JP7247981B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and other gaming machines are designed to improve the enjoyment of the game, reduce the processing load on the gaming machine, optimize processing, simplify control, and simplify the structure. Technical improvements have been made from various viewpoints such as production (for example, Patent Document 1).

In addition, various technical improvements have been made for the purpose of improving the soundness of games, such as detecting and deterring fraudulent actions by players and fraudulent modifications to gaming machines.

JP 2011-172988 A

In the above-mentioned gaming machines, further improvements have been made for the purpose of improving the enjoyment of games, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, optimizing processing, simplifying control, simplifying the structure, and providing more sound games. Improvements in technology are desired.

The present invention has been made to solve at least part of the above problems, and can be implemented as the following modes.

[form]
game processing executing means capable of executing a predetermined game processing when predetermined power is supplied;
power interruption processing executing means capable of executing a predetermined power interruption process when it is determined that the predetermined power is interrupted in a predetermined state;
with
A gaming machine capable of entering a playable state when the predetermined power is supplied by a predetermined method after power failure,
a displacement means that can be displaced between a first position and a second position, can be in a predetermined non-energized state when positioned at the first position, and can be in a predetermined energized state when positioned at the second position;
a storage means capable of holding predetermined information during a power failure;
It can be displaced between a pressed state and a non-pressed state, and when the predetermined power is supplied in the pressed state, at least part of the information stored in the storage means is initialized. an initialization switch that can be initialized;
means for determining the predetermined information stored in the storage means when the predetermined power is supplied after power failure;
state determination means capable of determining a state of the displacement means when the predetermined power is supplied to the game machine;
At a predetermined timing after the predetermined power is supplied to the game machine, the state determination means determines information corresponding to the position of the displacement means, and the determination determines that the displacement means is positioned at the first position. A first process is executed in a first case where it is determined that information corresponding to the fact that the displacement means is positioned at the first position is set according to the determination. a process execution means for executing a second process , which is different from the first process and is for displacing the displacement means to the first position, in a second case where it is determined that there is no
with
This game machine is
Acquisition availability condition determination means for determining whether or not acquisition availability conditions for acquiring predetermined lottery information are satisfied;
Lottery information storage means capable of storing the predetermined lottery information up to a predetermined upper limit;
with
In the first case, the lottery information storage means is configured to store the predetermined lottery information when the acquisition condition determination means determines that the acquisition condition is established. ,
This game machine is
a lottery executable condition determination means for determining whether or not a lottery executable condition for executing a predetermined lottery is established;
lottery means for executing the predetermined lottery;
with
In the first case, the lottery means is configured to execute the predetermined lottery when the lottery execution enable condition determination means determines that the lottery execution enable condition is established,
This game machine is
a variation execution enablement condition determining means for determining whether or not a variation execution enablement condition for executing a predetermined variation display has been established;
variable display means for executing the predetermined variable display;
with
In the first case, the variable display means is configured to execute the predetermined variable display when the variable executable condition judging means determines that the variable executable condition is established,
This game machine is
a timing means updated at predetermined intervals and used to acquire time information;
an effect executing means capable of executing a first effect when a first timing is reached based on the timing by the time measuring means;
with
In the first case, when the first timing comes, the effect executing means comprises means for executing a second effect different from the first effect without executing the first effect. ,
This game machine is
ball entry detection means for detecting entry of a game ball into predetermined ball entry means;
a ball entry detection condition determination means for determining whether or not a ball entry detection condition for detecting the entry of a game ball into the predetermined ball entry means is satisfied;
with
In the first case, when it is determined by the entering ball detection condition judging means that the entering ball detecting condition is established, the entry of the game ball into the predetermined ball entering means can be detected. ing
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the above aspect, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine as a first embodiment; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pattern and display surface which are variably displayed in a pattern display apparatus. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is an explanatory view explaining the contents of various counters used for winning lottery and the like. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a success/failure table; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of an allocation table; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a fall lottery success/failure table used when executing a fall lottery; It is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a success/failure table used when executing the electric accessory open lottery. 2 is a block diagram mainly showing electrical configurations of a sound emission control device and a display control device; FIG. It is a timing chart for explaining an example of processing when winning a drop lottery in a game round before reaching the guaranteed number of games. It is a timing chart for explaining an example of processing when a jackpot is won in a winning lottery in a game round before reaching the guaranteed number of games. A timing chart for explaining an example of processing when it is determined that a reach occurs in a reach determination without winning a drop lottery and winning a jackpot in a winning lottery in a game round before reaching the guaranteed number of games. be. It is an explanatory diagram showing the display surface of the symbol display device when the battle effect or the result notification effect is being executed. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a battle production; It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the result notification production|presentation performed after a battle production|presentation. It is a timing chart for explaining an example of processing when winning a fall lottery in a game round after reaching the guaranteed number of games. 10 is a timing chart for explaining the processing in the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 1 when a jackpot is won in a winning lottery without winning a falling lottery in a game round after reaching the guaranteed number of games. FIG. 10 is a timing chart for explaining the processing in the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 2 when a jackpot is won in a winning lottery without being won in a falling lottery in a game round after reaching a guaranteed number of games; FIG. A timing chart for explaining an example of processing in the case where a fall lottery is not won in a game round after the guaranteed number of games is reached, but a jackpot is won in a win lottery, and a first drop mode is won in a mode selection lottery. be. A timing chart for explaining an example of processing in the case where a fall lottery is not won in a game round after the guaranteed number of games is reached, but a jackpot is won in a winning lottery, and a falling mode is won in a mode selection lottery. be. A timing chart explaining an example of processing when it is determined that a reach occurs in the reach determination without winning the drop lottery and not winning the jackpot in the winning lottery in the game round after the guaranteed number of games is reached. is. 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing; It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for starting openings. It is a flow chart which shows first decision processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for through. 10 is a flowchart showing normal processing; It is a flow chart which shows game time control processing. It is a flow chart which shows fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows a pending|holding information shift process. It is a flowchart which shows a game state determination process. 4 is a flowchart showing fall determination processing; It is a flow chart which shows hit judging processing. 10 is a flowchart showing variable time setting processing; It is a flow chart showing a variable time setting process before the guaranteed number of games. It is a flow chart showing a variable time setting process after the guaranteed number of games. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation|variation completion|finish process. It is a flowchart which shows game state transition processing. It is a flow chart which shows big winning a prize mouth opening and closing processing. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing transition processing at the end of the ending period; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing processing for electric support. 4 is a flow chart showing an electrical opening/closing control process; 10 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the sound and light MPU; It is a flow chart which shows processing for game round production. It is a flowchart which shows game round production|presentation setting processing. 10 is a flow chart showing effect pattern setting processing. It is a flow chart showing the effect pattern setting process before the guaranteed number of games. It is a flow chart showing the production pattern setting process after the guaranteed number of games. It is a flowchart which shows the process for game round production|presentation execution. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed in the MPU of the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing; 4 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a win/fail table for a high probability mode provided in the pachinko machine of Modification 1; 14 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a mode selection table provided in the pachinko machine of Modification 2. FIG. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine in a second embodiment. It is a front view of a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display surface of the decorative design which is variably displayed in a design display device, and a design display device. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used for special figure lottery, normal figure lottery, and the like. It is an explanatory view showing the contents of the special figure propriety determination table. It is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a special figure type determination table. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a special electric switching scenario selection table; It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the normal figure right/wrong determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the normal figure classification determination table. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a mains switching scenario selection table; 2 is a block diagram mainly showing electrical configurations of a sound emission control device and a display control device; FIG. It is a timing chart showing an example of the flow of processing executed in the pachinko machine of the second embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production|presentation performed in the pachinko machine of 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production|presentation performed in the pachinko machine of 2nd Embodiment. 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing; It is a flow chart showing the entry process for the normal figure starting gate. It is a flow chart showing the ball entering process for the special figure starting port. It is a flow chart showing ball entry processing for the V winning hole. 10 is a flowchart showing normal processing; It is a flowchart which shows normal design control processing. It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows normal figure fluctuation time setting processing. It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation stop processing. It is a flow chart showing normal electric accessary product control processing. It is a flowchart which shows a normal electric switching process. It is a flow chart which shows special design control processing. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation start process. It is a flow chart showing a special figure fluctuation time setting process. It is a flow chart which shows special design fluctuation stop processing. It is a flow chart showing a special electric accessary product control process. It is a flowchart which shows a special electric opening-and-closing process. 10 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the sound and light MPU; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed in the MPU of the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed in the MPU of the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU of the display control device; It is explanatory drawing explaining an example of the production|presentation performed in the pachinko machine of the modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing explaining an example of the production|presentation performed in the pachinko machine of the modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a perspective view of a pachinko game machine as a third embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 30. FIG. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the delay mechanism 202 and the V winning mechanism 210. FIG. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a liquid crystal pattern and a display surface 41a that are variably displayed in a pattern display device 41; 2 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10; FIG. It is an explanatory view showing the contents of various counters used for a winning lottery or the like. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the success/failure table for 1st starting openings. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the success/failure table for 2nd starting openings. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the distribution table for 1st starting ports. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the distribution table for 2nd starting ports. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a jackpot type determined by a game ball entering a V winning opening (first V winning opening V1, second V winning opening V2). It is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a success/failure table used when executing the electric accessory open lottery. 3 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. FIG. It is an explanatory view explaining the flow of the game in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a specific suggestion effect; It is a flow chart showing the outline of the process of setting the effect in the game round (also referred to as the game round effect setting process). 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing; It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for starting openings. It is a flow chart which shows first decision processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for through. It is a flow chart showing ball entry processing for the V winning hole. 10 is a flowchart showing normal processing; It is a flow chart which shows game time control processing. It is a flow chart which shows fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows a pending|holding information shift process. It is a flow chart which shows hit judging processing. 10 is a flowchart showing variable time setting processing; It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation|variation completion|finish process. It is a flowchart which shows game state transition processing. 9 is a flowchart showing open/close scenario setting processing; It is a flow chart which shows big winning a prize mouth opening and closing processing. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing transition processing at the end of the ending period; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing processing for electric support. 4 is a flow chart showing an electrical opening/closing process; 9 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the sound and light side MPU 92; It is a flow chart which shows processing for game round production. It is a flowchart which shows game round production|presentation pattern setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows game ball circulation mode detection processing. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a game ball number count memory area. 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100; 4 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100; It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific suggestion effect for driving the driving accessory. It is an explanatory view showing an example of the arrangement position of a detection sensor. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of modification 5; FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of modification 6; FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of modification 7; It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine as a fourth embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pattern and display surface which are variably displayed in a pattern display apparatus. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is an explanatory view explaining the contents of various counters used for winning lottery and the like. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a success/failure table; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of an allocation table; It is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a success/failure table used when executing the electric accessory open lottery. 2 is a block diagram mainly showing electrical configurations of a sound emission control device and a display control device; FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the change of the area|region for 1st starting mouth reservation, and a reservation digestion area|region. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the change of the area|region for 2nd starting opening|mouth reservation, and a reservation digestion area|region. It is an explanatory view explaining a display mode of a reservation display icon. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a state when flower petals are displayed on the display surface of the pattern display device; It is an explanatory view showing a display method of the first to fourth types petals. It is explanatory drawing which shows the behavior of a third kind petal. It is an explanatory view showing the state of the first hold display icon when the special 1/hold 1 petal moves along the target hold arrival trajectory. It is explanatory drawing which shows a mode that the 4th kind petal acts on the pattern displayed on the display surface of a pattern display apparatus. 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing; It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for starting openings. It is a flow chart which shows first decision processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for through. 10 is a flowchart showing normal processing; It is a flow chart which shows game time control processing. It is a flow chart which shows fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows a pending|holding information shift process. It is a flow chart which shows hit judging processing. 10 is a flowchart showing variable time setting processing; It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation|variation completion|finish process. It is a flowchart which shows game state transition processing. It is a flow chart which shows big winning a prize mouth opening and closing processing. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing transition processing at the end of the ending period; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing processing for electric support. 4 is a flow chart showing an electrical opening/closing control process; 10 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the sound and light MPU; FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing pending command handling processing; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the update process at the time of ball entry. It is an explanatory view explaining a storage area for pending effect. It is a flow chart which shows parameter setting processing for pending effects. 9 is a flowchart showing display level upper limit value setting processing; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an upper limit value table; It is a flowchart which shows game round production|presentation setting processing. 10 is a flow chart showing effect pattern setting processing. 10 is a flowchart showing update processing at the start of fluctuation. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a third type petal effect setting process; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows the third kind petal effect setting process for the first start mouth holding. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a petal effect setting process for special 1/suspension 1; FIG. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a petal trajectory lottery table; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a special 1/suspended 2 petal effect setting process; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the petal effect setting process for special 1 and suspension 3. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the petal effect setting process for special 1 and reservation 4. FIG. It is a flow chart which shows the third kind petal effect setting process for holding the second start opening. It is a flow chart which shows pending display change setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows a 1st start opening reservation display change setting process. It is a flow chart which shows a 2nd start opening reservation display change setting process. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed in the MPU of the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing; 4 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing; 13 is a flowchart showing a first starting opening hold display change setting process in Modification 1; 10 is a flowchart showing petal display change processing. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine as a fifth embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display surface of a pattern display apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows the design changed and displayed in a design display apparatus. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is an explanatory view showing the contents of various counters used for a winning lottery or the like. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a success/failure table; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of an allocation table; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a reach determination right/wrong table; It is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a success/failure table used when executing the electric accessory open lottery. 2 is a block diagram mainly showing electrical configurations of a sound emission control device and a display control device; FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a character-based stage; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a non-character stage; It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a battle production|presentation and a result notification production|presentation. It is a timing chart showing the display mode of the changing/stopping pattern, the special reach screen effect, and the background image. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing transition of stages executed in a pachinko machine; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a mode of stage transition in a character-based stage; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a mode of stage transition in a non-character stage; 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing; It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for starting openings. It is a flow chart which shows first decision processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for through. 10 is a flowchart showing normal processing; It is a flow chart which shows game time control processing. It is a flow chart which shows fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows a pending|holding information shift process. It is a flow chart which shows hit judging processing. 10 is a flowchart showing variable time setting processing; It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation|variation completion|finish process. It is a flowchart which shows game state transition processing. It is a flow chart which shows big winning a prize mouth opening and closing processing. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing transition processing at the end of the ending period; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing processing for electric support. 4 is a flow chart showing an electrical opening/closing control process; 10 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the sound and light MPU; FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing pending command handling processing; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the update process at the time of ball entry. It is a flowchart which shows game round production|presentation setting processing. 10 is a flow chart showing effect pattern setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation pattern setting process for the time of a big hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of a reach distribution table. It is a flow chart showing production pattern setting processing for reach generation/loss. 10 is a flow chart showing processing for referring to an effect pattern table for super reach/off. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a warrior character lottery table; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a warrior character determination value correspondence table; It is a flow chart showing a process of referring to the effect pattern table for special reach/off time. It is a flow chart showing an effect pattern setting process for reach non-occurrence/off time. 10 is a flowchart showing update processing at the start of fluctuation. 4 is a flowchart showing stage effect processing; 10 is a flow chart showing stage transition processing in a character-based stage. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a stage lottery table; 10 is a flow chart showing stage transition processing in a non-character stage. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed in the MPU of the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing; 4 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing; It is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the music data as a background art, and its performance form. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the data structure of data stored in an audio data ROM; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each configuration of music A first data A1 and music A second data A2; FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing each configuration of music B first data B1 and music B second data B2; 4 is a timing chart showing a reproduction procedure for music A in the sound output LSI 97; 4 is a timing chart showing a reproduction procedure for music B in the sound output LSI 97; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing the data structure and performance form of a piece of music A in a reference example; 9 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90; 4 is a flowchart showing BGM processing; 4 is a flowchart showing BGM reproduction start processing. 4 is a flowchart showing BGM continuous reproduction processing; 4 is a flowchart showing a reproduction start execution process executed in the sound output LSI 97; 10 is a timing chart showing a reproduction procedure for music A by the sound output LSI 97 in Modification 1. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing BGM continuous reproduction processing; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing first-time second data reproduction processing; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing second data reproduction processing after the second time; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing a reproduction start execution process executed in the sound output LSI 97; FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram showing a predetermined period that defines transmission timing in Modification 5; It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine in 7th Embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pattern and display surface which are variably displayed in a pattern display apparatus. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is an explanatory view showing the contents of various counters used for a winning lottery or the like. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a success/failure table; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of an allocation table; It is an explanatory view showing the contents of the success or failure table for the electric accessory open lottery. FIG. 14 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device and the display control device of the seventh embodiment; FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing a power switch according to a seventh embodiment; FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing another example of a power switch; FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing another example of a power switch; FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the main MPU of the seventh embodiment when power is turned on; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing setting change processing executed by the main MPU of the seventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing setting confirmation processing executed by the main MPU of the seventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU of the seventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing power supply monitoring processing executed by the main MPU of the seventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing a ball entry process for the starting opening executed by the main MPU of the seventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing a destination determination process executed by the main MPU of the seventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing ball entry processing for a through gate executed by the main MPU of the seventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing game round control processing executed by the main MPU of the seventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing pending information shift processing executed by the main MPU of the seventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing fluctuation start processing executed by the main MPU of the seventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing hit determination processing executed by the main MPU of the seventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a variable time setting process executed by the main MPU of the seventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing game state transition processing executed by the main MPU of the seventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a big winning opening opening/closing process executed by the main MPU of the seventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing transition processing at the end of the ending period, which is executed by the main MPU of the seventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing processing for electric support performed by the main MPU of the seventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing an electrical opening/closing control process executed by the main MPU of the seventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the sound and light side MPU of the seventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing activation date/time information storage processing executed by the sound and light side MPU of the seventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing power failure type determination processing executed by the sound and light side MPU of the seventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing activation type determination processing executed by the sound and light side MPU of the seventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing sound and light side abnormal power interruption flag handling processing executed by the sound and light side MPU of the seventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the sound and light side MPU of the seventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing sound and light side power-off processing executed by the sound and light side MPU of the seventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing RTC rendering processing executed by the sound and light side MPU of the seventh embodiment; FIG. It is an explanatory view explaining an RTC effect execution determination table. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing processing for deferment suggestion effect executed by the sound and light side MPU of the seventh embodiment; FIG. It is an explanatory view explaining the movable object for presentation with which the pachinko machine of modification 1 of a 7th embodiment is provided. It is an explanatory view explaining the movable object for presentation with which the pachinko machine of modification 1 of a 7th embodiment is provided. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by a main MPU according to modification 12 of the seventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing power supply monitoring processing executed by a main MPU according to a twelfth modification of the seventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a power failure type determination process executed by the sound and light side MPU of Modification 12 of the seventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing sound and light side power interruption processing executed by the sound and light side MPU according to modification 12 of the seventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing power supply monitoring processing executed by a main MPU according to a thirteenth modification of the seventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a power interruption type determination process executed by a sound/light-side MPU according to a thirteenth modification of the seventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing sound and light side power interruption processing executed by a sound and light side MPU according to Modification 13 of the seventh embodiment; FIG. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine as an eighth embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is an explanatory view showing a starting mouth unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of a game ball when a sorting piece part exists in the 1st position Q1. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of a game ball when a distribution piece part exists in the 2nd position Q2. It is an explanatory view showing the first route in the starting port unit. It is an explanatory view showing a second route in the starting port unit. It is an explanatory view showing a third route in the starting port unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pattern and display surface which are variably displayed in a pattern display apparatus. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is an explanatory view showing the contents of various counters used for a winning lottery or the like. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the success/failure table for 1st starting openings. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the success/failure table for 2nd starting openings. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of an allocation table; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a reach determination right/wrong table; It is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a success/failure table used when executing the electric accessory open lottery. 2 is a block diagram mainly showing electrical configurations of a sound emission control device and a display control device; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of a game in the pachinko machine 10; FIG. Low probability low support state Low probability high support state High probability high support state and high probability low support state It is an explanatory diagram showing various aspects in each. 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing; It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for starting openings. It is a flow chart which shows the ball entry processing for the falling mouth. 10 is a flowchart showing normal processing; It is a flow chart which shows game time control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation|variation start processing for 1st starting ports. It is a flowchart which shows the hold|maintenance information shift process for 1st starting ports. It is a flowchart which shows the determination processing for 1st starting ports. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a process of setting the variable time for the first starting opening; FIG. It is a flow chart showing a low probability low support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the first starting port. It is a flow chart showing a low probability high support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the first starting port. It is a flow chart showing a high-probability high support state fluctuating time information acquisition process for the first starting port. It is a flow chart showing a high-probability-low support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the first starting port. 9 is a flowchart showing first fluctuation stop processing; It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation|variation start processing for 2nd starting ports. It is a flowchart which shows the hold|maintenance information shift process for 2nd starting ports. It is a flow chart which shows the decision processing for the 2nd starting openings. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the fluctuation time for a 2nd starting port. It is a flow chart showing a low probability low support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the second start port. It is a flow chart showing a low probability high support state time fluctuation time information acquisition process for the second starting port. It is a flow chart showing a high-probability high support state fluctuating time information acquisition process for the second starting port. It is a flow chart showing a high-probability-low support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the second starting port. 9 is a flowchart showing second fluctuation stop processing; It is a flowchart which shows game state transition processing. 9 is a flowchart showing open/close scenario setting processing; It is a flow chart which shows opening time setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows processing at the time of opening period flag ON. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing processing when an opening/closing processing period flag is ON; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows big winning a prize mouth opening and closing processing. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing processing when an ending period flag is ON; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing transition processing at the end of the ending period; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing processing for electric support. 4 is a flow chart showing an electrical opening/closing process; It is a flow chart which shows game ball distribution control processing. 10 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the sound and light MPU; FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing pending command handling processing; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the update process at the time of ball entry. It is a flowchart which shows game round production|presentation setting processing. 9 is a flowchart showing display mode switching processing; It is a flow chart which shows game round production setting processing for special 1. FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a first effect pattern setting process; FIG. It is a flow chart showing a production pattern setting process at the time of low probability low support state for the first start opening. It is a flow chart showing the effect pattern setting process at the time of the low probability high support state for the first starting port. It is a flow chart showing production pattern setting processing at the time of high-precision high support state for the first start opening. It is a flow chart showing a high probability low support state effect pattern setting process for the first start opening. It is a flowchart which shows the game round production|presentation setting process for special 2. FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing second effect pattern setting processing; FIG. It is a flow chart showing a production pattern setting process at the time of low probability low support state for the second start opening. It is a flow chart showing the effect pattern setting process at the time of low probability high support state for the second start opening. It is a flow chart showing a production pattern setting process at the time of high-precision high support state for the second start opening. It is a flow chart showing a production pattern setting process at the time of high probability low support state for the second start opening. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed in the MPU of the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed in the MPU of the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU of the display control device; It is explanatory drawing which shows the starting port unit in a modification. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine as a ninth embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pattern and display surface which are variably displayed in a pattern display apparatus. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is an explanatory view explaining the contents of various counters used for winning lottery and the like. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the success/failure table for 1st starting openings. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the success/failure table for 2nd starting openings. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of an allocation table; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a drop lottery success/failure table; It is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a success/failure table used when executing the electric accessory open lottery. 2 is a block diagram mainly showing electrical configurations of a sound emission control device and a display control device; FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game in a pachinko machine. 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing; It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for starting openings. It is a flow chart which shows first decision processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for through. 10 is a flowchart showing normal processing; It is a flow chart which shows game time control processing. It is a flow chart which shows fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows a pending|holding information shift process. 4 is a flowchart showing fall determination processing; It is a flow chart which shows hit judging processing. 10 is a flowchart showing variable time setting processing; It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation|variation completion|finish process. It is a flow chart which shows processing for time saving provision. It is a flowchart which shows game state transition processing. It is a flow chart which shows big winning a prize mouth opening and closing processing. 6 is a flowchart showing shutter opening/closing processing; It is a flowchart which shows V winning a prize determination processing. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing transition processing at the end of the ending period; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing processing for electric support. 4 is a flow chart showing an electrical opening/closing control process; 10 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the sound and light MPU; FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing pending command handling processing; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows game round production|presentation setting processing. 10 is a flow chart showing effect pattern setting processing. 10 is a flowchart showing update processing at the start of fluctuation. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed in the MPU of the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing; 4 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing; It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine as a tenth embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pattern and display surface which are variably displayed in a pattern display apparatus. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is an explanatory view explaining the contents of various counters used for winning lottery and the like. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the success/failure table for 1st starting openings. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the success/failure table for 2nd starting openings. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of an allocation table; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a drop lottery success/failure table; It is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a success/failure table used when executing the electric accessory open lottery. 2 is a block diagram mainly showing electrical configurations of a sound emission control device and a display control device; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of a game in the pachinko machine 10; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing; It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for starting openings. It is a flow chart which shows first decision processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for through. 10 is a flowchart showing normal processing; It is a flow chart which shows game time control processing. It is a flow chart which shows fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows a pending|holding information shift process. 4 is a flowchart showing fall determination processing; It is a flow chart which shows hit judging processing. 10 is a flowchart showing variable time setting processing; It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation|variation completion|finish process. It is a flow chart which shows processing for time saving provision. It is a flowchart which shows game state transition processing. It is a flow chart which shows big winning a prize mouth opening and closing processing. 6 is a flowchart showing shutter opening/closing processing; It is a flowchart which shows V winning a prize determination processing. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing transition processing at the end of the ending period; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing processing for electric support. 4 is a flow chart showing an electrical opening/closing control process; 10 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the sound and light MPU; FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing pending command handling processing; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows game round production|presentation setting processing. 10 is a flow chart showing effect pattern setting processing. 10 is a flowchart showing update processing at the start of fluctuation. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed in the MPU of the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing; 4 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing; It is an explanatory view showing the flow of a game in the pachinko machine of Modification 1. FIG. It is an explanatory view showing the contents of the distribution table for the first start opening provided in the pachinko machine of Modification 2. FIG. It is an explanatory view showing the flow of the game in the pachinko machine of the second modification. FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a right/wrong table (for low-probability mode) for the second starting port in modification 3; It is an explanatory view showing the flow of the game in the pachinko machine of the modification 3. It is a timing chart showing an example of control when transitioning from the high probability high support state to the high probability low support state in the 13th modification. It is a timing chart showing an example of the control at the time of transition from the high probability high support state to the high probability low support state in the modification 14. It is a timing chart showing an example of control when transitioning from the high probability high support state to the high probability low support state in the modification 15. 29 is a front view of a game board in Modification 18. FIG. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as 11th Embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pattern and display surface which are variably displayed in a pattern display apparatus. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is an explanatory view explaining the contents of various counters used for winning lottery and the like. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a success/failure table; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of an allocation table; It is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a success/failure table used when executing the electric accessory open lottery. 2 is a block diagram mainly showing electrical configurations of a sound emission control device and a display control device; FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the change of the area|region for 1st starting mouth reservation, and a reservation digestion area|region. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the change of the area|region for 2nd starting opening|mouth reservation, and a reservation digestion area|region. It is explanatory drawing which shows the case where a jackpot is included in special 1 reservation at normal time. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variable display about special 1 reservation 1, and an omen notice production (the 1st time). It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation|variation display about special 1 reservation 2, and an omen notice production (2nd time). It is explanatory drawing which shows the variable display about special 1 reservation 3, and an omen notice production (the 3rd time). FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the number of appearances of the foreshadowing effect and the scheduled execution effect; It is explanatory drawing which shows the variable display, the ready-to-win effect, and the stop display about special 1 reservation 4. FIG. It is a time chart showing a series of effects for special 1 reservation 1 to special 1 reservation 4 on the time axis. It is explanatory drawing which shows the basic concept of the pending|holding continuous production|presentation employ|adopted by the pachinko machine 10 of 11th Embodiment. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram conceptually showing how special 1 suspension is performed in case 1; FIG. 10 is a time chart for explaining the effect of special 1 suspension executed by special 1 suspension continuous effect processing and the performance of special 2 suspension executed by special 2 suspension performance processing in case 1. FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram conceptually showing how special 1 suspension is performed in case 2; FIG. 10 is a time chart for explaining an effect for special 1 suspension executed by special 1 suspension continuous effect processing and an effect for special 2 suspension executed by special 2 suspension performance processing in case 2. FIG. It is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the color of the same color of the pattern and the execution schedule effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows a series of production|presentations performed in the game round about special 2 reservation 1. FIG. 6 is a time chart showing Comparative Example 1. FIG. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram conceptually showing how special 1 suspension is performed in case 3; FIG. 10 is a time chart for explaining an effect for special 1 suspension executed by special 1 suspension continuous effect processing and an effect for special 2 suspension executed by special 2 suspension performance processing in case 3. FIG. It is explanatory drawing showing the content of charge production|presentation. It is explanatory drawing which shows a series of production|presentations performed in the game round about special 2 reservation 1. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing; It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for starting openings. It is a flow chart which shows first decision processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for through. 10 is a flowchart showing normal processing; It is a flow chart which shows game time control processing. It is a flow chart which shows fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows a pending|holding information shift process. It is a flow chart which shows hit judging processing. 10 is a flowchart showing variable time setting processing; It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation|variation completion|finish process. It is a flowchart which shows game state transition processing. It is a flow chart which shows big winning a prize mouth opening and closing processing. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing transition processing at the end of the ending period; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing processing for electric support. 4 is a flow chart showing an electrical opening/closing control process; 10 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the sound and light MPU; FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing pending command handling processing; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows game round production|presentation setting processing. 10 is a flow chart showing effect pattern setting processing. 10 is a flowchart showing update processing at the start of fluctuation. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed in the MPU of the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing; 4 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing; FIG. 22 is an explanatory diagram conceptually showing how special 1 suspension is performed in Modification 10; FIG. 13 is a time chart for explaining the effect for special 1 suspension executed by special 1 suspension continuous effect processing and the performance for special 2 suspension executed by special 2 suspension performance processing in modification 10. FIG. FIG. 14 is a time chart for explaining the effect for special 1 suspension executed by special 1 suspension continuous effect processing and the performance for special 2 suspension executed by special 2 suspension performance processing in modification 11. FIG. FIG. 21 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine as a twelfth embodiment; It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pattern and display surface which are variably displayed in a pattern display apparatus. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is an explanatory view explaining the contents of various counters used for winning lottery and the like. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a success/failure table; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of an allocation table; It is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a success/failure table used when executing the electric accessory open lottery. 2 is a block diagram mainly showing electrical configurations of a sound emission control device and a display control device; FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display surface where the 1st holding|holding relationship information was displayed on the sub area|region. It is an explanatory diagram showing how the non-execution pending display area, the variable active pending display area, and the already executed pending display area change as the game progresses. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display surface where the 2nd holding|holding relationship information was displayed on the sub area|region. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a pending change pattern lottery table for reference conditions; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of change in display color due to pending change notice; It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the data structure of a special 1 pending effect storage area. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an overview of an already executed pending notice process; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing same-color removal processing at the time of removal; FIG. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing how each pending display area changes in case 1; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing how each pending display area changes in Case 2; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing how each pending display area changes in case 3; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing how each pending display area changes in case 4; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing how each pending display area changes in case 5; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing how each pending display area changes in case 6; FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing how each pending display area changes in case 7; 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing; It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for starting openings. It is a flow chart which shows first decision processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for through. 10 is a flowchart showing normal processing; It is a flow chart which shows game time control processing. It is a flow chart which shows fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows a pending|holding information shift process. It is a flow chart which shows hit judging processing. 10 is a flowchart showing variable time setting processing; It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation|variation completion|finish process. It is a flowchart which shows game state transition processing. It is a flow chart which shows big winning a prize mouth opening and closing processing. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing transition processing at the end of the ending period; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing processing for electric support. 4 is a flow chart showing an electrical opening/closing control process; 10 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the sound and light MPU; FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing pending command handling processing; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows game round production|presentation setting processing. 10 is a flow chart showing effect pattern setting processing. 10 is a flowchart showing update processing at the start of fluctuation. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed in the MPU of the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing; 4 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing; FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing how each pending display area changes in case 8; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing how each pending display area changes in case A; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing how each pending display area changes in case A; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing how each pending display area changes in case A; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing how each pending display area changes in case B; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing how each pending display area changes in case B; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing how each pending display area changes in case B; It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a pending|holding change precursor production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a pending|holding change precursor production. FIG. 21 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine as a thirteenth embodiment; It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pattern and display surface which are variably displayed in a pattern display apparatus. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is an explanatory view explaining the contents of various counters used for winning lottery and the like. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a success/failure table; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of an allocation table; It is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a success/failure table used when executing the electric accessory open lottery. 2 is a block diagram mainly showing electrical configurations of a sound emission control device and a display control device; FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the change of the area|region for 1st starting mouth reservation, and a reservation digestion area|region. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the change of the area|region for 2nd starting opening|mouth reservation, and a reservation digestion area|region. It is a front view of the game board when the main rotating accessory for production has moved to the lowest position. FIG. 10 is a schematic right side view showing a main rotating accessory for presentation and a main rotating accessory for presentation driving section for operating the main rotating accessory for presentation. It is an explanatory view showing the operation of the production main rotating role in the one-shot announcement production process. It is a front view showing a pair of sub rotating accessories for production. It is a schematic right side view showing a sub-rotating role for production and a sub-rotating role for production driving section for operating the sub-rotating role for production. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the main rotating accessory for effect and the sub rotating accessory for effect by the big or small effect processing; It is an explanatory view showing a second predetermined rotation stop position of the main rotating accessory for production. It is an explanatory diagram showing a second specific rotation stop position of the sub rotating accessory for effect. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the main rotating accessory for production is at a second predetermined rotation stop position, and the sub-rotating accessory for production is at a second specific rotation stop position; It is a side schematic diagram of a rotating device of a comparative example. 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing; It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for starting openings. It is a flow chart which shows first decision processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for through. 10 is a flowchart showing normal processing; It is a flow chart which shows game time control processing. It is a flow chart which shows fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows a pending|holding information shift process. It is a flow chart which shows hit judging processing. 10 is a flowchart showing variable time setting processing; It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation|variation completion|finish process. It is a flowchart which shows game state transition processing. It is a flow chart which shows big winning a prize mouth opening and closing processing. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing transition processing at the end of the ending period; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing processing for electric support. 4 is a flow chart showing an electrical opening/closing control process; 10 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the sound and light MPU; FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing pending command handling processing; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows game round production|presentation setting processing. 10 is a flow chart showing effect pattern setting processing. 10 is a flowchart showing update processing at the start of fluctuation. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed in the MPU of the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing; 4 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing; It is a front view showing a pair of sub rotating accessories for production in a modification.

An embodiment of a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described in the following order with reference to the drawings.
<<1>> First embodiment (mainly corresponding to the following <<Z>> feature lA group to feature lH group):
<<2>> Second embodiment (mainly corresponding to the following <<Z>> characteristic mA group to characteristic mR group):
<<3>> Third embodiment (mainly corresponding to the following <<Z>> feature nA group to feature nN group):
<<4>> Fourth embodiment (mainly corresponding to the following <<Z>> feature oA group to feature oJ group):
<<5>> Fifth embodiment (mainly corresponding to the following <<Z>> feature pA group to feature pL group):
<<6>> Sixth embodiment (mainly corresponding to the following <<Z>> feature qA group to feature qM group):
<<7>> Seventh embodiment (mainly corresponding to the following <<Z>> feature rA group to feature rV group):
<<8>> Eighth embodiment (mainly corresponding to the following <<Z>> feature sA group to feature sV group):
<<9>> Ninth embodiment (mainly corresponding to characteristic tA group to characteristic tP group of <<Z>> below):
<<10>> Tenth embodiment (mainly corresponding to the following <<Z>> feature uA group to feature uU group and feature uIA group to feature uIM group):
<<11>> Eleventh embodiment (mainly corresponding to the following <<Z>> feature vA group to feature vR group):
<<12>> Twelfth embodiment (mainly corresponding to the following <<Z>> feature wA group to feature wY group):
<<13>> Thirteenth embodiment (mainly corresponding to feature xA group to feature xU group in <Z> below):
<<Y>> Application to other configurations:
<<Z>> Regarding the feature group extracted from each of the above embodiments, etc.:

<<1>> First Embodiment:
<<1-1>> Game machine structure:
FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter also referred to as a "pachinko machine") as a first embodiment of the present invention. A pachinko machine 10 has a wooden outer frame 11 combined in a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island equipment of the game hall. The pachinko machine 10 also includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11 . A pachinko machine body 12 has an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13. - 特許庁The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11 by metal hinges 15 . The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 16 with respect to the inner frame 13 . On the back of the inner frame 13, control devices for controlling the pachinko machine main body 12, such as a main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device, are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. - 特許庁The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened, and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation using a dedicated key on the cylinder lock 17 .

A substantially central portion of the front door frame 14 is formed with an open window portion 18 . Around the window part 18, resin parts and electric decoration parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. The electrical parts are composed of light emitting means including various lamps such as LEDs. The light emitting means plays a role of enhancing the performance effect by lighting or blinking at each game played by the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot is won, when a ready-to-win game is generated, or the like. A glass unit 19 composed of two sheets of plate glass is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14 , and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19 . A game board, which will be described later, is detachably attached to the inner frame 13 , and the player of the pachinko machine 10 can view the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 19 . Details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper tray 20 and a lower tray 21 for storing game balls. The upper tray 20 is formed in a box shape with an open top, and stores game balls such as rental balls lent from a rental machine (not shown) and prize balls discharged from the pachinko machine main body 12 . The game balls stored in the upper tray 20 are supplied to a game ball shooting mechanism provided in the pachinko machine main body 12. - 特許庁The game ball shooting mechanism is driven by the player's operation of the operation handle 25, and shoots the game balls supplied from the upper tray 20 to the front surface of the game board. The lower tray 21 is arranged below the upper tray 20 and is shaped like a box with an open top. The lower tray 21 stores game balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 20. - 特許庁A discharge port 22 for discharging game balls stored in the lower tray 21 is formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 21 . A lever 23 is provided below the ejection port 22 , and the player can switch the ejection port 22 between a closed state and an open state by operating the lever 23 . When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game ball falls from the discharge port 22 and is discharged from the lower tray 21 to the outside.

A performance operation button 24 is provided in front of the peripheral edge of the upper plate 20.例文帳に追加The effect operation button 24 is an operation unit for the player to perform an input operation for the game effect performed by the pachinko machine 10 . When a player operates a performance operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, a game performance reflecting the operation is performed by the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

An operation handle 25 for a player to operate is provided on the right side of the front door frame 14 when viewed from the front (hereinafter also simply referred to as "right side"). When the player operates (turns) the operation handle 25, a game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism to the front surface of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operation handle 25, there are a touch sensor 25a for permitting driving of the game ball shooting mechanism, a wait button 25b for stopping shooting of game balls by the game ball shooting mechanism when pressed by the player, and the operation handle 25. A variable resistor 25c is provided for detecting the amount of rotational operation of , based on a change in electrical resistance. When the player grips the operating handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operating handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. Then, a game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism to the front surface of the game board with strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

A game ball shooting button 26 for a player to operate is provided on the left side of the periphery of the upper tray 20 in front view (hereinafter also simply referred to as "left side"). When the game ball shooting button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is shot to the front surface of the game board with a predetermined shooting strength regardless of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 by the player. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball shooting button 26, the game ball is shot to the front surface of the game board with the same shooting intensity as when the operation handle 25 is rotated at its maximum. In the case of this embodiment, when a game ball is shot by operating the game ball shooting button 26, the game ball flows to the right side of the game board when viewed from the front and also to the right side of the game board. That is, by operating the game ball shooting button 26, the player can hit the ball to the right. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the game ball shooting button 26 is operated, the game ball is shot to the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is turned on. . That is, the player turns on at least the touch sensor 25a by grasping the operation handle 25, and then operates the game ball shooting button 26 to shoot the game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball shooting button 26. can be realized.

Next, the configuration of the rear surface of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. A control device for controlling the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is arranged on the back surface of the pachinko machine 10. - 特許庁

FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. As shown, the pachinko machine 10 includes a first control unit 51, a second control unit 52, a third control unit 53, and a power supply unit 58. Specifically, these units are provided on the back surface of the inner frame 13 .

The first control unit 51 has a main controller 60 . The main controller 60 has a main control board having a function of controlling the main game. The main control board is housed in a board box made of transparent resin material. This board box is configured to leave traces of opening and closing. For example, a seal is affixed to a portion that can be opened and closed, and when the substrate box is opened, characters such as "opened" appear.

The second control unit 52 includes an audio emission control device 90 and a display control device 100 . The sound emission control device 90 controls emission means such as speakers and various lamps provided in front of the pachinko machine 10 based on commands transmitted from the main control device 60 . The display control device 100 controls the pattern display device based on commands transmitted from the sound emission control device 90 . The pattern display device has a liquid crystal display for displaying patterns and images for presentation.

The third control unit 53 has a payout control device 70 and a launch control device 80 . The payout control device 70 performs payout control for paying out prize balls. When an instruction to shoot a game ball is input from the main control device 60, the shooting control device 80 shoots a game ball with strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 by the player. Controls the ball launching mechanism. In addition, on the back of the inner frame 13, there is a tank 54 to which the game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially supplied, and a slope which is connected to the lower part of the tank 54 and is gently inclined so that the game balls flow downstream. , a case rail 56 connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 55, a game ball is supplied from the case rail 56, and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out according to an instruction from the payout control device 70. A plurality of devices necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10, such as a payout device 71, are provided.

The power supply unit 58 includes a power supply device 85 and a power switch 88 . The power supply device 85 supplies power necessary for the pachinko machine 10 to operate. A power switch 88 is connected to the power supply device 85 . By ON/OFF operation of the power switch 88, a supply state in which power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 and a non-supply state in which power is not supplied to the pachinko machine 10 are switched.

Next, the game board will be explained. The game board is detachably attached to the front surface of the inner frame 13. - 特許庁

FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 30. FIG. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on its front surface. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding a game ball is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. A game ball shot from the game ball shooting mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and released above the game area PA, and then flows down the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicularly to the game board 30, and accessories such as windmills are arranged. These nails 42 and windmills distribute and organize the falling directions of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

The game board 30 is formed with a plurality of openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. A general prize winning port 32, a first starting port 33, a second starting port 34, a through gate 35, and a variable winning device 36 are provided in each opening. Game balls entered into each of the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, the through gate 35, and the variable winning device 36 enter the individual openings formed on the game board 30. Induced. Also, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display section 45 . The main display section 45 has a special figure unit 37 , a normal figure unit 38 , and a round display section 39 .

As illustrated, the general prize winning openings 32 are ball entrance members that form ball entrances into which game balls can enter, and are provided in plurality on the game board 30 . In this embodiment, when game balls enter the general winning hole 32, 10 game balls are paid out as prize balls from the payout device 71 (FIG. 2).

The first starting port 33 is a ball entrance member that forms a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter. The first starting port 33 is provided at the lower center of the game board 30 . In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first start hole 33, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a winning lottery, which will be described later, is executed.

The second starting port 34 is a ball entrance member that forms a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and is provided on the right side of the game board 30 . In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 34, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a winning lottery, which will be described later, is executed. Further, the second starting port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a.

The through gate 35 has a through hole extending vertically. The through gate 35 is a through gate that serves as a trigger for executing a lottery for opening the electric accessory 34a. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the main controller 60 performs an internal lottery (electric accessory open lottery) triggered by the passage. As a result of the internal lottery, when the electric role open is won, the electric accessory 34a shifts to the electric role open state in a predetermined manner. Since the through gate 35 is arranged on the upstream side of the second starting port 34 with respect to the flowing direction of the game ball, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 flows down the game area PA after passing through the second opening. It is possible to enter the ball into the starting port 34 . In addition, in this embodiment, even if the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the prize ball is not paid out.

The variable winning device 36 includes a large winning opening 36a leading to the back side of the game board 30, and an opening/closing door 36b for opening and closing the large winning opening 36a. The opening/closing door 36b is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot enter the big winning opening 36a. As a result of the internal lottery (winning lottery) by the main controller 60, when a big win is won and the opening/closing execution mode is shifted, the opening/closing door 36b repeats an open state in which a game ball can win and a closed state. The open/close execution mode is the result of a winning lottery by the main control device 60 triggered by the ball entering the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, and when a big win is won, the opening/closing door 36b is in an open state. and the closed state are repeated. That is, when a big win is won as a result of a winning lottery based on the ball entering the first starting hole 33, the operation shifts to the opening/closing execution mode in which the ball can enter the big winning hole 36a of the variable prize winning device 36. Similarly, even if a big win is won as a result of the winning lottery based on the ball entering the second starting hole 34, the operation shifts to the opening/closing execution mode in which the ball can enter the big winning hole 36a of the variable prize winning device 36. . In the present embodiment, when game balls enter the big winning hole 36a of the variable winning device 36, the payout device 71 pays out 15 game balls as prize balls.

An out port 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and game balls that do not enter the general winning port 32, the first starting port 33, the second starting port 34, or the variable winning device 36 are out. It is discharged from the game area PA through the mouth 43 .

The special figure unit 37 includes a first symbol display portion 37a and a second symbol display portion 37b. Each of the first pattern display portion 37a and the second pattern display portion 37b is composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting portions are arranged in a predetermined manner.

The first pattern display portion 37a is a display portion for displaying the first pattern. The first pattern refers to a pattern that is variably displayed or statically displayed based on a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33 . The first symbol display part 37a is used as a display mode until the segment display displays a display corresponding to the lottery result when a winning lottery is performed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting hole 33. , to perform the variable display of the first symbol. When the lottery is finished, the first symbol display unit 37a causes the segment display to stop displaying the first symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

The second pattern display portion 37b is a display portion for displaying the second pattern. The second pattern refers to a pattern that is variably displayed or statically displayed based on a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34 . The second symbol display part 37b is used as a display mode until a winning lottery is performed triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 34, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is performed on the segment display device. , to perform the variable display of the second symbol. When the lottery is finished, the second symbol display section 37b causes the segment display device to stop displaying the second symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

The time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol displayed in the second symbol display portion 37b to the stop display is called the variation time. call. Specifically, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed in the first symbol display portion 37a to the stop display is also called the first variation time, and the second symbol display portion 37b The time from the start of the variable display of the second symbol to be displayed until the stop display is also called a second variable time.

The special figure unit 37 is further provided with a first pending display portion 37c and a second pending display portion 37d, which are LED lamps, at positions adjacent to the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b. In this embodiment, up to four game balls that have won the first starting port 33 are reserved. The first reservation display portion 37c displays the number of reservations for the first starting port 33 according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be lit. Further, in the present embodiment, up to four game balls that have won the second starting port 34 are reserved. The second reservation display part 37d displays the number of reservations of the second starting port 34 according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be lit.

The normal figure unit 38 is composed of a light-emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. The normal figure unit 38, when the electric accessary item open lottery triggered by the passage of the through gate 35 is performed, causes the light-emitting display to display in a lighting display, a blinking display, or a predetermined mode. When the electric accessory open lottery ends, the normal figure unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The round display section 39 is composed of a light-emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games that occur in the open/close execution mode or displays corresponding thereto. A round game means that either a predetermined upper limit duration time elapses or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls enter the variable winning device 36 until either condition is met. It is a game in which the door 36b is kept open. The number of round games varies depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the shift. The round display unit 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the opening/closing execution mode is started, and ends when the opening/closing execution mode is finished and a new game is started.

In addition, the special figure unit 37, the general figure unit 38, and the round display unit 39 are not limited to being configured by a segment display device or a light emitting display device using an LED lamp. It may consist of various display devices capable of showing the draw in progress and the draw results, such as a CRT or dot matrix display.

The variable display unit 40 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area PA. The variable display unit 40 has a pattern display device 41 . The pattern display device 41 has a liquid crystal display. The display contents of the pattern display device 41 are controlled by the display control device 100 . The pattern display device 41 may be replaced with various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

When the first symbol display unit 37a performs variable display or predetermined display based on the ball entering the first starting port 33, the symbol display device 41 performs variable display or predetermined display of the symbols accordingly. In addition, when the second symbol display unit 37b performs a variable display or a predetermined display based on the ball entering the second starting port 34, the symbol display device 41 displays the symbol in a variable display or a predetermined display accordingly. conduct. The symbol display device 41 performs not only the display performance triggered by the entry of the ball into the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, but also the display performance during the opening/closing execution mode that shifts when the jackpot is won. . Details of the pattern display device 41 will be described below.

FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing the symbols that are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41 and the display surface 41a. FIG. 4(a) is an explanatory diagram showing symbols that are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41. FIG. As shown in FIG. 4A, the pattern display device 41 variably displays patterns representing numbers 1 to 8. As shown in FIG. As the symbols to be variably displayed, symbols such as characters may be added to the symbols representing the numbers 1 to 8. FIG.

FIG. 4B is an explanatory diagram showing the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. As shown in FIG. As shown in the figure, the display surface 41a displays three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 on the left, middle and right. In each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3, the patterns of numbers 1 to 8 shown in FIG. A variable display that scrolls upward is performed. As shown in FIG. 4(b), after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol row is displayed in a stationary state on the activated line L. As shown in FIG. Specifically, when a game ball enters the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are periodically scrolled in a predetermined direction to start a variable display. Then, the symbols to be scrolled are switched from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol row Z1, the symbol row Z3, and the symbol row Z2, and finally, the predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. . When the variable display of symbols is finished and the display is stopped, and when the result of the winning lottery by the main control device 60 is a big win, a predetermined predetermined combination of symbols is displayed on the activated line L. It is formed. For example, a combination of the same symbols is formed on the activated line L. The pattern display device 41 is not limited to the above-described patterns, but the number of pattern rows, the number of active lines, the direction of pattern display variation in the pattern rows, and the patterns in each pattern row. Various modes can be adopted for the mode of variable display of symbols such as numbers.

Here, the "game cycle" means the period from the start of the variable display of the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b to the end of the variable display and the stop display until the end of the stop display. In other words, it is one unit of processing for notifying the player of the lottery result of the winning lottery for the special information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34. be. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one winning lottery for one piece of special information for each game. When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires the special information based on the entry of the game ball into either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the first symbol display unit In either one of the 37a or the second pattern display portion 37b, after the segment display is variably displayed, the segment display is stop-displayed so that the display corresponds to the lottery result of the acquired special information. In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment acquires the special information based on the entry of the game ball into either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the symbol display device At 41, after the predetermined symbol row is variably displayed, the symbol row is stopped and displayed so as to correspond to the lottery result of the acquired special information. In addition, the time required for one game round is also called unit game time. The unit playing time is composed of a variable time, which is the time from when the variable display is started until the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed, and a stop time, which is the time when the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed. there is

Further, as shown in FIG. 4B, the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 displays a first reserved display area Ds1 and a second reserved display area Ds2. In the first reservation display area Ds1, the number of reservations based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 is displayed. The second pending display area Ds2 displays the number of pending balls entered into the second starting port 34 . In this embodiment, as described above, the maximum number of game balls entered into the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 is four.

As shown in FIG. 3, a pair of nails (so-called dead nails, navel nails) 42 (42a, 42b) are provided above the first starting port 33. As shown in FIG. The probability of the game ball entering the first starting port 33 changes depending on the spacing between the pair of nails 42a and 42b.

<<1-2>> Electrical Configuration of Gaming Machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described using a block diagram.

FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 10 mainly includes a main controller 60 , a sound emission control device 90 , and a display control device 100 .

The main controller 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main game. The main control board 61 has an MPU 62 composed of elements having multiple functions. The MPU 62 includes a CPU (not shown) that executes various control programs, a ROM 63 that records various control programs and fixed value data, and temporarily stores various data when executing the programs recorded in the ROM 63. and a RAM 64, which is a memory for storing. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. A part of the functions of the MPU 62 may be provided by another element. Details of various areas provided in the ROM 63 and RAM 64 will be described later.

The main control board 61 is provided with an input port (not shown) and an output port (not shown). An input port of the main control board 61 is connected to a payout control device 70 and a power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in a power supply device 85 . The main control board 61 is supplied with stable 24 V DC power from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86 . The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power supply as an external power supply, and converts the external power supplied from the commercial power supply into the operating power required by the main control device 60, the payout control device 70, etc., to each device supply power. The power supply device 85 has a capacitor (not shown), and continues to supply power to each device for a predetermined period of time when a power failure occurs or when the power switch 88 (FIG. 2) is turned off. do.

Various detection sensors 67 a to 67 e are connected to the input port of the main control board 61 . Specifically, it is connected to a plurality of detection sensors provided in various winning openings such as the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, the through gate 35, the variable winning device 36, and the like. The MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether or not the game ball flowing down the game area PA enters each ball entrance based on the signals from the various detection sensors 67a to 67e, and determines whether the game ball enters the through gate. It is determined whether or not 35 has been passed. Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 and the second start port 34, and executes the electric accessory release lottery based on the entry of the ball into the through gate 35. do.

The output port of the main control board 61 is provided with a variable winning driving unit 36c that opens and closes the open/close door 36b of the variable winning device 36, and an electric accessory driving unit 34b that opens and closes the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34. , and the main display unit 45 are connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning driving section 36c so that the opening/closing door 36b is opened/closed. Further, as a result of the electric accessory opening lottery, when the electric role opening is won, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 34b so that the electric accessory 34a is released. In each game round, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b in the main display portion 45. FIG. Further, when the jackpot type is determined in the opening/closing execution mode and the number of round games to be executed in the opening/closing execution mode is determined, display control of the round display section 39 in the main display section 45 is executed.

A payout control device 70 and a sound emission control device 90 are connected to the output port of the main control board 61 . A prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 70 from the main control device 60 based on the winning judgment result, for example. When the main controller 60 transmits the prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63. FIG. Specifically, when entering the ball into the general winning hole 32 is specified, a winning ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is transmitted from the main controller 60, and the ball enters the first starting hole 33. is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is transmitted from the main controller 60, and when entering the second start port 34 is specified, one game ball is paid out A prize ball command corresponding to is transmitted from the main controller 60 . The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 based on the prize ball command received from the main controller 60 to pay out prize balls.

A discharge control device 80 is connected to the payout control device 70 . The shooting control device 80 controls shooting of the game ball shooting mechanism 81 . The game ball shooting mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined shooting conditions are met. Also, the operation handle 25 and the game ball shooting button 26 are connected to the shooting control device 80 .

The sound emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60 and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main controller 60 transmits various commands, the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63 is referred to. Details of these various commands are described later.

In addition, based on various commands received from the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90 controls the driving of various lamps 47 composed of light emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the front door frame 14, and the driving control of the speaker 46. and control the display control device 100 . Also, the effect operation button 24 is connected to the sound emission control device 90, and when the effect operation button 24 is operated by the player at a predetermined timing, a game effect reflecting the operation is performed. It controls the various lamps 47, the speaker 46, the display control device 100, and the like.

The display control device 100 executes display control of the pattern display device 41 based on various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 . Specifically, the display control device 100, based on the various commands received from the sound emission control device 90, grasps the fluctuation time of the pattern in the pattern display device 41 and the type of combination of patterns to be finally stopped and displayed. , presence/absence of occurrence of ready-to-win, contents of ready-to-win effect, contents of notice effect to be executed in each game cycle, and the like are grasped. In this embodiment, the stop time, which is the time during which the combination of symbols is stopped and displayed, is constant. Therefore, by determining the variable time, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game, is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used for a winning lottery or the like. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 sets the winning lottery, the setting of the display of the main display section 45, the setting of the pattern display of the pattern display device 41, and the like. Specifically, a jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery. A jackpot type counter C2 is used when sorting the jackpot types such as probability variable jackpot results and normal jackpot results. A ready-to-win random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not to generate a ready-to-win when the symbol row displayed on the symbol display device 41 is changed. A falling random number counter CF is used for the falling lottery for determining whether or not to end the high probability mode (also called a high probability game state). The "high-probability mode" is a game state that is started by winning a variable-probability jackpot, and refers to a game state in which the probability of winning a jackpot in the winning lottery is relatively higher than in the low-probability mode.

A random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Further, when determining the variation time in the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b of the main display portion 45 and the symbol display device 41, a variation type counter CS is used. Furthermore, the electric accessory opening counter C4 is used for the electric accessory opening lottery for determining whether or not the electric accessory 34a of the second start port 34 is to be opened.

Each of the counters C1 to C4, CF, CINI, and CS is a loop counter that adds 1 to the counter value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. FIG.

The RAM 64 is provided with a pending information storage area 64b and a determination processing execution area 64c. The reservation information storage area 64b is provided with a first reservation area Ra and a second reservation area Rb. In this embodiment, when the game ball enters the first start port 33, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fall random number counter CF at the timing of the ball entering is stored in the reservation information storage area. It is stored chronologically in the first reservation area Ra of 64b. Also, when the game ball enters the second start port 34, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the falling random number counter CF at the timing of the ball entering is set to the second value of the holding information storage area 64b. 2 are stored chronologically in the reservation area Rb.

Details of the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. The jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery as described above. The jackpot random number counter C1 is, for example, configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 1199 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. When the jackpot random number counter C1 completes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 1199).

The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry when the game ball enters the first start port 33. When a game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entry.

The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first reservation area Ra is moved to the execution area AE of the judgment processing execution area 64c, and is collated with the hit/fail table stored in the hit/fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. It is determined whether or not In addition, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second reservation area Rb moves to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c, and is compared with the success/failure table stored in the success/failure table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, It is determined whether or not it will be a big hit.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb is By doing so, it moves to the execution area AE of the judgment processing execution area 64c in the order acquired. Then, the jackpot random number counter C1 moved to the execution area AE is collated with the hit/fail table stored in the hit/fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and it is determined whether or not there will be a jackpot.

Next, the details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining the jackpot type. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented one by one within the range of 0 to 99 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry when the game ball enters the first start port 33. When the game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c, and when the result of the winning lottery is a jackpot, the determination processing execution area 64c The jackpot type is determined using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in . Furthermore, the MPU 62 uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to determine the display mode of the segment display device that is stopped and displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b. . The stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referred to for the determination.

Next, details of the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is used when determining whether or not a reach occurs when the result of the winning lottery is not a big win. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the first start port 33, and the second start port 34. It is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters. After the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first reservation area Ra is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c, it is compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63, and the reach occurs. After the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the second reservation area Rb is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c, it is compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63, and the reach occurs. However, when the result of the winning lottery is a big win and the game shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 determines the occurrence of reach regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

The ready-to-win means that, for some of the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41, there is a possibility that a combination of symbols corresponding to a big win will be established, and some combinations of symbols are stopped. It refers to a display state in which symbols are displayed and the remaining symbol rows are displayed in a variable manner. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the combination of symbols corresponding to the big win refers to the combination of the same symbols on a predetermined pay line. As a specific example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of FIG. A ready-to-win state is achieved by forming a ready-to-win line and performing variable display of symbols in the symbol row Z2 when the ready-to-win line is formed. Then, when a big win occurs, the same symbols as the symbols forming the reach line are stop-displayed in the symbol row Z2.

In addition, in the ready-to-win state, while the ready-to-win line is formed, the patterns are displayed in the remaining pattern rows in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen to create a ready-to-win effect. It includes a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a after displaying a combination of patterns in which a reach line is formed in a reduced size or not. In addition, when the ready-to-win effect is being performed or before the ready-to-win display is performed, the determination of whether or not to perform a notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character is performed using the reach-to-win random number counter C3 or other counters. may

Next, details of the falling random number counter CF will be described. The falling random number counter CF is used when executing a falling lottery for determining whether or not to end the high probability mode in a game state in which the lottery mode is the high probability mode. When the falling lottery is won, the lottery mode in the game round is changed from the high probability mode to the low probability mode.

The falling random number counter CF is, for example, incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 99 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum. The falling random number counter CF is periodically updated, and stored in the reservation information storage area 64b of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the first start port 33 or the second start port 34. Specifically, the update value of the falling random number counter CF is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the first start port 33, and the game ball enters the second start port 34. The updated value of the fall random number counter CF is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the RAM 64 at the timing. Then, after the value of the drop random number counter CF stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb is moved to the execution area AE, the success/failure table ( It is collated with the drop lottery success/failure table) to determine whether or not to end the high probability mode.

Next, details of the fluctuation type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the variation time in the first symbol display portion 37 a and the second symbol display portion 37 b and the symbol variation time in the symbol display device 41 . The fluctuation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in sequence within a range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once each time a normal process, which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of variation display in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b and at the start of symbol variation by the symbol display device 41. The variable time table stored in the variable time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63 is used when determining the variable time in the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b.

Next, the details of the electric accessory release counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory release counter C4 is, for example, configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 465 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated, and stored in the electric role holding area 64d of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the through gate 35. - 特許庁Then, at a predetermined timing, after the value of the electric role product open counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 64d moves to the electric role execution area 64e, the value of the electric role product open counter C4 is displayed in the electric role execution area 64e. A lottery (hereinafter referred to as an electric accessory open lottery) is performed as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to the open state. Specifically, in the electric role execution area 64e, the winning/failure table (electric role lottery winning/failure table) stored in the role lottery table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 and the value of the electric role lottery counter C4 are different. It is collated, and it is determined whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to the open state.

At least one of the obtained value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4, and the value of the falling random number counter CF is special information in the present invention. corresponds to In addition, at least one of the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3 and the value of the falling random number counter CF stored in the first reservation area Ra and the second reservation area Rb is reserved. Also called information.

Next, the success/failure table will be described. The success/failure table is table data for matching with the big-hit random number counter C1 when performing a winning lottery based on the big-hit random number counter C1. A low-probability mode and a high-probability mode are set in the pachinko machine 10 as a lottery mode for a winning lottery. In the winning lottery in the probability mode, the success/failure table for the high probability mode is referred to.

FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the success/failure table. FIG. 7(a) shows the success/failure table for the low-probability mode (for the low-probability mode), and FIG. 7(b) shows the success/failure table for the high-probability mode.

As shown in FIG. 7(a), five values of 0 to 4 are set in the success/failure table for the low-probability mode as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Of the values from 0 to 1199, the values (5 to 1199) other than the five values from 0 to 4 are outliers. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 7(b), 16 values from 0 to 15 are set in the success/failure table for the high-probability mode as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Of the values from 0 to 1199, the values (16 to 1199) other than the 16 values from 0 to 15 are outliers. In this way, the high-probability mode has a higher probability of winning a big win in the winning lottery than the low-probability mode.

Further, in the present embodiment, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as the jackpot in the hit/fail table for the low-probability mode is the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as the jackpot in the hit/fail table for the high-probability mode. included in the group. However, as long as the probability of winning a big win in the high-probability mode is higher than in the low-probability mode as a result of the winning lottery, the number and value of the random numbers set as the big wins are arbitrary.

It should be noted that a "small win" may be provided as a result of the winning lottery, although it is not used in the win/fail table in this embodiment.

A "minor win" is a success/fail result that triggers a transition to the opening/closing execution mode in which the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is executed, but does not trigger a transition for both the lottery mode and the support mode. . On the other hand, "miss" is a pass/fail result that does not trigger the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, nor does it trigger the transition to the lottery mode and the support mode.

Next, the jackpot type will be described. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set in the pachinko machine 10. - 特許庁Specifically, for example, by providing differences in the following three aspects or modes, it is possible to set a plurality of types of jackpots.
(1) Aspect of opening/closing control of variable winning device 36 in opening/closing execution mode (2) Lottery mode for winning lottery after completion of opening/closing execution mode (3) Electric accessory 34a of second start port 34 after completion of opening/closing execution mode Support mode

In the pachinko machine 10, as a form of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the above-described (1) opening/closing execution mode, the frequency of occurrence of winning to the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode A high-frequency winning mode and a low-frequency winning mode can be set so that is relatively high or low. For example, in the high frequency winning mode, the opening and closing door 36b is opened and closed a plurality of times (for example, 16 times) from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode, and one opening is performed until 30 seconds elapses or to the opening and closing door 36b. It can be set to continue until the number of hit balls reaches 10. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening and closing door 36b is opened and closed twice from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode, and one opening is until 0.2 sec elapses or a ball enters the opening and closing door 36b. It can be set to continue until the number reaches six.

When the operation handle 25 is operated by the player, the game ball shooting mechanism 81 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is shot toward the game area PA every 0.6 sec. In the case of the above specific example, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of the opening/closing door 36b is 0.2 sec. In other words, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of the open/close door 36b is shorter than the shooting cycle of the game ball. Therefore, substantially no winning of game balls occurs in the opening/closing execution mode associated with the low-frequency winning mode. However, even in the opening and closing execution mode related to the low-frequency winning mode, it may be set so that the winning of the game ball can occur.

The number of opening/closing times of the opening/closing door 36b, the opening limit time for one opening, and the opening limit number for one opening are determined by the variable winning device 36 during the period from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode. is higher in the high-frequency winning mode than in the low-frequency winning mode, the open mode of the opening/closing door 36b is arbitrary. Specifically, if the high frequency winning mode has more opening and closing times than the low frequency winning mode, the opening limit time for one opening is longer, or the opening limit number for one opening is set more good. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, in the open/close execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode, substantially no winning to the variable winning device 36 may occur.

The pachinko machine 10 has a high-probability mode in which a winning lottery is performed using a high-probability win-or-fail table as a win-or-fail table, and a win-fail table as a win-or-fail table. A low-probability mode in which a winning lottery is performed using a low-probability success/failure table can be set. As described with reference to FIG. 7, the winning lottery using the high-probability success/failure table is more successful than the winning lottery using the low-probability success/failure table. likely to.

In the pachinko machine 10, as a form of the support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the end of the above-mentioned (3) opening and closing execution mode, shooting of game balls continues in a similar form to the game area PA. A high-frequency support mode and a low-frequency support mode are selected so that the frequency of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 being in the open state per unit time is relatively high or low when compared in the situation where can be set.

Specifically, the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode have different probabilities of winning the electric role open lottery in the electric role item opening lottery using the electric role item opening counter C4. In the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role open lottery in the electric accessory open lottery is made higher than in the low frequency support mode. In addition, in the high-frequency support mode, the opening time of the electric accessory 34a may be set longer than in the low-frequency support mode when the electric role opening winning is won.

Although not adopted in the present embodiment, in the high frequency support mode, the number of times the electric accessory 34a is in the open state when the electric accessory 34a is elected is set higher than in the low frequency support mode. good too. Furthermore, it may be configured such that the electric accessory 34a is set to have a long opening time once. In addition, in the high-frequency support mode, in the case where the open state of the electric accessory 34a occurs multiple times due to the electric role open winning, the closing time from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state is , may be set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the time secured from one electric accessory open lottery to the next electric accessory open lottery is set to be relatively shorter than in the low-frequency support mode. may

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of a ball entering the second starting port 34 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. That is, the high-frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary game state that assists establishment of special information acquisition conditions.

In the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won as a result of the winning lottery, the jackpot type is sorted using the jackpot type counter C2. The distribution of the jackpot types corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63 as a distribution table.

FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the allocation table. FIG. 8(a) shows a distribution table for the first start port, and FIG. 8(b) shows a distribution table for the second start port. The distribution table for the first start port is referred to during a winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33, and the distribution table for the second start port is referred to the second start port 34. It is referred to during the winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball. Both distribution tables function as reference tables for distributing the jackpot types, but in the present embodiment, they also function as reference tables for distributing the first drop mode and the second drop mode in the mode selection lottery. Details of the mode selection lottery will be described later.

As shown in the distribution table for the first start port in FIG. 8(a), the distribution table for the first start port includes, as jackpot types based on the entry of a game ball into the first start port 33, A 16R probability variable jackpot, an 8R probability variable jackpot, and an 8R normal jackpot are set.

In the 16R probability variable jackpot and the 8R probability variable jackpot, the mode of opening and closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode, and the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the end of the opening and closing execution mode (hereinafter simply “lottery mode”). ) is a high-probability mode, and the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode is a high-frequency support mode. The difference between the 16R variable variable jackpot and the 8R variable variable jackpot is that the number of openings of the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode is different, the 16R variable variable jackpot is 16 times (16 rounds), and the 8R variable variable jackpot is 8. times (8 rounds).

In the 8R normal jackpot, the mode of opening and closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode, the lottery mode after the opening and closing execution mode is the low probability mode, and the support after the opening and closing execution mode is finished. It is a jackpot where the mode is a high frequency support mode. The number of openings of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is 8 times (8 rounds).

In the distribution table for the first start port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 99", "0 to 64" corresponds to the 16R probability variable jackpot, and "65 to 89" corresponds to the 8R probability variable jackpot. , and “90 to 99” corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, three types of jackpots are set as the types of jackpots. Therefore, the aspect of the jackpot is diversified. When these three types of jackpots are compared, the degree of advantage for the player is the highest for the 16R variable variable jackpot, the second highest for the 8R variable jackpot, and finally the 8R normal jackpot. By thus setting a plurality of types of jackpots with different degrees of advantage for the player, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous and increase the degree of attention to the game.

As shown in the distribution table for the second start port in FIG. A 16R probability variable jackpot, an 8R probability variable jackpot, and an 8R normal jackpot are set. In the distribution table for the second start port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 99", "0 to 74" corresponds to the 16R probability variable jackpot, and "75 to 89" corresponds to the 8R probability variable jackpot. , and “90 to 99” corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won, the type of jackpot is distributed based on the ball entering the first start port 33 and when the jackpot is won. It is different from the case of winning a jackpot based on the entry of the ball into the starting hole 34, and a clear difference is provided in the advantage for the player.

In this embodiment, as described above, the type of jackpot set in the distribution table for the first start port and the type of jackpot set in the distribution table for the second start port are the same. However, instead of this, a different configuration may be used. Furthermore, the types of jackpots defined by each distribution table need not be limited to three types. For example, four types including the 16R normal jackpot, two types, or five types or more may be used. Furthermore, the number of opening times of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is not limited to 8R and 16R, and may be other times such as 4R and 5R, for example.

In addition, when the winning lottery results in a loss, the mode is not changed to the opening/closing execution mode, and the lottery mode and the support mode are not changed. In the sorting of the types of jackpots, if a 16 probability variable jackpot or an 8R probability variable jackpot is obtained, as described above, the lottery mode after the end of the opening and closing execution mode becomes a high probability mode, but this high probability mode The state is continued until the next time a big win is won in the winning lottery or until the drop lottery is won.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, and the jackpot type using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. However, the MPU 62 further uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to stop and display the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b. Determine the display mode. The stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referred to for the determination.

FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a fall lottery success/failure table used when executing a fall lottery. As shown in FIG. 9, three values of 0, 1, and 2 are set in the drop lottery success/failure table as values of the drop random number counter CF that will win the drop lottery. Ninety-seven values from 3 to 99 are set as values of the falling random number counter CF that will result in an error. That is, in the high-probability mode game round, the probability of winning the drop lottery, ending the high-probability mode, and becoming the low-probability mode is 3/100, and the probability of losing the drop lottery and continuing the high-probability mode is 3/100. It is 97/100. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the falling lottery is not executed in the low-probability mode game rounds.

FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a success/failure table (success/failure table for electric accessary product open lottery) used when executing an electric accessary product open lottery.

FIG. 10(a) shows a success/failure table (for low-frequency support mode) for electric accessory open lottery used in low-frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 10( a ), the electric accessory open lottery success/failure table (for low-frequency support mode) has two values of 0 and 1 for the electric accessory open counter C4 that will win the electric role open winning. A value is set. 464 values from 2 to 465 are set as the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4 to be out. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 in the low-frequency support mode and the electric accessary item open lottery is executed, the electric role open lottery is won with a probability of 1/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric role opening win is made in the low-frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.4 seconds.

FIG. 10(b) shows a success/failure table (for high-frequency support mode) for electric accessory open lottery used in high-frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 10(b), in the success/failure table for the electric accessory open lottery (for high frequency support mode), there are 462 values of 0 to 461 as the value of the electric accessory open counter C4 that becomes the electric accessory open winning. A value is set. Four values of 462 to 465 are set as the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4 that is out. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 in the high-frequency support mode and the electric accessory open lottery is executed, the electric role open lottery is won with a probability of 231/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric role opening win is made in the high-frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.6 seconds.

In this way, the success/failure table for the electric accessory open lottery is set so that the high-frequency support mode has a higher probability of the game ball entering the second start port 34 than the low-frequency support mode. .

<<1-3>> Electrical configuration of sound emission control device and display control device:
Next, electrical configurations of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 11 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. As shown in FIG. A part of the configuration such as the power supply device 85 (FIG. 5) is omitted. An MPU 92 is mounted on an audio emission control board 91 provided in the audio emission control device 90 . The MPU 92 is a device containing a CPU, a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like.

The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables, and the like. For example, part of the area of the ROM 93 is provided with an effect pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like. Details of these will be described later.

The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the ROM 93 . For example, a part of the area of the RAM 94 is provided with various flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, and the like. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 92, and they may be individually integrated into chips.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port. The input side of the MPU 92 is connected to the main control device 60 and the effect operation button 24 . Various commands are received from the main controller 60 . A speaker 46 and various lamps 47 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92, and the display control device 100 is also connected.

The display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102, which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are integrated into chips, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. is installed. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 102, and they may be individually integrated into chips.

The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, to generate internal commands for the VDP 105). .

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and also stores JPEG format image data for background images.

A work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when various programs are executed by the MPU 102 .

The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the pattern display device 41 . The VDP 105 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is an IC chip, and is a kind of microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, etc., and intervenes in the reading and writing of data.

The character ROM 106 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as patterns displayed on the pattern display device 41 . The character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table and the like that are referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 106 . It is also possible to configure the character ROM 106 to store the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 .

The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, and by rewriting the content of the video RAM 107, the display content of the pattern display device 41 is changed.

Hereinafter, the MPU 62, ROM 63, and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main MPU 62, main ROM 63, and main RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the sound emission control device 90 are referred to as the sound and light side MPU 92 and the sound and light side, respectively. The ROM 93 and the sound/light side RAM 94 are also called, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also called the display side MPU 102 .

<<1-4>> Overview of Processing by Gaming Machine:
Next, an overview of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the high frequency support mode is continued as the support mode until the number of games reaches a predetermined guaranteed number of games after shifting to the high frequency support mode. The “guaranteed number of games played” is the number of games guaranteed to be played continuously in the high-frequency support mode, and is, for example, 100 times. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, the high frequency support mode is guaranteed up to 100 times, which is the guaranteed number of games, after shifting to the high frequency support mode. When the low probability mode is set as the lottery mode at that time after exceeding the guaranteed number of games of 100, the support mode is shifted from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode. Even after the number of games in the high frequency support mode reaches 100 times, the high frequency support mode is continued as the support mode when the high probability mode is continued as the lottery mode at that time.

FIG. 12 is a timing chart for explaining an example of processing in the event that a fall lottery is won in a game round before reaching the guaranteed number of games. FIG. 12(a) shows the state of the lottery mode and the state of the support mode. In FIG. 12, the numbers in brackets [ ] (for example, [1], [60]) indicate the number of games played since the start of the high-frequency support mode.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a variable probability jackpot is won by a winning lottery, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the lottery mode shifts to a high probability mode, the support mode shifts to a high frequency support mode, and then the high frequency support mode. When the fall lottery is won in the game round (60 times in the illustrated example) before the number of games reaches the guaranteed number of games after the start of the game, the lottery mode shifts to the low-probability mode. Then, the winning lottery is executed in the low-probability mode from the 60th game round. On the other hand, in the support mode, even if the falling lottery is won in the 60th game turn and the high probability mode ends and the low probability mode is entered, 100 points after the high frequency support mode starts. The high-frequency support mode continues until the game round to be executed for the first time is reached.

FIG. 12(b) shows the effects, the lottery mode, and the support mode executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment in the 60th game round in which the drop lottery is won. In this example, up to the 60th game round (1st to 59th round), neither the falling lottery nor the hit lottery nor the reach lottery is won. A normal effect (also called a normal effect) for announcing the result or the lottery result is executed. Then, in the 60th game round in which the falling lottery is won, for example, a battle effect (hereinafter also referred to as a battle effect) in which the player side character and the enemy side character confront each other is executed.

The battle effect is a effect executed before the result notification effect for announcing the lottery results of the falling lottery and the winning lottery. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, three types of battle effects are prepared: a normal battle effect, a life-or-death battle effect, and an advantage battle effect. The normal battle effect suggests a result that is favorable to the player (win), a result that is unfavorable to the player (defeat), or a result that cannot be said to be favorable or unfavorable to the player (draw). It is a performance. The life-and-death battle effect is a effect suggesting either a favorable result (victory) or a disadvantageous result (defeat) for the player. The dominant battle effect is a effect that suggests either a result favorable to the player (victory) or a result neither advantageous nor disadvantageous to the player (tie). In the game times before the guaranteed number of games is reached, the normal battle effect is executed as the battle effect. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 12(b), a normal battle effect is executed as the battle effect.

After executing the battle production, a result notification production for announcing the lottery results of the drop lottery and the winning lottery is executed. In the result notification performance, a performance corresponding to the results of the falling lottery and winning lottery is executed. Specifically, when the falling lottery is won and the jackpot is not won in the winning lottery, a defeat effect is executed in which the player side character is defeated. Regardless of the lottery result of the fall lottery, when a big win is won in the winning lottery, a victory presentation is executed in which the player side character wins. When a falling lottery is not won and a big win is not won in a winning lottery, and a ready-to-win situation occurs, a draw performance is executed in which the player's character and the enemy's character are drawn. In the example of FIG. 12(b), since the falling lottery is won in the 60th game round, a defeat effect is executed as the result notification effect.

As a result of winning the falling lottery in the 60th game round, the timing of shifting from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode coincides with the timing of starting the 60th game round in which the falling lottery was won. there is That is, when the drop lottery is won in the 60th game round, the lottery mode immediately shifts from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode. As for the support mode, the high-frequency support mode continues as described above.

FIG. 13 is a timing chart for explaining an example of processing when a jackpot is won in a winning lottery in a game round before the guaranteed number of games is reached.

Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a variable probability jackpot is won by winning lottery, the lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode, and then the high frequency support mode starts. If a jackpot is won in a winning lottery in a game round (60 times in the illustrated example) before the number of games after the game reaches the guaranteed number of games, the 60th game round ends and the opening/closing execution mode is switched. The lottery mode shifts from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode at the start timing (that is, the timing immediately after the winning result notification effect ends). On the other hand, the support mode also shifts from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode at the timing when the 60th game round is completed and the opening/closing execution mode is started. That is, when the guaranteed number of games has not been reached, the lottery mode and the support mode are both reset to the low side at the timing when the game round in which a big win is won is completed and the opening/closing execution mode is started.

As for the effect, in the example of FIG. 13, up to the 60th game round (1st to 59th time), neither the fall lottery nor the reach lottery is won, so the normal effect is performed until the 59th game round. to run. Then, in the 60th game round in which the big win is won in the winning lottery, the battle performance and the result notification performance for notifying that the big win has been won in the winning lottery are executed. As described above, in the game rounds before the guaranteed number of games is reached, the normal battle production, which is a production suggesting victory, defeat, or draw, is executed as a battle production. be done. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 13, the normal battle effect is executed as the battle effect.

FIG. 14 shows that in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the game round before reaching the guaranteed number of games, the drop lottery is not won and the jackpot is not won in the winning lottery. ) is a timing chart for explaining an example of processing when it is determined that a Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a variable probability jackpot is won by a winning lottery, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the lottery mode shifts to a high probability mode, the support mode shifts to a high frequency support mode, and then In the number of games (60 in the illustrated example) before the number of games reached the guaranteed number of games after the start of the high-frequency support mode, the falling lottery was not won and the jackpot was not won in the winning lottery. FIG. 14 shows processing when it is determined that a reach (out-of-reach reach) occurs in the reach determination.

In the 60th game round when it is judged that reach (missing reach) occurs in the reach judgment without winning the fall lottery and winning the jackpot in the winning lottery, either victory, defeat or draw. After that, a draw effect in which the player's character neither wins nor loses is executed as a result notification effect. In game rounds that did not win the fall lottery and did not win the jackpot in the winning lottery, the lottery mode maintains the high probability mode and the support mode maintains the high frequency support mode regardless of whether reach occurs or not. do.

FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram showing the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 when the battle effect or result notification effect described above is being executed. When the battle effect or result notification effect is executed, the display surface 41a is divided into a first display area 41aS and a second display area 41aL. Then, in the first display area 41aS, the variable display and static display of the symbols are performed. Specifically, within the unit game time, the variable display of the symbols is executed during the variable time, and the stop display of the symbols is executed during the stop time. On the other hand, in the second display area 41aL, a battle effect or result notification effect is executed.

FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a battle effect. FIG. 16(a) shows an example of a normal battle effect, FIG. 16(b) shows an example of a life/death battle effect, and FIG. 16(c) shows an example of a superiority battle effect. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, an image (moving image) of a confrontation between a female character on the player side and a male character on the enemy side is displayed as a battle effect. is different. In the life-or-death battle shown in FIG. 16(b), both characters have larger swords than in the normal battle shown in FIG. ing. In the superiority battle shown in FIG. 16(c), the sword held by the female character on the player's side is larger than the sword held by the male character on the enemy's side, the player's side is superior, and the result of the battle is only victory or a draw. (that is, there is no loss). In each battle effect, the images shown in FIGS. 16(a) to 16(c) are displayed in the second display area 41aL of the display surface 41a, and the sound and light associated with the images are transmitted through the speaker 46 and various The lamp 47 is caused to output.

The images of the normal battle effect, the life-and-death battle effect, and the superiority battle effect described above are merely examples, and the present invention is not limited to these. In this embodiment, each battle production has almost the same overall composition in which a female character on the player side and a male character on the enemy side confront each other, and only the swords possessed by the characters are different. Alternatively, the overall composition may be completely different depending on the type of battle presentation. In short, the normal battle production is a production that can indicate that the result of the battle is victory, defeat, or a draw, and the life-and-death battle production is a production that can indicate whether the result of the battle is victory or defeat. If it is a production that can suggest that it corresponds to either, and if the superior battle production is a production that can suggest that the result of the battle corresponds to either victory or a draw, then what kind of production It can also be used as an aspect. Furthermore, even if the above-mentioned effects cannot be obtained, if the effects are different from each other, what kind of effects should be applied to each of the normal battle effect, the life-and-death battle effect, and the superiority battle effect? can also The reason why the normal battle effect, the life-or-death battle effect, and the superiority battle effect are different from each other is to change the sense of urgency and anticipation given to the player depending on the type of battle effect. If not desired, the normal battle effect, the life-or-death battle effect, and the superiority battle effect can each have the same effect content.

FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram exemplifying the result notification effect executed after the battle effect. FIG. 17(a) shows a victory effect as a result notification effect, FIG. 17(b) shows a defeat effect as a result notification effect, and FIG. 17(c) shows a tie effect as a result notification effect. In the victory presentation, as shown in FIG. 17(a), an image (moving image) in which the player's female character is delighted with the victory is displayed in the second display area 41aL (FIG. 15) of the display surface 41a, and the image is displayed. A speaker 46 and various lamps 47 are caused to output sound and light associated with this. In the example of FIG. 13 in which a big win is won in the winning lottery, a victory effect is executed as the result notification effect.

In the defeat effect, as shown in FIG. 17(b), an image (moving image) in which the player's female character is saddened by defeat is displayed in the second display area 41aL of the display surface 41a, and a voice accompanying the image is displayed. and light are output to the speaker 46 and various lamps 47 . In the example of FIG. 12 in which the falling lottery is won, a defeat effect is executed as the result notification effect.

In the draw effect, as shown in FIG. 17(c), an image (moving image) indicating that the player's female character is not defeated is displayed in the second display area 41aL (FIG. 15) of the display surface 41a. , the speaker 46 and various lamps 47 are caused to output sound and light associated with the image. In the game times before the number of games after the start of the high-frequency support mode reaches the guaranteed number of games, in which the falling lottery is not won and the jackpot lottery is not won in the winning lottery, and reach occurs, A draw effect is executed as the result notification effect. Note that the images (moving images) shown in FIGS. 17(a) to 17(c) can be replaced with other images (moving images) for each of the winning effect, the defeat effect, and the draw effect. In short, the victory effect can be any image as long as it can notify the player that the result is advantageous, and the defeat effect can be an image that can notify the player that the result is disadvantageous. Any image can be used as long as the draw effect is an image that can notify the player that the result is neither advantageous nor disadvantageous.

Next, description will be given of the case of winning the falling lottery and the case of winning the jackpot in the winning lottery in the game round after reaching the guaranteed number of games.

FIG. 18 is a timing chart for explaining an example of the process when the falling lottery is won in the game round after reaching the guaranteed number of games. In FIG. 18(a), a variable probability jackpot is won by a winning lottery, and after the open/close execution mode ends, the lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode, and then the high frequency support mode starts. After the number of games has reached the guaranteed number of games (120 times in the illustrated example), the falling lottery is won, the lottery mode is changed to the low probability mode, and the support mode is changed to the low frequency support mode. It shows the case of migration. Even when the falling lottery is won in the 120th game round, the lottery result in the fall lottery is reflected in the winning lottery lottery mode in the game round in the same way as when the fall lottery is won in the 60th game round. . That is, in the example of FIG. 18A, in the 120th game round, the falling lottery is won and the lottery mode shifts to the low probability mode. Then, the winning lottery is executed in the low probability mode from the 120th game round.

Regarding the support mode, as described above, after shifting to the high-frequency support mode, when the number of games reaches the guaranteed number of games (100 times), the mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode. However, even if the number of games in the high-frequency support mode reaches 100 times, if the high-probability mode is continued as the lottery mode at that time, the high-frequency support mode is continued as the support mode. be. Therefore, in the example of FIG. 18(a), when the falling lottery is won in the 120th game round, the high probability mode continues until the 120th game round is reached, so the high frequency support mode continues. It is In the 120th game round, the falling lottery is won and the lottery mode shifts from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode, and the support mode also shifts from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode.

FIG. 18(b) shows the effects, the lottery mode, and the support mode executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment in the 120th game round in which the falling lottery is won. In this example, until the 120th game round (1 to 119 times), neither the fall lottery nor the winning lottery is won, so the result of the winning lottery in each game round is announced until the 120th game round. Or normal production (also called normal production) to announce the lottery result is executed. Then, in the 120th game round in which the falling lottery is won, a battle presentation is executed. Here, as the battle effect, the previously described life-and-death battle effect (see FIG. 16(b)) is executed.

After executing the life-and-death battle production, a result notification production for announcing the lottery results of the falling lottery and the winning lottery is executed. In the result notification performance, a performance corresponding to the results of the falling lottery and winning lottery is executed. Specifically, when the fall lottery is won and the big win is not won in the win lottery, a defeat effect is executed in which the player side character is defeated as shown in FIG. 17(b). When a big win is won in the winning lottery, regardless of the result of the falling lottery, the winning effect shown in FIG. 17A is executed in which the player side character wins. In the case of FIG. 18(b), the falling lottery is won in the 120th game round, and the jackpot is not won in the winning lottery, so the defeat effect is executed as the result notification effect.

As a result of winning the fall lottery in the 120th game round, the timing of shifting from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode coincides with the timing of starting the 120th game round in which the fall lottery was won. there is That is, when the falling lottery is won in the 120th game round, the lottery mode immediately shifts from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. In addition, as the lottery mode shifts to the low probability mode, the support mode shifts from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode. The timing at which the support mode transitions to the low-frequency support mode is substantially the same as the timing at which the lottery mode transitions to the low-probability mode. Therefore, the low-frequency support mode is entered almost simultaneously with the start of the 120th game cycle.

Next, a description will be given of the processing when a big win is won in the win lottery in the game round after the guaranteed number of games has been reached. Before explaining the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the processing executed by the pachinko machines of Comparative Examples 1 and 2 will be described below.

FIG. 19 is a timing chart for explaining the processing in the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 1 in the case where the falling lottery is not won in the game round after the guaranteed number of games is reached, but the jackpot lottery is won in the winning lottery. Specifically, in FIG. 19, in the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 1, a variable probability jackpot is won by a winning lottery, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the lottery mode changes to the high probability mode, and the support mode changes to the high frequency support mode. After that, after the number of games after the start of the high-frequency support mode reaches the guaranteed number of games (120 times in the example shown), a jackpot is won in the winning lottery, and opening and closing is executed. A case is shown in which the lottery mode shifts to the low-probability mode and the support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode at the start of the mode.

In the 120th game round in which the falling lottery is not won and the jackpot is won in the win lottery, the battle performance is executed, and then the victory performance in which the player's side character wins is executed as the result notification performance. Then, the lottery mode shifts from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode at the timing when the opening/closing execution mode starts after the 120th game round in which the jackpot is won ends (that is, the timing when the winning result notification effect ends). At the same time, the support mode shifts from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode. In other words, the lottery mode and the support mode are both reset to the low side at the timing when the game round in which the big win is won is finished and the open/close execution mode is started.

Here, in the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 1, in the game round after the guaranteed number of games has been reached, when the fall lottery is won and the winning lottery does not win the jackpot, the lottery mode and the support mode are implemented. It is assumed that the same operation as the pachinko machine 10 in the configuration, that is, the operation shown in FIG. 18 is performed. Comparing FIG. 18(b) and FIG. 19, it can be seen that in the period from the start to the end of the 120th game round, the mode of change of the support mode differs between the two. During this period, the falling lottery is not won, and when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery, the falling lottery is won and the jackpot is won in the winning lottery, as opposed to the high-frequency support mode as shown in FIG. If not, the low-frequency support mode is set as shown in FIG. 18(b). Therefore, assuming a pachinko machine of Comparative Example 1 that executes both the processing shown in FIG. 18(b) and the processing shown in FIG. Secondly, by checking whether or not the high-frequency support mode has ended and shifted to the low-frequency support mode from the open/closed state of the electric accessory 34a (FIG. 3), whether the falling lottery has been won in the 120th game round. can recognize whether or not

Specifically, in the 120th game round, if the player can confirm that the electric accessory 34a (FIG. 3) stops opening and closing before the result notification effect is executed, Assuming that the high-frequency support mode ends and shifts to the low-frequency support mode at the timing when the 120th game round is started, it can be predicted that the falling lottery is won at the 120th game round. As a result, the player can predict the type of result notification effect to be executed after the battle effect is being executed. In other words, when the game rounds in the high-probability mode continue 100 times or more and in the high-frequency support mode, when the battle production is started, the player side character and the enemy side character It is not known until the result is announced which of the two will win (that is, it is not known until the result is announced whether it will win the fall lottery or the jackpot in the winning lottery). , by confirming that the high-frequency support has ended from the open/closed state of the electric accessory 34a during the period in which the battle production is being executed, the player's character loses this battle (winning the fall lottery). You can predict that during the battle production. As a result, the player may not be able to feel a sense of urgency and anticipation for the results of the drop lottery and the win lottery in the 120th game cycle through the battle effect and the result notification effect. This is the problem of Comparative Example 1.

FIG. 20 is a timing chart for explaining the processing in the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 2 in the case where the falling lottery is not won in the game round after the guaranteed number of games is reached, but the jackpot lottery is won in the winning lottery. Specifically, in the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 2, a variable probability jackpot is won by a winning lottery, the lottery mode shifts to a high probability mode, the support mode shifts to a high frequency support mode, and then the high frequency support mode is started. In the 120th game round after that, the falling lottery is not won, but the winning lottery wins the jackpot, and the lottery mode shifts to the low probability mode at the start of the opening/closing execution mode, as shown in FIG. shown in

In the 120th game round in which the falling lottery is not won and the jackpot is won in the win lottery, the battle performance is executed, and then the victory performance in which the player's side character wins is executed as the result notification performance. The support mode shifts from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode at the timing when the 120th game round of winning the jackpot is started, the 120th game round of winning the jackpot is completed, and the opening/closing execution mode is started. The lottery mode shifts from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode at the timing (that is, the timing immediately after the winning result notification effect ends). That is, when the number of games in the high-probability mode is continuously executed for the guaranteed number of games (100 times) or more, and the falling lottery is not won, and the jackpot is won in the winning lottery, the support mode is performed. In the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 1, the timing of shifting from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode is the timing when the game round in which the jackpot was won ends and the opening/closing execution mode starts (see FIG. 19). On the other hand, the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 2 is different in that the game round in which the big win is won is started (that is, at the start of the game round).

Comparing FIG. 18(b), which is an example of winning the fall lottery, with FIG. It can be seen that the manner of change of the support mode is the same. For this reason, before the execution of the result notification effect, the player wins the fall lottery in the 120th game round from the open/closed state of the electric accessory 34a (FIG. 3). I can't tell if I won or not. That is, it is impossible for the player to predict the type of result notification effect (whether it is a victory effect or a defeat effect) to be executed after the battle effect is being executed. Therefore, when the fall lottery is won in the game round after reaching the guaranteed number of games, the process shown in FIG. According to the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 2 that executes the process shown in 20, the above-described problem of Comparative Example 1 can be solved.

However, even the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 2 has the following problem.

According to the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 2, in the game round after the guaranteed number of games has been reached, both when the drop lottery is won and when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery, the support mode is activated at the timing when the game round is started. shifts from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode, and the electric accessory 34a (FIG. 3) stops opening and closing operations. In the game round after reaching the guaranteed number of games, if the fall lottery is not won and the winning lottery is not won a jackpot, the support mode maintains the high-frequency support mode, and the electric accessory 34a ( FIG. 3) continues to open and close. Therefore, by confirming that the electric accessory 34a (FIG. 3) continues the opening and closing operation even after the start of the game round, the player can participate in the fall lottery in the game round after the guaranteed number of games is reached. It is possible to predict that the player has not won the lottery and has not won the big prize in the winning lottery.

Therefore, according to the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 2, the battle performance executed in the game round after reaching the guaranteed number of games corresponds to not winning the fall lottery and not winning the jackpot in the winning lottery. Even if it is assumed to be a performance that can suggest a superiority battle, specifically, it is a draw by confirming that the electric accessory 34a (Fig. 3) continues the opening and closing operation, that is, winning the fall lottery. Moreover, since it is possible to predict that the player did not win the big prize in the winning lottery, the superiority battle production becomes meaningless. In other words, the battle effect executed in the game round after the guaranteed number of games is reached is meaningful only in the life-and-death battle effect in which the result of the battle is only victory or defeat. As a result, according to the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 2, there is a problem that the range of effects regarding the battle effects to be executed in the game round after the guaranteed number of games is reached cannot be expanded.

The pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment solves both the problems of Comparative Example 1 and Comparative Example 2 by having the following configuration.

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment wins a variable probability jackpot by winning lottery, the lottery mode shifts to a high probability mode, the support mode shifts to a high frequency support mode, and after that, the high frequency support mode is started before the guaranteed game. There are two modes for changing the support mode when a big win is won in a winning lottery in a game round after reaching the number of times (for example, the 120th game round). The two modes are hereinafter referred to as "Last Drop Mode" and "Last Drop Mode". It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, which of the first-drop mode and the second-drop mode is adopted is determined by a lottery (hereinafter referred to as a mode selection lottery), and the result of sorting by the mode selection lottery is as follows. It is configured not to notify the player.

In this embodiment, when a jackpot is won as a result of the winning lottery, the jackpot type is sorted using the jackpot type counter C2. , using the jackpot type counter C2, it is sorted into the first-drop mode or the second-drop mode. In the case of a big hit in the winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33, the distribution table for the first starting port shown in FIG. Sorting is performed between the trailing drop mode, and in the case of a big hit in the winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 33, the distribution for the second starting port shown in FIG. 8(b). A table is used to determine whether the first-drop mode or the last-drop mode is selected.

In the distribution table for the first start port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 99", "0 to 39", "65 to 89" and "90 to 99" correspond to the drop mode. , and "40 to 64" correspond to the trailing mode. That is, in the distribution table for the first start port, "0 to 39" is the value of the jackpot type counter C2 "0 to 64" that is associated with the 16R probability variable jackpot as the jackpot type distribution result. "40 to 64" are associated with the trailing drop mode. The value of the jackpot type counter C2 of "65 to 89", which is associated with the 8R probability variable jackpot as a jackpot type distribution result, is associated with the first drop mode. The value of the jackpot type counter C2 of "90 to 99", which is associated with the 8R normal jackpot as a jackpot type distribution result, is associated with the first drop mode.

In the distribution table for the second start port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 99", "0 to 49", "75 to 89" and "90 to 99" correspond to the drop mode. , and "50 to 74" correspond to the trailing mode. That is, in the distribution table for the second start port, "0 to 49" is the value of the jackpot type counter C2 "0 to 74" that is associated with the 16R probability variable jackpot as the jackpot type distribution result. "50 to 74" are associated with the trailing drop mode. The value of the jackpot type counter C2 of "75 to 89", which is associated with the 8R probability variable jackpot as a jackpot type distribution result, is associated with the first drop mode. The value of the jackpot type counter C2 of "90 to 99", which is associated with the 8R normal jackpot as a jackpot type distribution result, is associated with the first drop mode.

In this embodiment, the result of mode selection lottery for the value of the type counter C2 defined in the distribution table for the first start port and the type defined in the distribution table for the second start port Although the configuration is different from the distribution result of the mode selection lottery for the value of the counter C2, the same configuration may be used.

FIG. 21 shows that in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, in the game round after reaching the guaranteed number of games, the fall lottery is not won, the winning lottery is won, and the mode selection lottery is in the first drop mode. It is a timing chart explaining an example of processing when winning. Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a variable probability jackpot is won by a winning lottery, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the lottery mode shifts to a high probability mode, the support mode shifts to a high frequency support mode, and then At the game round (120 times in the illustrated example) after the number of games after the start of the high-frequency support mode reaches the guaranteed number of games, the falling lottery is not won, and the jackpot lottery is won. In addition, FIG. 21 shows a case where the first-running mode is won in the mode selection lottery, and the lottery mode shifts to the low-probability mode at the start of the opening/closing execution mode.

In the 120th game round in which the player did not win the falling lottery, but won the jackpot in the winning lottery, and was elected in the first drop mode in the mode selection lottery, it is suggested that it corresponds to either victory or defeat. A life-or-death battle effect (see FIG. 16(b)) is executed, and then a victory effect (see FIG. 17(a)) in which the player side character wins is executed as a result notification effect. In the event that the first drop mode is won in the mode selection lottery, the support mode is changed from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support at the timing when the 120th game round in which the big win is won starts (that is, at the start of the game round). mode, the lottery mode is changed from the high-probability mode at the timing when the 120th game round in which the jackpot is won is finished, and the open/close execution mode is started (that is, the timing immediately after the victory result announcement effect is finished). Switch to low probability mode. The changes in the states of the effect, the lottery mode, and the support mode match the changes in the states of the effect, the lottery mode, and the support mode in Comparative Example 2 shown in FIG.

FIG. 22 shows that in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the game round after reaching the guaranteed number of games, the fall lottery is not won, the winning lottery is won, and the mode selection lottery is in the falling mode. It is a timing chart explaining an example of processing when winning. Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a variable probability jackpot is won by a winning lottery, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the lottery mode shifts to a high probability mode, the support mode shifts to a high frequency support mode, and then At the game round (120 times in the illustrated example) after the number of games after the start of the high-frequency support mode reaches the guaranteed number of games, the falling lottery is not won, and the jackpot lottery is won. FIG. 22 shows a case where the mode selection lottery wins the late mode and the lottery mode shifts to the low probability mode at the start of the opening/closing execution mode.

In the 120th game round in which the player does not win the falling lottery, but wins a big win in the winning lottery and wins the falling mode in the mode selection lottery, it is suggested that it corresponds to either victory or draw. A winning superiority battle effect (see FIG. 16(c)) is executed, and then a victory effect (see FIG. 17(a)) in which the player side character wins is executed as a result notification effect. When the mode selection lottery wins the late mode, the 120th game round in which the big win is won ends, and at the timing when the opening and closing execution mode starts (that is, the timing immediately after the winning result announcement effect ends). As a result, the lottery mode shifts from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode, and the support mode shifts from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode. The changes in the states of the lottery mode and the support mode match those of the lottery mode and the support mode in Comparative Example 1 shown in FIG.

Comparing the case of winning the first drop mode in the mode selection lottery (Fig. 21) and the case of winning the last drop mode in the mode selection lottery (Fig. 22), the number of games in the high probability mode is guaranteed. In the case where it is continuously executed more than the number of times (100 times) and when a big win is won in the winning lottery, the battle production executed in the game round is won if the first drop mode is won. , defeat, or a life-or-death battle effect, whereas winning in the fall mode can suggest either victory or a draw. The difference is that it is a dominant battle production. The timing at which the support mode shifts from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode is the timing at which the game round in which the jackpot is won starts (that is, the start of the game round) when the first drop mode is won. On the other hand, when the late drop mode is won, the game round in which the big win was won ends and the open/close execution mode is started.

FIG. 23 shows that in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the game round after reaching the guaranteed number of games, the falling lottery is not won and the jackpot is not won in the winning lottery, and the reach (so-called miss) is reached in the reach determination. FIG. 10 is a timing chart illustrating an example of processing when it is determined that reach occurs. Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a variable probability jackpot is won by a winning lottery, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the lottery mode shifts to a high probability mode, the support mode shifts to a high frequency support mode, and then In the game round (120 times in the illustrated example) after the number of games after the start of the high-frequency support mode reaches the guaranteed number of games, the falling lottery is not won and the jackpot lottery is won. FIG. 23 shows processing when it is determined that a reach (outlier reach) occurs in the reach determination.

In the 120th game round when it is judged that reach (missing reach) occurs in the reach judgment without winning the fall lottery and winning the jackpot in the winning lottery, it corresponds to either victory or draw. 16(c)), and then a draw effect (see FIG. 17(c)) in which the player's character neither wins nor loses is executed as a result announcement effect. . In game rounds that did not win the fall lottery and did not win the jackpot in the winning lottery, the lottery mode maintains the high probability mode and the support mode maintains the high frequency support mode regardless of whether reach occurs or not. do.

In summary, it is as follows. The pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, in the game round after reaching the guaranteed number of games,
(A) If you win the fall lottery (regardless of the result of the winning lottery), or
(B) If you do not win the fall lottery, win the jackpot in the winning lottery, and win the first drop mode in the mode selection lottery,
A life-and-death battle presentation is executed as a battle presentation executed in the game round, and the support mode is shifted to the low-frequency support mode at the timing when the game round starts (that is, when the game round starts).

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the game round after reaching the guaranteed number of games,
(C) If it is determined that reach will occur in the reach determination without winning the fall lottery and not winning the jackpot in the winning lottery, or
(D) If you do not win the fall lottery, win a jackpot in the winning lottery, and win the falling mode in the mode selection lottery,
A superiority battle performance is executed as a battle performance to be executed in the game round, the game round in which the big win is won is finished, and the support mode is shifted to the low frequency support mode at the timing when the opening/closing execution mode is started.

For this reason, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the support mode is shifted to the low-frequency support mode at the same timing in the case of (A) and the case of (B), so that the number of games played is guaranteed. It is possible to prevent the player from predicting that the falling lottery has been won from the open/closed state of the electric accessory 34a (Fig. 3) during the battle production in the game round after reaching the Play. Furthermore, in the game round after the guaranteed number of games is reached, a life-or-death battle effect or a superiority battle effect can be performed, so the battle effect to be executed in the game round after the guaranteed number of games is reached It is possible to expand the range of production.

<<1-5>> Various processes executed in the main controller:
Next, an example of specific control for executing the above-described processing in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described. The processing executed in the main controller 60 will be described first, and then the processing executed in the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

In order to advance the game of each game cycle, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing. These processes are described below. In addition to timer interrupt processing and normal processing, the MPU 62 executes NMI interrupt processing that is activated by the input of a power failure signal, but the description of these processing will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. As described above, the timer interrupt process is started periodically (for example, every 2 msec) by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 .

In step Sl0101, reading processing of various detection sensors 67a to 67e is executed. That is, it reads the states of the various detection sensors 67a to 67e connected to the main controller 60, determines the states of the sensors, and saves the detection information (entering ball detection information). After that, the process proceeds to step Sl0102.

In step Sl0102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . After that, the process proceeds to step Sl0103.

In step Sl0103, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the falling random number counter CF, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to each of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the falling random number counter CF, and the electric accessory opening counter C4, and each of these counter values reaches the maximum value. clear to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1 to C4 and CF are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM64. After that, the process proceeds to step Sl0104. Note that the fluctuation type counter CS updates its value in the normal processing (FIG. 28) described later.

In step Sl0104, ball entry processing for the starting opening accompanying the ball entering the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34 is executed. The details of the ball entry process for the start opening in step Sl0104 will be described later. After executing step Sl0104, the process proceeds to step Sl0105.

In step Sl0105, a through ball entry process associated with the ball entering the through gate 35 is executed. The details of the through ball entry process in step Sl0105 will be described later. After executing step Sl0105, the MPU 62 ends the timer interrupt processing.

<Entering ball processing for the starting port>
Next, the ball entry process for the start opening will be described. The ball entry process for the starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 24: S10104).

FIG. 25 is a flow chart showing the ball entry process for the starting opening. In step Sl0201, it is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first starting port 33 whether or not the game ball has entered the first starting port 33 (starting ball). In step Sl0201, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the first starting port 33 (Sl0201: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl0202, and the prize ball for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls set command. Then, it progresses to step Sl0203.

In step S10203, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that the game ball has entered the first starting hole 33. FIG. After that, the process proceeds to step Sl0204.

In step Sl0204, the value stored in the reserved number storage area of the first reservation area Ra is read out as the start reservation number RaN (hereinafter also referred to as the first start reservation number RaN), and the first start reservation number RaN will be described later. Set as a target for processing. The first start suspension number RaN indicates the number of suspensions based on the ball entering the first start hole 33 . After that, the process proceeds to step Sl0209.

In step Sl0201, if it is determined that the game ball has not entered the first starting port 33 (Sl0201: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl0205, whether or not the game ball has entered the second starting port 34 is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second starting port 34 .

In step Sl0205, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34 (Sl0205: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl0206, and the prize ball for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls set command. Then, it progresses to step Sl0207. On the other hand, in step Sl0205, when it is determined that the game ball has not entered the second starting hole 34 (Sl0205: NO), the ball entering process for this starting hole ends.

In step Sl0207, external signal setting processing is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that the game ball has entered the second starting hole 34 . After that, the process proceeds to step Sl0208.

In step Sl0208, the start pending quantity RbN (hereinafter also referred to as the second start pending quantity RbN), which is the value stored in the pending quantity storage area of the second reserve area Rb, is read, and the second start pending quantity RbN will be described later. Set as a target for processing. The second start suspension number RbN indicates the number of suspensions based on the ball entering the second start opening 34 . After that, the process proceeds to step Sl0209.

In step Sl0209, it is determined whether or not the start pending number N (RaN or RbN) set in step Sl0204 or Sl0208 is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment). In step Sl0209, if the start suspension number N is not less than the upper limit value (Sl0209: NO), the ball-entering process for this start opening is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Sl0209, if the number N of start suspensions is less than the upper limit (Sl0209: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl0210, adds 1 to the number N of start suspensions of the corresponding reservation area, and then proceeds to step Sl0211. , adds 1 to the value stored in the total pending number storage area (hereinafter referred to as the total pending number CRN). The total pending number CRN indicates the sum of the first pending start number RaN and the second pending start number RbN. After that, the process proceeds to step Sl0212.

In step Sl0212, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and falling random number counter CF updated in step Sl0103 (Fig. 24) is first stored in the free storage area of the corresponding reservation area. area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the pending number to which 1 is added in step Sl0210. Specifically, when the first start suspension number RaN is set as a processing target, the jackpot random number counter C1 updated in step Sl0103, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the falling random number counter CF Each value is stored in the first storage area among the empty storage areas of the first reservation area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start suspension number RaN to which 1 is added in step Sl0210. In addition, when the second start pending quantity RbN is set as a processing target, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the fall random number counter CF updated in step Sl0103 , in the first storage area of the free storage areas of the second reservation area Rb, that is, in the storage area corresponding to the second start suspension number RbN to which 1 is added in step Sl0210. After executing step Sl0212, the process proceeds to step Sl0213.

In step Sl0213, the first determination process is executed. In the first determination process, based on the information (holding information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fall random number counter CF, the winning lottery decision result (lottery result), the jackpot This is a process of determining the type, presence or absence of ready-to-win occurrence, and the result of the fall lottery success/failure determination (lottery result) before the reservation information is subject to the winning lottery by the main controller 60 . The details of the first determination process will be described later. After executing step Sl0213, the process proceeds to step Sl0214.

In step Sl0214, processing for setting a pending command is executed. Specifically, the judgment result of the previous judgment process executed based on the information (holding information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the falling random number counter CF is set as a pending command. do.

The pending command indicates that the ball has entered the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34 and the judgment result (first judgment information) of the first judgment process based on the holding information acquired based on the entry, This is a command for causing the sub-side control device to confirm the pending information before the main control device 60 becomes a target of the winning lottery. The hold command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process ( FIG. 28 : step S10503) of the normal process, which will be described later.

In addition, when the sound emission control device 90 receives the hold command transmitted based on the ball entering the first starting port 33, the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 is displayed on hold. A command is sent to the display control device 100 to make the change corresponding to the increase. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first reserved display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of reserved characters. On the other hand, when receiving the hold command transmitted based on the ball entering the second starting port 34, the sound emission control device 90 displays the second hold display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41. A command is sent to the display control device 100 to make the change corresponding to the increase. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second reserved display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of reserved characters.

After executing step Sl0214, the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 terminates the ball-entering process for this starting opening.

<First determination process>
Next, the preceding determination processing will be described. The first determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 25: S10213) of the ball entry process for the starting opening.

FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing the first determination process. As described above, the first determination process, based on the pending information, determines whether the winning lottery is successful, determines the type of jackpot, determines whether reach occurs or not, determines whether the fall lottery is successful or not. This process is executed before the winning lottery by the main controller 60 is made.

In step S10301, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the storage area by the ball entering the starting hole in the ball entering process for the starting hole (FIG. 25) is grasped. After that, the process proceeds to step S10302, and the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery due to this ball entry is executed as a game round is determined. Specifically, the judgment result of the previous judgment process executed by the ball entry before the current ball entry is read from the corresponding storage area, and whether or not there is a probability variable jackpot that occurs before the winning lottery due to the current ball entry Also, the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery due to the current ball entry is executed as a game round is determined by grasping the presence or absence of winning in the falling lottery.

In step S10302, when it is determined that the lottery mode is the low-probability mode at the time when the winning lottery due to the current ball entry is executed as a game round, (S10302: YES), the process proceeds to step S10303, and the success/failure table is stored. The success/failure table for the low-probability mode stored in the area 63a is referred to. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10308, and as a result of referring to the success/failure table for the low-probability mode, it is determined whether or not the information of the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to the jackpot.

On the other hand, in step S10302, when it is determined that the lottery mode is not the low-probability mode at the time when the winning lottery due to the current entry is executed as a game round (S10302: NO), the process proceeds to step S10304, and the current entry The value of the fall random number counter CF stored in the storage area is grasped by the sphere. After that, the process advances to step S10305 to refer to the fall right/wrong determination table stored in the fall right/wrong determination table storage area 63d to determine whether or not the fall lottery has been won.

In step Sl0305, when it is determined that the falling lottery has been won (Sl0305: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl0306, the falling winning information is stored in the first determination processing result storage area 64h, and the process proceeds to step Sl0303. In step S10303, as described above, the success/failure table for the low probability mode stored in the success/failure table storage area 63a is referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step S10308, and as a result of referring to the success/failure table for the low probability mode, it is determined whether or not the value of the big hit random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to the big win.

In step Sl0305, when it is determined that the falling lottery has not been won (Sl0305: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl0307. In step S10307, as a result of referring to the success/failure table for the high probability mode, it is determined whether or not the value of the big hit random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to the big win. After that, the process proceeds to step S10308, and as a result of referring to the success/failure table for the high probability mode, it is determined whether or not the value of the big hit random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to the big win.

In step S10308, if it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to the jackpot (S10308: YES), the process proceeds to step S10309, and is stored in the storage area by the ball entering the starting port this time. The value of the jackpot type counter C2 is grasped. After that, the process advances to step S10310 to refer to the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 63b. Specifically, when the jackpot type counter C2 to be sorted this time is obtained based on the ball entering the first start port 33, refer to the first start port sort table. , the distribution table for the second starting opening is referred to when the information is acquired based on the ball entering the second starting opening 34 . After executing step Sl0310, the process proceeds to step Sl0311.

In step Sl0311, as a result of referring to the distribution table, it is determined whether or not the value of the big hit type counter C2 grasped this time corresponds to the variable probability big hit. In step Sl0311, when it is determined that the variable probability jackpot is supported (Sl0311: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl0312, and variable probability jackpot information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h. After that, the preceding determination process is terminated. On the other hand, in step Sl0311, when it is determined that it does not correspond to the variable probability jackpot (Sl0311: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl0313, and the normal jackpot information is stored in the first determination processing result storage area 64h. After that, the preceding determination process is terminated.

In step Sl0308, when it is determined that the value of the big hit random number counter C1 grasped this time does not correspond to the big hit (Sl0308: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl0314, and the entry into the starting port this time causes the storage area to be stored. The value of the stored reach random number counter C3 is grasped. Then, it progresses to step S10315 and refers to the table for reach determination memorize|stored in the table storage area 63c for reach determination. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10316, and as a result of referring to the reach determination table, it is determined whether or not the value of the reach random number counter C3 grasped this time corresponds to the occurrence of reach.

In step Sl0316, when it is determined that reach occurrence is supported (Sl0316: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl0317, and reach occurrence information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h. After that, the preceding determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl0316 that the reach occurrence is not supported (Sl0316: NO), the first determination process is terminated.

<Entering ball processing for through>
Next, the ball entry processing for through will be described. The through ball entry process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 24: S10105).

FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing the ball entry processing for through. In step S10401, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the through gate 35. FIG. In step Sl0401, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the through gate 35 (Sl0401: YES), proceed to step Sl0402, whether the accessory reserved number SN is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) determine whether or not Incidentally, the accessory reserved number SN is a value indicating the number of balls entered into the through gate 35 reserved for performing the electric accessory open lottery. In this embodiment, the maximum value of the number SN of reserved accessory items is four. On the other hand, in step S10401, when it is determined that the game ball has not entered the through gate 35 (S10401: NO), this through ball entering processing is terminated.

In step Sl0402, when it is determined that it is less than the upper limit value (less than 4) of the reserved role number SN (Sl0402: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl0403, and 1 is added to the reserved role number SN. Then, it progresses to step Sl0404.

In step Sl0404, the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4 updated in step Sl0103 (FIG. 24) is stored in the first storage area of the free storage areas of the electric work holding area 64d of the RAM64. After that, the through ball entry processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl0402 that the value of the reserved role number SN is not less than the upper limit (Sl0402: NO), that is, if it is determined that the value of the reserved role number SN is equal to or greater than the upper limit, Without storing the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4, the ball entry processing for through is terminated.

<Normal processing>
Next, normal processing will be described. The normal processing is processing started by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 when the power switch 88 is switched from the off state to the on state (hereinafter also referred to as "power on"). In normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed.

FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step Sl0501, startup processing is executed. Specifically, initialization of each control device upon power-on, determination of validity of data stored in the RAM 64, and the like are executed. Then, it progresses to step Sl0502.

In step S10502, a startup command is set. The start-up command is a command for causing each sub-side control device to start a demonstration video when the power is turned on. Then, it progresses to step Sl0503.

In step S10503, output data such as the start-up command set in step S10502 and the command set in the timer interrupt process or the previously executed normal process are transmitted to each sub-side control device. Specifically, the presence or absence of the prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 70 . In addition, when commands related to effects such as start-up commands, variation commands, type commands, and hold commands are set, they are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . After executing step Sl0503, the process proceeds to step Sl0504.

In step Sl0504, the change type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the fluctuation type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . After that, the process proceeds to step Sl0505.

In step Sl0505, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step Sl0506. In step S10506, game round control processing for controlling the game in each game round is executed. In the game round control processing, a winning lottery, setting of variable display of symbols by the symbol display device 41, display control of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b, and the like are performed. Details of the game round control process will be described later. After executing step Sl0506, the process proceeds to step Sl0507.

In step S10507, a game state transition process is executed to shift the game state. By executing the game state transition process, the game state shifts to an opening/closing execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, and the like. Details of the game state transition processing will be described later. After that, the process proceeds to step Sl0508.

In step Sl0508, an electric worker support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 34a provided at the second starting port 34 is executed. In the electric role support process, it is determined whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a. The details of the electronic support process will be described later. After that, the process proceeds to step Sl0509.

In step S10509, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has passed since the start of the current normal processing (strictly speaking, the start of the command output processing in step S10503). That is, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the next normal process. In step Sl0509, if it is determined that the predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed since the start of the normal processing this time (Sl0509: NO), in steps Sl0510 and Sl0511, until the execution timing of the next normal processing Within the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated. Specifically, in step S10510, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . Also, in step S10511, 1 is added to the variation type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl0509 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has elapsed since the start of the normal processing this time (Sl0509: YES), the process returns to step Sl0503, and each process from step Sl0503 to step Sl0508 is executed. Execute.

Since the execution time of each process from step S10503 to step S10508 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using the remaining time, the values of these counters can be randomly updated.

<Game Round Control Processing>
Next, game round control processing will be described. The game round control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of normal process (FIG. 28: S10506).

FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing game round control processing. In step Sl0601, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON when the game state is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode in the later-described game state transition processing, and turned OFF when the opening/closing execution mode is ended in the game state transition processing.

In step Sl0601, when it is determined that the open/close execution mode is in progress (Sl0601: YES), this game round control process is terminated without executing any of the processes after step Sl0602. That is, when the open/close execution mode is in progress, the game cycle is not started regardless of whether or not a ball is entered into the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34 . On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl0601 that the open/close execution mode is not in progress (Sl0601: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl0602.

In step Sl0602, it is determined whether or not the special figure unit 37 is displayed in a variable manner. Specifically, it is determined whether or not one of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b provided in the special figure unit 37 is in the process of variable display. This determination is made by determining whether or not the special figure variation displaying flag in the special figure variation displaying flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The special figure variable display flag is turned ON when one of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b is to start the variable display, and is turned OFF when the variable display is finished.

In step Sl0602, when it is determined that the special figure unit 37 is not displayed in a variable manner (Sl0602: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl0603.

In step Sl0603, a variation start process for starting the variation display in the special figure unit 37 and the variation display in the symbol display device 41 is executed. The details of the fluctuation start process will be described later. After executing step Sl0603, the game round control process is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Sl0602, when it is determined that the special figure unit 37 is displayed in a variable manner (Sl0602: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl0604.

In step S10604, a variation end process for ending the variation display in the special figure unit 37 and the variation display in the symbol display device 41 is executed. The details of the fluctuation end processing will be described later. After executing step Sl0604, this game round control process is terminated.

<Variation start processing>
Next, fluctuation start processing will be described. The fluctuation start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game round control process (FIG. 29: S10603).

FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing the fluctuation start process. In step Sl0701, it is determined whether or not the total pending number CRN exceeds "0". When the total pending number CRN is less than or equal to "0", it means that the pending start number for both the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 is "0". Therefore, in step Sl0701, when it is determined that the total number of reservations CRN is equal to or less than "0" (Sl0701: NO), this fluctuation start process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sl0701 that the total pending number CRN exceeds "0" (Sl0701: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl0702.

In step Sl0702, hold information shift processing for setting the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra or the second hold area Rb to the state after the start of fluctuation is executed, and the process proceeds to step Sl0703. Details of the pending information shift process will be described later.

In step S10703, game state determination processing for determining the game state is performed. Details of the game state determination process will be described later. After executing step Sl0703, the process proceeds to step Sl0704.

In step S10704, fall judgment processing including processing when winning the fall lottery is performed. Details of the fall determination process will be described later. Then, the process proceeds to step Sl0705.

In step Sl0705, a winning judgment process including a process when winning a big win in a winning lottery is performed. The details of the hit determination process will be described later. After executing step Sl0705, the process proceeds to step Sl0706.

In step Sl0706, variable time setting processing is executed. The variable time setting process is for setting the variable time, which is the time required for the current game round in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b, based on the presence or absence of a big hit, the presence or absence of reach, and the like. is the processing of Details of the variable time setting process will be described later. After executing step Sl0706, the process proceeds to step Sl0707.

In step S10707, a variation command is set. The command for variation includes whether the current game cycle is related to the hold information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33, or acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 34. Information indicating whether or not it relates to the hold information is included, and information on the presence or absence of reach occurrence and information on the variable time set in step Sl0706 are included. After executing step Sl0707, the process proceeds to step Sl0708.

In step Sl0708, a type command is set. The type command includes information on the presence or absence of a big hit and the result of distribution determination. In other words, the type command includes, as the information on the types of jackpots, 16R probability variable jackpot information, 8R probability variable jackpot information, 8R normal jackpot information, or out-of-range result information.

The variation command and type command set at steps Sl0707 and Sl0708 are sent to the sound emission control device 90 at step Sl0503 in the normal process (FIG. 28). The sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect in the game round based on the received variation command and the type command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the effect is executed. After executing step Sl0708, the process proceeds to step Sl0709.

In step Sl0709, the symbol display portion corresponding to the current game cycle out of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b is caused to start the variable display of symbols. Specifically, when the second symbol display portion flag of the RAM 64 is not ON, the first symbol display portion 37a is specified as the symbol display portion corresponding to the current game round, and the variable display is started, When the second pattern display portion flag is ON, the second pattern display portion 37b is specified as the pattern display portion corresponding to the current game round, and the variable display is started. After executing step Sl0709, the process proceeds to step Sl0710.

In step Sl0710, the special figure fluctuation displaying flag stored in the special figure fluctuation displaying flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned ON. After step Sl0710 is executed, this fluctuation start process is terminated.

<Holding information shift processing>
Next, the pending information shift process will be described. The hold information shift process is executed by MPU 62 of main controller 60 as a subroutine of fluctuation start process (FIG. 30: S10702).

FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing pending information shift processing. In step Sl0801, it is determined whether or not the reservation area to be processed for execution of the reservation information shift process is the first reservation area Ra. Specifically, the hold information stored first among the hold information stored chronologically in the first hold area Ra (FIG. 6) (the hold information stored in the first area information) is the first stored hold information (stored in the first area of the second hold area Rb) among the hold information stored chronologically in the second hold area Rb (FIG. 6) is stored in the reservation area prior to the reservation information), the reservation area to be processed is determined to be the first reservation area Ra. On the other hand, the first reservation information stored chronologically in the second reservation area Rb than the first reservation information stored chronologically in the first reservation area Ra If the stored reservation information is stored in the reservation area first, the reservation area to be processed is determined to be the second reservation area Rb. That is, by executing the process of step Sl0801, the pending information can be processed in the order stored in the first pending area Ra or the second pending area Rb.

In step Sl0801, when it is determined that the reservation area to be processed is the first reservation area Ra (step Sl0801: YES), reservation information shift processing for the first reservation area in steps Sl0802 to Sl0807 is executed. On the other hand, in step Sl0801, if it is determined that the processing target reservation area is not the first reservation area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the processing target reservation area is the second reservation area Rb (step Sl0801: NO ), and executes the reservation information shift processing for the second reservation area in steps Sl0808 to Sl0813.

In step Sl0802, after subtracting 1 from the first start-up reservation number RaN in the first reservation area Ra, the process proceeds to step Sl0803 to subtract 1 from the total reservation number CRN. After that, the process proceeds to step Sl0804. In step Sl0804, the data stored in the first area of the first reservation area Ra is moved to the execution area AE. After that, the process proceeds to step Sl0805.

In step S10805, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first reservation area Ra is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After executing step Sl0805, the process proceeds to step Sl0806.

In step S10806, if the second pattern display portion flag of the various flag storage area 64g is ON, the flag is turned OFF, and if not ON, the state is maintained. The second pattern display portion flag is information for specifying which of the first pattern display portion 37a and the second pattern display portion 37b is the target for starting the variable display this time. After that, the process proceeds to step Sl0807.

In step S10807, a shift command is set. The shift time command is a command including information for making the sound emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, recognize that the data in the reserved area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63, information indicating that the reservation area to which the data is to be shifted this time corresponds to the first reservation area Ra, that is, the information corresponding to the first start port 33 A shift-time command including information indicating that the shift-time command is included is selected, and the selected shift-time command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . After that, the hold information shift process is terminated.

The shift command set in step Sl0807 is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step Sl0503 of the normal process (FIG. 28). The sound emission control device 90 transmits to the display control device 100 a command for changing the display in the first reservation display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations, based on the received shift command. do. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first reserved display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the decrease in the reserved number.

In step Sl0801, if it is determined that the reservation area to be processed is not the first reservation area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the reservation area to be processed is the second reservation area Rb (Sl0801: NO), step Proceed to Sl0808.

In step Sl0808, 1 is subtracted from the second starting reservation quantity RbN in the second reservation area Rb. After that, the process proceeds to step Sl0809. In step Sl0809, 1 is subtracted from the total pending number CRN, and the process advances to step Sl0810 to move the data stored in the first area of the second pending area Rb to the execution area AE. After that, the process proceeds to step Sl0811.

In step Sl0811, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second reservation area Rb is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After executing step Sl0811, the process proceeds to step Sl0812.

In step Sl0812, if the second pattern display flag in the various flag storage area 64g is not ON, the flag is turned ON, and if it is ON, that state is maintained. After that, the process proceeds to step Sl0813.

In step Sl0813, a shift command is set. The shift time command is a command including information for making the sound emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, recognize that the data in the reserved area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63, the information indicating that the reservation area to which the data is to be shifted this time corresponds to the second reservation area Rb, that is, the information corresponding to the second start port 34 A shift-time command including information indicating that the shift-time command is included is selected, and the selected shift-time command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . After that, the hold information shift process is terminated.

The shift command set in step Sl0813 is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step Sl0503 of the normal process (FIG. 28). Based on the received shift time command, the sound emission control device 90 sends a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the second reservation display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations. Send. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second reserved display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the reserved number.

<Game state determination processing>
Next, the game state determination processing will be explained. The gaming state determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 30: S10703).

FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing the game state determination process. In step Sl0901, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

If it is determined in step Sl0901 that the mode is the high-probability mode (Sl0901: YES), the process advances to step Sl0902 to determine whether the support mode is the high-frequency support mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

If it is determined in step Sl0902 that the mode is the high frequency support mode (Sl0902: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl0903 to turn on the high accuracy/high support flag. The high probability/high support flag is a flag for specifying in the MPU 62 whether or not the game state (high probability/high support state) in which the lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode. and stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64. When the high accuracy/high support flag is ON, it is in a high accuracy/high support state. When the high accuracy/high support flag is OFF, it is not in the high accuracy/high support state. According to step S10903, it is possible for the MPU 62 to specify the result of determination as to whether or not the game is in the high-accuracy/high-support state at the time of execution of this gaming state determination process. After executing step Sl0903, the process proceeds to step Sl0904.

In step Sl0904, a high-precision/high-support command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the high-precision/high-support state is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 set. After executing step Sl0904, the gaming state determination process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the high probability mode in step Sl0901 (Sl0901: NO), or if it is determined that it is not the high frequency support mode in step Sl0902 (Sl0902: NO), without executing steps Sl0903 and Sl0904 , ends the game state determination process.

<Fall judgment processing>
Next, fall determination processing will be described. The fall determination process is executed by MPU 62 of main controller 60 as a subroutine of fluctuation start process (FIG. 30: S10704).

FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing fall determination processing. In step Sl1001, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. In step Sl1001, when it determines with it being high probability mode (Sl1001:YES), it progresses to step Sl1002.

In step Sl1002, the drop lottery success/failure determination is executed with reference to the drop lottery success/failure table. Specifically, the value of the fall random number counter CF stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as winning in the fall lottery success/failure table (see FIG. 9) in the fall lottery table storage area 63d. Determine whether or not In the following step Sl1003, when the result of the success/failure determination in step Sl1002 is that the fall lottery is won (Sl1003: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1004.

At step Sl1004, the high probability mode flag is turned off. After that, the process proceeds to step Sl1005, and the fall flag stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned ON. The drop flag is a flag for storing the result of the win/loss determination of the drop lottery. After executing step Sl1005, the process proceeds to step Sl1006.

In step Sl1006, it is determined whether or not the number of games continuously executed in the high-frequency support mode is before reaching the guaranteed number of games (for example, 100 times) (hereinafter simply referred to as "before the guaranteed number of games"). judge. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the guaranteed number-of-games counter PNC exceeds zero. Since the guaranteed number-of-games counter PNC indicates the number of games remaining in the guaranteed number of games, by determining whether PNC>0, the number of games continuously executed in the high-frequency support mode is determined. It can be determined whether or not is before reaching the guaranteed number of games. In step Sl1006, when it is determined that the value of the guaranteed number of games counter PNC does not exceed 0 (step Sl1006: NO), that is, when it is determined that it is not before the number of guaranteed games (=after the number of guaranteed games), step Proceeding to Sl1007, the high frequency support mode flag is turned off. After executing step Sl1007, the fall determination process ends.

On the other hand, in step Sl1006, when it is determined that it is before the guarantee game round (Sl1006: YES), the fall determination process is terminated immediately. Also, if it is determined in step Sl1001 that it is not in the high probability mode (Sl1001: NO), or if the result of the success/failure determination in step Sl1003 is that the fall lottery has not been won (Sl1003: NO), this fall determination process is immediately executed. finish.

By the falling determination process configured as described above, the variation of the lottery mode and the support mode at the timing of falling winning shown in FIG.

<Hit determination processing>
Next, hit determination processing will be described. The hit determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variation start process (FIG. 30: S10705).

FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing hit determination processing. In step Sl1101, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

In step Sl1101, when it is determined that the mode is the high probability mode (Sl1101: YES), the process advances to step Sl1102, and the success/failure determination is performed by referring to the success/failure table for the high probability mode. Specifically, whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as jackpot winning in the success/failure table for the high probability mode shown in FIG. 7(b). determine whether After that, the process proceeds to step Sl1104.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl1101 that the mode is not the high-probability mode (Sl1101: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1103, and the success/failure determination is performed by referring to the success/failure table for the low-probability mode. Specifically, whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as jackpot winning in the success/failure table for the low probability mode shown in FIG. 7(a). determine whether After that, the process proceeds to step Sl1104.

In step Sl1104, it is determined whether or not the result of the success/fail determination (hit lottery) in step Sl1102 or step Sl1103 is a big hit. In step Sl1104, when the result of the winning/failure determination is a jackpot winning (Sl1104: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1105.

In steps Sl1105 to Sl1109, a process for setting a game result and a process for setting a stop result in the case of winning a jackpot are executed.

At step Sl1105, it is determined whether or not the second pattern display flag of the RAM 64 is ON. In step Sl1105, if it is determined that the second symbol display flag is not ON (Sl1105: NO), proceed to step Sl1106 and refer to the distribution table for the first start opening (see FIG. 8A). and make a distribution judgment. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in any of the numerical range of the 16R probability variable jackpot, the numerical range of the 8R probability variable jackpot, and the numerical value range of the 8R normal jackpot. do.

On the other hand, in step Sl1105, when it is determined that the second pattern display flag is ON (Sl1105: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1107, and a distribution table for the second starting port (see FIG. 8B) Refer to to make a distribution judgment. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in any of the numerical range of the 16R probability variable jackpot, the numerical range of the 8R probability variable jackpot, and the numerical value range of the 8R normal jackpot. do. After executing the process of step Sl1106 or step Sl1107, the process proceeds to step Sl1108.

In step Sl1108, the flag (jackpot flag) corresponding to the type of jackpot distributed in step Sl1106 or step Sl1107 is turned ON. Specifically, when it is a 16R probability variable jackpot, the 16R probability variable jackpot flag is turned ON, when it is an 8R probability variable jackpot, the 8R probability variable jackpot flag is turned ON, and when it is an 8R normal jackpot, the 8R normal jackpot flag is turned on. Turn ON. After executing step Sl1108, the process proceeds to step Sl1109.

In step Sl1109, a process of setting the stop result for the jackpot is executed. Specifically, in the current game turn in which the big win is won, it is set whether the variable display is to be ended in the state in which the stop result is displayed in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b. This is a process for Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63f (FIG. 5), the stop result data corresponding to the type of jackpot sorted in step Sl1106 or step Sl1107. Address information is acquired, and the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After executing step Sl1109, the process proceeds to step Sl1110.

In step Sl1110, it is determined whether the support mode is the high frequency support mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

In step Sl1110, if it is determined that the high frequency support mode (Sl1110: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1111, the number of games to be continuously executed in the high frequency support mode is the guaranteed number of games (for example, 100 times ) is reached (=before the guaranteed number of games). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the guaranteed number-of-games counter PNC exceeds zero. In step Sl1111, when it is determined that the value of the guaranteed number of games counter PNC does not exceed 0 (step Sl1111: NO), that is, when it is determined that it is not before the number of guaranteed games (=after the number of guaranteed games), step Proceed to Sl1112.

In steps Sl1112 to Sl1116, after the guaranteed number of games, without winning the drop lottery, various kinds of processing are executed when winning the jackpot in the winning lottery.

In step Sl1112, a command after the guaranteed number of games is set. The command after the guaranteed number of games that has been set is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 by step S10503 in the normal processing (FIG. 28). When receiving the command after the guaranteed number of games, the sound emission control device 90 can grasp that the current game is the game after the guaranteed number of games. After executing step Sl1112, the process proceeds to step Sl1113.

In step Sl1113, it is determined whether or not the result of allocation determination (mode selection lottery) in step Sl1106 or step Sl1107 is the first drop mode. In step Sl1106 or step Sl1107, it was described above that the distribution determination is performed by distributing the type of jackpot as the distribution determination. A mode selection lottery for allocating a mode of changing the support mode when a big win is won in a winning lottery without winning the lottery is also performed. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is the distribution table for the first starting port shown in FIG. 8(a) or the second starting port shown in FIG. In the distribution table, it is determined whether or not the distribution result of the mode selection lottery matches the value set as the first drop mode. Then, in step Sl1113, it is determined whether or not the result of the mode selection lottery in step Sl1106 or Sl1107 is the first drop mode (=last drop mode).

In step Sl1113, when the result of the mode selection lottery is the first drop mode (Sl1113: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1114 to turn off the high frequency support mode flag. After that, the process proceeds to step Sl1115.

At step Sl1115, the first drop mode flag stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned ON. The first-to-last mode flag is a flag for storing that the result of the mode selection lottery is the first-to-last mode. After executing step Sl1115, the process proceeds to step Sl1116.

In step Sl1116, a first drop mode command is set. The set first drop mode command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step S10503 in the normal processing (FIG. 28). The sound emission control device 90 can recognize that the result of the mode selection lottery is the first-to-last mode when receiving this first-to-last mode command. After executing step Sl1116, the hit determination process ends.

On the other hand, in step Sl1110, if it is determined that it is not in the high-frequency support mode (Sl1110: NO), if it is determined in step Sl1111 that it is before the guaranteed number of games (step Sl1111: YES), or in step Sl1113 it is not the first drop mode That is, when it is determined that the mode is the falling mode (step Sl1113: NO), the hit determination process is immediately terminated. If the drop lottery is won and the big win is won in the winning lottery, it is judged as NO in step Sl1110, so the processing of steps Sl1111 to Sl1116 is not executed.

By the processing from step Sl1101 to step Sl1107 and the processing from step Sl1110 to step Sl1116 described above, the lottery mode and support mode at the timing of jackpot winning in FIG. variation is realized.

In step Sl1104, if the result of the winning lottery in step Sl1102 or step Sl1103 is not a jackpot winning (Sl1104: NO), proceed to step Sl1117, refer to the reach determination table, and determine whether a reach occurs in the game round. A determination is made as to whether or not Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is set as reach occurrence in the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c (FIG. 5). Determines whether or not it matches the value After that, the process proceeds to step Sl1118.

In step Sl1118, if the result of reach determination in step Sl1117 is that reach occurs in the game round (Sl1118: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1119, and the reach occurrence flag is turned ON. Specifically, the reach occurrence flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned ON. After executing step Sl1119, the process proceeds to step Sl1120.

On the other hand, in step Sl1118, if the result of the reach determination in step Sl1117 is that reach does not occur in the game round (Sl1118: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1120 without executing step Sl1119.

In step Sl1120, a process of setting a stop result for failure is executed. Specifically, in the current game turn that results in a loss, the variable display is set to end in a state in which the stop result is displayed in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b. processing. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for loss in the stop result table storage area 63f, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is acquired. , the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After executing step Sl1120, the hit determination process ends.

<Variation time setting processing>
Next, the variable time setting process will be described. The variable time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variable start process (FIG. 30: S10706).

FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing the variable time setting process. In step Sl1201, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is obtained. After that, the process proceeds to step Sl1202.

In step Sl1202, it is determined whether or not it is in a high accuracy/high support state. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high accuracy/high support flag stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The high accuracy/high support flag is a flag that is turned ON in step S10903 of FIG. If it is determined in step Sl1202 that the high accuracy/high support flag is not ON (Sl1202: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1203.

From step Sl1203 to step Sl1209, in a game state that is not in a high-accuracy/high-support state (a game state in which the lottery mode is a high-probability mode and the support mode is a high-frequency support mode), a process for setting the variable time is executed. do.

In step Sl1203, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery relating to the current game round is a big win. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the 16R probability variable jackpot flag, 8R probability variable jackpot flag, and 8R normal jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is ON, and if any flag is ON, Assuming that the jackpot is won (Sl1203: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1204.

In step S11204, the variation time table for big hits stored in the variation time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63 is referred to, and variation time information corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS is acquired. After that, the flow advances to step Sl1205 to set the acquired fluctuating time information in the fluctuating time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. FIG. After that, the variable time setting process is terminated.

In step Sl1203, when it is determined that the result of the winning lottery related to the current game round is not a jackpot winning (Sl1203: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1206 to determine whether or not reach occurs in the current game round. do. Since this process (Sl1206) is executed when the jackpot has not been won in the winning lottery related to the current game round in step Sl1203, in Sx1206, the reach (so-called It is determined whether or not it is a game round in which an out-of-reach reach occurs. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the reach occurrence flag stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. proceed to

In step Sl1207, the reach occurrence flag stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is shifted from ON to OFF. After that, the process proceeds to step Sl1208.

In step Sl1208, the variation time table for reach occurrence stored in the variation time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63 is referred to, and variation time information corresponding to the current value of the variation type counter CS is acquired. After that, the process proceeds to step Sl1205 described above, and the acquired variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. FIG. After that, the variable time setting process is terminated.

In step Sl1206, when it is determined that reach does not occur in the current game round (Sl1206: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1209, and the variable time table for reach non-occurrence stored in the variable time table storage area 63h is referred to. Then, the variable time corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS is acquired. The reach non-occurrence variable time table is a so-called out-of-range variable time table. After that, the process proceeds to step Sl1205 described above, and the acquired variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. FIG. After that, the variable time setting process is terminated.

In step Sl1202, when it is determined that the high accuracy/high support flag is ON (Sl1202: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1210.

In steps Sl1210 to Sl1213, a variable time setting process is executed in a high-probability/high-support state in which the lottery mode is the high-probability mode and the support mode is the high-frequency support mode.

In step Sl1210, the high accuracy/high support flag is turned off from ON. After that, the process proceeds to step Sl1211.

In step Sl1211, it is determined whether or not the number of games continuously executed in the high-frequency support mode is before reaching the guaranteed number of games (for example, 100 times) (=before the guaranteed number of games). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the guaranteed number-of-games counter PNC exceeds zero. In step Sl1211, when it is determined that the value of the guaranteed number-of-games counter PNC exceeds 0 (step Sl1211: YES), that is, when it is determined that the number of games is before the guaranteed number-of-games, the process proceeds to step Sl1212.

In step Sl1212, a variable time setting process before the guaranteed number of games is executed. The variation time setting process before the guaranteed number of games will be described later. After step Sl1212 is executed, this variable time setting process ends.

In step Sl1211, if it is determined that the value of the guaranteed game number counter PNC does not exceed 0 (step Sl1211: NO), that is, if it is determined that the number of guaranteed games has been passed, the process proceeds to step Sl1213, and the guaranteed game Execute the variable time setting process after the number of times. The variation time setting process after the guaranteed number of games will be described later. After step Sl1213 is executed, this variable time setting process is terminated.

<Variation time setting processing before the guaranteed number of games>
Next, the variation time setting process before the guaranteed number of games will be described. The variation time setting process before the guaranteed number of games is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variation time setting process (FIG. 35: S11212).

FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing the variable time setting process before the guaranteed number of games. In step Sl1301, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a big win. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the 16R probability variable jackpot flag, 8R probability variable jackpot flag, and 8R normal jackpot flag in the RAM 64 is ON, and if any flag is ON, the jackpot Assuming that the prize is won (Sl1301: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1302.

In step Sl1302, the variable time table for big win is specified from the variable time table group for before the number of guaranteed games stored in the variable time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. In the variable time table group for before the guaranteed number of games,
(i) A variable time table for jackpots used when a jackpot is won in a winning lottery in a game round before the number of games played after the high-frequency support mode has started reaches the guaranteed number of games (hereinafter referred to as the guaranteed number of games before・ It is called a variable time table for jackpot),
(ii) The variable time for falling used when the number of games played after the high-frequency support mode started and before the number of games reached the guaranteed number of games won the fall lottery and did not win the jackpot in the winning lottery. table (hereinafter referred to as a variable time table for falling before the guaranteed number of games),
(iii) Reach (so-called lost reach) without winning the fall lottery and without winning the jackpot in the winning lottery in the game round before the number of games after the high-frequency support mode starts reaches the guaranteed number of games Fluctuation time table for occurrence of outreach reach used when occurs (hereinafter referred to as fluctuation time table for occurrence of outreach reach before the number of guaranteed games),
is provided. In step Sl1302, the fluctuation time table for the big win before the number of guaranteed games, which is (i), is specified from among (i) to (iii). The guaranteed number-of-games-before/jackpot variable time table is, for example, a variable time table for executing a normal battle effect as a battle effect and a victory effect as a result notification effect (see FIG. 13). After executing step Sl1302, the process proceeds to step Sl1303.

In step Sl1303, the variable time table identified in step Sl1302 is referenced to obtain variable time information corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS obtained in step Sl1201 of the variable time setting process (FIG. 35). Subsequently, in step Sl1304, the variable time information acquired in step Sl1303 is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. FIG. After that, the fluctuation time setting process before the guaranteed number of games is ended.

On the other hand, in step Sl1301, when it is determined that the result of the winning lottery related to the current game round is not a jackpot winning (Sl1301: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1305, and whether the fall lottery related to the current game round has been won. determine whether or not Specifically, it is determined whether or not the fall flag stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step Sl1305 that the fall flag is ON (Sl1305: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1306.

In step S11306, the variable time table for fall is specified from the variable time table group for before the guaranteed number of games stored in the variable time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. FIG. Specifically, the variation time table for falling before the number of guaranteed games, which is (ii), is specified from among the above-mentioned (i) to (iii). The variable time table for guaranteed number of games before falling, for example, is a variable time table for executing a normal battle effect as a battle effect and a defeat effect as a result notification effect (see FIG. 12). After executing step Sl1306, the process advances to step Sl1303 described above, and the fluctuation time table specified in step Sl1306 is referred to to obtain the fluctuation time information corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS. After that, in step Sl1304, the acquired variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. FIG. After that, the fluctuation time setting process before the guaranteed number of games is ended.

In step Sl1305, when it is determined that the falling lottery for the current game round has not been won (Sl1305: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1307 to determine whether or not reach occurs in the current game round. In the above step Sl1301, when the jackpot is not won in the winning lottery related to the current game round, and when the fall lottery related to the current game round is not won in the above step Sl1305, this process (step Sl1307) is executed. Therefore, in step Sl1307, it is determined whether or not the game rounds in which no win is made in the falling lottery and the jackpot is not won in the winning lottery are game rounds in which reach (so-called loss reach) occurs. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the reach occurrence flag stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. proceed to

In step Sl1308, the reach occurrence flag stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is shifted from ON to OFF. After that, the process proceeds to step Sl1309.

In step S11309, the variable time table for occurrence of outlier reach is specified from the variable time table group for before the guaranteed number of games stored in the variable time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63 . Specifically, the variable time table for occurrence of before-guaranteed number-of-games/missing reach, which is (iii), is specified from among (i) to (iii) described above. The fluctuation time table for before the guaranteed number of games and for occurrence of loss reach is a fluctuation time table for executing, for example, a normal battle effect as a battle effect and a draw effect as a result notification effect (see FIG. 14). After executing step Sl1309, the process advances to step Sl1303, and the fluctuation time table specified in step Sl1309 is referred to to obtain fluctuation time information corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS. After that, in step Sl1304, the acquired variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. FIG. After that, the fluctuation time setting process before the guaranteed number of games is ended.

On the other hand, in step Sl1307, when it is determined that the reach does not occur in the current game round (Sl1307: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1310, the fluctuation time table for reach non-occurrence stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63h to obtain the fluctuation time corresponding to the current fluctuation type counter CS value. The process of step Sl1310 is the same as the process of step Sl1209 of the variable time setting process (FIG. 35). After that, in step Sl1304, the acquired variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. FIG. After that, the fluctuation time setting process before the guaranteed number of games is ended.

<Variation time setting process after guaranteed number of games played>
Next, the variation time setting process after the guaranteed number of games will be described. The variable time setting process after the guaranteed number of games is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variable time setting process (FIG. 35: S11213).

FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing the variable time setting process after the guaranteed number of games. In step Sl1401, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a big win. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the 16R probability variable jackpot flag, 8R probability variable jackpot flag, and 8R normal jackpot flag in the RAM 64 is ON, and if any flag is ON, the jackpot Assuming that the prize is won (Sl1401: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1402.

In step Sl1402, it is determined whether or not the fall lottery for the current game round has been won. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the fall flag stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step Sl1402 that the fall flag is not ON (Sl1402: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1403.

In step Sl1403, it is determined whether or not the result of the mode selection lottery pertaining to the current game round is the first drop mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the first drop mode flag stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step Sl1403 that the first drop mode flag is ON (Sl1403: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1404.

In step Sl1404, the first drop mode flag stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is changed from ON to OFF. After that, the process proceeds to step Sl1405.

In step Sl1405, the variable time table for the jackpot first drop mode is specified from the variable time table group for after the number of guaranteed games stored in the variable time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. In the variable time table group for after the guaranteed number of games,
(iv) Winning a jackpot in a winning lottery in a game round after the number of games played after the start of the high-frequency support mode has reached the guaranteed number of games, and the jackpot used when winning the first-run mode in the mode selection lottery. And the variable time table for the first-drop mode (hereinafter referred to as the variable time table for the guaranteed number of games/jackpot first-drop mode),
(v) A jackpot used when winning a big win in a winning lottery and winning a falling mode in a mode selection lottery in a game round after the number of games played after the start of the high-frequency support mode has reached the guaranteed number of games. And the variable time table for the post-drop mode (hereinafter referred to as the variable time table for the post-guaranteed number of games/post-jackpot mode),
(vi) Variation for falling used when winning a falling lottery and not winning a jackpot in a winning lottery in a game turn after the number of games played after the high frequency support mode started has reached the guaranteed number of games Time table (hereinafter referred to as a variable time table for falling after the guaranteed number of games),
(vii) After the number of games played after the high-frequency support mode started has reached the guaranteed number of games, without winning the fall lottery and without winning the jackpot in the winning lottery, reach (so-called lost reach ), a variable time table for occurrence of outreach reach (hereinafter referred to as a variable time table for occurrence of outreach reach after the number of guaranteed games),
is provided. In step S11405, the fluctuation time table for the after-game-game-big-hit first drop mode, which is (iv) from among (iv) to (vii), is specified. The variable time table for the guaranteed number of games/first-hit-jackpot mode is a variable time table for executing, for example, a life-or-death battle effect as a battle effect and a victory effect as a result notification effect (see FIG. 21). After executing step Sl1405, the process proceeds to step Sl1406.

In step Sl1406, the variable time table identified in step Sl1405 is referenced to obtain variable time information corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS obtained in step Sl1201 of the variable time setting process (FIG. 35). Subsequently, in step Sl1407, the variable time information acquired in step Sl1406 is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. FIG. After that, the variation time setting process after the guaranteed number of games is ended.

On the other hand, in step Sl1403, when it is determined that the result of the mode selection lottery for the current game round is not the first drop mode, that is, the last drop mode (Sl1403: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1408.

In step S11408, the variable time table for the post-jackpot drop mode is specified from the variable time table group for after the number of guaranteed games stored in the variable time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. Specifically, the variation time table for the drop mode after the number of guaranteed games and after the jackpot, which is (v), is specified from among the above-described (iv) to (vii). The post-guaranteed number of games/post-jackpot drop mode variable time table is a variable time table for executing, for example, a superiority battle effect as a battle effect and a victory effect as a result notification effect (see FIG. 22). After executing step Sl1408, the process advances to step Sl1406 described above, and the fluctuation time table specified in step Sl1408 is referred to to acquire the fluctuation time information corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS. Thereafter, the flow advances to step Sl1407 to set the acquired variable time information in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. FIG. After that, the variation time setting process after the guaranteed number of games is ended.

It should be noted that, in step Sl1402, if it is determined that the falling lottery for the current game round has been won (Sl1402: YES), without executing step Sl1403 and step Sl1404, the process proceeds to step Sl1405, the guaranteed number of games Specify the variable time table for the post-jackpot first drop mode. If you win in the drop lottery related to the game round after the guaranteed number of games, and if you win the jackpot in the winning lottery related to the game round this time, a high frequency support mode flag in step S11007 of the fall determination process (FIG. 33) is turned OFF, and step Sl1110 of the hit determination process (FIG. 34) is determined as NO, so the first drop mode flag is not turned ON by step Sl1115 of the hit determination process (FIG. 34). Therefore, in the variable time setting process after the guaranteed number of games, in order to avoid the process of step Sl1403, the process of step Sl1402 for judging the fall flag is provided between steps Sl1401 and Sl1403. On top of that, when it is determined as YES in step Sl1402, the process proceeds to step Sl1405, and it is configured to specify the variation time table for the after-guaranteed number of games/jackpot first drop mode.

In step Sl1401, when it is determined that the result of the winning lottery related to the current game round is not a jackpot winning (Sl1401: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1409, and whether or not the fall lottery related to the current game round has been won. judge. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the fall flag stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step Sl1409 that the fall flag is ON (Sl1409: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1410.

In step S11410, the variable time table for fall is specified from the variable time table group for after the guaranteed number of games stored in the variable time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. FIG. Specifically, the post-guaranteed number of games/fall fluctuating time table, which is (vi), is specified from among (iv) to (vii) described above. The variable time table for falling after guaranteed number of games is, for example, a variable time table for executing a life-and-death battle effect as a battle effect and a defeat effect as a result notification effect (see FIG. 18). After executing step Sl1410, the process advances to step Sl1406 to obtain the fluctuation time information corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS by referring to the fluctuation time table specified in step Sl1410. Thereafter, the flow advances to step Sl1407 to set the acquired variable time information in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. FIG. After that, the variation time setting process after the guaranteed number of games is ended.

In step Sl1409, when it is determined that the falling lottery for the current game round has not been won (Sl1409: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1411 to determine whether or not reach occurs in the current game round. In step Sl1401 above, when the jackpot has not been won in the winning lottery related to the current game round, and in the above step Sl1409, when the fall lottery related to the current game round has not been won, this process (step Sl1411) is executed. Therefore, in step Sl1411, it is determined whether or not the game rounds in which no win is made in the falling lottery and the big win in the winning lottery is a game round in which reach (so-called loss reach) occurs. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the reach occurrence flag stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. proceed to

In step Sl1412, the reach occurrence flag stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is shifted from ON to OFF. After that, the process proceeds to step Sl1413.

In step S11413, the variable time table for the generation of outreach reach is specified from the variable time table group for after the number of guaranteed games stored in the variable time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. Specifically, the variable time table for generation of after-guaranteed number of times of games and loss reach, which is (vii), is specified from among (iv) to (vii) described above. The variable time table for occurrence of guaranteed number of games/losing reach is a variable time table for executing, for example, a dominant battle effect as a battle effect and a draw effect as a result notification effect (see FIG. 23). After executing step Sl1413, the process advances to step Sl1406, and the fluctuation time table specified in step Sl1413 is referred to to obtain fluctuation time information corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS. Thereafter, the flow advances to step Sl1407 to set the acquired variable time information in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. FIG. After that, the variation time setting process after the guaranteed number of games is ended.

On the other hand, in step Sl1411, when it is determined that reach does not occur in this game round (Sl1411: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1414, and the variable time table for reach non-occurrence stored in the variable time table storage area 63h to obtain the fluctuation time corresponding to the current fluctuation type counter CS value. The process of step Sl1414 is the same as the process of step Sl1209 of the variable time setting process (FIG. 35). Thereafter, the flow advances to step Sl1407 to set the acquired variable time information in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. FIG. After that, the variation time setting process after the guaranteed number of games is ended.

<Variation end processing>
Next, the fluctuation end processing will be described. The fluctuation end process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game round control process (FIG. 29: S10604).

FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing fluctuation end processing. In step Sl1501, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the current game round has elapsed. As described above, the variation time is the time from when the symbol row starts to vary until all the symbol rows stop, and is part of the unit game time. Specifically, in step Sl1501, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable time information stored in the variable time counter area (various counter area 64f) of the RAM 64 has become "0". The value of the variable time information is set in the aforementioned variable time setting process (FIG. 35). The value of this set variable time information is decremented by 1 each time timer interrupt processing is started.

If it is determined in step Sl1501 that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (Sl1501: NO), this fluctuation ending process is ended.

In step Sl1501, when it is determined that the variation time has passed (Sl1501: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1502, and the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b correspond to the current game turn. A process for ending the variation of the symbols in the symbol display section is performed. Subsequently, in step Sl1503, the special figure variation displaying flag stored in the special figure variation displaying flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned OFF. After executing step Sl1503, the process proceeds to step Sl1504.

In step Sl1504, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a big win. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any one of the 16R probability variable jackpot flag, the 8R probability variable jackpot flag, and the 8R normal jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is ON. In step Sl1504, none of the above flags is ON, that is, when it is determined that the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is not a big win (Sl1504: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1505.

In step Sl1505, it is determined whether or not the support mode is the high frequency support mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

In step Sl1505, when it is determined that the high-frequency support mode flag is ON (Sl1505: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1506, and it is determined whether or not the value of the guaranteed number-of-games counter PNC exceeds 0. In step Sl1506, when it is determined that the value of the guaranteed number-of-games counter PNC exceeds 0 (Sl1506: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1507, and 1 is subtracted from the value of the guaranteed number-of-games counter PNC. After executing step Sl1507, the process proceeds to step Sl1508. On the other hand, in step Sl1506, when it is determined that the value of the guaranteed number-of-games counter PNC is 0 or less (Sl1506: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1508 without executing step Sl1507.

In step Sl1508, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

In step Sl1508, if it is determined that the high probability mode flag is not ON (Sl1508: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1509, and the number of games to be continuously executed in the high frequency support mode is the guaranteed number of games (for example, 100 times) is reached (=before the guaranteed number of games). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the guaranteed number-of-games counter PNC exceeds zero.

In step Sl1509, when it is determined that the value of the guaranteed number of games counter PNC does not exceed 0 (step Sl1509: NO), that is, when it is determined that it is not before the number of guaranteed games, the process proceeds to step Sl1510, high frequency support. Turn off the mode flag. After executing step Sl1510, the process proceeds to step Sl1511.

In step Sl1511, it is determined whether or not the fall flag stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step Sl1511 that the fall flag is ON (Sl1511: YES), the process advances to step Sl1512 to turn the fall flag OFF. After step Sl1512 is executed, this variable time ending process is ended.

If it is determined that the high probability mode flag is ON in step Sl1508 (Sl1508: YES), or if it is determined that it is before the guaranteed number of games in step Sl1509 (step Sl1509: YES), step Sl1510 to step Sl1512 , and ends the variable time end processing. Also, if it is determined in step Sl1511 that the fall flag is not ON (Sl1511: NO), this variable time ending process is terminated without executing step Sl1512.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl1505 that the high frequency support mode flag is not ON (Sl1505: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1513.

In step Sl1513, it is determined whether or not the falling flag stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step Sl1513 that the fall flag is ON (Sl1513: YES), the process advances to step Sl1514 to turn the fall flag OFF. After step Sl1514 is executed, this variable time ending process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sl1513 that the fall flag is not ON (Sl1513: NO), this variable time ending process is terminated without executing step Sl1514.

In step S11504, it is determined that any one of the 16R probability variable jackpot flag, the 8R probability variable jackpot flag, and the 8R normal jackpot flag is ON, that is, the result of the winning lottery related to the current game round is the jackpot winning. If so (Sl1504: YES), the process advances to step Sl1515 to turn on the open/close execution mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64. FIG. After step Sl1515 is executed, this variable time ending process is ended.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the game state transition processing will be explained. The game state transition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of normal process (FIG. 28: S10507).

FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing game state transition processing. In step Sl1601, it is determined whether or not the ending period flag is ON. The ending period flag is turned ON at the end of the big winning opening opening/closing process period (at the start of the ending period) in the opening/closing execution mode, and turned OFF at the end of the ending period. The ending period is a period for executing the ending effect in the opening/closing execution mode.

If it is determined in step Sl1601 that the ending period flag is not ON (Sl1601: NO), the process advances to step Sl1602 to determine whether or not the opening/closing process period flag is ON. The opening/closing process period flag is turned ON at the timing when the opening period ends in the opening/closing execution mode and the big winning opening opening/closing process period, which is the period during which the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is executed, starts. , is turned off at the timing when the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 36b ends.

If it is determined in step Sl1602 that the open/close processing period flag is not ON (Sl1602: NO), the process advances to step Sl1603 to determine whether or not the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is turned ON at the start of the opening period and turned OFF at the end of the opening period.

If it is determined in step Sl1603 that the opening period flag is not ON (Sl1603: NO), the process advances to step Sl1604 to determine whether the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step Sl1604 that the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON (Sl1604: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1605. On the other hand, in step Sl1604, when it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode flag is OFF (Sl1604: NO), this game state transition processing is terminated as it is.

At step Sl1605, the high probability mode flag is turned off. After that, the process proceeds to step Sl1606. In step Sl1606, the high frequency support mode flag is turned off. After that, the process proceeds to step Sl1607.

In step Sl1607, an opening/closing scenario setting process for setting an opening/closing scenario is executed. The opening/closing scenario defines the pattern of the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 36b in the round game. It is a program in which conditions for shifting the opening/closing door 36b from the open state to the closed state (hereinafter also referred to as "closed conditions") are recorded. The opening/closing scenario is stored in the opening/closing scenario storage area 63i of the ROM 63.

The opening conditions are, for example, as follows.
- The current state of the pachinko machine 10 is the timing for starting each round game in the open/close execution mode.
When one of the above items is established, the opening/closing door 36b shifts from the closed state to the open state.

Closing conditions are, for example, as follows.
- The elapsed time from the start of each round game exceeds a predetermined upper limit duration (for example, 15 seconds).
- The number of game balls entered into the big winning hole 36a after starting each round game exceeds a predetermined upper limit number.
When either one of the above two items is established, the opening/closing door 36b shifts from the open state to the closed state.

After executing step Sl1607, the process advances to step Sl1608 described above.

In step Sl1608, an opening time setting process is executed. The opening time setting process is a process of setting the length of time of the opening period (hereinafter also referred to as opening time) in the open/close execution mode. In this embodiment, the opening time of the same fixed length is set in each opening period. Specifically, "3000" (ie, 6 sec) is set in the third timer counter area T3 that determines the opening time. The third timer counter area T3 is provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM64. After executing step Sl1608, the process proceeds to step Sl1609.

In step Sl1609, an opening command is set. The set opening command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 at step S10503 in the normal processing (FIG. 28). This opening command includes information on the set opening time and the number of rounds of the current open/close execution mode. A sound emission control device 90 determines the contents of performance corresponding to the opening time and the period of opening/closing processing of the big winning opening based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents are executed. After executing step Sl1609, the process advances to step Sl1610 to turn on the opening period flag. After that, the game state transition processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sl1603 that the opening period flag is ON (Sl1603: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1611.

In step Sl1611, it is determined whether or not the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the third timer counter area T3 is "0". If it is determined in step Sl1611 that the opening period has ended (Sl1611: YES), the process advances to step Sl1612 to turn off the opening period flag. After that, the process proceeds to step Sl1613.

In step Sl1613, round display start processing for notifying the type of the current open/close execution mode is executed. Specifically, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 is checked. Based on the confirmed address information, stop result data corresponding to the address information is specified from among the stop result data group stored in the ROM 63, and the content of the number of rounds is determined from the specified stop result data. confirm. After that, the content of the confirmed number of rounds is output to the round display section 39 in the main display section 45 . As a result, the round display section 39 displays the round information related to the output. After executing step Sl1613, the process proceeds to step Sl1614.

In step Sl1614, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned ON. In subsequent step Sl1615, an opening/closing process start command is set. The opening/closing process start command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the opening/closing process period has started. The opening/closing process start command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process ( FIG. 28 : step S10503) of the normal process. After executing step Sl1615, the game state transition processing is terminated.

In step Sl1602, when it is determined that the opening/closing process period flag is ON (Sl1602: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1616 to execute the big winning opening opening/closing process. The special prize opening opening/closing process will be described later. After executing step Sl1616, the process proceeds to step Sl1617.

In step Sl1617, it is determined whether or not the big winning opening opening/closing process has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the big winning opening opening/closing process has ended depending on whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 for counting the number of times the opening/closing door 36b is opened is "0". do. In step Sl1617, when it is determined that the big winning opening opening/closing process has ended (Sl1617: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1618. On the other hand, in step Sl1617, when it is determined that the big winning opening opening/closing process has not ended (Sl1617: NO), the game state transition process is ended as it is.

In step Sl1618, the open/close processing period flag is turned off, and then the process proceeds to step Sl1619.

In step Sl1619, round display end processing is executed. In this process, the display control of the round display portion 39 in the main display portion 45 is terminated so that the round display portion 39 is turned off. After executing step Sl1619, the process proceeds to step Sl1620.

In step Sl1620, an ending time setting process is executed. The ending time setting process is a process of setting the length of time of the ending period (hereinafter also referred to as ending time) in the open/close execution mode. In this embodiment, the ending time of the same constant length is set for each ending period. Specifically, "3000" (ie, 6 sec) is set in the fourth timer counter area T4 that determines the ending time. The fourth timer counter area T4 is provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM64. After executing step Sl1620, the process proceeds to step Sl1621.

In step Sl1621, an ending command is set. This set ending command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step S10503 in the normal processing (FIG. 28). Upon receiving the ending command, the sound emission control device 90 terminates the effect corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode. After executing step Sl1621, the process proceeds to step Sl1622.

In step Sl1622, the ending period flag is turned ON. After that, the game state transition processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sl1601 that the ending period flag is ON (Sl1601: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1623.

In step Sl1623, it is determined whether or not the ending period has ended. Specifically, in the ending time setting process (Sl1620), it is determined whether or not the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0". If it is determined in step Sl1620 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0" (Sl1623: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1624.

At step Sl1624, the ending period flag is turned off. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sl1625 to execute transition processing at the end of the ending period. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes of game rounds after the end of the current ending period. Details of the transition processing at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing step Sl1625, the process advances to step Sl1626 to turn off the opening/closing execution mode flag. After executing step Sl1626, the process proceeds to step Sl1627.

In step Sl1627, it is determined whether or not the total pending number CRN is "0". When the total pending number CRN is "0", it means that the start pending number is "0" for both the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34. FIG. If it is determined in step Sl1627 that the total pending number CRN is "0" (Sl1627: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1628.

In step Sl1628, a customer waiting command is set. The customer waiting command is used to make the sound emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub-side, recognize that no hold information is stored in the hold information storage area 64b at the time when the pattern variation (game cycle) ends. is a command that contains information about This set customer waiting command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S11628 in the normal processing (FIG. 28). After executing step Sl1628, this game round control process is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Sl1627, when it is determined that the total number of reserved cards CRN is not "0" (Sl1627: NO), this game round control process is terminated. Also, in step Sl1623, when it is determined that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is not "0" (Sl1623: NO), this game state transition processing is terminated as it is.

<Opening and closing processing of the grand prize opening>
Next, the big winning opening opening/closing process will be described. The big winning opening opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 39: S11616).

FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing the big winning opening opening/closing process. In step Sl1701, it is determined whether or not the door 36b is open. Specifically, the determination is made based on the drive state of the variable winning drive section 36c. If it is determined in step Sl1701 that the opening/closing door 36b is not open (Sl1701: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1702.

In step Sl1702, it is determined whether or not the conditions for opening the opening/closing door 36b are met. Specifically, the opening/closing scenario set by the opening/closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether or not it is time to open the opening/closing door 36b. If it is determined in step Sl1702 that the conditions for opening the opening/closing door 36b are met (Sl1702: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1703.

In step Sl1703, the opening/closing door 36b is opened. After that, the process proceeds to step Sl1704.

In step Sl1704, a door opening command is set. The opening/closing door open command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the opening/closing door 36b has been opened. The open/close door open command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process ( FIG. 28 : step S10503) of the normal process. After step Sl1704 is executed, the big winning opening opening/closing process is ended.

When it is determined in step Sl1702 that the condition for opening the opening/closing door 36b is not established (Sl1702: NO), the big winning opening opening/closing process is terminated without executing steps Sl1703 and Sl1704.

In step Sl1701, when it is determined that the opening/closing door 36b is open (Sl1701: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1705.

In step Sl1705, it is determined whether or not the conditions for closing the door 36b are met. Specifically, the opening/closing scenario set by the opening/closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether or not it is time to close the opening/closing door 36b. If it is determined in step Sl1705 that the condition for closing the opening/closing door 36b is satisfied (Sl1705: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1706.

At step Sl1706, the opening/closing door 36b is closed. After that, the process proceeds to step Sl1707.

In step Sl1707, an opening/closing door closing command is set. The open/close door closing command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the open/close door 36b is closed. The open/close door closing command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process ( FIG. 28 : step S10503) of the normal process. After executing step Sl1707, the big winning opening opening/closing process is terminated.

When it is determined in step Sl1705 that the closing condition of the opening/closing door 36b is not established (Sl1705: NO), the big winning opening opening/closing process is terminated without executing steps Sl1706 and Sl1707.

<Transition processing at the end of the ending period>
Next, transition processing at the end of the ending period will be described. The transition process at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a game state transition process subroutine (FIG. 39: S11625).

FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing transition processing at the end of the ending period. In step Sl1801, it is determined whether or not the flag corresponding to the probability variable jackpot in the jackpot flag is turned on. That is, it is determined whether or not the 16R probability variable jackpot flag or the 8R probability variable jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is ON.

In step Sl1801, if it is determined that the 16R probability variable jackpot flag or the 8R probability variable jackpot flag of RAM64 is ON (Sl1801: YES), proceed to step Sl1802, one of the 16R probability variable jackpot flag and the 8R probability variable jackpot flag of RAM64 The ON flag is turned OFF. After executing step Sl1802, the process proceeds to step Sl1803.

In step Sl1803, the high-probability mode flag is turned ON, and then the process advances to step Sl1804 to turn the high-frequency support mode flag ON. As a result, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the game state shifts to a game state in which the lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode. After that, the process proceeds to step Sl1805.

In step Sl1805, 100 is set to the guarantee game number counter PNC provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM64. The value set in the guaranteed number-of-games counter PNC is a value indicating the number of games when the number of games is limited and the high-frequency support mode is executed. After that, the process proceeds to step Sl1806.

In step Sl1806, a high-probability mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the lottery mode is the high-probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. . After that, the process proceeds to step Sl1811.

On the other hand, in step Sl1801, when it is determined that the 16R probability variable jackpot flag and the 8R probability variable jackpot flag of RAM64 are not ON (Sl1801: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1807, and the 8R normal jackpot flag of RAM64 is turned OFF. After that, the process proceeds to step Sl1808.

In step Sl1808, after turning on the high-frequency support mode flag, the process proceeds to step Sl1809, and 100 is set in the guaranteed number-of-games counter PNC provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. FIG. After that, the process proceeds to step Sl1810.

In step Sl1810, a low-probability mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the lottery mode is the low-probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. . After that, the process proceeds to step Sl1811.

In step Sl1811, a high-frequency support mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. set. After that, the transition processing at the end of the ending period ends.

<Electronic support processing>
Next, the processing for electric support will be described. The electric service support process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 28: S10508).

FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing processing for electric support. In step Sl1901, it is determined whether or not support is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the supported flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The under-support flag is a flag that is turned ON when the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is to be opened, and is turned OFF when it is to be returned to the closed state. If it is determined in step Sl1901 that the supported flag is not ON (Sl1901: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1902.

In step Sl1902, it is determined whether or not the support winning flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The support winning flag is turned ON when the electric accessary product open lottery for determining whether or not to open the electric accessary product 34a is won in the open state, and is turned OFF when the supporting flag is ON. is. If it is determined in step Sl1902 that the support winning flag is not ON (Sl1902: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1903.

In step Sl1903, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, every 2 msec.

If it is determined in step Sl1903 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sl1903: NO), the electronic support process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sl1903: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1904.

In step S11904, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the variable display of symbols in the general pattern unit 38 . If it is determined in step Sl1904 that it is time to end the variable display (Sl1904: YES), the process advances to step Sl1905 to set the off display and then ends the electronic support process. By setting the deviation display, the variable display of the symbols in the general pattern unit 38 is terminated while the deviation display is stopped. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl1904 that it is not the end timing of the variable display (Sl1904: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1906.

In step Sl1906, it is determined whether or not the value of the reserved accessory number SN is greater than "0". In step Sl1906, when it is determined that the value of the reserved accessory number SN is "0" (Sl1906: NO), the electronic support process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sl1906 that the value of the reserved accessory number SN is greater than "0" (Sl1906: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1907.

In step Sl1907, it is determined whether or not the open/close execution mode is in progress, and then the process advances to step Sl1908 to determine whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect. If it is not the opening/closing execution mode at step Sl1907 (Sl1907: NO) and if it is the high-frequency support mode at step Sl1908 (Sl1908: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1909 to perform the electric accessory opening lottery. Specifically, the value stored in the electric role holding area 64c is shifted, and when the value of the electric role item opening counter C5 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric role item opening lottery be elected. Also, at the same time as the electric accessory open lottery, the second timer counter area T2 is set to "750" (that is, 1.5 sec). The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started. After that, the process proceeds to step Sl1910.

In step Sl1910, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory open lottery in step Sl1909 is support winning. In step Sl1910, when it is determined that the result of the electric accessory open lottery is support winning (Sl1910: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1911, the support winning flag is turned ON, and provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64 "3" is set in the second round counter area RC2. The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the electric accessory 34a is released. After that, the electronic support processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Sl1910, when it is determined that the result of the electric accessory open lottery is not support winning (Sl1910: NO), the process for electric role support ends without executing the process of step Sl1911.

If it is determined in step Sl1907 that it is in the opening/closing execution mode (Sl1907: YES), or if it is determined in step Sl1908 that it is not in the high-frequency support mode (Sl1908: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1912, and the electric accessory open lottery I do. Specifically, the value stored in the electric role holding area 64c is shifted, and when the value of the electric role item opening counter C5 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric role item opening lottery be elected. At the same time as the electric accessory open lottery, the second timer counter area T2 is set to "14750" (that is, 29.5 sec). After that, the process proceeds to step Sl1913.

In step Sl1913, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory open lottery in step Sl1912 is support winning. In step Sl1913, if it is determined that the support has not been won (Sl1913: NO), the electronic support process is terminated. On the other hand, in step Sl1913, when it is determined that the support winning is determined (Sl1913: YES), the process advances to step Sl1914 to turn on the support winning flag and set "1" to the second round counter area RC2. , terminates the electronic support process.

If it is determined in step Sl1902 that the support win flag is ON (Sl1902: YES), the process advances to step Sl1915 to determine whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38. In step Sl1915, when it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sl1915: NO), since the pattern is being changed and displayed in the normal figure unit 38, the main electric role support process is performed as it is. exit. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl1915 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sl1915: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1916.

In step Sl1916, a win display is set. As a result, the variation display of the pattern in the normal pattern unit 38 is terminated while the win display is stopped. After that, the process advances to step S11917 to turn on the supporting flag and turn off the support winning flag. After that, the electronic support process is terminated.

In step Sl1901, when it is determined that the supporting flag is ON (Sl1901: YES), the process advances to step Sl1918 to execute electric opening/closing control processing for controlling opening/closing of the electric accessory 34a. After that, the electronic support process is terminated.

<Electrical opening/closing control processing>
Next, the electrical opening/closing control process will be described. The electric power opening/closing control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control unit 60 as a subroutine of the electric power support process (FIG. 42: S11918).

FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing the electrical opening/closing control process. In step Sl2001, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open. Whether or not the electric accessory 34a is being opened is determined by whether or not the electric accessory drive unit 34b is in a driving state. When it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is open (Sl2001: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl2002.

In step Sl2002, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the open duration time of the electric accessory 34a. If it is determined in step Sl2002 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sl2002: NO), the electrical opening/closing control process is terminated. In other words, if the opening continuation time of the electric accessory 34a has not ended, the present electric opening/closing control process is terminated.

In step Sl2002, when it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sl2002: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl2003 to perform closing processing for controlling the electric accessory 34a to the closed state, "250" (that is, 0.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as a means for measuring the open duration time of the electric accessory 34a is "0", the electric accessory 34a is closed, and the second timer counter area T2 is electrically operated this time. It is used as a parameter for measuring the closed duration time of the accessory 34a, and "250" is set in the second timer counter area T2. After executing step Sl2003, the process proceeds to step Sl2004.

In step Sl2004, after subtracting 1 from the value of the second round counter area RC2, the flow advances to step Sl2005 to determine whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0". If it is determined in step Sl2005 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (Sl2005: NO), the electric opening/closing control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl2005 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0" (Sl2005: YES), the process advances to step Sl2006 to turn off the supported flag. After that, the electrical switching control process is terminated.

In step Sl2001, when it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is not open (Sl2001: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl2007 to determine whether the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closed duration time of the electric accessory 34a. If it is determined in step Sl2007 that the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sl2007: NO), the electrical opening/closing control process is terminated. On the other hand, in step Sl2007, when it is determined that the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sl2007: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl2008, and an opening process for controlling the electric accessary product 34a to the open state is executed. . After that, the process proceeds to step Sl2009.

In step Sl2009, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. If it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress (Sl2009: NO), the process advances to step Sl2010 to determine whether the high-frequency support mode is in effect. do.

If it is determined in step Sl2010 that the high frequency support mode is in effect (Sl2010: YES), the process advances to step Sl2011 to set "800" (that is, 1.6 sec) in the second timer counter area T2. After that, the electrical switching control process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl2009 that the mode is the open/close execution mode (Sl2009: YES), or if it is determined that the mode is not the high-frequency support mode in step Sl2010 (Sl2010: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl2012. "100" (that is, 0.2 sec) is set in the timer counter area T2. After that, the electrical switching control process is terminated.

<<1-6>> Various processes executed in the sound emission control device and the display control device:
Next, a specific example of control executed in the audio emission control device and the display control device will be described. The processing executed in the sound emission control device 90 will be described first, and then the processing executed in the display control device 100 will be described.

<Various processing executed in the sound emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, timer interrupt processing executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 will be described.

FIG. 44 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the sound and light side MPU 92 . Timer interrupt processing is repeatedly executed at a relatively short period (for example, 2 msec). Processing of each step executed in timer interrupt processing will be described below.

In step Sl2101, command storage processing is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing the received command in the sound and light side RAM 94 when a command is received from the main side MPU 62 . The sound and light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer for enabling storage and reading of commands received from the main side MPU 62, and the commands received from the main side MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer. , are read out sequentially according to the order in which they are stored. After executing step Sl2101, the process proceeds to step Sl2102.

In step Sl2102, a game cycle effect process is executed. In the game round effect processing, a process related to the effect to be executed in the game round from the start of the symbol variation to the stop is performed. Details of the game round effect processing will be described later. After executing step Sl2102, the process proceeds to step Sl2103.

In step Sl2103, processing for opening/closing execution mode effect is executed. In the opening/closing execution mode effect processing, processing related to effects during the opening period, effects during the big winning opening opening/closing process period, and effects during the ending period is performed. After executing step Sl2103, the process proceeds to step Sl2104.

In step Sl2104, other processing is executed. Other processing includes processing for displaying a moving image showing a game state on the symbol display device 41, processing for displaying a demonstration moving image on the symbol display device 41, and the like. Specifically, the background animation determined according to the game state determination value PN included in the game state command received from the main MPU 62 is displayed on the pattern display device 41 as the animation showing the game state. For example, a background video indicating that the high-frequency support mode is continuing, a background video indicating that the high-frequency support mode has ended, and a background video indicating that the high-probability mode is continuing are displayed. After executing step Sl2104, the process proceeds to step Sl2105.

In step Sl2105, light emission control processing for controlling light emission of various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, light emission control of various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read out in each of the effect processes described above. After executing step Sl2105, the process proceeds to step Sl2106.

At step Sl2106, an audio output control process for controlling the audio output of the speaker 46 is executed. In the audio output control process, audio output control of the speaker 46 is performed based on the audio data read out in the BGM process and each effect process. After executing step Sl2106, the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

<Processing for game round production>
Next, the game cycle effect processing will be described. The game round effect processing is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a timer interrupt processing subroutine (FIG. 44: S12102).

FIG. 45 is a flow chart showing processing for game round effect. In step Sl2201, a game cycle effect setting process is executed. The game round effect setting process is a process executed when a variation command and a type command are received from the main MPU 62, and is a process of setting an effect to be executed in the game round when the game round is started. be. Details of the game round effect setting process will be described later. After executing step Sl2201, the process proceeds to step Sl2202.

In step Sl2202, a process for executing a game round effect is executed. The game round effect execution process is a process executed when the game round effect (notice effect and ready-to-win effect) is set to be executed in the game round effect setting process. The details of the game round effect execution process will be described later. After step Sl2202 is executed, the processing for this game round effect is terminated.

<Game round effect setting processing>
Next, the game round effect setting process will be described. The game round effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the game round effect process (FIG. 45: S12201).

FIG. 46 is a flow chart showing game round effect setting processing. In step Sl2301, it is determined whether or not a variation command and a type command have been received. In step Sl2301, when it is determined that the command for variation and the type command have not been received (Sl2301: NO), this game round effect setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl2301 that the command for variation and the type command have been received (Sl2301: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl2302.

In step Sl2302, the command for variation received this time is read, and from the command, information on the presence or absence of a jackpot, the type of jackpot, the presence or absence of a drop winning, the presence or absence of reach occurrence, and the variation time are read. Then, the read information is stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 . After that, the process proceeds to step Sl2303.

In step Sl2303, effect pattern setting processing is executed. The effect pattern setting process is the process of determining and setting the effect pattern (battle effect, result announcement effect, advance notice effect, ready-to-win effect and execution timing) to be executed in the current game round based on the effect pattern table. be. Details of the effect pattern setting process will be described later. After executing step Sl2303, the process proceeds to step Sl2304.

In step Sl2304, stop symbol setting processing is executed. In the stop symbol setting process, when the result of the jackpot lottery of the current game round is the 16R probability variable jackpot, the 8R probability variable jackpot, or the 8R normal jackpot, the same pattern is displayed on the activated line L of the pattern display device 41. The information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination of is established is set as the information of the current stop symbol. Specifically, when the result of the jackpot lottery of the game round this time is the 16R probability variable jackpot or the 8R probability variable jackpot, the same combination of odd-numbered symbols can be selected as the combination of the same symbols, and the same Even symbol combinations may be selected. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the selection rate is the same for the combination of the same odd-numbered symbols and the combination of the same even-numbered symbols. A configuration in which the ratio is high may be adopted, and the latter may be configured to have a higher selection ratio than the former. Also, the combination of "7" symbols is selected only in the case of a 16R probability variable jackpot. In addition, when the result of the jackpot lottery of the current game round is the 8R normal jackpot, the same combination of even-numbered symbols is selected as the same combination of symbols.

If the result of the jackpot lottery of the current game round is a result of losing, it is determined whether or not the ready-to-win is generated from the content of the command for variation. When it is determined that it corresponds to the occurrence of ready-to-win, it corresponds to the stop result that the combination of the same symbols on the effective line L does not materialize and the combination of the ready-to-win symbols on the effective line L does. information is determined as the information of the result of this stop. On the other hand, when it is determined that it does not correspond to the occurrence of ready-to-win, the result is a stop result in which the combination of the same symbols on the effective line L does not materialize and the combination of the ready-to-win symbols on the effective line L does not materialize. The corresponding information is set as the information of the current stop symbol. After executing step Sl2304, the process proceeds to step Sl2305.

In step Sl2305, a process for setting a variation display pattern for the current game round is executed. In this process, information on the variation time of the current game round is specified from the content of the variation command received this time, and the combination of the information on the variation time and the information on the stop symbol set in step Sl2304 is performed. Select the corresponding variable display pattern. When selecting a variation display pattern, the variation display pattern table stored in the variation display pattern table storage area 93b of the sound and light side ROM 93 is referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step Sl2306.

In step Sl2306, the information of the effect pattern, the stop pattern, and the variable display pattern set in the current game round is set in the effect command. After that, the process advances to step S12307 to transmit the effect command to the display side MPU 102 . The display-side MPU 102 executes processing for displaying the effect contents corresponding to the received effect command on the pattern display device 41 . After executing step Sl2307, the process advances to step Sl2308 to execute update processing at the start of fluctuation. The update process at the start of fluctuation is a process for updating the reserved display in the first reserved display area Ds1 or the second reserved display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41. FIG. After executing step Sl2308, this game round effect setting process is terminated.

<Production pattern setting process>
Next, the effect pattern setting process will be described. The effect pattern setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 46: S12303) of the game cycle effect setting process.

FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing effect pattern setting processing. In step Sl2401, a production pattern random number acquisition process is executed. In the effect pattern random number acquisition process, the effect pattern random number RN is acquired from the lottery counter area 94c (FIG. 11) of the sound/light side RAM 94. FIG. After that, the process proceeds to step Sl2402.

In step Sl2402, it is determined whether or not a high accuracy/high support command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step Sl2402 that the high accuracy/high support command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (Sl2402: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl2403.

The processing from step Sl2403 to step Sl2408 is for executing a big win effect, a ready-to-win effect, and a losing effect in a game cycle in a state other than the high accuracy/high support state.

In step S12403, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a big win. Specifically, from the information on the presence or absence of the big win stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 by step S12302 of the game round effect setting process (FIG. 46), it is determined whether the result of the winning lottery is the big win or not. . In step Sl2302, when it is determined that the result of the winning lottery is the jackpot winning (Sl2403: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl2404.

In step Sl2404, the effect pattern table for the jackpot stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 11) of the sound and light side ROM 93 is referred to, and the fluctuation time read in step Sl2302 (FIG. 46) and the current A performance pattern for a big win corresponding to the value of the random number RN for performance pattern is acquired. The variable time read by step Sl2302 (FIG. 46) when executing step Sl2404 is the jackpot obtained by executing steps Sl1204 and Sl1205 in the variable time setting process (FIG. 35) executed by the main MPU 62. is the variable time for Therefore, the effect pattern acquired in step Sl2404 corresponds to the variation time for the big win obtained by the main side MPU 62 . After executing step Sl2404, the process proceeds to step Sl2405.

In step Sl2405, the effect pattern acquired in step Sl2404 is set as the effect pattern to be executed in the current game cycle. After that, the main effect pattern setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Sl2403, when it is determined that the result of the winning lottery related to the current game round is not the jackpot winning (Sl2403: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl2406 to determine whether reach occurs in the current game round. judge. Specifically, it is determined whether or not reach occurs from the information on the presence or absence of reach occurrence stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 in step S12302 of the game cycle effect setting process (FIG. 46). In step Sl2406, when it is determined that reach occurs in the current game round (Sl2406: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl2407.

In step Sl2407, the effect pattern table for reach generation stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 11) of the sound and light side ROM 93 is referred to, and the fluctuation time read out in step Sl2302 (FIG. 46) and the current obtains an effect pattern for generating a reach corresponding to the value of the random number RN for the effect pattern. The variable time read by step Sl2302 (FIG. 46) when executing step Sl2407 is the reach obtained by executing steps Sl1208 and Sl1205 in the variable time setting process (FIG. 35) executed by the main MPU 62. Variable time for generation. Therefore, the production pattern acquired in step Sl2407 corresponds to the fluctuation time for reach generation obtained by the main MPU 62. FIG. After execution of step Sl2407, it advances to step Sl2405 explained previously, and sets the production|presentation pattern acquired by step Sl2407 as a production|presentation pattern performed in this game round. After that, the main effect pattern setting process is terminated.

In step Sl2406, when it is determined that reach does not occur in this game round (Sl2406: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl2408.

In step Sl2408, the effect pattern table for reach non-occurrence stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 11) of the sound and light side ROM 93 is referred to, and the fluctuation time read in step Sl2302 (FIG. 46), A production pattern for non-generating reach corresponding to the value of the random number RN for this production pattern is acquired. The variable time read in step Sl2302 (FIG. 46) when executing step Sl2408 is the reach obtained by executing steps Sl1209 and Sl1205 in the variable time setting process (FIG. 35) executed by the main MPU 62. Variable time for non-generation. Therefore, the effect pattern acquired in step Sl2407 corresponds to the fluctuation time for reach non-occurrence obtained by the main side MPU 62 . After execution of step Sl2408, it advances to step Sl2405 explained previously, and sets the production|presentation pattern acquired by step Sl2408 as a production|presentation pattern performed in this game round. After that, the main effect pattern setting process is terminated.

In step Sl2402, when it is determined that the high accuracy/high support command is received from the main side MPU 62 (Sl2402: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl2409.

In steps Sl2409 to Sl2411, a process of setting an effect pattern is executed in a high-accuracy/high-support state in which the lottery mode is the high-probability mode and the support mode is the high-frequency support mode.

In step S12409, it is determined whether or not a command after the number of guaranteed games has been received from the main side MPU 62 . In step Sl2409, when it is determined that the command after the guaranteed number of games has not been received from the main side MPU 62 (Sl2409: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl2410.

In step Sl2410, the effect pattern setting process before the guaranteed number of games is executed. The effect pattern setting process before the guaranteed number of games will be described later. After that, the main effect pattern setting process is terminated.

In step Sl2409, if it is determined that the command after the number of games has been received from the main MPU 62 (step Sl2409: YES), that is, if it is determined that the number of games has been guaranteed, the process proceeds to step Sl2411.

In step Sl2411, the effect pattern setting process after the guaranteed number of games is executed. The effect pattern setting process after the guaranteed number of games will be described later. After that, the main effect pattern setting process is terminated.

<Production pattern setting processing before the guaranteed number of games>
Next, the effect pattern setting process before the guaranteed number of games will be described. The effect pattern setting process before the guaranteed number of games is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the effect pattern setting process (FIG. 47: S12410).

FIG. 48 is a flow chart showing the effect pattern setting process before the guaranteed number of games. In step Sl2501, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a big winning. Specifically, from the information on the presence or absence of the big win stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 by step S12302 of the game round effect setting process (FIG. 46), it is determined whether the result of the winning lottery is the big win or not. . In step Sl2501, when it is determined that the result of the winning lottery is the jackpot winning (Sl2501: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl2502.

In step S12502, the effect pattern table corresponding to the big win is specified from the effect pattern table group for before the guaranteed number of games stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 11) of the ROM 93 on the sound and light side. In the production pattern table group for before the guaranteed number of games,
(I) A production pattern table for executing a normal battle production as a battle production and a victory production as a result notification production (hereinafter referred to as a production pattern table for normal battle production and victory production),
(II) A production pattern table for executing a normal battle production as a battle production and a defeat production as a result notification production (hereinafter referred to as a production pattern table for normal battle production/defeat production),
(III) A production pattern table for executing a normal battle production as a battle production and a draw production as a result notification production (hereinafter referred to as a production pattern table for normal battle production and draw production),
is provided. In step S12502, the effect pattern table for normal battle effect/victory effect, which is (I), is specified from among (I) to (III). After executing step Sl2502, the process proceeds to step Sl2503.

In step Sl2503, with reference to the effect pattern table for the normal battle effect/victory effect specified in step Sl2502, the variation time read out in step Sl2302 (FIG. 46) and step Sl2401 of the effect pattern setting process (FIG. 47) A production pattern corresponding to the value of the obtained random number RN for the production pattern of this time is obtained. The variable time read by step Sl2302 (FIG. 46) when executing step Sl2503 is obtained by executing steps Sl1302 to Sl1304 in the variable time setting process (FIG. 36) before the guaranteed number of games executed by the main MPU 62. It is the fluctuation time for the jackpot before the guaranteed number of games obtained. Therefore, the effect pattern acquired in step S12503 corresponds to the fluctuation time for the big win before the guaranteed number of games obtained by the main side MPU 62 . After execution of step Sl2503, it progresses to step Sl2504 and sets the production|presentation pattern acquired by step Sl2503.

By executing the processing from step S12501 to step S12504 described above, the production in FIG. It can be carried out. After execution of step Sl2504, the effect pattern setting process before the guaranteed number of games is ended.

In step Sl2501, when it is determined that the result of the winning lottery related to the current game round is not the jackpot winning (Sl2501: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl2505, and the result of the falling lottery related to the current game round is winning. Determine whether or not Specifically, it is determined whether or not the result of the falling lottery is winning from the information on the presence or absence of falling winning stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 by step S12302 of the game spin effect setting process (FIG. 46). . In step Sl2505, when it is determined that the result of the fall lottery is winning (Sl2505: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl2506.

At step S12506, the effect pattern table corresponding to the drop winning is specified from the effect pattern table group for before the guaranteed number of games stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a of the ROM 93 on the sound and light side. Specifically, the effect pattern table (II) for normal battle effect/defeat effect is specified from among (I) to (III) described above. After executing step Sl2506, the process proceeds to step Sl2507.

In step Sl2507, with reference to the effect pattern table for normal battle effect/defeat effect specified in step Sl2506, the variation time read out in step Sl2302 (FIG. 46) and step Sl2401 of the effect pattern setting process (FIG. 47) A production pattern corresponding to the value of the obtained random number RN for the production pattern of this time is obtained. The variable time read by step Sl2302 (FIG. 46) when executing step Sl2507 is the variable time setting process (FIG. 36) before the guaranteed number of games executed by the main MPU 62. This is the variation time for falling before the guaranteed number of games obtained by executing S11304. Therefore, the effect pattern acquired in step S12507 corresponds to the variation time for falling before the guaranteed number of games obtained by the main MPU 62 . After execution of step Sl2507, it progresses to step Sl2504 demonstrated previously, and sets the production|presentation pattern acquired by step Sl2507. After that, the production pattern setting process before the guaranteed number of games is ended.

By executing the processing of steps Sl2501, Sx2505, Sx2506, Sx2507, and Sx2504 described above, the effects in FIG. You can perform a defeat performance.

In step Sl2505, when it is determined that the result of the fall lottery related to the current game round is not winning (Sl2505: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl2508, and it is determined whether or not reach occurs in the current game round. . Specifically, it is determined whether or not reach occurs from the information on the presence or absence of reach occurrence stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 in step S12302 of the game cycle effect setting process (FIG. 46). In step Sl2508, when it is determined that reach occurs in the current game round (Sl2508: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl2509.

In step Sl2509, the effect pattern table corresponding to the out-reach is specified from the effect pattern table group for before the guaranteed number of games stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a of the sound and light side ROM 93. Specifically, the effect pattern table for normal battle effect/tie effect, which is (III), is specified from among (I) to (III) described above. After executing step Sl2509, the process proceeds to step Sl2510.

In step Sl2510, the effect pattern table for normal battle effect/tie effect specified in step Sl2509 is referred to, and the variation time read out in step Sl2302 (FIG. 46) and the effect pattern setting process (FIG. 47) in step Sl2401 A production pattern corresponding to the value of the obtained random number RN for the production pattern of this time is acquired. The variable time read by step Sl2302 (FIG. 46) when executing step Sl2510 is set in step Sl1309, step Sl1303, and step Sl1309, step Sl1303, and step Sl1303 in the variable time setting process (FIG. 36) before the guaranteed number of games executed by the main MPU 62. It is the fluctuation time for the occurrence of the loss reach before the guaranteed number of games obtained by executing S11304. Therefore, the effect pattern acquired in step S12510 corresponds to the variation time for the occurrence of the loss reach before the guaranteed number of games obtained by the main side MPU 62 . After execution of step Sl2510, the process advances to step Sl2504 described above to set the effect pattern acquired in step Sl2510. After that, the production pattern setting process before the guaranteed number of games is ended.

By executing the processing of steps S12501, Sx2505, Sx2508 to Sx2510, and Sx2504 described above, the effects in FIG. It is possible to perform a draw performance.

In step Sl2508, when it is determined that reach does not occur in this game cycle (Sl2508: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl2511.

In step Sl2511, the effect pattern table for reach non-occurrence stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 11) of the sound and light side ROM 93 is referred to, and the fluctuation time read out in step Sl2302 (FIG. 46), A production pattern for non-generating reach corresponding to the value of the random number RN for this production pattern is acquired. The variable time read by step Sl2302 (FIG. 46) when executing step Sl2511 is obtained by executing steps Sl1310 and Sl1304 in the variable time setting process (FIG. 36) before the guaranteed number of games executed by the main MPU 62. It is the variable time for reach non-occurrence obtained by Therefore, the effect pattern acquired in step Sl2511 corresponds to the fluctuation time for reach non-occurrence obtained by the main side MPU 62 . After execution of step Sl2511, it progresses to step Sl2504 demonstrated previously and sets the production|presentation pattern acquired by step Sl2511. After that, the production pattern setting process before the guaranteed number of games is ended.

<Production pattern setting processing after the guaranteed number of games played>
Next, the effect pattern setting process after the guaranteed number of games will be described. The effect pattern setting process after the guaranteed number of games is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the effect pattern setting process (FIG. 47: S12411).

FIG. 49 is a flow chart showing the effect pattern setting process after the guaranteed number of games. In step Sl2601, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a big winning. Specifically, from the information on the presence or absence of the big win stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 by step S12302 of the game round effect setting process (FIG. 46), it is determined whether the result of the winning lottery is the big win or not. . In step Sl2601, when it is determined that the result of the winning lottery is the jackpot winning (Sl2601: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl2602.

In step Sl2602, it is determined whether or not the result of the fall lottery for the current game round is winning. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the result of the falling lottery is winning from the information on the presence or absence of falling winning stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 by step S12302 of the game spin effect setting process (FIG. 46). . In step Sl2602, when it is determined that the fall lottery result is not winning (Sl2602: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl2603.

In step S12603, it is determined whether or not a first drop mode command has been received from the main MPU 62 . If it is determined in step Sl2603 that the first-run mode command has been received from the main MPU 62 (Sl2603: YES), the result of the mode selection lottery is the first-run mode, and the process proceeds to step Sl2604.

At step S12604, the effect pattern table corresponding to the winning of the jackpot and the last-drop mode is specified from the effect pattern table group for after the guaranteed number of games stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 11) of the ROM 93 on the sound and light side. do. In the production pattern table group for after the guaranteed number of games,
(IV) A production pattern table for executing a life-and-death battle production as a battle production and a victory production as a result notification production (hereinafter referred to as a production pattern table for life-and-death battle production/victory production),
(V) a production pattern table for executing a life-and-death battle production as a battle production and a defeat production as a result notification production (hereinafter referred to as a production pattern table for life-and-death battle production/defeat production);
(VI) A production pattern table for executing a superiority battle production as a battle production and a victory production as a result announcement production (hereinafter referred to as a production pattern table for superiority battle production/victory production),
(VII) A production pattern table for executing a superiority battle production as a battle production and a draw production as a result notification production (hereinafter referred to as a production pattern table for superiority battle production/tie production),
is provided. In step Sl2604, the effect pattern table for life-or-death battle effect/victory effect, which is (IV), is specified from among (IV) to (VII). After executing step Sl2604, the process proceeds to step Sl2605.

In step Sl2605, with reference to the effect pattern table for the life-or-death battle effect/victory effect specified in step Sl2604, the variation time read in step Sl2302 (FIG. 46) and step Sl2401 of the effect pattern setting process (FIG. 47) A production pattern corresponding to the value of the obtained random number RN for the production pattern of this time is acquired. The variable time read by step Sl2302 (FIG. 46) when executing step Sl2605 is obtained by executing steps Sl1405 to Sl1407 in the variable time setting process (FIG. 37) after the guaranteed number of games executed by the main MPU 62. It is the variable time for the jackpot first drop mode after the guaranteed number of games obtained. Therefore, the production pattern acquired in step S12605 corresponds to the variation time for the guaranteed game count/jackpot first drop mode obtained by the main MPU 62 . After executing step Sl2605, the process advances to step Sl2606 to set the effect pattern acquired in step Sl2605.

By executing the processing from step Sl2601 to step Sl2606 described above, the effects in FIG. It is possible to perform the victory production of After execution of step Sl2606, the effect pattern setting process after the guaranteed number of games is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl2603 that the first drop mode command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (Sl2603: NO), the result of the mode selection lottery is the last drop mode, and the process proceeds to step Sl2607.

In step S12607, the effect pattern table corresponding to the jackpot win and the falling mode win is specified from the effect pattern table group for after the guaranteed number of games stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 11) of the sound and light side ROM 93. do. Specifically, the effect pattern table for superiority battle effect/victory effect, which is (VI), is specified from among (IV) to (VII) described above. After executing step Sl2607, the process proceeds to step Sl2608.

In step Sl2608, with reference to the effect pattern table for superiority battle effect/victory effect specified in step Sl2605, the variation time read out in step Sl2302 (FIG. 46) and step Sl2401 of the effect pattern setting process (FIG. 47) A production pattern corresponding to the value of the obtained random number RN for the production pattern of this time is acquired. The variable time read by step Sl2302 (FIG. 46) when executing step Sl2608 is set in the variable time setting process (FIG. 37) after the guaranteed number of games executed by the main MPU 62. It is the fluctuation time for the drop mode after the guaranteed number of games obtained by executing S11407. Therefore, the effect pattern acquired in step S12608 corresponds to the fluctuation time for the drop mode after the guaranteed number of games obtained by the main MPU 62 and after the jackpot. After executing step Sl2608, the process advances to step Sl2606 to set the effect pattern acquired in step Sl2608. After that, the effect pattern setting process after the guaranteed number of games is ended.

If it is determined in step Sl2602 that the result of the drop lottery is a win (Sl2602: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl2604 without executing step Sl2603. identify.

By executing the processing of steps S12601 to Sx2603, Sx2607, Sx2608, and Sx2606 described above, the effects in FIG. A victory effect can be performed as a result notification effect.

In step Sl2601, when it is determined that the result of the winning lottery related to the current game round is not the jackpot winning (Sl2601: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl2609, and the result of the falling lottery related to the current game round is winning. Determine whether or not Specifically, it is determined whether or not the result of the falling lottery is winning from the information on the presence or absence of falling winning stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 by step S12302 of the game spin effect setting process (FIG. 46). . In step Sl2609, when it is determined that the fall lottery results in winning (Sl2609: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl2610.

At step S12610, the effect pattern table corresponding to the falling winning is specified from the effect pattern table group for after the guaranteed number of games stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a of the sound and light side ROM 93. Specifically, the production pattern table for the life-and-death battle production/defeat production, which is (V), is specified from among the above-described (IV) to (VII). After executing step Sl2610, the process proceeds to step Sl2611.

In step Sl2611, with reference to the effect pattern table for the life-or-death battle effect/defeat effect specified in step Sl2610, the variation time read out in step Sl2302 (FIG. 46) and step Sl2401 of the effect pattern setting process (FIG. 47) A production pattern corresponding to the value of the obtained random number RN for the production pattern of this time is acquired. The variable time read in step Sl2302 (FIG. 46) when executing step Sl2611 is set in the variable time setting process (FIG. 37) after the guaranteed number of games executed by the main MPU 62. This is the fluctuation time for falling after the guaranteed number of games obtained by executing S11407. Therefore, the effect pattern acquired in step S126011 corresponds to the fluctuation time for falling after the guaranteed number of games obtained by the main MPU 62 . After execution of step Sl2611, it progresses to step Sl2606 and sets the production|presentation pattern acquired by step Sl2611. After that, the effect pattern setting process after the guaranteed number of games is ended.

By executing the processing of steps Sl2601, Sx2609 to step Sl2611, Sx2606 described above, the effects in FIG. You can perform directing.

In step Sl2609, when it is determined that the result of the fall lottery related to the current game round is not winning (Sl2609: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl2612, and it is determined whether or not reach occurs in the current game round. . Specifically, it is determined whether or not reach occurs from the information on the presence or absence of reach occurrence stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 in step S12302 of the game cycle effect setting process (FIG. 46). In step Sl2612, when it is determined that reach occurs in the current game round (Sl2612: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl2613.

In step Sl2613, the effect pattern table corresponding to the occurrence of the out-reach is specified from the effect pattern table group for after the guaranteed number of games stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a of the sound and light side ROM 93. Specifically, the effect pattern table for superior battle effect/tie effect, which is (VII), is specified from among (IV) to (VII) described above. After executing step Sl2613, the process proceeds to step Sl2614.

In step Sl2614, the effect pattern table for superior battle effect/tie effect specified in step Sl2613 is referred to, and the variation time read out in step Sl2302 (FIG. 46) and the effect pattern setting process (FIG. 47) in step Sl2401 A production pattern corresponding to the value of the obtained random number RN for the production pattern of this time is acquired. The variable time read by step Sl2302 (FIG. 46) when executing step Sl2614 is set in the variable time setting process (FIG. 37) after the guaranteed number of games executed by the main MPU 62. After the guaranteed number of games obtained by executing Sl1407, it is the fluctuation time for the occurrence of the loss reach. Therefore, the effect pattern acquired in step S12614 corresponds to the fluctuation time for occurrence of the after-guaranteed number of games and loss reach obtained by the main side MPU 62 . After execution of step Sl2614, it progresses to step Sl2606 and sets the production|presentation pattern acquired by step Sl2614. After that, the effect pattern setting process after the guaranteed number of games is ended.

By executing the processing of steps S12601, Sx2609, Sx2612 to Sx2614, and Sx2606 described above, the effects in FIG. It is possible to perform a draw performance.

In step Sl2612, when it is determined that reach does not occur in this game round (Sl2612: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl2615.

In step Sl2615, the effect pattern table for reach non-occurrence stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 11) of the sound and light side ROM 93 is referred to, and the fluctuation time read out in step Sl2302 (FIG. 46), A production pattern for non-generating reach corresponding to the value of the random number RN for this production pattern is acquired. The variable time read by step Sl2302 (FIG. 46) when executing step Sl2615 is obtained by executing steps Sl1414 and Sl1407 in the variable time setting process (FIG. 37) after the guaranteed number of games executed by the main MPU 62. It is the variable time for reach non-occurrence obtained by Therefore, the effect pattern acquired in step Sl2615 corresponds to the fluctuation time for reach non-occurrence obtained by the main MPU 62 . After execution of step Sl2615, it progresses to step Sl2606 demonstrated previously and sets the production|presentation pattern acquired by step Sl2615. After that, the effect pattern setting process after the guaranteed number of games is ended.

<Processing for execution of game round effect>
Next, the processing for executing the game round effect will be described. The game round effect execution process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the game round effect process (FIG. 45: S12202).

FIG. 50 is a flow chart showing processing for executing a game cycle effect. In step Sl2701, it is determined whether or not there is an effect pattern set in the above-described game round effect setting process (FIG. 46). In step Sl2701, when it is determined that the set effect pattern does not exist (Sl2701: NO), the process for executing this game round effect is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in step Sl2701, when it is determined that the set effect pattern exists (Sl2701: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl2702.

In step Sl2702, the set effect pattern is referred to, and then the process proceeds to step Sl2703 to determine whether or not it is time to start the game round effect. The game round effect referred to here is an effect based on various effect patterns set in the effect pattern setting process (FIG. 47). These production patterns store the content and timing of the production to be executed in the game round.

In step Sl2703, if it is determined that it is not time to start the game round effect (Sl2703: NO), the process for executing this game round effect is terminated. On the other hand, in step Sl2703, when it is determined that it is time to start the game round effect (Sl2703: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl2704.

In step Sl2704, a moving image display start command corresponding to the content of the game round effect set in the effect pattern is transmitted to the display control device 100. FIG. After that, the process proceeds to step Sl2705, and light emission control processing of various lamps 47 corresponding to the content of the game round effect set in the effect pattern is started. After that, the process advances to step S12706 to cause a sound output LSI (not shown) to start reproducing audio data corresponding to the content of the advance notice effect set in the effect pattern. After executing step Sl2706, the process for executing this game round effect is terminated.

<Various processing executed in the display control device>
Next, processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

The processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 mainly includes a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on until the power is turned off, and a main processing that is executed when a command is received from the sound emission control device 90. There are command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing executed when a V interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal that is transmitted from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when rendering processing of an image for one frame is completed.

The MPU 102 executes main processing after power-on, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of commands and detection of V interrupt signals. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command interrupt processing is preferentially executed. Therefore, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound emission control device 90 and execute the V interrupt process.

<Main processing>
Next, main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. As described above, the main process is a process that is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. Processing of each step executed in the main processing will be described below.

In step Sl2801, initialization processing is executed. Specifically, first, processing for initializing the MPU 102 and clearing the storage of the work RAM 104 and the video RAM 107 is performed. Then, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107 . Furthermore, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107 and the extracted character information is written in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107 . Also, perform other necessary settings for initialization. After that, the process proceeds to step Sl2802.

In step Sl2802, interrupt permission setting is executed. After the interrupt permission setting is executed, in the main processing, infinite loop processing is executed until the power is turned off. Accordingly, after the interrupt permission is set, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing, which will be described below, are executed in accordance with the reception of a command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described. As described above, the command interrupt processing is processing that is executed each time a command is received from the sound emission control device 90 .

FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. In step Sl2901, command storage processing is executed. In the command storage process, received command data is extracted and the extracted command data is stored in a command storage area provided in work RAM 104 . Various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read by the command determination process of the V interrupt process, which will be described later, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. As described above, V interrupt processing is processing that is executed when a V interrupt signal from VDP 105 is detected. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command storage area are executed by the command interrupt process. Execute the displayed instructions.

As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame worth of image is completed and that is transmitted to the MPU 102 . Therefore, the MPU 102 executes V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, so that drawing instructions to the VDP 105 are issued every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame worth of image is completed. For this reason, the VDP 105 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to suppress the development of an image associated with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area in which the image information is stored. Details of the processing of each step of the V interrupt processing will be described below.

In step Sl3001, command handling processing is executed. In the command handling process, the contents of the command stored in the command storage area by the command interruption process (FIG. 52) are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. Specifically, for example, when a performance command is stored, image drawing and display control is started so that the performance mode specified by the performance command is displayed on the pattern display device 41.例文帳に追加

If the effect operation command is stored, it is determined whether or not it is the period for accepting pressing of the effect operation button 24, and if it is determined that it is the period for accepting pressing of the effect operation button 24, the effect operation is performed. Control of image drawing and display is started so that the effect mode corresponding to the depression of the button 24 is displayed on the pattern display device 41 . On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the period for accepting pressing of the effect operation button 24, the content of the next command is analyzed without executing the process.

In the command processing (S13001), all commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and processing corresponding to all the analyzed commands is executed. The reason for this will be explained. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during the 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the effect is set by the sound emission control device 90 and the effect is started, there is a high possibility that various commands for specifying the content of the effect are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the state of the effect such as the advance notice effect and the stop pattern set by the sound emission control device 90, and display the effect image according to the state. The rendering of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the device 41 .

In step Sl3002, display setting processing is executed. In the display setting process, based on the type of screen to be displayed on the pattern display device 41 set by the command handling process (S13001), etc., the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the pattern display device 41 is specified. . After that, the process proceeds to step Sl3003.

In step Sl3003, task processing is executed. In the task processing, based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the pattern display device 41 specified by the display setting processing (S13002), the type of character (sprite, display object) that constitutes the image is determined. Along with specifying, for each character (sprite), various parameters required for drawing, such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc., are determined. After that, the process proceeds to step Sl3004.

In step Sl3004, drawing processing is executed. In the drawing process, the types of various characters forming one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each character, which are determined by the task process (S13003), are transmitted to the VDP 105. FIG. The VDP 105 executes an image drawing process based on these pieces of information, and together with a drive signal to cause the pattern display device 41 to display an image drawn based on the information received during the previous V interrupt process. The image data is transmitted to the pattern display device 41 . After that, the process proceeds to step Sl3005, and after executing other processes, the V interrupt process ends. An example of specific control for executing various processes including the jackpot effect in the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

<<1-7>> Functions and effects:
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, a variable probability jackpot is won by a winning lottery, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the lottery mode changes to the high-probability mode, and the support mode changes to the high-frequency support mode. After that, after the number of games has reached the guaranteed number of games since the high-frequency support mode was started (= after the number of guaranteed games), when a jackpot is won in a winning lottery, the support mode is high. The frequency support mode is shifted to the low frequency support mode, but the transition timing is switched by lottery (= mode selection lottery) between the start of the game round and the end of the game round. If the timing to shift to the low-frequency support mode is at the start of the game round, the life-and-death battle effect is executed in the game round, and the timing to shift to the low-frequency support mode is at the end of the game round , the superiority battle effect is executed in the game round. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10, when a big win is won in a winning lottery in a game round after the guaranteed number of games, two kinds of performances, a life-and-death battle performance and a superiority battle performance, can be performed. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to widen the range of effects in the case of winning a jackpot in the winning lottery related to the game round after reaching the guaranteed number of games, and to improve the interest of the game. It has the effect of being able to

Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the drop lottery is won in the game round after the guaranteed number of games is reached, or when the fall lottery is not won and the jackpot is won in the win lottery, the mode selection lottery is performed. , the support mode shifts from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode at the timing when the game cycle starts, and the electric accessory 34a (FIG. 3) stops opening and closing operations. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to prevent the player from estimating whether the falling lottery is won or the jackpot is won in the winning lottery from the opening/closing operation of the electric accessory 34a. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can provide the player with a sense of urgency and expectation for the result of the falling lottery and the winning lottery in the game round after the guaranteed number of games has been reached, and as a result, the game can be played. It is possible to further improve the interest of

Here, let us assume a pachinko machine that has only the first-drop mode and does not have the second-drop mode (=the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 2 described above). According to the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 2, a life-and-death battle effect is executed that suggests either winning a big win in a winning lottery (victory) or winning a falling lottery (defeat). Therefore, when the battle effect is started in the game round after reaching the guaranteed number of games, the player can choose either the result of winning the jackpot in the winning lottery or the result of winning the fall lottery. It can be predicted that it will be, and although it can give a sense of urgency and expectation for the results of the falling lottery and the winning lottery, it cannot give the player a sense of security including a draw in the battle production. On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the winning lottery in the game round after the guaranteed number of games is reached, there are two types of life-and-death battle production and superiority battle production. Since the production can be performed, the battle production including the draw by the dominant battle production can be performed, and the player can be given a sense of security including the draw in the battle production.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, after reaching the guaranteed number of games, the jackpot is won in the winning lottery without winning the falling lottery, and the game round in which the first drop mode is won in the mode selection lottery, and the falling lottery. The opening/closing operation of the electric accessory 34a is the same in the winning game round. Therefore, even if the player confirms the stoppage of the electric accessory 34a at the start of the game round, the game round does not win the drop lottery, but wins the jackpot in the hit lottery, and wins the first drop mode in the mode selection lottery. and the game round in which the falling lottery was won. However, by confirming that the opening and closing operation of the electric accessory 34a has stopped at the start of the game cycle after reaching the guaranteed number of games, the big win is won in the winning lottery without winning the falling lottery, and the mode selection lottery is first. The player can understand that the game has been narrowed down to one of the game rounds in which the drop mode has been won and the game rounds in which the fall lottery has been won. Therefore, in this embodiment, it is narrowed down to one of the game rounds in which the big win is won in the winning lottery without winning the fall lottery, and the mode selection lottery wins the first drop mode, and the game round in which the fall lottery is won. By executing the life-and-death battle effect suggesting that the player has won the lottery, it is possible to improve the player's sense of urgency and expectation as to whether the player has won a jackpot in the winning lottery or has won the falling lottery. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, after the guaranteed number of games has been reached, the falling lottery is not won, the win lottery wins the jackpot, and the mode selection lottery wins the falling mode. The opening and closing operation of the electric accessory 34a is the same between the times and the game times when it is determined that a reach (so-called losing reach) occurs in the reach determination without winning the falling lottery and not winning the big win in the winning lottery. is. Therefore, even if the player observes that the electric accessory 34a continues the opening/closing operation in the game round, the falling lottery is not won, and the jackpot lottery is won in the win lottery, and the mode selection lottery is won. and the game times determined to generate a reach in the reach determination without winning the falling lottery and not winning the jackpot in the winning lottery. You can prevent people from guessing. However, by confirming that the opening and closing operation of the electric accessory 34a continues in the game round after the guaranteed number of games is reached, the falling lottery is not won, and the jackpot is won in the winning lottery. Either a game round in which a falling mode is won in a selection lottery, or a game round in which a reach determination is determined to generate a reach without winning in a drop lottery and without winning a jackpot in a winning lottery. The player can comprehend up to the fact that it has been narrowed down to. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a game round that does not win the falling lottery, wins a big win in the winning lottery, and wins the falling mode in the mode selection lottery, and a game round that does not win the falling lottery and wins a big win in the winning lottery. Winning a jackpot in a winning lottery by executing a superiority battle production that suggests that the game is narrowed down to one of the game times determined to generate a reach in the reach determination without winning. It is possible to improve the player's sense of expectation as to whether the loss reach has occurred, and as a result, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

According to the pachinko machine 10, when the fall lottery is not won in the game round after the guaranteed number of games is reached, and a jackpot is won in the win lottery, and the first drop mode is won in the mode selection lottery; In the case of not winning the jackpot in the winning lottery but winning the drop lottery, it falls under either winning the jackpot in the winning lottery (victory) or winning the drop lottery (defeat). Since the suggested life-and-death battle effect is executed, the player can be given a sense of urgency and anticipation for the results of the fall lottery and the win lottery after the guaranteed number of games has been reached. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

In addition, according to the pachinko machine 10, in the game round after reaching the guaranteed number of games, when the drop lottery is not won, and the win lottery wins the jackpot and the mode selection lottery wins the falling mode. Winning a jackpot in a winning lottery in the case where it is determined that a reach (so-called losing reach) occurs in a reach determination without winning a falling lottery and not winning a big win in a winning lottery (victory) , or not winning the jackpot in the winning lottery and not winning the falling lottery (draw). Since the superiority battle presentation only results in a win or a draw, the player is more advantageous when the superiority battle presentation is performed than when the life-and-death battle presentation is performed. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to give the player a great sense of anticipation by the superiority battle effect, and as a result, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the falling lottery is not won in the game round after the guaranteed number of games is reached, and the jackpot is won in the win lottery, the life-and-death battle production and the superiority battle production are selected. is executed. A life-or-death battle effect may result in a defeat, but a superiority battle effect can only result in a victory or a draw, so when the superiority battle effect is executed, it is more important than when the life-or-death battle effect is executed. The degree of advantage for the player is high. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to give the player a great sense of anticipation by causing the superiority battle effect to appear. In particular, in the case of this embodiment, when winning the trailing mode in which the superiority battle effect can be executed, the jackpot type is limited to the 16R probability variable jackpot, which has the highest degree of advantage for the player (see FIG. 8). , it is possible to give the player a greater sense of expectation.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the 16R probability variable jackpot, which has the highest degree of advantage for the player, is associated with the trailing drop mode, which has the highest degree of advantage, in the distribution table. Alternatively, the 8R normal jackpot, which has the lowest advantage for the player, may be associated with the falling back mode, which has a higher advantage. In addition, it is good also as the constitution which corresponds to 2 jackpot classifications, for example, 16R probability variable jackpot and 8R probability variable jackpot, with high advantage degree falling back mode. According to this configuration, when winning the trailing mode in which superiority battle production can be executed, the types of jackpots are limited to variable jackpots with a high degree of advantage for the player, giving the player a great sense of anticipation. can do.

<<1-8>> Modified example of the first embodiment:
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and can be implemented in various aspects without departing from the scope of the invention. For example, the following modifications are possible. In addition, in the modified example described below, description of the same configuration, processing, and effects as those of the above-described embodiment is omitted.

<<1-8-1>> Modification 1:
In the above-described first embodiment, in the game round after the guaranteed number of games has been reached after the high-frequency support mode is started (=after the guaranteed number of games), the support mode is changed when a jackpot is won. Which mode of the drop mode and the trailing drop mode is to be adopted was determined by lottery (= mode selection lottery) based on the jackpot type counter C2. It may be determined by lottery based on the jackpot random number counter C1 used. Specifically, it is as follows. Since the hardware configuration of the pachinko machine in Modification 1 is the same as that of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the same parts as those of the first embodiment will be given the same names and reference numerals, and the following description will be given. I do.

FIG. 54 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the winning/failing table for the high-probability mode provided in the pachinko machine of Modification 1. As shown in FIG. In the high-probability mode success/failure table, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that results in a big win is the same as in the high-probability mode success/failure table (see FIG. 7(b)) in the first embodiment. Furthermore, in the win/fail table for the high-probability mode, among the values 0 to 1199, the values 0 to 15 that result in a big win are associated with the distribution results of the mode selection lottery. Specifically, of the values 0 to 15 that are the big hits, ten values 0 to 9 are set to the first-drop mode, and six values 10 to 15 are set to the last-drop mode.

In the pachinko machine of the modified example 1, when it is determined that the high-probability mode is selected in the winning determination process executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60, a winning lottery is performed with reference to the success/failure table for the high-probability mode. At the same time, a mode selection lottery is performed to determine whether the mode is the first drop mode or the last drop mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as jackpot winning in the success/failure table for the high probability mode shown in FIG. Then, if they match, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 further depends on whether it matches the value set in either the early drop mode or the late drop mode as the result of mode selection lottery distribution. It determines whether it is the drop mode or the trailing drop mode.

As a result, when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery related to the game round after the guaranteed number of games has been reached after the high-frequency support mode is started (=after the guaranteed number of games), the support mode is changed. It can be determined which of the drop mode and the trailing drop mode is employed. The processing executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 is the same as in the first embodiment, except for the part that determines which of the early drop mode and the late drop mode is to be used. Also, various processes executed in the sound emission control device 90 and various processes executed in the display control device 100 are the same as those in the first embodiment.

According to the pachinko machine of the modified example 1 configured as described above, similarly to the pachinko machine of the first embodiment, an effect when a big win is won in the winning lottery related to the game round after reaching the guaranteed number of games. In addition, from the opening and closing operation of the electric accessory 34a (Fig. 3), the player can predict whether he has won the fall lottery or won the jackpot in the winning lottery. can be prevented. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine of Modification 1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game, as with the pachinko machine of the first embodiment.

In addition, in the present modification 1, by adding an item of the distribution result of the mode selection lottery to the success/failure table and referring to the success/failure table, the distribution result of the mode selection lottery corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 can be obtained. was On the other hand, as another modification, the success/failure table remains the same as in the first embodiment, and the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 used for referencing the success/failure table is compared with the threshold value for distinguishing between the early-drop mode and the late-drop mode. By doing so, it may be determined whether the mode is the first-drop mode or the last-drop mode. Specifically, in the case of the hit/fail table for the high-probability mode illustrated in FIG. By determining whether or not the value of the big hit random number counter C1 is 10 or more, it is determined whether the mode is the last drop mode or the first drop mode. With this configuration as well, it is possible to decide which of the first-to-fail mode and the last-to-fail mode to adopt when a big win is won. Particularly, according to this modification, when the possible value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is as large as 65536 (2 to the 16th power), the processing time required for the determination can be shortened.

<<1-8-2>> Modification 2:
In the first embodiment and its modification 1, the support mode is changed when a jackpot is won in the game round after the guaranteed number of games is reached after the high frequency support mode is started (=after the guaranteed number of games). A lottery was used to determine which of the first-drop mode and the second-drop mode should be used. On the other hand, as a modification, in the game round after reaching the guaranteed number of games, based on the number of game rounds after the start of the high-frequency support mode, one of the early drop mode and the late drop mode is selected. It is good also as a structure which determines which is adopted. Specifically, it is as follows. Since the hardware configuration of the pachinko machine in Modification 2 is the same as that of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the same parts as those of the first embodiment will be given the same names and reference numerals, and the following description will be given. I do.

In the pachinko machine of Modified Example 2, the ROM 63 of the main controller 60 stores a mode selection table for determining the first drop mode or the last drop mode.

FIG. 55 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the mode selection table. As shown in the figure, the mode selection table indicates which of the number of games played after the start of the high-frequency support mode, the number of games played from the 101st game, which is after the guaranteed number of games, and the first-drop mode or the second-drop mode. It has a data structure that associates the selection results. In the example of FIG. 55, a period from the 101st to the 105th game and a period from the 109th game onward are set as the number of games to be played in the drop-out mode. A period from the 106th time to the 108th time is set as the number of games to be played in the trailing mode.

Thus, in the mode selection table, for each game round after the guaranteed number of games, there is a mode in which the support mode is changed when a big win is won in the winning lottery. mode is adopted. The MPU 62 of the main control device 60 refers to the mode selection table when a jackpot is won in the winning lottery related to the game round after the guaranteed number of games, and supports in the game round when the jackpot is won after the guaranteed number of games. It is determined whether the change mode of the mode is to be changed in the first-drop mode or the last-drop mode. The processing executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 is the same as in the first embodiment, except for the part that determines which of the early drop mode and the late drop mode is to be used. Also, various processes executed in the sound emission control device 90 and various processes executed in the display control device 100 are the same as those in the first embodiment.

According to the pachinko machine of Modification 2 configured as described above, similarly to the pachinko machine of the first embodiment, an effect when a big win is won in the winning lottery related to the game round after reaching the guaranteed number of games. In addition, from the opening and closing operation of the electric accessory 34a (Fig. 3), the player can predict whether he has won the fall lottery or won the jackpot in the winning lottery. can be prevented. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine of the modified example 2, it is possible to improve the interest of the game, like the pachinko machine of the first embodiment. Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine of Modified Example 2, the period after the guaranteed number of games is reached is divided into a plurality of periods, and either the first-drop mode or the second-drop mode is selected for each divided period. Since it is possible to set in advance whether to adopt it, it is possible to suppress the situation where the processing is biased to one of the first-drop mode and the second-drop mode, which is excessively advantageous or disadvantageous to the player. It is possible to perform a production rich in storytelling.

It should be noted that the mode selection results stored in the mode selection table shown in FIG. 55 are merely examples, and various modes are possible, such as a configuration in which the number of times of switching between the early drop mode and the late drop mode is increased. Furthermore, a plurality of mode selection tables with different mode selection results may be prepared in advance, and the mode selection table to be used may be switched. For example, in the success/failure table, a "big win" and a "minor win" are provided as a result of a winning lottery, and when a small win is won, the mode selection table is switched. According to such a configuration, it is possible to variously switch between the early-dropping mode and the trailing-drop mode. In particular, when the mode selection table is switched when a small win is won, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the small win has been won in the winning lottery, so that the player does not notice. , the mode selection table can be switched.

Further, the mode selection table selects the first drop mode or the last drop mode for the number of games from the 101st game, which is after the guaranteed number of games, among the number of games after the high frequency support mode is started. Although it was a data structure associated with it, on the other hand, the selection result of the early drop mode or the late drop mode for the number of games from the first time of the number of games after the high frequency support mode was started may be associated with each other. In this configuration, from the first to 100th game, the game is set to the falling mode (see FIG. 13).

It should be noted that, in Modification 2, by referring to the mode selection table, the mode selection result corresponding to the number of games played is obtained. On the other hand, as another modification, without using the mode selection table, the number of games played is compared with a threshold for distinguishing between the first-drop mode and the second-drop mode. It is good also as composition which judges whether. Specifically, in the mode selection table exemplified in FIG. 55, the thresholds for distinguishing the first drop mode and the second drop mode are 101, 106, and 109. When the number of games is less than 106, it is determined to be in the last drop mode, when the number of games is 106 or more and less than 109, it is determined to be in the last drop mode, and when the number of games is 109 or more, it is determined to be the last drop mode. mode. With this configuration as well, it is possible to determine which mode to use, the first drop mode or the last drop mode, according to the number of games played.

<<1-8-3>> Modification 3:
In the first embodiment and its modification 1, the support mode is changed when a jackpot is won in the game round after the guaranteed number of games is reached after the high frequency support mode is started (=after the guaranteed number of games). A lottery was used to determine which of the first-drop mode and the last-drop mode should be used. On the other hand, as a modified example, it may be configured such that the first drop mode or the last drop mode is determined according to the variable time set by the variable time setting process. Even with this configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the game, as in the first embodiment and its modification.

<<1-8-4>> Modification 4:
In the above-described first embodiment and modified examples 1 to 3, the player is not notified of which of the first-drop mode and the second-drop mode is to be adopted. On the other hand, as a modification, the player may be notified of which of the first drop mode and the last drop mode is to be adopted. For example, at the start of a game round, the pattern display device 41 is caused to display the mode adoption result. According to this modification 4, when the player learns from the display of the symbol display device 41 that it is in the falling mode, the opening/closing operation of the electric accessory 34a (FIG. 3) stops at the start of the game cycle. When he admits that, it can be predicted that he won the drop lottery during the superiority battle production. Therefore, according to Modification 4, the player can leave room for predicting that he/she has won the fall lottery during the battle presentation.

In the above-described first embodiment, the mode selection result corresponding to the jackpot type counter C2 is obtained by referring to the distribution table used when sorting the jackpot types. On the other hand, as another modification, without using the distribution table, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is compared with the threshold value that distinguishes the first-drop mode and the second-drop mode. A configuration may be adopted in which it is determined whether the current mode is the trailing drop mode. Specifically, in the distribution table for the first start opening illustrated in FIG. When the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is 0 or more and less than 40, it is determined to be in the first-lose mode, and when the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is 40 or more and less than 65, it is the last-lose mode. , and when the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is 65 or more, it is determined to be the first drop mode. With this configuration as well, it is possible to determine which of the early drop mode and the late drop mode to adopt according to the jackpot type counter C2. In the case of the first embodiment, the value of the big hit type counter C2 is obtained based on the entry of the game ball to the first start port 33, and the game ball to the second start port 34. The distribution result of the mode selection lottery according to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 was different from the case obtained based on the entering ball, but according to this modification 4, the same distribution result is obtained. .

<<1-8-5>> Modification 5:
In the first embodiment and its modification, the low-frequency support mode is adopted as the first state specified by the state information in the state storage means, and the high-frequency support mode is adopted as the state other than the first state. However, the first state and states other than the first state are not limited to these. For example, the high frequency support mode may be adopted as the first state, and the low frequency support mode may be adopted as the second state. In addition, in the first embodiment and its modification, there are a low-frequency support mode and a high-frequency support mode as states in which the high-frequency support mode flag, which is state information, can be specified. 34a may be configured to have three types of support modes (for example, low-frequency support mode, medium-frequency support mode, and high-frequency support mode) in which the frequency of the open state per unit time is divided into three stages. Further, the configuration may have n types of support modes in which the frequency is divided into n stages (n is a positive integer equal to or greater than 4).

<<1-8-6>> Modification 6:
In the above-described first embodiment and its modification, the determination mode (lottery mode) of the determination means has a low probability mode and a high probability mode. A configuration having three types of probability modes (for example, a low probability mode, a medium probability mode, and a high probability mode) divided into three stages may be employed. Furthermore, the configuration may have n types of probability modes in which the probability that special information satisfies a predetermined condition is divided into n levels (where n is a positive integer equal to or greater than 4).

<<1-8-7>> Modification 7:
In the above-described first embodiment and its modified example, the case where the special information satisfies the predetermined condition and the jackpot is won in the winning lottery has been described as an example. Not limited. For example, as a case where the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, a case where a condition for executing a ready-to-win effect based on the acquired counter value of the ready-to-win random number counter C3 is satisfied may be adopted.

<<1-8-8>> Modification 8:
In the first embodiment and its modifications, the main controller 60 side sets the fluctuation time based on various information including the high-frequency support mode, and the sound emission control device 90 sets various types of information including the high-frequency support mode. It is configured to set the production pattern based on the information of. On the other hand, as a modification, based on various information including the high-frequency support mode, a specific operation and display mode other than the above in the game machine, for example, a background animation to be displayed on the pattern display device 41 is set. may be configured.

<<1-8-9>> Modification 9:
In the first embodiment and its modified example, a battle effect (battle effect) is executed as a specific effect to be executed before the result notification effect, but the specific effect is limited to the battle effect. no. The above-mentioned specific effect can have any structure as long as it is a effect suggesting that the result notification effect may be executed. With such a configuration as well, the same effects as those described in the first embodiment can be obtained.

<<1-8-10>> Modification 10:
In the above-described first embodiment and its modification, the effects executed in one game cycle consisted of two types of effects, namely, the battle effect and the result notification effect. It may be composed of three types of effects including the notification effect. Furthermore, four or more types of effects may be provided.

<<1-8-11>> Modification 11:
In the above-described first embodiment and its modification, the life-and-death battle effect executed when the drop lottery is won, and the life-and-death battle effect executed when the big win is won in the win lottery and the mode selection lottery is won in the mode selection lottery. Although the battle production was the same, it is not limited to this. For example, a life-or-death battle presentation when winning a fall lottery and a life-or-death battle presentation when winning a jackpot in a winning lottery and winning in the first-to-lose mode are different in part of the images constituting the life-and-death battle presentation. It is good as For example, if the images are similar as a whole, but only a part of the players can notice the difference, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game. In addition, in the above-described first embodiment and its modified example 1, there is a superiority battle effect that is executed when the fall lottery is not won, but a jackpot is won in the win lottery, and the falling mode is won in the mode selection lottery. , The superiority battle production that is executed when it is determined that a reach (so-called loss reach) will occur in the reach determination without winning the fall lottery and winning the jackpot in the winning lottery was the same. It is not limited to this. For example, the former superiority battle presentation and the latter superiority battle presentation may be configured such that a part of the image constituting the superiority battle presentation is different. For example, if the images are similar as a whole, but only a part of the players can notice the difference, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

<<1-8-12>> Modification 12:
In the first embodiment and its modification, when a big win is won in a winning lottery related to a game round after the guaranteed number of games, the life-and-death battle presentation and the superiority battle presentation are selectively executed in the game round. On the other hand, as a modification, if a jackpot is won in a winning lottery related to a game round after the guaranteed number of games, in the game round, either a life-or-death battle effect or a superiority battle effect is selected. Only one of them may be executed, and the other of the life-and-death battle effect and the superiority battle effect may be executed in the game times before the guaranteed number of games. For example, if you win a jackpot in the winning lottery related to the game round after the guaranteed number of games, or if you win the fall lottery related to the game round, perform a life-or-death battle effect in the game round, If you win a jackpot in the winning lottery related to the game round, or if you do not win in the falling lottery related to the game round and you do not win the jackpot in the winning lottery, perform a superiority battle effect in the game round may be configured. In this configuration, the superiority battle effect may be a battle effect with other contents as long as it is different from the life-or-death battle effect, or may be a different effect than the battle effect.

<<1-8-13>> Modification 13:
In the first embodiment and its modification, after reaching the guaranteed number of games, if the falling lottery is not won and the jackpot is not won in the winning lottery, reach (so-called lose reach) is generated in the reach determination. A dominant battle production is performed in the determined game round, but as a modification, a reach is generated in the reach determination without winning the fall lottery and without winning the jackpot in the winning lottery. Then, even in game rounds in which no determination is made, the superiority battle effect may be performed. That is, regardless of whether or not a reach has occurred in the reach determination, a superiority battle effect may be performed in a game round in which the falling lottery is not won and the jackpot is not won in the winning lottery. According to this modification, the same effects as those described in the first embodiment can be obtained.

<<1-8-14>> Modification 14:
In the first embodiment and its modification, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to include three control devices, namely the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90, and the display control device 100, but instead of this, the main control It is good also as a structure provided with two control devices, such as a device and a sub control device. The sub control device may be configured to execute various processes executed by the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 in the first embodiment. Further, in the first embodiment and its modified example 1, the various processes executed by the three control devices 60, 90 and 100 are not necessarily limited to the division described in the first embodiment, and the three control It is sufficient that the devices 60, 90, 100 as a whole can execute various kinds of processing in the first embodiment.

<<2>> Second embodiment:
<<2-1>> Game machine structure:
FIG. 56 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment. A pachinko machine 10 has a wooden outer frame 11 combined in a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island equipment of the game hall. The pachinko machine 10 also includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11 . A pachinko machine body 12 has an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13. - 特許庁The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11 by metal hinges 15 . The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 16 with respect to the inner frame 13 . On the back of the inner frame 13, control devices for controlling the pachinko machine main body 12, such as a main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device, are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. - 特許庁The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened, and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation using a dedicated key on the cylinder lock 17 .

A substantially central portion of the front door frame 14 is formed with an open window portion 18 . Around the window part 18 of the front door frame 14, resin parts and electrical decoration parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. The electrical parts are composed of light emitting means including various lamps such as LEDs. The light-emitting means plays a role of enhancing performance effects by lighting or blinking at the time of a special lottery performed by the pachinko machine 10, at the time of winning, or at the time of occurrence of ready-to-win. A glass unit 19 composed of two sheets of plate glass is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14 , and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19 . A game board, which will be described later, is detachably attached to the inner frame 13 , and the player of the pachinko machine 10 can view the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 19 . Details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper tray 20 and a lower tray 21 for storing game balls. The upper tray 20 is formed in a box shape with an open top, and stores game balls such as rental balls lent from a rental machine (not shown) and prize balls discharged from the pachinko machine main body 12 . The game balls stored in the upper tray 20 are supplied to a game ball shooting mechanism provided in the pachinko machine main body 12. - 特許庁The game ball shooting mechanism is driven by the player's operation of the operation handle 25, and shoots the game balls supplied from the upper tray 20 to the front surface of the game board. The lower tray 21 is arranged below the upper tray 20 and is shaped like a box with an open top. The lower tray 21 stores game balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 20. - 特許庁A discharge port 22 for discharging game balls stored in the lower tray 21 is formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 21 . A lever 23 is provided below the ejection port 22 , and the player can switch the ejection port 22 between a closed state and an open state by operating the lever 23 . When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game ball falls from the discharge port 22 and is discharged from the lower tray 21 to the outside.

A presentation operation button 24 as an operation receiving means is provided in front of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20 . The effect operation button 24 is an operation unit for the player to perform an input operation for the game effect performed by the pachinko machine 10 . When a player operates a performance operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, a game performance reflecting the operation is performed by the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

Further, on the right side of the front door frame 14 when viewed from the front, an operation handle 25 is provided for the player to operate. When the player operates (turns) the operation handle 25, in conjunction with the operation, game balls are ejected from the game ball launching mechanism onto the front surface of the game board at predetermined intervals (0.6 second intervals in this embodiment). fired. Inside the operation handle 25, there are a touch sensor 25a for permitting driving of the game ball shooting mechanism, a wait button 25b for stopping shooting of game balls by the game ball shooting mechanism when pressed by the player, and the operation handle 25. A variable resistor 25c is provided for detecting the amount of rotational operation of , based on a change in electrical resistance. When the player grips the operating handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operating handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. Then, a game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism to the front surface of the game board with strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c. When the rotational operation amount of the operating handle 25 is less than a predetermined value, that is, when the shooting intensity of the game ball is less than a predetermined value, the shot game ball flows down the area on the left side of the game board when viewed from the front. The shooting mode of the game ball in this case is also called "left hitting". On the other hand, when the rotational operation amount of the operating handle 25 is greater than or equal to a predetermined value, that is, when the shooting intensity of the game ball is greater than or equal to a predetermined value, the shot game ball flows down the area on the right side of the game board when viewed from the front. The shooting mode of the game ball in this case is also called "right hitting".

A game ball shooting button 26 for the player to operate is provided on the left side of the peripheral portion of the upper tray 20 when viewed from the front. When the game ball shooting button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is shot to the front surface of the game board with a predetermined shooting strength regardless of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 by the player. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball shooting button 26, the game ball is shot to the front surface of the game board with the same shooting intensity as when the operation handle 25 is rotated at its maximum. In the case of this embodiment, when a game ball is shot by operating the game ball shooting button 26, the game ball flows to the right side of the game board when viewed from the front and also to the right side of the game board. That is, by operating the game ball shooting button 26, the player can "hit to the right". In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the game ball shooting button 26 is operated, the game ball is shot to the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is turned on. . That is, the player turns on the touch sensor 25a by gripping the operation handle 25, and then operates the game ball shooting button 26 to shoot the game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball shooting button 26. can be realized.

In this embodiment, the game ball launch button 26 is arranged on the left side of the periphery of the upper tray 20 when viewed from the front. may be adopted. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the game ball launch button 26 is arranged inside (peripheral portion) of the operation handle 25, like the weight button 25b. By doing so, the player can operate the operating handle 25, the weight button 25b, and the game ball shooting button 26 only with the right hand.

57 is a front view of the game board 30. FIG. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on its front surface. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding a game ball is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. A game ball shot from the game ball shooting mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and released above the game area PA, and then flows down the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicularly to the game board 30, and accessories such as windmills are arranged. These nails 42 and windmills distribute and organize the falling directions of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

The game board 30 is provided with a general winning port 32 , a normal starting gate 35 , a general electric winning device 34 , a first special electric winning device 57 , a second special electric winning device 58 and an out port 43 . In particular, in the present embodiment, a single resin-made circulation path 301 through which the game ball can circulate is provided in the right game area where the game ball can reach by hitting to the right. is provided with a general electric prize winning device 34, a first special electric prize winning device 57, a second special electric prize winning device 58 and an out port 43 in this order from the upstream side. In this embodiment, since no nail is provided on the route from the game ball to the distribution path 301 after it is shot, the "right-handed" game ball enters the distribution path 301 along a certain trajectory. reach. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, since no nail is provided inside the circulation path 301, each game ball circulating inside the circulation path 301 has no variation in behavior and circulates in a similar manner. Each configuration provided on the game board 30 will be described below.

The general winning hole 32 is a ball entry hole into which a game ball can enter, and when a game ball enters, one game ball is paid out from a payout device 71 as a prize ball. In this embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 32 are provided on the game board 30 .

The normal pattern starting gate 35 is a gate having a through hole through which a game ball can pass. As a result of the general pattern lottery, when the general pattern lottery is won, the normal electric opening/closing execution mode in which the normal electric accessory 34b performs the opening/closing operation is started. The general electric switching execution mode is composed of a general electric opening period, a general electric switching processing period, and a general electric ending period. The normal electric opening period is a waiting period until the opening/closing process of the normal electric accessory 34b is started, and the normal electric opening/closing process period is a period in which the opening/closing process of the normal electric accessory 34b is actually executed. The normal electric ending period is a waiting period after the opening/closing process of the normal electric accessory 34b is completed, until the next normal drawing lottery can be executed. In addition, even if the game ball passes through the normal figure starting gate 35, the payout of prize balls is not executed. In this embodiment, the normal figure starting gate 35 is provided in the central lower portion of the game board 30 . In addition, in this embodiment, the general winning opening 32 is provided at a position where the game ball that has passed through the normal figure starting gate 35 can enter. More specifically, the general prize winning opening 32 is provided directly under the normal figure starting gate 35 . In the following description, the passage of the game ball through the normal pattern start gate 35 is also referred to as "the game ball enters the normal pattern start gate 35".

The general electric prize winning device 34 includes a special figure starting port 34a into which game balls can enter, and a general electric accessory 34b functioning as a shutter for opening and closing the entrance of the special figure starting port 34a.

The normal electric accessory 34b is normally in a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter the special figure start port 34a, and when the above-described normal electric open/close execution mode is started, the game ball is special. It becomes an open state in which a ball can be entered into the starting port 34a.

In this embodiment, the normal electric accessory 34b is formed of a plate-like member, and when closed, protrudes forward from the game board 30, and its upper surface constitutes the bottom surface of the flow path 301. A game ball can flow on the upper surface of the plate-like member. On the other hand, in the open state, the normal electric accessory 34b is housed behind the game board 30, and the game ball circulating through the circulation path 301 is provided below the normal electric accessory 34b. It becomes possible to enter the starting hole 34a. Further, in this embodiment, a plurality of projections are provided on the upper surface of the normal electric accessory 34b, and the projections reduce the speed of the game ball flowing on the upper surface of the normal electric accessory 34b. As a result, the time required for the game ball to pass through the upper surface of the ordinary electric accessory 34b of this embodiment is 0.7 seconds or longer.

The special figure start port 34a is a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and when the game ball enters, three game balls are paid out as prize balls from the payout device 71, A special figure lottery, which is a lottery, is executed. As a result of the special lottery, when the special figure jackpot or the special figure small win is won, the special electric accessory (first special electric accessory 57b or second special electric accessory 58b) to be described later executes the opening and closing operation. mode is started. The special electric opening/closing execution mode is composed of a special electric opening period, a special electric opening/closing processing period, and a special electric ending period. The special electric opening period is the waiting period until the opening and closing process of the special electric role is started, the special electric opening and closing processing period is the period in which the opening and closing process of the special electric role is actually executed, and the special electric ending period is , After the opening and closing process of the special electric accessory is completed, it is a waiting period until the next special figure lottery can be executed. In addition, in this embodiment, as a result of the special figure lottery, the special figure big hit and the loss are not set, and only the special figure small hit is set. Then, in the present embodiment, as a result of the special figure lottery, when the special figure small hit is won, the special electric opening/closing execution mode in which the first special electric accessory 57b performs the opening/closing operation is started.

The first special electric prize winning device 57 includes a first special prize winning port 57a into which a game ball can enter, a first special electric accessory 57b functioning as a shutter for opening and closing the entrance of the first special prize winning port 57a, and a first A V winning opening 57av is provided inside the big winning opening 57a.

The first special electric accessory 57b is normally in a closed state in which it is impossible for the game ball to enter the first big winning hole 57a. is in an open state in which a ball can enter the first big winning hole 57a.

In this embodiment, the first special electric accessory 57b is composed of a plate-like member, and when closed, protrudes forward from the game board 30, and its upper surface constitutes the bottom surface of the flow path 301. A game ball can flow on the upper surface of the plate-like member. On the other hand, in the open state, the first special electric accessory 57b is housed behind the game board 30, and the game balls flowing through the circulation path 301 are provided below the first special electric accessory 57b. A ball can be entered into the first big winning hole 57a. In addition, in this embodiment, a plurality of projections are provided on the upper surface of the first special electric accessory 57b, and the projections reduce the speed of the game ball flowing on the upper surface of the first special electric accessory 57b. . As a result, the time required for the game ball to pass through the upper surface of the first special electric accessory 57b of this embodiment is 1.0 second or more.

The first big winning hole 57a is a ball hole into which game balls can enter when the first special electric accessory 57b is in an open state. The ball is paid out from the payout device 71 as a prize ball. As described above, in this embodiment, the V winning opening 57av is provided inside the first big winning opening 57a.

The V winning opening 57av is a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and when the game ball enters, the V winning jackpot is won, and the above-described special electric opening/closing execution mode is started. As described above, in the present embodiment, the V winning hole 57av is provided inside the first big winning hole 57a, and the game ball that enters the first big winning hole 57a is then surely V winning hole 57av. is configured to enter the ball. Then, when a game ball enters the V winning opening 57av, a special electric opening/closing execution mode is started in which a second special electric accessory 58b described later performs an opening/closing operation. In the following description, entering a game ball into the V winning opening 57av is also referred to as "winning the V winning jackpot".

The second special electric prize winning device 58 includes a second big prize winning port 58a into which game balls can enter, and a second special electric accessory 58b functioning as a shutter for opening and closing the entrance of the second big prize winning port 58a. there is

The second special electric accessory 58b is normally in a closed state in which it is impossible for the game ball to enter the second big winning hole 58a. is in an open state in which a ball can enter the second big winning hole 58a.

In this embodiment, the second special electric accessory 58b is composed of a plate-like member, and in the closed state projects forward of the game board 30, and its upper surface constitutes the bottom surface of the flow path 301. A game ball can flow on the upper surface of the plate-like member. On the other hand, in the open state, the second special electric accessory 58b is housed behind the game board 30, and the game balls flowing through the circulation path 301 are provided below the second special electric accessory 58b. A ball can be entered into the second big winning hole 58a.

The second big winning hole 58a is a ball hole into which a game ball can enter when the second special electric accessory 58b is in an open state, and when a game ball enters, 15 game balls The ball is paid out from the payout device 71 as a prize ball. The above-described V winning opening is not provided inside the second big winning opening 58a.

The out port 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30 and at the end of the flow path 301, and game balls that have not entered the various ball entrances are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 43. .

In addition, "entering ball" means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening or a predetermined area, and the game ball is discharged from the game area PA after passing through the predetermined opening or predetermined area. In addition, it also includes a mode in which the game ball continues to flow down the game area PA without being discharged from the game area PA after passing through a predetermined opening or a predetermined area. In addition, entering the game ball into the general winning opening 32, the special figure starting opening 34a, the first big winning opening 57a, the V winning opening 57av and the second big winning opening 58a is also referred to as winning.

Next, various display units provided on the game board 30 will be described.

The game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display section 45 . The main display section 45 has a special figure unit 37 , a normal figure unit 38 , and a round display section 39 .

The special figure unit 37 has a special symbol display portion 37a.

The special symbol display unit 37a is a display unit that displays special symbols in a variable and stationary manner. The special symbol means a symbol that is variably displayed and stopped when the special symbol lottery is executed with the entry of the game ball into the special symbol starting port 34a. When the special figure lottery is executed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the special figure start port 34a, the special symbol display unit 37a is used as a display mode until the display corresponding to the lottery result of the special figure lottery is performed. , Executes the variable display of special symbols. After that, the special symbol display unit 37a stops and displays the special symbol in a display mode corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol lottery. Hereinafter, the time from the start of the special symbol display to the stop display of the special symbol in the special symbol display section 37a is also referred to as the special symbol variation time.

In this embodiment, the special symbol display section 37a is composed of a 7-segment display in which 7 segment light-emitting sections are arranged in a figure-of-eight shape. When the game ball enters the special figure starting port 34a, the 7-segment display constituting the special symbol display part 37a flashes in a predetermined mode and then lights up in a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result of the special figure lottery. However, the special symbol display section 37a is not limited to the 7-segment display, and may have another configuration.

In addition, after the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol display section 37a is started, the variable display is finished and the stop display is performed, and the period until the stop display is finished is also called a special symbol game cycle. That is, the special figure game round is one unit of processing for notifying the player of the lottery result of the special figure lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the special figure start port 34a. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one special figure lottery for each special figure game round. In addition, the time required for one special figure game round is also called unit special figure game time. The unit special figure game time is the special figure fluctuation time which is the time from the start of the variable display of the special figure in the special figure display section 37a until the result of the special figure lottery is stopped and displayed, and the result of the special figure lottery. It is composed of a special figure stop time, which is the time when it is stopped and displayed.

In general pachinko machines, when a game ball enters the special figure start opening 34a during execution of the special electric opening/closing execution mode or during the variable display of special symbols, a special figure lottery based on the entering ball of the game ball It has a function (also called a special figure reservation function) to suspend the execution of, and has a special figure reservation display unit that displays information corresponding to the number of reservations of the reserved special figure lottery, but this implementation The form pachinko machine 10 does not have the above-described special figure reservation function, and does not have a special figure reservation display unit.

The normal pattern unit 38 includes a normal pattern display portion 38a and a normal pattern reservation display portion 38b.

The normal symbol display portion 38a is a display portion that displays the normal symbols in a variable and stationary manner. The normal symbol means a symbol that is variably displayed and stopped when the normal pattern lottery is executed with the entrance of the game ball to the normal pattern starting gate 35 as a trigger. When the normal pattern lottery is executed with the entrance of the game ball to the normal pattern start gate 35, the normal pattern display unit 38a is displayed as a display mode until the display corresponding to the lottery result of the normal pattern lottery. , Performs variable display of normal symbols. After that, the normal symbol display unit 38a stops and displays the normal symbols in a display mode corresponding to the lottery result of the normal symbol lottery. Hereinafter, the time from the start of the variable display of the normal symbols in the normal symbol display section 38a to the stop display is also referred to as the normal symbol fluctuation time.

In this embodiment, the normal symbol display portion 38a is composed of a 7-segment display device in which 7 segment light-emitting portions are arranged in a figure-of-eight shape. When the game ball enters the normal pattern start gate 35, the 7-segment display constituting the normal pattern display part 38a flashes in a predetermined manner and then lights up in a predetermined manner corresponding to the result of the normal pattern lottery. However, the normal symbol display section 38a is not limited to the 7-segment display, and may have another configuration.

It should be noted that the period from the start of the variable display of the normal symbols in the normal symbol display section 38a to the end of the variable display to the stop display until the end of the stop display is also referred to as a normal pattern game cycle. That is, the normal game round is one unit of processing for notifying the player of the lottery result of the normal game lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball to the normal game start gate 35 . In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one general-purpose lottery for each general-purpose game. In addition, the time required for one normal game time is also called unit normal game time. The unit normal pattern game time is the normal pattern fluctuation time, which is the time from the start of the variable display of the normal pattern in the normal pattern display section 38a until the result of the normal pattern lottery is stopped, and the result of the normal pattern lottery. It is composed of the normal map stop time, which is the time during which the stop display is made.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the game ball enters the normal pattern start gate 35 during the execution of the normal electric opening and closing execution mode or during the variable display of the normal pattern, the general pattern lottery based on the entry ball of the game ball It has a function to suspend execution (also referred to as a normal pattern reservation function), and has a normal pattern reservation display section 38b that displays information corresponding to the number of reservations of the reserved general pattern lottery.

The normal pattern reservation display unit 38b is a display unit that displays information corresponding to the number of reserved normal pattern lottery numbers. In this embodiment, the normal pattern lottery based on the entry ball of the game ball to the normal pattern start gate 35 is suspended up to a maximum of 4 pieces (4 times). In addition, in the present embodiment, the normal pattern reservation display unit 38b is composed of four LED lamps, and the number of LED lamps corresponding to the number of reserved normal pattern lottery lights up.

The round display unit 39 is a display unit that displays information corresponding to the number of round games executed in the special electric opening/closing execution mode. A round game means that a predetermined time (maximum open time) has elapsed, or that a predetermined upper limit number (maximum number of balls entered) of game balls enter the big winning opening. It is a game in which the special electric accessory is kept open until one of the conditions is satisfied. The number of round games differs according to the type per special figure that triggered the transition to the special electric opening/closing execution mode. The round display unit 39 starts display corresponding to the number of round games at the start of the special electric opening/closing processing period in the special electric opening/closing execution mode, and ends the display at the end of the special electric opening/closing processing period. In this embodiment, the round display unit 39 is configured by arranging two 7-segment displays in which 7 segment light-emitting units are arranged in a figure-of-eight shape. However, the round display section 39 is not limited to the two 7-segment displays, and may have another configuration.

It should be noted that the special-figure unit 37, the general-figure unit 38, and the round display unit 39 described above are not limited to being configured by a segment display device or a light-emitting display device using an LED lamp. The device may be constituted by various display devices capable of showing the draw in progress and the draw results, such as a CRT or dot matrix display.

The variable display unit 40 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area PA. The variable display unit 40 has a pattern display device 41 . The pattern display device 41 has a liquid crystal display. The display contents of the pattern display device 41 are controlled by a display control device 100 which will be described later. The configuration of the pattern display device 41 included in the variable display unit 40 is not limited to a liquid crystal display, and may be configured by various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

When the special symbol in the special symbol display portion 37a or the normal symbol in the normal symbol display portion 38a is variably displayed, the symbol display device 41 variably displays the decorative symbol accordingly. In addition, the symbol display device 41 is not limited to variable display of decorative symbols, and also performs performance display during the special electric opening/closing execution mode and the general electric opening/closing execution mode. Details of the pattern display device 41 will be described below.

FIG. 58 is an explanatory view showing decorative patterns that are variably displayed on the pattern display device 41 and the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. As shown in FIG. FIG. 58(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a decorative pattern variably displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 58(A), the pattern display device 41 variably displays patterns showing numbers 1 to 7 as decorative patterns. As the decorative patterns to be variably displayed, a pattern in which a pattern of a character or the like is attached to each pattern representing the numbers 1 to 7 may be employed.

FIG. 58B is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. As shown in FIG. As illustrated, a main display area MA and a sub-display area SA are displayed on the display surface 41a. In this embodiment, the main display area MA is a large central area of the display surface 41a, and the sub-display area SA is a smaller area than the main display area MA on the upper right side of the display surface 41a.

Three decorative pattern rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 of left, middle and right are displayed in the main display area MA. In each of the decorative pattern rows Z1-Z3, the decorative patterns of numbers 1-7 shown in FIG. is periodically scrolled from top to bottom or from bottom to top. Then, as shown in FIG. 58(B), after the variable display by scrolling, one decorative design is displayed in a stationary state on the active line L1 for each decorative design row.

In this embodiment, when the game ball enters the normal pattern start gate 35 and the normal pattern display unit 38a starts to display the normal patterns, the decorative patterns of the decorative pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are predetermined with periodicity. A variable display that scrolls in the direction of is started. Then, each decorative design to be scrolled is switched from variable display to standby display in the order of decorative design row Z1, decorative design row Z3, and decorative design row Z2. After that, in synchronism with the timing when the normal symbols are stopped and displayed in the normal symbol display section 38a, one decorative symbol is stopped and displayed for each of the decorative symbol rows Z1 to Z3. When the result of the general pattern lottery by the main control device 60 is a general pattern hit, when the variable display of the decorative patterns in each decorative pattern row is completed and the stop display is performed, a predetermined predetermined A combination of decorative symbols is formed on the activated line L1. For example, a combination of the same decorative symbols is formed on the activated line L1. The modes of variable display of the decorative symbols of each decorative symbol row are not limited to those described above. Various modes can be adopted as modes of variable display of decorative patterns, such as the number of decorative patterns in the decorative pattern row.

Next, the reach in the decorative pattern will be explained. Reach means the possibility that a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to winning is formed on the activated line L1 in some of the plurality of decorative symbol rows displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. It means a display state in which a certain combination of decorative patterns is stopped and displayed, and in this state, the decorative patterns are variably displayed in the remaining decorative pattern rows. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the win refers to the combination of the same decorative symbols. Specifically, for example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a in FIG. 58(B), the decorative symbol "7" is first stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol row Z1, and then in the decorative symbol row Z3. A reach line is formed by stop-displaying the same decorative pattern "7" as Z1, and in the state in which the reach line is formed, the decorative patterns are scrolled (variably displayed) in the decorative pattern row Z2. ) state is called reach. Then, when a hit occurs, the same decorative pattern as the decorative pattern forming the reach line is stop-displayed in the decorative pattern row Z2.

In addition, in the ready-to-win state, while the ready-to-win line is formed, decorative patterns are variably displayed in the remaining decorative pattern rows, and the ready-to-win effect is performed by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on the background screen. Alternatively, a combination of decorative patterns formed with reach lines is displayed in a reduced size or hidden, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a to produce a reach effect. .

In the sub-display area SA, three decorative pattern rows Z4, Z5 and Z6 on the left, middle and right are displayed in the same manner as in the main display area MA. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the special symbol start port 34a and the variable display of the special symbol is started in the special symbol display portion 37a, the decorative symbol in the sub-display area SA is accompanied by the start of the variable display. is started. Then, in synchronism with the timing when the special symbols are stopped and displayed in the special symbol display section 37a, one decorative symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line L2 for each of the decorative symbol rows Z4 to Z6. That is, in this embodiment, the decorative symbols in the sub-display area SA are synchronized with the variable display and stop display of the special symbols in the special symbol display section 37a.

As shown in FIG. 58(B), on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, a normal pattern reservation display area Dn is displayed. In the normal pattern reservation display area Dn, the number of normal pattern lotteries (the number of reserved normal pattern lotteries) reserved based on the entry of the game ball to the normal pattern start gate 35 is displayed. Suspended normal drawing lottery is an unexecuted normal drawing lottery, and refers to a normal drawing lottery in which fluctuation display of normal symbols for notifying the lottery result of the normal drawing drawing is not started. In this embodiment, the number of pending normal figure lottery that can be reserved based on the entering ball of the game ball to the normal figure starting gate 35 is four. Therefore, as shown in the figure, it is possible to hold display corresponding to the four reserved general pattern lottery in the general pattern reservation display area Dn.

Further, as shown in FIG. 58(B), on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, flashing display and lighting display are performed in synchronization with the variable display and stop display of the normal symbols displayed on the normal symbol display portion 38a. It has a normal figure synchronous display part Sync1 and a special figure synchronous display part Sync2 that performs blinking display and lighting display in synchronization with the variable display and stop display of the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display part 37a. Concretely, when the normal symbol is displayed in the normal symbol display portion 38a, the normal symbol synchronization display portion Sync1 blinks, and the normal symbol in the normal symbol display portion 38a is stopped and displayed. In this case, the normal map synchronization display unit Sync1 lights up. Also, when the special symbols are displayed in the special symbol display portion 37a, the special symbol synchronization display portion Sync2 blinks, and when the special symbols are stopped and displayed in the special symbol display portion 37a. Special figure synchronous display part Sync2 carries out lighting display.

In the present embodiment, the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 includes a main display area MA, a sub-display area SA, a general-purpose diagram reservation display area Dn, a general-purpose diagram synchronization display section Sync1, and a special-design synchronization display section. Sync2 is displayed, but a configuration may be employed in which part or all of these displays are not displayed on the display surface 41a.

<<2-2>> Electrical Configuration of Gaming Machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described using a block diagram.

FIG. 59 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 10 mainly includes a main controller 60 , a sound emission control device 90 , and a display control device 100 . The main controller 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main game. The main control board 61 has an MPU 62 composed of elements having multiple functions. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 in which various control programs and fixed value data are recorded, and a RAM 64 which is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the programs recorded in the ROM 63. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. A part of the functions of the MPU 62 may be provided by another element. Details of various areas provided in the ROM 63 and RAM 64 will be described later.

The main control board 61 is provided with an input port and an output port.

An input side of the main control board 61 is connected to a payout control device 70 and a power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in a power supply device 85 . The main control board 61 is supplied with stable 24 V DC power from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86 . The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power supply as an external power supply, and converts the external power supplied from the commercial power supply into the operating power required by the main control device 60, the payout control device 70, etc., to each device supply power.

In addition, on the input side of the main control board 61, there are various types such as the general winning opening 32, the special starting opening 34a, the normal starting gate 35, the first big winning opening 57a, the V winning opening 57av, and the second big winning opening 58a. Various detection sensors provided at the entrance are connected. The MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether or not the game ball flowing down the game area PA has entered each ball entrance based on the signals from these detection sensors. Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a special figure lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the special figure starting port 34a, and executes a normal figure lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the normal figure start gate 35.

On the output side of the main control board 61, there are a first special electric accessory drive section 57c that opens and closes the first special electric accessory 57b, and a second special electric accessory drive that opens and closes the second special electric accessory 58b. The portion 58c, the normal electric accessory driving portion 34c for opening and closing the normal electric accessory 34b, and the main display portion 45 are connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, in the special electric opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 controls the first special electric accessory drive unit 57c or the second special electric accessory drive unit 57c or the second special electric accessory drive unit 57b or the second special electric accessory 58b so that the first special electric accessory 57b or the second special electric accessory 58b is opened and closed. Drive control of the accessory drive unit 58c is executed. In addition, in the normal electric opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 performs drive control of the normal electric accessory drive section 34c so that the normal electric accessory 34b is opened and closed. Furthermore, when executing the special figure lottery, the MPU 62 executes display control of the special symbol display portion 37a in the main display portion 45, and when executing the special electric opening and closing execution mode, the round in the main display portion 45 Display control of the display unit 39 is executed. Further, the MPU 62 executes display control of the normal symbol display portion 38a in the main display portion 45 when the normal symbol lottery is executed.

A payout control device 70 and a sound emission control device 90 are connected to the output side of the main control board 61 . A winning ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 70 from the main control device 60 based on the ball entry determination result, for example. When the main controller 60 transmits the prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area 63b of the ROM 63. FIG. Specifically, when the entry of a game ball into the general winning hole 32 is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of one game ball is transmitted from the main controller 60 to the special figure start hole 34a. When the entering ball of the game ball is specified, the prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and the game to the first big winning hole 57a or the second big winning hole 58a When the entry of the ball is specified, the prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 15 game balls is transmitted from the main controller 60. - 特許庁The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 based on the prize ball command received from the main controller 60 to pay out prize balls.

A discharge control device 80 is connected to the payout control device 70 . The shooting control device 80 controls shooting of the game ball shooting mechanism 81 . The game ball shooting mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined shooting conditions are met. An operating handle 25 is also connected to the firing control device 80 . As described above, the operating handle 25 includes the touch sensor 25a, the weight button 25b, and the variable resistor 25c. When the player grips the operating handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operating handle 25, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism to the front surface of the game board with strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c. Furthermore, the game ball shooting button 26 is connected to the shooting control device 80 . When the game ball shooting button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is shot to the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is turned on.

The sound emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60 and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main controller 60 transmits various commands, the command information storage area 63b of the ROM 63 is referred to. Details of these various commands are described later.

In addition, based on various commands received from the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90 controls the driving of various lamps 47 composed of light emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the front door frame 14, and the driving control of the speaker 46. and control the display control device 100 . Also, the effect operation button 24 is connected to the sound emission control device 90, and when the effect operation button 24 is operated by the player at a predetermined timing, a game effect reflecting the operation is performed. It controls the various lamps 47, the speaker 46, the display control device 100, and the like.

The display control device 100 executes display control of the pattern display device 41 based on various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 . Specifically, the display control device 100, based on various commands received from the sound emission control device 90, grasps the fluctuation time of the decorative patterns in the pattern display device 41 and the type of combination of the decorative patterns that are finally stopped and displayed. At the same time, the presence/absence of occurrence of ready-to-win, the content of ready-to-win presentation, and the content of presentation to be executed while the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner are grasped. In addition, in the present embodiment, the time during which the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed is constant. Therefore, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game, is uniquely determined by determining the variation time of the decorative symbols. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

FIG. 60 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used for a special figure lottery, a normal figure lottery, and the like. Various counters are used when MPU62 performs special figure lottery, normal figure lottery, and the like. Specifically, the special figure right/wrong determination counter Cs1 and the special figure type determination counter Cs2 are used for the special figure lottery. Also, the special symbol variation type determination counter Cs4 is used when determining the variation time of the special symbol in the special symbol display section 37a. In addition, the general pattern correctness determination counter Cn1 and the general pattern type determination counter Cn2 are used for the general pattern lottery. In addition, the general pattern reach determination counter Cn3 is used to determine whether or not to generate a reach when the decorative pattern displayed on the pattern display device 41 is changed. In addition, the normal pattern variation type determination counter Cn4 is used when determining the normal pattern variation time in the normal symbol display section 38a. The random number initial value counter Cini is used when setting the initial values of the special figure propriety determination counter Cs1 and the general figure propriety determination counter Cn1.

Each of the counters Cs1 to Cs4, Cn1 to Cn4, and Cini is a loop counter that adds 1 to the counter value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. FIG.

Moreover, the RAM 64 is provided with a special figure determination area 64c, a normal figure reservation area 64d, and a normal figure determination area 64e. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the special figure start port 34a, each value of the special figure validity determination counter Cs1 and the special figure type determination counter Cs2 at the timing of the entrance is stored in the special figure determination area 64c. . In addition, in this embodiment, when the game ball enters the normal pattern start gate 35, each value of the normal pattern correctness determination counter Cn1, the normal pattern type determination counter Cn2, and the general pattern reach determination counter Cn3 at the timing of the entry ball It is stored in chronological order in the general map reservation area 64d.

The details of the special figure propriety determination counter Cs1 will be described. The special figure success/failure determination counter Cs1 is used to determine whether or not to win the special figure per (special figure big hit or special figure small hit). The special figure success/failure determination, which is the determination of whether or not to win the special figure, is part of the above-described special figure lottery. Special figure propriety determination counter Cs1, for example, is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 1199, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Also, when the special figure propriety determination counter Cs1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter Cini at that time is read as the initial value of the special figure propriety determination counter Cs1. Incidentally, the random number initial value counter Cini is a loop counter similar to the special figure propriety determination counter Cs1 (value = 0 to 1199).

The special symbol validity determination counter Cs1 is periodically updated, and when the special symbol opening and closing execution mode is not being executed and the special symbol of the special symbol display unit 37a is not being displayed in a variable manner, the game ball is placed in the special symbol start port 34a. When the ball is entered, the update value is stored in the special figure determination area 64c at the timing of the entry.

The value of the special figure judgment counter Cs1 stored in the special figure judgment area 64c is collated with the special figure judgment table stored in the various table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and the special figure big hit or the special figure small hit is won. It is determined whether or not to As will be described later, the special figure jackpot and special figure loss are not set in the special figure success/failure determination table of the present embodiment, so the special figure small hit is won with a probability of 100%.

Next, the details of the special figure type determination counter Cs2 will be described. The special symbol type determination counter Cs2 is used when determining the type of special symbol. The special figure type determination, which is the determination of the type of this special symbol, is part of the above-described special figure lottery. The special figure type determination counter Cs2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The special figure type determination counter Cs2 is periodically updated, and the game ball is placed in the special figure start port 34a in a situation where the special electric opening/closing execution mode is not being executed and the special symbol of the special symbol display unit 37a is not being displayed in a variable manner. When the ball is entered, the update value is stored in the special figure determination area 64c at the timing of the entry, along with the value of the above-described special figure determination counter.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs the special figure validity determination using the value of the special figure validity determination counter Cs1 stored in the special figure determination area 64c. Then, from among a plurality of special figure type determination tables stored in the various table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, one special figure type determination table corresponding to the result of the special figure propriety determination is selected, and the special figure determination area 64c The value of the special figure type determination counter Cs2 stored in is collated with the selected special figure type determination table to determine the type of special symbol. And MPU62 determines the display mode of the segment indicator which the special design display part 37a stops and displays based on the classification of the determined special design. In addition, in this embodiment, since all the results of the special figure propriety determination are special figure small hits, only one kind of special figure type determination table for special figure small hits is prepared.

Next, the details of the special figure variation type determination counter Cs4 will be described. The special symbol variation type determination counter Cs4 is used when determining the variation time of the special symbol in the special symbol display unit 37a and the variation time of the decorative symbol in the symbol display device 41. The special figure variation type determination counter Cs4 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The special figure variation type determination counter Cs4 is updated once each time the normal processing described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the normal processing, and the updated value is displayed in the special symbol display unit 37a. It is acquired just before the start of the variable display of special symbols. Then, the value of the acquired special figure variation type determination counter Cs4 is collated with the special figure variation time table stored in the various table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and the special figure variation time is determined.

Next, the details of the general/universal pattern right/wrong determination counter Cn1 will be described. The general pattern success/failure determination counter Cn1 is used to determine whether or not to be elected per general pattern. The general pattern success determination, which is a determination of whether or not to be elected per this general pattern, is part of the general pattern lottery described above. The normal figure right/wrong determination counter Cn1 is, for example, configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 1199, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. In addition, when the general pattern correctness determination counter Cn1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter Cini at that time is read as the initial value of the general pattern correctness determination counter Cn1.

The normal pattern correctness determination counter Cn1 is periodically updated, and when the game ball passes through the normal pattern starting gate 35, the updated value is stored in the normal pattern reservation area 64d at the timing of the passage.

Each time a game ball enters the normal pattern starting gate 35, up to four values of the normal pattern correctness determination counter Cn1 are stored in the normal pattern holding area 64d, and are moved to the normal pattern determination area 64e in the order of storage. Then, the value of the general pattern correctness determination counter Cn1 moved to the general pattern determination area 64e is collated with the general pattern correctness determination table stored in the various table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and whether or not the general pattern is won. is determined.

Next, the details of the normal figure type determination counter Cn2 will be described. The normal pattern type determination counter Cn2 is used when determining the normal pattern type. The normal pattern type determination, which is the determination of the type of normal pattern, is part of the normal pattern lottery described above. The normal figure type determination counter Cn2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The general pattern type determination counter Cn2 is periodically updated, and when a game ball enters the normal pattern start gate 35, the updated value is the timing of the entry, and the above-mentioned general pattern correctness determination counter Cn1. It is stored in the general pattern holding area 64d together with the value.

The value of the general pattern correctness determination counter Cn1 is stored in the normal pattern reservation area 64d up to 4 each time a game ball enters the normal pattern start gate 35, and the normal pattern correctness determination counter Cn1 described above is stored in the order of storage. It moves to the normal figure determination area 64e together with the value.

As described above, the MPU 62 uses the value of the normal pattern validity determination counter Cn1 stored in the normal pattern determination area 64e to perform the normal pattern validity determination. Then, from among a plurality of general pattern type determination tables stored in the various table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, one general pattern type determination table corresponding to the result of the general pattern propriety determination is selected, and a general pattern determination area 64e is selected. The value of the general pattern type determination counter Cn2 stored in is collated with the selected general pattern type determination table, and the normal pattern type is determined. Then, the MPU 62 determines the display mode of the segment display which is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display section 38a based on the determined normal symbol type.

Next, the details of the general pattern reach determination counter Cn3 will be described. The general pattern reach determination counter Cn3 is used to determine whether a reach occurs when the result of the general pattern correctness determination is not per general pattern. Ordinary figure reach determination counter Cn3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The general pattern reach determination counter Cn3 is periodically updated, and when the game ball enters the general pattern start gate 35, the updated value is the timing of the entry, and the above-described general pattern correctness determination counter Cn1 and It is stored in the general pattern reservation area 64d together with the value of the general pattern type determination counter Cn2.

The value of the general pattern reach determination counter Cn3 is stored in the general pattern reservation area 64d up to 4 each time a game ball enters the normal pattern start gate 35, and the normal pattern correctness determination counter Cn1 and It moves to the normal pattern determination area 64e together with the value of the normal pattern type determination counter Cn2.

MPU62, when it is determined that it is not per normal pattern in the normal pattern correctness determination, the value of the general pattern reach determination counter Cn3 stored in the special pattern determination area 64c is stored in the various table storage area 63a of the ROM63 It is compared with the normal figure reach determination table and determines whether or not reach occurs. It should be noted that, if the result of the general pattern determination in the general pattern lottery is per normal pattern, the MPU 62 determines that reach occurs regardless of the value of the general pattern reach determination counter Cn3.

Next, the details of the general pattern fluctuation type determination counter Cn4 will be described. The normal pattern fluctuation type determination counter Cn4 is used when determining the normal pattern fluctuation time in the normal pattern display section 38a and the decorative pattern fluctuation time in the pattern display device 41. The normal figure fluctuation type determination counter Cn4 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The general pattern fluctuation type determination counter Cn4 is updated once each time the normal processing described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the normal processing. Usually acquired just before the start of the variable display of the design. Then, the value of the acquired general pattern fluctuation type determination counter Cn4 is collated with the general pattern fluctuation time table stored in the various table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and the general pattern fluctuation time is determined.

Next, the special figure propriety determination table will be described.

FIG. 61 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the special figure propriety determination table. As described above, when the game ball enters the special figure starting port 34a, one value is obtained from the values within the range of 0 to 1199 in the special figure right or wrong determination counter Cs1. Then, according to the acquired value of the special figure success determination counter Cs1 and the special figure success determination table, the special figure success determination, which is the determination of whether or not to win the special figure hit (special figure big hit or special figure small hit), is performed. done.

As shown in FIG. 61, in the special figure propriety determination table of this embodiment, all the values of 0 to 1199 out of 1200 values of 0 to 1199 of the special figure propriety determination counter Cs1 It is set as a value to be elected, and the value to be elected to the special figure jackpot and the value to be out of the special figure are not set. That is, in the present embodiment, the result of the special figure propriety determination is a special figure small hit with a probability of 100%.

"Special figure small hit" is a determination result that triggers the start of the special electric opening and closing execution mode.

Next, the special figure type determination table will be described.

FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the special figure type determination table. As described above, when the game ball enters the special figure start port 34a, one value is obtained from the values within the range of 0 to 99 in the special figure type determination counter Cs2. Then, the special figure type determination table is selected according to the result of the above-mentioned special figure propriety determination, and the selected special figure type determination table and the value of the acquired special figure type determination counter Cs2, the special symbol Special figure type determination for determining the type is performed. However, as described above, in the present embodiment, since only the special figure small hit is set as a result of the special figure suitability determination, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment determines the special figure type for the special figure small hit It has a table only.

As shown in FIG. 62, in the special figure type determination table of the present embodiment, 40 values of 0 to 39 out of 100 values of 0 to 99 of the special figure type determination counter Cs2 are special symbols A ( It is set to the special figure small hit A), and the remaining 60 values of 40 to 99 are set to the special symbol B (special figure small hit B). The types of special symbols set in the special symbol type determination table are all triggers for execution of the special electric opening and closing execution mode, but each type of special symbol is selected when the special electric opening and closing execution mode is executed. The types of special electric switching scenarios are different.

The special electric switching scenario is a control program that stores the mode of control of the first special electric role 57b or the second special electric role 58b in the special electric switching execution mode. The mode of opening and closing the first special electric accessory 57b or the second special electric accessory 58b in the execution mode is different.

Next, the special electric switching scenario selection table will be described.

FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the special electric switching scenario selection table.

FIG. 63(A) is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the special electric opening/closing scenario selection table for the special figure small prize. The special electric opening/closing scenario selection table for the special figure small prize is a table for selecting a special electric opening/closing scenario corresponding to the type of the special figure when winning the special figure small prize.

As shown in FIG. 63(A), in the special electric opening/closing scenario selection table for the special figure small hit of this embodiment, the special electric opening/closing scenario A for the special figure small hit corresponding to the special symbol A is set. A special electric opening/closing scenario B for a special figure small hit is set corresponding to the symbol B. That is, when the special figure small hit is won in the special figure propriety determination, and the result of the special figure type determination is the special symbol A, the special electric opening/closing scenario A for the special figure small hit is executed when the special electric opening/closing execution mode is executed. is selected, on the other hand, if the special figure small per is elected in the special figure propriety determination, and the result of the special figure type determination is the special symbol B, the special figure small per is used when executing the special electric opening and closing execution mode Special electric switching scenario B is selected.

When the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special electric opening/closing scenario A for the special figure small prize is started, first, the special electric opening period of 0.5 seconds is started, and then the special electric opening/closing processing period is started. During the special electric opening/closing processing period, the round game in which the first special electric accessory 57b is opened is executed once (one round). The number of times the first special electric accessory 57b is opened in one round game is one, and in one round game, the first special electric accessory 57b is opened for 1.0 seconds, which is the maximum opening time. , or that the maximum number of 10 game balls enter the first big winning hole 57a, the game ends. When the special electric opening/closing processing period ends, a special electric ending period of 0.5 seconds is started. In addition, since it is substantially impossible for 10 game balls to enter the first big winning hole 57a during the opening of the first special electric accessory 57b for 1.0 seconds, special electric opening and closing for special figure small winning The total duration of the special electric switching execution mode based on Scenario A will be fixed at 2.0 seconds.

When the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special electric opening/closing scenario B for the special figure small prize is started, first, a special electric opening period of 0.5 seconds is started, and then a special electric opening/closing processing period is started. During the special electric opening/closing processing period, the round game in which the first special electric accessory 57b is opened is executed once (one round). The number of times the first special electric accessory 57b is opened in one round game is one, and in one round game, the first special electric accessory 57b is opened for 1.1 seconds, which is the maximum opening time. , or that the maximum number of 10 game balls enter the first big winning hole 57a, the game ends. When the special electric opening/closing processing period ends, a special electric ending period of 0.5 seconds is started. In addition, since it is substantially impossible for 10 game balls to enter the first big winning hole 57a during the opening of the first special electric accessory 57b for 1.1 seconds, special electric opening and closing for special figure small winning The total required time for the special electric switching execution mode based on Scenario B will be fixed at 2.1 seconds.

In addition, in this embodiment, in addition to the case where the special figure small hit is won in the special figure suitability determination, the special electric opening/closing execution mode is started also when the game ball enters the V winning opening 57av.

FIG. 63(B) is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the special electric switching scenario selection table for the V prize jackpot. In this embodiment, during the execution of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special electric opening/closing scenario A for the special figure small winning, when the game ball enters the first big winning opening 57a and enters the V winning opening 57av as it is. , the V winning jackpot A is won, and after the special electric switching execution mode ends, the special electric switching scenario A for the V winning jackpot is selected, and the special electric switching execution mode based on the special electric switching scenario A for the V winning jackpot is started. be done. On the other hand, during the execution of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special electric opening/closing scenario B for the special figure small winning, if the game ball enters the first big winning opening 57a and then enters the V winning opening 57av as it is, After winning the V winning big prize B and ending the special electric switching execution mode, the special electric switching scenario B for the V winning big prize is selected, and the special electric switching execution mode based on the special electric switching scenario B for the V winning big prize is started.

When the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special electric opening/closing scenario A for the V prize jackpot is started, first, a special electric opening period of 0.5 seconds is started, and then a special electric opening/closing processing period is started. During the special electric opening/closing processing period, the round game in which the second special electric accessory 58b is opened is executed 16 times (16 rounds). The number of times the second special electric accessory 58b is opened in one round game is one, and in one round game, the second special electric accessory 58b is opened for 5.0 seconds, which is the maximum opening time. , or that the maximum number of 10 game balls enter the second big winning hole 58a. The closing period (special electric interval period) of the second special electric accessory 58b during the round game is set to 3.0 seconds. When the special electric opening/closing processing period ends, a special electric ending period of 0.5 seconds is started.

When the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special electric opening/closing scenario B for the V prize jackpot is started, first, a special electric opening period of 0.5 seconds is started, and then a special electric opening/closing processing period is started. During the special electric opening/closing processing period, the round game in which the second special electric accessory 58b is opened is executed 12 times (12 rounds). The number of times the second special electric accessory 58b is opened in one round game is one, and in one round game, the second special electric accessory 58b is opened for 5.0 seconds, which is the maximum opening time. , or that the maximum number of 10 game balls enter the second big winning hole 58a. The closing period (special electric interval period) of the second special electric accessory 58b during the round game is set to 5.9 seconds. When the special electric opening/closing processing period ends, a special electric ending period of 0.5 seconds is started.

As described above, in the special electric switching scenario A for the V winning jackpot, the maximum opening time for one round during the special electric switching processing period is set to 5.0 seconds, and the maximum number of incoming balls is set to 10. Since the shortest shooting interval of the game balls is 0.6 seconds, only about 8 game balls enter the second big winning hole 58a during the opening period of the maximum opening time of 5.0 seconds. I can't. That is, in the special electric opening and closing scenario A for the V winning jackpot, the second special electric role product 58b is opened from 5.0 seconds by ten game balls entering during one opening of the second special electric role product 58b. It is constructed so that it will not close in a short time. As a result, in the special electric opening/closing scenario A for the V prize jackpot, the length of the opening period of one round of the second special electric accessory 58b is fixed at 5.0 seconds, regardless of the manner in which the game ball is shot by the player. The time length (total required time) of the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the special electric opening and closing scenario A for the V winning jackpot is 0.5 seconds (special electric opening period) + 5.0 seconds (1 round) x 16 (number of rounds) +3.0 seconds (special electric interval period)×15 (number of intervals)+0.5 seconds (special electric ending period), which is fixed at 126.0 seconds.

Similarly, in the special electric opening/closing scenario B for the V winning jackpot, the maximum open time for opening one round during the special electric opening/closing processing period is set to 5.0 seconds, and the maximum number of incoming balls is set to 10. Since the shortest shooting interval is 0.6 seconds, only about 8 game balls can enter the second big winning hole 58a during the opening period of the maximum opening time of 5.0 seconds. That is, even in the special electric opening and closing scenario B for the V prize jackpot, the second special electric role product 58b is held for 5.0 seconds by 10 game balls entering during one opening of the second special electric role product 58b. It is configured so that it will not close in a shorter time than As a result, even in the special electric opening/closing scenario B for the V prize jackpot, the length of the opening period of one round of the second special electric accessory 58b is fixed to 5.0 seconds regardless of the manner in which the game ball is shot by the player. , The time length (total required time) of the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the special electric opening and closing scenario B for the V winning jackpot is 0.5 seconds (special electric opening period) + 5.0 seconds (1 round) × 12 (number of rounds )+5.9 seconds (special electric interval period)×11 (number of intervals)+0.5 seconds (special electric ending period), which is fixed at 125.9 seconds.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the time length of the special electric switching execution mode is determined regardless of whether the special electric switching scenario A for the V winning jackpot or the special electric switching scenario B for the V winning jackpot is selected. (total required time) is 126.0 seconds or less. Then, the length of time (total required time) of the special electric switching execution mode based on the special electric switching scenario A for the V winning jackpot, and the length of time (total required time) of the special electric switching execution mode based on the special electric switching scenario B for the V winning jackpot time) is as small as about 0.1 second.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the total required time (2.0 seconds) of the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the special electric opening and closing scenario A for the special figure small prize and the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the special electric opening and closing scenario A for the V winning jackpot The time (128.0 seconds, hereinafter also referred to as "total time A") summed with the total required time (126.0 seconds) is the total required time for the special electric switching execution mode based on the special electric switching scenario B for the special figure small hit The time (2.1 seconds) and the total required time (125.9 seconds) of the special electric switching execution mode based on the special electric switching scenario B for the V winning jackpot (128.0 seconds, hereinafter "total time B") is the same as The reason for adopting such a configuration will be described later.

Next, the normal figure right/wrong determination table will be described.

FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the general-purpose suitability determination table. As described above, when the game ball enters the normal pattern starting gate 35, one value is obtained from the values within the range of 0 to 1199 in the normal pattern correctness determination counter Cn1. Then, according to the obtained value of the general pattern correctness determination counter Cn1 and the general pattern correctness determination table, the general pattern correctness determination, which is a determination of whether or not to be elected per general pattern, is performed.

As shown in FIG. 64, in the general figure correctness determination table of the present embodiment, 4 values of 0 to 3 out of 1200 values of 0 to 1199 of the general figure correctness determination counter Cn1 It is set as a value that will be elected, and other values are set as values that will be out of the normal pattern. That is, in the present embodiment, the result of the general pattern suitability determination is elected per general pattern with a probability of 1/300.

The "universal map hit" is a judgment result that triggers the start of the general electric switching execution mode. On the other hand, "out of the normal pattern" is a determination result that does not trigger the start of the normal switching execution mode.

Next, the normal figure classification determination table is demonstrated.

FIG. 65 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the general pattern type determination table. As described above, when the game ball enters the normal pattern start gate 35, one value is obtained from the values within the range of 0 to 99 in the normal pattern type determination counter Cn2. Then, according to the result of the above-mentioned general pattern propriety determination, the general pattern type determination table is selected, and the selected general pattern type determination table and the value of the acquired general pattern propriety determination counter Cn1, the normal pattern Normal figure type determination to determine the type is performed.

As a result of the above-mentioned general pattern correctness determination, if it is determined that it is a general pattern, the general pattern type determination table 1 is selected. Type determination table 2 is selected.

As shown in FIG. 65 (A), in the general figure type determination table 1 of the present embodiment, 40 values of 0 to 39 out of 100 values of 0 to 99 of the general figure type determination counter Cn2 are It is set to normal pattern A (per normal pattern A), 20 values of 40 to 59 are set to normal pattern B (per normal pattern B), and 15 values of 60 to 74 are normal patterns It is set to C (C per normal pattern), 15 values of 75 to 89 are set to normal pattern D (D per normal pattern), and 5 values of 90 to 94 are normal pattern E ( It is set to normal pattern E), three values 95 to 97 are set to normal pattern F (normal pattern F), and two values 98 to 99 are normal pattern G (normal pattern It is set to hit G). The types of normal symbols set in the normal pattern type determination table 1 are all triggers for execution of the normal electric opening and closing execution mode, but for each type of normal design, when the normal electric opening and closing execution mode is executed The type of electric switching scenario selected is different. The normal switching scenario is a control program that stores the manner of control of the normal electric role object 34b in the normal switching execution mode. The opening and closing modes of the object 34b are different.

As shown in FIG. 65(B), in the general pattern type determination table 2 of the present embodiment, out of 100 values of 0 to 99 of the general pattern type determination counter Cn2, all 100 values are normal symbols It is set to Z (normal map off). That is, when it is determined that the general pattern is out of the general pattern in the general pattern correctness determination, the normal pattern type is determined to be the normal pattern Z.

Next, the normal switching scenario selection table will be described.

FIG. 66 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the normal switching scenario selection table. The normal switching scenario selection table is a table for selecting a normal switching scenario corresponding to the type of normal symbol when winning per normal symbol.

As shown in FIG. 66, normal switching scenarios A to G are set in the normal switching scenarios A to G corresponding to the normal symbols A to G, respectively. That is, when the general pattern is elected in the general pattern propriety determination, and the result of the general pattern type determination is the normal pattern A to G, respectively, the general electrical switching scenario A to the general electrical switching scenario A to G will be selected respectively. The details of the normal switching scenarios A to G will be described below.

When the normal switching execution mode based on the normal switching scenario A is started, first, a 5.0-second normal switching opening period is started, and then a normal switching process period is started. During the general electric switching process period, the normal electric accessory 34b is opened once, and the opening time for one time is set to 0.8 seconds. When the general electric switching processing period ends, the general electric ending period of 140.0 seconds is started. In addition, during the normal electric opening and closing processing period, when 10 game balls, which is the maximum number of balls entered, enter the special figure start opening 34a, the normal electric accessory 34b is 0, which is one opening time. Even before 8 seconds have elapsed, the closed state is reached, and the general electric switching processing period ends. It is configured so that 10 game balls, which is the maximum number of entering balls, do not enter the special figure starting port 34a during the opening and closing process period.

When the normal switching execution mode based on the normal switching scenario B is started, first, a 5.0 second normal switching opening period is started, and then a normal switching process period is started. In the normal electric switching processing period, the normal electric accessory 34b opens twice, the opening time is 0.8 seconds for each time, the total opening time is 1.6 seconds, and the normal electric accessory is opened between opening and opening. The closing period of 34b (general electric interval period) is set to 135.0 seconds. When the general electric switching processing period ends, the general electric ending period of 140.0 seconds is started. In addition, during the normal electric opening and closing processing period, when 10 game balls, which is the maximum number of balls entered, enter the special figure start opening 34a, the normal electric accessory 34b is 1.6, which is the total opening time. Even before the second elapses, it will be in the closed state, and the normal switching processing period will end. It is configured so that 10 game balls, which is the maximum number of entering balls, do not enter the special figure start port 34a during the period. The same applies to the common switching scenarios C to G described below.

The normal switching scenarios C to G differ from the normal switching scenario B only in the number of times the normal electric accessory 34b is opened and the total opening time during the normal switching process period, and other controls are different from the normal switching scenario. Same as Scenario B. Specifically, the number of times the normal electric accessory 34b is opened during the normal switching processing period of the normal switching scenario C is 3 times, and the normal electric accessory 34b is opened during the normal switching processing period of the normal switching scenario D. The number of times is 4, the number of times the normal electric accessory 34b is opened during the normal switching process period of the normal switching scenario E is 5 times, and the normal electric function 34b is opened during the normal switching process period of the normal switching scenario F. is 6 times, and the number of times of opening the normal electric accessory 34b during the normal power switching processing period of the normal power switching scenario G is 7 times.

Thus, in this embodiment, the length of time (135.0 seconds) of the closing period (interval period) and the length of time (140. 0 seconds) are both the total required time (126.0 seconds) of the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the special electric opening and closing scenario A for the V prize jackpot and the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the special electric opening and closing scenario B for the V prize jackpot It is set to a time longer than the total required time (125.9 seconds). Furthermore, both the length of time (135.0 seconds) of the closing period (interval period) and the length of time (140.0 seconds) of the ending period (140.0 seconds) set in the electric switching scenario are , is set to a time longer than the total time A (128.0 seconds) and the total time B (128.0 seconds). The reason for adopting such a configuration will be described later.

In addition, in the following explanation, winning the special figure small hit in the special figure suitability determination, and being determined as the special symbol A in the special figure type determination, is also referred to as "winning the special figure small hit A in the special figure lottery". express. The special symbol B is also the same. In addition, it is also expressed as "won the general pattern A in the general pattern lottery" that it was elected per the general pattern in the general pattern propriety determination and was determined as the normal pattern A in the general pattern type determination. The same applies to normal symbols B to G.

<<2-3>> Electrical Configuration of Audio Light Emitting Control Device and Display Control Device:
Next, electrical configurations of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 67 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. As shown in FIG. A part of the configuration such as the power supply device 85 is omitted.

A sound emission control board 91 provided in the sound emission control device 90 includes an MPU 92 which is an arithmetic unit that controls the entire sound emission control device 90, and a speaker 46 based on the generated sound signal. and an audio data ROM 98, which is a memory in which various audio data are stored. The audio data ROM 98 is connected to a sound output LSI 97, and the sound output LSI 97 is connected to the MPU 92 via a signal line.

The MPU 92 is a device containing a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like. The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables, and the like. For example, part of the area of the ROM 93 is provided with an effect pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like. The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the ROM 93 . For example, a part of the area of the RAM 94 is provided with various flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, and the like. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 92, and they may be individually integrated into chips.

The sound output LSI 97 is a DSP (Digital Signal Processor) that generates sound to be reproduced based on instructions from the MPU 92 and outputs the generated sound from the speaker 46 . Specifically, when the sound output LSI 97 receives a reproduction start command from the MPU 92, it identifies the sound to start reproducing as instructed by the reproduction start command, and converts the sound data corresponding to the identified sound into the sound data format. Read from the ROM 98 to generate the sound to be played. The sound output LSI 97 then outputs the generated sound from the speaker 46 . When the sound output LSI 97 receives a reproduction end command from the MPU 92, the sound output LSI 97 specifies the sound whose reproduction is to be ended according to the reproduction end command, and ends the reproduction of the specified sound.

The sound output LSI 97 has 16 audio channels, generates up to 16 sounds simultaneously, synthesizes (mixes) them, and outputs them from the speaker 46 . In addition, the sound output LSI 97 can mute the output of the sound being reproduced for each audio channel according to instructions from the MPU 92, and cancel the mute setting. The sound output LSI 97 reads the corresponding audio data for the audio channel set to mute to generate the sound to be reproduced. By setting the sound level to 0 or by not inputting the sound of the audio channel to be silenced to the mixing circuit, the sound of the audio channel to be silenced is not mixed. As a result, the sound of the audio channel targeted for mute setting is not output from the speaker 46 .

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port. The input side of the MPU 92 is connected to the main control device 60 and the production operation buttons 24 , and the MPU 92 receives various commands from the main control device 60 and also receives signals indicating the operation modes of the production operation buttons 24 . A speaker 46 and various lamps 47 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92, and a display control device 100 is also connected.

The display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102, which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are integrated into chips, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. is installed. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 102, and they may be individually integrated into chips.

The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, to generate internal commands for the VDP 105). .

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and also stores JPEG format image data for background images.

A work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when various programs are executed by the MPU 102 .

The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the pattern display device 41 . The VDP 105 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is an IC chip, and is a kind of microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, etc., and intervenes in the reading and writing of data.

The character ROM 106 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as patterns displayed on the pattern display device 41 . The character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table and the like that are referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 106 . It is also possible to configure the character ROM 106 to store the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 .

The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, and by rewriting the content of the video RAM 107, the display content of the pattern display device 41 is changed.

Hereinafter, the MPU 62, ROM 63, and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main MPU 62, main ROM 63, and main RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the sound emission control device 90 are referred to as the sound and light side MPU 92 and the sound and light side, respectively. The ROM 93 and the sound/light side RAM 94 are also called, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also called the display side MPU 102 .

<<2-4>> Outline of Processing by Gaming Machine:
Next, an overview of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described.

FIG. 68 is a timing chart showing an example of the flow of processing executed in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment. FIGS. 69 and 70 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of effects executed in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment.

A player who plays a game on the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment first operates the operation handle 25 so that the game ball enters the normal figure start gate 35 provided at the lower center of the game board 30. To adjust the firing intensity of game balls. As shown in FIG. 68, when a game ball enters the normal pattern start gate 35, the main controller 60 of the pachinko machine 10 executes the above-described normal pattern lottery, and the normal pattern display unit 38a displays the normal pattern variation. is started (time t1). In addition, the sound emission control device 90 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 along with the start of the variable display of the normal symbols in the normal symbol display section 38a.

After that, when the set normal pattern fluctuation time elapses, the main control device 60 stops and displays the normal pattern during fluctuation in the normal pattern display part 38a in a display mode corresponding to the lottery result of the normal pattern lottery, and emits sound. The control device 90 stops and displays the changing decorative pattern in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 in a display mode corresponding to the result of the general pattern lottery (time t2). The player confirms the display mode of the normal symbols stop-displayed in the normal symbol display portion 38a or the display mode of the decorative symbols stop-displayed in the main display area MA of the symbol display device 41, thereby performing the lottery of the normal-symbol lottery. You can recognize the results. Specifically, in the present embodiment, when the result of the general pattern lottery is a general pattern hit, the decorative patterns that are changing in the main display area MA are displayed in three decorative pattern rows Z1 to Z3 with the same numbers. Stop display in a certain display mode (for example, "555"). On the other hand, if the result of the general pattern lottery is out of normal pattern, the decorative patterns that are fluctuating in the main display area MA are displayed in a display mode where the numbers of the three decorative pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are not the same (not aligned) ( For example, "135") is stopped and displayed.

The player repeatedly enters the game ball into the normal pattern start gate 35 until winning the normal pattern lottery. In addition, in this embodiment, since the general winning opening 32 is provided downstream of the normal starting gate 35, the game ball entering the normal starting gate 35 enters the general winning opening 32 as it is, and 1 game balls are paid out from a payout device 71 as prize balls.

As a result of the general pattern lottery, when the general pattern is won, the main control device 60 displays the changing normal pattern in the normal pattern display section 38a corresponding to the normal pattern type (normal pattern type). mode, and then select a normal switching scenario corresponding to the type of normal pattern (type of normal pattern), and start the normal switching execution mode based on the selected normal switching scenario (time t2). On the other hand, the sound emission control device 90 displays the changing decorative pattern in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 as the normal electric accessory 34b in the normal electric open/close execution mode executed after winning the normal pattern. is stopped and displayed in a display mode corresponding to the number of times of opening.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, when the number of times of opening the normal electric accessory 34b in the normal electric open/close execution mode is 1, and the general pattern A is won, the decorative pattern during fluctuation is changed to "1 ↓ 1 (a display mode in which only the decorative patterns in the central decorative pattern row Z2 are scrolled) to generate a reach, and then stop display in a display mode of "111". Also, for example, when the number of times the normal electric accessory 34b is opened in the normal electric open/close execution mode is 2 times, and the general pattern hit B is won, as shown in FIG. After displaying in a display mode of "2↓2" to generate a reach, as shown in FIG. 69B, it is stopped and displayed in a display mode of "222". Therefore, when reach occurs in the decorative symbols that are fluctuating in the main display area MA, the player determines the number of times the normal electric accessory 34b is opened in the normal electric opening/closing execution mode executed when winning the normal pattern. Therefore, it is possible to give the player not only the expectation of whether or not to win the normal game, but also the expectation of the number of openings of the normal electric accessory 34b after winning. . The reason why the player expects the number of times the normal electric accessory 34b is opened will be described later.

Hereinafter, in the example shown in FIG. 68, as a result of the general pattern lottery, the case where the general pattern B is elected will be described.

As a result of the general drawing lottery, when winning the general drawing B, the main control device 60 starts the general electrical switching execution mode based on the general electrical switching scenario B described above, and the general electrical opening period of the general electrical switching execution mode. is started (time t2). As described above, in the general electric switching execution mode based on the general electric switching scenario B, the electric accessory 34b is opened twice. Further, when the general electric opening period starts, the sound emission control device 90 starts the general electric opening effect and the right hitting notification process. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 70(A), a female character is displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 as a general electric opening effect, and a special electric opening/closing execution mode ( An effect suggesting that a so-called jackpot) will occur twice is executed. In addition, in the right-handed notification processing in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 70A, a right-handed arrow is displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 by displaying a character string such as "Right-handed" and an arrow pointing to the right. A hitting instruction image GD1 is displayed, and a voice such as "Right hitting!"

The player who recognizes that he/she should "hit to the right" by the right-handed informing process operates the operation handle 25 to perform "hit to the right". When the player hits to the right, the game ball shot from the game ball shooting mechanism 81 reaches the flow path 301 provided on the right side of the game area PA of the game board 30 . Here, in this embodiment, it takes 0.7 seconds or longer for the game ball to pass over the normal electric accessory 34b in the closed state. In this embodiment, game balls are shot from the game ball shooting mechanism 81 at intervals of 0.6 seconds. Therefore, after the start of the right-handed notification process, if the player continues to "hit to the right", at least one game ball is passing over the normal electric accessory 34b in the closed state (the game ball is loaded state).

Then, when the general electric opening period ends, the main controller 60 starts the general electric opening/closing processing period, and starts opening the general electric accessory 34b for the first time (time t3). Then, the game ball passing over the ordinary electric accessory 34b falls below the opened ordinary electric accessory 34b, and enters the special figure start port 34a provided below the ordinary electric accessory 34b. Enter the ball (time t4).

When the game ball enters the special figure starting port 34a, the main control device 60 executes the special figure lottery described above, starts the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol display unit 37a, and the sound emission control device 90 The variable display of decorative patterns is started in the sub-display area SA of the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 (time t4). In this embodiment, the special figure fluctuation time is set to 0.5 seconds each time regardless of the result of the special figure lottery.

After that, when the set special figure fluctuation time (0.5 seconds in this embodiment) elapses, the main control device 60 changes the special symbols that are fluctuating in the special symbol display section 37a to the lottery result of the special figure lottery. The sound emission control device 90 stops and displays the changing decorative pattern in the sub display area SA of the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 in a display mode corresponding to the lottery result of the special figure lottery. (time t5). As described above, in the present embodiment, the special figure lottery is always configured to win the special figure small winning (special figure small winning A or special figure small winning B), for example, the result of the special figure lottery is a special figure small hit A, the sound emission control device 90 stops and displays the changing decorative pattern in the sub-display area SA in a display mode such as "777", and the result of the special figure lottery is a special figure small In the case of winning B, the decoration pattern that is fluctuating in the sub-display area SA is stopped and displayed in a display mode such as "333".

In the example shown in FIG. 68, as a result of the special figure lottery, the case where the special figure small hit A is won will be described.

As a result of the special figure lottery, when the special figure small winning A is won, the main controller 60 starts the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the special electric opening and closing scenario A for the special figure small winning described above, and the special electric opening and closing execution mode of the special electric opening and closing execution mode The opening period is started (time t5).

Then, when the special electric opening period ends, the main controller 60 starts the special electric open/close processing period and starts opening the first special electric accessory 57b (time t6). As described above, in the special electric opening/closing processing period in the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special electric opening/closing scenario A for the special figure small prize, the first special electric accessory 57b is opened once. Here, in this embodiment, it takes 1.0 seconds or more for the game ball to pass over the first special electric accessory 57b in the closed state. In this embodiment, game balls are shot from the game ball shooting mechanism 81 at intervals of 0.6 seconds. Therefore, after the start of the right-handed notification process, if the player continues "right-handed", at least one game ball is passing over the closed first special electric accessory 57b (game the ball is on it). Therefore, when the first special electric role product 57b is opened, the game ball passing over the first special electric role product 57b falls below the opened first special electric role product 57b, and the first special The ball enters the first big winning hole 57a provided below the electric accessory 57b (time t7).

When the game ball enters the first big winning hole 57a, the game ball enters the V winning hole 57av as it is (time t7). That is, in the present embodiment, if the player continues to "hit to the right", the player can easily ( It is a configuration that allows you to enter the ball reliably).

When the game ball enters the V winning opening 57av, the sound emission control device 90 performs a V winning effect, which is an effect suggesting that the game ball enters the V winning opening 57av and wins the V winning jackpot. Executes an effect suggesting that the special electric opening and closing execution mode of the round is started, and the main controller 60 executes the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the special electric opening and closing scenario A for the special figure small winning that is being executed. A 16-round special electric switching execution mode based on the special electric switching scenario A for the V winning jackpot is started (time t8).

When the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special electric opening/closing scenario A for the V winning jackpot is started, the special electric opening/closing processing period starts after 0.5 seconds of the special electric opening period has passed, and the second special electric role 58b 16 The first release (round game of the first round) of the times of release is started (time t9). Then, the second special electric accessory 58b satisfies either condition that the maximum opening time of 5.0 seconds has passed or that 10 game balls, which is the maximum number of balls entered, have entered. , is closed. After entering the closed state, the second opening (second round round game) of the second special electric accessory 58b is started after the closing period (special electric interval period) of 3.0 seconds has elapsed. After that, after the 16th opening (round game of the 16th round) of the second special electric accessory 58b is completed and closed, the special electric ending period starts, and 0.5 seconds of the special electric ending period elapses. , the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special electric opening/closing scenario A for the V prize jackpot ends (time t10). During the special electric opening/closing processing period of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special electric opening/closing scenario A for the V winning big prize, the player enters the game ball into the second big prize opening 58a while the second special electric accessory 58b is open. By doing so, a large amount of game balls can be obtained as prize balls.

As described above, in the special electric switching scenario A for the V winning jackpot, the maximum opening time for one round during the special electric switching processing period is set to 5.0 seconds, and the maximum number of incoming balls is set to 10. Since the shortest shooting interval of the game balls is 0.6 seconds, only about 8 game balls enter the second big winning hole 58a during the opening period of the maximum opening time of 5.0 seconds. I can't. That is, in the special electric opening and closing scenario A for the V winning jackpot, the second special electric role product 58b is opened from 5.0 seconds by ten game balls entering during one opening of the second special electric role product 58b. It is constructed so that it will not close in a short time. As a result, in the special electric opening and closing scenario A for the V prize jackpot, the length of the opening period of one round of the second special electric accessory 58b is It is fixed at 5.0 seconds, and the length of time (total required time) of the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the special electric opening and closing scenario A for the V winning jackpot is 0.5 seconds (special electric opening period) + 5.0 seconds (1 rounds)×16 (number of rounds)+3.0 seconds (special electric interval period)×15 (number of intervals)+0.5 seconds (special electric ending period), which is fixed at 126.0 seconds. That is, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special electric opening/closing scenario A for the V winning jackpot in the present embodiment is 126.0% after the start, regardless of the manner in which the game ball is shot by the player and the behavior of the game ball after shooting. It will finish in seconds.

Further, in the present embodiment, from the time point (time t3) when the first opening of the normal electric accessory 34b in the general electric opening/closing execution mode starts, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special electric opening/closing scenario A for the V winning jackpot described above is started (time t8), if the player is "right hitting" as instructed by the right hitting notification process, the maximum time is about 4 seconds. there is

In the present embodiment, the closing period (universal electrical interval period) in the general electrical switching processing period of the general electrical switching execution mode based on the general electrical switching scenario B is set to 135.0 seconds. After 135.0 seconds have passed since the first closing of 34b, the second opening of the ordinary electric accessory 34b starts (time t11).

As a result, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 68, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special electric opening/closing scenario A for the V prize jackpot ends before the second opening of the normal electric accessory 34b starts. become.

Then, when the game ball enters the special figure start opening 34a by the second opening of the ordinary electric accessory 34b in the ordinary electric opening and closing execution mode based on the ordinary electric opening and closing scenario B, the main controller 60 A lottery is executed, the special symbol display unit 37a starts variable display of special symbols, and the sound emission control device 90 starts variable display of decorative symbols in the sub display area SA of the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 ( time t12).

The subsequent flow of processing is different only in that the general electrical interval period (closed period) in the general electrical switching execution mode is replaced with the general electrical ending period. This is the same as the flow of processing from time t5 to time t10 described above. In addition, since the time length of the general power ending period of the general power switching execution mode based on the general power switching scenario B is set to 140.0 seconds, even if the pending general drawing lottery exists, it is normal. The next general drawing lottery is not executed until 140.0 seconds of the general electric ending period, which is started after the electric accessory 34b is closed for the second time, elapses. That is, it is configured so that the next general pattern lottery is not executed earlier than the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the second V winning jackpot is completed. After that, 140.0 seconds of the general electrical ending period elapses and the general electrical opening/closing execution mode ends (time t19).

Note that, in the present embodiment, during five seconds before the end of the general electric ending period, the general electric ending effect is executed to suggest that the general electric open/close execution mode will end. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 70(B), a female character is displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, and a character string such as "Was it fun? See you soon!" indicate.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the processing from time t3 to time t10 is repeated for the number of times corresponding to the number of times the normal electric accessory 34b is opened in the normal electric open/close execution mode. In other words, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot of 16 rounds or 12 rounds is executed for the number of times corresponding to the number of opening times of the normal electric accessory 34b in the ordinary electric opening/closing execution mode.

In the example shown in FIG. 68, in the first and second special lotteries, the special figure small winning A is won, and then the game ball enters the V winning opening 57av and wins the V winning jackpot. However, in the first or second special lottery, the special figure small hit B was won, and after that, the game ball entered the V winning opening 57av and won the V winning jackpot In this case, the main controller 60 starts the special electric switching execution mode based on the special electric switching scenario B for the V winning jackpot described above during the electric interval period in the ordinary electric switching execution mode.

In addition, in the present embodiment, since the special figure start port 34a is not provided with a special figure reservation function, if the second opening of the normal electric accessory 34b is started and the game ball is placed in the special figure start port 34a If the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special electric opening/closing scenario for the V winning jackpot has not ended even when the ball enters, the special figure lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the special figure start port 34a is not executed. . As a result, it becomes impossible to win the special figure small prize in the special figure lottery, and to win the V prize big prize.

Also, unlike the example shown in FIG. 68, if the player does not hit the right hand despite the fact that the right hitting notification process is being executed, the normal electric accessory 34b is released. The game ball cannot enter the special figure start hole 34a, or the game ball can enter the first big winning hole 57a and the V winning hole 57av while the first special electric accessory 57b is open. Can not. In this case, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special electric opening/closing scenario for the special figure small prize and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special electric opening/closing scenario for the V winning jackpot are not started, and the player can It waits for the end of the closing period (general electric interval period) or the general electric ending period until the next opening of the ordinary electric accessory 34b in the execution mode.

As described above, according to this embodiment, the following effects can be obtained.

In the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of times that the V winning jackpot can be consecutively won is determined based on the type of normal symbol. More specifically, based on the number of times the normal electric accessory 34b is opened in the general electric switching execution mode, the maximum number of times that the special electric switching execution mode can be executed based on the V winning jackpot during the execution of the general electric switching execution mode. Since it is determined, the number of times the normal electric accessory 34b is opened in the normal electric open/close execution mode is a very important factor for the player. Therefore, when the general electric opening/closing execution mode is executed by winning the general electric open/close execution mode in the general electric open/close execution mode, the player is interested in the number of times the electric accessory 34b is opened in the normal electric opening/closing execution mode. can be held, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the present embodiment, since the special figure jackpot is not set as a result of the special figure lottery, various restrictions imposed on pachinko machines in which the special figure jackpot is set are not imposed. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the pachinko machine is increased, and it becomes possible to design and manufacture pachinko machines with various playability (specs).

In addition, in this embodiment, since it does not have a high probability mode (so-called probability variable state) in which the probability of winning a special figure jackpot in the special figure lottery is high, the control can be simplified and these modes are provided. Various regulations imposed on pachinko machines that are Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the pachinko machine is increased, and it becomes possible to design and manufacture pachinko machines with various playability (specs).

In addition, in the present embodiment, a high frequency support mode (so-called electric support mode) in which the probability of winning per general drawing in the general drawing lottery increases, or the number of times the normal electric accessory 34b is opened in the case of winning per general drawing increases state), control can be simplified, and various restrictions imposed on pachinko machines having these modes are not imposed. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the pachinko machine is increased, and it becomes possible to design and manufacture pachinko machines with various playability.

In addition, in this embodiment, since it does not have a function to suspend the special figure lottery, the special figure reservation area for suspending the special figure lottery can be omitted from the main side RAM 64, and the storage area of the main side RAM 64 can be saved. It becomes possible to effectively utilize it for other purposes.

In addition, in the present embodiment, during execution of the general electric switching execution mode, the special electric switching execution mode based on the V prize jackpot is executed multiple times without substantial lottery (so-called jackpots run consecutively). Therefore, when a general pachinko machine wins a series of jackpots, for example, even though it is in a high probability mode (so-called variable probability state), it is difficult to win a jackpot in the jackpot lottery, and the next special electric opening and closing execution mode does not start easily. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of such a situation (so-called addiction).

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the game ball enters the normal figure start gate 35 and is elected per normal figure in the general figure lottery and the general electric opening and closing execution mode is executed, the game ball is the distribution path 301 in the firing mode (the so-called "right-handed" firing mode), if it is continuously fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds, the game ball is a special figure start opening during the execution of the general electric opening and closing execution mode 34a, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small winning is executed, and the game ball enters the first big winning hole 57a during the execution of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small winning, The game ball that entered the 1 big winning hole 57a enters the V winning hole 57av, and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning big win is executed.

Then, according to this embodiment, the time required from the start to the end of the general electric switching execution mode, the time required from the start to the end of the special electric switching execution mode based on the special figure small hit, and the special electric power based on the V winning jackpot It can be set to a time longer than the sum of the time required from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode (total time: 128.0 seconds). More specifically, in a situation where the game ball is continuously shot at intervals of 0.6 seconds in a shooting mode (so-called "right-handed" shooting mode) that reaches the distribution passage 301, the general electric switching execution mode starts. When the time required until the special electric switching execution mode based on the V winning jackpot ends (the time from time t2 to time t10 in FIG. 68) is defined as the specific required time, from the start of the electric switching execution mode The time required for completion can be set to a time longer than the specific required time. Therefore, even after the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit ends, and then the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot ends, the electric opening/closing execution mode continues, and the electric opening/closing execution is continued. During the continuation of the mode, there is a case where the normal electric accessory 34b transitions to the open state and the game ball can enter the special figure start port 34a.

Then, according to the present embodiment, when the normal electric accessory 34b is elected in the normal drawing lottery for the normal drawing that opens two or more times, during the execution of the normal electric opening and closing execution mode, a special electric call based on the V winning jackpot After the opening/closing execution mode ends, the normal electric accessory 34b transitions from the closed state to the open state, so that the game ball enters the special figure start port 34a after the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot ends. becomes possible. Then, if the game ball enters the special figure starting port 34a after the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize big win is completed, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small win is executed again, and then again the V prize big win. The special electric switching execution mode based on will be executed. That is, when the ordinary electric accessory 34b is elected in the general drawing lottery for the general drawing that opens two or more times and the general electric opening and closing execution mode is executed, the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit and the V prize jackpot The special electric switching execution mode based on this will be executed multiple times. When the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot is executed a plurality of times, the player can obtain an opportunity to obtain a large amount of game balls as prize balls. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong sense of anticipation for the start of the normal electric opening/closing execution mode, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, according to the present embodiment, during the variation of the special symbol, during the execution of the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the special small prize, or during the execution of the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot When the ball enters the ball, it avoids acquiring various counter values for the special figure lottery (in other words, it does not have a function to hold the special figure lottery). Even if the game ball enters the special figure start hole 34a during the execution of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the win or during the execution of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot, after that, the special electric opening/closing execution based on the special small prize. The mode will not be executed, and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot will not be executed either, which is disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, the player wants the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot to end before the timing at which the game ball can enter the special figure start port 34a comes. It can make you feel nervous.

Also, if, unlike the present embodiment, during the variation of the special symbol, during the execution of the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the special small hit, or during the execution of the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot, the game ball starts the special figure In the case of adopting a configuration that does not avoid obtaining various counter values for the special figure lottery even when the ball enters the mouth 34a (that is, a configuration with a function of holding the special figure lottery), the normal electric accessory 34b If a plurality of game balls enter the special figure start port 34a in one opening, a plurality of special figure lotteries will be suspended, and regardless of the number of times the normal electric accessory 34b is opened in the general electric open/close execution mode However, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning prize may be executed multiple times.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, even if a plurality of game balls enter the special figure start opening 34a in one opening of the normal electric accessory 34b, one of the normal electric accessories 34b It is possible to realize a playability in which the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small win and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot are executed once each for the opening of the times.

In addition, according to the present embodiment, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot has a predetermined time required from start to finish regardless of the shooting mode of the game ball and the behavior of the game ball after shooting. Therefore, the length of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot does not become longer than the predetermined length. Therefore, for example, even at the timing when the normal electric accessory 34b transitions to the open state due to the length of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot becoming longer than the predetermined length, the special electric call based on the V winning jackpot It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the open/close execution mode has not yet ended. As a result, even at the timing when the game ball entered the special figure starting port 34a, the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot was not finished, and the game ball entered the special figure starting port 34a. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a disadvantageous situation for the player such that the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small prize is not executed and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot is not executed.

In addition, according to the present embodiment, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot has a predetermined time required from start to finish regardless of the shooting mode of the game ball and the behavior of the game ball after shooting. Since it is configured to have a predetermined length, the special electric switching execution mode based on the V prize jackpot ends early during the electric interval period of the electric switching execution mode, and the special electric switching execution mode ends. It is possible to suppress the delay of the game due to the lengthening of the period until the next opening of the normal electric accessory 34b.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in the general electric opening/closing execution mode, the general electric accessory 34b transitions from the open state to the closed state until the general electric accessory 34b transitions from the closed state to the open state. The length can be set to a longer time (135.0 seconds) than the time (for example, 126.0 seconds) required from the start to the end of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot. The reason for adopting such a configuration will be described.

First, unlike the present embodiment, the length of the general electric switch interval period of the general electric switching execution mode is set to the time required from the start to the end of the special electric switching execution mode based on the V winning jackpot (for example, 126.0 A case will be described where a configuration of a comparative example in which a time (for example, 80.0 seconds) is set to a time shorter than the second) is adopted.

First, in the configuration of the comparative example, the case where the game ball enters the special figure start opening 34a in the first open state of the normal electric accessory 34b in the normal electric open/close execution mode will be described. In this case, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small win is started, and then the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot is started. After that, the first general electric interval period in the general electric switching execution mode ends, and in the second open state of the ordinary electric accessory 34b, the special electric switching execution mode based on the V prize jackpot continues. . Therefore, even if the game ball enters the special figure start hole 34a, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize big hit are not newly started. After that, the second general electric interval period in the general electric opening and closing execution mode ends, and in the third open state of the ordinary electric accessory 34b, the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot has already ended, so the game When the ball enters the special figure starting port 34a, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small win is newly started, and then the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize big win is started. That is, in this case, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small prize and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot are performed in the first and third open states of the normal electric accessory 34b in the general electric opening/closing execution mode. It will be started when the game ball enters the special figure start port 34a, but it will not start even if the game ball enters the special figure start port 34a in the second open state. .

Next, in the configuration of the comparative example, the case where the game ball does not enter the special figure starting port 34a in the first open state of the normal electric accessory 34b in the normal electric open/close execution mode will be described. In this case, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small win is not started, and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is not started either. After that, the first general electric interval period in the general electric opening and closing execution mode ends, and in the second open state of the ordinary electric accessory 34b, the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot is not executed, so the game ball enters the special figure starting port 34a, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small win is started, and then the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is started. After that, the second general electric interval period in the general electric switching execution mode ends, and in the third open state of the ordinary electric accessory 34b, the special electric switching execution mode based on the V prize jackpot continues. . Therefore, even if the game ball enters the special figure start hole 34a, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize big hit are not newly started. After that, the third general electric interval period in the general electric opening and closing execution mode ends, and in the fourth open state of the ordinary electric accessory 34b, the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot has already ended, so the game When the ball enters the special figure starting port 34a, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small win is newly started, and then the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize big win is started. That is, in this case, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small prize and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot are performed in the second and fourth open states of the normal electric accessory 34b in the general electric opening/closing execution mode. It will be started when the game ball enters the special figure start port 34a, but even if the game ball enters the special figure start port 34a in the third open state, it will not be started. .

In this way, unlike the present embodiment, the configuration of the comparative example is adopted in which the length of the general electric switching interval period of the general electric switching execution mode is set to a time shorter than the length of the special electric switching execution mode based on the V winning jackpot. In this case, the timing of starting the special electric switching execution mode based on the special figure small win and the special electric switching execution mode based on the V winning jackpot during the execution of the general electric switching execution mode is not fixed, and the flow of the game becomes complicated. There is a problem that the control of the game becomes difficult.

Next, the length of the general electric switch interval period of the general electric switching execution mode is set to a longer time (135 0 seconds) is adopted.

First, in the configuration of the present embodiment, the case where the game ball enters the special figure start port 34a in the first open state of the normal electric accessory 34b in the normal electric open/close execution mode will be described. In this case, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small win is executed, and then the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot is executed. After that, the first general electric interval period in the general electric opening and closing execution mode ends, and in the second open state of the ordinary electric accessory 34b, the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot has already ended, so the game When the ball enters the special figure starting port 34a, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small win is newly started, and then the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize big win is started.

Next, in the configuration of the present embodiment, the case where the game ball does not enter the special figure start port 34a in the first open state of the normal electric accessory 34b in the normal electric open/close execution mode will be described. In this case, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small win is not executed, and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning big prize is not executed either. After that, the first general electric interval period in the general electric opening and closing execution mode ends, and in the second open state of the ordinary electric accessory 34b, the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot is not executed, so the game ball enters the special figure starting port 34a, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small win is started, and then the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is started.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the length of the general electric switching interval period of the general electric switching execution mode is set to the time required from the start to the end of the special electric switching execution mode based on the V winning jackpot (126.0 seconds). ) is set to a longer time (135.0 seconds), so at the timing when the normal electric accessory 34b becomes open in the normal electric open/close execution mode, the normal electric accessory 34b becomes open. Regardless of how many times it is, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot is not being executed or has already ended. Therefore, even though the game ball entered the special figure start opening 34a when the normal electric accessory 34b was in the open state in the general electric opening and closing execution mode, the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit and V There is no possibility that the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the winning jackpot will not be started. That is, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to fix the timing of starting the special electric switching execution mode based on the special electric switching execution mode and the special electric switching execution mode based on the V winning jackpot during the execution of the general electric switching execution mode, It is possible to suppress the flow of the game from becoming complicated, and by setting the number of times that the normal electric accessory 34b is in the open state during the execution of the normal electric switching execution mode, the normal electric switching execution mode is executed. It is possible to set the upper limit of the number of times that the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot can be executed.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the normal electric accessory 34b last transitions from the open state to the closed state in the general electric opening and closing execution mode, and the general electric ending, which is the period until the general drawing lottery can be executed. The length of the period can be set to a longer time (140.0 seconds) than the time (for example, 126.0 seconds) required from the start to the end of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot. The reason for adopting this configuration will be described.

First, unlike the present embodiment, when adopting a configuration in which the length of the general electric ending period is set to be shorter than the time required from the start to the end of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot. will be explained. In this configuration, for example, after the end of the general electric ending period, the general electric drawing is executed, and when the general electric drawing is won, the general electric switching execution mode is executed, and the game is played during the execution of the general electric switching execution mode. There is a possibility that the ball enters the special figure starting port 34a and the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit is executed. However, in this configuration, if the special electric switching execution mode based on the V prize jackpot is executed immediately after the start of the general electricity ending period, even after the general electricity ending period ends, the special electric switching operation based on the V prize jackpot The execution mode continues, and even at the timing when the game ball enters the special figure start port 34a, there is a case where the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot continues. In this case, even if the game ball enters the special figure starting port 34a, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit is not executed, and there is a problem that the player is in a disadvantageous situation.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the length of the general electric ending period can be set to a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot. To suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a V prize jackpot is continued even after a general electric ending period ends, and to suppress a situation disadvantageous to a player. can be done.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the length of the general electric ending period is set to be equal to or longer than the length of the general electric interval period. The flow of the game can be realized in the same manner during the general electric ending period of the general electric opening/closing execution mode. As a result, in both the general electricity interval period and the general electricity ending period in the general electricity switching execution mode, a new special electricity switching execution mode based on the special figure small hit and the special electricity switching execution mode based on the V prize jackpot can be executed. A game can be realized.

Further, according to the present embodiment, since the special electric switching execution mode based on the V prize jackpot can be executed in the electric switching execution mode during the electric interval period of the electric switching execution mode, the number of times of the electric switching interval period included in the electric switching execution mode is the game. very important factor for people. Therefore, when the general electric switching execution mode is executed by winning the general electric drawing in the general drawing lottery, the player is asked how many times the general electric switching interval period is included in the general electric switching execution mode. It is possible to make the player interested in the game and improve the interest in the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, since the special electric switching execution mode based on the V winning jackpot can be executed a plurality of times during the period from the start of the electric switching execution mode to the end thereof, the electric switching execution mode is started. It is a very important factor for the player whether or not it is. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in whether or not the general electric switching execution mode is started by winning the general electric drawing in the general drawing lottery, and the general electric switching execution mode is started. In this case, the player can be interested in how many times the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot will be executed, and the amusement of the game can be improved. .

In addition, according to the present embodiment, since the production (Fig. 69, Fig. 70 (A), etc.) that suggests the number of times the normal electric accessory 34b is opened in the normal electric open/close execution mode is executed, is won and the normal electric opening/closing execution mode is executed, the player can be interested in the number of times the normal electric accessory 34b is opened in the normal electric opening/closing execution mode, and the game can be played. Interest can be improved.

In particular, in this embodiment, the numbers of the decorative symbols that are variably displayed and statically displayed in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 are the number of times the normal electric accessory 34b is opened ( That is, since it suggests the number of consecutive games of the V winning big win), the player can feel that the decorative pattern with the largest possible number should be stopped on the effective line L1, thereby improving the interest of the game. can be achieved. In addition, when a reach occurs due to a decoration pattern with a large number, it is possible to make the player feel a great sense of anticipation.

Further, according to the present embodiment, based on the result of the general pattern lottery, the opening operation of the normal electric accessory 34b is executed at least a plurality of times for one general pattern per hit. Then, when one cycle from the opening of the normal electric accessory 34b (time t3 in FIG. 68) to the end of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot (time t10) is defined as one special game time, the normal electric role One special game round based on the opening of the object 34b at the first timing (time t3 in FIG. 68) is executed, and the normal electric drive is performed at the second timing (time t11 in FIG. 68) after the one special game round is completed. It controls so that the accessory 34b is opened. Therefore, it is possible to execute a plurality of 1 special game times for one normal figure per normal figure lottery.

Further, according to the present embodiment, a restriction period is generated for restricting the start of the variable display of normal symbols. More specifically, a predetermined restriction period is generated in a period from the first timing to the end of one special game round that occurs after the second timing. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress the start of the variable display of the normal symbols before the end of one special game round, the normal pattern lottery is executed even though the one special game round has not ended. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where As a result, for example, although the result of the general pattern lottery is a general pattern hit that is advantageous to the player, the game ball is a special pattern because the 1 special game round that has already been executed has not ended. It is possible to prevent a situation disadvantageous to the player such that the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit is not executed even if the ball enters the starting hole 34a.

In addition, in the present embodiment, since a plurality of types (V winning jackpots A and B) are set for the V winning jackpots, not only the number of V winning jackpots to be won in one electric switching execution mode, but also which It is also possible to give the player a sense of anticipation as to whether or not he or she will win the V winning jackpot of the type.

In addition, in this embodiment, the total required time (2.0 seconds) of the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the special electric opening and closing scenario A for the special figure small prize and the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the special electric opening and closing scenario A for the V winning jackpot The total time A (128.0 seconds), which is the sum of the total required time (126.0 seconds), is the total required time (2.1 seconds) of the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the special electric opening and closing scenario B for special figures. and the total required time (125.9 seconds) of the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the special electric opening and closing scenario B for the V winning jackpot. When the opening and closing execution mode is executed, after that, the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the special electric opening and closing scenario A for the V prize big win is executed, and the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the special electric opening and closing scenario B for the special figure small prize is executed. After that, when the special electric switching execution mode based on the special electric switching scenario B for the V winning jackpot is executed, the timing at which the special electric switching executing mode based on the V winning jackpot ends is the same. As a result, since the standby time from the end of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot to the next opening of the normal electric accessory 34b becomes the same, for example, the content of the effect executed during the standby time is made common. can do.

In addition, in this embodiment, a normal pattern starting gate 35 is provided at the lower center position of the game board 30, and a general winning opening 32 is located at a position where the game ball entered into the normal pattern starting gate 35 is provided, similar to a general pachinko machine in which a special figure start port 34a is provided at the lower center position of the game board 30, while awarding prize balls to the player, normal figure lottery It is possible to realize a game in which the player expects to win a prize.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player operates the operation handle 25 so that the game ball enters the normal pattern starting gate 35, so that many game balls enter the normal pattern starting gate 35. It's going to be a ball. And, in this embodiment, since the game balls that enter the normal game starting gate 35 enter the general winning hole 32, it is possible to increase the ratio of the number of winning balls by the general winning hole 32 to all the number of winning balls. can. In other words, it is possible to reduce the role ratio, which is the ratio of the number of prize balls due to the actuation of the role to the total number of prize balls.

<<2-5>> Various processes executed in the main controller:
Next, an example of specific control executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described. The processing executed in the main controller 60 will be described first, and then the processing executed in the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

In order to advance the game described above, the main MPU 62 of the main controller 60 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing. In addition to timer interrupt processing and normal processing, the main MPU 62 executes NMI interrupt processing activated by the input of a power failure signal, but the description of these processing is omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. The timer interrupt process is periodically executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 (2 msec cycle in this embodiment).

In step Sm0101, reading processing of various detection sensors is executed. That is, the state of various detection sensors connected to the main controller 60 is read, the state of the sensors is determined, and detection information (entering ball detection information) is saved. After that, the process proceeds to step Sm0102.

In step Sm0102, the value of the random number initial value counter Cini is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the value of the random number initial value counter Cini, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter Cini is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . After that, the process proceeds to step Sm0103.

In step Sm0103, the values of the general figure propriety determination counter Cn1, the general pattern type determination counter Cn2, the general pattern reach determination counter Cn3, the special figure propriety determination counter Cs1 and the special figure type determination counter Cs2 are updated. Specifically, add 1 to each value of the general figure appropriateness determination counter Cn1, the general figure type determination counter Cn2, the general figure reach determination counter Cn3, the special figure appropriateness determination counter Cs1 and the special figure type determination counter Cs2, When each counter value of reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the determination counters Cn1 to Cn3, Cs1 and Cs2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM64. After that, the process proceeds to step Sm0104.

In step Sm0104, the entry process for the normal pattern start gate based on the entry of the game ball to the normal pattern start gate 35 is executed. The details of the entering ball processing for the normal figure start gate will be described later. After executing step Sm0104, the process proceeds to step Sm0105.

In step Sm0105, ball entry processing for the special figure start opening based on the entry of the game ball to the special figure start opening 34a is executed. The details of the entry process for the special figure starting port will be described later. After executing step Sm0105, the process proceeds to step Sm0106.

In step Sm0106, ball entry processing for the V winning opening based on the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening 57av is executed. The details of the ball entry process for the V winning hole will be described later. After executing step Sm0106, the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

<Pitch ball processing for normal map starting gate>
Next, a description will be given of the entry process for the normal figure starting gate. The entry process for the normal figure starting gate is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (Fig. 71: Sm0104).

FIG. 72 is a flow chart showing ball entry processing for the normal pattern starting gate. In step Sm0201, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the normal figure start gate 35. In step Sm0201, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the normal pattern start gate 35 (Sm0201: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm0202, and the normal pattern lottery reservation number SN is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) It is determined whether or not. It should be noted that the number of normal pattern lottery pending SN is a value indicating the number of normal pattern lotteries (waiting for execution) that are suspended based on the entry of game balls to the normal pattern start gate 35. In this embodiment, the maximum value of the number SN of the general pattern lottery reservation is four. On the other hand, in step Sm0201, when it is determined that the game ball has not entered the normal pattern start gate 35 (Sm0201: NO), the entry process for the normal pattern start gate ends.

In step Sm0202, when it is determined that the normal pattern lottery reservation number SN is less than the upper limit (less than 4) (Sm0202: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm0203, and 1 is added to the normal pattern lottery reservation number SN. After that, the process proceeds to step Sm0204.

In step Sm0204, each value of the general pattern correctness determination counter Cn1, the general pattern type determination counter Cn2, and the general pattern reach determination counter Cn3 is stored in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the general pattern reservation area 64d of the RAM 64, that is, step Sm0203. , is stored in a storage area corresponding to the number SN of the general pattern lottery reservation number to which 1 is added. After that, the process proceeds to step Sm0205.

In step Sm0205, normal map destination determination processing is executed. The general map destination determination process is based on the information (general map reservation information) of each value of the general map accuracy determination counter Cn1, the general map type determination counter Cn2, and the general map reach determination counter Cn3 stored in the general map reservation area 64d. , The judgment result of the general drawing lottery (the judgment result of the judgment of the general drawing type judgment, the judgment result of the judgment result of the general drawing type judgment, and the judgment result of the presence or absence of the general drawing reach occurrence, etc.) This is the process of judging prior to drawing lottery. After executing step Sm0205, the process proceeds to step Sm0206.

In step Sm0206, a normal figure pending command is set. Specifically, it is executed based on the information of each value of the general pattern correctness determination counter Cn1, the general pattern type determination counter Cn2 and the general pattern reach determination counter Cn3 stored in the general pattern reservation area 64d (normal pattern reservation information) Set the determination result of the normal map destination determination process as the normal map hold command.

The normal pattern reservation command is for the control device on the sub side, the judgment result of the normal pattern reservation information acquired based on the entry of the game ball to the general pattern start gate 35 is sent to the normal pattern destination determination process. It is a command for recognizing before the figure reservation information becomes the target of the normal figure lottery with the fluctuation of the normal symbol. The general figure hold command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process of the normal process (FIG. 75: step Sm0503) to be described later. When the sound emission control device 90 receives the general pattern reservation command, the display control device issues a command for changing the display in the general pattern reservation display area Dn of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the general pattern lottery reservation number SN. Send to 100. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the normal pattern reservation display area Dn of the pattern display device 41 so as to correspond to the increase in the normal pattern lottery reservation number SN.

After executing step Sm0206, the entry process for this normal figure starting gate ends.

On the other hand, in step Sm0202, if it is determined that the value of the normal pattern lottery reservation number SN is not less than the upper limit (Sm0202: NO), that is, if it is determined that the value of the normal pattern lottery reservation number SN is the upper limit , without storing the values of the normal pattern correctness determination counter Cn1, the normal pattern type determination counter Cn2, and the normal pattern reach determination counter Cn3 in the normal pattern reservation area 64d, and ends the entry process for the normal pattern start gate.

<Entering ball processing for special figure start entrance>
Next, the entry process for the special figure starting port will be described. The entering ball processing for the special figure starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 71: Sm0105).

FIG. 73 is a flow chart showing a ball entry process for a special figure starting port. In step Sm0301, it is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the special figure start opening 34a whether or not the game ball has entered the special figure start opening 34a. In step Sm0301, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the special figure starting port 34a (Sm0301: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm0302, and the prize ball for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls Set command. After that, the process proceeds to step Sm0303. On the other hand, in step Sm0301, when it is determined that the game ball did not enter the special figure starting port 34a (Sm0301: NO), the entering process for this special figure starting port ends.

In step Sm0303, it is determined whether or not the special electric opening/closing execution mode flag stored in the main RAM 64 is ON. The special electric opening/closing execution mode flag is a flag that turns ON when the special electric opening/closing execution mode is started and turns OFF when the special electric opening/closing execution mode ends. That is, the special electric opening/closing execution mode flag is a flag that is ON during execution of the special electric opening/closing execution mode. If it is determined in step Sm0303 that the special electric switching execution mode flag is not ON (step Sm0303: NO), that is, if it is determined that the special electric switching execution mode is not being executed, the process proceeds to step Sm0304.

In step Sm0304, it is determined whether or not the special figure fluctuation flag stored in the main side RAM 64 is ON. The flag during special symbol fluctuation is a flag that turns ON when the special symbol in the special symbol display section 37a starts to fluctuate, and turns OFF when the special symbol fluctuates. That is, during special figure fluctuation flag, it is the flag which has become ON during fluctuation in the special design. In step Sm0304, if it is determined that the special figure fluctuation flag is not ON (step Sm0304: NO), that is, if it is determined that the special symbol is not in fluctuation, the process proceeds to step Sm0305.

In step Sm0305, each value of the special figure determination counter Cs1 and the special figure type determination counter Cs2 is stored in the special figure determination area 64c of the main side RAM64. After that, the process proceeds to step Sm0306.

In step Sm0306, the special figure fluctuation start flag stored in the main side RAM 64 is turned ON. The special symbol variation start flag is a flag for starting the variation of the special symbols in the special symbol display section 37a, and as described later, it becomes OFF when the variation of the special symbols is started. After executing step Sm0306, the entry process for this special figure starting port ends.

<Ball entry processing for V winning hole>
Next, the ball entry process for the V winning hole will be described. The ball entry process for the V winning hole is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 71: Sm0106).

FIG. 74 is a flow chart showing ball entry processing for the V winning hole. In step Sm0401, whether or not the game ball has entered the V winning opening 57av is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the V winning opening 57av. In step Sm0401, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the V winning opening 57av (Sm0401: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm0402, whether or not the V winning flag stored in the main RAM 64 is ON. judge. The V prize flag is turned ON when a game ball enters the V prize opening 57av, and when the V prize flag is turned ON, the special electric opening/closing execution mode is started, and the special electric opening/closing execution mode ends. This is a flag that is turned off when That is, in step Sm0402, by determining whether or not the V winning flag is already ON, even if a plurality of game balls enter the V winning opening 57av, steps Sm0403 to step Sm0405 to be described later are performed. It adopts a configuration that does not duplicate the processing of

In step Sm0402, when it is determined that the V winning flag is not ON (step Sm0402: NO), the process proceeds to step Sm0403, and the V winning flag is turned ON. Then, it progresses to step Sm0404 and turns ON the V winning a prize classification flag corresponding to the special figure classification flag which is ON. Specifically, for example, when the special symbol A flag is ON as the special symbol type flag, the V winning prize A flag is turned ON as the V winning prize type flag, and the special symbol B flag is ON as the special symbol type flag. If so, the V winning B flag is turned ON as the V winning type flag. After that, the process proceeds to step Sm0405.

In step Sm0405, a V winning command is set. The V winning command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that a game ball has entered the V winning opening 57av and has won the V winning jackpot and the type of the V winning. The V winning command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process ( FIG. 75 : step Sm0503) of the normal process, which will be described later. When the voice emission control device 90 receives the V winning command, the game ball enters the V winning opening 57av and wins the V winning jackpot, the type of the V winning and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning. A V winning performance, which is a performance suggesting the start of , is executed.

After executing step Sm0405, this ball entry process for the V winning hole ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the game ball has not entered the V winning opening 57av in step Sm0401 (step Sm0401: NO) and if it is determined that the V winning flag is ON in step Sm0402 (step Sm0402: YES) ends the ball-entering process for the V winning hole without executing the above-described steps Sm0403 to Sm0405.

<Normal processing>
Next, normal processing will be described. The normal processing is processing started by the MPU 62 of the main control unit 60 when the power is turned on. In normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed.

FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step Sm0501, start-up processing is executed. Specifically, initialization of each control device upon power-on, determination of validity of data stored in the RAM 64, and the like are executed. After that, the process proceeds to step Sm0502.

In step Sm0502, a startup command is set. The start-up command is a command for causing each sub-side control device to start a demonstration video when the power is turned on. After that, the process proceeds to step Sm0503.

In step Sm0503, output data such as the start-up command set in step Sm0502 and the command set in the timer interrupt processing or the previously executed normal processing are transmitted to each sub-side control device. Specifically, the presence or absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, the command is transmitted to the payout control device 70 . Also, if a start-up command and commands related to various effects described later are set, they are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . After executing step Sm0503, the process proceeds to step Sm0504.

In step Sm0504, the values of the normal figure fluctuation type determination counter Cn4 and the special figure fluctuation type determination counter Cs4 are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to each value of the normal figure fluctuation type determination counter Cn4 and the special figure fluctuation type determination counter Cs4, and when each counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0 . Then, the updated values of the general figure fluctuation type determination counter Cn4 and the special figure fluctuation type determination counter Cs4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM64. After that, the process proceeds to step Sm0505.

In step Sm0505, the ball count signal and the abnormal payout signal received from the payout control device 70 are read. After that, the process proceeds to step Sm0506.

In step Sm0506, a normal symbol control process, which is a control process relating to the variable display of normal symbols in the normal symbol display section 38a, is executed. In the normal design control process, the control of the normal pattern lottery and the variation display of the normal pattern based on the lottery result of the normal pattern lottery is performed. The details of the normal symbol control process will be described later. After executing step Sm0506, the process proceeds to step Sm0507.

In step Sm0507, a normal electric auditors control process, which is a control process for the normal electric auditors 34b, is executed. In the ordinary electric accessory control process, control in the ordinary electric open/close execution mode for opening and closing the ordinary electric accessory 34b is performed. The details of the normal electric accessory control process will be described later. After executing step Sm0507, the process proceeds to step Sm0508.

In step Sm0508, a special symbol control process, which is a control process related to the variable display of special symbols in the special symbol display section 37a, is executed. In the special symbol control process, control of the special symbol lottery and the variable display of the special symbol based on the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is performed. The details of the special symbol control process will be described later. After executing step Sm0508, the process proceeds to step Sm0509.

In step Sm0509, a special electric auditors control process, which is a control process relating to the special electric auditors, is executed. In the special electric role product control process, control in the special electric opening/closing execution mode for opening and closing the first special electric role product 57b and the second special electric role product 58b is performed. Details of the special electric accessary product control process will be described later. After executing step Sm0509, the process proceeds to step Sm0510.

In step Sm0510, standby processing is executed to cause each sub-side control device to start a demonstration moving image when the standby state has elapsed for a predetermined period of time. Thereafter, after executing step Sm0510, the process proceeds to step Sm0511.

In step Sm0511, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has passed since the start of the current normal processing (strictly speaking, the start of the command output processing in step Sm0503). That is, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the next normal process. In step Sm0511, if it is determined that the predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed since the start of the normal processing this time (Sm0511: NO), in steps Sm0512 and Sm0513, until the execution timing of the next normal processing Within the remaining time, the random number initial value counter Cini, the normal figure fluctuation type determination counter Cn4 and the special figure fluctuation type determination counter Cs4 are repeatedly updated. Specifically, in step Sm0512, the value of the random number initial value counter Cini is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter Cini is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . Also, in step Sm0513, 1 is added to each value of the normal figure fluctuation type determination counter Cn4 and the special figure fluctuation type determination counter Cs4, and when each counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, each update value of the general figure fluctuation type determination counter Cn4 and the special figure fluctuation type determination counter Cs4 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM64. On the other hand, in step Sm0511, if it is determined that the predetermined time (4 msec) has passed since the start of the normal processing this time (Sm0511: YES), the process returns to step Sm0503, and each process from step Sm0503 to step Sm0510 is performed. Execute.

Since the execution time of each process from step Sm0503 to step Sm0510 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by using the remaining time to repeatedly update the values of the random number initial value counter Cini, the normal figure fluctuation type determination counter Cn4 and the special figure variation type determination counter Cs4, these counter values are updated randomly can do.

<Normal symbol control process>
Next, normal symbol control processing will be described. The normal symbol control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (Fig. 75: Sm0506).

FIG. 76 is a flow chart showing normal symbol control processing. In step Sm0601, a normal design fluctuation start process, which is a process for starting the normal design fluctuation in the normal design display section 38a, is executed. The details of the normal symbol variation start process will be described later. After executing step Sm0601, the process proceeds to step Sm0602.

In step Sm0602, a normal design fluctuation stop process, which is a process for stopping the normal design fluctuation in the normal design display section 38a, is executed. The details of the normal symbol variation stop processing will be described later. After executing step Sm0602, the normal symbol control process is terminated.

<Normal symbol fluctuation start process>
Next, normal design variation start processing will be described. The normal symbol fluctuation start process is normally executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the normal symbol control process (Fig. 76: Sm0601).

FIG. 77 is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation start processing. In step Sm0701, it is determined whether or not the normal electric opening/closing execution mode flag stored in the main RAM 64 is ON. The normal electrical switching execution mode flag is a flag that is turned ON when the normal electrical switching execution mode is started and turned OFF when the normal electrical switching execution mode ends. That is, the normal electrical switching execution mode flag is a flag that is ON during execution of the normal electrical switching execution mode.

In step Sm0701, when it is determined that the normal electric opening/closing execution mode flag is ON (Sm0701: YES), this normal symbol fluctuation start process is terminated without executing any of the processes after step Sm0702 described later. . That is, during the execution of the normal electric opening/closing execution mode, the normal pattern display section 38a does not start to change the normal pattern. On the other hand, in step Sm0701, when it is determined that the ordinary switching execution mode flag is not ON (Sm0701: NO), the process proceeds to step Sm0702.

In step Sm0702, it is determined whether or not the normal pattern fluctuating flag stored in the main RAM 64 is ON. The normal pattern fluctuating flag is a flag that turns ON when the normal pattern starts to fluctuate in the normal pattern display section 38a, and turns OFF when the normal pattern finishes changing. That is, the flag during normal pattern fluctuation is a flag that is normally ON during the fluctuation of the pattern. In step Sm0702, when it is determined that the normal pattern fluctuation flag is not ON (step Sm0702: NO), that is, when it is determined that the normal pattern is not fluctuating, the process proceeds to step Sm0703.

In step Sm0703, it is determined whether or not the general pattern lottery reservation number SN is "1" or more. In step Sm0703, when it is determined that the normal pattern lottery reservation number SN is not "1" or more (Sm0703: NO), this normal pattern fluctuation start process is terminated. On the other hand, in step Sm0703, when it is determined that the general pattern lottery reservation number SN is "1" or more (Sm0703: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm0704. That is, when the general pattern lottery pending number SN is 1 or more in a situation where the general pattern display section 38a is not in the process of executing the general pattern open/close execution mode and the pattern is not fluctuating in the pattern display section 38a, the process proceeds to step Sm0704.

In step Sm0704, 1 is subtracted from the normal drawing lottery reservation number SN. After that, the process proceeds to step Sm0705.

In step Sm0705, a normal pattern reservation information shift process, which is a process for shifting the normal pattern reservation information stored in each area of the general pattern reservation area 64d, is executed. Specifically, in the general pattern reservation information shift process, after moving the general pattern reservation information stored in the first area of the general pattern reservation area 64d to the general pattern determination area 64e, the second area → the first area , 3rd area -> 2nd area, 4th area -> 3rd area, and so on. After executing step Sm0705, the process proceeds to step Sm0706.

In step Sm0706, the general pattern right or wrong determination process, which is the process of determining whether or not to be elected per general pattern, is executed. Specifically, in the general pattern correctness determination process, based on the value of the general pattern correctness determination counter Cn1 stored in the general pattern determination area 64e and the general pattern correctness determination table described above, whether to win per general pattern determine whether or not After executing step Sm0706, the process proceeds to step Sm0707.

In step Sm0707, normal pattern type determination processing, which is processing for determining the type of normal pattern, is executed. Specifically, in the general pattern type determination process, the above-described general pattern type determination table is selected according to the result of the general pattern type determination, and the value of the general pattern type determination counter Cn2 stored in the general pattern determination area 64e , Based on the selected general pattern type determination table, the type of normal pattern is determined. After executing step Sm0707, the process proceeds to step Sm0708.

In step Sm0708, the normal pattern type flag corresponding to the normal pattern type determined in the normal pattern type determination process of step Sm0707 is turned ON. Specifically, for example, when it is determined that it is a normal symbol A in the normal symbol type determination process of step Sm0707, the normal symbol A flag is turned ON as a normal symbol type flag, and when it is determined that it is a normal symbol B , the normal pattern B flag is turned ON as a normal pattern type flag. After executing step Sm0708, the process proceeds to step Sm0709.

In step Sm0709, normal figure fluctuation time setting processing is executed. The normal pattern fluctuation time setting process is a process of setting the normal pattern fluctuation time (normal pattern fluctuation time) in the normal pattern display section 38a. The details of the normal pattern fluctuation time setting process will be described later. After executing step Sm0709, the process proceeds to step Sm0710.

In step Sm0710, the normal figure fluctuation command is set. The general pattern variation command includes information indicating that the current pattern variation is based on the entry of the game ball into the general pattern start gate 35, information on the presence or absence of reach and The information of normal figure fluctuation time set in step Sm0709 is included. After executing step Sm0710, the process proceeds to step Sm0711.

In step Sm0711, the normal figure classification command is set. The general figure type command includes the information of the result of the general figure propriety determination (whether or not there is a general figure hit) and the result of the general figure type determination (normally the type of pattern).

Normal figure fluctuation commands and normal figure type commands set in steps Sm0710 and Sm0711 are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 by the command output process (step Sm0503) of the normal process (FIG. 75). The sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the performance based on the received normal map variation command and the received normal map type command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the performance is executed. After executing step Sm0711, the process proceeds to step Sm0712.

In step Sm0712, the variation of the normal design in the normal design display section 38a is started. After that, the process proceeds to step Sm0713, and the normal pattern fluctuating flag stored in the main side RAM 64 is turned ON. After that, the normal symbol variation start process is terminated.

<Normal map fluctuation time setting process>
Next, normal figure fluctuation time setting processing is explained. The normal pattern fluctuation time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the normal pattern fluctuation start process (Fig. 77: Sm0709).

FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing normal pattern fluctuation time setting processing. In step Sm0801, the value of the normal pattern fluctuation type determination counter Cn4 stored in the normal pattern fluctuation type determination counter buffer of the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired. After that, the process proceeds to step Sm0802.

In step Sm0802, it is determined whether or not the result of the general pattern propriety determination related to the variation of the normal pattern of this time is a general pattern. Specifically, among the general map type flags stored in the RAM 64, it is determined whether the general pattern type flag corresponding to the general pattern is ON, and the general pattern type flag corresponding to the general pattern is set. When it is ON, it is determined that the result of the general pattern suitability determination is the general pattern. In step Sm0802, when it is determined that the result of the general pattern suitability determination is the general pattern per (Sm0802: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm0803.

In step Sm0803, with reference to the normal pattern fluctuation time table per normal pattern stored in the various table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, obtain the fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the normal pattern fluctuation type determination counter Cn4 of this time . Then, it progresses to step Sm0804 and sets the acquired fluctuation time information to the normal figure fluctuation time timer counter provided in various counter areas 64d of RAM64. The value of this normal figure fluctuation time timer counter is subtracted by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is executed. After executing step Sm0804, this normal figure fluctuation time setting process is ended.

In step Sm0802, if it is determined that the result of the normal pattern validity determination related to this normal pattern variation is not per normal pattern (Sm0802: NO), proceed to step Sm0805, reach in this normal pattern variation Determine whether or not it occurs. Since this process (Sm0805) is executed when the result of the general pattern suitability determination related to the fluctuation of the normal pattern this time in step Sm0802 is not a general pattern, in step Sm0805, the result of the general pattern suitability determination is normal. It is determined whether or not it is a variation in which reach occurs among variations in normal symbols that are not hits. Specifically, referring to the general pattern reach determination table stored in the various table storage areas 63a of the ROM 63, the value of the general pattern reach determination counter Cn3 stored in the general pattern determination area 64e is the general pattern reach determination If it matches the value set as reach occurrence in the table, it is determined that reach occurs. In step Sm0805, when it is determined that reach occurs (Sm0805: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm0806.

In step Sm0806, referring to the normal pattern deviation (for reach generation) normal pattern fluctuation time table stored in the various table storage areas 63a of the ROM 63, the fluctuation time corresponding to the value of the normal pattern fluctuation type determination counter Cn4 of this time Get information. Then, it progresses to step Sm0804 and sets the acquired fluctuation time information to the normal figure fluctuation time counter provided in various counter areas 64d of RAM64. After that, the normal pattern fluctuation time setting process is terminated.

In step Sm0805, when it is determined that the reach does not occur in the normal pattern fluctuation of this time (Sm0805: NO), the process proceeds to step Sm0807, normal pattern off (reach non Occurrence) With reference to the normal pattern fluctuation time table, obtain the fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the current normal pattern fluctuation type determination counter Cn4. Then, it progresses to step Sm0804 and sets the acquired fluctuation time information to the normal figure fluctuation time counter provided in various counter areas 64d of RAM64. After that, the variable time setting process ends.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fluctuation time information stored in the normal pattern fluctuation time table for normal pattern deviation (no reach occurrence) is such that the fluctuation time is shorter as the number of the normal pattern lottery pending number SN is larger. is set to be However, it is not limited to this, for example, it may be a configuration that does not depend on the number of the normal drawing lottery reservation number SN, and it is set so that the smaller the number of the normal drawing drawing reservation number SN, the shorter the fluctuation time. may Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the fluctuation time information stored in the normal pattern fluctuation time table for normal pattern per normal pattern and the normal pattern fluctuation time table for normal pattern deviation (reach occurrence).

<Normal symbol fluctuation stop processing>
Next, normal design variation stop processing will be described. The normal symbol fluctuation stop process is normally executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the normal symbol control process (Fig. 76: Sm0602).

FIG. 79 is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation stop processing. In step Sm0901, it is determined whether or not the normal figure fluctuation flag is ON. In step Sm0901, when it is determined that the normal pattern fluctuation flag is not ON (step Sm0901: NO), this normal pattern fluctuation stop processing is terminated. On the other hand, in step Sm0901, when it is determined that the normal figure fluctuation flag is ON (step Sm0901: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm0902.

In step Sm0902, it is determined whether or not the normal pattern fluctuation time set in the normal pattern fluctuation time setting process (FIG. 78) has passed. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the normal pattern fluctuation time timer counter in the main side RAM 64 has become "0", and if it is "0", it is determined that the normal pattern fluctuation time has elapsed. do. In step Sm0902, when it is determined that the normal pattern fluctuation time has not passed (step Sm0902: NO), this normal pattern fluctuation stop processing is terminated. On the other hand, in step Sm0902, when it determines with normal figure fluctuation time having passed (step Sm0902: YES), it progresses to step Sm0903.

In step Sm0903, the normal symbol that is fluctuating in the normal symbol display section 38a is stopped and displayed in a display mode corresponding to the normal symbol type flag that is ON. As a result, the normal symbol in the display mode corresponding to the result of the normal symbol lottery is stopped and displayed in the normal symbol display section 38a. After executing step Sm0903, the process proceeds to step Sm0904.

In step Sm0904, it is determined whether or not the normal pattern type flag corresponding to the normal pattern is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the result of the general pattern propriety determination related to the variation of the normal pattern of this time is the general pattern. In step Sm0904, if it is determined that the normal pattern type flag corresponding to the normal pattern is not ON (step Sm0904: NO), that is, the result of the normal pattern propriety determination related to the fluctuation of the normal pattern is out of the normal pattern. In a certain case, it progresses to step Sm0905 and turns OFF the general pattern classification flag (normal design Z flag in this case) which is ON. After that, the process proceeds to step Sm0907, and the normal figure fluctuation flag is turned OFF. After that, this normal design fluctuation stop processing is ended.

On the other hand, in step Sm0904, if it is determined that the general pattern type flag corresponding to the general pattern is ON (step Sm0904: YES), that is, the result of the general pattern propriety determination related to this normal pattern fluctuation is the general pattern If it is a hit, the process advances to step Sm0906 to turn on the normal electric switching execution mode flag. After that, the process proceeds to step Sm0907, and the normal figure fluctuation flag is turned OFF. After that, this normal design fluctuation stop processing is terminated. As a result, when the result of the general pattern propriety determination related to the variation of the normal pattern of this time is the general pattern, the general electric opening and closing execution mode is started.

<Normal electric accessories control process>
Next, normal electric accessory control processing will be described. The normal electric accessory control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (Fig. 75: Sm0507).

FIG. 80 is a flow chart showing normal electric accessory control processing. In step Sm1001, it is determined whether or not the general electric ending period flag is ON. The general electric ending period flag is a flag that is turned ON at the start of the general electric ending period and turned OFF at the end of the general electric ending period. That is, the general electric ending period flag is a flag for determining whether or not it is during the general electric ending period.

If it is determined in step Sm1001 that the general electrical ending period flag is not ON (Sm1001: NO), the process proceeds to step Sm1002 to determine whether the general electrical switching processing period flag is ON. The normal switching process period flag is a flag that is turned ON at the start of the normal switching process period and turned OFF at the end of the normal switching process period. That is, the normal switching processing period flag is a flag for determining whether or not the normal switching processing period is in progress.

If it is determined in step Sm1002 that the general electric opening/closing processing period flag is not ON (Sm1002: NO), the process advances to step Sm1003 to determine whether or not the general electric opening period flag is ON. The general electric opening period flag is a flag that is turned ON at the start of the general electric opening period and turned OFF at the end of the general electric opening period. That is, the general electric opening period flag is a flag for determining whether or not it is during the general electric opening period.

If it is determined in step Sm1003 that the general electric opening period flag is not ON (Sm1003: NO), the process advances to step Sm1004 to determine whether or not the general electric open/close execution mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step Sm1004 that the normal electrical switching execution mode flag is ON (Sm1004: YES), the process proceeds to a processing group for starting the normal electrical switching execution mode in step Sm1005 and later described later. On the other hand, in step Sm1004, when it is determined that the normal electric open/close execution mode flag is not ON (Sm1004: NO), this normal electric accessory control process is terminated.

In step Sm1005, normal switch scenario selection processing is executed. The normal switching scenario selection process is a process of selecting the type of the normal switching scenario to be referenced in the normal switching execution mode based on the normal switching scenario selection table and the normal switching scenario selection table. Specifically, for example, when the normal pattern A flag as the normal pattern type flag is ON, the normal electric opening and closing scenario A is selected. After executing step Sm1005, the process proceeds to step Sm1006.

In step Sm1006, normal electric opening time setting processing is executed. The general electric opening time setting process is a process of setting the temporal length of the general electric opening period (hereinafter also referred to as the general electric opening time). Specifically, in the present embodiment, the general electrical opening time information is acquired from the general electrical switching scenario selected by the general electrical switching scenario selection process described above, and the acquired general electrical opening time information is stored in the general electrical switching scenario provided in the RAM 64. Set to the electric opening time timer counter. The value of this general electrical opening time timer counter is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is executed. After executing step Sm1006, the process proceeds to step Sm1007.

In step Sm1007, a general electric opening command is set. The set general electric opening command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (step Sm0503) in the normal process (FIG. 75). The sound emission control device 90 is set to execute the general electric opening effect and the right-handed informing effect based on the reception of the general electric opening command. After executing step Sm1007, the process advances to step Sm1008 to turn on the common electric opening period flag. After that, the normal electric accessary product control process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sm1003 that the general electric opening period flag is ON (Sm1003: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm1009.

In step Sm1009, it is determined whether or not the general electric opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the general electrical opening time timer counter set as the general electrical opening time in the general electrical opening time setting process described above is "0". If it is determined in step Sm1009 that the general electric opening period has ended (Sm1009: YES), the process advances to step Sm1010 to turn off the general electric opening period flag. After that, the process proceeds to step Sm1011.

In step Sm1011, the general electric switching processing period flag is turned ON. After that, the process advances to step Sm1012 to set a general electric switch processing period command. The set general electric switching process period command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (step Sm0503) in the normal process (FIG. 75). This general electric switching processing period command includes information on the number of times the electric accessory 34b is opened during the current general electric switching processing period. The sound emission control device 90 sets so as to execute an effect corresponding to the number of times the normal electric accessory 34b is opened, based on the received normal electric opening/closing processing period command. After executing step Sm1012, this normal electric accessory control process ends.

If it is determined in step Sm1002 that the normal switching process period flag is ON (Sm1002: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm1013 to execute the normal switching process. In the normal electric switching process, the opening/closing operation of the normal electric accessory 34b is controlled based on the normal electric switching scenario selected by the normal electric switching scenario selection process described above. The details of the general electric switching process will be described later. After executing step Sm1013, the process proceeds to step Sm1014.

In step Sm1014, it is determined whether or not the general electric switching processing period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the final opening of the normal electric accessory 34b based on the general electric switching scenario is completed and the closed state is reached, and the final opening of the normal electric accessory 34b is completed and closed. When it is determined that the state has been established, it is determined that the normal electric switching processing period has ended. In step Sm1014, when it is determined that the normal electric opening/closing processing period has not ended (Sm1014: NO), the normal electric accessory control processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sm1014 that the normal switching processing period has ended (Sm1014: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm1015 to turn off the normal switching processing period flag. After that, the process proceeds to step Sm1016.

In step Sm1016, a normal electric ending time setting process is executed. The general electric ending time setting process is a process of setting the temporal length of the general electric ending period (hereinafter also referred to as the general electric ending time). Specifically, in the present embodiment, the general electrical switching ending time information is acquired from the general electrical switching scenario selected by the general electrical switching scenario selection process described above, and the acquired general electrical ending time information is stored in the general electrical switching scenario provided in the RAM 64. set to the end time timer counter. The value of this electric ending time timer counter is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is executed. After executing step Sm1016, the process proceeds to step Sm1017.

In step Sm1017, a general electric ending command is set. The set general electric ending command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (step Sm0503) in the normal process (FIG. 75). After executing step Sm1017, the process proceeds to step Sm1018 to turn on the common electric ending period flag. After that, the normal electric accessary product control process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sm1001 that the general electric ending period flag is ON (Sm1001: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm1019.

In step Sm1019, it is determined whether or not the general electric ending period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the general electrical ending time timer counter set as the general electrical ending time in the general electrical ending time setting process described above is "0". In step Sm1019, when it is determined that the normal electric ending period has not ended (Sm1019: NO), this normal electric accessory control process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sm1019 that the general electric ending period has ended (Sm1019: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm1020.

In step Sm1020, the general electric ending period flag is turned off. Then, it progresses to step Sm1021 and turns OFF the normal figure classification flag. After that, the process proceeds to step Sm1022.

In step Sm1022, a general electric switching execution mode end command is set. The set general electric switching execution mode end command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (step Sm0503) in the normal process (FIG. 75). After that, the process proceeds to step Sm1023 to turn off the normal switching execution mode flag. After that, the normal electric accessary product control process is terminated.

<Common electric switch processing>
Next, normal electric switching processing will be described. The general electric opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control unit 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 80: Sm1013) of the normal electric accessory control process.

FIG. 81 is a flow chart showing normal power switching processing. In step Sm1101, it is determined whether or not the normal electric accessory 34b is open. In step Sm1101, when it is determined that the normal electric accessory 34b is not open (Sm1101: NO), the process proceeds to step Sm1102.

In step Sm1102, it is determined whether or not the condition for opening the normal electric accessory 34b is established. Specifically, the normal switching scenario selected by the normal switching scenario selection process is read, and it is determined whether or not the opening condition of the normal electric accessory 34b set in the normal switching scenario is established. In step Sm1102, when it is determined that the condition for opening the normal electric accessory 34b is satisfied (Sm1102: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm1103.

In step Sm1103, the normal electric accessory 34b is released. After that, the process proceeds to step Sm1104.

In step Sm1104, a general electric disconnection command is set. The common electric open command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the common electric accessory 34b has been opened. The utility power release command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 75: Sm0503) of the normal process. After step Sm1104 is executed, the main power switching process is terminated.

In step Sm1102, when it is determined that the opening condition of the normal electric accessory 34b is not established (Sm1102: NO), the normal electric opening/closing process is terminated as it is.

In step Sm1101, when it is determined that the normal electric accessory 34b is being opened (Sm1101: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm1105.

In step Sm1105, it is determined whether or not the closing condition of the normal electric accessory 34b is established. Specifically, the normal switching scenario selected by the normal switching scenario selection process is read, and it is determined whether or not the closing condition of the normal electric accessory 34b set in the normal switching scenario is established. In step Sm1105, when it is determined that the closing condition of the normal electric accessory 34b is satisfied (Sm1105: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm1106.

In step Sm1106, the normal electric accessory 34b is closed. After that, the process proceeds to step Sm1107.

In step Sm1107, a general electric closing command is set. The general electric closing command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the general electric accessory 34b is closed. The general electricity closing command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 75: Sm0503) of the normal process. After step Sm1107 is executed, the main power switch processing ends.

In step Sm1105, when it is determined that the closing condition of the normal electric accessory 34b is not established (Sm1105: NO), the normal electric opening/closing process is terminated as it is.

<Special symbol control processing>
Next, special design control processing is explained. The special symbol control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (Fig. 75: Sm0508).

FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing special symbol control processing. In step Sm1201, a special symbol variation start process, which is a process for starting the variation of the special symbol in the special symbol display section 37a, is executed. The details of the special symbol variation start processing will be described later. After executing step Sm1201, the process proceeds to step Sm1202.

In step Sm1202, a special symbol variation stop process, which is a process for stopping the variation of the special symbol in the special symbol display section 37a, is executed. The details of the special symbol variation stop processing will be described later. After executing step Sm1202, this special symbol control process is terminated.

<Special symbol fluctuation start processing>
Next, the special symbol variation start process will be described. The special symbol variation start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the special symbol control process (Fig. 82: Sm1201).

FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing special symbol variation start processing. In step Sm1301, it is determined whether or not the special electric opening/closing execution mode flag stored in the main RAM 64 is ON. The special electric opening/closing execution mode flag is a flag that turns ON when the special electric opening/closing execution mode is started, and turns OFF when the special electric opening/closing execution mode ends. That is, the special electric opening/closing execution mode flag is a flag that is ON during execution of the special electric opening/closing execution mode.

In step Sm1301, when it is determined that the special electric opening/closing execution mode flag is ON (Sm1301: YES), this special symbol variation start process is terminated without executing any of the processes after step Sm1302 described later. That is, during the execution of the special electric opening/closing execution mode, the special symbols in the special symbol display section 37a do not start to change. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sm1301 that the special electric opening/closing execution mode flag is not ON (Sm1301: NO), the process proceeds to step Sm1302.

In step Sm1302, it is determined whether or not the V winning flag stored in the main RAM 64 is ON. In step Sm1302, when it is determined that the V winning flag is ON (step Sm1302: YES), this special symbol variation start process is terminated without executing any of the processes after step Sm1303, which will be described later. That is, when the V winning flag is ON, the special symbols in the special symbol display portion 37a do not start to change. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sm1302 that the V winning flag is not ON (Sm1302: NO), the process proceeds to step Sm1303.

In step Sm1303, it is determined whether or not the special figure fluctuation flag stored in the main side RAM 64 is ON. The flag during special symbol fluctuation is a flag that turns ON when the special symbol in the special symbol display section 37a starts to fluctuate, and turns OFF when the special symbol fluctuates. That is, during special figure fluctuation flag, it is the flag which has become ON during fluctuation in the special design. In step Sm1303, when it is determined that the flag during special figure fluctuation is ON (step Sm1303: YES), without executing any of the processing after step Sm1304 described later, the special symbol fluctuation start processing is terminated. . That is, when the special symbol fluctuation flag is ON, the special symbol fluctuation in the special symbol display portion 37a is not started. On the other hand, in step Sm1303, when it is determined that the flag during special figure fluctuation is not ON (step Sm1303: NO), that is, when it is determined that the special symbol is not in fluctuation, the process proceeds to step Sm1304.

In step Sm1304, it is determined whether or not the special figure fluctuation start flag is ON. As described above, the special figure fluctuation start flag indicates that the game ball entered the special figure start port 34a in a situation where the special electric opening/closing execution mode is not being executed and the special symbol is not fluctuating in the special symbol display section 37a. This is a flag that is turned ON when In step Sm1304, when it is determined that the special figure fluctuation start flag is not ON (Sm1304: NO), this special symbol fluctuation start processing is terminated. On the other hand, in step Sm1304, when it is determined that the special figure fluctuation start flag is ON (Sm1304: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm1305. That is, when the game ball enters the special symbol start port 34a in a situation where the special electric opening/closing execution mode is not being executed, the V winning flag is not ON, and the special symbol is not fluctuating in the special symbol display section 37a. , the process proceeds to step Sm1305.

In step Sm1305, the special figure fluctuation start flag is turned OFF. After that, the process proceeds to step Sm1306.

In step Sm1306, a special figure success/failure determination process, which is a process for determining whether or not to win a special figure hit (a special figure big hit or a special figure small hit), is executed. Specifically, in the special figure validity determination process, based on the value of the special figure validity determination counter Cn1 stored in the special figure determination area 64e and the above-described special figure validity determination table, whether to win a special figure determine whether or not After executing step Sm1306, the process proceeds to step Sm1307.

In step Sm1307, a special figure type determination process, which is a process for determining the type of special symbol, is executed. Specifically, in the special figure type determination process, the special figure type determination table described above is selected according to the result of the special figure determination, and the value of the special figure type determination counter Cn2 stored in the special figure determination area 64e , Based on the selected special symbol type determination table, the type of special symbol is determined. After executing step Sm1307, the process proceeds to step Sm1308.

In step Sm1308, the special figure type flag corresponding to the special symbol type determined in the special figure type determination process of step Sm1307 is turned ON. Specifically, for example, when it is determined that it is a special symbol A in the special symbol type determination processing of step Sm1307, the special symbol A flag is turned ON as a special symbol type flag, and when it is determined that it is a special symbol B , the special symbol B flag is turned ON as a special symbol type flag. After executing step Sm1308, the process proceeds to step Sm1309.

In step Sm1309, a special figure fluctuation time setting process is executed. The special figure variation time setting process is a process of setting the special symbol variation time (special figure variation time) in the special symbol display section 37a. The details of the special figure fluctuation time setting process will be described later. After executing step Sm1309, the process proceeds to step Sm1310.

In step Sm1310, a special figure variation command is set. The special figure variation command includes information indicating that the current symbol variation is based on the entry of the game ball into the special figure start port 34a and the information of the special figure variation time set in step Sm1309. is After executing step Sm1310, the process proceeds to step Sm1311.

In step Sm1311, a special figure type command is set. The special figure type command includes the information of the result of the special figure propriety determination (presence or absence of special figure hit) and the result of the special figure type determination (type of special symbol).

The special figure variation command and the special figure type command set in steps Sm1310 and Sm1311 are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 by the command output process (step Sm0503) of the normal process (FIG. 75). The sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the performance based on the received special figure variation command and the special figure type command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the presentation is executed. After executing step Sm1311, the process proceeds to step Sm1312.

In step Sm1312, the special symbols in the special symbol display section 37a are started to fluctuate. After that, the process proceeds to step Sm1313, and the special figure fluctuating flag stored in the main side RAM 64 is turned ON. After that, the special symbol variation start process is terminated.

<Special figure fluctuation time setting process>
Next, special figure fluctuation time setting processing is explained. The special symbol variation time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the special symbol variation start process (FIG. 83: Sm1309).

FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing a special figure fluctuation time setting process. In step Sm1401, the value of the special figure variation type determination counter Cs4 stored in the normal figure variation type determination counter buffer of the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired. After that, the process proceeds to step Sm1402.

In step Sm1402, with reference to the special figure fluctuation time table stored in the various table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the special figure fluctuation type determination counter Cs4 of this time is acquired. Then, it advances to step Sm1403, sets the fluctuation time information which is acquired to the special figure fluctuation time timer counter which is provided in various counter areas 64d of RAM64. The value of this special figure fluctuation time timer counter is subtracted by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is executed. After executing step Sm1403, this special figure fluctuation time setting process is terminated.

<Special symbol fluctuation stop processing>
Next, the special symbol variation stop processing will be described. The special symbol variation stop process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the special symbol control process (Fig. 82: Sm1202).

FIG. 85 is a flow chart showing special symbol variation stop processing. In step Sm1501, it is determined whether or not the special figure fluctuation flag is ON. In step Sm1501, when it is determined that the special symbol fluctuation flag is not ON (step Sm1501: NO), this special symbol fluctuation stop processing is terminated. On the other hand, in step Sm1501, when it is determined that the special figure fluctuation flag is ON (step Sm1501: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm1502.

In step Sm1502, it is determined whether or not the special figure fluctuation time set in the special figure fluctuation time setting process (FIG. 84) has passed. Specifically, it determines whether the value of the special figure fluctuation time timer counter in the main side RAM 64 has become "0", and if it is "0", it is determined that the special figure fluctuation time has elapsed do. In step Sm1502, when it is determined that the special figure fluctuation time has not passed (step Sm1502: NO), this special symbol fluctuation stop processing is terminated. On the other hand, in step Sm1502, when it is determined that the special figure fluctuation time has elapsed (step Sm1502: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm1503.

In step Sm1503, the special symbol that is fluctuating in the special symbol display section 37a is stopped and displayed in a display mode corresponding to the special symbol type flag that is ON. As a result, the special symbol in the display mode corresponding to the result of the special symbol lottery is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display section 37a. After executing step Sm1503, the process proceeds to step Sm1504.

In step Sm1504, it is determined whether or not the special figure type flag corresponding to the special figure per (special figure big hit or special figure small hit) is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure propriety determination related to the variation of the special symbol of this time is a special figure. In step Sm1504, if it is determined that the special figure type flag corresponding to the special figure is not ON (step Sm1504: NO), that is, the result of the special figure propriety determination related to the fluctuation of the special symbol of this time is out of the special figure. When there is, it advances to step Sm1505, turns off the special figure classification flag which is ON. After that, the process proceeds to step Sm1507, and the special figure fluctuation flag is turned OFF. After that, the special symbol variation stop processing is terminated. It should be noted that, in this embodiment, the results of the special figure propriety determination are all special figure small hits, so it is possible to proceed to step Sm1505 by determining that the special figure type flag corresponding to the special figure per step Sm1504 is not ON. do not have.

On the other hand, in step Sm1504, if it is determined that the special figure type flag corresponding to the special figure is ON (step Sm1504: YES), i. If it is a hit, the process advances to step Sm1506 to turn on the special electric opening/closing execution mode flag. After that, the process proceeds to step Sm1507, and the special figure fluctuation flag is turned OFF. After that, the special symbol variation stop processing is terminated. Thereby, when the result of the special figure propriety determination related to the variation of the special symbol of this time is a special figure hit, the special electric opening/closing execution mode is started.

<Special electric accessory control processing>
Next, the special electric accessary product control process will be described. The special electric accessory control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (Fig. 75: Sm0509).

FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing a special electric accessary product control process. In step Sm1601, it is determined whether or not the special electric ending period flag is ON. The special electric ending period flag is a flag that is turned ON at the start of the special electric ending period and turned OFF at the end of the special electric ending period. That is, the special electric ending period flag is a flag for determining whether or not it is during the special electric ending period.

If it is determined in step Sm1601 that the special electric ending period flag is not ON (Sm1601: NO), the process advances to step Sm1602 to determine whether or not the special electric opening/closing processing period flag is ON. The special electric opening/closing processing period flag is a flag that is turned ON at the start of the special electric opening/closing processing period and turned OFF at the end of the special electric opening/closing processing period. That is, the special electric opening/closing processing period flag is a flag for determining whether or not the special electric opening/closing processing period is in progress.

If it is determined in step Sm1602 that the special electric opening/closing processing period flag is not ON (Sm1602: NO), the process advances to step Sm1603 to determine whether or not the special electric opening period flag is ON. The special electric opening period flag is a flag that is turned ON at the start of the special electric opening period and turned OFF at the end of the special electric opening period. That is, the special electric opening period flag is a flag for determining whether or not it is during the special electric opening period.

If it is determined in step Sm1603 that the special electric opening period flag is not ON (Sm1603: NO), the process advances to step Sm1604 to determine whether or not the special electric open/close execution mode flag is ON. In step Sm1604, when it is determined that the special electric opening/closing execution mode flag is ON (Sm1604: YES), the process proceeds to the processing group for starting the special electric opening/closing execution mode in step Sm1607 and later described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sm1604 that the special electric opening/closing execution mode flag is not ON (Sm1604: NO), the process advances to step Sm1605 to determine whether or not the V winning flag is ON. At step Sm1605, if it is determined that the V winning flag is ON (step Sm1605: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm1606 to turn ON the special electric opening/closing execution mode flag and the V opportunity flag, and then step Sm1607 to be described later. It proceeds to the processing group for starting the subsequent special electric opening/closing execution mode. The V trigger flag is a flag for determining whether or not the trigger for execution of the current special electric opening/closing execution mode is due to the V winning. On the other hand, in step Sm1605, when it is determined that the V winning flag is not ON (step Sm1605: NO), this special electric auditors product control process is terminated. That is, in the present embodiment, not only when the special figure is won in the special figure lottery (when the special electric opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON), but also when the game ball enters the V winning opening 57av and the V winning jackpot (When the V winning flag is turned ON), the special electric opening/closing execution mode is also started.

In step Sm1607, special electric switching scenario selection processing is executed. The special electric switching scenario selection process selects the type of the special electric switching scenario to be referred to in the special electric switching execution mode based on the V trigger flag, the V winning type flag, the special electric power type flag, and the special electric switching scenario selection table described above. It is a process to Specifically, for example, when the V opportunity flag is OFF and the special symbol A flag is ON as the special symbol type flag, the special symbol opening/closing scenario A for the special symbol small prize is selected. Further, for example, when the V opportunity flag is ON and the V prize A flag as the V prize type flag is ON, the special electric opening/closing scenario A for the V prize jackpot is selected. After executing step Sm1607, the process proceeds to step Sm1608.

In step Sm1608, special electric opening time setting processing is executed. The special electric opening time setting process is a process of setting the length of time of the special electric opening period (hereinafter also referred to as special electric opening time). Specifically, in this embodiment, the special electric opening time information is obtained from the special electric opening/closing scenario selected by the special electric opening/closing scenario selection process described above, and the obtained special electric opening time information is stored in the special electric opening time timer counter provided in the RAM 64. set to The value of the special electric opening time timer counter is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is executed. After executing step Sm1608, the process proceeds to step Sm1609.

In step Sm1609, a special electric opening command is set. The set special electric opening command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (step Sm0503) in the normal process (FIG. 75). The sound emission control device 90 sets so as to execute the special electric opening effect and the right-handed information effect based on the reception of the special electric opening command. After executing step Sm1609, the process advances to step Sm1610 to turn ON the special electric opening period flag. After that, the special electric accessary product control process is terminated.

When it is determined in step Sm1603 that the special electric opening period flag is ON (Sm1603: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm1611.

In step Sm1611, it is determined whether or not the special electric opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the special electric opening time timer counter set as the special electric electric opening time in the special electric opening time setting process described above is "0". If it is determined in step Sm1611 that the special electric opening period has ended (Sm1611: YES), the process advances to step Sm1612 to turn off the special electric opening period flag. After that, the process proceeds to step Sm1613.

In step Sm1613, round display start processing, which is processing for displaying the number of rounds in the current special electric opening/closing execution mode on the round display unit 39, is executed. Specifically, the number of rounds set in the selected special electric opening/closing scenario is read, and the read number of rounds is displayed on the round display section 39 . After executing step Sm1613, the process proceeds to step Sm1614.

In step Sm1614, the special electric switching processing period flag is turned ON. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sm1615 to set a special electric switching processing period command. The set special electric opening/closing processing period command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output processing (step Sm0503) in the normal processing (FIG. 75). This special electric opening/closing processing period command includes information on the number of times the first special electric accessory 57b or the second special electric accessory 58b is opened during the current special electric opening/closing processing period. The sound emission control device 90 is set to execute an effect corresponding to the number of times the first special electric accessory 57b or the second special electric accessory 58b is opened based on the received special electric opening/closing processing period command. After executing step Sm1615, this special electric accessary product control process is terminated.

In step Sm1602, when it is determined that the special electric switching process period flag is ON (Sm1602: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm1616 to execute the special electric switching process. In the special electric opening/closing process, the opening/closing operation of the first special electric accessory 57b or the second special electric accessory 58b is controlled based on the special electric opening/closing scenario selected by the special electric opening/closing scenario selection process described above. The details of the special electric opening/closing process will be described later. After executing step Sm1616, the process proceeds to step Sm1617.

In step Sm1617, it is determined whether or not the special electric switching processing period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether the last opening of the first special electric role product 57b or the second special electric role product 58b based on the special electric opening and closing scenario is completed and the closed state is reached, and the first special electric role When it is determined that the final opening of the object 57b or the second special electric accessory 58b is completed and the closed state is reached, it is determined that the special electric opening/closing processing period has ended. In step Sm1617, when it is determined that the special electric opening/closing processing period has not ended (Sm1617: NO), this special electric accessary product control processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sm1617 that the special electric opening/closing processing period has ended (Sm1617: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm1618, and the special electric opening/closing processing period flag is turned OFF. After that, the process proceeds to step Sm1619.

In step Sm1619, round display end processing, which is processing for ending the display of the number of rounds on the round display unit 39, is executed. After that, the process proceeds to step Sm1620.

In step Sm1620, special electric ending time setting processing is executed. The special electric ending time setting process is a process of setting the length of time of the special electric ending period (hereinafter also referred to as special electric ending time). Specifically, in this embodiment, special electric ending time information is obtained from the special electric opening/closing scenario selected by the special electric opening/closing scenario selection processing described above, and the obtained special electric ending time information is stored in the special electric ending time timer counter provided in the RAM 64. set to The value of this special electric ending time timer counter is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is executed. After executing step Sm1620, the process proceeds to step Sm1621.

In step Sm1621, a special electric ending command is set. The set special electric ending command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (step Sm0503) in the normal process (FIG. 75). The sound emission control device 90 sets to execute the special electric ending effect based on the reception of the special electric ending command. After executing step Sm1621, the process advances to step Sm1622 to turn ON the special electric ending period flag. After that, the special electric accessary product control process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sm1601 that the special electric ending period flag is ON (Sm1601: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm1623.

In step Sm1623, it is determined whether or not the special electric ending period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the special electric ending time timer counter set as the special electric ending time in the special electric ending time setting process described above is "0". In step Sm1623, when it is determined that the special electric ending period has not ended (Sm1623: NO), this special electric auditors product control process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sm1623 that the special electric ending period has ended (Sm1623: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm1624.

In step Sm1624, the special electric ending period flag is turned off. After that, the process proceeds to step Sm1625.

In step Sm1625, it is determined whether or not the V trigger flag is ON. If it is determined in step Sm1625 that the V trigger flag is not ON (step Sm1625: NO), that is, if the trigger for execution of the current special electric opening/closing execution mode is not due to the V winning, the process proceeds to step Sm1626. , The special figure type flag is turned OFF. After that, the process proceeds to step Sm1628, which will be described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sm1625 that the V trigger flag is ON (step Sm1625: YES), that is, if the trigger for executing the current special electric opening/closing execution mode is the V winning, step Sm1627 to turn off the V opportunity flag, the V winning flag, and the V winning type flag. After that, the process proceeds to step Sm1628.

In step Sm1628, a special electric switching execution mode end command is set. The set special electric opening/closing execution mode end command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (step Sm0503) in the normal process (FIG. 75). The sound emission control device 90 sets to end the special electric ending presentation based on the reception of the special electric opening/closing execution mode end command. After that, the process proceeds to step Sm1629 to turn off the special electric opening/closing execution mode flag. After that, the special electric accessary product control process is terminated.

<Special electric switch processing>
Next, the special electric opening/closing process will be described. The special electric opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 86: Sm1616) of the special electric accessory control process.

FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing special electric opening/closing processing. In step Sm1701, it is determined whether or not the first special electric accessory 57b is open. In step Sm1701, when it is determined that the first special electric accessory 57b is not open (Sm1701: NO), the process proceeds to step Sm1702.

In step Sm1702, it is determined whether or not the condition for opening the first special electric accessory 57b is established. Specifically, the special electric opening/closing scenario selected by the special electric opening/closing scenario selection process is read, and it is determined whether or not the opening condition of the first special electric accessory 57b set in the special electric opening/closing scenario is established. In step Sm1702, when it is determined that the condition for opening the first special electric accessory 57b is satisfied (Sm1702: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm1703.

In step Sm1703, the first special electric accessory 57b is released. After that, the process proceeds to step Sm1704.

In step Sm1704, the first special electric release command is set. The first special electric open command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the first special electric accessory 57b has been opened. The first special electric release command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 75: Sm0503) of the normal process. After executing step Sm1704, the special electric switching process ends.

In step Sm1702, when it is determined that the condition for opening the first special electric accessory 57b is not established (Sm1702: NO), the process proceeds to step Sm1708, which will be described later.

In step Sm1701, when it is determined that the first special electric accessory 57b is open (Sm1701: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm1705.

In step Sm1705, it is determined whether or not the closing condition of the first special electric accessory 57b is established. Specifically, the special electric opening/closing scenario selected by the special electric opening/closing scenario selection process is read, and it is determined whether or not the closing condition of the first special electric accessory 57b set in the special electric opening/closing scenario is established. In step Sm1705, when it is determined that the closing condition of the first special electric accessory 57b is established (Sm1705: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm1706.

At step Sm1706, the first special electric accessory 57b is closed. After that, the process proceeds to step Sm1707.

In step Sm1707, the first special electric closing command is set. The first special electric closing command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the first special electric accessory 57b has closed. The first special electric closing command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 75: Sm0503) of the normal process. After executing step Sm1707, the special electric switching process ends.

In step Sm1705, when it is determined that the closing condition of the first special electric accessory 57b is not satisfied (Sm1705: NO), the process proceeds to step Sm1708, which will be described later.

In step Sm1708, it is determined whether or not the second special electric accessory 58b is open. In step Sm1708, when it is determined that the second special electric accessory 58b is not open (Sm1708: NO), the process proceeds to step Sm1709.

In step Sm1709, it is determined whether or not the condition for opening the second special electric accessory 58b is established. Specifically, the special electric opening/closing scenario selected by the special electric opening/closing scenario selection process is read, and it is determined whether or not the opening condition of the second special electric accessory 58b set in the special electric opening/closing scenario is established. In step Sm1709, when it is determined that the condition for opening the second special electric accessory 58b is satisfied (Sm1709: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm1710.

At step Sm1710, the second special electric accessory 58b is released. After that, the process proceeds to step Sm1711.

In step Sm1711, a second special electric release command is set. The second special electric opening command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the second special electric accessory 58b has been opened. The second special electric release command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 75: Sm0503) of the normal process. After executing step Sm1711, the special electric switching process ends.

In step Sm1709, when it is determined that the opening condition of the second special electric accessory 58b is not established (Sm1709: NO), this special electric opening/closing processing is terminated as it is.

In step Sm1708, when it is determined that the second special electric accessory 58b is open (Sm1708: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm1712.

In step Sm1712, it is determined whether or not the closing condition of the second special electric accessory 58b is established. Specifically, the special electric opening/closing scenario selected by the special electric opening/closing scenario selection process is read, and it is determined whether or not the closing condition of the second special electric accessory 58b set in the special electric opening/closing scenario is established. In step Sm1712, when it is determined that the closing condition of the second special electric accessory 58b is established (Sm1712: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm1713.

At step Sm1713, the second special electric accessory 58b is closed. After that, the process proceeds to step Sm1714.

In step Sm1714, a second special electric closing command is set. The second special electric closing command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the second special electric accessory 58b has closed. The second special electric closing command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 75: Sm0503) of the normal process. After executing step Sm1714, the special electric switching process ends.

In step Sm1712, when it is determined that the closing condition of the second special electric accessory 58b is not satisfied (Sm1712: NO), this special electric opening/closing process is terminated as it is.

<<2-6>> Various processes executed in the sound emission control device and the display control device:
Next, a specific example of control executed in the audio emission control device and the display control device will be described. The processing executed in the sound emission control device 90 will be described first, and then the processing executed in the display control device 100 will be described.

<Various processing executed in the sound emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, timer interrupt processing executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 will be described.

FIG. 88 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the sound and light side MPU 92 . Timer interrupt processing is repeatedly executed at a relatively short period (for example, 2 msec). Processing of each step executed in timer interrupt processing will be described below.

In step Sm3101, command storage processing is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing the received command in the sound and light side RAM 94 when a command is received from the main side MPU 62 . The sound and light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer for enabling storage and reading of commands received from the main side MPU 62, and the commands received from the main side MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer. , are read out sequentially according to the order in which they are stored. After executing step Sm3101, the process proceeds to step Sm3102.

In step Sm3102, the process for normal figure game round production is executed. In the process for the normal game round production, the process related to the production during execution of the normal game round is executed. Specifically, for example, when a general pattern variation command and a general pattern type command are received, the normal pattern type included in the general pattern variation time and the normal pattern type command included in the general pattern variation command Based on this, processing relating to variable display and stationary display of decorative symbols in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 is executed. After executing step Sm3102, the process proceeds to step Sm3103.

In step Sm3103, a normal electric opening/closing execution mode rendering process is executed. In the normal electric switching execution mode effect processing, processing related to the effect during execution of the normal electric switching execution mode is executed. Specifically, for example, when a general electric opening command is received, a general electric opening effect and a right hitting notification process corresponding to the type of the general electric opening/closing scenario are set to be executed. In addition, when the general electric switching processing period command is received, setting is made so that the general electric switching processing period production corresponding to the type of the general electric switching scenario is executed. In addition, when the general electric opening command is received, the general electric opening performance corresponding to the type of general electric opening and closing scenario and the number of times of opening the ordinary electric accessory 34b is executed. In addition, when the normal electric closing command or the normal electric ending command is received, the general electric closing performance corresponding to the type of the general electric opening and closing scenario and the number of times of closing of the normal electric accessory 34b is executed. Further, when it is 5 seconds before the end of the general electric ending period, the general electric ending effect is executed. After executing step Sm3103, the process proceeds to step Sm3104.

In step Sm3104, a special figure game round production process is executed. In the processing for special figure game round performance, the processing relating to the performance during execution of the special figure game round is executed. Specifically, for example, when receiving a special figure variation command and a special figure type command, the special figure variation time included in the special figure variation command and the special symbol type included in the special figure type command Based on this, the processing relating to the variable display and stop display of the decorative symbols in the sub-display area SA of the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 is executed. After executing step Sm3104, the process proceeds to step Sm3105.

In step Sm3105, a special electric opening/closing execution mode rendering process is executed. In the special electric opening/closing execution mode effect processing, processing relating to the effect during the execution of the special electric opening/closing execution mode is executed. Specifically, for example, when a special electric opening command is received, it is set to execute a special electric opening effect and a right hitting notification process corresponding to the type of the special electric opening/closing scenario. Also, when a special electric switching processing period command is received, a special electric switching processing period effect corresponding to the type of the special electric switching scenario is set to be executed. Also, when the special electric open command is received, a special electric open production corresponding to the type of the special electric open/close scenario and the number of times the special electric accessory is opened is executed. Also, when the special electric closing command is received, the special electric interval period effect corresponding to the type of the special electric opening/closing scenario and the number of times of closing the special electric accessory is executed. Also, when a special electric ending command is received, a special electric ending effect corresponding to the type of the special electric opening/closing scenario is executed. After executing step Sm3105, the process proceeds to step Sm3106.

In step Sm3106, a V winning effect process is executed. In the processing for the V prize effect, setting is made so as to execute an effect suggesting that the player has won the V prize when the V prize command is received. After executing step Sm3106, the process proceeds to step Sm3107.

In step Sm3107, light emission control processing for controlling light emission of various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, light emission control of various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read out in each of the effect processes described above. After executing step Sm3107, the process proceeds to step Sm3108.

At step Sm3108, an audio output control process for controlling the audio output of the speaker 46 is executed. In the audio output control process, the audio output control of the speaker 46 is performed based on the audio data read out in each of the production processes described above. After executing step Sm3108, the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

<Various processing executed in the display control device>
Next, processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

The processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 mainly includes a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on until the power is turned off, and a main processing that is executed when a command is received from the sound emission control device 90. There are command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing executed when a V interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal that is transmitted from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when rendering processing of an image for one frame is completed.

The MPU 102 executes main processing after power-on, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of commands and detection of V interrupt signals. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command interrupt processing is preferentially executed. Therefore, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound emission control device 90 and execute the V interrupt process.

<Main processing>
Next, main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. As described above, the main process is a process that is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. Processing of each step executed in the main processing will be described below.

In step Sm6101, initialization processing is executed. Specifically, first, processing for initializing the MPU 102 and clearing the storage of the work RAM 104 and the video RAM 107 is performed. Then, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107 . Furthermore, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107 and the extracted character information is written in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107 . Also, perform other necessary settings for initialization. After that, the process proceeds to step Sm6102.

In step Sm6102, interrupt permission setting is executed. After the interrupt permission setting is executed, in the main processing, infinite loop processing is executed until the power is turned off. Accordingly, after the interrupt permission is set, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing, which will be described below, are executed in accordance with the reception of a command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described. As described above, the command interrupt processing is processing that is executed each time a command is received from the sound emission control device 90 .

FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. In step Sm6201, command storage processing is executed. In the command storage process, received command data is extracted and the extracted command data is stored in a command storage area provided in work RAM 104 . Various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read by the command determination process of the V interrupt process, which will be described later, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. As described above, V interrupt processing is processing that is executed when a V interrupt signal from VDP 105 is detected. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command storage area are executed by the command interrupt process. Execute the displayed instructions.

As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame worth of image is completed and that is transmitted to the MPU 102 . Therefore, the MPU 102 executes V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, so that drawing instructions to the VDP 105 are issued every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame worth of image is completed. For this reason, the VDP 105 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to suppress the development of an image associated with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area in which the image information is stored. Details of the processing of each step of the V interrupt processing will be described below.

In step Sm6301, command handling processing is executed. In the command handling process, the contents of the command stored in the command storage area by the command interruption process (FIG. 90) are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when a moving image display start command corresponding to the advance notice performance is stored, control of image drawing and display is started so that the moving image corresponding to the notice performance is displayed on the pattern display device 41.例文帳に追加When a moving image display start command corresponding to the ready-to-win performance is stored, control of image drawing and display is started so that the moving image corresponding to the ready-to-win performance is displayed on the pattern display device 41.例文帳に追加

In the command processing (Sm6301), all commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and processing corresponding to all the analyzed commands is executed. The reason for this will be explained. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during the 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the effect is set by the sound emission control device 90 and the effect is started, there is a high possibility that various commands for specifying the content of the effect are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the state of the effect such as the advance notice effect and the stop pattern set by the sound emission control device 90, and display the effect image according to the state. The rendering of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the device 41 . Details of the command handling process will be described later.

In step Sm6302, display setting processing is executed. In the display setting process, based on the type of screen to be displayed on the pattern display device 41 set by the command handling process (Sm6301), etc., the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the pattern display device 41 is specified. . After that, the process proceeds to step Sm6303.

In step Sm6303, task processing is executed. In the task processing, based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the pattern display device 41 specified by the display setting processing (Sm6302), the type of character (sprite, display object) that constitutes the image is determined. Along with specifying, for each character (sprite), various parameters required for drawing, such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc., are determined. After that, the process proceeds to step Sm6304.

In step Sm6304, drawing processing is executed. In the drawing process, the types of various characters forming one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each character, which are determined by the task process (Sm6303), are transmitted to the VDP 105 . The VDP 105 executes an image drawing process based on these pieces of information, and together with a drive signal to cause the pattern display device 41 to display an image drawn based on the information received during the previous V interrupt process. The image data is transmitted to the pattern display device 41 . After that, the process proceeds to step Sm6305, and after executing other processes, the V interrupt process ends.

As described above, according to this embodiment, the following effects can be obtained.

In the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of times that the V winning jackpot can be consecutively won is determined based on the type of normal symbol. More specifically, based on the number of times the normal electric accessory 34b is opened in the general electric switching execution mode, the maximum number of times that the special electric switching execution mode can be executed based on the V winning jackpot during the execution of the general electric switching execution mode. Since it is determined, the number of times the normal electric accessory 34b is opened in the normal electric open/close execution mode is a very important factor for the player. Therefore, when the general electric opening/closing execution mode is executed by winning the general electric open/close execution mode in the general electric open/close execution mode, the player is interested in the number of times the electric accessory 34b is opened in the normal electric opening/closing execution mode. can be held, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the present embodiment, since the special figure jackpot is not set as a result of the special figure lottery, various restrictions imposed on pachinko machines in which the special figure jackpot is set are not imposed. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the pachinko machine is increased, and it becomes possible to design and manufacture pachinko machines with various playability (specs).

In addition, in this embodiment, since it does not have a high probability mode (so-called probability variable state) in which the probability of winning a special figure jackpot in the special figure lottery is high, the control can be simplified and these modes are provided. Various regulations imposed on pachinko machines that are Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the pachinko machine is increased, and it becomes possible to design and manufacture pachinko machines with various playability (specs).

In addition, in the present embodiment, a high frequency support mode (so-called electric support mode) in which the probability of winning per general drawing in the general drawing lottery increases, or the number of times the normal electric accessory 34b is opened in the case of winning per general drawing increases state), control can be simplified, and various restrictions imposed on pachinko machines having these modes are not imposed. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the pachinko machine is increased, and it becomes possible to design and manufacture pachinko machines with various playability.

In addition, in this embodiment, since it does not have a function to suspend the special figure lottery, the special figure reservation area for suspending the special figure lottery can be omitted from the main side RAM 64, and the storage area of the main side RAM 64 can be saved. It becomes possible to effectively utilize it for other purposes.

In addition, in the present embodiment, during execution of the general electric switching execution mode, the special electric switching execution mode based on the V prize jackpot is executed multiple times without substantial lottery (so-called jackpots run consecutively). Therefore, when a general pachinko machine wins a series of jackpots, for example, even though it is in a high probability mode (so-called variable probability state), it is difficult to win a jackpot in the jackpot lottery, and the next special electric opening and closing execution mode does not start easily. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of such a situation (so-called addiction).

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the game ball enters the normal figure start gate 35 and is elected per normal figure in the general figure lottery and the general electric opening and closing execution mode is executed, the game ball is the distribution path 301 in the firing mode (the so-called "right-handed" firing mode), if it is continuously fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds, the game ball is a special figure start opening during the execution of the general electric opening and closing execution mode 34a, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small winning is executed, and the game ball enters the first big winning hole 57a during the execution of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small winning, The game ball that entered the 1 big winning hole 57a enters the V winning hole 57av, and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning big win is executed.

Then, according to this embodiment, the time required from the start to the end of the general electric switching execution mode, the time required from the start to the end of the special electric switching execution mode based on the special figure small hit, and the special electric power based on the V winning jackpot It can be set to a time longer than the sum of the time required from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode (total time: 128.0 seconds). More specifically, in a situation where the game ball is continuously shot at intervals of 0.6 seconds in a shooting mode (so-called "right-handed" shooting mode) that reaches the distribution passage 301, the general electric switching execution mode starts. When the time required until the special electric switching execution mode based on the V winning jackpot ends (the time from time t2 to time t10 in FIG. 68) is defined as the specific required time, from the start of the electric switching execution mode The time required for completion can be set to a time longer than the specific required time. Therefore, even after the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit ends, and then the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot ends, the electric opening/closing execution mode continues, and the electric opening/closing execution is continued. During the continuation of the mode, there is a case where the normal electric accessory 34b transitions to the open state and the game ball can enter the special figure start port 34a.

Then, according to the present embodiment, when the normal electric accessory 34b is elected in the normal drawing lottery for the normal drawing that opens two or more times, during the execution of the normal electric opening and closing execution mode, a special electric call based on the V winning jackpot After the opening/closing execution mode ends, the normal electric accessory 34b transitions from the closed state to the open state, so that the game ball enters the special figure start port 34a after the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot ends. becomes possible. Then, if the game ball enters the special figure starting port 34a after the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize big win is completed, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small win is executed again, and then again the V prize big win. The special electric switching execution mode based on will be executed. That is, when the ordinary electric accessory 34b is elected in the general drawing lottery for the general drawing that opens two or more times and the general electric opening and closing execution mode is executed, the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit and the V prize jackpot The special electric switching execution mode based on this will be executed multiple times. When the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot is executed a plurality of times, the player can obtain an opportunity to obtain a large amount of game balls as prize balls. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong sense of anticipation for the start of the normal electric opening/closing execution mode, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, according to the present embodiment, during the variation of the special symbol, during the execution of the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the special small prize, or during the execution of the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot When the ball enters the ball, it avoids acquiring various counter values for the special figure lottery (in other words, it does not have a function to hold the special figure lottery). Even if the game ball enters the special figure start hole 34a during the execution of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the win or during the execution of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot, after that, the special electric opening/closing execution based on the special small prize. The mode will not be executed, and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot will not be executed either, which is disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, the player wants the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot to end before the timing at which the game ball can enter the special figure start port 34a comes. It can make you feel nervous.

Also, if, unlike the present embodiment, during the variation of the special symbol, during the execution of the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the special small hit, or during the execution of the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot, the game ball starts the special figure In the case of adopting a configuration that does not avoid obtaining various counter values for the special figure lottery even when the ball enters the mouth 34a (that is, a configuration with a function of holding the special figure lottery), the normal electric accessory 34b If a plurality of game balls enter the special figure start port 34a in one opening, a plurality of special figure lotteries will be suspended, and regardless of the number of times the normal electric accessory 34b is opened in the general electric open/close execution mode However, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning prize may be executed multiple times.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, even if a plurality of game balls enter the special figure start opening 34a in one opening of the normal electric accessory 34b, one of the normal electric accessories 34b It is possible to realize a playability in which the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small win and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot are executed once each for the opening of the times.

In addition, according to the present embodiment, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot has a predetermined time required from start to finish regardless of the shooting mode of the game ball and the behavior of the game ball after shooting. Therefore, the length of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot does not become longer than the predetermined length. Therefore, for example, even at the timing when the normal electric accessory 34b transitions to the open state due to the length of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot becoming longer than the predetermined length, the special electric call based on the V winning jackpot It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the open/close execution mode has not yet ended. As a result, even at the timing when the game ball entered the special figure starting port 34a, the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot was not finished, and the game ball entered the special figure starting port 34a. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a disadvantageous situation for the player such that the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small prize is not executed and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot is not executed.

In addition, according to the present embodiment, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot has a predetermined time required from start to finish regardless of the shooting mode of the game ball and the behavior of the game ball after shooting. Since it is configured to have a predetermined length, the special electric switching execution mode based on the V prize jackpot ends early during the electric interval period of the electric switching execution mode, and the special electric switching execution mode ends. It is possible to suppress the delay of the game due to the lengthening of the period until the next opening of the normal electric accessory 34b.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in the general electric opening/closing execution mode, the general electric accessory 34b transitions from the open state to the closed state until the general electric accessory 34b transitions from the closed state to the open state. The length can be set to a longer time (135.0 seconds) than the time (for example, 126.0 seconds) required from the start to the end of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot. The reason for adopting such a configuration will be described.

First, unlike the present embodiment, the length of the general electric switch interval period of the general electric switching execution mode is set to the time required from the start to the end of the special electric switching execution mode based on the V winning jackpot (for example, 126.0 A case will be described where a configuration of a comparative example in which a time (for example, 80.0 seconds) is set to a time shorter than the second) is adopted.

First, in the configuration of the comparative example, the case where the game ball enters the special figure start opening 34a in the first open state of the normal electric accessory 34b in the normal electric open/close execution mode will be described. In this case, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small win is started, and then the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot is started. After that, the first general electric interval period in the general electric switching execution mode ends, and in the second open state of the ordinary electric accessory 34b, the special electric switching execution mode based on the V prize jackpot continues. . Therefore, even if the game ball enters the special figure start hole 34a, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize big hit are not newly started. After that, the second general electric interval period in the general electric opening and closing execution mode ends, and in the third open state of the ordinary electric accessory 34b, the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot has already ended, so the game When the ball enters the special figure starting port 34a, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small win is newly started, and then the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize big win is started. That is, in this case, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small prize and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot are performed in the first and third open states of the normal electric accessory 34b in the general electric opening/closing execution mode. It will be started when the game ball enters the special figure start port 34a, but it will not start even if the game ball enters the special figure start port 34a in the second open state. .

Next, in the configuration of the comparative example, the case where the game ball does not enter the special figure starting port 34a in the first open state of the normal electric accessory 34b in the normal electric open/close execution mode will be described. In this case, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small win is not started, and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is not started either. After that, the first general electric interval period in the general electric opening and closing execution mode ends, and in the second open state of the ordinary electric accessory 34b, the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot is not executed, so the game ball enters the special figure starting port 34a, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small win is started, and then the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is started. After that, the second general electric interval period in the general electric switching execution mode ends, and in the third open state of the ordinary electric accessory 34b, the special electric switching execution mode based on the V prize jackpot continues. . Therefore, even if the game ball enters the special figure start hole 34a, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize big hit are not newly started. After that, the third general electric interval period in the general electric opening and closing execution mode ends, and in the fourth open state of the ordinary electric accessory 34b, the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot has already ended, so the game When the ball enters the special figure starting port 34a, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small win is newly started, and then the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize big win is started. That is, in this case, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small prize and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot are performed in the second and fourth open states of the normal electric accessory 34b in the general electric opening/closing execution mode. It will be started when the game ball enters the special figure start port 34a, but even if the game ball enters the special figure start port 34a in the third open state, it will not be started. .

In this way, unlike the present embodiment, the configuration of the comparative example is adopted in which the length of the general electric switching interval period of the general electric switching execution mode is set to a time shorter than the length of the special electric switching execution mode based on the V winning jackpot. In this case, the timing of starting the special electric switching execution mode based on the special figure small win and the special electric switching execution mode based on the V winning jackpot during the execution of the general electric switching execution mode is not fixed, and the flow of the game becomes complicated. There is a problem that the control of the game becomes difficult.

Next, the length of the general electric switch interval period of the general electric switching execution mode is set to a longer time (135 0 seconds) is adopted.

First, in the configuration of the present embodiment, the case where the game ball enters the special figure start port 34a in the first open state of the normal electric accessory 34b in the normal electric open/close execution mode will be described. In this case, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small win is executed, and then the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot is executed. After that, the first general electric interval period in the general electric opening and closing execution mode ends, and in the second open state of the ordinary electric accessory 34b, the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot has already ended, so the game When the ball enters the special figure starting port 34a, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small win is newly started, and then the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize big win is started.

Next, in the configuration of the present embodiment, the case where the game ball does not enter the special figure start port 34a in the first open state of the normal electric accessory 34b in the normal electric open/close execution mode will be described. In this case, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small win is not executed, and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning big prize is not executed either. After that, the first general electric interval period in the general electric opening and closing execution mode ends, and in the second open state of the ordinary electric accessory 34b, the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot is not executed, so the game ball enters the special figure starting port 34a, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small win is started, and then the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is started.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the length of the general electric switching interval period of the general electric switching execution mode is set to the time required from the start to the end of the special electric switching execution mode based on the V winning jackpot (126.0 seconds). ) is set to a longer time (135.0 seconds), so at the timing when the normal electric accessory 34b becomes open in the normal electric open/close execution mode, the normal electric accessory 34b becomes open. Regardless of how many times it is, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot is not being executed or has already ended. Therefore, even though the game ball entered the special figure start opening 34a when the normal electric accessory 34b was in the open state in the general electric opening and closing execution mode, the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit and V There is no possibility that the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the winning jackpot will not be started. That is, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to fix the timing of starting the special electric switching execution mode based on the special electric switching execution mode and the special electric switching execution mode based on the V winning jackpot during the execution of the general electric switching execution mode, It is possible to suppress the flow of the game from becoming complicated, and by setting the number of times that the normal electric accessory 34b is in the open state during the execution of the normal electric switching execution mode, the normal electric switching execution mode is executed. It is possible to set the upper limit of the number of times that the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot can be executed.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the normal electric accessory 34b last transitions from the open state to the closed state in the general electric opening and closing execution mode, and the general electric ending, which is the period until the general drawing lottery can be executed. The length of the period can be set to a longer time (140.0 seconds) than the time (for example, 126.0 seconds) required from the start to the end of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot. The reason for adopting this configuration will be described.

First, unlike the present embodiment, when adopting a configuration in which the length of the general electric ending period is set to be shorter than the time required from the start to the end of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot. will be explained. In this configuration, for example, after the end of the general electric ending period, the general electric drawing is executed, and when the general electric drawing is won, the general electric switching execution mode is executed, and the game is played during the execution of the general electric switching execution mode. There is a possibility that the ball enters the special figure starting port 34a and the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit is executed. However, in this configuration, if the special electric switching execution mode based on the V prize jackpot is executed immediately after the start of the general electricity ending period, even after the general electricity ending period ends, the special electric switching operation based on the V prize jackpot The execution mode continues, and even at the timing when the game ball enters the special figure start port 34a, there is a case where the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot continues. In this case, even if the game ball enters the special figure starting port 34a, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit is not executed, and there is a problem that the player is in a disadvantageous situation.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the length of the general electric ending period can be set to a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot. To suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a V prize jackpot is continued even after a general electric ending period ends, and to suppress a situation disadvantageous to a player. can be done.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the length of the general electric ending period is set to be equal to or longer than the length of the general electric interval period. The flow of the game can be realized in the same manner during the general electric ending period of the general electric opening/closing execution mode. As a result, in both the general electricity interval period and the general electricity ending period in the general electricity switching execution mode, a new special electricity switching execution mode based on the special figure small hit and the special electricity switching execution mode based on the V prize jackpot can be executed. A game can be realized.

Further, according to the present embodiment, since the special electric switching execution mode based on the V prize jackpot can be executed in the electric switching execution mode during the electric interval period of the electric switching execution mode, the number of times of the electric switching interval period included in the electric switching execution mode is the game. very important factor for people. Therefore, when the general electric switching execution mode is executed by winning the general electric drawing in the general drawing lottery, the player is asked how many times the general electric switching interval period is included in the general electric switching execution mode. It is possible to make the player interested in the game and improve the interest in the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, since the special electric switching execution mode based on the V winning jackpot can be executed a plurality of times during the period from the start of the electric switching execution mode to the end thereof, the electric switching execution mode is started. It is a very important factor for the player whether or not it is. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in whether or not the general electric switching execution mode is started by winning the general electric drawing in the general drawing lottery, and the general electric switching execution mode is started. In this case, the player can be interested in how many times the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot will be executed, and the amusement of the game can be improved. .

In addition, according to the present embodiment, since the production (Fig. 69, Fig. 70 (A), etc.) that suggests the number of times the normal electric accessory 34b is opened in the normal electric open/close execution mode is executed, is won and the normal electric opening/closing execution mode is executed, the player can be interested in the number of times the normal electric accessory 34b is opened in the normal electric opening/closing execution mode, and the game can be played. Interest can be improved.

In particular, in this embodiment, the numbers of the decorative symbols that are variably displayed and statically displayed in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 are the number of times the normal electric accessory 34b is opened ( That is, since it suggests the number of consecutive games of the V winning big win), the player can feel that the decorative pattern with the largest possible number should be stopped on the effective line L1, thereby improving the interest of the game. can be achieved. In addition, when a reach occurs due to a decoration pattern with a large number, it is possible to make the player feel a great sense of anticipation.

Further, according to the present embodiment, based on the result of the general pattern lottery, the opening operation of the normal electric accessory 34b is executed at least a plurality of times for one general pattern per hit. Then, when one cycle from the opening of the normal electric accessory 34b (time t3 in FIG. 68) to the end of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot (time t10) is defined as one special game time, the normal electric role One special game round based on the opening of the object 34b at the first timing (time t3 in FIG. 68) is executed, and the normal electric drive is performed at the second timing (time t11 in FIG. 68) after the one special game round is completed. It controls so that the accessory 34b is opened. Therefore, it is possible to execute a plurality of 1 special game times for one normal figure per normal figure lottery.

Further, according to the present embodiment, a restriction period is generated for restricting the start of the variable display of normal symbols. More specifically, a predetermined restriction period is generated in a period from the first timing to the end of one special game round that occurs after the second timing. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress the start of the variable display of the normal symbols before the end of one special game round, the normal pattern lottery is executed even though the one special game round has not ended. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where As a result, for example, although the result of the general pattern lottery is a general pattern hit that is advantageous to the player, the game ball is a special pattern because the 1 special game round that has already been executed has not ended. It is possible to prevent a situation disadvantageous to the player such that the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit is not executed even if the ball enters the starting hole 34a.

In addition, in the present embodiment, since a plurality of types (V winning jackpots A and B) are set for the V winning jackpots, not only the number of V winning jackpots to be won in one electric switching execution mode, but also which It is also possible to give the player a sense of anticipation as to whether or not he or she will win the V winning jackpot of the type.

In addition, in this embodiment, the total required time (2.0 seconds) of the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the special electric opening and closing scenario A for the special figure small prize and the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the special electric opening and closing scenario A for the V winning jackpot The total time A (128.0 seconds), which is the sum of the total required time (126.0 seconds), is the total required time (2.1 seconds) of the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the special electric opening and closing scenario B for special figures. and the total required time (125.9 seconds) of the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the special electric opening and closing scenario B for the V winning jackpot. When the opening and closing execution mode is executed, after that, the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the special electric opening and closing scenario A for the V prize big win is executed, and the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the special electric opening and closing scenario B for the special figure small prize is executed. After that, when the special electric switching execution mode based on the special electric switching scenario B for the V winning jackpot is executed, the timing at which the special electric switching executing mode based on the V winning jackpot ends is the same. As a result, since the standby time from the end of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot to the next opening of the normal electric accessory 34b becomes the same, for example, the content of the effect executed during the standby time is made common. can do.

In addition, in this embodiment, a normal pattern starting gate 35 is provided at the lower center position of the game board 30, and a general winning opening 32 is located at a position where the game ball entered into the normal pattern starting gate 35 is provided, similar to a general pachinko machine in which a special figure start port 34a is provided at the lower center position of the game board 30, while awarding prize balls to the player, normal figure lottery It is possible to realize a game in which the player expects to win a prize.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player operates the operation handle 25 so that the game ball enters the normal pattern starting gate 35, so that many game balls enter the normal pattern starting gate 35. It's going to be a ball. And, in this embodiment, since the game balls that enter the normal game starting gate 35 enter the general winning hole 32, it is possible to increase the ratio of the number of winning balls by the general winning hole 32 to all the number of winning balls. can. In other words, it is possible to reduce the role ratio, which is the ratio of the number of prize balls due to the actuation of the role to the total number of prize balls.

<<2-7>> Modified example of the second embodiment:
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and can be implemented in various aspects without departing from the scope of the invention. For example, the following modifications are possible. In addition, in the modified example described below, description of the same configuration, processing, and effects as those of the above-described embodiment is omitted.

<<2-7-1>> Modification 1:
In the above-described embodiment, by executing a pseudo-general ending effect suggesting that the general electrical switching execution mode ends just before the general electrical switching interval period of the general electrical switching execution mode ends, the player is temporarily reminded of the general electrical After making the player think that the opening/closing execution mode will end, a continuation effect, which is an effect suggesting that the general electric opening/closing execution mode will continue without actually ending, may be executed. A specific description will be given below.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this modification, in addition to the seven types of normal symbols A to G in the above embodiment, a normal symbol H (normal pattern hit H) is set as a result of normal pattern type determination in a normal pattern lottery. , In addition to the seven types of normal switching scenarios A to G in the above embodiment, a normal switching scenario H is prepared. Then, when it is determined that it is the normal pattern H in the normal pattern type determination, the normal switch scenario H is selected.

Normal electric switching scenario H is compared with normal electric switching scenario G (normal electric accessory 34b is opened 7 times), from the first closing to the second opening of the normal electric accessory 34b in the normal electric switching processing period. The only difference is the length of the closing period (the first electric power interval period), and the other control is the same as the electric power opening/closing scenario G. Specifically, in scenario G, the length of all interval periods including the first interval period is set to 135.0 seconds. , the length of the first general electrical interval period is set to 145.0 seconds, which is 10.0 seconds longer than the other general electrical interval periods.

In this modification, when the general pattern H is won in the general pattern lottery, the decorative pattern is displayed in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 in the same way as when the general pattern A is won. 111” and stops.

A player who recognizes the stop mode of this decorative pattern opens the normal electric accessory 34b once in the normal electric opening/closing execution mode executed based on the current normal electric opening/closing execution mode, and executes the normal electric opening/closing execution mode. It is recognized that the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is executed once during the period.

After that, it is suggested that the general switching execution mode will be terminated in 5 seconds from 10 seconds before the end of the first general switching interval period to 5 seconds before the end of the first general switching execution mode based on the general switching scenario H. A pseudo-universal electric ending production, which is a production, is executed. The content of this pseudo-general electric ending effect is the content of the normal normal electric ending effect (FIG. 70 (B )).

FIG. 92 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of an effect executed in the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example. In this modified example, as a pseudo-general ending effect, a female character is displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 as shown in FIG. display. It should be noted that during the execution of this pseudo-normal ending effect, a right-handed instruction image GD2, which is an image in which a character string such as "Right-handed" and a rightward arrow are combined, is displayed in the upper right area of the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. display. This right-handed instruction image GD2 is smaller in size than the right-handed instruction image GD1 shown in FIG.

A player who recognizes this pseudo-general electric ending effect will know that the number of executions of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is one in the current electric opening/closing execution mode, and the normal electric opening/closing execution mode ends. Recognize.

After that, for 5 seconds from 5 seconds before the end of the first general electric interval period to the end, a continuous performance is executed as a production suggesting that the general electric open/close execution mode is continued without being ended. In this modified example, as shown in FIG. 92(B), as a continuous effect, a female character is displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, and a character string such as "Surprised! The jackpot continues!" display. During execution of this continuous effect, a right-handed instruction image GD1 larger than the right-handed instruction image GD2 shown in FIG. A voice such as "Right shot!" is output. As a result, the player can recognize that the normal electric opening/closing execution mode will continue without ending, and that it is a state in which a "right shot" should be made.

As described above, in the present modification, after executing the pseudo-normal ending effect, which is a effect suggesting that the normal power switching execution mode will end, the normal power switching execution mode continues without ending. Since the continuation effect, which is a suggested effect, is executed, after giving the player a feeling of disappointment that the normal electric switching execution mode ends, the normal electric switching execution mode is actually continued without ending. It is possible to make the player feel great joy and improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, in this modification, after the decorative pattern is stopped in a display mode such as "111" in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, a pseudo-normal ending effect is produced in the first normal-current interval period. However, the general electricity interval period for which the pseudo general electricity ending effect is executed is not limited to the first time. For example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, the decorative pattern is stopped in a display mode such as "333", and then the pseudo-general ending effect is executed in the third general-purpose electric interval period. good too. That is, the configuration may be such that the pseudo-general ending effect is executed in any one of the universal electrical interval periods from the second time onwards. Further, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a pseudo-general ending effect is executed every time during the universal electrical interval period. Even with such a configuration, after giving the player a sense of disappointment that the normal electric switching execution mode is terminated, the player is given greater joy that the normal electric switching execution mode is actually continued without being terminated. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<<2-7-2>> Modification 2:
In the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, the control aspect of the final round of the special electric switching processing period in the special electric switching execution mode based on the V prize is set to a different aspect from the control aspects of the other rounds, and in the final round Unless the game balls of the maximum number of balls entered are entered into the second big prize opening 58a within a predetermined time and the final round is not ended early, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the next V prize jackpot will not be executed. It is good also as a structure that it ends. A specific description will be given below.

In this modification, only the round game of the final round (16th round) of the special electric opening and closing scenario A for the V winning jackpot is configured so that the second special electric accessory 58b is opened multiple times. The opening time is 0.5 seconds, the closing time until the next opening is 1.0 seconds, the maximum opening time is 30.0 seconds, the maximum number of incoming balls is 10, and the special electric ending period is 0.0 seconds. is set. Therefore, until 10 game balls enter the second big winning hole 58a in the final round, the final round ends unless the total opening time of the second special electric accessory 58b reaches the maximum opening time. do not. Specifically, the final round continues until 60 times of opening for 0.5 seconds and 59 times of closing for 1.0 seconds are reached, and the maximum time required for the final round is 89.0 seconds. On the other hand, since the maximum number of balls entered in the final round is set to 10, the final round ends when 10 game balls enter the second big winning hole 58a, and the special electric opening/closing execution mode is also executed. finish. That is, in the special electric opening and closing scenario A for the V winning jackpot of this modification, the required time per round is 5 from the 1st round to the 15th round regardless of the shooting mode of the game ball and the behavior of the game ball after shooting. 0 seconds, but only in the 16th round, the time required for one round changes greatly depending on the shooting mode of the game ball and the behavior of the game ball after shooting. Then, the time required for the special electric switching execution mode based on the special electric switching scenario A for the V prize jackpot of this modified example varies from about 130 seconds to 209.5 seconds at maximum.

In this modification, as in the above embodiment, the general electric interval period is 135.0 seconds, and the special electric open/close execution mode based on the V prize must be completed before the next opening of the ordinary electric accessory 34b. If so, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the next V prize will not be executed, and the situation will be disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present modification, in the final round of the special electric opening/closing scenario A for the V winning jackpot, a predetermined number (maximum number of balls entering) of game balls are entered into the second big winning hole 58a within a predetermined time. A ball-entering promotion effect, which is a effect for prompting the player to enter the ball, is executed.

FIG. 93 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of an effect executed in the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example. In this modified example, as shown in FIG. 93(A), a female character is displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 as an effect to promote entry into the ball, and the words "Put the ball in before the time is up!" Do your best!!” is displayed, and an effect is executed to display the remaining time of the electric power interval period.

Then, by the end of the general electric interval period, that is, by the next opening of the ordinary electric accessory 34b, if the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the V prize can be ended, the next V prize Executes an effect suggesting that the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on is executed. Specifically, in this modification, as shown in FIG. 93(B), a female character is displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, and a character string such as "Congratulations!! The big wins continue!" display.

On the other hand, if the special electric open/close execution mode based on the V prize cannot be ended by the end of the general electric interval period, that is, by the next opening of the ordinary electric accessory 34b, the next V prize Executes a disappearing performance suggesting that the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on is no longer executed. Specifically, in this modification, as a disappearance effect, a sad female character is displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 as shown in FIG. has disappeared." is displayed. Then, the displayed right hitting instruction image GD1 is changed to a right hitting instruction image GD2, which is smaller.

As described above, in the present modification, in the final round of the special electric opening/closing scenario A for the V winning jackpot, the maximum number of game balls entered into the second big winning port 58a until the next opening of the normal electric accessory 34b. Since it is possible to provide the player with the game of making the ball enter, the interest in the game can be improved. Since there is a possibility that the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the next V prize jackpot will not be executed due to the longer time required for the final round, the player is instructed to follow the normal electric accessory 34b. It is possible to make the players feel impatient that they want the final round to be completed before the game is opened, and to enhance the interest of the game.

In addition, in the present modification, in the final round of the special electric opening/closing scenario A for the V winning jackpot, a ball-entering promotion effect, which is a effect encouraging a predetermined number of game balls to enter the second big winning hole 58a within a predetermined time, is performed. Therefore, a new game such as ending the special electric opening/closing execution mode by the next opening of the normal electric accessory 34b by entering a predetermined number of game balls into the second big winning hole 58a within a predetermined time In addition, it is possible to increase the player's motivation to enter a predetermined number of game balls into the second big winning hole 58a within a predetermined time.

Further, in this modification, if the special electric opening/closing execution mode does not end before the next opening of the normal electric accessory 34b, the disappearance effect is executed. to recognize that the special electric opening/closing execution mode has not ended, and to recognize that the flow of the game thereafter changes due to the fact that the special electric opening/closing execution mode has not ended.

Furthermore, in this modification, the V-winning jackpot special electric switching scenario A (16 rounds, variable length) has a larger number of rounds than the V-winning jackpot special electric switching scenario B (12 rounds, fixed length). On the other hand, there is also a risk that the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the next V prize jackpot will not be executed due to the lengthening of the time required for the final round. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel both a sense of happiness and a sense of tension that he/she has taken risks in exchange for many benefits (a large number of rounds), thereby improving the interest of the game. .

In addition, in this modification, only the final round has a configuration in which the required time is not fixed, but this configuration is not limited to such a configuration. A configuration in which the time is not fixed may be adopted. That is, it may be configured such that the entire required time of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is not fixed. Even with such a configuration, there is a possibility that the special electric switching execution mode based on the next V prize jackpot will not be executed because the total time required for the special electric switching execution mode based on the V prize jackpot will become longer. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel tense and improve the interest in the game.

<<2-7-3>> Modification 3:
In the above embodiment and each of the modifications, the time required for each round game that constitutes the special electric opening/closing processing period of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is fixed by adopting the configuration of this modification described below. It is good also as a structure which converts into. The configuration of this modification will be described below.

In this modification, in the special electric opening and closing execution scenario for the V prize jackpot, the special electric opening period is 12.0 seconds, the number of rounds is 10, the number of times the second special electric accessory 58b is opened in one round is 1, and the maximum opening time is is set to 0.1 seconds, the maximum number of incoming balls is 5, the special electric interval period is set to 12.0 seconds, and the special electric ending period is set to 5.0 seconds. In addition, in this modification, a plurality of projections are provided on the upper surface of the second special electric role product 58b as speed reducing means for reducing the passing speed of the game ball, and the game reaching the second special electric role product 58b The ball will temporarily stay on the upper surface until it passes through the second special electric accessory 58b.

Then, in a situation where the game ball is shot toward the distribution path 301 at intervals of 0.6 seconds and the shot game ball reaches the second special electric accessory 58b, the second special electric accessory 58b is 5 When the closed state is maintained for 0.0 seconds or more, a maximum of about eight game balls stay on the upper surface of the second special electric accessory 58b during the closed state. Then, when the second special electric accessory 58b is opened, about eight game balls staying on the upper surface of the second special electric accessory 58b enter the second big winning hole 58a. Although the maximum number of game balls entering the second big winning hole 58a is set to 5, the maximum number of game balls is already opened before it is detected that the game ball has entered the second big winning hole 58a. Since 0.1 second of the time has passed, the second special electric accessory 58b does not matter whether the number of game balls entering the second big winning hole 58a has reached the maximum number of entering balls. , is closed. Therefore, the time required for one round is fixed at 0.1 second regardless of the shooting mode of the game ball and the behavior of the shot game ball.

As a result, the time required for the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the special electric opening and closing execution scenario for the V winning jackpot in this modification is 12.0 seconds (special electric opening period) + 0.1 seconds (1 round) x 10 (number of rounds) + 12 0 seconds (special electric interval period)×9 (number of intervals)+5.0 seconds (special electric ending period), which is fixed at 126.0 seconds.

Even with such a configuration, it is possible to fix the duration of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot, as in the above-described embodiment.

<<2-7-4>> Modification 4:
In the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, even if the required time for all round games constituting the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot becomes the maximum opening time, the normal electric power in the normal electric opening and closing execution mode A configuration may be adopted in which the special electric opening/closing execution mode is surely terminated before the accessory 34b is opened next time. The configuration of this modification will be described below.

In this modification, only one type of special electric opening and closing scenario for the V winning jackpot is set. The number of openings of the object 58b is set to 1, the maximum opening time is set to 20.0 seconds, the maximum number of incoming balls is set to 10, the special electric interval period is set to 5.0 seconds, and the special electric ending period is set to 5.0 seconds.

Therefore, the longest required time for each round game in this modification is 20.0 seconds, and the longest required time for the entire special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the special electric opening and closing scenario is 5.0 seconds (special electric opening period) + 20 0 seconds (1 round) x 16 (number of rounds) + 5.0 seconds (special electric interval period) x 15 (number of intervals) + 5.0 seconds (special electric ending period), resulting in 405.0 seconds.

Next, the shortest required time for each round game in this modification will be described. Also in this modification, the shortest shooting interval of game balls is 0.6 seconds, so the shortest time required for ten game balls to enter the second big winning hole 58a is 6.0 seconds. The shortest required time for each round game is about 6.0 seconds. As a result, the shortest required time for the entire special electric switching execution mode based on the special electric switching scenario is 5.0 seconds (special electric opening period) + about 6.0 seconds (1 round) x 16 (number of rounds) + 5.0 Seconds (special electric interval period)×15 (number of intervals)+5.0 seconds (special electric ending period), which is approximately 181.0 seconds.

In this modification, in each general electric switching scenario, the general electric interval period is set to 415.0 seconds, and the general electric ending period is set to 420.0 seconds. The run mode ends in about 2.0 seconds. Therefore, in this modification, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot is executed after the first opening of the ordinary electric accessory 34b in the general electric opening/closing execution mode, and is included in the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot. Even if the required time for all round games is the longest 20.0 seconds, the special electric opening and closing execution mode will be opened by the second opening of the normal electric accessory 34b in the general electric opening and closing execution mode. It will end for sure.

In other words, according to this modification, after the first opening of the normal electric accessory 34b, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is executed, and all round games included in the special electric opening/closing execution mode are executed. It is possible to realize the pachinko machine 10 that can open the normal electric accessory 34b after the end of the special electric opening/closing execution mode even if the longest time is 20.0 seconds. As a result, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot is reliably executed multiple times regardless of the length of time required for the plurality of round games included in the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot. It is possible to

<<2-7-5>> Modification 5:
In the above-described embodiment and each of the modifications, during the execution of the round game during the special electric opening/closing processing period of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot, the pattern display device 41 displays information corresponding to the number of rounds of the round game being executed. may be displayed on the display surface 41a. Specifically, for example, during the period in which the round game of the first round is being executed, the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 may be configured to display a character string such as "It is in the first round!" .

Further, in the special electric opening/closing processing period of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot, information corresponding to the number of remaining round games may be displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. Specifically, for example, during the period in which the first round of the round game is being executed in the special electric opening/closing execution mode configured by the round game of 16 rounds, the display screen 41a of the pattern display device 41 displays "Remaining 15 During the period in which the round game of the 15th round is being executed, a character string such as "1 time remaining" is displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, and the 16th round (last Round) may be configured to display a character string such as "Last!"

According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player have an interest in the number of round games executed in the special electric opening/closing execution mode, and to improve the interest in the game.

Further, a specific image may be displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 when the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot is terminated. Specifically, for example, during the special electric ending period of the special electric open/close execution mode, as a specific image, an image of a specific character (for example, a whale character) speaking lines such as "Have you had fun? See you soon!" It may be configured to be displayed on the display surface 41 a of the device 41 . According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player recognize that the special electric opening/closing execution mode has ended, and to give the player a sense of fulfillment at the fact that the special electric opening/closing execution mode has been executed and motivation for the subsequent game. can do.

In addition, when the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning big win ends, the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 may display information about the profit that the player has obtained during the execution of the special electric opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, for example, in the special electric ending period of the special electric opening/closing execution mode, information related to the number of game balls paid out as prize balls during execution of the special electric opening/closing execution mode (related to the number of game balls acquired by the player) information) may be displayed on the display surface 41 a of the pattern display device 41 . According to such a configuration, it is possible for the player to grasp the profit obtained by himself/herself by executing the special electric switching execution mode, and to feel a sense of fulfillment from the execution of the special electric switching executing mode and afterward. It is possible to give motivation to the game of.

During execution of the round game in the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot, the decorative symbols are variably displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, and then the variably displayed decorative symbols are stopped in a predetermined display mode. It is good also as a structure displayed. Specifically, for example, immediately after winning per normal drawing in the general drawing lottery, after not suggesting to the player the number of times the normal electric accessory 34b is opened due to winning the normal drawing, after that , During execution of the round game of the final round of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot, the decorative pattern is variably displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, and after the end of the special electric opening/closing execution mode, the normal electric accessory 34b. When the is to be opened (in the case of a continuous residence), the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a display mode in which the same decorative patterns such as "777" are arranged, and the special electric opening and closing execution mode is terminated. When the normal electric accessory 34b is not opened later (when it is not connected), for example, the decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed in a display mode in which the same decorative patterns are not aligned, such as "326". According to such a configuration, since the variable display of the decorative symbols is started during execution of the round game, it is possible to give the player a feeling of surprise, and the display mode when the decorative symbols are stopped is displayed. It is possible to give the player a great sense of anticipation as to how the (stop mode) will turn out.

<<2-7-6>> Modification 6:
In the above-described embodiment and each of the modifications described above, after the end of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot (time t10 in FIG. 68), the next opening of the ordinary electric accessory 34b in the ordinary electric opening/closing execution mode (time t11 ), if the player does not hit the right hand during the period up to ), there is a special notice that the player should hit the right hand more strongly (vigorously) than the normal hitting to the right notification processing executed in other periods. It is good also as composition which performs right hitting information processing. The configuration of this modification will be described below.

Also in this modification, as in the above-described embodiment, since the opening time of the normal electric accessory 34b in the normal electric open/close execution mode is short, the game ball is opened after the player confirms that the normal electric accessory 34b has been opened. , when the game ball reaches the normal electric accessory 34b, the normal electric accessory 34b is already in a closed state, and the special figure start port 34a provided below the normal electric accessory 34b It is not possible to enter the game ball into the ball. Then, since the game ball did not enter the special figure starting port 34a, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small win is not executed, and as a result, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is not executed. It puts people in a disadvantageous situation.

Therefore, in this modified example, after the end of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot, until the next opening of the normal electric accessory 34b in the ordinary electric opening/closing execution mode, "right hitting" is performed. It is determined whether or not there is, and when it is determined that "right hitting" is not performed, special right hitting information processing is executed. Specifically, in the special right-handed notification process, a right-handed instruction image with characters and arrows larger than the right-handed instruction image GD1 shown in FIG. A voice such as "Please hit to the right" is output from the speaker 46 at the maximum volume.

It should be noted that various configurations can be employed as the configuration for determining whether or not "right-handed hitting" is being performed. For example, in this modification, a sensor capable of detecting the passage of game balls is provided near the entrance of the distribution passage 301, and the interval at which the passage of game balls is detected by the sensor is a predetermined interval (for example, 2.0 seconds). ), it is determined whether or not "right-handed" is performed. When it is determined that the interval at which the passing of the game ball is detected by the sensor is equal to or greater than the predetermined interval, it is determined that "right-handed hitting" is not performed, and on the other hand, it is determined that the interval is less than the predetermined interval. If so, it is determined that "right-handed" is being played.

As described above, in this modification, after the end of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot, during the period from the end of the special electric opening/closing execution mode to the next opening of the normal electric accessory 34b in the general electric opening/closing execution mode, "Right stroke" is performed, and if it is determined that "right hitting" is not performed, special right hitting notification processing is executed, so the game ball does not enter the special figure start port 34a Therefore, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small win is not executed, and as a result, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is not executed. can.

It should be noted that the notification mode of the special right-handed notification process is a mode in which the notification is made stronger (vigorously) than the notification mode of the normal right-handed notification process, that is, if the notification mode is such that the player can more easily recognize that the player should hit right. , is not limited to the above notification mode. For example, the hitting-to-right instruction image displayed in the special hitting-to-right notification process may repeat enlargement and reduction. good too.

<<2-7-7>> Modification 7:
In the above embodiment and each modification, the result of the special figure lottery executed when the game ball enters the special figure start port 34a may include the special figure off. According to such a configuration, even if the general figure lottery is won in the general figure lottery, and the general electric opening and closing execution mode is executed and the game ball enters the special figure start port 34a, it will be a special figure small hit after that. Since there is a possibility that the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the above is not executed, it is possible to make the player interested in the result of the special figure lottery and improve the interest of the game.

<<2-7-8>> Modification 8:
In the general electric winning device 34 of the above-described embodiment and each modification, a special electric start opening may be provided instead of the special figure start opening 34a. When the game ball enters the special electric starting opening provided instead of the special electric starting opening 34a, the special electric opening and closing execution mode in which the first special electric accessory 57b opens and closes without performing the above-described special electric accessory lottery. is executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to simplify the control by omitting the counter and the table for the special figure lottery, and it is possible to achieve the same effects as those of the above embodiment and each of the above modifications.

<<2-7-9>> Modification 9:
In the general electric winning device 34 of the above embodiment and each of the modifications, a V winning opening is provided instead of the special figure starting opening 34a, and the first special electric winning device 57 (first big winning opening 57a, first special electric role The object 57b and the V winning opening 57av) may be omitted. According to such a configuration, if the game ball enters the normal figure starting gate 35 and wins the normal figure per normal figure lottery, the general electric opening and closing execution mode is executed. Then, if the game ball enters the V winning opening during execution of the normal electric opening/closing execution mode and the normal electric accessory 34b is opened, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is executed. After that, even after the end of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot, if the ordinary electric opening/closing execution mode continues and the normal electric accessory 34b is opened again and the game ball enters the V winning opening, The special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot is executed again. That is, according to such a configuration, without going through the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the special small prize in the above-described embodiment, the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is executed multiple times per normal figure. configuration can be realized.

In addition, as in this modification, in the configuration where the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit is not executed, and in the configuration where the execution period of the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit is very short, the ordinary electric opening and closing execution mode If it is possible to set the time required from the start to the end of the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot to a longer time than the time required from the start to the end of the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot, the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot A configuration that can be executed multiple times during execution of the power switching execution mode can be realized.

<<2-7-10>> Modification 10:
In the above embodiment and each modification, all the results of the special figure lottery executed when the game ball enters the special figure start port 34a are set to the special figure jackpot, and the first special electric winning device 57 (first big prize winning port 57a, first special electric accessory 57b, V winning prize port 57av) may be omitted. According to such a configuration, if the game ball enters the normal figure starting gate 35 and wins the normal figure per normal figure lottery, the general electric opening and closing execution mode is executed. Then, if the game ball enters the special figure start opening 34a while the normal electric accessory 34b is open while the general electric opening/closing execution mode is being executed, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure jackpot is executed. In the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure jackpot, opening/closing processing of the second special electric accessory 58b is executed. After that, even after the end of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure jackpot, the normal electric opening/closing execution mode is continuing, and the normal electric accessory 34b is opened again and the game ball enters the special figure start port 34a. Then, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure jackpot will be executed again. That is, according to such a configuration, the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the special figure jackpot is executed multiple times per normal figure without going through the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit in the above embodiment. configuration can be realized.

In addition, all the results of the special figure lottery may not be set to the special figure jackpot, and the special figure jackpot may be set as a part of the result of the special figure lottery. For example, 50% of the result of the special figure lottery may be set to the special figure jackpot, and the remaining 50% may be set to the special figure off. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player interested in the result of the special figure lottery, and to improve the amusement of the game.

<<2-7-11>> Modification 11:
In the above-mentioned embodiment and each modification, it may be configured to have a high probability mode (so-called probability variation state) in which the probability of winning the special figure jackpot in the special figure lottery is high. Specifically, for example, it is configured to determine the start of the high probability mode as a specific profit based on the fact that the game ball has entered the V winning opening 57av, and after the start of the high probability mode, it is advantageous to the player. As a configuration (number-cutting variable machine, ST (special time) machine) that ends the high-probability mode when a predetermined end condition that the special drawing lottery in the high-probability mode is executed multiple times (for example, 100 times) is satisfied good too.

Further, in this configuration, information corresponding to the remaining number of times of the special figure lottery executed in the high probability mode may be displayed on the display surface 41 a of the pattern display device 41 . Specifically, for example, when the remaining number of times of the special figure lottery executed in the high probability mode is 15 times, a character string such as "remaining 15 times" is displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, During the period during which the special symbols are changing in the final special symbol lottery executed in the high probability mode, the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 may display a character string such as "Last!". According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player have an interest in the number of times the special figure lottery is executed in the high probability mode, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, a specific image may be displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 when the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot is terminated. Specifically, for example, during the special electric ending period of the special electric open/close execution mode, as a specific image, an image of a specific character (for example, a whale character) speaking lines such as "Have you had fun? See you soon!" It may be configured to be displayed on the display surface 41 a of the device 41 . According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player recognize that the special electric opening/closing execution mode has ended, and to give the player a sense of fulfillment at the fact that the special electric opening/closing execution mode has been executed and motivation for the subsequent game. can do.

In addition, it may be configured such that the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 displays information about the profits that the player has obtained during execution of the high probability mode when the high probability mode ends. Specifically, for example, the number of times a special jackpot was won without shifting from the high probability mode to the low probability mode (the so-called number of consecutive games), or the number of game balls paid out as prize balls during the consecutive games. (Information on the number of game balls acquired by the player) may be displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. FIG. According to such a configuration, the player can grasp the profit obtained by himself/herself by executing the high-probability mode. can give a desire to

Alternatively, one specific benefit may be determined from a plurality of types of specific benefits (for example, specific benefits A and B). Specifically, for example, in addition to the high-probability mode, the above-described high-frequency support mode (so-called electric support state) is provided, and the specific benefit A starts the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode. , Both the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode are configured to end when the special figure lottery is executed 100 times without winning the special figure jackpot, while the specific profit B is the high probability mode And the high frequency support mode is started, the high probability mode ends when the special figure lottery is executed 100 times without winning the special figure jackpot, and the high frequency support mode does not win the special figure jackpot. It may be configured to end when the special figure lottery is executed 30 times. Also, for example, a specific profit A starts a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode, and neither the high probability mode nor the high frequency support mode wins a special figure jackpot, and 100 special figure lotteries On the other hand, the specific profit B is when neither the high probability mode nor the high frequency support mode wins the special figure jackpot and the special figure lottery is executed 30 times. It is good also as a structure which ends in . According to such a configuration, the player is not only interested in whether or not a specific profit is awarded, but also what kind of specific profit is awarded if a specific profit is awarded. It is possible to arouse interest and interest in things such as

In addition, during the execution of the special drawing lottery in the high probability mode (during the variation of the special symbols), the decorative symbols are variably displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, and then the variably displayed decorative symbols are displayed in a predetermined display mode. It is good also as a structure which carries out a stop display by . Specifically, for example, during the execution of the special figure lottery in the high probability mode, the decorative pattern is variably displayed in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, and the special figure jackpot is won in the special figure lottery. In the case of doing so, for example, the decorative pattern is configured to be stopped and displayed in a display mode in which the same decorative patterns such as "777" are aligned. For example, the decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed in a display mode such as "326" in which the same decorative patterns are not aligned. According to such a configuration, since the variable display of the decorative pattern is started during execution of the special drawing lottery in the high probability mode, what is the display mode (stop mode) when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed? It is possible to impart a great sense of expectation to the player.

Further, based on the result of the normal drawing lottery, it may be configured to execute at least the opening operation of the normal electric accessory 34b a plurality of times for one normal drawing.

Also, when one cycle from the opening of the normal electric accessory 34b to the end of the high probability mode is defined as one special game round, one special game round based on the opening of the ordinary electric accessory 34b at the first timing is It may be configured to perform control so that the normal electric accessory 34b is opened at the second timing after the one special game round ends.

Moreover, it is good also as a structure which restrict|limits so that the fluctuation|variation display of a normal design may not be started. More specifically, a configuration may be adopted in which a predetermined restriction period is generated in a period from the first timing to the end of one special game round that occurs after the second timing.

In addition, the special figure lottery in the high probability mode can change between the shortest first special figure fluctuation time (for example, 2 seconds) and the longest second special figure fluctuation time (for example, 180 seconds) depending on the game state. There is, even if the special figure lottery of multiple times in the high probability mode of one special game time executed after the first timing is all executed in the second special figure fluctuation time, the one special game time It may be configured such that the normal electric accessory 34b can be opened after the end.

As described above, according to this modification, since the high probability mode is provided, it is possible to improve the interest in the game more than the above-described embodiment and each modification.

<<3>> Third Embodiment:
<<3-1>> Structure of game machine:
FIG. 94 is a perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter also referred to as "pachinko machine") as a third embodiment of the present invention. A pachinko machine 10 has a wooden outer frame 11 combined in a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island equipment of the game hall. The pachinko machine 10 also includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11 . A pachinko machine body 12 has an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13. - 特許庁The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11 by metal hinges 15 . The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 16 with respect to the inner frame 13 . On the back of the inner frame 13, control devices for controlling the pachinko machine main body 12, such as a main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device, are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. - 特許庁The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened, and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation using a dedicated key on the cylinder lock 17 .

A substantially central portion of the front door frame 14 is formed with an open window portion 18 . Around the window part 18, resin parts and electric decoration parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. The electrical parts are composed of light emitting means including various lamps such as LEDs. The light emitting means plays a role of enhancing the performance effect by lighting or blinking at each game played by the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot is won, when a ready-to-win game is generated, or the like. A glass unit 19 composed of two sheets of plate glass is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14 , and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19 . A game board, which will be described later, is detachably attached to the inner frame 13 , and the player of the pachinko machine 10 can view the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 19 . Details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper tray 20 and a lower tray 21 for storing game balls. The upper tray 20 is formed in a box shape with an open top, and stores game balls such as rental balls lent from a rental machine (not shown) and prize balls discharged from the pachinko machine main body 12 . The game balls stored in the upper tray 20 are supplied to a game ball shooting mechanism provided in the pachinko machine main body 12. - 特許庁The game ball shooting mechanism is driven by the player's operation of the operation handle 25, and shoots the game balls supplied from the upper tray 20 to the front surface of the game board. The lower tray 21 is arranged below the upper tray 20 and is shaped like a box with an open top. The lower tray 21 stores game balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 20. - 特許庁A discharge port 22 for discharging game balls stored in the lower tray 21 is formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 21 . A lever 23 is provided below the ejection port 22 , and the player can switch the ejection port 22 between a closed state and an open state by operating the lever 23 . When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game ball falls from the discharge port 22 and is discharged from the lower tray 21 to the outside.

A performance operation button 24 is provided in front of the peripheral edge of the upper plate 20.例文帳に追加The effect operation button 24 is an operation unit for the player to perform an input operation for the game effect performed by the pachinko machine 10 . When a player operates a performance operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, a game performance reflecting the operation is performed by the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

An operation handle 25 for a player to operate is provided on the right side of the front door frame 14 when viewed from the front (hereinafter also simply referred to as "right side"). When the player operates (turns) the operation handle 25, a game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism to the front surface of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operation handle 25, there are a touch sensor 25a for permitting driving of the game ball shooting mechanism, a wait button 25b for stopping shooting of game balls by the game ball shooting mechanism when pressed by the player, and the operation handle 25. A variable resistor 25c is provided for detecting the amount of rotational operation of , based on a change in electrical resistance. When the player grips the operating handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operating handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. Then, a game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism to the front surface of the game board with strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

A game ball shooting button 26 for a player to operate is provided on the left side of the periphery of the upper tray 20 in front view (hereinafter also simply referred to as "left side"). When the game ball shooting button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is shot to the front surface of the game board with a predetermined shooting strength regardless of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 by the player. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball shooting button 26, the game ball is shot to the front surface of the game board with the same shooting intensity as when the operation handle 25 is rotated at its maximum. In the case of this embodiment, when a game ball is shot by operating the game ball shooting button 26, the game ball flows to the right side of the game board when viewed from the front and also to the right side of the game board. That is, by operating the game ball shooting button 26, the player can hit the ball to the right. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the game ball shooting button 26 is operated, the game ball is shot to the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is turned on. . That is, the player turns on at least the touch sensor 25a by grasping the operation handle 25, and then operates the game ball shooting button 26 to shoot the game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball shooting button 26. can be realized.

Next, the configuration of the rear surface of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. A control device for controlling the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is arranged on the back surface of the pachinko machine 10. - 特許庁

95 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. As shown, the pachinko machine 10 includes a first control unit 51, a second control unit 52, a third control unit 53, and a power supply unit 58. Specifically, these units are provided on the back surface of the inner frame 13 .

The first control unit 51 has a main controller 60 . The main controller 60 has a main control board having a function of controlling the main game. The main control board is housed in a board box made of transparent resin material. This board box is configured to leave traces of opening and closing. For example, a seal is affixed to a portion that can be opened and closed, and when the substrate box is opened, characters such as "opened" appear.

The second control unit 52 includes an audio emission control device 90 and a display control device 100 . The sound emission control device 90 controls emission means such as speakers and various lamps provided in front of the pachinko machine 10 based on commands transmitted from the main control device 60 . The display control device 100 controls the pattern display device based on commands transmitted from the sound emission control device 90 . The pattern display device has a liquid crystal display for displaying patterns and images for presentation.

The third control unit 53 has a payout control device 70 and a launch control device 80 . The payout control device 70 performs payout control for paying out prize balls. When an instruction to shoot a game ball is input from the main control device 60, the shooting control device 80 shoots a game ball with strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 by the player. Controls the ball launching mechanism. In addition, on the back of the inner frame 13, there is a tank 54 to which the game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially supplied, and a slope which is connected to the lower part of the tank 54 and is gently inclined so that the game balls flow downstream. , a case rail 56 connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 55, a game ball is supplied from the case rail 56, and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out according to an instruction from the payout control device 70. A plurality of devices necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10, such as a payout device 71, are provided.

The power supply unit 58 includes a power supply device 85 and a power switch 88 . The power supply device 85 supplies power necessary for the pachinko machine 10 to operate. A power switch 88 is connected to the power supply device 85 . By ON/OFF operation of the power switch 88, a supply state in which power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 and a non-supply state in which power is not supplied to the pachinko machine 10 are switched.

Next, the game board will be explained. The game board is detachably attached to the front surface of the inner frame 13. - 特許庁

96 is a front view of the game board 30. FIG. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on its front surface. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding a game ball is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. A game ball shot from the game ball shooting mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and released above the game area PA, and then flows down the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicularly to the game board 30, and accessories such as windmills are arranged. These nails 42 and windmills distribute and organize the falling directions of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

The game board 30 is formed with a plurality of openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening is provided with a general winning opening 32, a first starting opening 33, a second starting opening 34, a through gate 35, and a first variable winning device . A delay mechanism 202 and a V winning mechanism 210 are arranged on the right side of the game board 30 when viewed from the front. Details of the delay mechanism 202 and the V winning mechanism 210 will be described later.

Furthermore, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display section 45 . The main display section 45 has a special figure unit 37 , a normal figure unit 38 , and a round display section 39 .

As illustrated, the general prize winning openings 32 are ball entrance members that form ball entrances into which game balls can enter, and are provided in plurality on the game board 30 . In this embodiment, when game balls enter the general winning hole 32, 10 game balls are paid out as prize balls from the payout device 71 (FIG. 95).

The first starting port 33 is a ball entrance member that forms a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter. The first starting port 33 is provided at the lower center of the game board 30 . In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first start hole 33, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a winning lottery, which will be described later, is executed.

The second starting port 34 is a ball entrance member that forms a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and is provided on the lower right side of the game board 30 . In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 34, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a winning lottery, which will be described later, is executed. Further, the second starting port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a.

The through gate 35 is provided in the channel 203 of the delay mechanism 202 as shown. The through gate 35 has a through hole extending vertically. The through gate 35 is a through gate that serves as a trigger for executing a lottery for opening the electric accessory 34a. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the main controller 60 performs an internal lottery (electric accessory open lottery) triggered by the passage. As a result of the internal lottery, when the electric role open is won, the electric accessory 34a shifts to the electric role open state in a predetermined manner. Since the through gate 35 is arranged on the upstream side of the second starting port 34 with respect to the flowing direction of the game ball, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 flows down the game area PA after passing through the second opening. It is possible to enter the ball into the starting port 34 . In addition, in this embodiment, even if the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the prize ball is not paid out.

The first variable prize winning device 36 includes a first big prize winning port 36a leading to the back side of the game board 30, and a first open/close door 36b for opening and closing the first big prize winning port 36a. The first opening/closing door 36b is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot enter the first big winning hole 36a. As a result of the internal lottery (winning lottery) by the main control device 60, when a big win or a small win is won and the mode is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode, the first opening/closing door 36b is opened and closed according to a preset opening/closing scenario. changes between an open state and a closed state in which a prize can be won. The open/close execution mode is a mode that shifts when a big win or a small win is won as a result of a winning lottery by the main controller 60 triggered by the ball entering the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, In this mode, the first opening/closing door 36b or the second opening/closing door 212b, which will be described later, repeats an open state and a closed state. That is, as a result of the winning lottery based on the ball entering the first starting port 33, when a big win or a small win is won, opening and closing that allows the ball to enter the first big prize winning port 36a or the second opening and closing door 212b Go to run mode. Similarly, even if a big win or a small win is won as a result of the winning lottery based on the ball entering the second starting port 34, the ball can be opened and closed to enter the first big winning port 36a or the second opening/closing door 212b. Go to run mode. In this embodiment, when one game ball enters the first big winning hole 36a of the first variable winning device 36, the payout device 71 pays out 15 game balls as prize balls.

Here, the delay mechanism 202 and the V winning mechanism 210 will be explained.

FIG. 97 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the delay mechanism 202 and the V winning mechanism 210. As shown in FIG. As can be seen from FIG. 96, the delay mechanism 202 and the V winning mechanism 210 are arranged on the right side of the game area PA when viewed from the front. It is configured such that the game ball always circulates through the delay mechanism 202 when the delay mechanism 202 is turned on.

As shown in FIG. 97, the delay mechanism 202 comprises a channel 203. As shown in FIG. The channel 203 communicates with the V winning mechanism 210 , and the game ball flowing into the channel 203 is guided to the V winning mechanism 210 . The flow path 203 has a meandering shape to the left and right with respect to the game board 30, and the time required for a game ball circulating on the right side of the game area PA to reach the V winning mechanism 210 is indicated by a nail on the right side of the game board 30. It has a function to delay compared to general gaming machines that are arranged. Note that the delay mechanism 202 is not limited to a meandering flow path, and other configurations may be adopted as long as they have a function of delaying the arrival of the game ball circulating on the right side of the game area PA to the V winning mechanism 210. You may For example, it is possible to adopt a cloon having an opening at the bottom, or adopt a structure that temporarily stops the circulation of game balls with a dynamic accessory and restarts the circulation of game balls after a certain period of time has elapsed. good too.

A detection sensor 205 is arranged in the channel 203 to detect the circulation of game balls. It is arranged to detect the distribution mode of game balls that circulate on the right side of the game board 30 . In other words, the detection sensor 205 detects the mode of the game ball shooting operation by the player operating the operating handle 25 or the game ball shooting button 26 . The content of detection processing of the game ball distribution mode using the detection sensor 205 will be described later.

As described above, the through gate 35 is arranged in the channel 203 . As shown in the figure, in this embodiment, the flow path 203 is formed so that the game ball passing through the flow path 203 may or may not pass through the through gate 35 .

The V winning mechanism 210 includes a second variable winning device 212 , a detection sensor 213 , a flow path 214 , a flow path 215 , a flow path 216 and a flow path 217 . The second variable winning device 212 includes a second large winning opening 212a and a second opening/closing door 212b for opening and closing the second large winning opening 212a. As with the first opening/closing door 36b described above, the second opening/closing door 212b is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot enter the second big winning hole 212a. As a result of the internal lottery (winning lottery) by the main controller 60, when a big win or a small win is won and the mode is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode, the second opening/closing door 212b is opened and closed according to a preset opening/closing scenario. changes between a winnable open state and a closed state.

As shown in the figure, when the game ball circulating through the channel 203 of the delay mechanism 202 reaches the V winning mechanism 210 and the second open/close door 212b is open, it enters the second big winning opening 212a. It spheres and flows through the channel 214 . On the other hand, when the second open/close door 212b is closed at the timing when the game ball reaches the V winning mechanism 210, the game ball does not enter the second big winning hole 212a and flows out from the flow path 203. It flows further downward in the area on the right side of the game area PA.

The detection sensor 213 is a sensor that detects that a game ball has entered the second big winning hole 212a. In this embodiment, when one game ball enters the second big winning hole 212a of the second variable winning device 212, the payout device 71 pays out 15 game balls as prize balls.

Channel 214 branches into channel 215 , channel 216 , and channel 217 on the downstream side. A first distribution valve 218 and a second distribution valve 219 are arranged on the flow path 214, and the combination of the open/closed states of the first distribution valve 218 and the second distribution valve 219 (hereinafter referred to as A game ball circulating in the channel 214 is distributed to one of the channels 215 , 216 and 217 according to the opening/closing pattern. Specifically, when the first distribution valve 218 is in a closed state, the game balls flowing through the flow path 214 are distributed to the flow path 215 . When the first distribution valve 218 is open and the second distribution valve 219 is closed, game balls flowing through the channel 214 are distributed to the channel 216 . When the first distribution valve 218 is in the open state and the second distribution valve 219 is in the open state, game balls flowing through the channel 214 are distributed to the channel 217 . The opening/closing pattern of the first distribution valve 218 and the second distribution valve 219 corresponds to the type of big win or small win that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 212b of the second variable winning device 212 . In the present embodiment, the second opening/closing door 212b is opened during execution of the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the small winning when a small winning is won in the winning lottery. In this embodiment, a plurality of types are provided for the small hit. The opening/closing patterns of the first distribution valve 218 and the second distribution valve 219 are set in association with each type of small hit. Correspondence between the types of small wins and the opening/closing patterns of the first distribution valve 218 and the second distribution valve 219 will be described later.

The flow path 215 guides the game ball to the croon 220 provided in the V winning mechanism 210 . The crew 220 has three first V winning openings V1 and three discharge openings 223 . The same processing is executed by the pachinko machine 10 even if the game ball enters any of the three first V winning holes V1. That is, the three channels communicating with the inside of the pachinko machine 10 from the three first V winning ports V1 arranged on the crew 220 merge into one channel or winning port inside. The game ball that has flowed out from the flow path 215 circulates on the concave surface provided by the croon 220, and then enters either the three first V winning openings V1 or the three discharge openings 223.

The channel 216 guides the game ball to the outlet 225 . The flow path 217 guides the game ball to the second V winning opening V2 provided in the V winning mechanism 210 .

In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first V winning opening V1 or the second V winning opening V2, a big hit is decided. More specifically, during the period in which the opening/closing execution mode is being executed, the game ball enters the second big winning hole 212a at the timing when the second opening/closing door 212b is opened, and then the game ball enters the second When the ball enters the 1V winning hole V1 or the 2nd V winning hole V2, a big hit is decided. Then, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the opening/closing execution mode is executed again as a privilege for the determined big win. The types of jackpots that are determined when a game ball enters the first V winning opening V1 or the second V winning opening V2 will be described later. The delay mechanism 202 and the V winning mechanism 210 have been described above.

The description returns to FIG. An out port 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and a ball enters the general winning port 32, the first starting port 33, the second starting port 34, the first variable winning device 36 or the second variable winning device 212. The game balls not played are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 43. - 特許庁

The special figure unit 37 includes a first symbol display portion 37a and a second symbol display portion 37b. Each of the first pattern display portion 37a and the second pattern display portion 37b is composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting portions are arranged in a predetermined manner.

The first pattern display portion 37a is a display portion for displaying the first pattern. The first pattern refers to a pattern that is variably displayed or statically displayed based on a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33 . The first symbol display part 37a is used as a display mode until a winning lottery is performed triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 33, and the display corresponding to the lottery result is performed on the segment display device. , to perform the variable display of the first symbol. When the lottery is finished, the first symbol display unit 37a causes the segment display to stop displaying the first symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

The second pattern display portion 37b is a display portion for displaying the second pattern. The second pattern refers to a pattern that is variably displayed or statically displayed based on a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34 . The second symbol display part 37b is used as a display mode until a winning lottery is performed triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 34, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is performed on the segment display device. , to perform the variable display of the second symbol. When the lottery is finished, the second symbol display section 37b causes the segment display device to stop displaying the second symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

The time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol displayed in the second symbol display portion 37b to the stop display is called the variation time. call. Specifically, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed in the first symbol display portion 37a to the stop display is also called the first variation time, and the second symbol display portion 37b The time from the start of the variable display of the second symbol to be displayed until the stop display is also called a second variable time.

The special figure unit 37 is further provided with a first pending display portion 37c and a second pending display portion 37d, which are LED lamps, at positions adjacent to the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b. In this embodiment, up to four game balls that have won the first starting port 33 are reserved. The first reservation display portion 37c displays the number of reservations for the first starting port 33 according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be lit. Further, in the present embodiment, up to four game balls that have won the second starting port 34 are reserved. The second reservation display part 37d displays the number of reservations of the second starting port 34 according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be lit.

The normal figure unit 38 is composed of a light-emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. The normal figure unit 38, when the electric accessary item open lottery triggered by the passage of the through gate 35 is performed, causes the light-emitting display to display in a lighting display, a blinking display, or a predetermined mode. When the electric accessory open lottery ends, the normal figure unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The round display section 39 is composed of a light-emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games that occur in the open/close execution mode or displays corresponding thereto. A round game means that a predetermined upper limit duration time elapses, or that a predetermined upper limit number of game balls enter the first variable winning device 36 or the second variable winning device 212. A game in which the first opening/closing door 36b or the second opening/closing door 212b is kept open until one of the conditions is satisfied. The number of round games varies depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the shift. The round display unit 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the opening/closing execution mode is started, and ends when the opening/closing execution mode is finished and a new game is started.

In addition, the special figure unit 37, the general figure unit 38, and the round display unit 39 are not limited to being configured by a segment display device or a light emitting display device using an LED lamp. It may consist of various display devices capable of showing the draw in progress and the draw results, such as a CRT or dot matrix display.

The variable display unit 40 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area PA. The variable display unit 40 has a pattern display device 41 . The pattern display device 41 has a liquid crystal display. The display contents of the pattern display device 41 are controlled by the display control device 100 . The pattern display device 41 may be replaced with various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

When the first symbol display unit 37a performs variable display or predetermined display based on the ball entering the first starting port 33, the symbol display device 41 performs variable display or predetermined display of the symbols accordingly. In addition, when the second symbol display unit 37b performs a variable display or a predetermined display based on the ball entering the second starting port 34, the symbol display device 41 displays the symbol in a variable display or a predetermined display accordingly. conduct. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to the display performance triggered by the ball entering the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, but during the opening and closing execution mode that shifts when a big win (or a small win) is won. We will also perform the display performance of. Details of the pattern display device 41 will be described below.

FIG. 98 is an explanatory diagram showing the liquid crystal patterns and the display surface 41a which are variably displayed on the pattern display device 41. FIG. FIG. 98(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the liquid crystal patterns that are variably displayed on the pattern display device 41. FIG. As shown in FIG. 98(a), the pattern display device 41 variably displays patterns for liquid crystal showing numbers 1-8. As the liquid crystal patterns to be variably displayed, a liquid crystal pattern in which a pattern such as a character is attached to each liquid crystal pattern showing the numbers 1 to 8 may be adopted.

FIG. 98(b) is an explanatory view showing the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. As shown in FIG. As shown in the figure, the display surface 41a displays three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 on the left, middle and right. In each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3, the liquid crystal patterns of numbers 1 to 8 shown in FIG. A variable display that scrolls from bottom to top is performed. As shown in FIG. 98(b), after the variable display by scrolling, one liquid crystal symbol is displayed in a stopped state on the active line L for each symbol row. Specifically, when a game ball enters the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, the liquid crystal symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are periodically scrolled in a predetermined direction to start a variable display. Then, the symbols to be scrolled are switched from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol row Z1, the symbol row Z3, and the symbol row Z2, and finally, the predetermined liquid crystal symbols are stopped and displayed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. becomes. When the variable display of the patterns for the liquid crystal ends and the display is stopped, and when the result of the winning lottery by the main control device 60 is a big win, a predetermined combination of the patterns for the liquid crystal is valid. It is formed on the line L. For example, the same liquid crystal pattern combination is formed on the effective line L. FIG. It should be noted that the manner in which the liquid crystal patterns are variably displayed in the design display device 41 is not limited to the above-described manner, and the number of pattern rows, the number of effective lines, the direction of the variability display of the liquid crystal symbols in the pattern rows, and the Various modes can be adopted for the variable display mode of the symbols such as the number of symbols in the symbol row.

Here, the "game cycle" means the period from the start of the variable display of the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b to the end of the variable display and the stop display until the end of the stop display. In other words, the lottery result of the winning lottery for the random number value (also called special information) obtained based on the entry of the game ball into either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 is sent to the player. This is one unit of notification processing. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one winning lottery for one piece of special information for each game. When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires the special information based on the entry of the game ball into either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the first symbol display unit In either one of the 37a or the second pattern display portion 37b, after the segment display is variably displayed, the segment display is stop-displayed so that the display corresponds to the lottery result of the acquired special information. In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment acquires the special information based on the entry of the game ball into either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the symbol display device At 41, after the predetermined symbol row is variably displayed, the symbol row is stopped and displayed so as to correspond to the lottery result of the acquired special information. In addition, the time required for one game round is also called unit game time. The unit playing time is composed of a variable time, which is the time from when the variable display is started until the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed, and a stop time, which is the time when the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed. there is

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 98(b), the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 displays a first reserved display area Ds1 and a second reserved display area Ds2. In the first reservation display area Ds1, the number of reservations based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 is displayed. The second pending display area Ds2 displays the number of pending balls entered into the second starting port 34 . In this embodiment, as described above, the maximum number of game balls entered into the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 is four. Further, in the present embodiment, a game round to be executed later corresponding to the reserved game ball, but not yet executed, is also referred to as a reserved game round.

<<3-2>> Electrical Configuration of Gaming Machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described using a block diagram.

FIG. 99 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 10 mainly includes a main controller 60 , a sound emission control device 90 , and a display control device 100 .

The main controller 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main game. The main control board 61 has an MPU 62 composed of elements having multiple functions. The MPU 62 includes a CPU (not shown) that executes various control programs, a ROM 63 that records various control programs and fixed value data, and temporarily stores various data when executing the programs recorded in the ROM 63. and a RAM 64, which is a memory for storing. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. A part of the functions of the MPU 62 may be provided by another element. Details of various areas provided in the ROM 63 and RAM 64 will be described later.

The main control board 61 is provided with an input port and an output port. An input port of the main control board 61 is connected to a payout control device 70 and a power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in a power supply device 85 . The main control board 61 is supplied with stable 24 V DC power from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86 . The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power supply as an external power supply, and converts the external power supplied from the commercial power supply into the operating power required by the main control device 60, the payout control device 70, etc., to each device supply power. The power supply device 85 is equipped with a capacitor (not shown), and in the event of a power failure or the power switch 88 (FIG. 95) being turned off, continues to supply power to each device for a predetermined period of time. do.

Various detection sensors are connected to the input port of the main control board 61 . Specifically, a plurality of winning openings provided in various winning openings such as the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, the through gate 35, the first variable winning apparatus 36, the second variable winning apparatus 212, etc. is connected to the detection sensor 205 (FIG. 97) provided in the detection sensor and delay mechanism 202 . Based on signals from various detection sensors, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether or not the game ball flowing down the game area PA has entered each ball entrance, and determines whether the game ball has passed through the through gate 35. It determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the delay mechanism 202 (detection of the distribution mode of the game ball). Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 and the second start port 34, and executes the electric accessory release lottery based on the entry of the ball into the through gate 35. do.

The output port of the main control board 61 is connected to the first variable winning drive unit 36c for opening and closing the first opening and closing door 36b of the first variable winning device 36, and the opening and closing operation of the second opening and closing door 212b of the second variable winning device 212. a second variable winning drive unit 212c that causes the first distribution valve 218 to open and close, a first distribution valve drive unit 218a that opens and closes the second distribution valve 219, a second distribution valve drive unit 219a that opens and closes, The main display unit 45 is connected to the electric accessory drive unit 34b that opens and closes the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34. As shown in FIG. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the first variable prize winning driving section 36c so that the first opening/closing door 36b is opened/closed, and furthermore, the second opening/closing door 212b is opened/closed. The drive control of the second variable winning drive unit 212c is executed as follows. Further, in the open/close execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the first distribution valve drive unit 218a so that the first distribution valve 218 is opened and closed, and furthermore, performs drive control so that the second distribution valve 219 is opened and closed. , drive control of the second distribution valve drive unit 219a is executed. In addition, as a result of the electric accessory opening lottery, when the electric role opening is won, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 34b so that the electric accessory 34a is released. In each game round, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b in the main display portion 45. FIG. Further, when the jackpot type is determined in the opening/closing execution mode and the number of round games to be executed in the opening/closing execution mode is determined, display control of the round display section 39 in the main display section 45 is executed.

A payout control device 70 and a sound emission control device 90 are connected to the output port of the main control board 61 . A prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 70 from the main control device 60 based on the winning judgment result, for example. When the main controller 60 transmits the prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63. FIG. Specifically, when entering the ball into the general winning hole 32 is specified, a winning ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is transmitted from the main controller 60, and the ball enters the first starting hole 33. is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is transmitted from the main controller 60, and when entering the second start port 34 is specified, one game ball is paid out A prize ball command corresponding to is transmitted from the main controller 60 . The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 based on the prize ball command received from the main controller 60 to pay out prize balls.

A discharge control device 80 is connected to the payout control device 70 . The shooting control device 80 controls shooting of the game ball shooting mechanism 81 . The game ball shooting mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined shooting conditions are met. Also, the operation handle 25 and the game ball shooting button 26 are connected to the shooting control device 80 .

The sound emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60 and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main controller 60 transmits various commands, the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63 is referred to. Details of these various commands are described later.

In addition, based on various commands received from the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90 controls the driving of various lamps 47 composed of light emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the front door frame 14, and the driving control of the speaker 46. and control the display control device 100 . Also, the effect operation button 24 is connected to the sound emission control device 90, and when the effect operation button 24 is operated by the player at a predetermined timing, a game effect reflecting the operation is performed. It controls the various lamps 47, the speaker 46, the display control device 100, and the like.

The display control device 100 executes display control of the pattern display device 41 based on various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 . Specifically, the display control device 100, based on the various commands received from the sound emission control device 90, grasps the fluctuation time of the pattern in the pattern display device 41 and the type of combination of patterns to be finally stopped and displayed. , presence/absence of occurrence of ready-to-win, contents of ready-to-win effect, contents of notice effect to be executed in each game cycle, and the like are grasped. In this embodiment, the stop time, which is the time during which the combination of symbols is stopped and displayed, is constant. Therefore, by determining the variable time, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game, is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

FIG. 100 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used for a winning lottery or the like. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 sets the winning lottery, the setting of the display of the main display section 45, the setting of the pattern display of the pattern display device 41, and the like. Specifically, a winning random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery. A hit type counter C2 is used when allocating the type of the big hit result and the type of the small hit result. A ready-to-win random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not to generate a ready-to-win when the symbol row displayed on the symbol display device 41 is changed.

A random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. Further, when determining the variation time in the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b of the main display portion 45 and the symbol display device 41, a variation type counter CS is used. Furthermore, the electric accessory opening counter C4 is used for the electric accessory opening lottery for determining whether or not the electric accessory 34a of the second start port 34 is to be opened.

Each of the counters C1 to C4, CINI, and CS is a loop counter that adds 1 to the counter value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. FIG.

The RAM 64 is provided with a pending information storage area 64b and a determination processing execution area 64c. The reservation information storage area 64b is provided with a first reservation area Ra and a second reservation area Rb. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first start port 33, each value of the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 at the timing of the entry is the first hold in the hold information storage area 64b. It is stored chronologically in area Ra. In addition, when the game ball enters the second start port 34, each value of the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 at the timing of entering the ball is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b. stored chronologically.

The details of the winning random number counter C1 will be described. The winning random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery as described above. The winning random number counter C1 is, for example, configured to be incremented by one within the range of 0 to 1199 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Further, when the winning random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value=0 to 1199).

The hit random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and when a game ball enters the first start port 33, the updated value is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entry. When a game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entry.

The value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the first reservation area Ra is moved to the execution area AE of the judgment processing execution area 64c, and is collated with the success/failure table stored in the success/failure table storage area 63a of the ROM 63 to determine the jackpot. It is determined whether or not it will be and whether or not it will be a small hit. Also, the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the second reservation area Rb is moved to the execution area AE of the judgment processing execution area 64c, and is collated with the success/failure table stored in the success/failure table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. It is determined whether or not it will be a big hit and whether or not it will be a small hit.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb is determined by By doing so, it moves to the execution area AE of the judgment processing execution area 64c in the order acquired. Then, the hit random number counter C1 moved to the execution area AE is compared with the hit/fail table stored in the hit/fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and it is determined whether or not there will be a big hit or a small hit. be done.

Next, the details of the hit type counter C2 will be described. The hit type counter C2 is used when determining the big hit type and the small hit type. The hit type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The hit type counter C2 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry when the game ball enters the first start port 33. When the game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the determination process execution area 64c. The jackpot type is determined using the value of the hit type counter C2 stored in . Further, when the result of the winning lottery is a small winning, the small winning type is determined using the value of the winning type counter C2 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c. Furthermore, the MPU 62 uses the value of the winning random number counter C1 and the value of the winning type counter C2 to determine the display mode of the segment display device that is stopped and displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b. . The stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referred to for the determination.

Next, details of the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is used when determining whether or not a reach occurs when the result of the winning lottery is neither a big win nor a small win. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the first start port 33, and the second start port 34. It is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters. After the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first reservation area Ra is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c, it is compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63, and the reach occurs. After the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the second reservation area Rb is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c, it is compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63, and the reach occurs. However, when the result of the winning lottery is a big win and the game shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 determines the occurrence of reach regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

The ready-to-win means that, for some of the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41, there is a possibility that a combination of symbols corresponding to a big win will be established, and some combinations of symbols are stopped. It refers to a display state in which symbols are displayed and the remaining symbol rows are displayed in a variable manner. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the combination of symbols corresponding to the big win refers to the combination of the same symbols on a predetermined pay line. As a specific example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of FIG. A ready-to-win state is achieved by forming a ready-to-win line and performing variable display of symbols in the symbol row Z2 when the ready-to-win line is formed. Then, when a big win occurs, the same symbols as the symbols forming the reach line are stop-displayed in the symbol row Z2.

In addition, in the ready-to-win state, while the ready-to-win line is formed, the patterns are displayed in the remaining pattern rows in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen to create a ready-to-win effect. It includes a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a after displaying a combination of patterns in which a reach line is formed in a reduced size or not. In addition, when the ready-to-win effect is being performed or before the ready-to-win display is performed, the determination of whether or not to perform a notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character is performed using the reach-to-win random number counter C3 or other counters. may

Next, details of the fluctuation type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the variation time in the first symbol display portion 37 a and the second symbol display portion 37 b and the symbol variation time in the symbol display device 41 . The fluctuation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 199, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once each time a normal process, which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of variation display in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b and at the start of symbol variation by the symbol display device 41. The variable time table stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is used when determining the variable time in the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b.

Next, the details of the electric accessory release counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory release counter C4 is, for example, configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 465 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated, and stored in the electric role holding area 64d of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the through gate 35. - 特許庁Then, at a predetermined timing, after the value of the electric role product open counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 64d moves to the electric role execution area 64e, the value of the electric role product open counter C4 is displayed in the electric role execution area 64e. is used to determine whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to the open state. Specifically, in the electric role execution area 64e, the winning/failure table (electric role lottery winning/failure table) stored in the role lottery table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 and the value of the electric role lottery counter C4 are different. It is collated, and it is determined whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to the open state. For example, if C4=0, 1, the electric accessory 34a is controlled to be in the open state, and if C4=2 to 465, the electric accessory 34a is maintained in the closed state.

At least one of the acquired value of the winning random number counter C1, the value of the winning type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, and the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 corresponds to special information in the present invention. Further, at least one of the value of the winning random number counter C1, the value of the winning type counter C2, and the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first reservation area Ra and the second reservation area Rb is also called reservation information.

Next, the success/failure table will be described. The success/failure table is table data for matching with the winning random number counter C1 when a winning lottery is performed based on the winning random number counter C1. The pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment includes, as win/fail tables, a win/fail table for the first start hole and a win/fail table for the second start hole.

FIG. 101 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the success/failure table for the first start port. As shown in FIG. 101, five values from 0 to 4 are set in the success/failure table for the first starting port as the value of the winning random number counter C1 for the big win. Also, five values from 5 to 9 are set as the value of the winning random number counter C1 that is a small win (loss). Of the winning random number counter C1 of 0 to 1199, the values of 10 to 1199 are out.

The "small win" is a trigger to shift to the opening and closing execution mode in which the opening and closing door of the variable winning device (the second opening and closing door 212b of the second variable winning device 212 in this embodiment) is executed. This is a pass/fail result that does not trigger mode transition. On the other hand, "off" is a pass/fail result that does not trigger the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, nor does it trigger the transition to the support mode.

FIG. 102 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the success/failure table for the second start port. As shown in FIG. 102, five values from 0 to 4 are set in the success/failure table for the second start port as the value of the winning random number counter C1 for the big win. In addition, 1195 values from 5 to 1199 are set as the value of the winning random number counter C1 that is a small win (loss). It should be noted that the value of the hit random number counter C1, which is not a small hit but a loss, is not set in the hit/fail table for the second start port of the present embodiment.

Next, the jackpot type will be described. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set in the pachinko machine 10. - 特許庁Specifically, for example, by providing a difference between the following two aspects or modes, it is possible to set a plurality of types of jackpots.
(1) Aspect of opening/closing control of the variable winning device (first variable winning device 36 in this embodiment) in the opening/closing execution mode (2) Support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the opening/closing execution mode ends

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment opens and closes the first opening/closing door 36b of the first variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode executed when a big win is won, and executes when a small win is won. In the opened/closed execution mode, the second opening/closing door 212b of the second variable winning device 212 is opened/closed.

In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of opening and closing control of the first variable winning device 36 in the above-mentioned (1) opening and closing execution mode, the first variable winning device 36 is controlled from the start of the opening and closing execution mode to the end of the opening and closing execution mode. A high-frequency winning mode and a low-frequency winning mode can be set so that the occurrence frequency of winning is relatively high or low. For example, in the high frequency winning mode, the opening and closing of the first opening and closing door 36b is performed multiple times (for example, 16 times) from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode. It can be set to continue until the number of balls entering the opening/closing door 36b reaches ten. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening and closing of the first opening and closing door 36b is performed twice from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode, and one opening is performed until 0.2 sec elapses or the first opening and closing door 36b It can be set to continue until the number of incoming balls reaches 6.

When the operation handle 25 is operated by the player, the game ball shooting mechanism 81 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is shot toward the game area PA every 0.6 sec. In the above specific example, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of the first opening/closing door 36b is 0.2 sec. In other words, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of the first opening/closing door 36b is shorter than the shooting cycle of the game ball. Therefore, substantially no winning of game balls occurs in the opening/closing execution mode associated with the low-frequency winning mode. However, even in the opening and closing execution mode related to the low-frequency winning mode, it may be set so that the winning of the game ball can occur.

The number of openings and closings of the first opening/closing door 36b, the opening limit time for one opening, and the opening limit number for one opening are determined by the first variable winning device from the time the opening/closing execution mode is started to the end. The opening mode of the first opening/closing door 36b is arbitrary as long as the frequency of occurrence of winnings to 36 is higher in the high-frequency winning mode than in the low-frequency winning mode. Specifically, if the high frequency winning mode has more opening and closing times than the low frequency winning mode, the opening limit time for one opening is longer, or the opening limit number for one opening is set more good. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, in the opening/closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode, substantially no winning to the first variable winning device 36 may occur.

In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of the support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the end of the above-mentioned (2) open/close execution mode, shooting of game balls continues in a similar mode to the game area PA. A high-frequency support mode and a low-frequency support mode are selected so that the frequency of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 being in the open state per unit time is relatively high or low when compared in the situation where can be set.

Specifically, the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode have different probabilities of winning the electric role open lottery in the electric role item opening lottery using the electric role item opening counter C4. In the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role open lottery in the electric accessory open lottery is made higher than in the low frequency support mode. In addition, in the high-frequency support mode, the opening time of the electric accessory 34a may be set longer than in the low-frequency support mode when the electric role opening winning is won.

Although not adopted in the present embodiment, in the high frequency support mode, the number of times the electric accessory 34a is in the open state when the electric accessory 34a is elected is set higher than in the low frequency support mode. good too. Furthermore, it may be configured such that the electric accessory 34a is set to have a long opening time once. In addition, in the high-frequency support mode, in the case where the open state of the electric accessory 34a occurs multiple times due to the electric role open winning, the closing time from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state is , may be set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the time secured from one electric accessory open lottery to the next electric accessory open lottery is set to be relatively shorter than in the low-frequency support mode. may

It should be noted that the electric role product 34a is opened when the distribution mode of the game ball to the through gate 35 satisfies a predetermined distribution condition (that is, when the game ball circulates through the through gate 35). It is driven based on the result of lottery, and is not driven when game balls do not circulate through the through gate 35.例文帳に追加

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of a ball entering the second starting port 34 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. That is, the high-frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary game state that assists establishment of special information acquisition conditions.

In this embodiment, when a big win is obtained as a result of the winning lottery, the type of the big win is distributed using the winning type counter C2. Further, when a small win is obtained as a result of the winning lottery, the type of the small win is sorted using a win type counter C2. The distribution of the types of big wins and the types of small wins corresponding to the value of the winning type counter C2 is stored in the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63 as a distribution table.

FIG. 103 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table for the first start port. Fig. 103(a) shows a big hit distribution table for the first start port, and Fig. 103(b) shows a small hit distribution table for the first start port. The distribution table for the first starting port is referred to at the time of winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 .

As shown in FIG. 103(a), in the jackpot allocation table for the first start port, jackpot A and jackpot B are set as the jackpot types based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33. ing. The jackpot A has a round game count of 10R in the opening/closing execution mode, and the first variable winning device 36 performs opening/closing operation in the opening/closing execution mode. The description indicated by [ ] in the column of [opening and closing scenario for jackpot] of the jackpot distribution table for the first start port in FIG. This is a program for controlling the opening and closing of the first opening/closing door 36b of the first variable prize winning device 36 (hereinafter also referred to as a big win opening/closing scenario). In the jackpot A, the main MPU 62 performs opening/closing control of the first opening/closing door 36b of the first variable winning device 36 corresponding to the round game number 10R according to the jackpot opening/closing scenario [LOP10]. Also, the jackpot A is a jackpot in which the support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency support mode. The number of games played in the high frequency support mode is 100 times.

The jackpot B has a round game count of 10R in the opening/closing execution mode, and the first opening/closing door 36b of the first variable winning device 36 opens/closes in the opening/closing execution mode. In the jackpot B, the main MPU 62 performs opening/closing control of the first opening/closing door 36b of the first variable winning device 36 corresponding to the round game number 10R according to the jackpot opening/closing scenario [LOP10]. Also, the jackpot B is a jackpot in which the support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the low-frequency support mode. That is, the number of game times executed in the high-frequency support mode is zero.

In the jackpot distribution table for the first start port, among the values of the hit type counter C2 of "0 to 99", "0 to 54" correspond to the jackpot A, and "55 to 99" correspond to the jackpot B. Yes.

As shown in FIG. 103(b), the small hit distribution table for the first starting port includes small hits a and big hits b as the types of small hits based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33. is set.

The small win a has a round game count of 1R in the opening/closing execution mode, and the second opening/closing door 212b of the second variable winning device 212 opens/closes in the opening/closing execution mode. The description shown in [ ] in the column of [opening and closing scenario for small hits] of the small hit distribution table for the first start port in FIG. 103 (b) is the set round in the opening and closing execution mode at the time of A program for controlling the opening and closing of the second opening/closing door 212b, the first distribution valve 218, and the second distribution valve 219 of the second variable winning device 212 according to the number of games played (hereinafter also referred to as the opening and closing scenario for the small winning call). In the small win a, the main MPU 62 performs opening/closing control of the second opening/closing door 212b of the second variable winning device 212 corresponding to the number of round games 1R, according to the opening/closing scenario [SOPa] for the small win. Open/close control of the distribution valve 218 and the second distribution valve 219 is performed. In the opening/closing scenario [SOPa] for the small hit, the game ball entering the second big winning hole 212a when the second opening/closing door 212b is open is easily attracted to the crew 220, so that the first distribution valve 218 and The opening/closing pattern of the second distribution valve 219 is set. Specifically, the first distribution valve 218 is closed at the timing when the game ball entering the second big winning hole 212a flows through the flow path 214 and reaches the first distribution valve 218, and the game ball The opening/closing patterns of the first distribution valve 218 and the second distribution valve 219 are set so that the flow is distributed to the flow path 215 and easily reaches the crew 220 .

Also, when the game ball enters the V winning opening (first V winning opening V1 or second V winning opening V2) during the opening/closing execution mode started with the small winning a as a trigger, the big winning is decided. The type of jackpot determined in this case is the jackpot Va. Details of the jackpot Va will be described later.

If a game ball enters the V winning slot during the opening and closing execution mode started with a small win and the big win is confirmed, after the opening and closing execution mode being executed ends, the game ball enters the V winning again. An open/close execution mode corresponding to the big win determined by the ball is started. Then, an opening/closing execution mode according to the determined jackpot type is executed, and when the high-frequency support mode is set, a predetermined number of games are executed in the high-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode is finished. be.

The small win b has a round game count of 1R in the opening/closing execution mode, and the second opening/closing door 212b of the second variable winning device 212 opens/closes in the opening/closing execution mode. In the small win b, the main MPU 62 performs opening/closing control of the second opening/closing door 212b of the second variable winning device 212 corresponding to the number of round games 1R according to the opening/closing scenario [SOPb] for the small win. Open/close control of the distribution valve 218 and the second distribution valve 219 is performed. The open/close scenario [SOPb] for the small hit is such that the game ball that enters the second big winning hole 212a when the second open/close door 212b is open is easily attracted to the cloon 220, so that the first distribution valve 218 and The opening/closing pattern of the second distribution valve 219 is set. When the game ball enters the V winning hole during the opening/closing execution mode started with the small win b, the big win Vb is determined. Details of the jackpot Vb will be described later.

In the small hit distribution table for the first start port, among the values of the hit type counter C2 of "0 to 99", "0 to 49" corresponds to the small hit a, and "50 to 99" is small. It corresponds to hit b.

In addition, as described above, the opening and closing scenario [SOPa] for the small winning and the opening and closing scenario [SOPb] for the small winning are designed so that the game ball entering the second big winning hole 212a is easily attracted to the croon 220. Although the opening and closing patterns of the first distribution valve 218 and the second distribution valve 219 are set, the game ball is not always attracted to the crew 220, and the game ball enters the second variable winning device 212. Depending on the timing, it may be guided to the second V winning opening V2 or the ejection opening 225.

FIG. 104 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table for the second start port. FIG. 104(a) shows a big hit distribution table for the second start port, and FIG. 104(b) shows a small hit distribution table for the second start port. The distribution table for the second starting port is referred to during a winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34. - 特許庁

As shown in FIG. 104(a), the jackpot distribution table for the second start port includes jackpot C, jackpot D, and jackpot E as jackpot types based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 34. is set. The jackpot C has a round game count of 15R in the opening/closing execution mode, and the first variable winning device 36 performs opening/closing operation in the opening/closing execution mode. In the case of the jackpot C, the main MPU 62 performs opening/closing control of the first opening/closing door 36b of the first variable winning device 36 corresponding to the number of round games 15R according to the opening/closing scenario [LOP15] for the jackpot. Also, the jackpot C is a jackpot in which the support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency support mode. The number of games played in the high frequency support mode is 100 times.

The jackpot D has a round game count of 5R in the opening/closing execution mode, and the first opening/closing door 36b of the first variable winning device 36 opens/closes in the opening/closing execution mode. In the jackpot D, the main MPU 62 performs opening/closing control of the first opening/closing door 36b of the first variable winning device 36 corresponding to the number of round games 5R according to the opening/closing scenario [LOP5] for the jackpot. Also, the jackpot D is a jackpot in which the support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency support mode. The number of games played in the high frequency support mode is 100 times.

The jackpot E has a round game count of 5R in the opening/closing execution mode, and the first opening/closing door 36b of the first variable winning device 36 opens/closes in the opening/closing execution mode. In the jackpot E, the main MPU 62 performs opening/closing control of the first opening/closing door 36b of the first variable winning device 36 corresponding to the number of round games 5R according to the opening/closing scenario [LOP5] for the jackpot. Also, the jackpot E is a jackpot in which the support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the low-frequency support mode. That is, the number of game times executed in the high-frequency support mode is zero.

In the jackpot distribution table for the second start port, among the values of the hit type counter C2 of "0 to 99", "0 to 28" correspond to the jackpot C, and "29 to 43" correspond to the jackpot D. It corresponds, and "44 to 99" corresponds to the jackpot E.

As shown in the small hit distribution table for the second start port in FIG. As the types of small wins, a small win c, a big win d, a small win e, a small win f, and a small win g are set.

The small hit c has a round game count of 1R in the opening/closing execution mode, and the second opening/closing door 212b of the second variable winning device 212 opens/closes in the opening/closing execution mode. In the small win c, the main MPU 62 performs opening/closing control of the second opening/closing door 212b of the second variable winning device 212 corresponding to the number of round games 1R according to the opening/closing scenario [SOPc] for the small win. Open/close control of the distribution valve 218 and the second distribution valve 219 is performed. The open/close scenario [SOPc] for the small win is such that the game ball that enters the second big winning port 212a when the second open/close door 212b is open is easily attracted to the cloon 220, so that the first distribution valve 218 and The opening/closing pattern of the second distribution valve 219 is set. Specifically, the first distribution valve 218 is closed at the timing when the game ball entering the second big winning hole 212a flows through the flow path 214 and reaches the first distribution valve 218, and the game ball The opening/closing patterns of the first distribution valve 218 and the second distribution valve 219 are set so that the flow is distributed to the flow path 215 and easily reaches the crew 220 .

Also, when the game ball enters the V winning opening (first V winning opening V1 or second V winning opening V2) during the opening/closing execution mode started with the small winning a as a trigger, the big winning is decided. The type of jackpot determined in this case is the jackpot Vc. Details of the jackpot Vc will be described later.

The small win d has a round game count of 1R in the opening/closing execution mode, and the second opening/closing door 212b of the second variable winning device 212 opens/closes in the opening/closing execution mode. In the small win d, the main MPU 62 performs opening/closing control of the second opening/closing door 212b of the second variable winning device 212 corresponding to the number of round games 1R according to the opening/closing scenario [SOPd] for the small win. Open/close control of the distribution valve 218 and the second distribution valve 219 is performed. The open/close scenario [SOPd] for the small win is the first distribution so that the game ball entering the second big winning opening 212a when the second opening/closing door 212b is open is easily attracted to the second V winning opening V2. The opening/closing patterns of the valve 218 and the second distribution valve 219 are set. Specifically, the first distribution valve 218 is in an open state at the timing when the game ball entering the second big winning hole 212a flows through the flow path 214 and reaches the first distribution valve 218, and the game ball reaches the second distribution valve 219, the second distribution valve 219 is in an open state, and the game ball is distributed to the flow path 217 so that it can easily reach the second V winning opening V2. The opening/closing patterns of the valve 218 and the second distribution valve 219 are set.

Also, when the game ball enters the V winning opening (first V winning opening V1 or second V winning opening V2) during the open/close execution mode started with the small winning d as a trigger, the big winning is decided. The type of jackpot determined in this case is the jackpot Vd. Details of the jackpot Vd will be described later.

The small win e has a round game count of 1R in the opening/closing execution mode, and the second opening/closing door 212b of the second variable winning device 212 opens/closes in the opening/closing execution mode. In the small win e, the main MPU 62 performs opening/closing control of the second opening/closing door 212b of the second variable winning device 212 corresponding to the number of round games 1R according to the opening/closing scenario [SOPe] for the small win. Open/close control of the distribution valve 218 and the second distribution valve 219 is performed. The open/close scenario [SOPe] for the small win is the first allocation so that the game ball entering the second big winning opening 212a when the second opening/closing door 212b is open is easily attracted to the second V winning opening V2. The opening/closing patterns of the valve 218 and the second distribution valve 219 are set. Specifically, the first distribution valve 218 is in an open state at the timing when the game ball entering the second big winning hole 212a flows through the flow path 214 and reaches the first distribution valve 218, and the game ball reaches the second distribution valve 219, the second distribution valve 219 is in an open state, and the game ball is distributed to the flow path 217 so that it can easily reach the second V winning opening V2. The opening/closing patterns of the valve 218 and the second distribution valve 219 are set.

Also, when the game ball enters the V winning opening (first V winning opening V1 or second V winning opening V2) during the opening/closing execution mode started with the small winning e as a trigger, the big winning is confirmed. In this case, the type of the jackpot determined is the jackpot Ve. Details of the jackpot Ve will be described later.

The small win f has a round game count of 1R in the opening/closing execution mode, and the second opening/closing door 212b of the second variable winning device 212 opens/closes in the opening/closing execution mode. In the small win f, the main MPU 62 performs opening/closing control of the second opening/closing door 212b of the second variable winning device 212 corresponding to the number of round games 1R according to the opening/closing scenario [SOPf] for the small win. Open/close control of the distribution valve 218 and the second distribution valve 219 is performed. In the open/close scenario [SOPf] for the small win, the game ball entering the second big winning opening 212a when the second opening/closing door 212b is open is easily attracted to the second V winning opening V2. The opening/closing patterns of the valve 218 and the second distribution valve 219 are set. Specifically, the first distribution valve 218 is in an open state at the timing when the game ball entering the second big winning hole 212a flows through the flow path 214 and reaches the first distribution valve 218, and the game ball reaches the second distribution valve 219, the second distribution valve 219 is in an open state, and the game ball is distributed to the flow path 217 so that it can easily reach the second V winning opening V2. The opening/closing patterns of the valve 218 and the second distribution valve 219 are set.

Also, when a game ball enters the V winning opening (first V winning opening V1 or second V winning opening V2) during the open/close execution mode started with the small winning f as a trigger, the big winning is confirmed. The type of jackpot determined in this case is the jackpot Vf. Details of the jackpot Vf will be described later.

The small win g has a round game count of 1R in the opening and closing execution mode, and the second opening and closing door 212b of the second variable winning device 212 opens and closes in the opening and closing execution mode. In the small win g, the main MPU 62 performs opening/closing control of the second opening/closing door 212b of the second variable winning device 212 corresponding to the number of round games 1R according to the opening/closing scenario [SOPg] for the small win. Open/close control of the distribution valve 218 and the second distribution valve 219 is performed. In the open/close scenario [SOPg] for small wins, the first sorting valve 218 is set so that the game ball that enters the second big winning opening 212a when the second opening/closing door 212b is open is easily attracted to the discharge opening 225. and the opening/closing patterns of the second distribution valve 219 are set. Specifically, the first distribution valve 218 is in an open state at the timing when the game ball entering the second big winning hole 212a flows through the flow path 214 and reaches the first distribution valve 218, and the game ball reaches the second distribution valve 219, the second distribution valve 219 is in a closed state, and the game ball is distributed to the flow path 216 so that it can easily reach the discharge port 225. and the opening/closing patterns of the second distribution valve 219 are set.

Also, when the game ball enters the V winning opening (first V winning opening V1 or second V winning opening V2) during the open/close execution mode started with the small winning g as a trigger, the big winning is confirmed. The type of jackpot determined in this case is the jackpot Vg. Details of the jackpot Vg will be described later.

In the small hit distribution table for the second start port, among the values of the hit type counter C2 of "0 to 99", "0 to 32" corresponds to the small hit c, and "32 to 38" is small. It corresponds to the hit d, "39 to 44" corresponds to the small hit e, "45 to 66" corresponds to the small hit f, and "67 to 99" corresponds to the small hit g. ing.

In addition, as described above, the opening and closing scenario [SOPc] for the small winning has the first distribution valve 218 and the second distribution valve 218 so that the game ball entering the second big winning hole 212a is easily attracted to the crew 220. Although the opening and closing pattern of the valve 219 is set, it is not always triggered by the crew 220, and depending on the timing when the game ball enters the second variable winning device 212, the second V winning port V2 or the discharge port 225 may also be triggered by In addition, in the opening/closing scenario [SOPd] for the small winning, the opening/closing scenario for the small winning [SOPe], and the opening/closing scenario for the small winning [SOPf], the game ball entering the second big winning hole 212a is the second V winning. The opening and closing patterns of the first distribution valve 218 and the second distribution valve 219 are set so that they are easily attracted to the opening V2, but they are not necessarily attracted to the second V winning opening V2. There is also a possibility of being induced to the croon 220 or the discharge port 225 depending on the timing when the ball enters the 2 variable winning device 212 . Furthermore, in the opening/closing scenario [SOPg] for the small win, the first distribution valve 218 and the second distribution valve 219 are set so that the game ball entering the second big prize winning port 212a is easily attracted to the discharge port 225. Although the opening and closing pattern is set, it is not always induced to the discharge port 225, and depending on the timing when the game ball enters the second variable winning device 212, it is induced to the crew 220 or the second V winning port V2. It is possible.

Next, during the opening and closing execution mode started with each of the small wins a to g as a trigger, the game ball enters the V winning port (first V winning port V1 or second V winning port V2) (hereinafter also referred to as V winning The jackpot Va to jackpot Vg that is determined when the game is called) will be described.

FIG. 105 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a jackpot type determined by a game ball entering a V winning hole (first V winning hole V1, second V winning hole V2).

As shown, the jackpot Va has a round game count of 10R in the opening/closing execution mode, and the first opening/closing door 36b of the first variable winning device 36 opens/closes in the opening/closing execution mode. In the jackpot Va, the main MPU 62 performs opening/closing control of the first opening/closing door 36b of the first variable winning device 36 corresponding to the round game number 10R according to the jackpot opening/closing scenario [LOP10]. Also, the big win Va is a big win in which the support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency support mode. The number of games played in the high frequency support mode is 100 times.

The jackpot Vb has a round game count of 10R in the opening/closing execution mode, and the first opening/closing door 36b of the first variable winning device 36 opens/closes in the opening/closing execution mode. In the jackpot Vb, the main MPU 62 performs opening/closing control of the first opening/closing door 36b of the first variable winning device 36 corresponding to the round game number 10R according to the jackpot opening/closing scenario [LOP10]. Also, the jackpot Vb is a jackpot in which the support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the low-frequency support mode. That is, the number of game times executed in the high-frequency support mode is zero.

The jackpot Vc has a round game count of 15R in the opening/closing execution mode, and the first opening/closing door 36b of the first variable winning device 36 opens/closes in the opening/closing execution mode. In the jackpot Vc, the main MPU 62 performs opening/closing control of the first opening/closing door 36b of the first variable winning device 36 corresponding to the number of round games 15R according to the jackpot opening/closing scenario [LOP15]. Also, the jackpot Vc is a jackpot in which the support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency support mode. The number of games played in the high frequency support mode is 100 times.

The jackpot Vd has a round game count of 15R in the opening/closing execution mode, and the first opening/closing door 36b of the first variable winning device 36 opens/closes in the opening/closing execution mode. In the jackpot Vd, the main MPU 62 performs opening/closing control of the first opening/closing door 36b of the first variable winning device 36 corresponding to the round game number 15R according to the jackpot opening/closing scenario [LOP15]. Also, the big win Vd is a big win in which the support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency support mode. The number of games played in the high frequency support mode is 100 times.

The jackpot Ve has a round game count of 5R in the opening/closing execution mode, and the first opening/closing door 36b of the first variable winning device 36 opens/closes in the opening/closing execution mode. In the jackpot Ve, the main MPU 62 performs opening/closing control of the first opening/closing door 36b of the first variable winning device 36 corresponding to the number of round games 5R according to the opening/closing scenario [LOP5] for the jackpot. Also, the jackpot Ve is a jackpot in which the support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency support mode. The number of games played in the high frequency support mode is 100 times.

The jackpot Vf has a round game count of 5R in the opening/closing execution mode, and the first opening/closing door 36b of the first variable winning device 36 opens/closes in the opening/closing execution mode. In the jackpot Vf, the main MPU 62 performs opening/closing control of the first opening/closing door 36b of the first variable winning device 36 corresponding to the number of round games 5R according to the jackpot opening/closing scenario [LOP5]. Also, the jackpot Vf is a jackpot in which the support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the low-frequency support mode. That is, the number of game times executed in the high-frequency support mode is zero.

The jackpot Vg has a round game count of 5R in the opening/closing execution mode, and the first opening/closing door 36b of the first variable winning device 36 opens/closes in the opening/closing execution mode. In the jackpot Vg, the main MPU 62 performs opening/closing control of the first opening/closing door 36b of the first variable winning device 36 corresponding to the number of round games 5R according to the jackpot opening/closing scenario [LOP5]. Also, the big win Vg is a big win in which the support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the low-frequency support mode. That is, the number of game times executed in the high-frequency support mode is zero.

As can be seen from FIG. 105, the jackpot Vc and the jackpot Vd, and the jackpot Vf and the jackpot Vg have the same number of round games and the number of high-frequency support mode games. Although they are the same, since the types of small hits that trigger the winning of the jackpot are different, they are set as different types of jackpots in terms of processing.

FIG. 106 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the success/failure table (electric accessary product open lottery success/failure table) used when executing the electric accessary product open lottery.

FIG. 106(a) shows a success/failure table (for low-frequency support mode) for electric accessory open lottery used in low-frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 106( a ), the electric accessory open lottery success/failure table (for low-frequency support mode) has two values of 0 and 1 for the electric accessory open counter C4 that will win the electric role open winning. A value is set. 464 values from 2 to 465 are set as the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4 to be out. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 in the low-frequency support mode and the electric accessary item open lottery is executed, the electric role open lottery is won with a probability of 1/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric role opening win is made in the low-frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.4 seconds.

FIG. 106(b) shows a success/failure table (for high-frequency support mode) for electric accessory open lottery used in high-frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 106(b), in the success/failure table for the electric accessory open lottery (for high-frequency support mode), there are 462 values from 0 to 461 as the value of the electric accessory open counter C4 that wins the electric accessory open winning. A value is set. Four values of 462 to 465 are set as the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4 that is out. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 in the high-frequency support mode and the electric accessory open lottery is executed, the electric role open lottery is won with a probability of 231/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric role opening win is made in the high-frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 5.0 seconds.

In this way, the success/failure table for the electric accessory open lottery is set so that the high-frequency support mode has a higher probability of the game ball entering the second start port 34 than the low-frequency support mode. .

<<3-3>> Electrical Configuration of Audio Light Emitting Control Device and Display Control Device:
Next, electrical configurations of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 107 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. As shown in FIG. A part of the configuration such as the power supply device 85 (FIG. 99) is omitted. An MPU 92 is mounted on an audio emission control board 91 provided in the audio emission control device 90 . The MPU 92 is a device containing a CPU, a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like.

The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables, and the like. For example, part of the area of the ROM 93 is provided with an effect pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like.

The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the ROM 93 . For example, a part of the area of the RAM 94 is provided with various flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, and the like. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 92, and they may be individually integrated into chips.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port. The input side of the MPU 92 is connected to the main control device 60 and the effect operation button 24 . Various commands are received from the main controller 60 . A speaker 46 and various lamps 47 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92, and the display control device 100 is also connected.

The display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102, which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are integrated into chips, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. is installed. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 102, and they may be individually integrated into chips.

The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, to generate internal commands for the VDP 105). .

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and also stores JPEG format image data for background images.

A work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when various programs are executed by the MPU 102 .

The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the pattern display device 41 . The VDP 105 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is an IC chip, and is a kind of microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, etc., and intervenes in the reading and writing of data.

The character ROM 106 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as patterns displayed on the pattern display device 41 . The character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table and the like that are referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 106 . It is also possible to configure the character ROM 106 to store the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 .

The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, and by rewriting the content of the video RAM 107, the display content of the pattern display device 41 is changed.

Hereinafter, the MPU 62, ROM 63, and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main MPU 62, main ROM 63, and main RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the sound emission control device 90 are referred to as the sound and light side MPU 92 and the sound and light side, respectively. The ROM 93 and the sound/light side RAM 94 are also called, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also called the display side MPU 102 .

<<3-4>> Outline of Processing by Gaming Machine:
[Game flow]
Next, an overview of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described. The pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is a so-called 1-kind 2-kind machine. Specifically, when a small win is won, the accessory is released, and when the accessory is released, the game ball wins V and the big win is confirmed. The game flow of the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described below.

FIG. 108 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the game flow in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment.

When the player starts playing the game, the operation handle 25 is operated to circulate the game ball to the left side of the game area PA when viewed from the front (hereinafter also referred to as left-handed hitting). Then, the game ball is entered into the first starting port 33 to start the game round (F101). Hereinafter, a game round started by entering a game ball into the first starting hole 33 is also called a first starting hole game round. In this description, the support mode is the low-frequency support mode at the time the game cycle is started.

Then, in the winning lottery in the executed first start game round, if the jackpot is won (F103) and the jackpot type is other than jackpot A (jackpot B) (F103: NO), the jackpot is won. The opening/closing execution mode (round game) triggered is executed (F104). After that, the player hits left again to enter the game ball into the first start hole 33 to execute the first start hole game round (F101).

On the other hand, in F103, when the jackpot type is jackpot A (F103: YES), the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot is executed (F105). After that, the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. The player circulates the game ball on the right side of the game area PA when viewed from the front (hereinafter also referred to as right-handed hitting), enters the game ball into the second start hole 34, and executes the second start hole game round (F112). ).

In the winning lottery of the first starting game round executed in F101, when the big win is not won (F102: NO) and when the small win is not won (F106: NO). , left-handed, and the game ball is entered into the first starting hole 33 to execute the first starting hole game round (F101).

In the winning lottery of the first starting game round executed in F101, when the jackpot is not won (F102: NO) and when the small win is won (F106: YES), the small win is triggered. The open/close execution mode is executed (F107). In the opening/closing execution mode, the second opening/closing door 212b performs the opening/closing operation as described above. When the player hits to the right and enters the game ball into the second big winning hole 212a and circulates in the V winning mechanism 210, and the game ball wins the V prize (F108: YES), the jackpot is won. Determine. Specifically, in the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the small winning winning, the game ball is entered into the second big winning opening 212a by striking to the right and circulated in the V winning mechanism 210, and the first distribution valve 218 And when the game ball is guided to the crew 220 by the distribution by the second distribution valve 219 and the game ball enters the first V winning port V1, or the distribution by the first distribution valve 218 and the second distribution valve 219 When the game ball enters the second V winning hole V2, it becomes a V prize and a big hit is decided.

When the determined jackpot type is the jackpot Va, the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot is executed (F110). After that, the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. The player circulates the game ball on the right side of the game area PA in front view (right shot), enters the game ball into the second start hole 34, and executes the second start hole game cycle (F112).

On the other hand, when the determined jackpot type is the jackpot Vb, the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot is executed (F111). After that, the support mode becomes the low-frequency support mode. After that, the player hits left again to enter the game ball into the first start hole 33 to execute the first start hole game round (F101).

In F108, when the game ball does not win the V prize in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the small win (F108: NO), the player hits left again after the opening/closing execution mode ends, and A game ball is entered into the first starting hole 33 to execute the first starting hole game cycle (F101).

In F112, in the state of the high-frequency support mode, the player hits to the right to enter the game ball into the second starting hole 34, and the second starting hole game cycle is executed. In the winning lottery in the second starting gate game round, if the jackpot is won (F113: YES) and the jackpot type is other than jackpot C and jackpot D (jackpot E) (F114: NO), the jackpot The opening/closing execution mode (round game) triggered is executed (F115). After that, the player hits left again to enter the game ball into the first start hole 33 to execute the first start hole game round (F101).

On the other hand, when the jackpot type is jackpot C or jackpot D (F114: YES) in the winning lottery in the second starting game round executed in F112, the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot is executed. (F116). After that, the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode again. The player hits to the right and enters the game ball into the second starting hole 34 to execute the second starting hole game cycle (F112).

In the winning lottery in the second start game round executed in F112, when the big win is not won (F113: NO) and when the small win is not won (F117: NO). , If the executed second start opening game round is within the limit number of times (100 times) of the game round executed as the high frequency support mode (F118: YES), the high frequency support mode is continued and the game is played. The player hits to the right and enters the game ball into the second starting hole 34 to execute the second starting hole game cycle (F112). On the other hand, when the executed second start opening game round exceeds the limited number of game rounds (100 times) executed in the high frequency support mode (F118: NO), the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode, The player hits to the left again, enters the game ball into the first start hole 33, and executes the first start hole game round (F101).

In the winning lottery of the second start game round executed in F112, if the big win is not won (F113: NO) and if the small win is won (F117: YES), the small win is triggered. The opening/closing execution mode is executed (F119). In the opening/closing execution mode, the second opening/closing door 212b performs the opening/closing operation as described above. When the player hits to the right and enters the game ball into the second big winning hole 212a and circulates in the V winning mechanism 210, and the game ball wins the V prize (F120: YES), the jackpot is won. Determine. Specifically, in the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the small winning winning, the game ball is entered into the second big winning opening 212a by striking to the right and circulated in the V winning mechanism 210, and the first distribution valve 218 And when the game ball is guided to the crew 220 by the distribution by the second distribution valve 219 and the game ball enters the first V winning port V1, or the distribution by the first distribution valve 218 and the second distribution valve 219 When the game ball enters the second V winning hole V2, it becomes a V prize and a big hit is decided.

When the determined jackpot type is jackpot Vc, jackpot Vd or jackpot Ve (F121: YES), the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot is executed (F122). After that, the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. The player hits to the right again, enters the game ball into the second starting hole 34, and executes the second starting hole game cycle (F112).

On the other hand, when the determined jackpot type is the jackpot Vf (F121: NO), the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot is executed (F123). After that, the support mode becomes the low-frequency support mode. After that, the player hits left again to enter the game ball into the first start hole 33 to execute the first start hole game round (F101).

In F120, when the game ball does not win the V prize during the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the small win (F120: NO), the process proceeds to F118. Since F118 has already been explained, its explanation is omitted. The flow of a series of games by the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

As explained in the flow of the game shown in FIG. 108, during the high-frequency support mode, the player hits to the right to enter the game ball into the second start hole 34, and the second start hole game round is played. to run. At this time, as can be seen from FIG. 102, in the winning lottery in the executed second start game round, the small winning is won with a high probability. Also, as shown in FIG. 104, the types of small wins to be won in the second start game cycle are small win c, small win d, small win e, small win f, or small win g.

Here, consideration is given to the advantages of the player when each of the small win c, small win d, small win e, small win f, and small win g is won.

If the small hit c is won, the game ball is induced to the croon 220 in the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the small hit c. When the game ball enters the first V winning hole V1 of the crew 220, the big hit Vc is decided, and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode again in the next game round. Also, when the game ball enters the discharge port 223 of the crew 220, when the executed game round is less than the limited number of games (100 times) of the high frequency support mode, the high frequency support mode is Continuing, the player can enter the game ball into the second starting hole 34 again to execute the second starting hole game cycle. That is, if the small hit c is won in less than the limited number of games in the high frequency support mode (100 times), the big hit Vc is confirmed (if the ball enters the 1st V winning opening V1), or the high frequency support mode is Either the game is continued (when the ball enters the outlet 223), and winning the small win c does not put the player at a disadvantage.

If the small winning d is won, the game ball is induced to the second V winning opening V2 in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the small winning d. When the game ball enters the second V winning hole V2, the big hit Vd is confirmed, and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode again in the next game cycle. Even when the small winning e is won, the game ball is induced to the second V winning opening V2 in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the small winning e. When the game ball enters the second V winning hole V2, the big win Ve is confirmed, and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode again in the next game cycle. When the small win f is won, the game ball is induced to the second V winning opening V2 in the open/close execution mode triggered by the small win f. When the game ball enters the second V winning hole V2, the big hit Vf is confirmed, and the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode in the next game cycle.

Then, when the small winning g is won, the game ball is induced to the discharge port 223 in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the small winning g. When the game ball enters the discharge port 223, if the number of times of the second starting port game executed is less than the limited number of times (100 times) of the number of games executed as the high frequency support mode, the next time High-frequency support will continue for game times.

When each of the small wins c, d, e, f, and g is viewed from the player's point of view, if the small win c is won, as described above, the result will be not be disadvantageous. Any of the small hits d, e, and f cannot be determined when the game ball enters the second V prize opening V2. Then, as can be seen from FIG. 104(b), 6 win type counters C2 are assigned to the small win d, 6 win type counters C2 are assigned to the small win e, and 12 win type counters C2 are assigned to the small win f. Since the number of hit type counters C2 is distributed, assuming that the ball has entered the second V winning hole V2, the percentage of small hits d is 25%, the percentage of small hits e is 25%, and the ratio of small hits e is 25%. The percentage of hit f is 50%. That is, from the player's point of view, when a game ball enters the second V winning hole V2 and a big win is confirmed, the probability of the big win Vf shifting to the low-frequency support mode in the future is 50%.

Therefore, the player expects that the type of the small win is the small win c when the small win is won in the second starting game cycle executed during the high-frequency support mode.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player is given a sense of anticipation by using the effect in the second starting game cycle executed during the high-frequency support mode. A detailed explanation will be given below.

[Set processing of production in game round]
In this embodiment, in the second starting game round executed during the high-frequency support mode, a specific suggestion effect (hereinafter also referred to as a specific suggestion effect) that suggests that the small hit c may be won call). More specifically, in the second starting game cycle in which the small win c is won, the specific suggesting performance is executed with a high probability. In addition, even in the other second starting opening game rounds in which the small winning c is not won, the specific suggestion performance is executed at a lower probability than the second starting opening game round in which the small winning c is won.

FIG. 109 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a specific suggestion effect. FIG. 109(a) shows the display screen 41a immediately after the start of the game cycle in which the result of the winning lottery is the small winning c. As shown in the figure, in the present embodiment, immediately after the start of the relevant game round as a specific suggestive effect, a female character CH is displayed on the display surface 41a for a short period of time (for example, 2 seconds). It suggests that the result of the winning lottery is the small winning c.

After that, as shown in FIG. 109(b), at the end of the variable time, the liquid crystal symbols corresponding to the winning lottery result in the game round are stopped and displayed.

As explained in FIG. 108 above, in the second starting opening game round in which the small winning c is won, the specific suggesting effect is executed with a high probability, but the second starting opening game round in which the small winning c is won is executed. When the player recognizes that the specific suggestion effect is to be executed, the player has a sense of expectation, and on the other hand, the game ball wins a small win other than the small win c and enters the second V winning opening V2. In order to avoid the entry of the ball, there is a possibility of stopping the hitting to the right or stopping the shooting itself of the game ball into the game area PA in the game times in which the specific suggestive performance is not executed. Hereinafter, in a specific case, the action of the player to stop hitting to the right and the action of stopping the game ball from being shot into the game area PA are also referred to as stopping hits. As described above, from the player's point of view, assuming that the game ball enters the second V winning hole V2 and the jackpot is confirmed, the probability of the jackpot Vf moving to the low frequency support mode in the future is Since it is 50%, the player desires to win a small win other than the small win c and avoid the game ball entering the second V winning hole V2. Therefore, there is a risk that the player will make a stop shot in the second start game round in which the specific suggestive effect is not executed.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the second starting game round in which the small win c is won, the specific suggestive effect is executed with a high probability, and when the stopping shot is detected, the small win c is won. Execution of the specific suggestive effect is stopped in the second starting game round that is running. In this way, while giving the player a sense of anticipation, the player is prevented from obtaining an unfair profit that is not originally intended. An outline of the processing described above will be described below using a simple flowchart. Details of the processing will be described later.

FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing an outline of processing for setting effects in game rounds (also referred to as game round effect setting processing).

In F201, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery in the game round to be executed is a big win. In F201, when the result of the winning lottery in the game round is a big win (F201: YES), the process proceeds to F202 to set a performance pattern for a big win. Specifically, one of a plurality of types of performance patterns prepared for big wins is selected by lottery using random numbers and set as the performance pattern to be executed according to the fluctuation time of the game round for which the performance pattern is set. . After executing F202, the game round effect setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, in F201, if the winning lottery result in the game round is not a big win (F201: NO), the process proceeds to F203. In F203, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery in the game round to be executed is a small winning.

In F203, when the result of the winning lottery in the game round is a small winning (F203: YES), the process proceeds to F204.

In F204, it is determined whether or not the type of the won small win is the small win c. In F204, when the type of the won small win is the small win c (F204: YES), the process proceeds to F205, and it is determined whether or not the final hitting flag is ON. The stop shot flag is turned ON when it is determined that the player is making a stop shot in the second starting game cycle that has been executed during the high frequency support mode, and the series of high frequency support modes has ended. is turned OFF.

Although the details will be described later, the determination of whether or not the player is making a final blow is made by the detection sensor 205 during a period in which a game round in which the winning lottery result is a small winning c is being executed during the high-frequency support mode. and the number of game balls detected by the detection sensor 205 during the period in which the game round in which the result of the winning lottery is other than the small win c is executed. In the present embodiment, a value obtained by calculating the number of circulations per unit time from the number of circulations of game balls detected by the detection sensor 205 during the period in which the game round in which the result of the winning lottery is the small winning c is executed (hereinafter referred to as (also called circulation frequency) and a value obtained by calculating the number of circulation per unit time ( Circulation frequency) satisfies a predetermined condition (hereinafter also referred to as a stop-play condition), it is determined whether or not the player is making a stop-play. The details of the stopping shot condition will be described later.

In F205, when it is determined that the stopping shot flag is not ON (F205: NO), the process proceeds to F206 to set an effect pattern for the small win c. Specifically, as described above, an effect pattern is set in which the specific suggestion effect is executed with a high probability. Incidentally, in all the cases where the result of the winning lottery is the small win c, the specific suggesting effect is not set as the effect pattern, and the specific suggesting effect may not be set. A lottery using random numbers determines whether or not to set the specific suggestive effect. After executing F205, the game round effect setting process is terminated.

In F204, if the type of the won small win is not small win c (F204: NO), or if it is determined in F205 that the stopping flag is ON (F205: YES), the process proceeds to F207. In F207, a normal effect pattern for a small win is set. Specifically, the specific suggestion effect is hardly executed, and according to the type of each small win and the fluctuation time of the game round, a lottery based on random numbers is used from among multiple types of production patterns prepared for the small win. 1 is selected and set as the effect pattern to be executed. After executing F207, the game round effect setting process is terminated. In F207, the specific suggestive effect is not set as the effect pattern at all, but the specific suggestive effect is set as the effect pattern at a lower probability than the case where the effect pattern for the small win c is set in F206. .

In F203, if the result of the winning lottery in the game round is not a small winning (F203: NO), the process proceeds to F208. In F208, it is determined whether reach occurs in the game round. If it is determined in F208 that a reach occurs (failure to generate a reach) (F208: YES), the process advances to F209 to set an effect pattern for occurrence of a reach. After executing F209, the game round effect setting process is terminated.

In F208, when it is determined that reach does not occur (F208: NO), the process proceeds to F210 to set the effect pattern for non-reach. After executing F210, the game round effect setting process is terminated.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the specific suggestion effect is executed in the game round in which the result of the winning lottery is the small win c. On the other hand, it is possible to give a sense of expectation about the result of the winning lottery. Furthermore, when it is determined that the player is making a stop shot, the specific suggestive performance is not executed in the game round in which the winning lottery result is a small win c, so the player desires the execution of the specific suggestive performance. In this case, it is possible to suppress the game ball shooting operation by the player, which would result in a stopping shot. As a result, if the player's finishing stroke gives the player a privilege not planned for the gaming machine, by determining whether or not to perform a specific suggestive effect based on the presence or absence of the finishing stroke, It is possible to suppress the granting of benefits to the unplanned player.

In other words, when it is determined that the distribution mode of the game ball due to the player's shooting operation is the stopping hit, the specific suggestive effect is not executed despite the fact that it is a small win c. It is possible to prompt the player who desires the execution to perform a game ball shooting operation that is not judged as a stopping shot.

Also, when determining the effect of the game round in which the result of the winning lottery is the small win c, the distribution frequency in the detection sensor 205 in the game round in which the result of the winning lottery is the small win c among the game rounds that have already been executed. , and based on the distribution frequency in the detection sensor 205 in game rounds in which the winning lottery result is a lottery result other than the small win c among the game rounds that have already been executed, the winning lottery result in the game round to be executed from now on is determined. Since it is determined whether or not to execute the specific suggestive effect in the game round of the small win c, the distribution frequency of the detection sensor 205 in the game round of the already executed game rounds in which the result of the winning lottery is the small win c and , the game in which the result of the winning lottery is the small winning c by comparing with the distribution frequency in the detection sensor 205 in the game times in which the winning lottery result is a lottery result other than the small winning c among the game times already executed. It can be detected whether the player switches the mode of the game ball shooting operation between the times and the game times in which the result of the winning lottery is other than the small win c. Therefore, for example, it is possible to accurately determine whether or not the player is intentionally trying to obtain a privilege not expected by the gaming machine, and whether or not to execute the specific suggestive effect based on the determination result. can be determined.

Furthermore, the detection of the shooting operation by the player (specifically, the detection of the stop shot) is detected based on the circulation frequency of the game balls in the detection sensor 205 . Since the distribution frequency is the time average of the number of distributed coins, it is possible to accurately detect the player's distribution state by excluding noise-like changes in the distribution state for a short period of time (for example, one second). Also, the distribution frequency is correlated with the manner in which the game ball is shot by the player. Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect reflecting the manner in which the game ball is shot by the player, and to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, since the effect in the game round to be executed is determined based on the circulation frequency in the game round in which the specific suggestive effect is executed, the player's shooting mode due to the execution of the specific suggestive effect, that is, the specific suggestive effect, is determined. It is possible to decide whether or not to execute the specific suggestive process afterward, taking into account the player's reaction to the execution and the player's psychology. That is, when determining whether or not to execute the specific suggestive effect, it is possible to consider the reaction of the player when the specific suggestive effect was previously executed, and the player's reaction to whether or not to execute the specific suggestive effect can be considered. can be controlled by feedback.

<<3-5>> Various processes executed in the main controller:
Next, an example of specific control for executing the above-described processing in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described. The processing executed in the main controller 60 will be described first, and then the processing executed in the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

In order to advance the game of each game cycle, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing. These processes are described below. In addition to timer interrupt processing and normal processing, the MPU 62 executes NMI interrupt processing that is activated by the input of a power failure signal, but the description of these processing will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. As described above, the timer interrupt process is started periodically (for example, every 2 msec) by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 .

In step Sn0101, reading processing of various detection sensors is executed. That is, the state of various detection sensors connected to the main controller 60 is read, the state of the sensors is determined, and detection information (entering ball detection information) is stored. After that, the process proceeds to step Sn0102.

At step Sn0102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . After that, the process proceeds to step Sn0103.

In step Sn0103, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to each of the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4, and when each of these counter values reaches the maximum value, each Clear to 0. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM64. After that, the process proceeds to step Sn0104. Note that the fluctuation type counter CS updates its value in the normal processing (FIG. 116) described later.

In step Sn0104, a ball entry process for the starting opening accompanying the ball entering the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34 is executed. The details of the ball entry process for the start opening in step Sn0104 will be described later. After executing step Sn0104, the process proceeds to step Sn0105.

In step Sn0105, a through ball entry process associated with the ball entering the through gate 35 is executed. Details of the entering ball processing for through in step Sn0105 will be described later. After executing step Sn0105, the process proceeds to step Sn0106.

In step Sn0106, ball entry processing for the V winning hole is executed. The details of the ball entry process for the V winning hole in step Sn0106 will be described later. After executing step Sn0106, the MPU 62 ends the timer interrupt processing.

<Entering ball processing for the starting port>
Next, the ball entry process for the start opening will be described. The ball entry process for the starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 111: Sn0104).

FIG. 112 is a flow chart showing the ball entry process for the starting opening. In step Sn0201, it is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first starting port 33 whether or not the game ball has entered the first starting port 33 (starting ball). In step Sn0201, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the first start hole 33 (Sn0201: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn0202, and the prize ball for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls set command. After that, the process proceeds to step Sn0203.

In step Sn0203, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has entered the first start hole 33. FIG. After that, the process proceeds to step Sn0204.

In step Sn0204, the start suspension number RaN (hereinafter also referred to as the first start suspension number RaN), which is the value stored in the suspension number storage area of the first reservation area Ra, is read, and the first start suspension number RaN will be described later. Set as a target for processing. The first start suspension number RaN indicates the number of suspensions based on the ball entering the first start hole 33 . After that, the process proceeds to step Sn0209.

In step Sn0201, if it is determined that the game ball has not entered the first start port 33 (Sn0201: NO), proceed to step Sn0205, whether or not the game ball entered the second start port 34 is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second starting port 34 .

In step Sn0205, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34 (Sn0205: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn0206, and the prize ball for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls set command. After that, the process proceeds to step Sn0207. On the other hand, in step Sn0205, when it is determined that the game ball has not entered the second starting hole 34 (Sn0205: NO), the ball entering process for this starting hole ends.

In step Sn0207, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that the game ball has entered the second starting hole . After that, the process proceeds to step Sn0208.

In step Sn0208, the start pending number RbN (hereinafter also referred to as the second start pending number RbN), which is the value stored in the pending number storage area of the second reserve area Rb, is read, and the second start pending number RbN will be described later. Set as a target for processing. The second start suspension number RbN indicates the number of suspensions based on the ball entering the second start opening 34 . After that, the process proceeds to step Sn0209.

In step Sn0209, it is determined whether or not the number N (RaN or RbN) of start suspension set in step Sn0204 or step Sn0208 is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment). In step Sn0209, if the number N of starting suspensions is not less than the upper limit (Sn0209: NO), the ball-entering process for this starting opening is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Sn0209, if the number N of pending start-ups is less than the upper limit (Sn0209: YES), proceed to step Sn0210, add 1 to the number N of pending start-up of the corresponding reserved area, and then proceed to step Sn0211. , adds 1 to the value stored in the total pending number storage area (hereinafter referred to as the total pending number CRN). The total pending number CRN indicates the sum of the first pending start number RaN and the second pending start number RbN. After that, the process proceeds to step Sn0212.

In step Sn0212, the values of the winning random number counter C1, winning type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 updated in step Sn0103 (FIG. 111) are stored in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the corresponding reserved area, that is, step In Sn0210, 1 is added and stored in a storage area corresponding to the pending number. Specifically, when the first start suspension number RaN is set as the processing target, each value of the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step Sn0103 is It is stored in the first storage area of the empty storage areas of the 1 reservation area Ra, ie, the storage area corresponding to the first start suspension number RaN to which 1 is added in step Sn0210. In addition, when the second start pending number RbN is set as a processing target, each value of the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step Sn0103 is stored in the second holding area. It is stored in the first memory area of the free memory areas of Rb, that is, the memory area corresponding to the second start suspension number RbN to which 1 is added in step Sn0210. After executing step Sn0212, the process proceeds to step Sn0213.

In step Sn0213, a first determination process is executed. The first determination process is based on the information (holding information) of each value of the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. It is a process of executing determination of the presence or absence of such pending information before the main control device 60 becomes a target of a winning lottery. The details of the first determination process will be described later. After executing step Sn0213, the process proceeds to step Sn0214.

At step Sn0214, a process of setting a pending command is executed. Specifically, the determination result of the previous determination process executed based on the information (suspension information) of each value of the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is set as a pending command.

The pending command indicates that the ball has entered the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34 and the judgment result (first judgment information) of the first judgment process based on the holding information acquired based on the entry, This is a command for causing the sub-side control device to confirm the pending information before the main control device 60 becomes a target of the winning lottery. The hold command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process ( FIG. 116 : step Sn0603) of the normal process, which will be described later.

In addition, when the sound emission control device 90 receives the hold command transmitted based on the ball entering the first starting port 33, the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 is displayed on hold. A command is sent to the display control device 100 to make the change corresponding to the increase. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first reserved display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of reserved items. On the other hand, when receiving the hold command transmitted based on the ball entering the second starting port 34, the sound emission control device 90 displays the second hold display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41. A command is sent to the display control device 100 to make the change corresponding to the increase. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second reserved display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of reserved characters.

After executing step Sn0214, the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 terminates the ball-entering process for the starting opening.

<First determination process>
Next, the preceding determination processing will be described. The first determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (Sn0213 in FIG. 112: Sn0213) of the ball entry process for the starting opening.

FIG. 113 is a flow chart showing the first determination process. As described above, in the first determination process, based on the pending information, determination results such as determination of winning lottery, determination of type of big win, determination of presence or absence of reach occurrence, etc. This is a process that is executed before the lottery is targeted.

In step Sn0301, the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the storage area by the ball entering the starting hole in the ball entering process for the starting hole (FIG. 112) is read. After that, the process proceeds to step Sn0302, and it is determined whether or not the read value of the winning random number counter C1 is the first reservation area Ra.

In step Sn0302, when it is determined that the read value of the hit random number counter C1 is the first reservation area Ra (Sn0302: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn0303, and the hit/fail table for the first start port is referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step Sn305, and as a result of referring to the success/failure table for the first starting port, it is determined whether or not the value information of the winning random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to a big winning.

On the other hand, in step Sn0302, when it is determined that the value of the read winning random number counter C1 is not the first reservation area Ra (Sn0302: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn0304, and the success/failure table for the second start port is referred to. . After that, the process proceeds to step Sn305, and as a result of referring to the success/failure table for the second starting port, it is determined whether or not the value information of the winning random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to a big winning.

In step Sn0305, if it is determined that the value of the winning random number counter C1 corresponds to a big win (Sn0305: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn0306, and the winning stored in the storage area due to the ball entering the starting port this time Grasp the value of the type counter C2. After that, the process proceeds to step Sn0307, and the big hit distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 63b is referred to. Specifically, when the hit type counter C2 to be distributed this time is obtained based on the ball entering the first start port 33, the jackpot distribution table for the first start port is set. Refer to it, and if it is obtained based on the ball entering the second starting port 34, refer to the big hit distribution table for the second starting port. After executing step Sn0307, the process proceeds to step Sn0308.

In step Sn0308, as a result of referring to the allocation table for big wins, the sorted big win types are stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64 as big win information. After that, the preceding determination process is terminated.

In step Sn0305, when it is determined that the value of the winning random number counter C1 does not correspond to a big win (Sn0305: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn0309. In step Sn309, it is determined whether or not the value of the read winning random number counter C1 corresponds to a small winning. In step Sn309, when it is determined that the value of the winning random number counter C1 corresponds to a small winning (Sn0309: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn0310.

At step Sn0310, the value of the hit type counter C2 stored in the storage area due to the ball entering the starting hole this time is grasped. Then, it progresses to step Sn0311 and references the distribution table for small hits memorize|stored in the distribution table storage area 63b. Specifically, when the hit type counter C2 to be distributed this time is obtained based on the ball entering the first start port 33, the small hit distribution table for the first start port , and if it is obtained based on the ball entering the second starting port 34, refer to the small hit distribution table for the second starting port. After executing step Sn0311, the process proceeds to step Sn0312.

In step Sn0312, as a result of referring to the distribution table for small hits, the sorted small hit types are stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64 as small hit information. After that, the preceding determination process is terminated.

In step Sn0309, when it is determined that the value of the winning random number counter C1 does not correspond to a small winning (Sn0309: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn0313.

At step Sn0313, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the storage area due to the ball entering the starting hole this time is grasped. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sn0314, and the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c is referred to. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sn0315, and as a result of referring to the reach determination table, it is determined whether or not the value of the reach random number counter C3 grasped this time corresponds to the occurrence of reach.

In step Sn0315, when it is determined that reach occurrence is supported (Sn0315: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn0316, and reach occurrence information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h. After that, the preceding determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sn0315 that the reach generation is not supported (Sn0315: NO), the first determination process is terminated.

<Entering ball processing for through>
Next, the ball entry processing for through will be described. The through ball entry process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 111: Sn0105).

FIG. 114 is a flow chart showing the ball entry processing for through. At step Sn0401, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the through gate 35 or not. In step Sn0401, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the through gate 35 (Sn0401: YES), proceed to step Sn0402, whether the number SN of accessory holdings is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) determine whether or not Incidentally, the accessory reserved number SN is a value indicating the number of balls entered into the through gate 35 reserved for performing the electric accessory open lottery. In this embodiment, the maximum value of the number SN of reserved accessory items is four. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sn0401 that the game ball has not entered the through gate 35 (Sn0401: NO), this through ball entering processing is terminated.

In step Sn0402, when it is determined that the value is less than the upper limit value (less than 4) of the reserved role number SN (Sn0402: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn0403, and 1 is added to the reserved role number SN. After that, the process proceeds to step Sn0404.

At step Sn0404, the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4 updated at step Sn0103 (FIG. 111) is stored in the first memory area of the free memory areas of the electric service holding area 64d of the RAM64. After that, the through ball entry processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Sn0402, if it is determined that the value of the reserved accessory number SN is not less than the upper limit (Sn0402: NO), that is, if it is determined that the value of the reserved accessory number SN is equal to or greater than the upper limit, Without storing the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4, the ball entry processing for through is terminated.

<Ball entry processing for V winning hole>
Next, the ball entry process for the V winning hole will be described. The ball entry process for the V winning hole is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 111: Sn0106).

FIG. 115 is a flow chart showing ball entry processing for the V winning hole. In step Sn0501, it is determined whether or not the V winning entrance entry permission flag is ON. The V winning entrance ball permission flag is for opening and closing the second opening/closing door 212b, the first distribution valve 218, and the second distribution valve 219 in the opening/closing execution mode that is executed when a small win is won. It is turned ON when the scenario is set, and is deleted when other flags indicating the status are deleted in transition processing at the end of the ending period executed when the opening/closing execution mode is terminated.

In step Sn0501, when it is determined that the V winning hole entry permission flag is ON (Sn0501: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn0502. On the other hand, in step Sn0501, when it is determined that the V winning hole entry permission flag is not ON (Sn0501: NO), the ball entering process for the V winning hole ends.

At step Sn0502, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the V winning opening (in this embodiment, the first V winning opening V1 or the second V winning opening V2). At step Sn0502, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the V winning hole (Sn0502: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn0503.

At step Sn0503, it is determined whether or not the V winning type flag is ON. The V winning type flag turns ON the V winning type flag corresponding to the type of the determined big win when the big win is determined by the game ball entering the V winning hole. Then, it is erased when other flags indicating the state are erased in transition processing at the end of the ending period, which is executed when the opening/closing execution mode is ended. Specifically, when the big win Va is confirmed, the V winning prize Va flag, when the big winning Vb is confirmed, the V winning prize Vb flag, when the big winning Vc is confirmed, the V winning prize Vc flag, when the big winning Vd is confirmed , the V winning Vd flag, the V winning Ve flag when the big win Ve is confirmed, the V winning Vf flag when the big winning Vf is confirmed, and the V winning Vg flag when the big winning Vg is confirmed are turned on. .

At step Sn0503, when it is determined that the V winning type flag is ON (Sn0503: YES), the ball entering process for the V winning opening is terminated. In step Sn0503, when it is determined that the V winning type flag is not ON (Sn0503: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn0504.

In step Sn0504, the V prize type flag corresponding to the type of the small hit won is turned ON. After executing step Sn0504, the process proceeds to step Sn0505 to set the V winning command. After that, the ball entry process for the V winning hole is ended.

On the other hand, in step Sn0502, when it is determined that the game ball has not entered the V winning hole (Sn0502: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn0506. At step Sn0506, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the discharge port (discharge port 223, discharge port 225).

In step S0506, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the outlet (Sn0506: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn0507. In step Sn0507, a non-V winning command is set. After that, the ball entry process for the V winning hole is ended.

<Normal processing>
Next, normal processing will be described. The normal processing is processing started by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 when the power switch 88 is switched from the off state to the on state (hereinafter also referred to as "power on"). In normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed.

FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing normal processing. At step Sn0601, start-up processing is executed. Specifically, initialization of each control device upon power-on, determination of validity of data stored in the RAM 64, and the like are executed. After that, the process proceeds to step Sn0602.

At step Sn0602, a startup command is set. The start-up command is a command for causing each sub-side control device to start a demonstration video when the power is turned on. After that, the process proceeds to step Sn0603.

In step Sn0603, output data such as the start-up command set in step Sn0602 and the command set in the timer interrupt processing or the previously executed normal processing are transmitted to each sub-side control device. Specifically, the presence or absence of the prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 70 . In addition, when commands related to effects such as start-up commands, variation commands, type commands, and hold commands are set, they are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . After executing step Sn0603, the process proceeds to step Sn0604.

At step Sn0604, the change type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the fluctuation type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . After that, the process proceeds to step Sn0605.

In step Sn0605, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step Sn0606. In step Sn0606, game round control processing for controlling the game in each game round is executed. In the game round control processing, a winning lottery, setting of variable display of symbols by the symbol display device 41, display control of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b, and the like are performed. Details of the game round control process will be described later. After executing step Sn0606, the process proceeds to step Sn0607.

In step Sn0607, a game state transition process is executed to shift the game state. By executing the game state transition process, the game state shifts to an opening/closing execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, and the like. Details of the game state transition processing will be described later. After that, the process proceeds to step Sn0608.

In step Sn0608, an electric worker support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 34a provided at the second starting port 34 is executed. In the electric role support process, it is determined whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a. The details of the electronic support process will be described later. After that, the process proceeds to step Sn0609.

In step Sn0609, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has passed since the start of the current normal processing (strictly speaking, the start of the command output processing in step Sn0603). That is, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the next normal process. In step Sn0609, if it is determined that the predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed since the start of the normal processing this time (Sn0609: NO), in steps Sn0610 and Sn0611, until the execution timing of the next normal processing Within the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated. Specifically, in step Sn0610, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . Further, in step Sn0611, 1 is added to the fluctuation type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sn0609 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has passed since the start of the normal processing (Sn0609: YES), the process returns to step Sn0603, and each process from step Sn0603 to step Sn0608 is performed. Execute.

Since the execution time of each process from step Sn0603 to step Sn0608 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using the remaining time, the values of these counters can be randomly updated.

<Game Round Control Processing>
Next, game round control processing will be described. The game round control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of normal process (FIG. 116: Sn0606).

FIG. 117 is a flow chart showing game round control processing. In step Sn0701, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON when the game state is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode in the later-described game state transition processing, and turned OFF when the opening/closing execution mode is ended in the game state transition processing.

At step Sn0701, when it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress (Sn0701: YES), this game round control process is terminated without executing any of the processes after step Sn0702. That is, when the open/close execution mode is in progress, the game cycle is not started regardless of whether or not a ball is entered into the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34 . On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sn0701 that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress (Sn0701: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn0702.

In step Sn0702, it is determined whether or not the special figure unit 37 is being displayed in a variable manner. Specifically, it is determined whether or not one of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b provided in the special figure unit 37 is in the process of variable display. This determination is made by determining whether or not the special figure variation displaying flag in the special figure variation displaying flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The special figure variable display flag is turned ON when one of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b is to start the variable display, and is turned OFF when the variable display is finished.

In step Sn0702, when it is determined that the special figure unit 37 is not displayed in a variable manner (Sn0702: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn0703.

In step Sn0703, a variation start process for starting the variation display in the special figure unit 37 and the variation display in the symbol display device 41 is executed. The details of the fluctuation start process will be described later. After executing step Sn0703, this game round control process is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Sn0702, when it is determined that the special figure unit 37 is displayed in a variable manner (Sn0702: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn0704.

In step Sn0704, a variation end process for ending the variation display in the special figure unit 37 and the variation display in the symbol display device 41 is executed. The details of the fluctuation end processing will be described later. After executing step Sn0704, this game round control process is terminated.

<Variation start processing>
Next, fluctuation start processing will be described. The fluctuation start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game round control process (FIG. 117: Sn0703).

FIG. 118 is a flow chart showing the fluctuation start process. At step Sn0801, it is determined whether or not the total pending number CRN exceeds "0". When the total pending number CRN is less than or equal to "0", it means that the pending start number for both the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 is "0". Therefore, when it is determined in step Sn0801 that the total pending number CRN is equal to or less than "0" (Sn0801: NO), this fluctuation start process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sn0801 that the total pending number CRN exceeds "0" (Sn0801: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn0802.

In step Sn0802, hold information shift processing is executed to set the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra or the second hold area Rb to the state after the start of fluctuation, and the process proceeds to step Sn0803. Details of the pending information shift process will be described later.

In step Sn0803, a winning determination process including a process when winning a big win in a winning lottery is performed. The details of the hit determination process will be described later. After executing step Sn0803, the process proceeds to step Sn0804.

In step Sn0804, variable time setting processing is executed. The variable time setting process is for setting the variable time, which is the time required for the current game cycle in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b, based on the presence or absence of a big win or the occurrence of reach. is the processing of Details of the variable time setting process will be described later. After executing step Sn0804, the process proceeds to step Sn0805.

At step Sn0805, a variation command is set. The command for variation includes whether the current game cycle is related to the hold information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33, or acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 34. It contains information indicating whether or not it relates to hold information, and information on the presence or absence of reach occurrence and information on the variable time set in step Sn0804. After executing step Sn0805, the process proceeds to step Sn0806.

At step Sn0806, a type command is set. The type command includes information on the presence or absence of a big win by winning lottery, presence or absence of a small win, information on the result of distribution determination, and information on the result of losing.

The variation command and type command set at steps Sn0805 and Sn0806 are sent to the sound emission control device 90 at step Sn0603 in the normal process (FIG. 116). The sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect in the game round based on the received variation command and the type command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the effect is executed. After executing step Sn0806, the process proceeds to step Sn0807.

In step Sn0807, of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b, the symbol display portion corresponding to the current game round is caused to start the variable display of symbols. Specifically, when the second symbol display portion flag of the RAM 64 is not ON, the first symbol display portion 37a is specified as the symbol display portion corresponding to the current game round, and the variable display is started, When the second pattern display portion flag is ON, the second pattern display portion 37b is specified as the pattern display portion corresponding to the current game round, and the variable display is started. After executing step Sn0807, the process proceeds to step Sn0808.

In step Sn0808, the special figure fluctuation display flag stored in the special figure fluctuation display flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned ON. After executing step Sn0808, this fluctuation start process is terminated.

<Holding information shift processing>
Next, the pending information shift process will be described. The hold information shift process is executed by MPU 62 of main controller 60 as a subroutine of fluctuation start process (Sn0802 in FIG. 118).

FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing pending information shift processing. In step Sn0901, it is determined whether or not the reservation area to be processed for execution of the reservation information shift process is the first reservation area Ra. The pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment preferentially processes the pending information stored in the second pending area Rb (FIG. 100). Specifically, when the reservation information is stored only in the first reservation area Ra (FIG. 100), the reservation information stored in the first reservation area Ra is processed, and the second reservation area Rb ( 100), the pending information stored in the second reserved area Rb is processed, and the pending information is stored in both the first reserved area Ra and the second reserved area Rb. If stored, the pending information stored in the second pending area Rb is preferentially processed.

In addition, as a modification, a configuration may be employed in which the pending information stored first in chronological order is preferentially processed. Specifically, the first stored pending information (holding information stored in the first area of the first holding area Ra) of the pending information stored in chronological order in the first holding area Ra is held earlier than the hold information stored first among the hold information stored chronologically in the second hold area Rb (the hold information stored in the first area of the second hold area Rb) If it is stored in the area, the reservation area to be processed is determined to be the first reservation area Ra. On the other hand, the first reservation information stored chronologically in the second reservation area Rb than the first reservation information stored chronologically in the first reservation area Ra If the stored reservation information is stored in the reservation area first, the reservation area to be processed is determined to be the second reservation area Rb. Such a configuration may be adopted.

In step Sn0901, when it is determined that the reservation area to be processed is the first reservation area Ra (step Sn0901: YES), reservation information shift processing for the first reservation area in steps Sn0902 to Sn0907 is executed. On the other hand, in step Sn0901, if it is determined that the processing target reservation area is not the first reservation area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the processing target reservation area is the second reservation area Rb (step Sn0901: NO ), the reservation information shift processing for the second reservation area of steps Sn0908 to Sn0913 is executed.

In step Sn0902, 1 is subtracted from the first start-up reservation number RaN in the first reservation area Ra, and then the process proceeds to step Sn0903 to subtract 1 from the total reservation number CRN. After that, the process proceeds to step Sn0904. In step Sn0904, the data stored in the first area of the first reservation area Ra is moved to the execution area AE. After that, the process proceeds to step Sn0905.

In step Sn0905, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first reservation area Ra is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After executing step Sn0905, the process proceeds to step Sn0906.

In step Sn0906, if the second pattern display portion flag in the various flag storage area 64g is ON, the flag is turned OFF, and if not ON, the state is maintained. The second pattern display portion flag is information for specifying which of the first pattern display portion 37a and the second pattern display portion 37b is the target for starting the variable display this time. After that, the process proceeds to step Sn0907.

At step Sn0907, a shift command is set. The shift time command is a command including information for making the sound emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, recognize that the data in the reserved area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63, information indicating that the reservation area to which the data is to be shifted this time corresponds to the first reservation area Ra, that is, the information corresponding to the first start port 33 A shift-time command including information indicating that the shift-time command is included is selected, and the selected shift-time command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . After that, the hold information shift process is terminated.

The shift time command set in step Sn0907 is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step Sn0603 of the normal process (FIG. 116). The sound emission control device 90 transmits to the display control device 100 a command for changing the display in the first reservation display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations, based on the received shift command. do. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first reserved display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the decrease in the reserved number.

In step Sn0901, if it is determined that the reservation area to be processed is not the first reservation area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the reservation area to be processed is the second reservation area Rb (Sn0901: NO), step Proceed to Sn0908.

In step Sn0908, 1 is subtracted from the second starting reservation quantity RbN in the second reservation area Rb. After that, the process proceeds to step Sn0909. In step Sn0909, 1 is subtracted from the total pending number CRN, and the process advances to step Sn0910 to move the data stored in the first area of the second pending area Rb to the execution area AE. After that, the process proceeds to step Sn0911.

In step Sn0911, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second reservation area Rb is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After executing step Sn0911, the process proceeds to step Sn0912.

In step Sn0912, if the second pattern display flag in the various flag storage area 64g is not ON, the flag is turned ON, and if it is ON, the state is maintained. After that, the process proceeds to step Sn0913.

In step Sn0913, a shift command is set. The shift time command is a command including information for making the sound emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, recognize that the data in the reserved area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63, the information indicating that the reservation area to which the data is to be shifted this time corresponds to the second reservation area Rb, that is, the information corresponding to the second start port 34 A shift-time command including information indicating that the shift-time command is included is selected, and the selected shift-time command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . After that, the hold information shift process is terminated.

The shift time command set in step Sn0913 is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step Sn0603 of the normal process (FIG. 116). Based on the received shift time command, the sound emission control device 90 sends a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the second reservation display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations. Send. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second reserved display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the reserved number.

<Hit determination processing>
Next, hit determination processing will be described. The hit determination process is executed by MPU 62 of main controller 60 as a subroutine of variation start process (Sn0703 in FIG. 118).

FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing hit determination processing. In step Sn1001, the value of the winning random number counter C1, which is the object of processing, is read. After that, the process proceeds to step Sn1002.

At step Sn1002, it is determined whether or not the second pattern display flag of the RAM 64 is ON. In step Sn1002, when it is determined that the second symbol display flag is not ON (Sn1002: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn1003, and the right/wrong determination is performed by referring to the right/wrong table for the first starting port. After that, the process proceeds to step Sn1005.

On the other hand, in step Sn1002, when it is determined that the second symbol display flag is ON (Sn1002: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1004, and the right/wrong determination is performed by referring to the right/wrong table for the second starting port. After that, the process proceeds to step Sn1005.

In step Sn1005, it is determined whether or not the jackpot has been won as a result of the winning/failing determination. At step Sn1005, when it is determined that the jackpot has been won (Sn1005: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1006.

At step Sn1006, the value of the hit type counter C2 is read. Then, it progresses to step Sn1007, and the classification of a big hit is distributed with reference to the big-hit distribution table. Specifically, when the reservation information stored in the first reservation area Ra is to be processed, the jackpot distribution table for the first start port is referred to and the jackpot types are distributed. When the reservation information stored in the second reservation area Rb is to be processed, the jackpot distribution table for the second starting port is referred to and the jackpot types are distributed.

After that, the process proceeds to step Sn1008, and the jackpot flag corresponding to the sorted jackpot type is turned ON. Specifically, the jackpot A flag is turned ON when the jackpot is A, the jackpot B flag is turned ON when the jackpot is B, the jackpot C flag is turned ON when the jackpot is C, and the jackpot D is turned ON. If there is, the big win D flag is turned ON, and if the big win is E, the big win E flag is turned ON. It should be noted that the jackpot Va to jackpot Vg (hereafter, the jackpot due to the V prize will also be referred to as the V prize jackpot) is not the jackpot won by the winning lottery in the game round, but the V prize during the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the small win. Since it is a jackpot that is determined by doing so, it is not a jackpot for which the jackpot flag is turned ON in step Sn1008. The jackpot flag when the V prize jackpot is confirmed is turned ON in the transition processing (FIG. 126) at the end of the ending period. After executing step Sn1008, the process proceeds to step Sn1009.

In step Sn1009, a process of setting a stop symbol corresponding to the type of jackpot is executed. Specifically, in the current game turn in which the big win is won, it is set whether the variable display is to be ended in the state in which the stop result is displayed in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b. It is a process for Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the big win stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the type of the big win distributed in step Sn1007 is acquired, and the The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After executing step Sn1009, the hit determination process ends.

On the other hand, in step Sn1005, when it is determined that the jackpot has not been won (Sn1005: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn1010. In step Sn1010, it is determined whether or not a small hit is won as a result of the winning/failing determination. In step Sn1010, when it is determined that the small hit is won (Sn1010: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1011.

At step Sn1011, the value of the winning type counter C2 is read. Then, it progresses to step Sn1012, and distributes the kind of small hit with reference to the distribution table for small hits. Specifically, when the reservation information stored in the first reservation area Ra is to be processed, the small hit distribution table for the first starting port is referred to, and the type of small hit is distributed. When the reservation information stored in the second reservation area Rb is to be processed, the small hit distribution table for the second starting port is referred to, and the type of the small hit is distributed.

Then, it progresses to step Sn1013 and turns ON the small hit flag corresponding to the classification of the distributed small hit. Specifically, when the small hit is a, the small hit a flag is turned ON, when the small hit is b, the big hit b flag is turned ON, and when the small hit is c, the small hit c flag is turned ON. If it is a small win d, the big win d flag is turned ON, if it is a small win e, the small win e flag is turned ON, and if it is a small win f, the small win f flag is turned ON. If it is g, the small hit g flag is turned ON. After executing step Sn1013, the process proceeds to step Sn1014.

In step Sn1014, a process of setting a stop symbol corresponding to the type of small winning is executed. Specifically, in the current game round in which a small win is won, it is determined whether the variable display is to be ended in a state in which the stop result is displayed in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b. This is the processing for setting. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the small hit stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the type of the small hit distributed in step Sn1012 is acquired. , the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After executing step Sn1014, the hit determination process ends.

In step Sn1010, when it is determined that the small hit has not been won (Sn1010: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn1015.

At step Sn1015, the value of the reach random number counter C3 is read, and then the process proceeds to step Sn1016 to refer to the reach determination table. After that, the process proceeds to step Sn1017, and it is determined whether or not reach occurs in the game round. Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is set as reach occurrence in the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c (FIG. 99). Determines whether or not it matches the value

At step Sn1017, when it is determined that reach occurs in the game round (Sn1017: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1018, and the reach occurrence flag is turned ON. Specifically, the reach occurrence flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned ON. After executing step Sn1018, the process proceeds to step Sn1019.

On the other hand, in step Sn1017, when it is determined that reach does not occur in the game round (Sn1017: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn1019.

In step Sn1019, a process of setting a stop result for failure is executed. Specifically, in the current game turn that results in a loss, the variable display is set to end in a state in which the stop result is displayed in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b. processing. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for failure in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data stored in the execution area AE is acquired, and the address information is stored as the stop result of the RAM 64. Store in the address storage area. After executing step Sn1019, the real hit determination process ends.

<Variation time setting processing>
Next, the variable time setting process will be described. The variable time setting process is executed by MPU 62 of main controller 60 as a subroutine of variable start process (Sn0804 in FIG. 118).

FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing variable time setting processing. At step Sn1101, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the execution area AE is read. After that, the process proceeds to step Sn1102.

At step Sn1102, it is determined whether or not a big win has been won in the winning lottery related to the current game round. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is ON, and if the jackpot flag is ON (Sn1102: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1103.

In step Sn1103, a process for setting a variation time for a big hit is executed. Specifically, the variable time table for big hits stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to, and the variable time information corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS is acquired.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variation time information stored in the jackpot variation time table is set so that the variation time becomes shorter as the number of total pending numbers CRN increases. Therefore, when the second start suspension number RbN is "0", the fluctuation time becomes shorter as the number of the first start suspension number RaN increases, and when the first start suspension number RaN is "0" , and the second start hold number RbN, the fluctuation time becomes shorter. However, it is not limited to this, and for example, it may be configured so as not to depend on the number of total pending numbers CRN, and may be set so that the smaller the number of total pending numbers CRN, the shorter the fluctuation time. Also, it may be set so as to be constant without depending on each of the reserved numbers RaN and RbN.

After executing step Sn1103, the process proceeds to step Sn1109.

In step Sn1102, when it is determined that the jackpot has not been won in the winning lottery related to the current game round (Sn1102: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn1104.

At step Sn1104, it is determined whether or not a small win has been won in the win lottery relating to the current game round. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag of the RAM 64 is ON, and when the small hit flag is ON (Sn1104: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1105.

In step Sn1105, the setting process of the variation time for the small hit is executed. Specifically, with reference to the small winning variation time table stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, the variation time information corresponding to the current value of the variation type counter CS is acquired.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variable time information stored in the small winning variable time table is set so that the larger the number of total pending numbers CRN, the shorter the variable time. Therefore, when the second start suspension number RbN is "0", the fluctuation time becomes shorter as the number of the first start suspension number RaN increases, and when the first start suspension number RaN is "0" , and the second start hold number RbN, the fluctuation time becomes shorter. However, it is not limited to this, and for example, it may be configured so as not to depend on the number of total pending numbers CRN, and may be set so that the smaller the number of total pending numbers CRN, the shorter the fluctuation time. Also, it may be set so as to be constant without depending on each of the reserved numbers RaN and RbN.

After executing step Sn1105, the process proceeds to step Sn1109.

In step Sn1104, when it is determined that the small winning has not been won in the winning lottery related to the current game round (Sn1104: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn1106.

At step Sn1106, it is determined whether or not reach occurs in the winning lottery relating to the current game round. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the reach occurrence flag of the RAM 64 is ON, and if the reach occurrence flag is ON (Sn1106: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1107.

In step Sn1107, a variable time setting process for reach occurrence is executed. Specifically, by referring to the variable time table for reach occurrence stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, the variable time information corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS is acquired.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variable time information stored in the ready-to-win variable time table is set such that the larger the number of total pending numbers CRN, the shorter the variable time. Therefore, when the second start suspension number RbN is "0", the fluctuation time becomes shorter as the number of the first start suspension number RaN increases, and when the first start suspension number RaN is "0" , and the second start hold number RbN, the fluctuation time becomes shorter. However, it is not limited to this, and for example, it may be configured so as not to depend on the number of total pending numbers CRN, and may be set so that the smaller the number of total pending numbers CRN, the shorter the fluctuation time. Also, it may be set so as to be constant without depending on each of the reserved numbers RaN and RbN.

After executing step Sn1107, the process proceeds to step Sn1109.

At step Sn1106, when it is determined that a reach does not occur in the winning lottery related to the current game round (Sn1106: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn1108.

In step Sn1108, a variable time setting process for reach non-occurrence is executed. Specifically, by referring to the variable time table for reach non-occurrence stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, the variable time information corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS is acquired.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variable time information stored in the non-reach variable time table is set such that the greater the number of total pending numbers CRN, the shorter the variable time. Therefore, when the second start suspension number RbN is "0", the fluctuation time becomes shorter as the number of the first start suspension number RaN increases, and when the first start suspension number RaN is "0" , and the second start hold number RbN, the fluctuation time becomes shorter. However, it is not limited to this, and for example, it may be configured so as not to depend on the number of total pending numbers CRN, and may be set so that the smaller the number of total pending numbers CRN, the shorter the fluctuation time. Also, it may be set so as to be constant without depending on each of the reserved numbers RaN and RbN.

After executing step Sn1108, the process proceeds to step Sn1109.

In step Sn1109, fluctuation time information is stored. Specifically, the acquired variable time information is set in variable time counter areas provided in the various counter areas 64 f of the RAM 64 . After that, the variable time setting process ends.

<Variation end processing>
Next, the fluctuation end processing will be described. The fluctuation end process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game round control process (FIG. 117: Sn0704).

FIG. 122 is a flow chart showing fluctuation end processing. At step Sn1201, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the current game round has elapsed. As described above, the variation time is the time from when the symbol row starts to vary until all the symbol rows stop, and is part of the unit game time. Specifically, in step Sn1201, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable time information stored in the variable time counter area (various counter area 64f) of the RAM 64 has become "0". The value of the variable time information is set in the aforementioned variable time setting process (FIG. 121). The value of this set variable time information is decremented by 1 each time timer interrupt processing is started.

If it is determined in step Sn1201 that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (Sn1201: NO), this fluctuation end processing is terminated.

In step Sn1201, when it is determined that the variation time has passed (Sn1201: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1202, and the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b correspond to the current game turn. A process for ending the variation of the symbols in the symbol display section is performed. After that, the process proceeds to step Sn1203, and the special figure variation displaying flag stored in the special figure variation displaying flag storage area in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned OFF. After executing step Sn1203, the process proceeds to step Sn1204.

In step Sn1204, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a big win or a small win. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RAM 64 jackpot flag (any of jackpot A flag to jackpot E flag) or small hit flag (any of small hit a flag to small hit g flag) is ON. At step Sn1204, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is ON (Sn1204: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn1206.

On the other hand, in step Sn1204, when it is determined that either the big hit flag or the small hit flag is ON (Sn1204: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1205. At step Sn1205, the opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON. After that, the fluctuation ending process is ended.

In step Sn1206, it is determined whether or not the support mode is the high frequency support mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

If it is determined in step Sn1206 that the high frequency support mode flag is ON (Sn1206: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1207. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sn1206 that the high-frequency support mode flag is not ON (Sn1206: NO), the fluctuation ending process is terminated.

At step Sn1207, 1 is subtracted from the value of the number-of-games counter PNC. The number-of-games counter PNC is a counter for counting the number of times the game is played in the high-frequency support mode (hereinafter also referred to as the guaranteed number of games). In this embodiment, the guaranteed number of games is set to 100 times. That is, in step Sn1207, when one game is executed in the high frequency support mode, the number of games that can be executed in the high frequency support mode is counted by subtracting 1 from the game number counter PNC. After executing step Sn1207, the process proceeds to step Sn1208.

At step Sn1208, it is determined whether or not the value of the number-of-games counter PNC exceeds zero. That is, it is determined whether or not the number of guaranteed games is less than 100 times. At step Sn1208, when it is determined that the value of the number-of-games counter PNC exceeds 0 (guaranteed number of games is less than 100) (Sn1208: YES), the fluctuation end processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in step Sn1208, if it is determined that the value of the number-of-games counter PNC does not exceed 0 (guaranteed game times have reached 100) (Sn1208: NO), proceed to step Sn1209, and set the high-frequency support mode flag. Turn off. After that, the fluctuation ending process is ended.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the game state transition processing will be explained. The game state transition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of normal process (FIG. 116: Sn0607).

FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing game state transition processing. In step Sn1301, it is determined whether or not the ending period flag is ON. The ending period flag is turned ON at the end of the big winning opening opening/closing process period (at the start of the ending period) in the opening/closing execution mode, and turned OFF at the end of the ending period. The ending period is a period for executing the ending effect in the opening/closing execution mode.

If it is determined in step Sn1301 that the ending period flag is not ON (Sn1301: NO), the process advances to step Sn1302 to determine whether or not the opening/closing process period flag is ON. The opening/closing processing period flag indicates the period during which the opening period ends in the opening/closing execution mode and the opening/closing operation of the first opening/closing door 36b of the first variable winning device 36 or the second opening/closing door 212b of the second variable winning device 212 is executed. is turned ON at the timing when the big winning opening opening/closing processing period is started, and is turned OFF at the timing when the opening/closing operation of the first opening/closing door 36b or the second opening/closing door 212b is completed.

If it is determined in step Sn1302 that the opening/closing process period flag is not ON (Sn1302: NO), the process advances to step Sn1303 to determine whether or not the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is turned ON at the start of the opening period and turned OFF at the end of the opening period.

If it is determined in step Sn1303 that the opening period flag is not ON (Sn1303: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn1304 to determine whether or not the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step Sn1304 that the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON (Sn1304: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1305. On the other hand, in step Sn1304, when it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode flag is OFF (Sn1304: NO), this game state transition processing is terminated as it is.

At step Sn1305, it is determined whether or not a small prize is won. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the opportunity for starting the opening/closing execution mode this time is triggered by the small winning. In step Sn1305, when it is determined that the small win has not been won, ie, the opening/closing execution mode of this time is triggered by the big win winning (Sn1305: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn1306.

At step Sn1306, the high frequency support mode flag is turned off. That is, when starting the opening/closing execution mode triggered by a big win, the high-frequency support mode is stopped. After that, the process proceeds to step Sn1307.

On the other hand, in step Sn1305, when it is determined that the small hit has been won, that is, the opening/closing execution mode of this time is triggered by the small hit winning (Sn1305: YES), without executing step Sn1306, step Proceed to Sn1307.

In step Sn1307, an opening/closing scenario setting process for setting an opening/closing scenario is executed. The opening/closing scenario determines the pattern of the opening/closing operation of the first opening/closing door 36b and the second opening/closing door 212b in the round game (large winning opening opening/closing process). 212b from the closed state to the open state (hereinafter also referred to as "open condition") and the condition for shifting the first opening/closing door 36b or the second opening/closing door 212b from the open state to the closed state (hereinafter referred to as "closed condition ”) is a recorded program. The opening/closing scenarios are stored in the opening/closing scenario storage area 63 i of the ROM 63 . The opening/closing scenario setting process will be described later. After executing step Sn1307, the process proceeds to step Sn1308 described above.

At step Sn1308, an opening time setting process is executed. The opening time setting process is a process of setting the length of time of the opening period (hereinafter also referred to as opening time) in the open/close execution mode. After executing step Sn1308, the process proceeds to step Sn1309.

At step Sn1309, an opening command is set. The set opening command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (Sn0603) in the normal process (FIG. 116). This opening command includes information on the set opening time and the number of rounds of the current open/close execution mode. A sound emission control device 90 determines the contents of performance corresponding to the opening time and the period of opening/closing processing of the big winning opening based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents are executed. After executing step Sn1309, the process advances to step Sn1310 to turn on the opening period flag. After that, the game state transition processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sn1303 that the opening period flag is ON (Sn1303: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1311.

In step Sn1311, it is determined whether or not the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the third timer counter T3 is "0". The third timer counter T3 is a timer counter that counts down the time of the opening period. If it is determined at step Sn1311 that the opening period has ended (Sn1311: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1312 to turn off the opening period flag. After that, the process proceeds to step Sn1313.

In step Sn1313, round display start processing for notifying the type of the current open/close execution mode is executed. Specifically, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 is checked. Based on the confirmed address information, stop result data corresponding to the address information is specified from among the stop result data group stored in the ROM 63, and the content of the number of rounds is determined from the specified stop result data. confirm. After that, the content of the confirmed number of rounds is output to the round display section 39 in the main display section 45 . As a result, the round display section 39 displays the round information related to the output. After executing step Sn1313, the process proceeds to step Sn1314.

In step Sn1314, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned ON. In subsequent step Sn1315, an open/close process start command is set. The opening/closing process start command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the opening/closing process period has started. The opening/closing process start command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process ( FIG. 116 : step Sn0603) of the normal process. After executing step Sn1314, the game state transition process is terminated.

At step Sn1302, when it is determined that the opening/closing process period flag is ON (Sn1302: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1315 to execute the big winning opening opening/closing process. The special prize opening opening/closing process will be described later. After executing step Sn1315, the process proceeds to step Sn1316.

In step Sn1316, it is determined whether or not the big winning opening opening/closing process has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the big winning opening opening/closing process has ended depending on whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 for counting the number of executed rounds is "0". At step Sn1316, when it is determined that the big winning opening opening/closing process has ended (Sn1316: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1317. On the other hand, in step Sn1316, when it is determined that the big winning opening opening/closing process has not ended (Sn1316: NO), this game state transition process ends.

In step Sn1317, the open/close process period flag is turned off, and then the process proceeds to step Sn1318.

In step Sn1318, round display end processing is executed. In this process, the display control of the round display portion 39 in the main display portion 45 is terminated so that the round display portion 39 is turned off. After executing step Sn1318, the process proceeds to step Sn1319.

In step Sn1319, an ending time setting process is executed. The ending time setting process is a process of setting the length of time of the ending period (hereinafter also referred to as ending time) in the open/close execution mode. In this embodiment, the ending time of the same constant length is set for each ending period. Specifically, "3000" (ie, 6 sec) is set in the fourth timer counter area T4 that determines the ending time. The fourth timer counter area T4 is provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM64. After executing step Sn1319, the process proceeds to step Sn1320.

In step Sn1320, an ending command is set. The set ending command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step Sn0603 in the normal process (FIG. 116). The ending command includes information on the ending time set in the ending time setting process (Sn1320). The sound emission control device 90 executes the ending effect based on the reception of the ending command. After executing step Sn1320, the process proceeds to step Sn1321.

In step Sn1321, the ending period flag is turned ON. After that, the game state transition processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sn1301 that the ending period flag is ON (Sn1301: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1322.

In step Sn1322, it is determined whether or not the ending period has ended. Specifically, in the ending time setting process (Sn1319), it is determined whether or not the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0". If it is determined in step Sn1322 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0" (Sn1322: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1323.

At step Sn1323, the ending period flag is turned off. After that, the process advances to step Sn1324 to execute transition processing at the end of the ending period. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes of game rounds after the end of the current ending period. Details of the transition processing at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing step Sn1324, the process proceeds to step Sn1325.

In step Sn1325, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag caused by the V prize (hereinafter also referred to as the V prize big hit flag) is ON. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any one of the big win Va flag, the big win Vb flag, the big win Vc flag, the big win Vd flag, the big win Ve flag, the big win Vf flag, and the big win Vg flag is ON. In step Sn1325, when it is determined that the V winning big hit flag is not ON (Sn1325: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn1326.

At step Sn1326, the opening/closing execution mode flag is turned OFF. After that, the game state transition processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Sn1325, if it is determined that the big win flag caused by the V winning is ON, that is, the opening and closing execution mode of this time is triggered by the small winning, and the big winning opening in the opening and closing execution mode In the opening/closing process, when the jackpot is determined by winning the V winning slot (Sn1325: YES), the game state transition process is terminated without turning OFF the opening/closing execution mode flag. In the large winning opening opening and closing process in the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the small winning winning, when the game ball enters the V winning opening and the big winning is confirmed, after the opening and closing execution mode being executed ends, the V winning is performed again. In order to execute the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the determined big win, the ON state of the opening/closing execution mode flag is continued without turning it OFF. By doing so, the opening/closing execution mode can be started again when the game state transition processing is executed next time.

<Opening/closing scenario setting processing>
Next, the opening/closing scenario setting process will be described. The opening/closing scenario setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (Sn1307 in FIG. 123).

FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing open/close scenario setting processing. In step Sn1401, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON. The execution of the big winning opening opening/closing process in the opening/closing execution mode may be triggered by the winning of the big win or by the winning of the small win. It is determined whether it is a winning opening opening/closing process or a large winning opening opening/closing process triggered by winning a small prize. In step Sn1401, when it is determined that the jackpot flag is ON (Sn1401: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1402.

At step Sn1402, an opening/closing scenario corresponding to the type of jackpot is set. Specifically, opening and closing scenarios are set according to the types of jackpot flags (jackpot A flag to jackpot E flag, jackpot flag Va to jackpot Vg). As described with reference to FIGS. 103, 104 and 105, the open/close scenario [LOP10] is set so that a 10R round game is executed when the jackpot A or jackpot B is won. When the jackpot C is won, the open/close scenario [LOP15] is set so that a 15R round game is executed. The open/close scenario [LOP5] is set so that a 5R round game is executed when the jackpot D or the jackpot E is won. The open/close scenario [LOP10] is set so that a 10R round game is executed when the jackpot Va or the jackpot Vb is won. The open/close scenario [LOP15] is set so that a 15R round game is executed when the jackpot Vc or jackpot Vd is won. The open/close scenario [LOP5] is set so that a 5R round game is executed when the jackpot Ve, jackpot Vf, or jackpot Vg is won.

After execution of step Sn1402, the opening/closing scenario setting process ends.

In step Sn1401, when it is determined that the jackpot flag is not ON (Sn1401: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn1403. In step Sn1403, an opening/closing scenario corresponding to the type of small win is set. Specifically, the opening and closing scenario is set according to the type of small hit flag (small hit a flag to small hit g flag). As described with reference to FIGS. 103, 104, and 105, when the small win a is won, the open/close scenario [SOPa] is set. In the opening/closing scenario [SOPa], the number of rounds is set to 1R. The opening/closing patterns of the first distribution valve 218 and the second distribution valve 219 are set. When the small win b is won, the opening/closing scenario [SOPb] is set. In the opening/closing scenario [SOPb], the number of rounds is set to 1R. The opening/closing patterns of the first distribution valve 218 and the second distribution valve 219 are set. When the small win c is won, the opening/closing scenario [SOPc] is set. In the opening/closing scenario [SOPc], the number of rounds is set to 1R. The opening/closing patterns of the first distribution valve 218 and the second distribution valve 219 are set. When the small win d is won, the opening/closing scenario [SOPd] is set. In the opening/closing scenario [SOPd], the number of rounds is set to 1R, and a game ball entering the second big winning opening 212a when the second opening/closing door 212b is open is easily attracted to the second V winning opening V2. , the opening/closing patterns of the first distribution valve 218 and the second distribution valve 219 are set. When the small win e is won, the opening/closing scenario [SOPe] is set. In the opening/closing scenario [SOPe], the number of rounds is set to 1R, and a game ball that enters the second big winning opening 212a when the second opening/closing door 212b is open is easily attracted to the second V winning opening V2. , the opening/closing patterns of the first distribution valve 218 and the second distribution valve 219 are set. When a small win f is won, an opening/closing scenario [SOPf] is set. In the opening/closing scenario [SOPf], the number of rounds is set to 1R, and a game ball that enters the second big winning opening 212a when the second opening/closing door 212b is open is easily attracted to the second V winning opening V2. , the opening/closing patterns of the first distribution valve 218 and the second distribution valve 219 are set. When winning a small win g, an opening/closing scenario [SOPg] is set. In the opening/closing scenario [SOPg], the number of rounds is set to 1R. The opening/closing patterns of the first distribution valve 218 and the second distribution valve 219 are set. After executing step Sn1403, the process proceeds to step Sn1404.

In step Sn1404, the V winning entrance entry permission flag is turned ON. The V winning gate ball entry permission flag is a flag that turns ON when an opening/closing scenario triggered by a small win is set, and the ball enters the V winning gate only when the V winning gate ball entry permission flag is ON. In this case, it is determined that the ball has entered the V winning hole (see Fig. 115: Sn0501). By doing so, it is possible to suppress the determination of a big win when a game ball unfairly enters the V winning hole due to some unexpected problem or the like. After step Sn1404 is executed, the opening/closing scenario setting process ends.

<Opening and closing processing of the grand prize opening>
Next, the big winning opening opening/closing process will be described. The big winning opening opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (Sn1315 in FIG. 123: Sn1315) of the game state transition process.

FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing the big winning opening opening/closing process. At step Sn1501, the opening/closing scenario set in the opening/closing scenario setting process (FIG. 123: Sn1309) is read. After that, the process advances to step S1502.

At step Sn1502, it is determined whether or not the first door 36b is open. Specifically, the determination is made based on the drive state of the first variable winning drive section 36c. If it is determined in step Sn1502 that the first opening/closing door 36b is not open (Sn1502: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn1503.

In step Sn1503, it is determined whether or not the conditions for opening the first door 36b are met. Specifically, the opening/closing scenario set by the opening/closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether or not it is time to open the first opening/closing door 36b. If it is determined in step Sn1503 that the condition for opening the first door 36b is met (Sn1503: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1504.

At step Sn1504, the first opening/closing door 36b is opened. After that, the process proceeds to step Sn1505.

In step Sn1505, a door opening command is set. The opening/closing door open command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the first opening/closing door 36b has been opened. The open/close door open command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process ( FIG. 116 : step Sn0603) of the normal process. After executing step Sn1505, the process proceeds to step Sn1509.

When it is determined in step Sn1503 that the condition for opening the first door 36b is not satisfied (Sn1503: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn1509 without executing steps Sn1504 and Sn1505.

If it is determined in step Sn1502 that the first door 36b is open (Sn1502: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1506.

At step Sn1506, it is determined whether or not the condition for closing the first opening/closing door 36b is satisfied. Specifically, the opening/closing scenario set by the opening/closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether or not it is time to close the first opening/closing door 36b. If it is determined in step Sn1506 that the closing condition for the first opening/closing door 36b is satisfied (Sn1506: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1507.

At step Sn1507, the first opening/closing door 36b is closed. After that, the process proceeds to step Sn1508.

In step Sn1508, a first open/close door closing command is set. The first open/close door closing command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the first open/close door 36b is closed. The first open/close door closing command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process ( FIG. 116 : step Sn0603) of the normal process. After executing step Sn1508, the process proceeds to step Sn1509.

If it is determined in step Sn1506 that the closing condition for the first door 36b is not satisfied (Sn1506: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn1509 without executing steps Sn1507 and Sn1508.

At step Sn1509, it is determined whether or not the second door 212b is open. Specifically, the determination is made based on the drive state of the second variable winning drive section 212c. If it is determined in step Sn1509 that the second door 212b is not open (Sn1509: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn1510.

At step Sn1510, it is determined whether or not the conditions for opening the second door 212b are met. Specifically, the opening/closing scenario set by the opening/closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether or not it is time to open the second opening/closing door 212b. If it is determined in step Sn1510 that the condition for opening the second opening/closing door 212b is satisfied (Sn1510: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1511.

In step Sn1511, the second door 212b is opened. After that, the process proceeds to step Sn1512.

In step Sn1512, a command for opening the second opening/closing door is set. The second opening/closing door open command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the second opening/closing door 212b has been opened. The second opening/closing door open command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process ( FIG. 116 : step Sn0603) of the normal process. After executing step Sn1512, the process proceeds to step Sn1516.

If it is determined in step Sn1510 that the condition for opening the second door 212b is not satisfied (Sn1510: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn1516 without executing steps Sn1511 and Sn1512.

If it is determined in step Sn1509 that the second door 212b is open (Sn1509: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1513.

At step Sn1513, it is determined whether or not the condition for closing the second opening/closing door 212b is satisfied. Specifically, the opening/closing scenario set by the opening/closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether or not it is time to close the second opening/closing door 212b. If it is determined in step Sn1513 that the closing condition for the second opening/closing door 212b is satisfied (Sn1513: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1514.

In step Sn1514, the second door 212b is closed. After that, the process proceeds to step Sn1515.

In step Sn1515, a second opening/closing door closing command is set. The second open/close door closing command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the second open/close door 212b is closed. The second opening/closing door closing command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process ( FIG. 116 : step Sn0603) of the normal process. After executing step Sn1515, the process proceeds to step Sn1516.

If it is determined in step Sn1513 that the closing condition for the second opening/closing door 212b is not satisfied (Sn1513: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn1516 without executing steps Sn1514 and Sn1515.

At step Sn1516, it is determined whether or not the first distribution valve 218 is open. Specifically, the determination is made based on the drive state of the first distribution valve drive section 218a. If it is determined in step Sn1516 that the first distribution valve 218 is not open (Sn1516: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn1517.

In step Sn1517, it is determined whether or not the condition for opening the first distribution valve 218 is satisfied. Specifically, the opening/closing scenario set by the opening/closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether or not it is time to open the first distribution valve 218 . If it is determined in step Sn1517 that the condition for opening the first distribution valve 218 is satisfied (Sn1517: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1518.

At step Sn1518, the first distribution valve 218 is opened. After that, the process proceeds to step Sn1519.

In step Sn1519, a first distribution valve open command is set. The first distribution valve open command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the first distribution valve 218 has been opened. The first distribution valve open command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process ( FIG. 116 : step Sn0603) of the normal process. After executing step Sn1519, the process proceeds to step Sn1523.

When it is determined in step Sn1517 that the condition for opening the first distribution valve 218 is not established (Sn1517: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn1523 without executing steps Sn1518 and Sn1519.

If it is determined in step Sn1516 that the first distribution valve 218 is open (Sn1516: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1520.

In step Sn1520, it is determined whether or not the condition for closing the first distribution valve 218 is satisfied. Specifically, the opening/closing scenario set by the opening/closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether or not it is time to close the first distribution valve 218 . If it is determined in step Sn1520 that the condition for closing the first distribution valve 218 is satisfied (Sn1520: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1521.

At step Sn1521, the first distribution valve 218 is closed. After that, the process proceeds to step Sn1522.

In step Sn1522, a first distribution valve closing command is set. The first distribution valve closing command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the first distribution valve 218 has closed. The first distribution valve closing command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 116: step Sn0603) of the normal process. After executing step Sn1522, the process proceeds to step Sn1523.

If it is determined in step Sn1520 that the condition for closing the first distribution valve 218 is not satisfied (Sn1520: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn1523 without executing steps Sn1521 and Sn1522.

At step Sn1523, it is determined whether or not the second distribution valve 219 is open. Specifically, the determination is made based on the drive state of the second distribution valve drive section 219a. If it is determined in step Sn1523 that the second distribution valve 219 is not open (Sn1523: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn1524.

In step Sn1524, it is determined whether or not the condition for opening the second distribution valve 219 is satisfied. Specifically, the opening/closing scenario set by the opening/closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether or not it is time to open the second distribution valve 219 . If it is determined in step Sn1524 that the condition for opening the second distribution valve 219 is satisfied (Sn1524: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1525.

In step Sn1525, the second distribution valve 219 is opened. After that, the process proceeds to step Sn1526.

In step Sn1526, a second distribution valve open command is set. The second distribution valve open command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the second distribution valve 219 has been opened. The second distribution valve open command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process ( FIG. 116 : step Sn0603) of the normal process. After executing step Sn1526, the big winning opening opening/closing process is terminated.

When it is determined in step Sn1524 that the condition for opening the second distribution valve 219 is not established (Sn1524: NO), the big winning opening opening/closing process is terminated without executing steps Sn1525 and Sn1526.

If it is determined in step Sn1523 that the second distribution valve 219 is open (Sn1523: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1527.

In step Sn1527, it is determined whether or not the condition for closing the second distribution valve 219 is satisfied. Specifically, the opening/closing scenario set by the opening/closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether or not it is time to close the second distribution valve 219 . If it is determined in step Sn1527 that the condition for closing the second distribution valve 219 is satisfied (Sn1527: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1528.

In step Sn1528, the second distribution valve 219 is closed. After that, the process proceeds to step Sn1529.

In step Sn1529, a second distribution valve closing command is set. The second distribution valve closing command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the second distribution valve 219 has closed. The second distribution valve closing command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process ( FIG. 116 : step Sn0603) of the normal process. After executing step Sn1529, the big winning opening opening/closing process is ended.

When it is determined in step Sn1527 that the condition for closing the second distribution valve 219 is not established (Sn1527: NO), the big winning opening opening/closing process is terminated without executing steps Sn1528 and Sn1529.

<Transition processing at the end of the ending period>
Next, transition processing at the end of the ending period will be described. The transition process at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (Sn1324 in FIG. 123).

FIG. 126 is a flow chart showing transition processing at the end of the ending period. In step Sn1601, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is ON. In step Sn1601, when it determines with a small hit flag not being ON (Sn1601:NO), it progresses to step Sn1602.

At step Sn1602, the value of the number-of-games counter PNC corresponding to the winning type is set. That is, when the high-frequency support mode is executed after the opening/closing execution mode triggered by a big win, the number of games executed as the high-frequency mode is set as the game number counter PNC. More specifically, the value shown in the high-frequency support game count column of the jackpot allocation table in FIGS. 103, 104, and 105 is set. After executing step Sn1602, the process proceeds to step Sn1603.

At step Sn1603, a flag clearing process is executed. Specifically, the flag indicating the game state is erased. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sn1604 to determine whether or not the value of the number-of-games counter PNC is greater than zero. At step Sn1604, if the number-of-games counter PNC is not greater than 0, that is, if the number-of-games counter PNC is 0 (Sn1604: NO), the transition process at the end of the ending period is terminated. More specifically, when the trigger for executing the opening/closing execution mode this time is a jackpot, and the type of the jackpot is a jackpot type that does not shift to high-frequency support after the opening/closing execution mode ends (for example, jackpot B or jackpot E, etc.), the number-of-games counter PNC is set to 0 in step Sn1602 (Sn1604: NO), and as the process progresses, the transition process at the end of the ending period ends.

At step Sn1604, when it is determined that the game number counter PNC is not 0 (Sn1604: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1605 to turn on the high frequency support mode flag. After executing step S1605, the process advances to step Sn1606 to set a high frequency support mode command. After that, the transition processing at the end of the ending period ends.

On the other hand, in step Sn1601, when it determines with a small hit flag being ON (Sn1601:YES), it progresses to step Sn1607. At step Sn1607, it is determined whether or not the V winning type flag is ON. The V winning type flag is a flag that turns ON when a game ball enters the V winning hole (see Fig. 115: Sn0504). In step S1607, when it is determined that the V winning type flag is ON (Sn1607: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1608.

In step Sn1608, the jackpot flag corresponding to the V winning type flag is turned ON. Specifically, the jackpot Va flag for the V prize Va flag, the jackpot Vb flag for the V prize Vb flag, the jackpot Vc flag for the V prize Vc flag, and the jackpot for the V prize Vd flag A big win Ve flag is turned on for the Vd flag and the V winning prize Ve flag, a big winning Vf flag for the V winning prize Vf flag, and a big winning Vg flag for the V winning prize Vg flag.

After executing step Sn1608, the process advances to step Sn1609 to execute flag erasing processing. After that, the transition processing at the end of the ending period ends.

At step Sn1607, when it is determined that the V winning type flag is not ON (Sn1607: NO), the process proceeds to step S1609 without executing step S1608 to execute flag erasing processing. After that, the transition processing at the end of the ending period ends.

<Electronic support processing>
Next, the processing for electric support will be described. The electric service support process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (Sn0608 in FIG. 116).

FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing processing for electric support. In step Sn1701, it is determined whether or not the device is being supported. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the supported flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The under-support flag is a flag that is turned ON when the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is to be opened, and is turned OFF when it is to be returned to the closed state. If it is determined in step Sn1701 that the supported flag is not ON (Sn1701: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn1702.

At step Sn1702, it is determined whether or not the support winning flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The support winning flag is turned ON when the electric accessary product open lottery for determining whether or not to open the electric accessary product 34a is won in the open state, and is turned OFF when the supporting flag is ON. is. If it is determined in step Sn1702 that the support win flag is not ON (Sn1702: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn1703.

At step Sn1703, it is determined whether or not the value of the electric service timer counter Td provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the electric service timer counter Td is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38 . The count value set in the electric service timer counter Td is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, every 2 msec.

If it is determined in step Sn1703 that the value of the electric service timer counter Td is not "0" (Sn1703: NO), the electric service support process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sn1703: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1704.

In step Sn1704, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the variable display of symbols in the general pattern unit . If it is determined at step Sn1704 that it is time to end the variable display (Sn1704: YES), the process advances to step Sn1705 to set the off display, and then the electronic support process ends. By setting the deviation display, the variable display of the symbols in the general pattern unit 38 is terminated while the deviation display is stopped. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sn1704 that it is not the end timing of the variable display (Sn1704: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn1706.

At step Sn1706, it is determined whether or not the value of the reserved accessory number SN is greater than "0". In step Sn1706, if it is determined that the value of the reserved accessory number SN is "0" (Sn1706: NO), the electronic support process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sn1706 that the value of the reserved accessory number SN is greater than "0" (Sn1706: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1707.

In step Sn1707, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, and then the process advances to step Sn1708 to determine whether or not the high-frequency support mode is in effect. If it is not the opening/closing execution mode at step Sn1707 (Sn1707: NO) and if it is the high-frequency support mode at step Sn1708 (Sn1708: YES), the process advances to step Sn1709 to perform the electric accessory opening lottery. Specifically, the value stored in the electric role holding area 64d is shifted, and when the value of the electric role item opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 461, the electric role item opening lottery be elected. At the same time as the electric accessory opening lottery, the electric role timer counter Td is set to "750" (that is, 1.5 sec). The electrical service timer counter Td is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started. After that, the process proceeds to step Sn1710.

In step Sn1710, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory open lottery in step Sn1709 is support winning. In step Sn1710, when it is determined that the result of the electric accessory open lottery is support winning (Sn1710: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1711, and the support winning flag is turned ON. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sn1712 to execute high-frequency support mode electric power opening/closing scenario setting processing. Specifically, it is a process of setting an opening/closing scenario in which an opening pattern of the electric accessory 34a when winning the electric accessory opening lottery in the high-frequency support mode is set. In the opening/closing scenario, a condition for opening the electric accessory 34a (opening condition for electric operation) and a condition for closing the electric accessory 34a (closing condition for electric operation) are set. In step Sn1712, after the high-frequency support mode electric power opening/closing scenario setting process is executed, the electric power support process ends.

On the other hand, in step Sn1710, when it is determined that the result of the electric accessory open lottery is not support winning (Sn1710: NO), the process for electric support is terminated without executing the processes of steps Sn1711 and Sn1712. .

If it is determined in step Sn1707 that it is in the opening/closing execution mode (Sn1707: YES), or if it is determined in step Sn1708 that it is not in the high-frequency support mode (Sn1708: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn1713, and the electric accessory open lottery I do. Specifically, the value stored in the electric role holding area 64d is shifted, and when the value of the electric role item opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 or 1, the electric role item opening lottery is performed. be elected. At the same time as the electric accessory opening lottery, the electric role timer counter Td is set to "14750" (that is, 29.5 sec). After that, the process proceeds to step Sn1714.

In step Sn1714, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory open lottery in step Sn1713 is support winning. In step Sn1714, if it is determined that the support has not been won (Sn1714: NO), the electronic support process is terminated. On the other hand, in step Sn1714, if it is determined that the support win has been achieved (Sn1714: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1715, and the support win flag is turned ON. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sn1716 to execute an electrical opening/closing scenario setting process for the low-frequency support mode. Specifically, it is a process of setting an opening/closing scenario in which an opening pattern of the electric accessory 34a is set when the electric accessory opening lottery is won in the low-frequency support mode. In the opening/closing scenario, a condition for opening the electric accessory 34a (opening condition for electric operation) and a condition for closing the electric accessory 34a (closing condition for electric operation) are set. In step Sn1716, after the low-frequency support mode electric power opening/closing scenario setting process is executed, the electric power support process is terminated.

If it is determined at step Sn1702 that the support winning flag is ON (Sn1702: YES), the process advances to step Sn1717 to determine whether or not the value of the electric timer counter Td is "0". In step Sn1717, if it is determined that the value of the electric service timer counter Td is not "0" (Sn1717: NO), since the pattern is being changed and displayed in the general drawing unit 38, the main electric service supporting process is performed as it is. exit. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sn1717 that the value of the electric service timer counter Td is "0" (Sn1717: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1718.

In step Sn1718, a win display is set. As a result, the variation display of the pattern in the normal pattern unit 38 is terminated while the win display is stopped. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sn1719 to turn on the supporting flag and turn off the support winning flag. After that, the electronic support process is terminated.

In step Sn1701, when it is determined that the flag during support is ON (Sn1701: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1720, and an electric opening/closing control process for controlling the opening/closing of the electric accessory 34a is executed. The details of the electrical opening/closing control process will be described later. After executing step Sn1720, the electronic support process is terminated.

<Electrical opening/closing process>
Next, the electrical opening/closing process will be described. The electrical opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the electrical support process (Sn1720 in FIG. 127).

FIG. 128 is a flow chart showing the electrical opening/closing process. In step Sn1801, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open. In step Sn1801, when it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is not open (Sn1801: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn1802.

At step Sn1802, it is determined whether or not the opening condition of the set opening/closing scenario is satisfied. Specifically, the number of times the electric accessory 34a is opened (once in the present embodiment) when one electric role opening lottery is won is counted, and the time to maintain the closed state of the electric accessory 34a is counted. It is determined whether or not the condition for shifting the electric accessary 34a to the open state is established by counting with a timer counter whether or not the opening timing has been reached. If it is determined in step Sn1802 that the opening condition of the opening/closing scenario is not established (Sn1802: NO), the electrical opening/closing process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sn1802 that the opening condition of the opening/closing scenario is satisfied (Sn1802: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1803.

At step Sn1803, the electric accessory 34a is opened. After executing step Sn1803, the process proceeds to step Sn1804.

At step Sn1804, an electric power release command is set. The electric power release command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process ( FIG. 116 : step Sn0603) of the normal process. The audio light emitting device that has received the electric role opening command performs setting for executing the electric role opening effect. After that, the electrical opening/closing process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sn1801 that the electric accessory 34a is not open (Sn1801: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1805.

At step Sn1805, it is determined whether or not the closing condition of the electric accessory 34a is satisfied. If it is determined in step Sn1805 that the closing condition is not satisfied (Sn1805: NO), the electrical opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sn1805 that the closing condition is satisfied (Sn1805: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1806.

At step Sn1806, the electric accessory 34a is closed. After executing step Sn1806, the process proceeds to step Sn1807.

At step Sn1807, an electrical closing command is set. The electric closing command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process ( FIG. 116 : step Sn0603) of the normal process. The audio light-emitting device that has received the power closing command executes settings for executing an effect for closing the power. After that, the electrical opening/closing process is terminated.

<<3-6>> Various processes executed in the sound emission control device and the display control device:
Next, a specific example of control executed in the audio emission control device and the display control device will be described. The processing executed in the sound emission control device 90 will be described first, and then the processing executed in the display control device 100 will be described.

<Various processing executed in the sound emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, timer interrupt processing executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 will be described.

FIG. 129 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the sound and light side MPU 92 . Timer interrupt processing is repeatedly executed at a relatively short period (for example, 2 msec). Processing of each step executed in timer interrupt processing will be described below.

In step Sn1901, command storage processing is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing the received command in the sound and light side RAM 94 when a command is received from the main side MPU 62 . The sound and light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer for enabling storage and reading of commands received from the main side MPU 62, and the commands received from the main side MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer. , are read out sequentially according to the order in which they are stored. After executing step Sn1901, the process proceeds to step Sn1902.

At step Sn1902, a game round effect process is executed. In the game round effect processing, processing relating to the effect to be executed in the game round from the start of the symbol variation to the stop is performed. Details of the game round effect processing will be described later. After executing step Sn1902, the process proceeds to step Sn1903.

At step Sn1903, a game ball distribution mode detection process is executed. The game ball distribution mode detection process is a process for detecting the distribution mode of game balls that are shot by the player's operation of the operation handle 25 and circulate in the game area. By executing the game ball distribution mode detection process, the player's stop shot is detected. The game ball distribution mode detection processing will be described later. After executing step Sn1903, the process proceeds to step Sn1904.

In step Sn1904, other processing is executed. Other processing includes processing for displaying effect moving images on the symbol display device 41 during the open/close execution mode, processing for displaying demonstration moving images on the symbol display device 41, and the like. After executing step Sn1904, the process proceeds to step Sn1905.

In step Sn1905, light emission control processing for controlling light emission of various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, light emission control of various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read out in each of the effect processes described above. After executing step Sn1905, the process proceeds to step Sn1906.

At step Sn1906, an audio output control process for controlling the audio output of the speaker 46 is executed. In the audio output control process, audio output control of the speaker 46 is performed based on the audio data read out in the BGM process and each effect process. After executing step Sn1906, the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

<Processing for game round production>
Next, the game cycle effect processing will be described. The game round effect processing is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a timer interrupt processing subroutine (Sn1902 in FIG. 129).

FIG. 130 is a flow chart showing processing for game round effect. In step Sn2001, it is determined whether or not a variation command and a type command have been received. In step Sn2001, when it is determined that the command for variation and the type command have not been received (Sn2001: NO), the processing for this game cycle effect is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sn2001 that the command for variation and the type command have been received (Sn2001: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn2002.

In step Sn2002, the command for variation received this time is read, and from the command, the presence or absence of a big win or a small win, the type of the big win or a small win, the presence or absence of reach occurrence, and the variation time are read. Then, the read information is stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 . After that, the process proceeds to step Sn2003.

At step Sn2003, a game cycle effect pattern setting process is executed. The game round effect pattern setting process is a process of determining and setting the pattern of effects to be executed in the current game round (the content and execution timing of the advance notice effect and ready-to-win effect) based on the effect pattern table. Details of the effect pattern setting process will be described later. After executing step Sn2003, the process proceeds to step Sn2004.

In step Sn2004, a stop symbol setting process is executed. In the stop symbol setting process, when the result of the winning lottery in the current game round is a big win, information corresponding to the stop result in which the same combination of symbols is established on the effective line L of the symbol display device 41 is displayed. , is set as the information of the current stop pattern.

If the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a losing result (including a small winning), it is determined whether or not the ready-to-win is generated from the content of the command for variation. When it is determined that it corresponds to the occurrence of ready-to-win, it corresponds to the stop result that the combination of the same symbols on the effective line L does not materialize and the combination of the ready-to-win symbols on the effective line L does. information is determined as the information of the result of this stop. On the other hand, when it is determined that it does not correspond to the occurrence of ready-to-win, the result is a stop result in which the combination of the same symbols on the effective line L does not materialize and the combination of the ready-to-win symbols on the effective line L does not materialize. The corresponding information is set as the information of the current stop symbol. After executing step Sn2004, the process proceeds to step Sn2005.

At step Sn2005, a process for setting a variation display pattern for the current game round is executed. In this process, information on the variation time of the current game round is specified from the content of the variation command received this time, and the combination of the information on the variation time and the information on the stop symbol set in step Sn2004 is performed. Select the corresponding variable display pattern. When selecting a variation display pattern, the variation display pattern table stored in the variation display pattern table storage area 93b of the sound and light side ROM 93 is referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step Sn2006.

In step Sn2006, the information of the effect pattern, the stop pattern, and the variable display pattern set in the current game round is set in the effect command. After that, the process proceeds to step Sn2007 to transmit the effect command to the display side MPU102. The display-side MPU 102 executes processing for displaying the effect contents corresponding to the received effect command on the pattern display device 41 . After executing step Sn2007, the process advances to step Sn2008 to execute update processing at the start of fluctuation. The update process at the start of fluctuation is a process for updating the reserved display in the first reserved display area Ds1 or the second reserved display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41. FIG. After executing step Sn2008, the process for this game round effect is terminated.

<Game cycle effect pattern setting process>
Next, the game cycle effect pattern setting process will be described. The game round effect pattern setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the game round effect process (FIG. 130: Sn2003).

FIG. 131 is a flow chart showing the game cycle effect pattern setting process. In step Sn2101, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery for the game round for which the effect pattern is to be set is a big win. Specifically, in step Sn2002, determination is made based on the information read from the command for variation and the type command. In step Sn2101, when it is determined that the result of the winning lottery for the game round for which the effect pattern is to be set is a big win (Sn2101: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn2102.

At step Sn2102, a setting process of a large winning effect pattern is executed. Specifically, from the production patterns set corresponding to each jackpot type, the production pattern corresponding to the jackpot type in the game round to be processed and the fluctuation time set in the fluctuation time setting process is selected and executed. Set as a production pattern.

As described in the variable time setting process, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variable time information stored in the jackpot variable time table is such that the variable time becomes shorter as the total pending number CRN increases. is set to Therefore, when the second start suspension number RbN is "0", the fluctuation time becomes shorter as the number of the first start suspension number RaN increases, and when the first start suspension number RaN is "0" , and the second start hold number RbN, the fluctuation time becomes shorter. Therefore, the effect pattern set in the process of setting the effect pattern for the big win differs depending on the number of reserved coins CRN at the time when the effect pattern of the game round to be processed is set.

After that, the game cycle effect pattern setting process is ended.

In step Sn2101, when it is determined that the result of the winning lottery for the game round for which the effect pattern is to be set is not a big win (Sn2101: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn2103. In step Sn2103, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery for the game round for which the effect pattern is to be set is a small winning. Specifically, in step Sn2002, determination is made based on the information read from the command for variation and the type command.

At step Sn2103, when it is determined that the result of the winning lottery for the game round for which the effect pattern is to be set is a small winning (Sn2103: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn2104.

In step Sn2104, it is determined whether or not the type of the small hit is the small hit c. In step Sn2104, when it determines with the kind of small hit being the small hit c (Sn2104:YES), it progresses to step Sn2105.

In step Sn2105, it is determined whether or not the stop shot flag is ON. The stopping shot flag is a flag that is turned ON when it is detected in the game ball distribution state detection process that the player is making a stopping shot in a game round other than the game round in which the small win c is won. The stopping flag is turned OFF when a series of high-frequency support modes ends. If it is determined in step Sn2105 that the stopping shot flag is not ON (Sn2105: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn2106. As described in the outline of the processing by the gaming machine, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment executes the specific suggestive effect when the small win c is won, but when the specific suggestive effect is not executed, i.e. , In order to suppress the player from making a stopping shot in a game round in which the possibility of winning the small win c is low, the winning lottery result is a game round with a lottery result other than the small win c. When it is detected that it is doing, the specific suggestion performance is not executed. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the stop shot flag is ON.

In step Sn2106, a process of setting an effect pattern for the small win c is performed. Specifically, as described with reference to FIG. 108, an effect pattern for executing a specific suggestion effect is set. In this embodiment, a plurality of production patterns for the small hit c are prepared, and the production pattern corresponding to the fluctuation time in the game round to be processed is selected from the production patterns prepared according to the fluctuation time. Select and set as the effect pattern to be executed.

As described in the variable time setting process, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variable time information stored in the small winning variable time table becomes shorter as the total pending number CRN increases. is set to Therefore, when the second start suspension number RbN is "0", the fluctuation time becomes shorter as the number of the first start suspension number RaN increases, and when the first start suspension number RaN is "0" , and the second start hold number RbN, the fluctuation time becomes shorter. Therefore, the effect pattern set in the process of setting the effect pattern for the small winning c differs depending on the number of reserved coins CRN at the time when the effect pattern of the game turn to be processed is set.

After that, the game cycle effect pattern setting process is ended.

In step Sn2104, when it is determined that the type of small per is not c (Sn2104: NO), or in step Sn2105, when it is determined that the stopping flag is ON (Sn2105: YES), step Proceed to Sn2107.

In step Sn2107, setting processing of a normal effect pattern for small winning is executed. The production pattern is a production pattern in which no specific suggestive production is executed. Specifically, from the production pattern set corresponding to the type of each small hit, select the production pattern according to the small hit type in the game round to be processed and the fluctuation time set in the fluctuation time setting process. , is set as the effect pattern to be executed.

As described in the variable time setting process, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variable time information stored in the small winning variable time table becomes shorter as the total pending number CRN increases. is set to Therefore, when the second start suspension number RbN is "0", the fluctuation time becomes shorter as the number of the first start suspension number RaN increases, and when the first start suspension number RaN is "0" , and the second start hold number RbN, the fluctuation time becomes shorter. Therefore, the effect pattern set in the process of setting the effect pattern for the small win differs depending on the number of reserved coins CRN at the time when the effect pattern of the game turn to be processed is set.

After executing step Sn2107, the game cycle effect pattern setting process is ended.

In step Sn2103, when it is determined that the result of the winning lottery for the game round for which the effect pattern is set is not a small winning (Sn2103: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn2108. In step Sn2108, it is determined whether reach occurs in the game round to be processed. If it is determined in step Sn2108 that reach occurs (Sn2108: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn2109.

In step Sn2109, a process of setting an effect pattern for generating reach is executed. Specifically, an effect pattern corresponding to the variable time set for the game round to be processed is selected and set as the effect pattern to be executed.

As described in the variable time setting process, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variable time information stored in the variable time table for reach occurrence becomes shorter as the number of total pending numbers CRN increases. is set to Therefore, when the second start suspension number RbN is "0", the fluctuation time becomes shorter as the number of the first start suspension number RaN increases, and when the first start suspension number RaN is "0" , and the second start hold number RbN, the fluctuation time becomes shorter. Therefore, the effect pattern set in the process of setting the effect pattern for generating reach differs depending on the pending number CRN at the time when the effect pattern of the game turn to be processed is set.

After that, the game cycle effect pattern setting process is terminated.

When it is determined in step Sn2108 that reach does not occur (Sn2108: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn2110. In step S2110, a process of setting an effect pattern for no reach generation is executed. Specifically, an effect pattern corresponding to the variable time set for the game round to be processed is selected and set as the effect pattern to be executed.

As described in the variable time setting process, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variable time information stored in the variable time table for reach non-occurrence is such that the greater the number of total pending numbers CRN, the shorter the variable time. is set to be Therefore, when the second start suspension number RbN is "0", the fluctuation time becomes shorter as the number of the first start suspension number RaN increases, and when the first start suspension number RaN is "0" , and the second start hold number RbN, the fluctuation time becomes shorter. Therefore, the effect pattern set in the setting process of the effect pattern for non-reach generation differs depending on the pending number CRN at the time when the effect pattern of the game turn to be processed is set.

After that, the game cycle effect pattern setting process is ended.

<Game ball distribution mode detection processing>
Next, the game ball distribution mode detection processing will be described. The game ball distribution mode detection process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (Sn1903 in FIG. 129).

FIG. 132 is a flow chart showing game ball distribution mode detection processing. In step Sn2201, it is determined whether or not the high-frequency support mode is on. Specifically, in the command storage processing (Sn1901) in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 129), it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode command has been received. If it is determined in step Sn2201 that the high frequency support mode is in effect (Sn2201: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn2202.

At step Sn2202, it is determined whether or not a game round is being executed. Specifically, when the variation command and the type command are received, it is determined whether or not the game round is being executed based on the variation time included in the received information.

At step Sn2202, when it is determined that the game round is being executed (Sn2202: YES), the process advances to step Sn2203 to execute game ball count processing.

The number-of-game-balls count process counts the number of game balls detected by the detection sensor 205 (see FIG. 97) of the delay mechanism 202 (hereinafter also referred to as the number of game balls in circulation) for each game cycle executed during the high-frequency support. is a process of counting . Specifically, for each game run during the high-frequency support mode, the lottery result of the winning lottery, the fluctuation time, and the number of circulation are stored in the game ball count provided in the work RAM 104 of the display control device 100. Store in memory area.

FIG. 133 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the game ball number count memory area. As shown in the figure, in the game ball count memory area, a series of high-frequency support modes (high-frequency support modes executed with one jackpot winning as a trigger) are started, and the game times that have been executed most recently are stored. In the period up to, the result of the winning lottery for each game round, the fluctuation time, the number of game balls distributed, and the distribution frequency are recorded. In the variable time column, the variable time value for each game round is recorded based on the variable time information included in the received variable command. FIG. 40X shows information corresponding to four game rounds. is recorded in the game ball number count memory area.

The number of game balls detected by the detection sensor 205 during each game round is recorded in the circulation number column. Then, the number of game balls detected by the detection sensor 205 per unit time (one second in this embodiment) is recorded in the distribution frequency column. The value of the distribution frequency is calculated by executing the calculation of (the number of game balls distributed/fluctuation time) in the arithmetic processing for determination of stop hitting (Sn2205), which will be described later.

The description returns to FIG. After executing step Sn2203, the process advances to step Sn2204 to determine whether or not it is time to end the game cycle.

In step Sn2204, if it is determined that the game cycle is finished (Sn2204: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn2205. In step Sn2205, a calculation process for determination of stop shot is executed. Specifically, as described above, from the value of the variation time and the number of game balls in circulation for each game round recorded in the game ball count memory area, the calculation of (number of circulation/variation time) is executed, The calculated value is recorded in the distribution frequency column of the game ball count memory area. In this embodiment, the unit of distribution frequency is [pieces/second]. Also, in the following description, the notation of the unit of distribution frequency may be omitted. After executing step Sn2205, the process proceeds to step Sn2206.

In step Sn2206, it is determined whether or not a predetermined stopping shot condition is established based on the information recorded in the game ball count memory area (hereinafter also referred to as distribution mode information). The stopping shot condition is a condition for determining whether or not the player has made a stopping shot in a game round other than the game round in which the winning lottery is a small win c, and when the stopping shot condition is satisfied, the stopping shot is made. is being executed.

In the present embodiment, determination is made based on whether or not the stop shot condition is satisfied using the following determination criteria.
- Judgment Criteria 1: If the distribution mode information has not yet been recorded in the game ball count memory area, it is judged that the stop shot condition is not satisfied.
・Judgment Criteria 2: When the distribution mode information is recorded in the game round in which the small win c was won (hereinafter also referred to as the standard game round), and the circulation frequency in the standard game round is 1.0 or more. And, if the circulation frequency is less than 1.0 in any one of the game rounds of the lottery result other than the latest small win c before and after the reference game round, the stop blow condition is established. judge.
・Judgment Criteria 3: If the information in the reference game round is recorded and the circulation frequency in the reference game round is less than 1.0, the circulation frequency in other game rounds is less than 1.0 However, it is determined that the stop shot condition is not satisfied.
· Judgment criteria 4: If the reference game round has not been executed yet, the circulation frequency is one of the game rounds other than the reference game round that has already been executed (the game round of the lottery result other than the small hit c) In the case of less than 1.0 times, it is determined that the stop shot condition is met.
・Judgment Criterion 5: In cases other than the above judgment criteria 1 to 4, it is judged that the stopping shot condition is not met.

In step Sn2206, it is determined whether or not the stopping shot condition is satisfied based on the determination criteria as described above. It should be noted that the determination criteria are not limited to the contents of the determination criteria 1 to 5 described above, and other determination criteria may be adopted. For example, the value of the circulation frequency in the game rounds other than the small winning c in the period from the small winning c game round to the next small winning c game round is the value of the circulation frequency of the small winning c game round. It may be determined that the stop shot is made when the value is smaller than the value by a predetermined number or more. In addition, various judgment criteria may be used.

If it is determined in step Sn2206 that the stop shot condition is satisfied (Sn2206: YES), the process advances to step Sn2207 to turn on the stop shot flag. After that, the process proceeds to step Sn2208.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sn2201 that it is not in the high-frequency support mode (Sn2201: NO), or if it is determined in step S2202 that the game round is not being executed (Sn2202: NO), or if it is determined in step Sn2204 that the game round When it is determined that it is not the end timing (Sn2204: NO), or when it is determined in step Sn2206 that the stop shot condition is not satisfied (Sn2206: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn2208 without executing step Sn2207. .

In step Sn2208, it is determined whether or not a low frequency support mode command has been received. At step Sn2208, if it is determined that the low-frequency support mode command has been received (Sn2208: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn2209 to reset the game ball number count memory area. That is, the distribution mode information recorded in the number-of-game-balls count memory area is erased. After executing step Sn2209, the process advances to step Sn2210 to turn off the stop shot flag. After that, the game ball distribution mode detection processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sn2208 that the low-frequency support mode command has not been received (Sn2208: NO), the game ball distribution mode detection processing is terminated.

<Various processing executed in the display control device>
Next, processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

The processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 mainly includes a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on until the power is turned off, and a main processing that is executed when a command is received from the sound emission control device 90. There are command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing executed when a V interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal that is transmitted from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when rendering processing of an image for one frame is completed.

The MPU 102 executes main processing after power-on, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of commands and detection of V interrupt signals. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command interrupt processing is preferentially executed. Therefore, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound emission control device 90 and execute the V interrupt process.

<Main processing>
Next, main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. As described above, the main process is a process that is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. Processing of each step executed in the main processing will be described below.

In step Sn2301, initialization processing is executed. Specifically, first, processing for initializing the MPU 102 and clearing the storage of the work RAM 104 and the video RAM 107 is performed. Then, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107 . Furthermore, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107 and the extracted character information is written in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107 . Also, perform other necessary settings for initialization. After that, the process proceeds to step Sn2302.

In step Sn2302, interrupt permission setting is executed. After the interrupt permission setting is executed, in the main processing, infinite loop processing is executed until the power is turned off. Accordingly, after the interrupt permission is set, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing, which will be described below, are executed in accordance with the reception of a command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described. As described above, the command interrupt processing is processing that is executed each time a command is received from the sound emission control device 90 .

FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. In step Sn2401, command storage processing is executed. In the command storage process, received command data is extracted and the extracted command data is stored in a command storage area provided in work RAM 104 . Various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read by the command determination process of the V interrupt process, which will be described later, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. As described above, V interrupt processing is processing that is executed when a V interrupt signal from VDP 105 is detected. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command storage area are executed by the command interrupt process. Execute the displayed instructions.

As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame worth of image is completed and that is transmitted to the MPU 102 . Therefore, the MPU 102 executes V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, so that drawing instructions to the VDP 105 are issued every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame worth of image is completed. For this reason, the VDP 105 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to suppress the development of an image associated with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area in which the image information is stored. Details of the processing of each step of the V interrupt processing will be described below.

In step Sn2501, command handling processing is executed. In the command handling process, the contents of the command stored in the command storage area by the command interruption process (FIG. 135) are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. Specifically, for example, when a performance command is stored, image drawing and display control is started so that the performance mode specified by the performance command is displayed on the pattern display device 41.例文帳に追加

If the effect operation command is stored, it is determined whether or not it is the period for accepting pressing of the effect operation button 24, and if it is determined that it is the period for accepting pressing of the effect operation button 24, the effect operation is performed. Control of image drawing and display is started so that the effect mode corresponding to the depression of the button 24 is displayed on the pattern display device 41 . On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the period for accepting pressing of the effect operation button 24, the content of the next command is analyzed without executing the process.

In the command processing (Sn2501), all commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and processing corresponding to all the analyzed commands is executed. The reason for this will be explained. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during the 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the effect is set by the sound emission control device 90 and the effect is started, there is a high possibility that various commands for specifying the content of the effect are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the state of the effect such as the advance notice effect and the stop pattern set by the sound emission control device 90, and display the effect image according to the state. The rendering of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the device 41 .

In step Sn2502, display setting processing is executed. In the display setting process, based on the type of screen to be displayed on the pattern display device 41 set by the command handling process (Sn2501), etc., the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the pattern display device 41 is specified. . After that, the process proceeds to step Sn2503.

In step Sn2503, task processing is executed. In the task processing, based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the pattern display device 41 specified by the display setting processing (Sn2502), the type of character (sprite, display object) that constitutes the image is determined. Along with specifying, for each character (sprite), various parameters required for drawing, such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc., are determined. After that, the process proceeds to step Sn2504.

In step Sn2504, drawing processing is executed. In the drawing process, the types of various characters forming one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each character, which are determined by the task process (Sn2503), are transmitted to the VDP 105 . The VDP 105 executes an image drawing process based on these pieces of information, and together with a drive signal to cause the pattern display device 41 to display an image drawn based on the information received during the previous V interrupt process. The image data is transmitted to the pattern display device 41 . After that, the process proceeds to step Sn2505, and after executing other processes, the V interrupt process ends. An example of specific control for executing various processes including the jackpot effect in the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the specific suggestive effect is executed in the game round in which the result of the winning lottery is the small win c, so the game recognizing that the specific suggestive effect has been executed It is possible to give the person a sense of expectation about the result of the winning lottery. Furthermore, in the game round executed before the game round in which the result of the winning lottery is the small win c, when the distribution mode of the game ball is the game ball distribution mode in which the player stops. , Since the specific suggestion performance is not executed in the game round in which the result of the winning lottery is the small win c, when the player desires to execute the specific suggestion performance, the game ball shooting operation by the player is a stop shot. You can suppress the firing operation. As a result, if the player's finishing stroke gives the player a privilege not planned for the gaming machine, by determining whether or not to perform a specific suggestive effect based on the presence or absence of the finishing stroke, It is possible to suppress the granting of benefits to the unplanned player.

In other words, when it is determined that the distribution mode of the game ball due to the player's shooting operation is the stopping hit, the specific suggestive effect is not executed despite the fact that it is a small win c. It is possible to prompt the player who desires the execution to perform a game ball shooting operation that is not judged as a stopping shot.

Also, when determining the effect of the game round in which the result of the winning lottery is the small win c, the distribution frequency in the detection sensor 205 in the game round in which the result of the winning lottery is the small win c among the game rounds that have already been executed. , and based on the distribution frequency in the detection sensor 205 in game rounds in which the winning lottery result is a lottery result other than the small win c among the game rounds that have already been executed, the winning lottery result in the game round to be executed from now on is determined. Since it is determined whether or not to execute the specific suggestive effect in the game round of the small win c, the distribution frequency of the detection sensor 205 in the game round of the already executed game rounds in which the result of the winning lottery is the small win c and , the game in which the result of the winning lottery is the small winning c by comparing with the distribution frequency in the detection sensor 205 in the game times in which the winning lottery result is a lottery result other than the small winning c among the game times already executed. It can be detected whether the player switches the mode of the game ball shooting operation between the times and the game times in which the result of the winning lottery is other than the small win c. Therefore, for example, it is possible to accurately determine whether or not the player is intentionally trying to obtain a privilege not expected by the gaming machine, and whether or not to execute the specific suggestive effect based on the determination result. can be determined.

Furthermore, the detection of the shooting operation by the player (specifically, the detection of the stop shot) is detected based on the circulation frequency of the game balls in the detection sensor 205 . Since the distribution frequency is the time average of the number of distributed coins, it is possible to accurately detect the player's distribution state by excluding noise-like changes in the distribution state for a short period of time (for example, one second). Also, the distribution frequency is correlated with the manner in which the game ball is shot by the player. Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect reflecting the manner in which the game ball is shot by the player, and to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, since the effect in the game round to be executed is determined based on the circulation frequency in the game round in which the specific suggestive effect is executed, the player's shooting mode due to the execution of the specific suggestive effect, that is, the specific suggestive effect, is determined. It is possible to decide whether or not to execute the specific suggestive process afterward, taking into account the player's reaction to the execution and the player's psychology. That is, when determining whether or not to execute the specific suggestive effect, it is possible to consider the reaction of the player when the specific suggestive effect was previously executed, and the player's reaction to whether or not to execute the specific suggestive effect can be considered. can be controlled by feedback.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment detects, for each game round, the result of the winning lottery corresponding to the game round and the number of game balls distributed through the detection sensor 205 during the period during which the game round is executed. A game ball number count memory area for storing information associated with a certain circulation number is provided. The circulation number is correlated with the manner in which the game ball is shot by the player. Therefore, it is possible to execute various processes based on the lottery result of the winning lottery or the effect during the game round reflecting the lottery result, and the manner in which the player shoots the game ball (the player's reaction). For example, it is possible to feed back a player's reaction to an effect reflecting a predetermined lottery result and select an effect in a game cycle to be executed from now on, thereby improving the interest of the game. Furthermore, the game ball number count memory area also stores the variation time of each game round in association with each game round. Therefore, it is possible to calculate the frequency (circulation frequency) at which the game ball circulates in a specific position in the game area based on the fluctuation time and the number of circulations of the game round, and the lottery result for each game round and the , and the distribution frequency corresponding to the lottery result, it can be applied to various processes in the game round to be executed from now on. For example, it is possible to detect the tendency of the game ball shooting mode by the player, not limited to stopping shots, and use the detection result to determine the effect in the game round to be executed from now on.

In the above embodiment, it is determined whether or not the game state is the high-frequency support mode, and if it is the high-frequency support mode, the circulation mode of the game ball is detected for stopping hit detection. That is, in the low-frequency support mode, detection of the game ball distribution mode is not performed. More specifically, in the case of the low frequency support mode, even if a game ball passes the detection sensor 205, it is not even stored in the game ball number count memory area. Therefore, the processing in the low frequency support mode can be simplified.

In addition, in the present embodiment, due to the configuration of the flow path 215, the crew 220, and the flow path 217 in the V winning mechanism 210, the game ball enters the first V winning opening V1 from the time when the game ball enters the second big winning opening 212a. The time until the game ball reaches the second big winning hole 212a is configured to be longer than the time until it reaches the second V winning hole V2. The game ball entering the first V winning hole V1 is more advantageous for the player than the game ball entering the second V winning hole V2, and the game ball enters the second big winning hole 212a. Since the time from the point in time to the point at which the game ball reaches the first V prize opening V1 is longer than the time from the point at which the game ball enters the second big prize opening 212a to the point at which the game ball reaches the second V prize opening V2, When the game ball is distributed to the flow path 215 by the first distribution valve 218 and the second distribution valve 219, the expectation that the game ball enters the first V winning hole V1 is given to the player. On the other hand, it can be given continuously for a long period of time. On the other hand, when the game ball is distributed to the flow path 217 by the first distribution valve 218 and the second distribution valve 219, there is a negative pressure for the game ball to enter the second V winning opening V2. A feeling (a sense of crisis) can be imparted to the player only for a short period of time. As a result, it is possible to realize a game machine that provides players with a well-balanced sense of anticipation in general, such as providing the player with a long sense of expectation and giving the player a short sense of urgency. be able to.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, depending on the result of the winning lottery,
Since the flow paths (flow path 215, flow path 216, flow path 217) to which the game balls entered from the second big winning hole 212a are distributed are different, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the result of the winning lottery. . Furthermore, in addition to the result of the winning lottery, it is possible to draw the player's attention to how the game balls are distributed by the first distributing valve 218 and the second distributing valve 219, thereby improving the interest in the game.

Moreover, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment can obtain the following effects by providing the delay mechanism 202 . That is, in a game round in which the result of the winning lottery is a small win, the game ball launched into the game area PA before the result of the winning lottery is notified is triggered by the small win, and the second opening and closing door 212b is opened. It is possible to reach the second big winning hole 212a during the period of transition to the open state, and in the game round in which the result of the winning lottery is a small winning, the ball is shot to the game area PA after the result of the lottery is notified. It becomes impossible for the played game ball to reach the second big winning opening 212a during the period in which the second open/close door 212b is transitioning to the open state triggered by the small win.

Therefore, when it is recognized that the result of the winning lottery is the small winning c by the notification of the result of the winning lottery in the game cycle, the game ball is shot after the notification, and the game ball is entered into the second big winning hole 212a. , when the result of the winning lottery is not the small win c or the small win other than the small win c is recognized by the notification of the result of the winning lottery in the game round, the game ball is not fired and the second big winning hole It is possible to prevent the player from intentionally switching the shooting mode of the game ball for each result of the winning lottery (for example, stop shot), such as not allowing the game ball to enter 212a.

<<3-7>> Modified example of the third embodiment:
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and can be implemented in various aspects without departing from the scope of the invention. For example, the following modifications are possible. In addition, in the modified example described below, description of the same configuration, processing, and effects as those of the above-described embodiment is omitted.

<<3-7-1>> Modification 1:
In the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 109, the image of the character CH is displayed on the display surface 41a as the specific suggestive effect, but other specific suggestive effect may be employed. For example, a specific suggestive effect may be executed by driving a movable accessory. FIG. 137 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the specific suggestive effect for driving the driving accessory.

As shown in the figure, the pachinko machine 10 of this modification provides a game board 30 with a movable accessory MY that is a dynamic accessory. The movable accessory MY functions as a driving means that drives so as to be visible to the player. When the specific suggestion effect is set as the effect to be executed in the game round, the movable accessory MY is driven to be visible to the player for a predetermined time (two seconds in this modification).

By driving the movable accessory MY so as to be visible to the player as the specific suggestive effect as in this modification, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the execution of the specific suggestive effect. As a result, by driving the movable accessory MY, it is possible to easily give the player a sense of expectation.

<<3-7-2>> Modification 2:
In the above-described third embodiment, the detection sensor 205 is arranged on the upper right side of the game area PA in order to detect the distribution mode of game balls, but the detection sensor may be arranged at another position. FIG. 138 is an explanatory diagram of an example of arrangement positions of detection sensors. As an example, the detection sensor 230 is arranged above the guide rail 31 on the upper left side of the game area PA. By arranging the detection sensor 230 at the position shown in FIG. 138, it is possible to detect whether or not the shooting operation of the game ball has been performed. Therefore, it is possible to detect the stop shot by the player switching between the execution and the stop of the shooting operation of the game ball.

As another example, a configuration including both the detection sensor 205 on the flow path 203 and the detection sensor 230 on the upper left side of the game area PA may be adopted. By adopting such a configuration, as one aspect of the stop hit, the stop hit by switching between the right hit and the left hit according to the result of the winning lottery, and the execution and stop of the game ball shooting operation by the player. It is possible to detect any mode of finishing hits, including the mode of switching between and.

<<3-7-3>> Modification 3:
In the above-described third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 97, the delay mechanism 202 is configured to include the flow path 203 that meanders left and right with respect to the game board 30, but other configurations may be adopted. may For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the speed at which game balls circulate is basically controlled by having a flow path in which projections are arranged. In addition, it is possible to adopt a cloon having an opening at the bottom, or adopt a structure that temporarily stops the circulation of game balls with a dynamic accessory and restarts the circulation of game balls after a certain period of time has elapsed. Any configuration may be employed as long as it has a function of delaying the arrival of the game balls circulating on the right side of the game area PA to the V winning mechanism 210 .

<<3-7-4>> Modification 4:
As information to be recorded in the game ball count memory area, whether or not a specific suggestive effect is executed for each game round executed, and the game circulated through the detection sensor 205 during the period in which each game round is executed. A configuration may be adopted in which information in which the number of balls in circulation is associated with the variation time for each game round is recorded. Then, using the information recorded in the number-of-game-balls count memory area, it may be determined whether or not the player is making a stopping shot. In this case, with respect to the reference game times used for the stop-play condition, in the third embodiment, the game times in which the small win c was won are used as the reference game times, but in this modified example, the game times in which the specific suggestive effect is executed are used. Adopted as a standard game round. Then, it is determined whether or not the stopping shot condition is established based on the determination standard of the stopping shot condition, in which the game round in which the specific suggesting effect is executed is adopted as the reference game round. By doing so, it is possible to determine whether or not the player is making a stop shot in direct response to whether or not the specific suggestion effect is executed.

<<3-7-5>> Modification 5:
In this modification, when the result of the winning lottery obtained by the previous determination process is the small win c, the game ball distribution mode in the period before the small win c is specified by the previous determination process. Based on, it is determined whether or not the player has executed a stop shot. As a result, when it is determined that the player has not made a stop shot, a specific suggesting performance is executed in a period before execution of a game round in which the result of the winning lottery is a small winning c. On the other hand, when it is determined that the player has made a stop shot, the specific suggestion performance is not executed in the period before the execution of the game round in which the result of the winning lottery is the small winning c.

139 is an explanatory diagram of an example of modification 5. FIG. As shown in the figure, when the game round U1 is executed, there are reserved game rounds corresponding to the game round U2 and the game round U3. A case where the ball is entered into 34 will be described. In this modification, based on the special information (hit random number counter C1, type counter C2, reach random number counter C3) acquired when the game ball corresponding to the game round U4 entered the second start port 34 , the first determination process is executed. As a result of the preceding determination process, when it is specified that the result of the winning lottery in the game round U4 is a small win c, the number of game balls for one or a plurality of game rounds executed before the specification. Based on the information recorded in the count memory area, a game ball distribution mode detection process is executed to determine whether or not the stop shot condition is established.

Then, when it is determined that the stop hitting condition is not satisfied, the game round (game round U2 or game round U3) executed in the period before the game round in which the result of the winning lottery is the small win c is executed. ), a specific suggestive effect is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop hitting condition is satisfied, the game round (game round U2 or game round U3) executed in the period before the game round in which the result of the winning lottery is the small win c is executed. ), the specific suggestive effect is not executed.

In this way, the player who wants to guess whether or not the result of the winning lottery is a small win c before the game round is executed is aware of the game ball shooting operation. can be made That is, it is possible to prevent the player from hitting the stop.

<<3-7-6>> Modification 6:
In this modified example, when the result of the winning lottery obtained by the previous determination process is the small win c, the result of the winning lottery is the small win c after the small win c is specified by the previous determination process. It is determined whether or not the player has executed a stop shot based on the distribution mode of the game balls in the period before the game round is executed. As a result, when it is determined that the player has not made a stop shot, a specific suggesting performance is executed in a period before execution of a game round in which the result of the winning lottery is a small winning c. On the other hand, when it is determined that the player has made a stop shot, the specific suggestion performance is not executed in the period before the execution of the game round in which the result of the winning lottery is the small winning c.

140 is an explanatory diagram of an example of modification 6. FIG. As shown in the figure, when the game round U1 is executed, there are reserved game rounds corresponding to the game round U2 and the game round U3. A case where the ball is entered into 34 will be described. In this modification, based on the special information (hit random number counter C1, type counter C2, reach random number counter C3) acquired when the game ball corresponding to the game round U4 entered the second start port 34 , the first determination process is executed. As a result of the preceding determination process, when it is specified that the result of the winning lottery in the game round U4 is a small win c, the number of game balls count memory area for one or a plurality of game rounds executed after the specification. Based on the information recorded in , a game ball distribution mode detection process is executed, and it is determined whether or not the stop shot condition is satisfied.

Then, when it is determined that the stop hitting condition is not satisfied, the game round (in this modification, the game round U3 ), a specific suggestive effect is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop-beat condition is established, the specific suggestive performance is not executed in the game round executed in the period before the game round in which the result of the winning lottery is the small win c is executed. .

In this way, the player who wants to guess whether or not the result of the winning lottery is a small win c before the game round is executed is aware of the game ball shooting operation. can be made That is, it is possible to prevent the player from hitting the stop.

<<3-7-7>> Modification 7:
In this modified example, when the result of the winning lottery obtained by the previous determination process is the small win c, the result of the winning lottery is the small win c after the small win c is specified by the previous determination process. It is determined whether or not the player has executed a stop shot based on the distribution mode of the game balls in the period before the game round is executed. As a result, when it is determined that the player has not made a stop shot, a specific suggestive performance is executed in the game round in which the winning lottery result is a small winning c. On the other hand, when it is determined that the player has made a stop shot, the specific suggesting effect is not executed in the game round in which the winning lottery result is the small winning c.

141 is an explanatory diagram of an example of modification 7. FIG. As shown in the figure, when the game round U1 is executed, there are reserved game rounds corresponding to the game round U2 and the game round U3. A case where the ball is entered into 34 will be described. In this modification, based on the special information (hit random number counter C1, type counter C2, reach random number counter C3) acquired when the game ball corresponding to the game round U4 entered the second start port 34 , the first determination process is executed. As a result of the preceding determination process, when it is specified that the result of the winning lottery in the game round U4 is a small win c, the number of game balls count memory area for one or a plurality of game rounds executed after the specification. Based on the information recorded in , a game ball distribution mode detection process is executed, and it is determined whether or not the stop shot condition is satisfied.

Then, when it is determined that the stop-beat condition is not satisfied, a specific suggestive effect is executed in the game round (game round U4 in this example) in which the result of the win lottery is the small win c. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop hitting condition is met, the specific suggestion performance is not executed in the game round (game round U4) in which the result of the winning lottery is the small win c.

By doing so, it is possible to make the player who desires to guess the result of the winning lottery in the game round by the effect executed in the game round aware of the game ball shooting operation. That is, it is possible to prevent the player from hitting the stop. In addition, from the game ball shooting operation by the player in the period after the small win c is specified by the first determination process and before the game round in which the result of the winning lottery is the small win c is executed. Considering the psychological state that can be estimated, it is possible to determine the effect to be executed in the game round of the small win c.

<<3-7-8>> Modification 8:
In the above-described third embodiment, processes related to determination of whether or not the player is performing a stop shot, such as counting processing for the number of game balls, arithmetic processing for determining stop shot, and processing for determining whether or not the condition for stopping shot is satisfied. The processing is executed only when a game round is executed in the high frequency support mode, but the configuration is not limited to such a configuration, and the processing related to the determination of stopping shots may also be executed in the case of the low frequency support mode. In this case, the number of distributions is detected not by the detection sensor 205 but by the detection sensor 230 shown in the modification. Then, information such as the result of the winning lottery for each game round, the variation time, the number of circulation in the detection sensor 230, the type of effect executed, and the like may be recorded in the game ball count memory area. By adopting such a configuration of the game ball count memory area, not only the player's reaction to the small hit c, but also the mode of the player's shooting operation with respect to other lottery results (the player's response to the lottery result) characteristics of the player's shooting operation of the game ball, such as the player's reaction to the type of effect executed (the player's reaction to each effect), etc. An effect that considers the characteristics can be executed.

<<3-7-9>> Modification 9:
In the third embodiment, when the game state shifts from the low-frequency support mode to the high-frequency support mode, the player is suggested to circulate the game ball on the right side of the game board 30 (to hit to the right). A configuration for executing an effect (a right-handed suggesting effect) may be adopted. In addition, when the game state shifts from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode, an effect that suggests to the player that the game ball is to be distributed to the left side of the game board 30 (to hit left) (suggestion to hit left) production) may be adopted. In addition, when the game state moves from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode, and during the low-frequency support mode, when it is detected that the game ball has circulated in the detection sensor 205 or the through gate 35, the game A configuration may be adopted in which an effect (left-handed suggestive effect) is executed to suggest to the player that the game ball should be distributed to the left side of the board 30 (to be hit left-handed). By doing so, it is possible to encourage the player to adopt a game mode in line with the flow of the game.

<<3-7-10>> Modification 10:
If the result of the winning lottery obtained by the previous determination process is a specific lottery result (for example, no reach occurrence, no reach occurrence, jackpot winning, small winning, etc.), the specific by the previous determination process The distribution mode of game balls in the period before obtaining the lottery result (for example, the number of game balls entered into the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, that is, the number of reservations CRN or the first start reservation number RaN, second start hold number RbN, etc.), the effect in the game round to be executed before the game round resulting in the specific lottery result is executed may be adopted. It is possible to make a player who desires to guess whether or not a specific lottery result is obtained before the execution of the game turn resulting in the specific lottery result be aware of the game ball shooting operation. .

<<3-7-11>> Modification 11:
If the result of the winning lottery obtained by the previous determination process is a specific lottery result (for example, no reach occurrence, no reach occurrence, jackpot winning, small winning, etc.), the specific by the previous determination process After the lottery result is obtained, the game ball distribution mode (for example, the first start port 33 and the second Based on the number of game balls entering the 2 start port 34, that is, the number of reservations CRN, the number of first start reservations RaN, the number of second start reservations RbN, etc.), the game round resulting in the specific lottery result is executed. A configuration may be adopted in which the effect in the game round executed before the game is determined. It is possible to make a player who desires to guess whether or not it is a specific lottery result before execution of a game turn with the specific lottery result be aware of the game ball shooting operation. .

<<3-7-12>> Modification 12:
If the result of the winning lottery obtained by the previous determination process is a specific lottery result (for example, no reach occurrence, no reach occurrence, jackpot winning, small winning, etc.), the specific by the previous determination process After the lottery result is obtained, the game ball distribution mode (for example, the first start port 33 or Based on the number of game balls entering the second start port 34, that is, the number of reservations CRN, the number of first start reservations RaN, the number of second start reservations RbN, etc. A configuration that determines the effect to be performed may be adopted. It is possible to make a player who desires to guess whether or not it is a specific lottery result by the performance executed in the game round of the specific lottery result be aware of the game ball shooting operation.

<<3-7-13>> Modification 13:
In the above-described third embodiment, when the effect of notifying the player in advance that there is a high possibility that the specific suggestive effect will be executed when the small win c is won, or when the stopping shot is detected. Alternatively, an effect may be executed in which the player is notified in advance that the specific suggestive effect is not executed. For example, such an effect may be executed as an opening effect during the opening period before the round game time starts after winning a jackpot in the first starting game time, or as an opening effect for customer waiting (customer It may be executed as a waiting moving image effect, a demonstration moving image effect). It should be noted that the customer-waiting animation effect is performed when there is no game round to be executed next when the execution of the game round is completed, that is, the value of the special information (hit random number counter C1) is set in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area. In the case where it is not stored in the area Rb and the detection sensor for detecting the circulation of the game ball does not detect the circulation of the game ball for a predetermined period of time, or when a predetermined distribution mode is satisfied, or the operation handle is operated by the player. This is an effect that is executed when a condition such as no operation of 25 is satisfied.

<<3-7-14>> Modification 14:
The determination criteria for the stop-play conditions used to determine whether or not the player has made a stop-play are not limited to the determination standards (determination standards 1 to 5) described in the third embodiment, and other determination standards. can be adopted. For example, if the circulation frequency in the game round executed immediately before the game round in which the result of the winning lottery is the small win c is equal to or less than a predetermined value, it is possible to adopt the determination criterion for determining that it is a final blow. Alternatively, if the circulation frequency in the game cycle executed immediately after the game cycle in which the result of the winning lottery is the small win c is executed is equal to or less than a predetermined value, a determination criterion for determining that it is a stop shot is adopted. may Processing can be simplified by using such a simple determination criterion.

<<4>> Fourth Embodiment:
<<4-1>> Game machine structure:
FIG. 142 is a perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter also referred to as "pachinko machine") as a fourth embodiment of the present invention. A pachinko machine 10 has a wooden outer frame 11 combined in a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island equipment of the game hall. The pachinko machine 10 also includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11 . A pachinko machine body 12 has an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13. - 特許庁The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11 by metal hinges 15 . The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 16 with respect to the inner frame 13 . On the back of the inner frame 13, control devices for controlling the pachinko machine main body 12, such as a main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device, are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. - 特許庁The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened, and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation using a dedicated key on the cylinder lock 17 .

A substantially central portion of the front door frame 14 is formed with an open window portion 18 . Around the window part 18, resin parts and electric decoration parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. The electrical parts are composed of light emitting means including various lamps such as LEDs. The light emitting means plays a role of enhancing the performance effect by lighting or blinking at each game played by the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot is won, when a ready-to-win game is generated, or the like. A glass unit 19 composed of two sheets of plate glass is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14 , and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19 . A game board, which will be described later, is detachably attached to the inner frame 13 , and the player of the pachinko machine 10 can view the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 19 . Details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper tray 20 and a lower tray 21 for storing game balls. The upper tray 20 is formed in a box shape with an open top, and stores game balls such as rental balls lent from a rental machine (not shown) and prize balls discharged from the pachinko machine main body 12 . The game balls stored in the upper tray 20 are supplied to a game ball shooting mechanism provided in the pachinko machine main body 12. - 特許庁The game ball shooting mechanism is driven by the player's operation of the operation handle 25, and shoots the game balls supplied from the upper tray 20 to the front surface of the game board. The lower tray 21 is arranged below the upper tray 20 and is shaped like a box with an open top. The lower tray 21 stores game balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 20. - 特許庁A discharge port 22 for discharging game balls stored in the lower tray 21 is formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 21 . A lever 23 is provided below the ejection port 22 , and the player can switch the ejection port 22 between a closed state and an open state by operating the lever 23 . When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game ball falls from the discharge port 22 and is discharged from the lower tray 21 to the outside.

A performance operation button 24 is provided in front of the peripheral edge of the upper plate 20.例文帳に追加The effect operation button 24 is an operation unit for the player to perform an input operation for the game effect performed by the pachinko machine 10 . When a player operates a performance operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, a game performance reflecting the operation is performed by the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

An operation handle 25 for a player to operate is provided on the right side of the front door frame 14 when viewed from the front (hereinafter also simply referred to as "right side"). When the player operates (turns) the operation handle 25, a game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism to the front surface of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operation handle 25, there are a touch sensor 25a for permitting driving of the game ball shooting mechanism, a wait button 25b for stopping shooting of game balls by the game ball shooting mechanism when pressed by the player, and the operation handle 25. A variable resistor 25c is provided for detecting the amount of rotational operation of , based on a change in electrical resistance. When the player grips the operating handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operating handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. Then, a game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism to the front surface of the game board with strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

A game ball shooting button 26 for a player to operate is provided on the left side of the periphery of the upper tray 20 in front view (hereinafter also simply referred to as "left side"). When the game ball shooting button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is shot to the front surface of the game board with a predetermined shooting strength regardless of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 by the player. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball shooting button 26, the game ball is shot to the front surface of the game board with the same shooting intensity as when the operation handle 25 is rotated at its maximum. In the case of this embodiment, when a game ball is shot by operating the game ball shooting button 26, the game ball flows to the right side of the game board when viewed from the front and also to the right side of the game board. That is, by operating the game ball shooting button 26, the player can hit the ball to the right. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the game ball shooting button 26 is operated, the game ball is shot to the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is turned on. . That is, the player turns on at least the touch sensor 25a by grasping the operation handle 25, and then operates the game ball shooting button 26 to shoot the game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball shooting button 26. can be realized.

Next, the configuration of the rear surface of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. A control device for controlling the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is arranged on the back surface of the pachinko machine 10. - 特許庁

143 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. As shown, the pachinko machine 10 includes a first control unit 51, a second control unit 52, a third control unit 53, and a power supply unit 58. Specifically, these units are provided on the back surface of the inner frame 13 .

The first control unit 51 has a main controller 60 . The main controller 60 has a main control board having a function of controlling the main game. The main control board is housed in a board box made of transparent resin material. This board box is configured to leave traces of opening and closing. For example, a seal is affixed to a portion that can be opened and closed, and when the substrate box is opened, characters such as "opened" appear.

The second control unit 52 includes an audio emission control device 90 and a display control device 100 . The sound emission control device 90 controls emission means such as speakers and various lamps provided in front of the pachinko machine 10 based on commands transmitted from the main control device 60 . The display control device 100 controls the pattern display device based on commands transmitted from the sound emission control device 90 . The pattern display device has a liquid crystal display for displaying patterns and images for presentation.

The third control unit 53 has a payout control device 70 and a launch control device 80 . The payout control device 70 performs payout control for paying out prize balls. When an instruction to shoot a game ball is input from the main control device 60, the shooting control device 80 shoots a game ball with strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 by the player. Controls the ball launching mechanism. In addition, on the back of the inner frame 13, there is a tank 54 to which the game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially supplied, and a slope which is connected to the lower part of the tank 54 and is gently inclined so that the game balls flow downstream. , a case rail 56 connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 55, a game ball is supplied from the case rail 56, and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out according to an instruction from the payout control device 70. A plurality of devices necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10, such as a payout device 71, are provided.

The power supply unit 58 includes a power supply device 85 and a power switch 88 . The power supply device 85 supplies power necessary for the pachinko machine 10 to operate. A power switch 88 is connected to the power supply device 85 . By ON/OFF operation of the power switch 88, a supply state in which power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 and a non-supply state in which power is not supplied to the pachinko machine 10 are switched.

Next, the game board will be explained. The game board is detachably attached to the front surface of the inner frame 13. - 特許庁

144 is a front view of the game board 30. FIG. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on its front surface. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding a game ball is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. A game ball shot from the game ball shooting mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and released above the game area PA, and then flows down the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicularly to the game board 30, and accessories such as windmills are arranged. These nails 42 and windmills distribute and organize the falling directions of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

The game board 30 is formed with a plurality of openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. A general prize winning port 32, a first starting port 33, a second starting port 34, a through gate 35, and a variable winning device 36 are provided in each opening. Game balls entered into each of the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, the through gate 35, and the variable winning device 36 enter the individual openings formed on the game board 30. Induced. Also, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display section 45 . The main display section 45 has a special figure unit 37 , a normal figure unit 38 , and a round display section 39 .

As illustrated, the general prize winning openings 32 are ball entrance members that form ball entrances into which game balls can enter, and are provided in plurality on the game board 30 . In this embodiment, when game balls enter the general winning hole 32, 10 game balls are paid out as prize balls from the payout device 71 (FIG. 143).

The first starting port 33 is a ball entrance member that forms a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter. The first starting port 33 is provided at the lower center of the game board 30 . In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first start hole 33, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a winning lottery, which will be described later, is executed.

The second starting port 34 is a ball entrance member that forms a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and is provided on the right side of the game board 30 . In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 34, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a winning lottery, which will be described later, is executed. Further, the second starting port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a.

The through gate 35 has a through hole extending vertically. The through gate 35 is a through gate that serves as a trigger for executing a lottery for opening the electric accessory 34a. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the main controller 60 performs an internal lottery (electric accessory open lottery) triggered by the passage. As a result of the internal lottery, when the electric role open is won, the electric accessory 34a shifts to the electric role open state in a predetermined manner. Since the through gate 35 is arranged on the upstream side of the second starting port 34 with respect to the flowing direction of the game ball, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 flows down the game area PA after passing through the second opening. It is possible to enter the ball into the starting port 34 . In addition, in this embodiment, even if the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the prize ball is not paid out.

The variable winning device 36 includes a large winning opening 36a leading to the back side of the game board 30, and an opening/closing door 36b for opening and closing the large winning opening 36a. The opening/closing door 36b is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot enter the big winning opening 36a. As a result of the internal lottery (winning lottery) by the main controller 60, when a big win is won and the opening/closing execution mode is shifted, the opening/closing door 36b repeats an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state. The open/close execution mode is the result of a winning lottery by the main control device 60 triggered by the ball entering the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, and when a big win is won, the opening/closing door 36b is in an open state. and the closed state are repeated. That is, when a big win is won as a result of a winning lottery based on the ball entering the first starting hole 33, the operation shifts to the opening/closing execution mode in which the ball can enter the big winning hole 36a of the variable prize winning device 36. Similarly, even if a big win is won as a result of the winning lottery based on the ball entering the second starting hole 34, the operation shifts to the opening/closing execution mode in which the ball can enter the big winning hole 36a of the variable prize winning device 36. . In the present embodiment, when game balls enter the big winning hole 36a of the variable winning device 36, the payout device 71 pays out 15 game balls as prize balls.

An out port 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and game balls that do not enter the general winning port 32, the first starting port 33, the second starting port 34, or the variable winning device 36 are out. It is discharged from the game area PA through the mouth 43 .

The special figure unit 37 includes a first symbol display portion 37a and a second symbol display portion 37b. Each of the first pattern display portion 37a and the second pattern display portion 37b is composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting portions are arranged in a predetermined manner.

The first pattern display portion 37a is a display portion for displaying the first pattern. The first pattern refers to a pattern that is variably displayed or statically displayed based on a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33 . The first symbol display part 37a is used as a display mode until the segment display displays a display corresponding to the lottery result when a winning lottery is performed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting hole 33. , to perform the variable display of the first symbol. When the lottery is finished, the first symbol display unit 37a causes the segment display to stop displaying the first symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

The second pattern display portion 37b is a display portion for displaying the second pattern. The second pattern refers to a pattern that is variably displayed or statically displayed based on a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34 . The second symbol display part 37b is used as a display mode until a winning lottery is performed triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 34, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is performed on the segment display device. , to perform the variable display of the second symbol. When the lottery is finished, the second symbol display section 37b causes the segment display device to stop displaying the second symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

The time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol displayed in the second symbol display portion 37b to the stop display is called the variation time. call. Specifically, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed in the first symbol display portion 37a to the stop display is also called the first variation time, and the second symbol display portion 37b The time from the start of the variable display of the second symbol to be displayed until the stop display is also called a second variable time.

The special figure unit 37 is further provided with a first pending display portion 37c and a second pending display portion 37d, which are LED lamps, at positions adjacent to the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b. In this embodiment, up to four game balls entered into the first starting port 33 are reserved. The first reservation display portion 37c displays the number of reservations for the first starting port 33 according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be lit. Further, in the present embodiment, up to four game balls entered into the second starting port 34 are reserved. The second reservation display part 37d displays the number of reservations of the second starting port 34 according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be lit.

The normal figure unit 38 is composed of a light-emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. The normal figure unit 38, when the electric accessary item open lottery triggered by the passage of the through gate 35 is performed, causes the light-emitting display to display in a lighting display, a blinking display, or a predetermined mode. When the electric accessory open lottery ends, the normal figure unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The round display section 39 is composed of a light-emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games that occur in the open/close execution mode or displays corresponding thereto. A round game means that either a predetermined upper limit duration time elapses or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls enter the variable winning device 36 until either condition is met. It is a game in which the door 36b is kept open. The number of round games varies depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the shift. The round display unit 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the opening/closing execution mode is started, and ends when the opening/closing execution mode is finished and a new game is started.

In addition, the special figure unit 37, the general figure unit 38, and the round display unit 39 are not limited to being configured by a segment display device or a light emitting display device using an LED lamp. It may consist of various display devices capable of showing the draw in progress and the draw results, such as a CRT or dot matrix display.

The variable display unit 40 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area PA. The variable display unit 40 has a pattern display device 41 . The pattern display device 41 has a liquid crystal display. The display contents of the pattern display device 41 are controlled by the display control device 100 . The pattern display device 41 may be replaced with various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

When the first symbol display unit 37a performs variable display or predetermined display based on the ball entering the first starting port 33, the symbol display device 41 performs variable display or predetermined display of the symbols accordingly. In addition, when the second symbol display unit 37b performs a variable display or a predetermined display based on the ball entering the second starting port 34, the symbol display device 41 displays the symbol in a variable display or a predetermined display accordingly. conduct. The symbol display device 41 performs not only the display performance triggered by the entry of the ball into the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, but also the display performance during the opening/closing execution mode that shifts when the jackpot is won. . Details of the pattern display device 41 will be described below.

FIG. 145 is an explanatory diagram showing the symbols that are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41 and the display surface 41a. FIG. 145(a) is an explanatory diagram showing symbols that are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41. FIG. As shown in FIG. 145(a), the symbol display device 41 variably displays symbols representing numbers 1-8. As the symbols to be variably displayed, symbols such as characters may be added to the symbols representing the numbers 1 to 8. FIG.

FIG. 145(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. As shown in FIG. As shown in the figure, the display surface 41a displays three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 on the left, middle and right. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the symbols of numbers 1 to 8 shown in FIG. A variable display that scrolls upward is performed. As shown in FIG. 145(b), after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol row is displayed in a stationary state on the activated line L. As shown in FIG. Specifically, when a game ball enters the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, a variable display is started in which the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are cyclically scrolled in a predetermined direction. Then, the symbols to be scrolled are switched from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol row Z1, the symbol row Z3, and the symbol row Z2, and finally, the predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. . When the variable display of symbols is finished and the display is stopped, and when the result of the winning lottery by the main control device 60 is a big win, a predetermined predetermined combination of symbols is displayed on the activated line L. It is formed. For example, a combination of the same symbols is formed on the activated line L. The pattern display device 41 is not limited to the above-described patterns, but the number of pattern rows, the number of active lines, the direction of pattern display variation in the pattern rows, and the patterns in each pattern row. Various modes can be adopted for the mode of variable display of symbols such as numbers.

Here, the "game cycle" means the period from the start of the variable display of the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b to the end of the variable display and the stop display until the end of the stop display. In other words, it is one unit of processing for notifying the player of the lottery result of the winning lottery for the special information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34. be. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one winning lottery for one piece of special information for each game. When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires the special information based on the entry of the game ball into either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the first symbol display unit In either one of the 37a or the second pattern display portion 37b, after the segment display is variably displayed, the segment display is stop-displayed so that the display corresponds to the lottery result of the acquired special information. In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment acquires the special information based on the entry of the game ball into either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the symbol display device At 41, after the predetermined symbol row is variably displayed, the symbol row is stopped and displayed so as to correspond to the lottery result of the acquired special information. In addition, the time required for one game round is also called unit game time. The unit playing time is composed of a variable time, which is the time from when the variable display is started until the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed, and a stop time, which is the time when the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed. there is

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 145(b), below the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, there are a first starting opening reservation area Ds1, a reserved digestion area Dm, and a second starting opening reservation area Ds2. is displayed. The reserved digestion area Dm is displayed in the center of the display surface 41a in the left-right direction, the first start opening reservation area Ds1 is displayed on the left side of the reservation digestion area Dm, and the second start opening reservation area Ds2 is displayed in the reservation digestion area Dm. displayed on the right. In the first start opening reservation area Ds1, the number of reserved balls based on the entry of game balls into the first start opening 33 is displayed. In the second starting opening reservation area Ds2, the number of reserved balls based on the entry of game balls into the second starting opening 34 is displayed. In this embodiment, as described above, the maximum number of game balls entered into the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 is four. The details of the operation of the first starting opening reservation area Ds1, the second starting opening reservation area Ds2, and the reservation digestion area Dm will be described in detail later.

As shown in FIG. 144, a pair of nails (so-called life nails, navel nails) 42 (42a, 42b) are provided above the first starting port 33. As shown in FIG. The probability of the game ball entering the first starting port 33 changes depending on the spacing between the pair of nails 42a and 42b.

<<4-2>> Electrical Configuration of Gaming Machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described using a block diagram.

FIG. 146 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 10 mainly includes a main controller 60 , a sound emission control device 90 , and a display control device 100 .

The main controller 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main game. The main control board 61 has an MPU 62 composed of elements having multiple functions. The MPU 62 includes a CPU (not shown) that executes various control programs, a ROM 63 that records various control programs and fixed value data, and temporarily stores various data when executing the programs recorded in the ROM 63. and a RAM 64, which is a memory for storing. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. A part of the functions of the MPU 62 may be provided by another element. Details of various areas provided in the ROM 63 and RAM 64 will be described later.

The main control board 61 is provided with an input port (not shown) and an output port (not shown). An input port of the main control board 61 is connected to a payout control device 70 and a power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in a power supply device 85 . The main control board 61 is supplied with stable 24 V DC power from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86 . The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power supply as an external power supply, and converts the external power supplied from the commercial power supply into the operating power required by the main control device 60, the payout control device 70, etc., to each device supply power. The power supply device 85 is equipped with a capacitor (not shown), and in the event of a power failure or the power switch 88 (FIG. 143) being turned off, continues to supply power to each device for a predetermined period of time. do.

Various detection sensors 67 a to 67 e are connected to the input port of the main control board 61 . Specifically, it is connected to a plurality of detection sensors provided at various ball entry openings such as the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, the through gate 35, and the variable winning apparatus 36. . The MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether or not the game ball flowing down the game area PA enters each ball entrance based on the signals from the various detection sensors 67a to 67e, and determines whether the game ball enters the through gate. It is determined whether or not 35 has been passed. Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 and the second start port 34, and executes the electric accessory release lottery based on the entry of the ball into the through gate 35. do.

The output port of the main control board 61 is provided with a variable winning driving unit 36c that opens and closes the open/close door 36b of the variable winning device 36, and an electric accessory driving unit 34b that opens and closes the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34. , and the main display unit 45 are connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning driving section 36c so that the opening/closing door 36b is opened/closed. Further, as a result of the electric accessory opening lottery, when the electric role opening is won, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 34b so that the electric accessory 34a is released. In each game round, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b in the main display portion 45. FIG. Further, when the jackpot type is determined in the opening/closing execution mode and the number of round games to be executed in the opening/closing execution mode is determined, display control of the round display section 39 in the main display section 45 is executed.

A payout control device 70 and a sound emission control device 90 are connected to the output port of the main control board 61 . A prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 70 from the main control device 60 based on the winning judgment result, for example. When the main controller 60 transmits the prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63. FIG. Specifically, when entering the ball into the general winning hole 32 is specified, a winning ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is transmitted from the main controller 60, and the ball enters the first starting hole 33. is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is transmitted from the main controller 60, and when entering the second start port 34 is specified, one game ball is paid out A prize ball command corresponding to is transmitted from the main controller 60 . The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 based on the prize ball command received from the main controller 60 to pay out prize balls.

A discharge control device 80 is connected to the payout control device 70 . The shooting control device 80 controls shooting of the game ball shooting mechanism 81 . The game ball shooting mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined shooting conditions are met. Also, the operation handle 25 and the game ball shooting button 26 are connected to the shooting control device 80 .

The sound emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60 and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main controller 60 transmits various commands, the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63 is referred to. Details of these various commands are described later.

In addition, based on various commands received from the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90 controls the driving of various lamps 47 composed of light emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the front door frame 14, and the driving control of the speaker 46. and control the display control device 100 . Also, the effect operation button 24 is connected to the sound emission control device 90, and when the effect operation button 24 is operated by the player at a predetermined timing, a game effect reflecting the operation is performed. It controls the various lamps 47, the speaker 46, the display control device 100, and the like.

The display control device 100 executes display control of the pattern display device 41 based on various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 . Specifically, the display control device 100, based on the various commands received from the sound emission control device 90, grasps the fluctuation time of the pattern in the pattern display device 41 and the type of combination of patterns to be finally stopped and displayed. , presence/absence of occurrence of ready-to-win, contents of ready-to-win effect, contents of notice effect to be executed in each game cycle, and the like are grasped. In this embodiment, the stop time, which is the time during which the combination of symbols is stopped and displayed, is constant. Therefore, by determining the variable time, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game, is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

FIG. 147 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used for a winning lottery or the like. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 sets the winning lottery, the setting of the display of the main display section 45, the setting of the pattern display of the pattern display device 41, and the like. Specifically, a jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery. A jackpot type counter C2 is used when sorting the jackpot types such as probability variable jackpot results and normal jackpot results. A ready-to-win random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not to generate a ready-to-win when the symbol row displayed on the symbol display device 41 is changed.

A random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Further, when determining the variation time in the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b of the main display portion 45 and the symbol display device 41, a variation type counter CS is used. Furthermore, the electric accessory opening counter C4 is used for the electric accessory opening lottery for determining whether or not the electric accessory 34a of the second start port 34 is to be opened.

Each of the counters C1 to C4, CINI, and CS is a loop counter that adds 1 to the counter value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. FIG.

The RAM 64 is provided with a pending information storage area 64b and a determination processing execution area 64c. The reservation information storage area 64b is provided with a first reservation area Ra and a second reservation area Rb. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 at the timing of the ball is set to the first It is stored chronologically in the reservation area Ra. In addition, when the game ball enters the second start port 34, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 at the timing of the ball entering the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b stored in chronological order.

Details of the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. The jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery as described above. The jackpot random number counter C1 is, for example, configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 1199 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. When the jackpot random number counter C1 completes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 1199).

The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry when the game ball enters the first start port 33. When a game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entry.

The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first reservation area Ra is moved to the execution area AE of the judgment processing execution area 64c, and is collated with the hit/fail table stored in the hit/fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. It is determined whether or not In addition, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second reservation area Rb moves to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c, and is compared with the success/failure table stored in the success/failure table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, It is determined whether or not it will be a big hit.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb is By doing so, it moves to the execution area AE of the judgment processing execution area 64c in the order acquired. Then, the jackpot random number counter C1 moved to the execution area AE is collated with the hit/fail table stored in the hit/fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and it is determined whether or not there will be a jackpot.

Next, the details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining the jackpot type. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented one by one within the range of 0 to 99 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry when the game ball enters the first start port 33. When the game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c, and when the result of the winning lottery is a jackpot, the determination processing execution area 64c The jackpot type is determined using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in . Furthermore, the MPU 62 uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to determine the display mode of the segment display device that is stopped and displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b. . The stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referred to for the determination.

Next, details of the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is used when determining whether or not a reach occurs when the result of the winning lottery is not a big win. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the first start port 33, and the second start port 34. It is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters. After the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first reservation area Ra is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c, it is compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63, and the reach occurs. After the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the second reservation area Rb is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c, it is compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63, and the reach occurs. However, when the result of the winning lottery is a big win and the game shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 determines the occurrence of reach regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

The ready-to-win means that, for some of the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41, there is a possibility that a combination of symbols corresponding to a big win will be established, and some combinations of symbols are stopped. It refers to a display state in which symbols are displayed and the remaining symbol rows are displayed in a variable manner. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the combination of symbols corresponding to the big win refers to the combination of the same symbols on a predetermined pay line. As a specific example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of FIG. A ready-to-win state is achieved by forming a ready-to-win line and performing variable display of symbols in the symbol row Z2 when the ready-to-win line is formed. Then, when a big win occurs, the same symbols as the symbols forming the reach line are stop-displayed in the symbol row Z2.

In addition, in the ready-to-win state, while the ready-to-win line is formed, the patterns are displayed in the remaining pattern rows in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen to create a ready-to-win effect. It includes a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a after displaying a combination of patterns in which a reach line is formed in a reduced size or not. In addition, when the ready-to-win effect is being performed or before the ready-to-win display is performed, the determination of whether or not to perform a notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character is performed using the reach-to-win random number counter C3 or other counters. may

Next, details of the fluctuation type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the variation time in the first symbol display portion 37 a and the second symbol display portion 37 b and the symbol variation time in the symbol display device 41 . The fluctuation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in sequence within a range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once each time a normal process, which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of variation display in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b and at the start of symbol variation by the symbol display device 41. The variable time table stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is used when determining the variable time in the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b.

Next, the details of the electric accessory release counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory release counter C4 is, for example, configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 465 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated, and stored in the electric role holding area 64d of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the through gate 35. - 特許庁Then, at a predetermined timing, after the value of the electric role product open counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 64d moves to the electric role execution area 64e, the value of the electric role product open counter C4 is displayed in the electric role execution area 64e. A lottery (hereinafter referred to as an electric accessory open lottery) is performed as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to the open state. Specifically, in the electric role execution area 64e, the winning/failure table (electric role lottery winning/failure table) stored in the role lottery table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 and the value of the electric role lottery counter C4 are different. It is collated, and it is determined whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to the open state.

At least one of the obtained value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, and the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 corresponds to the special information in the present invention. In addition, at least one of the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, and the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first reservation area Ra and the second reservation area Rb is also called reservation information.

Next, the success/failure table will be described. The success/failure table is table data for matching with the big-hit random number counter C1 when performing a winning lottery based on the big-hit random number counter C1. A low-probability mode and a high-probability mode are set in the pachinko machine 10 as a lottery mode for a winning lottery. In the winning lottery in the probability mode, the success/failure table for the high probability mode is referred to. High-probability mode (also called high-probability gaming state) is a gaming state that is started by winning a variable probability jackpot, and the probability of winning a jackpot in a winning lottery is relatively higher than the low-probability mode. To tell.

FIG. 148 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the success/failure table. FIG. 148(a) shows the success/failure table for the low-probability mode (for the low-probability mode), and FIG. 148(b) shows the success/failure table for the high-probability mode.

As shown in FIG. 148(a), in the success/failure table for the low-probability mode, five values of 0 to 4 are set as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 for the jackpot. Of the values from 0 to 1199, the values (5 to 1199) other than the five values from 0 to 4 are outliers. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 148(b), 16 values from 0 to 15 are set in the success/failure table for the high-probability mode as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Of the values from 0 to 1199, the values (16 to 1199) other than the 16 values from 0 to 15 are outliers. In this way, the high-probability mode has a higher probability of winning a big win in the winning lottery than the low-probability mode.

Further, in the present embodiment, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as the jackpot in the hit/fail table for the low-probability mode is the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as the jackpot in the hit/fail table for the high-probability mode. included in the group. However, as long as the probability of winning a big win in the high-probability mode is higher than in the low-probability mode as a result of the winning lottery, the number and value of the random numbers set as the big wins are arbitrary.

It should be noted that a "small win" may be provided as a result of the winning lottery, although it is not used in the win/fail table in this embodiment.

A "minor win" is a success/fail result that triggers a transition to the opening/closing execution mode in which the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is executed, but does not trigger a transition for both the lottery mode and the support mode. . On the other hand, "miss" is a pass/fail result that does not trigger the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, nor does it trigger the transition to the lottery mode and the support mode.

Next, the jackpot type will be described. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set in the pachinko machine 10. - 特許庁Specifically, for example, by providing differences in the following three aspects or modes, it is possible to set a plurality of types of jackpots.
(1) Aspect of opening/closing control of variable winning device 36 in opening/closing execution mode (2) Lottery mode for winning lottery after completion of opening/closing execution mode (3) Electric accessory 34a of second start port 34 after completion of opening/closing execution mode Support mode

In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the above-mentioned (1) opening/closing execution mode, the occurrence of winning balls to the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode. A high-frequency winning mode and a low-frequency winning mode can be set so that the frequencies are relatively high and low. For example, in the high frequency winning mode, the opening and closing door 36b is opened and closed a plurality of times (for example, 16 times) from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode, and one opening is performed until 30 seconds elapses or to the opening and closing door 36b. It can be set to continue until the number of hit balls reaches 10. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening and closing door 36b is opened and closed twice from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode, and one opening is until 0.2 sec elapses or a ball enters the opening and closing door 36b. It can be set to continue until the number reaches six.

When the operation handle 25 is operated by the player, the game ball shooting mechanism 81 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is shot toward the game area PA every 0.6 sec. In the case of the above specific example, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of the opening/closing door 36b is 0.2 sec. In other words, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of the open/close door 36b is shorter than the shooting cycle of the game ball. Therefore, in the opening and closing execution mode related to the low-frequency winning mode, substantially no game balls enter. However, even in the opening and closing execution mode related to the low-frequency winning mode, it may be set so that the game ball can enter.

The number of times of opening and closing the opening/closing door 36b, the limit time for one opening, and the limit number of openings for one opening are determined by the variable winning device 36 during the period from the start of the opening/closing execution mode to the end of the opening/closing execution mode. As long as the frequency of ball occurrence is higher in the high-frequency winning mode than in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening mode of the opening/closing door 36b is arbitrary. Specifically, if the high frequency winning mode has more opening and closing times than the low frequency winning mode, the opening limit time for one opening is longer, or the opening limit number for one opening is set more good. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, in the open/close execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode, substantially no winning ball to the variable winning device 36 may occur.

The pachinko machine 10 has a high-probability mode in which a winning lottery is performed using a high-probability win-or-fail table as a win-or-fail table, and a win-fail table as a win-or-fail table. A low-probability mode in which a winning lottery is performed using a low-probability success/failure table can be set. As described with reference to FIG. 148, when a winning lottery is performed using a high-probability success/failure table, a winning lottery is more likely to be won than when a winning lottery is performed using a low-probability success/failure table. likely to.

In the pachinko machine 10, as a form of the support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the end of the above-mentioned (3) opening and closing execution mode, shooting of game balls continues in a similar form to the game area PA. A high-frequency support mode and a low-frequency support mode are selected so that the frequency of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 being in the open state per unit time is relatively high or low when compared in the situation where can be set.

Specifically, the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode have different probabilities of winning the electric role open lottery in the electric role item opening lottery using the electric role item opening counter C4. In the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role open lottery in the electric accessory open lottery is made higher than in the low frequency support mode. In addition, in the high-frequency support mode, the opening time of the electric accessory 34a may be set longer than in the low-frequency support mode when the electric role opening winning is won.

Although not adopted in the present embodiment, in the high frequency support mode, the number of times the electric accessory 34a is in the open state when the electric accessory 34a is elected is set higher than in the low frequency support mode. good too. Furthermore, it may be configured such that the electric accessory 34a is set to have a long opening time once. In addition, in the high-frequency support mode, in the case where the open state of the electric accessory 34a occurs multiple times due to the electric role open winning, the closing time from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state is , may be set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the time secured from one electric accessory open lottery to the next electric accessory open lottery is set to be relatively shorter than in the low-frequency support mode. may

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of a ball entering the second starting port 34 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. That is, the high-frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary game state that assists establishment of special information acquisition conditions.

In the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won as a result of the winning lottery, the jackpot type is sorted using the jackpot type counter C2. The distribution of the jackpot types corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63 as a distribution table.

FIG. 149 is an explanatory diagram of the contents of the allocation table. FIG. 149(a) shows the distribution table for the first start port, and FIG. 149(b) shows the distribution table for the second start port. The distribution table for the first start port is referred to during a winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33, and the distribution table for the second start port is referred to the second start port 34. It is referred to during the winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball.

As shown in the distribution table for the first start port in FIG. 149(a), the distribution table for the first start port includes, as jackpot types based on the entry of a game ball into the first start port 33, A 16R probability variable jackpot, an 8R probability variable jackpot, a 16R normal jackpot, and an 8R normal jackpot are set.

In the 16R probability variable jackpot and the 8R probability variable jackpot, the mode of opening and closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode, and the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the end of the opening and closing execution mode (hereinafter simply “lottery mode”). ) is a high-probability mode, and the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode is a high-frequency support mode. The difference between the 16R variable variable jackpot and the 8R variable variable jackpot is that the number of openings of the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode is different, the 16R variable variable jackpot is 16 times (16 rounds), and the 8R variable variable jackpot is 8. times (8 rounds).

In the 16R normal jackpot and the 8R normal jackpot, the mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode, the lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends is the low-probability mode, and the opening/closing execution mode is selected. It is a jackpot in which the support mode after the end is the high-frequency support mode. The difference between the 16R normal jackpot and the 8R normal jackpot is that the number of openings of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is different, the 16R normal jackpot is 16 times (16 rounds), and the 8R normal jackpot is 8 times. times (8 rounds).

In the distribution table for the first start port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 99", "0 to 39" corresponds to the 16R probability variable jackpot, and "40 to 64" corresponds to the 8R probability variable jackpot. , "65 to 89" corresponds to the 16R normal jackpot, and "90 to 99" corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, four types of jackpots are set as the types of jackpots. Therefore, the aspect of the jackpot is diversified. When these four types of jackpots are compared, the degree of advantage for the player is the highest for the 16R variable variable jackpot, the next highest for the 8R variable variable jackpot, followed by the 16R normal jackpot, and finally the 8R normal jackpot. By thus setting a plurality of types of jackpots with different degrees of advantage for the player, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous and increase the degree of attention to the game.

As shown in the distribution table for the second starting port in FIG. A 16R probability variable jackpot and an 8R normal jackpot are set. In the distribution table for the second start port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 99", "0 to 64" corresponds to the 16R probability variable jackpot, and "65 to 99" corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot. corresponds to

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won, the type of jackpot is distributed based on the ball entering the first start port 33 and when the jackpot is won. It is different from the case of winning a jackpot based on the entry of the ball into the starting hole 34, and a clear difference is provided in the advantage for the player.

In addition, when the winning lottery results in a loss, the mode is not changed to the opening/closing execution mode, and the lottery mode and the support mode are not changed. In the sorting of the types of jackpots, if a 16 probability variable jackpot or an 8R probability variable jackpot is obtained, as described above, the lottery mode after the end of the opening and closing execution mode becomes a high probability mode, but this high probability mode The state is continued until the next big win is won in the winning lottery.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, and the jackpot type using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. However, the MPU 62 further uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to stop and display the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b. Determine the display mode. The stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referred to for the determination.

FIG. 150 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the success/failure table (electric accessary product open lottery success/failure table) used when executing the electric accessary product open lottery.

FIG. 150(a) shows a success/failure table (for low-frequency support mode) for electric accessory open lottery used in low-frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 150(a), in the electric accessory open lottery success/failure table (for low frequency support mode), there are two values of 0 and 1 for the electric accessory open counter C4 that will win the electric role open winning. A value is set. 464 values from 2 to 465 are set as the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4 to be out. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 in the low-frequency support mode and the electric accessary item open lottery is executed, the electric role open lottery is won with a probability of 1/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric role opening win is made in the low-frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.4 seconds.

FIG. 150(b) shows a success/failure table (for high-frequency support mode) for electric accessory open lottery used in high-frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 150(b), in the success/failure table for the electric accessory open lottery (for high frequency support mode), there are 462 values of 0 to 461 as the value of the electric accessory open counter C4 that will win the electric role open winning. A value is set. Four values of 462 to 465 are set as the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4 that is out. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 in the high-frequency support mode and the electric accessory open lottery is executed, the electric role open lottery is won with a probability of 231/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric role opening win is made in the high-frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.6 seconds.

In this way, the success/failure table for the electric accessory open lottery is set so that the high-frequency support mode has a higher probability of the game ball entering the second start port 34 than the low-frequency support mode. .

<<4-3>> Electrical Configuration of Audio Light Emitting Control Device and Display Control Device:
Next, electrical configurations of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 151 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. As shown in FIG. A part of the configuration such as the power supply device 85 (FIG. 146) is omitted. An MPU 92 is mounted on an audio emission control board 91 provided in the audio emission control device 90 . The MPU 92 is a device containing a CPU, a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like.

The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables, and the like. For example, part of the area of the ROM 93 is provided with an effect pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like. Details of these will be described later.

The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the ROM 93 . For example, a part of the area of the RAM 94 is provided with various flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, and the like. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 92, and they may be individually integrated into chips.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port. The input side of the MPU 92 is connected to the main control device 60 and the effect operation button 24 . Various commands are received from the main controller 60 . A speaker 46 and various lamps 47 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92, and the display control device 100 is also connected.

The display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102, which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are integrated into chips, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. is installed. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 102, and they may be individually integrated into chips.

The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, to generate internal commands for the VDP 105). .

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and also stores JPEG format image data for background images.

A work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when various programs are executed by the MPU 102 .

The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the pattern display device 41 . The VDP 105 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is an IC chip, and is a kind of microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, etc., and intervenes in the reading and writing of data.

The character ROM 106 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as designs and pictures displayed on the design display device 41 . The character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display patterns and display pictures, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. The various display pictorial diagrams also include pictorial diagrams of petals P1 to P4, which will be described later. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 106 . It is also possible to configure the character ROM 106 to store the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 .

The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, and by rewriting the content of the video RAM 107, the display content of the pattern display device 41 is changed.

Hereinafter, the MPU 62, ROM 63, and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main MPU 62, main ROM 63, and main RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the sound emission control device 90 are referred to as the sound and light side MPU 92 and the sound and light side, respectively. The ROM 93 and the sound/light side RAM 94 are also called, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also called the display side MPU 102 .

<<4-4>> Outline of Processing by Gaming Machine:
Next, an overview of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as described above, below the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, there is a first start indicating the number of pending game balls based on the number of game balls entered into the first start opening 33. A mouth reservation area Ds1, a second start opening reservation area Ds2 indicating the number of reservations based on the number of game balls entering the second start opening 34, a first start opening reservation area Ds1 and a second start opening reservation A reserved digestion region Dm located between regions Ds2 is displayed.

FIG. 152 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of changes in the first start opening reservation area Ds1 and the reservation digestion area Dm. In the first start opening reservation area Ds1, up to four reservation display icons corresponding to each reservation (each of up to four reservations) based on the entry of the game ball into the first start opening 33 are arranged in the horizontal direction. Is displayed. In the present embodiment, the pending display icon is circular, and in the example shown in FIG. A display icon H2 is shown. In the first start opening reservation area Ds1, the first reservation display icon H1 is displayed at the rightmost position, and the second reservation display icon H2 is displayed at the second position from the right side to the left side. That is, in the first start opening reservation area Ds1, each time a game ball enters the first start opening 33, the reservation display icon is displayed so as to increase one by one from the right side to the left side.

The reserved digestion area Dm is a trapezoid whose upper base is longer than its lower base. In the example shown in FIG. 152(a), the suspended display icon H0 is placed on the upper part of the reserved digestion area Dm. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a winning lottery is performed when a ball enters the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, and a variable display is performed to notify the result of the winning lottery. At the timing when this variable display is started, the pending display icon is placed on the upper portion of the pending digestion area Dm. This variable display is based on the hold (hold information) corresponding to the hold display icon H0 placed above the hold digest area Dm. The player can know that the suspension corresponding to the suspension display icon H0 is completed by observing that the suspension display icon H0 is placed on the upper part of the suspension completion area Dm.

In the state shown in FIG. 152(a), when the variable display ends and the display is stopped, the pending display icon H0 placed above the pending digestion area Dm disappears. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 152(b), the first reservation display icon H1 located on the rightmost side in the first start opening reservation area Ds1 moves to the upper part of the reservation digestion area Dm. At this time, the second reservation display icon H2 positioned second from the right side moves (shifts) to the rightmost position in the first start opening reservation area Ds1. In the example shown in FIG. 152(b), the third and fourth pending display icons from the right to the left do not exist, but if they exist, the third pending display icon moves (shifts) to the second position, and the fourth positioned pending display icon moves (shifts) to the third position.

As a result of the movement shown in FIG. 152(b), the state shown in FIG. 152(c) is obtained. That is, the first reservation display icon H1 is placed on the upper portion of the reservation digestion area Dm, and the second reservation display icon H2 is displayed at the rightmost position of the first start opening reservation area Ds1. At this time, a variable display for notifying the result of the winning lottery based on the reservation (reservation information) corresponding to the first reservation display icon H1 is executed.

As described above, each time the variable display and the stop display corresponding to one game round are executed, each holding display icon displayed in the first start opening holding area Ds1 shifts from the left side to the right side. , eventually move from the rightmost position to the top of the retained digestion region Dm. Then, variable display and stop display for informing the result of the winning lottery based on the reservation information corresponding to the reservation display icon are executed. In this way, in each of the holding display icons displayed in the first start opening holding area Ds1, the holding information corresponding to each holding display icon is arranged in the order from the right side to the left side (that is, the order of holding). Subject to lottery.

FIG. 153 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of changes in the second start opening retention area Ds2 and the retention digestion area Dm. In the second starting opening reservation area Ds2, up to four holding display icons H corresponding to each holding (each of up to four holdings) based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34 are arranged in the horizontal direction. is displayed. The manner of change of the second starting opening reservation area Ds2 is roughly the same as the manner of change of the first starting opening reservation area Ds1 shown in FIG. The direction is opposite to that of Ds1. That is, each time a game ball enters the second starting hole 34, the pending display icon H is displayed so as to increase one by one from the left side to the right side. Each time a game round is executed, the pending display icon H moves one by one from the right side to the left side in the second start opening pending region Ds2, and finally moves to the upper part of the pending digestion region Dm to display the pending display. Fluctuation display and stop display for announcing the result of the winning lottery based on the hold (hold information) corresponding to the icon H are executed. In this way, in each of the holding display icons displayed in the second start opening holding area Ds2, the holding information corresponding to each holding display icon is arranged in the order from left to right (that is, the order of holding). Subject to lottery.

The holding display icons displayed in the first starting opening holding area Ds1 and the second starting opening holding area Ds2 were circular as described above, but instead of this, triangles, squares, pentagons, etc. Other polygonal shapes are also possible. Further, the pending display icon is not limited to a graphical image, and may be an image of a character or the like. Although the reserved digestion area Dm was trapezoidal as described above, it may be an image of other shapes such as triangles, squares, circles, etc. instead. Further, the reserved digestion area Dm is not limited to a graphic image, and may be an image of a character or the like. Further, in the present embodiment, the reservation display icon moved from the first start opening reservation area Ds1 or the second start opening reservation area Ds2 to the reservation digestion area Dm is configured to be placed on the upper part of the reservation digestion area Dm. However, instead of this, it may be displayed in such a manner that it disappears after entering the reserved digestion area Dm.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, each pending display icon can take a plurality of display modes. In this embodiment, the display mode of the pending display icon is configured to suggest the possibility of winning a big win in the winning lottery. Specifically, the value of the big win random number counter C1 included in the holding information corresponding to each holding display icon indicates the possibility of winning a big win in a winning lottery by the display mode of each holding display icon. Specifically, as the display mode of each pending display icon, a plurality of stages of display modes from high to low are set according to the level of the possibility. As the display mode of the pending display icon becomes higher (ranked up) in a plurality of stages, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the pending display icon suggests a high possibility of winning a jackpot in a winning lottery. .

FIG. 154 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display mode of the pending display icon set in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment. As shown in the figure, the display mode of the pending display icon is set in a plurality of stages from high to low corresponding to the probability of winning a big win in the winning lottery. In the present embodiment, the display mode of the pending display icon is divided into five levels in order from the top: display level Lvr5, display level Lvr4, display level Lvr3, display level Lvr2, and display level Lvr1. The higher the display level Lvr is, the higher the possibility of winning the jackpot.

In this embodiment, the display mode corresponding to each display level Lvr is expressed in color. Specifically, display level Lvr5 is gold, display level Lvr4 is red, display level Lvr3 is green, display level Lvr2 is blue, and display level Lvr1 is white. In addition, the display mode corresponding to each display level Lvr is not limited to the mode represented by color, and may be, for example, a mode represented by a pattern, a mode represented by a shape, a mode represented by a character, or the like. Various display modes can be adopted as long as the differences between the display levels Lvr are expressed in a mode that can be recognized by a person.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, an effect of changing the display mode of the pending display icon described above is executed. For example, an effect of changing a white pending display icon to blue, an effect of changing a blue pending display icon to green, and the like are executed. In the present embodiment, the execution of this effect is triggered by attaching a flower petal, which is a type of effect image displayed on the pattern display device 41, to the pending display icon.

FIG. 155 is an explanatory diagram showing how flower petals are displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. FIG. As illustrated, a large number of flower petals are displayed on the entire display surface 41a. Each petal moves (falls) as if dancing from the top to the bottom. In this embodiment, each petal is classified into one of the first type petal P1, the second type petal P2, the third type petal P3, and the fourth type petal P4.

FIG. 156 is an explanatory diagram showing a method of displaying the first to fourth kinds of petals P1 to P4. In this embodiment, the display on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 is arranged on the background layer L1 for displaying the background and the upper side (front side) of the background layer L1. area Ds1, reservation digestion area Dm, second start opening reservation area Ds2 (FIG. 155), and a pattern row layer L2 for displaying, and an upper layer L3 arranged above (front side) the pattern row layer L2 , is performed by a layer structure having at least

The first type petal P1 is displayed on the background layer L1. In this embodiment, the period from when the demo image is displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 to when the player is playing the game is set as a predetermined period, and during this predetermined period, a plurality of images are repeatedly displayed. The configuration is such that the first type petal P1 is displayed on the background layer L1. As a result, at least while the player is playing the game, a plurality (many) of the first type petals P1 are repeatedly displayed on the display surface 41a. In place of this configuration, the predetermined period may not include the period of the jackpot effect that is executed when the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery. According to this configuration, the first type petal P1 is not displayed during the big win effect.

The first type petal P1 moves in various directions. The first kind petal P1 is displayed on the background layer L1, and flows under the pattern row when the position overlaps with the pattern row displayed on the pattern row layer L2. The first type petal P1 is for making the display surface 41a lively, and has no other function. A plurality of first-type petals P1 are displayed, but only one may be displayed.

Petals other than the first type petal P1, that is, the second type petal P2, the third type petal P3, and the fourth type petal P4 are displayed on the upper layer L3.

In this embodiment, the period from when the demo image is displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 to when the player is playing the game is set as a predetermined period, and during this predetermined period, a plurality of images are repeatedly displayed. The configuration is such that the second type petal P2 is displayed on the upper layer L3. As a result, at least while the player is playing the game, a plurality (many) of the second type petals P2 are repeatedly displayed on the display surface 41a. In place of this configuration, the predetermined period may not include the period of the jackpot effect that is executed when the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery. According to this configuration, the second type petal P2 is not displayed during the big win effect.

The multiple second type petals P2 move in various directions. The second kind petal P2 is displayed on the upper layer L3, and flows over the pattern row when the position overlaps with the pattern row displayed on the pattern row layer L2. The second type petal P2 is for making the display surface 41a lively, and has no other function. Although a plurality of second type petals P2 are displayed, only one may be displayed.

The third type petal P3 is the first starting opening retaining third type petal P31 that moves so as to dance from the upper side toward the first starting opening retaining area Ds1 on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, and the display surface 41a. and the second starting opening retaining third type petal P32 that dances toward the second starting opening retaining area Ds2 from above. The third type petal P31 for first start opening reservation functions to execute an effect of changing the display mode of the reservation display icon displayed in the first start opening reservation area Ds1. The second starting opening holding third type petal P32 functions to execute an effect of changing the display mode of the holding display icon displayed in the second starting opening holding area Ds2. The third type petal P31 for retaining the first starting opening and the third type petal P32 for retaining the second starting opening will be described later in detail.

The fourth type petal P4 moves from the upper side of the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 toward the pattern row in a game round won in a specific lottery process (petal re-fluctuation lottery process), and moves to the pattern row. adhere to. The pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment executes an effect of changing the variable display of the symbol row when the fourth type petal P4 is attached to the symbol row. The movement of the fourth type petal P4 and the effect will be described later in detail.

In this embodiment, the 1st to 4th petals P1 to P4 are composed of the same pictorial diagram. Since the petals P1 to P4 move while changing their directions, their shapes and sizes vary, but they are composed of the same picture as a whole. Therefore, the player cannot identify the types of the 1st to 4th petals P1 to P4. If it is difficult for the player to identify the type, each of the first to fourth types of petals P1 to P4 does not necessarily have to be the same pictorial diagram, and may be composed of image data of different pictorial diagrams. may As a modification, the pictorial diagram of the third type petal P3 may be configured to be different from the pictorial diagrams of the other types of petals P1, P2, and P4. Since the third type petal P3 has a special function (a function of executing an effect of changing the display mode of the pending display icon) different from the function of making the display surface 41a lively, the special function is executed. In order to give the player a sense of anticipation, the picture of the third kind petal P3 can be intentionally made different from the pictures of the first kind petal P1, the second kind petal P2 and the fourth kind petal P4. . Furthermore, as a modification, the pictorial diagram of the fourth type petal P4 may be configured to be different from the pictorial diagrams of the other types of petals P1 to P3. Since the fourth kind petal P4 has a special function (a function of changing the pattern row again) different from the function of enlivening the display surface 41a, the player is expected to perform the special function. For this purpose, the pictorial diagram of the fourth kind petal P4 can be intentionally configured to be different from the pictorial diagrams of the first to third kind petals P1 to P3.

FIG. 157 is an explanatory diagram showing the behavior of the third type petal P3. The illustration shows the third type petal P31 for holding the first starting port among the third type petals P3. In the present embodiment, a maximum of four holding display icons are displayed in the first starting opening holding region Ds1, but four types of first starting opening holding third type petals P31 are prepared for each holding display icon. ing. The first starting opening holding third type petal P31 facing the first holding display icon H1 positioned on the rightmost side in the first starting opening holding area Ds1 is hereinafter referred to as the special 1/holding 1 petal Pa. The first starting opening holding third type petal P31 facing the second holding display icon H2 positioned second from the right side in the first starting opening holding area Ds1 is hereinafter referred to as the special 1/holding 2 petal Pb. The first starting opening holding third type petal P31 facing the third holding display icon H3 positioned third from the right side in the first starting opening holding area Ds1 is hereinafter referred to as the special 1/holding 3 petal Pc. The first starting opening holding third type petal P31 facing the fourth holding display icon H4 positioned fourth from the right side in the first starting opening holding area Ds1 is hereinafter referred to as the special 1/holding 4 petal Pd.

Petals for Special 1/suspension 1 to special 1/suspension 4 Petals Pa to Pd perform the same operation with only different pending display icons, so the operation of petals for Special 1/suspension 1 is representative. to explain.

The special 1/holding 1 petal Pa moves along one trajectory selected from three types of trajectories prepared in advance. The three types of trajectories are composed of a common route RA from a starting point R1 to a specific point R2, and individual routes RB1, RB2, and RB3 extending in separate directions from the specific point R2. The common route RA is longer than 80% of the total length of each track and extends close to the first pending display icon H1. The first individual route RB1 reaches the position of the first pending display icon H1. The second individual route RB2 reaches a position shifted to the right from the first reservation display icon H1. The third individual route RB3 reaches a position shifted to the left from the first reserved display icon H1. Of the three types of trajectories, the trajectory composed of the common route RA and the first individual route RB1 is hereinafter referred to as the target hold arrival trajectory. Of the three types of trajectories, the trajectory composed of the common route RA and the second individual route RB2 is hereinafter referred to as the first target non-reserved trajectory. Of the three types of trajectories, the trajectory composed of the common route RA and the third individual route RB3 is hereinafter referred to as the second target non-reserved trajectory. The end point of the target hold arrival trajectory is the display position of the hold display icon.

As the trajectory of the petal Pa for special 1 / hold 1, which of the target hold arrival trajectory, the first target non-hold trajectory, and the second target non-hold trajectory is adopted is determined by a specific lottery process ( petal trajectory lottery process). Instead of the lottery, the trajectory may be changed in order.

In the present embodiment, the length of time required for the petals to move along each of the target hold arrival trajectory, the first target hold non-hold trajectory, and the second target hold non-hold trajectory (arrival required time), for example, 10 seconds bottom. Also, the length of time required for the petals to move along the common route RA on each trajectory is 8.5 seconds, and the time required for the petals to move on the first to third individual routes RB1 to RB3 on each trajectory. The target length was set to 1.5 seconds. These time lengths are merely examples, and may be replaced with other numerical values.

Each of the special 1/suspension 2 petal Pb, the special 1/suspension 3 petal Pc, and the special 1/suspension 4 petal Pd is the same as the special 1/suspension 1 petal Pa described above, each of the petals Pb to Pd Move along one trajectory selected from the target hold arrival trajectory, the first target non-holding trajectory, and the second target non-holding trajectory provided corresponding to.

It has been explained that the petals Pa to Pd for Special 1/suspension 1 to Special 1/suspension 4 are directed to the corresponding suspension display icon. This is because it has been explained as existing within. Even when the corresponding reservation display icon does not exist in the first start opening reservation area Ds1, the special 1/hold 1 to special 1/hold 4 petals Pa to Pd are displayed in the same way as when they exist. . For example, when the value of the first reserved number counter is 2, and the third reserved display icon H3 and the fourth reserved display icon H4 do not exist in the first start opening reserved area Ds1, special 1 reserved The petal for 3 Pc moves toward the third position from the right in the first start opening reservation area Ds1 (that is, the position where the third reservation display icon H3 can be displayed), and the petal for special 1 and reservation 4 Pd moves toward the fourth position from the right in the first start opening reservation area Ds1 (that is, the position where the fourth reservation display icon H4 can be displayed). That is, whether or not the corresponding reservation display icon exists in the first start opening reservation area Ds1, the display of the special 1/hold 1 to special 1/hold 4 petals Pa to Pd is started and the special There is no difference in the trajectories of the petals Pa to Pd for 1. Retention 1 to Special 1. Retention 4. In other words, the petals Pa to Pd for Special 1/Reservation 1 to Special 1/Reservation 4 are displayed regardless of whether or not the reservation display icon exists at the display position for displaying the corresponding reservation display icon. Move towards the display position.

FIG. 158 is an explanatory diagram showing the appearance of the first hold display icon H1 when the special 1/hold 1 petal Pa moves along the target hold arrival trajectory. The special 1/reservation 1 petal Pa that has been elected to adopt the target retention arrival trajectory in the petal trajectory lottery process and has proceeded from the common route RA to the first individual route RB1 is as shown in FIG. 158(a). Move the first individual route RB1 toward the first pending display icon H1. Then, as shown in FIG. 158(b), the special 1/reservation 1 petal Pa reaches the first reservation display icon H1. After arrival, the special 1/suspension 1 petal Pa remains on the first suspension display icon H1 for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds). As a result, the player can recognize that the special 1/hold 1 petal Pa has adhered to the first hold display icon H1. After that, as shown in FIG. 158(c), the adhered special 1/suspension 1 petal Pa disappears, and the display mode of the first suspension display icon H1 changes. For example, the first pending display icon H1 changes from white to blue. That is, the pachinko machine 10 changes the display mode of the reservation display icon such that the special 1/reservation 1 petal Pa reaches the first reservation display icon H1 and stays (attaches) for a predetermined time. A suggestion effect to suggest is executed, and then an effect to change the display mode of the first pending display icon H1 is executed. For example, an effect of changing the first pending display icon H1 from white to blue, an effect of changing the blue pending display icon to red, and the like are executed. In this specification, the petal remaining on the pending display icon for a predetermined time is expressed as the petal adhering to the pending display icon.

Each of the petals Pb to Pd for special 1/suspension 2 to special 1/suspension 4 performs the same operation as the petal Pa for special 1/suspension 1 described above. The pachinko machine 10 suggests that the display mode of the suspension display icons changes, that is, the petals Pb to Pd reach the corresponding suspension display icons H2 to H4 and stay (attach) for a predetermined time. After that, an effect of changing the display mode of the pending display icons H2 to H4 with the petals Pb to Pd attached is performed. For example, an effect of changing the pending display icons H2 to H4 from white to blue, an effect of changing the blue pending display icons H2 to H4 to red, and the like are executed.

In the above description, when each petal Pa to Pd reaches each of the reserved display icons H1 to H4 and stays for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds), the display mode of each reserved display icon H1 to H4 is changed. However, in practice, it is determined whether or not the following two conditions are satisfied when each of the petals Pa to Pd reaches each of the reserved display icons H1 to H4. Only when it is established, an effect of changing the display mode of each of the pending display icons H1 to H4 is executed. The two conditions are as follows.

・Condition 1:
A shift of the reserved display icon does not occur during a period from when the flower petal reaches the reserved display icon to when a predetermined time (for example, two seconds) elapses.
・Condition 2:
The display mode (display level Lvr) of the pending display icon reached by the flower petal is less than a preset upper limit value (hereinafter referred to as display level upper limit value Lvm).

The pachinko machine 10 specifically performs the following processes. When a ball enters the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34 and the hold information is acquired based on the ball entering, the value of the display level Lvr of the holding display icon corresponding to the ball entering 1 is set, and the value of the display level upper limit value Lvm of the pending display icon is set based on the game result such as winning a big hit or occurrence of reach. Then, when the flower petals Pa to Pd reach the pending display icons H1 to H4, it is determined whether or not the pending display icon shifts during a period of 2 seconds from the arrival (condition 1 judgment).

When it is determined that the shift of the pending display icon does not occur during the above period (when condition 1 is satisfied), the display level Lvr set for the pending display icon H1 to H4 reached by the flower petals Pa to Pd is also It is determined whether or not the display level is below the set display level upper limit value Lvm (determines condition 2). Here, when it is determined that the display level Lvr is lower than the display level upper limit value Lvm (that is, when both the condition 1 and the condition 2 are satisfied), an effect of changing the display mode of the pending display icons H1 to H4 is performed. Execute. Specifically, during the above period, the petals that reach the reserved display icon are continuously displayed at the position of the reserved display icon (the petals are deleted after the above period ends), and then the display level corresponding to the reserved display icon. The Lvr is increased by one level, and the display mode of the pending display icon is changed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the display level Lvr does not fall below the display level upper limit Lvm in the determination of whether or not the display level Lvr is below the display level upper limit Lvm (that is, condition 1 is satisfied and , condition 2 is not established), the effect of changing the display mode of the pending display icons H1 to H4 is not executed. Specifically, during the above period, the petals reaching the pending display icon are continuously displayed (the petals are erased after the above period ends), but the display mode of the pending display icon is not changed.

Further, when it is determined that the shift of the pending display icon will not occur during the above period (that is, if the condition 1 is not satisfied), it is determined whether the condition 2 is satisfied. Regardless, the effect of changing the display mode of the pending display icons H1 to H4 is not executed. Specifically, when the petals Pa to Pd reach the pending display icons H1 to H4, the petals are erased, and the display mode of the pending display icons is not changed.

Petals Pa to Pd for Special 1/Reservation 1 to Special 1/Reservation 4 that perform the above operations are repeated during the period in which the first starting opening reservation area Ds1 and the second starting opening reservation area Ds2 are displayed. Is displayed. Specifically, for Special 1/Reservation 1 to Special 1/Reservation 4 petals Pa to Pd, during the period in which the first starting opening reservation area Ds1 and the second starting opening reservation area Ds2 are displayed, a predetermined Display is started one by one in order with an interval of a period (for example, 5 seconds). That is, in the above period, the pachinko machine 10 starts displaying the petals Pa to Pd for Special 1/Reservation 1 to Special 1/Reservation 4 one by one at intervals of the predetermined period in this order, After starting the display of the petal Pd for special 1/suspension 4, the display returns to the petal Pa for special 1/suspension 1 after the predetermined period. In this way, display of petals Pa to Pd for special 1/hold 1 to special 1/hold 4 is repeated.

The pachinko machine 10 performs a petal trajectory lottery process when starting to display each of the petals Pa to Pd for special 1/hold 1 to special 1/hold 4, and the target hold arrival trajectory, the first target non-hold trajectory , second target off-hold trajectory to adopt. In the petal trajectory lottery process, when it is decided to adopt the target hold arrival trajectory, display of petals moving along the target hold arrival trajectory consisting of the common route RA and the first individual route RB1 is started. . In the petal trajectory lottery process, when it is decided to adopt the first target non-reserved trajectory, the petals moving along the first target non-reserved trajectory consisting of the common route RA and the second individual route RB2 Start display. In the petal trajectory lottery process, when it is decided to adopt the second target non-holding trajectory, the petals moving along the second target non-holding trajectory consisting of the common route RA and the third individual route RB3 Start display. The petals moved along the first target non-holding trajectory or the second target non-holding trajectory do not reach the holding display icon, and the effect of changing the display mode of the holding display icon is not performed.

In addition, since the third kind petals Pa to Pd for special 1/suspension 1 to special 1/suspension 4 are repeatedly displayed while the player is playing the game as described above, one suspension is required. The petals Pa to Pd may adhere to the display icon multiple times. In this case, if the display level Lvr is less than the display level upper limit value Lvm, an effect of changing the display mode of the pending display icons H1 to H4 is executed each time the petals Pa to Pd are attached. For example, when the petals Pa to Pd are attached twice to each of the white pending display icons H1 to H4, an effect of changing the color from white to blue is executed for the first time, and the color is changed from blue to green for the second time. A performance is performed.

What has been described with reference to FIGS. 157 and 158 is the operation of the first start opening retaining third type petal P31. On the other hand, the second starting opening retaining third type petal P32 also performs the same operation as the first starting opening retaining third type petal P31. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, each of the special 2/reservation 1 to special 2/reservation 4 petals as the second start opening reservation third type petal P32 is displayed in the second start opening reservation area Ds2. Executes a suggestive effect suggesting that the display mode of the suspension display icon changes by reaching each suspension display icon and staying (attaching) for a predetermined time, and then changing the display mode of the suspension display icon. Perform a transformative performance. Only when the condition 1 and the condition 2 are established, the effect of changing the display mode of the reservation display icon is also the same as the first start opening reservation side.

The first type petal P1 and the second type petal P2 having the function of enlivening the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 described above are repeatedly displayed in large numbers. One of them is configured to move along the same trajectory as the target retention arrival trajectory of the third type petal P3 described above, and after reaching the retention display icon, it is displayed so as to further move downward. Even if the first type petal P1 or the second type petal P2 of this kind reaches the reserved display icon, the effect of changing the display mode of the reserved display icon is executed by passing through the reserved display icon. never.

FIG. 159 is an explanatory diagram showing how the fourth type petal P4 acts on the pattern displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. FIG. In FIG. 159(a), in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, the same symbols are stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z1 and the symbol Z3, and the symbols are variably displayed in the central symbol row Z2. This indicates that the In this state, the fourth type petal P4 moves toward the symbol row Z2 so as to dance.

The state of FIG. 159(a) shifts to the state of FIG. 159(b), and the symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed. At this time, the symbols stop-displayed in the symbol row Z2 are different from the symbols stopped-displayed in the symbol rows Z1 and Z3. In this state, the fourth type petal P4 reaches the pattern row Z2 where it stopped last, and after reaching it, the fourth type petal P4 stops on the pattern for a predetermined time (for example, two seconds). As a result, the player can recognize that the fourth type petal P4 has adhered to the stopped symbol row Z2.

After that, as shown in FIG. 159(c), the attached 4th kind petal P4 disappears, and the pattern row Z2 again starts the variable display. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 159(d), the symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed. It should be noted that the symbols of the symbol row Z2 stopped and displayed after the restart of the variable display match the symbols stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z1 and the symbol row Z3. That is, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are a combination of the same symbols for winning the jackpot.

As described above, the fourth type petal P4 moves toward the symbol row that is being variably displayed, and adheres to the symbol immediately after the variably displayed symbol row is stopped. Then, when the fourth type petal P4 is attached, an effect is executed to change the pattern row again.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the third type petal P3 among the plurality of types of petals P1 to P4 displayed on the pattern display device 41 reaches the reserved display icon, When it stays (that is, sticks) for a set period of time (for example, 2 seconds), an effect of changing the display mode of the pending display icon is executed. In a conventional pachinko machine that does not have such a configuration, when the variable display is started, when the reservation information is shifted, or when the game ball enters the first start opening or the second start opening, the display mode of the reservation display icon is It was common to execute an effect suggesting a change (hereinafter referred to as a pending change suggesting effect) and then execute an effect to change the display mode of the pending display icon. In this conventional pachinko machine (hereinafter referred to as conventional pachinko machine 1), at the start of the variable display, at the time of shifting the hold information, or at the time of entering the game ball into the first start port or the second start port At a predetermined timing, the pending change suggesting effect is executed, and the effect of changing the display mode of the pending display icon is executed. There is a problem that the timing of appearance can be predicted, and the player lacks a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency. In addition, unless the pending change suggesting effect is executed, the effect of changing the display mode of the pending display icon does not appear. There was no focus, and the player lacked a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency.

In addition, as another conventional pachinko machine, during the variable display, a special character appears on the pending display icon, and when this character appears, an effect is executed to change the display mode of the pending display icon. There was some configuration. In the pachinko machine with this configuration, the above effects are never executed when the special character does not appear, and the above effects are always executed when the special character appears. Similar to the pachinko machine, there is a problem that the player lacks a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency.

Furthermore, as another conventional pachinko machine, during the variable display, a mini-game-like pending change effect is executed, and when the mini-game is won, the effect of changing the display mode of the pending display icon is executed. There was a configuration to do. In the pachinko machine of this configuration, when the above-mentioned pending change effect does not appear, the effect of changing the display mode of the pending display icon is never executed, so similar to the conventional pachinko machine 1, There is a problem that the player lacks a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a plurality of flower petals are repeatedly fluttering on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 regardless of whether or not the pending display icon is displayed.
(i) the majority of the petals (first type petal P1 and second type petal P2) do not affect the reserved display icon even if they pass around or over the reserved display icon; without
(ii) If one of the petals (the third type petal P3 moving along the first target non-holding trajectory or the second target non-holding trajectory) moves toward the holding display icon, the Immediately before the pending display icon, leaving the pending display icon,
(iii) When one of the petals (the third type petal P3 moving along the target hold arrival trajectory) reaches the hold display icon, a predetermined time has passed since the arrival. Due to the shift of the pending display icon before, the display mode of the pending display icon does not change,
(iv) If one of the petals (the third kind petal P3 moving along the target hold arrival trajectory) arrives at the hold display icon and stays (attaches) for a predetermined time , the display mode of the pending display icon does not change because the display level Lvr set for the pending display icon has already reached the display level upper limit value Lvm,
(v) one of the petals (the third kind petal P3 moving along the target hold arrival trajectory) reached toward the hold display icon and was thought to have stayed (attached) for a predetermined time; Then, an effect of changing the display mode of the suspension display icon is executed.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the flower petals are repeatedly displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, the player expects that the display mode of the pending display icon will change. In addition to being able to always give a sense of urgency (as long as one of the petals is displayed),
・Even though the flower petal reached the reserved display icon, it passed through the reserved display icon,
・For example, the flower petals headed for the reserved display icon, but the petals reached outside the reserved display icon.
・Even though the petal reached the reserved display icon, the petal did not attach to the reserved display icon,
・A flower petal reaches a reserved display icon, and the petal adheres to the reserved display icon (because the display level Lvr of the reserved display icon has already reached the set display level upper limit value Lvm). Since it is possible to impart a sense of disappointment that the display mode of the pending display icon has not changed, it is possible to further impart a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency to the player. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the petals that can play the role of the suspension change suggesting effect and the petals of the same pattern as the petals are always dancing, so it is expected that the effect of changing the display mode of the suspension display icon will appear. Since the player can always have a sense of excitement, it is possible to further give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency. Therefore, with the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the first place, the effect images such as flower petals, confetti, jellyfish, and butterflies floating on the display surface 41a are intended to liven up the display surface 41a. No action was taken. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to execute an effect such that a flower petal adheres to the pending display icon and changes the display mode of the pending display icon, so that the display surface 41a is lively. It is possible to effectively use the petals for making.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has a pattern in a pattern row in which the fourth type petal P4 among the plurality of types of petals P1 to P4 displayed on the pattern display device 41 is changed from the variable display state to the stopped state. , an effect for restarting the variable display of the symbol row is executed. In a conventional pachinko machine that does not have such a configuration, the flower petals do not affect the variable display of the symbol row, so when the variable display of the symbol row stops and the symbol rows are no longer the same combination of symbols. , it only gave the player a feeling of disappointment. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the fourth type petal P4 adheres to the symbols of the stopped symbol row, it is possible to execute an effect of restarting the variable display of the symbol row. As a result, it is possible to give a player who has once been discouraged because the combination of the same patterns in the pattern row is no longer surprised at the resumption of the variable display and a sense of expectation for another big win. Therefore, with the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

<<4-5>> Various processes executed in the main controller:
Next, an example of specific control for executing the above-described processing in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described. The processing executed in the main controller 60 will be described first, and then the processing executed in the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

In order to advance the game of each game cycle, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing. These processes are described below. In addition to timer interrupt processing and normal processing, the MPU 62 executes NMI interrupt processing that is activated by the input of a power failure signal, but the description of these processing will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 160 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing. As described above, the timer interrupt process is started periodically (for example, every 2 msec) by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 .

In step So0101, reading processing of various detection sensors 67a to 67e is executed. That is, it reads the states of the various detection sensors 67a to 67e connected to the main controller 60, determines the states of the sensors, and saves the detection information (entering ball detection information). After that, the process proceeds to step So0102.

In step So0102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . After that, the process proceeds to step So0103.

In step So0103, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to each of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4, and when each of these counter values reaches the maximum value, Clear each to 0. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM64. After that, the process proceeds to step So0104. It should be noted that the fluctuation type counter CS updates its value in the normal processing (FIG. 164) described later.

In step So0104, ball entry processing for the starting opening accompanying the ball entering the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34 is executed. The details of the ball entry process for the start opening in step So0104 will be described later. After executing step So0104, the process proceeds to step So0105.

In step So0105, a through-ball entry process associated with the ball entering the through gate 35 is executed. The details of the through ball entry process in step So0105 will be described later. After executing step So0105, the MPU 62 ends the timer interrupt processing.

<Entering ball processing for the starting port>
Next, the ball entry process for the start opening will be described. The ball entry process for the starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (Fig. 160: So0104).

FIG. 161 is a flow chart showing ball entry processing for the start opening. In step So0201, it is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first starting port 33 whether or not the game ball has entered the first starting port 33 (starting ball). In step So0201, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the first start hole 33 (So0201: YES), the process proceeds to step So0202, and the prize ball for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls set command. After that, the process proceeds to step So0203.

In step So0203, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal that the game ball has entered the first start hole 33 to the management control device on the game hall side. After that, the process proceeds to step So0204.

In step So0204, the value stored in the reserved number storage area of the first reservation area Ra is read out (hereinafter also referred to as the first suspended start number RaN), and the first suspended start number RaN will be described later. Set as a target for processing. The first start suspension number RaN indicates the number of suspensions based on the ball entering the first start hole 33 . After that, the process proceeds to step So0209.

In step So0201, if it is determined that the game ball has not entered the first start port 33 (So0201: NO), the process proceeds to step So0205, whether or not the game ball entered the second start port 34 is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second starting port 34 .

In step So0205, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34 (So0205: YES), the process proceeds to step So0206, and the prize ball for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls set command. After that, the process proceeds to step So0207. On the other hand, in step So0205, when it is determined that the game ball has not entered the second starting hole 34 (So0205: NO), the ball entering process for this starting hole ends.

In step So0207, external signal setting processing is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that the game ball has entered the second starting hole 34 . After that, the process proceeds to step So0208.

In step So0208, the value stored in the reserved number storage area of the second reserved area Rb, that is, the number of reserved starts RbN (hereinafter also referred to as the second reserved number of starts RbN) is read, and the second reserved number of starts RbN will be described later. Set as a target for processing. The second start suspension number RbN indicates the number of suspensions based on the ball entering the second start opening 34 . After that, the process proceeds to step So0209.

In step So0209, it is determined whether or not the start pending number N (RaN or RbN) set in step So0204 or step So0208 is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment). In step So0209, if the start suspension number N is not less than the upper limit value (So0209: NO), the ball-entering process for this start opening is terminated.

On the other hand, in step So0209, if the number N of pending starts is less than the upper limit (So0209: YES), the process proceeds to step So0210, adds 1 to the number N of pending starts in the corresponding reserved area, and then proceeds to step So0211. , adds 1 to the value stored in the total pending number storage area (hereinafter referred to as the total pending number CRN). The total pending number CRN indicates the sum of the first pending start number RaN and the second pending start number RbN. After that, the process proceeds to step So0212.

In step So0212, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 updated in step So0103 (FIG. 160) is stored in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the corresponding reservation area, that is, In step So0210, it stores in the storage area corresponding to the pending number to which 1 is added. Specifically, when the first start suspension number RaN is set as a processing target, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step So0103, It is stored in the first storage area of the empty storage areas of the first reservation area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start suspension number RaN to which 1 is added in step So0210. In addition, when the second start pending number RbN is set as a processing target, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step So0103 is set to the second hold It is stored in the first memory area of the empty memory areas of the area Rb, that is, the memory area corresponding to the second start suspension number RbN to which 1 is added in step So0210. After executing step So0212, the process proceeds to step So0213.

In step So0213, the first determination process is executed. In the first determination process, based on the information (holding information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, the winning lottery decision result (lottery result), the jackpot type, and the reach This is a process of determining whether or not there is an occurrence, etc., before the hold information is subject to a winning lottery by the main controller 60 . The details of the first determination process will be described later. After executing step So0213, the process proceeds to step So0214.

In step So0214, a process of setting a pending command is executed. Concretely, the decision result of previous decision processing which is executed on the basis of the information (pending information) of each value of big hit random number counter C1, big hit type counter C2 and reach random number counter C3 is set as a pending command.

The pending command indicates that the ball has entered the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34 and the judgment result (first judgment information) of the first judgment process based on the holding information acquired based on the entry, This is a command for causing the sub-side control device to confirm the pending information before the main control device 60 becomes a target of the winning lottery. The hold command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process ( FIG. 164 : step So0503) of the normal process, which will be described later.

Further, when the sound emission control device 90 receives a hold command transmitted based on the ball entering the first starting hole 33, the display in the first starting hole holding area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 is held. A command is sent to the display control device 100 to change the number to correspond to the increase in the number. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first start opening reservation region Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of reservations. On the other hand, when receiving the hold command transmitted based on the ball entering the second starting hole 34, the sound emission control device 90 holds the display in the second starting hole holding region Ds2 of the pattern display device 41. A command is sent to the display control device 100 to change the number to correspond to the increase in the number. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second start opening reservation region Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the increase in the number of reservations.

After executing step So0214, the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 terminates the ball-entering process for this starting opening.

<First determination process>
Next, the preceding determination processing will be described. The first determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (Fig. 161: So0213) of the ball entry process for the starting opening.

FIG. 162 is a flow chart showing the first determination process. As described above, in the first determination process, based on the pending information, determination results such as determination of winning lottery, determination of type of big win, determination of presence or absence of reach occurrence, etc. This is a process that is executed before the lottery is targeted.

In step So0301, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the storage area by the ball entering the starting hole in the ball entering process for the starting hole (FIG. 161) is grasped. After that, the process proceeds to step So0302, and the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery due to this ball entry is executed as a game round is determined. Specifically, the judgment result of the previous judgment process executed by the ball entry before the current ball entry is read from the corresponding storage area, and whether or not there is a probability variable jackpot that occurs before the winning lottery due to the current ball entry Also, the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery due to the current ball entry is executed as a game round is determined by grasping the presence or absence of winning in the falling lottery.

In step So0302, when it is determined that the lottery mode is the low-probability mode at the time when the winning lottery due to the current ball entry is executed as a game round, (So0302: YES), the process proceeds to step So0303, and the success/failure table is stored. The success/failure table for the low-probability mode (FIG. 148(a)) stored in the area 63a is referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step So0305, and as a result of referring to the success/failure table for the low-probability mode, it is determined whether or not the value information of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to the jackpot.

On the other hand, in step So0302, when it is determined that the lottery mode is not the low-probability mode at the time when the winning lottery due to the current ball entry is executed as a game round (So0302: NO), the process proceeds to step So0304 to store the success/failure table. Refer to the success/failure table for the high probability mode (FIG. 148(b)) stored in the area 63a. After that, the process proceeds to step So0305, and as a result of referring to the success/failure table for the high-probability mode, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to the jackpot.

In step So0305, when it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to the jackpot (So0305: YES), the process proceeds to step So0306, and is stored in the storage area by the ball entering the starting port this time. The value of the jackpot type counter C2 is grasped. After that, the process proceeds to step So0307 to refer to the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 63b. Specifically, when the jackpot type counter C2 to be sorted this time is obtained based on the ball entering the first start port 33, refer to the first start port sort table. , the distribution table for the second starting opening is referred to when the information is acquired based on the ball entering the second starting opening 34 . After executing step So0307, the process proceeds to step So0308.

In step So0308, as a result of referring to the allocation table, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot type counter C2 grasped this time corresponds to the variable probability jackpot. In step So0308, when it is determined that it corresponds to the probability variable jackpot (So0308: YES), the process proceeds to step So0309, and the probability variable jackpot information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h. After that, the preceding determination process is terminated. On the other hand, in step So0308, when it is determined that it does not correspond to the variable probability jackpot (So0308: NO), the process proceeds to step So0310, and the normal jackpot information is stored in the preceding determination processing result storage area 64h. After that, the preceding determination process is terminated.

In step So0305, when it is determined that the value of the big hit random number counter C1 grasped this time does not correspond to the big hit (So0305: NO), the process proceeds to step So0311, and the entry into the starting port this time causes the storage area to be stored. The value of the stored reach random number counter C3 is grasped. After that, the process proceeds to step So0312, and the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c is referred to. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step So0313, and as a result of referring to the reach determination table, it is determined whether or not the value of the reach random number counter C3 grasped this time corresponds to the occurrence of reach.

In step So0313, when it is determined that reach occurrence is supported (So0313: YES), the process proceeds to step So0314, and reach occurrence information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h. After that, the preceding determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step So0313 that the reach occurrence is not supported (So0313: NO), the first determination process is terminated.

<Entering ball processing for through>
Next, the ball entry processing for through will be described. The through ball entry process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (Fig. 160: So0105).

FIG. 163 is a flow chart showing the ball entry processing for through. In step So0401, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the through gate 35 or not. In step So0401, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the through gate 35 (So0401: YES), proceed to step So0402, whether the number SN of the reserved accessory is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) determine whether or not Incidentally, the accessory reserved number SN is a value indicating the number of balls entered into the through gate 35 reserved for performing the electric accessory open lottery. In this embodiment, the maximum value of the number SN of reserved accessory items is four. On the other hand, in step So0401, when it is determined that the game ball has not entered the through gate 35 (So0401: NO), this through ball entering processing is terminated.

In step So0402, when it is determined that it is less than the upper limit value (less than 4) of the reserved role number SN (So0402: YES), the process proceeds to step So0403, and 1 is added to the reserved role number SN. After that, the process proceeds to step So0404.

In step So0404, the value of the electric accessary product opening counter C4 updated in step So0103 (FIG. 160) is stored in the first storage area of the free storage areas of the electrician holding area 64d of the RAM64. After that, the through ball entry processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in step So0402, if it is determined that the value of the reserved accessory number SN is not less than the upper limit (So0402: NO), that is, if it is determined that the value of the reserved accessory number SN is equal to or greater than the upper limit, Without storing the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4, the ball entry processing for through is terminated.

<Normal processing>
Next, normal processing will be described. The normal processing is processing started by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 when the power switch 88 is switched from the off state to the on state (hereinafter also referred to as "power on"). In normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed.

FIG. 164 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step So0501, start-up processing is executed. Specifically, initialization of each control device upon power-on, determination of validity of data stored in the RAM 64, and the like are executed. After that, the process proceeds to step So0502.

In step So0502, a startup command is set. The start-up command is a command for causing each sub-side control device to start a demonstration video when the power is turned on. After that, the process proceeds to step So0503.

In step So0503, the output data such as the start-up command set in step So0502 and the command set in the timer interrupt process or the normal process executed last time are transmitted to each sub-side control device. Specifically, the presence or absence of the prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 70 . In addition, when commands related to effects such as start-up commands, variation commands, type commands, and hold commands are set, they are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . After executing step So0503, the process proceeds to step So0504.

In step So0504, the change type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the fluctuation type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . After that, the process proceeds to step So0505.

In step So0505, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step So0506. In step So0506, game round control processing for controlling the game in each game round is executed. In the game round control processing, a winning lottery, setting of variable display of symbols by the symbol display device 41, display control of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b, and the like are performed. Details of the game round control process will be described later. After executing step So0506, the process proceeds to step So0507.

In step So0507, game state transition processing is executed to shift the game state. By executing the game state transition process, the game state shifts to an opening/closing execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, and the like. Details of the game state transition processing will be described later. After that, the process proceeds to step So0508.

In step So0508, an electric support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 34a provided at the second starting port 34 is executed. In the electric role support process, it is determined whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a. The details of the electronic support process will be described later. After that, the process proceeds to step So0509.

In step So0509, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has passed from the start of the current normal processing (strictly speaking, the start of the command output processing in step So0503). That is, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the next normal process. In step So0509, if it is determined that the predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed since the start of the normal processing this time (So0509: NO), in steps So0510 and So0511, until the execution timing of the next normal processing Within the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated. Specifically, in step So0510, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . Further, in step So0511, 1 is added to the fluctuation type counter CS, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . On the other hand, in step So0509, if it is determined that the predetermined time (4 msec) has elapsed since the start of the normal processing this time (So0509: YES), the process returns to step So0503, and each process from step So0503 to step So0508 is performed. Execute.

Since the execution time of each process from step So0503 to step So0508 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using the remaining time, the values of these counters can be randomly updated.

<Game Round Control Processing>
Next, game round control processing will be described. The game round control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of normal process (Fig. 164: So0506).

FIG. 165 is a flow chart showing game round control processing. In step So0601, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON when the game state is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode in the later-described game state transition processing, and turned OFF when the opening/closing execution mode is ended in the game state transition processing.

In step So0601, when it is determined that the open/close execution mode is in progress (So0601: YES), this game round control process is terminated without executing any of the processes after step So0602. That is, when the open/close execution mode is in progress, the game cycle is not started regardless of whether or not a ball is entered into the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34 . On the other hand, if it is determined in step So0601 that the open/close execution mode is not in progress (So0601: NO), the process proceeds to step So0602.

In step So0602, it is determined whether or not the special figure unit 37 is displayed in a variable manner. Specifically, it is determined whether or not one of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b provided in the special figure unit 37 is in the process of variable display. This determination is made by determining whether or not the special figure variation displaying flag in the special figure variation displaying flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The special figure variable display flag is turned ON when one of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b is to start the variable display, and is turned OFF when the variable display is finished.

In step So0602, when it is determined that the special figure unit 37 is not displayed in a variable manner (So0602: NO), the process proceeds to step So0603.

In step So0603, a variation start process for starting the variation display in the special figure unit 37 and the variation display in the symbol display device 41 is executed. The details of the fluctuation start process will be described later. After executing step So0603, this game round control process is terminated.

On the other hand, in step So0602, when it is determined that the special figure unit 37 is in the middle of the variable display (So0602: YES), the process proceeds to step So0604.

In step So0604, a variation end process for ending the variation display in the special figure unit 37 and the variation display in the symbol display device 41 is executed. The details of the fluctuation end processing will be described later. After executing step So0604, this game round control process is terminated.

<Variation start processing>
Next, fluctuation start processing will be described. The fluctuation start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game round control process (Fig. 165: So0603).

FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing fluctuation start processing. In step So0701, it is determined whether or not the total pending number CRN exceeds "0". When the total pending number CRN is less than or equal to "0", it means that the pending start number for both the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 is "0". Therefore, when it is determined in step So0701 that the total pending number CRN is equal to or less than "0" (So0701: NO), this fluctuation start processing is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step So0701 that the total pending number CRN exceeds "0" (So0701: YES), the process proceeds to step So0702.

In step So0702, hold information shift processing for setting the hold information stored in the first reserve area Ra or the second reserve area Rb to the state after the start of fluctuation is executed, and the process proceeds to step So0703. Details of the pending information shift process will be described later.

In step So0703, a winning judgment process including a process when a big win is won in a winning lottery is performed. The details of the hit determination process will be described later. After executing step So0703, the process proceeds to step So0704.

In step So0704, variable time setting processing is executed. The variable time setting process is for setting the variable time, which is the time required for the current game round in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b, based on the presence or absence of a big hit, the presence or absence of reach, and the like. is the processing of Details of the variable time setting process will be described later. After executing step So0704, the process proceeds to step So0705.

In step So0705, a variation command is set. The command for variation includes whether the current game cycle is related to the hold information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33, or acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 34. Information indicating whether or not it relates to the hold information is included, and information on the presence or absence of reach occurrence and information on the variable time set in step So0706 are included. After executing step So0705, the process proceeds to step So0706.

At step So0706, a type command is set. The type command includes information on the presence or absence of a big hit and the result of distribution determination. That is, the type command includes 16R probability variable jackpot information, 8R probability variable jackpot information, 16R normal jackpot information, 8R normal jackpot information, or loss result information about winning lottery as information on the jackpot type. is

The variation command and type command set at steps So0705 and So0706 are sent to the sound emission control device 90 at step So0503 in the normal process (FIG. 164). The sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect in the game round based on the received variation command and the type command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the effect is executed. After executing step So0706, the process proceeds to step So0707.

In step So0707, of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b, the symbol display portion corresponding to the current game round is caused to start the variable display of symbols. Specifically, when the second symbol display portion flag of the RAM 64 is not ON, the first symbol display portion 37a is specified as the symbol display portion corresponding to the current game round, and the variable display is started, When the second pattern display portion flag is ON, the second pattern display portion 37b is specified as the pattern display portion corresponding to the current game round, and the variable display is started. After executing step So0707, the process proceeds to step So0708.

In step So0708, the special figure fluctuation display flag stored in the special figure fluctuation display flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned ON. After executing step So0708, the fluctuation start process is terminated.

<Holding information shift processing>
Next, the pending information shift process will be described. The hold information shift process is executed by MPU 62 of main controller 60 as a subroutine of fluctuation start process (Fig. 166: So0702).

FIG. 167 is a flowchart showing pending information shift processing. In step So0801, it is determined whether or not the reservation area to be processed for execution of the reservation information shift process is the first reservation area Ra. Specifically, the first stored hold information (hold information stored in the first area of the first reservation area Ra information) is the first stored hold information (stored in the first area of the second hold area Rb) among the hold information stored chronologically in the second hold area Rb (FIG. 147) is stored in the reservation area prior to the reservation information), the reservation area to be processed is determined to be the first reservation area Ra. On the other hand, the first reservation information stored chronologically in the second reservation area Rb than the first reservation information stored chronologically in the first reservation area Ra If the stored reservation information is stored in the reservation area first, the reservation area to be processed is determined to be the second reservation area Rb. That is, by executing the process of step So0801, the pending information can be processed in the order stored in the first pending area Ra or the second pending area Rb.

In step So0801, when it is determined that the reservation area to be processed is the first reservation area Ra (step So0801: YES), the reservation information shift processing for the first reservation area in steps So0802 to So0807 is executed. On the other hand, in step So0801, if it is determined that the processing target reservation area is not the first reservation area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the processing target reservation area is the second reservation area Rb (step So0801: NO ), the reservation information shift processing for the second reservation area of steps So0808 to So0813 is executed.

In step So0802, after subtracting 1 from the first start-up reservation number RaN in the first reservation area Ra, the process proceeds to step So0803 to subtract 1 from the total reservation number CRN. After that, the process proceeds to step So0804. In step So0804, the data stored in the first area of the first reservation area Ra is moved to the execution area AE. After that, the process proceeds to step So0805.

In step So0805, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first reservation area Ra is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After executing step So0805, the process proceeds to step So0806.

In step So0806, if the second pattern display portion flag in the various flag storage area 64g is ON, the flag is turned OFF, and if not ON, the state is maintained. The second pattern display portion flag is information for specifying which of the first pattern display portion 37a and the second pattern display portion 37b is the target for starting the variable display this time. After that, the process proceeds to step So0807.

In step So0807, a shift command is set. The shift time command is a command including information for making the sound emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, recognize that the data in the reserved area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63, information indicating that the reservation area to which the data is to be shifted this time corresponds to the first reservation area Ra, that is, the information corresponding to the first start port 33 A shift-time command including information indicating that the shift-time command is included is selected, and the selected shift-time command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . After that, the hold information shift process is terminated. It should be noted that the shift time command set in step So0807 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step So0503 of the normal processing (FIG. 164).

In step So0801, if it is determined that the reservation area to be processed is not the first reservation area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the reservation area to be processed is the second reservation area Rb (So0801: NO), step Proceed to So0808.

In step So0808, 1 is subtracted from the second starting reservation quantity RbN in the second reservation area Rb. After that, the process proceeds to step So0809. In step So0809, 1 is subtracted from the total pending number CRN, and the process proceeds to step So0810 to move the data stored in the first area of the second pending area Rb to the execution area AE. After that, the process proceeds to step So0811.

In step So0811, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second reservation area Rb is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After executing step So0811, the process proceeds to step So0812.

In step So0812, if the second pattern display flag in the various flag storage area 64g is not ON, the flag is turned ON, and if it is ON, the state is maintained. After that, the process proceeds to step So0813.

In step So0813, a shift command is set. The shift time command is a command including information for making the sound emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, recognize that the data in the reserved area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63, the information indicating that the reservation area to which the data is to be shifted this time corresponds to the second reservation area Rb, that is, the information corresponding to the second start port 34 A shift-time command including information indicating that the shift-time command is included is selected, and the selected shift-time command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . After that, the hold information shift process is terminated.

The shift command set in step So0813 is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step So0503 of the normal process (FIG. 164). The sound emission control device 90, based on the received shift time command, displays a command for changing the display in the second start opening reservation region Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations. Send to 100. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second start opening reservation region Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations.

<Hit determination processing>
Next, hit determination processing will be described. The hit determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variation start process (Fig. 166: So0703).

FIG. 168 is a flowchart showing hit determination processing. In step So0901, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

In step So0901, when it is determined that the mode is the high probability mode (So0901: YES), the process proceeds to step So0902, and the success/failure determination is performed by referring to the success/failure table for the high probability mode. Specifically, whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as jackpot winning in the success/failure table for the high probability mode shown in FIG. 148(b). determine whether After that, the process proceeds to step So0904.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step So0901 that the mode is not the high-probability mode (So0901: NO), the process proceeds to step So0903, and the success/failure determination is performed by referring to the success/failure table for the low-probability mode. Specifically, whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as jackpot winning in the success/failure table for the low probability mode shown in FIG. 148(a). determine whether After that, the process proceeds to step So0904.

In step So0904, it is determined whether or not the result of the success/failure determination (hit lottery) in step So0902 or step So0903 is a big hit. In step So0904, when the result of the winning/failure determination is a jackpot winning (So0904: YES), the process proceeds to step So0905.

In step So0905, it is determined whether or not the second pattern display flag of the RAM 64 is ON. In step So0905, if it is determined that the second symbol display flag is not ON (So0905: NO), proceed to step So0906 and refer to the distribution table for the first start port (see FIG. 149(a)). and make a distribution judgment. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is any of the numerical range of the 16R probability variable jackpot, the numerical range of the 8R probability variable jackpot, the numerical range of the 16R normal jackpot, and the numerical range of the 8R normal jackpot. determine whether it is contained in

On the other hand, in step So0905, when it is determined that the second symbol display flag is ON (So0905: YES), the process proceeds to step So0907, and a distribution table for the second starting port (see FIG. 149(b)) Refer to to make a distribution judgment. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in the numeric range of the 16R probability variable jackpot or the numeric range of the 8R normal jackpot. After executing the processing of step So0906 or step So0907, the process proceeds to step So0908.

In step So0908, the flag (jackpot flag) corresponding to the type of jackpot distributed in step So0906 or step So0907 is turned ON. Specifically, when it is a 16R probability variable jackpot, the 16R probability variable jackpot flag is turned ON, when it is an 8R probability variable jackpot, the 8R probability variable jackpot flag is turned ON, and when it is a 16R normal jackpot, the 16R normal jackpot flag is turned on. When it is 8R normal jackpot, the 8R normal jackpot flag is turned ON. After executing step So0908, the process proceeds to step So0909.

In step So0909, the process of setting the stop result for the jackpot is executed. Specifically, in the current game turn in which the big win is won, it is set whether the variable display is to be ended in the state in which the stop result is displayed in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b. This is a process for Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63f (FIG. 146), the stop result data corresponding to the type of jackpot sorted in step So0906 or step So0907 can be obtained. Address information is acquired, and the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After executing step So0909, the hit determination process ends.

In step So0904, if the result of the winning lottery in step So0902 or step So0903 is not a jackpot winning (So0904: NO), proceed to step So0910, refer to the reach determination table, and determine whether reach occurs in the game round A determination is made as to whether or not Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is set as reach occurrence in the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c (FIG. 146). Determines whether or not it matches the value After that, the process proceeds to step So0911.

In step So0911, if the result of reach determination in step So0910 is that reach occurs in the game round (So0911: YES), the process proceeds to step So0912, and the reach occurrence flag is turned ON. Specifically, the reach occurrence flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned ON. After executing step So0912, the process proceeds to step So0913.

On the other hand, in step So0911, if the result of reach determination in step So0910 is that reach does not occur in the game round (So0911: NO), the process proceeds to step So0913 without executing step So0912.

In step So0913, a process of setting a stop result for failure is executed. Specifically, in the current game turn that results in a loss, the variable display is set to end in a state in which the stop result is displayed in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b. processing. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for loss in the stop result table storage area 63f, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is acquired. , the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After executing step So0913, the hit determination process ends.

<Variation time setting process>
Next, the variable time setting process will be described. The variable time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variable start process (Fig. 166: So0704).

FIG. 169 is a flowchart showing variable time setting processing. In step So1001, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired. After that, the process proceeds to step So1002.

In step So1002, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a big win. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the 16R probability variable jackpot flag, 8R probability variable jackpot flag, 16R normal jackpot flag, and 8R normal jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is ON. If there is, it is assumed that the jackpot has been won (So1002: YES), and the process proceeds to step So1003.

In step So1003, petal re-variation lottery processing is executed. In the present embodiment, two types of variation time are prepared as the variation time when the jackpot is won: the normal variation time for the jackpot and the variation time for the jackpot with re-variation. The "re-fluctuation" referred to here means the re-fluctuation of the symbol row due to the attachment of the fourth type petal P4, which has been described with reference to FIG. As a necessary variable time, a large winning variable time with re-variation is prepared. The petal re-fluctuation lottery process is a process of determining by lottery whether or not to employ a big-hit fluctuation time accompanied by a re-fluctuation when a big-hit is won. Specifically, a value is obtained from a random number counter for the lottery, and one of the plurality of values stored as "winning" in the table data for the lottery stored in the ROM 63 corresponds to the value of the obtained random number counter. Determine if there is a value. If there is a value corresponding to the obtained random number value among the multiple values stored as "winning", it is decided to adopt the jackpot fluctuation time with re-fluctuation, and it corresponds to the obtained random number value If there is no value, it is determined not to adopt the big hit variation time with re-variation. A random number counter for lottery for the petal trajectory is provided in various counter areas 94b of the RAM 94 on the sound and light side. The random number counter is updated at short intervals. After executing step So1003, the process proceeds to step So1004.

In step So1004, based on the result of the petal re-variation lottery process, it is determined whether or not to adopt the big win variation time accompanied by re-variation. In step So1004, when winning in the petal re-variation lottery process, that is, when it is determined to adopt the large winning variation time accompanied by re-variation (So1004: YES), the process proceeds to step So1005.

In step So1005, a petal re-fluctuation lottery winning command is set. The petal re-variation lottery winning command is a command including information for making the sound emission control device 90, which is a sub-side control device, recognize that the petal re-variation lottery winning process has been won. The petal re-fluctuation lottery win command set in step So1005 is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step So0503 of the normal process (FIG. 164). After executing step So1005, the process proceeds to step So1006.

In step So1006, the variable time table for jackpot with re-variation stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to, and the variable time information corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS is acquired. After that, the process proceeds to step So1007, and the acquired variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM64. After that, the variable time setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, in step So1004, when it is not won in the petal re-variation lottery process, that is, when it is determined not to adopt the big winning variation time accompanied by re-variation (So1004: NO), the process proceeds to step So1008.

In step So1008, the variation time table for the normal jackpot stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to, and variation time information corresponding to the current value of the variation type counter CS is acquired. After that, the process proceeds to step So1006, and the acquired variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM64. After that, the variable time setting process is terminated.

In step So1002, when it is determined that the result of the winning lottery related to the current game round is not a jackpot winning (So1002: NO), the process proceeds to step So1009, and it is determined whether or not reach occurs in the current game round. do. Since this process (So1009) is executed when the jackpot has not been won in the winning lottery related to the current game round in step So1002, in Sx1009, the reach (so-called It is determined whether or not it is a game round in which an out-of-reach reach occurs. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the reach occurrence flag stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. proceed to

In step So1010, the reach occurrence flag stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is shifted from ON to OFF. After that, the process proceeds to step So1011.

In step So1011, the variation time table for reach generation stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to, and variation time information corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS is acquired. After that, the process proceeds to step So1007 described above, and the acquired variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. FIG. After that, the variable time setting process is terminated.

In step So1009, when it is determined that reach does not occur in this game round (So1009: NO), the process proceeds to step So1012, and the variable time table for reach non-occurrence stored in the variable time table storage area 63d is referred to. Then, the variable time corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS is obtained. The reach non-occurrence variable time table is a so-called out-of-range variable time table. After that, the process proceeds to step So1007 described above, and the acquired variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. FIG. After that, the variable time setting process is terminated.

<Variation end processing>
Next, the fluctuation end processing will be described. The fluctuation end process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game round control process (Fig. 165: So0604).

FIG. 170 is a flow chart showing fluctuation end processing. In step So1101, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the current game round has elapsed. As described above, the variation time is the time from when the symbol row starts to vary until all the symbol rows stop, and is part of the unit game time. Specifically, in step So1101, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable time information stored in the variable time counter area (various counter area 64f) of the RAM 64 has become "0". The value of the variable time information is set in the aforementioned variable time setting process (FIG. 169). The value of this set variable time information is decremented by 1 each time timer interrupt processing is started.

If it is determined in step So1101 that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (So1101: NO), this fluctuation end processing is terminated.

In step So1101, when it is determined that the variation time has passed (So1101: YES), the process proceeds to step So1102, and the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b correspond to the current game turn. A process for ending the variation of the symbols in the symbol display section is performed. Subsequently, in step So1103, the special figure variation displaying flag stored in the special figure variation displaying flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned OFF. After executing step So1103, the process proceeds to step So1104.

In step So1104, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a big win. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the 16R probability variable jackpot flag, 8R probability variable jackpot flag, 16R normal jackpot flag, and 8R normal jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is ON. In step So1104, none of the above flags is ON, that is, when it is determined that the result of the winning lottery related to the current game round is not a jackpot winning (So1104: NO), the process proceeds to step So1105.

In step So1105, it is determined whether or not the support mode is the high frequency support mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

In step So1105, when it is determined that the high-frequency support mode flag is ON (So1105: YES), the process proceeds to step So1106 to determine whether or not the value of the number-of-games counter PNC exceeds zero. In step So1106, when it is determined that the value of the number-of-games counter PNC exceeds 0 (So1106: YES), the process proceeds to step So1107, and 1 is subtracted from the value of the number-of-games counter PNC. After executing step So1107, the process proceeds to step So1108. On the other hand, when it is determined in step So1106 that the value of the number-of-games counter PNC is 0 or less (So1106: NO), the process proceeds to step So1108 without executing step So1107.

In step So1108, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

In step So1108, when it is determined that the high probability mode flag is not ON (So1108: NO), the process proceeds to step So1109 to determine whether or not the value of the number-of-games counter PNC exceeds zero.

In step So1109, when it is determined that the value of the number-of-games counter PNC does not exceed 0 (step So1109: NO), the process proceeds to step So1110 to turn off the high frequency support mode flag. After executing step So1110, the variable time ending process ends.

If it is determined that the high probability mode flag is ON in step So1108 (So1108: YES), or if it is determined that the value of the game number counter PNC is greater than 0 in step So1109 (step So1109: YES) , the variable time end processing ends without executing step So1110. If it is determined in step So1105 that the high-frequency support mode flag is not ON (So1105: NO), this variable time ending process is terminated without executing steps So106 to So1110.

On the other hand, in step So1104, any one of the 16R probability variable jackpot flag, 8R probability variable jackpot flag, 16R normal jackpot flag, and 8R normal jackpot flag is ON, that is, the result of the winning lottery related to this game round When it is determined that the jackpot has been won (So1104: YES), the process proceeds to step So1111, and the opening/closing execution mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned ON. After executing step So1111, the variable time ending process ends.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the game state transition processing will be explained. The game state transition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of normal process (Fig. 164: So0507).

FIG. 171 is a flowchart showing game state transition processing. In step So1201, it is determined whether or not the ending period flag is ON. The ending period flag is turned ON at the end of the big winning opening opening/closing process period (at the start of the ending period) in the opening/closing execution mode, and turned OFF at the end of the ending period. The ending period is a period for executing the ending effect in the opening/closing execution mode.

If it is determined in step So1201 that the ending period flag is not ON (So1201: NO), the process proceeds to step So1202 to determine whether or not the opening/closing process period flag is ON. The opening/closing process period flag is turned ON at the timing when the opening period ends in the opening/closing execution mode and the big winning opening opening/closing process period, which is the period during which the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is executed, starts. , is turned off at the timing when the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 36b ends.

If it is determined in step So1202 that the opening/closing processing period flag is not ON (So1202: NO), the process proceeds to step So1203 to determine whether or not the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is turned ON at the start of the opening period and turned OFF at the end of the opening period.

If it is determined in step So1203 that the opening period flag is not ON (So1203: NO), the process proceeds to step So1204 to determine whether or not the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step So1204 that the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON (So1204: YES), the process proceeds to step So1205. On the other hand, in step So1204, when it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode flag is OFF (So1204: NO), this game state transition processing is terminated as it is.

At step So1205, the high probability mode flag is turned off. After that, the process proceeds to step So1206. At step So1206, the high frequency support mode flag is turned off. After that, the process proceeds to step So1207.

In step So1207, an opening/closing scenario setting process for setting an opening/closing scenario is executed. The opening/closing scenario defines the pattern of the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 36b in the round game. It is a program in which conditions for shifting the opening/closing door 36b from the open state to the closed state (hereinafter also referred to as "closed conditions") are recorded. The opening/closing scenario is stored in the opening/closing scenario storage area 63h of the ROM 63.

The opening conditions are, for example, as follows.
- The current state of the pachinko machine 10 is the timing for starting each round game in the open/close execution mode.
When one of the above items is established, the opening/closing door 36b shifts from the closed state to the open state.

Closing conditions are, for example, as follows.
- The elapsed time from the start of each round game exceeds a predetermined upper limit duration (for example, 15 seconds).
- The number of game balls entered into the big winning hole 36a after starting each round game exceeds a predetermined upper limit number.
When either one of the above two items is established, the opening/closing door 36b shifts from the open state to the closed state.

After executing step So1207, the process proceeds to step So1208 described above.

In step So1208, an opening time setting process is executed. The opening time setting process is a process of setting the length of time of the opening period (hereinafter also referred to as opening time) in the open/close execution mode. In this embodiment, the opening time of the same fixed length is set in each opening period. Specifically, "3000" (ie, 6 sec) is set in the third timer counter area T3 that determines the opening time. The third timer counter area T3 is provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM64. After executing step So1208, the process proceeds to step So1209.

In step So1209, an opening command is set. The set opening command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 at step So0503 in the normal process (FIG. 164). This opening command includes information on the set opening time and the number of rounds of the current open/close execution mode. A sound emission control device 90 determines the contents of performance corresponding to the opening time and the period of opening/closing processing of the big winning opening based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents are executed. After executing step So1209, the process advances to step So1210 to turn on the opening period flag. After that, the game state transition processing is terminated.

When it is determined in step So1203 that the opening period flag is ON (So1203: YES), the process proceeds to step So1211.

In step So1211, it is determined whether or not the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the third timer counter area T3 is "0". If it is determined in step So1211 that the opening period has ended (So1211: YES), the process proceeds to step So1212 to turn off the opening period flag. After that, the process proceeds to step So1213.

In step So1213, round display start processing for notifying the type of the current open/close execution mode is executed. Specifically, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 is confirmed. Based on the confirmed address information, stop result data corresponding to the address information is specified from among the stop result data group stored in the ROM 63, and the content of the number of rounds is determined from the specified stop result data. confirm. After that, the content of the confirmed number of rounds is output to the round display section 39 in the main display section 45 . As a result, the round display section 39 displays the round information related to the output. After executing step So1213, the process proceeds to step So1214.

In step So1214, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned ON. In the following step So1215, an opening/closing process start command is set. The opening/closing process start command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the opening/closing process period has started. The opening/closing process start command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 164: step So0503) of the normal process. After executing step So1215, the game state transition processing is terminated.

In step So1202, when it is determined that the opening/closing process period flag is ON (So1202: YES), the process proceeds to step So1216 to execute the big winning opening opening/closing process. The special prize opening opening/closing process will be described later. After executing step So1216, the process proceeds to step So1217.

In step So1217, it is determined whether or not the big winning opening opening/closing process has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the big winning opening opening/closing process has ended depending on whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 for counting the number of times the opening/closing door 36b is opened is "0". do. In step So1217, when it is determined that the big winning opening opening/closing process has ended (So1217: YES), the process proceeds to step So1218. On the other hand, in step So1217, when it is determined that the big winning opening opening/closing process has not ended (So1217: NO), the game state transition process is ended as it is.

In step So1218, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned off, and then the process proceeds to step So1219.

In step So1219, end processing of the round display is executed. In this process, the display control of the round display portion 39 in the main display portion 45 is terminated so that the round display portion 39 is turned off. After executing step So1219, the process proceeds to step So1220.

In step So1220, an ending time setting process is executed. The ending time setting process is a process of setting the length of time of the ending period (hereinafter also referred to as ending time) in the open/close execution mode. In this embodiment, the ending time of the same constant length is set for each ending period. Specifically, "3000" (ie, 6 sec) is set in the fourth timer counter area T4 that determines the ending time. The fourth timer counter area T4 is provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM64. After executing step So1220, the process proceeds to step So1221.

In step So1221, an ending command is set. This set ending command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step So0503 in the normal process (FIG. 164). Upon receiving the ending command, the sound emission control device 90 terminates the effect corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode. After executing step So1221, the process proceeds to step So1222.

In step So1222, the ending period flag is turned ON. After that, the game state transition processing is terminated.

When it is determined in step So1201 that the ending period flag is ON (So1201: YES), the process proceeds to step So1223.

In step So1223, it is determined whether or not the ending period has ended. Specifically, in the ending time setting process (So1220), it is determined whether or not the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0". When it is determined in step So1220 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0" (So1223: YES), the process proceeds to step So1224.

In step So1224, the ending period flag is turned off. After that, the process advances to step So1225 to execute transition processing at the end of the ending period. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes of game rounds after the end of the current ending period. Details of the transition processing at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing step So1225, the process proceeds to step So1226 to turn off the opening/closing execution mode flag. After executing step So1226, the process proceeds to step So1227.

In step So1227, it is determined whether or not the total pending number CRN is "0". When the total pending number CRN is "0", it means that the start pending number is "0" for both the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34. FIG. When it is determined in step So1227 that the total pending number CRN is "0" (So1227: YES), the process proceeds to step So1228.

In step So1228, a customer waiting command is set. The customer waiting command is used to make the sound emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub-side, recognize that no hold information is stored in the hold information storage area 64b at the time when the pattern variation (game cycle) ends. is a command that contains information about This set customer waiting command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step So1228 in the normal processing (FIG. 164). After executing step So1228, this game round control process is terminated.

On the other hand, in step So1227, when it is determined that the total pending number CRN is not "0" (So1227: NO), this game round control processing is terminated as it is. Also, in step So1223, when it is determined that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is not "0" (So1223: NO), this game state transition processing is terminated as it is.

<Opening and closing processing of the grand prize opening>
Next, the big winning opening opening/closing process will be described. The big winning opening opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (Fig. 171: So1216).

FIG. 172 is a flow chart showing the big winning opening opening/closing process. In step So1301, it is determined whether or not the door 36b is open. Specifically, the determination is made based on the drive state of the variable winning drive section 36c. When it is determined in step So1301 that the opening/closing door 36b is not open (So1301: NO), the process proceeds to step So1302.

In step So1302, it is determined whether or not the condition for opening the opening/closing door 36b is satisfied. Specifically, the opening/closing scenario set by the opening/closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether or not it is time to open the opening/closing door 36b. When it is determined in step So1302 that the condition for opening the opening/closing door 36b is satisfied (So1302: YES), the process proceeds to step So1303.

In step So1303, the opening/closing door 36b is opened. After that, the process proceeds to step So1304.

In step So1304, a door opening command is set. The opening/closing door open command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the opening/closing door 36b has been opened. The open/close door open command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process of the normal process (FIG. 164: step So0503). After executing step So1304, the big winning opening opening/closing process is ended.

In step So1302, when it is determined that the condition for opening the opening/closing door 36b is not satisfied (So1302: NO), the big winning opening opening/closing process is terminated without executing steps So1303 and So1304.

In step So1301, when it is determined that the door 36b is open (So1301: YES), the process proceeds to step So1305.

In step So1305, it is determined whether or not the condition for closing the opening/closing door 36b is satisfied. Specifically, the opening/closing scenario set by the opening/closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether or not it is time to close the opening/closing door 36b. In step So1305, when it is determined that the condition for closing the opening/closing door 36b is satisfied (So1305: YES), the process proceeds to step So1306.

In step So1306, the opening/closing door 36b is closed. After that, the process proceeds to step So1307.

In step So1307, an opening/closing door closing command is set. The open/close door closing command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the open/close door 36b is closed. The open/close door closing command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 164: step So0503) of the normal process. After executing step So1307, the big winning opening opening/closing process is ended.

In step So1305, when it is determined that the closing condition of the opening/closing door 36b is not established (So1305: NO), the big winning opening opening/closing process is terminated without executing steps So1306 and So1307.

<Transition processing at the end of the ending period>
Next, transition processing at the end of the ending period will be described. The transition process at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (Fig. 171: So1225).

FIG. 173 is a flow chart showing transition processing at the end of the ending period. In step So1401, it is determined whether or not the flag corresponding to the probability variable jackpot in the jackpot flag is turned on. That is, it is determined whether or not the 16R probability variable jackpot flag or the 8R probability variable jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is ON.

In step So1401, when it is determined that the 16R probability variable jackpot flag or the 8R probability variable jackpot flag of RAM64 is ON (So1401: YES), the process proceeds to step So1402, of the 16R probability variable jackpot flag and the 8R probability variable jackpot flag of RAM64 The ON flag is turned OFF. After executing step So1402, the process proceeds to step So1403.

In step So1403, the high-probability mode flag is turned ON, and then the process advances to step So1404 to turn the high-frequency support mode flag ON. As a result, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the game state shifts to a game state in which the lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode. After that, the process proceeds to step So1405.

In step So1405, 100 is set to the number-of-games counter PNC provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM64. The value set in the number-of-games counter PNC indicates the number of games when the number of games is limited and the high-frequency support mode is executed. After that, the process proceeds to step So1406.

In step So1406, a high-probability mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the lottery mode is the high-probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. . After that, the process proceeds to step So1411.

On the other hand, in step So1401, when it is determined that the 16R probability variable jackpot flag and the 8R probability variable jackpot flag of RAM64 are not ON (So1401: NO), the process proceeds to step So1407, and the 8R normal jackpot flag of RAM64 is turned OFF. After that, the process proceeds to step So1408.

In step So1408, after turning on the high-frequency support mode flag, the process proceeds to step So1409, and 100 is set in the number-of-games counter PNC provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM64. After that, the process proceeds to step So1410.

In step So1410, a low-probability mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the lottery mode is the low-probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. . After that, the process proceeds to step So1411.

In step So1411, a high-frequency support mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. set. After that, the transition processing at the end of the ending period ends.

<Electronic support processing>
Next, the processing for electric support will be described. The electric service support process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (Fig. 164: So0508).

FIG. 174 is a flowchart showing processing for electric support. In step So1501, it is determined whether or not it is being supported. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the supported flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The under-support flag is a flag that is turned ON when the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is to be opened, and is turned OFF when it is to be returned to the closed state. If it is determined in step So1501 that the supported flag is not ON (So1501: NO), the process proceeds to step So1502.

In step So1502, it is determined whether or not the support winning flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The support winning flag is turned ON when the electric accessary product open lottery for determining whether or not to open the electric accessary product 34a is won in the open state, and is turned OFF when the supporting flag is ON. is. In step So1502, when it is determined that the support winning flag is not ON (So1502: NO), the process proceeds to step So1503.

In step So1503, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, every 2 msec.

If it is determined in step So1503 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (So1503: NO), the electronic support process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (So1503: YES), the process proceeds to step So1504.

In step So1504, it is determined whether or not it is time to finish the variable display of the symbols in the general pattern unit 38 . In step So1504, when it is determined that it is time to end the variable display (So1504: YES), the process proceeds to step So1505, and after setting the off display, the electronic support process is ended. By setting the deviation display, the variable display of the symbols in the general pattern unit 38 is terminated while the deviation display is stopped. On the other hand, if it is determined in step So1504 that it is not the end timing of the variable display (So1504: NO), the process proceeds to step So1506.

In step So1506, it is determined whether or not the value of the reserved accessory number SN is greater than "0". In step So1506, when it is determined that the value of the reserved accessory number SN is "0" (So1506: NO), the electronic support process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step So1506 that the value of the reserved accessory number SN is greater than "0" (So1506: YES), the process proceeds to step So1507.

In step So1507, it is determined whether or not the open/close execution mode is in progress, and then the process advances to step So1508 to determine whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect. If it is not the opening/closing execution mode in step So1507 (So1507: NO) and if it is in the high-frequency support mode in step So1508 (So1508: YES), the process proceeds to step So1509 to perform the electric accessory opening lottery. Specifically, the value stored in the electric role holding area 64c is shifted, and when the value of the electric role item opening counter C5 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric role item opening lottery be elected. Also, at the same time as the electric accessory open lottery, the second timer counter area T2 is set to "750" (that is, 1.5 sec). The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started. After that, the process proceeds to step So1510.

In step So1510, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory open lottery in step So1509 is support winning. In step So1510, when it is determined that the result of the electric accessory open lottery is support winning (So1510: YES), the process proceeds to step So1511, the support winning flag is turned ON, and provided in various counter areas 64f of RAM64 "3" is set in the second round counter area RC2. The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the electric accessory 34a is released. After that, the electronic support processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in step So1510, when it is determined that the result of the electric accessory open lottery is not support winning (So1510: NO), the process for electric role support ends without executing the process of step So1511.

If it is determined in step So1507 that it is in the opening/closing execution mode (So1507: YES), or if it is determined that it is not in the high-frequency support mode in step So1508 (So1508: NO), the process proceeds to step So1512, and the electric accessory open lottery I do. Specifically, the value stored in the electric role holding area 64c is shifted, and when the value of the electric role item opening counter C5 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric role item opening lottery be elected. At the same time as the electric accessory open lottery, the second timer counter area T2 is set to "14750" (that is, 29.5 sec). After that, the process proceeds to step So1513.

In step So1513, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory open lottery in step So1512 is support winning. In step So1513, if it is determined that the support has not been won (So1513: NO), the electronic support process is terminated. On the other hand, in step So1513, when it is determined that the support is won (So1513: YES), the process advances to step So1514, the support win flag is turned ON, and "1" is set in the second round counter area RC2. , terminates the electronic support process.

If it is determined in step So1502 that the support win flag is ON (So1502: YES), the process proceeds to step So1515 to determine whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38. In step So1515, when it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (So1515: NO), since the pattern is being changed and displayed in the normal figure unit 38, the main electric role support process is performed as it is. exit. On the other hand, when it is determined in step So1515 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (So1515: YES), the process proceeds to step So1516.

In step So1516, a win display is set. As a result, the variation display of the pattern in the normal pattern unit 38 is terminated while the win display is stopped. After that, the process advances to step So1517 to turn on the supporting flag and turn off the support winning flag. After that, the electronic support process is terminated.

In step So1501, when it is determined that the support flag is ON (So1501: YES), the process proceeds to step So1518 to execute the electric opening/closing control process for opening/closing the electric accessory 34a. After that, the electronic support process is terminated.

<Electrical opening/closing control processing>
Next, the electrical opening/closing control process will be described. The electric power opening/closing control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control unit 60 as a subroutine of the electric power support process (Fig. 174: So1518).

FIG. 175 is a flow chart showing the electrical opening/closing control process. In step So1601, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open. Whether or not the electric accessory 34a is being opened is determined by whether or not the electric accessory drive unit 34b is in a driving state. When it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is open (So1601: YES), the process proceeds to step So1602.

In step So1602, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the open duration time of the electric accessory 34a. If it is determined in step So1602 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (So1602: NO), the electric opening/closing control process is terminated. In other words, if the opening continuation time of the electric accessory 34a has not ended, the present electric opening/closing control process is terminated.

In step So1602, when it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (So1602: YES), the process proceeds to step So1603 to perform closing processing for controlling the electric accessory 34a to the closed state, "250" (that is, 0.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as a means for measuring the open duration time of the electric accessory 34a is "0", the electric accessory 34a is closed, and the second timer counter area T2 is electrically operated this time. It is used as a parameter for measuring the closed duration time of the accessory 34a, and "250" is set in the second timer counter area T2. After executing step So1603, the process proceeds to step So1604.

In step So1604, after subtracting 1 from the value of the second round counter area RC2, the process advances to step So1605 to determine whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0". If it is determined in step So1605 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (So1605: NO), the main electrical opening/closing control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step So1605 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0" (So1605: YES), the process advances to step So1606 to turn off the in-support flag. After that, the electrical switching control process is terminated.

In step So1601, when it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is not open (So1601: NO), the process proceeds to step So1607 to determine whether or not the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closed duration time of the electric accessory 34a. In step So1607, if it is determined that the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (So1607: NO), the electrical opening/closing control process is terminated. On the other hand, in step So1607, when it is determined that the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (So1607: YES), the process proceeds to step So1608, and an opening process for controlling the electric accessary product 34a to the open state is executed. . After that, the process proceeds to step So1609.

In step So1609, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress.If it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress (So1609: NO), the process advances to step So1610 to determine whether or not the high-frequency support mode is in effect. do.

If it is determined in step So1610 that the high frequency support mode is in effect (So1610: YES), the process proceeds to step So1611 to set "800" (that is, 1.6 sec) in the second timer counter area T2. After that, the electrical switching control process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step So1609 that it is in the open/close execution mode (So1609: YES), or if it is determined in step So1610 that it is not in the high-frequency support mode (So1610: NO), the process proceeds to step So1612, and the second "100" (that is, 0.2 sec) is set in the timer counter area T2. After that, the electrical switching control process is terminated.

<<4-6>> Various processes executed in the sound emission control device and the display control device:
Next, a specific example of control executed in the audio emission control device and the display control device will be described. The processing executed in the sound emission control device 90 will be described first, and then the processing executed in the display control device 100 will be described.

<Various processing executed in the sound emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, timer interrupt processing executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 will be described.

FIG. 176 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the sound and light side MPU 92. FIG. Timer interrupt processing is repeatedly executed at a relatively short period (for example, 2 msec). Processing of each step executed in timer interrupt processing will be described below.

In step So1701, command storage processing is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing the received command in the sound and light side RAM 94 when a command is received from the main side MPU 62 . The sound and light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer for enabling storage and reading of commands received from the main side MPU 62, and the commands received from the main side MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer. , are read out sequentially according to the order in which they are stored. After executing step So1701, the process proceeds to step So1702.

In step So1702, pending command handling processing is executed. In the pending command processing, processing corresponding to the pending command among the commands stored in step So1701 is performed. Details of the pending command handling process will be described later. After executing step So1702, the process proceeds to step So1703.

In step So1703, a game round effect setting process is executed. In the game round effect setting process, the effect to be executed in the game round from the start of the symbol variation to the stop is set. Details of the game round effect setting process will be described later. After executing step So1703, the process proceeds to step So1704.

In step So1704, processing for opening/closing execution mode effect is executed. In the opening/closing execution mode effect processing, processing related to effects during the opening period, effects during the big winning opening opening/closing process period, and effects during the ending period is performed. After executing step So1704, the process proceeds to step So1705.

In step So1705, the second type petal effect processing is executed. In the second kind petal rendering process, a process for displaying the second kind petal P2 (see FIGS. 155 and 156) on the pattern display device 41 is performed. Specifically, an effect command is transmitted to the display control device 100 to instruct execution of an effect in which the plurality of second type petals P2 move from the upper side to the lower side. The effect command also includes a command to set the display destination of the second type petal P2 to the upper layer L3. The display control device 100 that has received the effect command causes the pattern display device 41 to display the second type petal P2 described above. Instead of transmitting the effect command, a command for instructing the display control device 100 to reproduce video (moving image) data in which the plurality of second type petals P2 move from the upper side to the lower side. The image data may be displayed on the pattern display device 41 by transmission. After executing step So1705, the process proceeds to step So1706.

In step So1706, a third type petal effect setting process is executed. In the third kind petal effect setting process, an effect setting for displaying the third kind petal P3 (see FIGS. 155 to 157) on the pattern display device 41 is set. The details of the third type petal effect setting process will be described later. After executing step So1706, the process proceeds to step So1707.

In step So1707, pending display change setting processing is executed. In the pending display change setting process, an effect setting for changing the display mode of the pending display icon is set. The details of the pending display change setting process will be described later. After executing step So1707, the process proceeds to step So1708.

In step So1708, background effect processing is executed. In the background rendering process, a process of displaying on the pattern display device 41 a background moving image determined according to a command indicating the game state received from the main MPU 62 is performed. For example, a background video indicating that the high-frequency support mode is continuing, a background video indicating that the high-frequency support mode has ended, and a background video indicating that the high-probability mode is continuing are displayed. . Note that these background moving images include images in which a plurality of first-type petals P1 (see FIGS. 155 and 156) dance from the top to the bottom. After executing step So1708, the process proceeds to step So1709.

In step So1709, other processing is executed. Other processing includes processing for displaying a demonstration image (moving image) on the symbol display device 41 when the player is not playing a game. After executing step So1709, the process proceeds to step So1710.

In step So1710, light emission control processing for controlling light emission of various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, light emission control of various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read out in each of the effect processes described above. After executing step So1710, the process proceeds to step So1711.

In step So1711, an audio output control process for controlling the audio output of the speaker 46 is executed. In the audio output control process, audio output control of the speaker 46 is performed based on the audio data read out in the BGM process and each effect process. After executing step So1711, the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

<Processing for pending command>
Next, pending command handling processing will be described. The pending command handling process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (Fig. 176: So1702).

FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing pending command handling processing. In step So1801, it is determined whether or not a pending command has been received from the main MPU62. In step So1801, when it is determined that a pending command has been received from the main MPU 62 (So1801: YES), the process proceeds to step So1802.

In step So1802, update processing at the time of ball entry is executed. In the updating process at the time of ball entry, the number of pieces of pending information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33, the number of pieces of holding information acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 34, Processing is executed so that the sound and light side MPU 92 can specify the total number of these pieces of hold information. The details of the updating process at the time of ball entry in step So1802 will be described later. Hereinafter, the number of holding information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 is also referred to as "first holding number", and the holding information acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 34 The number is also called the "second reserved number", and the total number of the first reserved number and the second reserved number is also called the "total reserved number". After executing step So1802, the process proceeds to step So1803.

In step So1803, pending display control processing is executed. Specifically, in correspondence with the first reserved number and the second reserved number specified in step So1802, the display in the first starting opening reservation area Ds1 and the second starting opening reservation area Ds2 (the reservation display icon is A command for changing the display of how many pieces are arranged is sent to the display control device 100 . The display control device 100, which has received the command, causes the display in the first start opening reservation region Ds1 and the second start opening reservation region Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the first reservation number and the second reservation number. change. Specifically, the display control device 100 that has received the command defines each display position for displaying the reservation display icons H1 to H4 in the first start opening reservation area Ds1, and the first reservation number Display the corresponding number of pending display icons in the display position. In addition, the display control device 100 defines each display position for displaying the pending display icons in the second starting port pending area Ds2, and the number of pending display icons corresponding to the second pending number is displayed at the display position. indicate. After executing step So1803, the pending command handling process ends.

<Update process at the time of ball entry>
Next, update processing at the time of ball entry will be described. The updating process at the time of ball entry is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the hold command handling process (Fig. 177: So1802).

FIG. 178 is a flow chart showing update processing at the time of ball entry. In step So1901, it is determined whether or not the pending command read out this time is the one transmitted based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 or not. In step So1901, if it is determined that the hold command that is the read target this time is transmitted based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 (So1901: YES), the process proceeds to step So1902, and the sound The update processing of the first reserved number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the light-side RAM 94 is executed. The first reservation number counter area is a counter area for specifying the number of pieces of reservation information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting hole 33 in the sound and light side MPU 92 . In the process of updating the first pending number counter area, the information in the first pending number counter area is updated to the pending number information included in the pending command read this time. After executing step So1902, the process proceeds to step So1904.

In step So1901, if it is determined that the pending command to be read this time was not transmitted based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 (So1901: NO), that is, the pending command is the second starting If it is determined that the transmission has been made based on the ball entering the mouth 34, the process proceeds to step So1903 to update the second pending number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound and light side RAM 94. Execute. The second pending number counter area is a counter area for specifying, in the sound and light side MPU 92 , the number of pieces of pending information acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 34 . In the process of updating the second reserved number counter area, the information in the second reserved number counter area is updated to the information of the reserved number included in the command read this time. After executing step So1903, the process proceeds to step So1904.

The reason why steps So1902 and So1903 are performed as described above will be described. In this embodiment, while the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, backup power is supplied to the RAM 64 of the main control device 60, while backup power is supplied to the RAM 94 of the sound emission control device 90. not. Therefore, when the power is cut off in a situation where the hold information related to the ball entering the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34 is stored in the RAM 64 of the main controller 60, the main controller 60 is stored in memory, whereas the sound emission control device 90 recognizes that there are 0 pieces of hold information. In this case, if a configuration is adopted in which the first pending number counter area or the second pending number counter area is counted up each time a pending command is received in the sound emission control device 90, the main controller 60 actually stores the pending memory. Inconvenience may occur in that the number of on-hold information received does not match the number of on-hold information grasped by the sound emission control device 90 . On the other hand, as in the above-described embodiment, the main controller 60 transmits a hold command including information on the number of holds, and the sound emission control device 90 responds to the hold command each time it receives the hold command. By adopting a configuration in which information on the contained number of reserved items is set in the first reserved number counter area or the second reserved number counter area, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above inconveniences.

In step So1904, update processing of the total pending number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound and light side RAM 94 is executed. The total pending number counter area is the sum of the number of pending information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 and the number of pending information acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 34. This is a counter area for specifying in the sound and light side MPU 92 . In the update process, the information of the total pending number counter area is the sum of the information of the pending number measured in the first pending number counter area and the information of the pending number measured in the second pending number counter area. update to After executing step So1904, the process proceeds to step So1905.

In step So1905, parameter setting processing for pending effect is executed. In the pending effect parameter setting process, various parameters necessary for changing the display mode of the pending display are set. The details of the parameter setting process for holding effect will be described later. After executing step So1905, the update process at the time of the actual ball entry is terminated.

The storage area for pending effect used in the parameter setting process for pending effect in step So1905 will be described next. The parameters set by the parameter setting process for holding effect are stored in the holding effect storage area 94 d provided in the sound/light side RAM 94 provided in the sound emission control device 90 .

FIG. 179 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the pending effect storage area 94d. The holding effect storage area 94d includes a first starting opening holding effect storage area and a second starting opening holding effect storage area. FIG. 179(a) shows the storage area for the first start opening reservation effect, and FIG. 179(b) shows the storage area for the second start opening reservation effect.

The storage area for the first start opening reservation effect is a storage area for storing various parameters necessary for changing the display mode of the reservation display icons H1 to H4 of the first start opening reservation area Ds1. The storage area for the second start opening reservation effect is a storage area for storing various parameters necessary for changing the display mode of the reservation display icon of the second start opening reservation area Ds2. Since the storage area for the first starting opening reserved effect and the storage area for the second starting opening reserved effect have the same configuration, the storage area for the first starting opening reserved effect shown in FIG. A description of the storage area for the second start opening hold effect shown in 179(b) will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 179(a), the storage area for the first starting opening pending effect stores various parameters for each holding game round (n) for the first starting opening. The illustrated pending game times (n=1 to 4) for the first starting port correspond to the pending display icons H1 to H4. That is, the reserved game rounds are executed in order from the reserved game rounds of the first starting opening (n=1) to the reserved game rounds of the first starting opening (n=4).

As shown in the figure, the storage area for the first starting opening pending effect stores a display level upper limit value Lvm and a display level Lvr as various parameters for each holding game round (n) for the first starting opening.

The display level upper limit value Lvm is a parameter that defines the upper limit value of how high the display level Lvr can be changed when changing the display mode of the pending display icon. For example, a suspended display icon whose display level upper limit value Lvm is 5 can have its display level Lvr changed up to 5. FIG. A suspended display icon whose display level upper limit value Lvm is 3 can change the display level Lvr up to 3, but cannot change the display level Lvr to a display level Lvr higher than 3, such as 4 or 5.

The display level Lvr is a parameter indicating the current display mode level of the pending display icon, as described with reference to FIG.

The display level upper limit value Lvm and the display level Lvr are associated with various parameters such as the jackpot random number counter C1 in each pending game round, and each time a game round is executed, the stored area changes to the next pending game round. storage area. For example, as shown in FIGS. 179(a) and 179(b), the display level upper limit value Lvm and the display level Lvr stored in the storage area of the pending game round (n=4) of the first starting port are Each parameter is shifted to the storage area of the reserved game round (n=3) of the first starting opening in the storage area for the first starting opening reserved effect when the game round is executed once, and furthermore, the game round is executed once. When it is executed, it shifts to the storage area of the reserved game round (n=2) of the first starting opening in the storage area for first starting opening reserved effect.

It should be noted that the display level upper limit value Lvm and the display level Lvr are values that are stored corresponding to the pending game round when a game ball enters the starting hole and a pending game round exists. is. Therefore, as an example is shown in FIG. 179(b), for example, at a certain time, there are reserved game times for the second starting port (n=3) and reserved game times for the second starting port (n=4). If not, the display level upper limit value Lvm and the display level Lvr corresponding to the reserved game round are not stored. The pending effect parameter setting process executed using the pending effect storage area will be described below.

<Parameter setting processing for pending effect>
FIG. 180 is a flow chart showing a parameter setting process for holding effects. The holding effect parameter setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the update process at the time of ball entry (Fig. 178: So1905).

In step So2001, display level upper limit value setting processing is executed. This process is a process executed to set the display level upper limit value Lvm. Details of the display level upper limit value setting process will be described later. After executing the display level upper limit value setting process in step So2001, the process proceeds to step So2002.

In step So2002, 1 is set to the display level Lvr of the reserved game round corresponding to the current game ball entry. This pending effect parameter setting process is a process that is executed each time a game ball enters the starting hole. 1 is set to the display level Lvr of the storage area of the reserved game round corresponding to the entry in the storage area for the first start opening reservation effect or the storage area for the second start opening reservation effect. In this process, the display level Lvr of the reserved game round corresponding to the ball entry is set to 1, so the display mode is set to white corresponding to the display level Lvr of 1. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the starting hole, the display level Lvr of the storage area of the reserved game round corresponding to the entry is set to 1. For example, the display level upper limit Lvm Within the following range, if the reach random number counter C3 acquired by the entry is scheduled to execute the reach effect according to the reach determination table, the display level Lvr is set to 2, or the entry When the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 obtained by the ball is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning, the display level Lvr is set to a value of 2 or more. The display level Lvr may be determined based on the value. After executing step So2002, this parameter setting process for holding effect is terminated.

<Display level upper limit setting processing>
FIG. 181 is a flowchart showing display level upper limit value setting processing. The display level upper limit value setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (Fig. 180: So2001) of the parameter setting process for holding effects.

In step So2101, the value of the upper limit value setting counter Cm is obtained. The upper limit value setting counter Cm is used when the sound and light side MPU 92 determines the display level upper limit value Lvm. The upper limit value setting counter Cm is configured as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 99 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. After executing step So2101, the process proceeds to step So2102.

In step So2102, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 in the reserved game round corresponding to the current game ball entry wins the jackpot in the winning lottery. Specifically, based on the information about the determination result of the ahead determination process included in the hold command acquired by the sound and light side MPU 92 from the main side MPU 62 by the ahead determination process executed with the ball entering the starting opening this time as a trigger. to judge.

In step So2102, when it is determined that the reserved game round corresponding to the current game ball entry has won the jackpot (So2102: YES), the process proceeds to step So2103.

In step So2103, the jackpot upper limit table is referred to. Specifically, the value of the display level upper limit value Lvm corresponding to the acquired upper limit value setting counter Cm is extracted with reference to the jackpot upper limit value table.

FIG. 182 is an explanatory diagram of an upper limit value table. FIG. 182(a) shows a jackpot upper limit value table.

The jackpot upper limit value table is table data in which each value (0 to 99) of the upper limit value setting counter Cm and the value of the display level upper limit value Lvm are recorded in association with each other. The sound and light side MPU 92 extracts the value of the display level upper limit value Lvm corresponding to the acquired upper limit value setting counter Cm with reference to the big win upper limit table.

As shown in the figure, in the jackpot upper limit table, 80 values from 20 to 99 correspond to the display level upper limit Lvm=5 as the value of the upper limit setting counter Cm, and as the value of the upper limit setting counter Cm Ten values from 10 to 19 correspond to the display level upper limit value Lvm=4, and five values from 5 to 9 as the value of the upper limit value setting counter Cm correspond to the display level upper limit value Lvm=3. Four values from 1 to 4 correspond to the display level upper limit value Lvm=2 as values of the value setting counter Cm, and one upper limit value setting counter Cm having a value of 0 corresponds to the display level upper limit value Lvm=2. A value is set corresponding to the display level upper limit value Lvm=1. That is, the display level upper limit value Lvm is configured to have the highest probability of becoming 5 in the reserved game round in which the big win is won in the winning lottery.

FIG. 182(b) shows the reach upper limit value table. The reach upper limit table is an upper limit table used in step So2105, which will be described later. Like the jackpot upper limit table, the reach upper limit table is also table data in which each value (0 to 99) of the upper limit setting counter Cm and the value of the display level upper limit Lvm are recorded in association with each other. is. It is configured such that the display level upper limit value Lvm has the highest probability of being 4, followed by the probability of being 5 or 3 in the suspended game rounds in which ready-to-win occurs.

FIG. 182(c) shows the non-reach upper limit value table. The non-reach upper limit value table is an upper limit value table used in step So2106, which will be described later. In the reach non-generating upper limit table, each value (0 to 99) of the upper limit setting counter Cm and the value of the display level upper limit Lvm are recorded in association with each other in the same manner as the jackpot upper limit table. It is table data. The display level upper limit value Lvm has the highest probability of being 1, and the probability of being 2 is the second highest in the hold game rounds in which no reach occurs.

The description returns to FIG. In step So2103, after referring to the jackpot upper limit table, the process proceeds to step So2107.

On the other hand, in step So2102, when it is determined that the reserved game round corresponding to the entry of the game ball this time has not won the jackpot (So2102: NO), the process proceeds to step So2104.

In step So2104, it is determined whether or not the reserved game turn corresponding to the current entry of the game ball corresponds to the game turn to generate reach. That is, it is determined whether or not the reach random number counter C3 corresponding to the current reserved game round corresponds to the occurrence of reach. Specifically, based on the information about the determination result of the first determination process included in the hold command acquired by the sound and light side MPU 92 from the main side MPU 62 by the first determination process executed with the ball entering the starting opening this time as a trigger judge.

In step So2104, when it is determined that the reserved game round corresponding to the current game ball entry corresponds to the game round in which reach is generated (So2104: YES), the process proceeds to step So2105.

In step So2105, the reach upper limit table is referred to. More specifically, the value of the display level upper limit value Lvm corresponding to the obtained upper limit value setting counter Cm is extracted by referring to the reach upper limit value table. After that, the process proceeds to step So2107.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step So2104 that the reserved game round corresponding to the current game ball entry does not correspond to the game round in which reach is generated (So2104: NO), the process proceeds to step So2106.

In step So2106, the reach non-occurrence upper limit table is referred to. More specifically, the value of the display level upper limit value Lvm corresponding to the acquired upper limit value setting counter Cm is extracted by referring to the non-reach upper limit value table. After that, the process proceeds to step So2107.

In step So2107, the value of the display level upper limit value Lvm extracted in any one of step So2103, step So2105, or step So2106 is stored in the storage area for the first starting entrance pending effect or the storage area for the second starting entrance pending effect, It is set in the storage area of the display level upper limit value Lvm corresponding to the current reserved game round. After that, the display level upper limit value setting process is terminated.

<Game round effect setting processing>
Next, the game round effect setting process will be described. The game round effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (Fig. 176: So1703).

FIG. 183 is a flow chart showing a game round effect setting process. In step So2201, it is determined whether or not a variation command and a type command have been received. When it is determined in step So2201 that at least one of the variation command and the type command has not been received (So2201: NO), this game cycle effect setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step So2201 that the command for variation and the type command have been received (So2201: YES), the process proceeds to step So2202.

In step So2202, the command for variation received this time is read, and information on the presence or absence of the big win, the type of the big win, the presence or absence of reach occurrence, and the variation time is read from the command. Then, the read information is stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 . After that, the process proceeds to step So2203.

In step So2203, an effect pattern setting process is executed for setting a pattern of effect to be executed in a game cycle such as a big win or a ready-to-win game. Details of the effect pattern setting process will be described later. After executing step So2203, the process proceeds to step So2204.

In step So2204, a stop symbol setting process is executed. In the stop symbol setting process, if the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a 16R probability variable jackpot, an 8R probability variable jackpot, a 16R normal jackpot, or an 8R normal jackpot, a symbol is displayed on the effective line L of the pattern display device 41. Information corresponding to a stop result in which the same combination of symbols is established is set as information of the current stopped symbol. Specifically, when the result of the winning lottery of the current game round is the 16R probability variable jackpot or the 8R probability variable jackpot, the same combination of odd-numbered symbols can be selected as the same combination of symbols, and the same Even symbol combinations may be selected. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the selection rate is the same for the combination of the same odd-numbered symbols and the combination of the same even-numbered symbols. A configuration in which the ratio is high may be adopted, and the latter may be configured to have a higher selection ratio than the former. Also, the combination of "7" symbols is selected only in the case of a 16R probability variable jackpot. In addition, when the result of the winning lottery of the current game round is a 16R normal jackpot or an 8R normal jackpot, the same combination of even-numbered symbols is selected as the same combination of symbols.

If the result of the winning lottery in the current game round is a losing result, it is determined whether or not the ready-to-win is generated from the content of the command for variation. When it is determined that it corresponds to the occurrence of ready-to-win, it corresponds to the stop result that the combination of the same symbols on the effective line L does not materialize and the combination of the ready-to-win symbols on the effective line L does. information is determined as the information of the result of this stop. On the other hand, when it is determined that it does not correspond to the occurrence of ready-to-win, the result is a stop result in which the combination of the same symbols on the effective line L does not materialize and the combination of the ready-to-win symbols on the effective line L does not materialize. The corresponding information is set as the information of the current stop symbol. After executing step So2204, the process proceeds to step So2205.

In step So2205, a process for setting a variation display pattern for the current game round is executed. In this process, information on the variation time of the current game round is specified from the content of the variation command received this time, and a combination of the information on the variation time and the information on the stop symbol set in step So2204 is obtained. Select the corresponding variable display pattern. When selecting a variation display pattern, the variation display pattern table stored in the variation display pattern table storage area 93b (FIG. 151) of the sound and light side ROM 93 is referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step So2206.

In step So2206, the information of the effect pattern, the stop pattern, and the variable display pattern set in the current game round is set in the effect command. After that, the process proceeds to step So2207, and the effect command is transmitted to the display side MPU102. The display-side MPU 102 executes processing for displaying the effect contents corresponding to the received effect command on the pattern display device 41 . After executing step So2207, the process proceeds to step So2208.

In step So2208, update processing at the start of fluctuation is executed. In the update process at the start of fluctuation, the process of decreasing the first reserved number or the second reserved number by 1 is performed at the start of fluctuation. The details of the update process at the start of fluctuation will be described later. After executing step So2208, the process proceeds to step So2209.

In step So2209, pending display control processing is executed. The pending display control process is similar to the pending display control process executed in step So1803 of the pending command handling process (FIG. 177). Specifically, in correspondence with the first reserved number and the second reserved number specified in step So2208, the display in the first start opening reservation area Ds1 and the second start opening reservation area Ds2 (the reservation display icon is A command for changing the display of how many pieces are arranged is sent to the display control device 100 . The display control device 100, which has received the command, causes the display in the first start opening reservation region Ds1 and the second start opening reservation region Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the first reservation number and the second reservation number. change. Specifically, the display control device 100 that has received the command defines four display positions for displaying the reservation display icons H1 to H4 in the first start opening reservation area Ds1. Display the number of pending display icons corresponding to the display position. In addition, the display control device 100 defines four display positions for displaying the pending display icons in the second starting port pending area Ds2, and displays the number of pending display icons corresponding to the second pending number at the display positions. to display. Furthermore, in the pending display control process of step So2209, a pending display icon is displayed above the pending digestion area Dm. After executing step So2209, the game round effect setting process is terminated.

<Production pattern setting process>
Next, the effect pattern setting process will be described. The production pattern setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the game round production setting process (Fig. 183: So2203).

FIG. 184 is a flow chart showing effect pattern setting processing. In step So2301, a production pattern random number acquisition process is executed. In the effect pattern random number acquisition process, the effect pattern random number RN is acquired from the lottery counter area 94c (FIG. 151) of the sound and light side RAM 94. FIG. After that, the process proceeds to step So2302.

In step So2302, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a big win. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery is a big win from the information on the presence or absence of a big win stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 by step So2202 of the game round effect setting process (FIG. 183). . In step So2302, when it is determined that the result of the winning lottery is the jackpot winning (So2302: YES), the process proceeds to step So2303.

In step So2303, it is determined whether or not a petal re-variation lottery winning command has been received. If it is determined in step So2303 that the petal re-variation lottery winning command has not been received (So2303: NO), the process proceeds to step So2304.

In step So2304, referring to the normal jackpot effect pattern table stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 151) of the sound and light side ROM 93, the fluctuation time read out in step So2202 (FIG. 183), A normal jackpot performance pattern corresponding to the value of the current performance pattern random number RN is acquired. In the effect pattern table storage area 93a of the sound and light side ROM 93, there are two effect pattern tables for storing effect patterns in the case of winning a big win: a normal big win effect pattern table and a big win effect pattern table with re-variation. Kinds are available. In step So2304, a normal jackpot effect pattern table is referred to. The variable time read by step So2202 (FIG. 183) when executing step So2304 is the normal It is the fluctuation time for the jackpot. Therefore, the effect pattern obtained in step So2304 corresponds to the normal big hit fluctuation time obtained by the main side MPU62. After executing step So2304, the process proceeds to step So2309.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step So2303 that the petal re-variation lottery winning command has been received (So2303: YES), the process proceeds to step So2305.

In step So2305, referring to the big hit production pattern table with re-variation, which is stored in the production pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 151) of the sound and light side ROM 93, the fluctuation time read out in step So2202 (FIG. 183) , and the value of the random number RN for the present effect pattern, and the big win effect pattern accompanied by re-variation corresponding to the value of the current effect pattern random number RN is obtained. The variable time read out by step So2202 (FIG. 183) when executing step So2306 is the reproduced time obtained by executing steps So1006 and So1007 in the variable time setting process (FIG. 169) executed by main MPU 62. It is a variation time for a big hit with variation. Therefore, the effect pattern acquired in step So2305 corresponds to the big hit variation time accompanied by re-variation obtained by the main MPU 62 . After executing step So2305, the process proceeds to step So2309. The big win effect pattern with re-variation represents the big win effect with re-variation shown in FIG. 159, and includes the fourth type petal P4.

On the other hand, in step So2302, if it is determined that the result of the winning lottery related to the current game round is not a jackpot winning (So2302: NO), the process proceeds to step So2306 to determine whether reach occurs in the current game round. judge. Specifically, it is determined whether or not reach occurs from the information on the presence or absence of reach occurrence stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 in step So2202 of the game cycle effect setting process (FIG. 178). In step So2306, when it is determined that reach occurs in this game round (So2306: YES), the process proceeds to step So2307.

In step So2307, the effect pattern table for reach generation stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 151) of the sound and light side ROM 93 is referred to, and the fluctuation time read out in step So2202 (FIG. 183) and the current obtains an effect pattern for generating a reach corresponding to the value of the random number RN for the effect pattern. The variable time read by step So2202 (FIG. 183) when executing step So2307 is the reach obtained by executing steps So1011 and So1007 in the variable time setting process (FIG. 169) executed by the main MPU 62. Variable time for generation. Therefore, the effect pattern acquired in step So2307 corresponds to the fluctuation time for reach generation obtained by the main MPU 62. FIG. After executing step So2307, the process proceeds to step So2309.

In step So2306, when it is determined that reach does not occur in this game cycle (So2306: NO), the process proceeds to step So2308.

In step So2308, with reference to the effect pattern table for reach non-occurrence stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 151) of the sound and light side ROM 93, the fluctuation time read out in step So2202 (FIG. 183), A production pattern for non-generating reach corresponding to the value of the random number RN for this production pattern is acquired. The variable time read by step So2202 (FIG. 183) when executing step So2308 is the reach obtained by executing steps So1012 and So1007 in the variable time setting process (FIG. 169) executed by the main MPU 62. Variable time for non-generation. For this reason, the effect pattern acquired in step So2308 corresponds to the fluctuation time for non-occurrence of reach obtained by the main MPU 62 . After executing step So2308, the process proceeds to step So2309.

At step So2309, the effect pattern acquired at step So2304, step So2305, step So2307 or step So2308 is set as the effect pattern to be executed in the current game round. After executing step So2309, the process proceeds to step So2310.

In step So2310, a game time remaining time setting process is executed. The game remaining time setting process is a process of setting the remaining time of the current game (referred to as game remaining time). Specifically, a count value corresponding to the variable time read in step So2202 (FIG. 183) is set in the timer counter area T30 indicating the remaining game time. The timer counter area T30 is provided in various counter areas 94b of the sound and light side RAM 94. FIG. The count value set in the timer counter area T30 is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, every 2 msec. After executing step So2310, the effect pattern setting process is terminated.

<Update processing at the start of fluctuation>
Next, update processing at the start of fluctuation will be described. The update process at the start of fluctuation is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the game cycle effect setting process (Fig. 183: So2208).

FIG. 185 is a flowchart showing update processing at the start of fluctuation. In step So2401, the variation command received this time is related to the hold information acquired based on the ball entering the first start hole 33 in the current game round (hereinafter referred to as the first variation command). or whether it relates to the hold information acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 34 (hereinafter referred to as a second variation command). If it is determined in step So2401 that the variation command received this time is the first variation command (So2401: YES), the process proceeds to step So2402.

In step So2402, 1 is subtracted from the first pending number counter stored in the sound and light side RAM 94 . After that, the process proceeds to step So2403.

In step So2403, the data (display level upper limit value Lvm and display level Lvr) stored in the storage area for the first start opening hold effect (see FIG. 179(a)) stored in the sound and light side RAM 94 is shifted. Execute the process. This shift processing is processing for sequentially shifting the data stored in the storage area to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After executing step So2403, the process proceeds to step So2406.
nothing.

On the other hand, in step So2401, if it is determined that the variation command received this time is not the first variation command, that is, it is the second variation command (So2401: NO), the process proceeds to step So2404, and 1 is subtracted from the stored second reservation number counter. After that, the process proceeds to step So2405.

In step So2405, the data (display level upper limit value Lvm and display level Lvr) stored in the storage area for the second start entrance hold effect (see FIG. 179(b)) stored in the sound and light side RAM 94 are shifted. Execute the process. This shift processing is processing for sequentially shifting the data stored in the storage area to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After executing step So2405, the process proceeds to step So2406.

In step So2406, the information in the total pending number counter area is updated so that the total pending number stored in the total pending number counter area of the sound and light side RAM 94 is decremented by one. After that, the update process at the start of fluctuation is ended.

<Third kind flower petal effect setting process>
Next, the third type petal effect setting process will be described. The third type petal effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (Fig. 176: So1706).

FIG. 186 is a flow chart showing the third type petal effect setting process. In step So2501, the third type petal effect setting process for holding the first starting opening is executed. The details of the third type petal effect setting process for holding the first starting opening will be described later. After executing step So2501, the process proceeds to step So2502.

In step So2502, the third type petal effect setting process for holding the second start opening is executed. The details of the setting processing for setting the third type petal effect for holding the second start opening will be described later. After step So2502 is executed, this third type petal effect setting process is ended.

<Third-type petal effect setting processing for holding first start opening>
Next, a description will be given of the third type petal effect setting process for holding the first starting opening. The third type petal effect setting process for holding the first starting opening is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the third type petal effect setting process (Fig. 186: So2501).

FIG. 187 is a flow chart showing the process of setting the third type petal effect for holding the first start opening. In step So2601, it is determined whether or not it is the first execution from when the power switch 88 is switched from the off state to the on state (when the power is turned on). In step So2601, if it is determined that it is the first execution after power-on (So2601: YES), the process proceeds to step So2603.

On the other hand, in step So2601, if it is determined that it is not the first execution after the power is turned on (So2601: NO), the process proceeds to step So2602, and the third type petal effect setting process for holding the first starting opening was executed last time. It is determined whether or not 5 seconds or more have passed since. In step So2602, if it is determined that 5 seconds or more have not elapsed (So2602: NO), this first start opening holding third petal effect setting process is ended.

If it is determined in step So2602 that 5 seconds or more have elapsed (So2602: YES), the process proceeds to step So2603. That is, by the processing of steps So2601 and So2602, the processing after step So2603 is repeatedly executed at intervals of 5 seconds after the power is turned on.

In step So2603, the variable J stored in the sound and light side RAM 94 is incremented by one. It is assumed that the variable J is initialized to a value of 0 when the power is turned on. After executing step So2603, the process proceeds to step So2604.

In step So2604, it is determined whether the variable J is 1 or not. If it is determined in step So2604 that the variable J is 1 (So2604: YES), the process proceeds to step So2605.

In step So2605, a petal effect setting process for special 1/suspension 1 is executed. In the special 1/hold 1 petal effect setting process, the special 1/hold toward the first holding display icon H1 located on the rightmost side in the first start opening holding area Ds1 displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. 157). The details of the petal effect setting process for special 1/hold 1 will be described later. After step So2605 is executed, this third kind petal effect setting process for holding the first starting opening is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step So2604 that the variable J is not 1 (So2604: NO), the process advances to step So2606 to determine whether the variable J is 2 or not. If it is determined in step So2606 that the variable J is 2 (So2606: YES), the process proceeds to step So2607.

In step So2607, a petal effect setting process for special 1/hold 2 is executed. The petal effect setting process for Special 1/Reservation 2 is directed to the second reservation display icon H2 positioned second from the right side in the first start opening reservation area Ds1 displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41.・This is the rendering process for the petal Pb for hold 2 (see FIG. 157). The details of the special 1/hold 2 petal effect setting process will be described later. After step So2607 is executed, this third type petal effect setting process for holding the first starting opening is ended.

If it is determined in step So2606 that the variable J is not 2 (So2606: NO), the process advances to step So2608 to determine whether the variable J is 3 or not. If it is determined in step So2608 that the variable J is 3 (So2608: YES), the process proceeds to step So2609.

In step So2609, a petal effect setting process for special 1/suspension 3 is executed. The petal effect setting process for Special 1/Reservation 3 is directed to the third reservation display icon H3 located third from the right side in the first start opening reservation area Ds1 displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. Special 1・This is the rendering process for the petal Pc for reservation 3 (see FIG. 157). The details of the special 1/hold 3 petal effect setting process will be described later. After step So2609 is executed, this third kind petal effect setting process for holding the first starting opening is ended.

If it is determined in step So2608 that the variable J is not 3, that is, if the variable J is 4 (So2608: NO), the process proceeds to step So2610.

In step So2610, a special 1/hold 4 petal effect setting process is executed. The petal effect setting process for Special 1/Reservation 4 is directed to the fourth reservation display icon H4 located fourth from the right side in the first start opening reservation area Ds1 displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. Special 1・This is the rendering process for the petal Pd for reservation 4 (see FIG. 157). The details of the special 1/hold 4 petal effect setting process will be described later. After executing step So2610, the process proceeds to step So2611.

At step So2611, the variable J is set to 0. After step So2611 is executed, this third kind petal effect setting process for holding the first starting opening ends.

<Special 1/Pending 1 Petal Effect Setting Process>
Next, the petal effect setting process for special 1/suspension 1 will be described. The special 1/reservation 1 petal effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (Fig. 187: So2605) of the third type petal effect setting process for the first starting opening reserving.

FIG. 188 is a flow chart showing the special 1/hold 1 petal effect setting process. In step So2701, petal trajectory lottery processing is executed. In the petal trajectory lottery process, as the trajectory of the petal Pa for special 1 and hold 1 displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, one of the target hold arrival trajectory, the first target non-hold trajectory, and the second target non-hold trajectory This is a process of determining by lottery which one is to be adopted. Specifically, a value is obtained from a random number counter for the petal trajectory lottery, and this value is collated with the petal trajectory lottery table stored in the ROM 93 on the sound and light side to make the above determination. A random number counter for lottery for the petal trajectory is provided in various counter areas 94b of the RAM 94 on the sound and light side. The random number counter is updated at short intervals.

FIG. 189 is an explanatory diagram showing a petal trajectory lottery table. As shown in FIG. 189, among the values of the random number counter for the petal trajectory lottery of '0 to 1199', '0 to 399' corresponds to the target holding arrival trajectory, and '400 to 799' corresponds to the first target. It corresponds to the non-holding orbit, and "800 to 1199" corresponds to the second target non-holding orbit.

In the petal trajectory lottery process, if the value of the acquired random number counter falls within the range of "0 to 399" associated with the "target hold arrival trajectory" in the petal trajectory lottery table, the target hold arrival trajectory is set. Decide to adopt. When the obtained random number counter value falls within the range of "400 to 799" associated with the "first target non-reserved trajectory" in the petal trajectory lottery table, the first target non-reserved trajectory is adopted. decide. If the obtained random number counter value falls within the range of "800 to 1199" associated with the "second target non-reserved trajectory" in the petal trajectory lottery table, the second target non-reserved trajectory is adopted. decide.

In this embodiment, the distribution ratio of the target hold arrival trajectory, the first target non-holding trajectory, and the second target non-holding trajectory in the petal trajectory lottery table is set to 1:1:1, but it is not necessary to be limited to this. , the ratio allocated to the target hold arrival trajectory may be larger or smaller than the ratio allocated to the first target non-holding trajectory and the second target non-holding trajectory.

Return to FIG. After executing the petal trajectory lottery process in step So2701, the process proceeds to step So2702.

In step So2702, a process of displaying on the pattern display device 41 the special 1/hold 1 petal Pa moving along the lottery result of the petal trajectory lottery process is performed. Specifically, when the lottery result of the petal trajectory lottery process is the target hold arrival trajectory, a command to display the special 1 / hold 1 petal Pa moving along the target hold arrival trajectory is issued to the display control device 100 Send to The command also includes that the display destination of the petal Pa for special 1/suspension 1 is set to the upper layer L3. The display control device 100 that has received the command causes the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 to display the petal Pa for special 1 and hold 1 that moves along the target hold arrival trajectory.

If the lottery result of the petal trajectory lottery process is the first target non-holding trajectory, a command to display the special 1 / holding 1 petal Pa moving along the first target non-holding trajectory is sent to the display control device 100. Send. The command also includes that the display destination of the petal Pa for special 1/suspension 1 is set to the upper layer L3. The display control device 100, which has received the command, causes the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 to display the special 1/holding 1 petal Pa moving on the first target non-holding trajectory.

If the lottery result of the petal trajectory lottery process is the second target non-holding trajectory, a command to display the special 1 / holding 1 petal Pa moving along the second target non-holding trajectory is sent to the display control device 100. Send. The command also includes that the display destination of the petal Pa for special 1/suspension 1 is set to the upper layer L3. The display control device 100, which has received the command, causes the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 to display the special 1/holding 1 petal Pa moving on the second target non-holding trajectory. After executing step So2702, the process proceeds to step So2703.

In step So2703, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the petal trajectory lottery process executed in step So2701 is the target hold arrival trajectory. In step So2703, if it is determined that the lottery result is the target hold arrival trajectory (step So2703: YES), proceed to step So2704, whether the trajectory of the special 1 hold 1 petal Pa is the target hold arrival trajectory 1 is set to the flag F11 indicating whether or not. After executing step So2704, the process proceeds to step So2705.

In step So2705, the arrival required time setting process for Special 1/Hold 1 is executed. The special 1/suspension 1 required arrival time setting process is the length of time required for the special 1/suspension 1 petal Pa to reach the destination first suspension display icon H1 (hereinafter also referred to as the required arrival time ) is set. Specifically, a count value corresponding to 10 seconds is set in the timer counter area T11 that determines the required arrival time. The timer counter area T11 is provided in various counter areas 94b of the sound and light side RAM 94. FIG. The count value set in the timer counter area T11 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, every 2 msec. After step So2705 is executed, the petal effect setting process for main special 1/suspension 1 ends.

On the other hand, in step So2703, if it is determined that the lottery result is not the target hold arrival trajectory (step So2703: NO), the process proceeds to step So2706, and the trajectory of the special 1/hold 1 petal Pa is the target hold arrival trajectory 0 is set to a flag F11 indicating whether or not After step So2706 is executed, the petal effect setting process for main special 1/suspension 1 ends.

<Special 1/Suspended 2 Petal Effect Setting Processing>
Next, the special 1/hold 2 petal effect setting process will be described. The special 1/suspend 2 petal effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the audio light emission control device 90 as a subroutine (Fig. 187: So2607) of the third type petal effect setting process for the first start opening hold.

FIG. 190 is a flow chart showing the special 1/hold 2 petal effect setting process. In step So2801, petal trajectory lottery processing is executed. In the petal trajectory lottery process, the trajectory of the special 1/hold 2 petal Pb displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 is the target hold arrival trajectory, the first target non-holding trajectory, or the second target non-holding trajectory. This is a process of determining by lottery which one is to be adopted. Specifically, similarly to step So2701 of the special 1/hold 1 petal effect setting process (FIG. 188), a value is obtained from the random number counter for the petal trajectory lottery, and this value is stored in the sound and light side ROM 93. The above determination is made by collating with the petal trajectory lottery table. After executing step So2801, the process proceeds to step So2802.

In step So2802, a process of displaying on the pattern display device 41 the special 1/suspended 2 petal Pb that moves along the lottery result of the petal trajectory lottery process is performed. Specifically, when the lottery result of the petal trajectory lottery process is the target hold arrival trajectory, a command to display the special 1 and hold 2 petals Pb moving along the target hold arrival trajectory is issued to the display control device 100. Send to The command also includes the effect that the display destination of the special 1/hold 2 petal Pb is set to the upper layer L3. When the lottery result of the petal trajectory lottery process is the first target non-holding trajectory, a command to display the special 1 / holding 2 petal Pb that moves along the first target non-holding trajectory is sent to the display control device 100. Send. The command also includes the effect that the display destination of the special 1/hold 2 petal Pb is set to the upper layer L3. If the lottery result of the petal trajectory lottery process is the second target non-holding trajectory, a command to display the special 1 / holding 2 petal Pb that moves along the second target non-holding trajectory is sent to the display control device 100. Send. The command also includes the effect that the display destination of the special 1/hold 2 petal Pb is set to the upper layer L3. After executing step So2802, the process proceeds to step So2803.

In step So2803, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the petal trajectory lottery process executed in step So2801 is the target hold arrival trajectory. In step So2803, if it is determined that the lottery result is the target hold arrival trajectory (step So2803: YES), proceed to step So2804, whether the trajectory of the petal Pb for special 1 and hold 2 is the target hold arrival trajectory 1 is set to the flag F12 indicating whether or not. After executing step So2804, the process proceeds to step So2805.

In step So2805, the arrival required time setting process for special 1/suspension 2 is executed. The required arrival time setting process for Special 1/Reservation 2 sets the length of time required for the Petal Pb for Special 1/Reservation 2 to reach the second reservation display icon H2, which is the destination (hereinafter also referred to as the required arrival time). ) is set. Specifically, a count value corresponding to 10 seconds is set in the timer counter area T12 that determines the required arrival time. The timer counter area T12 is provided in various counter areas 94b of the sound and light side RAM 94. FIG. The count value set in the timer counter area T12 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, every 2 msec. After step So2805 is executed, the petal effect setting process for this special 1/suspension 2 ends.

On the other hand, in step So2803, if it is determined that the lottery result is not the target hold arrival trajectory (step So2803: NO), the process proceeds to step So2806, and the trajectory of the special 1 hold 2 petal Pb is the target hold arrival trajectory 0 is set to a flag F12 indicating whether or not After step So2806 is executed, the petal effect setting process for main special 1/suspension 2 ends.

<Special 1/Reserved 3 Petal Effect Setting Processing>
Next, the petal effect setting process for special 1/suspension 3 will be described. The special 1/reservation 3 petal effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the audio light emission control device 90 as a subroutine (Fig. 187: So2609) of the third type petal effect setting process for the first starting opening reserving.

FIG. 191 is a flow chart showing the special 1/hold 3 petal effect setting process. In step So2901, petal trajectory lottery processing is executed. In the petal trajectory lottery process, as the trajectory of the special 1/hold 3 petal Pc displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, one of the target hold arrival trajectory, the first target non-hold trajectory, and the second target non-hold trajectory This is a process of determining by lottery which one is to be adopted. Specifically, similarly to step So2701 of the special 1/hold 1 petal effect setting process (FIG. 188), a value is obtained from the random number counter for the petal trajectory lottery, and this value is stored in the sound and light side ROM 93. The above determination is made by collating with the petal trajectory lottery table. After executing step So2901, the process proceeds to step So2902.

In step So2902, a process of displaying on the pattern display device 41 the special 1/hold 3 petal Pc that moves along the lottery result of the petal trajectory lottery process is performed. Specifically, when the lottery result of the petal trajectory lottery process is the target hold arrival trajectory, the display control device 100 issues a command to display the special 1/hold 3 petals Pc that move along the target hold arrival trajectory. Send to The command also includes that the display destination of the special 1/reserved 3 petal Pc is set to the upper layer L3. If the lottery result of the petal trajectory lottery process is the first target non-holding trajectory, a command to display the special 1 / holding 3 petal Pc that moves along the first target non-holding trajectory to the display control device 100 Send. The command also includes that the display destination of the special 1/reserved 3 petal Pc is set to the upper layer L3. If the lottery result of the petal trajectory lottery process is the second target non-holding trajectory, a command to display the special 1 / holding 3 petal Pc that moves along the second target non-holding trajectory is sent to the display control device 100. Send. The command also includes that the display destination of the special 1/reserved 3 petal Pc is set to the upper layer L3. After executing step So2802, the process proceeds to step So2803.

In step So2903, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the petal trajectory lottery process executed in step So2901 is the target hold arrival trajectory. In step So2903, if it is determined that the lottery result is the target hold arrival trajectory (step So2903: YES), proceed to step So2904, whether the trajectory of the special 1/hold 3 petal Pc is the target hold arrival trajectory 1 is set to the flag F13 indicating whether or not. After executing step So2904, the process proceeds to step So2905.

In step So2905, the required arrival time setting process for special 1/suspension 3 is executed. The required arrival time setting process for Special 1/Reservation 3 sets the length of time required for the special 1/Reservation 3 petal Pc to reach the third reservation display icon H3, which is the destination (hereinafter also referred to as the required arrival time). ) is set. Specifically, a count value corresponding to 10 seconds is set in the timer counter area T13 that determines the required arrival time. The timer counter area T13 is provided in various counter areas 94b of the sound and light side RAM 94. FIG. The count value set in the timer counter area T13 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, every 2 msec. After step So2905 is executed, the petal effect setting process for special 1/hold 3 ends.

On the other hand, in step So2903, if it is determined that the lottery result is not the target hold arrival trajectory (step So2903: NO), the process proceeds to step So2906, and the trajectory of the special 1/hold 3 petal Pc is the target hold arrival trajectory 0 is set to a flag F13 indicating whether or not After executing step So2906, the petal effect setting process for the special 1/reservation 3 ends.

<Special 1/hold 4 petal effect setting process>
Next, the petal effect setting processing for special 1/hold 4 will be described. The special 1/suspend 4 petal effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the audio light emission control device 90 as a subroutine (Fig. 187: So2611) of the third type petal effect setting process for the first start opening hold.

FIG. 192 is a flow chart showing the special 1/hold 4 petal effect setting process. In step So3001, petal trajectory lottery processing is executed. In the petal trajectory lottery process, as the trajectory of the petal Pd for special 1 and hold 4 displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, one of the target hold arrival trajectory, the first target non-hold trajectory, and the second target non-hold trajectory This is a process of determining by lottery which one is to be adopted. Specifically, similarly to step So2701 of the special 1/hold 1 petal effect setting process (FIG. 188), a value is obtained from the random number counter for the petal trajectory lottery, and this value is stored in the sound and light side ROM 93. The above determination is made by collating with the petal trajectory lottery table. After executing step So3001, the process proceeds to step So3002.

In step So3002, a process of displaying on the pattern display device 41 the special 1/hold 4 petals Pd that move along the lottery result of the petal trajectory lottery process is performed. Specifically, when the lottery result of the petal trajectory lottery process is the target hold arrival trajectory, a command to display the special 1 and hold 4 petals Pd that move along the target hold arrival trajectory is issued to the display control device 100. Send to The command also includes the effect that the display destination of the special 1/hold 4 petal Pd is set to the upper layer L3. If the lottery result of the petal trajectory lottery process is the first target non-holding trajectory, a command to display the special 1 / holding 4 petal Pd that moves along the first target non-holding trajectory is sent to the display control device 100. Send. The command also includes the effect that the display destination of the special 1/hold 4 petal Pd is set to the upper layer L3. If the lottery result of the petal trajectory lottery process is the second target non-holding trajectory, a command to display the special 1 / holding 4 petal Pd that moves along the second target non-holding trajectory is sent to the display control device 100. Send. The command also includes the effect that the display destination of the special 1/hold 4 petal Pd is set to the upper layer L3. After executing step So3002, the process proceeds to step So3003.

In step So3003, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the petal trajectory lottery process executed in step So3001 is the target hold arrival trajectory. In step So3003, if it is determined that the lottery result is the target hold arrival trajectory (step So3003: YES), proceed to step So3004, whether the trajectory of the special 1 hold 4 petal Pd is the target hold arrival trajectory 1 is set to the flag F14 indicating whether or not. After executing step So3004, the process proceeds to step So3005.

In step So3005, the required arrival time setting process for Special 1/Holding 4 is executed. The required arrival time setting process for Special 1/Reservation 4 is the length of time required for the petal Pd for Special 1/Reservation 4 to reach the fourth reservation display icon H4, which is the destination (hereinafter also referred to as the required arrival time). ) is set. Specifically, a count value corresponding to 10 seconds is set in the timer counter area T14 that determines the required arrival time. The timer counter area T14 is provided in various counter areas 94b of the sound and light side RAM 94. FIG. The count value set in the timer counter area T14 is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, every 2 msec. After step So3005 is executed, the petal effect setting process for main special 1/suspension 4 ends.

On the other hand, in step So3003, if it is determined that the lottery result is not the target hold arrival trajectory (step So3003: NO), the process proceeds to step So3006, and the trajectory of the special 1/hold 4 petal Pd is the target hold arrival trajectory 0 is set to a flag F14 indicating whether or not After executing step So3006, the petal effect setting process for the main special 1/holding 4 ends.

<Third-type petal effect setting process for holding second start opening>
Next, the third type petal effect setting process for holding the second starting opening will be described. The third type petal effect setting process for holding the second starting opening is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the third type petal effect setting process (Fig. 186: So2502).

FIG. 193 is a flow chart showing the third type petal effect setting process for holding the second start opening. In step So3101, it is determined whether or not it is the first execution from when the power switch 88 is switched from the off state to the on state (when the power is turned on). If it is determined in step So3101 that it is the first execution after power-on (So3101: YES), the process proceeds to step So3103.

On the other hand, in step So3101, if it is determined that it is not the first execution after the power is turned on (So3101: NO), the process proceeds to step So3102, and the third type petal effect setting process for holding the second starting opening was executed last time. It is determined whether or not 5 seconds or more have passed since. In step So3102, if it is determined that 5 seconds or more have not elapsed (So3102: NO), the third type petal effect setting process for second starting opening holding ends.

In step So3102, when it is determined that 5 seconds or more have passed (So3102: YES), the process proceeds to step So3103. That is, by the processing of steps So3101 and So3102, the processing after step So3103 is repeatedly executed at intervals of 5 seconds after the power is turned on.

In step So3103, the variable K stored in the sound and light side RAM 94 is incremented by one. It is assumed that the variable K is initialized to a value of 0 when the power is turned on. After executing step So3103, the process proceeds to step So3104.

In step So3104, it is determined whether the variable K is 1 or not. If it is determined in step So3104 that the variable K is 1 (So3104: YES), the process proceeds to step So3105.

In step So3105, a petal effect setting process for special 2 and hold 1 is executed. The special 2/reservation 1 petal effect setting process is directed to the first reservation display icon located on the leftmost side in the second start opening reservation area Ds2 displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. Special 2/reservation 1 This is the effect processing for the flower petals. Although a detailed description using a flowchart is omitted, the petal effect setting process for special 2 and hold 1 is obtained by replacing the petal effect setting process for special 1 and hold 1 in FIG. It is content. That is, in the special 1/holding 1 petal effect setting process, the special 2/holding 1 petal moving along the trajectory according to the lottery result of the petal trajectory lottery process is displayed, and the lottery result indicates the target holding arrival trajectory. When it is decided to adopt, the value 1 is set to the flag F11, and the special 1 / hold 1 arrival required time setting process is executed, whereas in the special 2 / hold 1 petal effect setting process, When the special 2/hold 1 petal moving along the trajectory corresponding to the lottery result of the petal trajectory lottery process is displayed, and the lottery result is determined to adopt the target hold arrival trajectory, the value of the flag F21 1 is set, and the required arrival time setting process for special 2 and hold 1 is executed. After step So3105 is executed, this third type petal effect setting process for holding the second starting opening ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step So3104 that the variable K is not 1 (So3104: NO), the process advances to step So3106 to determine whether the variable K is 2 or not. If it is determined in step So3106 that the variable K is 2 (So3106: YES), the process proceeds to step So3107.

In step So3107, a special 2/reserved 2 petal effect setting process is executed. The special 2/holding 2 petal effect setting process is directed to the second holding display icon located second from the left in the second start opening holding area Ds2 displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. This is the effect processing for the petal for reservation 2. Although a detailed description using a flowchart is omitted, the special 2/hold 2 petal effect setting process is obtained by replacing the special 1/hold 2 petal effect setting process of FIG. It is content. That is, in the special 2/holding 2 petal effect setting process, the special 2/holding 2 petals that move along the trajectory according to the lottery result of the petal trajectory lottery process are displayed, and the lottery result indicates the target holding arrival trajectory. If it is decided to adopt it, the value 1 is set to the flag F22, and the required arrival time setting process for Special 2/Holding 2 is executed. After step So3107 is executed, this second start opening holding third type petal effect setting process is terminated.

If it is determined in step So3106 that the variable K is not 2 (So3106: NO), the process advances to step So3108 to determine whether the variable K is 3 or not. If it is determined in step So3108 that the variable K is 3 (So3108: YES), the process proceeds to step So3109.

In step So3109, a special 2/reserved 3 petal effect setting process is executed. The special 2/holding 3 petal effect setting process is directed to the third holding display icon located third from the left in the second start opening holding area Ds2 displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. This is the effect processing for the petal Pc for reservation 3. Although a detailed description using a flowchart is omitted, the petal effect setting process for special 2/suspension 3 is obtained by replacing the petal effect setting process for special 1/suspension 3 in FIG. It is content. That is, in the special 2/holding 3 petal effect setting process, the special 2/holding 3 petals that move along the trajectory according to the lottery result of the petal trajectory lottery process are displayed, and the lottery result indicates the target holding arrival trajectory. If it is decided to adopt it, the value 1 is set to the flag F23, and the required arrival time setting process for special 2 and hold 3 is executed. After step So3109 is executed, this second start opening holding third type petal effect setting process is terminated.

If it is determined in step So3108 that the variable K is not 3, that is, if the variable K is 4 (So3108: NO), the process proceeds to step So3110.

In step So3110, a petal effect setting process for special 2 and reserved 4 is executed. Special 2. The petal effect setting process for reservation 4 is directed to the fourth reservation display icon located fourth from the left in the second start opening reservation area Ds2 displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. Special 2. This is the effect processing for the petal for reservation 4. Although a detailed description using a flowchart is omitted, the special 2/hold 4 petal effect setting process is obtained by replacing the special 1/hold 4 petal effect setting process of FIG. It is content. That is, in the special 2/hold 4 petal effect setting process, the special 2/hold 4 petal moving along the trajectory according to the lottery result of the petal trajectory lottery process is displayed, and the lottery result indicates the target hold arrival trajectory. If it is decided to adopt it, the flag F24 is set to a value of 1, and the required arrival time setting process for Special 2/Holding 4 is executed. After executing step So3110, the process proceeds to step So3111.

In step So3111, the variable K is set to 0. After step So3111 is executed, this second start opening holding third type petal effect setting process is ended.

<Holding display change setting process>
Next, the pending display change setting process will be described. The hold display change setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (Fig. 176: So1707).

FIG. 194 is a flowchart showing pending display change setting processing. In step So3201, a first start opening hold display change setting process is executed. The details of the first start opening pending display change setting process will be described later. After executing step So3201, the process proceeds to step So3202.

In step So3202, a second start opening hold display change setting process is executed. The details of the second start opening pending display change setting process will be described later. After executing step So3202, this pending display change setting process is terminated.

<Processing for setting change of display of holding of first start port>
Next, the first start opening hold display change setting process will be described. The first start opening pending display change setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the pending display change setting process (Fig. 194: So3201).

FIG. 195 is a flow chart showing the first start opening hold display change setting process. In step So3301, 1 is set to the variable x stored in the RAM 94 on the sound and light side. After executing step So3301, the process proceeds to step So3302.

In step So3302, it is determined whether or not the flag F1x corresponding to the value of the variable x is 1. The flag F1x is a flag set by the setting processing of the third kind flower petal effect for the first start mouth holding in FIG. ), and if the variable x is 2, it corresponds to the flag F12 set by the special 1/hold 2 petal effect setting process (FIG. 190), and the variable x is 3. , corresponds to the flag F13 set by the special 1/hold 3 petal effect setting process (FIG. 191), and when the variable x is 4, the special 1/hold 4 petal effect setting process (FIG. 192) corresponds to the flag F14 set by In step So3302, it is determined whether or not the flag F1x corresponding to the value of the variable x is the value 1 indicating that the trajectory of the petal is the target holding arrival trajectory.

In step So3302, if it is determined that the flag F1x corresponding to the value of the variable x is 1, that is, it is determined that the trajectory of the special 1/hold x petal corresponding to the value of the variable x is the target hold arrival trajectory. If so (step So3302: YES), the process proceeds to step So3303.

In step So3303, it is determined whether or not the required arrival time for special 1/hold x corresponding to the value of the variable x has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter area T1x corresponding to the value of the variable x, which is set by the setting process for setting the third petal effect for first start opening reservation in FIG. 187, is "0". do. As a result, whether or not the special 1 reserved x petal corresponding to the value of the variable x has reached the target display position for displaying the reserved display icon (hereinafter simply referred to as the display position of the reserved display icon) is determined. When the variable x is 1, whether or not the value of the timer counter area T11 is "0" is determined to determine whether the petal Pa for special 1/suspension 1 has reached the display position of the suspension display icon H1. No is determined. When the variable x is 2, whether or not the value of the timer counter area T12 is "0" is determined to determine whether the petal Pb for special 1/suspension 2 has reached the display position of the suspension display icon H2. No is determined. When the variable x is 3, whether or not the value of the timer counter area T13 is "0" is determined to determine whether the special 1/reservation 3 petal Pc has reached the display position of the reservation display icon H3. No is determined. When the variable x is 4, whether or not the value of the timer counter area T14 is "0" is determined to determine whether the petal Pd for special 1/suspension 4 has reached the display position of the suspension display icon H4. No is determined.

In step So3303, when it is determined that the arrival required time for special 1/suspension x corresponding to the value of variable x has elapsed (step So3303: YES), the process proceeds to step So3304.

In step So3304, it is determined whether or not the reserved display icons H1 to H4 exist at the display position where the petal for special 1 reserved x has reached (step So3304). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the pending display icon exists from the first pending number.

In step So3304, when it is determined that the reserved display icon exists at the display position where the petal for special 1 reserved x has reached (step So3304: YES), the process proceeds to step So3305.

In step So3305, a predetermined time from the current time (in step So3304, when it is determined that the reserved display icon exists at the display position where the petal for special 1 reserved x has reached) (predetermined time described above, For example, it is determined whether or not the shift of the pending display icon does not occur during the period until the elapse of 2 seconds (hereinafter referred to as the predetermined period after the flower petal reaches). When the hold display icon shifts, it means that the current game cycle is over. Therefore, in step So3305, it is determined whether or not the current game cycle will end within a predetermined period after the flower petals are reached. . Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter area T30 indicating the remaining game time set in step So2310 of the effect pattern setting process (FIG. 184) exceeds the predetermined time (2 seconds). determines whether or not the current game cycle will end within a predetermined period of time after reaching the flower petal. If it is determined in step So3305 that the value of the timer counter area T30 exceeds 2 seconds, it is determined that no shift of the pending display icon occurs during the predetermined period after the petal reaches (step So3305: YES), and step So3406. proceed to

In step So3306, a command is sent to the display control device 100 to continuously display the petal for special 1/reservation X at the display position of the reservation display icon that has arrived for a predetermined period after the petal arrives. The display control device 100 that has received the command continues to display the special 1/suspended X flower petal that has reached the suspended display icon on the display surface 41 a of the pattern display device 41 . As a result, the special 1/reserved X flower petals that have reached the reserved display icon remain on the reserved display icon for a predetermined time. After transmitting the command in step So3306, the process proceeds to step So3307.

In step So3307, the display level upper limit value Lvm of the pending game cycle corresponding to the value of the variable x, which is stored in the storage area for the first start opening pending effect (see FIG. 179(a)), is read. Specifically, when the variable x is 1, the display level upper limit value Lvm of the reserved game round (1) for the first starting port stored in the first reserved effect storage area is read. When the variable x is 2, the display level upper limit value Lvm of the reserved game round (2) for the first starting port is read. When the variable x is 3, the display level upper limit value Lvm of the reserved game round (3) for the first starting port is read. When the variable x is 4, the display level upper limit value Lvm of the reserved game round (4) for the first starting port is read. After executing step So3307, proceed to step So3308

In step So3308, the display level Lvr of the pending game cycle corresponding to the value of the variable x, which is stored in the storage area for the first start opening pending effect, is read. Specifically, when the variable x is 1, the display level Lvr of the pending game round (1) for the first starting port stored in the first pending effect storage area is read. When the variable x is 2, the display level Lvr of the reserved game round (2) for the first starting port is read. When the variable x is 3, the display level Lvr of the reserved game round (3) for the first starting port is read. When the variable x is 4, the display level Lvr of the reserved game round (4) for the first starting port is read. After executing step So3308, the process proceeds to step So3309.

In step So3309, it is determined whether or not the read display level Lvr is lower than the read display level upper limit value Lvm. If it is determined in step So3309 that the display level Lvr is lower than the display level upper limit value Lvm (So3309: YES), the process proceeds to step So3310.

In step So3310, the display level Lvr of the pending game round corresponding to the value of the variable x stored in the storage area for the first starting opening pending effect is updated to a higher level by one step. Specifically, when the variable x is 1, the display level Lvr of the pending game round (1) for the first starting port stored in the first pending effect storage area is increased by one level. update to When the variable x is 2, the display level Lvr of the pending game round (2) for the first starting port is updated to a higher level by one step. When the variable x is 3, the display level Lvr of the reserved game round (3) for the first starting port is updated to a higher level by one step. When the variable x is 4, the display level Lvr of the reserved game round (4) for the first starting port is updated to a higher level by one step. After executing step So3310, the process proceeds to step So3311.

In step So3311, a command is sent to the display control device 100 to change the display mode of the reservation display icon at the position corresponding to the value of the variable x in the first start opening reservation area Ds1. Specifically, a command is sent to the display control device 100 to instruct the display mode (color) corresponding to the display level Lvr of the held game round (y) for the first start opening updated in step So3310. do. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display mode of the holding display icon at the x-th position from the right in the first starting hole holding area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 to the first starting hole updated in step So3310. It is changed corresponding to the display level Lvr of the reserved game round (y) for . After executing step So3311, the process proceeds to step So3312.

In step So3312, 0 is set to the flag F1x corresponding to the value of the variable x. After that, the process advances to step So3313 to add 1 to the variable x. After executing step So3313, the process proceeds to step So3314.

In step So3314, it is determined whether or not the variable x exceeds four. If it is determined in step So3314 that the variable x does not exceed 4 (So3314: NO), the process advances to step So3302 to repeat the processing from step So3302 to step So3314. On the other hand, if it is determined in step So3314 that the variable x exceeds 4 (So3314: YES), this first starting opening pending display change setting process is terminated.

In step So3302, if it is determined that the flag F1x corresponding to the value of the variable x is not 1 (step So3302: NO), in step So3303, the required arrival time for special 1/hold x corresponding to the value of the variable x has elapsed. If it is determined not to (step So3303: NO), in step So3304, if it is determined that the pending display icon does not exist (step So3304: NO), or in step So3305, for a predetermined period after reaching the flower petal If it is determined that the shift of the pending display icon does not occur (step So3305: NO), the process proceeds to step So3313, adds 1 to the variable x, and then proceeds to step So3314.

If it is determined in step So3309 that the display level Lvr does not fall below the display level upper limit value Lvm (So3309: NO), the process proceeds to step So3312 without executing steps So3310 and So3311.

<Second start opening hold display change setting process>
Next, the second start opening hold display change setting process will be described. The second start opening pending display change setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the pending display change setting process (Fig. 194: So3202).

FIG. 196 is a flow chart showing the second start opening hold display change setting process. In step So3401, 1 is set to the variable y stored in the RAM 94 on the sound and light side. After executing step So3401, the process proceeds to step So3402.

In step So3402, it is determined whether or not the flag F2y corresponding to the value of the variable y is 1. The flag F2y is a flag set by the third type petal effect setting process for holding the second starting opening shown in FIG. 193 . In step So3402, it is determined whether or not the flag F2y corresponding to the value of the variable y is the value 1 indicating that the trajectory of the petal is the target holding arrival trajectory.

In step So3402, if it is determined that the flag F2y corresponding to the value of the variable y is 1, that is, the trajectory of the special 2/hold y petal corresponding to the value of the variable y is determined to be the target hold arrival trajectory If so (step So3402: YES), the process proceeds to step So3403.

In step So3403, it is determined whether or not the required arrival time for special 2/hold y corresponding to the value of variable y has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter area T2y corresponding to the value of the variable y, which is set by the setting process for setting the second start opening third type petal effect in FIG. 187, is "0". do. As a result, it is determined whether or not the petal for special 2/reservation y corresponding to the value of the variable y has reached the display position for displaying the target reservation display icon.

In step So3403, when it is determined that the arrival required time for special 2/hold y corresponding to the value of variable y has passed (step So3403: YES), the process proceeds to step So3404.

In step So3404, it is determined whether or not a reserved display icon exists at the display position where the petal for special 2 reserved y has reached (step So3404). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the pending display icon exists from the second pending number.

In step So3404, when it is determined that the reserved display icon exists at the display position where the petal for special 2 reserved y has reached (step So3404: YES), the process proceeds to step So3405.

In step So3405, from the current time (in step So3404, when it is determined that the reserved display icon exists at the display position where the petal for special 2 reserved y has reached), a predetermined time (predetermined time described above, For example, it is determined whether or not the shift of the pending display icon does not occur during the period until the elapse of 2 seconds (hereinafter referred to as the predetermined period after the flower petal reaches). When the hold display icon shifts, it means that the current game round is over. Therefore, in step So3405, it is determined whether or not the current game round will end within a predetermined period after the flower petals are reached. . Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter area T30 indicating the remaining game time set in step So2310 of the effect pattern setting process (FIG. 184) exceeds the predetermined time (2 seconds). determines whether or not the current game cycle will end within a predetermined period of time after reaching the flower petal. If it is determined in step So3405 that the value of the timer counter area T30 exceeds 2 seconds, it is determined that no shift of the pending display icon occurs during the predetermined period after the petal reaches (step So3405: YES), and step So3406. proceed to

In step So3406, a command is sent to the display control device 100 to continuously display the special 2/hold y petal at the display position of the reached hold display icon for a predetermined period after the petal arrives. The display control device 100 that has received the command continues to display on the display surface 41 a of the pattern display device 41 the special 2/suspended y flower petal that has reached the suspended display icon. As a result, the special 2/reserved y flower petal that reaches the reserved display icon stays on the reserved display icon for a predetermined time. After transmitting the command in step So3406, the process proceeds to step So3407.

In step So3407, the display level upper limit value Lvm of the pending game round (y) corresponding to the value of the variable y, which is stored in the storage area for the second start opening pending effect (see FIG. 179(b)), is read. After executing step So3407, proceed to step So3408

In step So3408, the display level Lvr of the pending game round (y) corresponding to the value of the variable y, which is stored in the storage area for the second start opening pending effect, is read. After executing step So3408, the process proceeds to step So3409.

In step So3409, it is determined whether or not the read display level Lvr is lower than the read display level upper limit value Lvm. If it is determined in step So3409 that the display level Lvr is lower than the display level upper limit value Lvm (So3409: YES), the process proceeds to step So3410.

In step So3410, the display level Lvr of the reserved game round corresponding to the value of the variable y stored in the storage area for the second start opening reserved effect is updated to a higher level by one step. After executing step So3410, the process proceeds to step So3411.

In step So3411, a command is sent to the display control device 100 to change the display mode of the holding display icon at the position corresponding to the value of the variable y in the second start opening holding area Ds2. Specifically, a command is sent to the display control device 100 to instruct the display mode (color) corresponding to the display level Lvr of the held game round (y) for the second start opening updated in step So3410. do. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display mode of the holding display icon at the y-th position from the left in the second starting hole holding area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 to the second starting hole updated in step So3410. It is changed corresponding to the display level Lvr of the reserved game round (y) for . After executing step So3411, the process proceeds to step So3412.

At step So3412, 0 is set to the flag F2y corresponding to the value of the variable y. After that, the process advances to step So3413 to add 1 to the variable y. After executing step So3413, the process proceeds to step So3414.

In step So3414, it is determined whether or not the variable y exceeds 4. If it is determined in step So3414 that the variable y does not exceed 4 (So3414: NO), the process advances to step So3402 to repeat the processing from step So3402 to step So3414. On the other hand, if it is determined in step So3414 that the variable y exceeds 4 (So3414: YES), this second starting opening pending display change setting process is terminated.

In step So3402, if it is determined that the flag F2y corresponding to the value of the variable y is not 1 (step So3402: NO), in step So3403, the special 2 hold y arrival required time corresponding to the value of the variable y has elapsed If it is determined not to (step So3403: NO), in step So3404, if it is determined that the pending display icon does not exist (step So3404: NO), or in step So3405, for a predetermined period after reaching the flower petal If it is determined that the shift of the pending display icon does not occur (step So3405: NO), the process advances to step So3413, adds 1 to the variable y, and then advances to step So3414.

If it is determined in step So3409 that the display level Lvr does not fall below the display level upper limit value Lvm (So3409: NO), the process proceeds to step So3412 without executing steps So3410 and So3411.

<Various processing executed in the display control device>
Next, processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

The processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 mainly includes a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on until the power is turned off, and a main processing that is executed when a command is received from the sound emission control device 90. There are command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing executed when a V interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal that is transmitted from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when rendering processing of an image for one frame is completed.

The MPU 102 executes main processing after power-on, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of commands and detection of V interrupt signals. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command interrupt processing is preferentially executed. Therefore, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound emission control device 90 and execute the V interrupt process.

<Main processing>
Next, main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 197 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. As described above, the main process is a process that is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. Processing of each step executed in the main processing will be described below.

In step So3501, initialization processing is executed. Specifically, first, processing for initializing the MPU 102 and clearing the storage of the work RAM 104 and the video RAM 107 is performed. Then, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107 . Furthermore, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107 and the extracted character information is written in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107 . Also, perform other necessary settings for initialization. After that, the process proceeds to step So3502.

In step So3502, interrupt permission setting is executed. After the interrupt permission setting is executed, in the main processing, infinite loop processing is executed until the power is turned off. Accordingly, after the interrupt permission is set, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing, which will be described below, are executed in accordance with the reception of a command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described. As described above, the command interrupt processing is processing that is executed each time a command is received from the sound emission control device 90 .

FIG. 198 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. In step So3601, command storage processing is executed. In the command storage process, received command data is extracted and the extracted command data is stored in a command storage area provided in work RAM 104 . Various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read by the command determination process of the V interrupt process, which will be described later, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 199 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. As described above, V interrupt processing is processing that is executed when a V interrupt signal from VDP 105 is detected. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command storage area are executed by the command interrupt process. Execute the displayed instructions.

As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame worth of image is completed and that is transmitted to the MPU 102 . Therefore, the MPU 102 executes V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, so that drawing instructions to the VDP 105 are issued every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame worth of image is completed. For this reason, the VDP 105 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to suppress the development of an image associated with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area in which the image information is stored. Details of the processing of each step of the V interrupt processing will be described below.

In step So3701, command handling processing is executed. In the command handling process, the contents of the command stored in the command storage area by the command interruption process (FIG. 184) are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. Specifically, for example, when a performance command is stored, image drawing and display control is started so that the performance mode specified by the performance command is displayed on the pattern display device 41.例文帳に追加

If the effect operation command is stored, it is determined whether or not it is the period for accepting pressing of the effect operation button 24, and if it is determined that it is the period for accepting pressing of the effect operation button 24, the effect operation is performed. Control of image drawing and display is started so that the effect mode corresponding to the depression of the button 24 is displayed on the pattern display device 41 . On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the period for accepting pressing of the effect operation button 24, the content of the next command is analyzed without executing the process.

In the command processing (So3701), all commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and processing corresponding to all the analyzed commands is executed. The reason for this will be explained. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during the 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the effect is set by the sound emission control device 90 and the effect is started, there is a high possibility that various commands for specifying the content of the effect are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the state of the effect such as the advance notice effect and the stop pattern set by the sound emission control device 90, and display the effect image according to the state. The rendering of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the device 41 .

In step So3702, display setting processing is executed. In the display setting process, based on the type of screen to be displayed on the pattern display device 41 set by the command handling process (So3701), etc., the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the pattern display device 41 is specified. . After that, the process proceeds to step So3703.

In step So3703, task processing is executed. In the task processing, based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the pattern display device 41 specified by the display setting processing (So3702), the type of character (sprite, display object) that constitutes the image is determined. Along with specifying, for each character (sprite), various parameters required for drawing, such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc., are determined. After that, the process proceeds to step So3704.

In step So3704, drawing processing is executed. In the drawing process, the types of various characters forming one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each character, which are determined by the task process (So3703), are transmitted to the VDP 105 . The VDP 105 executes an image drawing process based on these pieces of information, and together with a drive signal to cause the pattern display device 41 to display an image drawn based on the information received during the previous V interrupt process. The image data is transmitted to the pattern display device 41 . After that, the process proceeds to step So3705, and after executing other processes, the V interrupt process ends. An example of specific control for executing various processes including the jackpot effect in the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

<<4-7>> Functions and effects:
As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the third type petal P3 among the plurality of types of petals P1 to P4 displayed on the pattern display device 41 reaches the reserved display icon, When it stays (that is, sticks) for a certain amount of time (for example, 2 seconds), an effect of changing the display mode of the pending display icon is executed. In a conventional pachinko machine that does not have such a configuration, when the variable display is started, when the reservation information is shifted, or when the game ball enters the first start opening or the second start opening, the display mode of the reservation display icon is It was common to execute an effect suggesting a change (a pending change suggesting effect) and then execute an effect to change the display mode of the pending display icon. In this conventional pachinko machine, at a predetermined timing such as the start of the variable display, the shift of the hold information, or the entry of the game ball into the first start port or the second start port, the hold change suggestion Since the effect is executed and the effect for changing the display mode of the pending display icon is executed, the player can predict the timing when the effect for changing the display mode of the pending display icon appears. , there is a problem that the player lacks a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency. In addition, unless the pending change suggesting effect is executed, the effect of changing the display mode of the pending display icon does not appear. There was no focus, and the player lacked a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a plurality of flower petals are repeatedly fluttering on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 regardless of whether or not the pending display icon is displayed.
(i) the majority of the petals (first type petal P1 and second type petal P2) do not affect the reserved display icon even if they pass around or over the reserved display icon; without
(ii) If one of the petals (the third type petal P3 moving along the first target non-holding trajectory or the second target non-holding trajectory) moves toward the holding display icon, the Immediately before the pending display icon, leaving the pending display icon,
(iii) When one of the petals (the third type petal P3 moving along the target hold arrival trajectory) reaches the hold display icon, a predetermined time has passed since the arrival. Due to the shift of the pending display icon before, the display mode of the pending display icon does not change,
(iv) If one of the petals (the third kind petal P3 moving along the target hold arrival trajectory) arrives at the hold display icon and stays (attaches) for a predetermined time , the display mode of the pending display icon does not change because the display level Lvr set for the pending display icon has already reached the display level upper limit value Lvm,
(v) one of the petals (the third kind petal P3 moving along the target hold arrival trajectory) reached toward the hold display icon and was thought to have stayed (attached) for a predetermined time; Then, an effect of changing the display mode of the suspension display icon is executed.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the flower petals are repeatedly displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, the player expects that the display mode of the pending display icon will change. In addition to being able to always give a sense of urgency (as long as one of the petals is displayed),
・Even though the flower petal reached the reserved display icon, it passed through the reserved display icon,
・For example, the flower petals headed for the reserved display icon, but the petals reached outside the reserved display icon.
・Even though the petal reached the reserved display icon, the petal did not attach to the reserved display icon,
・A flower petal reaches a reserved display icon, and the petal adheres to the reserved display icon (because the display level Lvr of the reserved display icon has already reached the set display level upper limit value Lvm). Since it is possible to impart a sense of disappointment that the display mode of the pending display icon has not changed, it is possible to further impart a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency to the player. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the petals that can play the role of the suspension change suggesting effect and the petals of the same pattern as the petals are always dancing, so it is expected that the effect of changing the display mode of the suspension display icon will appear. Since the player can always have a sense of excitement, it is possible to further give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency. Therefore, with the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, the effect images floating on the display surface 41a such as flower petals, confetti, jellyfish, butterflies, etc. are intended to liven up the display surface 41a. There was no such thing. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to execute an effect such that a flower petal adheres to the pending display icon and changes the display mode of the pending display icon, so that the display surface 41a is lively. It is possible to effectively use the petals for making.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has a pattern in a pattern row in which the fourth type petal P4 among the plurality of types of petals P1 to P4 displayed on the pattern display device 41 is changed from the variable display state to the stopped state. , an effect for restarting the variable display of the symbol row is executed. In a conventional pachinko machine that does not have such a configuration, the flower petals do not affect the variable display of the symbol row, so when the variable display of the symbol row stops and the symbol rows are no longer the same combination of symbols. , it only gave the player a feeling of disappointment. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the fourth type petal P4 adheres to the symbols of the stopped symbol row, it is possible to execute an effect of restarting the variable display of the symbol row. As a result, it is possible to give a player who has once been discouraged because the combination of the same patterns in the pattern row is no longer surprised at the resumption of the variable display and a sense of expectation for another big win. Therefore, with the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the third type petal P3 reaches the display position of the reserved display icon, the process of determining whether or not the reserved display icon exists (step So3304 in FIG. 195), A configuration for determining whether or not the shift of the pending display icon does not occur within a predetermined period (step So3305) and determining whether or not the display level Lvr is lower than the display level upper limit value Lvm (step So3309). and For this reason, in the middle of a game turn, a ball enters the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34, and based on the ball entering, the hold information is acquired, and a new hold display icon is added. Sometimes, the third type petal P3 acts on the added reserved display icon as well, making it possible to execute an effect of changing the display mode of the reserved display icon. In the middle of this game round, when the pending display icon is newly added, at the timing when the display of the third type petal P3 is started, the pending display is displayed at the display position of the pending display icon corresponding to the third type petal P3. Without displaying the icon, there is a case where the pending display icon is displayed at the display position until the third type petal P3 reaches the display position. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a new pending display icon is added in the middle of a game round, the player's sense of anticipation for the flower petals can be conveyed to the player when the pending display icon starts to be displayed. will be granted ex post facto. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a greater sense of expectation.

<<4-8>> Modified example of the fourth embodiment:
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and can be implemented in various aspects without departing from the scope of the invention. For example, the following modifications are possible. In addition, in the modified example described below, description of the same configuration, processing, and effects as those of the above-described embodiment is omitted.

<<4-8-1>> Modification 1:
In the above-described fourth embodiment, in the first start opening hold display change setting process (FIG. 195) and the second start opening hold display change setting process (FIG. 196), the petal reaches the hold display icon, and a predetermined period after reaching When it is determined that the display level Lvr has reached the display level upper limit value Lvm when the shift of the pending display icon does not occur, no special processing is performed. As a modification, when it is determined that the display level Lvr has reached the display level upper limit value Lvm, a lottery (lottery processing when the display level upper limit value is reached, which will be described later) is performed. Arrived petals may be continuously displayed at the display position of the reached pending display icon for a predetermined period, and when the lottery is not won, the reached petals may be displayed so as to pass the pending display icon. That is, in the fourth embodiment, when it is determined that the display level Lvr has reached the display level upper limit value Lvm, the flower petals reaching the pending display icon disappear and the display mode of the pending display icon is changed. On the other hand, in this modified example 1, when it is determined that the display level Lvr has reached the display level upper limit value Lvm, the flower petals that have reached the pending display icon pass through the pending display icon. In the first mode (when the lottery is not won) in which the display mode is not changed, the petals reaching the reserved display icon are continuously displayed at the display position of the reserved display icon for a predetermined period of time, and the reserved display is performed. A second mode in which the display mode of the icon is not changed (when the lottery is won) and a configuration in which one of them can be selectively taken. Instead of the lottery, a configuration may be adopted in which the first mode and the second mode are switched in turn.

Concrete control of the first starting opening hold display change setting process will be described below. Note that the second starting opening hold display change setting process is the same processing as the first starting opening holding display change setting process for the second starting opening, and thus a description thereof will be omitted. Since the hardware configuration of the pachinko machine in Modification 1 is the same as that of the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the same parts as in the fourth embodiment will be given the same names and reference numerals, and the following description will be given. I do. Further, with respect to software, processes other than the first starting opening hold display change setting process and the second starting opening hold display change setting process are the same as those of the fourth embodiment.

FIG. 200 is a flow chart showing the first starting opening hold display change setting process in Modification 1. FIG. The first starting opening hold display change setting process in Modification 1 differs from the first starting opening holding display change setting process (FIG. 195) in the fourth embodiment (FIG. 195), but is mostly the same. is. Steps with the same processing content are given the same reference numerals as in FIG.

In the first start opening hold display change setting process (FIG. 195) in the fourth embodiment, a command to continue to display the special 1/hold X petal at the display position of the hold display icon that has arrived for a predetermined period after the petal arrives to the display control device 100, i.e., the process of step So3306, in step So3305, it is determined that no shift of the pending display icon occurs within a predetermined period after the flower petal arrives (step So3305: YES ) was configured to be executed immediately after On the other hand, in the first starting opening hold display change setting process (FIG. 200) in Modification 1, immediately after it is determined in step So3309 that the display level Lvr is lower than the display level upper limit value Lvm (So3309: YES). It was configured to run on

If it is determined in step So3309 that the display level Lvr does not fall below the display level upper limit value Lvm (So3309: NO), the process advances to step So3309a to execute petal display change processing. Details of the petal display change processing will be described later. After executing step So3309a, the process proceeds to step So3312.

FIG. 201 is a flowchart showing petal display change processing. In step So3801, lottery processing is executed when the display level reaches the upper limit value. In the display level upper limit reaching lottery process, when it is determined that the display level Lvr does not fall below the display level upper limit Lvm, a lottery is performed to determine which of the first mode and the second mode is to be adopted. It is a process determined by Specifically, a value is obtained from a random number counter for lottery when the upper limit of display level is reached, and this value is collated with the table for lottery when the upper limit of display level is reached stored in the ROM 93 on the sound and light side. make a decision. A random number counter for lottery when the display level upper limit value is reached is provided in various counter areas 94 b of the sound and light side RAM 94 . The random number counter is updated at short intervals.

In the display level upper limit reaching lottery table, among the values of the random number counter for the display level upper limit reaching lottery of "0 to 1199", "0 to 599" correspond to the first mode. 600 to 1199” corresponds to the second mode. Note that this is just an example, and the percentage of winning the first mode and the percentage of winning the second mode may be different. After executing step So3801, the process proceeds to step So3802.

In step So3802, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the lottery process for reaching the display level upper limit value executed in step So3801 is the second mode. In step So3802, when it is determined that the lottery result is the second mode (step So3802: YES), the process proceeds to step So3803, and for a predetermined period after the petal arrives, the special 1/hold X petal is displayed as the hold icon. A command to continue display at the display position is transmitted to the display control device 100 . This processing has the same processing content as step So3306 in FIG. After execution of step So3803, this petal display change processing ends.

On the other hand, in step So3802, if the lottery result is not the second mode, i.e., if it is determined that the lottery result is the first mode (step So3802: NO), proceed to step So3804, special 1/hold X A command is transmitted to the display control device 100 to display the flower petal so as to move downward from the position where the reserved display icon is reached. The display control device 100 that has received the command displays the special 1/reserved X petals on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 so as to move downward. As a result, the special 1/reserved X flower petal that reaches the reserved display icon passes through without staying at the reserved display icon. After execution of step So3804, this petal display change processing ends.

According to the pachinko machine of Modification 1 configured as described above, when the third kind petal P3 reaches the reserved display icon, the third kind petal P3 passes through the reserved display icon, and the reserved display icon is displayed. and a second mode in which the third type petal P3 is continuously displayed at the display position of the reserved display icon for a predetermined period and the display mode of the reserved display icon is not changed. mode. Also, by executing steps So3306, So3310, and So3311 in the first starting opening pending display change setting process (FIG. 200), a third mode of changing the display mode of the pending display icon can be taken. That is, when the third kind petal reaches the reserved display icon, one of the first to third modes is selectively executed. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine of Modification 1, even if the flower petals are displayed, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency, such as whether the display mode of the pending display icon will change. . Furthermore, it is possible to give the player a feeling of disappointment that the flower petal reached the reserved display icon but passed through the reserved display icon and the display mode of the reserved display icon did not change. and a sense of urgency can be further imparted. As a result, according to the pachinko machine of Modification 1, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

It should be noted that, as another form of this modification 1, the configuration may be such that the processing of step So3804 of the petal display change processing (FIG. 201) is omitted. According to this configuration, in the first mode, the petal reaches the pending display icon, but immediately after that, the petal disappears and the display mode of the pending display icon does not change. It becomes possible, and the same effect as the pachinko machine of Modification 1 can be obtained.

<<4-8-2>> Modification 2:
In the above-described fourth embodiment and its modification, when the third type petal P3 reaches the display position of the reserved display icon, the determination processing of whether or not the reserved display icon exists (step So3304 in FIG. 195). A configuration for determining whether or not the shift of the pending display icon does not occur within a predetermined period (step So3305) and determining whether or not the display level Lvr is lower than the display level upper limit value Lvm (step So3309). and On the other hand, as a modified example, the above three determinations may be executed when the display of the third type petal P3 is started. This configuration has the effect of simplifying the control process.

<<4-8-3>> Modification 3:
In the above-described fourth embodiment and its modification, when the third type petal P3 reaches the display position of the reserved display icon, the determination processing of whether or not the reserved display icon exists (step So3304 in FIG. 195). A configuration for determining whether or not the shift of the pending display icon does not occur within a predetermined period (step So3305) and determining whether or not the display level Lvr is lower than the display level upper limit value Lvm (step So3309). and On the other hand, as a modified example 3, when the third kind petal P3 reaches the display position of the reserved display icon, it is determined whether or not the reserved display icon exists, and it is determined that the reserved display icon exists. It is also possible to change the display mode of the pending display icon without performing the other two determination processes. Further, as another form of modification 2, when the third type petal P3 reaches the display position of the reserved display icon, a process of determining whether or not the reserved display icon exists, and a reserved display for a predetermined period after reaching the petal It is also possible to change the display mode of the pending display icon without executing the process of determining whether or not the shift of the icon has occurred, and without performing another determination process. Further, as another form of Modified Example 2, when the third kind petal P3 reaches the display position of the reserved display icon, a process of determining whether or not the reserved display icon exists, and the display level Lvr is set to the display level upper limit value. It is also possible to change the display mode of the pending display icon without performing another determination process.

<<4-8-4>> Modification 4:
In the above-described fourth embodiment and its modification, petals (type 3 petals P3) are used as moving objects that can play a role in producing a suggestion of pending change. Other patterns may be used. In addition, in the fourth embodiment and its modification, petals (type 4 petals P4) are used as moving objects for resuming the variable display. It may be a pattern. Moving objects such as flower petals, confetti, jellyfish, and butterflies have the function of making the display surface 41a lively and enhancing the atmosphere of the production. Therefore, it is possible to change the display mode of the pending display icon and the display mode of the pattern, so that it is possible to effectively use the moving body.

<<4-8-5>> Modification 5:
In the above-described fourth embodiment and its modification, a plurality of petals as moving objects are displayed so as to dance (fall) from the upper side to the lower side on the display surface 41a. On the other hand, in the configuration in which the moving body is the butterfly, the butterfly is displayed so as to move in a loop on the display surface 41a. In the middle of its looped movement, the butterfly moves toward and reaches the pending display icon. When reaching this point, the display mode of the pending display icon is changed. According to this configuration, since the moving body can be directed in various directions, it is possible to further give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency, such as when the display mode of the pending display icon will change. can. Although the movement range of the butterfly is the entire display surface 41a, it may be configured to move within a predetermined area set within the display surface 41a instead. The predetermined area includes at least the display position of the pending display icon. According to this configuration, the range in which butterflies occur can be limited to a partial area of the effect displayed on the display surface 41, and various effects can be handled. In addition, although the butterfly is configured to move in a loop, it does not necessarily have to be a single ring, and may have a shape in which the trajectory of movement intersects. It may move in any manner as long as it is a configuration that is displayed at all times during the period.

That is, the moving object may be configured to be repeatedly displayed, for example, like a flower petal, or may be configured to be displayed so as to always exist for a predetermined period, for example, like a butterfly. Note that, in the above-described repeated display configuration, one or more flower petals may always appear on the display surface 41a for a predetermined period of time. good too. In the above-described fourth embodiment and modifications, moving objects are tangible objects such as flower petals, confetti, jellyfish, and butterflies. can also be replaced with In other words, the moving body can be regarded as an effector for acting on the pending display icons and symbol sequences, including the tangible and intangible objects described above.

<<4-8-6>> Modification 6:
In the fourth embodiment and its modification, the third type petal P31 for holding the first starting opening is the petal Pa for special 1/hold 1, the petal Pb for special 1/hold 2, and the petal Pb for special 1/hold 3. Four types of petals Pc and petals Pd for Special 1 and Hold 4 were prepared. On the other hand, as a modified example, two types of petals are prepared as the third type petal P31 for first start opening holding, and one type of petal is called special 1 / holding 1 and special 1 / holding 2. , and the other kind of petals may be shared for Special 1/reservation 3 and Special 1/reservation 4. That is, the petals of the first type are displayed in the first start opening reservation area Ds1, the display position of the first reservation display icon H1 positioned first from the right, and the display position of the second reservation display icon H1 positioned second from the right. The display position of the icon H2 and the display position of the icon H2, and the second type of petal is displayed on the third reservation display icon H3 located third from the right side in the first start opening reservation area Ds1. or the display position of the fourth pending display icon H4 positioned fourth from the right. In addition, one of the two types of petals is used in common, such as for Special 1/Reserve 1, Special 1/Reserve 2, and Special 1/Reserve 3, and the other type of petal is used for Special 1/Reserve 4. It may be configured to be shared for use. In short, one type of flower petal may be shared for display positions of two or more reserved display icons (any combination is acceptable). As for the third type petal P32 for holding the second starting opening, similarly, one type of petal may be used for the display position of two or more holding display icons. According to this modification 6, since it is difficult for the player to judge to which of the display positions of the plurality of reserved display icons the petal of one type will go, the player is further given a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency. can do.

<<4-8-7>> Modification 7:
In the above-described fourth embodiment and its modification, the first starting opening holding third type petal P31 and the second starting opening holding third type petal P32 are displayed, and displayed in the first starting opening holding area Ds1. The display mode of both the holding display icon displayed in the second start opening holding area Ds2 and the holding display icon displayed in the second starting opening holding area Ds2 can be changed. On the other hand, as a modification, only one of the first starting opening holding third petal P31 and the second starting opening holding third petal P32 is displayed, and the first starting opening holding area Ds1 is displayed. and only one of the pending display icon displayed in the second starting port pending region Ds2 may be configured to be able to change the display mode. Further, both the first starting opening holding third petal P31 and the second starting opening holding third kind petal P32 can be displayed, and at least one of them is displayed according to the game state. may be configured. Specifically, for example, in the high-probability game state, only the third type petal P32 for holding the second start opening is displayed, and in the normal game state (low-probability game state), the third petal for holding the first start opening is displayed. The configuration may be such that only the seed petal P31 is displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to further improve the expectation of entering the high-probability gaming state.

<<4-8-8>> Modification 8:
In the above-described fourth embodiment and its modification, the third type petal P3 as a moving object that can play a role in the pending change suggesting effect is configured to appear from the display start point and move toward the corresponding pending display icon. However, as a modification, for example, the character may throw a moving object toward the corresponding hold display icon. According to this configuration, for example, the first reserved number is three, and the character moves the ball as a moving body toward the third reserved display icon from the right side in the first start opening reserved area Ds1. When the ball is thrown, at the timing of throwing the ball, the thrown ball reaches the third holding display icon without displaying the holding display icon at the display position of the fourth holding display icon from the right side. By then, when a ball enters the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the hold information is acquired based on the ball entered, and a new hold display icon is added, the fourth It may be configured to display the pending display icon at the display position of the second pending display icon. According to this configuration, when the pending display icon is newly added in the middle of the game, the player is given a sense of expectation for the moving object after the display of the pending display icon is started. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with a greater sense of expectation. In addition, in the fourth embodiment and its modification, the fourth type petal P4 as a moving body for restarting the variable display is configured to appear from the display start point and move toward the pattern. On the other hand, as a modification, for example, the character may throw a moving object toward the pattern.

<<4-8-9>> Modification 9:
In the above-described fourth embodiment and its modification, the third type petal P3, which can play a role of the suspension change suggesting effect, is configured to periodically start to be displayed in order from the suspension 1 to the suspension 4, but instead of this, , the display may be started at random from the hold 1 use to the hold 4 use. According to this configuration, it becomes more difficult for the player to measure the timing at which the flower petals reach the display position of the reserved display icon, so that the player can be further given a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency. .

<<4-8-10>> Modification 10:
In the above-described fourth embodiment and its modification, when it is determined that the shift of the pending display icon does not occur during the predetermined period after the flower petal arrives, the flower petal is displayed for the predetermined period after the flower petal arrives. It is configured to be displayed continuously at the display position of the icon. This is to continue displaying the flower petals that have reached the pending display icon in the state of reaching them. On the other hand, for a predetermined period after the flower petals arrive, at the display position of the reserved display icon that has arrived, the flower petals can be made to blink, shine like fireworks, or change the color of the flower petals to other colors such as gold or rainbow. The display form of the petals may be changed, for example. According to this configuration, it is possible to further emphasize the suggestive effect suggesting that the display mode of the pending display icon will change, and to further give the player a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency.

<<4-8-11>> Modification 11:
In the above-described fourth embodiment and its modification, the fourth type petal P4 acting on the variable display pattern is included in the big win production pattern with re-variation. The configuration may be such that the fourth type petal P4 is displayed by a routine different from the display of . According to this configuration, it becomes easy to change the movement path of the fourth type petal P4 that affects the pattern of the variable display. For example, similar to the movement path of the type 4 petal P4, the movement path of the type 4 petal P4 is defined as a target arrival trajectory to reach the target symbol display position, and the same target arrival trajectory from the starting point to the middle. and a non-target trajectory reaching a position deviated from the symbol display position. According to this configuration, even if the type 4 petal P4 is displayed, the pattern display mode may or may not change. Therefore, according to the eleventh modification, even if the fourth type petal P4 is displayed, the player gives the player a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency, such as whether the display mode of the pattern will change. can do. Furthermore, it is possible to give the player a disappointing feeling that the display mode of the pattern did not change even though the fourth type petal P4 was displayed, so that it is possible to further give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency. can be done.

<<4-8-12>> Modification 12:
In the fourth embodiment and its modification, the display form of the pending display icon as the pending identification information corresponds to the possibility of winning a jackpot in the winning lottery, but it is not necessary to be limited to this, and other It may be meaningful.

<<4-8-13>> Modification 13:
In the fourth embodiment and its modification, the pending display icon as the pending identification information was the pattern displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, but instead of this, the pattern display device 41 Alternatively, a predetermined specified number of lamps may be installed, and the display form of the pending identification information may be changed by changing the lighting color of the lamps.

<<4-8-14>> Modification 14:
In the fourth embodiment and its modification, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to include three control devices, namely the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90, and the display control device 100, but instead of this, the main control It is good also as a structure provided with two control devices, such as a device and a sub control device. The sub control device may be configured to execute various processes executed by the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 in the fourth embodiment. In addition, in the fourth embodiment and its modification, the various processes executed by each of the three control devices 60, 90, and 100 are not limited to the division described in the fourth embodiment, and the three control devices 60, 90, and 100 as a whole should be able to execute various processes in the fourth embodiment.

<<4-8-15>> Modification 15:
In the fourth embodiment and its modification, the predetermined period is from when the demo image is displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 to when the player is playing the game. The petals as moving bodies are displayed repeatedly for a period of time. Further, as described above, as a modification, the predetermined period does not include the period of the jackpot effect that is executed when the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery. Furthermore, as a modification 15, the predetermined period during which the moving object is always displayed can be changed as follows.

The predetermined period is a period set after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. As described above, the predetermined period may not include the period of the jackpot effect that is executed after winning the jackpot in the jackpot lottery. Also, the predetermined period may be configured not to include the period of the ready-to-win effect that is executed when the ready-to-win is generated. The predetermined period may be configured not to include the period of the normal ready-to-win effect that is executed with the occurrence of the normal ready-to-win of the ready-to-win. The predetermined period may be configured not to include the period of the super ready-to-win effect that is executed with the occurrence of the super ready-to-win of the ready-to-win. The predetermined period may be configured not to include the period of the special ready-to-win effect that is executed with the occurrence of the special ready-to-win of the ready-to-win. The predetermined period may be configured not to include the period during which the RTC (real time clock) presentation is being executed. The predetermined period may be configured not to include a period in which a specific mode is selected in mode selection for designating the type of presentation of the entire game and the game is executed in the specific mode. The predetermined period may be configured not to include the period during which the demo image is displayed. Note that the period excluded from the predetermined period may not be one period as described above, and the predetermined period may exclude a plurality of periods selected from the various periods described above. For example, the predetermined period may be configured not to include the period of the jackpot effect that is executed when a big win is won in the winning lottery and the period of the ready-to-win effect that is executed when the ready-to-win game occurs. According to the configuration of Modification 15, the period during which the moving object is displayed can be narrowed down to an effective period for changing the display mode of the pending display icon.

<<4-8-16>> Modification 16:
In the fourth embodiment and its modification, the third type petal P3 as a moving object changes the display mode of the reserved display icon as the specific identification information, and the fourth type petal P4 as a moving object changes the specific identification information. It was configured to change the display mode of the pattern. On the other hand, as a modification, the specific identification information may be specific identification information corresponding to the special information other than the reserved display icon or pattern.

<<5>> Fifth Embodiment:
<<5-1>> Game machine structure:
FIG. 202 is a perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter also referred to as "pachinko machine") as a fifth embodiment of the present invention. A pachinko machine 10 has a wooden outer frame 11 combined in a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island equipment of the game hall. The pachinko machine 10 also includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11 . A pachinko machine body 12 has an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13. - 特許庁The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11 by metal hinges 15 . The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 16 with respect to the inner frame 13 . On the back of the inner frame 13, control devices for controlling the pachinko machine main body 12, such as a main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device, are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. - 特許庁The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened, and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation using a dedicated key on the cylinder lock 17 .

A substantially central portion of the front door frame 14 is formed with an open window portion 18 . Around the window part 18, resin parts and electric decoration parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. The electrical parts are composed of light emitting means including various lamps such as LEDs. The light emitting means plays a role of enhancing the performance effect by lighting or blinking at each game played by the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot is won, when a ready-to-win game is generated, or the like. A glass unit 19 composed of two sheets of plate glass is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14 , and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19 . A game board, which will be described later, is detachably attached to the inner frame 13 , and the player of the pachinko machine 10 can view the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 19 . Details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper tray 20 and a lower tray 21 for storing game balls. The upper tray 20 is formed in a box shape with an open top, and stores game balls such as rental balls lent from a rental machine (not shown) and prize balls discharged from the pachinko machine main body 12 . The game balls stored in the upper tray 20 are supplied to a game ball shooting mechanism provided in the pachinko machine main body 12. - 特許庁The game ball shooting mechanism is driven by the player's operation of the operation handle 25, and shoots the game balls supplied from the upper tray 20 to the front surface of the game board. The lower tray 21 is arranged below the upper tray 20 and is shaped like a box with an open top. The lower tray 21 stores game balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 20. - 特許庁A discharge port 22 for discharging game balls stored in the lower tray 21 is formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 21 . A lever 23 is provided below the ejection port 22 , and the player can switch the ejection port 22 between a closed state and an open state by operating the lever 23 . When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game ball falls from the discharge port 22 and is discharged from the lower tray 21 to the outside.

A performance operation button 24 is provided in front of the peripheral edge of the upper plate 20.例文帳に追加The effect operation button 24 is an operation unit for the player to perform an input operation for the game effect performed by the pachinko machine 10 . When a player operates a performance operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, a game performance reflecting the operation is performed by the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

An operation handle 25 for a player to operate is provided on the right side of the front door frame 14 when viewed from the front (hereinafter also simply referred to as "right side"). When the player operates (turns) the operation handle 25, a game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism to the front surface of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operation handle 25, there are a touch sensor 25a for permitting driving of the game ball shooting mechanism, a wait button 25b for stopping shooting of game balls by the game ball shooting mechanism when pressed by the player, and the operation handle 25. A variable resistor 25c is provided for detecting the amount of rotational operation of , based on a change in electrical resistance. When the player grips the operating handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operating handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. Then, a game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism to the front surface of the game board with strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

A game ball shooting button 26 for a player to operate is provided on the left side of the periphery of the upper tray 20 in front view (hereinafter also simply referred to as "left side"). When the game ball shooting button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is shot to the front surface of the game board with a predetermined shooting strength regardless of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 by the player. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball shooting button 26, the game ball is shot to the front surface of the game board with the same shooting intensity as when the operation handle 25 is rotated at its maximum. In the case of this embodiment, when a game ball is shot by operating the game ball shooting button 26, the game ball flows to the right side of the game board when viewed from the front and also to the right side of the game board. That is, by operating the game ball shooting button 26, the player can hit the ball to the right. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the game ball shooting button 26 is operated, the game ball is shot to the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is turned on. . That is, the player turns on at least the touch sensor 25a by grasping the operation handle 25, and then operates the game ball shooting button 26 to shoot the game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball shooting button 26. can be realized.

Next, the configuration of the rear surface of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. A control device for controlling the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is arranged on the back surface of the pachinko machine 10. - 特許庁

203 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. As shown, the pachinko machine 10 includes a first control unit 51, a second control unit 52, a third control unit 53, and a power supply unit 58. Specifically, these units are provided on the back surface of the inner frame 13 .

The first control unit 51 has a main controller 60 . The main controller 60 has a main control board having a function of controlling the main game. The main control board is housed in a board box made of transparent resin material. This board box is configured to leave traces of opening and closing. For example, a seal is affixed to a portion that can be opened and closed, and when the substrate box is opened, characters such as "opened" appear.

The second control unit 52 includes an audio emission control device 90 and a display control device 100 . The sound emission control device 90 controls emission means such as speakers and various lamps provided in front of the pachinko machine 10 based on commands transmitted from the main control device 60 . The display control device 100 controls the pattern display device based on commands transmitted from the sound emission control device 90 . The pattern display device has a liquid crystal display for displaying patterns and images for presentation.

The third control unit 53 has a payout control device 70 and a launch control device 80 . The payout control device 70 performs payout control for paying out prize balls. When an instruction to shoot a game ball is input from the main control device 60, the shooting control device 80 shoots a game ball with strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 by the player. Controls the ball launching mechanism. In addition, on the back of the inner frame 13, there is a tank 54 to which the game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially supplied, and a slope which is connected to the lower part of the tank 54 and is gently inclined so that the game balls flow downstream. , a case rail 56 connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 55, a game ball is supplied from the case rail 56, and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out according to an instruction from the payout control device 70. A plurality of devices necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10, such as a payout device 71, are provided.

The power supply unit 58 includes a power supply device 85 and a power switch 88 . The power supply device 85 supplies power necessary for the pachinko machine 10 to operate. A power switch 88 is connected to the power supply device 85 . By ON/OFF operation of the power switch 88, a supply state in which power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 and a non-supply state in which power is not supplied to the pachinko machine 10 are switched.

Next, the game board will be explained. The game board is detachably attached to the front surface of the inner frame 13. - 特許庁

204 is a front view of the game board 30. FIG. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on its front surface. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding a game ball is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. A game ball shot from the game ball shooting mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and released above the game area PA, and then flows down the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicularly to the game board 30, and accessories such as windmills are arranged. These nails 42 and windmills distribute and organize the falling directions of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

The game board 30 is formed with a plurality of openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. A general prize winning port 32, a first starting port 33, a second starting port 34, a through gate 35, and a variable winning device 36 are provided in each opening. Game balls entered into each of the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, the through gate 35, and the variable winning device 36 enter the individual openings formed on the game board 30. Induced. Also, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display section 45 . The main display section 45 has a special figure unit 37 , a normal figure unit 38 , and a round display section 39 .

As illustrated, the general prize winning openings 32 are ball entrance members that form ball entrances into which game balls can enter, and are provided in plurality on the game board 30 . In this embodiment, when game balls enter the general winning hole 32, 10 game balls are paid out as prize balls from the payout device 71 (Fig. 203).

The first starting port 33 is a ball entrance member that forms a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter. The first starting port 33 is provided at the lower center of the game board 30 . In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first start hole 33, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a winning lottery, which will be described later, is executed.

The second starting port 34 is a ball entrance member that forms a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and is provided on the right side of the game board 30 . In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 34, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a winning lottery, which will be described later, is executed. Further, the second starting port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a.

The through gate 35 has a through hole extending vertically. The through gate 35 is a through gate that serves as a trigger for executing a lottery for opening the electric accessory 34a. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the main controller 60 performs an internal lottery (electric accessory open lottery) triggered by the passage. As a result of the internal lottery, when the electric role open is won, the electric accessory 34a shifts to the electric role open state in a predetermined manner. Since the through gate 35 is arranged on the upstream side of the second starting port 34 with respect to the flowing direction of the game ball, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 flows down the game area PA after passing through the second opening. It is possible to enter the ball into the starting port 34 . In addition, in this embodiment, even if the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the prize ball is not paid out.

The variable winning device 36 includes a large winning opening 36a leading to the back side of the game board 30, and an opening/closing door 36b for opening and closing the large winning opening 36a. The opening/closing door 36b is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot enter the big winning opening 36a. As a result of the internal lottery (winning lottery) by the main controller 60, when a big win is won and the opening/closing execution mode is shifted, the opening/closing door 36b repeats an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state. The open/close execution mode is the result of a winning lottery by the main control device 60 triggered by the ball entering the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, and when a big win is won, the opening/closing door 36b is in an open state. and the closed state are repeated. That is, when a big win is won as a result of a winning lottery based on the ball entering the first starting hole 33, the operation shifts to the opening/closing execution mode in which the ball can enter the big winning hole 36a of the variable prize winning device 36. Similarly, even if a big win is won as a result of the winning lottery based on the ball entering the second starting hole 34, the operation shifts to the opening/closing execution mode in which the ball can enter the big winning hole 36a of the variable prize winning device 36. . In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the big winning hole 36a of the variable winning device 36, the payout device 71 pays out 15 game balls as prize balls.

An out port 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and game balls that do not enter the general winning port 32, the first starting port 33, the second starting port 34, or the variable winning device 36 are out. It is discharged from the game area PA through the mouth 43 .

The special figure unit 37 includes a first symbol display portion 37a and a second symbol display portion 37b. Each of the first pattern display portion 37a and the second pattern display portion 37b is composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting portions are arranged in a predetermined manner.

The first pattern display portion 37a is a display portion for displaying the first pattern. The first pattern refers to a pattern that is variably displayed or statically displayed based on a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33 . The first symbol display part 37a is used as a display mode until the segment display displays a display corresponding to the lottery result when a winning lottery is performed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting hole 33. , to perform the variable display of the first symbol. When the lottery is finished, the first symbol display unit 37a causes the segment display to stop displaying the first symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

The second pattern display portion 37b is a display portion for displaying the second pattern. The second pattern refers to a pattern that is variably displayed or statically displayed based on a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34 . The second symbol display part 37b is used as a display mode until a winning lottery is performed triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 34, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is performed on the segment display device. , to perform the variable display of the second symbol. When the lottery is finished, the second symbol display section 37b causes the segment display device to stop displaying the second symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

The time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol displayed in the second symbol display portion 37b to the stop display is called the variation time. call. Specifically, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed in the first symbol display portion 37a to the stop display is also called the first variation time, and the second symbol display portion 37b The time from the start of the variable display of the second symbol to be displayed until the stop display is also called a second variable time.

The special figure unit 37 is further provided with a first pending display portion 37c and a second pending display portion 37d, which are LED lamps, at positions adjacent to the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b. In this embodiment, up to four game balls entered into the first starting port 33 are reserved. The first reservation display portion 37c displays the number of reservations for the first starting port 33 according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be lit. Further, in the present embodiment, up to four game balls entered into the second starting port 34 are reserved. The second reservation display part 37d displays the number of reservations of the second starting port 34 according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be lit.

The normal figure unit 38 is composed of a light-emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. The normal figure unit 38, when the electric accessary item open lottery triggered by the passage of the through gate 35 is performed, causes the light-emitting display to display in a lighting display, a blinking display, or a predetermined mode. When the electric accessory open lottery ends, the normal figure unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The round display section 39 is composed of a light-emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games that occur in the open/close execution mode or displays corresponding thereto. A round game means that either a predetermined upper limit duration time elapses or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls enter the variable winning device 36 until either condition is met. It is a game in which the door 36b is kept open. The number of round games varies depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the shift. The round display unit 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the opening/closing execution mode is started, and ends when the opening/closing execution mode is finished and a new game is started.

In addition, the special figure unit 37, the general figure unit 38, and the round display unit 39 are not limited to being configured by a segment display device or a light emitting display device using an LED lamp. It may consist of various display devices capable of showing the draw in progress and the draw results, such as a CRT or dot matrix display.

The variable display unit 40 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area PA. The variable display unit 40 has a pattern display device 41 . The pattern display device 41 has a liquid crystal display. The display contents of the pattern display device 41 are controlled by the display control device 100 (FIG. 203). The pattern display device 41 may be replaced with various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

When the first symbol display unit 37a performs variable display or predetermined display based on the ball entering the first starting port 33, the symbol display device 41 performs variable display or predetermined display of the symbols accordingly. In addition, when the second symbol display unit 37b performs a variable display or a predetermined display based on the ball entering the second starting port 34, the symbol display device 41 displays the symbol in a variable display or a predetermined display accordingly. conduct. The symbol display device 41 performs not only the display performance triggered by the entry of the ball into the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, but also the display performance during the opening/closing execution mode that shifts when the jackpot is won. . Details of the pattern display device 41 will be described below.

FIG. 205 is an explanatory diagram showing the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. As shown in FIG. Three pattern rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 on the left, middle and right are variably displayed on the display surface 41a. Specifically, in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, symbols representing numbers 1 to 8 are arranged in ascending or descending order of numbers, and each symbol row is cyclically arranged from top to bottom or from bottom to top. A scrolling variable display is performed. After the variable display by scrolling, as shown in FIG. 205, one symbol for each symbol row is displayed in a stationary state on the activated line L. FIG.

FIG. 206 is an explanatory diagram showing symbols that are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41. FIG. FIG. 206(a) shows the even numbers among the numbers 1 to 8, and FIGS. The illustration is for the symbols 7 and 5). In this embodiment, the symbols that are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41 are classified into two types, that is, the symbols showing only numbers and the symbols with warrior characters added to the numbers. Symbols showing only numbers are applied to symbols showing even numbers. That is, as shown in FIG. 206(a), the symbol representing the number 2, the symbol representing the number 4, the symbol representing the number 6, and the symbol representing the number 8 are the symbols representing only the numbers concerned. ing.

On the other hand, a pattern in which a warrior character is added to a number is applied to a pattern representing an odd number. That is, as shown in FIG. 206(b), the pattern showing the number 7 is a pattern in which the warrior character A is added to the number 7. As shown in FIG. 206(c), the pattern showing the number 5 is a pattern in which the warrior character B is added to the number 5. As shown in FIG. Although not shown, the pattern showing the number 3 is a pattern in which the warrior character C is added to the number 3. Although not shown, the pattern showing the number 1 is a pattern in which the warrior character D is added to the number 1. In this embodiment, warrior character A is, for example, a beautiful girl warrior character, as shown in FIG. 206(b). Warrior character B is, for example, a young warrior character, as shown in FIG. 206(c).

In the present embodiment, the symbols to be variably displayed consisted of two types of symbols, numbers and symbols with warrior characters added. You may comprise the pattern which carries out by one of the said 2 types. In other words, the symbols to be variably displayed may be composed of only numbers, or may be composed of only numbers with warrior characters added. Also, the number of warrior characters is not limited to four, and may be any number as long as it is equal to or less than the number of designs. Incidentally, when the symbols are composed only of numbers, the number of warrior characters appearing in the production described later may exceed the number of symbols.

Here, a warrior character is a character that can fight. A character is a person, an animal, or the like that appears in works such as novels, comics, and games. Characters may include not only living things but also inorganic objects (robots, automobiles, battleships, etc.). In addition, the character should be judged to act based on subjective thinking, and by using anthropomorphism, it can also include conceptual things (country, prefecture, region, territory, clan), etc. good.

Next, a detailed description will be given of how the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (FIG. 205) change. Specifically, when a game ball enters the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, a variable display is started in which the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are cyclically scrolled in a predetermined direction. Then, the symbols to be scrolled are switched from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol row Z1, the symbol row Z3, and the symbol row Z2, and finally, the predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. . When the variable display of symbols is finished and the display is stopped, and when the result of the winning lottery by the main control device 60 is a big win, a predetermined predetermined combination of symbols is displayed on the activated line L. It is formed. For example, a combination of the same symbols is formed on the activated line L. The pattern display device 41 is not limited to the above-described patterns, but the number of pattern rows, the number of active lines, the direction of pattern display variation in the pattern rows, and the patterns in each pattern row. Various modes can be adopted for the mode of variable display of symbols such as numbers.

Here, the game cycle refers to the period from the start of the variable display of the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b to the end of the variable display and the stop display, and the end of the stop display. This is one unit of processing for notifying the player of the lottery result of the winning lottery for the special information obtained based on the entry of the game ball into either the first start hole 33 or the second start hole 34.例文帳に追加In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one winning lottery for one piece of special information for each game. When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires the special information based on the entry of the game ball into either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the first symbol display unit In either one of the 37a or the second pattern display portion 37b, after the segment display is variably displayed, the segment display is stop-displayed so that the display corresponds to the lottery result of the acquired special information. In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment acquires the special information based on the entry of the game ball into either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the symbol display device At 41, after the predetermined symbol row is variably displayed, the symbol row is stopped and displayed so as to correspond to the lottery result of the acquired special information. In addition, the time required for one game round is also called unit game time. The unit playing time is composed of a variable time, which is the time from when the variable display is started until the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed, and a stop time, which is the time when the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed. there is

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 205, below the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, a first starting opening reservation area Ds1, a reserved digestion area Dm, and a second starting opening reservation area Ds2 are displayed. be. The reserved digestion area Dm is displayed in the center of the display surface 41a in the left-right direction, the first start opening reservation area Ds1 is displayed on the left side of the reservation digestion area Dm, and the second start opening reservation area Ds2 is displayed in the reservation digestion area Dm. displayed on the right. In the first start opening reservation area Ds1, the number of reserved balls based on the entry of game balls into the first start opening 33 is displayed. In the second starting opening reservation area Ds2, the number of reserved balls based on the entry of game balls into the second starting opening 34 is displayed. In this embodiment, as described above, the maximum number of game balls entered into the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 is four. Each reservation displayed in the first start opening reservation area Ds1 is moved to the reservation digestion area Dm and becomes a target of a winning lottery. In addition, each reservation displayed in the second start opening reservation area Ds2 is moved to the reservation digestion area Dm and becomes a target of a winning lottery.

As shown in FIG. 204, a pair of nails (so-called life nails, navel nails) 42 (42a, 42b) are provided above the first starting port 33. As shown in FIG. The probability of the game ball entering the first starting port 33 changes depending on the spacing between the pair of nails 42a and 42b.

<<5-2>> Electrical Configuration of Gaming Machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described using a block diagram.

FIG. 207 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 10 mainly includes a main controller 60 , a sound emission control device 90 , and a display control device 100 .

The main controller 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main game. The main control board 61 has an MPU 62 composed of elements having multiple functions. The MPU 62 includes a CPU (not shown) that executes various control programs, a ROM 63 that records various control programs and fixed value data, and temporarily stores various data when executing the programs recorded in the ROM 63. and a RAM 64, which is a memory for storing. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. A part of the functions of the MPU 62 may be provided by another element. Details of various areas provided in the ROM 63 and RAM 64 will be described later.

The main control board 61 is provided with an input port (not shown) and an output port (not shown). An input port of the main control board 61 is connected to a payout control device 70 and a power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in a power supply device 85 . The main control board 61 is supplied with stable 24 V DC power from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86 . The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power supply as an external power supply, and converts the external power supplied from the commercial power supply into the operating power required by the main control device 60, the payout control device 70, etc., to each device supply power. The power supply device 85 has a capacitor (not shown), and continues to supply power to each device for a predetermined period of time when a power failure occurs or when the power switch 88 (Fig. 203) is turned off. do.

Various detection sensors 67 a to 67 e are connected to the input port of the main control board 61 . Specifically, it is connected to a plurality of detection sensors provided at various ball entry openings such as the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, the through gate 35, and the variable winning apparatus 36. . The MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether or not the game ball flowing down the game area PA enters each ball entrance based on the signals from the various detection sensors 67a to 67e, and determines whether the game ball enters the through gate. It is determined whether or not 35 has been passed. Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 and the second start port 34, and executes the electric accessory release lottery based on the entry of the ball into the through gate 35. do.

The output port of the main control board 61 is provided with a variable winning driving unit 36c that opens and closes the open/close door 36b of the variable winning device 36, and an electric accessory driving unit 34b that opens and closes the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34. , and the main display unit 45 are connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning driving section 36c so that the opening/closing door 36b is opened/closed. Further, as a result of the electric accessory opening lottery, when the electric role opening is won, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 34b so that the electric accessory 34a is released. In each game round, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b in the main display portion 45. FIG. Further, when the jackpot type is determined in the opening/closing execution mode and the number of round games to be executed in the opening/closing execution mode is determined, display control of the round display section 39 in the main display section 45 is executed.

A payout control device 70 and a sound emission control device 90 are connected to the output port of the main control board 61 . A prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 70 from the main control device 60 based on the winning judgment result, for example. When the main controller 60 transmits the prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63. FIG. Specifically, when entering the ball into the general winning hole 32 is specified, a winning ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is transmitted from the main controller 60, and the ball enters the first starting hole 33. is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is transmitted from the main controller 60, and when entering the second start port 34 is specified, one game ball is paid out A prize ball command corresponding to is transmitted from the main controller 60 . The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 based on the prize ball command received from the main controller 60 to pay out prize balls.

A discharge control device 80 is connected to the payout control device 70 . The shooting control device 80 controls shooting of the game ball shooting mechanism 81 . The game ball shooting mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined shooting conditions are met. Also, the operation handle 25 and the game ball shooting button 26 are connected to the shooting control device 80 .

The sound emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60 and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main controller 60 transmits various commands, the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63 is referred to. Details of these various commands will be described later.

In addition, based on various commands received from the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90 controls the driving of various lamps 47 composed of light emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the front door frame 14, and the driving control of the speaker 46. and control the display control device 100 . Also, the effect operation button 24 is connected to the sound emission control device 90, and when the effect operation button 24 is operated by the player at a predetermined timing, a game effect reflecting the operation is performed. It controls the various lamps 47, the speaker 46, the display control device 100, and the like.

The display control device 100 executes display control of the pattern display device 41 based on various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 . Specifically, the display control device 100, based on the various commands received from the sound emission control device 90, grasps the fluctuation time of the pattern in the pattern display device 41 and the type of combination of patterns to be finally stopped and displayed. , presence/absence of occurrence of ready-to-win, contents of ready-to-win effect, contents of notice effect to be executed in each game cycle, and the like are grasped. In this embodiment, the stop time, which is the time during which the combination of symbols is stopped and displayed, is constant. Therefore, by determining the variable time, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game, is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

FIG. 208 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used for a winning lottery or the like. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 sets the winning lottery, the setting of the display of the main display section 45, the setting of the pattern display of the pattern display device 41, and the like. Specifically, a jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery. A jackpot type counter C2 is used when sorting the jackpot types such as probability variable jackpot results and normal jackpot results. A ready-to-win random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not to generate a ready-to-win when the symbol row displayed on the symbol display device 41 is changed.

A random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Further, when determining the variation time in the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b of the main display portion 45 and the symbol display device 41, a variation type counter CS is used. Furthermore, the electric accessory opening counter C4 is used for the electric accessory opening lottery for determining whether or not the electric accessory 34a of the second start port 34 is to be opened.

Each of the counters C1 to C4, CINI, and CS is a loop counter that adds 1 to the counter value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. FIG.

The RAM 64 is provided with a pending information storage area 64b and a determination processing execution area 64c. The reservation information storage area 64b is provided with a first reservation area Ra and a second reservation area Rb. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 at the timing of the ball is set to the first It is stored chronologically in the reservation area Ra. In addition, when the game ball enters the second start port 34, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 at the timing of the ball entering the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b stored in chronological order.

Details of the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. The jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery as described above. The jackpot random number counter C1 is, for example, configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 1199 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. When the jackpot random number counter C1 completes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 1199).

The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry when the game ball enters the first start port 33. When a game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entry.

The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first reservation area Ra is moved to the execution area AE of the judgment processing execution area 64c, and is collated with the hit/fail table stored in the hit/fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. It is determined whether or not In addition, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second reservation area Rb moves to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c, and is compared with the success/failure table stored in the success/failure table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, It is determined whether or not it will be a big hit.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb is By doing so, it moves to the execution area AE of the judgment processing execution area 64c in the order acquired. Then, the jackpot random number counter C1 moved to the execution area AE is collated with the hit/fail table stored in the hit/fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and it is determined whether or not there will be a jackpot.

Next, the details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining the jackpot type. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented one by one within the range of 0 to 99 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry when the game ball enters the first start port 33. When the game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c, and when the result of the winning lottery is a jackpot, the determination processing execution area 64c The jackpot type is determined using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in . Furthermore, the MPU 62 uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to determine the display mode of the segment display device that is stopped and displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b. . The stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referred to for the determination.

Next, details of the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is used when determining whether or not a reach occurs when the result of the winning lottery is not a big win. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the first start port 33, and the second start port 34. It is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters. After the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first reservation area Ra is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c, it is compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63, and the reach occurs. After the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the second reservation area Rb is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c, it is compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63, and the reach occurs. However, when the result of the winning lottery is a big win and the game shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 determines the occurrence of reach regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

The ready-to-win means that, for some of the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41, there is a possibility that a combination of symbols corresponding to a big win will be established, and some combinations of symbols are stopped. It refers to a display state in which symbols are displayed and the remaining symbol rows are displayed in a variable manner. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the combination of symbols corresponding to the big win refers to the combination of the same symbols on a predetermined pay line. As a specific example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of FIG. A ready-to-win state is achieved by forming a ready-to-win line and performing variable display of symbols in the symbol row Z2 when the ready-to-win line is formed. Then, when a big win occurs, the same symbols as the symbols forming the reach line are stop-displayed in the symbol row Z2.

In addition, in the ready-to-win state, while the ready-to-win line is formed, the patterns are displayed in the remaining pattern rows in a variable manner, and the ready-to-win effect is performed by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image in the screen effect, It includes a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a after displaying a combination of patterns in which a reach line is formed in a reduced size or not. In addition, when the ready-to-win effect is being performed or before the ready-to-win display is performed, the determination of whether or not to perform a notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character is performed using the reach-to-win random number counter C3 or other counters. may

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the types of reach are normal reach (also referred to as normal reach), super reach which suggests that the possibility (expectation) of winning a jackpot in a winning lottery is higher than normal reach, and winning. A special reach that suggests that the possibility (expectation) of winning a jackpot in the lottery is higher than the super reach is prepared. Normal Reach, Super Reach, and Special Reach are determined to appear relatively frequently. Specifically, the appearance frequency of Super Reach is lower than the appearance frequency of Normal Reach, and the appearance frequency of Special Reach is lower than the appearance frequency of Super Reach. Each production at the time of normal reach, super reach, and special reach will be described in detail later.

Next, details of the fluctuation type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the variation time in the first symbol display portion 37 a and the second symbol display portion 37 b and the symbol variation time in the symbol display device 41 . The fluctuation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in sequence within a range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once each time a normal process, which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the normal process. The update value is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the first start port 33, and the reservation information at the timing when the game ball enters the second start port 34. It is stored in the second reserved area Rb of the storage area 64b. Using the value of the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the first reservation area Ra or the value of the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the second reservation area Rb, the fluctuation stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 By referring to the time table, the variation time in the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b is determined.

Next, the details of the electric accessory release counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory release counter C4 is, for example, configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 465 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated, and stored in the electric role holding area 64d of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the through gate 35. - 特許庁Then, at a predetermined timing, after the value of the electric role product open counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 64d moves to the electric role execution area 64e, the value of the electric role product open counter C4 is displayed in the electric role execution area 64e. A lottery (hereinafter referred to as an electric accessory open lottery) is performed as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to the open state. Specifically, in the electric role execution area 64e, the winning/failure table (electric role lottery winning/failure table) stored in the role lottery table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 and the value of the electric role lottery counter C4 are different. It is collated, and it is determined whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to the open state.

In addition, at least one of the obtained value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, the value of the variation type counter CS, and the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 is a special Corresponds to information. Also, at least one of the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the variation type counter CS, and the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first reservation area Ra and the second reservation area Rb Also called reserved information.

Next, the success/failure table will be described. The success/failure table is table data for matching with the big-hit random number counter C1 when performing a winning lottery based on the big-hit random number counter C1. A low-probability mode and a high-probability mode are set in the pachinko machine 10 as a lottery mode for a winning lottery. In the winning lottery in the probability mode, the success/failure table for the high probability mode is referred to. High-probability mode (also called high-probability gaming state) is a gaming state that is started by winning a variable probability jackpot, and the probability of winning a jackpot in a winning lottery is relatively higher than the low-probability mode. To tell.

FIG. 209 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the success/failure table. FIG. 209(a) shows the success/failure table for the low-probability mode (for the low-probability mode), and FIG. 209(b) shows the success/failure table for the high-probability mode.

As shown in FIG. 209(a), in the success/failure table for the low-probability mode, five values of 0 to 4 are set as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 for the jackpot. Of the values from 0 to 1199, the values (5 to 1199) other than the five values from 0 to 4 are outliers. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 209(b), 16 values from 0 to 15 are set in the success/failure table for the high-probability mode as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Of the values from 0 to 1199, the values (16 to 1199) other than the 16 values from 0 to 15 are outliers. In this way, the high-probability mode has a higher probability of winning a big win in the winning lottery than the low-probability mode.

Further, in the present embodiment, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as the jackpot in the hit/fail table for the low-probability mode is the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as the jackpot in the hit/fail table for the high-probability mode. included in the group. However, as long as the probability of winning a big win in the high-probability mode is higher than in the low-probability mode as a result of the winning lottery, the number and value of the random numbers set as the big wins are arbitrary.

It should be noted that a "small win" may be provided as a result of the winning lottery, although it is not used in the win/fail table in this embodiment.

A "minor win" is a success/fail result that triggers a transition to the opening/closing execution mode in which the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is executed, but does not trigger a transition for both the lottery mode and the support mode. . On the other hand, "miss" is a pass/fail result that does not trigger the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, nor does it trigger the transition to the lottery mode and the support mode.

Next, the jackpot type will be described. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set in the pachinko machine 10. - 特許庁Specifically, for example, by providing differences in the following three aspects or modes, it is possible to set a plurality of types of jackpots.
(1) Aspect of opening/closing control of variable winning device 36 in opening/closing execution mode (2) Lottery mode for winning lottery after completion of opening/closing execution mode (3) Electric accessory 34a of second start port 34 after completion of opening/closing execution mode Support mode

In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the above-mentioned (1) opening/closing execution mode, the occurrence of winning balls to the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode. A high-frequency winning mode and a low-frequency winning mode can be set so that the frequencies are relatively high and low. For example, in the high frequency winning mode, the opening and closing door 36b is opened and closed a plurality of times (for example, 16 times) from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode, and one opening is performed until 30 seconds elapses or to the opening and closing door 36b. It can be set to continue until the number of hit balls reaches 10. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening and closing door 36b is opened and closed twice from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode, and one opening is until 0.2 sec elapses or a ball enters the opening and closing door 36b. It can be set to continue until the number reaches six.

When the operation handle 25 is operated by the player, the game ball shooting mechanism 81 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is shot toward the game area PA every 0.6 sec. In the case of the above specific example, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of the opening/closing door 36b is 0.2 sec. In other words, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of the open/close door 36b is shorter than the shooting cycle of the game ball. Therefore, in the opening and closing execution mode related to the low-frequency winning mode, substantially no game balls enter. However, even in the opening and closing execution mode related to the low-frequency winning mode, it may be set so that the game ball can enter.

The number of times of opening and closing the opening/closing door 36b, the limit time for one opening, and the limit number of openings for one opening are determined by the variable winning device 36 during the period from the start of the opening/closing execution mode to the end of the opening/closing execution mode. As long as the frequency of ball occurrence is higher in the high-frequency winning mode than in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening mode of the opening/closing door 36b is arbitrary. Specifically, if the high frequency winning mode has more opening and closing times than the low frequency winning mode, the opening limit time for one opening is longer, or the opening limit number for one opening is set more good. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, in the open/close execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode, substantially no winning ball to the variable winning device 36 may occur.

The pachinko machine 10 has a high-probability mode in which a winning lottery is performed using a high-probability win-or-fail table as a win-or-fail table, and a win-fail table as a win-or-fail table. A low-probability mode in which a winning lottery is performed using a low-probability success/failure table can be set. As described with reference to FIG. 209, the winning lottery using the high-probability success/failure table is more likely to win the jackpot than the winning lottery using the low-probability success/failure table. likely to.

In the pachinko machine 10, as a form of the support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the end of the above-mentioned (3) opening and closing execution mode, shooting of game balls continues in a similar form to the game area PA. A high-frequency support mode and a low-frequency support mode are selected so that the frequency of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 being in the open state per unit time is relatively high or low when compared in the situation where can be set.

Specifically, the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode have different probabilities of winning the electric role open lottery in the electric role item opening lottery using the electric role item opening counter C4. In the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role open lottery in the electric accessory open lottery is made higher than in the low frequency support mode. In addition, in the high-frequency support mode, the opening time of the electric accessory 34a may be set longer than in the low-frequency support mode when the electric role opening winning is won.

Although not adopted in the present embodiment, in the high frequency support mode, the number of times the electric accessory 34a is in the open state when the electric accessory 34a is elected is set higher than in the low frequency support mode. good too. Furthermore, it may be configured such that the electric accessory 34a is set to have a long opening time once. In addition, in the high-frequency support mode, in the case where the open state of the electric accessory 34a occurs multiple times due to the electric role open winning, the closing time from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state is , may be set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the time secured from one electric accessory open lottery to the next electric accessory open lottery is set to be relatively shorter than in the low-frequency support mode. may

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of a ball entering the second starting port 34 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. That is, the high-frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary game state that assists establishment of special information acquisition conditions.

In the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won as a result of the winning lottery, the jackpot type is sorted using the jackpot type counter C2. The distribution of the jackpot types corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63 as a distribution table.

FIG. 210 is an explanatory diagram of the contents of the distribution table. FIG. 210(a) shows the distribution table for the first start port, and FIG. 210(b) shows the distribution table for the second start port. The distribution table for the first start port is referred to during a winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33, and the distribution table for the second start port is referred to the second start port 34. It is referred to during the winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball.

As shown in the distribution table for the first starting port in FIG. 210(a), the distribution table for the first starting port includes, as jackpot types based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33, A 16R probability variable jackpot, an 8R probability variable jackpot, a 16R normal jackpot, and an 8R normal jackpot are set.

In the 16R probability variable jackpot and the 8R probability variable jackpot, the mode of opening and closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode, and the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the end of the opening and closing execution mode (hereinafter simply “lottery mode”). ) is a high-probability mode, and the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode is a high-frequency support mode. The difference between the 16R variable variable jackpot and the 8R variable variable jackpot is that the number of openings of the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode is different, the 16R variable variable jackpot is 16 times (16 rounds), and the 8R variable variable jackpot is 8. times (8 rounds).

In the 16R normal jackpot and the 8R normal jackpot, the mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode, the lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends is the low-probability mode, and the opening/closing execution mode is selected. It is a jackpot in which the support mode after the end is the high-frequency support mode. The difference between the 16R normal jackpot and the 8R normal jackpot is that the number of openings of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is different, the 16R normal jackpot is 16 times (16 rounds), and the 8R normal jackpot is 8 times. times (8 rounds).

In the distribution table for the first start port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 99", "0 to 39" corresponds to the 16R probability variable jackpot, and "40 to 64" corresponds to the 8R probability variable jackpot. , "65 to 89" corresponds to the 16R normal jackpot, and "90 to 99" corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, four types of jackpots are set as the types of jackpots. Therefore, the aspect of the jackpot is diversified. When these four types of jackpots are compared, the degree of advantage for the player is the highest for the 16R variable variable jackpot, the next highest for the 8R variable variable jackpot, followed by the 16R normal jackpot, and finally the 8R normal jackpot. By setting a plurality of types of jackpots with different degrees of advantage for the player in this way, the monotony of the game can be suppressed, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

As shown in the distribution table for the second starting port in FIG. A 16R probability variable jackpot and an 8R normal jackpot are set. In the distribution table for the second start port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 99", "0 to 64" corresponds to the 16R probability variable jackpot, and "65 to 99" corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot. corresponds to

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won, the type of jackpot is distributed based on the ball entering the first start port 33 and when the jackpot is won. It is different from the case of winning a jackpot based on the entry of the ball into the starting hole 34, and a clear difference is provided in the advantage for the player.

In addition, when the winning lottery results in a loss, the mode is not changed to the opening/closing execution mode, and the lottery mode and the support mode are not changed. In the sorting of the types of jackpots, if a 16 probability variable jackpot or an 8R probability variable jackpot is obtained, as described above, the lottery mode after the end of the opening and closing execution mode becomes a high probability mode, but this high probability mode The state is continued until the next big win is won in the winning lottery.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, and the jackpot type using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. However, the MPU 62 further uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to stop and display the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b. Determine the display mode. The stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referred to for the determination.

Next, a reach determination table (hereinafter referred to as a reach determination success/failure table) will be described. The reach determination success/failure table is table data for collating with the value of the reach random number counter C3 when determining whether or not reach occurs based on the value of the reach random number counter C3.

FIG. 211 is an explanatory diagram showing a hit/fail table for reach determination. As shown in FIG. 211, among the values of the reach random number counter C3 ranging from 0 to 399, 20 values from 0 to 19 are set in the reach determination success/failure table as values for winning the reach. Among the values of 0 to 399, values (20 to 399) other than the 20 values of 0 to 19 are set as outliers, that is, values that do not win the reach. In other words, the probability of winning the ready-to-win is 1/20 in the situation where the jackpot is not won in the winning lottery.

FIG. 212 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the success/failure table (electric accessary product open lottery success/failure table) used when executing the electric accessary product open lottery.

FIG. 212(a) shows a success/failure table (for low-frequency support mode) for electric accessory open lottery used in low-frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 212(a), in the electric accessory open lottery success/failure table (for low frequency support mode), there are two values of 0 and 1 for the electric accessory open counter C4 that will win the electric role open winning. A value is set. 464 values from 2 to 465 are set as the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4 to be out. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 in the low-frequency support mode and the electric accessary item open lottery is executed, the electric role open lottery is won with a probability of 1/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric role opening win is made in the low-frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.4 seconds.

FIG. 212(b) shows a success/failure table (for high-frequency support mode) for electric accessory open lottery used in high-frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 212(b), in the success/failure table for the electric accessory open lottery (for high frequency support mode), there are 462 values from 0 to 461 as the value of the electric accessory open counter C4 for winning the electric role open winning. A value is set. Four values of 462 to 465 are set as the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4 that is out. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 in the high-frequency support mode and the electric accessory open lottery is executed, the electric role open lottery is won with a probability of 231/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric role opening win is made in the high-frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.6 seconds.

In this way, the success/failure table for the electric accessory open lottery is set so that the high-frequency support mode has a higher probability of the game ball entering the second start port 34 than the low-frequency support mode. .

<<5-3>> Electrical Configuration of Audio Light Emitting Control Device and Display Control Device:
Next, electrical configurations of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 213 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. As shown in FIG. A part of the configuration such as the power supply device 85 (FIG. 207) is omitted. An MPU 92 is mounted on an audio emission control board 91 provided in the audio emission control device 90 . The MPU 92 is a device containing a CPU, a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like.

The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables, and the like. For example, part of the area of the ROM 93 is provided with an effect pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like. Details of these will be described later.

The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the ROM 93 . For example, a part of the area of the RAM 94 is provided with various flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, and the like. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 92, and they may be individually integrated into chips.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port. The input side of the MPU 92 is connected to the main control device 60 and the effect operation button 24 . Various commands are received from the main controller 60 . A speaker 46 and various lamps 47 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92, and the display control device 100 is also connected.

The display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102, which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are integrated into chips, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. is installed. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 102, and they may be individually integrated into chips.

The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, to generate internal commands for the VDP 105). .

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and also stores JPEG format image data for background images.

A work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when various programs are executed by the MPU 102 .

The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the pattern display device 41 . The VDP 105 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is an IC chip, and is a kind of microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, etc., and intervenes in the reading and writing of data.

The character ROM 106 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as designs and pictures displayed on the design display device 41 . The character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table and the like that are referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 106 . It is also possible to configure the character ROM 106 to store the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 .

The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, and by rewriting the content of the video RAM 107, the display content of the pattern display device 41 is changed.

Hereinafter, the MPU 62, ROM 63, and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main MPU 62, main ROM 63, and main RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the sound emission control device 90 are referred to as the sound and light side MPU 92 and the sound and light side, respectively. The ROM 93 and the sound/light side RAM 94 are also called, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also called the display side MPU 102 .

<<5-4>> Outline of Processing by Gaming Machine:
Next, an overview of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 that fluctuate and stop, the screen effect when super reach or special reach occurs, and the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed. A background image appearing on the back side (rear side) is displayed.

The background image will be explained first. The pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment displays a background image called a stage. A stage is one form of an effect mode that defines an effect mode, and each stage is prepared with a moving image with a story.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, two types of stages are prepared: a character-type stage and a non-character-type stage. A character stage is a stage corresponding to a warrior character. A non-character stage is a stage that does not correspond to a warrior character.

FIG. 214 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a character stage. In the pachinko machine 10, as character stages, four character stages corresponding to the previously described warrior characters A to D are prepared. Specifically, as a character-type stage corresponding to warrior character A, a stage of a beautiful girl warrior character's room shown in FIG. 214(a) is prepared. In this stage, a beautiful girl warrior character as warrior character A spends time in her own room. Also, as a character stage corresponding to warrior character B, a stage of a young warrior character's room shown in FIG. 214(b) is prepared. In this stage, a young warrior character as warrior character B spends time in his room. In addition, although not shown, a stage in the room of the warrior character C as a character stage corresponding to the warrior character C and a stage in the room of the warrior character D as a character stage corresponding to the warrior character D are prepared. there is

That is, each stage corresponding to the character stage is associated with one warrior character, and a moving image in which the associated warrior character appears is assigned. Each of the stages of the rooms of the warrior characters A to D is a production in which the warrior character who is the owner of the room appears, but this does not prevent other warrior characters from appearing in addition to the warrior character. In addition, as a modified example, a configuration may be adopted in which the associated warrior character does not appear in the moving image of each stage of the character-based stage. In short, in the pachinko machine 10, it suffices if one warrior character is internally linked to each stage corresponding to the character stage, and whether or not the warrior character appears in the moving image of the stage. regardless of whether In the present embodiment, each stage corresponding to the character stage is associated with the warrior character added to the variably displayed symbol. It can be a character stage associated with a character unrelated to the warrior character. In this case, the number of character-based stages need not be limited to four, and may be any other number.

FIG. 215 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a non-character stage. In the pachinko machine 10, a rural stage illustrated in FIG. 215(a) is prepared as one of the non-character stages. This stage represents a rural landscape. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, as another non-character stage, an urban stage illustrated in FIG. 215(b) is prepared. This stage presents an urban landscape. In the pachinko machine 10, an ocean stage (not shown) and an all-players stage (not shown) are prepared as other non-character-type stages. The ocean stage represents an ocean landscape. In the stage for everyone, all the warrior characters A to D appear. A non-character type stage is a stage that does not correspond to a warrior character, but does not prevent the appearance of only one warrior character or the appearance of a plurality of warrior characters. In short, a character-type stage is associated with one warrior character, whereas a non-character-type stage is associated with no warrior character. In this embodiment, the number of non-character-type stages is four, but it may be replaced with another number.

In the present embodiment, each stage as a character-type stage and each stage as a non-character-type stage are displayed with stage names such as "Bishoujo Senshi Character Room Stage" and "Country Stage". Alternatively, each stage may have a configuration in which the stage name is not displayed. Alternatively, the stage name may be displayed for a predetermined period immediately after the stage is switched, and the stage name may be hidden after the predetermined period has passed.

In the pachinko machine 10, one stage is selected from each stage as a character stage and each stage as a non-character stage, and the selected stage is displayed as a background image.

Next, a description will be given of the screen effect when Super Reach or Special Reach occurs. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, normal reach, super reach, and special reach are prepared as types of reach, as described above.

In this embodiment, the normal reach is a reach that does not involve switching the screen effect displayed on the pattern display device 41 . Reach occurs when two of the three pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped with the same pattern, and the third pattern changes at a slower speed than before, just before the third pattern stops. Then it slows down even more. As a result, it is possible to make the player feel the expectation that the game will stop as it is and that the game will be a big win. During the production of normal reach, it may change to super reach or special reach, or it may restart after stopping in a state where the patterns are not aligned, and enter the reach again.

Super ready-to-win is ready-to-win accompanied by switching of screen effects displayed on the pattern display device 41 . At the time of super ready-to-win, as in normal ready-to-win, after two of the three pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped with the same pattern and ready-to-win occurs, screen presentation changes. The screen effect at this time is composed of a moving image in which one warrior character specified from the warrior characters A to D described above is the main character. Specifically, for example, the screen presentation is composed of moving images based on the daily life of the warrior character as the main character. A moving image based on the daily life of a warrior character is, for example, a moving image of a warrior character training, devising a technique, or meditating. The screen effect is a effect that does not involve a confrontation with an enemy character, which will be described later. After the end of the effect, the row of symbols in which the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped is displayed.

In addition, the warrior character who is the hero of the screen effect displayed when the super reach occurs was one of the warrior characters A to D added to the pattern displayed in a variable manner. , as a modification, characters unrelated to the warrior characters A to D added to the symbols that are variably displayed can be used. However, the warrior character who is the hero of the screen presentation displayed when super reach occurs matches one of the warrior characters associated with each stage of the character-type stages.

Special ready-to-win is ready-to-win accompanied by switching of screen effects displayed on the pattern display device 41 . In the case of special ready-to-win, as in normal ready-to-win, after two of the three pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped with the same pattern and ready-to-win occurs, screen presentation changes. The screen effect at this time is composed of a moving image in which one warrior character specified from the warrior characters A to D described above is the main character. More specifically, the screen presentation consists of a battle presentation (hereinafter also referred to as a battle presentation) in which the warrior character as the main character and the enemy character confront each other, and a result announcement presentation in which the warrior character is victorious or defeated. be done.

Before the battle effect is announced to the player whether the result is advantageous to the player (for example, winning a big win in a winning lottery) or disadvantageous (for example, losing in a winning lottery). This is an effect (suggestive effect) that suggests to the player whether the result will be advantageous or disadvantageous. The result notification effect is a effect for notifying the player whether the result is favorable or unfavorable depending on whether the warrior character has won or lost. In the present embodiment, the result notification effect is so-called dead or dead, in which if the warrior character wins in the battle effect, the warrior character survives, and if the warrior character is defeated, the warrior character dies.・It is a production of Alive. After the end of the result notification effect, the row of symbols in which the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped is displayed.

FIG. 216 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a battle effect and a result notification effect. FIG. 216(a) shows an example of a battle effect, FIG. 216(b) shows an example of a victory effect as a result notification effect, and FIG. 216(c) shows an example of a defeat effect as a result notification effect. . The battle presentation shown in FIG. 216(a) causes the pattern display device 41 to display an image (moving image) in which a beautiful girl warrior character as warrior character A and a monster as an enemy character confront each other. However, the battle production may be in another mode.

The victory presentation shown in FIG. 216(b) causes the symbol display device 41 to display an image in which the warrior character A is pleased with the victory. However, the victory effect as the result effect may be in another mode.

The defeat effect shown in FIG. 216(c) causes the symbol display device 41 to display an image in which the warrior character A has died. However, the defeat effect as the result notification effect may be in another mode.

It should be noted that the warrior character who is the hero of the screen effect displayed when the special reach occurs was one of the warrior characters A to D added to the pattern displayed in a variable manner. , as a modification, characters unrelated to the warrior characters A to D added to the symbols that are variably displayed can be used. However, the warrior character who is the hero of the screen presentation displayed when the special reach occurs matches one of the warrior characters associated with each stage of the character-type stages.

The screen effect (battle effect) that is executed during the above-mentioned special reach and the screen effect (effect that does not involve a battle) that is executed during the super reach display the moving image described above. A configuration may be adopted in which sound or light accompanying the moving image is output from the speaker 46 or various lamps 47 .

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the ready-to-win determination is that super ready-to-win occurs in the game round or that special ready-to-win occurs in the game round, the pattern display device On the display surface 41a of 41, as described above, screen effects specific to each of Super Reach and Special Reach are displayed.

You can also say: In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, one warrior character is associated with each of the character-based stages, and the associated warrior character is used as the main character in the game rounds of the character-based stages as a reach effect. There are two types of performances, and they are configured to be executable. One of the two types of presentation is a battle presentation in which the warrior character as the main character faces off against an enemy character, and the other is a presentation that does not involve a battle.

FIG. 217 shows the display mode of the changing/stopping symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (symbols), the screen effect when super reach or special reach occurs (hereinafter also referred to as the special reach screen effect), and the stage as a background image. is a timing chart showing The figure shows a plurality of game rounds in which the game results progress in the order of non-reach/loss, normal reach/loss, and super reach/loss. The reach non-occurrence/loss is a game cycle in which no big win is won in the winning lottery, and the reach does not occur. Normal reach/miss is a game round in which a big win is not won in a winning lottery, and a reach occurs, and the type of reach that occurs is a normal reach. Super reach/miss is a game round in which a big win is not won in a winning lottery, and a reach occurs, and the type of reach that occurs is super reach.

The stage as the background image is the period from the start point t1 to the point t2 (hereinafter referred to as the t1-t2 period) in the non-reach/missing game round, the normal reach/missing game round, and the super reach/missing game round. ) and is displayed. Here, for example, it is assumed that a character stage corresponding to warrior character A is displayed. During the period from point t2 to end point t3 (hereinafter referred to as t2-t3 period) in the super reach/loss game round, the stage as the background image is not displayed.

The special reach screen effect is not displayed in the non-reach/missing game times and the normal reach/missing game times. On the other hand, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in the non-reach/loss game cycle and the normal reach/loss game cycle. Specifically, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 that change and stop are displayed. As a result, the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 that change and stop are superimposed and displayed on the upper surface side (front side) of the stage as a background image.

During the t1-t2 period of the super reach/off game round, the special reach screen effect is not displayed. On the other hand, during the period t1-t2, the symbol rows Z1-Z3 are displayed. Specifically, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 that change and stop are displayed. As a result, the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 that change and stop are superimposed and displayed on the upper surface side (front side) of the stage as a background image.

During the t2-t3 period of the super reach/loss game round, a special reach screen effect is displayed. On the other hand, during the period t2-t3, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are reduced in size. As a result, instead of the stage as the background image, a special ready-to-win screen effect is displayed when super-reach occurs.

In the game round following the game round of super reach/loose (here, it is assumed that reach does not occur/loose), the stage as the background image continues to display the stage before it is hidden, and the special reach Screen effects are hidden. The display mode of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the special reach screen presentation, and the stage in the game rounds of super reach/jackpot, special reach/loss, and special reach/jackpot is shown in FIG. It is the same as the display mode for the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the special reach screen effect, and the stage in the times.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in a game cycle in which super reach or special reach occurs, if the stage before switching to the special reach screen effect is a character stage, the warrior character linked to the character stage A warrior character that matches is configured to appear as the main character in the special reach screen production. For example, when Super Reach or Special Reach occurs in a game episode in a character-type stage corresponding to Warrior Character A, the screen effect displayed during these Reach will be that Warrior Character A is the main character. .

In addition, if the stage before switching to the special reach screen production is a non-character stage, in the game, if a super reach or special reach occurs, the warrior character that appears as the main character in the special reach screen production was arbitrarily determined by lottery. Alternatively, if the stage before switching to the special ready-to-win screen presentation is a non-character stage, the special ready-to-reach screen presentation may be unrelated to the warrior character.

FIG. 218 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing transition of stages executed in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. A pachinko machine 10 performs a game while repeating stage transitions between a character-type stage and a non-character-type stage. In addition, the game is played while transitioning between character-type stages and non-character-type stages. These stage transitions are executed based on the determination result of winning lottery, the presence or absence of reach occurrence, the game result such as reach type when reach occurs, and pending information.

FIG. 219 is an explanatory diagram showing a mode of stage transition in a character-based stage. In FIG. 219, when the game result of the game round is “no reach/lost”, it corresponds to a game round in which no big win is won in the winning lottery and no reach occurs. The game result of the game round is "Normal Reach/Loss" corresponds to the case where Normal Reach occurs in the game round in which the winning lottery resulted in a loss. The game result of the game round is "super reach/loss" corresponds to the case where super reach occurs in the game round in which the winning lottery resulted in a loss. The game result of the game round is "special reach/loss" corresponds to the case where the special reach occurs in the game round in which the winning lottery resulted in a loss. A "jackpot" corresponds to a game round in which a jackpot is won in a winning lottery, regardless of the presence or absence of reach and the type of reach.

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to continue (maintain) the stage in the game round when the game result of the game round is non-occurrence of reach or loss, and does not perform the stage transition. and In other words, in the case of a so-called complete miss, in which reach does not occur, the stage transition is not performed.

In addition, even if the game is in a character-type stage and the game result of the game round is normal reach or out, the stage in the game round is continued and the stage transition is not performed. Since normal reach/loose game times occur frequently, if the stage is changed each time, it becomes difficult for the player to read the story of the stage. It was configured not to perform In place of this configuration, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the stage transition is performed when the game is in the character-type stage and the game result of the game round is normal reach/miss. For example, one character stage may be shifted to another stage, or a non-character stage may be transitioned to.

Even if it is in a character-type stage and the game result of the game round is Super Reach/Loss, the stage in the game round is continued and the stage transition is not performed (that is, the stage transition is restricted). As explained earlier, the screen presentation in the game episodes in which Super Reach occurs is a moving image based on the daily life of the warrior character, and like in the game episodes in which Special Reach occurs, it is a dead or alive scene. It is not staged. For this reason, since a moving image in which the warrior character dies is not displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, even if the warrior character appears on the stage in the next game round, the player cannot do anything. I never feel uncomfortable. For this reason, in the present embodiment, in a game cycle in which a winning lottery result is lost in a character-type stage, when a super reach occurs, the stage in the game cycle is continued, and the stage transition is not performed. and In place of this configuration, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the stage transition is performed when the game is in the character-type stage and the game result of the game cycle is Super Reach/Loss. For example, one character stage may be shifted to another stage, or a non-character stage may be transitioned to.

If it is on a character-type stage and the game result of the game round is a special reach or miss, the stage will be changed from the character-type stage to the non-character-type stage at the end of the game round (with exceptions). ). As described above, since the screen effect in the game round in which the special reach occurs is a dead or alive effect, in the game round in which the winning lottery results in a loss, the display surface of the symbol display device 41 is displayed. A moving image in which the warrior character dies is displayed in 41a (see FIG. 216(c)). For this reason, if the stage in the game round is continued and the stage transition is not performed, the player will not be able to see the moving image in which the deceased warrior character appears in the next game round as if nothing had happened. There was a possibility that I would feel a sense of incongruity when I saw it. In order to solve this problem, in the present embodiment, when a special reach occurs in a game round that is in a character-type stage and results in a loss in the winning lottery, the character-type is removed from the current character-type stage. It was configured to perform a stage transition to a non-character type stage that is not directly related to the warrior character corresponding to the stage. As a result, after the player sees the video image of the death of the warrior character in the character stage, the character stage corresponding to the dead warrior character is continued so that the dead warrior character does nothing. It is possible to prevent the feeling of discomfort such as appearing. Therefore, according to this configuration, it is possible to ensure the storylines of the effects in which the characters appear, and to improve the amusement of the game.

As described above, there are exceptions to the configuration in which the stage is shifted from the character-type stage to the non-character-type stage when the game result of the game round is special reach/miss. Specifically, in the character stage, if the game result of the game round is special reach / miss, information indicating that it corresponds to super reach or special reach is in the hold information at the end of the game round When it exists, a different process is performed without executing a stage transition to a non-character type stage. In other words, in the character stage, if the game result of the game round is special reach/loss, information indicating that it corresponds to super reach and information indicating that it corresponds to special reach is included in the hold information at the end of the game round Only when there is no information indicating that, the process of shifting the stage from the character stage to the non-character stage is performed. It should be noted that the above-mentioned super reach does not matter whether or not a big win is won in a winning lottery. That is, super reach includes super reach/loss and super reach/jackpot. The above-mentioned special reach does not matter whether or not a jackpot is won in a winning lottery. That is, the special reach includes special reach/loss and special reach/jackpot.

In the character stage, if the game result of the game round is Special Reach or Lost, if there is information indicating that it corresponds to Special Reach in the hold information at the end of the game round, the game round The stage in 1 is continued, and the stage transition is not performed (exception 1). In other words, by restricting the stage transition, the stage in the game cycle is continued. According to this configuration, on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, in the special reach screen effect, a moving image in which the warrior character dies is displayed. The screen production corresponding to the character stage in which the dead warrior character appears will continue to be displayed. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in principle, it is in the character stage, and when the game result of the game cycle is special reach/loss, the stage transition to the non-character stage is performed. It is done, and the dead warrior character will not appear as the main character in the next game stage. In spite of this, according to the configuration of exception 1, the dead warrior character appears in the stage of the next game round without stage transition. Looking back, in the case of exception 1, the hold information at the end of the game cycle includes information indicating that it corresponds to special reach, so the degree of advantage (expectation of jackpot) for the player is high. expensive. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the player recognizes that the stage transition will not be performed in the case of the special reach/loss in the game round in the state of the character stage, After that, when the pending information is digested, by recognizing the production that is expected to have a favorable result, specifically the battle production, it is possible to know that a favorable result can be expected if the stage transition is not performed. can. In particular, since the above-mentioned battle production executed when the pending information is digested is performed by the same warrior character as the warrior character who was defeated first, the player can enjoy the battle production by the warrior character who was defeated first. You can watch it one more time, and you can avenge your defeat by winning (winning the jackpot). For this reason, the player's emotional empathy for the performance increases. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 having the configuration of Exception 1 can make the player feel a sense of anticipation that an advantageous result will come, and can improve the amusement of the game.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the game result of the game round is special reach/loss in the character-type stage, the hold information at the end of the game round indicates that it corresponds to super reach. If there is information to indicate, it is configured to shift to a character-type stage corresponding to a warrior character other than the warrior character who appeared in the production corresponding to the special reach/loss of the game round (exception 2).

According to the configuration of Exception 2, in the screen presentation of Special Reach, a moving image in which the warrior character dies is displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, and at the end of the game round, all characters other than the dead warrior character are displayed. A screen effect corresponding to the character stage corresponding to the warrior character will be displayed. In the case of Exception 2, since the hold information at the end of the game cycle includes information indicating that it corresponds to Super Reach, the degree of advantage is relatively high for the player. Super reach has a lower advantage than special reach, but a higher advantage than normal reach, so that the player has a relatively high advantage. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10, when the player recognizes, at the end of the game cycle, that the character stage has shifted to a character-type stage corresponding to a warrior character other than the dead warrior character, an advantageous result can be obtained. You will have a sense of expectation that it will be. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 having the configuration of the exception 2, the player can have a sense of anticipation that a relatively advantageous result will come, and the interest in the game can be improved. In addition, new characters after the stage transition (= warrior characters other than the dead warrior character) will appear in the stage after the transition and when the pending information corresponding to Super Reach is digested, so the player Even if you become a character different from the characters that have appeared so far, you can get used to it immediately, and your emotional empathy for the production will increase. For this reason, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, as an exception to the principle that the stage is shifted from the character-type stage to the non-character-type stage when the game result of the game round is a special reach/loss in the character-type stage, the above-mentioned exception 1 and Exception 2 are prepared, but as a modified example, only Exception 1 described above may be prepared and Exception 2 may be excluded.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the character stage, when a jackpot is won in the winning lottery related to the game round, regardless of the presence or absence of the reach occurrence and the reach type when the reach occurs, in the game round The stage was continued and the stage transition was not performed. When a player wins a jackpot in a winning lottery, he/she often wants to continue the game on the same stage as the stage when the jackpot is won, so that the stage transition is not performed. Note that instead of this configuration, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the stage transition is performed when the game is in the character-type stage and a jackpot is won in the winning lottery. For example, one character stage may be shifted to another stage, or a non-character stage may be transitioned to.

FIG. 220 is an explanatory diagram showing a stage transition mode in a non-character stage. The pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured to continue the stage in the game round when it is in the non-character stage and the game result of the game round is non-reaching/missing, and the stage transition is not performed. . In other words, in the case of a so-called complete miss, in which reach does not occur, the stage transition is not performed.

Also, even if the player is on a non-character type stage and the game result of the game round is normal reach/miss, the stage of the game round is continued and the stage transition is not performed. Since normal reach/loose game times occur frequently, if the stage is changed each time, it becomes difficult for the player to read the story of the stage. It was configured not to perform In place of this configuration, a configuration may be adopted in which stage transition is performed when the game is on a non-character type stage and the game result of the game round is normal reach/miss. For example, a transition from one non-character-type stage to another stage may be performed, or a transition to a character-type stage may be performed.

If you are on a non-character stage and the game result of the game round is Super Reach / Lost, at the end of the game round, correspond to the warrior character that appeared in the production corresponding to the Super Reach / Missing of the game round It was configured to transition to a character-based stage that As explained earlier, the screen presentation in the game episodes in which Super Reach occurs is a moving image based on the daily life of the warrior character, and like in the game episodes in which Special Reach occurs, it is a dead or alive scene. It is not staged. For this reason, since a moving image in which the warrior character dies is not displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, even if the warrior character appears on the stage in the next game round, the player cannot do anything. I never feel uncomfortable. For this reason, in the present embodiment, in the non-character stage, in the game round that resulted in a loss in the winning lottery, when a super reach occurs, a character corresponding to the warrior character that appeared in the production of the super reach It is configured to move to the system stage.

If you are on a non-character stage and the game result of the game round is Special Reach/Loss, at the end of the game round, a warrior character other than the warrior character that appeared in the production corresponding to the Special Reach/Loss of the game round It was configured to move to the character-based stage corresponding to (however, there are exceptions). As described above, since the screen effect in the game round in which the special reach occurs is a dead or alive effect, in the game round in which the winning lottery results in a loss, the display surface of the symbol display device 41 is displayed. A moving image in which the warrior character dies is projected on 41a. For this reason, if the stage is changed to the character-based stage corresponding to the warrior character who appeared in the special reach/loss of the game round, the player will not be able to see the dead warrior character next. There was a risk that the player would feel a sense of incongruity when watching the moving image that appeared as if nothing had happened during the game. In order to solve this problem, in the present embodiment, when a special reach occurs in a non-character-type stage and a game round that results in a loss in the winning lottery, at the end of the game round, the game round It was configured to transition to a character-type stage that corresponds to a warrior character other than the warrior character that appeared in the production corresponding to the special reach/off. As a result, after the player sees the moving image in which the warrior character died on the non-character stage, the player moves to the character stage corresponding to the dead warrior character, and the dead warrior character appears to have had nothing to do with it. It is possible to prevent the feeling of discomfort such as appearing in the Therefore, according to this configuration, it is possible to ensure the storylines of the effects in which the characters appear, and to improve the amusement of the game.

If you are on a non-character-type stage and the game result of the game round is special reach/miss, go to the character-type stage corresponding to the warrior character other than the warrior character that appeared in the production corresponding to the special reach/loss of the game round There are exceptions to migrating configurations, as noted above. Specifically, in a non-character stage, if the game result of the game cycle is Special Reach/Loss, the hold information at the end of the game cycle contains information indicating that it corresponds to Special Reach. Occasionally, the stage is changed to a character-type stage corresponding to a warrior character that appears in the performance corresponding to the special reach/loss of the game round (exception A). It should be noted that the above-mentioned special reach does not matter whether or not a jackpot is won in a winning lottery. That is, the special reach includes special reach/loss and special reach/jackpot.

According to the configuration of Exception A, on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, in the screen presentation of the special reach in the non-character type stage, a moving image in which the warrior character dies is displayed, and at the end of the game cycle, A screen effect corresponding to the character stage in which the dead warrior character appears will be displayed. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is basically in the non-character stage, and when the game result of the game round is special reach/loss, the special reach/loss of the game round We are transitioning to a character-type stage that corresponds to a warrior character other than the warrior character that appeared in the production corresponding to, and the dead warrior character will not appear as the main character in the next game stage. Nevertheless, according to the configuration of Exception A, the deceased warrior character will appear in the stage of the next game round. In retrospect, in the case of exception A, the hold information at the end of the game cycle includes information indicating special reach, so the degree of advantage for the player is high. For this reason, according to the pachinko machine 10, when the game round in the state of the non-character type stage becomes special reach/miss, the dead warrior character will not be able to do anything in the next game round stage. If you recognize that it will appear as if it did not exist, then when the pending information is digested, you can expect a favorable result, more specifically, by recognizing the battle performance, the deceased warrior character will appear next. You can know that you can expect favorable results by appearing on the stage of the game. In particular, since the above-mentioned battle production executed when the pending information is digested is performed by the same warrior character as the warrior character who was defeated first, the player can enjoy the battle production by the warrior character who was defeated first. You can watch it one more time, and you can even avenge your defeat with a win. For this reason, the player's emotional empathy for the performance increases. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 having the configuration of the exception A can make the player feel a sense of anticipation that an advantageous result will come, and can improve the amusement of the game.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the non-character stage, when a jackpot is won in a winning lottery related to a game round, regardless of the presence or absence of reach occurrence, and regardless of the reach type when reach occurs, the game round The stage in 1 is continued, and the stage transition is not performed. When a player wins a jackpot in a winning lottery, he/she often wants to continue the game on the same stage as the stage when the jackpot is won, so that the stage transition is not performed. Note that instead of this configuration, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which stage transition is performed when a jackpot is won in a winning lottery in a non-character stage. For example, a transition from one non-character-type stage to another stage may be performed, or a transition to a character-type stage may be performed.

<<5-5>> Various processes executed in the main controller:
Next, an example of specific control for executing the above-described processing in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described. The processing executed in the main controller 60 will be described first, and then the processing executed in the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

In order to advance the game of each game cycle, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing. These processes are described below. In addition to timer interrupt processing and normal processing, the MPU 62 executes NMI interrupt processing that is activated by the input of a power failure signal, but the description of these processing will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 221 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. As described above, the timer interrupt process is started periodically (for example, every 2 msec) by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 .

In step Sp0101, reading processing of various detection sensors 67a to 67e is executed. That is, it reads the states of the various detection sensors 67a to 67e connected to the main controller 60, determines the states of the sensors, and saves the detection information (entering ball detection information). After that, the process proceeds to step Sp0102.

At step Sp0102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . Then, it progresses to step Sp0103.

In step Sp0103, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to each of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4, and when each of these counter values reaches the maximum value, Clear each to 0. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM64. Then, it progresses to step Sp0104. Note that the fluctuation type counter CS updates its value in the normal process (FIG. 225) described later.

In step Sp0104, ball entry processing for the starting opening accompanying the ball entering the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34 is executed. The details of the ball entry process for the start opening in step Sp0104 will be described later. After executing step Sp0104, the process proceeds to step Sp0105.

In step Sp0105, a through ball entry process associated with the ball entering the through gate 35 is executed. The details of the through ball entry process in step Sp0105 will be described later. After executing step Sp0105, the MPU 62 terminates the timer interrupt processing.

<Entering ball processing for the starting port>
Next, the ball entry process for the start opening will be described. The ball entry process for the starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (Fig. 221: Sp0104).

FIG. 222 is a flow chart showing ball entry processing for the start opening. In step Sp0201, it is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first starting port 33 whether or not the game ball has entered the first starting port 33 (starting ball). In step Sp0201, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the first starting port 33 (Sp0201: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp0202, and the prize ball for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls set command. Then, it progresses to step Sp0203.

In step Sp0203, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that the game ball has entered the first starting hole 33. FIG. Then, it progresses to step Sp0204.

In step Sp0204, the start suspension number RaN (hereinafter also referred to as the first start suspension number RaN), which is the value stored in the suspension number storage area of the first reservation area Ra, is read, and the first start suspension number RaN will be described later. Set as a target for processing. The first start suspension number RaN indicates the number of suspensions based on the ball entering the first start hole 33 . Then, it progresses to step Sp0209.

In step Sp0201, when it is determined that the game ball has not entered the first start port 33 (Sp0201: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp0205, whether or not the game ball entered the second start port 34 is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second starting port 34 .

In step Sp0205, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34 (Sp0205: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp0206, and the prize ball for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls set command. Then, it progresses to step Sp0207. On the other hand, in step Sp0205, when it is determined that the game ball has not entered the second starting hole 34 (Sp0205: NO), the ball entering process for this starting hole ends.

In step Sp0207, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal that the game ball has entered the second starting hole 34 to the management control device on the game hall side. After that, the process proceeds to step Sp0208.

In step Sp0208, the value stored in the reserved number storage area of the second reservation area Rb, that is, the start reservation number RbN (hereinafter also referred to as the second start reservation number RbN) is read, and the second start reservation number RbN will be described later. Set as a target for processing. The second start suspension number RbN indicates the number of suspensions based on the ball entering the second start opening 34 . Then, it progresses to step Sp0209.

In step Sp0209, it is determined whether or not the number of start suspensions N (RaN or RbN) set in step Sp0204 or step Sp0208 is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment). In step Sp0209, if the number N of starting suspensions is not less than the upper limit (Sp0209: NO), the ball-entering process for this starting opening is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Sp0209, if the number N of start suspensions is less than the upper limit value (Sp0209: YES), proceed to step Sp0210, add 1 to the number N of start suspensions of the corresponding reservation area, and then proceed to step Sp0211. , adds 1 to the value stored in the total pending number storage area (hereinafter referred to as the total pending number CRN). The total pending number CRN indicates the sum of the first pending start number RaN and the second pending start number RbN. After that, the process proceeds to step Sp0212.

In step Sp0212, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 updated in step Sp0103 (Fig. 221), and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS updated in the normal processing (Fig. 225) described later is stored in the first storage area among the empty storage areas of the corresponding reservation area, that is, in the storage area corresponding to the number of reservations incremented by 1 in step Sp0210. Specifically, when the first start pending number RaN is set as a processing target, each value of the updated jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fluctuation type counter CS , is stored in the first storage area of the free storage areas of the first reservation area Ra, ie, the storage area corresponding to the first start suspension number RaN to which 1 is added in step Sp0210. Further, when the second start pending number RbN is set as a processing target, each value of the updated jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fluctuation type counter CS is set to the second It is stored in the first storage area among the empty storage areas of the reservation area Rb, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second start suspension number RbN to which 1 is added in step Sp0210. After executing step Sp0212, the process proceeds to step Sp0213.

In step Sp0213, the first determination process is executed. The first determination process is based on the information (holding information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS. , determination of the type of jackpot, determination of presence/absence of reach, determination of variation time, etc. are executed before the reservation information is subject to the winning lottery by the main controller 60. The details of the first determination process will be described later. After executing step Sp0213, the process proceeds to step Sp0214.

In step Sp0214, a process of setting a pending command is executed. Specifically, the determination result of the previous determination process executed based on the information (holding information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS as a pending command set. The determination result of the first determination process includes the above-described success or failure determination result of the winning lottery (also referred to as the presence or absence of a jackpot), the type of jackpot, the presence or absence of reach, and the fluctuation time.

The pending command indicates that the ball has entered the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34 and the judgment result (first judgment information) of the first judgment process based on the holding information acquired based on the entry, This is a command for causing the sub-side control device to confirm the pending information before the main control device 60 becomes a target of the winning lottery. The hold command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process ( FIG. 225 : step Sp0503) of the normal process, which will be described later.

Further, when the sound emission control device 90 receives a hold command transmitted based on the ball entering the first starting hole 33, the display in the first starting hole holding area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 is held. A command is sent to the display control device 100 to change the number to correspond to the increase in the number. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first start opening reservation region Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of reservations. On the other hand, when receiving the hold command transmitted based on the ball entering the second starting hole 34, the sound emission control device 90 holds the display in the second starting hole holding region Ds2 of the pattern display device 41. A command is sent to the display control device 100 to change the number to correspond to the increase in the number. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second start opening reservation region Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the increase in the number of reservations.

After executing step Sp0214, the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 terminates the ball-entering process for this starting opening.

<First determination process>
Next, the preceding determination processing will be described. The first determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (Sp0213 in FIG. 222) of the ball entry process for the starting opening.

FIG. 223 is a flow chart showing the first determination process. As described above, in the first determination process, based on the pending information, determination results such as determination of winning lottery, determination of type of big win, determination of presence or absence of reach occurrence, etc. This is a process that is executed before the lottery is targeted.

In step Sp0301, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the storage area by the ball entering the starting hole in the ball entering process for the starting hole (FIG. 222) is grasped. After that, the process proceeds to step Sp0302, and the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery due to this ball entry is executed as a game round is determined. Specifically, the judgment result of the previous judgment process executed by the ball entry before the current ball entry is read from the corresponding storage area, and whether or not there is a probability variable jackpot that occurs before the winning lottery due to the current ball entry Also, the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery due to the current ball entry is executed as a game round is determined by grasping the presence or absence of winning in the falling lottery.

In step Sp0302, when it is determined that the lottery mode is the low-probability mode at the time when the winning lottery due to the current ball entry is executed as a game round, (Sp0302: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp0303 to store the success/failure table. Refer to the success/failure table for the low probability mode (FIG. 209(a)) stored in the area 63a. After that, the process proceeds to step Sp0305, and as a result of referring to the success/failure table for the low-probability mode, it is determined whether or not the value information of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to the jackpot.

On the other hand, in step Sp0302, when it is determined that the lottery mode is not the low-probability mode at the time when the winning lottery due to the current ball entry is executed as a game round (Sp0302: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp0304, and the success/failure table is stored. Refer to the success/failure table for the high-probability mode (FIG. 209(b)) stored in the area 63a. After that, the process proceeds to step Sp0305, and as a result of referring to the success/failure table for the high-probability mode, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to the jackpot.

In step Sp0305, if it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to the jackpot (Sp0305: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp0306, and is stored in the storage area by the ball entering the starting port this time. The value of the jackpot type counter C2 is grasped. Then, it progresses to step Sp0307 and references the distribution table memorize|stored in the distribution table storage area 63b. Specifically, when the jackpot type counter C2 to be sorted this time is obtained based on the ball entering the first start port 33, refer to the first start port sort table. , the distribution table for the second starting opening is referred to when the information is acquired based on the ball entering the second starting opening 34 . After executing step Sp0307, the process proceeds to step Sp0308.

In step Sp0308, as a result of referring to the distribution table, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot type counter C2 grasped this time corresponds to the variable probability jackpot. In step Sp0308, when it is determined that it corresponds to the probability variable jackpot (Sp0308: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp0309, and the probability variable jackpot information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h. After that, the preceding determination process is terminated. On the other hand, in step Sp0308, when it is determined that it does not correspond to the probability variable jackpot (Sp0308: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp0310, and the normal jackpot information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h. After that, the process proceeds to step Sp0315, which will be described later.

In step Sp0305, if it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time does not correspond to the jackpot (Sp0305: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp0311, and the entry into the starting port this time causes the storage area to be stored. The value of the stored reach random number counter C3 is grasped. Then, it progresses to step Sp0312 and refers to the table for reach determination memorize|stored in the table storage area 63c for reach determination. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sp0313, and as a result of referring to the reach determination table, it is determined whether or not the value of the reach random number counter C3 grasped this time corresponds to the occurrence of reach.

In step Sp0313, when it is determined that reach occurrence is supported (Sp0313: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp0314, and reach occurrence information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h. After that, the process proceeds to step Sp0315. On the other hand, in step Sp0313, when it determines with not corresponding to reach generation (Sp0313:NO), it progresses to step Sp0315 as it is.

In step Sp0315, a variable time first determination process for determining the variable time first is executed. Specifically, the variation type counter CS stored in the storage area by the ball entering the starting hole in the ball entering process for the starting hole (Fig. 222), the success determination result of the winning lottery obtained up to step Sp0315, and Based on the determination result of presence/absence of reach occurrence, processing to obtain the fluctuation time is performed. This process obtains the variable time by the same process as the later-described variable time setting process (FIG. 230). After execution of step Sp0315, the current destination determination process is terminated.

<Entering ball processing for through>
Next, the ball entry processing for through will be described. The through ball entry process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (Fig. 221: Sp0105).

FIG. 224 is a flow chart showing a ball entering process for through. In step Sp0401, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the through gate 35 or not. In step Sp0401, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the through gate 35 (Sp0401: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp0402, whether the number SN of the reserved accessory is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) determine whether or not Incidentally, the accessory reserved number SN is a value indicating the number of balls entered into the through gate 35 reserved for performing the electric accessory open lottery. In this embodiment, the maximum value of the number SN of reserved accessory items is four. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sp0401 that the game ball has not entered the through gate 35 (Sp0401: NO), this through ball entering process is terminated.

In step Sp0402, when it is determined that the value is less than the upper limit value (less than 4) of the reserved role number SN (Sp0402: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp0403, and 1 is added to the reserved role number SN. Then, it progresses to step Sp0404.

In step Sp0404, the value of the electric accessary product open counter C4 updated in step Sp0103 (FIG. 221) is stored in the first memory area among the empty memory areas of the electric work holding area 64d of the RAM64. After that, the through ball entry processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Sp0402, if it is determined that the value of the reserved role number SN is not less than the upper limit (Sp0402: NO), that is, if it is determined that the value of the reserved role number SN is equal to or greater than the upper limit, Without storing the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4, the ball entry processing for through is terminated.

<Normal processing>
Next, normal processing will be described. The normal processing is processing started by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 when the power switch 88 is switched from the off state to the on state (hereinafter also referred to as "power on"). In normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed.

FIG. 225 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step Sp0501, start-up processing is executed. Specifically, initialization of each control device upon power-on, determination of validity of data stored in the RAM 64, and the like are executed. After that, the process proceeds to step Sp0502.

At step Sp0502, a startup command is set. The start-up command is a command for causing each sub-side control device to start a demonstration video when the power is turned on. After that, the process proceeds to step Sp0503.

At step Sp0503, output data such as the start-up command set at step Sp0502 and the command set in the timer interrupt process or the normal process executed last time are transmitted to each sub-side control device. Specifically, the presence or absence of the prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 70 . In addition, when commands related to effects such as start-up commands, variation commands, type commands, and hold commands are set, they are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . After executing step Sp0503, the process proceeds to step Sp0504.

In step Sp0504, the change type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the fluctuation type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . After that, the process proceeds to step Sp0505.

In step Sp0505, the ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step Sp0506. In step Sp0506, game round control processing for controlling the game in each game round is executed. In the game round control processing, a winning lottery, setting of variable display of symbols by the symbol display device 41, display control of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b, and the like are performed. Details of the game round control process will be described later. After executing step Sp0506, the process proceeds to step Sp0507.

In step Sp0507, a game state transition process is executed to shift the game state. By executing the game state transition process, the game state shifts to an opening/closing execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, and the like. Details of the game state transition processing will be described later. After that, the process proceeds to step Sp0508.

In step Sp0508, an electric support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 34a provided at the second starting port 34 is executed. In the electric role support process, it is determined whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a. The details of the electronic support process will be described later. After that, the process proceeds to step Sp0509.

In step Sp0509, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has passed since the start of the current normal processing (strictly speaking, the start of the command output processing in step Sp0503). That is, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the next normal process. In step Sp0509, if it is determined that the predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed since the start of the normal processing this time (Sp0509: NO), in steps Sp0510 and Sp0511, until the execution timing of the next normal processing Within the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated. Specifically, in step Sp0510, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . Further, in step Sp0511, 1 is added to the variation type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when it reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . On the other hand, in step Sp0509, when it is determined that the predetermined time (4 msec) has elapsed since the start of the normal processing this time (Sp0509: YES), the process returns to step Sp0503, and each process from step Sp0503 to step Sp0508 is performed. Execute.

In addition, since the execution time of each process from step Sp0503 to step Sp0508 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using the remaining time, the values of these counters can be randomly updated.

<Game Round Control Processing>
Next, game round control processing will be described. The game round control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (Fig. 225: Sp0506).

FIG. 226 is a flow chart showing game round control processing. In step Sp0601, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON when the game state is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode in the later-described game state transition processing, and turned OFF when the opening/closing execution mode is ended in the game state transition processing.

At step Sp0601, when it is determined that the open/close execution mode is in progress (Sp0601: YES), this game round control process is terminated without executing any of the processes after step Sp0602. That is, when the open/close execution mode is in progress, the game cycle is not started regardless of whether or not a ball is entered into the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34 . On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sp0601 that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress (Sp0601: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp0602.

In step Sp0602, it is determined whether or not the special figure unit 37 is being displayed in a variable manner. Specifically, it is determined whether or not one of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b provided in the special figure unit 37 is in the process of variable display. This determination is made by determining whether or not the special figure variation displaying flag in the special figure variation displaying flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The special figure variable display flag is turned ON when one of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b is to start the variable display, and is turned OFF when the variable display is finished.

In step Sp0602, if it is determined that the special figure unit 37 is not displayed in a variable manner (Sp0602: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp0603.

In step Sp0603, a variation start process for starting the variation display in the special figure unit 37 and the variation display in the design display device 41 is executed. The details of the fluctuation start process will be described later. After executing step Sp0603, this game round control process is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Sp0602, when it is determined that the special figure unit 37 is displayed in a variable manner (Sp0602: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp0604.

In step Sp0604, a variation end process for ending the variation display in the special figure unit 37 and the variation display in the symbol display device 41 is executed. The details of the fluctuation end processing will be described later. After executing step Sp0604, this game round control process is terminated.

<Variation start processing>
Next, fluctuation start processing will be described. The fluctuation start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game round control process (Fig. 226: Sp0603).

FIG. 227 is a flowchart showing fluctuation start processing. At step Sp0701, it is determined whether or not the total pending number CRN exceeds "0". When the total pending number CRN is less than or equal to "0", it means that the pending start number for both the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 is "0". Therefore, in step Sp0701, when it is determined that the total number of reservations CRN is equal to or less than "0" (Sp0701: NO), this fluctuation start processing is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sp0701 that the total pending number CRN exceeds "0" (Sp0701: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp0702.

In step Sp0702, hold information shift processing for setting the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra or the second hold area Rb to the state after the start of fluctuation is executed, and the process proceeds to step Sp0703. Details of the pending information shift process will be described later.

In step Sp0703, a winning determination process including a process when a big win is won in a winning lottery is performed. The details of the hit determination process will be described later. After executing step Sp0703, the process proceeds to step Sp0704.

In step Sp0704, a variable time setting process is executed. The variable time setting process is for setting the variable time, which is the time required for the current game round in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b, based on the presence or absence of a big hit, the presence or absence of reach, and the like. is the processing of Details of the variable time setting process will be described later. After executing step Sp0704, the process proceeds to step Sp0705.

In step Sp0705, a variation command is set. The command for variation includes whether the current game cycle is related to the hold information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33, or acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 34. Information indicating whether or not it relates to the hold information is included, and information on the presence or absence of reach occurrence and information on the variable time set in step Sp0706 are included. After executing step Sp0705, the process proceeds to step Sp0706.

At step Sp0706, a type command is set. The type command includes information on the presence or absence of a big hit and the result of distribution determination. That is, the type command includes 16R probability variable jackpot information, 8R probability variable jackpot information, 16R normal jackpot information, 8R normal jackpot information, or loss result information about winning lottery as information on the jackpot type. is

The variation command and type command set at steps Sp0705 and Sp0706 are sent to the sound emission control device 90 at step Sp0503 in the normal process (FIG. 225). The sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect in the game round based on the received variation command and the type command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the effect is executed. After executing step Sp0706, the process proceeds to step Sp0707.

In step Sp0707, of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b, the symbol display portion corresponding to the current game round is caused to start the variable display of symbols. Specifically, when the second symbol display portion flag of the RAM 64 is not ON, the first symbol display portion 37a is specified as the symbol display portion corresponding to the current game round, and the variable display is started, When the second pattern display portion flag is ON, the second pattern display portion 37b is specified as the pattern display portion corresponding to the current game round, and the variable display is started. After executing step Sp0707, the process proceeds to step Sp0708.

In step Sp0708, the special figure fluctuation display flag stored in the special figure fluctuation display flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned ON. After executing step Sp0708, this fluctuation start process is terminated.

<Holding information shift processing>
Next, the pending information shift process will be described. The hold information shift process is executed by MPU 62 of main controller 60 as a subroutine of fluctuation start process (Fig. 227: Sp0702).

FIG. 228 is a flowchart showing pending information shift processing. In step Sp0801, it is determined whether or not the reservation area to be processed for execution of the reservation information shift process is the first reservation area Ra. Specifically, the first stored hold information (hold information) is the first stored pending information (stored in the first area of the second pending area Rb) among the pending information stored chronologically in the second pending area Rb (Fig. 208). is stored in the reservation area prior to the reservation information), the reservation area to be processed is determined to be the first reservation area Ra. On the other hand, the first reservation information stored chronologically in the second reservation area Rb than the first reservation information stored chronologically in the first reservation area Ra If the stored reservation information is stored in the reservation area first, the reservation area to be processed is determined to be the second reservation area Rb. That is, by executing the process of step Sp0801, the reservation information can be processed in the order stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb.

In step Sp0801, when it is determined that the reservation area to be processed is the first reservation area Ra (step Sp0801: YES), the reservation information shift processing for the first reservation area of steps Sp0802 to Sp0807 is executed. On the other hand, in step Sp0801, if it is determined that the processing target reservation area is not the first reservation area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the processing target reservation area is the second reservation area Rb (step Sp0801: NO ), the reservation information shift processing for the second reservation area in steps Sp0808 to Sp0813 is executed.

In step Sp0802, after subtracting 1 from the first start-up reservation number RaN in the first reservation area Ra, the process proceeds to step Sp0803, and 1 is subtracted from the total reservation number CRN. After that, the process proceeds to step Sp0804. At step Sp0804, the data stored in the first area of the first reservation area Ra is moved to the execution area AE. After that, the process proceeds to step Sp0805.

At step Sp0805, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first reservation area Ra is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After executing step Sp0805, the process proceeds to step Sp0806.

In step Sp0806, when the second pattern display flag of the various flag storage area 64g is ON, the flag is turned OFF, and when it is not ON, the state is maintained. The second pattern display portion flag is information for specifying which of the first pattern display portion 37a and the second pattern display portion 37b is the target for starting the variable display this time. After that, the process proceeds to step Sp0807.

At step Sp0807, a shift command is set. The shift time command is a command including information for making the sound emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, recognize that the data in the reserved area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63, information indicating that the reservation area to which the data is to be shifted this time corresponds to the first reservation area Ra, that is, the information corresponding to the first start port 33 A shift-time command including information indicating that the shift-time command is included is selected, and the selected shift-time command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . After that, the hold information shift process is terminated. The shift command set in step Sp0807 is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step Sp0503 of the normal processing (FIG. 225).

In step Sp0801, if it is determined that the reservation area to be processed is not the first reservation area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the reservation area to be processed is the second reservation area Rb (Sp0801: NO), step Proceed to Sp0808.

At step Sp0808, 1 is subtracted from the second starting reservation quantity RbN in the second reservation area Rb. After that, the process proceeds to step Sp0809. In step Sp0809, 1 is subtracted from the total pending number CRN, and the process proceeds to step Sp0810 to move the data stored in the first area of the second pending area Rb to the execution area AE. After that, the process proceeds to step Sp0811.

In step Sp0811, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second reservation area Rb is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After executing step Sp0811, the process proceeds to step Sp0812.

In step Sp0812, when the second pattern display portion flag of the various flag storage area 64g is not ON, the flag is turned ON, and when it is ON, the state is maintained. After that, the process proceeds to step Sp0813.

At step Sp0813, a shift command is set. The shift time command is a command including information for making the sound emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, recognize that the data in the reserved area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63, the information indicating that the reservation area to which the data is to be shifted this time corresponds to the second reservation area Rb, that is, the information corresponding to the second start port 34 A shift-time command including information indicating that the shift-time command is included is selected, and the selected shift-time command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . After that, the hold information shift process is terminated.

The shift command set in step Sp0813 is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step Sp0503 of the normal process (FIG. 225). The sound emission control device 90, based on the received shift time command, displays a command for changing the display in the second start opening reservation region Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations. Send to 100. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second start opening reservation region Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations.

<Hit determination processing>
Next, hit determination processing will be described. The hit determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the fluctuation start process (Fig. 227: Sp0703).

FIG. 229 is a flowchart showing hit determination processing. In step Sp0901, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

In step Sp0901, when it is determined that the mode is the high probability mode (Sp0901: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp0902, and the success/failure determination is performed by referring to the success/failure table for the high probability mode. Specifically, whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as jackpot winning in the success/failure table for the high probability mode shown in FIG. 209(b). determine whether After that, the process proceeds to step Sp0904.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sp0901 that the mode is not the high-probability mode (Sp0901: NO), the process advances to step Sp0903, and the success/failure determination is performed by referring to the success/failure table for the low-probability mode. Specifically, whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as jackpot winning in the success/failure table for the low probability mode shown in FIG. determine whether After that, the process proceeds to step Sp0904.

In step Sp0904, it is determined whether or not the result of the success/failure determination (hit lottery) in step Sp0902 or step Sp0903 is a big hit. In step Sp0904, when the result of the success/failure determination is the jackpot winning (Sp0904: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp0905.

At step Sp0905, it is determined whether or not the second pattern display flag of the RAM 64 is ON. In step Sp0905, if it is determined that the second symbol display unit flag is not ON (Sp0905: NO), proceed to step Sp0906 and refer to the distribution table for the first start port (see FIG. 210(a)). and make a distribution judgment. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is any of the numerical range of the 16R probability variable jackpot, the numerical range of the 8R probability variable jackpot, the numerical range of the 16R normal jackpot, and the numerical range of the 8R normal jackpot. determine whether it is contained in

On the other hand, in step Sp0905, when it is determined that the second pattern display flag is ON (Sp0905: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp0907, and the distribution table for the second starting port (see FIG. 210(b)) Refer to to make a distribution judgment. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in the numeric range of the 16R probability variable jackpot or the numeric range of the 8R normal jackpot. After executing the process of step Sp0906 or step Sp0907, the process proceeds to step Sp0908.

In step Sp0908, the flag (jackpot flag) corresponding to the type of jackpot sorted in step Sp0906 or step Sp0907 is turned ON. Specifically, when it is a 16R probability variable jackpot, the 16R probability variable jackpot flag is turned ON, when it is an 8R probability variable jackpot, the 8R probability variable jackpot flag is turned ON, and when it is a 16R normal jackpot, the 16R normal jackpot flag is turned on. When it is 8R normal jackpot, the 8R normal jackpot flag is turned ON. After executing step Sp0908, the process proceeds to step Sp0909.

In step Sp0909, the process of setting the stop result for the jackpot is executed. Specifically, in the current game turn in which the big win is won, it is set whether the variable display is to be ended in the state in which the stop result is displayed in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b. This is a process for Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63f (FIG. 207), the stop result data corresponding to the type of jackpot sorted in step Sp0906 or step Sp0907 Address information is acquired, and the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After executing step Sp0909, the hit determination process ends.

In step Sp0904, if the result of the winning lottery in step Sp0902 or step Sp0903 is not a jackpot winning (Sp0904: NO), proceed to step Sp0910, refer to the reach determination table, whether reach occurs in the game round A determination is made as to whether or not Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is set as reach occurrence in the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c (FIG. 207). Determines whether or not it matches the value After that, the process proceeds to step Sp0911.

In step Sp0911, if the reach determination result in step Sp0910 indicates that reach occurs in the game round (Sp0911: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp0912, and the reach occurrence flag is turned ON. Specifically, the reach occurrence flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned ON. After executing step Sp0912, the process proceeds to step Sp0913.

On the other hand, in step Sp0911, if the result of reach determination in step Sp0910 is that reach does not occur in the game round (Sp0911: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp0913 without executing step Sp0912.

In step Sp0913, a process of setting a stop result for failure is executed. Specifically, in the current game turn that results in a loss, the variable display is set to end in a state in which the stop result is displayed in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b. processing. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for loss in the stop result table storage area 63f, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is obtained. , the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After executing step Sp0913, the hit determination process ends.

<Variation time setting processing>
Next, the variable time setting process will be described. The variable time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variable start process (Fig. 227: Sp0704).

FIG. 230 is a flowchart showing variable time setting processing. In step Sp1001, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is grasped. Then, it progresses to step Sp1002.

In step Sp1002, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a big win. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the 16R probability variable jackpot flag, 8R probability variable jackpot flag, 16R normal jackpot flag, and 8R normal jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is ON. If there is, it is determined that a jackpot has been won (Sp1002: YES), and the process proceeds to step Sp1003.

In step Sp1003, the variation time table for big hits stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to, and variation time information corresponding to the current value of the variation type counter CS is acquired. After that, the process proceeds to step Sp1004, and the acquired variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM64. After that, the variable time setting process is terminated.

In step Sp1002, when it is determined that the result of the winning lottery related to the current game round is not a jackpot winning (Sp1002: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp1005, and it is determined whether or not reach occurs in the current game round. do. Since this process (Sp1005) is executed when the jackpot has not been won in the winning lottery related to the current game round in step Sp1002, in step Sp1005, the reach ( It is determined whether or not it is a game round in which a so-called outreach reach occurs. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the reach occurrence flag stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. proceed to

In step Sp1006, the variation time table for reach occurrence/loss stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to, and variation time information corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS is acquired. After that, the process proceeds to step Sp1004 described above, and the acquired variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. FIG. After that, the variable time setting process is terminated.

In step Sp1005, when it is determined that reach does not occur in this game round (Sp1005: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp1007, and the variable time table for reach non-occurrence/off stored in the variable time table storage area 63d to obtain the fluctuation time corresponding to the current fluctuation type counter CS value. After that, the process proceeds to step Sp1004 described above, and the acquired variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. FIG. After that, the variable time setting process is terminated.

<Variation end processing>
Next, the fluctuation end processing will be described. The fluctuation end process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game round control process (Fig. 226: Sp0604).

FIG. 231 is a flow chart showing fluctuation end processing. In step Sp1101, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the current game round has elapsed. As described above, the variation time is the time from when the symbol row starts to vary until all the symbol rows stop, and is part of the unit game time. Specifically, in step Sp1101, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable time information stored in the variable time counter area (various counter area 64f) of the RAM 64 has become "0". The value of the variable time information is set in the aforementioned variable time setting process (FIG. 230). The value of this set variable time information is decremented by 1 each time timer interrupt processing is started.

If it is determined in step Sp1101 that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (Sp1101: NO), this fluctuation end processing is terminated.

In step Sp1101, when it is determined that the fluctuation time has passed (Sp1101: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp1102, and the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b correspond to the current game turn. A process for ending the variation of the symbols in the symbol display section is performed. Subsequently, in step Sp1103, the special figure variation displaying flag stored in the special figure variation displaying flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned OFF. After executing step Sp1103, the process proceeds to step Sp1104.

In step Sp1104, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a big win. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the 16R probability variable jackpot flag, 8R probability variable jackpot flag, 16R normal jackpot flag, and 8R normal jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is ON. In step Sp1104, none of the above flags is ON, that is, if it is determined that the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is not a big win (Sp1104: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp1105.

In step Sp1105, it is determined whether or not the support mode is the high frequency support mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

At step Sp1105, when it is determined that the high-frequency support mode flag is ON (Sp1105: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp1106 to determine whether or not the value of the number-of-games counter PNC exceeds zero. At step Sp1106, when it is determined that the value of the number-of-games counter PNC exceeds 0 (Sp1106: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp1107, and 1 is subtracted from the value of the number-of-games counter PNC. After executing step Sp1107, the process proceeds to step Sp1108. On the other hand, in step Sp1106, when it is determined that the value of the number-of-games counter PNC is 0 or less (Sp1106: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp1108 without executing step Sp1107.

At step Sp1108, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

At step Sp1108, when it is determined that the high-probability mode flag is not ON (Sp1108: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp1109 to determine whether or not the value of the number-of-games counter PNC exceeds zero.

At step Sp1109, when it is determined that the value of the number-of-games counter PNC does not exceed 0 (step Sp1109: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp1110 to turn off the high frequency support mode flag. After executing step Sp1110, the variable time ending process ends.

If it is determined that the high-probability mode flag is ON in step Sp1108 (Sp1108: YES), or if it is determined that the value of the number-of-games counter PNC exceeds 0 in step Sp1109 (step Sp1109: YES) , ends the variable time end processing without executing step Sp1110. If it is determined in step Sp1105 that the high-frequency support mode flag is not ON (Sp1105: NO), this variable time ending process is terminated without executing steps Sp1106 to Sp1110.

On the other hand, in step Sp1104, any one of the 16R probability variable jackpot flag, 8R probability variable jackpot flag, 16R normal jackpot flag, and 8R normal jackpot flag is ON, that is, the result of the winning lottery related to this game round When it is determined that the jackpot is won (Sp1104: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp1111, and the open/close execution mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned ON. After executing step Sp1111, the variable time ending process ends.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the game state transition processing will be explained. The game state transition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of normal process (Fig. 225: Sp0507).

FIG. 232 is a flowchart showing game state transition processing. At step Sp1201, it is determined whether or not the ending period flag is ON. The ending period flag is turned ON at the end of the big winning opening opening/closing process period (at the start of the ending period) in the opening/closing execution mode, and turned OFF at the end of the ending period. The ending period is a period for executing the ending effect in the opening/closing execution mode.

If it is determined in step Sp1201 that the ending period flag is not ON (Sp1201: NO), the process advances to step Sp1202 to determine whether or not the opening/closing process period flag is ON. The opening/closing process period flag is turned ON at the timing when the opening period ends in the opening/closing execution mode and the big winning opening opening/closing process period, which is the period during which the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is executed, starts. , is turned off at the timing when the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 36b ends.

If it is determined in step Sp1202 that the opening/closing process period flag is not ON (Sp1202: NO), the process advances to step Sp1203 to determine whether or not the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is turned ON at the start of the opening period and turned OFF at the end of the opening period.

If it is determined in step Sp1203 that the opening period flag is not ON (Sp1203: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp1204 to determine whether or not the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step Sp1204 that the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON (Sp1204: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp1205. On the other hand, in step Sp1204, when it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode flag is OFF (Sp1204: NO), this game state transition processing is terminated as it is.

At step Sp1205, the high probability mode flag is turned off. After that, the process proceeds to step Sp1206. At step Sp1206, the high frequency support mode flag is turned off. After that, the process proceeds to step Sp1207.

At step Sp1207, an opening/closing scenario setting process for setting an opening/closing scenario is executed. The opening/closing scenario defines the pattern of the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 36b in the round game. It is a program in which conditions for shifting the opening/closing door 36b from the open state to the closed state (hereinafter also referred to as "closed conditions") are recorded. The opening/closing scenario is stored in the opening/closing scenario storage area 63h (FIG. 207) of the ROM 63.

The opening conditions are, for example, as follows.
- The current state of the pachinko machine 10 is the timing for starting each round game in the open/close execution mode.
When one of the above items is established, the opening/closing door 36b shifts from the closed state to the open state.

Closing conditions are, for example, as follows.
- The elapsed time from the start of each round game exceeds a predetermined upper limit duration (for example, 15 seconds).
- The number of game balls entered into the big winning hole 36a after starting each round game exceeds a predetermined upper limit number.
When either one of the above two items is established, the opening/closing door 36b shifts from the open state to the closed state.

After executing step Sp1207, the process proceeds to step Sp1208 described above.

At step Sp1208, an opening time setting process is executed. The opening time setting process is a process of setting the length of time of the opening period (hereinafter also referred to as opening time) in the open/close execution mode. In this embodiment, the opening time of the same fixed length is set in each opening period. Specifically, "3000" (ie, 6 sec) is set in the third timer counter area T3 that determines the opening time. The third timer counter area T3 is provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM64. After executing step Sp1208, the process proceeds to step Sp1209.

At step Sp1209, an opening command is set. The set opening command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 at step Sp0503 in the normal process (FIG. 225). This opening command includes information on the set opening time and the number of rounds of the current open/close execution mode. A sound emission control device 90 determines the contents of performance corresponding to the opening time and the period of opening/closing processing of the big winning opening based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents are executed. After executing step Sp1209, the process advances to step Sp1210 to turn on the opening period flag. After that, the game state transition processing is terminated.

In step Sp1203, when it determines with an opening period flag being ON (Sp1203:YES), it progresses to step Sp1211.

In step Sp1211, it is determined whether or not the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the third timer counter area T3 is "0". If it is determined in step Sp1211 that the opening period has ended (Sp1211: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp1212 to turn off the opening period flag. After that, the process proceeds to step Sp1213.

In step Sp1213, round display start processing for notifying the type of the current open/close execution mode is executed. Specifically, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 is confirmed. Based on the confirmed address information, stop result data corresponding to the address information is specified from among the stop result data group stored in the ROM 63, and the content of the number of rounds is determined from the specified stop result data. confirm. After that, the content of the confirmed number of rounds is output to the round display section 39 in the main display section 45 . As a result, the round display section 39 displays the round information related to the output. After executing step Sp1213, the process proceeds to step Sp1214.

At step Sp1214, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned ON. In the subsequent step Sp1215, an opening/closing process start command is set. The opening/closing process start command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the opening/closing process period has started. The opening/closing process start command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 225: step Sp0503) of the normal process. After executing step Sp1215, the game state transition processing is terminated.

In step Sp1202, when it is determined that the opening/closing process period flag is ON (Sp1202: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp1216 to execute the big winning opening opening/closing process. The special prize opening opening/closing process will be described later. After executing step Sp1216, the process proceeds to step Sp1217.

In step Sp1217, it is determined whether or not the big winning opening opening/closing process has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the big winning opening opening/closing process has ended depending on whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 for counting the number of times the opening/closing door 36b is opened is "0". do. In step Sp1217, when it is determined that the big winning opening opening/closing process has ended (Sp1217: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp1218. On the other hand, in step Sp1217, when it is determined that the big winning opening opening/closing process has not ended (Sp1217: NO), this game state transition process is ended as it is.

In step Sp1218, the open/close processing period flag is turned off, and then the process proceeds to step Sp1219.

In step Sp1219, end processing of the round display is executed. In this process, the display control of the round display portion 39 in the main display portion 45 is terminated so that the round display portion 39 is turned off. After executing step Sp1219, the process proceeds to step Sp1220.

In step Sp1220, an ending time setting process is executed. The ending time setting process is a process of setting the length of time of the ending period (hereinafter also referred to as ending time) in the open/close execution mode. In this embodiment, the ending time of the same constant length is set for each ending period. Specifically, "3000" (ie, 6 sec) is set in the fourth timer counter area T4 that determines the ending time. The fourth timer counter area T4 is provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM64. After executing step Sp1220, the process proceeds to step Sp1221.

In step Sp1221, an ending command is set. This set ending command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step Sp0503 of the normal processing (FIG. 225). Upon receiving the ending command, the sound emission control device 90 terminates the effect corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode. After executing step Sp1221, the process proceeds to step Sp1222.

At step Sp1222, the ending period flag is turned ON. After that, the game state transition processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sp1201 that the ending period flag is ON (Sp1201: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp1223.

At step Sp1223, it is determined whether or not the ending period has ended. Specifically, in the ending time setting process (Sp1220), it is determined whether or not the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0". If it is determined in step Sp1220 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0" (Sp1223: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp1224.

At step Sp1224, the ending period flag is turned off. After that, the process advances to step Sp1225 to execute transition processing at the end of the ending period. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes of game rounds after the end of the current ending period. Details of the transition processing at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing step Sp1225, the process proceeds to step Sp1226 to turn off the opening/closing execution mode flag. After executing step Sp1226, the process proceeds to step Sp1227.

At step Sp1227, it is determined whether or not the total pending number CRN is "0". When the total pending number CRN is "0", it means that the start pending number is "0" for both the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34. FIG. If it is determined in step Sp1227 that the total pending number CRN is "0" (Sp1227: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp1228.

In step Sp1228, a customer waiting command is set. The customer waiting command is used to make the sound emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub-side, recognize that no hold information is stored in the hold information storage area 64b at the time when the pattern variation (game cycle) ends. is a command that contains information about This set customer waiting command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 at step Sp0503 in the normal processing (FIG. 225). After executing step Sp1228, this game round control process is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Sp1227, when it is determined that the total number of reserved cards CRN is not "0" (Sp1227: NO), this game round control process is terminated as it is. Also, in step Sp1223, when it is determined that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is not "0" (Sp1223: NO), this game state transition processing is terminated as it is.

<Opening and closing processing of the grand prize opening>
Next, the big winning opening opening/closing process will be described. The big winning opening opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (Fig. 232: Sp1216).

FIG. 233 is a flowchart showing the big winning opening opening/closing process. At step Sp1301, it is determined whether or not the door 36b is open. Specifically, the determination is made based on the drive state of the variable winning drive section 36c. If it is determined in step Sp1301 that the open/close door 36b is not open (Sp1301: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp1302.

At step Sp1302, it is determined whether or not the condition for opening the opening/closing door 36b is satisfied. Specifically, the opening/closing scenario set by the opening/closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether or not it is time to open the opening/closing door 36b. In step Sp1302, when it is determined that the condition for opening the door 36b is satisfied (Sp1302: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp1303.

In step Sp1303, the opening/closing door 36b is opened. After that, the process proceeds to step Sp1304.

In step Sp1304, a door opening command is set. The opening/closing door open command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the opening/closing door 36b has been opened. The open/close door open command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process ( FIG. 225 : step Sp0503) of the normal process. After executing step Sp1304, the big winning opening opening/closing process is ended.

In step Sp1302, when it is determined that the condition for opening the opening/closing door 36b is not satisfied (Sp1302: NO), the big winning opening opening/closing process is terminated without executing steps Sp1303 and Sp1304.

In step Sp1301, when it is determined that the opening/closing door 36b is open (Sp1301: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp1305.

At step Sp1305, it is determined whether or not the condition for closing the open/close door 36b is satisfied. Specifically, the opening/closing scenario set by the opening/closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether or not it is time to close the opening/closing door 36b. If it is determined in step Sp1305 that the closing condition for the opening/closing door 36b is satisfied (Sp1305: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp1306.

In step Sp1306, the opening/closing door 36b is closed. After that, the process proceeds to step Sp1307.

In step Sp1307, an opening/closing door closing command is set. The open/close door closing command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the open/close door 36b is closed. The open/close door closing command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process ( FIG. 225 : step Sp0503) of the normal process. After executing step Sp1307, the big winning opening opening/closing process is terminated.

In step Sp1305, when it is determined that the closing condition of the opening/closing door 36b is not satisfied (Sp1305: NO), the big winning opening opening/closing process is terminated without executing steps Sp1306 and Sp1307.

<Transition processing at the end of the ending period>
Next, transition processing at the end of the ending period will be described. The transition process at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (Fig. 232: Sp1225).

FIG. 234 is a flowchart showing transition processing at the end of the ending period. In step Sp1401, it is determined whether or not the flag corresponding to the probability variable jackpot in the jackpot flag is turned ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the 16R probability variable jackpot flag or the 8R probability variable jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is ON.

In step Sp1401, when it is determined that the 16R probability variable jackpot flag or the 8R probability variable jackpot flag of RAM64 is ON (Sp1401: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp1402, one of the 16R probability variable jackpot flag and the 8R probability variable jackpot flag of RAM64 The ON flag is turned OFF. After executing step Sp1402, the process proceeds to step Sp1403.

At step Sp1403, the high-probability mode flag is turned ON, and then the process proceeds to step Sp1404, at which the high-frequency support mode flag is turned ON. As a result, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the game state shifts to a game state in which the lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode. After that, the process proceeds to step Sp1405.

In step Sp1405, 100 is set to the number-of-games counter PNC provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM64. The value set in the number-of-games counter PNC indicates the number of games when the number of games is limited and the high-frequency support mode is executed. After that, the process proceeds to step Sp1406.

In step Sp1406, a high-probability mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the lottery mode is the high-probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. . After that, the process proceeds to step Sp1411.

On the other hand, in step Sp1401, when it is determined that the 16R probability variable jackpot flag and the 8R probability variable jackpot flag of RAM64 are not ON (Sp1401: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp1407, and the 8R normal jackpot flag of RAM64 is turned OFF. After that, the process proceeds to step Sp1408.

In step Sp1408, after turning on the high-frequency support mode flag, the process proceeds to step Sp1409, and 100 is set in the number-of-games counter PNC provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM64. After that, the process proceeds to step Sp1410.

In step Sp1410, a low-probability mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the lottery mode is the low-probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. . After that, the process proceeds to step Sp1411.

In step Sp1411, a high-frequency support mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. set. After that, the transition processing at the end of the ending period ends.

<Electronic support processing>
Next, the processing for electric support will be described. The electric service support process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (Sp0508 in FIG. 225).

FIG. 235 is a flowchart showing processing for electric support. In step Sp1501, it is determined whether or not the device is being supported. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the supported flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The under-support flag is a flag that is turned ON when the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is to be opened, and is turned OFF when it is to be returned to the closed state. If it is determined in step Sp1501 that the supported flag is not ON (Sp1501: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp1502.

In step Sp1502, it is determined whether or not the support winning flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The support winning flag is turned ON when the electric accessary product open lottery for determining whether or not to open the electric accessary product 34a is won in the open state, and is turned OFF when the supporting flag is ON. is. In step Sp1502, when it is determined that the support winning flag is not ON (Sp1502: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp1503.

At step Sp1503, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter areas 64f (FIG. 207) of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, every 2 msec.

If it is determined in step Sp1503 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sp1503: NO), the electronic support process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sp1503: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp1504.

In step Sp1504, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the fluctuation display of the symbol in the normal figure unit 38. If it is determined in step Sp1504 that it is time to end the variable display (Sp1504: YES), the process advances to step Sp1505, and after setting the off display, the electronic support process ends. By setting the deviation display, the variable display of the symbols in the general pattern unit 38 is terminated while the deviation display is stopped. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sp1504 that it is not the end timing of the variable display (Sp1504: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp1506.

In step Sp1506, it is determined whether or not the value of the reserved accessory number SN is greater than "0". In step Sp1506, when it is determined that the value of the reserved accessory number SN is "0" (Sp1506: NO), the electronic support process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sp1506 that the value of the reserved accessory number SN is larger than "0" (Sp1506: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp1507.

In step Sp1507, it is determined whether or not the open/close execution mode is in progress, and then the process proceeds to step Sp1508 to determine whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect. If it is not the opening/closing execution mode at step Sp1507 (Sp1507: NO) and if it is the high-frequency support mode at step Sp1508 (Sp1508: YES), the process advances to step Sp1509 to perform the electric accessory opening lottery. Specifically, the value stored in the electric role holding area 64d is shifted, and when the value of the electric role item opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric role item opening lottery be elected. Also, at the same time as the electric accessory open lottery, the second timer counter area T2 is set to "750" (that is, 1.5 sec). The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started. After that, the process proceeds to step Sp1510.

In step Sp1510, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory open lottery in step Sp1509 is support winning. In step Sp1510, when it is determined that the result of the electric accessory open lottery is support winning (Sp1510: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp1511, the support winning flag is turned ON, and provided in various counter areas 64f of RAM64 "3" is set in the second round counter area RC2. The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the electric accessory 34a is released. After that, the electronic support processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Sp1510, when it is determined that the result of the electric accessory open lottery is not support winning (Sp1510: NO), the process for electric support is terminated without executing the process of step Sp1511.

If it is determined in step Sp1507 that it is in the opening/closing execution mode (Sp1507: YES), or if it is determined that it is not in the high-frequency support mode in step Sp1508 (Sp1508: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp1512, and the electric accessory open lottery I do. Specifically, the value stored in the electric role holding area 64d is shifted, and when the value of the electric role item opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric role item opening lottery be elected. At the same time as the electric accessory open lottery, the second timer counter area T2 is set to "14750" (that is, 29.5 sec). After that, the process proceeds to step Sp1513.

In step Sp1513, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory open lottery in step Sp1512 is support winning. In step Sp1513, if it is determined that the support has not been won (Sp1513: NO), the electronic support process is terminated. On the other hand, in step Sp1513, when it is determined that the support winning is determined (Sp1513: YES), the process advances to step Sp1514, the support winning flag is turned ON, and after setting "1" to the second round counter area RC2, , terminates the electronic support process.

At step Sp1502, when it is determined that the support winning flag is ON (Sp1502: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp1515 to determine whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38. In step Sp1515, when it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sp1515: NO), since the pattern is being changed and displayed in the normal figure unit 38, the main electric role support process is performed as it is. exit. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sp1515 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sp1515: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp1516.

In step Sp1516, a win display is set. As a result, the variation display of the pattern in the normal pattern unit 38 is terminated while the win display is stopped. After that, the process proceeds to step Sp1517 to turn on the supporting flag and turn off the support winning flag. After that, the electronic support process is terminated.

In step Sp1501, when it is determined that the support flag is ON (Sp1501: YES), the process advances to step Sp1518 to execute the electric opening/closing control process for opening/closing the electric accessory 34a. After that, the electronic support process is terminated.

<Electrical opening/closing control process>
Next, the electrical opening/closing control process will be described. The electric power opening/closing control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control unit 60 as a subroutine of the electric power support process (Fig. 235: Sp1518).

FIG. 236 is a flow chart showing an electrical opening/closing control process. In step Sp1601, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open. Whether or not the electric accessory 34a is being opened is determined by whether or not the electric accessory drive unit 34b is in a driving state. When it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is open (Sp1601: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp1602.

At step Sp1602, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the open duration time of the electric accessory 34a. If it is determined in step Sp1602 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sp1602: NO), the main electrical opening/closing control process is terminated. In other words, if the opening continuation time of the electric accessory 34a has not ended, the present electric opening/closing control process is terminated.

In step Sp1602, when it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sp1602: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp1603 to perform closing processing for controlling the electric accessary 34a to the closed state, "250" (that is, 0.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as a means for measuring the open duration time of the electric accessory 34a is "0", the electric accessory 34a is closed, and the second timer counter area T2 is electrically operated this time. It is used as a parameter for measuring the closed duration time of the accessory 34a, and "250" is set in the second timer counter area T2. After executing step Sp1603, the process proceeds to step Sp1604.

In step Sp1604, after subtracting 1 from the value of the second round counter area RC2, the process advances to step Sp1605 to determine whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0". If it is determined in step Sp1605 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (Sp1605: NO), the main electric opening/closing control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sp1605 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0" (Sp1605: YES), the process advances to step Sp1606 to turn off the supported flag. After that, the electrical switching control process is terminated.

In step Sp1601, when it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is not open (Sp1601: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp1607 to determine whether or not the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closed duration time of the electric accessory 34a. If it is determined in step Sp1607 that the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sp1607: NO), the electrical opening/closing control process is terminated. On the other hand, in step Sp1607, when it is determined that the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sp1607: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp1608, and an opening process for controlling the electric accessary 34a to the open state is executed. . After that, the process proceeds to step Sp1609.

In step Sp1609, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. If it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress (Sp1609: NO), the process advances to step Sp1610 to determine whether or not the high-frequency support mode is in effect. do.

If it is determined in step Sp1610 that the high frequency support mode is in effect (Sp1610: YES), the process advances to step Sp1611 to set "800" (that is, 1.6 sec) in the second timer counter area T2. After that, the electrical switching control process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sp1609 that the mode is the open/close execution mode (Sp1609: YES), or if it is determined that it is not in the high-frequency support mode in step Sp1610 (Sp1610: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp1612, and the second "100" (that is, 0.2 sec) is set in the timer counter area T2. After that, the electrical switching control process is terminated.

<<5-6>> Various processes executed in the sound emission control device and the display control device:
Next, a specific example of control executed in the audio emission control device and the display control device will be described. The processing executed in the sound emission control device 90 will be described first, and then the processing executed in the display control device 100 will be described.

<Various processing executed in the sound emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, timer interrupt processing executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 will be described.

FIG. 237 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the sound and light side MPU 92 . Timer interrupt processing is repeatedly executed at a relatively short period (for example, 2 msec). Processing of each step executed in timer interrupt processing will be described below.

In step Sp1701, command storage processing is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing the received command in the sound and light side RAM 94 when a command is received from the main side MPU 62 . The sound and light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer for enabling storage and reading of commands received from the main side MPU 62, and the commands received from the main side MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer. , are read out sequentially according to the order in which they are stored. After executing step Sp1701, the process proceeds to step Sp1702.

In step Sp1702, pending command handling processing is executed. In the pending command processing, processing corresponding to the pending command among the commands stored in step Sp1701 is performed. Details of the pending command handling process will be described later. After executing step Sp1702, the process proceeds to step Sp1703.

In step Sp1703, a game round effect setting process is executed. In the game round effect setting process, the effect to be executed in the game round from the start of the symbol variation to the stop is set. Details of the game round effect setting process will be described later. After executing step Sp1703, the process proceeds to step Sp1704.

In step Sp1704, processing for opening/closing execution mode effect is executed. In the opening/closing execution mode effect processing, processing related to effects during the opening period, effects during the big winning opening opening/closing process period, and effects during the ending period is performed. After executing step Sp1704, the process proceeds to step Sp1705.

In step Sp1705, stage effect processing is executed. In the stage effect processing, a process of displaying a screen effect corresponding to the stage described above is performed. The details of the stage effect processing will be described later. After executing step Sp1705, the process proceeds to step Sp1706.

In step Sp1706, background effect processing is executed. In the background rendering process, a process of displaying on the pattern display device 41 a background moving image determined according to a command indicating the game state received from the main MPU 62 is performed. For example, a background video indicating that the high-frequency support mode is continuing, a background video indicating that the high-frequency support mode has ended, and a background video indicating that the high-probability mode is continuing are displayed. . After executing step Sp1706, the process proceeds to step Sp1707.

In step Sp1707, other processing is executed. Other processing includes processing for displaying a demonstration image (moving image) on the symbol display device 41 when the player is not playing a game. After executing step Sp1707, the process proceeds to step Sp1708.

In step Sp1708, light emission control processing for controlling light emission of various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, light emission control of various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read out in each of the effect processes described above. After executing step Sp1708, the process proceeds to step Sp1709.

At step Sp1709, an audio output control process for controlling the audio output of the speaker 46 is executed. In the audio output control process, audio output control of the speaker 46 is performed based on the audio data read out in the BGM process and each effect process. After executing step Sp1709, the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

<Processing for pending command>
Next, pending command handling processing will be described. The pending command handling process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (Sp1702 in FIG. 237).

FIG. 238 is a flowchart showing pending command handling processing. In step Sp1801, it is determined whether or not a pending command has been received from the main MPU62. In step Sp1801, when it determines with having received the hold command from main side MPU62 (Sp1801:YES), it progresses to step Sp1802.

In step Sp1802, the hold command received this time is read, and hold information is read from the hold command. The reservation information includes information on whether or not there is a jackpot, the type of jackpot, whether or not there is reach, and variation time. Then, the hold information read out is stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 . As for the hold information, information for a maximum of four pieces, which is the number of reserved first starting ports 33, and information for a maximum of four pieces, which is the number of reserved second starting ports 34, are updated and stored. After executing step Sp1802, the process proceeds to step Sp1803.

In step Sp1803, update processing at the time of ball entry is executed. In the updating process at the time of ball entry, the number of pieces of pending information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33, the number of pieces of holding information acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 34, Processing is executed so that the sound and light side MPU 92 can specify the total number of these pieces of hold information. The details of the updating process at the time of ball entry in step Sp1803 will be described later. Hereinafter, the number of holding information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 is also referred to as "first holding number", and the holding information acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 34 The number is also called the "second reserved number", and the total number of the first reserved number and the second reserved number is also called the "total reserved number". After executing step Sp1803, the process proceeds to step Sp1804.

At step Sp1804, a pending display control process is executed. Specifically, in correspondence with the first reserved number and the second reserved number specified in step Sp1803, the display in the first starting opening reservation area Ds1 and the second starting opening reservation area Ds2 (the reservation display icon is A command for changing the display of how many pieces are arranged is sent to the display control device 100 . The display control device 100, which has received the command, causes the display in the first start opening reservation region Ds1 and the second start opening reservation region Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the first reservation number and the second reservation number. change. Specifically, the display control device 100, which has received the command, defines the display positions of the icons of the pending display in the first start gate pending region Ds1, and displays the number of icons corresponding to the first pending number. display in position. In addition, the display control device 100 defines the display positions of the icons of the pending display in the second starting point pending region Ds2, and displays the icons corresponding to the second pending number at the display positions. After executing step Sp1804, the pending command handling process ends.

<Update process at the time of ball entry>
Next, update processing at the time of ball entry will be described. The updating process at the time of ball entry is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the hold command handling process (Fig. 238: Sp1803).

FIG. 239 is a flowchart showing update processing at the time of ball entry. In step Sp1901, it is determined whether or not the pending command read out this time was transmitted based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 or not. In step Sp1901, if it is determined that the hold command that is the read target this time is the one that has been transmitted based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 (Sp1901: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp1902, and the sound The update processing of the first reserved number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the light-side RAM 94 is executed. The first reservation number counter area is a counter area for specifying the number of pieces of reservation information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting hole 33 in the sound and light side MPU 92 . In the process of updating the first pending number counter area, the information in the first pending number counter area is updated to the pending number information included in the pending command read this time. After executing step Sp1902, the process proceeds to step Sp1904.

In step Sp1901, if it is determined that the pending command read this time was not transmitted based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 (Sp1901: NO), that is, the pending command is the second starting If it is determined that the transmission is based on the ball entering the mouth 34, the process advances to step Sp1903, and the update processing of the second pending number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound and light side RAM 94 is performed. Execute. The second pending number counter area is a counter area for specifying, in the sound and light side MPU 92 , the number of pieces of pending information acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 34 . In the process of updating the second reserved number counter area, the information in the second reserved number counter area is updated to the information of the reserved number included in the command read this time. After executing step Sp1903, the process proceeds to step Sp1904.

The reason why steps Sp1902 and Sp1903 are performed as described above will be described. In this embodiment, while the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, backup power is supplied to the RAM 64 of the main control device 60, while backup power is supplied to the RAM 94 of the sound emission control device 90. not. Therefore, when the power is cut off in a situation where the hold information related to the ball entering the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34 is stored in the RAM 64 of the main controller 60, the main controller 60 is stored in memory, whereas the sound emission control device 90 recognizes that there are 0 pieces of hold information. In this case, if a configuration is adopted in which the first pending number counter area or the second pending number counter area is counted up each time a pending command is received in the sound emission control device 90, the main controller 60 actually stores the pending memory. Inconvenience may occur in that the number of on-hold information received does not match the number of on-hold information grasped by the sound emission control device 90 . On the other hand, as in the above-described embodiment, the main controller 60 transmits a hold command including information on the number of holds, and the sound emission control device 90 responds to the hold command each time it receives the hold command. By adopting a configuration in which information on the contained number of reserved items is set in the first reserved number counter area or the second reserved number counter area, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above inconveniences.

In step Sp1904, update processing of the total pending number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound and light side RAM 94 is executed. The total pending number counter area is the sum of the number of pending information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 and the number of pending information acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 34. This is a counter area for specifying in the sound and light side MPU 92 . In the update process, the information of the total pending number counter area is the sum of the information of the pending number measured in the first pending number counter area and the information of the pending number measured in the second pending number counter area. update to After executing step Sp1904, the update process at the time of the actual ball entry is terminated.

<Game round effect setting processing>
Next, the game round effect setting process will be described. The game round effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (Fig. 237: Sp1703).

FIG. 240 is a flow chart showing game round effect setting processing. In step Sp2001, it is determined whether or not a variation command and a type command have been received. In step Sp2001, when it is determined that at least one of the variation command and the type command has not been received (Sp2001: NO), this game cycle effect setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sp2001 that the command for variation and the type command have been received (Sp2001: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp2002.

In step Sp2002, the command for variation received this time is read, and information on the presence or absence of a big win, the type of the big win, the presence or absence of reach occurrence, and the variation time is read from the command. Then, the read information is stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 . Then, it progresses to step Sp2003.

In step Sp2003, an effect pattern setting process for setting a pattern of effect to be executed in a game cycle such as a big win or a ready-to-win game is executed. Details of the effect pattern setting process will be described later. After executing step Sp2003, the process proceeds to step Sp2004.

In step Sp2004, a stop symbol setting process is executed. In the stop symbol setting process, if the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a 16R probability variable jackpot, an 8R probability variable jackpot, a 16R normal jackpot, or an 8R normal jackpot, a symbol is displayed on the effective line L of the pattern display device 41. Information corresponding to a stop result in which the same combination of symbols is established is set as information of the current stopped symbol. Specifically, when the result of the winning lottery of the current game round is the 16R probability variable jackpot or the 8R probability variable jackpot, the same combination of odd-numbered symbols can be selected as the same combination of symbols, and the same Even symbol combinations may be selected. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the selection rate is the same for the combination of the same odd-numbered symbols and the combination of the same even-numbered symbols. A configuration in which the ratio is high may be adopted, and the latter may be configured to have a higher selection ratio than the former. Also, the combination of "7" symbols is selected only in the case of a 16R probability variable jackpot. In addition, when the result of the winning lottery of the current game round is a 16R normal jackpot or an 8R normal jackpot, the same combination of even-numbered symbols is selected as the same combination of symbols.

If the result of the winning lottery in the current game round is a losing result, it is determined whether or not the ready-to-win is generated from the content of the command for variation. When it is determined that it corresponds to the occurrence of ready-to-win, it corresponds to the stop result that the combination of the same symbols on the effective line L does not materialize and the combination of the ready-to-win symbols on the effective line L does. information is determined as the information of the result of this stop. On the other hand, when it is determined that it does not correspond to the occurrence of ready-to-win, the result is a stop result in which the combination of the same symbols on the effective line L does not materialize and the combination of the ready-to-win symbols on the effective line L does not materialize. The corresponding information is set as the information of the current stop symbol. After executing step Sp2004, the process proceeds to step Sp2005.

In step Sp2005, a process for setting a variation display pattern for the current game round is executed. In this process, information on the variation time of the current game cycle is specified from the content of the variation command received this time, and the combination of the information on the variation time and the information on the stop symbol set in step Sp2004 is performed. Select the corresponding variable display pattern. When selecting a variation display pattern, the variation display pattern table stored in the variation display pattern table storage area 93b (FIG. 213) of the sound and light side ROM 93 is referred to. Then, it progresses to step Sp2006.

In step Sp2006, the information of the production pattern, the stop pattern, and the variable display pattern set in the current game round is set in the production command. After that, the process proceeds to step Sp2007 to transmit the effect command to the display side MPU102. The display-side MPU 102 executes processing for displaying the effect contents corresponding to the received effect command on the pattern display device 41 . After executing step Sp2007, the process proceeds to step Sp2008.

In step Sp2008, update processing at the start of fluctuation is executed. In the update process at the start of fluctuation, the process of decreasing the first reserved number or the second reserved number by 1 is performed at the start of fluctuation. The details of the update process at the start of fluctuation will be described later. After executing step Sp2008, the process proceeds to step Sp2009.

In step Sp2009, a pending display control process is executed. The pending display control process is similar to the pending display control process executed in step Sp1803 of the pending command handling process (FIG. 238). Specifically, in correspondence with the first reserved number and the second reserved number specified in step Sp2008, the display in the first starting opening reservation area Ds1 and the second starting opening reservation area Ds2 (the reservation display icon is A command for changing the display of how many pieces are arranged is sent to the display control device 100 . The display control device 100, which has received the command, causes the display in the first start opening reservation region Ds1 and the second start opening reservation region Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the first reservation number and the second reservation number. change. After executing step Sp2009, the game round effect setting process is terminated.

<Production pattern setting process>
Next, the effect pattern setting process will be described. The effect pattern setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (Sp2003 in FIG. 240) of the game cycle effect setting process.

FIG. 241 is a flowchart showing effect pattern setting processing. In step Sp2101, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a big win. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery is a big win from the information on the presence or absence of a big win stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 by step Sp2002 of the game round effect setting process (FIG. 240). . In step Sp2101, when it is determined that the result of the winning lottery is the big winning (Sp2101: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp2102.

In step Sp2102, a large winning effect pattern setting process is executed. The big win effect pattern setting process is a process of setting the effect pattern to be executed for the effect indicating that a big win has been won in the winning lottery related to the current game round. The effect pattern setting process for the big hit will be described later. After executing step Sp2102, the effect pattern setting process is terminated.

In step Sp2101, when it is determined that the jackpot has not been won in the winning lottery of this game round (Sp2101: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp2103.

In step Sp2103, it is determined whether or not reach has occurred in the current game round. This determination is made using the information on the presence or absence of the reach generation ascertained in step Sp2001 of FIG. In step Sp2103, when it is determined that reach has occurred in the current game round (Sp2103: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp2104.

In step Sp2104, the effect pattern setting process for reach occurrence/loss is executed. The effect pattern for when the reach occurs/losing is to execute the effect pattern indicating that various types of reach occur in the game times in which the reach occurs among the game times in which the jackpot is not won in the winning lottery. This is the process of setting the The production pattern setting process for reach occurrence/loss will be described later. After executing step Sp2104, the effect pattern setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Sp2103, when it is determined that reach has not occurred in the current game round (Sp2103: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp2105, and effect pattern setting processing for non-reach/off occurrence is executed. The production pattern for reach non-occurrence/losing is a process of setting to execute the production in the case where a big win is not won in the winning lottery and no reach occurs. The effect pattern setting process for reach non-occurrence/loss will be described later. After executing step Sp2105, the effect pattern setting process is terminated.

<Production pattern setting process for jackpot time>
Next, the effect pattern setting process for the big hit will be described. The effect pattern setting process for jackpot is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the effect pattern setting process (Fig. 241: Sp2102). The jackpot effect pattern setting process determines the type of reach and sets the jackpot effect pattern according to the reach type. Hereinafter, the effect pattern setting process for the time of the big win will be described in detail.

FIG. 242 is a flow chart showing the effect pattern setting process for the time of the big win. In step Sp2201, the reach distribution table for the big hit is referred to. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment stores a reach distribution table for big hits and a reach distribution table for reach occurrence/loss in the reach distribution table storage area 93c (FIG. 213) of the sound and light side ROM 93. are doing.

FIG. 243 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the reach distribution table. FIG. 243(a) shows a ready-to-win apportionment table for big hits, and FIG. 243(b) shows a ready-to-win apportioning table for occurrence/loss of reach. Normal reach, super reach, and special reach are set in each reach distribution table as distribution results.

As shown in FIG. 243(a), the ready-to-win allocation table for big hits shows the correspondence relationship between the variation time and the type of reach (normal reach, super reach, special reach). As described above, the fluctuation time at the time of the big win (when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery) set by the fluctuation time setting process (FIG. 230) executed by the main MPU 62 is assumed to correspond to the type of reach. It's becoming The correspondence relationship between the variation time and the type of reach is stored in the reach distribution table for the big win. Specifically, when the variation time is 35 seconds, it corresponds to normal reach, when the variation time is 65 seconds, it corresponds to super reach, and when the variation time is 125 seconds, it corresponds to special reach. Yes.

As shown in FIG. 243(b), the reach distribution table for reach occurrence/disconnection shows the correspondence between the fluctuation time and the reach type (normal reach, super reach, special reach). As described above, the fluctuation time at the time of occurrence/loss of reach (when the jackpot is not won in the winning lottery and reach occurs) set by the fluctuation time setting process (FIG. 230) executed by the main MPU 62 is according to the type of reach. The correspondence relationship between this fluctuation time and the type of reach is stored in the reach distribution table for when reach occurs/disappears. Specifically, when the variation time is 30 seconds, it corresponds to normal reach, when the variation time is 60 seconds, it corresponds to super reach, and when the variation time is 120 seconds, it corresponds to special reach. Yes.

In step Sp2201 of FIG. 242, the ready-to-win distribution table for big hit shown in FIG. 243(a) is read from the ready-to-win distribution table storage area 93c and referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step Sp2202, and as a result of referring to the reach allocation table for reach occurrence/disconnection at step Sp2201, the variation stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 by step Sp2002 of the game turn effect setting process (Fig. 240) It is determined whether or not the time information corresponds to normal reach.

If it is determined in step Sp2202 that it corresponds to normal reach (Sp2202: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp2203.

In step Sp2203, the effect pattern table for normal reach/jackpot stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 213) of the sound and light side ROM 93 is referred to, and step Sp2002 of the game cycle effect setting process (FIG. 240) is performed. Acquires the production pattern corresponding to the variable time stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 by . The effect pattern table for normal reach/big win is a table of effect patterns suggesting that normal reach has occurred and that a big win has been won. After executing step Sp2203, the process proceeds to step Sp2204.

At step Sp2204, the effect pattern acquired at step Sp2203 is set as the effect pattern to be executed in the current game cycle. After execution of step Sp2204, this big hit effect pattern setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Sp2202, when it is determined that it does not correspond to normal reach (Sp2202: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp2205, and as a result of referring to the reach distribution table for the big hit in step Sp2201, the game round effect setting process is performed. It is determined whether or not the fluctuation time information stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 in step Sp2002 of (FIG. 240) corresponds to super reach.

If it is determined in step Sp2205 that the game supports super reach (Sp2205: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp2206.

At step Sp2206, the effect pattern table for super reach/jackpot stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 213) of the sound and light side ROM 93 is referred to, and step Sp2002 of the game cycle effect setting process (FIG. 240) is performed. Acquires the production pattern corresponding to the variable time stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 by . The effect pattern table for super reach/big win is a table of effect patterns suggesting that super reach has occurred and that a big win has been won. This production pattern is the same as the production pattern obtained by the super reach/loss production pattern table reference process described later, and the part indicating that super reach has occurred is the same, suggesting the result of the winning lottery. It is different about the part to do. For this reason, more specific processing contents will be described in the processing for referring to the effect pattern table for super reach/loss. After executing step Sp2206, the process advances to step Sp2204 described above, and the effect pattern acquired in step Sp2206 is set as the effect pattern to be executed in the current game round.

In step Sp2205, when it determines with not being corresponding to a super reach (Sp2205:NO), it progresses to step Sp2207. In step Sp2205, when it is determined that it does not correspond to the super reach, it means that the result of referring to the reach distribution table for the jackpot time in step Sp2201 is special reach, in this case, step Sp2207 proceed to

In step Sp2207, the effect pattern table for special reach/jackpot stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 213) of the sound and light side ROM 93 is referred to, and the step of the game cycle effect setting process (FIG. 240) is performed. Acquire the effect pattern corresponding to the variable time stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 by Sp2002. The effect pattern table for special reach/big win is a table of effect patterns suggesting that special reach has occurred and that a big win has been won. This production pattern is the same as the production pattern obtained by the special reach/loose production pattern table reference process described later, and the part indicating that the special reach has occurred is the same, suggesting the result of the winning lottery. It is different about the part to do. For this reason, more specific processing contents will be described in the processing for referring to the effect pattern table for special reach/loss. After executing step Sp2207, the process advances to step Sp2204 described above, and the effect pattern acquired in step Sp2207 is set as the effect pattern to be executed in the current game round.

<Production pattern setting processing for reach occurrence / loss>
Next, the effect pattern setting process for reach occurrence/loss will be described. The effect pattern setting process for reach occurrence/loss is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the effect pattern setting process (Fig. 241: Sp2105). In the production pattern setting process for the occurrence of reach/loss, similar to the production pattern setting process for the main jackpot, the type of reach is determined, and the production pattern for the occurrence/loss of reach is set according to the type of reach. It is something to do. Hereinafter, the effect pattern setting processing for when this reach occurrence/loss occurs will be described in detail.

FIG. 244 is a flow chart showing the effect pattern setting process for reach occurrence/loss. In step Sp2301, the reach distribution table for the reach generation/off time shown in FIG. 243(b) is read from the reach distribution table storage area 93c and referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step Sp2302, and as a result of referring to the reach distribution table for reach occurrence/disconnection at step Sp2301, the variation stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 by step Sp2002 of the game turn effect setting process (Fig. 240) It is determined whether or not the time information corresponds to normal reach.

If it is determined in step Sp2302 that it corresponds to normal reach (Sp2302: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp2303.

In step Sp2303, the effect pattern table for normal reach/loss stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 213) of the sound and light side ROM 93 is referred to, and step Sp2002 of the game cycle effect setting process (FIG. 240) is performed. Acquires the production pattern corresponding to the variable time stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 by . After executing step Sp2303, the process proceeds to step Sp2304.

At step Sp2304, the effect pattern acquired at step Sp2303 is set as the effect pattern to be executed in the current game round. After execution of step Sp2304, this ready-to-win occurrence/loss time production pattern setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Sp2302, when it is determined that it does not correspond to normal reach (Sp2302: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp2305, and as a result of referring to the reach distribution table for when reach occurs/disappears in step Sp2301, the game round It is determined whether or not the variable time information stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 in step Sp2002 of the effect setting process (FIG. 240) corresponds to super reach.

If it is determined in step Sp2305 that the game supports super reach (Sp2305: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp2306.

In step Sp2306, the reach occurrence/disengagement time reach type determination value VR is set to 1. The reach type determination value VR at the time of occurrence of reach/loss is a value for determining the type of reach when reach occurs in a game round in which the result is a loss in a winning lottery, and when the value is 1, the type is super. When it is 2, it means that the type is special reach, and when it is 0, it means that it is neither super reach nor special reach. After executing step Sp2306, the process proceeds to step Sp2307.

In step Sp2307, super reach/out time production pattern table reference processing is executed. The effect pattern table reference process for super reach/loss is a process of acquiring effect patterns by referring to the effect pattern table for super reach/loss. The effect pattern table reference processing for super reach/off time will be described later. After executing step Sp2307, the process advances to step Sp2304 described above, and the effect pattern obtained in step Sp2307 is set as the effect pattern to be executed in the current game round.

In step Sp2305, when it determines with not being corresponding to a super reach (Sp2305:NO), it progresses to step Sp2308. In step Sp2305, if it is determined that it does not correspond to the super reach, it means that the result of referring to the reach distribution table for reach occurrence / off time in step Sp2301 is special reach, in this case , the process proceeds to step Sp2308.

In step Sp2308, the reach occurrence/disengagement time reach type determination value VR is set to 2. That is, the ready-to-win type determination value VR at the time of occurrence of ready-to-win/losing is set to 2, which means that the type of ready-to-win is special ready-to-win when the type of ready-to-win occurs in the game round in which the result is a loss in the winning lottery. After executing step Sp2308, the process proceeds to step Sp2309.

In step Sp2309, special reach/off time production pattern table reference processing is executed. The effect pattern table reference process for special reach/loss is a process of acquiring effect patterns by referring to the effect pattern table for special reach/loss. The effect pattern table reference processing for special reach/loss will be described later. After executing step Sp2309, the process proceeds to step Sp2304 described above, and the effect pattern obtained in step Sp2309 is set as the effect pattern to be executed in the current game round.

<Processing for referring to the effect pattern table for super reach/off time>
Next, the processing for referring to the effect pattern table for super reach/out will be described. The effect pattern table reference process for super reach/loss is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (Sp2307 in FIG. 244) of the effect pattern setting process for occurrence/loss of the reach. In the following, the process of referring to the effect pattern table for super reach/loss will be described in detail.

FIG. 245 is a flow chart showing processing for referring to the effect pattern table for super reach/loss. In step Sp2401, it is determined whether or not the character stage determination value VS is 1. The character-type stage judgment value VS is a value for judging whether the previously described stage is a character-type stage or a non-character-type stage. When it is not 1 (=0), it means that it is in a non-character stage. In step Sp2401, if the character stage determination value VS is not 1, that is, if it is determined that the stage is a non-character stage (Sp2401: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp2402.

At step Sp2402, a warrior character lottery process is executed. The warrior character lottery process is a process of performing a lottery to specify one warrior character from among the warrior characters A to D described above. Specifically, a value is acquired from the random number counter C5 for the warrior character lottery, and this value is collated with the warrior character lottery table stored in the ROM 93 on the sound and light side to perform the lottery. A random number counter C5 for the warrior character lottery is provided in various counter areas 94b of the sound and light side RAM 94. FIG. The random number counter C5 is updated at short time intervals.

FIG. 246 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the warrior character lottery table. As shown in FIG. 246, among the values of the random number counter C5 for the warrior character lottery of "0 to 99", "0 to 24" correspond to the warrior character A, and "25 to 49" correspond to the warrior character. B, "50-74" correspond to the warrior character C, and "75-99" correspond to the warrior character D. In the present embodiment, each of the warrior characters A to D has an equal probability of winning, but instead of this, a configuration may be adopted in which each of the warrior characters A to D has a different probability of winning. After executing step Sp2402, the process proceeds to step Sp2403.

At step Sp2403, a warrior character determination value VC is set based on the lottery result obtained at step Sp2402. Specifically, the warrior character determination value VC is set by collating the lottery result with the warrior character determination value correspondence table stored in the sound and light side ROM 93 .

FIG. 247 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the warrior character determination value correspondence table. As shown in FIG. 247, the lottery result of warrior character A corresponds to 1 as warrior character determination value Vc, the lottery result of warrior character B corresponds to 2 as warrior character determination value Vc, and warrior character C corresponds to the lottery result of warrior character B. 3 corresponds to the lottery result of 1 as the warrior character determination value Vc, and 4 corresponds to the lottery result of the warrior character D as the warrior character determination value Vc. After executing step Sp2403 in FIG. 245, the process proceeds to step Sp2404.

In step Sp2401, if the character stage determination value VS is 1, that is, if it is determined that the stage is a character stage (Sp2401: YES), step Sp2404 is performed without executing steps Sp2402 and Sp2403. proceed to

In step Sp2404, the effect pattern table based on the warrior character determination value VC is specified from the super reach/miss effect pattern table group stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 213) of the ROM 93. The group of super reach/lost effect pattern tables includes super reach/loose effect pattern tables corresponding to warrior characters A to D, that is, the super reach/loose effect pattern table for warrior character A, A super reach/miss performance pattern table for warrior character B, a super reach/miss performance pattern table for warrior character C, and a super reach/miss performance pattern table for warrior character D are provided. In step Sp2404, when the warrior character determination value VC is 1, the effect pattern table for super reach/miss for warrior character A is specified. A ready-to-reach/missing effect pattern table is specified, and when the warrior character determination value VC is 3, a super reach/missing effect pattern table for the warrior character C is specified, and the warrior character determination value VC is 4. Sometimes, the effect pattern table for the super reach/miss time for the warrior character D is specified. After executing step Sp2404, the process proceeds to step Sp2405.

At step Sp2405, the effect pattern table identified at step Sp2404 is referenced, and the effect pattern corresponding to the variable time stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 at step Sp2002 of the game cycle effect setting process (FIG. 240) is acquired. . After step Sp2405 is executed, the process of referring to the effect pattern table for super reach/loss is terminated.

After the end of the effect pattern table reference process for super reach/loss, the process proceeds to step Sp2304 of the effect pattern setting process for reach occurrence/loss (Fig. 244), and the effect pattern acquired in step Sp2405 (Fig. 245) is the current effect pattern. It is set as an effect pattern to be executed in the game round.

<Processing for referring to effect pattern table for special reach/off time>
Next, the processing for referring to the effect pattern table for special reach/loss will be described. The effect pattern table reference process for the special reach/loss is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the effect pattern setting process for the occurrence/loss of the reach (Fig. 244: Sp2309). In the following, the processing for referring to the effect pattern table for the special reach/off will be described in detail.

FIG. 248 is a flow chart showing processing for referring to the effect pattern table for special reach/loss. Steps Sp2501 to Sp2503 are the same processing as steps Sp2401 to Sp2403 in the process of referring to the effect pattern table for super reach/loss.

Step Sp2504 is a process corresponding to step Sp2404 in the effect pattern table reference process for super reach/loss. Specifically, in step Sp2504, the effect pattern table based on the warrior character determination value VC is specified from the group of effect pattern tables for special reach/loss stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 213) of the ROM 93. do. After executing step Sp2504, the process proceeds to step Sp2505.

At step Sp2505, the effect pattern table identified at step Sp2504 is referenced, and the effect pattern corresponding to the variable time stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 at step Sp2002 of the game cycle effect setting process (FIG. 240) is acquired. . After step Sp2505 is executed, the effect pattern table reference process for super reach/out is terminated.

After the end of the effect pattern table reference process for special reach/loss, the process proceeds to step Sp2304 of the effect pattern setting process for reach/loss (Fig. 244), and the effect pattern obtained by step Sp2505 (Fig. 248) is the current effect pattern. It is set as an effect pattern to be executed in the game round.

<Production pattern setting processing for reach non-occurrence / loss>
Next, the effect pattern setting process for reach non-occurrence/loss will be described. The production pattern setting process for reach non-occurrence/off time is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the production pattern setting process (Fig. 241: Sp2105). Hereinafter, the effect pattern setting process for reach non-occurrence/loss will be described in detail.

FIG. 249 is a flow chart showing the production pattern setting process for reach non-occurrence/loss. In step Sp2601, with reference to the effect pattern table for the time of loss stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (Fig. 213) of the sound and light side ROM 93, sound is generated by step Sp2002 of the game turn effect setting process (Fig. 240). An effect pattern corresponding to the variable time stored in the register of the light side MPU 92 is acquired. The production for the non-reach/lost time is a production suggesting that the jackpot has not been won and the reach has not occurred. is different on the effective line L. After executing step Sp2601, the process proceeds to step Sp2602, and the effect pattern acquired in step Sp2601 is set as the effect pattern to be executed in the current game round. After execution of step Sp2602, this reach non-occurrence/off time effect pattern setting process is terminated.

<Update processing at the start of fluctuation>
Next, update processing at the start of fluctuation will be described. The update process at the start of fluctuation is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the game cycle effect setting process (Fig. 240: Sp2008).

FIG. 250 is a flowchart showing update processing at the start of fluctuation. In step Sp2701, the variation command received this time is related to the hold information acquired based on the ball entering the first start hole 33 in the current game round (hereinafter referred to as the first variation command). or whether it relates to the hold information acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 34 (hereinafter referred to as a second variation command). If it is determined in step Sp2701 that the command for variation received this time is the first command for variation (Sp2701: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp2702.

At step Sp2702, 1 is subtracted from the first pending number counter stored in the sound and light RAM 94. FIG. After executing step Sp2702, the process proceeds to step Sp2703.

In step Sp2403, the processing of shifting the data stored in the memory area (not shown) for the first start opening hold effect stored in the sound and light RAM 94 is executed. This shift processing is processing for sequentially shifting the data stored in the storage area to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After executing step Sp2403, the process proceeds to step Sp2406.
nothing.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sp2701 that the variation command received this time is not the first variation command, that is, it is the second variation command (Sp2701: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp2703. 1 is subtracted from the stored second reservation number counter. After executing step Sp2703, the process proceeds to step Sp2704.

In step Sp2704, the information in the total pending number counter area is updated so that the total pending number stored in the total pending number counter area of the sound and light side RAM 94 is decremented by one. After that, the update process at the start of fluctuation is terminated.

<Processing for stage production>
Next, the stage effect processing will be described. The stage effect processing is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a timer interrupt processing subroutine (Sp1705 in FIG. 237).

FIG. 251 is a flow chart showing stage effect processing. In step Sp2801, it is determined whether or not it is the first execution from when the power switch 88 is switched from the off state to the on state (when the power is turned on). If it is determined in step Sp2801 that it is the first execution after power-on (Sp2801: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp2802.

In step Sp2802, a process for displaying on the pattern display device 41 a screen effect corresponding to the rural stage (see FIG. 215(a)) is performed. Specifically, a command to display a screen effect corresponding to the countryside stage is transmitted to the display control device 100 . The command includes that the display destination is set to the background layer, and the screen effect corresponding to the rural stage is displayed as the background on the display surface 41 a of the pattern display device 41 . After executing step Sp2802, the process proceeds to step Sp2803.

At step Sp2803, the character stage determination value VS is set to 0, which means that the stage is a non-character stage. After executing step Sp2803, the process proceeds to step Sp2804.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sp2801 that it is not the first execution after power-on (Sp2801: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp2804 without executing steps Sp2802 and Sp2803.

In step Sp2804, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the game cycle. In this embodiment, by determining whether or not the time corresponding to the variable time read out in step Sp2002 of the game round effect setting process (FIG. 240) has passed from the time of reading, the end of the game round is reached. determine whether or not At step Sp2804, when it is determined that the game cycle is finished (Sp2804: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp2805.

In step Sp2805, it is determined whether or not the character stage determination value VS is 1. At step Sp2805, if the character stage determination value VS is 1, that is, if it is determined that the stage is a character stage (Sp2805: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp2806.

At step Sp2806, stage transition processing in the character stage is executed. Stage transition processing in character-based stages will be described later. After executing step Sp2806, the process proceeds to step Sp2808.

On the other hand, in step Sp2805, if the character stage determination value VS is not 1, that is, if it is determined that the stage is a non-character stage (Sp2805: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp2807.

At step Sp2807, stage transition processing for a non-character stage is executed. Stage transition processing in the non-character stage will be described later. After executing step Sp2807, the process proceeds to step Sp2808.

In step Sp2808, the reach occurrence/disengagement time reach type determination value VR is set to 0. After step Sp2806 or step Sp2807 is executed, the reach occurrence/disengagement reach type determination value VR is cleared to 0 once. After executing step Sp2808, this stage effect processing ends.

<Stage transition processing in character-based stages>
Next, the stage transition processing in the character stage will be described. The stage transition processing in the character-related stage is processing for controlling the execution/non-execution of the stage transition when the stage is in the character-related stage, and implements the contents of FIG. 219 described above. This processing is executed by the MPU 92 of the audio light emission control device 90 as a subroutine for stage production processing ( FIG. 251 : Sp2806).

FIG. 252 is a flow chart showing stage transition processing in a character stage. In step Sp2901, it is determined whether or not a special reach has occurred (special reach/loss) in the game round in which the winning lottery in the current game round resulted in a loss. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the reach type determination value VR is 2 at the time of reach occurrence/disappearance.

In step Sp2901, if it is determined that the reach occurrence/loss time reach type determination value VR is not 2, that is, if it is determined that the special reach/loss does not apply (Sp2901: NO), the process described later is executed. Terminate the stage transition processing in the character-based stage without i.e.
・ The game times that won the jackpot in the winning lottery,
・If no reach occurs in the game round that resulted in a loss in the winning lottery,
・If normal reach occurs in the game round that resulted in a loss in the winning lottery,
・Even if Super Reach occurs in a game round that resulted in a loss in the winning lottery, the stage in the current game round is continued by ending the stage transition processing in the character stage, and the stage Do not migrate.

On the other hand, in step Sp2901, if it is determined that the reach type determination value VR at the time of reach occurrence/loss is 2, that is, if it is determined that it is a special reach/loss (Sp2901: YES), to step Sp2902 move on.

In step Sp2902, from the hold information at the end of the game round at this time, the presence or absence of the big hit and the fluctuation time in each hold are grasped. Specifically, from the hold information stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 in step Sp1802 of the hold command correspondence processing (FIG. 238), the presence or absence of the big win and the fluctuation time in each hold are grasped. After executing step Sp2902, the process proceeds to step Sp2903.

In step Sp2903, it is determined whether or not there is information indicating special reach/loss or special reach/jackpot in the hold information at the end of the game cycle. Specifically, whether or not there is a jackpot in each hold grasped by step Sp2902, and whether the information on the fluctuation time in each hold grasped by step Sp2902 corresponds to the special reach, special reach, off or to the hold information It is determined whether or not there is information indicating that it corresponds to a special reach/jackpot.

In step Sp2903, when it is determined that information indicating that special reach/loss or special reach/jackpot exists in the hold information at the end of the game round (Sp2903: YES), the processing described later is executed. Terminate the stage transition processing in the character-based stage. Exception 1 in FIG. 219 is implemented by determining YES in this step Sp2903 and exiting the stage transition processing in the character stage.

On the other hand, in step Sp2903, if it is determined that there is no information indicating that special reach/loss and information indicating that special reach/jackpot are present in the hold information at the end of the game round ( Sp2903: NO), proceed to step Sp2904.

In step Sp2904, it is determined whether or not there is information indicating super reach/off or super reach/jackpot in the hold information at the end of the game cycle. Specifically, whether or not there is a jackpot in each hold grasped by step Sp2902, and whether the information on the fluctuation time in each hold grasped by step Sp2902 corresponds to super reach, super reach, off or to the hold information It is determined whether or not there is information indicating that it corresponds to super reach/jackpot.

In step Sp2904, when it is determined that information indicating super reach/off or super reach/jackpot exists in the hold information at the end of the game cycle (Sp2904: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp2905.

In step Sp2905, a character stage lottery process is executed. In the character-type stage lottery process, one stage is selected from among the previously described character-type stages: Warrior A's room stage, Warrior B's room stage, Warrior C's room stage, and Warrior D's room stage. This is a process of performing a lottery for specifying. Specifically, a value is acquired from the random number counter C6 for the character-type stage lottery, and the lottery is performed by collating this value with the character-type stage lottery table stored in the sound and light side ROM 93 . A random number counter C6 for the character stage lottery is provided in various counter areas 94b of the sound and light side RAM 94. FIG. The random number counter C6 is updated at short time intervals.

FIG. 253 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the stage lottery table. FIG. 253(a) shows the contents of the character stage lottery table, and FIG. 253(b) shows the contents of the non-character stage lottery table. As shown in FIG. 253(a), among the values of the random number counter C6 for the character stage lottery of "0 to 99", "0 to 24" correspond to the stage of Warrior A's room. 25 to 49" correspond to the stages in Warrior B's room, "50 to 74" correspond to the stages in Warrior C's room, and "75 to 99" correspond to the stages in Warrior D's room. ing. In the present embodiment, the stage in each room has an equal probability of winning, but instead of this, the stage in each room may have a different winning probability. After executing step Sp2905, the process proceeds to step Sp2906.

At step Sp2906, it is determined whether or not the lottery result at step Sp2905 indicates a character stage corresponding to the warrior character specified by the warrior character determination value VC. in particular,
・If the warrior character determination value VC is 1, determine whether the lottery result is the stage of warrior A's room,
・If the warrior character determination value VC is 2, determine whether the lottery result is the stage of warrior B's room,
・If the warrior character determination value VC is 3, determine whether the lottery result is the stage of warrior C's room,
When the warrior character determination value VC is 4, it is determined whether or not the lottery result is the stage of warrior D's room.

In step Sp2906, if the lottery result in step Sp2905 is determined to be a character stage corresponding to the warrior character specified by the warrior character determination value VC (Sp2906: YES), the process returns to step Sp2905. And each process of step Sp2906 is executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined at step Sp2906 that the lottery result at step Sp2905 is not a character stage corresponding to the warrior character specified by the warrior character determination value VC (Sp2906: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp2907. When the determination process of step Sp2906 is executed, it is determined that the game round this time is special reach/loss by step Sp2901, and the effect pattern table reference process for special reach/loss (Fig. The character determination value VC is set to a value that specifies a warrior character that appears in the production corresponding to special reach/loss. Therefore, if NO is determined in step Sp2906, it means that the warrior character other than the warrior character appearing in the effect corresponding to the special reach/loss of this game round matches the lottery result of step Sp2905. do. Therefore, in step Sp2906, when the result of the lottery in step Sp2905 is a warrior character other than the warrior character appearing in the effect corresponding to the special reach/loss of this game cycle, the process proceeds to step Sp2907.

In step Sp2907, a command is sent to the display control device 100 to display a character stage screen effect corresponding to the lottery result of step Sp2905. The command includes that the display destination is the background layer, and the screen effect is displayed as the background on the display surface 41 a of the pattern display device 41 . As a result, the transition from the character-type stage to the character-type stage corresponding to the warrior character other than the warrior character who appeared in the production corresponding to the special reach/miss is performed. After executing step Sp2907, the process proceeds to step Sp2908.

At step Sp2908, the warrior character determination value VC is set to a value corresponding to the result of the lottery at step Sp2905. in particular,
・If the result of the lottery is the stage in Warrior A's room, the warrior character judgment value VC is set to 1,
・If the result of the lottery is the stage of Warrior B's room, set the warrior character judgment value VC to 2,
・If the result of the lottery is the stage of Warrior C's room, the warrior character judgment value VC is set to 3,
・When the lottery result is the stage of Warrior D's room, the warrior character determination value VC is set to 4.

Exception 2 in FIG. 219 is realized by executing the processing from step Sp2904 to step Sp2908. After executing step Sp2908, the stage transition processing in the character stage ends.

In step Sp2904, if it is determined that there is no information indicating that super reach/loss and information indicating super reach/jackpot are present in the hold information at the end of the game cycle (Sp2904: NO), go to step Sp2909.

In step Sp2909, a non-character stage lottery process is executed. The non-character-type stage lottery process is a process of performing a lottery to specify one of the non-character-type stages described above: the country stage, the city stage, the ocean stage, and the everyone's stage. . Specifically, a value is acquired from the random number counter C7 for the non-character stage lottery, and this value is collated with the non-character stage lottery table stored in the sound and light side ROM 93 to perform the lottery. A random number counter C7 for the non-character stage lottery is provided in various counter areas 94b of the sound and light side RAM 94. FIG. The random number counter C7 is updated at short time intervals.

As shown in FIG. 253(b), among the values of the random number counter C7 for the non-character stage lottery of "0 to 99", "0 to 24" correspond to the countryside stage, and "25 to 49" corresponds to the city stage, "50-74" corresponds to the ocean stage, and "75-99" corresponds to the everyone's stage. In the present embodiment, each stage has an equal probability of being won. Alternatively, each stage may have different winning probabilities. After executing step Sp2909, the process proceeds to step Sp2910.

In step Sp2910, a command is sent to the display control device 100 to display a non-character stage screen effect corresponding to the result of the lottery in step Sp2909. The command includes that the display destination is the background layer, and the screen effect is displayed as the background on the display surface 41 a of the pattern display device 41 . As a result, the transition from the character-type stage to the non-character-type stage corresponding to the result of the lottery is performed. After executing step Sp2910, the process proceeds to step Sp2911.

At step Sp2911, the character stage determination value VS is set to zero. The principle in FIG. 219 is realized by determining YES in step Sp2901 and executing the processing from step Sp2909 to step Sp2911. After executing step Sp2911, the stage transition processing in the character-based stage ends.

<Stage transition processing for non-character stages>
Next, the stage transition processing in the non-character stage will be described. The stage transition processing for non-character-type stages is processing for controlling execution/non-execution of stage transitions when the stage is on a non-character-type stage, and implements the content of FIG. 220 described above. . This processing is executed by the MPU 92 of the audio light emission control device 90 as a subroutine for stage effect processing ( FIG. 251 : Sp2807).

FIG. 254 is a flow chart showing stage transition processing in a non-character stage. In step Sp3001, it is determined whether or not super reach has occurred (super reach/loss) in the game round in which the winning lottery in the current game round resulted in a loss. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the reach type determination value VR is 1 at the time of reach occurrence/disappearance.

In step Sp3001, if it is determined that the reach occurrence/loss time reach type determination value VR is 1, that is, if it is determined to be super reach/loss (Sp3001: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp3002. .

In step Sp3002, a command is sent to the display control device 100 to display the screen effect of the character stage corresponding to the warrior character specified by the warrior character determination value VC. The command includes that the display destination is the background layer, and the screen effect is displayed as the background on the display surface 41 a of the pattern display device 41 . in particular,
When the warrior character determination value VC is 1, a command is sent to display the screen effect of the stage in warrior A's room.
When the warrior character determination value VC is 2, a command is sent to display the screen effect of the stage in warrior B's room.
- When the warrior character determination value VC is 3, a command to display the screen effect of the stage in warrior C's room is transmitted.
・When the warrior character determination value VC is 4, a command to display the screen effect of the stage in the warrior D's room is transmitted.

In step Sp3001, when it is determined to be super reach/miss and step Sp3002 is executed, the warrior character determination value VC is a value for specifying the warrior character who appeared in the production corresponding to super reach/miss. Therefore, in step Sp3002, a screen presentation of a character-type stage corresponding to the warrior character who has appeared in the presentation corresponding to super reach/miss is displayed. After executing step Sp3002, the process proceeds to step Sp3003.

In step Sp3003, the character stage determination value VS is set to 1 indicating that it is a character stage. Exception A in FIG. 220 is implemented by determining YES in this step Sp3003 and executing the processing of steps Sp3002 and Sp3003. After executing step Sp3003, the stage transition processing in the non-character stage ends.

On the other hand, in step Sp3001, if it is determined that the reach occurrence/loss time reach type determination value VR is not 1, that is, if it is determined that it is not super reach/loss (Sp3001: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp3004.

In step Sp3004, it is determined whether or not a special reach has occurred (special reach/loss) in the game round in which the winning lottery in the current game round resulted in a loss. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the reach type determination value VR is 2 at the time of reach occurrence/disappearance.

In step Sp3004, if it is determined that the reach type determination value VR at the time of reach occurrence/loss is not 2, that is, if it is determined that special reach/loss does not apply (Sp3004: NO), the processing described later is executed. Terminate the stage transition processing in the non-character type stage. i.e.
・ The game times that won the jackpot in the winning lottery,
・If no reach occurs in the game round that resulted in a loss in the winning lottery,
・If normal reach occurs in the game round that resulted in a loss in the winning lottery,
In either case, by ending the stage transition processing in the non-character type stage, the stage in the current game cycle is continued and the stage transition is not performed.

On the other hand, in step Sp3004, if it is determined that the reach type determination value VR at the time of reach occurrence/loss is 2, that is, if it is determined that it is a special reach/loss (Sp3004: YES), to step Sp3005 move on.

In step Sp3005, the presence or absence of a big hit in each hold and the fluctuation time are grasped from the hold information at the end of the game round at this time. The processing of step Sp3005 is the same as that of step Sp2902 (FIG. 252) described above. After executing step Sp3005, the process proceeds to step Sp3006.

In step Sp3006, it is determined whether or not there is information indicating special reach/off or special reach/jackpot in the hold information at the end of the game cycle. The processing of step Sp3006 is the same as that of step Sp2903 (FIG. 252) described above.

In step Sp3006, if it is determined that the information indicating that special reach/off or special reach/jackpot exists in the hold information at the end of the game round (Sp3006: YES), the step described above Proceed to Sp3002.

As described above, in step Sp3002, a command is sent to the display control device 100 to display a character stage screen effect corresponding to the warrior character identified by the warrior character determination value VC. In step Sp3006, when it is determined that information indicating special reach/lost or special reach/jackpot exists in the pending information and step Sp3002 is executed, the warrior character determination value VC Therefore, in step Sp3002, a screen presentation of a character-type stage corresponding to the warrior character that appeared in the presentation corresponding to Special Reach/Loss is displayed. Become.

On the other hand, in step Sp3006, if it is determined that there is no information indicating special reach/loss and information indicating special reach/jackpot in the hold information at the end of the game round ( Sp3006: NO), proceed to step Sp3007.

In step Sp3007, a character stage lottery process is executed. The character-type stage lottery process is for specifying one stage from among the stage of warrior A's room, the stage of warrior B's room, the stage of warrior C's room, and the stage of warrior D's room as character-type stages. This is a lottery process, which is the same as step Sp2905 (FIG. 252) described above. After executing step Sp3007, the process proceeds to step Sp3008.

At step Sp3008, it is determined whether or not the lottery result at step Sp3007 indicates a character stage corresponding to the warrior character specified by the warrior character determination value VC. The processing of step Sp3008 is the same as step Sp2906 (FIG. 252) described above.

In step Sp3008, when it is determined that the lottery result in step Sp3007 is a character stage corresponding to the warrior character specified by the warrior character determination value VC (Sp3008: YES), the process returns to step Sp3007. And each process of step Sp3008 is executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined at step Sp3008 that the lottery result at step Sp3007 is not a character stage corresponding to the warrior character specified by the warrior character determination value VC (Sp3008: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp3008. When the determination processing of step Sp3008 is executed, it is determined that the current game round is special reach/loss by step Sp3004, and the effect pattern table reference processing for special reach/loss (Fig. The character determination value VC is set to a value that specifies a warrior character that appears in the production corresponding to special reach/loss. Therefore, if NO is determined in step Sp3008, it means that the warrior character other than the warrior character appearing in the effect corresponding to the special reach/loss of this game round matches the lottery result of step Sp3007. do. Therefore, in step Sp3008, when the lottery result in step Sp3007 is a warrior character other than the warrior character that appeared in the effect corresponding to the special reach/loss of this game round, the process proceeds to step Sp3009.

In step Sp3009, a command is sent to the display control device 100 to display a character stage screen effect corresponding to the lottery result of step Sp3007. The command includes that the display destination is the background layer, and the screen effect is displayed as the background on the display surface 41 a of the pattern display device 41 . The processing of step Sp3009 is the same as that of step Sp2907 (FIG. 252) described above. As a result of the processing of step Sp3009, the transition from the non-character-type stage to the character-type stage corresponding to the warrior character other than the warrior character appearing in the effect corresponding to the special reach/loss is performed. After executing step Sp3009, the process proceeds to step Sp3010.

At step Sp3010, the warrior character determination value VC is set to a value corresponding to the lottery result at step Sp3007. The processing of step Sp3010 is the same as step Sp2908 (FIG. 252) described above. After executing step Sp3010, the process proceeds to step Sp3011.

In step Sp3011, the character stage determination value VS is set to 1 indicating that it is a character stage. The principle in FIG. 220 is implemented by determining YES in step Sp3004 and executing the processes from step Sp3007 to step Sp3011. After executing step Sp3011, the stage transition processing in the non-character stage ends.

<Various processing executed in the display control device>
Next, processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

The processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 mainly includes a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on until the power is turned off, and a main processing that is executed when a command is received from the sound emission control device 90. There are command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing executed when a V interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal that is transmitted from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when rendering processing of an image for one frame is completed.

The MPU 102 executes main processing after power-on, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of commands and detection of V interrupt signals. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command interrupt processing is preferentially executed. Therefore, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound emission control device 90 and execute the V interrupt process.

<Main processing>
Next, main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 255 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. As described above, the main process is a process that is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. Processing of each step executed in the main processing will be described below.

In step Sp3101, initialization processing is executed. Specifically, first, processing for initializing the MPU 102 and clearing the storage of the work RAM 104 and the video RAM 107 is performed. Then, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107 . Furthermore, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107 and the extracted character information is written in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107 . Also, perform other necessary settings for initialization. After that, the process proceeds to step Sp3102.

In step Sp3102, interrupt permission setting is executed. After the interrupt permission setting is executed, in the main processing, infinite loop processing is executed until the power is turned off. Accordingly, after the interrupt permission is set, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing, which will be described below, are executed in accordance with the reception of a command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described. As described above, the command interrupt processing is processing that is executed each time a command is received from the sound emission control device 90 .

256 is a flow chart showing command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. In step Sp3201, command storage processing is executed. In the command storage process, received command data is extracted and the extracted command data is stored in a command storage area provided in work RAM 104 . Various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read by the command determination process of the V interrupt process, which will be described later, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

257 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. As described above, V interrupt processing is processing that is executed when a V interrupt signal from VDP 105 is detected. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command storage area are executed by the command interrupt process. Execute the displayed instructions.

As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame worth of image is completed and that is transmitted to the MPU 102 . Therefore, the MPU 102 executes V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, so that drawing instructions to the VDP 105 are issued every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame worth of image is completed. For this reason, the VDP 105 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to suppress the development of an image associated with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area in which the image information is stored. Details of the processing of each step of the V interrupt processing will be described below.

In step Sp3301, command handling processing is executed. In the command handling process, the contents of the command stored in the command storage area by the command interruption process (FIG. 241) are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. Specifically, for example, when a performance command is stored, image drawing and display control is started so that the performance mode specified by the performance command is displayed on the pattern display device 41.例文帳に追加

If the effect operation command is stored, it is determined whether or not it is the period for accepting pressing of the effect operation button 24, and if it is determined that it is the period for accepting pressing of the effect operation button 24, the effect operation is performed. Control of image drawing and display is started so that the effect mode corresponding to the depression of the button 24 is displayed on the pattern display device 41 . On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the period for accepting pressing of the effect operation button 24, the content of the next command is analyzed without executing the process.

In the command processing (Sp3301), all commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and processing corresponding to all the analyzed commands is executed. The reason for this will be explained. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during the 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the effect is set by the sound emission control device 90 and the effect is started, there is a high possibility that various commands for specifying the content of the effect are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the state of the effect such as the advance notice effect and the stop pattern set by the sound emission control device 90, and display the effect image according to the state. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the device 41 .

In step Sp3302, display setting processing is executed. In the display setting process, based on the type of screen to be displayed on the pattern display device 41 set by the command handling process (Sp3301), etc., the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the pattern display device 41 is specified. . After that, the process proceeds to step Sp3303.

In step Sp3303, task processing is executed. In the task processing, based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the pattern display device 41 specified by the display setting processing (Sp3302), the type of character (sprite, display object) forming the image is determined. Along with specifying, for each character (sprite), various parameters required for drawing, such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc., are determined. Then, it progresses to step Sp3304.

In step Sp3304, drawing processing is executed. In the drawing process, the types of various characters forming one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each character, which are determined by the task process (Sp3303), are transmitted to the VDP 105. FIG. The VDP 105 executes an image drawing process based on these pieces of information, and together with a drive signal to cause the pattern display device 41 to display an image drawn based on the information received during the previous V interrupt process. The image data is transmitted to the pattern display device 41 . After that, the process proceeds to step Sp3305, and after executing other processes, the V interrupt process ends. An example of specific control for executing various processes including the jackpot effect in the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

<<5-7>> Functions and effects:

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when super reach occurs (super reach/loss) in a game turn in which a winning lottery results in a loss in a character-type stage, The stage in the game round is continued, and the stage transition is not performed (see FIG. 219). Since the screen production in the game round in which Super Reach occurs is not a production in which the warrior character dies, even if the warrior character appears on the stage in the next game round, the player will not feel any discomfort. do not have.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a special reach occurs (in the case of a special reach/loss) in a game round in which a winning lottery results in a loss in a character-type stage, at the end of the game round , The stage is configured to shift from the character-type stage to the non-character-type stage (however, there are exceptions). Since the screen production in the game round in which the special reach occurs is a dead or alive production, in the game round in which the winning lottery results in a loss, the warrior character dies. For this reason, if the stage in the game round is continued and the stage transition is not performed, the player will not be able to see the moving image in which the deceased warrior character appears in the next game round as if nothing had happened. There was a possibility that I would feel a sense of incongruity when I saw it. In order to solve this problem, in the present embodiment, when a special reach occurs in a game round that is in a character-type stage and results in a loss in the winning lottery, the character-type is removed from the current character-type stage. It was configured to perform a stage transition to a non-character type stage that is not directly related to the warrior character corresponding to the stage. As a result, after the player sees the video image of the death of the warrior character in the character stage, the character stage corresponding to the dead warrior character is continued so that the dead warrior character does nothing. It is possible to prevent the feeling of discomfort such as appearing. Therefore, according to this configuration, it is possible to ensure the storylines of the effects in which the characters appear, and to improve the amusement of the game.

However, there is an exception to the configuration in which the stage is shifted from the character-type stage to the non-character-type stage when the game result of the game cycle is special reach/loss in the character-type stage. Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the game result of the game round is special reach/loss in the character stage, the hold information at the end of the game round corresponds to special reach. When there is information indicating that the game is to be played, the stage in the relevant game cycle is continued, and the stage transition is not performed (exception 1). According to the configuration of Exception 1, in the screen presentation of Special Reach, a moving image in which the warrior character dies is shown, and at the end of the game, there is a screen presentation corresponding to the character stage in which the dead warrior character appears. will be displayed. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in principle, it is in the character stage, and when the game result of the game cycle is special reach/loss, the stage transition to the non-character stage is performed. It is done, and the dead warrior character will not appear as the main character in the next game stage. Nevertheless, according to the configuration of Exception 1, the dead warrior character will appear in the stage of the next game round. Looking back, in the case of exception 1, the hold information at the end of the game cycle includes information indicating that it corresponds to special reach, so the degree of advantage (expectation of jackpot) for the player is high. expensive. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the player recognizes that the dead warrior character will appear in the next game stage as if nothing happened, the pending information is displayed after that. By recognizing the production expected to bring a favorable result when digested, it can be known that a favorable result can be expected if the dead warrior character appears in the next stage of the game cycle. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 having the configuration of Exception 1 can make the player feel a sense of anticipation that an advantageous result will come, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the game result of the game round is special reach/loss in the character-type stage, the hold information at the end of the game round is information indicating that it corresponds to super reach. is present, the transition is made to a character stage corresponding to a warrior character other than the warrior character who appeared in the production corresponding to the special reach/loss of the game round (exception 2). According to the configuration of exception 2, in the special reach screen presentation, a moving image of a warrior character dying is displayed, and at the end of the game round, it corresponds to a character stage corresponding to a warrior character other than the dead warrior character. A screen effect will be displayed. In the case of Exception 2, since the hold information at the end of the game cycle includes information indicating that it corresponds to Super Reach, the degree of advantage is relatively high for the player. For this reason, according to the pachinko machine 10, when the player acknowledges that he or she has shifted to a character-type stage corresponding to a warrior character other than the dead warrior character at the end of the game round, an advantageous result is obtained. You will have a sense of expectation that it will be. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 having the configuration of the exception 2, the player can have a sense of anticipation that a relatively advantageous result will come, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the game is in the non-character stage and the game result of the game round is super reach/loss, at the end of the game round, it corresponds to the super reach/loss of the game round. The character-based stage corresponding to the warrior character that appeared in the presentation was made (see FIG. 220). Since the screen production in the game round in which super reach occurs is not a production in which the warrior character dies, even if the warrior character appears on the stage in the next game round, the player will not feel any discomfort. do not have. For this reason, in the present embodiment, in the non-character stage, in the game round that resulted in a loss in the winning lottery, when a super reach occurs, a character corresponding to the warrior character that appeared in the production of the super reach It is configured to move to the system stage.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the game result of the game round is special reach/loss in the non-character type stage, at the end of the game round, an effect corresponding to the special reach/loss of the game round is performed. It was configured to move to a character-type stage corresponding to a warrior character other than the warrior character that appeared in (however, there are exceptions). Since the screen production in the game round in which the special reach occurs is a dead or alive production, in the game round in which the winning lottery results in a loss, the warrior character dies. For this reason, if the stage is changed to the character-based stage corresponding to the warrior character who appeared in the special reach/loss of the game round, the player will not be able to see the dead warrior character next. There was a risk that the player would feel a sense of incongruity when watching the moving image that appeared as if nothing had happened during the game. In order to solve this problem, in the present embodiment, when a special reach occurs in a non-character-type stage and a game round that results in a loss in the winning lottery, at the end of the game round, the game round It was configured to transition to a character-type stage that corresponds to a warrior character other than the warrior character that appeared in the production corresponding to the special reach/off. As a result, after the player sees the moving image in which the warrior character died on the non-character stage, the player moves to the character stage corresponding to the dead warrior character, and the dead warrior character appears to have had nothing to do with it. It is possible to prevent the feeling of discomfort such as appearing in the Therefore, according to this configuration, it is possible to ensure the storylines of the effects in which the characters appear, and to improve the amusement of the game.

However, if you are on a non-character stage and the game result of the game cycle is Special Reach/Loss, if there is information indicating that it corresponds to Special Reach in the hold information at the end of the game cycle, the relevant It was configured to transition to a character-type stage corresponding to the warrior character that appeared in the production corresponding to the special reach/miss of the game round (exception A). According to the configuration of Exception A, in the screen presentation of Special Reach, a presentation is made in which the warrior character dies, and at the end of the game cycle, a screen presentation corresponding to the character stage in which the dead warrior character appears is displayed. will be As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is basically in the non-character stage, and when the game result of the game round is special reach/loss, the special reach/loss of the game round We are transitioning to a character-type stage that corresponds to a warrior character other than the warrior character that appeared in the production corresponding to, and the dead warrior character will not appear as the main character in the next game stage. Nevertheless, according to the configuration of Exception A, the deceased warrior character will appear in the stage of the next game round. In retrospect, in the case of exception A, the hold information at the end of the game cycle includes information indicating special reach, so the degree of advantage for the player is high. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10, when the player recognizes that the deceased warrior character will appear as if nothing happened in the next game stage, when the pending information is digested after that, By recognizing the effect in which a favorable result is expected, it is possible to know that a favorable result can be expected if the dead warrior character also appears in the next stage of the game cycle. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 having the configuration of the exception A can make the player feel a sense of anticipation that an advantageous result will come, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a super reach or a special reach occurs in a game round, a screen effect (reach effect) composed of moving images with a specific warrior character as the main character is performed. However, if the game episode is on a character-type stage, the warrior character that appears as the main character in the screen production when the above Super Reach or Special Reach occurs matches the warrior character corresponding to the character-type stage. is configured to For example, when Super Reach or Special Reach occurs in a game episode in a character-type stage corresponding to Warrior Character A, the screen effect displayed during these Reach will be that Warrior Character A is the main character. . In a conventional pachinko machine that does not have such a configuration, the degree of connection between the ready-to-win effect and the set stage is low, so there is a risk that the player will feel a sense of incongruity. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the warrior character corresponding to the ready-to-win effect matches the warrior character corresponding to the character-type stage, so that the player feels uncomfortable with the effect. can be prevented. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game. It should be noted that it is sufficient if there are a plurality of pairs in which the warrior character corresponding to the reach production and the warrior character corresponding to the character stage match, and it is not necessarily the case that all the warrior characters corresponding to the reach production are the warrior characters corresponding to the character stage. It doesn't have to match the character. Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which none of the warrior characters corresponding to the ready-to-reach production and the warrior characters corresponding to the character-based stage match.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a transition from a non-character-type stage to a character-type stage is made, the character-type stage determines which of the character-type stages has been shifted to the stage corresponding to the warrior character. It is stored in the judgment value VS (see FIG. 254). Then, based on this character-type stage determination value VS, a ready-to-win effect pattern is determined when super ready-to-win or special ready-to-win occurs (see FIGS. 245 and 246). In retrospect, the transition to the character stage is executed based on the presence or absence of a big win in the winning lottery, the presence or absence of reach, and the type of reach that occurs (hereinafter, these three are collectively referred to as game results). there is For this reason, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the warrior character determination value VC is obtained based on the game result in the previous winning lottery, and a special reach for the warrior character specified from the determined warrior character determination value VC is obtained. - A production pattern for Super Reach is set. In a conventional pachinko machine that does not have such a configuration, the degree of connection between the ready-to-win effect and the game result of the previous game cycle is low, so there is a risk that the player will feel uncomfortable. On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the warrior character corresponding to the ready-to-win effect matches the warrior character specified based on the game result of the previous game round. It is possible to prevent the viewer from feeling discomfort in the production.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the transition from the non-character stage to the character stage is executed based on the hold information. For this reason, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the warrior character determination value VC is obtained based on the reservation information, and special reach/super reach effects for the warrior character specified from the determined warrior character determination value VC are provided. A pattern is set. In a conventional pachinko machine that does not have such a configuration, the degree of connection between the ready-to-win effect and the hold information is low, and thus the player may feel uncomfortable. On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the warrior character corresponding to the ready-to-win effect matches the warrior character specified based on the hold information, the player feels uncomfortable with the effect. can be prevented from feeling As a result, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment can further enhance the interest of the game.

<<5-8>> Modification of Fifth Embodiment:
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and can be implemented in various aspects without departing from the scope of the invention. For example, the following modifications are possible. In addition, in the modified example described below, description of the same configuration, processing, and effects as those of the above-described embodiment is omitted.

<<5-8-1>> Modification 1:
In the fifth embodiment, when a special reach occurs (in the case of a special reach/lost) in a game round in which the player loses in the winning lottery while in the character stage, at the end of the game round, The configuration is such that it is possible to shift from a character-type stage to a non-character-type stage (see FIG. 219). According to this configuration, the stage transition is not performed unless Special Reach occurs. Since the special reach occurs relatively infrequently, there was a problem that the stage transitions were relatively few in the case of character-type stages. On the other hand, as a modified example, when the state of the character stage continues for a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 game times) or more, the transition to the non-character stage may be forcibly performed. According to this configuration, since the transition to the non-character stage is performed after the predetermined period of time has elapsed, the interest in the game can be improved. Further, as another modified example, when the state in the character stage continues for a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 game times) or more, a lottery process for switching the stage is performed, and the lottery is won in this lottery process. It may be configured to shift to a non-character stage at times.

In addition, as another modification, when the state of the character stage continues for a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 game times) or more, the character stage shifts to a character stage with a different corresponding character. It is good also as a structure which carries out. For example, the configuration may be such that the stage in the room of the beautiful girl warrior character is shifted to the stage in the room of the young warrior character. With this configuration as well, the player can enjoy the enjoyment of transitioning between stages, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, as a configuration for shifting to a character-type stage in which the corresponding character is different in the character-type stage, when the variable display ends and the stop display is performed, the arrangement of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is predetermined. may be configured to shift to a character-type stage corresponding to the warrior character specified by the sequence when the sequence of characters is the sequence of . Specifically, it may be configured such that, when the above-described specific sequence is the reach sequence, the character-based stage corresponding to the warrior character specified by the same two symbols is entered. For example, when the patterns shown in FIG. 205 are aligned, the stage is shifted to the room of the beautiful girl warrior character. According to this configuration, it is possible to associate the row of ready-to-win symbols with the stage to which the game is to be shifted, thereby making the game more interesting.

<<5-8-2>> Modification 2:
In the above-described fifth embodiment, when the condition for transition in FIG. 220 is satisfied in a non-character type stage, the stage transition is performed, and when the condition for transition is not satisfied, the stage transition is not performed. and On the other hand, as a modification, if the conditions for transition in FIG. 220 are not satisfied, it may be configured such that the current stage is periodically transitioned to another stage within the non-character stage. For example, when the state of the non-character stage continues for a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 game times), the current stage of the countryside may be changed to the city stage. According to this configuration, every time the predetermined period of time elapses, the stage transition is made within the non-character-type stage, so it is possible to further improve the interest in the game. Note that the above-described stage transition is not limited to being performed periodically, and may be performed irregularly. For example, when the arrangement of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 becomes a predetermined arrangement when the variable display ends and the stationary display is performed, the above-described stage transition may be performed.

<<5-8-3>> Modification 3:
In the fifth embodiment, the production pattern for generating super reach (for failure or big hit) and the production pattern for special reach generation (for failure or big hit) are individual ones corresponding to each warrior character A to D. However, if it is a production pattern for generating Super Reach or a production pattern for generating Special Reach for the same warrior character, it will be the same regardless of whether the stage when Reach is generated is a character stage or a non-character stage. there were. On the other hand, as a modification, the effect pattern for generating super reach and the effect pattern for generating special reach may differ depending on whether the stage is a character stage or a non-character stage. That is, the production pattern for super reach generation in game rounds when in a non-character stage is different from the production pattern for super reach generation in game rounds when in a character stage, and a production unique to non-character stages is determined. It can be a thing. In addition, the production pattern for special reach generation in game times when on a non-character stage is different from the production pattern for special reach generation in game times when on a character stage. It can be a thing. Note that, as the production peculiar to the non-character stage, a production pattern in which the warrior character does not appear can be used. Further, as a production peculiar to the non-character stage, a production pattern in which a sub (supporting role) character that is not linked to the character stage appears can be used.

<<5-8-4>> Modification 4:
The pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment may be configured so that the player can designate a favorite warrior character from among the warrior characters A to D. FIG. Specifically, by selecting one warrior character from among warrior characters A to D on the demo screen, a preferred warrior character can be specified. In this configuration, when a favorite warrior character is specified, only the stage corresponding to the favorite warrior character is set in the character-type stages. In this case, the stage transition is performed between the character stage corresponding to the favorite warrior character and the non-character stage. According to this configuration, the player can always see his or her favorite warrior character in the character-based stage, and the player can be given a sense of satisfaction. However, according to this configuration, if you are on a non-character-type stage and the game result of the game round is special reach/miss, your favorite warrior character who died in the battle production will appear on the character-type stage after the transition. As a result, there is a possibility that the player who sees this may feel uncomfortable. In order to solve this problem, as a further modification, in the non-character type stage, when the game result of the game round is special reach / out, a character corresponding to the warrior character different from the favorite warrior character A configuration may also be adopted in which the player temporarily shifts to a system stage, and then shifts to a character system stage corresponding to a favorite warrior character after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. According to this configuration, it is possible to make many favorite warrior characters appear while ensuring the storylines of the production in which the characters appear. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game. In addition, the transition to the character-type stage corresponding to the warrior character different from the favorite warrior character is performed by specifying the warrior character specified by lottery, for example, from among the other warrior characters different from the favorite warrior character. , the character-based stage corresponding to the identified warrior character may be entered.

<<5-8-5>> Modification 5:
In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the degree of advantage for the player when reach occurs varies depending on the type of reach, and is the same even if the warrior character is different within the same reach type. On the other hand, as a modified example, in the non-character type stage, it is good to change the degree of advantage (expectation of big win) for the player based on the warrior character corresponding to the generated reach. For example, when reach for warrior character D occurs, the degree of advantage is 4.7%, when reach for warrior character C occurs, the degree of advantage is 7.9%, and reach for warrior character B occurs. The advantage may be differentiated, such as 16.6% advantage when a reach for warrior character A occurs, and 94.5% advantage when reach for warrior character A occurs. According to this configuration, since it is possible to assign superiority or inferiority to the types of warrior characters, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

<<5-8-6>> Modification 6:
In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, when the game result of the game round is special reach/loss in the character-type stage, the hold information at the end of the game round indicates that special reach is applied. When the indicated information exists, the stage in the relevant game round is continued, and the stage transition is not performed (exception 1). According to this configuration, the player will play the same character-type stage even in the game round after the game round in which the special reach/lost occurred. In addition, since there is information indicating that the reservation information corresponds to special reach, the player is defeated first by the special reach production (that is, battle production) executed when the reservation information is digested. It is possible to watch another battle by the same warrior character as the warrior character who played, and by winning, it is possible to avenge the defeat (win a jackpot). For this reason, as a modified example, when the above exception 1 occurs and the same character stage remains, the contents of the screen effect when the special reach occurs in the subsequent game round are changed first. It can also be configured to match the special reach screen effect in the game round that has become. The matching mentioned here may be a configuration that completely matches, or a configuration that matches only partially.

The MPU 62 of the main control device 60 does not store the fluctuation time of the previous game round, and the game round based on the result of the winning lottery for the current game round, the presence or absence of reach occurrence, and the value of the variation type counter CS. Since the fluctuation time is determined, the fluctuation time changes from time to time, and it is difficult to completely match the ready-to-win effect. Therefore, by combining the variable time assigned to the hold, it may be configured to secure a length close to the variable time in the game round that has previously become special reach/miss. Specifically, by pre-reading the hold information, if the fluctuation time in the game round to be executed later is shorter than the fluctuation time in the special reach/missing game round that was executed earlier, it corresponds to the special reach. For the variable time related to the hold information that was determined to be, assign the main part of the reach effect in the special reach that was executed earlier and the game turn that was missed, and it will be digested earlier than the hold information that corresponds to the special reach. The introductory portion of the ready-to-win effect is assigned to the variable time related to the hold information. The introductory part of this reach effect is divided into a plurality of parts, and according to the time that can be secured by the hold information digested earlier than the hold information corresponding to the special reach, the necessary from the divided introductory part Try to extract and allocate only the appropriate amount. Furthermore, the length of each of the divided lead-in parts can be extended by a very small amount as needed, so that the length of the presentation can be adjusted to the variable time. In addition, if there is no pending information to be digested prior to the pending information that corresponds to the special reach, only the main part of the reach production will be assigned to the variable time related to the pending information that corresponds to the special reach , and the effect pattern may be set. In addition, by pre-reading the hold information, if the fluctuation time in the game round to be executed later is longer than the fluctuation time in the game round that was previously executed special reach/miss, special reach/miss first By adding a new introduction part without features to the reach production in the game round that has become, the game round that will be executed later is It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the content of the ready-to-win effect in .

With the above configuration, it is possible to roughly match the special reach screen presentation in the game round in which the special reach occurs later with the special reach screen presentation in the game round in which the special reach is missed first. . Therefore, the player can be reminded of the performance of the battle in which he was previously defeated, and can arouse the desire to re-challenge and win. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

In addition, instead of the above configuration, the special reach screen production in the game round in which the special reach occurs later is slightly different from the special reach screen production in the game round in which the special reach is lost first. It is good also as a structure which carries out. In addition, if it can be determined from the hold information that special reach/loss occurs, the screen effect of special reach in the game round in which special reach occurs later will be changed to the special reach screen in the game round in which special reach/loss occurs first. If it can be determined that a special reach/jackpot will occur from the pending information, the screen effect of the special reach in the game round in which the special reach will occur later will be displayed first in the game round in which the special reach/off It is also possible to have a configuration that is only partially different from the special reach screen effect in .

<<5-8-7>> Modification 7:
In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, stage transition between a character-type stage and a non-character-type stage is performed at the end of a game cycle based on game results such as winning a big win in a winning lottery and occurrence of ready-to-win. , the game cycle from the next time is executed in the stage after the transition. On the other hand, as a modified example, the above-described stage transition may be performed at the start of the current game round based on the game results such as winning a big hit in the winning lottery related to the previous game round and occurrence of reach. This modification can also achieve the same effect as the fifth embodiment. In short, the transition to the stage can be made at any timing between the end of the game cycle related to the game results such as winning a big win in the winning lottery and the occurrence of ready-to-win, and the start of the next game cycle. Furthermore, the stage transition may be performed at a timing after the start of the next game cycle. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the stage transition is performed during the variation of the next game cycle described above. The middle of the change may be, for example, the timing just before the character appears in the special ready-to-win screen effect. Furthermore, as another example in which the stage transition is performed at a timing after the start of the next game round, when the game round related to the game result such as winning a jackpot in a winning lottery or the occurrence of ready-to-win is set as the starting game round, One or more games after the starting game, such as one game after the game (corresponding to the next game described above), two games, three games, etc. A stage transition may be performed at a predetermined timing (for example, at the start, at the end, etc.) of each episode. In the case of this configuration, in the game round between the starting point game round and the game round in which the stage transition is performed, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a dedicated switching effect is executed. As a dedicated switching production, for example, it may be a production in which a defeated character appears in a battle production, or a production that takes time to show what kind of stage the transition destination stage will be. Alternatively, an effect including a screen effect that allows the player to specify the stage to which the stage transition is to be made may be used.

<<5-8-8>> Modification 8:
In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, two types of production modes, a character-type stage and a non-character-type stage, are prepared, and a stage transition is performed between these two types of stages. On the other hand, as a modified example, a configuration may be adopted in which stage transition is performed between three or more types of stages including a character-type stage and a non-character-type stage. For example, the non-character stages are divided into a non-character stage for country A and a non-character stage for country B, and the mode of stage transition between the character stage and the non-character stage in the fifth embodiment. may be applied to the stage transition between the character-based stage and the non-character-based stage of Country A.

<<5-8-9>> Modification 9:
In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the screen effect (special reach screen effect) displayed when super reach occurs is composed of animations based on the daily life of warrior characters. There is no need to limit it, and it can be changed to various effects as long as it does not involve a confrontation with an enemy character. For example, a movie about growth of a warrior character from childhood to adulthood, a movie about a warrior character traveling to another country, or the like may be used.

<<5-8-10>> Modification 10:
In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the screen effect displayed when super reach occurs is limited to one in which a warrior character appears as the main character. As the screen presentation displayed when the game is played, there may be two types of screen presentation, one in which a warrior character appears as a main character (character-based screen presentation) and one in which no warrior character appears (non-character-based screen presentation). In the case of having these two types, as a condition for stage transition in the non-character type stage shown in FIG. Only when the performance corresponding to the omission is the character-based screen performance, at the end of the relevant game cycle, the transition to the character-based stage corresponding to the warrior character appearing as the main character in the character-based screen performance is made. On the other hand, if the effect corresponding to the super reach/loss of the game round is a non-character screen effect, the stage transition is not performed. According to this modified example, it is possible to increase the number of screen presentations displayed when super reach occurs, so that it is possible to further improve the amusement of the game.

<<5-8-11>> Modification 11:
In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the screen effect displayed when special reach occurs (hereinafter referred to as special reach screen effect) is a battle effect in which a warrior character and an enemy character confront each other (battle effect). It consisted of videos of On the other hand, as a modification, the special ready-to-win screen effect may be composed of moving images of games such as Go, Shogi, Renju, Othello, and Backgammon. In short, as long as the character confronts others, it does not have to involve a battle scene. Furthermore, it does not necessarily have to be a confrontation with another person, as long as it includes a scene in which the character challenges himself in some way and the results are announced to be advantageous or disadvantageous for the character (that is, for the player) , can be used as either production. For example, it may consist of a video including a scene in which an idol character attempts a singer audition and passes or fails the audition. Furthermore, it is not always necessary to announce both advantageous results and unfavorable results, and any moving image may be used as long as it includes at least a scene in which an unfavorable result is announced. Furthermore, in the screen effect displayed when a specific reach (special reach in this embodiment) occurs, when a scene in which the character performs some action or action is included, after the screen effect is displayed In the stage of , if the same character as the character who performed the action or action appears, the player will feel contradiction or discomfort. Any kind of screen effect may be displayed when it occurs.

<<5-8-12>> Modification 12:
In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, when the game result of the game cycle is special reach/loss in the character stage, the hold information at the end of the game cycle includes super reach (super reach/loss). or super reach/jackpot), when there is information indicating that it corresponds to the special reach/loss of the game round, it is configured to shift to the character stage corresponding to the warrior character other than the warrior character who appeared in the production corresponding to the special reach/loss of the game round (Exception 2). On the other hand, as a modified example, when the game result of the game cycle is special reach/loss in the character stage, the hold information at the end of the game cycle indicates that it corresponds to super reach/loss. When information exists, it is configured to shift to a character-type stage corresponding to a warrior character other than the warrior character who appeared in the production corresponding to the special reach/loss of the game round, and on the other hand, hold information at the end of the game round When there is information indicating that super reach/jackpot exists in , the stage in the game cycle may be continued and the stage transition may not be performed. According to this configuration, a battle production is performed in the game round, the dead warrior character appears as the main character in the stage of the next game round, and after that, in the game round in which the super reach occurs, the super reach production (warrior character's A performance based on everyday life) will be performed, and you will always win a jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with sudden joy. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game. Furthermore, as another modification, when the game result of a game cycle is special reach/loss in a character stage, information indicating that it corresponds to super reach/loss is included in the hold information at the end of the game cycle. If there is, it will be configured to transition to a character-type stage corresponding to the warrior character other than the warrior character that appeared in the production corresponding to the special reach/loss of the game round, and on the other hand, the pending information at the end of the game round When there is information indicating that a jackpot is won in the lottery (regardless of whether reach occurs or the reach type if reach occurs), the stage in the game round is continued and the stage transition is not performed. may be According to this configuration, a battle is performed in a game round, the dead warrior character appears as the main character in the stage of the next game round, and after that, in the game rounds in which normal reach and super reach occur, a jackpot is always won. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with sudden joy. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

<<5-8-13>> Modification 13:
In the fifth embodiment and its modification, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to include three control devices, namely the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90, and the display control device 100, but instead of this, the main control It is good also as a structure provided with two control devices, such as a device and a sub control device. The sub control device may be configured to execute various processes executed by the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 in the fifth embodiment. In addition, in the fifth embodiment and its modification, the various processes executed by each of the three control devices 60, 90, and 100 are not limited to the division described in the fifth embodiment. As a whole of 60, 90 and 100, it is sufficient that various processes in the fifth embodiment can be executed.

<<6>> Sixth Embodiment:
Next, a sixth embodiment will be described. The pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment is based on the pachinko machine of the fifth embodiment described above, with a new configuration added. The sixth embodiment will be described below by mainly describing the differences from the pachinko machine of the fifth embodiment. Note that in the sixth embodiment, descriptions of the same hardware configuration and software configuration (processing) as in the fifth embodiment will be omitted. In the sixth embodiment, the same parts as those in the fifth embodiment are given the same names and reference numerals, and the following description will be made.

<<6-1>> Electrical Configuration of Audio Light Emitting Control Device and Display Control Device:
FIG. 258 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is the same as the electrical configuration of the fifth embodiment. Since the embodiment requires a detailed explanation, the drawing of FIG. 258 is added for explanation.

The block diagram shown in FIG. 258 differs from the block diagram shown in FIG. 213 in the portion of the sound emission control board 91 provided in the sound emission control device 90 . As shown in the figure, the audio light emission control board 91 includes an MPU 92 which is an arithmetic unit that controls the entire audio light emission control device 90, and also includes an audio signal generator and a speaker 46 that drives the speaker 46 based on the generated audio signal. A sound output LSI 97 for outputting sound and an audio data ROM 98, which is a memory in which various audio data are stored, are mounted. The audio data ROM 98 is connected to a sound output LSI 97, and the sound output LSI 97 is connected to the MPU 92 via a signal line.

The sound output LSI 97 is a DSP (Digital Signal Processor) that generates sound to be reproduced based on instructions from the MPU 92 and outputs the generated sound from the speaker 46 . Specifically, when the sound output LSI 97 receives a reproduction start command from the MPU 92, the sound output LSI 97 identifies the sound to start reproduction specified by the reproduction start command, and outputs the sound data corresponding to the identified sound as the sound data. Read from ROM 98 to generate (ie, play) the sound to be played. The sound output LSI 97 then outputs the reproduced sound from the speaker 46 . When the sound output LSI 97 receives a reproduction end command from the MPU 92, the sound output LSI 97 specifies the sound whose reproduction is to be ended specified by the reproduction end command, and ends the reproduction of the specified sound.

The sound output LSI 97 has 16 audio channels, generates up to 16 sounds simultaneously, synthesizes (mixes) them, and outputs them from the speaker 46 .

<<6-2>> Background technology related to sound reproduction:
Some sounds (sounds) reproduced by the sound output LSI consist of a plurality of parts such as an intro and a melody. Sound data is recorded corresponding to each of a plurality of parts, but since the sound data is reproduced as one (without interruption), the plurality of sound data may be put together as one piece of music.

A piece of music organized in this manner may be reproduced in different modes depending on the situation, and a general sound output LSI may have such a function. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 259(a), consider the case where one piece of music is composed of an intro part and a loop part. With a piece of music organized in this way, both the intro part and the loop part are reproduced with one reproduction start command. On the other hand, in the performance of a pachinko machine, the intro part is the introduction part of the music and is played only once, but the loop part following the intro part is intended to be played repeatedly for a predetermined period. In short, with respect to the sound reproduction form of the pachinko machine, when reproducing a piece of music composed of an "intro part" and a "loop part", there is a situation where only the "loop part" is desired to be loop-reproduced.

As one form for realizing this, a reproduction start command with a setting indicating that loop reproduction is to be performed is output from the sound emission control board to the sound output LSI, and the sound output LSI side outputs the above-mentioned reproduction start command. When received, the intro part and the loop part are played first, then the playback position is returned to the beginning of the loop part (loop-in point), and the loop part from the loop-in point to the end of the loop part (loop-out point) is played. A configuration for repeated playback may also be used. With this configuration, as shown in FIG. 259(b), the "intro part" and the "loop part" are reproduced, and then only the "loop part" is loop-reproduced.

On the other hand, recent pachinko machines are expected to have a so-called interactive sound expression that can change background music and sound effects in accordance with the progress of the game. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in order to perform interactive sound expression, commands and data can be exchanged bidirectionally between the MPU 92 of the sound emission control board 91 and the sound output LSI 97. is realized. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the method of playing back the "intro part" and the "loop part" and then playing back only the "loop part" in a loop is different from the method shown in FIG. It has become. The sound reproduced by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control board 91 and the sound output LSI 97 will be described in detail below.

<<6-3>> Configuration of audio data:
FIG. 260 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the data structure of data stored in the audio data ROM. The sound data ROM 98 of this embodiment includes a character stage sound data storage area 98a for storing sound data corresponding to the content of the screen presentation of the character stage (see FIG. 214) described above, A non-character stage sound data storage area 98b is provided for storing sound data corresponding to the content of the screen presentation of the non-character stage (see FIG. 215). In addition to the two storage areas 98a and 98b, the voice data ROM 98 of the present embodiment stores sound data corresponding to the content of various effects, sound effects, and sound data such as dialogues of various characters. is provided. In this embodiment, voice data and sound data are equivalent. Sound data is also acoustic data.

In this embodiment, the audio data ROM 98 stores audio data in MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer-3) format. However, any format can be adopted as the voice data. That is, the audio data may be in a data format in which a sound waveform is sampled by a linear pulse code variation method, or may be data compressed by various audio compression methods such as MP3 and AAC (Advanced Audio Coding). good too. Also, a MIDI file conforming to the MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) standard for producing various sounds may be stored in the sound data ROM 98 as sound data. In this case, the sound output LSI 97 has a MIDI sound source, reads a MIDI file for reproducing the type of sound instructed to start reproduction from the MPU 92 from the sound data ROM 98, and makes the MIDI sound source sound according to the read MIDI file. By doing so, the sound may be reproduced.

In the example shown in FIG. 260, the character stage sound data storage area 98a stores two types of sound data related to a specific song (hereinafter referred to as song A), that is, song A first data A1 and song A. Second data A2 is stored. In this embodiment, as the music piece A, a piece of music suitable for the screen presentation of the character stage is selected.

In the non-character stage sound data storage area 98b, there are two types of sound data related to a specific song (hereinafter referred to as song B) different from song A, that is, song B first data B1 and song B second data. Data B2 is stored. In this embodiment, as the music piece B, a piece of music suitable for the screen presentation of the non-character stage is selected.

FIG. 261 is an explanatory diagram showing each configuration of the music A first data A1 and the music A second data A2. FIG. 261(a) shows the structure of music A first data A1, and FIG. 261(b) shows the structure of music A second data A2.

As shown in FIG. 261(a), music A first data A1 consists of music A first data_intro part A11, music A first data_major part A12, music A first data_reverberation part A13. consists of three parts. The three portions A11 to A13 are continuous in this order. That is, the three parts A11 to A13 are grouped so as to be reproduced continuously in this order. In other words, the song A first data_main part A12 is continuous with the song A first data_intro part A11 in the playback time axis direction, and the song A first data_reverberation part A13 is continuous with the song A first data_reverberation part A13. It is continuous in the playback time axis direction with respect to 1 data_major part A12.

In the song A recorded in the song A first data A1, there is an intro part (prelude part or introductory part) at the beginning, a melody part following the intro part, and an end part ( There is an aftertaste). The song A first data_intro part A11 records the intro part, the song A first data_main part A12 records the melody part, and the song A first data_reverberation part A13 records the reverberation. part is recorded. The melody part has a length of, for example, 4 bars, 8 bars, or the like.

The reverberation part will be further explained. If, for example, an orchestral piece is adopted as the piece of music A, the sounds of stringed instruments and percussion instruments leave a relatively long reverberation. For this reason, at the end of the melody part, it is possible that the long reverberation of string instruments, percussion instruments, etc. does not end. In the present embodiment, by providing the song A first data_reverberation part A13 continuously at the end of the song A first data_main part A12, it is possible to reproduce relatively long reverberations of stringed instruments, percussion instruments, and the like. Note that the music piece A first data_reverberation part A13 does not necessarily include the reverberation of the sound of a stringed instrument or a percussion instrument. Also good. Here, the sound accompanying the melody part is a sound that does not make the player feel uncomfortable when the sound of the data recorded in the music A first data_reverberation part A13 is switched from the sound of the melody part. It means the sound that accompanies the melody part. Also, the sound accompanying the melody part can be said to be the sound following the sound of the last sound data of the melody part. Furthermore, the song A first data_reverberation part A13 can be a part for recording a sound independent of the song A first data_main part A12. Note that the data length of the music piece A first data_reverberation part A13 is determined experimentally or by simulation so as to have a length that at least exceeds the delay period Δt described later during reproduction.

As shown in FIG. 261(b), the song A second data A2 is composed of two parts: song A second data_main part A21 and song A second data_reverberation part A22. The two portions A21 and A22 are continuous in this order. That is, the two parts A21 and A22 are grouped so as to be reproduced continuously in this order. In other words, the song A second data_reverberation part A22 is continuous with the song A second data_main part A21 in the playback time axis direction. The song A second data_major part A21 is the same data as the song A first data_major part A12. Music A second data_reverberation part A22 is the same data as music A first data_reverberation part A13. That is, the song A second data A2 is different from the song A first data A1 in that it does not include an intro part, and is the part of the song A first data A1 excluding the intro part (song A first data_ It matches the main part A12 and the song A first data_reverberation part A13).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, both the above-described music A first data A1 and music A second data A2 are used when reproducing music A composed of an intro part and a loop part on a character stage. A specific procedure for reproduction using both data A1 and A2 will be described later in detail.

FIG. 262 is an explanatory diagram showing each configuration of the music B first data B1 and the music B second data B2. FIG. 262(a) shows the structure of music B first data B1, and FIG. 262(b) shows the structure of music B second data B2.

As shown in FIG. 262(a), music B first data B1 includes music B first data_intro part B11, music B first data_major part B12, music B first data_reverberation part B13. consists of three parts. That is, in the same way as the music A first data A1 (FIG. 261(a)), the music B first data B1 contains the music B first data_intro part B11 in which the intro part of the music is recorded, and the melody of the music. Music B first data_main part B12 in which a part is recorded, and music B first data_reverberation part B13 in which a reverberation part of the music is recorded. Note that the data length of the song B first data_reverberation part B13 is determined experimentally or through simulation so that it can exceed at least a delay period Δt, which will be described later, during reproduction.

As shown in FIG. 262(b), the song B second data B2 is composed of two parts: song B second data_main part B21 and song B second data_reverberation part B22. In other words, the second music B data B2 includes, in the same way as the second music B data B1 (FIG. 261(b)), the second music B data_major part B21 in which the melody part of the music is recorded, and the reverberation of the music. A song B second data_reverberation part B22 in which a part is recorded is provided.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, both the above-described music B first data B1 and music B second data B2 are used when reproducing the music B composed of the intro part and the loop part on the non-character stage. . A specific procedure for reproduction using both data B1 and B2 will be described later in detail.

<<6-4>> Outline of Processing by Gaming Machine:
Next, an overview of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described.

FIG. 263 is a timing chart showing a reproduction procedure for music A in the sound output LSI 97. FIG. 263 shows, in the sound output LSI 97, the music A first data A1 reproduced on the audio channel 1, the music A second data A2 repeatedly reproduced on the audio channel 1, and the performance obtained as a result of these reproductions. The contents of the form are shown.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the background images of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are character-type stages, the sound output LSI 97 reproduces the music piece A in the following procedure. At the time of transition to the character stage, first, the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 (refer to FIG. 258, hereinafter referred to as the “sound and light side MPU 92”) issues the music A first data reproduction start command to the sound output LSI 97. CA1 is transmitted (time t1). The music piece A first data reproduction start command CA1 is a command for starting reproduction of the music piece A first data A1 as a reproduction target. th audio channel (hereinafter referred to as "audio channel 1"). It should be noted that it is not necessary to be limited to the first audio channel, and any audio channel can be used as long as it is another one specific audio channel.

When the sound output LSI 97 receives the music A first data reproduction start command CA1 from the sound and light side MPU 92, it reproduces the music A first data reproduction on the audio channel 1 designated by the music A first data reproduction start command CA1. The process of reproducing the music piece A first data A1 specified by the start command CA1 is started. More specifically, when the sound output LSI 97 receives the music A first data reproduction start command CA1, the sound output LSI 97 selects the music A number to be reproduced specified by the music A first data reproduction start command CA1 from the audio data ROM 98. 1 data A1 is specified, the specified music A first data A1 is read out sequentially from the beginning, and the sound based on the read music A first data A1 is reproduced on the audio channel 1 specified by the music A first data reproduction start command CA1. , sequentially generate (that is, reproduce). Then, the sound output LSI 97 sequentially outputs the generated sounds from the speaker 46 . Thus, in the audio channel 1, the music A first data A1 starts generating and outputting the sound from the beginning of the music A first data_intro portion A11, and the sound is generated toward the end of the music A first data A1. and output follows. In the sound output LSI 97, a predetermined period of delay occurs (this period Δt is hereinafter also referred to as “delay period Δt”). The main cause of the delay is that, from the audio data ROM 98, the music A first data A1 to be reproduced specified by the music A first data reproduction start command CA1 is specified, and the identified music A first data This is because it takes a considerable amount of time to read the beginning of A1. That is, after the delay period Δt has passed (time t1+Δt) from the timing (time t1) when the sound output LSI 97 received the music A first data reproduction start command CA1, the music A first data A1 is reproduced from the speaker 46. Output. Also in the example shown in FIG. 259, a delay of the delay period occurs from the timing of receiving the reproduction start command, but FIG.

Returning to FIG. 263, the sound and light side MPU 92 causes the sound output LSI 97 to In response, a music A second data reproduction start command CA2 is transmitted. The music A second data reproduction command CA2 is a command for starting reproduction of the music A second data A2 as a reproduction target, and includes a setting of audio channel 1 as the audio channel to be reproduced.

In this embodiment, the sound output LSI 97 is configured to be able to sequentially grasp the reproduction position of the data being reproduced, that is, the position of the generated sound in the data being reproduced. By communicating with the MPU 92 (sound and light side MPU 92) of the sound emission control device 90, it is possible to inform the sound and light side MPU 92 of the reproduction position of the data being reproduced. The sound and light side MPU 92 determines whether or not the reproduction position reaches the end of the main part A12 of the music A first data_major part A12 based on the reproduction position of the data being reproduced received from the sound output LSI 97. . In addition, instead of this configuration, a configuration in which the arrival time until the playback position reaches the end of the main part A12 of the music A first data_major part A12 is stored in advance on the sound emission control device 90 side. A configuration may be employed in which it is determined whether or not the playback position reaches the end of the music A first data_major part A12 based on whether or not the time has reached the arrival time.

When the sound output LSI 97 receives the music A second data reproduction start command CA2 from the sound and light side MPU 92, it starts reproducing the music A second data on the audio channel 1 specified by the music A second data reproduction start command CA2. The process of reproducing the music piece A second data A2 specified by the command CA2 is started. More specifically, when the sound output LSI 97 receives the song A second data reproduction start command CA2, the sound output LSI 97 selects the song A to be played back specified by the song A second data reproduction start command CA2 from the audio data ROM 98. 2 data A2 is specified, the specified song A second data A2 is sequentially read from the beginning, and the sound based on the read song A second data A2 is reproduced on the audio channel 1 specified by the song A second data reproduction start command CA2. , sequentially generate (that is, reproduce). It should be noted that until immediately before the sound based on the music A second data A2 is generated, the sound based on the music A first data A1 is generated, and the generated sound is changed from the sound based on the music A first data A1. The sound is switched to that based on the music A second data A2. Then, the sound output LSI 97 sequentially outputs sounds based on the generated music A second data A2 from the speaker 46 . Thus, in audio channel 1, the music A second data A2 starts generating and outputting sound from the beginning of the music A second data_major part A21, and generates sound toward the end of the music A second data A2. and output follows.

In the sound output LSI 97, there is a delay of Δt from the timing (time t2) when the music A second data reproduction start command CA2 is received until the sound of the music A second data A2 is generated (that is, reproduced). occurs. The main cause of the delay is that the music A second data A2 to be reproduced specified by the music A second data reproduction start command CA2 is specified from the audio data ROM 98, and the specified music A second data This is because it takes a considerable amount of time to read the beginning of A2. That is, after the delay period Δt has passed (time t2+Δt) from the timing (time t2) at which the sound output LSI 97 received the music A second data reproduction start command CA2, the sound of the music A second data A2 is reproduced and output to the speaker. Output from 46. During the delay period Δt, the sound of the song A first data_reverberation part A13 continuing to the end of the song A first data_main part A12 is continuously generated. The sound to be played is switched to the sound of the music A second data A2.

After that, at the timing when the reproduction position of the music A second data A2 on the audio channel 1 reaches the end of the music A second data_major part A21 (time t3), the sound output LSI 97 The song A second data reproduction start command CA2 is sent again. The music A second data reproduction start command CA2 is the same as the music A second data reproduction start command CA2 transmitted at time t2, and is an instruction for starting reproduction of the music A second data A2 on the audio channel 1 again. is. In addition, in order to distinguish the music A second data reproduction start command CA2 received at time t3 from the first music A second data reproduction start command CA2, the second music A second data reproduction start command CA2 is executed as necessary. Call it command CA2. Whether or not the playback position reaches the end of the music A second data_major part A21 is determined based on the playback position of the data being played received from the sound output LSI 97 . In addition, instead of this configuration, a configuration in which the arrival time until the playback position reaches the end of the main part A21 of the music A second data_major part A21 is stored in advance on the sound emission control device 90 side. It may be determined whether or not the playback position reaches the end of the music A second data_major portion A21 based on whether or not the time has reached the arrival time.

When the sound output LSI 97 receives the second song A second data reproduction start command CA2 from the sound and light side MPU 92, the sound output LSI 97 reproduces the song A second data reproduction start command CA2 specified by the second song A second data reproduction start command CA2. 2 Start reproducing data A2. Specifically, when the sound output LSI 97 receives the second song A second data reproduction start command CA2, the sound output LSI 97 stores the sound data designated by the second song A second data reproduction start command CA2 from the audio data ROM 98. Identify the music A second data A2 to be played back (hereinafter also referred to as the second music A second data A2), read the identified second music A second data A2 sequentially from the beginning, and read out the music A The sounds based on the second data A2 are sequentially generated (that is, reproduced) as the audio channel 1 . Note that, until immediately before the sound based on the second music A second data A2 is generated, the sound based on the first music A first data A1 is generated, and the generated sound is the first music The sound based on the A first data A1 is switched to the sound based on the second song A second data A2. Then, the sound output LSI 97 sequentially outputs sounds based on the generated music A second data A2 from the speaker 46 . Thus, in the audio channel 1, the second music A second data A2 starts generating and outputting sound from the beginning of the music A second data_intro part A21, and the second music A second data A2 ends. followed by sound generation and output.

Note that the sound output LSI 97 receives the second music A second data reproduction start command CA2 (time t3) until it generates (that is, reproduces) the sound of the second music A second data A2. , a delay of a delay period Δt occurs. The main cause of the delay is the same as the delay after time t2. That is, after the delay period Δt has passed (time t3+Δt) from the timing (time t3) when the sound output LSI 97 received the second music A second data reproduction start command CA2, the second music A second data A2 is reproduced. The sound is reproduced and output from the speaker 46. - 特許庁In the delay period Δt following time t3, the sound of the song A second data_reverberation part A22 continuing to the end of the song A second data_main part A21 of the first song A second data A2 continues. When the delay period Δt elapses, the generated sound switches to the sound of the second music piece A second data A2. In this way, the music piece A second data A2 is played repeatedly.

As described above, the loop reproduction of the melody part of the music A is realized by repeatedly reproducing the music A second data A2 after the music A first data A1 is reproduced. This loop reproduction is performed until the character stage ends. At the end of the character stage, the sound and light side MPU 92 transmits a music A second data reproduction end command to the sound output LSI 97, and the sound output LSI 97 receives the music A second data reproduction end command from the sound and light side MPU 92. , the loop reproduction of the music piece A second data A2 ends.

In the above description, in the sound output LSI 97, the delay period that occurs from the timing (time t1) when the music A first data reproduction start command CA1 is received until the sound is reproduced, and the first music A second data A delay period that occurs from the timing (time t2) when the reproduction start command CA2 is received until the sound is reproduced, and the sound is reproduced from the timing (time t3) when the second song A second data reproduction start command CA2 is received. Although the delay periods that occur up to and after are shown as the same Δt, these delay periods Δt are not necessarily of the same time length. Although the delay period Δt may have different lengths depending on the length of data to be reproduced, etc., in the present embodiment, the delay period is shown as Δt assuming that it has the same temporal length for the sake of convenience.

FIG. 264 is a timing chart showing a reproduction procedure for music B in the sound output LSI 97. FIG. FIG. 264 shows the music B first data B1 reproduced on the audio channel 1, the music B second data B2 repeatedly reproduced on the audio channel 1 in the sound output LSI 97, and the performance obtained as a result of these reproductions. The contents of the form are shown.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the background image is a non-character stage, the sound output LSI 97 reproduces the music piece B according to the procedure shown in FIG.

The contents of FIG. 264 are similar to those of FIG. The content of FIG. 264 differs from the content of FIG. 263 only in that the description of "music A" is replaced with the description of "music B". That is, "song A first data A1" is replaced with "song B first data B1", "song A second data A2" is replaced with "song B second data B2", and "song A first data reproduction start Command CA1" is replaced with "music B first data reproduction start command CB1", and "music A second data reproduction start command CA2" is replaced with "music B second data reproduction start command CB2". The timing at which the music B first data reproduction start command CB1 and the music B second data reproduction start command CB2 are output is the timing at which the music A first data data reproduction start command CA1 and the music A second data reproduction start command CA2 are output. are the same as the timing of Also, a delay of Δt occurs from the timing (time t1) when the music B first data reproduction start command CB1 is received until the sound of the music B first data B1 is actually output from the speaker 46. From the timing (time t2, t3) when the second data reproduction start command CB2 is received until the sound of the song B second data B2 is actually output from the speaker 46, the delay of the delay period Δt occurs as shown in FIG. are identical.

As shown in the figure, the loop reproduction of the melody portion of the music B is realized by reproducing the music B first data B1 and then repeatedly reproducing the music B second data B2. This loop reproduction is performed until the non-character stage ends. At the end of the non-character stage, the sound and light side MPU 92 transmits a music B second data reproduction end command to the sound output LSI 97, and the sound output LSI 97 receives the music B second data reproduction end command from the sound and light side MPU 92. Then, the loop reproduction of the song B second data B2 ends.

Let us return to the playback of the music piece A on the character stage shown in FIG. 263 . According to the configuration shown in FIG. 263, the loop reproduction of the melody part of the music piece A is realized by repeatedly reproducing the music piece A second data A2 after the music piece A first data A1 is reproduced. After the end sound of the music A first data_major part A12 of the A first data A1 is output from the speaker 46 (time t2), the beginning of the music A second data_major part A21 of the music A second data A2 is output from the speaker 46, a delay of a delay period .DELTA.t occurs. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the music A first data A1 is configured to include music A first data_reverberation part A13 that is continuous in the time axis direction with respect to music A first data_main part A12. Then, in the delay period Δt, the sound of music A first data_reverberation part A13 is output. Therefore, the sound is not interrupted between the melody part of the music A and the melody part of the music A when repeated (that is, the delay period Δt).

Next, this embodiment will be compared with a reference example. FIG. 265 is an explanatory diagram showing the structure of data and the form of performance of music A in the reference example. FIG. 265(a) shows the configuration of reference example music A first data X1, and FIG. 265(b) shows the configuration of reference example music A second data X2. FIG. 265(b) shows a performance form obtained by both data X1 and X2.

In the reference example, reference example music A first data X1 and reference example music A second data X2 are stored in the audio data ROM. Reference example song A first data X1 corresponds to song A first data A1 (FIG. 261) in this embodiment, and includes song A first data_intro part X11 and song A first data_main part X12. consists of two parts. The song A first data_intro part X11 is the same data as the song A first data_intro part A11 in this embodiment. The song A first data_major part X12 is the same data as the song A first data_major part A12 in this embodiment. That is, the reference example music piece A first data X1 does not have the music piece A first data_reverberation part A13 in comparison with the music piece A first data A1 in the present embodiment.

The second music piece A data X2 for reference example corresponds to the second music piece A data A2 (FIG. 261) in this embodiment, and is composed of the second music piece A data_main part X21. The song A second data_major part X21 is the same data as the song A second data_major part A21 in this embodiment. That is, the second music piece A data X2 for reference example does not have the second music piece A data_reverberation part A22 compared to the second music piece A data A2 in the present embodiment.

As in the present embodiment, consider a case where the second music data X2 is reproduced after the first music data X1 is reproduced. As in the present embodiment, the sound and light side MPU outputs the reference example song to the sound output LSI at the timing when the playback position of the song A first data X1 reaches the end of the song A first data_major portion X12. A second data reproduction start command is transmitted. According to this configuration, a delay of Δt occurs from the timing when the reference example song A second data reproduction start command is received until the sound of song A second data_major part X21 is actually output from the speaker 46. do. Since the music piece A first data X1 for reference example does not have a reverberation part that continues to the music piece A first data_major part X12, there is no sound during the delay period Δt. Although the delay period Δt is relatively short, such as several tens of milliseconds, the player can easily notice that the BGM is interrupted due to silence, and cannot ignore it.

On the other hand, the music A first data A1 in the present embodiment includes the music A first data_main part A12 and the music A first data_reverberation part A13. , in the delay period Δt between the melody parts of the music A and the melody part of the music A, the sound of the music A first data_reverberation part A13 is output, and the sound is not interrupted. Therefore, the player does not feel a sense of incongruity that the sound is interrupted in the BGM in the character stage. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the sound is similarly not interrupted during the delay period Δt when the music A second data A2 is repeatedly reproduced.

Also, in the delay period Δt in the case of repeatedly reproducing the music B second data A2 after the music B first data A1 is reproduced, and in the delay period Δt in the case of repeatedly reproducing the music B second data B2, the sound is uninterrupted. For this reason, the player does not feel a sense of incongruity that the sound is interrupted even in the BGM on the non-character stage.

<<6-5>> Various processes executed in the sound emission control device:
Next, an example of specific processing executed in the sound emission control device 90 will be described. Note that the processing executed by the main control device 60 and the processing executed by the display control device 100 are the same as those in the fifth embodiment, and thus description thereof will be omitted in this embodiment.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 266 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 (hereinafter referred to as the sound/light side MPU 92). Timer interrupt processing is repeatedly executed at a relatively short period (for example, 2 msec). This timer interrupt process is mostly the same as the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 237) executed in the sound and light side MPU 92 in the fifth embodiment, with only some differences. Specifically, steps Sq0101 and Sq0102 of this timer interrupt process are the same as steps Sp1701 and Sp1702 of the timer interrupt process in the fifth embodiment. Step Sq0103 following step Sq0102 of this timer interrupt process is a newly added step. Steps Sq0104 to Sq0110 of this timer interrupt process are the same as steps Sp1703 to Sp1709 of the timer interrupt process in the fifth embodiment.

In step Sq0103, BGM processing is executed. In the BGM processing, processing such as setting and reproduction of music for BGM is performed. Details of the BGM processing will be described later. After executing step Sq0103, the process proceeds to step Sq0104.

<Processing for BGM>
Next, BGM processing will be described. The BGM process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 266: Sq0103).

FIG. 267 is a flowchart showing BGM processing. In step Sq0201, BGM reproduction start processing is executed. In the BGM reproduction start process, when transitioning from a non-character stage to a character stage, or when transitioning from a character stage to a non-character stage, music A first data A1 or A process for instructing the start of reproduction of the music piece B first data B1 is executed. Details of the BGM reproduction start process will be described later. After executing step Sq0201, the process proceeds to step Sq0202.

In step Sq0202, BGM continuous reproduction processing is executed. In the BGM continuous reproduction, a process of repeatedly instructing the sound output LSI 97 to start reproducing the music A second data A2 or the music B second data B2 is executed. Details of the BGM continuous reproduction process will be described later. After step Sq0202 is executed, this BGM processing is terminated.

<BGM playback start processing>
Next, BGM reproduction start processing will be described. The BGM reproduction start process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the BGM process (FIG. 267: Sq0201).

FIG. 268 is a flowchart showing BGM reproduction start processing. In step Sq0301, it is determined whether or not it is the first execution from when the power switch 88 is switched from the off state to the on state (when the power is turned on). If it is determined in step Sq0301 that it is the first execution after power-on (Sq0301: YES), the process proceeds to step Sq0302.

In step Sq 0302 , a music piece B first data reproduction start command CB 1 is transmitted to the sound output LSI 97 . The music B first data reproduction start command CB1 is a command for starting reproduction of the music B first data B1 as a reproduction target, and includes a setting of audio channel 1 as the audio channel to be reproduced. After executing step Sq0302, the process proceeds to step Sq0303.

In step Sq0303, the old character stage determination value XVS is set to 0, which means that it is a non-character stage. The old character-related stage determination value XVS is a value for indicating the value of the character-related stage determination value VS at the time before this BGM reproduction start process was executed. As described in the fifth embodiment, the character-type stage determination value VS is a value for determining whether the stage is a character-type stage or a non-character-type stage. It means being on a stage, and if it is not 1 (=0), it means being on a non-character stage. After step Sq0303 is executed, this BGM reproduction start process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sq0301 that it is not the first execution after power-on (Sq0301: NO), the process proceeds to step Sq0304.

In step Sq0304, it is determined whether or not the character-related stage determination value VS matches the old character-related stage determination value XVS. According to this determination processing, it is determined whether or not the value of the character-related stage determination value VS has changed during the transition from the previous execution of the BGM reproduction start processing to the current execution. If it is determined in step Sq0304 that the character-type stage determination value VS matches the old character-type stage determination value XVS, that is, if it is determined that the value of the character-type stage determination value VS does not change, (Sq0304: YES), this BGM reproduction start process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sq0304 that the character-type stage determination value VS does not match the old character-type stage determination value XVS, that is, if it is determined that the value of the character-type stage determination value VS has changed. (Sq0304: NO), proceed to step Sq0305.

In step Sq0305, it is determined whether or not the character stage determination value VS is 1. In step Sq0305, if the character stage determination value VS is 1, that is, if it is determined that the current stage is the character stage (Sq0305: YES), the process proceeds to step Sq0306.

In step Sq 0306 , the music A first data reproduction start command CA 1 is transmitted to the sound output LSI 97 . The music A first data reproduction start command CA1 is a command for starting reproduction of the music A first data A1 as a reproduction target, and includes a setting of audio channel 1 as the audio channel to be reproduced. After executing step Sq0306, the process proceeds to step Sq0307.

In step Sq0307, processing is performed to transfer the value of the character-related stage determination value VS to the old character-related stage determination value XVS. After step Sq0307 is executed, this BGM reproduction start process ends.

In step Sq0305, if the character stage determination value VS is not 1, that is, if it is determined that the current stage is a non-character stage (Sq0305: NO), the process proceeds to step Sq0308.

In step Sq0308, a music B first data reproduction start command CB1 is transmitted to the sound output LSI 97. FIG. The music B first data reproduction start command CB1 is a command for starting reproduction of the music B first data B1 as a reproduction target, and includes a setting of audio channel 1 as the audio channel to be reproduced. This step Sq0308 is the same as the processing of step Sq0302. After executing step Sq0302, the process advances to step Sq0307 to transfer the value of the character-related stage determination value VS to the old character-related stage determination value XVS, and then terminates this BGM reproduction start processing.

<BGM continuous playback processing>
Next, BGM continuous reproduction processing will be described. The BGM continuous reproduction process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a BGM process subroutine (FIG. 267: Sq0202).

FIG. 269 is a flowchart showing BGM continuous reproduction processing. In step Sq0401, it is determined whether or not music A first data A1 is reproduced on audio channel 1 and the reproduction position reaches the end of music A first data_major portion A12. This determination is made by receiving information indicating the type of data being reproduced and information indicating the reproduction position of the data being reproduced from the sound output LSI 97, and based on these information, determining whether or not the music piece A is played on the audio channel 1. 1 data A1 is reproduced, and it is determined whether or not the reproduction position reaches the end of music A first data_major portion A12. In addition, instead of this configuration, the audio light emission control device 90 may be configured to store in advance the arrival time until the playback position reaches the end of the main part A12 of the music piece A first data_main part A12. The determination may be made according to the type of command and whether or not the time from the start of reproduction has reached the arrival time. If it is determined in step Sq0401 that the music A first data A1 is being reproduced on the audio channel 1 and the reproduction position is at the timing when it reaches the end of the music A first data_major part A12 (Sq0401 : YES), proceed to step Sq0402.

In step Sq 0402 , a music A second data reproduction start command CA 2 is transmitted to the sound output LSI 97 . The music A second data reproduction start command CA2 is a command for starting reproduction of the music A second data A2 as a reproduction target, and includes a setting of audio channel 1 as the audio channel to be reproduced. After executing step Sq0402, the process proceeds to step Sq0403.

On the other hand, in step Sq0401, if the music A first data A1 is not being reproduced on the audio channel 1, or if the music A first data A1 is being reproduced on the audio channel 1 and the reproduction position is the music A first data_key If it is determined that it is not time to reach the end of part A12 (Sq0401: NO), the process proceeds to step Sq0403 without executing step Sq0402.

In step Sq0403, it is determined whether or not music B first data B1 is reproduced on audio channel 1 and the reproduction position reaches the end of music B first data_major portion B12. This determination is made by receiving information indicating the type of data being reproduced and information indicating the reproduction position of the data being reproduced from the sound output LSI 97, and based on these information, selecting the music piece B in audio channel 1. 1 data B1 is reproduced, and it is determined whether or not the reproduction position reaches the end of music B first data_major portion B12. In addition, instead of this configuration, the audio light emission control device 90 may store in advance the arrival time until the playback position reaches the end of the music piece B first data_major portion B12. The determination may be made according to the type of command and whether or not the time from the start of reproduction has reached the arrival time. If it is determined in step Sq0403 that the music B first data B1 is reproduced on the audio channel 1 and the reproduction position reaches the end of the music B first data_major portion B12 (Sq0403 : YES), proceed to step Sq0404.

In step Sq 0404 , a music B second data reproduction start command CB 2 is transmitted to the sound output LSI 97 . The music B second data reproduction start command CB2 is a command for starting reproduction of the music B second data B2 as a reproduction target, and includes a setting of audio channel 1 as the audio channel to be reproduced. After executing step Sq0404, the process proceeds to step Sq0405.

On the other hand, in step Sq0403, if the music B first data B1 is not being reproduced on the audio channel 1, or if the music B first data B1 is being reproduced on the audio channel 1 and the reproduction position is the music B first data_key If it is determined that it is not time to reach the end of part B12 (Sq0403: NO), the process proceeds to step Sq0405 without executing step Sq0404.

In step Sq0405, it is determined whether or not the music A second data A2 is reproduced on the audio channel 1 and the reproduction position reaches the end of the music A second data_major part A21. This determination is made by receiving information indicating the type of data being reproduced and information indicating the reproduction position of the data being reproduced from the sound output LSI 97, and based on these information, determining whether or not the music piece A is played on the audio channel 1. It is determined whether or not the second data A2 is reproduced and the reproduction position reaches the end of the music A second data_major part A21. In addition, instead of this configuration, the sound emission control device 90 may store in advance the arrival time until the playback position reaches the end of the music A second data_major part A21. The determination may be made according to the type of command and whether or not the time from the start of reproduction has reached the arrival time. If it is determined in step Sq0405 that the music A second data A2 is being reproduced on the audio channel 1 and the reproduction position is at the timing when it reaches the end of the music A second data_major part A21 (Sq0405 : YES), proceed to step Sq0406.

In step Sq 0406 , the music A second data reproduction start command CA 2 is transmitted to the sound output LSI 97 . The music A second data reproduction start command CA2 is a command for starting reproduction of the music A second data A2 as a reproduction target, and includes a setting of audio channel 1 as the audio channel to be reproduced. The processing of step Sq0406 is the same as the processing of step Sq0402. After executing step Sq0406, the process proceeds to step Sq0407.

On the other hand, in step Sq0405, if the music A second data A2 is not being reproduced on the audio channel 1, or if the music A second data A2 is being reproduced on the audio channel 1 and the reproduction position is the music A second data_key If it is determined that it is not time to reach the end of part A21 (Sq0405: NO), the process proceeds to step Sq0407 without executing step Sq0406.

In step Sq0407, it is determined whether or not the music B second data B2 is reproduced on the audio channel 1 and the reproduction position reaches the end of the music B second data_major part B21. This determination is made by receiving information indicating the type of data being reproduced and information indicating the reproduction position of the data being reproduced from the sound output LSI 97, and based on these information, selecting the music piece B in audio channel 1. 2 data B2 is reproduced, and it is determined whether or not the reproduction position reaches the end of the music B second data_major part B21. In addition, instead of this configuration, the audio light emission control device 90 may store in advance the arrival time until the playback position reaches the end of the music B second data_major part B21. The determination may be made according to the type of command and whether or not the time from the start of reproduction has reached the arrival time. If it is determined in step Sq0407 that the music B second data B2 is reproduced on the audio channel 1 and that the reproduction position reaches the end of the music B second data_major portion B21 (Sq0407 : YES), proceed to step Sq0408.

In step Sq 0408 , a music B second data reproduction start command CB 2 is transmitted to the sound output LSI 97 . The music B second data reproduction start command CB2 is a command for starting reproduction of the music B second data B2 as a reproduction target, and includes a setting of audio channel 1 as the audio channel to be reproduced. The processing of step Sq0408 is the same as the processing of step Sq0404. After step Sq0408 is executed, this BGM continuous reproduction process ends.

On the other hand, in step Sq0407, if the music B second data B2 is not being reproduced on the audio channel 1, or if the music B second data B2 is being reproduced on the audio channel 1 and the reproduction position is the music B second data_key If it is determined that it is not time to reach the end of part B21 (Sq0407: NO), this BGM continuous reproduction process ends without executing step Sq0408.

<<6-6>> Processing Executed in Sound Output LSI:
Next, an example of specific processing executed in the sound output LSI 97 will be described.

<Reproduction start execution processing>
FIG. 270 is a flow chart showing a reproduction start execution process executed in the sound output LSI 97. FIG. The reproduction start execution process is repeatedly executed at a relatively short period (for example, 2 msec).

In step Sq0501, it is determined whether or not the song A first data reproduction start command CA1 has been received. If it is determined in step Sq0501 that the song A first data reproduction start command CA1 has been received (Sq0501: YES), the process proceeds to step Sq0502.

In step Sq0502, the music A first data A1 to be reproduced, which is specified by the music A first data reproduction start command CA1, is reproduced on the audio channel 1 designated by the received music A first data reproduction start command CA1. to start. More specifically, the sound output LSI 97 identifies, from the audio data ROM 98, the music piece A first data A1 to be reproduced, which is specified by the music piece A first data reproduction start command CA1. are sequentially read from the beginning, and sounds based on the read music A first data A1 are sequentially generated (that is, reproduced) in the audio channel 1 designated by the music A first data reproduction start command CA1. Then, the sound output LSI 97 sequentially outputs the generated sounds from the speaker 46 . Thus, in the audio channel 1, the music A first data A1 starts generating and outputting the sound from the beginning of the music A first data_intro portion A11, and the sound is generated toward the end of the music A first data A1. and output follows. Note that in the sound output LSI 97, a delay of Δt occurs from the timing when the music A first data reproduction start command CA1 is received until the sound of the music A first data A1 is generated (that is, reproduced). The main cause of the delay is that, from the audio data ROM 98, the music A first data A1 to be reproduced specified by the music A first data reproduction start command CA1 is specified, and the identified music A first data This is because it takes a considerable amount of time to read the beginning of A1. That is, after the delay period Δt has passed (time t1+Δt) from the timing when the sound output LSI 97 received the music A first data reproduction start command CA1 (time t1 in FIG. 263), the sound of music A first data A1 is reproduced. and output from the speaker 46. After executing step Sq0502, the process proceeds to step Sq0503.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sq0501 that the song A first data reproduction start command CA1 has not been received (Sq0501: NO), the process proceeds to step Sq0503 without executing step Sq0502.

In step Sq0503, it is determined whether or not the song B first data reproduction start command CB1 has been received. If it is determined in step Sq0503 that the song B first data reproduction start command CB1 has been received (Sq0503: YES), the process proceeds to step Sq0504.

In step Sq0504, the music B first data B1 to be played specified by the music B first data reproduction start command CB1 is reproduced on the audio channel 1 specified by the received music B first data reproduction start command CB1. to start. More specifically, the sound output LSI 97 identifies the music piece B first data B1 to be reproduced, which is specified by the music piece B first data reproduction start command CB1, from the audio data ROM 98. are sequentially read from the beginning, and sounds based on the read music B first data B1 are sequentially generated (that is, reproduced) in the audio channel 1 designated by the music B first data reproduction start command CB1. Then, the sound output LSI 97 sequentially outputs the generated sounds from the speaker 46 . Thus, in the audio channel 1, the music B first data B1 starts generating and outputting the sound from the beginning of the music B first data_intro part B11, and the sound is generated toward the end of the music B first data B1. and output follows. In the sound output LSI 97, a delay of Δt occurs from the timing when the music B first data reproduction start command CB1 is received until the sound of the music B first data B1 is generated (that is, reproduced). That is, after the delay period Δt has passed (time t1+Δt) from the timing when the sound output LSI 97 received the music B first data reproduction start command CB1 (time t1 in FIG. 264), the sound of music B first data B1 is reproduced. and output from the speaker 46. After executing step Sq0504, the process proceeds to step Sq0505.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sq0503 that the song B first data reproduction start command CB1 has not been received (Sq0503: NO), the process proceeds to step Sq0505 without executing step Sq0504.

In step Sq0505, it is determined whether or not the song A second data reproduction start command CA2 has been received. If it is determined in step Sq0505 that the song A second data reproduction start command CA2 has been received (Sq0505: YES), the process proceeds to step Sq0506.

In step Sq0506, the music A second data A2 to be played specified by the music A second data reproduction start command CA2 is reproduced on the audio channel 1 specified by the received music A second data reproduction start command CA2. to start. More specifically, the sound output LSI 97 identifies, from the audio data ROM 98, the music A second data A2 to be reproduced, which is specified by the music A second data reproduction start command CA2, and reproduces the identified music A second data A2. are sequentially read from the beginning, and sounds based on the read music A second data A2 are sequentially generated (that is, reproduced) in the audio channel 1 designated by the music A second data reproduction start command CA2. Then, the sound output LSI 97 sequentially outputs the generated sounds from the speaker 46 . Thus, in audio channel 1, the music A second data A2 starts generating and outputting sound from the beginning of the music A second data_major part A21, and generates sound toward the end of the music A second data A2. and output follows. Note that in the sound output LSI 97, from the timing of receiving the song A second data reproduction start command CA2 (time t2, time t3 in FIG. 263) until the sound of the song A second data A2 is generated (that is, reproduced) , a delay of a delay period Δt occurs. If the music A second data reproduction start command CA2 received in step Sq0505 is the first music A second data reproduction start command CA2, during the delay period Δt, the end of music A first data_major portion A12 The sound of the music A first data_reverberation part A13 continuing to the second data is continuously generated, and when the delay period Δt elapses, the generated sound switches to the sound of the music A second data A2. If the music A second data reproduction start command CA2 received in step Sq0505 is the second or later music A second data reproduction start command CA2, the previous music A second data A2 The sound of the music A second data_reverberation part A22 that continues to the end of the music A second data_main part A21 of is continuously generated, and when the delay period Δt elapses, the generated sound repeats It becomes the sound of the music piece A second data A2. After executing step Sq0506, the process proceeds to step Sq0507.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sq0505 that the song A second data reproduction start command CA2 has not been received (Sq0505: NO), the process proceeds to step Sq0507 without executing step Sq0506.

In step Sq0507, it is determined whether or not the song B second data reproduction start command CB2 has been received. If it is determined in step Sq0507 that the song B second data reproduction start command CB2 has been received (Sq0507: YES), the process proceeds to step Sq0508.

In step Sq0508, on the audio channel 1 specified by the received music B second data reproduction start command CB2, the music B second data B2 to be reproduced designated by the music B second data reproduction start command CB2 is reproduced. to start. More specifically, the sound output LSI 97 identifies, from the audio data ROM 98, the second music piece B data B2 to be reproduced, which is specified by the music B second data reproduction start command CB2, and reproduces the identified music B second data B2. are sequentially read from the beginning, and sounds based on the read music B second data B2 are sequentially generated (that is, reproduced) in the audio channel 1 designated by the music B second data reproduction start command CB2. Then, the sound output LSI 97 sequentially outputs the generated sounds from the speaker 46 . Thus, in the audio channel 1, the music B second data B2 starts generating and outputting the sound from the beginning of the music B second data_major part B21, and the sound is generated toward the end of the music B second data B2. and output follows. Note that in the sound output LSI 97, from the timing (time t2, time t3 in FIG. 264) when the music B second data reproduction start command CB2 is received until the sound of the music A second data A2 is generated (that is, reproduced) , a delay of a delay period Δt occurs. If the music B second data reproduction start command CB2 received in step Sq0507 is the first music B second data reproduction start command CB2, during the delay period Δt, the end of the music B first data_major part B12 The sound of the music B first data_reverberation part A13 continuing to the second data is continuously generated, and when the delay period Δt elapses, the generated sound switches to the sound of the music B second data B2. Note that if the music B second data reproduction start command CB2 received in step Sq0507 is the second or subsequent music B second data reproduction start command CB2, the previous music B second data B2 The sound of the song B second data_reverberation part B22 continuing to the end of the song B second data_major part B21 of is continuously generated, and when the delay period Δt elapses, the sound generated is The sound of the preceding music B second data B2 becomes the subsequent music B second data B2. After step Sq0508 is executed, this reproduction start execution process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sq0507 that the song B second data reproduction start command CB2 has not been received (Sq0507: NO), this reproduction start execution processing ends without executing step Sq0508.

<<6-7>> Functions and effects:
As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the background image is a character-type stage, the MPU 92 (sound and light side MPU 92) of the sound emission control device 90 controls the sound output LSI 97 for the music piece A. The 1-data reproduction start command CA1 is transmitted, the music A first data reproduction start command CA1 is received in the sound output LSI 97, and reproduction of the music A first data A1 is started. After that, at the timing when the reproduction position of the music A first data A1 reproduced in the sound output LSI 97 reaches the end of the music A first data_major part A12 (time t2 in FIG. 263), the sound and light side MPU 92 A song A second data reproduction start command CA2 is transmitted to the output LSI 97 . The sound output LSI 97 receives the music A second data reproduction start command CA2 and starts reproducing the music A second data A2. In the sound output LSI 97, a delay of .DELTA.t occurs between when the music A second data reproduction start command CA2 is received and when the music A second data A2 is started to be reproduced. As described above, according to the configuration of the reference example composed of sound data having no reverberation part after the melody part, the reproduction of the sound data has already been completed at the delay time Δt, resulting in silence. There was a problem that the sound was interrupted. On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the music A first data A1 is provided with the music A first data_reverberation part A13 that is continuous with the music A first data_main part A12, , during the delay period Δt, the sound of the music A first data_reverberation part A13 of the music A first data A1 is reproduced, and the sound is not interrupted. For this reason, the player does not feel a sense of incongruity that the sound is interrupted in the sound related to the character stage. Similarly, in the sound of the non-character-type stage, there is no sense of incongruity that the sound is interrupted in the reproduction between the music B first data B1 and the music B second data B2. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

You can also think as follows. According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the sound output LSI 97 starts playing the music A first data A1, and the playing position of the music A first data A1 is after the end of the music A first data_major part A12. to reach the end of the music A first data_reverberation part A13, the reproduction of the music A second data A2 is started. On the other hand, since the music A first data A1 includes the music A first data_reverberation part A13 that is continuous with the music A first data_main part A12, in the delay period Δt, the music data of the music A first data A1 The sound of the A first data_reverberation part A13 is reproduced, and the sound is not interrupted. Therefore, the player does not feel a sense of incongruity that the sound is interrupted in the sound related to the presentation. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the song A first data_reverberation part A13 connected to the song A first data_main part A12 is recorded in the song A first data_main part A12. Since the sound accompanying the melody part of the song A is recorded, the delay period Δt can be filled with the sound accompanying the melody part of the song A that was playing just before. Therefore, even if the delay period Δt occurs, it is possible to eliminate the sense of incongruity caused by the interruption of the sound without impairing the flow of the music.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the music A second data_major part A21 of the music A second data A2 is the data recorded in the music A first data_major part A12 of the music A first data A1. , the melody part of the song A recorded in the song A first data_major part A12 can be repeatedly reproduced.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the reproduction of the music A first data A1 and the reproduction of the music A second data A2 are performed in the same audio channel 1, during the delay period Δt described above, the audio channel 1 , the sound of the music A first data_reverberation part A13 of the music A first data A1 is reproduced, and the sound of the music A second data A2 is reproduced on the audio channel 1 when the delay period _ Reverberation part A13 is played back. As a result, the sound of the music A first data A1 can be reliably switched to the sound of the music A second data A2 without interruption.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the background image is a character-type stage, the music A second data reproduction start command CA2 is transmitted to the sound output LSI 97 by the sound and light side MPU 92, and the sound output LSI 97 Receiving the music A second data reproduction start command CA2, reproduction of music A second data A2 (first music A second data A2) is started. After that, at the timing when the reproduction position of the music A second data A2 reproduced in the sound output LSI 97 reaches the end of the music A second data_major portion A21, the sound and light side MPU 92 causes the music A to the sound output LSI 97. A second data reproduction start command CA2 is transmitted. The sound output LSI 97 receives the music A second data reproduction start command CA2 and starts reproducing the music A second data A2 (second music A second data A2). In the sound output LSI 97, a delay of a delay period Δt occurs between when the second music A second data reproduction start command CA2 is received and when the second music A second data A2 is started to be reproduced. . As described above, according to the configuration of the reference example composed of sound data having no reverberation part after the melody part, the reproduction of the sound data has already been completed at the delay time Δt, resulting in silence. There was a problem that the sound was interrupted. On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the music A second data A2 includes the music A second data_reverberation part A22 continuous with the music A second data_main part A21, , during the delay period Δt, the sound of the music A second data_reverberation part A22 of the music A second data A2 is reproduced, and the sound is not interrupted. For this reason, the player does not feel a sense of incongruity that the sound is interrupted in the sound related to the character stage. Similarly, in the sound of the non-character-type stage, there is no sense of incongruity that the sound is interrupted in the reproduction between the music B second data B1 and the next music B second data B2. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<<6-8>> Modified example of the sixth embodiment:
The present invention is not limited to the above-described sixth embodiment, and can be implemented in various aspects without departing from the scope of the invention. For example, the following modifications are also possible. In addition, in the modified example described below, description of the same configuration, processing, and effects as those of the above-described embodiment is omitted.

<<6-8-1>> Modification 1:
In the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, the music A first data A1 and the music A second data A2 are reproduced on the audio channel 1 as BGM processing in the case of the character stage. On the other hand, as a modified example, the configuration may be such that the music A first data A1 and the music A second data A2 are reproduced while switching the audio channel to be reproduced between the audio channel 1 and the audio channel 2. . Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, the music B first data B1 and the music B second data B2 are reproduced on the audio channel 1 as the BGM processing in the case of the non-character stage. On the other hand, as a modified example, while switching the audio channel to be reproduced between the audio channel 1 and the audio channel 2, the music B first data B1 and the music B second data B2 are reproduced. good too. The combination of the audio channels 1 and 2 may be replaced with other channel combinations such as the combination of the audio channels 1 and 3, the combination of the audio channels 2 and 3, and the like. Any combination of audio channels can be used as long as both channels are different.

The outline of the processing for reproducing the music piece A in the case of the character stage will be described below. It should be noted that the outline of the processing for reproducing music B in the case of a non-character-type stage conforms to the outline of the processing for reproducing music A in the case of a character-type stage, and description thereof will be omitted. Further, in Modification 1, descriptions of the same hardware configuration and software configuration (processing) as in the sixth embodiment will be omitted. In Modification 1, the same parts as in the sixth embodiment are given the same names and reference numerals, and the following description will be given.

FIG. 271 is a timing chart showing a reproduction procedure for music A in the sound output LSI 97. FIG. FIG. 271 shows the audio data reproduced on the audio channel 1 (1ch), the audio data reproduced on the audio channel 2 (2ch), and the contents of the performance form obtained by mixing them in the sound output LSI 97. It is shown.

In the pachinko machine of Modified Example 1, when the background image is a character stage, the sound output LSI 97 reproduces the music piece A in the following procedure. At the time of transition to the character stage, first, the sound and light side MPU 92 transmits a music piece A first data reproduction start command CA1 to the sound output LSI 97 (time t11). The music A first data reproduction start command CA1 is a command for starting reproduction of music A first data A1 as a reproduction target, and includes a setting of audio channel 1 as the audio channel to be reproduced. The music A first data reproduction start command CA1 is the same as the music A first data reproduction start command CA1 in the sixth embodiment.

When the sound output LSI 97 receives the music A first data reproduction start command CA1 from the sound and light side MPU 92, it reproduces the music A first data reproduction on the audio channel 1 designated by the music A first data reproduction start command CA1. The process of reproducing the music piece A first data A1 specified by the start command CA1 is started. In the sound output LSI 97, a predetermined period of delay occurs (this period Δt is hereinafter also referred to as “delay period Δt”).

The sound/light side MPU 92 outputs the music A first data to the sound output LSI 97 at the timing when the reproduction position of the music A first data A1 on the audio channel 1 reaches the end of the music A first data_major part A12 (time t12). A 2-data reproduction start command CA22 is transmitted. The music A second data reproduction command CA22 is a command for starting reproduction of the music A second data A2 as a reproduction target, and includes a setting of audio channel 2 as the audio channel to be reproduced. The music A second data reproduction command CA22 differs from the music A first data reproduction start command CA1 in the sixth embodiment in that the audio channel to be reproduced is the audio channel 2. FIG. The determination as to whether or not the playback position reaches the end of the music A first data_major part A12 is performed by the same method as in the sixth embodiment.

When the sound output LSI 97 receives the music A second data reproduction start command CA22 from the sound and light side MPU 92, it starts reproducing the music A second data on the audio channel 2 specified by the music A second data reproduction start command CA22. The process of reproducing the music A second data A2 (hereinafter also referred to as the first music A second data A2) specified by the command CA22 is started. In the sound output LSI 97, there is a delay of a delay period Δt from the timing (time t12) when the music A second data reproduction start command CA22 is received until the sound of the music A second data A2 is generated (that is, reproduced). occurs. That is, at the time t12+Δt, the reproduction of the music piece A second data A2 is started. During the delay period Δt, the sound of the song A first data_reverberation part A13 that continues to the end of the song A first data_main part A12 is continuously reproduced. When the reproduction position of the audio channel 1 reaches the end of the music A first data_reverberation part A13 (time tx1), the reproduction of the music A first data A1 ends. As described above, the data length of the song A first data_reverberation part A13 is longer than the delay period Δt at the time of reproduction. Become. As a result, during the period from time t12+Δt to time tx1 (the cross-hatched portion in the figure), the music A first data A1 is continuously reproduced on the audio channel 1 . At time t12+Δt, since the music A second data A21 has started to be reproduced on the audio channel 2, during the period from time t12+Δt to time tx, the sound of the music A first data A1 and the music A second data The sound of A2 is mixed and output from the speaker 46. - 特許庁

After that, the sound and light side MPU 92 determines that the reproduction position of the music A second data A2 (hereinafter also referred to as the first music A second data A2) on the audio channel 1 reaches the end of the music A second data_major part A21. At the timing (time t13), the music A second data reproduction start command CA21 is transmitted to the sound output LSI 97. FIG. The music A second data reproduction start command CA21 is a command for starting reproduction of the music A second data A2 as a reproduction target, and includes a setting of audio channel 1 as the audio channel to be reproduced. That is, the music A second data reproduction start command CA21 differs from the music A second data reproduction start command CA22 transmitted at time t12 in that the audio channel to be reproduced is audio channel 1. FIG.

When the sound output LSI 97 receives the music A second data reproduction start command CA21 from the sound and light side MPU 92 at time t13, the music output LSI 97 reproduces the music A second data reproduction start command CA21 on the audio channel 1 specified by the music A second data reproduction start command CA21. Reproduction of the music A second data A2 to be reproduced (hereinafter also referred to as the second music A second data A2) specified by the two-data reproduction start command CA21 is started. In the sound output LSI 97, there is a delay of a delay period Δt from the timing (time t13) when the music A second data reproduction start command CA21 is received until the sound of the music A second data A2 is generated (that is, reproduced). occurs. That is, at the time t13+Δt, the second reproduction of the music piece A second data A2 is started. During the delay period Δt, the sound of the music A second data_reverberation part A22 that continues to the end of the music A second data_main part A21 of the first music A second data A2 is continuously reproduced. there is When the reproduction position of the audio channel 2 reaches the end of the music A second data_reverberation part A22 (time tx2), the first reproduction of the music A second data A2 ends. During the period from time t13+Δt to time tx2 (the cross-hatched portion in the drawing), the first song A second data A2 is continuously reproduced on the audio channel 2 . At time t13+Δt, since the second music A second data A21 has started to be reproduced on the audio channel 1, during the period from time t13+Δt to time tx2, the first music A second data A2 is reproduced. and the sound of the second piece of music A second data A2 are mixed and output from the speaker 46. - 特許庁In this way, while switching the playback destination between audio channel 1 and audio channel 2 in the order of audio channel 2→audio channel 1→audio channel 2→......, music A second data A2 is reproduced. Repeat playback.

As described above, the loop reproduction of the melody part of the music A is realized by repeatedly reproducing the music A second data A2 after reproducing the music A first data A1. This loop reproduction is performed until the character stage ends. At the end of the character stage, the sound and light side MPU 92 transmits a music A second data reproduction end command to the sound output LSI 97, and the sound output LSI 97 receives the music A second data reproduction end command from the sound and light side MPU 92. , the loop reproduction of the music piece A second data A2 ends.

Next, an example of specific processing executed in the sound emission control device 90 in this modified example will be described. The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 in this modification (hereinafter referred to as the sound/light side MPU 92) executes the same timer interrupt processing (FIG. 266) and BGM processing (FIG. 267) as in the sixth embodiment. The processing in this modification is the same as in the sixth embodiment in terms of the BGM playback start processing (FIG. 268) executed in step Sq0201 of the BGM processing (FIG. 267). The difference lies in the detailed contents of the continuous reproduction process.

<BGM Continuous Playback Processing Executed in Audio Light Emitting Control Device>
The BGM continuous reproduction process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a BGM process subroutine (FIG. 267: Sq0202).

FIG. 272 is a flowchart showing BGM continuous reproduction processing. In step Sq0601, the second data reproduction process is executed for the first time. In the first second data reproduction process, a process for reproducing the first music A second data A2 and the first music B second data B2 described above is executed. The details of the first second data reproduction process will be described later. After executing step Sq0601, the process proceeds to step Sq0602.

In step Sq0602, the second data reproduction process is executed after the second time. In the second and subsequent second data reproduction processing, processing for reproducing the second and subsequent music piece A second data A2 and the second and subsequent music piece B second data B2 is executed. The second data reproduction process after the second time will be described later. After step Sq0602 is executed, this BGM continuous reproduction process ends.

<First Second Data Reproduction Processing>
Next, the first second data reproduction process will be described. The first second data reproduction process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the BGM continuous reproduction process (FIG. 272: Sq0601).

FIG. 273 is a flowchart showing the first second data reproduction process. In step Sq0701, it is determined whether or not music A first data A1 is reproduced on audio channel 1 and the reproduction position reaches the end of music A first data_major part A12. This determination process is the same process as step Sq0401 in FIG. 269 in the sixth embodiment. If it is determined in step Sq0701 that the music A first data A1 is being reproduced on the audio channel 1 and the reproduction position reaches the end of the music A first data_major part A12 (Sq0701 : YES), proceed to step Sq0702.

In step Sq 0702 , a music A second data reproduction start command CA 22 is transmitted to the sound output LSI 97 . The music A second data reproduction start command CA22 is a command for starting reproduction of the music A second data A2 as a reproduction target, and includes a setting of audio channel 2 as the audio channel to be reproduced. After executing step Sq0702, the process proceeds to step Sq0703.

On the other hand, in step Sq0701, if the music A first data A1 is not being reproduced on the audio channel 1, or if the music A first data A1 is being reproduced on the audio channel 1 and the reproduction position is the music A first data_key If it is determined that it is not time to reach the end of part A12 (Sq0701: NO), the process proceeds to step Sq0703 without executing step Sq0702.

In step Sq0703, it is determined whether or not music B first data B1 is reproduced on audio channel 1 and the reproduction position reaches the end of music B first data_major portion B12. This determination process is the same process as step Sq0403 in FIG. 269 in the sixth embodiment. If it is determined in step Sq0703 that the music B first data B1 is reproduced on the audio channel 1 and the reproduction position reaches the end of the music B first data_major portion B12 (Sq0703 : YES), proceed to step Sq0704.

In step Sq 0704 , a music B second data reproduction start command CB 22 is transmitted to the sound output LSI 97 . The music B second data reproduction start command CB22 is a command for starting reproduction of the music B second data B2 as a reproduction target, and includes a setting of audio channel 2 as the audio channel to be reproduced. After step Sq0704 is executed, the first second data reproduction process ends.

On the other hand, in step Sq0703, if the music B first data B1 is not being reproduced on the audio channel 1, or if the music B first data B1 is being reproduced on the audio channel 1 and the reproduction position is the music B first data_key If it is determined that it is not time to reach the end of part B12 (Sq0703: NO), the first second data reproduction process is terminated without executing step Sq0704.

<Second Data Reproduction Processing After Second Time>
Next, the second data reproduction process after the second time will be described. The second and later second data reproduction processing is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the BGM continuous reproduction processing (FIG. 272: Sq0602).

FIG. 274 is a flowchart showing second data reproduction processing after the second time. In step Sq0801, it is determined whether or not the music A second data A2 is reproduced on the audio channel 2 and the reproduction position reaches the end of the music A second data_major portion A21. This determination is made by receiving information indicating the type of data being reproduced and information indicating the reproduction position of the data being reproduced from the sound output LSI 97, and based on these information, determining whether or not the music piece A is played on the audio channel 2. It is determined whether or not the second data A2 is reproduced and the reproduction position reaches the end of the music A second data_major part A21. In addition, instead of this configuration, the voice light emission control device 90 may store in advance the arrival time until the playback position reaches the end of the music piece A second data_major part A21. The determination may be made according to the type of command and whether or not the time from the start of reproduction has reached the arrival time. If it is determined in step Sq0801 that the music A second data A2 is being reproduced on the audio channel 2 and the reproduction position is at the timing when it reaches the end of the music A second data_major part A21 (Sq0801 : YES), proceed to step Sq0802.

In step Sq 0802 , a music A second data reproduction start command CA 21 is transmitted to the sound output LSI 97 . The music A second data reproduction start command CA21 is a command for starting reproduction of the music A second data A2 as a reproduction target, and includes a setting of audio channel 1 as the audio channel to be reproduced. After executing step Sq0802, the process proceeds to step Sq0803.

On the other hand, in step Sq0801, if the music A second data A2 is not being reproduced on the audio channel 2, or if the music A second data A2 is being reproduced on the audio channel 2 and the reproduction position is the music A second data_key If it is determined that it is not time to reach the end of part A21 (Sq0801: NO), the process proceeds to step Sq0803 without executing step Sq0802.

In step Sq0803, it is determined whether or not the music B second data B2 is reproduced on the audio channel 2 and the reproduction position reaches the end of the music B second data_major portion B21. This determination is made by receiving information indicating the type of data being reproduced and information indicating the reproduction position of the data being reproduced from the sound output LSI 97, and based on these information, determining whether or not the music piece B is played in the audio channel 2. 2 data B2 is reproduced, and it is determined whether or not the reproduction position reaches the end of the music B second data_major part B21. In addition, instead of this configuration, the audio light emission control device 90 may store in advance the arrival time until the playback position reaches the end of the main part B21 of the music B second data_main part B21. The determination may be made according to the type of command and whether or not the time from the start of reproduction has reached the arrival time. If it is determined in step Sq0803 that the music B second data B2 is reproduced on the audio channel 2 and the reproduction position reaches the end of the music B second data_major part B21 (Sq0803 : YES), proceed to step Sq0804.

In step Sq 0804 , a music B second data reproduction start command CB 21 is transmitted to the sound output LSI 97 . The music B second data reproduction start command CB21 is a command for starting reproduction of the music B second data B2 as a reproduction target, and includes a setting of audio channel 1 as the audio channel to be reproduced. After executing step Sq0804, the process proceeds to step Sq0805.

On the other hand, in step Sq0803, if the music B second data B2 is not being reproduced on the audio channel 2, or if the music B second data B2 is being reproduced on the audio channel 2 and the reproduction position is the music B second data_key If it is determined that it is not time to reach the end of part B21 (Sq0803: NO), the process proceeds to step Sq0805 without executing step Sq0804.

In step Sq0805, it is determined whether or not the music A second data A2 is reproduced on the audio channel 1 and the reproduction position reaches the end of the music A second data_major portion A21. This determination process is the same process as step Sq0405 in FIG. 269 in the sixth embodiment. If it is determined in step Sq0805 that the music A second data A2 is being reproduced on the audio channel 1 and the reproduction position is at the timing when it reaches the end of the music A second data_major part A21 (Sq0805 : YES), proceed to step Sq0806.

In step Sq 0806 , a music A second data reproduction start command CA 22 is transmitted to the sound output LSI 97 . The music A second data reproduction start command CA22 is a command for starting reproduction of the music A second data A2 as a reproduction target, and includes a setting of audio channel 2 as the audio channel to be reproduced. After executing step Sq0806, the process proceeds to step Sq0807.

On the other hand, in step Sq0805, if the music A second data A2 is not being reproduced on the audio channel 1, or if the music A second data A2 is being reproduced on the audio channel 1 and the reproduction position is the music A second data_key If it is determined that it is not time to reach the end of part A21 (Sq0805: NO), the process proceeds to step Sq0807 without executing step Sq0806.

In step Sq0807, it is determined whether or not the music B second data B2 is reproduced on the audio channel 1 and the reproduction position reaches the end of the music B second data_major part B21. This determination process is the same process as step Sq0407 in FIG. 269 in the sixth embodiment. If it is determined in step Sq0807 that the music B second data B2 is reproduced on the audio channel 1 and the reproduction position reaches the end of the music B second data_major part B21 (Sq0807 : YES), proceed to step Sq0808.

In step Sq 0808 , a music B second data reproduction start command CB 22 is transmitted to the sound output LSI 97 . The music B second data reproduction start command CB22 is a command for starting reproduction of the music B second data B2 as a reproduction target, and includes a setting of audio channel 2 as the audio channel to be reproduced. After step Sq0808 is executed, the second data reproduction process from the second time onwards is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Sq0807, if the music B second data B2 is not being reproduced on the audio channel 1, or if the music B second data B2 is being reproduced on the audio channel 1 and the reproduction position is the music B second data_key If it is determined that it is not time to reach the end of part B21 (Sq0807: NO), step Sq0808 is not executed, and the second and subsequent data reproduction processes are terminated.

<Reproduction Start Execution Processing Executed in Sound Output LSI>
FIG. 275 is a flow chart showing a reproduction start execution process executed in the sound output LSI 97. FIG. The reproduction start execution process is repeatedly executed at a relatively short period (for example, 2 msec). This reproduction start execution process is mostly the same as the reproduction start execution process (FIG. 270) executed in the sound output LSI 97 in the sixth embodiment, with only a partial difference. Specifically, the contents of steps Sq0905 and Sq0907 of the present reproduction start execution process are different from the contents of steps Sq0505 and Sq0507 of the sixth embodiment. Steps Sq0906 and Sq0908 are the same as steps Sq0501 to Sq0504, steps Sq0506 and Sq0508 of the sixth embodiment.

In step Sq0905, it is determined whether or not the music A second data reproduction start command CA21 or the music A second data reproduction start command CA22 has been received. In the sixth embodiment, the start command for reproducing the music A second data A2 is only the music A second data reproduction start command CA2. Since the target start commands are the music A second data reproduction start command CA21 and the music A second data reproduction start command CA22, in step Sq0905, it is determined whether or not either of them has been received. bottom.

If it is determined in step Sq0905 that the music A second data reproduction start command CA21 or music A second data reproduction start command CA22 has been received (Sq0905: YES), the process proceeds to step Sq0906. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sq0905 that neither the music A second data reproduction start command CA21 nor the music A second data reproduction start command CA22 has been received (Sq0905: NO), step Sq0908 is executed. Without doing so, the process proceeds to step Sq0907.

In step Sq0907, it is determined whether or not the music B second data reproduction start command CB21 or the music B second data reproduction start command CB22 has been received. In the sixth embodiment, the start command for reproducing the music B second data B2 is only the music B second data reproduction start command CB2. Since the target start commands are the music B second data reproduction start command CB21 and the music B second data reproduction start command CB22, in step Sq0907, it is determined whether or not either of them has been received. bottom.

If it is determined in step Sq0907 that the music B second data reproduction start command CB21 or music B second data reproduction start command CB22 has been received (Sq0907: YES), the process proceeds to step Sq0908. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sq0907 that neither the music B second data reproduction start command CB21 nor the music B second data reproduction start command CB22 has been received (Sq0907: NO), step Sq0908 is executed. Without doing so, the reproduction start execution process is terminated.

In the pachinko machine of this modified example configured as described above, in the character stage, the music A first data A1 and the music A second data A2 are continuously played in the same manner as the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment. When playing, the sound is not interrupted. Further, when the music A second data A2 and the next music A second data A2 are continuously reproduced, the sound is not interrupted. Even in the non-character stage, when the music B first data B1 and the music B second data B2 are continuously reproduced, the sound is not interrupted. Further, when the music B second data B1 and the next music B second data B2 are reproduced continuously, the sound is not interrupted. Therefore, the player does not feel a sense of incongruity due to interruptions in the BGM between the character-related stage and the non-character-related stage. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine of this modified example, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine of this modified example is configured to reproduce the music A first data A1 and the music A second data A2 while switching the audio channel to be reproduced between the audio channel 1 and the audio channel 2. . Therefore, during the delay period Δt described above, the sound of the music A first data_reverberation part A13 of the music A first data A1 is reproduced on the audio channel 1, and after the delay period Δt has passed, the music The sound of the A second data A2 is reproduced. When the delay period Δt elapses, the sound of the unreproduced part of the music A first data_reverberation part A13 of the first data A1 is continuously reproduced on the audio channel 1, so this unreproduced sound is reproduced. During this period, the song A second data A2 reproduced on the audio channel 2 is superimposed. As a result, immediately after the sound of the music A first data A1 is switched to the sound of the music A second data A2, the sound of the music A first data A1 and the sound of the music A second data A2 are mixed. You can mix and switch sounds smoothly. Similarly, in the pachinko machine of this modified example, the music A second data A2 and the next music A second data A2 are reproduced while switching the audio channel to be reproduced between the audio channel 1 and the audio channel 2. Therefore, immediately after the sound of the music A second data A2 is switched to the sound of the next music A second data A2, the sound of the music A second data A2 and the sound of the next music A second data A2 The sound can be mixed and the sound can be switched smoothly. Also, immediately after the sound of the music A second data A2 is switched to the sound of the next music A second data A2, the sound of the music A second data A2 and the sound of the next music A second data A2 are changed. are mixed, the sound recorded in the song A first data_reverberation part A13 can be output longer than in the sixth embodiment.

<<6-8-2>> Modification 2:
In the sixth embodiment and its modification, music A corresponding to the character stage and music B corresponding to the non-character stage are prepared. It was configured to switch songs as. On the other hand, as a modification, each stage classified as a character stage (the room stage of warrior characters A to D) and each stage classified as a non-character stage (country stage, city stage, Music corresponding to the stage of the ocean, the stage of all members) may be prepared, and when there is a transition between stages of these small categories, the music as BGM may be switched. According to this configuration, music as BGM can be switched more precisely.

<<6-8-3>> Variation 3:
In the sixth embodiment and its modification, the music A first data A1 and the music A second data A2 (or the music B first data B1 and the music B second data B2) are recorded with the sounds related to the music. However, as a modification, it may be data in which sounds such as sound effects and dialogues of various characters are recorded. According to this modification as well, the sound/light side MPU 92 outputs the second sound data in which the sound is recorded to the sound output LSI while the first sound data in which the sound is recorded is being reproduced. By transmitting the instruction to start the reproduction of , the player does not feel a sense of incongruity that the sound is interrupted in the reproduction between the first sound data and the second sound data. Therefore, according to the configuration of this modified example, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<<6-8-4>> Modification 4:
In the sixth embodiment and its modification, the music piece A first data A1 consists of music piece A first data_intro part A11, music piece A first data_main part A12, and music piece A first data_reverberation part A13. The song A second data A2 is split into two parts: song A second data_main part A21 and song A second data_reverberation part A22. On the other hand, as a modification, the music A first data A1 and the music A second data A2 may not be divided into a plurality of pieces. That is, the music A first data A1 and the music A second data A2 may be sound data in which one continuous sound is recorded, and may not be divided into a plurality of parts for data management. In this configuration, the sound/light side MPU 92 determines the timing of transmitting the next sound data reproduction command to the sound output LSI 97 during reproduction of sound data as follows. Specifically, on the sound emission control device 90 side, the arrival time until the reproduction position reaches the timing is stored in advance, and whether or not the time from the start of reproduction has reached the arrival time is determined. , and determines whether or not the playback position is at the timing. Even with the configuration of this modified example, as with the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, the player does not feel a sense of incongruity that the sound is interrupted during reproduction between the music A first data A1 and the music A second data A2. There is no Therefore, according to the configuration of this modified example, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Similarly, as a modified example, the music B first data B1 and the music B second data B2 may not be divided into a plurality of pieces.

<<6-8-5>> Modification 5:
In the sixth embodiment and its modification, the sound and light side MPU 92 outputs the music A second data reproduction start command CA2 (the music A second data reproduction start command CA21 or the music A second data reproduction start command to the sound output LSI 97). command CA22) (hereinafter also referred to as transmission timing) is the timing of reaching the end of music A first data_major portion A12 of music A first data A1, or the timing of reaching the end of music A first data A12 of music A second data A2 The timing of reaching the end of the second data_major part A21 (hereinafter also referred to as the end timing) is set. On the other hand, as a modification, the transmission timing may be configured to be within a predetermined period including the termination timing instead of strictly matching the termination timing.

FIG. 276 is an explanatory diagram showing the predetermined period defining transmission timing. 276(a) shows the case where the transmission timing coincides with the end timing, FIG. 276(b) shows the case where the transmission timing is the earliest within the predetermined period, and FIG. 276(c) shows the case where the transmission timing is the earliest within the predetermined period. Shows the slowest case. As described above, in the sound output LSI 97, a delay period Δt is required from the timing when the music A second data reproduction start command CA2 is received until the sound is generated. Therefore, when the transmission timing is Ta, the time at which the music A second data A2 starts to be reproduced is Ta+Δt. It is necessary to determine the transmission timing Ta so that this time Ta+Δt falls within the range of the period TT during which the music A first data_reverberation part A13 can be reproduced. In other words, the transmission timing Ta can be any timing as long as the time Ta+.DELTA.t falls within the range of the period TT during which the music A first data_reverberation part A13 can be reproduced. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 276(b), when time Ta+Δt is the timing of the leading edge of music A first data_reverberation part A13, transmission timing Ta is the highest transmission timing within a predetermined period. get faster. As shown in FIG. 276(c), when time Ta+.DELTA.t is the end timing of music A first data_reverberation part A13, the transmission timing Ta is the latest within the predetermined period. That is, from the transmission timing Ta shown in FIG. The music A second data reproduction start command CA2 can be transmitted at any timing within the range from the end of the data_reverberation part A13 to the timing earlier by the delay time Δt (within the predetermined period). That is, the length of the predetermined period matches the length of the music A first data_reverberation part A13. With this configuration as well, the player does not feel a sense of incongruity that the sound is interrupted when the music A first data and the music A second data A2 are reproduced. Therefore, according to the configuration of this modified example, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<<6-8-6>> Modification 6:
In the sixth embodiment and its modification, the music piece A first data A1 consists of music piece A first data_intro part A11, music piece A first data_main part A12, and music piece A first data_reverberation part A13. On the other hand, as a modified example, the song A first data A1 does not include the song A first data_intro part A11, and the song A first data_main part A12 and the song A first data_reverberation part A13 may be provided. According to this configuration, the song A first data A1 has the same configuration as the song A second data A2. In this configuration, the sound data recorded in the music A second data_major portion A21 may be different from the sound data recorded in the music A first data_major portion A12. For example, the sound data recorded in the music A second data_major part A21 is the same melody part of the music A as the sound data recorded in the music A first data_major part A12, but is arranged up-tempo, for example. It may be configured so as to produce a muted sound. According to this configuration, it is possible to change the atmosphere of the song A and repeatedly reproduce the melody part. Similarly, the first song B data B1 may not include the first song B data_intro part B11, but may include the first song B data_major part B12 and the first song B data_reverberation part B13. good. Further, the sound data recorded in the music B second data_major part B21 may be different from the sound data recorded in the music B first data_major part B12.

<<6-8-7>> Modification 7:
In the sixth embodiment and its modification, only one type of music A second data A2 is prepared. A prepared configuration may be used. Each of the plurality of types of music A second data A2 has a melody part of the same music A, but has a different arrangement of the music. For example, the first song A second data A2 may be of normal tempo, and the second song A second data A2 may be of up tempo. The music A second data A2 to be used may be switched between the first music A second data A2 and the second music A second data A2 according to the game state. . Specifically, for example, in the normal game state (low probability game state), the first music A second data A2 is used, and in the high probability game state, the second music A second data A2 is used. may be used. According to this configuration, the BGM of the stage can further improve the expectation of entering the high-probability game state. In other words, a so-called interactive sound expression that can change the BGM and sound effects in accordance with the progress of the game becomes even more possible. Similarly, a configuration in which a plurality of types of music B second data B2 are prepared may be employed.

<<6-8-8>> Modification 8:
In the sixth embodiment and its modification, the music piece A second data A2 is configured to include the music piece A second data_main part A21 and the music piece A second data_reverberation part A22. As a modified example, a configuration may be adopted in which the music A second data_reverberation part A22 is not provided. According to this modification, by adopting a configuration in which the song A second data is reproduced only once following the song A first data, in the playback between the song A first data and the song A second data A2, , the player does not feel a sense of incongruity that the sound is interrupted. Therefore, according to the configuration of this modified example, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<<6-8-9>> Modification 9:
In the sixth embodiment and its modification, the data length of music A first data_reverberation part A13 and the data length of music A second data_reverberation part A22 are determined by the sound output LSI 97 according to the music A second data reproduction start command. It has been determined experimentally or through simulation so that the length can exceed at least the delay period Δt required from the timing when CA2 is received until the sound is reproduced. In addition, in the sixth embodiment and its modification, the timing at which the MPU 92 (sound and light side MPU 92) of the sound emission control device 90 transmits the music A second data reproduction start command CA2 to the sound output LSI 97 is By matching the timing at which the playback position of the A first data A1 reaches the end of the main part A12 of the song A first data A12, the song A second data A2 can be played before the playback of the song A first data A1 is completed. was to start playing. On the other hand, as a modification, the sound and light side MPU 92 adjusts the timing of transmitting the music A second data reproduction start command CA2 so that after the music A first data A1 is completely reproduced, the music A second data reproduction start command CA2 is transmitted. The configuration is such that reproduction of data A2 can be started. That is, the sound and light side MPU 92 adjusts the timing of transmitting the music A second data reproduction start command CA2 so that the reproduction of the music A second data A2 is started after the reproduction of the music A first data A1 is completed. A state (hereinafter referred to as the first state) and a state (hereinafter referred to as the second state) in which the reproduction of the music A second data A2 is started before the reproduction of the music A first data A1 is completed. It is configured to allow both. In the first state, that is, the state in which the reproduction of the music A first data A1 is completed and then the reproduction of the music A second data A2 is started, the reproduction position of the music A first data A1 is the music A first data_main When the period from the timing when the end of the part A12 is reached to the start of the reproduction of the music A second data A2 exceeds the time length at the time of reproduction corresponding to the music A first data_reverberation part A13 be. In the second state, that is, the state in which the reproduction of the music A second data A2 is started before the reproduction of the music A first data A1 is completed, the reproduction position of the music A first data A1 is the music A first data_ The period from the timing of reaching the end of the main part A12 to the start of reproduction of the music A second data A2 is equal to or less than the time length during reproduction corresponding to the music A first data_reverberation part A13. is the case.

In the first state, by the time the music A second data A2 starts to be reproduced, the music A first data A1 is reproduced at the end of the music A first data_reverberation part A13 (or at the end of the music A second data A2). The reproduction ends up to the end of the music A second data_reverberation part A22), and a silent state occurs between the reproduction of the music A first data A1 and the reproduction of the music A second data A2. On the other hand, in the second state, reproduction of the music piece A second data A2 is started without becoming silent. In this modified example, for example, when the possibility (expectation) of winning the jackpot in the winning lottery is high, the first state is taken, and when the expectation of winning the jackpot is not high, the second state is taken. By doing so, it is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation that he or she may have won a jackpot when the silent state occurs. Therefore, according to this modified example, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

<<6-8-10>> Modification 10:
In the above-described sixth embodiment and its modification, sound data was used as an example of effect data. Data in which a display pattern is recorded may be used. Further, data recording various images displayed on the pattern display device 41 may be used instead of the data recording the variable display pattern of the image. Furthermore, the effect data can be replaced with data in which light emission patterns of light emission means composed of various lamps such as LEDs are recorded. Even with these modified examples, the player does not feel a sense of incongruity that the performance is interrupted. Therefore, according to the configuration of this modified example, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<<6-8-11>> Modification 11:
In the sixth embodiment and its modification, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to include three control devices, namely the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90, and the display control device 100, but instead of this, the main control It is good also as a structure provided with two control devices, such as a device and a sub control device. The sub control device may be configured to execute various processes executed by the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 in the sixth embodiment. In addition, in the sixth embodiment and its modification, the various processes executed by each of the three control devices 60, 90, and 100 are not limited to the division described in the sixth embodiment, and the three control devices 60, 90, and 100 as a whole should be able to execute various processes in the sixth embodiment.

<<7>> Seventh Embodiment:
<<7-1>> Game machine structure:
FIG. 277 is a perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter also referred to as "pachinko machine") in the seventh embodiment. A pachinko machine 10 has a wooden outer frame 11 combined in a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island equipment of the game hall. The pachinko machine 10 also includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11 . A pachinko machine body 12 has an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13. - 特許庁The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11 by metal hinges 15 . The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 16 with respect to the inner frame 13 . On the back of the inner frame 13, control devices for controlling the pachinko machine main body 12, such as a main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device, are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. - 特許庁The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened, and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation using a dedicated key on the cylinder lock 17 .

A substantially central portion of the front door frame 14 is formed with an open window portion 18 . Around the window part 18 of the front door frame 14, resin parts and electrical decoration parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. The electrical parts are composed of light emitting means including various lamps such as LEDs. The light emitting means plays a role of enhancing the performance effect by lighting or blinking at each game played by the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot is won, when a ready-to-win game is generated, or the like. A glass unit 19 composed of two sheets of plate glass is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14 , and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19 . A game board, which will be described later, is detachably attached to the inner frame 13 , and the player of the pachinko machine 10 can view the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 19 . Details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper tray 20 and a lower tray 21 for storing game balls. The upper tray 20 is formed in a box shape with an open top, and stores game balls such as rental balls lent from a rental machine (not shown) and prize balls discharged from the pachinko machine main body 12 . The game balls stored in the upper tray 20 are supplied to a game ball shooting mechanism provided in the pachinko machine main body 12. - 特許庁The game ball shooting mechanism is driven by the player's operation of the operation handle 25, and shoots the game balls supplied from the upper tray 20 to the front surface of the game board. The lower tray 21 is arranged below the upper tray 20 and is shaped like a box with an open top. The lower tray 21 stores game balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 20. - 特許庁A discharge port 22 for discharging game balls stored in the lower tray 21 is formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 21 . A lever 23 is provided below the ejection port 22 , and the player can switch the ejection port 22 between a closed state and an open state by operating the lever 23 . When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game ball falls from the discharge port 22 and is discharged from the lower tray 21 to the outside.

A presentation operation button 24 as an operation receiving means is provided in front of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20 . The effect operation button 24 is an operation unit for the player to perform an input operation for the game effect performed by the pachinko machine 10 . When a player operates a performance operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, a game performance reflecting the operation is performed by the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

Further, on the right side of the front door frame 14 when viewed from the front, an operation handle 25 is provided for the player to operate. When the player operates the operation handle 25, a game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism to the front surface of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operation handle 25, there are a touch sensor 25a for permitting the drive of the game ball shooting mechanism, a wait button 25b for stopping the game ball shooting by the game ball shooting mechanism when pressed by the player, and the operation handle 25. A variable resistor 25c is provided for detecting the amount of rotational operation of , based on a change in electrical resistance. When the player grips the operating handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operating handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. Then, a game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism to the front surface of the game board with strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

Next, the configuration of the rear surface of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. A control device for controlling the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is arranged on the back surface of the pachinko machine 10. - 特許庁

278 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. As shown, the pachinko machine 10 includes a first control unit 51, a second control unit 52, and a third control unit 53. As shown in FIG. Specifically, each of these control units is provided on the back surface of the inner frame 13 .

The first control unit 51 has a main controller 60 . The main control device 60 has a main control board having a function of controlling the main game and a function of monitoring the power supply. The main control board is housed in a board box made of transparent resin material. The substrate box is configured to leave a trace of opening and closing (also referred to as a trace of opening or a trace of unsealing). For example, a seal is affixed to a portion that can be opened and closed, and when the substrate box is opened, characters such as "opened" appear. The main controller 60 also has a RAM clear switch 66a for clearing (erasing or initializing) the RAM mounted on the main control board, and a setting switch 66a for executing a setting change mode and a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later. A setting key insertion portion 66b which is a keyhole into which a key can be inserted, a setting change switch 66c for changing setting information in the setting change mode, and an information display portion 45z capable of displaying various information such as setting information. is provided.

The information display section 45z is configured by arranging four 7-segment displays adjacent to each other in a horizontal row. Each 7-segment display has 7 segment light emitting parts and a DP light emitting part indicating a decimal point. 3", "4", "5", "6", "7", "8", "9", "0", "b", "L.", "6." Characters, symbols, etc. can be displayed. In this embodiment, the seven segment light emitting units and the DP light emitting units are composed of red LEDs (light emitting diodes). In the following description, the 7-segment display arranged at the left end is also referred to as the left-end 7-segment display, and the 7-segment display arranged adjacent to the left-end 7-segment display is also referred to as the left center 7-segment display. , the 7-segment display arranged adjacent to the right side of the left middle 7-segment display is also called the right middle 7-segment display, and is arranged adjacent to the right side of the right middle 7-segment display and is arranged at the right end. The 7-segment display is also called the rightmost 7-segment display.

The second control unit 52 includes an audio emission control device 90 and a display control device 100 . The sound emission control device 90 controls emission means such as speakers and various lamps provided in front of the pachinko machine 10 based on commands transmitted from the main control device 60 . The display control device 100 controls the pattern display device based on commands transmitted from the sound emission control device 90 . The pattern display device has a liquid crystal display for displaying patterns and images for presentation.

The third control unit 53 includes a payout control device 70 , a launch control device 80 and a power supply device 85 . The payout control device 70 performs payout control for paying out prize balls. When an instruction to shoot a game ball is input from the main control device 60, the shooting control device 80 shoots a game ball with strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 by the player. Controls the ball launching mechanism. The power supply device 85 includes a power switch 85a. When the power switch 85a is turned on with a power terminal (not shown) connected to a commercial power supply as an external power supply, the external power supplied from the commercial power supply is switched on. , the main control device 60, the payout control device 70, etc. are converted into necessary operating power and supplied to each of these devices.

In addition, on the back surface of the inner frame 13, there is a tank 54 in which game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially supplied, and a slope which is connected to the lower part of the tank 54 and is gently inclined so that the game balls flow downstream. , a case rail 56 connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 55, a game ball is supplied from the case rail 56, and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out according to an instruction from the payout control device 70. A plurality of devices necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10, such as a payout device 71, are provided.

Next, the game board will be explained. The game board is detachably attached to the front surface of the inner frame 13. - 特許庁

279 is a front view of the game board 30. FIG. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on its front surface. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding a game ball is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. A game ball shot from the game ball shooting mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and released above the game area PA, and then flows down the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicularly to the game board 30, and accessories such as windmills are arranged. These nails 42 and windmills distribute and organize the falling directions of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

The game board 30 is provided with a general prize winning port 32 , a first starting port 33 , a second starting port 34 , a through gate 35 and a variable winning device 36 . Also, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display section 45 . The main display section 45 has a special figure unit 37 , a normal figure unit 38 , and a round display section 39 .

The general prize winning openings 32 are ball entrances into which game balls can enter, and are provided in plurality on the game board 30 . In this embodiment, when game balls enter the general winning hole 32, 10 game balls are paid out from the payout device 71 as prize balls. In this embodiment, as the general prize winning opening 32, three general prize winning openings 32a, 32b, and 32c are provided. Hereinafter, the general winning opening 32a is also referred to as the first winning opening 32a, the general winning opening 32b as the second winning opening 32b, and the general winning opening 32c as the third winning opening 32c.

The first starting port 33 is a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter. The first starting port 33 is provided at the lower center of the game board 30 . In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first start hole 33, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a winning lottery, which will be described later, is executed.

The second start port 34 is a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and is provided on the right side of the game board 30 . In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 34, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a winning lottery, which will be described later, is executed. Further, the second starting port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a as a normal electric accessory.

The through gate 35 has a through hole extending vertically. The through gate 35 is a through gate that serves as a trigger for executing a lottery for opening the electric accessory 34a. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the main controller 60 performs an internal lottery (electric accessory open lottery) triggered by the passage. As a result of the internal lottery, when the electric role open is won, the electric accessory 34a shifts to the electric role open state in a predetermined manner. Since the through gate 35 is arranged on the upstream side of the second starting port 34 with respect to the flowing direction of the game ball, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 flows down the game area PA after passing through the second opening. It is possible to enter the ball into the starting port 34 . In addition, in this embodiment, even if the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the prize ball is not paid out.

The variable winning device 36 includes a large winning opening 36a leading to the back side of the game board 30, and an opening/closing door 36b for opening and closing the large winning opening 36a. The opening/closing door 36b is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter the big winning opening 36a. When a game ball enters the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, the main controller 60 executes a winning lottery (internal lottery). As a result of winning lottery, when a big win or a small win is won, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to an opening/closing execution mode. The opening/closing execution mode is a mode in which opening/closing processing of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is executed. Specifically, when the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, it transitions from a closed state in which game balls cannot enter to an open state in which game balls can enter, and a predetermined condition is satisfied. After that, it transitions to the closed state again. In the present embodiment, when game balls enter the big winning hole 36a of the variable winning device 36, the payout device 71 pays out 15 game balls as prize balls.

In addition, an out port 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and game balls that have not entered the various ball entrances are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 43.例文帳に追加

In addition, in the present embodiment, the first starting port 33, the second starting port 34, the first winning port 32a, the second winning port 32b, the third winning port 32c, the big winning port 36a, and the game in which the ball enters the out port 43 The balls are configured to merge into a discharge passage provided on the back surface of the game board 30, and the discharge passage is provided with a discharge passage detection sensor for detecting the game balls. As will be described later, in this embodiment, it is possible to grasp the number of game balls shot onto the game board 30 by detecting the game balls with the ejection path detection sensor.

The special figure unit 37 includes a first symbol display portion 37a and a second symbol display portion 37b. Each of the first pattern display portion 37a and the second pattern display portion 37b is composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting portions are arranged in a predetermined manner.

The first pattern display portion 37a is a display portion for displaying the first pattern. The first pattern refers to a pattern that is variably displayed or statically displayed based on a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33 . The first symbol display part 37a is used as a display mode until a winning lottery is performed triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 33, and the display corresponding to the lottery result is performed on the segment display device. , to perform a variable display or a predetermined display of the first symbol. When the lottery is finished, the first symbol display section 37a causes the segment display to stop displaying the first symbol corresponding to the lottery result. Hereinafter, a game round in which a winning lottery is executed triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 33 is also called a first starting hole game round.

The second pattern display portion 37b is a display portion for displaying the second pattern. The second pattern refers to a pattern that is variably displayed or statically displayed based on a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34 . The second symbol display part 37b is used as a display mode until a winning lottery is performed triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 34, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is performed on the segment display device. , to perform a variable display or a predetermined display of the second symbol. When the lottery is finished, the second symbol display section 37b causes the segment display device to stop displaying the second symbol corresponding to the lottery result. Hereinafter, a game round in which a winning lottery is executed triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 34 is also called a second starting hole game round.

Here, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol displayed in the second symbol display portion 37b to the stop display is Also called variable time. Specifically, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed in the first symbol display portion 37a to the stop display is also called the first variation time, and the second symbol display portion 37b The time from the start of the variable display of the second symbol to be displayed until the stop display is also called a second variable time.

The special figure unit 37 is further provided with a first pending display portion 37c and a second pending display portion 37d, which are LED lamps, at positions adjacent to the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b.

The first reservation display portion 37c displays the number of reservations for the first starting port 33 according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be lit. In this embodiment, up to four game balls entered into the first starting port 33 are reserved.

The second reservation display part 37d displays the number of reservations of the second starting port 34 according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be lit. In this embodiment, up to four game balls entered into the second starting port 34 are reserved.

The normal figure unit 38 is composed of a light-emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. The normal figure unit 38, when the electric accessary item opening lottery triggered by the passage of the through gate 35 is performed, causes the light-emitting display to display in a lighting display, a blinking display, or a predetermined mode as a display mode. When the electric accessory open lottery ends, the normal figure unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The round display section 39 is composed of a light-emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games that occur in the open/close execution mode or displays corresponding thereto. A round game means that either a predetermined upper limit duration time elapses or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls enter the variable winning device 36 until either condition is met. It is a game in which the door 36b is kept open. The number of round games varies depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the shift. The round display unit 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the opening/closing execution mode is started, and ends when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

In addition, the special figure unit 37, the general figure unit 38, and the round display unit 39 are not limited to being configured by a segment display device or a light emitting display device using an LED lamp. It may consist of various display devices capable of showing the draw in progress and the draw results, such as a CRT or dot matrix display.

The variable display unit 40 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area PA. The variable display unit 40 has a pattern display device 41 . The pattern display device 41 has a liquid crystal display. The display contents of the pattern display device 41 are controlled by the display control device 100 . The configuration of the display device provided in the variable display unit 40 is not limited to the pattern display device 41, and may be configured by various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT, for example.

When the first symbol display unit 37a performs a variable display or a predetermined display based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33, the symbol display device 41 displays the symbols in a variable display or a predetermined display accordingly. I do. In addition, when the second symbol display unit 37b performs variable display or predetermined display based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34, the symbol display device 41 performs variable display or predetermined display of the symbol accordingly. is displayed. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to the variation display or the predetermined display of the symbols triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, and when the jackpot is won. It also performs effect display during the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. Details of the pattern display device 41 will be described below.

FIG. 280 is an explanatory diagram showing the symbols variably displayed on the symbol display device 41 and the display surface 41a. FIG. 280(a) is an explanatory diagram showing symbols that are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41. FIG. As shown in FIG. 280(a), the symbol display device 41 variably displays symbols representing numbers 1-8. As the symbols to be variably displayed, symbols such as characters may be added to the symbols representing the numbers 1 to 8. FIG.

FIG. 280(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. As shown in FIG. As shown in the figure, the display surface 41a displays three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 on the left, middle and right. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the symbols of numbers 1 to 8 shown in FIG. A variable display that scrolls upward is performed. As shown in FIG. 280(b), after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol row is displayed in a stationary state on the activated line L. As shown in FIG. Specifically, when a game ball enters the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are periodically scrolled in a predetermined direction to start a variable display. Then, the symbols to be scrolled are switched from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol row Z1, the symbol row Z3, and the symbol row Z2, and finally, the predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. . When the variable display of symbols is finished and the display is stopped, and when the result of the winning lottery by the main control device 60 is a big win, a predetermined predetermined combination of symbols is displayed on the activated line L. It is formed. For example, a combination of the same symbols is formed on the activated line L. The pattern display device 41 is not limited to the above-described patterns, but the number of pattern rows, the number of active lines, the direction of pattern display variation in the pattern rows, and the patterns in each pattern row. Various modes can be adopted for the mode of variable display of symbols such as numbers.

Here, the game round is one unit of processing for notifying the player of the lottery result of the winning lottery for the special information acquired based on the winning at either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34. is. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one winning lottery for one piece of special information for each game. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires special information based on the winning of either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, and displays the first result display section 37a or the second result for each game round. In either one of the display portions 37b, after the segment display is variably displayed, the segment display is stop-displayed so that the display corresponding to the lottery result of the acquired special information is displayed. In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires special information based on the winning of either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the symbol display device 41 displays a predetermined After the symbol row is variably displayed, the symbol row is stopped and displayed so as to correspond to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Also, the time required for one game round is also called unit game time. The unit playing time is composed of a variable time, which is the time from when the variable display is started until the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed, and a stop time, which is the time when the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed. there is

Further, as shown in FIG. 280(b), the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 displays a first reserved display area Ds1 and a second reserved display area Ds2. In the first pending display area Ds1, the pending number based on the winning to the first starting port 33 is displayed. In the second pending display area Ds2, the pending number based on the winning to the second starting port 34 is displayed. In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, the number of reserved game balls that have won the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 is up to four at maximum.

<<7-2>> Electrical Configuration of Gaming Machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described using a block diagram.

FIG. 281 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 mainly includes a main controller 60 , a sound emission controller 90 , and a display controller 100 .

The main controller 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main game. The main control board 61 has an MPU 62 composed of elements having multiple functions. The MPU 62 includes a CPU 62x that executes various control programs, a ROM 63 that records various control programs and fixed value data, and temporarily stores various data when the CPU 62x executes the programs recorded in the ROM 63. and a RAM 64, which is a memory for The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. A part of the functions of the MPU 62 may be provided by another element.

The main control board 61 is provided with an input port and an output port.

An input side of the main control board 61 is connected to a payout control device 70 and a power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in a power supply device 85 . The main control board 61 is supplied with stable 24 V DC power from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86 . The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power supply as an external power supply, and when the power switch 85a is turned on, the external power supplied from the commercial power supply is supplied by the main control device 60, the payout control device 70, etc. It is converted into operating power and supplied to each device. In addition, in this embodiment, the power supply device 85 includes a power switch state detection sensor 85b and a capacitor 87 as a backup power supply. The power switch state detection sensor 85b is a sensor that can detect the state of the power switch 85a (whether it is ON or OFF). The capacitor 87 continues power supply to each device for a predetermined period when a power failure occurs or when the power switch 85a is turned off.

Further, the input side of the main control board 61 is connected to ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h provided at each ball entry port. Based on the signals from these detection sensors, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the game ball flowing down the game area PA has entered the starting hole, the winning hole, or the big winning hole, and determines whether the game ball has entered the through gate or discharge. A determination is made as to whether or not the vehicle has passed through the aisle (out exit). Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a winning lottery based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 .

Further, the input side of the main control board 61 is connected to the RAM clear switch 66a, the setting key insertion section 66b, and the setting change switch 66c.

On the output side of the main control board 61, there is a variable winning driving unit 36c that opens and closes the open/close door 36b of the variable winning device 36, and an electric accessory driving unit 34b that opens and closes the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34. , the main display section 45 and the information display section 45z described above are connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning driving section 36c so that the opening/closing door 36b is opened/closed. Further, as a result of the electric accessory opening lottery, when the electric role opening is won, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 44b so that the electric accessory 34a is released. Furthermore, in each game cycle, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b in the main display portion 45, and in the opening/closing execution mode, round display in the main display portion 45. Display control of the unit 39 is executed.

A payout control device 70 and a sound emission control device 90 are connected to the output side of the main control board 61 . A winning ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 70 from the main control device 60 based on the ball entry determination result, for example. When the main controller 60 transmits the prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area of the ROM 63 . Specifically, when the entry of game balls into the general winning hole 32 is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is transmitted from the main controller 60 to the first starting hole 33. When the entry of a game ball is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is transmitted from the main controller 60, and the entry of a game ball into the second start port 34 is specified. A prize ball command corresponding to the payout of one game ball is transmitted from the main controller 60 to . Based on the prize ball command received from the main controller 60, the payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 to pay out prize balls.

A discharge control device 80 is connected to the payout control device 70 . The shooting control device 80 controls shooting of the game ball shooting mechanism 81 . The game ball shooting mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined shooting conditions are met. An operating handle 25 is also connected to the firing control device 80 . As described above, the operating handle 25 includes the touch sensor 25a, the weight button 25b, and the variable resistor 25c. When the player grips the operating handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operating handle 25, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism to the front surface of the game board with strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

The sound emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60 and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. Specifically, based on various commands received from the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90 controls the drive of various lamps 47 made of light emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the front door frame 14, and controls the operation of the speaker 46. , and controls the display control device 100 . Also, the effect operation button 24 is connected to the sound emission control device 90, and when the effect operation button 24 is operated by the player at a predetermined timing, a game effect reflecting the operation is performed. It controls the various lamps 47, the speaker 46, the display control device 100, and the like.

The display control device 100 executes display control of the pattern display device 41 based on various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 . Specifically, the display control device 100, based on the various commands received from the sound emission control device 90, grasps the fluctuation time of the pattern in the pattern display device 41 and the type of combination of patterns to be finally stopped and displayed. , presence/absence of occurrence of ready-to-win, content of ready-to-win presentation, and details of presentation to be executed while symbols for the first liquid crystal and patterns for the second liquid crystal are displayed in a variable display are grasped. In this embodiment, the stop time, which is the time during which the first liquid crystal symbol or the second liquid crystal symbol is stopped and displayed, is fixed. Therefore, by determining the variable time, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game, is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

FIG. 282 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used for a winning lottery or the like. Various counters are provided in various counter areas of the RAM 64, and are used when the MPU 62 sets the winning lottery, the display setting of the main display section 45, the design display setting of the design display device 41, and the like. Specifically, a winning random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery. A jackpot type counter C2 is used when sorting the jackpot types. A ready-to-win random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not to generate a ready-to-win when the symbol row displayed on the symbol display device 41 is changed.

A random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. Further, when determining the variation time in the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b of the main display portion 45 and the symbol display device 41, a variation type counter CS is used. Further, the electric accessory opening counter C4 is used for the electric accessory opening lottery for determining whether or not the electric accessory 34a of the second start port 34 is to be opened.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the counter value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. FIG.

The RAM 64 is also provided with a pending information storage area 64b and a judgment processing execution area 64c. The reservation information storage area 64b is provided with a first reservation area Ra and a second reservation area Rb. In this embodiment, when the game ball enters the first start port 33, each value of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the variation type counter CS at the timing of the ball is stored in the reservation information storage area. It is stored chronologically in the first reservation area Ra of 64b. In addition, when the game ball enters the second start port 34, each value of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS at the timing of the ball entering is the second in the reservation information storage area 64b. 2 are stored chronologically in the reservation area Rb.

The details of the winning random number counter C1 will be described. The winning random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery as described above. The winning random number counter C1 is, for example, incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 1199 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Further, when the winning random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value=0 to 1199).

The hit random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and when the game ball enters the first start port 33, the updated value is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entry. When a game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entry.

The value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the first reservation area Ra is moved to the execution area AE of the judgment processing execution area 64c, and compared with the success/failure table stored in the success/failure table storage area of the ROM 63, resulting in a big win. It is determined whether or not In addition, the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the second reservation area Rb is moved to the execution area AE of the judgment processing execution area 64c, and is collated with the success/failure table stored in the success/failure table storage area of the ROM 63. It is determined whether or not

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb is the value of the game ball entering the first start port 33 or the second start port By doing so, it moves to the execution area AE of the judgment processing execution area 64c in the order acquired. Then, the hit random number counter C1 moved to the execution area AE is collated with the hit/fail table stored in the hit/fail table storage area of the ROM 63, and it is determined whether or not there is a big hit.

Next, the details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining the jackpot type. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 39 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry when the game ball enters the first start port 33. When the game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the determination process execution area 64c. The jackpot type is determined using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in . Furthermore, the MPU 62 uses the value of the hit random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to determine the display mode of the segment display that is stopped and displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b. . The stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area of the ROM 63 is referred to for the determination.

Next, details of the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is used when determining whether or not a reach occurs when the result of the winning lottery is not a big win. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the first start port 33, and the second start port 34. It is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters. After the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first reservation area Ra is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c, it is compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of the ROM 63, and the reach is determined. It is determined whether or not it occurs. After the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the second reservation area Rb is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c, it is compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of the ROM 63, and the reach is determined. It is determined whether or not it occurs. However, when the result of the winning lottery is a big win and the game shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 determines the occurrence of reach regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

The ready-to-win means that, for some of the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41, there is a possibility that a combination of symbols corresponding to a big win will be established, and some combinations of symbols are stopped. It refers to a display state in which symbols are displayed and the remaining symbol rows are displayed in a variable manner. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the combination of symbols corresponding to the big win refers to the combination of the same symbols on a predetermined pay line. As a specific example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of FIG. A ready-to-win state is achieved by forming a ready-to-win line and performing variable display of symbols in the symbol row Z2 when the ready-to-win line is formed. Then, when a big win occurs, the same symbols as the symbols forming the reach line are stop-displayed in the symbol row Z2.

In addition, in the ready-to-win state, while the ready-to-win line is formed, the patterns are displayed in the remaining pattern rows in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen to create a ready-to-win effect. It includes a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a after displaying a combination of patterns in which a reach line is formed in a reduced size or not. In addition, when the ready-to-win effect is being performed or before the ready-to-win display is performed, the determination of whether or not to perform a notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character is performed using the reach-to-win random number counter C3 or other counters. may

Next, details of the fluctuation type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the variation time in the first symbol display portion 37 a and the second symbol display portion 37 b and the symbol variation time in the symbol display device 41 . The fluctuation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in sequence within a range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once each time a normal process, which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of variation display in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b and at the start of symbol variation by the symbol display device 41. A variable time table stored in the variable time table storage area of the ROM 63 is used when determining the variable time in the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b.

Next, the details of the electric accessory release counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory release counter C4 is, for example, configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 465 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated, and stored in the electric role holding area 64d of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the through gate 35. - 特許庁Then, at a predetermined timing, after the value of the electric role product opening counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 64d moves to the electric role product execution area 64e, the electric role product is opened in the electric role product execution area 64e. A lottery is made to determine whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to the open state using the value of the counter C4. For example, if C4=0, 1, the electric accessory 34a is controlled to be in the open state, and if C4=2 to 465, the electric accessory 34a is maintained in the closed state.

In addition, at least one of the acquired value of the hit random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4, and the value of the variation type counter CS is special information in the present invention. corresponds to In addition, at least one of the value of the winning random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3 and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the first reservation area Ra and the second reservation area Rb is reserved. Also called information.

Next, the success/failure table will be described. The success/failure table is table data for matching with the winning random number counter C1 when a winning lottery is performed based on the winning random number counter C1. A low-probability mode and a high-probability mode are set in the pachinko machine 10 as a lottery mode for a winning lottery. In the winning lottery in the probability mode, the success/failure table for the high probability mode is referred to.

Here, the main controller 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has a plurality of settings (hereinafter also referred to as "lottery settings") with different probabilities of winning a big win in the winning lottery. Specifically, even in the same low-probability mode, there are 6 levels of lottery settings ("lottery setting 1" to "lottery setting 6") with different probabilities of winning a big win in a winning lottery. A specific description will be given below.

The main controller 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is provided with six types of win/fail tables for low probability modes corresponding to six stages of lottery settings from "lottery setting 1" to "lottery setting 6". there is Then, the main controller 60 executes a winning lottery by referring to the winning/failing table corresponding to the set lottery setting. For example, when the pachinko machine 10 is set to the lottery setting 1 and the lottery mode is the low probability mode, the main controller 60 creates a success/failure table for the low probability mode corresponding to the lottery setting 1. A winning lottery is executed by referring to the above.

FIG. 283 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the success/failure table. FIG. 283(a) shows the success/failure table for the low-probability mode corresponding to lottery setting 1, and FIG. 283(b) shows the success/failure table for the high-probability mode. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 283(a), the success/failure table for the low-probability mode corresponding to the lottery setting 1 includes values of 0 to 1199 of the winning random number counter C1 as values for winning the jackpot. , 0 to 4 are set. Although illustration is omitted, in the present embodiment, a low-probability mode win/fail table corresponding to lottery setting 2 to lottery setting 6 is provided. , 0 to 1199 of the winning random number counter C1, 6 values of 0 to 5 are set as values for winning the jackpot. In addition, in the success/failure table for the low probability mode corresponding to the lottery setting 3, seven values of 0 to 6 are set as the values for winning the jackpot among the values of the winning random number counter C1 of 0 to 1199. there is In addition, in the winning/failing table for the low probability mode corresponding to the lottery setting 4, 8 values of 0 to 7 are set as values for winning the jackpot among the values of the winning random number counter C1 of 0 to 1199. there is In addition, in the win/fail table for the low-probability mode corresponding to the lottery setting 5, 9 values of 0 to 8 are set as values for winning the jackpot among the values of the winning random number counter C1 of 0 to 1199. there is In addition, in the win/fail table for the low-probability mode corresponding to the lottery setting 6, 10 values of 0 to 9 are set as values for winning the jackpot among the values of the winning random number counter C1 of 0 to 1199. there is

That is, in the present embodiment, the larger the number following the "lottery setting", the higher the winning probability of the winning lottery in the low-probability mode.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 283(b), the success/failure table for the high-probability mode contains 16 values from 0 to 15 as values for winning the jackpot among the values of the winning random number counter C1 from 0 to 1199. is set. In this way, the high-probability mode has a higher probability of winning a big win in the winning lottery than the low-probability mode. In the present embodiment, the winning lottery is executed by referring to the same win/fail table in the high-probability mode regardless of which of the six stages of lottery settings is set. That is, in the high-probability mode, regardless of the lottery setting, the probability of winning the jackpot in the winning lottery is the same. However, as another configuration, even in the high-probability mode, the larger the number following the "lottery setting", the higher the probability of winning the jackpot in the winning lottery.

In this embodiment, the change of the lottery setting in six stages is configured to be executable when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Specifically, in this embodiment, when the administrator who manages the pachinko machine 10 changes the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10, first, the power switch 85a of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and the setting key is changed. The setting key is inserted into the insertion portion 66b (keyhole). Then, the inserted key is turned to the setting change side (ON side) (for example, turned clockwise). Then, with the RAM clear switch 66a depressed (ON state) and all of the frame opening switch and the door opening switch turned ON, the power switch 85a is turned ON to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 10. do. Then, the pachinko machine 10 is activated in the setting change mode. The frame open switch is a switch that is turned on when the inner frame 13 is in an open state with respect to the outer frame 11, and the door open switch is in an open state with the front door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 13. It is a switch that is turned ON when

When the pachinko machine 10 is activated in the setting change mode, information indicating the current lottery setting (hereinafter also referred to as setting information) is displayed on the information display section 45z. For example, when the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is "lottery setting 1", "1" is displayed on the information display section 45z. Then, every time the administrator presses the setting change switch 66c, the setting information displayed on the information display section 45z changes from "1"→"2"→"3"→"4"→"5"→"6". → "1" → "2" ... (ascending order).

When the administrator turns the setting key from the setting change side to the original position while the setting information displayed on the information display section 45z has reached the value desired by the administrator, the information display section 45z displays is changed to the lottery setting corresponding to the existing setting information. Specifically, for example, in a state where the administrator presses the setting change switch 66c and "6" is displayed in the information display section 45z, the setting key is moved from the setting change side (ON side) to the original position. When turned to (OFF side), the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is changed to "lottery setting 6".

Thus, according to this embodiment, by changing the lottery setting in the pachinko machine 10, the probability of winning a big win in the winning lottery can be changed.

In this embodiment, a configuration having six stages of lottery settings is adopted, but the lottery settings are not limited to six stages. good.

In addition, in this embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 is configured so that it is possible to confirm which lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is set when the power is turned on. Specifically, in this embodiment, when the administrator who manages the pachinko machine 10 confirms the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10, first, the power switch 85a of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and the setting key The setting key is inserted into the insertion portion 66b (keyhole). Then, the inserted key is turned to the setting change side (ON side) (for example, turned clockwise). Then, with at least one of the RAM clear switch 66a, the frame opening switch and the door opening switch turned off, the power switch 85a is turned on to turn on the pachinko machine 10. Then, the pachinko machine 10 is activated in the setting confirmation mode. In the setting confirmation mode, the current setting information is displayed on the information display section 45z, but the setting information cannot be changed. When the administrator turns the setting key from the setting change side (ON side) to the original position (OFF side), the pachinko machine 10 terminates the setting confirmation mode.

Next, the jackpot type will be described. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set in the pachinko machine 10. - 特許庁Specifically, for example, by providing differences in the following three aspects or modes, it is possible to set a plurality of types of jackpots.
(1) Opening and closing times (number of rounds) of the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode
(2) Aspect of opening/closing control of variable winning device 36 in opening/closing execution mode (3) Winning lottery lottery mode (low probability mode or high probability mode) after completion of opening/closing execution mode

As a mode of opening and closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the above-mentioned (2) opening and closing execution mode, occurrence of game ball entry (winning) to the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode. A high-frequency winning mode and a low-frequency winning mode can be set so that the frequencies are relatively high and low. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, one opening of the opening/closing door 36b in the opening/closing execution mode is set to continue until 30 seconds elapse or until the number of game balls entering the opening/closing door 36b reaches 10. can do. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening/closing door 36b in the opening/closing execution mode is set to continue until 1.6 seconds have elapsed or until the number of balls entering the opening/closing door 36b reaches 10. can be done.

The opening limit time for one opening of the opening/closing door 36b and the opening limit number for one opening are determined by the frequency of occurrence of balls entering the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode. As long as the high frequency winning mode is higher than the low frequency winning mode, the opening mode of the opening/closing door 36b is arbitrary. Specifically, the high-frequency winning mode may have a longer opening limit time per opening or a larger opening limit number per opening than the low-frequency winning mode. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, in the open/close execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode, substantially no winning to the variable winning device 36 may occur.

In the present embodiment, multiple types of winning modes are not provided as the opening/closing execution mode, and during the opening/closing execution mode, the high-frequency winning mode described above is used. That is, one opening of the opening/closing door 36b in the opening/closing execution mode is set to continue until 30 seconds pass or until the number of game balls entering the opening/closing door 36b reaches 10 pieces.

In the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won as a result of the winning lottery, the jackpot type is sorted using the jackpot type counter C2. The distribution of the jackpot types corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the distribution table storage area of the ROM 63 as a distribution table.

FIG. 284 is an explanatory diagram of the contents of the allocation table. FIG. 284(a) shows the distribution table for the first start port, and FIG. 284(b) shows the distribution table for the second start port. The distribution table for the first start port is referred to during a winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33, and the distribution table for the second start port is referred to the second start port 34. It is referred to during the winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball.

As shown in the distribution table for the first starting port in FIG. 284(a), in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the jackpot types based on the first starting port 33 are 16R probability variable jackpot, 8R probability variable jackpot, 16R normal A jackpot and an 8R normal jackpot are set.

In the 16R probability variable jackpot and the 8R probability variable jackpot, the aspect of the opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode, and the winning/failure lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode is ended is the high-probability mode, and the opening/closing execution mode. It is a jackpot in which the support mode after the end of is a high-frequency support mode.

In the 16R normal jackpot and the 8R normal jackpot, the mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode, and the lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode is the low-probability mode. It is a jackpot in which the support mode after the end of is a high-frequency support mode.

In the distribution table for the first start port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39", "0 to 13" corresponds to the 16R probability variable jackpot, and "14 to 27" corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot. , "28 to 33" corresponds to the 16R normal jackpot, and "34 to 39" corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, four types of jackpots are set as the types of jackpots. Therefore, the aspect of the jackpot is diversified. When these four types of jackpots are compared, the degree of advantage for the player is the highest for the 16R variable variable jackpot, the next highest for the 8R variable variable jackpot, followed by the 16R normal jackpot, and finally the 8R normal jackpot. By thus setting a plurality of types of jackpots with different degrees of advantage for the player, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous and increase the degree of attention to the game.

As shown in the distribution table for the second starting port in FIG. 284(b), in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the 16R probability variable jackpot and the 8R normal jackpot are set as the jackpot types based on the second starting port 34. ing. In the distribution table for the second start port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39", "0 to 27" corresponds to the 16R probability variable jackpot, and "28 to 39" corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot. corresponds to

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the jackpot types are distributed according to the jackpot type when the jackpot hits. It is different from the case of winning a big hit based on the entry of the game ball into the second start hole 34, and a clear difference is provided in the advantage for the player.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs the winning lottery using the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, and the jackpot type using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. However, the MPU 62 further uses the value of the winning random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to stop and display the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b. Determine the display mode. The stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area of the ROM 63 is referred to for the determination.

In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of the support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the end of the above-mentioned (3) opening and closing execution mode, shooting of game balls continues in a similar mode to the game area PA. A high-frequency support mode and a low-frequency support mode are selected so that the frequency of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 being in the open state per unit time is relatively high or low when compared in the situation where can be set.

Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the probability of winning an electric role open lottery using the electric role item opening lottery using the electric role item opening counter C4 differs between the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode. . In the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role open lottery in the electric accessory open lottery is made higher than in the low-frequency support mode. Further, in the high-frequency support mode, the opening time of the electric accessory 34a is set to be longer than that in the low-frequency support mode when the electric accessory 34a is elected.

Although not adopted in the present embodiment, in the case where the open state of the electric accessory 34a occurs multiple times in the high-frequency support mode and the open state of the electric role is won, after one open state is completed, the next The closing time until the open state is started may be set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the time secured from one electric accessory open lottery to the next electric accessory open lottery is set to be relatively shorter than in the low-frequency support mode. may

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability that the game ball enters the second starting port 34 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. That is, the high-frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary game state that assists establishment of special information acquisition conditions.

FIG. 285 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the success/failure table (electric accessary product open lottery success/failure table) used when executing the electric role product open lottery.

FIG. 285(a) shows a success/failure table (for low-frequency support mode) for electric accessory open lottery used in low-frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 285(a), in the electric accessory open lottery success/failure table (for low frequency support mode), there are two values of 0 and 1 for the electric accessory open counter C4 that will win the electric role open winning. A value is set. 464 values from 2 to 465 are set as the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4 to be out. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 in the low-frequency support mode and the electric accessary item open lottery is executed, the electric role open lottery is won with a probability of 1/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric role opening win is made in the low-frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.4 seconds.

FIG. 285(b) shows a success/failure table for electric accessory open lottery (for high frequency support mode) used in high frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 285(b), in the success/failure table for electric accessary item open lottery (for high frequency support mode), 462 values of 0 to 461 are set as the value of the electric accessary item open counter C4 for winning the electric accession election. A value is set. Four values of 462 to 465 are set as the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4 that is out. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 in the high-frequency support mode and the electric accessory open lottery is executed, the electric role open lottery is won with a probability of 231/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric role opening win is made in the high-frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.6 seconds.

In this way, the success/failure table for the electric accessory open lottery is set so that the high-frequency support mode has a higher probability of the game ball entering the second start port 34 than the low-frequency support mode. .

<<7-3>> Electrical Configuration of Audio Light Emitting Control Device and Display Control Device:
Next, electrical configurations of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 286 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configurations of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 of the seventh embodiment. A part of the configuration such as the power supply device 85 is omitted.

An audio emission control board 91 provided in the audio emission control device 90 outputs an MPU 92, which is an arithmetic unit that controls the overall control of the audio emission control device 90, and current date and time information, which is information that can specify the current date and time. A capable RTC97 (real time clock) is installed. The MPU 92 and RTC 97 are connected via a signal line so as to be able to communicate with each other.

The MPU 92 is a device containing a CPU 92x, a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like. The CPU 92 x executes various control programs stored in the main ROM 63 . The ROM 93 is a memory that stores various control programs executed by the CPU 92x, fixed value data, tables, and the like. For example, a part of the area of the ROM 93 is provided with various table storage areas in which production pattern tables and the like are stored. The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data when the CPU 92x executes the control program. For example, a part of the area of the RAM 94 is provided with a various flag storage area 94a in which various flags are stored, an activation date/time information storage area 94b in which activation date/time information (to be described later) is stored, and the like. It is not essential that the CPU 92x, the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into a single chip, and they may be individually integrated into chips.

The RTC 97 has a function of keeping the current date and time, and has an RTC control section 97a, a register 97b, and an RTC power supply 97c.

The RTC control unit 97a uses (controls) the register 97b to perform various controls such as clocking of the current date and time. The register 97b has a register table consisting of a plurality of registers, and this register table includes a clock register 97b1 and an activation date/time information storage area 97b2.

The clock register 97b1 is a register for clocking the current date and time, and the register value as the current date and time information is updated every second. In this embodiment, the current date and time information in the clock register 97b1 includes information that can specify the current "year", "month", "day", "hour", "minute", and "second". .

The RTC power supply 97c is a dedicated power supply for the RTC 97 that is different from the power supply for the pachinko machine 10, and can supply power to the RTC control section 97a and the register 97b even when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. Therefore, the clock register 97b1 can update the current date and time information even in the power failure state. In this embodiment, a button type battery is used for the RTC power supply 97c.

The starting date/time information storage area 94b of the sound/light side RAM 94 is a storage area in which the current date/time information clocked by the clock register 97b1 is written at the timing immediately after the pachinko machine 10 is started. The current date and time information read from the clock register 97b1 and written to the start date and time information storage area 94b is hereinafter referred to as start date and time information. In this embodiment, the start date and time information stored in the start date and time information storage area 94b includes "year", "month", "day", "hour", " Contains information that can identify minutes and seconds. The details of the process of writing the current date and time information clocked by the clock register 97b1 into the startup date and time information storage area 94b as the startup date and time information will be described later.

The sound emission control board 91 is provided with an input/output port. The main control device 60 and the effect operation button 24 are connected to the input side of the sound emission control board 91, and the MPU 92 receives various commands from the main control device 60 and receives a predetermined signal from the effect operation button 24. . A speaker 46 and various lamps 47 are connected to the output side of the sound emission control board 91, and a display control device 100 is also connected.

The display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102, which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are integrated into chips, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. is installed. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 102, and they may be individually integrated into chips.

The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, to generate internal commands for the VDP 105). .

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and also stores JPEG format image data for background images.

A work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when various programs are executed by the MPU 102 .

The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the pattern display device 41 . The VDP 105 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is an IC chip, and is a kind of microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, etc., and intervenes in the reading and writing of data.

The character ROM 106 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as patterns displayed on the pattern display device 41 . The character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table and the like that are referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 106 . It is also possible to configure the character ROM 106 to store the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 .

The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, and by rewriting the content of the video RAM 107, the display content of the pattern display device 41 is changed.

Hereinafter, the MPU 62, ROM 63, and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main MPU 62, main ROM 63, and main RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the sound emission control device 90 are referred to as the sound and light side MPU 92 and the sound and light side, respectively. The ROM 93 and the sound/light side RAM 94 are also called, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also called the display side MPU 102 .

<<7-4>> Overview of Processing by Gaming Machine:
Next, an overview of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described.

In this embodiment, the main controller 60 of the pachinko machine 10 executes a power monitoring process for monitoring the drive voltage supplied to each device such as the main controller 60 of the pachinko machine 10. is less than the predetermined value, main-side power-off processing, which is processing for dealing with the power supply being cut off, is executed. The main side power-off processing is processing such as saving the register of the main side CPU 62 x to the main side RAM 64 . The details of the main-side power-off processing will be described later.

In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the drive voltage is less than the predetermined value, the power switch 85a of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off from the on state prior to the main power cutoff process. Or the power switch of the island facility where the pachinko machine 10 is installed while the power switch 85a is in the ON state (hereinafter also referred to as the island power switch) from the ON state to the OFF state. It is determined whether the drive voltage has decreased due to the operation of

FIG. 287 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the periphery of the power switch 85a provided in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment. FIG. 287(A) shows how the power switch 85a is turned off, and FIG. 287(B) shows how the power switch 85a is turned on. In this embodiment, the power switch 85a employs a rocker switch that connects/disconnects the electric circuit by alternately pressing both ends of the operation button. Since the structure of the power switch 85a itself is the same as that of a general rocker switch, detailed structures such as the contact portion of the power switch 85a itself are omitted in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 287, in this embodiment, a power switch state detection sensor 85b capable of detecting whether the power switch 85a is in the OFF state or the ON state is provided. In this embodiment, the power switch state detection sensor 85b employs a push button type momentary electric contact type sensor (switch), and when the power switch 85a is in the ON state, it is pressed to close the contact. On the other hand, when the power switch 85a is in the OFF state, the contact is opened and a Low level signal is output. The main MPU 62 can determine the state of the power switch 85a (OFF state or ON state) based on the signal from the power switch state detection sensor 85b.

The power switch 85a is not limited to the rocker switch described above, and various types of switches can be employed. For example, as shown in FIG. 288, various switches such as a toggle switch with a lever-shaped (bar-shaped) operating portion and a rotary switch with a rotary operating portion as shown in FIG. 289 can be employed. FIG. 288(A) shows how the power switch 85a2 employing a toggle switch is in the OFF state, and FIG. 288(B) shows the state in which the power switch 85a2 is in the ON state. . FIG. 289(A) shows how the power switch 85a3 employing a rotary switch is in the OFF state, and FIG. 289(B) shows the state in which the power switch 85a3 is in the ON state. . Thus, the power switch 85a of the pachinko machine 10 is not limited to the rocker switch described above, and various types of switches can be employed. As in FIG. 287, the detailed structure of the contact portion of the toggle switch itself and the detailed structure of the contact portion of the rotary switch itself are omitted.

Further, the power switch state detection sensor 85b is not limited to the electrical contact type sensor described above, and various sensors can be employed. For example, various switches such as optical sensors (photoswitches) and magnetic sensors can be employed.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 287, 288, and 289, the power switch state detection sensor 85b is configured to detect the ON state of the power switch 85a (turns ON when the power switch 85a is ON, and outputs a High level signal). However, as another example, a configuration that detects the OFF state of the power switch 85a (a configuration that turns ON when the power switch 85a is OFF and outputs a High level signal) may be used. Further, the power switch state detection sensor 85b may be provided at both the position where the power switch 85a is ON and the position where the power switch 85a is OFF. With this configuration, it is possible to improve the detection accuracy of the state of the power switch 85a. In this configuration, an error may be notified when there is a contradiction between the signals from the two power switch state detection sensors 85b.

Let us return to the control of the main MPU 62 .

When the drive voltage becomes less than a predetermined value, the main MPU 62 determines whether the power switch 85a is in the ON state or the OFF state based on the signal from the power switch state detection sensor 85b. When it is determined that the switch 85a is ON, the main side abnormal power interruption flag stored in the main side RAM 64 is turned ON, and then the above-described main side power interruption processing is executed. The main side abnormal power failure flag is a flag for determining whether the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure was the ON state or the OFF state when the power is turned on next time. Specifically, when the power is turned on, the main side abnormal power failure flag is ON if the power switch 85a was in the ON state at the time of the previous power failure. If the state of the switch 85a is OFF, it is OFF.

In this embodiment, the power supply device 85 is provided with a capacitor 87 as a backup power supply, and after the power supply from the commercial power supply is cut off, the power supply is switched to the power supply from the capacitor 87 . Therefore, even after the driving voltage becomes less than the predetermined value, the electric power necessary for completing the main-side power-off process is ensured. In addition, the state of the main side abnormal power failure flag stored in the main side RAM 64 is also held until the next startup. As a modification, a capacitor for securing the power required to complete the main side power interruption processing (main side power interruption processing capacitor) and a capacitor for retaining (backing up) the state of the main side RAM 64 (main-side RAM backup capacitor) may be provided separately. In this configuration, the main-side power-off processing capacitor may be provided, for example, in the power supply device 85 to supply power to the entire main control device 60 . Further, the main side RAM backup capacitor may be connected only to the main side RAM 64, for example, so that backup power is supplied only to the RAM 64 concerned.

After that, the main MPU 62 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment refers to the main side abnormal power failure flag at the time of the next startup after the power supply is started, so that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is determined. is in the OFF state or in the ON state. When it is determined that the main side abnormal power failure flag is not ON, that is, when it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure was in the OFF state, the normal power failure command is controlled by sound emission control. Send to device 90 . The normal power outage command is a command for notifying the sound emission control device 90 that the power switch 85a was in the OFF state at the time of the previous power outage.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the main side abnormal power failure flag is ON, that is, if it is determined that the power switch 85a was in the ON state at the time of the previous power failure, the abnormal power failure command is controlled by sound emission control. Send to device 90 . The abnormal power failure command is a command for notifying the sound emission control device 90 that the power switch 85a was in the ON state at the time of the previous power failure.

The audio emission control device 90 turns off the sound and light side abnormal power interruption flag stored in the sound and light side RAM 94 when receiving the normal power interruption command, and when receiving the abnormal power interruption command. , the sound and light side abnormal power interruption flag is turned ON.

As described above, the main side abnormal power interruption flag and the sound/light side abnormal power interruption flag are generated when power interruption occurs when the administrator or the like shifts the power switch 85a from the ON state to the OFF state. is turned off when the pachinko machine 10 is started by displacing the power switch 85a from the off state to the on state. The pachinko machine 10 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state or the power failure occurs due to the occurrence of a power failure, and then the administrator or the like shifts the island power switch from the OFF state to the ON state or the power failure is restored. is ON when the is started.

After starting the pachinko machine 10, the sound emission control device 90 executes various processes based on the state of the sound and light side abnormal power interruption flag.

First, the processing relating to the RTC effect will be described.

In the present embodiment, the sound emission control device 90 executes processing for setting the RTC effect to a state in which the RTC effect cannot be executed when the sound and light side abnormal power interruption flag is OFF. is ON, a process for setting the RTC effect to an executable state is executed. That is, when the power switch 85a is switched from the ON state to the OFF state to cause a power failure, and then the pachinko machine 10 is started by the power switch 85a being switched from the OFF state to the ON state, the RTC effect is performed. While the power switch 85a is in the ON state, the island power switch is changed from the ON state to the OFF state, or a power failure occurs. When the pachinko machine 10 is started due to the island power switch being changed from the OFF state to the ON state or the power failure being restored, the process of setting the RTC performance to the executable state is executed. The RTC effect is a effect that is executed based on the current date and time (current year, date, time, day of the week, etc.), elapsed time from a predetermined date and time, and the like. Hereinafter, prior to a specific description of the present embodiment, a game hall in which a plurality of pachinko machines 10 are installed will be described, and then the RTC effect will be described.

Generally, in a game hall where a plurality of pachinko machines 10 are installed, power supply to the plurality of pachinko machines 10 is started all at once (simultaneously). Specifically, a plurality of pachinko machines 10 are installed in a so-called island facility with their respective power switches 85a turned on. Electric power supply is started all at once (simultaneously) to the plurality of pachinko machines 10 that are running.

In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 reads the current date and time information from the clock register 97b1 of the RTC 97 based on the start of the supply of power from the outside to the pachinko machine 10, and stores the read current date and time information. A process of storing the start date/time information in the start date/time information storage area 94b of the sound/light side RAM 94 (hereinafter also referred to as "startup date/time information storage process") is executed. Then, the start date and time information storage process is executed based on the start date and time information including the date and time when the start date and time information storage process was executed and the current date and time information clocked by the clock register 97b1 of the RTC 97. The activation elapsed time, which is the elapsed time since then, is calculated, and the execution of the RTC presentation is started based on the calculated activation elapsed time. The effects of adopting this configuration will be described.

Suppose that, unlike the present embodiment, the execution of the RTC effect is started based on the current date and time information clocked in the clock register 97b1 of the RTC 97, instead of the activation elapsed time after the activation date and time information storage processing is executed. (For example, when the time included in the current date and time information reaches 11:00:00, the RTC presentation is started) will be described. In this configuration, if there is a deviation in the current date and time information clocked by the clock register 97b1 of each pachinko machine 10 installed in the island facility (for example, at a certain moment, the current date and time information of the pachinko machine 10A is 11:00:00 and the time included in the current date and time information of the pachinko machine 10B is 10:59:52), the timing at which the RTC effect is started is set for each pachinko machine. There is a problem that each pachinko machine 10 is different, and a player who expects the RTC performance to be started all at once (simultaneously) at each pachinko machine 10 installed on the island equipment feels uncomfortable.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, each pachinko machine 10 installed in the island facility receives the clock register of the RTC 97 based on the start of power supply from the outside to the pachinko machine 10. The current date/time information is read from 97b1, and the start date/time information storage process is executed to store the read current date/time information as start date/time information in the start date/time information storage area 94b. Therefore, for example, when the manager of the gaming hall turns on the island power switch, power supply to the plurality of pachinko machines 10 installed in the island facility is started all at once (simultaneously), and the island facility Each installed pachinko machine 10 simultaneously (simultaneously) executes start date/time information storage processing.

Then, according to the present embodiment, each pachinko machine 10 installed in the island facility stores start-up date and time information including the date and time when the start-up date and time information storage process was executed, and clocked in the clock register 97b1 of the RTC 97. Based on the current date and time information stored, the time elapsed since the start date and time information storage process was executed is calculated. As described above, each pachinko machine 10 installed in the island facility simultaneously (simultaneously) executes the activation date/time information storage processing. The elapsed time from the start is the same (or substantially the same) even if there is a deviation in the time contained in the current date and time information clocked in the clock register 97b1 of the RTC 97 of each pachinko machine 10.

Then, according to the present embodiment, each pachinko machine 10 installed on the island facility starts the RTC effect based on the calculated elapsed activation time. (simultaneously) to start the RTC effect.

However, in the pachinko machine 10 having such a configuration, by turning on the island power switch, power is supplied all at once (at the same time) to the plurality of pachinko machines 10 installed in the island facility. For the purpose of changing the setting information, the power switch 85a of one pachinko machine 10 is individually switched from the ON state to the OFF state to cut off the power supply, and the power switch 85a is again switched from the OFF state to the ON state. If the setting change mode is activated by the setting change mode, the activation date and time information storage processing will be executed even when the power supply is started for the second time, so other pachinko machines installed in the island facility 10, a problem arises that the start timing of the RTC effect in the one pachinko machine 10 is different from that of the other pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加In particular, since it takes about one minute to change the setting information, the one pachinko machine 10 whose setting information has been changed starts the RTC presentation about one minute behind the other pachinko machines 10.例文帳に追加will be In general, since the RTC performance time is about 5 minutes, the RTC performance in the one pachinko machine 10 whose setting information is changed overlaps with the RTC performance in the other pachinko machine 10 in a deviated state. A problem arises in that the game is executed and interferes with the game, giving the player a feeling of displeasure.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the power switch 85a of the pachinko machine 10 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state to cut off the power supply, and then the power switch 85a is switched from the OFF state to the ON state to start up, That is, if the abnormal power failure flag is OFF at the time of activation, the RTC effect is set to a non-executable state. As a result, for example, since the RTC effect is not executed in one pachinko machine 10 activated in the setting change mode, the RTC effect in the one pachinko machine 10 deviates from the RTC effect in the other pachinko machine 10. It is possible to suppress overlapping execution and interference in a state in which the game is over, and to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable.

On the other hand, while the power switch 85a of the pachinko machine 10 remains in the ON state, the island power switch is turned from the ON state to the OFF state. When it is activated by the fact that the abnormal power interruption flag is ON at the time of activation, the RTC effect is set to the executable state. As a result, it is possible to execute the RTC effect at the same (or substantially the same) timing as the other pachinko machines 10 installed in the island facility.

Next, the processing related to the deferment suggestion effect will be described.

In the present embodiment, the sound emission control device 90 executes processing for setting a state in which the deferment suggestion effect cannot be executed when the sound and light side abnormal power failure flag is OFF. When the flag is ON, a process of setting a state in which the deferment suggestion effect can be executed is executed. That is, when the power switch 85a is switched from the ON state to the OFF state to cause a power failure, and then the pachinko machine 10 is started by the power switch 85a being switched from the OFF state to the ON state, the stationary suggestion effect is produced. On the other hand, while the power switch 85a is in the ON state, the power switch is changed from the ON state to the OFF state, or a power failure occurs. Then, when the pachinko machine 10 is started due to the island power switch being shifted from the OFF state to the ON state or the power failure being restored, processing for setting the stationary suggesting performance to a state in which it can be executed is executed. The stationary suggestion effect will be described below prior to a detailed description of the present embodiment.

The deferment suggestion effect is an effect that can be executed if the setting information has not been changed at startup (when the power is turned on). ). In this embodiment, as the stationary suggestion effect, a effect is adopted in which the effect operation button 24 moves slightly forward (toward the player) and then returns to its original position. However, it is possible to adopt various forms of effects as the stationary suggestive effects. For example, a specific character (for example, a specific female character) is displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 in a predetermined display form for several seconds. Directly indicate that the setting information has been deferred or may have been deferred by means of an effect that displays the degree of It is possible to adopt a suggestive production or the like. In addition, in this embodiment, the timing of starting the first game round (fluctuation of special symbols) after turning on the power is adopted as the timing of executing the stationary suggestive effect. However, various timings can be adopted as the timing for executing the stationary suggestion effect. It is possible to adopt the timing of execution of the first specific effect (for example, specific super reach effect).

According to such a configuration, the player confirms whether or not the deferment suggestion effect is executed, thereby determining whether or not the setting information is deferred when the pachinko machine 10 is activated this time (that is, whether or not the setting information is deferred). changed or not) can be predicted. More specifically, for example, when there is a pachinko machine 10 with a high jackpot winning frequency in a certain gaming hall, the player sets the setting information of the pachinko machine 10 to a value with a high jackpot winning probability (for example, setting 6 ). Then, when the player plays a game at the pachinko machine 10 in the game hall on the next day and the deferment suggestive effect is executed, the player maintains the high setting of the previous day. It can be expected that Therefore, according to this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting whether or not the setting information of the pachinko machine 10 has been left unchanged from the previous day.

However, if the configuration of the present embodiment described above is not adopted and the setting information is not changed at the time of startup (when the power is turned on), regardless of the state of the sound and light side abnormal power interruption flag, the deferment suggestion presentation If a configuration capable of executing

For example, in a certain gaming hall, there is a specific pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter referred to as the specific pachinko machine 10) operating with setting 6, and a certain player pays out a large number of balls at the specific pachinko machine 10. is obtained. Then, the player and other players watching the large number of balls will recognize that the specific pachinko machine 10 is a high setting machine.

After that, after the business of the game hall is closed, the malicious manager of the game hall turns the island power switch from the ON state to the OFF state to include the specific pachinko machine 10 installed in the island facility. Power supply to a plurality of pachinko machines 10 is cut off. Then, before the start of business on the next business day, the manager switches the island power switch from the OFF state to the ON state to supply power to the plurality of pachinko machines 10 installed in the island facility. to start. After that, the administrator temporarily cuts off the power supply to the specific pachinko machine 10 by turning the power switch 85a of the specific pachinko machine 10 from the ON state to the OFF state. The setting change mode is started by shifting the power switch 85a from the OFF state to the ON state while performing an operation for starting the setting change mode, and the setting information is changed from 6 to 1 in the setting change mode. Then, by switching the power switch 85a of the specific pachinko machine 10 again from the ON state to the OFF state, the power supply to the specific pachinko machine 10 is cut off again. After that, when the administrator again shifts the power switch 85a of the specific pachinko machine 10 from the OFF state to the ON state to normally start the specific pachinko machine 10 (the setting information remains 1), the pachinko machine 10 It becomes a state in which the deferment suggestion production can be executed.

Then, when the game hall starts operating, a player who has obtained a large number of balls on the previous day (or the previous business day) or another player who has seen the large number of balls is 10, when the game is played and the deferment suggestion effect is executed, the player decides that the specific pachinko machine 10 is deferred (changed) with the same high setting state as the previous day (or the previous business day). is not set).

That is, depending on the operation of the game hall manager, the setting information in the pachinko machine 10 is actually changed from that of the previous day (or the previous business day), but the deferment suggestion effect can be executed. Then, a problem arises that the player may be deceived.

Then, as described above, in the game hall where the power supply to the plurality of pachinko machines 10 is simultaneously started and stopped by the island power switch of the island facility, the pachinko machine 10 operates the individual power switch 85a. If the power supply is cut off or started due to the , there is a high possibility that the setting information has been changed since the previous day (or the previous business day).

Therefore, in this embodiment, as described above, when the sound and light side abnormal power interruption flag is OFF at the time of startup, that is, the power switch 85a of the pachinko machine 10 is displaced from the ON state to the OFF state to stop the power supply. When the power switch 85a is turned off and then turned on by shifting from the off state to the on state, processing for setting the stationary suggestion effect to a state in which execution is disabled is executed. According to such a configuration, even if the game hall is operated like the above-mentioned game hall, the stationary suggestion effect is not executed in the specific pachinko machine 10, so that the player is prevented from being deceived. can be done.

<<7-5>> Various processes executed in the main controller:
Next, an example of specific control executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described. First, the processing performed by the main controller 60 will be described, and then the processing performed by the sound emission control device 90 will be described.

Next, an example of processing executed by the main MPU 62 of the main controller 60 of this embodiment will be specifically described.

The main MPU 62 of this embodiment executes main processing and timer interrupt processing. The main processing is processing that is executed after the power is turned on.

FIG. 290 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) of the seventh embodiment when power is turned on.

In step Sr0101, initial setting processing is executed upon power-on. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer of the main side CPU 62x, and the sub-side control devices (audio emission control device 90, display control device 100, payout control device 70, etc.) are operable. Wait processing is executed for about one second, for example, to wait for the state to be established. Then, access to the main RAM 64 is permitted. After that, the process advances to step Sr0102 to execute setting processing of the internal function register. After that, the process proceeds to step Sr0103.

In step Sr0103, it is determined whether or not the main side abnormal power interruption flag is ON. As described above, the main side abnormal power failure flag is a flag for determining whether the power switch 85a was in the ON state or the OFF state at the time of the previous power failure when the power is turned on next time. be. Specifically, the main side abnormal power failure flag is ON when the power switch 85a was in the ON state at the time of the previous power failure. is in the OFF state, it is OFF.

If it is determined in step Sr0103 that the main side abnormal power interruption flag is not ON (step Sr0103: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr0104 to transmit a normal power interruption command to the sound emission control device 90. After that, the process proceeds to step Sr0106, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr0103 that the main side abnormal power interruption flag is ON (step Sr0103: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr0105 and an abnormal power interruption command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. After that, the process proceeds to step Sr0106. Note that the normal power interruption command and the abnormal power interruption command are commands for notifying the sound emission control device 90 of the state of the power switch 85a (type of power interruption) at the time of the previous power interruption. Also called

In step Sr0106, it is determined whether or not the power recovery flag is ON.

Here, the power recovery flag will be described. In this embodiment, when the power switch 85a of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off or when a power failure occurs, various information stored in the register of the main side CPU 62x (information indicating the game state, control information, etc.) is saved in a predetermined area of the main RAM 64 . When the saving of the information to the main RAM 64 is completed, the power recovery flag is turned ON, and a predetermined calculation is performed based on a predetermined information group stored in the main RAM 64. A RAM determination value (for example, a checksum value) is calculated, and the calculated RAM determination value is stored in the main RAM 64 . Thus, the power restoration flag is a flag for identifying whether or not information for restoring the state at the time of the previous power failure is stored in the main RAM 64 when the power is turned on. Note that after the power supply from the commercial power source is cut off, the above-described save processing, RAM determination value calculation processing, and the like can be executed by power supply from a backup power source such as a capacitor.

If it is determined in step Sr0106 that the power recovery flag is ON (step Sr0106: YES), the process advances to step Sr0107 to execute a predetermined calculation based on a predetermined information group stored in the main RAM 64. Then, the RAM determination value is calculated. In this embodiment, the checksum value of the main RAM 64 is calculated as the RAM determination value. After that, the process proceeds to step Sr0108 to determine whether or not the calculated RAM determination value (checksum value) is normal. checksum value). If it is determined in step Sr0108 that the RAM determination value is normal (step Sr0108: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr0109.

In step Sr0109, setting information for lottery setting stored in the main RAM 64 is read, and it is determined whether or not the setting information is a numerical value within a predetermined range. In this embodiment, since the setting information set in the pachinko machine 10 is six levels from "1" to "6", if the setting information is a numerical value within the range from "1" to "6" determines that the setting information is a numerical value within a predetermined range. , it is determined that the setting information is not a numerical value within a predetermined range. If it is determined in step Sr0109 that the setting information is a numerical value within the predetermined range (step Sr0109: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr0110.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the power recovery flag is not ON in step Sr0106 described above (step Sr0106: NO), if it is determined that the RAM determination value is not normal in step Sr0108 described above (step Sr0108: NO), and If it is determined in step Sr0109 that the setting information is not a numerical value within the predetermined range (step Sr0109: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr0118 to turn on the RAM abnormality flag. That is, the RAM abnormality flag is turned ON when the power recovery flag is OFF, when the RAM determination value is not normal, or when the setting information is not a numerical value within a predetermined range, This flag indicates that the information stored in the main RAM 64 is not normal.

The flow of processing executed when the RAM abnormality flag is not turned ON will be described below, and then the flow of processing executed when the RAM abnormality flag is turned ON will be described.

In step Sr0110, it is determined whether or not the setting changing flag is ON. The setting changing flag is a flag that turns ON at the start of setting change processing (setting change mode), which will be described later, and turns OFF at the end of the setting change processing (setting change mode). Here, the situation in which the setting change flag is ON in step Sr0110 means that when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on last time, the setting change process (setting change mode) described later is executed, and the setting change process ( During execution of the setting change mode), the power switch 85a of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off or a power failure occurs, so that the setting change flag remains ON.

If it is determined in step Sr0110 that the setting changing flag is ON (step Sr0110: YES), the process advances to step Sr0121 to execute setting change processing (setting change mode). In the setting change process (setting change mode), a process of displaying the setting information of the lottery setting on the information display section 45z is executed, and a process of receiving a change of the setting information of the lottery setting is executed. That is, the setting change mode is a mode in which the administrator or the like can change the setting information of the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 . Details of the setting change process (setting change mode) will be described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr0110 that the setting changing flag is not ON (step Sr0110: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr0111.

In step Sr0111, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 66a is ON. If it is determined in step Sr0111 that the RAM clear switch 66a is not ON (step Sr0111: NO), the process advances to step Sr0112 to determine whether all of the setting key, frame opening switch, and door opening switch are ON. judge. Note that "the setting key is ON" means that the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion portion 66b (keyhole) and positioned on the ON side. The frame open switch is a switch that is turned on when the inner frame 13 is in an open state with respect to the outer frame 11, and the door open switch is in an open state with the front door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 13. It is a switch that is turned ON when

If it is determined in step Sr0112 that at least one of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch is not ON (step Sr0112: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr0113.

In step Sr0113, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation flag is ON. The setting confirmation flag is a flag that turns ON when setting confirmation processing (setting confirmation mode), which will be described later, is started, and turns OFF when the setting confirmation processing (setting confirmation mode) ends. Here, the situation in which the setting confirmation flag is ON in step Sr0113 means that when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on last time, the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) described later is executed, and the setting confirmation process ( During execution of the setting confirmation mode), the power switch 85a of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off or a power failure occurs, so that the setting confirmation flag remains ON.

If it is determined in step Sr0113 that the setting checking flag is not ON (step Sr0113: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr0114 to transmit a normal activation command to the sound emission control device 90. FIG. The normal start command is not determined to be RAM abnormal, and the pachinko machine 10 (main controller 60) is in a normal state in which none of the setting change processing, setting confirmation processing, and RAM clear processing described later are executed. This is a command indicating that it has started. When receiving the normal activation command, the sound emission control device 90 performs a process of notifying that the pachinko machine 10 has been activated in a normal state. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the speaker 46 is caused to output a voice such as "Normal startup". After executing step Sr0114, the process proceeds to step Sr0116, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr0112 that the setting key, frame opening switch, and door opening switch are all ON (step Sr0112: YES), and if the setting checking flag is ON in step Sr0113, If so (step Sr0113: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr0115. That is, when the RAM clear switch 66a is OFF when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, and the setting key, the frame opening switch and the door opening switch are all ON, and the previous time of the pachinko machine 10 The setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) is executed when the power is turned on, and the power switch 85a of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off or a power failure occurs during the execution of the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode). If the checking flag remains ON, the process proceeds to step Sr0115.

In step Sr0115, setting confirmation processing is executed. In the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode), a process of displaying the setting information of the current lottery setting on the information display section 45z is executed. That is, the setting confirmation mode is a mode in which the administrator or the like can confirm the setting information of the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 . The details of the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) will be described later. After executing step Sr0115, the process proceeds to step Sr0116.

In step Sr0116, power restoration processing is executed to restore the state at the time of the previous power OFF. Specifically, in the power restoration process, the value of the stack pointer saved in the main RAM 64 is written to the stack pointer of the main CPU 62x, and the data saved in the main RAM 64 is restored to the register of the main CPU 62x. , restores the state of the register of the main side CPU 62x to the state before the power was cut off. After executing step Sr0116, the process proceeds to step Sr0117, and the power recovery flag of the main RAM 64 is turned OFF. After that, the process proceeds to step Sr0126, which will be described later.

On the other hand, in step Sr0111 described above, if it is determined that the RAM clear switch 66a is ON (step Sr0111: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr0120, where the setting key, frame open switch, and door open switch are all turned ON. It is determined whether or not. In step Sr0120, if it is determined that all of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch are ON (step Sr0120: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr0121, and the setting change process (setting change mode). After that, the process proceeds to step Sr0126, which will be described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr0120 that at least one of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch is not ON (step Sr0120: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr0122.

In step Sr0122, it is determined whether or not the above-described RAM abnormality flag is ON. If it is determined in step Sr0122 that the RAM abnormality flag is not ON (step Sr0122: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr0123 to execute RAM clear processing. The RAM clearing process is a process of erasing (clearing to 0) the information stored in the main RAM 64, excluding the setting information of the lottery setting. That is, when the RAM clearing process is executed, various flag information indicating the game state, various control information, etc. are erased, but the setting information of the lottery setting is not erased, and the setting information is maintained as it is. After executing step Sr 0123 , the process proceeds to step Sr 0124 to transmit a RAM clear command, which is a command indicating that the RAM clear processing has been executed, to the sound emission control device 90 . As will be described later, upon receiving the RAM clear command, the sound emission control device 90 starts one of the above-described RAM clear notification processes A, B1, and B2. After executing step Sr0124, the process proceeds to step Sr0126, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr0122 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step Sr0122: YES), the process advances to step Sr0125 to emit a RAM abnormality command, which is a command indicating that the main side RAM 64 is abnormal. Send to control device 90 . As will be described later, upon receiving the RAM abnormality command, the sound emission control device 90 starts RAM abnormality notification processing. After executing step Sr0125, the process proceeds to step Sr0126. However, in the flow of this description, since the RAM abnormality flag is not ON, the process does not proceed to step Sr0125 described above.

In step Sr0126, a lighting/blinking process, which is a process of lighting and blinking all the light emitting parts (the segment light emitting part and the DP light emitting part) constituting the information display part 45z, is executed. In the lighting and blinking process, all the light emitting units constituting the information display unit 45z are lit for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds), and then synchronized and blinked for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds). After executing step Sr0126, the process proceeds to step Sr0127.

At step Sr0127, an interrupt permission setting is executed to permit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. Thereafter, an infinite loop is repeated to wait, and a timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is periodically executed (every 4 ms in this embodiment).

Next, the flow of processing executed when the RAM abnormality flag is turned ON in step Sr0118 will be described.

As described above, if it is determined that the power recovery flag is not ON in step Sr0106 (step Sr0106: NO), if it is determined that the RAM determination value is not normal in step Sr0108 (step Sr0108: NO), and step If it is determined in Sr0109 that the setting information is not a numerical value within the predetermined range (step Sr0109: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr0118 to turn on the RAM abnormality flag. After that, the process proceeds to step Sr0119.

In step Sr0119, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 66a is ON. If it is determined in step Sr0119 that the RAM clear switch 66a is ON (step Sr0119: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr0120 to determine whether the setting key, frame opening switch, and door opening switch are all ON. determine whether In step Sr0120, if it is determined that all of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch are ON (step Sr0120: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr0121, and the setting change process (setting change mode). After that, the process proceeds to step Sr0125. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr0119 that the RAM clear switch 66a is not ON (step Sr0119: NO), and in step Sr0120 it is determined that at least one of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch is not ON. If so (step Sr0120: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr0122.

In step Sr0122, it is determined whether or not the above-described RAM abnormality flag is ON. If it is determined in step Sr0122 that the RAM abnormality flag is not ON (step Sr0122: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr0123 to execute the above-described RAM clear processing. After executing step Sr 0123 , the process proceeds to step Sr 0124 to transmit a RAM clear command, which is a command indicating that the RAM clear processing has been executed, to the sound emission control device 90 . After executing step Sr0124, the process proceeds to step Sr0125. However, in the flow of this description, since the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the process does not proceed to step Sr0123 described above.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr0122 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step Sr0122: YES), the process advances to step Sr0125 to emit a RAM abnormality command, which is a command indicating that the main side RAM 64 is abnormal. Send to control device 90 . After executing step Sr0125, the process proceeds to step Sr0126.

In step Sr0126, the lighting flashing process described above is executed. After executing step Sr0126, the process advances to step Sr0127 to execute interrupt permission setting for permitting the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. Thereafter, infinite loop processing is repeated to wait, and timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is periodically executed (every 4 ms in this embodiment).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the operation for executing the setting change process (setting change mode) is performed by pressing the RAM clear switch 66a (ON state) and pressing the setting key (ON state). keyhole), the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch are all turned on, and the power switch 85a is turned on. Further, the operation for executing the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) is performed by setting the RAM clear switch 66a to a non-depressed state (OFF state) and setting the setting key (keyhole), the frame opening switch and the door. This is an operation to turn on the power switch 85a while all the opening switches are turned on. The operation for executing the RAM clearing process is to press down the RAM clear switch 66a (turn it ON) and turn OFF any of the setting key (keyhole), the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch. This is an operation to turn on the power switch 85a in the state where the

An example of the flow of processing realized by executing the main processing described above will be collectively described below.

・When the power supply is started, it is determined whether or not the main side abnormal power interruption flag is ON (step Sr0103), and if it is determined that the main side abnormal power interruption flag is OFF (step Sr0103: NO), and transmits a normal power interruption command to the sound emission control device 90 (step Sr0104). A disconnection command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 (step Sr0105). After that, one of the following processing flows is performed.

・After transmitting either the normal power interruption command or the abnormal power interruption command, it is determined whether or not the condition for turning on the RAM abnormality flag is satisfied (step Sr0106, step Sr0108, step Sr0109), but the setting is changed. If an operation for executing processing (setting change mode) has been performed, regardless of whether or not the condition for turning on the RAM abnormality flag is met, the state of the setting checking flag is changed. Regardless, the setting change process (setting change mode) is executed (step Sr0121).

・After transmitting either the normal power interruption command or the abnormal power interruption command, it is determined whether or not the condition for turning on the RAM abnormality flag is satisfied (step Sr0106, step Sr0108, step Sr0109), and the RAM abnormality flag is determined. When it is determined that the setting change flag is ON (step Sr0110: YES) when it is determined that the condition for turning ON is not satisfied, the setting change process (setting change mode) is executed. , the operation for executing the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode), and the operation for executing the RAM clearing process, regardless of whether or not the operation is performed, the setting change process (setting change mode) is executed. (step Sr0121).

・After transmitting either the normal power interruption command or the abnormal power interruption command, it is determined whether or not the condition for turning on the RAM abnormality flag is satisfied (step Sr0106, step Sr0108, step Sr0109), and the RAM abnormality flag is determined. When it is determined that the condition for turning ON is not satisfied, it is determined that the setting change flag is not ON (step Sr0110: NO), and an operation for executing RAM clear processing has been performed (step Sr0111: YES, step Sr0120: NO, step Sr0122: NO), regardless of the state of the setting checking flag, execute RAM clear processing (step Sr0123), and transmit a RAM clear command (step Sr0124). .

・After transmitting either the normal power interruption command or the abnormal power interruption command, it is determined whether or not the condition for turning on the RAM abnormality flag is satisfied (step Sr0106, step Sr0108, step Sr0109), and the RAM abnormality flag is determined. When it is determined that the condition for turning ON is not satisfied, it is determined that the setting change flag is not ON (step Sr0110: NO), and the operation for executing the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) is performed. If it has been done (step Sr0111: NO, step Sr0112: YES), setting confirmation processing (setting confirmation mode) is executed (step Sr0115).

・After transmitting either the normal power interruption command or the abnormal power interruption command, it is determined whether or not the condition for turning on the RAM abnormality flag is satisfied (step Sr0106, step Sr0108, step Sr0109), and the RAM abnormality flag is determined. When it is determined that the condition for turning ON is not satisfied, it is determined that the setting change flag is not ON (step Sr0110: NO), and the operation for executing the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) is performed. Even if it is not performed, if the setting confirmation flag is ON (step Sr0113: YES), the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) is executed (step Sr0115).

・After transmitting either the normal power interruption command or the abnormal power interruption command, it is determined whether or not the condition for turning on the RAM abnormality flag is satisfied (step Sr0106, step Sr0108, step Sr0109), and the RAM abnormality flag is determined. is turned ON, and the RAM abnormality flag is turned ON (step Sr0118), even if an operation for executing RAM clear processing has been performed, A RAM abnormality command is transmitted without executing RAM clear processing (step Sr0125).

・After transmitting either the normal power interruption command or the abnormal power interruption command, it is determined whether or not the condition for turning on the RAM abnormality flag is satisfied (step Sr0106, step Sr0108, step Sr0109), and the RAM abnormality flag is determined. is turned ON, and the RAM abnormality flag is turned ON (step Sr0118), if an operation for executing the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) has been performed Even so, the RAM abnormality command is transmitted without executing the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) (step Sr0125).

Next, the details of the setting change process shown in step Sr0121 in FIG. 290 will be described.

FIG. 291 is a flow chart showing setting change processing executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) of the seventh embodiment.

In step Sr<b>0201 , a setting change mode start command, which is a command indicating that the setting change mode has started, is sent to the sound emission control device 90 .

After transmitting the setting change mode start command to the sound emission control device 90, information indicating that the setting change mode has started may be transmitted to the hall computer of the game hall via the external terminal. In this case, the hall computer that receives the information indicating that the setting change mode has started may be configured to display the information of the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode on the management screen. After executing step Sr0201, the process proceeds to step Sr0202.

In step Sr0202, the setting changing flag in the main RAM 64 is turned ON. The setting change flag is a flag indicating that the setting change process (setting change mode) has started, as described above, and a flag indicating that the setting change process (setting change mode) has not yet ended. is. After executing step Sr0202, the process proceeds to step Sr0203.

In step Sr0203, initial setting processing at the start of setting change is executed. In the initial setting process at the start of setting change, initial settings necessary for starting the setting change process are executed. Further, in the present embodiment, in the initial setting process at the start of setting change, it is determined whether or not the RAM abnormality flag is ON, and if it is determined that the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the RAM abnormality flag is Turn off. After executing step Sr0203, the process proceeds to step Sr0204.

In step Sr0204, the setting information of the lottery setting stored in the main RAM 64 is read and saved as update setting information. Specifically, in this embodiment, the setting information of the lottery setting stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is read, and the read setting information is stored in another area of the main RAM 64 other than the setting information storage area. Store (copy) to the update setting information storage area. After executing step Sr0204, the process proceeds to step Sr0205.

In step Sr0205, the update setting information stored in the update setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is read, and control for displaying the read update setting information on the information display section 45z is started. Specifically, the left three 7-segment displays of the information display section 45z are caused to start lighting display of the character string "set." Then, the lighting display of the setting information for updating is started, and the flashing display of the DP light-emitting part of the rightmost 7-segment display is started. After executing step Sr0205, the process proceeds to step Sr0206.

In step Sr0206, it is determined whether or not the update setting information is a numerical value within a predetermined range. In this embodiment, since the setting information set in the pachinko machine 10 has six levels from "1" to "6", the update setting information is a numerical value within the range from "1" to "6". Determine whether or not If it is determined in step Sr0206 that the update setting information is a numerical value within the predetermined range (step Sr0206: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr0208. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr0206 that the update setting information is not a numerical value within the predetermined range (step Sr0206: NO), for example, if "0" or "7" is stored as the update setting information Alternatively, if information other than numerical values is stored due to noise or the like, the process advances to step Sr0207 to change the update setting information to the initial value. In this embodiment, "1" is stored as the initial value in the update setting information. After that, the process proceeds to step Sr0208.

In step Sr0208, it is determined whether or not the setting key (setting key insertion unit 66b) has shifted from the ON side to the OFF side. Specifically, in the present embodiment, a signal indicating a high level while the setting key (setting key insertion unit 66b) is on the ON side. While the unit 66b) is on the OFF side, the signal indicating the Low level is monitored, and when the falling edge of the signal falling from the High level to the Low level is detected, the setting key (setting It is determined that the key inserting portion 66b) has been turned OFF. If it is determined in step Sr0208 that the setting key (setting key insertion unit 66b) has not shifted from the ON side to the OFF side (step Sr0208: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr0209, and the setting change switch 66c is pressed. If it is determined in step Sr0209 that the setting change switch 66c has been pressed (step Sr0209: YES), the process advances to step Sr0210 to update the update setting information. Specifically, 1 is added to the numerical value information stored as update setting information. However, when the setting change switch 66c is pressed in a situation where the numerical value information stored as update setting information is "6", the numerical value information is updated to "1". After that, returning to step Sr0206 described above, it is determined whether or not the updated setting information for update is a numerical value within a predetermined range. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr0209 that the setting change switch 66c has not been pressed (step Sr0209: NO), the process returns to step Sr0206 without executing the process of step Sr0210, and the setting information for update is updated. is a numerical value within a predetermined range.

If it is determined in step Sr0208 described above that the setting key (setting key insertion unit 66b) has shifted from the ON side to the OFF side (step Sr0208: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr0211.

In step Sr0211, it is determined whether or not the update setting information stored in the update setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is the same as the setting information stored in the setting information storage area. If it is determined in step Sr0211 that the update setting information is not the same as the setting information (step Sr0211: NO), that is, if the setting information has been changed by an administrator or the like, the process proceeds to step Sr0212, and the setting has been changed. Turn on the flag. The setting change completion flag is a flag for determining whether or not the setting information has been changed when transmitting a setting change mode end command, which will be described later. After executing step Sr0212, the process proceeds to step Sr0213. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr0211 that the update setting information is the same as the setting information (step Sr0211: YES), that is, if the setting information has not been changed by the administrator or the like, step Sr0212 is executed. Without it, the process proceeds to step Sr0213.

In step Sr0213, the update setting information stored in the main RAM 64 is read and saved as setting information. Specifically, in this embodiment, the update setting information stored in the update setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is read, and the read update setting information is stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64. Memorize (copy). After executing step Sr0213, the process advances to step Sr0214 to start lighting display of the setting information on the rightmost 7-segment display and switch the display mode of the DP light emitting section of the rightmost 7-segment display from blinking display to lighting display. After that, the process advances to step Sr0215 to execute wait processing. The wait process waits for two seconds without proceeding to the next process. As a result, the character string "set." The state in which the DP light-emitting portion of the rightmost 7-segment display is illuminated continues for 2 seconds. After that, the process proceeds to step Sr0216, and the control for displaying the setting information on the information display section 45z ends. Specifically, the four 7-segment displays that constitute the information display section 45z are turned off. After that, the process proceeds to step Sr0217.

In step Sr0217, it is determined whether or not the above-described setting changed flag is ON. If it is determined in step Sr0217 that the setting changed flag is not ON (step Sr0217: NO), that is, if the setting information has not been changed by the administrator or the like, the process proceeds to step Sr0218, and the setting information has not been changed. First, a setting change mode end command A, which is a command indicating that the setting change mode has ended, is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . After that, the process proceeds to step Sr0220. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr0217 that the setting changed flag is ON (step Sr0217: YES), that is, if the setting information has been changed by the administrator or the like, the process proceeds to step Sr0219, and the setting information is changed. Then, a setting change mode end command B, which is a command indicating that the setting change mode has ended, is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . After that, the process proceeds to step Sr0220.

After transmitting the setting change mode end command A or B to the sound emission control device 90, information indicating that the setting change mode has ended may be transmitted to the hall computer of the game hall via the external terminal. In this case, the hall computer that receives the information indicating that the setting change mode has ended may display information indicating that the setting change mode of the pachinko machine 10 has ended on the management screen.

In step Sr0220, RAM clear processing is executed. In the RAM clearing process, information other than the setting information of the lottery setting stored in the setting information storage area of the main side RAM 64 is erased. That is, when this RAM clearing process is executed, the setting change flag and the setting change completed flag are also cleared (turned OFF).

After executing step Sr0220, this setting change process ends. After executing the setting change process, the setting information of the lottery setting after the change is transmitted to the hall computer of the game hall via the external terminal, and the hall computer receiving the information displays the pachinko machine on the management screen. 10 may be configured to display the setting information of the lottery setting after the change.

Details of the setting confirmation process shown in step Sr0115 in FIG. 290 will now be described.

FIG. 292 is a flow chart showing setting confirmation processing executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) of the seventh embodiment.

In step Sr 0301 , a setting confirmation mode start command, which is a command indicating that the setting confirmation mode has started, is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . When receiving the setting confirmation mode start command, the sound emission control device 90 starts the above-described setting confirmation mode in-execution notification process.

After transmitting the setting confirmation mode start command to the sound emission control device 90, information indicating that the setting confirmation mode has started may be transmitted to the hall computer of the game hall via the external terminal. In this case, the hall computer that receives the information indicating that the setting confirmation mode has started may be configured to display the information of the pachinko machine 10 in the setting confirmation mode on the management screen. After executing step Sr0301, the process proceeds to step Sr0302.

In step Sr0302, the setting confirmation flag in the main RAM 64 is turned ON. The setting confirmation flag is a flag indicating that the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) has started, as described above, and a flag indicating that the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) has not yet ended. is. After executing step Sr0302, the process proceeds to step Sr0303.

In step Sr0303, the control for displaying the setting information of the lottery setting stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 on the information display section 45z is started. Specifically, as described above, the left three 7-segment displays of the information display section 45z are caused to start lighting display of the character string "sec." The 7-segment display is caused to start lighting display of the setting information, and the lighting display of the DP light emitting portion of the right end 7-segment display is started. After executing step Sr0303, the process proceeds to step Sr0304.

In step Sr0304, it is determined whether or not the setting key (setting key insertion unit 66b) has shifted from the ON side to the OFF side. Specifically, in the present embodiment, a signal indicating a high level while the setting key (setting key insertion unit 66b) is on the ON side. While the unit 66b) is on the OFF side, the signal indicating the Low level is monitored, and when the falling edge of the signal falling from the High level to the Low level is detected, the setting key (setting It is determined that the key insertion unit 66b) has shifted from the ON side to the OFF side. If it is determined in step Sr0304 that the setting key (setting key insertion unit 66b) has not shifted from the ON side to the OFF side (step Sr0304: NO), step Sr0304 is executed again. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr0304 that the setting key (setting key insertion unit 66b) has shifted from the ON side to the OFF side (step Sr0304: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr0305. That is, the infinite loop is repeated until the setting key (setting key insertion unit 66b) shifts from the ON side to the OFF side, and the process does not proceed to step Sr0305. If it shifts from the side to the OFF side, the process advances to step Sr0305.

In step Sr0305, the control for displaying the setting information of the lottery setting on the information display section 45z ends. Specifically, the four 7-segment displays that constitute the information display section 45z are turned off. As a result, the three 7-segment displays on the left of the information display section 45z light up and display the character string "sec." The state in which the DP light-emitting portion of the display is illuminated continues after the setting confirmation mode is started until the setting key (setting key insertion portion 66b) shifts to the OFF side. After executing step Sr0305, the process proceeds to step Sr0306.

In step Sr0306, the setting changing flag in the main RAM 64 is turned OFF. After that, the process proceeds to step Sr0307.

In step Sr0307, a setting confirmation mode end command, which is a command indicating that the setting confirmation mode has ended, is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. FIG. As will be described later, when the setting confirmation mode end command is received, the sound emission control device 90 ends the setting confirmation mode in-execution notification process, and then executes the above-described setting confirmation mode termination notification process for 30 seconds.

After executing step Sr0307, this setting confirmation process is terminated. After transmitting the setting confirmation mode end command to the sound emission control device 90, information indicating that the setting confirmation mode has ended may be transmitted to the hall computer of the game hall via the external terminal. In this case, the hall computer that receives the information indicating that the setting confirmation mode has ended may display information indicating that the setting confirmation mode of the pachinko machine 10 has ended on the management screen.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the power switch 85a of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on and the pachinko machine 10 is started, the above-described normal startup command, RAM abnormality command, RAM clear command, setting change mode start command , setting confirmation mode start command is transmitted from the main controller 60 to the sound emission control device 90 . Upon receiving one of these five commands, the sound emission control device 90 determines in what manner the main control device 60 was started based on the type of the received command (what type of command). ) can be grasped. That is, the above-described five commands, ie, the normal startup command, the RAM error command, the RAM clear command, the setting change mode start command, and the setting confirmation mode start command are commands indicating the type of startup processing executed by the main controller 60. Therefore, these five commands are also collectively referred to as "activation type commands".

Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. Timer interrupt processing is started periodically (for example, every 4 msec) by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 .

FIG. 293 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) of the seventh embodiment. In step Sr0401, various random number updating processes are executed. In various random number update processes, the current numerical information is read from each counter (hit random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, electric accessory opening counter C4, etc.) in the main side RAM 64, and the read numerical information is After executing the process of adding 1, the process of overwriting the numerical information after the addition to the reading source counter is executed. When the read numerical value information is the maximum value of the counter, a process of overwriting the read source counter with 0 is executed. After executing step Sr0401, the process proceeds to step Sr0402.

In step Sr0402, a power monitoring process is executed. In the power monitoring process, the drive voltage supplied from the power supply device 85 to the main control device 60 is monitored, and when it is determined that the drive voltage is below a predetermined value (for example, 10 volts), the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 Determining that the switch 85a has been turned off or that a power failure has occurred, saves various information (information indicating the game state, control information, etc.) stored in the register of the main side CPU 62x to a predetermined area of the main side RAM 64 Let When the saving of the information to the main RAM 64 is completed, the power recovery flag is turned ON, and a predetermined calculation is performed based on a predetermined information group stored in the main RAM 64. A RAM determination value (for example, a checksum value) is calculated, and the calculated RAM determination value is stored in the main RAM 64 . After that, without proceeding to step Sr0403, which will be described later, the infinite loop processing is repeated until the supplied drive voltage drops and the device becomes inoperable. Note that the power supply device 85 of the present embodiment is used as a drive voltage in a control system such as the main controller 60 even when the drive voltage supplied to the main controller 60 drops below a predetermined value. It is configured to output a regulated voltage of 5 volts. As for the time during which this stabilized voltage is output, sufficient time is ensured for executing the processing up to storing the above-described RAM determination value in the main-side RAM 64 . Further, as will be described later, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the driving voltage has fallen below a predetermined value, it is determined whether or not the power switch 85a is in the OFF state. When it is determined that the above-mentioned main side abnormal power failure flag is turned ON.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the power supply monitoring process of step Sr0402 that the drive voltage supplied from the power supply 85 to the main controller 60 is not below the predetermined value, the process proceeds directly to step Sr0403.

In step Sr0403, it is determined whether or not at least one of the RAM abnormality flag and the game stop flag is ON. As described above, the RAM abnormality flag is a flag that turns ON when it is determined that the information stored in the main RAM 64 is not normal in the main process executed when the power is turned on. The game stop flag is a flag that turns ON in order to stop the progress of the game when shaking or magnetism is detected in the fraud detection process. When it is determined in step Sr0403 that both the RAM abnormality flag and the game stop flag are not ON (step Sr0403: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr0404. On the other hand, in step Sr0403, when it is determined that at least one of the RAM abnormality flag or the game stop flag is ON (step Sr0403: YES), this timer interrupt processing is terminated without executing the processing after step Sr0404. do. That is, when at least one of the RAM abnormality flag and the game stop flag is ON, the processing for enabling the progress of the game after step Sr0404 is not executed, and the game progress mode is entered in which the progress of the game is possible. is configured not to migrate. The processing after step Sr0404, which is the processing for enabling the progress of the game, will be described below.

In step Sr0404, port output processing is executed. In the port output process, when the output information has been set in the previous timer interrupt process, a process for outputting corresponding to the output information to the various driving units 36c and 34b is executed. For example, when information is set to switch the large winning opening 36a to the open state, output of a drive signal to the variable winning drive unit 36c is started, and when information to switch to the closed state is set Stop the output of the drive signal. Further, when the information to switch the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the electric accessory driving unit 34b is started, and the information to switch to the closed state is set. When set, the output of the drive signal is stopped. After that, the process proceeds to step Sr0405.

In step Sr0405, read processing is executed. In the reading process, signals other than the incoming ball signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing. After that, the process proceeds to step Sr0406.

In step Sr0406, signals received from each of the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h are read, and ball entry detection processing for performing processing corresponding to the read information is executed. After executing step Sr0406, the process proceeds to step Sr0407.

In step Sr0407, a timer update process is executed to collectively update numerical information of a predetermined timer counter provided in the main RAM 64. FIG. After that, the process proceeds to step Sr0408.

In step Sr0408, the ball entry process for the starting opening accompanying the entry of the game ball to the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34 is executed. In the ball entry process for the starting port, the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are determined based on the determination that the game ball has entered the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. While acquiring the value, the acquired counter value is stored in the pending information storage area 64b of the RAM64. After executing step Sr0408, the process proceeds to step Sr0409.

In step Sr0409, ball entry processing for the through gate accompanying entry (passage) of the game ball to the through gate 35 is executed. In the ball entry process for the through gate, the value of the electric accessary product opening counter C4 is acquired based on determination that the game ball has entered (passed through) the through gate 35, and the acquired counter value is stored in the RAM 64. It is stored in the electric service reservation area 64d. After executing step Sr0409, the process proceeds to step Sr0410.

In step Sr0410, game round control processing for controlling the game in each game round is executed. In the game round control process, winning lottery, display control of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b, and the like are performed. After executing step Sr0410, the process proceeds to step Sr0411.

In step Sr0411, game state transition processing is executed to shift the game state. In the game state transition processing, processing is executed to shift the game state to an opening/closing execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, or the like. After executing step Sr0411, the process proceeds to step Sr0412.

In step Sr0412, an electric role support process for controlling the electric accessory 34a is executed. In the electric role support process, it is determined whether or not to open the electric role product 34a (electric role product opening lottery), and when it is determined to be in the open state, the electric role product 34a is driven and controlled. After executing step Sr0412, the process proceeds to step Sr0413.

In step Sr0413, game ball launch control processing is executed. In the game ball shooting control process, a process for shooting a game ball to the game area PA when the operation handle 25 is operated by the player is executed. After executing step Sr0413, the process proceeds to step Sr0414.

In step Sr0414, door monitoring processing is executed. In the door monitoring process, it is monitored whether the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 are open. After executing step Sr0414, the process proceeds to step Sr0415.

In step Sr0415, fraud detection processing is executed. In the fraud detection process, shaking and magnetism are monitored, and when shaking and magnetism are detected, an alarm sound or voice such as "Shake detected!" "Magnetism detected!" At the same time, various lamps 47 are blinked at maximum brightness. Further, in the fraud detection process, the above-described game stop flag is turned ON when shaking or magnetism is detected. As a result, after the game stop flag is turned ON, execution of the processing from step Sr0404 to step Sr0417 is avoided. After executing step Sr0415, the process proceeds to step Sr0416.

In step Sr0416, a command output process for outputting (transmitting) the command set as a transmission target in the current timer interrupt process to each sub-side control device is executed. For example, when commands related to effects such as variation commands, type commands, and hold commands are set, these commands are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . After executing step Sr0416, the process proceeds to step Sr0417.

In step Sr0417, game history processing for calculating and displaying game history information is executed. The game history process is a process for calculating game history information such as the role ratio and the payout rate, and displaying the calculated game history information on the information display section 45z. After executing step Sr0417, the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Details of the power supply monitoring process shown in step Sr0402 in FIG. 293 will now be described.

FIG. 294 is a flow chart showing power monitoring processing executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) of the seventh embodiment. In step Sr0501, it is determined whether or not the driving voltage supplied from the power supply device 85 to the main controller 60 is less than a predetermined value (for example, 10 volts). If it is determined in step Sr0501 that the driving voltage is not less than the predetermined value (step Sr0501: NO), this power supply monitoring process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr0501 that the drive voltage is less than the predetermined value (step Sr0501: YES), the process advances to step Sr0502 to determine whether the power switch 85a is in the OFF state.

If it is determined in step Sr0502 that the power switch 85a is in the OFF state (step Sr0502: YES), the process proceeds to step S0503 to turn off the main side abnormal power failure flag. After that, the process proceeds to step Sr0505, which will be described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr0502 that the power switch 85a is not in the OFF state (step Sr0502: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr0504 to turn ON the main side abnormal power interruption flag. After that, the process proceeds to step Sr0505.

In step Sr<b>0505 , a power failure occurrence command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . The power failure occurrence command is a command for notifying the sound emission control device 90 that the drive voltage has become less than a predetermined value. After that, the process proceeds to step Sr0506.

In step Sr0506, various information (information indicating the game state, control information, etc.) stored in the register of the main CPU 62x is saved in a predetermined area of the main RAM 64. FIG. After that, the process advances to step Sr0507 to save the information stored in the stack pointer of the main CPU 62x in a predetermined area of the main RAM 64. FIG. After that, the process advances to step Sr0508 to turn on the power recovery flag. After that, the process advances to step Sr0509 to calculate a RAM determination value (for example, a checksum value) by executing a predetermined calculation based on a predetermined information group stored in the main RAM 64, and transfer the calculated RAM determination value to the main RAM 64. stored in the side RAM 64. After that, the process proceeds to step Sr0510, and after prohibiting the RAM access, the infinite loop processing is repeated until the supplied driving voltage drops and the operation becomes impossible.

The processing from step Sr0505 to step Sr0510, which is executed when it is determined that the drive voltage supplied from the power supply device 85 to the main controller 60 is less than the predetermined value, corresponds to the above-described main-side power-off processing. do.

[Ball entry processing for the starting port]
Next, the ball entry process for the start opening will be described. The ball entry process for the starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 293: Sr0408).

FIG. 295 is a flow chart showing the ball entry process for the starting opening executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) of the seventh embodiment. In step Sr0601, it is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first starting port 33 whether or not the game ball has entered the first starting port 33 (starting ball). In step Sr0601, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the first starting port 33 (Sr0601: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr0602, and the prize ball for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out four game balls set command. After that, the process proceeds to step Sr0603.

In step Sr0603, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal that the game ball has entered the first starting hole 33 to the management control device on the game hall side. After that, the process proceeds to step Sr0604.

In step Sr0604, the start suspension number RaN (hereinafter also referred to as the first start suspension number RaN), which is the value stored in the suspension number storage area of the first reservation area Ra, is read, and the first start suspension number RaN will be described later. Set as a target for processing. The first start suspension number RaN indicates the number of suspensions based on the entry of game balls into the first start port 33 . After that, the process proceeds to step Sr0609.

In step Sr0601, if it is determined that the game ball has not entered the first start port 33 (Sr0601: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr0605, whether or not the game ball entered the second start port 34 is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second starting port 34 .

In step Sr0605, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34 (Sr0605: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr0606, and the prize ball for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out one game ball set command. After that, the process proceeds to step Sr0607. On the other hand, in step Sr0605, when it is determined that the game ball has not entered the second starting hole 34 (Sr0605: NO), the ball entering process for this starting hole ends.

In step Sr0607, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that the game ball has entered the second starting hole . After that, the process proceeds to step Sr0608.

In step Sr0608, the start pending quantity RbN (hereinafter also referred to as second start pending quantity RbN), which is the value stored in the reserved quantity storage area of the second reserve area Rb, is read out, and the second start pending quantity RbN will be described later. Set as a target for processing. The second start suspension number RbN indicates the number of suspensions based on the entry of game balls into the second start port 34 . After that, the process proceeds to step Sr0609.

In step Sr0609, it is determined whether or not the number of start suspensions N (RaN or RbN) set in step Sr0604 or step Sr0608 is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment). In step Sr0609, if the number N of start suspensions is not less than the upper limit (Sr0609: NO), that is, if the number N of start suspensions is equal to or greater than the upper limit, the ball-entering process for this starting opening ends.

On the other hand, in step Sr0609, if the number N of pending start-ups is less than the upper limit (Sr0609: YES), proceed to step Sr0610, add 1 to the number N of pending start-up of the corresponding reserved area, and then proceed to step Sr0611. , adds 1 to the value stored in the total pending number storage area (hereinafter referred to as the total pending number CRN). The total pending number CRN indicates the sum of the first pending start number RaN and the second pending start number RbN. After that, the process proceeds to step Sr0612.

In step Sr0612, each value of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is the first storage area among the empty storage areas of the corresponding reservation area, that is, the number of reservations added with 1 in step Sr0610 Store in the corresponding storage area. Specifically, when the first start reservation number RaN is set as a processing target, each value of the winning random number counter C1, the big winning type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is set to the vacancy of the first reservation area Ra It is stored in the first storage area of the storage areas, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start pending number RaN to which 1 is added in step Sr0610. In addition, when the second start pending number RbN is set as a processing target, each value of the winning random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the free storage area of the second holding area Rb. It is stored in the first storage area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second start suspension number RbN to which 1 is added in step Sr0610. After executing step Sr0612, the process proceeds to step Sr0613.

In step Sr0613, it is determined whether or not the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is a numerical value within a predetermined range. In this embodiment, since the setting information that can be set in the pachinko machine 10 is six levels from "1" to "6", the setting information is "1", "2", "3", "4", " It is determined whether the numerical value is either 5 or 6. If it is determined in step Sr0613 that the setting information is a numerical value within the predetermined range (step Sr0613: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr0614.

In step Sr0614, the first determination process is executed. The first determination process is based on the information (holding information) of each value of the winning random number counter C1, the big winning type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. It is a process of executing determination of the presence or absence of such pending information before the main control device 60 becomes a target of a winning lottery. The details of the first determination process will be described later. After executing step Sr0614, the process proceeds to step Sr0615.

In step Sr0615, processing for setting a pending command is executed. Concretely, the decision result of previous decision processing which is executed on the basis of the information of each value (pending information) of hit random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2 and reach random number counter C3 is set as a hold command.

The hold command indicates that the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 has occurred, and the determination result by the previous determination process based on the hold information acquired based on the entry, to the hold This is a command for making the sub-side control device confirm the information before the information becomes the object of the winning lottery by the main control device 60 . The hold command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the above-described command output process (FIG. 293: step Sr0416).

In addition, when the sound emission control device 90 receives the hold command transmitted based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33, the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 A command is sent to the display control device 100 to make changes in response to an increase in the number of pending items. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first reserved display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of reserved characters. On the other hand, when receiving the hold command transmitted based on the ball entering the second starting port 34, the sound emission control device 90 displays the second hold display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41. A command is sent to the display control device 100 to make the change corresponding to the increase. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second reserved display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of reserved characters.

After executing step Sr0615, the main MPU 62 ends the ball-entering process for this starting opening.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr0613 that the setting information is not a numerical value within the predetermined range, for example, due to the influence of noise, etc. If it is determined that an impossible value is stored (step Sr0613: NO), the process advances to step Sr0616 without executing the previous determination process of step Sr0614 described above, and sets an abnormality pending command. The abnormal hold command is a command indicating that the setting information was not a numerical value within a predetermined range when the game ball entered the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 . The abnormality hold command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the above-described command output process (FIG. 293: step Sr0416). After step Sr0616 is executed, the ball entry processing for this starting opening is terminated.

[Prior judgment processing]
Next, the preceding determination processing will be described. The first determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 295: Sr0614) of the ball entry process for the starting opening.

FIG. 296 is a flow chart showing the first determination process executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) of the seventh embodiment. As described above, in the first determination process, based on the pending information, determination results such as determination of winning lottery, determination of type of big win, determination of presence or absence of reach occurrence, etc. This is a process that is executed before the lottery is targeted.

In step Sr0701, the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the storage area is read out by the entry of the game ball into the starting hole in the ball entering process for the starting hole (FIG. 295). After that, the process advances to step Sr0702 to determine the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery for the current ball entry is executed as a game round. Specifically, the judgment result of the previous judgment process executed by the ball entry before the current ball entry is read from the corresponding storage area, and whether or not there is a probability variable jackpot that occurs before the winning lottery due to the current ball entry is determined, the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery for the current ball entry is executed as a game round is determined.

In step Sr0702, when it is determined that the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery due to the current ball entry is executed as a game round is the low probability mode (Sr0702: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr0703 and corresponds to the setting information. refer to the success/failure table for the low-probability mode. As described above, the main controller 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has six kinds of low-probability modes corresponding to each of six stages of lottery settings from "lottery setting 1" to "lottery setting 6". A success/failure table is provided, and the main MPU 62 refers to the success/failure table for the low-probability mode corresponding to the setting information indicating the lottery setting. Specifically, for example, when the value of the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is "1", the success/failure table for the low-probability mode corresponding to the lottery setting 1 is referred to. . After that, the process proceeds to step Sr0705, and as a result of referring to the success/failure table for the low-probability mode, it is determined whether or not the value information of the winning random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to a big winning. Note that an example of the success/failure table for six types of low-probability modes has already been described in aspect 57, so description thereof will be omitted here.

On the other hand, in step Sr0702, if it is determined that the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery due to the current ball entry is executed as a game round is not the low probability mode (Sr0702: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr0704, and the high probability mode refer to the hit/fail table. After that, the process proceeds to step Sr0705, and as a result of referring to the success/failure table for the high-probability mode, it is determined whether or not the value of the hit random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to a big win. In the present embodiment, one type of high-probability mode success/failure table is referred to regardless of the lottery setting. A success/failure table for the mode may be prepared, and the success/failure table for the high-probability mode corresponding to the lottery setting may be referred to.

In step Sr0705, when it is determined that the value of the hit random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to a big hit (Sr0705: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr0706, and is stored in the storage area by the ball entering the starting port this time. Read the value of the jackpot type counter C2. After that, the process advances to step Sr0707 to refer to the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 63b. Specifically, when the jackpot type counter C2 to be distributed this time is obtained based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33, the first start port distribution table , and if it is acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting hole 34, the distribution table for the second starting hole is referred to. After executing step Sr0707, the process proceeds to step Sr0708.

In step Sr0708, as a result of referring to the distribution table, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot type counter C2 read this time corresponds to the variable probability jackpot. In step Sr0708, when it is determined that it corresponds to the probability variable jackpot (Sr0708: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr0709, and the probability variable jackpot information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64f. After that, the preceding determination process is terminated. On the other hand, in step Sr0708, when it is determined that it does not correspond to the variable probability jackpot (Sr0708: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr0710, and the normal jackpot information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64f. After that, the preceding determination process is terminated.

In step Sr0705, if it is determined that the value of the hit random number counter C1 read this time does not correspond to the big hit (Sr0705: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr0711, and the entry into the starting port this time causes the storage area to be stored. Read out the stored value of the reach random number counter C3. After that, the process advances to step Sr0712 to refer to the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sr0713, and as a result of referring to the reach determination table, it is determined whether or not the value of the reach random number counter C3 read this time corresponds to the occurrence of reach.

In step Sr0713, when it is determined that reach occurrence is supported (Sr0713: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr0714, and reach occurrence information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64f. After that, the preceding determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr0713 that the reach occurrence is not supported (Sr0713: NO), the first determination process is terminated.

[Ball entry processing for through gate]
Next, the ball entry processing for the through gate will be described. Ball entry processing for the through gate is executed by MPU 62 of main controller 60 as a timer interrupt processing subroutine (FIG. 293: Sr0409).

FIG. 297 is a flow chart showing a through-gate ball entry process executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) of the seventh embodiment. In step Sr0801, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered (passed through) the through gate 35 or not. In step Sr0801, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the through gate 35 (Sr0801: YES), proceed to step Sr0802, whether the accessory reserved number SN is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) determine whether or not Incidentally, the accessory reserved number SN is a value indicating the number of balls entered into the through gate 35 reserved for performing the electric accessory open lottery. In this embodiment, the maximum value of the number SN of reserved accessory items is four. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sr0801 that the game ball has not entered the through gate 35 (Sr0801: NO), this through ball entering processing is terminated.

In step Sr0802, when it is determined that the value is less than the upper limit value (less than 4) of the reserved role number SN (Sr0802: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr0803, and 1 is added to the reserved role number SN. After that, the process proceeds to step Sr0804.

In step Sr0804, the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4 updated in step Sr0401 (FIG. 293) is stored in the first storage area among the empty storage areas of the electrician holding area 64c of the RAM64. After that, the ball entry processing for the through gate ends.

On the other hand, in step Sr0802, if it is determined that the value of the reserved accessory number SN is not less than the upper limit (Sr0802: NO), that is, if it is determined that the value of the reserved accessory number SN is equal to or greater than the upper limit, Without storing the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4, the through ball entry processing is ended.

[Game spin control process]
Next, game round control processing will be described. The game round control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 293: step Sr0410).

FIG. 298 is a flow chart showing game round control processing executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) of the seventh embodiment. In step Sr0901, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode flag in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. As will be described later, the opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON at the timing of shifting to the opening/closing execution mode after the fluctuation of the symbols in the game round in which the big win is won, and is turned OFF at the timing of ending the opening/closing execution mode.

In step Sr0901, if it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON (Sr0901: YES), it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, and the present game cycle is executed without executing any of the processes after step Sr0902. End the control process. That is, when the open/close execution mode is in progress, the game round is not started regardless of whether or not the game ball enters the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. . On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr0901 that the open/close execution mode is not in progress (Sr0901: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr0902.

In step Sr0902, it is determined whether or not the main display section 45 is performing variable display. Specifically, it is determined whether or not one of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b is performing variable display. This determination is made by determining whether or not the variable display flag in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The variable display flag is turned ON when the variable display is started for either the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b, and is turned OFF when the variable display is terminated.

In step Sr0902, when it is determined that the main display unit 45 is not performing variable display (Sr0902: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr0903 to step Sr0905 for game round start processing. In step Sr0903, it is determined whether or not the total pending number CRN is "0". When the total pending number CRN is "0", it means that the start pending number is "0" for both the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34. FIG. Therefore, in step Sr0903, when it is determined that the total number of reserved cards CRN is "0" (Sr0903: YES), this game round control process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sr0903 that the total pending number CRN is not "0" (Sr0903: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr0904.

In step Sr0904, the data stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb is executed reservation information shift processing for setting the state after the start of fluctuation, and the process proceeds to step Sr0905. Details of the pending information shift process will be described later.

In step Sr0905, a variation start process for starting the variation display on the main display section 45 and the variation display on the pattern display device 41 is executed. The details of the fluctuation start process will be described later. After that, the process proceeds to step Sr0906.

At step Sr0906, 1 is subtracted from the value of the number-of-games counter PNC. The number-of-games counter PNC is a counter for counting the number of games played in the high-frequency support mode. After executing step Sr0906, this game round control process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sr0902 that the main display section 45 is performing variable display (Sr0902: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr0907.

In step Sr0907, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the current game round has elapsed. As described above, the variation time is the time from when the symbol row starts to vary until all the symbol rows stop, and is part of the unit game time. Specifically, in step Sr0907, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable time information stored in the variable time counter area (various counter area 64d) of the RAM 64 has become "0". The value of the variable time information is set in the variable time setting process (FIG. 302) described later. The value of this set variable time information is decremented by 1 each time timer interrupt processing is started.

If it is determined in step Sr0907 that the variable time has not elapsed (Sr0907: NO), the process advances to step Sr0908 to execute variable display processing. The variable display process is a process of changing the display mode in the result display section for the current game round. After executing step Sr0908, this game round control process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sr0907 that the fluctuation time has elapsed (Sr0907: YES), the process advances to step Sr0909 to execute fluctuation end processing. In the fluctuation ending process, the stop symbol determined in the hit determination process (FIG. 301), which will be described later, is stopped and displayed on the main display section 45 as the result of the current game round. After executing step Sr0909, the process proceeds to step Sr0910.

In step Sr0910, it is determined whether or not any of the jackpot flags stored in the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The jackpot flag is a flag that is turned ON when a jackpot is won in the hit determination process (FIG. 301) to be described later. In step Sr0910, when it is determined that any of the jackpot flags are ON (Sr0910: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr0911, and the open/close execution mode flag is turned ON. After that, the game round control process is terminated. On the other hand, in step Sr0910, when it is determined that none of the jackpot flags are ON (Sr0910: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr0912.

In step Sr0912, it is determined whether or not the total pending number CRN is "0". In step Sr0912, when it is determined that the total pending number CRN is "0" (Sr0912: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr0913 to set a customer waiting command. The customer waiting command is used to make the sound emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub-side, recognize that no hold information is stored in the hold information storage area 64b at the time when the pattern variation (game cycle) ends. is a command that contains information about The customer waiting command set in step Sr0913 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the above-described command output process (FIG. 293: step Sr0416). On the other hand, in step Sr0912, when it is determined that the total pending number CRN is not "0" (Sr0912: NO), this game round control process is terminated.

[Holding information shift process]
Next, the pending information shift process will be described. The pending information shift process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game round control process (FIG. 298: Sr0904).

FIG. 299 is a flow chart showing pending information shift processing executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) of the seventh embodiment. In step Sr1001, it is determined whether or not the reservation area to be processed for execution of the reservation information shift process is the first reservation area Ra. Specifically, the first stored hold information (hold information stored in the first area of the first reserve area Ra information) is the first stored hold information (stored in the first area of the second hold area Rb) among the hold information stored chronologically in the second hold area Rb (Fig. 282). is stored in the reservation area prior to the reservation information), the reservation area to be processed is determined to be the first reservation area Ra. On the other hand, it is stored chronologically in the second reservation area Rb (FIG. 282) than the reservation information stored first among the reservation information chronologically stored in the first reservation area Ra (FIG. 282) When the reservation information stored first among the reserved information is stored in the reservation area first, the reservation area to be processed is determined to be the second reservation area Rb. That is, by executing the process of step Sr1001, the pending information can be processed in the order stored in the first pending area Ra or the second pending area Rb.

In step Sr1001, when it is determined that the reservation area to be processed is the first reservation area Ra (step Sr1001: YES), reservation information shift processing for the first reservation area in steps Sr1002 to Sr1007 is executed. On the other hand, in step Sr1001, if it is determined that the processing target reservation area is not the first reservation area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the processing target reservation area is the second reservation area Rb (step Sr1001: NO ), the reservation information shift processing for the second reservation area in steps Sr1008 to Sr1013 is executed.

In step Sr1002, 1 is subtracted from the first start-up reservation number RaN in the first reservation area Ra, and then the process proceeds to step Sr1003 to subtract 1 from the total reservation number CRN. After that, the process proceeds to step Sr1004. In step Sr1004, the data stored in the first area of the first reservation area Ra is moved to the execution area AE. After that, the process proceeds to step Sr1005.

In step Sr1005, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first reservation area Ra is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After executing step Sr1005, the process proceeds to step Sr1006.

In step Sr1006, if the second pattern display portion flag of the various flag storage area 64e is ON, the flag is turned OFF, and if not ON, the state is maintained. The second pattern display portion flag is information for specifying which of the first pattern display portion 37a and the second pattern display portion 37b is the target for starting the variable display this time. After that, the process proceeds to step Sr1007.

In step Sr1007, a shift command is set. The shift time command is a command including information for making the sound emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, recognize that the data in the reserved area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63, information indicating that the reservation area to which the data is to be shifted this time corresponds to the first reservation area Ra, that is, the information corresponding to the first start port 33 A shift-time command including information indicating that the shift-time command is included is selected, and the selected shift-time command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . After that, the pending information shift process is terminated.

The shift time command set in step Sr1007 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the above-described command output process (FIG. 293: step Sr0416). The sound emission control device 90 transmits to the display control device 100 a command for changing the display in the first reservation display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations, based on the received shift command. do. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first reserved display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the decrease in the reserved number.

In step Sr1001, if it is determined that the reservation area to be processed is not the first reservation area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the reservation area to be processed is the second reservation area Rb (step Sr1001: NO), The process proceeds to step Sr1008.

In step Sr1008, 1 is subtracted from the second starting reservation number RbN in the second reservation area Rb. After that, the process proceeds to step Sr1009. In step Sr1009, 1 is subtracted from the total pending number CRN, and the process advances to step Sr1010 to move the data stored in the first area of the second pending area Rb to the execution area AE. After that, the process proceeds to step Sr1011.

In step Sr1011, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second reservation area Rb is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After executing step Sr1011, the process proceeds to step Sr1012.

In step Sr1012, when the second pattern display portion flag of the various flag storage area 64e is not ON, the flag is turned ON, and when it is ON, the state is maintained. After that, the process proceeds to step Sr1013.

In step Sr1013, a shift command is set. The shift time command is a command including information for making the sound emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, recognize that the data in the reserved area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63, information indicating that the reserved area to which the data is to be shifted this time corresponds to the second reserved area Rb, that is, A shift-time command including information indicating that the shift-time command is included is selected, and the selected shift-time command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . After that, the hold information shift process is terminated.

The shift command set in step Sr1013 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the above-described command output process (FIG. 293: step Sr0416). Based on the received shift time command, the sound emission control device 90 sends a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the second reservation display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations. Send. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second reserved display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the reserved number.

[Variation start processing]
Next, fluctuation start processing will be described. The fluctuation start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game round control process (FIG. 298: Sr0905).

FIG. 300 is a flow chart showing variation start processing executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) of the seventh embodiment. In step Sr1101, it is determined whether or not the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is a numerical value within a predetermined range. If it is determined that the setting information is a numerical value within the predetermined range (step Sr1101: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr1102.

In step Sr1102, hit determination processing is executed. In the hit determination process, it is determined whether or not the jackpot has been won based on the value of the hit random number counter C1 shifted to the execution area AE in the pending information shift process. The details of the hit determination process will be described later. After executing step Sr1102, the process proceeds to step Sr1103.

In step Sr1103, a variable time setting process is executed. In the variable time setting process, the variable time, which is the time required for the current game round in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b, is set based on the presence or absence of a big hit or the occurrence of ready-to-win. The details of the variable time setting process will be described later. After executing step Sr1103, the process proceeds to step Sr1104.

At step Sr1104, it is determined whether or not the second pattern display flag of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step Sr1104 that the second pattern display flag of the RAM 64 is not ON (Sr1104: NO), the process advances to step Sr1105 to set the first variation command. The first variation command includes information indicating that the current game round is related to the hold information acquired based on the winning to the first start port 33, and presence or absence of reach occurrence. and information on the variable time set in step Sr1103. On the other hand, in step Sr1104, when it is determined that the second pattern display flag is ON (Sr1104: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr1106 to set a second variation command. The second variation command includes information indicating that the current game round is related to the hold information acquired based on the winning to the second start port 34, and whether or not reach has occurred. and information on the variable time set in step Sr1103. After executing step Sr1105 or step Sr1106, the process proceeds to step Sr1107.

In step Sr1107, a type command is set. The type command includes information on the presence or absence of a big hit and the result of distribution determination. In other words, the type command includes 16R probability variable jackpot information, 8R probability variable jackpot information, 16R normal jackpot information, 8R normal jackpot information, or loss result information as jackpot type information.

The variation command and type command set in steps Sr1105 to Sr1107 are sent to the sound emission control device 90 in the above-described command output process (FIG. 293: step Sr0416). The sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect in the game round based on the received variation command and the type command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the effect is executed. After executing step Sr1107, the process proceeds to step Sr1108.

In step Sr1108, the symbol display portion corresponding to the current round of the game out of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b is caused to start the variable display of symbols. Specifically, when the second symbol display portion flag of the RAM 64 is not ON, the first symbol display portion 37a is specified as the symbol display portion corresponding to the current game round, and the variable display is started, When the second pattern display portion flag is ON, the second pattern display portion 37b is specified as the pattern display portion corresponding to the current game round, and the variable display is started. After executing step Sr1108, this fluctuation start processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Sr1101 described above, if it is determined that the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main side RAM 64 is not a numerical value within the predetermined range, the process proceeds to step Sr1109, and the game stop command is sent to the sub side. It is transmitted to the payout control device 70 and the sound emission control device 90 which are the control devices. The game stop command is a command for making the payout control device 70 and the sound emission control device 90, which are sub-side control devices, recognize that the progress of the game is to be stopped. After executing step Sr1109, the process proceeds to step Sr1110, and the game stop flag is turned ON. As a result, when the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 293) is executed, the process group for advancing the game (the process group of steps Sr0404 to Sr0416 in FIG. 293) and the game history process (step in FIG. 293) Sr0417) is avoided, and the progress of the game is stopped. After executing step Sr1110, the fluctuation start process is terminated.

[Hit determination process]
Next, hit determination processing will be described. The hit determination process is executed by MPU 62 of main controller 60 as a subroutine of variation start process (FIG. 300: Sr1102).

FIG. 301 is a flowchart showing hit determination processing executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) of the seventh embodiment. In step Sr1201, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high-probability mode flags in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 64 are ON. The high-probability mode flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the winning lottery mode is the high-probability mode by the MPU 62, and in this embodiment, it is turned ON at the end of the opening and closing execution mode related to the winning of the probability variable jackpot. , and is turned OFF when the opening/closing execution mode is started after winning the jackpot. If it is determined in step Sr1201 that the mode is the high probability mode (Sr1201: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr1202.

In step Sr1202, the success/failure determination is performed with reference to the success/failure table for the high-probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the win random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the big win in the success/failure table for the high probability mode. After that, the process proceeds to step Sr1204. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr1201 that the mode is not the high probability mode (Sr1201: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr1203.

In step Sr1203, the propriety determination is performed by referring to the propriety table for the low-probability mode corresponding to the setting information. Specifically, for example, when the value of the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is "1", the success/failure table for the low-probability mode corresponding to the lottery setting 1 is referred to. to determine whether it is correct or not. In the hit/fail judgment, it is judged whether or not the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as a jackpot winning in the hit/fail table for the low-probability mode corresponding to the setting information. do. After that, the process proceeds to step Sr1204.

In step Sr1204, it is determined whether or not the result of the success/fail determination (hit lottery) in step Sr1202 or step Sr1203 is a big hit. In step Sr1204, if the result of the success/failure determination is jackpot winning (Sr1204: YES), in steps Sr1205 to step Sr1212, to set the game result in the case of jackpot winning and to set the stop result process.

At step Sr1205, it is determined whether or not the second pattern display flag of the RAM 64 is ON. In step Sr1205, if it is determined that the second symbol display flag is not ON (Sr1205: NO), proceed to step Sr1206 and refer to the distribution table for the first start port (see FIG. 284(a)). and make a distribution judgment. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is any of the numerical range of the 16R probability variable jackpot, the numerical range of the 8R probability variable jackpot, the numerical range of the 16R normal jackpot, and the numerical range of the 8R normal jackpot. determine whether it is contained in

On the other hand, in step Sr1205, when it is determined that the second pattern display flag is ON (Sr1205: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr1207, where the distribution table for the second starting port (see FIG. 284(b)). Refer to to make a distribution judgment. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is any of the numerical range of the 16R probability variable jackpot, the numerical range of the 8R probability variable jackpot, the numerical range of the 16R normal jackpot, and the numerical range of the 8R normal jackpot. determine whether it is contained in After executing the process of step Sr1206 or step Sr1207. The process proceeds to step Sr1208.

In step Sr1208, it is determined whether or not the type of jackpot sorted out in step Sr1206 or step Sr1207 is a variable probability jackpot. In step Sr1208, when it is determined that the game result is a variable probability jackpot (Sr1208: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr1209.

In step Sr1209, stop result setting processing for probability variable jackpot is executed. The stop result setting process for the probability variable jackpot means that in the current game round that will be won by the probability variable jackpot, the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b is changed in a state where any stop result is displayed. This is a process for setting whether to end the display. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the probability variable jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step Sr1206 or step Sr1207 is obtained. It acquires and stores the address information in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After executing step Sr1209, the process proceeds to step Sr1210.

In step Sr1210, the flag (jackpot type flag) corresponding to the jackpot type sorted in step Sr1206 or step Sr1207 is turned ON. Specifically, when it is a 16R probability variable jackpot, the 16R probability variable flag is turned ON, and when it is an 8R probability variable jackpot, the 8R probability variable flag is turned ON. After that, the real hit determination process is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Sr1208, if it is determined that the type of jackpot distributed in step Sr1206 or step Sr1207 is not a variable jackpot (Sr1208: NO), that is, if the type of jackpot distributed is a normal jackpot, step Proceed to Sr1211.

In step Sr1211, stop result setting processing for normal jackpot is executed. The stop result setting process for the normal jackpot means that in the current game turn in which the normal jackpot is won, the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b fluctuates in a state in which the stop result is displayed. This is a process for setting whether to end the display. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the normal jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the type of jackpot distributed in step Sr1206 or step Sr1207 is obtained. It acquires and stores the address information in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After executing step Sr1211, the process proceeds to step Sr1212.

In step Sr1212, the flag (jackpot type flag) corresponding to the jackpot type sorted in step Sr1206 or step Sr1207 is turned ON. Specifically, the 16R normal flag is turned ON in the case of the 16R normal jackpot, and the 8R normal flag is turned ON in the case of the 8R normal jackpot. After that, the real hit determination process is terminated.

In step Sr1204, if the result of the winning lottery in step Sr1202 or step Sr1203 is not a jackpot winning (Sr1204: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr1213 to execute stop result setting processing for loss. The stop result setting process for the time of loss means that in the current game turn that results in a loss, the variation display is terminated in a state in which either the stop result is displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b. This is a process for setting whether Specifically, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is obtained by referring to the stop result table for the time of failure in the stop result table storage area 63e. and stores the address information in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After executing step Sr1213, the real winning determination process is terminated.

[Processing for setting fluctuation time]
Next, the processing for setting the variable time will be described. The variable time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variable start process (FIG. 300: Sr1103).

FIG. 302 is a flow chart showing variable time setting processing executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) of the seventh embodiment. In step Sr1301, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is obtained. After that, the process proceeds to step Sr1302.

In step Sr1302, it is determined whether or not the winning lottery for the current game round is won. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the variable probability jackpot flag or the normal jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is ON, and if either flag is ON (Sr1302: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr1303.

In step Sr1303, the variation time table for big hits stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to, and variation time information corresponding to the current value of the variation type counter CS is acquired. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variation time of the game times in which the winning lottery is won is constant. After that, the flow advances to step Sr1304 to set the acquired variable time information in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. FIG. After that, the variable time setting process ends.

In step Sr1302, when it is determined that the winning lottery related to the current game round is not won (Sr1302: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr1305 to determine whether or not reach occurs in the current game round. Since this process (Sr1305) is executed when the winning lottery related to the current game round is not won in the above step Sr1302, reach occurs among the game rounds not winning the winning lottery in step Sr1305. It is determined whether or not it is a game round. Specifically, when the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to the occurrence of reach, it is determined that reach occurs (Sr1305: YES), and the process proceeds to step Sr1306. It should be noted that the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of the ROM 63 is referred to when identifying the presence or absence of reach occurrence using the value of the reach random number counter C3.

In step Sr1306, the variation time table for reach generation stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to, and variation time information corresponding to the current value of the variation type counter CS is acquired. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the fluctuation time for reach generation is constant. After that, the flow advances to step Sr1304 to set the acquired variable time information in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. FIG. After that, the variable time setting process ends.

In step Sr1305, when it is determined that reach does not occur in this game round (Sr1305: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr1307, and the variable time table for reach non-occurrence stored in the variable time table storage area 63d is referred to. Then, the variable time corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS is obtained. After that, the flow advances to step Sr1304 to set the acquired variable time information in variable time counter areas provided in various counter areas of the RAM 64 . After that, the variable time setting process ends.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variable time information stored in the non-reach variable time table is set such that the greater the number of total pending numbers CRN, the shorter the variable time. However, it is not limited to this, and for example, it may be configured so as not to depend on the number of total pending numbers CRN, and may be set so that the smaller the number of total pending numbers CRN, the shorter the fluctuation time. Further, when the second start suspension number RbN is "0", the fluctuation time becomes shorter as the number of the first start suspension number RaN increases, and when the second start suspension number RbN is "1" or more may be set such that the larger the second start suspension number RbN, the shorter the variation time. Further, when the second start suspension number RbN is "0", the larger the number of the first start suspension number RaN, the longer the fluctuation time. may be set such that the larger the number of the second start-up pending number RbN, the longer the fluctuation time, or the variable time is constant regardless of the respective pending numbers RaN and RbN.

In addition, in the situation where the support mode is high-frequency support mode, compared to the case where the number of pending information is the same, compared to the situation where the support mode is low-frequency support mode, less fluctuation time is selected so that reach does not occur A variable time table for use may be set. However, it is not limited to this, and the selected variable times may be the same, or the above relationship may be reversed.

Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the variable time at the time of occurrence of reach, and the variable time that is easily selected and the variable time that is difficult to be selected may be different between when the big win is won and when the reach is lost. good. Also, the variable time table for probability variable jackpot, the variable time table for normal jackpot, the variable time table for loss reach, and the variable time table for complete loss may be set individually.

[Game state transition processing]
Next, the game state transition processing will be explained. The gaming state transition processing is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a timer interrupt processing subroutine (FIG. 293: Sr0411).

FIG. 303 is a flowchart showing game state transition processing executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) of the seventh embodiment. In step Sr1401, it is determined whether or not the ending period flag is ON. The ending period flag is turned ON at the start of the ending period and turned OFF at the end of the ending period. The ending period is a period for executing the ending effect in the opening/closing execution mode.

If it is determined in step Sr1401 that the ending period flag is not ON (Sr1401: NO), the process advances to step Sr1402 to determine whether or not the opening/closing process period flag is ON. The opening/closing process period flag is turned ON at the start of the opening/closing process period, and turned OFF at the end of the opening/closing process period.

If it is determined in step Sr1402 that the opening/closing processing period flag is not ON (Sr1402: NO), the process advances to step Sr1403 to determine whether or not the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is turned ON at the start of the opening period and turned OFF at the end of the opening period. The opening period is a period for executing the opening effect in the opening/closing execution mode.

In step Sr1403, when it is determined that the opening period flag is not ON (Sr1403: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr1404, timing at which the symbol variation display in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b ends. It is determined whether or not. In step Sr1404, when it is determined that it is not the timing when the variable display ends (Sr1404: NO), the game state transition processing is terminated as it is.

In step Sr1404, if it is determined that the variable display has ended (Sr1404: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr1405, and the result of the winning lottery for the current game round corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. Determine whether or not there is Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode flag of the RAM 64 is ON. When it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode flag is not ON (Sr1405: NO), this game state transition processing is terminated.

In step Sr1405, when it is determined that the result of the winning lottery for the current game round corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode (Sr1405: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr1406, where the high probability mode flag and the high frequency Among the support mode flags, the ON flag is turned OFF. After that, the process proceeds to step Sr1407. If both the high-probability mode flag and the high-frequency support mode flag are OFF in step Sr1406, the process directly proceeds to step Sr1407.

In step Sr1407, an opening time setting process is executed. The opening time setting process is a process of setting the temporal length of the opening period (hereinafter also referred to as opening time). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the third timer counter area T3 that determines the opening time. In this embodiment, "1500" (that is, 6 sec) is set in the third timer counter area T3. The third timer counter area T3 is provided in various timer counter areas 64d of the RAM64. After executing step Sr1407, the process proceeds to step Sr1408.

In step Sr1408, an opening command is set. The set opening command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the above-described command output process (FIG. 293: step Sr0416). The sound emission control device 90 sets to execute an opening effect and a right-handed informing effect based on the reception of the opening command, and starts controlling various devices so that these effects are sequentially executed. After executing step Sr1408, the process advances to step Sr1409 to turn on the opening period flag. After that, the game state transition processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sr1403 that the opening period flag is ON (Sr1403: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr1410.

In step Sr1410, it is determined whether or not the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the third timer counter area T3 is "0". If it is determined in step Sr1410 that the opening period has ended (Sr1410: YES), the process advances to step Sr1411 to turn off the opening period flag. After that, the process proceeds to step Sr1412.

In step Sr1412, round display start processing for notifying the type of the current open/close execution mode is executed. Specifically, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 is confirmed. Based on the confirmed address information, stop result data corresponding to the address information is specified from among the stop result data group stored in the ROM 63, and the content of the number of rounds is determined from the specified stop result data. confirm. After that, the content of the confirmed number of rounds is output to the round display section 39 in the main display section 45 . As a result, the round display section 39 displays the round information related to the output. After executing step Sr1412, the process proceeds to step Sr1413.

In step Sr1413, the number of rounds of the current open/close execution mode is set. Specifically, while checking the jackpot type flag (16R probability variable flag, 8R probability variable flag, 16R normal flag, 8R normal flag) stored in the RAM 64, the number of rounds corresponding to the flag is is set in the first round counter area RC1 provided in . The first round counter area RC1 is a counter area for counting the number of times the door 36b has been opened. After executing step 13913, the process proceeds to step Sr1414.

In step Sr1414, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned ON. After that, the process advances to step Sr1415 to set an opening start command. The set opening start command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the above-described command output process (FIG. 293: step Sr0416). This opening start command includes information on the number of rounds in the current opening/closing execution mode. Based on the received opening start command, the sound emission control device 90 sets to execute a round effect corresponding to the number of rounds, and controls various devices so that the set content of the round effect is executed. Start. After executing step Sr1415, the game state transition processing is terminated.

In step Sr1402, when it is determined that the opening/closing process period flag is ON (Sr1402: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr1416 to execute the big winning opening opening/closing process. Specifically, when the big winning opening 36a is closed, the variable winning driving unit 36c is brought into a driving state on the condition that the first round counter area RC1 is "1" or more, thereby winning a big prize. The mouth 36a is opened. In addition, when the big winning opening 36a is open, on the condition that the opening limit time has passed since the opening of the big winning opening 36a or that the game balls of the opening limit number have entered. The driving state of the variable winning drive section 36c is stopped, and the big winning opening 36a is closed. The details of the big winning opening opening/closing process will be described later. After executing step Sr1416, the process proceeds to step Sr1417.

In step Sr1417, it is determined whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0". When it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (Sr1417: NO), this game state transition processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" (Sr1417: YES), the process advances to step Sr1418 to turn off the opening/closing processing period flag. After executing step Sr1418, the process proceeds to step Sr1419.

In step Sr1419, round display end processing is executed. In this process, the display control of the round display portion 39 in the main display portion 45 is terminated so that the round display portion 39 is turned off. After executing step Sr1419, the process proceeds to step Sr1420.

In step Sr1420, an ending time setting process is executed. The ending time setting process is a process of setting the temporal length of the ending period (hereinafter also referred to as ending time). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the fourth timer counter area T4 that determines the ending time. In this embodiment, "1500" (that is, 6 sec) is set in the fourth timer counter area T4. The fourth timer counter area T4 is provided in various timer counter areas 64d of the RAM64. After executing step Sr1420, the process proceeds to step Sr1421.

In step Sr1421, an ending command is set. The set ending command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the above-described command output process (FIG. 293: step Sr0416). The sound emission control device 90 sets to execute the ending effect based on the reception of the ending command, and starts controlling various devices so that the ending effect is executed. After executing step Sr1421, the process proceeds to step Sr1422.

In step Sr1422, the ending period flag is turned ON. After that, the game state transition processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sr1401 that the ending period flag is ON (Sr1401: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr1423.

In step Sr1423, it is determined whether or not the ending period has ended. Specifically, in the ending time setting process (Sr1420), it is determined whether or not the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0". In step Sr1423, when it is determined that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is not "0" (Sr1423: NO), this game state transition processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sr1423 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0" (Sr1423: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr1424.

At step Sr1424, the ending period flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sr1425 to execute transition processing at the end of the ending period. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes of game rounds after the end of the current ending period. Details of the transition processing at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing step Sr1425, the process advances to step Sr1426 to turn off the opening/closing execution mode flag. After that, the process proceeds to step Sr1427.

In step Sr1427, it is determined whether or not the total pending number CRN is "0". In step Sr1427, when it is determined that the total pending number CRN is "0" (Sr1427: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr1428 to set a customer waiting command. The customer waiting command includes information for making the sound emission control device 90, which is a sub-side control device, recognize that no hold information is stored in the hold information storage area 64b when the opening/closing execution mode ends. is a command. The customer waiting command set in step Sr1428 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the above-described command output process (FIG. 293: step Sr0416). On the other hand, in step Sr1427, when it is determined that the total number of reserved coins CRN is not "0" (Sr1427: NO), this game state transition processing is terminated.

[Grand Prize Opening/Closing Process]
Next, the big winning opening opening/closing process will be described. The big winning opening opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (Fig. 302: Sr1416).

FIG. 304 is a flow chart showing the big winning opening opening/closing process executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) of the seventh embodiment. In step Sr1501, it is determined whether or not the big winning opening 36a is being opened. Specifically, the determination is made based on the drive state of the variable winning drive section 36c. When it is determined in step Sr1501 that the big winning opening 36a is not open (Sr1501: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr1502 to determine whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0". If it is determined in step Sr1502 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" (Sr1502: YES), the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr1502 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (Sr1502: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr1503.

In step Sr1503, it is determined whether or not the value of the first timer counter area T1 provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the closed continuation time of the big winning opening 36a. When it is determined in step Sr1503 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is not "0" (Sr1503: NO), the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, in step Sr1503, when it is determined that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0" (Sr1503: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr1504, and the variable winning driving unit is operated to open the big winning opening 36a. 36c is driven. After that, the process proceeds to step Sr1505.

In step Sr1505, setting processing for each round is executed. In the case of the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, all of the set winning modes are high-frequency winning modes, so "7500" (that is, 30 seconds) is set in the first timer counter area T1. Furthermore, in order to count the winning number of game balls into the big winning opening 36a, "10" is set in the winning counter area PC provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM64. The count value set in the first timer counter area T1 is decremented by 1 each time the timer update process (step Sr0407) of the timer interrupt process is executed, that is, every 4 msec. After executing step Sr1505, the process proceeds to step Sr1506.

In step Sr1506, an open command is set. After that, the main prize winning opening opening/closing process is terminated. The open command is a command including information for making the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, which are sub-side control devices, recognize that the opening of the big winning hole 36a has started. It is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the output process (FIG. 293: step Sr0416). Based on the received opening command, the sound emission control device 90 specifies that the opening of the big prize opening 36a for one round has been started, and the content of the effects in the various lamps 47 and the speakers 46 is set to the big prize opening 36a. is updated to the content corresponding to the start of opening. Further, the sound emission control device 90 transmits the above-described open command to the display control device 100 while maintaining its information format. Based on the received opening command, the display control device 100 specifies that the opening of the big winning opening 36a for one round has started, and also changes the content of the effect on the pattern display device 41 to the opening of the big winning opening 36a. Update to the content corresponding to being started.

In step Sr1501, when it is determined that the big winning opening 36a is open (step Sr1501: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr1507 to determine whether the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0". do. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the opening continuation time of the big winning opening 36a. If it is determined in step Sr1507 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is not "0" (Sr1507: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr1508.

In step Sr1508, it is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the variable winning device 36 whether or not the game ball has entered the big winning hole 36a. If it is determined in step Sr1508 that no ball has entered (Sr1508: NO), the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr1508 that a ball has entered (Sr1508: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr1509, and 1 is subtracted from the winning counter area PC. After that, the process proceeds to step Sr1510.

At step Sr1510, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter area PC is "0". If it is determined in step Sr1510 that the value of the winning counter area PC is not "0" (Sr1510: NO), the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sr1507 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0" (Sr1507: YES), or if it is determined that the value of the winning counter area PC is "0" in step Sr1510 (Sr1510: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr1511 to execute the big winning opening closing process. Specifically, the variable winning drive unit 36c is brought into a non-driving state in order to close the big winning opening 36a. After that, the process proceeds to step Sr1512.

In step Sr1512, 1 is subtracted from the value of the first round counter area RC1. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sr1513 to determine whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0". If it is determined in step Sr1513 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" (Sr1513: YES), the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr1513 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (Sr1513: NO), the process advances to step Sr1514 to set "500" (that is, 2 sec) to the first timer counter area T1. to set. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing continuation time of the big winning opening 36a. After executing step Sr1514, the process advances to step Sr1515 to set a close command. After that, the big winning opening opening/closing process is ended.

This set closing command is a command including information for making the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, which are sub-side control devices, recognize that the opening of the big winning hole 36a has been completed, and is a command including information for making the display control device 100 recognize that the opening of the big prize opening 36a has been completed. It is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 293: step Sr0416). Based on the received closing command, the sound emission control device 90 specifies that the opening of the big prize opening 36a for one round has been completed, and also changes the effect contents of the various lamps 47 and the speakers 46 to the large prize winning opening 36a. The content is updated to correspond to the end of opening. Further, the sound emission control device 90 transmits the above-described closing command to the display control device 100 while maintaining its information format. Based on the received closing command, the display control device 100 specifies that the opening of the large winning opening 36a for one round has been completed, and displays the content of the effect on the pattern display device 41. Update to match what you have done.

[Transition processing at the end of the ending period]
Next, transition processing at the end of the ending period will be described. The transition process at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a game state transition process subroutine (Fig. 303: Sr1425).

FIG. 305 is a flow chart showing transition processing at the end of the ending period executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) of the seventh embodiment. In step Sr1601, it is determined whether or not the flag corresponding to the probability variable jackpot as the jackpot type flag is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the 16R probability variation flag or the 8R probability variation flag of the RAM 64 is ON.

In step Sr1601, when it is determined that the 16R probability variation flag or the 8R probability variation flag of the RAM 64 is ON (Sr1601: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr1602 to execute the flag erasing process. Specifically, when the 16R probability variable flag, 8R probability variable flag, 16 normal flag, 8R normal flag, and high frequency support mode flag are ON, they are turned OFF, and when they are not ON, the state is maintained. . After executing step Sr1602, the process proceeds to step Sr1603.

In step Sr1603, the high-probability mode flag is turned ON, and then the process advances to step Sr1604 to turn the high-frequency support mode flag ON. As a result, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the game state shifts to a game state in which the winning/failure lottery mode is the high-probability mode and the support mode is the high-frequency support mode. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode are maintained at least until the next jackpot winning occurs. After that, the process proceeds to step Sr1605.

In step Sr1605, a high-probability mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the lottery mode is the high-probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. do. After that, the process proceeds to step Sr1610, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr1601 that the 16R normal flag or 8R normal flag of the RAM 64 is ON (Sr1601: NO), the process advances to step Sr1606 to execute flag erasing processing. Specifically, when the 16R probability variable flag, 8R probability variable flag, 16 normal flag, 8R normal flag, and high frequency support mode flag are ON, they are turned OFF, and when they are not ON, the state is maintained. . After that, the process proceeds to step Sr1607.

In step Sr1607, after turning on the high-frequency support mode flag, the process proceeds to step Sr1608, and 100 is set in the number-of-games counter PNC provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM64. The value set in the number-of-games counter PNC indicates the number of games when the number of games is limited and the high-frequency support mode is executed. After that, the process proceeds to step Sr1609.

In step Sr1609, a low-probability mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the lottery mode is the low-probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. do. After that, the process proceeds to step Sr1610.

In step Sr1610, a high-frequency support mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. set. After that, the transition processing at the end of the ending period ends.

[Electric support processing]
Next, the processing for electric support will be described. The electrical support process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control unit 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 293: Sr0412).

FIG. 306 is a flow chart showing an electric support process executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) of the seventh embodiment. In step Sr1701, it is determined whether or not it is being supported. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the supported flag in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The under-support flag is a flag that is turned ON when the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is to be opened, and is turned OFF when it is to be returned to the closed state. If it is determined in step Sr1701 that the supported flag is not ON (Sr1701: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr1702.

In step Sr1702, it is determined whether or not the support winning flag in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The support winning flag is turned ON when the electric accessary product open lottery for determining whether or not to open the electric accessary product 34a is won in the open state, and is turned OFF when the supporting flag is ON. is. If it is determined in step Sr1702 that the support winning flag is not ON (Sr1702: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr1703.

At step Sr1703, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 every time the timer update process (step Sr0407) of the timer interrupt process is executed, that is, every 4 msec.

If it is determined in step Sr1703 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sr1703: NO), the electronic support process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sr1703: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr1704.

In step Sr1704, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the variable display of symbols in the general pattern unit . If it is determined in step Sr1704 that it is time to end the variable display (Sr1704: YES), the process advances to step Sr1705 to set the off display and then ends the electronic support process. By setting the deviation display, the variable display of the symbols in the general pattern unit 38 is terminated while the deviation display is stopped. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr1704 that it is not the end timing of the variable display (Sr1704: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr1706.

In step Sr1706, it is determined whether or not the value of the reserved accessory number SN is greater than "0". If it is determined in step Sr1706 that the value of the reserved accessory number SN is "0" (Sr1706: NO), the electronic support process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sr1706 that the value of the reserved accessory number SN is larger than "0" (Sr1706: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr1707.

In step Sr1707, it is determined whether or not the open/close execution mode is in progress, and then the process advances to step Sr1708 to determine whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect. If it is not the opening/closing execution mode at step Sr1707 (Sr1707: NO) and if it is the high-frequency support mode at step Sr1708 (Sr1708: YES), the process advances to step Sr1709 to perform the electric accessory opening lottery. Specifically, the value stored in the electric role holding area 64c is shifted, and when the value of the electric role item opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 461, the electric role item opening lottery be elected. Also, at the same time as the electric accessory open lottery, "375" (ie 1.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started. After that, the process proceeds to step Sr1710.

In step Sr1710, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory open lottery in step Sr1709 is support winning. In step Sr1710, if it is determined that the result of the electric accessory open lottery is support winning (Sr1710: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr1711, the support winning flag is turned ON, and provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 "3" is set in the second round counter area RC2. The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the electric accessory 34a is released. After that, the process proceeds to step Sr1712. On the other hand, in step Sr1710, when it is determined that the result of the electric accessory open lottery is not support winning (Sr1710: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr1712 without executing the processing of step Sr1711.

In step Sr1712, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is the low probability mode. In step Sr1712, when it is determined that the lottery mode is the low probability mode (Sr1712: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr1713. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr1712 that the win/loss lottery mode is not the low-probability mode (Sr1712: NO), the electronic support process is terminated.

In step Sr1713, it is determined whether or not the number-of-games counter area is "0". The number-of-games counter is decremented by one each time one game round is completed in the low-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode. In step Sr1713, when it is determined that the number-of-games counter area is not "0" (Sr1713: NO), the electronic role support process is terminated. On the other hand, in step Sr1713, when it is determined that the number-of-games counter area is "0" (Sr1713: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr1714 to turn off the high frequency support mode flag. After that, the process proceeds to step Sr1715.

In step Sr1715, a low-frequency support mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. set. After that, the electronic support processing is terminated.

The low-frequency support mode command set in step Sr1715 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the above-described command output process (FIG. 293: step Sr0416). Upon receiving the low-frequency support mode command, the sound emission control device 90 identifies that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, and executes corresponding processing.

If it is determined in step Sr1707 that it is in the opening/closing execution mode (Sr1707: YES), or if it is determined in step Sr1718 that it is not in the high-frequency support mode (Sr1708: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr1716, and the electric accessory open lottery I do. Specifically, the value stored in the electric role holding area 64c is shifted, and when the value of the electric role item opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 or 1, the electric role item opening lottery is performed. be elected. Also, at the same time as the electric accessory open lottery, "7375" (that is, 29.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. After that, the process proceeds to step Sr1717.

In step Sr1717, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory open lottery in step Sr1716 is support winning. In step Sr1717, if it is determined that the support has not been won (Sr1717: NO), the electronic support process is terminated. On the other hand, in step Sr1717, when it is determined that the support winning is determined (Sr1717: YES), the process advances to step Sr1718, the support winning flag is turned ON, and "1" is set in the second round counter area RC2. , terminates the electronic support process.

If it is determined in step Sr1702 that the support win flag is ON (Sr1702: YES), the process advances to step Sr1719 to determine whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38. In step Sr1719, when it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sr1719: NO), since the pattern is being changed and displayed in the normal figure unit 38, the main electric role support process is performed as it is. exit. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr1719 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sr1719: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr1720.

In step Sr1720, a win display is set. As a result, the variation display of the pattern in the normal pattern unit 38 is terminated while the win display is stopped. After that, the process advances to step Sr1721 to turn on the supporting flag and turn off the support winning flag. After that, the electronic support process is terminated.

In step Sr1701, when it is determined that the support flag is ON (Sr1701: YES), the process advances to step Sr1722 to execute an electric opening/closing control process for opening/closing the electric accessory 34a. After that, the electronic support process is terminated.

[Electrical opening/closing control process]
Next, the electrical opening/closing control process will be described. The electric power opening/closing control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control unit 60 as a subroutine of the electric power support process (FIG. 306: Sr1722).

FIG. 307 is a flow chart showing an electrical opening/closing control process executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) of the seventh embodiment. In step Sr1801, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open. Whether or not the electric accessory 34a is being opened is determined by whether or not the electric accessory drive unit 34b is in a driving state. When it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is open (Sr1801: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr1802.

In step Sr1802, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the open duration time of the electric accessory 34a. If it is determined in step Sr1802 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sr1802: NO), the electrical opening/closing control process is terminated. In other words, if the opening continuation time of the electric accessory 34a has not ended, the present electric opening/closing control process is terminated.

In step Sr1802, when it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sr1802: YES), the process advances to step Sr1803 to perform closing processing for controlling the electric accessory 34a to the closed state, "250" (that is, 0.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as a means for measuring the open duration time of the electric accessory 34a is "0", the electric accessory 34a is closed, and the second timer counter area T2 is electrically operated this time. It is used as a parameter for measuring the closed duration time of the accessory 34a, and "250" is set in the second timer counter area T2. After executing step Sr1803, the process proceeds to step Sr1804.

In step Sr1804, after subtracting 1 from the value of the second round counter area RC2, the process advances to step Sr1805 to determine whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0". If it is determined in step Sr1805 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (Sr1805: NO), the electric opening/closing control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr1805 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0" (Sr1805: YES), the process advances to step Sr1806 to turn off the supported flag. After that, the electrical switching control process is terminated.

In step Sr1801, when it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is not open (Sr1801: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr1807 to determine whether the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closed duration time of the electric accessory 34a. If it is determined in step Sr1807 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sr1807: NO), the electrical opening/closing control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr507 that the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sr1807: YES), the process advances to step Sr1808 to execute opening processing for controlling the electric accessory 34a to the open state. . After that, the process proceeds to step Sr1809.

In step Sr1809, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. If it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress (Sr1809: NO), the process advances to step Sr1810 to determine whether or not the high-frequency support mode is in effect. do.

If it is determined in step Sr1810 that the high frequency support mode is on (Sr1810: YES), the process advances to step Sr1811 to set "400" (that is, 1.6 sec) in the second timer counter area T2. After that, the electrical switching control process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr1809 that the open/close execution mode is set (Sr1809: YES), or if it is determined that the high-frequency support mode is not set in step Sr1810 (Sr1810: NO), the process advances to step Sr1812 to perform the second operation. "50" (that is, 0.2 sec) is set in the timer counter area T2. After that, the electrical switching control process is terminated.

<<7-6>> Various processes executed in the sound emission control device:
Next, an example of specific control executed in the sound emission control device will be described.

<Various processing executed in the sound emission control device>
First, the main processing executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 will be described.

FIG. 308 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 (sound and light side CPU 92x) of the seventh embodiment. In step Sr4101, startup processing is executed. Specifically, it executes initial setting processing upon power-on, determination of whether or not the sound and light side RAM 94 functions normally, and the like. After executing step Sr4101, the process proceeds to step Sr4102.

In step Sr4102, start date/time information storage processing is executed. The activation date/time information storage process is a process of reading the activation date/time information from the activation date/time information storage area 97 b 2 of the RTC 97 and storing it in the activation date/time information storage area 94 b of the main RAM 64 . The details of the activation date/time information storage process will be described later. After executing step Sr4102, the process proceeds to step Sr4103.

In step Sr4103, power interruption type determination processing is executed. The power interruption type determination process is a process of determining the type of the previous power interruption of the main controller 60 based on the power interruption type command received from the main MPU 62 of the main controller 60 . As described above, the power interruption type means the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power interruption. Details of the power interruption type determination process will be described later. After executing step Sr4103, the process proceeds to step Sr4104.

In step Sr4104, an activation type determination process is executed. The activation type determination process is a process of determining the activation type of the main controller 60 based on the activation type command received from the main MPU 62 of the main controller 60 . Details of the activation type determination process will be described later. After executing step Sr4104, the process proceeds to step Sr4105.

In step Sr4105, sound and light side abnormal power interruption flag handling processing is executed. The sound/light side abnormal power interruption flag handling process is a process for setting the above-described RTC effect or deferment suggestion effect to either a state in which execution is possible or a state in which execution is not possible. The details of the sound and light side abnormal power interruption flag handling processing will be described later. After executing step Sr4105, the process proceeds to step Sr4106.

In step Sr4106, permission of timer interrupt is set. As a result, execution of timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is permitted. After that, it enters into an infinite loop.

Next, the details of the activation date/time information storage process shown in step Sr4102 of FIG. 308 will be described.

FIG. 309 is a flow chart showing activation date/time information storage processing executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 (sound and light side CPU 92x) of the seventh embodiment. In step Sr4201, the current date and time information is read from the clock register 97b1 of the RTC 97, and the read current date and time information is written (stored) in the startup date and time information storage area 94b of the RAM 94 on the sound and light side. After that, the activation date/time information storage processing is terminated.

Next, details of the power interruption type determination processing shown in step Sr4103 of FIG. 308 will be described.

FIG. 310 is a flow chart showing power interruption type determination processing executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 (sound and light side CPU 92x) of the seventh embodiment. In step Sr4301, it is determined whether or not a power interruption type command has been received from the main MPU62. Specifically, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not one of the two commands, the normal power interruption command and the abnormal power interruption command, has been received from the main MPU 62 . If it is determined in step Sr4301 that one of the above two commands has been received (step Sr4301: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr4302. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr4301 that none of the above two commands has been received (step Sr4301: NO), the process returns to step Sr4301. That is, it waits until it is determined that one of the above two commands has been received, and when it is determined that one of the above two commands has been received, the process proceeds to step Sr4302. move on.

In step Sr4302, it is determined whether or not the command received as the power interruption type command from the main MPU 62 is an abnormal power interruption command. If it is determined in step Sr4302 that the command received from the main MPU 62 as a power interruption type command is an abnormal power interruption command (step Sr4302: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr4303, where Turn on the sound and light side abnormal power failure flag. After that, the power interruption type determination processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr4302 that the command received from the main MPU 62 as the power interruption type command is not an abnormal power interruption command (step Sr4302: YES), that is, the command received from the main MPU 62 as the power interruption type command is the normal power interruption command, the process advances to step Sr4304 to turn off the sound and light side abnormal power interruption flag stored in the sound and light side RAM 94 . After that, the power interruption type determination processing is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, since the power interruption type determination process is executed, the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power interruption can also be grasped in the sound emission control device 90 as well.

Details of the activation type determination process shown in step Sr4104 in FIG. 308 will now be described.

FIG. 311 is a flowchart showing activation type determination processing executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 (sound and light side CPU 92x) of the seventh embodiment. In step Sr4401, it is determined whether or not an activation type command has been received from the main MPU62. Specifically, in the present embodiment, any one of the five commands from the main MPU 62, namely, the above-described normal startup command, RAM error command, RAM clear command, setting change mode start command, and setting confirmation mode start command command is received. If it is determined in step Sr4402 that one of the above five commands has been received (step Sr4401: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr4402. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr4401 that none of the five commands described above has been received (step Sr4401: NO), the process returns to step Sr4401. That is, it waits until it is determined that any one of the above-described five commands has been received, and if it is determined that any one of the above-described five commands has been received, the process proceeds to step Sr4402. move on.

In step Sr4402, it is determined whether or not the command received as the activation type command from the main MPU 62 is the normal activation command. When it is determined in step Sr4402 that the command received as the activation type command from the main MPU 62 is the normal activation command (step Sr4402: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr4403.

In step Sr4403, "01" is set to the activation type determination value stored in the sound and light side RAM 94. FIG. The activation type determination value is numerical information for the sound emission control device 90 to grasp the current activation type of the main control device 60 . In this embodiment, the state in which "01" is set in the activation type determination value means that the current activation type of main controller 60 was normal activation. After executing step Sr4403, this activation type determination processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr4402 that the command received from the main MPU 62 as the activation type command is not the normal activation command (step Sr4402: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr4404, where it is received from the main MPU 62 as the activation type command. It is determined whether or not the received command is a RAM abnormal command. If it is determined in step Sr4404 that the command received as the activation type command from the main MPU 62 is a RAM abnormality command (step Sr4404: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr4405.

In step Sr4405, "02" is set to the activation type determination value. In this embodiment, the state in which "02" is set in the activation type determination value means that the current activation type of main controller 60 is RAM abnormality. After step Sr4405 is executed, this activation type determination processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr4404 that the command received from the main MPU 62 as the activation type command is not the RAM abnormality command (step Sr4404: NO), the process advances to step Sr4406 to receive the activation type command from the main MPU 62. It is determined whether or not the received command is a RAM clear command. If it is determined in step Sr4406 that the command received as the activation type command from the main MPU 62 is the RAM clear command (step Sr4406: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr4407.

In step Sr4407, "03" is set to the activation type determination value. In this embodiment, the state in which "03" is set in the activation type determination value means that the current activation type of the main controller 60 is RAM clear. After executing step Sr4407, this activation type determination processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr4406 that the command received from the main MPU 62 as the activation type command is not the RAM clear command (step Sr4406: NO), the process advances to step Sr4408 to receive the activation type command from the main MPU 62. It is determined whether or not the received command is a setting change mode start command. If it is determined in step Sr4408 that the command received as the activation type command from the main MPU 62 is the setting change mode start command (step Sr4408: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr4409.

In step Sr4409, "04" is set to the activation type determination value. In this embodiment, the state in which "04" is set to the activation type determination value means that the current activation type of the main controller 60 was the setting change mode. After step Sr4409 is executed, this activation type determination processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr4408 that the command received from the main MPU 62 as the activation type command is not the setting change mode start command (step Sr4408: NO), in other words, if the command received from the main MPU 62 as the activation type command If the command is a setting confirmation mode start command, the process advances to step Sr4410.

In step Sr4410, "05" is set to the activation type determination value. In this embodiment, the state in which "05" is set in the activation type determination value means that the current activation type of the main controller 60 was the setting confirmation mode. After step Sr4410 is executed, this activation type determination process ends.

Next, the details of the sound and light side abnormal power interruption flag handling process shown in step Sr4105 in FIG. 308 will be described.

FIG. 312 is a flowchart showing sound and light side abnormal power interruption flag handling processing executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 (sound and light side CPU 92x) of the seventh embodiment.

In step Sr4501, it is determined whether or not the sound and light side abnormal power interruption flag is ON. If it is determined in step Sr4501 that the sound and light side abnormal power failure flag is not ON (step Sr4501: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr4502 to turn off the RTC effect execution permission flag stored in the sound and light side RAM 94. do. The RTC effect execution permission flag is a flag for the sound and light side MPU 92 to specify whether or not the RTC effect execution permission flag is in a state where the RTC effect execution permission flag is ON. etc.) is satisfied, it means that the RTC effect can be executed. Impossible to run. After executing step Sr4502, the process proceeds to step Sr4503.

In step Sr4503, the deferment suggestion effect execution permission flag stored in the sound and light side RAM 94 is turned OFF. The deferment suggestion effect execution permission flag is a flag for the sound and light side MPU 92 to specify whether or not the deferment suggestion effect execution permission flag is in a state in which it is possible to execute the deferment suggestion effect. If the execution condition (normal activation, etc.) is established, it means that the deferment suggestion effect can be executed. It means a state in which it is impossible to execute the deferment suggestion effect regardless of whether or not it is established. After step Sr4503 is executed, the main sound light side abnormal power interruption flag handling process is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Sr4501, when it is determined that the sound and light side abnormal power interruption flag is ON (step Sr4501: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr4504, and the RTC effect execution permission flag is turned ON. After that, the process advances to step Sr4505 to turn on the deferment suggestion effect execution permission flag. After that, the main sound light side abnormal power interruption flag handling process is ended.

Next, timer interrupt processing executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 will be described.

FIG. 313 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 (sound and light side CPU 92x) of the seventh embodiment. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed at a relatively short period (2 msec in this embodiment). Processing of each step executed in timer interrupt processing will be described below.

In step Sr6101, command storage processing is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing the received command in the sound and light side RAM 94 when a command is received from the main side MPU 62 . The sound and light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer for enabling storage and reading of commands received from the main side MPU 62, and the commands received from the main side MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer. , are read out sequentially according to the order in which they are stored. After executing step Sr6101, the process proceeds to step Sr6102.

In step Sr6102, sound and light side power interruption processing is executed. The sound and light side power interruption process is a process of executing, for example, saving a used register when a power interruption generation command is received from the main side MPU 62 . The details of the sound and light side power interruption processing will be described later. After executing step Sr6102, the process proceeds to step Sr6103.

In step Sr6103, RTC effect processing is executed. The RTC effect processing is performed after the pachinko machine 10 is started (after the power supply is started) at predetermined time intervals (every hour in the present embodiment) for a predetermined time (5 minutes in the present embodiment). It is a process for executing production. The details of the RTC effect processing will be described later. After executing step Sr6103, the process proceeds to step Sr6104.

In step Sr6104, processing for deferment suggestion effect is executed. The deferment suggestion effect process is a process for executing a deferment suggestion effect, which is an effect suggesting that the setting information is deferred. The details of the deferment suggestion effect processing will be described later. After executing step Sr6104, the process proceeds to step Sr6105.

In step Sr6105, a game round effect process is executed. In the game round effect processing, processing relating to the effect to be executed in the game round from the start of the symbol variation to the stop is performed. After executing step Sr6105, the process proceeds to step Sr6106.

In step Sr6106, processing for opening/closing execution mode effect is executed. In the opening/closing execution mode effect processing, processing related to effects during the opening period, effects during the opening/closing process period, and effects during the ending period is performed. After executing step Sr6106, the process advances to step Sr6107.

In step Sr6107, light emission control processing for controlling light emission of various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, light emission control of various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read out in each of the effect processes described above. After executing step Sr6107, the process proceeds to step Sr6108.

At step Sr6108, an audio output control process for controlling the audio output of the speaker 46 is executed. In the audio output control process, audio output control of the speaker 46 is performed based on the audio data read out in the BGM process and each effect process. After executing step Sr6108, the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Next, details of the sound and light side power interruption processing shown in step Sr6102 in FIG. 313 will be described.

FIG. 314 is a flow chart showing sound and light side power interruption processing executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 (sound and light side CPU 92x) of the seventh embodiment.

In step Sr6201, it is determined whether or not a power failure generation command has been received from the main MPU 62 . If it is determined in step Sr6201 that the power failure generation command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (step Sr6201: NO), the main sound light side power failure processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr6201 that a power failure generation command has been received from the main MPU 62 (step Sr6201: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr6202.

In step Sr6202, various information (information indicating the game state, control information, etc.) stored in the register of the sound and light side CPU 92x is saved in a predetermined area of the sound and light side RAM 94. FIG. After that, the process advances to step Sr6203 to store the information stored in the stack pointer of the sound and light side CPU 92x in a predetermined area of the sound and light side RAM 94. FIG. After that, the process advances to step Sr6204 to turn on the power restoration flag. After that, the process advances to step Sr6205 to calculate a RAM determination value (for example, a checksum value) by executing a predetermined calculation based on a predetermined information group stored in the sound and light side RAM 94, and the calculated RAM determination value is It is stored in the sound and light side RAM 94 . After that, the process proceeds to step Sr6205, and after prohibiting the RAM access, the infinite loop processing is repeated until the supplied drive voltage drops and the operation becomes impossible.

Next, details of the RTC effect processing shown in step Sr6103 of FIG. 313 will be described.

FIG. 315 is a flow chart showing RTC effect processing executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 (sound and light side CPU 92x) of the seventh embodiment.

In step Sr6301, it is determined whether or not the RTC effect execution permission flag is ON. In step S6301, when it is determined that the RTC effect execution permission flag is ON (step Sr6301: YES), the processing of steps Sr6302 to Sr6313 described below is executed. The processes of steps Sr6302 to Sr6313 are processes for determining whether or not it is time to execute the RTC effect, and executing the RTC effect when it is determined that it is time to execute the RTC effect. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6301 that the RTC effect execution permission flag is not ON (step Sr6301: NO), the process for RTC effect ends without executing the processes of steps Sr6302 to Sr6313.

Thus, in this embodiment, when the RTC effect execution permission flag is ON, that is, when the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is ON, the RTC effect is executed at a predetermined timing. However, on the other hand, if the RTC effect execution permission flag is OFF, that is, if the power switch 85a is OFF at the time of the previous power failure, the RTC effect is not executed. The processing of steps Sr6302 to Sr6313 will be described below.

In step Sr6202, it is determined whether or not the RTC effect execution flag stored in the main RAM 64 is ON. The RTC effect in-execution flag is a flag for determining whether or not an RTC effect, which will be described later, is being executed. In step Sr6202, if it is determined that the RTC effect running flag is not ON (step Sr6202: NO), that is, if the RTC effect is not being executed, the process proceeds to step Sr6203.

In step Sr6203, the current date and time information is read from the clock register 97b1 of the RTC 97. FIG. After that, the process proceeds to step Sr6204, based on the read current date and time information and the start date and time information stored in the start date and time information storage area 94b of the sound and light side RAM 94, the elapsed time from the start date and time to the current date and time. Calculate the elapsed startup time. Specifically, for example, the current date and time information read from the clock register 97b1 of the RTC 97 indicates "December 15, 2017 11:53:45", and the start date and time information stored in the sound and light side RAM 94 indicates "December 15, 2017 08:42:35", the activation elapsed time is "3 hours 11 minutes 10 seconds". If the calculated elapsed activation time exceeds 24 hours 00 minutes 00 seconds, the elapsed activation time will be reduced to 24 hours 00 minutes 00 seconds or less until the elapsed activation time reaches 24 hours 00 minutes 00 seconds. Subtract the value corresponding to seconds. For example, if the calculated elapsed activation time is "51 hours 35 minutes 24 seconds", the value corresponding to 24 hours 00 minutes 00 seconds is subtracted twice to obtain a new elapsed activation time "3 hours 35 minutes". 24 seconds”. The reason for adopting such processing will be described later. After executing step Sr6204, the process proceeds to step Sr6205.

In step Sr6205, the RTC effect execution determination table stored in the sound and light side ROM 93 is referred to, and in step Sr6206 it is determined whether or not it is time to start the RTC effect. In the RTC presentation execution determination table, the activation elapsed time and the type of RTC presentation are stored in association with each other.

FIG. 316 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the RTC effect execution determination table. As described above, the activation elapsed time and the type of RTC effect are associated and stored in the RTC effect execution determination table. Specifically, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 316, different types of RTC effects are set for each hour of the activation elapsed time. For example, "RTC effect A" is set corresponding to the elapsed startup time "1 hour 00 minutes 00 seconds", and "RTC effect B" is set corresponding to the elapsed startup time "2 hours 00 minutes 00 seconds". It is As described above, in the present embodiment, when the elapsed boot time exceeds 24 hours 00 minutes 00 seconds, the elapsed boot time is kept until the elapsed boot time reaches a value of 24 hours 00 minutes 00 seconds or less. from the value corresponding to 24 hours 00 minutes 00 seconds. Therefore, since the RTC effect execution determination table does not have to correspond to the portion where the elapsed time of activation exceeds 24 hours 00 minutes 00 seconds, the storage capacity of the sound and light side ROM 93 required for storing the RTC effect execution determination table is can be reduced.

Returning to FIG. 315 . In step Sr6206, it is determined whether or not it is time to start the RTC effect. Specifically, when the activation elapsed time calculated in step Sr6204 matches the activation elapsed time set in the RTC effect execution determination table, it is determined that it is time to start the RTC effect. If not, it is determined that it is not time to start the RTC presentation. For example, when the activation elapsed time calculated in step Sr6204 is "1 hour 00 minutes 00 seconds", it is determined that it is time to start the RTC effect A.

When it is determined in step Sr6206 that it is not the timing to start the RTC effect (step Sr6206: NO), this RTC effect processing ends. On the other hand, in step Sr6206, when it is determined that it is time to start the RTC effect (step Sr6206: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr6207.

In step Sr6207, the RTC effect of the type corresponding to the activation elapsed time set in the RTC effect execution determination table is set to start. For example, when the activation elapsed time is "1 hour 00 minutes 00 seconds", the control of the speaker 46 and various lamps 47 is started so as to create a presentation mode corresponding to the RTC presentation A, and the moving image corresponding to the RTC presentation A is displayed. is transmitted to the display control device 100 to start the display of . In this embodiment, the RTC production A is a production in which the character A appears and sings the song A for 5 minutes. Another RTC effect set in the RTC effect execution determination table is an effect in which another character appears and sings another song for five minutes. That is, different characters and songs appear for each type of RTC presentation. After that, the process proceeds to step Sr6208.

In step Sr6208, the RTC effect running flag is turned ON. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sr6209, and "150000" is set in the RTC rendering timer counter Tr. The RTC effect timer counter Tr is a counter for managing the remaining time of the RTC effect, and is decremented by 1 each time this timer interrupt process is executed, as will be described later. In this embodiment, the timer interrupt process is executed every 2 ms, so "150000" set in the RTC rendering timer counter Tr corresponds to 5 minutes. After that, the present RTC effect processing is terminated.

In the above-described step Sr6202, if it is determined that the RTC effect running flag is ON (step Sr6202: YES), that is, in the above-described step Sr6208 the timer interrupt processing after turning on the RTC effect running flag If the process proceeds to step Sr6202, the process proceeds to step Sr6210.

At step Sr6210, 1 is subtracted from the value set in the RTC effect timer counter Tr. After that, the process advances to step Sr6211 to determine whether or not the value of the RTC effect timer counter Tr is zero. In step Sr6211, if it is determined that the value of the RTC effect timer counter Tr is not 0 (step Sr6211: NO), that is, if it is determined that the RTC effect is not finished yet, this RTC effect processing is executed. finish. On the other hand, in step Sr6211, if it is determined that the value of the RTC effect timer counter Tr is 0 (step Sr6211: YES), that is, if it is determined that it is time to end the RTC effect, the process proceeds to step Sr6212. Set to terminate the RTC presentation in progress. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sr6213, the RTC effect execution flag is turned OFF, and this RTC effect processing ends.

Next, the details of the stationary suggestion effect processing shown in step Sr6104 of FIG. 313 will be described.

FIG. 317 is a flow chart showing processing for stationary suggestion effect executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 (sound and light side CPU 92x) of the seventh embodiment.

In step Sr6401, it is determined whether or not the deferment suggestion effect execution permission flag is ON. In step Sr6401, when it is determined that the stationary suggestion effect execution permission flag is ON (step Sr6401: YES), the processing of steps Sr6402 to Sr6406 described below is executed. The processing of steps Sr6402 to Sr6406 is processing for determining whether or not it is time to execute a deferment suggestive effect, and executing the deferment suggestive effect when it is determined that it is time to execute a deferment suggestive effect. be. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6401 that the deferment suggestion effect execution permission flag is not ON (step Sr6401: NO), this RTC effect processing ends without executing the processing of steps Sr6402 to Sr6406. .

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the flag for execution of the deferment suggestion effect is ON, that is, when the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is ON, the deferment suggestion effect is executed at a predetermined timing. On the other hand, when the deferment suggesting effect execution permission flag is OFF, that is, when the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is OFF, the deferment suggesting effect is not executed. The processing of steps Sr6402 to Sr6406 will be described below.

In step Sr6402, it is determined whether or not the activation type determination value is "01", that is, whether or not the current activation type is "normal activation". If it is determined in step Sr6402 that the activation type determination value is "01" (step Sr6402: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr6403, which will be described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6402 that the activation type determination value is not "01" (step Sr6402: NO), this processing for deferment suggestion effect ends.

In step Sr6403, it is determined whether or not the deferment suggestion effect executed flag stored in the sound and light side RAM 94 is ON. The deferment suggestive effect executed flag is a flag for determining whether or not the deferment suggestive effect has already been executed after the current activation. In the present embodiment, since a configuration is adopted in which the deferment suggestive effect is executed only in the first game round after normal activation, this deferment suggestive effect executed flag is provided. Even when the power supply is interrupted in the ON state, the deferment suggestion effect execution completion flag is not maintained in the ON state, and is always OFF at the next start-up.

In step Sr6403, when it is determined that the deferment suggestion effect executed flag is not ON (step Sr6403: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr6404, which will be described later. On the other hand, in step Sr6403, when it is determined that the flag indicating that the stationary suggestion effect has been executed is ON (step Sr6403: YES), the processing for the stationary suggestive effect is terminated.

At step Sr6404, it is determined whether or not a variation command has been received from main controller 60. FIG. The variation command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 when starting a game round (variation of special symbols) in the game round control process (step Sr0410) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 293) executed by the main controller 60. command. That is, in step Sr6404, it is determined whether or not the game round (fluctuation of special symbols) has been started. If it is determined in step Sr6404 that a variation command has been received (step Sr6404: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr6405, which will be described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr6404 that the command for variation has not been received (step Sr6404: NO), this processing for deferment suggestion effect ends.

In step Sr6405, deferment suggestion effect start processing is executed. The deferment suggestive effect start process is a process for starting the deferment suggestive effect described above. After that, the process proceeds to step Sr6406, the above-described deferment suggestion effect executed flag is turned ON, and this deferment suggestion effect start processing is ended.

As described above, according to this embodiment, the following effects can be obtained.

According to this embodiment, since the RTC effect is executed based on the elapsed time (activation elapsed time) after the pachinko machine 10 is activated, in a game hall where a plurality of pachinko machines 10 are installed in the island facilities, When the plurality of pachinko machines 10 are started all at once (at the same time) by turning on the island power switch of the island facility, the startup elapsed time of each pachinko machine 10 installed in the island facility is the same. becomes. Therefore, it is possible to start the RTC presentation all at once (simultaneously).

However, after the plurality of pachinko machines 10 installed in the island facility are activated all at once (at the same time) by turning on the island power switch, one pachinko machine 10 is activated for the purpose of, for example, changing the setting information. When the power switch 85a is individually displaced from the ON position to the OFF position to cut off the power supply, and the power switch 85a is displaced from the OFF position to the ON position again to start up, the one pachinko machine The activation elapsed time in 10 is different from the activation elapsed time in the other pachinko machine 10 installed in the island facility, and the timing of the start of the RTC effect in the one pachinko machine 10 is different from the other pachinko machine 10. There is a problem that it will shift. In particular, since it takes about one minute to change the setting information, the one pachinko machine 10 whose setting information has been changed starts the RTC presentation about one minute behind the other pachinko machines 10.例文帳に追加will be In general, since the RTC performance time is about 5 minutes, the RTC performance in the one pachinko machine 10 whose setting information is changed overlaps with the RTC performance in the other pachinko machine 10 in a deviated state. A problem arises in that the game is executed and interferes with the game, giving the player a feeling of displeasure.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is OFF, the process of turning OFF the RTC effect execution permission flag is executed. to the OFF position to cut off the power supply, and then the power switch 85a is shifted from the OFF position to the ON position and activated, the pachinko machine 10 is set to a state in which the RTC effect cannot be executed. will be As a result, the one pachinko machine 10 activated by the operation of the power switch 85a does not execute the RTC effect, so the RTC effect in the one pachinko machine 10 becomes the RTC effect in the other pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, it is possible to suppress overlapping execution in a deviated state and interfere with each other, and it is possible to suppress discomfort to the player.

On the other hand, while the power switch 85a of the pachinko machine 10 remains in the ON position, the power supply is interrupted by turning the island power switch from ON to OFF, and then by turning the island power switch from OFF to ON. When started, the pachinko machine 10 is set to a state in which the RTC effect can be executed (the RTC effect execution permission flag is turned ON), so it is the same as the other pachinko machines 10 installed in the island facilities. It is possible to execute the RTC effect at (or substantially the same) timing.

Also, in a game hall where a plurality of pachinko machines 10 are installed in an island facility, and power supply to the plurality of pachinko machines 10 is simultaneously started and stopped by an island power switch of the island facility. If the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off or started by operating the individual power switch 85a, there is a high possibility that the setting information has been changed since the previous day (or the previous business day). .

According to the present embodiment, when it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is OFF, the process of turning OFF the deferment suggestion effect execution permission flag is executed. If the occurrence is due to the operation of the power switch 85a, the stationary suggesting effect will not be executed in the pachinko machine 10 after the next activation. Therefore, even though the setting information has actually been changed from the previous day (or the previous business day), the deferment suggestion effect is executed on the pachinko machine 10, and the player does not set on the pachinko machine 10. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the information is misidentified as being left unchanged without being changed.

<<7-7>> Modified example of the seventh embodiment:
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and can be implemented in various aspects without departing from the scope of the invention. For example, the following modifications are possible. In addition, in the modified example described below, description of the same configuration, processing, and effects as those of the above-described embodiment is omitted.

<<7-7-1>> Modification 1:
In the above-described seventh embodiment, it is configured to include a performance movable object that can move within a predetermined range, and the sound light emission control device 90 operates when the sound and light side abnormal power failure flag is ON, that is, at the time of the previous power failure. A configuration may be adopted in which the movable object for presentation is moved from the origin position to the maximum position when it is determined that the power switch 85a is in the ON state. A specific description will be given below.

318 and 319 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the effect movable object 99 included in the pachinko machine 10 of the modification 1 of the seventh embodiment. The effect movable object 99 of this modification is configured to be movable from the origin position shown in FIG. 318 to the maximum position shown in FIG. It moves from the position to the maximum position, and returns from the maximum position to the origin position upon completion of the performance. Further, although not shown, in this modified example, a drive motor for moving the movable object for production 99, an origin position detection sensor capable of detecting that the movable object for production 99 is at the origin position, and a movable object for production A maximum position detection sensor capable of detecting that the movable object 99 is at the maximum position is provided. drive the drive motor until it is detected by the sensor, and on the other hand, when returning the movable object for production 99 from the maximum position to the origin position, drive the drive motor until the movable object for production 99 is detected by the origin position detection sensor. Let

Then, in this modification, when the audio emission control device 90 determines that the sound and light side abnormal power interruption flag is ON in the sound and light side abnormal power interruption flag handling process at the time of startup, that is, when the sound and light side abnormal power interruption flag is ON, When it is determined that the power switch 85a is in the ON state, the performance movable object 99 is moved from the origin position to the maximum position. According to such a configuration, the manager of the game hall or the like visually confirms whether or not the movable object for presentation 99 is at the origin position, thereby turning off the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure. It is possible to easily confirm whether it is determined to be in the ON state or whether it is determined to be in the ON state.

Then, when the administrator or the like notices that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure has been determined to be the ON state, the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure in the pachinko machine 10 It is possible to perform work corresponding to the determination that the state is the ON state.

Specifically, for example, in a game hall that is not a game hall that simultaneously starts and stops power supply to a plurality of pachinko machines 10 by an island power switch of an island facility, power supply If the state of the switch 85a remains ON, there is a possibility that the pachinko machine 10 has been illegally operated or modified by an illegal person such as a goto master. Therefore, in such a game hall, the manager or the like of the game hall can temporarily suspend the operation of the pachinko machine 10 to inspect the pachinko machine 10 or the like.

It should be noted that a stepping motor may be used as the drive motor for moving the effect movable object 99 . Specifically, for example, when moving the movable object for presentation 99 from the origin position to the maximum position, the rotation direction (for example, forward rotation direction) for moving from the origin position to the maximum position is specified, and a predetermined step is performed. A number (for example, 20) is set in the counter to drive the stepping motor, and when the number of steps set in the counter becomes 0, it is determined whether or not the maximum position detection sensor has detected the movable object for presentation 99. . When the maximum position detection sensor detects the movable object for presentation 99, the driving of the stepping motor is terminated. On the other hand, when the movable object for presentation 99 is not detected by the maximum position detection sensor, the movable object for presentation 99 is further moved in the direction of the maximum position by setting the counter one by one until it is detected. Note that an error may be notified when the number of added steps exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 5).

On the other hand, when moving the effect movable object 99 from the maximum position to the origin position, the rotation direction (for example, reverse direction) for moving from the maximum position to the origin position is specified, and a predetermined number of steps (for example, 20) is specified. A counter is set to drive a stepping motor, and when the number of steps set in the counter becomes 0, it is determined whether or not the performance movable object 99 is detected by the origin position detection sensor. When the origin position detection sensor detects the movable object for presentation 99, the driving of the stepping motor is terminated. On the other hand, when the performance movable object 99 is not detected by the origin position detection sensor, the counter is set one by one until the performance movable object 99 is detected, and the performance movable object 99 is further moved in the direction of the origin position. Note that an error may be notified when the number of added steps exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 5).

The configuration using the stepping motor as the driving motor described above may be applied to each modified example described below.

<<7-7-2>> Modification 2:
In the seventh embodiment and each modification described above, the audio emission control device 90 is configured such that the power switch 85a is ON when the sound and light side abnormal power failure flag is ON, that is, when the power switch 85a was in the ON state at the time of the previous power failure. A configuration may be adopted in which predetermined notification processing (for example, processing for sounding an alarm at maximum volume, etc.) is executed when it is determined that the According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the administrator or the like of the game hall aware that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure was determined to be the ON state. As a result, the administrator or the like can perform work corresponding to the determination that the power switch 85a was in the ON state at the time of the previous power failure in the pachinko machine 10 .

Specifically, for example, in a game hall that is not a game hall that simultaneously starts and stops power supply to a plurality of pachinko machines 10 by an island power switch of an island facility, power supply If the state of the switch 85a remains ON, there is a possibility that the pachinko machine 10 has been illegally operated or modified by an illegal person such as a goto master. Therefore, in such a game hall, the manager or the like of the game hall can temporarily suspend the operation of the pachinko machine 10 to inspect the pachinko machine 10 or the like.

<<7-7-3>> Modification 3:
In the seventh embodiment and each modification described above, an external output terminal capable of outputting information to an external device such as a hall computer is provided. That is, when it is determined that the power switch 85a is in the ON state at the time of the previous power failure, the external output terminal may output predetermined information indicating that there is a possibility that an abnormality has occurred. . According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the administrator or the like of the game hall aware that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure was determined to be the ON state. As a result, the administrator or the like can perform work corresponding to the determination that the power switch 85a was in the ON state at the time of the previous power failure in the pachinko machine 10 .

Specifically, for example, in a game hall that is not a game hall that simultaneously starts and stops power supply to a plurality of pachinko machines 10 by an island power switch of an island facility, power supply If the state of the switch 85a remains ON, there is a possibility that the pachinko machine 10 has been illegally operated or modified by an illegal person such as a goto master. Therefore, in such a game hall, the manager or the like of the game hall can temporarily suspend the operation of the pachinko machine 10 to inspect the pachinko machine 10 or the like.

<<7-7-4>> Modification 4:
In the seventh embodiment and each of the modifications described above, when the main side abnormal power failure flag is ON, that is, when it is determined that the power switch 85a was in the ON state at the time of the previous power failure, the power supply A configuration including a drive mechanism for forcibly displacing the switch 85a to the OFF state may be employed. According to this configuration, when the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is determined to be the ON state, the power switch 85a is displaced to the OFF state, and the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. It will drip. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a game from being played in the pachinko machine 10 while there is a possibility that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure was determined to be ON. .

Specifically, for example, in a game hall that is not a game hall that simultaneously starts and stops power supply to a plurality of pachinko machines 10 by an island power switch of an island facility, power supply If the state of the switch 85a remains ON, there is a possibility that the pachinko machine 10 has been illegally operated or modified by an illegal person such as a goto master. According to this modification, if the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure was in an abnormal ON state, the power switch 85a is forcibly displaced to the OFF state at the time of the next startup. The power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is forcibly cut off. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a game from being played on the pachinko machine 10 in a state where there is a possibility of an abnormality.

<<7-7-5>> Modification 5:
In the seventh embodiment and each modification described above, the audio light emission control device 90 is configured such that when the sound and light side abnormal power failure flag is OFF, that is, the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the OFF state. When it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is activated, the pattern display device 41 may display the activation demonstration image displayed when the pachinko machine 10 is activated. According to this configuration, the manager of the game hall or the like can confirm whether or not the activation demonstration image is displayed on the symbol display device 41, so that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is in the OFF state. It is possible to confirm whether it is determined to be present or whether it is determined to be in the ON state.

Then, when the administrator or the like notices that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure has been determined to be the ON state, the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure in the pachinko machine 10 It is possible to perform work corresponding to the determination that the state is the ON state.

Specifically, for example, in a game hall that is not a game hall that simultaneously starts and stops power supply to a plurality of pachinko machines 10 by an island power switch of an island facility, power supply If the state of the switch 85a remains ON, there is a possibility that the pachinko machine 10 has been illegally operated or modified by an illegal person such as a goto master. Therefore, in such a game hall, the manager or the like of the game hall can temporarily suspend the operation of the pachinko machine 10 to inspect the pachinko machine 10 or the like.

<<7-7-6>> Modification 6:
In the seventh embodiment and each modification described above, the main controller 60 determines that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the OFF state when the main side abnormal power failure flag is OFF. It may be configured to enable the shooting of the game ball by the game ball shooting mechanism 81 when the game ball is shot. Specifically, for example, a permission flag for permitting the shooting of game balls is provided, and only when the permission flag is ON, the game ball shooting mechanism 81 can shoot the game balls. Then, when it is determined that the power switch 85a was in the OFF state at the time of the previous power failure, the permission flag is turned ON, and it is determined that the power switch 85a was in the ON state at the time of the previous power failure. If so, the permission flag is turned OFF.

According to such a configuration, the player can play a game on the pachinko machine 10 when it is determined that the power switch 85a was in the OFF state during the previous power failure. On the other hand, when it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is in the ON state, the pachinko machine 10 does not perform the process of enabling the shooting of game balls. If it is determined that the power switch 85a is in the ON state at the time of power failure, the pachinko machine 10 cannot play a game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a game from being played in the pachinko machine 10 while there is a possibility that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure was determined to be ON. .

Specifically, for example, in a game hall that is not a game hall that simultaneously starts and stops power supply to a plurality of pachinko machines 10 by an island power switch of an island facility, power supply If the state of the switch 85a remains ON, there is a possibility that the pachinko machine 10 has been illegally operated or modified by an illegal person such as a goto master. As described above, according to this modification, when it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the ON state, the pachinko machine 10 performs the process of enabling the shooting of game balls. To prevent a game from being played in a pachinko machine 10 in a state in which there is a possibility of an abnormality in which the power switch 85a is determined to be in the ON state at the time of the previous power failure because the game is not executed. can be done.

Furthermore, in this modification, even if the main side abnormal power failure flag is ON, that is, even if it is determined that the power switch 85a was in the ON state at the time of the previous power failure, the current power supply When the game permission switch provided in the main control device 60 housing the main control board 61 is pressed within a predetermined period (for example, within 5 minutes) from the start of the supply of the above-mentioned game balls, the shooting of the game ball is permitted. A configuration may be adopted in which a permission flag to be used is turned ON. In this configuration, the manager of the game hall has a valid reason that the power switch 85a was in the ON state at the time of the previous power outage, and there is no problem even if a game is played on the pachinko machine 10. If it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not available, the game permission switch of the pachinko machine 10 may be pressed. According to the above-described configuration, the pachinko machine 10 will not continue to play games while there is a possibility that the power switch 85a was determined to be in the ON state at the time of the previous power failure. When the manager of the gaming hall recognizes that the possibility of an abnormality has been eliminated and the manager or the like presses the game permission switch, the player is allowed to play the game at the specific pachinko machine 10 It becomes possible to perform

<<7-7-7>> Modification 7:
In the seventh embodiment and each modification described above, the main controller 60 determines that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the OFF state when the main side abnormal power failure flag is OFF. When it is done, it may be configured to enable the detection of the game ball by the entering ball detection sensor. Specifically, for example, a permission flag for permitting detection of a game ball is provided, and only when the permission flag is ON, the game ball can be detected by the ball entry detection sensor. Then, when it is determined that the power switch 85a was in the OFF state at the time of the previous power failure, the permission flag is turned ON, and it is determined that the power switch 85a was in the ON state at the time of the previous power failure. If so, the permission flag is turned OFF.

According to such a configuration, the player can play a game on the pachinko machine 10 when it is determined that the power switch 85a was in the OFF state during the previous power failure. On the other hand, when it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the ON state, the pachinko machine 10 does not execute the process of enabling the detection of the game ball by the ball entry detection sensor. The player cannot play a game at the pachinko machine 10 when it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the ON state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a game from being played in the pachinko machine 10 while there is a possibility that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure was determined to be ON. .

Specifically, for example, in a game hall that is not a game hall that simultaneously starts and stops power supply to a plurality of pachinko machines 10 by an island power switch of an island facility, power supply If the state of the switch 85a remains ON, there is a possibility that the pachinko machine 10 has been illegally operated or modified by an illegal person such as a goto master. As described above, according to this modification, when it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is in the ON state, the game ball is detected by the ball entry detection sensor in the pachinko machine 10. Since the enabling process is not executed, the game is played in the pachinko machine 10 while there is a possibility of abnormality that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure was determined to be ON. can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in this modification, even if the main side abnormal power failure flag is ON, that is, even if it is determined that the power switch 85a was in the ON state at the time of the previous power failure, the current power supply When the game permission switch provided in the main control device 60 housing the main control board 61 is pressed within a predetermined period (for example, within 5 minutes) from the start of the supply of the game ball, the detection of the game ball described above is permitted. A configuration may be adopted in which a permission flag to be used is turned ON. In this configuration, the manager of the game hall has a valid reason that the power switch 85a was in the ON state at the time of the previous power outage, and there is no problem even if a game is played on the pachinko machine 10. If it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not available, the game permission switch of the pachinko machine 10 may be pressed. According to the above-described configuration, the pachinko machine 10 will not continue to play games while there is a possibility that the power switch 85a was determined to be in the ON state at the time of the previous power failure. When the manager of the gaming hall recognizes that the possibility of an abnormality has been eliminated and the manager or the like presses the game permission switch, the player is allowed to play the game at the specific pachinko machine 10 It becomes possible to perform

<<7-7-8>> Modification 8:
In the seventh embodiment and each modification described above, the main controller 60 determines that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the OFF state when the main side abnormal power failure flag is OFF. When it is done, it may be configured to enable acquisition of counter values such as the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the like. Specifically, for example, a permission flag for permitting the acquisition of these counter values is provided, and the counter values can be acquired only when the permission flag is ON. Then, when it is determined that the power switch 85a was in the OFF state at the time of the previous power failure, the permission flag is turned ON, and it is determined that the power switch 85a was in the ON state at the time of the previous power failure. If so, the permission flag is turned OFF.

According to such a configuration, the player can play a game on the pachinko machine 10 when it is determined that the power switch 85a was in the OFF state during the previous power failure. On the other hand, when it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power outage is the ON state, the pachinko machine 10 does not execute the processing for enabling acquisition of the counter value, so the player can If it is determined that the power switch 85a is in the ON state at the time of power failure, the pachinko machine 10 cannot play a game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a game from being played in the pachinko machine 10 while there is a possibility that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure was determined to be ON. .

Specifically, for example, in a game hall that is not a game hall that simultaneously starts and stops power supply to a plurality of pachinko machines 10 by an island power switch of an island facility, power supply If the state of the switch 85a remains ON, there is a possibility that the pachinko machine 10 has been illegally operated or modified by an illegal person such as a goto master. As described above, according to this modification, when it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power outage is the ON state, the pachinko machine 10 performs the processing that enables the acquisition of the counter value. To prevent a game from being played in a pachinko machine 10 in a state in which there is a possibility of an abnormality in which the power switch 85a is determined to be in the ON state at the time of the previous power failure because the game is not executed. can be done.

Furthermore, in this modification, even if the main side abnormal power failure flag is ON, that is, even if it is determined that the power switch 85a was in the ON state at the time of the previous power failure, the current power supply If the game permission switch provided in the main control device 60 housing the main control board 61 is pressed within a predetermined period (for example, within 5 minutes) from the start of the supply of the above-mentioned counter value acquisition is permitted A configuration may be adopted in which a permission flag to be used is turned ON. In this configuration, the manager of the game hall has a valid reason that the power switch 85a was in the ON state at the time of the previous power outage, and there is no problem even if a game is played on the pachinko machine 10. If it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not available, the game permission switch of the pachinko machine 10 may be pressed. According to the above-described configuration, the pachinko machine 10 will not continue to play games while there is a possibility that the power switch 85a was determined to be in the ON state at the time of the previous power failure. When the manager of the gaming hall recognizes that the possibility of an abnormality has been eliminated and the manager or the like presses the game permission switch, the player is allowed to play the game at the specific pachinko machine 10 It becomes possible to perform

<<7-7-9>> Modification 9:
In the seventh embodiment and each modification described above, the main controller 60 determines that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the OFF state when the main side abnormal power failure flag is OFF. In this case, the special symbols may be variably displayed in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b. Specifically, for example, a permission flag for permitting the variable display of the special symbols is provided, and only when the permission flag is ON, the variable display of the special symbols is made possible. Then, when it is determined that the power switch 85a was in the OFF state at the time of the previous power failure, the permission flag is turned ON, and it is determined that the power switch 85a was in the ON state at the time of the previous power failure. If so, the permission flag is turned OFF.

According to such a configuration, the player can play a game on the pachinko machine 10 when it is determined that the power switch 85a was in the OFF state during the previous power failure. On the other hand, when it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the ON state, the pachinko machine 10 does not perform the process of enabling the variable display of the special symbols. If it is determined that the power switch 85a is in the ON state at the time of power failure, the pachinko machine 10 cannot play a game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a game from being played in the pachinko machine 10 while there is a possibility that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure was determined to be ON. .

Specifically, for example, in a game hall that is not a game hall that simultaneously starts and stops power supply to a plurality of pachinko machines 10 by an island power switch of an island facility, power supply If the state of the switch 85a remains ON, there is a possibility that the pachinko machine 10 has been illegally operated or modified by an illegal person such as a goto master. As described above, according to this modification, when it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is in the ON state, the pachinko machine 10 enables the variable display of special symbols. is not executed, it is suppressed that a game is played in the pachinko machine 10 in a state in which there is a possibility of an abnormality that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure was determined to be in the ON state. be able to.

Furthermore, in this modification, even if the main side abnormal power failure flag is ON, that is, even if it is determined that the power switch 85a was in the ON state at the time of the previous power failure, the current power supply When the game permission switch provided in the main control device 60 housing the main control board 61 is pressed within a predetermined period (for example, within 5 minutes) from the start of the supply of the above, the variable display of the above-mentioned special symbols is displayed. A configuration may be adopted in which a permission flag for permission is turned ON. In this configuration, the manager of the game hall has a valid reason that the power switch 85a was in the ON state at the time of the previous power outage, and there is no problem even if a game is played on the pachinko machine 10. If it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not available, the game permission switch of the pachinko machine 10 may be pressed. According to the above-described configuration, the pachinko machine 10 will not continue to play games while there is a possibility that the power switch 85a was determined to be in the ON state at the time of the previous power failure. When the manager of the gaming hall recognizes that the possibility of an abnormality has been eliminated and the manager or the like presses the game permission switch, the player is allowed to play the game at the specific pachinko machine 10 It becomes possible to perform

<<7-7-10>> Modification 10:
In the seventh embodiment and each modification described above, the main controller 60 determines that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the OFF state when the main side abnormal power failure flag is OFF. The configuration may be such that a winning lottery can be executed when the winning lottery is executed. Specifically, for example, a permission flag for permitting execution of a winning lottery is provided, and the winning lottery can be executed only when the permission flag is ON. Then, when it is determined that the power switch 85a was in the OFF state at the time of the previous power failure, the permission flag is turned ON, and it is determined that the power switch 85a was in the ON state at the time of the previous power failure. If so, the permission flag is turned OFF.

According to such a configuration, the player can play a game on the pachinko machine 10 when it is determined that the power switch 85a was in the OFF state during the previous power failure. On the other hand, when it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power outage is the ON state, the processing for enabling the execution of the winning lottery is not executed in the pachinko machine 10. If it is determined that the power switch 85a is in the ON state at the time of power failure, the pachinko machine 10 cannot play a game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a game from being played in the pachinko machine 10 while there is a possibility that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure was determined to be ON. .

Specifically, for example, in a game hall that is not a game hall that simultaneously starts and stops power supply to a plurality of pachinko machines 10 by an island power switch of an island facility, power supply If the state of the switch 85a remains ON, there is a possibility that the pachinko machine 10 has been illegally operated or modified by an illegal person such as a goto master. As described above, according to this modification, when it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is in the ON state, the pachinko machine 10 performs the process of enabling the execution of the winning lottery. To prevent a game from being played in a pachinko machine 10 in a state in which there is a possibility of an abnormality in which the power switch 85a is determined to be in the ON state at the time of the previous power failure because the game is not executed. can be done.

Furthermore, in this modification, even if the main side abnormal power failure flag is ON, that is, even if it is determined that the power switch 85a was in the ON state at the time of the previous power failure, the current power supply When the game permission switch provided in the main control device 60 housing the main control board 61 is pressed within a predetermined period (for example, within 5 minutes) from the start of the supply of the above, the execution of the winning lottery described above is permitted. A configuration may be adopted in which a permission flag to be used is turned ON. In this configuration, the manager of the game hall has a valid reason that the power switch 85a was in the ON state at the time of the previous power outage, and there is no problem even if a game is played on the pachinko machine 10. If it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not available, the game permission switch of the pachinko machine 10 may be pressed. According to the above-described configuration, the pachinko machine 10 will not continue to play games while there is a possibility that the power switch 85a was determined to be in the ON state at the time of the previous power failure. When the manager of the gaming hall recognizes that the possibility of an abnormality has been eliminated and the manager or the like presses the game permission switch, the player is allowed to play the game at the specific pachinko machine 10 It becomes possible to perform

<<7-7-11>> Modification 11:
In the seventh embodiment and each modification described above, when the main side abnormal power failure flag is OFF, that is, the main controller 60 determines that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the OFF state. The opening/closing execution mode may be executed when the opening/closing execution mode is executed. Specifically, for example, a permission flag for permitting execution of the opening/closing execution mode is provided, and the opening/closing execution mode can be executed only when the permission flag is ON. Then, when it is determined that the power switch 85a was in the OFF state at the time of the previous power failure, the permission flag is turned ON, and it is determined that the power switch 85a was in the ON state at the time of the previous power failure. If so, the permission flag is turned OFF.

According to such a configuration, the player can play a game on the pachinko machine 10 when it is determined that the power switch 85a was in the OFF state during the previous power failure. On the other hand, when it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the ON state, the pachinko machine 10 does not execute the processing for enabling execution of the opening/closing execution mode. If it is determined that the power switch 85a is in the ON state at the time of power failure, the pachinko machine 10 cannot play a game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a game from being played in the pachinko machine 10 while there is a possibility that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure was determined to be ON. .

Specifically, for example, in a game hall that is not a game hall that simultaneously starts and stops power supply to a plurality of pachinko machines 10 by an island power switch of an island facility, power supply If the state of the switch 85a remains ON, there is a possibility that the pachinko machine 10 has been illegally operated or modified by an illegal person such as a goto master. As described above, according to this modification, when it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is in the ON state, the pachinko machine 10 can execute the opening/closing execution mode. is not executed, it is suppressed that a game is played in the pachinko machine 10 in a state in which there is a possibility of an abnormality that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure was determined to be in the ON state. be able to.

Furthermore, in this modification, even if the main side abnormal power failure flag is ON, that is, even if it is determined that the power switch 85a was in the ON state at the time of the previous power failure, the current power supply When the game permission switch provided in the main control device 60 housing the main control board 61 is pressed within a predetermined period (for example, within 5 minutes) from the start of the supply of the above, the opening and closing execution mode described above is executed. A configuration may be adopted in which a permission flag for permission is turned ON. In this configuration, the manager of the game hall has a valid reason that the power switch 85a was in the ON state at the time of the previous power outage, and there is no problem even if a game is played on the pachinko machine 10. If it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not available, the game permission switch of the pachinko machine 10 may be pressed. According to the above-described configuration, the pachinko machine 10 will not continue to play games while there is a possibility that the power switch 85a was determined to be in the ON state at the time of the previous power failure. When the manager of the gaming hall recognizes that the possibility of an abnormality has been eliminated and the manager or the like presses the game permission switch, the player is allowed to play the game at the specific pachinko machine 10 It becomes possible to perform

<<7-7-12>> Modification 12:
In the seventh embodiment and each modification described above, based on the state of the main side abnormal power failure flag stored in the main side RAM 64 of the main controller 60, the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is changed as follows. However, instead of this configuration, the movable object 99 for presentation described in the first modification described above is provided, and based on the position of the movable object 99 for presentation, the previous The configuration may be such that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of power failure can be determined at the next start-up. A specific description will be given below.

In this modification, the main MPU 62 of the main controller 60 determines whether the power switch 85a is in the ON state based on the signal from the power switch state detection sensor 85b when the driving voltage becomes less than a predetermined value. It is determined whether the power switch 85a is in the OFF state, and if it is determined that the power switch 85a is in the ON state, an abnormal power interruption generation command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90, and then the above-described main side power interruption processing is executed. do. On the other hand, when it is determined that the power switch 85a is in the OFF state, a normal power interruption generation command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90, and then the main side power interruption processing described above is executed.

When the sound and light side MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 receives the abnormal power interruption occurrence command, the effect movable object 99 is moved from the origin position to the maximum position, and then the sound and light side power interruption processing described above is performed. to run. On the other hand, when the normal power interruption generation command is received, the performance movable object 99 is put on standby at the origin position or returned to the origin position, and then the sound and light side power interruption processing described above is executed. That is, when the power supply is interrupted while the power switch 85a is in the ON state, the effect movable object 99 moves to the maximum position, and the power supply is interrupted while the power switch 85a is in the OFF state. When it falls, the movable object for presentation 99 stays at the origin position.

After that, the sound and light side MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 determines whether or not the production movable object 99 is detected by the origin position detection sensor at the next activation after power supply is started. It is determined whether the state of the power switch 85a at the time of power failure was OFF or ON. Then, when it is determined that the performance movable object 99 has been detected by the origin position detection sensor, that is, when it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure was in the OFF state, the sound and light side abnormal electric power is detected. Turn off the disconnection flag. On the other hand, when it is determined that the performance movable object 99 was not detected by the origin position detection sensor, that is, when it is determined that the power switch 85a was in the ON state at the time of the previous power failure, sound and light side abnormality Turn ON the power failure flag.

Other processes executed by the main control device 60 and the sound emission control device 90 are the same as those of the above-described seventh embodiment and each of the modifications described above.

Next, an example of processing executed by the main side MPU 62 and the sound and light side MPU 92 of this modified example will be described.

The processing executed by the main side MPU 62 and the sound and light side MPU 92 of this modified example is different from that of the seventh embodiment in that the main processing (FIG. 290), the power supply monitoring processing (FIG. 294), the power interruption type determination processing (FIG. 310) and sound and light side power interruption processing (FIG. 314) are different, and other processing is the same as that of the seventh embodiment. Main processing and power supply monitoring processing executed by the main MPU 62 of this modified example and power failure type determination processing and sound and light side power failure processing performed by the sound and light side MPU 92 of this modified example will be described below.

FIG. 320 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the main MPU 62 of the twelfth modification of the seventh embodiment. The difference from the main processing shown in FIG. 290 is that the processing from step Sr0103 to step Sr0105 in FIG. 290 is omitted, and the processing of other steps is the same as the main processing shown in FIG. be. That is, in this modification, the main side abnormal power interruption flag is not provided, and the power interruption type command (normal power interruption command or abnormal power interruption command) corresponding to the state of the main side abnormal power interruption flag is voiced. The process of transmitting to the light emission control device 90 is not executed.

Next, the power supply monitoring process executed by the main MPU 62 of this modified example will be described.

FIG. 321 is a flow chart showing power supply monitoring processing executed by the main MPU 62 of the twelfth modification of the seventh embodiment. The difference from the power monitoring process shown in FIG. 294 is that when it is determined that the power switch 85a is in the OFF state in step Sr0502 of FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that the power switch 85a is in the ON state, an abnormal power interruption occurrence command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S0504a. This is the same as the power monitoring process shown.

Next, the power interruption type determination processing executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 of this modified example will be described.

FIG. 322 is a flow chart showing power interruption type determination processing executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 of the twelfth modification of the seventh embodiment. In step Sr4301a, it is determined whether or not the effect movable object 99 is positioned on the origin position sensor side. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the signal from the origin position sensor is at Hi level, and if the signal from the origin position sensor is at Hi level, the effect movable object 99 is positioned on the side of the origin position sensor. determined to be In step Sr4301a, when it is determined that the effect movable object 99 is located on the origin position sensor side (step Sr4301a: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr4302a to turn off the sound and light side abnormal electric interruption flag. After that, the power interruption type determination processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr4301a that the effect movable object 99 is not positioned on the side of the origin position sensor (step Sr4301a: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr4303a to turn on the sound and light side abnormal power interruption flag. . After that, the power interruption type determination processing is terminated.

Next, sound and light side power interruption processing executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 of the present modification will be described.

FIG. 323 is a flowchart showing sound and light side power interruption processing executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 according to the twelfth modification of the seventh embodiment. The difference from the sound and light side power interruption processing shown in FIG. 314 is that when it is determined in step Sr6201 in FIG. (step Sr6201a1), and if it is determined to be a normal power interruption generation command, move the performance movable object 99 to the origin position sensor side (step Sr6201a2). If it is determined that there is, the effect movable object 99 is moved to the maximum position sensor side (step Sr6201a3), and the processing of other steps is the same as the sound and light side power interruption processing shown in FIG. be.

As described above, according to this modified example, the same effects as those of the seventh embodiment and each of the modified examples described above can be obtained, and the following effects can be obtained.

According to this modification, when it is determined that the power switch 85a is at the ON position when the supply of power from the outside is cut off, the movable object for presentation 99 is moved to the maximum position. If the power switch 85a is in the OFF position when the power supply is cut off, the effect movable object 99 stays at the origin position. , the performance movable object 99 moves to a position other than the origin position. That is, the position of the power switch 85a in the pachinko machine 10 when the power supply from the outside is cut off is indicated by the position of the movable object 99 for presentation. Therefore, the manager of the game hall or the like can visually confirm whether or not the movable object for presentation 99 is at the origin position, so that the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 when the supply of power from the outside is cut off is activated. The position of 85a can be easily confirmed.

Then, according to the present modification, when it is determined that the performance movable object 99 is at the origin position when the supply of electric power from the outside is started, the RTC performance execution permission flag and the deferment suggestion performance execution permission flag is turned OFF, and if it is determined that it is not the origin position, a process is executed to turn ON the RTC effect execution permission flag and the deferment suggestion effect execution permission flag. can be switched in accordance with the position of the power switch 85a when the power supply to is cut off. As a result, appropriate processing can be executed according to the position of the power switch 85a.

In addition, according to this modification, the transmission of the main side abnormal power interruption flag and power interruption type commands (normal power interruption command, abnormal power interruption command) can be omitted. can be reduced.

In addition, you may apply each structure of the modification 1 to the modification 11 mentioned above to this modification. Even in this manner, the effects described in Modifications 1 to 11 can be obtained.

<<7-7-13>> Modification 13:
In the seventh embodiment described above, the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure can be determined at the next startup based on the state of the main side abnormal power failure flag stored in the main side RAM 64 of the main controller 60. configuration. In the twelfth modified example, the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure can be determined at the time of the next activation based on the position of the movable object 99 for presentation controlled by the sound emission control device 90. FIG. Therefore, in this modification, after combining the configuration of the seventh embodiment and the configuration of the modification 12, it is determined whether there is a difference between the determination results of both, and if there is a difference, it is notified may be configured. Hereinafter, an example of processing executed by the main side MPU 62 and the sound and light side MPU 92 of this modified example will be described.

The processing executed by the main side MPU 62 and the sound and light side MPU 92 of this modified example is different from that of the seventh embodiment in that the power supply monitoring processing (FIG. 294), the power failure type determination processing (FIG. The only difference is the content of the disconnection process (FIG. 314), and the rest of the process is the same as that of the seventh embodiment. Power source monitoring processing executed by the main MPU 62 of this modified example, power interruption type determination processing and sound and light side power interruption processing executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 of this modified example will be described below.

FIG. 324 is a flow chart showing power supply monitoring processing executed by the main MPU 62 of the thirteenth modification of the seventh embodiment. The difference from the power supply monitoring process shown in FIG. 324, the main side abnormal power interruption flag is turned ON in step Sr0504 of FIG. 324, the process proceeds to step Sr0504b, an abnormal power interruption generation command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90, and thereafter, This is the point of proceeding to step Sr0506, and the processing of other steps is the same as the power supply monitoring processing shown in FIG.

Next, the power interruption type determination processing executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 of this modified example will be described.

FIG. 325 is a flow chart showing power failure type determination processing executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 of the thirteenth modification of the seventh embodiment. In this modification, the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power outage recognized by the main controller 60 (the state of the main side abnormal power outage flag, the type of the power outage type command) and the sound emission control device 90 side are The state of the power switch 85a (the position of the movable object 99 for presentation) is compared with the recognized state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure, and if they do not match, an abnormality notification is executed. A specific description will be given below.

In step Sr4301, it is determined whether or not a power interruption type command has been received from the main MPU62. Specifically, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not one of the two commands, the normal power interruption command and the abnormal power interruption command, has been received from the main MPU 62 . If it is determined in step Sr4301 that one of the above two commands has been received (step Sr4301: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr4302. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr4301 that none of the above two commands has been received (step Sr4301: NO), the process returns to step Sr4301. That is, it waits until it is determined that one of the above two commands has been received, and when it is determined that one of the above two commands has been received, the process proceeds to step Sr4302. move on.

In step Sr4302, it is determined whether or not the command received as the power interruption type command from the main MPU 62 is an abnormal power interruption command. If it is determined in step Sr4302 that the command received from the main MPU 62 as a power interruption type command is an abnormal power interruption command (step Sr4302: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr4303, where Turn on the sound and light side abnormal power failure flag. After that, the process proceeds to step Sr4303b1.

In step Sr4303b1, it is determined whether or not the effect movable object 99 is positioned on the origin position sensor side. In step Sr4303b1, if it is determined that the effect movable object 99 is not positioned on the origin position sensor side (step Sr4303b1: NO), that is, the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure recognized by the main controller 60 side (ON state) matches the state (ON state) of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power interruption recognized by the sound emission control device 90 side, the power interruption type determination processing is performed as it is. exit.

On the other hand, in step Sr4303b1, if it is determined that the effect movable object 99 is located on the origin position sensor side (step Sr4303b1: YES), that is, the power supply at the time of the previous power failure recognized by the main controller 60 side If the state (ON state) of the switch 85a does not match the state (OFF state) of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure recognized by the sound emission control device 90, the process proceeds to step Sr4303b2, Execute the anomaly notification process. In this modified example, the anomaly notification process is a process of repeatedly outputting a voice such as "Anomaly has occurred. Please check" from the speaker 46 at the maximum volume. After that, infinite loop processing is repeated.

If it is determined in step Sr4302 that the command received as the power interruption type command from the main MPU 62 is not an abnormal power interruption command (step Sr4302: YES), that is, the command received as the power interruption type command from the main MPU 62 is normal. If it is a power interruption command, the process advances to step Sr4304 to turn off the sound and light side abnormal power interruption flag stored in the sound and light side RAM 94 . After that, the process proceeds to step Sr4304b1.

In step Sr4304b1, it is determined whether or not the effect movable object 99 is positioned on the origin position sensor side. In step Sr4304b1, if it is determined that the effect movable object 99 is located on the origin position sensor side (step Sr4303b1: YES), that is, the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure recognized by the main controller 60 side (OFF state) matches the state (OFF state) of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure recognized by the sound emission control device 90 side, the main power failure type determination processing is performed as it is. exit.

On the other hand, in step Sr4304b1, if it is determined that the effect movable object 99 is not positioned on the origin position sensor side (step Sr4303b1: NO), that is, the main controller 60 side recognizes that the power supply at the time of the previous power failure If the state (OFF state) of the switch 85a does not match the state (ON state) of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure recognized by the sound emission control device 90, the process proceeds to step Sr4304b2, Execute the anomaly notification process. In this modified example, the anomaly notification process is a process of repeatedly outputting a voice such as "Anomaly has occurred. Please check" from the speaker 46 at the maximum volume. After that, infinite loop processing is repeated.

Next, sound and light side power interruption processing executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 of the present modification will be described.

FIG. 326 is a flowchart showing sound and light side power interruption processing executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 according to the thirteenth modification of the seventh embodiment. Since the sound and light side power interruption processing shown in FIG. 326 is the same as the sound and light side power interruption processing of Modification 12 shown in FIG. 323, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, according to this modified example, the same effects as those of the seventh embodiment and each of the modified examples described above can be obtained, and the following effects can be obtained.

According to this modified example, when the power switch 85a is in the OFF position when the power supply from the outside is cut off, the movable object for presentation 99 remains at the origin position, while the power supply from the outside is stopped. If the power switch 85a is in the ON position at the time of disconnection, the performance movable object 99 moves to the maximum position. Therefore, the manager of the game hall or the like can visually confirm whether or not the movable object for presentation 99 is at the origin position, so that the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 when the supply of power from the outside is cut off is activated. The position of 85a can be easily confirmed.

Further, according to this modification, when the supply of electric power from the outside is started, the main side abnormal power interruption flag (and the sound and light side abnormal power interruption flag) is OFF, and the movable object for presentation 99 is the origin position, the RTC effect execution permission flag and the deferment suggestion effect execution permission flag are turned OFF, and on the other hand, the main side abnormal power interruption flag (and the sound and light side abnormal power interruption flag) is ON and the performance movable object 99 is not at the origin position, a process for turning ON the RTC performance execution permission flag and the deferment suggestion performance execution permission flag is executed. Therefore, the content of the process to be executed can be switched according to the position of the power switch 85a when the power supply from the outside is cut off. According to this modified example, the position of the power switch 85a when the supply of power from the outside is cut off is determined by the dual system of the main control device 60 and the sound emission control device 90. Confidence in results can be improved.

Further, according to this modification, the main side abnormal power interruption flag (and the sound and light side abnormal power interruption flag) is OFF, and the second determination means determines that the performance movable object 99 is not at the origin position. If so, the abnormality notification process (step Sr4304b2 in FIG. 325) is executed. Furthermore, when it is determined that the main side abnormal power interruption flag (and the sound and light side abnormal power interruption flag) is ON and the movable object for presentation 99 is at the origin position, the abnormality notification process (step of FIG. 325) Sr4303b2) is executed. Therefore, the manager of the game hall or the like can notice that the determination results of the main controller 60 and the sound emission control device 90 in the pachinko machine 10 are in an abnormal state contradicting each other. Specifically, for example, it is difficult for a fraudulent person such as a goto master to prepare a fraudulent base in which information on the state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the previous power failure is matched and stored. If a part of the main controller 60 is replaced with the illegal board, the determination results of the main controller 60 and the sound emission control device 90 are likely to be inconsistent. According to this modification, when the inconsistency is detected, the abnormality notification process is executed. be aware that there may be The administrator or the like can temporarily suspend the operation of the pachinko machine 10 to inspect the pachinko machine 10 or the like.

In addition, you may apply each structure of the modification 1 to the modification 11 mentioned above to this modification. Even in this manner, the effects described in Modifications 1 to 11 can be obtained.

<<7-7-14>> Modification 14:
In Modification 12 and Modification 13, when the state of the power switch 85a at the time of power failure is the ON state (for example, when a plurality of pachinko machines 10 are powered off all at once by the island power switch). By moving the movable object for production 99 to the maximum position, determining the position of the movable object for production 99 at the time of the next activation, and moving the movable object for production 99 from the maximum position to the origin position after the determination, It may be configured such that it can be inspected whether the movable object 99 operates normally.

Specifically, for example, when the state of the power switch 85a at the time of power failure is in the ON state (for example, when a plurality of pachinko machines 10 are simultaneously powered off by the island power switch), power failure processing , specify the direction of rotation of the stepping motor (for example, forward rotation direction) for moving the production movable object 99 from the origin position to the maximum position, set a predetermined number of steps (for example, 20) in the counter, and operate the stepping motor. When the number of steps set in the counter becomes 0, it is determined whether or not the movable object 99 for presentation has been detected by the maximum position detection sensor. When the maximum position detection sensor detects the movable object for presentation 99, the driving of the stepping motor is terminated. On the other hand, when the movable object for presentation 99 is not detected by the maximum position detection sensor, the movable object for presentation 99 is further moved in the direction of the maximum position by setting the counter one by one until it is detected. Then, when the number of added steps exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 5), the movable object malfunction flag is turned ON.

Then, at the next start-up, the state of the movable object malfunction flag is determined, and if it is determined that the movable object malfunction flag is ON, the movable object for effect 99 does not operate normally (abnormality). ) is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the movable object malfunction flag is not ON, the position of the movable object for presentation 99 is determined. Then, when it is determined that the performance movable object 99 is at the maximum position, the rotation direction (for example, reverse direction) of the stepping motor for moving from the maximum position to the origin position is specified, and a predetermined number of steps (for example, 20) is specified. ) is set in the counter to drive the stepping motor, and when the number of steps set in the counter becomes 0, it is determined whether or not the movable object for performance 99 is detected by the origin position detection sensor. When the origin position detection sensor detects the movable object for presentation 99, the driving of the stepping motor is terminated. On the other hand, when the performance movable object 99 is not detected by the origin position detection sensor, the counter is set one by one until the performance movable object 99 is detected, and the performance movable object 99 is further moved in the direction of the origin position. Then, when the number of added steps exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 5), the above-described movable object malfunction notification process is executed.

According to this modified example described above, in a game hall where power supply to a plurality of pachinko machines 10 is simultaneously started and stopped by the island power switch of the island facility, each of the island facilities installed It is possible to simultaneously inspect whether or not the performance movable object 99 of the pachinko machine 10 operates normally.

<<7-7-15>> Modification 15:
Among the above modifications, in the configuration including the movable object for presentation 99, when the state of the power switch 85a at the time of power failure is the ON state, the movable object for presentation 99 is moved to the maximum position, and the power is cut off. When the state of the power switch 85a at the time is OFF, the movable object for production 99 is moved to the origin position (stays at the origin position), and the movement mode of the movable object for production 99 is this configuration. For example, when the state of the power switch 85a at the time of power failure is in the ON state, the movable object for presentation 99 is moved to the origin position (stayed at the origin position), and the power switch at the time of power failure When the state of 85a is the OFF state, the movable object for presentation 99 may be moved to the maximum position.

<<7-7-16>> Modification 16:
In the seventh embodiment and each modification described above, when the power switch 85a is OFF at the time of power failure (for example, when each pachinko machine 10 is individually powered off by each power switch 85a), it is considered "normal". When the power switch 85a is ON at the time of power failure (for example, when a plurality of pachinko machines 10 are powered off all at once by the island power switch), this expression is expressed as "abnormal". For the sake of convenience, for example, a case where the power switch 85a is OFF when the power is cut off may be expressed as "abnormal", and a case where the power switch 85a is ON when the power is cut may be expressed as "normal". . Expressions other than "normal" and "abnormal" may also be used. is ON may be expressed as a "second state".

<<8>> Eighth Embodiment:
<<8-1>> Game machine structure:
FIG. 327 is a perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter also referred to as "pachinko machine") as an eighth embodiment of the present invention. A pachinko machine 10 has a wooden outer frame 11 combined in a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island equipment of the game hall. The pachinko machine 10 also includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11 . A pachinko machine body 12 has an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13. - 特許庁The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11 by metal hinges 15 . The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 16 with respect to the inner frame 13 . Control devices for controlling the pachinko machine body 12, such as a main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device, are arranged on the back of the inner frame 13. FIG. Details of these control devices will be described later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. - 特許庁The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened, and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation using a dedicated key on the cylinder lock 17 .

A substantially central portion of the front door frame 14 is formed with an open window portion 18 . Around the window part 18, resin parts and electric decoration parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. The electrical parts are composed of light emitting means including various lamps such as LEDs. The light emitting means plays a role of enhancing the performance effect by lighting or blinking at each game played by the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot is won, when a ready-to-win game is generated, or the like. A glass unit 19 composed of two sheets of plate glass is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14 , and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19 . A game board, which will be described later, is detachably attached to the inner frame 13 , and the player of the pachinko machine 10 can view the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 19 . Details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper tray 20 and a lower tray 21 for storing game balls. The upper tray 20 is formed in a box shape with an open top, and stores game balls such as rental balls lent from a rental machine (not shown) and prize balls discharged from the pachinko machine main body 12 . The game balls stored in the upper tray 20 are supplied to a game ball shooting mechanism provided in the pachinko machine main body 12. - 特許庁The game ball shooting mechanism is driven by the player's operation of the operation handle 25, and shoots the game balls supplied from the upper tray 20 to the front surface of the game board. The lower tray 21 is arranged below the upper tray 20 and is shaped like a box with an open top. The lower tray 21 stores game balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 20. - 特許庁A discharge port 22 for discharging game balls stored in the lower tray 21 is formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 21 . A lever 23 is provided below the ejection port 22 , and the player can switch the ejection port 22 between a closed state and an open state by operating the lever 23 . When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game ball falls from the discharge port 22 and is discharged from the lower tray 21 to the outside.

A performance operation button 24 is provided in front of the peripheral edge of the upper plate 20.例文帳に追加The effect operation button 24 is an operation unit for the player to perform an input operation for the game effect performed by the pachinko machine 10 . When a player operates a performance operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, a game performance reflecting the operation is performed by the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

An operation handle 25 for a player to operate is provided on the right side of the front door frame 14 when viewed from the front (hereinafter also simply referred to as "right side"). When the player operates (turns) the operation handle 25, a game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism to the front surface of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operation handle 25, there are a touch sensor 25a for permitting driving of the game ball shooting mechanism, a wait button 25b for stopping shooting of game balls by the game ball shooting mechanism when pressed by the player, and the operation handle 25. A variable resistor 25c is provided for detecting the amount of rotational operation of , based on a change in electrical resistance. When the player grips the operating handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operating handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. Then, a game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism to the front surface of the game board with strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

A game ball shooting button 26 for a player to operate is provided on the left side of the periphery of the upper tray 20 in front view (hereinafter also simply referred to as "left side"). When the game ball shooting button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is shot to the front surface of the game board with a predetermined shooting strength regardless of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 by the player. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball shooting button 26, the game ball is shot to the front surface of the game board with the same shooting intensity as when the operation handle 25 is rotated at its maximum. In the case of this embodiment, when a game ball is shot by operating the game ball shooting button 26, the game ball flows to the right side of the game board when viewed from the front and also to the right side of the game board. That is, by operating the game ball shooting button 26, the player can hit the ball to the right. Further, in the following description, the case where the game ball is shot by operating the operation handle 25 and flows to the left side of the game board when viewed from the front and also to the left side of the game board when viewed from the front will be referred to as "left It is sometimes expressed as "hitting". In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the game ball shooting button 26 is operated, the game ball is shot to the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is turned on. . That is, the player turns on at least the touch sensor 25a by grasping the operation handle 25, and then operates the game ball shooting button 26 to shoot the game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball shooting button 26. can be realized.

In this embodiment, the game ball launch button 26 is arranged on the left side of the periphery of the upper tray 20 when viewed from the front. may be adopted. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the game ball launch button 26 is arranged inside (peripheral portion) of the operation handle 25, like the weight button 25b. By doing so, the player can operate the operating handle 25, the weight button 25b, and the game ball shooting button 26 only with the right hand.

Next, the configuration of the rear surface of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. A control device for controlling the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is arranged on the back surface of the pachinko machine 10. - 特許庁

328 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. As shown, the pachinko machine 10 includes a first control unit 51, a second control unit 52, a third control unit 53, and a power supply unit 58. Specifically, these units are provided on the back surface of the inner frame 13 .

The first control unit 51 has a main controller 60 . The main controller 60 has a main control board having a function of controlling the main game. The main control board is housed in a board box made of transparent resin material. This board box is configured to leave traces of opening and closing. For example, a seal is affixed to a portion that can be opened and closed, and when the substrate box is opened, characters such as "opened" appear.

The second control unit 52 includes an audio emission control device 90 and a display control device 100 . The sound emission control device 90 controls emission means such as speakers and various lamps provided in front of the pachinko machine 10 based on commands transmitted from the main control device 60 . The display control device 100 controls the pattern display device based on commands transmitted from the sound emission control device 90 . The pattern display device has a liquid crystal display for displaying patterns and images for presentation.

The third control unit 53 has a payout control device 70 and a launch control device 80 . The payout control device 70 performs payout control for paying out prize balls. When an instruction to shoot a game ball is input from the main control device 60, the shooting control device 80 shoots a game ball with strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 by the player. Controls the ball launching mechanism. In addition, on the back of the inner frame 13, there is a tank 54 to which the game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially supplied, and a slope which is connected to the lower part of the tank 54 and is gently inclined so that the game balls flow downstream. , a case rail 56 connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 55, a game ball is supplied from the case rail 56, and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out according to an instruction from the payout control device 70. A plurality of devices necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10, such as a payout device 71, are provided.

The power supply unit 58 includes a power supply device 85 and a power switch 88 . The power supply device 85 supplies power necessary for the pachinko machine 10 to operate. A power switch 88 is connected to the power supply device 85 . By ON/OFF operation of the power switch 88, a supply state in which power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 and a non-supply state in which power is not supplied to the pachinko machine 10 are switched.

Next, the game board will be explained. The game board is detachably attached to the front surface of the inner frame 13. - 特許庁

329 is a front view of the game board 30. FIG. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on its front surface. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding a game ball is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. A game ball shot from the game ball shooting mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and released above the game area PA, and then flows down the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicularly to the game board 30, and accessories such as windmills are arranged. These nails 42 and windmills distribute and organize the falling directions of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

The game board 30 includes a general prize winning port 32, a central first starting port 33 (hereinafter also referred to simply as the first starting port 33), a second starting port 34, and a right first starting port 44 (hereinafter simply referred to as the first starting port). (also referred to as a mouth 44), a through gate 35, and a variable winnings device 36 are provided. The second starting port 34 and the first right starting port 44 are provided inside the starting port unit 200 .

Also, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display section 45 . The variable display unit 40 is provided substantially in the center of the game board 30, and the main display section 45 is provided near the upper right side of the game board 30 when viewed from the front. A decorative frame member DF whose surface is decorated is attached to the game board 30 so as to surround the variable display unit 40. - 特許庁

A first right-handed rail R1 and a second right-handed rail R2 are provided in a space sandwiched between the portion from the upper side to the right side of the decorative frame member DF, the outer rail portion 31b, and the main display portion 45. is provided. A right-handed outer rail R3 is provided on the right side of the lower portion of the second right-handed rail R2. A right-handed first passage P1 is formed by the first right-handed rail R1 and the second right-handed rail R2. A right-handed second passage P2 is formed by the second right-handed rail R2, the outer rail portion 31b, the main display portion 45, and the right-handed outer rail R3. Both the right-handed first passage P1 and the right-handed second passage P2 are formed in a substantially arcuate shape, and the first right-handed passage P1 and the second right-handed passage P2 are positioned side by side. The right-handed first passage P1 is located inside the right-handed second passage P2.

Both the opening end P1a on one side of the first path P1 when hitting to the right and the opening end P2a on the one side of the second path P2 when hitting to the right are located near the top of the game area PA, and a game ball can enter. ing. Both the other side opening end P1b of the right-handed first path P1 and the other-side open end P2b of the right-handed second path P2 are located in the vicinity of the right side of the game area PA, and are located in the right-handed first path P1. According to this, a game ball can be sent toward the starting port unit 200, and a game ball can be sent toward the variable winning device 36 according to the second passage P2 when striking to the right.

As described above, by maximizing the rotational operation amount of the operating handle 25 (Fig. 327) or by operating the game ball shooting button 26 (Fig. 327), the game ball is moved to the right side of the game area PA. In the case of these operations, the game ball can be guided to the second path P2 when hitting to the right. On the other hand, by adjusting the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 25 (FIG. 327) in the direction of decreasing from the maximum, it is possible to guide the game ball to the first path P1 when hitting to the right. Hereinafter, the right-handed second path P2 will be referred to as the "strong right-handed path P2", and the right-handed first path P1 will be referred to as the "weak right-handed path P1". The operation of guiding the game ball to the strong right-handed path P2, that is, maximizing the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 (Fig. 327) or operating the game ball launch button 26 (Fig. 327) is referred to as " It is called "strong right hitting operation" or simply "strong right hitting", and the operation of guiding the game ball to the weak right hitting path P1 is called "weak right hitting operation" or simply "strong right hitting".

The general prize winning openings 32 are ball entrance members that form ball entrances into which game balls can enter, and are provided in plurality on the game board 30 . In this embodiment, when game balls enter the general winning hole 32, 10 game balls are paid out as prize balls from the payout device 71 (Fig. 328).

The central side first starting port 33 is a ball entrance member that forms a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter. The center-side first starting port 33 is provided at the lower center of the game board 30 . In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the center side first start hole 33, one game ball is paid out as a prize ball, and a winning lottery, which will be described later, is executed.

The second start port 34 is a ball entrance member that forms a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and is provided inside the start port unit 200 . In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting port 34, one game ball is paid out as a prize ball, and a winning lottery, which will be described later, is executed.

The game board 32 is formed with a plurality of openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. A game ball entered into each of the general prize winning opening 32, the center side first starting opening 33, and the second starting opening 34 is guided to the individual openings formed in the game board 32, and is guided to the game board 30. sent to the back side.

The right first starting port 44 is provided on the right side of the game board 30 and provided inside the starting port unit 200 . The right first starting port 44 is configured by a through hole through which a game ball can pass. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the right first starting port 44, one game ball is paid out as a prize ball, and a winning lottery, which will be described later, is executed. In addition, an electric accessory 34a is provided at the right first start port 44. As shown in FIG.

The through gate 35 is provided below the opening end P1b of the weak right-handed passage P1 and above the ball entrance of the starting unit 200 (ball entrance 210a of the main line passage portion 210 described later), and penetrates in the vertical direction. with through holes. A game ball flowing down from the opening end P1b of the weak right hitting passage P1 passes through the through gate 35 and then enters the ball entrance 210a. In this embodiment, the game ball that has passed through the through gate enters the ball entrance 210a with a probability of 100%. The through gate 35 is a through gate that serves as a trigger for executing a lottery for opening the electric accessory 34a. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the main controller 60 performs an internal lottery (electric accessory open lottery) triggered by the passage. As a result of the internal lottery, when the electric role open is won, the electric accessory 34a shifts to the electric role open state in a predetermined manner. Since the through gate 35 is arranged upstream of the right first starting port 44 with respect to the flowing direction of the game ball, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 flows down inside the starting port unit 200 after passing. Then, it is possible to enter the ball into the right first starting hole 44 . In addition, in this embodiment, even if the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the prize ball is not paid out.

The variable winning device 36 is provided below the opening end P1b of the hard-right hitting path P2. The variable winning device 36 includes a large winning opening 36a leading to the back side of the game board 30, and an opening/closing door 36b for opening and closing the large winning opening 36a. The opening/closing door 36b is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot enter the big winning opening 36a. As a result of the internal lottery (winning lottery) by the main controller 60, when a big win is won and the opening/closing execution mode is shifted, the opening/closing door 36b repeats an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state. The open/close execution mode is when a big win is won as a result of a winning lottery by the main controller 60 triggered by the ball entering the center side first start port 33, the right side first start port 44, or the second start port 34. , and the opening/closing door 36b repeats the open state and the closed state. That is, when a big win is won as a result of the winning lottery based on the ball entering the center side first starting hole 33, the operation shifts to the opening/closing execution mode in which the ball can enter the big winning hole 36a of the variable prize winning device 36. do. Similarly, when a big win is won as a result of the winning lottery based on the ball entering the right first starting port 44, and when a big winning is won as a result of the winning lottery based on the ball entering the second starting port 34 Also, it shifts to the opening/closing execution mode in which the ball can be entered into the big winning opening 36 a of the variable winning device 36 . In the present embodiment, when game balls enter the big winning hole 36a of the variable winning device 36, the payout device 71 pays out 15 game balls as prize balls. Next, the configuration of the starting port unit 200 will be described in detail.

330 is an explanatory diagram showing the starting port unit 200. FIG. This figure is a front view of the game board 30 . The starting port unit 200 includes a main line passage portion 210, a first branch passage portion 220 that branches from the middle of the main line passage portion 210 and extends downward, and a second branch passage that branches from the middle of the first branch passage portion 220 and extends downward. A portion 230 , a second starting port 34 , a first right starting port 44 , an out port 251 in the starting port unit, and a fall port 252 . In this embodiment, the main line passage portion 210, the first branch passage portion 220, and the second branch passage portion 230 are made of a transparent resin material, so that the player can easily understand the flow of the game ball inside the starting port unit 200. can be observed.

The main line passage portion 210 has a ball inlet 210a at the end on the upward side and a ball-ball outlet 210b at the end on the downward side, and a game ball can flow from the ball inlet 210a to the ball-ball outlet 210b. is a passage. A second starting opening 34 is provided below the ball opening 210b. An opening 210c into which a game ball can enter is formed in the middle of the main line passage 210, and the upper open end of the first branch passage 220 is connected to the opening 210c. The upper opening end of the first branch passage portion 220 constitutes the right first starting port 44 . A detection sensor 67 d for the right first starting port is provided immediately below the right first starting port 44 . The detection sensor 67 d for the first right starting port detects the entrance of a game ball to the first right starting port 44 .

The electric accessory 34 a is provided in the opening 210 c of the main line passage 210 . The electric accessory 34a moves a substantially rectangular plate material in the front and back directions in the figure, so that the opening 210c is opened (indicated by a broken line in the figure) and the opening 210c is closed (indicated by a broken line in the figure). shown by a solid line). When the electric accessory 34a is in the open state, it permits the entry of the game ball into the first branch passage portion 220, that is, the entry of the game ball into the right first start port 44, and when it is in the closed state. Second, entry of a game ball into the first branch passage portion 220, that is, entry of a game ball into the right first starting port 44 is prohibited. The game ball that has entered the right first starting port 44 travels downward through the first branch passage portion 220 . On the other hand, the game ball that is prohibited from entering the right first starting port 44 advances through the main line passage portion 210 toward the ball ball port 210b.

A game ball sorting device 240 is provided at the point where the first branch passage portion 220 branches to the second branch passage portion 230 . The game ball distribution device 240 includes a reciprocating rotating shaft 241 and a distributing piece portion 242 fixed to the reciprocating rotating shaft 241 . By reciprocating rotation (swinging) of the reciprocating rotary shaft 241a, the sorting piece portion 242 moves between a first position Q1 indicated by a solid line in the figure and a second position Q2 indicated by a broken line in the figure. Reciprocating motion is possible. Specifically, the reciprocating rotary shaft 241 is connected to the game ball distribution drive unit 241a (see FIG. 337), and the game ball distribution drive unit 241a reciprocates the reciprocating rotary shaft 241a, thereby distributing the game ball. The piece 240b reciprocates between the first position Q1 and the second position Q2.

In the present embodiment, the sorting piece portion 242 is kept at the first position Q1 for 2.0 seconds, and then at the second position Q2 for 0.1 second. , the main controller 60 (FIG. 337) executes drive control of the game ball distribution drive section 241a. As a result, the distribution piece portion 242 is displaced to the second position Q2 for 0.1 seconds every 2.1 seconds, and remains at the first position Q1 for the remaining 2 seconds.

FIG. 331 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls when the sorting piece portion 240b is at the first position Q1. When the sorting piece portion 242 is at the first position Q1, the game ball PB is prohibited from entering the second branch passage portion 230, and moves downward toward the end portion 220a of the first branch passage portion 220. can send the game ball PB.

FIG. 332 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls when the sorting piece portion 240b is at the second position Q2. When the sorting piece 242 is at the second position Q2, the game ball PB is permitted to enter the second branch passage portion 230, and moves downward toward the end portion 230a of the second branch passage portion 230. can send game balls.

As shown in FIG. 330, the starting port unit inner outlet 251 is provided below the downward side end 220a of the first branch passage portion 220, and the downward side end portion 230a of the second branch passage portion 230 is provided. A fall port 252 is provided below the .

The out port 251 in the starter unit is an entrance into which a game ball can enter, and is provided inside the starter unit 200 . A game ball that has entered the out port 251 in the starting port unit is guided to an opening that is formed in the game board 32 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and is sent to the back side of the game board 30 .

The falling port 252 is a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and is provided inside the starting port unit 200 . When the game ball enters the falling hole 252, the lottery mode of the winning lottery described later is changed from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. A game ball entered into the fall hole 252 is guided to an opening formed in the game board 32 and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and sent to the back side of the game board 30 .

According to the starting port unit 200 configured as described above, the diverting piece portion 242 is displaced to the second position Q2 for 0.1 seconds every 2.1 seconds. A game ball entered into the right first starting hole 44 enters the falling hole 252 with a probability of 1 second (=1/21). It should be noted that the probability that the game ball entering the right first starting hole 44 enters the falling hole 252 does not need to be limited to the probability of 1/21, and may be changed to a probability of another value.

According to the starting port unit 200 configured as described above, a game ball entering the ball entrance 210a flows along any one of the following first to third routes.
(i) First route RT1: As shown by the solid line in FIG. 333, this is a route in which the game ball PB enters the right first starting hole 44 and then enters the out hole 251 in the starting hole unit. In other words, it is a route that allows the ball to enter the right first starting hole 44 .
(ii) Second route RT2: As shown by the solid line in FIG. That is, it is a route that allows the ball to enter the right first start hole 44 and the fall hole 252 .
(iii) Third route RT3: As shown by the solid line in FIG. That is, it is a route that allows the ball to enter the second starting port 34 .

Which of the first to third routes RT1 to RT3 is selected depends on whether or not the electric accessory 34a is in an open state when the game ball reaches a position in front of the electric accessory 34a, and whether the game ball is in the open state. It is determined by whether the sorting piece portion 242 is at the first position Q1 or at the second position Q2 when the game ball sorting device 240 reaches the front position of the sorting piece portion 242 . Specifically, the game ball PB flows along the first route RT1 (Fig. 333) because the electric accessory 34a is in an open state when the game ball reaches a position in front of the electric accessory 34a, Moreover, when the game ball reaches the position in front of the sorting piece portion 242 of the game ball sorting device 240, the sorting piece portion 242 is in the first position Q1. The reason why the game ball PB flows along the second route RT2 (Fig. 334) is that the electric accessory 34a is in an open state when the game ball reaches a position in front of the electric accessory 34a, and the game ball is This is the case where the sorting piece portion 242 is at the second position Q2 when the game ball sorting device 240 reaches the front position of the sorting piece portion 242 . The game ball PB flows along the third route RT3 (FIG. 335) when the electric accessory 34a is in the closed state when the game ball reaches a position in front of the electric accessory 34a.

As shown in FIG. 329, an out port 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and game balls that have not entered various ball entrances are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 43. be.

General winning opening 32, central first starting opening 33, second starting opening 34, out opening 251 in starting opening unit, falling opening 252, variable winning device 36, and game ball entering out opening 43 It is configured to finally merge with a discharge passage provided on the back of 30, and the discharge passage is provided with a discharge passage detection sensor for detecting game balls. By detecting the game balls with the discharge path detection sensor, it is possible to grasp the number of game balls shot to the game board 30. - 特許庁

The main display section 45 has a special figure unit 37 , a normal figure unit 38 , and a round display section 39 .

The special figure unit 37 includes a first symbol display portion 37a and a second symbol display portion 37b. Each of the first pattern display portion 37a and the second pattern display portion 37b is composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting portions are arranged in a predetermined manner.

The first pattern display portion 37a is a display portion for displaying the first pattern. The first pattern is a variable display or stop based on a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first start ports 33 and 44 (the first start port 33 on the center side and the first start port on the right side 44). Refers to the displayed pattern. The first symbol display part 37a displays until a winning lottery is performed triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting holes 33 and 44, and the display corresponding to the lottery result is performed on the segment display device. As a mode, the variable display of the first pattern is performed. When the lottery is finished, the first symbol display unit 37a causes the segment display to stop displaying the first symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

The second pattern display portion 37b is a display portion for displaying the second pattern. The second pattern refers to a pattern that is variably displayed or statically displayed based on a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34 . The second symbol display part 37b is used as a display mode until a winning lottery is performed triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 34, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is performed on the segment display device. , to perform the variable display of the second symbol. When the lottery is finished, the second symbol display section 37b causes the segment display device to stop displaying the second symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

Here, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol displayed in the second symbol display portion 37b to the stop display is Also called variable time. Specifically, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed in the first symbol display portion 37a to the stop display is also called the first variation time, and the second symbol display portion 37b The time from the start of the variable display of the second symbol to be displayed until the stop display is also called a second variable time.

The special figure unit 37 is further provided with a first pending display portion 37c and a second pending display portion 37d, which are LED lamps, at positions adjacent to the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b. The first reservation display portion 37c displays the number of reservations of the first starting ports 33, 44 (the first starting port 33 on the center side and the first starting port on the right side 44) depending on the color and combination of the LED lamps to be lit. In this embodiment, up to four game balls entering the first starting ports 33 and 44 are reserved as a total of the two first starting ports 33 and 44 . The second reservation display part 37d displays the number of reservations of the second starting port 34 according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be lit. In this embodiment, up to four game balls entered into the second starting port 34 are reserved.

The normal figure unit 38 is composed of a light-emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. The normal figure unit 38, when the electric accessary item open lottery triggered by the passage of the through gate 35 is performed, causes the light-emitting display to display in a lighting display, a blinking display, or a predetermined mode. When the electric accessory open lottery ends, the normal figure unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The round display section 39 is composed of a light-emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games that occur in the open/close execution mode or displays corresponding thereto. A round game means that a predetermined upper limit duration time elapses, or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls wins in the variable winning device 36 until either one of the conditions is satisfied. It is a game that continues the open state of 36b. The number of round games varies depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the shift. The round display unit 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the opening/closing execution mode is started, and ends when the opening/closing execution mode is finished and a new game is started.

In addition, the special figure unit 37, the general figure unit 38, and the round display unit 39 are not limited to being configured by a segment display device or a light emitting display device using an LED lamp. It may consist of various display devices capable of showing the draw in progress and the draw results, such as a CRT or dot matrix display.

The variable display unit 40 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area PA. The variable display unit 40 has a pattern display device 41 . The pattern display device 41 has a liquid crystal display. The display contents of the pattern display device 41 are controlled by the display control device 100 . The pattern display device 41 may be replaced with various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

The symbol display device 41 variably displays the symbols when the first symbol display unit 37a performs variable display or stop display based on the winning to the center side first start port 33 or the right side first start port 44. Or display a stop display. Further, when the second symbol display unit 37b performs variable display or static display based on the ball entering the second starting hole 34, the symbol display device 41 performs variable display or static display of the symbols accordingly. The pattern display device 41 is not limited to the display performance triggered by the entry of the ball into the central side first start port 33, the right side first start port 44, or the second start port 34, and shifts when a jackpot is won. It also performs display effects during the open/close execution mode. Details of the pattern display device 41 will be described below.

FIG. 336 is an explanatory diagram showing symbols that are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41 and the display surface 41a. FIG. 336(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the first decorative design or the second decorative design that is variably displayed on the design display device 41. FIG. The first decorative design is an image displayed on the design display device 41, and is a design corresponding to the first design displayed on the first design display section 37a. The second decorative design is an image displayed on the design display device 41, and is a design corresponding to the second design displayed on the second design display section 37b.

As shown in FIG. 336(a), the symbol display device 41 variably displays symbols representing numbers 1 to 8 as the first decorative symbol or the second decorative symbol. As the symbols to be variably displayed, symbols such as characters may be added to the symbols representing the numbers 1 to 8. FIG.

FIG. 336(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. As shown in FIG. As illustrated, a main display area MA and a sub-display area SA are displayed on the display surface 41a. In the main display area MA, there are cases where the image of the first decorative design is displayed and where the image of the second decorative design is displayed. Similarly, in the sub-display area SA, as in the main display area MA, there are cases where the image of the first decorative design is displayed and where the image of the second decorative design is displayed. When the image of the first decorative design is displayed in the main display area MA, the image of the second decorative design is displayed in the sub-display area SA, and the image of the second decorative design is displayed in the main display area MA. , an image of the first decorative design is displayed in the sub-display area SA. Which of the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols is displayed in the main display area MA and the sub-display area SA is determined by the state of the game.

Three pattern rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 of left, middle and right are displayed in the main display area MA. In each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3, patterns of numbers 1 to 8 are arranged in ascending or descending order of numbers as the first decorative pattern or the second decorative pattern shown in FIG. A variable display that scrolls from top to bottom or from bottom to top with periodicity is performed. As shown in FIG. 336(b), after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol row is displayed in a stationary state on the activated line L1.

Specifically, when the game ball enters the first starting port 33, 44 (the central side first starting port 33, the right side first starting port 44) or the second starting port 34, the symbols of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 A variable display is started in which is periodically scrolled in a predetermined direction. Then, the symbols to be scrolled are switched from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol row Z1, the symbol row Z3, and the symbol row Z2, and finally, the predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. . When the variable display of the symbols is finished and the display is stopped, and when the result of the winning lottery by the main control device 60 is a big win, a predetermined predetermined combination of symbols appears on the activated line L1. It is formed. For example, the same symbol combination is formed on the activated line L1. The mode of the first decorative design and the second decorative design in the main display area MA is not limited to the above-described mode. For example, the number of symbol rows in the main display area MA, the number of active lines, the direction of the variable display of symbols in the symbol rows, the number of symbols in each symbol row, etc., display modes of the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols are various. can be adopted.

Three pattern rows Z4, Z5 and Z6 on the left, middle and right are displayed in the sub-display area SA. In each of the pattern rows Z4 to Z6, patterns of numbers 1 to 8 are arranged in ascending or descending order of numbers as the first decorative pattern or the second decorative pattern shown in FIG. A variable display that scrolls from top to bottom or from bottom to top with periodicity is performed. As shown in FIG. 336(b), after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol row is displayed in a stationary state on the activated line L2.

Specifically, when the game ball enters the first starting port 33, 44 (central side first starting port 33, right side first starting port 44), the symbols of each symbol row Z4 to Z6 are periodically predetermined. A variable display that scrolls in the direction is started. Then, the symbols to be scrolled are switched from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol row Z4, the symbol row Z6 and the symbol row Z5, and finally the predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed in the symbol rows Z4 to Z6. . When the variable display of symbols is finished and the display is stopped, and when the result of the winning lottery by the main control device 60 is a big win, a predetermined predetermined combination of symbols appears on the activated line L2. It is formed. For example, the same symbol combination is formed on the activated line L2. The mode of the first decorative design and the second decorative design in the sub-display area SA is not limited to the above-described mode. For example, the number of symbol rows in the sub-display area SA, the number of active lines, the direction of the variable display of symbols in the symbol rows, the number of symbols in each symbol row, etc., display modes of the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols are various. can be adopted.

Here, the "game cycle" means the period from the start of the variable display of the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b to the end of the variable display and the stop display until the end of the stop display. In other words, the winning lottery for the special information acquired based on the ball entering either the first start ports 33, 44 (the center side first start port 33, the right side first start port 44) or the second start port 34 This is one unit of processing for informing the player of the result of the lottery.

Further, as shown in FIG. 336(b), the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 displays a first reserved display area Ds1 and a second reserved display area Ds2. In the first reservation display area Ds1, the number of reservations based on the number of balls entered into the first starting openings 33 and 44 (the first starting opening 33 on the center side and the first starting opening on the right side 44) is displayed. The second pending display area Ds2 displays the number of pending balls entered into the second starting port 34 . In addition, as described above, in the present embodiment, the number of reserved game balls that have won the first starting ports 33 and 44 (central side first starting port 33, right side first starting port 44) and second starting port 34 is , each up to a maximum of four.

Further, as shown in FIG. 336(b), on the display surface 41a, blinking display and lighting in synchronization with the variable display and stop display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a of the special figure unit 37 are displayed. The first synchronous display unit Sync1 that performs the display, and the second synchronous display that performs blinking display and lighting display in synchronization with the variable display and stop display of the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display unit 37b of the special figure unit 37 Sync2. Specifically, when the first symbol display portion 37a is performing the variable display, the first synchronization display portion Sync1 performs blinking display, and when the first symbol display portion 37a is performing the stop display, the 1 synchronous display section Sync1 performs lighting display. Further, when the second symbol display portion 37b is performing the variable display, the second synchronization display portion Sync2 performs blinking display, and when the second symbol display portion 37b is performing the stop display, the second synchronization display. The part Sync2 performs lighting display.

In this embodiment, the display surface 41a is configured to display the main display area MA, the sub-display area SA, the first synchronization display area Sync1, and the second synchronization display area Sync2. A configuration in which some or all of these displays are not displayed may be employed.

<<8-2>> Electrical Configuration of Gaming Machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described using a block diagram.

FIG. 337 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 10 mainly includes a main controller 60 , a sound emission control device 90 , and a display control device 100 .

The main controller 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main game. The main control board 61 has an MPU 62 composed of elements having multiple functions. The MPU 62 includes a CPU (not shown) that executes various control programs, a ROM 63 that records various control programs and fixed value data, and temporarily stores various data when executing the programs recorded in the ROM 63. and a RAM 64, which is a memory for storing. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. A part of the functions of the MPU 62 may be provided by another element. Details of various areas provided in the ROM 63 and RAM 64 will be described later.

The main control board 61 is provided with an input port (not shown) and an output port (not shown). An input port of the main control board 61 is connected to a payout control device 70 and a power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in a power supply device 85 . The main control board 61 is supplied with stable 24 V DC power from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86 . The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power supply as an external power supply, and converts the external power supplied from the commercial power supply into the operating power required by the main control device 60, the payout control device 70, etc., to each device supply power. The power supply device 85 is equipped with a capacitor (not shown), and in the event of a power failure or the power switch 88 (FIG. 328) being turned off, continues to supply power to each device for a predetermined period of time. do.

Various detection sensors 67a to 67g are connected to the input port of the main control board 61. As shown in FIG. Specifically, various ball entrances such as the general winning opening 32, the central first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, the right first starting opening 44, the falling opening 252, the through gate 35, and the variable winning device 36 It is connected to a plurality of detection sensors provided in the The MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether or not the game ball flowing down the game area PA has entered each ball entrance based on the signals from the various detection sensors 67a to 67g, and the game ball passes through the gate. It is determined whether or not 35 has been passed. Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first start ports 33, 44 (the center side first start port 33, the right side first start port 44) and the second start port 34. , an electric accessory opening lottery is executed based on the ball entering the through gate 35.例文帳に追加

In the present embodiment, a detection sensor (not shown) is also provided in the out port 251 in the starting port unit provided in the starting port unit 200 . The detection sensor is also connected to the input port of the main control board 61, and based on the signal from the detection sensor, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 detects that the game ball flowing down the game area PA reaches the out port in the starter unit. A determination can be made as to whether or not the ball has entered 251 . A first branch passage connecting between the opening 210c and the out port 251 in the starting port unit is configured to determine whether or not the game ball has entered the out port 251 in the starting port unit. Ball clogging of game balls in the section 220 can be detected. Specifically, when the entry of the game ball to the right first start hole 44 is detected based on the signal from the detection sensor 67d for the right first start hole, then detection for the second start hole When the entry of the game ball is not detected by both the sensor and the detection sensor for the out port 251 in the starting port unit, it can be determined that the game ball is clogged in the middle of the first branch passage part 220.例文帳に追加.

The output port of the main control board 61 has a variable winning driving unit 36c that opens and closes the open/close door 36b of the variable winning device 36, and an electric accessory driving unit 34b that opens and closes the electric accessory 34a of the right first start port 44. , and a game ball distribution driving section 241a that reciprocates the distribution piece portion 240b of the game ball distribution device 240 between the first position Q1 and the second position Q2, and the main display section 45 are connected. . Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning driving section 36c so that the opening/closing door 36b is opened/closed. Further, as a result of the electric accessory opening lottery, when the electric role opening is won, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 34b so that the electric accessory 34a is released. In each game round, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b in the main display portion 45. FIG. Further, when the jackpot type is determined in the opening/closing execution mode and the number of round games to be executed in the opening/closing execution mode is determined, display control of the round display section 39 in the main display section 45 is executed.

A payout control device 70 and a sound emission control device 90 are connected to the output port of the main control board 61 . A prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 70 from the main control device 60 based on the winning judgment result, for example. When the main controller 60 transmits the prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63. FIG. Specifically, when the entry into the general winning hole 32 is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is transmitted from the main controller 60, and the first starting holes 33, 44 are sent. When the entering ball is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of one game ball is transmitted from the main controller 60, and when the entering ball into the second starting port 34 is specified, one game ball is sent. A prize ball command corresponding to the payout of is transmitted from the main controller 60. - 特許庁The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 based on the prize ball command received from the main controller 60 to pay out prize balls.

A discharge control device 80 is connected to the payout control device 70 . The shooting control device 80 controls shooting of the game ball shooting mechanism 81 . The game ball shooting mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined shooting conditions are met. Also, the operation handle 25 and the game ball shooting button 26 are connected to the shooting control device 80 .

The sound emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60 and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main controller 60 transmits various commands, the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63 is referred to. Details of these various commands are described later.

In addition, based on various commands received from the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90 controls the driving of various lamps 47 composed of light emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the front door frame 14, and the driving control of the speaker 46. and control the display control device 100 . Also, the effect operation button 24 is connected to the sound emission control device 90, and when the effect operation button 24 is operated by the player at a predetermined timing, a game effect reflecting the operation is performed. It controls the various lamps 47, the speaker 46, the display control device 100, and the like.

The display control device 100 executes display control of the pattern display device 41 based on various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 . Specifically, the display control device 100, based on the various commands received from the sound emission control device 90, grasps the fluctuation time of the pattern in the pattern display device 41 and the type of combination of patterns to be finally stopped and displayed. , presence/absence of occurrence of ready-to-win, contents of ready-to-win effect, contents of notice effect to be executed in each game cycle, and the like are grasped. In this embodiment, the stop time, which is the time during which the combination of symbols is stopped and displayed, is constant. Therefore, by determining the variable time, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game, is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

FIG. 338 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used for a winning lottery. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 sets the winning lottery, the setting of the display of the main display section 45, the setting of the pattern display of the pattern display device 41, and the like. Specifically, a winning random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery. A jackpot type counter C2 is used when sorting the jackpot types such as probability variable jackpot results and normal jackpot results. A ready-to-win random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not to generate a ready-to-win when the symbol row displayed on the symbol display device 41 is changed.

A random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. Further, when determining the variation time in the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b of the main display portion 45 and the symbol display device 41, a variation type counter CS is used. Furthermore, the electric accessory opening counter C4 is used for the electric accessory opening lottery for determining whether the electric accessory 34a of the right first start port 44 is to be opened.

Each of the counters C1 to C4, CINI, and CS is a loop counter that adds 1 to the counter value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. FIG.

The RAM 64 is provided with a pending information storage area 64b and a determination processing execution area 64c. The reservation information storage area 64b is provided with a first reservation area Ra and a second reservation area Rb. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the center side first start port 33 or the right side first start port 44, each value of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 at the timing of the ball entry are stored in chronological order in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b. In addition, when the game ball enters the second start port 34, each value of the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 at the timing of entering the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b stored in chronological order.

The details of the winning random number counter C1 will be described. The winning random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery as described above. The winning random number counter C1 is, for example, configured to be incremented by one within the range of 0 to 1199 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Further, when the winning random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value=0 to 1199).

The hit random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and its updated value is the entry ball when the game ball enters the first start hole (the central side first start hole 33 and the right side first start hole 44). It is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of, and when the game ball enters the second start port 34, the second reservation area of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry. Stored in Rb.

The value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the first reservation area Ra is moved to the first execution area of the determination process execution area 64c, and is collated with the hit/fail table stored in the hit/fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, resulting in a big hit. It is determined whether or not In addition, the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the second reservation area Rb is moved to the second execution area 64cp of the determination processing execution area, and is collated with the hit/fail table stored in the hit/fail table storage area 63a of the ROM63. It is determined whether or not a jackpot will be achieved.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first start ports 33 and 44 (the center side first start port 33 and the right side first start port 44), it is stored in the first reservation area Ra. The value of the winning random number counter C1 thus obtained is moved to the first execution area of the determination processing execution area 64c, and is collated with the success/failure table stored in the success/failure table storage area 63a of the ROM 63 to determine whether or not a big win will occur. When the game ball enters the second starting port 34, the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the second reservation area Rb is moved to the second execution area of the judgment processing execution area 64c. Then, the process of comparing with the win/lose table stored in the win/lose table storage area 63a of the ROM 63 and determining whether or not the win will be a big win is executed in parallel. In the following, the process of determining whether or not a big hit will be triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first start ports 33 and 44, and the big hit triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second start port 34. Along with executing in parallel the determination processing of whether or not to become, the variable display of the first symbol display portion 37a and the variable display of the second symbol display portion 37b can be executed in parallel (simultaneously). The pachinko machine 10 of the embodiment is also called a simultaneous variation machine.

In the following description, a game (also referred to as a game round) that is executed when a game ball enters the first starting holes 33 and 44 is referred to as a first starting hole game round, and a second starting hole. A game (also referred to as a game round) that is executed when a game ball enters 34 may be referred to as a second starting port game round.

Next, the details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining the jackpot type. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented one by one within the range of 0 to 99 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and the updated value is the first reservation area Ra , and when a game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entry.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the determination process execution area 64c. The jackpot type is determined using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in . Furthermore, the MPU 62 uses the value of the hit random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to determine the display mode of the segment display that is stopped and displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b. . The stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referred to for the determination.

Next, details of the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is used when determining whether or not a reach occurs when the result of the winning lottery is not a big win. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the first start ports 33 and 44, and the second start is performed. At the timing when the game ball enters the mouth 34, it is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b. After the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first reservation area Ra is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c, it is compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63, and the reach occurs. After the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the second reservation area Rb is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c, it is compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63, and the reach occurs. However, when the result of the winning lottery is a big win and the game shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 determines the occurrence of reach regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

The ready-to-win means that, for some of the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41, there is a possibility that a combination of symbols corresponding to a big win will be established, and some combinations of symbols are stopped. It refers to a display state in which symbols are displayed and the remaining symbol rows are displayed in a variable manner. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the combination of symbols corresponding to the big win refers to the combination of the same symbols on a predetermined pay line. As a specific example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a shown in FIG. A ready-to-win state is achieved by forming a ready-to-win line and performing variable display of symbols in the symbol row Z2 when the ready-to-win line is formed. Then, when a big win occurs, the same symbols as the symbols forming the reach line are stop-displayed in the symbol row Z2.

In addition, in the ready-to-win state, while the ready-to-win line is formed, the patterns are displayed in the remaining pattern rows in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen to create a ready-to-win effect. It includes a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a after displaying a combination of patterns in which a reach line is formed in a reduced size or not. In addition, when the ready-to-win effect is being performed or before the ready-to-win display is performed, the determination of whether or not to perform a notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character is performed using the reach-to-win random number counter C3 or other counters. may

Next, details of the fluctuation type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the variation time in the first symbol display portion 37 a and the second symbol display portion 37 b and the symbol variation time in the symbol display device 41 . The fluctuation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in sequence within a range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once each time a normal process, which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of variation display in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b and at the start of symbol variation by the symbol display device 41. The variable time table stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is used when determining the variable time in the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b.

Next, the details of the electric accessory release counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory release counter C4 is, for example, configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 465 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated, and stored in the electric role holding area 64d of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the through gate 35. - 特許庁Then, at a predetermined timing, after the value of the electric role product open counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 64d moves to the electric role execution area 64e, the value of the electric role product open counter C4 is displayed in the electric role execution area 64e. A lottery (hereinafter referred to as an electric accessory open lottery) is performed as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to the open state. Specifically, in the electric role execution area 64e, the winning/failure table (electric role lottery winning/failure table) stored in the role lottery table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 and the value of the electric role lottery counter C4 are different. It is collated, and it is determined whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to the open state.

At least one of the acquired value of the winning random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, and the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 corresponds to special information in the present invention. In addition, at least one of the value of the hit random number counter C1, the value of the big hit type counter C2, and the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first reservation area Ra and the second reservation area Rb is also called reservation information.

Next, the success/failure table will be described. The success/failure table is table data for matching with the winning random number counter C1 when a winning lottery is performed based on the winning random number counter C1. A low-probability mode and a high-probability mode are set in the pachinko machine 10 as a lottery mode for a winning lottery. In the winning lottery in the probability mode, the success/failure table for the high probability mode is referred to. High-probability mode (also called high-probability gaming state) is a gaming state that is started by winning a variable probability jackpot, and the probability of winning a jackpot in a winning lottery is relatively higher than the low-probability mode. To tell. In addition, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 is triggered by the entry of game balls into the first start ports 33 and 44, and the hit random number counter C1 stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b. A success/failure table for collation, and a success/failure table for collation with the hit random number counter C1 stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second start port 34. are stored as separate table data. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 includes a success/failure table for the first start port (for low probability mode), a success/failure table for the first start port (for high probability mode), and a success/failure table for the second start port (low probability mode). The success/failure table for the probability mode) and the success/failure table for the second start port (for the high probability mode) are stored in the success/failure table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. FIG.

FIG. 339 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the success/failure table for the first start port. FIG. 339(a) shows the success/failure table for the first starting point (for low probability mode), and FIG. 339(b) shows the success/failure table for the first starting point (for high probability mode).

As shown in FIG. 339(a), in the success/failure table for the first start port (for the low probability mode), four values of 0 to 3 are set as the value of the winning random number counter C1 for the big win. there is Among the values 0 to 1199, the values (4 to 1199) other than the four values 0 to 3 are outliers.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 339(b), 20 values from 0 to 19 are set in the success/failure table for the first start port (for high-probability mode) as the value of the winning random number counter C1 for the big win. It is In addition, 40 values of 20 to 59 are set as the value of the random number counter C1 for the special small win, and 1140 values of 60 to 1199 are set as the value of the random number counter C1 for the normal small win. there is

Here, the "minor win" is a win/fail result that triggers the transition to the opening/closing execution mode in which the variable winning device 36 is opened and closed, but does not trigger the transition to the lottery mode, which will be described later. The number of round games generated in the opening/closing execution mode is limited to one. In this embodiment, two types of small wins are prepared, that is, a normal small win and a special small win (premium small win). A special small win is a small win that can trigger the support mode to shift from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode. It should be noted that the opening time of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 at the time of a small hit is 0.1 sec.

"Off" is a success/fail result that does not trigger the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, nor does it trigger the transition to the lottery mode and the support mode. In this embodiment, there is no setting of a value for "outlier" in the right/wrong table for the first start port (for high probability mode) shown in FIG. 339(b).

In this embodiment, the value group of the winning random number counter C1 set as a jackpot in the success/failure table for the first start port (for low probability mode) is set in the success/failure table for the first start port (for high probability mode). It is included in the value group of the winning random number counter C1 that is set as a big win. However, as long as the probability of winning a big win in the high-probability mode is higher than in the low-probability mode as a result of the winning lottery, the number and value of the random numbers set as the big wins are arbitrary.

FIG. 340 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the success/failure table for the second start port. FIG. 340(a) shows the success/failure table for the second start port (for low probability mode), and FIG. 340(b) shows the success/failure table for the second start port (for high probability mode).

As shown in FIG. 340(a), in the success/failure table for the second start port (for the low probability mode), four values of 0 to 3 are set as the value of the winning random number counter C1 for the big win. there is Among the values 0 to 1199, the values (4 to 1199) other than the four values 0 to 3 are outliers. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 340(b), 20 values from 0 to 19 are set in the success/failure table for the second start port (for the high probability mode) as the value of the winning random number counter C1 for the big win. It is Of the values from 0 to 1199, the values (20 to 1199) other than the 20 values from 0 to 19 are outliers. In this way, the high-probability mode has a higher probability of winning a big win in the winning lottery than the low-probability mode.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the value group of the winning random number counter C1 set as the jackpot in the success/failure table for the second start port (for low probability mode) is the success/failure table for the second start port (for high probability mode). ) is included in the value group of the winning random number counter C1 set as a jackpot. However, as long as the probability of winning a big win in the high-probability mode is higher than in the low-probability mode as a result of the winning lottery, the number and value of the random numbers set as the big wins are arbitrary.

Next, the jackpot type will be described. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set in the pachinko machine 10. - 特許庁Specifically, for example, by providing differences in the following three aspects or modes, it is possible to set a plurality of types of jackpots.
(1) Aspect of opening/closing control of variable winning device 36 in opening/closing execution mode (2) Lottery mode for winning lottery after completion of opening/closing execution mode (3) Electric accessory 34a of right first start port 44 after completion of opening/closing execution mode support mode for

In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the above-mentioned (1) opening/closing execution mode, the occurrence of winning balls to the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode. A high-frequency winning mode and a low-frequency winning mode can be set so that the frequencies are relatively high and low. For example, in the high frequency winning mode, the opening and closing door 36b is opened and closed a plurality of times (for example, 16 times) from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode, and one opening is performed until 30 seconds elapses or to the opening and closing door 36b. It can be set to continue until the number of hit balls reaches 10. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening and closing door 36b is opened and closed twice from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode, and one opening is until 0.2 sec elapses or a ball enters the opening and closing door 36b. It can be set to continue until the number reaches six.

When the operation handle 25 is operated by the player, the game ball shooting mechanism 81 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is shot toward the game area PA every 0.6 sec. In the case of the above specific example, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of the opening/closing door 36b is 0.2 sec. In other words, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of the open/close door 36b is shorter than the shooting cycle of the game ball. Therefore, in the opening and closing execution mode related to the low-frequency winning mode, substantially no game balls enter. However, even in the opening and closing execution mode related to the low-frequency winning mode, it may be set so that the game ball can enter.

The number of times of opening and closing the opening/closing door 36b, the limit time for one opening, and the limit number of openings for one opening are determined by the variable winning device 36 during the period from the start of the opening/closing execution mode to the end of the opening/closing execution mode. As long as the frequency of ball occurrence is higher in the high-frequency winning mode than in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening mode of the opening/closing door 36b is arbitrary. Specifically, if the high frequency winning mode has more opening and closing times than the low frequency winning mode, the opening limit time for one opening is longer, or the opening limit number for one opening is set more good. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, in the open/close execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode, substantially no winning ball to the variable winning device 36 may occur.

The pachinko machine 10 has a high-probability mode in which a winning lottery is performed using a high-probability win-or-fail table as a win-or-fail table, and a win-fail table as a win-or-fail table. A low-probability mode in which a winning lottery is performed using a low-probability success/failure table can be set. As described with reference to FIGS. 339 and 340, the winning lottery using the high-probability win-or-fail table is better than the winning lottery using the low-probability win-fail table. High chance of winning the jackpot.

In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of the support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the right first starting port 44 after the end of the above-mentioned (3) opening and closing execution mode, game balls are shot in a similar mode to the game area PA. A high-frequency support mode and a low-frequency support mode are selected so that the frequency of the electric accessory 34a of the right first starting port 44 being in the open state per unit time is relatively high or low when compared in a continuing situation. mode can be set.

Specifically, the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode have different probabilities of winning the electric role open lottery in the electric role item opening lottery using the electric role item opening counter C4. In the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role open lottery in the electric accessory open lottery is made higher than in the low frequency support mode. In addition, in the high-frequency support mode, the opening time of the electric accessory 34a may be set longer than in the low-frequency support mode when the electric role opening winning is won.

Although not adopted in the present embodiment, in the high frequency support mode, the number of times the electric accessory 34a is in the open state when the electric accessory 34a is elected is set higher than in the low frequency support mode. good too. Furthermore, it may be configured such that the electric accessory 34a is set to have a long opening time once. In addition, in the high-frequency support mode, in the case where the open state of the electric accessory 34a occurs multiple times due to the electric role open winning, the closing time from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state is , may be set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the time secured from one electric accessory open lottery to the next electric accessory open lottery is set to be relatively shorter than in the low-frequency support mode. may

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of a ball entering the right first starting port 44 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. That is, the high-frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary game state that assists establishment of special information acquisition conditions.

In the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won as a result of the winning lottery, the jackpot type is sorted using the jackpot type counter C2. The distribution of the jackpot types corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63 as a distribution table.

FIG. 341 is an explanatory diagram of the contents of the allocation table. FIG. 341(a) shows the distribution table for the first start port, and FIG. 341(b) shows the distribution table for the second start port. The distribution table for the first start port is referred to during a winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33, and the distribution table for the second start port is referred to the second start port 34. It is referred to during the winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball.

As shown in the distribution table for the first starting port of FIG. A 16R probability variable jackpot, an 8R probability variable jackpot, and an 8R normal jackpot are set.

In the 16R probability variable jackpot and the 8R probability variable jackpot, the mode of opening and closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode, and the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the end of the opening and closing execution mode (hereinafter simply “lottery mode”). ) is a high-probability mode, and the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode is a high-frequency support mode. The difference between the 16R variable variable jackpot and the 8R variable variable jackpot is that the number of openings of the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode is different, the 16R variable variable jackpot is 16 times (16 rounds), and the 8R variable variable jackpot is 8. times (8 rounds).

In the 8R normal jackpot, the mode of opening and closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode, the lottery mode after the opening and closing execution mode is the low probability mode, and the support after the opening and closing execution mode is finished. It is a jackpot where the mode is a high frequency support mode. The number of openings of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the 8R normal jackpot is 8 times (8 rounds).

In the distribution table for the first start port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 99", "0 to 54" corresponds to the 16R probability variable jackpot, and "55 to 69" corresponds to the 8R probability variable jackpot. , and "70 to 99" corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, three types of jackpots are set as the types of jackpots. Therefore, the aspect of the jackpot is diversified. When these three types of jackpots are compared, the degree of advantage for the player is the highest for the 16R variable variable jackpot, the second highest for the 8R variable jackpot, and finally the 8R normal jackpot. By thus setting a plurality of types of jackpots with different degrees of advantage for the player, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous and increase the degree of attention to the game. It should be noted that the types of jackpots are not necessarily limited to the above three types of jackpots, and may be two types or four types of jackpots. For example, the configuration may be such that four types of jackpots are set: 16R variable probability jackpot, 8R variable probability jackpot, 16R normal jackpot, and 8R normal jackpot.

As shown in the distribution table for the second start port in FIG. A 16R probability variable jackpot, an 8R probability variable jackpot, and an 8R normal jackpot are set. In the distribution table for the second start port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 99", "0 to 64" corresponds to the 16R probability variable jackpot, and "65 to 69" corresponds to the 8R probability variable jackpot. , and "70 to 99" corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot.
It usually corresponds to the jackpot.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won, the type of jackpot is distributed based on the ball entering the first start port 33 and when the jackpot is won. It is different from the case of winning a jackpot based on the entry of the ball into the starting hole 34, and a clear difference is provided in the advantage for the player.

In addition, when the winning lottery results in a loss, the mode is not changed to the opening/closing execution mode, and the lottery mode and the support mode are not changed. In the sorting of the types of jackpots, if a 16 probability variable jackpot or an 8R probability variable jackpot is obtained, as described above, the lottery mode after the end of the opening and closing execution mode becomes a high probability mode, but this high probability mode The state is continued until the next big win is won in the winning lottery, or the game ball enters the falling hole 252 provided in the starter unit 200.例文帳に追加

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, and the jackpot type using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. However, the MPU 62 further uses the value of the winning random number counter C1 and the value of the big winning type counter C2 to stop and display the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b. Determine the display mode. The stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referred to for the determination.

Next, a reach determination table (hereinafter referred to as a reach determination success/failure table) will be described. The reach determination success/failure table is table data for collating with the value of the reach random number counter C3 when determining whether or not reach occurs based on the value of the reach random number counter C3.

FIG. 342 is an explanatory diagram of a reach determination success/failure table. As shown in FIG. 342, among the values of the reach random number counter C3 ranging from 0 to 399, 20 values from 0 to 19 are set in the reach determination success/failure table as the values for winning the reach. Among the values of 0 to 399, values (20 to 399) other than the 20 values of 0 to 19 are set as outliers, that is, values that do not win the reach. In other words, the probability of winning the ready-to-win is 1/20 in the situation where the jackpot is not won in the winning lottery.

The pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is the total value of the number of reserved game balls entering the first starting port 33 and the number of reserved game balls entering the second starting port 34. Five reach determination success/failure tables with different probabilities of winning the reach are provided. The success/failure table shown in FIG. 342 is for a case where the total pending number is four or more, and the five hit/fail determination tables for reach determination including the success/failure table show that the smaller the total pending number, the higher the probability of winning the reach. getting higher. For example, if the total pending number is 3, the reach winning probability is about 1/11, if the total pending number is 2, the reach winning probability is about 1/10, and if the total pending number is 1 is about 1/9, and when the total pending number is 0, the reach winning probability is about 1/6. The number of reach determination right/wrong tables is not limited to five, and may be two, three, four, six or more. The point is that there are a plurality of reach determination right/wrong tables, and as long as the smaller the total number of pending games, the higher the probability of winning the reach, any configuration may be used.

FIG. 343 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the success/failure table (electric accessary product open lottery success/failure table) used when executing the electric accessary product open lottery.

FIG. 343(a) shows a success/failure table (for low-frequency support mode) for electric accessory open lottery used in low-frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 343(a), in the electric accessory open lottery success/failure table (for low frequency support mode), there are two values of 0 and 1 for the electric accessory open counter C4 that will win the electric role open winning. A value is set. 464 values from 2 to 465 are set as the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4 to be out. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 in the low-frequency support mode and the electric accessary item open lottery is executed, the electric role open lottery is won with a probability of 1/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric role opening win is made in the low-frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.4 seconds.

FIG. 343(b) shows a success/failure table for electric accessory open lottery (for high frequency support mode) used in high frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 343(b), in the success/failure table for electric accessary item open lottery (for high-frequency support mode), 462 values of 0 to 461 are set as the value of the electric accessary item open counter C4 for winning the electric accession election. A value is set. Four values of 462 to 465 are set as the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4 that is out. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 in the high-frequency support mode and the electric accessory open lottery is executed, the electric role open lottery is won with a probability of 231/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when an electric role opening win is made in the high-frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 0.5 seconds.

In this way, according to the success/failure table for the electric accessory open lottery, the high frequency support mode is set so that the probability of the game ball entering the right first start port 44 is higher than the low frequency support mode. there is

<<8-3>> Electrical Configuration of Audio Light Emitting Control Device and Display Control Device:
Next, electrical configurations of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 344 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. As shown in FIG. A part of the configuration such as the power supply device 85 (FIG. 337) is omitted. An MPU 92 is mounted on an audio emission control board 91 provided in the audio emission control device 90 . The MPU 92 is a device containing a CPU, a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like.

The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables, and the like. For example, part of the area of the ROM 93 is provided with an effect pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, a reach allocation table storage area 93c, and the like. Details of these will be described later.

The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the ROM 93 . For example, a part of the area of the RAM 94 is provided with various flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, and the like. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 92, and they may be individually integrated into chips.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port. The input side of the MPU 92 is connected to the main control device 60 and the effect operation button 24 . Various commands are received from the main controller 60 . A speaker 46 and various lamps 47 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92, and the display control device 100 is also connected.

The display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102, which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are integrated into chips, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. is installed. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 102, and they may be individually integrated into chips.

The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, to generate internal commands for the VDP 105). .

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and also stores JPEG format image data for background images.

A work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when various programs are executed by the MPU 102 .

The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the pattern display device 41 . The VDP 105 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is an IC chip, and is a kind of microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, etc., and intervenes in the reading and writing of data.

The character ROM 106 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as designs and pictures displayed on the design display device 41 . The character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display patterns and display pictures, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. The various display pictorial diagrams also include pictorial diagrams of petals P1 to P4, which will be described later. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 106 . It is also possible to configure the character ROM 106 to store the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 .

The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, and by rewriting the content of the video RAM 107, the display content of the pattern display device 41 is changed.

Hereinafter, the MPU 62, ROM 63, and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main MPU 62, main ROM 63, and main RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the sound emission control device 90 are referred to as the sound and light side MPU 92 and the sound and light side, respectively. The ROM 93 and the sound/light side RAM 94 are also called, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also called the display side MPU 102 .

<<8-4>> Outline of Processing by Gaming Machine:
Next, an overview of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described.

<<8-4-1>> High/low transition between lottery mode and support mode:
In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won by a win lottery and the type of the jackpot won is a normal jackpot, the lottery mode shifts to a low probability mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, and the support mode. transitions to high-frequency support mode. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won by a winning lottery and the type of the jackpot won is a variable probability jackpot, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the lottery mode changes to the high probability mode, and the support mode changes. Switch to high-frequency support mode.

After shifting to the high-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode is continued as the support mode until the number of games played after the start of the high-frequency support mode reaches a predetermined guaranteed number of games. The “guaranteed number of games played” is the number of games guaranteed to be played continuously in the high-frequency support mode, and is, for example, 50 times. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, the high frequency support mode is guaranteed up to 50 times, which is the guaranteed number of games, after shifting to the high frequency support mode. When the number of games played after the start of the high-frequency support mode reaches the guaranteed number of games, the support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode. Especially in this embodiment, even if the high-probability mode continues at the time when the number of games reaching the guaranteed number of games ends, the support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode.

When the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the probability that the result of the electric role item open lottery that is executed when the through gate 35 is passed is an electric role open lottery is extremely high at 231/233. The accessory 34a is substantially in the electric role open state. For this reason, when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the player hits a weak right-hand hit and causes the game ball to flow down to the weak right-hand hit passage P1, whereby the right side first ball provided with the electric accessory 34a is hit. A game is played so as to enter a game ball into a starting port 44.例文帳に追加A game ball entered into the right first starting port 44 is distributed to a route toward an out port 251 in the starting port unit and a route toward a fall port 252 by a sorting piece 242 of a game ball sorting device 240.例文帳に追加Therefore, the game ball entering the right first starting hole 44 may enter the falling hole 252, although the probability is as low as 1/21 as described above.

The chance of shifting to the high-frequency support mode is a probability variable jackpot, and the number of games after the start of the high-frequency support mode is before the number of games reaches the guaranteed number of games (for example, the 30th game). When a game ball enters the lottery mode, the lottery mode shifts from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode. Then, the winning lottery is executed in the low-probability mode from the game round next to the timing at which the game ball enters the fall hole 252.例文帳に追加Regarding the support mode, in the game round before the number of games reaches the guaranteed number of games after the start of the high-frequency support mode (for example, the 30th game round), the game ball enters the fall hole 252 and is high. Even when the probability mode ends and shifts to the low probability mode, the high frequency support mode is continued until the number of games played after the high frequency support mode is started reaches the guaranteed number of games (that is, 50 times). be.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a variable probability jackpot is won by a winning lottery, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the lottery mode shifts to a high probability mode, the support mode shifts to a high frequency support mode, and then the high frequency support mode. If you win a jackpot (regardless of whether it is a normal jackpot or a variable jackpot) in a winning lottery in a game round before the number of games has reached the guaranteed number of games since the start (for example, the 30th game round), The lottery mode shifts from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode at the timing when the opening/closing execution mode starts after the 30th game round in which a big win is won is completed. As for the support mode, the high-frequency support mode is shifted to the low-frequency support mode at the timing when the game round before reaching the guaranteed number of games (for example, the 30th game round) is completed and the open/close execution mode is started. . That is, both the lottery mode and the support mode are reset to the low side at the timing when the game round in which the player wins the jackpot ends and the open/close execution mode starts.

<<8-4-2>> Game flow:
In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, at least four types of states can be taken as game states to be transitioned as the game progresses, depending on the combination of high and low between the lottery mode and the support mode. Specifically, i) a low-probability low-probability support state in which the lottery mode is a low-probability mode and the support mode is a low-frequency support mode, and ii) the lottery mode is a high-probability mode, and the support mode is High probability high support state which is high frequency support mode, iii) high probability low support state where lottery mode is high probability mode and support mode is low frequency support mode, and iv) lottery mode is low probability mode and a low probability high support state in which the support mode is a high frequency support mode. Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, an open/close execution mode in which a game ball can enter the big winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36 can be taken as a game state. The game progresses while transitioning between these game states.

FIG. 345 is an explanatory diagram showing a game flow in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. When the game is started, it is initially in a low probability low support state (state H1). That is, the lottery mode is a low-probability mode, and the support mode is a low-frequency support mode.

FIG. 346 is an explanatory diagram showing various modes in each of the low probability low support state, low probability high support state, high probability high support state, and high probability low support state. Here, as a mode, the center side first start port 33, the right side first start port 44, the fall port 252, and whether or not the game ball can enter the second start port 34, the fluctuation time of the first symbol, the 2 pattern variation time and the like are determined.

As shown in FIG. 346, in the low-probability-low support state, it is possible to enter the game ball into the center-side first starting port 33 . For this reason, in the low-probability-low-support state, the player is made to hit left, the game ball is made to flow down to the left side of the game area PA, and the game ball is entered into the center side first start hole 33.例文帳に追加When a game ball enters the central side first start hole 33, the game round for the first start hole is executed and a winning lottery is performed. At this time, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a (see FIG. 336(b)) of the liquid crystal display device 41, the first decorative pattern, which is the effect image corresponding to the game round for the first starting opening, is displayed, and the sub display is performed. A second decoration image, which is an effect image corresponding to the game round for the second start opening, is displayed in the area SA. That is, since the target for the player to enter the game ball is the center side first starting hole 33, the first decoration pattern is displayed in the main display area MA.

Let's consider the entrances other than the central first starting opening 33 . In the low probability low support state, the ball cannot be entered into the right first starting port 44 and the falling port 252 provided in the starting port unit 200, but the ball can be entered into the second starting port 34. . Since the support mode is the low-frequency support mode in the low-probability-low-support state, the probability that the result of the electric accessory open lottery that is executed upon passing through the through gate 35 will be lost is extremely high at 232/233. Therefore, the electric accessory 34a is substantially always closed, and the game ball flows along the third route RT3 (FIG. 335) described above, so that the ball can be entered into the second start port 34. . For this reason, some players aim to enter the game ball into the second starting port 34 by hitting slightly to the right in the low probability/low support state and letting the game ball flow along the third route RT3. can be considered. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as a simultaneous variation machine, the variation time of the second symbol display section 37b (hereinafter also referred to as special 2 variation time) is set to a very long time such as 10 minutes. Thus, the winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 is suppressed from being repeatedly executed in a short period of time. As a result, in the present embodiment, it is possible to make the player give up the weak right-handed operation in the low-probability-low support state and concentrate on left-handed hitting.

In addition, although the special 2 fluctuation time in the low probability low support state was set to a very long time of 10 minutes, the fluctuation time of the first symbol display unit 37a in the low probability low support state (hereinafter also referred to as special 1 fluctuation time) is set to a normal length of time. The "normal length of time" referred to here is a normal length of time determined by the value of the fluctuation type counter CS described later, the type of jackpot, the presence or absence of reach, etc., for example, from 2 seconds to Three minutes.

Return to FIG. When the winning lottery in the first start opening game cycle executed in the low probability low support state (state H1) is lost, the low probability low support state (state H1) is continued, and the player is the central side first A game ball is entered into the starting port 33 to execute the game round for the first starting port.

If a jackpot is won in the winning lottery in the first starting game round executed in a low-probability and low support state, and the type of the winning jackpot is a normal jackpot, the game is played after the first starting game round is finished. The open/close execution mode is executed as a privilege given to the person. That is, it shifts from the low probability low support state (state H1) to the open/close execution mode (state H2). The pachinko machine 10 executes a suggestive performance for prompting the player to hit hard right before the round game that occurs in the open/close execution mode. The player executes a hard right hit after the game round for the first starting opening is completed according to the suggested effect, causes the game ball to flow down to the hard right hit passage P2, enters the game ball into the big winning prize opening 36a, and wins a prize. get the ball

When the open/close execution mode (state H2) ends, the state shifts to the low probability high support state (state H3). That is, the lottery mode is a low-probability mode, and the support mode is a high-frequency support mode (limited to 50 guaranteed games).

As shown in FIG. 346, in the low-probability-height support state, it is possible to enter a game ball into the center side first start port 33, the right side first start port 44, and the fall port 252, and the second It is impossible to enter a game ball into the starting port 34 . Since the support mode is the high-frequency support mode in the low-probability support state, there is a possibility that the result of the electric role open lottery that is executed when the through gate 35 is passed will be the electric role open win. Since it is as high as 233, the electric accessory 34a is substantially in the electric operation open state. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the game ball passing through the through gate 35 passes through the electric accessory 34a in the open state with a probability of 100%. , the distance from the through gate 35 to the electric accessory 34a, the opening time of the electric accessory 34a once, the number of times the electric accessory 34a is opened, the pattern fluctuation time in the universal figure unit 38, etc. are adjusted. Therefore, when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 and entered the ball entrance 210a is the above-described first route RT1 (FIG. 333) or second route RT2. (Fig. 334), the game ball enters the right first start port 44 and the out port 251 in the start port unit, or the game ball enters the right first start port 44 and the fall port 252. becomes possible, and entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 becomes impossible or difficult. In addition, even if the game ball enters the fall hole 252, in the low-probability support state, the lottery mode is a low-probability mode, so the player is worried about shifting to the low-probability mode (so-called fall). no. Therefore, in the low-probability-high support state (state H3), the player is made to hit weakly to the right, and the game ball flows down to the weak right-handed path P1, thereby causing the game ball to enter the right first start port 44 with a high probability. You can enter the ball.

When a game ball enters the right first starting hole 44, a game cycle for the first starting hole is executed and a winning lottery is performed. At this time, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a (see FIG. 336(b)) of the liquid crystal display device 41, the first decorative pattern, which is the effect image corresponding to the game round for the first starting opening, is displayed, and the sub display is performed. A second decoration image, which is an effect image corresponding to the game round for the second start opening, is displayed in the area SA. That is, since the target for the player to enter the game ball is the right first starting hole 44, the first decoration pattern is displayed in the main display area MA.

The special 1 fluctuation time and the special 2 fluctuation time in the low definite height support state are set to a normal length of time (for example, 2 seconds to 3 minutes).

Return to FIG. If the winning lottery in the game round for the first start port executed in the low probability support state (state H3) is lost, the low probability support state (state H3) is continued, and the player can start the right first start A game ball is entered into the opening 44, and the game round for the first starting opening is executed. In addition, when the number of games after the start of the high-frequency support mode reaches 50 times, which is the guaranteed number of games, the state shifts to a low probability low support state (state H1).

When a jackpot is won in a win lottery in the first starter game round executed in the low-probability support state (state H3) and the type of the won jackpot is the normal jackpot, the first starter game round After the end of , the opening/closing execution mode is executed as a privilege given to the player. That is, the low probability height support state (state H3) shifts to the open/close execution mode (state H2). The pachinko machine 10 executes a suggestive performance for prompting the player to hit hard right before the round game that occurs in the open/close execution mode. The player executes a hard right hit after the game round for the first starting opening is completed according to the suggested effect, causes the game ball to flow down to the hard right hit passage P2, enters the game ball into the big winning prize opening 36a, and wins a prize. get the ball

When a jackpot is won in a win lottery in the first starter game round executed in the low probability support state (state H3), and the type of the won jackpot is variable probability jackpot, the first starter game round. After the end of , the opening/closing execution mode is executed as a privilege given to the player. Here, the low probability high support state (state H3) shifts to the open/close execution mode (state H4).

In addition, in the low probability low support state (state H1), the game ball is aimed at entering the center side first start port 33, but this entering ball cannot be performed with a high probability. On the other hand, in the low-probability support state (state H3), the player can make the game ball enter the right first start hole 44 with a high probability by hitting weakly to the right. Therefore, in the low-probability high support state (state H3), compared with the low-probability low support state (state H1), there are many opportunities for the first start opening game round to be executed and the winning lottery to be performed. It is highly advantageous for people.

In the low probability low support state (state H1), if a jackpot is won in the winning lottery in the first starting port game round and the type of the winning jackpot is a variable probability jackpot, the first starting port game round ends. The opening/closing execution mode is executed as a benefit given to the player later. That is, it shifts from the low probability low support state (state H1) to the open/close execution mode (state H4).

The pachinko machine 10 executes a suggestive effect for prompting the player to hit hard right before the round game that occurs in the open/close execution mode (state H4). The opening/closing execution mode (state H4) is the same processing as the opening/closing execution mode (state H2). The reason why the state H2 and the state H4 are distinguished even though they are the same open/close execution mode is that the branch destinations are different. When the opening/closing execution mode (state H4) ends, the state shifts to the high-accuracy-high support state (state H5). That is, the lottery mode becomes a high probability mode, and the support mode becomes a high frequency support mode (limited to 50 times, which is the guaranteed number of games played).

As shown in FIG. 346, in the high-definition-height support state, it is possible to enter a game ball into the center side first start port 33, the right side first start port 44, and the fall port 252, and the second It is impossible to enter a game ball into the starting port 34 . Whether or not these balls can be entered is the same as whether or not the ball can be entered in the low-probability support state. However, in the low probability high support state, since the lottery mode is already a low probability mode, the player does not have to worry about shifting to the low probability mode (so-called fall), whereas in the high probability high support state , the lottery mode is shifted from the high probability mode to the low probability mode (so-called fall) when the game ball enters the fall hole 252 . Since the support mode is the high-frequency support mode in the high certainty and high support state, the probability that the result of the electric role open lottery executed when the through gate 35 is passed is 231/233. is extremely high, the electric accessory 34a is substantially in the electric-operated open state. For this reason, as described above, when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 and entered the ball entrance 210a is either the first route RT1 (FIG. 333) or the first route RT1 (FIG. 333). Since it flows along the 2 route RT2 (Fig. 334), the game ball enters the right first start port 44 and the out port 251 in the start port unit, or the game ball enters the right first start port 44 and the fall port 252. , and it becomes impossible or difficult to enter a game ball into the second starting port 34.例文帳に追加

In the high-probability-high support state, the player is made to hit weakly to the right, the game ball is made to flow down to the weak right hitting path P1, and the game ball is entered into the right first start port 44.例文帳に追加When a game ball enters the right first starting hole 44, a game cycle for the first starting hole is executed and a winning lottery is performed. At this time, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a (see FIG. 336(b)) of the liquid crystal display device 41, the first decorative pattern, which is the effect image corresponding to the game round for the first starting opening, is displayed, and the sub display is performed. A second decoration image, which is an effect image corresponding to the game round for the second start opening, is displayed in the area SA. That is, since the target for the player to enter the game ball is the right first starting hole 44, the first decoration pattern is displayed in the main display area MA.

Return to FIG. When the winning lottery in the first start port game round executed in the high probability high support state (state H5) is lost, the high probability high support state (state H5) is repeated, and the right first start port 44 A game ball is entered to execute the game round for the first starting port.

When a jackpot is won in a win lottery in the first starter game round executed in the high probability high support state (state H5) and the type of the won jackpot is normal jackpot, the first starter game round After the end of , the opening/closing execution mode is executed as a privilege given to the player. That is, the low probability height support state (state H5) shifts to the open/close execution mode (state H2). The pachinko machine 10 executes a suggestive performance for prompting the player to hit hard right before the round game that occurs in the open/close execution mode.

When a jackpot is won in a win lottery in a first start port game run executed in a high probability high support state (state H5), and the type of the won jackpot is variable probability jackpot, the first start port game time After the end of , the opening/closing execution mode is executed as a privilege given to the player. Here, the high-accuracy-high support state (state H5) is shifted to the open/close execution mode (state H4).

In the high probability height support state (state H5), when the game ball enters the fall hole 252, it shifts to the low probability height support state (state H3). That is, the lottery mode shifts from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode, and the support mode continues as the high-frequency support mode. In addition, when shifting to the low-probability-high support state (state H3), the guaranteed number-of-games counter PNC, which indicates the number of times the game is continuously executed in the high-frequency support mode, is held as it was before the transition. . Therefore, the transition to the low-probability-high support state (state H3) does not reset the number of games continuously executed in the high-frequency support mode.

In addition, the special 1 fluctuation time in the high probability high support state (state H5) is set to a normal length, and the special 2 fluctuation time in the high probability high support state (state H5) is set to, for example, 10 minutes . The reason why the special 2 fluctuation time in the high-precision high support state (state H5) is set to a very long time of 10 minutes is as follows.

In the high probability high support state, it is impossible to enter the game ball to the second start port 34, but the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b holds the reservation information (up to 4 pieces). In the remaining high-probability-high support state, a winning lottery may be executed based on the remaining reservation information. Then, a winning lottery is executed with reference to the success/failure table (for high probability mode) for the second starting port shown in FIG. In order to solve this, in the present embodiment, in the high accuracy and high support state, while it is impossible to enter the game ball into the second start port 34, the special 2 fluctuation time is, for example, 10 minutes. By setting this to an extremely long time, it is possible to suppress repeated digestion of the pending information remaining in the second pending area Rb in a short period of time.

In the high probability high support state (state H5), when the number of games after the start of the high frequency support mode reaches 50 times which is the guaranteed number of games, the state shifts to the high probability low support state (state H6). Also, when a special small win is won in the winning lottery in the first start opening game cycle executed in the high-probability and high-support state (state H5), the state shifts to the high-probability and low-support state (state H6). In the high probability low support state, the lottery mode is the high probability mode, and the support mode is the low frequency support mode. In this embodiment, the player selects from the performance contents corresponding to the special small winning performance pattern displayed on the symbol display device 41, in the winning lottery in the first starting game round executed in the high-probability and high-support state. It is possible to recognize that the special prize has been won.

As shown in FIG. 346, in the high-probability-low support state, it is possible to enter the game ball with respect to the center side first start port 33 and the second start port 34, and the right side first start port 44 and It is impossible to enter a game ball into the fall opening 252 . Since the support mode is the low-frequency support mode in the high-probability-low support state, the probability that the result of the electric accessory open lottery that is executed upon passing through the through gate 35 will be lost is extremely high at 232/233. Therefore, the electric accessory 34a is substantially always closed, and the game ball flows along the third route RT3 (Fig. 335) described above, so that the ball can be entered into the second start port 34. It becomes impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the first right starting port 44 and the falling port 252.例文帳に追加

In the high-probability-low support state (state H6), the game ball can be entered into the second starting port 34 by making the player hit weakly to the right and causing the game ball to flow down to the weakly hitting path P1. When a game ball enters the second starting hole 34, a game round for the second starting hole is executed and a winning lottery is performed. At this time, the second decoration pattern, which is the effect image corresponding to the game round for the second starting opening, is displayed in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a (see FIG. 336(b)) of the liquid crystal display device 41, and the sub-display. A first decoration image, which is an effect image corresponding to the game round for the first start opening, is displayed in the area SA. That is, since the target for the player to enter the game ball is the second starting hole 34, the second decoration pattern is displayed in the main display area MA.

When a jackpot is won in a winning lottery in a second starter game round executed in a high-probability low support state (state H6) and the type of the won jackpot is a normal jackpot, the second starter game round is executed. After the end of , the opening/closing execution mode is executed as a privilege given to the player. That is, the high-probability-low support state (state H6) shifts to the opening/closing execution mode (state H2).

In the winning lottery in the game round for the second starting port executed in the high-probability-low support state (state H6), when the jackpot is won and the type of the winning jackpot is variable-probability jackpot, the game round for the second starting port is won. After the end of , the opening/closing execution mode is executed as a privilege given to the player. That is, the high-probability-low support state (state H6) shifts to the opening/closing execution mode (state H4).

In the above-described high-probability-low support state (state H6), it is impossible or difficult for a game ball hit by a weak right-hand hit to enter the fall opening 252 as described above. The ball will enter the second starting hole 34 with a close probability (this probability is hereinafter also referred to as 100% for the sake of convenience). Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the high-probability-low support state (state H6), 100% continues until the jackpot is won in the winning lottery in the game round for the second start port, and the second start port 34 A winning lottery can be performed by entering a game ball. In other words, the high-probability-low support state (state H6) is a so-called invincible zone in which there is no fall. As a result, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the high-probability high support state shifts to the high-probability low support state (invincible zone), the jackpot is won again, so-called consecutive chances can be reliably performed, and the game can be played. It is possible to give the person a sense of expectation to make a series of chances. Therefore, with the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the number of guaranteed games ends from the high-precision high support state, it becomes a high-probability low support state. There is a possibility that a state in which time continues may occur. In a high-probability-low support state (invincible zone), in a state where special 2 fluctuation set to long continues, in the invincible zone, a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second start port 34 is performed. It becomes impossible to repeat the action in a short period of time, which is disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the lottery result of the winning lottery of the winning lottery table (for high probability mode) for the first starting port is set to only the big win and the small win (special small win, normal small win) (no loss) ), when the big hit variation or the small hit variation executed with the entry of the game ball into the first start port (the central side first start port 33, the right side first start port 44) stops , can be stopped regardless of the result of the winning lottery for the special 2. As a result, it is possible to solve the problem that the variation of Special 2 set to long in the invincible zone continues in the high-definition-high support state, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the support mode is the high-frequency support mode in the high-precision and high-support state, the electric accessory 34a is substantially in the electric role open state, and the through The game ball that has passed through the gate 35 moves from the main line passage portion 210 to the first branch passage portion 220 in the starting port unit 200 (Fig. 330). Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 always enters the right first starting hole 44 . However, the game ball entering the right first starting hole 44 enters the falling hole 252 with a probability of 0.1 seconds (=1/21) in 2.1 seconds. When the opportunity to shift to the high-frequency support mode is a probability variable jackpot, and the game ball enters the fall hole 252 in the game round before the number of games reaches the guaranteed number of games after the start of the high-frequency support mode. , the lottery mode shifts from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode. That is, when the game ball enters the right first start hole 44, the lottery mode shifts from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode with a probability of 1/21, and the player may be disadvantaged. be.

On the other hand, when the number of games played after the start of the high-frequency support mode reaches the guaranteed number of games without the game ball entering the fall hole 252, the support mode is changed from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode. It shifts to a support mode, and the game state shifts from a high-probability high support state to a high-probability low support state (invincible zone). When the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is substantially always closed, and as a result, the game ball flows along the third route RT3 (Fig. 335) and enters the second start port 34. The ball will enter the ball. In this case, the lottery mode is not shifted from the high probability mode to the low probability mode by entering the game ball into the falling port 252 as in the case where the game ball flows to the right first starting port 44 side. Therefore, it is possible to continuously perform the game rounds triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 without the possibility of the player being in a disadvantageous state. The high-probability-low support state continues until the next jackpot election, and the next jackpot election is virtually promised.

As a result, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the high-probability and high-support state, the player is provided with a period from the start of the high-frequency support mode until the number of games reaches the guaranteed number of games, A sense of urgency that the game ball does not enter the fall hole 252 and the lottery mode does not shift from the high probability mode to the low probability mode (I do not want you to fall), and the number of games reaches the guaranteed number of games before falling. It is possible to provide both a sense of expectation such as wanting to Then, when the number of games reaches the guaranteed number of games without falling, the player is executed with the entry of the game ball into the second start port 34 without the risk of falling. A feeling of relief that you can shift to a high-probability and low support state (invincible zone) where you can continuously play the game rounds, and the game rounds that are executed with the entry of the game ball into the second start port 34 are continuously performed. By doing so, it is possible to give a sense of expectation that a big hit will be won in the near future in a high-probability-low support state. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, by providing the player with emotions such as anticipation, tension, and relief, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

Conventional pachinko machines include loop type pachinko machines and ST type pachinko machines. A loop-type pachinko machine is a model in which the state of the high-probability mode continues until a big win is won in the next winning lottery. The ST type pachinko machine is a model in which the number of games in the high-probability mode is limited. A loop-type pachinko machine can give a player a sense of urgency to win a big win in a winning lottery in a state of a high-probability mode and see if the type of the won big win will be a normal big win. On the other hand, in the ST type pachinko machine, in the state of the high-probability mode, it is possible to give the player a sense of urgency that he or she may not win the jackpot before the limit number of times is reached. On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as described above, it is possible to impart a sense of urgency and an expectation that the number of games played reaches the guaranteed number of games before falling. In addition, when the number of games reaches the guaranteed number of games without falling, the player is executed with the entry of the game ball into the second start port 34 without the risk of falling. A feeling of relief that you can shift to a high-probability and low support state (invincible zone) where you can continuously play the game rounds, and the game rounds that are executed with the entry of the game ball into the second start port 34 are continuously performed. By doing so, it is possible to give a sense of expectation that a big hit will be won in the near future in a high-probability-low support state. Such a sense of relief and anticipation is an effect unique to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, and can improve the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, even when a special small win is won in the winning lottery in the high-probability-high support state, the support mode shifts from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode, The game state is configured to shift from a high-probability high support state to a high-probability low support state (invincible zone). For this reason, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation to win a special small prize in the winning lottery, and as a result, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as described above, in the high-accuracy-high support state H5, the player hits weakly to the right, causes the game ball to flow down to the weakly hitting path P1, and starts the right first start. The game is usually played so as to enter the game ball into the mouth 44. - 特許庁On the other hand, in the high-probability-high support state H5, as described above, it is possible to enter the game ball into the center side first start port 33, so depending on the player, In the high-accuracy-high support state H5, it is also possible to perform a game such that a game ball is entered into the center side first start hole 33 by hitting to the left. In this case, the game ball does not enter the fall port 252, and the game state is not shifted to the low-probability support state on the way, so the center side first start is only 50 times, which is the guaranteed number of games. If the game ball can be entered into the opening 33, the game state can be surely shifted to the high probability low support state which is the invincible zone. However, entering the game ball into the central first starting hole 33 as many times as 50 times imposes a great burden on the player in terms of time and the amount of game balls spent, so it is highly reliable. In the high support state H5, the game method of hitting left and entering the game ball into the center side first start hole 33 has no merit for the player and is not realistic. In other words, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, by setting the number of guaranteed games to 50, which is a relatively large number, in the high-probability-high support state H5, the game ball can be delivered to the center-side first start port 33. It has a configuration in which it is difficult to play a game in which a ball is entered.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as described above, it is difficult to enter the game ball into the center-side first start hole 33 in the high-accuracy-high support state H5. However, it does not completely exclude such a way of playing. If the above difficulties can be tolerated, it is also possible to perform a game in which the game ball is entered into the center side first start hole 33 by hitting left in the high probability/height support state H5. For example, a player who cannot mentally allow a game ball to enter the fall hole 252 and the lottery mode to shift from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode selects the above game method. I might. From the side of the designer of the game machine, by setting the guaranteed number of games to a relatively small number such as 5 or 10 times, the game ball can be entered into the center side first start port 33 in the high probability high support state H5. By setting the guaranteed number of games to a large number such as 50 times or 100 times, the game can be played to the central side first start port 33 in the high accuracy and high support state H5. It is strictly prohibited to play the game in such a way that the ball is entered. That is, it is possible to adjust whether to allow or prohibit playing a game so as to enter the game ball into the central side first start port 33 in the high probability high support state H5 by the guaranteed number of games. Become.

<<8-5>> Various processes executed in the main controller:
Next, an example of specific processing executed in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described. The processing executed in the main controller 60 will be described first, and then the processing executed in the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

In order to advance the game of each game cycle, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing. These processes are described below. In addition to timer interrupt processing and normal processing, the MPU 62 executes NMI interrupt processing that is activated by the input of a power failure signal, but the description of these processing will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 347 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. Timer interrupt processing is started periodically (for example, every 2 msec) by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 .

In step Ss0101, reading processing of various detection sensors is executed. That is, the state of various detection sensors connected to the main controller 60 is read, the state of the sensors is determined, and detection information (entering ball detection information) is stored. After that, the process proceeds to step Ss0102.

In step Ss0102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . After that, the process proceeds to step Ss0103.

In step Ss0103, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the electric accessary product release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to each of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4, and when each of these counter values reaches the maximum value, each Clear to 0. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM64. After that, the process proceeds to step Ss0104. It should be noted that the fluctuation type counter CS updates its value in the normal processing (FIG. 349) described later.

In step Ss0104, the ball entry process for the starting opening accompanying the entry of the game ball to the first starting opening (center side first starting opening 33, right side first starting opening 44) and second starting opening 34 is executed. The details of the ball entry process for the start opening in step Ss0104 will be described later. After that, the process proceeds to step Ss0105.

In step Ss0105, ball entry processing for the falling hole accompanying the entry of the game ball into the falling hole 252 is executed. The details of the ball entry process for the fall opening in step Ss0105 will be described later. After executing step Ss0105, the MPU 62 ends the timer interrupt processing.

<Entering ball processing for the starting port>
Next, the ball entry process for the start opening will be described. The ball entry process for the starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (Fig. 347: Ss0104).

FIG. 348 is a flow chart showing ball entry processing for the starting opening. In step Ss0201, whether or not the game ball entered the first starting hole (center side first starting hole 33, right side first starting hole 44) (start winning) is checked by the first starting hole (central side first starting 33, right first starting port 44) (detection sensor 67d for the right first starting port, etc.). In step Ss0201, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the first starting hole (center side first starting hole 33, right side first starting hole 44) (Ss0201: YES), proceed to step Ss0202, payout control A prize ball command is set to cause the device 70 to pay out one game ball. After that, the process proceeds to step Ss0203.

In step Ss0203, an external signal for outputting a signal to the game hall side management control device that the game ball has entered the first start port (central side first start port 33, right side first start port 44) Perform setting processing. After that, the process proceeds to step Ss0204.

In step Ss0204, the start suspension number RaN (hereinafter also referred to as the first start suspension number RaN), which is the value stored in the suspension number storage area of the first reservation area Ra, is read, and the first start suspension number RaN will be described later. Set as a target for processing. The first start suspension number RaN indicates the number of suspensions based on the ball entering the first start opening (center side first start opening 33, right side first start opening 44). After that, the process proceeds to step Ss0209.

In step Ss0201, when it is determined that the game ball has not entered the first starting hole (center side first starting hole 33, right side first starting hole 44) (Ss0201: NO), proceed to step Ss0205, A detection state of a detection sensor corresponding to the second starting port 34 determines whether or not the game ball has entered the second starting port 34.例文帳に追加

In step Ss0205, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34 (Ss0205: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss0206, and the prize ball for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out one game ball set command. After that, the process proceeds to step Ss0207. On the other hand, in step Ss0205, when it is determined that the game ball has not entered the second starting hole 34 (Ss0205: NO), the ball entering process for this starting hole ends.

In step Ss0207, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that the game ball has entered the second starting hole . After that, the process proceeds to step Ss0208.

In step Ss0208, the start suspension number RbN (hereinafter also referred to as the second start suspension number RbN), which is the value stored in the suspension number storage area of the second reservation area Rb, is read, and the second start suspension number RbN will be described later. Set as a target for processing. The second start suspension number RbN indicates the number of suspensions based on the ball entering the second start opening 34 . After that, the process proceeds to step Ss0209.

In step Ss0209, it is determined whether or not the number of start suspensions N (RaN or RbN) set in step Ss0204 or Ss0208 is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment). In step Ss0209, if the start suspension number N is not less than the upper limit value (Ss0209: NO), the ball-entering process for this starting port ends.

On the other hand, in step Ss0209, if the number N of start suspensions is less than the upper limit (Ss0209: YES), proceed to step Ss0210, add 1 to the number N of start suspensions of the corresponding reservation area, and then proceed to step Ss0211. , adds 1 to the value stored in the total pending number storage area (hereinafter referred to as the total pending number CRN). The total pending number CRN indicates the sum of the first pending start number RaN and the second pending start number RbN. After that, the process proceeds to step Ss0212.

In step Ss0212, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step Ss0103 (FIG. 347) are stored in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the corresponding reservation area, that is, step In Ss0210, it is stored in a storage area corresponding to the number of pending items to which 1 is added. Specifically, when the first start suspension number RaN is set as a processing target, each of the winning random number counter C1, the big winning type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step Ss0103 (FIG. 347) The value is stored in the first storage area among the empty storage areas of the first reservation area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start suspension number RaN to which 1 is added in step Ss0210. In addition, when the second start pending quantity RbN is set as a processing target, each value of the winning random number counter C1, the big winning type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step Ss0103 (Fig. 347) is It is stored in the first storage area of the free storage areas of the second reservation area Rb, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second start suspension number RbN to which 1 is added in step Ss0210. After executing step Ss0212, the process proceeds to step Ss0213.

In step Ss0213, a first determination process is executed. The first determination process is based on the information (holding information) of each value of the winning random number counter C1, the big winning type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. It is a process of executing determination of the presence or absence of such pending information before the main control device 60 becomes a target of a winning lottery. After executing step Ss0213, the process proceeds to step Ss0214.

In step Ss0214, processing for setting a pending command is executed. Specifically, the judgment result (first judgment information) of the preceding judgment process executed based on the information (holding information) of each value of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is set as a holding command do.

The hold command is the occurrence of a ball entering the first starting hole (central side first starting hole 33, right side first starting hole 44) or the second starting hole 34, and holding information acquired based on the ball entering. This is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize the determination result (previous determination information) of the pre-determining process based on , before the holding information is subject to the winning lottery by the main control unit 60. The hold command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 350: step Ss0402) of the normal process, which will be described later.

In addition, when the sound emission control device 90 receives a hold command transmitted based on the ball entering the first starting port (the first starting port 33 on the center side and the first starting port on the right side 44), the liquid crystal display A command is sent to the display control device 100 to change the display in the first reserved display area Ds1 of the device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of reserved items. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first reservation display area Ds1 of the liquid crystal display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of reservations. On the other hand, when receiving the hold command transmitted based on the ball entering the second starting port 34, the sound emission control device 90 displays the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the liquid crystal display device 41 on hold. A command is sent to the display control device 100 to make the change corresponding to the increase. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second reservation display area Ds2 of the liquid crystal display device 41 so as to correspond to the increase in the number of reservations.

After executing step Ss0214, the main MPU 62 ends the ball-entering process for this starting opening.

<Ball entry processing for the fall entrance>
Next, the ball entry processing for the fall opening will be described. The ball entry process for the falling hole is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (Fig. 347: Ss0105).

FIG. 349 is a flow chart showing ball entry processing for a fall hole. In step Ss0301, whether or not the game ball has entered the fall opening 252 is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the fall opening 252. FIG. In step Ss0301, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the fall opening 252 (Ss0301: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss0302.

At step Ss0302, the high probability mode flag is turned off. The high-probability mode flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the winning lottery mode is the high-probability mode by the MPU 62, and in this embodiment, it is turned ON at the end of the opening and closing execution mode related to the winning of the probability variable jackpot. , and is turned OFF at the end of the opening/closing execution mode relating to winning the normal jackpot, and is also turned OFF in this step Ss0302. After that, the process proceeds to step Ss0303.

In step Ss0303, a low probability mode command is set. The low-probability mode command is a command for notifying the sound emission control device 90 that the lottery mode is the low-probability mode. After that, the process proceeds to step Ss0304.

In step Ss0304, a fall command is set. The drop command is a command for notifying the sound emission control device 90 that the game ball has entered the drop hole 252 and the lottery mode has changed from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. After executing step Ss0304, the ball-entering process for the falling hole ends.

In step Ss0301, when it is determined that the game ball has not entered the fall hole 252 (Ss0301: NO), this ball entry process for the fall hole ends.

<Normal processing>
Next, normal processing will be described. The normal processing is processing started by the MPU 62 of the main control unit 60 when the power is turned on. In normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed.

FIG. 350 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step Ss0401, start-up processing is executed. Specifically, initialization of each control device upon power-on, determination of validity of data stored in the RAM 64, and the like are executed. Then, it progresses to step Ss0402.

In step Ss0402, output data such as commands set in the timer interrupt process or the previously executed normal process are transmitted to each sub-side control device. Specifically, the presence or absence of the prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 70 . Also, when commands related to effects such as variation commands, type commands, and hold commands are set, they are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . After executing step Ss0402, the process proceeds to step Ss0403.

In step Ss0403, the change type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the fluctuation type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . After that, the process proceeds to step Ss0404.

In step Ss0404, the ball count signal and the abnormal payout signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step Ss0405. In step Ss0405, game round control processing for controlling the game in each game round is executed. In the game round control process, a winning lottery, setting of variable display of symbols by the liquid crystal display device 41, display control of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b, and the like are performed. Details of the game round control process will be described later. After executing step Ss0405, the process proceeds to step Ss0406.

In step Ss0406, game state transition processing is executed to shift the game state. By executing the game state transition process, the game state shifts to an opening/closing execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, and the like. Details of the game state transition processing will be described later. After that, the process proceeds to step Ss0407.

In step Ss0407, an electric support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 44a provided at the right first starting port 44 is executed. In the electric role support process, it is determined whether or not to open the electric accessory 44a. The details of the electronic support process will be described later. After that, the process proceeds to step Ss0408.

In step Ss0408, a game ball distribution control process for driving and controlling the game ball distribution device 240 provided in the starter unit 200 is executed. Details of the game ball distribution control process will be described later. After that, the process proceeds to step Ss0409.

In step Ss0409, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has passed since the start of the current normal processing (from the second round onwards, the start of the command output processing in step Ss0402). That is, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the next normal process.

In step Ss0409, if it is determined that the predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed since the start of the normal processing this time (Ss0409: NO), in steps Ss0410 and Ss0411, until the execution timing of the next normal processing Within the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated. Specifically, in step Ss0410, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . Further, in step Ss0411, 1 is added to the fluctuation type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 .

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss0409 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has passed since the start of the normal processing (Ss0409: YES), the process returns to step Ss0402, and each process from step Ss0402 to step Ss0408 is performed. Execute.

Since the execution time of each process from step Ss0402 to step Ss0408 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using the remaining time, the values of these counters can be randomly updated.

<Game Round Control Processing>
Next, game round control processing will be described. The game round control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of normal process (Fig. 350: Ss0405).

FIG. 351 is a flow chart showing game round control processing. In step Ss0501, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. As will be described later, the opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON at the timing of shifting to the opening/closing execution mode after the fluctuation of the symbols in the game round in which the big win is won, and is turned OFF at the timing of ending the opening/closing execution mode. By determining whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is being executed in step Ss0501, step Ss0503 (and step Ss0506) are not executed while the opening/closing execution mode is being executed. As a result, it is possible not to start the game round while the opening/closing execution mode is being executed. Details will be described below.

In step Ss0501, when it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON (Ss0501: YES), it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, and the present game cycle is executed without executing any of the processes after step Ss0502. End the control process. That is, when it is in the opening and closing execution mode, whether the game ball is entered into the first start port (the central side first start port 33 and the right side first start port 44) or the second start port 34 Regardless of whether or not a game round is started. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss0501 that the open/close execution mode is not in progress (Ss0501: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss0502.

In step Ss0502, it is determined whether or not the first fluctuating flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The first fluctuating flag is a flag that is turned ON when the game round for the first start opening is started, and is turned OFF when the variable display in the first symbol display portion 37a is stopped and the display is stopped. If it is determined in step Ss0502 that the first fluctuating flag is not ON (Ss0502: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss0503.

In step Ss0503, a fluctuation start process for the first start port is executed. The fluctuation start processing for the first starting port is processing for starting the game round for the first starting port. The details of the fluctuation start processing for the first start opening will be described later. After executing step Ss0503, the process proceeds to step Ss0505.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Ss0502 that the first fluctuating flag is ON (Ss0502: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss0504.

In step Ss0504, the first fluctuation stopping process is executed. The first fluctuation stopping process is a process for stopping the fluctuation of the symbols of the started game round for the first starting port. Details of the first fluctuation stop processing will be described later. After executing step Ss0504, the process proceeds to step Ss0505.

In step Ss0505, it is determined whether or not the second fluctuating flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The second fluctuating flag is a flag that is turned ON when the game round for the second start opening is started, and is turned OFF when the variable display in the second symbol display portion 37b is stopped and the display is stopped. . If it is determined in step Ss0505 that the second fluctuating flag is not ON (Ss0505: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss0506.

In step Ss0506, a fluctuation start process for the second starting opening is executed. The variation start processing for the second starting port is processing for starting the game round for the second starting port. The details of the fluctuation start processing for the second start opening will be described later. After executing step Ss0506, this game round control process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Ss0505 that the second fluctuating flag is ON (Ss0505: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss0507.

In step Ss0507, a second fluctuation stop process is executed. The second fluctuation stopping process is a process for stopping the fluctuation of the pattern of the started game round for the second starting port. Details of the second fluctuation stop processing will be described later. After executing step Ss0507, this game round control process is terminated.

<Variation start processing for the first start port>
Next, the variation start processing for the first start port will be described. The variation start process for the first starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game round control process (Fig. 351: Ss0503).

FIG. 352 is a flow chart showing the fluctuation start processing for the first start port. In step Ss0601, it is determined whether or not the first start suspension number RaN=0. If it is determined in step Ss0601 that the first start suspension number RaN is not 0 (Ss0601: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss0602. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss0601 that the first start suspension number RaN=0 (Ss0601: YES), this fluctuation start processing for the first start port ends.

In step Ss0602, the hold information shift process for the first start port is executed. In the holding information shift process for the first starting port, the holding information stored in the first holding area Ra is shifted. The details of the hold information shift process for the first start port will be described later. After executing step Ss0602, the process proceeds to step Ss0603.

In step Ss0603, determination processing for the first start opening is executed. In the determination process for the first start opening, a winning lottery is executed based on the special information stored in the determination process execution area 64c. Specifically, based on the values of the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c, the presence or absence of a big hit or a small hit (normal small hit, special small hit) Judgment of whether or not to judge, distribution judgment to distribute the jackpot type, and reach judgment to judge the presence or absence of reach occurrence are performed. The details of the determination processing for the first start port will be described later. Hereinafter, when including both the normal small hit and the special small hit, it is simply referred to as "small hit". After executing step Ss0603, the process proceeds to step Ss0604.

In step Ss0604, a variable time setting process for the first start port is executed. In the process of setting the variation time for the first starting port, the variation time, which is the time from when the pattern starts to change until it stops, is set. The details of the process of setting the variable time for the first start port will be described later. After executing step Ss0604, the process proceeds to step Ss0605.

In step Ss0605, a first variation command is set. The first variation command includes special information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port (center side first starting port 33, right side first starting port 44). It contains information indicating that it is a thing, information on the presence or absence of reach occurrence, and information on the fluctuation time set in step Ss0604. After executing step Ss0605, the process proceeds to step Ss0606.

In step Ss0606, a first type command is set. The first type command includes information on whether or not there is a jackpot and information on the jackpot type. Specifically, the first type command includes 16R probability variable jackpot information, 8R probability variable jackpot information, 8R normal jackpot information, small hit (normal small hit, special small hit) information, or off information be

The first variation command and the first type command set in steps Ss0605 and Ss0606 are sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step Ss0402 of the normal process (FIG. 350). The sound emission control device 90 determines the contents of the performance in the game round based on the received variation command and the first type command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents of the performance are executed. After executing step Ss0606, the process proceeds to step Ss0607.

In step Ss0607, the first symbol display portion 37a is caused to start changing display, and then the process proceeds to step Ss0608 to turn on the first changing flag. The first fluctuating flag is a flag that is turned ON when the game round for the first starting opening is started, and is turned OFF when the variable display in the first symbol display portion 37a becomes a stop display. After executing step Ss0608, the process proceeds to step Ss0609.

At step Ss0609, 1 is subtracted from the value of the number-of-games counter PNC. The game number counter PNC is set to a value when the high-frequency support mode is started, and the counter value is decremented by 1 each time a game is played. After step Ss0609 is executed, the fluctuation start processing for the first start port ends.

<Holding information shift processing for the first start port>
Next, the hold information shift processing for the first start port will be described. The holding information shift process for the first start port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the fluctuation start process for the first start port (Fig. 352: Ss0602).

FIG. 353 is a flow chart showing the hold information shift process for the first start port. In step Ss0701, 1 is subtracted from the first start-up reservation number RaN in the first reservation area Ra. After that, the process proceeds to step Ss0702.

In step Ss0702, the data (reservation information) stored in the first area of the first reservation area Ra is moved to the first execution area of the determination processing execution area 64c. After that, the process proceeds to step Ss0703.

In step Ss0703, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first reservation area Ra is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After executing step Ss0703, the book reservation information shift process for the first start port ends.

<Determination processing for the first start port>
Next, the determination processing for the first start port will be described. The determination process for the first start opening is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the fluctuation start process for the first start opening (Fig. 352: Ss0603).

FIG. 354 is a flowchart showing determination processing for the first start port. In step Ss0801, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The high-probability mode flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the winning lottery mode is the high-probability mode by the MPU 62, and in this embodiment, it is turned ON at the end of the opening and closing execution mode related to the winning of the probability variable jackpot. , is turned off at the start of the opening/closing execution mode relating to the winning of the next jackpot. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the fall opening 252 provided in the starting opening unit 200, the high probability mode flag is turned OFF. In step Ss0801, when it determines with it being high probability mode (Ss0801:YES), it progresses to step Ss0802.

In step Ss0802, the success/failure determination is performed with reference to the success/failure table for the first starting port (for high probability mode). Specifically, the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is set as a big win in the success/failure table (for high probability mode) for the first starting port shown in FIG. 339(b). Determines whether or not it matches the value After that, the process proceeds to step Ss0804. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss0801 that the mode is not the high probability mode (Ss0801: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss0803.

In step Ss0803, the success/failure determination is performed with reference to the success/failure table (for the low-probability mode) for the first start port. Specifically, the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is set as a big win in the success/failure table (for low probability mode) for the first starting port shown in FIG. 339(a). Determines whether or not it matches the value After that, the process proceeds to step Ss0804.

In step Ss0804, it is determined whether or not the result of the success/failure determination in step Ss0802 or Ss0803 is a big hit. In step Ss0804, when it is determined that the result of the success/failure determination is a big hit (Ss0804: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss0805.

In step Ss0805, the first winning flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned ON. The first winning flag indicates that the lottery result of the winning lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the first start port (the center side first start port 33 or the right side first start port 44) is "big hit", " It is turned ON in the case of "special small win" or "normal small win", and is turned OFF when the variable display of the first symbol due to the entry of the game ball into the first start port is stopped and the stop display is displayed. is a flag that After executing step Ss0805, the process proceeds to step Ss0806.

In step Ss0806, the allocation determination is performed by referring to the allocation table for the first start port (see FIG. 341(a)). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is included in which jackpot type numerical range. After executing step Ss0806, the process proceeds to step Ss0807.

In step Ss0807, it is determined whether or not the result of distribution determination (jackpot type) in step Ss0806 is a variable probability jackpot. In step Ss0807, when it is determined that the distributed jackpot type is the probability variable jackpot (Ss0807: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss0808.

In step Ss0808, the probability variable jackpot flag (jackpot type flag) corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step Ss0806 is turned ON. After executing step Ss0808, the process proceeds to step Ss0809.

In step Ss0809, stop symbol setting processing for probability variable jackpot is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for the probability variable jackpot, it is set whether to end the variable display (stop display) in the state in which the stop result is displayed in the first symbol display unit 37a in the current game round to be the probability variable jackpot. process for Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the probability variable jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step Ss0806 is acquired, and the The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After executing step Ss0809, the determination process for the first start opening is terminated.

In step Ss0807, when it is determined that the distributed jackpot type is not the probability variable jackpot (Ss0807: NO), that is, when the distributed jackpot type is the normal jackpot, the process proceeds to step Ss0810.

In step Ss0810, the normal jackpot flag (jackpot type flag) corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step Ss0806 is turned ON. After executing step Ss0810, the process proceeds to step Ss0811.

In step Ss0811, stop symbol setting processing for normal jackpot is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for the normal big win, it is set whether to end the variable display (stop display) in which stop result is displayed in the first symbol display part 37a in the current game round which is the normal big win. process for Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the normal jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step Ss0806 is acquired, and the The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After step Ss0811 is executed, the determination process for the first start opening is terminated.

In step Ss0804, if it is determined that the result of the success/failure determination in step Ss0802 or step Ss0803 is not a big hit (Ss0804: NO), proceed to step Ss0812, and the result of the success/failure determination in step Ss0802 or step Ss0803 is usually a small hit Determine whether or not there is In step Ss0812, when it is determined that the result of the success/failure determination is the normal small hit (Ss0812: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss0813, and the normal small hit flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned ON. After executing step Ss0813, the process proceeds to step Ss0814.

In step Ss0814, a stop symbol setting process for normal small winning is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for the normal small win, it is determined whether the variable display is to be ended (stopped display) in a state in which the stop result is displayed on the second symbol display portion 37b in the current game round which is the normal small win. Execute the setting process. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the normal small hit stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the normal small win is acquired, and the address information is Stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After executing step Ss0814, the process proceeds to step Ss0819.

In step Ss0812, if it is determined that the result of the success/failure determination in step Ss0802 or step Ss0803 is not a normal small hit (Ss0812: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss0815, and the result of the success/failure determination in step Ss0802 or step Ss0803 is a special small hit It is determined whether or not. In step Ss0815, when it is determined that the result of the success/failure determination is a special small hit (Ss0815: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss0816, and the special small hit flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned ON. Then, it progresses to step Ss0817 and sets a special small hit command. The special small winning command is a command for notifying the sound emission control device 90 that the special small winning has been won in the winning lottery. After executing step Ss0817, the process proceeds to step Ss0818.

In step Ss0818, a stop symbol setting process for a special small winning is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for the special small win, it is determined whether the variable display is to be ended (stopped display) in the state of which stop result is displayed on the second symbol display section 37b in the current game turn to be the special small win. Execute the setting process. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the special small hit stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the special small win is acquired, and the address information is Stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After executing step Ss0818, the process proceeds to step Ss0819.

At step Ss0819, the first hit flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned ON. The first winning flag indicates that the lottery result of the winning lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the first start port (the center side first start port 33 or the right side first start port 44) is "big hit", " It is turned ON in the case of "special small win" or "normal small win", and is turned OFF when the variable display of the first symbol due to the entry of the game ball into the first start port is stopped and the stop display is displayed. is a flag that After executing step Ss0819, the process for determining the first starting port ends.

In step Ss0815, when it is determined that the result of the success/failure determination is not a special small hit (Ss0815: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss820.

In step Ss820, the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 is referenced to determine whether or not the reach occurs. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the determination process execution area 64c matches the value set as reach occurrence in the reach determination table referred to. The process of step Ss0820 is executed when the result of the success/failure determination (hit lottery) in step Ss0804 is neither a big win nor a small win (normal small win, special small win). That is, in step Ss0820, it is determined whether or not it is a game round in which reach occurs among the game rounds in which the result of the success/failure determination is neither a big win nor a small win (normal small win, special small win). After executing step Ss0820, the process proceeds to step Ss0821.

In step Ss0821, it is determined whether or not the result of reach determination in step Ss0820 is reach occurrence. In step Ss0821, when it is determined that reach has occurred (Ss0821: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss0822, and the reach occurrence flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned ON. After executing step Ss0822, the process proceeds to step Ss0823. In step Ss0821, if it is determined that reach has not occurred (Ss0821: NO), the process proceeds directly to step Ss0823.

In step Ss0823, a stop symbol setting process for losing is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for loss, in the current game turn to be a loss, the first symbol display portion 37a is used for setting which stop result is displayed to end the variable display (stop display). Execute the process. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for failure in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the judgment processing execution area 64c is obtained. It acquires and stores the address information in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After executing step Ss0823, the determination process for the first start opening is terminated.

<Processing for setting fluctuation time for first start port>
Next, the process of setting the variable time for the first start port will be described. The variable time setting process for the first start port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the change start process for the first start port (Fig. 352: Ss0604).

FIG. 355 is a flow chart showing the process of setting the variable time for the first start port. In step Ss0901, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is obtained. After that, the process proceeds to step Ss0902.

In step Ss0902, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag is ON. When it is determined in step Ss0902 that the high probability mode flag is not ON (Ss0902: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss0903.

In step Ss0903, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step Ss0903 that the high frequency support mode flag is not ON (Ss0903: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss0904.

In step Ss0904, the low probability low support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the first starting port is executed. In the low-probability-low-support state variable time information acquisition processing for the first starting port, the game round for the first starting port is executed when the lottery mode is the low-probability mode and the support mode is the low-frequency support mode. In this case, it is a process of acquiring the fluctuation time information of the game round for the first starting port. Specifically, in the low probability low support state (state H1) in FIG. 345, when the first start opening game round is executed, the variation time information of the first start opening game round is acquired. processing. The details of the low-probability low support state time fluctuation time information acquisition process for the first start port will be described later. After executing step Ss0904, the process proceeds to step Ss0909.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss0903 that the high frequency support mode flag is ON (Ss0903: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss0905.

In step Ss0905, the low probability high support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the first starting port is executed. In the low-probability support state variable time information acquisition processing for the first start port, the game round for the first start port is executed when the lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode. In this case, it is a process of acquiring the fluctuation time information of the game round for the first starting port. Specifically, in the low probability high support state (state H3) in FIG. 345, when the first starting opening game round is executed, the fluctuation time information of the first starting opening game round is acquired. processing. The details of the low-probability support state fluctuating time information acquisition process for the first starting port will be described later. After executing step Ss0905, the process proceeds to step Ss0909.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss0902 that the high probability mode flag is ON (Ss0902: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss0906.

In step Ss0906, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step Ss0906 that the high frequency support mode flag is ON (Ss0906: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss0907.

In step Ss0907, high-probability high support state fluctuation time information acquisition processing for the first starting port is executed. In the high-probability-high support state variable time information acquisition processing for the first start port, the first start port game round is executed when the lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode. In this case, it is a process of acquiring the fluctuation time information of the game round for the first starting port. Specifically, when the game round for the first starting opening is executed in the high probability high support state (state H5) in FIG. 345, the variation time information of the game round for the first starting opening is acquired. processing. The details of the high-probability high support state fluctuating time information acquisition process for the first starting port will be described later. After executing step Ss0907, the process proceeds to step Ss0909.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss0906 that the high frequency support mode flag is not ON (Ss0906: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss0908.

In step Ss0908, the high-probability low support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the first starting port is executed. In the high-probability-low-support state fluctuation time information acquisition processing for the first starting port, the game round for the first starting port is executed when the lottery mode is the high-probability mode and the support mode is the low-frequency support mode. In this case, it is a process of acquiring the fluctuation time information of the game round for the first starting port. Specifically, in the high-probability-low support state (state H6) in FIG. 345, when the game round for the first starting opening is executed, the variation time information of the game round for the first starting opening is acquired. processing. The details of the high-probability-low-support state fluctuating time information acquisition process for the first starting port will be described later. After executing step Ss0908, the process proceeds to step Ss0909.

In step Ss0909, the variable time information acquired in each process of step Ss0904, step Ss0905, step Ss0907, and step Ss0908 is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of RAM64. After that, the process of setting the variation time for the first starting opening is terminated.

<Variation time information acquisition processing during low probability low support state for the first start port>
Next, the fluctuation time information acquisition process for the first starting opening in the low probability low support state will be described. The low probability low support state variable time information acquisition process for the first start port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 355: Ss0904) of the variable time setting process for the first start port.

FIG. 356 is a flowchart showing the low probability low support state fluctuating time information acquisition process for the first starting port. In step Ss1001, it is determined whether or not the result of the win/loss determination related to the current game round is a big hit. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the probability variable jackpot flag or the normal jackpot flag is ON, and if either flag is ON (Ss1001: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss1002.

In step Ss1002, the variable time table for the jackpot is specified from the group of variable time tables during the low probability and low support state stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, and the specified variable time table for the jackpot is referred to. By doing so, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. In the low-probability and low-support state fluctuation time table group, (i) a big-hit fluctuation time table used when winning a jackpot in a winning lottery in a low-probability and low-support state, (ii) in a low-probability and low-support state, winning Variable time table for reach generation used when reach occurs without winning the jackpot in the lottery, (iii) Reach non-reach used when reach does not occur without winning the jackpot in the winning lottery in a low probability low support state A variable time table for generation is provided. In step Ss1002, first, (i) is specified from among (i) to (iii). (i) is, for example, a variable time table for performing a normal effect for big wins. Next, by referring to the specified big hit variation time table, variation time information corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS acquired in step Ss0901 (FIG. 355) is acquired. After executing step Ss1002, the low probability low support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the first starting port ends.

On the other hand, in step Ss1001, when it is determined that the result of the win/loss determination for the current game round is not a big hit (step Ss1001: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss1003.

In step Ss1003, it is determined whether reach occurs in the current game round. In step Ss1003, when it is determined that reach occurs in the current game round (step Ss1003: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss1004.

In step Ss1004, the variable time table for reach generation is specified from the low probability low support state variable time table group stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, and the specified variable time table for reach generation is selected. By referring to it, the variation time information corresponding to the current value of the variation type counter CS is acquired. Specifically, first, from (i) to (iii), (ii) in a low probability low support state, a variable time table for reach generation used when reach occurs without winning a jackpot in a winning lottery, Identify. (ii) is, for example, a variable time table for performing normal effects for reach generation. Next, by referring to the identified reach occurrence fluctuation time table, obtain fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS obtained in step Ss0901 (FIG. 355). After executing step Ss1004, the low probability low support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the first starting port ends.

In step Ss1003, when it is determined that reach does not occur in this game round (step Ss1003: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss1005.

In step Ss1005, a variable time table for reach non-occurrence is specified from the low probability low support state variable time table group stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, and the specified reach non-occurrence variable time By referring to the table, the variation time information corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS is acquired. Specifically, first, from (i) to (iii), (iii) in a low probability low support state, a variable time for reach non-occurrence used when reach does not occur without winning a jackpot in a winning lottery Identify the table. (iii) is, for example, a variable time table for performing a non-reach normal effect. Next, by referring to the identified reach non-occurrence fluctuation time table, obtain the fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS obtained in step Ss0901 (FIG. 355). After executing step Ss1005, the low probability low support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the first starting port ends.

<Variation time information acquisition processing during low-probability support state for the first start port>
Next, the fluctuation time information acquisition process for the first starting opening in the low-probability support state will be described. The variable time information acquisition process for the first starting opening during low probability high support state is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 355: Ss0905) of the variable time setting process for the first starting opening.

FIG. 357 is a flowchart showing a low probability high support state fluctuating time information acquisition process for the first starting port. In step Ss1101, it is determined whether or not the result of the win/loss determination related to the current game round is a big win. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the probability variable jackpot flag or the normal jackpot flag is ON, and if either flag is ON (Ss1101: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss1102.

In step Ss1102, the variable time table for the big hit is specified from the low-probability support state variable time table group stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, and the specified variable time table for the big win is referred to. By doing so, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. In the low-probability support state fluctuation time table group, (iv) a big-hit fluctuation time table used when winning a jackpot in a winning lottery in a low-probability support state, (v) in a low-probability support state, hit Variable time table for reach generation used when reach occurs without winning a jackpot in the lottery, (iv) Reach non-reach used when reach does not occur without winning a jackpot in a winning lottery in a low-probability sapo state A variable time table for generation is provided. In step Ss1102, first, (iv) is specified from among (iv) and (v). Next, by referring to the specified big hit variation time table, variation time information corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS acquired in step Ss0901 (FIG. 355) is acquired. After executing step Ss1102, the low probability height support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the first starting port ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Ss1101 that the result of the winning/failure determination for the current game round is not a big win (step Ss1101: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss1103.

In step Ss1103, it is determined whether reach occurs in the current game round. In step Ss1103, when it is determined that reach occurs in the current game round (step Ss1103: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss1104.

In step Ss1104, the variable time table for reach generation is specified from the group of variable time tables for low probability support state stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, and the specified variable time table for reach generation is selected. By referring to it, the variation time information corresponding to the current value of the variation type counter CS is acquired. Specifically, first, from (iv) and (v), the variable time table for reach generation used when reach occurs without winning a jackpot in a winning lottery in a low-probability support state (v). Identify. Next, by referring to the identified reach occurrence fluctuation time table, obtain fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS obtained in step Ss0901 (FIG. 355). After executing step Ss1104, the low probability height support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the first starting port ends.

In step Ss1103, when it is determined that reach does not occur in this game round (step Ss1103: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss1105.

In step Ss1105, the variable time table for reach non-occurrence is specified from the low probability high support state variable time table group stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, and the specified reach non-occurrence variable time By referring to the table, the variation time information corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS is acquired. Specifically, first, from (iv) to (iv), (iv) in a low-probability sapo state, a variable time for reach non-occurrence used when reach does not occur without winning a jackpot in a winning lottery Identify the table. Next, by referring to the identified reach non-occurrence fluctuation time table, obtain the fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS obtained in step Ss0901 (FIG. 355). After executing step Ss1105, the low probability height support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the first starting port ends.

<Variation time information acquisition processing during high-precision high support state for the first start port>
Next, the fluctuation time information acquisition processing for the first starting opening in the high-probability-high support state will be described. The high-probability-high support state variable time information acquisition process for the first start port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 355: Ss0907) of the variable time setting process for the first start port.

FIG. 358 is a flow chart showing high-probability-high support state fluctuating time information acquisition processing for the first starting port. In step Ss1201, it is determined whether or not the result of the win/loss determination related to the current game round is a big win. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the probability variable jackpot flag or the normal jackpot flag is ON, and if either flag is ON (Ss1201: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss1202.

In step Ss1202, the variable time table for the jackpot is specified from the group of variable time tables during the high probability high support state stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, and the specified variable time table for the jackpot is referred to. By doing so, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. In the high-probability high support state fluctuation time table group, (vii) the big hit fluctuation time table used when winning the jackpot in the winning lottery in the high-probability high support state, (viii) in the high-probability high support state, hit Variable time table for special small hits used when winning a special small hit in the lottery, (ix) variable time table for normal small hits used when winning a normal small hit in a winning lottery in a high-probability high support state are provided. In step Ss1202, first, (vii) is specified from among (vii) to (ix). Next, by referring to the specified big hit variation time table, variation time information corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS acquired in step Ss0901 (FIG. 355) is acquired. After executing step Ss1202, the high-probability-high support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the first starting port is ended.

On the other hand, in step Ss1201, when it is determined that the result of the winning/failure determination for the current game round is not a big hit (step Ss1201: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss1203.

In step Ss1203, it is determined whether or not the result of the win/loss determination related to the current game round is a special small hit. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special small hit flag is ON, and when it is determined that the special small hit flag is ON (Ss1203: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss1204.

In step Ss1204, the fluctuation time table for the special small hit is specified from the fluctuation time table group during the high probability high support state stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, and the fluctuation time for the specified special small hit By referring to the table, the variation time information corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS is obtained. Specifically, first, from (vii) to (ix), (viii) in a high-accuracy high support state, a special small winning variable time table used when winning a special small winning in a winning lottery is specified. . Then, by referring to the fluctuation time table for the specified special small hit, obtain the fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS obtained in step Ss0901 (Fig. 355). After executing step Ss1204, the high-probability-high support state fluctuating time information acquisition process for the first starting port ends.

In step Ss1203, when it is determined that the result of the win/loss determination related to the current game round is not a special small hit (Ss1203: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss1205.

In step Ss1205, from the high-probability high support state fluctuation time table group stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, the fluctuation time table for the normal small hit is specified, and the fluctuation time for the specified normal small hit By referring to the table, the variation time information corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS is acquired. Specifically, first, from among (vii) to (ix), (ix) in a high-probability high support state, a normal small winning fluctuation time table used when winning a normal small winning in a winning lottery is specified. . Then, by referring to the specified normal small per variation time table, to acquire the variation time information corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS acquired in step Ss0901 (Fig. 355). After executing step Ss1205, the high-probability-high support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the first starting port ends.

<Variation time information acquisition processing during high probability low support state for the first start port>
Next, the high-probability-low support state fluctuating time information acquisition process for the first starting port will be described. The high-probability-low support state variable time information acquisition process for the first start port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 355: Ss0907) of the variable time setting process for the first start port.

FIG. 359 is a flowchart showing the high-probability-low support state variable time information acquisition process for the first starting port. In step Ss1301, it is determined whether or not the result of the win/loss determination related to the current game round is a big win. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the probability variable jackpot flag or the normal jackpot flag is ON, and if either flag is ON (Ss1301: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss1302.

In step Ss1302, the variable time table for the big win is specified from the group of variable time tables for the high probability/low support state stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, and the specified variable time table for the big win is referred to. By doing so, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. The high-probability-low support state variable time table group includes (x) a high-probability-low support state, a big hit fluctuation time table used when a jackpot is won in a winning lottery, (xi) a high-probability-low support state, a hit. A small winning variable time table used when a small winning (normal small winning, special small winning) is won in a lottery is provided. In step Ss1302, first, (x) is identified from (x) and (xi). Next, by referring to the specified big hit variation time table, variation time information corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS acquired in step Ss0901 (FIG. 355) is acquired. After executing step Ss1302, the high-probability-low support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the first starting port ends.

On the other hand, in step Ss1301, when it is determined that the win/loss determination result of the current game round is not a big hit (that is, when it is determined as a small hit) (step Ss1301: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss1303.

In step Ss1303, from the high-probability low support state fluctuation time table group stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, the fluctuation time table for the small hit is specified, and the fluctuation time table for the small hit is specified. By referring to it, the variation time information corresponding to the current value of the variation type counter CS is acquired. Specifically, first, from (x) and (xi), (xi) in a high probability and low support state, a small win used when winning a small win (normal small win, special small win) in a winning lottery Specify the variable time table. Then, by referring to the specified small winning variation time table, to acquire the variation time information corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS acquired in step Ss0901 (Fig. 355). After executing step Ss1303, the high probability low support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the first starting port ends.

<First fluctuation stop processing>
Next, the first fluctuation stop processing will be described. The first fluctuation stop process is executed by the main MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game round control process (Fig. 351: Ss504).

FIG. 360 is a flow chart showing the first fluctuation stopping process. In step Ss1401, it is determined whether or not the second hit flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The second winning flag is turned ON when the lottery result of the winning lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 is a "jackpot", and the game to the second starting port 34 is started. The variable display of the second symbol due to the entry of the ball stops, and is turned off when the display is stopped. If it is determined in step Ss1401 that the second hit flag is not ON (Ss1401: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss1402.

In step Ss1402, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the first symbol display portion 37a has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the variation time for the first symbol set in the variation time setting process (FIG. 355) for the first starting port has elapsed. When it is determined in step Ss1402 that the variation time of the first symbol display portion 37a has ended (Ss1402: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss1403. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Ss1402 that the variation time of the first symbol display portion 37a has not ended (Ss1402: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss1411.

In step Ss1403, the movement of the first symbol display portion 37a is stopped. In other words, the first symbol of the first symbol display portion 37a is shifted from the variable display to the stop display. The combination of symbols to be stopped and displayed (stopped symbols) is set in step Ss0809, step Ss0811, step Ss0814, step Ss0818, or step Ss0823 of the determination process for the first start opening (FIG. 354). After executing step Ss1403, the process proceeds to step Ss1404.

In step Ss1404, the first fluctuating flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned OFF. As described above, the first fluctuating flag is triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port (the central side first starting port 33, the right side first starting port 44). It is a flag that is turned ON when one symbol starts to fluctuate, and turned OFF when the first symbol stops fluctuating. After executing step Ss1404, the process proceeds to step Ss1405.

In step Ss1405, it is determined whether or not the second fluctuating flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. As described above, the second fluctuating flag is turned ON when the second pattern of the second pattern display portion 37b starts to fluctuate with the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 as a trigger. 2 is a flag that is turned OFF when the variation is stopped. If it is determined in step Ss1405 that the second fluctuating flag is not ON (Ss1405: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss1406.

At step Ss1406, the first hit flag is turned OFF. After that, the first fluctuation stopping process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss1405 that the second fluctuating flag is ON (Ss1405: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss1411.

If it is determined in step Ss1401 that the second hit flag is ON (Ss1401: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss1407.

In step Ss1407, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the second symbol display portion 37b has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the variation time for the second symbol set in the process of setting the variation time for the second starting port (FIG. 364), which will be described later, has elapsed. When it is determined in step Ss1407 that the variation time of the second symbol display portion 37b has not ended (Ss1407: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss1402. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Ss1407 that the variation time of the second symbol display portion 37b has ended (Ss1407: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss1408.

In step Ss1408, the second winning flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned OFF. After executing step Ss1408, the process proceeds to step Ss1409.

In step Ss1409, the movement of the first symbol display portion 37a is stopped. In other words, the first symbol of the first symbol display portion 37a is shifted from the variable display to the stop display. In the present embodiment, as the symbol to be stopped and displayed (stop symbol), a stop symbol for losing is used. Further, in step Ss1409, various flags such as the probability variable jackpot flag and the normal jackpot flag related to the first start game round are turned off, and in the winning lottery related to the first start game round, Even if a big win or a small win (special small win, normal small win) is won, the winning is invalidated. After executing step Ss1409, the process proceeds to step Ss1410.

In step Ss1410, the first fluctuating flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned OFF. After that, the process proceeds to step Ss1411.

In step Ss1411, it is determined whether the support mode is the high frequency support mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

In step Ss1411, if it is determined that the high-frequency support mode flag is ON (Ss1411: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss1412, and the number of games continuously executed in the high-frequency support mode is the guaranteed number of games ( For example, 50 times) is reached (=within the guaranteed number of games). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the guaranteed number-of-games counter PNC exceeds zero. Since the guaranteed number-of-games counter PNC indicates the number of games remaining in the guaranteed number of games, by determining whether PNC>0, the number of games continuously executed in the high-frequency support mode is determined. It can be determined whether or not is before reaching the guaranteed number of games.

In step Ss1412, if it is determined that the value of the guaranteed number-of-games counter PNC does not exceed 0 (step Ss1412: NO), that is, if it is determined that it is not within the guaranteed number-of-games, proceed to step Ss1413 for high-frequency support. Turn off the mode flag. After executing step Ss1413, the process proceeds to step Ss1414.

In step Ss1414, a low frequency support mode command is set. The low frequency support mode command is a command for notifying the sound emission control device 90 that the support mode is the low frequency support mode. The low frequency support mode command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 at step Ss0402 in the normal process (FIG. 350). After executing step Ss1414, the process proceeds to step Ss1415.

In step Ss1415, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

If it is determined in step Ss1415 that the high probability mode flag is ON (Ss1411: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss1416 to set an invincible zone command. The invincible zone command is a command for notifying the sound emission control device 90 that the high-probability high support state has shifted to the high-probability low support state (invincibility zone). The invincible zone command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 at step Ss0402 in the normal process (FIG. 350). After executing step Ss1414, the first fluctuation stopping process is ended.

If it is determined in step Ss1415 that the high-probability mode flag is not ON (Ss1415: NO), the first fluctuation stopping process is terminated. When it is determined in step Ss1411 that the high-frequency support mode flag is not ON (Ss1411: NO), the first fluctuation stopping process is terminated. Also, in step Ss1412, when it is determined that the value of the guaranteed number-of-games counter PNC exceeds 0 (step Ss1412: YES), the first fluctuation stop processing is terminated.

<Variation start processing for the second start port>
Next, the fluctuation start processing for the second start opening will be described. The variation start process for the second starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game round control process (Fig. 351: Ss0506).

FIG. 361 is a flow chart showing the variation start process for the second start port. In step Ss1501, it is determined whether or not the second start suspension number RbN=0. If it is determined in step Ss1501 that the second start suspension number RbN is not 0 (Ss1501: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss1502. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Ss1501 that the second start suspension number RbN=0 (Ss1501: YES), the fluctuation start processing for the second start port ends.

In step Ss1502, a hold information shift process for the second starting port is executed. In the hold information shift process for the second starting port, the hold information stored in the second reserve area Rb is shifted. The details of the hold information shift process for the second start port will be described later. After executing step Ss1502, the process proceeds to step Ss1503.

In step Ss1503, determination processing for the second starting opening is executed. In the determination process for the second start opening, a winning lottery is executed based on the special information stored in the determination process execution area 64c. Specifically, based on the values of the winning random number counter C1, the big winning type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the judgment processing execution area 64c, the judgment of whether or not there is a big hit or a small hit is determined, and the big hit type is distributed. Distribution judgment and reach judgment for judging presence/absence of reach occurrence are performed. The details of the determination process for the second start opening will be described later. After executing step Ss1503, the process proceeds to step Ss1504.

In step Ss1504, a variable time setting process for the second starting opening is executed. In the process of setting the variation time for the second starting opening, the variation time, which is the time from when the pattern starts to change until it stops, is set. The details of the process of setting the variable time for the second starting opening will be described later. After executing step Ss1504, the process proceeds to step Ss1505.

In step Ss1505, a second variation command is set. The second variation command includes information indicating that the current game round is related to the special information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 34, and the reach Information on the presence or absence of occurrence and information on the variable time set in step Ss1504 are included. After executing step Ss1505, the process proceeds to step Ss1506.

In step Ss1506, a second type command is set. The second type command includes information on whether or not there is a jackpot and information on the jackpot type. Specifically, the second type command includes 16R probability variable jackpot information, 8R probability variable jackpot information, 8R normal jackpot information, or off information.

The variation command and the second type command set in steps Ss1505 and Ss1506 are sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step Ss0402 in the normal process (FIG. 350). The sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the performance in the game round based on the received variation command and the second type command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the performance is executed. After executing step Ss1506, the process proceeds to step Ss1507.

In step Ss1507, the second symbol display portion 37b is caused to start changing display, and then the process proceeds to step Ss1508 to turn on the second changing flag. The second fluctuating flag is a flag that is turned ON when the game cycle for the second start opening is started, and is turned OFF when the variable display in the second symbol display portion 37b becomes a stop display. After executing step Ss1508, the process proceeds to step Ss1509.

In step Ss1509, 1 is subtracted from the value of the number-of-games counter PNC. The game number counter PNC is set to a value when the high-frequency support mode is started, and the counter value is decremented by 1 each time a game is played. After step Ss1509 is executed, the fluctuation start processing for the second start opening is terminated.

<Holding information shift process for the second start port>
Next, the hold information shift process for the second start port will be described. The hold information shift process for the second start port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variation start process for the second start port (Fig. 361: Ss1502).

FIG. 362 is a flow chart showing the hold information shift process for the second start port. In step Ss1601, 1 is subtracted from the second starting reservation number RbN in the second reservation area Rb. After that, the process proceeds to step Ss1602.

In step Ss1602, the data (holding information) stored in the first area of the second holding area Rb is moved to the second execution area of the determination processing execution area 64c. After that, the process proceeds to step Ss1603.

In step Ss1603, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second reservation area Rb is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After executing step Ss1603, this second start port holding information shift process is terminated.

<Determination processing for the second start port>
Next, the determination processing for the second start port will be described. The determination process for the second start port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the fluctuation start process for the second start port (Fig. 361: Ss1503).

FIG. 363 is a flow chart showing determination processing for the second start port. In step Ss1701, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The high-probability mode flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the winning lottery mode is the high-probability mode by the MPU 62, and in this embodiment, it is turned ON at the end of the opening and closing execution mode related to the winning of the probability variable jackpot. , is normally turned OFF at the end of the opening/closing execution mode relating to the winning of the jackpot. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the fall opening 252 provided in the starting opening unit 200, the high probability mode flag is turned OFF. If it is determined in step Ss1701 that the mode is the high probability mode (Ss1701: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss1702.

In step Ss1702, the success/failure determination is performed with reference to the success/failure table (for the high-probability mode) for the second start port. Specifically, the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is set as a big win in the success/failure table (for high probability mode) for the second starting port shown in FIG. 340(b). Determines whether or not it matches the value After that, the process proceeds to step Ss1704. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss1701 that the mode is not the high probability mode (Ss1701: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss1703.

In step Ss1703, the success/failure determination is performed by referring to the success/failure table for the second start port (for the low-probability mode). Specifically, the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is set as a big win in the success/failure table (for low probability mode) for the second starting port shown in FIG. 340(a). Determines whether or not it matches the value After that, the process proceeds to step Ss1704.

In step Ss1704, it is determined whether or not the result of the success determination in step Ss1702 or Ss1703 is a big hit. In step Ss1704, when it is determined that the result of the success/failure determination is a big hit (Ss1704: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss1705.

In step Ss1705, the second winning flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned ON. The second winning flag is turned ON when the lottery result of the winning lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the second start port 34 as a trigger is "big win", and the game ball enters the second start port 34. This is a flag that is turned OFF when the variable display of the second symbol due to the entry of the ball stops and the stop display is displayed. After executing step Ss1705, the process proceeds to step Ss1706.

In step Ss1706, a distribution determination is made with reference to the distribution table for the second start port (see FIG. 341(b)). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is included in which jackpot type numerical range. After executing step Ss1706, the process proceeds to step Ss1707.

In step Ss1707, it is determined whether or not the result of distribution determination (jackpot type) in step Ss1706 is a variable probability jackpot. In step Ss1707, when it is determined that the distributed jackpot type is the probability variable jackpot (Ss1707: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss1708.

In step Ss1708, the probability variable jackpot flag (jackpot type flag) corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step Ss1706 is turned ON. After executing step Ss1708, the process proceeds to step Ss1709.

In step Ss1709, stop symbol setting processing for probability variable jackpot is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for the probability variable jackpot, it is set whether to end the variable display (stop display) in the state in which the stop result is displayed in the second symbol display part 37b in the current game round to be the probability variable jackpot. process for Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the probability variable jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step Ss1706 is acquired, and the The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After step Ss1709 is executed, the determination process for the second starting port is terminated.

In step Ss1707, when it is determined that the distributed jackpot type is not the probability variable jackpot (Ss1707: NO), that is, when the distributed jackpot type is the normal jackpot, the process proceeds to step Ss1710.

In step Ss1710, the normal jackpot flag (jackpot type flag) corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step Ss1706 is turned ON. After executing step Ss1710, the process advances to step Ss1711.

In step Ss1711, stop symbol setting processing for normal jackpot is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for the normal big win, it is set which stop result is to be displayed in the second symbol display part 37b to end the variable display (stop display) in the current game round which is the normal big win. process for Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the normal jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step Ss1706 is acquired, and the The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After executing step Ss1711, the determination process for the second start port ends.

In step Ss1704, when it is determined that the result of the success/failure determination in step Ss1702 or step Ss1703 is not a big hit (Ss1704: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss1712.

In step Ss1712, the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 is referenced to determine whether or not the reach occurs. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the determination process execution area 64c matches the value set as reach occurrence in the reach determination table referred to. The process of step Ss1712 is executed when the result of the win/loss determination (hit lottery) in step Ss1704 is not a big win. That is, in step Ss1712, it is determined whether or not it is a game round in which reach occurs among the game rounds in which the result of the winning/failure determination is not a jackpot. After executing step Ss1712, the process proceeds to step Ss1713.

In step Ss1713, it is determined whether or not the result of reach determination in step Ss1712 is reach occurrence. In step Ss1713, when it is determined that reach has occurred (Ss1713: YES), the process advances to step Ss1714 to turn on the reach occurrence flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64. FIG. After executing step Ss1714, the process proceeds to step Ss1715. In step Ss1713, when it is determined that reach has not occurred (Ss1713: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss1715 without executing step Ss1714.

In step Ss1715, a stop symbol setting process for losing is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for loss, in the current game turn that is a loss, the second symbol display portion 37b is used to set which stop result is displayed to end the variable display (stop display). Execute the process. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for failure in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the judgment processing execution area 64c is obtained. It acquires and stores the address information in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After executing step Ss1715, the determination process for the second starting port ends.

<Processing for setting fluctuation time for second start port>
Next, the process of setting the variable time for the second starting port will be described. The process of setting the variation time for the second start port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variation start process for the second start port (Fig. 361: Ss1504).

FIG. 364 is a flow chart showing the process of setting the variation time for the second start port. In step Ss1801, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired. After that, the process proceeds to step Ss1802.

In step Ss1802, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step Ss1802 that the high probability mode flag is not ON (Ss1802: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss1803.

In step Ss1803, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step Ss1803 that the high frequency support mode flag is not ON (Ss1803: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss1804.

In step Ss1804, low probability low support state time fluctuation time information acquisition processing for the second starting port is executed. In the low-probability-low-support state fluctuating time information acquisition process for the second starting port, the game cycle for the second starting port is executed when the lottery mode is the low-probability mode and the support mode is the low-frequency support mode. In this case, it is a process of acquiring the fluctuation time information of the game round for the second starting port. Specifically, in the low probability low support state (state H1) shown in FIG. processing. The details of the low-probability low support state time fluctuation time information acquisition process for the second starting port will be described later. After executing step Ss1804, the process proceeds to step Ss1809.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss1803 that the high frequency support mode flag is ON (Ss1803: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss1805.

In step Ss1805, low probability high support state fluctuation time information acquisition processing for the second starting port is executed. In the low probability high support state fluctuation time information acquisition processing for the second start port, the game round for the second start port is executed when the lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode. In this case, it is a process of acquiring the fluctuation time information of the game round for the second starting port. Specifically, in the low probability high support state (state H3) in FIG. 345, when the second starting opening game round is executed, the variation time information of the second starting opening game round is acquired. processing. The details of the low-probability support state fluctuating time information acquisition process for the second starting port will be described later. After executing step Ss1805, the process proceeds to step Ss1809.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss1802 that the high probability mode flag is ON (Ss1802: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss1806.

In step Ss1806, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step Ss1806 that the high frequency support mode flag is ON (Ss1806: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss1807.

In step Ss1807, high-probability high support state fluctuation time information acquisition processing for the second starting port is executed. In the high-probability-high support state variable time information acquisition process for the second start port, the second start port game round is executed when the lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode. In this case, it is a process of acquiring the fluctuation time information of the game round for the second starting port. Specifically, when the game round for the second starting opening is executed in the high probability high support state (state H5) in FIG. 345, the variation time information of the game round for the second starting opening is acquired. processing. The details of the high-probability high support state fluctuating time information acquisition process for the second starting port will be described later. After executing step Ss1807, the process proceeds to step Ss1809.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss1806 that the high frequency support mode flag is not ON (Ss1806: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss1808.

In step Ss1808, high-probability-low support state fluctuation time information acquisition processing for the second starting port is executed. In the high-probability-low-support state fluctuation time information acquisition processing for the second starting port, the game cycle for the second starting port is executed when the lottery mode is the high-probability mode and the support mode is the low-frequency support mode. In this case, it is a process of acquiring the fluctuation time information of the game round for the second starting port. Specifically, in the high-probability-low support state (state H6) shown in FIG. processing. The details of the high-probability-low-support state fluctuating time information acquisition process for the second starting port will be described later. After executing step Ss1808, the process proceeds to step Ss1809.

In step Ss1809, the variable time information obtained in each process of steps Ss1804, Ss1805, Ss1807, and Ss1808 is set in variable time counter areas provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. FIG. After that, the process of setting the variation time for the second starting opening is terminated.

<Variation time information acquisition processing during low probability low support state for the second start port>
Next, the fluctuation time information acquisition process for the second starting opening in the low probability low support state will be described. The low probability low support state variable time information acquisition process for the second start port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 364: Ss1804) of the variable time setting process for the second start port.

FIG. 365 is a flowchart showing the low-probability low-support-state fluctuating time information acquisition process for the second start port. In step Ss1901, long fluctuation time information is acquired. Specifically, an extremely long variation time of 10 minutes (long variation time) is acquired as the variation time information. After executing step Ss1901, the low probability low support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the second starting port is terminated.

<Variation time information acquisition processing during low-probability support state for the second start port>
Next, the fluctuation time information acquisition process for the second starting opening at the time of the low-probability support state will be described. The variable time information acquisition process for the second start opening during low probability high support state is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 364: Ss1805) of the variable time setting process for the second start opening.

FIG. 366 is a flowchart showing the low probability high support state fluctuating time information acquisition process for the second starting port. In step Ss2001, it is determined whether or not the result of the win/loss determination related to the current game round is a big hit. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the probability variable jackpot flag or the normal jackpot flag is ON, and if either flag is ON (Ss2001: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss2002.

In step Ss2002, the variable time table for the jackpot is specified from the low-probability support state variable time table group stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, and the specified variable time table for the jackpot is referred to. By doing so, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. In the low-probability support state fluctuation time table group, (I) the jackpot fluctuation time table used when winning the jackpot in the winning lottery in the low-probability support state, (II) in the low-probability support state, hit Variable time table for reach generation used when reach occurs without winning a jackpot in the lottery, (III) Reach non-reach used when reach does not occur without winning a jackpot in a winning lottery in a low-probability sapo state A variable time table for generation is provided. In step Ss2002, first, (I) is specified from among (I) to (III). Next, by referring to the specified big hit variation time table, variation time information corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS acquired in step Ss1801 (FIG. 364) is acquired. After executing step Ss2002, the low probability height support state fluctuating time information acquisition process for the second starting port ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Ss2001 that the result of the win/loss determination for the current game round is not a big hit (step Ss2001: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss2003.

In step Ss2003, it is determined whether reach occurs in the current game round. In step Ss2003, when it is determined that reach occurs in the current game round (step Ss2003: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss2004.

In step Ss2004, the variable time table for reach generation is specified from the group of variable time tables for low probability support state stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, and the specified variable time table for reach generation is selected. By referring to it, the variation time information corresponding to the current value of the variation type counter CS is acquired. Specifically, first, from (I) to (III), (II) in a low-probability sapo state, a variable time table for reach generation used when reach occurs without winning a jackpot in a winning lottery. Identify. Next, by referring to the identified reach occurrence fluctuation time table, obtain fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS obtained in step Ss1801 (FIG. 364). After executing step Ss2004, the low probability height support state fluctuating time information acquisition process for the second starting port ends.

In step Ss2003, when it is determined that reach does not occur in this game round (step Ss2003: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss2005.

In step Ss2005, the variable time table for reach non-occurrence is specified from the low-probability support state variable time table group stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, and the specified reach non-occurrence variable time By referring to the table, the variation time information corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS is acquired. Specifically, first, from (I) to (III), (III) in a low-probability sapo state, a variable time for reach non-occurrence used when reach does not occur without winning a jackpot in a winning lottery Identify the table. Next, by referring to the identified reach non-occurrence fluctuation time table, obtain the fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS obtained in step Ss1801 (FIG. 364). After executing step Ss2005, the low probability height support state fluctuating time information acquisition process for the second starting port ends.

<Variation time information acquisition processing during high-precision high support state for the second start port>
Next, the fluctuation time information acquisition process for the second starting port at the time of high-precision high support state will be described. The high-probability-high-support-state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the second start opening is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 364: Ss1807) of the fluctuation time setting process for the second start opening.

FIG. 367 is a flowchart showing the high-precision high support state fluctuating time information acquisition process for the second starting port. In step Ss2101, long fluctuation time information is acquired. Specifically, an extremely long fluctuation time of 10 minutes is acquired as the fluctuation time information. After executing step Ss2101, the high-probability-high support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the second starting port ends.

<Variation time information acquisition processing during high probability low support state for the second start port>
Next, the high-probability-low-support state fluctuating time information acquisition process for the second starting port will be described. The high-probability-low support state variable time information acquisition process for the second start port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 364: Ss1807) of the variable time setting process for the second start port.

FIG. 368 is a flowchart showing the high-probability-low support state variable time information acquisition process for the second start port. In step Ss2201, it is determined whether or not the result of the win/loss determination for the current game round is a big win. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the probability variable jackpot flag or the normal jackpot flag is ON, and if either flag is ON (Ss2201: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss2202.

In step Ss2202, the variable time table for the big win is specified from the group of variable time tables for the high probability/low support state stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, and the specified variable time table for the big win is referred to. By doing so, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. The high-probability low support state fluctuation time table group includes (IV) a high-probability low-support state, a jackpot fluctuation time table used when a jackpot is won in a winning lottery, and (V) a high-probability low support state, a hit. Variable time table for reach generation used when reach occurs without winning a jackpot in the lottery, (VI) Reach non-reach used when reach does not occur without winning a jackpot in a winning lottery in a high-probability low support state A variable time table for generation is provided. In step Ss2202, first, (IV) is identified from among (IV) to (VI). Next, by referring to the specified big hit variation time table, variation time information corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS acquired in step Ss1801 (FIG. 364) is acquired. After executing step Ss2202, the high probability low support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the second starting port is ended.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Ss2201 that the result of the winning/failure determination for the current game round is not a big hit (step Ss2201: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss2203.

In step Ss2203, it is determined whether reach occurs in the current game round. In step Ss2203, when it is determined that reach occurs in the current game round (step Ss2203: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss2204.

In step Ss2204, the variable time table for reach generation is identified from the high-probability-low support state variable time table group stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, and the identified variable time table for reach generation is selected. By referring to it, the variation time information corresponding to the current value of the variation type counter CS is acquired. Specifically, first, (V) is specified from among (IV) to (VI). Next, by referring to the identified reach occurrence fluctuation time table, obtain fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS obtained in step Ss1801 (FIG. 364). After executing step Ss2204, the high probability low support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the second start port ends.

In step Ss2203, when it is determined that reach does not occur in this game round (step Ss2203: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss2205.

In step Ss2205, a variable time table for reach non-occurrence is specified from the high probability low support state variable time table group stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, and the specified reach non-occurrence variable time By referring to the table, the variation time information corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS is acquired. Specifically, first, (VI) is specified from among (IV) to (VI). Next, by referring to the identified reach non-occurrence fluctuation time table, obtain the fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS obtained in step Ss1801 (FIG. 364). After executing step Ss2205, the high probability low support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the second starting port ends.

<Second Fluctuation Stop Processing>
Next, the second fluctuation stopping process will be explained. The second fluctuation stop process is executed by the main side MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game round control process (Fig. 351: Ss507).

FIG. 369 is a flowchart showing second fluctuation stop processing. In step Ss2301, it is determined whether or not the first winning flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The first winning flag indicates that the lottery result of the winning lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the first start port (the center side first start port 33, the right side first start port 44) is "big hit", " It is turned ON in the case of "special small win" or "normal small win", and is turned OFF when the variable display of the first symbol due to the entry of the game ball into the first start port is stopped and the stop display is displayed. be made. If it is determined in step Ss2301 that the first win flag is not ON (Ss2301: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss2302.

In step Ss2302, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the second symbol display portion 37a has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the variation time for the second symbol set in the variation time setting process (FIG. 364) for the second starting port has elapsed. When it is determined in step Ss2302 that the variation time of the second symbol display portion 37a has ended (Ss2302: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss2303. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Ss2302 that the variation time of the second symbol display portion 37a has not ended (Ss2302: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss2311.

In step Ss2303, the movement of the second symbol display portion 37a is stopped. In other words, the second symbol of the second symbol display portion 37a is shifted from the variable display to the stop display. The combination of symbols to be stopped and displayed (stop symbols) is set in step Ss1709, step Ss1711, or step Ss1715 of the determination process for the second starting port (FIG. 363). After executing step Ss2303, the process proceeds to step Ss2304.

In step Ss2304, the second fluctuating flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned OFF. As described above, the second fluctuating flag is turned ON when the second pattern of the second pattern display portion 37a starts to fluctuate with the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 as a trigger. 2 is a flag that is turned OFF when the variation is stopped. After executing step Ss2304, the process proceeds to step Ss2305.

In step Ss2305, it is determined whether or not the first fluctuating flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. As described above, the first fluctuating flag is triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port (the central side first starting port 33, the right side first starting port 44). It is a flag that is turned ON when one symbol starts to fluctuate, and turned OFF when the first symbol stops fluctuating. If it is determined in step Ss2305 that the first fluctuating flag is not ON (Ss2305: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss2306.

In step Ss2306, the second winning flag is turned OFF. After that, the second fluctuation stopping process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss2305 that the first fluctuating flag is ON (Ss2305: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss2311.

If it is determined in step Ss2301 that the first hit flag is ON (Ss2301: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss2307.

In step Ss2307, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the first symbol display portion 37b has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the variation time for the first symbol set in the variation time setting process (FIG. 355) for the first starting port has elapsed. When it is determined in step Ss2307 that the variation time of the first symbol display portion 37b has not ended (Ss2307: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss2302. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Ss2307 that the variation time of the first symbol display portion 37b has ended (Ss2307: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss2308.

In step Ss2308, the first winning flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned OFF. After executing step Ss2308, the process proceeds to step Ss2309.

In step Ss2309, the movement of the second symbol display portion 37a is stopped. In other words, the second symbol of the second symbol display portion 37a is shifted from the variable display to the stop display. In the present embodiment, as the symbol to be stopped and displayed (stop symbol), a stop symbol for losing is used. Further, in step Ss2309, various flags such as the probability variable jackpot flag and the normal jackpot flag related to the second start game round are turned off, and in the winning lottery related to the second start game round, Even if a jackpot is won, the winning is invalidated. After executing step Ss2309, the process proceeds to step Ss2310.

In step Ss2310, the second fluctuating flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned OFF. After that, the process proceeds to step Ss2311.

In step Ss2311, it is determined whether or not the support mode is the high frequency support mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

In step Ss2311, if it is determined that the high-frequency support mode flag is ON (Ss2311: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss2312, and the number of games continuously executed in the high-frequency support mode is the guaranteed number of games ( For example, 50 times) is reached (=within the guaranteed number of games). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the guaranteed number-of-games counter PNC exceeds zero. Since the guaranteed number-of-games counter PNC indicates the number of games remaining in the guaranteed number of games, by determining whether PNC>0, the number of games continuously executed in the high-frequency support mode is determined. It can be determined whether or not is before reaching the guaranteed number of games.

In step Ss2312, if it is determined that the value of the guaranteed number-of-games counter PNC does not exceed 0 (step Ss2312: NO), that is, if it is determined that it is not within the guaranteed number-of-games, proceed to step Ss2313 to provide high-frequency support. Turn off the mode flag. After executing step Ss2313, the process proceeds to step Ss2314.

In step Ss2314, a low frequency support mode command is set. The low-frequency support mode command is a command for notifying the sound emission control device 90 that the support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the low-frequency support mode. The low frequency support mode command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 at step Ss0402 in the normal process (FIG. 350). After that, the second fluctuation stopping process is terminated.

When it is determined in step Ss2311 that the high-frequency support mode flag is not ON (Ss2311: NO), the second fluctuation stopping process is ended. Also, in step Ss2312, when it is determined that the value of the guaranteed number-of-games counter PNC exceeds 0 (step Ss2312: YES), the second fluctuation stop processing is terminated.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the game state transition processing will be explained. The game state transition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of normal process (Fig. 350: Ss0406).

FIG. 370 is a flowchart showing game state transition processing. In step Ss2401, it is determined whether or not the ending period flag is ON. The ending period flag is turned ON at the end of the opening/closing process period (at the start of the ending period) in the opening/closing execution mode, and turned OFF at the end of the ending period. The ending period is a period for executing the ending effect in the opening/closing execution mode.

If it is determined in step Ss2401 that the ending period flag is not ON (Ss2401: NO), the process advances to step Ss2402 to determine whether or not the opening/closing process period flag is ON. As described above, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned ON when the game state is shifted to the opening/closing processing period, and is turned OFF when the opening/closing processing period is terminated.

If it is determined in step Ss2402 that the opening/closing processing period flag is not ON (Ss2402: NO), the process advances to step Ss2403 to determine whether or not the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is turned ON at the start of the opening period and turned OFF at the end of the opening period.

If it is determined in step Ss2403 that the opening period flag is not ON (Ss2403: NO), the flow advances to step Ss2404 to determine whether or not the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON. The opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON when the game cycle that triggered the start of the opening/closing execution mode ends, and is turned OFF when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

If it is determined in step Ss2404 that the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON (Ss2404: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss2405. On the other hand, in step Ss2404, when it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode flag is not ON (Ss2404: NO), the game state transition processing is terminated.

In step Ss2405, it is determined whether or not it is a normal small hit. Specifically, by determining whether or not the normal small hit flag is ON, it is determined whether or not the trigger for starting the opening/closing execution mode is the winning of the normal small hit. In step Ss2405, when it is determined that it is not a normal small hit (Ss2405: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss2406.

In step Ss2406, it is determined whether or not it is a special small hit. Specifically, by determining whether or not the special small hit flag is ON, it is determined whether or not the trigger for starting the opening/closing execution mode is the winning of the special small hit. In step Ss2406, when it determines with it not being a special small hit (Ss2406:NO), it progresses to step Ss2407.

At step Ss2407, the high probability mode flag is turned off. In steps Ss2405 and Ss2406, since it is determined that the game result of the current game round (result of the winning lottery) is not a small winning (normal small winning, special small winning), the result of the winning lottery in the current game round is a big hit. A high-probability mode flag is turned off in order to change the lottery mode during execution of the opening/closing execution mode triggered by winning a jackpot to the low-probability mode. After executing step Ss2407, the process proceeds to step Ss2408.

In step Ss2408, the high frequency support mode flag is turned off. In step Ss2408, since it is determined that the game result of the current game round (result of the winning lottery) is not a small win (normal small win, special small win), the result of the winning lottery in the current game round is a big win. be. A high-frequency support mode flag is turned off in order to change the support mode during execution of the opening/closing execution mode triggered by winning the jackpot to the low-frequency support mode. After executing step Ss2408, the process proceeds to step Ss2409.

In step Ss2409, a jackpot open/close execution mode command is set. The jackpot opening/closing execution mode command is a command for notifying the sound emission control device 90 that the opening/closing execution mode will be started when the jackpot is won. The jackpot open/close execution mode command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 350: step Ss0402) of the normal process. After executing step Ss2409, the process proceeds to step Ss2413.

In step Ss2405, when it is determined that it is a normal small hit (Ss2405: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss2413.

In step Ss2406, when it determines with it being a special small hit (Ss2406:YES), it progresses to step Ss2410.

In step Ss2410, the high frequency support mode flag is turned off. Thereafter, the process advances to step Ss2411 to set a low-frequency support mode command. The low-frequency support mode command is a command for notifying the sound emission control device 90 that the support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the low-frequency support mode. The low frequency support mode command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 at step Ss0402 in the normal process (FIG. 350). After executing step Ss2411, the process proceeds to step Ss2412.

In step Ss2412, an invincible zone command is set. The invincible zone command is a command for notifying the sound emission control device 90 that the high-probability high support state has shifted to the high-probability low support state (invincibility zone). The invincible zone command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 at step Ss0402 in the normal process (FIG. 350). After executing step Ss2412, the process proceeds to step Ss2413.

In step Ss2413, an opening/closing execution mode start command is set. The opening/closing execution mode start command is a command for notifying the sound emission control device 90 that the opening/closing execution mode will be started in the wake of a jackpot winning or in the wake of a small win. That is, the opening/closing execution mode start command is set when the opening/closing execution mode is started regardless of the big win or the small win. The open/close execution mode start command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 350: step Ss0402) of the normal process. After executing step Ss2413, the process proceeds to step Ss2414.

In step Ss2414, open/close scenario setting processing is executed. The opening/closing scenario setting process is a process for setting an opening/closing scenario in which an opening pattern of the opening/closing door 36b in the round game is set. The opening/closing scenario setting process will be described later. After executing step Ss2414, the process proceeds to step Ss2415.

In step Ss2415, an opening time setting process is executed. The opening time setting process is a process of setting the length of time of the opening period (hereinafter also referred to as opening time) in the special game state. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the third timer counter area T3 as the opening time. The opening time setting process will be described later. After executing step Ss2415, the process proceeds to step Ss2416.

In step Ss2416, an opening command is set. The set opening command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 at step Ss0402 in the normal process (FIG. 350). This opening command includes information on the set opening time, information on the type of big win, and information on the big win or small win that triggered execution of the opening/closing execution mode this time. The sound emission control device 90 determines the contents of the presentation corresponding to the opening time and the opening/closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents are executed. After executing step Ss2416, the process advances to step Ss2417 to turn on the opening period flag. After that, the game state transition processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step Ss2403 that the opening period flag is ON (Ss2403: YES), the process advances to step Ss2418 to execute processing when the opening period flag is ON. The details of the processing when the opening period flag is ON will be described later. After executing step Ss2418, the game state transition processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step Ss2402 that the opening/closing period flag is ON (Ss2402: YES), the process advances to step Ss2419 to execute the opening/closing period flag ON time process. The details of the processing when the opening/closing processing period flag is ON will be described later. After executing step Ss2419, the game state transition processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step Ss2401 that the ending period flag is ON (Ss2401: YES), the process advances to step Ss2420 to execute processing when the ending period flag is ON. The details of the processing when the ending period flag is ON will be described later. After executing step Ss2420, the game state transition process is terminated.

<Opening/closing scenario setting processing>
Next, the opening/closing scenario setting process will be described. The opening/closing scenario setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (Fig. 370: Ss2414).

FIG. 371 is a flowchart showing open/close scenario setting processing. In step Ss2501, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON. In step Ss2501, when it is determined that the jackpot flag is ON (Ss2501: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss2502.

In step Ss2502, a jackpot open/close scenario is set according to the type of jackpot. The opening/closing scenario is a program in which opening patterns of the opening/closing door 36b in the round game are set. After step Ss2502 is executed, the open/close scenario setting process ends.

When it is determined in step Ss2501 that the jackpot flag is not ON (Ss2501: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss2503.

In step Ss2503, the opening and closing scenario for small winning is set. In the present embodiment, the opening/closing scenario for a small win is set with an opening/closing pattern in which the opening/closing door 36b opens/closes once in the round game. After step Ss2503 is executed, the open/close scenario setting process ends.

<Opening time setting processing>
Next, the opening time setting process will be explained. The opening time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (Fig. 370: Ss2415).

FIG. 372 is a flowchart showing opening time setting processing. In step Ss2601, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is triggered by a big win. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON.

In step Ss2601, when it is determined that the trigger of the opening/closing execution mode this time is the jackpot winning (Ss2601: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss2602.

In step Ss2602, 3000 (approximately 6.0 sec) is set in the third timer counter area T3 as the opening time. After that, the opening time setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Ss2601, if it is determined that the current opening/closing execution mode is not a big hit, that is, if it is determined that the current opening/closing execution mode is a small hit (Ss2601: NO), step Proceed to Ss2603.

In step Ss2603, 0 (0 sec) is set in the third timer counter area T3 as the opening time. After that, the opening time setting process is terminated.

<Processing when the opening period flag is ON>
Next, the processing when the opening period flag is ON will be described. The opening period flag ON time process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (Fig. 370: Ss2418).

FIG. 373 is a flowchart showing processing when the opening period flag is ON. In step Ss2701, it is determined whether or not the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the third timer counter area T3 set in the opening time setting process is "0". If it is determined in step Ss2701 that the opening period has ended (Ss2701: YES), the process advances to step Ss2702 to turn off the opening period flag. After that, the process proceeds to step Ss2703.

In step Ss2703, round display start processing is executed to notify the type of the current open/close execution mode. Specifically, the big hit type is displayed on the round display section 39 . After executing step Ss2703, the process proceeds to step Ss2704.

In step Ss2704, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned ON. After that, the processing when the opening period flag is ON ends.

If it is determined in step Ss2701 that the opening period has not ended (Ss2701: NO), this opening period flag ON processing ends.

<Processing when opening/closing processing period flag is ON>
Next, the processing when the opening/closing processing period flag is ON will be described. The open/close process period flag ON time process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (Fig. 370: Ss2419).

FIG. 374 is a flowchart showing the process when the open/close process period flag is ON. In step Ss2801, a big winning opening opening/closing process is executed. The special prize opening opening/closing process will be described later. After executing step Ss2801, the process proceeds to step Ss2802.

In step Ss2802, it is determined whether or not the large winning opening opening/closing process has been completed. If it is determined that the large winning opening opening/closing process has been completed (Ss2802: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss2803. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Ss2802 that the big winning opening opening/closing process has not ended (Ss2802: NO), the main opening/closing process period flag ON time process ends.

In step Ss2803, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned off, and then the process proceeds to step Ss2804.

In step Ss2804, round display end processing is executed. In this process, the display control of the round display portion 39 in the main display portion 45 is terminated so that the round display portion 39 is turned off. After executing step Ss2404, the process proceeds to step Ss2805.

In step Ss2805, ending time setting processing is executed. The ending time setting process is a process of setting the length of time of the ending period (hereinafter also referred to as ending time) in the open/close execution mode. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the fourth timer counter area T4 as the ending time. After executing step Ss2805, the process proceeds to step Ss2806.

In step Ss2806, an ending command is set. The set ending command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 at step Ss0402 in the normal process (FIG. 350). Upon receiving the ending command, the sound emission control device 90 starts an effect corresponding to the ending period. After executing step Ss2806, the process proceeds to step Ss2807.

In step Ss2807, the ending period flag is turned ON. After that, the main opening/closing processing period flag ON time processing ends.

<Opening and closing processing of the grand prize opening>
Next, the big winning opening opening/closing process will be described. The big winning opening opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the opening/closing process period flag ON time process (Fig. 374: Ss2801).

FIG. 375 is a flow chart showing the big winning opening opening/closing process. In step Ss2901, it is determined whether or not the door 36b is open. If it is determined in step Ss2901 that the door 36b is not open (Ss2901: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss2902.

In step Ss2902, it is determined whether or not the conditions for opening the door 36b are satisfied. Specifically, the opening/closing scenario set by the opening/closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether or not it is time to open the opening/closing door 36b. If it is determined in step Ss2902 that the condition for opening the door 36b is met (Ss2902: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss2903.

In step Ss2903, the opening/closing door 36b is opened. After that, the process proceeds to step Ss2904.

In step Ss2904, a door opening command is set. The opening/closing door open command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the opening/closing door 36b has been opened. The open/close door open command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 350: Ss0402) of the normal process. After executing step Ss2904, the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated.

In step Ss2902, when it is determined that the condition for opening the opening/closing door 36b is not established (Ss2902: NO), the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Ss2901 that the door 36b is open (Ss2901: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss2905.

In step Ss2905, it is determined whether or not the condition for closing the door 36b is met. The closing condition of the opening/closing door 36b is that the continuous opening time of the opening/closing door 36b set in the opening/closing scenario has elapsed, or that a predetermined number of game balls have entered the big winning opening 36a. holds when If it is determined in step Ss2905 that the condition for closing the door 36b is satisfied (Ss2905: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss2906.

In step Ss2906, the opening/closing door 36b is closed. After that, the process proceeds to step Ss2907.

In step Ss2907, an opening/closing door closing command is set. The open/close door closing command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the open/close door 36b is closed. The open/close door closing command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 350: Ss0402) of the normal process. After executing step Ss2907, the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated.

In step Ss2905, when it is determined that the closing condition of the opening/closing door 36b is not satisfied (Ss2905: NO), the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated.

<Processing when the ending period flag is ON>
Next, the processing when the ending period flag is ON will be described. The ending period flag ON time process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (Fig. 370: Ss2420).

FIG. 376 is a flow chart showing processing when the ending period flag is ON. In step Ss3001, it is determined whether or not the ending period has ended. Specifically, in the ending time setting process (Ss2805), it is determined whether or not the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0". If it is determined in step Ss2805 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0" (Ss3001: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss3002.

In step Ss3002, the ending period flag is turned off. Thereafter, the process advances to step Ss3003 to execute transition processing at the end of the ending period. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes of game rounds after the end of the current ending period. Details of the transition processing at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing step Ss3003, the process advances to step Ss3004 to turn off the opening/closing execution mode flag. After that, the process advances to step Ss3005 to set an opening/closing execution mode end command. The opening/closing execution mode end command is a command for notifying the sound emission control device 90 that the opening/closing execution mode has ended. The open/close execution mode end command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 at step Ss0402 in the normal process (FIG. 350). After that, the process when the ending period flag is ON ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss3001 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is not "0" (Ss3001: NO), this ending period flag ON time processing is terminated.

<Transition processing at the end of the ending period>
Next, transition processing at the end of the ending period will be described. The transition process at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the ending period flag ON process (Fig. 376: Ss3003).

FIG. 377 is a flow chart showing transition processing at the end of the ending period. In step Ss3101, it is determined whether or not the trigger for shifting to the opening/closing execution mode this time is a jackpot. Specifically, when any one of the jackpot type flags stored in the RAM 64 is ON, it is determined that the trigger for shifting to the opening/closing execution mode this time is a jackpot.

In step Ss3101, when it is determined that the current trigger for switching to the opening/closing execution mode is a jackpot (Ss3101: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss3102, where the current trigger for switching to the opening/closing execution mode is a probability variable jackpot. Determine whether or not Specifically, when the variable probability jackpot flag stored in the RAM 64 is ON, it is determined that the timing of shifting to the opening/closing execution mode this time is the variable probability jackpot.

In step Ss3102, when it is determined that the trigger for switching to the opening/closing execution mode this time is the probability variable jackpot (Ss3102: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss3103. On the other hand, in step Ss3102, when it is determined that the timing of the shift to the opening/closing execution mode this time is not the probability variable jackpot (Ss3102: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss3112.

In step Ss3103, the corresponding probability variable jackpot flag is turned OFF. Specifically, out of the 10R probability variable jackpot flag and the 2R probability variable flag, the flag that is ON is turned OFF. After executing step Ss3103, the process proceeds to step Ss3104.

At step Ss3104, the high probability mode flag stored in the RAM 64 is turned ON. As a result, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the win/fail lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode. After executing step Ss3104, the process proceeds to step Ss3105.

At step Ss3105, the high-probability mode command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. FIG. The high-probability mode command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the win-or-fail lottery mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the high-probability mode. After executing step Ss3105, the process proceeds to step Ss3106.

In step Ss3106, the high frequency support mode flag is turned ON. After that, the process proceeds to step Ss3107, and 50 is set as the counter value in the number-of-games counter PNC. After executing step Ss3107, the process proceeds to step Ss3108.

In step Ss3108, a high frequency support mode command is set. The high-frequency support mode command is a command for notifying the sound emission control device 90 that the support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency support mode. The high frequency support mode command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 at step Ss0402 in the normal process (FIG. 350). After that, the transition processing at the end of this ending period is ended.

In step Ss3102, when it is determined that the timing of the shift to the opening/closing execution mode this time is not the probability variable jackpot (Ss3102: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss3109, and the corresponding normal jackpot flag is turned OFF. After executing step Ss3109, the process proceeds to step Ss3110.

In step Ss3110, the low-probability mode command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. FIG. The low-probability mode command is a command that includes information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the win-or-fail lottery mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the low-probability mode. After executing step Ss3110, the process proceeds to step Ss3111.

In step Ss3111, the high frequency support mode flag is turned ON. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Ss3112, and 50 is set as the counter value in the number-of-games counter PNC. After executing step Ss3112, the process proceeds to step Ss3113.

In step Ss3113, a high frequency support mode command is set. The high-frequency support mode command is a command for notifying the sound emission control device 90 that the support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency support mode. The high frequency support mode command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 at step Ss0402 in the normal process (FIG. 350). After that, the transition processing at the end of this ending period is ended.

In step Ss3101, when it is determined that the timing of shifting to the opening/closing execution mode this time is not a big hit (Ss3101: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss3114. In step Ss3114, it is determined whether or not the trigger for shifting to the opening/closing execution mode this time is a normal small win. Specifically, when the normal small win stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON, it is determined that the occasion for shifting to the opening/closing execution mode this time is the normal small win.

In step Ss3114, when it is determined that the trigger for shifting to the opening/closing execution mode this time is the normal small hit (Ss3114: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss3115, and the normal small hit flag is turned OFF. After executing step Ss3115, the transition processing at the end of the ending period ends.

On the other hand, in step Ss3114, when it is determined that the opportunity to shift to the opening and closing execution mode this time is not a normal small hit (Ss3114: NO), that is, the opportunity to shift to the opening and closing execution mode this time is a special small hit. goes to step Ss3116 and turns off the special small hit flag. After executing step Ss3116, the transition processing at the end of the ending period ends.

<Electronic support processing>
Next, the processing for electric support will be described. The electric service support process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (Fig. 350: Ss0407).

FIG. 378 is a flowchart showing processing for electric support. In step Ss3201, it is determined whether or not support is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the supported flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The supporting flag is a flag that is turned ON when the electric accessory 44a of the right first starting port 44 is opened and turned OFF when returning to the closed state. If it is determined in step Ss3201 that the supported flag is not ON (Ss3201: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss3202.

In step Ss3202, it is determined whether or not the support winning flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The support winning flag is turned ON when the electric accessary product open lottery for determining whether or not to open the electric accessary product 44a is won in the open state, and is turned OFF when the supporting flag is ON. is. If it is determined in step Ss3202 that the support winning flag is not ON (Ss3202: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss3203.

In step Ss3203, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, every 2 msec.

If it is determined in step Ss3203 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Ss3203: NO), the electronic support process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Ss3203: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss3204.

In step Ss3204, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the variable display of symbols in the general pattern unit 38 . If it is determined in step Ss3204 that it is time to end the variable display (Ss3204: YES), the process advances to step Ss3205 to set the off display, and then ends the electronic support process. By setting the deviation display, the variable display of the symbols in the general pattern unit 38 is terminated while the deviation display is stopped. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss3204 that it is not the end timing of the variable display (Ss3204: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss3206.

In step Ss3206, it is determined whether or not the value of the reserved accessory number SN is greater than "0". In step Ss3206, if it is determined that the value of the reserved accessory number SN is "0" (Ss3206: NO), the electronic support process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Ss3206 that the value of the reserved accessory number SN is larger than "0" (Ss3206: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss3207.

In step Ss3207, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is on, and then the process proceeds to step Ss3208 to determine whether or not the high frequency support mode is on. If it is not the opening/closing execution mode in step Ss3207 (Ss3207: NO) and if it is in the high-frequency support mode in step Ss3208 (Ss3208: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss3209 to perform the electric accessory opening lottery. Specifically, the value stored in the electric role holding area 64d is shifted, and when the value of the electric role item opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric role item opening lottery be elected. Also, at the same time as the electric accessory open lottery, the second timer counter area T2 is set to "5" (that is, 0.01 sec). The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started. After that, the process proceeds to step Ss3210.

In step Ss3210, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory open lottery in step Ss3209 is support winning. In step Ss3210, if it is determined that the result of the electric accessory open lottery is support winning (Ss3210: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss3211, the support winning flag is turned ON, and provided in various counter areas 64f of RAM 64 "1" is set in the second round counter area RC2. The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the electric accessory 44a is released. After that, the electronic support process is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Ss3210, when it is determined that the result of the electric accessory open lottery is not support winning (Ss3210: NO), the process for this electric role support ends without executing the process of step Ss3211.

If it is determined in step Ss3207 that it is in the opening/closing execution mode (Ss3207: YES), or if it is determined in step Ss3208 that it is not in the high-frequency support mode (Ss3208: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss3212, and the electric accessory open lottery I do. Specifically, the value stored in the electric role holding area 64d is shifted, and when the value of the electric role item opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric role item opening lottery be elected. In addition, at the same time as the electric accessory release lottery, "14750" (that is, 29.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. After that, the process proceeds to step Ss3213.

In step Ss3213, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory open lottery in step Ss3212 is support winning. In step Ss3213, if it is determined that the support has not been won (Ss3213: NO), the electronic support process is terminated. On the other hand, in step Ss3213, if it is determined that the support winning is determined (Ss3213: YES), the process advances to step Ss3214 to turn on the support winning flag and set "1" to the second round counter area RC2. , terminates the electronic support process.

If it is determined in step Ss3202 that the support winning flag is ON (Ss3202: YES), the process advances to step Ss3215 to determine whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38. In step Ss3215, when it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Ss3215: NO), since the pattern is being changed and displayed in the universal figure unit 38, the main electric role supporting process is performed as it is. exit. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss3215 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Ss3215: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss3216.

In step Ss3216, a win display is set. As a result, the variation display of the pattern in the normal pattern unit 38 is terminated while the win display is stopped. After that, the process advances to step Ss3217 to turn on the supporting flag and turn off the support winning flag. After that, the electronic support process is terminated.

In step Ss3201, when it is determined that the support flag is ON (Ss3201: YES), the process advances to step Ss3218 to execute electric opening/closing processing for opening/closing control of the electric accessory 44a. After that, the electronic support process is terminated.

<Electrical opening and closing process>
Next, the electrical opening/closing process will be described. The electrical opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the electrical support process (Fig. 378: Ss3218).

FIG. 379 is a flow chart showing the electrical opening/closing process. In step Ss3301, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 44a is open. Whether or not the electric accessory 44a is being opened is determined by whether or not the electric accessory drive unit 44b is in a driving state. When it is determined that the electric accessory 44a is open (Ss3301: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss3302.

In step Ss3302, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the open duration time of the electric accessory 44a. If it is determined in step Ss3302 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Ss3302: NO), the main electric opening/closing process is terminated. In other words, when the open duration time of the electric accessory 44a has not ended, the present electric opening/closing process is terminated.

In step Ss3302, when it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Ss3302: YES), the process advances to step Ss3303 to perform closing processing for controlling the electric accessory 44a to be closed, "5" (that is, 0.01 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as a means for measuring the open duration time of the electric accessory 44a is "0", the electric accessory 44a is closed, and the second timer counter area T2 is electrically operated this time. It is used as a parameter for measuring the closed duration time of the accessory 44a, and "250" is set in the second timer counter area T2. After executing step Ss3303, the process proceeds to step Ss3304.

In step Ss3304, after subtracting 1 from the value of the second round counter area RC2, the process advances to step Ss3305 to determine whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0". If it is determined in step Ss3305 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (Ss3305: NO), the main electric opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss3305 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0" (Ss3305: YES), the process advances to step Ss3306 to turn off the supported flag. After that, the main electrical opening/closing process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Ss3301 that the electric accessory 44a is not open (Ss3301: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss3307 to determine whether or not the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closed duration time of the electric accessory 44a. If it is determined in step Ss3307 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Ss3307: NO), the electric opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss3307 that the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Ss3307: YES), the process advances to step Ss3308 to execute opening processing for controlling the electric accessary 44a to the open state. . After that, the process proceeds to step Ss3309.

In step Ss3309, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. If it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress (Ss3309: NO), the process advances to step Ss3310 to determine whether or not the high-frequency support mode is in effect. do.

If it is determined in step Ss3310 that the high frequency support mode is in effect (Ss3310: YES), the process advances to step Ss3311 to set "250" (that is, 0.5 sec) in the second timer counter area T2. After that, the main electrical opening/closing process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss3309 that the opening/closing execution mode is set (Ss3309: YES), or if it is determined that the high-frequency support mode is not set in step Ss3310 (Ss3310: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss3312. "100" (that is, 0.2 sec) is set in the timer counter area T2. After that, the main electrical opening/closing process is terminated.

<Game ball distribution control processing>
Next, game ball distribution control processing will be described. The game ball distribution control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (Fig. 350: Ss0408).

FIG. 380 is a flow chart showing game ball distribution control processing. In step Ss3401, it is determined whether or not the value of the fifth timer counter area T5 provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64 is "0". The fifth timer counter area T5 is used as a parameter for switching the sorting piece portion 242 of the game ball sorting device 240 between the first position Q1 and the second position Q2. By determining whether or not the value of the fifth timer counter area T5 is "0", it is determined whether or not it is time to switch the distribution piece 242 from the first position Q1 to the second position Q2. can be done. The count value set in the fifth timer counter area T5 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, every 2 msec.

If it is determined in step Ss3401 that the value of the fifth timer counter area T5 is "0" (Ss3401: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss3402.

In step Ss3402, the game ball distribution driving section 241a (FIG. 337) is driven and controlled to switch the distribution piece section 242 from the first position Q1 to the second position Q2. After that, the game ball distribution control process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss3401 that the value of the fifth timer counter area T5 is not "0" (Ss3401: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss3403.

In step Ss3403, it is determined whether or not the value of the fifth timer counter area T5 provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64 is "-50". A value of "50" corresponds to approximately 0.1 sec.

If it is determined in step Ss3403 that the value of the fifth timer counter area T5 is "-50" (Ss3403: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss3404.

In step Ss3404, the game ball distribution driving section 241a (FIG. 337) is driven and controlled to switch the distribution piece section 242 from the second position Q2 to the first position Q1. As a result, the distribution piece 242 is at the second position Q2 for a period of about 0.1 seconds from when the value of the fifth timer counter area T5 becomes "0" until it becomes "-50". state will be retained. After executing step Ss3403, the process proceeds to step Ss3405.

In step Ss3405, 1000 (approximately 2.0 sec) is set in the fifth timer counter area T5. By setting about 2.0 seconds as an initial value in the fifth timer counter area T5, the sorting piece 242 is held at the first position Q1 for about 2.0 seconds. After executing step Ss3405, this game ball distribution control process is terminated.

In step Ss3403, when it is determined that the value of the fifth timer counter area T5 is not "-50" (Ss3403: NO), this game ball distribution control process is terminated.

<<8-6>> Various processes executed in the sound emission control device and the display control device:
Next, a specific example of control executed in the audio emission control device and the display control device will be described. The processing executed in the sound emission control device 90 will be described first, and then the processing executed in the display control device 100 will be described.

<Various processing executed in the sound emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, timer interrupt processing executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 will be described.

FIG. 381 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the sound and light side MPU 92. FIG. Timer interrupt processing is repeatedly executed at a relatively short period (for example, 2 msec). Processing of each step executed in timer interrupt processing will be described below.

In step Ss3501, command storage processing is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing the received command in the sound and light side RAM 94 when a command is received from the main side MPU 62 . The sound and light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer for enabling storage and reading of commands received from the main side MPU 62, and the commands received from the main side MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer. , are read out sequentially according to the order in which they are stored. After executing step Ss3501, the process proceeds to step Ss3502.

In step Ss3502, pending command handling processing is executed. In pending command processing, processing corresponding to the pending command among the commands stored in step Ss3501 is performed. Details of the pending command handling process will be described later. After executing step Ss3502, the process proceeds to step Ss3503.

In step Ss3503, a game round effect setting process is executed. In the game round effect setting process, the effect to be executed in the game round from the start of the symbol variation to the stop is set. Details of the game round effect setting process will be described later. After executing step Ss3503, the process proceeds to step Ss3504.

In step Ss3504, processing for opening/closing execution mode effect is executed. In the opening/closing execution mode effect processing, processing related to effects during the opening period, effects during the big winning opening opening/closing process period, and effects during the ending period is performed. After executing step Ss3504, the process proceeds to step Ss3505.

In step Ss3505, background effect processing is executed. In the background rendering process, a process of displaying on the pattern display device 41 a background moving image determined according to a command indicating the game state received from the main MPU 62 is performed. For example, a background video indicating that the high-frequency support mode is continuing, a background video indicating that the high-frequency support mode has ended, and a background video indicating that the high-probability mode is continuing are displayed. . After executing step Ss3505, the process proceeds to step Ss3506.

In step Ss3506, a fall rendering process is executed. In the fall effect processing, a process of displaying on the symbol display device 41 a effect image (moving image) determined according to the fall command received from the main MPU 62 is performed. Specifically, when the lottery mode is the high-probability mode and the support mode is the high-frequency support mode (that is, during the high-probability-high support state), it is determined whether or not a fall command has been received from the main MPU 62. When it is determined that the received signal has been received, a process for displaying an effect image that can indicate that the player is in a disadvantageous state is performed on the symbol display device 41.例文帳に追加The player recognizes that the lottery mode has shifted from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode by visually recognizing the performance image displayed on the pattern display device 41, which can indicate that the player is in a disadvantageous state. be able to. In this embodiment, since the first branch passage portion 220 and the second branch passage portion 230 provided in the starting port unit 200 are formed of a transparent resin material, the second route RT2 (see FIG. 334) in the starting port unit 200 ), the player can recognize that the lottery mode has changed from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode by the flow of the game balls along the path Ss3506. Since it can also be recognized by the effect image displayed, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game. After executing step Ss3506, the process proceeds to step Ss3507.

In step Ss3507, an invincible zone entry effect process is executed. In the invincible zone entry effect processing, a process of causing the pattern display device 41 to display an effect image (moving image) determined according to the invincible zone command received from the main MPU 62 is performed. By visually recognizing the effect image determined according to the invincible zone command displayed on the pattern display device 41, the player recognizes that the high-probability high support state has shifted to the high-probability low support state (invincible zone). can be done. In the present embodiment, the main line passage portion 210, the first branch passage portion 220, and the second branch passage portion 230 provided in the starting port unit 200 are made of a transparent resin material. The player can recognize that the high-probability high support state has shifted to the high-probability low support state (invincible zone) by the flow of the game ball along the 3 route RT3 (Fig. 335), but the processing of step Ss3507. According to this, since it can be recognized by the effect image displayed on the pattern display device 41, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game. After executing step Ss3507, the process proceeds to step Ss3508.

In step Ss3508, other processing is executed. Other processing includes processing for displaying a demonstration image (moving image) on the symbol display device 41 when the player is not playing a game. After executing step Ss3508, the process proceeds to step Ss3509.

In step Ss3509, light emission control processing for controlling light emission of various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, light emission control of various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read out in each of the effect processes described above. After executing step Ss3509, the process proceeds to step Ss3510.

In step Ss3510, an audio output control process for controlling the audio output of the speaker 46 is executed. In the audio output control process, audio output control of the speaker 46 is performed based on the audio data read out in the BGM process and each effect process. After executing step Ss3510, the timer interrupt process is terminated.

<Processing for pending command>
Next, pending command handling processing will be described. The hold command handling process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 381: Ss3502).

FIG. 382 is a flowchart showing pending command handling processing. In step Ss3601, it is determined whether or not a pending command has been received from the main MPU62. If it is determined in step Ss3601 that a hold command has been received from the main MPU 62 (Ss3601: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss3602.

In step Ss3602, the pending command received this time is read, and pending information is read from the pending command. The reservation information includes information on whether or not there is a jackpot, the type of jackpot, whether or not there is reach, and variation time. Then, the hold information read out is stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 . As for the hold information, information for a maximum of four pieces, which is the number of reserved first starting ports 33, and information for a maximum of four pieces, which is the number of reserved second starting ports 34, are updated and stored. After executing step Ss3602, the process proceeds to step Ss3603.

In step Ss3603, update processing at the time of ball entry is executed. In the updating process at the time of ball entry, the number of pieces of pending information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33, the number of pieces of holding information acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 34, Processing is executed so that the sound and light side MPU 92 can specify the total number of these pieces of hold information. The details of the updating process at the time of ball entry in step Ss3603 will be described later. Hereinafter, the number of holding information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 is also referred to as "first holding number", and the holding information acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 34 The number is also called the "second reserved number", and the total number of the first reserved number and the second reserved number is also called the "total reserved number". After executing step Ss3603, the process proceeds to step Ss3604.

In step Ss3604, pending display control processing is executed. Specifically, in correspondence with the first reserved number and the second reserved number specified in step Ss3603, the display in the first starting opening reservation area Ds1 and the second starting opening reservation area Ds2 (the reservation display icon is A command for changing the display of how many pieces are arranged is sent to the display control device 100 . The display control device 100, which has received the command, causes the display in the first start opening reservation region Ds1 and the second start opening reservation region Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the first reservation number and the second reservation number. change. Specifically, the display control device 100, which has received the command, defines the display positions of the icons of the pending display in the first start gate pending region Ds1, and displays the number of icons corresponding to the first pending number. display in position. In addition, the display control device 100 defines the display positions of the icons of the pending display in the second starting point pending region Ds2, and displays the icons corresponding to the second pending number at the display positions. After executing step Ss3604, the pending command handling process ends.

<Update process at the time of ball entry>
Next, update processing at the time of ball entry will be described. The updating process at the time of ball entry is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the hold command handling process (FIG. 382: Ss3603).

FIG. 383 is a flowchart showing update processing at the time of ball entry. In step Ss3701, it is determined whether or not the pending command read this time was transmitted based on the ball entering the first starting port 33. In step Ss3701, if it is determined that the pending command read this time was transmitted based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 (Ss3701: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss3702, and the sound The update processing of the first reserved number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the light-side RAM 94 is executed. The first reservation number counter area is a counter area for specifying the number of pieces of reservation information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting hole 33 in the sound and light side MPU 92 . In the process of updating the first pending number counter area, the information in the first pending number counter area is updated to the pending number information included in the pending command read this time. After executing step Ss3702, the process proceeds to step Ss3704.

In step Ss3701, if it is determined that the pending command read this time was not transmitted based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 (Ss3701: NO), that is, the pending command is the second starting If it is determined that the transmission is based on the ball entering the mouth 34, the process advances to step Ss3703 to update the second pending number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound and light side RAM 94. Execute. The second pending number counter area is a counter area for specifying, in the sound and light side MPU 92 , the number of pieces of pending information acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 34 . In the process of updating the second reserved number counter area, the information in the second reserved number counter area is updated to the information of the reserved number included in the command read this time. After executing step Ss3703, the process proceeds to step Ss3704.

The reason why steps Ss3702 and Ss3703 are processed as described above will be described. In this embodiment, while the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, backup power is supplied to the RAM 64 of the main control device 60, while backup power is supplied to the RAM 94 of the sound emission control device 90. not. Therefore, when the power is cut off in a situation where the hold information related to the ball entering the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34 is stored in the RAM 64 of the main controller 60, the main controller 60 is stored in memory, whereas the sound emission control device 90 recognizes that there are 0 pieces of hold information. In this case, if a configuration is adopted in which the first pending number counter area or the second pending number counter area is counted up each time a pending command is received in the sound emission control device 90, the main controller 60 actually stores the pending memory. Inconvenience may occur in that the number of on-hold information received does not match the number of on-hold information grasped by the sound emission control device 90 . On the other hand, as in the above-described embodiment, the main controller 60 transmits a hold command including information on the number of holds, and the sound emission control device 90 responds to the hold command each time it receives the hold command. By adopting a configuration in which information on the contained number of reserved items is set in the first reserved number counter area or the second reserved number counter area, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above inconveniences.

In step Ss3704, update processing of the total pending number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound and light side RAM 94 is executed. The total pending number counter area is the sum of the number of pending information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 and the number of pending information acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 34. This is a counter area for specifying in the sound and light side MPU 92 . In the update process, the information of the total pending number counter area is the sum of the information of the pending number measured in the first pending number counter area and the information of the pending number measured in the second pending number counter area. update to After executing step Sp3704, the update process at the time of the main ball entry is terminated.

<Game round effect setting processing>
Next, the game round effect setting process will be described. The game round effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 381: Ss3503).

FIG. 384 is a flow chart showing game round effect setting processing. In step Ss3801, it is determined whether or not a high-probability mode command has been received from the main MPU62.

In step Ss3801, if it is determined that the high-probability mode command has been received from the main MPU 62 (Ss3801: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss3802. The side high probability mode flag is turned ON.

If it is determined in step Ss3801 that the high-probability mode command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (Ss3801: NO), the process advances to step Ss3803 to determine whether or not the low-probability mode command has been received from the main MPU 62. judge.

If it is determined in step Ss3803 that the low-probability mode command has been received from the main MPU 62 (Ss3803: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss3804. The side high probability mode flag is turned off.

If it is determined in step Ss3803 that the low-probability mode command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (Ss3803: NO), the process proceeds directly to step Ss3805. Also, after executing step Ss3802 or after executing step Ss3804, the process advances to step Ss3805.

In step Ss3805, it is determined whether or not a high-frequency support mode command has been received from the main MPU 62.

In step Ss3805, if it is determined that the high-frequency support mode command has been received from the main MPU 62 (Ss3805: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss3806, and the sounds stored in the various flag storage areas 94a of the sound and light side RAM 94 The light side high frequency support mode flag is turned ON.

If it is determined in step Ss3805 that the high frequency support mode command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (Ss3805: NO), the process advances to step Ss3807 to determine whether the low frequency support mode command has been received from the main MPU 62. determine whether

In step Ss3807, if it is determined that the low-frequency support mode command has been received from the main MPU 62 (Ss3807: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss3808, and the sounds stored in the various flag storage areas 94a of the sound and light side RAM 94 The light side high frequency support mode flag is turned off.

If it is determined in step Ss3807 that the low-frequency support mode command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (Ss3807: NO), the process proceeds directly to step Ss3809. Also, after executing step Ss3806 or after executing step Ss3808, the process advances to step Ss3809.

In step Ss3809, display mode switching processing is executed. The display mode switching process is a process of switching the area for displaying the first decorative symbols corresponding to the first starting game round and the second decorative symbols corresponding to the second starting opening game round. Specifically, the first decorative design is displayed in the main display area MA and the second decorative design is displayed in the sub-display area SA, and the second decorative design is displayed in the main display area MA and the sub-display area SA is displayed. , a process for switching between displaying the first decorative pattern is executed. The details of the display mode switching process will be described later. After executing step Ss3809, the process proceeds to step Ss3810.

In step Ss3810, special 1 game round effect processing is executed. The special 1 game round effect processing is a process of setting and executing an effect corresponding to the first start opening game round. The details of the special 1 game round effect processing will be described later. After executing step Ss3810, the process advances to step Ss3811.

In step Ss3811, special 2 game round effect processing is executed. The special 2 game round effect processing is a process of setting and executing an effect corresponding to the second start opening game round. The details of the special 2 game round effect processing will be described later. After executing step Ss3811, this game round effect setting process is terminated.

<Display Mode Switching Processing>
Next, display mode switching processing will be described. The display mode switching process is executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 384: Ss3809) of the game cycle effect setting process.

FIG. 385 is a flowchart showing display mode switching processing. In step Ss3901, it is determined whether or not the sound and light side high probability mode flag stored in the various flag storage area 94a is ON.

If it is determined in step Ss3901 that the sound and light side high probability mode flag is ON (Ss3901: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss3902, and the sound and light side high frequency support mode flag stored in the various flag storage area 94a is set. It is determined whether or not it is ON.

If it is determined in step Ss3902 that the sound and light side high frequency support mode flag is not ON (Ss3902: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss3903.

In step Ss3903, a special 2 main display command is transmitted to the display control device 100. FIG. The display control device 100 that has received the special 2 main display command controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 41 to display the second decoration pattern corresponding to the game round for the second start opening in the main display area MA of the liquid crystal display device 41. , and the first decoration pattern corresponding to the first starting game round is displayed in the sub display area SA of the liquid crystal display device 41.例文帳に追加That is, in a high probability low support state (invincible zone) in which the lottery mode is a high probability mode and the support mode is a low frequency support mode, the second decoration pattern is displayed in the main display area MA of the liquid crystal display device 41, A first decorative pattern is displayed in the sub-display area SA of the liquid crystal display device 41 .

If it is determined in step Ss3901 that the sound/light-side high-probability mode flag is not ON (Ss3901: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss3904. If it is determined in step Ss3902 that the sound and light side high-frequency support mode flag is ON (Ss3902: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss3904.

In step Ss3904, a special 1 main display command is transmitted to the display control device 100. FIG. The display control device 100 that has received the special 1 main display command controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 41 to display the first decoration pattern corresponding to the game round for the first start opening in the main display area MA of the liquid crystal display device 41. , and a second decorative pattern corresponding to the second starting game round is displayed in the sub display area SA of the liquid crystal display device 41.例文帳に追加That is, the lottery mode is a low probability mode, the support mode is a low frequency support mode, the low probability low support state, the lottery mode is a low probability mode, and the support mode is a high frequency support mode. And, in each of the high-probability and high-support states in which the lottery mode is the high-probability mode and the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the first decoration pattern is displayed in the main display area MA of the liquid crystal display device 41, and the liquid crystal display is performed. A second decorative pattern is displayed in the sub-display area SA of the device 41 .

After executing step Ss3903 or after executing step Ss3904, the display mode switching process ends.

<Special 1 game turn effect setting process>
Next, the special 1 game round effect setting process will be described. The special 1 game round effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 384: Ss3810) of the game round effect setting process.

FIG. 386 is a flowchart showing special 1 game round effect setting processing. In step Ss4001, it is determined whether or not the first variation command and the first type command have been received from the main MPU 62. When it is determined in step Ss4001 that at least one of the first variation command and the first type command has not been received (Ss4001: NO), the special 1 game round effect setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss4001 that the first variation command and the first type command have been received (Ss4001: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss4002.

In step Ss4002, the command for the first variation received this time is read, and from the command, the presence or absence of the big hit, the type of the big win, the presence or absence of the special small win, the presence or absence of the reach occurrence, and the information of the variation time are read. Then, the read information is stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 . After that, the process proceeds to step Ss4003.

In step Ss4003, a first effect pattern setting process for setting a pattern of effects to be executed in a game cycle such as a big win, a small win, or a ready-to-win game is executed. Details of the first effect pattern setting process will be described later. After executing step Ss4003, the process proceeds to step Ss4004.

In step Ss4004, stop symbol setting processing is executed. In the stop symbol setting process, if the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a 16R probability variable jackpot, an 8R probability variable jackpot, or an 8R normal jackpot, the same pattern is displayed on the activated line L of the pattern display device 41. The information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination is established is set as the information of the stop symbol of this time. Specifically, when the result of the winning lottery of the current game round is the 16R probability variable jackpot or the 8R probability variable jackpot, the same combination of odd-numbered symbols can be selected as the same combination of symbols, and the same Even symbol combinations may be selected. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the selection rate is the same for the combination of the same odd-numbered symbols and the combination of the same even-numbered symbols. A configuration in which the ratio is high may be adopted, and the latter may be configured to have a higher selection ratio than the former. Also, the combination of "7" symbols is selected only in the case of a 16R probability variable jackpot. In addition, when the result of the winning lottery in the current game round is the 8R normal jackpot, the same combination of even-numbered symbols is selected as the same combination of symbols.

If the result of the winning lottery in the current game round is a losing result, it is determined whether or not the ready-to-win is generated from the content of the command for variation. When it is determined that it corresponds to the occurrence of ready-to-win, it corresponds to the stop result that the combination of the same symbols on the effective line L does not materialize and the combination of the ready-to-win symbols on the effective line L does. information is determined as the information of the result of this stop. On the other hand, when it is determined that it does not correspond to the occurrence of ready-to-win, the result is a stop result in which the combination of the same symbols on the effective line L does not materialize and the combination of the ready-to-win symbols on the effective line L does not materialize. The corresponding information is set as the information of the current stop symbol. After executing step Ss4004, the process proceeds to step Ss4005.

In step Ss4005, a process for setting a variation display pattern (hereinafter referred to as a first variation display pattern) for the current first starting game cycle is executed. In this process, information on the variation time of the current first start opening game cycle is specified from the content of the first variation command received this time, and the information on the variation time and the information set in step Ss4004 are specified. A first variable display pattern corresponding to a combination of stop symbol information is selected. When selecting the first variation display pattern, the first variation display pattern table stored in the variation display pattern table storage area 93b (FIG. 344) of the sound and light side ROM 93 is referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step Ss4006.

In step Ss4006, the information of the first effect pattern, the stop symbol, and the first variable display pattern set in the game round for the first starting opening this time is set in the effect command. After that, the process advances to step Ss4007 to transmit the effect command to the display side MPU 102 . The display-side MPU 102 executes processing for displaying the effect contents corresponding to the received effect command on the pattern display device 41 . After executing step Ss4007, the process proceeds to step Ss4008.

In step Ss4008, update processing of pending information is executed. In the pending information update process, the information in the first pending number counter area is updated so that the first pending number stored in the first pending number counter area of the sound and light side RAM 94 is decremented by one. After executing step Ss4008, the process proceeds to step Ss4009.

In step Ss4009, pending display control processing is executed. The pending display control process is similar to the pending display control process executed in step Ss3604 of the pending command handling process (FIG. 382). Specifically, a command for changing the display (display of how many pending display icons are arranged) in the first starting point holding area Ds1 corresponding to the first pending number specified in step Ss4008 is It transmits to the display control device 100 . The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first start opening reservation region Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 so as to correspond to the first reservation number. After executing step Ss4009, the special 1 game round effect setting process is terminated.

<First effect pattern setting process>
Next, the first effect pattern setting process will be explained. The first effect pattern setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the special 1 game round effect setting process (FIG. 386: Ss4003).

FIG. 387 is a flow chart showing the first effect pattern setting process. In step Ss4101, it is determined whether or not the sound and light side high probability mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step Ss4101 that the sound/light-side high-probability mode flag is not ON (Ss4101: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss4102.

In step Ss4102, it is determined whether or not the sound and light side high frequency support mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step Ss4102 that the sound and light side high frequency support mode flag is not ON (Ss4102: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss4103.

In step Ss4103, a low-probability low support state production pattern setting process for the first start opening is executed. The low-probability low-support state performance pattern setting process for the first starting port is performed when the game cycle for the first starting port is executed when the lottery mode is the low-probability mode and the support mode is the low-frequency support mode. 2, it is a process of setting the effect pattern of the game round for the first start opening. Specifically, in the low-probability-low support state (state H1) in FIG. 345, when the game round for the first start opening is executed, the process of setting the effect pattern of the game round for the first opening opening. is. The details of the effect pattern setting process at the time of the low probability low support state for the first start port will be described later. After executing step Ss4103, the first effect pattern setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss4102 that the sound and light side high frequency support mode flag is ON (Ss4102: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss4104.

In step Ss4104, a low probability high support state effect pattern setting process for the first starting opening is executed. The effect pattern setting process for the first starting port at the time of the low probability high support state is performed when the game round for the first starting port is executed when the lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode. 2, it is a process of setting the effect pattern of the game round for the first start opening. Specifically, when the low probability high support state (state H3) shown in FIG. is. The details of the effect pattern setting process at the time of the low probability high support state for the first starting port will be described later. After executing step Ss4104, the first effect pattern setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss4101 that the sound/light side high-probability mode flag is ON (Ss4101: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss4105.

In step Ss4105, it is determined whether or not the sound and light side high frequency support mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step Ss4105 that the sound and light side high frequency support mode flag is ON (Ss4105: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss4106.

In step Ss4106, the effect pattern setting process for the first starting opening is executed at the time of the high-precision high support state. The production pattern setting process for the high-probability high support state for the first starting port is performed when the game cycle for the first starting port is executed when the lottery mode is the high-probability mode and the support mode is the high-frequency support mode. 2, it is a process of setting the effect pattern of the game round for the first start opening. Specifically, when the first start opening game round is executed in the high probability high support state (state H5) in FIG. is. The details of the production pattern setting process for the first start opening in the high-probability-high support state will be described later. After executing step Ss4106, the first effect pattern setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss4105 that the sound and light side high frequency support mode flag is not ON (Ss4105: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss4107.

In step Ss4107, the production pattern setting process for the first starting opening is executed at the time of the high-probability-low support state. The high-probability-low-support state performance pattern setting process for the first starting port is executed when the game cycle for the first starting port is executed when the lottery mode is the high-probability mode and the support mode is the low-frequency support mode. 2, it is a process of setting the effect pattern of the game round for the first start opening. Specifically, when the high probability low support state (state H6) shown in FIG. is. The details of the effect pattern setting process for the first start opening in the high-probability-low support state will be described later. After executing step Ss4107, the first effect pattern setting process is terminated.

<Production pattern setting processing at the time of low probability low support state for the first start port>
Next, the effect pattern setting process for the first starting opening at the time of the low-probability-low support state will be described. The low probability low support state effect pattern setting process for the first starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 387: Ss4103) of the first effect pattern setting process.

FIG. 388 is a flow chart showing the effect pattern setting process for the first start opening in the low probability low support state. In step Ss4201, a production pattern random number acquisition process is executed. In the effect pattern random number acquisition process, the effect pattern random number is acquired from the lottery counter area 94 c of the sound/light side RAM 94 . After that, the process proceeds to step Ss4202.

In step Ss4202, it is determined whether or not the result of the success/failure determination (hit lottery) in the current game round is a big hit. Specifically, from the information on the presence or absence of the jackpot stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 by step Ss4002 of the special 1 game round effect setting process (FIG. 386), whether the result of the win/win decision is the jackpot winning judge. In step Ss4202, when it is determined that the result of the success/failure determination is the jackpot winning (Ss4202: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss4203.

In step Ss4203, the effect pattern table for the big win is specified from the effect pattern table group for the low-probability, low-frequency state stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 344) of the ROM93. The low-probability, low-frequency state effect pattern table group includes (a) a jackpot effect pattern table used when a jackpot is won in a winning lottery in a low-probability, low-frequency state, and (b) a win in a low-probability, low-frequency state. A production pattern table for reach generation used when reach occurs without winning a jackpot in the lottery, (C) In a low probability low frequency state, non-reach used when reach does not occur without winning a jackpot in a winning lottery A production pattern table for generation is provided. In step Ss4203, (a) is specified from among (a) to (c). (a) is, for example, an effect pattern table for performing a normal effect for big wins. After executing step Ss4203, the process proceeds to step Ss4204.

In step Ss4204, the effect pattern table identified in step Ss4203 is referred to, and effect patterns corresponding to the variable time obtained in step Ss1002 (FIG. 356) and the value of the current effect pattern random number obtained in step Ss4201 are displayed. to get Subsequently, in step Ss4205, the effect pattern acquired in step Ss4204 is set as the effect pattern to be executed in the current game round. After executing step Ss4205, the effect pattern setting process for the first starting port at the time of the low probability low support state is ended.

On the other hand, in step Ss4202, if it is determined that the result of the success/failure determination in the current game round is not the jackpot winning (Ss4202: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss4206, and it is determined whether reach occurs in the current game round. judge. Specifically, it is determined whether or not reach occurs from the information on the presence or absence of reach occurrence stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 by Ss4002 of the special 1 game round effect setting process (FIG. 386). In step Ss4206, when it is determined that the result of the success/failure determination in the current game round is reach occurrence (Ss4206: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss4207.

In step Ss4207, the effect pattern table for generating reach is specified from the effect pattern table group for the low probability low support state stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 344) of the ROM 93. Specifically, in the above-described (a) low-probability and low-probability support state, a reach generation effect pattern table used when a reach occurs without winning a big win in a winning lottery is specified. (a) is, for example, an effect pattern table for performing a normal effect for reach. After executing step Ss4207, proceed to step Ss4204 described above, refer to the effect pattern table specified in step Ss4207, and obtain the variable time obtained in step Ss1002 (Fig. 356) and step Ss1004 (Fig. 356). Acquire the production pattern corresponding to the fluctuation time and the value of the random number for the production pattern of this time.

In step Ss4206, when it is determined that the result of the success/failure determination in the current game round is not reach occurrence (Ss4206: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss4208.

In step Ss4208, a non-reach effect pattern table is specified from the low probability low support state effect pattern table group stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 344) of the ROM 93. Specifically, in the above-described (c) low-probability-low support state, the non-reach effect pattern table used when no big hit is won in the winning lottery and no reach occurs is specified. (c) is, for example, an effect pattern table for performing a normal effect for losing. After executing step Ss4208, the process proceeds to step Ss4204 described above, and the effect pattern table specified in step Ss4208 is referred to, and the variable time obtained in step Ss1005 (Fig. 356) and the current effect pattern random number value are Acquire the corresponding production pattern.

<Production pattern setting processing in low-probability support state for the first starting port>
Next, the effect pattern setting process at the time of the low-probability support state for the first starting opening will be described. The low probability high support state effect pattern setting process for the first starting opening is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 387: Ss4104) of the first effect pattern setting process.

FIG. 389 is a flow chart showing the effect pattern setting process for the first start opening in the low probability support state. In step Ss4301, a production pattern random number acquisition process is executed. In the effect pattern random number acquisition process, the effect pattern random number is acquired from the lottery counter area 94 c of the sound/light side RAM 94 . After that, the process proceeds to step Ss4302.

In step Ss4302, it is determined whether or not the result of the success/failure determination (hit lottery) in the current game round is a big win. Specifically, from the information on the presence or absence of the jackpot stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 by step Ss4002 of the special 1 game round effect setting process (FIG. 386), whether the result of the win/win decision is the jackpot winning judge. In step Ss4302, when it is determined that the result of the success/failure determination is the jackpot winning (Ss4302: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss4303.

In step Ss4303, the effect pattern table for big win is specified from the effect pattern table group for low probability high support stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 344) of ROM93. The low-probability sapo production pattern table group includes (d) a low-probability support pattern table used when winning a jackpot in a winning lottery, (o) a low-probability support, a jackpot in a winning lottery. Production pattern table for reach generation used when reach occurs without winning, (f) production pattern for non-reach generation used when reach does not occur without winning a jackpot in a winning lottery with a low probability high support A table is provided. In step Ss4303, (d) is specified from among (d) to (f). (d) is, for example, an effect pattern table for performing a normal effect for big wins. After executing step Ss4303, the process proceeds to step Ss4304.

In step Ss4304, the effect pattern table specified in step Ss4303 is referred to, and effect patterns corresponding to the fluctuation time obtained in step Ss1102 (FIG. 357) and the value of the current effect pattern random number obtained in step Ss4301 are displayed. to get Subsequently, in step Ss4305, the effect pattern acquired in step Ss4304 is set as the effect pattern to be executed in the current game round. After executing step Ss4305, the effect pattern setting process for the first starting port at the time of the low probability high support state is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Ss4302, if it is determined that the result of the success/failure determination in this game round is not a jackpot winning (Ss4302: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss4306, and it is determined whether or not reach occurs in this game round. judge. Specifically, it is determined whether or not reach occurs from the information on the presence or absence of reach occurrence stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 by Ss4002 of the special 1 game round effect setting process (FIG. 386). In step Ss4306, when it is determined that the result of the success/failure determination in the current game round is reach occurrence (Ss4306: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss4307.

In step Ss4307, the effect pattern table for generating reach is specified from the effect pattern table group for low probability high support stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 344) of ROM93. Specifically, in the above-described (E) low probability support, the production pattern table for reach generation used when reach occurs without winning a big win in the winning lottery is specified. (E) is, for example, an effect pattern table for performing a normal effect for reach. After executing step Ss4307, the process proceeds to step Ss4304 described above, and the effect pattern table specified in step Ss4307 is referred to, and the variation time obtained in step Ss1104 (Fig. 357) and the current effect pattern random number value are Acquire the corresponding production pattern.

In step Ss4306, when it is determined that the result of the success/failure determination in the current game round is not reach occurrence (Ss4306: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss4308.

In step Ss4308, a non-reach effect pattern table is specified from the effect pattern table group for low probability high support stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 344) of the ROM 93. Specifically, in the above-described (f) low-probability support state, the non-reach effect pattern table used when the jackpot is not won in the winning lottery and the reach does not occur is specified. (F) is, for example, an effect pattern table for performing a normal effect for failure. After executing step Ss4308, the process proceeds to step Ss4304 described above, and the effect pattern table identified in step Ss4308 is referred to, and the variable time obtained in step Ss1105 (Fig. 357) and the current effect pattern random number value are Acquire the corresponding production pattern.

<Production pattern setting processing at the time of high-precision high support state for the first start port>
Next, the production pattern setting process for the first starting opening at the time of the high-precision high support state will be described. The effect pattern setting process for the first starting port in the high-precision high support state is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (Fig. 387: Ss4106) of the first effect pattern setting process.

FIG. 390 is a flow chart showing the production pattern setting process for the first starting opening in the high-precision high support state. In step Ss4401, a production pattern random number acquisition process is executed. In the effect pattern random number acquisition process, the effect pattern random number is acquired from the lottery counter area 94 c of the sound/light side RAM 94 . After that, the process proceeds to step Ss4402.

In step Ss4402, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning/losing determination (winning lottery) in the current game round is a big win. Specifically, from the information on the presence or absence of the jackpot stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 by step Ss4002 of the special 1 game round effect setting process (FIG. 386), whether the result of the win/win decision is the jackpot winning judge. In step Ss4402, when it is determined that the result of the success/failure determination is the jackpot winning (Ss4402: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss4403.

In step Ss4403, the effect pattern table for big win is specified from the effect pattern table group for high accuracy and high support stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 344) of ROM93. The production pattern table group for high probability high support includes (g) high probability high support, a jackpot production pattern table used when winning a jackpot in a winning lottery, (h) high probability high support, special in winning lottery A special small winning performance pattern table used when winning a small winning, (i) a normal small winning performance pattern table used when winning a normal small winning in a winning lottery in a high probability high sapo is provided. . In step Ss4403, (ki) is specified from (ki) to (ke). (g) is, for example, an effect pattern table for performing a normal effect for big wins. After executing step Ss4403, the process proceeds to step Ss4404.

In step Ss4404, the effect pattern table identified in step Ss4403 is referred to, and effect patterns corresponding to the variable time obtained in step Ss1202 (FIG. 358) and the value of the current effect pattern random number obtained in step Ss4401 are displayed. to get Subsequently, in step Ss4405, the effect pattern acquired in step Ss4404 is set as the effect pattern to be executed in the current game round. After step Ss4405 is executed, the effect pattern setting process for the first start opening at the time of the high-precision high support state is ended.

On the other hand, in step Ss4402, when it is determined that the result of the winning/failure determination in the current game round is not the jackpot winning (Ss4402: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss4406.

In step Ss4406, it is determined whether or not the result of the success/failure determination (hit lottery) in the current game round is a special small winning. Specifically, from the information on the presence or absence of a special small hit stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 by step Ss4002 of the special 1 game round effect setting process (FIG. 386), the result of the win/loss determination is a special small hit. Determine whether or not there is In step Ss4406, when it is determined that the result of the success/failure determination is the special small hit winning (Ss4406: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss4407.

In step Ss4407, the effect pattern table for the small win is specified from the effect pattern table group for high accuracy and high support stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 344) of the ROM 93. Specifically, in the above-mentioned (h) high probability high support, specify the special small winning effect pattern table used when winning a special small winning in the winning lottery. After executing step Ss4407, the process proceeds to step Ss4404 described above, and the effect pattern table specified in step Ss4407 is referred to, and the variable time obtained in step Ss1204 (FIG. 358) and the current effect pattern random number value are Acquire the corresponding production pattern.

In step Ss4406, when it is determined that the result of the success/failure determination in the current game round is not the special small hit winning (Ss4406: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss4408.
In step Ss4408, the effect pattern table for the normal small win is specified from the effect pattern table group for the high accuracy and high support stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 344) of the ROM 93. Specifically, in the above-mentioned (i) high probability high support, the normal small winning effect pattern table used when winning the normal small winning in the winning lottery is specified. After executing step Ss4408, the process proceeds to step Ss4404 described above, and the effect pattern table specified in step Ss4408 is referred to, and the variation time obtained in step Ss1203 (Fig. 358) and the current effect pattern random number value are Acquire the corresponding production pattern.

<Production pattern setting processing at high probability low support state for the first start port>
Next, the effect pattern setting process for the first starting opening in the high-probability-low support state will be described. The high probability low support state effect pattern setting process for the first start opening is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 387: Ss4107) of the first effect pattern setting process.

FIG. 391 is a flow chart showing the effect pattern setting process for the first start opening in the high-probability-low support state. In step Ss4501, a production pattern random number acquisition process is executed. In the effect pattern random number acquisition process, the effect pattern random number is acquired from the lottery counter area 94 c of the sound/light side RAM 94 . After that, the process proceeds to step Ss4502.

In step Ss4502, it is determined whether or not the result of the win/loss determination (hit lottery) in the current game round is a big win. Specifically, from the information on the presence or absence of the jackpot stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 by step Ss4002 of the special 1 game round effect setting process (FIG. 386), whether the result of the win/win decision is the jackpot winning judge. In step Ss4502, when it is determined that the result of the success/failure determination is the jackpot winning (Ss4502: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss4503.

In step Ss4503, the effect pattern table for big win is specified from the effect pattern table group for high probability and low support stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 344) of ROM93. The high-probability and low-probability support pattern table group includes (c) a high-probability-low support pattern table used when winning a jackpot in a winning lottery, (c) a high-probability-low support, and a small A small win performance pattern table used when winning a win (special small win, normal small win) is provided. In step Ss4503, (ko) is specified from (ko) and (sa). (ix) is, for example, an effect pattern table for performing a normal effect for big wins. After executing step Ss4503, the process proceeds to step Ss4504.

In step Ss4504, the effect pattern table identified in step Ss4503 is referred to, and effect patterns corresponding to the variable time obtained in step Ss1302 (FIG. 359) and the value of the current effect pattern random number obtained in step Ss4501 are displayed. to get Subsequently, in step Ss4505, the effect pattern acquired in step Ss4504 is set as the effect pattern to be executed in the current game round. After executing step Ss4505, the high-probability-low support state effect pattern setting process for the first start opening is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Ss4502, when it is determined that the result of the winning/failure determination in the current game round is not the jackpot winning (Ss4502: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss4506.

In step Ss4506, the effect pattern table for the small win is specified from the effect pattern table group for the high-probability and low support stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 344) of the ROM 93. Specifically, in the above-mentioned (S) high-probability-low support, a small winning performance pattern table used when winning a small winning (special small winning, normal small winning) in a winning lottery is specified. After executing step Ss4506, the process proceeds to step Ss4504 described above, and the effect pattern table specified in step Ss4506 is referred to. Acquire the corresponding production pattern.

<Special 2 game turn effect setting process>
Next, the special 2 game round effect setting process will be described. The game round effect setting process for special 2 is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 384: Ss3811) of the game round effect setting process.

FIG. 392 is a flowchart showing special 2 game round effect setting processing. In step Ss4601, it is determined whether or not the second variation command and the second type command have been received from the main MPU 62. When it is determined in step Ss4601 that at least one of the second variation command and the second type command has not been received (Ss4601: NO), the special 2 game round effect setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss4601 that the second variation command and the second type command have been received (Ss4601: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss4602.

In step Ss4602, the command for the second variation received this time is read, and information on the presence or absence of the jackpot, the type of the jackpot, the presence or absence of reach occurrence, and the variation time is read from the command. Then, the read information is stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 . After that, the process proceeds to step Ss4603.

In step Ss4603, a second effect pattern setting process is executed for setting a pattern of effects to be executed in game rounds such as at the time of a big win or at the time of reach. Details of the second effect pattern setting process will be described later. After executing step Ss4603, the process proceeds to step Ss4604.

In step Ss4604, stop symbol setting processing is executed. In the stop symbol setting process, if the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a 16R probability variable jackpot, an 8R probability variable jackpot, or an 8R normal jackpot, the same pattern is displayed on the activated line L of the pattern display device 41. The information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination is established is set as the information of the stop symbol of this time. Specifically, when the result of the winning lottery of the current game round is the 16R probability variable jackpot or the 8R probability variable jackpot, the same combination of odd-numbered symbols can be selected as the same combination of symbols, and the same Even symbol combinations may be selected. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the selection rate is the same for the combination of the same odd-numbered symbols and the combination of the same even-numbered symbols. A configuration in which the ratio is high may be adopted, and the latter may be configured to have a higher selection ratio than the former. Also, the combination of "7" symbols is selected only in the case of a 16R probability variable jackpot. In addition, when the result of the winning lottery in the current game round is the 8R normal jackpot, the same combination of even-numbered symbols is selected as the same combination of symbols.

If the result of the winning lottery in the current game round is a losing result, it is determined whether or not the ready-to-win is generated from the content of the command for variation. When it is determined that it corresponds to the occurrence of ready-to-win, it corresponds to the stop result that the combination of the same symbols on the effective line L does not materialize and the combination of the ready-to-win symbols on the effective line L does. information is determined as the information of the result of this stop. On the other hand, when it is determined that it does not correspond to the occurrence of ready-to-win, the result is a stop result in which the combination of the same symbols on the effective line L does not materialize and the combination of the ready-to-win symbols on the effective line L does not materialize. The corresponding information is set as the information of the current stop symbol. After executing step Ss4604, the process proceeds to step Ss4605.

In step Ss4605, a process for setting a variation display pattern (hereinafter referred to as a second variation display pattern) for the current second starting game cycle is executed. In this process, information on the variation time of the current second start opening game cycle is specified from the contents of the second variation command received this time, and the information on the variation time and the information set in step Ss4604 are specified. A second variable display pattern corresponding to a combination of information of stop symbols is selected. When selecting the second variation display pattern, the second variation display pattern table stored in the variation display pattern table storage area 93b (FIG. 344) of the sound and light side ROM 93 is referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step Ss4606.

In step Ss4606, the information of the second effect pattern, the stop symbol, and the second variable display pattern set in the current game cycle for the second start opening is set in the effect command. After that, the process advances to step Ss4607 to transmit the effect command to the display side MPU 102 . The display-side MPU 102 executes processing for displaying the effect contents corresponding to the received effect command on the pattern display device 41 . After executing step Ss4607, the process proceeds to step Ss4608.

In step Ss4608, update processing of pending information is executed. In the pending information update process, the information in the second pending number counter area is updated so that the second pending number stored in the second pending number counter area of the sound and light side RAM 94 is decremented by one. After executing step Ss4608, the process advances to step Ss4609.

In step Ss4609, pending display control processing is executed. The pending display control process is similar to the pending display control process executed in step Ss3604 of the pending command handling process (FIG. 382). Specifically, a command for changing the display (display of how many pending display icons are arranged) in the second starting point holding area Ds2 in correspondence with the second pending number specified in step Ss4608, It transmits to the display control device 100 . The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second start opening reservation region Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the second reservation number. After executing step Ss4609, the game round effect setting process for special 2 ends.

<Second effect pattern setting process>
Next, the second effect pattern setting process will be explained. The second effect pattern setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the special 2 game round effect setting process (Fig. 392: Ss4603).

FIG. 393 is a flow chart showing the second effect pattern setting process. In step Ss4701, it is determined whether or not the sound and light side high probability mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step Ss4701 that the sound/light-side high-probability mode flag is not ON (Ss4701: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss4702.

In step Ss4702, it is determined whether or not the sound and light side high frequency support mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step Ss4702 that the sound and light side high frequency support mode flag is not ON (Ss4702: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss4703.

In step Ss4703, a low probability low support state effect pattern setting process for the second start opening is executed. The low-probability/low-probability support state performance pattern setting process for the second starting port is executed when the game cycle for the second starting port is executed when the lottery mode is the low-probability mode and the support mode is the low-frequency support mode. 2, it is a process of setting the effect pattern of the game round for the second starting port. Specifically, when the second start opening game round is executed in the low probability low support state (state H1) in FIG. is. The details of the low-probability-low-support state performance pattern setting process for the second starting port will be described later. After executing step Ss4703, the second effect pattern setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss4702 that the sound and light side high frequency support mode flag is ON (Ss4702: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss4704.

In step Ss4704, a low probability high support state production pattern setting process for the second start opening is executed. The effect pattern setting process for the second starting port at the time of the low probability high support state is performed when the game round for the second starting port is executed when the lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode. 2, it is a process of setting the effect pattern of the game round for the second starting port. Specifically, when the second starting opening game round is executed in the low probability high support state (state H3) in FIG. is. The details of the effect pattern setting process at the time of the low probability height support state for the second starting port will be described later. After executing step Ss4704, the second effect pattern setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss4701 that the sound/light side high-probability mode flag is ON (Ss4701: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss4705.

In step Ss4705, it is determined whether or not the sound and light side high frequency support mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step Ss4705 that the sound and light side high frequency support mode flag is ON (Ss4705: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss4706.

In step Ss4706, the effect pattern setting process for the second starting opening is executed at the time of the high-precision high support state. The production pattern setting process for the second starting port at the time of high probability and high support state is performed when the game round for the second starting port is executed when the lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode. 2, it is a process of setting the effect pattern of the game round for the second starting port. Specifically, when the second start opening game round is executed in the high probability high support state (state H5) in FIG. is. The details of the effect pattern setting process for the second starting opening in the high-precision high support state will be described later. After executing step Ss4706, the second effect pattern setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss4705 that the sound and light side high frequency support mode flag is not ON (Ss4705: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss4707.

In step Ss4707, the high-probability low support state production pattern setting process for the second start opening is executed. The high-probability-low support state performance pattern setting process for the second starting port is performed when the game round for the second starting port is executed when the lottery mode is the high-probability mode and the support mode is the low-frequency support mode. 2, it is a process of setting the effect pattern of the game round for the second starting port. Specifically, when the second start opening game round is executed in the high probability low support state (state H6) in FIG. is. The details of the high-probability-low support state effect pattern setting process for the second starting port will be described later. After executing step Ss4707, the second effect pattern setting process is terminated.

<Production pattern setting processing at low probability low support state for the second start port>
Next, the effect pattern setting process for the second starting opening at the time of the low probability low support state will be described. The low probability low support state effect pattern setting process for the second starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 393: Ss4703) of the second effect pattern setting process.

FIG. 394 is a flow chart showing the low-probability low-support state performance pattern setting process for the second start opening. In step Ss4801, a long variation effect pattern is specified from the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 344) of the ROM 93. FIG. After executing step Ss4801, the process proceeds to step Ss4802.

At step Ss4802, the effect pattern table identified at step Ss4802 is referenced to obtain the effect pattern corresponding to the long fluctuation time obtained at step Ss1901 (FIG. 365). At subsequent step Ss4803, the effect pattern obtained at step Ss4802 is set as the effect pattern to be executed in the current game round. After executing step Ss4803, the low-probability low-support state effect pattern setting process for the second starting port is ended.

<Production pattern setting processing in low-probability support state for second starting port>
Next, the effect pattern setting process at the time of the low-probability support state for the second starting port will be described. The low probability high support state production pattern setting process for the second starting opening is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 393: Ss4704) of the second production pattern setting process.

FIG. 395 is a flow chart showing the effect pattern setting process for the second start opening in the low probability support state. In step Ss4901, a production pattern random number acquisition process is executed. In the effect pattern random number acquisition process, the effect pattern random number is acquired from the lottery counter area 94 c of the sound/light side RAM 94 . After that, the process proceeds to step Ss4902.

In step Ss4902, it is determined whether or not the result of the win/loss determination (hit lottery) in the current game round is a big win. Specifically, from the information on the presence or absence of a big hit stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 by step Ss4602 of the special 2 game round effect setting process (FIG. 392), whether the result of the win/loss determination is a big win or not judge. In step Ss4902, when it is determined that the result of the success/failure determination is the jackpot winning (Ss4902: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss4903.

In step Ss4903, the effect pattern table for big win is specified from the effect pattern table group for low probability high support stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 344) of ROM93. The low-probability support pattern table group includes (sa) a low-probability support and a jackpot effect pattern table used when winning a jackpot in a winning lottery, (c) a low-probability support and a jackpot in a winning lottery. Production pattern table for reach occurrence used when reach occurs without winning, (S) production pattern for reach non-occurrence used when reach does not occur without winning a jackpot in a winning lottery with a low-probability sapo A table is provided. In step Ss4903, (sa) is specified from (sa) to (s). (S) is, for example, an effect pattern table for performing a normal effect for big wins. After executing step Ss4903, the process proceeds to step Ss4904.

In step Ss4904, the effect pattern table specified in step Ss4903 is referred to, and effect patterns corresponding to the fluctuation time obtained in step Ss2002 (FIG. 366) and the value of the current effect pattern random number obtained in step Ss4901 are displayed. to get Subsequently, in step Ss4905, the effect pattern acquired in step Ss4904 is set as the effect pattern to be executed in the current game round. After executing step Ss4905, the effect pattern setting process for the second starting port at the time of the low probability high support state is ended.

On the other hand, in step Ss4902, if it is determined that the result of the success/failure determination in this game round is not a big hit (Ss4902: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss4906, and it is determined whether reach occurs in this game round. judge. Specifically, it is determined whether or not reach occurs from the information on the presence or absence of reach occurrence stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 by Ss4602 of the game round effect setting process for special 2 (FIG. 392). In step Ss4906, when it is determined that the result of the success/failure determination in the current game round is reach generation (Ss4906: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss4907.

In step Ss4907, the effect pattern table for generating reach is specified from the effect pattern table group for low probability high support stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 344) of ROM93. Specifically, in the above-mentioned (i) low-probability support, a reach generation production pattern table used when a reach occurs without winning a jackpot in a winning lottery is specified. (C) is, for example, an effect pattern table for performing a normal effect for reach. After executing step Ss4907, proceed to step Ss4904 described above, refer to the effect pattern table specified in step Ss4907, and determine the variable time acquired in step Ss2004 (Fig. 366) and the value of the random number for the effect pattern of this time Acquire the corresponding production pattern.

In step Ss4906, when it is determined that the result of the success/failure determination in the current game round is not reach occurrence (Ss4906: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss4908.

In step Ss4908, a non-reach effect pattern table is specified from the effect pattern table group for low probability high support stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 344) of the ROM 93. Specifically, in the above-described (S) low-probability support state, the non-reach effect pattern table used when the jackpot is not won in the winning lottery and the reach does not occur is specified. (S) is, for example, an effect pattern table for performing a normal effect for failure. After executing step Ss4908, proceed to step Ss4904 described above, refer to the effect pattern table specified in step Ss4908, and change the variable time acquired in step Ss2005 (Fig. 366) to the current effect pattern random number value. Acquire the corresponding production pattern.

<Production pattern setting processing at the time of high-precision high support state for the second start port>
Next, the effect pattern setting process for the second starting opening at the time of the high-precision high support state will be described. The effect pattern setting process for the second starting port at the time of high-precision high support state is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the second effect pattern setting process (Fig. 393: Ss4706).

FIG. 396 is a flow chart showing the effect pattern setting process for the second starting opening in the high-precision high support state. In step Ss5001, a long variation effect pattern is specified from the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 344) of the ROM 93. FIG. After executing step Ss5001, the process proceeds to step Ss5002.

In step Ss5002, the effect pattern table identified in step Ss5002 is referenced to obtain the effect pattern corresponding to the long fluctuation time obtained in step Ss2101 (FIG. 367). Subsequently, in step Ss5003, the effect pattern acquired in step Ss5002 is set as the effect pattern to be executed in the current game round. After executing step Ss5003, the production pattern setting process for the second starting port at the time of the high-precision high support state is ended.

<Production pattern setting processing at high probability low support state for the second start port>
Next, the effect pattern setting process for the second starting opening at the time of the high-probability-low support state will be described. The high probability low support state effect pattern setting process for the second start opening is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 393: Ss4704) of the second effect pattern setting process.

FIG. 397 is a flow chart showing the high-probability-low support state effect pattern setting process for the second start opening. In step Ss5101, a production pattern random number acquisition process is executed. In the effect pattern random number acquisition process, the effect pattern random number is acquired from the lottery counter area 94 c of the sound/light side RAM 94 . After that, the process proceeds to step Ss5102.

In step Ss5102, it is determined whether or not the result of the win/loss determination (hit lottery) in the current game round is a big win. Specifically, from the information on the presence or absence of a big hit stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 by step Ss4602 of the special 2 game round effect setting process (FIG. 392), whether the result of the win/loss determination is a big win or not judge. In step Ss5102, when it is determined that the result of the success/failure determination is the jackpot winning (Ss5102: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss5103.

In step Ss5103, the effect pattern table for big win is specified from the effect pattern table group for high probability and low support stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 344) of ROM93. The high-probability and low-probability support pattern table group includes (C) a high-probability-low support and a jackpot effect pattern table used when winning a jackpot in a winning lottery, and (S) a high-probability-low support in a winning lottery. A production pattern table for reach generation used when reach occurs without winning, (t) production pattern for non-reach generation used when reach does not occur without winning a jackpot in a winning lottery in a high probability low support A table is provided. In step Ss5103, (C) is specified from (C) to (T). (C) is, for example, an effect pattern table for performing a normal effect for big wins. After executing step Ss5103, the process proceeds to step Ss5104.

In step Ss5104, the effect pattern table specified in step Ss5103 is referred to, and effect patterns corresponding to the fluctuation time obtained in step Ss2202 (FIG. 368) and the value of the current effect pattern random number obtained in step Ss5101 are displayed. to get Subsequently, in step Ss5105, the effect pattern acquired in step Ss5104 is set as the effect pattern to be executed in the current game round. After executing step Ss5105, the high-probability-low support state performance pattern setting process for the second starting port ends.

On the other hand, in step Ss5102, if it is determined that the result of the success/failure determination in this game round is not a jackpot winning (Ss5102: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss5106, and it is determined whether reach occurs in this game round. judge. Specifically, it is determined whether or not reach occurs from the information on the presence or absence of reach occurrence stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 by Ss4602 of the game round effect setting process for special 2 (FIG. 392). In step Ss5106, when it is determined that the result of the success/failure determination in the current game round is reach occurrence (Ss5106: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss5107.

In step Ss5107, the effect pattern table for generating reach is specified from the effect pattern table group for high probability and low support stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 344) of ROM93. Specifically, in the above-mentioned (S) high-probability-low support, the production pattern table for ready-to-win generation, which is used when a ready-to-win is generated without winning a big win in the winning lottery, is specified. (G) is, for example, an effect pattern table for performing a normal effect for reach. After executing step Ss5107, proceed to step Ss5104 described above, refer to the effect pattern table specified in step Ss5107, and determine the variable time acquired in step Ss2204 (Fig. 368) and the value of the random number for the effect pattern this time. Acquire the corresponding production pattern.

In step Ss5106, when it is determined that the result of the success/failure determination in the current game round is not reach occurrence (Ss5106: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss5108.

In step Ss5108, a non-reach effect pattern table is specified from the high-probability-low support effect pattern table group stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 344) of the ROM 93. FIG. Specifically, in the high-probability-low support state described above, the non-reach effect pattern table used when no big hit is won in the winning lottery and no reach occurs is specified. (T) is, for example, an effect pattern table for performing a normal effect for losing. After executing step Ss5108, proceed to step Ss5104 described above, refer to the effect pattern table specified in step Ss2108, and determine the variable time acquired in step Ss2205 (Fig. 368) and the value of the random number for the effect pattern of this time Acquire the corresponding production pattern.

<Various processing executed in the display control device>
Next, processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

The processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 mainly includes a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on until the power is turned off, and a main processing that is executed when a command is received from the sound emission control device 90. There are command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing executed when a V interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal that is transmitted from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when rendering processing of an image for one frame is completed.

The MPU 102 executes main processing after power-on, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of commands and detection of V interrupt signals. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command interrupt processing is preferentially executed. Therefore, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound emission control device 90 and execute the V interrupt process.

<Main processing>
Next, main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 398 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. As described above, the main process is a process that is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. Processing of each step executed in the main processing will be described below.

In step Ss5201, initialization processing is executed. Specifically, first, processing for initializing the MPU 102 and clearing the storage of the work RAM 104 and the video RAM 107 is performed. Then, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107 . Furthermore, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107 and the extracted character information is written in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107 . Also, perform other necessary settings for initialization. After that, the process proceeds to step Ss5202.

In step Ss5202, interrupt permission setting is executed. After the interrupt permission setting is executed, in the main processing, infinite loop processing is executed until the power is turned off. Accordingly, after the interrupt permission is set, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing, which will be described below, are executed in accordance with the reception of a command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described. As described above, the command interrupt processing is processing that is executed each time a command is received from the sound emission control device 90 .

399 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. In step Ss5301, command storage processing is executed. In the command storage process, received command data is extracted and the extracted command data is stored in a command storage area provided in work RAM 104 . Various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read by the command determination process of the V interrupt process, which will be described later, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 400 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. As described above, V interrupt processing is processing that is executed when a V interrupt signal from VDP 105 is detected. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command storage area are executed by the command interrupt process. Execute the displayed instructions.

As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame worth of image is completed and that is transmitted to the MPU 102 . Therefore, the MPU 102 executes V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, so that drawing instructions to the VDP 105 are issued every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame worth of image is completed. For this reason, the VDP 105 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to suppress the development of an image associated with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area in which the image information is stored. Details of the processing of each step of the V interrupt processing will be described below.

In step Ss5401, command handling processing is executed. In the command handling process, the content of the command stored in the command storage area is analyzed by the command interrupt process (E19), and the process corresponding to the command is executed. Specifically, for example, when a performance command is stored, image drawing and display control is started so that the performance mode specified by the performance command is displayed on the pattern display device 41.例文帳に追加

If the effect operation command is stored, it is determined whether or not it is the period for accepting pressing of the effect operation button 24, and if it is determined that it is the period for accepting pressing of the effect operation button 24, the effect operation is performed. Control of image drawing and display is started so that the effect mode corresponding to the depression of the button 24 is displayed on the pattern display device 41 . On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the period for accepting pressing of the effect operation button 24, the content of the next command is analyzed without executing the process.

In the command processing (Ss5401), all commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and processing corresponding to all the analyzed commands is executed. The reason for this will be explained. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during the 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the effect is set by the sound emission control device 90 and the effect is started, there is a high possibility that various commands for specifying the content of the effect are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the state of the effect such as the advance notice effect and the stop pattern set by the sound emission control device 90, and display the effect image according to the state. The rendering of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the device 41 .

In step Ss5402, display setting processing is executed. In the display setting process, based on the type of screen to be displayed on the pattern display device 41 set by the command handling process (Ss5401), etc., the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the pattern display device 41 is specified. . After that, the process proceeds to step Ss5403.

In step Ss5403, task processing is executed. In the task processing, based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the pattern display device 41 specified by the display setting processing (Ss5402), the type of character (sprite, display object) that constitutes the image is determined. Along with specifying, for each character (sprite), various parameters required for drawing, such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc., are determined. After that, the process proceeds to step Ss5404.

In step Ss5404, drawing processing is executed. In the drawing process, the types of characters forming one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each character, which are determined by the task process (Ss5403), are transmitted to the VDP 105. FIG. The VDP 105 executes an image drawing process based on these pieces of information, and together with a drive signal to cause the pattern display device 41 to display an image drawn based on the information received during the previous V interrupt process. The image data is transmitted to the pattern display device 41 . After that, the process advances to step Ss5405, and after executing other processes, the V interrupt process ends. An example of specific control for executing various processes including the jackpot effect in the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

<<8-7>> Functions and effects:
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the support mode is the high-frequency support mode in the high-precision and high-support state, the electric accessory 34a is substantially in the electric role open state, and the through A game ball that has passed through the gate 35 flows from the main line passage portion 210 to the first branch passage portion 220 in the starting port unit 200 (FIG. 330). Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 always enters the right first starting hole 44 . However, the game ball entering the right first starting hole 44 enters the falling hole 252 with a probability of 0.1 seconds (=1/21) in 2.1 seconds. When the opportunity to shift to the high-frequency support mode is a probability variable jackpot, and the game ball enters the fall hole 252 in the game round before the number of games reaches the guaranteed number of games after the start of the high-frequency support mode. , the lottery mode shifts from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode. That is, when the game ball enters the right first start hole 44, the lottery mode shifts from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode with a probability of 1/21, and the player may be disadvantaged. be.

On the other hand, when the number of games played after the start of the high-frequency support mode reaches the guaranteed number of games without the game ball entering the fall hole 252, the support mode is changed from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode. It shifts to a support mode, and the game state shifts from a high-probability high support state to a high-probability low support state (invincible zone). When the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is substantially always closed, and as a result, the game ball flows along the third route RT3 (Fig. 335) and enters the second start port 34. The ball will enter the ball. In this case, the lottery mode is not shifted from the high probability mode to the low probability mode by entering the game ball into the falling port 252 as in the case where the game ball flows to the right first starting port 44 side. Therefore, it is possible to continuously perform the game rounds triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 without the possibility of the player being in a disadvantageous state. The high-probability-low support state continues until the next jackpot election, and the next jackpot election is virtually promised.

As a result, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the high-probability and high-support state, the player is provided with a period from the start of the high-frequency support mode until the number of games reaches the guaranteed number of games, A sense of urgency that the game ball does not enter the fall port 252 and the lottery mode does not shift from the high probability mode to the low probability mode (I do not want you to fall), and the number of games reaches the guaranteed number of games before falling. It is possible to give a sense of expectation such as wanting to Then, when the number of games reaches the guaranteed number of games without falling, the player is executed with the entry of the game ball into the second start port 34 without the risk of falling. A feeling of relief that you can shift to a high-probability and low support state (invincible zone) where you can continuously play the game rounds, and the game rounds that are executed with the entry of the game ball into the second start port 34 are continuously performed. By doing so, it is possible to give a sense of expectation that a big hit will be won in the near future in a high-probability-low support state. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, by providing the player with emotions such as anticipation, tension, and relief, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, even when a special small win is won in the winning lottery in the high-probability-high support state, the support mode shifts from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode, The game state is configured to shift from a high-probability high support state to a high-probability low support state (invincible zone). For this reason, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation to win a special small prize in the winning lottery, and as a result, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the low-probability-low support state, it is impossible to enter the ball into the right first start hole 44 and the drop hole 252 provided in the start hole unit 200, but the second start hole It is possible to enter the 34. Since the support mode is the low-frequency support mode in the low-probability-low-support state, the probability that the result of the electric accessory open lottery that is executed upon passing through the through gate 35 will be lost is extremely high at 232/233. Therefore, the electric accessory 34a is substantially always closed, and the game ball flows along the third route RT3 (FIG. 335), so that the ball can enter the second start port . For this reason, some players aim to enter the game ball into the second starting port 34 by hitting slightly to the right in the low probability/low support state and letting the game ball flow along the third route RT3. can be considered. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as a simultaneous variation machine, the variation time of the second symbol display section 37b (hereinafter also referred to as special 2 variation time) is set to a very long time such as 10 minutes. Thus, the winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 is suppressed from being repeatedly executed in a short period of time. As a result, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to make the player give up the weak right-handed operation and concentrate on the left-handed stroke in the low-probability-low support state.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the starter unit 200 includes a structure (in terms of hardware In addition, the main line passage portion 210, the first branch passage portion 220, and the second branch passage portion 230 are made of a transparent resin material. According to this configuration, the player can observe the flow of the game ball in the starting port unit 200, and by observing whether or not the game ball enters the falling port 252, the player can determine whether the game ball enters the second starting port 34 or not. Whether or not the ball enters the ball, etc. can be recognized. When a game ball enters the fall hole 252, the lottery mode shifts from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode, which is disadvantageous to the player. For this reason, it is possible to give a sense of urgency to the player observing the flow of the game ball in the starting port unit 200 to see if the game ball enters the falling port 252 and puts the game ball in a disadvantageous state. Also, when the game ball enters the second start hole 34, the game state is shifted to the invincible zone where the game ball does not enter the fall hole 252.例文帳に追加For this reason, the player observing the flow of game balls in the starter unit 200 can be given a sense of anticipation that the game state will shift to a game state advantageous to the player, such as an invincible zone. As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to further give the player a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency, thereby further enhancing the amusement of the game.

<<8-8>> Modified example of the eighth embodiment:
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and can be implemented in various aspects without departing from the scope of the invention. For example, the following modifications are possible. In addition, in the modified example described below, description of the same configuration, processing, and effects as those of the above-described embodiment is omitted.

<<8-8-1>> Modification 1:
In the eighth embodiment, the main line passage portion 210, the first branch passage portion 220, the second branch passage portion 230, the second starting port 34, the right first starting port 44, the out port 251 in the starting port unit, and the falling port 252, there is a possibility that a game ball enters the falling hole 252 and the lottery mode of the winning lottery falls from the high probability mode to the low probability mode in the high probability high support state. On the other hand, when the state in which the game ball does not enter the fall opening 252 continues until the number of game rounds executed in the high-probability-high support state H5 reaches the guaranteed number of games, there is no possibility of falling. The game state can be shifted to the support state. In the high-probability-low support state, it is possible to perform a winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34, and besides, there is no possibility of falling as described above, and in fact, the following A jackpot win is guaranteed. On the other hand, as a modified example, by adopting a configuration different from that of the starter unit 200 described above, the game characteristics described above may be realized. In short, in the high probability and high support state, there is a possibility that the game ball enters the falling port 252 and the lottery mode of the winning lottery falls from the high probability mode to the low probability mode, while in the high probability and high support state H5. When the state in which the game ball does not enter the falling port 252 continues until the number of game times executed reaches the guaranteed number of games, the game state can be shifted to a high-probability low support state in which there is no possibility of falling. If so, any configuration can be adopted.

<<8-8-2>> Modification 2:
In the eighth embodiment, since the main line passage portion 210, the first branch passage portion 220, and the second branch passage portion 230 provided in the starting port unit 200 are formed of a transparent resin material, the starting port unit 200 A player can observe the flow of game balls inside the . On the other hand, as a modification, the main line passage portion 210, the first branch passage portion 220, and the second branch passage portion 230 are formed of a non-transparent member, and the flow of game balls inside the starting port unit 200 is controlled. It may also be configured so that a person cannot observe it. According to this configuration, the player cannot know that the game ball enters the falling port 252, the game ball enters the second start port 34, etc. only from the flow of the game ball. According to the configuration of the eighth embodiment, the effect image displayed on the symbol display device 41 causes the player to fall (the lottery mode shifts from the high probability mode to the low probability mode) or shifts to the invincible zone. you can know what you did.

<<8-8-3>> Modification 3:
In the eighth embodiment, the first branch passage portion 220 and the second branch passage portion 230 provided in the starting port unit 200 are made of a transparent resin material. It can be known that the game ball has entered the falling port 252.例文帳に追加On the other hand, as a modification, the first branch passage portion 220 and the second branch passage portion 230 are formed of a non-transparent member, and the entry of the game ball into the fall opening 252 or the out opening 251 in the starting opening unit is prevented. It may be configured to be invisible. In addition, on the side of the sound emission control device 90, the processing for displaying the effect image (moving image) determined according to the entry of the game ball into the drop opening 252 on the symbol display device 41 is not performed, and the high frequency support mode is performed. Whether the number of games after the start of the game has reached the guaranteed number of games is not notified by performance. According to this configuration, in the high-precision high support state, until the number of games played after the start of the high-frequency support mode reaches the guaranteed number of games, the player is given a sense of urgency such as whether or not he or she has fallen over a long period of time. can be done. In addition, when the number of games played after the start of the high-frequency support mode reaches the guaranteed number of games, the player is expected to transition to a high-accuracy low-support state (invincible zone) without falling. can do. As described above, according to this modified example, it is possible to further give the player a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency, and to further improve the interest in the game.

<<8-8-4>> Modification 4:
In the eighth embodiment, in the high-probability and high support state, if the result of the success/failure determination in this game round is a special small hit winning, the support mode is shifted from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode, It was configured to transition to a high-precision low support state (invincible zone). On top of that, in the eighth embodiment, when the support mode is shifted from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode in the high probability high support state, from the high probability high support state to the high probability low support state (invincible zone) It is configured such that an effect image indicating the transition is displayed on the pattern display device 41. - 特許庁On the other hand, as a modification, the main line passage portion 210, the first branch passage portion 220, and the second branch passage portion 230 are formed of a non-transparent member, as in the first modification of the eighth embodiment. After that, when the support mode shifts from high frequency support mode to low frequency support mode in high probability high support state, production indicating that it has transitioned from high probability high support state to high probability low support state (invincible zone) The timing of displaying the image may be delayed until the number of games played after the start of the high-frequency support mode reaches the guaranteed number of games. According to this configuration, as a result of the success/failure determination, winning a special small hit and shifting to a high-probability low support state (invincible zone) means that the number of games after the start of the high-frequency support mode is the guaranteed number of games. Since it is not possible to recognize it until it is reached, it is possible to further give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency, thereby further improving the interest in the game.

Furthermore, in Modification 4, the configuration of Modification 3 may be added. That is, in the modification 4, the sound emission control device 90 side does not perform the process of displaying the effect image (moving image) determined according to the entry of the game ball into the fall opening 252 on the symbol display device 41, Until the number of games played after the start of the frequency support mode reaches the guaranteed number of games, the game state shifts from the high-probability high support state to either the low-probability high-support state or the high-probability low support state (invincible zone). It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which it is not notified by means of a performance. According to this configuration, until the number of games played after the start of the high-frequency support mode reaches the guaranteed number of games, whether the player has fallen over a long period of time or whether the player has shifted to a high-probability low-support state (invincible zone). Such a sense of urgency can be imparted to the player. In addition, when the number of games played after the start of the high-frequency support mode reaches the guaranteed number of games, the player is expected to transition to a high-accuracy low-support state (invincible zone) without falling. can do. As described above, according to this modified example, it is possible to further give the player a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency, and to further improve the interest in the game.

<<8-8-5>> Modification 5:
In the eighth embodiment and its modified example, when a game ball enters the falling hole 252, the lottery mode of the winning lottery is changed from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. On the other hand, as a modification, a lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the fall hole 252 is used to determine whether or not the winning will occur, for example, with a probability of 1/2. A configuration may be adopted in which the high-probability mode is shifted to the low-probability mode. According to this configuration, it is possible to give the player a greater sense of urgency as to whether the lottery mode will shift from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode and the player will be put in a disadvantageous state.

<<8-8-6>> Modification 6:
In the above eighth embodiment and its modification, the game ball entering the right first starting hole 44 is allowed to enter the falling hole 252 with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/21), and the game ball enters the falling hole 252. By switching the lottery mode of the winning lottery from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode when the ball enters, the lottery mode is set to high with a predetermined probability when the game ball enters the right first start hole 44.例文帳に追加The configuration is such that the probability mode can be switched to the low probability mode. On the other hand, as a modification, a lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the right first starting port 44 determines whether or not a fall win is made with a probability of, for example, 1/21. The lottery mode of the lottery may be changed from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode. That is, in software, when a game ball enters the right first start hole 44, the lottery mode may be switched from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode with a predetermined probability. According to this modification, it is possible to give the player a sense of urgency as to whether or not the lottery mode will shift from the high probability mode to the low probability mode and the player will be put in a disadvantageous state. Furthermore, according to this modification, the out port 251 in the starting unit, the fall port 252, the passage leading to the out port 251 in the starting port unit, the passage leading to the falling port 252, etc. can be omitted. It also has the effect of simplifying.

<<8-8-7>> Modification 7:
In the eighth embodiment and its modification, in the high-precision high support state, as a condition for shifting the support mode from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode, the number of games after the high-frequency support mode is started is guaranteed. There are two cases, that is, the case that the number of games is reached and the case that a special small prize is won in the winning lottery in the current game round. On the other hand, as a modification, as a condition for the above transition, if the number of games after the high frequency support mode is started reaches the guaranteed number of games, and a special small win is won in the winning lottery in this game round It may be either one of the following cases. Further, the conditions for transition may be three or more conditions in which other cases are added to the above two cases.

<<8-8-8>> Modification 8:
In the eighth embodiment and its modification, as shown in FIG. 346, in the low definite height support state, the special 2 fluctuation time is set to a normal length. On the other hand, as a modification, in the low definite height support state, the special 2 fluctuation time may be set to a very long time such as 10 minutes. In the low fixed height support state, it is impossible to enter the game ball into the second starting port 34, but the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b holds the reservation information (up to 4 pieces). In the remaining low-probability support state, a winning lottery may be executed based on the remaining reservation information. Then, it becomes an excessively advantageous state for the player, but in this modification, in the low fixed height support state, while it is impossible to enter the game ball to the second start port 34, By setting the second variable time to an extremely long time such as 10 minutes, it is possible to suppress repeated digestion of the pending information remaining in the second pending area Rb in a short period of time.

<<8-8-9>> Modification 9:
In the eighth embodiment and its modification, the game ball distribution device 240 for distributing game balls between the flow path leading to the falling port 252 and the flow path leading to the out port 251 in the starting port unit is reciprocated. A configuration is adopted in which game balls are sorted by the segment portion 242.例文帳に追加According to this configuration, the distribution destination of the game ball is determined by the timing at which the game ball enters the movable range of the distribution piece portion 242 . On the other hand, as a modified example, game balls may be distributed by a dish-shaped accessory (so-called croon) provided with a plurality of holes into which game balls enter. According to this configuration, the allocation destination of the game ball is determined by the kinetic energy (velocity) of the game ball moving on the crew. This modification can also provide the player with a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency. In addition, the game ball sorting device 240 is not limited to the configuration including the sorting piece portion 242 or the configuration including the dish-shaped accessory, and can be configured by structures of various shapes (hardware configuration). It can also be replaced with a device for distributing game balls.

<<8-8-10>> Modification 10:
In the above eighth embodiment and its modification, the distribution table for the second starting port (see FIG. 341(b)) includes a jackpot type based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34, which is a variable probability. A jackpot and a normal jackpot are mixed and set. On the other hand, as a modified example, the distribution table for the second starting port may be configured such that only the probability variable jackpot is set and the normal jackpot is not set. This configuration is realized by a V-variant. The V probability variable machine is a model in which the lottery mode becomes a high probability mode triggered by the game ball entering a specific area (V zone) during the round game that occurs in the opening and closing execution mode. By using the V probability variable machine, it is possible to change the probability of a variable probability big hit between when the game ball enters the first start port and when the game ball enters the second start port. In this modification, by setting it as a V definite variable machine, the structure in which only the definite variable jackpot is set with respect to the distribution table for the second starting port is realized.

The game flow in this modified example is different from the game flow in the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment shown in FIG. becomes. Therefore, the high-probability-low support state H6 continues until the next winning of the variable probability big win, and the next variable probability big win is practically guaranteed. In the high-probability-low support state H6 in the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment, the next big hit is guaranteed, but it is not guaranteed that the distribution determination result (jackpot type) will be a variable probability big hit. On the other hand, in this modification, in the high probability low support state H6, since the next probability variable jackpot is guaranteed, when moving from the high probability high support state H5 to the high probability low support state H6, even more A sense of relief can be imparted to the player.

<<8-8-11>> Modification 11:
In the above embodiment and each modification, the outer frame of the pachinko machine is not limited to being made of wood, but may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin. , cast steel, stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, alloy steel, and other metals. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the modifications, the inner frame provided in the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin. It may be made of metal such as stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, or alloy steel. Further, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the front door frame provided in the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin, and may be made of steel (carbon steel), cast iron, or cast steel. , stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, alloy steel, and other metals. Further, in the above embodiment and each modification, the pachinko machine has a function of locking the inner frame to the outer frame so that it cannot be opened, and a function of locking the front door frame to the inner frame so that it cannot be opened. However, after adopting a configuration in which this cylinder lock is omitted, a first cylinder lock having a function of locking the inner frame to the outer frame so that it cannot be opened, and the front door frame A configuration in which a second cylinder lock having a function of locking the inner frame so that it cannot be opened may be employed. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, the configuration in which the rotation shaft for rotating the inner frame with respect to the outer frame is provided on the left side when viewed from the front is adopted. You may employ the structure provided. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modified examples, the configuration in which the rotation shaft for rotating the front door frame with respect to the inner frame is provided on the left side when viewed from the front is adopted. may be adopted. Further, in the above embodiment and each modification, the game board provided in the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin, and may be made of steel (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, It may be made of metal such as stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, or alloy steel. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modifications, when a game ball passes through the ball entry portion 210a of the starting port unit 200 as the predetermined area through which the game ball can pass, the right side first From the signal from the detection sensor for the starting port 44, the signal from the detection sensor for the second starting port 34, the signal from the detection sensor for the falling port 252, and the signal from the detection sensor for the out port 251 in the starting port unit It is configured to acquire one piece of result information. On the other hand, as a modification, when the game ball passes through the right first starting port 44 as a predetermined area through which the game ball can pass, the value of the hit random number counter C1 as multiple types of result information and the jackpot type A configuration may be adopted in which one piece of result information is acquired from the value of the counter C2. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each modification, the pachinko machine employs a configuration including an upper tray and a lower tray, but the lower tray may be omitted and a configuration including only the upper tray may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, a configuration in which the operation handle is provided on the right side in front view is adopted, but a configuration in which the operation handle is provided on the left side in front view may be adopted. Also, a configuration in which the operation handle is provided on both the right side and the left side when viewed from the front may be adopted. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the modifications, the operating handle is provided with a touch sensor capable of detecting whether or not the player is gripping the operating handle (whether or not the player's hand is in contact with the operating handle). However, a configuration in which the touch sensor is omitted may be adopted. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modification, various configurations can be adopted as the shooting means capable of shooting game balls. Alternatively, a structure or the like may be adopted in which the game ball is shot using the wind pressure generated when the compressed gas is ejected. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, when the operating handle is turned clockwise by a predetermined amount, about 100 game balls are shot per minute. A configuration in which less than 100 (eg, 60) game balls are fired per minute may be used, and a configuration in which 100 or more (eg, 200) game balls are fired per minute may be used. good. Alternatively, the game ball may be shot one by one by flipping the lever. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modification, the first distribution means is configured by the electric accessory 34a, and the second distribution means is configured by the game ball distribution device 240. Alternatively, the first sorting means and the second sorting means can be configured by the control section and table data stored in the storage section. As the table data, for example, a success/failure table and a sorting table can be used. Specifically, the means for executing the winning lottery using the success/failure table may be the first distribution means, and the means for executing distribution determination using the distribution table may be the second distribution means. In this case, the first result obtained by the first distribution means corresponds to the loss of the winning lottery, the second result obtained by the first distribution means corresponds to the big win of the winning lottery, and the second distribution means corresponds to the winning lottery. The obtained third result may correspond to the variable probability jackpot as the result of the distribution determination, and the fourth result may correspond to the normal jackpot as the result of the distribution determination. In such a modification, as in the above embodiment and each modification, the specific game state of the transition source to be shifted by the game state transition means corresponds to the high probability high support state, and the predetermined game state of the transition destination is low probability high Corresponds to support status. This modification can also provide the player with a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency, thereby making the game more interesting. Note that the predetermined area in this modification may be the main line passage portion 210 leading to the second starting port 34 instead of the first right starting port 44 . Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, a configuration in which a speaker is provided as means capable of outputting sound is adopted, but a configuration in which an earphone jack is provided in addition to or instead of the speaker may be adopted. According to this configuration, the player can hear the sound of the pachinko machine he/she is playing without being disturbed by the sounds of the surrounding pachinko machines by connecting the earphones or headphones he/she has brought with him/herself to the earphone jack. It is possible to enjoy it in minutes. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, various configurations can be adopted as the display means capable of displaying the special symbol that starts the variable display based on the entry of the game ball into the various starting holes. For example, an LED lamp, an LED display device, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a halogen lamp, or the like may be employed. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modified examples, various configurations can be adopted as the display means capable of displaying the normal symbols that start the variable display based on the passage of the game ball through various gates, For example, an LED lamp, an LED display device, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a halogen lamp, or the like may be employed. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, various configurations can be adopted as display means capable of displaying various decorative patterns, such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, and an LED display device. , a rotating drum type display device, a light guide plate, a three-dimensional hologram display device, or the like may be employed. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, the decorative pattern is not limited to numerals, and various characters, figures, symbols, patterns, etc., and combinations thereof can be employed. For example, as decorative patterns, alphabets, Greek letters, hiragana, katakana, kanji, various characters, and combinations thereof may be employed. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each modification, the number of symbol rows in which decorative symbols are scrolled is not limited to three, and may be, for example, two or less, or four or more. In the case of adopting a configuration in which there is only one decorative pattern row, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a jackpot is won when a specific decorative pattern (for example, "7") stops. In the case of adopting a configuration in which two or more rows of decorative patterns are employed, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a jackpot is won when the same decorative patterns stop on a specific line. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, various configurations can be adopted as the special electric accessory. A configuration in which the large winning slot can be opened by rotating the plate-shaped member forward about the rotation shaft, or a configuration in which the large winning slot is opened and closed by a plate-shaped member that can slide in the front-rear direction of the game board, etc. may be adopted. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modifications described above, various configurations can be adopted as the ordinary electric accessory. A rotation shaft extending in a substantially horizontal direction is provided below the plate-shaped member, and the plate-shaped member rotates forward about the rotation shaft to open the starting port, front and rear of the game board A structure or the like in which the starting port is opened and closed by a plate-shaped member that can slide in a direction may be adopted. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, the number of winning balls set in each ball opening (starting hole, general winning opening, big winning opening, etc.) is an example, and is set for each ball opening By appropriately changing the number of prize balls, it is possible to realize a plurality of types of pachinko machines with different specifications.

<<8-8-12>> Modification 12:
In the eighth embodiment and its modification, the starting port provided in the opening 210c of the starting port unit 200 is the first starting port (right first starting port 44). On the other hand, as a modification, the starting port provided in the opening 210c of the starting port unit 200 may be configured to be the second starting port.

FIG. 401 is an explanatory diagram showing the starting port unit 200X in this modified example. The starting port unit 200X in this modification includes, as starting ports, an upper second starting port (second starting port replacing the right first starting port 44 in the eighth embodiment) 934 and a lower second starting port (eighth starting port). It has a starting port 34 which is the same as the second starting port 34 in the embodiment. The configuration of the starter unit 200X other than this configuration and the hardware configuration other than the starter are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment. In FIG. 401, the same reference numerals as in the eighth embodiment are attached to the same parts as in the eighth embodiment. In this modification, instead of providing a special small win in the lottery result of the winning lottery of the winning lottery table for the first starting port (for high probability mode), the winning lottery table for the second starting port (for high probability mode) It was configured to provide a special small hit in the lottery result of the winning lottery. According to this modification also, it is possible to shift from a high-probability high support state to a high-probability low support state which is an invincible zone, and similar to the eighth embodiment, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency. , It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to this modified example, the following effects are also exhibited. In the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment, when the jackpot is won, the type of jackpot is distributed according to the jackpot winning based on the ball entering the first start port 33 and the second start port. 34 is different from the case of winning the jackpot based on the ball entering the second start port 34, and the case of winning the jackpot based on the ball entering the second start port 34 is more likely to enter the first start port 33. Compared with the case of winning a jackpot based on the ball, the configuration is highly advantageous for the player. For this reason, according to this modification, since the right first starting port 44 is replaced with the upper second starting port 934, it is possible to pass the game ball through the starting port unit 200X compared to the eighth embodiment. Benefits are higher. Therefore, according to this modification, in the high-probability-high support state H5, hit to the left, rather than entering the game ball to the center side first start port 33, hit to the right and hit to the upper side second start port. Since it is possible for the player to recognize that it is more advantageous to enter the game ball into the 934, it is recommended that the player hit weakly to the right in the high accuracy and high support state H5. It has a secondary effect of being able to In addition, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment, originally, when the jackpot is won based on the ball entering the second start port 34, it is better to enter the first start port 33. Compared to the case of winning a jackpot based on the ball entering, the advantage for the player is high, but the degree of the advantage may be increased. Concretely, it is good also as the constitution which makes the frequency of the round game of the distribution result of the distribution table for the 1st starting port small, for example 2R. In short, the advantage for the player when the jackpot is won based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port is the game when the jackpot is won based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port. Any configuration can be substituted as long as it can be reduced relative to the advantage to the user.

In addition, in this modified example in which the starting port provided in the opening 210c of the starting port unit 200X is the upper second starting port 934, the fluctuation time (special 1 fluctuation time ) is set to a very long time such as 10 minutes, for example, in the high-probability high support state H5, the winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start port 34 is repeatedly executed in a short period of time. It is good also as a structure which suppresses this. As a result, in this modification, it is possible to make the player give up hitting to the left and concentrate on hitting to the weak right in the high-probability-high support state H5. As a modification to this modification, in addition to the high probability high support state H5, the low probability high support state H3 and the high probability low support state H6 are also set to a very long time such as 10 minutes. may be configured. That is, it is possible to set the special 1 fluctuation time in various game states H3, H5, H6 other than the low probability low support state H1, which is assumed to make the player hit left, to an extremely long time such as 10 minutes. good. As a result, in the game states H3, H5 and H6 other than the low-probability-low support state H1, the player can be made to give up the left-hand hitting operation and concentrate on the weak right-hand hitting.

Furthermore, in this modification in which the starting port provided in the opening 210c of the starting port unit 200X is the upper second starting port 934, the distribution result of the distribution table for the second starting port is only the probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot ) may be configured. This configuration is realized by the above-described V-transformer. According to this configuration, first, in the high probability high support state H5, as long as the jackpot is won, the high probability high support state H5 can always be continued, so in the high probability high support state H5, the upper side It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation to win a big win in the winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second start hole 934.例文帳に追加In addition, in the high-probability-high support state, even if the player does not win the jackpot, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the number of games will reach the guaranteed number of games before falling. Then, in the high-probability-low support state H6, which is shifted by the number of games reaching the guaranteed number of games without falling, a sense of relief in the invincible zone where there is no normal jackpot (always a variable jackpot). It is possible to give more to the player, and to improve the interest of the game.

<<8-8-13>> Modification 13:
In the high-accuracy-high support state H5, rather than hitting left and entering the game ball into the center side first start hole 33, hitting slightly right and letting the game ball enter the right side first start hole 44 is performed. The following method is also available as a method for making the player recognize that there is a greater merit in . Specifically, the variation time of the first symbol display portion 37b based on the entrance of the game ball to the center side first start port 33 in the high probability high support state H5 (also referred to as the center side special 1 variation time) is set to 10, for example. By setting the time to an extremely long time such as minutes, it is suppressed that the winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the central side first start port 33 is repeatedly executed in a short period of time in the high-probability-high sapo state H5. It is good also as a structure which carries out. As a result, in this modification, it is possible to make the player give up hitting to the left and concentrate on hitting to the weak right in the high-probability-high support state H5. As a modification to this modification, in addition to the high probability high support state H5, the center side special 1 fluctuation time for the low probability high support state H3 and the high probability low support state H6 is set to an extremely long time such as 10 minutes It is good also as a structure which sets. That is, it is possible to set the special 1 fluctuation time in various game states H3, H5, H6 other than the low probability low support state H1, which is assumed to make the player hit left, to an extremely long time such as 10 minutes. good. As a result, in the game states H3, H5 and H6 other than the low-probability-low support state H1, the player can be made to give up the left-hand hitting operation and concentrate on the weak right-hand hitting.

<<8-8-14>> Modification 14:
In the eighth embodiment and its modified example, the guaranteed number of games in the high-frequency support mode is set to 50, but as a modified example, the guaranteed number of games may be set to one. The game flow in this modification differs from the game flow in the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment shown in FIG. When the guaranteed number of games is 1, if the player falls in the first game rotation, the lottery mode shifts from the high probability mode to the low probability mode at the time of the fall, and the support mode is high when the fluctuation of the game rotation stops. Since the frequency support mode is shifted to the low frequency support mode, the transition destination when falling in the high probability high support state H5 becomes the low probability low support state H1. That is, in the high-probability high support state H5, when falling, it moves from the high-probability high support state H5 to the low-probability low support state H1. It should be noted that, when the guaranteed number of games is 1, if the player does not fall in the first game rotation, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment, the high probability low support state H5 is changed to the high probability low support state H5. It shifts to the support state H6. Even with this modification, similar to the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by imparting emotions such as anticipation, tension, and relief to the player. It should be noted that the guaranteed number of games does not have to be limited to 1 or 50, and may be any other number.

<<8-8-15>> Modification 15:
In the eighth embodiment and its modification, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to include three control devices, the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90, and the display control device 100, but instead of this, the main control It is good also as a structure provided with two control devices, such as a device and a sub control device. The sub control device may be configured to execute various processes executed by the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 in the eighth embodiment. Further, in the eighth embodiment and its modification, the various processes executed by the three control devices 60, 90, and 100 are not necessarily limited to the division described in the eighth embodiment, and the three control devices As a whole of 60, 90 and 100, it is sufficient that various processes in the eighth embodiment can be executed.

<<9>> Ninth Embodiment:
<<9-1>> Game machine structure:
Fig. 402 is a perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter also referred to as "pachinko machine") as a ninth embodiment of the present invention. A pachinko machine 10 has a wooden outer frame 11 combined in a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island equipment of the game hall. The pachinko machine 10 also includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11 . A pachinko machine body 12 has an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13. - 特許庁The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11 by metal hinges 15 . The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 16 with respect to the inner frame 13 . On the back of the inner frame 13, control devices for controlling the pachinko machine main body 12, such as a main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device, are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. - 特許庁The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened, and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation using a dedicated key on the cylinder lock 17 .

A substantially central portion of the front door frame 14 is formed with an open window portion 18 . Around the window part 18, resin parts and electric decoration parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. The electrical parts are composed of light emitting means including various lamps such as LEDs. The light emitting means plays a role of enhancing the performance effect by lighting or blinking at each game played by the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot is won, when a ready-to-win game is generated, or the like. A glass unit 19 composed of two sheets of plate glass is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14 , and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19 . A game board, which will be described later, is detachably attached to the inner frame 13 , and the player of the pachinko machine 10 can view the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 19 . Details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper tray 20 and a lower tray 21 for storing game balls. The upper tray 20 is formed in a box shape with an open top, and stores game balls such as rental balls lent from a rental machine (not shown) and prize balls discharged from the pachinko machine main body 12 . The game balls stored in the upper tray 20 are supplied to a game ball shooting mechanism provided in the pachinko machine main body 12. - 特許庁The game ball shooting mechanism is driven by the player's operation of the operation handle 25, and shoots the game balls supplied from the upper tray 20 to the front surface of the game board. The lower tray 21 is arranged below the upper tray 20 and is shaped like a box with an open top. The lower tray 21 stores game balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 20. - 特許庁A discharge port 22 for discharging game balls stored in the lower tray 21 is formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 21 . A lever 23 is provided below the ejection port 22 , and the player can switch the ejection port 22 between a closed state and an open state by operating the lever 23 . When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game ball falls from the discharge port 22 and is discharged from the lower tray 21 to the outside.

A performance operation button 24 is provided in front of the peripheral edge of the upper plate 20.例文帳に追加The effect operation button 24 is an operation unit for the player to perform an input operation for the game effect performed by the pachinko machine 10 . When a player operates a performance operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, a game performance reflecting the operation is performed by the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

An operation handle 25 for a player to operate is provided on the right side of the front door frame 14 when viewed from the front (hereinafter also simply referred to as "right side"). When the player operates (turns) the operation handle 25, a game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism to the front surface of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operation handle 25, there are a touch sensor 25a for permitting driving of the game ball shooting mechanism, a wait button 25b for stopping shooting of game balls by the game ball shooting mechanism when pressed by the player, and the operation handle 25. A variable resistor 25c is provided for detecting the amount of rotational operation of , based on a change in electrical resistance. When the player grips the operating handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operating handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. Then, a game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism to the front surface of the game board with strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

A game ball shooting button 26 for a player to operate is provided on the left side of the periphery of the upper tray 20 in front view (hereinafter also simply referred to as "left side"). When the game ball shooting button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is shot to the front surface of the game board with a predetermined shooting strength regardless of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 by the player. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball shooting button 26, the game ball is shot to the front surface of the game board with the same shooting intensity as when the operation handle 25 is rotated at its maximum. In the case of this embodiment, when a game ball is shot by operating the game ball shooting button 26, the game ball flows to the right side of the game board when viewed from the front and also to the right side of the game board. That is, by operating the game ball shooting button 26, the player can hit the ball to the right. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the game ball shooting button 26 is operated, the game ball is shot to the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is turned on. . That is, the player turns on at least the touch sensor 25a by grasping the operation handle 25, and then operates the game ball shooting button 26 to shoot the game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball shooting button 26. can be realized.

Next, the configuration of the rear surface of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. A control device for controlling the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is arranged on the back surface of the pachinko machine 10. - 特許庁

403 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. As shown, the pachinko machine 10 includes a first control unit 51, a second control unit 52, a third control unit 53, and a power supply unit 58. Specifically, these units are provided on the back surface of the inner frame 13 .

The first control unit 51 has a main controller 60 . The main controller 60 has a main control board having a function of controlling the main game. The main control board is housed in a board box made of transparent resin material. This board box is configured to leave traces of opening and closing. For example, a seal is affixed to a portion that can be opened and closed, and when the substrate box is opened, characters such as "opened" appear.

The second control unit 52 includes an audio emission control device 90 and a display control device 100 . The sound emission control device 90 controls emission means such as speakers and various lamps provided in front of the pachinko machine 10 based on commands transmitted from the main control device 60 . The display control device 100 controls the pattern display device based on commands transmitted from the sound emission control device 90 . The pattern display device has a liquid crystal display for displaying patterns and images for presentation.

The third control unit 53 has a payout control device 70 and a launch control device 80 . The payout control device 70 performs payout control for paying out prize balls. When an instruction to shoot a game ball is input from the main control device 60, the shooting control device 80 shoots a game ball with strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 by the player. Controls the ball launching mechanism. In addition, on the back of the inner frame 13, there is a tank 54 to which the game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially supplied, and a slope which is connected to the lower part of the tank 54 and is gently inclined so that the game balls flow downstream. , a case rail 56 connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 55, a game ball is supplied from the case rail 56, and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out according to an instruction from the payout control device 70. A plurality of devices necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10, such as a payout device 71, are provided.

The power supply unit 58 includes a power supply device 85 and a power switch 88 . The power supply device 85 supplies power necessary for the pachinko machine 10 to operate. A power switch 88 is connected to the power supply device 85 . By ON/OFF operation of the power switch 88, a supply state in which power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 and a non-supply state in which power is not supplied to the pachinko machine 10 are switched.

Next, the game board will be explained. The game board is detachably attached to the front surface of the inner frame 13. - 特許庁

404 is a front view of the game board 30. FIG. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on its front surface. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding a game ball is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. A game ball shot from the game ball shooting mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and released above the game area PA, and then flows down the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicularly to the game board 30, and accessories such as windmills are arranged. These nails 42 and windmills distribute and organize the falling directions of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

The game board 30 is formed with a plurality of openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening is provided with a general winning opening 32, a first starting opening 33, a second starting opening 34, a through gate 35, a variable winning device 36, and a V winning opening . Also, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display section 45 . Specifically, the variable display unit 40 is provided substantially in the center of the game board 30, and the main display section 45 is provided near the upper right of the game board 30 when viewed from the front.

The general prize winning openings 32 are ball entrances into which game balls can enter, and are provided in plurality on the game board 30 . In this embodiment, when game balls enter the general winning hole 32, 10 game balls are paid out as prize balls from the payout device 71 (Fig. 403).

The first starting port 33 is a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter. The first starting port 33 is provided below the center of the game area PA. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first start hole 33, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a winning lottery, which will be described later, is executed.

The second starting port 34 is a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and is provided on the upper right side of the game area PA. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting port 34, one game ball is paid out as a prize ball, and a winning lottery, which will be described later, is executed. Further, the second starting port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a.

The through gate 35 has a through hole extending vertically. The through gate 35 is a through gate that serves as a trigger for executing a lottery for opening the electric accessory 34a. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the main controller 60 performs an internal lottery (electric accessory open lottery) triggered by the passage. As a result of the internal lottery, when the electric role open is won, the electric accessory 34a shifts to the electric role open state in a predetermined manner. Since the through gate 35 is arranged on the upstream side of the second starting port 34 with respect to the flowing direction of the game ball, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 flows down the game area PA after passing through the second opening. It is possible to enter the ball into the starting port 34 . In addition, in this embodiment, even if the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the prize ball is not paid out.

The variable winning device 36 is provided on the lower right side of the game area PA. The variable winning device 36 includes a large winning opening 36a leading to the back side of the game board 30, and an opening/closing door 36b for opening and closing the large winning opening 36a. The big winning opening 36a is an entrance into which a game ball can enter, and is formed in a rectangular shape in this embodiment. The opening/closing door 36b is a rectangular lid body one size larger than the big winning opening 36a, and is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter the big winning opening 36a. When a game ball enters the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, the main controller 60 executes a winning lottery (internal lottery). As a result of winning lottery, when a big win is won, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to an opening/closing execution mode. The opening/closing execution mode is a mode in which opening/closing processing of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is executed. Specifically, when the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, it transitions from a closed state in which game balls cannot enter to an open state in which game balls can enter, and a predetermined condition is satisfied. After that, it transitions to the closed state again. In the present embodiment, when game balls enter the big winning hole 36a of the variable winning device 36, the payout device 71 pays out 15 game balls as prize balls.

The V winning opening 48 is a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and is a ball entrance that is a condition for operating the high probability mode. In this embodiment, the V winning opening 48 is provided inside the big winning opening 36 a of the variable winning device 36 . The V winning opening 48 is provided with a V winning opening shutter 48 a for opening and closing the V winning opening 48 . The V winning opening shutter 48a changes from a closed state to an open state at a predetermined timing in an opening/closing execution mode executed with the jackpot winning as a trigger after winning a big win by a winning lottery, and returns to a closed state after a lapse of a certain time. A game ball can enter the V winning opening 48 during a period in which the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is open and the V winning opening shutter 48a is open. When a game ball enters the V winning hole 48, the lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. The predetermined timing for switching from the closed state to the open state will be described later.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, after a predetermined number of game rounds (hereinafter also referred to as ST times) are executed in the high probability mode game state, the lottery mode shifts from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. The number of STs is 50 in this embodiment. In addition, the number of times of ST is not limited to 50 times, and may be other times such as 60 times, 40 times, 30 times, 20 times, or the like. In this embodiment, the number of times of ST is limited to the number of times greater than the number of times of continuous time saving (for example, 10 times) described later, and any number of times greater than the number of times of continuous time saving may be used.

An out port 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and game balls that have not entered various ball entrances are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 43. - 特許庁

A game ball entering the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, the large winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36, the V winning opening 48, and the out opening 43 is placed on the back of the game board 30. It is configured to finally join the provided discharge passage, and the discharge passage is provided with a discharge passage detection sensor for detecting a game ball. By detecting the game balls with the discharge path detection sensor, it is possible to grasp the number of game balls shot to the game board 30. - 特許庁

The main display section 45 has a special figure unit 37 , a normal figure unit 38 , and a round display section 39 .

The special figure unit 37 includes a first symbol display portion 37a and a second symbol display portion 37b. Each of the first pattern display portion 37a and the second pattern display portion 37b is composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting portions are arranged in a predetermined manner.

The first pattern display portion 37a is a display portion for displaying the first pattern. The first pattern refers to a pattern that is variably displayed or statically displayed based on a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33 . The first symbol display part 37a is used as a display mode until a winning lottery is performed triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 33, and the display corresponding to the lottery result is performed on the segment display device. , to perform the variable display of the first symbol. When the lottery is finished, the first symbol display unit 37a causes the segment display to stop displaying the first symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

The second pattern display portion 37b is a display portion for displaying the second pattern. The second pattern refers to a pattern that is variably displayed or statically displayed based on a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34 . The second symbol display part 37b is used as a display mode until a winning lottery is performed triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 34, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is performed on the segment display device. , to perform the variable display of the second symbol. When the lottery is finished, the second symbol display section 37b causes the segment display device to stop displaying the second symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

Here, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol displayed in the second symbol display portion 37b to the stop display is Also called variable time. Specifically, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed in the first symbol display portion 37a to the stop display is also called the first variation time, and the second symbol display portion 37b The time from the start of the variable display of the second symbol to be displayed until the stop display is also called a second variable time.

The special figure unit 37 is further provided with a first reserved display portion 37c made of an LED lamp at a position adjacent to the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b. In this embodiment, up to four game balls entered into the first starting port 33 are reserved. The first reservation display portion 37c displays the number of reservations for the first starting port 33 according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be lit. Note that the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that a game ball entered into the second start hole 34 is not held. Therefore, the condition that the second symbol is variably displayed is established based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 during the period in which neither the first symbol nor the second symbol is variably displayed. On the other hand, this configuration is not established based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 during the period in which the first symbol or the second symbol is variably displayed.

The normal figure unit 38 is composed of a light-emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. The normal figure unit 38, when the electric accessary item open lottery triggered by the passage of the through gate 35 is performed, causes the light-emitting display to display in a lighting display, a blinking display, or a predetermined mode. When the electric accessory open lottery ends, the normal figure unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The round display section 39 is composed of a light-emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games that occur in the open/close execution mode or displays corresponding thereto. A round game means that either a predetermined upper limit duration time elapses or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls enter the variable winning device 36 until either condition is met. It is a game in which the door 36b is kept open. The number of round games varies depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the shift. The round display unit 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the opening/closing execution mode is started, and ends when the opening/closing execution mode is finished and a new game is started.

In addition, the special figure unit 37, the general figure unit 38, and the round display unit 39 are not limited to being configured by a segment display device or a light emitting display device using an LED lamp. It may consist of various display devices capable of showing the draw in progress and the draw results, such as a CRT or dot matrix display.

The variable display unit 40 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area PA. The variable display unit 40 has a pattern display device 41 . The pattern display device 41 has a liquid crystal display. The display contents of the pattern display device 41 are controlled by the display control device 100 . The pattern display device 41 may be replaced with various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

When the first symbol display unit 37a performs variable display or static display based on the ball entering the first starting hole 33, the symbol display device 41 performs variable display or static display of the symbols accordingly. Further, when the second symbol display unit 37b performs variable display or static display based on the ball entering the second starting hole 34, the symbol display device 41 performs variable display or static display of the symbols accordingly. The symbol display device 41 performs not only the display performance triggered by the entry of the ball into the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, but also the display performance during the opening/closing execution mode that shifts when the jackpot is won. . Details of the pattern display device 41 will be described below.

FIG. 405 is an explanatory diagram showing the symbols that are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41 and the display surface 41a. FIG. 405(a) is an explanatory diagram showing decorative symbols that are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41. FIG. As shown in FIG. 405(a), the pattern display device 41 variably displays patterns representing numbers 1 to 8 as decorative patterns. As the decorative patterns to be variably displayed, a pattern in which a pattern such as a character is attached to each pattern representing the numbers 1 to 8 may be employed.

FIG. 405(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. As shown in FIG. As shown in the figure, the display surface 41a displays three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 on the left, middle and right. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the symbols of numbers 1 to 8 shown in FIG. 405(a) are arranged in ascending or descending order of numbers, and each symbol row is cyclically arranged from top to bottom or from bottom. A variable display that scrolls upward is performed. As shown in FIG. 405(b), after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol row is displayed in a stationary state on the activated line L1.

Specifically, when a game ball enters the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, a variable display is started in which the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are cyclically scrolled in a predetermined direction. Then, the symbols to be scrolled are switched from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol row Z1, the symbol row Z3, and the symbol row Z2, and finally, the predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. . When the variable display of the symbols is finished and the display is stopped, and when the result of the winning lottery by the main control device 60 is a big win, a predetermined predetermined combination of symbols appears on the activated line L1. It is formed. For example, the same symbol combination is formed on the activated line L1. It should be noted that the manner in which the decorative symbols are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the manner described above. Various modes can be adopted for the variable display mode of decorative symbols such as the number of symbols.

Here, the "game cycle" means the period from the start of the variable display of the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b to the end of the variable display and the stop display until the end of the stop display. In other words, it is one unit of processing for notifying the player of the lottery result of the winning lottery for the special information acquired based on the ball entering either the first start hole 33 or the second start hole 34 . In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one winning lottery for one piece of special information for each game. When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires the special information based on the ball entering either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the first symbol display portion 37a and the second In either one of the pattern display portions 37b, after the segment display is variably displayed, the segment display is stop-displayed so that the display corresponding to the lottery result of the acquired special information is displayed. Further, when the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires the special information based on the ball entering either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the pattern display device 41 displays a predetermined After the symbol row is variably displayed, the symbol row is stopped and displayed so as to correspond to the lottery result of the acquired special information. In addition, the time required for one game round is also called unit game time. The unit playing time is composed of a variable time, which is the time from when the variable display is started until the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed, and a stop time, which is the time when the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed. there is

Further, as shown in FIG. 405(b), the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 displays the first reserved display area Ds1. In the first pending display area Ds1, the pending number based on the winning to the first starting port 33 is displayed. In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, the number of game balls entered into the first starting port 33 is up to four.

Further, as shown in FIG. 405(b), on the display surface 41a, blinking display and lighting in synchronization with the variable display and stop display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a of the special figure unit 37 are displayed. The first synchronous display unit Sync1 that performs the display, and the second synchronous display that performs blinking display and lighting display in synchronization with the variable display and stop display of the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display unit 37b of the special figure unit 37 Sync2. Specifically, when the first symbol display portion 37a is performing the variable display, the first synchronization display portion Sync1 performs blinking display, and when the first symbol display portion 37a is performing the stop display, the 1 synchronous display section Sync1 performs lighting display. Further, when the second symbol display portion 37b is performing the variable display, the second synchronization display portion Sync2 performs blinking display, and when the second symbol display portion 37b is performing the stop display, the second synchronization display. The part Sync2 performs lighting display.

In this embodiment, the display surface 41a is configured to display the main display area MA, the first reserved display area Ds1, the first synchronization display section Sync1, and the second synchronization display section Sync2. A configuration in which 41a does not display some or all of these displays may be employed.

<<9-2>> Electrical Configuration of Gaming Machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described using a block diagram.

FIG. 406 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 10 mainly includes a main controller 60 , a sound emission control device 90 , and a display control device 100 .

The main controller 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main game. The main control board 61 has an MPU 62 composed of elements having multiple functions. The MPU 62 includes a CPU (not shown) that executes various control programs, a ROM 63 that records various control programs and fixed value data, and temporarily stores various data when executing the programs recorded in the ROM 63. and a RAM 64, which is a memory for storing. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. A part of the functions of the MPU 62 may be provided by another element. Details of various areas provided in the ROM 63 and RAM 64 will be described later.

The main control board 61 is provided with an input port (not shown) and an output port (not shown). An input port of the main control board 61 is connected to a payout control device 70 and a power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in a power supply device 85 . The main control board 61 is supplied with stable 24 V DC power from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86 . The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power supply as an external power supply, and converts the external power supplied from the commercial power supply into the operating power required by the main control device 60, the payout control device 70, etc., to each device supply power. The power supply device 85 has a capacitor (not shown), and continues to supply power to each device for a predetermined period of time when a power failure occurs or when the power switch 88 (Fig. 403) is turned off. do.

In addition, the input port of the main control board 61, the general prize winning port 32, the first starting port 33, the second starting port 34, the through gate 35, the variable winning device 36, V winning port 48 and other various ball entrances and Various detection sensors 67a to 67f provided in the through gate are connected. Based on the signals from these detection sensors 67a to 67f, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether or not the game ball flowing down the game area PA has entered the ball entrance, and the game ball passes through the gate. It is determined whether or not the Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 and the second start port 34, and executes the electric accessory release lottery based on the entry of the ball into the through gate 35. do.

The output port of the main control board 61 is provided with a variable winning driving unit 36c that opens and closes the open/close door 36b of the variable winning device 36, and an electric accessory driving unit 34b that opens and closes the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34. , V winning opening shutter driving section 48b for opening and closing the V winning opening shutter 48a, and the main display section 45 are connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning driving section 36c so that the opening/closing door 36b is opened/closed. Further, as a result of the electric accessory opening lottery, when the electric role opening is won, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 34b so that the electric accessory 34a is released. Further, when a predetermined lottery result is obtained in the lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 and the second start port 34, the V winning port 48 is opened at a predetermined timing during the round game.・The driving control of the V winning opening shutter driving section 48b is executed so that the closed V winning opening shutter 48a is opened and closed. Furthermore, in each game cycle, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b in the main display portion 45, and in the opening/closing execution mode, round display in the main display portion 45. Display control of the unit 39 is executed.

An output port of the main control board 61 is connected with a payout control device 70 and a sound emission control device 90 . A prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 70 from the main control device 60 based on the winning judgment result, for example. When the main controller 60 transmits the prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63. FIG. Specifically, when entering the ball into the general winning hole 32 is specified, a winning ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is transmitted from the main controller 60, and the ball enters the first starting hole 33. is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is transmitted from the main controller 60, and when entering the second start port 34 is specified, one game ball is paid out A prize ball command corresponding to is transmitted from the main controller 60, and a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 15 game balls is transmitted from the main controller 60 when the ball entering the big winning opening 36a is specified. be. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 based on the prize ball command received from the main controller 60 to pay out prize balls.

A discharge control device 80 is connected to the payout control device 70 . The shooting control device 80 controls shooting of the game ball shooting mechanism 81 . The game ball shooting mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined shooting conditions are met. Also, the operation handle 25 and the game ball shooting button 26 are connected to the shooting control device 80 . As described above, the operating handle 25 includes the touch sensor 25a, the weight button 25b, and the variable resistor 25c. When the player grips the operating handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operating handle 25, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism to the front surface of the game board with strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c. As described above, the game ball shooting button 26 is operated by the player, and regardless of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 by the player, the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 is maximum. A game ball is shot to the front of the game board with the same shooting intensity.

The sound emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60 and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main controller 60 transmits various commands, the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63 is referred to. Details of these various commands are described later.

In addition, based on various commands received from the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90 controls the driving of various lamps 47 composed of light emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the front door frame 14, and the driving control of the speaker 46. and control the display control device 100 . Also, the effect operation button 24 is connected to the sound emission control device 90, and when the effect operation button 24 is operated by the player at a predetermined timing, a game effect reflecting the operation is performed. It controls the various lamps 47, the speaker 46, the display control device 100, and the like.

The display control device 100 executes display control of the pattern display device 41 based on various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 . Specifically, the display control device 100, based on the various commands received from the sound emission control device 90, grasps the fluctuation time of the pattern in the pattern display device 41 and the type of combination of patterns to be finally stopped and displayed. , presence/absence of occurrence of ready-to-win, contents of ready-to-win effect, contents of notice effect to be executed in each game cycle, and the like are grasped. In this embodiment, the stop time, which is the time during which the combination of symbols is stopped and displayed, is constant. Therefore, by determining the variable time, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game, is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

FIG. 407 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used for a winning lottery or the like. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 sets the winning lottery, the setting of the display of the main display section 45, the setting of the pattern display of the pattern display device 41, and the like. Specifically, a winning random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery. A jackpot type counter C2 is used when sorting the jackpot types. A ready-to-win random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not to generate a ready-to-win when the symbol row displayed on the symbol display device 41 is changed.

A random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. Further, when determining the variation time in the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b of the main display portion 45 and the symbol display device 41, a variation type counter CS is used. Furthermore, the electric accessory opening counter C4 is used for the electric accessory opening lottery for determining whether or not the electric accessory 34a of the second start port 34 is to be opened.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the counter value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. FIG.

The RAM 64 is provided with a pending information storage area 64b and a determination processing execution area 64c. A first reservation area Ra is provided in the reservation information storage area 64b. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first start port 33, each value of the winning random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the falling random number counter CF at the timing of entering the ball is stored as reserved information. It is stored chronologically in the first reservation area Ra of the area 64b. In addition, when the game ball enters the second start port 34, each value of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fall random number counter CF at the timing of the ball entry is stored in the judgment processing execution area 64c. be done.

The details of the winning random number counter C1 will be described. The winning random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery as described above. The winning random number counter C1 is, for example, configured to be incremented by one within the range of 0 to 1199 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Further, when the winning random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value=0 to 1199).

The hit random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and when a game ball enters the first start port 33, the updated value is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entry. When a game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the determination processing execution area 64c at the timing of the ball entering.

The value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the first reservation area Ra is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c each time the game round being executed ends, and the winning/failing table stored in the winning/failing table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. , and it is determined whether or not it will be a big hit. In addition, when the game ball enters the second starting port 34, the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is collated with the success/failure table stored in the success/failure table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. It is determined whether or not a jackpot will be achieved.

Next, the details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining the jackpot type. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 39 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry when the game ball enters the first start port 33. When the game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the determination processing execution area 64c at the timing of the ball entering. The value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the first reservation area Ra is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c each time the game cycle being executed is completed.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the determination process execution area 64c. The jackpot type is determined using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in . Furthermore, the MPU 62 uses the value of the hit random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to determine the display mode of the segment display that is stopped and displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b. . The stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referred to for the determination.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the game ball enters the second start hole 34, when the opening and closing execution mode is executed when the jackpot is won, or During the period from when the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b starts the variable display until the end of the variable display, the game ball enters the second starting port 34, and Also, the values of the winning random number counter C1, the big winning type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 described later, and the falling random number counter CF described later are not stored in the determination processing execution area 64c (not having a holding function configuration).

Next, details of the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is used when determining whether or not a reach occurs when the result of the winning lottery is not a big win. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry when the game ball enters the first start port 33. When the game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the determination processing execution area 64c at the timing of the ball entering. The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first reservation area Ra is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c each time the game cycle being executed is completed.

The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is collated with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63, and it is determined whether or not reach occurs. be. However, when the result of the winning lottery is a big win and the game shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 determines the occurrence of reach regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

The ready-to-win means that, for some of the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41, there is a possibility that a combination of symbols corresponding to a big win will be established, and some combinations of symbols are stopped. It refers to a display state in which symbols are displayed and the remaining symbol rows are displayed in a variable manner. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the combination of symbols corresponding to the big win refers to the combination of the same symbols on a predetermined pay line. As a specific example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of FIG. A ready-to-win state is achieved by forming a ready-to-win line and performing variable display of symbols in the symbol row Z2 when the ready-to-win line is formed. Then, when a big win occurs, the same symbols as the symbols forming the reach line are stop-displayed in the symbol row Z2.

In addition, in the ready-to-win state, while the ready-to-win line is formed, the patterns are displayed in the remaining pattern rows in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen to create a ready-to-win effect. It includes a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a after displaying a combination of patterns in which a reach line is formed in a reduced size or not. In addition, when the ready-to-win effect is being performed or before the ready-to-win display is performed, the determination of whether or not to perform a notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character is performed using the reach-to-win random number counter C3 or other counters. may

Next, details of the falling random number counter CF will be described. The falling random number counter CF is used when executing a falling lottery for determining whether or not to end the high probability mode in a game state in which the lottery mode is the high probability mode. When the falling lottery is won, the lottery mode in the game round is changed from the high probability mode to the low probability mode.

The falling random number counter CF is, for example, incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 299, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum. The fall random number counter CF is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry when the game ball enters the first start port 33. When the game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the determination processing execution area 64c at the timing of the ball entering. The value of the fall random number counter CF stored in the first reservation area Ra is moved to the determination process execution area 64c each time the game cycle in progress is completed.

The value of the fall random number counter CF stored in the judgment processing execution area 64c is collated with the success/failure table (fall lottery success/failure table: FIG. 411) stored in the fall lottery table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, resulting in a high probability. A decision is made whether to end the mode.

Next, details of the fluctuation type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the variation time in the first symbol display portion 37 a and the second symbol display portion 37 b and the symbol variation time in the symbol display device 41 . The fluctuation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in sequence within a range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once each time a normal process, which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of variation display in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b and at the start of symbol variation by the symbol display device 41. The variable time table stored in the variable time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63 is used when determining the variable time in the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b.

Next, the details of the electric accessory release counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory release counter C4 is, for example, configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 465 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated, and stored in the electric role holding area 64d of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the through gate 35. - 特許庁Then, at a predetermined timing, after the value of the electric role product open counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 64d moves to the electric role execution area 64e, the value of the electric role product open counter C4 is displayed in the electric role execution area 64e. A lottery (hereinafter referred to as an electric accessory open lottery) is performed as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to the open state. Specifically, in the electric role execution area 64e, the winning/failure table (electric role lottery winning/failure table) stored in the role lottery table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 and the value of the electric role lottery counter C4 are different. It is collated, and it is determined whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to the open state.

At least one of the acquired value of the winning random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4, and the value of the falling random number counter CF is special information in the present invention. corresponds to

Next, the success/failure table will be described. The success/failure table is table data for matching with the winning random number counter C1 when a winning lottery is performed based on the winning random number counter C1. A low-probability mode and a high-probability mode are set in the pachinko machine 10 as a lottery mode for a winning lottery. In the winning lottery in the probability mode, the success/failure table for the high probability mode is referred to. Further, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33, and then the judgment processing execution area 64c. a success/failure table for collating with the winning random number counter C1 transferred to , and a winning random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 34. The success/failure table is stored as separate table data. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 includes a success/failure table for the first start port (for low probability mode), a success/failure table for the first start port (for high probability mode), and a success/failure table for the second start port (low probability mode). The success/failure table for the probability mode) and the success/failure table for the second start port (for the high probability mode) are stored in the success/failure table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. FIG.

FIG. 408 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the success/failure table for the first start port. FIG. 408(a) shows the success/failure table for the first starting point (for low probability mode), and FIG. 408(b) shows the success/failure table for the first starting point (for high probability mode).

As shown in FIG. 408(a), 20 values from 0 to 19 are set in the success/failure table for the first start port (for the low probability mode) as the value of the winning random number counter C1 for the big win. there is Of the values from 0 to 3979, the values (20 to 3979) other than the 20 values from 0 to 19 are outliers. In this case, the number of value groups of the winning random number counter C1, which is a big hit, is 20/3980 (=1/199) of the total number.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 408(b), 199 values from 0 to 198 are set in the success/failure table for the first start port (for high-probability mode) as the value of the winning random number counter C1 for the big win. It is Of the values from 0 to 3979, the values (199 to 3979) other than the 199 values from 0 to 198 are outliers. In this case, the number of value groups of the winning random number counter C1, which is a big hit, is 199/3980 (=1/20) of the total number. In this way, the high-probability mode has a higher probability of winning a big win in the winning lottery than the low-probability mode.

FIG. 409 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the success/failure table for the second start port. FIG. 409(a) shows the right/wrong table for the second start port (for low probability mode), and FIG. 409(b) shows the right/wrong table for the second start port (for high probability mode).

As shown in FIG. 409(a), 20 values from 0 to 19 are set in the success/failure table for the second start port (for the low probability mode) as the value of the winning random number counter C1 for the big win. there is And, in the success or failure table for the second start port (for low probability mode), the values 0 to 3979 (20 to 3979) other than the 20 values 0 to 19 are given when the time is reduced. It is set as the value of the random number counter C1. In this case, the number of value groups of the winning random number counter C1, which is a big hit, is 20/3980 (=1/199) of the total number.

"Time-saving provision" is a success or failure result that triggers the transition to the support mode described later, but does not trigger the transition to the opening and closing execution mode in which the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened and closed. If the support mode is in the low-frequency support mode when the time-saving grant is won, the support mode shifts from the low-frequency support mode to the high-frequency support mode.

It should be noted that the right/wrong table (for the low probability mode) for the second start port in the present embodiment does not have a setting of "out". That is, in the success/failure table (for the low-probability mode) for the second starting opening in the present embodiment, time saving is set as the success/failure result instead of the off.

As shown in FIG. 409(b), 199 values from 0 to 198 are set in the success/failure table for the second start port (for the high probability mode) as the value of the winning random number counter C1 for the big win. there is Of the values from 0 to 3979, the values (199 to 3979) other than the 199 values from 0 to 198 are outliers. In this case, the number of value groups of the winning random number counter C1, which is a big hit, is 199/3980 (=1/20) of the total number. In this way, the high-probability mode has a higher probability of winning a big win in the winning lottery than the low-probability mode.

"Off" is a success/fail result that does not trigger the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, nor does it trigger the transition to the lottery mode and the support mode.

In this embodiment, the value group of the winning random number counter C1 set as the jackpot in the win/fail table for the low probability mode corresponds to the value group of the winning random number counter C1 set as the jackpot in the win/fail table for the high probability mode. include. However, as long as the probability of winning a big win in the high-probability mode is higher than in the low-probability mode as a result of the winning lottery, the number and value of the random numbers set as the big wins are arbitrary.

It should be noted that a "small win" may be provided as a result of the winning lottery, although it is not used in the win/fail table in this embodiment.

A "minor win" is a win/fail result that triggers a transition to an opening/closing execution mode in which the opening/closing door 36b of the variable prize winning device 36 is opened and closed, but does not trigger a transition to a lottery mode, which will be described later. , the number of round games that occur in the open/close execution mode is limited to one.

Next, the jackpot type will be described. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set in the pachinko machine 10. - 特許庁Specifically, for example, by providing differences in the following three aspects or modes, it is possible to set a plurality of types of jackpots.
(1) Aspect of opening/closing control of variable winning device 36 in opening/closing execution mode (2) Lottery mode for winning lottery after completion of opening/closing execution mode (3) Electric accessory 34a of second start port 34 after completion of opening/closing execution mode Support mode

In the pachinko machine 10, as a form of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the above-described (1) opening/closing execution mode, the frequency of occurrence of winning to the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode A high-frequency winning mode and a low-frequency winning mode can be set so that is relatively high or low. For example, in the high frequency winning mode, the opening and closing door 36b is opened and closed a plurality of times (for example, 16 times) from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode, and one opening is performed until 30 seconds elapses or to the opening and closing door 36b. It can be set to continue until the number of hit balls reaches 10. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening and closing door 36b is opened and closed twice from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode, and one opening is until 0.2 sec elapses or a ball enters the opening and closing door 36b. It can be set to continue until the number reaches six.

When the operation handle 25 is operated by the player, the game ball shooting mechanism 81 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is shot toward the game area PA every 0.6 sec. In the case of the above specific example, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of the opening/closing door 36b is 0.2 sec. In other words, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of the open/close door 36b is shorter than the shooting cycle of the game ball. Therefore, substantially no winning of game balls occurs in the opening/closing execution mode associated with the low-frequency winning mode. However, even in the opening and closing execution mode related to the low-frequency winning mode, it may be set so that the winning of the game ball can occur.

The number of opening/closing times of the opening/closing door 36b, the opening limit time for one opening, and the opening limit number for one opening are determined by the variable winning device 36 during the period from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode. is higher in the high-frequency winning mode than in the low-frequency winning mode, the open mode of the opening/closing door 36b is arbitrary. Specifically, if the high frequency winning mode has more opening and closing times than the low frequency winning mode, the opening limit time for one opening is longer, or the opening limit number for one opening is set more good. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, in the open/close execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode, substantially no winning to the variable winning device 36 may occur.

The pachinko machine 10 has a high-probability mode in which a winning lottery is performed using a high-probability win-or-fail table as a win-or-fail table, and a win-fail table as a win-or-fail table. A low-probability mode in which a winning lottery is performed using a low-probability success/failure table can be set. As described with reference to FIG. 408, when a winning lottery is performed using a high-probability success/failure table, a winning lottery is more likely to be won than when a winning lottery is performed using a low-probability success/failure table. likely to.

In the pachinko machine 10, as a form of the support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the end of the above-mentioned (3) opening and closing execution mode, shooting of game balls continues in a similar form to the game area PA. A high-frequency support mode and a low-frequency support mode are selected so that the frequency of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 being in the open state per unit time is relatively high or low when compared in the situation where can be set.

Specifically, the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode have different probabilities of winning the electric role open lottery in the electric role item opening lottery using the electric role item opening counter C4. In the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role open lottery in the electric accessory open lottery is made higher than in the low frequency support mode. In addition, in the high-frequency support mode, the opening time of the electric accessory 34a may be set longer than in the low-frequency support mode when the electric role opening winning is won.

Although not adopted in the present embodiment, in the high frequency support mode, the number of times the electric accessory 34a is in the open state when the electric accessory 34a is elected is set higher than in the low frequency support mode. good too. Furthermore, it may be configured such that the electric accessory 34a is set to have a long opening time once. In addition, in the high-frequency support mode, in the case where the open state of the electric accessory 34a occurs multiple times due to the electric role open winning, the closing time from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state is , may be set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the time secured from one electric accessory open lottery to the next electric accessory open lottery is set to be relatively shorter than in the low-frequency support mode. may

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of a ball entering the second starting port 34 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. That is, the high-frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary game state that assists establishment of special information acquisition conditions.

In the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won as a result of the winning lottery, the jackpot type is sorted using the jackpot type counter C2. The distribution of the jackpot types corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63 as a distribution table.

FIG. 410 is an explanatory diagram of the contents of the distribution table. FIG. 410(a) shows the distribution table for the first start port, and FIG. 410(b) shows the distribution table for the second start port. The distribution table for the first start port is referred to during a winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33, and the distribution table for the second start port is referred to the second start port 34. It is referred to during the winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball.

As shown in FIG. 410(a), in the distribution table for the first starting port, 8R probability variable jackpot and 8R normal jackpot are set as the jackpot types based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33. It is

In the 8R probability variable jackpot, the number of openings of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is 8 times (8 rounds), and the mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode. . Also, the 8R probability variable jackpot is a jackpot that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the V winning opening 48 in the first round of the round game. Specifically, the period during which the opening/closing door 36b is opened in the first round of the round game includes the period in which the V winning opening shutter 48a is open. It is a jackpot with a set opening period. The period in which the opening/closing door 36b is opened in the first round of the round game includes the period in which the V winning opening shutter 48a is in the open state (not part of it, but all of it is included), so that one round of the round game is completed. It becomes easy for the game ball to enter the V winning hole 48 opened at the eye. As described above, the V winning opening shutter 48a is opened and closed at a predetermined timing during the round game. After the elapse of , it will be in an open state for a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds), and then will be in a closed state. The 8R probability variable jackpot is defined so that the open/close door 36b is opened in the first round of the round game during the open state period.

When a game ball enters the opened V winning port 48, the lottery mode of winning lottery after the end of the opening/closing execution mode becomes the high probability mode. As described above, it is easy for the game ball to enter the V winning opening 48 in the first round of the round game. The lottery mode of winning lottery after the end of the opening/closing execution mode does not shift to the high probability mode.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the number of game rounds executed in the high probability mode is limited to 50 times (ST number), and the number of game rounds executed in the high probability mode is 50 times. , the lottery mode of the winning lottery shifts from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode. It should be noted that, in the game round executed in the high probability mode, if the probability variable jackpot is further won and the game ball enters the V winning opening 48 opened with the probability variable jackpot as a trigger, the high probability that has been executed so far The number of game rounds in the probability mode is reset, and after the round game executed with the probability variable jackpot as a trigger, 50 game rounds are again counted from the game rounds in the high probability mode to be executed thereafter. Therefore, when a jackpot is won in the high-probability mode, the game rounds in the high-probability mode may be continuously executed 50 times or more.

In the 8R normal jackpot, the opening and closing times of the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode is 8 times (8 rounds), and the mode of opening and closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode. . In addition, in the 8R normal jackpot, the opening period of the opening and closing door 36b in the first round of the round game and the period in which the V winning opening shutter 48a is open do not overlap. It is a jackpot with a set opening period. Since the opening period of the opening/closing door 36b and the opening period of the opening/closing door 36b do not overlap, the probability of the game ball entering the V winning hole 48 is extremely low. Therefore, the 8R normal jackpot is a jackpot in which the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the end of the open/close execution mode is substantially the low probability mode.

In this way, the probability variable jackpot makes it easier for the game ball to enter the V winning opening 48 in the first round of the round game compared to the normal jackpot, so the winning lottery lottery mode after the end of the opening and closing execution mode has a high probability. There is a high probability that it will become a mod. On the other hand, since game balls are less likely to enter the V winning opening 48 in the normal jackpot compared to the variable probability jackpot, the probability that the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the end of the open/close execution mode will be the high probability mode is very low. In this specification, the distribution result with a higher probability that the game ball is likely to enter the V winning hole 48 and the lottery mode of the winning lottery becomes the high probability mode is called "probability variable jackpot" for convenience. In other words, if a jackpot is won by a winning lottery, the type of the jackpot won is a probability variable jackpot, and the game ball does not enter the V winning port 48 that is opened by the jackpot, after the opening/closing execution mode ends. The lottery mode of the winning lottery does not shift to the high probability mode, but as described above, it is called "probability variable jackpot" for convenience.

In the distribution table for the first start port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39", "0 to 19" corresponds to the 8R probability variable jackpot, and "20 to 39" corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot. is set to

As shown in FIG. 410(b), in the distribution table for the second starting port, 16R probability variable jackpot is set as the jackpot type based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port .

In the 16R probability variable jackpot, the number of openings of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is 16 times (16 rounds), and the opening/closing control mode of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode. . Also, the 16R probability variable jackpot is a jackpot that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the V winning opening 48 in the first round of the round game. Specifically, the 16R probability variable jackpot is set so that the period in which the V winning opening shutter 48a is open is included in the open period of the opening and closing door 36b in the first round of the round game. It is a jackpot that determines the opening period of the opening and closing door 36b. A period in which the V winning opening shutter 48a is in an open state is included in the opening period of the opening/closing door 36b in the first round of the round game, so that the game to the V winning opening 48 opened in the first round of the round game is performed. It becomes easier to enter the ball. As described above, the V winning opening shutter 48a is opened and closed at a predetermined timing during the round game. After the elapse of , it will be in an open state for a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds), and then will be in a closed state. The 16R probability variable jackpot is defined so that the open/close door 36b is opened in the first round of the round game during the open state period. That is, the 16R probability variable jackpot differs from the 8R probability variable jackpot only in the number of openings of the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode, and the aspect of the opening and closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode. is the high-frequency winning mode, and it is the same in that it is easy for the game ball to enter the V winning hole 48 in the first round of the round game.

In the distribution table for the second starting port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39", "0 to 39" are set so as to correspond to the 16R probability variable jackpot. That is, all of the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39" are set so as to correspond to the 16R probability variable jackpot.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the jackpot types are distributed according to the jackpot type when the jackpot hits. It is different from the case of winning a big hit based on the entry of the game ball into the second start hole 34, and a clear difference is provided in the advantage for the player.

In the present embodiment, as described above, as the types of jackpots, three types of 8R probability variable jackpot, 8R normal jackpot, and 16R probability variable jackpot are set. The number may be four, two, or five or more. Furthermore, the number of opening times of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is not limited to 8R and 16R, and may be other times such as 4R and 5R, for example.

As described above, when the number of game rounds executed in the high probability mode reaches the ST number (50 times), the winning lottery lottery mode shifts from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. In the embodiment, even in the game round before reaching the number of times of ST, when winning in the falling lottery described later, the lottery mode of the winning lottery is configured to shift from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. there is

FIG. 411 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a fall lottery success/failure table used when executing a fall lottery. As shown in FIG. 411, 100 values from 0 to 99 out of values from 0 to 299 are set in the drop lottery success/failure table as values of the drop random number counter CF that will win the drop lottery. . 200 values from 100 to 299 out of the values from 0 to 299 are set in the drop lottery success/failure table as values of the drop random number counter CF that are lost in the drop lottery. That is, in the high probability mode game round, the probability of winning the falling lottery, ending the high probability mode, and entering the low probability mode is 1/3. In the high-probability mode game round, when the drop lottery is lost, the high-probability mode is continued. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the falling lottery is not executed in the low-probability mode game rounds.

FIG. 412 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the success/failure table (electric accessary product open lottery success/failure table) used when executing the electric accessary product open lottery.

FIG. 412(a) shows a success/failure table for electric accessory open lottery (for low frequency support mode) used in low frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 412(a), in the electric accessory open lottery success/failure table (for the low-frequency support mode), two values of 0 and 1 are set as the values of the electric accessory open counter C4 that will win the electric role open winning. A value is set. 464 values from 2 to 465 are set as the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4 to be out. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 in the low-frequency support mode and the electric accessary item open lottery is executed, the electric role open lottery is won with a probability of 1/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric role opening win is made in the low-frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.4 seconds.

FIG. 412(b) shows a success/failure table (for high-frequency support mode) for electric accessory open lottery used in high-frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 412(b), in the success/failure table for electric accessary item open lottery (for high-frequency support mode), 462 values of 0 to 461 for the electric accessary item open counter C4 for winning the electric accession election. A value is set. Four values of 462 to 465 are set as the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4 that is out. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 in the high-frequency support mode and the electric accessory open lottery is executed, the electric role open lottery is won with a probability of 231/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric role opening win is made in the high-frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.6 seconds.

In this way, the success/failure table for the electric accessory open lottery is set so that the high-frequency support mode has a higher probability of the game ball entering the second start port 34 than the low-frequency support mode. .

<<9-3>> Electrical configuration of sound emission control device and display control device:
Next, electrical configurations of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 413 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. As shown in FIG. A part of the configuration such as the power supply device 85 (FIG. 406) is omitted. An MPU 92 is mounted on an audio emission control board 91 provided in the audio emission control device 90 . The MPU 92 is a device containing a CPU, a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like.

The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables, and the like. For example, part of the area of the ROM 93 is provided with an effect pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like. Details of these will be described later.

The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the ROM 93 . For example, a part of the area of the RAM 94 is provided with various flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, and the like. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 92, and they may be individually integrated into chips.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port. The input side of the MPU 92 is connected to the main control device 60 and the effect operation button 24 . Various commands are received from the main controller 60 . A speaker 46 and various lamps 47 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92, and the display control device 100 is also connected.

The display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102, which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are integrated into chips, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. is installed. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 102, and they may be individually integrated into chips.

The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, to generate internal commands for the VDP 105). .

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and also stores JPEG format image data for background images.

A work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when various programs are executed by the MPU 102 .

The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the pattern display device 41 . The VDP 105 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is an IC chip, and is a kind of microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, etc., and intervenes in the reading and writing of data.

The character ROM 106 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as patterns displayed on the pattern display device 41 . The character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table and the like that are referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 106 . It is also possible to configure the character ROM 106 to store the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 .

The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, and by rewriting the content of the video RAM 107, the display content of the pattern display device 41 is changed.

Hereinafter, the MPU 62, ROM 63, and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main MPU 62, main ROM 63, and main RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the sound emission control device 90 are referred to as the sound and light side MPU 92 and the sound and light side, respectively. The ROM 93 and the sound/light side RAM 94 are also called, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also called the display side MPU 102 .

<<9-4>> Outline of Processing by Gaming Machine:
Next, an overview of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described.

<<9-4-1>> High/low transition between lottery mode and support mode:
First, a case where the lottery mode and the support mode are shifted will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won by a win lottery and the type of the jackpot won is a normal jackpot, the lottery mode shifts to a low probability mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, and the support mode. transitions to infrequent support mode.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won by a winning lottery, the type of the jackpot won is a probability variable jackpot, and a game ball enters the V prize opening 48 opened with the jackpot as a trigger, opening and closing is performed. After the execution mode ends, the lottery mode shifts to the high-probability mode, and the support mode shifts to the high-frequency support mode. In the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won by a winning lottery, the type of the jackpot won is a variable jackpot, and the game ball does not enter the V winning port 48 opened by the jackpot, A lottery mode does not shift to a high-probability mode, and a support mode does not shift to a high-frequency support mode.

After the support mode shifts to the high-frequency support mode based on the fact that a jackpot is won by a winning lottery and the type of the jackpot won is a variable probability jackpot, the game cycle is executed after the high-frequency support mode is started. The high-frequency support mode is continued as the support mode until the number of times reaches a predetermined number of times (hereinafter, also referred to as the number of continuous time-saving operations). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the number of consecutive times of time saving is ten times, for example. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, the high frequency support mode is continued up to 10 times, which is the number of continuous times of time saving, after shifting to the high frequency support mode. The support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode after the number of game times executed after the start of the high-frequency support mode reaches 10 times, which is the number of time-saving continuations. It should be noted that the number of continuation of time saving does not have to be limited to 10 times as described above, and may be another number of times.

On the other hand, the winning lottery is executed with reference to the success/failure table for the second starting port (for low probability mode) shown in FIG. When shifting to the frequency support mode, the high frequency support mode is continued as the support mode until the next big win is won.

When the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the probability that the result of the electric role item open lottery that is executed when the through gate 35 is passed is an electric role open lottery is extremely high at 231/233. The accessory 34a is in the electric role open state with high frequency. Therefore, when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the player hits to the right and plays the game so as to enter the game ball into the second starting hole 34 provided with the electric accessory 34a.

After the lottery mode shifts to the high-probability mode, the high-probability mode is continued as the lottery mode until the number of game rounds executed after the start of the high-probability mode reaches a predetermined number (ST number). In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the number of STs is, for example, 50 times. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, after the high-probability mode is started and 50 game rounds, which is the ST number, are executed, the lottery mode is shifted from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode.

In addition, when the fall lottery is won in the game round before the number of game rounds executed after the start of the high probability mode reaches the ST number, the lottery mode is shifted from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. . Specifically, when the number of times of execution of the game round reaches ST number of times before winning in the falling lottery related to the game round, the lottery mode is shifted from the high probability mode to the low probability mode at the start of the game round, and the game round A winning lottery is executed in a low probability mode. Therefore, in the winning lottery in the game round, the winning lottery is executed with reference to the success/failure table (for low probability mode) for the second start port shown in FIG. If so, the high-frequency support mode is continued as the support mode until the next big win is won.

In the game round executed in the high-probability mode, when a big win is further won and the game ball enters the V prize-winning port 48 opened with the opportunity of the big win, the game in the high-probability mode executed so far is performed. The number of rounds is reset, and after a round game executed with the big win as a trigger, 50 rounds of games are counted again from the game rounds in the high probability mode executed after that. Therefore, when a jackpot is won in the high-probability mode, the game rounds in the high-probability mode may be continuously executed 50 times or more.

<<9-4-2>> Game flow:
In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, at least four types of states can be taken as game states to be transitioned as the game progresses, depending on the combination of high and low between the lottery mode and the support mode. Specifically, i) a low-probability low-probability support state in which the lottery mode is a low-probability mode and the support mode is a low-frequency support mode, and ii) the lottery mode is a low-probability mode and the support mode is Low probability high support state which is high frequency support mode, iii) high probability high support state where lottery mode is high probability mode and support mode is high frequency support mode, and iv) lottery mode is high probability mode and a high-probability low-support state in which the support mode is a low-frequency support mode. Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, an open/close execution mode in which a game ball can enter the big winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36 can be taken as a game state. The game progresses while transitioning between these game states.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a high-probability mode flag specifying the lottery mode and a high-frequency support mode specifying the support mode are stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM64. The lottery mode is identified as the low probability mode when the high probability mode flag is OFF, and the lottery mode is identified as the high probability mode when the high probability mode flag is ON. The support mode is identified as the low-frequency support mode when the high-frequency support mode flag is OFF, and the support mode is identified as the high-frequency support mode when the high-frequency support mode flag is ON. For this reason, each of the above-described low probability low support state, low probability high support state, high probability low support state, and high probability high support state is specified by a high probability mode flag and a high frequency support mode flag. Become. As a result, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, at least one of the high-probability mode flag and the high-frequency support mode flag is switched, thereby progressing the flow of the game while switching between the four states described above.

In the present embodiment, the lottery mode is specified by one flag (that is, the high probability mode flag), but instead of this, the lottery mode is specified by two flags (that is, the high probability mode flag). low-probability mode flag). In this modification, when one of the high-probability mode flag and the low-probability mode flag is turned on, the other is automatically turned off. In addition, in the present embodiment, the support mode is identified by one flag (ie, the high frequency support mode flag), but instead of this, the support mode is identified by two flags (ie, the high frequency support mode flag). flag and low frequency support mode flag). In this modification, when one of the high-frequency support mode flag and the low-frequency support mode flag is turned ON, the other is automatically turned OFF. According to both modifications, similar to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, by switching the flag, the flow of the game progresses while switching between the four states described above.

FIG. 414 is an explanatory diagram showing a game flow in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. When the game is started, it is initially in a low probability low support state (state H1). That is, the lottery mode is a low-probability mode, and the support mode is a low-frequency support mode. In the low-probability-low-support state (state H1), the player hits left, causes the game ball to flow down to the left side of the game area PA, and enters the game ball into the first start hole 33. - 特許庁When the game ball enters the first starting hole 33, a winning lottery is performed for the special information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting hole 33, and the lottery result of the winning lottery is sent to the player. A game round for notification is executed.

When the lottery result of the winning lottery in the game round executed in the low-probability and low support state (state H1) is lost, the low-probability and low support state (state H1) is continued, and the player enters the first start port 33. A game ball is entered and a game cycle is executed.

When a jackpot is won in a win lottery in a game round executed in a low-probability and low-support state, and the type of the jackpot won is a normal jackpot, an opening/closing execution mode is provided as a privilege given to the player after the game round is over. is executed. That is, it shifts from the low probability low support state (state H1) to the open/close execution mode (state H2).

The pachinko machine 10 executes a suggestive effect for prompting the player to hit to the right, prior to the round game occurring in the opening/closing execution mode (state H2). The player hits to the right in accordance with the suggested performance, causes the game ball to flow down to the right side of the game area PA, enters the game ball into the big winning hole 36a, and obtains a prize ball. In the opening/closing execution mode (state H2) executed when the type of the winning jackpot is the normal jackpot, almost no game balls enter the V winning opening 48 as described above.

When the open/close execution mode (state H2) ends, the state shifts to the low probability low support state (state H1). That is, the lottery mode becomes the low-probability mode, and the support mode becomes the low-frequency support mode.

On the other hand, in the low probability low support state (state H1), even if a jackpot is won in a winning lottery in a game round and the type of the jackpot won is a variable probability jackpot, a privilege given to the player after the game round ends. , the open/close execution mode is executed. That is, it shifts from the low probability low support state (state H1) to the open/close execution mode (state H3).

Prior to the round game that occurs in the open/close execution mode (state H3), the pachinko machine 10 has a suggestive effect to prompt the player to hit to the right, and enters the game ball into the V winning opening 48 in the first round of the round game. Executes a suggestive effect that prompts the ball to be played. The player hits to the right according to these suggestive effects, causes the game ball to flow down to the right side of the game area PA, enters the game ball into the big winning opening 36a to obtain a prize ball, and one round of the round game. A game ball is entered into the V winning opening 48 in the big winning opening 36a. In addition, in the opening and closing execution mode (state H3) executed when the type of the winning jackpot is the variable probability jackpot, as described above, the game ball enters the V winning opening 48 in the first round of the round game. It's easy to ball.

When the game ball enters the V winning port 48 in the first round of the round game in the opening/closing execution mode (state H3), and the opening/closing execution mode (state H3) ends, the state shifts to a high probability/high support state (state H4). . That is, the lottery mode is a high probability mode (limited to 50 times, which is the number of STs), and the support mode is a high frequency support mode (limited to 10 times, which is the number of continuations of time saving).

In the high-probability-high support state (state H4), the pachinko machine 10 executes a suggestive effect for prompting the player to hit to the right. In the high-probability-high support state (state H4), the player hits to the right in accordance with the suggested effect, causing the game ball to flow down to the right side of the game area PA and enter the game ball into the second start port 34. Let Since the support mode is the high-frequency support mode in the high-precision and high-support state, there is a possibility that the result of the electric role open lottery that is executed when the through gate 35 is passed will be the electric role open win. 233, which is extremely high, the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is frequently in the electric open state. Therefore, in the high-probability-high support state, the game ball easily enters the second starting port 34.例文帳に追加When the game ball enters the second starting port 34, a winning lottery is performed for the special information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34, and the lottery result of the winning lottery is sent to the player. A game round for notification is executed. That is, in the high-accuracy and high support state (state H4), the electric accessory 34a of the second start port 34 is in the open state with a high frequency, and the game ball is in the second start port 34 more than normal (low support state). By entering a large number of balls, the player can receive a winning lottery in a state where the number of balls in his possession is less likely to decrease.

When the lottery result of the winning lottery in the game round executed in the high probability high support state (state H4) is a big win, the type of the winning jackpot is limited to the probability variable jackpot (the second start in FIG. 410 (b) Refer to the distribution table for the mouth), the high-accuracy-high support state H4 is shifted to the open/close execution mode H3. When the lottery result of the winning lottery in the game round executed in the high probability high support state (state H4) is lost, the high probability high support state (state H4) is continued, and the player enters the second start port 34. A game ball is entered and a game cycle is executed.

Since the lottery mode is the high-probability mode in the game round executed in the high-probability-high support state (state H4), the fall lottery described above is executed.

As described above, the game state in which the support mode is the high-frequency support mode continues up to 10 game rounds, which is the number of time-saving continuations. When the falling lottery is won, the lottery mode in the game round is changed from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. That is, the high probability high support state (state H4) is shifted to the low probability high support state (state H5). In addition, when shifting to the low-probability-high support state (state H5), the time-saving game number counter PNC, which indicates the number of times the game is continuously executed in the high-frequency support mode, is held as it was before the transition. be. Therefore, the transition to the low-probability-high support state (state H5) does not reset the number of games continuously executed in the high-frequency support mode.

The winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 in the low probability support state (state H5) is the winning lottery for the second starting port shown in FIG. 409 (a) (low probability mode for) is used. For this reason, the lottery result of the winning lottery related to the game round in which the falling lottery was won is either a jackpot lottery or a time-saving award lottery. When the short-time provision is won in the winning lottery, the high-frequency support mode is continued as the support mode until the next big win is won. In other words, if the player wins the time-saving grant in the winning lottery, the high-frequency support mode continues until the next big win is won, and the next big win is virtually guaranteed. In addition, since the jackpot type based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 is limited to the 16R probability variable jackpot, as shown in FIG. ), it is guaranteed that you will win a variable probability jackpot and move again to the high probability high support state (state H4).

In the low definite height support state (state H5), the pachinko machine 10 executes a suggestive effect for prompting the player to hit to the right. In the low-probable-height support state (state H5), the player hits to the right according to the suggested effect, causing the game ball to flow down to the right side of the game area PA, and enter the game ball into the second start port 34. Let Since the support mode is the high-frequency support mode in the low-probability support state, there is a possibility that the result of the electric role open lottery that is executed when the through gate 35 is passed will be the electric role open win. 233, which is extremely high, the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is frequently in the electric open state. Therefore, in the low-probability support state, the game ball easily enters the second starting port 34. - 特許庁When the game ball enters the second starting port 34, a winning lottery is performed for the special information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34, and the lottery result of the winning lottery is sent to the player. A game round for notification is executed. That is, in the low-probability-high support state (state H5), the electric accessory 34a of the second start port 34 is in the open state with high frequency, and the game ball enters the second start port 34 more than normal (low support state). By entering a large number of balls, the player can receive a winning lottery in a state where the number of balls in his possession is less likely to decrease.

When a jackpot is won in a winning lottery in a game cycle executed in a low-probability support state (state H5), the type of the winning jackpot is a variable-probability jackpot, and opening and closing is executed as a privilege given to the player after the game cycle is over. mode is executed. That is, the low probability height support state (state H5) shifts to the open/close execution mode (state H3).

In summary, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the low-probability-high support state (state H5), the high-frequency support mode is continued as the support mode until the jackpot is won in the next winning lottery. In a state in which it is difficult for players to reduce the number of balls they have, it is possible to enter game balls into the second start port 34 and repeat the winning lottery at high frequency until the next big win is won. This state in which the high-frequency support mode is continued as the support mode until the next big win is won is hereinafter referred to as "continued state of high support until next time (=state of continued high support until next time)". As a result, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the falling lottery is won in the game rotation within 10 times from the high probability high support state (state H4) and it shifts to the low probability high support state (state H5) , so-called consecutive chances to win the jackpot again can be performed without fail, and the expectation of consecutive chances can be imparted to the player.

In the high-probability high support state (state H4), when the number of executions of the games executed in the high-frequency support mode reaches 10 times, which is the number of time-saving continuations, without winning the drop lottery, the support mode is the high-frequency support. mode to infrequent support mode. That is, it shifts from the high probability high support state (state H4) to the high probability low support state (state H6). It should be noted that when shifting to the high-probability-low support state (state H6), the number-of-games counter SNC for ST, which indicates the number of times the game is continuously executed in the high-probability mode, is held as it was before the transition. . Therefore, the transition to the high-probability-low support state (state H6) does not reset the number of games continuously executed in the high-probability mode.

In the high-probability-low support state (state H6), the pachinko machine 10 executes a suggestive effect for prompting the player to hit left. Since the support mode is the low-frequency support mode in the high-probability and low-support state, the possibility that the result of the electric role open lottery executed upon passing through the through gate 35 will be the electric role open win is 1/ 233, which is extremely low, and the probability that the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 will be in the electric open state is extremely low. Therefore, in the high-probability-low support state (state H6), it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting port 34. Execute a suggestive production that encourages left-handed strikes instead of right-handed ones. In the high-probability-low support state (state H6), the player makes the game ball flow down to the left side of the game area PA and enters the game ball into the first start port 33 by executing left-handed hitting according to the suggested effect. Let When the game ball enters the first starting hole 33, a winning lottery is performed for the special information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting hole 33, and the lottery result of the winning lottery is sent to the player. A game round for notification is executed. Since the lottery mode is the high-probability mode in this game round, the fall lottery described above is executed. In the high-probability-low support state (state H6), if the player continues to hit to the right, the game ball will not enter the second starting port 34 and the game ball will be wasted.

When the falling lottery in the game spin executed in the high-probability low support state (state H6) is won, the lottery mode is shifted from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode. That is, it moves from the high probability low support state (state H6) to the low probability low support state (state H1).

In the high-probability-low support state (state H6), when a jackpot is won in a winning lottery in a game cycle and the type of the jackpot won is a normal jackpot, it is opened and closed as a privilege given to the player after the game cycle is over. Run mode is executed. That is, the high-probability-low support state (state H6) shifts to the opening/closing execution mode (state H2).

In the high-probability-low support state (state H6), if a jackpot is won in a winning lottery in a game cycle and the type of the jackpot won is a variable probability jackpot, it is opened and closed as a privilege given to the player after the game cycle ends. Run mode is executed. That is, the high-probability-low support state (state H6) shifts to the open/close execution mode (state H3).

In the high-probability low support state (state H6), the number of game rounds executed in the high-probability mode without winning a jackpot in the winning lottery in the game round and without winning the fall lottery is ST times (high When the count reaches 40 times after shifting to the low probability support state H6, the lottery mode is shifted from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. That is, it moves from the high probability low support state (state H6) to the low probability low support state (state H1).

A comparison of advantages for the player in the four states H1, H4, H5 and H6 specified by the lottery mode and the support mode is as follows. Of the four states H1, H4, H5, and H6, the low probability low support state H1 is the least advantageous. Among the high probability high support state H4, the low probability high support state H5, and the high probability low support state H6, the high probability low support state H6 has the lowest advantage. This is because the high-probability low support state H6 shifts to the low-probability low support state (state H1) when the falling lottery is won or when the number of executions of the game round reaches the ST number. Comparing the high probability high support state H4 and the low probability high support state H5, the low probability high support state H5 is more advantageous than the high probability high support state H4. The high probability high support state H4 is highly advantageous because the lottery mode is a high probability mode, but when the number of times the game is executed reaches 10 times, which is the number of time-saving continuations, the support mode changes to a low frequency support mode. Due to the transition, the advantage is low compared to the high probability high support state H4 in which the next probability variable jackpot is guaranteed.

Based on the transition of the game state described above, the player plays the game as follows. First, the player hits to the left in the low probability and low support state H1, and enters the game ball into the first start hole 33. - 特許庁At this time, the player expects to win a big win in the winning lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the first start hole 33, and furthermore, the player expects that the type of the big win is a probability variable big win. expect.

In the low-probability low support state H1, when the jackpot is won and the type of the jackpot is the normal jackpot, the player is disappointed that the normal jackpot is not the variable-probability jackpot, but leaves the low-probability low support state H1. The round game is repeated in the opened/closed execution mode H2. After all the round games are finished, it returns to the low probability low support state H1.

In the low-probability low support state H1, when a jackpot is won and the type of the jackpot is a variable-probability jackpot, the player rejoices at winning the variable-probability jackpot and opens and closes from the low-probability low support state H1. In execution mode H3, the round game is repeated. After all the round games are finished, the game shifts to a high-accuracy-high support state H4.

In the high-probability-high support state H4, the player hits to the right and enters the game ball into the second start hole 34. - 特許庁In the high-precision high support state H4, since the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, as described above, the electric accessory 34a of the second start port 34 is frequently opened, and the second start A game ball can be easily entered into the mouth 34.例文帳に追加At this time, the player expects to win a big win in a winning lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting hole 34.例文帳に追加When the lottery result of the winning lottery in the game cycle executed in the high-probability-high support state H4 is a big win, the type of the winning big win is limited to the variable-probability big win, so the player does not want to win the big win. Expect more.

In the high-probability and high-support state H4, the player expects to win the jackpot as described above, but the number of games after shifting to the high-probability and high support state H4 is 10, which is the number of time-saving continuations. Expect to win the fall lottery in the game rounds before reaching the round (within 10 rounds). When the fall lottery is won in the game round within 10 times of the game after shifting to the high-probability high support state H4, the high-probability high support state H4 is shifted to the low-probability high support state H5, but first. As explained, the low probability high support state H5 is virtually guaranteed the next probability variable jackpot, so the player can play within 10 times after moving to the high probability high support state H4. In the game round, you will expect to win the fall lottery.

On the other hand, in the high probability high support state H4, when the number of games after shifting to the high probability high support state H4 reaches 10 times without winning the falling lottery, the high probability high support state H4 is changed to the high probability low. Although it shifts to the support state H6, the high-probability-low support state H6 does not guarantee the next big win. Therefore, in the high-probability and high-support state H4, the player does not win not only the winning lottery but also the falling lottery, and the number of games after shifting to the high-probability and high support state H4 does not reach 10 times. Such a sense of urgency is combined with the above-mentioned sense of anticipation.

In the low fixed height support state H5, the player hits to the right and enters the game ball into the second start hole 34. - 特許庁In the low probability high support state H5, the winning lottery is executed, and when the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode based on winning the time reduction grant in the winning lottery, the high support continues until the next time explained above. state. Therefore, in the low-probability-high support state H5, the player can have a sense of security that the high-frequency support mode as the support mode will not end until the jackpot is won in the winning lottery and distributed to the variable-probability jackpot.

In the high-probability high support state H4, when neither winning lottery nor falling lottery is won and the number of games after shifting to the high-probability high support state H4 reaches 10 times, a support mode is entered. shifts from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode, and as a result, shifts from the high-probability high support state H4 to the high-probability low support state H6.

In the high-probability-low support state H6, the player hits to the left and enters the game ball into the first start hole 33. - 特許庁In the high-probability low support state H6, the player has not won a jackpot in the high-probability high support state H4 before shifting to the high-probability low support state H6, and the number of games played is 10 times in the high-probability high support state H4. While disappointed that I did not win the fall lottery in the game round within
i) win the drop lottery;
ii) to win a jackpot in a winning lottery;
iii) The number of game rounds executed after transitioning to the high probability low support state H6 reaches 40 times (50 times counted after transitioning to the high probability high support state H4),
The game round will be repeated until either of the conditions is satisfied. When the above i) or iii) is satisfied, it moves from the high probability low support state H6 to the low probability low support state H1. When the above condition ii) is satisfied, the opening/closing execution mode H2 or H3 corresponding to the distribution result of the distribution determination is entered.

In addition, in the high-probability-low support state H6, since the lottery mode is a high-probability mode, the player can still have a sense of anticipation that a big win will be won. You can have a sense of expectation that you want to return to the high probability and high support state H4 by becoming a probability variable jackpot. In addition, a sense of urgency, such as the possibility of winning the drop lottery, is combined with the above-mentioned sense of anticipation.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment having the game flow as described above, when a jackpot is won in the winning lottery in the low-probability and low-probability support state H1, and the state is shifted to the high-probability-high support state H4 by being distributed to the probability-variable jackpot. Next, let us consider the probability of winning the jackpot next time (hereinafter referred to as “continuation rate”).

In the high probability high support state H4, when the number of games after shifting to the high probability high support state H4 is within the number of times of time reduction continuation (10 times), when a fall lottery is won, the state is changed from the high probability high support state H4. , it shifts to the low probability high support state H5 in which the next probability variable jackpot is guaranteed. Therefore, in order to calculate the continuation rate in the high probability high support state H4, in addition to the case of winning the jackpot in the winning lottery (distribution is 100% probability variable jackpot), from the high probability high support state H4 to the low probability high support state H5 should be considered when migrating to Therefore, in one game round, the probability of not winning the falling lottery and not winning the jackpot in the winning lottery is calculated, and from this probability, the probability of losing both the winning lottery and the falling lottery at all the times of short time continuation (10 times) is calculated, and the value obtained by subtracting the probability of deviation from 1 is the continuation rate. Specifically, the continuation rate can be calculated according to the following formula (1).

Retention rate = 1 - {(1-1/3) x (1-1/20)}^10 ... (1)

In formula (1), "1-1/3" is the probability of not winning the falling lottery in one game round. "1-1/20" is the probability of not winning a jackpot (distribution is 100% probability variable jackpot) in a winning lottery in one game round in the high probability mode. "10" is the number of continuous working hours. “^” is an operator representing exponentiation. Calculating the formula (1) gives a continuation rate of about 99.0%. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is a ream system that is completely different from conventional pachinko machines, and it is possible to realize a model with extremely high specifications for ream performance.

According to the pachinko machine 10 having the continuous playing performance, the following effects can also be obtained compared with the conventional pachinko machine. Conventionally, there are two types of pachinko machines, loop type and ST type, which have different techniques for continuing the jackpot. In the loop type pachinko machine, since it is confirmed that the next big win will be won in the high-probability and high-support state, the continuation rate is determined based on the distribution probability to the probability-variable big win when the big win is won. This means that in a loop-type pachinko machine, the continuation rate is determined based on the probability that, when the symbols are aligned, the aligned symbols are probability variable symbols (for example, "7" symbols). For this reason, in the high-probability-high support state, the player just watches the game rounds being digested, and when the symbols are aligned, the matching symbols are expected to be variable probability symbols. . On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as described above, in the high-probability and high-support state H4, the number of times the game is executed after the high-frequency support mode is started is 10 or less. A player can expect to win a fall lottery or a winning lottery in a turn. As a result, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, compared with the conventional loop type pachinko machine, the player does not win the winning lottery as well as the fall lottery, and the high-probability and high support state H4 is achieved. It is possible to give a sense of urgency, such as whether the number of games played after the transition to 10 will reach 10 times.

In the ST type pachinko machine, the continuation rate in the high-probability and high-support state is calculated by calculating the probability of not winning a jackpot in a winning lottery per game round, calculating the probability of losing in all ST times, and subtracting the probability of losing from 1. can be obtained by Therefore, in the ST type pachinko machine, the continuation rate is determined based on the probability of matching symbols (probability of winning a jackpot) and the number of times of ST. Therefore, in the ST type pachinko machine, as the number of game rounds executed in the high-quality and high support state progresses, the sense of urgency that the number of game rounds will reach the ST number without winning the jackpot is increased. can be granted to a person. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the high probability and high support state H4, in addition to the jackpot winning (symbols are aligned), the drop lottery is not won, and the state shifts to the high probability and high support state H4. It is possible to give a sense of urgency to the player as to whether the number of times of playing after the game reaches the number of times of time-saving continuation (10 times). Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, compared with the conventional ST type pachinko machine, it is possible to impart a greater sense of urgency to the player by adding the drop winning to the jackpot winning. can.

As a pachinko machine having other game properties, the following configuration is also conceivable. When a small win is won in a winning lottery (a small win is won with a high probability) in a specific advantageous state that is advantageous to the player before the number of games played after shifting to that advantageous state reaches a predetermined number. , a configuration in which the open/close execution mode (round game) is continued when a game ball enters the V winning hole. According to this configuration, since the game cycle to be executed from the advantageous state to the opening/closing execution mode is completed in a short time, the opening/closing execution mode is repeated at short intervals, and the gambling property is excessively increased. I had a problem. On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the route that shifts from the high-probability support state H4 to the open/close execution mode H3, it is guaranteed that the final jackpot will be won, and the lottery mode is low. Since it is possible to go through the low probability high support state H5 in which the winning lottery can be repeatedly performed in the probability mode, it is possible to take a sufficient time to shift from the high probability high support state H4 to the opening/closing execution mode H3. For this reason, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from being excessively increased due to repetition of the open/close execution mode at short intervals. In addition, by taking a sufficient amount of time, it is possible to obtain a secondary effect that various effects can be performed. These effects cannot be achieved even by the structure of the pachinko machine having other game characteristics.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment exhibits superior effects as compared with various types of conventional pachinko machines.

<<9-5>> Various processes executed in the main controller:
Next, an example of specific control for executing the above-described processing in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described. The processing executed in the main controller 60 will be described first, and then the processing executed in the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

In order to advance the game of each game cycle, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing. These processes are described below. In addition to timer interrupt processing and normal processing, the MPU 62 executes NMI interrupt processing that is activated by the input of a power failure signal, but the description of these processing will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 415 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. As described above, the timer interrupt process is started periodically (for example, every 2 msec) by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 .

In step St0101, reading processing of various detection sensors 67a to 67f is executed. That is, it reads the states of the various detection sensors 67a to 67f connected to the main controller 60, determines the states of the sensors, and saves the detection information (entrance detection information). After that, the process proceeds to step St0102.

At step St0102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . After that, the process proceeds to step St0103.

In step St0103, the values of the hit random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, fall random number counter CF, and electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to each of the winning random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the falling random number counter CF, and the electric accessory opening counter C4, and each of these counter values reaches the maximum value. If so, they are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1 to C4 and CF are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM64. After that, the process proceeds to step St0104. Note that the fluctuation type counter CS updates its value in the normal processing (FIG. 419) described later.

In step St0104, a ball entry process for the starting opening accompanying the ball entering the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34 is executed. The details of the ball entry process for the start opening in step St0104 will be described later. After executing step St0104, the process proceeds to step St0105.

At step St0105, a through-ball entry process associated with the ball entering the through gate 35 is executed. The details of the through ball entry process in step St0105 will be described later. After executing step St0105, the MPU 62 ends the timer interrupt processing.

<Entering ball processing for the starting port>
Next, the ball entry process for the start opening will be described. The ball entry process for the starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (Fig. 415: St0104).

FIG. 416 is a flow chart showing ball entry processing for the starting opening. In step St0201, it is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first starting port 33 whether or not the game ball has entered the first starting port 33 (starting ball). In step St0201, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the first starting port 33 (St0201: YES), the process proceeds to step St0202, and the prize ball for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls. set command. After that, the process proceeds to step St0203.

In step St0203, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that the game ball has entered the first starting hole 33. FIG. After that, the process proceeds to step St0204.

In step St0204, the start suspension number RaN (hereinafter also referred to as the first start suspension number RaN), which is the value stored in the suspension number storage area of the first reservation area Ra, is read, and the first start suspension number RaN is the upper limit value. (4 in this embodiment) is determined. In step St0204, when the first start suspension number RaN is not less than the upper limit value (St0204: NO), the ball-entering process for this start opening is terminated.

On the other hand, in step St0204, when the first start suspension number RaN is less than the upper limit value (St0204: YES), the process proceeds to step St0205, and 1 is added to the first start suspension number RaN. After that, the process proceeds to step St0206.

In step St0206, each value of the winning random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and falling random number counter CF updated in step St0103 (Fig. 415) is stored in the first free storage area of the corresponding reservation area. Stored in a storage area, that is, a storage area corresponding to the first start suspension number RaN to which 1 is added in step St0205. After executing step St0206, the process proceeds to step St0207.

In step St0207, a first determination process is executed. In the first determination process, based on the information (holding information) of each value of the winning random number counter C1, the big winning type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the falling random number counter CF, the success or failure determination result of the winning lottery (lottery result), the jackpot type, presence/absence of reach, and the success or failure result of the drop lottery before the holding information is subject to the winning lottery (judgment processing) by the main controller 60. The details of the first determination process will be described later. After executing step St0207, the process proceeds to step St0208.

In step St0208, processing for setting a pending command is executed. Specifically, the judgment result of the first judgment process executed based on the information (holding information) of each value of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fall random number counter CF is first held. Set as a command.

The first pending command is the occurrence of the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 and the judgment result (preceding judgment information) by the preceding judgment processing based on the holding information acquired based on the entry. This is a command for causing the sub-side control device to recognize the pending information before the main control device 60 becomes the target of the winning lottery. The first hold command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 419: step St0503) of the normal process to be described later.

When the sound emission control device 90 receives the first suspension command transmitted based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33, the display in the first suspension display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 A command is sent to the display control device 100 to make changes in response to an increase in the number of pending items. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first reserved display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of reserved characters. After step St0208 is executed, the ball-entering process for this starting opening ends.

In step St0201, when it is determined that the game ball has not entered the first starting port 33 (St0201: NO), the process proceeds to step St0209, whether or not the game ball has entered the second starting port 34 is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second starting port 34 .

In step St0209, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34 (St0209: YES), the process proceeds to step St0210, and a prize ball for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out one game ball. set command. After that, the process proceeds to step St0211. On the other hand, in step S2t0209, when it is determined that the game ball has not entered the second starting hole 34 (St0209: NO), the ball entering process for this starting hole ends.

In step St0211, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal indicating that a game ball has entered the second starting hole 34 to the management control device on the game hall side. After that, the process proceeds to step St0212.

At step St0212, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON when the game state is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode in the game state transition processing described later, and turned OFF when the opening/closing execution mode is ended in the game state transition processing. If it is determined in step St0212 that the opening/closing execution mode flag is not ON (step St0212: NO), the process proceeds to step St0213. On the other hand, if it is determined in step St0212 that the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON (step St0212: YES), the ball-entering process for this starting opening is terminated.

In step St0213, it is determined whether or not the special figure unit 37 is being displayed in a variable manner. Specifically, it is determined whether or not one of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b provided in the special figure unit 37 is in the process of variable display. This determination is made by determining whether or not the special figure variation displaying flag in the special figure variation displaying flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The special figure variable display flag is turned ON when one of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b is to start the variable display, and is turned OFF when the variable display is finished.

In step St0213, when it is determined that the special figure unit 37 is not displayed in a variable manner (St0213: NO), the process proceeds to step St0214. On the other hand, in step St0213, when it is determined that the flag during special figure fluctuation display is ON (step St0213: YES), the entering ball processing for this starting opening is terminated.

In step St0214, each value of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the falling random number counter CF updated in step St0103 (FIG. 415) is stored in the determination process execution area 64c. After executing step St0214, the process proceeds to step St0215.

At step St0215, the second start entrance ball flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned ON. The second start opening ball flag is turned ON when a game ball enters the second start opening 34, and is turned OFF when the second symbol starts to change with the entry of the second start opening 34 as a trigger. be made. After step St0215 is executed, the ball-entering process for this starting opening is terminated.

<First determination process>
Next, the preceding determination processing will be described. The first determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the ball entry process for the starting opening (Fig. 416: St0207).

FIG. 417 is a flow chart showing the first determination process. As described above, the first determination process, based on the pending information, determines whether the winning lottery is successful, determines the type of jackpot, determines whether reach occurs or not, determines whether the fall lottery is successful or not. This process is executed before the winning lottery by the main controller 60 is made.

At step St0301, the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the storage area by the ball entering the starting hole in the ball entering process for the starting hole (FIG. 416) is grasped. After that, the process proceeds to step St0302, and the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery due to this ball entry is executed as a game round is determined. Specifically, the judgment result of the previous judgment process executed by the ball entry before the current ball entry is read from the corresponding storage area, and whether or not there is a probability variable jackpot that occurs before the winning lottery due to the current ball entry Also, the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery due to the current ball entry is executed as a game round is determined by grasping the presence or absence of winning in the falling lottery.

In step St0302, when it is determined that the lottery mode is the low-probability mode at the time when the winning lottery due to the current ball entry is executed as a game round, (St0302: YES), the process proceeds to step St0303, and the success/failure table is stored. The success/failure table (for the low-probability mode) for the first starting port stored in the area 63a is referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step St0308, and as a result of referring to the success/failure table for the first starting port (for low probability mode), it is determined whether or not the value information of the hit random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to a big win. .

On the other hand, in step St0302, when it is determined that the lottery mode is not the low-probability mode at the time when the winning lottery due to the current entry is executed as a game round (St0302: NO), the process proceeds to step St0304, and the current entry is performed. The value of the fall random number counter CF stored in the storage area is grasped by the sphere. After that, the process advances to step St0305 to refer to the fall propriety determination table stored in the fall lottery table storage area 63d to determine whether or not the fall lottery has been won.

In step St0305, when it is determined that the falling lottery is won (St0305: YES), the process proceeds to step St0306, the falling winning information is stored in the first determination process result storage area 64h, and the process proceeds to step St0303. In step St0303, as described above, the success/failure table (for the low-probability mode) for the first starting port stored in the success/failure table storage area 63a is referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step St0308, and as a result of referring to the success/failure table (for low probability mode) for the first starting port, it is determined whether or not the value of the hit random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to a big win.

In step St0305, when it is determined that the falling lottery is not won (St0305: NO), the process proceeds to step St0307, and the success/failure table for the first start opening (for high probability mode) is referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step St0308, and as a result of referring to the success/failure table for the first start port (for high probability mode), it is determined whether or not the value of the hit random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to a big win.

In step St0308, when it is determined that the value of the winning random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to a big win (St0308: YES), the process proceeds to step St0309, and is stored in the storage area by the ball entering the start opening this time. The value of the jackpot type counter C2 is grasped. After that, the process proceeds to step St0310, and the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 63b is referred to. Specifically, when the jackpot type counter C2 to be sorted this time is obtained based on the ball entering the first start port 33, refer to the first start port sort table. , the distribution table for the second starting opening is referred to when the information is acquired based on the ball entering the second starting opening 34 . After executing step St0310, the process proceeds to step St0311.

In step St0311, as a result of referring to the allocation table, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot type counter C2 grasped this time corresponds to the variable probability jackpot. In step St0311, when it is determined that the variable probability jackpot is supported (St0311: YES), the process proceeds to step St0312, and the variable probability jackpot information is stored in the preceding determination processing result storage area 64h. After that, the preceding determination process is terminated. On the other hand, in step St0311, when it is determined that it does not correspond to the variable probability jackpot (St0311: NO), the process proceeds to step St0313, and the normal jackpot information is stored in the preceding determination processing result storage area 64h. After that, the preceding determination process is terminated.

In step St0308, when it is determined that the value of the hit random number counter C1 grasped this time does not correspond to a big hit (St0308: NO), the process proceeds to step St0314, and the entry into the starting port this time causes the storage area to be stored. The value of the stored reach random number counter C3 is grasped. Then, it progresses to step St0315 and refers to the table for reach determination memorize|stored in the table storage area 63c for reach determination. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step St0316, and as a result of referring to the reach determination table, it is determined whether or not the value of the reach random number counter C3 grasped this time corresponds to the occurrence of reach.

In step St0316, when it is determined that reach occurrence is supported (St0316: YES), the process proceeds to step St0317, and reach occurrence information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h. After that, the preceding determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step St0316 that the reach generation is not supported (St0316: NO), the first determination process is terminated.

<Entering ball processing for through>
Next, the ball entry processing for through will be described. The through ball entry process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (Fig. 415: St0105).

FIG. 418 is a flow chart showing the ball entry processing for through. At step St0401, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the through gate 35 or not. In step St0401, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the through gate 35 (St0401: YES), the process proceeds to step St0402, and whether the accessory reserved number SN is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) determine whether or not Incidentally, the accessory reserved number SN is a value indicating the number of balls entered into the through gate 35 reserved for performing the electric accessory open lottery. In this embodiment, the maximum value of the number SN of reserved accessory items is four. On the other hand, when it is determined in step St0401 that the game ball has not entered the through gate 35 (St0401: NO), this through ball entering processing is terminated.

In step St0402, when it is determined that the reserved role number SN is less than the upper limit (less than 4) (St0402: YES), the process proceeds to step St0403, and 1 is added to the reserved role number SN. After that, the process proceeds to step St0404.

In step St0404, the value of the electric accessary product open counter C4 updated in step St0103 (FIG. 415) is stored in the first memory area among the free memory areas of the electric work holding area 64d of the RAM64. After that, the through ball entry processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in step St0402, if it is determined that the value of the reserved role item SN is not less than the upper limit (St0402: NO), that is, if it is determined that the value of the reserved role item SN is equal to or greater than the upper limit, Without storing the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4, the ball entry processing for through is terminated.

<Normal processing>
Next, normal processing will be described. The normal processing is processing started by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 when the power switch 88 is switched from the off state to the on state (hereinafter also referred to as "power on"). In normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed.

FIG. 419 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step St0501, start-up processing is executed. Specifically, initialization of each control device upon power-on, determination of validity of data stored in the RAM 64, and the like are executed. After that, the process proceeds to step St0502.

At step St0502, a startup command is set. The start-up command is a command for causing each sub-side control device to start a demonstration video when the power is turned on. After that, the process proceeds to step St0503.

In step St0503, the output data such as the start-up command set in step St0502 and the command set in the timer interrupt process or the normal process executed last time are transmitted to each sub-side control device. Specifically, the presence or absence of the prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 70 . In addition, when commands related to effects such as a start-up command, a variation command, a type command, and a first hold command are set, they are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . After executing step St0503, the process proceeds to step St0504.

In step St0504, the change type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the fluctuation type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . After that, the process proceeds to step St0505.

In step St0505, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step St0506. In step St0506, game round control processing for controlling the game in each game round is executed. In the game round control processing, a winning lottery, setting of variable display of symbols by the symbol display device 41, display control of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b, and the like are performed. Details of the game round control process will be described later. After executing step St0506, the process proceeds to step St0507.

At step St0507, a game state transition process is executed to shift the game state. By executing the game state transition process, the game state shifts to an opening/closing execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, and the like. Details of the game state transition processing will be described later. After that, the process proceeds to step St0508.

In step St0508, an electric support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 34a provided at the second starting port 34 is executed. In the electric role support process, it is determined whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a. The details of the electronic support process will be described later. After that, the process proceeds to step St0509.

In step St0509, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has passed from the start of the current normal processing (strictly speaking, the start of the command output processing in step St0503). That is, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the next normal process. In step St0509, if it is determined that the predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed since the start of the normal processing this time (St0509: NO), in steps St0510 and St0511, until the execution timing of the next normal processing Within the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated. Specifically, in step St0510, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . Further, in step St0511, 1 is added to the fluctuation type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . On the other hand, in step St0509, when it is determined that the predetermined time (4 msec) has passed since the start of the normal processing this time (St0509: YES), the process returns to step St0503, and each process from step St0503 to step St0508 is performed. Execute.

Since the execution time of each process from step St0503 to step St0508 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using the remaining time, the values of these counters can be randomly updated.

<Game Round Control Processing>
Next, game round control processing will be described. The game round control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of normal process (Fig. 419: St0506).

FIG. 420 is a flow chart showing game round control processing. At step St0601, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON when the game state is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode in the game state transition processing described later, and turned OFF when the opening/closing execution mode is ended in the game state transition processing.

In step St0601, when it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress (St0601: YES), the game round control process is terminated without executing any of the processes after step St0602. That is, when the open/close execution mode is in progress, the game cycle is not started regardless of whether or not a ball is entered into the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34 . On the other hand, if it is determined in step St0601 that the open/close execution mode is not in progress (St0601: NO), the process proceeds to step St0602.

In step St0602, it is determined whether or not the special figure unit 37 is displayed in a variable manner. Specifically, it is determined whether or not one of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b provided in the special figure unit 37 is in the process of variable display. This determination is made by determining whether or not the special figure variation displaying flag in the special figure variation displaying flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The special figure variable display flag is turned ON when one of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b is to start the variable display, and is turned OFF when the variable display is finished.

In step St0602, when it is determined that the special figure unit 37 is not displayed in a variable manner (St0602: NO), the process proceeds to step St0603.

In step St0603, a variation start process for starting the variation display in the special figure unit 37 and the variation display in the symbol display device 41 is executed. The details of the fluctuation start process will be described later. After executing step St0603, this game round control process is terminated.

On the other hand, in step St0602, when it is determined that the special figure unit 37 is in the process of variable display (St0602: YES), the process proceeds to step St0604.

In step St0604, a variation end process for ending the variation display in the special figure unit 37 and the variation display in the symbol display device 41 is executed. The details of the fluctuation end processing will be described later. After executing step St0604, this game round control process is terminated.

<Variation start processing>
Next, fluctuation start processing will be described. The fluctuation start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game round control process (Fig. 420: St0603).

FIG. 421 is a flowchart showing fluctuation start processing. In step St0701, it is determined whether or not the second start entrance ball flag stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The second start opening ball flag is turned ON when a game ball enters the second start opening 34, and is turned OFF when the second symbol starts to change with the entry of the second start opening 34 as a trigger. be made. When it is determined in step St0701 that the second starting port entry flag is not ON (St0701: NO), the process proceeds to step St0702.

At step St0702, it is determined whether or not the first start suspension number RaN exceeds "0". When the first start suspension number RaN is equal to or less than "0", it means that the start suspension number for the first start port 33 is "0". Therefore, when it is determined in step St0702 that the first start suspension number RaN is equal to or less than "0" (St0702: NO), this fluctuation start process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step St0702 that the first start suspension number RaN exceeds "0" (St0702: YES), the process proceeds to step St0703.

In step St0703, a pending information shift process is executed to set the pending information stored in the first pending area Ra to the state after the change is started, and the process proceeds to step St0706. Details of the pending information shift process will be described later.

On the other hand, in step St0701, when it is determined that the second start entrance ball flag is ON (St0701: YES), the process proceeds to step St0704, and the second symbol display portion flag stored in the various flag storage area 64g. to ON. The second symbol display portion flag is information for specifying which of the second symbol display portion 37b and the first symbol display portion 37a is the target for starting the variable display this time. After that, the process proceeds to step St0705.

At step St0705, the second start entrance ball flag stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned OFF. After executing step St0705, the process proceeds to step St0706.

In step St0706, fall judgment processing including processing when winning the fall lottery is performed. Details of the fall determination process will be described later. Next, the process proceeds to step St0707.

In step St0707, a winning determination process including a process when a big win is won in a winning lottery is performed. The details of the hit determination process will be described later. After executing step St0707, the process proceeds to step St0708.

At step St0708, a variable time setting process is executed. The variable time setting process is the time required for the current game cycle in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b based on the game state, the presence or absence of the jackpot and the time saving provision, and the presence or absence of the reach generation. This is the processing for setting the variable time. Details of the variable time setting process will be described later. After executing step St0708, the process proceeds to step St0709.

In step St0709, a variation command is set. The variable command indicates whether the current game cycle is related to the hold information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 or based on the ball entering the second starting port 34. is included, and information on the presence or absence of reach occurrence and information on the fluctuation time set in step St0708 are included. After executing step St0709, the process proceeds to step St0710.

At step St0710, a type command is set. The type command includes information on the presence or absence of a big hit, the presence or absence of time saving, and the result of distribution determination. In other words, the type command includes information on whether or not you have won a jackpot in a winning lottery, information on whether or not you have won a time-saving grant in a winning lottery, and information on the type of jackpot, such as 8R probability variable jackpot information, 8R normal It contains jackpot information, 16R probability variable jackpot information, or loss result information.

The variation command and type command set at steps St0709 and St0710 are sent to the sound emission control device 90 at step St0503 in the normal process (FIG. 419). The sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect in the game round based on the received variation command and the type command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the effect is executed. After executing step St0710, the process proceeds to step St0711.

In step St0711, the symbol display portion corresponding to the current game cycle out of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b is caused to start the variable display of symbols. Specifically, when the second symbol display portion flag of the RAM 64 is not ON, the first symbol display portion 37a is specified as the symbol display portion corresponding to the current game round, and the variable display is started, When the second pattern display portion flag is ON, the second pattern display portion 37b is specified as the pattern display portion corresponding to the current game round, and the variable display is started. After executing step St0711, the process proceeds to step St0712.

In step St0712, the special figure fluctuation displaying flag stored in the special figure fluctuation displaying flag storage area in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned ON. After executing step St0712, the fluctuation start process is terminated.

<Holding information shift processing>
Next, the pending information shift process will be described. The hold information shift process is executed by MPU 62 of main controller 60 as a subroutine of fluctuation start process (Fig. 421: St0703).

FIG. 422 is a flowchart showing pending information shift processing. In step St0801, 1 is subtracted from the first start-up reservation number RaN for the first reservation area Ra, which is the processing target for executing the reservation information shift processing. After that, the process proceeds to step St0802.

At step St0802, the data stored in the first area of the first reservation area Ra is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c. After that, the process proceeds to step St0803.

In step St0803, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first reservation area Ra is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After executing step St0803, the process proceeds to step St0804.

In step St0804, if the second pattern display flag of the various flag storage area 64g is ON, the flag is turned OFF, and if not ON, the state is maintained. After that, the process proceeds to step St0805.

At step St0805, a shift command is set. The shift time command is a command including information for making the sound emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, recognize that the data in the reserved area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63, information indicating that the reservation area to which the data is to be shifted this time corresponds to the first reservation area Ra, that is, the information corresponding to the first start port 33 A shift-time command including information indicating that the shift-time command is included is selected, and the selected shift-time command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . After that, the hold information shift process is terminated.

<Fall judgment processing>
Next, fall determination processing will be described. The fall determination process is executed by MPU 62 of main controller 60 as a subroutine of fluctuation start process (Fig. 421: St0706).

FIG. 423 is a flowchart showing fall determination processing. At step St0901, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. In step St0901, when it determines with it being high probability mode (St0901:YES), it progresses to step St0902.

In step St0902, the drop lottery success/failure determination is executed with reference to the drop lottery success/failure table. Specifically, the value of the fall random number counter CF stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is the value set as winning in the fall lottery success/failure table (see FIG. 411) of the fall lottery table storage area 63d. Determine whether or not they match. In the following step St0903, when the result of the success/failure determination in step St0902 is that the falling lottery is won (St0903: YES), the process proceeds to step St0904.

At step St0904, the high probability mode flag is turned off. After that, the process advances to step St0905 to set a fall command. The drop command is a command for notifying the sound emission control device 90 that the drop lottery has been won and the lottery mode has changed from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode. After executing step St0905, the fall determination process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step St0901 that it is not in the high probability mode (St0901: NO), or if the result of the success/failure determination in step St0903 is that the fall lottery has not been won (St0903: NO), this fall determination process is immediately executed. finish.

<Hit determination processing>
Next, hit determination processing will be described. The hit determination process is executed by MPU 62 of main controller 60 as a subroutine of variation start process (Fig. 421: St0707).

FIG. 424 is a flowchart showing hit determination processing. At step St1001, it is determined whether or not the second pattern display flag of the RAM 64 is ON. In step St1001, when it is determined that the second symbol display flag is not ON (St1001: NO), the process proceeds to step St1002 to determine whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

In step St1002, when it is determined that the mode is the high probability mode (St1002: YES), the process advances to step St1003, and the success/failure determination is performed with reference to the success/failure table for the first starting port (for high probability mode). Specifically, the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is the jackpot winning in the success/failure table (for high probability mode) for the first starting port shown in FIG. 408(b). Determines whether or not it matches the value set as After that, the process proceeds to step St1008.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step St1002 that the mode is not the high-probability mode (St1002: NO), the process proceeds to step St1004, and the validity determination is performed by referring to the validity table for the first starting port (for low-probability mode). Specifically, the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is set as a jackpot winning in the success/failure table (for low probability mode) for the first starting port shown in FIG. 408(a). Determines whether or not it matches the value After that, the process proceeds to step St1008.

At step St1001, when it is determined that the second symbol display flag is ON (St1001: YES), the process proceeds to step St1005 to determine whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

In step St1005, when it is determined that the mode is the high probability mode (St1005: YES), the process advances to step St1006 to refer to the propriety table (for the high probability mode) for the second starting port to determine propriety. Specifically, the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is the jackpot winning in the success/failure table (for high probability mode) for the second starting port shown in FIG. 409(b). Determines whether or not it matches the value set as After that, the process proceeds to step St1006.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step St1005 that the mode is not the high-probability mode (St1005: NO), the process proceeds to step St1007, and the validity determination is performed by referring to the validity table for the second starting port (for low-probability mode). Specifically, the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is set as a jackpot winning in the success/failure table (for low probability mode) for the second starting port shown in FIG. 409(a). Determines whether or not it matches the value After that, the process proceeds to step St1008.

In step St1008, it is determined whether or not the result of the win/loss determination (hit lottery) in step St1003, step St1004, step St1006, or step St1007 is a big win. In step St1008, when the result of the winning/failure determination is the jackpot winning (St1008: YES), the process proceeds to step St1009.

At step St1009, it is determined whether or not the second symbol display flag of the RAM 64 is ON. In step St1009, when it is determined that the second symbol display flag is not ON (St1009: NO), the process proceeds to step St1010, and the distribution table for the first start port (FIG. 410(a)) is referred to. to determine the allocation. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is included in the numerical range of the 8R probability variable jackpot or the numerical range of the 8R normal jackpot.

On the other hand, in step St1009, when it is determined that the second pattern display flag is ON (St1009: YES), the process proceeds to step St1011, and the distribution table for the second starting port (FIG. 410(b)) is displayed. Make a distribution decision by referring to it. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is included in the numerical range of the 16R probability variable jackpot. In the distribution table for the second starting port of the present embodiment, since the distribution result is only one type of 16R probability variable jackpot, the result of the above determination is always a 16R probability variable jackpot. After executing the process of step St1010 or step St1011, the process proceeds to step St1012.

In step St1012, the flag (jackpot flag) corresponding to the type of jackpot distributed in step St1010 or step St1011 is turned ON. Specifically, when it is an 8R probability variable jackpot, the 8R probability variable jackpot flag is turned ON, when it is an 8R normal jackpot, the 8R normal jackpot flag is turned ON, and when it is a 16R probability variable jackpot, the 16R probability variable jackpot flag is turned on. Turn ON. After executing step St1012, the process proceeds to step St1013.

In step St1013, a process of setting a stop result for a big win is executed. Specifically, in the current game turn in which the big win is won, it is set whether the variable display is to be ended in the state in which the stop result is displayed in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b. This is a process for Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the big win stored in the stop result table storage area 63f, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the type of the big win distributed in step St1010 or step St1011 is acquired. and stores the address information in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After executing step St1013, the real winning determination process is terminated.

In step St1008, when the result of the winning lottery in step St1003, step St1004, step St1006, or step St1007 is not a big win (St1008: NO), the process proceeds to step St1014.

In step St1014, it is determined whether or not the result of the success/failure determination (hit lottery) in step St1007 is time saving grant winning (winning time saving grant). In step St1014, when the result of the success/failure determination is the time reduction award winning (St1014: YES), the process proceeds to step St1015.

In step St1015, a time saving provision flag is turned ON. Specifically, the time reduction provision flag of various flag storage areas 64g of RAM64 is turned ON. A time saving provision flag is a flag which shows having won in time saving provision. After executing step St1015, the process proceeds to step St1016.

In step St1016, the process which sets the stop result for time reduction provision is performed. Specifically, it is a process for setting which stop result is displayed in the second symbol display portion 37b in the current game round in which the time saving grant is won and the variable display is ended. . Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for time saving in the stop result table storage area 63f, the stop result data corresponding to the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the stop result table storage area 63f Address information is acquired, and the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After executing step St1016, the real winning determination process is terminated.

In step St1014, when the result of the success/failure determination in step St1007 is not time-saving provision election (St1014:NO), it progresses to step St1017.

In step St1017, the ready-to-win determination table is referenced to determine whether or not the ready-to-win will occur in the game round. Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is the value set as the occurrence of reach in the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c. It is determined whether or not they match. After that, the process proceeds to step St1018.

In step St1018, if the result of reach determination in step St1017 is that reach occurs in the game round (St1018: YES), the process proceeds to step St1019, and the reach occurrence flag is turned ON. Specifically, the reach occurrence flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned ON. After executing step St1019, the process proceeds to step St1020.

On the other hand, in step St1018, if the result of reach determination in step St1017 is that reach does not occur in the game round (St1018: NO), the process proceeds to step St1020 without executing step St1019.

In step St1020, a process of setting a stop result for failure is executed. Specifically, in the current game turn that results in a loss, the variable display is set to end in a state in which the stop result is displayed in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b. processing. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the loss in the stop result table storage area 63f, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is obtained. It acquires and stores the address information in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After executing step St1016, the real winning determination process is terminated.

<Variation time setting process>
Next, the variable time setting process will be described. The variable time setting process is executed by MPU 62 of main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variable start process (Fig. 421: St0708).

FIG. 425 is a flowchart showing variable time setting processing. In step St1101, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired. After that, the process proceeds to step St1102.

In step St1102, a process of specifying a fluctuation time table is executed. The fluctuation time table is data in tabular form having data elements of fluctuation time information (variation time information), which is the time from when the pattern starts to stop until it stops, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS. In the variable time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63, various types of variable time tables are stored according to the game state, the presence or absence of the jackpot and the time saving provision, and the presence or absence of the reach generation. In step S1102, one variable time table is identified from these variable time tables. Specifically, based on the high probability mode flag and the high frequency support mode flag, the current gaming state is low probability low support state, high probability high support state, low probability high support state, high probability low support state It is determined whether it is in any of the above, the result of the determination, the result of the determination of whether or not there is a jackpot or time saving, and the determination result of the reach determination that determines whether or not the reach occurs. One variable time table is specified from the variable time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63 based on the above. After executing step St1102, the process proceeds to step St1103.

In step St1103, by referring to the fluctuation time table identified in step St1102, fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS obtained in step St1101 is acquired. After executing step St1103, the process proceeds to step St1104.

In step St1104, the variable time information acquired in step St1103 is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM64. After that, the variable time setting process is terminated.

<Variation end processing>
Next, the fluctuation end processing will be described. The fluctuation end process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game round control process (Fig. 420: St0604).

FIG. 426 is a flowchart showing fluctuation end processing. At step St1201, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the current game round has elapsed. As described above, the variation time is the time from when the symbol row starts to vary until all the symbol rows stop, and is part of the unit game time. Specifically, in step St1201, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable time information stored in the variable time counter area (various counter area 64f) of the RAM 64 has become "0". The value of the variable time information is set in the aforementioned variable time setting process (FIG. 425). The value of this set variable time information is decremented by 1 each time timer interrupt processing is started.

If it is determined in step St1201 that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (St1201: NO), this fluctuation ending process is terminated.

In step St1201, when it is determined that the variation time has elapsed (St1201: YES), the process proceeds to step St1202, and the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b correspond to the current game turn. A process for ending the variation of the symbols in the symbol display section is performed. Subsequently, in step St1203, the special figure variation displaying flag stored in the special figure variation displaying flag storage area in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned OFF. After executing step St1203, the process proceeds to step St1204.

At step St1204, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a big winning. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any one of the 8R probability variable jackpot flag, the 8R normal jackpot flag, and the 16R probability variable jackpot flag is ON. In step St1204, when none of the above flags is ON, that is, when it is determined that the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is not a big win (St1204: NO), the process proceeds to step St1205.

In step St1205, the process for time reduction provision which is a process performed when the result of the winning lottery which concerns on this game round is time reduction provision is performed. In addition, the detail of the process for time reduction provision is mentioned later. After executing step St1205, the process proceeds to step St1206.

In step St1206, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

At step St1206, when it is determined that the high-probability mode flag is ON (St1206: YES), the process proceeds to step St1207, and 1 is subtracted from the value of the number-of-games counter SNC for ST. The number-of-games counter SNC for ST is a counter for counting how many more times the number of games continuously executed in the high-probability mode will reach the number of STs. After executing step St1207, the process proceeds to step St1208.

At step St1208, it is determined whether or not the number of times the game is continuously executed in the high probability mode has reached the ST number (for example, 50 times). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the number-of-games counter SNC for ST is zero. Since the number-of-games counter SNC for ST indicates the remaining number of STs, by determining whether SNC=0, the number of games continuously executed in the high-probability mode can be increased. It is possible to determine whether or not the number of times of ST has been reached.

In step St1208, if it is determined that the value of the number-of-games counter SNC for ST is 0 (St1208: YES), that is, it is determined that the number of times of games continuously executed in the high-probability mode has reached the number of times of ST. If so, the process advances to step St1209 to turn off the high-probability mode flag. After that, the process proceeds to step St1210.

On the other hand, in step St1208, if it is determined that the value of the number-of-games counter SNC for ST is not 0 (St1208: NO), that is, before the number of games continuously executed in the high-probability mode reaches the number of STs ( = ST count), the process proceeds to step St1210 without executing step St1209.

Note that even when it is determined in step St1206 that the high-probability mode flag is not ON (St1206: NO), the process proceeds to step St1210.

In step St1210, it is determined whether or not the high support continuation state flag stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON until the next time. The high support continuation state flag until the next time is a flag indicating whether or not it corresponds to the state in which the high frequency support mode is continued as the support mode until the next jackpot is won (the high support continuation state until the next time), and the time reduction of step St1205. It is turned ON when it is determined that the time saving provision flag is ON in the provision process, and is turned OFF at the start of the opening/closing execution mode (at the start of the opening period).

In step St1210, when it is determined that the high support continuation state flag is ON until the next time (St1210: YES), this fluctuation end processing is terminated immediately.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step St1210 that the high support continuation state flag is not ON until the next time (St1210: NO), the process proceeds to step St1211.

In step St1211, it is determined whether or not the support mode is the high frequency support mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

If it is determined in step St1211 that the high frequency support mode flag is ON (St1211: YES), the process proceeds to step St1212.

In step St1212, 1 is subtracted from the value of the time-saving game number counter PNC. The time-saving game number counter PNC is a counter for counting how many more times the number of games continuously executed in the high-frequency support mode reaches the time-saving continuation number. After that, the process proceeds to step St1213.

In step St1213, it is determined whether or not the number of times the game times are continuously executed in the high-frequency support mode has reached the number of time-saving continuation times (for example, 10 times). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the time-saving game number counter PNC is 0 or less. Since the time-saving game number counter PNC indicates the remaining number of time-saving continuation times, by determining whether PNC = 0, the number of games that are continuously executed in the high-frequency support mode It is possible to determine whether or not the number of times has reached the number of continuous hours.

In step St1213, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving game number counter PNC is 0 (St1213: YES), that is, the number of times of games continuously executed in the high-frequency support mode has reached the time-saving continuation number If so, the process advances to step St1214 to turn off the high-frequency support mode flag. After executing step St1214, the fluctuation ending process is ended.

On the other hand, in step St1213, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving game number counter PNC is not 0 (St1213: NO), that is, the number of times the game is continuously executed in the high-frequency support mode reaches the time-saving continuation number. When it determines with it being the front (within the number of times of time reduction continuation), it ends this fluctuation end processing immediately, without performing step St1214.

Note that even if it is determined in step St1211 that the high-frequency support mode flag is not ON (St1211: NO), this fluctuation end processing is immediately terminated.

In step St1204, it is determined that any one of the 8R probability variable jackpot flag, the 8R normal jackpot flag, and the 16R probability variable jackpot flag is ON, that is, the result of the winning lottery related to the current game round is the jackpot winning. If so (St1204: YES), the process proceeds to step St1215, and the opening/closing execution mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned ON. After executing step St1215, the variable time end processing is ended.

<Processing for shortening working hours>
Next, processing for time reduction provision is explained. Processing for shortening of working hours is executed by MPU 62 of main controller 60 as a subroutine of fluctuation end processing (Fig. 426: St1205).

FIG. 427 is a flow chart showing processing for shortening working hours. In step St1301, it is determined whether or not the time reduction provision flag is ON.

In step St1301, when it determines with a reduction in working hours provision flag being ON (St1301:YES), it progresses to step St1302 and a high frequency support mode flag is turned ON. Thereby, when the time saving provision flag is ON, that is, when the time saving provision is won in the winning lottery, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. After executing step St1302, the process proceeds to step St1303.

In step St1303, a high-frequency support mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. set. After executing step St1303, the process proceeds to step St1304.

In step St1304, the high support continuation state flag is turned ON until the next time, and then the process proceeds to step St1305, where a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the high support continuation state is in effect until the next time. A high support continuation state command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . After executing step St1305, the process proceeds to step St1306.

In step St1306, a time saving provision flag is turned off. After executing step St1306, the processing for shortening working hours is terminated.

On the other hand, in step St1301, when it determines with a time saving provision flag not being ON (St1301:NO), the process for time saving provision is immediately complete|finished.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the game state transition processing will be explained. The game state transition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of normal process (Fig. 419: St0507).

FIG. 428 is a flowchart showing game state transition processing. In step St1401, it is determined whether or not the ending period flag is ON. The ending period flag is turned ON at the end of the big winning opening opening/closing process period (at the start of the ending period) in the opening/closing execution mode, and turned OFF at the end of the ending period. The ending period is a period for executing the ending effect in the opening/closing execution mode.

If it is determined in step St1401 that the ending period flag is not ON (St1401: NO), the process proceeds to step St1402 to determine whether or not the opening/closing process period flag is ON. The opening/closing process period flag is turned ON at the timing when the opening period ends in the opening/closing execution mode and the big winning opening opening/closing process period, which is the period during which the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is executed, starts. , is turned off at the timing when the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 36b ends.

If it is determined in step St1402 that the opening/closing period flag is not ON (St1402: NO), the process proceeds to step St1403 to determine whether or not the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is turned ON at the start of the opening period and turned OFF at the end of the opening period.

If it is determined in step St1403 that the opening period flag is not ON (St1403: NO), the process proceeds to step St1404 to determine whether or not the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step St1404 that the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON (St1404: YES), the process proceeds to step St1405. On the other hand, in step St1404, when it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode flag is OFF (St1404: NO), this game state transition processing is terminated as it is.

At step St1405, the high probability mode flag is turned off. After executing step St1405, the process advances to step St1406 to turn off the high frequency support mode flag. After executing step St1406, the process advances to step St1407 to turn off the high support continuation state flag until the next time. After executing step St1407, the process proceeds to step St1408.

At step St1408, an opening/closing scenario setting process for setting an opening/closing scenario is executed. The opening/closing scenario defines the pattern of the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 36b in the round game. It is a program in which conditions for shifting the opening/closing door 36b from the open state to the closed state (hereinafter also referred to as "closed conditions") are recorded. The opening/closing scenario is stored in the opening/closing scenario storage area 63i of the ROM 63.

The opening conditions are, for example, as follows.
- The current state of the pachinko machine 10 is the timing for starting each round game in the open/close execution mode.
When one of the above items is established, the opening/closing door 36b shifts from the closed state to the open state.

Closing conditions are, for example, as follows.
- The elapsed time from the start of each round game exceeds a predetermined upper limit duration (for example, 15 seconds).
- The number of game balls entered into the big winning hole 36a after starting each round game exceeds a predetermined upper limit number.
When either one of the above two items is established, the opening/closing door 36b shifts from the open state to the closed state.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the V winning opening shutter 48a is opened for a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds) after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the opening/closing execution mode by the shutter opening/closing process described later. After that, it is controlled to be in a closed state. In retrospect, the opening/closing scenario that determines the opening/closing operation pattern of the opening/closing door 36b is set differently depending on whether the type of the jackpot is a variable probability jackpot or a normal jackpot. When the type of the jackpot is a variable probability jackpot, that is, when the 8R variable probability jackpot flag or the 16R variable probability jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is ON, during the opening period of the open/close door 36b in the first round of the round game, V winning The opening condition is determined so as to include the period in which the mouth shutter 48a is in the open state (not part of it, but all of it). As a result, when a big win is won by a winning lottery and the type of the won big win is a probability variable big win, it becomes easy to enter the game ball into the V prize opening 48 opened in the first round of the round game.

In addition, instead of the configuration in which the opening period of the open/close door 36b in the first round of the round game includes the period in which the V winning opening shutter 48a is in the open state, opening and closing in the number of rounds of the round game other than 1 The opening period of the door 36b may include a period in which the V winning opening shutter 48a is open. After executing step St1408, the process proceeds to step St1409.

In step St1409, an opening time setting process is executed. The opening time setting process is a process of setting the length of time of the opening period (hereinafter also referred to as opening time) in the open/close execution mode. In this embodiment, the opening time of the same fixed length is set in each opening period. Specifically, "3000" (ie, 6 sec) is set in the third timer counter area T3 that determines the opening time. The third timer counter area T3 is provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM64. After executing step St1409, the process proceeds to step St1410.

At step St1410, an opening command is set. The set opening command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 at step St0503 in the normal process (FIG. 419). This opening command includes information on the set opening time and the number of rounds of the current open/close execution mode. A sound emission control device 90 determines the contents of performance corresponding to the opening time and the period of opening/closing processing of the big winning opening based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents are executed. After executing step St1410, the process advances to step St1411 to turn on the opening period flag. After executing step St1411, the game state transition processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step St1403 that the opening period flag is ON (St1403: YES), the process proceeds to step St1412.

In step St1412, it is determined whether or not the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the third timer counter area T3 is "0". If it is determined in step St1412 that the opening period has ended (St1412: YES), the process proceeds to step St1413 to turn off the opening period flag. After that, the process proceeds to step St1414.

In step St1413, round display start processing for notifying the type of the current opening/closing execution mode is executed. Specifically, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 is confirmed. Based on the confirmed address information, stop result data corresponding to the address information is specified from among the stop result data group stored in the ROM 63, and the content of the number of rounds is determined from the specified stop result data. confirm. After that, the content of the confirmed number of rounds is output to the round display section 39 in the main display section 45 . As a result, the round display section 39 displays the round information related to the output. After executing step St1414, the process proceeds to step St1415.

At step St1415, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned ON. In the subsequent step St1415, an opening/closing process start command is set. The opening/closing process start command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the opening/closing process period has started. The opening/closing process start command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 419: step St0503) of the normal process. After executing step St1415, the game state transition processing is terminated.

In step St1402, when it is determined that the opening/closing process period flag is ON (St1402: YES), the process proceeds to step St1416 to execute the big winning opening opening/closing process. The special prize opening opening/closing process will be described later. After executing step St1416, the process proceeds to step St1417.

In step St1417, shutter opening/closing processing is executed. The shutter opening/closing process will be described later. After executing step St1417, the process proceeds to step St1418.

At step St1418, it is determined whether or not the big winning opening opening/closing process has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the big winning opening opening/closing process has ended depending on whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 for counting the number of times the opening/closing door 36b is opened is "0". do. In step St1418, when it is determined that the big winning opening opening/closing process has ended (St1418: YES), the process proceeds to step St1419. On the other hand, in step St1418, when it is determined that the big winning opening opening/closing process has not ended (St1418: NO), this game state transition process is ended as it is.

In step St1419, the open/close processing period flag is turned off, and then the process proceeds to step St1420.

In step St1420, round display end processing is executed. In this process, the display control of the round display portion 39 in the main display portion 45 is terminated so that the round display portion 39 is turned off. After executing step St1420, the process proceeds to step St1421.

In step St1421, an ending time setting process is executed. The ending time setting process is a process of setting the length of time of the ending period (hereinafter also referred to as ending time) in the open/close execution mode. In this embodiment, the ending time of the same constant length is set for each ending period. Specifically, "3000" (ie, 6 sec) is set in the fourth timer counter area T4 that determines the ending time. The fourth timer counter area T4 is provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM64. After executing step St1421, the process proceeds to step St1422.

In step St1422, an ending command is set. This set ending command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step St0503 in the normal process (FIG. 419). Upon receiving the ending command, the sound emission control device 90 terminates the effect corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode. After executing step St1422, the process proceeds to step St1423.

At step St1423, the ending period flag is turned ON. After that, the game state transition processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step St1401 that the ending period flag is ON (St1401: YES), the process proceeds to step St1424.

At step St1424, it is determined whether or not the ending period has ended. Specifically, in the ending time setting process (St1421), it is determined whether or not the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time in step St1421 is "0". When it is determined in step St1424 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0" (St1424: YES), the process proceeds to step St1425.

At step St1425, the ending period flag is turned off. Thereafter, the process advances to step St1426 to execute transition processing at the end of the ending period. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes of game rounds after the end of the current ending period. Details of the transition processing at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing step St1426, the process proceeds to step St1427.

At step St1427, the opening/closing execution mode flag is turned off. After executing step St1426, the game state transition processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in step St1424, when it is determined that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is not "0" (St1424: NO), this game state transition processing is finished as it is.

<Opening and closing processing of the grand prize opening>
Next, the big winning opening opening/closing process will be described. The big winning opening opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (Fig. 428: St1416).

FIG. 429 is a flow chart showing the big winning opening opening/closing process. At step St1501, it is determined whether or not the door 36b is open. Specifically, the determination is made based on the drive state of the variable winning drive section 36c. If it is determined in step St1501 that the opening/closing door 36b is not open (St1501: NO), the process proceeds to step St1502.

At step St1502, it is determined whether or not the conditions for opening the opening/closing door 36b are satisfied. Specifically, the opening/closing scenario set by the opening/closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether or not it is time to open the opening/closing door 36b. In step St1502, when it is determined that the condition for opening the opening/closing door 36b is satisfied (St1502: YES), the process proceeds to step St1503.

In step St1503, the opening/closing door 36b is opened. After that, the process proceeds to step St1504.

In step St1504, a door opening command is set. The opening/closing door open command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the opening/closing door 36b has been opened. The opening/closing door open command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 419: step St0503) of the normal process. Based on the received open/close door open command, the sound emission control device 90 specifies that the opening of the big prize opening 36a for one round has started, and also determines the contents of the effects in the various lamps 47 and the speakers 46. The content is updated to correspond to the start of opening of the mouth 36a. Further, the sound emission control device 90 transmits the door opening command to the display control device 100 while maintaining the information format. The display control device 100 identifies that the opening of the large winning prize opening 36a for one round has started based on the received open/close door opening command, and changes the content of the effect on the pattern display device 41 to the opening of the large winning prize opening 36a. Update to the contents corresponding to the start of opening. After executing step St1504, the big winning opening opening/closing process is terminated.

When it is determined in step St1502 that the condition for opening the opening/closing door 36b is not satisfied (St1502: NO), the big winning opening opening/closing process is terminated without executing steps St1503 and St1504.

In step St1501, when it is determined that the opening/closing door 36b is being opened (St1501: YES), the process proceeds to step St1505.

At step St1505, it is determined whether or not the condition for closing the opening/closing door 36b is satisfied. Specifically, the opening/closing scenario set by the opening/closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether or not it is time to close the opening/closing door 36b. In step St1505, when it is determined that the closing condition of the opening/closing door 36b is satisfied (St1505: YES), the process proceeds to step St1506.

In step St1506, the opening/closing door 36b is closed. After that, the process proceeds to step St1507.

In step St1507, an opening/closing door closing command is set. The open/close door closing command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the open/close door 36b is closed. The open/close door closing command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 419: step St0503) of the normal process. Based on the received open/close door closing command, the sound emission control device 90 specifies that the opening of the big prize opening 36a for one round has been completed, and the contents of the effects in the various lamps 47 and the speakers 46 are set to the big prize opening. 36a is updated to correspond to the end of opening. Further, the sound emission control device 90 transmits the open/close door closing command to the display control device 100 while maintaining the information format. The display control device 100 specifies that the opening of the large winning prize opening 36a for one round has been completed based on the received open/close door closing command, and the content of the effect on the pattern display device 41 is changed to the opening of the large winning prize opening 36a. is updated to correspond to the completion of . After executing step St1507, the big winning opening opening/closing process is ended.

When it is determined in step St1505 that the closing condition of the opening/closing door 36b is not established (St1505: NO), the big winning opening opening/closing process is terminated without executing steps St1506 and St1507.

<Shutter open/close process>
Next, shutter opening/closing processing will be described. The shutter opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (Fig. 428: St1417).

FIG. 430 is a flowchart showing shutter opening/closing processing. In step St1601, it is determined whether or not the V winning opening shutter 48a is open. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the V winning opening shutter 48a is open, depending on the operating state of the V winning opening shutter driving section 48b (FIG. 406).

In step St1601, when it is determined that the V winning opening shutter 48a is not open (St1601: NO), the process proceeds to step St1602.

At step St1602, it is determined whether or not the condition for opening the V winning opening shutter 48a is established. In this embodiment, as described above, the V winning opening shutter 48a is opened for a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds) after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the opening/closing execution mode, and then closed. operate as In order to realize this operation, in step St1602, the condition for opening the V winning opening shutter 48a is established by counting with a timer counter whether a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the opening/closing execution mode and the opening timing has been reached. determine whether or not

In step St1602, when it is determined that the condition for opening the V winning opening shutter 48a is established (St1602: YES), the process proceeds to step St1603 to open the V winning opening shutter 48a. After executing step St1603, the process proceeds to step St1606, which will be described later.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step St1602 that the condition for opening the V winning opening shutter 48a is not established (St1602: NO), the process proceeds to step St1606 without executing step St1603.

In step St1601, when it is determined that the V winning opening shutter 48a is open (St1601: YES), the process proceeds to step St1604.

At step St1604, it is determined whether or not the condition for closing the V winning opening shutter 48a is established. Specifically, the closing condition of the V winning opening shutter 48a is determined by counting with a timer counter whether the predetermined time (10 seconds) has passed since the opening timing of the V winning opening shutter 48a and whether the closing timing has been reached. Determine whether or not it is established.

In step St1604, when it is determined that the condition for closing the V winning opening shutter 48a is satisfied (St1604: YES), the process proceeds to step St1605 to close the V winning opening shutter 48a. After executing step St1605, the process proceeds to step St1606.

On the other hand, in step St1604, when it is determined that the closing condition of the V winning opening shutter 48a is not established (St1604: NO), the process proceeds to step St1606 without executing step St1605.

In step St1606, a V prize determination process is executed. The V prize determination process will be described later. After executing step St1606, the shutter opening/closing process ends.

<V Winning Judgment Process>
Next, the V prize determination process will be described. The V prize determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the shutter opening/closing process (Fig. 430: St1606).

FIG. 431 is a flow chart showing the V prize determination process. In step St1701, it is determined whether or not entry of a game ball into the V winning opening 48 has been detected. This determination is made from the detection signal of the detection sensor 67f that detects the entry of the game ball into the V winning hole 48. FIG. In step St1701, when the entrance ball of the game ball to V winning a prize mouth 48 is detected, (St1701: YES), it advances to step St1702.

At step St1702, the V winning flag is turned ON. The V winning flag is a flag indicating that a game ball has entered the V winning opening 48, and sets the lottery mode in the game round executed after the end of the round game to either a high probability mode or a low probability mode. It is used to determine whether The V winning flag is turned ON when the entry of the game ball into the V winning hole 48 is detected, and turned OFF at the end of the ending period. After executing step St1702, the process proceeds to step St1703.

At step St1703, a V winning command is set. The V winning command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 419: step St0503) of the normal process. The audio light emitting device that receives the V winning command executes settings for executing the V winning effect. The V prize effect is a effect for informing the player that the game ball has entered the V prize hole 48 . After executing step St1703, this V prize determination process is terminated.

On the other hand, in step St1701, when the entry of the game ball into the V winning hole 48 is not detected (St1701: NO), this V winning determination process is terminated without executing steps St1702 and St1703.

<Transition processing at the end of the ending period>
Next, transition processing at the end of the ending period will be described. The transition process at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (Fig. 428: St1426).

FIG. 432 is a flow chart showing transition processing at the end of the ending period. At step St1801, it is determined whether or not the V winning flag is ON.

In step St1801, when it is determined that the V winning flag is ON (St1801: YES), the process proceeds to step St1802 to execute flag erasing processing. Specifically, the ON flags among the 16R probability variable jackpot flag, the 8R probability variable jackpot flag, and the 8R normal jackpot flag are turned OFF, and the flags that are not ON are maintained in that state. Also, the V winning flag is turned OFF. After executing step St1802, the process proceeds to step St1803.

At step St1803, the high-probability mode flag is turned ON, and then the process advances to step St1804 to turn the high-frequency support mode flag ON. As a result, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the game state shifts to a game state in which the lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode. After executing step St1804, the process proceeds to step St1805.

In step St1805, a high-probability mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the lottery mode is the high-probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. . After executing step St1805, the process proceeds to step St1806.

In step St1806, a high-frequency support mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. set. After executing step St1806, the process proceeds to step St1807.

At step St1807, 50 is set to the number-of-games counter SNC for ST provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM64. The value set in the number-of-games counter SNC for ST is a value indicating the number of games to be limited when the number of games is limited and the high-probability mode is executed. After executing step St1807, the process proceeds to step St1808.

In step St1808, 10 is set to the time-saving game number counter PNC provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM64. The value set in the time-saving game number counter PNC is a value indicating the number of games to be limited when the number of games is limited and the high-frequency support mode is executed. After step St1808 is executed, the transition processing at the end of the ending period ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step St1801 that the V winning flag is not ON (St1801: NO), the process proceeds to step St1809 to execute flag erasing processing. Specifically, the ON flags among the 16R probability variable jackpot flag, the 8R probability variable jackpot flag, and the 8R normal jackpot flag are turned OFF, and the flags that are not ON are maintained in that state. After executing step St1809, the process proceeds to step St1810.

In step St1810, a low-probability mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the lottery mode is the low-probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. . After executing step St1810, the process proceeds to step St1811.

In step St1811, a low-frequency support mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. set. After executing step St1811, the transition process at the end of the ending period is ended.

<Electronic support processing>
Next, the processing for electric support will be described. The electric service support process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (Fig. 419: St0508).

FIG. 433 is a flowchart showing processing for electric support. In step St1901, it is determined whether or not it is being supported. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the supported flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The under-support flag is a flag that is turned ON when the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is to be opened, and is turned OFF when it is to be returned to the closed state. If it is determined in step St1901 that the supported flag is not ON (St1901: NO), the process proceeds to step St1902.

At step St1902, it is determined whether or not the support winning flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The support winning flag is turned ON when the electric accessary product open lottery for determining whether or not to open the electric accessary product 34a is won in the open state, and is turned OFF when the supporting flag is ON. is. If it is determined in step St1902 that the support winning flag is not ON (St1902: NO), the process proceeds to step St1903.

At step St1903, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, every 2 msec.

If it is determined in step St1903 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (St1903: NO), the electronic support process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (St1903: YES), the process proceeds to step St1904.

In step St1904, it is determined whether or not it is time to finish the variable display of symbols in the general pattern unit . If it is determined in step St1904 that it is time to end the variable display (St1904: YES), the process advances to step St1905, and after setting the off display, the electronic support process ends. By setting the deviation display, the variable display of the symbols in the general pattern unit 38 is terminated while the deviation display is stopped. On the other hand, if it is determined in step St1904 that it is not the end timing of the variable display (St1904: NO), the process proceeds to step St1906.

In step St1906, it is determined whether or not the value of the reserved accessory number SN is greater than "0". In step St1906, when it is determined that the value of the reserved accessory number SN is "0" (St1906: NO), the electronic support process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step St1906 that the value of the reserved accessory number SN is greater than "0" (St1906: YES), the process proceeds to step St1907.

In step St1907, it is determined whether or not the open/close execution mode is in progress, and then the process proceeds to step St1908 to determine whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect. If it is not the opening/closing execution mode at step St1907 (St1907: NO) and if it is the high-frequency support mode at step St1908 (St1908: YES), the process proceeds to step St1909 to perform an electric accessory opening lottery. Specifically, the value stored in the electric role holding area 64d is shifted, and when the value of the electric role item opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 461, the electric role item opening lottery be elected. Also, at the same time as the electric accessory open lottery, the second timer counter area T2 is set to "750" (that is, 1.5 sec). The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started. After that, the process proceeds to step St1910.

In step St1910, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory open lottery in step St1909 is support winning. In step St1910, when it is determined that the result of the electric accessory open lottery is support winning (St1910: YES), the process proceeds to step St1911, the support winning flag is turned ON, and provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64 "3" is set in the second round counter area RC2. The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the electric accessory 34a is released. After that, the electronic support processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in step St1910, when it is determined that the result of the electric accessory open lottery is not support winning (St1910: NO), the process for electric role support ends without executing the process of step St1911.

If it is determined in step St1907 that it is in the opening/closing execution mode (St1907: YES), or if it is determined in step St1908 that it is not in the high-frequency support mode (St1908: NO), the process proceeds to step St1912, and the electric accessory open lottery I do. Specifically, the value stored in the electric role holding area 64d is shifted, and when the value of the electric role item opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric role item opening lottery be elected. At the same time as the electric accessory open lottery, the second timer counter area T2 is set to "14750" (that is, 29.5 sec). After that, the process proceeds to step St1913.

In step St1913, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory open lottery in step St1912 is support winning. In step St1913, if it is determined that the support is not won (St1913: NO), the electronic support process is terminated. On the other hand, in step St1913, when it is determined that the support winning is determined (St1913: YES), the process proceeds to step St1914, the support winning flag is turned ON, and "1" is set in the second round counter area RC2. , terminates the electronic support process.

In step St1902, when it is determined that the support winning flag is ON (St1902: YES), the process proceeds to step St1915 to determine whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38. In step St1915, when it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (St1915: NO), since the pattern is being changed and displayed in the normal figure unit 38, the main electric role support process is performed as it is. exit. On the other hand, when it is determined in step St1915 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (St1915: YES), the process proceeds to step St1916.

In step St1916, a win display is set. As a result, the variation display of the pattern in the normal pattern unit 38 is terminated while the win display is stopped. After that, the process proceeds to step St1917 to turn on the supporting flag and turn off the support winning flag. After that, the electronic support process is terminated.

In step St1901, when it is determined that the supporting flag is ON (St1901: YES), the process advances to step St1918 to execute an electric opening/closing control process for opening/closing the electric accessory 34a. After that, the electronic support process is terminated.

<Electrical opening/closing control processing>
Next, the electrical opening/closing control process will be described. The electric power opening/closing control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control unit 60 as a subroutine of the electric power support process (Fig. 433: St1918).

FIG. 434 is a flow chart showing the electrical opening/closing control process. In step St2001, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open. Whether or not the electric accessory 34a is being opened is determined by whether or not the electric accessory drive unit 34b is in a driving state. When it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is open (St2001: YES), the process proceeds to step St2002.

At step St2002, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the open duration time of the electric accessory 34a. If it is determined in step St2002 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (St2002: NO), the electrical opening/closing control process is terminated. In other words, if the opening continuation time of the electric accessory 34a has not ended, the present electric opening/closing control process is terminated.

In step St2002, when it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (St2002: YES), the process advances to step St2003 to perform closing processing for controlling the electric accessary 34a to the closed state, "250" (that is, 0.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as a means for measuring the open duration time of the electric accessory 34a is "0", the electric accessory 34a is closed, and the second timer counter area T2 is electrically operated this time. It is used as a parameter for measuring the closed duration time of the accessory 34a, and "250" is set in the second timer counter area T2. After executing step St2003, the process proceeds to step St2004.

In step St2004, after subtracting 1 from the value of the second round counter area RC2, the process proceeds to step St2005 to determine whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0". If it is determined in step St2005 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (St2005: NO), the electric opening/closing control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step St2005 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0" (St2005: YES), the process proceeds to step St2006 to turn off the supported flag. After that, the electrical switching control process is terminated.

In step St2001, when it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is not open (St2001: NO), the process proceeds to step St2007 to determine whether or not the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closed duration time of the electric accessory 34a. In step St2007, if it is determined that the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (St2007: NO), the electrical opening/closing control process is terminated. On the other hand, in step St2007, when it is determined that the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (St2007: YES), the process proceeds to step St2008, and an opening process for controlling the electric accessary 34a to the open state is executed. . After that, the process proceeds to step St2009.

In step St2009, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. If it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress (St2009: NO), the process advances to step St2010 to determine whether or not the high-frequency support mode is in effect. do.

If it is determined in step St2010 that the high frequency support mode is in effect (St2010: YES), the process advances to step St2011 to set "800" (that is, 1.6 sec) in the second timer counter area T2. After that, the electrical switching control process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step St2009 that the mode is the opening/closing execution mode (St2009: YES), or if it is determined that it is not the high-frequency support mode in step St2010 (St2010: NO), the process proceeds to step 201712, and the second "100" (that is, 0.2 sec) is set in the timer counter area T2. After that, the electrical switching control process is terminated.

<<9-6>> Various processes executed in the sound emission control device and the display control device:
Next, a specific example of control executed by the sound emission control device and the display control device in order to execute the announcement effect and the result notification effect will be described. The processing executed in the sound emission control device 90 will be described first, and then the processing executed in the display control device 100 will be described.

<Various processing executed in the sound emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, timer interrupt processing executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 will be described.

FIG. 435 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the sound and light side MPU 92 . Timer interrupt processing is repeatedly executed at a relatively short period (for example, 2 msec). Processing of each step executed in timer interrupt processing will be described below.

In step St2101, command storage processing is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing the received command in the sound and light side RAM 94 when a command is received from the main side MPU 62 . The sound and light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer for enabling storage and reading of commands received from the main side MPU 62, and the commands received from the main side MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer. , are read out sequentially according to the order in which they are stored. After executing step St2101, the process proceeds to step St2102.

In step St2102, pending command handling processing is executed. In the pending command handling process, a process corresponding to the first pending command among the commands stored in step St2101 is performed. Details of the pending command handling process will be described later. After executing step St2102, the process proceeds to step St2103.

In step St2103, a game cycle effect setting process is executed. In the game round effect setting process, the effect to be executed in the game round from the start of the symbol variation to the stop is set. Details of the game round effect setting process will be described later. After executing step St2103, the process proceeds to step St2104.

In step St2104, processing for opening/closing execution mode effect is executed. In the opening/closing execution mode effect processing, processing related to effects during the opening period, effects during the big winning opening opening/closing process period, and effects during the ending period is performed. After executing step St2104, the process proceeds to step St2105.

In step St2105, background effect processing is executed. In the background rendering process, a process of displaying on the pattern display device 41 a background moving image determined according to a command indicating the game state received from the main MPU 62 is performed. For example, a background video indicating that the high-frequency support mode is continuing, a background video indicating that the high-frequency support mode has ended, and a background video indicating that the high-probability mode is continuing are displayed. . After executing step St2105, the process proceeds to step St2106.

In step St2106, a process for V winning effect is executed. In the V winning effect processing, processing for displaying on the symbol display device 41 an effect image (moving image) determined according to the V winning command received from the main MPU 62 is performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a V winning command has been received from the main side MPU 62 during execution of the opening and closing process of the large winning opening in the opening and closing execution mode. A process for displaying a performance image for informing the player that the ball has entered is performed on the pattern display device 41.例文帳に追加By visually recognizing a performance image indicating that a game ball has entered a V winning hole 48 displayed on a pattern display device 41, a player wins a big win by a winning lottery, and the type of the won big win changes with certainty. It can be recognized that it is a big hit. After executing step St2106, the process proceeds to step St2107.

In step St2107, a fall effect process is executed. In the fall effect processing, a process of displaying on the symbol display device 41 a effect image (moving image) determined according to the fall command received from the main MPU 62 is performed. Specifically, when the lottery mode is the high-probability mode and the support mode is the high-frequency support mode (that is, during the high-probability-high support state), it is determined whether or not a fall command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined that it has been received, processing is performed to display on the symbol display device 41 an effect image that can indicate that the player is in an advantageous state. By visually recognizing the performance image displayed on the symbol display device 41, which can indicate that the player is in an advantageous state, the player shifts the lottery mode from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode, and as a result, It can be recognized that it has transitioned to the low definite height support state H5. On the other hand, when the lottery mode is the high-probability mode and the support mode is the low-frequency support mode (that is, when the high-probability low-support state), determine whether or not a fall command has been received from the main side MPU 62, When it is determined that the signal has been received, processing is performed to display on the symbol display device 41 an effect image that can indicate that the player is in a disadvantageous state. By visually recognizing the performance image displayed on the symbol display device 41, which can indicate that the player is in a disadvantageous state, the player can shift the lottery mode from the high probability mode to the low probability mode, and as a result, It can be recognized that it has transitioned to the low probability low support state H1. After executing step St2107, the process proceeds to step St2108.

In step St2108, the high support continuation effect processing is executed until the next time. In the high-support continuation effect processing until the next time, processing for displaying on the pattern display device 41 an effect image (moving image) determined according to the high-support continuation state command until the next time received from the main MPU 62 is performed. By visually recognizing the effect image determined according to the high support continuation state command until the next time displayed on the symbol display device 41, the player can see the state in which the high frequency support mode is continued as the support mode until the next big win is won ( It is possible to recognize that it has shifted to the high support continuation state until the next time). After executing step St2108, the process proceeds to step St2109.

In step St2109, other processing is executed. Other processing includes processing for displaying a demonstration image (moving image) on the symbol display device 41 when the player is not playing a game. After executing step St2109, the process proceeds to step St2110.

In step St2110, light emission control processing for controlling light emission of various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, light emission control of various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read out in each of the effect processes described above. After executing step St2110, the process proceeds to step St2111.

At step St2111, an audio output control process for controlling the audio output of the speaker 46 is executed. In the audio output control process, audio output control of the speaker 46 is performed based on the audio data read out in the BGM process and each effect process. After executing step St2111, the timer interrupt process is terminated.

<Processing for pending command>
Next, pending command handling processing will be described. The hold command handling process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (Fig. 435: St2102).

FIG. 436 is a flowchart showing pending command handling processing. In step St2201, it is determined whether or not the first hold command has been received from the main MPU62. If it is determined in step St2201 that the first hold command has been received from the main MPU 62 (St2201: YES), the process proceeds to step St2202.

In step St2202, update processing of the first pending number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound and light side RAM 94 is executed. The first reservation number counter area is a counter area for specifying the number of pieces of reservation information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting hole 33 in the sound and light side MPU 92 . In the updating process of the first reserved number counter area, the information in the first reserved number counter area is updated to the information of the reserved number included in the first reserved command read out this time. After executing step St2202, the process proceeds to step St2203.

In step St2203, a pending display control process is executed. Specifically, based on the number of pending information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 specified in step St2202, the display mode of the first pending display unit 37c (the color of the LED lamp to be lit or combination). After executing step St2203, this pending command handling process ends.

The reason why steps St2202 and St2203 are performed as described above will be described. In this embodiment, while the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, backup power is supplied to the RAM 64 of the main control device 60, while backup power is supplied to the RAM 94 of the sound emission control device 90. not. For this reason, when the power is cut off in a situation where the hold information relating to the ball entering the first starting port 33 is stored in the RAM 64 of the main controller 60, the main controller 60 does not store and hold the hold information. On the other hand, the sound emission control device 90 recognizes that there are 0 pieces of hold information. In this case, if a configuration is adopted in which the first pending number counter area is counted up each time the first pending command is received in the sound emission control device 90, the pending information actually stored in the main control unit 60 , and the number of on-hold information grasped by the sound emission control device 90 do not match. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the main controller 60 transmits the first hold command including the information on the number of holds, and the sound emission control device 90 responds to the command each time it receives the hold command. By adopting a configuration in which the contained number of reserved items is set in the first reserved number counter area, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above inconveniences.

If it is determined in step St2201 that the first hold command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (St2201: NO), this hold command handling process is terminated without executing steps St2202 and St2203.

<Game round effect setting processing>
Next, the game round effect setting process will be described. The game round effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (Fig. 435: St2103).

FIG. 437 is a flow chart showing game round effect setting processing. In step St2301, it is determined whether or not a variation command and a type command have been received. When it is determined in step St2301 that the command for variation and the type command have not been received (St2301: NO), this game cycle effect setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step St2301 that the command for variation and the type command have been received (St2301: YES), the process proceeds to step St2302.

In step St2302, the command for variation and the type command received this time are read, and from these commands, the presence or absence of a big hit, the presence or absence of time saving addition, the type of jackpot, the presence or absence of reach occurrence, and the information of variation time are grasped respectively. Then, the grasped information is stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 . After that, the process proceeds to step St2303.

In step St2303, effect pattern setting processing is executed. The production pattern setting process is a process of determining and setting the pattern of production to be executed in the current game round (contents of advance notice production, ready-to-win production and execution timing) based on the production pattern table. Details of the effect pattern setting process will be described later. After executing step St2303, the process proceeds to step St2304.

In step St2304, a stop symbol setting process is executed. In the stop symbol setting process, if the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a 16R probability variable jackpot, an 8R probability variable jackpot, or an 8R normal jackpot, the same pattern is displayed on the activated line L1 (see FIG. 405). The information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination is established is set as the information of the stop symbol of this time. Specifically, when the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a 16R probability variable jackpot or an 8R probability variable jackpot, the same combination of odd-numbered symbols can be selected as the same combination of symbols, and the same Even symbol combinations may be selected. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the selection rate is the same for the combination of the same odd-numbered symbols and the combination of the same even-numbered symbols. A configuration in which the ratio is high may be adopted, and the latter may be configured to have a higher selection ratio than the former. Also, the combination of "7" symbols is selected only in the case of a 16R probability variable jackpot. In addition, when the result of the winning lottery in the current game round is the 8R normal jackpot, the same combination of even-numbered symbols is selected as the same combination of symbols.

If the result of the jackpot lottery for the current game round is a result of losing, the presence or absence of the occurrence of ready-to-win is determined from the content of the command for variation. When it is determined that it corresponds to the occurrence of ready-to-win, it corresponds to the stop result that the combination of the same symbols does not materialize on the effective line L1 and the combination of the ready-to-win symbols does to materialize on the effective line L1. information is determined as the information of the result of this stop. On the other hand, when it is determined that it does not correspond to the occurrence of ready-to-win, the result is a stop result in which the combination of the same symbols is not established on the effective line L1, and a stop result in which the combination of ready-to-win symbols is not established on the effective line L1. The corresponding information is set as the information of the current stop symbol.

If the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a time-saving symbol, the information corresponding to the stop result in which a combination of predetermined symbols is established on the activated line L1 (see FIG. 405) is displayed as the stop symbol for this time. Set as information. A predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the time saving pattern is, for example, [3.4.1] (see FIG. 405). After executing step St2304, the process proceeds to step St2305.

In step St2305, a process for setting a variation display pattern for the current game round is executed. In this process, information on the variation time of the current game round is specified from the content of the variation command received this time, and a combination of the information on the variation time and the information on the stop symbol set in step St2304 is obtained. Select the corresponding variable display pattern. When selecting a variation display pattern, the variation display pattern table stored in the variation display pattern table storage area 93b of the sound and light side ROM 93 is referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step St2306.

At step St2306, information of the effect pattern set at step St2303, the stop pattern set at step St2304, and the variable display pattern set at step St2305 in the current game round is set to the effect command. After that, the process proceeds to step St2307 to transmit the effect command to the display side MPU102. The display-side MPU 102 executes processing for displaying the effect contents corresponding to the received effect command on the pattern display device 41 . After executing step St2307, the process proceeds to step St2308.

In step St2308, update processing at the start of fluctuation is executed. The update process at the start of fluctuation is a process for updating the reserved display in the first reserved display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41. FIG. The details of the update process at the start of fluctuation will be described later. After executing step St2308, this game round effect setting process is ended.

<Production pattern setting process>
Next, the effect pattern setting process will be described. The effect pattern setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the game cycle effect setting process (Fig. 437: St2303).

FIG. 438 is a flow chart showing effect pattern setting processing. At step St2401, the random number RN for effect pattern is acquired from the lottery counter area 94c of the sound/light RAM 94. FIG. After that, the process proceeds to step St2402.

At step St2402, a process of identifying the effect pattern table is executed. The effect pattern table is three-dimensional tabular data whose data elements are patterns of effects to be executed in game rounds, fluctuation times, and random numbers RN for effect patterns. The performance pattern table storage area 93a of the ROM 93 stores various types of performance pattern tables corresponding to the presence or absence of a big hit, the presence or absence of time saving, and the presence or absence of reach generation. At step St2402, one effect pattern table is specified from these effect pattern tables. Specifically, based on the presence or absence of the big hit, the presence or absence of the time saving grant, the type of the jackpot, and the presence or absence of the reach generation grasped in step St2302 of the game round production setting process (FIG. 437), the production pattern table storage area of the ROM 93 One effect pattern table is specified from 93a. After executing step St2402, the process proceeds to step St2403.

At step St2403, the effect pattern table specified at St2402 is referred to, and the variation time grasped at step St2302 of the game round effect setting process (FIG. 437) and the current effect pattern random number RN value obtained at step St2401. Acquire a production pattern corresponding to and. After executing step St2403, the process proceeds to step St2404.

At step St2404, the effect pattern acquired at step St2403 is set as the effect pattern to be executed in the current game round. After executing step St2404, the effect pattern setting process is terminated.

<Update processing at the start of fluctuation>
Next, update processing at the start of fluctuation will be described. The update process at the start of fluctuation is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the game cycle effect setting process (Fig. 437: St2308).

FIG. 439 is a flowchart showing update processing at the start of fluctuation. In step St2501, it is determined whether or not the command for variation received this time relates to the hold information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting hole 33 or not. In step St2501, when it is determined that the variation command received this time relates to the hold information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 (St2501: YES), the process proceeds to step St2502, The information in the first reserved number counter area is updated so that the number stored in the first reserved number counter area of the sound and light RAM 94 is decremented by one. After that, the update process at the start of fluctuation is ended.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step St2501 that the variation command received this time is not related to the hold information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 (St2501: NO), step St2502 is performed. The update process at the start of this fluctuation ends without executing it.

<Various processing executed in the display control device>
Next, processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

The processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 mainly includes a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on until the power is turned off, and a main processing that is executed when a command is received from the sound emission control device 90. There are command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing executed when a V interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal that is transmitted from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when rendering processing of an image for one frame is completed.

The MPU 102 executes main processing after power-on, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of commands and detection of V interrupt signals. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command interrupt processing is preferentially executed. Therefore, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound emission control device 90 and execute the V interrupt process.

<Main processing>
Next, main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 440 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. As described above, the main process is a process that is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. Processing of each step executed in the main processing will be described below.

In step St2601, initialization processing is executed. Specifically, first, processing for initializing the MPU 102 and clearing the storage of the work RAM 104 and the video RAM 107 is performed. Then, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107 . Furthermore, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107 and the extracted character information is written in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107 . Also, perform other necessary settings for initialization. After that, the process proceeds to step St2602.

In step St2602, interrupt permission setting is executed. After the interrupt permission setting is executed, in the main processing, infinite loop processing is executed until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing, which will be described below, are executed in accordance with the reception of a command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described. As described above, the command interrupt processing is processing that is executed each time a command is received from the sound emission control device 90 .

441 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. In step St2701, command storage processing is executed. In the command storage process, received command data is extracted and the extracted command data is stored in a command storage area provided in work RAM 104 . Various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read by the command determination process of the V interrupt process, which will be described later, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

442 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. As described above, V interrupt processing is processing that is executed when a V interrupt signal from VDP 105 is detected. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command storage area are executed by the command interrupt process. Execute the display instructions.

As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering processing of one frame of an image is completed and that is transmitted to the MPU 102 . Therefore, the MPU 102 executes V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, so that drawing instructions to the VDP 105 are issued every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame worth of image is completed. For this reason, the VDP 105 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to suppress the development of an image associated with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area in which the image information is stored. Details of the processing of each step of the V interrupt processing will be described below.

In step St2801, command handling processing is executed. In the command handling process, the contents of the command stored in the command storage area are analyzed by the command interruption process (FIG. 441), and the process corresponding to the command is executed. Specifically, for example, when a performance command is stored, control of image drawing and display is started so that the performance mode specified by the performance command is displayed on the pattern display device 41.例文帳に追加

If the effect operation command is stored, it is determined whether or not it is the period for accepting pressing of the effect operation button 24, and if it is determined that it is the period for accepting pressing of the effect operation button 24, the effect operation is performed. Control of image drawing and display is started so that the effect mode corresponding to the depression of the button 24 is displayed on the pattern display device 41 . On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the period for accepting pressing of the effect operation button 24, the content of the next command is analyzed without executing the process.

In the command processing (St2801), all commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and processing corresponding to all the analyzed commands is executed. The reason for this will be explained. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during the 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the effect is set by the sound emission control device 90 and the effect is started, there is a high possibility that various commands for specifying the content of the effect are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the state of the effect such as the advance notice effect and the stop pattern set by the sound emission control device 90, and display the effect image according to the state. The rendering of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the device 41 .

In step St2802, display setting processing is executed. In the display setting process, based on the type of screen to be displayed on the pattern display device 41 set by the command handling process (St2801), etc., the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the pattern display device 41 is specified. . After that, the process proceeds to step St2803.

In step St2803, task processing is executed. In the task processing, based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the pattern display device 41 specified by the display setting processing (St2802), the type of the character (sprite, display object) forming the image is determined. At the same time, for each character (sprite), various parameters required for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle, are determined. After that, the process proceeds to step St2804.

In step St2804, drawing processing is executed. In the drawing process, the types of various characters forming one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each character, which are determined by the task process (St2803), are transmitted to the VDP 105 . The VDP 105 executes an image drawing process based on these pieces of information, and together with a drive signal to cause the pattern display device 41 to display an image drawn based on the information received during the previous V interrupt process. The image data is transmitted to the pattern display device 41 . After that, the process proceeds to step St2805, and after executing other processes, the V interrupt process ends. An example of specific control for executing various processes including the jackpot effect in the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

<<9-7>> Functions and effects:
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the high-accuracy high support state H4, until the number of times of execution of the game rounds after the start of the high-frequency support mode reaches the number of time-saving continuations (10 times within), the lottery mode in the game round in which the fall lottery was won is changed from the high probability mode to the low probability mode, and as a result, the high probability high support state H4 changes to the low probability high support state H5. migrated. Then, in the low-probability support state H5, when short-time granting is won in the winning lottery, the high-frequency support mode is continued as the support mode until the next big win is won. In the high-frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is in the electric role open state at high frequency, the game ball easily enters the second starting port 34, and it is difficult for the player to reduce the number of balls held. Thus, the winning lottery executed when the game ball enters the second starting port 34 can be executed with high frequency. For this reason, if it is possible to shift to the low probability high support state H5, the next big hit is virtually guaranteed. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the high-probability-high support state H4, not only the player expects to win a jackpot in the winning lottery, but also the game after the high-frequency support mode is started. A player can be expected to win a fall lottery in a game round of which the number of rounds executed is 10 or less.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the low probability high support state H5, the lottery mode is performed at high frequency until the player wins a big hit in the next winning lottery in a state where the number of balls held is difficult to decrease. It can give a sense of security that the support mode will not end.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the high-probability and high-support state H4, neither winning lottery nor falling lottery is won, and the number of game rounds executed after shifting to the high-probability and high-support state H4. reaches ten times, the support mode is shifted from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode, and as a result, the high-probability high support state H4 is shifted to the high-probability low support state H6. In the high-probability-low support state H6, the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, and the distribution of the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot is based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33. For this reason, it is less advantageous to the player than the low-probability support state H5. When the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the game ball easily enters the second starting port 34, and the number of balls held by the player is difficult to decrease, whereas the support mode is the low-frequency support mode. In this case, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting port 34, and the number of held balls continues to decrease, so the high-probability low support state H6 is less advantageous for the player than the low-probability high support state H5. Furthermore, the distribution mode of the jackpot type in the case of a big win is that the game ball enters the first start port 33 from the case of a big win based on the game ball entering the second start port 34. Since the advantage for the player is lower when a big hit is made based on The advantage for the player is lower in the high-probability-low support state H6 in which the game ball is entered. Therefore, in the high probability high support state H4, the player does not win the winning lottery as well as the falling lottery, and the number of times the game is executed after shifting to the high probability high support state H4 is the number of time-saving continuation times (10 times), and there will be a sense of urgency that the high-accuracy high support state H4 will shift to the high-accuracy low support state H6.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game by providing the player with emotions such as a sense of anticipation, a sense of security, and a sense of urgency.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the high-accuracy high support state H4, until the number of times of execution of the game rounds after the high-frequency support mode is started reaches the number of time-saving continuations (within 10 times), the falling lottery When winning, the high-probability-high support state H4 shifts to the low-probability-high support state H5. In the low-probability support state H5, as described above, the next jackpot is virtually guaranteed. Therefore, when moving to the high probability and high support state H4, the probability of winning the jackpot next time (continuation rate) is a value calculated by the following formula (1) (= formula (1) shown above) .

Retention rate = 1 - {(1-1/3) x (1-1/20)}^10 ... (1)

In formula (1), "1-1/3" is the probability of not winning the falling lottery in one game round. "1-1/20" is the probability of not winning a jackpot (distribution is 100% probability variable jackpot) in a winning lottery in one game round in the high probability mode. "10" is the number of continuous working hours. “^” is an operator representing exponentiation. Calculating the formula (1) gives a continuation rate of about 99.0%. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is a ream system that is completely different from conventional pachinko machines, and it is possible to realize a machine with extremely high specifications for ream performance.

According to the pachinko machine 10 having the continuous playing performance, the following effects can be obtained as compared with the conventional pachinko machine. Conventionally, there are two types of pachinko machines, loop type and ST type, which have different techniques for continuing the jackpot. In a loop-type pachinko machine, it is determined that the next big win will be won in the high-probability and high-support state, so the continuation rate is determined based on the distribution probability to the probability-variable big win when the big win is won. This means that in a loop-type pachinko machine, the continuation rate is determined based on the probability that, when the symbols are aligned, the aligned symbols are probability variable symbols (for example, "7" symbols). For this reason, in the high-probability-high support state, the player just watches the game rounds being digested, and only expects that when the symbols are aligned, the matching symbols are variable probability symbols. . On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as described above, in the high-probability and high-support state H4, the number of times the game is executed after the high-frequency support mode is started is 10 or less. A player can expect to win a fall lottery or a winning lottery in a turn. As a result, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, compared with the conventional loop type pachinko machine, the player does not win the winning lottery as well as the fall lottery, and the high-probability and high support state H4 is achieved. It is possible to give a sense of urgency, such as whether the number of games played after the transition to 10 will reach 10 times.

In the ST type pachinko machine, the continuation rate in the high-probability and high-support state is calculated by calculating the probability of not winning a jackpot in a winning lottery per game round, calculating the probability of losing in all ST times, and subtracting the probability of losing from 1. can be obtained by Therefore, in the ST type pachinko machine, the continuation rate is determined based on the probability of matching symbols (probability of winning a jackpot) and the number of times of ST. Therefore, in the ST type pachinko machine, as the number of game rounds executed in the high-quality and high support state progresses, the sense of urgency that the number of game rounds will reach the ST number without winning the jackpot is increased. can be granted to a person. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the high probability and high support state H4, in addition to the jackpot winning (the symbols are aligned), the drop lottery is not won, and the state shifts to the high probability and high support state H4. It is possible to give a sense of urgency to the player as to whether or not the number of times of playing after the game reaches the number of times of time-saving continuation (10 times). Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, compared with the conventional ST type pachinko machine, it is possible to impart a greater sense of urgency to the player by adding the drop winning to the jackpot winning. can.

As a pachinko machine having other game properties, the following configuration is also conceivable. When a small win is won in a winning lottery (a small win is won with a high probability) in a specific advantageous state that is advantageous to the player before the number of games played after shifting to that advantageous state reaches a predetermined number. , a configuration in which the open/close execution mode (round game) is continued when a game ball enters the V winning hole. According to this configuration, since the game cycle to be executed from the advantageous state to the opening/closing execution mode is completed in a short time, the opening/closing execution mode is repeated at short intervals, and the gambling property is excessively increased. I had a problem. On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the route that shifts from the high-probability support state H4 to the open/close execution mode H3, it is guaranteed that the final jackpot will be won, and the lottery mode is low. Since it is possible to go through the low probability high support state H5 in which the winning lottery can be repeatedly performed in the probability mode, it is possible to take a sufficient time to shift from the high probability high support state H4 to the opening/closing execution mode H3. For this reason, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from being excessively increased due to repetition of the open/close execution mode at short intervals. In addition, by taking a sufficient amount of time, it is possible to obtain a secondary effect that various effects can be performed. These effects cannot be achieved even by the structure of the pachinko machine having other game characteristics.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment exhibits superior effects as compared with various types of conventional pachinko machines.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, although it has not been described so far, as one of the transitions of the game state, the It may shift to the low probability low support state H1. Specifically, immediately after moving from the low probability low support state H1 to the high probability high support state H4 via the opening and closing execution mode H3, the random number counter hits the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b (Fig. 407) Consider the case where the value of C1 (hereinafter referred to as special 1 reserve) remains. In this case, until the winning lottery based on the special 1 reservation is all executed, even if the game ball enters the second starting port 34, the entering ball does not become effective (the entry to the second starting port 34 (Because there is no function to hold the entry of game balls). For this reason, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the high-probability-high support state H4, a winning lottery based on the special 1 reserve may be executed, and a normal jackpot may be assigned. When it is distributed to the normal jackpot, it will shift from the high probability high support state H4 to the low probability low support state H1 via the opening and closing execution mode H2.

Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, immediately after shifting from the low probability low support state H1 to the high probability high support state H4 via the opening and closing execution mode H3, when special 1 reservation remains In the winning lottery based on the special 1 reservation, there is a sense of urgency to win a big win and be distributed to a normal big win. In addition, in the high-probability-high support state H4, in order to avoid wasting the game ball due to invalidation of the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34, the player can display the first reservation display area Ds1. (Fig. 405) is confirmed, and if there is a reserved number, the wait button 25b provided on the operating handle 25 is pressed to stop the shooting of game balls by the game ball shooting mechanism. You may let In addition, the player may perform the following operations.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, an effect of displaying symbols on the pattern display device 41 is performed in order to notify the result of the winning lottery. When it is determined that the probability of winning the jackpot in the lottery is extremely high, the weight button 25b provided on the operating handle 25 may be pressed to stop the shooting of game balls by the game ball shooting mechanism. By this operation (hereinafter referred to as stopping operation), when a jackpot is won in a winning lottery and the distribution result by distribution judgment becomes a probability variable jackpot, a high probability high support state via the opening and closing execution mode H3 After reaching H4, the number of special 1 reservations remaining in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b (FIG. 407) can be reduced. As a result, in the high-probability and high-support state H4, the special 1 reservation is digested and the normal jackpot is won, and the transition to the low-probability and low-support state H1 via the opening/closing execution mode H2 is eliminated as much as possible. In addition, entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 can be made effective early.

On the other hand, a player who wants to increase the number of symbol fluctuations (that is, the number of winning lotteries) as much as possible can judge that the probability of winning a big win in the winning lottery is extremely high in the low-probability and low-probability support state H1. Also in this case, the game may be continued without performing the stopping operation. That is, the player is aware of the risk of shifting to the low probability low support state H1 via the opening and closing execution mode H2 in the high probability high support state H4, and continues the game without performing the stopping operation. , it is possible to increase the number of times the pattern changes. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment wins a jackpot in the winning lottery in the low-probability/low-probability support state H1, and when the distribution result of the distribution determination is a variable-probability jackpot, the stopping operation is performed. It is possible to increase the interest in the game by providing a game property that allows the user to choose between avoiding the risk of the risk of the risk and continuing the game while accepting the risk to increase the number of symbol changes.

In addition, in the above-described high-probability-high support state H4, during the period in which the winning lottery based on the special 1 reserve is executed, the symbol display device 41 may perform an effect including a special effect. The special effect contents may include, for example, a battle effect and a result notification effect.

A battle production (battle production) is, for example, a production in which a character on the player side and a character on the enemy side confront each other. It is a production of In the present embodiment, the battle effect of the above period is, if a jackpot is won in the winning lottery and the distribution result by the distribution judgment is a probability variable jackpot, or if the fall lottery is won, the jackpot is won in the winning lottery and shakes. If the distribution result by the minute judgment is a normal jackpot, it is a production that suggests that it corresponds to either one of the cases (when neither the falling lottery nor the winning lottery is won). . Then, after executing the battle production, a result notification production is carried out for announcing whether the result will be advantageous or disadvantageous to the player. As a result notification effect, specifically, when the falling lottery is won, the transition to the low probability high support state H5 as described above is highly advantageous for the player. Execute a victory production in which the side character wins. In addition, even when a big win is won in a winning lottery and the result of distribution by distribution determination is a variable probability big win, a victory performance is executed in which the player's character wins. When a jackpot is won in a winning lottery and the distribution result of the distribution determination is a normal jackpot, the character on the player side is defeated because it shifts to the low probability low support state H1 via the open/close execution mode H2. Execute the defeat animation. When the player does not fall down and does not win a big win in the winning lottery (in the case of a loss), a draw effect is executed in which the player's character and the enemy's character draw. According to this configuration, in the high-probability-high support state H4, during the period in which the winning lottery based on the special 1 reserve is executed, both the sense of urgency and the sense of expectation are imparted to the player by the battle performance. can be done.

<<9-8>> Modification of the ninth embodiment:
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and can be implemented in various aspects without departing from the scope of the invention. For example, the following modifications are possible. In addition, in the modified example described below, description of the same configuration, processing, and effects as those of the above-described embodiment is omitted.

<<9-8-1>> Modification 1:
In the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment, the number of times of ST is set to be higher than the number of times of time saving, such as 10 times, and the number of times of ST is 50 times, for example. On the other hand, as a modified example, the ST number and the number of times of continuous time saving may be the same, such that the number of times of continuing time saving is ten times, and the number of times of ST is ten times, for example. According to this configuration, in the high-probability and high-support state H4, when the number of executions of the game round reaches the time-saving continuation number (= ST number) without winning the falling lottery, the high-probability and high support state H4 is changed to the low probability. Immediately shift to the low support state H1. That is, according to this modified example, the game state to be transitioned in progressing the game does not include the high-probability-low support state H6 in the transition diagram shown in FIG. Specifically, in the high probability high support state H4, when the number of executions of the game round after shifting to the high probability high support state H4 becomes 10 times, from the high probability high support state H4 to the low probability low support There will be an immediate transition to state H1. According to this modification, there is no winning in the falling lottery as well as the winning lottery, and the sense of urgency is felt as if the number of times the game is executed after shifting to the high-probability and high support state H4 reaches 10 times. , the player can be made to hold it even more strongly.

<<9-8-2>> Modification 2:
In the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment, although a jackpot is won by a winning lottery and the type of the jackpot won is a probability variable jackpot, a game ball enters the V winning port 48 opened with the jackpot as a trigger. The lottery mode does not shift to the high-probability mode and the support mode does not shift to the high-frequency support mode when the ball is not hit. On the other hand, as a modified example, when a jackpot is won by a winning lottery, the type of the jackpot won is a variable jackpot, and the game ball does not enter the V prize opening 48 opened with the jackpot as a trigger. , the lottery mode does not shift to the high-probability mode, but the support mode may shift to the high-frequency support mode.

According to this modification, in the low-probability-low support state H1 (see FIG. 414), a jackpot is won by a winning lottery, the type of the jackpot won is a variable probability jackpot, and the V winning port 48 opened with the jackpot as a trigger. When the game ball does not enter the game ball, the low-probability low support state H1 is shifted to the low-probability high support state H5 via the opening/closing execution mode H3. In the low definite height support state H5, the next big win (variable definite big win) is practically guaranteed, which is highly advantageous for the player. Therefore, according to this modified example, a jackpot is won by a winning lottery, the type of the jackpot won is a probability variable jackpot, and the game operation is such that the game ball is not allowed to enter the V winning port 48 opened with the jackpot as a trigger. can be valid. According to this modification, in the high-probability high support state H4, until the number of executions of the game rounds after shifting to the high-probability high support state H4 reaches 10 times, which is the number of time-saving continuations (within 10 times), When the player wins the falling lottery, it has a game property that it can shift to the low probability high support state H5 in which the next probability variable big win is virtually guaranteed. When a game operation is performed that does not dare to enter the ball, it is possible to shift to the low-probability support state H5 without winning the fall lottery within the above 10 times, and the above-mentioned game characteristics are impaired. A thorny problem arose. This problem can be solved by the following modified example 3.

<<9-8-3>> Modification 3:
The pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment is configured to include one variable winning device 36 . On the other hand, as a modified example, the configuration may include a first variable winning device and a second variable winning device. The first variable prize winning device has a configuration in which a large prize winning port and an opening/closing door for opening and closing the large prize winning port are provided, and a V winning prize port is not provided. The second variable winning device includes a large winning opening, an opening/closing door for opening and closing the large winning opening, and a V winning opening provided inside the large winning opening. The second variable winning device differs from the variable winning device 36 provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment in that it does not have the V winning opening shutter 48a. In this modification, when a jackpot is won by a winning lottery and the type of the jackpot won is a normal jackpot, the opening/closing door of the first variable winning device is opened and closed in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot. state and repeat. On the other hand, when a jackpot is won by a winning lottery and the type of the jackpot won is a probability variable jackpot, the opening/closing door of the second variable winning device switches between an open state and a closed state triggered by the jackpot in the opening/closing execution mode. repeat.

According to the above configuration, when a jackpot is won by the winning lottery and the type of the jackpot won is a normal jackpot, the game ball enters the big prize opening of the first variable prize winning device, and the game ball enters the V prize opening. No ball enters. On the other hand, when a jackpot is won by a winning lottery and the type of the jackpot won is a probability variable jackpot, a game ball enters the big prize opening of the second variable prize winning device, and a V winning opening shutter is provided. Therefore, the game ball entering the big winning hole will enter the V winning hole with 100% probability. For this reason, when a big win is won by a winning lottery and the type of the won big win is a probability variable big win, the game ball does not enter the V winning hole while the game ball enters the big winning hole. Therefore, according to this modification, it is possible to avoid moving from the low probability low support state H1 to the low probability high support state H5 via the opening and closing execution mode H3, so in the high probability high support state H4, When the player wins the drop lottery before the number of times the game is executed after shifting to the high-quality high support state H4 reaches 10 times, which is the number of time-saving continuations (within 10 times), in fact, the following It is possible to exhibit the original game property of being able to shift to the low-probability-high support state H5 in which the probability variable jackpot is guaranteed.

<<9-8-4>> Modification 4:
Further, as a configuration that makes it impossible to perform a game operation in which a game ball is not allowed to enter the V winning opening 48, the following configuration can be used instead of the third modification. A gate through which the game ball can pass is provided in an area where the game ball can be entered by a right-handed operation, and only when the game ball passes through the gate when executing a round game based on winning a jackpot, is the variable winning device 36. The opening/closing door 36b starts opening/closing operation, and a V prize opening is provided directly under the gate. According to this configuration, in order to start the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable prize winning device 36, it is necessary to let the game ball pass through the gate. It will be. Therefore, even according to this modification, when a jackpot is won by a winning lottery and the type of the jackpot won is a probability variable jackpot, the game ball does not enter the V winning port while the game ball enters the big winning port. never. Therefore, according to this modification, it is possible to avoid moving from the low probability low support state H1 to the low probability high support state H5 via the opening and closing execution mode H3, so in the high probability high support state H4, If the player wins the drop lottery before the number of times the game is executed after shifting to the high-quality high support state H4 reaches 10 times, which is the number of time-saving continuations (within 10 times), in effect, the following It is possible to exhibit the original game property of being able to shift to the low-probability-high support state H5 in which the probability variable jackpot is guaranteed.

<<9-8-5>> Modification 5:
In the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment, the success/failure table for the second starting port (for low probability mode: see FIG. 409(b)) includes the value of the hit random number counter C1 that becomes a big hit, and the time reduction given The value of the hit random number counter C1 is set, and there is no setting of the loss. On the other hand, as a modification, the success/failure table for the second starting port (for low probability mode: see FIG. 409(b)) includes the value of the hit random number counter C1 that will be a big hit, and the hit random number counter that will give time reduction. The value of C1 and the value of the winning random number counter C1 may be set. According to this modification, when the jackpot is not won in the winning lottery, there are cases where the time saving grant is won and there are cases where neither the jackpot nor the time saving grant is won. For this reason, according to this modification, the transition to the low-probability-high support state H5 betrays the expectations of the player who was pleased to have shifted to the low-probability-high support state H5 in which the next big hit (probability-variable big win) is guaranteed. Even so, the high-frequency support mode may end after 10 times, which is the number of continuations of time saving, without winning the time saving award in the winning lottery. Therefore, according to this modification, it is possible to disappoint the player and give him a feeling of disappointment. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment, when the jackpot is not won in the winning lottery in the low-probability support state H5, the time-saving grant is always won. It is possible to gain the trust of the player without giving it to the player.

<<9-8-6>> Modification 6:
In the above-described ninth embodiment and its modification, the lottery mode of the winning lottery is changed from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode when winning the fall lottery using the value of the fall random number counter CF. On the other hand, as a modified example, the game board 30 is provided with a drop hole into which the game ball can enter, and when the game ball enters the drop hole, the lottery mode of the winning lottery changes from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. It is good also as a structure changed into probability mode. In this configuration, a game ball sorting device for sorting game balls between a flow path leading to the fall opening and a flow path leading to a place other than the fall opening (for example, an out opening or a second start opening) is provided above the fall opening. It can also be configured to be provided. According to these configurations, since the player can visually recognize whether or not the game ball enters the falling hole, in the high probability high support state H4, the game after transition to the high probability high support state H4 The player can wait with a sense of urgency and expectation whether or not the game ball enters the falling hole before the number of times of execution reaches the number of time-saving continuations.

<<9-8-7>> Modification 7:
In the ninth embodiment and its modification, in the winning lottery using the success or failure table for the second start port (for low probability mode: see FIG. 409 (b)), even once when the time saving grant wins, the winning lottery The high-frequency support mode is continued as the support mode until the jackpot is won. In particular, in the ninth embodiment, when the jackpot is not won in the winning lottery using the success/failure table for the second start port (for low probability mode: see FIG. 409(b)), the time saving grant is elected In the low-probability support state H5, the time-saving grant winning is repeated in the winning lottery until the big win is won in the winning lottery. That is, in the above-mentioned ninth embodiment and its modification, when the time-saving grant winning is won even once in the winning lottery, the high-frequency support mode is continued as the support mode until the jackpot is won in the winning lottery, but the winning lottery is executed. It is constructed so that a short-time award is won each time it is played, and with this construction, a high-frequency support mode is continued as a support mode until a jackpot is won in a low-probability high support state H5. On the other hand, as a modified example, if the jackpot is not won in the winning lottery using the success or failure table for the second start port (for low probability mode: see FIG. 409 (b)), the time saving grant is elected. (Configuration of Modified Example 5), and if neither the jackpot winning nor the short-time grant winning in the winning lottery is applicable, the support mode is a high-frequency support mode until the jackpot is won in the winning lottery. may be continued, and the high-frequency support mode may be continued as the support mode until a big win is won in the winning lottery when the winning lottery wins the time-saving grant even once.

<<9-8-8>> Modification 8:
In the above-described ninth embodiment and its modification, when the time-saving provision winning is won in the winning lottery, the high-frequency support mode is continued as the support mode until the next big win is won in the winning lottery. On the other hand, as a modification, the period during which the high frequency support mode is continued as the support mode (hereinafter referred to as the high support duration period) is extended until the number of game executions reaches a predetermined number (for example, 5 times). You can replace it with That is, when the winning lottery wins, the high-frequency support mode may be continued as the support mode until the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number (for example, 5 times). The predetermined number of times is not necessarily limited to 5 times, and may be any number of times such as 1 time, 2 times, 3 times, 4 times and 6 times. Other configurations in this modified example are the same as those in the ninth embodiment. If you do not win the jackpot, you will be elected for the reduction of working hours).

According to the configuration of this modification, by the end of the high support duration period, the short-time grant winning will be won in the repeated winning lottery. are sequentially extended, and this extension is repeated until a big win is won in a winning lottery. As a result, the high frequency support mode is continued as the support mode until the next big win is won in the winning lottery. Therefore, according to this modification, as in the ninth embodiment, in the low-probability support state H5, using a time-saving grant that continues only a predetermined number of times, the next time, until the jackpot is won in the winning lottery, as a lottery mode. There is an effect that it is possible to realize a game property in which the high-frequency support mode is continued. In other words, the high frequency support mode is continued as the lottery mode until the next big win is won in the next winning lottery, without using the short-time provision of continuing the high frequency support mode as the support mode until the big win is won in the winning lottery. Playability can be realized.

It should be noted that, as a modification of this modification, when the jackpot is not elected in the winning lottery using the success or failure table for the second start port (for low probability mode: see FIG. 409 (b)), the time saving grant was elected With a configuration that may not be the case (configuration of modification 5), if you win a time-saving award in a winning lottery, the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times). The high-frequency support mode may be continued as the support mode. According to this configuration, in the high support continuation period, which is a period until the number of execution times of the game reaches a predetermined number, the high support continuation period can be extended only when the winning lottery wins the time reduction grant. Therefore, according to the modification of this modification, in the high support duration period, even if the jackpot is not won in the winning lottery, the short-time grant winning is performed before reaching the predetermined number of times, and the high-frequency support mode is continued. The player can be expected to extend the

<<9-8-9>> Modification 9:
In the above embodiment and each modification, the outer frame of the pachinko machine is not limited to being made of wood, but may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin. , cast steel, stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, alloy steel, and other metals. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the modifications, the inner frame provided in the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin. It may be made of metal such as stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, or alloy steel. Further, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the front door frame provided in the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin, and may be made of steel (carbon steel), cast iron, or cast steel. , stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, alloy steel, and other metals. Further, in the above embodiment and each modification, the pachinko machine has a function of locking the inner frame to the outer frame so that it cannot be opened, and a function of locking the front door frame to the inner frame so that it cannot be opened. However, after adopting a configuration in which this cylinder lock is omitted, a first cylinder lock having a function of locking the inner frame to the outer frame so that it cannot be opened, and the front door frame A configuration in which a second cylinder lock having a function of locking the inner frame so that it cannot be opened may be employed. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, the configuration in which the rotation shaft for rotating the inner frame with respect to the outer frame is provided on the left side when viewed from the front is adopted. You may employ the structure provided. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modified examples, the configuration in which the rotation shaft for rotating the front door frame with respect to the inner frame is provided on the left side when viewed from the front is adopted. may be adopted. Further, in the above embodiment and each modification, the game board provided in the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin, and may be made of steel (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, It may be made of metal such as stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, or alloy steel. Also, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, in the high probability high support state, when the number of times of execution of the game round after the transition to the high probability high support state reaches the number of time reduction continuation times When elected in the falling lottery, It is configured to shift to a low-probability-high support state in which the next big hit (probability variable jackpot) is guaranteed. On the other hand, as a modification, in an ST type pachinko machine, in a high-probability and high-support state, a jackpot is won in a winning lottery before the number of game rounds executed after shifting to the high-probability and high support state reaches the ST number of times. In such a case, it may be configured to shift to the opening/closing execution mode. In the open/close execution mode, it is guaranteed to move to the high-accuracy-height support state next. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, in the high-probability and high-support state, the specific condition that can trigger the switching of the lottery mode between the high-probability mode and the low-probability mode is set to be elected in the falling lottery. Alternatively, a jackpot may be won in a winning lottery. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each modification, the pachinko machine employs a configuration including an upper tray and a lower tray, but the lower tray may be omitted and a configuration including only the upper tray may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, a configuration in which the operation handle is provided on the right side in front view is adopted, but a configuration in which the operation handle is provided on the left side in front view may be adopted. Also, a configuration in which the operation handle is provided on both the right side and the left side when viewed from the front may be adopted. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the modifications, the operating handle is provided with a touch sensor capable of detecting whether or not the player is gripping the operating handle (whether or not the player's hand is in contact with the operating handle). However, a configuration in which the touch sensor is omitted may be adopted. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modification, various configurations can be adopted as the shooting means capable of shooting game balls. Alternatively, a structure or the like may be adopted in which the game ball is shot using the wind pressure generated when the compressed gas is ejected. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, when the operating handle is turned clockwise by a predetermined amount, about 100 game balls are shot per minute. A configuration in which less than 100 (eg, 60) game balls are fired per minute may be used, and a configuration in which 100 or more (eg, 200) game balls are fired per minute may be used. good. Alternatively, the game ball may be shot one by one by flipping the lever. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, when a falling lottery is won in the high probability high support state, it is shifted to the low probability high support state that is more advantageous for the player than the high probability high support state. When a drop lottery is won in the high-probability low support state, the state is shifted to the low-probability low-support state, which is less advantageous for the player than the high-probability low support state. On the other hand, as a modification, in a loop type pachinko machine, in a low probability low support state, a jackpot is won in a winning lottery, and when it is established that a normal jackpot is won by distribution judgment, a low probability low support It is configured to shift to a low-probability high support state that is more advantageous for the player than the state, and in the high-probability high support state, a jackpot is won in a winning lottery, and a normal jackpot is won by distribution judgment. In the case, it may be configured to shift to a low probability high support state (or low probability low support state) that is less advantageous for the player than the high probability high support state. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, a configuration in which a speaker is provided as means capable of outputting sound is adopted, but a configuration in which an earphone jack is provided in addition to or instead of the speaker may be adopted. According to this configuration, the player can hear the sound of the pachinko machine he/she is playing without being disturbed by the sounds of the surrounding pachinko machines by connecting the earphones or headphones he/she has brought with him/herself to the earphone jack. It is possible to enjoy it in minutes. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, various configurations can be adopted as the display means capable of displaying the special symbol that starts the variable display based on the entry of the game ball into the various starting ports. For example, an LED lamp, an LED display device, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a halogen lamp, or the like may be employed. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modified examples, various configurations can be adopted as the display means capable of displaying the normal symbols that start the variable display based on the passage of the game ball through various gates, For example, an LED lamp, an LED display device, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a halogen lamp, or the like may be employed. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, various configurations can be adopted as display means capable of displaying various decorative patterns, such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, and an LED display device. , a rotating drum type display device, a light guide plate, a three-dimensional hologram display device, or the like may be employed. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, the decorative pattern is not limited to numerals, and various characters, figures, symbols, patterns, etc., and combinations thereof can be employed. For example, as decorative patterns, alphabets, Greek letters, hiragana, katakana, kanji, various characters, and combinations thereof may be employed. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each modification, the number of symbol rows in which decorative symbols are scrolled is not limited to three, and may be, for example, two or less, or four or more. In the case of adopting a configuration in which there is only one decorative pattern row, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a jackpot is won when a specific decorative pattern (for example, "7") stops. In the case of adopting a configuration in which two or more rows of decorative patterns are employed, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a jackpot is won when the same decorative patterns stop on a specific line. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, various configurations can be adopted as the special electric accessory. A configuration in which the large winning slot can be opened by rotating the plate-shaped member forward about the rotation shaft, or a configuration in which the large winning slot is opened and closed by a plate-shaped member that can slide in the front-rear direction of the game board, etc. may be adopted. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modifications described above, various configurations can be adopted as the ordinary electric accessory. A rotation shaft extending in a substantially horizontal direction is provided below the plate-shaped member, and the plate-shaped member rotates forward about the rotation shaft to open the starting port, front and rear of the game board A structure or the like in which the starting port is opened and closed by a plate-shaped member that can slide in a direction may be adopted. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, the number of winning balls set in each ball opening (starting hole, general winning opening, big winning opening, etc.) is an example, and is set for each ball opening By appropriately changing the number of prize balls, it is possible to realize a plurality of types of pachinko machines with different specifications.

<<9-8-10>> Modification 10:
In the ninth embodiment and its modification, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to include three control devices, namely the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90, and the display control device 100, but instead of this, the main control It is good also as a structure provided with two control devices, such as a device and a sub control device. The sub control device may be configured to execute various processes executed by the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 in the ninth embodiment. In addition, in the ninth embodiment and its modification, the various processes executed by the three control devices 60, 90, and 100 are not necessarily limited to the division described in the ninth embodiment, and the three control devices As a whole of 60, 90 and 100, it is sufficient that various processes in the ninth embodiment can be executed.

<<10>> Tenth embodiment:
<<10-1>> Game machine structure:
FIG. 443 is a perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter also referred to as "pachinko machine") as a tenth embodiment of the present invention. A pachinko machine 10 has a wooden outer frame 11 combined in a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island equipment of the game hall. The pachinko machine 10 also includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11 . A pachinko machine body 12 has an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13. - 特許庁The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11 by metal hinges 15 . The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 16 with respect to the inner frame 13 . On the back of the inner frame 13, control devices for controlling the pachinko machine main body 12, such as a main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device, are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. - 特許庁The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened, and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation using a dedicated key on the cylinder lock 17 .

A substantially central portion of the front door frame 14 is formed with an open window portion 18 . Around the window part 18, resin parts and electric decoration parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. The electrical parts are composed of light emitting means including various lamps such as LEDs. The light emitting means plays a role of enhancing the performance effect by lighting or blinking at each game played by the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot is won, when a ready-to-win game is generated, or the like. A glass unit 19 composed of two sheets of plate glass is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14 , and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19 . A game board, which will be described later, is detachably attached to the inner frame 13 , and the player of the pachinko machine 10 can view the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 19 . Details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper tray 20 and a lower tray 21 for storing game balls. The upper tray 20 is formed in a box shape with an open top, and stores game balls such as rental balls lent from a rental machine (not shown) and prize balls discharged from the pachinko machine main body 12 . The game balls stored in the upper tray 20 are supplied to a game ball shooting mechanism provided in the pachinko machine main body 12. - 特許庁The game ball shooting mechanism is driven by the player's operation of the operation handle 25, and shoots the game balls supplied from the upper tray 20 to the front surface of the game board. The lower tray 21 is arranged below the upper tray 20 and is shaped like a box with an open top. The lower tray 21 stores game balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 20. - 特許庁A discharge port 22 for discharging game balls stored in the lower tray 21 is formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 21 . A lever 23 is provided below the ejection port 22 , and the player can switch the ejection port 22 between a closed state and an open state by operating the lever 23 . When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game ball falls from the discharge port 22 and is discharged from the lower tray 21 to the outside.

A performance operation button 24 is provided in front of the peripheral edge of the upper plate 20.例文帳に追加The effect operation button 24 is an operation unit for the player to perform an input operation for the game effect performed by the pachinko machine 10 . When a player operates a performance operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, a game performance reflecting the operation is performed by the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

An operation handle 25 for a player to operate is provided on the right side of the front door frame 14 when viewed from the front (hereinafter also simply referred to as "right side"). When the player operates (turns) the operation handle 25, a game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism to the front surface of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operation handle 25, there are a touch sensor 25a for permitting driving of the game ball shooting mechanism, a wait button 25b for stopping shooting of game balls by the game ball shooting mechanism when pressed by the player, and the operation handle 25. A variable resistor 25c is provided for detecting the amount of rotational operation of , based on a change in electrical resistance. When the player grips the operating handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operating handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. Then, a game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism to the front surface of the game board with strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

A game ball shooting button 26 for a player to operate is provided on the left side of the periphery of the upper tray 20 in front view (hereinafter also simply referred to as "left side"). When the game ball shooting button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is shot to the front surface of the game board with a predetermined shooting strength regardless of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 by the player. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball shooting button 26, the game ball is shot to the front surface of the game board with the same shooting intensity as when the operation handle 25 is rotated at its maximum. In the case of this embodiment, when a game ball is shot by operating the game ball shooting button 26, the game ball flows to the right side of the game board when viewed from the front and also to the right side of the game board. That is, by operating the game ball shooting button 26, the player can hit the ball to the right. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the game ball shooting button 26 is operated, the game ball is shot to the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is turned on. . That is, the player turns on at least the touch sensor 25a by grasping the operation handle 25, and then operates the game ball shooting button 26 to shoot the game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball shooting button 26. can be realized.

Next, the configuration of the rear surface of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. A control device for controlling the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is arranged on the back surface of the pachinko machine 10. - 特許庁

444 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. As shown, the pachinko machine 10 includes a first control unit 51, a second control unit 52, a third control unit 53, and a power supply unit 58. Specifically, these units are provided on the back surface of the inner frame 13 .

The first control unit 51 has a main controller 60 . The main controller 60 has a main control board having a function of controlling the main game. The main control board is housed in a board box made of transparent resin material. This board box is configured to leave traces of opening and closing. For example, a seal is affixed to a portion that can be opened and closed, and when the substrate box is opened, characters such as "opened" appear.

The second control unit 52 includes an audio emission control device 90 and a display control device 100 . The sound emission control device 90 controls emission means such as speakers and various lamps provided in front of the pachinko machine 10 based on commands transmitted from the main control device 60 . The display control device 100 controls the pattern display device based on commands transmitted from the sound emission control device 90 . The pattern display device has a liquid crystal display for displaying patterns and images for presentation.

The third control unit 53 has a payout control device 70 and a launch control device 80 . The payout control device 70 performs payout control for paying out prize balls. When an instruction to shoot a game ball is input from the main control device 60, the shooting control device 80 shoots a game ball with strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 by the player. Controls the ball launching mechanism. In addition, on the back of the inner frame 13, there is a tank 54 to which the game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially supplied, and a slope which is connected to the lower part of the tank 54 and is gently inclined so that the game balls flow downstream. , a case rail 56 connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 55, a game ball is supplied from the case rail 56, and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out according to an instruction from the payout control device 70. A plurality of devices necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10, such as a payout device 71, are provided.

The power supply unit 58 includes a power supply device 85 and a power switch 88 . The power supply device 85 supplies power necessary for the pachinko machine 10 to operate. A power switch 88 is connected to the power supply device 85 . By ON/OFF operation of the power switch 88, a supply state in which power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 and a non-supply state in which power is not supplied to the pachinko machine 10 are switched.

Next, the game board will be explained. The game board is detachably attached to the front surface of the inner frame 13. - 特許庁

445 is a front view of the game board 30. FIG. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on its front surface. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding a game ball is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. A game ball shot from the game ball shooting mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and released above the game area PA, and then flows down the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicularly to the game board 30, and accessories such as windmills are arranged. These nails 42 and windmills distribute and organize the falling directions of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

The game board 30 is formed with a plurality of openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening is provided with a general winning opening 32, a first starting opening 33, a second starting opening 34, a through gate 35, a variable winning device 36, and a V winning opening . Also, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display section 45 . Specifically, the variable display unit 40 is provided substantially in the center of the game board 30, and the main display section 45 is provided near the upper right of the game board 30 when viewed from the front.

The general prize winning openings 32 are ball entrances into which game balls can enter, and are provided in plurality on the game board 30 . In this embodiment, when game balls enter the general winning hole 32, 10 game balls are paid out as prize balls from the payout device 71 (Fig. 444).

The first starting port 33 is a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter. The first starting port 33 is provided in the lower center of the game area PA. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first start hole 33, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a winning lottery, which will be described later, is executed.

The second starting port 34 is a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and is provided on the upper right side of the game area PA. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting port 34, two game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a winning lottery, which will be described later, is executed. Further, the second starting port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a.

The through gate 35 has a through hole extending vertically. The through gate 35 is a through gate that serves as a trigger for executing a lottery for opening the electric accessory 34a. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the main controller 60 performs an internal lottery (electric accessory open lottery) triggered by the passage. As a result of the internal lottery, when the electric role open is won, the electric accessory 34a shifts to the electric role open state in a predetermined manner. Since the through gate 35 is arranged on the upstream side of the second starting port 34 with respect to the flowing direction of the game ball, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 flows down the game area PA after passing through the second opening. It is possible to enter the ball into the starting port 34 . In addition, in this embodiment, even if the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the prize ball is not paid out.

The variable winning device 36 is provided on the lower right side of the game area PA. The variable winning device 36 includes a large winning opening 36a leading to the back side of the game board 30, and an opening/closing door 36b for opening and closing the large winning opening 36a. The big winning opening 36a is an entrance into which a game ball can enter, and is formed in a rectangular shape in this embodiment. The opening/closing door 36b is a rectangular lid body one size larger than the big winning opening 36a, and is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter the big winning opening 36a. When a game ball enters the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, the main controller 60 executes a winning lottery (internal lottery). As a result of winning lottery, when a big win is won, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to an opening/closing execution mode. The opening/closing execution mode is a mode in which opening/closing processing of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is executed. Specifically, when the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, it transitions from a closed state in which game balls cannot enter to an open state in which game balls can enter, and a predetermined condition is satisfied. After that, it transitions to the closed state again. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the big winning hole 36a of the variable winning device 36, the payout device 71 pays out 15 game balls as prize balls.

The V winning opening 48 is a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and is a ball entrance that is a condition for operating the high probability mode. In this embodiment, the V winning opening 48 is provided inside the big winning opening 36 a of the variable winning device 36 . The V winning opening 48 is provided with a V winning opening shutter 48 a for opening and closing the V winning opening 48 . The V winning opening shutter 48a changes from a closed state to an open state at a predetermined timing in an opening/closing execution mode executed with the jackpot winning as a trigger after winning a big win by a winning lottery, and returns to a closed state after a lapse of a certain time. A game ball can enter the V winning opening 48 during a period in which the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is open and the V winning opening shutter 48a is open. When a game ball enters the V winning hole 48, the lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. The predetermined timing for switching from the closed state to the open state will be described later.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, after a predetermined number of game rounds (hereinafter also referred to as ST times) are executed in the high probability mode game state, the lottery mode shifts from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. The number of STs is 10 in this embodiment. Note that the number of times of ST is not limited to 10 times, and may be other times such as 20 times, 9 times, 8 times, 7 times, and 6 times. In this embodiment, the number of times of ST is limited to the number of times greater than the number of times of continuous time saving (for example, 5 times) described later, and any number of times greater than the number of times of continuous time saving may be used.

An out port 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and game balls that have not entered various ball entrances are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 43. - 特許庁

A game ball entering each of the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, the large winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36, the V winning opening 48, and the out opening 43 is placed on the game board 30. It is configured to be guided to the back side of the game board 30 through the formed individual openings and finally join the discharge passage provided on the back side of the game board 30 . The discharge passage is provided with a discharge passage detection sensor for detecting game balls. By detecting the game balls with the ejection path detection sensor, it is possible to grasp the number of game balls shot to the game board 30. - 特許庁

The main display section 45 has a special figure unit 37 , a normal figure unit 38 , and a round display section 39 .

The special figure unit 37 includes a first symbol display portion 37a and a second symbol display portion 37b. Each of the first pattern display portion 37a and the second pattern display portion 37b is composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting portions are arranged in a predetermined manner.

The first pattern display portion 37a is a display portion for displaying the first pattern. The first pattern means a pattern that is displayed in a variable or stationary manner based on a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33 . The first symbol display portion 37a is used as a display mode until a winning lottery is performed triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is performed on the segment display. , to perform the variable display of the first symbol. When the lottery is finished, the first symbol display section 37a causes the segment display to stop displaying the first symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

The second pattern display portion 37b is a display portion for displaying the second pattern. The second symbol refers to a symbol that is variably displayed or statically displayed based on a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34 . The second symbol display part 37b is used as a display mode until a winning lottery is performed triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 34, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is performed on the segment display. , to perform the variable display of the second symbol. When the lottery is finished, the second symbol display section 37b causes the segment display to stop displaying the second symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

Here, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol displayed in the second symbol display portion 37b to the stop display is Also called variable time. Specifically, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a to the stop display is also called the first variation time, and the second symbol display portion 37b The time from the start of the variable display of the displayed second symbol to the stop display is also referred to as the second variable time.

The special figure unit 37 is further provided with a first pending display portion 37c and a second pending display portion 37d, which are LED lamps, at positions adjacent to the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b. In the present embodiment, up to four game balls entered into the first starting port 33 are reserved. The first reservation display portion 37c displays the number of reservations for the first starting port 33 according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be lit. Further, in the present embodiment, up to four game balls entered into the second starting port 34 are reserved. The second reservation display part 37d displays the number of reservations of the second starting port 34 according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be lit.

The normal figure unit 38 is composed of a light-emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. The normal figure unit 38, when the electric accessary item opening lottery triggered by the passage of the through gate 35 is performed, causes the light-emitting display to display in a lighting display, a blinking display, or a predetermined mode as a display mode. When the electric accessory open lottery ends, the normal figure unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The round display section 39 is composed of a light-emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games that occur in the open/close execution mode or displays corresponding thereto. A round game means that either a predetermined upper limit duration time elapses or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls enter the variable winning device 36 until either condition is met. It is a game in which the door 36b is kept open. The number of round games varies depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the shift. The round display unit 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the opening/closing execution mode is started, and ends when the opening/closing execution mode is finished and a new game is started.

In addition, the special figure unit 37, the general figure unit 38, and the round display unit 39 are not limited to being configured by a segment display device or a light emitting display device using an LED lamp. It may consist of various display devices capable of showing the draw in progress and the draw results, such as a CRT or dot matrix display.

The variable display unit 40 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area PA. The variable display unit 40 has a pattern display device 41 . The pattern display device 41 has a liquid crystal display. The display contents of the pattern display device 41 are controlled by the display control device 100 . The pattern display device 41 may be replaced with various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

When the first symbol display unit 37a performs variable display or static display based on the ball entering the first starting hole 33, the symbol display device 41 performs variable display or static display of the symbols accordingly. Further, when the second symbol display unit 37b performs variable display or static display based on the ball entering the second starting hole 34, the symbol display device 41 performs variable display or static display of the symbols accordingly. The symbol display device 41 performs not only the display performance triggered by the entry of the ball into the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, but also the display performance during the opening/closing execution mode that shifts when the jackpot is won. . Details of the pattern display device 41 will be described below.

FIG. 446 is an explanatory diagram showing the symbols variably displayed on the symbol display device 41 and the display surface 41a. FIG. 446(a) is an explanatory diagram showing decorative symbols that are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41. FIG. As shown in FIG. 446(a), the pattern display device 41 variably displays patterns showing numbers 1 to 8 as decorative patterns. As the decorative patterns to be variably displayed, a pattern in which a pattern such as a character is attached to each pattern representing the numbers 1 to 8 may be employed.

FIG. 446(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. As shown in FIG. As shown in the figure, the display surface 41a displays three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 on the left, middle and right. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the symbols of numbers 1 to 8 shown in FIG. A variable display that scrolls upward is performed. As shown in FIG. 446(b), after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol row is displayed in a stationary state on the activated line L1.

Specifically, when a game ball enters the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, a variable display is started in which the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are cyclically scrolled in a predetermined direction. Then, the symbols to be scrolled are switched from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol row Z1, the symbol row Z3, and the symbol row Z2, and finally, the predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. . When the variable display of the symbols is finished and the display is stopped, and when the result of the winning lottery by the main control device 60 is a big win, a predetermined predetermined combination of symbols appears on the activated line L1. It is formed. For example, the same symbol combination is formed on the activated line L1. It should be noted that the manner in which the decorative symbols are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the manner described above. Various modes can be adopted for the variable display mode of decorative symbols such as the number of symbols.

Here, the "game cycle" means the period from the start of the variable display of the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b to the end of the variable display and the stop display until the end of the stop display. In other words, it is one unit of processing for notifying the player of the lottery result of the winning lottery for the special information acquired based on the ball entering either the first start hole 33 or the second start hole 34 . In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one winning lottery for one piece of special information for each game. When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires the special information based on the ball entering either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the first symbol display portion 37a and the second In either one of the pattern display portions 37b, after the segment display is variably displayed, the segment display is stop-displayed so that the display corresponding to the lottery result of the acquired special information is displayed. Further, when the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires the special information based on the ball entering either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the pattern display device 41 displays a predetermined After the symbol row is variably displayed, the symbol row is stopped and displayed so as to correspond to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Also, the time required for one game round is also called unit game time. The unit playing time is composed of a variable time, which is the time from when the variable display is started until the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed, and a stop time, which is the time when the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed. there is

Further, as shown in FIG. 446(b), the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 displays a first reserved display area Ds1 and a second reserved display area Ds2. In the first reservation display area Ds1, the number of reservations based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 is displayed. The second pending display area Ds2 displays the number of pending balls entered into the second starting port 34 . In this embodiment, as described above, the number of game balls entered into the first start port 33 and the second start port 34 is up to four at maximum.

Further, as shown in FIG. 446(b), on the display surface 41a, blinking display and lighting in synchronization with the variable display and stop display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a of the special figure unit 37 are displayed. The first synchronous display unit Sync1 that performs the display, and the second synchronous display that performs blinking display and lighting display in synchronization with the variable display and stop display of the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display unit 37b of the special figure unit 37 Sync2. Specifically, when the first symbol display portion 37a is performing the variable display, the first synchronization display portion Sync1 performs blinking display, and when the first symbol display portion 37a is performing the stop display, the 1 synchronous display section Sync1 performs lighting display. Further, when the second symbol display portion 37b is performing the variable display, the second synchronization display portion Sync2 performs blinking display, and when the second symbol display portion 37b is performing the stop display, the second synchronization display. The part Sync2 performs lighting display.

In this embodiment, the display surface 41a is configured to display the main display area MA, the first reserved display area Ds1, the second reserved display area Ds2, the first synchronization display section Sync1, and the second synchronization display section Sync2. However, a configuration may be adopted in which the display surface 41a does not display some or all of these displays.

<<10-2>> Electrical Configuration of Gaming Machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described using a block diagram.

447 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 10 mainly includes a main controller 60 , a sound emission controller 90 , and a display controller 100 .

The main controller 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main game. The main control board 61 has an MPU 62 composed of elements having multiple functions. The MPU 62 includes a CPU (not shown) that executes various control programs, a ROM 63 that records various control programs and fixed value data, and temporarily stores various data when executing the programs recorded in the ROM 63. and a RAM 64, which is a memory for storing. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. A part of the functions of the MPU 62 may be provided by another element. Details of various areas provided in the ROM 63 and RAM 64 will be described later.

The main control board 61 is provided with an input port (not shown) and an output port (not shown). An input port of the main control board 61 is connected to a payout control device 70 and a power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in a power supply device 85 . The main control board 61 is supplied with stable 24 V DC power from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86 . The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power supply as an external power supply, and converts the external power supplied from the commercial power supply into the operating power required by the main control device 60, the payout control device 70, etc., to each device supply power. The power supply device 85 is equipped with a capacitor (not shown), and in the event of a power failure or the power switch 88 (FIG. 444) being turned off, continues to supply power to each device for a predetermined period of time. do.

In addition, the input port of the main control board 61, the general prize winning port 32, the first starting port 33, the second starting port 34, the through gate 35, the variable winning device 36, V winning port 48 and other various ball entrances and Various detection sensors 67a to 67f provided in the through gate are connected. Based on the signals from these detection sensors 67a to 67f, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether or not the game ball flowing down the game area PA has entered the ball entrance, and the game ball passes through the gate. It is determined whether or not the Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 and the second start port 34, and executes the electric accessory release lottery based on the entry of the ball into the through gate 35. do.

The output port of the main control board 61 has a variable winning driving unit 36c that opens and closes the open/close door 36b of the variable winning device 36, and an electric accessory driving unit 34b that opens and closes the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34. , V winning opening shutter driving section 48b for opening and closing the V winning opening shutter 48a, and the main display section 45 are connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning driving section 36c so that the opening/closing door 36b is opened/closed. Further, as a result of the electric accessory opening lottery, when the electric role opening is won, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 34b so that the electric accessory 34a is released. Further, when a predetermined lottery result is obtained in the lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 and the second start port 34, the V winning port 48 is opened at a predetermined timing during the round game.・The driving control of the V winning opening shutter driving section 48b is executed so that the closed V winning opening shutter 48a is opened and closed. Furthermore, in each game cycle, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b in the main display portion 45, and in the opening/closing execution mode, round display in the main display portion 45. Display control of the unit 39 is executed.

An output port of the main control board 61 is connected with a payout control device 70 and a sound emission control device 90 . A prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 70 from the main control device 60 based on the winning judgment result, for example. When the main controller 60 transmits the prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63. FIG. Specifically, when entering the ball into the general winning hole 32 is specified, a winning ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is transmitted from the main controller 60, and the ball enters the first starting hole 33. is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is transmitted from the main controller 60, and when entering the second start port 34 is specified, two game balls are paid out. A prize ball command corresponding to is transmitted from the main controller 60, and a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 15 game balls is transmitted from the main controller 60 when the ball entering the big winning opening 36a is specified. be. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 based on the prize ball command received from the main controller 60 to pay out prize balls.

A discharge control device 80 is connected to the payout control device 70 . The shooting control device 80 controls shooting of the game ball shooting mechanism 81 . The game ball shooting mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined shooting conditions are met. Also, the operation handle 25 and the game ball shooting button 26 are connected to the shooting control device 80 . As described above, the operating handle 25 includes the touch sensor 25a, the weight button 25b, and the variable resistor 25c. When the player grips the operating handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operating handle 25, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism to the front surface of the game board with strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c. As described above, the game ball shooting button 26 is operated by the player, and regardless of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 by the player, the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 is maximum. A game ball is shot to the front of the game board with the same shooting intensity.

The sound emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60 and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main controller 60 transmits various commands, the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63 is referred to. Details of these various commands are described later.

In addition, based on various commands received from the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90 controls the driving of various lamps 47 composed of light emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the front door frame 14, and the driving control of the speaker 46. and control the display control device 100 . Also, the effect operation button 24 is connected to the sound emission control device 90, and when the effect operation button 24 is operated by the player at a predetermined timing, a game effect reflecting the operation is performed. It controls the various lamps 47, the speaker 46, the display control device 100, and the like.

The display control device 100 executes display control of the pattern display device 41 based on various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 . Specifically, the display control device 100, based on the various commands received from the sound emission control device 90, grasps the fluctuation time of the pattern in the pattern display device 41 and the type of combination of patterns to be finally stopped and displayed. , presence/absence of occurrence of ready-to-win, contents of ready-to-win effect, contents of notice effect to be executed in each game cycle, and the like are grasped. In this embodiment, the stop time, which is the time during which the combination of symbols is stopped and displayed, is constant. Therefore, by determining the variable time, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game, is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

FIG. 448 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used for a winning lottery or the like. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 sets the winning lottery, the setting of the display of the main display section 45, the setting of the pattern display of the pattern display device 41, and the like. Specifically, a winning random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery. A jackpot type counter C2 is used when sorting the jackpot types. A ready-to-win random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not to generate a ready-to-win when the symbol row displayed on the symbol display device 41 is changed. A falling random number counter CF is used for the falling lottery for determining whether or not to end the high-probability mode.

A random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. Further, when determining the variation time in the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b of the main display portion 45 and the symbol display device 41, a variation type counter CS is used. Furthermore, the electric accessory opening counter C4 is used for the electric accessory opening lottery for determining whether or not the electric accessory 34a of the second start port 34 is to be opened.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the counter value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. FIG.

The RAM 64 is provided with a pending information storage area 64b and a determination processing execution area 64c. The reservation information storage area 64b is provided with a first reservation area Ra and a second reservation area Rb. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first start port 33, each value of the winning random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the falling random number counter CF at the timing of entering the ball is stored as reserved information. It is stored in the first reserved area Ra of the area 64b. In the first reservation area Ra, there are four areas corresponding to the maximum number of game balls entered into the first starting port 33, that is, the first area, the second area, the third area, and the fourth area. area is provided. When the game ball enters the first start port 33, each value of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the falling random number counter CF at the timing of the entering ball is retained information (hereinafter, special 1 retained ) is stored in one of the first to fourth areas. Which of the first to fourth areas is stored is determined by the order of ball entry, and the earlier the ball entry timing is, the higher the area (the first area is the highest area).

Also, when the game ball enters the second start port 34, each value of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the falling random number counter CF at the timing of the ball entering is the second 2 are stored chronologically in the reservation area Rb. In the second reservation area Rb, there are four areas corresponding to the maximum number of game balls that have entered the second starting port 34, that is, the first area, the second area, the third area, and the fourth area. area is provided. When the game ball enters the second start port 34, each value of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the falling random number counter CF at the timing of the entering ball is retained information (hereinafter, special 2 retained ) is stored in one of the first to fourth areas. Which of the first to fourth areas is stored is determined by the order of ball entry, and the earlier the ball entry timing is, the higher the area (the first area is the highest area).

The details of the winning random number counter C1 will be described. The winning random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery as described above. The winning random number counter C1 is, for example, configured to be incremented by one within the range of 0 to 1199 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Further, when the winning random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value=0 to 1199).

The hit random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and when a game ball enters the first start port 33, the updated value is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entry. When a game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entry.

The value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the first reservation area Ra is moved to the execution area AE of the judgment processing execution area 64c, and is collated with the success/failure table stored in the success/failure table storage area 63a of the ROM 63 to determine the jackpot. It is determined whether or not Also, the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the second reservation area Rb moves to the execution area AE of the judgment processing execution area 64c, and is compared with the success/failure table stored in the success/failure table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. It is determined whether or not it will be a big hit.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the first reservation area Ra is determined in the order in which the game ball enters the first start hole 33, and the determination process execution area Move to execution area AE of 64c. Specifically, the data stored in the first area of the first reservation area Ra is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c, and the data stored in the storage area of the first reservation area Ra is shifted. do. The data shift is to sequentially shift the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the upper area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area.

In addition, the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the second reservation area Rb moves to the execution area AE of the judgment processing execution area 64c in the order acquired by the game ball entering the second starting port 34. . Specifically, the data stored in the first area of the second reservation area Rb is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c, and the data stored in the storage area of the second reservation area Rb is shifted. do. The data shift is to sequentially shift the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the upper area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area.

When the value of the random number counter C1 is stored in the second reservation area Rb, regardless of whether the hit in the first reservation area Ra is stored or not, the value of the random number counter C1 is stored in the second reservation area Rb. The value of the stored winning random number counter C1 is to be moved to the execution area AE of the judgment processing execution area 64c. As a result, when the value of the random number counter C1 is stored in both the first reservation area Ra and the second reservation area Rb, the hit stored in the second reservation area Rb corresponding to the second starting port 34 Priority is given to the value of the random number counter C1. That is, in this embodiment, when the value of the random number counter C1 is stored in both the first reservation area Ra and the second reservation area Rb, it is stored in the second reservation area Rb corresponding to the second start port 34 The value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the second reservation area Rb is prioritized, and the data stored in the first area of the second reservation area Rb is determined among the values of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the second reservation area Rb. The data stored in the storage area of the second reservation area Rb is shifted to the processing execution area 64c. If the value of the hit random number counter C1 is not stored in the second reservation area Rb, among the values of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the first reservation area Ra, the first area of the first reservation area Ra A process of moving the stored data to the determination process execution area 64c and shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first reservation area Ra is executed.

In the above description, it is explained in what order the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb is moved to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c. However, the value of the winning random number counter C1 is not limited to the value of the winning random number counter C1. Each value of the counter CF) is also moved to the execution area AE of the judgment processing execution area 64c in the same order.

Next, the details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining the jackpot type. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 39 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry when the game ball enters the first start port 33. When the game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry. The value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the first reservation area Ra moves to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c. The value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the second reservation area Rb moves to the execution area AE of the judgment processing execution area 64c.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the determination process execution area 64c. The jackpot type is determined using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in . Furthermore, the MPU 62 uses the value of the hit random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to determine the display mode of the segment display that is stopped and displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b. . The stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referred to for the determination.

Next, details of the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is used when determining whether or not a reach occurs when the result of the winning lottery is not a big win. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry when the game ball enters the first start port 33. When the game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry. After moving to the execution area AE of the determination process execution area 64c, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first reservation area Ra is stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63. It is collated to determine if reach occurs. After the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the second reservation area Rb is moved to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c, the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 It is collated to determine if reach occurs. However, when the result of the winning lottery is a big win and the game shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 determines the occurrence of reach regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

The ready-to-win means that, for some of the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41, there is a possibility that a combination of symbols corresponding to a big win will be established, and some combinations of symbols are stopped. It refers to a display state in which symbols are displayed and the remaining symbol rows are displayed in a variable manner. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the combination of symbols corresponding to the big win refers to the combination of the same symbols on a predetermined pay line. As a specific example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of FIG. A ready-to-win state is achieved by forming a ready-to-win line and performing variable display of symbols in the symbol row Z2 when the ready-to-win line is formed. Then, when a big win occurs, the same symbols as the symbols forming the reach line are stop-displayed in the symbol row Z2.

In addition, in the ready-to-win state, while the ready-to-win line is formed, the patterns are displayed in the remaining pattern rows in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen to create a ready-to-win effect. It includes a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a after displaying a combination of patterns in which a reach line is formed in a reduced size or not. In addition, when the ready-to-win effect is being performed or before the ready-to-win display is performed, the determination of whether or not to perform a notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character is performed using the reach-to-win random number counter C3 or other counters. may

Next, details of the falling random number counter CF will be described. The falling random number counter CF is used when executing a falling lottery for determining whether or not to end the high probability mode in a game state in which the lottery mode is the high probability mode. When the falling lottery is won, the lottery mode in the game round is changed from the high probability mode to the low probability mode.

The falling random number counter CF is, for example, incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 299, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum. The fall random number counter CF is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry when the game ball enters the first start port 33. Then, when the game ball enters the second starting port 34, the updated value of the falling random number counter CF is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the RAM 64 at the timing of the ball entering. The value of the falling random number counter CF stored in the first reservation area Ra is moved to the execution area AE of the judgment processing execution area 64c each time the game round being executed ends. After the value of the falling random number counter CF stored in the second reservation area Rb is moved to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c, the success/failure table (falling lottery table) stored in the fall lottery table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 Applicability table: FIG. 452) to determine whether to terminate the high probability mode.

Next, details of the fluctuation type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the variation time in the first symbol display portion 37 a and the second symbol display portion 37 b and the symbol variation time in the symbol display device 41 . The fluctuation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in sequence within a range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once each time a normal process, which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of variation display in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b and at the start of symbol variation by the symbol display device 41. The variable time table stored in the variable time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63 is used when determining the variable time in the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b.

Next, the details of the electric accessory release counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory release counter C4 is, for example, configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 465 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated, and stored in the electric role holding area 64d of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the through gate 35. - 特許庁Then, at a predetermined timing, after the value of the electric role product open counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 64d moves to the electric role execution area 64e, the value of the electric role product open counter C4 is displayed in the electric role execution area 64e. A lottery (hereinafter referred to as an electric accessory open lottery) is performed as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to the open state. Specifically, in the electric role execution area 64e, the winning/failure table (electric role lottery winning/failure table) stored in the role lottery table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 and the value of the electric role lottery counter C4 are different. It is collated, and it is determined whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to the open state.

At least one of the acquired value of the winning random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4, and the value of the falling random number counter CF is special information in the present invention. corresponds to

Next, the success/failure table will be described. The success/failure table is table data for matching with the winning random number counter C1 when a winning lottery is performed based on the winning random number counter C1. A low-probability mode and a high-probability mode are set in the pachinko machine 10 as a lottery mode for a winning lottery. In the winning lottery in the probability mode, the success/failure table for the high probability mode is referred to. Further, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33, and then the judgment processing execution area 64c. a success/failure table for collating with the winning random number counter C1 transferred to , and a winning random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 34. The success/failure table is stored as separate table data. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 includes a success/failure table for the first start port (for low probability mode), a success/failure table for the first start port (for high probability mode), and a success/failure table for the second start port (low probability mode). The success/failure table for the probability mode) and the success/failure table for the second start port (for the high probability mode) are stored in the success/failure table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. FIG.

FIG. 449 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the success/failure table for the first starting port. FIG. 449(a) shows the success/failure table for the first starting point (for low probability mode), and FIG. 449(b) shows the success/failure table for the first starting point (for high probability mode).

As shown in FIG. 449(a), 20 values from 0 to 19 are set in the success/failure table for the first start port (for the low probability mode) as the value of the winning random number counter C1 for the big win. there is Of the values from 0 to 3979, the values (20 to 3979) other than the 20 values from 0 to 19 are outliers. In this case, the number of value groups of the winning random number counter C1, which is a big hit, is 20/3980 (=1/199) of the total number.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 449(b), 199 values from 0 to 198 are set in the success/failure table for the first start port (for high probability mode) as the value of the winning random number counter C1 that is the big win. It is Of the values from 0 to 3979, the values (199 to 3979) other than the 199 values from 0 to 198 are outliers. In this case, the number of value groups of the winning random number counter C1, which is the big win, is 199/3980 (=1/20) of the total number. Thus, the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning a big prize in the winning lottery than the low probability mode.

FIG. 450 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the success/failure table for the second start port. FIG. 450(a) shows the success/failure table for the second starting point (for low probability mode), and FIG. 450(b) shows the success/failure table for the second starting point (for high probability mode).

As shown in FIG. 450(a), 20 values from 0 to 19 are set in the success/failure table for the second start port (for the low probability mode) as the value of the winning random number counter C1 for the big win. there is And, in the success or failure table for the second start port (for low probability mode), the values 0 to 3979 (20 to 3979) other than the 20 values 0 to 19 are given when the time is reduced. It is set as the value of the random number counter C1. In this case, the number of value groups of the winning random number counter C1, which is a big hit, is 20/3980 (=1/199) of the total number.

"Time-saving provision" is a success or failure result that triggers the transition to the support mode described later, but does not trigger the transition to the opening and closing execution mode in which the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened and closed. If the support mode is in the low-frequency support mode when the time-saving grant is won, the support mode shifts from the low-frequency support mode to the high-frequency support mode. "Time-saving grant" elected in the present embodiment is a type of time-saving grant that continues until the next big hit is won in the high-frequency support mode. That is, when the time saving grant is won, if the support mode is in the low-frequency support mode, the support mode shifts from the low-frequency support mode to the high-frequency support mode, and the high-frequency support mode continues until the next jackpot is won. be done.

It should be noted that the right/wrong table (for the low probability mode) for the second start port in the present embodiment does not have a setting of "out". That is, in the success/failure table (for the low-probability mode) for the second starting opening in the present embodiment, time saving is set as the success/failure result instead of the off.

As shown in FIG. 450(b), 199 values from 0 to 198 are set in the success/failure table for the second start port (for the high probability mode) as the value of the winning random number counter C1 for the big win. there is Of the values from 0 to 3979, the values (199 to 3979) other than the 199 values from 0 to 198 are outliers. In this case, the number of value groups of the winning random number counter C1, which is a big hit, is 199/3980 (=1/20) of the total number. In this way, the high-probability mode has a higher probability of winning a big win in the winning lottery than the low-probability mode.

"Off" is a success/fail result that does not trigger the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, nor does it trigger the transition to the lottery mode and the support mode.

In this embodiment, the value group of the winning random number counter C1 set as the jackpot in the win/fail table for the low probability mode corresponds to the value group of the winning random number counter C1 set as the jackpot in the win/fail table for the high probability mode. include. However, as long as the probability of winning a big win in the high-probability mode is higher than in the low-probability mode as a result of the winning lottery, the number and value of the random numbers set as the big wins are arbitrary.

It should be noted that a "small win" may be provided as a result of the winning lottery, although it is not used in the win/fail table in this embodiment.

A "minor win" is a win/fail result that triggers a transition to an opening/closing execution mode in which the opening/closing door 36b of the variable prize winning device 36 is opened and closed, but does not trigger a transition to a lottery mode, which will be described later. , the number of round games that occur in the open/close execution mode is limited to one.

Next, the jackpot type will be described. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set in the pachinko machine 10. - 特許庁Specifically, for example, by providing differences in the following three aspects or modes, it is possible to set a plurality of types of jackpots.
(1) Aspect of opening/closing control of variable winning device 36 in opening/closing execution mode (2) Lottery mode for winning lottery after completion of opening/closing execution mode (3) Electric accessory 34a of second start port 34 after completion of opening/closing execution mode Support mode

In the pachinko machine 10, as a form of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the above-described (1) opening/closing execution mode, the frequency of occurrence of winning to the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode A high-frequency winning mode and a low-frequency winning mode can be set so that is relatively high or low. For example, in the high frequency winning mode, the opening and closing door 36b is opened and closed a plurality of times (for example, 16 times) from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode, and one opening is performed until 30 seconds elapses or to the opening and closing door 36b. It can be set to continue until the number of hit balls reaches 10. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening and closing door 36b is opened and closed twice from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode, and one opening is until 0.2 sec elapses or a ball enters the opening and closing door 36b. It can be set to continue until the number reaches six.

When the operation handle 25 is operated by the player, the game ball shooting mechanism 81 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is shot toward the game area PA every 0.6 sec. In the case of the above specific example, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of the opening/closing door 36b is 0.2 sec. In other words, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of the open/close door 36b is shorter than the shooting cycle of the game ball. Therefore, substantially no winning of game balls occurs in the opening/closing execution mode associated with the low-frequency winning mode. However, even in the opening and closing execution mode related to the low-frequency winning mode, it may be set so that the winning of the game ball can occur.

The number of opening/closing times of the opening/closing door 36b, the opening limit time for one opening, and the opening limit number for one opening are determined by the variable winning device 36 during the period from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode. is higher in the high-frequency winning mode than in the low-frequency winning mode, the open mode of the opening/closing door 36b is arbitrary. Specifically, if the high frequency winning mode has more opening and closing times than the low frequency winning mode, the opening limit time for one opening is longer, or the opening limit number for one opening is set more good. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, in the open/close execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode, substantially no winning to the variable winning device 36 may occur.

The pachinko machine 10 has a high-probability mode in which a winning lottery is performed using a high-probability win-or-fail table as a win-or-fail table, and a win-fail table as a win-or-fail table. A low-probability mode in which a winning lottery is performed using a low-probability success/failure table can be set. As described with reference to FIG. 449, when a winning lottery is performed using a high-probability success/failure table, a winning lottery is more likely to be won than when a winning lottery is performed using a low-probability success/failure table. likely to.

In the pachinko machine 10, as a form of the support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the end of the above-mentioned (3) opening and closing execution mode, shooting of game balls continues in a similar form to the game area PA. A high-frequency support mode and a low-frequency support mode are selected so that the frequency of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 being in the open state per unit time is relatively high or low when compared in the situation where can be set.

Specifically, the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode have different probabilities of winning the electric role open lottery in the electric role item opening lottery using the electric role item opening counter C4. In the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role open lottery in the electric accessory open lottery is made higher than in the low frequency support mode. In addition, in the high-frequency support mode, the opening time of the electric accessory 34a may be set longer than in the low-frequency support mode when the electric role opening winning is won.

Although not adopted in the present embodiment, in the high frequency support mode, the number of times the electric accessory 34a is in the open state when the electric accessory 34a is elected is set higher than in the low frequency support mode. good too. Furthermore, it may be configured such that the electric accessory 34a is set to have a long opening time once. In addition, in the high-frequency support mode, in the case where the open state of the electric accessory 34a occurs multiple times due to the electric role open winning, the closing time from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state is , may be set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the time secured from one electric accessory open lottery to the next electric accessory open lottery is set to be relatively shorter than in the low-frequency support mode. may

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of a ball entering the second starting port 34 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. That is, the high-frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary game state that assists establishment of special information acquisition conditions.

In the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won as a result of the winning lottery, the jackpot type is sorted using the jackpot type counter C2. The distribution of the jackpot types corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63 as a distribution table.

FIG. 451 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table. FIG. 451(a) shows the distribution table for the first start port, and FIG. 451(b) shows the distribution table for the second start port. The distribution table for the first start port is referred to during a winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33, and the distribution table for the second start port is referred to the second start port 34. It is referred to during the winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball. In each of FIGS. 451(a) and 451(b), the left side of the vertical double line corresponds to the distribution table. The portion on the right side of the vertical double line indicates which mode the lottery mode and the support mode shift after the big win when sorted by the sorting table. Here, "after the big win" specifically means after the end of the opening/closing execution mode executed when the big win is won in the winning lottery.

As shown in FIG. 451(a), in the distribution table for the first start port, 8R probability variable jackpot and 8R normal jackpot are set as the jackpot types based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33. It is

In the 8R probability variable jackpot, the number of openings of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is 8 times (8 rounds), and the mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode. . Also, the 8R probability variable jackpot is a jackpot that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the V winning opening 48 in the first round of the round game. Specifically, the period during which the opening/closing door 36b is opened in the first round of the round game includes the period in which the V winning opening shutter 48a is open. It is a jackpot with a set opening period. The period in which the opening/closing door 36b is opened in the first round of the round game includes the period in which the V winning opening shutter 48a is in the open state (not part of it, but all of it is included), so that one round of the round game is completed. It becomes easy for the game ball to enter the V winning hole 48 opened at the eye. As described above, the V winning opening shutter 48a is opened and closed at a predetermined timing during the round game. After the elapse of , it will be in an open state for a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds), and then will be in a closed state. The 8R probability variable jackpot is defined so that the open/close door 36b is opened in the first round of the round game during the open state period.

When a game ball enters the opened V winning port 48, the lottery mode of winning lottery after the end of the opening/closing execution mode becomes the high probability mode. As described above, it is easy for the game ball to enter the V winning opening 48 in the first round of the round game. The lottery mode of winning lottery after the end of the opening/closing execution mode does not shift to the high probability mode.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the number of game rounds executed in the high probability mode is limited to 10 times (ST number), and the number of game rounds executed in the high probability mode is 10 times. , the lottery mode of the winning lottery shifts from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode after the end of the game round. It should be noted that, in the game round executed in the high probability mode, if the probability variable jackpot is further won and the game ball enters the V winning opening 48 opened with the probability variable jackpot as a trigger, the high probability that has been executed so far The number of game rounds in the probability mode is reset, and after the round game executed with the probability variable jackpot as a trigger, 10 game rounds are again counted from the game rounds in the high probability mode to be executed thereafter. Therefore, when a jackpot is won in the high-probability mode, the game rounds in the high-probability mode may be continuously executed 10 times or more.

When a jackpot is won by winning lottery and the type of the jackpot won is the 8R probability variable jackpot, the support mode shifts to a high-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. The number of game rounds to be executed in the high-frequency support mode is limited to 5 times (time-saving continuation number). Here, the 8R probability variable jackpot is assumed, but the number of rounds is actually irrelevant, and in the case of the probability variable jackpot, the support mode shifts to the high-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode is finished. In this case as well, the number of game times executed in the high-frequency support mode is limited to the number of time-saving continuations.

In the 8R normal jackpot, the opening and closing times of the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode is 8 times (8 rounds), and the mode of opening and closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode. . In addition, in the 8R normal jackpot, the opening period of the opening and closing door 36b in the first round of the round game and the period in which the V winning opening shutter 48a is open do not overlap. It is a jackpot with a set opening period. Since the opening period of the opening/closing door 36b and the opening period of the opening/closing door 36b do not overlap, the probability of the game ball entering the V winning hole 48 is extremely low. Therefore, the 8R normal jackpot is a jackpot in which the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the end of the open/close execution mode is substantially the low probability mode.

In this way, the probability variable jackpot makes it easier for the game ball to enter the V winning opening 48 in the first round of the round game compared to the normal jackpot, so the winning lottery lottery mode after the end of the opening and closing execution mode has a high probability. There is a high probability that it will become a mod. On the other hand, since game balls are less likely to enter the V winning opening 48 in the normal jackpot compared to the variable probability jackpot, the probability that the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the end of the open/close execution mode will be the high probability mode is very low. In this specification, the distribution result with a higher probability that the game ball is likely to enter the V winning hole 48 and the lottery mode of the winning lottery becomes the high probability mode is called "probability variable jackpot" for convenience. In other words, if a jackpot is won by a winning lottery, the type of the jackpot won is a probability variable jackpot, and the game ball does not enter the V winning port 48 that is opened by the jackpot, after the opening/closing execution mode ends. The lottery mode of the winning lottery does not shift to the high probability mode, but as described above, it is called "probability variable jackpot" for convenience.

When a jackpot is won by a winning lottery and the type of the jackpot won is the 8R normal jackpot, the support mode becomes a low-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. Here, the case of the 8R normal jackpot is assumed, but the number of rounds is actually irrelevant, and in the case of the normal jackpot, the support mode becomes a low-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends.

In the distribution table for the first start port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39", "0 to 19" corresponds to the 8R probability variable jackpot, and "20 to 39" corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot. is set to

As shown in FIG. 451(b), in the distribution table for the second starting port, 16R probability variable jackpot is set as the jackpot type based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port .

In the 16R probability variable jackpot, the number of openings of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is 16 times (16 rounds), and the opening/closing control mode of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode. . Also, the 16R probability variable jackpot is a jackpot that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the V winning opening 48 in the first round of the round game. Specifically, the 16R probability variable jackpot is set so that the period in which the V winning opening shutter 48a is open is included in the open period of the opening and closing door 36b in the first round of the round game. It is a jackpot that determines the opening period of the opening and closing door 36b. A period in which the V winning opening shutter 48a is in an open state is included in the opening period of the opening/closing door 36b in the first round of the round game, so that the game to the V winning opening 48 opened in the first round of the round game is performed. It becomes easier to enter the ball. As described above, the V winning opening shutter 48a is opened and closed at a predetermined timing during the round game. After the elapse of , it will be in an open state for a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds), and then will be in a closed state. The 16R probability variable jackpot is defined so that the open/close door 36b is opened in the first round of the round game during the open state period. That is, the 16R probability variable jackpot differs from the 8R probability variable jackpot only in the number of openings of the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode, and the aspect of the opening and closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode. is the high-frequency winning mode, and it is the same in that it is easy for the game ball to enter the V winning hole 48 in the first round of the round game. Also, the 16R probability variable jackpot is the same as the 8R probability variable jackpot in the lottery mode and the support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode.

In the distribution table for the second starting port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39", "0 to 39" are set so as to correspond to the 16R probability variable jackpot. That is, all of the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39" are set so as to correspond to the 16R probability variable jackpot.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the jackpot types are distributed according to the jackpot type when the jackpot hits. It is different from the case of winning a big hit based on the entry of the game ball into the second start hole 34, and a clear difference is provided in the advantage for the player.

In the present embodiment, as described above, as the types of jackpots, three types of 8R probability variable jackpot, 8R normal jackpot, and 16R probability variable jackpot are set. The number may be four, two, or five or more. Furthermore, the number of opening times of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is not limited to 8R and 16R, and may be other times such as 4R and 5R, for example.

As described above, when the number of executions of the game rounds executed in the high probability mode reaches the number of STs (10 times), the winning lottery lottery mode is changed from the high probability mode to the low probability mode after the end of the game rounds. Although it shifts to the probability mode, in this embodiment, even if it is a game round before reaching this ST number, when winning in the falling lottery described later, the lottery mode of the winning lottery is changed from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. configured to move to

FIG. 452 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a fall lottery success/failure table used when executing a fall lottery. As shown in FIG. 452, 100 values from 0 to 99 out of values from 0 to 299 are set in the drop lottery success/failure table as values of the drop random number counter CF that will win the drop lottery. . 200 values from 100 to 299 out of the values from 0 to 299 are set in the drop lottery success/failure table as values of the drop random number counter CF that are lost in the drop lottery. That is, in the high probability mode game round, the probability of winning the falling lottery, ending the high probability mode, and entering the low probability mode is 1/3. In the high-probability mode game round, when the drop lottery is lost, the high-probability mode is continued. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the falling lottery is not executed in the low-probability mode game rounds. The probability of winning in the falling lottery is not necessarily limited to the above 1/3, and other probabilities such as 1/2 and 1/4 may be used.

FIG. 453 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the success/failure table (electric accessary product open lottery success/failure table) used when executing the electric accessary product open lottery.

FIG. 453(a) shows a success/failure table for electric accessory open lottery (for low frequency support mode) used in low frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 453(a), in the electric accessory open lottery success/failure table (for low-frequency support mode), two values of 0 and 1 are set as the values of the electric accessory open counter C4 that will win the electric role open winning. A value is set. 464 values from 2 to 465 are set as the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4 to be out. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 in the low-frequency support mode and the electric accessary item open lottery is executed, the electric role open lottery is won with a probability of 1/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric role opening win is made in the low-frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.4 seconds.

FIG. 453(b) shows a success/failure table for electric accessory open lottery (for high frequency support mode) used in high frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 453(b), in the success/failure table for the electric accessory open lottery (for high-frequency support mode), 462 values of 0 to 461 for the electric accessory open counter C4 for winning the electric role open winning A value is set. Four values of 462 to 465 are set as the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4 that is out. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 in the high-frequency support mode and the electric accessory open lottery is executed, the electric role open lottery is won with a probability of 231/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric role opening win is made in the high-frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.6 seconds.

In this way, the success/failure table for the electric accessory open lottery is set so that the high-frequency support mode has a higher probability of the game ball entering the second start port 34 than the low-frequency support mode. .

<<10-3>> Electrical Configuration of Audio Light Emitting Control Device and Display Control Device:
Next, electrical configurations of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 454 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. As shown in FIG. A part of the configuration such as the power supply device 85 (FIG. 447) is omitted. An MPU 92 is mounted on an audio emission control board 91 provided in the audio emission control device 90 . The MPU 92 is a device containing a CPU, a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like.

The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables, and the like. For example, part of the area of the ROM 93 is provided with an effect pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like. Details of these will be described later.

The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the ROM 93 . For example, a part of the area of the RAM 94 is provided with various flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, and the like. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 92, and they may be individually integrated into chips.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port. The input side of the MPU 92 is connected to the main control device 60 and the effect operation button 24 . Various commands are received from the main controller 60 . A speaker 46 and various lamps 47 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92, and the display control device 100 is also connected.

The display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102, which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are integrated into chips, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. is installed. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 102, and they may be individually integrated into chips.

The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, to generate internal commands for the VDP 105). .

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and also stores JPEG format image data for background images.

A work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when various programs are executed by the MPU 102 .

The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the pattern display device 41 . The VDP 105 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is an IC chip, and is a kind of microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, etc., and intervenes in the reading and writing of data.

The character ROM 106 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as patterns displayed on the pattern display device 41 . The character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table and the like that are referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 106 . It is also possible to configure the character ROM 106 to store the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 .

The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, and by rewriting the content of the video RAM 107, the display content of the pattern display device 41 is changed.

Hereinafter, the MPU 62, ROM 63, and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main MPU 62, main ROM 63, and main RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the sound emission control device 90 are referred to as the sound and light side MPU 92 and the sound and light side, respectively. The ROM 93 and the sound/light side RAM 94 are also called, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also called the display side MPU 102 .

<<10-4>> Outline of Processing by Gaming Machine:
Next, an overview of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described.

<<10-4-1>> High/low transition between lottery mode and support mode:
First, a case where the lottery mode and the support mode are shifted will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won by a win lottery and the type of the jackpot won is a normal jackpot, the lottery mode shifts to a low probability mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, and the support mode. transitions to infrequent support mode.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won by a winning lottery, the type of the jackpot won is a probability variable jackpot, and a game ball enters the V prize opening 48 opened with the jackpot as a trigger, opening and closing is performed. After the execution mode ends, the lottery mode shifts to the high-probability mode, and the support mode shifts to the high-frequency support mode. In the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won by a winning lottery, the type of the jackpot won is a variable jackpot, and the game ball does not enter the V winning port 48 opened by the jackpot, A lottery mode does not shift to a high-probability mode, and a support mode does not shift to a high-frequency support mode.

After the support mode shifts to the high-frequency support mode based on the fact that a jackpot is won by a winning lottery and the type of the jackpot won is a variable probability jackpot, the game cycle is executed after the high-frequency support mode is started. The high-frequency support mode is continued as the support mode until the number of times reaches a predetermined number of times (hereinafter, also referred to as the number of continuous time-saving operations). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the number of consecutive times of time saving is five times, for example. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, the high frequency support mode is continued up to 5 times, which is the number of continuous times of time saving, after shifting to the high frequency support mode. When the number of times the game is executed after the start of the high-frequency support mode reaches 5 times, which is the number of time-shortening continuations, the support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode after the end of the game. It should be noted that the number of continuations of time saving is not necessarily limited to the five times described above, and may be another number of times.

On the other hand, the winning lottery is executed with reference to the success/failure table for the second starting port (for low probability mode) shown in FIG. When shifting to the frequency support mode, the high frequency support mode is continued as the support mode until the next big win is won.

When the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the probability that the result of the electric role item open lottery that is executed when the through gate 35 is passed is an electric role open lottery is extremely high at 231/233. The accessory 34a is in the electric role open state with high frequency. Therefore, when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the player hits to the right and plays the game so as to enter the game ball into the second starting hole 34 provided with the electric accessory 34a.

After the lottery mode shifts to the high-probability mode, the high-probability mode is continued as the lottery mode until the number of game rounds executed after the start of the high-probability mode reaches a predetermined number (ST number). In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the number of STs is ten times, for example. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, after the high-probability mode is started and ten game rounds, which is the ST number, are executed, the lottery mode is shifted from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode.

In addition, when the fall lottery is won in the game round before the number of game rounds executed after the start of the high probability mode reaches the ST number, the lottery mode is shifted from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. . Specifically, when the number of times of execution of the game round reaches ST number of times before winning in the falling lottery related to the game round, the lottery mode is shifted from the high probability mode to the low probability mode at the start of the game round, and the game round A winning lottery is executed in a low probability mode. Therefore, in the winning lottery in the game round, the winning lottery is executed with reference to the success/failure table (for low probability mode) for the second start port shown in FIG. If so, the high-frequency support mode is continued as the support mode until the next big win is won.

In the game round executed in the high-probability mode, when a jackpot is further won, the type of the jackpot won is a probability variable jackpot, and the game ball enters the V winning port 48 opened with the jackpot as a trigger, The number of games in the high-probability mode that has been executed so far is reset, and after the round game that is executed in the wake of the big win, 10 games are repeated from the game in the high-probability mode that is executed thereafter. A count is performed. Therefore, when a jackpot is won in the high-probability mode, the game rounds in the high-probability mode may be continuously executed 10 times or more.

<<10-4-2>> Game flow:
In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, at least four types of states can be taken as game states to be transitioned as the game progresses, depending on the combination of high and low between the lottery mode and the support mode. Specifically, i) a low-probability low-probability support state in which the lottery mode is a low-probability mode and the support mode is a low-frequency support mode, and ii) the lottery mode is a low-probability mode and the support mode is Low probability high support state which is high frequency support mode, iii) high probability high support state where lottery mode is high probability mode and support mode is high frequency support mode, and iv) lottery mode is high probability mode and a high-probability low-support state in which the support mode is a low-frequency support mode. Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, an open/close execution mode in which a game ball can enter the big winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36 can be taken as a game state. The game progresses while transitioning between these game states.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a high-probability mode flag specifying the lottery mode and a high-frequency support mode specifying the support mode are stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM64. The lottery mode is identified as the low probability mode when the high probability mode flag is OFF, and the lottery mode is identified as the high probability mode when the high probability mode flag is ON. The support mode is identified as the low-frequency support mode when the high-frequency support mode flag is OFF, and the support mode is identified as the high-frequency support mode when the high-frequency support mode flag is ON. For this reason, each of the above-described low probability low support state, low probability high support state, high probability low support state, and high probability high support state is specified by a high probability mode flag and a high frequency support mode flag. Become. As a result, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, at least one of the high-probability mode flag and the high-frequency support mode flag is switched, thereby progressing the flow of the game while switching between the four states described above.

In the present embodiment, the lottery mode is specified by one flag (that is, the high probability mode flag), but instead of this, the lottery mode is specified by two flags (that is, the high probability mode flag). low-probability mode flag). In this modification, when one of the high-probability mode flag and the low-probability mode flag is turned on, the other is automatically turned off. In addition, in the present embodiment, the support mode is identified by one flag (ie, the high frequency support mode flag), but instead of this, the support mode is identified by two flags (ie, the high frequency support mode flag). flag and low frequency support mode flag). In this modification, when one of the high-frequency support mode flag and the low-frequency support mode flag is turned ON, the other is automatically turned OFF. According to both modifications, similar to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, by switching the flag, the flow of the game progresses while switching between the four states described above.

FIG. 455 is an explanatory diagram showing a game flow in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. When the game is started, it is initially in a low probability low support state (state H1). That is, the lottery mode is a low-probability mode, and the support mode is a low-frequency support mode. In the low-probability-low-support state (state H1), the player hits left, causes the game ball to flow down to the left side of the game area PA, and enters the game ball into the first start hole 33. - 特許庁When the game ball enters the first starting hole 33, a winning lottery is performed for the special information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting hole 33, and the lottery result of the winning lottery is sent to the player. A game round for notification is executed. In the drawing, the contents described in the broken-line rectangle H1a labeled as "left-handed" correspond to the left-handed game mode so far. The contents described within the broken-line rectangle H1b labeled "Special 2 Remaining Pending Digestion" in the figure will be described later.

When the lottery result of the winning lottery in the game cycle executed in the mode H1a during left hitting in the low probability low support state (state H1) is lost, the low probability low support state (state H1) is continued.

When a jackpot is won in a win lottery in a game round executed in a mode H1a during left-handed hitting in a low probability low support state (state H1), and when the type of the jackpot won is a normal jackpot, after the game round is finished. The opening/closing execution mode is executed as a privilege given to the player. That is, it shifts from the low probability low support state (state H1) to the open/close execution mode (state H2).

The pachinko machine 10 executes a suggestive effect for prompting the player to hit to the right, prior to the round game occurring in the opening/closing execution mode (state H2). The player hits to the right in accordance with the suggested performance, causes the game ball to flow down to the right side of the game area PA, enters the game ball into the big winning hole 36a, and obtains a prize ball. In the opening/closing execution mode (state H2) executed when the type of the winning jackpot is the normal jackpot, almost no game balls enter the V winning opening 48 as described above.

When the open/close execution mode (state H2) ends, the state shifts to the low probability low support state (state H1). That is, the low-probability mode is continued as the lottery mode, and the low-frequency support mode is continued as the support mode. In addition, in the opening and closing execution mode (state H2) shifted from the low probability low support state (state H1), the game ball hardly enters the second start port 34 because the support mode is the low frequency support mode. Therefore, when the opening and closing execution mode (state H2) is completed, without transitioning to the mode H1b during special 2 remaining pending digestion in the low probability low support state (state H1), in the low probability low support state (state H1) It shifts to the aspect H1a in a left-handed shot.

On the other hand, in the low probability low support state (state H1), even if a jackpot is won in a winning lottery in a game round and the type of the jackpot won is a variable probability jackpot, a privilege given to the player after the game round ends. , the open/close execution mode is executed. That is, it shifts from the low probability low support state (state H1) to the open/close execution mode (state H3). In addition, in the low-probability low support state (state H1), winning the probability-variable jackpot can be either the state H1a during left-handed hitting or the state H1b during special 2 remaining pending digestion.

Prior to the round game that occurs in the open/close execution mode (state H3), the pachinko machine 10 has a suggestive effect to prompt the player to hit to the right, and enters the game ball into the V winning opening 48 in the first round of the round game. Executes a suggestive effect that prompts the ball to be played. The player hits to the right according to these suggestive effects, causes the game ball to flow down to the right side of the game area PA, enters the game ball into the big winning opening 36a to obtain a prize ball, and one round of the round game. A game ball is entered into the V winning opening 48 in the big winning opening 36a. In addition, in the opening and closing execution mode (state H3) executed when the type of the winning jackpot is the variable probability jackpot, as described above, the game ball enters the V winning opening 48 in the first round of the round game. It's easy to ball.

When the game ball enters the V winning port 48 in the first round of the round game in the opening/closing execution mode (state H3), and the opening/closing execution mode (state H3) ends, the state shifts to a high probability/high support state (state H4). . That is, the lottery mode is a high probability mode (limited to 10 times, which is the number of times of ST), and the support mode is a high frequency support mode (limited to 5 times, which is the number of time-saving continuations).

In the high-probability-high support state (state H4), the pachinko machine 10 executes a suggestive effect for prompting the player to hit to the right. In the high-probability-high support state (state H4), the player hits to the right in accordance with the suggested effect, causing the game ball to flow down to the right side of the game area PA and enter the game ball into the second start port 34. Let Since the support mode is the high-frequency support mode in the high-precision and high-support state, there is a possibility that the result of the electric role open lottery that is executed when the through gate 35 is passed will be the electric role open win. 233, which is extremely high, the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is frequently in the electric open state. Therefore, in the high-probability-high support state, the game ball easily enters the second starting port 34.例文帳に追加When the game ball enters the second starting port 34, a winning lottery is performed for the special information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34, and the lottery result of the winning lottery is sent to the player. A game round for notification is executed. That is, in the high-accuracy and high support state (state H4), the electric accessory 34a of the second start port 34 is in the open state with a high frequency, and the game ball is in the second start port 34 more than normal (low support state). By entering a large number of balls, the player can receive a winning lottery in a state where the number of balls in his possession is less likely to decrease.

If the lottery result of the winning lottery in the game round executed in the high probability high support state (state H4) is a jackpot, the type of the winning jackpot is limited to the probability variable jackpot (second start in FIG. 451 (b) Refer to the distribution table for the mouth), the high-accuracy-high support state H4 is shifted to the open/close execution mode H3. When the lottery result of the winning lottery in the game round executed in the high probability high support state (state H4) is lost, the high probability high support state (state H4) is continued, and the player enters the second start port 34. A game ball is entered and a game cycle is executed. In addition, in the high-probability-high support state (state H4), the winning lottery based on the special information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 by hitting to the right is the second shown in FIG. Since the success/failure table for the starting port (for high probability mode) is used, it will not be elected for time saving.

Since the lottery mode is the high-probability mode in the game round executed in the high-probability-high support state (state H4), the fall lottery described above is executed.

As described above, the game state in which the support mode is the high-frequency support mode continues up to 5 game times, which is the number of time-saving continuation times, but before reaching this 5 times (within 5 times: including 5 times) When the drop lottery is won in the game round, the lottery mode in the game round is changed from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode. That is, the high probability high support state (state H4) is shifted to the low probability high support state (state H5). In addition, when shifting to the low-probability-high support state (state H5), the time-saving game number counter PNC, which indicates the number of times the game is continuously executed in the high-frequency support mode, is held as it was before the transition. be. Therefore, the transition to the low-probability-high support state (state H5) does not reset the number of games continuously executed in the high-frequency support mode.

The winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 in the low probability support state (state H5) is the winning lottery for the second starting port shown in FIG. 450 (a) (low probability mode for) is used. For this reason, the lottery result of the winning lottery related to the game round in which the falling lottery was won is either a jackpot lottery or a time-saving award lottery. When the short-time provision is won in the winning lottery, the high-frequency support mode is continued as the support mode until the next big win is won. In other words, if the player wins the time-saving grant in the winning lottery, the high-frequency support mode continues until the next big win is won, and the next big win is virtually guaranteed. In addition, since the jackpot type based on the game ball entering the second start port 34 is limited to the 16R probability variable jackpot, as shown in FIG. ), it is guaranteed that you will win a variable probability jackpot and move again to the high probability high support state (state H4).

In the low-probable-height support state (state H5), the player hits to the right to cause the game ball to flow down to the right side of the game area PA and enter the game ball into the second start hole 34 . Since the support mode is the high-frequency support mode in the low-probability support state, there is a possibility that the result of the electric role open lottery that is executed when the through gate 35 is passed will be the electric role open win. 233, which is extremely high, the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is frequently in the electric open state. Therefore, in the low-probability support state, the game ball easily enters the second starting port 34. - 特許庁When the game ball enters the second starting port 34, a winning lottery is performed for the special information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34, and the lottery result of the winning lottery is sent to the player. A game round for notification is executed. That is, in the low-probability-high support state (state H5), the electric accessory 34a of the second start port 34 is in the open state with high frequency, and the game ball enters the second start port 34 more than normal (low support state). By entering a large number of balls, the player can receive a winning lottery in a state where the number of balls in his possession is less likely to decrease.

When a jackpot is won in a winning lottery in a game cycle executed in a low-probability support state (state H5), the type of the winning jackpot is a variable-probability jackpot, and opening and closing is executed as a privilege given to the player after the game cycle is over. mode is executed. That is, the low probability height support state (state H5) shifts to the open/close execution mode (state H3).

In summary, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the low-probability-high support state (state H5), the high-frequency support mode is continued as the support mode until the jackpot is won in the next winning lottery. In a state in which it is difficult for players to reduce the number of balls they have, it is possible to enter game balls into the second start port 34 and repeat the winning lottery at high frequency until the next big win is won. This state in which the high-frequency support mode is continued as the support mode until the next big win is won is hereinafter referred to as "continued state of high support until next time (=state of continued high support until next time)". As a result, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, from the high-probability-high support state (state H4), when the falling lottery is won in the game spins within 5 times and shifts to the low-probability-high support state (state H5) , so-called consecutive chances to win the jackpot again can be performed without fail, and the expectation of consecutive chances can be imparted to the player.

In the high-probability high support state (state H4), when the number of executions of the game rounds executed in the high-frequency support mode reaches 5 times, which is the number of time-saving continuations, without winning the fall lottery, the game rounds After termination, the support mode transitions from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode. That is, it shifts from the high probability high support state (state H4) to the high probability low support state (state H6). It should be noted that when shifting to the high-probability-low support state (state H6), the number-of-games counter SNC for ST, which indicates the number of times the game is continuously executed in the high-probability mode, is held as it was before the transition. . Therefore, the transition to the high-probability-low support state (state H6) does not reset the number of games continuously executed in the high-probability mode.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the game balls entered into the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 are each reserved up to four, and then the first reservation area Ra and the second When the reservation information is stored in both of the two reservation areas Rb, the winning lottery for the reservation information stored in the second reservation area Rb corresponding to the second starting port 34 is preferentially executed. and For this reason, in the high probability low support state (state H6), immediately after the transition from the high probability high support state (state H4) to the high probability low support state (state H6), the reservation information storage area 64b (Fig. 448) When the reservation information remains in the second reservation area Rb, the winning lottery is preferentially performed by the remaining reservation information (hereinafter referred to as special 2 remaining reservation), and the lottery result of the winning lottery is sent to the player. A game round for notification is executed. In the drawing, the content described in the broken-line rectangle H6a labeled "Toku 2 Remaining Reservation Digesting" corresponds to the mode of the game with the special 2 remaining reservation. That is, immediately after transitioning from the high-probability high support state (state H4) to the high-probability low support state (state H6), if there is a special 2 remaining hold, transition to the mode H6a during digestion of the special 2 remaining hold become. Immediately after shifting from the high-probability high support state (state H4) to the high-probability low support state (state H6), if there is no special 2 remaining hold, it shifts to the left-handed state H6b described later.

In the mode H6a during digestion of special 2 remaining reserve in the high-probability low support state (state H6), a winning lottery is performed by the special 2 remaining reserve, and a game cycle is executed to notify the player of the lottery result of the winning lottery. be. In addition, the winning lottery due to the special 2 remaining reservation does not win the time saving award because the winning lottery table (for high probability mode) for the second start port shown in FIG. 450 (b) is used. Since the lottery mode is the high-probability mode in this game round, the fall lottery described above is executed.

Mode H6a in which Special 2 Remaining Hold is digested continues until the number of game rounds corresponding to the number of Special 2 Remaining Reserves (up to 4 times), but in the game rounds before reaching this number of times, if the drop lottery is won. Then, the lottery mode in the game round is changed from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode. That is, in the game round in which the falling lottery is won, the state H6a during special 2 remaining pending digestion in the high probability low support state (state H6) shifts to the low probability low support state (state H1). It should be noted that the transition destination is the mode H1b during special 2 remaining pending digestion in the low probability low support state (state H1).

In the low probability low support state (state H1), the winning lottery based on the special information acquired based on the entry of the game ball to the first start port 33 during the left-handed hit is the first Since the success/failure table for the starting port (for low probability mode) is used, it will not be elected for time saving. On the other hand, the winning lottery by the special 2 remaining hold in the low probability low support state (state H1) uses the success or failure table for the second start port (for low probability mode) shown in FIG. 450 (a) , It is possible to win a short time grant.

If the lottery result of the winning lottery in the game round executed in the mode H1b during the special 2 remaining hold digestion in the low probability low support state (state H1) is not a big hit, that is, if the time reduction grant is won, the support mode is low. Transition from high-frequency support mode to high-frequency support mode. As a result, it shifts from the low probability low support state (state H1) to the previously described low probability high support state (state H5). The time-saving provision for winning in the mode H1b during special 2 remaining pending consumption is of a type in which the high-frequency support mode is continued as the support mode until the next big win is won. In addition, in place of the time-saving grant of the type in which the high-frequency support mode continues until the next jackpot is won, the type in which the high-frequency support mode continues until the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number (for example, 5 times) Shorter working hours may be given. The predetermined number of times is not necessarily limited to 5 times, and may be any number of times such as 1 time, 2 times, 6 times, or 8 times.

In summary, in the mode H6a during special 2 remaining pending digestion in high probability low support state (state H6), if you win the drop lottery, special 2 remaining pending digestion in low probability low support state (state H1) Transition to mode H1b, in the game round that won the fall, you will win a jackpot or a short time grant, and when you win a short time grant, from the low probability low support state (state H1) to the low probability high support state (State H5). In the low-probability support state (state H5), the high-frequency support mode is continued as the support mode until the next big win is won in the winning lottery, so that the next big win can be achieved in a state where it is difficult for the player to reduce the number of balls he has. A winning lottery can be repeated at a high frequency by entering game balls into the second starting port 34 until winning. For this reason, in the mode H6a during special 2 remaining pending digestion in the high probability low support state (state H6), if the fall lottery is won, Special 2 remaining pending digestion in the low probability low support state (state H1) By moving to the low probability height support state H5 via the mode H1b, the next probability variable jackpot is virtually guaranteed.

Returning to the description of the high-probability-low support state (state H6). In the winning lottery in the game round executed in the state H6a during the special 2 remaining pending digestion in the high probability low support state (state H6), when the jackpot is won, the jackpot won as shown in FIG. 451 (b) Since the type of is limited to the probability variable jackpot, the high probability low support state (state H6) is shifted to the opening and closing execution mode H3. If the lottery result of the winning lottery in the game cycle executed in the mode H6a during the digestion of special 2 remaining reserve in the high probability low support state (state H6) is lost, as long as the special 2 remaining reserve remains, special 2 Mode H6a in which remaining reserves are being consumed is continued, a winning lottery is performed with special 2 remaining reserves, and a game cycle is executed to notify the player of the lottery result of the winning lottery.

In the mode H6a during digestion of special 2 remaining reserve, when the number of game rounds corresponding to the number of special 2 remaining reserves has passed without winning the fall lottery and winning the winning lottery, special 2 remaining reserve Mode H6a during digestion shifts to mode H6b during left-handed stroke.

In the high-probability-low support state (state H6), the pachinko machine 10 executes a suggestive effect for prompting the player to hit left. Since the support mode is the low-frequency support mode in the high-probability and low-support state, the possibility that the result of the electric role open lottery executed upon passing through the through gate 35 will be the electric role open win is 1/ 233, which is extremely low, and the probability that the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 will be in the electric open state is extremely low. Therefore, in the high-probability-low support state (state H6), it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting port 34. Execute a suggestive production that encourages left-handed strikes instead of right-handed ones. In the state H6b of hitting left in the high-probability-low support state (state H6), the player makes the game ball flow down to the left side of the game area PA by executing the left-hand hitting according to the suggested effect, and the first start opening. A game ball is entered into 33. In the high-probability-low support state (state H6), if the player continues to hit to the right, the game ball will not enter the second starting port 34 and the game ball will be wasted.

In the left-handed mode H6b, when the game ball enters the first start hole 33, a winning lottery is performed based on the special information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the first start hole 33, and the winning lottery. A game round is executed to notify the player of the result of the lottery. Since the lottery mode is the high-probability mode in this game round, the fall lottery described above is executed. In addition, the winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball to the first start port 33 uses the hit/fail table (for high probability mode) for the first start port shown in FIG. 449 (b). will not be elected.

When the falling lottery in the game round executed in the left-handed mode H6b is won, the lottery mode is shifted from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode. That is, it moves from the high probability low support state (state H6) to the low probability low support state (state H1). It should be noted that the transition destination is the mode H1a during left hitting in the low probability low support state (state H1).

In the state H6b of hitting to the left in the high-probability low support state H6, if a jackpot is won in the winning lottery in the game round and the type of the jackpot won is the normal jackpot, it is awarded to the player after the game round ends. Opening and closing execution mode is executed as a special benefit. That is, the high-probability-low support state (state H6) shifts to the opening/closing execution mode (state H2).

In the left-handed mode H6b, if a jackpot is won in a winning lottery in a game round, and the type of the jackpot won is a probability variable jackpot, the open/close execution mode is provided as a benefit given to the player after the game round ends. executed. That is, the high-probability-low support state (state H6) shifts to the open/close execution mode (state H3).

In the left-handed mode H6b, the number of game rounds executed in the high-probability mode is ST times (10 times: high 5 times counted after shifting to the low probability support state H6), the lottery mode is shifted from the high probability mode to the low probability mode after the end of the game round. That is, it moves from the high probability low support state (state H6) to the low probability low support state (state H1). The transition destination is the mode H1a during left hitting in the low probability low support state (state H1).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the reason why the number of STs is set to 10 is that in the mode H6a during special 2 remaining hold digestion in the high probability low support state H6, the maximum number of game balls entering the second start port 34 This is because the number of game rounds corresponding to the reserved number (four times) can be executed, and one round is added as an allowance. That is, the number of times (4 times) corresponding to the maximum number of pending game balls entering the second start port 34 is added to the number of time-saving continuations (5 times), and 1 time is added as a margin for a total of 10. The number of times was taken as the number of STs. The reason why the margin is necessary will be explained below.

Let us consider a case where the number of times of ST is nine in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment. On top of that, when moving from the high-accuracy high support state H4 to the high-accuracy low support state H6, that is, in the high-accuracy high support state H4, the number of games after moving to the high-accuracy high support state H4 is the time-saving continuation number Consider a case where the number of reserved second start ports 34 reaches the maximum of four when the number of times (5) is reached. At the end of the game cycle in which the number of games reaches the number of time-saving continuations, the support mode shifts from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode, and the electric accessory 34a returns from the electric role open state to the closed state. A game ball may enter just before the accessory 34a closes. Then, by the time the entered game ball is detected by the detection sensor in the second starting port 34, the game round for the reserved information corresponding to the first one of the reserved number of the second starting port 34 is started. , it is determined that the reserved number of the second starting port 34 is reduced by 1 to 3, and the special information about the game ball entered immediately before the electric accessory 34a is closed becomes the reserved object for special 2. I have something to gain. Then, four game rounds are executed in the high-probability low support state H6, and when the number of game rounds executed in the high-probability low support state H6 reaches the ST number, the lottery mode is activated after the game round is completed. The high-probability mode is shifted to the low-probability mode, and the high-probability and low-probability support state H6 is shifted to the low-probability and low-support state H1. The special information about the game ball that entered immediately before remains as a special 2 remaining reservation, and the special 2 remaining reservation that is originally desired to be used in the high probability low support state H6 is special 2 in the low probability low support state H1. It will be used in mode H1b during residual pending digestion.

In the mode H1b of digesting special 2 remaining hold, as described above, even if the lottery result of the winning lottery in the game round executed in the mode H1b of digesting special 2 remaining hold is not a big win, it is possible to provide time saving. Since the player wins, the game shifts to the low probability high support state H5 in which the next big win is guaranteed. In other words, the special 2 remaining hold corresponding to the game ball entered just before the electric accessory 34a closes when transitioning from the high probability high support state H4 to the high probability low support state H6, and the special 2 remaining hold is being digested. It will shift to the low probability high support state H5 via the mode H1b. After reaching the ST number from the high-probability high support state H4 and returning to the low-probability low support state H1, by winning the time-saving grant with special 2 remaining reservation and shifting to the low-probability high support state H5, the next big hit The fact that you always win is a game feature that the designer did not originally assume.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the number of times of ST is set to 9, as described above, the game characteristics originally not expected by the designer will be exhibited, and the soundness of the game will be impaired. There was fear. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the number of times of ST is 10 times, immediately before the electric accessory 34a closes at the time of transition from the high-probability high support state H4 to the high-probability low support state H6 The special 2 remaining hold corresponding to the entered game ball will be used in the mode H6a during special 2 remaining hold digestion in the high probability low support state (state H6), and the special 2 remaining hold remains. , There is no return from the high probability low support state H6 to the low probability low support state H1. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, after reaching the ST number from the high probability high support state H4 and returning to the low probability low support state H1, the game flow of winning the time reduction grant with special 2 remaining hold Since it can be erased, the soundness of the game can be improved.

A comparison of advantages for the player in the four states H1, H4, H5 and H6 specified by the lottery mode and the support mode is as follows. Of the four states H1, H4, H5, and H6, the low probability low support state H1 is the least advantageous. Among the high probability high support state H4, the low probability high support state H5, and the high probability low support state H6, the high probability low support state H6 has the lowest advantage. The high-probability-low support state H6 shifts to the low-probability-low support state (state H1) when a falling lottery is won in the left-handed mode H6b, or when the number of times of game execution reaches the number of times of ST. is. Comparing the high probability high support state H4 and the low probability high support state H5, the low probability high support state H5 is more advantageous than the high probability high support state H4. The high probability high support state H4 is highly advantageous because the lottery mode is a high probability mode, but when the number of times the game is executed reaches 5 times, which is the number of time-saving continuations, the support mode changes to a low frequency support mode. Due to the transition, the advantage is low compared to the low probability high support state H5 in which the next probability variable jackpot is guaranteed.

Based on the transition of the game state described above, the player plays the game as follows. First, the player hits to the left in the low probability and low support state H1, and enters the game ball into the first start hole 33. - 特許庁At this time, the player expects to win a big win in the winning lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the first start hole 33, and furthermore, the player expects that the type of the big win is a probability variable big win. expect.

In the low-probability low support state H1, when the jackpot is won and the type of the jackpot is the normal jackpot, the player is disappointed that the normal jackpot is not the variable-probability jackpot, but leaves the low-probability low support state H1. The round game is repeated in the opened/closed execution mode H2. After all the round games are finished, it returns to the low probability low support state H1.

In the low-probability low support state H1, when a jackpot is won and the type of the jackpot is a variable-probability jackpot, the player rejoices at winning the variable-probability jackpot and opens and closes from the low-probability low support state H1. In execution mode H3, the round game is repeated. After all the round games are finished, the game shifts to a high-accuracy-high support state H4.

In the high-probability-high support state H4, the player hits to the right and enters the game ball into the second start hole 34. - 特許庁In the high-precision high support state H4, since the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, as described above, the electric accessory 34a of the second start port 34 is frequently opened, and the second start A game ball can be easily entered into the mouth 34.例文帳に追加At this time, the player expects to win a big win in a winning lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting hole 34.例文帳に追加When the lottery result of the winning lottery in the game cycle executed in the high-probability-high support state H4 is a big win, the type of the winning big win is limited to the variable-probability big win, so the player does not want to win the big win. Expect more.

In the high-probability and high-support state H4, the player expects to win the jackpot as described above, but the number of times of games after shifting to the high-probability and high support state H4 is the number of time-saving continuations 5. Expect to win the fall lottery in the game rounds before reaching the round (within 5 rounds). When the fall lottery is won in the game round within 5 times of the game after shifting to the high-probability high support state H4, the high-probability high support state H4 is shifted to the low-probability high support state H5, but first. As explained, the low probability high support state H5 is virtually guaranteed the next probability variable jackpot, so the player can play within 5 times after moving to the high probability high support state H4. In the game round, you will expect to win the fall lottery.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when shifting from the opening/closing execution mode H3 to the high-accuracy/high support state H4, the effect including the effect content notifying that the advantage for the player has increased is displayed in a pattern. Executed by device 41 . In the present embodiment, a specific character image and a character string such as "Enter the chance zone!" is output from the speaker 46. Then, a specific background image (hereinafter referred to as a first specific background image) indicating that the player has entered the chance zone is displayed. By visually recognizing the first specific background image, which means entering the chance zone, on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, the player can expect to win the above-described jackpot or the falling lottery. , will expect much more.

In the low fixed height support state H5, the player hits to the right and enters the game ball into the second start hole 34. - 特許庁In the low probability high support state H5, the winning lottery is executed, and when the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode based on winning the time reduction grant in the winning lottery, the high support continues until the next time explained above. state. Therefore, in the low-probability-high support state H5, the player can have a sense of security that the high-frequency support mode as the support mode will not end until the jackpot is won in the winning lottery and distributed to the variable-probability jackpot.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the pattern display device 41 executes an effect including the content of the effect notifying that a high advantage for the player is maintained in the low-probability support state H5. As the content of the effect to notify that the state of being highly advantageous is maintained, a specific background image (hereinafter referred to as a second specific background image) indicating that the player has entered the safe zone is displayed. That is. By visually recognizing the second specific background image on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, which means that the player has entered the safe zone, the player has a greater sense of security that the above-described high-frequency support mode will not end. It will be.

In the high-probability-high support state H4, when the number of games reaches 5 after shifting to the high-probability-high support state H4 without winning either the win lottery or the drop lottery, the fifth time. After the end of the game round, it moves from the high-probability high support state H4 to the high-probability low support state H6, but even in this high-probability low support state H6, the game round executed in the mode H6a during special 2 remaining pending digestion , the player expects to win not only the winning lottery but also the fall lottery. In the mode H6a during special 2 remaining pending digestion in the high probability low support state (state H6), when the fall lottery is won, from the high probability low support state (state H6) to the low probability low support state (state H1) 2 remaining pending digestion mode H1b, but as described above, in the low probability low support state (state H1), in the mode H1b during special 2 remaining pending digestion, the low probability low support state (state H1 ), by transitioning to the low-probability high support state H5 via the special 2 remaining pending digestion mode H1b, the next high-probability variable jackpot is virtually guaranteed, so the player can use the high-probability low support Winning the drop lottery is also expected in the game cycle based on the special 2 hold after shifting to the state (state H6).

In addition, as described above, in order to execute many games based on special 2 suspension in the high probability low support state (state H6), in the high probability high support state H4, after moving to the high probability high support state H4 At the timing when the number of games reaches the number of time-saving continuations (5 times), it is necessary to accumulate special 2 reservations so that the number of reservations of the second start port 34 becomes the maximum number of reservations. Therefore, in the high-accuracy-high support state H4, the player continuously hits to the right and plays the game so as not to stop the shooting of the game ball by the game ball shooting mechanism.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the state H6a of digesting special 2 remaining hold in the high probability low support state H6, the state with high advantage for the player is a limited game corresponding to the number of special 2 remaining holds. The pattern display device 41 executes the performance including the content of the performance notifying that it will be continued for the number of times. As the content of the effect, for example, a specific background image (hereinafter referred to as a third specific background image) that means entering the final battle zone and counting down the remaining number of the limited number of games is performed. ). By visually recognizing the third specific background image on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, the player expects to win the above-described jackpot or the falling lottery.

In the high-probability-low support state H6, while confirming the existence of the special 2 remaining reserve, the player hits left and enters the game ball into the first start hole 33. - 特許庁When the special 2 remaining hold disappears and the game cycle shifts from the mode H6a in which the special 2 remaining hold is being consumed to the mode H6b during left-handed hitting, the player enters the high-probability high support state before shifting to the high-probability low support state H6. From H4 to the state H6a of the special 2 remaining pending digestion in the high-probability low support state H6, he is disappointed that he did not win the jackpot and that he did not win the drop lottery. For this reason, before transitioning to the mode H6b during left-handed hitting, that is, in the mode H6a during the digestion of the T2 remaining reserve, neither the win lottery nor the drop lottery is won, and the execution is performed based on the T2 remaining hold. The player will have a sense of urgency, such as whether or not the game round to be played will end.

In the left-handed mode H6b,
i) win the drop lottery;
ii) to win a jackpot in a winning lottery;
iii) The number of game rounds executed after transitioning to the high probability low support state H6 reaches 5 times (10 times counted after transitioning to the high probability high support state H4),
The game round will be repeated until either of the conditions is satisfied. When the above i) or iii) is satisfied, it moves from the high probability low support state H6 to the low probability low support state H1. When the above condition ii) is satisfied, the opening/closing execution mode H2 or H3 corresponding to the distribution result of the distribution determination is entered.

In addition, since the lottery mode is a high-probability mode in the state H6b of hitting left in the high-probability-low support state H6, the player can still have expectations of whether or not he or she will win the jackpot. Then, the type of the jackpot becomes a probability variable jackpot, and the player can have a feeling of expectation that he wants to return to the high-probability and high-support state H4. In addition, a sense of urgency, such as the possibility of winning the drop lottery, is combined with the above-mentioned sense of anticipation.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the mode H6b during left-handed hitting in the high-probability-low support state H6, there is an effect content that notifies that the state in which the player is highly advantageous is about to disappear completely. The effect including is executed by the pattern display device 41. - 特許庁The content of the effect is, for example, to display a specific background image (hereinafter referred to as a fourth specific background image) indicating that the player is entering a pinch zone. By visually recognizing the fourth specific background image, which means entering the pinch zone, on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, the above-mentioned disappointment is further increased, and on the other hand, the above-mentioned high certainty It will have a greater sense of expectation to want to revive to the high support state H4.

In the aspect H1b of the special 2 remaining hold in the low probability low support state H1 that shifts when the fall lottery is won in the aspect H6a of the special 2 remaining hold digesting in the high probability low support state H6, to the special 2 remaining hold Expect to win a jackpot in a winning lottery executed based on Since the type of the jackpot won based on the special 2 balance reservation is limited to the variable probability jackpot, the player expects more to win the jackpot. However, even if you do not win the jackpot in the mode H1b during special 2 remaining pending digestion in the low-probability low support state H1, you will definitely win the time-saving grant, so it will move to the low-probability high support state H5, and finally Since the player can win the probability variable jackpot again, he/she can have a sense of security without being discouraged by not winning the jackpot.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the state H1b of the special 2 remaining hold digestion in the low probability low support state H1, there is no possibility that the advantage for the player will decrease, and the advantage for the player will be high. The pattern display device 41 executes an effect including the content of the effect for notifying the shift. Specifically, as a notification that there is no longer a risk that the player's advantage will decrease, the production of the final battle zone executed in the mode H6a during the special 2 remaining hold digestion in the high-probability low support state H6 is continued, In the battle performance as the performance of the final decisive battle zone, the specific character corresponding to the player side becomes superior, and the performance including the performance content indicating that the specific character is not defeated is executed. After that, as the content of the presentation notifying the transition to a state having a high advantage for the player, the presentation including one of the two types of content of the presentation is executed. One of the two performance contents is executed when a jackpot is won in a winning lottery and distributed to a variable probability jackpot in a mode H1b during special 2 remaining pending digestion in a low probability low support state H1, Including production content that a specific character wins. The other of the two types of performance contents is executed when the short-time provision is won in the winning lottery, and includes the performance contents of a temporary draw while the specific character remains dominant in the battle performance.

In the low-probability support state H5, which transitions when the time-saving grant is won in the mode H1b during the special 2 remaining pending digestion in the low-probability low support state H1, the specific character is dominant following the above-mentioned once-drawn production content. As it is, the content of the production that can not be settled is repeated. After that, in the low-probability support state H5, when winning the variable-probability jackpot, an effect including the content of the effect that the specific character wins is executed. By visually recognizing a series of effects including these effects on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, the player will have a greater sense of anticipation and a sense of security.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment having the game flow as described above, when a jackpot is won in the winning lottery in the low-probability and low-probability support state H1, and the state is shifted to the high-probability-high support state H4 by being distributed to the probability-variable jackpot. Next, let us consider the probability of winning the jackpot next time (hereinafter referred to as “continuation rate”).

In the high-accuracy high support state H4, when the number of times of games after shifting to the high-accuracy high support state H4 is within the number of times of time-saving continuation (5 times), when a fall lottery is won, the state is changed from the high-accuracy high support state H4. , it shifts to the low probability high support state H5 in which the next probability variable jackpot is guaranteed. In addition, in the high-accuracy low-support state H6, which has shifted from the high-accuracy high-support state H4 after the number of times of time-saving continuation (5 times) has passed, the falling lottery in the game rotation within the number of times corresponding to the number of special 2 remaining reservations When winning, from the mode H6a during special 2 remaining pending digestion in high probability low support state H6, via mode H1b during special 2 remaining pending digestion in low probability low support state H1, the next probability variable jackpot It shifts to the guaranteed low-probability-height support state H5. Therefore, in order to calculate the continuation rate in the high probability high support state H4, in addition to the case of winning the jackpot in the winning lottery (distribution is 100% probability variable jackpot), from the high probability high support state H4 to the low probability high support state H5 When shifting to, and from high probability high support state H4 to high probability low support state H6 via mode H6a during special 2 residual pending digestion in low probability low support state H1 to mode H1b during special 2 residual pending digestion It is necessary to consider the case of migration.

First, the probability A of shifting from the high probability high support state H4 to the high probability low support state H6 is calculated. Specifically, in one game round, the probability of not winning the falling lottery and not winning the jackpot in the winning lottery is calculated. is calculated as the above-mentioned probability A. Specifically, the probability A is calculated according to the following equation (1).

Probability A={(1-1/3)*(1-1/20)}^5...(1)

In formula (1), "1-1/3" is the probability of not winning the falling lottery in one game round. "1-1/20" is the probability of not winning a jackpot (distribution is 100% probability variable jackpot) in a winning lottery in one game round in the high probability mode. "5" is the number of continuous working hours. “^” is an operator representing exponentiation.

Next, the probability B of shifting from the mode H6a during the digestion of special 2 remaining hold to the mode H6b during left-handed hitting in the high probability high support state H4 is calculated. Specifically, in one game round, the probability of not winning in the falling lottery and not winning the jackpot in the winning lottery is calculated, and from this probability, all the times corresponding to the number of special 2 remaining reservations are also in the winning lottery. The probability of failing in the fall lottery is calculated as the probability B mentioned above. Specifically, the probability B is calculated according to the following equation (2).

Probability B={(1-1/3)*(1-1/20)}^4...(2)

In equation (2), "1-1/3" is the probability of not winning the falling lottery in one game round. "1-1/20" is the probability of not winning a jackpot (distribution is 100% probability variable jackpot) in a winning lottery in one game round in the high probability mode. "4" is the number of times corresponding to the number of special 2 remaining reservations, and here, the maximum is 4 times. “^” is an operator representing exponentiation.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, in the high probability low support state H6, since the aspect H6b in the middle of hitting left is configured, in this aspect H6b in the middle of hitting left, even when winning a probability variable jackpot need to consider. Therefore, the probability C is calculated as the probability of not winning the probability variable jackpot in the state H6b of hitting left in the high-probability low support state H6. Specifically, in one game round, the probability C is calculated as the probability of not winning the drop lottery, not winning the big win in the winning lottery, and even if a big win is made, it is not sorted to the probability variable big win. Here, it is assumed that the number of game rounds executed in the mode H6b during left-handed hitting is one. Specifically, the probability C is calculated according to the following equation (3).

Probability C = (1-1/3) x (1-1/20) x (1-1/2) ...(3)

In the formula (3), "1-1/3" is the probability of not winning the falling lottery in one game round. "1-1/20" is the probability of not winning a jackpot in a winning lottery in one game round in the high probability mode. "1-1/2" is the probability of not being distributed to the probability variable jackpot in the distribution table for the first starting port (see FIG. 451(a)).

The continuation rate is obtained by multiplying the above-described probability A by the probability B and the probability C, respectively, and subtracting the result from 1. That is, the continuation rate can be calculated according to the following equation (4).

Continuation rate = 1 - Probability A x Probability B x Probability C
=1-[{(1-1/3)*(1-1/20)}^5]*
[{(1-1/3)×(1-1/20)}^4]×
{(1-1/3)×(1-1/20)×(1-1/2)} ...(4)

Calculating the formula (4) gives a continuation rate of about 99.5%. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is a ream system that is completely different from conventional pachinko machines, and it is possible to realize a model with extremely high specifications for ream performance.

According to the pachinko machine 10 having the continuous playing performance, the following effects can also be obtained compared with the conventional pachinko machine. Conventionally, there are two types of pachinko machines, loop type and ST type, which have different techniques for continuing the jackpot. In the loop type pachinko machine, since it is confirmed that the next big win will be won in the high-probability and high-support state, the continuation rate is determined based on the distribution probability to the probability-variable big win when the big win is won. This means that in a loop-type pachinko machine, the continuation rate is determined based on the probability that, when the symbols are aligned, the aligned symbols are probability variable symbols (for example, "7" symbols). For this reason, in the high-probability-high support state, the player just watches the game rounds being digested, and only expects that when the symbols are aligned, the matching symbols are variable probability symbols. . On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as described above, in the high-accuracy and high-support state H4, the number of times the game is executed after the high-frequency support mode is started is the time-saving continuous number. A maximum of 4 times executed based on each game round within 5 times and the special 2 remaining hold after transitioning to the high probability low support state (state H6) (may be 5 times as described above) , the player can expect to win a falling lottery or a winning lottery. As a result, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a greater sense of expectation than the conventional loop type pachinko machine.

In the ST type pachinko machine, the continuation rate in the high-probability and high-support state is calculated by calculating the probability of not winning a jackpot in a winning lottery per game round, calculating the probability of losing in all ST times, and subtracting the probability of losing from 1. can be obtained by Therefore, in the ST type pachinko machine, the continuation rate is determined based on the probability of matching symbols (probability of winning a jackpot) and the number of times of ST. Therefore, in the ST type pachinko machine, as the number of game rounds executed in the high-quality and high support state progresses, the sense of urgency that the number of game rounds will reach the ST number without winning the jackpot is increased. can be granted to a person. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the period from the high-probability high support state (state H4) to the high-probability low support state (state H6), in addition to the jackpot winning (the symbols are aligned), the falling It is possible to impart a sense of urgency to the player as to whether or not the special 2 remaining reserve will be lost without winning the lottery. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, compared with the conventional ST type pachinko machine, it is possible to impart a greater sense of urgency to the player by adding the drop winning to the jackpot winning. can.

As a pachinko machine having other game properties, the following configuration is also conceivable. When a small win is won in a winning lottery (a small win is won with a high probability) in a specific advantageous state that is advantageous to the player before the number of games played after shifting to that advantageous state reaches a predetermined number. , a configuration in which the open/close execution mode (round game) is continued when a game ball enters the V winning hole. According to this configuration, since the game cycle to be executed from the advantageous state to the opening/closing execution mode is completed in a short time, the opening/closing execution mode is repeated at short intervals, and the gambling property is excessively increased. I had a problem. On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the route that shifts from the high-probability support state H4 to the open/close execution mode H3, it is guaranteed that the final jackpot will be won, and the lottery mode is low. Since it is possible to go through the low probability high support state H5 in which the winning lottery can be repeatedly performed in the probability mode, it is possible to take a sufficient time to shift from the high probability high support state H4 to the opening/closing execution mode H3. For this reason, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from being excessively increased due to repetition of the open/close execution mode at short intervals. In addition, by taking a sufficient amount of time, it is possible to obtain a secondary effect that various effects can be performed. These effects cannot be achieved even by the structure of the pachinko machine having other game characteristics.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment exhibits superior effects as compared with various types of conventional pachinko machines.

<<10-5>> Various processes executed in the main controller:
Next, an example of specific control for executing the above-described processing in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described. The processing executed in the main controller 60 will be described first, and then the processing executed in the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

In order to advance the game of each game cycle, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing. These processes are described below. In addition to timer interrupt processing and normal processing, the MPU 62 executes NMI interrupt processing that is activated by the input of a power failure signal, but the description of these processing will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 456 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. As described above, the timer interrupt process is started periodically (for example, every 2 msec) by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 .

In step Su0101, reading processing of various detection sensors 67a to 67f is executed. That is, it reads the states of the various detection sensors 67a to 67f connected to the main controller 60, determines the states of the sensors, and saves the detection information (entrance detection information). After that, the process proceeds to step Su0102.

In step Su0102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . After that, the process proceeds to step Su0103.

In step Su0103, the values of the hit random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, fall random number counter CF, and electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to each of the winning random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the falling random number counter CF, and the electric accessory opening counter C4, and each of these counter values reaches the maximum value. If so, they are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1 to C4 and CF are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM64. After that, the process proceeds to step Su0104. It should be noted that the fluctuation type counter CS updates its value in the normal processing (FIG. 460) described later.

In step Su0104, the ball entry processing for the starting opening accompanying the ball entering the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34 is executed. The details of the ball entry process for the start opening in step Su0104 will be described later. After executing step Su0104, the process proceeds to step Su0105.

In step Su0105, a through ball entry process associated with the ball entering the through gate 35 is executed. The details of the entering ball processing for through in step Su0105 will be described later. After executing step Su0105, the MPU 62 ends the timer interrupt processing.

<Entering ball processing for the starting port>
Next, the ball entry process for the start opening will be described. The ball entry process for the starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (Fig. 456: Su0104).

FIG. 457 is a flow chart showing ball entry processing for the start opening. In step Su0201, it is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first starting port 33 whether or not the game ball has entered the first starting port 33 (starting ball). In step Su0201, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the first start port 33 (Su0201: YES), the process proceeds to step Su0202, and the prize ball for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls set command. After that, the process proceeds to step Su0203.

In step Su0203, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has entered the first start hole 33. FIG. After that, the process proceeds to step Su0204.

In step Su0204, the value stored in the reserved number storage area of the first reservation area Ra is read out (hereinafter also referred to as the first suspended start number RaN), and the first suspended start number RaN will be described later. Set as a target for processing. The first start suspension number RaN indicates the number of suspensions based on the ball entering the first start hole 33 . After that, the process proceeds to step Su0209.

In step Su0201, if it is determined that the game ball has not entered the first start port 33 (Su0201: NO), proceed to step Su0205, whether or not the game ball entered the second start port 34 is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second starting port 34 .

In step Su0205, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34 (Su0205: YES), the process proceeds to step Su0206, and the prize ball for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out two game balls set command. After that, the process proceeds to step Su0207. On the other hand, in step Su0205, when it is determined that the game ball has not entered the second starting hole 34 (Su0205: NO), the ball entering process for this starting hole ends.

In step Su0207, external signal setting processing is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that the game ball has entered the second starting port . After that, the process proceeds to step Su0208.

In step Su0208, the value stored in the reserved number storage area of the second reservation area Rb, that is, the start reservation number RbN (hereinafter also referred to as the second start reservation number RbN) is read, and the second start reservation number RbN will be described later. Set as a target for processing. The second start suspension number RbN indicates the number of suspensions based on the ball entering the second start opening 34 . After that, the process proceeds to step Su0209.

In step Su0209, it is determined whether or not the number of start suspensions N (RaN or RbN) set in step Su0204 or step Su0208 is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment). In step Su0209, if the start suspension number N is not less than the upper limit value (Su0209: NO), the ball-entering process for this starting port ends.

On the other hand, in step Su0209, if the number N of pending starts is less than the upper limit (Su0209: YES), proceed to step Su0210, add 1 to the number N of pending starts in the corresponding reserved area, and then proceed to step Su0211. , adds 1 to the value stored in the total pending number storage area (hereinafter referred to as the total pending number CRN). The total pending number CRN indicates the sum of the first pending start number RaN and the second pending start number RbN. After that, the process proceeds to step Su0212.

In step Su0212, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3 and falling random number counter CF updated in step Su0103 (Fig. 456) is stored in the first memory among the free storage areas of the corresponding reservation area. area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the pending number to which 1 is added in step Su0210. Specifically, when the first start suspension number RaN is set as a processing target, the jackpot random number counter C1 updated in step Su0103, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the falling random number counter CF Each value is stored in the first storage area among the empty storage areas of the first reservation area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start suspension number RaN to which 1 is added in step Su0210. In addition, when the second start pending number RbN is set as a processing target, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3 and falling random number counter CF updated in step Su0103 , in the first memory area of the free memory areas of the second reserve area Rb, that is, in the memory area corresponding to the second start reserve number RbN to which 1 is added in step Su0210. After executing step Su0212, the process proceeds to step Su0213.

In step Su0213, the first determination process is executed. In the first determination process, based on the information (holding information) of each value of the winning random number counter C1, the big winning type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the falling random number counter CF, the success or failure determination result of the winning lottery (lottery result), the jackpot type, presence/absence of reach, and the success or failure result of the drop lottery before the holding information is subject to the winning lottery (judgment processing) by the main controller 60. The details of the first determination process will be described later. After executing step Su0213, the process proceeds to step Su0214.

In step Su0214, a process of setting pending commands is executed. Specifically, the judgment result of the previous judgment process executed based on the information (holding information) of each value of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the falling random number counter CF is used as a pending command. set.

The pending command indicates that the ball has entered the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34 and the judgment result (first judgment information) of the first judgment process based on the holding information acquired based on the entry, This is a command for causing the sub-side control device to confirm the pending information before the main control device 60 becomes a target of the winning lottery. The hold command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 460: step Su0503) of the normal process, which will be described later.

In addition, when the sound emission control device 90 receives the hold command transmitted based on the ball entering the first starting port 33, the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 is displayed on hold. A command is sent to the display control device 100 to make the change corresponding to the increase. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first reserved display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of reserved items. On the other hand, when receiving the hold command transmitted based on the ball entering the second starting port 34, the sound emission control device 90 displays the second hold display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41. A command is sent to the display control device 100 to make the change corresponding to the increase. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second reserved display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of reserved characters.

After executing step Su0214, the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 terminates the ball-entering process for the starting opening.

<First determination process>
Next, the preceding determination processing will be described. The first determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (Fig. 457: Su0207) of the ball entry process for the starting opening.

FIG. 458 is a flowchart showing the first determination process. As described above, the first determination process, based on the pending information, determines whether the winning lottery is successful, determines the type of jackpot, determines whether reach occurs or not, determines whether the fall lottery is successful or not. This process is executed before the winning lottery by the main controller 60 is made.

In step Su0301, the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the storage area by the ball entering the starting hole in the ball entering process for the starting hole (FIG. 457) is grasped. After that, the process proceeds to step Su0302, and the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery due to this ball entry is executed as a game round is determined. Specifically, the judgment result of the previous judgment process executed by the ball entry before the current ball entry is read from the corresponding storage area, and whether or not there is a probability variable jackpot that occurs before the winning lottery due to the current ball entry Also, the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery due to the current ball entry is executed as a game round is determined by grasping the presence or absence of winning in the falling lottery.

In step Su0302, when it is determined that the lottery mode is the low-probability mode at the time when the winning lottery due to the current ball entry is executed as a game round, (Su0302: YES), the process proceeds to step Su0303, and the success/failure table is stored. The success/failure table (for the low-probability mode) for the first starting port stored in the area 63a is referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step Su0308, and as a result of referring to the success/failure table for the first starting port (for low probability mode), it is determined whether or not the value information of the hit random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to a big win. .

On the other hand, in step Su0302, when it is determined that the lottery mode is not the low probability mode at the time when the winning lottery due to this entry is executed as a game round (Su0302: NO), the process proceeds to step Su0304, and the current entry The value of the fall random number counter CF stored in the storage area is grasped by the sphere. After that, the process advances to step Su0305 to refer to the fall propriety determination table stored in the fall lottery table storage area 63d to determine whether or not the fall lottery has been won.

In step Su0305, when it is determined that the falling lottery is won (Su0305: YES), the process proceeds to step Su0306, the falling winning information is stored in the first determination process result storage area 64h, and the process proceeds to step Su0303. In step Su0303, as described above, the success/failure table (for the low-probability mode) for the first start opening stored in the success/failure table storage area 63a is referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step Su0308, and as a result of referring to the success/failure table (for low probability mode) for the first starting port, it is determined whether or not the value of the hit random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to a big win.

In step Su0305, when it is determined that the falling lottery has not been won (Su0305: NO), the process proceeds to step Su0307, and the success/failure table for the first starting port (for high probability mode) is referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step Su0308, and as a result of referring to the success/failure table for the first start port (for high probability mode), it is determined whether or not the value of the winning random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to the big winning.

In step Su0308, if it is determined that the value of the hit random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to a big hit (Su0308: YES), the process proceeds to step Su0309, and is stored in the storage area by the ball entering the starting port this time. The value of the jackpot type counter C2 is grasped. After that, the process proceeds to step Su0310, and the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 63b is referred to. Specifically, when the jackpot type counter C2 to be sorted this time is obtained based on the ball entering the first start port 33, refer to the first start port sort table. , the distribution table for the second starting opening is referred to when the information is acquired based on the ball entering the second starting opening 34 . After executing step Su0310, the process proceeds to step Su0311.

In step Su0311, as a result of referring to the distribution table, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot type counter C2 grasped this time corresponds to the variable probability jackpot. In step Su0311, when it is determined that it corresponds to the probability variable jackpot (Su0311: YES), the process proceeds to step Su0312, and the probability variable jackpot information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h. After that, the preceding determination process is terminated. On the other hand, in step Su0311, when it is determined that it does not correspond to the variable probability jackpot (Su0311: NO), the process proceeds to step Su0313, and the normal jackpot information is stored in the first determination processing result storage area 64h. After that, the preceding determination process is terminated.

In step Su0308, if it is determined that the value of the hit random number counter C1 grasped this time does not correspond to the big hit (Su0308: NO), proceed to step Su0314, The value of the stored reach random number counter C3 is grasped. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Su0315, and the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c is referred to. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Su0316, and as a result of referring to the reach determination table, it is determined whether or not the value of the reach random number counter C3 grasped this time corresponds to the occurrence of reach.

In step Su0316, when it is determined that reach occurrence is supported (Su0316: YES), the process proceeds to step Su0317, and reach occurrence information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h. After that, the preceding determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Su0316 that it does not correspond to reach occurrence (Su0316: NO), the first determination process is terminated.

<Entering ball processing for through>
Next, the ball entry processing for through will be described. The through ball entry process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (Fig. 456: Su0105).

FIG. 459 is a flow chart showing the ball entry processing for through. In step Su0401, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the through gate 35 or not. In step Su0401, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the through gate 35 (Su0401: YES), proceed to step Su0402, whether the accessory holding number SN is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) determine whether or not Incidentally, the accessory reserved number SN is a value indicating the number of balls entered into the through gate 35 reserved for performing the electric accessory open lottery. In this embodiment, the maximum value of the number SN of reserved accessory items is four. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Su0401 that the game ball has not entered the through gate 35 (Su0401: NO), this through ball entering process is terminated.

In step Su0402, when it is determined that it is less than the upper limit value (less than 4) of the reserved role number SN (Su0402: YES), the process proceeds to step Su0403, and 1 is added to the reserved role number SN. After that, the process proceeds to step Su0404.

In step Su0404, the value of the electric accessary product open counter C4 updated in step Su0103 (FIG. 456) is stored in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the electrician holding area 64d of the RAM64. After that, the through ball entry processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Su0402 that the value of the reserved role number SN is not less than the upper limit (Su0402: NO), that is, if it is determined that the value of the reserved role number SN is equal to or greater than the upper limit, Without storing the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4, the ball entry processing for through is terminated.

<Normal processing>
Next, normal processing will be described. The normal processing is processing started by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 when the power switch 88 is switched from the off state to the on state (hereinafter also referred to as "power on"). In normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed.

FIG. 460 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step Su0501, start-up processing is executed. Specifically, initialization of each control device upon power-on, determination of validity of data stored in the RAM 64, and the like are executed. After that, the process proceeds to step Su0502.

In step Su0502, a startup command is set. The start-up command is a command for causing each sub-side control device to start a demonstration video when the power is turned on. After that, the process proceeds to step Su0503.

In step Su0503, output data such as the start-up command set in step Su0502 and the command set in the timer interrupt process or the normal process executed last time are sent to each sub-side control device. Specifically, the presence or absence of the prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 70 . In addition, when commands related to effects such as a start-up command, a variation command, a type command, and a first hold command are set, they are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . After executing step Su0503, the process proceeds to step Su0504.

In step Su0504, the fluctuation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the fluctuation type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . After that, the process proceeds to step Su0505.

In step Su0505, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step Su0506. In step Su0506, game round control processing for controlling the game in each game round is executed. In the game round control processing, a winning lottery, setting of variable display of symbols by the symbol display device 41, display control of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b, and the like are performed. Details of the game round control process will be described later. After executing step Su0506, the process proceeds to step Su0507.

In step Su0507, a game state transition process is executed to shift the game state. By executing the game state transition process, the game state shifts to an opening/closing execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, and the like. Details of the game state transition processing will be described later. After that, the process proceeds to step Su0508.

In step Su0508, an electric support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 34a provided at the second starting port 34 is executed. In the electric role support process, it is determined whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a. The details of the electronic support process will be described later. After that, the process proceeds to step Su0509.

In step Su0509, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has passed from the start of the current normal processing (strictly speaking, the start of the command output processing in step Su0503). That is, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the next normal process. In step Su0509, if it is determined that the predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed since the start of the normal processing this time (Su0509: NO), in steps Su0510 and Su0511, until the execution timing of the next normal processing Within the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated. Specifically, in step Su0510, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . Further, in step Su0511, 1 is added to the fluctuation type counter CS, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . On the other hand, in step Su0509, when it is determined that the predetermined time (4 msec) has elapsed since the start of the normal processing this time (Su0509: YES), the process returns to step Su0503, and each process from step Su0503 to step Su0508 is performed. Execute.

In addition, since the execution time of each process from step Su0503 to step Su0508 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using the remaining time, the values of these counters can be randomly updated.

<Game Round Control Processing>
Next, game round control processing will be described. The game round control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of normal process (Fig. 460: Su0506).

FIG. 461 is a flow chart showing game round control processing. In step Su0601, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON when the game state is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode in the game state transition processing described later, and turned OFF when the opening/closing execution mode is ended in the game state transition processing. Note that the opening/closing execution mode may be an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player.

In step Su0601, when it is determined that the open/close execution mode is in progress (Su0601: YES), this game round control process is terminated without executing any of the processes after step Su0602. That is, when the open/close execution mode is in progress, the game cycle is not started regardless of whether or not a ball is entered into the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34 . On the other hand, if it is determined in step Su0601 that the open/close execution mode is not in progress (Su0601: NO), the process proceeds to step Su0602.

In step Su0602, it is determined whether or not the special figure unit 37 is being displayed in a variable manner. Specifically, it is determined whether or not one of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b provided in the special figure unit 37 is in the process of variable display. This determination is made by determining whether or not the special figure variation displaying flag in the special figure variation displaying flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The special figure variable display flag is turned ON when one of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b is to start the variable display, and is turned OFF when the variable display is finished.

In step Su0602, when it is determined that the special figure unit 37 is not displayed in a variable manner (Su0602: NO), the process proceeds to step Su0603.

In step Su0603, a variation start process for starting the variation display in the special figure unit 37 and the variation display in the symbol display device 41 is executed. The details of the fluctuation start process will be described later. After executing step Su0603, this game round control process is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Su0602, when it is determined that the special figure unit 37 is in the process of variable display (Su0602: YES), the process proceeds to step Su0604.

In step Su0604, a variation end process for ending the variation display in the special figure unit 37 and the variation display in the symbol display device 41 is executed. The details of the fluctuation end processing will be described later. After executing step Su0604, this game round control process is terminated.

<Variation start processing>
Next, fluctuation start processing will be described. The fluctuation start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game round control process (Fig. 461: Su0603).

FIG. 462 is a flowchart showing fluctuation start processing. In step Su0701, it is determined whether or not the total pending number CRN exceeds "0". When the total pending number CRN is less than or equal to "0", it means that the pending start number for both the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 is "0". Therefore, when it is determined in step Su0701 that the total pending number CRN is equal to or less than "0" (Su0701: NO), this fluctuation start processing is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Su0701 that the total pending number CRN exceeds "0" (Su0701: YES), the process proceeds to step Su0702.

In step Su0702, hold information shift processing for setting the hold information stored in the first reserve area Ra or the second reserve area Rb to the state after the start of fluctuation is executed, and the process proceeds to step Su0703. Details of the pending information shift process will be described later.

In step Su0703, fall judgment processing including processing when winning the fall lottery is performed. Details of the fall determination process will be described later. Then, the process proceeds to step Su0704.

In step Su0704, a winning determination process including a process when a big win is won in a winning lottery is performed. The details of the hit determination process will be described later. After executing step Su0704, the process proceeds to step Su0705.

In step Su0705, variable time setting processing is executed. The variable time setting process is the time required for the current game cycle in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b based on the game state, the presence or absence of the jackpot and the time saving provision, and the presence or absence of the reach occurrence. This is the processing for setting the variable time. Details of the variable time setting process will be described later. After executing step Su0705, the process proceeds to step Su0706.

In step Su0706, a variation command is set. The variable command indicates whether the current game cycle is related to the hold information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 or based on the ball entering the second starting port 34. is included, and information on the presence or absence of reach and information on the fluctuation time set in step Su0705 are included. After executing step Su0706, the process proceeds to step Su0707.

At step Su0707, a type command is set. The type command includes information on the presence or absence of a big hit, the presence or absence of time saving, and the result of distribution determination. In other words, the type command includes information on whether or not you have won a jackpot in a winning lottery, information on whether or not you have won a time-saving grant in a winning lottery, and information on the type of jackpot, such as 8R probability variable jackpot information, 8R normal It contains jackpot information, 16R probability variable jackpot information, or loss result information.

The variation command and type command set at steps Su0706 and Su0707 are sent to the sound emission control device 90 at step Su0503 in the normal process (FIG. 460). The sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect in the game round based on the received variation command and the type command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the effect is executed. After executing step Su0707, the process proceeds to step Su0708.

In step Su0708, the symbol display portion corresponding to the current game round out of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b is caused to start the variable display of symbols. Specifically, when the second symbol display portion flag of the RAM 64 is not ON, the first symbol display portion 37a is specified as the symbol display portion corresponding to the current game round, and the variable display is started, When the second pattern display portion flag is ON, the second pattern display portion 37b is specified as the pattern display portion corresponding to the current game round, and the variable display is started. After executing step Su0708, the process proceeds to step Su0709.

In step Su0709, the special figure fluctuation display flag stored in the special figure fluctuation display flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned ON. After executing step Su0709, this fluctuation start process is terminated.

<Holding information shift processing>
Next, the pending information shift process will be described. The hold information shift process is executed by MPU 62 of main controller 60 as a subroutine of fluctuation start process (Fig. 462: Su0703).

FIG. 463 is a flowchart showing pending information shift processing. In step Su0801, it is determined whether or not the second start pending number RbN stored in the pending number storage area of the second reserve area Rb is greater than zero.

In step Su0801, if it is determined that the second start reservation number RbN is not greater than 0 (that is, is 0) (step Su0801: NO), step Su0802 to step Su0807 reservation information shift processing for the first reservation area to run. On the other hand, in step Su0801, when it is determined that the second start reservation number RbN is greater than 0 (step Su0801: YES), the second reservation area for the reservation information shift process of step Su0808~step Su0813 is executed. As a result, when the reservation information is stored in the second reservation area Rb corresponding to the second starting port 34, the reservation information shift process for the second reservation area of steps Su0808 to step Su0813 is preferentially executed. will be

In step Su0802, after subtracting 1 from the first start-up reservation number RaN in the first reservation area Ra, the process proceeds to step Su0803 to subtract 1 from the total reservation number CRN. After that, the process proceeds to step Su0804. In step Su0804, the data stored in the first area of the first reservation area Ra is moved to the execution area AE. After that, the process proceeds to step Su0805.

In step Su0805, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first reservation area Ra is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the upper area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After executing step Su0805, the process proceeds to step Su0806.

In step Su0806, if the second pattern display portion flag of the various flag storage area 64g is ON, the flag is turned OFF, and if not ON, the state is maintained. The second pattern display portion flag is information for specifying which of the first pattern display portion 37a and the second pattern display portion 37b is the target for starting the variable display this time. After that, the process proceeds to step Su0807.

In step Su0807, a shift command is set. The shift time command is a command including information for making the sound emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, recognize that the data in the reserved area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63, information indicating that the reservation area to which the data is to be shifted this time corresponds to the first reservation area Ra, that is, the information corresponding to the first start port 33 A shift-time command including information indicating that the shift-time command is included is selected, and the selected shift-time command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . After that, the hold information shift process is terminated.

The shift time command set in step Su0807 is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step Su0503 in the normal process (FIG. 460). The sound emission control device 90 transmits to the display control device 100 a command for changing the display in the first reservation display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations, based on the received shift command. do. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first reserved display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the decrease in the reserved number.

When it is determined in step Su0801 that the second start suspension number RbN is greater than 0 (step Su0801: YES), the process proceeds to step Su0808.

In step Su0808, 1 is subtracted from the second starting reservation number RbN in the second reservation area Rb. After that, the process proceeds to step Su0809. In step Su0809, 1 is subtracted from the total number of reservations CRN, and the process proceeds to step Su0810 to move the data stored in the first area of the second reservation area Rb to the execution area AE. After that, the process proceeds to step Su0811.

In step Su0811, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second reservation area Rb is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the upper area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After executing step Su0811, the process proceeds to step Su0812.

In step Su0812, if the second pattern display flag in the various flag storage area 64g is not ON, the flag is turned ON, and if it is ON, that state is maintained. After that, the process proceeds to step Su0813.

In step Su0813, a shift command is set. The shift time command is a command including information for making the sound emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, recognize that the data in the reserved area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63, the information indicating that the reservation area to which the data is to be shifted this time corresponds to the second reservation area Rb, that is, the information corresponding to the second start port 34 A shift-time command including information indicating that the shift-time command is included is selected, and the selected shift-time command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . After that, the hold information shift process is terminated.

The shift command set in step Su0813 is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step Su0503 of the normal process (FIG. 460). Based on the received shift time command, the sound emission control device 90 sends a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the second reservation display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations. Send. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second reserved display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the reserved number.

<Fall judgment processing>
Next, fall determination processing will be described. The fall determination process is executed by MPU 62 of main controller 60 as a subroutine of fluctuation start process (Fig. 462: Su0706).

FIG. 464 is a flowchart showing fall determination processing. In step Su0901, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. In step Su0901, when it is determined that the mode is the high probability mode (Su0901: YES), the process proceeds to step Su0902.

In step Su0902, the drop lottery success/failure determination is executed with reference to the drop lottery success/failure table. Specifically, the value of the fall random number counter CF stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is the value set as winning in the fall lottery success/failure table (see FIG. 452) in the fall lottery table storage area 63d. Determine whether or not they match. In the following step Su0903, when the result of the success/failure determination in step Su0902 is that the drop lottery is won (Su0903: YES), the process proceeds to step Su0904.

At step Su0904, the high probability mode flag is turned off. After that, the flow advances to step Su0905 to set a fall command. The drop command is a command for notifying the sound emission control device 90 that the drop lottery has been won and the lottery mode has changed from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode. After executing step Su0905, the fall determination process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not in the high probability mode in step Su0901 (Su0901: NO), or if the result of the success/failure determination in step Su0903 is not won in the fall lottery (Su0903: NO), this fall determination process is immediately performed. finish.

<Hit determination processing>
Next, hit determination processing will be described. The hit determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the fluctuation start process (Fig. 462: Su0707).

FIG. 465 is a flowchart showing hit determination processing. At step Su1001, it is determined whether or not the second pattern display section flag of the RAM 64 is ON. When it is determined in step Su1001 that the second symbol display flag is not ON (Su1001: NO), the process proceeds to step Su1002 to determine whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

In step Su1002, when it is determined that the mode is the high probability mode (Su1002: YES), the process advances to step Su1003, and the success/failure determination is performed with reference to the success/failure table for the first starting port (for high probability mode). Specifically, the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is the jackpot winning in the success/failure table (for high probability mode) for the first starting port shown in FIG. 449(b). Determines whether or not it matches the value set as After that, the process proceeds to step Su1008.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Su1002 that the mode is not the high probability mode (Su1002: NO), the process proceeds to step Su1004, and the validity determination is performed by referring to the validity table for the first starting port (for the low probability mode). Specifically, the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is set as a jackpot winning in the success/failure table (for low probability mode) for the first starting port shown in FIG. 449(a). Determines whether or not it matches the value After that, the process proceeds to step Su1008.

In step Su1001, when it is determined that the second symbol display flag is ON (Su1001: YES), the process proceeds to step Su1005 to determine whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

In step Su1005, when it is determined that the mode is the high probability mode (Su1005: YES), the process proceeds to step Su1006, and the success/failure determination is performed by referring to the success/failure table for the second starting port (for high probability mode). Specifically, the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is the jackpot winning in the success/failure table (for high probability mode) for the second starting port shown in FIG. 450(b). Determines whether or not it matches the value set as After that, the process proceeds to step Su1006.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Su1005 that the mode is not the high-probability mode (Su1005: NO), the process proceeds to step Su1007, and the success/failure determination is performed by referring to the success/failure table for the second starting port (for the low-probability mode). Specifically, the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is set as a jackpot winning in the success/failure table (for low probability mode) for the second starting port shown in FIG. 450(a). Determines whether or not it matches the value After that, the process proceeds to step Su1008.

In step Su1008, it is determined whether or not the result of the success/failure determination (hit lottery) in step Su1003, step Su1004, step Su1006, or step Su1007 is a big hit. In step Su1008, when the result of the success/failure determination is a big hit (Su1008: YES), the process proceeds to step Su1009.

At step Su1009, it is determined whether or not the second pattern display section flag of the RAM 64 is ON. In step Su1009, if it is determined that the second symbol display unit flag is not ON (Su1009: NO), proceed to step Su1010, refer to the distribution table for the first start port (Fig. 451(a)). to determine the allocation. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is included in the numerical range of the 8R probability variable jackpot or the numerical range of the 8R normal jackpot.

On the other hand, in step Su1009, when it is determined that the second pattern display flag is ON (Su1009: YES), the process proceeds to step Su1011, and the distribution table for the second start port (FIG. 451(b)) is displayed. Make a distribution decision by referring to it. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is included in the numerical range of the 16R probability variable jackpot. In the distribution table for the second starting port of the present embodiment, since the distribution result is only one type of 16R probability variable jackpot, the result of the above determination is always a 16R probability variable jackpot. After executing the process of step Su1010 or step Su1011, the process proceeds to step Su1012.

In step Su1012, the flag (jackpot flag) corresponding to the type of jackpot distributed in step Su1010 or step Su1011 is turned ON. Specifically, when it is an 8R probability variable jackpot, the 8R probability variable jackpot flag is turned ON, when it is an 8R normal jackpot, the 8R normal jackpot flag is turned ON, and when it is a 16R probability variable jackpot, the 16R probability variable jackpot flag is turned on. Turn ON. After executing step Su1012, the process proceeds to step Su1013.

In step Su1013, the process of setting the stop result for the jackpot is executed. Specifically, in the current game turn in which the big win is won, it is set whether the variable display is to be ended in the state in which the stop result is displayed in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b. This is a process for Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the big win stored in the stop result table storage area 63f, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the type of the big win distributed in step Su1010 or step Su1011 is acquired. and stores the address information in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After executing step Su1013, the real hit determination process is terminated.

In step Su1008, when the result of the winning lottery in step Su1003, step Su1004, step Su1006, or step Su1007 is not a jackpot winning (Su1008: NO), the process proceeds to step Su1014.

In step Su1014, it is determined whether or not the result of the success/failure determination (hit lottery) in step Su1007 is the time saving grant winning (winning the time saving grant). In step Su1014, when the result of the success/failure determination is the time saving grant winning (Su1014: YES), the process proceeds to step Su1015.

In step Su1015, the time reduction provision flag is turned ON. Specifically, the time reduction provision flag of various flag storage areas 64g of RAM64 is turned ON. A time saving provision flag is a flag which shows having won in time saving provision. After executing step Su1015, the process proceeds to step Su1016.

In step Su1016, the process of setting the stop result for time saving provision is executed. Specifically, it is a process for setting which stop result is displayed in the second symbol display portion 37b in the current game round in which the time saving grant is won and the variable display is ended. . Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for time saving in the stop result table storage area 63f, the stop result data corresponding to the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the stop result table storage area 63f Address information is acquired, and the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After executing step Su1016, the real winning determination process is terminated.

In step Su1014, when the result of the success/failure determination in step Su1007 is not time saving grant election (Su1014:NO), it progresses to step Su1017.

In step Su1017, the ready-to-win determination table is referenced to determine whether or not the ready-to-win occurs in the game round. Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is the value set as the occurrence of reach in the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c. It is determined whether or not they match. After that, the process proceeds to step Su1018.

In step Su1018, if the result of the reach determination in step Su1017 is that reach occurs in the game round (Su1018: YES), the process proceeds to step Su1019, and the reach occurrence flag is turned ON. Specifically, the reach occurrence flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned ON. After executing step Su1019, the process proceeds to step Su1020.

On the other hand, in step Su1018, if the result of reach determination in step Su1017 is that reach does not occur in the game round (Su1018: NO), the process proceeds to step Su1020 without executing step Su1019.

In step Su1020, a process of setting a stop result for failure is executed. Specifically, in the current game turn that results in a loss, the variable display is set to end in a state in which the stop result is displayed in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b. processing. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for failure in the stop result table storage area 63f, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is obtained. It acquires and stores the address information in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After executing step Su1020, the real hit determination process ends.

<Variation time setting process>
Next, the variable time setting process will be described. The variable time setting process is executed by MPU 62 of main controller 60 as a subroutine of variable start process (Fig. 462: Su0708).

FIG. 466 is a flowchart showing variable time setting processing. In step Su1101, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is obtained. After that, the process proceeds to step Su1102.

In step Su1102, a process of specifying a fluctuation time table is executed. The fluctuation time table is data in tabular form having data elements of fluctuation time information (variation time information), which is the time from when the pattern starts to stop until it stops, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS. In the variable time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63, various types of variable time tables are stored according to the game state, the presence or absence of the jackpot and time saving provision, and the presence or absence of reach occurrence. In step S1102, one variable time table is identified from these variable time tables. Specifically, based on the high probability mode flag and the high frequency support mode flag, the current gaming state is low probability low support state, high probability high support state, low probability high support state, high probability low support state It is determined whether it is in any of the above, the result of the determination, the result of the determination of whether or not there is a jackpot or time saving, and the determination result of the reach determination that determines whether or not the reach occurs. One variable time table is specified from the variable time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63 based on the above. After executing step Su1102, the process proceeds to step Su1103.

In step Su1103, by referring to the fluctuation time table identified in step Su1102, fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS obtained in step Su1101 is obtained. After executing step Su1103, the process proceeds to step Su1104.

In step Su1104, the variable time information acquired in step Su1103 is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM64. After that, the variable time setting process is terminated.

<Variation end processing>
Next, the fluctuation end processing will be described. The fluctuation end process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game round control process (Fig. 461: Su0604).

FIG. 467 is a flowchart showing fluctuation end processing. In step Su1201, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the current game round has elapsed. As described above, the variation time is the time from when the symbol row starts to vary until all the symbol rows stop, and is part of the unit game time. Specifically, in step Su1201, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable time information stored in the variable time counter area (various counter area 64f) of the RAM 64 has become "0". The value of the variable time information is set in the aforementioned variable time setting process (FIG. 466). The value of this set variable time information is decremented by 1 each time timer interrupt processing is started.

If it is determined in step Su1201 that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (Su1201: NO), this fluctuation ending process is ended.

In step Su1201, when it is determined that the variation time has passed (Su1201: YES), the process proceeds to step Su1202, and the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b correspond to the current game turn. A process for ending the variation of the symbols in the symbol display section is performed. Subsequently, in step Su1203, the special figure variation displaying flag stored in the special figure variation displaying flag storage area in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned OFF. After executing step Su1203, the process proceeds to step Su1204.

In step Su1204, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a big win. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any one of the 8R probability variable jackpot flag, the 8R normal jackpot flag, and the 16R probability variable jackpot flag is ON. In step Su1204, none of the above flags is ON, that is, when it is determined that the result of the winning lottery related to the current game round is not a big win (Su1204: NO), the process proceeds to step Su1205.

In step Su1205, the process for shortening working hours, which is the process executed when the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is the shortening of working hours, is executed. In addition, the detail of the process for time reduction provision is mentioned later. After executing step Su1205, the process proceeds to step Su1206.

At step Su1206, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

In step Su1206, when it is determined that the high probability mode flag is ON (Su1206: YES), the process proceeds to step Su1207, and 1 is subtracted from the value of the number-of-games counter SNC for ST. The number-of-games counter SNC for ST is a counter for counting how many more times the number of games continuously executed in the high-probability mode will reach the number of STs. After executing step Su1207, the process proceeds to step Su1208.

In step Su1208, it is determined whether or not the number of times the game is continuously executed in the high-probability mode has reached the ST number (for example, 10 times). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the number-of-games counter SNC for ST is zero. Since the number-of-games counter SNC for ST indicates the remaining number of STs, by determining whether SNC=0, the number of games continuously executed in the high-probability mode can be increased. It is possible to determine whether or not the number of times of ST has been reached.

In step Su1208, when it is determined that the value of the number of games counter SNC for ST is 0 (Su1208: YES), that is, it is determined that the number of times of games continuously executed in the high probability mode has reached the number of times of ST If so, the process advances to step Su1209 to turn off the high probability mode flag. After that, the process proceeds to step Su1210.

On the other hand, in step Su1208, if it is determined that the value of the number of games counter SNC for ST is not 0 (Su1208: NO), that is, before the number of times of game times continuously executed in the high probability mode reaches the number of times of ST ( = ST count), the process proceeds to step Su1210 without executing step Su1209.

It should be noted that even when it is determined in step Su1206 that the high probability mode flag is not ON (Su1206: NO), the process proceeds to step Su1210.

In step Su1210, it is determined whether or not the high support continuation state flag stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The high support continuation state flag until the next time is a flag indicating whether or not it corresponds to the state in which the high frequency support mode is continued as the support mode until the next jackpot is won (the high support continuation state until the next time). It is turned ON when it is determined that the time saving provision flag is ON in the provision process, and is turned OFF at the start of the opening/closing execution mode (at the start of the opening period).

In step Su1210, when it is determined that the high support continuation state flag is ON until the next time (Su1210: YES), this fluctuation end processing is terminated immediately.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Su1210 that the high support continuation state flag is not ON until the next time (Su1210: NO), the process proceeds to step Su1211.

In step Su1211, it is determined whether or not the support mode is the high frequency support mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

If it is determined in step Su1211 that the high frequency support mode flag is ON (Su1211: YES), the process proceeds to step Su1212.

In step Su1212, 1 is subtracted from the value of the time-saving game number counter PNC. The time-saving game number counter PNC is a counter for counting how many more times the number of games continuously executed in the high-frequency support mode reaches the time-saving continuation number. After that, the process proceeds to step Su1213.

In step Su1213, it is determined whether or not the number of times the game times are continuously executed in the high-frequency support mode has reached the number of time-saving continuation times (for example, five times). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the time-saving game number counter PNC is 0 or less. Since the time-saving game number counter PNC indicates the remaining number of time-saving continuation times, by determining whether PNC = 0, the number of games that are continuously executed in the high-frequency support mode It is possible to determine whether or not the number of times has reached the number of continuous hours.

In step Su1213, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving game number counter PNC is 0 (Su1213: YES), that is, the number of times the game is continuously executed in the high-frequency support mode has reached the time-saving continuation number If so, the process advances to step Su1214 to turn off the high-frequency support mode flag. After executing step Su1214, the fluctuation ending process is ended.

On the other hand, in step Su1213, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving game number counter PNC is not 0 (Su1213: NO), that is, the number of times the game is continuously executed in the high-frequency support mode reaches the time-saving continuation number When it is determined that it is before (=within the number of times of time saving continuation), this fluctuation ending process is terminated immediately without executing step Su1214.

Note that even when it is determined in step Su1211 that the high-frequency support mode flag is not ON (Su1211: NO), this fluctuation end processing is immediately ended.

In step Su1204, it is determined that any one of the 8R probability variable jackpot flag, the 8R normal jackpot flag, and the 16R probability variable jackpot flag is ON, that is, the result of the winning lottery related to this game round is the jackpot winning. If so (Su1204: YES), the process advances to step Su1215 to turn on the opening/closing execution mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64. FIG. After executing step Su1215, the variable time end processing is ended.

<Processing for shortening working hours>
Next, processing for time reduction provision is explained. Processing for shortening of working hours is executed by MPU 62 of main controller 60 as a subroutine of fluctuation end processing (Fig. 467: Su1205).

FIG. 468 is a flowchart showing processing for shortening working hours. In step Su1301, it is determined whether or not the time saving provision flag is ON.

In step Su1301, when it determines with a reduction in working hours provision flag being ON (Su1301:YES), it progresses to step Su1302 and turns a high frequency support mode flag ON. Thereby, when the time saving provision flag is ON, that is, when the time saving provision is won in the winning lottery, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. After executing step Su1302, the process proceeds to step Su1303.

In step Su1303, a high-frequency support mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. set. After executing step Su1303, the process proceeds to step Su1304.

In step Su1304, the high support continuation state flag is turned ON until the next time, and then the process proceeds to step Su1305, where a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the high support continuation state is in effect until the next time. A high support continuation state command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . After executing step Su1305, the process proceeds to step Su1306.

In step Su1306, the time saving provision flag is turned OFF. After executing step Su1306, the process for shortening working hours is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Su1301, when it determines with the time saving provision flag not being ON (Su1301:NO), the process for time saving provision is immediately complete|finished.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the game state transition processing will be explained. The game state transition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of normal process (Fig. 460: Su0507).

FIG. 469 is a flowchart showing game state transition processing. In step Su1401, it is determined whether or not the ending period flag is ON. The ending period flag is turned ON at the end of the big winning opening opening/closing process period (at the start of the ending period) in the opening/closing execution mode, and turned OFF at the end of the ending period. The ending period is a period for executing the ending effect in the opening/closing execution mode.

When it is determined in step Su1401 that the ending period flag is not ON (Su1401: NO), the process advances to step Su1402 to determine whether or not the opening/closing process period flag is ON. The opening/closing process period flag is turned ON at the timing when the opening period ends in the opening/closing execution mode and the big winning opening opening/closing process period, which is the period during which the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is executed, starts. , is turned off at the timing when the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 36b ends.

When it is determined in step Su1402 that the opening/closing process period flag is not ON (Su1402: NO), the process proceeds to step Su1403 to determine whether or not the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is turned ON at the start of the opening period and turned OFF at the end of the opening period.

If it is determined in step Su1403 that the opening period flag is not ON (Su1403: NO), the process proceeds to step Su1404 to determine whether or not the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step Su1404 that the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON (Su1404: YES), the process proceeds to step Su1405. On the other hand, in step Su1404, when it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode flag is OFF (Su1404: NO), this game state transition processing is terminated as it is.

At step Su1405, the high probability mode flag is turned off. After executing step Su1405, the process advances to step Su1406 to turn off the high-frequency support mode flag. After executing step Su1406, the process advances to step Su1407 to turn off the high support continuation state flag until the next time. After executing step Su1407, the process proceeds to step Su1408.

At step Su1408, an opening/closing scenario setting process for setting an opening/closing scenario is executed. The opening/closing scenario defines the pattern of the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 36b in the round game. It is a program in which conditions for shifting the opening/closing door 36b from the open state to the closed state (hereinafter also referred to as "closed conditions") are recorded. The opening/closing scenario is stored in the opening/closing scenario storage area 63i of the ROM 63.

The opening conditions are, for example, as follows.
- The current state of the pachinko machine 10 is the timing for starting each round game in the open/close execution mode.
When one of the above items is established, the opening/closing door 36b shifts from the closed state to the open state.

Closing conditions are, for example, as follows.
- The elapsed time from the start of each round game exceeds a predetermined upper limit duration (for example, 15 seconds).
- The number of game balls entered into the big winning hole 36a after starting each round game exceeds a predetermined upper limit number.
When either one of the above two items is established, the opening/closing door 36b shifts from the open state to the closed state.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the V winning opening shutter 48a is opened for a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds) after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the opening/closing execution mode by the shutter opening/closing process described later. After that, it is controlled to be in a closed state. In retrospect, the opening/closing scenario that determines the opening/closing operation pattern of the opening/closing door 36b is set differently depending on whether the type of the jackpot is a variable probability jackpot or a normal jackpot. When the type of the jackpot is a variable probability jackpot, that is, when the 8R variable probability jackpot flag or the 16R variable probability jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is ON, during the opening period of the open/close door 36b in the first round of the round game, V winning The opening condition is determined so as to include the period in which the mouth shutter 48a is in the open state (not part of it, but all of it). As a result, when a big win is won by a winning lottery and the type of the won big win is a probability variable big win, it becomes easy to enter the game ball into the V prize opening 48 opened in the first round of the round game.

In addition, instead of the configuration in which the opening period of the open/close door 36b in the first round of the round game includes the period in which the V winning opening shutter 48a is in the open state, opening and closing in the number of rounds of the round game other than 1 The opening period of the door 36b may include a period in which the V winning opening shutter 48a is open. After executing step Su1408, the process proceeds to step Su1409.

In step Su1409, an opening time setting process is executed. The opening time setting process is a process of setting the length of time of the opening period (hereinafter also referred to as opening time) in the open/close execution mode. In this embodiment, the opening time of the same fixed length is set in each opening period. Specifically, "3000" (ie, 6 sec) is set in the third timer counter area T3 that determines the opening time. The third timer counter area T3 is provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM64. After executing step Su1409, the process proceeds to step Su1410.

At step Su1410, an opening command is set. The set opening command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 at step Su0503 in the normal process (FIG. 460). This opening command includes information on the set opening time and the number of rounds of the current open/close execution mode. A sound emission control device 90 determines the contents of performance corresponding to the opening time and the period of opening/closing processing of the big winning opening based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents are executed. After executing step Su1410, the process advances to step Su1411 to turn on the opening period flag. After executing step Su1411, the game state transition process is terminated.

When it is determined in step Su1403 that the opening period flag is ON (Su1403: YES), the process proceeds to step Su1412.

In step Su1412, it is determined whether or not the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the third timer counter area T3 is "0". If it is determined in step Su1412 that the opening period has ended (Su1412: YES), the process proceeds to step Su1413 to turn off the opening period flag. After that, the process proceeds to step Su1414.

In step Su1413, round display start processing for notifying the type of the current open/close execution mode is executed. Specifically, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 is confirmed. Based on the confirmed address information, stop result data corresponding to the address information is specified from among the stop result data group stored in the ROM 63, and the content of the number of rounds is determined from the specified stop result data. confirm. After that, the content of the confirmed number of rounds is output to the round display section 39 in the main display section 45 . As a result, the round display section 39 displays the round information related to the output. After executing step Su1414, the process proceeds to step Su1415.

In step Su1415, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned ON. In subsequent step Su1415, an opening/closing process start command is set. The opening/closing process start command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the opening/closing process period has started. The opening/closing process start command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 460: step Su0503) of the normal process. After executing step Su1415, the game state transition process is terminated.

In step Su1402, when it is determined that the opening/closing process period flag is ON (Su1402: YES), the process proceeds to step Su1416 to execute the big winning opening opening/closing process. The special prize opening opening/closing process will be described later. After executing step Su1416, the process proceeds to step Su1417.

In step Su1417, shutter opening/closing processing is executed. The shutter opening/closing process will be described later. After executing step Su1417, the process proceeds to step Su1418.

In step Su1418, it is determined whether or not the big winning opening opening/closing process has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the big winning opening opening/closing process has ended depending on whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 for counting the number of times the opening/closing door 36b is opened is "0". do. In step Su1418, when it is determined that the big winning opening opening/closing process has ended (Su1418: YES), the process proceeds to step Su1419. On the other hand, in step Su1418, when it is determined that the big winning opening opening/closing process has not ended (Su1418: NO), this game state transition process ends.

In step Su1419, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned off, and then the process proceeds to step Su1420.

In step Su1420, round display end processing is executed. In this process, the display control of the round display portion 39 in the main display portion 45 is terminated so that the round display portion 39 is turned off. After executing step Su1420, the process proceeds to step Su1421.

In step Su1421, an ending time setting process is executed. The ending time setting process is a process of setting the length of time of the ending period (hereinafter also referred to as ending time) in the open/close execution mode. In this embodiment, the ending time of the same constant length is set for each ending period. Specifically, "3000" (ie, 6 sec) is set in the fourth timer counter area T4 that determines the ending time. The fourth timer counter area T4 is provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM64. After executing step Su1421, the process proceeds to step Su1422.

In step Su1422, an ending command is set. This set ending command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step Su0503 in the normal process (FIG. 460). Upon receiving the ending command, the sound emission control device 90 terminates the effect corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode. After executing step Su1422, the process proceeds to step Su1423.

In step Su1423, the ending period flag is turned ON. After that, the game state transition processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step Su1401 that the ending period flag is ON (Su1401: YES), the process proceeds to step Su1424.

In step Su1424, it is determined whether or not the ending period has ended. Specifically, in the ending time setting process (Su1421), it is determined whether or not the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time in step Su1421 is "0". When it is determined in step Su1424 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0" (Su1424: YES), the process proceeds to step Su1425.

At step Su1425, the ending period flag is turned off. After that, the process advances to step Su1426 to execute transition processing at the end of the ending period. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes of game rounds after the end of the current ending period. Details of the transition processing at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing step Su1426, the process proceeds to step Su1427.

At step Su1427, the opening/closing execution mode flag is turned OFF. After executing step Su1426, the game state transition processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Su1424, when it is determined that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is not "0" (Su1424: NO), this game state transition processing is terminated as it is.

<Grand Prize Opening/Closing Process>
Next, the special winning opening opening/closing process will be described. The big winning opening opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (Fig. 469: Su1416).

FIG. 470 is a flow chart showing the big winning opening opening/closing process. At step Su1501, it is determined whether or not the door 36b is open. Specifically, the determination is made based on the drive state of the variable winning drive section 36c. When it is determined in step Su1501 that the open/close door 36b is not open (Su1501: NO), the process proceeds to step Su1502.

At step Su1502, it is determined whether or not the conditions for opening the door 36b are met. Specifically, the opening/closing scenario set by the opening/closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether or not it is time to open the opening/closing door 36b. If it is determined in step Su1502 that the conditions for opening the door 36b are met (Su1502: YES), the process proceeds to step Su1503.

In step Su1503, the opening/closing door 36b is opened. After that, the process proceeds to step Su1504.

In step Su1504, a door opening command is set. The opening/closing door open command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the opening/closing door 36b has been opened. The open/close door open command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 460: step Su0503) of the normal process. Based on the received open/close door open command, the sound emission control device 90 specifies that the opening of the big prize opening 36a for one round has started, and also determines the contents of the effects in the various lamps 47 and the speakers 46. The content is updated to correspond to the start of opening of the mouth 36a. Further, the sound emission control device 90 transmits the door opening command to the display control device 100 while maintaining the information format. The display control device 100 identifies that the opening of the large winning prize opening 36a for one round has started based on the received open/close door opening command, and changes the content of the effect on the pattern display device 41 to the opening of the large winning prize opening 36a. Update to the contents corresponding to the start of opening. After executing step Su1504, the big winning opening opening/closing process ends.

When it is determined in step Su1502 that the condition for opening the opening/closing door 36b is not established (Su1502: NO), the big winning opening opening/closing process is terminated without executing steps Su1503 and Su1504.

When it is determined in step Su1501 that the opening/closing door 36b is open (Su1501: YES), the process proceeds to step Su1505.

In step Su1505, it is determined whether or not the conditions for closing the door 36b are satisfied. Specifically, the opening/closing scenario set by the opening/closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether or not it is time to close the opening/closing door 36b. If it is determined in step Su1505 that the condition for closing the opening/closing door 36b is satisfied (Su1505: YES), the process proceeds to step Su1506.

In step Su1506, the open/close door 36b is closed. After that, the process proceeds to step Su1507.

In step Su1507, a door closing command is set. The open/close door closing command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the open/close door 36b is closed. The open/close door closing command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 460: step Su0503) of the normal process. Based on the received open/close door closing command, the sound emission control device 90 specifies that the opening of the big prize opening 36a for one round has been completed, and the contents of the effects in the various lamps 47 and the speakers 46 are set to the big prize opening. 36a is updated to correspond to the end of opening. Further, the sound emission control device 90 transmits the open/close door closing command to the display control device 100 while maintaining the information format. The display control device 100 specifies that the opening of the large winning prize opening 36a for one round has been completed based on the received open/close door closing command, and the content of the effect on the pattern display device 41 is changed to the opening of the large winning prize opening 36a. is updated to correspond to the completion of . After executing step Su1507, the big winning opening opening/closing process is terminated.

When it is determined in step Su1505 that the closing condition of the opening/closing door 36b is not established (Su1505: NO), the big winning opening opening/closing process is terminated without executing steps Su1506 and Su1507.

<Shutter open/close processing>
Next, shutter opening/closing processing will be described. The shutter opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (Fig. 469: Su1417).

FIG. 471 is a flowchart showing shutter opening/closing processing. In step Su1601, it is determined whether or not the V winning opening shutter 48a is open. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the V winning opening shutter 48a is open, depending on the operating state of the V winning opening shutter driving section 48b (FIG. 447).

In step Su1601, when it is determined that the V winning opening shutter 48a is not open (Su1601: NO), the process proceeds to step Su1602.

In step Su1602, it is determined whether or not the condition for opening the V winning opening shutter 48a is established. In this embodiment, as described above, the V winning opening shutter 48a is opened for a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds) after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the opening/closing execution mode, and then closed. operate as In order to realize this operation, in step Su1602, the condition for opening the V winning opening shutter 48a is established by counting with a timer counter whether a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the opening/closing execution mode and the opening timing has been reached. determine whether or not

In step Su1602, when it is determined that the opening condition of the V winning opening shutter 48a is satisfied (Su1602: YES), the process proceeds to step Su1603, and the V winning opening shutter 48a is opened. After executing step Su1603, the process proceeds to step Su1606, which will be described later.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Su1602 that the condition for opening the V winning opening shutter 48a is not satisfied (Su1602: NO), the process proceeds to step Su1606 without executing step Su1603.

In step Su1601, when it is determined that the V winning opening shutter 48a is open (Su1601: YES), the process proceeds to step Su1604.

In step Su1604, it is determined whether or not the closing condition of the V winning opening shutter 48a is established. Specifically, the closing condition of the V winning opening shutter 48a is determined by counting with a timer counter whether the predetermined time (10 seconds) has passed since the opening timing of the V winning opening shutter 48a and whether the closing timing has been reached. Determine whether or not it is established.

In step Su1604, when it is determined that the closing condition of the V winning opening shutter 48a is satisfied (Su1604: YES), the process proceeds to step Su1605 to close the V winning opening shutter 48a. After executing step Su1605, the process proceeds to step Su1606.

On the other hand, in step Su1604, when it is determined that the closing condition of the V winning opening shutter 48a is not satisfied (Su1604: NO), the process proceeds to step Su1606 without executing step Su1605.

At step Su1606, the V prize determination process is executed. The V prize determination process will be described later. After executing step Su1606, the shutter opening/closing process ends.

<V Winning Judgment Process>
Next, the V prize determination process will be described. The V prize determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the shutter opening/closing process (Su1606 in FIG. 471).

FIG. 472 is a flow chart showing V winning judgment processing. In step Su1701, it is determined whether or not entry of a game ball into the V winning opening 48 has been detected. This determination is made from the detection signal of the detection sensor 67f that detects the entry of the game ball into the V winning hole 48. FIG. In step Su1701, when the entry ball of the game ball to V winning a prize mouth 48 is detected, (Su1701: YES), it advances to step Su1702.

At step Su1702, the V winning flag is turned ON. The V winning flag is a flag indicating that a game ball has entered the V winning opening 48, and sets the lottery mode in the game round executed after the end of the round game to either a high probability mode or a low probability mode. It is used to determine whether The V winning flag is turned ON when the entry of the game ball into the V winning hole 48 is detected, and turned OFF at the end of the ending period. After executing step Su1702, the process proceeds to step Su1703.

In step Su1703, a V winning command is set. The V winning command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 460: step Su0503) of the normal process. The audio light emitting device that receives the V winning command executes settings for executing the V winning effect. The V prize effect is a effect for informing the player that the game ball has entered the V prize hole 48 . After step Su1703 is executed, this V prize determination process ends.

On the other hand, in step Su1701, if the entry of the game ball into the V winning port 48 is not detected (Su1701: NO), this V winning determination process is terminated without executing steps Su1702 and Su1703.

<Transition processing at the end of the ending period>
Next, transition processing at the end of the ending period will be described. The transition process at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (Fig. 469: Su1426).

FIG. 473 is a flow chart showing transition processing at the end of the ending period. In step Su1801, it is determined whether or not the V winning flag is ON.

In step Su1801, when it is determined that the V winning flag is ON (Su1801: YES), the process proceeds to step Su1802 to execute flag erasing processing. Specifically, the ON flags among the 16R probability variable jackpot flag, the 8R probability variable jackpot flag, and the 8R normal jackpot flag are turned OFF, and the flags that are not ON are maintained in that state. Also, the V winning flag is turned OFF. After executing step Su1802, the process proceeds to step Su1803.

In step Su1803, the high-probability mode flag is turned ON, and then the process advances to step Su1804 to turn the high-frequency support mode flag ON. As a result, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the game state shifts to a game state in which the lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode. After executing step Su1804, the process proceeds to step Su1805.

In step Su1805, a high-probability mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the lottery mode is the high-probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. . After executing step Su1805, the process proceeds to step Su1806.

In step Su1806, a high-frequency support mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. set. After executing step Su1806, the process proceeds to step Su1807.

At step Su1807, 10 is set to the number-of-games counter SNC for ST provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM64. The value set in the number-of-games counter SNC for ST is a value indicating the number of games to be limited when the number of games is limited and the high-probability mode is executed. After executing step Su1807, the process proceeds to step Su1808.

In step Su1808, 5 is set to the time-saving game number counter PNC provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM64. The value set in the time-saving game number counter PNC is a value indicating the number of games to be limited when the number of games is limited and the high-frequency support mode is executed. After executing step Su1808, the transition processing at the end of the ending period is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Su1801 that the V winning flag is not ON (Su1801: NO), the process advances to step Su1809 to execute flag erasing processing. Specifically, the ON flags among the 16R probability variable jackpot flag, the 8R probability variable jackpot flag, and the 8R normal jackpot flag are turned OFF, and the flags that are not ON are maintained in that state. After executing step Su1809, the process proceeds to step Su1810.

In step Su1810, a low-probability mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the lottery mode is the low-probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. . After executing step Su1810, the process proceeds to step Su1811.

In step Su1811, a low-frequency support mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. set. After step Su1811 is executed, the transition processing at the end of the ending period ends.

<Electronic support processing>
Next, the processing for electric support will be described. The electric service support process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (Fig. 460: Su0508).

FIG. 474 is a flowchart showing processing for electric support. In step Su1901, it is determined whether or not support is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the supported flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The under-support flag is a flag that is turned ON when the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is to be opened, and is turned OFF when it is to be returned to the closed state. If it is determined in step Su1901 that the supported flag is not ON (Su1901: NO), the process proceeds to step Su1902.

At step Su1902, it is determined whether or not the support winning flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The support winning flag is turned ON when the electric accessary product open lottery for determining whether or not to open the electric accessary product 34a is won in the open state, and is turned OFF when the supporting flag is ON. is. In step Su1902, when it is determined that the support winning flag is not ON (Su1902: NO), the process proceeds to step Su1903.

At step Su1903, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, every 2 msec.

If it is determined in step Su1903 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Su1903: NO), the electronic support process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Su1903: YES), the process proceeds to step Su1904.

In step Su1904, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the variable display of the symbols in the normal unit 38. If it is determined in step Su1904 that it is time to end the variable display (Su1904: YES), the process advances to step Su1905 to set off display, and then ends the electronic support process. By setting the deviation display, the variable display of the symbols in the general pattern unit 38 is terminated while the deviation display is stopped. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Su1904 that it is not the end timing of the variable display (Su1904: NO), the process proceeds to step Su1906.

In step Su1906, it is determined whether or not the value of the reserved accessory number SN is greater than "0". In step Su1906, when it is determined that the value of the reserved accessory number SN is "0" (Su1906: NO), the electronic support process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Su1906 that the value of the reserved accessory number SN is greater than "0" (Su1906: YES), the process proceeds to step Su1907.

In step Su1907, it is determined whether or not the open/close execution mode is in progress, and then the process proceeds to step Su1908 to determine whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect. If it is not the opening/closing execution mode in step Su1907 (Su1907: NO) and if it is the high-frequency support mode in step Su1908 (Su1908: YES), the process proceeds to step Su1909 to perform the electric accessory opening lottery. Specifically, the value stored in the electric role holding area 64d is shifted, and when the value of the electric role item opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 461, the electric role item opening lottery be elected. Also, at the same time as the electric accessory open lottery, the second timer counter area T2 is set to "750" (that is, 1.5 sec). The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started. After that, the process proceeds to step Su1910.

In step Su1910, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory open lottery in step Su1909 is support winning. In step Su1910, if it is determined that the result of the electric accessory open lottery is support winning (Su1910: YES), proceed to step Su1911, turn on the support winning flag, and provide in various counter areas 64f of RAM64 "3" is set in the second round counter area RC2. The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the electric accessory 34a is released. After that, the electronic support processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Su1910, when it is determined that the result of the electric accessory open lottery is not support winning (Su1910: NO), the process for electric support is terminated without executing the process of step Su1911.

If it is determined that it is in the opening and closing execution mode in step Su1907 (Su1907: YES), or if it is determined that it is not in the high frequency support mode in step Su1908 (Su1908: NO), the process proceeds to step Su1912, and the electric accessory open lottery I do. Specifically, the value stored in the electric role holding area 64d is shifted, and when the value of the electric role item opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric role item opening lottery be elected. At the same time as the electric accessory open lottery, the second timer counter area T2 is set to "14750" (that is, 29.5 sec). After that, the process proceeds to step Su1913.

In step Su1913, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory open lottery in step Su1912 is support winning. In step Su1913, if it is determined that the support has not been won (Su1913: NO), the electronic support process is terminated. On the other hand, in step Su1913, if it is determined that support winning (Su1913: YES), the process proceeds to step Su1914, the support winning flag is turned ON, and after setting "1" to the second round counter area RC2 , terminates the electronic support process.

In step Su1902, when it is determined that the support winning flag is ON (Su1902: YES), the process proceeds to step Su1915, and it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38. In step Su1915, when it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Su1915: NO), since the pattern is being changed and displayed in the normal figure unit 38, the main electric role support process is performed as it is. exit. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Su1915 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Su1915: YES), the process proceeds to step Su1916.

At step Su1916, a win display is set. As a result, the variation display of the pattern in the normal pattern unit 38 is terminated while the win display is stopped. After that, the process proceeds to step Su1917 to turn on the supporting flag and turn off the support winning flag. After that, the electronic support process is terminated.

In step Su1901, when it is determined that the supporting flag is ON (Su1901: YES), the process advances to step Su1918 to execute electric opening/closing control processing for opening/closing control of the electric accessory 34a. After that, the electronic support process is terminated.

<Electrical opening/closing control processing>
Next, the electrical opening/closing control process will be described. The electric power opening/closing control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control unit 60 as a subroutine of the electric power support process (Fig. 474: Su1918).

FIG. 475 is a flow chart showing the electrical opening/closing control process. In step Su2001, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open. Whether or not the electric accessory 34a is being opened is determined by whether or not the electric accessory drive unit 34b is in a driving state. When it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is open (Su2001: YES), the process proceeds to step Su2002.

At step Su2002, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the open duration time of the electric accessory 34a. If it is determined in step Su2002 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Su2002: NO), the electric opening/closing control process is terminated. In other words, if the opening continuation time of the electric accessory 34a has not ended, the present electric opening/closing control process is terminated.

In step Su2002, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Su2002: YES), proceed to step Su2003, perform closing processing to control the electric accessary 34a to the closed state, "250" (that is, 0.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as a means for measuring the open duration time of the electric accessory 34a is "0", the electric accessory 34a is closed, and the second timer counter area T2 is electrically operated this time. It is used as a parameter for measuring the closed duration time of the accessory 34a, and "250" is set in the second timer counter area T2. After executing step Su2003, the process proceeds to step Su2004.

In step Su2004, after subtracting 1 from the value of the second round counter area RC2, the process advances to step Su2005 to determine whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0". If it is determined in step Su2005 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (Su2005: NO), the electric opening/closing control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Su2005 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0" (Su2005: YES), the process proceeds to step Su2006 to turn off the in-support flag. After that, the electrical switching control process is terminated.

In step Su2001, when it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is not open (Su2001: NO), the process proceeds to step Su2007 to determine whether or not the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closed duration time of the electric accessory 34a. In step Su2007, if it is determined that the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Su2007: NO), the electrical opening/closing control process is terminated. On the other hand, in step Su2007, when it is determined that the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Su2007: YES), the process proceeds to step Su2008, and an opening process for controlling the electric accessary 34a to the open state is executed. . After that, the process proceeds to step Su2009.

In step Su2009, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. If it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress (Su2009: NO), the process advances to step Su2010 to determine whether or not the high-frequency support mode is in effect. do.

If it is determined in step Su2010 that the high frequency support mode is in effect (Su2010: YES), the process proceeds to step Su2011 to set "800" (that is, 1.6 sec) in the second timer counter area T2. After that, the electrical switching control process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Su2009 that it is in the open/close execution mode (Su2009: YES), or if it is determined in step Su2010 that it is not in the high-frequency support mode (Su2010: NO), the process proceeds to step Su2012, and the second "100" (that is, 0.2 sec) is set in the timer counter area T2. After that, the electrical switching control process is terminated.

<<10-6>> Various processes executed in the sound emission control device and the display control device:
Next, a specific example of control executed by the sound emission control device and the display control device in order to execute the announcement effect and the result notification effect will be described. The processing executed in the sound emission control device 90 will be described first, and then the processing executed in the display control device 100 will be described.

<Various processing executed in the sound emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, timer interrupt processing executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 will be described.

FIG. 476 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the sound and light side MPU 92. FIG. Timer interrupt processing is repeatedly executed at a relatively short period (for example, 2 msec). Processing of each step executed in timer interrupt processing will be described below.

In step Su2101, command storage processing is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing the received command in the sound and light side RAM 94 when a command is received from the main side MPU 62 . The sound and light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer for enabling storage and reading of commands received from the main side MPU 62, and the commands received from the main side MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer. , are read out sequentially according to the order in which they are stored. After executing step Su2101, the process proceeds to step Su2102.

In step Su2102, pending command handling processing is executed. In the pending command processing, processing corresponding to the first pending command among the commands stored in step Su2101 is performed. Details of the pending command handling process will be described later. After executing step Su2102, the process proceeds to step Su2103.

In step Su2103, a game round effect setting process is executed. In the game round effect setting process, the effect to be executed in the game round from the start of the symbol variation to the stop is set. Details of the game round effect setting process will be described later. After executing step Su2103, the process proceeds to step Su2104.

In step Su2104, processing for opening/closing execution mode effect is executed. In the opening/closing execution mode effect processing, processing related to effects during the opening period, effects during the big winning opening opening/closing process period, and effects during the ending period is performed. After executing step Su2104, the process proceeds to step Su2105.

In step Su2105, background rendering processing is executed. In the background rendering process, a process of displaying on the pattern display device 41 a background moving image determined according to a command indicating the game state received from the main MPU 62 is performed. For example, a background video indicating that the high-frequency support mode is continuing, a background video indicating that the high-frequency support mode has ended, and a background video indicating that the high-probability mode is continuing are displayed. . After executing step Su2105, the process proceeds to step Su2106.

At step Su2106, a V winning effect process is executed. In the V winning effect processing, processing for displaying on the symbol display device 41 an effect image (moving image) determined according to the V winning command received from the main MPU 62 is performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a V winning command has been received from the main side MPU 62 during execution of the opening and closing process of the large winning opening in the opening and closing execution mode. A process for displaying a performance image for informing the player that the ball has entered is performed on the pattern display device 41.例文帳に追加By visually recognizing a performance image indicating that a game ball has entered a V winning hole 48 displayed on a pattern display device 41, a player wins a big win by a winning lottery, and the type of the won big win changes with certainty. It can be recognized that it is a big hit. After executing step Su2106, the process proceeds to step Su2107.

In step Su2107, a fall effect process is executed. In the fall effect processing, a process of displaying on the symbol display device 41 a effect image (moving image) determined according to the fall command received from the main MPU 62 is performed. Specifically, when the lottery mode is the high-probability mode and the support mode is the high-frequency support mode (that is, during the high-probability-high support state), it is determined whether or not a fall command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined that it has been received, processing is performed to display on the symbol display device 41 an effect image that can indicate that the player is in an advantageous state. By visually recognizing the performance image displayed on the symbol display device 41, which can indicate that the player is in an advantageous state, the player shifts the lottery mode from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode, and as a result, , it can be allowed to shift to the low-probability support state H5 in which the next big win is substantially guaranteed.

On the other hand, when the lottery mode is the high-probability mode, the support mode is the low-frequency support mode (that is, the high-probability low support state), and there is a special 2 remaining hold, the main MPU 62 issues a fall command. It is determined whether or not the symbol has been received, and if it is determined that the symbol has been received, processing is performed to cause the symbol display device 41 to display an effect image that can indicate that the player is in an advantageous state. By visually recognizing the performance image displayed on the symbol display device 41, which can indicate that the player is in an advantageous state, the player shifts the lottery mode from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode, and as a result, As, via the special 2 remaining pending digestion H1b in the low probability low support state H1, it can be allowed to shift to the low probability high support state H5 in which the next jackpot election is substantially guaranteed.

When the lottery mode is the high-probability mode, the support mode is the low-frequency support mode (that is, the high-probability low-support state), and there is no special 2 remaining hold, the drop command is received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined that it has been received, processing is performed to display on the symbol display device 41 an effect image that can indicate that the player is in a disadvantageous state. By visually recognizing the performance image displayed on the symbol display device 41, which can indicate that the player is in a disadvantageous state, the player can shift the lottery mode from the high probability mode to the low probability mode, and as a result, It can be recognized that it has transitioned to the low probability low support state H1. After executing step Su2107, the process proceeds to step Su2108.

At step Su2108, the high support continuation effect processing is executed until the next time. In the high-support continuation effect processing until the next time, processing for displaying on the pattern display device 41 an effect image (moving image) determined according to the high-support continuation state command until the next time received from the main MPU 62 is performed. By visually recognizing the effect image determined according to the high support continuation state command until the next time displayed on the symbol display device 41, the player can see the state in which the high frequency support mode is continued as the support mode until the next big win is won ( It is possible to recognize that it has shifted to the high support continuation state until the next time). After executing step Su2108, the process proceeds to step Su2109.

In step Su2109, other processing is executed. Other processing includes processing for displaying a demonstration image (moving image) on the symbol display device 41 when the player is not playing a game. After executing step Su2109, the process proceeds to step Su2110.

In step Su2110, light emission control processing for controlling light emission of various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, light emission control of various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read out in each of the effect processes described above. After executing step Su2110, the process proceeds to step Su2111.

At step Su2111, an audio output control process for controlling the audio output of the speaker 46 is executed. In the audio output control process, audio output control of the speaker 46 is performed based on the audio data read out in the BGM process and each effect process. After executing step Su2111, the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

<Processing for pending command>
Next, pending command handling processing will be described. The pending command handling process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 476: Su2102).

FIG. 477 is a flowchart showing pending command handling processing. In step Su2201, it is determined whether or not a pending command has been received from the main MPU62. If it is determined in step Su2201 that a pending command has been received from the main MPU 62 (Su2201: YES), the process proceeds to step Su2202.

In step Su2202, it is determined whether or not the pending command read out this time was transmitted based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 or not. In step Su2202, if it is determined that the hold command that is read this time has been transmitted based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 (Su2202: YES), the process proceeds to step Su2203, the sound The update processing of the first reserved number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the light-side RAM 94 is executed. The first pending number counter area is a counter area for specifying the number of pieces of pending information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting hole 33 in the sound and light side MPU 92 . In the process of updating the first pending number counter area, the information in the first pending number counter area is updated to the pending number information included in the pending command read this time. After executing step Su2203, the process proceeds to step Su2205.

In step Su2202, if it is determined that the pending command read this time was not transmitted based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 (Su2202: NO), that is, the pending command is the second starting If it is determined that the transmission is based on the ball entering the mouth 34, the process proceeds to step Su2204, and the second pending number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound and light side RAM 94 is updated. Execute. The second pending number counter area is a counter area for specifying, in the sound and light side MPU 92 , the number of pieces of pending information acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 34 . In the process of updating the second reserved number counter area, the information in the second reserved number counter area is updated to the information of the reserved number included in the command read this time. After executing step Su2204, the process proceeds to step Su2205.

The reason why steps Su2203 and Su2204 are processed as described above will be described. In this embodiment, while the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, backup power is supplied to the RAM 64 of the main control device 60, while backup power is supplied to the RAM 94 of the sound emission control device 90. not. Therefore, when the power is cut off in a situation where the hold information related to the ball entering the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34 is stored in the RAM 64 of the main controller 60, the main controller 60 is stored in memory, whereas the sound emission control device 90 recognizes that there are 0 pieces of hold information. In this case, if a configuration is adopted in which the first pending number counter area or the second pending number counter area is counted up each time a pending command is received in the sound emission control device 90, the main controller 60 actually stores the pending memory. Inconvenience may occur in that the number of on-hold information received does not match the number of on-hold information grasped by the sound emission control device 90 . On the other hand, as in the above-described embodiment, the main controller 60 transmits a hold command including information on the number of holds, and the sound emission control device 90 responds to the hold command each time it receives the hold command. By adopting a configuration in which information on the contained number of reserved items is set in the first reserved number counter area or the second reserved number counter area, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above inconveniences.

In step Su2205, update processing of the total pending number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound and light side RAM 94 is executed. The total pending number counter area is the sum of the number of pending information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 and the number of pending information acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 34. This is a counter area for specifying in the sound and light side MPU 92 . In the update process, the information of the total pending number counter area is the sum of the information of the pending number measured in the first pending number counter area and the information of the pending number measured in the second pending number counter area. update to After executing step Su2205, the process proceeds to step Su2206.

If it is determined in step Su2201 that no pending command has been received from the main MPU 62 (Su2201: NO), the process proceeds to step Su2206 without executing steps Su2202 to Su2205.

At step Su2206, a pending display control process is executed. Specifically, based on the number of pending information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 specified in step Su2203, the display mode of the first pending display unit 37c (the color of the LED lamp to be lit and combination), and based on the number of pieces of hold information acquired based on the entry into the second starting port 34 specified in step Su2204, the display mode of the second hold display unit 37d (lighted LED lamp colors and combinations). After executing step Su2206, this pending command handling process is terminated.

<Game round effect setting processing>
Next, the game round effect setting process will be described. The game round effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (Fig. 476: Su2103).

FIG. 478 is a flow chart showing game round effect setting processing. In step Su2301, it is determined whether or not a variation command and a type command have been received. When it is determined in step Su2301 that the command for variation and the type command have not been received (Su2301: NO), this game cycle effect setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Su2301 that the command for variation and the type command have been received (Su2301: YES), the process proceeds to step Su2302.

In step Su2302, read the variation command and type command received this time, from these commands, the presence or absence of the jackpot, the presence or absence of time-saving provision, the type of jackpot, the presence or absence of reach occurrence, and information on the variation time are grasped respectively. Then, the grasped information is stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 . After that, the process proceeds to step Su2303.

At step Su2303, effect pattern setting processing is executed. The production pattern setting process is a process of determining and setting the pattern of production to be executed in the current game round (contents of advance notice production, ready-to-win production and execution timing) based on the production pattern table. Details of the effect pattern setting process will be described later. After executing step Su2303, the process proceeds to step Su2304.

In step Su2304, a stop symbol setting process is executed. In the stop symbol setting process, if the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a 16R probability variable jackpot, an 8R probability variable jackpot, or an 8R normal jackpot, the same pattern is displayed on the activated line L1 (see FIG. 446). The information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination is established is set as the information of the stop symbol of this time. Specifically, when the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a 16R probability variable jackpot or an 8R probability variable jackpot, the same combination of odd-numbered symbols can be selected as the same combination of symbols, and the same Even symbol combinations may be selected. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the selection rate is the same for the combination of the same odd-numbered symbols and the combination of the same even-numbered symbols. A configuration in which the ratio is high may be adopted, and the latter may be configured to have a higher selection ratio than the former. Also, the combination of "7" symbols is selected only in the case of a 16R probability variable jackpot. In addition, when the result of the winning lottery in the current game round is the 8R normal jackpot, the same combination of even-numbered symbols is selected as the same combination of symbols.

If the result of the jackpot lottery of the current game round is a result of losing, it is determined whether or not the ready-to-win is generated from the content of the command for variation. When it is determined that it corresponds to the occurrence of ready-to-win, it corresponds to the stop result in which the combination of the same symbols does not materialize on the effective line L1 and the combination of the ready-to-win symbols occurs on the effective line L1. information is determined as the information of the result of this stop. On the other hand, when it is determined that it does not correspond to the occurrence of ready-to-win, the result is a stop result in which the combination of the same symbols is not established on the effective line L1, and a stop result in which the combination of ready-to-win symbols is not established on the effective line L1. The corresponding information is set as the information of the current stop symbol.

If the result of the winning lottery for the current game cycle is a time-saving symbol, the information corresponding to the stop result in which a combination of predetermined symbols is established on the activated line L1 (see FIG. 446) is displayed as the current stop symbol. Set as information. A predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the time saving pattern is, for example, [3.4.1] (see FIG. 446). After executing step Su2304, the process proceeds to step Su2305.

In step Su2305, a process for setting a variation display pattern for the current game round is executed. In this process, information on the variation time of the current game cycle is specified from the content of the variation command received this time, and the combination of the information on the variation time and the information on the stop symbol set in step Su2304 is performed. Select the corresponding variable display pattern. When selecting a variation display pattern, the variation display pattern table stored in the variation display pattern table storage area 93b of the sound and light side ROM 93 is referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step Su2306.

In step Su2306, information of the effect pattern set in step Su2303, the stop pattern set in step Su2304, and the variable display pattern set in step Su2305 in the current game round is set in the effect command. After that, the process advances to step Su2307 to transmit the effect command to the display side MPU 102. FIG. The display-side MPU 102 executes processing for displaying the effect contents corresponding to the received effect command on the pattern display device 41 . After executing step Su2307, the process proceeds to step Su2308.

In step Su2308, update processing at the start of fluctuation is executed. The update process at the start of fluctuation is a process for updating the reserved display in the first reserved display area Ds1 or the second reserved display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41. FIG. The details of the update process at the start of fluctuation will be described later. After executing step Su2308, this game round effect setting process is terminated.

<Production pattern setting process>
Next, the effect pattern setting process will be described. The production pattern setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the game round production setting process (FIG. 478: Su2303).

FIG. 479 is a flow chart showing effect pattern setting processing. In step Su2401, random number RN for effect pattern is acquired from lottery counter area 94c of sound/light side RAM94. After that, the process proceeds to step Su2402.

At step Su2402, a process of identifying the effect pattern table is executed. The effect pattern table is three-dimensional tabular data whose data elements are patterns of effects to be executed in game rounds, fluctuation times, and random numbers RN for effect patterns. In the production pattern table storage area 93a of the ROM 93, various types of production pattern tables are stored according to the presence or absence of a big hit, the presence or absence of time saving, and the presence or absence of reach generation. At step Su2402, one effect pattern table is specified from these effect pattern tables. Specifically, based on the presence or absence of the jackpot, the presence or absence of the time reduction grant, the type of the jackpot, and the presence or absence of the reach occurrence, which are grasped in step Su2302 of the game round effect setting process (FIG. 478), the production pattern table storage area of the ROM 93 One effect pattern table is specified from 93a. After executing step Su2402, the process proceeds to step Su2403.

In step Su2403, the effect pattern table specified in Su2402 is referred to, and the variation time grasped in step Su2302 of the game cycle effect setting process (FIG. 478) and the value of the current effect pattern random number RN obtained in step Su2401 Acquire a production pattern corresponding to and. After executing step Su2403, the process proceeds to step Su2404.

At step Su2404, the effect pattern obtained at step Su2403 is set as the effect pattern to be executed in the current game round. After executing step Su2404, the effect pattern setting process is terminated.

<Update processing at the start of fluctuation>
Next, update processing at the start of fluctuation will be described. The update process at the start of fluctuation is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the game cycle effect setting process (Fig. 478: Su2308).

FIG. 480 is a flowchart showing update processing at the start of fluctuation. In step Su2501, it is determined whether or not the command for variation received this time relates to the hold information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 or not. In step Su2501, if it is determined that the variation command received this time relates to the hold information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 (Su2501: YES), proceed to step Su2502, The information in the first reserved number counter area is updated so that the number stored in the first reserved number counter area of the sound and light RAM 94 is decremented by one. After that, the process proceeds to step Su2504.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Su2501 that the variation command received this time is not related to the hold information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 (Su2501: NO), the process proceeds to step Su2503. Next, the information in the second reserved number counter area is updated so that the number stored in the second reserved number counter area of the sound and light side RAM 94 is decremented by one. After that, the process proceeds to step Su2504.

In step Su2504, the information in the total pending number counter area is updated so that the total pending number stored in the total pending number counter area of the sound and light side RAM 94 is decremented by one. After that, the update process at the start of fluctuation is terminated.

<Various processing executed in the display control device>
Next, processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

The processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 mainly includes a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on until the power is turned off, and a main processing that is executed when a command is received from the sound emission control device 90. There are command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing executed when a V interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal that is transmitted from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when rendering processing of an image for one frame is completed.

The MPU 102 executes main processing after power-on, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of commands and detection of V interrupt signals. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command interrupt processing is preferentially executed. Therefore, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound emission control device 90 and execute the V interrupt process.

<Main processing>
Next, main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 481 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. As described above, the main process is a process that is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. Processing of each step executed in the main processing will be described below.

In step Su2601, initialization processing is executed. Specifically, first, processing for initializing the MPU 102 and clearing the storage of the work RAM 104 and the video RAM 107 is performed. Then, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107 . Furthermore, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107 and the extracted character information is written in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107 . Also, perform other necessary settings for initialization. After that, the process proceeds to step Su2602.

At step Su2602, interrupt permission setting is executed. After the interrupt permission setting is executed, in the main processing, infinite loop processing is executed until the power is turned off. Accordingly, after the interrupt permission is set, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing, which will be described below, are executed in accordance with the reception of a command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described. As described above, the command interrupt processing is processing that is executed each time a command is received from the sound emission control device 90 .

482 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. In step Su2701, command storage processing is executed. In the command storage process, received command data is extracted and the extracted command data is stored in a command storage area provided in work RAM 104 . Various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read by the command determination process of the V interrupt process, which will be described later, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

483 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. As described above, V interrupt processing is processing that is executed when a V interrupt signal from VDP 105 is detected. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command storage area are executed by the command interrupt process. Execute the display instructions.

As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering processing of one frame of an image is completed and that is transmitted to the MPU 102 . Therefore, the MPU 102 executes V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, so that drawing instructions to the VDP 105 are issued every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame worth of image is completed. For this reason, the VDP 105 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to suppress the development of an image associated with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area in which the image information is stored. Details of the processing of each step of the V interrupt processing will be described below.

In step Su2801, command handling processing is executed. In the command handling process, the contents of the command stored in the command storage area by the command interrupt process (FIG. 482) are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. Specifically, for example, when a performance command is stored, control of image drawing and display is started so that the performance mode specified by the performance command is displayed on the pattern display device 41.例文帳に追加

If the effect operation command is stored, it is determined whether or not it is the period for accepting pressing of the effect operation button 24, and if it is determined that it is the period for accepting pressing of the effect operation button 24, the effect operation is performed. Control of image drawing and display is started so that the effect mode corresponding to the depression of the button 24 is displayed on the pattern display device 41 . On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the period for accepting pressing of the effect operation button 24, the content of the next command is analyzed without executing the process.

In the command processing (Su2801), all commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and processing corresponding to all the analyzed commands is executed. The reason for this will be explained. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during the 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the effect is set by the sound emission control device 90 and the effect is started, there is a high possibility that various commands for specifying the content of the effect are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the state of the effect such as the advance notice effect and the stop pattern set by the sound emission control device 90, and display the effect image according to the state. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the device 41 .

In step Su2802, display setting processing is executed. In the display setting process, based on the type of screen to be displayed on the pattern display device 41 set by the command handling process (Su2801), etc., the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the pattern display device 41 is specified. . After that, the process proceeds to step Su2803.

In step Su2803, task processing is executed. In the task processing, based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the pattern display device 41 specified by the display setting processing (Su2802), the type of character (sprite, display object) that constitutes the image is determined. Along with specifying, for each character (sprite), various parameters required for drawing, such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc., are determined. After that, the process proceeds to step Su2804.

In step Su2804, drawing processing is executed. In the drawing process, the types of characters forming one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each character, which are determined by the task process (Su2803), are transmitted to the VDP 105. FIG. The VDP 105 executes an image drawing process based on these pieces of information, and together with a drive signal to cause the pattern display device 41 to display an image drawn based on the information received during the previous V interrupt process. The image data is transmitted to the pattern display device 41 . After that, the process proceeds to step Su2805, and after executing other processes, the V interrupt process ends. An example of specific control for executing various processes including the jackpot effect in the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

<<10-7>> Functions and effects:
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the high-accuracy high support state H4, until the number of times of execution of the game rounds after the start of the high-frequency support mode reaches the time-saving continuous number of times (5 times within), the lottery mode in the game round in which the fall lottery was won is changed from the high probability mode to the low probability mode, and as a result, the high probability high support state H4 changes to the low probability high support state H5. migrated. Then, in the low-probability support state H5, the lottery result of the winning lottery is either a big win or a short-time granting lottery. When the player wins the time-saving grant in the winning lottery, the high-frequency support mode is continued as the support mode until the next big win is won. In the high-frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is in the electric role open state at high frequency, the game ball easily enters the second starting port 34, and it is difficult for the player to reduce the number of balls held. Thus, the winning lottery executed when the game ball enters the second starting port 34 can be executed with high frequency. For this reason, if it is possible to shift to the low probability high support state H5, the next big hit is virtually guaranteed. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the high-probability-high support state H4, not only the player expects to win a jackpot in the winning lottery, but also the game after the high-frequency support mode is started. A player can be expected to win a fall lottery in a game round of which the number of rounds executed is five or less.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the low probability high support state H5, the lottery mode is performed at high frequency until the player wins a big hit in the next winning lottery in a state where the number of balls held is difficult to decrease. It can give a sense of security that the support mode will not end.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the high-probability and high-support state H4, neither winning lottery nor falling lottery is won, and the number of game rounds executed after shifting to the high-probability and high-support state H4. reaches five times, the support mode is shifted from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode, and as a result, the high-probability high support state H4 is shifted to the high-probability low support state H6. In the high-probability low support state H6, immediately after shifting from the high-probability low support state H4 to the high-probability low support state H6, if the pending information remains in the second pending area Rb of the pending information storage area 64b, this A winning lottery based on the remaining reservation information (special 2 remaining reservation) is preferentially performed. That is, immediately after shifting from the high-probability high support state H4 to the high-probability low support state H6, if there is a special 2 remaining reserve, the state is shifted to the mode H6a of special 2 remaining pending digestion. Then, in the special 2 remaining pending digestion mode H6a, when the fall lottery is won, the transition to the special 2 remaining pending digesting mode H1b in the low probability low support state H1 is performed. A jackpot or short-time grant is won, and when the short-time grant is won, the low-probability low support state H1 is shifted to a low-probability high support state H5 in which the next big win is substantially guaranteed. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the mode H6a in which the special 2 remaining reserve is being consumed, not only the player expects to win a big win in the winning lottery, but also the special 2 remaining reserve remains. The player can expect to win the fall lottery in the interim game rounds.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the fall lottery is won in the mode H6a of the special 2 remaining pending digestion in the high probability low support state H6, the special 2 remaining pending digestion in the low probability low support state H1 Mode H1b, the low probability height support state H5 and the opening and closing execution mode H3 will surely shift to the high probability height support state H4. In other words, when winning the falling lottery in the mode H6a during special 2 remaining pending digestion in the high probability low support state H6, with a high probability (100% probability in this embodiment) high probability high support state H4 will move again to On the other hand, if the falling lottery is won in the left-handed mode H6b in the high-probability low support state H6, it will shift to the left-handed mode H1a in the low-probability low support state H1, so the high-probability high support The probability of re-shifting to state H4 is lower than the high probability (100% probability in this embodiment). In other words, if the falling lottery is won in the state H6b of hitting left in the high-probability-low support state H6, the state will be shifted again to the high-probability-high support state with a lower probability than the high probability. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to make the player expect to win the falling lottery before the end of the mode H6a in which the special 2 remaining hold is being digested in the high probability low support state H6. can. Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, when the drop lottery is won in the mode H6a during special 2 remaining hold digestion in the high probability low support state H6, it moves again to the high probability high support state H4 with a probability of 100%. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a greater sense of expectation (because it is guaranteed that the state will be shifted to the high-probability-high support state H4 again).

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the fall lottery is won before all the winning lotteries for the special 2 remaining reserve acquired in the high probability and high support state H4 are completed, the high probability and high support state H4 The transition to the low probability high support state H5 that is guaranteed to shift again to the high probability high support state H4, on the other hand, the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the high probability high support state H4 is a predetermined number of times without winning the falling lottery ( ST times), the probability of moving again to the high probability high support state H4 is shifted to the low probability low support state H1 lower than the low probability high support state H5. For this reason, according to this embodiment, the player wins the falling lottery before the winning lottery for all the special 2 reservation information stored in the high probability and high support state H4 is completed, and the low probability It is possible to expect the transition to the high support state H5. That is, according to the present embodiment, in the high-probability and high-support state H4, the player can expect to win the jackpot in the high-probability mode in which the probability of winning the jackpot is high. By the time the win lottery for all the special 2 reservation information stored in the high probability high support state H4 is completed, it is possible to expect that the falling lottery will be won and the player will shift to the low probability high support state H5. In the past, the player was only expected to win the jackpot by the end of the winning lottery for all the special 2 reservation information stored in the high probability and high support state H4, but according to the present embodiment For example, the player is expected to win the falling lottery and shift to the low probability high support state H5 before the winning lottery for all special 2 reservation information stored in the high probability high support state H4 is completed. can be done. Then, the low probability high support state H5 continues until the jackpot is won and the opening/closing execution mode H3 is started, and after the opening/closing execution mode H3 ends, it is guaranteed to shift again to the high probability high support state H4. By adopting it, even if the player does not win the jackpot by the end of the winning lottery for all the special 2 reservation information stored in the high probability and high support state H4, the high probability and high support state H4. If the falling lottery is won by the end of the winning lottery for all the special 2 reservation information stored in , the open/close execution mode H3 is guaranteed, and it is guaranteed to shift again to the high-precision high support state H4. It can give a sense of security that it will be done. Then, according to the present embodiment, when the number of executions of game rounds after shifting to the high probability high support state H4 reaches a predetermined number of times (ST number of times) without winning the falling lottery, the high probability high Since the probability of moving again to the support state H4 is shifted to the low probability low support state H1 lower than the low probability high support state H5, in the high probability high support state H4, without winning the jackpot, The fall lottery is not won until the winning lottery for all the special 2 reservation information stored in the high support state H4 is completed, and the number of execution times of the game rounds after shifting to the high probability high support state H4 is predetermined. It is possible to make the player feel a sense of urgency as to whether or not the number of times is reached.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the high-probability and high-support state H4, when the game round of the number of time-saving continuations is executed without winning the falling lottery, it is shifted to the high-probability and low support state H6, In the left-handed mode H6b in the low-probability support state H6, when the falling lottery is won in the winning lottery for special 1, the advantage for the player is low compared to the high-probability-low support state H6. Transition to the support state H1. That is, according to the present embodiment, even if the same falling lottery is won, the falling lottery is won in the high probability and high support state H4 and the left hitting mode H6b in the high probability and low support state H6. The function is different in the case of winning the lottery. Specifically, when a fall lottery is won in the high-probability and high-support state H4, the game state transitions such that the advantage for the player increases (from the high-probability and high-support state H4 to the high-probability and low support state H6 ) is performed, and on the other hand, if the drop lottery is won in the winning lottery for Special 1 in the mode H6b of the high-probability-low support state H6 during left-handed hitting, the advantage for the player is low. Such a game state transition (transition from high probability low support state H6 to low probability low support state H1) is performed. That is, according to the present embodiment, winning the falling lottery triggers a transition to a game state in which the player's advantage increases, and also triggers a game state transition in which the player's advantage decreases. Since this also serves as an opportunity, the degree of freedom in designing the pachinko machine 10 can be improved, and the diversification of game characteristics can be facilitated.

Then, according to the present embodiment, when the falling lottery is won in the high-probability-high support state H4, the game state is shifted so as to increase the advantage for the player. , in the high-probability-high support state H4, it is possible to make the player expect to win the falling lottery. On the other hand, in the left-handed state H6b of the high-probability-low support state H6, when the falling lottery is won during the winning lottery for special 1, the game state transitions such that the advantage for the player decreases. Since it is performed, the player can be made to think that he/she does not want to win the drop lottery in the state H6b of hitting left in the high-probability-low support state H6. That is, in the high-probability and high-support state H4, the player is expected to win the fall lottery, and after that, after shifting to the left-handed mode H6b in the high-probability and low support state H6, the player does not want to win the fall lottery. The player can be made to think that. In this way, as the game state shifts, it is possible to make the player feel the exact opposite of winning the fall lottery, so that it is possible to add excitement to the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the falling lottery is won, the lottery mode changes and the game state shifts. The change of the lottery mode and the transition of the game state have a great effect on the degree of advantage for the player. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to make the player strongly interested in whether or not he or she will win the drop lottery, and to improve the interest in the game.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game by providing the player with emotions such as a sense of anticipation, a sense of security, and a sense of urgency.

It should be noted that "in the mode H6a during special 2 remaining pending digestion in the high-probability low support state H6, if the falling lottery is won" is acquired in the high-probability high support state H4, the second reservation area of the reservation information storage area 64b It can be rephrased as the case where the fall lottery is won before the hit determination for each of the special 2 remaining reserves stored in Rb ends in the high probability low support state H6. For this reason, until the hit determination for each of the special 2 remaining reservations acquired in the high probability high support state H4 and stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b ends in the high probability low support state H6 2, when the fall lottery is won, the state H1b is shifted to the mode H1b in which the special 2 remaining hold is being digested in the low-probability low support state H1, and in the game round in which the fall is won, a jackpot or a short-time grant will be won, When the short-time provision is won, the low-probability and low-probability support state H1 is shifted to the low-probability-high support state H5 in which the next big win is substantially guaranteed.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the high probability high support state H4, the number of games after shifting to the high probability high support state H4 is won in the falling lottery in the game rotation within the number of time reduction continuation times (5 times) When it does, it shifts from the high probability high support state H4 to the low probability high support state H5 in which the next probability variable jackpot is guaranteed. In addition, in the high-accuracy low-support state H6, which has shifted from the high-accuracy high-support state H4 after the number of times of time-saving continuation (5 times) has passed, the falling lottery in the game rotation within the number of times corresponding to the number of special 2 remaining reservations When winning, from the mode H6a during special 2 remaining pending digestion in high probability low support state H6, via mode H1b during special 2 remaining pending digestion in low probability low support state H1, the next probability variable jackpot It shifts to the guaranteed low-probability-height support state H5. For this reason, when moving to the high probability high support state H4, the probability of winning the next big hit (continuation rate) is the same as the high probability high support When transitioning from state H4 to low-probability high support state H5, and from high-probability high-support state H4 to high-probability low support state H6 Special in low-probability low support state H1 via mode H6a during remaining pending digestion It is necessary to consider the case of shifting to mode H1b in which 2 residues are pending digestion. Specifically, as described above, it is a value calculated by the following equation (4) (=equation (4) shown above).

Retention rate = 1-[{(1-1/3) x (1-1/20)}^5] x
[{(1-1/3)×(1-1/20)}^4]×
{(1-1/3)×(1-1/20)×(1-1/2)} ...(4)

Calculating the formula (4) gives a continuation rate of about 99.5%. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is a ream system that is completely different from conventional pachinko machines, and it is possible to realize a machine with extremely high specifications for ream performance.

According to the pachinko machine 10 having the continuous playing performance, the following effects can also be obtained compared with the conventional pachinko machine. Conventionally, there are two types of pachinko machines, loop type and ST type, which have different techniques for continuing the jackpot. In the loop type pachinko machine, since it is confirmed that the next big win will be won in the high-probability and high-support state, the continuation rate is determined based on the distribution probability to the probability-variable big win when the big win is won. This means that in a loop-type pachinko machine, the continuation rate is determined based on the probability that, when the symbols are aligned, the aligned symbols are probability variable symbols (for example, "7" symbols). For this reason, in the high-probability-high support state, the player just watches the game rounds being digested, and when the symbols are aligned, the matching symbols are expected to be variable probability symbols. . On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as described above, in the high-accuracy and high-support state H4, the number of times the game is executed after the high-frequency support mode is started is the time-saving continuous number. A maximum of 4 times executed based on each game round within 5 times and the special 2 remaining hold after transitioning to the high probability low support state (state H6) (may be 5 times as described above) , the player can expect to win a falling lottery or a winning lottery. As a result, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a greater sense of anticipation than the conventional loop type pachinko machine.

In the ST type pachinko machine, the continuation rate in the high-probability and high-support state is calculated by calculating the probability of not winning a jackpot in a winning lottery per game round, calculating the probability of losing in all ST times, and subtracting the probability of losing from 1. can be obtained by Therefore, in the ST type pachinko machine, the continuation rate is determined based on the probability of matching symbols (probability of winning a jackpot) and the number of times of ST. Therefore, in the ST type pachinko machine, as the number of game rounds executed in the high-quality and high support state progresses, the sense of urgency that the number of game rounds will reach the ST number without winning the jackpot is increased. can be granted to a person. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the period from the high-probability high support state (state H4) to the high-probability low support state (state H6), in addition to the jackpot winning (the symbols are aligned), the falling It is possible to impart a sense of urgency to the player as to whether or not the special 2 remaining reserve will be lost without winning the lottery. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, compared with the conventional ST type pachinko machine, it is possible to impart a greater sense of urgency to the player by adding the drop winning to the jackpot winning. can.

As a pachinko machine having other game properties, the following configuration is also conceivable. When a small win is won in a winning lottery (a small win is won with a high probability) in a specific advantageous state that is advantageous to the player before the number of games played after shifting to that advantageous state reaches a predetermined number. , a configuration in which the open/close execution mode (round game) is continued when a game ball enters the V winning hole. According to this configuration, since the game cycle to be executed from the advantageous state to the opening/closing execution mode is completed in a short time, the opening/closing execution mode is repeated at short intervals, and the gambling property is excessively increased. I had a problem. On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the route that shifts from the high-probability support state H4 to the open/close execution mode H3, it is guaranteed that the final jackpot will be won, and the lottery mode is low. Since it is possible to go through the low probability high support state H5 in which the winning lottery can be repeatedly performed in the probability mode, it is possible to take a sufficient time to shift from the high probability high support state H4 to the opening/closing execution mode H3. For this reason, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from being excessively increased due to repetition of the open/close execution mode at short intervals. In addition, by taking a sufficient amount of time, it is possible to obtain a secondary effect that various effects can be performed. These effects cannot be achieved even by the structure of the pachinko machine having other game characteristics.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment exhibits superior effects as compared with various types of conventional pachinko machines.

<<10-8>> Modification of the tenth embodiment:
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and can be implemented in various aspects without departing from the scope of the invention. For example, the following modifications are possible. In addition, in the modified example described below, description of the same configuration, processing, and effects as those of the above-described embodiment is omitted.

<<10-8-1>> Modification 1:
In this modification 1, with respect to the configuration of the 10th embodiment, when the number of times the probability variable jackpot is won in succession (hereinafter referred to as the probability variable continuous number of times) reaches the upper limit (limit), even if the probability variable jackpot is won Even in such a case, a configuration is added in which the lottery mode becomes the low-probability mode after the opening/closing execution mode based on the probability variable jackpot ends. A detailed description will be given below.

484 is an explanatory diagram showing a game flow in the pachinko machine of Modification 1. FIG. As shown in FIG. 484, the pachinko machine of Modification 1 has a variable probability limit function in the opening and closing execution mode H3 executed when the jackpot is won in the low probability low support state (state H1) and distributed to the variable probability jackpot. It is

In the opening/closing execution mode H3, the following processing is executed as the variable probability limit function. First, in the mode H1a during left-handed hitting in the low probability low support state H1, winning a jackpot in the winning lottery and the distribution result by the distribution judgment becomes a probability variable jackpot (so-called winning a probability variable jackpot at the first hit) 1 is set to the probability variable continuation number counter when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode H3. After that, the value of the variable probability continuation number counter is incremented by 1 every time a big win is won in the winning lottery and the result of allocation by the allocation determination becomes a variable probability big win and the opening/closing execution mode H3 is entered. Then, it is determined whether the value of the probability variable continuation counter has reached a predetermined probability limit number of times (for example, 3 times), and when it is determined that the value of the probability variable continuation counter does not reach the probability limit number of times , after the opening/closing execution mode H3 ends, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment, by shifting the lottery mode to the high-probability mode and shifting the support mode to the high-frequency support mode, the opening/closing execution mode It shifts from H3 to high-probability-high support state H4. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the probability variable continuation number counter has reached the probability variable limit number of times, after the opening/closing execution mode H3 ends, the lottery mode is shifted to the low probability mode, and the support mode is shifted to the high frequency support mode. By doing so, the opening/closing execution mode H3 is shifted to the low probability high support state H5.

The operation in the low definite height support state H5 is the same as in the tenth embodiment. That is, in the low-probability support state H5, the player continuously hits to the right, causing the game ball to flow down to the right side of the game area PA and enter the game ball into the second starting port 34 . Since the lottery result of the winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second start port 34 in the low-probability support state H5 is limited to either the jackpot winning or the short-time giving winning, the jackpot in the winning lottery. Since the time-saving provision is won even if the player does not win, the high-frequency support mode is continued as the support mode until the next big win is won. In other words, when the time-saving provision is won in the winning lottery, the high-frequency support mode continues until the next big win is won, and the next big win is virtually guaranteed. In addition, since the jackpot type based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 34 is limited to the 16R probability variable jackpot, in the low probability high support state H5, the probability variable jackpot is won, and the high probability high support It is guaranteed that state H4 will be entered again.

The value of the variable probability continuation number counter is cleared to 0 each time the lottery mode in the game state shifts from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. Specifically, if the number of times of probability variation reaches the upper limit (limit), if you fall in a falling lottery, if you win a jackpot in a winning lottery and the distribution result by the distribution judgment is a normal jackpot, or high When the number of game rounds executed in the probability mode reaches the ST number, the value of the variable probability continuation number counter is cleared to zero. The rest of the configuration of the pachinko machine of Modification 1 is the same as that of the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

According to the pachinko machine of Modification 1 configured as described above, in the mode H1a during left-handed hitting in the low probability low support state H1, after winning the probability variable jackpot at the first hit, again, the low probability low support state By the time H1 returns to left-handed mode H1a, in the high-probability high support state H4 or the high-probability low support state H6, the number of times that a jackpot is won in a winning lottery and the distribution result by distribution determination is a variable probability is variable. When the limit number of times of 3 is reached, after the opening/closing execution mode H3 based on the winning of the jackpot is ended, the game shifts to the low probability high support state H5. In the low probability high support state H5, as described above, since it is guaranteed to win the probability variable jackpot and move again to the high probability high support state H4, according to the pachinko machine of the modified example 1, the first hit After winning the variable jackpot, in the high-probability high support state H4 or the high-probability low support state H6, the jackpot was won in the winning lottery, and the distribution result by the distribution judgment was the probability variable jackpot 3 times. In that case, the probability variable jackpot is won again, and the state shifts to the high probability high support state H4. That is, when the probability variable jackpot is won three times, the player is given the privilege of the probability variable jackpot one more time. In other words, if the variable probability big win continues three times, the fourth time variable probability big win is guaranteed. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine of Modification 1, it is possible to give great joy to the player by giving the privilege one more time. Furthermore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the continuation of the variable probability big win three times. In particular, since it is very important to continue the variable probability big win three times, the third time of the variable probability big win after the second time the variable probability big win is given to the player with a greater sense of expectation. be able to.

In the pachinko machine of Modification 1, the variable probability limit number of times is set to 3 times, but it may be set to 2 times, 4 times, 5 times, or the like.

<<10-8-2>> Modification 2:
In the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment, when a big win is won by a winning lottery and the distribution result of the distribution determination is a normal win, the support mode is changed to the low-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. Met. On the other hand, as a modified example, in the game state where the lottery mode is the high probability mode, if a big win is won by a winning lottery and the result of allocation by allocation determination is a normal win, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, The support mode may be configured to be a high-frequency support mode. A detailed description will be given below.

485 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table for the first start opening provided in the pachinko machine of Modification 2. FIG. FIG. 485(a) shows the distribution table for the first start port (for low probability mode), and FIG. 485(b) shows the distribution table for the first start port (for high probability mode). The distribution table for the first starting port provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment did not distinguish between the low probability mode and the high probability mode, but in contrast, the pachinko machine of the modified example 2 is provided. The distribution table for the first starting port is divided into low-probability mode and high-probability mode.

The distribution table for the first start opening provided in the pachinko machine of Modification 2 (for low probability mode) is the same as the distribution table for the first start opening provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment.

The distribution table for the first start opening provided in the pachinko machine of Modification 2 (for the high probability mode) is compared with the distribution table for the first start opening provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment. When a jackpot is won by a lottery and the type of the jackpot won is the 8R normal jackpot, the difference is that the support mode shifts to the high-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode is finished, and the others are the same. The high-frequency support mode referred to here is a type in which the high-frequency support mode is continued until the next big win is won.

Moreover, the pachinko machine of the modified example 2 differs in the number of times of ST compared with the pachinko machine 10 of 10th Embodiment. In the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment, the number of STs is set to 10 times, whereas in the pachinko machine of Modified Example 2, the number of STs is set to 13 times.

486 is an explanatory diagram showing a game flow in the pachinko machine of Modification 2. FIG. In the pachinko machine of the modified example 2, since the number of times of ST is 13 times, the number of game times executed in the mode H6b during left-handed hitting in the high-probability low support state H6 is lower than in the case of the tenth embodiment. Yes, there are more. Specifically, in the mode H6a during special 2 remaining pending digestion in the high probability low support state H6, four times corresponding to the maximum pending number of game balls entering the second start port 34, the game round was executed In this case, the number of game rounds executed in the state H6b during left-handed hitting in the high-probability-low support state H6 is four. That is, the number of times obtained by subtracting 5 times, which is the time saving continuation number, and 4 times executed in the mode H6a during special 2 residual hold digestion from 13 times, which is the ST number, that is, 4 times is left-handed It is the number of game rounds executed in the mode H6b. On the other hand, when the game round is not performed even once in the mode H6a during the special 2 remaining pending digestion, the number of times obtained by subtracting the number of times of shortening continuation times of 5 times from the number of ST times of 13 times, that is, 8 times is the number of game rounds executed in the mode H6b during left-handed hitting.

In the mode H6b during left-handed hitting executed 4 to 8 times, when a jackpot is won by a winning lottery and the result of distribution by distribution determination is a normal jackpot, it is given to the player after the game round is finished. Opening and closing execution mode is executed as a privilege. That is, the high-probability-low support state H6 is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode H7. After the opening/closing execution mode H7 ends, the lottery mode shifts from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode, and the support mode shifts from the low-frequency support mode to the high-frequency support mode. As a result, the opening/closing execution mode H7 is shifted to the low-probability-height support state H5. At this time, the high-frequency support mode will continue until the next jackpot is won.

The operation in the low definite height support state H5 is the same as that of the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment. That is, in the low-probability support state H5, the player continuously hits to the right, causing the game ball to flow down to the right side of the game area PA and enter the game ball into the second starting port 34 . Since the lottery result of the winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second start port 34 in the low-probability support state H5 is limited to either the jackpot winning or the short-time giving winning, the jackpot in the winning lottery. Since the time-saving provision is won even if the player does not win, the high-frequency support mode is continued as the support mode until the next big win is won. In other words, when the time-saving provision is won in the winning lottery, the high-frequency support mode continues until the next big win is won, and the next big win is virtually guaranteed. In addition, since the jackpot type based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 34 is limited to the 16R probability variable jackpot, in the low probability high support state H5, the probability variable jackpot is won, and the high probability high support It is guaranteed that state H4 will be entered again.

The rest of the configuration of the pachinko machine of Modification 2 is the same as that of the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

According to the pachinko machine of Modified Example 2 configured as described above, i) In the high-probability-high support state H4, neither the winning lottery nor the falling lottery is won, and the state is shifted to the high-probability-high support state H4. Since the number of games after reaching 5 times, it misses the transition from the high probability high support state H4 to the low probability high support state H5 that is guaranteed to win the next big hit, ii) high probability low support In the state H6a in which the special 2 remaining reserve is being digested in the state H6, the special 2 remaining reserve is lost without winning either the winning lottery or the falling lottery, thereby changing from the high probability low support state H6 to the low probability low support. Even if you miss the transition to the low-probability high support state H5 via the state H1b during special 2 remaining pending digestion in the state H1, in the state H6b during left-handed hitting in the high-probability low support state H6, hit A big hit is won by a lottery, and the result of distribution by distribution determination is a normal big win, so that the high-probability low support state H6 can be shifted to the low-probability high support state H5 via the opening/closing execution mode H7. Therefore, even if the player misses the chances of i) and ii) and is disappointed, he/she can win the next jackpot by winning the normal jackpot in the state H6b during left-handed hitting in the high-probability/low support state H6. You will be given another chance to move to the guaranteed low definite height support state H5. Therefore, the player has both a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency regarding the normal jackpot in the state H6b of hitting left in the high-probability-low support state H6. As a result, according to the pachinko machine of Modification 2, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the pachinko machine of Modification 2, when the lottery mode is the high-probability mode, the high-frequency support mode given when the jackpot is won is of a type that continues until the next jackpot win. However, instead of this, the high frequency support mode may be of a type that continues for only one game round. Even if the high-frequency support mode continues only once, after the opening and closing execution mode H7 ends, the system moves to the low probability high support state H5, and then by winning the time saving in the low probability high support state H5. This is because the high-frequency support mode is continued until the next big win is won. That is, when the lottery mode is the high-probability mode, the high-frequency support mode given when the jackpot is won may be once or many times.

<<10-8-3>> Modification 3:
In the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment, there is no set error in the success/failure table for the second start port (for low probability mode), and when the jackpot is not won, the time saving grant is always won. . On the other hand, as a modification, there is a setting of jackpot winning, time saving giving winning and loss in the success/failure table for the second start port (for low probability mode), and if the jackpot does not win, time saving giving winning It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which it is distributed to the case of being out of line and the case of being out of line. A detailed description will be given below.

487 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the success/failure table (for the low-probability mode) for the second starting port in Modification 3. FIG. As shown in FIG. 487, the success/failure table for the second starting port (for low probability mode) is set to 20 values of 0 to 19 as the value of the random number counter C1 that will be a big hit, and the time saving is given. 1980 values from 20 to 1999 are set as the value of the random number counter C1, and 1980 values from 2000 to 3979 are set as the value of the random number counter C1 that will be out (an event that does not win the jackpot or short-time award). A value is set. In this case, the number of value groups of the winning random number counter C1, which is a big hit, is 20/3980 (=1/199) with respect to the total number, and the number of values of the winning random number counter C1, which is a time-saving grant, is The total number is 1980/3980 (=99/199), and the number of values of the winning random number counter C1 that are outliers is 1980/3980 (=99/199). ing. As a result, according to the success/failure table for the second starting port (for low probability mode), 1/2 of the number of value groups of the winning random number counter C1 that does not result in a big hit is given as a time reduction, and the number of the winning random number counter C1 that does not result in a big hit is reduced. 1/2 of the number of value groups are outliers.

In addition, the "time saving grant" won in this modification is a type of time saving grant in which the high frequency support mode is continued for a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times) game times, and this point is also different from the tenth embodiment. . That is, in the tenth embodiment, when the time-saving provision winning in the winning lottery, the high frequency support mode continues as the support mode until the next time the jackpot is won in the winning lottery, whereas in this modification, the winning When the lottery is won, the high-frequency support mode is continued as the support mode only for a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times).

488 is an explanatory diagram showing a game flow in the pachinko machine of Modification 3. FIG. The flow of the game in the pachinko machine of the modification 3, compared with the case of the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment (see FIG. 455), the operation in the low probability high support state H5 and the special feature in the low probability low support state H1 The operation is different from that of mode H1b during 2-remaining pending digestion, and the other operations are the same.

In the pachinko machine of the modified example 3, in the low-probability sapo state H5, when the jackpot is not won in the winning lottery, it is sorted into short-time grant winning and loss with a probability of 1/2. When the short-time application wins, the high-frequency support mode as the support mode is continued for five game rounds. During the five game rounds in which the high-frequency support mode is continued, if neither the jackpot nor the short-time award is won in the winning lottery (in case of loss), after the five game rounds are completed, The support mode shifts from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode. That is, during five game rounds in which the high-frequency support mode is continued, if neither the jackpot nor the short-time grant is won in the winning lottery, the low-probability high support state H5 to the low-probability low support state H1 transition to The transition destination in the low-probability low support state H1 is the aspect H1a during left-handed when there is no special 2 remaining hold, and the aspect H1b in which special 2 remaining is being digested when there is a special 2 remaining hold. .

In the low-probability high support state H5, if the time-saving grant is won again in the winning lottery before the 5 game rounds in which the high-frequency support mode is continued are completed, the period of the high-frequency support mode is 5 times. is extended by the number of games played. For this reason, in the low-probability high support state H5, if it is possible to repeat winning the time-saving grant in the winning lottery again by the end of the five game rounds in which the high-frequency support mode is continued, high-frequency support It is possible to sequentially extend the period of the mode until the next big win is won.

Similarly, in the mode H1b during special 2 remaining pending digestion in the low-probability low support state H1, when the jackpot is not won in the winning lottery, it is sorted into short-time grant winning and loss with a probability of 1/2. When the time-saving provision is won, the support mode shifts from the low-frequency support mode to the high-frequency support mode, and as a result, the low-probability low support state H1 shifts to the previously described low-probability high support state H5.

The rest of the configuration of the pachinko machine of Modification 3 is the same as that of the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

According to the pachinko machine of the modified example 3 configured as described above, in the high probability high support state H4, when the falling lottery is won in the game round before the number of times of execution of the game round reaches the number of times of continuous time reduction, high It shifts from the high-probability support state H4 to the low-probability support state H5. If it is possible to repeatedly win the time-saving grant, the period during which the high-frequency support mode is continued can be successively extended until the next big win is won. For this reason, even if the player does not win a jackpot in the winning lottery in the low-probability support state H5, it is possible to shorten the time in the winning lottery by the end of the five game rounds in which the high-frequency support mode is continued. Winning an award can be repeatedly expected. On the flip side, the player is repeatedly given a sense of urgency, such as whether they will win the jackpot or the short-time grant in the winning lottery by the end of the five game rounds in which the high-frequency support mode continues. can be granted.

In addition, in the mode H1b in which special 2 remaining reserve is consumed in the low-probability low support state H1, the player can be expected to win the time-saving award even if he/she does not win the jackpot in the winning lottery. As described above, according to the pachinko machine of Modified Example 3, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by imparting feelings such as expectation and security to the player.

<<10-8-4>> Modification 4:
In the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment, the number of times of ST (10 times) is the number of times of time-saving continuation (5 times), and the number of times corresponding to the maximum number of reserved game balls entering the second start port 34 (4 times ) and one extra time (10 times). On the other hand, the number of times of ST may be the number of times exceeding the above total. For example, the number of STs may be 11 times, 12 times, . . . , 15 times, . Even with this modification, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment, it corresponds to a game ball entered just before the electric accessory 34a closes when transitioning from the high-accuracy high support state H4 to the high-accuracy low support state H6. The special 2 remaining hold can be used without fail in the mode H6a during digestion of the special 2 remaining hold in the high probability low support state (state H6), and with the special 2 remaining hold remaining, the high probability low support state H6 There is no return to the low probability low support state H1 from. Therefore, even with the pachinko machine of this modification, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment, after reaching the ST number from the high probability high support state H4 and returning to the low probability low support state H1, the special 2 remaining Since it is possible to eliminate the flow of the game in which the winning of the time-saving provision is held, the soundness of the game can be improved.

<<10-8-5>> Modification 5:
In the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment described above, a jackpot is won by a winning lottery, and a game ball enters the V prize opening 48 that is opened at the time of the jackpot even though the type of the jackpot that is won is a probability variable jackpot. When the ball is not hit, the lottery mode does not shift to the high-probability mode, and the support mode does not shift to the high-frequency support mode. On the other hand, as a modified example, when a jackpot is won by a winning lottery, the type of the jackpot won is a variable jackpot, and a game ball does not enter the V prize opening 48 opened with the jackpot as a trigger. , the lottery mode does not shift to the high-probability mode, but the support mode may shift to the high-frequency support mode.

According to this modification, in the low-probability-low support state H1 (see FIG. 455), a jackpot is won by a winning lottery, the type of the jackpot won is a variable probability jackpot, and the V winning port 48 opened with the jackpot as a trigger. When the game ball does not enter the game ball, the low-probability low support state H1 is shifted to the low-probability high support state H5 via the opening/closing execution mode H3. In the low definite height support state H5, the next big win (variable definite big win) is practically guaranteed, which is highly advantageous for the player. Therefore, according to this modified example, a jackpot is won by a winning lottery, the type of the jackpot won is a probability variable jackpot, and the game operation is such that the game ball is not allowed to enter the V winning port 48 opened with the jackpot as a trigger. can be valid. According to this modification, in the high-probability high support state H4, until the number of times of execution of the game round after shifting to the high-probability high support state H4 reaches 5 times, which is the number of time-saving continuations (within 5 times), When the player wins the falling lottery, it has a game property that it can shift to the low probability high support state H5 in which the next probability variable big win is virtually guaranteed. If a game operation is performed that does not dare to enter the ball, it is possible to shift to the low-probability support state H5 without winning the falling lottery within the above five times, and the above game characteristics are impaired. A thorny problem arose. This problem can be solved by the following modified example 6.

<<10-8-6>> Modification 6:
The pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment is configured to include one variable winning device 36 . On the other hand, as a modified example, the configuration may include a first variable winning device and a second variable winning device. The first variable prize winning device has a configuration in which a large prize winning port and an opening/closing door for opening and closing the large prize winning port are provided, and a V winning prize port is not provided. The second variable winning device includes a large winning opening, an opening/closing door for opening and closing the large winning opening, and a V winning opening provided inside the large winning opening. The second variable winning device differs from the variable winning device 36 provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment in that it does not have the V winning opening shutter 48a. In this modification, when a jackpot is won by a winning lottery and the type of the jackpot won is a normal jackpot, the opening/closing door of the first variable winning device is opened and closed in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot. state and repeat. On the other hand, when a jackpot is won by a winning lottery and the type of the jackpot won is a probability variable jackpot, the opening/closing door of the second variable winning device switches between an open state and a closed state triggered by the jackpot in the open/close execution mode. repeat.

According to the above configuration, when a jackpot is won by the winning lottery and the type of the jackpot won is a normal jackpot, the game ball enters the big prize opening of the first variable prize winning device, and the game ball enters the V prize opening. No ball enters. On the other hand, when a jackpot is won by a winning lottery and the type of the jackpot won is a probability variable jackpot, a game ball enters the big prize opening of the second variable prize winning device, and a V winning opening shutter is provided. Therefore, the game ball entering the big winning hole will enter the V winning hole with 100% probability. For this reason, when a big win is won by a winning lottery and the type of the won big win is a certain variable big win, the game ball does not enter the V winning hole while the game ball enters the big winning hole. Therefore, according to this modification, it is possible to avoid moving from the low probability low support state H1 to the low probability high support state H5 via the opening and closing execution mode H3, so in the high probability high support state H4, If the player wins the fall lottery before the number of times the game is executed after shifting to the high-quality high support state H4 reaches 5 times, which is the number of time-saving continuation times (within 5 times), in fact, the following It is possible to exhibit the original game property of being able to shift to the low-probability-high support state H5 in which the probability variable jackpot is guaranteed.

<<10-8-7>> Modification 7:
Further, as a configuration in which a game operation in which a game ball is not allowed to enter the V winning opening 48 is not possible, the following configuration can be used instead of the sixth modification. A gate through which the game ball can pass is provided in an area where the game ball can enter by a right-handed operation, and only when the game ball passes through the gate when executing a round game based on winning a jackpot, a variable winning device 36. The opening/closing door 36b starts opening/closing operation, and a V prize opening is provided directly under the gate. According to this configuration, in order to start the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable prize winning device 36, it is necessary to let the game ball pass through the gate, and in that case, the game ball must enter the V prize opening. It will be. Therefore, even according to this modification, when a jackpot is won by a winning lottery and the type of the jackpot won is a probability variable jackpot, the game ball does not enter the V winning port while the game ball enters the big winning port. never. Therefore, according to this modification, it is possible to avoid moving from the low probability low support state H1 to the low probability high support state H5 via the opening and closing execution mode H3, so in the high probability high support state H4, If the player wins the fall lottery before the number of times the game is executed after shifting to the high-quality high support state H4 reaches 5 times, which is the number of time-saving continuations (within 5 times), in effect, the following It is possible to exhibit the original game property of being able to shift to the low-probability-high support state H5 in which the probability variable jackpot is guaranteed.

<<10-8-8>> Modification 8:
In the tenth embodiment and its modification, the lottery mode of the winning lottery is changed from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode when winning the fall lottery using the value of the fall random number counter CF. On the other hand, as a modified example, the game board 30 is provided with a drop hole into which the game ball can enter, and when the game ball enters the drop hole, the lottery mode of the winning lottery changes from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. It is good also as composition changed into probability mode. In this configuration, a game ball sorting device for sorting game balls between a flow path leading to the fall opening and a flow path leading to a place other than the fall opening (for example, an out opening or a second start opening) is provided above the fall opening. It can also be set as the structure provided. According to these configurations, since the player can visually recognize whether or not the game ball enters the falling hole, in the high probability high support state H4, the game after transition to the high probability high support state H4 The player can wait with a sense of urgency and expectation whether or not the game ball enters the falling hole before the number of times of execution reaches the number of time-saving continuations.

<<10-8-9>> Modification 9:
In the tenth embodiment, its modified example 1, and its modified example 2, when the short-time grant winning is won in the winning lottery, the high-frequency support mode is continued as the support mode until the next big win is won in the winning lottery. and On the other hand, as a modification, the period during which the high frequency support mode is continued as the support mode (hereinafter referred to as the high support duration period) is extended until the number of game executions reaches a predetermined number (for example, 5 times). You can replace it with That is, when the winning lottery wins, the high-frequency support mode may be continued as the support mode until the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number (for example, 5 times). The predetermined number of times is not necessarily limited to 5 times, and may be any number of times such as 1 time, 2 times, 3 times, 4 times and 6 times. Other configurations in this modification are the same as in the tenth embodiment. If you do not win the jackpot, you will be elected for the reduction of working hours).

According to the configuration of this modification, by the end of the high support duration period, the short-time grant winning will be won in the repeated winning lottery. are sequentially extended, and this extension is repeated until a big win is won in a winning lottery. As a result, the high frequency support mode is continued as the support mode until the next big win is won in the winning lottery. Therefore, according to this modification, as in the tenth embodiment, in the low-probability support state H5, using a time-saving grant that continues only a predetermined number of times, the next time, until the jackpot is won in the winning lottery, as a lottery mode. There is an effect that it is possible to realize a game property in which the high-frequency support mode is continued. In other words, the high-frequency support mode is continued as the lottery mode until the next big win in the winning lottery without using the short-time provision of continuing the high-frequency support mode as the support mode until the big win is won in the winning lottery. Playability can be realized.

<<10-8-10>> Modification 10:
In the above embodiment, the special information obtained in the high probability high support state as the specific game state which is the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode, and the entry of the game ball to the second start port 34 As an advantageous game state that is guaranteed to move again to a high-certainty high support state as a specific game state when a specific condition such as winning a falling lottery is established before the end of the winning lottery for special information based on On the other hand, the number of executions of the game after shifting to the high probability high support state as a specific game state is a predetermined number of times (ST number of times) without winning the falling lottery. When it reaches, the probability of moving again to the specific game state is lower than the advantageous game state, which is a low probability low support state as a predetermined game state. is an example, and various combinations can be adopted as the types of lottery mode and support mode in each game state.

Specifically, for example, as a specific game state, high probability mode and high frequency support mode high probability high support state and high probability mode low frequency support mode high probability low support mode, low probability mode A low probability high support state which is a high frequency support mode, a low probability low support state which is a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode, etc. may be adopted. Also, for example, as an advantageous gaming state, high probability mode and high frequency support mode high probability high support state, high probability mode low frequency support mode high probability low support state, low probability mode high A low probability high support state which is a frequency support mode, a low probability low support state which is a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode, etc. may be adopted. Further, for example, as the predetermined game state, high probability mode and high frequency support mode high probability high support state, high probability mode low frequency support mode high probability low support mode, low probability mode high A low probability high support state which is a frequency support mode, a low probability low support state which is a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode, etc. may be adopted. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game in the same manner as in the above-described embodiment.

<<10-8-11>> Modification 11:
In the above embodiment, in the high probability high support state as the first specific game state which is the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode, when the specific condition of winning the falling lottery is established, the support mode is specified A first predetermined game state in which the high-frequency support mode is maintained for a period, for example, until the next big win is won in a winning lottery, and which is more advantageous to the player than the high-probability and high-support state. On the other hand, in the high probability high support state, when the second predetermined condition is established such that the number of times of the time-saving continuous game is executed without winning the falling lottery, It is configured to shift to a high probability low support state as a second specific game state, and in the high probability low support state, a winning lottery for special information acquired based on the entry of a game ball into the first start port 33 When a specific condition such as winning a falling lottery is established, the game is shifted to a low-probability low support state as a second predetermined game state which is less advantageous for the player than the high-probability low support state. However, the types of the lottery mode and the support mode in each game state are examples, and various combinations can be adopted as the types of the lottery mode and the support mode in each game state.

Specifically, for example, as the first specific game state, high probability mode and high frequency support mode high probability high support state, high probability mode low frequency support mode high probability low support mode, low A low probability high support state which is a probability mode and a high frequency support mode, a low probability low support state which is a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode, etc. may be adopted. Also, for example, as the first predetermined game state, a high probability high support state that is a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode, a high probability low support state that is a high probability mode and a low frequency support mode, and a low probability mode A low probability high support state which is a high frequency support mode, a low probability low support state which is a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode, etc. may be adopted. Also, for example, as the second specific game state, high probability mode and high frequency support mode high probability high support state, high probability mode low frequency support mode high probability low support mode, low probability mode A low probability high support state which is a high frequency support mode, a low probability low support state which is a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode, etc. may be adopted. Also, for example, as the second predetermined game state, a high probability high support state that is a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode, a high probability low support state that is a high probability mode and a low frequency support mode, and a low probability mode A low probability high support state which is a high frequency support mode, a low probability low support state which is a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode, etc. may be adopted. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game in the same manner as in the above-described embodiment.

<<10-8-12>> Modification 12:
The configuration of this modified example described below may be applied to the above embodiment and each of the modified examples. An example in which the configuration of this modified example is applied to the above-described embodiment will be specifically described below with reference to FIG. 455 described above.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example, when shifting from the opening/closing execution mode H3 to the high-probability-high support state H4, an effect is executed to notify that the game state has shifted to a game state that is highly advantageous for the player. In this modified example, as an effect to notify that the game state has shifted to a highly advantageous game state, an image of a specific character (in this modified example, an image of female character A) and a character string such as "Enter the chance zone!" The character string is displayed on the display device 41, and an effect (chance zone entering effect) is executed to output a sound corresponding to the character string from the speaker 46.例文帳に追加Then, the pattern display device 41 is caused to display a specific background image (hereinafter referred to as a first specific background image) indicating that the game has entered the chance zone. By recognizing the chance zone entering effect and the first specific background image, the player recognizes that the player has entered a highly advantageous chance zone, and expects to win a big prize or a falling lottery. become.

Then, in the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example, the falling lottery was won in the game spin before the number of games after shifting to the high-accuracy-high support state H4 reaches 5 times (within 5 times), which is the number of time-saving continuations. In this case, just before the end of the game round, an effect is executed that suggests that an event advantageous to the player has occurred. In this modified example, as the effect, an image of a specific character (in this modified example, an image of a monkfish character) and a character string such as "Put into the safe zone!" An effect (play of entering a safe zone) is executed to output a sound corresponding to the row from the speaker 46.例文帳に追加Then, the pattern display device 41 is caused to display a specific background image (hereinafter referred to as a second specific background image) indicating that the game has entered the safe zone. By recognizing the effect of entering the safe zone and the second specific background image, the player can clearly recognize that an advantageous event such as entering the safe zone has occurred. Then, the pachinko machine 10 shifts from the high-probability-high support state H4 to the low-probability-high support state H5 with the drop winning as a trigger. In addition, in this modification, if the jackpot (probable variable jackpot) is also won in the game round in which the fall lottery is won, the above-mentioned safe zone entry effect is not executed, and it is announced that the probability variable jackpot has been won. Execute the production to do.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this modification, neither the jackpot nor the falling lottery is won in the high probability high support state H4, and the number of times of execution of the game round after shifting to the high probability high support state H4 is the number of time reduction continuation times ( 5 times), in the case of transitioning to mode H6a of digesting special 2 remaining pending in high probability low support state H6, the state with high advantage for the player corresponds to the number of special 2 remaining pending. A performance suggesting continuation only for a limited number of games is executed. In this modified example, as the effect, an image of a specific character (in this modified example, an image of female character B) and a character string such as "Enter the final chance zone!" An effect (final chance zone rushing effect) for outputting a sound corresponding to is output from the speaker 46 is executed. Then, a specific background image (hereinafter referred to as a third specific background image) indicating that the final chance zone has been reached is displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the remaining number of games (specific Numerical information (special 2 remaining pending countdown information) indicating the number of 2 remaining pending numbers is displayed on the pattern display device 41 . By recognizing the final chance zone entry performance, the third specific background image, and the special 2 remaining pending countdown information, the player can win a big hit or fall lottery before the numerical value of the special 2 remaining pending countdown information becomes 0. You will have the feeling that you want to be elected.

Then, when winning the drop lottery in the mode H6a during special 2 remaining pending digestion in the high probability low support state H6, and when winning the probability variable jackpot in the winning lottery regardless of whether the fall lottery is correct, the middle stage of the game round , an effect is executed to suggest that an event advantageous to the player has occurred. In this modified example, as the effect, an image of a specific character (in this modified example, an image of a whale character) and a character string such as "It's a guaranteed variable jackpot, and you've entered the safe zone!" 41, and an effect for outputting a voice corresponding to the character string from the speaker 46 (advantageous event occurrence selection effect) is executed. A player who recognizes the advantageous event occurrence alternative presentation can clearly recognize that an advantageous event has occurred, such as winning a certainty variable jackpot or entering a safe zone.

Then, when the falling lottery is won in the game round, the special 2 remaining in the low probability low support state H1 from the state H6a during the digestion of special 2 remaining in the high probability low support state H6 with the falling winning as a trigger It will shift to the state H1b of pending digestion, and on the other hand, if the falling lottery is not won in the game spin but the probability variable jackpot is won, the game state transition does not occur. Then, if the result of the winning lottery in the game round is a variable probability jackpot (only a probability variable jackpot because it is a special 2 hold), an effect to announce that the probability variable jackpot has been won is executed just before the end of the game round. On the other hand, if the result of the winning lottery is a time-saving grant winning (that is, the falling lottery is won and the special 2 remaining pending digestion mode H1a in the low-probability low support state H1 is transitioned to, but in the winning lottery In the case of winning the time saving grant without winning the probability variable jackpot), the above-mentioned safe zone entering effect is executed just before the end of the game round. As a result, the player can confirm which advantageous event occurred in the current game round.

As described above, in this modification, the background image (first specific background image corresponding to the chance zone) displayed in the high probability high support state H4, and the high probability low support state from the high probability high support state H4 The background image (the third specific background image corresponding to the final chance zone) displayed during the period from the transition to H6 to the end of the special 2 remaining hold is different. Therefore, it is possible for the player to clearly distinguish and recognize the two states, and to pay attention to the change in the state of the game.

In addition, in this modification, when the fall lottery is won in the high-probability-high support state H4, an effect (anxiety mode entry effect) is executed to suggest that an advantageous event has occurred. Here, in a normal pachinko machine, it is not preferable for a player to win a falling lottery. However, in the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example, winning the falling lottery in the above situation is preferable for the player, unlike the ordinary pachinko machine. Therefore, in this modification, when the fall lottery is won in the high-probability and high support state H4, by executing an effect (safety mode entry effect) that suggests that an advantageous event has occurred, the player , it is possible to clearly recognize that an advantageous event has occurred.

In addition, in this modification, after moving to the high probability low support state H6 by reaching the number of times of time reduction continuation (5 times), the special 2 remaining When a falling lottery is won before the game round by suspension ends in a high-probability low support state H6, a performance suggesting the occurrence of an advantageous event (advantageous event generation alternative performance) is executed. Here, in a normal pachinko machine, it is not preferable for the player to win the falling lottery. However, in the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example, it is preferable for the player to win the falling lottery in the above situation, unlike the ordinary pachinko machine. Therefore, in this modification, after shifting to the high-probability low support state H6, when the drop lottery is won before the game round due to the special 2 remaining hold is completed in the high-probability low support state H6, an advantageous event occurs. By executing an effect (advantageous event occurrence alternative effect) suggesting that the game has occurred, it is possible to make the player clearly recognize that an advantageous event has occurred.

<<10-8-13>> Modification 13:
The configuration of this modified example described below may be applied to the above embodiment and each of the modified examples. In the following description, the symbol displayed in the first symbol display portion 37a of the special symbol unit 37 is also referred to as the "first special symbol", and the symbol displayed in the second symbol display portion 37b is referred to as the "second special symbol". ”, and the pattern displayed on the general pattern unit 38 is also referred to as a “normal pattern”. Also, the "first special design" and the "second special design" are collectively referred to as "special design".

In addition, the "hit lottery" in the above embodiment and each modification is also referred to as the "special figure lottery", and the special figure lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball to the first start port 33 is the "first special lottery". The special figure lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 is also called the "second special figure lottery". In addition, the "electric accessory open lottery" in the above embodiment and each of the modifications is also referred to as the "normal figure lottery", and the "electric accessory 34a" is also referred to as the "normal electric accessory 34a".

In addition, for convenience of explanation, "variation of the first special symbol" is also referred to as "first special symbol variation", "variation of the second special symbol" is also referred to as "second special symbol variation", and "normal symbol variation" Fluctuation" is also called "Uzu fluctuation". In addition, "first special figure fluctuation" and "second special figure fluctuation" are collectively referred to as "special figure fluctuation". In addition, the ST (special time) number of times in the above embodiment and each modification is also referred to as "high probability continuation upper limit number of times", and "time saving continuation number of times" is also referred to as "high support continuation upper limit number of times".

In the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the high probability continuation upper limit number (ST number) is the high support continuation upper limit number (time reduction continuation number, 5 times in the above embodiment). 4) is added, and 1 (or 2 or more) is added as a margin (10 in the above embodiment). The reason for this is that if a configuration is adopted that does not add one time as the above-mentioned allowance to the high probability continuation upper limit number (ST number), the special figure fluctuation that reached the high support continuation upper limit number (5 times) After the start of the next (sixth) special figure fluctuation, if the game ball enters the second start port 34 and the number of special 2 reservations becomes 4, the fourth special 2 The hold will exist as a special 2 remaining hold until after the transition to the low probability low support state H1, and the second special figure lottery based on the fourth special 2 hold will be special 2 of the low probability low support state H1 It is executed in the mode H1b during the remaining pending digestion, and either the probability variable jackpot or the time saving award is surely won, and as a result, the game characteristics assumed at the time of designing the pachinko machine 10 are broken. It is from.

Therefore, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, as described above, the high support continuation upper limit number (5 times) is reached by adding one time as a margin to the high probability continuation upper limit number (ST number). Even if the game ball enters the second start port 34 after the start of the special figure fluctuation next to the special figure fluctuation (sixth time) and the number of special figure 2 reserved becomes 4, The second special figure lottery based on the fourth special 2 reservation (the 10th special figure lottery after moving to the high probability high support state H4) is executed in the high probability low support state H6 (i.e., high probability mode is executed before exiting).

On the other hand, as a modification, the value obtained by adding the high probability continuation upper limit number of times, the high support continuation upper limit number of times (5 times in this modification) and the maximum number of special 2 suspensions (4 in this modification) (this In the modified example, it is set to 9 times), and the configuration is such that one time as a margin is not added, and the next (6th) special figure after the special figure fluctuation that has reached the high support continuation upper limit number (5 times) A configuration may be employed to avoid the game ball entering the second starting port 34 after the start of the fluctuation and the special 2 reservation number becoming four. The configuration of this modified example will be specifically described below.

FIG. 489 is a timing chart showing an example of control when transitioning from the high-probability high support state H4 to the high-probability low support state H6 in this modification. In this modification, the high support continuation upper limit number is set to 5 times, and the high probability continuation upper limit number (ST number) is set to 9 times.

And, in this modification, when the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation after shifting to the high probability high support state H4 reaches the high support continuation upper limit number (5 times), from the high probability high support state H4 to the high probability low support The transition to state H6 (transition from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode) occurs when the high-frequency support mode flag actually changes from ON to OFF when the upper limit number of high-frequency support continuations (5 times) is reached. It is set at the start of the figure fluctuation. In addition, as shown in FIG. 489, after the variation of the special symbol is finished (after it is stopped), a special symbol determination time Tcs of 0.5 seconds is provided. Special figure determination time Tcs is the time (stop display time) during which the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to the result of the special figure lottery, and after the elapse of this special figure determination time Tcs, the next variation of the special symbol (game times) can be started. In addition, like the special symbol, the normal symbol determination time Tcn is provided even after the fluctuation of the normal symbol ends. The control in this modified example will be described below with reference to the example shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 489, the game ball passes through the through gate 35 during execution of the fourth special figure fluctuation (the second special figure fluctuation in the example shown in FIG. 489) after shifting to the high probability high support state H4 If you do, the general pattern lottery is executed and the general pattern variation is started (time t1). When the normal pattern fluctuation time elapses, the normal pattern fluctuation ends (time t2), and the normal pattern stops in a mode corresponding to the result of the normal pattern lottery. Since the general pattern lottery is executed in the high-frequency support mode, it is almost certain (at a probability of 231/233) that the general pattern lottery will be won. Then, as shown in FIG. 489, as a result of the general pattern lottery, when the general pattern is elected, the normal electric accessory 34a is opened at the passage of the general pattern fixed time Tcn (time t3).

In addition, in this modification, the normal pattern fluctuation time in the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode, the normal pattern fixed time Tcn, the normal pattern winning probability that is the probability of winning per normal pattern in the general pattern lottery, the normal pattern The number of times the normal electric accessory 34a is opened when winning a prize, and the normal electric open time, which is the opening time when the normal electric accessory 34a is opened, are set as follows. be.

[Low frequency support mode]
・Normal figure fluctuation time: 10.0 seconds ・Normal figure confirmation time Tcn: 0.1 second ・Normal figure winning probability: 1/233
・Public power open times: 1 time ・Public power open time: 0.1 seconds [in high frequency support mode]
・Normal pattern fluctuation time: 0.2 seconds ・Normal pattern confirmation time Tcn: 0.1 seconds ・Normal pattern winning probability: 231/233
・Public electric open number of times: 1 time ・Public electric open time: 1.4 seconds Even if the high-frequency support mode flag is turned OFF after the lottery is executed (for example, during normal pattern fluctuation), the normal electric accessory 34a will be opened once for 1.4 seconds.

Returning to the description of FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 489, the fourth special figure fluctuation ends during the opening of the normal electric accessory 34a (time t4), and the fifth special figure fluctuation is started after the special figure fixed time Tcs has passed ( At time t5), the number of special 2 reserved items has changed from 4 to 3. As described above, in this modification, the high support continuation upper limit number is set to 5 times, and the timing when the high frequency support mode flag turns from ON to OFF is the special figure fluctuation that has reached the high support continuation upper limit number. Since it is set at the start of fluctuation, the high frequency support mode flag is turned OFF at the start of fluctuation of the fifth special figure fluctuation (time t5).

In the example shown in FIG. 489, since the normal electric accessory 34a continues to open even after the fifth special figure fluctuation starts, the game ball can enter the second start port 34, As shown in FIG. 489, when the game ball enters the second starting port 34 (time t6), the special 2 reservation number increases by one, and becomes from three to four. After that, the normal electric open time elapses, and the normal electric accessory 34a enters the closed state (time t7).

After time t5 when the high-frequency support mode flag is turned off, the normal pattern winning probability is as low as 1/233. In addition, even if the normal electric accessory 34a is opened, the normal electric open time is as short as 0.1 seconds, so the game ball will not enter the second start port 34 substantially. do not have.

Also, temporarily, just before the start of the variation of the fifth special figure variation (that is, just before the high frequency support mode flag turns from ON to OFF), the game ball passes through the through gate 35 and the normal figure lottery is executed, and the normal Even if the normal electric accessory 34a is opened based on the figure lottery, the time required from the start of the normal figure fluctuation in the high frequency support mode until the normal electric accessory 34a closes is 1.7 seconds. And, in this modification, the variation time of at least the fifth special figure variation is not set to 1.7 seconds or less, so the normal electric accessory 34a is until after the start of the sixth special figure variation It won't stay open. Therefore, it is possible to avoid that the game ball enters the second starting port 34 after the sixth special figure fluctuation starts and the special 2 reservation number becomes four.

Thus, in this modification, the high support continuation upper limit number of times (5 times) is reached without adding one time as a margin to the high probability continuation upper limit number of times (ST number of times) as in the above embodiment. It is possible to avoid that the game ball enters the second start port 34 after the start of the special figure fluctuation next to the special figure fluctuation (sixth time) and the number of special figure 2 reserved becomes 4. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the presence of the special 2 remaining hold after shifting to the low probability low support state H1. As a result, it is possible to avoid the unexpected occurrence of the second special figure variation in the low-probability-low support state H1, and it is possible to avoid the collapse of the game characteristics assumed for the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加.

<<10-8-14>> Modification 14:
In the above modification 13, the timing at which the high frequency support mode flag turns from ON to OFF is configured to be set at the start of the fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation that reaches the high support continuation upper limit number of times, but as a modification 14, high The timing at which the frequency support mode flag turns OFF from ON may be configured to be set at the end of the fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation that reaches the high support continuation upper limit number of times. The configuration of Modification 14 will be described below, focusing on the differences from Modification 13 described above.

FIG. 490 is a timing chart showing an example of control when transitioning from the high-probability high support state H4 to the high-probability low support state H6 in this modification. In this modification, similarly to modification 13 described above, the high support continuation upper limit number of times is set to 5 times, and the high probability continuation upper limit number of times is set to 9 times.

And, as described above, in this modification, the timing at which the high-frequency support mode flag turns from ON to OFF is set at the end of the special figure fluctuation reaching the high support continuation upper limit number (5 times).

Furthermore, in this modification, the length of the special figure confirmation time TcsLast after the end of the fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation that has reached the high support continuation upper limit number is changed to the normal special figure confirmation time Tcs (0.5 seconds in this modification) set to a different length. Specifically, the length of the special figure determination time TcsLast is set to a length equal to or longer than the time required from the start of fluctuation of the normal symbol to the closing of the normal electric accessory in the high frequency support mode. In this modification, the length of the special figure confirmation time TcsLast is 1.7 seconds (= 0.2 seconds (normal figure fluctuation time) + 0.1 seconds (normal figure confirmation time Tcn) + 1.4 seconds (normal electricity open set to 1.8 seconds, which is longer than the time)). The reason for this will be explained using the example shown in FIG. Note that time t1 to time t7 in FIG. 490 are the same as in FIG. 489 except that the high-frequency support mode flag does not change from ON to OFF at time t5, so detailed description will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 490, in this modification, the high frequency support mode flag is turned OFF at the end of the fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation reaching the high support continuation upper limit number (5 times) (time t9). Here, in FIG. 490, the case where the game ball passes through the through gate 35 just before the end of the variation of the special figure variation that reaches the high support continuation upper limit number (5 times) will be described.

As shown in FIG. 490, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 just before the end of the special figure fluctuation reaching the high support continuation upper limit number (5 times) (time t8), the passage is triggered A normal figure lottery is executed, and a normal figure fluctuation is started. When the normal pattern fluctuation time elapses, the normal pattern fluctuation ends (time t10), and the normal pattern stops in a mode corresponding to the result of the normal pattern lottery. Since the general pattern lottery is executed in the high-frequency support mode, it is almost certain (at a probability of 231/233) that the general pattern lottery will be won. Then, as shown in FIG. 490, as a result of the general pattern lottery, when winning per general pattern, the normal electric accessory 34a is opened at the time of passage of the general pattern fixed time Tcn (time t11).

However, as shown in FIG. 490, even if the game ball enters the second starting port 34 before the special figure confirmation time TcsLast ends (time t12), the special figure confirmation time TcsLast ends Since the special 2 reserved number remains 4 until the next second special figure fluctuation is started, the special 2 reserved number will not increase based on the entry.

And, in this modification, the length of the special figure determination time TcsLast after the fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation that reaches the high support continuation upper limit number (5 times) is normal from the start of the fluctuation of the normal symbol in the high frequency support mode Since it is set to a length (1.8 seconds in this modification) of the time required to close the electric accessory (1.7 seconds in this modification) or more, the timing (time Before t14), the normal electric accessory 34a will be closed (time t13). In other words, the open state of the normal electric accessory 34a continues until the timing (time t14) at which the next (sixth) special figure variation of the special figure variation that reaches the high support continuation upper limit number (5 times) is started. never do. Thus, according to this modification, the opening of the normal electric accessory 34a continues until after the start of the special figure variation next to the special figure variation that has reached the high support continuation upper limit number (5 times) (sixth time) Since it is possible to avoid doing so, the next (6th) special figure variation after the special figure variation that has reached the high support continuation upper limit number (5 times) is started, and the special 2 pending number is from 4 It is possible to avoid the game balls entering the second starting port 34 in the state of three and the special 2 reserved number becoming four.

Although illustration is omitted, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 after the fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation that reaches the high support continuation upper limit number (5 times) (for example, during the special figure confirmation time TcsLast), Since the high-frequency support mode is already OFF, the normal drawing lottery based on the passage is executed as the low-frequency support mode. Since the normal pattern winning probability in the low frequency support mode is as low as 1/233, the normal electric accessory 34a is almost never opened based on the general pattern lottery, and even if the normal electric accessory 34a is opened Also, since the electric power open time is as short as 0.1 second, substantially no game ball enters the second starting port 34 .

As described above, according to the present modification, high support continuation upper limit number of times (5 It is avoided that the game ball enters the second start port 34 after the special figure variation next to the special figure variation that has reached the number of times (6th time) and the special figure 2 reservation number becomes 4. Since it is possible to do so, it is possible to avoid the presence of the special 2 remaining hold after the transition to the low probability low support state H1. As a result, it is possible to avoid the unexpected occurrence of the second special figure variation in the low-probability-low support state H1, and it is possible to avoid the collapse of the game characteristics assumed for the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加.

In addition, in the above modification 13, since the high-frequency support mode flag is turned off at the start of the fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation that has reached the high support continuation upper limit number (5 times), the high support continuation upper limit number (5 times) has been reached There was a problem that it was difficult to open the normal electric accessory 34a during the execution of the special figure fluctuation and save four special 2 reservations, but in this modification, the high support continuation upper limit number (5 times) Since the high-frequency support mode flag is ON even during the execution of the special figure fluctuation that has been reached, even during the execution of the special figure fluctuation that has reached the high support continuation upper limit number (5 times), the normal electric accessory 34a is opened to allow the game ball to enter the second starting port 34, thereby making it possible to accumulate four special 2 reserves.

In addition, in this modification, only the length of the special figure determination time TcsLast after the fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation that has reached the high support continuation upper limit number (5 times) is changed from the start of the normal design fluctuation in the high frequency support mode Although it was configured to be set to a predetermined length longer than the time required to close the normal electric accessory, as another modification, not only the length of the special figure confirmation time TcsLast but also the normal special figure confirmation time Tcs The length may also be set to a predetermined length longer than the time required from the start of fluctuation of the normal symbol to the closing of the normal electric accessory in the high-frequency support mode. According to this configuration, the length of the special figure confirmation time TcsLast after the end of the fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation reaching the high support continuation upper limit number (5 times) is different from the length of the normal special figure confirmation time Tcs. It is possible to avoid giving to the player.

<<10-8-15>> Modification 15:
In the above modification 13 and the above modification 14, as an unexpected event that becomes excessively advantageous to the player, the following (6th 2) After the start of the fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation, the game ball entered the second start port 34 and the number of special 2 reserved numbers became 4. A configuration may be adopted in which the occurrence of an event that is excessively advantageous to the player is allowed, and the occurrence of the event is aimed at as a chance for the player. The configuration of Modification 15 will be described below, focusing on the differences from Modification 13 described above.

FIG. 491 is a timing chart showing an example of control when transitioning from the high-probability high support state H4 to the high-probability low support state H6 in this modification. In this modified example, similarly to modified examples 13 and 14 described above, the high support continuation upper limit number of times is set to 5 times, and the high probability continuation upper limit number of times is set to 9 times.

And in this modification, the timing at which the high-frequency support mode flag turns from ON to OFF is when the special figure confirmation time Tcs after the end of the special figure fluctuation reaching the high support continuation upper limit number (5 times) ( At the end of the game round) is set. The reason for this will be described using the example shown in FIG. Note that time t1 to time t7 in FIG. 491 are the same as in FIG. 489 except that the high-frequency support mode flag does not change from ON to OFF at time t5, so detailed description will be omitted.

As shown in Figure 491, in this modification, high-frequency support mode flag at the time (time t12) elapses of the special figure determination time Tcs after the end of the fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation reaching the high support continuation upper limit number (5 times) is turned OFF. Here, in FIG. 491, the case where the game ball passes through the through gate 35 during the special figure determination time Tcs after the end of the special figure variation that reaches the high support continuation upper limit number of times (5 times) will be described.

In this modification, during the variation of the special figure variation that has reached the high support continuation upper limit number (5 times), a through passage promotion performance that is a performance that prompts the player to pass the game ball through the through gate 35 is executed. . In this modification, as a through passage promotion effect, an image of a specific character (image of a female character in this modification) and "Let the game ball pass through just before the fluctuation ends and open the electric chew until after the next fluctuation starts Let me!” is displayed on the pattern display device 41, and the speaker 46 outputs a voice corresponding to the character string. The player who recognizes the effect adjusts the shooting timing and shooting intensity of the game ball so that the game ball passes through the through gate 35 just before the end of the special figure fluctuation reaching the high support continuation upper limit number (5 times). The game will be played while doing so.

As shown in FIG. 491, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 during the special figure determination time Tcs after the special figure fluctuation has reached the high support continuation upper limit number (5 times) (time t9) , The general pattern lottery triggered by the passage is executed, and the general pattern fluctuation is started. When the normal pattern fluctuation time elapses, the normal pattern fluctuation ends (time t10), and the normal pattern stops in a mode corresponding to the result of the normal pattern lottery. Since the general pattern lottery is executed in the high-frequency support mode, it is almost certain (at a probability of 231/233) that the general pattern lottery will be won. Then, as shown in FIG. 491, as a result of the general pattern lottery, when the general pattern is elected, the normal electric accessory 34a is opened at the time when the general pattern fixed time Tcn elapses (time t11).

In this modification, the game ball passes through the through gate 35 during the fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation reaching the high support continuation upper limit number (5 times) or during the special figure confirmation time Tcs after the fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation is finished, When it is determined that the opening of the normal electric accessory 34a opened based on the winning will continue until after the next special figure fluctuation starts executes an advantageous state start effect, which is a effect suggesting the start of a state advantageous to the player. In this modified example, as an advantageous state start effect, an image of a specific character (in this modified example, an image of a female character) and a character string such as "Super Den Chu Chance has arrived!!!" are displayed on the pattern display device 41. An effect of outputting the voice corresponding to the character string from the speaker 46 is executed. The player who recognizes the effect will recognize that a state advantageous to the player will start.

After that, when the special figure confirmation time Tcs of 0.5 seconds has passed (time t12), the high frequency support mode flag is turned off, the sixth special figure fluctuation is started, and the number of special 2 reservations is 4 to 3 become. And in the example shown in FIG. 491, since the open state of the normal electric accessory 34a continues even after the sixth special figure fluctuation starts, the game ball can enter the second start port 34. , It is possible to accumulate the number of special 2 reservations up to 4, the maximum number of reservations, during the execution of the sixth special figure variation.

In this modification, after the next (sixth) special figure variation after the special figure variation that reached the high support continuation upper limit number (5 times), that is, in the high probability low support state H6, normal electric accessories When 34a is in an open state, a special 2 ball entry promoting effect is executed, which is a effect for prompting the player to enter the game ball into the second starting port 34.例文帳に追加In this modified example, as an effect to promote entering the ball, an image of a specific character (in this modified example, an image of a female character) and a character string such as "Aim for the electric chew that is open and accumulate 4 holds!" The character string is displayed on the display device 41, and an effect of outputting the voice corresponding to the character string from the speaker 46 is executed. The player who recognizes the effect enters the game ball into the second starting hole 34 and continuously hits to the right so that the special 2 reserved number becomes four.

Then, as shown in FIG. 491, when the game ball enters the second starting hole 34 (time t13), the special 2 pending number becomes four. As described above, the second special drawing lottery based on the fourth special 2 reservation will be executed in the low probability low support state H1, so the result of either winning the jackpot or winning the time saving grant becomes.

Therefore, in this modification, after the change of the next (sixth) special figure variation of the special figure variation that reached the high support continuation upper limit number (5 times), that is, after the transition to the high probability low support state H6, When the game ball enters the second start port 34 and the number of special 2 reservations becomes 4, which is the maximum number of reservations, the advantage determination suggesting that it is determined that an advantageous state will come to the player. perform the performance. In this modified example, as an advantage confirmation effect, an image of a specific character (an image of a male character in this modified example) and a character string such as "Congratulations! Good things will happen soon!" are displayed on the pattern display device 41. An effect of outputting the voice corresponding to the character string from the speaker 46 is executed. A player who recognizes the effect recognizes that a state advantageous to the player is confirmed.

After that, when the normal electric open time passes (time t14), the normal electric accessory 34a is closed.

Thus, in this modification, the high-frequency support mode flag is turned ON until the special figure determination time Tcs after the end of the special figure fluctuation that reaches the high support continuation upper limit number (5 times) (time t12) Therefore, if the game ball is passed through the through gate 35 just before the special figure confirmation time Tcs elapses, the next (sixth) special figure variation that has reached the high support continuation upper limit number of times (5 times) It is possible to continue the open state of the normal electric accessory 34a until after the start of the fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation. As a result, it is possible to generate an event advantageous to the player that the game ball enters the second starting port 34 after the sixth special figure fluctuation starts and the special 2 reserved number becomes 4. .

Then, the closer the timing at which the game ball passes through the through gate 35 (that is, the timing at which the normal figure fluctuation starts) to the timing at which the special figure confirmation time Tcs elapses, the more the normal electric accessory 34a opens in the high probability low support state H6. The period of holding will be longer, and it will be easier to accumulate up to 4 special 2 pending numbers.

As described above, according to this modification, before the elapse of the special figure determination time Tcs after the end of the special figure fluctuation that has reached the high support continuation upper limit number (5 times) (preferably just before), the game ball is passed through the gate By passing through, the open state of the normal electric accessory 34a is continued until after the next (sixth) special figure fluctuation starts, and after the next special figure fluctuation starts, the game ball is the second start opening It is possible to create a new game property in which the number of special 2 reserves is set to 4 by entering 34 balls and a state advantageous to the player is obtained.

In addition, in this modification, since the through-pass promotion effect is executed, it is possible for the player to recognize how to play the game in line with the new game characteristics of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

Also, in this modification, the game ball passes through the through gate 35, and the opening of the normal electric accessory 34a reaches the high support continuation upper limit number of times (5 times). Since the advantageous state start performance is executed in a situation where the fluctuation continues until after the fluctuation starts, a state advantageous to the player, which is different from that of a normal pachinko machine, starts when the game ball passes through the through gate 35.例文帳に追加It is possible to make them recognize that it is done.

In addition, in this modification, when the normal electric accessory 34a transitions to the open state in the high-probability-low support state H6, the special 2 ball-entering promotion effect is executed, so that the player is provided with the new pachinko machine 10. It is possible to make the player recognize how to play the game in line with the game property.

Also, in this modification, after the transition to the high probability low support state H6, when the game ball enters the second start port 34 and the number of special 2 reservations becomes 4, which is the maximum number of reservations, it is advantageous Since the fixed performance is executed, it is possible for the player to recognize that there is a special meaning in the fact that the special 2 reserved number has become 4, which is the maximum reserved number, after shifting to the high-probability-low support state H6. becomes.

<<10-8-16>> Modification 16:
In the above modification 15, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 in a situation where a new normal pattern lottery cannot be executed (for example, during the execution of the normal pattern fluctuation or during the opening of the normal electric accessory 34a) A configuration that does not have a function (hereinafter also referred to as a normal pattern reservation function) to reserve the normal pattern lottery based on the passage of the game ball may be adopted. As in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, when adopting a configuration having a general pattern reservation function, there is a case where the general pattern lottery that has been reserved is automatically executed at a timing unintended by the player. Therefore, it may be difficult to adjust the opening timing of the normal electric accessory 34a.

On the other hand, in this modified example, a configuration that does not have a general pattern holding function in a specific game state (for example, high probability high support state H4) is adopted. According to such a configuration, even if the game ball passes through the through gate 35 in the high probability high support state H4, the normal pattern lottery is not suspended, so the suspended normal pattern lottery is performed at a timing not intended by the player. You can prevent it from running automatically. Therefore, by adjusting the timing at which the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the player can adjust the opening timing of the normal electric accessory 34a. As a result, before the passage of the special figure determination time Tcs after the end of the special figure fluctuation reaching the high support continuation upper limit number (5 times) (preferably immediately before) By passing the game ball through the through gate, the following The open state of the normal electric accessory 34a is continued until after the start of the (sixth) special figure fluctuation, and the game ball is entered into the second start port 34 after the start of the next special figure fluctuation. It is possible to make the above-described new game feature of obtaining a state advantageous to the player by setting the number of 2-holding numbers to 4 more conspicuous.

In addition, as a further modification, regardless of the game state (always) may adopt a configuration that does not have the normal pattern holding function. According to such a configuration, regardless of the game state, the suspended normal pattern lottery will not be automatically executed at a timing unintended by the player, so that the player can pass the game ball through the through gate 35. It is possible to adjust the opening timing of the normal electric accessory 34a by adjusting the timing of passing through. As a result, before the passage of the special figure determination time Tcs after the end of the special figure fluctuation reaching the high support continuation upper limit number (5 times) (preferably immediately before) By passing the game ball through the through gate, the following The open state of the normal electric accessory 34a is continued until after the start of the (sixth) special figure fluctuation, and the game ball is entered into the second start port 34 after the start of the next special figure fluctuation. It is possible to make the above-described new game feature of obtaining a state advantageous to the player by setting the number of 2-holding numbers to 4 more conspicuous.

<<10-8-17>> Modification 17:
In the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, when the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation after shifting to the high probability high support state H4 reaches the high support continuation upper limit number (5 times), the high frequency support mode flag turns from ON to OFF The timing may be different depending on the type of the jackpot symbol that triggered the transition to the high-probability-high support state H4.

For example, when the high probability high support state H4 is entered by winning the jackpot pattern A (probability variable jackpot A) in the special lottery, the high frequency support mode flag is turned off from ON as shown in the above modification 13 The timing is set at the start of the fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation that has reached the high support continuation upper limit number of times, and when the special figure lottery is elected to the jackpot pattern B (probability variation jackpot B) When it shifts to the high probability high support state H4 is set at the end of the fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation when the high frequency support mode flag turns from ON to OFF as shown in the above modification 14, reaching the high support continuation upper limit number of times, and in the special figure lottery, the jackpot pattern C ( When the high probability high support state H4 is entered by winning the probability variable jackpot C), the timing at which the high frequency support mode flag turns from ON to OFF as shown in the above modification 15 is the high support continuation upper limit number. It is set at the elapse of the special figure confirmation time after the end of the fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation that has been reached. According to such a configuration, the high-frequency support mode flag turns from ON to OFF when the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation after shifting to the high-probability and high-support state H4 reaches the high-support continuation upper limit number of times. It is possible to create a sense of anticipation and a sense of tension as to which timing is set (whether it is set to a timing advantageous to the player as in Modification 15).

<<10-8-18>> Modification 18:
In the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, it may be configured to further include a high-probability transition winning opening, which is a ball entry opening that shifts the lottery mode to the high-probability mode when a game ball enters. The configuration of this modified example will be specifically described below.

FIG. 492 is a front view of the game board 30 in this modified example. The difference from the game board 30 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 445 is that a high-accuracy transition winning opening 34e is provided in the right area of the game area PA. A movable piece 34f is provided at the entrance of the high accuracy transition winning opening 34e. The movable piece 34f can transition from a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter the high-probability transition winning opening 34e to an open state in which a game ball can enter the high-probability transition winning opening 34e. In the game state other than the fixed height support state H5, it is in a closed state, and in the low fixed height support state H5, the closed state and the open state are alternately repeated every predetermined time (every 1.0 seconds in this modification). . Then, in the low-probability high support state H5 in which the high-frequency support mode continues until the next jackpot winning, when the game ball enters the high-probability transition winning opening 34e, the lottery mode shifts from the low-probability mode to the high-probability mode. Then, both the high-frequency support mode and the high-probability mode are in a game state that continues until the next big win is won.

As described above, according to this modification, when the falling lottery is won in the high probability high support state H4, the lottery mode moves to the low probability high support state H5, which is a low probability mode. In the high support state H5, if the game ball can enter the high-probability transition winning opening 34e, the determination mode will shift to the second determination mode again. Here, if it is possible to win the time reduction grant in the low probability high support state H5, and if the game ball can be entered into the high probability transition winning opening 34e, both the high frequency support mode and the high probability mode will win the next big hit. It will be in a game state that continues until. This game state is very advantageous for the player. Therefore, according to this modification, it is possible to provide the player with a new game property of entering a game ball into the high-probability shift winning opening 34e in the low-probability high support state H5 and shifting to a more advantageous game state. can be done.

<<10-8-19>> Modification 19:
In the above embodiment and each modification, the outer frame of the pachinko machine is not limited to being made of wood, but may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin. , cast steel, stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, alloy steel, and other metals. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the modifications, the inner frame provided in the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin. It may be made of metal such as stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, or alloy steel. Further, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the front door frame provided in the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin, and may be made of steel (carbon steel), cast iron, or cast steel. , stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, alloy steel, and other metals. Further, in the above embodiment and each modification, the pachinko machine has a function of locking the inner frame to the outer frame so that it cannot be opened, and a function of locking the front door frame to the inner frame so that it cannot be opened. However, after adopting a configuration in which this cylinder lock is omitted, a first cylinder lock having a function of locking the inner frame to the outer frame so that it cannot be opened, and the front door frame A configuration in which a second cylinder lock having a function of locking the inner frame so that it cannot be opened may be employed. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modification, the background image for the high-probability high support state is displayed as the background image in the high-probability high support state, and the background image for the low-probability low support state is displayed as the background image in the low-probability low support state. A configuration in which a background image is displayed may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, the configuration in which the rotation shaft for rotating the inner frame with respect to the outer frame is provided on the left side when viewed from the front is adopted. You may employ the structure provided. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modified examples, the configuration in which the rotation shaft for rotating the front door frame with respect to the inner frame is provided on the left side when viewed from the front is adopted. may be adopted. Further, in the above embodiment and each modification, the game board provided in the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin, and may be made of steel (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, It may be made of metal such as stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, or alloy steel. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each modification, the pachinko machine employs a configuration including an upper tray and a lower tray, but the lower tray may be omitted and a configuration including only the upper tray may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, a configuration in which the operation handle is provided on the right side in front view is adopted, but a configuration in which the operation handle is provided on the left side in front view may be adopted. Also, a configuration in which the operation handle is provided on both the right side and the left side when viewed from the front may be adopted. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, when a jackpot is won in a high-probability and high support state, even if it adopts a configuration that executes a production (jackpot notification production) that suggests that an advantageous event has occurred good. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the modifications, the operating handle is provided with a touch sensor capable of detecting whether or not the player is gripping the operating handle (whether or not the player's hand is in contact with the operating handle). However, a configuration in which the touch sensor is omitted may be adopted. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modification, various configurations can be adopted as the shooting means capable of shooting game balls. Alternatively, a structure or the like may be adopted in which the game ball is shot using the wind pressure generated when the compressed gas is ejected. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, when the operating handle is turned clockwise by a predetermined amount, about 100 game balls are shot per minute. A configuration in which less than 100 (eg, 60) game balls are fired per minute may be used, and a configuration in which 100 or more (eg, 200) game balls are fired per minute may be used. good. Alternatively, the game ball may be shot one by one by flipping the lever. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modification, in the low-probability low support state that has been shifted by the number of executions of the game round after the transition to the high-probability high support state has reached a predetermined number, special 2 remaining pending digestion In the above mode, when a jackpot is won in a winning lottery, it is distributed to a variable probability jackpot with a high probability (for example, a probability of 100%), thereby shifting again to a high probability and high support state with a high probability, and on the other hand, a low probability and low probability. When a jackpot lottery is won in a left-handed mode in a support state, it may be distributed to a variable probability jackpot with a probability lower than the high probability, thereby shifting again to the high-probability and high support state with the low probability. . Even with such a configuration, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, a configuration in which a speaker is provided as means capable of outputting sound is adopted, but a configuration in which an earphone jack is provided in addition to or instead of the speaker may be adopted. According to this configuration, the player can hear the sound of the pachinko machine he/she is playing without being disturbed by the sounds of the surrounding pachinko machines by connecting the earphones or headphones he/she has brought with him/herself to the earphone jack. It is possible to enjoy it in minutes. In addition, after moving to the low-probability low support state, if a jackpot is won before the winning lottery due to special 2 suspension ends in the low-probability low support state, a production that suggests that an advantageous event has occurred (jackpot announcement production) may be adopted. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, various configurations can be adopted as the display means capable of displaying the special symbol that starts the variable display based on the entry of the game ball into the various starting ports. For example, an LED lamp, an LED display device, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a halogen lamp, or the like may be employed. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modified examples, various configurations can be adopted as the display means capable of displaying the normal symbols that start the variable display based on the passage of the game ball through various gates, For example, an LED lamp, an LED display device, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a halogen lamp, or the like may be employed. Also, in a situation where it is possible to pass the game ball through the V winning area, a configuration may be adopted in which an effect is executed to prompt the player to pass the game ball through the V winning area. Then, in a situation where the game ball can be passed through the V winning area, when the game ball passes through the V winning area, an effect is executed suggesting that a state advantageous to the player is started. may be adopted. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, various configurations can be adopted as display means capable of displaying various decorative patterns, such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, and an LED display device. , a rotating drum type display device, a light guide plate, a three-dimensional hologram display device, or the like may be employed. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each modification, the special information stored (reserved) in the high-probability mode and the high-probability high support state, which is the high-frequency support mode, to the second start port 34 In the opening and closing execution mode that is guaranteed to move again to the high probability high support state when the specific conditions such as winning the probability variable jackpot are established by the end of the winning lottery for the special information based on the entry of the game ball. The lottery mode after the end of the opening and closing execution mode is determined to be a high probability mode, and on the other hand, the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the high probability high support state is a predetermined number without winning the probability variable jackpot. When the number of times (ST number of times) is reached, the probability of moving again to the high probability high support state may be configured to shift to the low probability low support state lower than the opening and closing execution mode based on the probability variable jackpot. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, the decorative pattern is not limited to numerals, and various characters, figures, symbols, patterns, etc., and combinations thereof can be employed. For example, as decorative patterns, alphabets, Greek letters, hiragana, katakana, kanji, various characters, and combinations thereof may be employed. In addition, when a jackpot is won in a high-probability and high-support state, the high-probability mode flag is shifted to a jackpot game state in which it is turned off. A configuration may be employed in which, when a game ball enters the V guaranteed winning hole, the lottery mode after the end of the jackpot game state is shifted to the high probability mode with the entry of the ball as a trigger. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each modification, the number of symbol rows in which decorative symbols are scrolled is not limited to three, and may be, for example, two or less, or four or more. In the case of adopting a configuration in which there is only one decorative pattern row, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a jackpot is won when a specific decorative pattern (for example, "7") stops. In the case of adopting a configuration in which two or more rows of decorative patterns are employed, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a jackpot is won when the same decorative patterns stop on a specific line. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, in the low-probability low-probability support state, which is a low-probability mode and a low-frequency support mode, when a specific condition such as winning a normal jackpot is established, the support mode is specified. Period, for example, the period until the number of executions of the game reaches a predetermined number or the period until the next big win is won in the winning lottery, the game state maintained in the high frequency support mode, compared with the low probability low support state In the low-probability and low-probability support state, when a second predetermined condition such as winning a variable-probability jackpot without winning a normal jackpot is established in the low-probability and low-probability support state, It is configured to shift to a high-probability-high support state, and in the high-probability-high support state, a normal jackpot is won in a winning lottery for special information acquired based on the entry of a game ball into a first start port 33. When such a specific condition is established, it may be configured to shift to a low probability high support state or a low probability low support state, which is less advantageous for the player than the high probability high support state. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, various configurations can be adopted as the special electric accessory. A configuration in which the large winning slot can be opened by rotating the plate-shaped member forward about the rotation shaft, or a configuration in which the large winning slot is opened and closed by a plate-shaped member that can slide in the front-rear direction of the game board, etc. may be adopted. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modifications described above, various configurations can be adopted as the ordinary electric accessory. A rotation shaft extending in a substantially horizontal direction is provided below the plate-shaped member, and the plate-shaped member rotates forward about the rotation shaft to open the starting port, front and rear of the game board A structure or the like in which the starting port is opened and closed by a plate-shaped member that can slide in a direction may be adopted. In addition, in the low probability low support state, when the normal electric accessory transitions to the open state, a configuration may be adopted in which an effect is executed to prompt the player to enter the game ball into the second start port. . In addition, the above-mentioned "low probability low support state that the probability of moving again to high probability high support state is lower than opening and closing execution mode based on probability variable jackpot" means that from low probability low support state to high probability high support state The probability of shifting to (probability of being distributed to a probability variable jackpot when winning a lottery in a low probability low support state, probability variable ratio, such as a probability variable rush rate of 50%) is surely after the end (along with the normal game flow It is lower than the opening and closing execution mode based on the probability variable jackpot that is guaranteed to shift to a high probability high support state if you are shooting a game ball (for example, if you are hitting right) with a probability of 100%). However, the above probability does not mean that the winning probability in the winning lottery is high or low. Also, when the special 2 reserved number becomes 4 in the low probability low support state, the 4 reserved icon images corresponding to the special 2 reserved number becoming 4 are displayed on the pattern display device (liquid crystal display device). may be adopted. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, the number of winning balls set in each ball opening (starting hole, general winning opening, big winning opening, etc.) is an example, and is set for each ball opening By appropriately changing the number of prize balls, it is possible to realize a plurality of types of pachinko machines with different specifications.

<<10-8-20>> Modification 20:
In the tenth embodiment and its modification, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to include three control devices, namely the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90, and the display control device 100, but instead of this, the main control It is good also as a structure provided with two control devices, such as a device and a sub control device. The sub control device may be configured to execute various processes executed by the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 in the tenth embodiment. Further, in the tenth embodiment and its modification, the various processes executed by the three control devices 60, 90, and 100 are not necessarily limited to the division described in the tenth embodiment, and the three control devices As a whole of 60, 90, and 100, it is sufficient that various processes in the tenth embodiment can be executed.

<<11>> Eleventh Embodiment:
<<11-1>> Game machine structure:
FIG. 493 is a perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter also referred to as "pachinko machine") as an eleventh embodiment of the present invention. A pachinko machine 10 has a wooden outer frame 11 combined in a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island equipment of the game hall. The pachinko machine 10 also includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11 . A pachinko machine body 12 has an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13. - 特許庁The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11 by metal hinges 15 . The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 16 with respect to the inner frame 13 . Control devices for controlling the pachinko machine body 12, such as a main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device, are arranged on the back of the inner frame 13. FIG. Details of these control devices will be described later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. - 特許庁The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened, and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation using a dedicated key on the cylinder lock 17 .

A substantially central portion of the front door frame 14 is formed with an open window portion 18 . Around the window part 18, resin parts and electric decoration parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. The electrical parts are composed of light emitting means including various lamps such as LEDs. The light-emitting means plays a role of enhancing the performance effect by lighting or blinking at each game played by the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot is won, when a ready-to-win game occurs, or the like. A glass unit 19 composed of two sheets of plate glass is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14 , and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19 . A game board, which will be described later, is detachably attached to the inner frame 13 , and the player of the pachinko machine 10 can view the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 19 . Details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper tray 20 and a lower tray 21 for storing game balls. The upper tray 20 is formed in a box shape with an open top, and stores game balls such as rental balls lent from a rental machine (not shown) and prize balls discharged from the pachinko machine main body 12 . The game balls stored in the upper tray 20 are supplied to a game ball shooting mechanism provided in the pachinko machine main body 12. - 特許庁The game ball shooting mechanism is driven by the player's operation of the operation handle 25, and shoots the game balls supplied from the upper tray 20 to the front surface of the game board. The lower tray 21 is arranged below the upper tray 20 and is shaped like a box with an open top. The lower tray 21 stores game balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 20. - 特許庁A discharge port 22 for discharging game balls stored in the lower tray 21 is formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 21 . A lever 23 is provided below the ejection port 22 , and the player can switch the ejection port 22 between a closed state and an open state by operating the lever 23 . When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game ball falls from the discharge port 22 and is discharged from the lower tray 21 to the outside.

A performance operation button 24 is provided in front of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20.例文帳に追加The effect operation button 24 is an operation unit for the player to perform an input operation for the game effect performed by the pachinko machine 10 . When a player operates a performance operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, a game performance reflecting the operation is performed by the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

An operation handle 25 for a player to operate is provided on the right side of the front door frame 14 when viewed from the front (hereinafter also simply referred to as "right side"). When the player operates (turns) the operating handle 25, a game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism to the front surface of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operation handle 25, there are a touch sensor 25a for permitting the drive of the game ball shooting mechanism, a wait button 25b for stopping the game ball shooting by the game ball shooting mechanism when pressed by the player, and the operation handle 25. A variable resistor 25c is provided for detecting the amount of rotational operation of , based on a change in electrical resistance. When the player grips the operating handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operating handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. Then, a game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism to the front surface of the game board with strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

A game ball shooting button 26 for a player to operate is provided on the left side of the periphery of the upper tray 20 in front view (hereinafter also simply referred to as "left side"). When the game ball shooting button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is shot to the front surface of the game board with a predetermined shooting strength regardless of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 by the player. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball shooting button 26, the game ball is shot to the front surface of the game board with the same shooting intensity as when the operation handle 25 is rotated at its maximum. In the case of this embodiment, when a game ball is shot by operating the game ball shooting button 26, the game ball flows to the right side of the game board when viewed from the front and also to the right side of the game board. That is, by operating the game ball shooting button 26, the player can hit the ball to the right. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the game ball shooting button 26 is operated, the game ball is shot to the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is turned on. . That is, the player turns on at least the touch sensor 25a by grasping the operation handle 25, and then operates the game ball shooting button 26 to shoot the game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball shooting button 26. can be realized.

Next, the configuration of the rear surface of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. A control device for controlling the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is arranged on the back surface of the pachinko machine 10. - 特許庁

494 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. As shown, the pachinko machine 10 includes a first control unit 51, a second control unit 52, a third control unit 53, and a power supply unit 58. Specifically, these units are provided on the back surface of the inner frame 13 .

The first control unit 51 has a main controller 60 . The main control device 60 has a main control board having a function of controlling the main game. The main control board is housed in a board box made of transparent resin material. This board box is configured to leave traces of opening and closing. For example, a seal is affixed to a portion that can be opened and closed, and when the substrate box is opened, characters such as "opened" appear.

The second control unit 52 includes an audio emission control device 90 and a display control device 100 . The sound emission control device 90 controls emission means such as speakers and various lamps provided in front of the pachinko machine 10 based on commands transmitted from the main control device 60 . The display control device 100 controls the pattern display device based on commands transmitted from the sound emission control device 90 . The pattern display device has a liquid crystal display for displaying patterns and images for presentation.

The third control unit 53 has a payout control device 70 and a launch control device 80 . The payout control device 70 performs payout control for paying out prize balls. When an instruction to shoot a game ball is input from the main control device 60, the shooting control device 80 shoots a game ball with strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 by the player. Controls the ball launching mechanism. In addition, on the back of the inner frame 13, there is a tank 54 to which the game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially supplied, and a slope which is connected to the lower part of the tank 54 and is gently inclined so that the game balls flow downstream. , a case rail 56 connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 55, a game ball is supplied from the case rail 56, and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out according to an instruction from the payout control device 70. A plurality of devices necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10, such as a payout device 71, are provided.

The power supply unit 58 includes a power supply device 85 and a power switch 88 . The power supply device 85 supplies power necessary for the pachinko machine 10 to operate. A power switch 88 is connected to the power supply device 85 . By ON/OFF operation of the power switch 88, a supply state as a predetermined game state in which power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 and a non-supply state in which power is not supplied to the pachinko machine 10 are switched.

Next, the game board will be explained. The game board is detachably attached to the front surface of the inner frame 13. - 特許庁

495 is a front view of the game board 30. FIG. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on its front surface. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding a game ball is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. A game ball shot from the game ball shooting mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and released above the game area PA, and then flows down the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicularly to the game board 30, and accessories such as windmills are arranged. These nails 42 and windmills distribute and organize the falling directions of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

The game board 30 is formed with a plurality of openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening is provided with a general winning opening 32, a first starting opening 33, a second starting opening 34, through gates 35a and 35b, and a variable winning device . Game balls entered into each of the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, the through gate 35, and the variable winning device 36 enter the individual openings formed on the game board 30. Induced. Also, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display section 45 . The main display section 45 has a special figure unit 37 , a normal figure unit 38 , and a round display section 39 .

As illustrated, the general prize winning openings 32 are ball entrance members that form ball entrances into which game balls can enter, and are provided in plurality on the game board 30 . In this embodiment, when game balls enter the general winning hole 32, 10 game balls are paid out as prize balls from the payout device 71 (FIG. 494).

The first starting port 33 is a ball entrance member that forms a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter. The first starting port 33 is provided at the lower center of the game board 30 . In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first start hole 33, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a winning lottery, which will be described later, is executed.

The second starting port 34 is a ball entrance member that forms a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and is provided below the game board 30 . The second starting port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a consisting of a pair of left and right movable pieces. When the electric accessory 34a is in the closed state, the game ball cannot enter the second starting port 34. - 特許庁On the other hand, when the electric accessory 34a is in the open state, the game ball can enter the second starting port 34. As shown in FIG. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 34, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a winning lottery, which will be described later, is executed.

Each of the two through gates 35a, 35b has a through-hole extending vertically. Each of the through gates 35a and 35b is a through gate that serves as a trigger for executing a lottery for opening the electric accessory 34a. Specifically, when a game ball passes through the through gate 35a or the through gate 35b, the main controller 60 conducts an internal lottery (electric accessory open lottery) triggered by the passage. As a result of the internal lottery, when the electric role open is won, the electric accessory 34a shifts to the electric role open state in a predetermined manner. One of the two through gates 35 a and 35 b is provided on the left side of the pattern display device 41 , and the other through gate 35 b is provided on the right side of the pattern display device 41 . Since each through gate 35a, 35b is located upstream of the second starting port 34 with respect to the flowing direction of the game ball, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 flows down the game area PA after passing through the second It is possible to enter the ball into the second starting port 34. In this embodiment, even if game balls pass through the through gates 35a and 35b, no prize balls are paid out.

The variable winning device 36 is provided on the lower right side of the game area PA. The variable winning device 36 includes a large winning opening 36a leading to the back side of the game board 30, and an opening/closing door 36b for opening and closing the large winning opening 36a. The opening/closing door 36b is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot enter the big winning opening 36a. As a result of the internal lottery (winning lottery) by the main controller 60, when a big win is won and the opening/closing execution mode is shifted, the opening/closing door 36b repeats an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state. The open/close execution mode is the result of a winning lottery by the main control device 60 triggered by the ball entering the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, and when a big win is won, the opening/closing door 36b is in an open state. and the closed state are repeated. That is, when a big win is won as a result of a winning lottery based on the ball entering the first starting hole 33, the operation shifts to the opening/closing execution mode in which the ball can enter the big winning hole 36a of the variable prize winning device 36. Similarly, even if a big win is won as a result of the winning lottery based on the ball entering the second starting hole 34, the operation shifts to the opening/closing execution mode in which the ball can enter the big winning hole 36a of the variable prize winning device 36. . In the present embodiment, when game balls enter the big winning hole 36a of the variable winning device 36, the payout device 71 pays out 15 game balls as prize balls.

An out port 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and game balls that do not enter the general winning port 32, the first starting port 33, the second starting port 34, or the variable winning device 36 are out. It is discharged from the game area PA through the mouth 43 .

The game balls entering the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, the large winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36, and the out opening 43 are individually formed on the game board 30. It is configured to be guided to the back side of the game board 30 through the opening and finally join the discharge passage provided on the back side of the game board 30 . The discharge passage is provided with a discharge passage detection sensor for detecting game balls. By detecting the game balls with the discharge path detection sensor, it is possible to grasp the number of game balls shot to the game board 30. - 特許庁

The special figure unit 37 includes a first symbol display portion 37a and a second symbol display portion 37b. Each of the first pattern display portion 37a and the second pattern display portion 37b is composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting portions are arranged in a predetermined manner.

The first pattern display portion 37a is a display portion for displaying the first pattern. The first pattern refers to a pattern that is variably displayed or statically displayed based on a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33 . The first symbol display part 37a is used as a display mode until the segment display displays a display corresponding to the lottery result when a winning lottery is performed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting hole 33. , to perform the variable display of the first symbol. When the lottery is finished, the first symbol display unit 37a causes the segment display to stop displaying the first symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

The second pattern display portion 37b is a display portion for displaying the second pattern. The second pattern refers to a pattern that is variably displayed or statically displayed based on a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34 . The second symbol display part 37b is used as a display mode until a winning lottery is performed triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 34, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is performed on the segment display device. , to perform the variable display of the second symbol. When the lottery is finished, the second symbol display section 37b causes the segment display device to stop displaying the second symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

The time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol displayed in the second symbol display portion 37b to the stop display is called the variation time. call. Specifically, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed in the first symbol display portion 37a to the stop display is also called the first variation time, and the second symbol display portion 37b The time from the start of the variable display of the second symbol to be displayed until the stop display is also called a second variable time.

The special figure unit 37 is further provided with a first pending display portion 37c and a second pending display portion 37d, which are LED lamps, at positions adjacent to the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b. In this embodiment, up to four game balls entered into the first starting port 33 are reserved. The first reservation display portion 37c displays the number of reservations for the first starting port 33 according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be lit. For example, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 33 during a jackpot game, the display mode of the first reservation display portion 37c changes. The first pending display section 37c also functions as predetermined suggestive information display means. Further, in the present embodiment, up to four game balls entered into the second starting port 34 are reserved. The second reservation display part 37d displays the number of reservations of the second starting port 34 according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be lit.

The normal figure unit 38 is composed of a light-emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. The normal figure unit 38, when the electric accessary item open lottery triggered by the passage of the through gate 35 is performed, causes the light-emitting display to display in a lighting display, a blinking display, or a predetermined mode. When the electric accessory open lottery ends, the normal figure unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The round display section 39 is composed of a light-emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games that occur in the open/close execution mode or displays corresponding thereto. A round game means that either a predetermined upper limit duration time elapses or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls enter the variable winning device 36 until either condition is met. It is a game in which the door 36b is kept open. The number of round games varies depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the shift. The round display unit 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the opening/closing execution mode is started, and ends when the opening/closing execution mode is finished and a new game is started.

In addition, the special figure unit 37, the general figure unit 38, and the round display unit 39 are not limited to being configured by a segment display device or a light emitting display device using an LED lamp. It may consist of various display devices capable of showing the draw in progress and the draw results, such as a CRT or dot matrix display.

The variable display unit 40 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area PA. The variable display unit 40 has a pattern display device 41 . The pattern display device 41 has a liquid crystal display. The display contents of the pattern display device 41 are controlled by the display control device 100 . The pattern display device 41 may be replaced with various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT. The display surface of the main display section 45 described above is located on the front side (the side facing the player) with respect to the display surface of the pattern display device 41 .

When the first symbol display unit 37a performs variable display or predetermined display based on the ball entering the first starting port 33, the symbol display device 41 performs variable display or predetermined display of the symbols accordingly. In addition, when the second symbol display unit 37b performs a variable display or a predetermined display based on the ball entering the second starting port 34, the symbol display device 41 displays the symbol in a variable display or a predetermined display accordingly. conduct. The symbol display device 41 performs not only the display performance triggered by the entry of the ball into the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, but also the display performance during the opening/closing execution mode that shifts when the jackpot is won. . Details of the pattern display device 41 will be described below.

FIG. 496 is an explanatory diagram showing symbols that are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41 and the display surface 41a. FIG. 496(a) is an explanatory diagram showing symbols that are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41. FIG. As shown in FIG. 496(a), the symbol display device 41 variably displays symbols representing numbers 1-9. Each pattern representing numbers 1 to 9 is classified into three types according to color. The symbols representing numbers 1 to 3 are green, the symbols representing numbers 4 to 6 are red, and the symbols representing numbers 7 to 9 are gold. As the symbols to be variably displayed, symbols such as characters may be added to the symbols representing the numbers 1 to 9. FIG.

FIG. 496(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. As shown in FIG. As shown in the figure, the display surface 41a displays three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 on the left, middle and right. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the symbols of numbers 1 to 9 shown in FIG. A variable display that scrolls upward is performed. As shown in FIG. 496(b), after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol row is displayed in a stationary state on the activated line L1. Specifically, when a game ball enters the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, a variable display is started in which the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are cyclically scrolled in a predetermined direction. Then, the symbols to be scrolled are switched from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol row Z1, the symbol row Z3, and the symbol row Z2, and finally, the predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. . When the variable display of the symbols is finished and the display is stopped, and when the result of the winning lottery by the main control device 60 is a big win, a predetermined predetermined combination of symbols appears on the activated line L1. It is formed. For example, the same symbol combination is formed on the activated line L1. The pattern display device 41 is not limited to the above-described patterns, but the number of pattern rows, the number of active lines, the direction of pattern display variation in the pattern rows, and the patterns in each pattern row. Various modes can be adopted for the mode of variable display of symbols such as numbers.

Here, the "game cycle" means the period from the start of the variable display of the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b to the end of the variable display and the stop display until the end of the stop display. In other words, it is one unit of processing for notifying the player of the lottery result of the winning lottery for the special information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34. be. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one winning lottery for one piece of special information for each game. When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires the special information based on the entry of the game ball into either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the first symbol display unit In either one of the 37a and the second pattern display portion 37b, after the segment display is variably displayed, the segment display is stop-displayed so that the display corresponds to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Further, when the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires the special information based on the entry of the game ball into either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the symbol display device At 41, after the predetermined symbol row is variably displayed, the symbol row is stopped and displayed so as to correspond to the lottery result of the acquired special information. In addition, the time required for one game round is also called unit game time. The unit playing time is composed of a variable time, which is the time from when the variable display is started until the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed, and a stop time, which is the time when the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed. there is

Further, as shown in FIG. 496(b), below the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, there are a first starting opening reservation area Ds1, a reserved digestion area Dm, and a second starting opening reservation area Ds2. is displayed. The reserved digestion area Dm is displayed in the center of the display surface 41a in the left-right direction, the first start opening reservation area Ds1 is displayed on the left side of the reservation digestion area Dm, and the second start opening reservation area Ds2 is displayed in the reservation digestion area Dm. displayed on the right. In the first start opening reservation area Ds1, the number of reserved balls based on the entry of game balls into the first start opening 33 is displayed. In the second starting opening reservation area Ds2, the number of reserved balls based on the entry of game balls into the second starting opening 34 is displayed. In this embodiment, as described above, the maximum number of game balls entered into the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 is four. The details of the operation of the first starting opening reservation area Ds1, the second starting opening reservation area Ds2, and the reservation digestion area Dm will be described in detail later.

<<11-2>> Electrical Configuration of Gaming Machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described using a block diagram.

FIG. 497 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 10 mainly includes a main controller 60 , a sound emission control device 90 , and a display control device 100 .

The main controller 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main game. The main control board 61 has an MPU 62 composed of elements having multiple functions. The MPU 62 includes a CPU (not shown) that executes various control programs, a ROM 63 that records various control programs and fixed value data, and temporarily stores various data when executing the programs recorded in the ROM 63. and a RAM 64, which is a memory for storing. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. A part of the functions of the MPU 62 may be provided by another element. Details of various areas provided in the ROM 63 and RAM 64 will be described later.

The main control board 61 is provided with an input port (not shown) and an output port (not shown). An input port of the main control board 61 is connected to a payout control device 70 and a power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in a power supply device 85 . The main control board 61 is supplied with stable 24 V DC power from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86 . The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power supply as an external power supply, and converts the external power supplied from the commercial power supply into the operating power required by the main control device 60, the payout control device 70, etc., to each device supply power. The power supply device 85 is equipped with a capacitor (not shown), and in the event of a power failure or the power switch 88 (FIG. 494) being turned off, it continues to supply power to each device for a predetermined period of time. do.

Various detection sensors 67 a to 67 e are connected to the input port of the main control board 61 . Specifically, it is connected to a plurality of detection sensors provided at various ball entry openings such as the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, the through gate 35, and the variable winning apparatus 36. . The MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether or not the game ball flowing down the game area PA enters each ball entrance based on the signals from the various detection sensors 67a to 67e, and determines whether the game ball enters the through gate. It is determined whether or not 35 has been passed. Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 and the second start port 34, and executes the electric accessory release lottery based on the entry of the ball into the through gate 35. do.

The output port of the main control board 61 is provided with a variable winning driving unit 36c that opens and closes the open/close door 36b of the variable winning device 36, and an electric accessory driving unit 34b that opens and closes the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34. , and the main display unit 45 are connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning driving section 36c so that the opening/closing door 36b is opened/closed. Further, as a result of the electric accessory opening lottery, when the electric role opening is won, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 34b so that the electric accessory 34a is released. In each game round, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b in the main display portion 45. FIG. Further, when the jackpot type is determined in the opening/closing execution mode and the number of round games to be executed in the opening/closing execution mode is determined, display control of the round display section 39 in the main display section 45 is executed.

An output port of the main control board 61 is connected with a payout control device 70 and a sound emission control device 90 . A prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 70 from the main control device 60 based on the winning judgment result, for example. When the main controller 60 transmits the prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63. FIG. Specifically, when entering the ball into the general winning hole 32 is specified, a winning ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is transmitted from the main controller 60, and the ball enters the first starting hole 33. is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is transmitted from the main controller 60, and when entering the second start port 34 is specified, one game ball is paid out A prize ball command corresponding to is transmitted from the main controller 60 . The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 based on the prize ball command received from the main controller 60 to pay out prize balls.

A discharge control device 80 is connected to the payout control device 70 . The shooting control device 80 controls shooting of the game ball shooting mechanism 81 . The game ball shooting mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined shooting conditions are met. Also, the operation handle 25 and the game ball shooting button 26 are connected to the shooting control device 80 .

The sound emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60 and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main controller 60 transmits various commands, the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63 is referred to. Details of these various commands are described later.

In addition, based on various commands received from the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90 controls the driving of various lamps 47 composed of light emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the front door frame 14, and the driving control of the speaker 46. and control the display control device 100 . Also, the effect operation button 24 is connected to the sound emission control device 90, and when the effect operation button 24 is operated by the player at a predetermined timing, a game effect reflecting the operation is performed. It controls the various lamps 47, the speaker 46, the display control device 100, and the like.

The display control device 100 executes display control of the pattern display device 41 based on various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 . Specifically, the display control device 100, based on the various commands received from the sound emission control device 90, grasps the fluctuation time of the pattern in the pattern display device 41 and the type of combination of patterns to be finally stopped and displayed. , presence/absence of occurrence of ready-to-win, contents of ready-to-win effect, contents of notice effect to be executed in each game cycle, and the like are grasped. In this embodiment, the stop time, which is the time during which the combination of symbols is stopped and displayed, is constant. Therefore, by determining the variable time, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game, is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

FIG. 498 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used for a winning lottery or the like. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 sets the winning lottery, the setting of the display of the main display section 45, the setting of the pattern display of the pattern display device 41, and the like. Specifically, a winning random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery. A jackpot type counter C2 is used when sorting the jackpot types such as probability variable jackpot results and normal jackpot results. A ready-to-win random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not to generate a ready-to-win when the symbol row displayed on the symbol display device 41 is changed.

A random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. Further, when determining the variation time in the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b of the main display portion 45 and the symbol display device 41, a variation type counter CS is used. Furthermore, the electric accessory opening counter C4 is used for the electric accessory opening lottery for determining whether or not the electric accessory 34a of the second start port 34 is to be opened.

Each of the counters C1 to C4, CINI, and CS is a loop counter that adds 1 to the counter value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. FIG.

The RAM 64 is provided with a pending information storage area 64b and a determination processing execution area 64c. The reservation information storage area 64b is provided with a first reservation area Ra and a second reservation area Rb. In this embodiment, when the game ball enters the first start port 33, each value of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS at the timing of the ball entry is stored as pending information. It is stored chronologically in the first reservation area Ra of the area 64b. In the first reservation area Ra, there are four areas corresponding to the maximum number of game balls entered into the first starting port 33, that is, the first area, the second area, the third area, and the fourth area. area is provided. When the game ball enters the first start port 33, each value of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS at the timing of the ball is retained information (hereinafter, special 1 retained ) is stored in one of the first to fourth areas. Which of the first to fourth areas is stored is determined by the order of ball entry, and the earlier the ball entry timing is, the higher the area (the first area is the highest area).

Also, when the game ball enters the second start port 34, each value of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS at the timing of the ball entering is stored in the reservation information storage area 64b. It is stored chronologically in the second reservation area Rb. In the second reservation area Rb, there are four areas corresponding to the maximum number of game balls that have entered the second starting port 34, that is, the first area, the second area, the third area, and the fourth area. area is provided. When the game ball enters the second start port 34, each value of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS at the timing of the ball is retained information (hereinafter, special 2 retained ) is stored in one of the first to fourth areas. Which of the first to fourth areas is stored is determined by the order of ball entry, and the earlier the ball entry timing is, the higher the area (the first area is the highest area).

The details of the winning random number counter C1 will be described. The winning random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery as described above. The winning random number counter C1 is, for example, configured to be incremented by one within the range of 0 to 1199 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Further, when the winning random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value=0 to 1199).

The hit random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and when a game ball enters the first start port 33, the updated value is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entry. When a game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entry.

The value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the first reservation area Ra is moved to the execution area AE of the judgment processing execution area 64c, and is collated with the success/failure table stored in the success/failure table storage area 63a of the ROM 63 to determine the jackpot. It is determined whether or not Also, the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the second reservation area Rb is moved to the execution area AE of the judgment processing execution area 64c, and is collated with the success/failure table stored in the success/failure table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. It is determined whether or not it will be a big hit.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the first reservation area Ra is determined in the order in which the game ball enters the first start hole 33, and the determination process execution area Move to execution area AE of 64c. Specifically, the data stored in the first area of the first reservation area Ra is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c, and the data stored in the storage area of the first reservation area Ra is shifted. do. The data shift is to sequentially shift the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the upper area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area.

In addition, the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the second reservation area Rb moves to the execution area AE of the judgment processing execution area 64c in the order acquired by the game ball entering the second starting port 34. . Specifically, the data stored in the first area of the second reservation area Rb is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c, and the data stored in the storage area of the second reservation area Rb is shifted. do. The data shift is to sequentially shift the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the upper area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area.

When the value of the random number counter C1 is stored in the second reservation area Rb, regardless of whether the hit in the first reservation area Ra is stored or not, the value of the random number counter C1 is stored in the second reservation area Rb. The value of the stored winning random number counter C1 is to be moved to the execution area AE of the judgment processing execution area 64c. As a result, when the value of the random number counter C1 is stored in both the first reservation area Ra and the second reservation area Rb, the hit stored in the second reservation area Rb corresponding to the second starting port 34 Priority is given to the value of the random number counter C1. That is, in this embodiment, when the value of the random number counter C1 is stored in both the first reservation area Ra and the second reservation area Rb, it is stored in the second reservation area Rb corresponding to the second start port 34 The value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the second reservation area Rb is prioritized, and the data stored in the first area of the second reservation area Rb is determined among the values of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the second reservation area Rb. The data stored in the storage area of the second reservation area Rb is shifted to the processing execution area 64c. If the value of the hit random number counter C1 is not stored in the second reservation area Rb, among the values of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the first reservation area Ra, the first area of the first reservation area Ra A process of moving the stored data to the determination process execution area 64c and shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first reservation area Ra is executed.

In the above description, it is explained in what order the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb is moved to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c. However, it is not limited to the value of the winning random number counter C1, and counters other than the winning random number counter C1 stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb (jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fluctuation Each value of the type counter CS) is also moved to the execution area AE of the judgment processing execution area 64c in the same order.

Next, the details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining the jackpot type. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented one by one within the range of 0 to 99 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry when the game ball enters the first start port 33. When the game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the determination process execution area 64c. The jackpot type is determined using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in . Furthermore, the MPU 62 uses the value of the hit random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to determine the display mode of the segment display that is stopped and displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b. . The stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referred to for the determination.

Next, details of the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is used when determining whether or not a reach occurs when the result of the winning lottery is not a big win. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the first start port 33, and the second start port 34. It is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters. After the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first reservation area Ra is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c, it is compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63, and the reach occurs. After the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the second reservation area Rb is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c, it is compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63, and the reach occurs. However, when the result of the winning lottery is a big win and the game shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 determines the occurrence of reach regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

The ready-to-win means that, for some of the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41, there is a possibility that a combination of symbols corresponding to a big win will be established, and some combinations of symbols are stopped. It refers to a display state in which symbols are displayed and the remaining symbol rows are displayed in a variable manner. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the combination of symbols corresponding to the big win refers to the combination of the same symbols on a predetermined pay line. As a specific example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of FIG. A ready-to-win state is achieved by forming a ready-to-win line and performing variable display of symbols in the symbol row Z2 when the ready-to-win line is formed. Then, when a big win occurs, the same symbols as the symbols forming the reach line are stop-displayed in the symbol row Z2.

In addition, in the ready-to-win state, while the ready-to-win line is formed, the patterns are displayed in the remaining pattern rows in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen to create a ready-to-win effect. It includes a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a after displaying a combination of patterns in which a reach line is formed in a reduced size or not. In addition, when the ready-to-win effect is being performed or before the ready-to-win display is performed, the determination of whether or not to perform a notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character is performed using the reach-to-win random number counter C3 or other counters. may

Reach is classified into three types, normal reach, super reach, and special reach, depending on the content of reach performance. A ready-to-win performance is executed in which the degree of expectation for winning a big win is higher in super reach than in normal reach, and a ready-to-win performance is executed in which the degree of expectation for winning a big win is higher in special reach than in super reach.

Next, details of the fluctuation type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the variation time in the first symbol display portion 37 a and the second symbol display portion 37 b and the symbol variation time in the symbol display device 41 . The fluctuation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in sequence within a range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The variation type counter CS is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the first start port 33, and the second start port 34 It is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters. After moving to the determination processing execution area 64c, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the first reservation area Ra is changed when the variation display in the first symbol display unit 37a is started and when the symbol display device 41 starts variation of the symbol. used in determining the variation pattern in After moving to the determination processing execution area 64c, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the second reservation area Rb is changed at the start of the variation display in the second symbol display unit 37b and at the start of variation in the symbol by the symbol display device 41. used in determining the variation pattern in The variable time table stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is used when determining the variable time in the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to specify the content of the ready-to-win effect (that is, the type of ready-to-win) according to the type of variation pattern.

Next, the details of the electric accessory release counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory release counter C4 is, for example, configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 465 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated, and stored in the electric role holding area 64d of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the through gate 35a or through gate 35b. Then, at a predetermined timing, after the value of the electric role product open counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 64d moves to the electric role execution area 64e, the value of the electric role product open counter C4 is displayed in the electric role execution area 64e. A lottery (hereinafter referred to as an electric accessory open lottery) is performed as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to the open state. Specifically, in the electric role execution area 64e, the winning/failure table (electric role lottery winning/failure table) stored in the role lottery table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 and the value of the electric role lottery counter C4 are different. It is collated, and it is determined whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to the open state.

At least one of the acquired value of the winning random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, the variation type counter CS, and the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 is the special information in the present invention. Equivalent to. Also, at least one of the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the first reservation area Ra and the second reservation area Rb, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS Also called reserved information.

Next, the success/failure table will be described. The success/failure table is table data for matching with the winning random number counter C1 when a winning lottery is performed based on the winning random number counter C1. A low-probability mode and a high-probability mode are set in the pachinko machine 10 as a lottery mode for a winning lottery. In the winning lottery in the probability mode, the success/failure table for the high probability mode is referred to. High-probability mode (also called high-probability gaming state) is a gaming state that is started by winning a variable probability jackpot, and the probability of winning a jackpot in a winning lottery is relatively higher than the low-probability mode. To tell.

FIG. 499 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the success/failure table. FIG. 499(a) shows the success/failure table for the low-probability mode (for the low-probability mode), and FIG. 499(b) shows the success/failure table for the high-probability mode.

As shown in FIG. 499(a), five values of 0 to 4 are set in the success/failure table for the low-probability mode as the value of the winning random number counter C1 for the big win. Of the values from 0 to 1199, the values (5 to 1199) other than the five values from 0 to 4 are outliers. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 499(b), 16 values from 0 to 15 are set as values of the winning random number counter C1 for the high probability mode in the success/failure table. Of the values from 0 to 1199, the values (16 to 1199) other than the 16 values from 0 to 15 are outliers. In this way, the high-probability mode has a higher probability of winning a big win in the winning lottery than the low-probability mode.

Further, in the present embodiment, the value group of the winning random number counter C1 set as the jackpot in the win/fail table for the low-probability mode is the value of the win random number counter C1 set as the jackpot in the win/fail table for the high-probability mode. included in the group. However, as long as the probability of winning a big win in the high-probability mode is higher than in the low-probability mode as a result of the winning lottery, the number and value of the random numbers set as the big wins are arbitrary.

It should be noted that a "small win" may be provided as a result of the winning lottery, although it is not used in the win/fail table in this embodiment.

A "minor win" is a success/fail result that triggers a transition to the opening/closing execution mode in which the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is executed, but does not trigger a transition for both the lottery mode and the support mode. . On the other hand, "miss" is a pass/fail result that does not trigger the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, nor does it trigger the transition to the lottery mode and the support mode.

Next, the jackpot type will be described. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set in the pachinko machine 10. - 特許庁Specifically, for example, by providing differences in the following three aspects or modes, it is possible to set a plurality of types of jackpots.
(1) Aspect of opening/closing control of variable winning device 36 in opening/closing execution mode (2) Lottery mode for winning lottery after completion of opening/closing execution mode (3) Electric accessory 34a of second start port 34 after completion of opening/closing execution mode Support mode

In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the above-mentioned (1) opening/closing execution mode, the occurrence of winning balls to the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode. A high-frequency winning mode and a low-frequency winning mode can be set so that the frequencies are relatively high and low. For example, in the high frequency winning mode, the opening and closing door 36b is opened and closed a plurality of times (for example, 16 times) from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode, and one opening is performed until 30 seconds elapses or to the opening and closing door 36b. It can be set to continue until the number of hit balls reaches 10. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening and closing door 36b is opened and closed twice from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode, and one opening is until 0.2 sec elapses or a ball enters the opening and closing door 36b. It can be set to continue until the number reaches six.

When the operation handle 25 is operated by the player, the game ball shooting mechanism 81 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is shot toward the game area PA every 0.6 sec. In the case of the above specific example, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of the opening/closing door 36b is 0.2 sec. In other words, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of the open/close door 36b is shorter than the shooting cycle of the game ball. Therefore, in the opening and closing execution mode related to the low-frequency winning mode, substantially no game balls enter. However, even in the opening and closing execution mode related to the low-frequency winning mode, it may be set so that the game ball can enter.

The number of times of opening and closing the opening/closing door 36b, the limit time for one opening, and the limit number of openings for one opening are determined by the variable winning device 36 during the period from the start of the opening/closing execution mode to the end of the opening/closing execution mode. As long as the frequency of ball occurrence is higher in the high-frequency winning mode than in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening mode of the opening/closing door 36b is arbitrary. Specifically, if the high frequency winning mode has more opening and closing times than the low frequency winning mode, the opening limit time for one opening is longer, or the opening limit number for one opening is set more good. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, in the open/close execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode, substantially no winning ball to the variable winning device 36 may occur.

The pachinko machine 10 has a high-probability mode in which a winning lottery is performed using a high-probability win-or-fail table as a win-or-fail table, and a win-fail table as a win-or-fail table. A low-probability mode in which a winning lottery is performed using a low-probability success/failure table can be set. As described with reference to FIG. 499, when a winning lottery is performed using a high-probability success/failure table, a winning lottery is more likely to be won than when a winning lottery is performed using a low-probability success/failure table. likely to.

In the pachinko machine 10, as a form of the support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the end of the above-mentioned (3) opening and closing execution mode, shooting of game balls continues in a similar form to the game area PA. A high-frequency support mode and a low-frequency support mode are selected so that the frequency of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 being in the open state per unit time is relatively high or low when compared in the situation where can be set.

Specifically, the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode have different probabilities of winning the electric role open lottery in the electric role item opening lottery using the electric role item opening counter C4. In the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role open lottery in the electric accessory open lottery is made higher than in the low frequency support mode. In addition, in the high-frequency support mode, the opening time of the electric accessory 34a may be set longer than in the low-frequency support mode when the electric role opening winning is won.

Although not adopted in the present embodiment, in the high frequency support mode, the number of times the electric accessory 34a is in the open state when the electric accessory 34a is elected is set higher than in the low frequency support mode. good too. Furthermore, it may be configured such that the electric accessory 34a is set to have a long opening time once. In addition, in the high-frequency support mode, in the case where the open state of the electric accessory 34a occurs multiple times due to the electric role open winning, the closing time from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state is , may be set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the time secured from one electric accessory open lottery to the next electric accessory open lottery is set to be relatively shorter than in the low-frequency support mode. may

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of a ball entering the second starting port 34 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. That is, the high-frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary game state that assists establishment of special information acquisition conditions.

In the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won as a result of the winning lottery, the jackpot type is sorted using the jackpot type counter C2. The distribution of the jackpot types corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63 as a distribution table.

FIG. 500 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the allocation table. FIG. 500(a) shows the distribution table for the first start port, and FIG. 500(b) shows the distribution table for the second start port. The distribution table for the first start port is referred to during a winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33, and the distribution table for the second start port is referred to the second start port 34. It is referred to during the winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball.

As shown in the distribution table for the first starting port in FIG. A 16R probability variable jackpot, an 8R probability variable jackpot, a 16R normal jackpot, and an 8R normal jackpot are set.

In the 16R probability variable jackpot and the 8R probability variable jackpot, the mode of opening and closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode, and the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the end of the opening and closing execution mode (hereinafter simply “lottery mode”). ) is a high-probability mode, and the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode is a high-frequency support mode. The difference between the 16R variable variable jackpot and the 8R variable variable jackpot is that the number of openings of the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode is different, the 16R variable variable jackpot is 16 times (16 rounds), and the 8R variable variable jackpot is 8. times (8 rounds).

In the 16R normal jackpot and the 8R normal jackpot, the mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode, the lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends is the low-probability mode, and the opening/closing execution mode is selected. It is a jackpot in which the support mode after the end is the high-frequency support mode. The difference between the 16R normal jackpot and the 8R normal jackpot is that the number of openings of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is different, the 16R normal jackpot is 16 times (16 rounds), and the 8R normal jackpot is 8 times. times (8 rounds).

In the distribution table for the first start port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 99", "0 to 39" corresponds to the 16R probability variable jackpot, and "40 to 64" corresponds to the 8R probability variable jackpot. , "65 to 89" corresponds to the 16R normal jackpot, and "90 to 99" corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, four types of jackpots are set as the types of jackpots. Therefore, the aspect of the jackpot is diversified. When these four types of jackpots are compared, the degree of advantage for the player is the highest for the 16R variable variable jackpot, the next highest for the 8R variable variable jackpot, followed by the 16R normal jackpot, and finally the 8R normal jackpot. By thus setting a plurality of types of jackpots with different degrees of advantage for the player, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous and increase the degree of attention to the game.

As shown in the distribution table for the second start port in FIG. A 16R probability variable jackpot and an 8R normal jackpot are set. In the distribution table for the second start port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 99", "0 to 64" corresponds to the 16R probability variable jackpot, and "65 to 99" corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot. corresponds to

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won, the type of jackpot is distributed based on the ball entering the first start port 33 and when the jackpot is won. It is different from the case of winning a jackpot based on the entry of the ball into the starting hole 34, and a clear difference is provided in the advantage for the player.

In addition, when the winning lottery results in a loss, the mode is not changed to the opening/closing execution mode, and the lottery mode and the support mode are not changed. In the sorting of the types of jackpots, if a 16 probability variable jackpot or an 8R probability variable jackpot is obtained, as described above, the lottery mode after the end of the opening and closing execution mode becomes a high probability mode, but this high probability mode The state is continued until the next big win is won in the winning lottery.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, and the jackpot type using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. However, the MPU 62 further uses the value of the winning random number counter C1 and the value of the big winning type counter C2 to stop and display the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b. Determine the display mode. The stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referred to for the determination.

FIG. 501 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the success/failure table (electric accessary product open lottery success/failure table) used when executing the electric accessary product open lottery.

FIG. 501(a) shows a success/failure table (for low-frequency support mode) for electric accessory open lottery used in low-frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 501(a), in the success/failure table for electric accessary item opening lottery (for low frequency support mode), the values of the electric accessary item opening counter C4, which means that the short opening of the electric accessary has been won, are 0 and 1. are set, and two values of 2 and 3 are set as the values of the electric role product opening counter C4 that will be elected to open the electric role chief, and the value of the electric role product opening counter C4 that will be out. 462 values from 4 to 465 are set as values. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 in the low frequency support mode and the electric accessory open lottery is executed, the electric role short opening is won with a probability of 1/233, and the probability is 1/233. I will be elected to the opening of the electric director. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric role short opening is won in the low frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 0.6 seconds. In the low-frequency support mode, when winning the electric role opening, the electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 5.0 seconds.

FIG. 501(b) shows a success/failure table for electric accessory open lottery (for high frequency support mode) used in high frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 501(b), the electric accessory opening lottery success/failure table (for high-frequency support mode) contains 0 to 461 as the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 that wins the opening during the electric role. 462 values of are set. Four values of 462 to 465 are set as the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4 that is out. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 in the high-frequency support mode and the electric accessory open lottery is executed, it means that the open during the electric role is won with a probability of 231/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the open during electric operation is won in the high frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.6 seconds.

In this way, the success/failure table for the electric accessory open lottery is set so that the high-frequency support mode has a higher probability of the game ball entering the second start port 34 than the low-frequency support mode. . In addition, when the support mode is the low-frequency support mode according to the electric accessory opening lottery success/failure table (for low-frequency support mode), one of two types of opening time of the electric accessory 34a is selected. is set to obtain When the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the opening time of the electric accessory 34a is longer than the short opening of the electric role, and the length of the electric role is determined according to the success/failure table for the electric accessory opening lottery (for the low-frequency support mode). It is set to be open during electric service, which is a shorter time than open. It should be noted that the respective opening times when winning the short-term opening, when winning the open during the electricity, and when winning the long-term opening need not be limited to the above examples, and may be other times.

<<11-3>> Electrical Configuration of Audio Light Emitting Control Device and Display Control Device:
Next, electrical configurations of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 502 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. As shown in FIG. A part of the configuration such as the power supply device 85 (FIG. 497) is omitted. An MPU 92 is mounted on an audio emission control board 91 provided in the audio emission control device 90 . The MPU 92 is a device containing a CPU, a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like.

The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables, and the like. For example, part of the area of the ROM 93 is provided with an effect pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like. Details of these will be described later.

The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the ROM 93 . For example, a part of the area of the RAM 94 is provided with various flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, and the like. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 92, and they may be individually integrated into chips.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port. The input side of the MPU 92 is connected to the main control device 60 and the effect operation button 24 . Various commands are received from the main controller 60 . A speaker 46 and various lamps 47 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92, and the display control device 100 is also connected.

The display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102, which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are integrated into chips, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. is installed. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 102, and they may be individually integrated into chips.

The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, to generate internal commands for the VDP 105). .

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and also stores JPEG format image data for background images.

A work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when various programs are executed by the MPU 102 .

The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the pattern display device 41 . The VDP 105 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is an IC chip, and is a kind of microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, etc., and intervenes in the reading and writing of data.

The character ROM 106 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as designs and pictures displayed on the design display device 41 . The character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display patterns and display pictures, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. The various display pictorial diagrams also include pictorial diagrams of petals P1 to P4, which will be described later. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 106 . It is also possible to configure the character ROM 106 to store the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 .

The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, and by rewriting the content of the video RAM 107, the display content of the pattern display device 41 is changed.

Hereinafter, the MPU 62, ROM 63, and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main MPU 62, main ROM 63, and main RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the sound emission control device 90 are referred to as the sound and light side MPU 92 and the sound and light side, respectively. The ROM 93 and the sound/light side RAM 94 are also called, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also called the display side MPU 102 .

<<11-4>> Outline of Processing by Gaming Machine:
Next, an overview of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described.

<<11-4-1>> Hold display:
In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as described above, below the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, there is a first start indicator indicating the number of pending game balls based on the entry of game balls into the first start opening 33. A mouth reservation area Ds1, a second start opening reservation area Ds2 indicating the number of reservations based on the number of game balls entering the second start opening 34, a first start opening reservation area Ds1 and a second start opening reservation A reserved digestion region Dm located between regions Ds2 is displayed.

FIG. 503 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of changes in the first start opening reservation area Ds1 and the reservation digestion area Dm. In the first start opening reservation area Ds1, up to four reservation display icons corresponding to each reservation (each of up to four reservations) based on the entry of the game ball into the first start opening 33 are arranged in the horizontal direction. Is displayed. In this embodiment, the hold display icon is a circle, and in the example shown in FIG. A first pending display icon H1 and a second pending display icon H2 are shown respectively corresponding to (also referred to as pending 2). In the first start opening reservation area Ds1, the first reservation display icon H1 is displayed at the rightmost position, and the second reservation display icon H2 is displayed at the second position from the right side to the left side. That is, in the first start opening reservation area Ds1, each time a game ball enters the first start opening 33, the reservation display icon is displayed so as to increase one by one from the right side to the left side.

The reserved digestion area Dm is in the shape of a container whose upper side is open, and in the example shown in FIG. 503(a), the reserved display icon H0 is arranged inside the reserved digestion area Dm. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a winning lottery is performed when a ball enters the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, and a variable display is performed to notify the result of the winning lottery. , at the timing when this variable display is started, the pending display icon is placed inside the pending digestion area Dm. This variable display is based on the suspension (suspension information) corresponding to the suspension display icon H0 arranged inside the suspension digestion area Dm. The player can know that the suspension corresponding to the suspension display icon H0 is completed by observing that the suspension display icon H0 is arranged inside the suspension completion area Dm.

In the state shown in FIG. 503(a), when the variable display ends and the display is stopped, the pending display icon H0 placed inside the pending digestion area Dm disappears. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 503(b), the first holding display icon H1 positioned on the rightmost side in the first start opening holding area Ds1 moves inside the holding digestion area Dm. At this time, the second reservation display icon H2 positioned second from the right side moves (shifts) to the rightmost position in the first start opening reservation area Ds1. In the example shown in FIG. 503(b), the third and fourth pending display icons from the right side to the left side do not exist. moves (shifts) to the second position, and the fourth positioned pending display icon moves (shifts) to the third position.

As a result of the movement shown in FIG. 503(b), the state shown in FIG. 503(c) is obtained. That is, the first reservation display icon H1 is arranged inside the reservation digestion area Dm, and the second reservation display icon H2 is displayed at the rightmost position of the first start opening reservation area Ds1. At this time, a variable display for notifying the result of the winning lottery based on the reservation (reservation information) corresponding to the first reservation display icon H1 is executed.

As described above, each time the variable display and the stop display corresponding to one game round are executed, each holding display icon displayed in the first start opening holding area Ds1 shifts from the left side to the right side. , eventually moves from the rightmost position into the interior of the retained digestion region Dm. Then, variable display and stop display for informing the result of the winning lottery based on the reservation information corresponding to the reservation display icon are executed. In this way, in each of the holding display icons displayed in the first start opening holding area Ds1, the holding information corresponding to each holding display icon is arranged in the order from the right side to the left side (that is, the order of holding). Subject to lottery.

FIG. 504 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of changes in the second start opening retention area Ds2 and the retention digestion area Dm. In the second starting opening reservation area Ds2, up to four holding display icons H corresponding to each holding (each of up to four holdings) based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34 are arranged in the horizontal direction. is displayed. The manner of change of the second starting opening reservation area Ds2 is roughly the same as the manner of change of the first starting opening reservation area Ds1 shown in FIG. The direction is opposite to that of Ds1. That is, each time a game ball enters the second starting hole 34, the pending display icon H is displayed so as to increase one by one from the left side to the right side. Each time a game round is executed, the holding display icon H moves one by one from the right side to the left side in the second start opening holding area Ds2, and finally moves inside the holding digestion area Dm to display the holding display. The variable display and stop display for informing the result of the winning lottery based on the hold (hold information) corresponding to the icon H are executed (digested). In this way, in each of the holding display icons displayed in the second start opening holding area Ds2, the holding information corresponding to each holding display icon is arranged in the order from left to right (that is, the order of holding). Subject to lottery.

In addition, when the holding display icon H exists in the second starting opening holding area Ds2, the holding display icon existing in the first starting opening holding area Ds1 is given priority to the second starting opening holding area Ds2. The Special 2 suspension corresponding to the existing suspension display icon H is terminated.

The holding display icons displayed in the first starting opening holding area Ds1 and the second starting opening holding area Ds2 were circular as described above, but instead of this, triangles, squares, pentagons, etc. Other polygonal shapes are also possible. Further, the pending display icon is not limited to a graphical image, and may be an image of a character or the like. Although the reserved digestion area Dm was trapezoidal as described above, it may be an image of other shapes such as triangles, squares, circles, etc. instead. Further, the reserved digestion area Dm is not limited to a graphic image, and may be an image of a character or the like. Further, in the present embodiment, the reservation display icon moved from the first start opening reservation area Ds1 or the second start opening reservation area Ds2 to the reservation digestion area Dm is arranged inside the reservation digestion area Dm. However, instead of this, it may be displayed in such a manner that it disappears after entering the reserved digestion area Dm.

<<11-4-2>> Foreshadowing effect:
In recent pachinko machines, in order to increase the player's expectation for the hold information corresponding to each hold display icon (that is, the hold information stored in the hold information storage area 64b of the RAM 64), the hit included in each hold information The value of the random number counter C1 is confirmed before it becomes an object of the winning lottery, and based on the confirmed result, the player is given a feeling of anticipation, so-called look-ahead effect. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as one of the look-ahead effects, when there is reservation information that has a high possibility of winning a jackpot in a winning lottery in the reservation information corresponding to each reservation display icon, the jackpot is won. To execute a premonitory performance, which is a special performance, when the variation of the suspension information stored prior to the suspension information that is likely to occur is stopped and displayed. The foreshadowing effect will be described in detail below.

In the normal time when the support mode is the low-frequency support mode and the lottery mode is the low-probability mode, the player hits to the left, causing the game ball to flow down to the left side of the game area PA and enter the first start port 33. to enter the ball. When the game ball enters the first start port 33, the special information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b as special 1 reservation. Although they are stored in order, here, it is assumed that the maximum number (upper limit number) of 4 special 1 reserves is accumulated.

FIG. 505 is an explanatory diagram showing a case where a jackpot is included in special 1 pending in normal time. As shown in the figure, it is assumed that four special 1 reserves from special 1 reserve 1 to special 1 reserve 4 are stored at normal times. The main control device 60 executes the first determination process each time a game ball enters the first start port 33, and determines the success or failure of the winning lottery based on the reservation information of the special 1 reservation stored by the current ball entry. , determination of the type of jackpot, determination of presence/absence of occurrence of ready-to-win, determination of type of variation pattern, etc. are performed before the reservation information is subject to the winning lottery by the main controller 60.例文帳に追加The determination of the type of variation pattern is performed based on the variation time obtained by obtaining the variation time based on the value of the variation type counter CS included in the reservation information. After that, main controller 60 sets the determination result of the previous determination process as a hold command, and transmits the hold command to sound emission control device 90 . The sound emission control device 90 receives the hold command, and from the hold command, specifies the result of winning lottery, the type of big win, the presence or absence of reach generation, and the content of reach effect (type of reach). The content of reach production can be specified from the type of variation pattern. In the illustrated example, it is assumed that the lottery result of the winning lottery is the jackpot winning in the last stored special 1 reserve 4 among the 4 special 1 reserves, and it is determined that super reach occurs. The sound emission control device 90 executes a pending continuous effect process triggered by the receipt of a hold command for the special 1 hold 4 determined to win the jackpot from the main control unit 60 . According to the reservation continuous performance process, when each special 1 reservation stored at the timing before the special 1 reservation 4 is consumed, the precursor notice performance is executed. Specifically, one or a plurality of times (three times in this case) of forewarning effect is executed across each game round corresponding to Special 1 Reservation 1 to Special 1 Reservation 3.

Figures 506 to 508 and Figure 510 show a series of performances from digestion of Special 1 Hold 1 to digestion of Special 1 Hold 4. FIG. 506 is an explanatory diagram showing the variable display and the foreshadowing effect (first time) for Special 1 Suspension 1. FIG. As shown in FIG. 506(a), in the sound emission control device 90, first, a variable display for notifying the lottery result of the winning lottery for Special 1 Hold 1 is performed. Specifically, the display icon H1 corresponding to the special 1 reservation 1 is arranged inside the reservation digestion area Dm, and the result of the winning lottery based on the reservation (reservation information) corresponding to this display icon H1 is notified. The variation for is displayed in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a.

In the sound emission control device 90, after the variable display of the special 1 hold 1, the stop display of the special 1 hold 1 is executed as shown in FIG. 506(b). This stop display constitutes a part of the foreshadowing effect. Here, the symbol combination corresponding to the chance eye is stopped and displayed. That is, for a plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41, a symbol combination corresponding to the chance eye is displayed in a stopped state on the activated line L1. In this embodiment, for example, [3, 4, 1] is set as the chance. Note that [3, 4, 1] is just an example, and other combinations may be used as chances.

In the sound emission control device 90, after the stop display, as shown in FIG. 506(c), an effect in which bubbles BL appear is executed. The effect in which the bubble BL appears constitutes a part of the foreshadowing effect. As an effect in which the bubbles BL appear, the bubbles BL are displayed in a wide range including the main display area MA of the display surface 41a, and a sound indicating the bubble sound is emitted from the speaker 46. FIG.

In summary, when the lottery result of the winning lottery for special 1 reservation 4 is a big win, when the variation for special 1 reservation 1 is stopped, the combination of symbols corresponding to the chance eye on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. is stop-displayed, and during the stop-display, an effect is executed in which bubbles BL appear together with a bubbly sound. An effect in which the combination of symbols corresponding to the chance eye is stopped and displayed, and bubbles BL appear with a bubble sound during the stop display corresponds to the foreshadowing effect (first time).

After the variable display of Special 1 Suspension 1, the player confirms that a chance eye appears in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a and bubbles BL appear overlapping the symbol combination of the chance eye. , it is expected that there may be hold information for winning a big win in a winning lottery in the special 1 hold corresponding to each hold display icon.

FIG. 507 is an explanatory diagram showing the variable display and the premonition effect (second time) for Special 1 Suspension 2. FIG. After execution of the effect shown in FIG. 506, as shown in FIG. 507(a), the variable display for notifying the lottery result of the winning lottery for Special 1 Hold 2 is executed in the sound emission control device 90. Specifically, the display icon H2 corresponding to the special 1 reservation 2 is arranged inside the reservation digestion area Dm, and the result of the winning lottery based on the reservation (reservation information) corresponding to this display icon H2 is notified. The variation for is displayed in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a.

In the sound emission control device 90, after the variable display of the special 1 hold 2, the stop display of the special 1 hold 2 is executed as shown in FIG. 507(b). This stop display constitutes a part of the foreshadowing effect. Here, the symbol combination corresponding to the chance eye is stopped and displayed. That is, for a plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41, a symbol combination corresponding to the chance eye is displayed in a stopped state on the activated line L1. The second chance is [3, 4, 1] as in the case of the foreshadowing effect (first time).

After the stop display, the sound emission control device 90 executes an effect in which bubbles BL appear, as shown in FIG. 507(c). The effect in which the bubble BL appears constitutes a part of the foreshadowing effect. The effect in which the bubbles BL appear is the effect in which the bubbles BL are displayed together with the sound of bubbles, as in the case of the foreshadowing effect (first time).

In summary, when the lottery result of the winning lottery for special 1 reservation 4 is a big win, when the variation for special 1 reservation 2 is stopped, the combination of symbols corresponding to the chance eye on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. is stop-displayed, and during the stop-display, an effect is executed in which bubbles BL appear together with a bubbly sound. The effect in which the symbol combination corresponding to the chance eye is stopped and displayed, and bubbles BL appear along with the bubble sound during the stop display corresponds to the foreshadowing effect (second time). That is, according to this example, following the execution of the foreshadowing effect (first time) at the time of the fluctuation stop for Special 1 Hold 1, the foreshadowing effect (second time) is also performed at the time of the fluctuation stop for Special 1 Hold 2 is executed.

After the fluctuation display of Special 1 Suspension 2, following the execution of the premonitory effect (first time) at the time of the fluctuation stop of Special 1 Suspension 1, the player displays a chance eye in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a. appears, and when it is confirmed that the bubble BL appears overlapping the symbol combination of the chance, the special 1 reservation corresponding to each reservation display icon includes reservation information for winning a jackpot in a winning lottery. I hope that the possibility of doing so has increased.

FIG. 508 is an explanatory diagram showing the variable display and the forewarning effect (third time) for Special 1 Suspension 3. FIG. After execution of the effect shown in FIG. 507, as shown in FIG. 508(a), the variable display for notifying the lottery result of the winning lottery for Special 1 Hold 3 is executed in the sound emission control device 90. Specifically, the display icon H3 corresponding to the special 1 reservation 3 is arranged inside the reservation digestion area Dm, and the result of the winning lottery based on the reservation (reservation information) corresponding to this display icon H3 is notified. The variation for is displayed in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a.

In the sound emission control device 90, after the variable display of the special 1 hold 3, the stop display of the special 1 hold 3 is executed as shown in FIG. 508(b). This stop display constitutes a part of the foreshadowing effect. Here, the symbol combination corresponding to the chance eye is stopped and displayed. That is, for a plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41, a symbol combination corresponding to the chance eye is displayed in a stopped state on the activated line L1. The second chance is [3, 4, 1] as in the case of the foreshadowing effect (first time).

In the sound emission control device 90, after the stop display, as shown in FIG. 508(c), an effect in which bubbles BL appear is executed. The effect in which the bubble BL appears constitutes a part of the foreshadowing effect. The effect in which the bubbles BL appear is the effect in which the bubbles BL are displayed together with the sound of bubbles, as in the case of the foreshadowing effect (first time).

In summary, when the lottery result of the winning lottery for special 1 reservation 4 is a big win, when the variation for special 1 reservation 3 is stopped, the combination of symbols corresponding to the chance eye on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. is stop-displayed, and during the stop-display, an effect is executed in which bubbles BL appear together with a bubbly sound. An effect in which the combination of symbols corresponding to the chance eye is stopped and displayed, and bubbles BL appear with a bubble sound during the stop display corresponds to the foreshadowing effect (third time). That is, according to this example, the foreshadowing effect (first time) is executed when the fluctuation of Special 1 Reservation 1 is stopped, and the precursory notice effect (second time) is executed when the fluctuation is stopped for Special 1 Reservation 2. Following that, the predictive notice effect (third time) is also executed at the time of stopping the fluctuation of Special 1 Suspension 3. When the foreshadowing performance is continuously generated, the expectation of winning a big win in the winning lottery increases. The degree of expectation means a high probability of winning a jackpot.

FIG. 509 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the number of appearances of the predictive effect and the execution schedule effect. As shown in the figure, when the number of appearances of the foreshadowing performance is the first time and the second time, the ready-to-win performance of normal reach or more is set as the performance to be executed by the hold information in the special 1 reserve (that is, the scheduled performance). When the foreshadowing effect appears for the third time, a ready-to-win effect equal to or greater than super ready-to-win is set as the effect (execution-scheduled effect) to be executed according to the hold information in the special 1 reserve. On the other hand, when the number of appearances of the foreshadowing performance reaches the fourth time, determination of jackpot winning from special reach is set as the performance (scheduled performance) to be executed according to the reservation information in the special 1 reservation.

After the fluctuation display of Special 1 Suspension 3, following the execution of the premonitory effect (second time) at the time of the fluctuation stop of Special 1 Suspension 2, the player displays a chance eye in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a. appears, and when it is confirmed that the bubble BL appears overlapping the symbol combination of the chance, the special 1 reservation corresponding to each reservation display icon includes reservation information for winning a jackpot in a winning lottery. I look forward to doing more. In particular, since the foreshadowing effect is performed three times in succession, it is confirmed that a reach effect equal to or greater than super reach (that is, super reach or special reach) will be executed. I hope that the possibility of doing so will increase even further.

FIG. 510 is an explanatory diagram showing variable display, ready-to-win effect, and stop display for Special 1 Hold 4. FIG. After execution of the effect shown in FIG. 508, as shown in FIG. 510(a), the variable display for notifying the lottery result of the winning lottery for Special 1 Hold 4 is executed in the sound emission control device 90. Specifically, the display icon H4 corresponding to the special 1 reservation 4 is arranged inside the reservation digestion area Dm, and the result of the winning lottery based on the reservation (reservation information) corresponding to this display icon H4 is notified. The variation for is displayed in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a.

In the sound emission control device 90, as shown in FIG. 510(b), after the variable display of the special 1 suspension 4, the symbol row Z1 and the symbol row Z3 are stopped and displayed, and the symbol row Z2 is displayed with the variable display of the symbol. A ready-to-win effect is executed by being performed. The ready-to-win production here is a production to indicate that it is super ready-to-win.

In the sound emission control device 90, as shown in FIG. 510(c), after the ready-to-win effect, the combination of symbols announcing that the result of the winning lottery by the main control device 60 is a big win is stopped and displayed. That is, for a plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41, a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning of the jackpot is displayed in a stopped state on the activated line L1.

FIG. 511 is a time chart showing a series of performances for the above-described Special 1 Suspension 1 to Special 1 Suspension 4 on the time axis. As shown in the figure, in game turn U1 for special 1 hold 1, first, variable display A11 is executed. The variable display A11 is shown in FIG. 506(a). Subsequently, a stop display A12 for making a chance eye appear is executed. The stop display A12 is shown in FIG. 506(b). Subsequently, a bubble appearance effect A13 is executed. The bubble appearance effect A13 is shown in FIG. 506(c). Along with the end of the bubble appearance effect A13, the game round U1 for the special 1 reservation 1 ends. The stop display A12 and the appearance effect A13 of bubbles constitute a foreshadowing effect (first time).

In the game round U2 for the special 1 reserve 2 subsequent to the game round U1 for the special 1 reserve 1, first, the variable display B11 is executed. The variable display B11 is shown in FIG. 507(a). Subsequently, a stop display B12 for making a chance eye appear is executed. The stop display B12 is shown in FIG. 507(b). Subsequently, a bubble appearance effect B13 is executed. The bubble appearance effect B13 is shown in FIG. 507(c). Along with the end of the bubble appearance effect B13, the game round U2 for the special 1 reservation 2 ends. The stop display B12 and the appearance effect B13 of the bubbles constitute the foreshadowing effect (second time).

In the game round U3 for the special 1 reserve 3 following the game round U2 for the special 1 reserve 2, first, the variable display C11 is executed. The variable display C11 is shown in FIG. 508(a). Subsequently, a stop display C12 that causes a chance eye to appear is executed. The stop display C12 is shown in FIG. 508(b). Subsequently, a bubble appearance effect C13 is executed. The bubble appearance effect C13 is shown in FIG. 508(c). Along with the end of the bubble appearance effect C13, the game round U3 for the special 1 reservation 3 ends. The stop display C12 and the appearance effect C13 of bubbles constitute a foreshadowing effect (third time).

In the game round U4 for the special 1 reserve 4 following the game round U3 for the special 1 reserve 3, first, the variable display D11 is executed. The variable display D11 is shown in FIG. 510(a). Subsequently, a super ready-to-win effect D12 is executed. The super reach effect D12 is shown in FIG. 510(b). Subsequently, a stop display D13 corresponding to the winning of the jackpot is executed. The stop display D13 is shown in FIG. 510(c). When the stop display D13 ends, the game round U4 for the special 1 hold 4 ends.

506 to 508, 510, and 511, the mode of execution of the forewarning effect has been described above. This is when the lottery result of the winning lottery is a jackpot lottery. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in addition to the execution mode of the forewarning effect described above, which one of Special 1 Suspension 1 to Special 1 Suspension 4 has become a trigger and Special 1 Suspension that has become a trigger , The foreshadowing performance is executed in various modes depending on the content of the ready-to-win performance to be executed and the presence or absence of the winning of the jackpot. Specifically, when the triggering Special 1 reserve is Special 1 reserve 4, and the lottery result of the winning lottery for Special 1 reserve 4 is out, but a super reach occurs, Special 1 reserve 1 to Special It is configured such that the foreshadowing performance can be executed in each of the game rounds U1 to U3 for 1 reservation 3.例文帳に追加When the special 1 reserve that is the trigger is the special 1 reserve 4, and the lottery result of the winning lottery for the special 1 reserve 4 is out, but normal reach occurs, the game round U2 and the special 1 for the special 1 reserve 2 It is configured such that the foreshadowing performance can be executed in both the game rounds U3 for the reservation 3 or only the game rounds U3 for the special 1 reservation 3.例文帳に追加Also, when the triggering special 1 reserve is special 1 reserve 3, and the lottery result of the winning lottery for special 1 reserve 3 is out, but normal reach occurs, the game round U1 for special 1 reserve 1 and It is configured such that the foreshadowing performance can be executed in both the game rounds U2 for the special 1 reservation 2 or only the game rounds U2 for the special 1 reservation 2.例文帳に追加Also, when the triggering special 1 reserve is special 1 reserve 2 and the lottery result of the winning lottery for special 1 reserve 2 is lost but normal reach occurs, in the game round U1 for special 1 reserve 1 A configuration is adopted in which the foreshadowing effect can be executed. In addition, when the triggering special 1 suspension is special 1 suspension 3, and the lottery result of the winning lottery for special 1 suspension 3 is a jackpot winning, the game round U1 and special 1 suspension 2 for special 1 suspension 1 or both of the game rounds U2 of , or only the game rounds U2 of special 1 reservation 2, the foreshadowing effect can be executed. In short, when there is a special 1 reservation having reservation information (scheduled to be executed) for executing (scheduled to execute) a performance with a high expectation of winning a jackpot such as a ready-to-win performance among the stored special 1 suspensions. It suffices to make an omen notice effect appear in a plurality of continuous game rounds or one game round in series with respect to the special 1 hold that is a trigger among the game rounds for the special 1 hold stored earlier. , the number of times of appearance can be any number as long as it does not violate the relationship between the number of times of appearance of the foreshadowing effect and the execution schedule effect described with reference to FIG.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the mode of execution of the foreshadowing effect is determined by the special 1 pending continuous effect setting process executed in the sound emission control device 90 . Specifically, according to the special 1 suspension continuous effect setting process, a suspension command sent from the main control device 60 is received each time a game ball enters the first start port 33 or the second start port 34. , when it is determined from the hold command that it is a special 1 hold having hold information for executing (scheduled to be executed) a ready-to-win effect with a high expectation of winning a big hit such as a ready-to-win effect, the contents of the ready-to-win effect and By comparing the number of special 1 suspension information existing before the special 1 suspension with a table showing the relationship between the number of appearances of the foreshadowing effect shown in FIG. It is determined which of the previously existing special 1 reservation information is used to execute the foreshadowing effect. For example, the special 1 reserve that became the trigger is special 1 reserve 4, and the lottery result of the winning lottery for special 1 reserve 4 is out, but normal reach occurs. When two cases, that is, the case of executing the forewarning performance in the game round U3 for U2 and the special 1 suspension 3 and the case for executing the foreshadowing performance in the game round U3 for the special 1 suspension 3, For example, it is determined by lottery which of the two patterns is to be adopted, or whether neither of them is to be adopted.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as described above, when a plurality of foreshadowing effects are to appear, the special 1 suspension that is the trigger is continued, and the plurality of foreshadowing effects are configured to be continuous. However, as a modification to this, when a plurality of foreshadowing effects are executed, the foreshadowing effects do not necessarily have to be continuous, and there may be game rounds without the foreshadowing effects on the way.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. Only if there is no special 2 hold that is remembered based on the ball entering. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the special 2 hold is changed with priority over the special 1 hold, during the change of the special 1 hold (in the above example, the change of the special 1 hold 1 is started and immediately before the change of special 1 reservation 4 is started), the electric accessory opening lottery is won, the electric accessory 34a is opened, and the game ball enters the second start port 34 In this case, the variation of the special 2 suspension obtained by the relevant ball entry is executed with priority over the variation of the special 1 suspension, and the suspension continuous performance of the game rounds U1 to U4 is interrupted.

As a process when the performance of the game rounds U1 to U4 is interrupted, after the fluctuation of the special 2 suspension is completed, the suspension continuous performance of the special 1 suspension that has not been executed (hereinafter also referred to as "remaining") is canceled. However, in this configuration, the player is given a sense of incongruity that the suspension continuous effect has been stopped, and there is a problem that the interest in the game is spoiled. In order to solve this problem, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment executes a pending continuous effect having the following configuration.

FIG. 512 is an explanatory diagram showing the basic concept of the continuous pending effect employed in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment. In FIG. 512, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same processing contents as in FIG. Here, in the middle of the game round U2 of Special 1 Reservation 2 (time t1), the electric accessary item opening lottery performed by the game ball passing through the through gates 35a and 35b is won, and the electric accessary item 34a is opened. Then, it is assumed that a game ball enters the second starting port 34 . In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, after the game round U2 of the special 1 reservation 2 is completed (time t2), it is stored based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 34 by the special 2 reservation effect processing. Execute one or more game rounds VZ for special 2 hold. Specifically, according to the special 2 hold effect processing executed by the sound emission control device 90, when a hold command for the special 2 hold is received from the main control device 60, the special 1 hold 2 game round U2 is performed. After finishing (time t2), one or a plurality of game rounds VZ for the special 2 suspension stored based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 are executed.

Subsequently, after the game round of the special 2 suspension is completed (time t3), the remaining special that has not been executed due to the preferential execution of the game round U2 of the special 1 suspension 2 by the suspension continuous effect process. Execute the game round for 1 hold. That is, in the middle of the game turn U2 of the special 1 reservation 2, when the game ball enters the second start port 34 and the special 2 reservation is accumulated, the game turn VZ for the special 2 reservation is changed to the remaining special The configuration is such that the game rounds U3 and U4 for the 1 hold are preferentially executed, and the remaining game rounds U3 and U4 for the special 1 hold are executed after the game round VZ for the special 2 hold is completed. However, there is a feature different from the conventional one in the effect displayed in the game round VZ for the special 2 hold.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the following effects (i) to (iii) are prepared as predetermined effects included in the effects of the game round VZ for special 2 hold.
(i) Special 1 continuous production continuation chance eye production (ii) Special 1 continuous production continuation pattern same color production (iii) Special 2 exclusive production

Which one of the above (i) to (iii) should be used as the predetermined effect was determined based on the following knowledge of the inventor.

When the lottery result of the electric accessory open lottery that triggered the execution of the special 2 hold variation is short open electric role, the opening time of the electric accessory 34a is as short as 0.6 seconds. The number of game balls entering the second start port 34 is one, and two at most. Therefore, the game round VZ for the special 2 hold is one game round or two game rounds. In this case, even when the game round VZ of the special 2 reserve is being executed, the player clearly remembers the game round of the special 1 reserve executed immediately before (the game round U2 in the example of FIG. 512). There will be Therefore, the inventor wants to maintain the continuity of the production by using the foreshadowing effect (appearance of the chance eye + appearance effect of bubbles) executed in the special 1 pending game cycle executed immediately before as much as possible. thought. The appearance of the chance eye of the foreshadowing effect executed in the special 1 pending game cycle executed immediately before corresponds to the chance eye effect for continuing the special 1 continuous effect of the above (i).

《11-4-3》 Special 1 continuous production Chance production for continuation:
Next, the special 1 continuous effect continuation chance effect will be described. Here, case 1 will be described.

FIG. 513 is an explanatory diagram conceptually showing how special 1 suspension is performed in case 1. FIG. As shown, in Case 1, it is assumed that Special 1 Reserve 1 and Special 1 Reserve 2 are stored in normal times. The main control device 60 executes the first determination process each time a game ball enters the first start port 33, and determines the success or failure of the winning lottery based on the reservation information of the special 1 reservation stored by the current ball entry. , determination of the type of jackpot, determination of presence/absence of occurrence of ready-to-win, determination of type of variation pattern, etc. are performed before the reservation information is subject to the winning lottery by the main controller 60.例文帳に追加After that, main controller 60 sets the determination result of the previous determination process as a hold command, and transmits the hold command to sound emission control device 90 . The sound emission control device 90 receives the hold command, and from the hold command, specifies the result of winning lottery, the type of big win, the presence or absence of reach generation, and the content of reach effect (type of reach). The content of reach production can be specified from the type of variation pattern. In the illustrated example, it is assumed that in Special 1 Reservation 2, the result of the winning lottery is out and normal reach is determined to occur. The voice light emission control device 90 executes the suspension continuous effect processing triggered by the receipt of the suspension command for the special 1 suspension 2 judged to generate this normal reach from the main control device 60 .

FIG. 514 shows, in case 1, the special 1 suspension performed by the suspension continuous presentation process (hereinafter referred to as the special 1 suspension continuous presentation process) and the special 2 suspension performed by the special 2 suspension presentation process. It is a time chart explaining production. As shown in the figure, first, a game round U11 for special 1 suspension 1 is executed by special 1 suspension continuous effect processing. The game round U11 for the special 1 reserve 1 is the same as the game round U1 for the special 1 reserve 1 explained with reference to FIG. In the game round U11 for Special 1 Hold 1, first, the variable display A11 is executed. The variable display A11 is shown in FIG. 506(a). Subsequently, a stop display A12 for making a chance eye appear is executed. The stop display A12 is shown in FIG. 506(b). Subsequently, a bubble appearance effect A13 is executed. The bubble appearance effect A13 is shown in FIG. 506(c). When the bubble appearance effect A13 ends, the game round U11 for the special 1 reservation 1 ends. The stop display A12 and the appearance effect A13 of bubbles constitute a foreshadowing effect (first time).

In the middle of the game round U11 for this special 1 reservation 1 (time t11), the electric role short opening is won in the electric role item opening lottery performed by the game ball passing through the through gates 35a and 35b, and the electric role is elected. It is assumed that the object 34a is opened for 0.6 seconds and one game ball enters the second starting port 34. In this case, after the game round U11 for the special 1 reserve 1 ends (time t12), the game round V11 for the special 2 reserve 1 stored based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 34 is performed. Execution is started. The execution of the game round V11 for the special 2 suspension 1 is executed by the special 2 suspension effect processing by the sound emission control device 90. FIG. According to the special 2 reservation effect processing, when starting the game round V11 for the special 2 reservation 1, which one is the lottery result of the electric accessory open lottery that triggered the execution of the special 2 reservation change? A first determination is made, and when it is determined by the first determination that the lottery result of the electric accessory open lottery is short-open electric role, a second determination, which will be described later, is performed. Then, when the determination result of the second determination is affirmative, the special 1 continuous effect continuation chance effect of (i) is displayed in the game round V11 for the special 2 suspension 1.例文帳に追加In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the special 1 continuous effect continuation chance effect is the chance of the foreshadowing effect executed in the game round (game round U11 in case 1) for the special 1 suspension executed immediately before. It was the same as the production (image) of the appearance of the eyes.

That is, in the game round V11 for the special 2 reserve 1 which is executed following the game round U11 for the special 1 reserve 1, the variation display α11 for the special 2 reserve 1 is executed first. Subsequently, a stop display A12 for making a chance eye appear is executed. The stop display A12 is the same as the stop display A12 executed in the game round U11, and is given the same reference numerals. The stop display A12 is shown in FIG. 506(b). That is, the image shown in FIG. 506(b) corresponds to the special 1 continuous effect continuation chance effect. Subsequently, a bubble appearance effect A13 is executed. The appearance effect A13 of bubbles is the same as the stop display executed in the game round U11, and is given the same reference numerals. The bubble appearance effect A13 is shown in FIG. 506(c). When the bubble appearance effect A13 ends, the game round V11 for the special 2 reservation 1 ends. When viewed from the player, it is recognized that the foreshadowing performance (second time) has appeared by the special 1 continuous performance continuation chance performance and the bubble appearance performance A13 appearing by the stop display A12.

Subsequently, after the game round V11 for the special 2 hold 1 ends (time t13), the game round U12 for the special 1 hold 2 is started by the special 1 hold continuous effect processing. In the game round U12, first, the variable display E11 is executed. Subsequently, a normal ready-to-win effect E12 is executed. Subsequently, a stop display E13 corresponding to the fact that the result of the winning lottery is a loss is executed. With the end of the stop display E13, the game round U12 for the special 1 hold 2 ends. The content of the game round U12 for Special 1 Reservation 2 is the same as when the game ball does not enter the second start port 34 in the middle of the game round U11 for Special 1 Reservation 1. .

In summary, in case 1 where the result of the winning lottery in special 1 reservation 2 is out and normal reach occurs, first, the game round U11 for special 1 reservation 1 is executed, and in the game round U11, chance eyes and bubbles The foreshadowing effect (first time) in which BL appears is executed. When the game ball enters the second start port 34 in the middle of the game round U1 for the special 1 hold 1, the game round V11 for the special 2 hold 1 obtained by entering the ball follows the game round U11. , and in the game round V11, the foreshadowing effect (second time) in which the chance and the bubble BL appear, which is the special 1 continuous effect continuation chance effect, is executed. Then, following the game round V11 for the special 2 hold 1, the game round U12 for the special 1 hold 2 is executed, and in the game round U12, a normal ready-to-win effect and a stop display corresponding to the loss are performed. That is, the foreshadowing effect continues twice, and finally the normal reach is lost. It does not violate (consistent with) the relationship between the number of times of appearance and the performance to be executed.

As described above, the flow of effects up to Special 1 Suspension 2, which has become a trigger, due to the pending continuous effects does not violate the relationship between the number of appearances of the foreshadowing effects and the execution schedule effects. In the middle of the game round U1, even if the game round V11 for Special 2 Suspension 1 is added, even if the foreshadowing effect increases by one time, only in cases where the above relationship is not violated, Regarding Special 2 Suspension 1 This is because the forewarning effect is made to appear in the game round V11. Specifically, when the effect of the special 2 suspension stored in the middle of the game round of the special 1 suspension is the effect including the chance effect for the continuation of the special 1 continuous effect, the special 1 suspension that became the trigger It is determined as the second determination whether or not the series of pending continuous effects up to the effect matches the relationship between the number of appearances of the foreshadowing effect and the scheduled effect shown in FIG. 509, and the second determination is affirmative. This is because the forewarning effect is made to appear in the game round V11 for the special 2 suspension 1 only when the game is performed. The second judgment is based on the hold information possessed by the special 1 hold, specifically, which of the special 1 hold 1 to special 1 hold 4 was the trigger, and the execution schedule performance for the special 1 hold that became the trigger can be determined by For example, as in this case 1, the execution schedule effect for the special 1 suspension (special 1 suspension 4) that has become the trigger is normal reach, and is executed before the special 1 suspension (special 1 suspension 4) that has become the trigger If the forewarning effect is executed once in the game round, the effect of the game cycle based on the special 2 reserve stored in the middle of the game cycle of the special 1 reserve is changed to the special 1 continuous effect continuation chance effect. Even if the effect is included, the relationship between the number of appearances of the foreshadowing effect and the execution schedule effect shown in FIG. On the other hand, the performance scheduled to be executed for the triggering special 1 suspension (special 1 suspension 4) is normal reach, and the premonitory presentation performance is performed in the game cycle executed before the special 1 suspension (special 1 suspension 4) serving as the trigger. is executed twice, and if the effect for the special 2 suspension stored in the middle of the game round of the special 1 suspension is the effect including the special 1 continuous effect continuation chance effect, the trigger special 1 In suspension, the foreshadowing effect will be executed three times before the normal ready-to-win effect is performed. The determination result of the determination is negative.

As described above, in the case of case 1, the foreshadowing effect continues twice, and finally the normal reach is lost, so the number of appearances and the execution of the foreshadowing effect shown in FIG. The relationship with the scheduled performance is not violated, and the player is not given any sense of incongruity. Therefore, with the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, it is possible to improve interest.

In case 1 above, when winning the electric win short opening, one game ball enters the second start port 34, but two game balls enter the second start port 34. Even when a ball is played, the special 1 continuous effect continuation chance effect may be displayed in each game round of the special 2 reserve 1 and the special 2 reserve 2.例文帳に追加Also in this case, it is possible to display the special 1 continuous effect continuation chance effect by making an affirmative determination in the second determination based on the reservation information of the special 1 reserve.

<<11-4-4>> Special 1 continuous effect continuation pattern same color effect:
The above (ii) special 1 continuous effect continuation symbol same color effect will be described below. Case 2 will be described here.

FIG. 515 is an explanatory diagram conceptually showing how special 1 suspension is performed in case 2. FIG. As illustrated, in case 2, four special 1 reserves from special 1 reserve 1 to special 1 reserve 4 are stored at normal times. The main control device 60 executes the first determination process each time a game ball enters the first start port 33, and determines the success or failure of the winning lottery based on the reservation information of the special 1 reservation stored by the current ball entry. , determination of the type of jackpot, determination of presence/absence of occurrence of ready-to-win, determination of type of variation pattern, etc. are performed before the reservation information is subject to the winning lottery by the main controller 60.例文帳に追加After that, main controller 60 sets the determination result of the previous determination process as a hold command, and transmits the hold command to sound emission control device 90 . The sound emission control device 90 receives the hold command, and from the hold command, specifies the result of the winning lottery, the type of the big win, the presence or absence of the occurrence of the reach, and the contents of the reach effect (type of the reach). The content of reach production can be specified from the type of variation pattern. In the illustrated example, it is assumed that in Special 1 Reservation 4, the result of the winning lottery is out and it is determined that super reach occurs. The sound emission control device 90 executes the special 1 hold continuous effect processing triggered by the reception of the hold command for the special 1 hold 4 judged to generate this super reach from the main control device 60 .

FIG. 516 is a time chart for explaining an effect for special 1 suspension executed by special 1 suspension continuous effect processing and an effect for special 2 suspension executed by special 2 suspension performance processing in case 2. FIG. As shown in the figure, first, the game round U21 for the special 1 reservation 1 is executed by the special 1 reservation continuous effect process. The game round U21 for the special 1 reserve 1 is the same as the game round U1 for the special 1 reserve 1 explained with reference to FIG. In the game round U21 for Special 1 Reservation 1, first, the variable display A11 is executed. The variable display A11 is shown in FIG. 506(a). Subsequently, a stop display A12 for making a chance eye appear is executed. The stop display A12 is shown in FIG. 506(b). Subsequently, a bubble appearance effect A13 is executed. The bubble appearance effect A13 is shown in FIG. 506(c). When the bubble appearance effect A13 ends, the game round U21 for the special 1 reservation 1 ends. The stop display A12 and the appearance effect A13 of bubbles constitute a foreshadowing effect (first time).

By the special 1 reservation continuous effect processing, the game round U22 for the special 1 reservation 2 is executed following the game round U21 for the special 1 reservation 1. - 特許庁The game round U22 for the special 1 reserve 2 is the same as the game round U2 for the special 1 reserve 2 described with reference to FIG. In the game round U22 for Special 1 Hold 2, first, the variable display B11 is executed. The variable display B11 is shown in FIG. 507(a). Subsequently, a stop display B12 for making a chance eye appear is executed. The stop display B12 is shown in FIG. 507(b). Subsequently, a bubble appearance effect B13 is executed. The bubble appearance effect B13 is shown in FIG. 507(c). When the bubble appearance effect B13 ends, the game round U22 for the special 1 reservation 2 ends. The stop display B12 and the appearance effect B13 of the bubbles constitute the foreshadowing effect (second time). In the middle of the game round U22 for this special 1 reservation 2 (time t21), the electric role short opening is won in the electric role item opening lottery performed by the game ball passing through the through gates 35a and 35b, and the electric role is elected. It is assumed that the object 34a is opened for 0.6 seconds and one game ball enters the second starting port 34. In this case, after the game round U22 for the special 1 reserve 2 ends (time t22), the game round V21 for the special 2 reserve 1 stored based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 34 is performed. Execution is started. The execution of the game round V21 for the special 2 suspension 1 is executed by the special 2 suspension effect processing by the sound emission control device 90. FIG.

According to the special 2 reservation effect processing, when starting the game round V21 for the special 2 reservation 1, which is the lottery result of the electric accessory open lottery that triggered the execution of the special 2 reservation change. A first determination is made, and when it is determined by the first determination that the lottery result of the electric accessory open lottery is short opening of the electric role, the second determination described above is performed. Then, when the determination result of the second determination is negative, the above (ii) special 1 continuous effect continuation symbol same color effect is displayed in the game round V21 for the special 2 suspension 1. - 特許庁That is, the lottery result of the electric role item open lottery that triggered the execution of the special 2 hold variation is the electric role short open, and the special 2 hold stored during the game round of the special 1 hold If the special 1 continuous production continuous production including the chance eye production, the series of suspension continuous production up to the production of special 1 suspension (in case 2, special 1 suspension 4 corresponds to case 2) 509, when the relationship between the number of appearances of the foreshadowing effect and the execution schedule effect is violated, the special 1 continuous effect continuation pattern same color effect is displayed in the game cycle V21 for the special 2 suspension 1.例文帳に追加

Specifically, in the game round V21 for the special 2 reserve 1 executed subsequent to the game round U22 for the special 1 reserve 2, the variation display β11 for the special 2 reserve 1 is executed first. Subsequently, stop display β12 with the same color as the symbol is executed. The same color of the pattern means that the three patterns formed in the state of being stopped on the effective line L1 on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 have different numbers, but the colors of the three patterns are the same color. . Specifically, since the symbols representing the numbers 1, 2 and 3 are green, the combination of the symbols representing the numbers 1, 2 and 3 will be the same color as the symbols. Further, since the symbols representing the numbers 4, 5 and 6 are red, the combination of the symbols representing the numbers 4, 5 and 6 can also be of the same color. Since the patterns showing the numbers 7, 8, and 9 are gold, the combination of the patterns showing the numbers 7, 8, and 9 can also be the same color. The color of the same color as the pattern and the performance to be executed are associated in advance.

FIG. 517 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the color of the same color as the pattern and the execution schedule effect. As shown in the figure, a ready-to-reach effect equal to or higher than normal reach is set as the scheduled effect for green, a reach effect equal to or higher than super reach is set to red as the scheduled effect, and a special effect is set to be performed for gold. Jackpot winning confirmation from reach is set. An image having the same color as the symbol having such a configuration corresponds to the special 1 continuous effect continuation pattern same color effect.

As shown in FIG. 516, according to the special 2 suspension effect processing, when the stop display β12 is executed, the game round for special 1 suspension executed immediately before (in case 2, the game round for special 1 suspension 2 U21) specifies the number of appearances of the foreshadowing effect executed in U21), and the same color of the pattern that is the same scheduled execution effect as the scheduled execution effect associated with the specified number of appearances is selected as the foreshadowing effect. is identified by referring to a table (Fig. 509) showing the relationship between the number of appearances of and the execution schedule effect and a table (Fig. 517) showing the relationship between the color of the same color of the symbol and the execution schedule effect, and the identified symbol same color The special 1 continuous effect continuation pattern same color effect is displayed with the color of . Specifically, since the premonitory effect is the second time in the game round of the special 1 suspension executed immediately before (in the case of case 2, the game round U21 of the special 1 suspension 2), the table shown in FIG. 517, it is specified that the effect scheduled to be executed by the premonitory effect in the game round for the special 1 suspension executed immediately before is normal reach, and from the table shown in FIG. is specified to be green, corresponding to normal reach. With this green color, the special 1 continuous effect continuation pattern same color effect is displayed. As a result, the degree of expectation when the special 1 continuous effect continuation pattern same color effect is displayed is the same as the degree of expectation when the forewarning effect appears in the game round U22 for the special 1 suspension 2 executed immediately before. becomes.

FIG. 518 is an explanatory diagram showing a series of effects executed in the game round V21 for Special 2 Reservation 1. FIG. The pending display icon H11 located in the pending digestion area Dm corresponds to the special 2 pending 1. FIG. 518(a) shows an effect displayed on the display surface 41a during the variable display β11, and FIG. 518(b) shows an effect displayed on the display surface 41a during the stop display β12. As shown in FIG. 518(b), during the stop display β12, the special 1 continuous effect continuation symbol same color effect is executed in which the symbol is the same color as green. Specifically, the three symbols formed in a stopped state on the activated line L1 are a combination of a symbol representing the number 1, a symbol representing the number 2, and a symbol representing the number 3, for example, "312". Become.

Returning to FIG. 516, when the stop display β12 ends, the game round V21 for the special 2 hold 1 ends.

After the game round V21 for the special 2 reservation 1 ends (time t23), the game round U23 for the special 1 reservation 3 is executed by special 1 reservation continuous effect processing. The game round U23 for the special 1 reserve 3 is the same as the game round U3 for the special 1 reserve 3 explained with reference to FIG. In the game round U23 for Special 1 Reservation 3, first, the variable display C11 is executed. The variable display C11 is shown in FIG. 508(a). Subsequently, a stop display C12 that causes a chance eye to appear is executed. The stop display C12 is shown in FIG. 508(b). Subsequently, a bubble appearance effect C13 is executed. The bubble appearance effect C13 is shown in FIG. 508(c). The game round U23 for the special 1 reservation 3 ends with the end of the bubble appearance effect C13. The stop display C12 and the appearance effect C13 of bubbles constitute a foreshadowing effect (third time).

After the game round U23 for the special 1 reservation 3 ends (time t24), the game round U24 for the special 1 reservation 4 is executed by special 1 reservation continuous effect processing. The game round U24 for the special 1 reserve 4 is the same as the game round U4 for the special 1 reserve 4 explained with reference to FIG. In the game round U24 for Special 1 Reservation 4, first, the variable display F11 is executed. Subsequently, a super ready-to-win effect F12 is executed. Subsequently, a stop display F13 corresponding to the fact that the result of the winning lottery is a loss is executed. With the end of the stop display F13, the game round U24 for the special 1 reservation 4 ends. The contents of the game round U24 for Special 1 Reservation 4 are the same as when the game ball does not enter the second start port 34 in the middle of the game round U22 for Special 1 Reservation 2. .

In summary, in case 2 where the result of the winning lottery in Special 1 reservation 4 is lost and super reach occurs, first, the game round U21 for Special 1 reservation 1 is executed, and in the game round U21, it is a chance eye. A foreshadowing effect (first time) in which bubbles BL appear is executed. Next, a game round U22 for Special 1 Reservation 2 is executed, and in the game round U22, a foreshadowing performance (second time) in which a chance eye and bubbles BL appear is executed. When the game ball enters the second start port 34 in the middle of the game round U22 for the special 1 hold 2, the game round V21 for the special 2 hold 1 obtained by the ball entering follows the game round U21. In the game round V21, the stop display β12, which is the special 1 continuous effect continuation symbol same color effect, is executed. The color of the symbol same color in the special 1 continuous effect continuation symbol same color effect is green, and the scheduled execution effect associated with this green (see FIG. 517) It is configured such that the scheduled execution effect (see FIG. 509) associated with the number of appearances of the executed predictive effect including the chance eye coincides. After the game round V21 for the special 2 hold 1 is completed, the game round U23 for the special 1 hold 3 is executed, and in the game round U23, the foreshadowing effect (third time) of the appearance of the chance and the bubble BL is executed. be. Next, the game round U24 for the special 1 reservation 4 is executed, and in the game round U24, a super ready-to-win effect and a stop display corresponding to the loss are performed.

As described above, in the case of case 2, the foreshadowing effect including the chance eye is performed twice, followed by the green pattern same color effect, and then the foreshadowing effect including the chance eye. After one time (three times in total), the effect of finally losing in super reach is executed. When the player watches a series of performances, the player recognizes that the performance to be executed is equal to or higher than the normal reach due to the fact that the foreshadowing performance including the chance eye appears twice, and the color of the same color of the pattern becomes green. , it is confirmed again that the scheduled execution effect is normal reach or higher, and subsequently, by the third time of the foreshadowing effect including the chance eye, it is recognized that the scheduled execution effect is super reach or higher. I know that I was out of the super reach. As a result, the player does not feel any sense of discomfort, and the reliability of the advance notice effect is improved. Next, Comparative Example 1 will be described, and the advantages of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment over Comparative Example 1 will be described.

519 is a time chart showing Comparative Example 1. FIG. Comparative Example 1 differs from Case 2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment (see FIG. 516) in the following points. In the case 2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the special 2 reservation 1 executed based on the game ball entering the second start port 34 during the execution of the game round U22 for the special 1 reservation 2 In the game round V21, the special 1 continuous effect continuation symbol same color effect is executed. In the game round V21X for special 2 reservation 1 executed based on the fact that the game ball enters the game, the special 1 continuous performance continuation chance performance is executed.

That is, in the game round V21X for the special 2 hold 1 that is executed following the game round U22 for the special 1 hold 2, the variation display γ11 for the special 2 hold 1 is executed first. Subsequently, a stop display B12 for making a chance eye appear is executed. The stop display B12 is the same as the stop display B12 executed in the game round U22, and is given the same reference numerals. The stop display B12 corresponds to special 1 continuous effect continuation chance effect. Subsequently, a bubble appearance effect B13 is executed. The appearance effect B13 of bubbles is the same as the effect executed in the game round U22, and the same symbols are attached. From the player's point of view, it is recognized that the foreshadowing effect (third time) has appeared by the special 1 continuous effect continuation chance effect produced by the stop display B12 and the bubble appearance effect B13. After that, in the game round U23 for the special 1 reserve 3 executed after the game round V21X for the special 2 reserve 1 is completed, it is recognized that the foreshadowing effect (fourth time) has appeared. The game round U24 for the special 1 hold 4 executed after the game round V21X for the special 2 hold 1 is completed is the same as the game round U24 in case 2 (see FIG. 516). According to this comparative example 1, in starting the execution of the game round V21X for the special 2 reservation 1, the lottery result of the electric accessary item open lottery that triggered the execution of the variation of the special 2 reservation is the number It is only necessary to execute 1 judgment (no need for 2nd judgment), and when the judgment result of the 1st judgment is that the electric role is short open, in the game round V21X for the special 2 hold 1, the special 1 continuous effect is continued uniformly. It suffices to execute the first-chance performance, and the control becomes easy.

However, in Comparative Example 1, after the foreshadowing effect including the chance eye appears four times in succession, the super ready-to-win effect is executed. This series of effects violates the relationship between the number of appearances of the foreshadowing effects and the execution schedule effects shown in FIG. More specifically, a skilled player who has recognized that the foreshadowing effect including the chance eye has appeared four times in a row will say, "This pachinko machine 10 has appeared four times in a row foreshadowing effect including the chance eye. In this case, the jackpot will surely be won after the special reach effect is executed, so in this game round U24, the jackpot will be surely won after the special reach effect is executed.” The result of the game round U24 is eagerly awaited. However, in this comparative example 1, although the foreshadowing effect including the chance eye appeared four times in succession, the super ready-to-win effect was executed instead of the special ready-to-win effect in the game round U24, and the lottery result was lost. turn into. As a result, the player's expectations are betrayed, and he/she feels that "the performance of this pachinko machine 10 cannot be trusted." As a result, according to Comparative Example 1, the reliability of the advance notice effect is lowered.

On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as described above, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the series of effects, so the reliability of the advance notice effects can be increased.

Incidentally, in case 2, when winning the electric win short opening, one game ball enters the second start port 34, but two game balls enter the second start port 34. In this case, the special 1 continuous effect continuation symbol same color effect may be displayed in each game round of the special 2 reserve 1 and the special 2 reserve 2.例文帳に追加The special 1 continuous effect continuation symbol same color effect in the game round of the special 2 reserve 2 is the same as the special 1 continuous effect continuation symbol same color effect in the game round of the special 2 reserve 1. Also in this case, when the determination result of the second determination is negative, it is possible to display the special 1 continuous effect continuation symbol same color effect. In addition, in this modification, it is possible to display the special 1 continuous effect continuation symbol same color effect in one of the game rounds of the special 2 reserve 1 and the special 2 reserve 2.

Further, according to the case 2 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the game round V21 for the special 2 hold 1, the special 1 continuous effect continuation symbol same color effect is displayed. In the game round V21 for the special 2 hold 1, the special 1 continuous production continuation chance effect is displayed, and executed in the game round U23 for the special 1 hold executed after the game round V21 for the special 2 hold 1 is completed. It is also possible to switch the planned special 1 continuous effect continuation chance effect to the special 1 continuous effect continuation pattern same color effect and display it. In this case, the color of the special 1 continuous effect continuation symbol same color effect is a color associated with the number of appearances of the chance effect executed before the start of the game round U23 for the special 1 suspension. Specifically, since the number of appearances of the chance eye effect is three, the same color as the pattern is set to red. According to this modification, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric role short opening is won in the electric role item opening lottery in the normal time and the game round about the special 2 hold is executed, In the game rounds of the special 1 suspension that are continuously executed after the game rounds of the special 2 suspension are finished, the expectation of winning the jackpot such as the ready-to-win performance by the continuous suspension performance can be confirmed again, and a series of Since the player does not feel any sense of incongruity with respect to the effect of (1), the reliability of the advance notice effect can be increased.

As a further modification of the above modification, the special 1 continuous effect continuation symbol same color effect is displayed in the game round V21 for the special 2 hold 1, and the special 1 is executed after the game round V21 for the special 2 hold 1 is completed. It is also possible to display the special 1 continuous effect continuation symbol same color effect in the game round U23 regarding suspension. In this case, the color of the special 1 continuous effect continuation symbol same color effect is the foreshadowing effect including the chance eyes that appeared in the game round for the special 1 hold executed before the start of the game round V21 for the special 2 hold 1 Let the color correspond to the number of occurrences of . Since the special 1 continuous performance continuation pattern same color performance does not change the execution schedule performance depending on the number of times of appearance, it is allowed to display the special 1 continuous performance continuation pattern same color performance a plurality of times in succession.

Both the above (i) special 1 continuous effect continuation chance eye effect and the above (ii) special 1 continuous effect continuation pattern same color effect can be said to be effects for continuing the special 1 pending continuous effect. One of the conditions for executing the special 1 continuous effect continuation chance eye effect or the special 1 continuous effect continuation symbol same color effect Since the period during which the second chance effect or special 1 continuous effect is executed is short (the number of reserved special 2 is small), the special 1 continuous effect continuation chance effect and special 1 continuous effect are continued It can be said that the same color production for the pattern is a production for continuing the special 1 reservation continuous production.

<<11-4-5>> special 2 production:
The above (iii) Special 2-dedicated effect will be described below. Case 3 will be described here.

FIG. 520 is an explanatory diagram conceptually showing how special 1 suspension is performed in case 3. FIG. As shown in the figure, in case 3, four special 1 reserves from special 1 reserve 1 to special 1 reserve 4 are stored at normal times. The main control device 60 executes the first determination process each time a game ball enters the first start port 33, and determines the success or failure of the winning lottery based on the reservation information of the special 1 reservation stored by the current ball entry. , determination of the type of jackpot, determination of presence/absence of occurrence of ready-to-win, determination of type of variation pattern, etc. are performed before the reservation information is subject to the winning lottery by the main controller 60.例文帳に追加After that, main controller 60 sets the determination result of the previous determination process as a hold command, and transmits the hold command to sound emission control device 90 . The sound emission control device 90 receives the hold command, and from the hold command, specifies the result of winning lottery, the type of big win, the presence or absence of reach generation, and the content of reach effect (type of reach). The content of reach production can be specified from the type of variation pattern. In the illustrated example, in Special 1 Reservation 4, the result of the winning lottery is out and it is determined that super reach occurs. The sound emission control device 90 executes the special 1 hold continuous effect processing by receiving from the main control device 60 the hold command for the special 1 hold 4 judged to generate this super reach as a trigger.

FIG. 521 is a time chart for explaining an effect for special 1 suspension executed by special 1 suspension continuous effect processing and an effect for special 2 suspension executed by special 2 suspension performance processing in case 3. FIG. As shown in the figure, first, the game round U31 for the special 1 reservation 1 is executed by the special 1 reservation continuous effect process. The game round U31 for the special 1 reserve 1 is the same as the game round U1 for the special 1 reserve 1 explained with reference to FIG. In the game round U31 for Special 1 Hold 1, first, the variable display A11 is executed. The variable display A11 is shown in FIG. 506(a). Subsequently, a stop display A12 for making a chance eye appear is executed. The stop display A12 is shown in FIG. 506(b). Subsequently, a bubble appearance effect A13 is executed. The bubble appearance effect A13 is shown in FIG. 506(c). When the bubble appearance effect A13 ends, the game round U31 for the special 1 reservation 1 ends. The stop display A12 and the appearance effect A13 of bubbles constitute a foreshadowing effect (first time).

By the special 1 reservation continuous effect processing, the game round U32 for the special 1 reservation 2 is executed following the game round U31 for the special 1 reservation 1. - 特許庁The game round U32 for the special 1 reserve 2 is the same as the game round U2 for the special 1 reserve 2 described with reference to FIG. In the game round U32 for Special 1 Suspension 2, first, the variable display B11 is executed. The variable display B11 is shown in FIG. 507(a). Subsequently, a stop display B12 for making a chance eye appear is executed. The stop display B12 is shown in FIG. 507(b). Subsequently, a bubble appearance effect B13 is executed. The bubble appearance effect B13 is shown in FIG. 507(c). When the bubble appearance effect B13 ends, the game round U32 for the special 1 reservation 3 ends. The stop display B12 and the appearance effect B13 of the bubbles constitute the foreshadowing effect (second time).

In the middle of the game round U32 for this special 1 reservation 2 (time t31), in the electric role opening lottery performed by the game ball passing through the through gates 35a and 35b, when the electric director opening lottery is won, The electric accessory 34a is opened for a long time (5 seconds). It is assumed that five or more game balls enter the second starting port 34 while the opening is open for a long time. As described above, since the maximum number (upper limit number) of Special 2 reserves is 4, a maximum of 5 Special 2 reserves are stored during the opening of the electric accessory 34a for 5 seconds. The reason why it is not 4 is that there is a possibility that the 5th special 2 reserve is stored while the variation of the game ball that entered first is started. As a result, as the game rounds based on the special 2 reserve, the number of game rounds equal to or greater than the predetermined upper limit number of special 2 reserves (here, it is assumed to be 5, but it may be 6, 7, etc.). become executable. According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player is instructed to enter as many game balls as possible into the second start opening 34 while the electric accessary 34a is open for a long time (5 seconds). We are doing a special rendition to encourage In this embodiment, this effect is called a charge effect.

FIG. 522 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the charging effect. Here, it is assumed that the timing at which the electric role length opening is won in the electric accessory opening lottery is when the variation display B11 in the game round U32 is executed. As shown in the figure, a charge effect is displayed overlapping this variable display B11. In the present embodiment, as a charging effect, a female character WM appears, and the female character WM shouts, "Charging is in progress." The charge effect is executed until the electric accessory 34a is closed.

This charging effect is only an example, and instead of the female character WM, it is possible to have a configuration in which other characters such as male characters and animal characters appear. A configuration in which a scene or the like is displayed may be used.

Return to FIG. It is assumed that five game balls enter the second starting port 34 while the electric accessory 34a is open for a long time. Special 2 reservations corresponding to five game balls are hereinafter referred to as special 2 reservations 1, special 2 reservations 2, special 2 reservations 3, special 2 reservations 4, and special 2 reservations 4+. After the game round U32 for the special 1 reserve 2 ends (time t32), the game rounds V31 to V35 for the special 2 reserve 1 to special 2 reserve 4+ are executed in order. In the game round V31 for Special 2 Hold 1, the variable display δ11 is performed, and then the stop display δ12 is performed. Similarly, in the other game rounds V32 to V35 (only the game round V35 in the figure), the variable display δ11 is performed and then the stop display δ12 is performed. The execution of the game round V31 to the game round V35 is executed by the special 2 suspension effect processing by the sound emission control device 90. FIG.

According to the special 2 reservation effect processing, when starting the game round V31 for the special 2 reservation 1, which is the lottery result of the electric accessory open lottery that triggered the execution of the special 2 reservation change. Judgment Perform the above-described first judgment, and if it is determined that the lottery result of the electric role open lottery is the electric role chief open by the first judgment, each game about Special 2 Hold 1 to Special 2 Hold 4+ In the game round V31 to the game round V35, the above (iii) Special 2 exclusive effect is executed.

FIG. 523 is an explanatory diagram showing a series of effects executed in the game round V31 for Special 2 Hold 1. FIG. In the game round V31 for the special 2 hold 1, as shown in FIG. 523(a), first, the variation display δ11 for the special 2 hold 1 is executed. Specifically, a display icon H21 corresponding to Special 2 Reservation 1 is arranged inside the reservation digestion area Dm, and the result of the winning lottery based on the reservation (reservation information) corresponding to this display icon H21 is notified. The variation for is displayed in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a. Between the main display area MA and the second start opening reservation area Ds2, there is provided a display area SA for special 2 special effects. An image of the special 2 special effect is displayed in the special 2 special effect display area SA. The special effect display area SA is positioned so as not to hinder the visual recognition of the symbols displayed in the main display area MA.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, all or part of the image of the foreshadowing effect executed in the game round about the special 1 suspension executed immediately before (in the case of case 3, the game round U32 about the special 1 suspension 2) part is captured (stored), and a reduced image of the obtained captured image (still image) is displayed in the display area SA for special 2 special effects as special 2 special effects. Specifically, a reduced image of the capture image in which a chance eye (a sequence of [3, 4, 1]) has occurred and bubbles have appeared is displayed in the special 2-dedicated effect display area SA.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the shell image SH is displayed in the variable display δ11 for the special 2 reserve 1. FIG. In the game rounds V31 to V35 for the special 2 hold, even if the electric role product 34a is elected in the electric role opening lottery for the long time (5 seconds) opening of the electric role object 34a, and the support mode is the low frequency support mode Regardless, it is executed as a result of being able to easily accumulate 4 or 5 special 2 reservations. This is highly unexpected and pleasing to the player. For this reason, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in each of the game rounds V31 to V35, when the electric role chief opening lottery is executed in the state where the support mode is the low frequency support mode, the electric role chief opening lottery is exclusively used. is performed, and the special performance is configured to improve the interest of the player. The display of the shell image SH corresponds to this special effect. In the variable display δ11 for Special 2 Hold 1, the shell image SH is in a state where two shells are closed. The image SH of the shellfish is provided between the main display area MA and the first start opening holding area Ds1.

After the change display δ11, the stop display δ12 for Special 2 hold 1 is executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 523(b), a combination of symbols corresponding to the result of the winning lottery for Special 2 Reservation 1 (in the illustrated example, 137, which is an outlier) is the main display of the display surface 41a. Displayed in area MA. Also during this stop display δ12, a display area SA dedicated to special effects 2 is provided between the main display area MA and the second start opening reservation area Ds2, and this display area SA dedicated to effects special 2 is provided. , the image of special effect 2, which is the same as that of the variable display .delta.11, is displayed.

In the stop display δ12 for the special 2 reservation 1, the image SH of the shellfish is displayed following the case of the variable display δ11. In the stop display δ12, the shell image SH is in a state in which the two shells are slightly opened. Each time the stop display is executed in the game rounds V31 to V35 for the special 2 hold, the two shells are opened wide little by little.

In the other game rounds V32 to V35 (only game round V35 is shown), similarly, the fluctuation display δ11 and the stop display δ12 are performed. An effect display area SA is provided, and the same special effect image as that shown in FIG. 523 is displayed in the special effect display area SA, and a shellfish image SH is displayed. When a big win is won in a winning lottery based on the special 2 reservation, when the game cycle corresponding to the winning of the big win is stopped, the image SH of the shellfish is displayed with the two shells fully open and the two shells. For example, a pearl emerges from between. In this way, it is produced that a jackpot has been won.

Note that the shell image SH displayed in the variable display δ11 and the stationary display δ12 for Special 2 Hold 1 is merely an example, and other images such as people, other creatures, specific backgrounds, stages, scenes, etc. You can change it.

After the game round for all special 2 reservations (special 2 reservation 1 to special 2 reservation 4+ in case 3) is completed (time t33), the remaining special 1 reservations (special 1 reservation 3 and special 1 reservation 3 in case 3) The game round for Special 1 Suspension 4) is resumed. The game round U33 for the special 1 reserve 3 is the same as the game round U3 for the special 1 reserve 3 explained with reference to FIG. In the game round U33 for the special 1 hold 3, first, the variable display C11 is executed. The variable display C11 is shown in FIG. 508(a). Subsequently, a stop display C12 that causes a chance eye to appear is executed. The stop display C12 is shown in FIG. 508(b). Subsequently, a bubble appearance effect C13 is executed. The bubble appearance effect C13 is shown in FIG. 508(c). When the bubble appearance effect C13 ends, the game round U33 for the special 1 reservation 3 ends. The stop display C12 and the appearance effect C13 of the bubbles constitute a foreshadowing effect (third time) including a chance eye.

In addition, as a modification, the captured image is captured as it is between the last game round V35 for the special 2 hold and the game round of the special 1 hold that is continuously executed after the end of the game round V35. A configuration may be adopted in which a screen displayed in a size (full screen size) is inserted. In this case, the reduced captured image in the display area SA for special effects displayed in the last game round V35 is zoomed in and effected so as to move to the above-described captured image of the full screen size. It is possible to make a visually smooth transition from the game round of special 2 suspension to the game round of special 1 suspension performing continuous suspension performance.

In the game round U34 for the special 1 reserve 4 that is executed following the game round U33 for the special 1 reserve 3, first, the variable display G11 is executed. Subsequently, a super ready-to-win effect G12 is executed. Subsequently, a stop display G13 corresponding to the fact that the result of the winning lottery is a loss is executed. With the end of the stop display G13, the game round U34 for Special 1 Reservation 4 ends. Regarding the contents of the game round U33 for Special 1 Reserve 3 and the contents of the game round U34 for Special 1 Reserve 4, a game ball enters the second start port 34 during the game round U32 for Special 1 Reserve 2. The content is the same as if it had not been done. It should be noted that the contents do not necessarily have to be the same. may be changed.

In the case of case 3, let us consider a configuration in which the special effect dedicated to special 2 is not executed in each of the game rounds V31 to V35 regarding the special 2 suspension. Assuming this configuration as Comparative Example 2, Comparative Example 2 has the following problems.

The maximum number of game rounds to be executed based on the special 2 hold is five, and the time spent for five game rounds is usually a long time (for example, several minutes). Especially, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a dedicated effect using the image SH of the shellfish is performed, and the game time is longer. For this reason, in Comparative Example 2, when the holding continuous effect of special 1 suspension is interrupted due to the execution of the game round of special 2 suspension, the advance notice is given in the game round of special 1 suspension that has been executed so far Some players may have completely forgotten that the presentation had appeared.

On the other hand, according to the case 3 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in each of the game rounds V31 to V35 regarding the special 2 hold, the special 1 hold executed immediately before switching to the special 2 hold game round Since the capture image of all or part of the foreshadowing performance appearing in the game cycle continues to be displayed as special 2 special performance, the player forgets that the foreshadowing performance has appeared. can be suppressed, and it is possible to remind that the special 1 suspension continuous production is continuing.

Incidentally, according to the case 3 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the capture image is displayed in all of the game rounds V31 to V35 for the special 2 hold. A configuration may be adopted in which the captured image is displayed only in the final game round (game round V35 in case 3) of the game rounds V31 to V35 regarding suspension. Furthermore, the game rounds for the special 1 suspension are continuously executed after the game rounds V31 to V35 for the special 2 suspension without displaying the captured image in each of the game rounds V31 to V35 for the special 2 suspension. The configuration may be such that the above-mentioned capture image is displayed in (game round U33 in case 3). According to these modifications, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the special 2 is elected in the electric role opening lottery at the normal time when the special 1 reservation holding continuous effect is executed. When the game rounds for the special 2 reserve are executed more than the upper limit number of reservations, the game rounds for the special 1 reserve that are continuously executed after the game rounds for the special 2 reserve are completed, and the special 1 It can be reminded that the pending continuous rendition of the pending is continuing.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, all or all of the foreshadowing effects are provided as a special 2-only effect that reminds the user that the reservation continuous effect was performed in the special 1 reserve executed immediately before switching to the game round of the special 2 reserve. Although the reduced image of the partially captured captured image is displayed, instead of this, the captured image may be displayed in its original size without being reduced. Alternatively, an outline image (for example, an image showing the outline of bubbles) of the main portion of the captured image may be displayed in the same size or reduced. Alternatively, the density of the captured image may be lowered, and the captured image may be displayed in the same size or in a reduced size. Furthermore, instead of the captured image, information that suggests the situation in the game round of the special 1 hold executed immediately before switching to the game round of the special 2 hold (for example, information expressed in characters, information expressed in icons ) may be displayed. According to these modifications, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to confirm that the holding continuous effect was performed in the game round based on the special 1 hold executed immediately before switching to the game round of the special 2 hold. can remind people.

Further, as the above special effect 2, an image obtained by changing at least a part of a captured image obtained by capturing all or part of the foreshadowing effect may be displayed as it is or reduced in size. For example, when the image is reduced and displayed, the image becomes less noticeable, so the captured image may be changed to increase the amount of bubbles.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the shell image SH is provided between the main display area MA and the first start opening holding area Ds1. On the other hand, as a modification, the shell image SH may be made larger than that shown in FIG. 523 so as to overlap with the pattern displayed in the main display area MA. In addition, the image of the enlarged shellfish may be configured to overlap the special effect display area SA in which the captured image is displayed.

<<11-5>> Various processes executed in the main controller:
Next, an example of specific control for executing the above-described processing in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described. The processing performed in the main controller 60 will be described first, and then the processing performed in the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

In order to advance the game of each game cycle, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing. These processes are described below. In addition to timer interrupt processing and normal processing, the MPU 62 executes NMI interrupt processing that is activated by the input of a power failure signal, but the description of these processing will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 524 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. As described above, the timer interrupt process is started periodically (for example, every 2 msec) by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 .

In step Sv0101, reading processing of various detection sensors 67a to 67e is executed. That is, it reads the states of the various detection sensors 67a to 67e connected to the main controller 60, determines the states of the sensors, and saves the detection information (entrance detection information). After that, the process proceeds to step Sv0102.

At step Sv0102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . After that, the process proceeds to step Sv0103.

In step Sv0103, the values of the hit random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, electric accessory release counter C4, and fluctuation type counter CS are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to each of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the electric accessory release counter C4, and the variation type counter CS, and each counter value reaches the maximum value. If so, they are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM64. After that, the process proceeds to step Sv0104. In addition, the fluctuation type counter CS updates its value in the normal processing (FIG. 528) described later.

In step Sv0104, a ball entry process for the starting opening accompanying the ball entering the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34 is executed. The details of the ball entry process for the start opening in step Sv0104 will be described later. After executing step Sv0104, the process proceeds to step Sv0105.

In step Sv0105, a through ball entry process associated with the ball entering the through gate 35 is executed. The details of the through ball entry process in step Sv0105 will be described later. After executing step Sv0105, the MPU 62 terminates the timer interrupt processing.

<Entering ball processing for the starting port>
Next, the ball entry process for the start opening will be described. The ball entry process for the starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (Fig. 524: Sv0104).

FIG. 525 is a flow chart showing ball entry processing for the start opening. In step Sv0201, it is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first starting port 33 whether or not the game ball has entered the first starting port 33 (starting ball). In step Sv0201, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the first starting port 33 (Sv0201: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv0202, and the prize ball for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls set command. Then, it progresses to step Sv0203.

In step Sv0203, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that the game ball has entered the first starting hole 33. FIG. Then, it progresses to step Sv0204.

In step Sv0204, the start suspension number RaN (hereinafter also referred to as the first start suspension number RaN), which is the value stored in the suspension number storage area of the first reservation area Ra, is read, and the first start suspension number RaN will be described later. Set as a target for processing. The first start suspension number RaN indicates the number of suspensions based on the ball entering the first start opening 33 . Then, it progresses to step Sv0209.

In step Sv0201, if it is determined that the game ball has not entered the first start port 33 (Sv0201: NO), the process proceeds to step Sv0205, whether or not the game ball entered the second start port 34 is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second starting port 34 .

In step Sv0205, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34 (Sv0205: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv0206, and the prize ball for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls set command. Then, it progresses to step Sv0207. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sv0205 that the game ball has not entered the second starting hole 34 (Sv0205: NO), the ball entering process for this starting hole ends.

In step Sv0207, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that the game ball has entered the second starting hole . After that, the process proceeds to step Sv0208.

In step Sv0208, the start suspension quantity RbN (hereinafter also referred to as the second start suspension quantity RbN), which is the value stored in the reservation quantity storage area of the second reservation area Rb, is read, and the second start suspension quantity RbN will be described later. Set as a target for processing. The second start suspension number RbN indicates the number of suspensions based on the ball entering the second start opening 34 . Then, it progresses to step Sv0209.

In step Sv0209, it is determined whether or not the number N (RaN or RbN) of start suspension set in step Sv0204 or Sv0208 is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment). In step Sv0209, if the start suspension number N is not less than the upper limit (Sv0209: NO), the ball-entering process for this start opening is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Sv0209, if the number N of start suspensions is less than the upper limit (Sv0209: YES), proceed to step Sv0210, add 1 to the number N of start suspensions of the corresponding reservation area, and then proceed to step Sv0211. , adds 1 to the value stored in the total pending number storage area (hereinafter referred to as the total pending number CRN). The total pending number CRN indicates the sum of the first pending start number RaN and the second pending start number RbN. After that, the process proceeds to step Sv0212.

In step Sv0212, each value of the hit random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fluctuation type counter CS updated in step Sv0103 (Fig. 524) is stored in the first of the free storage areas of the corresponding reservation area. It is stored in a storage area, that is, in a storage area corresponding to the pending number to which 1 is added in step Sv0210. Specifically, when the first start suspension number RaN is set as a processing target, each value of the winning random number counter C1, the big winning type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step Sv0103, It is stored in the first storage area of the empty storage areas of the first reservation area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start suspension number RaN to which 1 is added in step Sv0210. In addition, when the second start suspension number RbN is set as a processing target, each value of the winning random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step Sv0103 is set to the second suspension It is stored in the first storage area of the empty storage areas in area Rb, ie, the storage area corresponding to the second start suspension number RbN to which 1 is added in step Sv0210. After executing step Sv0212, the process proceeds to step Sv0213.

In step Sv0213, a first determination process is executed. The first determination process is based on the information (holding information) of each value of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. This is a process of determining whether or not there is an occurrence before the pending information becomes a target of a winning lottery by the main controller 60 . The details of the first determination process will be described later. After executing step Sv0213, the process proceeds to step Sv0214.

In step Sv0214, processing for setting a pending command is executed. Concretely, the decision result of previous decision processing which is executed on the basis of the information of each value (pending information) of hit random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2 and reach random number counter C3 is set as a hold command.

The hold command indicates that a ball has entered the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34 and the judgment result (preceding judgment information) of the preceding judgment process based on the holding information acquired based on the entering, This is a command for making the sub-side control device confirm the pending information before the main control device 60 becomes a target of the winning lottery. The hold command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 528: step Sv0503) of the normal process, which will be described later.

Further, when the sound emission control device 90 receives a hold command transmitted based on the ball entering the first starting hole 33, the display in the first starting hole holding area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 is held. A command is sent to the display control device 100 to change the number to correspond to the increase in the number. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first start opening reservation region Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of reservations. On the other hand, when receiving the hold command transmitted based on the ball entering the second starting hole 34, the sound emission control device 90 holds the display in the second starting hole holding region Ds2 of the pattern display device 41. A command is sent to the display control device 100 to change the number to correspond to the increase in the number. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second start opening reservation region Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the increase in the number of reservations.

After executing step Sv0214, the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 terminates the ball-entering process for this starting opening.

<First determination process>
Next, the preceding determination processing will be described. The first determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 525: Sv0213) of the ball entry process for the starting opening.

FIG. 526 is a flowchart showing the first determination process. As described above, the first determination process, based on the reservation information, determines whether the winning lottery is successful, determines the type of jackpot, determines whether or not reach occurs, and the like. It is a process to be executed before becoming the target of

In step Sv0301, the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the storage area by the ball entering the starting hole in the ball entering process for the starting hole (FIG. 525) is grasped. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sv0302, and the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery due to the current ball entry is executed as a game round is determined. Specifically, the judgment result of the previous judgment process executed by the ball entry before the current ball entry is read from the corresponding storage area, and whether or not there is a probability variable jackpot that occurs before the winning lottery due to the current ball entry Also, the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery due to the current ball entry is executed as a game round is determined by grasping the presence or absence of winning in the fall lottery.

In step Sv0302, when it is determined that the lottery mode is the low-probability mode at the time when the winning lottery due to the current ball entry is executed as a game round, (Sv0302: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv0303, and the success/failure table is stored. The success/failure table for the low probability mode (FIG. 499(a)) stored in the area 63a is referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step Sv0305, and as a result of referring to the success/failure table for the low-probability mode, it is determined whether or not the value information of the hit random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to a big win.

On the other hand, in step Sv0302, when it is determined that the lottery mode is not the low-probability mode at the time when the winning lottery due to the current ball entry is executed as a game round (Sv0302: NO), the process proceeds to step Sv0304, and the success/failure table is stored. Refer to the success/failure table for the high probability mode (FIG. 499(b)) stored in the area 63a. After that, the process proceeds to step Sv0305, and as a result of referring to the success/failure table for the high-probability mode, it is determined whether or not the value of the hit random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to a big win.

In step Sv0305, if it is determined that the value of the winning random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to a big win (Sv0305: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv0306, and is stored in the storage area by the ball entering the start opening this time. The value of the jackpot type counter C2 is grasped. After that, the process proceeds to step Sv0307, and the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 63b is referred to. Specifically, when the jackpot type counter C2 to be sorted this time is obtained based on the ball entering the first start port 33, the first start port sort table is referred to. , the distribution table for the second starting opening is referred to when the information is obtained based on the ball entering the second starting opening 34 . After executing step Sv0307, the process proceeds to step Sv0308.

In step Sv0308, as a result of referring to the distribution table, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot type counter C2 grasped this time corresponds to the variable probability jackpot. In step Sv0308, when it is determined that it corresponds to the probability variable jackpot (Sv0308: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv0309, and the probability variable jackpot information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h. After that, the preceding determination process is terminated. On the other hand, in step Sv0308, when it is determined that it does not correspond to the variable probability jackpot (Sv0308: NO), the process proceeds to step Sv0310, and normal jackpot information is stored in the first determination processing result storage area 64h. After that, the process proceeds to step Sv0315.

In step Sv0305, if it is determined that the value of the hit random number counter C1 grasped this time does not correspond to a big hit (Sv0305: NO), proceed to step Sv0311, The value of the stored reach random number counter C3 is grasped. Then, it progresses to step Sv0312 and refers to the table for reach determination memorize|stored in the table storage area 63c for reach determination. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sv0313, and as a result of referring to the reach determination table, it is determined whether or not the value of the reach random number counter C3 grasped this time corresponds to the occurrence of reach.

In step Sv0313, when it is determined that reach occurrence is supported (Sv0313: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv0314, and reach occurrence information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h. After that, the process proceeds to step Sv0315. On the other hand, in step Sv0313, when it determines with not corresponding to reach occurrence (Sv0313:NO), it progresses to step Sv0315.

In step Sv0315, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the storage area due to the ball entering the starting hole in the ball entering process for the starting hole (FIG. 525) is grasped. Then, it progresses to step Sv0316, refers to the fluctuation time table for big hits stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, and acquires fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS. After executing step Sv0316, the process proceeds to step Sv0317.

In step Sv0317, a variation pattern is identified from the variation time information acquired in step Sv0316, and the type of the identified variation pattern is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h. After executing step Sv0317, the current destination determination process ends.

<Entering ball processing for through>
Next, the ball entry processing for through will be described. The through ball entry process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (Fig. 524: Sv0105).

FIG. 527 is a flow chart showing the ball entry processing for through. In step Sv0401, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the through gate 35 or not. In step Sv0401, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the through gate 35 (Sv0401: YES), proceed to step Sv0402, whether the accessory reserved number SN is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) determine whether or not Incidentally, the accessory reserved number SN is a value indicating the number of balls entered into the through gate 35 reserved for performing the electric accessory open lottery. In this embodiment, the maximum value of the number SN of reserved accessory items is four. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sv0401 that the game ball has not entered the through gate 35 (Sv0401: NO), this through ball entering process is terminated.

In step Sv0402, when it is determined that the value is less than the upper limit value (less than 4) of the reserved role number SN (Sv0402: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv0403, and 1 is added to the reserved role number SN. Then, it progresses to step Sv0404.

In step Sv0404, the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4 updated in step Sv0103 (FIG. 524) is stored in the first memory area among the empty memory areas of the electric work holding area 64d of the RAM64. After that, the through ball entry processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Sv0402, if it is determined that the value of the reserved role number SN is not less than the upper limit (Sv0402: NO), that is, if it is determined that the value of the reserved role number SN is equal to or greater than the upper limit, Without storing the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4, the ball entry processing for through is terminated.

<Normal processing>
Next, normal processing will be described. The normal processing is processing started by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 when the power switch 88 is switched from the off state to the on state (hereinafter also referred to as "power on"). In normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed.

FIG. 528 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step Sv0501, start-up processing is executed. Specifically, initialization of each control device upon power-on, determination of validity of data stored in the RAM 64, and the like are executed. After that, the process proceeds to step Sv0502.

At step Sv0502, a startup command is set. The start-up command is a command for causing each sub-side control device to start a demonstration video when the power is turned on. After that, the process proceeds to step Sv0503.

In step Sv0503, output data such as the start-up command set in step Sv0502 and the command set in the timer interrupt process or the normal process executed last time are transmitted to each sub-side control device. Specifically, the presence or absence of the prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 70 . In addition, when commands related to effects such as start-up commands, variation commands, type commands, and hold commands are set, they are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . After executing step Sv0503, the process proceeds to step Sv0504.

In step Sv0504, the change type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the fluctuation type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . Then, it progresses to step Sv0505.

In step Sv0505, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step Sv0506. In step Sv0506, game round control processing for controlling the game in each game round is executed. In the game round control processing, a winning lottery, setting of variable display of symbols by the symbol display device 41, display control of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b, and the like are performed. Details of the game round control process will be described later. After executing step Sv0506, the process proceeds to step Sv0507.

In step Sv0507, a game state transition process is executed to shift the game state. By executing the game state transition process, the game state shifts to an opening/closing execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, and the like. Details of the game state transition processing will be described later. After that, the process proceeds to step Sv0508.

In step Sv0508, an electric support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 34a provided at the second starting port 34 is executed. In the electric role support process, it is determined whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a. The details of the electronic support process will be described later. After that, the process proceeds to step Sv0509.

In step Sv0509, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has passed since the start of the current normal processing (strictly speaking, the start of the command output processing in step Sv0503). That is, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the next normal process. In step Sv0509, if it is determined that the predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed since the start of the normal processing this time (Sv0509: NO), in steps Sv0510 and Sv0511, until the execution timing of the next normal processing Within the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated. Specifically, in step Sv0510, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . Further, in step Sv0511, 1 is added to the fluctuation type counter CS, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . On the other hand, in step Sv0509, if it is determined that the predetermined time (4 msec) has passed since the start of the normal processing this time (Sv0509: YES), the process returns to step Sv0503, and each process from step Sv0503 to step Sv0508 is performed. Execute.

Since the execution time of each process from step Sv0503 to step Sv0508 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using the remaining time, the values of these counters can be randomly updated.

<Game Round Control Processing>
Next, game round control processing will be described. The game round control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of normal process (Fig. 528: Sv0506).

FIG. 529 is a flow chart showing game round control processing. In step Sv0601, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON when the game state is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode in the later-described game state transition processing, and turned OFF when the opening/closing execution mode is ended in the game state transition processing.

In step Sv0601, when it is determined that the open/close execution mode is in progress (Sv0601: YES), this game round control process is terminated without executing any of the processes after step Sv0602. That is, when the open/close execution mode is in progress, the game cycle is not started regardless of whether or not a ball is entered into the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34 . On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sv0601 that the open/close execution mode is not in progress (Sv0601: NO), the process proceeds to step Sv0602.

In step Sv0602, it is determined whether or not the special figure unit 37 is displayed in a variable manner. Specifically, it is determined whether or not one of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b provided in the special figure unit 37 is in the process of variable display. This determination is made by determining whether or not the special figure variation displaying flag in the special figure variation displaying flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The special figure variable display flag is turned ON when one of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b is to start the variable display, and is turned OFF when the variable display is finished.

In step Sv0602, when it is determined that the special figure unit 37 is not displayed in a variable manner (Sv0602: NO), the process proceeds to step Sv0603.

In step Sv0603, a variation start process for starting the variation display in the special figure unit 37 and the variation display in the symbol display device 41 is executed. The details of the fluctuation start process will be described later. After executing step Sv0603, this game round control process is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Sv0602, when it is determined that the special figure unit 37 is displayed in a variable manner (Sv0602: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv0604.

In step Sv0604, a variation end process for ending the variation display in the special figure unit 37 and the variation display in the symbol display device 41 is executed. Details of the fluctuation end processing will be described later. After executing step Sv0604, this game round control process is terminated.

<Variation start processing>
Next, fluctuation start processing will be described. The fluctuation start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game round control process (Fig. 529: Sv0603).

FIG. 530 is a flowchart showing fluctuation start processing. In step Sv0701, it is determined whether or not the total pending number CRN exceeds "0". When the total pending number CRN is less than or equal to "0", it means that the pending start number for both the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 is "0". Therefore, when it is determined in step Sv0701 that the total number of reserved cards CRN is equal to or less than "0" (Sv0701: NO), this fluctuation start process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sv0701 that the total pending number CRN exceeds "0" (Sv0701: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv0702.

In step Sv0702, hold information shift processing for setting the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra or the second hold area Rb to the state after the start of fluctuation is executed, and the process proceeds to step Sv0703. Details of the pending information shift process will be described later.

In step Sv0703, a winning determination process including a process when a big win is won in a winning lottery is performed. The details of the hit determination process will be described later. After executing step Sv0703, the process proceeds to step Sv0704.

In step Sv0704, variable time setting processing is executed. The variable time setting process is for setting the variable time, which is the time required for the current game cycle in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b, based on the presence or absence of a big win, the occurrence of reach, and the like. is the processing of Details of the variable time setting process will be described later. After executing step Sv0704, the process proceeds to step Sv0705.

In step Sv0705, a variation command is set. The command for variation includes whether the current game cycle is related to the hold information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33, or the information acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 34. Information indicating whether or not it relates to the hold information is included, and information on the presence or absence of reach occurrence and information on the variable time set in step Sv0706 are included. After executing step Sv0705, the process proceeds to step Sv0706.

At step Sv0706, a type command is set. The type command includes information on the presence or absence of a big hit and the result of distribution determination. That is, the type command includes 16R probability variable jackpot information, 8R probability variable jackpot information, 16R normal jackpot information, 8R normal jackpot information, or loss result information about winning lottery as information on the jackpot type. is

The variation command and type command set at steps Sv0705 and Sv0706 are sent to the sound emission control device 90 at step Sv0503 in the normal process (FIG. 528). The sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect in the game round based on the received variation command and the type command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the effect is executed. After executing step Sv0706, the process proceeds to step Sv0707.

In step Sv0707, of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b, the symbol display portion corresponding to the current game round is caused to start the variable display of symbols. Specifically, when the second symbol display portion flag of the RAM 64 is not ON, the first symbol display portion 37a is specified as the symbol display portion corresponding to the current game round, and the variable display is started, When the second pattern display portion flag is ON, the second pattern display portion 37b is specified as the pattern display portion corresponding to the current game round, and the variable display is started. After executing step Sv0707, the process proceeds to step Sv0708.

In step Sv0708, the special figure fluctuation display flag stored in the special figure fluctuation display flag storage area in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned ON. After executing step Sv0708, this fluctuation start process is terminated.

<Holding information shift processing>
Next, the pending information shift process will be described. The hold information shift process is executed by MPU 62 of main controller 60 as a subroutine of fluctuation start process (Fig. 530: Sv0702).

FIG. 531 is a flowchart showing pending information shift processing. In step Sv0801, it is determined whether or not the reservation area to be processed for execution of the reservation information shift process is the first reservation area Ra. Specifically, the first stored hold information (hold information stored in the first area of the first hold area Ra) among the hold information stored in chronological order in the first hold area Ra (FIG. 498) information) is the first stored hold information (stored in the first area of the second hold area Rb) among the hold information stored chronologically in the second hold area Rb (Fig. 498). is stored in the reservation area prior to the reservation information), the reservation area to be processed is determined to be the first reservation area Ra. On the other hand, the first reservation information stored chronologically in the second reservation area Rb than the first reservation information stored chronologically in the first reservation area Ra If the stored reservation information is stored in the reservation area first, the reservation area to be processed is determined to be the second reservation area Rb. That is, by executing the process of step Sv0801, the pending information can be processed in the order stored in the first pending area Ra or the second pending area Rb.

In step Sv0801, when it is determined that the reservation area to be processed is the first reservation area Ra (step Sv0801: YES), reservation information shift processing for the first reservation area in steps Sv0802 to Sv0807 is executed. On the other hand, in step Sv0801, if it is determined that the processing target reservation area is not the first reservation area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the processing target reservation area is the second reservation area Rb (step Sv0801: NO ), and executes the reservation information shift processing for the second reservation area in steps Sv0808 to Sv0813.

In step Sv0802, 1 is subtracted from the first start-up reservation number RaN in the first reservation area Ra, and then the process proceeds to step Sv0803 to subtract 1 from the total reservation number CRN. After that, the process proceeds to step Sv0804. At step Sv0804, the data stored in the first area of the first reservation area Ra is moved to the execution area AE. After that, the process proceeds to step Sv0805.

In step Sv0805, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first reservation area Ra is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After executing step Sv0805, the process proceeds to step Sv0806.

In step Sv0806, if the second pattern display portion flag of the various flag storage area 64g is ON, the flag is turned OFF, and if not ON, the state is maintained. The second pattern display portion flag is information for specifying which of the first pattern display portion 37a and the second pattern display portion 37b is the target for starting the variable display this time. After that, the process proceeds to step Sv0807.

In step Sv0807, a shift command is set. The shift time command is a command including information for making the sound emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, recognize that the data in the reserved area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63, information indicating that the reservation area to which the data is to be shifted this time corresponds to the first reservation area Ra, that is, the information corresponding to the first start port 33 A shift-time command including information indicating that the shift-time command is included is selected, and the selected shift-time command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . After that, the hold information shift process is terminated. It should be noted that the shift time command set in step Sv0807 is sent to sound emission control device 90 in step Sv0503 of the normal process (FIG. 528).

In step Sv0801, if it is determined that the reservation area to be processed is not the first reservation area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the reservation area to be processed is the second reservation area Rb (Sv0801: NO), step Proceed to Sv0808.

In step Sv0808, 1 is subtracted from the second starting reservation quantity RbN in the second reservation area Rb. After that, the process proceeds to step Sv0809. In step Sv0809, 1 is subtracted from the total pending number CRN, and the process advances to step Sv0810 to move the data stored in the first area of the second pending area Rb to the execution area AE. After that, the process proceeds to step Sv0811.

In step Sv0811, the process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second reservation area Rb is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After executing step Sv0811, the process proceeds to step Sv0812.

In step Sv0812, if the second pattern display flag in the various flag storage area 64g is not ON, the flag is turned ON, and if it is ON, that state is maintained. After that, the process proceeds to step Sv0813.

In step Sv0813, a shift command is set. The shift time command is a command including information for making the sound emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, recognize that the data in the reserved area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63, the information indicating that the reservation area to which the data is to be shifted this time corresponds to the second reservation area Rb, that is, the information corresponding to the second start port 34 A shift-time command including information indicating that the shift-time command is included is selected, and the selected shift-time command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . After that, the hold information shift process is terminated.

The shift time command set in step Sv0813 is sent to sound emission control device 90 in step Sv0503 of the normal process (FIG. 528). The sound emission control device 90, based on the received shift time command, displays a command for changing the display in the second start opening reservation region Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations. Send to 100. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second start opening reservation region Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations.

<Hit determination processing>
Next, hit determination processing will be described. The hit determination process is executed by MPU 62 of main controller 60 as a subroutine of variation start process (FIG. 530: Sv0703).

FIG. 532 is a flowchart showing hit determination processing. In step Sv0901, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

In step Sv0901, when it is determined that the mode is the high probability mode (Sv0901: YES), the process advances to step Sv0902, and the success/failure determination is performed by referring to the success/failure table for the high probability mode. Specifically, whether or not the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the jackpot winning in the success/failure table for the high probability mode shown in FIG. 499(b). determine whether After that, the process proceeds to step Sv0904.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sv0901 that the mode is not the high-probability mode (Sv0901: NO), the process advances to step Sv0903, and the success/failure determination is performed by referring to the success/failure table for the low-probability mode. Specifically, whether or not the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the jackpot winning in the success/failure table for the low probability mode shown in FIG. 499(a). determine whether After that, the process proceeds to step Sv0904.

In step Sv0904, it is determined whether or not the result of the success/failure determination (hit lottery) in step Sv0902 or step Sv0903 is a big hit. In step Sv0904, when the result of the success/failure determination is the jackpot winning (Sv0904: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv0905.

At step Sv0905, it is determined whether or not the second pattern display flag of the RAM 64 is ON. In step Sv0905, if it is determined that the second symbol display unit flag is not ON (Sv0905: NO), proceed to step Sv0906 and refer to the distribution table for the first start port (see FIG. 500(a)). and make a distribution judgment. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is any of the numerical range of the 16R probability variable jackpot, the numerical range of the 8R probability variable jackpot, the numerical range of the 16R normal jackpot, and the numerical range of the 8R normal jackpot. determine whether it is contained in

On the other hand, in step Sv0905, when it is determined that the second symbol display flag is ON (Sv0905: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv0907, and the distribution table for the second starting port (see FIG. 500(b)) Refer to to make a distribution judgment. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in the numeric range of the 16R probability variable jackpot or the numeric range of the 8R normal jackpot. After executing the processing of step Sv0906 or step Sv0907, the process proceeds to step Sv0908.

In step Sv0908, the flag (jackpot flag) corresponding to the type of jackpot distributed in step Sv0906 or step Sv0907 is turned ON. Specifically, when it is a 16R probability variable jackpot, the 16R probability variable jackpot flag is turned ON, when it is an 8R probability variable jackpot, the 8R probability variable jackpot flag is turned ON, and when it is a 16R normal jackpot, the 16R normal jackpot flag is turned on. When it is 8R normal jackpot, the 8R normal jackpot flag is turned ON. After executing step Sv0908, the process proceeds to step Sv0909.

In step Sv0909, the process of setting the stop result for the jackpot is executed. Specifically, in the current game turn in which the big win is won, it is set whether the variable display is to be ended in the state in which the stop result is displayed in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b. This is a process for Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63f (FIG. 497), the stop result data corresponding to the type of jackpot distributed in step Sv0906 or step Sv0907. Address information is acquired, and the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After executing step Sv0909, the hit determination process ends.

In step Sv0904, if the result of the winning lottery in step Sv0902 or step Sv0903 is not a jackpot winning (Sv0904: NO), proceed to step Sv0910, refer to the reach determination table, and determine whether reach occurs in the game round A determination is made as to whether or not Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is set as reach occurrence in the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c (FIG. 497). Determines whether or not it matches the value After that, the process proceeds to step Sv0911.

In step Sv0911, if the result of reach determination in step Sv0910 is that reach occurs in the game round (Sv0911: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv0912, and the reach occurrence flag is turned ON. Specifically, the reach occurrence flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned ON. After executing step Sv0912, the process proceeds to step Sv0913.

On the other hand, in step Sv0911, if the result of reach determination in step Sv0910 is that reach does not occur in the game round (Sv0911: NO), the process proceeds to step Sv0913 without executing step Sv0912.

In step Sv0913, a process of setting a stop result for failure is executed. Specifically, in the current game turn that results in a loss, the variable display is set to end in a state in which the stop result is displayed in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b. processing. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for failure in the stop result table storage area 63f, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is acquired. , the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After executing step Sv0913, the hit determination process ends.

<Variation time setting process>
Next, the variable time setting process will be described. The variable time setting process is executed by MPU 62 of main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variable start process (Fig. 530: Sv0704).

FIG. 533 is a flowchart showing variable time setting processing. In step Sv1001, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired. After that, the process proceeds to step Sv1002.

In step Sv1002, a process of specifying a fluctuation time table is executed. The fluctuation time table is data in tabular form having data elements of fluctuation time information (variation time information), which is the time from when the pattern starts to stop until it stops, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS. In the variable time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63, various types of variable time tables are stored according to the game state, the presence or absence of the jackpot and time saving provision, and the presence or absence of reach occurrence. In step S1102, one variable time table is identified from these variable time tables. Specifically, based on the high probability mode flag and the high frequency support mode flag, the current gaming state is low probability low support state, high probability high support state, low probability high support state, high probability low support state It is determined whether it is in any of the above, the result of the determination, the result of the determination of whether or not there is a jackpot or time saving, and the determination result of the reach determination that determines whether or not the reach occurs. One variable time table is specified from the variable time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63 based on the above. After executing step Sv1002, the process proceeds to step Sv1003.

In step Sv1003, by referring to the fluctuation time table identified in step Sv1002, fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS obtained in step Sv1001 is acquired. After executing step Sv1003, the process proceeds to step Sv1004.

In step Sv1004, the variable time information acquired in step Sv1003 is set in variable time counter areas provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. FIG. After that, the variable time setting process is terminated.

<Variation end processing>
Next, the fluctuation end processing will be described. The fluctuation end process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game round control process (Fig. 529: Sv0604).

FIG. 534 is a flowchart showing fluctuation end processing. In step Sv1101, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the current game round has elapsed. As described above, the variation time is the time from when the symbol row starts to vary until all the symbol rows stop, and is part of the unit game time. Specifically, in step Sv1101, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable time information stored in the variable time counter area (various counter area 64f) of the RAM 64 has become "0". The value of the variable time information is set in the aforementioned variable time setting process (FIG. 533). The value of this set variable time information is decremented by 1 each time timer interrupt processing is started.

If it is determined in step Sv1101 that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (Sv1101: NO), this fluctuation ending process is terminated.

In step Sv1101, when it is determined that the variation time has passed (Sv1101: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv1102, and the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b corresponding to the current game round A process for ending the variation of the symbols in the symbol display section is performed. Subsequently, in step Sv1103, the special figure variation display flag stored in the special figure variation display flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned OFF. After executing step Sv1103, the process proceeds to step Sv1104.

In step Sv1104, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a big win. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the 16R probability variable jackpot flag, 8R probability variable jackpot flag, 16R normal jackpot flag, and 8R normal jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is ON. In step Sv1104, none of the above flags is ON, that is, when it is determined that the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is not a big win (Sv1104: NO), the process proceeds to step Sv1105.

In step Sv1105, it is determined whether the support mode is the high frequency support mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

At step Sv1105, when it is determined that the high-frequency support mode flag is ON (Sv1105: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv1106 to determine whether or not the value of the number-of-games counter PNC exceeds zero. In step Sv1106, when it is determined that the value of the number-of-games counter PNC exceeds 0 (Sv1106: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv1107, and 1 is subtracted from the value of the number-of-games counter PNC. After executing step Sv1107, the process proceeds to step Sv1108. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sv1106 that the value of the number-of-games counter PNC is 0 or less (Sv1106: NO), the process proceeds to step Sv1108 without executing step Sv1107.

In step Sv1108, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

At step Sv1108, when it is determined that the high probability mode flag is not ON (Sv1108: NO), the process proceeds to step Sv1109 to determine whether or not the value of the number-of-games counter PNC exceeds zero.

If it is determined in step Sv1109 that the value of the number-of-games counter PNC has not exceeded 0 (step Sv1109: NO), the process proceeds to step Sv1110 to turn off the high frequency support mode flag. After executing step Sv1110, the variable time ending process ends.

If it is determined that the high probability mode flag is ON in step Sv1108 (Sv1108: YES), or if it is determined that the value of the game number counter PNC is greater than 0 in step Sv1109 (step Sv1109: YES) , the variable time ending process ends without executing step Sv1110. If it is determined in step Sv1105 that the high-frequency support mode flag is not ON (Sv1105: NO), this variable time ending process is terminated without executing steps Sv106 to Sv1110.

On the other hand, in step Sv1104, any one of the 16R probability variable jackpot flag, 8R probability variable jackpot flag, 16R normal jackpot flag, and 8R normal jackpot flag is ON. When it is determined that the jackpot has been won (Sv1104: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv1111, and the opening/closing execution mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned ON. After executing step Sv1111, the variable time ending process ends.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the game state transition processing will be explained. The game state transition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of normal process (Fig. 528: Sv0507).

FIG. 535 is a flowchart showing game state transition processing. In step Sv1201, it is determined whether or not the ending period flag is ON. The ending period flag is turned ON at the end of the big winning opening opening/closing process period (at the start of the ending period) in the opening/closing execution mode, and turned OFF at the end of the ending period. The ending period is a period for executing the ending effect in the opening/closing execution mode.

If it is determined in step Sv1201 that the ending period flag is not ON (Sv1201: NO), the process advances to step Sv1202 to determine whether or not the opening/closing process period flag is ON. The opening/closing process period flag is turned ON at the timing when the opening period ends in the opening/closing execution mode and the big winning opening opening/closing process period, which is the period during which the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is executed, starts. , is turned off at the timing when the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 36b ends.

If it is determined in step Sv1202 that the opening/closing process period flag is not ON (Sv1202: NO), the process advances to step Sv1203 to determine whether or not the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is turned ON at the start of the opening period and turned OFF at the end of the opening period.

If it is determined in step Sv1203 that the opening period flag is not ON (Sv1203: NO), the process advances to step Sv1204 to determine whether or not the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step Sv1204 that the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON (Sv1204: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv1205. On the other hand, in step Sv1204, when it is determined that the open/close execution mode flag is OFF (Sv1204: NO), this game state transition processing is terminated as it is.

At step Sv1205, the high probability mode flag is turned off. After that, the process proceeds to step Sv1206. At step Sv1206, the high frequency support mode flag is turned off. After that, the process proceeds to step Sv1207.

In step Sv1207, an opening/closing scenario setting process for setting an opening/closing scenario is executed. The opening/closing scenario defines the pattern of the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 36b in the round game. It is a program in which conditions for shifting the opening/closing door 36b from the open state to the closed state (hereinafter also referred to as "closed conditions") are recorded. The opening/closing scenario is stored in the opening/closing scenario storage area 63h of the ROM 63.

The opening conditions are, for example, as follows.
- The current state of the pachinko machine 10 is the timing for starting each round game in the open/close execution mode.
When one of the above items is established, the opening/closing door 36b shifts from the closed state to the open state.

Closing conditions are, for example, as follows.
- The elapsed time from the start of each round game exceeds a predetermined upper limit duration (for example, 15 seconds).
- The number of game balls entered into the big winning hole 36a after starting each round game exceeds a predetermined upper limit number.
When either one of the above two items is established, the opening/closing door 36b shifts from the open state to the closed state.

After executing step Sv1207, the process advances to step Sv1208 described above.

In step Sv1208, an opening time setting process is executed. The opening time setting process is a process of setting the length of time of the opening period (hereinafter also referred to as opening time) in the open/close execution mode. In this embodiment, the opening time of the same fixed length is set in each opening period. Specifically, "3000" (ie, 6 sec) is set in the third timer counter area T3 that determines the opening time. The third timer counter area T3 is provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM64. After executing step Sv1208, the process proceeds to step Sv1209.

At step Sv1209, an opening command is set. The set opening command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 at step Sv0503 in the normal process (FIG. 528). This opening command includes information on the set opening time and the number of rounds of the current open/close execution mode. A sound emission control device 90 determines the contents of performance corresponding to the opening time and the period of opening/closing processing of the big winning opening based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents are executed. After executing step Sv1209, the process advances to step Sv1210 to turn on the opening period flag. After that, the game state transition processing is terminated.

When it is determined in step Sv1203 that the opening period flag is ON (Sv1203: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv1211.

In step Sv1211, it is determined whether or not the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the third timer counter area T3 is "0". If it is determined in step Sv1211 that the opening period has ended (Sv1211: YES), the process advances to step Sv1212 to turn off the opening period flag. After that, the process proceeds to step Sv1213.

In step Sv1213, round display start processing for notifying the type of the current open/close execution mode is executed. Specifically, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 is checked. Based on the confirmed address information, stop result data corresponding to the address information is specified from among the stop result data group stored in the ROM 63, and the content of the number of rounds is determined from the specified stop result data. confirm. After that, the content of the confirmed number of rounds is output to the round display section 39 in the main display section 45 . As a result, the round display section 39 displays the round information related to the output. After executing step Sv1213, the process proceeds to step Sv1214.

In step Sv1214, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned ON. In subsequent step Sv1215, an opening/closing process start command is set. The opening/closing process start command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the opening/closing process period has started. The opening/closing process start command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 528: step Sv0503) of the normal process. After executing step Sv1215, the game state transition process is terminated.

In step Sv1202, when it is determined that the opening/closing process period flag is ON (Sv1202: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv1216 to execute the big winning opening opening/closing process. The special prize opening opening/closing process will be described later. After executing step Sv1216, the process proceeds to step Sv1217.

In step Sv1217, it is determined whether or not the big winning opening opening/closing process has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the big winning opening opening/closing process has ended depending on whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 for counting the number of times the opening/closing door 36b is opened is "0". do. In step Sv1217, when it is determined that the big winning opening opening/closing process has ended (Sv1217: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv1218. On the other hand, in step Sv1217, when it is determined that the big winning opening opening/closing process has not ended (Sv1217: NO), this game state transition process ends.

In step Sv1218, the open/close processing period flag is turned off, and then the process proceeds to step Sv1219.

In step Sv1219, round display end processing is executed. In this process, the display control of the round display portion 39 in the main display portion 45 is terminated so that the round display portion 39 is turned off. After executing step Sv1219, the process proceeds to step Sv1220.

In step Sv1220, an ending time setting process is executed. The ending time setting process is a process of setting the length of time of the ending period (hereinafter also referred to as ending time) in the open/close execution mode. In this embodiment, the ending time of the same constant length is set for each ending period. Specifically, "3000" (ie, 6 sec) is set in the fourth timer counter area T4 that determines the ending time. The fourth timer counter area T4 is provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM64. After executing step Sv1220, the process proceeds to step Sv1221.

In step Sv1221, an ending command is set. This set ending command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step Sv0503 in the normal process (FIG. 528). Upon receiving the ending command, the sound emission control device 90 terminates the effect corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode. After executing step Sv1221, the process proceeds to step Sv1222.

In step Sv1222, the ending period flag is turned ON. After that, the game state transition processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sv1201 that the ending period flag is ON (Sv1201: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv1223.

In step Sv1223, it is determined whether or not the ending period has ended. Specifically, in the ending time setting process (Sv1220), it is determined whether or not the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0". When it is determined in step Sv1220 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0" (Sv1223: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv1224.

At step Sv1224, the ending period flag is turned off. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sv1225 to execute transition processing at the end of the ending period. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes of game rounds after the end of the current ending period. Details of the transition processing at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing step Sv1225, the process proceeds to step Sv1226 to turn off the opening/closing execution mode flag. After executing step Sv1226, the process proceeds to step Sv1227.

In step Sv1227, it is determined whether or not the total pending number CRN is "0". When the total pending number CRN is "0", it means that the start pending number is "0" for both the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34. FIG. If it is determined in step Sv1227 that the total pending number CRN is "0" (Sv1227: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv1228.

In step Sv1228, a customer waiting command is set. The customer waiting command is used to make the sound emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub-side, recognize that no hold information is stored in the hold information storage area 64b at the time when the pattern variation (game cycle) ends. is a command that contains information about This set customer waiting command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step Sv1228 in the normal process (FIG. 528). After executing step Sv1228, this game round control process is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Sv1227, when it is determined that the total number of reserved cards CRN is not "0" (Sv1227: NO), this game round control process is terminated. Also, in step Sv1223, when it is determined that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is not "0" (Sv1223: NO), this game state transition processing is ended as it is.

<Grand Prize Opening/Closing Process>
Next, the special winning opening opening/closing process will be described. The big winning opening opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (Fig. 535: Sv1216).

FIG. 536 is a flow chart showing the big winning opening opening/closing process. In step Sv1301, it is determined whether or not the door 36b is open. Specifically, the determination is made based on the drive state of the variable winning drive section 36c. If it is determined in step Sv1301 that the door 36b is not open (Sv1301: NO), the process proceeds to step Sv1302.

In step Sv1302, it is determined whether or not the conditions for opening the door 36b are satisfied. Specifically, the opening/closing scenario set by the opening/closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether or not it is time to open the opening/closing door 36b. If it is determined in step Sv1302 that the condition for opening the opening/closing door 36b is satisfied (Sv1302: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv1303.

In step Sv1303, the opening/closing door 36b is opened. After that, the process proceeds to step Sv1304.

In step Sv1304, a door opening command is set. The opening/closing door open command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the opening/closing door 36b has been opened. The open/close door open command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 528: step Sv0503) of the normal process. After executing step Sv1304, the big winning opening opening/closing process ends.

When it is determined in step Sv1302 that the condition for opening the opening/closing door 36b is not established (Sv1302: NO), the big winning opening opening/closing process is terminated without executing steps Sv1303 and Sv1304.

If it is determined in step Sv1301 that the opening/closing door 36b is open (Sv1301: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv1305.

In step Sv1305, it is determined whether or not the conditions for closing the door 36b are met. Specifically, the opening/closing scenario set by the opening/closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether or not it is time to close the opening/closing door 36b. If it is determined in step Sv1305 that the condition for closing the opening/closing door 36b is satisfied (Sv1305: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv1306.

In step Sv1306, the opening/closing door 36b is closed. After that, the process proceeds to step Sv1307.

In step Sv1307, an opening/closing door closing command is set. The open/close door closing command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the open/close door 36b is closed. The open/close door closing command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 528: step Sv0503) of the normal process. After executing step Sv1307, the big winning opening opening/closing process is ended.

When it is determined in step Sv1305 that the closing condition of the opening/closing door 36b is not established (Sv1305: NO), the big winning opening opening/closing process is terminated without executing steps Sv1306 and Sv1307.

<Transition processing at the end of the ending period>
Next, transition processing at the end of the ending period will be described. The transition process at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a game state transition process subroutine (Fig. 535: Sv1225).

FIG. 537 is a flowchart showing transition processing at the end of the ending period. In step Sv1401, it is determined whether or not the flag corresponding to the probability variable jackpot in the jackpot flag is turned on. That is, it is determined whether or not the 16R probability variable jackpot flag or the 8R probability variable jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is ON.

In step Sv1401, if it is determined that the 16R probability variation big hit flag or the 8R probability variation big hit flag of RAM64 is ON (Sv1401: YES), proceed to step Sv1402, one of the 16R probability variation big hit flag and the 8R probability variation big hit flag of RAM64 The ON flag is turned OFF. After executing step Sv1402, the process proceeds to step Sv1403.

In step Sv1403, the high-probability mode flag is turned ON, and then the process advances to step Sv1404 to turn the high-frequency support mode flag ON. As a result, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the game state shifts to a game state in which the lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode. After that, the process proceeds to step Sv1405.

In step Sv1405, 100 is set to the number-of-games counter PNC provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM64. The value set in the number-of-games counter PNC indicates the number of games when the number of games is limited and the high-frequency support mode is executed. After that, the process proceeds to step Sv1406.

In step Sv1406, a high-probability mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the lottery mode is the high-probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. . After that, the process proceeds to step Sv1411.

On the other hand, in step Sv1401, when it is determined that the 16R probability variable jackpot flag and the 8R probability variable jackpot flag of RAM64 are not ON (Sv1401: NO), the process proceeds to step Sv1407, and the 8R normal jackpot flag of RAM64 is turned OFF. After that, the process proceeds to step Sv1408.

In step Sv1408, after turning on the high-frequency support mode flag, the process proceeds to step Sv1409, and 100 is set in the number-of-games counter PNC provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM64. After that, the process proceeds to step Sv1410.

In step Sv1410, a low-probability mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the lottery mode is the low-probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. . After that, the process proceeds to step Sv1411.

In step Sv1411, a high-frequency support mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. set. After that, the transition processing at the end of the ending period ends.

<Electronic support processing>
Next, the processing for electric support will be described. The electric service support process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (Fig. 528: Sv0508).

FIG. 538 is a flowchart showing processing for electric support. In step Sv1501, it is determined whether or not it is being supported. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the supported flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The under-support flag is a flag that is turned ON when the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is to be opened, and is turned OFF when it is to be returned to the closed state. If it is determined in step Sv1501 that the supported flag is not ON (Sv1501: NO), the process proceeds to step Sv1502.

In step Sv1502, it is determined whether or not the support winning flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The support winning flag is turned ON when the electric accessary product open lottery for determining whether or not to open the electric accessary product 34a is won in the open state, and is turned OFF when the supporting flag is ON. is. If it is determined in step Sv1502 that the support winning flag is not ON (Sv1502: NO), the process proceeds to step Sv1503.

In step Sv1503, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, every 2 msec.

If it is determined in step Sv1503 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sv1503: NO), the electronic support process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sv1503: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv1504.

In step Sv1504, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the variable display of symbols in the general pattern unit 38 . If it is determined in step Sv1504 that it is time to end the variable display (Sv1504: YES), the process advances to step Sv1505 to set the off display, and then the electronic support process ends. By setting the deviation display, the variable display of the symbols in the general pattern unit 38 is terminated while the deviation display is stopped. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sv1504 that it is not the end timing of the variable display (Sv1504: NO), the process proceeds to step Sv1506.

In step Sv1506, it is determined whether or not the value of the reserved accessory number SN is greater than "0". In step Sv1506, when it is determined that the value of the reserved accessory number SN is "0" (Sv1506: NO), the electronic support process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sv1506 that the value of the reserved accessory number SN is larger than "0" (Sv1506: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv1507.

In step Sv1507, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is on, and then the process proceeds to step Sv1508 to determine whether or not the high frequency support mode is on. If it is not the opening/closing execution mode at step Sv1507 (Sv1507: NO) and if it is the high-frequency support mode at step Sv1508 (Sv1508: YES), the process advances to step Sv1509 to perform the electric accessory opening lottery. Specifically, the value stored in the electric role holding area 64c is shifted, and when the value of the electric role item opening counter C5 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric role item opening lottery be elected. Also, at the same time as the electric accessory open lottery, the second timer counter area T2 is set to "750" (that is, 1.5 sec). The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started. After that, the process proceeds to step Sv1510.

In step Sv1510, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory open lottery in step Sv1509 is support winning. In step Sv1510, if it is determined that the result of the electric accessory open lottery is support winning (Sv1510: YES), proceed to step Sv1511, turn on the support winning flag, and provide in various counter areas 64f of RAM64 "3" is set in the second round counter area RC2. The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the electric accessory 34a is released. After that, the electronic support processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Sv1510, when it is determined that the result of the electric accessory open lottery is not support winning (Sv1510: NO), the process for electric support is terminated without executing the process of step Sv1511.

If it is determined in step Sv1507 that it is in the opening/closing execution mode (Sv1507: YES), or if it is determined that it is not in the high-frequency support mode in step Sv1508 (Sv1508: NO), the process proceeds to step Sv1512, and the electric accessory open lottery I do. Specifically, the value stored in the electric role holding area 64c is shifted, and when the value of the electric role item opening counter C5 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric role item opening lottery be elected. At the same time as the electric accessory open lottery, the second timer counter area T2 is set to "14750" (that is, 29.5 sec). After that, the process proceeds to step Sv1513.

In step Sv1513, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory open lottery in step Sv1512 is support winning. In step Sv1513, if it is determined that the support has not been won (Sv1513: NO), the electronic support process is terminated. On the other hand, in step Sv1513, if it is determined that the support is won (Sv1513: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv1514, the support win flag is turned ON, and after setting "1" to the second round counter area RC2, , terminates the electronic support process.

In step Sv1502, when it is determined that the support winning flag is ON (Sv1502: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv1515 to determine whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38. In step Sv1515, when it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sv1515: NO), since the pattern is being changed and displayed in the normal figure unit 38, the main electric role support process is performed as it is. exit. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sv1515 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sv1515: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv1516.

In step Sv1516, a win display is set. As a result, the variation display of the pattern in the normal pattern unit 38 is terminated while the win display is stopped. After that, the process advances to step Sv1517 to turn on the supporting flag and turn off the support winning flag. After that, the electronic support process is terminated.

In step Sv1501, when it is determined that the supporting flag is ON (Sv1501: YES), the process advances to step Sv1518 to execute electric opening/closing control processing for controlling opening/closing of the electric accessory 34a. After that, the electronic support process is terminated.

<Electrical opening/closing control process>
Next, the electrical opening/closing control process will be described. The electric power opening/closing control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control unit 60 as a subroutine of the electric power support process (FIG. 538: Sv1518).

FIG. 539 is a flow chart showing the electrical opening/closing control process. In step Sv1601, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open. Whether or not the electric accessory 34a is being opened is determined by whether or not the electric accessory drive unit 34b is in a driving state. When it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is open (Sv1601: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv1602.

In step Sv1602, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the open duration time of the electric accessory 34a. If it is determined in step Sv1602 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sv1602: NO), the electric opening/closing control process is terminated. In other words, if the opening continuation time of the electric accessory 34a has not ended, the present electric opening/closing control process is terminated.

In step Sv1602, when it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sv1602: YES), the process advances to step Sv1603 to perform closing processing for controlling the electric accessary 34a to the closed state, "250" (that is, 0.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as a means for measuring the open duration time of the electric accessory 34a is "0", the electric accessory 34a is closed, and the second timer counter area T2 is electrically operated this time. It is used as a parameter for measuring the closed duration time of the accessory 34a, and "250" is set in the second timer counter area T2. After executing step Sv1603, the process proceeds to step Sv1604.

At step Sv1604, after subtracting 1 from the value of the second round counter area RC2, the process advances to step Sv1605 to determine whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0". If it is determined in step Sv1605 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (Sv1605: NO), the electric opening/closing control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sv1605 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0" (Sv1605: YES), the process advances to step Sv1606 to turn off the supported flag. After that, the electrical switching control process is terminated.

In step Sv1601, when it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is not open (Sv1601: NO), the process proceeds to step Sv1607 to determine whether or not the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closed duration time of the electric accessory 34a. If it is determined in step Sv1607 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sv1607: NO), the electrical opening/closing control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sv1607 that the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sv1607: YES), the process advances to step Sv1608 to execute opening processing for controlling the electric accessory 34a to the open state. . After that, the process proceeds to step Sv1609.

In step Sv1609, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. If it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress (Sv1609: NO), the process advances to step Sv1610 to determine whether or not the high-frequency support mode is in effect. do.

If it is determined in step Sv1610 that the high frequency support mode is in effect (Sv1610: YES), the process advances to step Sv1611 to set "800" (that is, 1.6 sec) in the second timer counter area T2. After that, the electrical switching control process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sv1609 that it is in the open/close execution mode (Sv1609: YES), or if it is determined in step Sv1610 that it is not in the high-frequency support mode (Sv1610: NO), the process proceeds to step Sv1612, and the second "100" (that is, 0.2 sec) is set in the timer counter area T2. After that, the electrical switching control process is terminated.

<<11-6>> Various processes executed in the sound emission control device and the display control device:
Next, a specific example of control executed by the sound emission control device and the display control device in order to execute the announcement effect and the result notification effect will be described. The processing executed in the sound emission control device 90 will be described first, and then the processing executed in the display control device 100 will be described.

<Various processing executed in the sound emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, timer interrupt processing executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 will be described.

FIG. 540 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the sound and light side MPU 92. FIG. Timer interrupt processing is repeatedly executed at a relatively short period (for example, 2 msec). Processing of each step executed in timer interrupt processing will be described below.

In step Sv1701, command storage processing is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing the received command in the sound and light side RAM 94 when a command is received from the main side MPU 62 . The sound and light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer for enabling storage and reading of commands received from the main side MPU 62, and the commands received from the main side MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer. , are read out sequentially according to the order in which they are stored. After executing step Sv1701, the process proceeds to step Sv1702.

In step Sv1702, pending command handling processing is executed. In the pending command processing, processing corresponding to the first pending command among the commands stored in step Sv1701 is performed. Details of the pending command handling process will be described later. After executing step Sv1702, the process proceeds to step Sv1703.

In step Sv1703, a game round effect setting process is executed. In the game round effect setting process, the effect to be executed in the game round from the start of the symbol variation to the stop is set. Details of the game round effect setting process will be described later. After executing step Sv1703, the process proceeds to step Sv1704.

In step Sv1704, processing for opening/closing execution mode effect is executed. In the opening/closing execution mode effect processing, processing related to effects during the opening period, effects during the big winning opening opening/closing process period, and effects during the ending period is performed. After executing step Sv1704, the process proceeds to step Sv1705.

In step Sv1705, background effect processing is executed. In the background rendering process, a process of displaying on the pattern display device 41 a background moving image determined according to a command indicating the game state received from the main MPU 62 is performed. For example, a background video indicating that the high-frequency support mode is continuing, a background video indicating that the high-frequency support mode has ended, and a background video indicating that the high-probability mode is continuing are displayed. . After executing step Sv1705, the process proceeds to step Sv1706.

In step Sv1706, other processing is executed. Other processing includes processing for displaying a demonstration image (moving image) on the symbol display device 41 when the player is not playing a game. After executing step Sv1706, the process proceeds to step Sv1707.

In step Sv1707, light emission control processing for controlling light emission of various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, light emission control of various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read out in each of the effect processes described above. After executing step Sv1707, the process proceeds to step Sv1708.

At step Sv1708, an audio output control process for controlling the audio output of the speaker 46 is executed. In the audio output control process, audio output control of the speaker 46 is performed based on the audio data read out in the BGM process and each effect process. After executing step Sv1708, the timer interrupt processing ends.

<Processing for pending command>
Next, pending command handling processing will be described. The hold command handling process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 540: Sv1702).

FIG. 541 is a flowchart showing pending command handling processing. In step Sv1801, it is determined whether or not a hold command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step Sv1801 that a hold command has been received from the main MPU 62 (Sv1801: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv1802.

In step Sv1802, it is determined whether or not the pending command read out this time is the one transmitted based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 or not. In step Sv1802, if it is determined that the pending command read this time was transmitted based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 (Sv1802: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv1803, and the sound The update processing of the first reserved number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the light-side RAM 94 is executed. The first reservation number counter area is a counter area for specifying the number of pieces of reservation information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting hole 33 in the sound and light side MPU 92 . In the process of updating the first pending number counter area, the information in the first pending number counter area is updated to the pending number information included in the pending command read this time. After executing step Sv1803, the process proceeds to step Sv1804.

In step Sv1804, a special 1 pending continuous effect setting process is executed. The special 1 pending continuous effect setting process is described in detail in the section "Outline of processing by game machine", and determines the execution mode of the foreshadowing effect. Specifically, according to the special 1 suspension continuous effect setting process, a suspension command sent from the main control device 60 is received each time a game ball enters the first start port 33 or the second start port 34. , when it is determined from the hold command that it is a special 1 hold having hold information for executing (scheduled to be executed) a ready-to-win effect with a high expectation of winning a big hit such as a ready-to-win effect, the contents of the ready-to-win effect and By comparing the number of special 1 suspension information existing before the special 1 suspension with a table showing the relationship between the number of appearances of the foreshadowing effect shown in FIG. It is determined which of the previously existing special 1 reservation information is used to execute the foreshadowing effect. For example, the special 1 reserve that became the trigger is special 1 reserve 4, and the lottery result of the winning lottery for special 1 reserve 4 is out, but normal reach occurs. When two cases, that is, the case of executing the forewarning performance in the game round U3 for U2 and the special 1 suspension 3 and the case for executing the foreshadowing performance in the game round U3 for the special 1 suspension 3, For example, it is determined by lottery which of the two patterns is to be adopted, or whether neither of them is to be adopted. After executing step Sv1804, the process proceeds to step Sv1806.

In step Sv1802, if it is determined that the hold command read this time was not transmitted based on the ball entering the first start port 33 (Sv1802: NO), that is, the hold command is the second start If it is determined that the transmission is based on the ball entering the mouth 34, the process advances to step Sv1805 to update the second pending number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound and light side RAM 94. Execute. The second pending number counter area is a counter area for specifying, in the sound and light side MPU 92 , the number of pieces of pending information acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 34 . In the process of updating the second reserved number counter area, the information in the second reserved number counter area is updated to the information of the reserved number included in the command read this time. After executing step Sv1805, the process proceeds to step Sv1806.

The reason why steps Sv1803 and Sv1805 are processed as described above will be described. In this embodiment, while the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, backup power is supplied to the RAM 64 of the main control device 60, while backup power is supplied to the RAM 94 of the sound emission control device 90. not. Therefore, when the power is cut off in a situation where the hold information related to the ball entering the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34 is stored in the RAM 64 of the main controller 60, the main controller 60 is stored in memory, whereas the sound emission control device 90 recognizes that there are 0 pieces of hold information. In this case, if a configuration is adopted in which the first pending number counter area or the second pending number counter area is counted up each time a pending command is received in the sound emission control device 90, the main controller 60 actually stores the pending memory. Inconvenience may occur in that the number of on-hold information received does not match the number of on-hold information grasped by the sound emission control device 90 . On the other hand, as in the above-described embodiment, the main controller 60 transmits a hold command including information on the number of holds, and the sound emission control device 90 responds to the hold command each time it receives the hold command. By adopting a configuration in which information on the contained number of reserved items is set in the first reserved number counter area or the second reserved number counter area, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above inconveniences.

In step Sv1806, update processing of the total pending number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound and light side RAM 94 is executed. The total pending number counter area is the sum of the number of pending information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 and the number of pending information acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 34. This is a counter area for specifying in the sound and light side MPU 92 . In the update process, the information of the total pending number counter area is the sum of the information of the pending number measured in the first pending number counter area and the information of the pending number measured in the second pending number counter area. update to. After executing step Sv1805, the process proceeds to step Sv1807.

If it is determined in step Sv1801 that no pending command has been received from the main MPU 62 (Sv1801: NO), the process proceeds to step Sv1807 without executing steps Sv1802 to Sv1806.

In step Sv1807, pending display control processing is executed. Specifically, based on the number of pending information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 specified in step Sv1803, the display mode of the first pending display unit 37c (the color of the LED lamp to be lit and combination), and based on the number of pieces of hold information acquired based on the entry into the second starting port 34 specified in step Sv1805, the display mode of the second hold display unit 37d (lighting LED lamp colors and combinations). After executing step Sv1807, this pending command handling process ends.

<Game round effect setting processing>
Next, the game round effect setting process will be described. The game round effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 540: Sv1703).

FIG. 542 is a flow chart showing game round effect setting processing. In step Sv1901, it is determined whether or not a variation command and a type command have been received. In step Sv1901, when it is determined that the command for variation and the type command have not been received (Sv1901: NO), this game cycle effect setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sv1901 that the command for variation and the type command have been received (Sv1901: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv1902.

In step Sv1902, read the variation command and type command received this time, from these commands, the presence or absence of the jackpot, the presence or absence of time-saving provision, the type of jackpot, the presence or absence of reach occurrence, and information on the variation time are grasped respectively. Then, the grasped information is stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 . After that, the process proceeds to step Sv1903.

In step Sv1903, effect pattern setting processing is executed. The production pattern setting process is a process of determining and setting the pattern of production to be executed in the current game round (contents of advance notice production, ready-to-win production and execution timing) based on the production pattern table. Details of the effect pattern setting process will be described later. After executing step Sv1903, the process proceeds to step Sv1904.

In step Sv1904, a stop symbol setting process is executed. In the stop symbol setting process, if the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a 16R probability variable jackpot, an 8R probability variable jackpot, or an 8R normal jackpot, the same pattern is displayed on the activated line L1 (see FIG. 496). The information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination is established is set as the information of the stop symbol of this time. Specifically, when the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a 16R probability variable jackpot or an 8R probability variable jackpot, the same combination of odd-numbered symbols can be selected as the same combination of symbols, and the same Even symbol combinations may be selected. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the selection rate is the same for the combination of the same odd-numbered symbols and the combination of the same even-numbered symbols. A configuration in which the ratio is high may be adopted, and the latter may be configured to have a higher selection ratio than the former. Also, the combination of "7" symbols is selected only in the case of a 16R probability variable jackpot. In addition, when the result of the winning lottery in the current game round is the 8R normal jackpot, the same combination of even-numbered symbols is selected as the same combination of symbols.

If the result of the jackpot lottery of the current game round is a result of losing, it is determined whether or not the ready-to-win is generated from the content of the command for variation. When it is determined that it corresponds to the occurrence of ready-to-win, it corresponds to the stop result in which the combination of the same symbols does not materialize on the effective line L1 and the combination of the ready-to-win symbols occurs on the effective line L1. information is determined as the information of the result of this stop. On the other hand, when it is determined that it does not correspond to the occurrence of ready-to-win, the result is a stop result in which the combination of the same symbols is not established on the effective line L1, and a stop result in which the combination of ready-to-win symbols is not established on the effective line L1. The corresponding information is set as the information of the current stop symbol.

In step Sv1905, a process for setting the variation pattern of the current game round is executed. In this process, information on the variation time of the current game round is specified from the content of the variation command received this time, and a combination of the information on the variation time and the information on the stop symbol set in step Sv1904 is obtained. Select the corresponding variation pattern. When selecting a variation pattern, the variation pattern table stored in the variation display pattern table storage area 93b of the sound and light side ROM 93 is referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step Sv1906.

In step Sv1906, special 1 reservation continuous effect processing is executed. The special 1 pending continuous effect processing is described in detail in the section "Outline of Processing by Gaming Machine". Execute processing for setting effects such as appearance of bubbles, charge effects, and the like. After executing step Sv1906, the process proceeds to step Sv1907. In step Sv1907, special 2 suspension effect processing is executed. The special 2 pending effect processing is described in detail in the section "Outline of processing by the game machine", and performs the first and second determinations described above, as well as the effect of appearing the same color of the pattern and the image SH of the shellfish. Executes processing for setting the effect that appears. After executing step Sv1907, the process proceeds to step Sv1908.

In step Sv1908, the effect pattern set in step Sv1903 in this game round, the stop pattern set in step Sv1904, the information of the variation pattern set in step Sv1905, the various effects obtained in step Sv1906 and step Sv1907 Set the information to the production command. After that, the process advances to step Sv1909 to transmit the effect command to the display side MPU 102 . The display-side MPU 102 executes processing for displaying the effect contents corresponding to the received effect command on the pattern display device 41 . After executing step Sv1909, the process proceeds to step Sv1910.

In step Sv1910, update processing at the start of fluctuation is executed. The update process at the start of fluctuation is a process for updating the reserved display in the first reserved display area Ds1 or the second reserved display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41. FIG. The details of the update process at the start of fluctuation will be described later. After executing step Sv1910, this game round effect setting process is terminated.

<Production pattern setting process>
Next, the effect pattern setting process will be described. The effect pattern setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 542: Sv1903) of the game cycle effect setting process.

FIG. 543 is a flow chart showing effect pattern setting processing. In step Sv2001, random number RN for effect pattern is obtained from lottery counter area 94c of sound/light RAM 94. FIG. After that, the process proceeds to step Sv2002.

At step Sv2002, a process of identifying the effect pattern table is executed. The effect pattern table is three-dimensional tabular data whose data elements are patterns of effects to be executed in game rounds, fluctuation times, and random numbers RN for effect patterns. In the production pattern table storage area 93a of the ROM 93, various types of production pattern tables are stored according to the presence or absence of a big hit, the presence or absence of time saving, and the presence or absence of reach generation. At step Sv2002, one effect pattern table is specified from these effect pattern tables. Specifically, based on the presence or absence of the jackpot, the presence or absence of the time saving provision, the type of the jackpot, and the presence or absence of the reach occurrence, which are grasped in step Sv1902 of the game round effect setting process (Fig. 542), the production pattern table storage area of the ROM 93 One effect pattern table is specified from 93a. After executing step Sv2002, the process proceeds to step Sv2003.

In step Sv2003, the effect pattern table specified in Sv2002 is referred to, and the fluctuation time grasped in step Sv1902 of the game round effect setting process (Fig. 542) and the current effect pattern random number RN value obtained in step Sv2001 Acquire a production pattern corresponding to and. After executing step Sv2003, the process proceeds to step Sv2004.

At step Sv2004, the effect pattern acquired at step Sv2003 is set as the effect pattern to be executed in the current game round. After executing step Sv2004, the effect pattern setting process is terminated.

<Update processing at the start of fluctuation>
Next, update processing at the start of fluctuation will be described. The update process at the start of fluctuation is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 542: Sv1910) of the game cycle effect setting process.

FIG. 544 is a flowchart showing update processing at the start of fluctuation. In step Sv2101, it is determined whether or not the command for variation received this time relates to the hold information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting hole 33 or not. If it is determined in step Sv2101 that the variation command received this time relates to the hold information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 (Sv2101: YES), proceed to step Sv2102, The information in the first reserved number counter area is updated so that the number stored in the first reserved number counter area of the sound and light RAM 94 is decremented by one. After that, the process proceeds to step Sv2104.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sv2101 that the variation command received this time is not related to the hold information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 (Sv2101: NO), the process proceeds to step Sv2103. Next, the information in the second reserved number counter area is updated so that the number stored in the second reserved number counter area of the sound and light side RAM 94 is decremented by one. After that, the process proceeds to step Sv2104.

In step Sv2104, the information in the total pending number counter area is updated so that the total pending number stored in the total pending number counter area of the sound and light side RAM 94 is decremented by one. After that, the update process at the start of fluctuation is terminated.

<Various processing executed in the display control device>
Next, processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

The processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 mainly includes a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on until the power is turned off, and a main processing that is executed when a command is received from the sound emission control device 90. There are command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing executed when a V interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal that is transmitted from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when rendering processing of an image for one frame is completed.

The MPU 102 executes main processing after power-on, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of commands and detection of V interrupt signals. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command interrupt processing is preferentially executed. Therefore, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound emission control device 90 and execute the V interrupt process.

<Main processing>
Next, main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

545 is a flow chart showing main processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. As described above, the main process is a process that is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. Processing of each step executed in the main processing will be described below.

In step Sv2201, initialization processing is executed. Specifically, first, processing for initializing the MPU 102 and clearing the storage of the work RAM 104 and the video RAM 107 is performed. Then, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107 . Furthermore, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107 and the extracted character information is written in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107 . Also, perform other necessary settings for initialization. After that, the process proceeds to step Sv2202.

In step Sv2202, interrupt permission setting is executed. After the interrupt permission setting is executed, in the main processing, infinite loop processing is executed until the power is turned off. Accordingly, after the interrupt permission is set, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing, which will be described below, are executed in accordance with the reception of a command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described. As described above, the command interrupt processing is processing that is executed each time a command is received from the sound emission control device 90 .

546 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. In step Sv2301, command storage processing is executed. In the command storage process, received command data is extracted and the extracted command data is stored in a command storage area provided in work RAM 104 . Various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read by the command determination process of the V interrupt process, which will be described later, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

547 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. As described above, V interrupt processing is processing that is executed when a V interrupt signal from VDP 105 is detected. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command storage area are executed by the command interrupt process. Execute the display instructions.

As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame worth of image is completed and that is transmitted to the MPU 102 . Therefore, the MPU 102 executes V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, so that drawing instructions to the VDP 105 are issued every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame worth of image is completed. For this reason, the VDP 105 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to suppress the development of an image associated with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area in which the image information is stored. Details of the processing of each step of the V interrupt processing will be described below.

In step Sv2401, command handling processing is executed. In the command handling process, the contents of the command stored in the command storage area are analyzed by the command interrupt process (FIG. 546), and the process corresponding to the command is executed. Specifically, for example, when a performance command is stored, control of image drawing and display is started so that the performance mode specified by the performance command is displayed on the pattern display device 41.例文帳に追加

If the effect operation command is stored, it is determined whether or not it is the period for accepting pressing of the effect operation button 24, and if it is determined that it is the period for accepting pressing of the effect operation button 24, the effect operation is performed. Control of image drawing and display is started so that the effect mode corresponding to the depression of the button 24 is displayed on the pattern display device 41 . On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the period for accepting pressing of the effect operation button 24, the content of the next command is analyzed without executing the process.

In the command processing (Sv2401), all commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and processing corresponding to all the analyzed commands is executed. The reason for this will be explained. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during the 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the effect is set by the sound emission control device 90 and the effect is started, there is a high possibility that various commands for specifying the content of the effect are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the state of the effect such as the advance notice effect and the stop pattern set by the sound emission control device 90, and display the effect image corresponding to the state. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the device 41 .

In step Sv2402, display setting processing is executed. In the display setting process, based on the type of screen to be displayed on the pattern display device 41 set by the command handling process (Sv2401), etc., the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the pattern display device 41 is specified. . After that, the process proceeds to step Sv2403.

In step Sv2403, task processing is executed. In the task processing, based on the contents of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the pattern display device 41 specified by the display setting processing (Sv2402), the type of character (sprite, display object) that constitutes the image is determined. At the same time, for each character (sprite), various parameters required for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle, are determined. After that, the process proceeds to step Sv2404.

In step Sv2404, drawing processing is executed. In the drawing process, the types of various characters that make up one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each character, which are determined by the task process (Sv2403), are transmitted to the VDP 105 . The VDP 105 executes an image drawing process based on these pieces of information, and together with a drive signal to cause the pattern display device 41 to display an image drawn based on the information received during the previous V interrupt process. The image data is transmitted to the pattern display device 41 . After that, the process advances to step Sv2405, and after executing other processes, the V interrupt process ends. An example of specific control for executing various processes including the jackpot effect in the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

<<11-7>> Functions and Effects:
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the support mode is the low-frequency support mode and the lottery mode is the low-probability mode, special 1 A performance image of a chance eye is displayed in succession to a predetermined number of game rounds regarding suspension. When the game ball passes through the through gate 35 at the normal time, the electric accessory opening lottery is executed, and the short opening of the electric role is won, the electric accessory 34a is opened for a short period of time. As a result, when the game ball enters the second start port 34, the game round of the special 2 suspension is executed for a specific number of times which is equal to or less than the upper limit number (4) of the special 2 suspension, Also in the game round, the effect image of the chance eye is displayed. Furthermore, the effect image of the chance is displayed in the game rounds of the special 1 hold, which are continuously executed after the end of the game cycle in which the effect image of the chance is executed for a specific number of times. For this reason, in a normal state, when there is reservation information in the special 1 reservation that is scheduled to perform a performance with a high expectation of winning a big win in a winning lottery, a performance image of the chance is displayed to the player. On the other hand, it is possible to perform an advance notice effect that there is a possibility that the above-described reservation information with a high expectation of winning a jackpot exists in the special 1 reservation. Also, as described above, in the middle of the notice effect, when the game round for the special 2 hold is executed for a specific number of times that is equal to or less than the upper limit number (4) of the special 2 hold, even in the game round, By displaying the effect image of the second chance, it is possible to digest the special 2 suspension without interrupting the flow of the advance notice effect and without discomfort.

On the other hand, when there is a special 2 suspension, if the special 2 suspension is configured so that the effect image of the chance is always displayed, the effect image of the chance will be repeated unnecessarily, resulting in the advance notice effect. There is a possibility that the relationship between the number of appearances of and the execution schedule effect is violated, and the reliability of the advance notice effect is lowered. On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the determination result of the second determination is negative in the game round of the special 1 suspension, the effect image of the chance eye is switched to the effect image of the same color as the symbol. Therefore, when the determination result of the second determination is negative, it is possible to suppress the extra appearance of the effect image for the second chance. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to improve the reliability of the notice effect, and to improve the interest of the game.

Specifically, in case 1 (see FIGS. 513 and 514) where the result of the winning lottery in Special 1 Reservation 2 is out and becomes normal reach (see FIGS. 513 and 514), first, the game round U11 for Special 1 Reservation 1 is executed, In the game round U11, the foreshadowing effect (first time) in which the chance and the bubble BL appear is executed. In the middle of the game round U11, when the electric role short opening is won in the electric role item opening lottery, and the game ball enters the second start port 34 in the middle of the game round U11 for the special 1 reservation 1, the ball is entered. The game round V11 for the special 2 suspension 1 acquired by the above is executed following the game round U11, and in the game round V11, the special 1 continuous production continuation chance effect and the bubble BL appearing effect are executed. be. These productions are the second premonitory productions. In the case of case 1, when the game round for the special 2 suspension is executed in the middle of the foreshadowing announcement effect, even in the game round for the special 2 suspension, the announcement effect is displayed by displaying the effect image of the chance eye. Special 2 reservation can be digested without any discomfort without interrupting the flow of.

In case 2 (see FIGS. 515 and 516) in which the winning lottery result in Special 1 Reservation 4 is lost and Super Reach occurs (see FIGS. 515 and 516), first, the game round U21 for Special 1 Reservation 1 is executed, and the game round At U21, a foreshadowing effect (first time) is executed in which a chance and bubbles BL appear. Next, a game round U22 for Special 1 Reservation 2 is executed, and in the game round U22, a foreshadowing performance (second time) in which a chance eye and bubbles BL appear is executed. When the game ball enters the second start port 34 in the middle of the game round U22 for the special 1 hold 2, the game round V21 for the special 2 hold 1 obtained by the ball entering follows the game round U21. In the game round V21, the stop display β12, which is the special 1 continuous effect continuation symbol same color effect, is executed. The color of the symbol same color in the special 1 continuous effect continuation symbol same color effect is green, and the scheduled execution effect associated with this green (see FIG. 517) It is configured such that the scheduled execution effect (see FIG. 509) associated with the number of appearances of the executed predictive effect including the chance eye coincides. After the game round V21 for the special 2 hold 1 is completed, the game round U23 for the special 1 hold 3 is executed, and in the game round U23, the foreshadowing effect (third time) of the appearance of the chance and the bubble BL is executed. be. Next, the game round U24 for the special 1 reservation 4 is executed, and in the game round U24, a super ready-to-win effect and a stop display corresponding to the loss are performed.

In the case of case 2, the foreshadowing performance including the chance eye continues twice, followed by the performance with the same color of the green symbol, and then the foreshadowing performance including the chance eye continues once (three times in total). As a result, an effect that ends up being out of super reach is executed. When the player watches a series of performances, the player recognizes that the performance to be executed is equal to or higher than the normal reach due to the fact that the foreshadowing performance including the chance eye appears twice, and the color of the same color of the pattern becomes green. , it is confirmed again that the scheduled execution effect is normal reach or higher, and subsequently, by the third time of the foreshadowing effect including the chance eye, it is recognized that the scheduled execution effect is super reach or higher. I know that I was out of the super reach. As a result, the player does not feel any sense of discomfort, and the reliability of the advance notice effect is improved.

On the other hand, in Comparative Example 1 shown in FIG. 519, after the foreshadowing effect including the chance eye appears four times in succession, the super ready-to-win effect is executed. This series of effects violates the relationship between the number of appearances of the foreshadowing effects and the execution schedule effects shown in FIG. More specifically, a skilled player who has recognized that the foreshadowing effect including the chance eye has appeared four times in a row will say, "This pachinko machine 10 has appeared four times in a row foreshadowing effect including the chance eye. In this case, the jackpot will surely be won after the special reach effect is executed, so in this game round U24, the jackpot will be surely won after the special reach effect is executed.” The result of the game round U24 is eagerly awaited. However, in this comparative example 1, although the foreshadowing effect including the chance eye appeared four times in succession, the super ready-to-win effect was executed instead of the special ready-to-win effect in the game round U24, and the lottery result was lost. turn into. As a result, the player's expectations are betrayed, and he/she feels that "the performance of this pachinko machine 10 cannot be trusted." As a result, according to Comparative Example 1, the reliability of the advance notice effect is lowered.

On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as described above, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the series of effects, so the reliability of the advance notice effects can be increased.

According to the case 2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the game round V21 for the special 2 hold 1, the special 1 continuous effect continuation symbol same color effect is displayed. In the game round V21 for 2 hold 1, neither the special 1 continuous effect continuation chance effect nor the special 1 continuous effect continuation symbol same color effect is displayed, and after the game round V21 for special 2 hold 1 is completed. It is also possible to display the special 1 continuous effect continuation symbol same color effect in the game round U23 for the special 1 suspension 3 to be executed. According to this modification, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric role short opening is won in the electric role item opening lottery in the normal time and the game round about the special 2 hold is executed, In the game rounds of the special 1 suspension that are continuously executed after the game rounds of the special 2 suspension are finished, the expectation of winning the jackpot such as the ready-to-win performance by the continuous suspension performance can be confirmed again, and a series of Since the player does not feel any sense of incongruity with respect to the effect of (1), the reliability of the advance notice effect can be increased.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the effect image of bubbles included in the precursory notice effect is displayed in the predetermined number of game times for the special 1 suspension. For this reason, when there is reservation information in the special 1 suspension that is scheduled to perform a performance with a high expectation of winning a big win in a winning lottery, the player is notified of the special 1 suspension by the bubble performance image information. It is possible to perform a forewarning effect that there is a possibility that there is the above-described holding information with a high expectation of winning a jackpot. Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the normal state where the support mode is the low-frequency support mode and the lottery mode is the low-probability mode, the specific number of , a specific game state in which a game cycle for the special 2 hold can be executed can occur. Then, the shell image SH is displayed while the specific game state is occurring. For this reason, it takes a long time to execute the game cycle of the special 2 suspension. can be improved. On the other hand, since the game round for the special 2 hold is long, when the game round for the special 2 hold is completed, the special 1 hold executed before the game round for the special 2 hold is started There is a risk that some players may completely forget that the advance notice effect has appeared in a predetermined number of game rounds. In addition, by displaying the image SH of the shellfish in the game rounds of the special 2 suspension, it becomes easier to forget that the advance notice effect has appeared in the predetermined number of game rounds of the special 1 suspension. On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the specific game image is displayed and the game rounds of the special 2 reserve are executed, the special game image is made to appear in the predetermined number of game rounds of the special 1 reserve. Since the capture image including the effect image of bubbles is continuously displayed, the player is prevented from forgetting that the notice effect has appeared, and the notice effect for the special 1 suspension is suppressed. It can remind you of what is going on. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Specifically, in the normal state, four special 1 reservations from special 1 reservation 1 to special 1 reservation 4 are stored, and in special 1 reservation 4, the result of the winning lottery is out and super reach occurs. 3 (see FIGS. 520 and 521), in the middle of the game round U32 for Special 1 Reservation 2 (time t31), the electric accessary item open lottery performed by the game ball passing through the through gates 35a and 35b. , the electric accessory 34a is opened for a long period of time (5 seconds). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, all or part of the image of the foreshadowing effect executed in the game round U32 for the special 1 hold 2 executed immediately before the game rounds V31 to V35 for the special 2 hold is captured. (save), and the reduced image of the obtained captured image (still image) is displayed in the display area SA for special 2 special effects as special 2 special effects. In addition, in the game rounds V31 to V35 regarding the special 2 suspension, the shell image SH is displayed, and as the game rounds V31 to V35 regarding the special 2 suspension progress, the two shells are gradually opened. .

Here, in case 3, let us consider a configuration in which special effects dedicated to special 2 are not executed in each of game rounds V31 to V35 for special 2 suspension. Assuming this configuration as Comparative Example 2, Comparative Example 2 has the following problems. The maximum number of game rounds to be executed based on the special 2 hold is five, and the time spent for five game rounds is usually a long time (for example, several minutes). Especially, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a dedicated effect using the image SH of the shellfish is performed, and the game time is longer. For this reason, in Comparative Example 2, when the holding continuous effect of special 1 suspension is interrupted due to the execution of the game round of special 2 suspension, the advance notice is given in the game round of special 1 suspension that has been executed so far Some players may have completely forgotten that the presentation had appeared.

On the other hand, according to the case 3 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in each of the game rounds V31 to V35 regarding the special 2 hold, the special 1 hold executed immediately before switching to the special 2 hold game round Since the capture image of all or part of the foreshadowing performance appearing in the game cycle continues to be displayed as special 2 special performance, the player forgets that the foreshadowing performance has appeared. can be suppressed, and it is possible to remind that the special 1 suspension continuous production is continuing. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Incidentally, according to the case 3 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the capture image is displayed in all of the game rounds V31 to V35 for the special 2 hold. A configuration may be adopted in which the captured image is displayed only in the final game round (game round V35 in case 3) of the game rounds V31 to V35 regarding suspension. Furthermore, the game rounds for the special 1 suspension are continuously executed after the game rounds V31 to V35 for the special 2 suspension without displaying the captured image in each of the game rounds V31 to V35 for the special 2 suspension. The configuration may be such that the above-mentioned capture image is displayed in (game round U33 in case 3). According to these modifications, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the special 2 is elected in the electric role opening lottery at the normal time when the special 1 reservation holding continuous effect is executed. When the game rounds for the special 2 reserve are executed more than the upper limit number of reservations, the game rounds for the special 1 reserve that are continuously executed after the game rounds for the special 2 reserve are completed, and the special 1 It can be reminded that the pending continuous rendition of the pending is continuing. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

<<11-8>> Modified Example of the Eleventh Embodiment:
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and can be implemented in various aspects without departing from the scope of the invention. For example, the following modifications are possible. In addition, in the modified example described below, description of the same configuration, processing, and effects as those of the above-described embodiment is omitted.

<<11-8-1>> Modification 1:
As a modification of the eleventh embodiment, the display on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 may be configured with a plurality of layer structures. Specifically, i) a background layer for displaying the background, and ii) a main display area MA for displaying a combination of patterns, which is placed above (front side) the background layer, and a first starting point reserve. area Ds1, reserved digestion area Dm, second start opening reserved area Ds2 (see FIG. 493); A layer structure having at least an upper layer for displaying an effect, a special effect dedicated to special 2, a charge effect (female character WM), an image SH of a shellfish, and the like may be used. According to this configuration, drawing can be controlled independently for each layer, so control can be simplified.

<<11-8-2>> Modification 2:
In the eleventh embodiment and its modification, when displaying the special 1 continuous effect continuation symbol same color effect, it was executed in the game round for special 1 suspension executed immediately before the game round for special 2 suspension It is equal to the expectation of jackpot winning such as reach performance associated with the specified number of times of appearance (hereinafter simply referred to as "expectation due to omen notice effect"). It is configured to display the special 1 continuous performance continuation pattern same color performance with the same color of the pattern associated with the degree of expectation. On the other hand, as a modification, when displaying the special 1 continuous effect continuation symbol same color effect, the foreshadowing effect executed in the game round for the special 1 hold executed immediately before the game round for the special 2 hold Even if a color with the same color as the pattern associated with a higher expectation level than the expectation level of (hereinafter referred to as a color with a high degree of expectation) appears, the scheduled execution performance corresponding to the color with the same color as the pattern will not be triggered. As long as the effect scheduled to be executed in the special 1 suspension that has not been reached is not exceeded, the same color effect of the special 1 continuous effect continuation pattern may be displayed in the color of the high expectation level. Specifically, in the case of FIG. 512, since the premonitory effect in the game round is the second for the special 1 hold executed immediately before the game round for the special 2 hold, the expectation is normal reach , It is also possible to display the special 1 continuous effect continuation pattern same color effect, which is red corresponding to a higher expectation than normal reach, for example, super reach. In other words, it is also possible to display a combination of patterns showing numbers 4, 5, and 6, which are red patterns. According to this configuration, since the performance scheduled to be executed in the special 1 reservation 4 that is the trigger is super ready-to-win, even if the red pattern same color appears in the game round V21 of the special 2 reservation 1, the player feels uncomfortable. Also, even if the third premonitory performance appears in the game round U23 of special 1 reservation 3, the player does not feel uncomfortable.

<<11-8-3>> Modification 3:
In the eleventh embodiment and its modification, when the performance scheduled to be executed for the special 1 suspension that is the trigger is sufficiently high in the expectation of winning the jackpot, for example, if it is a special reach, the special 1 continuous performance continuation symbol A picture (for example, a specific stage) dedicated to special reach, which is different from the same-color effect, may be prepared, and the picture may be displayed in the game round for special 2 hold. Furthermore, as another modification, in the game round for the special 2 suspension, the execution of the advance notice effect is not performed (that is, the effect without performance is performed), and after the game round for the special 2 suspension is completed It may be configured to cancel the execution of the special 1 suspension continuous effect in the game round for the special 1 suspension to be executed.

<<11-8-4>> Modification 4:
In the eleventh embodiment and its modification, bubbles are displayed as part of the forewarning effect, but instead of the bubbles, other patterns such as petals, confetti, jellyfish, and butterflies may be displayed. good. Further, instead of the floating picture, a non-moving picture, a specific background, a stage, a scene, or the like may be displayed. Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the above-described embodiment, the combination of symbols corresponding to the chance eye is statically displayed, and the effect in which the bubbles BL appear during the static display is the foreshadowing effect. The combination of , instead of being a chance, may be an effect in which bubbles BL only appear during the stop display of the symbols, as the foreshadowing effect. Also in this configuration, the bubbles BL can be replaced with other patterns, specific backgrounds, stages, and scenes, as described above.

<<11-8-5>> Modification 5:
In the above-described eleventh embodiment and its modification, a chance eye appears as a foreshadowing effect in which the execution schedule effect is determined by the number of appearances. On the other hand, as a modified example, the combination of symbols may be configured such that a specific character (symbols in the shape of a real or fictitious person, animal, or the like) appears instead of being a chance. The performance to be executed is determined by the number of appearances of a specific character. Further, in the eleventh embodiment and its modified example, the same color as the pattern appears as the advance notice effect that is determined regardless of the number of appearances of the effect to be executed. On the other hand, as a modification, the combination of symbols may not be a combination of symbols of the same color, but may be configured to execute an effect in which a specific background zone appears. The color (or tone) of the specific background zone determines the effect to be executed. Further, as a notice effect that is determined regardless of the number of appearances of the effect to be executed, a specific character may appear.

<<11-8-6>> Modification 6:
In the eleventh embodiment and its modification, the game rounds for the special 1 hold of a predetermined number of times which are normally executed, and the special 2 hold which is preferentially executed during the game rounds for the special 1 hold It is possible to display a performance image in which the scheduled performance is determined by the number of times of appearance in each of the game round and the game round of the special 1 suspension that is continuously executed after the game round of the special 2 suspension is completed. However, the effect image for which the scheduled effect is determined by the number of appearances does not necessarily have to be the same image, and may be replaced with an image of the same type, although it does not match perfectly. For example, a character image that can be identified by the same attribute, such as a character image of seafood, a character image of a woman, and a character image of a specific friend, may be used as the specific character image for which the execution schedule effect is determined by the number of appearances.

<<11-8-7>> Modification 7:
In the eleventh embodiment and its modification, the configuration is such that the specific effect image of the chance eye is displayed by the pending continuous effect process in the normal time when the support mode is the low frequency support mode and the lottery mode is the low probability mode. On the other hand, as a modified example, a specific effect image may appear at any time during normal times, the support mode is a low frequency support mode, the lottery mode is a low probability mode, and a specific A specific effect image may be displayed only when a condition is satisfied (hereinafter referred to as a specific normal time). The following i) to v) and the like can be adopted as the specific conditions.
i) After a specific effect: After a specific ready-to-win effect or the like is executed, and the like.
ii) After a specific game state: After winning a jackpot in a winning lottery, after the support mode is a high-frequency support mode and the lottery mode is a high-probability mode, or after a high-probability high-support state ends, or the support mode is a high frequency After the high support state, which is the support mode, ends, and so on.
iii) After a specific time has passed: After a specific time has passed from a specific timing.
iv) After a specific number of games: After a specific number of games have passed from a specific timing.
v) After Winning a Specific Lottery: After winning the lottery result of a particular Lottery.
According to this modification, similar to the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment, the series of performances by the pending continuous performance does not give the player any sense of incongruity, so the reliability of the notice performance is increased. be able to.

<<11-8-8>> Modification 8:
In the eleventh embodiment and its modification, in starting the execution of the game round V11 for the special 2 reservation 1, which is the lottery result of the electric accessory open lottery that triggered the execution of the variation of the special 2 reservation? Although the first determination is made, this first determination may be made based on the number of special 2 reservations instead of being made based on the lottery result of the electric accessory open lottery. Specifically, if the number of special 2 reserves is 2 or less, the lottery result of the electric role item open lottery is considered to be an electric role short open, and special 1 continuous in the game round for special 2 reserve If the same color effect of special 1 continuous effect continuation pattern is displayed, and the number of special 2 reserved is more than 2, the lottery result of the electric accessory open lottery is that the electric director is open. Assuming that, the special 2 exclusive effect is displayed in the game round about the special 2 reservation. With this configuration as well, it is possible to easily perform an effect according to the number of times the game is executed for the special 2 hold.

<<11-8-9>> Modification 9:
In the eleventh embodiment and its modification, when starting to execute the game rounds for the special 2 reserve accumulated in the middle of the game rounds for the special 1 reserve by the special 2 reserve effect processing, the game round for the special 1 reserve is executed. When the performance of the game round about the special 2 suspension stored in the middle is set as the performance including the chance performance for the continuation of the special 1 continuous performance, a series of suspension continuous performances up to the performance of the special 1 suspension that has become a trigger. The second determination is whether or not the flow matches the relationship between the number of appearances of the predictive effect and the scheduled effect (see FIG. 509). On the other hand, as a modified example, the second determination is performed not only when the game round for the special 2 reserve accumulated in the middle of the game round for the special 1 reserve is started, but also for the game for the special 2 reserve. It may be configured to be performed at the start of each game round from the first round to the game round for the special 1 hold that triggered the advance notice effect. In this configuration, in case 2 (see FIGS. 515 and 516) described above, the special 1 continuous effect continuation chance effect is displayed in the game round V21 for special 2 reserve 1, and the special 2 reserve 1 is displayed. The special 1 continuous performance continuation chance performance scheduled to be executed in the game round U23 of the special 1 suspension 3 executed after the game round V21 is finished is switched to the special 1 continuous performance continuation symbol same color performance and displayed. It can also be applied in modifications.

<<11-8-10>> Modification 10:
In the eleventh embodiment and its modification, when starting the execution of the game round for the special 2 reserve accumulated in the middle of the game round of the special 1 reserve, the special 2 accumulated in the middle of the game round of the special 1 reserve When the performance of the game round regarding suspension is the performance including the special 1 continuous performance continuation chance performance, the series of pending continuous performances up to the performance of the special 1 suspension that is the trigger is the forewarning performance. Whether or not it matches the relationship between the number of appearances and the scheduled performance (see FIG. 509) is determined as the second determination, and if the determination result of the second determination is negative, the special 1 continuous performance scheduled to be performed is continued. The second chance effect was switched to the same color as the special 1 continuous effect continuation pattern. On the other hand, as a modified example, in the game round about the special 2 reserve accumulated in the middle of the game round of the special 1 reserve, the special 1 continuous production continuation chance effect is originally displayed, and the special 2 At the start of execution of the game round about suspension, when the special 1 continuous production continuation chance effect is displayed in the game round, the number of appearances of the foreshadowing effect until the production of the game round ends is the trigger. A new second determination (hereinafter referred to as a new second determination) is determined as to whether or not the number of appearances of the foreshadowing effect corresponding to the scheduled execution effect for the special 1 suspension that has not occurred matches the number of appearances, and the new second determination is made. When the determination result is negative, the special 1 continuous effect continuation chance effect scheduled to be executed in the game round of the special 2 suspension may be switched to the special 1 continuous effect continuation pattern same color effect and displayed. In this case, even in each game round of the special 1 reserve that is continuously executed after the game round of the special 2 reserve is finished, the chance effect is originally displayed, and each game round of the special 1 reserve is displayed. At the start of execution, when the chance effect is displayed in the game round, the number of appearances of the foreshadowing effect until the end of the effect of the game round corresponds to the scheduled execution effect for the special 1 hold that has become the trigger. A new second judgment is made as to whether or not it matches the number of appearances of the foreshadowing performance that has been performed, and if the judgment result of the new second judgment is negative, the chance performance scheduled to be executed in the game round of the special 1 suspension. is switched to the pattern same color presentation and displayed. A detailed description will be given below with specific examples.

FIG. 548 is an explanatory diagram conceptually showing how special 1 suspension is performed in Modification 10. FIG. As shown in the figure, four special 1 reservations from special 1 reservation 1 to special 1 reservation 4 are stored, and in special 1 reservation 4, it is determined that the result of the winning lottery is lost and super reach occurs. . The sound emission control device 90 executes the special 1 hold continuous effect processing triggered by the reception of the hold command for the special 1 hold 4 judged to generate this super reach from the main control device 60 .

FIG. 549 is a time chart for explaining an effect for special 1 suspension executed by special 1 suspension continuous effect processing and an effect for special 2 suspension executed by special 2 suspension performance processing in modification 10. . As shown in the figure, first, the game round U41 for the special 1 reservation 1 is executed by the special 1 reservation continuous effect process. The game round U41 for the special 1 reserve 1 is the same as the game round U21 for the special 1 reserve 1 explained with reference to FIG. In the game round U41 for Special 1 Hold 1, first, the variable display A11 is executed. Subsequently, a stop display A12 for making a chance eye appear is executed. Subsequently, a bubble appearance effect A13 is executed. When the bubble appearance effect A13 ends, the game round U41 for the special 1 reservation 1 ends. The stop display A12 and the appearance effect A13 of bubbles constitute a foreshadowing effect (first time).

In the middle of the game round U41 for this special 1 reservation 1 (time t41), the electric role short opening is won in the electric role item opening lottery performed by the game ball passing through the through gates 35a and 35b, and the electric role is elected. It is assumed that the object 34a is opened for 0.6 seconds and one game ball enters the second starting port 34. In this case, after the game round U41 for the special 1 reserve 1 ends (time t42), the game round V41 for the special 2 reserve 1 stored based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 is performed. Execution is started. The execution of the game round V41 for the special 2 suspension 1 is executed by the special 2 suspension effect processing by the sound emission control device 90. FIG.

According to the special 2 reservation effect processing, when starting the game round V41 for the special 2 reservation 1, which is the lottery result of the electric accessory open lottery that triggered the execution of the change of the special 2 reservation. The first determination is performed, and when it is determined by the first determination that the lottery result of the electric accessory open lottery is the short opening of the electric role, the new second determination described above is performed. Then, when the determination result of the new second determination is affirmative, the special 1 continuous effect continuation chance effect is displayed in the game round V41 for the special 2 suspension 1.例文帳に追加That is, the lottery result of the electric role item open lottery that triggered the execution of the special 2 hold variation is the electric role short open, and the special 2 hold stored during the game round of the special 1 hold When the special 1 continuous production continuous production including the chance eye production, the number of appearances of the foreshadowing production until the production of the game round ends (here, it is the second time) is the trigger special It is determined as a new second determination whether or not it is consistent with the number of appearances of the foreshadowing effect corresponding to the performance scheduled to be executed (here, deviation from super ready-to-win) for one hold. Here, since the determination result of the new second determination is affirmative, the special 1 continuous effect continuation chance effect which is scheduled to be executed is displayed.

After the game round V41 for the special 2 reservation 1 ends (time t43), the game round U42 for the special 1 reservation 2 is executed by special 1 reservation continuous effect processing. It should be noted that a new second determination is made when starting the game round U42. Even if the chance eye effect is executed in the game round U42, it is the third premonitory effect, and the number of appearances, which is the third time, is the execution schedule effect (here, from super reach to is consistent with the number of times of appearance of the foreshadowing effect corresponding to the deviation of ), the determination result of the new second determination here is also affirmative. Therefore, in the game round U42 for Special 1 Reservation 2, the chance effect is displayed.

After the game round U42 for the special 1 suspension 2 is completed (time t44), the game round U43 for the special 1 suspension 3 is executed. It should be noted that a new second determination is made when starting the game round U43. When the chance eye effect is executed in the game round U43, it becomes the fourth foreshadowing effect, and the number of appearances, which is the fourth time, is the execution schedule effect for the special 1 hold that became the trigger (here, deviation from super reach corresponds to), violating the number of appearances of the foreshadowing effect. When the foreshadowing performance appears for the fourth time, the jackpot winning from the special reach is confirmed as the performance scheduled to be executed, and the departure from the super reach which is the performance scheduled to be executed for the special 1 hold that is the trigger is violated. . Therefore, the determination result of the new second determination is negative, and the chance eye effect scheduled to be executed in the game round U43 for the special 1 reservation 3 is switched to the symbol same color effect and displayed. In this case, the color of the symbol same color effect is a color associated with the number of appearances of the chance eye effect executed before the start of the game round U43 for the special 1 reservation 3. Specifically, since the number of appearances of the chance eye effect is three, the same color as the pattern is set to red.

After the game round U43 for the special 1 suspension 3 is completed (time t45), the game round U44 for the special 1 suspension 4 is executed. The game round U44 for the special 1 reserve 4 is the same as the game round U24 for the special 1 reserve 4 explained with reference to FIG.

According to this modification 10, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric role short opening is won in the electric role item opening lottery at the normal time and the game round about the special 2 hold is executed, In the game rounds of the special 1 suspension which are continuously executed after the game rounds of the special 2 suspension are finished, it is possible to reconfirm the expectation of winning the jackpot such as the ready-to-win performance by the continuous suspension performance, and furthermore, Since the player does not feel uncomfortable with the series of performances, the reliability of the advance notice performance can be increased.

<<11-8-11>> Modification 11:
In the tenth modified example of the eleventh embodiment, when the chance eye effect scheduled to be executed is switched to the pattern same color effect and displayed, the same scheduled execution effect is supported for the execution scheduled effect corresponding to the number of appearance times of the chance eye. It was configured to display the same color as the pattern of the selected color. On the other hand, as a modified example, when the chance performance scheduled to be executed is switched to the same color performance as the symbol and displayed, the symbol of the color with a high expectation of winning the jackpot compared to the execution schedule performance corresponding to the number of appearances of the chance eye. The configuration may be such that the same color is displayed. A detailed description will be given below with specific examples.

FIG. 550 is a time chart for explaining an effect for special 1 suspension executed by special 1 suspension continuous effect processing and an effect for special 2 suspension executed by special 2 suspension performance processing in modification 11. . In modification 11, four special 1 reservations from special 1 reservation 1 to special 1 reservation 4 are stored, and in special 1 reservation 4, it is determined that the result of the winning lottery is a big win and a special reach occurs. do.

Also in this modification 11, in the middle of the game round U41 for Special 1 Reservation 1 (time t51), the electric role short opening is performed in the electric role item opening lottery performed by the game ball passing through the through gates 35a and 35b. is won, the electric accessory 34a is opened for 0.6 seconds, and one game ball enters the second starting port 34.例文帳に追加In this case, after the game round U41 for the special 1 reserve 1 ends (time t52), the game round V41 for the special 2 reserve 1 stored based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 34 is performed. executed. In addition, when starting the game round V41, the first determination is made as to which is the lottery result of the electric role item open lottery that triggered the execution of the variation of the special 2 reservation. A third judgment is made when the lottery result of the object release lottery is determined to be the short opening of the electric role. In the third determination, an execution scheduled performance (hereinafter referred to as a first execution schedule performance) corresponding to the number of appearances of the chance eye performance executed before the start of the game round V41, and a special 1 suspension that has become a trigger. is compared with the performance scheduled to be executed (hereinafter referred to as a second scheduled performance). When it is determined by the third determination that the degree of expectation of the first scheduled performance effect is equal to or less than the degree of expectation of the second scheduled performance effect, a lottery (hereinafter referred to as , is called an effect lottery) to determine the effect to be executed. That is, the chance effect, the pattern same color effect of the same expectation level as the expectation level when the chance effect is displayed, and the expectation level when the chance effect which has already been executed is displayed. The effect to be executed is determined by lottery from among the pattern same color effects of the color with a high degree of expectation compared to . Here, as a result of the effect lottery, it is assumed that the same game round V41 for special 2 reservation 1 as in modification 10 is executed.

Next, after the game round V41 for the special 2 reserve 1 ends (time t53), the game round U42 for the special 1 reserve 2 is executed. Note that when the game round U42 is started to be executed, the third determination is executed, and it is determined by the third determination that the degree of expectation of the first scheduled performance effect is equal to or less than the degree of expectation of the second scheduled performance effect. , the above production lottery will be held. As a result of the effect lottery, it is assumed that the game round U42 for Special 1 Reservation 2, which is the same as in Modification 10, is executed.

Next, after the game round U42 for the special 1 reserve 2 ends (time t54), the game round U43 for the special 1 reserve 3 is executed. Note that when the game round U43 is started to be executed, the third determination is executed, and it is determined by the third determination that the degree of expectation of the first scheduled performance effect is equal to or less than the degree of expectation of the second scheduled performance effect. , the above production lottery will be held. As a result of the performance lottery, in the game round U43 for special 1 reservation 3, the chance performance scheduled to be executed is switched to the pattern same color performance with a higher expectation than the chance performance when the chance performance is executed. shall be displayed. Specifically, since the number of appearances of the chance eye effect is three times, the gold pattern same color effect with a higher degree of expectation than the red color corresponding to the three times is displayed. Since the performance scheduled to be executed for the special 1 suspension that has become a trigger is determination of a big hit from the special reach, even if the color of the pattern same color performance is set to gold, the advance notice performance will not fail.

After the game round U43 for the special 1 suspension 3 is completed (time t55), the game round U44 for the special 1 suspension 4 is executed. In the game round U44 for the special 1 reservation 4, first, the variable display I11 is executed. Subsequently, a special ready-to-win effect I12 is executed. Subsequently, a stop display I13 corresponding to the fact that the result of the winning lottery is a big win is executed. With the end of the stop display I13, the game round U44 for the special 1 reservation 4 ends.

According to this modification 11, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric role short opening is won in the electric role item open lottery at normal time and the game round about the special 2 hold is executed, In the game rounds of the special 1 suspension which are continuously executed after the game rounds of the special 2 suspension are finished, it is possible to reconfirm the expectation of winning the jackpot such as the ready-to-win performance by the continuous suspension performance, and furthermore, Since the player does not feel uncomfortable with the series of performances, the reliability of the advance notice performance can be increased.

<<11-8-12>> Modification 12:
In the above embodiment and each modification, the outer frame of the pachinko machine is not limited to being made of wood, but may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin. , cast steel, stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, alloy steel, and other metals. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the modifications, the inner frame provided in the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin. It may be made of metal such as stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, or alloy steel. Further, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the front door frame provided in the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin, and may be made of steel (carbon steel), cast iron, or cast steel. , stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, alloy steel, and other metals. Further, in the above embodiment and each modification, the pachinko machine has a function of locking the inner frame to the outer frame so that it cannot be opened, and a function of locking the front door frame to the inner frame so that it cannot be opened. However, after adopting a configuration in which this cylinder lock is omitted, a first cylinder lock having a function of locking the inner frame to the outer frame so that it cannot be opened, and the front door frame A configuration in which a second cylinder lock having a function of locking the inner frame so that it cannot be opened may be employed. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modified examples, the image of the chance eye included in the forewarning effect is used as the specific effect image in succession to the predetermined number of game rounds for the special 1 hold in the normal state, which is the predetermined game state. was configured to display On the other hand, as a modification, the specific effect image may be a specific character that can be counted as the number of appearances of the foreshadowing effect, or may be a background image normally displayed. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, the configuration in which the rotation shaft for rotating the inner frame with respect to the outer frame is provided on the left side when viewed from the front is adopted. You may employ the structure provided. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modified examples, the configuration in which the rotation shaft for rotating the front door frame with respect to the inner frame is provided on the left side when viewed from the front is adopted. may be adopted. Further, in the above embodiment and each modification, the game board provided in the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin, and may be made of steel (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, It may be made of metal such as stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, or alloy steel. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each modification, the pachinko machine employs a configuration including an upper tray and a lower tray, but the lower tray may be omitted and a configuration including only the upper tray may be adopted. Further, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the electric accessory 34a is in an open state and the game ball enters the second start port 34. A specific number of times below the upper limit of special 2 suspension The above-mentioned specific effect image was displayed in the game round of the special 2 hold. On the other hand, as a modification, the special 2 hold stored in the high support state (hereinafter referred to as the remaining special 2 hold) is executed after the high support state in which the support mode is a high-frequency support mode transitions to the normal state. ), the specific effect image may be displayed. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, the specific effect image is displayed in the game rounds for the special 1 suspension that are continuously executed after the game rounds for the special 2 suspension of the specific number of times are completed. rice field. On the other hand, as a modified example, the specific effect image may be displayed in the game round of the special 1 reserve that is continuously executed after the game round of the remaining special 2 reserve is finished. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, a configuration in which the operation handle is provided on the right side in front view is adopted, but a configuration in which the operation handle is provided on the left side in front view may be adopted. Also, a configuration in which the operation handle is provided on both the right side and the left side when viewed from the front may be adopted. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the modifications, the operating handle is provided with a touch sensor capable of detecting whether or not the player is gripping the operating handle (whether or not the player's hand is in contact with the operating handle). However, a configuration in which the touch sensor is omitted may be adopted. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modification, various configurations can be adopted as the shooting means capable of shooting game balls. Alternatively, a structure or the like may be adopted in which the game ball is shot using the wind pressure generated when the compressed gas is ejected. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, when the operating handle is turned clockwise by a predetermined amount, about 100 game balls are shot per minute. A configuration in which less than 100 (eg, 60) game balls are fired per minute may be used, and a configuration in which 100 or more (eg, 200) game balls are fired per minute may be used. good. Alternatively, the game ball may be shot one by one by flipping the lever. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, when the specific condition in the game round about the special 1 suspension is satisfied that the determination result of the second determination described above is negative, the predetermined effect image The specific effect image is switched to the special 1 continuous effect continuation pattern same color effect. On the other hand, as a modification, when it is established that the ready-to-win effect as a specific condition is executed in the special 1 reservation that is continuously executed after the end of the game round of the remaining special 2 reservation, the specific effect The image may be switched to the background image during the ready-to-win effect as the predetermined effect image, or the background image A as the specific effect image may be switched to the background image B as the predetermined effect image when the condition for switching the background image is satisfied. good. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, a configuration in which a speaker is provided as means capable of outputting sound is adopted, but a configuration in which an earphone jack is provided in addition to or instead of the speaker may be adopted. According to this configuration, the player can hear the sound of the pachinko machine he/she is playing without being disturbed by the sounds of the surrounding pachinko machines by connecting the earphones or headphones he/she has brought with him/herself to the earphone jack. It is possible to enjoy it in minutes. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, various configurations can be adopted as the display means capable of displaying the special symbol that starts the variable display based on the entry of the game ball into the various starting ports. For example, an LED lamp, an LED display device, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a halogen lamp, or the like may be employed. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modified examples, various configurations can be adopted as the display means capable of displaying the normal symbols that start the variable display based on the passage of the game ball through various gates, For example, an LED lamp, an LED display device, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a halogen lamp, or the like may be employed. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, various configurations can be adopted as display means capable of displaying various decorative patterns, such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, and an LED display device. , a rotating drum type display device, a light guide plate, a three-dimensional hologram display device, or the like may be employed. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, a specific game state that can be executed for a specific number of special 2 reserves that is equal to or greater than the upper limit number of special 2 reserves that can be stored in the normal state can be generated. As a game state generating means, the electric accessory 34a of the second start port 34 is configured to generate a long open state in which special 2 reserves that are equal to or greater than the upper limit number of special 2 reserves can be stored. On the other hand, as a modification, the specific game state generating means is set to a state in which the game ball is easily entered into the second start port 34, such as a high probability high support state (so-called rush state). ) may be used as a means capable of shifting to In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, the decorative pattern is not limited to numerals, and various characters, figures, symbols, patterns, etc., and combinations thereof can be employed. For example, as decorative patterns, alphabets, Greek letters, hiragana, katakana, kanji, various characters, and combinations thereof may be employed. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each modification, the number of symbol rows in which decorative symbols are scrolled is not limited to three, and may be, for example, two or less, or four or more. In the case of adopting a configuration in which there is only one decorative pattern row, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a jackpot is won when a specific decorative pattern (for example, "7") stops. In the case of adopting a configuration in which two or more rows of decorative patterns are employed, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a jackpot is won when the same decorative patterns stop on a specific line. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, various configurations can be adopted as the special electric accessory. A configuration in which the large winning slot can be opened by rotating the plate-shaped member forward about the rotation shaft, or a configuration in which the large winning slot is opened and closed by a plate-shaped member that can slide in the front-rear direction of the game board, etc. may be adopted. Further, in the above embodiment and each modification, the specific game image corresponding to the specific game, which is displayed while the specific game state is occurring, is the shell image. On the other hand, as a modification, the specific game image may be a background image displayed in the rush state. Further, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, when the image of the shellfish as the specific game image is displayed and the game round for the special 2 hold is executed, the foreshadowing effect including bubbles is captured and obtained. An image obtained by reducing the captured image is continuously displayed as predetermined suggestive information. On the other hand, as a modified example, the display mode of the first pending display portion of the main display portion may be continuously displayed in the rush state. Furthermore, as a modification of the modification, the first suspension of the main display unit displayed in the game round for the special 1 suspension executed immediately before the start of the game round for the special 2 suspension that displays the background image in the rush state A configuration may be adopted in which the display mode of the display unit is continuously displayed as it is. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modifications described above, various configurations can be adopted as the ordinary electric accessory. A rotation shaft extending in a substantially horizontal direction is provided below the plate-shaped member, and the plate-shaped member rotates forward about the rotation shaft to open the starting port, front and rear of the game board A structure or the like in which the starting port is opened and closed by a plate-shaped member that can slide in a direction may be adopted. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, the number of winning balls set in each ball opening (starting hole, general winning opening, big winning opening, etc.) is an example, and is set for each ball opening By appropriately changing the number of prize balls, it is possible to realize a plurality of types of pachinko machines with different specifications.

<<11-8-13>> Modification 13:
In the eleventh embodiment and its modification, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to include three control devices, namely the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90, and the display control device 100, but instead of this, the main control It is good also as a structure provided with two control devices, such as a device and a sub control device. The sub control device may be configured to execute various processes executed in the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 in the eleventh embodiment. Further, in the eleventh embodiment and its modification, the various processes executed by the three control devices 60, 90, and 100 are not necessarily limited to the division described in the eleventh embodiment, and the three control devices As a whole of 60, 90 and 100, it is sufficient that various processes in the eleventh embodiment can be executed.

<<12>> Twelfth Embodiment:
<<12-1>> Game machine structure:
FIG. 551 is a perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter also referred to as "pachinko machine") as a twelfth embodiment of the present invention. A pachinko machine 10 has a wooden outer frame 11 combined in a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island equipment of the game hall. The pachinko machine 10 also includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11 . A pachinko machine body 12 has an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13. - 特許庁The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11 by metal hinges 15 . The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 16 with respect to the inner frame 13 . Control devices for controlling the pachinko machine body 12, such as a main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device, are arranged on the back of the inner frame 13. FIG. Details of these control devices will be described later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. - 特許庁The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened, and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation using a dedicated key on the cylinder lock 17 .

A substantially central portion of the front door frame 14 is formed with an open window portion 18 . Around the window part 18, resin parts and decorative parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. The decorative parts are composed of light-emitting means including various lamps such as LEDs. The light-emitting means plays a role of enhancing the performance effect by lighting or blinking at each game played by the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot is won, when a ready-to-win game occurs, or the like. A glass unit 19 composed of two sheets of plate glass is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14 , and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19 . A game board, which will be described later, is detachably attached to the inner frame 13 , and the player of the pachinko machine 10 can view the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 19 . Details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper tray 20 and a lower tray 21 for storing game balls. The upper tray 20 is formed in a box shape with an open top, and stores game balls such as rental balls lent from a rental machine (not shown) and prize balls discharged from the pachinko machine main body 12 . The game balls stored in the upper tray 20 are supplied to a game ball shooting mechanism provided in the pachinko machine main body 12. - 特許庁The game ball shooting mechanism is driven by the player's operation of the operation handle 25, and shoots the game balls supplied from the upper tray 20 to the front surface of the game board. The lower tray 21 is arranged below the upper tray 20 and is shaped like a box with an open top. The lower tray 21 stores game balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 20. - 特許庁A discharge port 22 for discharging game balls stored in the lower tray 21 is formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 21 . A lever 23 is provided below the ejection port 22 , and the player can switch the ejection port 22 between a closed state and an open state by operating the lever 23 . When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game ball falls from the discharge port 22 and is discharged from the lower tray 21 to the outside.

A performance operation button 24 is provided in front of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20.例文帳に追加The effect operation button 24 is an operation unit for the player to perform an input operation for the game effect performed by the pachinko machine 10 . When a player operates a performance operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, a game performance reflecting the operation is performed by the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

An operation handle 25 for a player to operate is provided on the right side of the front door frame 14 when viewed from the front (hereinafter also simply referred to as "right side"). When the player operates (turns) the operation handle 25, a game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism to the front surface of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operation handle 25, there are a touch sensor 25a for permitting driving of the game ball shooting mechanism, a wait button 25b for stopping shooting of game balls by the game ball shooting mechanism when pressed by the player, and the operation handle 25. A variable resistor 25c is provided for detecting the amount of rotational operation of , based on a change in electrical resistance. When the player grips the operating handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operating handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. Then, a game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism to the front surface of the game board with strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

A game ball shooting button 26 for a player to operate is provided on the left side of the periphery of the upper tray 20 in front view (hereinafter also simply referred to as "left side"). When the game ball shooting button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is shot to the front surface of the game board with a predetermined shooting strength regardless of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 by the player. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball shooting button 26, the game ball is shot to the front surface of the game board with the same shooting intensity as when the operation handle 25 is rotated at its maximum. In the case of this embodiment, when a game ball is shot by operating the game ball shooting button 26, the game ball flows to the right side of the game board when viewed from the front and also to the right side of the game board. That is, by operating the game ball shooting button 26, the player can hit the ball to the right. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the game ball shooting button 26 is operated, the game ball is shot to the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is turned on. . That is, the player turns on at least the touch sensor 25a by grasping the operation handle 25, and then operates the game ball shooting button 26 to shoot the game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball shooting button 26. can be realized.

Next, the configuration of the rear surface of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. A control device for controlling the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is arranged on the back surface of the pachinko machine 10. - 特許庁

552 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. As shown, the pachinko machine 10 includes a first control unit 51, a second control unit 52, a third control unit 53, and a power supply unit 58. Specifically, these units are provided on the back surface of the inner frame 13 .

The first control unit 51 has a main controller 60 . The main controller 60 has a main control board having a function of controlling the main game. The main control board is housed in a board box made of transparent resin material. This board box is configured to leave traces of opening and closing. For example, a seal is affixed to a portion that can be opened and closed, and when the substrate box is opened, characters such as "opened" appear.

The second control unit 52 includes an audio emission control device 90 and a display control device 100 . The sound emission control device 90 controls emission means such as speakers and various lamps provided in front of the pachinko machine 10 based on commands transmitted from the main control device 60 . The display control device 100 controls the pattern display device based on commands transmitted from the sound emission control device 90 . The pattern display device has a liquid crystal display for displaying patterns and images for presentation.

The third control unit 53 has a payout control device 70 and a launch control device 80 . The payout control device 70 performs payout control for paying out prize balls. When an instruction to shoot a game ball is input from the main control device 60, the shooting control device 80 shoots a game ball with strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 by the player. Controls the ball launching mechanism. In addition, on the back of the inner frame 13, there is a tank 54 to which the game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially supplied, and a slope which is connected to the lower part of the tank 54 and is gently inclined so that the game balls flow downstream. , a case rail 56 connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 55, a game ball is supplied from the case rail 56, and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out according to an instruction from the payout control device 70. A plurality of devices necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10, such as a payout device 71, are provided.

The power supply unit 58 includes a power supply device 85 and a power switch 88 . The power supply device 85 supplies power necessary for the pachinko machine 10 to operate. A power switch 88 is connected to the power supply device 85 . By ON/OFF operation of the power switch 88, a supply state in which power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 and a non-supply state in which power is not supplied to the pachinko machine 10 are switched.

Next, the game board will be explained. The game board is detachably attached to the front surface of the inner frame 13. - 特許庁

553 is a front view of the game board 30. FIG. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on its front surface. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding a game ball is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. A game ball shot from the game ball shooting mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and released above the game area PA, and then flows down the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicularly to the game board 30, and accessories such as windmills are arranged. These nails 42 and windmills distribute and organize the falling directions of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

The game board 30 is formed with a plurality of openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening is provided with a general winning opening 32, a first starting opening 33, a second starting opening 34, a through gate 35, and a variable winning device . Game balls entered into each of the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, the through gate 35, and the variable winning device 36 enter the individual openings formed on the game board 30. Induced. Also, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display section 45 . The main display section 45 has a special figure unit 37 , a normal figure unit 38 , and a round display section 39 .

As illustrated, the general prize winning openings 32 are ball entrance members that form ball entrances into which game balls can enter, and are provided in plurality on the game board 30 . In this embodiment, when game balls enter the general winning hole 32, 10 game balls are paid out as prize balls from the payout device 71 (Fig. 552).

The first starting port 33 is a ball entrance member that forms a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter. The first starting port 33 is provided at the lower center of the game board 30 . In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first start hole 33, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a winning lottery, which will be described later, is executed.

The second starting port 34 is a ball entrance member that forms a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and is provided on the right side of the game board 30 . The second starting port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a consisting of a pair of left and right movable pieces. When the electric accessory 34a is in the closed state, the game ball cannot enter the second starting port 34. - 特許庁On the other hand, when the electric accessory 34a is in the open state, the game ball can enter the second starting port 34. As shown in FIG. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 34, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a winning lottery, which will be described later, is executed.

The through gate 35 has a through hole extending vertically. The through gate 35 is a through gate that serves as a trigger for executing a lottery for opening the electric accessory 34a. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the main controller 60 performs an internal lottery (electric accessory open lottery) triggered by the passage. As a result of the internal lottery, when the electric role open is won, the electric accessory 34a shifts to the electric role open state in a predetermined manner. Since the through gate 35 is arranged on the upstream side of the second starting port 34 with respect to the flowing direction of the game ball, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 flows down the game area PA after passing through the second opening. It is possible to enter the ball into the starting port 34 . In addition, in this embodiment, even if the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the prize ball is not paid out.

The variable winning device 36 includes a large winning opening 36a leading to the back side of the game board 30, and an opening/closing door 36b for opening and closing the large winning opening 36a. The opening/closing door 36b is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot enter the big winning opening 36a. As a result of the internal lottery (winning lottery) by the main controller 60, when a big win is won and the opening/closing execution mode is shifted, the opening/closing door 36b repeats an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state. The open/close execution mode is a transition to the open/close door 36b when a big win is won as a result of a winning lottery by the main controller 60 triggered by the ball entering the first start hole 33 or the second start hole 34, and the open/close door 36b is opened. and the closed state are repeated. That is, when a big win is won as a result of the winning lottery based on the ball entering the first starting hole 33, the operation shifts to the opening/closing execution mode in which the ball can be entered into the big winning hole 36a of the variable prize winning device 36. Similarly, even if a big win is won as a result of the winning lottery based on the ball entering the second starting hole 34, the operation shifts to the opening/closing execution mode in which the ball can enter the big winning hole 36a of the variable prize winning device 36. . In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the big winning hole 36a of the variable winning device 36, the payout device 71 pays out 15 game balls as prize balls.

An out port 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and game balls that do not enter the general winning port 32, the first starting port 33, the second starting port 34, or the variable winning device 36 are out. It is discharged from the game area PA through the mouth 43 .

A game ball entered into each of the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, the large winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36, and the out opening 43 is individually formed on the game board 30. It is configured to be guided to the back side of the game board 30 through the opening and finally join the discharge passage provided on the back side of the game board 30 . The discharge passage is provided with a discharge passage detection sensor for detecting game balls. By detecting the game balls with the ejection path detection sensor, it is possible to grasp the number of game balls shot to the game board 30. - 特許庁

The special figure unit 37 includes a first symbol display portion 37a and a second symbol display portion 37b. Each of the first pattern display portion 37a and the second pattern display portion 37b is composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting portions are arranged in a predetermined manner.

The first pattern display portion 37a is a display portion for displaying the first pattern. The first pattern means a pattern that is displayed in a variable or stationary manner based on a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33 . The first symbol display unit 37a is used as a display mode until a winning lottery is performed triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 33, and the display corresponding to the lottery result is performed on the segment display device. , to perform the variable display of the first symbol. When the lottery is finished, the first symbol display section 37a causes the segment display to stop displaying the first symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

The second pattern display portion 37b is a display portion for displaying the second pattern. The second pattern refers to a pattern that is variably displayed or statically displayed based on a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34 . The second symbol display part 37b is used as a display mode until a winning lottery is performed triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 34, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is performed on the segment display device. , to perform the variable display of the second symbol. When the lottery is finished, the second symbol display section 37b causes the segment display device to stop displaying the second symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

The time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol displayed in the second symbol display portion 37b to the stop display is called the variation time. call. Specifically, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed in the first symbol display portion 37a to the stop display is also called the first variation time, and the second symbol display portion 37b The time from the start of the variable display of the second symbol to be displayed until the stop display is also called a second variable time.

The special figure unit 37 is further provided with a first pending display portion 37c and a second pending display portion 37d, which are LED lamps, at positions adjacent to the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b. In the present embodiment, up to four game balls entered into the first starting port 33 are reserved. The first reservation display portion 37c displays the number of reservations for the first starting port 33 according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be lit. Further, in the present embodiment, up to four game balls entered into the second starting port 34 are reserved. The second reservation display part 37d displays the number of reservations of the second starting port 34 according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be lit.

The normal figure unit 38 is composed of a light-emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. The normal figure unit 38, when the electric accessary item open lottery triggered by the passage of the through gate 35 is performed, causes the light-emitting display to display in a lighting display, a blinking display, or a predetermined mode. When the electric accessory open lottery ends, the normal figure unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The round display section 39 is composed of a light-emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games that occur in the open/close execution mode or displays corresponding thereto. A round game means that either a predetermined upper limit duration time elapses or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls enter the variable winning device 36 until either one of the conditions is met. It is a game in which the door 36b is kept open. The number of round games varies depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the shift. The round display unit 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the opening/closing execution mode is started, and ends when the opening/closing execution mode is finished and a new game is started.

In addition, the special figure unit 37, the general figure unit 38, and the round display unit 39 are not limited to being configured by a segment display device or a light emitting display device using an LED lamp. It may consist of various display devices capable of showing the draw in progress and the draw results, such as a CRT or dot matrix display.

The variable display unit 40 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area PA. The variable display unit 40 has a pattern display device 41 . The pattern display device 41 has a liquid crystal display. The display contents of the pattern display device 41 are controlled by the display control device 100 . The pattern display device 41 may be replaced with various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

When the first symbol display unit 37a performs variable display or predetermined display based on the ball entering the first starting port 33, the symbol display device 41 performs variable display or predetermined display of the symbols accordingly. In addition, when the second symbol display unit 37b performs a variable display or a predetermined display based on the ball entering the second starting port 34, the symbol display device 41 displays the symbol in a variable display or a predetermined display accordingly. conduct. The symbol display device 41 performs not only the display performance triggered by the entry of the ball into the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, but also the display performance during the opening/closing execution mode that shifts when the jackpot is won. . Details of the pattern display device 41 will be described below.

FIG. 554 is an explanatory diagram showing symbols that are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41 and the display surface 41a. FIG. 554(a) is an explanatory diagram showing symbols that are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41. FIG. As shown, the symbol display device 41 variably displays symbols representing numbers 1 to 8. FIG. As the symbols to be variably displayed, symbols such as characters may be added to the symbols representing the numbers 1 to 8. FIG.

FIG. 554(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. As shown in FIG. As shown, the display surface 41a displays a main display area MA and a sub-area SA located below the main display area MA. Three pattern rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 of left, middle and right are displayed in the main display area MA. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the symbols of numbers 1 to 8 shown in FIG. A variable display that scrolls upward is performed. As shown in FIG. 554(b), after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol row is displayed in a stationary state on the activated line L. As shown in FIG. Specifically, when a game ball enters the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, a variable display is started in which the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are cyclically scrolled in a predetermined direction. Then, the symbols to be scrolled are switched from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol row Z1, the symbol row Z3, and the symbol row Z2, and finally, the predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. . When the variable display of symbols is finished and the display is stopped, and when the result of the winning lottery by the main control device 60 is a big win, a predetermined predetermined combination of symbols is displayed on the activated line L. It is formed. For example, a combination of the same symbols is formed on the activated line L. The pattern display device 41 is not limited to the above-described patterns, but the number of pattern rows, the number of active lines, the direction of pattern display variation in the pattern rows, and the patterns in each pattern row. Various modes can be adopted for the mode of variable display of symbols such as numbers.

Here, the "game cycle" means that the variable display of the symbols displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b (and the variable display of various symbols displayed on the symbol display device 41) is started. After that, the variable display ends and becomes a stop display, and it is one unit that counts the variable game that is one game rotation operation until the stop display ends, and to the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 It is one unit of processing for notifying the player of the lottery result of the winning lottery for the special information acquired based on the entry of the game ball. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one winning lottery for one piece of special information every game round (every game round operation, every variable game). When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires the special information based on the entry of the game ball into either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the first symbol display unit In either one of the 37a and the second pattern display portion 37b, after the segment display is variably displayed, the segment display is stop-displayed so that the display corresponds to the lottery result of the acquired special information. In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment acquires the special information based on the entry of the game ball into either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the symbol display device At 41, after the predetermined symbol row is variably displayed, the symbol row is stopped and displayed so as to correspond to the lottery result of the acquired special information. In addition, the time required for one game round is also called unit game time. The unit playing time is composed of a variable time, which is the time from when the variable display is started until the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed, and a stop time, which is the time when the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed. there is

In the sub-area SA located below the main display area MA, hold-related information (hereinafter also referred to as first hold-related information) related to hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33, or Retention related information (hereinafter also referred to as second retention related information) related to reserving based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 is displayed. Specifically, in a game state (so-called normal state) in which it is substantially impossible for a game ball to enter the second starting port 34, the first suspension related information is displayed in the sub-area SA. On the other hand, in a game state (during a high-frequency support mode described later) in which it is easy for a game ball to enter the second starting port 34, the second hold related information is displayed in the sub-area SA. The normal state is a state in which the lottery mode is the low-probability mode and the support mode is the low-frequency support mode. Specific display contents of the first reservation related information and the second reservation related information will be described in detail later.

As shown in FIG. 553, a pair of nails 42 (42a, 42b) (so-called dead nails, umbilical nails) are provided above the first starting port 33. As shown in FIG. The probability of the game ball entering the first starting port 33 changes depending on the spacing between the pair of nails 42a and 42b.

<<12-2>> Electrical Configuration of Gaming Machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described using a block diagram.

FIG. 555 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 10 mainly includes a main controller 60 , a sound emission control device 90 , and a display control device 100 .

The main controller 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main game. The main control board 61 has an MPU 62 composed of elements having multiple functions. The MPU 62 includes a CPU (not shown) that executes various control programs, a ROM 63 that records various control programs and fixed value data, and temporarily stores various data when executing the programs recorded in the ROM 63. and a RAM 64, which is a memory for storing. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. A part of the functions of the MPU 62 may be provided by another element. Details of various areas provided in the ROM 63 and RAM 64 will be described later.

The main control board 61 is provided with an input port (not shown) and an output port (not shown). An input port of the main control board 61 is connected to a payout control device 70 and a power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in a power supply device 85 . The main control board 61 is supplied with stable 24 V DC power from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86 . The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power supply as an external power supply, and converts the external power supplied from the commercial power supply into the operating power required by the main control device 60, the payout control device 70, etc., to each device supply power. The power supply device 85 is equipped with a capacitor (not shown), and in the event of a power failure or the power switch 88 (FIG. 552) being turned off, continues power supply to each device for a predetermined period of time. do.

Various detection sensors 67 a to 67 e are connected to the input port of the main control board 61 . Specifically, it is connected to a plurality of detection sensors provided at various ball entry openings such as the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, the through gate 35, and the variable winning apparatus 36. . The MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether or not the game ball flowing down the game area PA enters each ball entrance based on the signals from the various detection sensors 67a to 67e, and determines whether the game ball enters the through gate. It is determined whether or not 35 has been passed. Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 and the second start port 34, and executes the electric accessory release lottery based on the entry of the ball into the through gate 35. do.

The output port of the main control board 61 is provided with a variable winning driving unit 36c that opens and closes the open/close door 36b of the variable winning device 36, and an electric accessory driving unit 34b that opens and closes the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34. , and the main display unit 45 are connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning driving section 36c so that the opening/closing door 36b is opened/closed. Further, as a result of the electric accessory opening lottery, when the electric role opening is won, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 34b so that the electric accessory 34a is released. In each game round, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b in the main display portion 45. FIG. Further, when the jackpot type is determined in the opening/closing execution mode and the number of round games to be executed in the opening/closing execution mode is determined, display control of the round display section 39 in the main display section 45 is executed.

An output port of the main control board 61 is connected with a payout control device 70 and a sound emission control device 90 . A prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 70 from the main control device 60 based on the winning judgment result, for example. When the main controller 60 transmits the prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63. FIG. Specifically, when entering the ball into the general winning hole 32 is specified, a winning ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is transmitted from the main controller 60, and the ball enters the first starting hole 33. is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is transmitted from the main controller 60, and when entering the second start port 34 is specified, one game ball is paid out A prize ball command corresponding to is transmitted from the main controller 60 . The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 based on the prize ball command received from the main controller 60 to pay out prize balls.

A discharge control device 80 is connected to the payout control device 70 . The shooting control device 80 controls shooting of the game ball shooting mechanism 81 . The game ball shooting mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined shooting conditions are met. Also, the operation handle 25 and the game ball shooting button 26 are connected to the shooting control device 80 .

The sound emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60 and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main controller 60 transmits various commands, the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63 is referred to. Details of these various commands are described later.

In addition, based on various commands received from the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90 controls the driving of various lamps 47 composed of light emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the front door frame 14, and the driving control of the speaker 46. and control the display control device 100 . In addition, the effect operation button 24 is connected to the sound emission control device 90, and when the effect operation button 24 is operated by the player at a predetermined timing, a game effect reflecting the operation is performed. It controls the various lamps 47, the speaker 46, the display control device 100, and the like.

The display control device 100 executes display control of the pattern display device 41 based on various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 . Specifically, the display control device 100, based on the various commands received from the sound emission control device 90, grasps the fluctuation time of the pattern in the pattern display device 41 and the type of combination of patterns to be finally stopped and displayed. , presence/absence of occurrence of ready-to-win, contents of ready-to-win effect, contents of notice effect to be executed in each game cycle, and the like are grasped. In this embodiment, the stop time, which is the time during which the combination of symbols is stopped and displayed, is constant. Therefore, by determining the variable time, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game, is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

FIG. 556 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used for a winning lottery or the like. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 sets the winning lottery, the setting of the display of the main display section 45, the setting of the pattern display of the pattern display device 41, and the like. Specifically, a winning random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery. A jackpot type counter C2 is used when sorting the jackpot types such as probability variable jackpot results and normal jackpot results. A ready-to-win random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not to generate a ready-to-win when the symbol row displayed on the symbol display device 41 is changed.

A random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. Further, when determining the variation time in the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b of the main display portion 45 and the symbol display device 41, a variation type counter CS is used. Furthermore, the electric accessory opening counter C4 is used for the electric accessory opening lottery for determining whether or not the electric accessory 34a of the second start port 34 is to be opened.

Each of the counters C1 to C4, CINI, and CS is a loop counter that adds 1 to the counter value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. FIG.

The RAM 64 is provided with a pending information storage area 64b and a determination processing execution area 64c. The reservation information storage area 64b is provided with a first reservation area Ra and a second reservation area Rb. In this embodiment, when the game ball enters the first start port 33, each value of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS at the timing of the ball entry is stored as pending information. It is stored chronologically in the first reserved area Ra of the area 64b. In the first reservation area Ra, there are four areas corresponding to the maximum number of game balls entered into the first starting port 33, that is, the first area, the second area, the third area, and the fourth area. area is provided. When the game ball enters the first start port 33, each value of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS at the timing of the ball is retained information (hereinafter, special 1 retained ), stored in one of the first to fourth areas. Which of the first to fourth areas is stored is determined by the order of ball entry, and the earlier the ball entry timing is, the higher the area (the first area is the highest area).

In addition, when the game ball enters the second start port 34, each value of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS at the timing of the ball entry is stored in the reservation information storage area 64b. It is stored chronologically in the second reservation area Rb. In the second reservation area Rb, there are four areas corresponding to the maximum number of game balls that have entered the second starting port 34, that is, the first area, the second area, the third area, and the fourth area. area is provided. When the game ball enters the second start port 34, each value of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS at the timing of the ball is retained information (hereinafter, special 2 retained ) is stored in one of the first to fourth areas. Which of the first to fourth areas is stored is determined by the order of ball entry, and the earlier the ball entry timing, the higher the area (the first area is the highest area).

Details of the winning random number counter C1 will be described. The winning random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery as described above. The winning random number counter C1 is, for example, configured to be incremented by one within the range of 0 to 1199 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Further, when the winning random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value=0 to 1199).

The hit random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and when the game ball enters the first start port 33, the updated value is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entry. When a game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entry.

The value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the first reservation area Ra is moved to the execution area AE of the judgment processing execution area 64c, and is collated with the success/failure table stored in the success/failure table storage area 63a of the ROM 63 to determine the jackpot. It is determined whether or not Also, the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the second reservation area Rb moves to the execution area AE of the judgment processing execution area 64c, and is compared with the success/failure table stored in the success/failure table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. It is determined whether or not it will be a big hit.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the first reservation area Ra is determined in the order in which the game ball enters the first start hole 33, and the determination process execution area Move to execution area AE of 64c. Specifically, the data stored in the first area of the first reservation area Ra is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c, and the data stored in the storage area of the first reservation area Ra is shifted. do. The data shift is to sequentially shift the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the upper area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area.

In addition, the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the second reservation area Rb moves to the execution area AE of the judgment processing execution area 64c in the order acquired by the game ball entering the second starting port 34. . Specifically, the data stored in the first area of the second reservation area Rb is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c, and the data stored in the storage area of the second reservation area Rb is shifted. do. The data shift is to sequentially shift the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the upper area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area.

When the value of the random number counter C1 is stored in the second reservation area Rb, regardless of whether the hit in the first reservation area Ra is stored or not, the value of the random number counter C1 is stored in the second reservation area Rb. The value of the stored winning random number counter C1 is to be moved to the execution area AE of the judgment processing execution area 64c. As a result, when the value of the random number counter C1 is stored in both the first reservation area Ra and the second reservation area Rb, the hit stored in the second reservation area Rb corresponding to the second starting port 34 Priority is given to the value of the random number counter C1. That is, in this embodiment, when the value of the random number counter C1 is stored in both the first reservation area Ra and the second reservation area Rb, it is stored in the second reservation area Rb corresponding to the second start port 34 The value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the second reservation area Rb is prioritized, and the data stored in the first area of the second reservation area Rb is determined among the values of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the second reservation area Rb. The data stored in the storage area of the second reservation area Rb is shifted to the processing execution area 64c. If the value of the hit random number counter C1 is not stored in the second reservation area Rb, among the values of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the first reservation area Ra, the first area of the first reservation area Ra A process of moving the stored data to the determination process execution area 64c and shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first reservation area Ra is executed.

In the above description, it is explained in what order the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb is moved to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c. However, it is not limited to the value of the winning random number counter C1, and counters other than the winning random number counter C1 stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb (jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fluctuation Each value of the type counter CS) is also moved to the execution area AE of the judgment processing execution area 64c in the same order.

Next, the details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining the jackpot type. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented one by one within the range of 0 to 99 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry when the game ball enters the first start port 33. When the game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the determination process execution area 64c. The jackpot type is determined using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in . Furthermore, the MPU 62 uses the value of the hit random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to determine the display mode of the segment display that is stopped and displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b. . The stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referred to for the determination.

Next, details of the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is used when determining whether or not a reach occurs when the result of the winning lottery is not a big win. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the first start port 33, and the second start port 34. It is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters. After the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first reservation area Ra is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c, it is compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63, occurs. After the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the second reservation area Rb is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c, it is compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63, and the reach occurs. However, when the result of the winning lottery is a big win and the game shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 determines the occurrence of reach regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

Reach means that, among a plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, there is a possibility that a combination of symbols corresponding to a big win may be established. It refers to a display state in which symbols are displayed in a stopped state, and symbols are variably displayed in the remaining symbol rows. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the combination of symbols corresponding to the big win refers to the combination of the same symbols on a predetermined pay line. As a specific example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a shown in FIG. A ready-to-win state is achieved by forming a ready-to-win line and performing variable display of symbols in the symbol row Z2 when the ready-to-win line is formed. Then, when a big win occurs, the same symbols as the symbols forming the reach line are stop-displayed in the symbol row Z2.

In addition, in the ready-to-win state, while the ready-to-win line is formed, the patterns are displayed in the remaining pattern rows in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen to create a ready-to-win effect. It includes a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a after displaying a combination of patterns in which a reach line is formed in a reduced size or not. In addition, when the ready-to-win effect is being performed or before the ready-to-win display is performed, the determination of whether or not to perform a notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character is performed using the reach-to-win random number counter C3 or other counters. may

Reach is classified into three types, normal reach, super reach, and special reach, depending on the content of reach performance. A ready-to-win performance with a higher expectation (reliability) for winning a big hit is executed in super reach than in normal reach, and a ready-to-win performance in which expectation for winning big win is higher in special reach than in super reach is executed.

Next, details of the fluctuation type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the variation time in the first symbol display portion 37 a and the second symbol display portion 37 b and the symbol variation time in the symbol display device 41 . The fluctuation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The variation type counter CS is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the first start port 33, and the second start port 34 It is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters. After moving to the determination processing execution area 64c, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the first reservation area Ra is changed when the variation display in the first symbol display unit 37a is started and when the symbol display device 41 starts variation of the symbol. used in determining the variation pattern in After moving to the determination processing execution area 64c, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the second reservation area Rb is changed at the start of the variation display in the second symbol display unit 37b and at the start of variation in the symbol by the symbol display device 41. used in determining the variation pattern in The variable time table stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is used when determining the variable time in the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to specify the content of the ready-to-win effect (that is, the type of ready-to-win) according to the type of variation pattern.

Next, the details of the electric accessory release counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory release counter C4 is, for example, configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 465 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated, and stored in the electric role holding area 64d of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the through gate 35. - 特許庁Then, at a predetermined timing, after the value of the electric role product open counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 64d moves to the electric role execution area 64e, the value of the electric role product open counter C4 is displayed in the electric role execution area 64e. A lottery (hereinafter referred to as an electric accessory open lottery) is performed as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to the open state. Specifically, in the electric role execution area 64e, the winning/failure table (electric role lottery winning/failure table) stored in the role lottery table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 and the value of the electric role lottery counter C4 are different. It is collated, and it is determined whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to the open state.

In addition, at least one of the acquired value of the winning random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, the variation type counter CS, and the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 is a special Corresponds to information. Also, at least one of the value of the winning random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the first reservation area Ra and the second reservation area Rb Also called pending information.

Next, the success/failure table will be described. The success/failure table is table data for matching with the winning random number counter C1 when a winning lottery is performed based on the winning random number counter C1. A low-probability mode and a high-probability mode are set in the pachinko machine 10 as a lottery mode for a winning lottery. In the winning lottery in the probability mode, the success/failure table for the high probability mode is referred to. High-probability mode (also called high-probability gaming state) is a gaming state that is started by winning a variable probability jackpot, and the probability of winning a jackpot in a winning lottery is relatively higher than the low-probability mode. To tell.

FIG. 557 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the success/failure table. FIG. 557(a) shows the success/failure table for the low-probability mode (for the low-probability mode), and FIG. 557(b) shows the success/failure table for the high-probability mode.

As shown in FIG. 557(a), five values from 0 to 4 are set in the success/failure table for the low-probability mode as the value of the winning random number counter C1 for the big win. Of the values from 0 to 1199, the values (5 to 1199) other than the five values from 0 to 4 are outliers. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 557(b), 16 values from 0 to 15 are set as values of the winning random number counter C1 for the high probability mode in the success/failure table. Of the values from 0 to 1199, the values (16 to 1199) other than the 16 values from 0 to 15 are outliers. In this way, the high-probability mode has a higher probability of winning a big win in the winning lottery than the low-probability mode.

Further, in the present embodiment, the value group of the winning random number counter C1 set as the jackpot in the win/fail table for the low-probability mode is the value of the win random number counter C1 set as the jackpot in the win/fail table for the high-probability mode. included in the group. However, as long as the probability of winning a big win in the high-probability mode is higher than in the low-probability mode as a result of the winning lottery, the number and value of the random numbers set as the big wins are arbitrary.

It should be noted that a "small win" may be provided as a result of the winning lottery, although it is not used in the win/fail table in this embodiment.

A "minor win" is a success/fail result that triggers a transition to the opening/closing execution mode in which the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is executed, but does not trigger a transition for both the lottery mode and the support mode. . On the other hand, "miss" is a pass/fail result that does not trigger the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, nor does it trigger the transition to the lottery mode and the support mode.

Next, the jackpot type will be described. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set in the pachinko machine 10. - 特許庁Specifically, for example, by providing differences in the following three aspects or modes, it is possible to set a plurality of types of jackpots.
(1) Aspect of opening/closing control of variable winning device 36 in opening/closing execution mode (2) Lottery mode for winning lottery after completion of opening/closing execution mode (3) Electric accessory 34a of second start port 34 after completion of opening/closing execution mode Support mode

In the pachinko machine 10, as an aspect of the opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the above-mentioned (1) opening/closing execution mode, the occurrence of winning balls to the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode. A high-frequency winning mode and a low-frequency winning mode can be set so that the frequencies are relatively high and low. For example, in the high frequency winning mode, the opening and closing door 36b is opened and closed multiple times (for example, 16 times) from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode. It can be set to continue until the number of hit balls reaches 10. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening and closing door 36b is opened and closed twice from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode, and one opening is until 0.2 sec passes or the ball enters the opening and closing door 36b. It can be set to continue until the number reaches six.

When the operation handle 25 is operated by the player, the game ball shooting mechanism 81 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is shot toward the game area PA every 0.6 sec. In the case of the above specific example, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of the opening/closing door 36b is 0.2 sec. In other words, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of the open/close door 36b is shorter than the shooting cycle of the game ball. Therefore, in the opening and closing execution mode related to the low-frequency winning mode, substantially no game balls enter. However, even in the opening and closing execution mode related to the low-frequency winning mode, it may be set so that the game ball can enter.

The number of times of opening and closing the opening/closing door 36b, the limit time for one opening, and the limit number of openings for one opening are determined by the variable winning device 36 during the period from the start of the opening/closing execution mode to the end of the opening/closing execution mode. As long as the frequency of ball occurrence is higher in the high-frequency winning mode than in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening mode of the opening/closing door 36b is arbitrary. Specifically, if the high frequency winning mode has more opening and closing times than the low frequency winning mode, the opening limit time for one opening is longer, or the opening limit number for one opening is set more good. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, in the open/close execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode, substantially no winning ball to the variable winning device 36 may occur.

The pachinko machine 10 has a high-probability mode in which a winning lottery is performed using a high-probability win-or-fail table as a win-or-fail table, and a win-fail table as a win-or-fail table. A low-probability mode in which a winning lottery is performed using a low-probability success/failure table can be set. As described with reference to FIG. 557, when a winning lottery is performed using a high-probability success/failure table, a winning lottery is more likely to be won than when a winning lottery is performed using a low-probability success/failure table. likely to.

In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of the support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the end of the above-mentioned (3) opening and closing execution mode, shooting of game balls continues in a similar mode to the game area PA. A high-frequency support mode and a low-frequency support mode are selected so that the frequency of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 being in the open state per unit time is relatively high or low when compared in the situation where can be set.

Specifically, the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode have different probabilities of winning the electric role open lottery in the electric role item opening lottery using the electric role item opening counter C4. In the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role open lottery in the electric accessory open lottery is made higher than in the low frequency support mode. In addition, in the high-frequency support mode, the opening time of the electric accessory 34a may be set longer than in the low-frequency support mode when the electric role opening winning is won.

Although not adopted in the present embodiment, in the high-frequency support mode, the number of times the electric accessory 34a is in the open state when the electric accessory 34a is elected is set to be greater than in the low-frequency support mode. good too. Furthermore, it may be configured such that the electric accessory 34a is set to have a long opening time once. Also, in the high-frequency support mode, when the open state of the electric accessory 34a occurs multiple times due to the electric role open winning, the closing time from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state is , may be set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the time secured from one electric accessory open lottery to the next electric accessory open lottery is set to be relatively shorter than in the low-frequency support mode. may

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of a ball entering the second starting port 34 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. That is, the high-frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary game state that assists establishment of special information acquisition conditions.

In the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won as a result of the winning lottery, the jackpot type is sorted using the jackpot type counter C2. The distribution of the jackpot types corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63 as a distribution table.

FIG. 558 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table. FIG. 558(a) shows the distribution table for the first start port, and FIG. 558(b) shows the distribution table for the second start port. The distribution table for the first start port is referred to during a winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33, and the distribution table for the second start port is referred to the second start port 34. It is referred to during the winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball.

As shown in the distribution table for the first start port in FIG. 558(a), the distribution table for the first start port includes, as jackpot types based on the entry of a game ball into the first start port 33, A 16R probability variable jackpot, an 8R probability variable jackpot, a 16R normal jackpot, and an 8R normal jackpot are set.

In the 16R probability variable jackpot and the 8R probability variable jackpot, the mode of opening and closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode, and the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the end of the opening and closing execution mode (hereinafter simply “lottery mode”). ) is a high-probability mode, and the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode is a high-frequency support mode. The difference between the 16R variable variable jackpot and the 8R variable variable jackpot is that the number of openings of the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode is different, the 16R variable variable jackpot is 16 times (16 rounds), and the 8R variable variable jackpot is 8. times (8 rounds).

In the 16R normal jackpot and the 8R normal jackpot, the mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode, the lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends is the low-probability mode, and the opening/closing execution mode is selected. It is a jackpot in which the support mode after the end is the high-frequency support mode. The difference between the 16R normal jackpot and the 8R normal jackpot is that the number of openings of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is different, the 16R normal jackpot is 16 times (16 rounds), and the 8R normal jackpot is 8 times. times (8 rounds).

In the distribution table for the first start port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 99", "0 to 39" corresponds to the 16R probability variable jackpot, and "40 to 64" corresponds to the 8R probability variable jackpot. , "65 to 89" corresponds to the 16R normal jackpot, and "90 to 99" corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, four types of jackpots are set as the types of jackpots. Therefore, the aspect of the jackpot is diversified. When these four types of jackpots are compared, the degree of advantage for the player is the highest for the 16R variable variable jackpot, the next highest for the 8R variable variable jackpot, followed by the 16R normal jackpot, and finally the 8R normal jackpot. By thus setting a plurality of types of jackpots with different degrees of advantage for the player, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous and increase the degree of attention to the game.

As shown in the distribution table for the second starting port in FIG. A 16R probability variable jackpot and an 8R normal jackpot are set. In the distribution table for the second start port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 99", "0 to 64" corresponds to the 16R probability variable jackpot, and "65 to 99" corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot. corresponds to

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won, the type of jackpot is distributed based on the ball entering the first start port 33 and when the jackpot is won. It is different from the case of winning a jackpot based on the entry of the ball into the starting hole 34, and a clear difference is provided in the advantage for the player.

In addition, when the winning lottery results in a loss, the mode is not changed to the opening/closing execution mode, and the lottery mode and the support mode are not changed. In the distribution of the types of jackpots, in the case of a 16 probability variable jackpot or an 8R probability variable jackpot, as described above, the lottery mode after the end of the opening and closing execution mode becomes a high probability mode, but this high probability mode The state is continued until the next big win is won in the winning lottery.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, and the jackpot type using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. However, the MPU 62 further uses the value of the winning random number counter C1 and the value of the big winning type counter C2 to stop and display the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b. Determine the display mode. The stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referred to for the determination.

FIG. 559 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the success/failure table (electric accessary product open lottery success/failure table) used when executing the electric accessary product open lottery.

FIG. 559(a) shows a success/failure table (for low-frequency support mode) for electric accessory open lottery used in low-frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 559(a), in the electric accessory open lottery success/failure table (for low frequency support mode), there are two values of 0 and 1 for the electric accessory open counter C4 that will win the electric role open winning. A value is set. 464 values from 2 to 465 are set as the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4 to be out. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 in the low-frequency support mode and the electric accessary item open lottery is executed, the electric role open lottery is won with a probability of 1/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric role opening win is made in the low-frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.4 seconds.

FIG. 559(b) shows a success/failure table for electric accessory open lottery (for high frequency support mode) used in high frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 559(b), in the success/failure table for electric accessary item open lottery (for high frequency support mode), 462 values of 0 to 461 are set as the value of the electric accessary item open counter C4 that becomes the electric accession winning. A value is set. Four values of 462 to 465 are set as the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4 that is out. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 in the high-frequency support mode and the electric accessory open lottery is executed, the electric role open lottery is won with a probability of 231/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric role opening win is made in the high-frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.6 seconds.

In this way, the success/failure table for the electric accessory open lottery is set so that the high-frequency support mode has a higher probability of the game ball entering the second start port 34 than the low-frequency support mode. .

<<12-3>> Electrical Configuration of Audio Light Emitting Control Device and Display Control Device:
Next, electrical configurations of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 560 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. FIG. A part of the configuration such as the power supply device 85 (FIG. 555) is omitted. An MPU 92 is mounted on an audio emission control board 91 provided in the audio emission control device 90 . The MPU 92 is a device containing a CPU, a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like.

The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables, and the like. For example, part of the area of the ROM 93 is provided with an effect pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like. Details of these will be described later.

The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the ROM 93 . For example, a part of the area of the RAM 94 is provided with various flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, and the like. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 92, and they may be individually integrated into chips.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port. The input side of the MPU 92 is connected to the main control device 60 and the effect operation button 24 . Various commands are received from the main controller 60 . A speaker 46 and various lamps 47 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92, and the display control device 100 is also connected.

The display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102, which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are combined, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. is installed. It is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 102, and they may be individually integrated into chips.

The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, generate internal commands for the VDP 105). .

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and also stores JPEG format image data for background images.

A work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when various programs are executed by the MPU 102 .

The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the pattern display device 41 . The VDP 105 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is an IC chip, and is a kind of microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, etc., and intervenes in the reading and writing of data.

The character ROM 106 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as designs and pictures displayed on the design display device 41 . The character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display patterns and display pictures, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 106 . It is also possible to configure the character ROM 106 to store the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 .

The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 41. By rewriting the content of the video RAM 107, the display content of the pattern display device 41 is changed.

Hereinafter, the MPU 62, ROM 63, and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main MPU 62, main ROM 63, and main RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the sound emission control device 90 are referred to as the sound and light side MPU 92 and the sound and light side, respectively. The ROM 93 and the sound/light side RAM 94 are also called, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also called the display side MPU 102 .

<<12-4>> Outline of Processing by Gaming Machine:
Next, an overview of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described.

<<12-4-1>> Hold display:
In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as described above, in the sub-area SA located below the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, the game ball enters the first start hole 33, and the game ball enters the first start hole 33. Related first suspension related information or second suspension related information related to suspension based on entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 is displayed. Specifically, in a game state (so-called normal state) in which it is substantially impossible for a game ball to enter the second starting port 34, the first suspension related information is displayed in the sub-area SA. On the other hand, in the gaming state (during high-frequency support mode) in which it is easy for the game ball to enter the second starting port 34, the second pending relationship information is displayed in the sub-region SA.

FIG. 561 is an explanatory diagram showing the display surface 41a on which the first reservation related information is displayed in the sub-area SA. In the normal state, an unexecuted pending display area Dh, a varying active pending display area Dy, and an already executed pending display area Dz are displayed in the sub-region SA as the first pending related information. The variable execution pending display area Dy is displayed in the center in the horizontal direction of the display surface 41a, the unexecuted pending display area Dh is displayed on the right side of the variable active pending display area Dy, and the already executed pending display area Dz is variable execution. It is displayed on the left side of the reserved display area Dy.

The unexecuted reservation display area Dh is composed of unit areas Dh1 to Dh4 of the number corresponding to the maximum number of game balls that have entered the first start hole 33 (ie four). The unit areas Dh1 to Dh4 are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction of the display surface 41a. Hereinafter, the leftmost unit area Dh1 (closest to the variable execution pending display area Dy) will be referred to as the first non-execution pending display area Dh1, and the unit area Dh2 located second from the leftmost to the right side will be referred to as The unit area Dh3 positioned third from the leftmost to the right is called a second unexecuted pending display area Dh2, and the unit area Dh3 positioned farthest to the right is called a third unexecuted pending display area Dh3. This area is called execution pending display area Dh4.

Each of the first to fourth unexecuted suspension display areas Dh1 to Dh4 has a rectangular icon, and above the icon, an unexecuted suspension corresponding to suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 A display icon H can be displayed. The non-execution suspension display icon is suspension display information corresponding to suspension based on the entry of a game ball into the first start port 33 and not yet transferred to execution of winning lottery. In this embodiment, the unexecuted pending display icon H is circular. Each time a game ball enters the first start port 33, the unexecuted reservation display icon H increases one by one from the first unexecuted reservation display area Dh1 toward the fourth unexecuted reservation display area Dh4. Is displayed. The number of unexecuted reservation display icons H indicates the number of reservations based on the number of game balls entered into the first start port 33 .

The variable execution suspension display area Dy includes a trapezoidal icon whose upper base is longer than the lower base, and above the trapezoidal icon, a variation corresponding to the suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 An execution pending display icon Y can be displayed. The change execution suspension display icon Y is suspension display information corresponding to suspension during execution of a winning lottery, which is suspension based on entry of a game ball into the first start opening 33 . In this embodiment, the variable execution suspension display icon Y is a hexagon. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a winning lottery is performed with the ball entering the first start hole 33 as a trigger, and a variable display for informing the result of the winning lottery is performed, and this variable display is started. At this timing, the change-execution suspension display icon Y is displayed in the change-execution suspension display area Dy. This variable display is based on the suspension (suspension information) corresponding to the variable execution suspension display icon Y displayed in the variation execution suspension display area Dy. The player knows that the suspension corresponding to the variable execution suspension display icon Y is completed by observing that the variation execution suspension display icon Y is displayed in the variation execution suspension display area Dy. be able to.

The already-executed pending display area Dz is an area capable of displaying pending display information corresponding to the game round after execution of the variable game in the game round, that is, after execution of the game round operation. In this embodiment, the execution pending display area Dz is composed of four unit areas Dz1 to Dz4. The unit areas Dz1 to Dz4 are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction of the display surface 41a. Hereinafter, the unit area Dz1 located on the rightmost side (closer to the variable execution pending display area Dy) will be referred to as the first executed pending display area Dz1, and the unit area Dz2 located second from the rightmost side to the left side. The unit area Dz3 positioned third from the rightmost to the left is called a second executed pending display area Dz2, and the unit area Dz3 positioned farthest to the left is called a third executed pending display area Dz3. This area is called execution pending display area Dz4.

Each of the first to fourth execution suspension display areas Dz1 to Dz4 is provided with a rectangular icon, and inside the rectangular icon, an existing game ball corresponding to the suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 is displayed. An execution pending display icon Z can be displayed. According to the first to fourth execution pending display areas Dz1 to Dz4, the executed pending display icon Z corresponding to the suspension in which the variable display and stop display are completed is displayed. The suspension corresponding to the already-executed suspension display icon Z displayed in the first already-executed suspension display area Dz1 is one more than the suspension corresponding to the variable execution suspension display icon Y displayed in the variable execution suspension display area Dy. Suspension (suspension information) that has been executed before, and the suspension (suspension information) that is executed one by one from the first execution suspension display area Dz1 to the fourth execution suspension display area Dz4. is displayed.

FIG. 562 is an explanatory diagram showing how the unexecuted pending display area Dh, the varying active pending display area Dy, and the executed pending display area Dz change as the game progresses. FIG. 562(a) shows the state during the variable display, FIG. 562(b) shows the state after the stop of the variable, and FIG. 562(c) shows the state during the next variable display. It changes in order of FIG.562(a), FIG.562(b), and FIG.562(c).

In the example shown in FIG. 562(a), the first unexecuted pending display icon H corresponding to the first pending is displayed in the first unexecuted pending display area Dh1 in the unexecuted pending display area Dh. A second unexecuted suspension display icon H corresponding to the second suspension is displayed in the second unexecuted suspension display area Dh2. A change execution pending display icon Y is displayed in the change execution pending display area Dy. Four already-executed pending display icons Z are displayed in the already-executed pending display area Dz. As described above, the already-executed pending display area Dz is an area capable of displaying pending display information corresponding to the game round after execution of the variable game in the game round is completed, that is, after execution of the game round operation. be. The variable display is based on the suspension (suspension information) corresponding to the variable execution suspension display icon Y displayed in the variation execution suspension display area Dy.

When the variation is stopped and displayed from the variable display state shown in FIG. The variable execution suspension display icon Y displayed in the execution suspension display area Dy moves (shifts) to the first execution suspension display area Dz1 of the execution suspension display area Dz. That is, the variable execution pending display icon Y is displayed in the variable execution pending display area Dy until the variation stops, and at the timing when the next variable display is started, the first execution pending display icon Y is displayed in the already executed pending display area Dz. Move (shift) to the display area Dz1. At this time, the execution pending display icon Z displayed in the first execution pending display area Dz1 is moved (shifted) to the second execution pending display area Dz2 and displayed in the second execution pending display area Dz2. The already-executed-suspended display icon Z is moved (shifted) to the third already-executed-suspended display area Dz3, and the already-executed-suspended display icon Z displayed in the third already-executed-suspended display area Dz3 is moved to the fourth already-executed-suspended display. It moves (shifts) to the area Dz4, and the already-executed pending display icon Z displayed in the fourth already-executed pending display area Dz4 disappears. Further, the unexecuted pending display icon H displayed in the first unexecuted pending display area Dh1 is moved (shifted) to the variable active pending display area Dy, and the unexecuted pending display icon H displayed in the second unexecuted pending display area Dh2. The execution pending display icon H moves (shifts) to the first unexecuted pending display area Dh1. In the example shown in FIG. 562(b), there is no unexecuted pending display icon H displayed in the third unexecuted pending display area Dh3 and the fourth unexecuted pending display area Dh4. , the unexecuted pending display icon H displayed in the third unexecuted pending display area Dh3 moves (shifts) to the second unexecuted pending display area Dh2, and the unexecuted pending display icon H displayed in the fourth unexecuted pending display area Dh4 The pending display icon H moves (shifts) to the third unexecuted pending display area Dh3.

As a result of the movement shown in FIG. 562(b), the state shown in FIG. 562(c) is obtained. That is, only one unexecuted pending display icon H is displayed in the unexecuted pending display area Dh. In the variable execution pending display area Dy, the unexecuted pending display icon H displayed in the first unexecuted pending display area Dh1 in the states of FIGS. Y is displayed. In the first execution pending display area Dz1 in the already executed pending display area Dz, the variable execution pending display icon displayed in the variable execution pending display area Dy in the state of FIGS. 562(a) and 562(b) Y is displayed as an already-executed pending display icon Z. In the second to fourth execution pending display areas Dz2 to Dz4 in the execution pending display area Dz, the first to third execution pending display areas Dz1 to Dz3 are displayed in the states shown in FIGS. , is displayed. As described above, the already-executed pending display area Dz is an area capable of displaying pending display information corresponding to the game round after execution of the variable game in the game round is completed, that is, after execution of the game round operation. be.

As described above, each time the variable display and stop display corresponding to one game round are executed, each unexecuted pending display icon H displayed in the unexecuted pending display area Dh moves from right to left. Then, it moves from the leftmost first non-execution suspension display area Dh1 to the variable execution suspension display area Dy. Then, variable display and stop display for notifying the result of the winning lottery based on the pending information corresponding to the variable execution pending display icon Y displayed in the variable active pending display area Dy are executed. Thereafter, the variable execution pending display icon Y displayed in the variable execution pending display area Dy moves to the already executed pending display area Dz. In the already-executed-suspended display area Dz, the already-executed-suspended display icon Z moves from right to left, and disappears after passing the fourth already-executed-suspended display area Dz4.

Although the unexecuted pending display icon H displayed in the unexecuted pending display area Dh has a circular shape as described above, it may be replaced with a polygonal shape such as a triangle, quadrangle, or pentagon. may be Further, the variable execution pending display icon Y displayed in the variable execution pending display area Dy and the already executed pending display icon Z displayed in the already executed pending display area Dz are hexagonal as described above. However, other polygonal shapes such as triangles, quadrilaterals, pentagons, octagons, or circles may be used instead. Although the unexecuted pending display icon H, the variable active pending display icon Y, and the executed pending display icon Z have different shapes, they may have the same shape. Furthermore, the unexecuted pending display icon H, the variable active pending display icon Y, and the executed pending display icon Z are not limited to graphic images, and may be images of characters or the like. Further, in the present embodiment, the variable execution pending display icon Y and the execution pending display icon Z having the same shape are displayed in the variable execution pending display area Dy and the already executed pending display area Dz. Alternatively, the variable execution pending display icon Y displayed in the variable execution pending display area Dy and the already executed pending display icon Z displayed in the already executed pending display area Dz may have different shapes.

FIG. 563 is an explanatory diagram showing the display surface 41a on which the second reservation related information is displayed in the sub-area SA. During the high-frequency support mode, an unexecuted pending display area Eh and a varying active pending display area Ey are displayed in the sub-area SA as the second pending related information. The unexecuted pending display area Eh and the variable active pending display area Ey are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction of the display surface 41a, and the unexecuted pending display area Eh is displayed on the right side of the variable active pending display area Ey. That is, the second pending relationship information has a configuration that does not have a configuration corresponding to the already-executed pending display area Dz compared to the first pending related information displayed in FIG. However, as the second pending related information, the already-executed pending display area Dz may be displayed on the display surface 41a.

The unexecuted reservation display area Eh is composed of unit areas Eh1 to Eh4 of the number corresponding to the maximum number of game balls that have entered the second starting port 34 (ie four). The unit areas Eh1 to Eh4 are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction of the display surface 41a. Hereinafter, the leftmost unit area Eh1 (closest to the variable execution pending display area Ey) will be referred to as a first non-execution pending display area Eh1, and the unit area Eh2 located second from the leftmost to the right side. The unit area Eh3 located third from the leftmost to the right is called the third unexecuted pending display area Eh3, and the rightmost unit area Eh4 is called the fourth unexecuted pending display area Eh2. This area is called execution pending display area Eh4.

Each of the first to fourth unexecuted suspension display areas Eh1 to Eh4 has a rectangular icon, and above the icon, an unexecuted suspension corresponding to suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 34 A display icon HX can be displayed. The non-execution suspension display icon is a suspension display icon corresponding to suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 and not yet transferred to the execution of the winning lottery. In this embodiment, the unexecuted pending display icon HX is circular. Each time a game ball enters the second starting port 34, the unexecuted reservation display icon HX is increased by one from the first unexecuted reservation display area Eh1 toward the fourth unexecuted reservation display area Eh4. Is displayed. The number of unexecuted pending display icons HX indicates the number of pending game balls entered into the second starting port 34 .

The variable execution suspension display area Ey includes a trapezoidal icon whose upper base is longer than the lower base, and above the trapezoidal icon, a variation corresponding to the suspension based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 34 An execution pending display icon YX can be displayed. The change-execution suspension display icon YX is a suspension display icon that is based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34 and corresponds to suspension during execution of a winning lottery. In the present embodiment, the variable execution suspension display icon YX is a hexagon. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a winning lottery is performed with the ball entering the second start hole 34 as a trigger, and a variable display for informing the result of the winning lottery is performed, and this variable display is started. At this timing, the change-execution suspension display icon YX is displayed in the change-execution suspension display area Ey. This variable display is based on the suspension (suspension information) corresponding to the variable execution suspension display icon YX displayed in the variation execution suspension display area Ey. The player knows that the suspension corresponding to the variable execution suspension display icon YX is completed by observing that the variation execution suspension display icon YX is displayed in the variation execution suspension display area Ey. be able to.

<<12-4-2>> Suspended change notice effect:
The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in order to increase the player's expectation for the hold information corresponding to each hold display icon (that is, the hold information stored in the hold information storage area 64b of the RAM 64), The value of the included winning random number counter C1 is confirmed before it becomes an object of the winning lottery, and based on the confirmed result, a performance that gives the player a sense of expectation, so-called look-ahead performance is performed. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment changes the display color of each pending display icon from the default color (for example, white) to another color as one of the look-ahead effects, so that the pending display icon whose display color has changed A pending change notice effect (hereinafter also simply referred to as “holding change notice”) suggesting the degree of expectation (reliability) of jackpot winning for the corresponding pending information is executed. In this embodiment, it is configured to execute the reservation change notice by the reservation information (hereinafter also referred to as special 1 reservation information) based on the entry of the game ball to the first start port 33, and the game ball to the second start port 34 The holding change notice by the holding information (hereinafter also referred to as special 2 holding information) based on the entry of the ball is not executed. In addition, as a modified example, both the reservation change notice by the special 1 hold information and the hold change notice by the special 2 hold information may be executed. In this embodiment, the display color of the unexecuted pending display icon H displayed in the unexecuted pending display area Dh is changed by the pending change notice.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the display colors of the unexecuted pending display icon H and the variable active pending display icon Y located in the variable active pending display area Dy are white as the default color and blue. , green, and red, and are associated in this order with four levels from low to high expectations (reliability) of winning a jackpot in a winning lottery. That is, the degree of expectation for winning a jackpot to be associated is lowest in white as a display color, higher in blue than white, higher in green than blue, and highest in red. In other words, according to the pending change notice, the unexecuted pending display icon H or the variable active pending display icon Y located in the variable active pending display area Dy (hereinafter referred to as the unexecuted pending display icon H and the variable active pending display icon Y is collectively referred to as pending display icons H and Y). If the display color of the icon is white, which is the default color, the expectation of winning the jackpot is low. When the display color changes to green, the expectation of winning a big win is higher than when it is blue, and when the display color changes to red, the expectation of winning a big win is higher than when it is green. The number of times that one pending display icon H, Y changes is not limited to one time, but may be multiple times. The timing of the change is any timing from when the game ball enters the first starting port 33 to the end of the variable display (for example, after a predetermined time after the start of the variable display). is also possible. When the holding change notice changes the holding display icons H, Y to a display color with a high expectation of winning the big win, the player's expectation for winning the big win can be improved, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Specifically, the pending change notice is executed as follows. The main control device 60 executes the first determination process each time a game ball enters the first start port 33, and determines the success or failure of the winning lottery based on the reservation information of the special 1 reservation stored by the current ball entry. , determination of the type of jackpot, determination of presence/absence of ready-to-win occurrence, determination of the type of variation pattern, etc. are performed before the reservation information is subject to winning lottery by the main controller 60.例文帳に追加The determination of the type of variation pattern is performed based on the variation time obtained by obtaining the variation time based on the value of the variation type counter CS included in the reservation information. After that, main controller 60 sets the determination result of the previous determination process as a hold command, and transmits the hold command to sound emission control device 90 .

The sound emission control device 90 receives the hold command, and from the hold command, specifies the result of winning lottery, the type of big win, the presence or absence of ready-to-win production, and the content of ready-to-win effect. The content of reach production can be specified from the type of variation pattern. After that, the sound emission control device 90 performs a lottery to determine whether or not to execute the hold change notice, based on the specified success or failure result of the winning lottery and the acquired hold change notice random number. The lottery is performed based on a pending change notice execution lottery table (not shown) in which the result of winning lottery and the pending change notice random number are associated with whether or not the hold change notice is executed. That is, whether or not to execute the pending change notice is determined by referring to the pending change notice execution lottery table and based on the result of winning lottery and the obtained pending change notice random number. In addition to the success or failure result of the winning lottery, a lottery may be made to determine whether or not the pending change notice is executed with respect to the content of the ready-to-win effect. At this time, in normal reach, which is classified according to the content of the reach production, the execution probability of the pending change notice is set low, and in super reach, which is classified according to the content of the reach production, the execution probability of the hold change notice is set to medium, and the reach production is performed. It is preferable to set a high execution probability of the pending change notice in the special reaches classified according to the contents of . By setting in this way, it becomes easier for a reach with a higher expectation of winning a jackpot to execute the pending change notice.

When it is decided to execute the hold change notice based on the lottery, the voice light emission control device 90 changes the display color pattern of the unexecuted hold display icon H for the special 1 hold accumulated by the current ball entry. (hereinafter referred to as a pending change pattern) is determined by lottery. This holding change pattern lottery is based on a hold change pattern lottery table in which a hold change pattern random number described later is associated with a plurality of hold change patterns prepared in advance for each type of reach classified according to the content of the reach effect. done on the basis of The hold change pattern lottery table is prepared in advance for each reference condition specified by the winning lottery success/failure result and the number of special 1 holds accumulated by the current ball entry, and the sound emission control device 90 performs the winning lottery. Based on the success or failure result and the number of the special 1 suspensions, identify the pending change pattern lottery table to be referenced, refer to the specified pending change pattern lottery table, and the type of reach specified from the pending command and the acquired A pending change pattern corresponding to the pending change pattern random number is determined.

FIG. 564 is an explanatory diagram exemplifying a reservation change pattern lottery table for reference conditions such that the special 1 reservation number accumulated by the current entry is 2 and the win lottery result is a jackpot lottery. As illustrated, according to the hold change pattern lottery table, a plurality of hold change patterns (hereinafter also referred to as hold change scenarios) are prepared in advance for each type of reach, and hold change patterns for each hold change pattern A random number is associated. The pending change scenario defines the change pattern of the display colors of the pending display icons H and Y corresponding to the special 1 pending, and is displayed in the non-execution pending display area Dh to the variable executing pending display area Dy. It shows how the display colors of the pending display icons H and Y are changed within the range of . For example, if the reach type is "normal reach" and the hold change pattern random number is "10 to 19", the second hold change scenario corresponds to the second hold (special 1 hold 2) White is determined as the display color of the unexecuted suspension display icon H, and blue is determined as the display color of the first unexecuted suspension display icon H corresponding to the first suspension (special 1 suspension 1), and the variable display is performed. Blue is defined as the display color of the variable execution suspension display icon Y corresponding to suspension (special 1 suspension 0) that is being executed. If the type of reach is "super reach" and the pending change pattern random number is "10 to 19", the second pending change corresponding to the second pending (special 1 pending 2) as a pending change scenario Blue is determined as the display color of the execution suspension display icon H, and green is determined as the display color of the first non-execution suspension display icon H corresponding to the first suspension (special 1 suspension 1). Green is set as the display color of the variable execution suspension display icon Y corresponding to the suspension being executed (special 1 suspension 0). If the type of reach is "special reach" and the pending change pattern random number is "10 to 19", the second pending corresponding to the second pending (special 1 pending 2) as a pending change scenario Green is determined as the display color of the execution suspension display icon H, and red is determined as the display color of the first non-execution suspension display icon H corresponding to the first suspension (Special 1 suspension 1). Red is set as the display color of the variable execution suspension display icon Y corresponding to the suspension being executed (special 1 suspension 0).

The above display color setting mode is such that the last display color set in each pending change scenario, that is, the display color of Special 1 Hold 0, is the same as the display color of the hold display icons H and Y described above and the expectation of winning the jackpot. It is determined to be in accordance with the relationship between high and low degrees. It should be noted that the final display color set in all of the pending change scenarios does not necessarily have to conform to the relationship, and may conform to the relationship as a whole. For example, it does not preclude the existence of pending change scenarios that result in green for normal reach, where the odds of winning a jackpot are relatively low.

A holding change pattern lottery table having such a configuration is provided for each reference condition. That is, in addition to the pending change pattern lottery table shown in FIG. 564, the following pending change pattern lottery table for reference conditions is prepared.
・For reference conditions where the number of special 1 reservations is 2 and the winning lottery result is out ・For reference conditions where the number of special 1 reservations is 1 and the result of the winning lottery is a jackpot winning is 1, the number of special 1 reservations for the reference condition that the winning lottery result is out is 3, and the number of special 1 reservations for the reference condition that the winning lottery result is a big win is 3, The number of reserved special 1 for the reference condition that the success or failure result of the winning lottery is out is 4, and the number of reserved special 1 for the reference condition that the success or failure result of the winning lottery is a big win is 4, and the success or failure result of the winning lottery for reference conditions that are outliers

Collecting all the pending change pattern lottery tables for each of these reference conditions and calculating the probability of winning the jackpot according to the display colors of the pending display icons H and Y, white is the lowest, blue is higher than white, and green is higher than blue. High, with red being the highest. In other words, each of the pending change pattern lottery tables by reference conditions, when all are collected, has the lowest probability of winning a jackpot in white, higher in blue than white, higher in green than blue, and highest in red. The content of the pending change scenario is set as follows. As a result, when the display color of the pending display icons H and Y is white, the player has a low expectation of winning a big win, and when the display color changes to blue, the expectation of winning a big win is white. When the display color changes to green, the expectation of winning a big win is higher than in the case of blue, and when the display color changes to red, the expectation of winning a big win is higher than in the case of green.

FIG. 565 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of change in display color due to pending change notice. FIG. 565(a) shows the variable display of special 1 suspension (suspension information) corresponding to the variable execution suspension display icon Y displayed in the variation execution suspension display area Dy, and FIG. 565(b) shows the next game FIG. 565(c) shows the variable display of the next next game round. It changes in order of FIG.565(a), FIG.565(b), and FIG.565(c).

During the variable display shown in FIG. 565 (a), when the game ball enters the first start port 33, the number of reservations for the special 1 reservation stored by the entry is 2, and the winning lottery A case where the win/fail result is a jackpot win will be described. In this case, when winning the lottery for whether or not to execute the hold change notice, the hold change pattern lottery table shown in FIG. 564 is referred to. Here, if it is specified that it is super reach from the hold command, and the acquired hold change pattern random number is 10, the lottery result of the hold change pattern is the second stage of super reach (marked with * in the figure) Section 2) will be the pending change scenario described in Section 2). According to this reservation change scenario, since the display color of the second non-execution reservation display icon H corresponding to Special 1 reservation 2 is blue, the game ball enters the first start port 33, and the first When the unexecuted pending display icon H is displayed in the second unexecuted pending display area Dh2, the display color is blue. In addition, "blue", "green", and "white" in the figure are for convenience to indicate display colors. ”, “green”, “white”, etc. are not displayed.

Subsequently, during the variable display of the next game round shown in FIG. 565(b), the unexecuted pending display icon H displayed in the second unexecuted pending display area Dh2 in FIG. Although it is shifted to the unexecuted pending display area Dh1, the display color of the unexecuted pending display icon H at the timing of the shift (that is, the timing at which the variable display is started) is obtained by lottery of pending change patterns. It changes to green according to the recorded contents of the special 1 hold 1 column of the hold change scenario described above (see the column marked with * in the figure). In this way, by changing the display color of the unexecuted pending display icon H displayed in the unexecuted pending display area Dh from blue to green, the jackpot winning for the pending information corresponding to the unexecuted pending display icon H is determined. It is possible to suggest to the player that the degree of expectation (reliability) is the considerably higher one of the four levels described above.

Subsequently, during the variable display of the next next game round shown in FIG. 565(c), the unexecuted pending display icon H displayed in the first unexecuted pending display area Dh1 in FIG. The variable execution pending display icon Y is shifted to the already executed pending display area Dz, but at the timing of the shift (that is, the timing at which the variable display is started), the display color of the already executed pending display icon Z is It remains green according to the recorded contents of the special 1 hold 0 column of the above-mentioned hold change scenario (see the column marked with * in the figure) obtained by lottery of the hold change pattern.

The example shown in FIG. 565 is an example, and the number of special 1 suspension stored by the entry ball of the game ball to the first start port 33, the success or failure result of the winning lottery, the type of reach, the acquired retention change pattern random number , the display color of the unexecuted pending display icon H displayed in the unexecuted pending display area Dh and the display color of the variable execution pending display icon Y displayed in the variable active pending display area Dy change variously. do. In this way, the possibility (reliability) of winning a big win in the winning lottery of the pending information corresponding to the non-execution pending display icon H and the variable execution pending display icon Y is given to the player as an expectation of winning the big win. It is possible to suggest

It should be noted that the hold change scenario recorded in the hold change pattern lottery table illustrated in FIG. It is limited to those that change the display color in the direction in which the expectation of winning the jackpot changes from low to high, such as those that allow the player to win the jackpot. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as a reservation change notice, the display color is changed in a direction in which the expectation of winning a jackpot changes from low to high, but there is a possibility of winning a jackpot in a winning lottery. The display color is not changed in the direction from the higher to the lower degree. Specifically, the configuration is such that red is not changed to green, blue, or white, green is not changed to blue or white, or blue is not changed to white.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as described above, the display color of the unexecuted pending display icon H changes at the timing when the unexecuted pending display icon H shifts (that is, the timing at which the variable display is started). However, instead of this, a configuration may be adopted in which the display color changes during the variable display. The timing for changing the display color during the variable display may be, for example, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable display, or may be triggered by a petal, confetti, fireball, or the like. It may be triggered when a tangible object or an intangible object such as a light beam, a laser beam, or an electric wave reaches the unexecution suspension display icon H. FIG.

<<12-4-3>> Pre-execution pending notice effect:
The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment executes, as a look-ahead effect, an already-executed pending notice effect (hereinafter also simply referred to as "already-executed pending notice") in addition to the above-described pending change notice. The already-executed pending notice is an advance notice effect using the already-executed pending display icon Z displayed in the already-executed pending display area Dz (see FIG. 561) for special 1 pending. As described above, the already-executed pending display area Dz is an area capable of displaying pending display information corresponding to the game round after execution of the variable game in the game round is completed, that is, after execution of the game round operation. be. In this embodiment, when the display colors of the execution pending display icons Z displayed in the execution pending display area Dz are all the same due to the previous execution pending notice, they are displayed in the variable execution pending display area Dy. A configuration is adopted to suggest to the player that the result of the winning lottery related to the variation based on the suspension information corresponding to the variation executing suspension display icon Y is determined to be the jackpot. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the already executed suspension notice by the suspension information (special 2 suspension information) based on the entry of the game ball to the second start port 34 is not executed. Alternatively, both the already-executed suspension notice based on the special 1 suspension information and the already-executed suspension notice based on the special 2 suspension information may be executed.

FIG. 566 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the data configuration of the special 1 pending effect storage area. The sound and light side RAM 94 provided in the sound emission control device 90 is provided with a holding effect storage area 94d (see FIG. 560), and the suspension effect storage area 94d is provided with a special 1 suspension effect storage area. The special 1 pending effect storage area is an unexecuted pending display area Dh for special 1 pending (see FIG. 561), a variable executing pending display area Dy, and an unexecuted pending display area Dz. This is a storage area for storing the current display color of the display icon H, the variable execution pending display icon Y, or the already executed pending display icon Z (holding display icons H, Y, Z) and the result of winning lottery. As shown in the figure, each area displaying the pending display icons H, Y, and Z is associated with the current display color and the result of the winning lottery in the previous determination process. Specifically, the first to fourth unexecuted pending display areas Dh1 to Dh4 provided in the unexecuted pending display area Dh, the variable active pending display area Dy, and the first to fourth unexecuted pending display areas Dz. The current display color and the success/failure result of the winning lottery by the previous determination process are associated with each of the execution pending display areas Dz1 to Dz4. The storage contents of the display color of the special 1 suspension effect storage area illustrated in FIG. there is

Each of the pending display icons H, Y, and Z displayed in the unexecuted pending display area Dh, the variable active pending display area Dy, and the already executed pending display area Dz has been executed as described above. Since the display color and the result of winning lottery, which are stored in the special 1 pending effect storage area, are shifted to the area adjacent to the left each time the game round is executed. do. The sound emission control device 90 refers to the storage area for the special 1 suspension effect, so that the current display colors of the suspension display icons H, Y, and Z displayed in the respective areas Dh1 to Dh4, Dy, and Dz1 to Dz4 are displayed. and the success/failure result of the winning lottery by the previous determination process can be specified.

The sound emission control device 90 refers to the storage contents of the special 1 suspension effect storage area configured as described above, and executes the already-executed suspension notice. Specifically, the previous execution suspension notice is executed as follows. Each time the sound emission control device 90 receives a hold command sent from the main control device 60, it executes the above-described processing for holding change notice (hereinafter referred to as hold change notice processing). , a process for an already-executed pending notice (hereinafter referred to as an already-executed pending notice process) is executed following the pending change notice process. The sound emission control device 90 further executes processing for removing the same color when out, as processing for holding effects.

FIG. 567 is a flowchart showing an overview of the already-executed suspension notice process. FIG. 568 is a flow chart showing the process for same color removal at the time of removal.

The already-executed suspension notice process shown in FIG. 567 will be described. This already-executed suspension notice process is executed by the sound emission control device 90 each time a suspension command sent from the main controller 60 is received.

When the process is executed, the sound emission control device 90 first starts to execute the already-executed hold notice process. A winning lottery is drawn between the unexecuted pending display icon H for the special 1 pending acquired before the unexecuted pending display icon H and the variable active pending display icon Y displayed in the variable active pending display area Dy. It is determined whether or not there is any pending information corresponding to the winning result of the winning jackpot (step S1). This determination is made by referring to the special 1 pending effect storage area. For example, assuming that the contents of the special 1 pending effect storage area are those shown in FIG. The unexecuted pending display icon H for the specified Special 1 pending corresponds to what is displayed in the second unexecuted pending display area Dh2 (the part marked with * in the figure), and is displayed before the unexecuted pending display icon H. The unexecuted pending display icon H for the acquired Special 1 pending corresponds to the unexecuted pending display icon H displayed in the first unexecuted pending display area Dh1. The non-execution pending display icon H indicates that the result of the winning lottery is lost. Further, the result of the winning lottery is also lost for the variable execution pending display icon Y displayed in the variable execution pending display area Dy. In this case, the determination result of step S1 is negative.

In step S1, affirmative determination, that is, from the non-execution hold display icon H for the special 1 hold added by the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 that triggered the execution of the already executed hold notice process The result of the winning lottery is a big win between the non-execution suspension display icon H for the previously acquired special 1 suspension and the variable execution suspension display icon Y displayed in the variation execution suspension display area Dy. If it is determined that there is something corresponding to certain hold information, the already-executed hold notice processing is terminated. According to this already-executed pending notice process, the color change due to the pending change notice may be stopped in step S9, which will be described later. For this reason, for example, there may be a case where a big win is won in a winning lottery while the display color of the unexecuted pending display icon H is white. In addition, in the unexecuted suspension display icon H for the special 1 suspension and the variable execution suspension display icon Y displayed in the variable execution suspension display area Dy, there is suspension information that the winning lottery success or failure result is a jackpot winning. The configuration is such that if there is a corresponding one, the already-executed suspension notice process is terminated immediately.

On the other hand, in step S1, a negative determination, that is, the non-execution suspension display icon for the special 1 suspension added by the entry of the game ball to the first start port 33 that triggered the execution of the already-executed suspension notice process The result of the winning lottery is a big hit between the unexecuted pending display icon H for the special 1 pending acquired before H and the variable active pending display icon Y displayed in the variable active pending display area Dy. If it is determined that there is no winning pending information, the process proceeds to step S2.

In step S2, the success or failure result of the winning lottery specified from the hold command by the previous determination process in the previously executed hold change notice (the game ball to the first start port 33 that triggered the execution of the already executed hold notice process It is determined whether or not the winning lottery result for the special 1 reservation added by the ball entry) is a jackpot winning (step S2). In step S2, when it is determined that the result of the winning lottery is a big win, the process proceeds to step S3, and the type of reach specified by the contents of the reach effect specified from the hold command by the process for notice of hold change is determined. It is determined whether or not it is a special reach. This judgment is for judging whether or not the content of the ready-to-win effect has a high degree of expectation for winning the jackpot.

If it is determined in step S3 that the type of reach is not special reach, the process proceeds to step S4, and 4 is set to variable n. After execution of step S4, the process proceeds to step S5.

In step S5, going back from the non-execution suspension display icon H for the special 1 suspension added by the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 that triggered the execution of the already-executed suspension notice process n (= 4) The pending display icons H, Y, and Z are defined as a determination target pending display icon row, and each pending display icon H, Y, Z included in the determination target pending display icon row has the same display color (that is, same color). This determination is made by referring to the special 1 pending effect storage area illustrated in FIG. For example, in the storage area for special 1 suspension effect shown in FIG. The unexecuted pending display icon H corresponds to what is displayed in the second unexecuted pending display area Dh2 (part marked with * in the figure). Here, assuming that the type of ready-to-win specified by the content of the ready-to-win effect specified from the pending command is special ready-to-win, and the variable n is 4, n pending display icons going back from unexecuted pending display icon H H, Y, Z, that is, the determination target pending display icon row RW is composed of the unexecuted pending display icon H displayed in the first unexecuted pending display area Dh1, the variable in-execution displayed in the variable in-execution pending display area Dy. The pending display icon Y, the executed pending display icon Z displayed in the first executed pending display area Dz1, and the executed pending display icon Z displayed in the second executed pending display area Dz2 are applicable. In step S5, it is determined whether or not the pending display icons H, Y, and Z included in the determination target pending display icon row RW are of the same color. For example, in the special 1 suspension effect storage area shown in FIG. 566, the suspension display icons H, Y, and Z included in the determination target suspension display icon row RW are green and have the same color. In addition, in the determination of whether the colors are the same here, the default color white is assumed to be not the same color. That is, when each of the pending display icons H, Y, and Z included in the determination target pending display icon row RW is white, the determination result in step S5 is negative. If blue, green, and red are the same color, the determination result in step S5 is affirmative.

In step S5, it is determined that the pending display icons H, Y, and Z included in the determination target pending display icon row RW are of the same color (hereinafter also simply referred to as “the determination target pending display icon row RW has the same color”). If so, go to step S6.

In step S6, a female character effect setting process for setting an effect in which a female character appears is executed. Specifically, according to the female character effect setting process, at the timing when the entire determination target pending display icon row RW shifts to the execution pending display area Dz, any position within the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 For example, an effect is set so that a female character appears around the execution pending display area Dz. For example, a female character WM appears as shown in FIG. 569(d). When the determination target pending display icon row RW is the same color and the entire determination target pending display icon row RW is shifted to the already executed pending display area Dz, four already executed pending display icons Z are displayed in the already executed pending display area Dz. are lined up in the same color, the female character WM can be made to appear on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 at the timing when the entire determination target pending display icon row RW shifts to the execution pending display area Dz. , clearly suggesting to the player that the success/failure result of the winning lottery related to the variation based on the suspension information corresponding to the already-executed suspension display icon Z displayed in the variation execution suspension display area Dy is determined to be the jackpot. be able to. As described above, the already-executed pending display area Dz is an area capable of displaying pending display information corresponding to the game round after execution of the variable game in the game round is completed, that is, after execution of the game round operation. be.

As a modification of this embodiment, the female character may be replaced with another character such as a male character or an animal character. Furthermore, instead of the female character, a configuration in which floating objects such as flower petals and fireballs dance, or a configuration in which light or rays of light are emitted may be employed. Further, as a modified example of the present embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which the process of step S6 for executing an effect in which a female character appears is omitted. Even in the case of this modification, the player confirms that the result of the winning lottery is a jackpot by confirming that all the execution suspension display icons Z in the execution suspension display area Dz are all in the same color. can know After execution of step S6, the process proceeds to step S7.

In step S7, of the pending display icon row RW to be determined, the pending display icons H and Y excluding the already executed pending display icon Z displayed in the already executed pending display area Dz are color-converted by the pending change notice effect. process to stop The suspension display icons H and Y that stop the color conversion are the first starting ports that triggered the execution of the already-executed suspension notice process, which was the target of determination as to whether or not there was a jackpot winning in step S1. In the unexecuted hold display icon H for the special 1 hold acquired before the unexecuted hold display icon H for the special 1 hold added by the entry of the game ball to 33, and in the variable execution hold display area Dy Matches the displayed icon Y, which is displayed on hold during execution of change. The reason for stopping the color conversion is to avoid that the display color of the row of pending display icons to be determined RW, which is in the same color state, is not the same color due to a change in the display color due to the pending change notice effect. After execution of step S7, the already-executed suspension notice process is ended. The previous execution pending notice realized by the processes of steps S1 to S7 described above will be described in detail below. Here, case 1 will be described.

・Case 1:
FIG. 569 is an explanatory diagram showing how the reserved display areas Dh, Dy, and Dz change in Case 1. FIG. Figure 569(a) shows the variable display, Figure 569(b) shows the variable after stopping, Figure 569(c) shows the next round of the variable display, Figure 569(d) shows the next , indicating that the number of game rounds is being changed. It changes in order of FIG.569(a), FIG.569(b), FIG.569(c), and FIG.569(d).

In the example shown in FIG. 569(a), the unexecuted pending display icon H is displayed in green in the first unexecuted pending display area Dh1, and the variable active pending display icon Y is displayed in the variable active pending display area Dy. is displayed in green, the already-executed-suspended display icon Z is displayed in green in the first already-executed-suspended display area Dz1, and the already-executed-suspended display icon Z is displayed in green in the second already-executed-suspended display area Dz2. is displayed in the display color of . The variable display is based on the suspension (suspension information) corresponding to the variable execution suspension display icon Y displayed in the variation execution suspension display area Dy. During this variable display, when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, the unexecuted pending display icon H (blue) corresponding to the pending (holding information) based on this ball entry is the second unexecuted pending display. It is additionally displayed in area Dh2. As a result, the storage contents of the special 1 pending effect storage area are in the state shown in FIG.

In case 1, it was acquired before the unexecuted hold display icon H for the special 1 hold added by the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 that triggered the execution of the already executed hold notice process. The non-execution pending display icon H for special 1 pending and the variable execution pending display icon Y displayed in the variable active pending display area Dy correspond to the pending information that the winning lottery win/fail result is a jackpot winning. There is nothing that has been done (this point is the same for cases 2 to 7 described later), and the second unexecuted reservation display area Dh2 additionally displayed by the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 this time It is assumed that the pending information corresponding to the non-execution pending display icon H indicates that the result of the winning lottery is the jackpot winning and the type of ready-to-win is super ready-to-win. Under such circumstances, when the already-execution suspension notice process is executed, a negative decision is made in step S1 of FIG. 567, affirmative decision is made in step S2, negative decision is made in step S3, and 4 is set, and it is determined in step S5 whether or not the pending display icon row RW to be determined has the same color. As can be seen from FIG. 566, the determination object pending display icon row RW includes a first unexecuted pending display area Dh1, a variable executing pending display area Dy, a first executed pending display area Dz1, and a second executed pending display area. The pending display icons H, Y, and Z displayed in Dz2 correspond to them, all of which are green. Therefore, in step S5, it is determined that the pending display icon row RW to be determined has the same color, and in step S6, the female character effect setting process is executed. According to the female character effect setting process, as described above, at the timing when the entire determination target pending display icon row RW shifts to the executed pending display area Dz, the already executed icon in the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 is displayed. An effect is set so that a female character appears around the reserved display area Dz.

From the state during the variable display in FIG. 569(a), through the state after the change is stopped in FIG. 569(b), as shown in FIG. H, Y and Z are shifted to the left.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 569(d), the holding display icons H, Y, and Z are further shifted to the left during the variable display of the next game round. The timing at which this variable display is started is the timing at which the entire determination target pending display icon row RW shifts to the already executed pending display area Dz. 569(d), the four pending display icons Z in the already-executed pending display area Dz are aligned in the same color and the same color is displayed in the already-executed pending display area Dz at the timing of this shift. A production in which a female character appears around is executed.

By visually recognizing the appearance of the female character WM, the player can clearly know that the four execution suspension display icons Z displayed in the execution suspension display area Dz are aligned in the same color. As a result, the player recognizes that the success/failure result of the winning lottery related to the change based on the holding information corresponding to the change execution holding display icon Y displayed in the change execution holding display area Dy is the confirmation of the jackpot winning. be able to.

As described in detail above, in case 1, when the game ball enters the first start port 33 and the non-execution suspension display icon H for special 1 suspension is added to the non-execution suspension display area Dh, The row of pending display icons H, Y, and Z corresponding to the four pending display icons H, Y, and Z traced back from the unexecuted pending display icon H originally have the same color. For this reason, when the pending information corresponding to the added unexecuted pending display icon H indicates that the result of the winning lottery is a big win, the row of pending display icons to be judged RW that are aligned in the same color is displayed in the same color. By shifting to the already-executed pending display area Dz, the four already-executed pending display icons Z displayed in the already-executed pending display area Dz can be arranged in the same color. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the four execution suspension display icons Z displayed in the execution suspension display area Dz are aligned in the same color, they are displayed in the variable execution suspension display area Dy. It is possible to realize an advance notice effect that the success/failure result of the winning lottery related to the variation based on the suspension information corresponding to the variation executing suspension display icon Y is determined to be the big winning. As a result, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, by executing the effect in which the female character appears, the four already-executed pending display icons Z displayed in the already-executed pending display area Dz are aligned in the same color. can be clearly displayed to the player.

Furthermore, in case 1, as shown in FIG. 569(a), the game ball enters the first start port 33, and the unexecuted reservation display icon H for special 1 reservation is added to the unexecuted reservation display area Dh. In this case, the player visually recognizes that the four pending display icons H, Y, Z (determined pending display icon row RW) going back from the unexecuted pending display icon H are aligned in the same color. be able to. For this reason, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, during the variable display shown in FIG. By aligning the four execution suspension display icons Z displayed in the execution suspension display area Dz with the same color, the player can expect that the jackpot winning will eventually be confirmed.

Returning to the description of FIG. If it is determined in step S5 that the pending display icon row RW to be determined is not of the same color, the process proceeds to step S8.

In step S8, it is determined whether or not n-1 pending display icons H, Y, and Z in the pending display icon row RW to be determined have the same display color. The row of pending display icons to be determined RW is, as described above, the four pending pending display icons H that are additionally displayed by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 this time. Means display icon. In step S8, n-1 (=3) pending display icons H, Y, and Z in the pending display icon row RW to be determined have the same display color, and only the remaining one pending display icon is Determine whether the colors are different.

If it is determined in step S8 that n-1 of the pending display icon rows RW to be determined are of the same color, the process proceeds to step S9.

In step S9, an assist setting process is executed to make the display colors of the suspension display icons H, Y, and Z displayed in the determination target suspension display icon row RW the same color. At the time when step S9 is executed, n−1 (=3) pending display icons in the row of pending display icons to be determined RW are of the same color, and the remaining one pending display icon is of the same color. It is a different color than the original color. The n-1 pending display icons are hereinafter referred to as the same color pending display icon, and the remaining one pending display icon is hereinafter referred to as the different color pending display icon. The assist setting process is a process for setting the display color of the different color reserved icon to be the same as the display color of the same color reserved icon at a predetermined timing.

The above-mentioned predetermined timing for performing color conversion is such that all of the row of pending display icons to be determined RW are aligned in the already executed pending display area Dz from the timing when the execution of the already executed pending notice process is started. Any timing may be used as long as it is within a period from the start of the game round (after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the game round). Therefore, according to the assist setting process, color conversion of the different color pending display icon is performed at any timing from the unexecuted pending display area Dh to the already executed pending display area Dz through the variable active pending display area Dy. is determined by lottery, and the color conversion is performed at the determined timing. Various aspects of the assist setting process in which the predetermined timing is switched will be described in detail later. After execution of step S9, the process proceeds to step S6 described above.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8 that n-1 of the pending display icon rows RW to be determined are not of the same color, the already executed pending notice process is terminated. Further, when it is determined in step S2 that the result of the winning lottery is not the jackpot winning, the already-executed suspension notice process is ended. Various aspects of the assist setting process will be described as cases 2 to 6 below.

・Case 2:
FIG. 570 is an explanatory diagram showing how the reserved display areas Dh, Dy, and Dz change in Case 2. FIG. FIG. 570(a) shows during the fluctuation display, FIG. 570(b) shows after the fluctuation is stopped, FIG. 570(c) shows during the fluctuation display of the next game round, and FIG. 570(d) shows the next , indicating that the number of game rounds is being changed. It changes in order of FIG.570(a), FIG.570(b), FIG.570(c), and FIG.570(d).

In the example shown in FIG. 570(a), the unexecuted pending display icon H is displayed in white in the first unexecuted pending display area Dh1, and the variable active pending display icon Y is displayed in the variable active pending display area Dy. is displayed in green, the already-executed-suspended display icon Z is displayed in green in the first already-executed-suspended display area Dz1, and the already-executed-suspended display icon Z is displayed in green in the second already-executed-suspended display area Dz2. is displayed in the display color of . The variable display is based on the suspension (suspension information) corresponding to the variable execution suspension display icon Y displayed in the variation execution suspension display area Dy. During this variable display, when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, the unexecuted pending display icon H (blue) corresponding to the pending (holding information) based on this ball entry is the second unexecuted pending display. It is additionally displayed in area Dh2.

Here, the suspension information corresponding to the non-execution suspension display icon H in the second non-execution suspension display area Dh2 additionally displayed by the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 this time is the success or failure result of the winning lottery. It is assumed that it is a jackpot winning and indicates that the type of reach is super reach. Under these circumstances, when the already-execution suspension notice process is executed, the determination in step S1 of FIG. is set, and it is determined in step S5 whether or not the pending display icon row RW to be determined has the same color. The determination object pending display icon row RW is the pending display displayed in the first unexecuted pending display area Dh1, the variable executing pending display area Dy, the first executed pending display area Dz1, and the second executed pending display area Dz2. Icons H, Y and Z correspond, and one of the four pending display icons H, Y and Z is white and the remaining three are green. Therefore, when a negative determination is made in step S5 and an affirmative determination is made in step S8, the process proceeds to step S9 and the assist setting process is executed.

In this case 2, as shown in FIG. 570(b), as shown in FIG. 570(b), by the assist setting process, at the timing when the fluctuation display of the current game round is stopped and the fluctuation display of the next game round is started, the determination target pending display icon row RW Of these, the rightmost pending display icon is color-converted from white to green, and as shown in FIG. The change execution suspension display icon Y becomes green, and the determination target suspension display icon row RW is aligned in the same color.

Following the state of FIG. 570(c), as shown in FIG. 570(d), the holding display icons H, Y, and Z are further shifted to the left during the variable display of the next next game round. becomes. As a result, in the already-executed pending display area Dz, the determination target pending display icon row RW that has the same color as a result of the assist setting process is arranged. Further, as shown in FIG. 570(d), the female character WM having the content set by the female character effect setting process is displayed during the variable display of the next game round. That is, at the timing of shifting to the state of FIG. An effect is executed in which a female character appears around the reserved display area Dz.

By visually recognizing the appearance of the female character WM, the player can clearly know that the four execution suspension display icons Z displayed in the execution suspension display area Dz are aligned in the same color. As a result, the player recognizes that the success/failure result of the winning lottery related to the change based on the holding information corresponding to the change execution holding display icon Y displayed in the change execution holding display area Dy is the confirmation of the jackpot winning. be able to.

As described in detail above, in case 2, when the game ball enters the first start port 33 and the non-execution suspension display icon H for special 1 suspension is added to the non-execution suspension display area Dh, The unexecuted pending display icon displayed in the unexecuted pending display area Dh in the determination target pending display icon row RW, which is four pending display icons H, Y, and Z that trace back from the unexecuted pending display icon H. When H is a different color pending icon, the unexecuted pending display icon H is converted into the same color as the same color pending icon at the timing when the unexecuted pending display icon H shifts to the variable active pending display area Dy. As a result, the determination target pending display icon row RW is aligned in the same color, and the determination target pending display icon row RW is displayed in the already executed pending display area Dz by shifting to the already executed pending display area Dz in the same display color. The four execution pending display icons Z displayed can be arranged in the same color. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the four execution suspension display icons Z displayed in the execution suspension display area Dz are aligned in the same color, they are displayed in the variable execution suspension display area Dy. It is possible to realize an advance notice effect that the success/failure result of the winning lottery related to the variation based on the suspension information corresponding to the variation executing suspension display icon Y is determined to be the big winning. As a result, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in case 2, as in case 1, the effect in which the female character appears is executed, so that the four already-executed pending display icons Z displayed in the already-executed pending display area Dz are aligned in the same color. This can be clearly shown to the player.

Furthermore, in case 2, the different color pending icon in the row of pending display icons to be determined RW changes to the same color as the same color pending icon at the timing of shifting from the non-execution pending display area Dh to the variable executing pending display area Dy. , the row of pending display icons to be judged RW are arranged in the same color. For this reason, the determination object pending display icon row RW is shifted to the already executed pending display area Dz in the same display color, and the four already executed pending display icons Z displayed in the already executed pending display area Dz are changed to the same color. By aligning, it is possible to make the player expect that winning the jackpot will eventually be confirmed.

・Case 3:
FIG. 571 is an explanatory diagram showing how the reserved display areas Dh, Dy, and Dz change in case 3. FIG. FIG. 571(a) shows during the fluctuation display, FIG. 571(b) shows after the fluctuation is stopped, FIG. 571(c) shows during the fluctuation display of the next game round, and FIG. 571(d) shows the next , indicating that the number of game rounds is being changed. It changes in order of FIG.571(a), FIG.571(b), FIG.571(c), and FIG.571(d).

In the example shown in FIG. 571(a), the unexecuted pending display icon H is displayed in green in the first unexecuted pending display area Dh1, and the variable active pending display icon Y is displayed in the variable active pending display area Dy. is displayed in white, the already-executed-suspended display icon Z is displayed in green in the first already-executed-suspended display area Dz1, and the already-executed-suspended display icon Z is displayed in green in the second already-executed-suspended display area Dz2. is displayed in the display color of . The variable display is based on the suspension (suspension information) corresponding to the variable execution suspension display icon Y displayed in the variation execution suspension display area Dy. During this variable display, when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, the unexecuted pending display icon H (blue) corresponding to the pending (holding information) based on this ball entry is the second unexecuted pending display. It is additionally displayed in area Dh2. The reservation information corresponding to the additionally displayed non-execution reservation display icon H indicates that the result of the winning lottery is the big winning. The row of pending display icons to be determined RW is a pending display displayed in the first unexecuted pending display area Dh1, the variable executing pending display area Dy, the first executed pending display area Dz1, and the second executed pending display area Dz2. Icons H, Y, and Z correspond.

In this case 3, the second pending display icon from the right in the determination target pending display icon row RW, that is, the variable execution displayed in the variable execution pending display area Dy during the variable display in FIG. The medium suspension display icon Y corresponds to the unique suspension display icon. By the assist setting process, as shown in FIG. 571(b), the timing at which the variation of the current game cycle is stopped and the next game cycle is started, that is, two At the timing when the second pending display icon shifts from the variable execution pending display area Dy to the first executed pending display area Dz1, the pending display icon is color-converted from white to green. As shown, during the variable display of the next game round, the already-executed pending display icon Z in the first already-executed pending display area Dz1 is green, and the determination target pending display icon row RW is aligned in the same color. .

Following the state of FIG. 571(c), as shown in FIG. 571(d), the holding display icons H, Y, and Z are further shifted to the left during the variable display of the next next game round. becomes. As a result, in the already-executed pending display area Dz, the determination target pending display icon row RW that has the same color as a result of the assist setting process is arranged. Further, as shown in FIG. 571(d), the female character WM having the content set by the female character effect setting process is displayed during the variable display of the next game round. That is, at the timing of shifting to the state of FIG. An effect is executed in which a female character appears around the reserved display area Dz.

By visually recognizing the appearance of the female character WM, the player can clearly know that the four execution suspension display icons Z displayed in the execution suspension display area Dz are aligned in the same color. As a result, the player recognizes that the success/failure result of the winning lottery related to the change based on the hold information corresponding to the change-execution hold display icon Y displayed in the change-execution hold display area Dy is the confirmation of the big win. be able to.

As described in detail above, in case 3, when the game ball enters the first start port 33 and the non-execution suspension display icon H for special 1 suspension is added to the non-execution suspension display area Dh, The change-in-execution hold displayed in the change-in-execution-hold display area Dy in the determination target hold-display icon row RW, which is the four hold-on display icons H, Y, and Z traced back from the non-execution hold display icon H. When the display icon Y is a different-color pending icon, the variable-executing-hold display icon Y is displayed at the timing when the variable-execution-hold display icon Y shifts from the variable-execution-hold display area Dy to the already-execution-hold display area Dz. Convert to the same color as the same color hold icon. As a result, the determination target pending display icon row RW is aligned in the same color, and the determination target pending display icon row RW is displayed in the already executed pending display area Dz by shifting to the already executed pending display area Dz in the same display color. The four execution pending display icons Z displayed can be arranged in the same color. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the four execution suspension display icons Z displayed in the execution suspension display area Dz are aligned in the same color, they are displayed in the variable execution suspension display area Dy. It is possible to realize an advance notice effect that the success/failure result of the winning lottery related to the variation based on the suspension information corresponding to the variation executing suspension display icon Y is determined to be the big winning. As a result, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in case 3, as in case 1, the effect in which the female character appears is executed, so that the four already-executed pending display icons Z displayed in the already-executed pending display area Dz are aligned in the same color. This can be clearly shown to the player.

Furthermore, in case 3, the different color pending icon in the determination target pending display icon row RW changes to the same color as the same color pending icon at the timing when the variable pending pending display area Dy shifts to the already executed pending display area Dz. , the row of pending display icons to be judged RW are arranged in the same color. For this reason, the entire determination object pending display icon row RW is shifted to the already executed pending display area Dz in the same display color, and the four already executed pending display icons Z displayed in the already executed pending display area Dz are displayed. By aligning the same color, the player can be made to expect that winning the jackpot will eventually be confirmed.

・Case 4:
FIG. 572 is an explanatory diagram showing how the reserved display areas Dh, Dy, and Dz change in Case 4. FIG. Figure 572(a) shows during the variable display, Figure 572(b) shows after the change is stopped, Figure 572(c) shows during the variable display of the next game round, Figure 572(d) shows the next , indicating that the number of game rounds is being changed. 572(a), 572(b), 572(c), and 572(d).

In the example shown in FIG. 572(a), the unexecuted pending display icon H is displayed in green in the first unexecuted pending display area Dh1, and the variable active pending display icon Y is displayed in the variable active pending display area Dy. is displayed in green, the already-executed-suspended display icon Z is displayed in green in the first already-executed-suspended display area Dz1, and the already-executed-suspended display icon Z is displayed in blue in the second already-executed-suspended display area Dz2. is displayed in the display color of . The variable display is based on the suspension (suspension information) corresponding to the variable execution suspension display icon Y displayed in the variation execution suspension display area Dy. During this variable display, when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, the unexecuted pending display icon H (blue) corresponding to the pending (holding information) based on this ball entry is the second unexecuted pending display. It is additionally displayed in area Dh2. The reservation information corresponding to the additionally displayed non-execution reservation display icon H indicates that the result of the winning lottery is the big winning. The row of pending display icons to be determined RW is a pending display displayed in the first unexecuted pending display area Dh1, the variable executing pending display area Dy, the first executed pending display area Dz1, and the second executed pending display area Dz2. Icons H, Y, and Z correspond.

In this case 4, the leftmost pending display icon in the determination target pending display icon row RW, that is, the executed pending display displayed in the second executed pending display area Dz2 during the variable display in FIG. The icon Z corresponds to a different color pending display icon. By the assist setting process, as shown in FIG. 572(d), at the timing during the variable display of the game round which is a predetermined time after the start of the next next game round, the determination object holding display icon row RW is changed. Among them, the leftmost pending display icon, that is, the executed pending display icon displayed in the fourth executed pending display area Dz4 is color-converted from blue to green. As a result, during the variable display of the next next game round, the already-executed pending display icon Z displayed in the fourth already-executed pending display area Dz4 is green, and the determination target pending display icon row RW is aligned in the same color. It will be. Then, as shown in FIG. 572(d), the female character WM is displayed around the execution pending display area Dz.

By visually recognizing the appearance of the female character WM, the player can clearly know that the four execution suspension display icons Z displayed in the execution suspension display area Dz are aligned in the same color. As a result, the player recognizes that the success/failure result of the winning lottery related to the change based on the holding information corresponding to the change execution holding display icon Y displayed in the change execution holding display area Dy is the confirmation of the jackpot winning. be able to.

As described in detail above, in case 4, when the game ball enters the first start port 33 and the non-execution suspension display icon H for special 1 suspension is added to the non-execution suspension display area Dh, One pending display icon H (or Z) in the determination object pending display icon row RW consisting of four pending display icons H, Y and Z traced back from the unexecuted pending display icon H is a unique pending display icon. In some cases, during the variable display of the game round (next next game round) that has been started at the timing when the whole of the determination target pending display icon row RW shifts to the already executed pending display area Dz, the different color pending display icon is displayed. Convert to the same color as the same color hold display icon. In this way, the four already-executed-suspended display icons Z displayed in the already-executed-suspended display area Dz can be arranged in the same color. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the four execution suspension display icons Z displayed in the execution suspension display area Dz are aligned in the same color, they are displayed in the variable execution suspension display area Dy. It is possible to realize a notice effect that the winning lottery win/failure result related to the change based on the hold information corresponding to the change execution hold display icon Y is determined to be the big win. As a result, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in case 4, as in case 1, the effect in which the female character appears is executed, so that the four already-executed pending display icons Z displayed in the already-executed pending display area Dz are aligned in the same color. This can be clearly shown to the player.

Furthermore, in Case 4, at the start of the variable display of the next game round, the four already-executed pending display icons Z displayed in the already-executed pending display area Dz are not in the same color. On the other hand, the same color is suddenly displayed during the variable display, so that the player can be greatly surprised and delighted.

・Case 5:
FIG. 573 is an explanatory diagram showing how the reserved display areas Dh, Dy, and Dz change in case 5. FIG. Figure 573(a) shows the variable display, Figure 573(b) shows the variable after stopping, Figure 573(c) shows the next round of variable display, Figure 573(d) shows the next indicates that the next game round is being displayed in a variable manner. 573(a), 573(b), 573(c), and 573(d).

In the example shown in FIG. 573(a), the unexecuted pending display icon H is displayed in white in the second unexecuted pending display area Dh2, and the unexecuted pending display icon H is displayed in the first unexecuted pending display area Dh1. is displayed in green, the variable execution pending display icon Y is displayed in green in the variable execution pending display area Dy, and the already executed pending display icon Z is displayed in green in the first already executed pending display area Dz1. is displayed in the display color of . The variable display is based on the suspension (suspension information) corresponding to the variable execution suspension display icon Y displayed in the variation execution suspension display area Dy. During this variable display, when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, the unexecuted pending display icon H (blue) corresponding to the pending (holding information) based on this ball entry is the third unexecuted pending display. It is additionally displayed in area Dh3. The reservation information corresponding to the additionally displayed non-execution reservation display icon H indicates that the result of the winning lottery is the big winning. The row of pending display icons to be determined RW includes the pending displays displayed in the second unexecuted pending display area Dh2, the first unexecuted pending display area Dh1, the varying active pending display area Dy, and the first executed pending display area Dz1. Icons H, Y, and Z correspond.

In this case 5, the rightmost pending display icon in the determination target pending display icon row RW, that is, the unexecuted pending display displayed in the second unexecuted pending display area Dh2 during the variable display in FIG. The icon H corresponds to a different color pending display icon. By the assist setting process, as shown in FIG. 573(b), at the timing when the variation of the current game round is stopped and the next game round is started, the rightmost hold display of the judgment object hold display icon row RW is displayed. Color conversion is performed to convert the icon from white to green, and as shown in FIG. It becomes green, and the row of pending display icons to be judged RW are aligned in the same color.

Following the state of FIG. 573(c), as shown in FIG. 573(d), the holding display icons H, Y and Z are further shifted to the left during the variable display of the next next next game round. state. As a result, in the already-executed pending display area Dz, the determination target pending display icon row RW that has the same color as a result of the assist setting process is arranged. Further, as shown in FIG. 573(d), the female character WM having the content set by the female character effect setting process is displayed during the variable display of the next game round. That is, at the timing of shifting to the state of FIG. An effect is executed in which the pending display icons Z are aligned in the same color and a female character appears around the already-executed pending display area Dz.

By visually recognizing the appearance of the female character WM, the player can clearly know that the four execution suspension display icons Z displayed in the execution suspension display area Dz are aligned in the same color. As a result, the player recognizes that the success/failure result of the winning lottery related to the change based on the hold information corresponding to the change-execution hold display icon Y displayed in the change-execution hold display area Dy is the confirmation of the big win. be able to.

As described in detail above, in case 5, when the game ball enters the first start port 33 and the non-execution suspension display icon H for special 1 suspension is added to the non-execution suspension display area Dh, The unexecuted pending display icon displayed in the unexecuted pending display area Dh in the determination target pending display icon row RW, which is the four pending display icons H, Y, and Z going back from the unexecuted pending display icon H. When H is a different color pending icon, at the timing when the unexecuted pending display icon H shifts to the left in the unexecuted pending display area Dh, the unexecuted pending display icon H is converted to the same color as the same color pending icon. do. As a result, the determination target pending display icon row RW is aligned in the same color, and the determination target pending display icon row RW is displayed in the already executed pending display area Dz by shifting to the already executed pending display area Dz with the same display color. The four execution pending display icons Z displayed can be arranged in the same color. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the four execution suspension display icons Z displayed in the execution suspension display area Dz are aligned in the same color, they are displayed in the variable execution suspension display area Dy. It is possible to realize a notice effect that the winning lottery win/failure result related to the change based on the hold information corresponding to the change execution hold display icon Y is determined to be the big win. As a result, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in case 5, as in case 1, the effect in which the female character appears is executed, so that the four already-executed pending display icons Z displayed in the already-executed pending display area Dz are aligned in the same color. This can be clearly shown to the player.

Furthermore, in Case 5, at the timing when the different color pending icon in the determination target pending display icon row RW shifts to the left side in the unexecuted pending display area Dh, it changes to the same color as the same color pending icon, and the determination target pending display. The player can visually recognize that the icon rows RW are arranged in the same color. For this reason, the entire determination object pending display icon row RW is shifted to the already executed pending display area Dz in the same display color, and the four already executed pending display icons Z displayed in the already executed pending display area Dz are displayed. By aligning the same color, the player can be made to expect that winning the jackpot will eventually be confirmed.

・Case 6:
FIG. 574 is an explanatory diagram showing how the reserved display areas Dh, Dy, and Dz change in Case 6. FIG. Fig. 574(a) shows during the fluctuation display, Fig. 574(b) shows after the fluctuation is stopped, Fig. 574(c) shows during the fluctuation display of the next game round, Fig. 574(d) shows the next , indicating that the number of game rounds is being changed. 574(a), 574(b), 574(c), and 574(d).

In the example shown in FIG. 574(a), the unexecuted pending display icon H is displayed in green in the first unexecuted pending display area Dh1, and the variable active pending display icon Y is displayed in the variable active pending display area Dy. is displayed in green, the already-executed-suspended display icon Z is displayed in green in the first already-executed-suspended display area Dz1, and the already-executed-suspended display icon Z is displayed in blue in the second already-executed-suspended display area Dz2. is displayed in the display color of , and the execution pending display icon Z is displayed in the green display color in the third execution pending display area Dz3. The variable display is based on the suspension (suspension information) corresponding to the variable execution suspension display icon Y displayed in the variation execution suspension display area Dy. During this variable display, when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, the unexecuted pending display icon H (blue) corresponding to the pending (holding information) based on this ball entry is the second unexecuted pending display. It is additionally displayed in area Dh2. The reservation information corresponding to the additionally displayed non-execution reservation display icon H indicates that the result of the winning lottery is the big winning. The row of pending display icons to be determined RW is a pending display displayed in the first unexecuted pending display area Dh1, the variable executing pending display area Dy, the first executed pending display area Dz1, and the second executed pending display area Dz2. Icons H, Y, and Z correspond.

In case 6, as in case 4, the leftmost pending display icon in the row of pending display icons to be determined RW, that is, the second executed pending display area Dz2 during the variable display in FIG. corresponds to the different color pending display icon. The display color of this different color pending display icon is changed from blue to green by the assist setting process. Since the green color is the same as the display color, as shown in FIG. 574(c), the variable display of the next game round is stopped, and at the timing when the next next game round is started, the third executed pending display is displayed. By erasing the different color pending display icon displayed in the area Dz3, the pending display icons H, Y, and Z positioned to the right of the second executed pending display area Dz2 are shifted to the left, as shown in FIG. 574(d). As shown in , during the variable display of the next game round, the already-executed pending display icon Z in the third already-executed pending display area Dz3 is green, and the determination object pending display icon row RW is aligned in the same color. become. Then, as shown in FIG. 574(c), the female character WM is displayed around the execution pending display area Dz.

By visually recognizing the appearance of the female character WM, the player can clearly know that the four execution suspension display icons Z displayed in the execution suspension display area Dz are aligned in the same color. As a result, the player recognizes that the success/failure result of the winning lottery related to the change based on the hold information corresponding to the change-execution hold display icon Y displayed in the change-execution hold display area Dy is the confirmation of the big win. be able to.

As described in detail above, in case 6, when the game ball enters the first start port 33 and the non-execution suspension display icon H for special 1 suspension is added to the non-execution suspension display area Dh, The leftmost pending display icon in the row of pending display icons H, Y, and Z to be determined, which are four pending display icons H, Y, and Z from the unexecuted pending display icon H, is the unique pending display icon. When the already-executed pending display icon Z to the left of the pending display icon has the same display color as that of the pending display icon of the same color, the pending display icon row RW to be judged is made the same color by eliminating the pending display icon of a different color. align. In this way, the four already-executed-suspended display icons Z displayed in the already-executed-suspended display area Dz can be arranged in the same color. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the four execution suspension display icons Z displayed in the execution suspension display area Dz are aligned in the same color, they are displayed in the variable execution suspension display area Dy. It is possible to realize an advance notice effect that the success/failure result of the winning lottery related to the variation based on the suspension information corresponding to the variation executing suspension display icon Y is determined to be the big winning. As a result, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in case 6, as in case 1, the effect in which the female character appears is executed, so that the four already-executed pending display icons Z displayed in the already-executed pending display area Dz are aligned in the same color. This can be clearly shown to the player.

Returning to the description of FIG. If it is determined in step S3 that the type of reach is special reach, the process proceeds to step S10, and 3 is set to variable n. That is, 3 is set to the variable n in the case of the special reach with a high expectation of winning the jackpot. After execution of step S10, the process advances to step S11 to determine whether or not the pending display icon row RW to be determined has the same color. The process of step S11 is substantially the same as the process of step S5 described above, and the difference is that the row of pending display icons to be judged RW to be judged in step S5 is the variable n are four pending display icons H, Y, and Z corresponding to . The only difference is that they are the pending display icons H, Y, and Z of .

In step S11, when it is determined that the pending display icon row RW to be determined has the same color, the process advances to step S12 to execute specific symbol display setting processing. The specific symbol display setting process is a process of setting to display a specific symbol row (for example, [3, 4, 1]) on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 during the stop display of a predetermined game cycle. The predetermined game round is next to the unexecuted reservation display icon H for the special 1 reservation added by the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 that triggered the execution of the already executed reservation notice process. It is a game round corresponding to the reserved display icons H and Y. In case 7, which will be described later, the game round corresponding to the variable execution suspension display icon Y displayed in the variable execution suspension display area Dy corresponds to the predetermined game round. After execution of step S12, the process proceeds to step S13.

In step S13, an already-executed pending display area reduction setting process is executed. The already-executed pending display area reduction setting process is performed after the specific symbol row (for example, [3, 4, 1]) is displayed, and then the leftmost unit area (the fourth unexecuted unit area) of the already-executed pending display area Dz. This is processing for setting the reserved display area Dh4) to disappear. As a result of this process, the already-executed pending display area Dz is reduced in size from the four unit areas Dh1 to Dh4 to the three unit areas Dh1 to Dh3. Each process of step S12 and step S13 will be described in detail later with specific examples. After execution of step S13, the process proceeds to step S6 described above.

If it is determined in step S11 that the pending display icon row RW to be determined does not have the same color, the already-executed pending notice process is terminated. The execution suspension notice realized by the processes of steps S1 to S3, steps S10 to S13, steps S6 and S7 described above will be described in detail below. Here, case 7 will be described.

・Case 7:
FIG. 575 is an explanatory diagram showing how the reserved display areas Dh, Dy, and Dz change in case 7. FIG. FIG. 575(a) shows the variable display, FIG. 575(b) shows the variable after stopping, and FIG. 575(c) shows the variable display of the next round. It changes in order of FIG.575(a), FIG.575(b), and FIG.575(c).

In the example shown in FIG. 575(a), the variable execution pending display icon Y is displayed in green in the variable execution pending display area Dy, and the already executed pending display icon Z is displayed in the first already executed pending display area Dz1. is displayed in green, the already-executed-suspended display icon Z is displayed in green in the second already-executed-suspended display area Dz2, and the already-executed-suspended display icon Z is displayed in white in the third already-executed-suspended display area Dz3. is displayed in the display color of . The variable display is based on the suspension (suspension information) corresponding to the variable execution suspension display icon Y displayed in the variation execution suspension display area Dy. During this variable display, when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, the unexecuted pending display icon H (blue) corresponding to the pending (holding information) based on this entering ball is the first unexecuted pending display. It is additionally displayed in area Dh1.

Here, the suspension information corresponding to the unexecuted suspension display icon H in the first unexecuted suspension display area Dh1 additionally displayed by the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 this time is the success or failure result of the winning lottery. It is assumed that this indicates that the jackpot has been won and that the type of reach is special reach. Under these circumstances, when the already-executed suspension notice process is executed, the determination in step S1 of FIG. is set, and in step S11, it is determined whether or not the pending display icon row RW to be determined has the same color. The determination target pending display icon row RW is displayed in three pending display icons Y and Z, that is, the variable execution pending display area Dy, the first executed pending display area Dz1, and the second executed pending display area Dz2. , and the three pending display icons Y, Z are green and have the same color. Therefore, by making an affirmative determination in step S11, the process proceeds to step S12, and the specific symbol display setting process is executed. After step S12 is executed, the process advances to step S13, and an already-executed pending display area reduction setting process is executed.

After the variable display shown in FIG. 575(a), at the timing when the variable display stops, [3 4・1] is displayed. Also, at the timing when the variable display stops, as shown in FIG. The execution pending display area Dh4 disappears. It should be noted that the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 displays an effect in which the moving body reaches the disappearing fourth unexecuted reserved display area Dh4 in accordance with the timing when the fourth unexecuted reserved display area Dh4 disappears. good too. Moving objects include tangible objects such as flower petals, confetti, and fireballs, and intangible objects such as light rays, laser beams, and radio waves. By allowing the moving object to reach there, the player can be made to watch the disappearance of the fourth non-execution reservation display area Dh4.

As shown in FIG. 575(b), when the variation is stopped and displayed, each holding display icon H, Y, Z shifts to the left at the timing when the variation display of the next game round is started. As a result, as shown in FIG. 575(c), three already-executed pending display icons of the same color are displayed in the already-executed pending display area Dz composed of the first to third already-executed pending display areas Dz1 to Dz3. A determination target pending display icon row RW composed of Zs is located. Further, as shown in FIG. 575(c), during the variable display of the next game round, the female character WM having the contents set by the female character effect setting process is displayed. That is, at the timing of shifting to the state of FIG. An effect is executed in which three already-executed pending display icons Z are aligned in the same color and a female character appears around the already-executed pending display area Dz.

By visually recognizing the appearance of the female character WM, the player can view all (in this case 7, three ), it is possible to clearly know that the execution pending display icons Z are all in the same color. As a result, the player recognizes that the success/failure result of the winning lottery related to the change based on the hold information corresponding to the change-execution hold display icon Y displayed in the change-execution hold display area Dy is the confirmation of the big win. be able to.

As described in detail above, in case 7, when the game ball enters the first start port 33 and the non-execution suspension display icon H for special 1 suspension is added to the non-execution suspension display area Dh, The row of pending display icons to be determined RW, which are three pending display icons Y and Z traced back from the unexecuted pending display icon H, is originally the same color. Therefore, the pending information corresponding to the added non-execution pending display icon H indicates that the result of the winning lottery is the jackpot winning, and the reach type is the special reach that is highly expected to win the jackpot. In one case, [3, 4, 1] as a specific pattern row is displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, and the row of pending display icons to be judged RW that are aligned in the same color are already displayed in the same display color. By shifting to the execution pending display area Dz, the three already executed pending display icons Z displayed in the already executed pending display area Dz can be arranged in the same color. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when all (three in this case 7) execution suspension display icons Z displayed in the execution suspension display area Dz are aligned in the same color, the variable execution is in progress. It is possible to realize a notice effect that the success or failure result of the winning lottery related to the variation based on the suspension information corresponding to the variable execution suspension display icon Y displayed in the suspension display area Dy is determined to be the jackpot. As a result, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, all (three in this case 7) execution pending display displayed in the execution pending display area Dz by executing the effect in which the female character appears. It is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the icons Z are aligned in the same color.

Furthermore, in case 7, when [3, 4, 1] as a specific pattern string is displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, as shown in FIG. Since Dz is reduced to a size composed of three unit areas Dh1 to Dh3, it is expected that the condition that all the execution pending display icons Z in the execution pending display area Dz are all the same color will be relaxed. Feelings can be imparted to the player. In case 7, all (three in case 7) executed pending display icons Z displayed in the executed pending display area Dz composed of the first to third executed pending display areas Dz1 to Dz3 will be of the same color.

As described above, in Case 7, only three already-executed pending display icons Z arranged in the same color in the already-executed pending display area Dz are required, and compared to the other cases, the number of already-executed pending display icons Z in the already-executed pending display area Dz is smaller. It is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that the condition that the reserved display icons Z are arranged in the same color is eased and that the big win is likely to be won.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the number of unit areas constituting the already-executed pending display area Dz is reduced to two by the already-executed pending display area reduction setting process. When the already-executed pending display icons Z are arranged in the same color, the result of the winning lottery for the change based on the pending information corresponding to the variable-executing pending display icon Y displayed in the variable-executing pending display area Dy is determined. A configuration is realized that may suggest to the player that the winning of the jackpot is confirmed. Further, by the already-executed pending display area reduction setting process, the number of unit areas constituting the already-executed pending display area Dz is reduced to one, and one already-executed pending display is displayed in the already-executed pending display area Dz. When the icon Z becomes a specific display color (for example, red in this embodiment), the change based on the suspension information corresponding to the variable execution suspension display icon Y displayed in the variation execution suspension display area Dy A configuration is realized that may suggest to the player that the success or failure result of the winning lottery is determined to win the jackpot. In the already-executed pending display area reduction setting process, whether the number of unit areas constituting the already-executed pending display area Dz is 3, 2, or 1 can be determined by, for example, a specific It is determined by lottery using random numbers. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that the maximum number of execution pending display icons Z that can be displayed in the execution pending display area Dz can be changed from 1 to 4. . According to this configuration, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that the condition that all the execution pending display icons Z in the execution pending display area Dz are all in the same color will be relaxed.

<<12-4-4>> Process for removing the same color when out:
The process for removing the same color at the time of removal shown in FIG. 568 will be described. This processing for removing the same color when out is executed by the sound emission control device 90, and is executed each time there is a shift of the pending display icon from the first unexecuted pending display area Dh1 to the variable executing pending display area Dy. be.

When the process is started, first, whether or not the pending information about the variable execution pending display icon Y to be displayed in the variable active pending display area Dy is the result of winning lottery. is determined (step S21). If it is determined in step S21 that the pending information indicates that the result of the winning lottery is lost, the process proceeds to step S22.

In step S22, it is determined whether or not the execution pending display icons Z to be displayed in the first to fourth execution pending display areas Dz1 to Dz4 have the same color. This determination is made by referring to the special 1 pending effect storage area shown in FIG. If it is determined in step S22 that the execution pending display icons Z are of the same color, the process advances to step S23 to execute same color removal processing. The processing for removing the same color changes the display color of one of the four execution pending display icons Z to be displayed in the first to fourth execution pending display areas Dz1 to Dz4 to the other execution pending display icon Z. It is a process of changing to a color different from . For example, when all the execution pending display icons Z to be displayed in the first to fourth execution pending display areas Dz1 to Dz4 are green, one of the four execution pending display icons Z Change the display color from green to red. As a result of executing the same color removal process, the execution pending display icons Z to be displayed in the first to fourth execution pending display areas Dz1 to Dz4 no longer have the same color. After step S23 is executed, the process for removing the same color when out is terminated.

On the other hand, in step S21, if it is determined that the winning lottery result is not lost, the pending information about the variable execution pending display icon Y to be displayed in the variable execution pending display area Dy is displayed in the same color as the winning lottery. End the removal process. Further, in step S22, if it is determined that the execution pending display icons Z to be displayed in the first to fourth execution pending display areas Dz1 to Dz4 are not of the same color, the process of removing the same color when out is terminated. do.

According to this process for removing the same color at the time of loss, the pending information about the variable execution pending display icon Y to be displayed in the variable active pending display area Dy is that the result of the winning lottery is a loss. In this case, it is possible to prevent the four execution pending display icons Z to be displayed in the first to fourth execution pending display areas Dz1 to Dz4 from being of the same color. On the other hand, according to the already-executed suspension notice process described above, the suspension information about the variable execution suspension display icon Y to be displayed in the variable execution suspension display area Dy is the result of the winning lottery. The four execution pending display icons Z to be displayed in the first to fourth execution pending display areas Dz1 to Dz4 in the case of winning can be of the same color. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the four execution suspension display icons Z displayed in the first to fourth execution suspension display areas Dz1 to Dz4 are the same color, the variable execution suspension It is possible to guarantee that the result of winning lottery related to the variation based on the suspension information about the variable execution suspension display icon Y displayed in the display area Dy is the confirmation of the jackpot winning.

<<12-4-5>> Already-executed pending display area initialization process The audio light emission control device 90 provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is in a state where the touch sensor 25a provided on the operation handle 25a is in the off state. Execution suspension display area initialization processing for erasing the execution suspension display icon Z displayed in the execution suspension display area Dz after a predetermined period of time has passed since the suspension command was received from the control device 60. to run. In the case of a change of players, there is a certain amount of non-playing period after the previous player finishes playing and before the succeeding player starts playing. The predetermined period is determined in consideration of the period during which the game is not played, and is, for example, 5 minutes. According to this configuration, when the player changes, it is possible to suppress the remaining execution pending display icon Z accumulated by the previous player's game. For this reason, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the player changes, the game can be started without the execution pending display icon Z displayed in the execution pending display area Dz. There is no need to feel annoyed that the already-executed pending display icon Z remains in the already-executed pending display area Dz. In addition, as the execution pending display area initialization process, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is in a standby state, and the execution pending display area Dz It is also possible to delete the already-executed pending display icon Z displayed in .

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player can make It is possible to realize a new performance that has not existed in the past, such as suggesting the determination of winning a jackpot.

Here, as a reference example, consider a pachinko machine that has the function of the pending change notice effect but does not have the function of the already-executed pending notice effect. In the pachinko machine of this reference example, a pending change notice is given using the unexecuted pending display icon H displayed in the unexecuted pending display area Dh, but the unexecuted pending display icon H is shifted to the variable active pending display area Dy. However, after the change is executed and the result of the winning lottery related to the change is lost, the change execution pending display icon Y loses its meaning and becomes nothing. For example, even if the display color of the non-execution pending display icon H and the variable execution pending display icon Y becomes red with the highest expectation of winning the jackpot due to the pending change notice, the holding corresponding to the pending display icons H and Y If the result of winning lottery due to fluctuations in information is lost, nothing happens.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the interest in the game is improved by giving meaning to the already-executed pending display icon Z whose variable display is finished.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, for example, during the next variable display of case 1 shown in FIG. If the four pending display icons Z, Y are aligned in the same color, and if the change ends and each pending display icon Z, Y, H shifts to the left, the already executed pending display in the already executed pending display area Dz is displayed. The situation is such that all the icons Z have the same color. Under this circumstance, when the variable execution suspension display icon Y shifts to the already executed suspension display area Dz, the variation execution suspension display icon Y is displayed in a red color rather than a red display color. It is more advantageous for the player when the expectation of winning the jackpot is displayed in green (in the case of FIG. 569(c)).

The reason why it is highly advantageous for the player is that during the successive fluctuation display shown in FIG. This is because the result is that the jackpot winning is confirmed. For this reason, even if the hold information corresponding to the unexecuted hold display icon H and the variable execution hold display icon Y is green, and the expectation of winning the jackpot is lower than the red color, the executed hold display area Dz is displayed. Under conditions where the possibility that all the display icons Z are all the same color increases, the unexecuted pending display icon H and the variable active pending display icon Y remain green without changing to red, and are displayed in the already executed pending display area Dz. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that he wants to make the transition. In addition, in the green display color of the unexecuted pending display icon H and the variable active pending display icon Y, the pending information set for the green display color is different from the level of expectation that the jackpot will be won. A special meaning such as confirmation of winning can be given. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when all the execution suspension display icons Z in the execution suspension display area Dz are all in the same color, the success or failure result of the winning lottery is determined as the jackpot winning. For this reason, it is possible to give the player a greater sense of expectation. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as shown in case 4, the display color of the execution pending display icon Z displayed in the execution pending display area Dz may change. Therefore, for the player, for example, in a situation where the display colors of all the execution pending display icons Z displayed in the execution pending display area Dz do not match the same display color, Also, the display color of the already-executed pending display icon Z displayed in the already-executed pending display area Dz may change, and the variable-executing-suspended display icon Y displayed in the variable-executing-suspended display area Dy may indicate that the By moving to the pending display area Dz, it is expected that all the execution pending display icons Z displayed in the pending execution display area Dz will be aligned in the same display color. can. Then, the display color of the execution pending display icon Z actually displayed in the execution pending display area Dz changes, and the variable execution pending display icon Y shifts to the already executed pending display area Dz. When all the execution pending display icons Z displayed in the pending display area Dz are displayed in the same display color, it is possible to give great joy to the player.

More specifically, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, display of one pending display icon (different colored pending display icon) H, Y, Z in the determination target pending display icon row RW by the assist setting process. By converting the colors, all the display colors of the pending display icons H, Y, and Z in the determination target pending display icon row RW are made to be the same color. For this reason, even when it is not possible to align all the execution pending display icons Z in the execution pending display area Dz with the same color by simply shifting the pending display icons H, Y, and Z, a different color pending display is possible. By converting the display colors of the icons, all the pending-execution display icons Z in the pending-execution display area Dz can be arranged in the same color. In general, it takes a long time to play the game for all the pending display icons Z in the pending display area Dz just by shifting the pending display icons H, Y, and Z. By the setting process, it is possible to create a state in which all the execution pending display icons Z in the execution pending display area Dz are aligned in the same color even in a game for a relatively short period of time. As a result, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the already-executed pending notice effect can be performed at a frequency suitable for practical use.

For example, by changing the display color of the unexecuted pending display icon H in the first unexecuted pending display area Dh1, all the executed pending display icons Z in the already executed pending display area Dz will be aligned in the same color. Since there is a case, it is possible to give great joy to the player who expects that all the execution pending display icons Z in the execution pending display area Dz are all in the same color.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the unexecuted pending display icon H is circular, and the executed pending display icon Z is hexagonal. For this reason, it is easy to distinguish between the unexecuted pending display icon H and the executed pending display icon Z, and the unexecuted pending display icon H moves from the unexecuted pending display area Dh through the variable active pending display area Dy. It becomes easy to determine that the display has been shifted to the reserved display area Dz. Therefore, visibility is improved.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the execution suspension notice effect is executed in a game state (so-called normal state) in which it is substantially impossible for the game ball to enter the second start hole 34, and the game is played. It is configured such that it is not executed in a game state (during high-frequency support mode) in which it is easy for a ball to enter the second starting port 34 . In the high-frequency support mode, when the electric role open winning is won, the time for one time of opening the electric accessory 34a is set to be long, which is a state that is originally highly advantageous for the player, and the execution is suspended. The need to execute the advance notice effect is low. In addition, during the high-frequency support mode, since the variable time is short, it is difficult to execute the already-executed suspension notice effect in the non-execution suspension display area Dh and the variable-execution suspension display area Dy. For this reason, in the present embodiment, by not executing the already-executed pending notice effect during the high-frequency support mode, the control can be simplified, and in the normal state, the already-executed pending notice effect is executed. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as one aspect of changing the display mode of the suspension display icons H, Y, Z by the suspension change notice effect, the display color of the suspension display icons H, Y, Z is changed. Therefore, it is obvious at a glance whether or not all the suspension display icons Z in the execution suspension display area Dz have the same color. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the suspension information about the variable execution suspension display icon Y to be displayed in the variation execution suspension display area Dy is information indicating that the result of the winning lottery is a loss. In this case, by changing the display color of the unexecuted pending display icon H, for example, by the same color removing process when out, four existing execution pending display areas Dz1 to Dz4 are displayed in the first to fourth executed pending display areas Dz1 to Dz4. This prevents the execution suspension display icon Z from being the same color. For this reason, the player expects that the display colors of the execution suspension display icons Z in the execution suspension display area Dz are all likely to be the same color, and that the success or failure result of the winning lottery will be determined as a big win. However, the display color of the execution suspension display icon Z is not the same color, and as a result, the winning of the jackpot is not confirmed, and the expectation is disappointing and disappointing. In this way, the already-executed suspension notice effect can impart a feeling of expectation that the success or failure result of the winning lottery will be determined as a big win, and at the same time, a feeling of disappointment can be imparted. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to impart conflicting emotions such as anticipation and disappointment to the player, thereby making the game more interesting.

For example, if each pending display icon continues to shift as it is, all the executed pending display icons Z in the executed pending display area Dz are likely to have the same color. By changing the display color of the execution pending display icon H, all the execution pending display icons Z in the execution pending display area Dz may not all have the same color. Therefore, it is possible to give a great sense of disappointment to the player who expected that all the pending execution display icons Z in the pending execution display area Dz should be all of the same color.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a plurality of unexecuted pending display icons H displayed in the first to fourth unexecuted pending display areas Dh1 to Dh1 by the assist setting process included in the already executed pending notice process. In the first unexecuted pending display area Dh1 closest to the variable execution pending display area Dy, the display color of the unexecuted pending display icon H is changed to the same color as the same color pending display icon (hereinafter referred to as , called the color of the same color). In this case, immediately before the unexecuted pending display icon H shifts from the unexecuted pending display area Dh to the variable active pending display area Dy, the display mode of the unexecuted pending display icon H is switched to the same color. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a great sense of surprise.

<<12-5>> Various processes executed in the main controller:
Next, an example of specific control for executing the above-described processing in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described. The processing performed in the main controller 60 will be described first, and then the processing performed in the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

In order to advance the game of each game cycle, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing. These processes are described below. In addition to timer interrupt processing and normal processing, the MPU 62 executes NMI interrupt processing that is activated by the input of a power failure signal, but the description of these processing will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 576 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. As described above, the timer interrupt process is started periodically (for example, every 2 msec) by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 .

In step Sw0101, reading processing of various detection sensors 67a to 67e is executed. That is, it reads the states of the various detection sensors 67a to 67e connected to the main controller 60, determines the states of the sensors, and saves the detection information (entering ball detection information). After that, the process proceeds to step Sw0102.

In step Sw0102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . After that, the process proceeds to step Sw0103.

In step Sw0103, the values of the hit random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, electric accessory release counter C4, and fluctuation type counter CS are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to each of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the electric accessory release counter C4, and the variation type counter CS, and each counter value reaches the maximum value. If so, they are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM64. After that, the process proceeds to step Sw0104. In addition, the fluctuation type counter CS updates its value in the normal processing (FIG. 580) described later.

In step Sw0104, ball entry processing for the starting opening accompanying the ball entering the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34 is executed. The details of the ball entry process for the start opening in step Sw0104 will be described later. After executing step Sw0104, the process proceeds to step Sw0105.

In step Sw0105, a through ball entry process associated with the ball entering the through gate 35 is executed. The details of the through ball entry process in step Sw0105 will be described later. After executing step Sw0105, the MPU 62 ends the timer interrupt processing.

<Entering ball processing for the starting port>
Next, the ball entry process for the start opening will be described. The ball entry process for the starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (Fig. 576: Sw0104).

FIG. 577 is a flow chart showing ball entry processing for the start opening. In step Sw0201, it is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first starting port 33 whether or not the game ball has entered the first starting port 33 (starting ball). In step Sw0201, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the first starting port 33 (Sw0201: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw0202, and the prize ball for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls set command. After that, the process proceeds to step Sw0203.

In step Sw0203, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal that the game ball has entered the first start hole 33 to the management control device on the game hall side. After that, the process proceeds to step Sw0204.

In step Sw0204, the start suspension number RaN (hereinafter also referred to as the first start suspension number RaN), which is the value stored in the suspension number storage area of the first reservation area Ra, is read, and the first start suspension number RaN will be described later. Set as a target for processing. The first start suspension number RaN indicates the number of suspensions based on the ball entering the first start hole 33 . After that, the process proceeds to step Sw0209.

In step Sw0201, if it is determined that the game ball has not entered the first starting port 33 (Sw0201: NO), the process proceeds to step Sw0205, whether or not the game ball has entered the second starting port 34 is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second starting port 34 .

In step Sw0205, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34 (Sw0205: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw0206, and the prize ball for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls set command. After that, the process proceeds to step Sw0207. On the other hand, in step Sw0205, when it is determined that the game ball has not entered the second starting hole 34 (Sw0205: NO), the ball entering process for this starting hole ends.

In step Sw0207, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that the game ball has entered the second starting hole . After that, the process proceeds to step Sw0208.

In step Sw0208, the start pending quantity RbN (hereinafter also referred to as second start pending quantity RbN), which is the value stored in the reserved quantity storage area of the second reserve area Rb, is read, and the second start pending quantity RbN will be described later. Set as a target for processing. The second start suspension number RbN indicates the number of suspensions based on the ball entering the second start opening 34 . After that, the process proceeds to step Sw0209.

In step Sw0209, it is determined whether or not the number of start suspensions N (RaN or RbN) set in step Sw0204 or step Sw0208 is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment). In step Sw0209, if the number N of start suspensions is not less than the upper limit (Sw0209: NO), the ball-entering process for this start opening is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Sw0209, if the number N of pending start-ups is less than the upper limit (Sw0209: YES), proceed to step Sw0210, add 1 to the number N of pending start-up of the corresponding reserved area, and then proceed to step Sw0211. , adds 1 to the value stored in the total pending number storage area (hereinafter referred to as the total pending number CRN). The total pending number CRN indicates the sum of the first pending start number RaN and the second pending start number RbN. After that, the process proceeds to step Sw0212.

In step Sw0212, each value of the hit random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fluctuation type counter CS updated in step Sw0103 (FIG. 576) is stored in the first free storage area of the corresponding reservation area. Store in a storage area, that is, in a storage area corresponding to the pending number to which 1 is added in step Sw0210. Specifically, when the first start suspension number RaN is set as a processing target, each value of the winning random number counter C1, the big winning type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step Sw0103, It is stored in the first storage area of the free storage areas of the first reservation area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start suspension number RaN to which 1 is added in step Sw0210. In addition, when the second start suspension number RbN is set as a processing target, each value of the winning random number counter C1, the big winning type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step Sw0103 is set to the second suspension It is stored in the first memory area of the empty memory areas of the area Rb, that is, the memory area corresponding to the second start suspension number RbN to which 1 is added in step Sw0210. After executing step Sw0212, the process proceeds to step Sw0213.

In step Sw0213, the first determination process is executed. The first determination process is based on the information (holding information) of each value of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. This is a process of determining whether or not there is an occurrence, etc., before the hold information is subject to a winning lottery by the main controller 60 . The details of the first determination process will be described later. After executing step Sw0213, the process proceeds to step Sw0214.

In step Sw0214, processing for setting a hold command is executed. Concretely, the decision result of previous decision processing which is executed on the basis of the information of each value (pending information) of hit random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2 and reach random number counter C3 is set as a hold command.

The pending command indicates that the ball has entered the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34 and the judgment result (first judgment information) of the first judgment process based on the holding information acquired based on the entry, This is a command for causing the sub-side control device to confirm the pending information before the main control device 60 becomes a target of the winning lottery. The hold command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 580: step Sw0503) of the normal process, which will be described later.

Further, when the sound emission control device 90 receives a hold command transmitted based on the ball entering the first starting hole 33, the display in the first starting hole holding area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 is held. A command is sent to the display control device 100 to change the number to correspond to the increase in the number. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first start opening reservation region Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of reservations. On the other hand, when receiving the hold command transmitted based on the ball entering the second starting hole 34, the sound emission control device 90 holds the display in the second starting hole holding region Ds2 of the pattern display device 41. A command is sent to the display control device 100 to change the number to correspond to the increase in the number. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second start opening reservation region Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the increase in the number of reservations.

After executing step Sw0214, the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 terminates the ball-entering process for the starting opening.

<First determination process>
Next, the preceding determination processing will be described. The first determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (Fig. 577: Sw0213) of the ball entry process for the starting opening.

FIG. 578 is a flowchart showing the first determination process. As described above, the first determination process, based on the pending information, determines the success or failure of the winning lottery, determines the type of big win, determines whether or not reach occurs, and the like. It is a process to be executed before becoming the target of

In step Sw0301, the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the storage area by the ball entering the starting hole in the ball entering process for the starting hole (FIG. 577) is grasped. After that, the process proceeds to step Sw0302, and the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery due to the current ball entry is executed as a game round is determined. Specifically, the judgment result of the previous judgment process executed by the ball entry before the current ball entry is read from the corresponding storage area, and whether or not there is a probability variable jackpot that occurs before the winning lottery due to the current ball entry Also, the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery due to the current ball entry is executed as a game round is determined by grasping the presence or absence of winning in the falling lottery.

In step Sw0302, when it is determined that the lottery mode is the low-probability mode at the time when the winning lottery due to the current ball entry is executed as a game round, (Sw0302: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw0303, and the success/failure table is stored. The success/failure table for the low-probability mode (FIG. 557(a)) stored in the area 63a is referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step Sw0305, and as a result of referring to the success/failure table for the low-probability mode, it is determined whether or not the value information of the hit random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to a big win.

On the other hand, in step Sw0302, when it is determined that the lottery mode is not the low-probability mode at the time when the winning lottery due to the current ball entry is executed as a game round (Sw0302: NO), the process proceeds to step Sw0304, and the success/failure table is stored. Refer to the success/failure table for the high probability mode (FIG. 557(b)) stored in the area 63a. After that, the process proceeds to step Sw0305, and as a result of referring to the success/failure table for the high-probability mode, it is determined whether or not the value of the hit random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to a big win.

In step Sw0305, if it is determined that the value of the winning random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to a big win (Sw0305: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw0306, and is stored in the storage area by the ball entering the start opening this time. The value of the jackpot type counter C2 is grasped. After that, the process proceeds to step Sw0307, and the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 63b is referred to. Specifically, when the jackpot type counter C2 to be sorted this time is obtained based on the ball entering the first start port 33, refer to the first start port sort table. , the distribution table for the second starting opening is referred to when the information is acquired based on the ball entering the second starting opening 34 . After executing step Sw0307, the process proceeds to step Sw0308.

In step Sw0308, as a result of referring to the distribution table, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot type counter C2 grasped this time corresponds to the variable probability jackpot. In step Sw0308, when it is determined that the variable probability jackpot is supported (Sw0308: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw0309, and the variable probability jackpot information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h. After that, the preceding determination process is terminated. On the other hand, in step Sw0308, when it is determined that the variable probability jackpot is not supported (Sw0308: NO), the process proceeds to step Sw0310, and the normal jackpot information is stored in the first determination processing result storage area 64h. After that, the process proceeds to step Sw0315.

In step Sw0305, if it is determined that the value of the hit random number counter C1 grasped this time does not correspond to a big hit (Sw0305: NO), the process proceeds to step Sw0311, and the entry into the starting port this time causes the storage area to be stored. The value of the stored reach random number counter C3 is grasped. After that, the process proceeds to step Sw0312, and the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c is referred to. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sw0313, and as a result of referring to the reach determination table, it is determined whether or not the value of the reach random number counter C3 grasped this time corresponds to the occurrence of reach.

In step Sw0313, when it is determined that reach occurrence is supported (Sw0313: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw0314, and reach occurrence information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h. After that, the process proceeds to step Sw0315. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sw0313 that the reach occurrence is not supported (Sw0313: NO), the process proceeds to step Sw0315.

In step Sw0315, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the storage area due to the ball entering the starting hole in the ball entering process for the starting hole (FIG. 577) is grasped. After that, it proceeds to step Sw0316, refers to the variation time table for big hit stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, and obtains variation time information corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS. After executing step Sw0316, the process proceeds to step Sw0317.

In step Sw0317, a variation pattern is identified from the variation time information acquired in step Sw0316, and the type of the identified variation pattern is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h. After executing step Sw0317, the current destination determination process ends.

<Entering ball processing for through>
Next, the ball entry processing for through will be described. The through ball entry process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 576: Sw0105).

FIG. 579 is a flow chart showing the ball entry processing for through. In step Sw0401, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the through gate 35 or not. In step Sw0401, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the through gate 35 (Sw0401: YES), proceed to step Sw0402, whether the number SN of the reserved accessory is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) determine whether or not Incidentally, the accessory reserved number SN is a value indicating the number of balls entered into the through gate 35 reserved for performing the electric accessory open lottery. In this embodiment, the maximum value of the number SN of reserved accessory items is four. On the other hand, in step Sw0401, when it is determined that the game ball has not entered the through gate 35 (Sw0401: NO), this through ball entering processing is terminated.

In step Sw0402, when it is determined that the value is less than the upper limit value (less than 4) of the reserved role product number SN (Sw0402: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw0403, and 1 is added to the reserved role product number SN. After that, the process proceeds to step Sw0404.

In step Sw0404, the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4 updated in step Sw0103 (FIG. 576) is stored in the first storage area of the empty storage areas of the electrician holding area 64d of the RAM64. After that, the through ball entry processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sw0402 that the value of the reserved role number SN is not less than the upper limit (Sw0402: NO), that is, if it is determined that the value of the reserved role number SN is equal to or greater than the upper limit, Without storing the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4, the ball entry processing for through is terminated.

<Normal processing>
Next, normal processing will be described. The normal process is a process started by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 when the power switch 88 is switched from off to on (hereinafter also referred to as "power on"). In normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed.

FIG. 580 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step Sw0501, start-up processing is executed. Specifically, initialization of each control device upon power-on, determination of validity of data stored in the RAM 64, and the like are executed. After that, the process proceeds to step Sw0502.

In step Sw0502, a startup command is set. The start-up command is a command for causing each sub-side control device to start a demonstration video when the power is turned on. After that, the process proceeds to step Sw0503.

In step Sw0503, the output data such as the start-up command set in step Sw0502 and the command set in the timer interrupt process or the normal process executed last time are transmitted to each sub-side control device. Specifically, the presence or absence of the prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 70 . In addition, when commands related to effects such as start-up commands, variation commands, type commands, and hold commands are set, they are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . After executing step Sw0503, the process proceeds to step Sw0504.

In step Sw0504, the change type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the fluctuation type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . After that, the process proceeds to step Sw0505.

In step Sw0505, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step Sw0506. In step Sw0506, game round control processing for controlling the game in each game round is executed. In the game round control processing, a winning lottery, setting of variable display of symbols by the symbol display device 41, display control of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b, and the like are performed. Details of the game round control process will be described later. After executing step Sw0506, the process proceeds to step Sw0507.

In step Sw0507, game state transition processing is executed to shift the game state. By executing the game state transition process, the game state shifts to an opening/closing execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, and the like. Details of the game state transition processing will be described later. After that, the process proceeds to step Sw0508.

In step Sw0508, an electric support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 34a provided at the second starting port 34 is executed. In the electric role support process, it is determined whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a. The details of the electronic support process will be described later. After that, the process proceeds to step Sw0509.

In step Sw0509, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has passed since the start of the current normal processing (strictly speaking, the start of the command output processing in step Sw0503). That is, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the next normal process. In step Sw0509, if it is determined that the predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed since the start of the normal processing this time (Sw0509: NO), in steps Sw0510 and Sw0511, until the execution timing of the next normal processing Within the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated. Specifically, in step Sw0510, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . Further, in step Sw0511, 1 is added to the fluctuation type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . On the other hand, in step Sw0509, if it is determined that the predetermined time (4 msec) has elapsed since the start of the normal processing this time (Sw0509: YES), the process returns to step Sw0503, and each process from step Sw0503 to step Sw0508 is performed. Execute.

Since the execution time of each process from step Sw0503 to step Sw0508 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using the remaining time, the values of these counters can be randomly updated.

<Game Round Control Processing>
Next, game round control processing will be described. The game round control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (Fig. 580: Sw0506).

FIG. 581 is a flow chart showing game round control processing. In step Sw0601, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON when the game state is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode in the later-described game state transition processing, and turned OFF when the opening/closing execution mode is ended in the game state transition processing.

In step Sw0601, when it is determined that the open/close execution mode is in progress (Sw0601: YES), this game round control process is terminated without executing any of the processes after step Sw0602. That is, when the open/close execution mode is in progress, the game cycle is not started regardless of whether or not a ball is entered into the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34 . On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sw0601 that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress (Sw0601: NO), the process proceeds to step Sw0602.

In step Sw0602, it is determined whether or not the special figure unit 37 is displayed in a variable manner. Specifically, it is determined whether or not one of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b provided in the special figure unit 37 is in the process of variable display. This determination is made by determining whether or not the special figure variation displaying flag in the special figure variation displaying flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The special figure variable display flag is turned ON when one of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b is to start the variable display, and is turned OFF when the variable display is finished.

In step Sw0602, when it is determined that the special figure unit 37 is not displayed in a variable manner (Sw0602: NO), the process proceeds to step Sw0603.

In step Sw0603, a variation start process for starting the variation display in the special figure unit 37 and the variation display in the symbol display device 41 is executed. The details of the fluctuation start process will be described later. After executing step Sw0603, this game round control process is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Sw0602, when it is determined that the special figure unit 37 is displayed in a variable manner (Sw0602: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw0604.

In step Sw0604, a variation end process for ending the variation display in the special figure unit 37 and the variation display in the symbol display device 41 is executed. The details of the fluctuation end processing will be described later. After executing step Sw0604, this game round control process is terminated.

<Variation start processing>
Next, fluctuation start processing will be described. The variation start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game round control process (FIG. 581: Sw0603).

FIG. 582 is a flowchart showing fluctuation start processing. In step Sw0701, it is determined whether or not the total pending number CRN exceeds "0". When the total pending number CRN is less than or equal to "0", it means that the pending start number for both the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 is "0". Therefore, in step Sw0701, when it is determined that the total number of reservations CRN is equal to or less than "0" (Sw0701: NO), this fluctuation start processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sw0701 that the total pending number CRN exceeds "0" (Sw0701: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw0702.

In step Sw0702, hold information shift processing for setting the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra or the second hold area Rb to the state after the start of fluctuation is executed, and the process proceeds to step Sw0703. Details of the pending information shift process will be described later.

In step Sw0703, a winning determination process including a process when a big win is won in a winning lottery is performed. The details of the hit determination process will be described later. After executing step Sw0703, the process proceeds to step Sw0704.

In step Sw0704, variable time setting processing is executed. The variable time setting process is for setting the variable time, which is the time required for the current game round in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b, based on the presence or absence of a big hit, the presence or absence of reach, and the like. is the processing of Details of the variable time setting process will be described later. After executing step Sw0704, the process proceeds to step Sw0705.

In step Sw0705, a variation command is set. The command for variation includes whether the current game cycle is related to the hold information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33, or acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 34. Information indicating whether or not it relates to the hold information is included, as well as information on the presence or absence of reach occurrence and information on the variable time set in step Sw0706. After executing step Sw0705, the process proceeds to step Sw0706.

At step Sw0706, a type command is set. The type command includes information on the presence or absence of a big hit and the result of distribution determination. That is, the type command includes 16R probability variable jackpot information, 8R probability variable jackpot information, 16R normal jackpot information, 8R normal jackpot information, or loss result information about winning lottery as information on the jackpot type. is

The variation command and type command set at steps Sw0705 and Sw0706 are sent to the sound emission control device 90 at step Sw0503 in the normal process (FIG. 580). The sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect in the game round based on the received variation command and the type command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the effect is executed. After executing step Sw0706, the process proceeds to step Sw0707.

In step Sw0707, of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b, the symbol display portion corresponding to the current game round is caused to start the variable display of symbols. Specifically, when the second symbol display portion flag of the RAM 64 is not ON, the first symbol display portion 37a is specified as the symbol display portion corresponding to the current game round, and the variable display is started, When the second pattern display portion flag is ON, the second pattern display portion 37b is specified as the pattern display portion corresponding to the current game round, and the variable display is started. After executing step Sw0707, the process proceeds to step Sw0708.

In step Sw0708, the special figure fluctuation display flag stored in the special figure fluctuation display flag storage area in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned ON. After executing step Sw0708, this fluctuation start process is terminated.

<Holding information shift processing>
Next, the pending information shift process will be described. The hold information shift process is executed by MPU 62 of main controller 60 as a subroutine of fluctuation start process (Fig. 582: Sw0702).

FIG. 583 is a flowchart showing pending information shift processing. In step Sw0801, it is determined whether or not the reservation area to be processed for execution of the reservation information shift process is the first reservation area Ra. Specifically, the first stored hold information (hold information) is the first stored hold information (stored in the first area of the second hold area Rb) among the hold information stored chronologically in the second hold area Rb (Fig. 556). is stored in the reservation area prior to the reservation information), the reservation area to be processed is determined to be the first reservation area Ra. On the other hand, the first reservation information stored chronologically in the second reservation area Rb than the first reservation information stored chronologically in the first reservation area Ra If the stored reservation information is stored in the reservation area first, the reservation area to be processed is determined to be the second reservation area Rb. That is, by executing the process of step Sw0801, the reservation information can be processed in the order stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb.

In step Sw0801, when it is determined that the reservation area to be processed is the first reservation area Ra (step Sw0801: YES), the reservation information shift processing for the first reservation area in steps Sw0802 to Sw0807 is executed. On the other hand, in step Sw0801, if it is determined that the processing target reservation area is not the first reservation area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the processing target reservation area is the second reservation area Rb (step Sw0801: NO ), the reservation information shift processing for the second reservation area in steps Sw0808 to Sw0813 is executed.

In step Sw0802, after subtracting 1 from the first start-up reservation number RaN in the first reservation area Ra, the process proceeds to step Sw0803 to subtract 1 from the total reservation number CRN. After that, the process proceeds to step Sw0804. In step Sw0804, the data stored in the first area of the first reservation area Ra is moved to the execution area AE. After that, the process proceeds to step Sw0805.

In step Sw0805, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first reservation area Ra is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After executing step Sw0805, the process proceeds to step Sw0806.

In step Sw0806, if the second pattern display portion flag in the various flag storage area 64g is ON, the flag is turned OFF, and if not ON, the state is maintained. The second pattern display portion flag is information for specifying which of the first pattern display portion 37a and the second pattern display portion 37b is the target for starting the variable display this time. After that, the process proceeds to step Sw0807.

In step Sw0807, a shift command is set. The shift time command is a command including information for making the sound emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, recognize that the data in the reserved area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63, information indicating that the reservation area to which the data is to be shifted this time corresponds to the first reservation area Ra, that is, the information corresponding to the first start port 33 A shift-time command including information indicating that the shift-time command is included is selected, and the selected shift-time command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . After that, the hold information shift process is terminated. The shift command set in step Sw0807 is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step Sw0503 of the normal process (FIG. 580).

In step Sw0801, if it is determined that the reservation area to be processed is not the first reservation area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the reservation area to be processed is the second reservation area Rb (Sw0801: NO), step Proceed to Sw0808.

In step Sw0808, 1 is subtracted from the second starting reservation quantity RbN in the second reservation area Rb. After that, the process proceeds to step Sw0809. In step Sw0809, 1 is subtracted from the total pending number CRN, and the process proceeds to step Sw0810 to move the data stored in the first area of the second pending area Rb to the execution area AE. After that, the process proceeds to step Sw0811.

In step Sw0811, the process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second reservation area Rb is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After executing step Sw0811, the process proceeds to step Sw0812.

In step Sw0812, if the second pattern display flag in the various flag storage area 64g is not ON, the flag is turned ON, and if it is ON, that state is maintained. After that, the process proceeds to step Sw0813.

In step Sw0813, a shift command is set. The shift time command is a command including information for making the sound emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, recognize that the data in the reserved area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63, the information indicating that the reservation area to which the data is to be shifted this time corresponds to the second reservation area Rb, that is, the information corresponding to the second start port 34 A shift-time command including information indicating that the shift-time command is included is selected, and the selected shift-time command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . After that, the hold information shift process is terminated.

The shift command set in step Sw0813 is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step Sw0503 of the normal process (FIG. 580). The sound emission control device 90, based on the received shift time command, displays a command for changing the display in the second start opening reservation region Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations. Send to 100. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second start opening reservation region Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations.

<Hit determination processing>
Next, hit determination processing will be described. The hit determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the fluctuation start process (Fig. 582: Sw0703).

FIG. 584 is a flowchart showing hit determination processing. In step Sw0901, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

If it is determined in step Sw0901 that the mode is the high probability mode (Sw0901: YES), the process advances to step Sw0902, and the success/failure determination is performed by referring to the success/failure table for the high probability mode. Specifically, whether or not the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as a jackpot winning in the success/failure table for the high probability mode shown in FIG. 557(b). determine whether After that, the process proceeds to step Sw0904.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sw0901 that the mode is not the high-probability mode (Sw0901: NO), the process advances to step Sw0903, and the success/failure determination is performed by referring to the success/failure table for the low-probability mode. Specifically, whether or not the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the big hit in the success/failure table for the low probability mode shown in FIG. 557(a). determine whether After that, the process proceeds to step Sw0904.

In step Sw0904, it is determined whether or not the result of the success/failure determination (hit lottery) in step Sw0902 or step Sw0903 is a big hit. In step Sw0904, when the result of the winning/failure determination is a jackpot winning (Sw0904: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw0905.

At step Sw0905, it is determined whether or not the second pattern display flag of the RAM 64 is ON. In step Sw0905, if it is determined that the second symbol display unit flag is not ON (Sw0905: NO), proceed to step Sw0906 and refer to the distribution table for the first start opening (see FIG. 558(a)). and make a distribution judgment. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is any of the numerical range of the 16R probability variable jackpot, the numerical range of the 8R probability variable jackpot, the numerical range of the 16R normal jackpot, and the numerical range of the 8R normal jackpot. determine whether it is contained in

On the other hand, in step Sw0905, when it is determined that the second pattern display flag is ON (Sw0905: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw0907, and the distribution table for the second starting port (see FIG. 558(b)) Refer to to make a distribution judgment. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in the numeric range of the 16R probability variable jackpot or the numeric range of the 8R normal jackpot. After executing the process of step Sw0906 or step Sw0907, the process proceeds to step Sw0908.

In step Sw0908, the flag (jackpot flag) corresponding to the type of jackpot sorted in step Sw0906 or step Sw0907 is turned ON. Specifically, when it is a 16R probability variable jackpot, the 16R probability variable jackpot flag is turned ON, when it is an 8R probability variable jackpot, the 8R probability variable jackpot flag is turned ON, and when it is a 16R normal jackpot, the 16R normal jackpot flag is turned on. When it is 8R normal jackpot, the 8R normal jackpot flag is turned ON. After executing step Sw0908, the process proceeds to step Sw0909.

In step Sw0909, the process of setting the stop result for the jackpot is executed. Specifically, in the current game turn in which the big win is won, it is set whether the variable display is to be ended in the state in which the stop result is displayed in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b. This is a process for Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63f (FIG. 555), the stop result data corresponding to the type of jackpot distributed in step Sw0906 or step Sw0907 Address information is acquired, and the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After executing step Sw0909, the hit determination process ends.

In step Sw0904, if the result of the winning lottery in step Sw0902 or step Sw0903 is not a jackpot winning (Sw0904: NO), proceed to step Sw0910, refer to the reach determination table, and reach occurs in the game round. or not. Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is set as reach occurrence in the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c (Fig. 555). Determines whether or not it matches the value After that, the process proceeds to step Sw0911.

In step Sw0911, if the reach determination result in step Sw0910 indicates that reach occurs in the game round (Sw0911: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw0912, and the reach occurrence flag is turned ON. Specifically, the reach occurrence flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned ON. After executing step Sw0912, the process proceeds to step Sw0913.

On the other hand, in step Sw0911, if the result of reach determination in step Sw0910 is that reach does not occur in the game round (Sw0911: NO), the process proceeds to step Sw0913 without executing step Sw0912.

In step Sw0913, a process of setting a stop result for failure is executed. Specifically, in the current game turn that results in a loss, the variable display is set to end in a state in which the stop result is displayed in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b. processing. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for failure in the stop result table storage area 63f, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is obtained. , the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After executing step Sw0913, the hit determination process ends.

<Variation time setting process>
Next, the variable time setting process will be described. The variable time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variable start process (Fig. 582: Sw0704).

FIG. 585 is a flowchart showing variable time setting processing. In step Sw1001, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired. After that, the process proceeds to step Sw1002.

In step Sw1002, a process of specifying a fluctuation time table is executed. The fluctuation time table is data in tabular form having data elements of fluctuation time information (variation time information), which is the time from when the pattern starts to stop until it stops, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS. In the variable time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63, various types of variable time tables are stored according to the game state, the presence or absence of the jackpot and time saving provision, and the presence or absence of reach occurrence. In step Sw1002, one variable time table is identified from these variable time tables. Specifically, based on the high probability mode flag and the high frequency support mode flag, the current gaming state is low probability low support state, high probability high support state, low probability high support state, high probability low support state It is determined whether it is in any of the above, the result of the determination, the result of the determination of whether or not there is a jackpot or time saving, and the determination result of the reach determination that determines whether or not the reach occurs. One variable time table is specified from the variable time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63 based on the above. After executing step Sw1002, the process proceeds to step Sw1003.

In step Sw1003, by referring to the fluctuation time table identified in step Sw1002, fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS obtained in step Sw1001 is acquired. After executing step Sw1003, the process proceeds to step Sw1004.

In step Sw1004, the variable time information acquired in step Sw1003 is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM64. After that, the variable time setting process is terminated.

<Variation end processing>
Next, the fluctuation end processing will be described. The fluctuation end process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game round control process (Fig. 581: Sw0604).

FIG. 586 is a flowchart showing fluctuation end processing. In step Sw1101, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the current game round has elapsed. As described above, the variation time is the time from when the symbol row starts to vary until all the symbol rows stop, and is part of the unit game time. Specifically, in step Sw1101, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable time information stored in the variable time counter area (various counter area 64f) of the RAM 64 has become "0". The value of the variable time information is set in the aforementioned variable time setting process (FIG. 585). The value of this set variable time information is decremented by 1 each time timer interrupt processing is started.

If it is determined in step Sw1101 that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (Sw1101: NO), this fluctuation end processing is terminated.

In step Sw1101, when it is determined that the fluctuation time has passed (Sw1101: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw1102, and the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b corresponding to the current game round A process for ending the variation of the symbols in the symbol display section is performed. Subsequently, in step Sw1103, the special figure variation displaying flag stored in the special figure variation displaying flag storage area in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned OFF. After executing step Sw1103, the process proceeds to step Sw1104.

In step Sw1104, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a big win. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the 16R probability variable jackpot flag, 8R probability variable jackpot flag, 16R normal jackpot flag, and 8R normal jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is ON. In step Sw1104, if none of the above flags is ON, that is, if it is determined that the win lottery win/fail result for the current game round is not a big win (Sw1104: NO), the process proceeds to step Sw1105.

In step Sw1105, it is determined whether or not the support mode is the high frequency support mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

At step Sw1105, when it is determined that the high-frequency support mode flag is ON (Sw1105: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw1106 to determine whether or not the value of the number-of-games counter PNC exceeds zero. In step Sw1106, when it is determined that the value of the number-of-games counter PNC exceeds 0 (Sw1106: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw1107, and 1 is subtracted from the value of the number-of-games counter PNC. After executing step Sw1107, the process proceeds to step Sw1108. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sw1106 that the value of the number-of-games counter PNC is 0 or less (Sw1106: NO), the process proceeds to step Sw1108 without executing step Sw1107.

In step Sw1108, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

If it is determined in step Sw1108 that the high probability mode flag is not ON (Sw1108: NO), the process proceeds to step Sw1109 to determine whether or not the value of the number-of-games counter PNC exceeds zero.

If it is determined in step Sw1109 that the value of the number-of-games counter PNC does not exceed 0 (step Sw1109: NO), the process proceeds to step Sw1110 to turn off the high frequency support mode flag. After executing step Sw1110, the variable time ending process ends.

When it is determined that the high probability mode flag is ON in step Sw1108 (Sw1108: YES), or when it is determined that the value of the number of games counter PNC exceeds 0 in step Sw1109 (step Sw1109: YES) , ends the variable time end processing without executing step Sw1110. If it is determined in step Sw1105 that the high-frequency support mode flag is not ON (Sw1105: NO), this variable time ending process is terminated without executing steps Sw106 to Sw1110.

On the other hand, in step Sw1104, any one of the 16R probability variable jackpot flag, 8R probability variable jackpot flag, 16R normal jackpot flag, and 8R normal jackpot flag is ON. is a big hit (Sw1104: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw1111, and the open/close execution mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned ON. After executing step Sw1111, the variable time ending process ends.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the game state transition processing will be explained. The game state transition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of normal process (Fig. 580: Sw0507).

FIG. 587 is a flowchart showing game state transition processing. In step Sw1201, it is determined whether or not the ending period flag is ON. The ending period flag is turned ON at the end of the big winning opening opening/closing process period (at the start of the ending period) in the opening/closing execution mode, and turned OFF at the end of the ending period. The ending period is a period for executing the ending effect in the opening/closing execution mode.

If it is determined in step Sw1201 that the ending period flag is not ON (Sw1201: NO), the process advances to step Sw1202 to determine whether or not the opening/closing process period flag is ON. The opening/closing process period flag is turned ON at the timing when the opening period ends in the opening/closing execution mode and the big winning opening opening/closing process period, which is the period during which the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is executed, starts. , is turned off at the timing when the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 36b ends.

If it is determined in step Sw1202 that the opening/closing process period flag is not ON (Sw1202: NO), the process advances to step Sw1203 to determine whether or not the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is turned ON at the start of the opening period and turned OFF at the end of the opening period.

If it is determined in step Sw1203 that the opening period flag is not ON (Sw1203: NO), the process advances to step Sw1204 to determine whether or not the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step Sw1204 that the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON (Sw1204: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw1205. On the other hand, in step Sw1204, when it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode flag is OFF (Sw1204: NO), this game state transition processing is terminated as it is.

At step Sw1205, the high probability mode flag is turned off. After that, the process proceeds to step Sw1206. At step Sw1206, the high frequency support mode flag is turned off. After that, the process proceeds to step Sw1207.

In step Sw1207, an opening/closing scenario setting process for setting an opening/closing scenario is executed. The opening/closing scenario defines the pattern of the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 36b in the round game. It is a program in which conditions for shifting the opening/closing door 36b from the open state to the closed state (hereinafter also referred to as "closed conditions") are recorded. The opening/closing scenario is stored in the opening/closing scenario storage area 63h of the ROM 63.

The opening conditions are, for example, as follows.
- The current state of the pachinko machine 10 is the timing for starting each round game in the open/close execution mode.
When one of the above items is established, the opening/closing door 36b shifts from the closed state to the open state.

Closing conditions are, for example, as follows.
- The elapsed time from the start of each round game exceeds a predetermined upper limit duration (for example, 15 seconds).
- The number of game balls entered into the big winning hole 36a after starting each round game exceeds a predetermined upper limit number.
When either one of the above two items is established, the opening/closing door 36b shifts from the open state to the closed state.

After executing step Sw1207, the process proceeds to step Sw1208 described above.

In step Sw1208, an opening time setting process is executed. The opening time setting process is a process of setting the length of time of the opening period (hereinafter also referred to as opening time) in the open/close execution mode. In this embodiment, the opening time of the same fixed length is set in each opening period. Specifically, "3000" (ie, 6 sec) is set in the third timer counter area T3 that determines the opening time. The third timer counter area T3 is provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM64. After executing step Sw1208, the process proceeds to step Sw1209.

At step Sw1209, an opening command is set. The set opening command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 at step Sw0503 in the normal process (FIG. 580). This opening command includes information on the set opening time and the number of rounds of the current open/close execution mode. A sound emission control device 90 determines the contents of performance corresponding to the opening time and the period of opening/closing processing of the big winning opening based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents are executed. After executing step Sw1209, the process advances to step Sw1210 to turn on the opening period flag. After that, the game state transition processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sw1203 that the opening period flag is ON (Sw1203: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw1211.

In step Sw1211, it is determined whether or not the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the third timer counter area T3 is "0". If it is determined in step Sw1211 that the opening period has ended (Sw1211: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw1212 to turn off the opening period flag. After that, the process proceeds to step Sw1213.

In step Sw1213, round display start processing for notifying the type of the current open/close execution mode is executed. Specifically, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 is confirmed. Based on the confirmed address information, stop result data corresponding to the address information is specified from among the stop result data group stored in the ROM 63, and the content of the number of rounds is determined from the specified stop result data. confirm. After that, the content of the confirmed number of rounds is output to the round display section 39 in the main display section 45 . As a result, the round display section 39 displays the round information related to the output. After executing step Sw1213, the process proceeds to step Sw1214.

In step Sw1214, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned ON. In subsequent step Sw1215, an opening/closing process start command is set. The opening/closing process start command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the opening/closing process period has started. The opening/closing process start command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 580: step Sw0503) of the normal process. After executing step Sw1215, the game state transition processing is terminated.

In step Sw1202, when it is determined that the opening/closing process period flag is ON (Sw1202: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw1216 to execute the big winning opening opening/closing process. The special prize opening opening/closing process will be described later. After executing step Sw1216, the process proceeds to step Sw1217.

In step Sw1217, it is determined whether or not the big winning opening opening/closing process has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the big winning opening opening/closing process has ended depending on whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 for counting the number of times the opening/closing door 36b is opened is "0". do. In step Sw1217, when it is determined that the big winning opening opening/closing process has ended (Sw1217: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw1218. On the other hand, in step Sw1217, when it is determined that the big winning opening opening/closing process has not ended (Sw1217: NO), this game state transition process ends.

In step Sw1218, the open/close process period flag is turned off, and then the process proceeds to step Sw1219.

In step Sw1219, round display end processing is executed. In this process, the display control of the round display portion 39 in the main display portion 45 is terminated so that the round display portion 39 is turned off. After executing step Sw1219, the process proceeds to step Sw1220.

In step Sw1220, an ending time setting process is executed. The ending time setting process is a process of setting the length of time of the ending period (hereinafter also referred to as ending time) in the open/close execution mode. In this embodiment, the ending time of the same constant length is set for each ending period. Specifically, "3000" (ie, 6 sec) is set in the fourth timer counter area T4 that determines the ending time. The fourth timer counter area T4 is provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM64. After executing step Sw1220, the process proceeds to step Sw1221.

In step Sw1221, an ending command is set. This set ending command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step Sw0503 in the normal process (FIG. 580). Upon receiving the ending command, the sound emission control device 90 terminates the effect corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode. After executing step Sw1221, the process proceeds to step Sw1222.

In step Sw1222, the ending period flag is turned ON. After that, the game state transition processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sw1201 that the ending period flag is ON (Sw1201: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw1223.

In step Sw1223, it is determined whether or not the ending period has ended. Specifically, in the ending time setting process (Sw1220), it is determined whether or not the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0". When it is determined in step Sw1220 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0" (Sw1223: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw1224.

At step Sw1224, the ending period flag is turned off. After that, the process advances to step Sw1225 to execute transition processing at the end of the ending period. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes of game rounds after the end of the current ending period. Details of the transition processing at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing step Sw1225, the process proceeds to step Sw1226 to turn off the opening/closing execution mode flag. After executing step Sw1226, the process proceeds to step Sw1227.

In step Sw1227, it is determined whether or not the total pending number CRN is "0". When the total pending number CRN is "0", it means that the start pending number is "0" for both the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34. FIG. If it is determined in step Sw1227 that the total pending number CRN is "0" (Sw1227: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw1228.

In step Sw1228, a customer waiting command is set. The customer waiting command is used to make the sound emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub-side, recognize that no hold information is stored in the hold information storage area 64b at the time when the pattern variation (game cycle) ends. is a command that contains information about This set customer waiting command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step Sw1228 in the normal process (FIG. 580). After executing step Sw1228, this game round control process is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Sw1227, when it is determined that the total number of reserved cards CRN is not "0" (Sw1227: NO), this game round control process is terminated. Also, in step Sw1223, when it is determined that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is not "0" (Sw1223: NO), this game state transition processing is terminated as it is.

<Opening and closing processing of the grand prize opening>
Next, the big winning opening opening/closing process will be described. The big winning opening opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (Fig. 587: Sw1216).

FIG. 588 is a flow chart showing the big winning opening opening/closing process. In step Sw1301, it is determined whether or not the door 36b is open. Specifically, the determination is made based on the drive state of the variable winning drive section 36c. If it is determined in step Sw1301 that the opening/closing door 36b is not open (Sw1301: NO), the process proceeds to step Sw1302.

In step Sw1302, it is determined whether or not the conditions for opening the door 36b are met. Specifically, the opening/closing scenario set by the opening/closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether or not it is time to open the opening/closing door 36b. If it is determined in step Sw1302 that the conditions for opening the door 36b are met (Sw1302: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw1303.

In step Sw1303, the opening/closing door 36b is opened. After that, the process proceeds to step Sw1304.

In step Sw1304, a door opening command is set. The opening/closing door open command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the opening/closing door 36b has been opened. The opening/closing door open command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 580: step Sw0503) of the normal process. After executing step Sw1304, the big winning opening opening/closing process ends.

In step Sw1302, when it is determined that the condition for opening the opening/closing door 36b is not established (Sw1302: NO), the big winning opening opening/closing process is terminated without executing steps Sw1303 and Sw1304.

If it is determined in step Sw1301 that the opening/closing door 36b is open (Sw1301: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw1305.

In step Sw1305, it is determined whether or not the condition for closing the door 36b is satisfied. Specifically, the opening/closing scenario set by the opening/closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether or not it is time to close the opening/closing door 36b. If it is determined in step Sw1305 that the condition for closing the opening/closing door 36b is satisfied (Sw1305: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw1306.

In step Sw1306, the opening/closing door 36b is closed. After that, the process proceeds to step Sw1307.

In step Sw1307, an opening/closing door closing command is set. The open/close door closing command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the open/close door 36b is closed. The open/close door closing command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 580: step Sw0503) of the normal process. After executing step Sw1307, the big winning opening opening/closing process is ended.

When it is determined in step Sw1305 that the closing condition of the opening/closing door 36b is not established (Sw1305: NO), the big winning opening opening/closing process is terminated without executing steps Sw1306 and Sw1307.

<Transition processing at the end of the ending period>
Next, transition processing at the end of the ending period will be described. The transition process at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (Fig. 587: Sw1225).

FIG. 589 is a flowchart showing transition processing at the end of the ending period. In step Sw1401, it is determined whether or not the flag corresponding to the probability variable jackpot in the jackpot flag is turned on. That is, it is determined whether or not the 16R probability variable jackpot flag or the 8R probability variable jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is ON.

In step Sw1401, when it is determined that the 16R probability variable big hit flag or the 8R probability variable big hit flag of RAM64 is ON (Sw1401: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw1402, one of the 16R probability variable big hit flag and the 8R probability variable big hit flag of RAM64 The ON flag is turned OFF. After executing step Sw1402, the process proceeds to step Sw1403.

In step Sw1403, the high-probability mode flag is turned ON, and then the process advances to step Sw1404 to turn the high-frequency support mode flag ON. As a result, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the game state shifts to a game state in which the lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode. After that, the process proceeds to step Sw1405.

In step Sw1405, 100 is set to the number-of-games counter PNC provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM64. The value set in the number-of-games counter PNC indicates the number of games when the number of games is limited and the high-frequency support mode is executed. After that, the process proceeds to step Sw1406.

In step Sw1406, a high-probability mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the lottery mode is the high-probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. . After that, the process proceeds to step Sw1411.

On the other hand, in step Sw1401, when it is determined that the 16R probability variable jackpot flag and the 8R probability variable jackpot flag of RAM64 are not ON (Sw1401: NO), the process proceeds to step Sw1407, and the 8R normal jackpot flag of RAM64 is turned OFF. After that, the process proceeds to step Sw1408.

At step Sw1408, after turning on the high-frequency support mode flag, the process proceeds to step Sw1409, and 100 is set to the number-of-games counter PNC provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM64. After that, the process proceeds to step Sw1410.

In step Sw1410, a low-probability mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the lottery mode is the low-probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. . After that, the process proceeds to step Sw1411.

In step Sw1411, a high-frequency support mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. set. After that, the transition processing at the end of the ending period ends.

<Electronic support processing>
Next, the processing for electric support will be described. The electric service support process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (Fig. 580: Sw0508).

FIG. 590 is a flowchart showing processing for electric support. In step Sw1501, it is determined whether or not the device is being supported. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the supported flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The under-support flag is a flag that is turned ON when the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is to be opened, and is turned OFF when it is to be returned to the closed state. If it is determined in step Sw1501 that the supported flag is not ON (Sw1501: NO), the process proceeds to step Sw1502.

In step Sw1502, it is determined whether or not the support winning flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The support winning flag is turned ON when the electric accessary product open lottery for determining whether or not to open the electric accessary product 34a is won in the open state, and is turned OFF when the supporting flag is ON. is. If it is determined in step Sw1502 that the support winning flag is not ON (Sw1502: NO), the process proceeds to step Sw1503.

In step Sw1503, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, every 2 msec.

If it is determined in step Sw1503 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sw1503: NO), the electronic support process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sw1503: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw1504.

In step Sw1504, it is determined whether or not it is time to finish the variable display of the symbols in the normal unit 38. If it is determined in step Sw1504 that it is time to end the variable display (Sw1504: YES), the process advances to step Sw1505 to set the off display, and then ends the electronic support process. By setting the deviation display, the variable display of the symbols in the general pattern unit 38 is terminated while the deviation display is stopped. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sw1504 that it is not the end timing of the variable display (Sw1504: NO), the process proceeds to step Sw1506.

In step Sw1506, it is determined whether or not the value of the reserved accessory number SN is greater than "0". If it is determined in step Sw1506 that the value of the reserved accessory number SN is "0" (Sw1506: NO), the electronic support process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sw1506 that the value of the reserved accessory number SN is larger than "0" (Sw1506: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw1507.

In step Sw1507, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, and then the process advances to step Sw1508 to determine whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect. If it is not the opening/closing execution mode at step Sw1507 (Sw1507: NO) and if it is the high-frequency support mode at step Sw1508 (Sw1508: YES), the process advances to step Sw1509 to perform the electric accessory opening lottery. Specifically, the value stored in the electric role holding area 64c is shifted, and when the value of the electric role item opening counter C5 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric role item opening lottery be elected. Also, at the same time as the electric accessory open lottery, the second timer counter area T2 is set to "750" (that is, 1.5 sec). The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started. After that, the process proceeds to step Sw1510.

In step Sw1510, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory open lottery in step Sw1509 is support winning. In step Sw1510, when it is determined that the result of the electric accessory open lottery is support winning (Sw1510: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw1511, the support winning flag is turned ON, and provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64 "3" is set in the second round counter area RC2. The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the electric accessory 34a is released. After that, the electronic support processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Sw1510, when it is determined that the result of the electric accessory open lottery is not support winning (Sw1510: NO), the process for electric role support ends without executing the process of step Sw1511.

If it is determined in step Sw1507 that it is in the opening/closing execution mode (Sw1507: YES), or if it is determined in step Sw1508 that it is not in the high-frequency support mode (Sw1508: NO), the process proceeds to step Sw1512, and the electric accessory open lottery I do. Specifically, the value stored in the electric role holding area 64c is shifted, and when the value of the electric role item opening counter C5 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric role item opening lottery be elected. At the same time as the electric accessory open lottery, the second timer counter area T2 is set to "14750" (that is, 29.5 sec). After that, the process proceeds to step Sw1513.

In step Sw1513, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory open lottery in step Sw1512 is support winning. In step Sw1513, if it is determined that the support has not been won (Sw1513: NO), the electronic support process is terminated. On the other hand, in step Sw1513, if it is determined that the support is won (Sw1513: YES), the process advances to step Sw1514, the support win flag is turned ON, and after setting "1" to the second round counter area RC2, , terminates the electronic support process.

If it is determined in step Sw1502 that the support win flag is ON (Sw1502: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw1515 to determine whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38. In step Sw1515, when it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sw1515: NO), since the pattern is being changed and displayed in the normal figure unit 38, the main electric role support process is performed as it is. exit. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sw1515 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sw1515: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw1516.

In step Sw1516, a win display is set. As a result, the variation display of the pattern in the normal pattern unit 38 is terminated while the win display is stopped. After that, the process proceeds to step Sw1517 to turn on the supporting flag and turn off the support winning flag. After that, the electronic support process is terminated.

In step Sw1501, when it is determined that the supporting flag is ON (Sw1501: YES), the process advances to step Sw1518 to execute an electric opening/closing control process for opening/closing the electric accessory 34a. After that, the electronic support process is terminated.

<Electrical opening/closing control process>
Next, the electrical opening/closing control process will be described. The electric power opening/closing control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the electric power support process (Fig. 590: Sw1518).

FIG. 591 is a flow chart showing the electrical opening/closing control process. In step Sw1601, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open. Whether or not the electric accessory 34a is being opened is determined by whether or not the electric accessory drive unit 34b is in a driving state. When it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is open (Sw1601: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw1602.

In step Sw1602, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the open duration time of the electric accessory 34a. If it is determined in step Sw1602 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sw1602: NO), the electric opening/closing control process is terminated. In other words, if the opening continuation time of the electric accessory 34a has not ended, the present electric opening/closing control process is terminated.

In step Sw1602, when it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sw1602: YES), the process advances to step Sw1603 to perform closing processing for controlling the electric accessary product 34a to the closed state, "250" (that is, 0.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as a means for measuring the open duration time of the electric accessory 34a is "0", the electric accessory 34a is closed, and the second timer counter area T2 is electrically operated this time. It is used as a parameter for measuring the closed duration time of the accessory 34a, and "250" is set in the second timer counter area T2. After executing step Sw1603, the process proceeds to step Sw1604.

In step Sw1604, after subtracting 1 from the value of the second round counter area RC2, the process advances to step Sw1605 to determine whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0". If it is determined in step Sw1605 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (Sw1605: NO), the electric opening/closing control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sw1605 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0" (Sw1605: YES), the process advances to step Sw1606 to turn off the supported flag. After that, the electrical switching control process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sw1601 that the electric accessory 34a is not open (Sw1601: NO), the process proceeds to step Sw1607 to determine whether or not the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closed duration time of the electric accessory 34a. If it is determined in step Sw1607 that the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sw1607: NO), the electrical opening/closing control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sw1607 that the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sw1607: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw1608 to execute opening processing for controlling the electric accessary 34a to the open state. . After that, the process proceeds to step Sw1609.

In step Sw1609, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. If it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress (Sw1609: NO), the process advances to step Sw1610 to determine whether or not the high-frequency support mode is in effect. do.

If it is determined in step Sw1610 that the high frequency support mode is in effect (Sw1610: YES), the process advances to step Sw1611 to set "800" (that is, 1.6 sec) in the second timer counter area T2. After that, the electrical switching control process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sw1609 that the open/close execution mode is set (Sw1609: YES), or if it is determined that it is not in the high-frequency support mode in step Sw1610 (Sw1610: NO), the process proceeds to step Sw1612, and the second "100" (that is, 0.2 sec) is set in the timer counter area T2. After that, the electrical switching control process is terminated.

<<12-6>> Various processes executed in the sound emission control device and the display control device:
Next, a specific example of control executed by the sound emission control device and the display control device in order to execute the announcement effect and the result notification effect will be described. The processing executed in the sound emission control device 90 will be described first, and then the processing executed in the display control device 100 will be described.

<Various processing executed in the sound emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, timer interrupt processing executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 will be described.

FIG. 592 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the sound and light side MPU 92. FIG. Timer interrupt processing is repeatedly executed at a relatively short period (for example, 2 msec). Processing of each step executed in timer interrupt processing will be described below.

In step Sw1701, command storage processing is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing the received command in the sound and light side RAM 94 when a command is received from the main side MPU 62 . The sound and light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer for enabling storage and reading of commands received from the main side MPU 62, and the commands received from the main side MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer. , are read out sequentially according to the order in which they are stored. After executing step Sw1701, the process proceeds to step Sw1702.

In step Sw1702, pending command handling processing is executed. In the pending command processing, processing corresponding to the first pending command among the commands stored in step Sw1701 is performed. Details of the pending command handling process will be described later. After executing step Sw1702, the process proceeds to step Sw1703.

In step Sw1703, a game cycle effect setting process is executed. In the game round effect setting process, the effect to be executed in the game round from the start of the symbol variation to the stop is set. Details of the game round effect setting process will be described later. After executing step Sw1703, the process proceeds to step Sw1704.

In step Sw1704, processing for opening/closing execution mode effect is executed. In the opening/closing execution mode effect processing, processing related to effects during the opening period, effects during the big winning opening opening/closing process period, and effects during the ending period is performed. After executing step Sw1704, the process proceeds to step Sw1705.

In step Sw1705, background effect processing is executed. In the background rendering process, a process of displaying on the pattern display device 41 a background moving image determined according to a command indicating the game state received from the main MPU 62 is performed. For example, a background video indicating that the high-frequency support mode is continuing, a background video indicating that the high-frequency support mode has ended, and a background video indicating that the high-probability mode is continuing are displayed. . After executing step Sw1705, the process proceeds to step Sw1706.

In step Sw1706, other processing is executed. Other processing includes processing for displaying a demonstration image (moving image) on the symbol display device 41 when the player is not playing a game. After executing step Sw1706, the process proceeds to step Sw1707.

In step Sw1707, light emission control processing for controlling light emission of various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, light emission control of various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read out in each of the effect processes described above. After executing step Sw1707, the process proceeds to step Sw1708.

At step Sw1708, an audio output control process for controlling the audio output of the speaker 46 is executed. In the audio output control process, audio output control of the speaker 46 is performed based on the audio data read out in the BGM process and each effect process. After executing step Sw1708, the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

<Processing for pending command>
Next, pending command handling processing will be described. The pending command handling process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 592: Sw1702).

FIG. 593 is a flowchart showing pending command handling processing. In step Sw1801, it is determined whether or not a pending command has been received from the main MPU62. In step Sw1801, when it is determined that a pending command has been received from the main MPU 62 (Sw1801: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw1802.

In step Sw1802, it is determined whether or not the pending command read out this time is the one transmitted based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 or not. In step Sw1802, if it is determined that the pending command read this time was transmitted based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 (Sw1802: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw1803, and the sound The update processing of the first reserved number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the light-side RAM 94 is executed. The first reservation number counter area is a counter area for specifying the number of pieces of reservation information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting hole 33 in the sound and light side MPU 92 . In the process of updating the first pending number counter area, the information in the first pending number counter area is updated to the pending number information included in the pending command read this time. After executing step Sw1803, the process proceeds to step Sw1804.

In step Sw1804, processing for pending change notice is executed. The hold change notice process is detailed in the "hold change notice effect" column included in the "outline of processing by gaming machine" column. to another color, reservation change notice suggesting the degree of expectation (reliability) of winning a jackpot with respect to the reservation information corresponding to the reservation display icons H, Y, Z whose display colors have changed is executed. After executing step Sw1804, the process proceeds to step Sw1805.

In step Sw1805, a process for an already-executed suspension notice is executed. The already-executed pending notice processing is described in detail in the column of "executed pending notice effect" included in the column of "outline of processing by the gaming machine". When the display color of the already-executed pending display icon Z is the same color, the result of the winning lottery related to the change based on the pending information corresponding to the variable-executing pending display icon Y displayed in the variable-executing pending display area Dy. Executes an already-executed suspension notice suggesting to the player that the is determined to win the jackpot. Specifically, in the already-executed suspension notice process, the process shown in FIG. 567 is performed. After executing step Sw1805, the process proceeds to step Sw1807.

In step Sw1802, if it is determined that the pending command read this time was not transmitted based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 (Sw1802: NO), that is, the pending command is the second starting If it is determined that the transmission is based on the ball entering the mouth 34, the process advances to step Sw1806 to update the second pending number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound and light side RAM 94. Execute. The second pending number counter area is a counter area for specifying, in the sound and light side MPU 92 , the number of pieces of pending information acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 34 . In the process of updating the second reserved number counter area, the information in the second reserved number counter area is updated to the information of the reserved number included in the command read this time. After executing step Sw1806, the process proceeds to step Sw1807.

The reason why steps Sw1803 and Sw1806 are performed as described above will be described. In this embodiment, while the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, backup power is supplied to the RAM 64 of the main control device 60, while backup power is supplied to the RAM 94 of the sound emission control device 90. not. Therefore, when the power is cut off in a situation where the hold information related to the ball entering the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34 is stored in the RAM 64 of the main controller 60, the main controller 60 is stored in memory, whereas the sound emission control device 90 recognizes that there are 0 pieces of hold information. In this case, if a configuration is adopted in which the first pending number counter area or the second pending number counter area is counted up each time a pending command is received in the sound emission control device 90, the main controller 60 actually stores the pending memory. Inconvenience may occur in that the number of on-hold information received does not match the number of on-hold information grasped by the sound emission control device 90 . On the other hand, as in the above-described embodiment, the main controller 60 transmits a hold command including information on the number of holds, and the sound emission control device 90 responds to the hold command each time it receives the hold command. By adopting a configuration in which information on the contained number of reserved items is set in the first reserved number counter area or the second reserved number counter area, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above inconveniences.

In step Sw1807, update processing of the total pending number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound and light side RAM 94 is executed. The total pending number counter area is the sum of the number of pending information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 and the number of pending information acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 34. This is a counter area for specifying in the sound and light side MPU 92 . In the update process, the information of the total pending number counter area is the sum of the information of the pending number measured in the first pending number counter area and the information of the pending number measured in the second pending number counter area. update to After executing step Sw1807, the process proceeds to step Sw1808.

If it is determined in step Sw1801 that no pending command has been received from the main MPU 62 (Sw1801: NO), the process proceeds to step Sw1808 without executing steps Sw1802 to Sw1807.

In step Sw1808, pending display control processing is executed. Specifically, based on the number of pending information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 specified in step Sw1803, the display mode of the first pending display unit 37c (the color of the LED lamp to be lit and combination), and based on the number of pieces of hold information acquired based on the entry into the second starting port 34 specified in step Sw1806, the display mode of the second hold display unit 37d (LED to be lit lamp colors and combinations). After executing step Sw1807, this pending command handling process ends.

<Game round effect setting processing>
Next, the game round effect setting process will be described. The game round effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 592: Sw1703).

FIG. 594 is a flow chart showing game round effect setting processing. In step Sw1901, it is determined whether or not a variation command and a type command have been received. In step Sw1901, when it is determined that the command for variation and the type command have not been received (Sw1901: NO), this game cycle effect setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sw1901 that the command for variation and the type command have been received (Sw1901: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw1902.

In step Sw1902, the command for variation and the type command received this time are read, and from these commands, the presence or absence of the big hit, the presence or absence of the time saving addition, the type of the jackpot, the presence or absence of the reach occurrence, and the information of the variation time are grasped respectively. Then, the grasped information is stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 . After that, the process proceeds to step Sw1903.

In step Sw1903, effect pattern setting processing is executed. The effect pattern setting process is the pattern of effects to be executed in the current game round (notice effect, content and execution timing of ready-to-win effect, timing of change of variable execution suspension display icon Y in variable execution suspension display area Dy, etc.) is determined and set based on the effect pattern table. It should be noted that the variable execution pending display area Dy is an area capable of displaying pending display information corresponding to the variation that started the variable game, that is, the game round after execution of the game round operation. In addition, the variable execution pending display icon Y is a pending display icon corresponding to the variation that started the variable game, that is, the game round after execution of the game round operation. Details of the effect pattern setting process will be described later. After executing step Sw1903, the process proceeds to step Sw1904.

In step Sw1904, a stop symbol setting process is executed. In the stop symbol setting process, if the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a 16R probability variable jackpot, an 8R probability variable jackpot, or an 8R normal jackpot, the same pattern is displayed on the activated line L1 (see FIG. 554). The information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination of is established is set as the information of the current stop symbol. Specifically, if the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is the 16R probability variable jackpot or the 8R probability variable jackpot, the same combination of odd-numbered symbols can be selected as the same combination of symbols, and the same of even symbol combinations can be selected. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the selection rate is the same for the combination of the same odd-numbered symbols and the combination of the same even-numbered symbols. A configuration in which the ratio is high may be adopted, and the latter may be configured to have a higher selection ratio than the former. Also, the combination of "7" symbols is selected only in the case of a 16R probability variable jackpot. Further, when the winning lottery result of the current game round is the 8R normal jackpot, the same combination of even-numbered symbols is selected as the same combination of symbols.

If the result of the jackpot lottery of the current game round is a result of a loss, the presence or absence of the reach generation is determined from the contents of the command for variation. When it is determined that it corresponds to the occurrence of ready-to-win, it corresponds to the stop result in which the combination of the same symbols does not materialize on the effective line L1 and the combination of the ready-to-win symbols occurs on the effective line L1. information is determined as the information of the result of this stop. On the other hand, when it is determined that it does not correspond to the occurrence of ready-to-win, the result is a stop result in which the combination of the same symbols is not established on the effective line L1, and a stop result in which the combination of ready-to-win symbols is not established on the effective line L1. The corresponding information is set as the information of the current stop symbol.

In step Sw1905, a process for setting the variation pattern of the current game round is executed. In this process, information on the variation time of the current game round is specified from the content of the variation command received this time, and the combination of the information on the variation time and the information on the stop symbol set in step Sw1904 is performed. Select the corresponding variation pattern. When selecting a variation pattern, the variation pattern table stored in the variation display pattern table storage area 93b of the sound and light side ROM 93 is referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step Sw1906.

In step Sw1906, a process for removing the same color when out is executed. The process for removing the same color when out is described in detail in the column of "processing for removing the same color when out" included in the column of "outline of processing by game machine", and is displayed in the pending display area Dy during variation execution. When the pending information about the variable execution pending display icon Y is that the result of the winning lottery is lost, the four executed pending display areas Dh1 to Dh4 displayed in the first to fourth executed pending display areas This is a process for avoiding that the reserved display icons Z are of the same color. Specifically, the process for removing the same color when out is carried out as shown in FIG. 568 . After executing step Sw1906, the process proceeds to step Sw1907.

At step Sw1907, the production pattern set at step Sw1903, the stop pattern set at step Sw1904, the information of the variation pattern set at step Sw1905, and the hold display information obtained at step Sw1906 in the current game round are produced. Set to command. After that, the process advances to step Sw1908 to transmit the effect command to the display side MPU 102 . The display-side MPU 102 executes processing for displaying the effect contents corresponding to the received effect command on the pattern display device 41 . After executing step Sw1908, the process proceeds to step Sw1909.

In step Sw1909, update processing at the start of fluctuation is executed. The update process at the start of fluctuation is a process for updating the reserved display in the first reserved display area Ds1 or the second reserved display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41. FIG. The details of the update process at the start of fluctuation will be described later. After executing step Sw1909, this game round effect setting process is terminated.

<Production pattern setting process>
Next, the effect pattern setting process will be described. The effect pattern setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 594: Sw1903) of the game cycle effect setting process.

FIG. 595 is a flow chart showing effect pattern setting processing. In step Sw2001, random number RN for effect pattern is obtained from lottery counter area 94c of sound/light RAM 94. FIG. After that, the process proceeds to step Sw2002.

In step Sw2002, a process of identifying the effect pattern table is executed. The effect pattern table is three-dimensional tabular data whose data elements are patterns of effects to be executed in game rounds, fluctuation times, and random numbers RN for effect patterns. In the production pattern table storage area 93a of the ROM 93, various types of production pattern tables are stored according to the presence or absence of a big hit, the presence or absence of time saving, and the presence or absence of reach generation. At step Sw2002, one effect pattern table is specified from these effect pattern tables. Specifically, based on the presence or absence of a jackpot, the presence or absence of time reduction grant, the type of jackpot, and the presence or absence of reach occurrence, grasped in step Sw1902 of the game round effect setting process (FIG. 594), the production pattern table storage area of the ROM 93 One effect pattern table is specified from 93a. After executing step Sw2002, the process proceeds to step Sw2003.

In step Sw2003, the effect pattern table specified in Sw2002 is referred to, and the variation time grasped in step Sw1902 of the game cycle effect setting process (Fig. 594) and the current effect pattern random number RN value obtained in step Sw2001 Acquire a production pattern corresponding to and. After executing step Sw2003, the process proceeds to step Sw2004.

At step Sw2004, the effect pattern acquired at step Sw2003 is set as the effect pattern to be executed in the current game round. After executing step Sw2004, the effect pattern setting process is terminated.

<Update processing at the start of fluctuation>
Next, update processing at the start of fluctuation will be described. The update process at the start of fluctuation is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the game cycle effect setting process (FIG. 594: Sw1909).

FIG. 596 is a flowchart showing update processing at the start of fluctuation. In step Sw2101, it is determined whether or not the command for variation received this time relates to the hold information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting hole 33 or not. In step Sw2101, if it is determined that the variation command received this time is related to the hold information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 (Sw2101: YES), proceed to step Sw2102, The information in the first reserved number counter area is updated so that the number stored in the first reserved number counter area of the sound and light RAM 94 is decremented by one. After that, the process proceeds to step Sw2103.

In step Sw2103, a process of shifting the data (display color and success/failure result of winning lottery) stored in the special 1 pending effect storage area (see FIG. 566) stored in the sound and light side RAM 94 is executed. This shift processing is processing for sequentially shifting the data stored in the storage area to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the fourth executed pending display area Dz4 is cleared, and the third executed pending display area Dz3→fourth executed pending display area Dz4, second executed pending display area Dz2→third Execution pending display area Dz3, first executed pending display area Dz1→second executed pending display area Dz2, variable active pending display area Dy→first executed pending display area Dz1, first unexecuted pending display area Dh1→ Variable execution pending display area Dy, second unexecuted pending display area Dh2→first unexecuted pending display area Dh1, third unexecuted pending display area Dh3→second unexecuted pending display area Dh2, fourth unexecuted pending display The data in each area is shifted in the order of area Dh4→third non-execution pending display area Dh3. After executing step Sw2103, the process proceeds to step Sw2105.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sw2101 that the variation command received this time is not related to the hold information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 (Sw2101: NO), the process proceeds to step Sw2104. Next, the information in the second reserved number counter area is updated so that the number stored in the second reserved number counter area of the sound and light side RAM 94 is decremented by one. After that, the process proceeds to step Sw2105.

In step Sw2105, the information in the total pending number counter area is updated so that the total pending number stored in the total pending number counter area of the sound and light side RAM 94 is decremented by one. After that, the update process at the start of fluctuation is terminated.

<Various processing executed in the display control device>
Next, processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

The processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 mainly includes a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on until the power is turned off, and a main processing that is executed when a command is received from the sound emission control device 90. There are command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing executed when a V interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal that is transmitted from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when rendering processing of an image for one frame is completed.

The MPU 102 executes main processing after power-on, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of commands and detection of V interrupt signals. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command interrupt processing is preferentially executed. Therefore, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound emission control device 90 and execute the V interrupt process.

<Main processing>
Next, main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 597 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. As described above, the main process is a process that is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. Processing of each step executed in the main processing will be described below.

In step Sw2201, initialization processing is executed. Specifically, first, processing for initializing the MPU 102 and clearing the storage of the work RAM 104 and the video RAM 107 is performed. Then, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107 . Furthermore, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107 and the extracted character information is written in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107 . Also, perform other necessary settings for initialization. After that, the process proceeds to step Sw2202.

In step Sw2202, interrupt permission setting is executed. After the interrupt permission setting is executed, in the main processing, infinite loop processing is executed until the power is turned off. Accordingly, after the interrupt permission is set, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing, which will be described below, are executed in accordance with the reception of a command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described. As described above, the command interrupt processing is processing that is executed each time a command is received from the sound emission control device 90 .

598 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. In step Sw2301, command storage processing is executed. In the command storage process, received command data is extracted and the extracted command data is stored in a command storage area provided in work RAM 104 . Various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read by the command determination process of the V interrupt process, which will be described later, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

599 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. As described above, V interrupt processing is processing that is executed when a V interrupt signal from VDP 105 is detected. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command storage area are executed by the command interrupt process. Execute the displayed instructions.

As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame worth of image is completed and that is transmitted to the MPU 102 . Therefore, the MPU 102 executes V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, so that drawing instructions to the VDP 105 are issued every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame worth of image is completed. For this reason, the VDP 105 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to suppress the development of an image associated with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area in which the image information is stored. Details of the processing of each step of the V interrupt processing will be described below.

In step Sw2401, command handling processing is executed. In the command handling process, the contents of the command stored in the command storage area by the command interrupt process (FIG. 598) are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. Specifically, for example, when a performance command is stored, image drawing and display control is started so that the performance mode specified by the performance command is displayed on the pattern display device 41.例文帳に追加

If the effect operation command is stored, it is determined whether or not it is the period for accepting pressing of the effect operation button 24, and if it is determined that it is the period for accepting pressing of the effect operation button 24, the effect operation is performed. Control of image drawing and display is started so that the effect mode corresponding to the depression of the button 24 is displayed on the pattern display device 41 . On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the period for accepting pressing of the effect operation button 24, the content of the next command is analyzed without executing the process.

In the command processing (Sw2401), all commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and processing corresponding to all the analyzed commands is executed. The reason for this will be explained. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during the 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the effect is set by the sound emission control device 90 and the effect is started, there is a high possibility that various commands for specifying the content of the effect are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the state of the effect such as the advance notice effect and the stop pattern set by the sound emission control device 90, and display the effect image according to the state. The rendering of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the device 41 .

In step Sw2402, display setting processing is executed. In the display setting process, based on the type of screen to be displayed on the pattern display device 41 set by the command handling process (Sw2401), etc., the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the pattern display device 41 is specified. . After that, the process proceeds to step Sw2403.

In step Sw2403, task processing is executed. In the task processing, based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the pattern display device 41 specified by the display setting processing (Sw2402), the type of the character (sprite, display object) making up the image is determined. Along with specifying, for each character (sprite), various parameters required for drawing, such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc., are determined. After that, the process proceeds to step Sw2404.

In step Sw2404, drawing processing is executed. In the drawing process, the types of various characters forming one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each character, which are determined by the task process (Sw2403), are transmitted to the VDP 105. FIG. The VDP 105 executes an image drawing process based on these pieces of information, and together with a drive signal to cause the pattern display device 41 to display an image drawn based on the information received during the previous V interrupt process. The image data is transmitted to the pattern display device 41 . After that, the process proceeds to step Sw2405, and after executing other processes, the V interrupt process ends. An example of specific control for executing various processes including the jackpot effect in the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

<<12-7>> Functions and effects:
As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present invention, by using a predetermined number of execution pending display icons Z in the execution pending display area Dz corresponding to the game round after execution of the game round motion, On the other hand, it is possible to realize a new performance that has never existed before, such as suggesting the determination of winning a jackpot.

Here, as a reference example, consider a pachinko machine that has the function of the pending change notice effect but does not have the function of the already-executed pending notice effect. In the pachinko machine of this reference example, a pending change notice is given using the unexecuted pending display icon H displayed in the unexecuted pending display area Dh, but the unexecuted pending display icon H is shifted to the variable active pending display area Dy. However, after the change is executed and the result of the winning lottery related to the change is lost, the change execution pending display icon Y loses its meaning and becomes nothing. For example, even if the display color of the non-execution pending display icon H and the variable execution pending display icon Y becomes red with the highest expectation of winning the jackpot due to the pending change notice, the holding corresponding to the pending display icons H and Y If the result of winning lottery due to fluctuations in information is lost, nothing happens.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the interest in the game is improved by giving meaning to the already-executed pending display icon Z whose variable display is finished.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, for example, during the next variable display of case 1 shown in FIG. If the four pending display icons Z, Y are aligned in the same color, and if the change ends and each pending display icon Z, Y, H shifts to the left, the already executed pending display in the already executed pending display area Dz is displayed. The situation is such that all the icons Z have the same color. Under this circumstance, when the variable execution suspension display icon Y shifts to the already executed suspension display area Dz, the variation execution suspension display icon Y is displayed in a red color rather than a red display color. It is more advantageous for the player when the expectation of winning the jackpot is displayed in green (in the case of FIG. 569(c)).

The reason why it is highly advantageous for the player is that during the successive fluctuation display shown in FIG. This is because the result is that the jackpot winning is confirmed. For this reason, even if the hold information corresponding to the unexecuted hold display icon H and the variable execution hold display icon Y is green, and the expectation of winning the jackpot is lower than the red color, the executed hold display area Dz is displayed. Under conditions where the possibility that all the display icons Z are all the same color increases, the unexecuted pending display icon H and the variable active pending display icon Y remain green without changing to red, and are displayed in the already executed pending display area Dz. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that he wants to make the transition. In addition, in the green display color of the unexecuted pending display icon H and the variable active pending display icon Y, the pending information set for the green display color is different from the level of expectation that the jackpot will be won. A special meaning such as confirmation of winning can be given. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when all the execution suspension display icons Z in the execution suspension display area Dz are all in the same color, the success or failure result of the winning lottery is determined as the jackpot winning. For this reason, it is possible to give the player a greater sense of expectation. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as shown in case 4, the display color of the execution pending display icon Z displayed in the execution pending display area Dz may change. Therefore, for the player, for example, in a situation where the display colors of all the execution pending display icons Z displayed in the execution pending display area Dz do not match the same display color, Also, the display color of the already-executed pending display icon Z displayed in the already-executed pending display area Dz may change, and the variable-executing-suspended display icon Y displayed in the variable-executing-suspended display area Dy may indicate that the By moving to the pending display area Dz, it is expected that all the execution pending display icons Z displayed in the pending execution display area Dz will be aligned in the same display color. can. Then, the display color of the execution pending display icon Z actually displayed in the execution pending display area Dz changes, and the variable execution pending display icon Y shifts to the already executed pending display area Dz. When all the execution pending display icons Z displayed in the pending display area Dz are displayed in the same display color, it is possible to give great joy to the player.

More specifically, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, display of one pending display icon (different colored pending display icon) H, Y, Z in the determination target pending display icon row RW by the assist setting process. By converting the colors, all the display colors of the pending display icons H, Y, and Z in the determination target pending display icon row RW are made to be the same color. For this reason, even when it is not possible to align all the execution pending display icons Z in the execution pending display area Dz with the same color by simply shifting the pending display icons H, Y, and Z, a different color pending display is possible. By converting the display colors of the icons, all the pending-execution display icons Z in the pending-execution display area Dz can be arranged in the same color. In general, it takes a long time to play the game for all the pending display icons Z in the pending display area Dz just by shifting the pending display icons H, Y, and Z. By the setting process, it is possible to create a state in which all the execution pending display icons Z in the execution pending display area Dz are aligned in the same color even in a game for a relatively short period of time. As a result, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the already-executed pending notice effect can be performed at a frequency suitable for practical use.

For example, by changing the display color of the unexecuted pending display icon H in the first unexecuted pending display area Dh1, all the executed pending display icons Z in the already executed pending display area Dz will be aligned in the same color. Since there is a case, it is possible to give great joy to the player who expects that all the execution pending display icons Z in the execution pending display area Dz are all in the same color.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the unexecuted pending display icon H is circular, and the executed pending display icon Z is hexagonal. For this reason, it is easy to distinguish between the unexecuted pending display icon H and the executed pending display icon Z, and the unexecuted pending display icon H moves from the unexecuted pending display area Dh through the variable active pending display area Dy. It becomes easy to determine that the display has been shifted to the reserved display area Dz. Therefore, visibility is improved.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the execution suspension notice effect is executed in a game state (so-called normal state) in which it is substantially impossible for the game ball to enter the second start hole 34, and the game is played. It is configured such that it is not executed in a game state (during high-frequency support mode) in which it is easy for a ball to enter the second starting port 34 . In the high-frequency support mode, when the electric role open winning is won, the time for one time of opening the electric accessory 34a is set to be long, which is a state that is originally highly advantageous for the player, and the execution is suspended. The need to execute the advance notice effect is low. In addition, during the high-frequency support mode, since the variable time is short, it is difficult to execute the already-executed suspension notice effect in the non-execution suspension display area Dh and the variable-execution suspension display area Dy. For this reason, in the present embodiment, by not executing the already-executed pending notice effect during the high-frequency support mode, the control can be simplified, and in the normal state, the already-executed pending notice effect is executed. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as one aspect of changing the display mode of the suspension display icons H, Y, Z by the suspension change notice effect, the display color of the suspension display icons H, Y, Z is changed. Therefore, it is obvious at a glance whether or not all the suspension display icons Z in the execution suspension display area Dz have the same color. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the suspension information about the variable execution suspension display icon Y to be displayed in the variation execution suspension display area Dy is information indicating that the result of the winning lottery is a loss. In this case, by changing the display color of the unexecuted pending display icon H, for example, by the same color removing process when out, four existing execution pending display areas Dz1 to Dz4 are displayed in the first to fourth executed pending display areas Dz1 to Dz4. This prevents the execution suspension display icon Z from being the same color. For this reason, the player expects that the display colors of the execution suspension display icons Z in the execution suspension display area Dz are all likely to be the same color, and that the success or failure result of the winning lottery will be determined as a big win. However, the display color of the execution suspension display icon Z is not the same color, and as a result, the winning of the jackpot is not confirmed, and the expectation is disappointing and disappointing. In this way, the already-executed suspension notice effect can impart a feeling of expectation that the success or failure result of the winning lottery will be determined as a big win, and at the same time, a feeling of disappointment can be imparted. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to impart conflicting emotions such as anticipation and disappointment to the player, thereby making the game more interesting.

For example, if each pending display icon continues to shift as it is, all the executed pending display icons Z in the executed pending display area Dz are likely to have the same color. By changing the display color of the execution pending display icon H, all the execution pending display icons Z in the execution pending display area Dz may not all have the same color. Therefore, it is possible to give a great sense of disappointment to the player who expected that all the pending execution display icons Z in the pending execution display area Dz should be all of the same color.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a plurality of unexecuted pending display icons H displayed in the first to fourth unexecuted pending display areas Dh1 to Dh1 by the assist setting process included in the already executed pending notice process. In the first unexecuted pending display area Dh1 closest to the variable execution pending display area Dy, the display color of the unexecuted pending display icon H is changed to the same color as the same color pending display icon (hereinafter referred to as , called the color of the same color). In this case, immediately before the unexecuted pending display icon H shifts from the unexecuted pending display area Dh to the variable active pending display area Dy, the display mode of the unexecuted pending display icon H is switched to the same color. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a great sense of surprise.

<<12-8>> Modified Example of the Twelfth Embodiment:
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and can be implemented in various aspects without departing from the gist thereof. For example, the following modifications are also possible. In addition, in the modified example described below, description of the same configuration, processing, and effects as those of the above-described embodiment is omitted.

<<12-8-1>> Modification 1:
In the twelfth embodiment and its modification, as the execution suspension notice, when all the execution suspension display icons Z displayed in the execution suspension display area Dz are all of the same color, the result of the winning lottery is determined. It is configured to suggest to the player that the jackpot winning is confirmed. On the other hand, as a modified example, even if all the execution pending display icons Z displayed in the execution pending display area Dz are not all of the same color, if they are arranged so as to satisfy a specific rule, a hit is achieved. The lottery success/failure result may suggest to the player that the winning of the jackpot is confirmed. As a specific rule, for example, when all colors (white, blue, green, and red) are available, the expectation of winning the jackpot is increased in the direction from the first execution suspension display area Dz1 to the fourth execution suspension display area Dz4. When the display colors are arranged in the order of display color (white, blue, green, red) from the low side to the high side, the expectation of winning the jackpot is in the direction from the first execution pending display area Dz1 to the fourth execution pending display area Dz4. The display colors may be arranged in the order of display colors (red, green, blue, white) from the side with the highest degree to the side with the lowest degree. According to these modified examples, as in the twelfth embodiment, it is possible to improve the player's expectation for winning the jackpot and improve the interest in the game.

<<12-8-2>> Modification 2:
In the twelfth embodiment and its modification, when all the execution pending display icons Z displayed in the execution pending display area Dz are all of the same color, the advantage for the player increases. , the success/failure result of the winning lottery suggests to the player that the winning of the jackpot is confirmed. As the advantage for the player increases, the result of the winning lottery is the confirmation of winning the jackpot, and the expectation for the variable display increases, the actual profit increases, and the usefulness increases. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which high items are notified. As a configuration that increases the expectation for the variable display, the type of reach develops into a type with a high expectation of winning the jackpot, the advance notice effect is replaced with a performance with a high expectation of winning the jackpot, and the time until the effect and result announcement. Various things can be adopted, such as one in which a timer that defines is activated. As an actual profit, various configurations can be adopted, such as a configuration in which the electric accessary 34a is opened multiple times, a configuration in which a time-saving award is won, and a configuration in which a small win is won in a jackpot lottery. "Time-saving provision" is a success/fail result that triggers the transition to the support mode, but does not trigger the transition to the opening/closing execution mode in which the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened/closed. Various items such as pachinko machine settings (settings that determine the probability of winning a jackpot) and a base value that indicates the ball payout rate at normal times can be used as the highly useful notification items. With these configurations as well, similar to the twelfth embodiment and its modification, it is possible to improve the sense of anticipation and improve the interest in the game.

<<12-8-3>> Modification 3:
In the twelfth embodiment and its modification, when all the execution suspension display icons Z displayed in the execution suspension display area Dz are all of the same color as the execution suspension notice, the result of the winning lottery is determined. It is configured to suggest to the player that the jackpot winning is confirmed. This configuration has the same advantage for the player regardless of whether the same display color is blue, green, or red. On the other hand, as a modified example, a display color with a higher degree of difficulty of being the same color may be more advantageous for the player. Specifically, the advantage for the player is higher when all the execution pending display icons Z displayed in the execution pending display area Dz are all green than when they are all blue. . In addition, the advantage for the player is higher when all the execution pending display icons Z displayed in the execution pending display area Dz are all red than when they are all green. According to this modified example, it is possible to increase or decrease the advantage given to the player, thereby making the game more interesting.

<<12-8-4>> Modification 4:
In the twelfth embodiment and its modification, assuming that all the execution pending display icons Z displayed in the execution pending display area Dz are the same color, the execution pending display area Dz is divided into four unit areas. There is a case where it is composed of Dh1 to Dh4, and a case where the already-executed pending display area Dz is composed of three unit areas Dh1 to Dh3. bottom. On the other hand, as a modified example, when all the pending execution display icons Z displayed in the pending execution display area Dz are arranged in the same color, the number of unit areas constituting the pending execution display area Dz is A configuration may be adopted in which the greater the number, the higher the advantage for the player. Specifically, the case in which the already-executed pending display area Dz is configured by four unit areas Dh1 to Dh4 is better than the case in which the already-executed pending display area Dz is configured by three unit areas Dh1 to Dh3. It may be configured to increase the advantage for the user. According to this modified example, it is possible to increase or decrease the advantage given to the player, thereby making the game more interesting.

<<12-8-5>> Modification 5:
In the twelfth embodiment and its modification, in the assist setting process (S9 in FIG. 567) in the already-executed suspension notice process, the suspension display icons H, Y, and Z are displayed at various timings illustrated in cases 2 to 7. The display color of is changed, and the timing of changing this display color in game rounds is the timing at which the variable display is started. On the other hand, as a modification, in the assist setting process, the display colors of the pending display icons H, Y, and Z may be changed at the timing when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable display. According to this modification, since the display colors of the pending display icons H, Y, and Z change during the variable display of the game cycle, even after the variable display is started, The player is made to expect that the display colors of the pending display icons H, Y, and Z are not the same, so that the interest in the game can be further enhanced.

In this modification 5, the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 may display an effect in which the moving object reaches the holding display icons H, Y, and Z at the timing when the display color changes. The moving objects include tangible objects such as flower petals, confetti, and fireballs, and intangible objects such as light rays, laser beams, and radio waves. Further, in this modification 5, the shape of the pending display icons H, Y, and Z is changed from the default circular or hexagonal shape to another shape (for example, a character or A configuration may also be adopted in which an effect of converting to a shape imitating a coat of arms, etc., is displayed. According to these configurations, when the moving object reaches the pending display icons H, Y, and Z, and the shape of the pending display icons H, Y, and Z changes to a special shape, the pending display icons H, Y , Z are changed, and the player can further expect that the pending display icons H, Y, and Z displayed in the determination target pending display icon row RW will all be of the same color.

In this modified example 5, that is, in the modified example 5 in which the display colors of the pending display icons H, Y, and Z are changed at the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable display in the assist setting process, By changing the display color of the unexecuted pending display icon H in the first unexecuted pending display area Dh1, the display colors of the pending display icons H, Y, and Z in the determination target pending display icon row RW can be aligned. can. According to this configuration, the display color of the unexecuted suspension display icon H is switched to the same color immediately before the transition from the unexecuted suspension display area Dh to the variable execution suspension display area Dy. It can give you joy.

<<12-8-6>> Modification 6:
In the twelfth embodiment and its modification, the display color of one of the pending display icons H, Y, and Z in the determination target pending display icon row RW is converted as assist setting processing in the already-executed pending notice processing. Thus, the display colors of the pending display icons H, Y, and Z in the determination target pending display icon row RW are all the same color. On the other hand, as a modification, by converting the display colors of two or more pending display icons H, Y, Z in the determination target pending display icon row RW, the pending icons in the determination target pending display icon row RW The display colors of the display icons H, Y, and Z may all be the same color. According to this configuration, the player expects that all of the pending display icons H, Y, and Z in the pending display icon row RW are of the same color even if the row of pending display icons to be judged RW contains only pending display icons of different colors. can be made

<<12-8-7>> Modification 7:
In the twelfth embodiment and its modification, in the assist setting process in the already-executed pending notice process, a different color pending display icon is specified from within the determination target pending display icon row RW, and the display color of the specified unique pending display icon is It was configured to convert On the other hand, as a modified example, a different color pending display icon can be specified according to the operation of the effect operation button 24 by the player. The display color of the pending display icon may be converted. Furthermore, the mini-game effect is displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, and the game waits for the player to designate a different color pending display icon according to the operation of the effect operation button 24 for the mini-game effect. The display color of the different color reserved display icon may be converted. According to these modified examples, since a special operation by the player is required, the interest in the game can be further improved.

<<12-8-8>> Modification 8:
In the twelfth embodiment and its modification, as the pending change notice and the already executed pending notice, an effect in which the display colors of the pending display icons H, Y, and Z change is executed. And as an already-executed pending notice, an effect in which the shapes of the pending display icons H, Y, and Z change may be executed. As the pending change notice and the already executed pending notice, an effect in which the sizes of the pending display icons H, Y, and Z change may be executed. As the pending change notice and the already executed pending notice, an effect in which the types of the pending display icons H, Y, and Z change may be executed. As the pending change notice and the already executed pending notice, an effect in which the images added to the pending display icons H, Y, and Z change may be executed. Further, an effect may be executed by combining any one or more of color change, shape change, size change, type change, and additional image change. As described above, as the suspension change notice and the already-executed suspension notice, any effect may be executed as long as the display mode changes.

<<12-8-9>> Modification 9:
In the twelfth embodiment and its modification, the variable execution pending display icon Y shifted from the first non-execution pending display area Dh1 to the variable execution pending display area Dy changes in the variable execution pending display area Dy. was displayed from the start until the fluctuation stopped. On the other hand, as a modification, the variable execution pending display icon Y that has been shifted from the first non-execution pending display area Dh1 to the variable execution pending display area Dy is displayed in the variable execution pending display area Dy. It may be configured to be displayed until a predetermined period of time (a period before the fluctuation stops, for example, several seconds) has elapsed from the time of start, and disappear after the predetermined period of time has elapsed. In principle, the disappearing variable execution pending display icon Y is shifted to the already executed pending display area Dz side and revived at the timing when the variable display ends and the stop display period ends. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the display area is not shifted to the already-executed pending display area Dz side.

Here, each of the execution pending display icons Z displayed in the first to third execution pending display areas Dz1 to Dz3 is green, and the variable execution pending display icon displayed in the variable execution pending display area Dy. Consider a case where Y is blue and the unexecuted pending display icon H displayed in the first unexecuted pending display area Dh1 is green. In this case, the variable execution pending display icon Y displayed in the variable execution pending display area Dy disappears after a predetermined period from the start of the variable display, and the variable execution pending display icon Y is displayed as already executed pending display. If the area is not shifted to the Dz side, at the timing when the variation of the next game round is started, the unexecuted pending display icon H (green) displayed in the first unexecuted pending display area Dh1 is changed to the variable executing pending display area. By shifting to Dy, the arrangement of the four execution pending display icons Z from the third execution pending display area Dz3 to the variable execution pending display area Dy is arranged in the same color. For this reason, according to this configuration, the four already-executed pending display icons Z suddenly line up in the same color, so that it is possible to give the player a sudden sense of surprise. For this reason, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

As another modification, the change-execution-holding display icon Y shifted from the first unexecution-holding display area Dh1 to the change-execution-holding display area Dy in the twelfth embodiment is changed to the variable-execution holding display area Dy. In the configuration in which the variation is displayed from the start of the variation to the end of the variation, the variation execution pending display icon Y may disappear after the variation is completed and may not be shifted to the already executed pending display area Dz side. .

<<12-8-10>> Modification 10:
In the twelfth embodiment and its modified example, when the display colors of the execution pending display icons Z displayed in the execution pending display area Dz are all the same color, they are displayed in the variable execution pending display area Dy. The result of the winning lottery pertaining to the variation based on the suspension information corresponding to the variation execution suspension display icon Y is realized is the announcement effect that the winning lottery is confirmed. On the other hand, as a modified example, all the already executed pending display icons Z and the varied executing pending display icons Y displayed in the range including the already executed pending display area Dz and the varying active pending display area Dy (that is, 5) When the colors are the same, the result of the winning lottery pertaining to the change based on the hold information corresponding to the change-in-execution hold display icon Y displayed in the change-in-execution hold display area Dy is determined to be a big win. It may be configured to realize an advance notice effect. This configuration will be described by taking Case 8 as an example.

・Case 8:
FIG. 600 is an explanatory diagram showing how the reserved display areas Dh, Dy, and Dz change in Case 8. FIG. FIG. 600(a) shows the variable display, FIG. 600(b) shows the variable display after stopping, and FIG. 600(c) shows the variable display of the next game round. It changes in the order of FIG. 600(a), FIG. 600(b), and FIG. 600(c).

In the example shown in FIG. 600(a), the five pending display icons H, Y, Z from the third executed pending display area Dz3 to the first unexecuted pending display area Dh1 are arranged in the same color. When the variation is completed and each of the pending display icons Z, Y, and H shifts to the left, five pending display icons are displayed within a range including the already executed pending display area Dz and the variable executing pending display area Dy. The situation is such that Z and Y are all of the same color. Under this situation, when the unexecuted pending display icon H in the first unexecuted pending display area Dh1 shifts to the variable active pending display area Dy, the unexecuted pending display icon H is displayed in red. It is more advantageous for the player to see green, which has a lower expectation of winning the jackpot than red (in the case of FIG. 600(b)).

The reason why the advantage for the player increases is that during the variable display of the next game round shown in FIG. This is because the displayed pending display icons Z and Y are all of the same color, and the result of the winning lottery is that the jackpot winning is determined. For this reason, even in this modification, even if the expectation that the hold information corresponding to the unexecuted hold display icon H or the variable execution hold display icon Y is a green lower than the red is lower than red, the executed hold display area Under conditions where the possibility that all of the pending display icons Z and Y within the range including Dz and the variable execution pending display area Dy are the same color is high, the unexecuted pending display icon H and the variable executing pending display icon Y are displayed. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation to move to the variable execution pending display area Dy or the already executed pending display area Dz without changing to red and remaining green. In addition, in the display color of green of the unexecuted pending display icon H and variable active pending display icon Y, the pending information set for green is different from the level of expectation for winning the jackpot, such as confirmation of jackpot winning. can have a special meaning. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<<12-8-11>> Modification 11:
In the twelfth embodiment and its modification, the number of unit areas constituting the already-executed pending display area Dz is configured to switch between 4 and 1, but as a modification, The number of unit areas constituting the already-executed pending display area Dz may be switched to any number from 4 to 0 including 0. FIG.

<<12-8-12>> Modification 12:
In the twelfth embodiment and its modification, the number of unit areas constituting the execution pending display area Dz is changed by lottery. A configuration in which the number of constituting unit areas is fixed to a constant number may be employed. For example, the number of unit areas forming the execution pending display area Dz may be fixed to any one of 0, 1, 2, 3, and 4. FIG. In the case of this configuration, unlike the pachinko machine 10 of the above-described embodiment, the condition that all the execution pending display icons Z in the execution pending display area Dz are all the same color is not relaxed, and the condition is satisfied. Difficulty is always constant. Therefore, according to this modification, the degree of difficulty of the condition that all the pending execution display icons Z in the pending execution display area Dz are all of the same color changes, giving the player an unnecessary sense of anticipation and disappointment. I never get tired of it.

<<12-8-13>> Modification 13:
In the above-described twelfth embodiment and its modified example, the configuration is such that, by the already-executed suspension notice, the result of the winning lottery will be determined to be a big win. On the other hand, as a modified example, it is possible to have a configuration in which a notice effecting that there is a high possibility that the result of the winning lottery will result in a jackpot winning (that is, that the expectation of winning a jackpot is high) is performed by a notice of suspension of execution. . The degree of high expectation here is higher than the expectation level associated with red, which has the highest expectation level in the pending change notice effect. That is, when all the display colors of the execution suspension display icons Z displayed in the execution suspension display area Dz are the same due to the execution suspension notice, the variation displayed in the variable execution suspension display area Dy The degree of expectation that the result of the winning lottery for the change based on the pending information corresponding to the pending display icon Y will result in a jackpot win is higher than the degree of expectation associated with red, which has the highest degree of expectation in the pending change notice effect. A configuration may be adopted in which an advance notice effect is given that the degree of expectation is high. With this configuration, as in the twelfth embodiment, under specific conditions, the specific pending display icon is displayed in green, which has a lower expectation of winning the jackpot than in red, compared to when it is displayed in red. In this case, it is possible to make it more advantageous for the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<<12-8-14>> Modification 14:
In the twelfth embodiment and its modification, in the assist setting process in the already-executed pending notice process, a different color pending display icon is specified from within the determination target pending display icon row RW, and the display color of the specified unique pending display icon is is converted to the same color as the display color of the same color reserved display icon. On the other hand, as a modification, the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 may be configured so that a row of symbols in a specific color can be stopped and displayed, and after the row of symbols in a specific color is displayed, The display color of the identified different color pending display icon may be converted to the specific color (the color of the stop symbol row). In this modification, the symbols representing the numbers 1 to 9 are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the symbols representing the numbers 1 to 9 are classified into three types according to the colors, and represent the numbers 1 to 3. Each pattern is blue, each pattern indicating numbers 4 to 6 is green, and each pattern indicating numbers 7 to 9 is red. According to this configuration, when winning a lottery using a specific random number, the same color as the display color of the same-color reserved display icon is set as a specific color, and a combination of patterns showing numbers corresponding to this specific color. A symbol row is stopped and displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, and after the symbol row is displayed, the display color of the specified different color reserved display icon is changed to the specific color (the color of the stopped symbol row). It is configured to convert. According to this configuration, the colors of the pending display icons H, Y, Z are changed according to the color of the stop symbol row, and all the pending display icon rows RW to be judged are changed to the same color, so that the interest in the game can be further improved. .

<<12-8-15>> Modification 15:
In the above embodiment and each modification, when all the execution pending display icons Z displayed in the four execution pending display areas Dz have the same display color, the winning of the jackpot is confirmed or the winning of the jackpot is confirmed. However, as a modification, all the execution pending display icons Z displayed in the four execution pending display areas Dz are the same display color, and the non-execution pending display icon Z When all the unexecuted pending display icons H displayed in the display area Dh are aligned in the same display color, the variable game corresponding to the variable active pending display icon Y displayed in the variable active pending display area Dy. , the expectation of winning the jackpot is high, and a predetermined premium performance suggesting that the expectation of winning the jackpot is extremely high in the variation game is executed and a predetermined premium image is displayed. A specific configuration of this modified example will be described below.

In this modification, when the main controller 60 of the pachinko machine 10 detects the entry of the game ball into the first start hole 33, it acquires special information such as the value of the hit random number counter, and based on the acquired special information to execute the first determination process. Then, the presence or absence of the jackpot winning, the type of the jackpot, and the like are determined by the previous determination processing, and the result of the previous determination processing is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 as a pending command. Based on the result of the destination determination process included in the hold command, the sound emission control device 90 determines whether or not the same color control process, which will be described later, is executed, the display color of the hold display icon, the pattern of change, and the hold display icon. Determines the type of presentation in the game round. In the same color control process, in a situation where the pending display icon that is the target of the previous determination process exists in the variable execution pending display area Dy, all the executed pending display areas Dz are displayed. The display color of each pending display icon is controlled so that the display icons Z are aligned in the same display color and all the unexecuted pending display icons H displayed in the unexecuted pending display area Dh are aligned in the same display color. It is a process to

An example of how the pending display icon changes when the same color control process is executed will be described below.

・Case A
FIGS. 601, 602, and 603 are explanatory diagrams for explaining an example of how the pending display icon changes as case A. FIG. In state A1 shown in FIG. 601, the already-executed-suspended display icon Z is displayed in white in the fourth already-executed-suspended display area Dz4, and the already-executed-suspended display icon Z is displayed in white in the third already-executed-suspended display area Dz3. , the already-executed-suspended display icon Z is displayed in blue in the second already-executed-suspended display area Dz2, and the already-executed-suspended display icon Z is displayed in blue in the first already-executed-suspended display area Dz1. is displayed in color, and the variable execution pending display icon Y is displayed in a blue display color in the variable execution pending display area Dy, and the game round corresponding to the variable execution pending display icon Y is being executed. be. As described above, the already-executed pending display area Dz is an area capable of displaying pending display information corresponding to the game round after execution of the variable game in the game round is completed, that is, after execution of the game round operation. be.

In this state A1, when a game ball enters the first start hole 33, the pachinko machine 10 detects the entry of the game ball and acquires special information based on the entry. Then, the pre-determination process is executed for the acquired special information, and whether or not to execute the same color control process is determined based on the result of the pre-determination process. In the example shown in this case A, as a result of the first determination process, the result of the winning lottery is a jackpot winning, it is decided to execute the same color control process described above, and as the same color control process, the holding corresponding to the entering ball The display color of the display icon is determined to be green, and the display color of the four pending display icons preceding the relevant pending display icon is the display color of the currently highest stage among the four pending display icons. Align to a certain blue color, align the display color of the pending display icon after the pending display icon to white, execute a predetermined premium ready-to-win effect in the game round corresponding to the pending display icon, and execute a predetermined premium ready-to-win effect in the premium ready-to-win effect It is assumed that the user decides to display the image. As a result, the green unexecuted pending display icon H is displayed in the first unexecuted pending display area Dh1, resulting in state A2.

In the state A2, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 33 and the pachinko machine 10 detects the entering of the game ball into the first starting hole 33, the same color control process described above is performed to display the second non-execution pending display. An unexecuted pending display icon H with a white display color is displayed in the area Dh2. This results in state A3.

In the state A3, when the game ball enters the first starting port 33 and the pachinko machine 10 detects that the game ball enters the first starting port 33, the above-described same-color control process causes the third non-execution suspension display. An unexecuted pending display icon H with a white display color is displayed in the area Dh3. This results in state A4.

In the state A4, the display colors of the three pending display icons preceding the green unexecuted pending display icon H in the first unexecuted pending display area Dh1 are all blue, and the first unexecuted pending display area Dh1. Since the display colors of the two pending display icons following the green display color of the unexecuted pending display icon H are all white, the player may possibly be displayed in the four completed execution pending display areas Dz. The phenomenon that all the execution pending display icons Z are aligned in the same display color and all the unexecuted pending display icons H displayed in the unexecuted pending display area Dh are aligned in the same display color does not occur. You will have expectations such as

After that, the pachinko machine 10 changes the white display color of the executed pending display icon Z displayed in the third executed pending display area Dz3 to a blue display color by the same color control processing described above. This results in state A5.

In the state A5, the display colors of the four pending display icons preceding the green unexecuted pending display icon H in the first unexecuted pending display area Dh1 are all blue. The display colors of all (two) pending display icons after the unexecuted pending display icon H of the green display color of Dh1 are all white. Therefore, all the executed pending display icons Z displayed in the four executed pending display areas Dz in the pachinko machine 10 are aligned in the same display color, and all the executed pending display icons Z displayed in the unexecuted pending display area Dh If the unexecuted pending display icons H are aligned in the same display color, the player who knows that the expectation of winning the jackpot is high will finish the game round currently being executed and display each pending display icon. If the colors are not changed and shifted one by one to the left, all the execution pending display icons Z displayed in the four execution pending display areas Dz are aligned in the same display color, and the non-execution pending display icons Z are displayed in the same display color. The player has a great expectation that all the unexecuted pending display icons H displayed in the display area Dh will have the same display color. In addition, the player dislikes that the condition that all the unexecuted pending display icons H displayed in the unexecuted pending display area Dh are aligned in the same display color is no longer satisfied, and if a game ball is newly launched in the first start When the ball is hit in the mouth 33, the feeling of wanting to add the unexecuted pending display icon H in a white display color, or even if it is a change to a display color of a higher level of expectation, the pending display icon is no more. This results in a feeling that the user does not want the display color of the display to change. As described above, the already-executed pending display area Dz is an area capable of displaying pending display information corresponding to the game round after execution of the variable game in the game round is completed, that is, after execution of the game round operation. be.

After that, when the game round being executed in the state A5 ends without winning a jackpot, each reserved display icon shifts to the left one by one, and the state A6 shown in FIG. 602 is reached.

In the state A6 shown in FIG. 602, all the already-executed pending display icons Z displayed in the four already-executed pending display areas Dz are aligned in blue display color and displayed in the unexecuted pending display area Dh. All the unexecuted pending display icons H are in a white display color, and the game round corresponding to the green display color variable execution pending display icon Y shifted to the variable execution pending display area Dy is executed. It is in a state where

In this modification, as shown in the state A6, the pachinko machine 10 has all the executed pending display icons Z displayed in the four executed pending display areas Dz in the same display color, and has not been executed. When all the unexecuted pending display icons H displayed in the pending display area Dh have the same display color, all the executed pending display icons Z displayed in the four already executed pending display areas Dz are the same. and all the non-execution suspension display icons H displayed in the non-execution suspension display area Dh are aligned in the same display color. In this modified example, a female character image WM is displayed as a condition-satisfaction suggestive effect, and a character string such as "Pending already executed and pending unexecuted are all in the same color! Chance!!" Then, an effect of outputting a voice corresponding to the character string is executed. By recognizing the condition-satisfaction suggestive effect, the player can make all the execution pending display icons Z displayed in the four execution pending display areas Dz have the same display color and the non-execution pending display. It can be recognized that there is a special meaning in that all the unexecuted pending display icons H displayed in the area Dh have the same display color.

Thereafter, as shown in state A7, the pachinko machine 10 executes a predetermined premium ready-to-win effect suggesting that there is an extremely high possibility of winning a jackpot in the game round currently being executed, and in the premium ready-to-win effect, a predetermined View premium images. In this modification, a whale character image KL is displayed as the premium image. Since the premium ready-to-win effect is executed and the premium image is displayed, the player expects that the possibility of winning the jackpot in the game cycle is extremely high.

Thereafter, as shown in state A8 of FIG. 603, the pachinko machine 10 stops and displays the changing symbols at "777" corresponding to winning the big win, and displays a winning big win image notifying that the big win has been won. do. In this modified example, a close-up image WM2 of a female character is displayed as a jackpot winning image, a character string such as "Congratulations on the big win!!" is displayed, and an effect of outputting a voice corresponding to the character string is executed. After that, the pachinko machine 10 starts an opening/closing execution mode based on the winning of the jackpot.

・Case B
604, 605, and 606 are explanatory diagrams for explaining an example of how the pending display icon changes as case B. FIG. In the state B1 shown in FIG. 604, the already-executed-suspended display icon Z is displayed in red in the fourth already-executed-suspended display area Dz4, and the already-executed-suspended display icon Z is displayed in white in the third already-executed-suspended display area Dz3. , the already-executed-suspended display icon Z is displayed in white in the second already-executed-suspended display area Dz2, and the already-executed-suspended display icon Z is displayed in white in the first already-executed-suspended display area Dz1. is displayed in color, the variable execution suspension display icon Y is displayed in white in the variation execution suspension display area Dy, and the game round corresponding to the variation execution suspension display icon Y is being executed. be.

In this state B1, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 33, the pachinko machine 10 detects the game ball entry and acquires special information based on the game ball entry, as described above. Then, the pre-determination process is executed for the acquired special information, and whether or not to execute the same color control process is determined based on the result of the pre-determination process. In the example shown in this case B, as a result of the first determination process, the result of the winning lottery is a jackpot winning, it is decided to execute the same color control process described above, and as the same color control process, the holding corresponding to the entering ball The display color of the display icon is determined to be green, and the display color of the four pending display icons preceding the relevant pending display icon is the display color of the currently highest stage among the four pending display icons. Align to a certain white (however, in this state B1, all are already aligned to white), align the display color of the pending display icon after the pending display icon to blue, and in the game round corresponding to the pending display icon, a predetermined It is assumed that a premium ready-to-win effect is executed and a predetermined premium image is to be displayed in the premium ready-to-win effect. As a result, the green unexecuted pending display icon H is displayed in the first unexecuted pending display area Dh1, resulting in state B2.

In the state B2, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 33 and the pachinko machine 10 detects the entering of the game ball into the first starting hole 33, the above-described same-color control process causes the second non-execution suspension display. An unexecuted pending display icon H in a blue display color is displayed in the area Dh2. This results in state B3.

In state B3, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 33 and the pachinko machine 10 detects that the game ball enters the first starting hole 33, the display color is changed to blue by the same color control process described above. On the premise of changing, the unexecuted pending display icon H in white is displayed in the third unexecuted pending display area Dh3. This results in state B4.

In the state B4, the display colors of the four pending display icons preceding the green unexecuted pending display icon H in the first unexecuted pending display area Dh1 are all white. All the executed pending display icons Z displayed in the already executed pending display areas Dz have the same display color, and all the unexecuted pending display icons H displayed in the unexecuted pending display area Dh have the same display color. There is an expectation that a phenomenon such as matching the display color of .

After that, the pachinko machine 10 changes the white display color of the unexecuted pending display icon H displayed in the third unexecuted pending display area Dh3 to a blue display color by the same color control processing described above. This results in state B5.

In the state B5, the display colors of the four pending display icons preceding the green unexecuted pending display icon H in the first unexecuted pending display area Dh1 are all white. The display colors of all (two) pending display icons after the unexecuted pending display icon H of the green display color of Dh1 are all blue. Therefore, all the executed pending display icons Z displayed in the four executed pending display areas Dz in the pachinko machine 10 are aligned in the same display color, and all the executed pending display icons Z displayed in the unexecuted pending display area Dh If the unexecuted pending display icons H are aligned in the same display color, the player who knows that the expectation of winning the jackpot is high will finish the game round currently being executed and display each pending display icon. If the colors are not changed and shifted one by one to the left, all the execution pending display icons Z displayed in the four execution pending display areas Dz are aligned in the same display color, and the non-execution pending display icons Z are displayed in the same display color. The player has a great expectation that all the unexecuted pending display icons H displayed in the display area Dh will have the same display color. In addition, the player dislikes that the condition that all the unexecuted pending display icons H displayed in the unexecuted pending display area Dh are aligned in the same display color is no longer satisfied, and if a game ball is newly launched in the first start When the ball is hit in the mouth 33, there is a feeling of wanting the unexecuted pending display icon H to be added in a blue display color, or even if there is a change to a display color of a higher level of expectation, there is no more pending display icon. This results in a feeling that the user does not want the display color of the display to change.

After that, when the game cycle being executed in the state B5 ends without winning a jackpot, each holding display icon shifts to the left one by one, and the state B6 shown in FIG. 605 is reached.

In the state B6 shown in FIG. 605, all the executed pending display icons Z displayed in the four executed pending display areas Dz are aligned in white color and displayed in the unexecuted pending display area Dh. All the unexecuted pending display icons H are in a blue display color, and the game round corresponding to the green display color variable execution pending display icon Y shifted to the variable execution pending display area Dy is executed. It is in a state where

In this modification, as shown in the state B6, the pachinko machine 10 has all the executed pending display icons Z displayed in the four executed pending display areas Dz in the same display color, and has not been executed. When all the unexecuted pending display icons H displayed in the pending display area Dh have the same display color, the above-described condition establishment suggesting effect is executed. In this modified example, a female character image WM is displayed as a condition-satisfaction suggestive effect, and a character string such as "Pending already executed and pending unexecuted are all in the same color! Chance!!" Then, an effect of outputting a voice corresponding to the character string is executed. By recognizing the condition-satisfaction suggestive effect, the player can make all the execution pending display icons Z displayed in the four execution pending display areas Dz have the same display color and the non-execution pending display. It can be recognized that there is a special meaning in that all the unexecuted pending display icons H displayed in the area Dh have the same display color.

After that, as shown in state B7, the pachinko machine 10 executes a predetermined premium ready-to-win effect suggesting that there is an extremely high possibility of winning a jackpot in the game round currently being executed, and in the premium ready-to-win effect, a predetermined View premium images. In this modification, a whale character image KL is displayed as the premium image. Since the premium ready-to-win effect is executed and the premium image is displayed, the player expects that the possibility of winning the jackpot in the game cycle is extremely high.

After that, as shown in state B8 of FIG. 606, the pachinko machine 10 stops and displays the changing symbols at "777" corresponding to the winning of the big win, and displays the winning big win image notifying the winning of the big win. do. In this modified example, a close-up image WM2 of a female character is displayed as a jackpot winning image, a character string such as "Congratulations on the big win!!" is displayed, and an effect of outputting a voice corresponding to the character string is executed. After that, the pachinko machine 10 starts the opening/closing execution mode based on the winning of the jackpot.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present invention, a predetermined number of already-executed pending display icons Z in the already-executed pending display area Dz corresponding to the game round after the execution of the game round motion are used to inform the player. On the other hand, it is possible to realize a new performance that has never existed before, such as suggesting the degree of expectation for winning a jackpot.

Specifically, according to this modified example, as shown in case A, all the already-executed pending display icons Z displayed in the four already-executed pending display areas Dz are displayed in blue. When all the unexecuted pending display icons H displayed in the execution pending display area Dh are displayed in white, a predetermined premium ready-to-win effect is executed as a game rotation operation and a predetermined premium image is displayed. For the player, all the execution pending display icons Z displayed in the already execution pending display area Dz are aligned in a blue display color, and all the unexecuted pending display displayed in the unexecuted pending display area Dh. It is possible to create a new sense of expectation that has never existed in the past, such as wanting the icon H to be displayed in a white display color.

In particular, in the conventional pachinko machine, even if the reserved display icon corresponding to the game round of the game round motion is displayed in a display color with a high possibility of winning a jackpot after the game round motion is executed. If the game rotation operation ends without winning the jackpot for the reserved display icon, the display color loses its meaning.

However, according to this modification, the pending display icon corresponding to the game round after execution of the game round motion is displayed as the already-executed pending display icon Z, and all of the four already-executed pending display areas Dz are displayed. When the executed pending display icon Z is blue and all the unexecuted pending display icons H displayed in the unexecuted pending display area Dh are white, a predetermined premium reach is performed as a game rotation operation. An effect is executed and a predetermined premium image is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to give meaning to the already-executed suspension display icon Z corresponding to the game round in which the game round operation has ended without winning the jackpot, and to draw the attention of the player. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, in the example shown in case A, the big win is won after all the reserved display icons in the blue display color are missed despite the fact that they are consecutive, which brings great joy to the player. can give.

Furthermore, according to this modification, as shown in case A, the display color of the execution pending display icon Z in the execution pending display area Dz may be changed. Then, even in a situation where all the execution pending display icons Z displayed in the four execution pending display areas Dz do not all have the same display color, it is possible that the execution pending display area Dz The display color of the displayed already-execution-suspended display icon Z may change, and all the already-executed-suspended display icons Z displayed in the four already-executed-suspended display areas Dz may have the same display color. It can create a sense of anticipation. Then, the display color of the execution pending display icon Z actually displayed in the execution pending display area Dz changes, and all the executed pending display icons Z displayed in the four execution pending display areas Dz are displayed. are all in the same display color, it is possible to give great joy to the player, and all the unexecuted pending display icons H displayed in the unexecuted pending display area Dh also have the same display color. It is possible to give a further sense of expectation that you want it to be complete.

Furthermore, according to this modification, as shown in case B, all the execution pending display icons Z displayed in the four execution pending display areas Dz are displayed in white, and the unexecuted pending display When all the unexecuted pending display icons H displayed in the area Dh are displayed in blue, a predetermined premium ready-to-win effect is executed and a predetermined premium image is displayed, and then opened and closed as a result of the game round. Since the jackpot winning image corresponding to the occurrence of the execution mode is displayed, all the execution suspension display icons Z displayed in the execution suspension display area Dz are aligned in white display color for the player, and It is possible to create a new sense of expectation that has not existed in the past, such as wanting all the unexecuted pending display icons H displayed in the unexecuted pending display area Dh to be all displayed in blue.

Furthermore, in the example shown in case B, the pending display icon in the white display color with the lowest expectation of winning the jackpot continues in succession, and the jackpot is won after all of them are lost. The hope that it can give great joy to people, and that the possibility of winning a big win may be increased even in a situation where the pending display icon in the white display color, which is the least expected, continues in succession. can be given to the player.

Furthermore, according to this modification, as shown in case B, the display color of the unexecuted pending display icon H in the unexecuted pending display area Dh may be changed. Then, even if all the unexecuted pending display icons H displayed in the unexecuted pending display area Dh do not all have the same display color, they may be displayed in the unexecuted pending display area Dh. There is an expectation that the display color of the unexecuted pending display icon H will change and all the unexecuted pending display icons H displayed in the unexecuted pending display area Dh will be aligned in the same display color. can hold Then, the display color of the unexecuted pending display icon H actually displayed in the unexecuted pending display area Dh changes, and all the unexecuted pending display icons H displayed in the unexecuted pending display area Dh are displayed in the same color. When the display colors are the same, the player can be greatly delighted, and all the execution pending display icons Z displayed in the execution pending display area Dz are also uniform in the same display color. It is possible to give a further sense of expectation such as wanting.

Furthermore, according to this modification, as shown in cases A and B, the execution pending display icon Z in the execution pending display area Dz is displayed in a hexagonal shape, and the unexecuted pending display icon Z in the unexecuted pending display area Dh The display icon H is displayed in a circular shape. That is, the pending execution display icon Z in the pending execution display area Dz is displayed in a shape different from the pending pending display icon H in the pending pending display area Dh. Therefore, the player can recognize that the pending execution display icon Z is different from the non-execution pending display icon H. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that there is an unexecuted pending icon H whose game round has not yet been executed in a situation where the already executed pending display icon Z is displayed. .

Furthermore, in the present modification, the number of pending execution display icons Z displayed in the pending execution display area Dz is set to a fixed number (four) and does not change. Therefore, the degree of difficulty that all the pending-execution display icons Z displayed in the pending-execution display area Dz have the same display color is constant. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling unnecessary anticipation or disappointment due to a change in the difficulty level.

Furthermore, according to this modification, all the execution pending display icons Z displayed in the four execution pending display areas Dz have the same display color, and all the execution pending display icons Z displayed in the unexecution pending display area Dh When the unexecuted pending display icons H have the same display color, all the executed pending display icons Z are aligned in the same color, and the condition is an effect suggesting that the unexecuted pending display icons H are all aligned in the same color. Since the establishment suggesting performance is executed, all the already executed pending display icons Z displayed in the four already executed pending display areas Dz are clearly arranged in the same color and the unexecuted pending display areas are clearly displayed to the player. It is possible to recognize that the condition that all the unexecuted pending display icons H displayed in Dh are aligned in the same color is met, and that the fulfillment of the condition has a special meaning. .

Furthermore, according to this modified example, the blue display color is a display color one stage higher than the white display color among the plurality of stages. In other words, the blue display color is the second lowest tier display color. In general, even if the lowest white display color or the second lowest blue display color pending display icon is displayed, the player does not have a great sense of expectation.

However, in this modified example, as shown in cases A and B, the pending display icons displayed in white and blue display colors increase, and all the pending display icons displayed in the execution pending display area Dz , and all the unexecuted pending display icons H displayed in the unexecuted pending display area Dh are aligned in a white display color (Case A) Alternatively, all the execution pending display icons Z displayed in the execution pending display area Dz are all white, and all the unexecuted pending display icons H displayed in the unexecuted pending display area Dh are blue. (Case B), a predetermined premium ready-to-win effect is executed as a game rotation operation, and a predetermined premium image is displayed.

Therefore, according to the present modification, even in a situation where the pending display icon is displayed in a white display color or a blue display color, which generally does not give the player much expectation, the player can , the number of pending display icons in white or blue may continue to increase, and as a result, all the pending execution display icons Z displayed in the pending execution display area Dz will be displayed in blue or white. It is hoped that all the unexecuted pending display icons H displayed in the unexecuted pending display area Dh will be colored in white or blue. As a result, according to this modified example, it is possible to give special significance to the pending display icons of white display color and blue display color, which are generally not expected by the player. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<<12-8-16>> Modification 16:
In the above embodiment and each modified example, the sound emission control device 90 of the pachinko machine 10 has no special information that is held at the end of the game round, and is held after the game round ends. When a predetermined time (for example, 3 minutes) has passed without receiving a command (without a new game ball entering the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34), the erasure flag is turned ON, A configuration may be adopted in which the execution pending display icon Z displayed in the execution pending display area Dz is erased based on the erasure flag being turned ON.

In the case of adopting such a configuration, the player who was playing the game on the pachinko machine 10 stops the game, and after the lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 3 minutes) after the last game round is finished, the next player When a game is newly started on the pachinko machine 10, the execution pending display icon Z accumulated by the previous player's game is erased at the timing when the next player starts the game. Therefore, the next player does not feel annoyed that the pending execution display icons Z accumulated by the previous player's game remain in the pending execution display area Dz.

As described above, according to this modification, the next player is informed of the situation in which the game can be started in a state where the execution suspension display icon Z by the previous player's game does not exist in the execution suspension display area Dz. can be provided for

<<12-8-17>> Modification 17:
In the above-described embodiment and each modification, all the executed pending display icons Z displayed in the four executed pending display areas Dz have the same display color and are displayed in the unexecuted pending display area Dh. When all the unexecuted pending display icons H displayed in the same display color, the jackpot winning is determined according to the same display color of the executed pending display icons Z displayed in the executed pending display area Dz. A configuration with different degrees of expectation (possibility of occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode) may be employed.

Specifically, for example, all the executed pending display icons Z displayed in the four executed pending display areas Dz are aligned in the same display color, and all the executed pending display icons Z displayed in the unexecuted pending display area Dh In the case where the unexecuted pending display icons H are aligned in the same display color, the higher the expectation level associated with the same display color of the executed pending display icons Z, the higher the expected level. .

Specifically, for example, all the execution pending display icons Z displayed in the four execution pending display areas Dz are aligned in the same display color, and all the execution pending display icons Z displayed in the unexecuted pending display area Dh Among the cases in which the unexecuted pending display icons H are all in the same display color, when the display color of the already executed pending display icon Z is red (for example, all the executed pending display icons Z are all in red, When all the unexecuted pending display icons H are all displayed in white, the degree of expectation is the highest, and when the display color of the executed pending display icons Z is green (for example, when all the executed pending display icons Z are green) When the display color is the same and all the unexecuted pending display icons H are all white), the expectation is the next highest, and when the display color of the already executed pending display icon Z is blue (for example, the already executed pending display When all the icons Z are blue and all the unexecuted pending display icons H are white, the expectation is the next highest, and when the executed pending display icon Z is white ( For example, the lowest expectation may be set when all of the pending execution display icons Z are white and all non-execution pending display icons H are white.

According to this modification, the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot varies depending on the display color of the execution pending display icon Z displayed in the execution pending display area Dz. Not only does it determine whether or not the execution suspension display icon Z and the unexecution suspension display icon H displayed in the unexecution suspension display area Dh are the same display color, but also whether or not the execution suspension display icon Z is displayed in the same color. It is possible to attract the player's interest in whether or not they are aligned, thereby making the game more interesting.

<<12-8-18>> Modification 18:
In the above-described embodiment and each modification, all the executed pending display icons Z displayed in the four executed pending display areas Dz have the same display color and are displayed in the unexecuted pending display area Dh. When all the unexecuted pending display icons H have the same display color, the color of the executed pending display icon Z having the same display color and the unexecuted pending display icon H having the same display color Depending on the combination with the color of , the expectation of winning the jackpot may be different.

Specifically, for example, all the executed pending display icons Z displayed in the four executed pending display areas Dz are aligned in the same display color, and all the executed pending display icons Z displayed in the unexecuted pending display area Dh Among the cases where the unexecuted pending display icons H have the same display color, if the degree of expectation for the display color of the executed pending display icon Z is higher than the degree of expectation for the display color of the unexecuted pending display icon H (for example, All of the pending execution display icons Z are blue and all of the unexecuted pending display icons H are white. When the display color of the execution pending display icon H is the same (for example, when the execution pending display icon Z and the unexecuted pending display icon H are all in blue), the expectation is the next highest, and , when the degree of expectation for the display color of the execution pending display icon Z is lower than the degree of expectation for the display color of the unexecuted pending display icon H (for example, when all the execution pending display icons Z are white, All of the pending display icons H are displayed in a blue color) may be configured to have the lowest expectation.

According to this modification, whether or not the execution pending display icon Z displayed in the execution pending display area Dz and the unexecuted pending display icon H displayed in the unexecuted pending display area Dh are all in the same display color. It is possible to draw the player's interest not only in the display colors of the execution suspension display icon Z and the non-execution suspension display icon H, but also in what colors the respective execution suspension display icons H are arranged in, thereby further improving the interest of the game. can be achieved.

<<12-8-19>> Modification 19:
In the above embodiment and each modified example, all the executed pending display icons Z displayed in the four executed pending display areas Dz have the same display color and are displayed in the unexecuted pending display area Dh. Even if all the non-execution pending display icons H have the same display color, the predetermined premium ready-to-win effect may not be executed. Then, the player may have a higher expectation of winning the jackpot when the predetermined premium ready-to-win effect is executed than when the predetermined premium ready-to-win effect is not executed. According to this configuration, all the execution pending display icons Z displayed in the four execution pending display areas Dz are aligned in the same display color, and all the unexecuted pending display icons Z displayed in the unexecuted pending display area Dh. When the execution suspension display icons H are aligned in the same display color, the player can be given an expectation of whether or not the premium ready-to-win effect will be executed.

<<12-8-20>> Modification 20:
In the above embodiment and each modified example, all the executed pending display icons Z displayed in the four executed pending display areas Dz have the same display color and are displayed in the unexecuted pending display area Dh. When all the unexecuted pending display icons H displayed in the same display color, various images selected by lottery may be displayed. The various images include, for example, an image suggesting the set value of the lottery of the pachinko machine 10, an image showing the set value itself, an image suggesting the base value of the pachinko machine 10, an image showing the base value itself, and a specific Various images that can be displayed in the ready-to-win effect, various images that can be displayed in a specific advance notice effect, etc. can be adopted. According to this configuration, all the execution pending display icons Z displayed in the four execution pending display areas Dz are aligned in the same display color, and all the unexecuted pending display icons Z displayed in the unexecuted pending display area Dh. When the execution suspension display icons H are arranged in the same display color, the player is expected to know whether or not an image is displayed, and if so, what kind of image is displayed. be able to.

<<12-8-21>> Modification 21:
In the above-described embodiment and each modified example, the above-described same-color control process (all the execution-pending display icons Z displayed in the execution-pending display area Dz are set to the same color and displayed in the unexecution-pending display area Dh Even in a situation where the control process for making all the unexecuted pending display icons H the same color) is not executed, all the unexecuted pending display areas Dz accidentally appear in the already executed pending display area Dz due to a normal pending change notice. When the already executed pending display icon Z has the same color and all the unexecuted pending display icons H displayed in the unexecuted pending display area Dh have the same color, a predetermined premium ready-to-win effect is executed and a predetermined The configuration may be such that a premium image can be displayed.

In addition, in a situation where the above-described same color control process is not executed, due to the normal pending change notice, all the already executed pending display icons Z displayed in the already executed pending display area Dz accidentally become the same color and When all the unexecuted pending display icons H displayed in the execution pending display area Dh are of the same color, various images selected by lottery may be displayed. The various images include, for example, an image suggesting the lottery set value of the pachinko machine 10, an image showing the set value itself, an image suggesting the base value of the pachinko machine 10, an image showing the base value itself, and a specific Various images that can be displayed in the ready-to-win effect, various images that can be displayed in a specific advance notice effect, etc. can be adopted. According to this configuration, all the execution pending display icons Z displayed in the execution pending display area Dz happen to be the same color, and all the unexecuted pending display icons displayed in the unexecuted pending display area Dh. Even if H is the same color, for example, even if the game time (fluctuation time) for executing a predetermined premium ready-to-win effect cannot be secured, a predetermined image can be displayed. For the user, all the execution pending display icons Z displayed in the execution pending display area Dz are the same color, and all the unexecuted pending display icons H displayed in the unexecuted pending display area Dh are the same color. It is possible to make the players feel that they want them to come together, and to improve the interest of the game.

<<12-8-22>> Modification 22:
In the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, an effect suggesting that the display color of either the execution pending display icon Z or the unexecuted pending display icon H may change (hereinafter referred to as a pending change precursor effect A1). ) may be implemented. In other words, the configuration is such that the same rendering mode can be executed when the display color of the execution pending display icon Z is changed and when the display color of the unexecuted pending display icon H is changed, A configuration may be adopted in which the display color may not change even when the effect mode is executed. The configuration of this modified example will be specifically described below.

FIG. 607(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the pending change portent effect A1. In this modification, as the pending change precursor effect A1, an image of a specific character (crab character image XA1 in this modification) and a character string such as "Either execution pending or unexecuted pending may change!?" The character string is displayed on the pattern display device 41, and an effect is executed in which a sound corresponding to the character string is output from the speaker 46. - 特許庁After the pending change portent effect A1 is executed, in this modified example, if any one of the four executed pending display icons Z changes, it is displayed. One unexecuted pending display icon H among the plurality of unexecuted pending display icons H may change, or neither the executed pending display icon Z nor the unexecuted pending display icon H may change.

As described above, according to this modified example, the display color of the execution pending display icon Z is changed and the display color of the unexecuted pending display icon H is changed. Since the pending change portent effect A1 can be executed, the player who recognizes the pending change portent effect A1 will see whether the display color of the executed pending display icon Z will change or the display color of the unexecuted pending display icon H will change. It is not possible to determine whether Therefore, for example, when the display color of one execution pending display icon Z changes, all the executed pending display icons Z displayed in the four execution pending display areas Dz are aligned in the same display color. , when the effect mode is executed, the player does not want the display color of the unexecuted pending display icon H to change, but wants the display color of the one executed pending display icon Z to change. You will feel hopeful. As described above, according to this modified example, it is possible to make the player have a new sense of anticipation that has not existed in the past, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Furthermore, according to the present modification, even if the pending change portent effect A1 suggesting that the display color of the executed pending display icon Z or the unexecuted pending display icon H may change, is executed. In some cases, the display color of the pending execution display icon Z or the pending execution display icon H may not change. Therefore, for example, if the display color of one pending execution display icon Z changes, it is displayed in the pending execution display area Dz. In a situation where all the already-executed pending display icons Z to be displayed have the same display color, when the pending change sign effect A1 is executed, the player expects an event to change the display color. (While hoping that the pending change portent effect A1 is not a fake), further, of the executed pending display icons Z displayed in the four executed pending display areas Dz, the one executed pending display icon The user has a feeling of expectation that the display color of Z should be changed. As described above, according to this modified example, it is possible to make the player have a new sense of anticipation that has not existed in the past, and to improve the amusement of the game.

<<12-8-23>> Modification 23:
In the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, an effect suggesting that the display color of the executed pending display icon Z may change (hereinafter referred to as pending change precursor effect A2), and an unexecuted pending display icon H The effect suggesting that the display color of is likely to change (hereinafter referred to as pending change portent effect A3) may be executed in a different effect mode. In other words, the configuration is such that different effects can be executed depending on whether the display color of the pending execution display icon Z is changed or the display color of the pending execution display icon H is changed. A configuration may be adopted in which the display color may not change even when the effect mode is executed. The configuration of this modified example will be specifically described below.

FIG. 607(B) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the pending change portent effect A2. In this modified example, as the pending change portent effect A2, the image of a specific character (octopus character image XA2 in this modified example) and a character string such as "Maybe the pending execution will change!?" At the same time, an effect of outputting a voice corresponding to the character string from the speaker 46 is executed. After the pending change portent effect A2 is executed, in this modified example, any one of the four executed pending display icons Z may change, or the completed executed pending display may change. In some cases, icon Z does not change. However, the unexecuted pending display icon H does not change after the pending change portent effect A2 is executed.

FIG. 607(C) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the pending change portent effect A3. In this modified example, as the pending change portent effect A3, the image of a specific character (turtle character image XA3 in this modified example) and a character string such as "The unexecuted hold may change!?" At the same time, an effect of outputting a voice corresponding to the character string from the speaker 46 is executed. After the pending change portent effect A3 is executed, in this modification, any one of the displayed unexecuted pending display icons H may change, or may be changed. In some cases, the execution pending display icon H does not change. However, the already-executed pending display icon Z does not change after the pending change portent effect A3 is executed.

As described above, according to this modified example, the display color of the pending execution display icon Z is changed and the display color of the pending execution display icon H is changed. Since it is executable, the player who recognizes the effect mode can distinguish whether the display color of the execution suspension display icon Z is changed or the display color of the unexecution suspension display icon H is changed. Therefore, for example, when the suspension change portent effect A2 is executed, the player will have a strong interest in the current display color of the already-executed suspension display icon Z. When the pending change portent effect A3 is executed, the player will have a strong interest in the display color of the current unexecuted pending display icon H. As described above, according to the present modification, it is possible to make the player strongly interested in the current display color of the execution pending display icon Z or the unexecuted pending display icon H, thereby improving the amusement of the game. be able to.

Furthermore, according to the present modification, even if the pending change portent effect A2 suggesting that the display color of the already-executed pending display icon Z may change, the already-executed pending display icon Z does not change, for example, if the display color of one execution pending display icon Z changes, all the execution pending display icons Z displayed in the execution pending display area Dz are displayed in the same display. When the pending change portent effect A2 is executed in a situation where the colors match, the player expects an event in which the display color changes (expecting that the pending change portent effect A2 is not a fake). Furthermore, out of the four already-executed pending display icons Z displayed in the four already-executed pending display areas Dz, there is an expectation that the display color of the one already-executed pending display icon Z will change. It will be. As described above, according to this modified example, it is possible to make the player have a new sense of anticipation that has not existed in the past, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Furthermore, according to this modification, even if the pending change precursor effect A3 that suggests that the display color of the unexecuted pending display icon H may change is executed, the unexecuted pending display icon H does not change, for example, if the display color of one unexecuted pending display icon H changes, all the unexecuted pending display icons H displayed in the unexecuted pending display area Dh are displayed in the same display. When the pending change portent effect A3 is executed in a situation where the colors match, the player expects an event in which the display color changes (expecting that the pending change portent effect A3 is not a fake). ), and furthermore, of the unexecuted pending display icons H displayed in the unexecuted pending display area Dh, one of the unexecuted pending display icons H will have an expectation that the display color of the one unexecuted pending display icon H will change. . As described above, according to this modified example, it is possible to make the player have a new sense of anticipation that has not existed in the past, and to improve the amusement of the game.

<<12-8-24>> Modification 24:
In the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, an effect suggesting that the display color of either the execution pending display icon Z or the unexecuted pending display icon H will surely change (hereinafter referred to as pending change portent effect B1). It may be an executable configuration. In other words, the configuration is such that the same rendering mode can be executed when the display color of the execution pending display icon Z is changed and when the display color of the unexecuted pending display icon H is changed, The display color of either the executed pending display icon Z or the unexecuted pending display icon H may always change when the effect mode is executed. The configuration of this modified example will be specifically described below.

FIG. 608(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the pending change portent effect B1. In this modified example, as pending change precursor effect B1, a specific character image (adult male character image XB1 in this modified example) and a character string such as "Either execution pending or non-execution pending will change!" is displayed on the pattern display device 41, and an effect of outputting a voice corresponding to the character string from the speaker 46 is executed. After execution of the pending change portent effect B1, in this modified example, any one of the four executed pending display icons Z may be changed or displayed. One unexecuted pending display icon H among a plurality of unexecuted pending display icons H may change. Then, there is no case where neither the executed pending display icon Z nor the unexecuted pending display icon H changes even though the pending change portent effect B1 is executed.

As described above, according to this modified example, the display color of the execution pending display icon Z is changed and the display color of the unexecuted pending display icon H is changed. Since the pending change portent effect B1 can be executed, the player who recognizes the pending change portent effect B1 will see whether the display color of the executed pending display icon Z will change or the display color of the unexecuted pending display icon H will change. It is not possible to determine whether Therefore, for example, when the display color of one execution pending display icon Z changes, all the executed pending display icons Z displayed in the four execution pending display areas Dz are aligned in the same display color. , when the effect mode is executed, the player does not want the display color of the unexecuted pending display icon H to change, but wants the display color of the one executed pending display icon Z to change. You will feel hopeful. As described above, according to this modified example, it is possible to make the player have a new sense of anticipation that has not existed in the past, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Furthermore, according to the present modification, when the pending change precursor effect B1 suggesting that the display color of either the executed pending display icon Z or the unexecuted pending display icon H will surely change, Since the display color of either the execution pending display icon Z or the unexecuted pending display icon H always changes, for example, in a situation where all the unexecuted pending display icons H already have the same display color, the pending change When the premonition performance B1 is executed, the player does not want the display color of the unexecuted pending display icon H to change, so he/she feels that the display color of the already executed pending display icon Z should be changed. become. As described above, according to this modified example, it is possible to make the player feel a new feeling that has not existed in the past, and to improve the interest in the game.

<<12-8-25>> Modification 25:
In the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, an effect suggesting that the display color of the execution pending display icon Z will surely change (hereinafter referred to as pending change precursor effect B2) and the display color of the unexecuted pending display icon H The effect suggesting that the is always changed (hereinafter referred to as pending change portent effect B3) may be executed in a different effect mode. In other words, the configuration is such that different effects can be executed depending on whether the display color of the already executed pending display icon Z is changed or the display color of the unexecuted pending display icon H is changed. When the change portent effect B2 is executed, the display color of the executed pending display icon Z is always changed, and when the pending change portent effect B3 is executed, the display color of the unexecuted pending display icon H is always changed. It is good also as a structure which changes. The configuration of this modified example will be specifically described below.

FIG. 608(B) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the pending change portent effect B2. In this modified example, as the pending change portent effect B2, the image of a specific character (boy character image XB2 in this modified example) and a character string such as "Already executed pending will definitely change!" are displayed on the pattern display device 41. At the same time, an effect of outputting a voice corresponding to the character string from the speaker 46 is executed. After execution of pending change precursor effect B2, in this modification, any one of the four executed pending display icons Z always changes. That is, there is no case where the already-executed pending display icon Z does not change even though the pending change portent effect B2 is executed.

FIG. 608(C) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the pending change portent effect B3. In this modified example, as the pending change portent effect B3, the image of a specific character (girl character image XB3 in this modified example) and a character string such as "Unexecuted pending will definitely change!" are displayed on the pattern display device 41. At the same time, an effect of outputting a voice corresponding to the character string from the speaker 46 is executed. After the pending change portent effect B3 is executed, in this modified example, one of the unexecuted pending display icons H that are being displayed always changes. That is, there is no case where the unexecuted pending display icon H does not change even though the pending change portent effect B3 is executed.

As described above, in this modified example, the display color of the pending execution display icon Z is always changed, and the display color of the pending execution display icon H is always changed. Since it can be executed, the player who recognizes the effect mode can distinguish whether the display color of the execution suspension display icon Z is changed or the display color of the non-execution suspension display icon H is changed. Therefore, for example, when the pending change portent effect B2 is executed, the player will have a strong interest in the current display color of the already-executed pending display icon Z. When the suspension change portent effect B3 is executed, the player will have a strong interest in the display color of the current unexecuted suspension display icon H. Thus, according to this modification, it is possible to make the player strongly interested in the current display color of the execution pending display icon Z or the non-execution pending display icon H, thereby improving the amusement of the game. be able to.

Furthermore, according to this modification, when the pending change precursor effect B2 suggesting that the display color of the already-executed pending display icon Z will certainly change, the four already-executed pending display icons Z Since the display color of any one of the already-executed-suspended display icons Z always changes, for example, if the display color of one already-executed-suspended display icon Z changes, all of the already-executed-suspended display areas Dz are displayed. In a situation where the execution pending display icons Z are aligned in the same display color, when the pending change sign effect B2 is executed, the player can see the already executed pending display displayed in the four already executed pending display areas Dz. Among the icons Z, there is a feeling of expectation that the display color of the one already-executed pending display icon Z should be changed. As described above, according to this modified example, it is possible to make the player have a new sense of anticipation that has not existed in the past, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Furthermore, according to the present modification, when the pending change precursor effect B3 suggesting that the display color of the unexecuted pending display icon H will certainly change, the displayed unexecuted pending display icon H The display color of any one of the unexecuted pending display icons H always changes. In a situation where the unexecuted pending display icons H are aligned in the same display color, when the pending change sign effect B3 is executed, the player can select the unexecuted pending display icons H displayed in the unexecuted pending display area Dh. Among them, there is a feeling of expectation that the display color of the one unexecuted pending display icon H should be changed. As described above, according to this modified example, it is possible to make the player have a new sense of anticipation that has not existed in the past, and to improve the amusement of the game.

<<12-8-26>> Modification 26:
In the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, in the suspension change precursor effect, the specific character displayed is configured to explain the content suggested by the suspension change precursor effect (configured to speak the content as a line). A configuration without an explanation may be used. For example, in the pending change portent effect A1 described above, only the crab character image XA1 is displayed. There is a case where the display color of the unexecuted pending display icon H changes, and a case where neither the executed pending display icon Z nor the unexecuted pending display icon H changes. With such a configuration, the player can use the pachinko machine 10 to change the display color of either the executed pending display icon Z or the unexecuted pending display icon H when the crab character image XA1 is displayed. It will be recognized that it is a production that suggests that there is a possibility to do so. The same applies to the other pending change portent effects A2, A3, B1, B2, and B3 described above. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to make the player have a new sense of anticipation that has not existed in the past, and to improve the amusement of the game.

<<12-8-27>> Modification 27:
In the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, a configuration may be adopted in which an effect suggesting the changed display color of the execution pending display icon Z or the non-execution pending display icon H is executed.

Specifically, for example, in the pending change indication effect A1 described above, the symbol display device 41 is caused to display a character string such as "Which of the pending execution or the pending non-execution will change to blue?" A configuration may be adopted in which voice corresponding to the character string is output from the speaker 46 . Further, for example, in the above-described hold change portent effect A2, a character string such as "Personally executed hold may change to blue!?" It is good also as a structure output. Further, for example, in the above-described hold change portent effect A3, the symbol display device 41 displays a character string such as "Unexecuted hold may change to blue!?" It is good also as a structure output.

Further, for example, in the pending change sign effect B1 described above, the symbol display device 41 displays a character string such as "Either the pending execution or the pending non-execution will change to blue!" A configuration may be adopted in which the corresponding voice is output from the speaker 46 . Further, for example, in the above-described hold change portent effect B2, a character string such as "Already-executed hold will surely change to blue!" It is good also as a structure output. Further, for example, in the above-described hold change sign effect B3, a character string such as "Unexecuted hold will definitely change to blue!" It is good also as a structure output.

As described above, according to this modified example, it is possible to execute an effect suggesting the changed display color of the executed pending display icon Z or the unexecuted pending display icon H. , if there is one already-executed-suspended display icon Z that will have the same display color as all the already-executed-suspended display icons Z if it changes to the display color after the change suggested by the effect, The player expects that the one execution pending display icon Z will change to the display color suggested by the effect. As described above, according to this modified example, it is possible to make the player feel a new feeling that has not existed in the past, and to improve the interest in the game.

Note that the configuration for suggesting the display color after the change is not limited to the configuration described above, and various configurations can be adopted. For example, a configuration suggested by the color of a specific character image displayed (the character's own color, the color of the character's aura, etc.), or a configuration suggested by the size and position of a specific character image displayed, etc. can be adopted.

<<12-8-28>> Modification 28:
In the above embodiment and each modification, the outer frame of the pachinko machine is not limited to being made of wood, but may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin. , cast steel, stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, alloy steel, and other metals. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the modifications, the inner frame provided in the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin. It may be made of metal such as stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, or alloy steel. Further, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the front door frame provided in the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin, and may be made of steel (carbon steel), cast iron, or cast steel. , stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, alloy steel, and other metals. Further, in the above embodiment and each modification, the pachinko machine has a function of locking the inner frame to the outer frame so that it cannot be opened, and a function of locking the front door frame to the inner frame so that it cannot be opened. However, after adopting a configuration in which this cylinder lock is omitted, a first cylinder lock having a function of locking the inner frame to the outer frame so that it cannot be opened, and the front door frame A configuration in which a second cylinder lock having a function of locking the inner frame so that it cannot be opened may be employed. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, the configuration in which the rotation shaft for rotating the inner frame with respect to the outer frame is provided on the left side when viewed from the front is adopted. You may employ the structure provided. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modified examples, the configuration in which the rotation shaft for rotating the front door frame with respect to the inner frame is provided on the left side when viewed from the front is adopted. may be adopted. Further, in the above embodiment and each modification, the game board provided in the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin, and may be made of steel (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, It may be made of metal such as stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, or alloy steel. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each modification, the pachinko machine employs a configuration including an upper tray and a lower tray, but the lower tray may be omitted and a configuration including only the upper tray may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, a configuration in which the operation handle is provided on the right side in front view is adopted, but a configuration in which the operation handle is provided on the left side in front view may be adopted. Also, a configuration in which the operation handle is provided on both the right side and the left side when viewed from the front may be adopted. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the modifications, the operating handle is provided with a touch sensor capable of detecting whether or not the player is gripping the operating handle (whether or not the player's hand is in contact with the operating handle). However, a configuration in which the touch sensor is omitted may be adopted. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modification, various configurations can be adopted as the shooting means capable of shooting game balls. Alternatively, a structure or the like may be adopted in which the game ball is shot using the wind pressure generated when the compressed gas is ejected. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, when the operating handle is turned clockwise by a predetermined amount, about 100 game balls are shot per minute. A configuration in which less than 100 (eg, 60) game balls are fired per minute may be used, and a configuration in which 100 or more (eg, 200) game balls are fired per minute may be used. good. Alternatively, the game ball may be shot one by one by flipping the lever. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, a configuration in which a speaker is provided as means capable of outputting sound is adopted, but a configuration in which an earphone jack is provided in addition to or instead of the speaker may be adopted. According to this configuration, the player can hear the sound of the pachinko machine he/she is playing without being disturbed by the sounds of the surrounding pachinko machines by connecting the earphones or headphones he/she has brought with him/herself to the earphone jack. It is possible to enjoy it in minutes. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, various configurations can be adopted as the display means capable of displaying the special symbol that starts the variable display based on the entry of the game ball into the various starting holes. For example, an LED lamp, an LED display device, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a halogen lamp, or the like may be employed. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modified examples, various configurations can be adopted as the display means capable of displaying the normal symbols that start the variable display based on the passage of the game ball through various gates, For example, an LED lamp, an LED display device, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a halogen lamp, or the like may be employed. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, various configurations can be adopted as display means capable of displaying various decorative patterns, such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, and an LED display device. , a rotating drum type display device, a light guide plate, a three-dimensional hologram display device, or the like may be employed. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, the decorative pattern is not limited to numerals, and various characters, figures, symbols, patterns, etc., and combinations thereof can be employed. For example, as decorative patterns, alphabets, Greek letters, hiragana, katakana, kanji, various characters, and combinations thereof may be employed. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each modification, the number of symbol rows in which decorative symbols are scrolled is not limited to three, and may be, for example, two or less, or four or more. In the case of adopting a configuration in which there is only one decorative pattern row, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a jackpot is won when a specific decorative pattern (for example, "7") stops. In the case of adopting a configuration in which two or more rows of decorative patterns are employed, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a jackpot is won when the same decorative patterns stop on a specific line. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, various configurations can be adopted as the special electric accessory. A configuration in which the large winning slot can be opened by rotating the plate-shaped member forward about the rotation shaft, or a configuration in which the large winning slot is opened and closed by a plate-shaped member that can slide in the front-rear direction of the game board, etc. may be adopted. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modifications described above, various configurations can be adopted as the ordinary electric accessory. A rotation shaft extending in a substantially horizontal direction is provided below the plate-shaped member, and the plate-shaped member rotates forward about the rotation shaft to open the starting port, front and rear of the game board A structure or the like in which the starting port is opened and closed by a plate-shaped member that can slide in a direction may be adopted. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, the number of winning balls set in each ball opening (starting hole, general winning opening, big winning opening, etc.) is an example, and is set for each ball opening By appropriately changing the number of prize balls, it is possible to realize a plurality of types of pachinko machines with different specifications. In the above embodiment and each modification, the outer frame of the pachinko machine is not limited to being made of wood, but may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin. , cast steel, stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, alloy steel, and other metals. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the modifications, the inner frame provided in the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin. It may be made of metal such as stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, or alloy steel. Further, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the front door frame provided in the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin, and may be made of steel (carbon steel), cast iron, or cast steel. , stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, alloy steel, and other metals. Further, in the above embodiment and each modification, the pachinko machine has a function of locking the inner frame to the outer frame so that it cannot be opened, and a function of locking the front door frame to the inner frame so that it cannot be opened. However, after adopting a configuration in which this cylinder lock is omitted, a first cylinder lock having a function of locking the inner frame to the outer frame so that it cannot be opened, and the front door frame A configuration in which a second cylinder lock having a function of locking the inner frame so that it cannot be opened may be employed. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, the configuration in which the rotation shaft for rotating the inner frame with respect to the outer frame is provided on the left side when viewed from the front is adopted. You may employ the structure provided. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modified examples, the configuration in which the rotation shaft for rotating the front door frame with respect to the inner frame is provided on the left side when viewed from the front is adopted. may be adopted. Further, in the above embodiment and each modification, the game board provided in the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin, and may be made of steel (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, It may be made of metal such as stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, or alloy steel. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each modification, the pachinko machine employs a configuration including an upper tray and a lower tray, but the lower tray may be omitted and a configuration including only the upper tray may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, a configuration in which the operation handle is provided on the right side in front view is adopted, but a configuration in which the operation handle is provided on the left side in front view may be adopted. Also, a configuration in which the operation handle is provided on both the right side and the left side when viewed from the front may be adopted. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the modifications, the operating handle is provided with a touch sensor capable of detecting whether or not the player is gripping the operating handle (whether or not the player's hand is in contact with the operating handle). However, a configuration in which the touch sensor is omitted may be adopted. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modification, various configurations can be adopted as the shooting means capable of shooting game balls. Alternatively, a structure or the like may be adopted in which the game ball is shot using the wind pressure generated when the compressed gas is ejected. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, when the operating handle is turned clockwise by a predetermined amount, about 100 game balls are shot per minute. A configuration in which less than 100 (eg, 60) game balls are fired per minute may be used, and a configuration in which 100 or more (eg, 200) game balls are fired per minute may be used. good. Alternatively, the game ball may be shot one by one by flipping the lever. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, a configuration in which a speaker is provided as means capable of outputting sound is adopted, but a configuration in which an earphone jack is provided in addition to or instead of the speaker may be adopted. According to this configuration, the player can hear the sound of the pachinko machine he/she is playing without being disturbed by the sounds of the surrounding pachinko machines by connecting the earphones or headphones he/she has brought with him/herself to the earphone jack. It is possible to enjoy it in minutes. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, various configurations can be adopted as the display means capable of displaying the special symbol that starts the variable display based on the entry of the game ball into the various starting ports. For example, an LED lamp, an LED display device, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a halogen lamp, or the like may be employed. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modified examples, various configurations can be adopted as the display means capable of displaying the normal symbols that start the variable display based on the passage of the game ball through various gates, For example, an LED lamp, an LED display device, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a halogen lamp, or the like may be employed. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, in a configuration in which the number of unit areas constituting the already-executed pending area is fixed to 0, a specific color displayed in the first unexecuted pending area (for example, Green) unexecuted pending icon moves to the variable executing pending area with the specific color and becomes a variable executing pending icon, the change based on the pending information corresponding to the variable executing pending icon The result of the winning lottery may be a configuration in which the winning of the jackpot is determined (or a configuration in which the expectation of winning the jackpot is higher than that of red). That is, the case where the pending display icon to shift to the variable execution pending area is displayed in the green display color is more advantageous for the player than the case where the pending display icon is displayed in the red display color. It is good also as a structure that is high. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, various configurations can be adopted as display means capable of displaying various decorative patterns, such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, and an LED display device. , a rotating drum type display device, a light guide plate, a three-dimensional hologram display device, or the like may be employed. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, the decorative pattern is not limited to numerals, and various characters, figures, symbols, patterns, etc., and combinations thereof can be employed. For example, as decorative patterns, alphabets, Greek letters, hiragana, katakana, kanji, various characters, and combinations thereof may be employed. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each modification, the number of symbol rows in which decorative symbols are scrolled is not limited to three, and may be, for example, two or less, or four or more. In the case of adopting a configuration in which there is only one decorative pattern row, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a jackpot is won when a specific decorative pattern (for example, "7") stops. In the case of adopting a configuration in which two or more rows of decorative patterns are employed, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a jackpot is won when the same decorative patterns stop on a specific line. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, various configurations can be adopted as the special electric accessory. A configuration in which the large winning slot can be opened by rotating the plate-shaped member forward about the rotation shaft, or a configuration in which the large winning slot is opened and closed by a plate-shaped member that can slide in the front-rear direction of the game board, etc. may be adopted. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modifications described above, various configurations can be adopted as the ordinary electric accessory. A rotation shaft extending in a substantially horizontal direction is provided below the plate-shaped member, and the plate-shaped member rotates forward about the rotation shaft to open the starting port, front and rear of the game board A structure or the like in which the starting port is opened and closed by a plate-shaped member that can slide in a direction may be adopted. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, the number of winning balls set in each ball opening (starting hole, general winning opening, big winning opening, etc.) is an example, and is set for each ball opening By appropriately changing the number of prize balls, it is possible to realize a plurality of types of pachinko machines with different specifications. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, a configuration may be adopted in which various effects are executed by including the variable execution pending area in the already-executed pending area. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, the outer frame of the pachinko machine is not limited to being made of wood, but may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin. It may be made of metal such as cast iron, cast steel, stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, and alloy steel. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the modifications, the inner frame provided in the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin. It may be made of metal such as stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, or alloy steel. Further, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the front door frame provided in the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin, and may be made of steel (carbon steel), cast iron, or cast steel. , stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, alloy steel, and other metals. Further, in the above embodiment and each modification, the pachinko machine has a function of locking the inner frame to the outer frame so that it cannot be opened, and a function of locking the front door frame to the inner frame so that it cannot be opened. However, after adopting a configuration in which this cylinder lock is omitted, a first cylinder lock having a function of locking the inner frame to the outer frame so that it cannot be opened, and the front door frame A configuration in which a second cylinder lock having a function of locking the inner frame so that it cannot be opened may be employed. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, the configuration in which the rotation shaft for rotating the inner frame with respect to the outer frame is provided on the left side when viewed from the front is adopted. You may employ the structure provided. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modified examples, the configuration in which the rotation shaft for rotating the front door frame with respect to the inner frame is provided on the left side when viewed from the front is adopted. may be adopted. Further, in the above embodiment and each modification, the game board provided in the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin, and may be made of steel (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, It may be made of metal such as stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, or alloy steel. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each modification, the pachinko machine employs a configuration including an upper tray and a lower tray, but the lower tray may be omitted and a configuration including only the upper tray may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, a configuration in which the operation handle is provided on the right side in front view is adopted, but a configuration in which the operation handle is provided on the left side in front view may be adopted. Also, a configuration in which the operation handle is provided on both the right side and the left side when viewed from the front may be adopted. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the modifications, the operating handle is provided with a touch sensor capable of detecting whether or not the player is gripping the operating handle (whether or not the player's hand is in contact with the operating handle). However, a configuration in which the touch sensor is omitted may be adopted. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modification, various configurations can be adopted as the shooting means capable of shooting game balls. Alternatively, a structure or the like may be adopted in which the game ball is shot using the wind pressure generated when the compressed gas is ejected. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, when the operating handle is turned clockwise by a predetermined amount, about 100 game balls are shot per minute. A configuration in which less than 100 (eg, 60) game balls are fired per minute may be used, and a configuration in which 100 or more (eg, 200) game balls are fired per minute may be used. good. Alternatively, the game ball may be shot one by one by flipping the lever. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, a configuration in which a speaker is provided as means capable of outputting sound is adopted, but a configuration in which an earphone jack is provided in addition to or instead of the speaker may be adopted. According to this configuration, the player can hear the sound of the pachinko machine he/she is playing without being disturbed by the sounds of the surrounding pachinko machines by connecting the earphones or headphones he/she has brought with him/herself to the earphone jack. It is possible to enjoy it in minutes. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, various configurations can be adopted as the display means capable of displaying the special symbol that starts the variable display based on the entry of the game ball into the various starting ports. For example, an LED lamp, an LED display device, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a halogen lamp, or the like may be employed. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modified examples, various configurations can be adopted as the display means capable of displaying the normal symbols that start the variable display based on the passage of the game ball through various gates, For example, an LED lamp, an LED display device, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a halogen lamp, or the like may be employed. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, various configurations can be adopted as display means capable of displaying various decorative patterns, such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, and an LED display device. , a rotating drum type display device, a light guide plate, a three-dimensional hologram display device, or the like may be employed. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, the decorative pattern is not limited to numerals, and various characters, figures, symbols, patterns, etc., and combinations thereof can be employed. For example, as decorative patterns, alphabets, Greek letters, hiragana, katakana, kanji, various characters, and combinations thereof may be employed. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each modification, the number of symbol rows in which decorative symbols are scrolled is not limited to three, and may be, for example, two or less, or four or more. In the case of adopting a configuration in which there is only one decorative pattern row, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a jackpot is won when a specific decorative pattern (for example, "7") stops. In the case of adopting a configuration in which two or more rows of decorative patterns are employed, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a jackpot is won when the same decorative patterns stop on a specific line. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, various configurations can be adopted as the special electric accessory. A configuration in which the large winning slot can be opened by rotating the plate-shaped member forward about the rotation shaft, or a configuration in which the large winning slot is opened and closed by a plate-shaped member that can slide in the front-rear direction of the game board, etc. may be adopted. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modifications described above, various configurations can be adopted as the ordinary electric accessory. A rotation shaft extending in a substantially horizontal direction is provided below the plate-shaped member, and the plate-shaped member rotates forward about the rotation shaft to open the starting port, front and rear of the game board A structure or the like in which the starting port is opened and closed by a plate-shaped member that can slide in a direction may be adopted. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, the number of winning balls set in each ball opening (starting hole, general winning opening, big winning opening, etc.) is an example, and is set for each ball opening By appropriately changing the number of prize balls, it is possible to realize a plurality of types of pachinko machines with different specifications. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, the outer frame of the pachinko machine is not limited to being made of wood, but may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin. It may be made of metal such as cast iron, cast steel, stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, and alloy steel. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the modifications, the inner frame provided in the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin. It may be made of metal such as stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, or alloy steel. Further, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the front door frame provided in the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin, and may be made of steel (carbon steel), cast iron, or cast steel. , stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, alloy steel, and other metals. Further, in the above embodiment and each modification, the pachinko machine has a function of locking the inner frame to the outer frame so that it cannot be opened, and a function of locking the front door frame to the inner frame so that it cannot be opened. However, after adopting a configuration in which this cylinder lock is omitted, a first cylinder lock having a function of locking the inner frame to the outer frame so that it cannot be opened, and the front door frame A configuration in which a second cylinder lock having a function of locking the inner frame so that it cannot be opened may be employed. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, the configuration in which the rotation shaft for rotating the inner frame with respect to the outer frame is provided on the left side when viewed from the front is adopted. You may employ the structure provided. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modified examples, the configuration in which the rotation shaft for rotating the front door frame with respect to the inner frame is provided on the left side when viewed from the front is adopted. may be adopted. Further, in the above embodiment and each modification, the game board provided in the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin, and may be made of steel (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, It may be made of metal such as stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, or alloy steel. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each modification, the pachinko machine employs a configuration including an upper tray and a lower tray, but the lower tray may be omitted and a configuration including only the upper tray may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, a configuration in which the operation handle is provided on the right side in front view is adopted, but a configuration in which the operation handle is provided on the left side in front view may be adopted. Also, a configuration in which the operation handle is provided on both the right side and the left side when viewed from the front may be adopted. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the modifications, the operating handle is provided with a touch sensor capable of detecting whether or not the player is gripping the operating handle (whether or not the player's hand is in contact with the operating handle). However, a configuration in which the touch sensor is omitted may be adopted. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modification, various configurations can be adopted as the shooting means capable of shooting game balls. Alternatively, a structure or the like may be adopted in which the game ball is shot using the wind pressure generated when the compressed gas is ejected. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, when the operating handle is turned clockwise by a predetermined amount, about 100 game balls are shot per minute. A configuration in which less than 100 (eg, 60) game balls are fired per minute may be used, and a configuration in which 100 or more (eg, 200) game balls are fired per minute may be used. good. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, the number of already-executed pending areas is not limited to four. Alternatively, the game ball may be shot one by one by flipping the lever. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, a configuration in which a speaker is provided as means capable of outputting sound is adopted, but a configuration in which an earphone jack is provided in addition to or instead of the speaker may be adopted. According to this configuration, the player can hear the sound of the pachinko machine he/she is playing without being disturbed by the sounds of the surrounding pachinko machines by connecting the earphones or headphones he/she has brought with him/herself to the earphone jack. It is possible to enjoy it in minutes. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, various configurations can be adopted as the display means capable of displaying the special symbol that starts the variable display based on the entry of the game ball into the various starting ports. For example, an LED lamp, an LED display device, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a halogen lamp, or the like may be employed. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modified examples, various configurations can be adopted as the display means capable of displaying the normal symbols that start the variable display based on the passage of the game ball through various gates, For example, an LED lamp, an LED display device, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a halogen lamp, or the like may be employed. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, various configurations can be adopted as display means capable of displaying various decorative patterns, such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, and an LED display device. , a rotating drum type display device, a light guide plate, a three-dimensional hologram display device, or the like may be employed. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, the decorative pattern is not limited to numerals, and various characters, figures, symbols, patterns, etc., and combinations thereof can be employed. For example, as decorative patterns, alphabets, Greek letters, hiragana, katakana, kanji, various characters, and combinations thereof may be employed. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each modification, the number of symbol rows in which decorative symbols are scrolled is not limited to three, and may be, for example, two or less, or four or more. In the case of adopting a configuration in which there is only one decorative pattern row, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a jackpot is won when a specific decorative pattern (for example, "7") stops. In the case of adopting a configuration in which two or more rows of decorative patterns are employed, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a jackpot is won when the same decorative patterns stop on a specific line. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, various configurations can be adopted as the special electric accessory. A configuration in which the large winning slot can be opened by rotating the plate-shaped member forward about the rotation shaft, or a configuration in which the large winning slot is opened and closed by a plate-shaped member that can slide in the front-rear direction of the game board, etc. may be adopted. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modifications described above, various configurations can be adopted as the ordinary electric accessory. A rotation shaft extending in a substantially horizontal direction is provided below the plate-shaped member, and the plate-shaped member rotates forward about the rotation shaft to open the starting port, front and rear of the game board A structure or the like in which the starting port is opened and closed by a plate-shaped member that can slide in a direction may be adopted. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, the number of winning balls set in each ball opening (starting hole, general winning opening, big winning opening, etc.) is an example, and is set for each ball opening By appropriately changing the number of prize balls, it is possible to realize a plurality of types of pachinko machines with different specifications. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modifications described above, various configurations can be adopted as the ordinary electric accessory. A rotation shaft extending in a substantially horizontal direction is provided below the plate-shaped member, and the plate-shaped member rotates forward about the rotation shaft to open the starting port, front and rear of the game board A structure or the like in which the starting port is opened and closed by a plate-shaped member that can slide in a direction may be adopted. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, the number of winning balls set in each ball opening (starting hole, general winning opening, big winning opening, etc.) is an example, and is set for each ball opening By appropriately changing the number of prize balls, it is possible to realize a plurality of types of pachinko machines with different specifications. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, it is configured without an already-executed pending area, and by chance, all (one) variable-executing-holding icons displayed in the variable-executing-holding area are, for example, blue When all the unexecuted pending icons displayed in the unexecuted pending area are displayed in a white color, for example, a predetermined image may be displayed as the game rotation operation. In the above embodiment and each modification, the outer frame of the pachinko machine is not limited to being made of wood, but may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin. , cast steel, stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, alloy steel, and other metals. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the modifications, the inner frame provided in the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin. It may be made of metal such as stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, or alloy steel. Further, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the front door frame provided in the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin, and may be made of steel (carbon steel), cast iron, or cast steel. , stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, alloy steel, and other metals. Further, in the above embodiment and each modification, the pachinko machine has a function of locking the inner frame to the outer frame so that it cannot be opened, and a function of locking the front door frame to the inner frame so that it cannot be opened. However, after adopting a configuration in which this cylinder lock is omitted, a first cylinder lock having a function of locking the inner frame to the outer frame so that it cannot be opened, and the front door frame A configuration in which a second cylinder lock having a function of locking the inner frame so that it cannot be opened may be employed. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, the configuration in which the rotation shaft for rotating the inner frame with respect to the outer frame is provided on the left side when viewed from the front is adopted. You may employ the structure provided. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modified examples, the configuration in which the rotation shaft for rotating the front door frame with respect to the inner frame is provided on the left side when viewed from the front is adopted. may be adopted. Further, in the above embodiment and each modification, the game board provided in the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin, and may be made of steel (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, It may be made of metal such as stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, or alloy steel. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each modification, the pachinko machine employs a configuration including an upper tray and a lower tray, but the lower tray may be omitted and a configuration including only the upper tray may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, a configuration in which the operation handle is provided on the right side in front view is adopted, but a configuration in which the operation handle is provided on the left side in front view may be adopted. Also, a configuration in which the operation handle is provided on both the right side and the left side when viewed from the front may be adopted. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the modifications, the operating handle is provided with a touch sensor capable of detecting whether or not the player is gripping the operating handle (whether or not the player's hand is in contact with the operating handle). However, a configuration in which the touch sensor is omitted may be adopted. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modification, various configurations can be adopted as the shooting means capable of shooting game balls. Alternatively, a structure or the like may be adopted in which the game ball is shot using the wind pressure generated when the compressed gas is ejected. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, when the operating handle is turned clockwise by a predetermined amount, about 100 game balls are shot per minute. A configuration in which less than 100 (eg, 60) game balls are fired per minute may be used, and a configuration in which 100 or more (eg, 200) game balls are fired per minute may be used. good. Alternatively, the game ball may be shot one by one by flipping the lever. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, a configuration in which a speaker is provided as means capable of outputting sound is adopted, but a configuration in which an earphone jack is provided in addition to or instead of the speaker may be adopted. According to this configuration, the player can hear the sound of the pachinko machine he/she is playing without being disturbed by the sounds of the surrounding pachinko machines by connecting the earphones or headphones he/she has brought with him/herself to the earphone jack. It is possible to enjoy it in minutes. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, various configurations can be adopted as the display means capable of displaying the special symbol that starts the variable display based on the entry of the game ball into the various starting ports. For example, an LED lamp, an LED display device, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a halogen lamp, or the like may be employed. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modified examples, various configurations can be adopted as the display means capable of displaying the normal symbols that start the variable display based on the passage of the game ball through various gates, For example, an LED lamp, an LED display device, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a halogen lamp, or the like may be employed. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, various configurations can be adopted as display means capable of displaying various decorative patterns, such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, and an LED display device. , a rotating drum type display device, a light guide plate, a three-dimensional hologram display device, or the like may be employed. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, the decorative pattern is not limited to numerals, and various characters, figures, symbols, patterns, etc., and combinations thereof can be employed. For example, as decorative patterns, alphabets, Greek letters, hiragana, katakana, kanji, various characters, and combinations thereof may be employed. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each modification, the number of symbol rows in which decorative symbols are scrolled is not limited to three, and may be, for example, two or less, or four or more. In the case of adopting a configuration in which there is only one decorative pattern row, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a jackpot is won when a specific decorative pattern (for example, "7") stops. In the case of adopting a configuration in which two or more rows of decorative patterns are employed, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a jackpot is won when the same decorative patterns stop on a specific line. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, various configurations can be adopted as the special electric accessory. A configuration in which the large winning slot can be opened by rotating the plate-shaped member forward about the rotation shaft, or a configuration in which the large winning slot is opened and closed by a plate-shaped member that can slide in the front-rear direction of the game board, etc. may be adopted. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modifications described above, various configurations can be adopted as the ordinary electric accessory. A rotation shaft extending in a substantially horizontal direction is provided below the plate-shaped member, and the plate-shaped member rotates forward about the rotation shaft to open the starting port, front and rear of the game board A structure or the like in which the starting port is opened and closed by a plate-shaped member that can slide in a direction may be adopted. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, the number of winning balls set in each ball opening (starting hole, general winning opening, big winning opening, etc.) is an example, and is set for each ball opening By appropriately changing the number of prize balls, it is possible to realize a plurality of types of pachinko machines with different specifications. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, the outer frame of the pachinko machine is not limited to being made of wood, but may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin. It may be made of metal such as cast iron, cast steel, stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, and alloy steel. In the above embodiment, each of the above modifications, and the above configuration B, it happens that all (one) variable execution suspension icons displayed in the variable execution suspension area are displayed in white, for example, and the non-execution suspension If all the unexecuted pending icons displayed in the area are, for example, displayed in blue, an image corresponding to winning the jackpot may be displayed. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the modifications, the inner frame provided in the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin. It may be made of metal such as stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, or alloy steel. Further, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the front door frame provided in the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin, and may be made of steel (carbon steel), cast iron, or cast steel. , stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, alloy steel, and other metals. Further, in the above embodiment and each modification, the pachinko machine has a function of locking the inner frame to the outer frame so that it cannot be opened, and a function of locking the front door frame to the inner frame so that it cannot be opened. However, after adopting a configuration in which this cylinder lock is omitted, a first cylinder lock having a function of locking the inner frame to the outer frame so that it cannot be opened, and the front door frame A configuration in which a second cylinder lock having a function of locking the inner frame so that it cannot be opened may be employed. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, the configuration in which the rotation shaft for rotating the inner frame with respect to the outer frame is provided on the left side when viewed from the front is adopted. You may employ the structure provided. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modified examples, the configuration in which the rotation shaft for rotating the front door frame with respect to the inner frame is provided on the left side when viewed from the front is adopted. may be adopted. Further, in the above embodiment and each modification, the game board provided in the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin, and may be made of steel (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, It may be made of metal such as stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, or alloy steel. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each modification, the pachinko machine employs a configuration including an upper tray and a lower tray, but the lower tray may be omitted and a configuration including only the upper tray may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, a configuration in which the operation handle is provided on the right side in front view is adopted, but a configuration in which the operation handle is provided on the left side in front view may be adopted. Also, a configuration in which the operation handle is provided on both the right side and the left side when viewed from the front may be adopted. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the modifications, the operating handle is provided with a touch sensor capable of detecting whether or not the player is gripping the operating handle (whether or not the player's hand is in contact with the operating handle). However, a configuration in which the touch sensor is omitted may be adopted. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modification, various configurations can be adopted as the shooting means capable of shooting game balls. Alternatively, a structure or the like may be adopted in which the game ball is shot using the wind pressure generated when the compressed gas is ejected. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, when the operating handle is turned clockwise by a predetermined amount, about 100 game balls are shot per minute. A configuration in which less than 100 (eg, 60) game balls are fired per minute may be used, and a configuration in which 100 or more (eg, 200) game balls are fired per minute may be used. good. Alternatively, the game ball may be shot one by one by flipping the lever. In addition, in the above-described embodiment, each of the above modifications, and the above-described configuration B, the display color and shape of the variable execution suspension icon and the non-execution suspension icon may be changed, and the variation execution suspension icon is the non-execution suspension icon may be configured to be displayed in a different manner. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, a configuration in which a speaker is provided as means capable of outputting sound is adopted, but a configuration in which an earphone jack is provided in addition to or instead of the speaker may be adopted. According to this configuration, the player can hear the sound of the pachinko machine he/she is playing without being disturbed by the sounds of the surrounding pachinko machines by connecting the earphones or headphones he/she has brought with him/herself to the earphone jack. It is possible to enjoy it in minutes. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, various configurations can be adopted as the display means capable of displaying the special symbol that starts the variable display based on the entry of the game ball into the various starting holes. For example, an LED lamp, an LED display device, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a halogen lamp, or the like may be employed. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modified examples, various configurations can be adopted as the display means capable of displaying the normal symbols that start the variable display based on the passage of the game ball through various gates, For example, an LED lamp, an LED display device, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a halogen lamp, or the like may be employed. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, various configurations can be adopted as display means capable of displaying various decorative patterns, such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, and an LED display device. , a rotating drum type display device, a light guide plate, a three-dimensional hologram display device, or the like may be employed. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, the decorative pattern is not limited to numerals, and various characters, figures, symbols, patterns, etc., and combinations thereof can be employed. For example, as decorative patterns, alphabets, Greek letters, hiragana, katakana, kanji, various characters, and combinations thereof may be employed. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each modification, the number of symbol rows in which decorative symbols are scrolled is not limited to three, and may be, for example, two or less, or four or more. In the case of adopting a configuration in which there is only one decorative pattern row, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a jackpot is won when a specific decorative pattern (for example, "7") stops. In the case of adopting a configuration in which two or more rows of decorative patterns are employed, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a jackpot is won when the same decorative patterns stop on a specific line. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, various configurations can be adopted as the special electric accessory. A configuration in which the large winning slot can be opened by rotating the plate-shaped member forward about the rotation shaft, or a configuration in which the large winning slot is opened and closed by a plate-shaped member that can slide in the front-rear direction of the game board, etc. may be adopted. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modifications described above, various configurations can be adopted as the ordinary electric accessory. A rotation shaft extending in a substantially horizontal direction is provided below the plate-shaped member, and the plate-shaped member rotates forward about the rotation shaft to open the starting port, front and rear of the game board A structure or the like in which the starting port is opened and closed by a plate-shaped member that can slide in a direction may be adopted. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, the number of winning balls set in each ball opening (starting hole, general winning opening, big winning opening, etc.) is an example, and is set for each ball opening By appropriately changing the number of prize balls, it is possible to realize a plurality of types of pachinko machines with different specifications. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modifications described above, various configurations can be adopted as the ordinary electric accessory. A rotation shaft extending in a substantially horizontal direction is provided below the plate-shaped member, and the plate-shaped member rotates forward about the rotation shaft to open the starting port, front and rear of the game board A structure or the like in which the starting port is opened and closed by a plate-shaped member that can slide in a direction may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment, each of the above modifications, and the above-described configuration B, the number of variable execution suspension icons may be a fixed number, and the variable execution suspension icon may be deleted based on the start of a predetermined effect. (disappears from the display screen). In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, the number of winning balls set in each ball opening (starting hole, general winning opening, big winning opening, etc.) is an example, and is set for each ball opening By appropriately changing the number of prize balls, it is possible to realize a plurality of types of pachinko machines with different specifications. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, the outer frame of the pachinko machine is not limited to being made of wood, but may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin. It may be made of metal such as cast iron, cast steel, stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, and alloy steel. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the modifications, the inner frame provided in the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin. It may be made of metal such as stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, or alloy steel. Further, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the front door frame provided in the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin, and may be made of steel (carbon steel), cast iron, or cast steel. , stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, alloy steel, and other metals. Further, in the above embodiment and each modification, the pachinko machine has a function of locking the inner frame to the outer frame so that it cannot be opened, and a function of locking the front door frame to the inner frame so that it cannot be opened. However, after adopting a configuration in which this cylinder lock is omitted, a first cylinder lock having a function of locking the inner frame to the outer frame so that it cannot be opened, and the front door frame A configuration in which a second cylinder lock having a function of locking the inner frame so that it cannot be opened may be employed. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, the configuration in which the rotation shaft for rotating the inner frame with respect to the outer frame is provided on the left side when viewed from the front is adopted. You may employ the structure provided. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modified examples, the configuration in which the rotation shaft for rotating the front door frame with respect to the inner frame is provided on the left side when viewed from the front is adopted. may be adopted. Further, in the above embodiment and each modification, the game board provided in the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin, and may be made of steel (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, It may be made of metal such as stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, or alloy steel. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each modification, the pachinko machine employs a configuration including an upper tray and a lower tray, but the lower tray may be omitted and a configuration including only the upper tray may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, a configuration in which the operation handle is provided on the right side in front view is adopted, but a configuration in which the operation handle is provided on the left side in front view may be adopted. Also, a configuration in which the operation handle is provided on both the right side and the left side when viewed from the front may be adopted. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the modifications, the operating handle is provided with a touch sensor capable of detecting whether or not the player is gripping the operating handle (whether or not the player's hand is in contact with the operating handle). However, a configuration in which the touch sensor is omitted may be adopted. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modification, various configurations can be adopted as the shooting means capable of shooting game balls. Alternatively, a structure or the like may be adopted in which the game ball is shot using the wind pressure generated when the compressed gas is ejected. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, when the operating handle is turned clockwise by a predetermined amount, about 100 game balls are shot per minute. A configuration in which less than 100 (eg, 60) game balls are fired per minute may be used, and a configuration in which 100 or more (eg, 200) game balls are fired per minute may be used. good. Alternatively, the game ball may be shot one by one by flipping the lever. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, a configuration in which a speaker is provided as means capable of outputting sound is adopted, but a configuration in which an earphone jack is provided in addition to or instead of the speaker may be adopted. According to this configuration, the player can hear the sound of the pachinko machine he/she is playing without being disturbed by the sounds of the surrounding pachinko machines by connecting the earphones or headphones he/she has brought with him/herself to the earphone jack. It is possible to enjoy it in minutes. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, various configurations can be adopted as the display means capable of displaying the special symbol that starts the variable display based on the entry of the game ball into the various starting ports. For example, an LED lamp, an LED display device, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a halogen lamp, or the like may be employed. In addition, in the above embodiment, each of the above modifications, and the above configuration B, by chance, all (one) variable execution pending icons displayed in the variable execution pending area are displayed in blue, for example. When all the non-execution pending icons displayed in the execution pending area are displayed in white, for example, it may be configured to execute a suggestive effect corresponding to the display color of the variable execution pending icon being blue. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modified examples, various configurations can be adopted as the display means capable of displaying the normal symbols that start the variable display based on the passage of the game ball through various gates, For example, an LED lamp, an LED display device, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a halogen lamp, or the like may be employed. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, various configurations can be adopted as display means capable of displaying various decorative patterns, such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, and an LED display device. , a rotating drum type display device, a light guide plate, a three-dimensional hologram display device, or the like may be employed. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, the decorative pattern is not limited to numerals, and various characters, figures, symbols, patterns, etc., and combinations thereof can be employed. For example, as decorative patterns, alphabets, Greek letters, hiragana, katakana, kanji, various characters, and combinations thereof may be employed. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each modification, the number of symbol rows in which decorative symbols are scrolled is not limited to three, and may be, for example, two or less, or four or more. In the case of adopting a configuration in which there is only one decorative pattern row, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a jackpot is won when a specific decorative pattern (for example, "7") stops. In the case of adopting a configuration in which two or more rows of decorative patterns are employed, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a jackpot is won when the same decorative patterns stop on a specific line. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, various configurations can be adopted as the special electric accessory. A configuration in which the large winning slot can be opened by rotating the plate-shaped member forward about the rotation shaft, or a configuration in which the large winning slot is opened and closed by a plate-shaped member that can slide in the front-rear direction of the game board, etc. may be adopted. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modifications described above, various configurations can be adopted as the ordinary electric accessory. A rotation shaft extending in a substantially horizontal direction is provided below the plate-shaped member, and the plate-shaped member rotates forward about the rotation shaft to open the starting port, front and rear of the game board A structure or the like in which the starting port is opened and closed by a plate-shaped member that can slide in a direction may be adopted. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, the number of winning balls set in each ball opening (starting hole, general winning opening, big winning opening, etc.) is an example, and is set for each ball opening By appropriately changing the number of prize balls, it is possible to realize a plurality of types of pachinko machines with different specifications. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modifications described above, various configurations can be adopted as the ordinary electric accessory. A rotation shaft extending in a substantially horizontal direction is provided below the plate-shaped member, and the plate-shaped member rotates forward about the rotation shaft to open the starting port, front and rear of the game board A structure or the like in which the starting port is opened and closed by a plate-shaped member that can slide in a direction may be adopted. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, the number of winning balls set in each ball opening (starting hole, general winning opening, big winning opening, etc.) is an example, and is set for each ball opening By appropriately changing the number of prize balls, it is possible to realize a plurality of types of pachinko machines with different specifications. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, the outer frame of the pachinko machine is not limited to being made of wood, but may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin. It may be made of metal such as cast iron, cast steel, stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, and alloy steel. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the modifications, the inner frame provided in the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin. It may be made of metal such as stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, or alloy steel. Further, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the front door frame provided in the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin, and may be made of steel (carbon steel), cast iron, or cast steel. , stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, alloy steel, and other metals. In addition, in the above-described embodiment, each modified example, and the above-described configuration B, the degree of expectation for winning a jackpot may differ according to the display mode (color or shape) of the variable execution suspension icon. Further, in the above embodiment and each modification, the pachinko machine has a function of locking the inner frame to the outer frame so that it cannot be opened, and a function of locking the front door frame to the inner frame so that it cannot be opened. However, after adopting a configuration in which this cylinder lock is omitted, a first cylinder lock having a function of locking the inner frame to the outer frame so that it cannot be opened, and the front door frame A configuration in which a second cylinder lock having a function of locking the inner frame so that it cannot be opened may be employed. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, the configuration in which the rotation shaft for rotating the inner frame with respect to the outer frame is provided on the left side when viewed from the front is adopted. You may employ the structure provided. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modified examples, the configuration in which the rotation shaft for rotating the front door frame with respect to the inner frame is provided on the left side when viewed from the front is adopted. may be adopted. Further, in the above embodiment and each modification, the game board provided in the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin, and may be made of steel (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, It may be made of metal such as stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, or alloy steel. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each modification, the pachinko machine employs a configuration including an upper tray and a lower tray, but the lower tray may be omitted and a configuration including only the upper tray may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, a configuration in which the operation handle is provided on the right side in front view is adopted, but a configuration in which the operation handle is provided on the left side in front view may be adopted. Also, a configuration in which the operation handle is provided on both the right side and the left side when viewed from the front may be adopted. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the modifications, the operating handle is provided with a touch sensor capable of detecting whether or not the player is gripping the operating handle (whether or not the player's hand is in contact with the operating handle). However, a configuration in which the touch sensor is omitted may be adopted. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modification, various configurations can be adopted as the shooting means capable of shooting game balls. Alternatively, a structure or the like may be adopted in which the game ball is shot using the wind pressure generated when the compressed gas is ejected. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, when the operating handle is turned clockwise by a predetermined amount, about 100 game balls are shot per minute. A configuration in which less than 100 (eg, 60) game balls are fired per minute may be used, and a configuration in which 100 or more (eg, 200) game balls are fired per minute may be used. good. Alternatively, the game ball may be shot one by one by flipping the lever. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, a configuration in which a speaker is provided as means capable of outputting sound is adopted, but a configuration in which an earphone jack is provided in addition to or instead of the speaker may be adopted. According to this configuration, the player can hear the sound of the pachinko machine he/she is playing without being disturbed by the sounds of the surrounding pachinko machines by connecting the earphones or headphones he/she has brought with him/herself to the earphone jack. It is possible to enjoy it in minutes. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, various configurations can be adopted as the display means capable of displaying the special symbol that starts the variable display based on the entry of the game ball into the various starting ports. For example, an LED lamp, an LED display device, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a halogen lamp, or the like may be employed. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modified examples, various configurations can be adopted as the display means capable of displaying the normal symbols that start the variable display based on the passage of the game ball through various gates, For example, an LED lamp, an LED display device, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a halogen lamp, or the like may be employed. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, various configurations can be adopted as display means capable of displaying various decorative patterns, such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, and an LED display device. , a rotating drum type display device, a light guide plate, a three-dimensional hologram display device, or the like may be employed. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, the decorative pattern is not limited to numerals, and various characters, figures, symbols, patterns, etc., and combinations thereof can be employed. For example, as decorative patterns, alphabets, Greek letters, hiragana, katakana, kanji, various characters, and combinations thereof may be employed. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each modification, the number of symbol rows in which decorative symbols are scrolled is not limited to three, and may be, for example, two or less, or four or more. In the case of adopting a configuration in which there is only one decorative pattern row, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a jackpot is won when a specific decorative pattern (for example, "7") stops. In the case of adopting a configuration in which two or more rows of decorative patterns are employed, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a jackpot is won when the same decorative patterns stop on a specific line. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, various configurations can be adopted as the special electric accessory. A configuration in which the large winning slot can be opened by rotating the plate-shaped member forward about the rotation shaft, or a configuration in which the large winning slot is opened and closed by a plate-shaped member that can slide in the front-rear direction of the game board, etc. may be adopted. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modifications described above, various configurations can be adopted as the ordinary electric accessory. A rotation shaft extending in a substantially horizontal direction is provided below the plate-shaped member, and the plate-shaped member rotates forward about the rotation shaft to open the starting port, front and rear of the game board A structure or the like in which the starting port is opened and closed by a plate-shaped member that can slide in a direction may be adopted. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, the number of winning balls set in each ball opening (starting hole, general winning opening, big winning opening, etc.) is an example, and is set for each ball opening By appropriately changing the number of prize balls, it is possible to realize a plurality of types of pachinko machines with different specifications. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, the outer frame of the pachinko machine is not limited to being made of wood, but may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin. It may be made of metal such as cast iron, cast steel, stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, and alloy steel. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the modifications, the inner frame provided in the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin. It may be made of metal such as stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, or alloy steel. Further, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the front door frame provided in the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin, and may be made of steel (carbon steel), cast iron, or cast steel. , stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, alloy steel, and other metals. Further, in the above embodiment and each modification, the pachinko machine has a function of locking the inner frame to the outer frame so that it cannot be opened, and a function of locking the front door frame to the inner frame so that it cannot be opened. However, after adopting a configuration in which this cylinder lock is omitted, a first cylinder lock having a function of locking the inner frame to the outer frame so that it cannot be opened, and the front door frame A configuration in which a second cylinder lock having a function of locking the inner frame so that it cannot be opened may be employed. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, the configuration in which the rotation shaft for rotating the inner frame with respect to the outer frame is provided on the left side when viewed from the front is adopted. You may employ the structure provided. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modified examples, the configuration in which the rotation shaft for rotating the front door frame with respect to the inner frame is provided on the left side when viewed from the front is adopted. may be adopted. Further, in the above embodiment and each modification, the game board provided in the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin, and may be made of steel (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, It may be made of metal such as stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, or alloy steel. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each modification, the pachinko machine employs a configuration including an upper tray and a lower tray, but the lower tray may be omitted and a configuration including only the upper tray may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, a configuration in which the operation handle is provided on the right side in front view is adopted, but a configuration in which the operation handle is provided on the left side in front view may be adopted. Also, a configuration in which the operation handle is provided on both the right side and the left side when viewed from the front may be adopted. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the modifications, the operating handle is provided with a touch sensor capable of detecting whether or not the player is gripping the operating handle (whether or not the player's hand is in contact with the operating handle). However, a configuration in which the touch sensor is omitted may be adopted. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modification, various configurations can be adopted as the shooting means capable of shooting game balls. Alternatively, a structure or the like may be adopted in which the game ball is shot using the wind pressure generated when the compressed gas is ejected. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, when the operating handle is turned clockwise by a predetermined amount, about 100 game balls are shot per minute. A configuration in which less than 100 (eg, 60) game balls are fired per minute may be used, and a configuration in which 100 or more (eg, 200) game balls are fired per minute may be used. good. Alternatively, the game ball may be shot one by one by flipping the lever. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, a configuration in which a speaker is provided as means capable of outputting sound is adopted, but a configuration in which an earphone jack is provided in addition to or instead of the speaker may be adopted. According to this configuration, the player can hear the sound of the pachinko machine he/she is playing without being disturbed by the sound of the surrounding pachinko machines by connecting the earphones or headphones he/she has brought with him/herself to the earphone jack. It is possible to enjoy it in minutes. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, various configurations can be adopted as the display means capable of displaying the special symbol that starts the variable display based on the entry of the game ball into the various starting ports. For example, an LED lamp, an LED display device, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a halogen lamp, or the like may be employed. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modified examples, various configurations can be adopted as the display means capable of displaying the normal symbols that start the variable display based on the passage of the game ball through various gates, For example, an LED lamp, an LED display device, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a halogen lamp, or the like may be employed. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, various configurations can be adopted as display means capable of displaying various decorative patterns, such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, and an LED display device. , a rotating drum type display device, a light guide plate, a three-dimensional hologram display device, or the like may be employed. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, the decorative pattern is not limited to numerals, and various characters, figures, symbols, patterns, etc., and combinations thereof can be employed. For example, as decorative patterns, alphabets, Greek letters, hiragana, katakana, kanji, various characters, and combinations thereof may be employed. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each modification, the number of symbol rows in which decorative symbols are scrolled is not limited to three, and may be, for example, two or less, or four or more. In the case of adopting a configuration in which there is only one decorative pattern row, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a jackpot is won when a specific decorative pattern (for example, "7") stops. In the case of adopting a configuration in which two or more rows of decorative patterns are employed, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a jackpot is won when the same decorative patterns stop on a specific line. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, various configurations can be adopted as the special electric accessory. A configuration in which the large winning slot can be opened by rotating the plate-shaped member forward about the rotation shaft, or a configuration in which the large winning slot is opened and closed by a plate-shaped member that can slide in the front-rear direction of the game board, etc. may be adopted. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modifications described above, various configurations can be adopted as the ordinary electric accessory. A rotation shaft extending in a substantially horizontal direction is provided below the plate-shaped member, and the plate-shaped member rotates forward about the rotation shaft to open the starting port, front and rear of the game board A structure or the like in which the starting port is opened and closed by a plate-shaped member that can slide in a direction may be adopted. In addition, in the above embodiment and each modification, the number of winning balls set in each ball opening (starting hole, general winning opening, big winning opening, etc.) is an example, and is set for each ball opening. By appropriately changing the number of prize balls, it is possible to realize a plurality of types of pachinko machines with different specifications.

<<12-8-29>> Modification 29:
In the above embodiment and its modification, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to include three control devices, namely the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90, and the display control device 100, but instead of this, the main control device and It is good also as a structure provided with two control devices called a sub control device. The sub control device may be configured to execute various processes executed by the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 in the above embodiment. In addition, in the above embodiment and its modification, the various processes executed by each of the three control devices 60, 90, 100 are not necessarily limited to the division described in the above embodiment, and the three control devices 60, 90 , 100 as a whole should be able to execute various processes in the above embodiment.

<<13>> Thirteenth Embodiment:
<<13-1>> Structure of game machine:
FIG. 609 is a perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter also referred to as "pachinko machine") as a thirteenth embodiment of the present invention. The pachinko machine has a rotating body as the rotating means of the present invention. The rotator includes a first rotator configured so that the light source positioned on the back side can be visually recognized, and a second rotator movable to the back side of the rotating first rotator. As shown, the pachinko machine 10 has a wooden outer frame 11 combined in a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island equipment of the game hall. The pachinko machine 10 also includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11 . A pachinko machine body 12 has an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13. - 特許庁The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11 by metal hinges 15 . The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 16 with respect to the inner frame 13 . Control devices for controlling the pachinko machine body 12, such as a main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device, are arranged on the back of the inner frame 13. FIG. Details of these control devices will be described later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. - 特許庁The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened, and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation using a dedicated key on the cylinder lock 17 .

A substantially central portion of the front door frame 14 is formed with an open window portion 18 . Around the window part 18, resin parts and decorative parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. The decorative parts are composed of light-emitting means including various lamps such as LEDs. The light-emitting means plays a role of enhancing the performance effect by lighting or blinking at each game played by the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot is won, when a ready-to-win game occurs, or the like. A glass unit 19 composed of two sheets of plate glass is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14 , and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19 . A game board, which will be described later, is detachably attached to the inner frame 13 , and the player of the pachinko machine 10 can view the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 19 . Details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper tray 20 and a lower tray 21 for storing game balls. The upper plate 20 is formed in a box shape with an open top, and stores game balls such as rental balls lent from a rental machine (not shown) and prize balls discharged from the pachinko machine main body 12 . The game balls stored in the upper tray 20 are supplied to a game ball shooting mechanism provided in the pachinko machine main body 12. - 特許庁The game ball shooting mechanism is driven by the player's operation of the operation handle 25, and shoots the game balls supplied from the upper tray 20 to the front surface of the game board. The lower tray 21 is arranged below the upper tray 20 and is shaped like a box with an open top. The lower tray 21 stores game balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 20. - 特許庁A discharge port 22 for discharging game balls stored in the lower tray 21 is formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 21 . A lever 23 is provided below the ejection port 22 , and the player can switch the ejection port 22 between a closed state and an open state by operating the lever 23 . When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game ball falls from the discharge port 22 and is discharged from the lower tray 21 to the outside.

A performance operation button 24 is provided in front of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20.例文帳に追加The effect operation button 24 is an operation unit for the player to perform an input operation for the game effect performed by the pachinko machine 10 . When a player operates a performance operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, a game performance reflecting the operation is performed by the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

An operation handle 25 for a player to operate is provided on the right side of the front door frame 14 when viewed from the front (hereinafter also simply referred to as "right side"). When the player operates (turns) the operating handle 25, a game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism to the front surface of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operation handle 25, there are a touch sensor 25a for permitting the drive of the game ball shooting mechanism, a wait button 25b for stopping the game ball shooting by the game ball shooting mechanism when pressed by the player, and the operation handle 25. A variable resistor 25c is provided for detecting the amount of rotational operation of , based on a change in electrical resistance. When the player grips the operating handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operating handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. Then, a game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism to the front surface of the game board with strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

A game ball shooting button 26 for a player to operate is provided on the left side of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20 when viewed from the front (hereinafter also simply referred to as "left side"). When the game ball shooting button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is shot to the front surface of the game board with a predetermined shooting intensity regardless of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 by the player. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball shooting button 26, the game ball is shot to the front surface of the game board with the same shooting intensity as when the operation handle 25 is rotated at its maximum. In the case of this embodiment, when a game ball is shot by operating the game ball shooting button 26, the game ball flows to the right side of the game board in front view and also to the right side of the game board. That is, by operating the game ball shooting button 26, the player can hit the ball to the right. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the game ball shooting button 26 is operated, the game ball is shot to the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is turned on. . That is, the player turns on at least the touch sensor 25a by grasping the operation handle 25, and then operates the game ball shooting button 26, thereby shooting a game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball shooting button 26. can be realized.

Next, the configuration of the rear surface of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. A control device for controlling the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is arranged on the back surface of the pachinko machine 10. - 特許庁

610 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. As shown, the pachinko machine 10 includes a first control unit 51, a second control unit 52, a third control unit 53, and a power supply unit 58. Specifically, these units are provided on the back surface of the inner frame 13 .

The first control unit 51 has a main controller 60 . The main controller 60 has a main control board having a function of controlling the main game. The main control board is housed in a board box made of transparent resin material. This board box is configured to leave traces of opening and closing. For example, a seal is affixed to a portion that can be opened and closed, and when the substrate box is opened, characters such as "opened" appear.

The second control unit 52 includes an audio emission control device 90 and a display control device 100 . The sound emission control device 90 controls emission means such as speakers and various lamps provided in front of the pachinko machine 10 based on commands transmitted from the main control device 60 . The display control device 100 controls the pattern display device based on commands transmitted from the sound emission control device 90 . The pattern display device has a liquid crystal display for displaying patterns and images for presentation.

The third control unit 53 has a payout control device 70 and a launch control device 80 . The payout control device 70 performs payout control for paying out prize balls. When an instruction to shoot a game ball is input from the main control device 60, the shooting control device 80 shoots a game ball with strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 by the player. Controls the ball launching mechanism. In addition, on the back of the inner frame 13, there is a tank 54 to which the game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially supplied, and a slope which is connected to the lower part of the tank 54 and is gently inclined so that the game balls flow downstream. , a case rail 56 connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 55, a game ball is supplied from the case rail 56, and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out according to an instruction from the payout control device 70. A plurality of devices necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10, such as a payout device 71, are provided.

The power supply unit 58 includes a power supply device 85 and a power switch 88 . The power supply device 85 supplies power necessary for the pachinko machine 10 to operate. A power switch 88 is connected to the power supply device 85 . By ON/OFF operation of the power switch 88, a supply state in which power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 and a non-supply state in which power is not supplied to the pachinko machine 10 are switched.

Next, the game board will be explained. The game board is detachably attached to the front surface of the inner frame 13. - 特許庁

611 is a front view of the game board 30. FIG. The game board 30 is made of transparent resin, and in this embodiment, is made of colorless and transparent polycarbonate resin. However, as a modification, the game board 30 may be made of other kinds of transparent resin such as ABS resin and acrylic resin. A game area PA is formed on the front surface of the game board 30 . A plurality of light emitting parts such as lamps and LEDs are provided on the back side of the game board 30, and by illuminating the game area PA from the back side, the game area PA shines when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加A design production is made.

An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding a game ball is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. A game ball shot from the game ball shooting mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and released above the game area PA, and then flows down the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicularly to the game board 30, and accessories such as a windmill 96 are arranged.

The game ball is a sphere made of a uniform material, and is made of steel (iron) in this embodiment. The outer shape of the game ball is point-symmetrical with respect to the center of rotation of the game ball when viewed from the front, and is a sphere that is close to a perfect sphere. Characters and symbols such as the name and logo of the game hall are written on the surface of the game ball. As described above, the game ball fired from the game ball launching mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and released above the game area PA, then flows down the game area PA, and reaches above the windmill 96. From the position it flows down towards the windmill 96 . The falling game ball can change its rotation speed and the direction of its rotation axis during rotation by the nail or the pinwheel 96, and can also reverse its rotation direction. A player of the pachinko machine 10 can visually recognize the game ball through the glass unit 19 from the front of the pachinko machine 10, and can see how the game ball flows down the game area PA. Incidentally, when game balls are continuously shot from the game ball shooting mechanism, a plurality of game balls can exist in the game area PA.

The nail 42 is made of brass, and distributes and organizes the falling directions of the game balls flowing down the game area PA. A game ball flowing down the game area PA is guided in a falling direction restricted by the nail 42 while rotating by hitting the nail 42 .

The windmill 96 is a structure that can be switched between a rotating state and a stopped state by receiving mechanical energy from the game ball, and its rotating direction and rotating speed can also be changed. In this embodiment, the windmill 96 is provided at a fixed position on the left side of the game board 30, and includes a shaft cylinder 96a for inserting a nail set upright on the game board 30, and an outer circumference of the shaft cylinder 96a. It has three blades 96b arranged radially, and a front disk 96c attached to the front side of the shaft cylinder 96a and the blades 96b (forward direction of the game board 30). In this embodiment, the shaft cylinder 96a, the blade plate 96b, and the front disc 96c are integrally formed of a transparent resin material, and configured to be rotatable about a nail inserted through the shaft cylinder 96a. . A shaft cylinder 96a functioning as a rotation shaft of the windmill 96 and a nail inserted through the shaft cylinder 96a are arranged in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the game board 30. As shown in FIG. Since the front disk 96c is made of transparent resin, the light source located on the back side of the game board 30 can be visually recognized. The front disc 96c has a high light transmission region where the light transmittance is high because the blade plate 96b is not provided, and a high light transmission region where the light transmittance is high due to the blade plate 96b being provided. a low light transmission region, which is a region that is lower than the

By planting a plurality of nails 42 in the left area of the game board 30, there are a plurality of paths that can reach from a position above the windmill 96 to a position on the back side of the front disk 96c of the windmill 96. is provided. The game ball can move between a position above the windmill 96 and a position on the back side of the front disk 96c of the windmill 96 by flowing down one of the plurality of paths. During movement, repeated collisions with the nail 42 can change its movement speed, rotation direction, and rotation speed.

The game ball that reaches the windmill 96 is determined by the rotation mode of the front disk 96c (rotation direction, rotation speed, position of the blade plate 96b, etc.) at the timing when the game ball moves to the position on the back side of the front disk 96c of the windmill 96. ), either the central route that makes it easier to enter the first starting port 33 described later or the outer (left side) route that makes it difficult to enter the first starting port 33. . Specifically, each time the game ball moves to the back side of the front disk 96c of the windmill 96, the rotation direction of the windmill 96 changes to either the counterclockwise rotation direction or the clockwise rotation direction. It's up to you. When the windmill 96 rotates in the clockwise direction, it is easier for the game balls to be distributed to the above-described central route, which is highly advantageous for the player. easy to become When the game ball is distributed to the above-described central route, the possibility of the game ball entering the first start hole 33 increases, and the state becomes highly advantageous for the player. When the ball is distributed to the outer (left) route described above, the possibility of the game ball entering the first start hole 33 decreases, resulting in a low advantage for the player.

Further, according to the windmill 96 of the present embodiment, since the blade plate 96b and the front disk 96c are made of a transparent resin material, the game ball can be shot while the game ball is being shot from the game ball shooting mechanism. In a situation where the game ball is flowing down above the pinwheel 96, the light-emitting part provided on the back side of the game board 30 can be visually recognized through the front disk 96c of the pinwheel 96. - 特許庁Therefore, aesthetics can be enhanced. On the other hand, when a game ball flowing down from a position above the windmill 96 moves to the back side of the front disk 96c of the windmill 96 (the back side of the above-described high light transmission area), the game ball moves to the game board. The game ball can be visually recognized through the front disc 96c of the pinwheel 96 by blocking the light from the light emitting part provided on the back side of the 30.例文帳に追加Therefore, it becomes easy to visually recognize that the game ball has moved to the windmill 96, and the expectation that the game ball will be distributed to the center side of the game board 30 by the windmill 96 can be enhanced. It should be noted that the game ball flowing down above the pinwheel 96 can be visually recognized without passing through the front disk 96c of the pinwheel 96.例文帳に追加

The game board 30 is formed with a plurality of openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. A general prize winning port 32, a first starting port 33, a second starting port 34, a through gate 35, and a variable winning device 36 are provided in each opening. The game balls roll on the surface of the game board 30 and enter the general prize winning port 32, the first starting port 33, the second starting port 34, the through gate 35, and the variable winning device 36, respectively. The entered game ball is guided to the individual openings formed in the game board 30 . Also, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display section 45 . The main display section 45 has a special figure unit 37 , a normal figure unit 38 , and a round display section 39 . Furthermore, the game board 30 is provided with a main rotating accessory for presentation 170 as an example of a first rotating body and a pair of sub rotating accessories for presentation 180 and 190 as an example of a second rotating body. .

As illustrated, the general prize winning openings 32 are ball entrance members that form ball entrances into which game balls can enter, and are provided in plurality on the game board 30 . In this embodiment, when game balls enter the general winning hole 32, 10 game balls are paid out as prize balls from the payout device 71 (FIG. 610).

The first starting port 33 is a ball entrance member that forms a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter. The first starting port 33 is provided at the lower center of the game board 30 . In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first start hole 33, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a winning lottery, which will be described later, is executed.

The second starting port 34 is a ball entrance member that forms a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and is provided on the right side of the game board 30 . The second starting port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a consisting of a pair of left and right movable pieces. When the electric accessory 34a is in the closed state, the game ball cannot enter the second starting port 34. - 特許庁On the other hand, when the electric accessory 34a is in the open state, the game ball can enter the second starting port 34. As shown in FIG. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 34, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a winning lottery, which will be described later, is executed.

The through gate 35 has a through hole extending vertically. The through gate 35 is a through gate that serves as a trigger for executing a lottery for opening the electric accessory 34a. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the main controller 60 performs an internal lottery (electric accessory open lottery) triggered by the passage. As a result of the internal lottery, when the electric role open is won, the electric accessory 34a shifts to the electric role open state in a predetermined manner. Since the through gate 35 is arranged on the upstream side of the second starting port 34 with respect to the flowing direction of the game ball, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 flows down the game area PA after passing through the second opening. It is possible to enter the ball into the starting port 34 . In addition, in this embodiment, even if the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the prize ball is not paid out.

The variable winning device 36 includes a large winning opening 36a leading to the back side of the game board 30, and an opening/closing door 36b for opening and closing the large winning opening 36a. The opening/closing door 36b is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot enter the big winning opening 36a. As a result of the internal lottery (winning lottery) by the main controller 60, when a big win is won and the opening/closing execution mode is shifted, the opening/closing door 36b repeats an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state. The open/close execution mode is the result of a winning lottery by the main control device 60 triggered by the ball entering the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, and when a big win is won, the opening/closing door 36b is in an open state. and the closed state are repeated. That is, when a big win is won as a result of a winning lottery based on the ball entering the first starting hole 33, the operation shifts to the opening/closing execution mode in which the ball can enter the big winning hole 36a of the variable prize winning device 36. Similarly, even if a big win is won as a result of the winning lottery based on the ball entering the second starting hole 34, the operation shifts to the opening/closing execution mode in which the ball can enter the big winning hole 36a of the variable prize winning device 36. . In the present embodiment, when game balls enter the big winning hole 36a of the variable winning device 36, the payout device 71 pays out 15 game balls as prize balls.

An out port 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and game balls that do not enter the general winning port 32, the first starting port 33, the second starting port 34, or the variable winning device 36 are out. It is discharged from the game area PA through the mouth 43 .

A game ball entered into each of the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, the large winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36, and the out opening 43 is individually formed on the game board 30. It is configured to be guided to the back side of the game board 30 through the opening and finally join the discharge passage provided on the back side of the game board 30 . The discharge passage is provided with a discharge passage detection sensor for detecting game balls. By detecting the game balls with the ejection path detection sensor, it is possible to grasp the number of game balls shot to the game board 30. - 特許庁

The special figure unit 37 includes a first symbol display portion 37a and a second symbol display portion 37b. Each of the first pattern display portion 37a and the second pattern display portion 37b is composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting portions are arranged in a predetermined manner.

The first pattern display portion 37a is a display portion for displaying the first pattern. The first pattern means a pattern that is displayed in a variable or stationary manner based on a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33 . The first symbol display unit 37a is used as a display mode until a winning lottery is performed triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 33, and the display corresponding to the lottery result is performed on the segment display device. , to perform the variable display of the first symbol. When the lottery is finished, the first symbol display section 37a causes the segment display to stop displaying the first symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

The second pattern display portion 37b is a display portion for displaying the second pattern. The second pattern refers to a pattern that is variably displayed or statically displayed based on a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34 . The second symbol display part 37b is used as a display mode until a winning lottery is performed triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 34, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is performed on the segment display device. , to perform the variable display of the second symbol. When the lottery is finished, the second symbol display section 37b causes the segment display device to stop displaying the second symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

The time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol displayed in the second symbol display portion 37b to the stop display is called the variation time. call. Specifically, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed in the first symbol display portion 37a to the stop display is also called the first variation time, and the second symbol display portion 37b The time from the start of the variable display of the second symbol to be displayed until the stop display is also called a second variable time.

The special figure unit 37 is further provided with a first pending display portion 37c and a second pending display portion 37d, which are LED lamps, at positions adjacent to the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b. In the present embodiment, up to four game balls entered into the first starting port 33 are reserved. The first reservation display portion 37c displays the number of reservations for the first starting port 33 according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be lit. Further, in the present embodiment, up to four game balls entered into the second starting port 34 are reserved. The second reservation display part 37d displays the number of reservations of the second starting port 34 according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be lit.

The normal figure unit 38 is composed of a light-emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. The normal figure unit 38, when the electric accessary item open lottery triggered by the passage of the through gate 35 is performed, causes the light-emitting display to display in a lighting display, a blinking display, or a predetermined mode. When the electric accessory open lottery ends, the normal figure unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The round display section 39 is composed of a light-emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games that occur in the open/close execution mode or displays corresponding thereto. A round game means that either a predetermined upper limit duration time elapses or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls enter the variable winning device 36 until either one of the conditions is met. It is a game in which the door 36b is kept open. The number of round games varies depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the shift. The round display unit 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the opening/closing execution mode is started, and ends when the opening/closing execution mode is finished and a new game is started.

In addition, the special figure unit 37, the general figure unit 38, and the round display unit 39 are not limited to being configured by a segment display device or a light emitting display device using an LED lamp, for example, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, It may consist of various display devices capable of showing the draw in progress and the draw results, such as a CRT or dot matrix display.

The variable display unit 40 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area PA. The variable display unit 40 has a pattern display device 41 . The pattern display device 41 has a liquid crystal display. The display contents of the pattern display device 41 are controlled by the display control device 100 . The pattern display device 41 may be replaced with various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

When the first symbol display unit 37a performs variable display or predetermined display based on the ball entering the first starting port 33, the symbol display device 41 performs variable display or predetermined display of the symbols accordingly. In addition, when the second symbol display unit 37b performs a variable display or a predetermined display based on the ball entering the second starting port 34, the symbol display device 41 displays the symbol in a variable display or a predetermined display accordingly. conduct. The symbol display device 41 performs not only the display performance triggered by the entry of the ball into the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, but also the display performance during the opening/closing execution mode that shifts when the jackpot is won. . Details of the pattern display device 41 will be described below.

FIG. 612 is an explanatory diagram showing the symbols that are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41 and the display surface 41a. FIG. 612(a) is an explanatory diagram showing symbols that are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41. FIG. As shown, the symbol display device 41 variably displays symbols representing numbers 1 to 8. FIG. As the symbols to be variably displayed, symbols such as characters may be added to the symbols representing the numbers 1 to 8. FIG.

FIG. 612(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. As shown in FIG. As shown, the display surface 41a displays a main display area MA and a sub-area SA located below the main display area MA. Three pattern rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 of left, middle and right are displayed in the main display area MA. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the symbols of numbers 1 to 8 shown in FIG. A variable display that scrolls upward is performed. As shown in FIG. 612(b), after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol row is displayed in a stationary state on the activated line L. As shown in FIG. Specifically, when a game ball enters the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, a variable display is started in which the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are cyclically scrolled in a predetermined direction. Then, the symbols to be scrolled are switched from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol row Z1, the symbol row Z3, and the symbol row Z2, and finally, the predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. . When the variable display of symbols is finished and the display is stopped, and when the result of the winning lottery by the main control device 60 is a big win, a predetermined predetermined combination of symbols is displayed on the activated line L. It is formed. For example, a combination of the same symbols is formed on the activated line L. The pattern display device 41 is not limited to the above-described patterns, but the number of pattern rows, the number of active lines, the direction of pattern display variation in the pattern rows, and the patterns in each pattern row. Various modes can be adopted for the mode of variable display of symbols such as numbers.

Here, the "game cycle" means the period from the start of the variable display of the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b to the end of the variable display and the stop display until the end of the stop display. One unit of processing for notifying the player of the lottery result of the winning lottery for the special information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34. is. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one winning lottery for one piece of special information for each game. When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires the special information based on the entry of the game ball into either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the first symbol display unit In either one of the 37a and the second pattern display portion 37b, after the segment display is variably displayed, the segment display is stop-displayed so that the display corresponds to the lottery result of the acquired special information. In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment acquires the special information based on the entry of the game ball into either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the symbol display device At 41, after the predetermined symbol row is variably displayed, the symbol row is stopped and displayed so as to correspond to the lottery result of the acquired special information. A game ball is a rotating body that circulates while rotating. The time required for one game round is also called unit game time. The unit playing time is composed of a variable time, which is the time from when the variable display is started until the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed, and a stop time, which is the time when the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed. there is

In the sub-area SA located below the main display area MA, a first start opening reservation area Ds1, a reserved digestion area Dm, and a second start opening reservation area Ds2 are displayed. The reserved digestion area Dm is displayed in the center of the display surface 41a in the left-right direction, the first start opening reservation area Ds1 is displayed on the left side of the reservation digestion area Dm, and the second start opening reservation area Ds2 is displayed in the reservation digestion area Dm. displayed on the right. In the first start opening reservation area Ds1, the number of reserved balls based on the entry of game balls into the first start opening 33 is displayed. In the second starting opening reservation area Ds2, the number of reserved balls based on the entry of game balls into the second starting opening 34 is displayed. In this embodiment, as described above, the maximum number of game balls entered into the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 is four. The details of the operation of the first starting opening reservation area Ds1, the second starting opening reservation area Ds2, and the reservation digestion area Dm will be described in detail later.

Returning to the description of FIG. The main rotating accessory for effect 170 is arranged above the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, and is configured to be movable downward from the illustrated origin position. Each of the pair of production sub-rotary accessories 180 and 190 is arranged below the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, and is configured to be movable upward from the illustrated origin position. When the sub-rotating accessory for presentation 180, 190 is at the origin position, most of the sub-rotating accessory for presentation 180, 190 is hidden by the cover plate 199, and the sub-rotating accessory for presentation 180, 190 Only a portion of 190 protrudes from cover plate 199 . The configuration of the main rotating accessory for production 170 and the sub-rotating accessory for production 180, 190 and their operations will be described later in detail.

A pair of nails 42 (42a, 42b) (so-called life nails, umbilical nails) are provided above the first starting port 33. As shown in FIG. The probability of the game ball entering the first starting port 33 changes depending on the spacing between the pair of nails 42a and 42b. In addition, depending on whether the game ball is distributed to the center side or the outer side (left side) of the game board 30 by the windmill 96, the probability of the game ball entering the first start port 33 changes. The advantage for the player changes. That is, the windmill is a rotating body that changes the advantage for the player depending on the direction of rotation.

<<13-2>> Electrical Configuration of Gaming Machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described using a block diagram.

FIG. 613 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 10 mainly includes a main controller 60 , a sound emission control device 90 , and a display control device 100 .

The main controller 60 has a main control board 61 that controls the main game. The main control board 61 has an MPU 62 composed of elements having multiple functions. The MPU 62 includes a CPU (not shown) that executes various control programs, a ROM 63 that records various control programs and fixed value data, and temporarily stores various data when executing the programs recorded in the ROM 63. and a RAM 64, which is a memory for storing. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. A part of the functions of the MPU 62 may be provided by another element. Details of various areas provided in the ROM 63 and RAM 64 will be described later.

The main control board 61 is provided with an input port (not shown) and an output port (not shown). An input port of the main control board 61 is connected to a payout control device 70 and a power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in a power supply device 85 . The main control board 61 is supplied with stable 24 V DC power from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86 . The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power supply as an external power supply, and converts the external power supplied from the commercial power supply into the operating power required by the main control device 60, the payout control device 70, etc., to each device supply power. The power supply device 85 is equipped with a capacitor (not shown), and in the event of a power failure or the power switch 88 (FIG. 610) being turned off, continues to supply power to each device for a predetermined period of time. do.

Various detection sensors 67 a to 67 e are connected to the input port of the main control board 61 . Specifically, it is connected to a plurality of detection sensors provided at various ball entry openings such as the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, the through gate 35, and the variable winning apparatus 36. . The MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether or not the game ball flowing down the game area PA enters each ball entrance based on the signals from the various detection sensors 67a to 67e, and determines whether the game ball enters the through gate. It is determined whether or not 35 has been passed. Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 and the second start port 34, and executes the electric accessory release lottery based on the entry of the ball into the through gate 35. do.

The output port of the main control board 61 has a variable winning driving unit 36c that opens and closes the open/close door 36b of the variable winning device 36, and an electric accessory driving unit 34b that opens and closes the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34. , and the main display unit 45 are connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning driving section 36c so that the opening/closing door 36b is opened/closed. Further, as a result of the electric accessory opening lottery, when the electric role opening is won, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 34b so that the electric accessory 34a is released. In each game round, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b in the main display portion 45. FIG. Further, when the jackpot type is determined in the opening/closing execution mode and the number of round games to be executed in the opening/closing execution mode is determined, display control of the round display section 39 in the main display section 45 is executed.

An output port of the main control board 61 is connected with a payout control device 70 and a sound emission control device 90 . A prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 70 from the main control device 60 based on the winning judgment result, for example. When the main controller 60 transmits the prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63. FIG. Specifically, when entering the ball into the general winning hole 32 is specified, a winning ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is transmitted from the main controller 60, and the ball enters the first starting hole 33. is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is transmitted from the main controller 60, and when entering the second start port 34 is specified, one game ball is paid out A prize ball command corresponding to is transmitted from the main controller 60 . The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 based on the prize ball command received from the main controller 60 to pay out prize balls.

A discharge control device 80 is connected to the payout control device 70 . The shooting control device 80 controls shooting of the game ball shooting mechanism 81 . The game ball shooting mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined shooting conditions are met. Also, the operation handle 25 and the game ball shooting button 26 are connected to the shooting control device 80 .

The sound emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60 and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main controller 60 transmits various commands, the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63 is referred to. Details of these various commands are described later.

In addition, based on various commands received from the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90 controls the driving of various lamps 47 composed of light emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the front door frame 14, and the driving control of the speaker 46. and control the display control device 100 . Also, the effect operation button 24 is connected to the sound emission control device 90, and when the effect operation button 24 is operated by the player at a predetermined timing, a game effect reflecting the operation is performed. It controls the various lamps 47, the speaker 46, the display control device 100, and the like.

The display control device 100 executes display control of the pattern display device 41 based on various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 . Specifically, the display control device 100, based on the various commands received from the sound emission control device 90, grasps the fluctuation time of the pattern in the pattern display device 41 and the type of combination of patterns to be finally stopped and displayed. , presence/absence of occurrence of ready-to-win, contents of ready-to-win effect, contents of notice effect to be executed in each game cycle, and the like are grasped. In this embodiment, the stop time, which is the time during which the combination of symbols is stopped and displayed, is constant. Therefore, by determining the variable time, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game, is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

FIG. 614 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used for a winning lottery or the like. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 sets the winning lottery, the setting of the display of the main display section 45, the setting of the pattern display of the pattern display device 41, and the like. Specifically, a winning random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery. A jackpot type counter C2 is used when sorting the jackpot types such as probability variable jackpot results and normal jackpot results. A ready-to-win random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not to generate a ready-to-win when the symbol row displayed on the symbol display device 41 is changed.

A random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. Further, when determining the variation time in the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b of the main display portion 45 and the symbol display device 41, a variation type counter CS is used. Further, the electric accessory opening counter C4 is used for the electric accessory opening lottery for determining whether or not the electric accessory 34a of the second start port 34 is to be opened.

Each of the counters C1 to C4, CINI, and CS is a loop counter that adds 1 to the counter value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. FIG.

The RAM 64 is provided with a pending information storage area 64b and a determination processing execution area 64c. The reservation information storage area 64b is provided with a first reservation area Ra and a second reservation area Rb. In this embodiment, when the game ball enters the first start port 33, each value of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS at the timing of the ball entry is stored as pending information. It is stored chronologically in the first reservation area Ra of the area 64b. In the first reservation area Ra, there are four areas corresponding to the maximum number of game balls entered into the first starting port 33, that is, the first area, the second area, the third area, and the fourth area. area is provided. When the game ball enters the first start port 33, each value of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS at the timing of the ball is retained information (hereinafter, special 1 retained ) is stored in one of the first to fourth areas. Which of the first to fourth areas is stored is determined by the order of ball entry, and the earlier the ball entry timing is, the higher the area (the first area is the highest area).

In addition, when the game ball enters the second start port 34, each value of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS at the timing of the ball entry is stored in the reservation information storage area 64b. It is stored chronologically in the second reservation area Rb. In the second reservation area Rb, there are four areas corresponding to the maximum number of game balls that have entered the second starting port 34, that is, the first area, the second area, the third area, and the fourth area. area is provided. When the game ball enters the second start port 34, each value of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS at the timing of the ball is retained information (hereinafter, special 2 retained ), stored in one of the first to fourth areas. Which of the first to fourth areas is stored is determined by the order of ball entry, and the earlier the ball entry timing, the higher the area (the first area is the highest area).

The details of the winning random number counter C1 will be described. The winning random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery as described above. The winning random number counter C1 is, for example, configured to be incremented by one within the range of 0 to 1199 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Further, when the winning random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value=0 to 1199).

The hit random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and when a game ball enters the first start port 33, the updated value is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entry. When a game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entry.

The value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the first reservation area Ra is moved to the execution area AE of the judgment processing execution area 64c, and is collated with the success/failure table stored in the success/failure table storage area 63a of the ROM 63 to determine the jackpot. It is determined whether or not Also, the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the second reservation area Rb is moved to the execution area AE of the judgment processing execution area 64c, and is collated with the success/failure table stored in the success/failure table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. It is determined whether or not it will be a big hit.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the first reservation area Ra is determined in the order in which the game ball enters the first start hole 33, and the determination process execution area Move to execution area AE of 64c. Specifically, the data stored in the first area of the first reservation area Ra is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c, and the data stored in the storage area of the first reservation area Ra is shifted. do. The data shift is to sequentially shift the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the upper area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area.

In addition, the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the second reservation area Rb is moved to the execution area AE of the judgment processing execution area 64c in the order acquired by the game ball entering the second starting port 34. . Specifically, the data stored in the first area of the second reservation area Rb is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c, and the data stored in the storage area of the second reservation area Rb is shifted. do. The data shift is to sequentially shift the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the upper area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area.

When the value of the random number counter C1 is stored in the second reservation area Rb, regardless of whether the hit in the first reservation area Ra is stored or not, the value of the random number counter C1 is stored in the second reservation area Rb. The value of the stored winning random number counter C1 is to be moved to the execution area AE of the judgment processing execution area 64c. As a result, when the value of the random number counter C1 is stored in both the first reservation area Ra and the second reservation area Rb, the hit stored in the second reservation area Rb corresponding to the second starting port 34 Priority is given to the value of the random number counter C1. That is, in this embodiment, when the value of the random number counter C1 is stored in both the first reservation area Ra and the second reservation area Rb, it is stored in the second reservation area Rb corresponding to the second start port 34 The value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the second reservation area Rb is prioritized, and the data stored in the first area of the second reservation area Rb is determined among the values of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the second reservation area Rb. The data stored in the storage area of the second reservation area Rb is shifted to the processing execution area 64c. If the value of the hit random number counter C1 is not stored in the second reservation area Rb, among the values of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the first reservation area Ra, the first area of the first reservation area Ra A process of moving the stored data to the determination process execution area 64c and shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first reservation area Ra is executed.

In the above description, it is explained in what order the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb is moved to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c. However, it is not limited to the value of the winning random number counter C1, and counters other than the winning random number counter C1 stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb (jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fluctuation Each value of the type counter CS) is also moved to the execution area AE of the judgment processing execution area 64c in the same order.

Next, the details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining the jackpot type. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented one by one within the range of 0 to 99 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry when the game ball enters the first start port 33. When the game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the determination process execution area 64c. The jackpot type is determined using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in . Furthermore, the MPU 62 uses the value of the hit random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to determine the display mode of the segment display that is stopped and displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b. . The stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referred to for the determination.

Next, details of the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is used when determining whether or not a reach occurs when the result of the winning lottery is not a big win. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the first start port 33, and the second start port 34. It is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters. After the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first reservation area Ra is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c, it is compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63, and the reach occurs. After the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the second reservation area Rb is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c, it is compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63, and the reach occurs. However, when the result of the winning lottery is a big win and the game shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 determines the occurrence of reach regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

Reach means that, among a plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, there is a possibility that a combination of symbols corresponding to a big win may be established. It refers to a display state in which symbols are displayed in a stopped state, and symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the remaining symbol rows. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the combination of symbols corresponding to the big win refers to the combination of the same symbols on a predetermined pay line. As a specific example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of FIG. A reach line is formed, and when the reach line is formed, the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the symbol row Z2 to achieve a reach. Then, when a big hit occurs, the same symbols as the symbols forming the reach line are stop-displayed in the symbol row Z2.

In addition, in the ready-to-win state, while the ready-to-win line is formed, the patterns are displayed in the remaining pattern rows in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen to create a ready-to-win effect. It includes a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a after displaying a combination of patterns in which a reach line is formed in a reduced size or not. In addition, when the ready-to-win effect is being performed or before the ready-to-win display is performed, the determination of whether or not to perform a notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character is performed using the reach-to-win random number counter C3 or other counters. may

Reach is classified into three types, normal reach, super reach, and special reach, depending on the content of reach performance. A ready-to-win performance with a higher expectation (reliability) for winning a jackpot is executed in super reach than in normal reach, and a reach performance in which expectation for winning a big win is higher in special reach than in super reach is executed.

Next, details of the fluctuation type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the variation time in the first symbol display portion 37 a and the second symbol display portion 37 b and the symbol variation time in the symbol display device 41 . The fluctuation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The variation type counter CS is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the first start port 33, and the second start port 34 It is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters. After moving to the determination processing execution area 64c, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the first reservation area Ra is changed when the variation display in the first symbol display unit 37a is started and when the symbol display device 41 starts variation of the symbol. used in determining the variation pattern in After moving to the determination processing execution area 64c, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the second reservation area Rb is changed at the start of the variation display in the second symbol display section 37b and at the start of variation of the symbol by the symbol display device 41. used in determining the variation pattern in A variable time table stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is used when determining the variable time in the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to specify the content of the ready-to-win effect (that is, the type of ready-to-win) according to the type of variation pattern.

Next, the details of the electric accessory release counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory release counter C4 is, for example, configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 465 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated, and stored in the electric role holding area 64d of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the through gate 35. - 特許庁Then, at a predetermined timing, after the value of the electric role product open counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 64d moves to the electric role execution area 64e, the value of the electric role product open counter C4 is displayed in the electric role execution area 64e. A lottery (hereinafter referred to as an electric accessory open lottery) is performed as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to the open state. Specifically, in the electric role execution area 64e, the winning/failure table (electric role lottery winning/failure table) stored in the role lottery table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 and the value of the electric role lottery counter C4 are different. It is collated, and it is determined whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to the open state.

In addition, at least one of the acquired value of the winning random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, the variation type counter CS, and the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 is a special Corresponds to information. Also, at least one of the value of the winning random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the first reservation area Ra and the second reservation area Rb Also called pending information.

Next, the success/failure table will be described. The success/failure table is table data for matching with the winning random number counter C1 when a winning lottery is performed based on the winning random number counter C1. A low-probability mode and a high-probability mode are set in the pachinko machine 10 as a lottery mode for a winning lottery. In the winning lottery in the probability mode, the success/failure table for the high probability mode is referred to. High-probability mode (also called high-probability gaming state) is a gaming state that is started by winning a probability variable jackpot, and the probability of winning a jackpot in a winning lottery is relatively higher than the low-probability mode. To tell.

FIG. 615 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the success/failure table. FIG. 615(a) shows the success/failure table for the low-probability mode (for the low-probability mode), and FIG. 615(b) shows the success/failure table for the high-probability mode.

As shown in FIG. 615(a), five values from 0 to 4 are set in the success/failure table for the low-probability mode as the value of the winning random number counter C1 for the big win. Of the values from 0 to 1199, the values (5 to 1199) other than the five values from 0 to 4 are outliers. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 615(b), 16 values from 0 to 15 are set as values of the winning random number counter C1 for the high-probability mode in the success/failure table. Of the values from 0 to 1199, the values (16 to 1199) other than the 16 values from 0 to 15 are outliers. Thus, the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning a big prize in the winning lottery than the low probability mode.

Further, in the present embodiment, the value group of the winning random number counter C1 set as the jackpot in the win/fail table for the low-probability mode is the value of the win random number counter C1 set as the jackpot in the win/fail table for the high-probability mode. included in the group. However, as long as the probability of winning a big win in the high-probability mode is higher than in the low-probability mode as a result of the winning lottery, the number and value of the random numbers set as the big wins are arbitrary.

It should be noted that a "small win" may be provided as a result of the winning lottery, although it is not used in the win/fail table in this embodiment.

A "minor win" is a win/fail result that triggers a transition to the opening/closing execution mode in which the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is executed, but does not trigger a transition for both the lottery mode and the support mode. . On the other hand, "missing" is a pass/fail result that does not trigger the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, nor does it trigger the transition to the lottery mode and the support mode.

Next, the jackpot type will be described. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set in the pachinko machine 10. - 特許庁Specifically, for example, by providing differences in the following three aspects or modes, it is possible to set a plurality of types of jackpots.
(1) Aspect of opening/closing control of variable winning device 36 in opening/closing execution mode (2) Lottery mode for winning lottery after completion of opening/closing execution mode (3) Electric accessory 34a of second start port 34 after completion of opening/closing execution mode Support mode

In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the above-mentioned (1) opening/closing execution mode, the occurrence of winning balls to the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode. A high-frequency winning mode and a low-frequency winning mode can be set so that the frequencies are relatively high and low. For example, in the high frequency winning mode, the opening and closing door 36b is opened and closed multiple times (for example, 16 times) from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode. It can be set to continue until the number of hit balls reaches 10. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening and closing door 36b is opened and closed twice from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode, and one opening is until 0.2 sec elapses or a ball enters the opening and closing door 36b. It can be set to continue until the number reaches six.

When the operation handle 25 is operated by the player, the game ball shooting mechanism 81 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is shot toward the game area PA every 0.6 sec. In the case of the above specific example, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of the opening/closing door 36b is 0.2 sec. In other words, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of the open/close door 36b is shorter than the shooting cycle of the game ball. Therefore, substantially no game balls enter in the opening/closing execution mode associated with the low-frequency winning mode. However, even in the opening and closing execution mode related to the low-frequency winning mode, it may be set so that the game ball can enter.

The number of times of opening and closing the opening/closing door 36b, the limit time for one opening, and the limit number of openings for one opening are determined by the variable winning device 36 during the period from the start of the opening/closing execution mode to the end of the opening/closing execution mode. As long as the frequency of ball occurrence is higher in the high-frequency winning mode than in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening mode of the opening/closing door 36b is arbitrary. Specifically, if the high frequency winning mode has more opening and closing times than the low frequency winning mode, the opening limit time for one opening is longer, or the opening limit number for one opening is set more good. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, in the open/close execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode, substantially no winning ball to the variable winning device 36 may occur.

The pachinko machine 10 has a high-probability mode in which a winning lottery is performed using a high-probability win-or-fail table as a win-or-fail table, and a win-fail table as a win-or-fail table. A low-probability mode in which a winning lottery is performed using a low-probability success/failure table can be set. As described with reference to FIG. 615, the winning lottery using the high-probability success/failure table is more likely to win the jackpot than the winning lottery using the low-probability success/failure table. likely to.

In the pachinko machine 10, as a form of the support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the end of the above-mentioned (3) opening and closing execution mode, shooting of game balls continues in a similar form to the game area PA. A high-frequency support mode and a low-frequency support mode are selected so that the frequency of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 being in the open state per unit time is relatively high or low when compared in the situation where can be set.

Specifically, the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode have different probabilities of winning the electric role open lottery in the electric role item opening lottery using the electric role item opening counter C4. In the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role open lottery in the electric accessory open lottery is made higher than in the low frequency support mode. In addition, in the high-frequency support mode, the opening time of the electric accessory 34a may be set longer than in the low-frequency support mode when the electric role opening winning is won.

Although not adopted in the present embodiment, in the high frequency support mode, the number of times the electric accessory 34a is in the open state when the electric accessory 34a is elected is set higher than in the low frequency support mode. good too. Furthermore, it may be configured such that the electric accessory 34a is set to have a long opening time once. In addition, in the high-frequency support mode, in the case where the open state of the electric accessory 34a occurs multiple times due to the electric role open winning, the closing time from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state is , may be set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the time secured from one electric accessory open lottery to the next electric accessory open lottery is set to be relatively shorter than in the low-frequency support mode. may

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of a ball entering the second starting port 34 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. That is, the high-frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary game state that assists establishment of special information acquisition conditions.

In the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won as a result of the winning lottery, the jackpot type is sorted using the jackpot type counter C2. The distribution of the jackpot types corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63 as a distribution table.

FIG. 616 is an explanatory diagram of the contents of the distribution table. FIG. 616(a) shows the distribution table for the first start port, and FIG. 616(b) shows the distribution table for the second start port. The distribution table for the first start port is referred to during a winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33, and the distribution table for the second start port is directed to the second start port 34. It is referred to during the winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball.

As shown in the distribution table for the first start port in FIG. 616(a), the distribution table for the first start port contains, as jackpot types based on the entry of a game ball into the first start port 33, A 16R probability variable jackpot, an 8R probability variable jackpot, a 16R normal jackpot, and an 8R normal jackpot are set.

In the 16R probability variable jackpot and the 8R probability variable jackpot, the mode of opening and closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode, and the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the end of the opening and closing execution mode (hereinafter simply “lottery mode”). ) is a high-probability mode, and the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode is a high-frequency support mode. The difference between the 16R variable variable jackpot and the 8R variable variable jackpot is that the number of openings of the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode is different, the 16R variable variable jackpot is 16 times (16 rounds), and the 8R variable variable jackpot is 8. times (8 rounds).

In the 16R normal jackpot and the 8R normal jackpot, the mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode, the lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends is the low-probability mode, and the opening/closing execution mode is selected. It is a jackpot in which the support mode after the end is the high-frequency support mode. The difference between the 16R normal jackpot and the 8R normal jackpot is that the number of openings of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is different, the 16R normal jackpot is 16 times (16 rounds), and the 8R normal jackpot is 8 times. times (8 rounds).

In the distribution table for the first start port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 99", "0 to 39" corresponds to the 16R probability variable jackpot, and "40 to 64" corresponds to the 8R probability variable jackpot. , "65 to 89" corresponds to the 16R normal jackpot, and "90 to 99" corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, four types of jackpots are set as the types of jackpots. Therefore, the aspect of the jackpot is diversified. When these four types of jackpots are compared, the degree of advantage for the player is the highest for the 16R variable variable jackpot, the next highest for the 8R variable variable jackpot, followed by the 16R normal jackpot, and finally the 8R normal jackpot. By thus setting a plurality of types of jackpots with different degrees of advantage for the player, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous and increase the degree of attention to the game.

As shown in the distribution table for the second starting port in FIG. A 16R probability variable jackpot and an 8R normal jackpot are set. In the distribution table for the second start port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 99", "0 to 64" corresponds to the 16R probability variable jackpot, and "65 to 99" corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot. corresponds to

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won, the type of jackpot is distributed based on the ball entering the first start port 33 and when the jackpot is won. It is different from the case of winning a jackpot based on the entry of the ball into the starting hole 34, and a clear difference is provided in the advantage for the player.

In addition, when the winning lottery results in a loss, the mode is not changed to the opening/closing execution mode, and the lottery mode and the support mode are not changed. In the sorting of the types of jackpots, if a 16 probability variable jackpot or an 8R probability variable jackpot is obtained, as described above, the lottery mode after the end of the opening and closing execution mode becomes a high probability mode, but this high probability mode The state is continued until the next big win is won in the winning lottery.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, and the jackpot type using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. However, the MPU 62 further uses the value of the winning random number counter C1 and the value of the big winning type counter C2 to stop and display the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b. Determine the display mode. The stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referred to for the determination.

FIG. 617 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the success/failure table (electric accessary product open lottery success/failure table) used when executing the electric accessary product open lottery.

FIG. 617(a) shows a success/failure table for electric accessory open lottery (for low frequency support mode) used in low frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 617(a), in the electric accessory open lottery success/failure table (for the low frequency support mode), two values of 0 and 1 are set as the values of the electric accessory open counter C4 that will win the electric role open winning. A value is set. 464 values from 2 to 465 are set as the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4 to be out. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 in the low-frequency support mode and the electric accessary item open lottery is executed, the electric role open lottery is won with a probability of 1/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric role opening win is made in the low-frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.4 seconds.

FIG. 617(b) shows a success/failure table for electric accessory open lottery (for high frequency support mode) used in high frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 617(b), in the success/failure table for the electric accessory open lottery (for the high-frequency support mode), 462 values from 0 to 461 for the electric accessory open counter C4 for winning the electric role open winning A value is set. Four values of 462 to 465 are set as the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4 that is out. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 in the high-frequency support mode and the electric accessory open lottery is executed, the electric role open lottery is won with a probability of 231/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric role opening win is made in the high-frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.6 seconds.

In this way, the success/failure table for the electric accessory open lottery is set so that the high-frequency support mode has a higher probability of the game ball entering the second start port 34 than the low-frequency support mode. .

<<13-3>> Electrical Configuration of Audio Light Emitting Control Device and Display Control Device:
Next, electrical configurations of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 618 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. As shown in FIG. A part of the configuration such as the power supply device 85 (FIG. 613) is omitted. An MPU 92 is mounted on an audio emission control board 91 provided in the audio emission control device 90 . The MPU 92 is a device in which a CPU, a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like are incorporated.

The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables, and the like. For example, part of the area of the ROM 93 is provided with an effect pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like. Details of these will be described later.

The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when executing the control program stored in the ROM 93 . For example, a part of the area of the RAM 94 is provided with various flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, and the like. It should be noted that it is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 92, and they may be individually integrated into chips.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port. The input side of the MPU 92 is connected to the main control device 60 and the effect operation button 24 . Various commands are received from the main controller 60 . A speaker 46 and various lamps 47 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92, and the display control device 100 is also connected.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the output side of the MPU 92 includes a performance main rotating accessory drive unit 97 for operating the performance main rotating accessory 170 and a performance driving unit 97 for operating a pair of performance sub rotating accessories 180 and 190. The sub-rotary accessory drive units 98 and 99 for use are connected.

The display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102, which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are combined, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. is installed. It is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 102, and they may be individually integrated into chips.

The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, to generate internal commands for the VDP 105). .

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and also stores JPEG format image data for background images.

A work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when various programs are executed by the MPU 102 .

The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the pattern display device 41 . The VDP 105 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is an IC chip, and is a kind of microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, etc., and intervenes in the reading and writing of data.

The character ROM 106 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as designs and pictures displayed on the design display device 41 . The character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display patterns and display pictures, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 106 . It is also possible to configure the character ROM 106 to store the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 .

The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 41. By rewriting the content of the video RAM 107, the display content of the pattern display device 41 is changed.

Hereinafter, the MPU 62, ROM 63, and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main MPU 62, main ROM 63, and main RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the sound emission control device 90 are referred to as the sound and light side MPU 92 and the sound and light side, respectively. The ROM 93 and the sound/light side RAM 94 are also called, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also called the display side MPU 102 .

<<13-4>> Outline of Processing by Game Machine and Effect Operation:
Next, an overview of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described.

<<13-4-1>> Hold display:
In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as described above, in the sub-area SA located below the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, there is a holding game ball based on the entry of the game ball into the first start hole 33. 1st start opening reservation area Ds1 indicating the number, 2nd start opening reservation area Ds2 indicating the number of reservations based on the number of game balls entering the second start opening 34, and 1st start opening reservation area Ds1 A reserved digestion area Dm located between the second start opening reservation areas Ds2 is displayed.

FIG. 619 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of changes in the first start opening retention area Ds1 and the retention digestion area Dm. In the first start opening reservation area Ds1, up to four reservation display icons corresponding to each reservation (each of up to four reservations) based on the entry of the game ball into the first start opening 33 are arranged in the horizontal direction. Is displayed. In the present embodiment, the pending display icon is circular, and in the example shown in FIG. 619(a), the first pending display icon H1 and the second pending display icon H1 corresponding respectively to the first pending and second pending A display icon H2 is shown. In the first start opening reservation area Ds1, the first reservation display icon H1 is displayed at the rightmost position, and the second reservation display icon H2 is displayed at the second position from the right side to the left side. That is, in the first start opening reservation area Ds1, each time a game ball enters the first start opening 33, the reservation display icon is displayed so as to increase one by one from the right side to the left side.

The reserved digestion area Dm is a trapezoid whose upper base is longer than its lower base. In the example shown in FIG. 619(a), the suspended display icon H0 is placed on the upper part of the reserved digestion area Dm. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a winning lottery is performed triggered by the entry of a ball into the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, and a variable display is performed to notify the result of the winning lottery. At the timing when this variable display is started, the pending display icon is placed on the upper portion of the pending digestion area Dm. This variable display is based on the hold (hold information) corresponding to the hold display icon H0 placed above the hold digest area Dm. The player can know that the suspension corresponding to the suspension display icon H0 is completed by observing that the suspension display icon H0 is placed on the upper part of the suspension completion area Dm.

In the state shown in FIG. 619(a), when the variable display ends and the display is stopped, the pending display icon H0 placed above the pending digestion area Dm disappears. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 619(b), the first reservation display icon H1 located on the rightmost side in the first start opening reservation area Ds1 moves to the upper part of the reservation digestion area Dm. At this time, the second reservation display icon H2 positioned second from the right side moves (shifts) to the rightmost position in the first start opening reservation area Ds1. In the example shown in FIG. 619(b), there are no pending display icons positioned third and fourth from the right side to the left side. moves (shifts) to the second position, and the fourth positioned pending display icon moves (shifts) to the third position.

As a result of the movement shown in FIG. 619(b), the state shown in FIG. 619(c) is obtained. That is, the first reservation display icon H1 is placed on the upper portion of the reservation digestion area Dm, and the second reservation display icon H2 is displayed at the rightmost position of the first start opening reservation area Ds1. At this time, a variable display for notifying the result of the winning lottery based on the reservation (reservation information) corresponding to the first reservation display icon H1 is executed.

As described above, each time the variable display and the stop display corresponding to one game round are executed, each holding display icon displayed in the first start opening holding area Ds1 shifts from the left side to the right side. , eventually move from the rightmost position to the top of the retained digestion region Dm. Then, the variable display and the stationary display for notifying the result of the winning lottery based on the reservation information corresponding to the reservation display icon are executed. In this way, in each of the holding display icons displayed in the first start opening holding region Ds1, the holding information corresponding to each holding display icon is arranged in the order from the right side to the left side (that is, the order of holding). Subject to lottery.

FIG. 620 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of changes in the second start opening retention area Ds2 and the retention digestion area Dm. In the second starting opening reservation area Ds2, up to four holding display icons H corresponding to each holding (each of up to four holdings) based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34 are arranged in the horizontal direction. is displayed. The manner of change of the second starting opening reservation area Ds2 is roughly the same as the manner of change of the first starting opening reservation area Ds1 shown in FIG. The direction is opposite to that of Ds1. That is, each time a game ball enters the second starting hole 34, the pending display icon H is displayed so as to increase one by one from the left side to the right side. Each time a game round is executed, the pending display icon H moves one by one from the right side to the left side in the second start opening pending region Ds2, and finally moves to the upper part of the pending digestion region Dm, and the pending display is displayed. Fluctuation display and stop display for announcing the result of the winning lottery based on the hold (hold information) corresponding to the icon H are executed. In this way, in each of the holding display icons displayed in the second start opening holding area Ds2, the holding information corresponding to each holding display icon is arranged in the order from left to right (that is, the order of holding). Subject to lottery.

The holding display icons displayed in the first starting opening holding area Ds1 and the second starting opening holding area Ds2 were circular as described above, but instead of this, triangles, squares, pentagons, etc. Other polygonal shapes are also possible. Further, the pending display icon is not limited to a graphical image, and may be an image of a character or the like. Although the reserved digestion area Dm was trapezoidal as described above, it may be an image of other shapes such as triangles, squares, circles, etc. instead. Further, the reserved digestion area Dm is not limited to a graphic image, and may be an image of a character or the like. Further, in the present embodiment, the reservation display icon moved from the first start opening reservation area Ds1 or the second start opening reservation area Ds2 to the reservation digestion area Dm is placed on the upper part of the reservation digestion area Dm. However, instead of this, it may be displayed in such a manner that it disappears after entering the reserved digestion area Dm.

<<13-4-2>> Suspended Change Notice Effect:
The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in order to increase the player's expectation for the hold information corresponding to each hold display icon (that is, the hold information stored in the hold information storage area 64b of the RAM 64), The value of the included winning random number counter C1 is confirmed before it becomes an object of the winning lottery, and based on the confirmed result, a performance that gives the player a sense of expectation, so-called look-ahead performance is performed. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment changes the display color of each pending display icon from the default color (for example, white) to another color as one of the look-ahead effects, so that the pending display icon whose display color has changed A pending change notice effect (hereinafter also simply referred to as “holding change notice”) suggesting the degree of expectation (reliability) of jackpot winning for the corresponding pending information is executed.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, there are white, blue, green, and red as the default colors for the display colors of the pending display icons, and in this order, it is expected that a jackpot will be won in the winning lottery. Four levels from low to high degrees of reliability (reliability) are associated with each other. In other words, the degree of expectation for winning a jackpot to be associated is lowest for white as a display color, higher for blue than white, higher for green than blue, and highest for red. In other words, according to the reservation change notice, if the display color of the reservation display icon is white, which is the default color, the expectation of winning the jackpot is low, and if the display color changes to blue, the expectation of winning the jackpot is white. When the display color changes to green, the expectation of winning a big win is higher than when it is blue, and when the display color changes to red, the expectation of winning a big win is higher than when it is green. When the reservation change notice changes the display color of the reservation display icon H to a display color with a high degree of expectation for winning the big win, the player's expectation for winning the big win can be improved, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a big win is won in the winning lottery, the value of the winning random number counter C1 included in the pending information left in the pending information storage area 64b is confirmed at the end of the game cycle related to the winning of the big win. Then, based on the confirmed results, it is determined whether or not the winning of the jackpot is confirmed, that is, whether or not there is a so-called reservation series (=reserved series chan).

<<13-4-3>> Configuration of the main rotating role for production:
As described above, the main rotating accessory for effect 170 is arranged above the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, and is configured to be movable downward from the origin position shown in FIG.

FIG. 621 is a front view of the game board 30 when the effect main rotating accessory 170 has moved to the lowest position (hereinafter referred to as the lowest point position). As shown in the figure, at the lowest point position, the main rotary accessory 170 for effect is positioned near the center of the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. As shown in FIG. The production main rotating accessory 170 is configured to be movable from the origin position shown in FIG. 611 to the lowest point position shown in FIG. The main rotating accessory for effect 170 moves from the origin position to the lowest point position and returns from the lowest point position to the origin position in accordance with the execution of the predetermined effect processing.

As shown in FIGS. 611 and 621, when the game board 30 is viewed from the front, the main rotating accessory for presentation 170 is configured such that five petal portions 172 are arranged around a rotating shaft portion 171. As shown in FIGS. . Each petal portion 172 is a plate-like member, and has a petal shape when viewed from the front (hereinafter simply referred to as "front view" means the front view of the game board 30). The rotary shaft portion 171 extends in the front-rear direction of the game board 30 (the direction perpendicular to the surface of the game board 30), and is configured to be rotatable around the rotary shaft portion 171. As shown in FIG. By rotating the rotating shaft portion 171, each petal portion 172 connected to the rotating shaft portion 171 rotates, for example, in the direction of the arrow RL, that is, counterclockwise when viewed from the front.

The production main rotary accessory 170 is configured such that when it is positioned at the origin position shown in FIG. It will look like this. On the other hand, the production main rotating accessory 170 is configured such that each of the five petal portions 172 is separated from the rotating shaft portion 171 when positioned at the lowest position shown in FIG. It becomes a flower-like shape that opens at

Each of the five petal portions 172 is molded from a resin material with a translucent color (for example, cherry blossom), and one of the five petal portions 172 is formed with a through hole. A magnifying lens LZ is embedded in the hole. With this configuration, light emitted from the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 partially passes through four of the five petal portions 172, and the remaining one petal portion 172 (hereinafter referred to as the one petal portion 172 is also called a petal portion 172L), the light emitted from the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 is magnified through the magnifying lens LZ.

In summary, the production main rotating accessory 170 performs the following four actions or actions.
・Moving operation: An operation of moving from the origin position shown in FIG. 611 to the lowest point position shown in FIG.・Scaling operation: At the origin position, the petals 172 gather around the rotation shaft 171 to form a closed flower-like shape, and at the lowest point, the petals 172 separate from the rotation shaft 171 to form an open flower-like shape. Shaped operation/light transmission action: The action of enlarging and transmitting the light emitted from the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 through the magnifying lens LZ in one petal portion 172L of the five petal portions 172.

FIG. 622 is a schematic right side view showing the main rotating accessory for presentation 170 and the main rotating accessory for presentation driving section 97 (FIG. 618) for operating the main rotating accessory for presentation 170. FIG. The main rotating accessory for presentation 170 includes a rotating shaft portion 171 and five petal portions 172, as described above. The performance main rotary accessory drive section 97 includes a main rotary accessory rotation motor 174 , a rack and pinion mechanism section 175 , a pinion connection motor 176 , and an enlargement/reduction mechanism section 177 .

The motor 174 for rotating the main rotating accessory is a unit that controls the above-described rotating operation of the main rotating accessory for production 170, and is the end portion of the rotation shaft portion 171 on the side opposite to the side to which the petal portion 172 is connected. connected to Upon receiving the driving force of the motor 174 for rotating the main rotating accessory, the main rotating accessory for presentation 170 rotates, for example, in the direction of the arrow RL, that is, counterclockwise when viewed from the front. In the present embodiment, the speed of this rotation is set to a constant speed so that each petal portion 172 provided in the main rotating accessory 170 for presentation can be visually recognized. The main rotating accessory rotating motor 174 is configured by, for example, a stepping motor.

The rack-and-pinion mechanism 175 and the pinion-connecting motor 176 are units that control the movement of the main rotating accessory 170 for presentation. The rack and pinion mechanism section 175 includes a rack 175a and a pinion 175b. A mounting portion 174a of the main rotary accessory rotating motor 174 is connected to one end of the rack 175a. A pinion coupling motor 176 is coupled to the center shaft of the pinion 175b. The rack and pinion mechanism 175 can convert the rotational motion of the pinion coupling motor 176 into linear motion. Upon receiving the driving force of the pinion connecting motor 176 , the main rotating accessory rotating motor 174 and the main rotating accessory for presentation 170 reciprocate integrally in the vertical direction Y of the game board 30 . The pinion connection motor 176 is configured by, for example, a stepping motor.

The enlargement/reduction mechanism 177 is a unit that controls the above-described enlargement/reduction operation of the production main rotating accessory 170 , and is attached to the rotation shaft 171 and connected to each petal 172 . The enlargement/reduction mechanism 177 allows the production main rotary accessory 170 to have a flower-like shape in which the petals 172 gather around the rotary shaft 171 at the origin position (hereinafter referred to as a closed petal state). At the lowest position of the main rotary accessory 170 for production, each petal part 172 is separated from the rotary shaft part 171 to form an open flower-like shape (hereinafter referred to as an open petal state).

A main rotary accessory rotation motor 174 , a pinion connection motor 176 , and an enlargement/reduction mechanism unit 177 provided in the performance main rotary accessory drive unit 97 receive control signals from the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 . As a result, the main rotating accessory rotating motor 174 , the pinion connecting motor 176 , and the enlargement/reduction mechanism 177 are controlled by the sound emission control device 90 . As processing for performing the control, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a one-shot notification effect processing for performing a one-shot notification effect, and a big or small effect processing for performing a big or small effect (=big or small effect). to run. The one-shot notification effect processing will be described in detail below.

<<13-4-4>> One-shot announcement effect:
The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 decides by lottery whether or not to execute the one-shot notification performance when the result of the winning lottery in the game round is a big win, and decides to execute the one-shot notification performance. When it is done, execute the one-shot notification effect processing. The one-shot notification performance is a performance for notifying that the winning lottery result is a jackpot winning before the combination of symbols becomes a predetermined combination corresponding to the jackpot winning. The lottery for determining whether or not to execute the one-shot notification effect is performed by generating a random number for one-shot notification and determining whether or not the random number matches a predetermined value.

When the execution of the one-shot notification effect processing is started, the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 controls the pinion connection motor 176 at the start of the game cycle in which the winning lottery result is a big win. The main rotating accessory 170 is moved from the origin position shown in FIG. 611 to the lowest point position shown in FIG. In this embodiment, an origin position detection sensor (not shown) capable of detecting that the main rotating accessory for production 170 is at the origin position and detecting that the main rotating accessory for production 170 is at the lowest point position. A possible lowest point position detection sensor (not shown) is provided, and when the main rotating accessory for presentation 170 is moved from the origin position to the lowest point position, the main rotating accessory for presentation 170 The pinion coupling motor 176 is driven until it is detected by the lowest point position detection sensor.

The MPU 92 controls the main rotary accessory rotation motor 174 at the timing when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the movement of the main rotary accessory for production 170 (timing before reaching the lowest position). , the production main rotary accessory 170 is rotated counterclockwise RL in a front view, and the enlargement/reduction mechanism 177 is controlled to change each petal part 172 from the petal closed state to the petal open state.

FIG. 623 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the production main rotating accessory 170 in the one-shot notification production process. As described above, as a result of controlling the motor 174 for rotating the main rotating accessory and controlling the scaling mechanism 177 at the above timing, the main rotating accessory for production 170 is moved to the origin as shown in FIG. 623(a). While moving from the position to the lowest position (while moving in the +Y direction), the petal closed state changes to the petal open state and rotates counterclockwise RL in the front view.

After that, when the main rotating accessory for production 170 reaches the lowest position, the MPU 92 rotates the main rotating accessory for production 170 until a predetermined period elapses from the time when the main rotary accessory for production 170 reaches the lowest position, and enters the petal open state. to continue. As a result, as shown in FIG. 623(b), the production main rotating accessory 170 rotates counterclockwise RL in the front view with the petals open for a predetermined period at the lowest position.

When the predetermined period of time has passed, the MPU 92 controls the main rotating accessory rotating motor 174 to stop the rotating performance main rotating accessory 170, and controls the scaling mechanism 177. , each petal portion 172 is changed from the petal open state to the petal closed state. Thereafter, the MPU 92 controls the pinion coupling motor 176 to return from the lowest position shown in FIG. 621 to the origin position shown in FIG. When returning the performance main rotating accessory 170 from the lowest position to the origin position, the pinion coupling motor 176 is driven until the performance main rotating accessory 170 is detected by the origin position detection sensor.

The sound emission control device 90 causes the display control device 100 to display a predetermined image on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 during the above-described predetermined period in which the effect main rotating accessory 170 is at the lowest position. conduct. FIG. 623(b) shows the display surface 41a on which the predetermined image is displayed. As described above, when the main rotating accessory for presentation 170 is at the lowest position, the main rotating accessory for presentation 170 rotates counterclockwise RL in the front view with the petals open for a predetermined period. , the magnifying lens LZ provided on the main rotating accessory for presentation 170 rotates on a circular orbit centered on the rotating shaft portion 171 of the main rotating accessory for presentation 170 in a front view. The sound emission control device 90 has a plurality of (10 in this embodiment) circular high-brightness portions HB arranged at regular intervals so as to overlap the circular orbit in a front view with respect to the display control device 100. The (drawn) image is displayed on the pattern display device 41 as a predetermined image.

The light emitted from each high-brightness portion HB included in the predetermined image travels toward the front side of the game board 30, but on the way, it partially passes through each rotating petal portion 172 or passes through a gap between the adjacent petal portions 172 to the player. Or, it is magnified through a magnifying lens LZ embedded in one petal portion 172L and sent to the player side. For this reason, during a predetermined period in which the production main rotating accessory 170 is at the lowest position, the player can see the high-intensity light that was visible through each rotating petal portion 172 and the gaps between the adjacent petal portions 172 . The portion HB can be magnified by the magnifying lens LZ provided in the petal portion 172L and can be visually recognized as shining brightly.

According to the one-shot notification effect configured as described above, the high-brightness part HB shines brightly through the magnifying lens LZ of the rotating petal part 172L during a predetermined period in which the main rotating accessory for effect 170 is at the lowest position. When it becomes visible as described above, it is possible to improve the player's expectation for winning the jackpot and improve the amusement of the game. In particular, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the high-brightness portion HB that is magnified by the magnifying lens LZ and shines brightly can be visually recognized by the player. It is possible to further increase the interest of

<<13-4-5>> Configuration of sub-rotating role for production:
As described above, each of the pair of sub-rotary accessories 180 and 190 for effect is arranged below the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, and is moved upward from the origin position shown in FIG. configured as possible. When the sub-rotating accessory for presentation 180, 190 is at the origin position, most of the sub-rotating accessory for presentation 180, 190 is hidden by the cover plate 199, and the sub-rotating accessory for presentation 180, 190 Only a portion of 190 protrudes from cover plate 199 .

FIG. 624 is a front view showing a pair of sub rotating accessories 180 and 190 for production. First, the sub rotating accessory 180 for presentation arranged on the right side in the front view will be described. The sub-rotary accessory for presentation 180 includes a rotating shaft portion 181 and a rotating body 182 .

The rotating body 182 is a plate-like member having an outer shape in which one pair of opposite sides are parallel and the other pair of opposite sides are semicircular. The rotating body 182 is molded from a resin material with a non-transparent color (eg, red). In addition, as a modification, it may be transparent instead of the non-transparent color. A rotating shaft portion 181 is connected to the center of the rotating body 182 . The rotating shaft portion 181 extends in the front-rear direction of the game board 30 (the direction perpendicular to the surface of the game board 30) Z, and is rotatable around the rotating shaft portion 181 . By rotationally driving the rotating shaft portion 181, the rotating body 182 connected to the rotating shaft portion 181 rotates, for example, in the direction of the arrow RL, that is, counterclockwise when viewed from the front. The outer shape of the rotating body 182 is symmetrical with respect to the center of rotation of the rotating body 182 when the game board 30 is viewed from the front.

A circular through hole is provided near one end in the longitudinal direction of the rotating body 182, and a transparent resin 183 is embedded in the through hole. A character string 183a of “BIG” is drawn on the transparent resin 183 in rainbow-colored characters. A circular through hole is provided near the other end in the longitudinal direction of the rotating body 182, and a transparent resin 184 is embedded in the through hole. A character string 184a of "BIG" is drawn on the transparent resin 184 in black characters.

The production sub-rotary accessory 180 is configured to be movable in the vertical direction Y, moves from the origin position to the uppermost position (hereinafter referred to as the top position), and then returns from the top position to the origin position. . A long flat connecting rod 185 is connected to the rotating shaft portion 181 .

FIG. 625 is a schematic right side view showing the sub-rotating accessory for presentation 180 and the sub-rotating accessory for presentation driving section 98 that operates the sub-rotating accessory for presentation 180. FIG. The production sub-rotary accessory 180 includes the rotating shaft portion 181 and the rotating body 182 as described above. The sub-rotating accessory driving section 98 for presentation includes a sub-rotating accessory rotating motor 186 , a rack and pinion mechanism section 187 , and a pinion connecting motor 188 .

The sub-rotating accessory rotating motor 186 is a unit that controls the rotation of the sub-rotating accessory for production 180, and is connected to the end of the rotating shaft portion 181 on the side opposite to the side to which the rotating body 182 is connected. It is Receiving the driving force of the motor 186 for rotating the sub-rotating role, the sub-rotating role for production 180 rotates, for example, in the direction of the arrow RL, that is, counterclockwise when viewed from the front. In this embodiment, the speed of this rotation is set to a speed at which the rotating body 182 provided in the sub-rotating accessory 180 for production can be visually recognized.

The rack and pinion mechanism 187 and the pinion connection motor 188 are units that control the movement of the sub-rotary accessory 180 for presentation. The rack and pinion mechanism section 187 includes a rack 187a and a pinion 187b. A mounting portion 186a of a sub-rotating accessory rotating motor 186 is connected to one end of the rack 187a. A pinion coupling motor 188 is coupled to the center shaft of the pinion 187b. The rack and pinion mechanism 187 can convert the rotational motion of the pinion coupling motor 188 into linear motion. As a result, the driving force of the pinion connecting motor 188 is received, and the sub-rotating accessory rotating motor 186 and the sub-rotating accessory for production 180 integrally move from the origin position indicated by the solid line in the figure. It moves to the top position indicated by the dashed line, and then returns to the origin position from the top position. Note that the illustration of the connecting rod 185 shown in FIG. 624 is omitted in the figure. The connecting rod 185 has a function of hiding the rack 187a when viewed from the front, and does not govern the movement of the sub-rotary accessory 180 for presentation.

When the sub rotating accessory for effect 180 is at the origin position indicated by the solid line in the drawing, the sub rotating accessory for effect 180 has most of the rotating body 182 behind the cover plate 199 (rear surface) in front view. side). Specifically, in the front-rear direction Z of the game board 30, the rotating body 182 of the sub-rotary accessory for presentation 180 is located behind the cover plate 199, and the sub-rotary accessory for presentation 180 is at the origin position. Sometimes, the production sub-rotary accessory 180 is positioned at a position where most of the rotating body 182 is hidden behind the cover plate 199 .

When the sub rotating accessory for effect 180 is at the highest position indicated by the dashed line in the figure, when the main rotating accessory for effect 170 moves to the lowest position, the sub rotating accessory for effect 180 is When viewed from the front, it is possible to position a part of the rotating body 182 of the sub rotating accessory for presentation 180 behind the petal portion 172 of the main rotating accessory for presentation 170 (back side). Specifically, in the front-rear direction Z of the game board 30, since the rotating body 182 of the sub-rotating accessory for effect 180 is positioned behind the petal portion 172, the sub-rotating accessory for effect 180 is positioned at the top. When it is at the point position, it is possible to position a part of the rotary body 182 of the sub-rotary accessory for production 180 at a position hidden behind the petal part 172 .

Returning to the description of FIG. The sub-rotating accessory for production arranged on the left side in the front view (hereinafter also referred to as the second sub-rotating accessory for production) is arranged on the right side in the front view (hereinafter referred to as the first production sub-rotating accessory). It has almost the same configuration as compared with 180 (also called a sub-rotary accessory for use) 180. That is, the second effect sub rotating accessory 190 includes a rotating shaft portion 191 and a rotating body 192 in the same manner as the first effect sub rotating accessory 180 . The rotating body 192 is different from the rotating body 182 of the first effect sub rotating accessory 180 in that the character strings 193a and 194a drawn on the transparent resins 193 and 194 are "SML". are the same. That is, on the rotating body 192, a rainbow-colored character string 193a of "SML" and a black-colored character string 194a of "SML" are drawn. SML is an abbreviation for SMALL. A long flat connecting rod 195 is connected to the rotating shaft portion 191 .

The sub-rotating accessory drive section for presentation (hereinafter referred to as the sub-rotating accessory drive section for second presentation) 99 that operates the sub-rotary accessory for presentation 190 also operates the sub-rotary accessory for presentation 180. It has almost the same configuration as the effect sub-rotational accessory drive section 98 (FIG. 625, hereinafter referred to as the first effect sub-rotational accessory drive section) to be operated. That is, the second effect sub-rotational accessory driving section 99 includes a sub-rotating accessory rotating motor, a rack and pinion mechanism, and a pinion coupling motor. The second effect sub-rotating accessory drive unit 99 rotates the second effect sub-rotating accessory drive 190 counterclockwise in front view in the same manner as the first effect sub-rotary accessory drive unit 98, and rotates the origin It is moved from the position to the highest point position, and then returned from the highest point position to the origin position. When the second effect sub-rotating accessory 190 is at the origin position, the second effect sub-rotating accessory 190 is located at a position where most of the rotating body 192 is hidden behind the cover plate 199 in a front view. . When the second effect sub-rotary accessory 190 is at the highest point position, when the effect main rotating accessory 170 moves to the lowest point position, the second effect sub-rotary accessory 190 is in the front view , a part of the rotating body 192 of the second effect sub rotating accessory 190 can be positioned behind the petal part 172 of the main rotating accessory 170 for effect.

<<13-4-6>> Big or Small Production:
The big or small effect processing will be described in detail below. In the big or small effect processing, when the main rotating accessory for effect 170, the sub-rotating accessory for first effect 180, and the sub-rotating accessory for second effect 190 cooperate to win a jackpot in a winning lottery. A big or small production is performed for announcing the number of round games acquired and the presence or absence of a holding group. First, the control of the production main rotating accessory 170 by the big or small production process will be described.

The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 decides by lottery whether or not to execute the big or small performance when the result of the winning lottery in the game cycle is a big win, and decides to execute the big or small performance. If so, big or small effect processing is executed. The lottery for determining whether or not to execute the big or small effect is performed by generating a random number for the big or small effect and determining whether or not the random number matches a predetermined value.

When the execution of the big or small effect process is started, the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 connects the pinion after the game cycle in which the winning lottery result is a big win (at the start of the opening period described later). By controlling the motor 176 (see FIG. 622), the main rotary accessory 170 for production is moved from the origin position to the lowest point position. In addition, the MPU 92 rotates the main rotary accessory rotation motor 174 (Fig. 622) to rotate the production main rotating accessory 170 counterclockwise RL in the front view, and control the enlargement/reduction mechanism 177 (see FIG. 622) to move each petal 172 from the petal closed state. Change to petal open state.

FIG. 626 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the production main rotating accessory 170 and the like in the big or small production process. As a result of controlling the motor 174 for rotating the main rotating accessory at the above timing and controlling the scaling mechanism 177, as shown in FIG. While moving to the position (while moving in the +Y direction), it changes from the petal closed state to the petal open state and rotates counterclockwise RL in the front view.

After that, when the main rotating accessory for effect 170 reaches the lowest position, the MPU 92 controls the main rotating accessory rotating motor 174 to rotate the rotating main rotating accessory for effect 170 to a predetermined level. Stop at the rotation stop position. The state shown in FIG. 626(b) is the state where the rotation is stopped at a predetermined rotation stop position. A predetermined rotation stop position (hereinafter referred to as a predetermined rotation stop position) will be described later. Next, the MPU 92 controls the enlargement/reduction mechanism section 177 after a specific time (for example, 3 seconds) has passed from the stopped state, and changes each petal section 172 from the petal open state to the petal closed state. After that, the MPU 92 controls the pinion connection motor 176 to return the production main rotary accessory 170 from the lowest point position to the origin position.

The predetermined rotation stop position will be described in detail below. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a first predetermined rotation stop position and a second predetermined rotation stop position are prepared in advance as predetermined rotation stop positions at the lowest position of the main rotating accessory 170 for effect. ing. The first predetermined rotation stop position is a position where it is possible to interact with the first effect sub-rotary accessory 180. Specifically, the effect main rotating accessory 170 shown in FIG. position. As shown in FIG. 626(b), when the main rotating accessory for effect 170 is at the first predetermined rotation stop position, the main rotating accessory for effect 170 is equipped with the main rotating accessory for effect when viewed from the front of the game board 30. With respect to the magnifying lens LZ, the rainbow-colored character string 183a or the black character string 184a drawn on the rotating body 182 of the first production sub-rotary accessory 180 that has moved to the highest point position can overlap. Become. That is, in the front view of the game board 30, for the rainbow character string 183a or the black character string 184a drawn on the rotating body 182 of the first effect sub-rotary accessory 180 positioned at the highest position, The position of the main rotating accessory for presentation 170 when the centers of the magnifying lenses LZ provided on the main rotating accessory for presentation 170 overlap corresponds to the first predetermined rotation stop position. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the main rotating accessory for effect 170 moves from the origin position to the lowest point position, the first effect sub-purpose that has moved to the highest point position in the front view of the game board 30 The center of the magnifying lens LZ provided on the main rotating accessory 170 for production overlaps with the position of the rainbow-colored character string 183a or the black character string 184a drawn on the rotating body 182 of the rotating accessory 180. is possible, the main rotating accessory rotating motor 174 is controlled to stop the rotating performance main rotating accessory 170 at the first predetermined rotation stop position.

FIG. 627 is an explanatory diagram showing the second predetermined rotation stop position of the main rotating accessory for production 170. FIG. The second predetermined rotation stop position is a position where it is possible to interact with the second effect sub-rotary accessory 190, specifically, the position of the effect main rotating accessory 170 shown in FIG. . As shown in FIG. 627, when the main rotating accessory for effect 170 is at the second predetermined rotation stop position, the magnifying lens LZ provided on the main rotating accessory for effect 170 is On the other hand, the rainbow character string 193a or the black character string 194a drawn on the rotating body 192 of the second effect sub-rotary accessory 190 that has moved to the highest point position can be overlapped. That is, in the front view of the game board 30, for the rainbow-colored character string 193a or the black character string 194a drawn on the rotating body 192 of the second effect sub-rotary accessory 190 located at the highest position, The position of the main rotating accessory for presentation 170 when the centers of the magnifying lenses LZ provided on the main rotating accessory for presentation 170 overlap corresponds to the second predetermined rotation stop position. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the main rotating accessory for effect 170 moves from the origin position to the lowest point position, the second effect sub-purpose that has moved to the highest point position in the front view of the game board 30 The center of the magnifying lens LZ provided on the main rotating accessory 170 for presentation overlaps with the position of the rainbow-colored character string 193a or the black character string 194a drawn on the rotating body 192 of the rotating accessory 190. is possible, the main rotating accessory rotating motor 174 is controlled to stop the rotating performance main rotating accessory 170 at the second predetermined rotation stop position.

It should be noted that which of the first predetermined rotation stop position and the second predetermined rotation stop position is adopted as the predetermined rotation stop position is obtained at the time of winning the jackpot that triggers the execution of the big or small effect processing. It is determined according to the number of round games. Specifically, when the result of the allocation determination executed in the winning lottery that triggered the execution of the big or small effect processing is the 16R probability variable jackpot or the 16R normal jackpot, the main By controlling the rotating accessory rotating motor 174, the production main rotating accessory 170 is stopped at the first predetermined rotation stop position. On the other hand, when the result of the allocation determination executed in the winning lottery that triggered the execution of the big or small effect processing is the 8R variable variable jackpot or the 8R normal jackpot, the main rotating accessory at the lowest point position. The rotation motor 174 is controlled to stop the production main rotating accessory 170 at the second predetermined rotation stop position.

In the big or small production process, the main rotating accessory for production 170 described above is controlled, and the sub-rotating accessory for first production 180 and the sub-rotating accessory for second production 190 are controlled. . Next, the control of the first effect sub-rotating accessory 180 and the second effect sub-rotating accessory 190 will be described. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the first effect sub-rotating role 180 and the second effect sub-rotating role 180 and The control for the second production sub rotating accessory 190 is performed.

When the execution of the big or small effect process is started, the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 operates each pinion connecting motor in synchronization with moving the effect main rotary accessory 170 from the origin position to the lowest point position. (See FIG. 625) to move each of the production sub-rotary accessories 180 and 190 from the origin position to the highest point position. The moving speed at this time was constant. In addition, the MPU 92 rotates each sub-rotary role product rotation motor at a timing (timing before reaching the top position) after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the movement of each of the sub-rotary role products 180 and 190 for production. 186 (see FIG. 625) is controlled to rotate each of the production sub-rotary accessories 180 and 190 counterclockwise RL in the front view. At this time, the rotation speed was kept constant. As a result, as shown in FIG. 626(a), each of the effect sub-rotary accessories 180 and 190 moves from the origin position to the highest point position (while moving in the -Y direction), Rotate around RL. When the main rotating accessory for presentation 170 and the sub rotating accessories for presentation 180 and 190 are in the form shown in FIG. Since the rotating accessories 180 and 190 are spaced apart from each other in terms of distance, the rotating bodies 182 and 192 of the respective sub rotating accessories for production 180 and 190 are the main rotating accessories for production when the game board 30 is viewed from the front. It is visible without passing through the petal portion 172 of 170 . In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as described above, in synchronism with moving the main rotating accessory for presentation 170 from the origin position to the lowest position, each secondary rotating accessory for presentation 180 , 190 are moved from the origin position to the highest point position, it is not necessary to match the timing of movement of both, and as a modification, the timing of movement of both may be shifted. Specifically, the main rotating accessory for production 170 may be first moved to the lowest position, and then the sub rotating accessories for production 180 and 190 may be moved to the highest position. After moving the secondary sub-rotary accessories 180 and 190 to the highest position, the main rotating accessory for presentation 170 may be moved to the lowest position.

Thereafter, the MPU 92 controls the motors 186 for rotating the sub-rotating role products when the respective sub-rotating role products 180 and 190 for production reach the highest position, and the sub-rotating role products for production that are rotating 180, 190 are stopped at a specific rotation stop position. The state shown in FIG. 626(b) is the state where the rotation is stopped at a specific rotation stop position. A specific rotation stop position (hereinafter referred to as a specific rotation stop position) will be described later. The timing at which each sub-rotary accessory for effect 180, 190 stops at a specific rotation stop position is controlled so as to be synchronized with the timing at which the main rotating accessory for effect 170 stops at a predetermined rotation stop position at the lowest position. ing. It should be noted that the timings of stopping the rotation of both do not necessarily have to match, and as a modification, the timings of stopping the rotation of both may be shifted. Specifically, after the main rotating accessory for presentation 170 that is rotating is first stopped at a predetermined rotation stop position, the rotating sub-rotating accessories for presentation 180 and 190 are stopped at a specific rotation stop position. Alternatively, the rotating production sub-rotary accessories 180 and 190 are first stopped at a specific rotation stop position, and then the rotating production main rotating accessory 170 is stopped at a predetermined rotation stop position. It is good also as a structure stopped by. Next, the MPU 92 controls each pinion connection motor 188 after a specific time (for example, 3 seconds) has passed from the stopped state, and each sub-rotation accessory for production 180, 190 is moved from the highest point position. Return to origin position.

The specific rotation stop position will be described in detail below. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a first specific rotation stop position and a second specific rotation stop position are set in advance as the specific rotation stop position at the highest point position for each of the effect sub-rotary accessories 180 and 190. prepared. The first specific rotation stop position is the position where the rainbow-colored character string 183a (or 193a) is on the upper side, as shown in FIG. The second specific rotation stop position is a state in which the vertical direction is reversed from that shown in FIG.

In FIG. 626(b), in synchronism with the main rotating accessory for presentation 170 reaching the lowest position, the sub rotating accessories for presentation 180 and 190 reach the highest position, and then each of the presentations A state in which the sub-rotary accessories 180 and 190 for the player are stopped at the first specific rotation stop position is shown. As described above, at the first specific rotation stop position, the sub-representative rotating accessories 180 and 190 are in a state in which the rainbow-colored character string 183a (or 193a) is on the upper side. On the other hand, in the state shown in FIG. 626(b), the main rotating accessory for effect 170 stops at the first predetermined rotation stop position at the lowest position, so that when the game board 30 is viewed from the front, The rainbow-colored character string 183a "BIG" drawn on the rotating body 182 of the first production sub-rotary role 180 overlaps with the magnifying lens LZ provided on the main rotating role 170. FIG. That is, both the main rotating accessory for presentation 170 in the rotated state and the sub-rotating accessory for presentation 180 in the rotated state are stopped, and the magnifying lens provided on the main rotating accessory for presentation 170 is stopped. The rainbow-colored "BIG" character string 183a drawn on the rotating body 182 of the first production sub-rotary accessory 180 is exactly superimposed on LZ. On the other hand, the rainbow-colored character string 193a "SML" drawn on the rotating body 192 of the second effect sub-rotary accessory 190 does not overlap the position of the magnifying lens LZ.

In FIG. 627 as well, in synchronism with the effect main rotating accessory 170 reaching the lowest position, each of the effect sub rotating accessories 180 and 190 reaches the highest point position, and then each of the effect sub rotating accessories A state in which the accessories 180 and 190 are stopped at the first specific rotation stop position is shown. In the state shown in FIG. 627, the main rotating accessory for effect 170 stops at the second predetermined rotation stop position at the lowest position, so that when the game board 30 is viewed from the front, the main rotating accessory for effect 170 A rainbow-colored character string 193a "SML" drawn on the rotating body 192 of the second production sub-rotary accessory 190 overlaps with the magnifying lens LZ provided in the . In other words, both the main rotating accessory for presentation 170 in the rotated state and the sub rotating accessory for presentation 190 in the rotated state are stopped, and the magnifying lens provided on the main rotating accessory for presentation 170 is stopped. The character string 193a of rainbow-colored "SML" drawn on the rotating body 192 of the second production sub-rotary accessory 190 exactly overlaps with LZ. On the other hand, the rainbow-colored "BIG" character string 183a drawn on the rotor 182 of the first production sub-rotary accessory 180 does not overlap the position of the magnifying lens LZ.

FIG. 628 is an explanatory diagram showing the second specific rotation stop position for each sub-rotation accessory 180, 190 for production. In FIG. 628, in synchronism with the main rotating accessory for presentation 170 reaching the lowest position, the sub rotating accessories for presentation 180 and 190 reach the highest position, and then each sub rotating accessory for presentation A state in which the accessories 180 and 190 are stopped at the second specific rotation stop position is shown. As described above, at the second specific rotation stop position, each sub-representation rotating accessory 180, 190 is in a state in which the black character string 184a (or 194a) is on the upper side. On the other hand, in the state shown in FIG. 628, since the main rotating accessory for effect 170 stops at the first predetermined rotation stop position at the lowest position, when the game board 30 is viewed from the front, the main rotating role for effect A black character string 184a of "BIG" drawn on the rotating body 182 of the first sub-rotating accessory 180 for presentation overlaps with the magnifying lens LZ provided on the object 170. FIG. That is, both the main rotating accessory for presentation 170 in the rotated state and the sub-rotating accessory for presentation 180 in the rotated state are stopped, and the magnifying lens provided on the main rotating accessory for presentation 170 is stopped. The black character string 184a of "BIG" drawn on the rotating body 182 of the first production sub-rotary accessory 180 exactly overlaps with LZ. On the other hand, the character string 194a of black "SML" drawn on the rotating body 192 of the second effect sub rotating accessory 190 does not overlap the position of the magnifying lens LZ.

In FIG. 629 as well, in synchronism with the effect main rotating accessory 170 reaching the lowest position, each of the effect sub rotating accessories 180 and 190 reaches the highest point position, and then each of the effect sub rotating accessories A state in which the accessories 180 and 190 are stopped at the second specific rotation stop position is shown. In the state shown in FIG. 629, the main rotating accessory for effect 170 is stopped at the second predetermined rotation stop position at the lowest point position. A black character string 194a of "SML" drawn on the rotating body 192 of the second effect sub rotating accessory 190 is superimposed on the magnifying lens LZ provided in the . In other words, both the main rotating accessory for presentation 170 in the rotated state and the sub rotating accessory for presentation 190 in the rotated state are stopped, and the magnifying lens provided on the main rotating accessory for presentation 170 is stopped. The character string 194a of black "SML" drawn on the rotating body 192 of the second effect sub-rotary accessory 190 exactly overlaps with LZ. On the other hand, the character string 184a of black "BIG" drawn on the rotating body 182 of the first production sub-rotary accessory 180 does not overlap the position of the magnifying lens LZ.

Whether the first specific rotation stop position or the second specific rotation stop position is used as the specific rotation stop position is determined according to the presence or absence of the holding train. Specifically, when the determination result of the presence or absence of the holding series executed at the end of the game round related to the winning of the jackpot that triggered the execution of the big or small production processing is the presence of the holding series, each production sub-rotation Each sub-rotating accessory rotating motor 186 is controlled at the top position of the accessory 180, 190 to stop each sub-rotating accessory for presentation 180, 190 at the first specific rotation stop position. On the other hand, when the determination result of the presence/absence of the holding series executed at the end of the game round related to the winning of the jackpot that triggered the execution of the big or small production process is the absence of the holding series, each sub rotating accessory 180 for production. , 190, each main rotating accessory rotating motor 174 is controlled to stop each sub-rotating accessory for production 180, 190 at a second specific rotation stop position.

The sound emission control device 90 instructs the display control device 100 to display an image on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 during the specific time period in which the rotation of the effect main rotating accessory 170 is stopped at the lowest position. Processing for displaying a predetermined image is performed. The predetermined image is the same image as the predetermined image displayed during the one-shot notification effect. That is, as shown in FIGS. 626(b) and 627 to 629, the magnifying lens LZ can be moved when the main rotating accessory for production 170 is at the lowest position on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. An image in which a plurality of (10 in this embodiment) circular high-brightness portions HB are arranged at equal intervals so as to overlap the circular orbit is displayed as a predetermined image.

The light emitted from each high-brightness portion HB included in the predetermined image travels toward the front side of the game board 30, but is blocked by each petal portion 172 on the way, or escapes to the player side through gaps between adjacent petal portions 172. Or, it is magnified through a magnifying lens LZ embedded in one petal portion 172L and sent to the player side. According to the big or small effect processing, as described above, when the game board 30 is viewed from the front, the first effect sub-rotary accessory 180 or the second effect sub-rotary accessory 190 is displayed with respect to the magnifying lens LZ. Since the character strings (any one of 183a, 184a, 193a, and 194a) provided in the image overlap each other, the character strings are enlarged and conspicuously displayed by the light emitted from the high luminance portion HB included in the predetermined image. can be done.

In summary, according to the big or small effect processing, the main rotating accessory for effect 170, the sub-rotating accessory for first effect 180, and the sub-rotating accessory for second effect 190 operate as follows. become.

When the execution of the big or small effect process is started, after the end of the game cycle in which the win lottery result is a big win, the main rotary accessory for effect 170 moves from the origin position shown in FIG. 611 to the lowest point position. At the same time, the first effect sub-rotating accessory 180 and the second effect sub-rotating accessory 190 move from the origin position shown in FIG. 611 to the highest point position. The production main rotating accessory 170 changes from the petal closed state to the petal open state while moving from the origin position to the lowest point position, and rotates counterclockwise RL when viewed from the front. The first production sub-rotational accessory 180 and the second production sub-rotational accessory 190 rotate counterclockwise RL in the front view while moving from the origin position to the highest point position (see FIG. 626). As a modification of the present embodiment, when the effect main rotating accessory 170 and the first and second effect sub rotating accessories 180 and 190 start to move, a voice saying "big or small" is produced. It may be configured to output.

When the production main rotating accessory 170 reaches the lowest position, it stops at the first or second predetermined rotation stop position. When the first effect sub-rotating accessory 180 and the second effect sub-rotating accessory 190 reach the top position, they stop at the first or second specific rotation stop position. It should be noted that the timing at which the production main rotating accessory 170 stops at the predetermined rotation stop position at the lowest position and the timing at which each of the production sub rotating accessories 180 and 190 stop at the specific rotation stop position are synchronized. controlled. After that, the main rotating accessory for presentation 170, the sub rotating accessory for first presentation 180, and the sub rotating accessory for second presentation 190 are kept stopped for a specific time (for example, 3 seconds). During the specific time period, the main rotating accessory for effect 170, the sub-rotating accessory for first effect 180, and the sub-rotating accessory for second effect 190 are shown in FIGS. Or it can take the form shown in FIG.

According to the form shown in FIG. 626(b), the rainbow-colored character string 183a drawn on the rotating body 182 of the sub rotating accessory 180 for the first effect is magnified by the magnifying lens LZ and displayed. be. According to the form shown in FIG. 627, the rainbow-colored "SML" character string 193a drawn on the rotating body 192 of the second production sub-rotary accessory 190 is enlarged and displayed by the magnifying lens LZ. According to the form shown in FIG. 628, the character string 184a of black "BIG" drawn on the rotating body 182 of the first production sub-rotary accessory 180 is enlarged and displayed by the magnifying lens LZ. According to the aspect shown in FIG. 629, the character string 194a of black "SML" drawn on the rotating body 192 of the second production sub-rotary accessory 190 is enlarged and displayed by the magnifying lens LZ. In other words, when the main rotating accessory for effect 170 and the sub rotating accessory for effect 180, 190 are in the form shown in FIG. 626(b), FIG. 627, FIG. A rainbow-colored "BIG" character string 183a, a rainbow-colored "SML" character string 193a, and a black "BIG" character drawn on the rotating bodies 182, 192 of the second production sub-rotating accessories 180, 190. Column 184a, or black "SML" text 194a, is visible through petal 172L with magnifying lens LZ.

During the period of the specific time, the main rotating accessory for effect 170, the sub-rotating accessory for first effect 180, and the sub-rotating accessory for second effect 190 are shown in FIGS. Which of the forms shown in FIG. 629 can be taken is specified from the result of the allocation determination executed at the time of the winning lottery that triggered the execution of the big or small effect processing, as described above. It is determined by the number of round games to be played and the determination result of the presence/absence of the holding series which is executed at the end of the game round relating to the winning of the jackpot which triggered the execution of the big or small effect processing. That is, when the number of round games is 16 and there is a holding group, the form shown in FIG. It can take the form shown. When the number of round games is 16 and there is no holding group, the form shown in FIG. 628 is adopted, that is, the form in which a black character string 184a of "BIG" is magnified and displayed by the magnifying lens LZ. obtain. When the number of round games is 8 and there is a holding string, the form shown in FIG. can take When the number of round games is 8 and there are no holding runs, the mode shown in FIG. 629 is adopted, that is, the mode in which the black character string 'SML' 194a is magnified and displayed by the magnifying lens LZ. obtain.

Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, after the end of the game cycle in which the result of the winning lottery is a jackpot winning, the main rotary accessory for presentation 170 rotates and descends to the lowest point position. , the first and second effect sub-rotary accessories 180, 190 come up to the highest position while rotating, and then the effect main rotating accessory 170 and the first and second effect sub-rotating accessory 180. , 190 stop rotating together, and the character strings 183a, 184a, 193a drawn on the first or second sub-rotating accessory for presentation 180, 190 are drawn by the magnifying lens LZ provided on the main rotating accessory for presentation 170. , 194a is displayed in an enlarged manner, the player can be informed of the number of round games and the presence/absence of a holding group.

According to the big or small production of the above configuration, the character string 183a drawn on the first or second sub-rotary accessory for production 180, 190 with respect to the magnifying lens LZ provided in the main rotary accessory for production 170, It is possible to give the player a feeling of urgency (feeling of excitement) such as which one of 184a, 193a, and 194a coincides (stops). In addition, according to the big or small production, the rainbow-colored "BIG" character string 183a is drawn on the first sub-rotary accessory for production 180 by the magnifying lens LZ provided on the main rotary accessory for production 170. is displayed in an enlarged manner, the number of acquisition round games in the case of winning a jackpot in a winning lottery becomes 16, and the player can be given the double joy of the existence of the holding series. Further, according to the big or small effect, the magnifying lens LZ provided on the main rotating accessory for effect 170 enlarges the character string 184a of the black "BIG" drawn on the sub rotating accessory for effect 180. is displayed, it is possible to give the player the joy that the number of acquired round games will be 16 times in the case of winning the jackpot in the winning lottery, and on the other hand, hold the case of winning the jackpot in the winning lottery. It is possible to give the player a slight sense of disappointment that there is no ren. Further, according to the big or small production, the rainbow-colored "SML" character string 193a drawn on the second production sub-rotary accessory 190 is magnified by the magnifying lens LZ provided on the production main rotating accessory 170. is displayed, it is possible to give the player the pleasure of having a holding group in the case of winning a jackpot in the winning lottery, and on the other hand, the winning round game in the case of winning a jackpot in the winning lottery It is possible to give the player a slight sense of disappointment that the number of times is eight. Furthermore, according to the big or small production, the magnifying lens LZ provided on the main rotary accessory for production 170 enlarges the character string 194a of the black "SML" drawn on the sub rotary accessory for production 190. is displayed, the number of winning round games in the case of winning the jackpot in the winning lottery will be 8 times, and there will be no pending series, so the feeling that it was better than not winning the jackpot feeling) can be imparted to the player. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

FIG. 630 is a schematic side view of a rotating device of a comparative example. The rotating device includes a performance rotating accessory 970 , a rotating motor 974 , a scaling mechanism 977 , and an LED (light emitting diode) 979 . The production rotating accessory 970 includes a rotating shaft portion 971 and a plurality of petal portions 972 . Each petal portion 972 is a plate-like member and has a petal shape when viewed from the front, similarly to the petal portion 172 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment. The rotation motor 974 has substantially the same configuration as the main rotation accessory rotation motor 174 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment. The enlarging/reducing mechanism section 977 has substantially the same configuration as the enlarging/reducing mechanism section 177 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment. In the rotating device of this comparative example, each petal portion 972 is made of a translucent material. An LED 979 is attached to the rear surface side of each petal portion 972 . Each LED 979 irradiates each translucent petal portion 972 from the back side. The mounting position of each LED 979 is a position very close to each petal portion 972 , and each LED 979 is configured to rotate in synchronization with each petal portion 972 . That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, an image in which the circular high-brightness portion HB is drawn is displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, so that the high-brightness portion HB is used as a light source for illuminating the petal portion 172L. In contrast, in the conventional rotating device, the LEDs 979 attached in the immediate vicinity of the back side of the petal portions 972 directly illuminate each petal portion 972 .

In the rotating device of the comparative example, the distance between each petal portion 972 and each LED 979 was short. Therefore, in the rotating device of the comparative example, it was impossible to insert a plate-like member between each petal portion 972 and each LED 979 . On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the light source for illuminating the petal portion 172L is configured by the high luminance portion HB displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, so that the petal portion 172L and the petal The distance between the light source that irradiates the part 172L is lengthened so that the sub rotating accessories 180 and 190 for presentation can be inserted into the space between them. As a result, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the second effect sub-rotating accessory 190 can cooperate with the first effect sub-rotating accessory 180 having the petal portion 172L. In this embodiment, it is possible to implement a big or small effect for notifying the number of round games obtained when a jackpot is won in a winning lottery and the presence or absence of a holding group.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the main rotating accessory for presentation 170 is provided with a plurality of petal portions 172 rotatable around a rotating shaft portion 171, and is one of the plurality of petal portions 172. The flower petal portion 172L is provided with a magnifying lens LZ so that the high brightness portion HB included in the predetermined image displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 can be visually recognized. can switch to Rotating bodies 182 and 192 provided in each sub rotating accessory 180 for presentation are configured to be rotatable, and when the game board 30 is viewed from the front, the petal portion 172L of the main rotating accessory for presentation 170 is not seen through. A first possible position (see, eg, FIG. 626(a)) and a second position visible through petal portion 172L (see, eg, FIG. 626(b), FIG. 627, FIG. 628, or FIG. 629). can be displaced between Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the one-shot announcement effect, the high brightness portion HB is in the first state in which the high brightness portion HB can be visually recognized through the magnifying lens LZ of the rotating petal portion 172L, and in the big or small effect, the rotating petal portion By moving the rotating bodies 182 and 192 provided in each sub-rotating accessory 180 for effect to the back side of 172L, the rotating body 182 or the rotating body 192 blocks the light from the high brightness part HB and rotates. A second state is entered in which the body 182 or the rotating body 192 is visible through the magnifying lens LZ of the petal portion 172L. For this reason, when the first state is brought about by the one-shot notification performance, the winning lottery result is a big win before the combination of symbols becomes a predetermined combination corresponding to the big win, as described above. A player can be notified of something. In addition, when the second state is reached by the big or small effect, as described above, it is determined whether the number of acquired round games is 16 or 8, and whether there is a holding group. Players can be notified of this. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player is given the joy of winning the jackpot by the result of winning lottery before the combination of symbols becomes a predetermined combination corresponding to winning the jackpot by the one-shot notification effect. In addition to being able to do it, there is a little expectation and a little bit of expectation such as whether the number of round games acquired in the case of winning a jackpot in the winning lottery will be 16 or 8, and whether there will be a pending group due to the big or small production. A feeling of discouragement can be imparted to the player. As a result, with the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the game board 30 is viewed from the front, the outer shape of the rotating bodies 182 and 192 provided in the sub-rotating accessories 180 and 190 for effect is the same as that of the rotating bodies 182 and 192. Since the points are symmetrical with respect to the center of , the beauty of the rotating bodies 182 and 192 can be enhanced when the sub-rotary accessories for production 180 and 190 are rotated. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the petal portion 172 provided in the production main rotating accessory 170 and the rotors 182 and 192 provided in the producing sub rotating accessories 180 and 190 are formed of a resin material. Since these parts are formed easily, the degree of freedom in the shape of these parts is high. For this reason, the production using the production main rotary accessory 170 and the production sub-rotary accessories 180 and 190 having these parts, that is, the one-shot announcement production and the big or small production should have a higher impact. can be done. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the rotating shaft portion 171 provided in the effect main rotary accessory 170 is arranged along the direction perpendicular to the surface of the game board 30, It is possible to rotate the petal portion 172 on a parallel plane with high accuracy. Therefore, it is easy to increase the outer diameter of the production main rotary accessory 170, and as a result, the one-shot announcement production and the big or small production can be made gorgeous. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

In addition, conventionally known rotating accessories have a light-emitting part, and can perform an effect of simply rotating while the light-emitting part emits light. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the main rotating accessory for effect 170, which is an example of the first rotating body, and the petal portion 172L of the main rotating accessory for effect 170 are illuminated from the back side. Since the design display device 41 that functions as a light source is independent from the design display device 41, there is a one-shot announcement performance in which the main rotating accessory for production 170 rotates while the light source on the back side emits light, and the light source on the back side does not emit light. The main rotating accessory for presentation 170 and the sub rotating accessories for presentation 180, 190, which are examples of the second rotating body, are involved in the state, and the main rotating accessory for presentation 170 itself only mainly rotates. Both big or small production became feasible. In other words, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to realize various kinds of effects than before by making the rotating accessory and the light source independent. Moreover, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the symbol display device 41 functioning as the light source can perform variable display for notifying the result of the winning lottery and various effects such as character display. As a result, more efficient use of the device is possible.

<<13-5>> Various processes executed in the main controller:
Next, an example of specific control for executing the above-described processing in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described. The processing executed in the main controller 60 will be described first, and then the processing executed in the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

In order to advance the game of each game cycle, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing. These processes are described below. In addition to timer interrupt processing and normal processing, the MPU 62 executes NMI interrupt processing that is activated by the input of a power failure signal, but the description of these processing will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 631 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. As described above, the timer interrupt process is started periodically (for example, every 2 msec) by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 .

In step Sx0101, reading processing of various detection sensors 67a to 67e is executed. That is, it reads the states of the various detection sensors 67a to 67e connected to the main controller 60, determines the states of the sensors, and saves the detection information (entering ball detection information). After that, the process proceeds to step Sx0102.

At step Sx0102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . After that, the process proceeds to step Sx0103.

In step Sx0103, the values of the hit random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, electric accessory release counter C4, and variation type counter CS are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to each of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the electric accessory release counter C4, and the variation type counter CS, and each counter value reaches the maximum value. If so, they are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM64. After that, the process proceeds to step Sx0104. It should be noted that the fluctuation type counter CS updates its value in the normal processing (FIG. 635) described later.

In step Sx0104, ball entry processing for the starting opening accompanying the ball entering the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34 is executed. The details of the ball entry process for the start opening in step Sx0104 will be described later. After executing step Sx0104, the process proceeds to step Sx0105.

In step Sx0105, a through ball entry process associated with the ball entering the through gate 35 is executed. The details of the through ball entry process in step Sx0105 will be described later. After executing step Sx0105, the MPU 62 terminates the timer interrupt processing.

<Entering ball processing for the starting port>
Next, the ball entry process for the start opening will be described. The ball entry process for the starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (Fig. 631: Sx0104).

FIG. 632 is a flow chart showing ball entry processing for a start opening. In step Sx0201, it is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first starting port 33 whether or not the game ball has entered the first starting port 33 (starting ball). In step Sx0201, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the first start hole 33 (Sx0201: YES), the process proceeds to step Sx0202, and the prize ball for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls set command. After that, the process proceeds to step Sx0203.

In step Sx0203, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal that the game ball has entered the first starting hole 33 to the management control device on the game hall side. After that, the process proceeds to step Sx0204.

In step Sx0204, the value stored in the reserved number storage area of the first reservation area Ra is read out as the start reservation number RaN (hereinafter also referred to as the first start reservation number RaN), and the first start reservation number RaN will be described later. Set as a target for processing. The first start suspension number RaN indicates the number of suspensions based on the ball entering the first start hole 33 . After that, the process proceeds to step Sx0209.

In step Sx0201, if it is determined that the game ball has not entered the first start port 33 (Sx0201: NO), the process proceeds to step Sx0205, whether or not the game ball entered the second start port 34 is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second starting port 34 .

In step Sx0205, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34 (Sx0205: YES), the process proceeds to step Sx0206, and the prize ball for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls set command. After that, the process proceeds to step Sx0207. On the other hand, in step Sx0205, when it is determined that the game ball has not entered the second starting hole 34 (Sx0205: NO), the ball entering process for this starting hole ends.

In step Sx0207, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that the game ball has entered the second starting hole . After that, the process proceeds to step Sx0208.

In step Sx0208, the value stored in the reserved number storage area of the second reserved area Rb, that is, the number of reserved starts RbN (hereinafter, also referred to as the second reserved number of starts RbN) is read, and the second reserved number of starts RbN will be described later. Set as a target for processing. The second start suspension number RbN indicates the number of suspensions based on the ball entering the second start opening 34 . After that, the process proceeds to step Sx0209.

In step Sx0209, it is determined whether or not the number of start suspensions N (RaN or RbN) set in step Sx0204 or step Sx0208 is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment). In step Sx0209, if the number N of start suspensions is not less than the upper limit (Sx0209: NO), the ball-entering process for this start opening is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Sx0209, if the start pending number N is less than the upper limit (Sx0209: YES), proceed to step Sx0210, add 1 to the start pending number N of the corresponding reserved area, and then proceed to step Sx0211. , adds 1 to the value stored in the total pending number storage area (hereinafter referred to as the total pending number CRN). The total pending number CRN indicates the sum of the first pending start number RaN and the second pending start number RbN. After that, the process proceeds to step Sx0212.

In step Sx0212, each value of the hit random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fluctuation type counter CS updated in step Sx0103 (Fig. 631) is stored in the first of the free storage areas in the corresponding reservation area. Store in a storage area, that is, in a storage area corresponding to the pending number to which 1 is added in step Sx0210. Specifically, when the first start suspension number RaN is set as a processing target, each value of the winning random number counter C1, the big winning type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step Sx0103, It is stored in the first storage area of the empty storage areas of the first reservation area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start suspension number RaN to which 1 is added in step Sx0210. In addition, when the second start suspension number RbN is set as the processing target, each value of the winning random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step Sx0103 is set to the second suspension It is stored in the first memory area of the empty memory areas of the area Rb, ie, the memory area corresponding to the second start suspension number RbN to which 1 is added in step Sx0210. After executing step Sx0212, the process proceeds to step Sx0213.

In step Sx0213, a first determination process is executed. The first determination process is based on the information (holding information) of each value of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. This is a process of determining whether or not there is an occurrence, etc., before the hold information is subject to a winning lottery by the main controller 60 . The details of the first determination process will be described later. After executing step Sx0213, the process proceeds to step Sx0214.

In step Sx0214, a process of setting pending commands is executed. Concretely, the decision result of previous decision processing which is executed on the basis of the information of each value (pending information) of hit random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2 and reach random number counter C3 is set as a hold command.

The pending command indicates that the ball has entered the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34 and the judgment result (first judgment information) of the first judgment process based on the holding information acquired based on the entry, This is a command for causing the sub-side control device to confirm the pending information before the main control device 60 becomes a target of the winning lottery. The hold command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 635: step Sx0503) of the normal process, which will be described later.

Further, when the sound emission control device 90 receives a hold command transmitted based on the ball entering the first starting hole 33, the display in the first starting hole holding area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 is held. A command is sent to the display control device 100 to change the number to correspond to the increase in the number. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first start opening reservation region Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of reservations. On the other hand, when receiving the hold command transmitted based on the ball entering the second starting hole 34, the sound emission control device 90 holds the display in the second starting hole holding region Ds2 of the pattern display device 41. A command is sent to the display control device 100 to change the number to correspond to the increase in the number. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second start opening reservation region Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the increase in the number of reservations.

After executing step Sx0214, the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 terminates the ball-entering process for this starting opening.

<First determination process>
Next, the preceding determination processing will be described. The first determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 632: Sx0213) of the ball entry process for the starting opening.

FIG. 633 is a flowchart showing the first determination process. As described above, the first determination process, based on the pending information, determines the success or failure of the winning lottery, determines the type of big win, determines whether or not reach occurs, and the like. It is a process to be executed before becoming the target of

In step Sx0301, the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the storage area by the ball entering the starting hole in the ball entering process for the starting hole (FIG. 632) is grasped. After that, the process proceeds to step Sx0302, and the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery due to this ball entry is executed as a game round is determined. Specifically, the judgment result of the previous judgment process executed by the ball entry before the current ball entry is read from the corresponding storage area, and whether or not there is a probability variable jackpot that occurs before the winning lottery due to the current ball entry Also, the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery due to the current ball entry is executed as a game round is determined by grasping the presence or absence of winning in the falling lottery.

In step Sx0302, when it is determined that the lottery mode is the low-probability mode at the time when the winning lottery for the current ball entry is executed as a game round, (Sx0302: YES), the process proceeds to step Sx0303 to store the success/failure table. Refer to the success/failure table for the low-probability mode (FIG. 615(a)) stored in the area 63a. After that, the process proceeds to step Sx0305, and as a result of referring to the success/failure table for the low-probability mode, it is determined whether or not the value information of the winning random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to a big winning.

On the other hand, in step Sx0302, when it is determined that the lottery mode is not the low-probability mode at the time when the winning lottery due to the current ball entry is executed as a game round (Sx0302: NO), the process proceeds to step Sx0304 to store the success/failure table. Refer to the success/failure table for the high-probability mode (FIG. 615(b)) stored in the area 63a. After that, the process proceeds to step Sx0305, and as a result of referring to the success/failure table for the high-probability mode, it is determined whether or not the value of the hit random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to a big win.

In step Sx0305, if it is determined that the value of the winning random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to a big win (Sx0305: YES), the process proceeds to step Sx0306, and is stored in the storage area by the ball entering the start opening this time. The value of the jackpot type counter C2 is grasped. After that, the process proceeds to step Sx0307, and the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 63b is referred to. Specifically, when the jackpot type counter C2 to be sorted this time is obtained based on the ball entering the first start port 33, refer to the first start port sort table. , the distribution table for the second starting opening is referred to when the information is acquired based on the ball entering the second starting opening 34 . After executing step Sx0307, the process proceeds to step Sx0308.

In step Sx0308, as a result of referring to the allocation table, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot type counter C2 grasped this time corresponds to the variable probability jackpot. In step Sx0308, when it is determined that the variable probability jackpot is supported (Sx0308: YES), the process proceeds to step Sx0309, and the variable probability jackpot information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h. After that, the preceding determination process is terminated. On the other hand, in step Sx0308, when it is determined that it does not correspond to the variable probability jackpot (Sx0308: NO), the process proceeds to step Sx0310, and normal jackpot information is stored in the first determination processing result storage area 64h. After that, the process proceeds to step Sx0315.

In step Sx0305, if it is determined that the value of the hit random number counter C1 grasped this time does not correspond to a big hit (Sx0305: NO), proceed to step Sx0311, The value of the stored reach random number counter C3 is grasped. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sx0312, and the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c is referred to. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sx0313, and as a result of referring to the reach determination table, it is determined whether or not the value of the reach random number counter C3 grasped this time corresponds to the occurrence of reach.

In step Sx0313, when it is determined that reach occurrence is supported (Sx0313: YES), the process proceeds to step Sx0314, and reach occurrence information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h. After that, the process proceeds to step Sx0315. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sx0313 that the reach occurrence is not supported (Sx0313: NO), the process proceeds to step Sx0315.

In step Sx0315, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the storage area due to the ball entering the starting hole in the ball entering process for the starting hole (FIG. 632) is grasped. After that, it proceeds to step Sx0316, refers to the variation time table for big hit stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, and obtains variation time information corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS. After executing step Sx0316, the process proceeds to step Sx0317.

In step Sx0317, a variation pattern is identified from the variation time information acquired in step Sx0316, and the type of the identified variation pattern is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h. After executing step Sx0317, the current destination determination process ends.

<Entering ball processing for through>
Next, the ball entry processing for through will be described. The through ball entry process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (Fig. 631: Sx0105).

FIG. 634 is a flow chart showing the ball entry processing for through. At step Sx0401, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the through gate 35 or not. In step Sx0401, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the through gate 35 (Sx0401: YES), proceed to step Sx0402, whether the accessory reserved number SN is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) determine whether or not Incidentally, the accessory reserved number SN is a value indicating the number of balls entered into the through gate 35 reserved for performing the electric accessory open lottery. In this embodiment, the maximum value of the number SN of reserved accessory items is four. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sx0401 that the game ball has not entered the through gate 35 (Sx0401: NO), this through ball entering processing is terminated.

In step Sx0402, when it is determined that the reserved role number SN is less than the upper limit (less than 4) (Sx0402: YES), the process proceeds to step Sx0403, and 1 is added to the reserved role number SN. After that, the process proceeds to step Sx0404.

In step Sx0404, the value of the electric accessary product open counter C4 updated in step Sx0103 (FIG. 631) is stored in the first memory area among the empty memory areas of the electric work holding area 64d of the RAM64. After that, the through ball entry processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Sx0402, if it is determined that the value of the reserved accessory number SN is not less than the upper limit (Sx0402: NO), that is, if it is determined that the value of the reserved accessory number SN is equal to or greater than the upper limit, Without storing the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4, the ball entry processing for through is terminated.

<Normal processing>
Next, normal processing will be described. The normal process is a process started by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 when the power switch 88 is switched from off to on (hereinafter also referred to as "power on"). In normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed.

FIG. 635 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step Sx0501, start-up processing is executed. Specifically, initialization of each control device upon power-on, determination of validity of data stored in the RAM 64, and the like are executed. After that, the process proceeds to step Sx0502.

At step Sx0502, a startup command is set. The start-up command is a command for causing each sub-side control device to start a demonstration video when the power is turned on. After that, the process proceeds to step Sx0503.

In step Sx0503, output data such as the start-up command set in step Sx0502 and the command set in the timer interrupt processing or the previously executed normal processing are transmitted to each sub-side control device. Specifically, the presence or absence of the prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 70 . In addition, when commands related to effects such as start-up commands, variation commands, type commands, and hold commands are set, they are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . After executing step Sx0503, the process proceeds to step Sx0504.

In step Sx0504, the change type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the fluctuation type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . After that, the process proceeds to step Sx0505.

In step Sx0505, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step Sx0506. In step Sx0506, game round control processing for controlling the game in each game round is executed. In the game round control processing, a winning lottery, setting of variable display of symbols by the symbol display device 41, display control of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b, and the like are performed. Details of the game round control process will be described later. After executing step Sx0506, the process proceeds to step Sx0507.

At step Sx0507, a game state transition process is executed to shift the game state. By executing the game state transition process, the game state shifts to an opening/closing execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, and the like. Details of the game state transition processing will be described later. After that, the process proceeds to step Sx0508.

In step Sx0508, an electric support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 34a provided at the second starting port 34 is executed. In the electric role support process, it is determined whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a. The details of the electronic support process will be described later. After that, the process proceeds to step Sx0509.

In step Sx0509, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has passed since the start of the current normal processing (strictly speaking, the start of the command output processing in step Sx0503). That is, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the next normal process. In step Sx0509, if it is determined that the predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed since the start of the normal processing this time (Sx0509: NO), in steps Sx0510 and Sx0511, until the execution timing of the next normal processing Within the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated. Specifically, in step Sx0510, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . Further, in step Sx0511, 1 is added to the fluctuation type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sx0509 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has elapsed since the start of the normal processing this time (Sx0509: YES), the process returns to step Sx0503, and each process from step Sx0503 to step Sx0508 is performed. Execute.

Since the execution time of each process from step Sx0503 to step Sx0508 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using the remaining time, the values of these counters can be randomly updated.

<Game Round Control Processing>
Next, game round control processing will be described. The game round control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of normal process (Fig. 635: Sx0506).

FIG. 636 is a flow chart showing game round control processing. In step Sx0601, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON when the game state is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode in the later-described game state transition processing, and turned OFF when the opening/closing execution mode is ended in the game state transition processing.

At step Sx0601, when it is determined that the open/close execution mode is in progress (Sx0601: YES), this game round control process is terminated without executing any of the processes after step Sx0602. That is, when the open/close execution mode is in progress, the game cycle is not started regardless of whether or not a ball is entered into the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34 . On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sx0601 that the open/close execution mode is not in progress (Sx0601: NO), the process proceeds to step Sx0602.

In step Sx0602, it is determined whether or not the special figure unit 37 is being displayed in a variable manner. Specifically, it is determined whether or not one of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b provided in the special figure unit 37 is in the process of variable display. This determination is made by determining whether or not the special figure variation displaying flag in the special figure variation displaying flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The special figure variable display flag is turned ON when one of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b is to start the variable display, and is turned OFF when the variable display is finished.

In step Sx0602, when it is determined that the special figure unit 37 is not displayed in a variable manner (Sx0602: NO), the process proceeds to step Sx0603.

In step Sx0603, a variation start process for starting the variation display in the special figure unit 37 and the variation display in the symbol display device 41 is executed. The details of the fluctuation start process will be described later. After executing step Sx0603, this game round control process is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Sx0602, when it is determined that the special figure unit 37 is in the process of variable display (Sx0602: YES), the process proceeds to step Sx0604.

In step Sx0604, a variation end process for ending the variation display in the special figure unit 37 and the variation display in the symbol display device 41 is executed. The details of the fluctuation end processing will be described later. After executing step Sx0604, this game round control process is terminated.

<Variation start processing>
Next, fluctuation start processing will be described. The fluctuation start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game round control process (Fig. 636: Sx0603).

FIG. 637 is a flowchart showing fluctuation start processing. In step Sx0701, it is determined whether or not the total pending number CRN exceeds "0". When the total pending number CRN is less than or equal to "0", it means that the pending start number for both the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 is "0". Therefore, when it is determined in step Sx0701 that the total number of reserved cards CRN is equal to or less than "0" (Sx0701: NO), this fluctuation start process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sx0701 that the total pending number CRN exceeds "0" (Sx0701: YES), the process proceeds to step Sx0702.

In step Sx0702, hold information shift processing for setting the hold information stored in the first reserve area Ra or the second reserve area Rb to the state after the start of fluctuation is executed, and the process proceeds to step Sx0703. Details of the pending information shift process will be described later.

In step Sx0703, a win determination process including a process when a big win is won in a win lottery is performed. The details of the hit determination process will be described later. After executing step Sx0703, the process proceeds to step Sx0704.

In step Sx0704, variable time setting processing is executed. The variable time setting process is for setting the variable time, which is the time required for the current game round in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b, based on the presence or absence of a big hit, the presence or absence of reach, and the like. is the processing of Details of the variable time setting process will be described later. After executing step Sx0704, the process proceeds to step Sx0705.

At step Sx0705, a variation command is set. The command for variation includes whether the current game cycle is related to the hold information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33, or acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 34. It contains information indicating whether or not it relates to hold information, as well as information on the presence or absence of reach occurrence and information on the variable time set in step Sx0706. After executing step Sx0705, the process proceeds to step Sx0706.

At step Sx0706, a type command is set. The type command includes information on the presence or absence of a big hit and the result of distribution determination. That is, the type command includes 16R probability variable jackpot information, 8R probability variable jackpot information, 16R normal jackpot information, 8R normal jackpot information, or loss result information about winning lottery as information on the jackpot type. is

The variation command and type command set at steps Sx0705 and Sx0706 are sent to the sound emission control device 90 at step Sx0503 in the normal process (FIG. 635). The sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect in the game round based on the received variation command and the type command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the effect is executed. After executing step Sx0706, the process proceeds to step Sx0707.

In step Sx0707, the symbol display portion corresponding to the current game cycle out of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b is caused to start the variable display of symbols. Specifically, when the second symbol display portion flag of the RAM 64 is not ON, the first symbol display portion 37a is specified as the symbol display portion corresponding to the current game round, and the variable display is started, When the second pattern display portion flag is ON, the second pattern display portion 37b is specified as the pattern display portion corresponding to the current game round, and the variable display is started. After executing step Sx0707, the process proceeds to step Sx0708.

In step Sx0708, the special figure variation display flag stored in the special figure variation display flag storage area in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned ON. After executing step Sx0708, this fluctuation start processing is terminated.

<Holding information shift processing>
Next, the pending information shift process will be described. The hold information shift process is executed by MPU 62 of main controller 60 as a subroutine of change start process (Fig. 637: Sx0702).

FIG. 638 is a flowchart showing pending information shift processing. In step Sx0801, it is determined whether or not the reservation area to be processed for execution of the reservation information shift process is the first reservation area Ra. Specifically, the first stored hold information (hold information) is the first stored pending information (stored in the first area of the second pending area Rb) among the pending information stored chronologically in the second pending area Rb (Fig. 614). is stored in the reservation area prior to the reservation information), the reservation area to be processed is determined to be the first reservation area Ra. On the other hand, the first reservation information stored chronologically in the second reservation area Rb than the first reservation information stored chronologically in the first reservation area Ra If the stored reservation information is stored in the reservation area first, the reservation area to be processed is determined to be the second reservation area Rb. That is, by executing the process of step Sx0801, the reservation information can be processed in the order stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb.

In step Sx0801, when it is determined that the reservation area to be processed is the first reservation area Ra (step Sx0801: YES), reservation information shift processing for the first reservation area in steps Sx0802 to Sx0807 is executed. On the other hand, in step Sx0801, if it is determined that the processing target reservation area is not the first reservation area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the processing target reservation area is the second reservation area Rb (step Sx0801: NO ), the reservation information shift processing for the second reservation area of steps Sx0808 to Sx0813 is executed.

In step Sx0802, after subtracting 1 from the first start-up reservation number RaN in the first reservation area Ra, the process proceeds to step Sx0803 to subtract 1 from the total reservation number CRN. After that, the process proceeds to step Sx0804. At step Sx0804, the data stored in the first area of the first reservation area Ra is moved to the execution area AE. After that, the process proceeds to step Sx0805.

In step Sx0805, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first reservation area Ra is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After executing step Sx0805, the process proceeds to step Sx0806.

In step Sx0806, if the second pattern display portion flag in the various flag storage area 64g is ON, the flag is turned OFF, and if not ON, the state is maintained. The second pattern display portion flag is information for specifying which of the first pattern display portion 37a and the second pattern display portion 37b is the target for starting the variable display this time. After that, the process proceeds to step Sx0807.

In step Sx0807, a shift command is set. The shift time command is a command including information for making the sound emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, recognize that the data in the reserved area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63, information indicating that the reservation area to which the data is to be shifted this time corresponds to the first reservation area Ra, that is, the information corresponding to the first start port 33 A shift-time command including information indicating that the shift-time command is included is selected, and the selected shift-time command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . After that, the hold information shift process is terminated. The shift command set in step Sx0807 is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step Sx0503 of the normal process (FIG. 635).

In step Sx0801, if it is determined that the reservation area to be processed is not the first reservation area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the reservation area to be processed is the second reservation area Rb (Sx0801: NO), step Proceed to Sx0808.

In step Sx0808, 1 is subtracted from the second starting reservation quantity RbN in the second reservation area Rb. After that, the process proceeds to step Sx0809. In step Sx0809, 1 is subtracted from the total pending number CRN, and the process proceeds to step Sx0810 to move the data stored in the first area of the second pending area Rb to the execution area AE. After that, the process proceeds to step Sx0811.

In step Sx0811, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second reservation area Rb is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After executing step Sx0811, the process proceeds to step Sx0812.

In step Sx0812, if the second pattern display flag in the various flag storage area 64g is not ON, the flag is turned ON, and if it is ON, the state is maintained. After that, the process proceeds to step Sx0813.

In step Sx0813, a shift command is set. The shift time command is a command including information for making the sound emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, recognize that the data in the reserved area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63, the information indicating that the reservation area to which the data is to be shifted this time corresponds to the second reservation area Rb, that is, the information corresponding to the second start port 34 A shift-time command including information indicating that the shift-time command is included is selected, and the selected shift-time command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . After that, the hold information shift process is terminated.

The shift command set in step Sx0813 is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step Sx0503 of the normal process (FIG. 635). The sound emission control device 90, based on the received shift time command, displays a command for changing the display in the second start opening reservation region Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations. Send to 100. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second start opening reservation region Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations.

<Hit determination processing>
Next, hit determination processing will be described. The hit determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variation start process (Fig. 637: Sx0703).

FIG. 639 is a flowchart showing hit determination processing. In step Sx0901, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

In step Sx0901, if it is determined that the mode is the high probability mode (Sx0901: YES), the process proceeds to step Sx0902, and the success/failure determination is performed by referring to the success/failure table for the high probability mode. Specifically, whether or not the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the jackpot winning in the success/failure table for the high probability mode shown in FIG. 615(b). determine whether After that, the process proceeds to step Sx0904.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sx0901 that the mode is not the high-probability mode (Sx0901: NO), the process advances to step Sx0903, and the success/failure determination is performed by referring to the success/failure table for the low-probability mode. Specifically, whether or not the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as a jackpot winning in the success/failure table for the low probability mode shown in FIG. 615(a). determine whether After that, the process proceeds to step Sx0904.

In step Sx0904, it is determined whether or not the result of the success/fail determination (hit lottery) in step Sx0902 or step Sx0903 is a big hit. In step Sx0904, when the result of the winning/failure determination is a jackpot winning (Sx0904: YES), the process proceeds to step Sx0905.

At step Sx0905, it is determined whether or not the second pattern display flag of the RAM 64 is ON. In step Sx0905, if it is determined that the second symbol display flag is not ON (Sx0905: NO), proceed to step Sx0906 and refer to the distribution table for the first start port (see FIG. 616(a)). and make a distribution judgment. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is any of the numerical range of the 16R probability variable jackpot, the numerical range of the 8R probability variable jackpot, the numerical range of the 16R normal jackpot, and the numerical range of the 8R normal jackpot. determine whether it is contained in

On the other hand, in step Sx0905, when it is determined that the second pattern display flag is ON (Sx0905: YES), the process proceeds to step Sx0907, and the distribution table for the second starting port (see FIG. 616(b)) Refer to to make a distribution judgment. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in the numeric range of the 16R probability variable jackpot or the numeric range of the 8R normal jackpot. After executing the process of step Sx0906 or step Sx0907, the process proceeds to step Sx0908.

In step Sx0908, a flag (jackpot flag) corresponding to the type of jackpot distributed in step Sx0906 or step Sx0907 is turned ON. Specifically, when it is a 16R probability variable jackpot, the 16R probability variable jackpot flag is turned ON, when it is an 8R probability variable jackpot, the 8R probability variable jackpot flag is turned ON, and when it is a 16R normal jackpot, the 16R normal jackpot flag is turned on. When it is 8R normal jackpot, the 8R normal jackpot flag is turned ON. After executing step Sx0908, the process proceeds to step Sx0909.

In step Sx0909, the process of setting the stop result for the jackpot is executed. Specifically, in the current game turn in which the big win is won, it is set whether the variable display is to be ended in the state in which the stop result is displayed in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b. This is a process for Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63f (FIG. 613), stop result data corresponding to the type of jackpot sorted in step Sx0906 or step Sx0907 can be obtained. Address information is acquired, and the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After executing step Sx0909, the hit determination process ends.

In step Sx0904, if the result of the winning lottery in step Sx0902 or step Sx0903 is not a big win (Sx0904: NO), proceed to step Sx0910, refer to the reach determination table, and reach occurs in the game round. or not. Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is set as reach occurrence in the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c (Fig. 613). Determines whether or not it matches the value After that, the process proceeds to step Sx0911.

In step Sx0911, if the result of reach determination in step Sx0910 indicates that reach occurs in the game round (Sx0911: YES), the process proceeds to step Sx0912, and the reach occurrence flag is turned ON. Specifically, the reach occurrence flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned ON. After executing step Sx0912, the process proceeds to step Sx0913.

On the other hand, in step Sx0911, if the result of reach determination in step Sx0910 is that reach does not occur in the game round (Sx0911: NO), the process proceeds to step Sx0913 without executing step Sx0912.

In step Sx0913, a process of setting a stop result for failure is executed. Specifically, in the current game turn that results in a loss, the variable display is set to end in a state in which the stop result is displayed in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b. processing. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for failure in the stop result table storage area 63f, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is obtained. , the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After executing step Sx0913, the hit determination process ends.

<Variation time setting process>
Next, the variable time setting process will be described. The variable time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variable start process (Fig. 637: Sx0704).

FIG. 640 is a flowchart showing variable time setting processing. In step Sx1001, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired. After that, the process proceeds to step Sx1002.

In step Sx1002, a process of specifying a fluctuation time table is executed. The fluctuation time table is data in tabular form having data elements of fluctuation time information (variation time information), which is the time from when the pattern starts to stop until it stops, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS. In the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, various types of variable time tables are stored according to the game state, the presence or absence of the jackpot and time saving provision, and the presence or absence of reach occurrence. In step Sx1002, one variable time table is identified from these variable time tables. Specifically, based on the high probability mode flag and the high frequency support mode flag, the current gaming state is low probability low support state, high probability high support state, low probability high support state, high probability low support state It is determined whether it is in any of the above, the result of the determination, the result of the determination of whether or not there is a jackpot or time saving, and the determination result of the reach determination that determines whether or not the reach occurs. One variable time table is specified from the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 based on the above. After executing step Sx1002, the process proceeds to step Sx1003.

In step Sx1003, by referring to the fluctuation time table specified in step Sx1002, fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS obtained in step Sx1001 is obtained. After executing step Sx1003, the process proceeds to step Sx1004.

In step Sx1004, the variable time information acquired in step Sx1003 is set in variable time counter areas provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. FIG. After that, the variable time setting process is terminated.

<Variation end processing>
Next, the fluctuation end processing will be described. The fluctuation end process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game round control process (Fig. 636: Sx0604).

FIG. 641 is a flowchart showing fluctuation end processing. In step Sx1101, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the current game round has elapsed. As described above, the variation time is the time from when the symbol row starts to vary until all the symbol rows stop, and is part of the unit game time. Specifically, in step Sx1101, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable time information stored in the variable time counter area (various counter area 64f) of the RAM 64 has become "0". The value of the variable time information is set in the aforementioned variable time setting process (FIG. 640). The value of this set variable time information is decremented by 1 each time timer interrupt processing is started.

If it is determined in step Sx1101 that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (Sx1101: NO), this fluctuation ending process is ended.

In step Sx1101, when it is determined that the variation time has passed (Sx1101: YES), the process proceeds to step Sx1102, and the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b correspond to the current game turn. A process for ending the variation of the symbols in the symbol display section is performed. Subsequently, in step Sx1103, the special figure variation display flag stored in the special figure variation display flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned OFF. After executing step Sx1103, the process proceeds to step Sx1104.

In step Sx1104, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a big win. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the 16R probability variable jackpot flag, 8R probability variable jackpot flag, 16R normal jackpot flag, and 8R normal jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is ON. At step Sx1104, none of the above flags is ON, that is, when it is determined that the win lottery win/fail result for the current game round is not a big win (Sx1104: NO), the process proceeds to step Sx1105.

In step Sx1105, it is determined whether or not the support mode is the high frequency support mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

At step Sx1105, when it is determined that the high-frequency support mode flag is ON (Sx1105: YES), the process proceeds to step Sx1106 to determine whether or not the value of the number-of-games counter PNC exceeds zero. In step Sx1106, when it is determined that the value of the number-of-games counter PNC exceeds 0 (Sx1106: YES), the process proceeds to step Sx1107, and 1 is subtracted from the value of the number-of-games counter PNC. After executing step Sx1107, the process proceeds to step Sx1108. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sx1106 that the value of the number-of-games counter PNC is 0 or less (Sx1106: NO), the process proceeds to step Sx1108 without executing step Sx1107.

In step Sx1108, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

At step Sx1108, when it is determined that the high probability mode flag is not ON (Sx1108: NO), the process proceeds to step Sx1109 to determine whether or not the value of the number-of-games counter PNC exceeds zero.

If it is determined in step Sx1109 that the value of the number-of-games counter PNC does not exceed 0 (step Sx1109: NO), the process proceeds to step Sx1110 to turn off the high frequency support mode flag. After step Sx1110 is executed, this variable time ending process is ended.

If it is determined that the high probability mode flag is ON in step Sx1108 (Sx1108: YES), or if it is determined that the value of the game number counter PNC is greater than 0 in step Sx1109 (step Sx1109: YES) , the variable time ending process ends without executing step Sx1110. If it is determined at step Sx1105 that the high-frequency support mode flag is not ON (Sx1105: NO), this variable time ending process is terminated without executing steps Sx106 to Sx1110.

On the other hand, in step Sx1104, any one of the 16R probability variable jackpot flag, 8R probability variable jackpot flag, 16R normal jackpot flag, and 8R normal jackpot flag is ON. is determined to be a big hit (Sx1104: YES), the process proceeds to step Sx1111, and the opening/closing execution mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned ON. After executing step Sx1111, the process proceeds to step Sx1112. In step S1112, the value of the winning random number counter C1 included in the pending information left in the pending information storage area 64b is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot winning in the remaining pending information. In step Sx1112, when it is determined that there is a jackpot winning in the remaining pending information (Sx1112: YES), the process proceeds to step Sx1113 to set a command with a pending run. The command for the existence of pending ream is used to make the sound emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub-side, recognize that there is a jackpot winning in the reserving information left in the reserving information storage area 64b, that is, that there is a reserving ream. command. After step Sx1113 is executed, this variable time ending process is terminated. On the other hand, in step Sx1112, when it is determined that there is no jackpot winning in the remaining hold information (Sx1112: NO), the process proceeds to step Sx1114 to set a no hold ream command. The no-hold-run command is used to make the sound emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub-side, recognize that there is no jackpot winning in the hold information left in the hold information storage area 64b, that is, that there is no hold run. command. After step Sx1114 is executed, this variable time ending process is terminated.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the game state transition processing will be explained. The game state transition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of normal process (Fig. 635: Sx0507).

FIG. 642 is a flowchart showing game state transition processing. In step Sx1201, it is determined whether or not the ending period flag is ON. The ending period flag is turned ON at the end of the big winning opening opening/closing process period (at the start of the ending period) in the opening/closing execution mode, and turned OFF at the end of the ending period. The ending period is a period for executing the ending effect in the opening/closing execution mode.

If it is determined in step Sx1201 that the ending period flag is not ON (Sx1201: NO), the process advances to step Sx1202 to determine whether or not the opening/closing process period flag is ON. The opening/closing process period flag is turned ON at the timing when the opening period ends in the opening/closing execution mode and the big winning opening opening/closing process period, which is the period during which the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is executed, starts. , is turned off at the timing when the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 36b ends.

If it is determined in step Sx1202 that the opening/closing process period flag is not ON (Sx1202: NO), the process advances to step Sx1203 to determine whether or not the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is turned ON at the start of the opening period and turned OFF at the end of the opening period.

If it is determined in step Sx1203 that the opening period flag is not ON (Sx1203: NO), the process advances to step Sx1204 to determine whether or not the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step Sx1204 that the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON (Sx1204: YES), the process proceeds to step Sx1205. On the other hand, in step Sx1204, when it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode flag is OFF (Sx1204: NO), this game state transition processing is terminated as it is.

At step Sx1205, the high probability mode flag is turned off. After that, the process proceeds to step Sx1206. At step Sx1206, the high frequency support mode flag is turned off. After that, the process proceeds to step Sx1207.

In step Sx1207, an opening/closing scenario setting process for setting an opening/closing scenario is executed. The opening/closing scenario defines the pattern of the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 36b in the round game. It is a program in which conditions for shifting the opening/closing door 36b from the open state to the closed state (hereinafter also referred to as "closed conditions") are recorded. The opening/closing scenario is stored in the opening/closing scenario storage area 63h of the ROM 63.

The opening conditions are, for example, as follows.
- The current state of the pachinko machine 10 is the timing for starting each round game in the open/close execution mode.
When one of the above items is established, the opening/closing door 36b shifts from the closed state to the open state.

Closing conditions are, for example, as follows.
- The elapsed time from the start of each round game exceeds a predetermined upper limit duration (for example, 15 seconds).
- The number of game balls entered into the big winning hole 36a after starting each round game exceeds a predetermined upper limit number.
When either one of the above two items is established, the opening/closing door 36b shifts from the open state to the closed state.

After executing step Sx1207, the process advances to step Sx1208 described above.

In step Sx1208, an opening time setting process is executed. The opening time setting process is a process of setting the length of time of the opening period (hereinafter also referred to as opening time) in the open/close execution mode. In this embodiment, the opening time of the same fixed length is set in each opening period. Specifically, "3000" (ie, 6 sec) is set in the third timer counter area T3 that determines the opening time. The third timer counter area T3 is provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM64. After executing step Sx1208, the process proceeds to step Sx1209.

At step Sx1209, an opening command is set. The set opening command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 at step Sx0503 in the normal process (FIG. 635). This opening command includes information on the set opening time and the number of rounds of the current open/close execution mode. A sound emission control device 90 determines the contents of performance corresponding to the opening time and the period of opening/closing processing of the big winning opening based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents are executed. After executing step Sx1209, the process advances to step Sx1210 to turn on the opening period flag. After that, the game state transition processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sx1203 that the opening period flag is ON (Sx1203: YES), the process proceeds to step Sx1211.

In step Sx1211, it is determined whether or not the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the third timer counter area T3 is "0". If it is determined in step Sx1211 that the opening period has ended (Sx1211: YES), the process advances to step Sx1212 to turn off the opening period flag. After that, the process proceeds to step Sx1213.

In step Sx1213, round display start processing for notifying the type of the current open/close execution mode is executed. Specifically, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 is checked. Based on the confirmed address information, stop result data corresponding to the address information is specified from among the stop result data group stored in the ROM 63, and the content of the number of rounds is determined from the specified stop result data. confirm. After that, the content of the confirmed number of rounds is output to the round display section 39 in the main display section 45 . As a result, the round display section 39 displays the round information related to the output. After executing step Sx1213, the process proceeds to step Sx1214.

In step Sx1214, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned ON. In subsequent step Sx1215, an opening/closing process start command is set. The opening/closing process start command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the opening/closing process period has started. The opening/closing process start command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 635: step Sx0503) of the normal process. After executing step Sx1215, the game state transition processing is terminated.

In step Sx1202, when it is determined that the opening/closing process period flag is ON (Sx1202: YES), the process proceeds to step Sx1216 to execute the big winning opening opening/closing process. The special prize opening opening/closing process will be described later. After executing step Sx1216, the process proceeds to step Sx1217.

In step Sx1217, it is determined whether or not the big winning opening opening/closing process has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the big winning opening opening/closing process has ended depending on whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 for counting the number of times the opening/closing door 36b is opened is "0". do. In step Sx1217, when it is determined that the big winning opening opening/closing process has ended (Sx1217: YES), the process proceeds to step Sx1218. On the other hand, in step Sx1217, when it is determined that the big winning opening opening/closing process has not ended (Sx1217: NO), this game state transition process ends.

In step Sx1218, the open/close processing period flag is turned off, and then the process proceeds to step Sx1219.

In step Sx1219, round display end processing is executed. In this process, the display control of the round display portion 39 in the main display portion 45 is terminated so that the round display portion 39 is turned off. After executing step Sx1219, the process proceeds to step Sx1220.

In step Sx1220, an ending time setting process is executed. The ending time setting process is a process of setting the length of time of the ending period (hereinafter also referred to as ending time) in the open/close execution mode. In this embodiment, the ending time of the same constant length is set for each ending period. Specifically, "3000" (ie, 6 sec) is set in the fourth timer counter area T4 that determines the ending time. The fourth timer counter area T4 is provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM64. After executing step Sx1220, the process proceeds to step Sx1221.

In step Sx1221, an ending command is set. This set ending command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step Sx0503 in the normal process (FIG. 635). Upon receiving the ending command, the sound emission control device 90 terminates the effect corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode. After executing step Sx1221, the process proceeds to step Sx1222.

In step Sx1222, the ending period flag is turned ON. After that, the game state transition processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sx1201 that the ending period flag is ON (Sx1201: YES), the process proceeds to step Sx1223.

In step Sx1223, it is determined whether or not the ending period has ended. Specifically, in the ending time setting process (Sx1220), it is determined whether or not the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0". When it is determined in step Sx1220 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0" (Sx1223: YES), the process proceeds to step Sx1224.

At step Sx1224, the ending period flag is turned OFF. After that, the process advances to step Sx1225 to execute transition processing at the end of the ending period. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes of game rounds after the end of the current ending period. Details of the transition processing at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing step Sx1225, the process advances to step Sx1226 to turn off the opening/closing execution mode flag. After executing step Sx1226, the process proceeds to step Sx1227.

In step Sx1227, it is determined whether or not the total pending number CRN is "0". When the total pending number CRN is "0", it means that the start pending number is "0" for both the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34. FIG. If it is determined in step Sx1227 that the total pending number CRN is "0" (Sx1227: YES), the process proceeds to step Sx1228.

In step Sx1228, a customer waiting command is set. The customer waiting command is used to make the sound emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, recognize that no hold information is stored in the hold information storage area 64b at the time when the pattern variation (game round) ends. is a command that contains information about This set customer waiting command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step Sx1228 in the normal process (FIG. 635). After executing step Sx1228, this game round control process is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Sx1227, when it is determined that the total number of reserved cards CRN is not "0" (Sx1227: NO), this game round control process is ended. Also, in step Sx1223, when it is determined that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is not "0" (Sx1223: NO), this game state transition processing is ended as it is.

<Grand Prize Opening/Closing Process>
Next, the special winning opening opening/closing process will be described. The big winning opening opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (Fig. 642: Sx1216).

FIG. 643 is a flowchart showing the big winning opening opening/closing process. At step Sx1301, it is determined whether or not the door 36b is open. Specifically, the determination is made based on the drive state of the variable winning drive section 36c. If it is determined in step Sx1301 that the opening/closing door 36b is not open (Sx1301: NO), the process proceeds to step Sx1302.

In step Sx1302, it is determined whether or not the conditions for opening the opening/closing door 36b are met. Specifically, the opening/closing scenario set by the opening/closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether or not it is time to open the opening/closing door 36b. If it is determined in step Sx1302 that the condition for opening the opening/closing door 36b is satisfied (Sx1302: YES), the process proceeds to step Sx1303.

In step Sx1303, the opening/closing door 36b is opened. After that, the process proceeds to step Sx1304.

In step Sx1304, a door opening command is set. The opening/closing door open command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the opening/closing door 36b has been opened. The opening/closing door open command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 635: step Sx0503) of the normal process. After executing step Sx1304, the big winning opening opening/closing process ends.

When it is determined in step Sx1302 that the condition for opening the opening/closing door 36b is not established (Sx1302: NO), the big winning opening opening/closing process is terminated without executing steps Sx1303 and Sx1304.

If it is determined in step Sx1301 that the open/close door 36b is open (Sx1301: YES), the process proceeds to step Sx1305.

In step Sx1305, it is determined whether or not the condition for closing the door 36b is satisfied. Specifically, the opening/closing scenario set by the opening/closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether or not it is time to close the opening/closing door 36b. If it is determined in step Sx1305 that the closing condition for the opening/closing door 36b is satisfied (Sx1305: YES), the process proceeds to step Sx1306.

In step Sx1306, the opening/closing door 36b is closed. After that, the process proceeds to step Sx1307.

In step Sx1307, an opening/closing door closing command is set. The open/close door closing command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the open/close door 36b is closed. The open/close door closing command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 635: step Sx0503) of the normal process. After executing step Sx1307, the big winning opening opening/closing process is ended.

When it is determined in step Sx1305 that the closing condition of the opening/closing door 36b is not satisfied (Sx1305: NO), the big winning opening opening/closing process is terminated without executing steps Sx1306 and Sx1307.

<Transition processing at the end of the ending period>
Next, transition processing at the end of the ending period will be described. The transition process at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (Fig. 642: Sx1225).

FIG. 644 is a flow chart showing transition processing at the end of the ending period. In step Sx1401, it is determined whether or not the flag corresponding to the probability variable jackpot in the jackpot flag is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the 16R probability variable jackpot flag or the 8R probability variable jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is ON.

In step Sx1401, when it is determined that the 16R probability variable jackpot flag or the 8R probability variable jackpot flag of RAM64 is ON (Sx1401: YES), the process proceeds to step Sx1402, one of the 16R probability variable jackpot flag and the 8R probability variable jackpot flag of RAM64 The ON flag is turned OFF. After executing step Sx1402, the process proceeds to step Sx1403.

At step Sx1403, the high-probability mode flag is turned ON, and then the process advances to step Sx1404 to turn the high-frequency support mode flag ON. As a result, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the game state shifts to a game state in which the lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode. After that, the process proceeds to step Sx1405.

In step Sx1405, 100 is set to the number-of-games counter PNC provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM64. The value set in the number-of-games counter PNC is a value indicating the number of games when the number of games is limited and the high-frequency support mode is executed. After that, the process proceeds to step Sx1406.

In step Sx1406, a high-probability mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the lottery mode is the high-probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. . After that, the process proceeds to step Sx1411.

On the other hand, in step Sx1401, when it is determined that the 16R probability variable jackpot flag and the 8R probability variable jackpot flag of the RAM64 are not ON (Sx1401: NO), the process proceeds to step Sx1407, and the 16R normal jackpot flag and the 8R normal jackpot flag of the RAM64 are turned OFF. do. After that, the process proceeds to step Sx1408.

At step Sx1408, after turning on the high-frequency support mode flag, the process proceeds to step Sx1409, and 100 is set to the number-of-games counter PNC provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. FIG. After that, the process proceeds to step Sx1410.

In step Sx1410, a low-probability mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the lottery mode is the low-probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. . After that, the process proceeds to step Sx1411.

In step Sx1411, a high-frequency support mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. set. After that, the transition processing at the end of the ending period ends.

<Electronic support processing>
Next, the processing for electric support will be described. The electric service support process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (Fig. 635: Sx0508).

FIG. 645 is a flowchart showing processing for electric support. In step Sx1501, it is determined whether or not it is being supported. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the supported flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The under-support flag is a flag that is turned ON when the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is to be opened, and is turned OFF when it is to be returned to the closed state. If it is determined in step Sx1501 that the supported flag is not ON (Sx1501: NO), the process proceeds to step Sx1502.

At step Sx1502, it is determined whether or not the support winning flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The support winning flag is turned ON when the electric accessary product open lottery for determining whether or not to open the electric accessary product 34a is won in the open state, and is turned OFF when the supporting flag is ON. is. If it is determined in step Sx1502 that the support winning flag is not ON (Sx1502: NO), the process proceeds to step Sx1503.

At step Sx1503, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, every 2 msec.

If it is determined in step Sx1503 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sx1503: NO), the electronic support process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sx1503: YES), the process proceeds to step Sx1504.

In step Sx1504, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the variable display of symbols in the general pattern unit . If it is determined in step Sx1504 that it is time to end the variable display (Sx1504: YES), the process advances to step Sx1505 to set the off display, and then the electronic support process ends. By setting the deviation display, the variable display of the symbols in the general pattern unit 38 is terminated while the deviation display is stopped. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sx1504 that it is not the end timing of the variable display (Sx1504: NO), the process proceeds to step Sx1506.

In step Sx1506, it is determined whether or not the value of the reserved accessory number SN is greater than "0". In step Sx1506, when it is determined that the value of the reserved accessory number SN is "0" (Sx1506: NO), the electronic support process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sx1506 that the value of the reserved accessory number SN is larger than "0" (Sx1506: YES), the process proceeds to step Sx1507.

In step Sx1507, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, and then the process advances to step Sx1508 to determine whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect. If it is not the opening/closing execution mode at step Sx1507 (Sx1507: NO) and if it is the high-frequency support mode at step Sx1508 (Sx1508: YES), the process advances to step Sx1509 to perform the electric accessory opening lottery. Specifically, the value stored in the electric role holding area 64d is shifted, and when the value of the electric role item opening counter C5 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric role item opening lottery be elected. Also, at the same time as the electric accessory open lottery, the second timer counter area T2 is set to "750" (that is, 1.5 sec). The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started. After that, the process proceeds to step Sx1510.

In step Sx1510, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory open lottery in step Sx1509 is support winning. In step Sx1510, when it is determined that the result of the electric accessory open lottery is support winning (Sx1510: YES), the process proceeds to step Sx1511, the support winning flag is turned ON, and provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64 "3" is set in the second round counter area RC2. The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the electric accessory 34a is released. After that, the electronic support processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Sx1510, when it is determined that the result of the electric accessory open lottery is not support winning (Sx1510: NO), the process for electric role support ends without executing the process of step Sx1511.

If it is determined in step Sx1507 that it is in the opening/closing execution mode (Sx1507: YES), or if it is determined in step Sx1508 that it is not in the high-frequency support mode (Sx1508: NO), the process proceeds to step Sx1512, and the electric accessory open lottery I do. Specifically, the value stored in the electric role holding area 64d is shifted, and when the value of the electric role item opening counter C5 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric role item opening lottery be elected. At the same time as the electric accessory open lottery, the second timer counter area T2 is set to "14750" (that is, 29.5 sec). After that, the process proceeds to step Sx1513.

In step Sx1513, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory open lottery in step Sx1512 is support winning. In step Sx1513, if it is determined that the support has not been won (Sx1513: NO), the electronic support process is terminated. On the other hand, in step Sx1513, if it is determined that the support is won (Sx1513: YES), the process advances to step Sx1514, the support win flag is turned ON, and "1" is set in the second round counter area RC2. , terminates the electronic support process.

In step Sx1502, when it is determined that the support winning flag is ON (Sx1502: YES), the process proceeds to step Sx1515 to determine whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the variation time of the normal figure unit 38. In step Sx1515, when it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sx1515: NO), since the pattern is being changed and displayed in the normal picture unit 38, the main electric role support process is performed as it is. exit. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sx1515 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sx1515: YES), the process proceeds to step Sx1516.

In step Sx1516, a win display is set. As a result, the variation display of the pattern in the normal pattern unit 38 is terminated while the win display is stopped. After that, the process proceeds to step Sx1517 to turn on the supporting flag and turn off the support winning flag. After that, the electronic support process is terminated.

In step Sx1501, when it is determined that the support flag is ON (Sx1501: YES), the process advances to step Sx1518 to execute an electric opening/closing control process for opening/closing the electric accessory 34a. After that, the electronic support process is terminated.

<Electrical opening/closing control process>
Next, the electrical opening/closing control process will be described. The electrician opening/closing control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control unit 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 645: Sx1518) of electrician support processing.

FIG. 646 is a flow chart showing the electrical opening/closing control process. In step Sx1601, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open. Whether or not the electric accessory 34a is being opened is determined by whether or not the electric accessory drive unit 34b is in a driving state. When it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is open (Sx1601: YES), the process proceeds to step Sx1602.

In step Sx1602, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the open duration time of the electric accessory 34a. If it is determined in step Sx1602 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sx1602: NO), the electrical opening/closing control process is terminated. In other words, if the opening continuation time of the electric accessory 34a has not ended, the present electric opening/closing control process is terminated.

In step Sx1602, when it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sx1602: YES), the process advances to step Sx1603 to perform closing processing for controlling the electric accessory 34a to the closed state, "250" (that is, 0.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as means for measuring the open duration time of the electric accessory 34a is "0", the electric accessory 34a is closed, and the second timer counter area T2 is electrically operated this time. It is used as a parameter for measuring the closed duration time of the accessory 34a, and "250" is set in the second timer counter area T2. After executing step Sx1603, the process proceeds to step Sx1604.

At step Sx1604, after subtracting 1 from the value of the second round counter area RC2, the process advances to step Sx1605 to determine whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0". If it is determined in step Sx1605 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (Sx1605: NO), the electric opening/closing control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sx1605 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0" (Sx1605: YES), the process advances to step Sx1606 to turn off the supported flag. After that, the electrical switching control process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sx1601 that the electric accessory 34a is not open (Sx1601: NO), the process proceeds to step Sx1607 to determine whether the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closed duration time of the electric accessory 34a. If it is determined in step Sx1607 that the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sx1607: NO), the electrical opening/closing control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sx1607 that the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sx1607: YES), the process advances to step Sx1608 to execute opening processing for controlling the electric accessory 34a to the open state. . After that, the process proceeds to step Sx1609.

In step Sx1609, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. If it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress (Sx1609: NO), the process advances to step Sx1610 to determine whether or not the high-frequency support mode is in effect. do.

If it is determined in step Sx1610 that the high frequency support mode is in effect (Sx1610: YES), the process advances to step Sx1611 to set "800" (that is, 1.6 sec) in the second timer counter area T2. After that, the electrical switching control process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sx1609 that the mode is the open/close execution mode (Sx1609: YES), or if it is determined in step Sx1610 that it is not the high-frequency support mode (Sx1610: NO), the process proceeds to step Sx1612, and the second "100" (that is, 0.2 sec) is set in the timer counter area T2. After that, the electrical switching control process is terminated.

<<13-6>> Various processes executed in the sound emission control device and the display control device:
Next, a specific example of control executed by the sound emission control device and the display control device in order to execute the announcement effect and the result notification effect will be described. The processing executed in the sound emission control device 90 will be described first, and then the processing executed in the display control device 100 will be described.

<Various processing executed in the sound emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, timer interrupt processing executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 will be described.

FIG. 647 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the sound and light side MPU 92. FIG. Timer interrupt processing is repeatedly executed at a relatively short period (for example, 2 msec). Processing of each step executed in timer interrupt processing will be described below.

In step Sx1701, command storage processing is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing the received command in the sound and light side RAM 94 when a command is received from the main side MPU 62 . The sound and light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer for enabling storage and reading of commands received from the main side MPU 62, and the commands received from the main side MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer. , are read out sequentially according to the order in which they are stored. After executing step Sx1701, the process proceeds to step Sx1702.

In step Sx1702, pending command handling processing is executed. In the pending command processing, processing corresponding to the first pending command among the commands stored in step Sx1701 is performed. Details of the pending command handling process will be described later. After executing step Sx1702, the process proceeds to step Sx1703.

In step Sx1703, a game round effect setting process is executed. In the game round effect setting process, the effect to be executed in the game round from the start of the symbol variation to the stop is set. Details of the game round effect setting process will be described later. After executing step Sx1703, the process proceeds to step Sx1704.

In step Sx1704, a one-shot notification effect process is executed. The one-shot announcement effect process is a process for realizing the one-shot announcement effect described in detail in the "one-shot announcement effect" column included in the "outline of processing by game machine and effect operation" column. As described above, the one-shot notification effect is that the result of the winning lottery is a big win before the combination of symbols becomes a predetermined combination corresponding to the big win by the action of the main rotary accessory 170 for production. It is a production to announce. Specifically, the one-shot notification effect is effected with the content illustrated in FIG. 623 . After executing step Sx1704, the process advances to step Sx1705.

In step Sx1705, processing for opening/closing execution mode effect is executed. In the opening/closing execution mode effect processing, processing related to effects during the opening period, effects during the big winning opening opening/closing process period, and effects during the ending period is performed. After executing step Sx1705, the process proceeds to step Sx1706.

In step Sx1706, big or small effect processing is executed. The big or small effect processing is a process for realizing the big or small effect described in detail in the "big or small effect" column included in the "outline of processing by game machine and effect operation" column. As described above, in the big or small effect, the effect main rotating accessory 170, the first effect sub-rotating accessory 180, and the second effect sub-rotating accessory 190 cooperate to win. This is an effect for notifying the number of round games obtained and the presence/absence of a holding group when a jackpot is won in the lottery. Concretely, the big or small effect is effected with the contents illustrated in FIGS. After executing step Sx1706, the process proceeds to step Sx1707.

In step Sx1707, background rendering processing is executed. In the background rendering process, a process of displaying on the pattern display device 41 a background moving image determined according to a command indicating the game state received from the main MPU 62 is performed. For example, a background video indicating that the high-frequency support mode is continuing, a background video indicating that the high-frequency support mode has ended, and a background video indicating that the high-probability mode is continuing are displayed. . After executing step Sx1707, the process proceeds to step Sx1708.

In step Sx1708, other processing is executed. Other processing includes processing for displaying a demonstration image (moving image) on the symbol display device 41 when the player is not playing a game. After executing step Sx1708, the process proceeds to step Sx1709.

In step Sx1709, light emission control processing for controlling light emission of various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control processing, light emission control of various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read out in each of the above processing for presentation. After executing step Sx1709, the process proceeds to step Sx1710.

At step Sx1710, an audio output control process for controlling the audio output of the speaker 46 is executed. In the audio output control process, audio output control of the speaker 46 is performed based on the audio data read out in the BGM process and each effect process. After executing step Sx1710, the timer interrupt process is terminated.

<Processing for pending command>
Next, pending command handling processing will be described. The hold command handling process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 647: Sx1702).

FIG. 648 is a flowchart showing pending command handling processing. In step Sx1801, it is determined whether or not a pending command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step Sx1801 that a pending command has been received from the main MPU 62 (Sx1801: YES), the process proceeds to step Sx1802.

In step Sx1802, it is determined whether or not the pending command read out this time is the one transmitted based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 or not. In step Sx1802, if it is determined that the hold command read this time was transmitted based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 (Sx1802: YES), the process proceeds to step Sx1803, and the sound The update processing of the first reserved number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the light-side RAM 94 is executed. The first reservation number counter area is a counter area for specifying the number of pieces of reservation information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting hole 33 in the sound and light side MPU 92 . In the process of updating the first pending number counter area, the information in the first pending number counter area is updated to the pending number information included in the pending command read this time. After executing step Sx1803, the process proceeds to step Sx1804.

In step Sx1804, processing for pending change notice effect is executed. The pending change notice effect process is a process for realizing the hold change notice effect described in detail in the "holding change notice effect" column included in the "outline of processing by gaming machine" column. As described above, the suspension change notice effect corresponds to the suspension display icons H, Z whose display colors have changed by changing the display color of each suspension display icon H, Z from the default color to another color. This is an effect that suggests the degree of expectation (reliability) of winning the jackpot with respect to the reserved information. After executing step Sx1804, the process proceeds to step Sx1806.

In step Sx1802, if it is determined that the pending command read this time was not transmitted based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 (Sx1802: NO), that is, the pending command is the second starting If it is determined that the transmission is based on the ball entering the mouth 34, the process advances to step Sx1805 to update the second pending number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound and light side RAM 94. Execute. The second pending number counter area is a counter area for specifying, in the sound and light side MPU 92 , the number of pieces of pending information acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 34 . In the process of updating the second reserved number counter area, the information in the second reserved number counter area is updated to the information of the reserved number included in the command read this time. After executing step Sx1805, the process proceeds to step Sx1806.

The reason why steps Sx1803 and Sx1805 are processed as described above will be described. In this embodiment, while the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, backup power is supplied to the RAM 64 of the main control device 60, while backup power is supplied to the RAM 94 of the sound emission control device 90. not. Therefore, when the power is cut off in a situation where the hold information related to the ball entering the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34 is stored in the RAM 64 of the main controller 60, the main controller 60 is stored in memory, whereas the sound emission control device 90 recognizes that there are 0 pieces of hold information. In this case, if a configuration is adopted in which the first pending number counter area or the second pending number counter area is counted up each time a pending command is received in the sound emission control device 90, the main controller 60 actually stores the pending memory. Inconvenience may occur in that the number of on-hold information received does not match the number of on-hold information grasped by the sound emission control device 90 . On the other hand, as in the above-described embodiment, the main controller 60 transmits a hold command including information on the number of holds, and the sound emission control device 90 responds to the hold command each time it receives the hold command. By adopting a configuration in which information on the contained number of reserved items is set in the first reserved number counter area or the second reserved number counter area, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above inconveniences.

In step Sx1806, update processing of the total pending number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound and light side RAM 94 is executed. The total pending number counter area is the sum of the number of pending information items acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 and the number of pending information items acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 34. This is a counter area for specifying in the sound and light side MPU 92 . In the update process, the information of the total pending number counter area is the sum of the information of the pending number measured in the first pending number counter area and the information of the pending number measured in the second pending number counter area. update to. After executing step Sx1806, the process proceeds to step Sx1807.

If it is determined in step Sx1801 that no pending command has been received from the main MPU 62 (Sx1801: NO), the process proceeds to step Sx1807 without executing steps Sx1802 to Sx1806.

In step Sx1807, pending display control processing is executed. Specifically, based on the number of pending information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 specified in step Sx1803, the display mode of the first pending display unit 37c (the color of the LED lamp to be lit and combination), and based on the number of pieces of hold information acquired based on the entry into the second starting port 34 specified in step Sx1805, the display mode of the second hold display unit 37d (lighting LED lamp colors and combinations). After executing step Sx1807, this pending command handling process ends.

<Game round effect setting processing>
Next, the game round effect setting process will be described. The game round effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 647: Sx1703).

FIG. 649 is a flow chart showing game round effect setting processing. In step Sx1901, it is determined whether or not a variation command and a type command have been received. In step Sx1901, when it is determined that the command for variation and the type command have not been received (Sx1901: NO), this game round effect setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sx1901 that the command for variation and the type command have been received (Sx1901: YES), the process proceeds to step Sx1902.

In step Sx1902, read the variation command and type command received this time, from these commands, the presence or absence of the jackpot, the presence or absence of time-saving provision, the type of jackpot, the presence or absence of reach occurrence, and information on the variation time are grasped respectively. Then, the grasped information is stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 . After that, the process proceeds to step Sx1903.

In step Sx1903, effect pattern setting processing is executed. The production pattern setting process is a process of determining and setting the pattern of production to be executed in the current game round (the contents of the advance notice production and the ready-to-win production and the execution timing) based on the production pattern table. Details of the effect pattern setting process will be described later. After executing step Sx1903, the process proceeds to step Sx1904.

In step Sx1904, stop symbol setting processing is executed. In the stop symbol setting process, if the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a 16R probability variable jackpot, an 8R probability variable jackpot, or an 8R normal jackpot, the same pattern is displayed on the activated line L1 (see FIG. 612). The information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination of is established is set as the information of the current stop symbol. Specifically, if the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is the 16R probability variable jackpot or the 8R probability variable jackpot, the same combination of odd-numbered symbols can be selected as the same combination of symbols, and the same of even symbol combinations can be selected. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the selection rate is the same for the combination of the same odd-numbered symbols and the combination of the same even-numbered symbols. A configuration in which the ratio is high may be adopted, and the latter may be configured to have a higher selection ratio than the former. Also, the combination of "7" symbols is selected only in the case of a 16R probability variable jackpot. Further, when the result of the winning lottery of the current game round is the 8R normal jackpot, the same combination of even-numbered symbols is selected as the same combination of symbols.

If the result of the jackpot lottery of the current game round is a result of a loss, the presence or absence of the reach generation is determined from the contents of the command for variation. When it is determined that it corresponds to the occurrence of ready-to-win, it corresponds to the stop result in which the combination of the same symbols does not materialize on the effective line L1 and the combination of the ready-to-win symbols occurs on the effective line L1. information is determined as the information of the result of this stop. On the other hand, when it is determined that it does not correspond to the occurrence of ready-to-win, the result is a stop result in which the combination of the same symbols is not established on the effective line L1, and a stop result in which the combination of ready-to-win symbols is not established on the effective line L1. The corresponding information is set as the information of the current stop symbol.

In step Sx1905, a process for setting the variation pattern of the current game round is executed. In this process, information on the variation time of the current game round is specified from the content of the variation command received this time, and a combination of the information on the variation time and the information on the stop symbol set in step Sx1904 is obtained. Select the corresponding variation pattern. When selecting a variation pattern, the variation pattern table stored in the variation display pattern table storage area 93b of the sound and light side ROM 93 is referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step Sx1906.

At step Sx1906, the production pattern set at step Sx1903, the stop pattern set at step Sx1904, the information of the variation pattern set at step Sx1905, and the hold display information obtained at step Sx1906 in the current game round are produced. Set to command. After that, the process advances to step Sx1907 to transmit the effect command to the display side MPU 102 . The display-side MPU 102 executes processing for displaying the effect contents corresponding to the received effect command on the pattern display device 41 . After executing step Sx1907, the process proceeds to step Sx1908.

In step Sx1908, update processing at the start of fluctuation is executed. The update process at the start of fluctuation is a process for updating the hold display in the first starting opening holding area Ds1 or the second starting opening holding area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 . The details of the update process at the start of fluctuation will be described later. After executing step Sx1908, this game round effect setting process is terminated.

<Production pattern setting process>
Next, the effect pattern setting process will be described. The effect pattern setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 649: Sx1903) of the game cycle effect setting process.

FIG. 650 is a flow chart showing effect pattern setting processing. In step Sx2001, random number RN for effect pattern is obtained from lottery counter area 94c of sound/light RAM 94. FIG. After that, the process proceeds to step Sx2002.

At step Sx2002, a process of identifying the effect pattern table is executed. The effect pattern table is three-dimensional tabular data whose data elements are patterns of effects to be executed in game rounds, fluctuation times, and random numbers RN for effect patterns. The performance pattern table storage area 93a of the ROM 93 stores various types of performance pattern tables corresponding to the presence or absence of a big hit, the presence or absence of time saving, and the presence or absence of reach generation. At step Sx2002, one effect pattern table is specified from these effect pattern tables. Specifically, based on the presence or absence of the jackpot, the presence or absence of the time saving grant, the type of the jackpot, and the presence or absence of the reach generation grasped in step Sx1902 of the game round production setting process (FIG. 649), the production pattern table storage area of the ROM 93 One effect pattern table is specified from 93a. After executing step Sx2002, the process proceeds to step Sx2003.

In step Sx2003, the effect pattern table specified in Sx2002 is referred to, and the fluctuation time grasped in step Sx1902 of the game cycle effect setting process (Fig. 649) and the current effect pattern random number RN value obtained in step Sx2001 Acquire a production pattern corresponding to and. After executing step Sx2003, the process proceeds to step Sx2004.

At step Sx2004, the effect pattern acquired at step Sx2003 is set as the effect pattern to be executed in the current game round. After executing step Sx2004, the effect pattern setting process is terminated.

<Update processing at the start of fluctuation>
Next, update processing at the start of fluctuation will be described. The update process at the start of fluctuation is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the game cycle effect setting process (FIG. 649: Sx1909).

FIG. 651 is a flowchart showing update processing at the start of fluctuation. In step Sx2101, it is determined whether or not the command for variation received this time relates to the hold information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting hole 33 or not. If it is determined in step Sx2101 that the variation command received this time is related to the hold information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting hole 33 (Sx2101: YES), proceed to step Sx2102, The information in the first reserved number counter area is updated so that the number stored in the first reserved number counter area of the sound and light RAM 94 is decremented by one. After that, the process proceeds to step Sx2104.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sx2101 that the variation command received this time is not related to the hold information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 (Sx2101: NO), the process proceeds to step Sx2103. Next, the information in the second reserved number counter area is updated so that the number stored in the second reserved number counter area of the sound and light side RAM 94 is decremented by one. After that, the process proceeds to step Sx2104.

In step Sx2104, the information in the total pending number counter area is updated so that the total pending number stored in the total pending number counter area of the sound and light side RAM 94 is decremented by one. After that, the update process at the start of fluctuation is ended.

<Various processing executed in the display control device>
Next, processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

The processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 mainly includes a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on until the power is turned off, and a main processing that is executed when a command is received from the sound emission control device 90. There are command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing executed when a V interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal that is transmitted from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when rendering processing of an image for one frame is completed.

The MPU 102 executes main processing after power-on, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of commands and detection of V interrupt signals. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command interrupt processing is preferentially executed. Therefore, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound emission control device 90 and execute the V interrupt process.

<Main processing>
Next, main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

652 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. As described above, the main process is a process that is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. Processing of each step executed in the main processing will be described below.

In step Sx2201, initialization processing is executed. Specifically, first, processing for initializing the MPU 102 and clearing the storage of the work RAM 104 and the video RAM 107 is performed. Then, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107 . Furthermore, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107 and the extracted character information is written in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107 . Also, perform other necessary settings for initialization. After that, the process proceeds to step Sx2202.

In step Sx2202, interrupt permission setting is executed. After the interrupt permission setting is executed, in the main processing, infinite loop processing is executed until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing, which will be described below, are executed in accordance with the reception of a command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described. As described above, the command interrupt processing is processing that is executed each time a command is received from the sound emission control device 90 .

653 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. In step Sx2301, command storage processing is executed. In the command storage process, received command data is extracted and the extracted command data is stored in a command storage area provided in work RAM 104 . Various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read by the command determination process of the V interrupt process, which will be described later, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

654 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. As described above, V interrupt processing is processing that is executed when a V interrupt signal from VDP 105 is detected. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command storage area are executed by the command interrupt process. Execute the display instructions.

As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame worth of image is completed and that is transmitted to the MPU 102 . Therefore, the MPU 102 executes V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, so that drawing instructions to the VDP 105 are issued every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame worth of image is completed. For this reason, the VDP 105 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to suppress the development of an image associated with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area in which the image information is stored. Details of the processing of each step of the V interrupt processing will be described below.

In step Sx2401, command handling processing is executed. In the command handling process, the contents of the command stored in the command storage area are analyzed by the command interrupt process (FIG. 653), and the process corresponding to the command is executed. Specifically, for example, when a performance command is stored, image drawing and display control is started so that the performance mode specified by the performance command is displayed on the pattern display device 41.例文帳に追加

If the effect operation command is stored, it is determined whether or not it is the period for accepting pressing of the effect operation button 24, and if it is determined that it is the period for accepting pressing of the effect operation button 24, the effect operation is performed. Control of image drawing and display is started so that the effect mode corresponding to the depression of the button 24 is displayed on the pattern display device 41 . On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the period for accepting pressing of the effect operation button 24, the content of the next command is analyzed without executing the process.

In the command processing (Sx2401), all commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and processing corresponding to all the analyzed commands is executed. The reason for this will be explained. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during the 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the effect is set by the sound emission control device 90 and the effect is started, there is a high possibility that various commands for specifying the content of the effect are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the state of the effect such as the advance notice effect and the stop pattern set by the sound emission control device 90, and display the effect image according to the state. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the device 41 .

In step Sx2402, display setting processing is executed. In the display setting process, based on the type of screen to be displayed on the pattern display device 41 set by the command handling process (Sx2401), etc., the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the pattern display device 41 is specified. . After that, the process proceeds to step Sx2403.

In step Sx2403, task processing is executed. In the task processing, based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the pattern display device 41 specified by the display setting processing (Sx2402), the type of the character (sprite, display object) making up the image is determined. Along with specifying, for each character (sprite), various parameters required for drawing, such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc., are determined. After that, the process proceeds to step Sx2404.

In step Sx2404, drawing processing is executed. In the drawing process, the types of characters forming one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each character, which are determined by the task process (Sx2403), are transmitted to the VDP 105 . The VDP 105 executes an image drawing process based on these pieces of information, and together with a drive signal to cause the pattern display device 41 to display an image drawn based on the information received during the previous V interrupt process. The image data is transmitted to the pattern display device 41 . After that, the process proceeds to step Sx2405, and after executing other processes, the V interrupt process ends. An example of specific control for executing various processes including the jackpot effect in the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

<<13-7>> Functions and Effects:
As described in detail above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, after the end of the game cycle in which the winning lottery result is a jackpot, the main rotary accessory for production 170 rotates to the lowest point position. , the first and second effect sub rotating accessories 180 and 190 come up to the highest position while rotating, and then the main rotating accessory for effect 170 and the first and second effect Both the sub-rotating accessories 180 and 190 stop rotating, and the character string drawn on the first or second sub-rotating accessories 180 and 190 for presentation is drawn by the magnifying lens LZ provided on the main rotating accessory for presentation 170. The player can be informed of the number of round games and the presence/absence of a holding series by executing a big or small effect of enlarging and displaying any one of 183a, 184a, 193a, and 194a.

According to the big or small production of the above configuration, the character string 183a drawn on the first or second sub-rotary accessory for production 180, 190 with respect to the magnifying lens LZ provided in the main rotary accessory for production 170, It is possible to give the player a feeling of urgency (feeling of excitement) such as which one of 184a, 193a, and 194a coincides (stops). In addition, according to the big or small production, the rainbow-colored "BIG" character string 183a is drawn on the first sub-rotary accessory for production 180 by the magnifying lens LZ provided on the main rotary accessory for production 170. When is displayed in an enlarged manner, the number of acquisition round games in the case of winning a jackpot in a winning lottery becomes 16 times, and the player can be given the double joy of having a holding group. Further, according to the big or small production, the magnifying lens LZ provided in the production main rotary accessory 170 enlarges the black character string 184a of "BIG" drawn on the first production sub-rotary accessory 180. is displayed, it is possible to give the player the joy that the number of acquired round games will be 16 times in the case of winning a big win in the winning lottery, and on the other hand, hold the case of winning a big win in the winning lottery. It is possible to give the player a slight sense of disappointment that there is no ren. Further, according to the big or small production, the rainbow-colored "SML" character string 193a drawn on the second production sub-rotary accessory 190 is magnified by the magnifying lens LZ provided on the production main rotating accessory 170. is displayed, it is possible to give the player the joy of having a holding group in the case of winning a jackpot in the winning lottery, and on the other hand, the winning round game in the case of winning a jackpot in the winning lottery can be given to the player. It is possible to give the player a slight sense of disappointment that the number of times is eight. Furthermore, according to the big or small production, the magnifying lens LZ provided on the main rotary accessory for production 170 enlarges the character string 194a of the black "SML" drawn on the sub rotary accessory for production 190. is displayed, the number of winning round games in the case of winning the jackpot in the winning lottery will be 8 times, and there will be no pending series, so the feeling that it was better than not winning the jackpot feeling) can be imparted to the player. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the main rotating accessory for presentation 170 is provided with a plurality of petal portions 172 rotatable around a rotating shaft portion 171, and is one of the plurality of petal portions 172. The flower petal portion 172L is provided with a magnifying lens LZ so that the high brightness portion HB included in the predetermined image displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 can be visually recognized. can switch to Rotating bodies 182 and 192 provided in each sub rotating accessory 180 for presentation are configured to be rotatable, and when the game board 30 is viewed from the front, the petal portion 172L of the main rotating accessory for presentation 170 is not seen through. A first possible position (see, eg, FIG. 626(a)) and a second position visible through petal portion 172L (see, eg, FIG. 626(b), FIG. 627, FIG. 628, or FIG. 629). can be displaced between Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the one-shot announcement effect, the high brightness portion HB is in the first state in which the high brightness portion HB can be visually recognized through the magnifying lens LZ of the rotating petal portion 172L, and in the big or small effect, the rotating petal portion By moving the rotating bodies 182 and 192 provided in each sub-rotating accessory 180 for effect to the back side of 172L, the rotating body 182 or the rotating body 192 blocks the light from the high brightness part HB and rotates. A second state is entered in which the body 182 or the rotating body 192 is visible through the magnifying lens LZ of the petal portion 172L. For this reason, when the first state is brought about by the one-shot notification performance, the winning lottery result is a big win before the combination of symbols becomes a predetermined combination corresponding to the big win, as described above. A player can be notified of something. In addition, when the second state is reached by the big or small effect, as described above, it is determined whether the number of acquired round games is 16 or 8, and whether there is a holding group. Players can be notified of this. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player is given the joy of winning the jackpot by the result of winning lottery before the combination of symbols becomes a predetermined combination corresponding to winning the jackpot by the one-shot notification effect. In addition to being able to do it, there is a little expectation and a little bit of expectation such as whether the number of round games acquired in the case of winning a jackpot in the winning lottery will be 16 or 8, and whether there will be a pending group due to the big or small production. A feeling of discouragement can be imparted to the player. As a result, with the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the game board 30 is viewed from the front, the outer shape of the rotating bodies 182 and 192 provided in the sub-rotary accessories for production 180 and 190 is the same as that of the rotating bodies 182 and 192. Since the points are symmetrical with respect to the center of , the beauty of the rotating bodies 182 and 192 can be enhanced when the sub-rotary accessories for production 180 and 190 are rotated. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the petal portion 172 provided in the production main rotating accessory 170 and the rotors 182 and 192 provided in the producing sub rotating accessories 180 and 190 are formed of a resin material. Since these parts are formed easily, the degree of freedom in the shape of these parts is high. For this reason, the production using the production main rotary accessory 170 and the production sub-rotary accessories 180 and 190 having these parts, that is, the one-shot announcement production and the big or small production should have a higher impact. can be done. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the rotating shaft portion 171 provided in the effect main rotary accessory 170 is arranged along the direction perpendicular to the surface of the game board 30, It is possible to rotate the petal portion 172 on a parallel plane with high accuracy. Therefore, it is easy to increase the outer diameter of the production main rotary accessory 170, and as a result, the one-shot announcement production and the big or small production can be made gorgeous. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

Further, conventionally known rotating accessories have a light-emitting part, and can execute an effect of simply rotating the light-emitting part while the light-emitting part emits light. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the main rotating accessory for effect 170, which is an example of the first rotating body, and the petal portion 172L of the main rotating accessory for effect 170 are illuminated from the back side. Since the design display device 41 that functions as a display device 41 has an independent configuration, there is a one-shot announcement performance in which the main rotating accessory for production 170 rotates while the light source on the back side emits light, and the light source on the back side does not emit light. The main rotating accessory for presentation 170 and the sub rotating accessories for presentation 180 and 190, which are examples of the second rotating body, are involved in the state, and the main rotating accessory for presentation 170 itself only mainly rotates. Both big or small production became feasible. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to realize various kinds of effects than before by making the rotating accessory and the light source independent. Moreover, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the symbol display device 41 functioning as the light source can perform variable display for notifying the result of the winning lottery and various effects such as character display. As a result, more efficient use of the device is possible.

<<13-8>> Modification of the thirteenth embodiment:
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and can be implemented in various aspects without departing from the gist thereof. For example, the following modifications are also possible. In addition, in the modified example described below, description of the same configuration, processing, and effects as those of the above-described embodiment is omitted. Various modifications of the production main rotating accessory 170 and the production main rotating accessory driving unit 97 as an example of the first rotating body will be described as first to 12 variations.

<<13-8-1>> Modification 1:
In the thirteenth embodiment and its modification, the production main rotating accessory 170 as an example of the first rotating body has five petal parts 172 as rotating plate parts. The number of petal parts may be a plurality of other numbers such as 2, 3, 4, or 6, or may be 1. That is, the number of rotating plate portions included in the first rotating body may be any number, and may be one. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the above-described embodiment, the first rotating body is used for presentation, but it is not necessarily for presentation, and may be used for various purposes. In short, the first rotating body may be used for any purpose as long as the effect of the present invention can be exhibited by the interaction between the first rotating body and the second rotating body. .

<<13-8-2>> Modification 2:
In the thirteenth embodiment and its modification, a flower petal shape is adopted as the shape of the rotating plate provided in the production main rotating accessory 170 as an example of the first rotating body. Other shapes such as rectangular, triangular, elliptical, circular (perfect circular or distorted circular) may be adopted as the shape of the rotating plate portion. In short, the rotating plate portion of the first rotating body has a rotating surface, and if it is possible for the second rotating body to move to the back side (rear side) of the surface, any shape can be used. There may be.

<<13-8-3>> Modification 3:
In the thirteenth embodiment and its modification, the petal part 172 as the rotating plate part provided in the main rotating accessory for production 170 is made of a translucent material, but is instead made of a transparent material. You may The material may be either resin material, glass material, or the like. In this case, the transparent portion in the petal portion may not be the entire petal, but may be a part of the petal. In the thirteenth embodiment and its modification in which the petal portion 172 is made of a translucent material, the translucent portion may not be the entire petal, but may be a part of the petal.

<<13-8-4>> Modification 4:
In the thirteenth embodiment and its modification, the petal portion 172 is formed of a translucent material and the magnifying lens LZ is provided in one petal portion 172L. , and a magnifying lens LZ may be provided in one petal portion 172L. In short, if one of the plurality of petals 172L is provided with the magnifying lens LZ, the other petals 172L can be made of transparent, translucent, or opaque material. good too.

<<13-8-5>> Modification 5:
In the thirteenth embodiment and its modification, the petal portion 172 is made of a translucent material and the magnifying lens LZ is provided in one petal portion 172L. , and none of the petals 172 is provided with a magnifying lens. The material may be either resin material, glass material, or the like. The term "transparency" as used herein means transparency to the extent that the character strings 183a, 184a, 193a, and 194a provided in the first effect sub-rotary accessory 180 and the second effect sub-rotary accessory 190 can be visually recognized through the petal portion 172. Any degree of transparency is acceptable as long as it has transparency. According to this configuration, the character strings 183 a , 184 a , 193 a , 194 a described in the sub rotating accessories 180 , 190 for presentation can be clearly visually recognized through the petal portion 172 . In addition, when the petal portion 172 is formed of a resin material having transparency, it is easy to form, so the degree of freedom in the shape of the petal portion 172 is increased. It is possible to make the effect used have a higher impact. Furthermore, as another modified example, the petal portion as the rotating plate portion may have a region with a high light transmittance and a region with a lower light transmittance than the portion. In the case of this configuration, at the timing when each of the effect sub-rotating roles 180 and 190 stops at a specific rotation stop position, each of the effect sub-rotating roles is placed on the back side of the high light transmittance region provided in the petal portion. It is assumed that the objects 180 and 190 move. According to this configuration, after the timing at which each of the sub-rotating accessory for effects 180 and 190 stops at the specific rotation stop position, the player can set each sub-rotating role for effect 180 and 190 so that the light transmittance of the petal portion is Clearly visible through high areas. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

<<13-8-6>> Modification 6:
In the thirteenth embodiment and its modified example, the magnifying lens LZ is provided in one petal portion 172L as the rotating plate portion. Alternatively, a configuration in which a transparent plastic plate is provided, a configuration in which a through hole is provided, or the like may be used. In short, the inside of the rotating plate portion may be configured in any way as long as the second rotating body can be visually recognized through the rotating plate portion when the second rotating body moves to the back side of the rotating plate portion.

<<13-8-7>> Modification 7:
In the thirteenth embodiment and its modification, the enlarging/reducing mechanism 177 for enlarging/reducing each petal portion 172 is provided. It may be configured not to allow In this configuration, as described in Modification 1, one petal portion may be provided as the rotating plate portion, or the single petal portion may be circular as described in Modification 2. In short, if the rotating plate portion has a rotating surface and the second rotating body can move to the back side (rear side) of the rotating plate portion, the number of the rotating plate portion is one. The rotating plate portion may have any shape.

<<13-8-8>> Modification 8:
In the thirteenth embodiment and its modification, the rack and pinion mechanism 175 and the pinion coupling motor 176 are used to vertically move the production main rotating accessory 170. The pinion mechanism part 175 and the pinion connection motor 176 may be eliminated, and the production main rotating accessory 170 may be fixed at a specific position. The term “fixed” here means that the position in the vertical direction is fixed, and the petal portion 172 rotates. Specifically, the rotation shaft portion 171 provided in the production main rotating accessory 170 is fixed at a specific position. The specific position can be, for example, the origin position of the production main rotating accessory 170 in the thirteenth embodiment. According to this configuration, it becomes easy to move the sub-representation rotating accessories 180 and 190 to the back side of the revolving rendition main rotating accessory 170 . Therefore, according to this modification, simplification of control can be achieved. It should be noted that the production main rotating accessory 170 may be arranged at a fixed position not only in the vertical direction but also in the horizontal direction. In short, if it is possible for the second rotating body to move to the back side of the rotating plate portion provided in the first rotating body, which is the main rotating accessory for production 170 as an example, the first rotating body is It may be fixed at a specific position or moved to a specific position.

<<13-8-9>> Modification 9:
In the thirteenth embodiment and its modification, the main rotating accessory rotating motor 174 is configured by a stepping motor, but instead, the main rotating accessory rotating motor 174 is a DC motor with a brush or a DC motor without a brush. may be configured. These use a DC power supply as a power source for rotating the main rotating accessory for production 170, but instead of this, an AC power supply, ultrasonic waves generated using a piezoelectric element, and Coulomb imprinting force and repulsive force due to static electricity are used. , the kinetic energy of the game ball discharged from the game area PA through the out port 43 of the game board 30, or other kinetic energy of the game ball may be used as the power source for rotating the main rotary accessory 170 for presentation. . In short, in a configuration in which the first rotating body can rotate, exemplified by the production main rotating accessory 170, any device configuration can be used as a device for performing the rotation. Any power may be used as a power source for moving the .

<<13-8-10>> Modification 10:
In the thirteenth embodiment and its modification, the main rotating accessory rotating motor 174 rotates the main rotating accessory for production 170 at a constant speed. 174 may be configured to change the rotational speed of the main rotating accessory 170 for production. According to this configuration, since the rotation speed of the production main rotary accessory 170 changes, in the one-shot notification production, the visibility of the high-brightness part HB seen through the magnifying lens LZ of the rotating petal part 172L changes. It is possible to As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. The rotational speed of the main rotating accessory for presentation 170 may be changed at random, and the rotational speed may be set to 0 in the middle of the rotation, that is, the rotation may be stopped. Further, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the rotation speed changes with a predetermined trigger, and even in this configuration, the rotation speed may change to any magnitude including zero. In short, if it is possible for the second rotating body to move to the back side of the rotating plate portion provided in the first rotating body, which is the main rotating accessory for production 170 as an example, the rotation of the first rotating body The magnitude of the speed and the mode of change in the rotational speed may be any, including the case where the rotation is stopped halfway.

<<13-8-11>> Modification 11:
In the thirteenth embodiment and its modification, the main rotating accessory rotating motor 174 rotates the main rotating accessory for presentation 170 counterclockwise when viewed from the front. The object 170 may be configured to rotate clockwise when viewed from the front. Further, instead of setting the direction of rotation of the main rotating accessory for effect 170 to a fixed direction, the rotating direction of the main rotating accessory for effect 170 may be reversed from one direction to the other direction. According to this configuration, since the rotation direction of the production main rotary accessory 170 changes, in the one-shot notification production, the visibility of the high-brightness part HB seen through the magnifying lens LZ of the rotating petal part 172L changes. It is possible to As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In short, if it is possible for the second rotating body to move to the back side of the rotating plate portion provided in the first rotating body, which is the main rotating accessory for production 170 as an example, the rotation of the first rotating body The direction may be any direction, and the configuration may be such that the direction of rotation is switched in the middle. In addition, as another modification, each time an opportunity to rotate the main rotating accessory for effect 170 is established, the rotation direction of the main rotating accessory for effect 170 is rotated counterclockwise and clockwise when viewed from the front. As a configuration for determining which direction to use, even if it is easier for the player to increase the advantage when it is decided to rotate clockwise than when it is decided to rotate counterclockwise. good. Specifically, when the result of the allocation judgment executed in the winning lottery that triggered the execution of the big or small production process is the 8R probability variable jackpot or the 8R normal jackpot, the main rotary accessory 170 for production. rotate counterclockwise. On the other hand, when the result of the allocation determination executed in the winning lottery that triggered the execution of the big or small production process is the 16R variable variable jackpot or the 16R normal jackpot, the main rotary accessory 170 for production is rotated clockwise. rotate to With this configuration, it is more advantageous for the player when the rotation direction of the first rotating body is determined to be clockwise than when it is determined to be counterclockwise. According to this configuration, the player becomes concerned about the direction of rotation of the main rotating accessory for presentation 170, which is an example of the first rotating body, so that the interest in the game can be further improved.

<<13-8-12>> Modification 12:
In the thirteenth embodiment and its modification, the main rotating accessory for production 170 as an example of the first rotating body is arranged above the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. A configuration may be adopted in which the first rotating body is provided inside the display surface 41a of the device 41, inside the game area PA, inside the big winning opening 36a, or the like. In short, if it is possible for the second rotating body to move to the back side of the rotating plate portion provided in the first rotating body, which is the main rotating accessory for presentation 170 as an example, any part of the game board 30 It is good also as a structure which provides a 1st rotary body in a position.

Various modifications of the production sub-rotary accessories 180 and 190 and the production sub-rotary accessory driving units 98 and 99 as examples of the second rotating body will be described below as modifications 13 to 22.

<<13-8-13>> Modification 13:
In the thirteenth embodiment and its modification, in the vertical direction of the game board 30, the sub-representation rotating accessories 180 and 190, which are examples of the second rotating body, are positioned below the rendition main rotating accessory 170. However, instead of this, the sub rotating accessories for production 180 and 190 may be arranged above the main rotating accessory for production 170 . In this case, the sub rotating accessories 180 and 190 for presentation are moved toward the main rotating accessory for presentation 170 from above the main rotating accessory for presentation 170 by the rack and pinion mechanism and the motor for connecting the pinion. The configuration shall be such that According to this configuration, it is possible to provide an effect such that the sub-representative rotating accessories 180 and 190 pour down from above toward the main revolving accessory for effect 170, thereby further enhancing the amusement of the game. In short, if it is possible for the second rotating body to move to the back side of the rotating plate portion provided in the first rotating body, the second rotating body may be arranged on either the upper or lower side with respect to the first rotating body. In addition, as another modified example, the second rotating body, which is an example of the sub-rotary accessories for production 180 and 190, moves from the origin position to the highest point position, and then returns from the highest point position to the origin position. However, instead of this, the second rotating body may move from the origin position to the highest point position, and then move further upward from the highest point position. Further, in the configuration in which the second rotating body is arranged above the first rotating body, the second rotating body moves from the origin position to the back side of the rotating plate portion provided in the first rotating body, and then further downward. It is good also as a structure which moves to. In short, if it is possible for the second rotating body, such as the production sub-rotating accessories 180 and 190, to move to the back side of the rotating plate portion provided in the first rotating body, the second rotating body may be in any direction. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the production sub-rotating accessories 180 and 190 as an example of the second rotating body are used for producing, but the second rotating body is not necessarily for producing. It is not necessary and may be used for various purposes. In short, the second rotating body may be used for any purpose as long as the effect of the present invention can be exhibited by the first rotating body and the second rotating body being engaged with each other. .

<<13-8-14>> Modification 14:
In the thirteenth embodiment and its modification, the configuration includes two sub-representation rotating accessories 180 and 190 as an example of the second rotating body. It may be configured to include one rotating accessory. In this case, for example, when the number of round games obtained when a jackpot is won in a winning lottery is 16, the sub rotating accessory for presentation is operated, and when the number of round games is 8, it is for presentation. The configuration is such that the sub-rotating accessory is not operated. According to this configuration, it is possible to announce that the number of round games obtained when a big win is won in the winning lottery is 16 and whether or not there is a holding series. In addition, as another modified example, three or more sub rotating accessories for presentation as the second rotating body may be provided. Further, in the thirteenth embodiment and its modification, most of the sub-rotating accessory for presentation 180, 190 is hidden by the cover plate 199 when the sub-rotating accessory for presentation 180, 190 is at the origin position. , and only a part of each of the sub rotating accessories for production 180 and 190 is configured to protrude from the cover plate 199. , The entirety of each of the sub rotating accessories 180 and 190 for production may be covered by a cover plate 199. Also, the sub rotating accessories 180 and 190 for presentation may be detachable from the pachinko machine 10, and even in the detached state, the presentation using only the main rotating accessory for presentation 170 can be performed like the one-shot announcement presentation. It can be carried out. In short, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the second rotating body constituted by the sub-representation rotating accessories 180 and 190 may move from any position including the outside of the pachinko machine. It suffices if it can move to the back side of the rotating plate portion provided in the rotating body. In other words, the second rotating body does not need to always exist on the game board (on the game area), and may exist temporarily. Further, as a configuration in which the second rotating body moves to the back surface side of the rotating plate portion provided in the first rotating body, a configuration in which the entire second rotating body moves to the back surface side of the rotating plate portion may be used. A part of the 2-rotating body may be configured to move to the back side of the rotating plate portion.

<<13-8-15>> Modification 15:
In the thirteenth embodiment and its modification, the rotation shaft portion 181 of the first effect sub-rotation accessory 180 arranged on the right side and the rotation shaft portion 191 of the second effect sub-rotation accessory 190 arranged on the left side The first production sub-rotation accessory 180 and the second production sub-rotation accessory 190 were controlled so that the movement would be the same in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction, but instead of this, the first The rotating shaft portion 181 of the sub-rotating accessory for presentation 180 and the rotating shaft portion 191 of the second sub-rotating accessory for presentation 190 may move differently in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction. According to this configuration, the player can enjoy the movement of the sub-rotating accessory for presentation 180, 190 toward the main rotating accessory for presentation 170 in various movements. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game. In addition, in the thirteenth embodiment and its modification, the rotating body 182 provided in the first effect sub-rotating role 180 arranged on the right side and the second effect sub-rotating role 190 arranged on the left side The first effect sub-rotating accessory 180 and the second effect sub-rotating accessory 190 are controlled so that the rotating body 192 provided rotates in the same manner. The rotating body 182 provided in the first effect sub rotating accessory 180 and the rotating body 192 provided in the second effect sub rotating accessory 190 may rotate in different rotation modes. According to this configuration, the player can enjoy the fact that the sub rotating accessories for presentation 180 and 190 rotate in various manners. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game. In short, in a configuration in which a plurality of second rotating bodies, exemplified by the first and second sub-rotating accessories 180 and 190 for effect, move to the back side of the rotating plate portion provided in the first rotating body, Each of the plurality of second rotating bodies may independently and independently move in any direction in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction, and the rotation mode of each of the plurality of second rotating bodies may be any rotation mode. good.

<<13-8-16>> Modification 16:
In the thirteenth embodiment and its modification, each of the sub-rotating accessories 180 and 190 for effect moves from the origin position to the highest point position by one route, but instead of this, it moves by a plurality of routes. may be configured. Further, the route is not limited to a straight route, and may be a curved route. According to these configurations, the player can enjoy the movement of the sub-rotating accessory for effect 180, 190 toward the main rotating accessory for effect 170 through various paths. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game. In short, if it is possible for the second rotating body, such as each sub-rotary accessory for production 180 and 190, to move to the back side of the rotating plate portion provided in the first rotating body, the second rotation There may be a plurality of movement routes of the body, and the shape of the movement route may take any shape.

<<13-8-17>> Modification 17:
In the thirteenth embodiment and its modification, the speed at which each of the sub-rotating accessories for production 180 and 190 moves from the origin position to the highest point position is constant, but instead, each sub-for production It may be configured such that the speed at which the rotating accessories 180 and 190 move from the origin position to the highest point position can be changed. According to this configuration, when the moving speed is reduced, each sub-rotating accessory for production 180, 190 reaches the highest position while the sub-rotating accessory for production 180, 190 is moving. It is possible to impart a negative feeling to the player that the big or small effect will not be executed without the game being played. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game. In short, if it is possible for the second rotating body, such as each sub-rotary accessory for production 180 and 190, to move to the back side of the rotating plate portion provided in the first rotating body, the second rotation The movement speed of the body may be of any size and mode of change.

<<13-8-18>> Modification 18:
In the thirteenth embodiment and its modification, the rotational speed of the sub-rotating accessories for production 180 and 190 is constant. A configuration in which the speed can be changed is also possible. According to this configuration, when the sub-representation rotating accessories 180 and 190 move to the back side of the rotating petal portion 172L, the direction of rotation of the rendition sub-rotating accessories 180 and 190 can be changed variously. can be made Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game. In short, if it is possible for the second rotating body, such as each sub-rotary accessory for production 180 and 190, to move to the back side of the rotating plate portion provided in the first rotating body, the second rotation The speed of rotation of the body can be of any magnitude and manner of change.

<<13-8-19>> Modification 19:
In the thirteenth embodiment and its modification, the sub-rotating accessory rotating motor rotates the sub-rotating accessory 180, 190 for effect in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front. The sub-rotary accessories 180 and 190 may be configured to rotate clockwise when viewed from the front. In addition, instead of setting the direction of rotation of the sub-rotating accessory for presentation 180, 190 to a fixed direction, the direction of rotation of the sub-rotating accessory for presentation 180, 190 is reversed from one direction to the other direction. may be According to this configuration, when the sub-representation rotating accessories 180 and 190 move to the back side of the rotating petal portion 172L, the direction of rotation of the rendition sub-rotating accessories 180 and 190 can be changed variously. can be made Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game. In short, if it is possible for the second rotating body, such as each sub-rotary accessory for production 180 and 190, to move to the back side of the rotating plate portion provided in the first rotating body, the second rotation The rotation direction of the body may be any direction, and the rotation direction may be switched in the middle.

<<13-8-20>> Modification 20:
In the thirteenth embodiment and its modification, the rotating bodies 182 and 192 provided in the production sub rotating accessories 180 and 190 as an example of the second rotating body are supported by the rotating shafts 181 and 191. However, instead of this configuration, the second rotating body may be configured to be rotatable without having a rotation shaft. According to this configuration, the configuration can be simplified. In short, if it is possible for the second rotating body, such as each sub-rotary accessory for production 180 and 190, to move to the back side of the rotating plate portion provided in the first rotating body, the second rotation The body can be in any rotational mode.

<<13-8-21>> Modification 21:
In the thirteenth embodiment and its modification, the rotating bodies 182 and 192 provided in the sub-rotary accessories for production 180 and 190 were made of a resin material. It is good also as the structure formed with the material. Further, each rotating body 182 (192) is provided with a circular through-hole, and transparent resin 183, 184 (193, 194) is embedded in the through-hole. Although the rows 183a, 184a (193a, 194a) were drawn, instead, each rotating body is made of a uniform material (for example, iron) without through-holes, and has a A configuration in which characters are written may also be used. With this configuration, the configuration of the rotating body 182 (192) can be simplified, and the manufacturing of the rotating body 182 (192) is easy. In addition, there is also the effect that the rotating body 182 (192) rotates smoothly without rattling. In short, the second rotating body, which is an example of the sub-representative rotary accessories 180 and 190, moves to the back side of the rotating plate portion provided in the first rotating body, so that the second rotating body moves away from the light source. As long as the character can be visually recognized in a state in which the second rotating body is visible through the rotating plate portion by blocking the light, any configuration for writing the character may be used.

<<13-8-22>> Modification 22:
In the thirteenth embodiment and its modification, the rotating shafts 181 and 191 provided in the respective sub-rotary accessories for presentation 180 and 190 are arranged in the direction perpendicular to the surface of the game board 30 (hereinafter referred to as the vertical direction of the game board 30). ), and the direction of each rotating shaft 181, 191 was fixed in the vertical direction of the game board 30. The vertical direction of the board 30 may be changed to a direction inclined by a predetermined angle (for example, 5 degrees) from the vertical direction. According to this configuration, it is possible to realize an effect in which each of the sub rotating accessories for presentation 180 and 190 is rotated while changing the direction of each of the sub rotating accessories for presentation 180 and 190 like a so-called swing. . Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Furthermore, the inclination angle from the vertical direction is not limited to one direction, and may be changed in various directions. In short, if it is possible for the second rotating body, such as each sub-rotary accessory for production 180 and 190, to move to the back side of the rotating plate portion provided in the first rotating body, the second rotation The body can be in any rotational mode.

<<13-8-23>> Modification 23:
In the thirteenth embodiment and its modified example, when the number of round games is 16 by the big or small effect and there is a holding group, the rotating body 182 of the sub rotating accessory 180 for the first effect is drawn. The rainbow-colored character string 183a labeled "BIG" is magnified by the magnifying lens LZ and displayed. character string 184a of "BIG" is magnified and displayed by the magnifying lens LZ. In addition, when the number of round games is eight and there is a holding group, the rainbow-colored character string 193a of "SML" drawn on the rotating body 192 of the second effect sub-rotary accessory 190 is magnified. When the number of round games is 8 and there are no holding runs, the character string 194a in black "SML" drawn on the rotor 192 is magnified by the magnifying lens LZ. can take the form of On the other hand, as a modified example, the following configuration may be adopted.

FIG. 655 is a front view showing a pair of production sub-rotary accessories 880 and 890 in this modification. In this modification, when there is a holding group due to the big or small effect, and the number of round games is 16, the rainbow colored When the character string 883a of "BIG" is magnified by the magnifying lens LZ and displayed, there is a holding ream, and the number of round games is eight, the rainbow-colored "SML" drawn on the rotating body 882 '' 884a is magnified and displayed by the magnifying lens LZ. In addition, when there is no holding ream and the number of round games is 16, the character string 893a of the black "BIG" drawn on the rotating body 892 of the second effect sub-rotary accessory 890 is displayed by the magnifying lens. When it is magnified and displayed by LZ, there is no holding run, and the number of round games is 8, the character string 894a of black "SML" drawn on the rotating body 892 is magnified by the magnifying lens LZ. can take the form of In other words, in the thirteenth embodiment, when the number of round games is 16, the rainbow or black "BIG ” are magnified and displayed by the magnifying lens LZ, and when the number of round games is eight, the rainbow color or While the character strings 193a and 194a of black "SML" are enlarged and displayed by the magnifying lens LZ, in this modified example, when there is a holding stanza, the sub-rotation for the first effect shown in FIG. The rainbow-colored character strings 883a and 884a of "BIG" or "SML" drawn on the rotating body 882 of the role object 880 are magnified by the magnifying lens LZ and displayed. The character strings 893a and 894a of black "BIG" or "SML" drawn on the rotating body 892 of the sub rotating accessory 890 are enlarged by the magnifying lens LZ and displayed. According to this modified example, as in the thirteenth embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by providing the player with ups and downs of conflicting emotions such as anticipation and disappointment. The point is that the second rotating body, which is the second directing sub rotating accessory 180, 190 as an example, can be visually recognized through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating body, which is the directing main rotating accessory 170 as an example. A first mode in which the frequency of winning a big win in a winning lottery is high in a predetermined period and a second mode in which the frequency of winning a big win in a winning lottery in a predetermined period is lower than that in the first mode, according to the rotation mode of the rotating plate portion when it becomes. The configuration of the second rotating body may be any configuration as long as it can be configured to be one of the two modes.

<<13-8-24>> Modification 24:
In the thirteenth embodiment and its modification, the big or small effect processing causes 10 circular high-brightness Although the predetermined image in which the portion HB is arranged is displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, instead of this, an image in which another number (one or more) of the high luminance portions HB are arranged. may be displayed on the display surface 41 a of the pattern display device 41 . In short, the rotary bodies 182, 182, 182, 182, 182, 182, 182, 182, 182, 182, 182, 182, 182, 182, 182, 182, 182, 182, respectively, respectively, are moved to the uppermost position with respect to the magnifying lens LZ provided in the main rotating accessory for presentation 170 by the big or small presentation processing. When the character strings 183a, 184a, 193a, and 194a drawn in 192 are superimposed, if the character strings can be clearly recognized, what is the number of high-brightness portions HB and how are the positions of the high-brightness portions HB arranged? may be

<<13-8-25>> Modification 25:
In the thirteenth embodiment and its modification, the light source visible through the magnifying lens LZ provided in the petal portion 172L is the high-luminance portion HB included in the predetermined image displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. However, instead of this, the light source may be composed of various light emitting units such as a mercury lamp, an LED, and a laser light source. In addition, the overlapping position of the sub-rotating accessory for presentation 180, 190 with respect to the main rotating accessory for presentation 170 is defined as the outside of the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, and the position of the game board 30 corresponding to the overlapping position is determined. A configuration may be adopted in which the light emitting portion as the light source is arranged on the back surface side. According to this configuration, the configuration can be simplified. The light emitting unit as the light source arranged on the back side of the overlapping position of the game board 30 may be newly provided for illuminating the main rotating accessory 170 for production, or may be made of polycarbonate resin. A light-emitting portion originally provided on the back side of the game board 30 for design effects may be used as the light source. According to this configuration, the configuration can be simplified. Further, the light source is arranged on the back side of the overlapping position of the game board 30, but the back side referred to here does not necessarily have to be a position that coincides with the overlapping position when viewed from the front. As long as the light from the two can be visually recognized through the rotating plate portion, the position may not coincide with the overlapping position when viewed from the front. In short, as long as the light from the light source can be visually recognized through the rotating plate portion, the configuration of the light source may be any, and the position of the light source may be any.

<<13-8-26>> Modification 26:
In the thirteenth embodiment and its modification, the rotating body 182 (192) provided in the production sub rotating accessory 180 (190) moves to the back side of the rotating petal portion 172L. The character strings 183a, 184a (193a, 194a) described in (192) block the light from the high brightness portion HB, and the character strings 183a, 184a (193a, 194a) are visually recognized through the magnifying lens LZ of the petal portion 172L. It was possible. On the other hand, as a modification, the portion that blocks the light from the high brightness portion HB may be the entire rotating body 182 (192). In short, the portion that blocks the light from the high luminance portion HB may be any portion as long as it is at least a portion of the rotating body 182 (192).

<<13-8-27>> Modification 27:
In the thirteenth embodiment and its modification, when the pair of sub-rotary accessories for production 180 and 190 move to the highest position, the main rotating accessory for production 170 that has moved to the lowest position is equipped with As a first mode that is advantageous to the player, depending on which character strings 183a, 184a (193a, 194a) of the sub-rotary accessory 180 (190) for presentation exactly match with the magnifying lens LZ, A mode in which the number of round games won is 16 when the player wins, and a second mode in which the player's advantage is lower than the first mode, in which the number of round games won is 8 when the jackpot is won. It was configured to be distributed to one of the modes of turning. On the other hand, as a modified example, as a first mode advantageous to the player, instead of the mode in which the number of round games is 16, the result of the winning lottery is determined to be a jackpot winning. As a second mode in which the advantage is lower than that of the first mode, the result of winning lottery may be a loss. In addition, as the first mode that is advantageous to the player, it is also possible to replace with a configuration that increases the degree of expectation for the variable display, a configuration that increases the actual profit, a configuration that notifies highly profitable items, and the like. As a configuration that increases the expectation for the variable display, the type of reach develops into a type with a high expectation of winning the jackpot, the advance notice effect is replaced with a performance with a high expectation of winning the jackpot, and the time until the effect and result announcement. Various things can be adopted, such as one in which a timer that defines is activated. The actual benefits include a configuration in which the electric accessory 34a is opened multiple times, a configuration in which it is possible to win a time-saving grant, a configuration in which a small win is won in a jackpot lottery, and the frequency at which a game ball enters the first start port 33. Various configurations can be adopted, such as a configuration in which the "Time-saving provision" is a success/failure result that triggers the transition to the support mode, but does not trigger the transition to the opening/closing execution mode in which opening/closing of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is executed. Various items such as pachinko machine settings (settings that determine the probability of winning a jackpot) and a base value that indicates the ball payout rate at normal times can be used as the highly useful notification items. The second mode, which is less advantageous to the player than the first mode, is less advantageous to the player than these examples. With these configurations as well, similar to the thirteenth embodiment and its modification, it is possible to improve the sense of anticipation and enhance the interest in the game. In short, when the pair of sub rotating accessories for production 180 and 190 move to the highest point position, the magnifying lens LZ provided for the main rotating accessory for production 170 that has moved to the lowest position, Depending on which character strings 183a, 184a (193a, 194a) of the production sub-rotary accessory 180 (190) exactly match, the first mode advantageous to the player and the first advantage for the player are selected. Each of the first mode and the second mode may be of any type as long as it is configured to be assigned to either of the second mode and the second mode, which are lower than the mode.

<<13-8-28>> Modification 28:
In the thirteenth embodiment and its modification, the big or small effect using the effect main rotating accessory 170 and the effecting sub rotating accessory 180, 190 is a jackpot when the winning lottery result in the game round is won. However, instead of this, it may be configured to be executed when the result of the winning lottery in the game round is not a big win. In short, during any period during which a game is being played in the pachinko machine, an effect using the effect main rotating accessory 170 and the effecting sub rotating accessories 180 and 190 is executed. may be For example, during the period from when the game ball launching mechanism starts shooting the game ball to the front surface of the game board until the last game ball is discharged from the out port 43 provided at the bottom of the game board 30, an effect It may be configured to execute an effect using the main rotating accessory 170 and the sub rotating accessories 180 and 190 for each effect.

<<13-8-29>> Modification 29:
In the above embodiment and each modification, the outer frame of the pachinko machine is not limited to being made of wood, but may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin. , cast steel, stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, alloy steel, and other metals. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the modifications, the inner frame provided in the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin. It may be made of metal such as stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, or alloy steel. Further, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the front door frame provided in the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin, and may be made of steel (carbon steel), cast iron, or cast steel. , stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, alloy steel, and other metals. Further, in the above embodiment and each modification, the pachinko machine has a function of locking the inner frame to the outer frame so that it cannot be opened, and a function of locking the front door frame to the inner frame so that it cannot be opened. However, after adopting a configuration in which this cylinder lock is omitted, a first cylinder lock having a function of locking the inner frame to the outer frame so that it cannot be opened, and the front door frame A configuration in which a second cylinder lock having a function of locking the inner frame so that it cannot be opened may be employed. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, the configuration in which the rotation shaft for rotating the inner frame with respect to the outer frame is provided on the left side when viewed from the front is adopted. You may employ the structure provided. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modified examples, the configuration in which the rotation shaft for rotating the front door frame with respect to the inner frame is provided on the left side when viewed from the front is adopted. may be adopted. Further, in the above embodiment and each modification, the game board provided in the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin, and may be made of steel (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, It may be made of metal such as stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, or alloy steel. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, the game balls provided in the pachinko machine may be stamped balls on which characters are marked, or may be blank balls on which no characters are marked. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each modification, the pachinko machine employs a configuration including an upper tray and a lower tray, but the lower tray may be omitted and a configuration including only the upper tray may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, a configuration in which the operation handle is provided on the right side in front view is adopted, but a configuration in which the operation handle is provided on the left side in front view may be adopted. Also, a configuration in which the operation handle is provided on both the right side and the left side when viewed from the front may be adopted. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the modifications, the operating handle is provided with a touch sensor capable of detecting whether or not the player is gripping the operating handle (whether or not the player's hand is in contact with the operating handle). However, a configuration in which the touch sensor is omitted may be adopted. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modification, various configurations can be adopted as the shooting means capable of shooting game balls. Alternatively, a structure or the like may be adopted in which the game ball is shot using the wind pressure generated when the compressed gas is ejected. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, when the operating handle is turned clockwise by a predetermined amount, about 100 game balls are shot per minute. A configuration in which less than 100 (eg, 60) game balls are fired per minute may be used, and a configuration in which 100 or more (eg, 200) game balls are fired per minute may be used. good. Alternatively, the game ball may be shot one by one by flipping the lever. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, a configuration in which a speaker is provided as means capable of outputting sound is adopted, but a configuration in which an earphone jack is provided in addition to or instead of the speaker may be adopted. According to this configuration, the player can hear the sound of the pachinko machine he/she is playing without being disturbed by the sounds of the surrounding pachinko machines by connecting the earphones or headphones he/she has brought with him/herself to the earphone jack. It is possible to enjoy it in minutes. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, various configurations can be adopted as the display means capable of displaying the special symbol that starts the variable display based on the entry of the game ball into the various starting holes. For example, an LED lamp, an LED display device, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a halogen lamp, or the like may be employed. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modified examples, various configurations can be adopted as the display means capable of displaying the normal symbols that start the variable display based on the passage of the game ball through various gates, For example, an LED lamp, an LED display device, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a halogen lamp, or the like may be employed. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, various configurations can be adopted as display means capable of displaying various decorative patterns, such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, and an LED display device. , a rotating drum type display device, a light guide plate, a three-dimensional hologram display device, or the like may be employed. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, the decorative pattern is not limited to numerals, and various characters, figures, symbols, patterns, etc., and combinations thereof can be employed. For example, as decorative patterns, alphabets, Greek letters, hiragana, katakana, kanji, various characters, and combinations thereof may be employed. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each modification, the number of symbol rows in which decorative symbols are scrolled is not limited to three, and may be, for example, two or less, or four or more. In the case of adopting a configuration in which there is only one decorative pattern row, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a jackpot is won when a specific decorative pattern (for example, "7") stops. In the case of adopting a configuration in which two or more rows of decorative patterns are employed, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a jackpot is won when the same decorative patterns stop on a specific line. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, various configurations can be adopted as the special electric accessory. A configuration in which the large winning slot can be opened by rotating the plate-shaped member forward about the rotation shaft, or a configuration in which the large winning slot is opened and closed by a plate-shaped member that can slide in the front-rear direction of the game board, etc. may be adopted. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modifications described above, various configurations can be adopted as the ordinary electric accessory. A rotation shaft extending in a substantially horizontal direction is provided below the plate-shaped member, and the plate-shaped member rotates forward about the rotation shaft to open the starting port, front and rear of the game board A structure or the like that opens and closes the starting port by a plate-shaped member that can slide in a direction may be adopted. In addition, in the above embodiment and each modification, the number of winning balls set in each ball opening (starting hole, general winning opening, big winning opening, etc.) is an example, and is set for each ball opening. By appropriately changing the number of prize balls, it is possible to realize a plurality of types of pachinko machines with different specifications.

<<13-8-30>> Modification 30:
In the above embodiment and its modification, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to include three control devices, namely the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90, and the display control device 100, but instead of this, the main control device and It is good also as a structure provided with two control devices called a sub control device. The sub control device may be configured to execute various processes executed by the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 in the above embodiment. In addition, in the above embodiment and its modification, the various processes executed by each of the three control devices 60, 90, 100 are not necessarily limited to the division described in the above embodiment, and the three control devices 60, 90 , 100 as a whole should be able to execute various processes in the above embodiment.

<<Y>> Application to other configurations:
Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, such as a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory opens a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a pachinko machine in which a game ball enters a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a game machine such as a pachinko machine that generates a right and a jackpot, a pachinko machine with other accessories, an arrangement ball machine, and a mammoth ball.

In addition, a non-ball game machine, for example, equipped with a plurality of reels on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction, starts rotating the reels by inserting medals and operating a start lever, and operates a stop switch. or after the reels are stopped by the lapse of a predetermined time, if a specific pattern or a combination of specific patterns is formed on an effective line that can be visually recognized from the display window, a privilege such as payout of medals is given to the player. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

In addition, the game machine main body which is openably and closably supported by the outer frame is provided with a storage portion and a take-in device, and after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage portion are taken in by the take-in device, the start lever is operated. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, in which the reels start rotating.

Further, a part of the functions realized by software in the above embodiments may be realized by hardware, or a part of the functions realized by hardware may be realized by software.

<<Z>> Regarding the feature group extracted from each of the above embodiments, etc.:
A group of features (features of a group of inventions) extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following description, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above-described embodiments are shown in parentheses or the like as appropriate, but are not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses or the like.

<Feature lA group>
The feature lA group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature lA1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
When one game round is defined as the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended, a game round execution means (main control unit) for executing the game round MPU 62 on the board 61 side, and game round control processing of FIG. 29 executed by it);
State storage means (various flag storage areas) for storing state information (high-frequency support mode flag) capable of specifying a plurality of states including at least a first state (low-frequency support mode);
In a gaming machine comprising
The game round execution means is
means for shifting the stored state information from information specifying a state other than the first state to information specifying the first state when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition. A first transition mode (first drop mode) in which the timing is the start of the game round and a first transition mode in which the timing is the start of the game round and the timing is the end of the game round, as transition modes having different timings for transitioning the state information. and at least a second transition mode (leaving mode), and the first transition mode can be executed when a first condition is satisfied (when the result of the mode selection lottery is the first-leaving mode). , state information transition means (step S11104 in the hit determination process of FIG. 34, Sx1110 to Sx1116)
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature lA1, when the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, the state information stored in the state storage means is information specifying the first state from information specifying states other than the first state. However, the transition timing is switched between a first transition mode at the start of the game round and a second transition mode at the end of the game round. Therefore, according to feature lA1, in a game round when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, the game based on the information specifying the first state after the state information is transferred and the state information are transferred. A game is played in two ways, one based on information specifying a state other than the previous first state. Therefore, according to the characteristic lA1, it is possible to widen the range of game modes in game rounds, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature lA2]
The gaming machine according to feature lA1,
a ball entry means for allowing a game ball to enter;
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is changed between a state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the ball-entering means, and a state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter the ball-entering means. a state transition means for transitioning;
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein the control modes in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means are a first control mode and a control mode in which the state of the auxiliary means is different from that of the first control mode. a control means having at least a second control mode in which a game ball is easily entered into the ball means;
with
The control means is
When the state information stored in the state storage means is information specifying a state (high-frequency support mode) other than the first state, the second control mode can be executed, and the state storage means can execute the second control mode. A game machine characterized in that the first control mode can be executed when the state information stored in means is information specifying the first state (low-frequency support mode).

According to feature lA2, the control mode for transitioning the state of the auxiliary means is switched according to the state information stored in the state storage means. Therefore, according to feature 1A2, the player can guess the current state of the state information by visually observing the state of the auxiliary means. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature lA3]
The gaming machine according to feature 1A2,
The determination means is
As determination modes (lottery modes) for performing the determination, there are a first determination mode (low-probability mode) and a second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher than in the first determination mode. a judgment mode (high-probability mode);
The game round execution means is
Judgment mode determination means (FIG. 33) for determining in which of the first judgment mode and the second judgment mode the judgment by the judgment means in the game round is to be executed at the start of the game round. fall judgment processing) and
At the start of the game cycle in which the determination is determined to be performed in the first determination mode by the determination mode determining means, the state information is changed from information specifying a state other than the first state to the first state. (steps Sl1004, Sx1005, Sx1007 in the fall determination process in FIG. 33) for shifting to information specifying the state (low-frequency support mode);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature 1A3, the game round corresponding to the special information that satisfies a predetermined condition and is executed in the first transition mode when the first condition is established, and the first transition mode is determined by the determination mode determining means. In both cases of the game round in which it is decided to execute the judgment in the judgment mode, at the start of the game round, the state information determines the first state from the information specifying the state other than the first state. The state of the auxiliary means is shifted to the first control mode in conjunction with the change of the state information. Therefore, when the player observes that the state of the auxiliary means has changed to the first control mode at the start of the game round, the current game round corresponds to the special information that satisfies the predetermined condition. and the game round executed in the first transition mode when the first condition is satisfied and the game round determined to be judged in the first judgment mode by the judgment mode determining means. It is unknown which one, but it can be inferred that it was narrowed down to one of the two game times. In other words, it is possible to prevent the player from guessing which one of the two game rounds is due to the change in the state of the auxiliary means linked to the change in the state information. Therefore, according to feature 1A3, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency, and as a result, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature lA4]
A gaming machine according to feature lA2 or feature lA3,
The determination means is
As determination modes (lottery modes) for performing the determination, there are a first determination mode (low-probability mode) and a second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher than in the first determination mode. a judgment mode (high-probability mode);
The game round execution means is
Judgment mode determination means (FIG. 33) for determining in which of the first judgment mode and the second judgment mode the judgment by the judgment means in the game round is to be executed at the start of the game round. fall judgment processing) and
In the game round in which the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition and in which the judgment mode determining means decides to execute the judgment in the second judgment mode, the state information is changed to the first judgment mode. Means for maintaining information specifying a state other than the state (NO determination by step Sl1003 in the fall determination process of FIG. 33, NO determination by step Sl1104 in the hit determination process of FIG. 34);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature 1A4, a game round corresponding to special information that satisfies a predetermined condition and executed in the second transition mode when the second condition is established and the special information fulfills the predetermined condition. In either case of the game round in which the determination is determined to be executed in the second determination mode by the determination mode determination means (the game round at the time of loss), the state information is maintained in information identifying states other than the first state. Therefore, when the player observes that the state of the auxiliary means continues the second control mode in the game round, the game round this time corresponds to the special information that satisfies the predetermined condition. A game round that is executed in the second transition mode when the second condition is satisfied, and a game round in which the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition and is determined in the second determination mode by the determination mode determining means. It is unknown which one of the game rounds it was decided to execute, but it can be inferred that it was narrowed down to either one of the two game rounds. In other words, it is possible to prevent the player from guessing which of the two game rounds it is based on the state of the auxiliary means. Therefore, according to feature 1A4, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency, and as a result, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature 1A5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features lA1 to lA4,
The state information transfer means is
A game cycle after the number of executions of the game cycle reaches the predetermined number of times after the state information is changed from information specifying the first state to information specifying a state other than the first state. and means for shifting the state information when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition.

According to feature 1A5, after the state information is changed from the information specifying the first state to the information specifying a state other than the first state, the game is played after the number of times the game has been executed reaches a predetermined number of times. In the event that it is a time and the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, it is possible to widen the range of game modes.

<Feature lB group>
The feature lB group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature lB1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
When one game round is defined as the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended, a game round execution means (main control unit) for executing the game round MPU 62 on the board 61 side, and the game turn control process of FIG. 29 executed by it);
An effect execution means for executing an effect in the game round;
In a gaming machine comprising
The production executing means is
It is assumed that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition as a first condition (winning a jackpot in a winning lottery), and the first result that the first condition is satisfied and the game more than the first condition. A second result in which a second condition with a low degree of advantage for the player (it is determined that a loss reach occurs) is satisfied, and a third condition with a lower degree of advantage for the player than the second condition (fall a result notification effect means for executing a result notification effect for notifying which of the third result of winning the lottery) is established;
means for executing a predetermined effect before the result notification effect, wherein the predetermined effect is a first suggesting effect (life or death) suggesting that one of the first result and the third result is applicable. Execution of a predetermined effect for executing either one of a battle effect) and a second suggesting effect (superiority battle effect) suggesting that one of the first result and the second result is met. means and
A game machine with

According to the feature lB1, in the game round, there are a first result that the first condition that the special information satisfies a predetermined condition and a second condition that is less advantageous to the player than the first condition. A result notification effect is executed for notifying which of the second result that is satisfied and the third result that the third condition that is less advantageous to the player than the second condition is satisfied. However, as a result, a predetermined effect is executed before the notification effect. Predetermined effects include a first suggestive effect suggesting that one of the first result and the third result is applicable, and a suggestion that one of the first result and the second result is applicable. and a second suggestion effect to be performed. Conventionally, when suggesting three results, it is common to suggest one of the first result, the second result, and the third result, but in this case is limited to one type of suggestive production. On the other hand, according to feature lB1, a first suggesting effect suggesting that one of the first result and the third result corresponds, and one of the first result and the second result It is possible to execute two types of suggestive effects, such as a second suggestive effect suggesting that one corresponds to the above. Therefore, according to the characteristic lB1, it is possible to widen the range of the mode of the predetermined effect performed before the result notification effect in the game round, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature lB2]
The gaming machine according to feature lB1,
State storage means (various flag storage areas) for storing state information (high-frequency support mode flag) capable of specifying a plurality of states including at least a first state (low-frequency support mode),
The game round execution means is
means for shifting the stored state information from information specifying a state other than the first state to information specifying the first state when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition. A first transition mode (first drop mode) in which the timing is the start of the game round and a first transition mode in which the timing is the start of the game round and the timing is the end of the game round as transition modes in which the state information is shifted at different timings. and at least a second transition mode (leaving mode), wherein the first transition mode can be executed when a first condition is satisfied (when the mode selection lottery result is the first-leaving mode). , state information transition means (step Sl1104 in the hit determination process of FIG. 34, Sx1110 to Sx1116),
The predetermined effect execution means is
means for executing the first suggestive effect in a game cycle in which the transition is performed in the first transition mode, and executing the second suggestive effect in the game cycle in which the transition is performed in the second transition mode. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature lB2, when the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, the state information stored in the state storage means is information specifying the first state from information specifying states other than the first state. However, the timing of this transition is switched between a first transition mode at the start of the game round and a second transition mode at the end of the game round. A first suggestive effect is executed in a game round in which the transition is made in the mode, and a second suggestive effect is executed in the game round in which the transition is made in the second transition mode. Therefore, according to feature 1B2, in a game round when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, the first suggestive effect based on the information specifying the first state after the transition of the state information, and the state information is changed. A second suggestive effect based on information specifying a state other than the first state before transition is performed. Therefore, according to feature 1B2, it is possible to widen the range of aspects of presentation in game rounds when the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, and it is possible to further improve the interest in the game. .

[Feature lB3]
The gaming machine according to feature 1B2,
a ball entry means for allowing a game ball to enter;
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is changed between a state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the ball-entering means, and a state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter the ball-entering means. a state transition means for transitioning;
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein the control modes in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means are a first control mode and a control mode in which the state of the auxiliary means is different from that of the first control mode. a control means having at least a second control mode in which a game ball is easily entered into the ball means;
with
The control means is
When the state information stored in the state storage means is information specifying a state (high-frequency support mode) other than the first state, the second control mode can be executed, and the state storage means can execute the second control mode. A game machine characterized in that the first control mode can be executed when the state information stored in means is information specifying the first state (low-frequency support mode).

According to feature lB3, the control mode for transitioning the state of the auxiliary means is switched according to the state information stored in the state storage means. Therefore, according to feature 1B3, the player can guess the current state of the state information by visually observing the state of the auxiliary means. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature lB4]
The gaming machine according to feature 1B3,
The determination means is
As determination modes (lottery modes) for performing the determination, there are a first determination mode (low-probability mode) and a second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher than in the first determination mode. a judgment mode (high-probability mode);
The game round execution means is
Judgment mode determination means (FIG. 33) for determining in which of the first judgment mode and the second judgment mode the judgment by the judgment means in the game round is to be executed at the start of the game round. fall judgment processing) and
At the start of the game cycle in which the determination is determined to be performed in the first determination mode by the determination mode determining means, the state information is changed from information specifying a state other than the first state to the first state. (steps Sl1004, Sx1005, Sx1007 in the fall determination process in FIG. 33) for shifting to information specifying the state (low-frequency support mode);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature 1B4, the game round corresponding to the special information that satisfies a predetermined condition and is executed in the first transition mode when the first condition is established, and the first transition mode is determined by the judgment mode determining means. In both cases of the game round in which it is decided to execute the judgment in the judgment mode, at the start of the game round, the state information determines the first state from the information specifying the state other than the first state. The state of the auxiliary means is shifted to the first control mode in conjunction with the change of the state information. Therefore, when the player observes that the state of the auxiliary means has changed to the first control mode at the start of the game round, the current game round corresponds to the special information that satisfies the predetermined condition. and the game round executed in the first transition mode when the first condition is satisfied and the game round determined to be judged in the first judgment mode by the judgment mode determining means. It is unknown which one, but it can be inferred that it was narrowed down to one of the two game times. In other words, it is possible to prevent the player from guessing which one of the two game rounds is due to the change in the state of the auxiliary means linked to the change in the state information. Therefore, according to feature 1B4, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency, and as a result, it is possible to further improve the amusement of the game.

[Feature lB5]
A gaming machine according to feature 1B3 or feature 1B4,
The determination means is
As determination modes (lottery modes) for performing the determination, there are a first determination mode (low-probability mode) and a second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher than in the first determination mode. a judgment mode (high-probability mode);
The game round execution means is
Judgment mode determination means (FIG. 33) for determining in which of the first judgment mode and the second judgment mode the judgment by the judgment means in the game round is to be executed at the start of the game round. fall judgment processing) and
In the game round in which the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition and in which the judgment mode determining means decides to execute the judgment in the second judgment mode, the state information is changed to the first judgment mode. Means for maintaining information specifying a state other than the state of (NO determination by step Sl1003 in the fall determination process of FIG. 33, NO determination by step Sl1104 in the hit determination process of FIG. 34);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature 1B5, the game round corresponding to the special information that satisfies the predetermined condition and the second condition is satisfied and is executed in the second transition mode, and the special information satisfies the predetermined condition. In either case of the game round in which the determination is determined to be executed in the second determination mode by the determination mode determination means (the game round at the time of loss), the state information is maintained in information identifying states other than the first state. Therefore, when the player observes that the state of the auxiliary means continues the second control mode in the game round, the game round this time corresponds to the special information that satisfies the predetermined condition. A game round that is executed in the second transition mode when the second condition is satisfied, and a game round in which the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition and is determined in the second determination mode by the determination mode determining means. It is unknown which one of the game rounds it was decided to execute, but it can be inferred that it was narrowed down to either one of the two game rounds. In other words, it is possible to prevent the player from guessing which of the two game rounds it is based on the state of the auxiliary means. Therefore, according to feature 1B5, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency, and as a result, it is possible to further improve the amusement of the game.

[Feature lB6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features 1B1 to 1B5,
The state information transfer means is
A game cycle after the number of executions of the game cycle reaches the predetermined number of times after the state information is changed from information specifying the first state to information specifying a state other than the first state. and means for shifting the state information when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition.

According to feature 1B6, after the state information is changed from the information specifying the first state to the information specifying a state other than the first state, the game is played after the number of times the game has been executed reaches a predetermined number of times. When it is the first time and the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, it is possible to widen the range of aspects of presentation.

<Characteristic lC group>
The feature lC group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment and its modifications.

[Characteristic lC1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
When one game round is defined as the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended, a game round execution means (main control unit) for executing the game round MPU 62 on the board 61 side, and the game turn control process of FIG. 29 executed by it);
Predetermined action execution means (electric role product 34a, electric role product drive unit 34b) capable of executing a predetermined action capable of changing the degree of advantage for the player;
An effect execution means for executing an effect in the game round;
In a gaming machine comprising
The game round execution means is
When the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, the motion mode of the predetermined motion by the predetermined motion executing means is changed from the second motion mode to be more advantageous for the player than the second motion mode. A first transition mode (premature drop mode), which is a means for shifting to a first operation mode with a low degree, wherein the timing is set to the start of the game round as a transition mode with a different timing for shifting the operation mode. and a second transition mode (rearward drop mode) in which the timing is the end of the game cycle (steps Sl1104, Sx1110 to Sx1116 in the hit determination process in FIG. 34),
The production executing means is
In the game round in which the transition is performed in the first transition mode, the first effect (life-and-death battle effect) is executed, and in the game round in which the transition is performed in the second transition mode, the first effect is performed. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for executing a second effect (superiority battle effect) suggesting that the degree of advantage is high for the player.

According to the feature lC1, when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, the action mode of the predetermined action by the predetermined action executing means is changed from the second action mode to the second action mode for the player. The transition is made to a first operation mode with a low degree of advantage, but the timing of this transition is a first transition mode at the start of a game round, or a second transition mode at the end of a game round. can be switched between. Then, in the game round in which the transition is performed in the first transition mode, that is, in the game round in which the movement moves to the first action with the low advantage degree early, the first effect on the side with the low advantage degree for the player is executed. , in the game cycle in which the transition is performed in the second transition mode, that is, in the game cycle in which the game moves to the first action with the low degree of advantage late, the second effect on the side with the high degree of advantage for the player is executed. . Therefore, according to the characteristic lC1, in a game round when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, the predetermined action performed by the predetermined action executing means conforms to the degree of advantage that the player can obtain, and is advantageous for the player. A first effect and a second effect having different degrees can be switched and performed. Therefore, according to feature lC1, it is possible to widen the range of aspects of presentation in game rounds when the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature lC2]
The gaming machine according to feature lC1,
The predetermined operation execution means is
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the entry means into which the game ball can enter;
The state of the auxiliary means is changed between a state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the ball-entering means, and a state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter the ball-entering means. a state transition means for transitioning;
with
The game round execution means is
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein as control modes in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means, there is a first control mode, and the input mode is different from the first control mode. and at least a second control mode in which the game ball can be easily entered into the ball means, and the first operation mode is realized by executing the first control mode, and the second control mode is implemented. A gaming machine comprising: control means for realizing the second operation mode according to a mode.

According to feature lC2, by switching the control mode for transitioning the state of the auxiliary means from the second control mode to the first control mode, the operation mode of the predetermined operation performed by the predetermined operation executing means can be changed to the second operation mode. From the mode, it is possible to shift to the first motion mode, which is less advantageous for the player than the second motion mode. Therefore, according to the characteristic lC2, the controllability is excellent.

[Feature lC3]
The gaming machine according to feature LC2,
The determination means is
As determination modes (lottery modes) for performing the determination, there are a first determination mode (low-probability mode) and a second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher than in the first determination mode. a judgment mode (high-probability mode);
The game round execution means is
Judgment mode determination means (FIG. 33) for determining in which of the first judgment mode and the second judgment mode the judgment by the judgment means in the game round is to be executed at the start of the game round. fall judgment processing) and
At the start of the game round in which the determination is determined to be performed in the first determination mode by the determination mode determination means, the operation mode of the predetermined operation by the predetermined operation execution unit is changed to the second operation mode. means for shifting from the operation mode to the first operation mode (steps S11004, Sx1005, and Sx1007 in the fall determination process in FIG. 33);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature lC3, the game round corresponding to the special information that satisfies a predetermined condition and is executed in the first transition mode when the first condition is established, and the first transition mode is determined by the judgment mode determining means. In both cases of the game round in which it is decided to execute the judgment in the judgment mode, the operation mode of the predetermined operation by the predetermined operation executing means is changed from the second operation mode to the second operation mode at the start of the game round. , to the first action mode which is less advantageous for the player than the second action mode. Therefore, when the player observes that the action mode of the predetermined action performed by the predetermined action executing means has changed to the first action mode at the start of the game round, the current game round satisfies the predetermined condition. A game round corresponding to the special information that satisfies a first condition and executed in the first transition mode, and the judgment mode determining means decides to execute the judgment in the first judgment mode. It is unknown which one of the game rounds was played, but it can be inferred that it was narrowed down to one of the two game rounds. In other words, it is possible to prevent the player from guessing which one of the two game rounds it is based on the change in the action mode of the predetermined action executing means. Therefore, according to the feature lC3, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency, and as a result, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature lC4]
A gaming machine according to feature lC2 or feature lC3,
The determination means is
As determination modes (lottery modes) for performing the determination, there are a first determination mode (low-probability mode) and a second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher than in the first determination mode. a judgment mode (high-probability mode);
The game round execution means is
Judgment mode determination means (FIG. 33) for determining in which of the first judgment mode and the second judgment mode the judgment by the judgment means in the game round is to be executed at the start of the game round. fall judgment processing) and
In the game round in which the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition and in which the determination mode determination means determines to perform the determination in the second determination mode, the predetermined action execution means performs the determination in the game round. Means for maintaining the motion mode of a predetermined motion in the second motion mode (NO determination in step Sl1003 in the fall determination process in FIG. 33, NO determination in step Sl1104 in the hit determination process in FIG. 34);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature lC4, a game round corresponding to special information that satisfies a predetermined condition and is executed in the second transition mode when the second condition is satisfied, and the special information meets the predetermined condition. In either case of the game round in which the determination is determined in the second determination mode by the determination mode determining means (the game round at the time of loss), the predetermined action is performed in the game round. The operation mode of the predetermined operation by the execution means is maintained in the second operation mode. Therefore, when the player observes that the motion mode of the predetermined motion performed by the predetermined motion executing means continues in the second motion mode in the game round, the current game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition. a game round corresponding to special information that satisfies a second condition and executed in a second transition mode; Although it is unclear which one of the game rounds is decided to execute the judgment in the second judgment mode by , it can be assumed that it has been narrowed down to one of the two game rounds. In other words, it is possible to prevent the player from guessing which one of the two game rounds it is based on the action mode of the predetermined action executing means. Therefore, according to feature LC4, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency, and as a result, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

<Characteristic lD group>
The feature lD group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature lD1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
When one game round is defined as the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended, a game round execution means (main control unit) for executing the game round MPU 62 on the board 61 side, and the game turn control process of FIG. 29 executed by it);
State storage means (various flag storage areas) for storing state information (high-frequency support mode flag) capable of specifying a plurality of states including at least a first state (low-frequency support mode);
An effect execution means for executing an effect in the game round;
In a gaming machine comprising
The determination means is
As determination modes (lottery modes) for performing the determination, there are a first determination mode (low-probability mode) and a second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher than in the first determination mode. a judgment mode (high-probability mode);
The game round execution means is
Judgment mode determination means (FIG. 33) for determining in which of the first judgment mode and the second judgment mode the judgment by the judgment means in the game round is to be executed at the start of the game round. fall judgment processing) and
It is determined by the determination mode determining means that the determination is to be performed in the second determination mode (not winning the falling lottery), and the special information satisfies the predetermined condition (the big win in the winning lottery). ) is a specific case, and at the start of the game cycle in the specific case, the first state is specified from the stored state information specifying a state other than the first state. Game turn start time state information transfer means (steps Sl1104, Sx1110 to Sx1116 in the hit determination process in FIG. 34) that performs processing to transfer to information to
At the end of the game round related to the specific case, the game round is completed by performing a process of shifting the stored state information from information specifying a state other than the first state to information specifying the first state. time state information transition means (step S11606 in game state transition processing in FIG. 39);
When the first condition is satisfied (when the result of the mode selection lottery is the first drop mode), the processing by the state information transfer means at the start of the game cycle can be executed, and when the second condition is satisfied (mode selection transition switching means for enabling execution of the process by the state information transition means at the end of the game cycle when the result of the lottery is the backward drop mode;
with
The production executing means is
In the game round related to the specific case, the judgment mode determination means has decided to execute the judgment in the first judgment mode (winning a fall lottery), and the special information is the predetermined condition a first suggestive effect means for executing a suggestive effect (life-and-death battle effect) suggesting that one of the above conditions is fulfilled (winning a jackpot in a winning lottery);
In the game round pertaining to the specific case, the judgment mode determining means has decided to execute the judgment in the second judgment mode, and the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. and second suggestive effect means for executing a suggestive effect (superiority battle effect) suggesting that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition;
The suggestive performance by the first suggestive performance means can be executed when the first condition is established, and the suggestive performance by the second suggestive performance means can be executed when the second condition is established. Suggestive effect switching means (steps S12603 to Sx2608 in the effect pattern setting process after the guaranteed number of games in FIG. 49),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature lD1, when the determination mode determination means determines to execute the determination in the second determination mode, and when the special information satisfies a predetermined condition (=specific case), at the start of the game round , the state information is changed from the information specifying the state other than the first state to the information specifying the first state, and the determination mode determining means determines that the determination is to be performed in the first determination mode. or that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition. The determination by the determination mode determination means to execute the determination in the first determination mode means that the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is low, so the degree of advantage for the player is low. turn into. On the other hand, if the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, the degree of advantage for the player increases. Therefore, according to the characteristic 1D1, when the timing of changing the state information to the information specifying the first state is the start time of the player, the degree of advantage for the player is low, and the advantage for the player is A suggestive effect is executed that suggests that the degree is high, or that it corresponds to either one of the above. If it is assumed that the transition of the state information from information specifying a state other than the first state to information specifying the first state is disadvantageous to the player, then according to feature lD1 , the player will be disadvantaged at the start of the game cycle, and before notifying the player of this fact, the player is told that the degree of advantage for the player is low and that the advantage for the player is high. It is possible to perform a suggestive effect suggesting that one of the two is applicable. Therefore, according to the feature lD1, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Further, according to the feature 1D1, the determination mode determination means determines to execute the determination in the second determination mode, and the special information satisfies a predetermined condition (=specific case). At the time of termination, the state information is changed from the information specifying the state other than the first state to the information specifying the first state, and the determination mode determining means determines that the determination is to be performed in the second determination mode. and the special information does not satisfy the prescribed conditions, or the special information satisfies the prescribed conditions. . It can be said that it is neither advantageous nor disadvantageous for the player when the determination mode determination means determines to execute the determination in the second determination mode and the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. On the other hand, if the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, the degree of advantage for the player increases. Therefore, according to the feature lD1, when the timing of changing the state information to the information specifying the first state is the time when the player ends, the player is neither advantageous nor disadvantageous. A suggestive effect is executed that suggests that the degree of advantage is high or that it corresponds to one of the above. If it is assumed that the transition of the state information from information specifying a state other than the first state to information specifying the first state is disadvantageous to the player, then according to feature lD1 Since the player will not be disadvantaged until the game round ends, either the game round is neither advantageous nor disadvantageous to the player, or the degree of advantage to the player is high. It is possible to perform a suggestive production that suggests that it corresponds to Therefore, according to the characteristic lD1, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation, and as a result, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

Further, according to the feature lD1, in the game turn related to the case where the judgment mode decision means decides to execute the judgment in the second judgment mode and the special information satisfies a predetermined condition (=specific case). , a suggestive effect by the first suggestive effect means and a suggestive effect by the second suggestive effect means. Therefore, according to the feature 1D1, it is possible to widen the range of aspects of presentation in a specific game round, and to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature lD2]
The gaming machine according to feature lD1,
a ball entry means for allowing a game ball to enter;
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is changed between a state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the ball-entering means, and a state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter the ball-entering means. a state transition means for transitioning;
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein the control modes in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means are a first control mode and a control mode in which the state of the auxiliary means is different from that of the first control mode. a control means having at least a second control mode in which a game ball is easily entered into the ball means;
with
The control means is
When the state information stored in the state storage means is information specifying a state (high-frequency support mode) other than the first state, the second control mode can be executed, and the state storage means can execute the second control mode. A game machine characterized in that the first control mode can be executed when the state information stored in means is information specifying the first state (low-frequency support mode).

According to feature 1D2, the control mode for transitioning the state of the auxiliary means is switched according to the state information stored in the state storage means. Therefore, according to feature 1D2, the player can guess the current state of the state information by visually observing the state of the auxiliary means. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature lD3]
A gaming machine according to feature 1D1 or feature 1D2,
Each of the state information transfer means at the start of a game cycle and the state information transfer means at the end of a game cycle,
A game cycle after the number of executions of the game cycle reaches the predetermined number of times after the state information is changed from information specifying the first state to information specifying a state other than the first state. and means for shifting the state information in the specific case.

According to feature 1D3, after the state information is changed from the information specifying the first state to the information specifying a state other than the first state, the game is played after the number of times the game has been executed reaches a predetermined number of times. In the event that it is a time and the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, it is possible to widen the range of game modes.

<Characteristic lE group>
The feature lE group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature lE1]
a ball entry means for allowing a game ball to enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information triggered by the entry of a game ball into said ball entry means;
Means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition, and includes a first determination mode (low-probability mode) as a determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination; a second determination mode (high-probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher than that in the first determination mode;
When one game round is defined as the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended, a game round execution means (main control unit) for executing the game round MPU 62 on the board 61 side, and the game turn control process of FIG. 29 executed by it);
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is changed between a state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the ball-entering means, and a state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter the ball-entering means. a state transition means for transitioning;
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein the control modes in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means are a first control mode and a control mode in which the state of the auxiliary means is different from that of the first control mode. a control means having at least a second control mode in which a game ball is easily entered into the ball means;
An effect execution means for executing an effect in the game round;
In a gaming machine comprising
Triggered by the establishment of a predetermined transition condition, the determination mode is shifted from the first determination mode to the second determination mode, and the control mode is changed from the first control mode to the second control mode. Judgment mode/control mode transition means for transitioning to a mode;
Judgment mode determination means (FIG. 33) for determining in which of the first judgment mode and the second judgment mode the judgment by the judgment means in the game round is to be executed at the start of the game round. fall judgment processing) and
The determination mode is shifted from the second determination mode to the first determination mode at the start of the game round determined by the determination mode determining means to execute the determination in the first determination mode. determination mode transition means (step S11004 in the fall determination process in FIG. 33);
Starting from the time when the judgment mode is shifted from the first judgment mode to the second judgment mode by the judgment mode/control mode shifting means, the number of times the game is executed from the starting point reaches a predetermined number. a predetermined number of preprocessing means for continuing the second control mode as the control mode until the
After the number of executions of the game rounds from the starting point reaches the predetermined number of times, if the determination mode is the second determination mode, continuing the second control mode as the control mode; post-processing means for a predetermined number of times to shift the control mode from the second control mode to the first control mode when the determination mode shifts from the second control mode to the first determination mode;
with
The production executing means is
When the second control mode continues as the control mode after the number of executions of the game rounds from the starting point reaches the predetermined number, the first determination is made by the determination mode determining means. In the game round in which it was decided to execute the determination in the mode (game round in which the fall lottery was won), or in the game round in which the special information satisfies the predetermined condition (game round in which the jackpot was won), a first effect means for effecting predetermined content (life-and-death battle effect);
A game round in which the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the judgment mode determining means decides to execute the judgment in the second judgment mode (disappearing game round), or a second effect means for effecting a performance (superiority battle effect) different from the predetermined content in the game times (game times in which the jackpot is won) in which the special information satisfies the predetermined condition;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature lE1, the control mode changes to the second control mode after the number of game rounds executed from the starting point reaches a predetermined number of times, starting from when the determination mode is shifted to the second determination mode. If it continues, predetermined content is added to the game round in which the judgment mode determination means determines to execute the judgment in the first judgment mode, or in the game round in which the special information satisfies the predetermined condition. A performance is performed. On the other hand, the special information does not satisfy the predetermined conditions, and the game times determined by the determination mode determination means to execute the determination in the second determination mode, or the special information satisfies the predetermined conditions. , an effect with content different from the predetermined content is executed. Therefore, in the game round after the number of game rounds executed from the starting point has reached a predetermined number, two kinds of effects, that is, the effect with the predetermined content and the effect with the content different from the predetermined content, can be performed. It is possible to widen the range of aspects of presentation and to improve the amusement of the game.

[Feature lE2]
The gaming machine according to feature lE1,
The special information satisfies the predetermined condition when the control mode is maintained in the second control mode after the number of executions of the game rounds from the starting point reaches the predetermined number of times. means for shifting the determination mode from the second determination mode to the first determination mode at the start of the game round (when the jackpot is won);
The first production means is
As an effect of the predetermined content, the determination mode determining means determines that the determination is to be performed in the first determination mode (won a falling lottery), and the special information satisfies the predetermined condition. A gaming machine characterized by executing a suggestive effect (life-and-death battle effect) suggesting that the player has become a winner (a big win in a winning lottery) or either of the above.

According to the feature lE2, the special information satisfies a predetermined condition when the control mode is maintained in the second control mode after the number of game times executed from the starting point reaches a predetermined number. At the start of a certain game cycle and at the start of a game cycle in which the determination mode determining means determines to execute determination in the first determination mode, the determination mode shifts from the second determination mode to the first determination mode. In addition, in the game round, either the judgment mode determining means has decided to execute the judgment in the first judgment mode, or the special information satisfies a predetermined condition. A suggestive effect is executed to suggest that the The determination by the determination mode determination means to execute the determination in the first determination mode means that the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is low, so the degree of advantage for the player is low. turn into. On the other hand, if the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, the degree of advantage for the player increases. Therefore, according to feature lE2, a suggestive effect is executed that suggests that the degree of advantage for the player is low or that the degree of advantage for the player is high. It is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency, and as a result, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature lE3]
A gaming machine according to feature lE1 or feature lE2,
The second effect means is
As a presentation of content different from the predetermined content, the determination mode determining means determines that the determination is to be performed in the second determination mode, and the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. A game characterized by executing a suggestive effect (superiority battle effect) that suggests that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, or that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition. machine.

According to feature lE3, the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, and the determination mode determining means determines to execute the determination in the second determination mode, or the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. In a game cycle that satisfies the condition, a suggestive performance suggesting that it is neither advantageous nor disadvantageous to the player, or that the degree of advantage to the player is high, can be performed. Therefore, according to feature lE3, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation, and as a result, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

<Characteristic IF group>
The feature IF group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature lF1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
When one game round is defined as the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended, a game round execution means (main control unit) for executing the game round MPU 62 on the board 61 side, and the game turn control process of FIG. 29 executed by it);
State storage means (various flag storage areas) for storing state information (high-frequency support mode flag) capable of specifying a plurality of states including at least a first state (low-frequency support mode);
An effect execution means for executing an effect in the game round;
In a gaming machine comprising
The determination means is
As determination modes (lottery modes) for performing the determination, there are a first determination mode (low-probability mode) and a second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher than in the first determination mode. a judgment mode (high-probability mode);
The game round execution means is
Judgment mode determination means (FIG. 33) for determining in which of the first judgment mode and the second judgment mode the judgment by the judgment means in the game round is to be executed at the start of the game round. fall judgment processing) and
It is determined by the determination mode determining means that the determination is to be performed in the second determination mode (not winning the falling lottery), and the special information satisfies the predetermined condition (the big win in the winning lottery). ) is a specific case, and at the end of the game round related to the specific case, the stored state information specifies the first state from information specifying a state other than the first state. game turn end state information transition means (step S11606 in game state transition processing in FIG. 39) for performing processing to transition to information to be performed;
with
The production executing means is
In the game round pertaining to the specific case, the judgment mode determining means has decided to execute the judgment in the second judgment mode, and the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. and that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition; Amusement machine.

According to feature lF1, at the end of the game round when it is determined by the determination mode determination means that the determination is to be performed in the second determination mode, and when the special information satisfies a predetermined condition (=specific case), The state information is changed from information specifying a state other than the first state to information specifying the first state, and the determination mode determining means determines to perform determination in the second determination mode, and A suggestive effect is executed to suggest that the special information does not satisfy the prescribed condition or that the special information satisfies the prescribed condition. It can be said that it is neither advantageous nor disadvantageous for the player when the determination mode determination means determines to execute the determination in the second determination mode and the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. On the other hand, if the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, the degree of advantage for the player increases. Therefore, according to the feature IF1, when the timing of changing the state information to the information specifying the first state is the time when the player ends, the player is neither advantageous nor disadvantageous. A suggestive effect is executed that suggests that the degree of advantage is high or that it corresponds to one of the above. If it is assumed that the transition of the state information from information specifying a state other than the first state to information specifying the first state is disadvantageous to the player, then according to feature lF1 Since the player will not be disadvantaged until the game round ends, either the game round is neither advantageous nor disadvantageous to the player, or the degree of advantage to the player is high. It is possible to perform a suggestive production that suggests that it corresponds to Therefore, according to the feature IF1, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation, and as a result, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature lF2]
The gaming machine according to feature 1F1,
The game round execution means is
At the start of the game cycle in the specific case, a game cycle is started by performing a process of shifting the stored state information from information specifying a state other than the first state to information specifying the first state. time state information transfer means (steps Sl1104, Sx1110 to Sx1116 in the hit determination process in FIG. 34);
When the first condition is satisfied (when the result of the mode selection lottery is the first drop mode), the processing by the state information transfer means at the start of the game cycle can be executed, and when the second condition is satisfied (mode selection transition switching means for enabling execution of the process by the state information transition means at the end of the game cycle when the result of the lottery is the backward drop mode;
with
The production executing means is
In the game round related to the specific case, the judgment mode determination means has decided to execute the judgment in the first judgment mode (winning a fall lottery), and the special information is the predetermined condition a second suggestive effect means for executing a suggestive effect (life-and-death battle effect) suggesting that the condition has been fulfilled (winning a jackpot in a winning lottery);
The suggestive performance by the second suggestive performance means can be executed when the first condition is established, and the suggestive performance by the first suggestive performance means can be executed when the second condition is established. Suggestive effect switching means (steps S12603 to Sx2608 in the effect pattern setting process after the guaranteed number of games in FIG. 49),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature 1F2, when the determination mode determination means determines to execute determination in the second determination mode, and when the special information satisfies a predetermined condition (=specific case), at the start of the game cycle, The state information is changed from information specifying a state other than the first state to information specifying the first state, and determination is made by the determination mode determination means to execute determination in the first determination mode. or that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition. The fact that the judgment mode determining means decides to execute the judgment in the first judgment mode means that the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition becomes low, so the degree of advantage for the player becomes low. end up On the other hand, if the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, the degree of advantage for the player increases. Therefore, according to the characteristic 1D1, when the timing of changing the state information to the information specifying the first state is the start time of the player, the degree of advantage for the player is low, and the advantage for the player is A suggestive effect is executed to suggest that the degree is high and that it corresponds to either one of the above. If it is assumed that the transition of the state information from information specifying a state other than the first state to information specifying the first state is disadvantageous to the player, then according to the feature lF2 , the player will be disadvantaged at the start of the game cycle, and before notifying the player of this fact, the player is told that the degree of advantage for the player is low and that the degree of advantage for the player is high. It is possible to perform a suggestive effect suggesting that one of these cases is applicable. Therefore, according to the feature IF2, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

[Feature lF3]
A gaming machine according to feature 1F1 or feature 1F2,
a ball entry means for allowing a game ball to enter;
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is changed between a state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the ball-entering means, and a state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter the ball-entering means. a state transition means for transitioning;
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein as control modes in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means, there is a first control mode, and the input mode is different from the first control mode. a control means having at least a second control mode in which a game ball is easily entered into the ball means;
with
The control means is
When the state information stored in the state storage means is information specifying a state (high-frequency support mode) other than the first state, the second control mode can be executed, and the state storage means can execute the second control mode. A game machine characterized in that the first control mode can be executed when the state information stored in means is information specifying the first state (low-frequency support mode).

According to feature 1F3, the control mode for transitioning the state of the auxiliary means is switched according to the state information stored in the state storage means. Therefore, according to the feature IF3, the player can guess the current state of the state information by visually observing the state of the auxiliary means. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature lF4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features 1F1 to 1F3,
Each of the state information transfer means at the start of a game cycle and the state information transfer means at the end of a game cycle,
A game cycle after the number of executions of the game cycle reaches the predetermined number of times after the state information is changed from information specifying the first state to information specifying a state other than the first state. and means for shifting the state information in the specific case.

According to the feature IF4, after the state information is changed from the information specifying the first state to the information specifying a state other than the first state, the game is played after the number of times the game has been executed reaches a predetermined number of times. In the event that it is a time and the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, it is possible to widen the range of game modes.

<Characteristic lG group>
The feature lG group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from modification 2 of the first embodiment.

[Feature lG1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
When one game round is defined as the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended, a game round execution means (main control unit) for executing the game round MPU 62 on the board 61 side, and the game turn control process of FIG. 29 executed by it);
State storage means (various flag storage areas) for storing state information (high-frequency support mode flag) capable of specifying a plurality of states including at least a first state (low-frequency support mode);
In a gaming machine comprising
The game round execution means is
Triggered by the establishment of a first condition (that a variable probability jackpot has been won by a winning lottery and after the opening/closing execution mode has ended), the stored state information is changed from the information specifying the first state. first state information transition means for transitioning to information specifying a state other than the first state;
After the transition by the first state information transfer means is made, the game round when the second condition (that the jackpot is won in the winning lottery) is established is set as the specific game round, and the specific game round is stored. second state information transition means for transitioning the state information from information specifying a state other than the first state to information specifying the first state;
with
The second state information transfer means,
As a transition mode in which the timing of transferring the state information is different, a first transition mode (first drop mode) in which the timing is the start of the specific game round, and a second transition mode in which the timing is the end of the specific game round 2 transition modes (later drop modes), and which of the first transition mode and the second transition mode is used to transition the state information is determined by the second transition mode. A game machine, comprising transition mode determination means for determining based on the number of executions of the game rounds executed from the transition by the 1-state information transition means to the specific game rounds.

According to feature lG1, when the first condition is established, the state information stored in the state storage means shifts from information specifying the first state to information specifying a state other than the first state. After that transition, the state information is shifted from information specifying a state other than the first state to information specifying the first state in a specific game round when the second condition is satisfied, The transition timing is switched between a first transition mode at the start of the game round and a second transition mode at the end of the game round. Therefore, according to the feature lG1, in the specific game round, a game based on information specifying the first state after the state information is transferred, and a state other than the first state before the state information is transferred The game is played in two ways: one based on information specifying the . Therefore, according to the feature lG1, it is possible to widen the range of game modes in game rounds, and to improve the interest of the game. Furthermore, according to the feature lG1, in the specific game round, based on the number of game rounds executed after the state information is changed from information specifying the first state to information specifying a state other than the first state Since it is determined whether the transition mode to be adopted is the first transition mode or the second transition mode, it is possible to perform a game rich in storytelling, for example, an effect rich in storytelling, It is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature lG2]
The gaming machine according to feature lG1,
a ball entry means for allowing a game ball to enter;
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is changed between a state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the ball-entering means, and a state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter the ball-entering means. a state transition means for transitioning;
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein the control modes in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means are a first control mode and a control mode in which the state of the auxiliary means is different from that of the first control mode. a control means having at least a second control mode in which a game ball is easily entered into the ball means;
with
The control means is
When the state information stored in the state storage means is information specifying a state (high-frequency support mode) other than the first state, the second control mode can be executed, and the state storage means can execute the second control mode. A game machine characterized in that the first control mode can be executed when the state information stored in means is information specifying the first state (low-frequency support mode).

According to feature lG2, the control mode for transitioning the state of the auxiliary means is switched according to the state information stored in the state storage means. Therefore, according to the feature lG2, the player can guess the current state of the state information by visually observing the state of the auxiliary means. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature lG3]
The gaming machine according to feature lG2,
A gaming machine, wherein the second condition is that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition.

According to the feature lG3, the state information is transferred as a specific game round when the special information satisfies a predetermined condition. Therefore, in a game round when the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, it is possible to widen the range of game modes and improve the interest of the game.

[Feature lG4]
The gaming machine according to feature lG3,
The determination means is
As determination modes (lottery modes) for performing the determination, there are a first determination mode (low-probability mode) and a second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher than in the first determination mode. a judgment mode (high-probability mode);
The game round execution means is
Judgment mode determination means (FIG. 33) for determining in which of the first judgment mode and the second judgment mode the judgment by the judgment means in the game round is to be executed at the start of the game round. fall judgment processing) and
At the start of the game cycle in which the determination is determined to be performed in the first determination mode by the determination mode determining means, the state information is changed from information specifying a state other than the first state to the first state. means for shifting to information specifying the state of
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature lG4, a game round (=specific game round), which is a game round corresponding to special information that satisfies a predetermined condition and in which state information is shifted by the first transition mode (=specific game round); In both cases of the game round in which it is decided to execute the judgment in the judgment mode 1, at the start of the game round, the state information changes from the information specifying the state other than the first state to the first state. The state of the auxiliary means is shifted to the information specifying the state, and the state of the auxiliary means is shifted to the first control mode in conjunction with the change of the state information. Therefore, when the player observes that the state of the auxiliary means has changed to the first control mode at the start of the game round, the current game round corresponds to the special information that satisfies the predetermined condition. Which of the specific game round in which the transition of the state information is made by the first transition mode and the game round in which it is determined by the determination mode determination means to execute the determination in the first determination mode is determined. Although it is unknown, it can be assumed that it was narrowed down to one of the two game times. In other words, it is possible to prevent the player from guessing which one of the two game rounds is due to the change in the state of the auxiliary means linked to the change in the state information. Therefore, according to feature lG4, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency, and as a result, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature lG5]
A gaming machine according to feature lG3 or feature lG4,
The determination means is
As determination modes (lottery modes) for performing the determination, there are a first determination mode (low-probability mode) and a second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher than in the first determination mode. a judgment mode (high-probability mode);
The game round execution means is
Judgment mode determination means (FIG. 33) for determining in which of the first judgment mode and the second judgment mode the judgment by the judgment means in the game round is to be executed at the start of the game round. fall judgment processing) and
In the game round in which the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition and in which the judgment mode determining means decides to execute the judgment in the second judgment mode, the state information is changed to the first judgment mode. Means for maintaining information specifying a state other than the state (NO determination by step Sl1003 in the fall determination process of FIG. 33, NO determination by step Sl1104 in the hit determination process of FIG. 34);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature lG5, a game round (=specific game round) corresponding to special information that satisfies a predetermined condition and in which state information is transferred by the second transition mode (=specific game round); In either of the game rounds in which the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the judgment mode determining means decides to execute the judgment in the second judgment mode (game rounds at the time of loss) , the state information is maintained as information specifying a state other than the first state in the game round. Therefore, when the player observes that the state of the auxiliary means continues the second control mode in the game round, the game round this time corresponds to the special information that satisfies the predetermined condition. A game turn in which the status information is transferred by the second transition mode, and a game turn in which the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the determination is performed in the second determination mode by the determination mode determining means. Although it is unknown which of the game rounds was decided, it can be assumed that it was narrowed down to one of the two game rounds. In other words, it is possible to prevent the player from guessing which of the two game rounds it is based on the state of the auxiliary means. Therefore, according to feature 1G5, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency, and as a result, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

<Characteristic lH group>
The feature lH group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature lH1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
When one game round is defined as the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended, a game round execution means (main control unit) for executing the game round MPU 62 on the board 61 side, and the game turn control process of FIG. 29 executed by it);
State storage means (various flag storage areas) for storing state information (high-frequency support mode flag) capable of specifying a plurality of states including at least a first state (low-frequency support mode);
An effect execution means for executing an effect in the game round;
In a gaming machine comprising
The game round execution means is
means for shifting the stored state information from information specifying a state other than the first state to information specifying the first state when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition. A first transition mode (first drop mode) in which the timing is the start of the game round and a first transition mode in which the timing is the start of the game round and the timing is the end of the game round, as transition modes having different timings for transitioning the state information. and at least a second transition mode (leaving mode), and the first transition mode can be executed when a first condition is satisfied (when the result of the mode selection lottery is the first-leaving mode). , state information transition means (step S11104 in the hit determination process of FIG. 34, Sx1110 to Sx1116),
The production executing means is
In the game round in which the transition is made in the first transition mode, an effect of predetermined content (life-and-death battle effect) is executed, and in the game round in which the transition is made in the second transition mode, the predetermined content is A gaming machine characterized by comprising a means for executing an effect with different contents (superiority battle effect).

According to feature lH1, when the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, the state information stored in the state storage means is information specifying the first state from information specifying states other than the first state. However, the timing of this transition is switched between a first transition mode at the start of the game round and a second transition mode at the end of the game round. In the game round in which the transition is made in the mode, the performance of the predetermined content is executed, and in the game round in which the transition is made in the second transition mode, the performance of the content different from the predetermined content is executed. Therefore, according to the feature lH1, in the game round when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, the game is played in two ways, an effect with a predetermined content and an effect with a content different from the predetermined content. Therefore, according to the feature lH1, it is possible to widen the range of game modes in game rounds, and to improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic mA group>
The feature mA group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature mA1]
A first ball entry means (normal figure start gate 35) that allows game balls to enter,
a first predetermined information acquiring means for acquiring first predetermined information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entering means;
A first determination means (a function of executing a normal pattern lottery) that performs a first determination that is a determination as to whether or not the first predetermined information satisfies a first condition;
A second ball entry means (special figure start port 34a) that allows game balls to enter,
A state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball-entering means (closed state), and a state in which a game ball is possible or easy to enter the second ball-entering means. a first state transition means (ordinary electric accessory 34b) capable of transitioning between a ball-enterable state (open state);
A first transition mode (a first transition mode ( a first transition mode executing means for executing a normal electric switching execution mode;
Second predetermined information acquisition means for acquiring second predetermined information based on the fact that the game ball entered the second ball entry means (special figure start port 34a);
A second determination means (function for executing a special drawing lottery) that performs a second determination that determines whether the second predetermined information satisfies a second condition;
A third ball entry means (first big prize opening 57a) that allows game balls to enter,
A state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the third ball-entering means (closed state), and a state in which a game ball is possible or easy to enter the third ball-entering means. a second state transition means (first special electric accessory 57b) capable of transitioning between a ball-enterable state (open state);
A second transition mode (a second transition mode ( A second transition mode execution means for executing a special electric opening and closing execution mode based on a special figure small hit,
a fourth ball entry means (V winning opening 57av) into which a game ball entered by the third ball entry means can enter;
A fifth ball entry means (second big prize opening 58a) into which a game ball can enter;
A state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the fifth ball-entering means (closed state), and a state in which a game ball is possible or easy to enter the fifth ball-entering means. a third state transition means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of transitioning between a ball-enterable state (open state);
When the game ball enters the fourth ball entering means, the third transition mode (for the V winning jackpot) transitions the third state transition means between the state where the ball cannot be entered and the state where the ball can be entered. a third transition mode execution means for executing a special electric switching execution mode based on
a payout means (payout device 71) for paying out a game ball as a prize ball when the game ball enters the fifth ball entering means;
A gaming machine comprising
The first transition mode executing means,
The time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode (general power switching execution mode),
The time required from the start to the end of the second transition mode (special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the special prize) and the time required from the start to the end of the third transition mode (special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the V prize) and means for setting a time longer than the total time (total time: 128.0 seconds).

According to the characteristic mA1, when the game ball enters the first ball entering means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball When the game ball is continuously shot in a predetermined shooting mode, the game ball enters the second ball entering means during execution of the first transition mode, and the second transition mode is executed, and the second transition mode is executed. A game ball enters the third ball-entering means during the execution of, the game ball entering the third ball-entering means enters the fourth ball-entering means, and the third transition mode is executed. be.

Further, according to this feature, the first transition mode execution means divides the time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode into the time required from the start to the end of the second transition mode and the time required from the start to the end of the second transition mode and the time required for the end of the first transition mode, even after the second transition mode ends and the third transition mode ends thereafter. continues, and there is a case where the first state transition means transitions to the ball entry possible state during the continuation of the first transition mode, and the game ball can enter the second ball entry means.

In this case, if the game ball enters the second ball entering means, the second transition mode is executed again, and then the third transition mode is executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the second transition mode and the third transition mode may be executed multiple times. When the third transition mode is executed multiple times, the player can get an opportunity to win a large number of game balls as prize balls. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong sense of anticipation for the start of the first transition mode, and to improve the amusement of the game.

[Feature mA2]
The gaming machine according to feature mA1,
During execution of the first transition mode, the first transition mode execution means causes the first state transition means to transition from the non-enterable state to the enterable state after the third transition mode ends. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a means.

According to feature mA2, the first transition mode executing means causes the first state transition means to transition from the ball-entry prohibited state to the ball-entry possible state after the third transition mode ends during execution of the first transition mode. Since the means is provided, it becomes possible for the game ball to enter the second ball entering means after the third transition mode ends. Then, when the game ball enters the second ball entering means after the third transition mode ends, the second transition mode is executed again, and then the third transition mode is executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the second transition mode and the third transition mode are executed multiple times. When the third transition mode is executed multiple times, the player can get an opportunity to win a large number of game balls as prize balls. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong sense of anticipation for the start of the first transition mode, and to improve the amusement of the game.

[Feature mA3]
A gaming machine according to feature mA1 or feature mA2,
During the execution of the second transition mode or during the execution of the third transition mode When the game ball enters the second ball entry means (special figure start port 34a), the second predetermined information A gaming machine comprising means for avoiding acquisition or avoiding execution of the second determination.

According to feature mA3, when the game ball enters the second ball entering means during execution of the second transition mode or during execution of the third transition mode, the acquisition of the second predetermined information is avoided or Since means for avoiding execution of the second determination is provided, even if a game ball enters the second ball entering means during execution of the second transition mode or during execution of the third transition mode, the second The transition mode is not executed, and the third transition mode is not executed either, which is a disadvantageous situation for the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel nervous that the second transition mode and the third transition mode should be finished before the timing at which the game ball can enter the second ball entering means comes.

Further, unlike this feature, even if a game ball enters the second ball entering means during execution of the second transition mode or during execution of the third transition mode, the second predetermined information When adopting a configuration that does not avoid acquisition and execution of the second determination, a plurality of game balls enter the second ball entering means in one transition of the first state transition means to the entering ball possible state. In this case, a plurality of pieces of the second predetermined information are withheld, and the second transition mode and the third transition mode are executed a plurality of times regardless of the transition mode of the first state transition means in the first transition mode. There is

On the other hand, according to this feature, even if a plurality of game balls enter the second ball entering means in one transition to the entering ball possible state of the first state transition means, the second It is possible to realize a playability in which the number of executions of the second transition mode and the number of executions of the third transition mode is one each for one transition to the enterable state of the one-state transition means.

[Feature mA4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features mA1 to mA3,
The third transition mode executing means
As the third transition mode (special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot), the time required from start to finish is predetermined regardless of the shooting mode of the game ball and the behavior of the game ball after shooting. A gaming machine comprising means capable of executing a predetermined length third transition mode (fixed-length special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a V prize jackpot) having a predetermined length.

According to feature mA4, the third transition mode executing means predetermines the time required from the start to the end of the third transition mode regardless of the game ball shooting mode and the behavior of the game ball after shooting. means capable of executing the predetermined length third transition mode having a predetermined length. not longer than the length of Therefore, for example, even at the timing when the first state transition means transitions to the enterable state due to the length of the third transition mode becoming longer than the predetermined length, the third transition mode has not yet ended. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where there is no As a result, the third transition mode is not completed even at the timing when the game ball enters the second ball entering means, and the second transition occurs even though the game ball enters the second ball entering means. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a disadvantageous situation for the player such that the mode is not executed and the third transition mode is not executed.

[Feature mA5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features mA1 to mA4,
The first transition mode executing means
In the first transition mode (general electric switching execution mode), the first state transition means transitions from the state where entry is possible to the state where entry is prohibited, and then transitions from the state where entry is prohibited to the state where entry is possible. The length of the interval period (general electric interval period), which is the period until the A gaming machine characterized by comprising a means that can be set to

According to feature mA5, the first transition mode execution means changes the state from the entry prohibited state to the entry permitted state after the first state transition means transitions from the entry possible state to the ball entry prohibited state in the first transition mode. A means is provided for setting the length of the interval period, which is the period until the transition, to a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the third transition mode. The reason for adopting such a configuration will be described.

First, unlike this feature, the length of the interval period of the first transition mode is set to a time (for example, 0.7T) shorter than the time (for example, T) required from the start to the end of the third transition mode. A case will be described in which the configuration of the comparative example is set to .

First, in the configuration of the comparative example, a case where a game ball enters the second ball entering means in the first entering possible state of the first state transition means in the first transition mode will be described. In this case, the second transition mode is started, and then the third transition mode is started. After that, the first interval period in the first transition mode ends, and the third transition mode continues in the second ball-enterable state of the first state transition means. Therefore, even if the game ball enters the second ball entering means, the second transition mode and the third transition mode are not newly started. After that, the second interval period in the first transition mode ends, and in the third ball entry possible state of the first state transition means, since the third transition mode has already ended, the game ball enters the second entry. When the ball hits the ball means, the second transition mode is newly started, and then the third transition mode is started. That is, in this case, the second transition mode and the third transition mode are such that the game ball enters the second ball entering means in the first and third entering possible states of the first state transition means in the first transition mode. It will be started when the ball is entered, but it will not be started even if the game ball enters the second ball entering means in the state where the second ball can be entered.

Next, in the configuration of the comparative example, the case where the game ball does not enter the second ball entering means in the first entering possible state of the first state transition means in the first transition mode will be described. In this case, neither the second transition mode nor the third transition mode is started. After that, the first interval period in the first transition mode ends, and in the second ball entry possible state of the first state transition means, since the third transition mode is not executed, the game ball is the second ball entry. If the ball enters the means, the second transition mode is started, and then the third transition mode is started. After that, the second interval period in the first transition mode ends, and the third transition mode continues in the third enterable state of the first state transition means. Therefore, even if the game ball enters the second ball entering means, the second transition mode and the third transition mode are not newly started. After that, the third interval period in the first transition mode ends, and in the fourth ball entry possible state of the first state transition means, since the third transition mode has already ended, the game ball enters the second entry. When the ball hits the ball means, the second transition mode is newly started, and then the third transition mode is started. That is, in this case, in the second transition mode and the third transition mode, the game ball enters the second ball entering means in the second and fourth entering possible states of the first state transition means in the first transition mode. It will be started when the ball is entered, but it will not be started even if the game ball enters the second ball entering means in the state where the ball can be entered for the third time.

As described above, unlike the present feature, when the configuration of the comparative example in which the length of the interval period of the first transition mode is set shorter than the length of the third transition mode is adopted, the There is a problem that the timing of starting the second transition mode and the third transition mode during execution is not fixed, the flow of the game becomes complicated, and the control of the game becomes difficult.

Next, the length of the interval period of the first transition mode is set to a time (eg, 1.3T) longer than the time (eg, T) required from the start to the end of the third transition mode. A case where the configuration is adopted will be described.

First, in the configuration of this feature, a case where a game ball enters the second ball entering means in the first entering possible state of the first state transition means in the first transition mode will be described. In this case, the second transition mode is started, and then the third transition mode is started. After that, the first interval period in the first transition mode ends, and in the second ball entry possible state of the first state transition means, since the third transition mode has already ended, the game ball enters the second entry. When the ball hits the ball means, the second transition mode is newly started, and then the third transition mode is started.

Next, in the configuration of this feature, the case where the game ball does not enter the second ball entering means in the first entering possible state of the first state transition means in the first transition mode will be described. In this case, neither the second transition mode nor the third transition mode is started. After that, the first interval period in the first transition mode ends, and in the second ball entry possible state of the first state transition means, since the third transition mode is not executed, the game ball is the second ball entry. If the ball enters the means, the second transition mode is started, and then the third transition mode is started.

Thus, according to this feature, the length of the interval period of the first transition mode is set to be longer than the time required from the start to the end of the third transition mode. At the timing when the first state transition means enters the ball-enterable state, the third transition mode is executed regardless of how many times the first state transition means enters the ball-enterable state. not exist or has already ended. Therefore, even though the game ball entered the second ball entering means when the first state transition means entered the ball entering possible state in the first transition mode, the second transition mode and the third transition mode It doesn't mean it won't start. That is, according to this feature, it is possible to fix the start timing of the second transition mode and the third transition mode during the execution of the first transition mode, thereby suppressing the complication of the game flow. Execution of the second transition mode and the third transition mode during execution of the first transition mode by setting the number of times that the first state transition means is in the state where the ball can be entered during execution of the first transition mode. It is possible to set an upper limit on the number of possible times.

[Feature mA6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features mA1 to mA5,
The first transition mode executing means,
In the first transition mode (general electric switching execution mode), the first determination by the first determination means after the first state transition means finally transitions from the entry possible state to the entry impossible state The length of the waiting period (general electric ending period), which is the period until the A game machine characterized by comprising a means for setting a time longer than

According to feature mA6, the first transition mode execution means performs the first transition by the first determination means after the first state transition means last transitions from the state where the ball can be entered to the state where the ball cannot be entered in the first transition mode. A means is provided for setting the length of the waiting period, which is the period until the judgment can be executed, to a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the third transition mode. The reason for adopting this configuration will be described.

First, unlike this feature, a case will be described in which the length of the waiting period is set to be shorter than the time required from the start to the end of the third transition mode. In this configuration, for example, when the first determination is performed after the waiting period ends and it is determined that the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, the first transition mode is performed and the first transition mode is performed. There is a possibility that a game ball enters the second ball entering means during execution of the transition mode, and the second transition mode is executed. However, in this configuration, when the third transition mode is executed immediately after the start of the waiting period, the third transition mode continues even after the waiting period ends, and the game ball is the second The third transition mode may continue even at the timing when the ball enters the ball-entering means. In this case, there is a problem that the second transition mode is not executed even if the game ball enters the second ball entering means, resulting in a disadvantageous situation for the player.

On the other hand, according to this feature, the first transition mode execution means performs the first determination after the first state transition means last transitions from the state where the ball can be entered to the state where the ball cannot be entered in the first transition mode. Since the means is provided, the length of the waiting period, which is the period until the means can execute the first determination, can be set to a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the third transition mode. , it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the third transition mode continues even after the waiting period has ended, and it is possible to suppress a situation that is disadvantageous to the player.

[Feature mA7]
A gaming machine according to any one of features mA1 to mA6,
The first transition mode executing means
In the first transition mode (general electric switching execution mode), after the first state transition means finally transitions from the entry possible state to the entry non-enterable state, the first determination means executes the next determination. The length of the waiting period (Uden ending period), which is the period until it becomes possible, is
An interval period (general electric interval period ), characterized by comprising means capable of setting a length (140.0 seconds) equal to or longer than the length (135.0 seconds) of ).

According to feature mA7, the first transition mode execution means performs the next determination by the first determination means after the first state transition means last transitions from the state where the ball can be entered to the state where the ball cannot be entered in the first transition mode. The length of the waiting period, which is the period until it is possible to execute A series of game flows realized during the interval period of the first transition mode can also be performed during the waiting period of the first transition mode. It is possible to achieve the same. As a result, for example, it is possible to realize a new game in which the second transition mode and the third transition mode can be executed during both the interval period and the standby period in the first transition mode.

<Characteristic mB group>
The feature mB group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature mB1]
A first ball entry area (normal figure start gate 35) where a game ball can be entered,
A first lottery execution means for executing a first lottery (normal figure lottery) based on the game ball entering the first ball entry area;
A first variation means for performing variable display and stop display of the first identification information (normal symbol) based on the execution of the first lottery;
A second ball entry area (special figure start opening 34a) where the game ball can be entered,
From the state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entering area, the game ball can enter the second ball entering area or is easy to enter. A first transition means (ordinary electric accessory 34b) that can transition to a ball-enabled state (open state);
When the result of the first lottery is the first predetermined lottery result (normal drawing), the first transition mode (general electric a first transition mode executing means for executing an opening/closing execution mode;
A second lottery execution means for executing a second lottery (special lottery) based on the game ball entering the second ball entry area (special figure start port 34a);
A second variation means for performing variable display and stop display of the second identification information (special symbol) based on the execution of the second lottery;
A third ball entry area (V winning opening 57av) where a game ball can enter,
From a state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the third ball entry area, a game ball can enter the third ball entry area or is easily entered. A second transition means (first special electric accessory 57b) that can transition to a ball-enabled state (open state);
A second transition mode (special A second transition mode execution means for executing a special electric opening and closing execution mode based on a figure small hit,
Determination means for determining granting of a specific profit (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on V winning) based on the game ball entering the third ball entry area;
means for terminating the provision of the specified profit when a predetermined end condition is satisfied after the provision of the specified profit is started;
A gaming machine comprising
When one cycle from the transition of the first transition means to the state where the ball can be entered (time t3 in FIG. 68) to the end of the provision of the specific profit (time t10 in FIG. 68) is defined as one special game round ,
The first transition mode executing means
means for executing at least the transition operation of the first transition means a plurality of times for one result of the first predetermined lottery based on the result of the first lottery;
The first transition means executes the one special game round based on the transition to the ball-enterable state at the first timing, and the first transition means is executed at the second timing after the one special game round is completed. means for controlling transition to the ball-enterable state;
limiting means for limiting the start of the variable display of the first identification information;
with
The restriction means includes means for generating a predetermined restriction period in a period from the first timing to after the end of the one special game that occurs after the second timing,
The predetermined end condition for the specific profit is established by executing a first state (round game) advantageous to the player a plurality of times,
The first state can be changed between a first time with the shortest execution time and a second time with the longest execution time depending on the game state,
Said first transition mode executing means, in said one special game time executed after said first timing, said first state of a plurality of times of said specific profit are all executed in said second time. Also, after the end of the one special game round, the first transition means can transition to the ball-enterable state.

According to the feature mB1, when the game ball enters the first ball entry area and the first lottery is executed, the result of the first lottery becomes the first predetermined lottery result, and the first transition mode is executed. , when the game ball is continuously shot in a predetermined shooting mode, the game ball enters the second ball entry area during the execution of the first transition mode, and the second lottery is executed. The result of the lottery becomes the second predetermined lottery result, and the second transition mode is executed. Then, during execution of the second transition mode, the game ball enters the third ball entry area, and determination is made to give the specific profit.

Further, according to this feature, the first transition mode executing means causes at least the transition operation of the first transition means to be executed a plurality of times for one first predetermined lottery result based on the result of the first lottery. One special game round is executed based on the fact that the means and the first transition means transition to a ball-enterable state at a first timing, and the first transition means is turned on at a second timing after the one special game round is completed. and means for controlling the transition to the sphere-capable state. Therefore, it is possible to execute one special game a plurality of times for one first predetermined lottery result in the first lottery.

Further, according to this feature, the first transition mode execution means includes a restriction means for restricting the start of the variable display of the first identification information, and the restriction means occurs after the second timing from the first timing. means for generating a predetermined restriction period in a period until after the end of one special game round. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the start of the variable display of the first identification information before the end of one special game round. is executed. As a result, for example, even though the result of the first lottery is the first predetermined lottery result that is advantageous to the player, the game ball is dropped because the one special game round that has already been executed has not ended. It is possible to prevent a situation disadvantageous to the player such that the second transition mode is not executed even if the ball enters the second ball-entering area.

Further, according to this feature, the predetermined end condition of the specific profit is established by executing the first state advantageous to the player a plurality of times, and the first state is the first state having the shortest execution time among the game states. and the longest second time, and the first transition mode execution means determines that the first state of a plurality of times of the specific profit in one special game time executed after the first timing is all changed to the second state. Even if it is executed in time, the first transition means can transition to the ball-enterable state after the end of the one special game round. Therefore, even if the first state of a plurality of specific profits in one special game round is all executed in the second time, the game ball enters the second ball entry area after the end of the one special game round. It becomes possible to make a ball, and it becomes possible to execute one special game round again. As a result, regardless of how long the length of the first state of the multiple times of the specific profit is, it is possible to reliably execute the special game times multiple times.

[Feature mB2]
The gaming machine according to feature mB1,
A gaming machine comprising a number display means for displaying information on the number of times of the first state (remaining number of round games).

According to the feature mB2, since the number display means for displaying information about the number of times of the first state is provided, it is possible to arouse interest in the number of times of the first state in the player, and to improve the amusement of the game. can.

[Feature mB3]
A gaming machine according to feature mB1 or feature mB2,
A game machine comprising specific image display means for displaying a specific image (ending image) at the end of the provision of the specific profit (during the special electric ending period of the special electric open/close execution mode based on the V winning jackpot).

According to the feature mB3, since the specific image display means for displaying a specific image is provided at the end of the provision of the specific profit, the player can be made to recognize that the provision of the specific profit is finished, and the specific profit can be displayed. It is possible to give a sense of fulfillment to the awarding of the profit and motivation for subsequent games.

[Feature mB4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features mB1 to mB3,
Provided is profit information display means for displaying information on the profit obtained by the player by giving the specific profit at the end of the giving of the specific profit (during the special electric ending period of the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot). Characteristic game machine.

According to the feature mB4, since the profit information display means is provided for displaying information on the profit obtained by the player through the provision of the specific profit at the end of the provision of the specific profit, the player can be informed that he/she will It is possible to allow the player to grasp the obtained profit, and to give a sense of fulfillment in receiving the specific profit and a desire to play the game thereafter.

[Feature mB5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features mB1 to mB4,
The gaming machine, wherein the determining means comprises means for determining the granting of one of a plurality of types of specified benefits (special electric opening/closing execution mode A or B based on the V winning jackpot).

According to feature mB5, since the determining means comprises means for determining whether to grant one specific benefit from among a plurality of types of specified benefits, the player is only interested in whether or not the specified benefit will be granted. Instead, if a specific benefit is given, it is possible to arouse interest in what kind of special benefit is given.

[Feature mB6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features mB1 to mB5,
A gaming machine comprising predetermined information changing means for executing variable display and stop display of predetermined identification information (decorative symbols) in the first state (round game).

According to the feature mB6, since the predetermined information changing means for executing the variable display and stop display of the predetermined identification information in the first state is provided, the player is surprised that the variable display of the predetermined identification information has started in the first state. In addition, it is possible to give a great sense of anticipation as to what the display mode (stop mode) will be when the predetermined identification information is stopped and displayed.

<Characteristic mC group>
The feature mC group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature mC1]
A first ball entry means (normal figure start gate 35) that allows game balls to enter,
a first predetermined information acquiring means for acquiring first predetermined information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entering means;
A first determination means (a function of executing a normal pattern lottery) that performs a first determination that is a determination as to whether or not the first predetermined information satisfies a first condition;
A second ball entry means (special figure start port 34a) that allows game balls to enter,
A state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball-entering means (closed state), and a state in which a game ball is possible or easy to enter the second ball-entering means. a first state transition means (ordinary electric accessory 34b) capable of transitioning between a ball-enterable state (open state);
A first transition mode (a first transition mode ( a first transition mode executing means for executing a normal electric switching execution mode;
Second predetermined information acquisition means for acquiring second predetermined information based on the fact that the game ball entered the second ball entry means (special figure start port 34a);
A second determination means (function for executing a special drawing lottery) that performs a second determination that determines whether the second predetermined information satisfies a second condition;
A third ball entry means (first big prize opening 57a) that allows game balls to enter,
A state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the third ball-entering means (closed state), and a state in which a game ball is possible or easy to enter the third ball-entering means. a second state transition means (first special electric accessory 57b) capable of transitioning between a ball-enterable state (open state);
A second transition mode (a second transition mode ( A second transition mode execution means for executing a special electric opening and closing execution mode based on a special figure small hit,
a fourth ball entry means (V winning opening 57av) into which a game ball entered by the third ball entry means can enter;
A fifth ball entry means (second big prize opening 58a) into which a game ball can enter;
A state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the fifth ball-entering means (closed state), and a state in which a game ball is possible or easy to enter the fifth ball-entering means. a third state transition means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of transitioning between a ball-enterable state (open state);
When a game ball enters the fourth ball entering means, a third transition mode (for V winning jackpot) that causes the third state transition means to transition between the state where the ball cannot be entered and the state where the ball can be entered a third transition mode execution means for executing a special electric switching execution mode based on
a payout means (payout device 71) for paying out a game ball as a prize ball when the game ball enters the fifth ball entering means;
A gaming machine comprising
The game ball enters the first ball entering means (general figure starting gate 35), the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode (general power opening and closing execution mode) is executed, and if the game ball is continuously shot in a predetermined shooting mode,
During the execution of the first transition mode, the game ball enters the second ball entry means (special figure start port 34a) and the second transition mode (special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit) is executed is,
During the execution of the second transition mode, a game ball enters the third ball entry means (first big winning port 57a), and the game ball entering the third ball entry means enters the fourth The third transition mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot) is executed by entering the ball into the ball entry means (V prize opening 57av),
Even after the third transition mode ends, the first transition mode continues, and the first state transition means transitions to the enterable state during the continuation of the first transition mode, and the game ball can be entered by the second ball entering means.

According to the feature mC1, when the game ball enters the first ball entering means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball When the game ball is continuously shot in a predetermined shooting mode, the game ball enters the second ball entering means during execution of the first transition mode, and the second transition mode is executed, and the second transition mode is executed. A game ball enters the third ball-entering means during the execution of, the game ball entering the third ball-entering means enters the fourth ball-entering means, and the third transition mode is executed. , even after the third transition mode ends, the first transition mode continues, and during the continuation of the first transition mode, the first state transition means transitions to the state where the game ball can be entered, and the game ball moves to the second state. It may be possible to enter the ball in the entry means of.

In this case, if the game ball enters the second ball entering means, the second transition mode is executed again, and then the third transition mode is executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed once, the second transition mode and the third transition mode may be executed multiple times. When the third transition mode is executed multiple times, the player can get an opportunity to win a large number of game balls as prize balls. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong sense of anticipation for the start of the first transition mode, and to improve the amusement of the game.

[Feature mC2]
The gaming machine according to feature mC1,
During execution of the second transition mode or during execution of the third transition mode When the game ball enters the second ball entry means (special figure start port 34a), the second predetermined information A gaming machine comprising means for avoiding acquisition or avoiding execution of the second determination.

According to the feature mC2, when the game ball enters the second ball entering means during execution of the second transition mode or during execution of the third transition mode, the acquisition of the second predetermined information is avoided or Since means for avoiding execution of the second determination is provided, even if a game ball enters the second ball entering means during execution of the second transition mode or during execution of the third transition mode, the second The transition mode is not executed, and the third transition mode is not executed either, which is a disadvantageous situation for the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel nervous that the second transition mode and the third transition mode should be finished before the timing at which the game ball can enter the second ball entering means comes.

Further, unlike this feature, even if a game ball enters the second ball entering means during execution of the second transition mode or during execution of the third transition mode, the second predetermined information When adopting a configuration that does not avoid acquisition and execution of the second determination, a plurality of game balls enter the second ball entering means in one transition of the first state transition means to the entering ball possible state. In this case, a plurality of pieces of the second predetermined information are withheld, and the second transition mode and the third transition mode are executed a plurality of times regardless of the transition mode of the first state transition means in the first transition mode. There is

On the other hand, according to this feature, even if a plurality of game balls enter the second ball entering means in one transition to the entering ball possible state of the first state transition means, the second It is possible to realize a playability in which the number of executions of the second transition mode and the number of executions of the third transition mode is one each for one transition to the enterable state of the one-state transition means.

[Feature mC3]
A gaming machine according to feature mC1 or feature mC2,
The third transition mode executing means,
As the third transition mode (special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot), the time required from start to finish is predetermined regardless of the shooting mode of the game ball and the behavior of the game ball after shooting. A gaming machine comprising means capable of executing a predetermined length third transition mode (fixed-length special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a V prize jackpot) having a predetermined length.

According to feature mC3, the third transition mode executing means predetermines the time required from the start to the end of the third transition mode regardless of the game ball shooting mode and the behavior of the game ball after shooting. means capable of executing the predetermined length third transition mode having a predetermined length. not longer than the length of Therefore, for example, even at the timing when the first state transition means transitions to the enterable state due to the length of the third transition mode becoming longer than the predetermined length, the third transition mode has not yet ended. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where there is no As a result, the third transition mode is not completed even at the timing when the game ball enters the second ball entering means, and the second transition occurs even though the game ball enters the second ball entering means. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a disadvantageous situation for the player such that the mode is not executed and the third transition mode is not executed.

<Characteristic mD group>
The feature mD group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature mD1]
A first ball entry means (normal figure start gate 35) that allows game balls to enter,
a first predetermined information acquiring means for acquiring first predetermined information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entering means;
A first determination means (a function of executing a normal pattern lottery) that performs a first determination that is a determination as to whether or not the first predetermined information satisfies a first condition;
A second ball entry means (special figure start port 34a) that allows game balls to enter,
A state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball-entering means (closed state), and a state in which a game ball is possible or easy to enter the second ball-entering means. a first state transition means (ordinary electric accessory 34b) capable of transitioning between a ball-enterable state (open state);
A first transition mode (a first transition mode ( a first transition mode executing means for executing a normal electric switching execution mode;
Second predetermined information acquisition means for acquiring second predetermined information based on the fact that the game ball entered the second ball entry means (special figure start port 34a);
A second determination means (function for executing a special drawing lottery) that performs a second determination that determines whether the second predetermined information satisfies a second condition;
A third ball entry means (first big prize opening 57a) that allows game balls to enter,
A state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the third ball-entering means (closed state), and a state in which a game ball is possible or easy to enter the third ball-entering means. a second state transition means (first special electric accessory 57b) capable of transitioning between a ball-enterable state (open state);
A second transition mode (a second transition mode ( A second transition mode execution means for executing a special electric opening and closing execution mode based on a special figure small hit,
a fourth ball entry means (V winning opening 57av) into which a game ball entered by the third ball entry means can enter;
A fifth ball entry means (second big prize opening 58a) into which a game ball can enter;
A state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the fifth ball-entering means (closed state), and a state in which a game ball is possible or easy to enter the fifth ball-entering means. a third state transition means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of transitioning between a ball-enterable state (open state);
When a game ball enters the fourth ball entering means, a third transition mode (for V winning jackpot) that causes the third state transition means to transition between the state where the ball cannot be entered and the state where the ball can be entered a third transition mode execution means for executing a special electric switching execution mode based on
a payout means (payout device 71) for paying out a game ball as a prize ball when the game ball enters the fifth ball entering means;
A gaming machine comprising
In a situation where game balls are continuously shot in a predetermined shooting mode,
After the first transition mode is started,
When the first transition mode is started, the first state transition means transitions from the state in which the ball cannot be entered to the state in which the ball can be entered,
The game ball enters the first ball entry means (normal figure start gate 35) by the first state transition means transitioning from the ball entry impossible state to the ball entry possible state,
The first predetermined information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entering means (normal starting gate 35) satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode (normal switching mode) run mode) is executed and
During the execution of the first transition mode, the game ball enters the second ball entry means (special figure start port 34a) and the second transition mode (special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit) is executed is,
During execution of the second transition mode, the game ball enters the third ball entering means (first big winning hole 57a),
The game ball entering the third ball entering means enters the fourth ball entering means (V winning opening 57av), and the third transition mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot) is executed. is,
When the time required until the third transition mode ends is defined as a specific required time (the time from time t2 to time t10 in FIG. 68),
The first transition mode executing means
A gaming machine comprising means capable of setting a time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode (general electric switching execution mode) to a time longer than the specific required time.

According to the feature mD1, when the game ball enters the first ball entering means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball When the game ball is continuously shot in a predetermined shooting mode, the game ball enters the second ball entering means during execution of the first transition mode, and the second transition mode is executed, and the second transition mode is executed. A game ball enters the third ball-entering means during the execution of, the game ball entering the third ball-entering means enters the fourth ball-entering means, and the third transition mode is executed. be.

Further, according to this feature, the first transition mode executing means includes means capable of setting the time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode to a time longer than the specific required time. is completed, the first transition mode continues, and during the continuation of the first transition mode, the first state transition means transitions to the ball entry possible state, and the game ball enters the second ball entry means It may be possible to enter the ball.

In this case, if the game ball enters the second ball entering means, the second transition mode is executed again, and then the third transition mode is executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the second transition mode and the third transition mode may be executed multiple times. When the third transition mode is executed multiple times, the player can get an opportunity to win a large number of game balls as prize balls. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong sense of anticipation for the start of the first transition mode, and to improve the amusement of the game.

[Feature mD2]
The gaming machine according to feature mD1,
During execution of the first transition mode, the first transition mode execution means causes the first state transition means to transition from the non-enterable state to the enterable state after the third transition mode ends. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a means.

According to feature mD2, the first transition mode executing means causes the first state transition means to transition from the ball-entry prohibited state to the ball-entry possible state after the third transition mode is terminated during execution of the first transition mode. Since the means is provided, it becomes possible for the game ball to enter the second ball entering means after the third transition mode ends. Then, when the game ball enters the second ball entering means after the third transition mode ends, the second transition mode is executed again, and then the third transition mode is executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the second transition mode and the third transition mode are executed multiple times. When the third transition mode is executed multiple times, the player can get an opportunity to win a large number of game balls as prize balls. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong sense of anticipation for the start of the first transition mode, and to improve the amusement of the game.

[Feature mD3]
A gaming machine according to feature mD1 or feature mD2,
During execution of the second transition mode or during execution of the third transition mode When the game ball enters the second ball entry means (special figure start port 34a), the second predetermined information A gaming machine comprising means for avoiding acquisition or avoiding execution of the second determination.

According to feature mD3, when a game ball enters the second ball entering means during execution of the second transition mode or during execution of the third transition mode, the acquisition of the second predetermined information is avoided or Since means for avoiding execution of the second determination is provided, even if a game ball enters the second ball entering means during execution of the second transition mode or during execution of the third transition mode, the second The transition mode is not executed, and the third transition mode is not executed either, which is a disadvantageous situation for the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel nervous that the second transition mode and the third transition mode should be finished before the timing at which the game ball can enter the second ball entering means comes.

Further, unlike this feature, even if a game ball enters the second ball entering means during execution of the second transition mode or during execution of the third transition mode, the second predetermined information When adopting a configuration that does not avoid acquisition and execution of the second determination, a plurality of game balls enter the second ball entering means in one transition of the first state transition means to the entering ball possible state. In this case, a plurality of pieces of the second predetermined information are withheld, and the second transition mode and the third transition mode are executed a plurality of times regardless of the transition mode of the first state transition means in the first transition mode. There is

On the other hand, according to this feature, even if a plurality of game balls enter the second ball entering means in one transition to the entering ball possible state of the first state transition means, the second It is possible to realize a playability in which the number of executions of the second transition mode and the number of executions of the third transition mode is one each for one transition to the enterable state of the one-state transition means.

[Feature mD4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features mD1 to mD3,
The third transition mode executing means,
As the third transition mode (special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot), the time required from start to finish is predetermined regardless of the shooting mode of the game ball and the behavior of the game ball after shooting. A gaming machine comprising means capable of executing a predetermined length third transition mode (fixed-length special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a V prize jackpot) having a predetermined length.

According to feature mD4, the third transition mode executing means predetermines the time required from the start to the end of the third transition mode regardless of the game ball shooting mode and the behavior of the game ball after shooting. means capable of executing the predetermined length third transition mode having a predetermined length. not longer than the length of Therefore, for example, even at the timing when the first state transition means transitions to the enterable state due to the length of the third transition mode becoming longer than the predetermined length, the third transition mode has not yet ended. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where there is no As a result, the third transition mode is not completed even at the timing when the game ball enters the second ball entering means, and the second transition occurs even though the game ball enters the second ball entering means. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a disadvantageous situation for the player such that the mode is not executed and the third transition mode is not executed.

<Characteristic mE group>
The feature mE group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature mE1]
A first ball entry means (normal figure start gate 35) that allows game balls to enter,
a first predetermined information acquiring means for acquiring first predetermined information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entering means;
A first determination means (function for executing a normal pattern lottery) that determines whether or not the first predetermined information satisfies a first condition;
A second ball entry means (special figure start port 34a) that allows game balls to enter,
A state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball-entering means (closed state), and a state in which a game ball is possible or easy to enter the second ball-entering means. a first state transition means (ordinary electric accessory 34b) capable of transitioning between a ball-enterable state (open state);
A first transition mode (a first transition mode ( a first transition mode executing means for executing a normal electric switching execution mode;
When a predetermined privilege granting condition including that the game ball has entered the second ball entering means is established, a privilege granting mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on V winning) is executed for granting a privilege to the player. a privilege giving mode executing means for
A gaming machine comprising
The first transition mode executing means
The time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode (general power switching execution mode),
A game machine comprising means capable of setting a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege giving mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on V winning).

According to the feature mE1, when the game ball enters the first ball entering means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball When the game ball is continuously shot in the predetermined shooting mode, the game ball enters the second ball entering means during the execution of the first transition mode, and the predetermined privilege giving condition is established to enter the privilege giving mode. is executed.

Further, according to this feature, the first transition mode execution means is means capable of setting the time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode to be longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege imparting mode. , the first transition mode continues even after the privilege grant mode ends, and the first state transition means transitions to the state where the game ball can be entered during the continuation of the first transition mode, and the game ball It may be possible to enter the ball into the second ball entering means.

In this case, if the game ball enters the second ball entering means, the privilege giving mode is executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the privilege provision mode may be executed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong sense of anticipation for the start of the first transition mode, and to improve the amusement of the game.

[Feature mE2]
The gaming machine according to feature mE1,
The first transition mode executing means is means for causing the first state transition means to transition from the entering-inhibited state to the entering-inhibited state after the privilege imparting mode ends during the execution of the first transition mode. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature mE1, the first transition mode executing means is means for causing the first state transition means to transition from the state in which entry is not allowed to the state in which entry is possible after the privilege provision mode is terminated during execution of the first transition mode. , it is possible for the game ball to enter the second ball entering means after the privilege giving mode is finished. Then, if the game ball enters the second ball entering means after the privilege imparting mode ends, the privilege imparting mode is executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the privilege provision mode is executed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong sense of anticipation for the start of the first transition mode, and to improve the amusement of the game.

[Feature mE3]
A gaming machine according to feature mE1 or feature mE2,
The privilege provision mode execution means is
When the game ball enters the second ball entry means (special figure start port 34a) during the execution of the privilege grant mode, the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means is triggered. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for avoiding execution of the privilege giving mode.

According to feature mE3, when a game ball enters the second ball entering means during execution of the privilege giving mode, the privilege giving mode execution means causes the game ball to enter the second ball entering means. Since means for avoiding the execution of the privilege giving mode triggered by the ball is provided, even if the game ball enters the second ball entering means during the execution of the privilege giving mode, the privilege giving mode is not executed after that. becomes a disadvantageous situation for the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a sense of urgency to want the privilege giving mode to end before the timing at which the game ball can enter the second ball entering means comes.

[Feature mE4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features mE1 to mE3,
Second predetermined information acquisition means for acquiring second predetermined information based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means (special figure start port 34a);
A second determination means (a function of executing a special drawing lottery) that performs a second determination, which is a determination as to whether or not the second predetermined information satisfies a second condition;
A third ball entry means (first big prize opening 57a) that allows game balls to enter,
A state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the third ball-entering means (closed state), and a state in which a game ball is possible or easy to enter the third ball-entering means. a second state transition means (first special electric accessory 57b) capable of transitioning between a ball-enterable state (open state);
A second transition mode (a second transition mode ( A second transition mode execution means for executing a special electric opening and closing execution mode based on a special figure small hit,
a fourth ball entry means (V winning opening 57av) into which a game ball entered by the third ball entry means can enter;
A fifth ball entry means (second big prize opening 58a) into which a game ball can enter;
A ball-impossible state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the fifth ball-entering means, and a game ball is possible or easy to enter the fifth ball-entering means. a third state transition means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of transitioning between a ball-enterable state (open state);
a payout means (payout device 71) for paying out a game ball as a prize ball when the game ball enters the fifth ball entering means;
with
The privilege imparting mode execution means changes the third state transition means between the non-enterable state and the enterable state as the privilege imparting mode when a game ball enters the fourth ball entering means. a third transition mode executing means for executing a third transition mode (a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a V winning jackpot) that transitions between

According to feature mE4, when the game ball enters the first ball entering means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball When the game ball is continuously shot in a predetermined shooting mode, the game ball enters the second ball entering means during execution of the first transition mode, and the second transition mode is executed, and the second transition mode is executed. The game ball enters the third ball entering means during the execution of the above, the game ball entering the third ball entering means enters the fourth ball entering means, and the third as the privilege giving mode 3 transition modes are performed. That is, according to this feature, the third transition mode as the privilege giving mode is triggered by the game ball entering the second ball entering means that has entered the ball entering state during the execution of the first transition mode. can be executed.

<Characteristic mF group>
The feature mF group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature mF1]
A first ball entry means (normal figure start gate 35) that allows game balls to enter,
a first predetermined information acquiring means for acquiring first predetermined information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entering means;
A first determination means (function for executing a normal pattern lottery) that determines whether or not the first predetermined information satisfies a first condition;
A second ball entry means (special figure start port 34a) that allows game balls to enter,
A state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball-entering means (closed state), and a state in which a game ball is possible or easy to enter the second ball-entering means. a first state transition means (ordinary electric accessory 34b) capable of transitioning between a ball-enterable state (open state);
A first transition mode (a first transition mode ( a first transition mode executing means for executing a normal electric switching execution mode;
When a predetermined privilege granting condition including that the game ball has entered the second ball entering means is established, a privilege granting mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on V winning) is executed for granting a privilege to the player. a privilege giving mode executing means for
A gaming machine comprising
The first transition mode executing means is means for causing the first state transition means to transition from the state in which the ball cannot be entered to the state in which the ball can be entered after the privilege granting mode ends during execution of the first transition mode. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature mF1, when the game ball enters the first ball entering means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball When the game ball is continuously shot in the predetermined shooting mode, the game ball enters the second ball entering means during the execution of the first transition mode, and the predetermined privilege giving condition is established to enter the privilege giving mode. is executed.

According to this feature, the first transition mode execution means transitions the first state transition means from the entry prohibited state to the entry possible state after the privilege granting mode ends during execution of the first transition mode. Since the device is provided with the means for allowing the game ball to enter the second ball entering means after the privilege giving mode is finished. Then, if the game ball enters the second ball entering means after the privilege imparting mode ends, the privilege imparting mode is executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the privilege provision mode is executed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong sense of anticipation for the start of the first transition mode, and to improve the amusement of the game.

According to feature mF1, the first transition mode execution means is means for causing the first state transition means to transition from the state in which entry is prohibited to the state in which entry is possible after the privilege provision mode is terminated during execution of the first transition mode. , it is possible for the game ball to enter the second ball entering means after the privilege giving mode is finished. Then, if the game ball enters the second ball entering means after the privilege imparting mode ends, the privilege imparting mode is executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the privilege provision mode is executed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong sense of anticipation for the start of the first transition mode, and to improve the amusement of the game.

[Feature mF2]
The gaming machine according to feature mF1,
The privilege provision mode execution means is
When the game ball enters the second ball entry means (special figure start port 34a) during the execution of the privilege grant mode, the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means is triggered. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for avoiding execution of the privilege giving mode.

According to feature mF2, when a game ball enters the second ball entering means during execution of the privilege giving mode, the privilege giving mode execution means causes the game ball to enter the second ball entering means. Since means for avoiding the execution of the privilege giving mode triggered by the ball is provided, even if the game ball enters the second ball entering means during the execution of the privilege giving mode, the privilege giving mode is not executed after that. becomes a disadvantageous situation for the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a sense of urgency to want the privilege giving mode to end before the timing at which the game ball can enter the second ball entering means comes.

[Feature mF3]
A gaming machine according to feature mF1 or feature mF2,
Second predetermined information acquisition means for acquiring second predetermined information based on the fact that the game ball entered the second ball entry means (special figure start port 34a);
A second determination means (function for executing a special drawing lottery) that performs a second determination that determines whether the second predetermined information satisfies a second condition;
A third ball entry means (first big prize opening 57a) that allows game balls to enter,
A state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the third ball-entering means (closed state), and a state in which a game ball is possible or easy to enter the third ball-entering means. a second state transition means (first special electric accessory 57b) capable of transitioning between a ball-enterable state (open state);
A second transition mode (a second transition mode ( A second transition mode execution means for executing a special electric opening and closing execution mode based on a special figure small hit,
a fourth ball entry means (V winning opening 57av) into which a game ball entered by the third ball entry means can enter;
A fifth ball entry means (second big prize opening 58a) into which a game ball can enter;
A state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the fifth ball-entering means (closed state), and a state in which a game ball is possible or easy to enter the fifth ball-entering means. a third state transition means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of transitioning between a ball-enterable state (open state);
a payout means (payout device 71) for paying out a game ball as a prize ball when the game ball enters the fifth ball entering means;
with
The privilege imparting mode execution means changes the third state transition means between the non-enterable state and the enterable state as the privilege imparting mode when a game ball enters the fourth ball entering means. a third transition mode executing means for executing a third transition mode (a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a V winning jackpot) that transitions between

According to the feature mF3, when the game ball enters the first ball entering means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball When the game ball is continuously shot in a predetermined shooting mode, the game ball enters the second ball entering means during execution of the first transition mode, and the second transition mode is executed, and the second transition mode is executed. The game ball enters the third ball entering means during the execution of the above, the game ball entering the third ball entering means enters the fourth ball entering means, and the third as the privilege giving mode 3 transition modes are performed. That is, according to this feature, the third transition mode as the privilege giving mode is triggered by the game ball entering the second ball entering means that has entered the ball entering state during the execution of the first transition mode. can be executed.

<Characteristic mG group>
The feature mG group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature mG1]
A first ball entry means (normal figure start gate 35) that allows game balls to enter,
a first predetermined information acquiring means for acquiring first predetermined information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entering means;
A first determination means (function for executing a normal pattern lottery) that determines whether or not the first predetermined information satisfies a first condition;
A second ball entry means (special figure start port 34a) that allows game balls to enter,
A state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball-entering means (closed state), and a state in which a game ball is possible or easy to enter the second ball-entering means. a first state transition means (ordinary electric accessory 34b) capable of transitioning between a ball-enterable state (open state);
A first transition mode (a first transition mode ( a first transition mode executing means for executing a normal electric switching execution mode;
A privilege giving mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a V prize) is a mode in which a privilege is given to a player when a predetermined privilege giving condition including that a game ball has entered the second ball entering means is established. ), a privilege giving mode executing means for executing
A gaming machine comprising
The privilege provision mode execution means is
When the game ball enters the second ball entry means (special figure start port 34a) during the execution of the privilege grant mode, the game ball enters the second ball entry means. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for avoiding execution of the privilege giving mode.

According to the characteristic mG1, when the game ball enters the first ball entering means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball When the game ball is continuously shot in the predetermined shooting mode, the game ball enters the second ball entering means during the execution of the first transition mode, and the predetermined privilege giving condition is established to enter the privilege giving mode. is executed.

Then, according to this characteristic, when the game ball enters the second ball entering means during execution of the privilege giving mode, the privilege giving mode executing means sends the game ball to the second ball entering means. Since the means for avoiding the execution of the privilege imparting mode triggered by the entry of the second ball is provided, even if the game ball enters the second ball entering means during the execution of the privilege imparting mode, the privilege imparting mode is executed thereafter. This will result in a disadvantageous situation for the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a sense of urgency to want the privilege giving mode to end before the timing at which the game ball can enter the second ball entering means comes.

[Feature mG2]
The gaming machine according to feature mG1,
The first transition mode executing means,
The time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode (general power switching execution mode),
A game machine comprising means capable of setting a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege giving mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on V winning).

According to feature mG2, the first transition mode execution means comprises means capable of setting the time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode to be longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege giving mode. Therefore, even after the privilege granting mode ends, the first transition mode continues. It may be possible to enter the ball in the entry means of.

In this case, if the game ball enters the second ball entering means, the privilege giving mode is executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the privilege provision mode may be executed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong sense of anticipation for the start of the first transition mode, and to improve the amusement of the game.

[Feature mG3]
A gaming machine according to feature mG1 or feature mG2,
The first transition mode executing means is means for causing the first state transition means to transition from the entering-inhibited state to the entering-inhibited state after the privilege imparting mode ends during the execution of the first transition mode. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature mG3, the first transition mode execution means is means for causing the first state transition means to transition from the state in which entry is not allowed to the state in which entry is possible after the privilege provision mode is terminated during execution of the first transition mode. , it is possible for the game ball to enter the second ball entering means after the privilege giving mode is finished. Then, if the game ball enters the second ball entering means after the privilege imparting mode ends, the privilege imparting mode is executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the privilege provision mode is executed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong sense of anticipation for the start of the first transition mode, and to improve the amusement of the game.

[Feature mG4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features mG1 to mG3,
Second predetermined information acquisition means for acquiring second predetermined information based on the fact that the game ball entered the second ball entry means (special figure start port 34a);
A second determination means (function for executing a special drawing lottery) that performs a second determination that determines whether the second predetermined information satisfies a second condition;
A third ball entry means (first big prize opening 57a) that allows game balls to enter,
A state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the third ball-entering means (closed state), and a state in which a game ball is possible or easy to enter the third ball-entering means. a second state transition means (first special electric accessory 57b) capable of transitioning between a ball-enterable state (open state);
A second transition mode (a second transition mode ( A second transition mode execution means for executing a special electric opening and closing execution mode based on a special figure small hit,
a fourth ball entry means (V winning opening 57av) into which a game ball entered by the third ball entry means can enter;
A fifth ball entry means (second big prize opening 58a) into which a game ball can enter;
A state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the fifth ball-entering means (closed state), and a state in which a game ball is possible or easy to enter the fifth ball-entering means. a third state transition means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of transitioning between a ball-enterable state (open state);
a payout means (payout device 71) for paying out a game ball as a prize ball when the game ball enters the fifth ball entering means;
with
The privilege imparting mode execution means changes the third state transition means between the non-enterable state and the enterable state as the privilege imparting mode when a game ball enters the fourth ball entering means. a third transition mode execution means for executing a third transition mode (a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a V prize jackpot) that transitions between the two.

According to the feature mG4, when the game ball enters the first ball entering means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball When the game ball is continuously shot in a predetermined shooting mode, the game ball enters the second ball entering means during execution of the first transition mode, and the second transition mode is executed, and the second transition mode is executed. The game ball enters the third ball entering means during the execution of the above, the game ball entering the third ball entering means enters the fourth ball entering means, and the third as the privilege giving mode 3 transition modes are performed. That is, according to this feature, the third transition mode as the privilege giving mode is triggered by the game ball entering the second ball entering means that has entered the ball entering state during the execution of the first transition mode. can be executed.

<Characteristic mH group>
The feature mH group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature mH1]
A first ball entry means (normal figure start gate 35) that allows game balls to enter,
a first predetermined information acquiring means for acquiring first predetermined information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entering means;
A first determination means (function for executing a normal pattern lottery) that determines whether or not the first predetermined information satisfies a first condition;
A second ball entry means (special figure start port 34a) that allows game balls to enter,
A state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball-entering means (closed state), and a state in which a game ball is possible or easy to enter the second ball-entering means. a first state transition means (ordinary electric accessory 34b) capable of transitioning between a ball-enterable state (open state);
A first transition mode (a first transition mode ( a first transition mode executing means for executing a normal electric switching execution mode;
When a predetermined privilege granting condition including that the game ball has entered the second ball entering means is established, a privilege granting mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on V winning) is executed for granting a privilege to the player. a privilege giving mode executing means for
A gaming machine comprising
The privilege provision mode execution means is
As the privilege giving mode (special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot), the length from start to finish is a predetermined predetermined length regardless of the shooting mode of the game ball and the behavior of the game ball after shooting. A game machine characterized by comprising a means capable of executing a predetermined length privilege giving mode (fixed length special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a V prize jackpot) having a length of .

According to the feature mH1, when the game ball enters the first ball entering means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball When the game ball is continuously shot in the predetermined shooting mode, the game ball enters the second ball entering means during the execution of the first transition mode, and the predetermined privilege giving condition is established to enter the privilege giving mode. is executed.

According to this feature, the privilege imparting mode execution means predetermines the length from the start to the end of the privilege imparting mode regardless of the shooting mode of the game ball and the behavior of the game ball after shooting. Since the means for executing the predetermined length privilege imparting mode having the predetermined length is provided, when the predetermined length privilege imparting mode is executed, the length of the privilege imparting mode is longer than the predetermined length. not too long. Therefore, for example, in a gaming machine in which the player is put in a disadvantageous situation due to the length of the privilege giving mode being longer than a predetermined length, it is possible to prevent the player from being put in a disadvantageous situation. be able to.

Specifically, for example, in a gaming machine in which the privilege imparting mode is not executed after a game ball enters the second ball entering means while the privilege imparting mode is being executed, The privilege imparting mode is longer than a prescribed length, the privilege imparting mode is not finished even at the timing when the game ball enters the second ball entering means, and the privilege imparting mode is not executed after that. It is possible to prevent the player from being in a disadvantageous situation.

[Feature mH2]
The gaming machine according to feature mH1,
The privilege provision mode execution means is
When the game ball enters the second ball entry means (special figure start port 34a) during the execution of the privilege grant mode, the game ball enters the second ball entry means. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for avoiding execution of the privilege giving mode.

According to feature mH2, when a game ball enters the second ball entering means during execution of the privilege giving mode, the privilege giving mode execution means causes the game ball to enter the second ball entering means. Since means for avoiding the execution of the privilege giving mode triggered by the ball is provided, even if the game ball enters the second ball entering means during the execution of the privilege giving mode, the privilege giving mode is not executed after that. becomes a disadvantageous situation for the player.

However, according to this feature, the privilege imparting mode execution means predetermines the length from the start to the end of the privilege imparting mode regardless of the shooting mode of the game ball and the behavior of the game ball after shooting. Since the means for executing the predetermined length privilege imparting mode having the predetermined length is provided, when the predetermined length privilege imparting mode is executed, the length of the privilege imparting mode is longer than the predetermined length. not too long. Therefore, even at the timing when the first state transition means transitions to the state in which the first state transition means can enter the ball due to the length of the privilege imparting mode being longer than the predetermined length, the privilege imparting mode has not yet ended. The occurrence can be suppressed. As a result, even though the game ball has entered the second ball entering means, it is disadvantageous for the player that the privilege granting mode triggered by the game ball entering the second ball entering means is not executed. It is possible to prevent a situation from occurring.

[Feature mH3]
A gaming machine according to feature mH1 or feature mH2,
The first transition mode executing means,
The time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode (general power switching execution mode),
A game machine comprising means capable of setting a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege giving mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on V winning).

According to feature mH3, the first transition mode execution means comprises means capable of setting the time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode to be longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege giving mode. Therefore, even after the privilege granting mode ends, the first transition mode continues. It may be possible to enter the ball in the entry means of.

In this case, if the game ball enters the second ball entering means, the privilege giving mode is executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the privilege provision mode may be executed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong sense of anticipation for the start of the first transition mode, and to improve the amusement of the game.

[Feature mH4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features mH1 to mH3,
The first transition mode executing means is means for causing the first state transition means to transition from the entering-inhibited state to the entering-inhibited state after the privilege imparting mode ends during the execution of the first transition mode. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature mH4, the first transition mode execution means is means for causing the first state transition means to transition from the state in which entry is prohibited to the state in which entry is possible after the privilege provision mode is terminated during execution of the first transition mode. , it is possible for the game ball to enter the second ball entering means after the privilege giving mode is finished. Then, if the game ball enters the second ball entering means after the privilege imparting mode ends, the privilege imparting mode is executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the privilege provision mode is executed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong sense of anticipation for the start of the first transition mode, and to improve the amusement of the game.

[Feature mH5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features mH1 to mH4,
Second predetermined information acquisition means for acquiring second predetermined information based on the fact that the game ball entered the second ball entry means (special figure start port 34a);
A second determination means (function for executing a special drawing lottery) that performs a second determination that determines whether the second predetermined information satisfies a second condition;
A third ball entry means (first big prize opening 57a) that allows game balls to enter,
A state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the third ball-entering means (closed state), and a state in which a game ball is possible or easy to enter the third ball-entering means. a second state transition means (first special electric accessory 57b) capable of transitioning between a ball-enterable state (open state);
A second transition mode (a second transition mode ( A second transition mode execution means for executing a special electric opening and closing execution mode based on a special figure small hit,
a fourth ball entry means (V winning opening 57av) into which a game ball entered by the third ball entry means can enter;
A fifth ball entry means (second big prize opening 58a) into which a game ball can enter;
A state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the fifth ball-entering means (closed state), and a state in which a game ball is possible or easy to enter the fifth ball-entering means. a third state transition means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of transitioning between a ball-enterable state (open state);
a payout means (payout device 71) for paying out a game ball as a prize ball when the game ball enters the fifth ball entering means;
with
The privilege imparting mode execution means changes the third state transition means between the non-enterable state and the enterable state as the privilege imparting mode when a game ball enters the fourth ball entering means. a third transition mode execution means for executing a third transition mode (a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a V prize jackpot) that transitions between the two.

According to the feature mH5, when the game ball enters the first ball entering means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball When the game ball is continuously shot in a predetermined shooting mode, the game ball enters the second ball entering means during execution of the first transition mode, and the second transition mode is executed, and the second transition mode is executed. The game ball enters the third ball entering means during the execution of the above, the game ball entering the third ball entering means enters the fourth ball entering means, and the third as the privilege giving mode 3 transition modes are performed. That is, according to this feature, the third transition mode as the privilege giving mode is triggered by the game ball entering the second ball entering means that has entered the ball entering state during the execution of the first transition mode. can be executed.

<Characteristic mI group>
The feature mI group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature mI1]
A first ball entry means (normal figure start gate 35) that allows game balls to enter,
a first predetermined information acquiring means for acquiring first predetermined information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entering means;
A first determination means (function for executing a normal pattern lottery) that determines whether or not the first predetermined information satisfies a first condition;
A second ball entry means (special figure start port 34a) that allows game balls to enter,
A state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball-entering means (closed state), and a state in which a game ball is possible or easy to enter the second ball-entering means. a first state transition means (ordinary electric accessory 34b) capable of transitioning between a ball-enterable state (open state);
A first transition mode (a first transition mode ( a first transition mode executing means for executing a normal electric switching execution mode;
When a predetermined privilege granting condition including that the game ball has entered the second ball entering means is established, a privilege granting mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on V winning) is executed for granting a privilege to the player. a privilege giving mode execution means for
A gaming machine comprising
The first transition mode executing means,
In the first transition mode (general electric switching execution mode), the first state transition means transitions from the state where entry is possible to the state where entry is prohibited, and then transitions from the state where entry is prohibited to the state where entry is possible. The length of the interval period (general electric interval period), which is the period until the time is set, is set to a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege granting mode (special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot). A game machine characterized by comprising a settable means.

According to the feature mI1, when the game ball enters the first ball entering means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball When the game ball is continuously shot in the predetermined shooting mode, the game ball enters the second ball entering means during the execution of the first transition mode, and the predetermined privilege giving condition is established to enter the privilege giving mode. is executed.

According to this feature, the first transition mode execution means changes from the entry prohibited state to the ball entry prohibited state after the first state transition means transitions from the ball entry possible state to the ball entry prohibited state in the first transition mode. A means capable of setting the length of the interval period, which is the period until transition to the state, to a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege giving mode. The reason for adopting such a configuration will be described.

First, unlike this feature, the length of the interval period of the first transition mode is set to a time (e.g., 0.7T) shorter than the time (e.g., T) required from the start of the privilege provision mode until it ends. A case where the configuration of the set comparative example is adopted will be described.

First, in the configuration of the comparative example, a case where a game ball enters the second ball entering means in the first entering possible state of the first state transition means in the first transition mode will be described. In this case, the privilege provision mode is started. After that, the first interval period in the first transition mode ends, and the privilege giving mode is still continued in the state in which the first state transition means allows the ball to enter for the second time. Therefore, even if the game ball enters the second ball entering means, the privilege giving mode is not newly started. After that, the second interval period in the first transition mode ends, and in the third ball entry possible state of the first state transition means, since the privilege granting mode has already ended, the game ball enters the second ball. If the ball is entered into the means, a new privilege granting mode will be started. That is, in this case, the privilege giving mode is triggered by the game ball entering the second ball entering means in the first and third entering possible states of the first state transition means in the first transition mode. However, even if the game ball enters the second ball entering means in the second ball entering state, it will not be started.

Next, in the configuration of the comparative example, the case where the game ball does not enter the second ball entering means in the first entering possible state of the first state transition means in the first transition mode will be described. In this case, the privilege provision mode is not started. After that, the first interval period in the first transition mode ends, and in the state where the first state transition means can enter the ball for the second time, the privilege granting mode is not executed, so the game ball moves to the second ball entering means. If the ball is entered, the privilege giving mode will be started. After that, the second interval period in the first transition mode ends, and the privilege giving mode is still continued in the third enterable state of the first state transition means. Therefore, even if the game ball enters the second ball entering means, the privilege giving mode is not newly started. After that, the third interval period in the first transition mode ends, and in the fourth ball entry possible state of the first state transition means, since the privilege granting mode has already ended, the game ball enters the second ball. If the ball is entered into the means, a new privilege granting mode will be started. That is, in this case, the privilege provision mode is triggered by the game ball entering the second ball entering means in the second and fourth entering possible states of the first state transition means in the first transition mode. However, even if the game ball enters the second ball entering means in the third ball entering state, it will not be started.

As described above, unlike this feature, when the configuration of the comparative example in which the length of the interval period of the first transition mode is set to a time shorter than the length of the privilege provision mode is adopted, the execution of the first transition mode There is a problem that the timing of starting the privilege giving mode is not fixed, the flow of the game becomes complicated, and the control of the game becomes difficult.

Next, the configuration of this feature that sets the length of the interval period of the first transition mode to a time (eg, 1.3T) longer than the time (eg, T) required from the start to the end of the privilege granting mode. will be described.

First, in the configuration of this feature, a case where a game ball enters the second ball entering means in the first entering possible state of the first state transition means in the first transition mode will be described. In this case, the privilege provision mode is started. After that, the first interval period in the first transition mode ends, and in the second ball-enterable state of the first state-transition means, since the privilege giving mode has already ended, the game ball enters the second ball. If the ball is entered into the means, a new privilege granting mode will be started.

Next, in the configuration of this feature, the case where the game ball does not enter the second ball entering means in the first entering possible state of the first state transition means in the first transition mode will be described. In this case, the privilege provision mode is not started. After that, the first interval period in the first transition mode ends, and in the state where the first state transition means can enter the ball for the second time, the privilege granting mode is not executed, so the game ball moves to the second ball entering means. If the ball is entered, the privilege giving mode will be started.

Thus, according to this feature, since the length of the interval period of the first transition mode is set to be longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege provision mode, the first At the timing when the first state transition means enters the enterable state, regardless of how many times the first state transition means enters the enterable state, the privilege imparting mode is not executed, or It is already finished. Therefore, even if the game ball enters the second ball entering means when the first state transition means enters the ball entering possible state in the first transition mode, the privilege imparting mode is not started. . That is, according to this feature, it is possible to fix the timing of starting the privilege giving mode during the execution of the first transition mode, and it is possible to suppress the complication of the game flow, and the first It is possible to set the upper limit of the number of times the privilege imparting mode can be executed during the execution of the first transition mode by setting the number of times the first state transition means is in the enterable state during the execution of the transition mode. Become.

[Feature mI2]
The gaming machine according to feature mI1,
The first transition mode executing means,
The time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode (general power switching execution mode),
A gaming machine comprising means capable of setting a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege giving mode (the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize).

According to feature mI2, the first transition mode execution means comprises means capable of setting the time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode to be longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege giving mode. Therefore, even after the privilege granting mode ends, the first transition mode continues. It may be possible to enter the ball in the entry means of.

In this case, if the game ball enters the second ball entering means, the privilege giving mode is executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the privilege provision mode may be executed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong sense of anticipation for the start of the first transition mode, and to improve the amusement of the game.

[Feature mI3]
A gaming machine according to feature mI1 or feature mI2,
The first transition mode executing means is means for causing the first state transition means to transition from the state in which the ball cannot be entered to the state in which the ball can be entered after the privilege granting mode ends during execution of the first transition mode. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature mI3, the first transition mode execution means is means for causing the first state transition means to transition from the state in which entry is not allowed to the state in which entry is possible after the privilege provision mode is terminated during execution of the first transition mode. , it is possible for the game ball to enter the second ball entering means after the privilege giving mode is finished. Then, if the game ball enters the second ball entering means after the privilege imparting mode ends, the privilege imparting mode is executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the privilege provision mode is executed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong sense of anticipation for the start of the first transition mode, and to improve the amusement of the game.

[Feature mI4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features mI1 to mI3,
Second predetermined information acquisition means for acquiring second predetermined information based on the fact that the game ball entered the second ball entry means (special figure start port 34a);
A second determination means (function for executing a special drawing lottery) that performs a second determination that determines whether the second predetermined information satisfies a second condition;
A third ball entry means (first big prize opening 57a) that allows game balls to enter,
A state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the third ball-entering means (closed state), and a state in which a game ball is possible or easy to enter the third ball-entering means. a second state transition means (first special electric accessory 57b) capable of transitioning between a ball-enterable state (open state);
A second transition mode (a second transition mode ( A second transition mode execution means for executing a special electric opening and closing execution mode based on a special figure small hit,
a fourth ball entry means (V winning opening 57av) into which a game ball entered by the third ball entry means can enter;
A fifth ball entry means (second big prize opening 58a) into which a game ball can enter;
A state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the fifth ball-entering means (closed state), and a state in which a game ball is possible or easy to enter the fifth ball-entering means. a third state transition means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of transitioning between a ball-enterable state (open state);
a payout means (payout device 71) for paying out a game ball as a prize ball when the game ball enters the fifth ball entering means;
with
The privilege imparting mode execution means changes the third state transition means between the non-enterable state and the enterable state as the privilege imparting mode when a game ball enters the fourth ball entering means. a third transition mode execution means for executing a third transition mode (a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a V prize jackpot) that transitions between the two.

According to the feature mI4, when the game ball enters the first ball entering means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball When the game ball is continuously shot in a predetermined shooting mode, the game ball enters the second ball entering means during execution of the first transition mode, and the second transition mode is executed, and the second transition mode is executed. The game ball enters the third ball entering means during the execution of the above, the game ball entering the third ball entering means enters the fourth ball entering means, and the third as the privilege giving mode 3 transition modes are performed. That is, according to this feature, the third transition mode as the privilege giving mode is triggered by the game ball entering the second ball entering means that has entered the ball entering state during the execution of the first transition mode. can be executed.

<Characteristic mJ group>
The feature mJ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature mJ1]
A first ball entry means (normal figure start gate 35) that allows game balls to enter,
a first predetermined information acquiring means for acquiring first predetermined information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entering means;
A first determination means (function for executing a normal pattern lottery) that determines whether or not the first predetermined information satisfies a first condition;
A second ball entry means (special figure start port 34a) that allows game balls to enter,
A state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball-entering means (closed state), and a state in which a game ball is possible or easy to enter the second ball-entering means. a first state transition means (ordinary electric accessory 34b) capable of transitioning between a ball-enterable state (open state);
A first transition mode (a first transition mode ( a first transition mode executing means for executing a normal electric switching execution mode;
When a predetermined privilege granting condition including that the game ball has entered the second ball entering means is established, a privilege granting mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on V winning) is executed for granting a privilege to the player. a privilege giving mode execution means for
A gaming machine comprising
The first transition mode executing means,
In the first transition mode (general electric switching execution mode), the first determination by the first determination means after the first state transition means finally transitions from the entry possible state to the entry impossible state The length of the waiting period (general electric ending period), which is the period until the execution of A game machine characterized by comprising a means for setting a long time.

According to the feature mJ1, when the game ball enters the first ball entering means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball When the game ball is continuously shot in the predetermined shooting mode, the game ball enters the second ball entering means during the execution of the first transition mode, and the predetermined privilege giving condition is established to enter the privilege giving mode. is executed.

Further, according to this feature, the first transition mode executing means performs the first transition by the first determination means after the first state transition means last transitions from the state where the ball can be entered to the state where the ball cannot be entered in the first transition mode. A means capable of setting the length of the waiting period, which is the period until the determination of 1 can be executed, to be longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege giving mode. The reason for adopting this configuration will be described.

First, unlike this feature, the case of adopting a configuration in which the length of the standby period is set to be shorter than the time required from the start of the privilege provision mode to the end thereof will be described. In this configuration, for example, when the first determination is performed after the waiting period ends and it is determined that the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, the first transition mode is performed and the first transition mode is performed. There is a possibility that a game ball enters the second ball entering means during execution of the transition mode and the privilege giving mode is executed. However, in this configuration, when the privilege giving mode is executed immediately after the start of the waiting period, the privilege giving mode continues even after the waiting period is over, and the game ball is the second entering ball. The privilege giving mode may continue even at the timing when the player hits the ball. In this case, there is a problem that even if the game ball enters the second ball entering means, the privilege giving mode is not executed, and the situation becomes disadvantageous to the player.

On the other hand, according to this feature, the first transition mode execution means performs the first determination after the first state transition means last transitions from the state where the ball can be entered to the state where the ball cannot be entered in the first transition mode. Since the means is provided, the length of the waiting period, which is the period until the first determination by the means can be executed, can be set to a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege giving mode, It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the privilege giving mode continues even after the waiting period has ended, and it is possible to suppress a situation that is disadvantageous to the player.

[Feature mJ2]
The gaming machine according to feature mJ1,
The first transition mode executing means
The time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode (general power switching execution mode),
A game machine comprising means capable of setting a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege giving mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on V winning).

According to feature mJ2, the first transition mode execution means includes means capable of setting the time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode to be longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege giving mode. Therefore, even after the privilege granting mode ends, the first transition mode continues. It may be possible to enter the ball in the entry means of.

In this case, if the game ball enters the second ball entering means, the privilege giving mode is executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the privilege provision mode may be executed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong sense of anticipation for the start of the first transition mode, and to improve the amusement of the game.

[Feature mJ3]
A gaming machine according to feature mJ1 or feature mJ2,
The first transition mode executing means is means for causing the first state transition means to transition from the state in which the ball cannot be entered to the state in which the ball can be entered after the privilege granting mode ends during execution of the first transition mode. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature mJ3, the first transition mode execution means is means for causing the first state transition means to transition from the state in which entry is prohibited to the state in which entry is possible after the privilege provision mode is terminated during execution of the first transition mode. , it is possible for the game ball to enter the second ball entering means after the privilege giving mode is finished. Then, if the game ball enters the second ball entering means after the privilege imparting mode ends, the privilege imparting mode is executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the privilege provision mode is executed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong sense of anticipation for the start of the first transition mode, and to improve the amusement of the game.

[Feature mJ4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features mJ1 to mJ3,
Second predetermined information acquisition means for acquiring second predetermined information based on the fact that the game ball entered the second ball entry means (special figure start port 34a);
A second determination means (function for executing a special drawing lottery) that performs a second determination that determines whether the second predetermined information satisfies a second condition;
A third ball entry means (first big prize opening 57a) that allows game balls to enter,
A state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the third ball-entering means (closed state), and a state in which a game ball is possible or easy to enter the third ball-entering means. a second state transition means (first special electric accessory 57b) capable of transitioning between a ball-enterable state (open state);
A second transition mode (a second transition mode ( A second transition mode execution means for executing a special electric opening and closing execution mode based on a special figure small hit,
a fourth ball entry means (V winning opening 57av) into which a game ball entered by the third ball entry means can enter;
A fifth ball entry means (second big prize opening 58a) into which a game ball can enter;
A state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the fifth ball-entering means (closed state), and a state in which a game ball is possible or easy to enter the fifth ball-entering means. a third state transition means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of transitioning between a ball-enterable state (open state);
a payout means (payout device 71) for paying out a game ball as a prize ball when the game ball enters the fifth ball entering means;
with
The privilege imparting mode execution means changes the third state transition means between the non-enterable state and the enterable state as the privilege imparting mode when a game ball enters the fourth ball entering means. a third transition mode execution means for executing a third transition mode (a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a V prize jackpot) that transitions between the two.

According to the feature mJ4, when the game ball enters the first ball entering means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball When the game ball is continuously shot in a predetermined shooting mode, the game ball enters the second ball entering means during execution of the first transition mode, and the second transition mode is executed, and the second transition mode is executed. The game ball enters the third ball entering means during the execution of the above, the game ball entering the third ball entering means enters the fourth ball entering means, and the third as the privilege giving mode 3 transition modes are performed. That is, according to this feature, the third transition mode as the privilege giving mode is triggered by the game ball entering the second ball entering means that has entered the ball entering state during the execution of the first transition mode. can be executed.

<Characteristic mK group>
The feature mK group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature mK1]
A first ball entry means (normal figure start gate 35) that allows game balls to enter,
a first predetermined information acquiring means for acquiring first predetermined information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entering means;
A first determination means (function for executing a normal pattern lottery) that determines whether or not the first predetermined information satisfies a first condition;
A second ball entry means (special figure start port 34a) that allows game balls to enter,
A state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball-entering means (closed state), and a state in which a game ball is possible or easy to enter the second ball-entering means. a first state transition means (ordinary electric accessory 34b) capable of transitioning between a ball-enterable state (open state);
A first transition mode (a first transition mode ( a first transition mode executing means for executing a normal electric switching execution mode;
When a predetermined privilege granting condition including that the game ball has entered the second ball entering means is established, a privilege granting mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on V winning) is executed for granting a privilege to the player. a privilege giving mode executing means for
A gaming machine comprising
The first transition mode executing means
In the first transition mode (general electric switching execution mode), after the first state transition means finally transitions from the entry possible state to the entry non-enterable state, the first determination means executes the next determination. The length of the waiting period (Uden ending period), which is the period until it becomes possible, is
An interval period (general electric interval period ), characterized by comprising means capable of setting a length (140.0 seconds) equal to or longer than the length (135.0 seconds) of ).

According to the feature mK1, when the game ball enters the first ball entering means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball When the game ball is continuously shot in the predetermined shooting mode, the game ball enters the second ball entering means during the execution of the first transition mode, and the predetermined privilege giving condition is established to enter the privilege giving mode. is executed.

According to this feature, the first transition mode executing means determines the next transition by the first determination means after the first state transition means last transitions from the state where the ball can be entered to the state where the ball cannot be entered in the first transition mode. The length of the waiting period, which is the period until it is possible to execute the determination, is the length of the waiting period from the state where the first state transition means transitions from the state where the ball can be entered to the state where the ball cannot be entered, and then the state where the ball cannot be entered. Since means is provided that can be set to a length equal to or longer than the length of the interval period, which is the period until the transition, the series of game flows realized during the interval period of the first transition mode can be changed to the standby period of the first transition mode. can be realized in the same way. As a result, for example, it is possible to realize a new game in which the privilege giving mode can be executed during both the interval period and the standby period in the first transition mode.

[Feature mK2]
The gaming machine according to feature mK1,
The first transition mode executing means
The time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode (general power switching execution mode),
A game machine comprising means capable of setting a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege giving mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on V winning).

According to feature mK2, the first transition mode execution means comprises means capable of setting the time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode to be longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege giving mode. Therefore, even after the privilege granting mode ends, the first transition mode continues. It may be possible to enter the ball in the entry means of.

In this case, if the game ball enters the second ball entering means, the privilege giving mode is executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the privilege provision mode may be executed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong sense of anticipation for the start of the first transition mode, and to improve the amusement of the game.

[Feature mK3]
A gaming machine according to feature mK1 or feature mK2,
The first transition mode executing means is means for causing the first state transition means to transition from the entering-inhibited state to the entering-inhibited state after the privilege imparting mode ends during the execution of the first transition mode. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature mK3, the first transition mode execution means is means for causing the first state transition means to transition from the state in which entry is prohibited to the state in which entry is possible after the privilege provision mode is terminated during execution of the first transition mode. , it is possible for the game ball to enter the second ball entering means after the privilege giving mode is finished. Then, if the game ball enters the second ball entering means after the privilege imparting mode ends, the privilege imparting mode is executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the privilege provision mode is executed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong sense of anticipation for the start of the first transition mode, and to improve the amusement of the game.

[Feature mK4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features mK1 to mK3,
Second predetermined information acquisition means for acquiring second predetermined information based on the fact that the game ball entered the second ball entry means (special figure start port 34a);
A second determination means (function for executing a special drawing lottery) that performs a second determination that determines whether the second predetermined information satisfies a second condition;
A third ball entry means (first big prize opening 57a) that allows game balls to enter,
A state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the third ball-entering means (closed state), and a state in which a game ball is possible or easy to enter the third ball-entering means. a second state transition means (first special electric accessory 57b) capable of transitioning between a ball-enterable state (open state);
A second transition mode (a second transition mode ( A second transition mode execution means for executing a special electric opening and closing execution mode based on a special figure small hit,
a fourth ball entry means (V winning opening 57av) into which a game ball entered by the third ball entry means can enter;
A fifth ball entry means (second big prize opening 58a) into which a game ball can enter;
A state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the fifth ball-entering means (closed state), and a state in which a game ball is possible or easy to enter the fifth ball-entering means. a third state transition means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of transitioning between a ball-enterable state (open state);
a payout means (payout device 71) for paying out a game ball as a prize ball when the game ball enters the fifth ball entering means;
with
The privilege imparting mode execution means changes the third state transition means between the non-enterable state and the enterable state as the privilege imparting mode when a game ball enters the fourth ball entering means. a third transition mode execution means for executing a third transition mode (a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a V prize jackpot) that transitions between the two.

According to the feature mK4, when the game ball enters the first ball entering means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball When the game ball is continuously shot in a predetermined shooting mode, the game ball enters the second ball entering means during execution of the first transition mode, and the second transition mode is executed, and the second transition mode is executed. The game ball enters the third ball entering means during the execution of the above, the game ball entering the third ball entering means enters the fourth ball entering means, and the third as the privilege giving mode 3 transition modes are performed. That is, according to this feature, the third transition mode as the privilege giving mode is triggered by the game ball entering the second ball entering means that has entered the ball entering state during the execution of the first transition mode. can be executed.

<Characteristic mL group>
The feature mL group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature mL1]
A first ball entry means (normal figure start gate 35) that allows game balls to enter,
a first predetermined information acquiring means for acquiring first predetermined information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entering means;
A first determination means (function for executing a normal pattern lottery) that determines whether or not the first predetermined information satisfies a first condition;
A second ball entry means (special figure start port 34a) that allows game balls to enter,
A state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball-entering means (closed state), and a state in which a game ball is possible or easy to enter the second ball-entering means. a first state transition means (ordinary electric accessory 34b) capable of transitioning between a ball-enterable state (open state);
A first transition mode (a first transition mode ( a first transition mode executing means for executing a normal electric switching execution mode;
When a predetermined privilege granting condition including that the game ball has entered the second ball entering means is established, a privilege granting mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on V winning) is executed for granting a privilege to the player. a privilege giving mode executing means for
A gaming machine comprising
Based on the transition mode (number of times of opening) of the first state transition means in the first transition mode that transitions from the entry impossible state to the entry possible state, the first transition mode (general electric switching execution mode) A gaming machine characterized in that an upper limit number of executions (upper limit number of consecutive games) of the privilege granting mode (special electric switching execution mode based on a special electric switching execution mode for a V-winning jackpot scenario) during execution is determined.

According to the feature mL1, when the game ball enters the first ball entering means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball When the game ball is continuously shot in the predetermined shooting mode, the game ball enters the second ball entering means during the execution of the first transition mode, and the predetermined privilege giving condition is established to enter the privilege giving mode. is executed.

Further, according to this feature, the privilege imparting mode during execution of the first transition mode is based on the transition state of the first state transition means in the first transition mode, in which the state where the ball cannot be entered is changed to the state where the ball is allowed to be entered. is determined, the transition mode of the first state transition means in the first transition mode is a very important factor for the player. Therefore, when the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition and the first transition mode is executed, the player may be interested in the transition state of the first state transition means in the first transition mode. can be held, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Feature mL2]
The gaming machine according to feature mL1,
The first transition mode executing means,
The time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode (general power switch execution mode),
A game machine comprising means capable of setting a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege giving mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on V winning).

According to feature mL2, the first transition mode execution means includes means capable of setting the time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode to be longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege giving mode. Therefore, even after the privilege granting mode ends, the first transition mode continues. It may be possible to enter the ball in the entry means of.

In this case, if the game ball enters the second ball entering means, the privilege giving mode is executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the privilege provision mode may be executed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong sense of anticipation for the start of the first transition mode, and to improve the amusement of the game.

[Feature mL3]
A gaming machine according to feature mL1 or feature mL2,
The first transition mode executing means is means for causing the first state transition means to transition from the state in which the ball cannot be entered to the state in which the ball can be entered after the privilege granting mode ends during execution of the first transition mode. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature mL3, the first transition mode execution means is means for causing the first state transition means to transition from the state in which entry is prohibited to the state in which entry is possible after the privilege provision mode is terminated during execution of the first transition mode. , it is possible for the game ball to enter the second ball entering means after the privilege giving mode is finished. Then, if the game ball enters the second ball entering means after the privilege imparting mode ends, the privilege imparting mode is executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the privilege provision mode is executed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong sense of anticipation for the start of the first transition mode, and to improve the amusement of the game.

[Feature mL4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features mL1 to mL3,
Second predetermined information acquisition means for acquiring second predetermined information based on the fact that the game ball entered the second ball entry means (special figure start port 34a);
A second determination means (function for executing a special drawing lottery) that performs a second determination that determines whether the second predetermined information satisfies a second condition;
A third ball entry means (first big prize opening 57a) that allows game balls to enter,
A state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the third ball-entering means (closed state), and a state in which a game ball is possible or easy to enter the third ball-entering means. a second state transition means (first special electric accessory 57b) capable of transitioning between a ball-enterable state (open state);
A second transition mode (a second transition mode ( A second transition mode execution means for executing a special electric opening and closing execution mode based on a special figure small hit,
a fourth ball entry means (V winning opening 57av) into which a game ball entered by the third ball entry means can enter;
A fifth ball entry means (second big prize opening 58a) into which a game ball can enter;
A state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the fifth ball-entering means (closed state), and a state in which a game ball is possible or easy to enter the fifth ball-entering means. a third state transition means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of transitioning between a ball-enterable state (open state);
a payout means (payout device 71) for paying out a game ball as a prize ball when the game ball enters the fifth ball entering means;
with
The privilege imparting mode execution means changes the third state transition means between the non-enterable state and the enterable state as the privilege imparting mode when a game ball enters the fourth ball entering means. a third transition mode execution means for executing a third transition mode (a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a V prize jackpot) that transitions between the two.

According to feature mL4, when the game ball enters the first ball entering means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball When the game ball is continuously shot in a predetermined shooting mode, the game ball enters the second ball entering means during execution of the first transition mode, and the second transition mode is executed, and the second transition mode is executed. The game ball enters the third ball entering means during the execution of the above, the game ball entering the third ball entering means enters the fourth ball entering means, and the third as the privilege giving mode 3 transition modes are performed. That is, according to this feature, the third transition mode as the privilege giving mode is triggered by the game ball entering the second ball entering means that has entered the ball entering state during the execution of the first transition mode. can be executed.

<Characteristic mM group>
The feature mM group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature mM1]
A first ball entry means (normal figure start gate 35) that allows game balls to enter,
a first predetermined information acquiring means for acquiring first predetermined information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entering means;
A first determination means (function for executing a normal pattern lottery) that determines whether or not the first predetermined information satisfies a first condition;
A second ball entry means (special figure start port 34a) that allows game balls to enter,
A state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball-entering means (closed state), and a state in which a game ball is possible or easy to enter the second ball-entering means. a first state transition means (ordinary electric accessory 34b) capable of transitioning between a ball-enterable state (open state);
A first transition mode (a first transition mode ( a first transition mode executing means for executing a normal electric switching execution mode;
When a predetermined privilege granting condition including that the game ball has entered the second ball entering means is established, a privilege granting mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on V winning) is executed for granting a privilege to the player. a privilege giving mode execution means for
A gaming machine comprising
The privilege provision mode execution means is
During the period during which the first transition mode is being executed, the first state transition means transitions from the state where the ball can be entered to the state where the ball is not allowed to enter, and then the state where the ball is not allowed to enter is changed to the state where the ball is allowed to be entered. A game machine, comprising means capable of executing the privilege giving mode in an interval period (general electric interval period), which is a period until the game machine is activated.

According to the characteristic mm1, when the game ball enters the first ball entering means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball When the game ball is continuously shot in the predetermined shooting mode, the game ball enters the second ball entering means during the execution of the first transition mode, and the predetermined privilege giving condition is established to enter the privilege giving mode. is executed.

Then, according to this feature, during the period during which the first transition mode is being executed, the first state transition means transitions from the state in which the ball can be entered to the state in which the ball cannot be entered. The number of interval periods included in the first transition mode is a very important factor for the player, since means is provided for executing the privilege giving mode during the interval period which is the period until the transition from the prohibited state to the ball-enterable state is provided. becomes. Therefore, when the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition and the first transition mode is executed, the player is asked how many interval periods are included in the first transition mode. It is possible to arouse interest and interest in the game, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

[Feature mm2]
The gaming machine according to feature mM1,
The first transition mode executing means,
The time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode (general power switching execution mode),
A game machine comprising means capable of setting a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege giving mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on V winning).

According to feature mm2, the first transition mode execution means includes means capable of setting the time required from start to end of the first transition mode to be longer than the time required from start to end of the privilege giving mode. Therefore, even after the privilege granting mode ends, the first transition mode continues. It may be possible to enter the ball in the entry means of.

In this case, if the game ball enters the second ball entering means, the privilege giving mode is executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the privilege provision mode may be executed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong sense of anticipation for the start of the first transition mode, and to improve the amusement of the game.

[Feature mm3]
A gaming machine according to feature mM1 or feature mM2,
The first transition mode executing means is means for causing the first state transition means to transition from the entering-inhibited state to the entering-inhibited state after the privilege imparting mode ends during the execution of the first transition mode. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature mm3, the first transition mode execution means is means for causing the first state transition means to transition from the state where entry is prohibited to the state where entry is possible after the privilege provision mode is terminated during execution of the first transition mode. , it is possible for the game ball to enter the second ball entering means after the privilege giving mode is finished. Then, if the game ball enters the second ball entering means after the privilege imparting mode ends, the privilege imparting mode is executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the privilege provision mode is executed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong sense of anticipation for the start of the first transition mode, and to improve the amusement of the game.

[Feature mm4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features mM1 to mm3,
Second predetermined information acquisition means for acquiring second predetermined information based on the fact that the game ball entered the second ball entry means (special figure start port 34a);
A second determination means (function for executing a special drawing lottery) that performs a second determination that determines whether the second predetermined information satisfies a second condition;
A third ball entry means (first big prize opening 57a) that allows game balls to enter,
A state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the third ball-entering means (closed state), and a state in which a game ball is possible or easy to enter the third ball-entering means. a second state transition means (first special electric accessory 57b) capable of transitioning between a ball-enterable state (open state);
A second transition mode (a second transition mode ( A second transition mode execution means for executing a special electric opening and closing execution mode based on a special figure small hit,
a fourth ball entry means (V winning opening 57av) into which a game ball entered by the third ball entry means can enter;
A fifth ball entry means (second big prize opening 58a) into which a game ball can enter;
A state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the fifth ball-entering means (closed state), and a state in which a game ball is possible or easy to enter the fifth ball-entering means. a third state transition means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of transitioning between a ball-enterable state (open state);
a payout means (payout device 71) for paying out a game ball as a prize ball when the game ball enters the fifth ball entering means;
with
The privilege imparting mode execution means changes the third state transition means between the non-enterable state and the enterable state as the privilege imparting mode when a game ball enters the fourth ball entering means. a third transition mode execution means for executing a third transition mode (a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a V prize jackpot) that transitions between the two.

According to the feature mm4, when the game ball enters the first ball entering means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball When the game ball is continuously shot in a predetermined shooting mode, the game ball enters the second ball entering means during execution of the first transition mode, and the second transition mode is executed, and the second transition mode is executed. The game ball enters the third ball entering means during the execution of the above, the game ball entering the third ball entering means enters the fourth ball entering means, and the third as the privilege giving mode 3 transition modes are performed. That is, according to this feature, the third transition mode as the privilege giving mode is triggered by the game ball entering the second ball entering means that has entered the ball entering state during the execution of the first transition mode. can be executed.

<Characteristic mN group>
The feature mN group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature mN1]
A first ball entry means (normal figure start gate 35) that allows game balls to enter,
a first predetermined information acquiring means for acquiring first predetermined information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entering means;
A first determination means (function for executing a normal pattern lottery) that determines whether or not the first predetermined information satisfies a first condition;
A second ball entry means (special figure start port 34a) that allows game balls to enter,
A state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball-entering means (closed state), and a state in which a game ball is possible or easy to enter the second ball-entering means. a first state transition means (ordinary electric accessory 34b) capable of transitioning between a ball-enterable state (open state);
A first transition mode (a first transition mode ( a first transition mode executing means for executing a normal electric switching execution mode;
When a predetermined privilege granting condition including that the game ball has entered the second ball entering means is established, a privilege granting mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on V winning) is executed for granting a privilege to the player. a privilege giving mode execution means for
A gaming machine comprising
The privilege imparting mode executing means executes the privilege imparting mode (special electric switching execution mode based on V prize) a plurality of times during the period from the start to the end of the first transition mode (general electric switching execution mode). A gaming machine characterized by comprising possible means.

According to the feature mN1, when the game ball enters the first ball entering means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball When the game ball is continuously shot in the predetermined shooting mode, the game ball enters the second ball entering means during the execution of the first transition mode, and the predetermined privilege giving condition is established to enter the privilege giving mode. is executed.

Further, according to this feature, since the privilege imparting mode executing means includes means capable of executing the privilege imparting mode a plurality of times during the period from the start of the first transition mode to the end thereof, the first transition mode is Whether it is started or not is a very important factor for the player. Therefore, the player can be interested in whether the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition and the first transition mode is started, and the first transition mode is started. In this case, the player can be interested in how many times the privilege giving mode will be executed, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Feature mN2]
The gaming machine according to feature mN1,
The first transition mode executing means
The time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode (general power switching execution mode),
A game machine comprising means capable of setting a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege giving mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on V winning).

According to feature mN2, the first transition mode execution means comprises means capable of setting the time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode to be longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege giving mode. Therefore, even after the privilege granting mode ends, the first transition mode continues. It may be possible to enter the ball in the entry means of.

In this case, if the game ball enters the second ball entering means, the privilege giving mode is executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the privilege provision mode may be executed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong sense of anticipation for the start of the first transition mode, and to improve the amusement of the game.

[Feature mN3]
The gaming machine according to feature mN1 or feature 2,
The first transition mode executing means is means for causing the first state transition means to transition from the state in which the ball cannot be entered to the state in which the ball can be entered after the privilege granting mode ends during execution of the first transition mode. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature mN3, the first transition mode execution means is means for causing the first state transition means to transition from the state in which entry is not allowed to the state in which entry is possible after the privilege provision mode is terminated during execution of the first transition mode. , it is possible for the game ball to enter the second ball entering means after the privilege giving mode is finished. Then, when the game ball enters the second ball entering means after the privilege imparting mode ends, the privilege imparting mode is executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the privilege provision mode is executed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong sense of anticipation for the start of the first transition mode, and to improve the amusement of the game.

[Feature mN4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features mN1 to mN3,
Second predetermined information acquisition means for acquiring second predetermined information based on the fact that the game ball entered the second ball entry means (special figure start port 34a);
A second determination means (function for executing a special drawing lottery) that performs a second determination that determines whether the second predetermined information satisfies a second condition;
A third ball entry means (first big prize opening 57a) that allows game balls to enter,
A state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the third ball-entering means (closed state), and a state in which a game ball is possible or easy to enter the third ball-entering means. a second state transition means (first special electric accessory 57b) capable of transitioning between a ball-enterable state (open state);
A second transition mode (a second transition mode ( A second transition mode execution means for executing a special electric opening and closing execution mode based on a special figure small hit,
a fourth ball entry means (V winning opening 57av) into which a game ball entered by the third ball entry means can enter;
A fifth ball entry means (second big prize opening 58a) into which a game ball can enter;
A state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the fifth ball-entering means (closed state), and a state in which a game ball is possible or easy to enter the fifth ball-entering means. a third state transition means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of transitioning between a ball-enterable state (open state);
a payout means (payout device 71) for paying out a game ball as a prize ball when the game ball enters the fifth ball entering means;
with
The privilege imparting mode execution means changes the third state transition means between the non-enterable state and the enterable state as the privilege imparting mode when a game ball enters the fourth ball entering means. a third transition mode execution means for executing a third transition mode (a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a V prize jackpot) that transitions between the two.

According to the feature mN4, when the game ball enters the first ball entering means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball When the game ball is continuously shot in a predetermined shooting mode, the game ball enters the second ball entering means during execution of the first transition mode, and the second transition mode is executed, and the second transition mode is executed. The game ball enters the third ball entering means during the execution of the above, the game ball entering the third ball entering means enters the fourth ball entering means, and the third as the privilege giving mode 3 transition modes are performed. That is, according to this feature, the third transition mode as the privilege giving mode is triggered by the game ball entering the second ball entering means that has entered the ball entering state during the execution of the first transition mode. can be executed.

<Characteristic mO group>
The feature mO group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature mO1]
A first ball entry means (normal figure start gate 35) that allows game balls to enter,
a first predetermined information acquiring means for acquiring first predetermined information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entering means;
A first determination means (function for executing a normal pattern lottery) that determines whether or not the first predetermined information satisfies a first condition;
A second ball entry means (special figure start port 34a) that allows game balls to enter,
A state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball-entering means (closed state), and a state in which a game ball is possible or easy to enter the second ball-entering means. a first state transition means (ordinary electric accessory 34b) capable of transitioning between a ball-enterable state (open state);
A first transition mode (a first transition mode ( a first transition mode executing means for executing a normal electric switching execution mode;
When a predetermined privilege granting condition including that the game ball has entered the second ball entering means is established, a privilege granting mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on V winning) is executed for granting a privilege to the player. a privilege giving mode executing means for
production execution means for executing production;
A gaming machine comprising
The effect execution means is means for executing a effect (figure) suggesting a transition mode (number of times of opening) in which the first state transition means in the first transition mode transitions from the state in which the ball cannot be entered to the state in which the ball can be entered. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature mO1, when the game ball enters the first ball entering means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball When the game ball is continuously shot in the predetermined shooting mode, the game ball enters the second ball entering means during the execution of the first transition mode, and the predetermined privilege giving condition is established to enter the privilege giving mode. is executed.

Further, according to this feature, the first state transition means in the first transition mode includes means for executing an effect suggesting a transition state in which the state in which the ball is not allowed to be entered to the state in which the ball is allowed to be entered. satisfies the first condition and the first transition mode is executed, the player can be interested in the transition mode of the first state transition means in the first transition mode, It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature mO2]
The gaming machine according to feature mO1,
Based on the transition mode (number of times of opening) of the first state transition means in the first transition mode that transitions from the entry impossible state to the entry possible state, the first transition mode (general electric switching execution mode) A gaming machine characterized in that an upper limit number of executions (upper limit number of consecutive games) of the privilege granting mode (special electric switching execution mode based on a special electric switching execution mode for a V-winning jackpot scenario) during execution is determined.

According to feature mO2, the privilege imparting mode is executed during the execution of the first transition mode based on the transition state of the first state transition means in the first transition mode that transitions from the state in which the player cannot enter the ball to the state in which the player can enter the ball. Since the possible upper limit number of times is determined, the transition mode of the first state transition means in the first transition mode is a very important factor for the player. Therefore, when the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition and the first transition mode is executed, the player may be interested in the transition state of the first state transition means in the first transition mode. can be held, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Feature mO3]
A gaming machine according to feature mO1 or feature mO2,
The first transition mode executing means
The time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode (general power switch execution mode),
A gaming machine comprising means capable of setting a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege giving mode (the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize).

According to feature mO3, the first transition mode execution means includes means capable of setting the time required from start to end of the first transition mode to be longer than the time required from start to end of the privilege giving mode. Therefore, even after the privilege granting mode ends, the first transition mode continues. It may be possible to enter the ball in the entry means of.

In this case, if the game ball enters the second ball entering means, the privilege giving mode is executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the privilege provision mode may be executed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong sense of anticipation for the start of the first transition mode, and to improve the amusement of the game.

[Feature mO4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features mO1 to mO3,
The first transition mode executing means is means for causing the first state transition means to transition from the state in which the ball cannot be entered to the state in which the ball can be entered after the privilege granting mode ends during execution of the first transition mode. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature mO4, the first transition mode executing means is means for causing the first state transition means to transition from the state in which entry is prohibited to the state in which entry is possible after the privilege provision mode is terminated during execution of the first transition mode. , it is possible for the game ball to enter the second ball entering means after the privilege giving mode is finished. Then, if the game ball enters the second ball entering means after the privilege imparting mode ends, the privilege imparting mode is executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the privilege provision mode is executed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong sense of anticipation for the start of the first transition mode, and to improve the amusement of the game.

[Feature mO5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features mO1 to mO4,
Second predetermined information acquisition means for acquiring second predetermined information based on the fact that the game ball entered the second ball entry means (special figure start port 34a);
A second determination means (function for executing a special drawing lottery) that performs a second determination that determines whether the second predetermined information satisfies a second condition;
A third ball entry means (first big prize opening 57a) that allows game balls to enter,
A state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the third ball-entering means (closed state), and a state in which a game ball is possible or easy to enter the third ball-entering means. a second state transition means (first special electric accessory 57b) capable of transitioning between a ball-enterable state (open state);
A second transition mode (a second transition mode ( A second transition mode execution means for executing a special electric opening and closing execution mode based on a special figure small hit,
a fourth ball entry means (V winning opening 57av) into which a game ball entered by the third ball entry means can enter;
A fifth ball entry means (second big prize opening 58a) into which a game ball can enter;
A state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the fifth ball-entering means (closed state), and a state in which a game ball is possible or easy to enter the fifth ball-entering means. a third state transition means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of transitioning between a ball-enterable state (open state);
a payout means (payout device 71) for paying out a game ball as a prize ball when the game ball enters the fifth ball entering means;
with
The privilege imparting mode execution means changes the third state transition means between the non-enterable state and the enterable state as the privilege imparting mode when a game ball enters the fourth ball entering means. a third transition mode execution means for executing a third transition mode (a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a V prize jackpot) that transitions between the two.

According to the feature mO5, when the game ball enters the first ball entering means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball When the game ball is continuously shot in a predetermined shooting mode, the game ball enters the second ball entering means during execution of the first transition mode, and the second transition mode is executed, and the second transition mode is executed. The game ball enters the third ball entering means during the execution of the above, the game ball entering the third ball entering means enters the fourth ball entering means, and the third as the privilege giving mode 3 transition modes are performed. That is, according to this feature, the third transition mode as the privilege giving mode is triggered by the game ball entering the second ball entering means that has entered the ball entering state during the execution of the first transition mode. can be executed.

<Characteristic mP group>
The feature mP group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature mP1]
A first ball entry means (normal figure start gate 35) that allows game balls to enter,
a first predetermined information acquiring means for acquiring first predetermined information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entering means;
A first determination means (function for executing a normal pattern lottery) that determines whether or not the first predetermined information satisfies a first condition;
A second ball entry means (special figure start port 34a) that allows game balls to enter,
A state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball-entering means (closed state), and a state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter the second ball-entering means. a first state transition means (ordinary electric accessory 34b) capable of transitioning between a ball-enterable state (open state);
A first transition mode (a first transition mode ( a first transition mode executing means for executing a normal electric switching execution mode;
When a predetermined privilege granting condition including that the game ball has entered the second ball entering means is established, a privilege granting mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on V winning) is executed for granting a privilege to the player. a privilege giving mode execution means for
A gaming machine comprising
The privilege provision mode execution means is
As the privilege granting mode, an indeterminate privilege granting mode that may not end by a predetermined timing in the first transition mode (the timing at which the normal electric accessory 34b opens) A gaming machine characterized by comprising a means capable of executing a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the system.

According to the feature mP1, when the game ball enters the first ball entering means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball When the game ball is continuously shot in the predetermined shooting mode, the game ball enters the second ball entering means during the execution of the first transition mode, and the predetermined privilege giving condition is established to enter the privilege giving mode. is executed.

Further, according to this feature, the privilege imparting mode executing means includes means capable of executing, as the privilege imparting mode, an indefinite privilege imparting mode that may not end by a predetermined timing in the first transition mode.

For example, when the configuration of this feature is applied to a gaming machine that puts the player in a disadvantageous situation if the privilege provision mode is not completed by a predetermined timing in the first transition mode, , it is possible to create a feeling of impatience that the indeterminate privilege provision mode should be completed by a predetermined timing.

In particular, in the case of a configuration in which whether or not the indeterminate privilege provision mode ends by a predetermined timing depends on the shooting mode of the game ball and the behavior of the fired game ball, the player is informed of the shooting mode of the game ball and the behavior of the fired game ball. It is possible to arouse interest and interest in the behavior of the game ball.

[Feature mP2]
The gaming machine according to feature mP1,
The privilege provision mode execution means is
When the privilege granting mode has not ended by the predetermined timing in the first transition mode, the game ball enters the second ball entering means (special figure start port 34a). A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for avoiding execution of the privilege giving mode triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means.

According to the feature mP2, the privilege giving mode executing means, when the indefinite privilege giving mode has not ended by a predetermined timing in the first transition mode, when the game ball enters the second ball entering means However, since the game ball is provided with a means for avoiding execution of the privilege giving mode triggered by the game ball entering the second ball entering means, the game ball enters the second ball during the execution of the privilege giving mode Even if the player hits the means, the privilege giving mode will not be executed after that, and the player will be in a disadvantageous situation. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a feeling of impatience that the indeterminate privilege provision mode should be terminated by a predetermined timing.

[Feature mP3]
A gaming machine according to feature mP1 or feature mP2,
The first transition mode executing means,
The time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode (general power switching execution mode),
A gaming machine comprising means capable of setting a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege giving mode (the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize).

According to feature mP3, the first transition mode execution means comprises means capable of setting the time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode to be longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege giving mode. Therefore, even after the privilege granting mode ends, the first transition mode continues. It may be possible to enter the ball in the entry means of.

In this case, if the game ball enters the second ball entering means, the privilege giving mode is executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the privilege provision mode may be executed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong sense of anticipation for the start of the first transition mode, and to improve the amusement of the game.

[Feature mP4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features mP1 to mP3,
The first transition mode executing means is means for causing the first state transition means to transition from the entering-inhibited state to the entering-inhibited state after the privilege imparting mode ends during the execution of the first transition mode. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature mP4, the first transition mode execution means is means for causing the first state transition means to transition from the state in which entry is prohibited to the state in which entry is possible after the privilege provision mode is terminated during execution of the first transition mode. , it is possible for the game ball to enter the second ball entering means after the privilege giving mode is finished. Then, if the game ball enters the second ball entering means after the privilege imparting mode ends, the privilege imparting mode is executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the privilege provision mode is executed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong sense of anticipation for the start of the first transition mode, and to improve the amusement of the game.

[Feature mP5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features mP1 to mP4,
Second predetermined information acquisition means for acquiring second predetermined information based on the fact that the game ball entered the second ball entry means (special figure start port 34a);
A second determination means (function for executing a special drawing lottery) that performs a second determination that determines whether the second predetermined information satisfies a second condition;
A third ball entry means (first big prize opening 57a) that allows game balls to enter,
A state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the third ball-entering means (closed state), and a state in which a game ball is possible or easy to enter the third ball-entering means. a second state transition means (first special electric accessory 57b) capable of transitioning between a ball-enterable state (open state);
A second transition mode (a second transition mode ( A second transition mode execution means for executing a special electric opening and closing execution mode based on a special figure small hit,
a fourth ball entry means (V winning opening 57av) into which a game ball entered by the third ball entry means can enter;
A fifth ball entry means (second big prize opening 58a) into which a game ball can enter;
A state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the fifth ball-entering means (closed state), and a state in which a game ball is possible or easy to enter the fifth ball-entering means. a third state transition means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of transitioning between a ball-enterable state (open state);
a payout means (payout device 71) for paying out a game ball as a prize ball when the game ball enters the fifth ball entering means;
with
The privilege imparting mode execution means changes the third state transition means between the non-enterable state and the enterable state as the privilege imparting mode when a game ball enters the fourth ball entering means. a third transition mode execution means for executing a third transition mode (a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a V prize jackpot) that transitions between the two.

According to the feature mP5, when the game ball enters the first ball entering means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball When the game ball is continuously shot in a predetermined shooting mode, the game ball enters the second ball entering means during execution of the first transition mode, and the second transition mode is executed, and the second transition mode is executed. The game ball enters the third ball entering means during the execution of the above, the game ball entering the third ball entering means enters the fourth ball entering means, and the third as the privilege giving mode 3 transition modes are performed. That is, according to this feature, the third transition mode as the privilege giving mode is triggered by the game ball entering the second ball entering means that has entered the ball entering state during the execution of the first transition mode. can be executed.

<Characteristic mQ group>
The feature mQ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature mQ1]
A first ball entry means (normal figure start gate 35) that allows game balls to enter,
a first predetermined information acquiring means for acquiring first predetermined information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entering means;
A first determination means (function for executing a normal pattern lottery) that determines whether or not the first predetermined information satisfies a first condition;
A second ball entry means (special figure start port 34a) that allows game balls to enter,
A state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball-entering means (closed state), and a state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter the second ball-entering means. a first state transition means (ordinary electric accessory 34b) capable of transitioning between a ball-enterable state (open state);
A first transition mode (a first transition mode ( a first transition mode executing means for executing a normal electric switching execution mode;
When a predetermined privilege granting condition including that the game ball has entered the second ball entering means is established, a privilege granting mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on V winning) is executed for granting a privilege to the player. a privilege giving mode execution means for
Privilege granting ball entry means (second special electric accessory 58b) in which a game ball can be entered during execution of the privilege granting mode;
production execution means for executing production;
A gaming machine comprising
The performance execution means causes a predetermined number of game balls to enter the privilege granting ball entry means by a predetermined timing (timing when the normal electric accessory 34b opens next) during execution of the privilege granting mode. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a means capable of executing an effect (ball-entering promotion effect shown in FIG. 93(A)) for prompting the player to enter the game.

According to the feature mQ1, when the game ball enters the first ball entering means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball When the game ball is continuously shot in the predetermined shooting mode, the game ball enters the second ball entering means during the execution of the first transition mode, and the predetermined privilege giving condition is established to enter the privilege giving mode. is executed.

Then, according to this feature, the effect execution means is means capable of executing an effect prompting a predetermined number of game balls to enter the privilege granting ball entry means by a predetermined timing during execution of the privilege granting mode. Prepare.

For example, when the configuration of this feature is applied to a gaming machine that puts the player in a disadvantageous situation if the privilege provision mode does not end by a predetermined timing in the first transition mode, the predetermined timing By entering a predetermined number of game balls into the privilege granting ball entry means by the time, the player can understand the new game property that the privilege granting mode is terminated by the predetermined timing. It is possible to increase the motivation of the player to enter a predetermined number of game balls into the privilege imparting ball entering means by the timing.

[Feature mQ2]
The gaming machine according to feature mQ1,
A game characterized in that the effect executing means comprises means capable of executing a specific effect (disappearance effect shown in FIG. 93(C)) when the privilege giving mode is not completed by the predetermined timing. machine.

According to the feature mQ2, the effect executing means has means capable of executing a specific effect when the privilege giving mode is not completed by the predetermined timing, so that the player can receive the privilege by the predetermined timing. It is possible to make the player recognize that the mode has not ended, and to make him/her aware that the flow of the game after that will change due to the fact that the privilege giving mode has not ended.

[Feature mQ3]
A gaming machine according to feature mQ1 or feature mQ2,
The privilege provision mode execution means is
If the privilege provision mode is not completed by the predetermined timing, even if the game ball enters the second ball entry means (special figure start port 34a), the game ball A gaming machine comprising means for avoiding execution of the privilege giving mode triggered by a ball entering the second ball entering means.

According to the feature mQ3, if the privilege granting mode execution means does not end the privilege granting mode by a predetermined timing, even if the game ball enters the second ball entering means, the game Since means for avoiding the execution of the privilege giving mode triggered by the entry of the ball into the second ball entering means is provided, the game ball does not enter the second ball entering means during the execution of the privilege giving mode. However, the privilege giving mode will not be executed after that, which is disadvantageous for the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel impatient that he wants the privilege giving mode to end by a predetermined timing.

[Feature mQ4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features mQ1 to mQ3,
The first transition mode executing means,
The time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode (general power switching execution mode),
A gaming machine comprising means capable of setting a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege giving mode (the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize).

According to feature mQ4, the first transition mode execution means includes means capable of setting the time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode to be longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege giving mode. Therefore, even after the privilege granting mode ends, the first transition mode continues. It may be possible to enter the ball in the entry means of.

In this case, if the game ball enters the second ball entering means, the privilege giving mode is executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the privilege provision mode may be executed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong sense of anticipation for the start of the first transition mode, and to improve the amusement of the game.

[Feature mQ5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features mQ1 to mQ4,
The first transition mode executing means is means for causing the first state transition means to transition from the entering-inhibited state to the entering-inhibited state after the privilege imparting mode ends during the execution of the first transition mode. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature mQ5, the first transition mode execution means is means for causing the first state transition means to transition from the state in which entry is prohibited to the state in which entry is possible after the privilege provision mode is terminated during execution of the first transition mode. , it is possible for the game ball to enter the second ball entering means after the privilege giving mode is finished. Then, if the game ball enters the second ball entering means after the privilege imparting mode ends, the privilege imparting mode is executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the privilege provision mode is executed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong sense of anticipation for the start of the first transition mode, and to improve the amusement of the game.

[Feature mQ6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features mQ1 to mQ5,
Second predetermined information acquisition means for acquiring second predetermined information based on the fact that the game ball entered the second ball entry means (special figure start port 34a);
A second determination means (function for executing a special drawing lottery) that performs a second determination that determines whether the second predetermined information satisfies a second condition;
A third ball entry means (first big prize opening 57a) that allows game balls to enter,
A state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the third ball-entering means (closed state), and a state in which a game ball is possible or easy to enter the third ball-entering means. a second state transition means (first special electric accessory 57b) capable of transitioning between a ball-enterable state (open state);
A second transition mode (a second transition mode ( A second transition mode execution means for executing a special electric opening and closing execution mode based on a special figure small hit,
a fourth ball entry means (V winning opening 57av) into which a game ball entered by the third ball entry means can enter;
A state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the privilege granting ball entering means (closed state), and a state in which a game ball can or easily enter the privilege granting ball entering means. A third state transition means (second special electric accessory 58b) that can transition between the ball possible state (open state),
a payout means (payout device 71) for paying out a game ball as a prize ball when the game ball enters the privilege giving ball entering means;
with
The privilege imparting mode execution means changes the third state transition means between the non-enterable state and the enterable state as the privilege imparting mode when a game ball enters the fourth ball entering means. a third transition mode execution means for executing a third transition mode (a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a V prize jackpot) that transitions between the two.

According to the feature mQ6, when the game ball enters the first ball entering means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball When the game ball is continuously shot in a predetermined shooting mode, the game ball enters the second ball entering means during execution of the first transition mode, and the second transition mode is executed, and the second transition mode is executed. The game ball enters the third ball entering means during the execution of the above, the game ball entering the third ball entering means enters the fourth ball entering means, and the third as the privilege giving mode 3 transition modes are performed. That is, according to this feature, the third transition mode as the privilege giving mode is triggered by the game ball entering the second ball entering means that has entered the ball entering state during the execution of the first transition mode. can be executed.

<Characteristic mR group>
The feature mR group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature mR1]
A first ball entry means (normal figure start gate 35) that allows game balls to enter,
a first predetermined information acquiring means for acquiring first predetermined information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entering means;
A first determination means (a function of executing a normal pattern lottery) that performs a first determination that is a determination as to whether or not the first predetermined information satisfies a first condition;
A second ball entry means (special electric start opening) that allows game balls to enter,
A state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball-entering means (closed state), and a state in which a game ball is possible or easy to enter the second ball-entering means. a first state transition means (ordinary electric accessory 34b) capable of transitioning between a ball-enterable state (open state);
A first transition mode (a first transition mode ( a first transition mode executing means for executing a normal electric switching execution mode;
A third ball entry means (first big prize opening 57a) that allows game balls to enter,
A state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the third ball-entering means (closed state), and a state in which a game ball is possible or easy to enter the third ball-entering means. a second state transition means (first special electric accessory 57b) capable of transitioning between a ball-enterable state (open state);
A second transition mode in which the second state transition means transitions between the non-enterable state and the enterable state when the game ball enters the second ball entry means (special electric start opening). Second transition mode execution means for executing (special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the entry of a game ball into the special electric starting port);
a fourth ball entry means (V winning opening 57av) into which a game ball entered by the third ball entry means can enter;
A fifth ball entry means (second big prize opening 58a) into which a game ball can enter;
A state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the fifth ball-entering means (closed state), and a state in which a game ball is possible or easy to enter the fifth ball-entering means. a third state transition means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of transitioning between a ball-enterable state (open state);
When a game ball enters the fourth ball entering means, a third transition mode (for V winning jackpot) that causes the third state transition means to transition between the state where the ball cannot be entered and the state where the ball can be entered a third transition mode execution means for executing a special electric switching execution mode based on
a payout means (payout device 71) for paying out a game ball as a prize ball when the game ball enters the fifth ball entering means;
A gaming machine comprising
The first transition mode executing means,
The time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode (general power switching execution mode),
The time required from the start to the end of the second transition mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the entry of a game ball into the special electric starting gate) and the start of the third transition mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on V winning) A gaming machine characterized by comprising a means for setting a time longer than the sum of the time required from to the end.

According to the feature mR1, when the game ball enters the first ball entering means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball When the game ball is continuously shot in a predetermined shooting mode, the game ball enters the second ball entering means during execution of the first transition mode, and the second transition mode is executed, and the second transition mode is executed. A game ball enters the third ball-entering means during the execution of, the game ball entering the third ball-entering means enters the fourth ball-entering means, and the third transition mode is executed. be.

Further, according to this feature, the first transition mode execution means divides the time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode into the time required from the start to the end of the second transition mode and the time required from the start to the end of the second transition mode and the time required for the end of the first transition mode, even after the second transition mode ends and the third transition mode ends thereafter. continues, and there is a case where the first state transition means transitions to the ball entry possible state during the continuation of the first transition mode, and the game ball can enter the second ball entry means.

In this case, if the game ball enters the second ball entering means, the second transition mode is executed again, and then the third transition mode is executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the second transition mode and the third transition mode may be executed multiple times. When the third transition mode is executed multiple times, the player can get an opportunity to win a large number of game balls as prize balls. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong sense of anticipation for the start of the first transition mode, and to improve the amusement of the game.

[Feature mR2]
The gaming machine according to feature mR1,
During execution of the first transition mode, the first transition mode execution means causes the first state transition means to transition from the non-enterable state to the enterable state after the third transition mode ends. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a means.

According to the characteristic mR2, the first transition mode executing means causes the first state transition means to transition from the ball-entry prohibited state to the ball-entry possible state after the third transition mode ends during execution of the first transition mode. Since the means is provided, it becomes possible for the game ball to enter the second ball entering means after the third transition mode ends. Then, when the game ball enters the second ball entering means after the third transition mode ends, the second transition mode is executed again, and then the third transition mode is executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the second transition mode and the third transition mode are executed multiple times. When the third transition mode is executed multiple times, the player can get an opportunity to win a large number of game balls as prize balls. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong sense of anticipation for the start of the first transition mode, and to improve the amusement of the game.

[Feature mR3]
A gaming machine according to feature mR1 or feature mR2,
During the execution of the second transition mode or during the execution of the third transition mode When the game ball enters the second ball entry means (special figure start port 34a), the second predetermined information A gaming machine comprising means for avoiding acquisition or avoiding execution of the second determination.

According to the feature mR3, when the game ball enters the second ball entering means during execution of the second transition mode or during execution of the third transition mode, the acquisition of the second predetermined information is avoided or Since means for avoiding execution of the second determination is provided, even if a game ball enters the second ball entering means during execution of the second transition mode or during execution of the third transition mode, the second The transition mode is not executed, and the third transition mode is not executed either, which is a disadvantageous situation for the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel nervous that the second transition mode and the third transition mode should be finished before the timing at which the game ball can enter the second ball entering means comes.

Further, unlike this feature, even if a game ball enters the second ball entering means during execution of the second transition mode or during execution of the third transition mode, the second predetermined information When adopting a configuration that does not avoid acquisition and execution of the second determination, a plurality of game balls enter the second ball entering means in one transition of the first state transition means to the entering ball possible state. In this case, a plurality of pieces of the second predetermined information are withheld, and the second transition mode and the third transition mode are executed a plurality of times regardless of the transition mode of the first state transition means in the first transition mode. There is

On the other hand, according to this feature, even if a plurality of game balls enter the second ball entering means in one transition to the entering ball possible state of the first state transition means, the second It is possible to realize a playability in which the number of executions of the second transition mode and the number of executions of the third transition mode is one each for one transition to the enterable state of the one-state transition means.

[Feature mR4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features mR1 to mR3,
The third transition mode executing means,
As the third transition mode (special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot), the time required from start to finish is predetermined regardless of the shooting mode of the game ball and the behavior of the game ball after shooting. A gaming machine comprising means capable of executing a predetermined length third transition mode (fixed-length special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a V prize jackpot) having a predetermined length.

According to the feature mR4, the third transition mode executing means predetermines the time required from the start to the end of the third transition mode regardless of the game ball shooting mode and the behavior of the game ball after shooting. means capable of executing the predetermined length third transition mode having a predetermined length. not longer than the length of Therefore, for example, even at the timing when the first state transition means transitions to the enterable state due to the length of the third transition mode becoming longer than the predetermined length, the third transition mode has not yet ended. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where there is no As a result, the third transition mode is not completed even at the timing when the game ball enters the second ball entering means, and the second transition occurs even though the game ball enters the second ball entering means. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a disadvantageous situation for the player such that the mode is not executed and the third transition mode is not executed.

<Characteristic nA group>
The feature nA group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and mainly extracted from the third embodiment.

[Feature nA1]
a launching means for launching a game ball;
a game area in which the game balls shot by the shooting means circulate;
Circulation state detection means (detection sensor 205 in the third embodiment) for detecting the distribution state of game balls in the game area;
information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Lottery execution means for executing a lottery based on the acquired special information;
a game round executing means for executing a game round when the game operation for informing the result of the lottery by the lottery executing means is started and then the game operation is ended;
production execution means for executing production;
A gaming machine comprising
The production executing means is
Means for executing a specific effect (specific suggestive effect) in a specific lottery result game cycle, which is a game cycle informing that the result of the lottery is a specific lottery result (small win c in the third embodiment);
When the distribution mode of the game ball before the specific lottery result game round is executed is a specific distribution mode (distribution mode in which stop shot is performed), in the specific lottery result game round A means not to execute a specific production (specific suggestion),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature nA1, since the specific lottery result game cycle informing that the lottery result is the specific lottery result, the specific effect is executed, so that the player who recognizes that the specific effect has been executed is provided. , it is possible to give a sense of expectation about the result of the lottery. Furthermore, when the distribution mode of the game balls before the specific lottery result game round is executed is the specific distribution mode, the specific effect is not executed in the specific lottery result game round, so that the player can perform the specific lottery game. When the player desires to execute an effect, it is possible to suppress the player from performing a game ball shooting operation so as to achieve a specific distribution mode. As a result, for example, if the player launches the game balls so as to achieve a specific circulation mode, the player will be given a privilege that is not planned for the gaming machine. Certain awards can be suppressed to players who do not.

[Feature nA2]
The gaming machine according to feature nA1,
A first specific lottery result game round and a second specific lottery result game round executed after the first specific lottery result game round as the two specific lottery result game rounds (game rounds with a small win c). When defining the game times,
The production executing means is
A first distribution mode (circulation frequency) that is the distribution mode during the period in which the first specific lottery result game round is executed, and a game round executed before the second specific lottery result game round And the second specific lottery result game based on the second distribution mode (distribution frequency) that is the distribution mode during the period in which the game round other than the first specific lottery result game round is executed A gaming machine comprising means for determining whether or not to execute the specific effect (specific suggestive effect) in a round.

According to the feature nA2, the distribution mode in the period in which the first specific lottery result game round is executed, and the game round executed before the second specific lottery result game round and the first specific lottery Since it is determined whether or not to execute a specific effect in the second specific lottery result game round based on the distribution mode during the period in which the game round other than the result game round is executed, the first specific lottery result is determined. Mode of game ball shooting operation by a player recognizing a specific effect executed in a game round, and a second specific lottery result A game round executed before a game round and a first specific lottery result It is possible to detect whether the shooting operation of the game ball is switched between the specific lottery result game round and the other game round by comparing with the mode of the game ball shooting operation by the player in the game round other than the game round. . Therefore, for example, it is possible to accurately determine whether or not the player is intentionally trying to obtain a privilege not expected by the gaming machine, and whether or not to execute a specific effect based on the determination result. can be determined.

[Feature nA3]
A gaming machine according to feature nA1 or feature nA2,
The production executing means is
a first circulating game ball number (circulation frequency), which is the number of game balls circulating in a specific position of the game area per unit time during the period in which the first specific lottery result game round is executed;
During a period in which a game round other than the first specific lottery result game round which is executed before the second specific lottery result game round is executed, the number of the game regions per unit time is increased. A second number of circulating game balls (circulation frequency), which is the number of game balls circulating in a specific position;
means for determining whether or not to execute the specific effect (specific suggestive effect) in the second specific lottery result game round based on the above.

According to the feature nA3, based on the first number of circulating games and the second number of circulating games regarding the number of game balls circulating in a specific position of the game area per unit time, the second specific lottery result game round is specified. Since it is determined whether or not to execute the effect of , it is possible to accurately detect the mode of the player's shooting operation regarding the distribution of the game ball to a specific position in the game area.

[Feature nA4]
The gaming machine according to feature nA3,
The production executing means is
means for not executing the specific effect in the second specific lottery result game round when the second number of circulated game balls is smaller than the first number of circulated game balls by a predetermined number or more; game machine.

According to the feature nA4, the player circulates the game ball through a specific position in the game area during the period when the specific lottery result game round is executed, and the game round other than the specific lottery result game round is executed. It is possible to prevent execution of a specific performance when a player performs a shooting operation of a game ball that prevents the game ball from circulating through a specific position in the game area during the period.

<Characteristic nB group>
The feature nB group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and mainly extracted from the third embodiment.

[Feature nB1]
a launching means for launching a game ball;
a game area in which the game balls shot by the shooting means circulate;
information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Circulation state detection means (detection sensor 205 in the third embodiment) for detecting the distribution state of game balls in the game area;
production execution means for executing production;
A gaming machine comprising
The production executing means is
When a specific condition related to the special information is satisfied (the result of the winning lottery is a small win c), and when the distribution mode satisfies a predetermined specific distribution condition (when the final blow is not performed) ), means for executing a specific production (specific suggestive production),
When the specific conditions related to the special information are satisfied (the result of the winning lottery is a small win c), and when the distribution mode does not satisfy the specific distribution conditions (when a final blow is made) , means for not executing the specific effect (specific suggestive effect).

According to the feature nB1, when the distribution mode does not satisfy a predetermined specific distribution condition, the specific effect is not executed even though the specific condition is satisfied, so the specific effect is executed. A player who desires a game ball can be urged to perform a game ball shooting operation that satisfies a specific circulation condition.

[Feature nB2]
The gaming machine according to feature nB1,
The production executing means is
The specific A gaming machine characterized by comprising determination means for determining whether or not the distribution conditions of the above are satisfied.

According to the feature nB2, the determination means is provided for determining whether or not a specific distribution condition is satisfied based on the distribution mode in the first period and the distribution mode in the second period. Whether or not to execute a specific effect can be determined based on the change in the game ball shooting operation by the player.

[Feature nB3]
A gaming machine according to feature nB1 or feature nB2,
Lottery execution means for executing a lottery based on the acquired special information;
a game round executing means for executing a game round when the game operation for informing the result of the lottery by the lottery executing means is started and then the game operation is ended;
with
The production executing means is
A gaming machine comprising means for executing the specific effect (specific suggestive effect) when the result of the lottery is a specific lottery result (small win c) as the specific condition.

According to the feature nB3, since a specific effect is executed when a specific lottery result is obtained, a player who desires a specific lottery result can be given a sense of expectation by executing the specific effect. can. Furthermore, when the distribution mode does not satisfy a predetermined specific distribution condition, the specific effect is not executed even with a specific lottery result. can be urged to execute the shooting operation of the game ball in a distribution mode that satisfies the distribution conditions of .

[Feature nB4]
The gaming machine according to feature nB3,
The production executing means is
A gaming machine comprising means for determining that the specific distribution condition is not satisfied when the distribution mode changes according to the result of the lottery corresponding to the game round.

According to the feature nB4, when the player performs a game ball shooting operation such that the distribution mode changes according to the result of the lottery corresponding to the game round, a specific effect is executed even if the result is a specific lottery result. Therefore, it is possible to urge a player who desires execution of a specific effect not to perform a game ball shooting operation that changes the distribution mode according to the result of the lottery.

<Characteristic nC group>
The feature nC group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and mainly extracted from the third embodiment.

[Feature nC1]
a launching means for launching a game ball;
a game area in which the game balls shot by the shooting means circulate;
a process executing means for executing a specific process;
A gaming machine comprising
The specific process executing means is
Means for determining whether or not to execute the specific processing (specific suggestive effect in the third embodiment) based on the circulation frequency, which is the frequency at which game balls circulate in the specific position of the game area. Characteristic game machine.

According to the feature nC1, whether or not to execute a specific process is determined based on the distribution frequency. The distribution frequency is correlated with the game ball shooting operation by the player. Therefore, it is possible to execute a process reflecting the player's shooting operation of the game ball, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Feature nC2]
The gaming machine according to feature nC1,
information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Lottery execution means for executing a lottery based on the acquired special information;
a game round executing means for executing a game round when the game operation for informing the result of the lottery by the lottery executing means is started and then the game operation is ended;
with
The specific process executing means is
Execute the specific process in the game round,
Whether or not to execute the specific process upon execution of an unexecuted game round, which is a game round that has not yet been executed, based on the distribution frequency in the game round in which the specific process has already been executed A gaming machine characterized by determining

According to the feature nC2, it is determined whether or not to execute a specific process when a non-executed game round is executed, based on the circulation frequency in the game rounds in which the specific process has already been executed. Therefore, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute a specific process after taking into consideration the player's shooting operation due to the execution of the specific process, that is, the player's reaction to the execution of the specific process. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic nD group>
The feature nD group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and mainly extracted from the third embodiment.

[Feature nD1]
a launching means for launching a game ball;
a game area in which the game balls shot by the shooting means circulate;
a distribution pattern detection means for detecting a distribution pattern of game balls in the game area;
information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Lottery execution means for executing a lottery based on the acquired special information;
a game round executing means for executing a game round when the game operation for informing the result of the lottery by the lottery executing means is started and then the game operation is ended;
For each game round, the result of the lottery corresponding to the game round and the circulation number, which is the number of game balls circulating in a specific position of the game area during the period during which the game round is executed, are associated. Storage means for storing attached information (game ball number count memory area in the third embodiment);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature nD1, for each game round, the result of the lottery corresponding to the game round and the circulation number, which is the number of game balls circulating in a specific position of the game area during the period during which the game round is executed. and storage means for storing information in which the and are associated with each other. The circulation number is correlated with the game ball shooting operation by the player. Therefore, it is possible to execute a process based on the lottery result or the effect during the game that reflects the lottery result and the player's shooting operation of the game ball (player's reaction). For example, it is possible to feed back a player's reaction to an effect reflecting a specific lottery result and select an effect in a game cycle to be executed from now on, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Feature nD2]
A gaming machine according to feature nD1,
When the time from the start of the game operation for informing the result of the lottery by the lottery execution means to the end of the game operation is set as the variable time,
The storage means
For each game round, the result of the lottery corresponding to the game round, the circulation number, which is the number of game balls circulating in a specific position of the game area during the period in which the game round is executed, and the A gaming machine comprising means (a game ball number count memory area in the third embodiment) for storing information in which the variation time in a game round is associated with the information.

According to the feature nD2, for each game round, the result of the lottery corresponding to the game round and the circulation number, which is the number of game balls circulating in a specific position of the game area during the period during which the game round is executed. and the variable time in the game round are stored in correspondence with each other. Therefore, for example, it is possible to calculate the frequency (circulation frequency) at which the game ball circulates in a specific position in the game area based on the fluctuation time and the number of circulations of the game round, and the lottery for each game round Based on the result and the distribution frequency corresponding to the result of the lottery, it is possible to determine the processing and the like in the game round to be executed from now on, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Feature nD3]
A gaming machine according to feature nD1 or feature nD2,
Equipped with specific processing execution means for executing specific processing (specific suggestion effect),
A gaming machine, wherein the specific process execution means comprises means for determining whether or not to execute the specific process based on the information stored in the storage means.

According to the feature nD3, for example, a specific effect is executed based on the result of the lottery or the effect during the game round reflecting the result of the lottery and the operation of shooting the game ball by the player (the reaction of the player). It is possible to determine whether or not to execute the particular performance in the game round to be executed by feeding back the player's reaction to the performance reflecting the result of the specific lottery. be able to.

<Characteristic nE group>
The feature nE group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and mainly extracted from the third embodiment.

[Feature nE1]
a launching means for launching a game ball;
a game area in which the game balls shot by the shooting means circulate;
a distribution pattern detection means for detecting a distribution pattern of game balls in the game area;
information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Lottery execution means for executing a lottery based on the acquired special information;
a game round execution means for executing a game round when the game operation for informing the result of the lottery by the lottery execution means is started and then the game operation is ended;
a storage means for storing predetermined information;
with
The storage means
When the time from the start of the game operation for informing the result of the lottery by the lottery execution means to the end of the game operation is set as the variable time,
Means (game ball number count memory area in the third embodiment) for storing information that associates the result of the lottery corresponding to each game round with the variable time in the game round for each game round. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature nE1, the storage means includes means for storing, for each game round, information in which the result of the lottery corresponding to the game round and the fluctuation time in the game round are associated with each other. The information can be used for various processes, such as determining the effect in the game round to be executed by using the information.

[Feature nE2]
The gaming machine according to feature nE1,
The storage means
For each game round, the result of the lottery corresponding to the game round, the variation time in the game round, and the game balls circulating in a specific position of the game area during the period during which the game round is executed. A game machine, comprising: means for storing information in which the numbers in circulation are associated with each other (game ball number count memory area in the third embodiment).

According to the feature nE2, the storage means includes means for storing, for each game round, information in which the result of the lottery corresponding to the game round, the fluctuation time in the game round, and the circulation number are associated with each other. . Therefore, for example, it is possible to calculate the frequency (circulation frequency) at which the game ball circulates in a specific position in the game area based on the fluctuation time and the number of circulations of the game round, and the lottery for each game round Based on the result and the distribution frequency corresponding to the result of the lottery, it is possible to determine the processing and the like in the game round to be executed from now on, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Feature nE3]
A gaming machine according to feature nE1 or feature nE2,
Equipped with specific processing execution means for executing specific processing (specific suggestion effect),
A gaming machine, wherein the specific process execution means comprises means for determining whether or not to execute the specific process based on the information stored in the storage means.

According to the feature nE3, it is possible to determine, for example, whether or not to execute a specific effect based on the result of the lottery corresponding to the game round and the variable time in the game round, thereby improving the interest of the game. can be planned.

<Characteristic nF group>
The feature nF group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and mainly extracted from the third embodiment.

[Feature nF1]
a launching means for launching a game ball;
a game area in which the game balls shot by the shooting means circulate;
a distribution pattern detection means for detecting a distribution pattern of game balls in the game area;
information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Lottery execution means for executing a lottery based on the acquired special information;
a game round execution means for executing a game round when the game operation for informing the result of the lottery by the lottery execution means is started and then the game operation is ended;
Effect executing means for executing a specific effect (specific suggestive effect) in the game round;
storage means for storing predetermined information;
with
The storage means
For each game round, whether or not the specific effect is executed in the game round, and the circulation number, which is the number of game balls circulating in a specific position of the game area during the period in which the game round is being executed, (game ball number count memory area in modification 4 of the third embodiment) for storing information associated with .

According to the feature nF1, for each game round, whether or not a specific effect is executed in the game round, and the number of game balls circulating in a specific position of the game area during the period in which the game round is executed. Since means for storing information in which the circulation number is associated is provided, for example, the information is used to determine the effect to be executed in consideration of the player's reaction to the execution of the specific effect. Such information can be used for various processes.

[Feature nF2]
The gaming machine according to feature nF1,
The storage means
When the time from the start of the game operation for informing the result of the lottery by the lottery execution means to the end of the game operation is set as the variable time,
For each game round, whether or not the specific effect is executed in the game round, and the circulation number, which is the number of game balls circulating in a specific position of the game area during the period in which the game round is being executed, A gaming machine comprising means for storing information associated with the variable time in the game round (modification 4 of the third embodiment).

According to the feature nF2, the storage means stores, for each game round, whether or not a specific effect is executed in the game round, and whether or not the game ball circulates at a specific position in the game area during the period in which the game round is executed. Means for storing information that associates the number of circulation, which is the number obtained, with the variation time in the game round. Therefore, for example, it is possible to calculate the frequency (circulation frequency) in which the game ball circulates in a specific position in the game area based on the variation time and the number of circulations of the game round, and a specific effect is executed. This information can be used for various processes, such as determining a process in consideration of the game ball shooting operation by the player.

[Feature nF3]
A gaming machine according to feature nF1 or feature nF2,
The specific effect execution means is
A game characterized by comprising means (modification 4 of the third embodiment) for determining whether or not to execute the specific effect in a game turn to be executed based on the information stored in the storage means. machine.

According to the feature nF3, when determining whether or not to execute a specific effect, it is possible to consider the reaction of the player when the specific effect was previously executed, and whether or not to execute the specific effect can be considered. Control can be performed by feeding back the reaction of the player.

<Characteristic nG group>
The feature nG group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and mainly extracted from the third embodiment.

[Feature nG1]
a launching means for launching a game ball;
a game area in which the game balls shot by the shooting means circulate;
a distribution pattern detection means (detection sensor 205 in the third embodiment) for detecting a distribution pattern of game balls at a specific position in the game area;
information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Lottery execution means for executing a lottery based on the acquired special information;
a game round execution means for executing a game round when the game operation for informing the result of the lottery by the lottery execution means is started and then the game operation is ended;
a game state control means for controlling a game state, which is a game state;
production execution means for executing production;
When the game state shifts from the first game state (low frequency support mode) to the second game state (high frequency support mode), based on the distribution mode of the game ball at the specific position detected, A gaming machine comprising means for determining whether or not to execute a specific effect (specific suggestive effect).

According to the feature nG1, when the game state is shifted to the second game state, it is determined whether or not to execute a specific effect based on the detected circulation mode. This makes it possible to make the player aware of the distribution mode of game balls at a specific position, thereby improving the interest in the game.

[Feature nG2]
The gaming machine according to feature nG1,
The production executing means is
A game machine characterized by comprising means for not determining whether or not to execute the specific effect in the first game state (low-frequency support mode) regardless of the detected distribution mode.

According to the feature nG2, in the first game state, regardless of the detected circulation mode, it is not determined whether or not to execute a specific effect, so the processing in the first game state can be simplified. .

[Feature nG3]
A gaming machine according to feature nG1 or feature nG2,
The production executing means is
The results of the lottery corresponding to the executed game rounds, which are the game rounds that have already been executed in the second gaming state (high-frequency support mode), and the distribution mode ( distribution frequency) and means for determining whether or not to execute the specific effect in the second game state.

According to the feature nG3, whether or not to execute a specific effect in the second game state based on the lottery results of the executed game times already executed in the second game state and the circulation mode in the executed game times. determine whether or not The distribution mode has a correlation with the game ball shooting operation of the player. Therefore, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute a specific effect according to the correlation between the lottery result of the executed game round and the player's shooting operation of the game ball in the executed game round, and the game corresponding to the lottery result. The performance can be determined in consideration of the psychology of the person. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic nH group>
The feature nH group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and mainly extracted from the third embodiment.

[Feature nH1]
a launching means for launching a game ball;
a game area in which the game balls shot by the shooting means circulate;
a distribution pattern detection means for detecting a distribution pattern of game balls in the game area;
information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Lottery execution means for executing a lottery based on the acquired special information;
a game round executing means for executing a game round when the game operation for informing the result of the lottery by the lottery executing means is started and then the game operation is ended;
Driving means (movable role object MY in modification 1 of the third embodiment) that drives so as to be visible to the player;
A gaming machine comprising
The drive means
When the distribution mode satisfies a predetermined specific distribution condition (when the player does not make a stopping shot), driving based on the result of the lottery (small win c),
A gaming machine characterized in that it is not driven when the specific circulation condition is not satisfied (when the player is playing a stopping shot).

According to the feature nH1, the drive means is driven based on the result of the lottery when the distribution mode satisfies a predetermined specific distribution condition, and is not driven when the specific distribution condition is not satisfied. Since the player desires to know the result of the lottery, the game ball is shot so that the distribution mode satisfies a specific distribution condition in order to drive the driving means based on the result of the lottery. That is, according to the characteristic nH1, it is possible to prompt the player to perform a game ball shooting operation in which the distribution mode satisfies a predetermined specific distribution condition. Furthermore, since the drive means is driven based on the result of the lottery, it is easy for the player to visually recognize the result of the lottery, and it is possible to easily give the player a sense of expectation for the result of the lottery.

[Feature nH2]
The gaming machine according to feature nH1,
The drive means
means for driving when the result of the lottery is a specific lottery result when the distribution mode satisfies a predetermined specific distribution condition;
a means that does not operate if the result of the lottery is not a specific lottery result when the distribution mode satisfies a predetermined specific distribution condition;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature nH2, when the distribution mode satisfies a predetermined specific distribution condition, it is driven when the lottery result is a specific lottery result, and when the lottery result is not a specific lottery result. Since it is not driven, depending on whether or not the driving means is driven, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to whether or not the lottery result is a specific lottery result.

<Characteristic nI group>
The feature nI group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and mainly extracted from the third embodiment.

[Feature nI1]
a launching means for launching a game ball;
a game area in which the game balls shot by the shooting means circulate;
a distribution pattern detection means for detecting a distribution pattern of game balls in the game area;
information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
a game round executing means for executing a game round when the game operation for informing the result of the lottery by the lottery executing means is started and then the game operation is ended;
a process executing means for executing a predetermined process;
A gaming machine comprising
The processing execution means is
A game that has not yet been executed based on the distribution mode in the executed game round in which the process executing means has executed a specific process (specific suggestive effect) among the already executed game rounds. (Modification 4 of the third embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature nI1, it is determined whether or not to execute the specific process with the execution of the unexecuted game round as a trigger based on the distribution mode in the executed game round in which the specific process has been executed. Considering the game ball shooting operation by the player when executing the specific process in , it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the specific process triggered by the execution of the non-executed game round. Therefore, for example, when a player performs or may perform an unfair operation unexpected by a gaming machine by executing a specific process, it is possible to prevent the specific process from being performed. It can be used for various processing.

[Feature nI2]
The gaming machine according to feature nI1,
The processing execution means includes a production execution means for executing production,
The directing means is
A gaming machine comprising means for executing a specific effect (specific suggestion effect) as the specific process.

According to the characteristic nI2, it is determined whether or not to execute the specific effect with the execution of the unexecuted game times as a trigger based on the distribution mode in the executed game times in which the specific effect is executed. Considering the player's shooting operation of the game ball when executing the specific effect, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the specific effect with the execution of the non-executed game time as a trigger. Therefore, for example, when a player performs or is likely to perform an unfair operation unexpected by the gaming machine due to the execution of a specific effect, it is possible to prevent a specific process from being performed. It can be used for various processing.

[Feature nI3]
A gaming machine according to feature nI1 or feature nI2,
A gaming machine, wherein the circulation mode is a circulation frequency, which is the number of game balls that circulate in a specific position of the game area per unit time.

The circulation frequency, which is the number of game balls that circulate at a specific position in the game area, correlates with the launch intensity when the game balls are launched. Therefore, according to the feature nI3, when the player performs or is likely to perform an illegal operation unexpected by the game machine as an operation of the firing intensity of the game ball due to the execution of the specific process, the specific process make it possible to avoid

<Characteristic nJ group>
The feature nJ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and mainly extracted from the third embodiment.

[Feature nJ1]
a launching means for launching a game ball;
a game area in which the game balls shot by the shooting means circulate;
a distribution pattern detection means for detecting a distribution pattern of game balls in the game area;
information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Lottery execution means for executing a lottery based on the acquired special information;
a game round executing means for executing a game round when the game operation for informing the result of the lottery by the lottery executing means is started and then the game operation is ended;
production execution means for executing production;
A gaming machine comprising
The production executing means is
A gaming machine, wherein an effect in a specific game round is determined based on a circulation mode (circulation frequency) in a game round other than a specific game round (a game round that is a small win c in the third embodiment). .

According to the feature nJ1, the effect in the specific game round is determined based on the distribution mode in the game round other than the specific game round. The distribution mode has a correlation with the game ball shooting operation of the player. Therefore, it is possible to determine the content of the presentation based on the manner in which the game ball is shot by the player, thereby making the game more interesting.

[Feature nJ2]
The gaming machine according to feature nJ1,
A gaming machine, wherein the circulation mode is a circulation frequency, which is the number of game balls that circulate in a specific position of the game area per unit time.

According to the feature nJ2, the effect in a specific game round is determined based on the distribution frequency, which is the number of game balls that circulate in a specific position in the game area. The circulation frequency, which is the number of game balls that circulate at a specific position in the game area, correlates with the launch intensity when the game balls are launched. Therefore, it is possible to determine the contents of the presentation based on the shooting intensity of the game ball which is correlated with the player's shooting operation, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Feature nJ3]
A gaming machine according to feature nJ1 or feature nJ2,
The production executing means is
means for determining whether or not to execute a specific effect in the specific game round based on the distribution frequency in game rounds other than the specific game round;
means for not executing a specific effect in the specific game round when the circulation frequency in the game round other than the specific game round is lower than a predetermined circulation frequency;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature nJ3, when the distribution frequency in game rounds other than the specific game round is lower than the predetermined circulation frequency, the specific production is not executed in the specific game round, so execution of the specific production is desired. It is possible to prompt the player to perform a game ball shooting operation so as to maintain a predetermined or higher distribution frequency in game rounds other than specific game rounds.

<Characteristic nK group>
The feature nK group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and mainly extracted from the third embodiment.

[Feature nK1]
a launching means for launching a game ball;
a game area in which the game balls shot by the shooting means circulate;
a distribution pattern detection means for detecting a distribution pattern of game balls in the game area;
information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Lottery execution means for executing a lottery based on the acquired special information;
Prior lottery result acquisition means for acquiring the result of the lottery before the lottery executing means executes the lottery (first determination process in Modification 5 of the third embodiment);
a game round execution means for executing a game round when the game operation for informing the result of the lottery by the lottery execution means is started and then the game operation is ended;
production execution means for executing production;
A gaming machine comprising
The production executing means is
When the result of the lottery acquired by the preceding lottery result acquiring means is a specific lottery result, the number of game balls in a predetermined period before the preceding lottery result acquiring means acquires the specific lottery result. A gaming machine comprising effect determination means (modification 5 of the third embodiment) for determining a effect to be executed before the specific lottery result game round is executed based on a distribution mode.

According to the characteristic nK1, when the result of the lottery acquired by the previous lottery result acquisition means is a specific lottery result, the game ball distribution mode in a predetermined period, that is, based on the game ball shooting operation by the player Since the effect to be executed is determined before the specific lottery result game round is executed, it is possible to guess whether or not the specific lottery result is obtained before the specific lottery result game round is executed. It is possible to make the desired player aware of the shooting operation of the game ball.

[Feature nK2]
A gaming machine according to feature nK1,
The production determining means is
Means for determining an effect to be executed before the specific lottery result game round is executed based on the number of game balls circulating in a specific position during the predetermined period (modification 5 of the third embodiment) )
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature nK2, for a player who desires to guess whether or not it is a specific lottery result before the specific lottery result game round is executed, a predetermined game ball shooting operation is performed. It is possible to make the player aware of the number of game balls that circulate at a specific position during the period.

[Feature nK3]
A gaming machine according to feature nK1 or feature nK2,
The effect determination means (modification 5 in the third embodiment),
When the lottery result obtained by the preceding lottery result obtaining means is the specific lottery result, and the distribution mode of the game balls in the predetermined period satisfies a predetermined specific distribution condition. means for executing the specific effect before the specific lottery result game round is executed,
When the result of the lottery acquired by the preceding lottery result acquisition means is the specific lottery result, and the distribution mode of the game balls in the predetermined period does not satisfy the specific distribution condition, means for not executing the specific effect before the specific lottery result game round is executed;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature nK3, a specific lottery result game round is executed for a player who desires to guess whether or not a specific lottery result is obtained before the specific lottery result game round is executed. It is possible to make it desired that a specific effect is performed before the performance is performed. As a result, it is possible to prompt the player to shoot the game ball so that the game ball distribution mode in the predetermined period satisfies the specific distribution condition.

<Characteristic nL group>
The feature nL group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and mainly extracted from the third embodiment.

[Feature nL1]
a launching means for launching a game ball;
a game area in which the game balls shot by the shooting means circulate;
a distribution pattern detection means for detecting a distribution pattern of game balls in the game area;
information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Lottery execution means for executing a lottery based on the acquired special information;
Prior lottery result acquisition means for acquiring the result of the lottery before the lottery execution means executes the lottery (first determination process in Modification 6 of the third embodiment);
a game round executing means for executing a game round when the game operation for informing the result of the lottery by the lottery executing means is started and then the game operation is ended;
production execution means for executing production;
A gaming machine comprising
The production executing means is
When the lottery result obtained by the preceding lottery result obtaining means is a specific lottery result, the lottery result is changed to the specific lottery after the previous lottery result obtaining means obtains the specific lottery result. Before the specific lottery result game round is executed based on the distribution mode of the game balls in a predetermined period before the specific lottery result game round, which is the game round that notifies the result, is executed (Modification 6 in the third embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature nL1, when the result of the lottery acquired by the previous lottery result acquisition means is a specific lottery result, the game ball distribution mode in a predetermined period, that is, based on the game ball shooting operation by the player Since the effect to be executed is determined before the specific lottery result game round is executed, it is possible to guess whether or not the specific lottery result is obtained before the specific lottery result game round is executed. It is possible to make the desired player aware of the shooting operation of the game ball.

[Feature nL2]
The gaming machine according to feature nL1,
The production determining means is
A means for determining an effect to be executed before the specific lottery result game round is executed based on the number of game balls circulating in a specific position during the predetermined period (modification 6 of the third embodiment) )
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature nL2, for a player who desires to guess whether or not it is a specific lottery result before the specific lottery result game round is executed, a predetermined game ball shooting operation is performed. It is possible to make the player aware of the number of game balls that circulate at a specific position during the period.

[Feature nL3]
A gaming machine according to feature nL1 or feature nL2,
The effect determination means (modification 6 in the third embodiment) is
When the lottery result obtained by the preceding lottery result obtaining means is the specific lottery result, and the distribution mode of the game balls in the predetermined period satisfies a predetermined specific distribution condition. means for executing the specific effect before the specific lottery result game round is executed,
When the result of the lottery acquired by the preceding lottery result acquisition means is the specific lottery result, and the distribution mode of the game balls in the predetermined period does not satisfy the specific distribution condition, means for not executing the specific effect before the specific lottery result game round is executed;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature nL3, a specific lottery result game round is executed for a player who desires to guess whether or not a specific lottery result is obtained before the specific lottery result game round is executed. It is possible to make it desired that a specific effect is performed before the performance is performed. As a result, it is possible to prompt the player to perform a game ball shooting operation in which the game ball distribution mode in a predetermined period satisfies a specific distribution condition.

<Characteristic nM group>
The feature nM group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and mainly extracted from the third embodiment.

[Feature nM1]
a launching means for launching a game ball;
a game area in which the game balls shot by the shooting means circulate;
a distribution pattern detection means for detecting a distribution pattern of game balls in the game area;
information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Lottery execution means for executing a lottery based on the acquired special information;
Prior lottery result acquisition means for acquiring the result of the lottery before the lottery execution means executes the lottery (previous determination process in modification 7 of the third embodiment);
a game round execution means for executing a game round when the game operation for informing the result of the lottery by the lottery execution means is started and then the game operation is ended;
production execution means for executing production;
A gaming machine comprising
The production executing means is
When the lottery result obtained by the preceding lottery result obtaining means is a specific lottery result, the lottery result is changed to the specific lottery after the previous lottery result obtaining means obtains the specific lottery result. An effect to be executed in the specific lottery result game round is determined based on the distribution mode of the game balls in a predetermined period before the specific lottery result game round, which is the game round informing the result, is executed. Equipped with effect determination means (modification 7 of the third embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature nM1, when the result of the lottery acquired by the previous lottery result acquisition means is a specific lottery result, the game ball distribution mode in a predetermined period, that is, based on the game ball shooting operation by the player , Since the effect to be executed in the specific lottery result game round is determined, the player who wants to guess whether the specific lottery result is obtained by the effect to be executed in the specific lottery result game round is asked to play the game. It is possible to make the player aware of the shooting operation of the ball. In addition, it is possible to determine the effect to be executed in the specific lottery result game round in consideration of the psychological state etc. that can be inferred from the game ball shooting operation by the player during the predetermined period.

[Feature nM2]
The gaming machine according to feature nM1,
The production determining means is
Means for determining an effect to be executed in the specific lottery result game cycle based on the number of game balls circulating in a specific position during the predetermined period (Modification 7 of the third embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature nM2, for a player who desires to guess whether or not it is a specific lottery result by the effect executed in the specific lottery result game round, a game ball shooting operation is performed in a predetermined period. It is possible to make the player aware of the number of game balls circulating in a specific position.

[Feature nM3]
A gaming machine according to feature nM1 or feature nM2,
The effect determination means (modification 7 of the third embodiment)
When the lottery result obtained by the preceding lottery result obtaining means is the specific lottery result, and the distribution mode of the game balls in the predetermined period satisfies a predetermined specific distribution condition. means for executing a specific effect in the specific lottery result game round,
When the result of the lottery acquired by the preceding lottery result acquisition means is the specific lottery result, and the distribution mode of the game balls in the predetermined period does not satisfy the specific distribution condition, Means for not executing the specific effect in the specific lottery result game round;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature nM3, a specific effect is given in a specific lottery result game round for a player who desires to guess whether or not it is a specific lottery result by the effect executed in the specific lottery result game round. can be desired to be performed. As a result, it is possible to prompt the player to shoot the game ball so that the game ball distribution mode in the predetermined period satisfies the specific distribution condition.

<Characteristic nN group>
The feature nN group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and mainly extracted from the third embodiment.

[Feature nN1]
a launching means for launching a game ball;
a game area in which the game balls shot by the shooting means circulate;
A specific ball entrance (second big winning opening 212a in the third embodiment) that is provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
Between a first state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter the specific ball entrance, and a second state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the specific ball entrance. State transition means (second opening and closing door 212b in the third embodiment) for changing the state in
A first guide flow path (flow path 215 in the third embodiment) that guides the game ball entering the specific ball entrance,
A second guide flow path (flow path 217 in the third embodiment) that guides the game ball entering the specific ball entrance,
Distributing means (first distributing valve 218, second distributing valve 219) for distributing the game ball entering the specific ball entrance to the first guide channel or the second guide channel;
a first ball entrance (first V prize opening V1) into which a game ball that has entered the specific ball entrance can enter;
a second ball entrance (second V prize opening V2) into which only game balls that have entered the specific ball entrance can be entered;
with
The game balls distributed to the first guide flow path by the distribution means are more likely to enter the first ball entrance than the game balls distributed to the second guide flow path by the distribution means. high quality,
The game balls distributed to the second guide channel by the distribution means are more likely to enter the second ball entrance than the game balls distributed to the first guide channel by the distribution means. high quality,
The game ball entering the first ball entrance is more advantageous for the player than the game ball entering the second ball entrance,
The first time, which is the time from when the game ball enters the specific ball entrance to when it reaches the first ball entrance, is the time when the game ball enters the specific ball entrance. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be longer than a second time, which is the time from the point of time until the point of arrival at the second ball entrance.

According to the feature nN1, it is more advantageous for the player to enter the game ball into the first ball entrance than to enter the second ball entrance, and the game ball enters the specific entrance. The first time, which is the time from when the ball enters the ball hole to when it reaches the first ball hole, is the time when the game ball enters the specific ball hole and reaches the second ball hole. Since it is longer than the second time, which is the time until reaching the point of time, when the game ball is distributed to the first guide channel by the distribution means, the game ball enters the first ball inlet. A sense of anticipation for hitting the ball can be continuously given to the player for a long period of time. On the other hand, when the game ball is distributed to the second guide channel by the distribution means, a negative sense of urgency (sense of crisis) about the game ball entering the second ball entrance is felt. , can be granted to the player for only a short period of time. As a result, it is possible to realize a game machine that provides players with a well-balanced sense of anticipation in general, such as providing the player with a long sense of expectation and giving the player a short sense of urgency. be able to.

[Feature nN2]
The gaming machine according to feature nN1,
information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Lottery execution means for executing a lottery based on the acquired special information;
a game round execution means for executing a game round when the game operation for informing the result of the lottery by the lottery execution means is started and then the game operation is ended;
with
The state transition means is
When the result of the lottery is the first lottery result (small win c in the third embodiment), after the end of the game round informing the result of the lottery, the second state is changed to the first state for a predetermined period. a means for transitioning to the state of
When the result of the lottery is the second lottery result (small win other than the small win c in the third embodiment), the second state for a predetermined period after the end of the game round informing the result of the lottery means for transitioning from to the first state;
with
The sorting means is
When the result of the lottery is the first lottery result, the game ball that entered from the specific ball entrance and reached the sorting means after the end of the game round in which the result of the lottery was announced is Means for distributing to the first guide channel;
When the result of the lottery is the second lottery result, the game ball that entered from the specific ball entrance and reached the sorting means after the game round informing the result of the lottery is Means for distributing to the second guide channel;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature nN2, since the guidance path to which the game ball entered from the specific ball entrance is distributed differs depending on the result of the lottery, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the result of the lottery. Furthermore, in addition to the result of the lottery, it is possible to draw the player's attention to how the game balls are distributed by the distributing means, thereby improving the interest in the game.

[Feature nN3]
The gaming machine according to feature nN2,
In the game round in which the result of the lottery is the result of the first lottery or the result of the second lottery, the game ball shot by the shooting means before the result of the lottery is notified is the first lottery result. It is possible to reach the specific ball entrance during the period in which the state transition means is transitioning to the first state triggered by the result of the lottery or the result of the second lottery,
In the game round in which the result of the lottery is the result of the first lottery or the result of the second lottery, the game ball shot by the shooting means after the result of the lottery is notified is the result of the first lottery. Alternatively, it is configured such that it is impossible to reach the specific ball entrance during the period in which the state transition means is transitioning to the first state triggered by the second lottery result (third with the delay mechanism 202 in the embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature nN3, when it is recognized by notification of the lottery result that the result of the lottery is the first lottery result, the game ball is shot and entered into the specific ball entrance, and the lottery result is obtained. A game for each result of the lottery by the player, such as not firing the game ball and not entering the game ball into a specific ball entrance when recognizing that the is the second lottery result by notifying the lottery result Intentional switching of the shooting mode of the ball can be suppressed.

<Feature oA group>
The feature oA group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature oA1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determination means for determining whether the stored special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
specific identification information display means for displaying specific identification information (holding display icon, pattern row) corresponding to the stored special information;
production execution means for executing production;
A gaming machine comprising
The production executing means is
a first moving body display means for displaying a moving first moving body (the first type petal P1 or the second type petal P2);
A means for displaying a second moving body (third type petal P3) configured by a pictorial diagram substantially identical to that of the first moving body, and a period during which the moving body moves toward the specific identification information (target holding arrival trajectory the second moving object display means (the MPU 92 of the audio light emission control device 90 and the first startup of FIG. Mouth holding third type petal effect setting process and second starting mouth holding third type petal effect setting process in FIG. 193);
When the second moving body reaches the specific identification information, the display mode changing means (MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 and the second mobile unit in FIG. 195 executed by it) changes the display mode of the specific identification information. 1 start opening hold display change setting process and second start start hold display change setting process in FIG. 196);
A game machine with

According to the feature oA1, when the second moving object, which has substantially the same picture as the first moving object, reaches the specific identification information, the display mode of the specific identification information is changed. In a conventional pachinko machine that does not have such a configuration, the display mode of the specific identification information changes at a predetermined timing, so the player can predict the timing when the display mode changes. As a result, there is a problem that the player lacks a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency. On the other hand, according to the feature oA1, even if the first mobile object is displayed and reaches the specific identification information, the specific identification information is not affected. When a second moving object, which is composed of substantially the same pictorial diagram as the one moving object, reaches the specific identification information, an effect of changing the display mode of the specific identification information is executed. Therefore, according to the feature oA1, by displaying the first moving body and the second moving body, the player is given a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency, such as whether the display mode of the specific identification information will change. can be granted. In addition, since it is possible to give the player a sense of disappointment that the specific identification information has not changed in the display mode even though the moving object has reached the specific identification information, it will further give the player a sense of anticipation and urgency. can do. Therefore, in the feature oA1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature oA2]
The gaming machine according to feature oA1,
The display mode changing means is
Switching occurrence determination means (first Step So3305 in the starting opening pending display change setting process, and Step So3405 in the second starting opening pending display change setting process in FIG. 196);
When the switching occurrence determination means determines that the switching of the specific identification information does not occur during the predetermined period, the display mode of the specific identification information is changed after the predetermined period, and the specific identification information is displayed during the predetermined period. Means for not changing the display mode of the specific identification information (steps So3310 and So3311 in the first starting port holding display change setting process in FIG. 195, and steps So3311 in FIG. 196 Steps So3410 and So3411) in the second start opening pending display change setting process;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature oA2, even if the second moving body reaches the specific identification information, when switching of the specific identification information occurs in a predetermined period starting from the arrival time, the display mode of the specific identification information is If the specific identification information does not change during the predetermined period of time while the specific identification information does not change, an effect of changing the display mode of the specific identification information is executed. Therefore, according to feature oA2, even if the second moving body reaches the specific identification information, the player is given a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency, such as whether the display mode of the specific identification information will change. be able to. Furthermore, since it is possible to give the player a sense of disappointment that the display mode of the specific identification information has not changed even though the second moving object has reached the specific identification information, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency. More can be given.

[Feature oA3]
A gaming machine according to feature oA1 or feature oA2,
The specific identification information is hold identification information for identifying the hold corresponding to the stored special information,
For the pending identification information,
As the display mode of the on-hold identification information, the possibility that the special information corresponding to the on-hold identification information satisfies the predetermined condition is suggested, and a plurality of stages from high to low correspond to the level of the possibility. a display level comprising
When changing the display mode of the pending identification information, an upper limit value as an upper limit that can change the display level,
is set and
The display mode changing means is
When the second moving object reaches the holding identification information, it is determined whether the display level set for the holding identification information is below the upper limit, and the display level exceeds the upper limit. Means for changing the display level to a higher side when the display level is lower than the upper limit value and not changing the display level when the display level is equal to or higher than the upper limit value (first starting opening hold display change setting process in FIG. 195) Steps So3307 to So3311 in Steps So3307 to So3311 in and Steps So3407 to So3411 in the second starting port hold display change setting process in FIG.
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature oA3, even if the second moving body reaches the holding identification information, if the display level set for the holding identification information is equal to or higher than the upper limit, the display level as the display mode of the holding identification information does not change, but when the display level set for the pending identification information is below the upper limit value, an effect of changing the display level is executed. Therefore, according to the feature oA3, even if the second moving body reaches the holding identification information, the player is given a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency, such as whether the display mode of the holding identification information will change. be able to. Furthermore, since it is possible to give the player a sense of disappointment that the second moving object has reached the holding identification information but the display mode of the holding identification information has not changed, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency. More can be given.

<Feature oB group>
The feature oB group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature oB1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determination means for determining whether the stored special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
specific identification information display means for displaying specific identification information (holding display icon, pattern row) corresponding to the stored special information;
When one game round is defined as the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended, a game round execution means (main control unit) for executing the game round MPU 62 on the board 61 side, and the game round control process of FIG. 165 executed by it);
production execution means for executing production;
A gaming machine comprising
The production executing means is
Moving object display means (MPU 92 of sound emission control device 90) for displaying moving objects (3rd kind petal P3, 4th kind petal P4) moving toward the specific identification information, and 1 start opening reservation third type petal effect setting process and second start opening reservation third type petal effect setting process in FIG. 193);
Display mode changing means (MPU 92 of audio light emission control device 90 and the first start port in FIG. Suspension display change setting process and second start port suspension display change setting process in FIG. 196);
with
The display mode changing means is
Means for changing the display mode of the specific identification information after the predetermined period if the game cycle does not end in a predetermined period starting from when the moving object reaches the specific identification information. (Steps So3305, So3310, and So3311 in the first start opening hold display change setting process in FIG. 195, and steps So3405, So3410, and So3411 in the second start start hold display change setting process in FIG. 196)
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature oB1, when the moving object reaches the specific identification information, it is possible to change the display mode of the specific identification information. When the end does not occur, the configuration is such that the display mode of the specific identification information is changed after a predetermined period of time. Therefore, according to the feature oB1, even if the mobile body reaches the specific identification information, the display mode of the specific identification information may or may not change. Therefore, according to the feature oB1, even if the moving object reaches the specific identification information, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency, such as whether the display mode of the specific identification information will change. Furthermore, since it is possible to give the player a sense of disappointment that the specific identification information has not changed in the display mode even though the moving object has reached the specific identification information, it further gives the player a sense of anticipation and urgency. can do. Therefore, the feature oB1 can improve the interest of the game.

[Feature oB2]
The gaming machine according to feature oB1,
The specific identification information is hold identification information for identifying the hold corresponding to the stored special information,
The moving object display means is
A game characterized by comprising means for displaying the moving body moving toward the display position regardless of whether the holding identification information exists at a predetermined display position for displaying the holding identification information. machine.

In a conventional pachinko machine, the display mode of the holding identification information changes at the start of the variable display, the shifting of the holding identification information, or the acquisition of special information (when the game ball enters the starting hole). It is common to execute an effect that suggests (holding change suggesting effect) and then execute an effect that changes the display mode of the holding identification information. Therefore, unless the pending change suggesting effect is executed, the effect of changing the display mode of the pending identification information does not appear. Therefore, the player lacked a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency. On the other hand, according to the feature oB2, the moving body that can play a role of the pending change suggestion effect is displayed regardless of whether the pending identification information exists at the display position. It is possible to increase opportunities for the player to have a sense of anticipation for the appearance of an effect that changes the . Therefore, it is possible to further give the player a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency.

[Feature oB3]
The gaming machine according to feature oB2,
The information storage means is
means for storing the special information with a predetermined number as an upper limit;
The holding display means
Hold identification information corresponding to each of the stored special information is displayed at the same number of display positions as the specified number, and each time the game round is completed, out of the stored special information means for subjecting the first stored special information to the judgment by the judging means, excluding the holding identification information corresponding to the special information from the display position arrangement, and shifting each of the remaining holding identification information A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature oB3, the player can accurately know how much special information has been acquired by observing the displayed row of pending identification information. In addition, since the display mode of the hold identification information changes when the shift of the hold identification information does not occur in a predetermined period starting from when the mobile body reaches the hold identification information, the display form of the hold identification information is changed. Accurate display is possible.

[Feature oB4]
A gaming machine according to feature oB2 or feature oB3,
for each of said pending identities,
As the display mode of the on-hold identification information, the possibility that the special information corresponding to the on-hold identification information satisfies the predetermined condition is suggested, and a plurality of stages from high to low correspond to the level of the possibility. a display level comprising
When changing the display mode of the pending identification information, an upper limit value as an upper limit that can change the display level,
is set and
The display mode changing means is
When the moving object reaches the holding identification information, it is determined whether the display level set for the holding identification information is below the upper limit, and if the display level is below the upper limit means for changing the display level to the upper side and not changing the display level when the display level is equal to or higher than the upper limit value (step So3307 in the first start opening hold display change setting process in FIG. 195); ~ So3311, and Steps So07 ~ So3411 in the second start opening hold display change setting process in Fig. 196)
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature oB4, even if the moving object reaches the hold identification information, if the display level set for the hold identification information is equal to or higher than the upper limit, the display level as the display mode of the hold identification information does not change. On the other hand, when the display level set for the pending identification information is below the upper limit, an effect of changing the display level is executed. Therefore, according to the feature oB4, even if the moving object reaches the holding identification information and the game cycle does not end within the predetermined period, the player will be asked if the display mode of the holding identification information changes. It is possible to give a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency. Furthermore, it is possible to give a feeling of disappointment such that the display mode of the pending identification information did not change even though the game round did not end after a predetermined period of time has passed since the mobile object reached the pending identification information. It can give people a greater sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency.

<Characteristic oC group>
The feature oC group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature oC1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determination means for determining whether the stored special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
Hold display means for displaying hold identification information (hold display icon) corresponding to the stored special information at a predetermined display position;
production execution means for executing production;
A gaming machine comprising
The production executing means is
Mobile object display means (MPU 92 of audio light emission control device 90 and , the third type petal effect setting process for first start opening reservation in FIG. 187 and the third type petal effect setting process for second start opening reservation in FIG. 193 executed thereby;
When the moving body reaches the display position, if the holding identification information exists at the display position reached, the display mode changing means for changing the display mode of the holding identification information (voice emission control device 90 MPU 92, the first starting opening hold display change setting process of FIG. 195 and the second starting opening hold display change setting process of FIG. 196 executed by it);
with
for each of said pending identities,
As the display mode of the on-hold identification information, the possibility that the special information corresponding to the on-hold identification information satisfies the predetermined condition is suggested, and a plurality of stages from high to low correspond to the level of the possibility. a display level comprising
When changing the display mode of the pending identification information, an upper limit value as an upper limit that can change the display level,
is set and
The display mode changing means is
When the moving object reaches the holding identification information, it is determined whether the display level set for the holding identification information is below the upper limit, and if the display level is below the upper limit means for changing the display level to the upper side and not changing the display level when the display level is equal to or higher than the upper limit value (step So3307 in the first start opening hold display change setting process in FIG. 195); ~ So3311, and Steps So3407 ~ So3411 in the second start opening hold display change setting process in Fig. 196)
A game machine characterized by comprising:

In a conventional pachinko machine, the display mode of the holding identification information changes at the start of the variable display, the shifting of the holding identification information, or the acquisition of special information (when the game ball enters the starting hole). It is common to execute an effect that suggests (holding change suggesting effect) and then execute an effect that changes the display mode of the holding identification information. Therefore, unless the pending change suggesting effect is executed, the effect of changing the display mode of the pending identification information does not appear. Therefore, the player lacked a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency. On the other hand, according to the feature oC1, the moving body that can play the role of the pending change suggestion effect is displayed regardless of whether the pending identification information exists at the display position. It is possible to increase opportunities for the player to have a sense of anticipation for the appearance of an effect that changes the . Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency.

Further, according to the feature oC1, when the moving body reaches the holding identification information, it is possible to change the display mode of the holding identification information. When the display level is below the upper limit value, the display level is changed to a higher side, and when the display level is equal to or higher than the upper limit value, the display level is not changed. Therefore, according to the feature oC1, even if the moving body reaches the holding identification information, the display mode of the holding identification information may or may not change. Therefore, according to the feature oC1, even if the moving object reaches the reserved identification information, the player has a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency, such as whether the display mode of the reserved identification information will change. can be given. Furthermore, since it is possible to give the player a sense of disappointment that the display mode of the reserved identification information has not changed even though the mobile object has reached the reserved identification information, it further gives the player a sense of expectation and urgency. can do. As a result, the feature oC1 can improve the interest of the game.

[Feature oC2]
The gaming machine according to feature oC1,
The information storage means is
means for storing the special information with a predetermined number as an upper limit;
The holding display means
Hold identification information corresponding to each of the stored special information is displayed at the same number of display positions as the specified number, and each time the game round is completed, out of the stored special information means for subjecting the first stored special information to the judgment by the judging means, excluding the holding identification information corresponding to the special information from the display position arrangement, and shifting each of the remaining holding identification information A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature oC2, the player can accurately know how much special information has been acquired by observing the displayed row of pending identification information.

[Feature oC3]
The gaming machine according to feature oC2,
The display mode changing means is
Shift generation determining means (first start-up in Step So3305 in the mouth holding display change setting process, and Step So3405 in the second starting mouth holding display change setting process of FIG. 196),
When the shift occurrence determination means determines that the shift does not occur in the predetermined period, the display level of the holding identification information is changed after the predetermined period, and it is determined that the shift occurs in the predetermined period. means for not changing the display level of the holding identification information (steps So3310 and So3311 in the first starting opening holding display change setting process in FIG. 195 and the second starting opening holding display in FIG. 196). Steps So3410 and So3411) in the change setting process;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the characteristic oC3, even if the mobile body reaches the holding identification information, the display mode of the holding identification information does not change if a shift of the holding identification information occurs in a predetermined period starting from the arrival time. On the other hand, if no shift of the on-hold identification information occurs during the predetermined period, an effect is executed to change the display mode of the on-hold identification information. Therefore, according to the feature oC3, even if the moving body reaches the holding identification information, the player is further given a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency, such as whether the display mode of the holding identification information will change. be able to.

<Feature oD group>
The feature oD group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature oD1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
information storage means for storing the acquired special information up to a predetermined prescribed number;
determination means for determining whether the stored special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
Hold identification information (hold display icon) corresponding to each of the stored special information is displayed at the same number of display positions as the specified number, and is stored each time the determination by the determination means is completed. The first stored special information among the special information stored is subjected to the judgment by the judgment means, the holding identification information corresponding to the special information is excluded from the arrangement of the display positions, and the remaining holding identification information holding display means for shifting each;
production execution means for executing production;
A gaming machine comprising
The production executing means is
Moving object display means (sound emission control device) for displaying a plurality of moving objects (third type petal P3) moving toward each display position regardless of whether the holding identification information exists at each display position 90 of the MPU 92, the first starting opening holding third petal effect setting process of FIG. 187 and the second starting opening holding third petal effect setting process of FIG. 193 executed thereby;
Display mode changing means (audio emission control device) for changing the display mode of the holding identification information when the holding identification information exists at the display position reached when each moving body reaches the display position 90 MPU 92, the first starting opening hold display change setting process of FIG. 195 and the second starting opening hold display change setting process of FIG. 196 executed by it);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

In a conventional pachinko machine, the display mode of the holding identification information changes at the start of the variable display, the shifting of the holding identification information, or the acquisition of special information (when the game ball enters the starting hole). It is common to execute an effect that suggests (holding change suggesting effect) and then execute an effect that changes the display mode of the holding identification information. Therefore, unless the pending change suggesting effect is executed, the effect of changing the display mode of the pending identification information does not appear. Therefore, the player lacked a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency. On the other hand, according to the feature oD1, each moving body that can play a role in the pending change suggestion effect is displayed regardless of whether or not the pending identification information exists at each display position. It is possible to increase the chances of giving the player a feeling of anticipation for the appearance of an effect that changes the display mode. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency.

[Feature oD2]
The gaming machine according to feature oD1,
The display mode changing means is
Shift generation determining means (first start-up in Step So3305 in the mouth holding display change setting process, and Step So3405 in the second starting mouth holding display change setting process of FIG. 196),
When the shift occurrence determining means determines that the shift does not occur during the predetermined period, the display mode of the holding identification information is changed after the predetermined period, and it is determined that the shift occurs during the predetermined period. means for not changing the display mode of the holding identification information (steps So3310 and So3311 in the first starting opening holding display change setting process in FIG. 195 and the second starting opening holding display change setting in FIG. 196). Step So3410, step So3411) in the process,
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature oD2, even if the mobile body reaches the holding identification information, if the holding identification information shifts in a predetermined period starting from the arrival time, the display mode of the holding identification information does not change. On the other hand, if no shift of the on-hold identification information occurs during the predetermined period, an effect is executed to change the display mode of the on-hold identification information. Therefore, according to the feature oD2, even if the moving object reaches the holding identification information, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency, such as whether the display mode of the holding identification information will change. . Furthermore, since it is possible to give the player a sense of disappointment that the display mode of the reserved identification information has not changed even though the mobile object has reached the reserved identification information, it further gives the player a sense of expectation and urgency. can do.

[Feature oD3]
A gaming machine according to feature oD1 or feature oD2,
for each of said pending identities,
As the display mode of the on-hold identification information, the possibility that the special information corresponding to the on-hold identification information satisfies the predetermined condition is suggested, and a plurality of stages from high to low correspond to the level of the possibility. a display level comprising
When changing the display mode of the pending identification information, an upper limit value as an upper limit that can change the display level,
is set and
The display mode changing means is
When the moving object reaches the holding identification information, it is determined whether the display level set for the holding identification information is below the upper limit, and if the display level is below the upper limit means for changing the display level to the upper side and not changing the display level when the display level is equal to or higher than the upper limit value (step So3307 in the first start opening hold display change setting process in FIG. 195); ~ So3311, and Steps So3407 ~ So3411 in the second start opening hold display change setting process in Fig. 196)
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature oD3, even if the moving object reaches the hold identification information, if the display level set for the hold identification information is equal to or higher than the upper limit, the display level as the display mode of the hold identification information does not change. On the other hand, when the display level set for the pending identification information is below the upper limit, an effect of changing the display level is executed. Therefore, according to the feature oD3, even if the moving object reaches the holding identification information, the player is given a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency, such as whether the display mode of the holding identification information will change. can be done.

<Feature oE group>
The feature oE group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature oE1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determination means for determining whether the stored special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
specific identification information display means for displaying specific identification information (holding display icon, pattern row) corresponding to the stored special information at a predetermined display position;
production execution means for executing production;
A gaming machine comprising
The production executing means is
Moving object display means (MPU 92 of audio light emission control device 90 and , the third type petal effect setting process for first start opening reservation in FIG. 187 and the third type petal effect setting process for second start opening reservation in FIG. 193 executed thereby;
When the moving body reaches the specific identification information, the display mode changing means (MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 and the first start port in FIG. 195 executed by it) that changes the display mode of the specific identification information Suspension display change setting process and second start port suspension display change setting process in FIG. 196);
with
The moving object display means is
A means for specifying a trajectory during movement of the moving body, which is a target arrival trajectory (target holding arrival trajectory) that reaches the display position, and a target arrival trajectory that is the same from the start point to the middle, and from the middle to the display A game machine, comprising: moving body trajectory specifying means for specifying one of a non-target trajectory (target non-holding trajectory) that reaches a position deviated from the position.

In a conventional pachinko machine, the display mode of the holding identification information changes at the start of the variable display, the shifting of the holding identification information, or the acquisition of special information (when the game ball enters the starting hole). It is common to execute an effect that suggests (holding change suggesting effect) and then execute an effect that changes the display mode of the holding identification information. Therefore, unless the pending change suggesting effect is executed, the effect of changing the display mode of the pending identification information does not appear. Therefore, the player lacked a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency. On the other hand, according to the feature oE1, the moving object that can play a role in the pending change suggestion effect is displayed regardless of whether or not the pending identification information as the specific identification information exists at the display position. It is possible to increase the chances of giving the player a sense of anticipation for the appearance of an effect that changes the display mode of the identification information. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency.

Further, according to the feature oE1, when the moving object reaches the specific identification information, it is possible to change the display mode of the specific identification information. It can take either an on-target trajectory or an off-target trajectory that reaches a position off the display position. Therefore, according to the feature oE1, even if the moving object is displayed, the display mode of the specific identification information may or may not change. Therefore, according to the feature oE1, even if the moving object is displayed, the player can feel a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency, such as whether the display mode of the specific identification information will change. can. Furthermore, since it is possible to give the player a disappointing feeling that the display mode of the specific identification information did not change even though the moving object was displayed, it is possible to further give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency. can. As a result, the feature oE1 can improve the interest of the game.

[Feature oE2]
The gaming machine according to feature oE1,
The display mode changing means is
During a predetermined period starting from the time when the moving body reaches the holding identification information, the switching occurrence determination means (first starting port holding in FIG. 195) that determines whether switching of the specific identification information occurs or not. Step So3305 in the display change setting process, and Step So3405 in the second start opening hold display change setting process of FIG. 196);
When the switching occurrence determination means determines that the switching of the specific identification information does not occur during the predetermined period, the display mode of the specific identification information is changed after the predetermined period, and the specific identification information is displayed during the predetermined period. Means for not changing the display mode of the specific identification information (steps So3310 and So3311 in the first starting port holding display change setting process in FIG. 195, and steps So3311 in FIG. 196 Steps So3410 and So3411) in the second start opening pending display change setting process;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature oE2, even if the mobile body reaches the specific identification information, the display mode of the specific identification information does not change when switching of the specific identification information occurs in a predetermined period starting from the arrival time. On the other hand, if the specific identification information is not switched during the predetermined period, an effect is executed to change the display mode of the specific identification information. Therefore, according to the feature oE2, even if the moving object reaches the specific identification information, the player is further given a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency, such as whether the display mode of the specific identification information will change. be able to.

[Feature oE3]
A gaming machine according to feature oE1 or feature oE2,
The specific identification information is hold identification information for identifying the hold corresponding to the stored special information,
for each of said pending identities,
As the display mode of the on-hold identification information, the possibility that the special information corresponding to the on-hold identification information satisfies the predetermined condition is suggested, and a plurality of stages from high to low correspond to the level of the possibility. a display level comprising
When changing the display mode of the pending identification information, an upper limit value as an upper limit that can change the display level,
is set and
The display mode changing means is
When the moving object reaches the holding identification information, it is determined whether the display level set for the holding identification information is below the upper limit, and if the display level is below the upper limit means for changing the display level to the upper side and not changing the display level when the display level is equal to or higher than the upper limit value (step So3307 in the first start opening hold display change setting process in FIG. 195); ~ So3311, and Steps So3407 ~ So3411 in the second start opening hold display change setting process in Fig. 196)
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature oE3, even if the moving object reaches the hold identification information, if the display level set for the hold identification information is equal to or higher than the upper limit, the display level as the display mode of the hold identification information does not change. On the other hand, when the display level set for the pending identification information is below the upper limit, an effect of changing the display level is executed. Therefore, according to the feature oE3, even if the moving body reaches the holding identification information, the player is given a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency, such as whether the display mode of the holding identification information will change. can be done.

<Feature oF group>
The feature oF group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from modification 1 of the fourth embodiment.

[Feature oF1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determination means for determining whether the stored special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
Hold display means for displaying hold identification information (hold display icon) corresponding to the stored special information at a predetermined display position;
production execution means for executing production;
A gaming machine comprising
The production executing means is
Mobile object display means (MPU 92 of audio light emission control device 90 and , the third type petal effect setting process for first start opening reservation in FIG. 187 and the third type petal effect setting process for second start opening reservation in FIG. 193 executed thereby;
When the moving object reaches the display position, and the holding identification information exists at the display position, the moving object passes through the display position or disappears to change the display mode of the holding identification information. a first mode in which no change is performed; a second mode in which the mobile object is continuously displayed at the display position for a predetermined period and the display mode of the pending identification information is not changed; and a third mode in which the body is continuously displayed at the display position for a predetermined period and the display mode of the reserved identification information is changed, and any one of the first to third modes is executed. Means (first start opening hold display change setting process (FIG. 200) and petal display change process (FIG. 201) of modification 1);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

In a conventional pachinko machine, the display mode of the holding identification information changes at the start of the variable display, the shifting of the holding identification information, or the acquisition of special information (when the game ball enters the starting hole). It is common to execute an effect that suggests (holding change suggesting effect) and then execute an effect that changes the display mode of the holding identification information. Therefore, unless the pending change suggesting effect is executed, the effect of changing the display mode of the pending identification information does not appear. Therefore, the player lacked a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency. On the other hand, according to the feature oF1, the moving object that can play the role of the suspension change suggestion effect is displayed regardless of whether the suspension identification information exists at the display position. It is possible to increase opportunities for the player to have a sense of anticipation for the appearance of an effect that changes the . Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency.

Further, according to the feature oF1, when the moving body reaches the display position, if the holding identification information exists at the display position that the moving body has reached, the moving body passes through the display position or disappears and the display mode of the holding identification information a second mode in which the mobile body stays at the display position for a predetermined period of time and does not change the display mode of the reserved identification information; and a mobile body at the display position for a predetermined period of time. and a third mode of changing the display mode of the stay pending identification information. Therefore, according to the feature oF1, even if a moving object is displayed, there are three possible modes: first to third modes. Therefore, according to the feature oF1, even if the moving object is displayed, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency, such as whether the display mode of the pending identification information will change. Furthermore, it is possible to give the player a disappointing feeling that the moving object has reached the display position, but has passed through the display position or disappeared, and the display mode of the pending identification information has not changed. A sense of expectation and a sense of urgency can be further imparted. As a result, the feature oF1 can improve the interest of the game.

[Feature oF2]
The gaming machine according to feature oF1,
The information storage means is
means for storing the special information with a predetermined number as an upper limit;
The holding display means
The holding identification information corresponding to each of the stored special information is displayed at the same number of display positions as the specified number, and each time the determination by the determination means is completed, the stored special information The first stored special information among them is subjected to the judgment by the judgment means, the holding identification information corresponding to the special information is eliminated from the display position arrangement, and each of the remaining holding identification information is shifted. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means.

According to feature oF2, the player can accurately know how much special information has been acquired by observing the displayed row of pending identification information.

[Feature oF3]
The gaming machine according to feature oF2,
The display mode changing means is
Shift generation determining means (first start-up in Step So3305 in the mouth holding display change setting process, and Step So3405 in the second starting mouth holding display change setting process of FIG. 196),
When the shift occurrence determining means determines that the shift does not occur during the predetermined period, the display level of the holding identification information is changed after the predetermined period, and it is determined that the shift occurs during the predetermined period. means for not changing the display level of the holding identification information (steps So3310 and So3311 in the first starting opening holding display change setting process in FIG. 195 and the second starting opening holding display in FIG. 196). Steps So3410 and So3411) in the change setting process;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature oF3, even if the mobile body reaches the holding identification information, the display mode of the holding identification information does not change if a shift of the holding identification information occurs in a predetermined period starting from the arrival time. On the other hand, if no shift of the on-hold identification information occurs during the predetermined period, an effect is executed to change the display mode of the on-hold identification information. Therefore, according to the feature oF3, even if the moving object reaches the holding identification information, the player is further given a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency, such as whether the display mode of the holding identification information will change. be able to.

[Feature oF4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features oF1 to feature oF3,
for each of said pending identities,
As the display mode of the on-hold identification information, the possibility that the special information corresponding to the on-hold identification information satisfies the predetermined condition is suggested, and a plurality of stages from high to low correspond to the level of the possibility. a display level comprising
When changing the display mode of the pending identification information, an upper limit value as an upper limit that can change the display level,
is set and
The display mode changing means is
When the moving object reaches the holding identification information, it is determined whether the display level set for the holding identification information is below the upper limit, and if the display level is below the upper limit means for changing the display level to the upper side and not changing the display level when the display level is equal to or higher than the upper limit value (step So3307 in the first start opening hold display change setting process in FIG. 195); ~ So3311, and Steps So3407 ~ So3411 in the second start opening hold display change setting process in Fig. 196)
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature oF4, even if the moving object reaches the holding identification information, if the display level set for the holding identification information is equal to or higher than the upper limit, the display level as the display mode of the holding identification information does not change. On the other hand, when the display level set for the pending identification information is below the upper limit, an effect of changing the display level is executed. Therefore, according to the feature oF4, even if the moving object reaches the holding identification information, the player is given a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency, such as whether the display mode of the holding identification information will change. can be done.

<Feature oG group>
The feature oG group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature oG1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determination means for determining whether the stored special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
Hold display means for displaying hold identification information (hold display icon) corresponding to the stored special information at a predetermined display position;
production execution means for executing production;
A gaming machine comprising
The production executing means is
Moving body display means (MPU 92 of sound light emission control device 90) for displaying a moving body (third type petal P3) moving toward the display position, and the first starting opening holding third moving body shown in FIG. 187 executed thereby. Seed petal effect setting process and third kind petal effect setting process for holding the second start opening in FIG. 193);
Display mode changing means (MPU 92 of audio light emission control device 90 and first start port in FIG. 195 executed by it) Suspension display change setting process and second start port suspension display change setting process in FIG. 196);
with
The holding display means
When the holding identification information is displayed at the display position by the time the moving body reaches the display position without displaying the holding identification information at the display position at the timing when the display of the moving object is started A game machine characterized by having

In a conventional pachinko machine, the display mode of the holding identification information changes at the start of the variable display, the shifting of the holding identification information, or the acquisition of special information (when the game ball enters the starting hole). It is common to execute an effect that suggests (holding change suggesting effect) and then execute an effect that changes the display mode of the holding identification information. Therefore, unless the pending change suggesting effect is executed, the effect of changing the display mode of the pending identification information does not appear. Therefore, the player lacked a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency. On the other hand, according to the feature oG1, the moving object that can play the role of the pending change suggestion effect is displayed even if the holding identification information does not exist at the display position at the timing when the display of the moving object is started. Therefore, it is possible to increase the chances of giving the player a feeling of anticipation for the appearance of an effect that changes the display mode of the pending identification information. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency.

Further, according to the feature oG1, the pending identification information is not displayed at the display position at the timing when the display of the moving object is started, and the pending identification information is displayed at the display position until the moving object reaches the display position. Since there is a case, the expectation for the moving object is given to the player after the fact when the display of the pending information identification information is started. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a greater sense of expectation. As a result, the feature oG1 can improve the interest of the game.

[Feature oG2]
The gaming machine according to feature oG1,
The information storage means is
means for storing the special information with a predetermined number as an upper limit;
The holding display means
The holding identification information corresponding to each of the stored special information is displayed at the same number of display positions as the specified number, and each time the determination by the determination means is completed, the stored special information The first stored special information among them is subjected to the judgment by the judgment means, the holding identification information corresponding to the special information is eliminated from the display position arrangement, and each of the remaining holding identification information is shifted. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means.

According to feature oG2, the player can accurately know how much special information has been acquired by observing the displayed row of pending identification information.

[Feature oG3]
The gaming machine according to feature oG2,
The display mode changing means is
Shift generation determining means (first start-up in Step So3305 in the mouth holding display change setting process, and Step So3405 in the second starting mouth holding display change setting process of FIG. 196),
When the shift occurrence determination means determines that the shift does not occur in the predetermined period, the display level of the holding identification information is changed after the predetermined period, and it is determined that the shift occurs in the predetermined period. means for not changing the display level of the holding identification information (steps So3310 and So3311 in the first starting opening holding display change setting process in FIG. 195 and the second starting opening holding display in FIG. 196). Steps So3410 and So3411) in the change setting process;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature oG3, even if the mobile body reaches the holding identification information, if the holding identification information shifts in a predetermined period starting from the arrival time, the display mode of the holding identification information does not change. On the other hand, if no shift of the on-hold identification information occurs during the predetermined period, an effect is executed to change the display mode of the on-hold identification information. Therefore, according to the feature oG3, even if the moving object reaches the holding identification information, the player is further given a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency, such as whether the display mode of the holding identification information will change. be able to.

[Feature oG4]
A gaming machine according to any one of feature oG1 to feature oG3,
for each of said pending identities,
As the display mode of the on-hold identification information, the possibility that the special information corresponding to the on-hold identification information satisfies the predetermined condition is suggested, and a plurality of stages from high to low correspond to the level of the possibility. a display level comprising
When changing the display mode of the pending identification information, an upper limit value as an upper limit that can change the display level,
is set and
The display mode changing means is
When the moving object reaches the holding identification information, it is determined whether the display level set for the holding identification information is below the upper limit, and if the display level is below the upper limit means for changing the display level to the upper side and not changing the display level when the display level is equal to or higher than the upper limit value (step So3307 in the first start opening hold display change setting process in FIG. 195); ~ So3311, and Steps So3407 ~ So3411 in the second start opening hold display change setting process in Fig. 196)
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature oG4, even if the moving object reaches the holding identification information, if the display level set for the holding identification information is equal to or higher than the upper limit, the display level as the display mode of the holding identification information does not change. On the other hand, when the display level set for the pending identification information is below the upper limit, an effect of changing the display level is executed. Therefore, according to the feature oG4, even if the moving object reaches the holding identification information, the player is further given a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency, such as whether the display mode of the holding identification information will change. can be done.

<Characteristic oH group>
The feature oH group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature oH1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determination means for determining whether the stored special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
Judgment result notification means (MPU 92 of sound emission control device 90) for informing the results of the judgment by the judgment means by game operations such as starting variable display of symbols and stopping and displaying the symbols that are being displayed in a variable manner. Game round effect setting process of FIG. 183 to be executed);
When the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game operation is ended as one game round, a game round execution means (main) for executing the game round MPU 62 on the control board 61 side, and game turn control processing in FIG. 165 executed by it),
A gaming machine comprising
The determination result notification means is
A case where a first moving object (fourth type petal P4) moving toward a display position is displayed, and the first moving object reaches the stopped symbol in the middle of one game round. 2, the variable restart means for restarting the variable display of the symbols (MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 and step So2305 of the effect pattern setting process of FIG. 184 executed by it)
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature oH1, when the first moving object reaches the symbols stopped and displayed from the variable display state, an effect for restarting the variable display of the symbols is executed. In a conventional pachinko machine which does not have such a configuration, the first moving body does not affect the variable display of the symbols, so when the symbols do not win the jackpot, the player feels discouraged. I just had to. On the other hand, according to the feature oH1, when the first moving object reaches the symbols stopped and displayed from the variable display state, an effect for restarting the variable display of the symbols can be executed. is a symbol that does not win a big win, and the player who was once discouraged can be given surprise at the resumption of the variable display and a sense of expectation for another big win. Therefore, according to the feature oH1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature oH2]
The gaming machine according to feature oH1,
Hold display means for displaying hold identification information (hold display icon) corresponding to the stored special information at a predetermined display position;
production execution means for executing production;
with
The production executing means is
Second moving body display means (sound emission control device 90 of the MPU 92, the first starting opening holding third petal effect setting process of FIG. 187 and the second starting opening holding third petal effect setting process of FIG. 193 executed thereby;
Display mode changing means (MPU 92 of audio light emission control device 90 and the second moving object in FIG. 1 starting opening pending display change setting process and second starting opening pending display change setting process in FIG. 196);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature oH2, even if the first moving body that acts on the pattern reaches the holding identification information, it does not act on the holding identification information, whereas the picture that is substantially the same as the first moving body When the configured second moving object reaches the holding identification information, an effect is executed to change the display mode of the holding identification information. Therefore, according to the feature oH2, by displaying the first moving body and the second moving body, the player is asked whether the variable display of symbols is resumed or the display mode of the pending identification information is changed. It is possible to give a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency such as whether it will be done.

In a conventional pachinko machine, the display mode of the holding identification information changes at the start of the variable display, the shifting of the holding identification information, or the acquisition of special information (when the game ball enters the starting hole). It is common to execute an effect that suggests (holding change suggesting effect) and then execute an effect that changes the display mode of the holding identification information. Therefore, unless the pending change suggesting effect is executed, the effect of changing the display mode of the pending identification information does not appear. Therefore, the player lacked a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency. On the other hand, according to the feature oH2, the second moving body that can play the role of the pending change suggesting effect and the first moving body with substantially the same pattern as the second moving body are displayed. Since it is possible to increase opportunities for the player to have a sense of expectation for the appearance of an effect that changes the display mode of the reserved identification information, it is possible to further give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency. can. As a result, according to the feature oH2, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature oH3]
The gaming machine according to feature oH2,
The display mode changing means is
A shift occurrence determining means (Fig. 195) for determining whether or not the shift occurs for the holding identification information in a predetermined period starting from the time when the second moving body reaches the holding identification information. Step So3305 in the first starting opening pending display change setting process, and Step So3405 in the second starting opening pending display change setting process of FIG. 196);
When the shift occurrence determination means determines that the shift does not occur in the predetermined period, the display level of the holding identification information is changed after the predetermined period, and it is determined that the shift occurs in the predetermined period. means for not changing the display level of the holding identification information (steps So3310 and So3311 in the first starting opening holding display change setting process in FIG. 195 and the second starting opening holding display in FIG. 196). Steps So3410 and So3411) in the change setting process;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature oH3, even if the mobile body reaches the holding identification information, the display mode of the holding identification information does not change if a shift of the holding identification information occurs in a predetermined period starting from the arrival time. On the other hand, if no shift of the on-hold identification information occurs during the predetermined period, an effect is executed to change the display mode of the on-hold identification information. Therefore, according to the feature oH3, even if the moving object reaches the holding identification information, the player is further given a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency, such as whether the display mode of the holding identification information will change. be able to.

[Feature oH4]
A gaming machine according to feature oH2 or feature oH3,
for each of said pending identities,
As the display mode of the on-hold identification information, the possibility that the special information corresponding to the on-hold identification information satisfies the predetermined condition is suggested, and a plurality of stages from high to low correspond to the level of the possibility. a display level comprising
When changing the display mode of the pending identification information, an upper limit value as an upper limit that can change the display level,
is set and
The display mode changing means is
When the second moving body reaches the holding identification information, it is determined whether the display level set for the holding identification information is below the upper limit, and the display level exceeds the upper limit. Means for changing the display level to a higher side when the display level is lower than the upper limit value and not changing the display level when the display level is equal to or higher than the upper limit value (first starting opening hold display change setting process in FIG. 195) Steps So3307 to So3311 in Steps So3307 to So3311 in and Steps So3407 to So3411 in the second starting opening hold display change setting process in FIG.
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature oH4, when the moving object reaches the hold identification information, it is possible to change the display mode of the hold identification information. When the display level is below the upper limit, the display level is changed to a higher side, and when the display level is equal to or higher than the upper limit, the display level is not changed. Therefore, according to the feature oH4, even if the moving object reaches the holding identification information, the display mode of the holding identification information may or may not change. Therefore, according to the feature oH4, even if the moving object reaches the reserved identification information, the player has a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency, such as whether the display mode of the reserved identification information will change. can be given. Furthermore, since it is possible to give the player a sense of disappointment that the display mode of the reserved identification information has not changed even though the mobile object has reached the reserved identification information, it further gives the player a sense of expectation and urgency. can do.

<Feature oI group>
The feature oI group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature oI1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determination means for determining whether the stored special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
specific identification information display means for displaying specific identification information (holding display icon, pattern row) corresponding to the stored special information;
production execution means for executing production;
A gaming machine comprising
The production executing means is
means for constantly displaying one or more effectors (first to fourth type petals P1 to P4) for a predetermined period of time, wherein at least one of said effectors faces said specific identification information; 187 is performed by the effector display means (MPU 92 of the audio light emission control device 90 and FIG. 187 193 third type petal effect setting process for first start opening reservation and third type petal effect setting process for second start opening reservation in FIG. 193);
Display mode changing means for changing the display mode of the specific identification information when the action object reaches the specific identification information (MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90, and the first start port in FIG. 195 executed by it) Suspension display change setting process and second start port suspension display change setting process in FIG. 196);
A game machine with

According to the feature oI1, one or more effectors are always displayed for a predetermined period of time, and when at least one of the effectors reaches the specific identification information, the display mode of the specific identification information is changed. change. In a conventional pachinko machine that does not have such a configuration, the display mode of the specific identification information changes at a predetermined timing, so the player can predict the timing when the display mode changes. As a result, there is a problem that the player lacks a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency. On the other hand, according to feature oI1, since the effector is always displayed for a predetermined period of time, it is difficult for the player to determine when the effector reaches the specific identification information. Therefore, according to the feature oI1, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency, such as when the display mode of the specific identification information will change. Therefore, the feature oI1 can improve the interest of the game.

[Feature oI2]
The gaming machine according to feature oI1,
The action object display means is
A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for repeatedly displaying a plurality of said effectors (petals P1 to P4).

According to feature oI2, since a plurality of effectors are repeatedly displayed, the player has a sense of anticipation that the effector will repeatedly reach the specific identification information and change the display mode of the specific identification information. and a sense of urgency.
[Feature oI3]
The gaming machine according to feature oI1,
The action object display means is
The effector is displayed such that the effector always exists within a predetermined display area (display surface 41a) including at least the display position of the specific identification information during the predetermined period. A game machine characterized by comprising means for performing.

According to feature oI3, the effector is displayed so that the effector always exists within the display area for a predetermined period of time. It is possible to give a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency, such as whether the effector will reach , and the display mode of the specific identification information will change.

[Feature oI4]
A gaming machine according to any one of feature oI1 to feature oI3,
A gaming machine, wherein the specific identification information is hold identification information for identifying a hold corresponding to the stored special information.

According to the feature oI4, it is possible to give a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency, such as whether the effector will reach the pending identification information and the display mode of the pending identification information will change.

[Feature oI5]
A gaming machine according to any one of feature oI1 to feature oI3,
Judgment result notification means (MPU 92 of sound emission control device 90) for informing the results of the judgment by the judgment means by game operations such as starting variable display of symbols and stopping and displaying the symbols that are being displayed in a variable manner. Game round effect setting process of FIG. 183 to be executed)
with
A gaming machine, wherein the specific identification information is the pattern.

According to the characteristic oI5, it is possible to give a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency, such as whether the effector reaches the pattern and the display mode of the pattern changes, for example, the variable display of the pattern is resumed. .

<Characteristic oJ group>
The feature oJ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature oJ1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determination means for determining whether the stored special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
specific identification information display means for displaying specific identification information (holding display icon, pattern row) corresponding to the stored special information;
production execution means for executing production;
A gaming machine comprising
The production executing means is
Effect display means (the MPU 92 of the audio light emission control device 90 and the effector display means (MPU 92 of the audio light emission control device 90, and 1 start opening reservation third type petal effect setting process and second start opening reservation third type petal effect setting process in FIG. 193);
Any one of a first mode of changing the display mode of the specific identification information and a second mode of not changing the specific identification information when the action body reaches the specific identification information effect mode selection means (first starting opening hold display change setting process (Fig. 200) and petal display change process (Fig. 201) of Modification 1),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature oJ1, when the effector reaches the specific identification information, it is possible to change the display mode of the specific identification information. In a conventional pachinko machine that does not have such a configuration, the display mode of the specific identification information is always changed at a predetermined timing. As a result, there is a problem that the player lacks a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency. On the other hand, according to the feature oJ1, since it is difficult for the player to determine when the effector reaches the specific identification information, it is difficult for the player to determine when the display mode of the specific identification information changes. It is possible to give a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency such as kana.

Further, according to the feature oJ1, when the effector reaches the specific identification information, it is possible that the specific identification information is not changed. Therefore, according to the feature oJ1, even though the effector has reached the specific identification information, it is possible to give the player a feeling of disappointment. can be done. As a result, the feature oJ1 can improve the interest of the game.

[Feature oJ2]
The gaming machine according to feature oJ1,
The production mode selection means is
A game machine comprising: means for displaying a second action body as the action body, which is composed of a pictorial diagram substantially identical to the action body and moves toward a position deviated from the specific identification information.

According to feature oJ2, by displaying the second effector, when the effector reaches the specific identification information, the second mode in which the specific identification information is not changed is performed. Therefore, with a simple configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency, such as when the display mode of the specific identification information will change.

[Feature oJ3]
A gaming machine according to feature oJ1 or feature oJ2,
The specific identification information is hold identification information for identifying the hold corresponding to the stored special information,
For the pending identification information,
As the display mode of the on-hold identification information, the possibility that the special information corresponding to the on-hold identification information satisfies the predetermined condition is suggested, and a plurality of stages from high to low correspond to the level of the possibility. a display level comprising
When changing the display mode of the pending identification information, an upper limit value as an upper limit that can change the display level,
is set and
The production mode selection means is
When the effector reaches the pending identification information, it is determined whether the display level set for the pending identification information is below the upper limit value, and if the display level is below the upper limit value, means for changing the display level to the upper side and not changing the display level when the display level is equal to or higher than the upper limit value (step So3307 in the first start opening hold display change setting process in FIG. 195); ~ So3311, and Steps So3407 ~ So3411 in the second start opening hold display change setting process in Fig. 196)
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature oJ3, even if the effector reaches the pending identification information, if the display level set for the pending identification information is equal to or higher than the upper limit, the display level as the display mode of the pending identification information does not change On the other hand, when the display level set for the pending identification information is below the upper limit, an effect of changing the display level is executed. Therefore, according to the feature oJ3, when the effector reaches the specific identification information, the second mode is performed in which the specific identification information is not changed. Therefore, with a simple configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency, such as when the display mode of the specific identification information will change.

<Characteristic pA group>
The feature pA group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fifth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature pA1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
information storage means for storing a plurality of the acquired special information;
determination means for sequentially determining whether or not the stored special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
A production mode setting that can set one of a plurality of types of production modes including at least a first production mode (character-type stage) and a second production mode (non-character-type stage), each having a different production mode, as the production mode. means and
When the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game operation is ended as one game round, the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means is used. game round execution means for executing at least one game round;
A gaming machine comprising
The production mode setting means is
In the state where the first effect mode is set, after the specific condition including at least the judgment by the judging means that the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition (dismissal) is established (special reach/dismissal) To, production mode transition means ("principle" in Figure 219) for shifting the production mode that is set to the second production mode,
After the end of the game cycle in which the specific condition is established, the special information (reserved information) that has not been judged by the judging means among the special information stored in the information storage means has a second 1 When the special information that satisfies the special condition exists, the production mode continuation means ("exception 1”) and
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature pA1, in a state where the first effect mode is set, the set effect mode is established after the specific condition including at least the determination by the determination means that the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition is established. is shifted to the second effect mode. In a conventional gaming machine that does not have a production mode transition means, the state in which the first production mode is set despite the establishment of a specific condition including at least a determination that the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition is established. Since the game is continued, there is a problem that the sense of urgency that the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition cannot be given to the player by the effect according to the effect mode. On the other hand, according to the feature pA1, by shifting the production mode from the first production mode to the second production mode, the sense of urgency that the special information did not satisfy the predetermined condition is expressed by the production according to the production mode. It can be given to a player.

Further, according to the characteristic pA1, after the end of the game round in which the specific condition is satisfied, among the special information stored in the information storage means, the first special When the special information satisfying the condition exists, the first performance mode is continued without shifting to the second performance mode by the performance mode shifting means. For this reason, originally, the set production mode is shifted from the first production mode to the second production mode by the production mode transfer means, but the first production mode is continued (maintained), so the game When the player recognizes that the first presentation mode is continued, some change will occur in the game state, and the player will have an expectation that an advantageous result will come. Therefore, according to the feature pA1, it is possible to make the player feel a sense of anticipation that an advantageous result may come, and to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature pA2]
The gaming machine according to feature pA1,
A gaming machine comprising: means for executing a predetermined effect (a screen effect when a special reach occurs) in the game cycle when the specific condition is satisfied.

According to the feature pA2, a predetermined effect is executed in a game round when a specific condition is established. For this reason, it is possible to notify the player that the specific condition has been established by a predetermined effect. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature pA3]
The gaming machine according to feature pA2,
A gaming machine comprising: means for executing the predetermined effect in the game round corresponding to the special information that satisfies the first special condition.

According to the feature pA3, the predetermined effect is executed in the game round corresponding to the special information that satisfies the first special condition. For this reason, after the predetermined effect is executed in the game round when the specific condition is established, the predetermined effect is executed again when the special information satisfying the first special condition is consumed. For the player, the effect that was seen when the specific condition was established can be seen once again. When the specific condition is met, the determination means determines that the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. satisfies a predetermined condition). Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature pA4]
The gaming machine according to feature pA3,
As the first production mode, a plurality of individual production modes with different production modes (stage of warrior A's room, stage of warrior B's room, etc.) are provided,
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined effects having different effects modes are determined for each of the plurality of individual effect modes.

According to the feature pA4, the predetermined effect executed in the game round when the specific condition is satisfied or the game round corresponding to the special information satisfying the first special condition is individually set as the first effect mode. An effect corresponding to the effect mode can be provided. Therefore, according to the feature pA4, the content of the predetermined effect can be controlled by switching the individual effect mode included in the first effect mode, and various effects can be provided to the player. Therefore, according to the feature pA3, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Feature pA5]
The gaming machine according to feature pA4,
The predetermined effect is composed of a moving image in which a character corresponding to the set effect mode appears,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the determination means determines that the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the character is disadvantageous in the predetermined effect.

According to feature pA5, a predetermined effect is executed in which a character appears in a game turn when a specific condition is established, and after a result disadvantageous to the character is announced in the predetermined effect, the first special condition is satisfied. When the special information is digested, the predetermined effect in which the character appears is executed again. For this reason, the player's emotional empathy for the predetermined presentation increases due to the character that gives a disadvantageous result. Therefore, according to the feature pA5, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Feature pA6]
The gaming machine according to feature pA5,
The production mode setting means is
After the end of the game cycle in which the specific condition is established, the special information (reserved information) that has not been judged by the judging means among the special information stored in the information storage means has a second 2. When the special information that satisfies the special condition exists, the set production mode is changed to the individual in the first production mode corresponding to the character other than the character that appeared in the predetermined production. Means to shift to production mode ("Exception 2" in Figure 219)
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature pA6, after the end of the game cycle in which the specific condition is established, the second special condition is included in the special information stored in the information storage means, which has not been judged by the judgment means. When the satisfying special information exists, the set production mode is shifted to the individual production mode among the first production modes corresponding to the characters other than the character appearing in the moving image constituting the predetermined production. . Therefore, originally, the set performance mode is shifted from the first performance mode to the second performance mode by the performance mode shifting means, but the performance mode is shifted to another individual performance mode in the same first performance mode. Therefore, when the player recognizes the shift to another individual effect mode in the same first effect mode, the player has an expectation that an advantageous result will come. Therefore, according to feature pA6, it is possible to make the player feel a sense of anticipation that an advantageous result will come, and to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature pA7]
The gaming machine according to feature pA6,
The first special condition is that the degree of possibility of satisfying the predetermined condition is a first degree or more (special reach),
The second special condition is that the degree of possibility of satisfying the predetermined condition is less than the first degree and equal to or greater than a second degree lower than the first degree (super reach). A game machine characterized by

According to feature pA7, when there is special information that satisfies the second special condition among the special information that has not been judged by the judging means among the special information stored in the information storage means, it is set. The present performance mode is shifted to an individual performance mode among the first performance modes corresponding to the characters other than the characters appearing in the animation constituting the predetermined performance. On the other hand, when there is special information that satisfies the first special condition with a higher degree of possibility of satisfying the predetermined condition than the second special condition, the first effect mode is continued without transitioning to the second effect mode. do. Therefore, after the end of the game cycle in which the specific condition is established, the transition mode of the performance mode can be changed by the special information which is not judged by the judging means among the special information stored in the information storing means. . Therefore, according to the characteristic pA7, it is possible to make the player feel a sense of anticipation that an advantageous result may come, depending on the mode of transition of the production mode, and further improve the interest of the game. .

<Characteristic pB group>
The feature pB group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fifth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature pB1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
information storage means for storing a plurality of the acquired special information;
determination means for sequentially determining whether or not the stored special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
production mode setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of types of production modes including at least a first production mode (character stage) as the production mode;
When the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game operation is ended as one game round, the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means is used. game round execution means for executing at least one game round;
In the game round, when the first performance mode is set by the performance mode setting means, execution of a predetermined performance capable of executing a predetermined performance (battle performance + result notification performance) corresponding to the first performance mode. means and
A gaming machine comprising
The production mode setting means is
In a state where the first production mode is set, after the result of the predetermined production satisfies a specific condition (executing a defeat production), the set production mode is changed to a mode other than the first production mode. Production mode transition means to shift to production mode ("principle" in Figure 219)
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature pB1, in a state in which the first effect mode is set, after the result of a predetermined effect satisfies a specific condition, the set effect mode shifts to a effect mode other than the first effect mode. be done. In a conventional game machine having no effect mode transition means, the first effect mode is set when the result of a predetermined effect is an effect in which, for example, a result unfavorable to the character is notified as a specific condition. is continued, in the first production mode, if a character appears that matches the character whose unfavorable result has been announced for the character in a predetermined production, the player is notified of the unfavorable result. There is a possibility that the user may feel a sense of incongruity when viewing the production in the production mode in which the character that has been killed (for example, died) appears as if nothing had happened. On the other hand, according to the feature pB1, the set production mode is shifted from the first production mode to a production mode other than the first production mode after the result of the predetermined production satisfies the specific condition. By doing so, it is possible to avoid characters with disadvantageous results from appearing in the production mode. Therefore, according to the feature pB1, the storylines of the effects in which the characters appear are ensured, and it is possible to prevent the players from feeling uncomfortable with the effects. As a result, according to the feature pB1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature pB2]
The gaming machine according to feature pB1,
The plurality of production modes include a character production mode (character stage) having a plurality of production modes in which the corresponding characters are set, and a non-character production mode (non-character stage) in which the corresponding characters are not set. ) and
A gaming machine, wherein the first production mode is one production mode among the character production modes (character stage).

According to the feature pB2, a transition is made from an effect mode among character-based effect modes having a plurality of effect modes in which corresponding characters are set to a effect mode other than the effect mode. For example, by shifting from the character-based presentation mode to the non-character-based presentation mode, the transition to the presentation mode other than the first presentation mode can be easily performed.

[Feature pB3]
The gaming machine according to feature pB2,
The game machine is characterized in that the predetermined effect is composed of a moving image including at least a scene in which a character corresponding to the set effect mode appears and a result disadvantageous to the character is announced.

According to feature pB3, as the predetermined effect, a moving image including at least a scene in which a character corresponding to the set effect mode appears and a disadvantageous result for the character is announced is displayed. Therefore, the player can also receive a suggestive notification that the game result will be disadvantageous. Therefore, the player is given a sense of anticipation and a sense of disappointment, and the game can be made more interesting.

[Feature pB4]
The gaming machine according to feature pB3,
The production mode transition means is
Means for shifting the set production mode to the non-character production mode after the result of the predetermined production satisfies a specific condition while the character production mode is set. Amusement machine.

According to the feature pB4, by shifting from the character-based presentation mode to the non-character-based presentation mode, the transition to the presentation mode other than the first presentation mode can be easily performed.

[Feature pB5]
The gaming machine according to feature pB3,
The production mode transition means is
In a state where the character-based production mode is set, after the result of the predetermined production satisfies a specific condition, the set production mode is applied to the character other than the character who appeared in the prescribed production. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for shifting to the corresponding character-based presentation mode to the presentation mode.

According to the feature pB5, by shifting the set production mode to the production mode among the character production modes corresponding to the character other than the character appearing in the predetermined production, It is possible to easily shift to a performance mode other than the 1 performance mode.

[Feature pB6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features pB1 to pB5,
The production mode setting means is
After the end of the game cycle in which the specific condition is satisfied, the special information (reserved information) that has not been judged by the judging means among the special information stored in the information storage means has a second 1 If the special information that satisfies the special condition exists, production mode continuation means (Fig. "Exception 1" in H.219)
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature pB6, the first special condition is included in the special information that has not been judged by the judging means among the special information stored in the information storage means after the end of the game round in which the specific condition is established. When the satisfying special information exists, the first performance mode is continued without shifting to a performance mode other than the first performance mode by a performance mode shifting means. Therefore, originally, the set performance mode is shifted from the first performance mode to a performance mode other than the first performance mode by the performance mode shifting means, but the first performance mode is continued (maintained). Therefore, when the player recognizes that the first performance mode will be continued, the game state will change in some way, and the player will have an expectation that an advantageous result will come. Therefore, according to the characteristic pB6, it is possible to make the player feel a sense of anticipation that an advantageous result may come, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic pC group>
The feature pC group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fifth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature pC1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
information storage means for storing a plurality of the acquired special information;
determination means for sequentially determining whether or not the stored special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
Any of a plurality of types of production modes including at least a first production mode (character-type stage) in which the corresponding character is set and a second production mode (non-character-type stage) in which the corresponding character is not set. a production mode setting means capable of setting whether or not as a production mode;
When the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game operation is ended as one game round, the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means is used. game round execution means for executing at least one game round;
In the game round, when the first performance mode is set by the performance mode setting means, a predetermined performance (battle performance) in which the character corresponding to the first performance mode appears can be executed. a means of execution;
A gaming machine comprising
The production mode setting means is
In a state where the first production mode is set, after a specific condition including at least notification of a disadvantageous result for the character in the predetermined production is established, the set production mode is changed to the second production mode. Production mode transition means to shift to production mode ("principle" in Figure 219)
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature pC1, after a specific condition including at least being notified of a disadvantageous result for the character in a predetermined effect is satisfied in a state where the first effect mode is set, the effect mode transition means sets the effect mode. The presenting production mode is shifted to the second production mode. In a conventional game machine having no performance mode transition means, a state in which a first performance mode is set even though a specific condition including at least notification of a disadvantageous result for a character is established in a predetermined performance. is continued, in the continuing first production mode, if a character that matches the character notified of a disadvantageous result for the character in a predetermined production appears, the player can There is a possibility that the user will feel a sense of incongruity when viewing the production of the production mode in which the character whose result has been announced (for example, died) appears as if nothing happened. On the other hand, according to feature pC1, after a specific condition including at least being notified of a disadvantageous result for the character in a predetermined effect is established, the set effect mode is changed to the corresponding character. By shifting to the non-existent second production mode, it is possible to avoid the appearance of the character with a disadvantageous result in the production mode. Therefore, according to the feature pC1, the storylines of the effects in which the characters appear are ensured, and it is possible to prevent the players from feeling uncomfortable with the effects. As a result, according to the feature pC1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature pC2]
The gaming machine according to feature pC1,
The production mode setting means is
After the end of the game cycle in which the specific condition is established, the special information (reserved information) that has not been judged by the judging means among the special information stored in the information storage means has a second 1 When the special information that satisfies the special condition exists, the production mode continuation means ("exception 1”)
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature pC2, the first special condition is included in the special information stored in the information storage means, which has not been judged by the judgment means, after the end of the game cycle in which the specific condition is established. When the satisfying special information exists, the first performance mode is continued without shifting to the second performance mode by the performance mode shifting means. For this reason, originally, the set production mode is shifted from the first production mode to the second production mode by the production mode transfer means, but the first production mode is continued (maintained), so the game When the player recognizes that the first performance mode will be continued, some change will occur in the game state and he/she will have an expectation that an advantageous result will come. Therefore, according to the feature pC2, it is possible to make the player feel a sense of anticipation that an advantageous result may come, and it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature pC3]
The gaming machine according to feature pC2,
A gaming machine comprising: means for executing the predetermined effect in the game round corresponding to the special information that satisfies the first special condition.

According to the feature pC3, a predetermined effect is executed in the game round corresponding to the special information that satisfies the first special condition. For this reason, after the predetermined performance is executed in the game round when the specific condition is satisfied, the predetermined performance is executed again when the special information satisfying the first special condition is consumed. For the player, the effect that was seen when the specific condition was established can be seen once again. When the specific condition is established, it includes the notification of a disadvantageous result for the character in a predetermined production, so that the player is notified of the disadvantageous result for the character in the predetermined production. You can also get revenge for including . Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature pC4]
The gaming machine according to feature pC3,
As the first production mode, a plurality of individual production modes with different production modes (stage of warrior A's room, stage of warrior B's room, etc.) are provided,
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined effects having different effects modes are determined for each of the plurality of individual effect modes.

According to the feature pC4, the predetermined effect to be executed in the game round when the specific condition is satisfied or the game round corresponding to the special information satisfying the first special condition is individually set as the first effect mode. An effect corresponding to the effect mode can be provided. Therefore, according to feature pC4, the content of the predetermined effect can be controlled by switching the individual effect mode included in the first effect mode, and various effects can be provided to the player. Therefore, according to the feature pA3, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Feature pC5]
The gaming machine according to feature pC4,
The production mode setting means is
After the end of the game cycle in which the specific condition is satisfied, the special information (reserved information) that has not been judged by the judging means among the special information stored in the information storage means has a second 2. When the special information that satisfies the special condition exists, the set production mode is changed to the individual in the first production mode corresponding to the character other than the character that appeared in the predetermined production. Means to shift to production mode ("Exception 2" in Figure 219)
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature pC5, the second special condition is added to the special information stored in the information storage means that has not been judged by the judging means after the end of the game cycle in which the specific condition is established. When the satisfying special information exists, the set performance mode is shifted to the individual performance mode in the first performance mode corresponding to the characters other than the character appearing in the prescribed performance. Therefore, originally, the set performance mode is shifted from the first performance mode to the second performance mode by the performance mode shifting means, but the performance mode is shifted to another individual performance mode in the same first performance mode. Therefore, when the player recognizes the shift to another individual effect mode in the same first effect mode, the player has an expectation that an advantageous result will come. Therefore, according to feature pC5, it is possible to make the player feel a sense of anticipation that an advantageous result may come, and to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature pC6]
The gaming machine according to feature pC5,
The first special condition is that the degree of possibility of satisfying the predetermined condition is a first degree or higher (special reach),
The second special condition is that the degree of possibility of satisfying the predetermined condition is less than the first degree and equal to or greater than a second degree lower than the first degree (super reach). A game machine characterized by

According to the feature pC6, when there is special information that satisfies the second special condition among the special information that has not been judged by the judging means among the special information stored in the information storage means, it is set. The current performance mode is shifted to an individual performance mode among the first performance modes corresponding to the characters other than the character appearing in the predetermined performance. On the other hand, when there is a first special condition whose degree of possibility of satisfying the predetermined condition is higher than that of the second special condition, the first effect mode is continued without shifting to the second effect mode. Therefore, after the end of the game cycle in which the specific condition is established, the transition mode of the performance mode can be changed by the special information which is not judged by the judging means among the special information stored in the information storing means. . Therefore, according to the feature pC5, it is possible to make the player feel a sense of anticipation that an advantageous result may come, depending on the mode of transition of the production mode, thereby further improving the interest of the game. .

<Characteristic pD group>
The feature pD group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fifth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature pD1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
information storage means for storing a plurality of the acquired special information;
determination means for sequentially determining whether or not the stored special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
A plurality including at least a first production mode (character stage) having a plurality of production modes in which the corresponding characters are individually set and a second production mode (non-character stage) in which the corresponding characters are not set. a production mode setting means capable of setting one of the types of production modes as a production mode;
When the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game operation is ended as one game round, the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means is used. game round execution means for executing at least one game round;
In the game round, when the first performance mode is set by the performance mode setting means, a predetermined performance (battle performance) in which the character corresponding to the first performance mode appears can be executed. a means of execution;
A gaming machine comprising
The production mode setting means is
In a state where the second production mode is set, after a specific condition including at least notification of a disadvantageous result for the character in the predetermined production is established, the set production mode is changed to the predetermined production mode. Production mode transition means for shifting to the production mode in the first production mode corresponding to the character other than the character that appeared in the production of ("principle" in FIG. 220)
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature pD1, after a specific condition including at least being notified of a disadvantageous result for the character in a predetermined effect is satisfied in a state where the second effect mode is set, the effect mode transition means sets the second effect mode. The current performance mode is shifted to a performance mode among the first performance modes corresponding to the characters other than the character appearing in the predetermined performance. If it is configured to shift to the production mode in the first production mode corresponding to the character that appeared in the predetermined production, the player is notified of the disadvantageous result (for example, the character who died). However, there was a risk of feeling uncomfortable when watching the production of the production mode that appeared as if nothing had happened. On the other hand, according to feature pD1, in the state where the second effect mode is set, after a specific condition including at least being notified of a disadvantageous result for the character in a predetermined effect is satisfied, the character is set. By shifting the present production mode to a production mode in the first production mode corresponding to a character other than the character that appeared in the predetermined production, the character whose disadvantageous result was notified (for example, died) It is possible to avoid appearing in the production mode. Therefore, according to the feature pD1, the storylines of the effects in which the characters appear are ensured, and it is possible to prevent the players from feeling uncomfortable with the effects. As a result, according to the feature pD1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature pD2]
The gaming machine according to feature pD1,
The production mode transition means is
After the end of the game cycle in which the specific condition is satisfied, the special information (reserved information) that has not been judged by the judging means among the special information stored in the information storage means has a second 1 When the special information satisfying a special condition exists, the set production mode is shifted to the production mode among the first production modes corresponding to the character appearing in the predetermined production. Means (“Exception A” in FIG. 220)
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature pD2, the first special condition is included in the special information that has not been judged by the judging means among the special information stored in the information storage means after the end of the game cycle in which the specific condition is established. When the satisfying special information exists, the set performance mode is shifted to a performance mode among the first performance modes corresponding to the characters appearing in the predetermined performance. Therefore, the performance mode originally set by the performance mode transition means is shifted from the second performance mode to the performance mode among the first performance modes corresponding to the characters other than the character appearing in the predetermined performance. However, it is shifted to a production mode among the first production modes corresponding to characters other than characters appearing in a predetermined production. The player can know that the above transition can expect a favorable result by recognizing the transition and then recognizing the effect in which a favorable result is expected when the pending information is consumed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel the expectation that an advantageous result may come. Furthermore, according to the feature pD2, by shifting to the production mode among the first production modes corresponding to the character that appeared in the predetermined production, the character whose disadvantageous result was notified (for example, died) Since the effect of appearing in the effect of the effect mode is performed, it is possible to further make the player feel the expectation that an advantageous result may come. As a result, according to the feature pD2, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature pD3]
A gaming machine according to feature pD1 or feature pD2,
The production executing means is
When the determining means determines that the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, the character appearing in the predetermined effect becomes an advantageous result, and the determining means determines that the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. a game machine characterized by comprising: means for giving a disadvantageous result to said character appearing in said predetermined presentation in the event of a failure.

According to feature pD3, the specific condition is equivalent to a condition including at least the determination by the determination means that the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. For this reason, according to the feature pD3, after the specific condition including at least the determination by the determination means that the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition is established in the state where the second effect mode is set, the set condition is established. The current production mode is shifted to the production mode among the first production modes corresponding to the character other than the character notified of the disadvantageous result. Therefore, according to the feature pD3, the sense of urgency that the special information did not satisfy the predetermined condition can be imparted to the player even by the effect according to the effect mode.

[Feature pD4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features pD1 to pD3,
The specific condition is that the character has a disadvantageous result in the predetermined effect, and the degree of possibility of satisfying the predetermined condition is a first degree or higher (special reach/miss).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature pD4, after the end of the game cycle in which the character has a disadvantageous result in the predetermined effect and the degree of possibility of satisfying the predetermined condition is equal to or higher than the first degree, the second effect mode is performed. Therefore, a transition to the first effect mode among the first effect modes corresponding to the character having a disadvantageous result in the predetermined effect is performed. Here, regardless of the degree of possibility that a predetermined condition is satisfied, whenever a character is given a disadvantageous result in a predetermined effect, when considering a gaming machine, the transition to the above effect mode is performed. Since the transition occurs frequently, there is a problem that the player feels annoyed. On the other hand, according to the feature pD4, the effect mode transition is performed only when the specific condition is satisfied, so that the problem of frequent switching of the effect mode can be solved. Therefore, according to the characteristic pD4, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic pE group>
The feature pE group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fifth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature pE1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
information storage means for storing a plurality of the acquired special information;
determination means for sequentially determining whether or not the stored special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
A plurality including at least a first production mode (character stage) having a plurality of production modes in which the corresponding characters are individually set and a second production mode (non-character stage) in which the corresponding characters are not set. a production mode setting means capable of setting one of the types of production modes as a production mode;
When the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game operation is ended as one game round, the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means is used. game round execution means for executing at least one game round;
means for executing an effect for suggesting the result of the determination by the determining means in the game round, comprising a first special effect in which the character corresponding to the first effect mode appears; any one of a plurality of types of effects including at least a second special effect in which a disadvantageous result is not notified even if the result of the determination does not satisfy the predetermined condition, and the special information is the predetermined a production execution means that results in a disadvantageous result for the character in the first special production when the determination means determines that the condition of is not satisfied;
A gaming machine comprising
The production mode setting means is
In a state where the first effect mode is set, the determination means determines that the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition (disappearance), and the first special effect is executed by the effect execution means. When the first special effect is executed after the end of the game round, effect mode transition means for shifting the set effect mode to the second effect mode ("principle" in FIG. 219) ,
In a state where the first effect mode is set, the determination means determines that the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition (disappearance), and the second special effect is executed by the effect execution means. production mode continuation means for continuing the set first production mode after the end of the game round in which the second production is executed when the second production is executed;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature pE1, when the determination means determines that the special information does not satisfy a predetermined condition while the first effect mode is set, the effect executed by the effect execution means is the first special effect. Depending on which of the second special effects, the set effect mode is divided into whether it is shifted to the second effect mode or continued as the first effect mode. In a conventional game machine, even if the same character is used as the character appearing in the first special effect and the character appearing in the effect mode, both are controlled separately. A character whose disadvantageous result was announced (for example, died) could appear as if nothing had happened in the production mode of the next game round. For this reason, in the conventional gaming machine, the player sees the effect of the effect mode in which the character notified of the unfavorable result (for example, died) appears as if nothing happened, and there is a possibility that the player feels uncomfortable. was there. On the other hand, according to the feature pE1, in the state where the first effect mode is set, the determination means determines that the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, and the effect execution means executes the first special effect. When it is executed, after the end of the game round in which the first special effect is executed, the set effect mode is shifted to the second effect mode, thereby notifying a disadvantageous result (for example, (dead) characters can be avoided from appearing in the production mode. On the other hand, since no disadvantageous result is notified in the second special effect, the determination means determines that the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition in the state where the first effect mode is set, In addition, when the second special effect is executed by the effect executing means, even if the set first effect mode is continued after the end of the game round in which the second special effect is executed, the player will does not feel the discomfort described above. For this reason, according to the feature pE1, the storylines of the effects in which the characters appear are ensured, and it is possible to prevent the players from feeling uncomfortable with the effects. Therefore, according to the feature pE1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature pE2]
The gaming machine according to feature pE1,
The production executing means is
When suggesting the result of the determination by the determination means, if the degree of possibility of satisfying the predetermined condition is equal to or higher than the first degree (special reach), the first special effect is executed, and the predetermined effect is performed. is less than the first degree and is equal to or higher than the second degree lower than the first degree (super reach), means for executing the second special effect A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature pE2, the first special effect is executed when the degree of possibility of satisfying the predetermined condition is the first degree or higher, and the degree of possibility of satisfying the predetermined condition is less than the first degree. , and is equal to or higher than a second degree lower than the first degree, the second special effect is executed. Therefore, when the degree of advantage for the player is higher, the first special effect can give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency. Therefore, according to the feature pE2, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Feature pE3]
The gaming machine according to feature pE2,
The production mode transition means is
If the special information that satisfies the first special condition exists among the special information (reserved information) that has not been judged by the judgment means among the special information stored in the information storage means, Production mode continuation means ("exception 1" in Figure 219) to continue the first production mode without performing the transition to the second production mode by the production mode transfer means
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature pE3, when there is special information satisfying the first special condition among the special information that has not been judged by the judging means among the special information stored in the information storage means, the production mode shifts. The first performance mode is continued without shifting to the second performance mode by means. For this reason, originally, the set production mode is shifted from the first production mode to the second production mode by the production mode transfer means, but the first production mode is continued (maintained), so the game When the player recognizes that the first presentation mode is continued, some change will occur in the game state, and the player will have an expectation that an advantageous result will come. Therefore, according to the feature pE3, it is possible to make the player feel a sense of anticipation that an advantageous result may come, and it is possible to further improve the amusement of the game.

[Feature pE4]
The gaming machine according to feature pE3,
A gaming machine comprising: means for executing the first special effect in the game round corresponding to the special information that satisfies the first special condition.

According to the feature pE4, a predetermined effect is executed in the game round corresponding to the special information that satisfies the first special condition. For this reason, after the first special performance is executed in the game round when the specific condition is satisfied, the first special performance is executed again when the special information satisfying the first special condition is digested. For the player, the effect that was seen when the specific condition was established can be seen once again. When the specific condition is satisfied, the player is notified of the unfavorable result for the character in the predetermined effect because it includes the notification of the unfavorable result for the character in the first special effect. You can also get revenge for being involved. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature pE5]
The gaming machine according to feature pE4,
The production mode transition means is
If the special information that satisfies the second special condition exists in the special information (reserved information) that has not been judged by the judgment means among the special information stored in the information storage means, Means for shifting the set production mode to the production mode in the first production mode corresponding to the character other than the character appearing in the first special production ("exception 2" in FIG. 219) )
with
The second special condition is that the degree of possibility of satisfying the predetermined condition is less than the third degree and equal to or greater than a fourth degree lower than the third degree (super reach). A game machine characterized by

According to the feature pE5, after the end of the game cycle in which the specific condition is established, the second special condition is added to the special information stored in the information storage means that has not been judged by the judgment means. When the satisfying special information exists, the set performance mode is shifted to the performance mode among the first performance modes corresponding to the characters other than the character appearing in the first special performance. Therefore, originally, the set performance mode is shifted from the first performance mode to the second performance mode by the performance mode shifting means, but the performance mode is shifted to another performance mode in the same first performance mode. Therefore, when the player recognizes the shift to another performance mode in the same first performance mode, the player has expectations that an advantageous result may come. Therefore, according to the feature pE5, it is possible to make the player feel a sense of anticipation that an advantageous result may come, and it is possible to further improve the amusement of the game. The fourth degree may or may not be the same as the second degree in the feature pE2.

<Characteristic pF group>
The feature pF group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fifth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature pF1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
information storage means for storing a plurality of the acquired special information;
determination means for sequentially determining whether or not the stored special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
A plurality including at least a first production mode (character stage) having a plurality of production modes in which the corresponding characters are individually set and a second production mode (non-character stage) in which the corresponding characters are not set. a production mode setting means capable of setting one of the types of production modes as a production mode;
When the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game operation is ended as one game round, the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means is used. game round execution means for executing at least one game round;
means for executing an effect for suggesting the result of the determination by the determining means in the game round, comprising a first special effect in which the character corresponding to the first effect mode appears; any one of a plurality of types of effects including at least a second special effect in which a disadvantageous result is not notified even if the result of the determination does not satisfy the predetermined condition, and the special information is the predetermined an effect execution means for giving a disadvantageous result to the character in the first special effect when the determination means determines that the condition is not satisfied;
A gaming machine comprising
The production mode setting means is
In a state where the second effect mode is set, the determination means determines that the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition (disappearance), and the first special effect is executed by the effect execution means. In this case, after the end of the game cycle in which the first special effect is executed, the set effect mode is applied to the character other than the character who has a disadvantageous result in the first special effect. Then, the first production mode transition means to shift to the production mode in the first production mode ("principle" in Figure 220),
In a state in which the second performance mode is set, the determination means determines that the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition (disappearance), and the second special performance is executed by the performance execution means. In this case, after the end of the game round in which the second special effect is executed, the set effect mode is changed to the first effect mode corresponding to the character appearing in the second special effect. A second production mode transition means for shifting to the production mode in
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature pF1, when the determination means determines that the special information does not satisfy a predetermined condition while the second effect mode is set, the effect executed by the effect execution means is the first special effect. Depending on which of the second special effects it is, the set effect mode is shifted to the effect mode among the first effect modes corresponding to the characters other than the character who had the confrontation in the first special effect, or It is sorted whether to shift to the production mode in the first production mode corresponding to the character appearing in the second special production. In the conventional game machine, even if the character appearing in the first special effect and the character appearing in the effect mode are the same character, they are controlled separately. In the case of a configuration in which the transition to the production mode in the first production mode corresponding to the character that appeared in the production is performed, the character whose disadvantageous result was notified in the predetermined production (for example, died) It was possible to appear as if nothing had happened in the production of the production mode of the game round. For this reason, in the conventional gaming machine, the player sees the effect of the effect mode in which the character notified of the unfavorable result (for example, died) appears as if nothing happened, and there is a possibility that the player feels uncomfortable. was there.

On the other hand, according to the feature pF1, in a state where the second effect mode is set, the determination means determines that the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, and the effect executing means executes the first special effect. When executed, after the end of the game round in which the first special effect is executed, the set effect mode corresponds to the character other than the character who has a disadvantageous result in the first special effect. By shifting to one of the performance modes, it is possible to prevent a character notified of a disadvantageous result (for example, died) from appearing in the performance mode. On the other hand, since the second special effect does not result in a disadvantageous result for the character, the determination means determines that the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition in the state where the second effect mode is set, In addition, when the second special performance is executed by the performance executing means, the set performance mode corresponds to the character appearing in the second special performance after the end of the game cycle in which the second special performance is executed. Then, even if the game is shifted to the effect mode among the first effect modes, the player will not feel the above discomfort. Therefore, according to the feature pF1, the storylines of the effects in which the characters appear are ensured, and it is possible to prevent the players from feeling uncomfortable with the effects. Therefore, according to the feature pF1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature pF2]
The gaming machine according to feature pF1,
The production executing means is
When suggesting the result of the determination by the determination means, when the degree of possibility of satisfying the predetermined condition is equal to or higher than the first degree (special reach), the first special effect is executed. , when the degree of possibility of satisfying the predetermined condition is less than the first degree and is equal to or higher than the second degree lower than the first degree (super reach), the second special effect is executed. A game machine characterized by comprising means for

According to the feature pF2, the first special effect is executed when the degree of possibility of satisfying the predetermined condition is equal to or higher than the first degree, and the degree of possibility of satisfying the predetermined condition is less than the first degree. , and is equal to or higher than a second degree lower than the first degree, the second special effect is executed. Therefore, when the degree of advantage for the player is higher, the confrontation of the characters can give the player a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency. Therefore, according to the feature pF2, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Feature pF3]
The gaming machine according to feature pF2,
The first production mode transition means is
After the end of the game cycle in which the specific condition is satisfied, the special information (reserved information) that has not been judged by the judging means among the special information stored in the information storage means has a second 1 When the special information satisfying a special condition exists, the set production mode is shifted to the production mode among the first production modes corresponding to the character appearing in the first special production. (“Exception A” in FIG. 220)
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature pF3, the first special condition is included in the special information that has not been judged by the judging means among the special information stored in the information storage means after the end of the game round in which the specific condition is established. When satisfying special information exists, the set performance mode is shifted to a performance mode among the first performance modes corresponding to the character appearing in the first special performance. For this reason, the originally set production mode is shifted from the second production mode to the production mode in the first production mode, which corresponds to a character other than the character that appeared in the prescribed production. Since the transition is made to the production mode among the first production modes corresponding to the characters other than the character appearing in the production, when the player recognizes the transition, some change occurs in the game state. , there is a sense of expectation that favorable results may come. Therefore, according to the feature pF3, it is possible to make the player feel a sense of anticipation that an advantageous result may come, and it is possible to further improve the amusement of the game.

[Feature pF4]
The gaming machine according to feature pF3,
The first special condition is that the degree of possibility of satisfying the predetermined condition is a third degree or higher (special reach),
The first transition restricting means,
By shifting the set production mode to the production mode among the first production modes corresponding to the character having a disadvantageous result in the first special production, the production mode shifting means A game machine characterized by comprising means for restricting transition.

According to the feature pF4, among the special information stored in the information storage means, the degree of possibility that the special information that has not been judged by the judgment means (hereinafter also referred to as pending information) satisfies a predetermined condition If there is special information that is the third degree or higher, the set production mode is the production mode among the first production modes that corresponds to the character that has a disadvantageous result in the first special production. migrated. According to feature pF4, the player can expect a favorable outcome from the above transition by recognizing the transition and then recognizing the effect expected to have a favorable outcome when the pending information is consumed. can be known. Therefore, according to the feature pF4, it is possible to surely make the player feel a sense of anticipation that an advantageous result may come, and to further improve the interest of the game. The third degree may or may not be the same as the first degree in the feature pF2.

<Characteristic pG group>
The feature pG group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fifth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature pG1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
information storage means for storing a plurality of the acquired special information;
determination means for sequentially determining whether or not the stored special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
Judgment result notification means (MPU 92 of sound emission control device 90) for informing the results of the judgment by the judgment means by game operations such as starting variable display of symbols and stopping and displaying the symbols that are being displayed in a variable manner. Game round effect setting process of FIG. 244 to be executed);
When one game round is defined as the game operation informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game operation is ended, a game round executing means (main unit) for executing the game round MPU 62 on the control board 61 side, and the game turn control process of FIG. 226 executed by it),
A gaming machine comprising
Means for setting a performance mode for a performance serving as a background of the variable display from among a plurality of types of performance modes, wherein after the end of a specific game cycle, the special display stored in the information storage means a performance mode setting means for setting the performance mode based on the special information that is not determined by the determination means among the information.

According to the feature pG1, the effect mode setting means sets the effect mode for the background effect of the variable display from among a plurality of types of effect modes. The effect mode is set based on the special information that has not been judged by the judging means among the information. Of the special information stored in the information storage means, special information that has not been judged by the judgment means (hereinafter also referred to as reserved information) can be used to measure future advantages for the player. For this reason, according to the feature pG1, it is possible to make the player feel a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency regarding the degree of advantage in the future by means of the background effect of the variable display. Therefore, according to the feature pG1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature pG2]
The gaming machine according to feature pG1,
The plurality of types of production modes include a character-type production mode (character-type stage) having a plurality of production modes in which the corresponding characters are set, and a non-character-type production mode in which the corresponding characters are not set (non-character-type stage). stage) and
When the determining means determines that a predetermined effect (battle effect) in which a character corresponding to the set effect mode appears can be executed in the game round, and the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. (2) a game machine characterized by comprising: an effect executing means that gives a disadvantageous result to the character in the predetermined effect.

According to the feature pG2, the setting of the production mode for the background production of the variable display can be set to a plurality of types of production modes including at least a character production mode corresponding to the character and a non-character production mode not corresponding to the character. can be set from the Also, the player can be notified of the result of determination by the determination means by a predetermined effect. Therefore, according to the feature pG2, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency by means of an effect according to the effect mode and an effect in which the characters confront each other. Therefore, according to the feature pG2, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Feature pG3]
The gaming machine according to feature pG2,
The production mode setting means is
After a specific condition including at least determining (missing) by the determining means that the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition in the state where the character-based production mode is set (special reach/missing) is established. , production mode transition means ("principle" in Figure 219) for shifting the set production mode to the non-character-based production mode;
After the end of the game cycle in which the specific condition is established, the special information (reserved information) that has not been judged by the judging means among the special information stored in the information storage means has a second 1 If the special information that satisfies the special condition exists, the production mode continuation means (" Exception 1”) and
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature pG3, after a specific condition including at least determination by the determination means that the special information does not satisfy a predetermined condition is established in a state where the character-based presentation mode is set, the presentation mode transition means performs the following: The set production mode is shifted to the non-character production mode. In a conventional game machine that does not have a production mode transition means, the character production mode is set even though a specific condition including at least determining that the special information does not satisfy a predetermined condition is met. Since the game is continued, there is a problem that the sense of urgency that the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition cannot be given to the player by the effect according to the effect mode. On the other hand, according to the feature pG3, by shifting the production mode from the character production mode to the non-character production mode, the sense of urgency that the special information did not satisfy the predetermined condition is expressed according to the production mode. can be given to the player by

Further, according to the feature pG3, after the end of the game round in which the specific condition is satisfied, among the special information stored in the information storage means, the first special When there is special information that satisfies the conditions, the non-character-based performance mode is continued without transitioning to the non-character-based performance mode by the performance mode transition means. For this reason, originally, the set production mode is shifted from the character-based production mode to the non-character-based production mode by the production mode transfer means, but the character-based production mode is continued. When the player recognizes the continuation of the character-based presentation mode, he/she has a sense of anticipation that some kind of change will occur in the game state and an advantageous result will come. Therefore, according to feature pG3, it is possible to make the player feel the expectation that an advantageous result will come. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature pG4]
The gaming machine according to feature pG3,
The production mode setting means is
After the end of the game cycle in which the specific condition is satisfied, the special information (reserved information) that has not been judged by the judging means among the special information stored in the information storage means has a second 2. When the special information that satisfies the special condition exists, the set production mode is changed to the production in the character-based production mode corresponding to the character other than the character appearing in the predetermined production. Mode transition means (“Exception 2” in FIG. 219),
with
The first special condition is that the degree of possibility of satisfying the predetermined condition is a first degree or higher (special reach),
The second special condition is that the degree of possibility of satisfying the predetermined condition is less than the first degree and equal to or greater than a second degree lower than the first degree (super reach). A game machine characterized by

According to the feature pG4, the second special condition is included in the special information stored in the information storage means that has not been judged by the judging means after the end of the game round in which the specific condition is established. When the satisfying special information exists, the set production mode is shifted to the production mode among the character-based production modes corresponding to the characters other than the character appearing in the predetermined production, thereby providing the production mode transition means. The transition to non-character-based production mode by is restricted. For this reason, originally, the set production mode is transferred from the character-based production mode to the non-character-based production mode by the production mode transfer means, but it is transferred to another production mode in the same character-based production mode. Therefore, the player has a feeling of expectation that an advantageous result will come when he or she recognizes the transition to another character-based presentation mode. Therefore, according to the feature pG4, it is possible to make the player feel a sense of anticipation that an advantageous result may come, and to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature pG5]
The gaming machine according to feature pG2,
The production mode setting means is
In the state where the non-character-based production mode is set, after a specific condition is met (special reach, failure ), the set production mode is shifted to the production mode among the character-based production modes corresponding to the character other than the character appearing in the predetermined production (Fig. 220) the "principles" in
After the end of the game cycle in which the specific condition is satisfied, the special information (reserved information) that has not been judged by the judging means among the special information stored in the information storage means has a second 2 When the special information satisfying the special condition exists, the set production mode is shifted to the production mode among the first production modes corresponding to the character appearing in the first special production. means to cause (“Exception A” in FIG. 220);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature pG5, after a specific condition including at least determination by the determination means that the special information does not satisfy a predetermined condition is established in a state where the non-character-based presentation mode is set, the set presentation is established. The mode is shifted to a performance mode among character-based performance modes corresponding to characters other than characters appearing in a predetermined performance. If it is configured to shift to a production mode among character-based production modes corresponding to a character that has appeared in a predetermined production, the player is notified of a disadvantageous result (for example, a character who died). However, there was a risk of feeling uncomfortable when watching the production of the production mode that appeared as if nothing had happened. On the other hand, according to feature pG5, after a specific condition including at least the determination by the determination means that the special information does not satisfy a predetermined condition is established in a state where the non-character-based presentation mode is set, An unfavorable result is announced by shifting the set production mode to a production mode among the character-based production modes that corresponds to a character other than the character that appeared in the predetermined production (for example, death ) It is possible to avoid that the character appears in the production mode. Therefore, according to the feature pG5, the storylines of the effects in which the characters appear are ensured, and it is possible to prevent the players from feeling uncomfortable with the effects.

Further, according to the feature pG5, after the end of the game cycle in which the specific condition is satisfied, the second special When there is special information that satisfies the conditions, the set performance mode is shifted to a performance mode among the character-based performance modes corresponding to the characters appearing in the predetermined performance. The player can know that the above transition can expect a favorable result by recognizing the transition and then recognizing the effect in which a favorable result is expected when the pending information is consumed. Therefore, it is possible to surely make the player feel the expectation that an advantageous result may come. Furthermore, according to the feature pG5, by shifting to the production mode among the character-based production modes corresponding to the character that appeared in a predetermined production, the character whose disadvantageous result was announced (for example, died) dares to appear in the effect of the effect mode, it is possible to make the player have a greater sense of expectation that the above-mentioned advantageous result will come. As a result, according to the feature pG5, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

<Characteristic pH group>
The characteristic pH group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fifth embodiment and its modifications.

[Characteristic pH 1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
information storage means for storing a plurality of the acquired special information;
determination means for sequentially determining whether or not the stored special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
If one game round is defined as the game operation informing the result of the determination by the determination unit starting and the game operation ending, a game round executing means (main control unit) for executing the game round MPU 62 on the board 61 side, and the game turn control process of FIG. 226 executed by it);
production mode setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of production modes including at least a plurality of individual production modes individually corresponding to each of the plurality of characters;
an effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect (battle effect) in which one of the plurality of characters appears in the game round;
A gaming machine comprising
The production mode setting means is
When an unfavorable result for the character is announced in the predetermined effect, the set effect mode is notified of the unfavorable result in the game round next to the game round in which the predetermined effect is executed. means for shifting to the production mode corresponding to a character other than the character.

According to the feature pH1, when a result unfavorable to the character is announced in a predetermined effect, in the next game round after the game cycle in which the predetermined effect is executed, characters other than the character with the unfavorable result A corresponding production mode is set. In a conventional gaming machine that does not have such a configuration, even though a character is notified of a disadvantageous result in a predetermined effect, in the game cycle following the game cycle in which the confrontation/result notification effect is executed, the character is not disadvantaged. Since a production mode corresponding to a character other than the character whose result was announced may be set, the player will appear as if nothing had happened to the character whose disadvantageous result was announced (for example, died). There is a possibility that the user may feel a sense of incongruity when viewing the performance of the performance mode. On the other hand, according to the feature pH1, when an unfavorable result for the character is announced in a predetermined effect, in the next game round, an effect corresponding to the character who has been notified of the unfavorable result is provided. By not setting the mode, it is possible to avoid that a character notified of a disadvantageous result (for example, died) appears in the presentation mode. Therefore, according to the feature pH1, the storylines of the effects in which the characters appear are ensured, and it is possible to prevent the players from feeling uncomfortable with the effects. As a result, according to the feature pH1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature pH 2]
The gaming machine according to feature pH1,
The plurality of types of production modes include a character-type production mode (character-type stage) having a plurality of production modes in which the corresponding characters are set, and a non-character-type production mode in which the corresponding characters are not set (non-character-type stage). stage) and
The production mode setting means is
In a state where the character-based production mode is set, after a specific condition including at least notification of a disadvantageous result for the character in the predetermined production is established, the set production mode is changed to the non-character production mode. Production mode transition means to shift to system production mode ("principle" in Figure 219)
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature pH2, after a specific condition including at least being notified of a result unfavorable to the character in a predetermined effect is satisfied in a state where the character-based effect mode is set, the effect mode transition means sets the effect mode. The directed production mode is shifted to a non-character-based production mode. In a conventional game machine without a performance mode transition means, a state in which a character-based performance mode is set even though a specific condition including at least notification of a disadvantageous result for a character in a predetermined performance has been established. is continued, in the continuing character-based production mode, if a character that matches the character with a disadvantageous result in a predetermined intellectual production appears, the player can There is a possibility that the user may feel uncomfortable when seeing the performance of the performance mode in which the notified (for example, the deceased) character appears as if nothing happened. On the other hand, according to the feature pH2, the set production mode is shifted to the non-character-based production mode after a specific condition including at least notification of a disadvantageous result for the character in a predetermined production is satisfied. By doing so, it is possible to avoid the appearance of a character notified of a disadvantageous result (for example, died) in the production mode. Therefore, according to the feature pH2, the storylines of the effects in which the characters appear are ensured, and it is possible to prevent the players from feeling uncomfortable with the effects. As a result, according to the feature pH2, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic pH 3]
A gaming machine according to feature pH1 or feature pH2,
The plurality of production modes include a character production mode (character stage) having a plurality of production modes in which the corresponding characters are set, and a non-character production mode (non-character stage) in which the corresponding characters are not set. ) and
The production mode setting means is
In a state where the non-character-based production mode is set, after a specific condition including at least notification of a disadvantageous result for the character in the predetermined production is established, the set production mode is Production mode transition means for shifting to the production mode among the character-based production modes corresponding to the characters other than the character appearing in a predetermined production ("principle" in Fig. 220)
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature pH3, in a state where the non-character-based production mode is set, after a specific condition including at least notification of a disadvantageous result for the character in a predetermined production is satisfied, the production mode transition means sets The presenting production mode is shifted to a production mode among the character-based production modes corresponding to the characters other than the character appearing in the predetermined production. If it is configured to shift to a production mode among character-based production modes corresponding to a character that has appeared in a predetermined production, the player is notified of a disadvantageous result (for example, a character who died). However, there was a risk of feeling uncomfortable when watching the production of the production mode that appeared as if nothing had happened. On the other hand, according to the feature pH3, in a state where the non-character-based production mode is set, after a specific condition including at least being notified of a disadvantageous result for the character in a predetermined production is satisfied, the setting is made. An unfavorable result is announced by shifting to a production mode among character-based production modes that corresponds to a character other than a character that has a disadvantageous result in a predetermined production (for example, (dead) characters can be avoided from appearing in the production mode. Therefore, according to the feature pH3, the storylines of the effects in which the characters appear are ensured, and it is possible to prevent the players from feeling uncomfortable with the effects. As a result, according to the feature pH3, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic pI group>
The feature pI group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fifth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature pI1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
information storage means for storing a plurality of the acquired special information;
determination means for sequentially determining whether or not the stored special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
When one game round is defined as the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended, a game round execution means (main control unit) for executing the game round MPU 62 on the board 61 side, and the game round control process of FIG. 226 executed by it);
production mode setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of production modes including at least a plurality of production modes individually corresponding to each of the plurality of characters;
Means for executing a special effect (super ready-to-win effect, special ready-to-win effect) indicating a degree of possibility that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition in the game round, wherein any one of the plurality of characters is executed. a special effect executing means for executing a special effect for the corresponding character;
A gaming machine comprising
The special production execution means is
When one of the plurality of characters corresponds to the production mode set by the production mode setting means, means for executing the special production for the character that matches the corresponding character (voice emission) MPU 92 of control device 90 and effect pattern table reference processing for super reach/loss in FIG. 245 executed by it or effect pattern table reference processing for special reach/loss in FIG. 248)
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature pI1, when one of the plurality of characters corresponds to the production mode set by the production mode setting means, a special production for the character that matches the corresponding character is executed by the special production execution means. executed. For this reason, the character corresponding to the special effect executed in the game cycle matches the character corresponding to the set effect mode. In a conventional gaming machine that does not have such a configuration, the degree of connection between the special effect and the effect mode that is set is low, so there is a possibility that the player will feel a sense of incongruity. On the other hand, according to the feature pI1, the character corresponding to the special effect executed in the game round matches the character corresponding to the set effect mode. It can prevent you from feeling it. As a result, according to the characteristic pI1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature pI2]
A gaming machine according to feature pI1,
The plurality of production modes include a character-type production mode (character-type stage) having a plurality of production modes in which the corresponding characters are set, and a non-character-type production mode (non-character-type stage) in which the corresponding characters are not set. ) and
The special effect is composed of a video in which a character corresponding to the set effect mode appears,
The production mode setting means is
In a state where the non-character-based production mode is set, after a specific condition including at least notification of a disadvantageous result for the character in the special production is satisfied, the set production mode is changed to the special production mode. Production mode transition means for shifting to the production mode among the character-based production modes corresponding to the characters other than the characters appearing in the production ("principle" in Fig. 220)
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature pI2, in a state where the non-character-based production mode is set, after a specific condition including at least being notified of a disadvantageous result for the character in the special production is satisfied, the production mode transition means sets the non-character production mode. The present production mode is shifted to the production mode among the character-based production modes corresponding to the characters other than the characters appearing in the special production. If it is configured to shift to the production mode in the character-based production mode corresponding to the character that appeared in the special production, the player will be notified of the disadvantageous result (for example, the character who died). There was a possibility that the user would feel a sense of incongruity when watching the production of the production mode that appeared as if nothing had happened. On the other hand, according to the feature pI2, in the state where the non-character production mode is set, after a specific condition including at least being notified of a disadvantageous result for the character in the special production is established, it is set. A character whose unfavorable result was announced (for example, died) by shifting to a character-based production mode that corresponds to a character other than the character that appeared in the special production. You can avoid appearing in the mode. Therefore, according to the feature pI2, the storylines of the effects in which the characters appear are ensured, and it is possible to prevent the players from feeling uncomfortable with the effects. In addition, since the character corresponding to the transferred character-based presentation mode matches the character corresponding to the special presentation executed in the game round, the connection between each presentation is further enhanced. As a result, according to the feature pI2, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature pI3]
A gaming machine according to feature pI2,
The production mode transition means is
In the state where the non-character-based presentation mode is set, after the game cycle in which the specific condition is established is completed, the judgment means makes a judgment among the special information stored in the information storage means. When the special information satisfying the first special condition exists in the special information (reserved information) that has not been displayed, the set production mode is set to correspond to the character that appeared in the special production. Means for shifting to the production mode in the character mode ("Exception A" in Fig. 220)
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature pI3, the first special condition is included in the special information that has not been judged by the judging means among the special information stored in the information storage means after the end of the game round in which the specific condition is established. When the satisfying special information exists, the set production mode is shifted to the production mode among the character-based production modes corresponding to the characters appearing in the special production. Therefore, the production mode originally set by the production mode transition means is shifted from the non-character production mode to the production mode among the character production modes corresponding to the characters other than the character appearing in the special production. However, it is shifted to the production mode among the character-based production modes corresponding to the character that appeared in the special production. The player can know that the above transition can expect a favorable result by recognizing the transition and then recognizing the effect in which a favorable result is expected when the pending information is consumed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel the expectation that an advantageous result may come. Furthermore, according to the feature pI3, by shifting to the above-mentioned production mode among the character-based production modes corresponding to the character that appeared in the special production, the character whose disadvantageous result was notified (for example, died) is produced. Since the effect of appearing in the effect of the mode is performed, it is possible to further make the player feel the expectation that the above-mentioned advantageous result may come. As a result, according to the feature pI3, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

<Characteristic pJ group>
The feature pJ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fifth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature pJ1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
information storage means for storing a plurality of the acquired special information;
determination means for sequentially determining whether or not the stored special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
When one game round is defined as the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended, a game round execution means (main control unit) for executing the game round MPU 62 on the board 61 side, and the game round control process of FIG. 226 executed by it);
Means for executing a special effect (super ready-to-win effect, special ready-to-win effect) indicating a degree of possibility that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition in the game round, wherein any one of the plurality of characters is executed. a special effect executing means for executing a special effect for the corresponding character;
A gaming machine comprising
The special production execution means is
Among the plurality of characters, the determination result of the determination means related to the previous game round (loss in winning lottery) and the special information indicated by the special effect executed in the previous game round are the predetermined The character (character specified by the warrior character determination value VC) is specified based on the degree of possibility of satisfying the condition (occurrence of special reach) (the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 and the stage transition processing in a non-character type stage), means for executing the special effect for the character that matches the specified character (MPU 92 of the audio light emission control device 90 and the super reach stage of FIG. 245 executed by it) Effect pattern table reference processing for loss or effect pattern table reference processing for special reach/loss in FIG. 248)
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature pJ1, the character is specified based on the determination result of the determination means relating to the previous game round and the degree of possibility that the special information indicated by the special effect executed in the previous game round satisfies a predetermined condition. and a special effect for the character that matches the identified character is executed. For this reason, the character corresponding to the special effect to be executed in the game round depends on the judgment result of the judgment means relating to the previous game round and the degree of possibility that the special information in the previous game round satisfies the predetermined condition. It will correspond. In a conventional gaming machine that does not have such a configuration, the special effect executed in a game round has a low degree of connection with the game result of the previous game round, and thus the player may feel uncomfortable. . On the other hand, according to the feature pJ1, the character corresponding to the special effect executed in the game round matches the character specified based on the game result of the previous game round. It is possible to prevent the viewer from feeling a sense of incongruity in the production. As a result, according to the characteristic pJ1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature pJ2]
The gaming machine according to feature pJ1,
a production mode setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of production modes including at least a plurality of production modes individually corresponding to each of the plurality of characters;
The plurality of production modes include a character-type production mode (character-type stage) having a plurality of production modes in which the corresponding characters are set, and a non-character-type production mode (non-character-type stage) in which the corresponding characters are not set. ) and
The special effect is composed of a video in which a character corresponding to the set effect mode appears,
The production mode setting means is
In a state where the non-character-based production mode is set, after a specific condition including at least notification of a disadvantageous result for the character in the special production is satisfied, the set production mode is changed to the special production mode. Production mode transition means for shifting to the production mode among the character-based production modes corresponding to the characters other than the characters appearing in the production ("principle" in Fig. 220)
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature pJ2, in a state in which the non-character-based production mode is set, after a specific condition including at least being notified of a disadvantageous result for the character in the special production is established, the production mode transition means sets the special production. The present production mode is shifted to the production mode among the character-based production modes corresponding to the characters other than the characters appearing in the special production. If it is configured to shift to the production mode in the character-based production mode corresponding to the character that appeared in the special production, the player will be notified of the disadvantageous result (for example, the character who died). There was a possibility that the user would feel a sense of incongruity when watching the production of the production mode that appeared as if nothing had happened. On the other hand, according to feature pJ2, in the state in which the non-character-based production mode is set, after a specific condition including at least being notified of a disadvantageous result for the character in the special production is established, it is set. A character whose unfavorable result was announced (for example, died) by shifting to a character-based production mode that corresponds to a character other than the character that appeared in the special production. You can avoid appearing in the mode. For this reason, according to the feature pJ2, the storylines of the effects in which the characters appear are ensured, and it is possible to prevent the players from feeling uncomfortable with the effects. In addition, since the character corresponding to the game result of the previous game cycle and the character corresponding to the special effect executed in the game cycle match, the connection between each effect becomes higher. As a result, according to the feature pJ2, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature pJ3]
The gaming machine according to feature pJ2,
The production mode transition means is
In the state where the non-character-based presentation mode is set, after the game cycle in which the specific condition is established is completed, the judgment means makes a judgment among the special information stored in the information storage means. When the special information satisfying the first special condition exists in the special information (reserved information) that has not been displayed, the set production mode is set to correspond to the character that appeared in the special production. Means for shifting to the production mode in the character mode ("Exception A" in Fig. 220)
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature pJ3, after the end of the game cycle in which the specific condition is established, the first special condition is included in the special information stored in the information storage means that has not been judged by the judgment means. When the satisfying special information exists, the set production mode is shifted to the production mode among the character-based production modes corresponding to the characters appearing in the special production. Therefore, the production mode originally set by the production mode transition means is shifted from the non-character production mode to the production mode among the character production modes corresponding to the characters other than the character appearing in the special production. However, it is shifted to the production mode among the character-based production modes corresponding to the character that appeared in the special production. The player can know that the above transition can expect a favorable result by recognizing the transition and then recognizing the effect in which a favorable result is expected when the pending information is consumed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel the expectation that an advantageous result may come. Furthermore, according to the feature pJ3, by shifting to the above-mentioned production mode among the character-based production modes corresponding to the character that appeared in the special production, the character whose disadvantageous result was notified (for example, died) is produced. Since the effect of appearing in the effect of the mode is performed, it is possible to further make the player feel the expectation that the above-mentioned advantageous result may come. As a result, according to the feature pJ3, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

<Characteristic pK group>
The feature pK group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fifth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature pK1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
information storage means for storing a plurality of the acquired special information;
determination means for sequentially determining whether or not the stored special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
If one game round is defined as the game operation informing the result of the determination by the determination unit starting and the game operation ending, a game round executing means (main control unit) for executing the game round MPU 62 on the board 61 side, and the game turn control process of FIG. 226 executed by it);
Means for executing a special effect (super ready-to-win effect, special ready-to-win effect) indicating the degree of possibility that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition in the game round, wherein any one of the plurality of characters is executed. a special effect executing means for executing a special effect for the corresponding character;
A gaming machine comprising
The special production execution means is
From among the plurality of characters, the character (warrior character determination value VC character specified by) is specified (the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 and the stage transition processing in the non-character stage of FIG. 254 executed by it), and the special Means for executing production (MPU 92 of sound emission control device 90 and super reach/off time production pattern table reference processing in FIG. 245 executed by it or special reach/off time production pattern table reference processing in FIG. 248)
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature pK1, a character is identified based on special information (hereinafter referred to as pending information) that has not been judged by the judgment means among the special information stored in the information storage means, and the identified character and A special effect for the matching character is performed. For this reason, the character corresponding to the special effect executed in the game round depends on the judgment result of the judging means for the previous game round and the degree of possibility that the judging means in the previous game round satisfies the predetermined condition. It will correspond. In a conventional gaming machine that does not have such a configuration, the special effects executed in game rounds have a low degree of connection with the hold information, so there is a risk that the player will feel a sense of incongruity. On the other hand, according to the feature pK1, the character corresponding to the special effect executed in the game round matches the character specified based on the hold information, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable with the effect. It can prevent you from feeling it. As a result, according to the feature pK1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature pK2]
The gaming machine according to feature pK1,
a production mode setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of production modes including at least a plurality of production modes individually corresponding to each of the plurality of characters;
Among the plurality of production modes, a character-type production mode (character-type stage) having a plurality of production modes individually corresponding to each of a plurality of characters with different production modes, and a non-character-type production that does not correspond to the character At least including mode (non-character stage),
The special effect is composed of a video in which a character corresponding to the set effect mode appears,
The production mode setting means is
In a state where the non-character-based production mode is set, after a specific condition including at least notification of a disadvantageous result for the character in the special production is satisfied, the set production mode is changed to the special production mode. Production mode transition means for shifting to the production mode among the character-based production modes corresponding to the characters other than the characters appearing in the production ("principle" in Fig. 220)
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature pK2, in a state in which the non-character-based production mode is set, after a specific condition including at least being notified of a disadvantageous result for the character in the special production is satisfied, the production mode transition means sets the special production. The present production mode is shifted to the production mode among the character-based production modes corresponding to the characters other than the characters appearing in the special production. If it is configured to shift to the production mode in the character-based production mode corresponding to the character that appeared in the special production, the player will be notified of the disadvantageous result (for example, the character who died). There was a possibility that the user would feel a sense of incongruity when watching the production of the production mode that appeared as if nothing had happened. On the other hand, according to the feature pK2, in the state where the non-character-based production mode is set, after a specific condition including at least being notified of a disadvantageous result for the character in the special production is established, it is set. A character whose unfavorable result was announced (for example, died) by shifting to a character-based production mode that corresponds to a character other than the character that appeared in the special production. You can avoid appearing in the mode. For this reason, according to the feature pK2, the storylines of the effects in which the characters appear are ensured, and it is possible to prevent the players from feeling uncomfortable with the effects. Also, since the character corresponding to the reserved information and the character corresponding to the special effect executed in the game round match, the connection between each effect becomes higher. As a result, according to the characteristic pK2, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Feature pK3]
The gaming machine according to feature pK2,
The production mode transition means is
After the end of the game cycle in which the specific condition is satisfied, the special information (reserved information) that has not been judged by the judging means among the special information stored in the information storage means has a second 1 Means for shifting the set production mode to the production mode among the character-based production modes corresponding to the character appearing in the special production when the special information satisfying the special condition exists. ("Exception A" in Fig. 220)
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature pK3, the first special condition is included in the special information stored in the information storage means that has not been judged by the judging means after the end of the game cycle in which the specific condition is established. When the satisfying special information exists, the set production mode is shifted to the production mode among the character-based production modes corresponding to the characters appearing in the special production. Therefore, the production mode originally set by the production mode transition means is shifted from the non-character production mode to the production mode among the character production modes corresponding to the characters other than the character appearing in the special production. However, it is shifted to the production mode among the character-based production modes corresponding to the character that appeared in the special production. The player can know that the above transition can expect a favorable result by recognizing the transition and then recognizing the effect in which a favorable result is expected when the pending information is consumed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel the expectation that an advantageous result may come. Furthermore, according to the feature pK4, by shifting to the above-mentioned production mode among the character-based production modes corresponding to the character that appeared in the special production, the character whose disadvantageous result was notified (for example, died) is produced. Since the effect of appearing in the effect of the mode is performed, it is possible to further make the player feel the expectation that the above-mentioned advantageous result may come. As a result, according to the characteristic pK3, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic pL group>
The feature pL group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fifth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature pL1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
information storage means for storing a plurality of the acquired special information;
determination means for sequentially determining whether or not the stored special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
production mode setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of types of production modes including at least a first production mode (character stage) as the production mode;
When the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game operation is ended as one game round, the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means is used. game round execution means for executing at least one game round;
In the game round, when the first performance mode is set by the performance mode setting means, execution of a predetermined performance capable of executing a predetermined performance (battle performance + result notification performance) corresponding to the first performance mode. means and
A gaming machine comprising
The production mode setting means is
In a state where the first production mode is set, after the result of the predetermined production satisfies a specific condition (executing a defeat production), the set production mode is changed to a mode other than the first production mode. Production mode transition means ("principle" in Figure 219) for shifting to production mode,
After the end of the game cycle in which the specific condition is established, the special information (reserved information) that has not been judged by the judging means among the special information stored in the information storage means has a second 1 production mode continuation means for continuing the first production mode without transitioning to a production mode other than the first production mode by the production mode transfer means when the special information satisfying the special condition exists "Exception 1" in H.219) and
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature pL1, in a state in which the first effect mode is set, after the result of a predetermined effect satisfies a specific condition, the set effect mode shifts to a effect mode other than the first effect mode. be done. In a conventional game machine having no effect mode transition means, the first effect mode is set when the result of a predetermined effect is a effect in which, for example, a result unfavorable to the character is notified as a specific condition. is continued, in the first production mode, when a character that matches the character whose unfavorable result has been announced for the character in a predetermined production appears, the player is notified of the unfavorable result. There is a possibility that the player may feel a sense of incongruity when viewing the production mode in which the character who has been killed (for example, died) appears as if nothing had happened. On the other hand, according to the feature pL1, after the result of the predetermined effect satisfies the specific condition, the set effect mode is shifted from the first effect mode to the effect mode other than the first effect mode. By doing so, it is possible to avoid characters with disadvantageous results from appearing in the production mode. Therefore, according to the feature pL1, the storylines of the effects in which the characters appear are ensured, and it is possible to prevent the players from feeling uncomfortable with the effects. As a result, according to the feature pL1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the feature pL1, after the end of the game round in which the specific condition is satisfied, among the special information stored in the information storage means, the first special When special information satisfying a condition exists, the first performance mode is continued without shifting to a performance mode other than the first performance mode by a performance mode shifting means. Therefore, originally, the set performance mode is shifted from the first performance mode to a performance mode other than the first performance mode by the performance mode shifting means, but the first performance mode is continued (maintained). Therefore, when the player recognizes that the first performance mode will be continued, the game state will change in some way, and the player will have an expectation that an advantageous result will come. Therefore, according to the feature pL1, it is possible to make the player feel a sense of anticipation that an advantageous result may come, and to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature pL2]
The gaming machine according to feature pL1,
The plurality of production modes include a character production mode (character stage) having a plurality of production modes in which the corresponding characters are set, and a non-character production mode (non-character stage) in which the corresponding characters are not set. ) and
A gaming machine, wherein the first production mode is one production mode among the character production modes (character stage).

According to the feature pL2, a transition is made from an effect mode among character-based effect modes having a plurality of effect modes in which corresponding characters are set to a effect mode other than the effect mode. For example, by shifting from the character-based presentation mode to the non-character-based presentation mode, the transition to the presentation mode other than the first presentation mode can be easily performed.

[Feature pL3]
The gaming machine according to feature pL2,
The game machine is characterized in that the predetermined effect is composed of a moving image including at least a scene in which a character corresponding to the set effect mode appears and a result disadvantageous to the character is announced.

According to the feature pL3, as the predetermined effect, a moving image including at least a scene in which a character corresponding to the set effect mode appears and a disadvantageous result for the character is announced is displayed. Therefore, the player can also receive a suggestive notification that the game result will be disadvantageous. Therefore, the player is given a sense of anticipation and a sense of disappointment, and the game can be made more interesting.

[Feature pL4]
The gaming machine according to feature pL3,
The production mode transition means is
Means for shifting the set production mode to the non-character production mode after the result of the predetermined production satisfies a specific condition while the character production mode is set. Amusement machine.

According to the characteristic pL4, by shifting from the character-based presentation mode to the non-character-based presentation mode, the transition to the presentation mode other than the first presentation mode can be easily performed.

[Feature pL5]
The gaming machine according to feature pL3,
The production mode transition means is
In a state where the character-based production mode is set, after the result of the predetermined production satisfies a specific condition, the set production mode is applied to the character other than the character who appeared in the prescribed production. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for shifting to the corresponding character-based presentation mode to the presentation mode.

According to the characteristic pL5, by shifting the set production mode to the production mode among the character production modes corresponding to the character other than the character appearing in the predetermined production, It is possible to easily shift to a performance mode other than the 1 performance mode.

<Characteristic qA group>
The feature qA group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the sixth embodiment and modifications of the sixth embodiment.

[Feature qA1]
main control means for performing a win-or-fail lottery (winning lottery) to determine whether or not to generate a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player;
Production control means (MPU 92 of audio light emission control device 90) for controlling at least audio production based on the control signal from the main control means;
effect data storage means for storing first effect data (song A first data A1) and second effect data (song A second data A2);
an effect executing means (sound output LSI 97) capable of using the first effect data and the second effect data to execute the effect;
A gaming machine comprising
The first effect data includes a first part (song A first data_main part A12) and a second part (song A first data_reverberation part A13) that is continuous with the first part in the time axis direction. and at least
The production control means is
first instruction means (means for transmitting a music A first data reproduction start command CA1) for instructing the execution of the first effect data to the effect execution means;
Within a predetermined period including the timing when the execution position of the first effect data in the effect execution means reaches the end of the first part (time t2 in FIG. 263), the second effect is issued to the effect execution means second instruction means for instructing execution of data (means for transmitting a music A second data reproduction start command CA2);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature qA1, the first instruction means provided in the effect control means instructs the effect execution means to execute the first effect data, and the execution position of the first effect data in the effect execution means is the first portion. Within a predetermined period including the timing of reaching the end of , the second instruction means provided in the effect control means instructs the effect execution means to execute the second effect data. The effect executing means receives an instruction to execute the first effect data and starts executing the first effect data, and receives an instruction to execute the second effect data and starts executing the second effect data. However, in the effect execution means, there is a delay of a predetermined period (this period is hereinafter also referred to as a "delay period") from when the instruction to execute the second effect data is received until the execution of the second effect data is started. call) may occur. According to the feature qA1, the first effect data includes the second part that is continuous with the first part in the time axis direction. uninterrupted. Therefore, the player does not feel a sense of incongruity that the performance is interrupted. Therefore, according to the feature qA1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature qA2]
A gaming machine according to feature qA1,
The first part is a part in which the main part of a specific performance is recorded,
The gaming machine, wherein the second portion is a portion in which an effect associated with the main portion is recorded.

According to the feature qA2, since the above-described delay period can be filled with the performance accompanying the main part of the specific performance, the sense of incongruity caused by the interruption of the performance can be eliminated without impairing the flow of the specific performance.

[Feature qA3]
The gaming machine according to feature qA2,
A gaming machine, wherein the second effect data is the same as the data recorded in the first portion.

According to feature qA3, it is possible to repeatedly execute (reproduce) the main part of a specific presentation, for example, the melody part of a piece of music.

[Feature qA4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features qA1 to qA3,
The production executing means is
Having a plurality of execution means for executing the production,
The first instruction means is
means for instructing execution of the first effect data by a specific execution means (audio channel 1) among the plurality of execution means;
The second instruction means
A gaming machine comprising means for instructing execution of the second effect data by the specific execution means (audio channel 1).

According to the feature qA4, during the delay period described above, the specific executing means executes the second portion of the first effect data, and when the delay period elapses, the specific executing means executes the second effect data. It is executed by switching to the second part of the performance data. As a result, it is possible to reliably switch the effect from the first effect data to the second effect data without interrupting the effect.

[Feature qA5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features qA1 to qA3,
The production executing means is
Having a plurality of execution means for executing the production,
The first instruction means is
means for instructing execution of the first effect data by a specific execution means (audio channel 1) among the plurality of execution means;
The second instruction means
A gaming machine comprising means for instructing execution of the second effect data by an execution means (audio channel 2) different from the specific execution means.

According to feature qA5, during the delay period described above, the second part of the first effect data is executed by the specific execution means, and when the delay period elapses, the execution means different from the specific execution means executes the second part. 2 effect data is executed. When the delay period elapses, the unexecuted part of the second part of the first effect data is continuously executed by the specific executing means, so that the period during which the unexecuted part is being executed is executed by the specific executing means. The second effect data is also executed by the execution means different from the above. As a result, immediately after the performance is switched from the first performance data to the second performance data, the performance of the first performance data and the performance of the second performance data are mixed to smoothly switch the performance. It can be carried out.

<Characteristic qB group>
The feature qB group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the sixth embodiment and modifications of the sixth embodiment.

[Feature qB1]
main control means for performing a win-or-fail lottery (winning lottery) to determine whether or not to generate a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player;
Production control means (MPU 92 of audio light emission control device 90) for controlling at least audio production based on the control signal from the main control means;
effect data storage means for storing effect data (song A second data A2);
Production executing means (sound output LSI 97) for executing production using the production data,
A gaming machine comprising
The effect data includes a first part (song A second data_main part A21), a second part (song A second data_reverberation part A22) continuous with the first part in the time axis direction, with at least
The production control means is
a first instruction means (a means for transmitting a music A second data reproduction start command CA2) for instructing the performance execution means to execute the performance data;
Within a predetermined period including the timing when the execution position of the effect data in the effect execution means reaches the end of the second part (time t3 in FIG. 263), the effect execution means is instructed to execute the effect data. a second instructing means for instructing (means for transmitting a music A second data reproduction start command CA2);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature qB1, the first instruction means provided in the effect control means instructs the effect execution means to execute the effect data (hereinafter also referred to as the first instruction), and the effect execution means executes the effect data. Within a predetermined period including the timing when the execution position reaches the end of the first part, the second instruction means provided in the effect control means issues an instruction to execute the effect data (hereinafter also referred to as the second instruction) to execute the effect. made to means. Upon receiving the first instruction, the effect executing means starts executing the effect data (hereinafter also referred to as the first effect data), and upon receiving the second instruction, produces the same effect data as the first effect data ( hereinafter also referred to as the second effect data) is started to be executed. However, in the effect executing means, there is a predetermined period of delay (this period is hereinafter referred to as " (also called a “delay period”) may occur. According to the feature qB1, since the effect data includes the second part that is continuous in the time axis direction with respect to the first part, the second part of the effect data is executed during the delay period, and the effect is not interrupted. . Therefore, the player does not feel a sense of incongruity that the performance is interrupted. Therefore, according to the feature qB1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature qB2]
The gaming machine according to feature qB1,
The first part is a part in which the main part of a specific performance is recorded,
The gaming machine, wherein the second portion is a portion in which an effect associated with the main portion is recorded.

According to the feature qB2, since the above-mentioned delay period can be filled with the performance accompanying the main part of the specific performance, the sense of incongruity caused by the interruption of the performance can be eliminated without impairing the flow of the specific performance.

[Feature qB3]
A gaming machine according to feature qB1 or feature qB2,
The production executing means is
Having a plurality of execution means for executing the production,
The first instruction means is
means for instructing execution of the performance data by a specific execution means (audio channel 1) among the plurality of execution means;
The second instruction means
A gaming machine comprising means for instructing execution of the performance data by the specific execution means (audio channel 1).

According to feature qB3, during the delay period described above, the second part of the first effect data is executed by the specific execution means, and when the delay period elapses, the specific execution means executes the second effect data. It is executed by switching to the second part of the first effect data. As a result, it is possible to reliably switch the effect from the first effect data to the second effect data without interrupting the effect.

[Feature qB4]
A gaming machine according to feature qB1 or feature qB2,
The production executing means is
Having a plurality of execution means for executing the production,
The first instruction means is
means for instructing execution of the performance data by a specific execution means (audio channel 2) among the plurality of execution means;
The second instruction means
A gaming machine comprising means for instructing execution of the second effect data by an execution means (audio channel 1) different from the specific execution means.

According to feature qB4, during the delay period described above, the second part of the effect data for the first time is executed by the specific execution means, and when the delay period elapses, execution means different from the specific execution means is used, The effect data for the second time is executed. When the delay period elapses, the unexecuted part of the second part of the first performance data is continuously executed by the specific execution means, so the period during which the unexecuted part is executed is the specific execution. In the means, the effect data for the second time is also executed. As a result, immediately after the effect is switched from the effect data for the first time to the effect data for the second time, the effect for the first effect data and the effect for the second effect data are mixed. Switching can be done smoothly.

<Characteristic qC group>
The feature qC group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the sixth embodiment and modifications of the sixth embodiment.

[Feature qC1]
main control means for performing a win-or-fail lottery (winning lottery) to determine whether or not to generate a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player;
Production control means (MPU 92 of audio light emission control device 90) for controlling at least audio production based on the control signal from the main control means;
effect data storage means for storing first effect data (song A first data A1) and second effect data (song A second data A2);
an effect executing means (sound output LSI 97) capable of using the first effect data and the second effect data to execute the effect;
A gaming machine comprising
The production control means is
first instruction means (means for transmitting a music A first data reproduction start command CA1) for instructing the execution of the first effect data to the effect execution means;
Second instruction means (music A means for transmitting the second data reproduction start command CA2);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature qC1, the first instruction means provided in the effect control means instructs the effect execution means to execute the first effect data, and the effect execution means is executing the first effect data. Then, an instruction to execute the second effect data is given to the effect execution means by the second instruction means provided in the effect control means. The effect executing means receives an instruction to execute the first effect data and starts executing the first effect data, and receives an instruction to execute the second effect data and starts executing the second effect data. However, in the effect execution means, there is a delay of a predetermined period (this period is hereinafter also referred to as a "delay period") from when the instruction to execute the second effect data is received until the execution of the second effect data is started. call) may occur. According to the feature qC1, the timing at which the instruction to execute the second effect data is issued is during the execution of the first effect data. During the period, the unexecuted part is executed and the performance is not interrupted. Therefore, the player does not feel a sense of incongruity that the performance is interrupted. Therefore, according to the feature qC1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature qC2]
The gaming machine according to feature qC1,
A gaming machine, wherein the first effect data and the second effect data each include a portion in which a common effect is recorded.

According to the characteristic qC2, it is possible to repeatedly execute (reproduce) a portion in which a common effect is recorded, for example, a melody portion of a piece of music.

[Feature qC3]
A gaming machine according to feature qC1 or feature qC2,
The production executing means is
Having a plurality of execution means for executing the production,
The first instruction means is
means for instructing execution of the first effect data by a specific execution means (audio channel 1) among the plurality of execution means;
The second instruction means
A gaming machine comprising means for instructing execution of the second effect data by the specific execution means (audio channel 1).

According to feature qC3, during the delay period described above, the above-described unexecuted portion of the first effect data is executed by the specific execution means, and when the delay period elapses, the specific execution means executes the second effect data. is switched to the first effect data and executed. As a result, it is possible to reliably switch the effect from the first effect data to the second effect data without interrupting the effect.

[Feature qC4]
A gaming machine according to feature qC1 or feature qC2,
The production executing means is
Having a plurality of execution means for executing the production,
The first instruction means is
means for instructing execution of the first effect data by a specific execution means (audio channel 1) among the plurality of execution means;
The second instruction means
A gaming machine comprising means for instructing execution of the second effect data by an execution means (audio channel 2) different from the specific execution means.

According to feature qC4, during the delay period described above, the above-described unexecuted portion of the first effect data is executed by the specific execution means, and when the delay period elapses, an execution means different from the specific execution means is executed. Then, the second effect data is executed. When the delay period elapses, the part of the first effect data that continues to the part executed during the delay period (hereinafter also referred to as the continuous part) is continuously executed by the specific execution means, so the continuous part is executed. During the period, the second effect data is also executed in execution means different from the specific execution means. As a result, immediately after the performance is switched from the first performance data to the second performance data, the performance of the first performance data and the performance of the second performance data are mixed to smoothly switch the performance. It can be carried out.

<Feature qD group>
The feature qD group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the sixth embodiment and modifications of the sixth embodiment.

[Feature qD1]
main control means for performing a win-or-fail lottery (winning lottery) to determine whether or not to generate a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player;
Production control means (MPU 92 of audio light emission control device 90) for controlling at least audio production based on the control signal from the main control means;
effect data storage means for storing effect data (song A second data A2);
Production executing means (sound output LSI 97) for executing production using the production data,
A gaming machine comprising
The production control means is
a first instruction means (a means for transmitting a music A second data reproduction start command CA2) for instructing the performance execution means to execute the performance data;
While the effect execution means is executing the effect data (time t3 in FIG. 263), the second instruction means (music A second data reproduction start) instructs the effect means to execute the effect data. means for transmitting command CA2);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature qD1, the first instruction means provided in the effect control means instructs the effect execution means to execute the effect data (hereinafter also referred to as the first instruction), and the effect execution means executes the effect data. During execution, the second instruction means provided in the effect control means instructs the effect execution means to execute the effect data (hereinafter also referred to as the second instruction). Upon receiving the first instruction, the effect executing means starts executing the effect data (hereinafter also referred to as the first effect data), receives the second instruction, and executes the same effect as the first effect data. Execution of data (hereinafter also referred to as second performance data) is started. However, in the effect executing means, there is a predetermined period of delay (this period is hereinafter referred to as " (also called a “delay period”) may occur. According to the feature qD1, the timing of the second instruction is in the middle of execution of the first performance data. , the performance of the unexecuted portion is executed, and the performance is not interrupted. Therefore, the player does not feel a sense of incongruity that the performance is interrupted. Therefore, according to the feature qD1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature qD2]
A gaming machine according to feature qD1,
The production executing means is
Having a plurality of execution means for executing the production,
The first instruction means is
means for instructing execution of the performance data by a specific execution means (audio channel 1) among the plurality of execution means;
The second instruction means
A gaming machine comprising means for instructing execution of the performance data by the specific execution means (audio channel 1).

According to feature qD2, during the delay period described above, the specific execution means executes the above-described unexecuted portion of the first effect data, and when the delay period elapses, the specific execution means executes the second The performance data is switched to the first performance data and executed. As a result, the effect can be reliably switched from the first effect data to the second effect data without interruption of the effect.

[Feature qD3]
A gaming machine according to feature qD1,
The production executing means is
Having a plurality of execution means for executing the production,
The first instruction means is
means for instructing execution of the performance data by a specific execution means (audio channel 2) among the plurality of execution means;
The second instruction means
A gaming machine comprising means for instructing execution of the second effect data by an execution means (audio channel 1) different from the specific execution means.

According to feature qD3, during the delay period described above, the above-described unexecuted part of the first effect data is executed by the specific execution means, and when the delay period elapses, a different effect from that of the specific effect means is executed. The second performance data is executed by the means. When the delay period elapses, a portion of the first rendering data that continues to the portion executed during the delay period (hereinafter also referred to as a continuous portion) is continuously executed by a specific rendering means. is being executed, the second performance data is also executed in a performance means different from the specific performance means. As a result, immediately after the effect is switched from the effect data of the first time to the effect data of the second time, the effect of the effect data of the first time and the effect of the effect data of the second time are mixed, and the effect is produced. You can switch smoothly.

<Feature qE group>
The feature qE group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the sixth embodiment and modifications of the sixth embodiment.

[Feature qE1]
main control means for performing a win-or-fail lottery (winning lottery) to determine whether or not to generate a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player;
Production control means (MPU 92 of audio light emission control device 90) for controlling at least audio production based on the control signal from the main control means;
effect data storage means for storing first effect data (song A first data A1) and second effect data (song A second data A2);
an effect executing means (sound output LSI 97) capable of using the first effect data and the second effect data to execute the effect;
A gaming machine comprising
The first effect data includes a first part (song A first data_main part A12) and a second part (song A first data_reverberation part A13) that is continuous with the first part in the time axis direction. and at least
The production executing means is
a first effect data executing means for executing the first effect data;
At a predetermined timing (time t2+Δt in FIG. 263) within the range from the end of the first portion until the execution position of the first effect data reaches the end of the second portion, the second effect data is executed. a second effect data execution means for
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature qE1, execution of the first effect data is started by the first effect data execution means provided in the effect execution means, and the execution position of the first effect data is shifted from the end of the first portion to the end of the second portion. Execution of the second effect data is started by the second effect data executing means provided in the effect executing means at a predetermined timing within the range until reaching the . In the effect executing means, when the instruction from the effect control means is received and the execution of the second effect data is started, the time interval between the time when the instruction is received from the effect control means and the execution of the second effect data is started. , a delay of a predetermined period (this period is hereinafter also referred to as a "delay period") may occur. According to feature qE1, the first effect data has a second part that is continuous with the first part in the direction of the time axis, and in the effect executing means, the execution position of the first effect data is from the end of the first part onwards. Since the execution of the second effect data is started at a predetermined timing within the range until reaching the end of the second part, the second part of the first effect data is executed during the delay period. Here, as a comparative example, consider the case where the first effect data does not include the second part and the end of the first part coincides with the end of the first effect data. According to the comparative example, in the delay period, the execution has already been completed up to the end of the first effect data, and the effect is not executed, resulting in no effect. Therefore, according to the configuration of the comparative example, the effect may be interrupted between the end of execution of the first effect data and the start of execution of the second effect data. On the other hand, according to the feature qE1, the second part of the first effect data is executed during the delay period, and the effect is not interrupted. Therefore, the player does not feel a sense of incongruity that the performance is interrupted. Therefore, according to the feature qE1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature qE2]
The gaming machine according to feature qE1,
The first part is a part in which the main part of a specific performance is recorded,
The gaming machine, wherein the second portion is a portion in which an effect associated with the main portion is recorded.

According to the feature qE2, since the above-mentioned delay period can be filled with the performance accompanying the main part of the specific performance, the sense of incongruity caused by the interruption of the performance can be eliminated without impairing the flow of the specific performance.

[Feature qE3]
A gaming machine according to feature qE2,
A gaming machine, wherein the second effect data is the same as the data recorded in the first portion.

According to feature qE3, it is possible to repeatedly execute (reproduce) the main part of a specific presentation, for example, the melody part of a piece of music.

[Feature qE4]
A gaming machine according to any one of feature qE1 to feature qE3,
The production executing means is
Having a plurality of execution means for executing the production,
The first effect data execution means is
means for executing the first effect data by a specific execution means (audio channel 1) among the plurality of execution means;
The second effect data execution means is
A gaming machine comprising means for executing the second effect data by the specific executing means (audio channel 1).

According to feature qE4, during the delay period described above, the specific executing means executes the second part of the first effect data, and when the delay period elapses, the specific executing means executes the second effect data. It is executed by switching to the second part of the performance data. As a result, switching from the first effect data to the effect of the second effect data can be reliably performed without interruption of the effect.

[Feature qE5]
A gaming machine according to any one of feature qE1 to feature qE3,
The production executing means is
Having a plurality of execution means for executing the production,
The first effect data execution means is
means for executing the first effect data by a specific execution means (audio channel 1) among the plurality of execution means;
The second effect data execution means is
A gaming machine comprising means for executing the second effect data by executing means (audio channel 2) different from the specific executing means.

According to the feature qE5, during the delay period described above, the second portion of the first effect data is executed by the specific execution means, and when the delay period elapses, the execution means different from the specific execution means executes the second part of the first effect data. 2 effect data is executed. When the delay period elapses, the unexecuted part of the second part of the first effect data is continuously executed by the specific executing means, so that the period during which the unexecuted part is being executed is executed by the specific executing means. The second effect data is also executed by the execution means different from the above. As a result, immediately after the performance is switched from the first performance data to the second performance data, the performance of the first performance data and the performance of the second performance data are mixed to smoothly switch the performance. It can be carried out.

<Characteristic qF group>
The feature qF group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the sixth embodiment and modifications of the sixth embodiment.

[Feature qF1]
main control means for performing a win-or-fail lottery (winning lottery) to determine whether or not to generate a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player;
Production control means (MPU 92 of audio light emission control device 90) for controlling at least audio production based on the control signal from the main control means;
effect data storage means for storing effect data (song A second data A2);
Production executing means (sound output LSI 97) for executing production using the production data,
A gaming machine comprising
The effect data includes a first part (song A second data_main part A21), a second part (song A second data_reverberation part A22) continuous with the first part in the time axis direction, with at least
The production executing means is
a first effect data execution means for executing the effect data;
A second effect that executes the effect data at a predetermined timing (time t3+Δt in FIG. 263) within the range from the end of the first part to the end of the second part. a data execution means;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature qF1, the first effect data execution means provided in the effect execution means starts the execution of the effect data (hereinafter also referred to as the first effect data), and the execution position of the effect data is the end of the first part. After that, at a predetermined timing within the range until reaching the end of the second part, the same effect data as the first effect data executed by the second effect data executing means provided in the effect executing means (hereinafter referred to as the second effect data) (also referred to as effect data) is started. In the performance execution means, when receiving an instruction from the performance control means and starting execution of the second performance data, a period from receiving the instruction from the performance control means to starting the execution of the second performance data. In between, a delay of a predetermined period (this period is hereinafter also referred to as a "delay period") may occur. According to the feature qF1, the effect data has a second part that is continuous with the first part in the direction of the time axis, and in the effect executing means, the first execution position of the effect data is the first part after the end of the first part. Since the execution of the second effect data is started at a predetermined timing within the range until reaching the end of the second part, the second part of the first effect data is executed during the delay period. . Here, as a comparative example, consider a case where the effect data does not include the second part and the end of the first part matches the end of the effect data. According to the comparative example, in the delay period, the execution has already been completed up to the end of the effect data, and the effect is not executed without being executed. Therefore, according to the configuration of the comparative example, the effect may be interrupted between the end of the execution of the effect data for the first time and the start of the execution of the effect data for the second time. On the other hand, according to the feature qF1, during the delay period, the second part of the effect data for the first time is executed, and the effect is not interrupted. Therefore, the player does not feel a sense of incongruity that the performance is interrupted. Therefore, according to the feature qF1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature qF2]
A gaming machine according to feature qF1,
The first part is a part in which the main part of a specific performance is recorded,
The gaming machine, wherein the second portion is a portion in which an effect associated with the main portion is recorded.

According to the feature qF2, since the above-mentioned delay period can be filled with the performance accompanying the main part of the specific performance, the sense of incongruity caused by the interruption of the performance can be eliminated without impairing the flow of the specific performance.

[Feature qF3]
A gaming machine according to feature qF1 or feature qF2,
The production executing means is
Having a plurality of execution means for executing the production,
The first effect data execution means is
means for executing the performance data by a specific execution means (audio channel 1) among the plurality of execution means;
The second effect data execution means is
A gaming machine comprising means for executing the performance data by the specific execution means (audio channel 1).

According to feature qF3, during the delay period described above, the second part of the first effect data is executed by the specific execution means, and when the delay period elapses, the specific execution means executes the second effect data. It is executed by switching to the second part of the first performance data. As a result, it is possible to reliably switch the effect from the first effect data to the second effect data without interrupting the effect.

[Feature qF4]
A gaming machine according to feature qF1 or feature qF2,
The production executing means is
Having a plurality of execution means for executing the production,
The first effect data execution means is
means for executing the performance data by a specific execution means (audio channel 2) among the plurality of execution means;
The second effect data execution means is
A gaming machine comprising means for executing the performance data by means of execution means (sound channel 1) different from the specific execution means.

According to feature qF4, during the delay period described above, the second part of the effect data for the first time is executed by the specific execution means, and when the delay period elapses, execution means different from the specific execution means The effect data for the second time is executed. When the delay period elapses, the unexecuted part of the second part of the first performance data is continuously executed by the specific execution means, so the period during which the unexecuted part is executed is the specific execution. The effect data for the second time is also executed in the execution means different from the means. As a result, immediately after the effect is switched from the effect data of the first time to the effect data of the second time, the effect of the effect data of the first time and the effect of the effect data of the second time are mixed, and the effect is produced. Switching can be done smoothly.

<Feature qG>
The feature qG group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the sixth embodiment and modifications of the sixth embodiment.

[Feature qG1]
main control means for performing a win-or-fail lottery (winning lottery) to determine whether or not to generate a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player;
Production control means (MPU 92 of audio light emission control device 90) for controlling at least audio production based on the control signal from the main control means;
effect data storage means for storing first effect data (song A first data A1) and second effect data (song A second data A2);
an effect executing means (sound output LSI 97) capable of using the first effect data and the second effect data to execute the effect;
A gaming machine comprising
The production executing means is
a first effect data executing means for executing the first effect data;
a second effect data executing means for executing the second effect data during execution of the first effect data (time t2+Δt in FIG. 263);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature qG1, the first effect data execution means provided in the effect execution means starts the execution of the first effect data, and while the first effect data is being executed, the second effect data provided in the effect execution means is executed. Execution of the second effect data is started by the effect data executing means. In the effect execution means, when the command from the effect control means is received and the execution of the second effect data is started, the time interval between the reception of the instruction from the effect control means and the start of execution of the second effect data. , a delay of a predetermined period (this period is hereinafter also referred to as a "delay period") may occur. For this reason, after the execution of the first effect data is completed, a configuration (hereinafter referred to as a comparative example configuration) in which a command to execute the second effect data is received from the effect control means and the execution of the second effect data is started is adopted. Considering this, according to the configuration of the comparative example, the execution of the first effect data has already been completed in the delay period, and there is a problem that the effect is not executed without being executed. On the other hand, according to the feature qG1, in the effect execution means, the execution of the second effect data is started at the timing during the execution of the first effect data. The execution of the first effect data continues until it is started. Therefore, according to the feature qG1, even if the delay period occurs, since the first effect data is continuously executed during the delay period, the effect is not interrupted. Therefore, the player does not feel a sense of incongruity that the performance is interrupted. Therefore, according to the feature qG1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature qG2]
A gaming machine according to feature qG1,
A gaming machine, wherein the first effect data and the second effect data each include a portion in which a common effect is recorded.

According to the feature qG2, it is possible to repeatedly execute (reproduce) a portion in which a common effect is recorded, for example, a melody portion of a piece of music.

[Feature qG3]
A gaming machine according to feature qG1 or feature qG2,
The production executing means is
Having a plurality of execution means for executing the production,
The first effect data execution means is
means for executing the first effect data by a specific execution means (audio channel 1) among the plurality of execution means;
The second effect data execution means is
A gaming machine comprising means for executing the second effect data by the specific executing means (audio channel 1).

According to feature qG3, during the delay period described above, the specific execution means executes the first effect data, and when the delay period elapses, the specific execution means executes the second effect data. As a result, it is possible to reliably switch the effect from the first effect data to the second effect data without interrupting the effect.

[Feature qG4]
A gaming machine according to feature qG1 or feature qG2,
The production executing means is
Having a plurality of execution means for executing the production,
The first effect data execution means is
means for executing the first effect data by a specific execution means (audio channel 1) among the plurality of execution means;
The second effect data execution means is
A gaming machine comprising means for executing the second effect data by executing means (audio channel 2) different from the specific executing means.

According to feature qG4, during the delay period described above, the first effect data is executed by the specific execution means, and when the delay period elapses, the second effect data is executed by the effect means different from the specific effect means. executed. When the delay period elapses, the part of the first effect data that continues to the part executed during the delay period (hereinafter also referred to as the continuous part) is continuously executed by the specific effect means, so the continuous part is executed. During the period, the second effect data is also executed in the specific effect means and the different effect means. As a result, immediately after the performance is switched from the first performance data to the second performance data, the performance of the first performance data and the performance of the second performance data are mixed to smoothly switch the performance. It can be carried out.

<Characteristic qH group>
The feature qH group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the sixth embodiment and modifications of the sixth embodiment.

[Feature qH1]
a main control means for performing a winning lottery (winning lottery) to determine whether or not to generate a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player;
Production control means (MPU 92 of audio light emission control device 90) for controlling at least audio production based on the control signal from the main control means;
effect data storage means for storing effect data (song A second data A2);
Production executing means (sound output LSI 97) for executing production using the production data,
A gaming machine comprising
The production executing means is
a first effect data execution means for executing the effect data;
a second effect data execution means for executing the effect data during execution of the effect data (time t3+Δt in FIG. 263);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature qH1, the effect executing means starts to execute the effect data (hereinafter also referred to as the first effect data), and while the effect data is being executed, the same effect as the first effect data is executed. Execution of the data (hereinafter also referred to as second performance data) is started. In the performance execution means, when receiving an instruction from the performance control means and starting execution of the second performance data, a period from receiving the instruction from the performance control means to starting the execution of the second performance data. In between, a delay of a predetermined period (this period is hereinafter also referred to as a "delay period") may occur. Therefore, after the execution of the effect data for the first time is completed, an instruction to execute the effect data for the second time is received from the effect control means and the execution of the effect data for the second time is started (hereinafter referred to as the configuration of the comparative example). ), according to the configuration of the comparative example, in the delay period, the execution has already finished up to the end of the first performance data, and the performance is not executed and there is no performance. there were. On the other hand, according to the feature qH1, the effect executing means starts executing the second effect data at the timing during the execution of the first effect data. The execution of the effect data for the first time is continued until the execution of is started. Therefore, according to the feature qH1, even if the delay period occurs, since the first performance data is continuously executed during the delay period, the performance is not interrupted. Therefore, the player does not feel a sense of incongruity that the performance is interrupted. Therefore, according to the feature qH1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature qH2]
A gaming machine according to feature qH1,
The production executing means is
Having a plurality of execution means for executing the production,
The first effect data execution means is
means for executing the performance data by a specific execution means (audio channel 1) among the plurality of execution means;
The second effect data execution means is
A gaming machine comprising means for executing the performance data by the specific execution means (audio channel 1).

According to feature qH2, during the delay period described above, the specific execution means continues to execute the first effect data, and when the delay period elapses, the specific execution means executes the second effect data. is switched to the first performance data and executed. As a result, it is possible to reliably switch the effect from the first effect data to the second effect data without interrupting the effect.

[Feature qH3]
A gaming machine according to feature qH1,
The production executing means is
Having a plurality of execution means for executing the production,
The first effect data execution means is
means for executing the performance data by a specific execution means (audio channel 2) among the plurality of execution means;
The second effect data execution means is
A gaming machine comprising means for executing the performance data by means of execution means (sound channel 1) different from the specific execution means.

According to feature qH3, during the delay period described above, the specific execution means executes the first performance data, and when the delay period elapses, the second performance data is executed by an execution means different from the specific execution means. data is executed. When the delay period elapses, the unexecuted part of the first performance data is continuously executed by the specific execution means, so the period during which the unexecuted part is executed differs from the specific execution means. The effect data for the second time is also executed by the execution means. As a result, immediately after the effect is switched from the effect data of the first time to the effect data of the second time, the effect of the effect data of the first time and the effect of the effect data of the second time are mixed, and the effect is produced. You can switch smoothly.

<Feature qI group>
The feature qI group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the sixth embodiment and modifications of the sixth embodiment.

[Feature qI1]
main control means for performing a win-or-fail lottery (winning lottery) to determine whether or not to generate a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player;
Production control means (MPU 92 of audio light emission control device 90) for controlling at least audio production based on the control signal from the main control means;
Effect execution means (sound output LSI 97 + voice data ROM 98);
A gaming machine comprising
The production control means is
first instruction means (means for transmitting a music A first data reproduction start command CA1) for instructing the execution of the first effect data to the effect execution means;
second instruction means (means for transmitting a music A second data reproduction start command CA2) for instructing the effect executing means to execute the second effect data following the first effect data;
with
The production executing means is
a first effect data execution means for executing the first effect data upon receiving an instruction to execute the first effect data from the effect control means;
specific effect data execution means for executing specific effect data (song A first data_reverberation part A13) following the first effect data when execution of the first effect data is completed;
a second effect data execution means for executing the second effect data upon receiving an instruction to execute the second effect data from the effect control means;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the characteristic qI1, the execution of the first effect data is started by the first effect data execution means provided in the effect execution means, triggered by receiving an instruction to execute the first effect data from the effect control means, When the execution of the first performance data is finished, the execution of the specific performance data is started following the first performance data by the specific performance data execution means provided in the performance execution means. Then, the execution of the second effect data is started by the second effect data execution means provided in the effect execution means, triggered by receiving an instruction to execute the second effect data from the effect control means. In the effect executing means, when the instruction from the effect control means is received and the execution of the second effect data is started, the time interval between the time when the instruction is received from the effect control means and the execution of the second effect data is started. , a delay of a predetermined period (this period is hereinafter also referred to as a "delay period") may occur. According to the feature qI1, when the execution of the first effect data is completed, the specific effect data is executed following the first effect data. When the execution of is completed, the specific effect data is executed during the delay period. Here, as a comparative example, consider a configuration in which the effect executing means does not execute the specific effect data when the execution of the first effect data is completed. According to the comparative example, when the second performance data is executed after the execution of the first performance data is completed, the performance is not executed during the delay period, resulting in no performance. Therefore, according to the configuration of the comparative example, the effect may be interrupted between the end of execution of the first effect data and the start of execution of the second effect data. On the other hand, according to the feature qI1, the specific effect data is executed during the delay period, and the effect is not interrupted. Therefore, the player does not feel a sense of incongruity that the performance is interrupted. Therefore, according to the feature qI1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature qI2]
A gaming machine according to feature qI1,
A game machine, wherein the specific effect data is effect data (music A first data_reverberation part A13) representing a effect following an end-time effect represented by an end-time portion of the first effect data. .

According to the feature qI2, since the delay period described above can be filled with the performance following the end performance indicated by the end time part of the first performance data, the sense of discomfort caused by the interruption of the performance can be eliminated without impairing the flow of the performance. more can be resolved.

[Feature qI3]
A gaming machine according to feature qI1 or feature qI2,
The production executing means is
Having a plurality of execution means for executing the production,
The first effect data execution means is
means for executing the first effect data by a specific execution means (audio channel 1) among the plurality of execution means;
The specific effect data execution means is
A means for executing the specific effect data by the specific execution means (audio channel 1),
The second effect data execution means is
A gaming machine comprising means for executing the second effect data by the specific executing means (audio channel 1).

According to feature qI3, the first effect data is executed by the specific execution means, the specific effect data is executed by the specific execution means during the delay period described above, and the specific effect data is executed by the specific execution means when the delay period elapses. , the second effect data is executed. As a result, switching from the first effect data to the effect of the second effect data can be reliably performed without interruption of the effect.

[Feature qI4]
A gaming machine according to feature qI1 or feature qI2,
The production executing means is
Having a plurality of execution means for executing the production,
The first effect data execution means is
means for executing the first effect data by a specific execution means (audio channel 1) among the plurality of execution means;
The specific effect data execution means is
A means for executing the specific effect data by the specific execution means (audio channel 1),
The second effect data execution means is
A gaming machine comprising means for executing the second effect data by executing means (audio channel 2) different from the specific executing means.

According to feature qI4, the first effect data is executed by the specific execution means, the specific effect data is executed by the specific execution means during the delay period described above, and the specific execution means and is executed by a different execution means. When the delay period elapses, the unexecuted portion of the specific effect data is continuously executed by the specific execution means, so the period during which the unexecuted portion is executed is the execution means different from the specific execution means. , the second effect data is also executed. As a result, immediately after the performance is switched from the first performance data to the second performance data, the performance of the specific performance data and the performance of the second performance data are mixed to smoothly switch the performance. be able to.

<Characteristic qJ group>
The feature qJ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the sixth embodiment and modifications of the sixth embodiment.

[Feature qJ1]
main control means for performing a win-or-fail lottery (winning lottery) to determine whether or not to generate a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player;
Production control means (MPU 92 of audio light emission control device 90) for controlling at least audio production based on the control signal from the main control means;
effect execution means (sound output LSI 97 + sound data ROM 98) for executing effect using effect data (music A second data_main part A21);
A gaming machine comprising
The production control means is
a first instruction means (means for transmitting a music A second data reproduction start command CA2) for giving a first instruction to the effect executing means to execute the effect;
a second instruction means (means for transmitting a music A second data reproduction start command CA2) for performing a second instruction to execute the effect when the effect executed according to the first instruction ends;
with
The production executing means is
effect data execution means for executing the effect data when receiving the first instruction or the second instruction from the effect control means;
specific effect data execution means for executing specific effect data (song A second data_reverberation part A22) following the effect data when execution of the effect data is completed;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature qJ1, the first instruction means provided in the effect control means gives the first instruction to execute the effect to the effect execution means, and then the second instruction means provided in the effect control means causes the effect to be executed. is made to the effect executing means. A performance execution means starts execution of performance data when receiving a first instruction, and starts execution of specific performance data following the performance data when execution of the performance data is completed. Then, the performance executing means starts executing the performance data when receiving the second instruction, and starts executing the specific performance data following the performance data when the execution of the performance data is finished. In the performance executing means, a delay of a predetermined period (this period is hereinafter also referred to as a ``delay period'') occurs from when the performance execution instruction is received until the performance data is started. There is According to the feature qJ1, when the performance data are repeatedly executed, the execution of the specific performance data is started following the performance data, so that the specific performance data is executed during the delay period and the performance is not interrupted. Therefore, the player does not feel a sense of incongruity that the performance is interrupted. Therefore, according to the feature qJ1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature qJ2]
The gaming machine according to feature qJ1,
A gaming machine, wherein the specific performance data is performance data representing a performance following an end-time performance represented by an end-time portion of the performance data.

According to the feature qJ2, since the delay period described above can be filled with the performance following the end time performance represented by the end time part of the performance data, the sense of incongruity caused by the interruption of the performance can be further eliminated without impairing the flow of the performance. can do.

[Feature qJ3]
A gaming machine according to feature qJ1 or feature qJ2,
The production executing means is
Having a plurality of execution means for executing the production,
The performance data execution means is
A gaming machine comprising means for executing the performance data by a specific execution means (audio channel 1) among the plurality of execution means.

According to the feature qJ3, repeated performance data is executed by the same specific execution means. As a result, the effect data can be easily repeatedly executed.

[Feature qJ4]
A gaming machine according to feature qJ1 or feature qJ2,
The production executing means is
Having a plurality of execution means for executing the production,
The performance data execution means is
A specific execution means (audio channel 2) out of the plurality of execution means executes the performance data for the n-th time (n is a positive integer), and the performance data is executed for the n+1 time by the specific execution means. means for performing by means of execution (audio channel 1) different from
The specific effect data execution means is
A gaming machine comprising means for executing the specific performance data by the specific execution means.

According to the feature qJ4, the specific execution means executes the n-th (n is a positive integer) effect data, the specific effect data is executed by the specific execution means during the delay period, and the delay period elapses. Sometimes, the (n+1)-th performance data is executed by an execution means different from the specific execution means. When the delay period elapses, the unexecuted part of the specific effect data is continuously executed by the specific execution means, so the period during which the unexecuted part is executed is the execution means different from the specific execution means. , the n+1-th performance data is also executed. As a result, immediately after the effect is switched from the n-th effect data to the n+1-th effect data, the effect of the specific effect data and the effect of the n+1-th effect data are mixed, and the effect is switched. can be done smoothly.

<Feature qK group>
The feature qK group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the sixth embodiment and modifications of the sixth embodiment.

[Feature qK1]
main control means for performing a win-or-fail lottery (winning lottery) to determine whether or not to generate a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player;
Production control means (MPU 92 of audio light emission control device 90) for controlling at least audio production based on the control signal from the main control means;
first effect data (song A first data A1) comprising a specific portion (song A first data_main portion A12) and a related portion related to the specific portion (song A first data_intro portion A11); effect data storage means for storing second effect data (song A second data A2) including the specific part (song A second data_main part A21);
an effect executing means (sound output LSI 97) capable of using the first effect data and the second effect data to execute the effect;
A gaming machine comprising
The production control means is
first instruction means (means for transmitting a music A first data reproduction start command CA1) for instructing the execution of the first effect data to the effect execution means;
second instruction means (means for transmitting a music A second data reproduction start command CA2) for instructing execution of the second effect data when execution of the first effect data is completed in the effect execution means;
Third instruction means (music A second data reproduction start command CA2) for instructing the effect execution means to execute the second effect data when the effect execution means ends the execution of the second effect data. ), and
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature qK1, the first instruction means provided in the effect control means instructs the effect execution means to execute the first effect data, and the effect execution means ends the execution of the first effect data. Second, the second instruction means provided in the effect control means instructs the effect execution means to execute the second effect data. Further, when the execution of the second effect data is completed in the effect execution means, the third instruction means provided in the effect control means instructs the effect execution means to execute the second effect data. The effect executing means executes the first effect data upon receiving the instruction to execute the first effect data, and repeatedly executes the second effect data by repeatedly receiving the instruction to execute the second effect data. As a result, the execution of the first effect data is performed once, and the execution of the second effect data is performed a plurality of times. As a result, the specific portion included in both the first effect data and the second effect data can be repeatedly executed three times or more. For example, when the related part of the first effect data is the intro part of the music and the specific part of the first effect data is the melody part of the music, according to the feature qK1, the intro part is reproduced, followed by the melody part. can be reproduced three times or more, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Feature qK2]
A gaming machine according to feature qK1,
The first effect data further comprises an additional part (song A first data_reverberation part A13) positioned at the end of the first effect data and neither the specific part nor the related part,
The second effect data further includes an additional part (song A second data_reverberation part A22) that is continuous with the specific part of the second effect data in the time axis direction and is not the specific part,
The second instruction means
Within a predetermined period including the timing at which the execution position of the first effect data in the effect execution means reaches the start end of the additional part provided in the first effect data (time t2 in FIG. 263), the effect execution means and means for instructing execution of the second effect data,
The third instruction means is
Within a predetermined period including the timing at which the execution position of the second effect data in the effect execution means reaches the end of the additional portion included in the second effect data (time t3 in FIG. 263), the effect execution means means for instructing execution of the second effect data by
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature qK2, in the effect executing means, a predetermined period of delay ( This period, hereinafter also referred to as a "delay period") may occur. According to the feature qK2, since the first effect data has the additional part at the endmost side, the additional part of the first effect data is executed during the delay period, and the effect is not interrupted. In addition, a delay period may also occur between the n-th (n is a plural number) instruction to execute the second effect data and the start of the n-th execution of the second effect data. According to the feature qK2, since the second effect data has an additional part that is continuous in the time axis direction with respect to the specific part, the additional part of the second effect data is executed during the delay period, and the effect can be interrupted. do not have. As a result of these, the player does not feel a sense of incongruity that the performance is interrupted. Therefore, according to the feature qK2, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature qK3]
A gaming machine according to feature qK2,
The specific part is a part in which the main part of a specific production is recorded,
The additional portion included in the first effect data is a portion in which an effect associated with the main part of the specific effect is recorded,
The gaming machine, wherein the additional part included in the second effect data is a part in which an effect associated with the main part of the specific effect is recorded.

According to the feature qK3, since the above-mentioned delay period can be filled with the performance accompanying the main part of the specific performance, the sense of incongruity caused by the interruption of the performance can be eliminated without impairing the flow of the specific performance. Further, according to the feature qK3, it is possible to repeatedly execute (reproduce) the main part of a specific presentation, for example, the melody part of a piece of music.

<Feature qL group>
The feature qL group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the sixth embodiment and modifications of the sixth embodiment.

[Feature qL1]
main control means for performing a win-or-fail lottery (winning lottery) to determine whether or not to generate a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player;
Production control means (MPU 92 of audio light emission control device 90) for controlling at least audio production based on the control signal from the main control means;
effect data storage means for storing first effect data (song A first data A1) and second effect data (song A second data A2);
Effect execution means (sound output LSI 97), which is means for executing a performance based on a control signal from the performance control means, and which can use the first performance data and the second performance data for execution of the performance ,
A gaming machine comprising
The first effect data includes a first part (song A first data_main part A12) and a second part (song A first data_reverberation part A13) that is continuous with the first part in the time axis direction. and at least
The production executing means is
A first effect executing means for executing the first effect data,
A period (delay period Δt) from the timing when the execution position of the first effect data reaches the end of the first part to the start of execution of the second effect data in the effect executing means exceeds a predetermined time. , a specific state (silent state) in which both the first effect data and the second effect data are not executed, and when the period is equal to or less than the predetermined time, the specific state is not formed and the second effect data is not executed. 2 can execute performance data,
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature qL1, the period from the timing when the execution position of the first effect data in the effect execution means reaches the end of the first part to the start of execution of the second effect data in the effect execution means is a predetermined When the time is exceeded, a specific state can occur in which both the first effect data and the second effect data are not executed. On the other hand, when the period is equal to or less than the predetermined time, the second effect data can be executed without forming the specific state. For this reason, when the period exceeds a predetermined time, for example, the time length corresponding to the second part, the specified state occurs. not be in a state. Thus, the appearance of the specific state can be controlled by adjusting the timing of starting the execution of the second effect data. For example, when the possibility (expectation) of winning a big win in a winning lottery is high, the timing of starting the execution of the second performance data is delayed so that the period exceeds the predetermined time, and the big win is won. When the degree of expectation is not high, the timing of starting the execution of the second effect data is advanced, and the period is set to be equal to or less than the predetermined time, so that when a specific state occurs in the player, It is possible to create a sense of anticipation that you have won the jackpot. Therefore, according to the feature qL1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature qL2]
A gaming machine according to feature qL1,
The production control means is
first instructing means (means for transmitting a music A first data reproduction start command CA1) for instructing the execution of the first effect data to the effect executing means;
Within a predetermined period including the timing when the execution position of the first effect data in the effect execution means reaches the end of the first part (time t2 in FIG. 263), the second effect is issued to the effect execution means second instruction means for instructing execution of data (means for transmitting a music A second data reproduction start command CA2);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature qL2, the first instruction means provided in the effect control means instructs the effect execution means to execute the first effect data, and the execution position of the first effect data in the effect execution means is the first portion. Within a predetermined period including the timing of reaching the end of , the second instruction means provided in the effect control means instructs the effect execution means to execute the second effect data. In the effect execution means, a delay of a predetermined period (hereinafter also referred to as a "delay period") between the reception of the instruction to execute the second effect data and the start of the execution of the second effect data. may occur. According to the feature qL2, the first effect data includes the second part that is continuous with the first part in the time axis direction. uninterrupted. Therefore, the player does not feel a sense of incongruity that the performance is interrupted. Therefore, according to the feature qL2, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature qL3]
A gaming machine according to feature qL2,
The first part is a part in which the main part of a specific performance is recorded,
The gaming machine, wherein the second portion is a portion in which an effect associated with the main portion is recorded.

According to the feature qL3, since the above-described delay period can be filled with the performance accompanying the main part of the specific performance, the sense of incongruity caused by the interruption of the performance can be eliminated without impairing the flow of the specific performance.

[Feature qL4]
A gaming machine according to feature qL3,
A gaming machine, wherein the second effect data is the same as the data recorded in the first portion.

According to feature qL4, it is possible to repeatedly execute (reproduce) the main part of a specific presentation, for example, the melody part of a piece of music.

[Feature qL5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features qL2 to feature qL4,
The production executing means is
Having a plurality of execution means for executing the production,
The first instruction means is
means for instructing execution of the first effect data by a specific execution means (audio channel 1) among the plurality of execution means;
The second instruction means
A gaming machine comprising means for instructing execution of the second effect data by the specific execution means (audio channel 1).

According to the characteristic qL5, during the delay period described above, the specific executing means executes the second portion of the first effect data, and when the delay period elapses, the specific executing means executes the second effect data. It is executed by switching to the second part of the performance data. As a result, it is possible to reliably switch the effect from the first effect data to the second effect data without interrupting the effect.

[Feature qL6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features qL2 to feature qL4,
The production executing means is
Having a plurality of execution means for executing the production,
The first instruction means is
means for instructing execution of the first effect data by a specific execution means (audio channel 1) among the plurality of execution means;
The second instruction means
A gaming machine comprising means for instructing execution of the second effect data by an execution means (audio channel 2) different from the specific execution means.

According to the feature qL6, during the delay period described above, the second part of the first effect data is executed by the specific execution means, and when the delay period elapses, the execution means different from the specific execution means executes the second part. 2 effect data is executed. When the delay period elapses, the unexecuted part of the second part of the first effect data is continuously executed by the specific executing means, so that the period during which the unexecuted part is being executed is executed by the specific executing means. The second effect data is also executed by the execution means different from the above. As a result, immediately after the performance is switched from the first performance data to the second performance data, the performance of the first performance data and the performance of the second performance data are mixed to smoothly switch the performance. It can be carried out.

<Feature qM group>
The feature qM group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the sixth embodiment and modifications of the sixth embodiment.

[Feature qM1]
main control means for performing a win-or-fail lottery (winning lottery) to determine whether or not to generate a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player;
Production control means (MPU 92 of audio light emission control device 90) for controlling at least audio production based on the control signal from the main control means;
effect data storage means for storing first effect data (song A first data A1) and second effect data (song A second data A2);
an effect executing means (sound output LSI 97) capable of using the first effect data and the second effect data to execute the effect;
A gaming machine comprising
The production executing means is
A first execution means (audio channel 1) and a second execution means (audio channel 2) for executing the production,
The production control means is
first instruction means (means for transmitting a music A first data reproduction start command CA1) for instructing the effect execution means to execute the first effect data using the first execution means;
While the first effect data is being executed in the effect executing means (time t2 in FIG. 263), the second effect data is executed using the second executing means for the effect executing means. a second instruction means (means for transmitting a music A second data reproduction start command CA2) for instructing
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature qM1, the first instruction means provided in the effect control means instructs the effect execution means to execute the first effect data, and the effect execution means is executing the first effect data. Then, an instruction to execute the second effect data is given to the effect execution means by the second instruction means provided in the effect control means. The effect executing means receives an instruction to execute the first effect data and starts executing the first effect data, and receives an instruction to execute the second effect data and starts executing the second effect data. However, in the effect executing means, a delay of a predetermined period (this period is hereinafter referred to as a "delay period") occurs after receiving an instruction to execute the second effect data until the execution of the second effect data is started. ) may occur. According to the feature qM1, the timing at which the instruction to execute the second effect data is issued is during the execution of the first effect data, so the first effect data has a portion that has not been executed yet, resulting in a delay. During the period, the unexecuted part is executed and the performance is not interrupted. Therefore, the player does not feel a sense of incongruity that the performance is interrupted. Therefore, according to the feature qM1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the feature qM1, during the delay period described above, the first execution means executes the above-described unexecuted portion of the first effect data, and when the delay period elapses, the first execution means is different. The second performance data is executed by the second executing means. When the delay period elapses, a part of the first effect data that continues to the part executed during the delay period (hereinafter also referred to as a continuous part) is continuously executed by the first execution means, so that the continuous part is executed. During the period, the second performance data is also executed by the second execution means. As a result, immediately after the performance is switched from the first performance data to the second performance data, the performance of the first performance data and the performance of the second performance data are mixed to smoothly switch the performance. It can be carried out.

[Feature qM2]
A gaming machine according to feature qM1,
A gaming machine, wherein the first effect data and the second effect data each include a portion in which a common effect is recorded.

According to the feature qM2, it is possible to repeatedly execute (reproduce) a portion in which a common effect is recorded, for example, a melody portion of a piece of music.

<Characteristic rA group>
The feature rA group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the seventh embodiment and modifications 1 to 11 thereof.

[Feature rA1]
a displacement means (power switch 85a) capable of being displaced between a first position (OFF position) and a second position (ON position);
a state determination means capable of determining the state of the displacement means;
When power is supplied to the gaming machine, if the state determination means determines that the power switch 85a is in the first state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the OFF state), the first processing (RTC effect If it is determined to be in the second state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the ON state), the second processing (the RTC effect execution permission flag is turned off) is executed. a process execution means for executing a process to turn ON;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to this feature, when power is supplied to the gaming machine, the first process is executed if the state determining means determines that the state is in the first state, and if it is determined that the state is in the second state. is provided with the process execution means for executing the second process, it is possible to switch the contents of the process to be executed according to the state of the displacement means. As a result, appropriate processing can be executed according to the state of the displacement means.

[Feature rA2]
The gaming machine according to feature rA1,
Predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect (RTC effect) based on the elapsed time since the game machine was started,
The processing executing means executes the predetermined effect by the predetermined effect executing means when the state determining means determines that the power switch 85a is in the first state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the OFF state). (turns off the RTC effect execution permission flag).

According to this feature, since the game machine is provided with a predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect based on the elapsed time (activation elapsed time) after the game machine is started, a plurality of game machines are installed in the island facility. In the gaming hall where the island facility is located, when the plurality of gaming machines are activated all at once (simultaneously) by turning on the island power switch of the island facility, the startup progress of each gaming machine installed in the island facility Since the time is the same, it is possible to start the predetermined effects all at once (simultaneously).

However, after turning on the island power switch to activate all of the game machines installed in the island facility (at the same time), it is possible to displace one game machine for the purpose of, for example, changing the setting information. The means (power switch 85a) is individually displaced from the second position (ON position) to the first position (OFF position) to cut off the power supply, and the displacement means (power switch 85a) is again turned to the first position (OFF). position) to the second position (ON position), the elapsed startup time of the one gaming machine will deviate from the elapsed startup time of the other gaming machines installed in the island facility. As a result, there arises a problem that the timing of starting the predetermined effect in the one gaming machine is different from that of the other gaming machine. In particular, since it takes about one minute to change the setting information, the one game machine whose setting information is changed starts the predetermined effect about one minute later than the other game machine. become. In general, since the time of the predetermined effect is about 5 minutes, the predetermined effect in the one game machine whose setting information is changed is duplicated with a deviation from the predetermined effect in the other game machine. However, there is a problem in that the player interferes with the player, giving the player a sense of displeasure.

Therefore, in this feature, the process execution means includes means for setting a state in which execution of the predetermined effect by the predetermined effect execution means is disabled when the state determination means determines that the state is the first state. (Power switch 85a) is displaced from the second position (ON position) to the first position (OFF position) to cut off the power supply, and then the displacing means (power switch 85a) is displaced from the first position (OFF position). When the game machine is displaced to the second position (ON position) and activated, the game machine is set to a state in which the predetermined effect cannot be executed. As a result, since the predetermined effect is not executed in the one gaming machine activated by operating the displacement means (power switch 85a), the predetermined effect in the one gaming machine becomes the predetermined effect in the other gaming machine. It is possible to suppress overlapping execution and interference in a state deviated from, and it is possible to suppress giving discomfort to the player.

On the other hand, while the displacement means (power switch 85a) of the gaming machine remains in the second position (ON position), the island power switch is displaced from ON to OFF. to ON, the gaming machine is set to a state capable of executing a predetermined effect, so that it is the same (or substantially the same) as the other gaming machines installed in the island facility. It becomes possible to execute a predetermined performance at the timing.

[Feature rA3]
A gaming machine according to feature rA1 or feature rA2,
Predetermined information changing means capable of changing predetermined information (setting information) that is information that determines one privilege granting condition out of a plurality of privilege granting conditions;
a ball entry means for allowing a game ball to enter;
special information acquisition means capable of acquiring special information triggered by the entry of a game ball into said ball entry means;
privilege grant determination means capable of executing privilege grant determination, which is a determination as to whether or not the special information satisfies the privilege grant condition corresponding to the predetermined information;
privilege granting means capable of executing a privilege granting mode (opening/closing execution mode) for granting a privilege to a player when it is determined that the special information satisfies the privilege granting condition;
a suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a suggestive effect (stationary suggestive effect) that is a effect suggesting that the predetermined information has not been changed;
with
The process executing means executes the suggestive effect by the suggestive effect executing means when the state determining means determines that the power switch 85a is in the first state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is in the OFF state). (turns off a deferment suggestion effect execution permission flag).

In amusement halls where multiple gaming machines are installed on an island facility and power supply to the multiple gaming machines is simultaneously started and stopped by an island power switch of the island facility, the gaming machines are individually operated. If the power supply is cut off or started by operating the displacement means (power switch 85a), there is a high possibility that the predetermined information has been changed since the previous day (or the previous business day).

According to this feature, the process executing means includes means for setting a state in which execution of the suggestive effect by the suggestive effect executing means is disabled when the state determining means determines that the suggestive effect is in the first state. When the means determines that the state is the first state (when the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is determined to be the OFF state), that is, when the previous power failure occurred, the displacement means (the power switch In the case of the operation of 85a), the suggestive effect will not be executed in the game machine after the next activation. Therefore, even though the predetermined information has actually been changed since the previous day (or the previous business day), the suggestive effect is executed in the gaming machine, and the player cannot change the predetermined information in the gaming machine. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the user misunderstands that the device is left untouched.

[Feature rA4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features rA1 to rA3,
Equipped with movable means (movable object for production 99) that can move within a predetermined range,
The process execution means performs a process of causing the movable means to perform a predetermined operation when the state determination means determines that the power switch 85a is in the second state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the ON state). A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for performing.

According to this feature, the process execution means includes means for executing a process for causing the movable means to execute a predetermined action when the state determination means determines that the state is the second state. To easily confirm whether a displacement means is determined to be in a first state or a second state by visually confirming whether or not a movable means has executed a predetermined operation. can be done.

Then, when the manager or the like notices that the displacement means is determined to be in the second state, the manager or the like performs work corresponding to the determination that the displacement means is in the second state in the game machine. be able to.

Specifically, for example, in a game hall that is not a game hall that simultaneously starts and stops power supply to a plurality of game machines by an island power switch of an island facility, the displacement means If the power switch 85a remains ON, there is a possibility that the gaming machine has been illegally operated or remodeled by an illegal person such as a goto master. Therefore, in such a gaming hall, the manager or the like of the gaming hall can temporarily suspend the operation of the gaming machine and inspect the gaming machine.

[Feature rA5]
The gaming machine according to feature rA4,
A gaming machine, wherein the process for causing the movable means to perform the predetermined action includes a process for moving the movable means in a predetermined direction by a predetermined amount.

According to this feature, the process for causing the movable means to perform the predetermined action includes a process for moving the movable means in a predetermined direction by a predetermined amount. Even if it is not possible to visually confirm the movable means, the displacement means is in the first state by visually confirming whether or not the movable means in the state where the predetermined operation has been completed has moved by a predetermined amount. It is possible to more easily confirm whether it is determined that the state is the state or whether the state is the second state.

[Feature rA6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features rA1 to rA5,
Provided with notification means capable of executing notification processing,
The process execution means causes the notification means to execute a predetermined notification process when the state determination means determines that the power switch 85a is in the second state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the ON state). A gaming machine characterized by comprising a means.

According to this feature, the process execution means includes means for causing the notification means to execute a predetermined notification process when the state determination means determines that the state is the second state. can be used to make the user aware that the displacement means is determined to be in the second state. As a result, the manager or the like can perform work corresponding to the determination that the displacement means is in the second state in the gaming machine.

Specifically, for example, in a game hall that is not a game hall that simultaneously starts and stops power supply to a plurality of game machines by an island power switch of an island facility, the displacement means If the power switch 85a remains ON, there is a possibility that the gaming machine has been illegally operated or remodeled by an illegal person such as a goto master. Therefore, in such a gaming hall, the manager or the like of the gaming hall can temporarily suspend the operation of the gaming machine and inspect the gaming machine.

[Feature rA7]
A gaming machine according to any one of features rA1 to rA6,
Equipped with information output means (external output terminal) capable of outputting information to an external device (hall computer),
The processing execution means causes the information output means to output predetermined information when the state determination means determines that the power switch 85a is in the second state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the ON state). A gaming machine characterized by comprising a means.

According to this feature, the process execution means includes means for outputting predetermined information to the information output means when the state determination means determines that the state is the second state. can be used to make the user aware that the displacement means is determined to be in the second state. As a result, the manager or the like can perform work corresponding to the determination that the displacement means is in the second state in the gaming machine.

Specifically, for example, in a game hall that is not a game hall that simultaneously starts and stops power supply to a plurality of game machines by an island power switch of an island facility, the displacement means If the power switch 85a remains ON, there is a possibility that the gaming machine has been illegally operated or remodeled by an illegal person such as a goto master. Therefore, in such a gaming hall, the manager or the like of the gaming hall can temporarily suspend the operation of the gaming machine and inspect the gaming machine.

[Feature rA8]
A gaming machine according to any one of features rA1 to rA7,
The processing execution means shifts the displacement means (power switch 85a) to the second state when the state determination means determines that the power switch 85a is in the second state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the ON state). A game machine characterized by comprising means for displacing to position 1 (OFF position).

According to this feature, the process execution means includes means for displacing the displacement means to the first position when the state determination means determines that the state is the second state. When determined, the displacement means is displaced to the first position, and the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off.
Therefore, it is possible to prevent a game from being played in the gaming machine in a state in which there is a possibility of an abnormality in which the displacement means is determined to be in the second state.

Specifically, for example, in a game hall that is not a game hall that simultaneously starts and stops power supply to a plurality of game machines by an island power switch of an island facility, the displacement means If the power switch 85a remains ON, there is a possibility that the gaming machine has been illegally operated or remodeled by an illegal person such as a goto master. According to this feature, if the state of the displacement means (power switch 85a) at the time of the previous power failure was in an abnormal ON state, the displacement means (power switch 85a) is forcibly turned on at the next start-up. It is displaced to position 1 (OFF state), and the power supply to the game machine is forcibly cut off. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a game from being played on the gaming machine in a state where there is a possibility of an abnormality.

[Feature rA9]
A gaming machine according to any one of features rA1 to rA8,
An image display means capable of displaying an image is provided,
The processing execution means displays a predetermined image (activation demonstration image) when the state determination means determines that the power switch 85a is in the first state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the OFF state). A gaming machine characterized by comprising a means for displaying on the means.

According to this feature, the process execution means has means for displaying the predetermined image on the image display means when the state determination means determines that the state is the first state. By confirming whether or not the predetermined image is displayed on the means, it is possible to confirm whether the displacement means is determined to be in the first state or the second state.

Then, when the manager or the like notices that the displacement means is determined to be in the second state, the manager or the like performs work corresponding to the determination that the displacement means is in the second state in the game machine. be able to.

Specifically, for example, in a game hall that is not a game hall that simultaneously starts and stops power supply to a plurality of game machines by an island power switch of an island facility, the displacement means If the power switch 85a remains ON, there is a possibility that the gaming machine has been illegally operated or remodeled by an illegal person such as a goto master. Therefore, in such a gaming hall, the manager or the like of the gaming hall can temporarily suspend the operation of the gaming machine and inspect the gaming machine.

[Feature rA10]
A gaming machine according to any one of features rA1 to rA9,
Equipped with shooting means capable of shooting game balls,
The processing executing means enables the shooting means to shoot the game ball when the state determining means determines that the power switch 85a is in the first state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the OFF state). A gaming machine characterized by comprising a means for making

According to this feature, the process execution means includes means for enabling the shooting means to shoot the game ball when the state determination means determines that the game ball is in the first state. When it is determined that the game machine is in the first state, it is possible to play a game in the gaming machine. On the other hand, when the state determination means determines that the game machine is in the second state, the game machine does not execute the processing for enabling the shooting of the game ball. If it is determined, the game cannot be played on the gaming machine. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a game from being played in the gaming machine in a state in which there is a possibility of an abnormality, that is, the second state is determined by the state determining means.

Specifically, for example, in a game hall that is not a game hall that simultaneously starts and stops power supply to a plurality of game machines by an island power switch of an island facility, the displacement means If the power switch 85a remains ON, there is a possibility that the gaming machine has been illegally operated or remodeled by an illegal person such as a goto master. As described above, according to this feature, when the state determining means determines that the game ball is in the second state, the game machine does not execute the process for enabling the shooting of the game ball. It is possible to prevent a game from being played in the gaming machine in a state in which there is a possibility of an abnormality that is determined to be state 2.例文帳に追加

[Feature rA11]
A gaming machine according to any one of features rA1 to rA10,
A ball entry means (first start port 33, etc.) that allows a game ball to enter,
a detection means (ball entry detection sensor) capable of detecting entry of a game ball into said ball entry means;
with
The processing execution means enables the detection means to detect the game ball when the state determination means determines that the power switch 85a is in the first state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the OFF state). A gaming machine characterized by comprising a means for making

According to this feature, the process execution means includes means for enabling detection of the game ball by the detection means when the state determination means determines that the game ball is in the first state. When it is determined to be in the first state, it becomes possible to play a game in the gaming machine. On the other hand, when the state determination means determines that the game ball is in the second state, the game machine does not execute the process for enabling the detection means to detect the game ball. If it is determined that it is, the game cannot be played on the gaming machine. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a game from being played in the gaming machine in a state in which there is a possibility of an abnormality, that is, the second state is determined by the state determining means.

Specifically, for example, in a game hall that is not a game hall that simultaneously starts and stops power supply to a plurality of game machines by an island power switch of an island facility, the displacement means If the power switch 85a remains ON, there is a possibility that the gaming machine has been illegally operated or remodeled by an illegal person such as a goto master. As described above, according to this feature, when the state determination means determines that the game ball is in the second state, the game machine does not execute the process for enabling detection of the game ball by the detection means. It is possible to suppress the game from being played in the gaming machine in a state in which there is a possibility of an abnormality that is determined to be the second state by the means.

[Feature rA12]
A gaming machine according to any one of features rA1 to rA11,
Equipped with special information acquisition means capable of acquiring special information,
The processing execution means acquires the special information by the special information acquisition means when the state determination means determines that the power switch 85a is in the first state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the OFF state). A gaming machine characterized by comprising a means for enabling

According to this feature, the process execution means includes means for enabling acquisition of special information by the special information acquisition means when the state determination means determines that the state is in the first state. When the means determines that the game machine is in the first state, it is possible to play a game in the game machine. On the other hand, when the state determination means determines that the state is the second state, the game machine does not execute the process for enabling the acquisition of the special information by the special information acquisition means. If it is determined to be in state 2, no game can be played in the gaming machine. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a game from being played in the gaming machine in a state in which there is a possibility of an abnormality, that is, the second state is determined by the state determining means.

Specifically, for example, in a game hall that is not a game hall that simultaneously starts and stops power supply to a plurality of game machines by an island power switch of an island facility, the displacement means If the power switch 85a remains ON, there is a possibility that the gaming machine has been illegally operated or remodeled by an illegal person such as a goto master. As described above, according to this feature, when the state determining means determines that the game machine is in the second state, the special information acquiring means does not execute the processing for enabling acquisition of special information. It is possible to prevent a game from being played in the gaming machine in a state in which there is a possibility of an abnormality that is determined to be the second state by the state determining means.

[Feature rA13]
A gaming machine according to any one of features rA1 to rA12,
Equipped with variable display means capable of executing variable display of identification information (special pattern),
The process executing means causes the variable display means to display a variable display of the identification information when the state determination means determines that the power switch 85a is in the first state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the OFF state). A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for enabling execution of

According to this feature, the process execution means includes means for enabling execution of variable display of the identification information by the variable display means when the state determination means determines that the identification information is in the first state. When the state determining means determines that the game machine is in the first state, it is possible to play a game in the gaming machine. On the other hand, if the state determining means determines that the game machine is in the second state, the game machine does not execute the process for enabling the variable display means to variably display the identification information. If it is determined that the game machine is in the second state, the game cannot be played in the gaming machine. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a game from being played in the gaming machine in a state in which there is a possibility of an abnormality, that is, the second state is determined by the state determining means.

Specifically, for example, in a game hall that is not a game hall that simultaneously starts and stops power supply to a plurality of game machines by an island power switch of an island facility, the displacement means If the power switch 85a remains ON, there is a possibility that the gaming machine has been illegally operated or remodeled by an illegal person such as a goto master. As described above, according to this feature, when the state determination means determines that the game machine is in the second state, the process of enabling the variable display means to perform the variable display of the identification information is not executed in the gaming machine. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a game from being played in the gaming machine in a state in which there is a possibility of an abnormality that is determined to be the second state by the state determining means.

[Feature rA14]
A gaming machine according to any one of features rA1 to rA13,
Provided with privilege grant determination means capable of executing privilege grant determination, which is a determination of whether or not to grant a privilege to a player,
The processing execution means is configured to perform the privilege grant determination by the privilege grant determination means when the state determination means determines that the power switch 85a is in the first state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is in the OFF state). A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for enabling execution.

According to this feature, the process execution means includes means for enabling execution of the privilege grant determination by the privilege grant determination means when the state determination means determines that the state is the first state. When the determining means determines that the game machine is in the first state, it is possible to play a game in the gaming machine. On the other hand, when the state determination means determines that the state is the second state, the processing for enabling execution of the privilege grant determination by the privilege grant determination means is not executed in the gaming machine. If it is determined to be in the second state, the game cannot be played on the gaming machine. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a game from being played in the gaming machine in a state in which there is a possibility of an abnormality, that is, the second state is determined by the state determining means.

Specifically, for example, in a game hall that is not a game hall that simultaneously starts and stops power supply to a plurality of game machines by an island power switch of an island facility, the displacement means If the power switch 85a remains ON, there is a possibility that the gaming machine has been illegally operated or remodeled by an illegal person such as a goto master. As described above, according to this feature, when the state determination means determines that the state is the second state, the processing for enabling execution of the privilege grant determination by the privilege grant determination means is not executed in the gaming machine. , it is possible to suppress the game from being played in the gaming machine in a state in which there is a possibility of an abnormality that is determined to be the second state by the state determining means.

[Feature rA15]
A gaming machine according to any one of features rA1 to rA14,
A privilege granting means capable of executing a privilege granting mode (opening/closing execution mode) for granting a privilege to a player,
The process executing means executes the privilege giving mode by the privilege giving means when the state determining means determines that the power switch 85a is in the first state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the OFF state). A gaming machine characterized by comprising a means for enabling

According to this feature, the process executing means includes means for enabling the privilege granting means to execute the privilege granting mode when the state determining means determines that the state is in the first state. When the means determines that the game machine is in the first state, it is possible to play a game in the game machine. On the other hand, when the state determination means determines that the state is the second state, the processing for enabling the privilege granting mode to be executed by the privilege granting means is not executed in the gaming machine. If it is determined to be in state 2, no game can be played in the gaming machine. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a game from being played in the gaming machine in a state in which there is a possibility of an abnormality, that is, the second state is determined by the state determining means.

Specifically, for example, in a game hall that is not a game hall that simultaneously starts and stops power supply to a plurality of game machines by an island power switch of an island facility, the displacement means If the power switch 85a remains ON, there is a possibility that the gaming machine has been illegally operated or remodeled by an illegal person such as a goto master. As described above, according to this feature, when the state determination means determines that the game machine is in the second state, the process for enabling the privilege granting means to execute the privilege granting mode is not executed in the gaming machine. It is possible to prevent a game from being played in the gaming machine in a state in which there is a possibility of an abnormality that is determined to be the second state by the state determining means.

<Characteristic rB group>
The feature rB group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and mainly extracted from the seventh embodiment.

[Feature rB1]
a displacement means (power switch 85a) capable of being displaced between a first position (OFF position) and a second position (ON position);
a state determination means capable of determining the state of the displacement means;
When power is supplied to the game machine, if the state determination means determines that the power switch 85a is in the first state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the OFF state), the first process is executed. , a process executing means for executing a second process when it is determined that the power switch 85a is in the second state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the ON state);
a predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect (RTC effect);
means for causing the predetermined effect executing means to execute the predetermined effect (RTC effect) based on the lapse of a predetermined period after the start of supply of power when the process executing means executes the second process;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to this feature, when power is supplied to the gaming machine, the first process is executed if the state determining means determines that the state is in the first state, and if it is determined that the state is in the second state. is provided with the process execution means for executing the second process, it is possible to switch the contents of the process to be executed according to the state of the displacement means. As a result, appropriate processing can be executed according to the state of the displacement means.

Further, according to this feature, since the predetermined effect execution means capable of executing the predetermined effect is provided based on the lapse of the predetermined period after the supply of power is started, the island facility can be equipped with a plurality of game machines. In the hall, when the plurality of game machines are activated all at once (simultaneously) by turning on the island power switch of the island equipment, the elapsed startup time of each game machine installed in the island equipment Since they are the same, it is possible to start the predetermined effects all at once (simultaneously).

However, after turning on the island power switch to activate all of the game machines installed in the island facility (at the same time), it is possible to displace one game machine for the purpose of, for example, changing the setting information. The means (power switch 85a) is individually displaced from the second position (ON position) to the first position (OFF position) to cut off the power supply, and the displacement means (power switch 85a) is again turned to the first position (OFF). position) to the second position (ON position), the elapsed startup time of the one gaming machine will deviate from the elapsed startup time of the other gaming machines installed in the island facility. As a result, there arises a problem that the timing of starting the predetermined effect in the one gaming machine is different from that of the other gaming machine. In particular, since it takes about one minute to change the setting information, the one game machine whose setting information is changed starts the predetermined effect about one minute later than the other game machine. become. In general, since the time of the predetermined effect is about 5 minutes, the predetermined effect in the one game machine whose setting information is changed is duplicated in a state shifted from the predetermined effect in the other game machine. However, there is a problem in that the player interferes with the player, giving the player a sense of displeasure.

Therefore, in this feature, when the process executing means executes the second process, the predetermined effect (RTC effect) is provided to the predetermined effect executing means based on the elapse of a predetermined period after the start of the power supply. Since the means for executing the operation is provided, the electric power supply is cut off by displacing the island power switch from ON to OFF while the displacement means (power switch 85a) of the gaming machine remains in the second position (ON position). When the game machine is activated by shifting the island power switch from OFF to ON, the game machine is set to a state in which a predetermined effect can be executed, and the predetermined effect is executed when a predetermined period elapses after the start of power supply. Since it is executed, it is possible to execute the predetermined effect at the same (or substantially the same) timing as the other gaming machines installed in the island facility.

On the other hand, the displacement means (power switch 85a) is displaced from the second position (ON position) to the first position (OFF position) to cut off the power supply, and then the displacement means (power switch 85a) is shifted to the first position ( OFF position) to the second position (ON position) and activated, the game machine is set to a state in which the predetermined effect cannot be executed. As a result, since the predetermined effect is not executed in the one game machine activated by operating the displacement means (power switch 85a), the predetermined effect in the one game machine is replaced by the predetermined effect in the other game machine. It is possible to suppress interference caused by overlapping execution in a state deviated from, and to suppress giving discomfort to the player.

<Characteristic rC group>
The feature rC group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the seventh embodiment.

[Feature rC1]
a displacement means (power switch 85a) capable of being displaced between a first position (OFF position) and a second position (ON position);
a state determination means capable of determining the state of the displacement means;
When power is supplied to the game machine, if the state determination means determines that the power switch 85a is in the first state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the OFF state), the first process is executed. , a process executing means for executing a second process when it is determined that the power switch 85a is in the second state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the ON state);
Predetermined information changing means capable of changing predetermined information (setting information) that is information that determines one privilege granting condition out of a plurality of privilege granting conditions;
a ball entry means for allowing a game ball to enter;
special information acquisition means capable of acquiring special information triggered by the entry of a game ball into said ball entry means;
privilege grant determination means capable of executing privilege grant determination, which is a determination as to whether or not the special information satisfies the privilege grant condition corresponding to the predetermined information;
privilege granting means capable of executing a privilege granting mode (opening/closing execution mode) for granting a privilege to a player when it is determined that the special information satisfies the privilege granting condition;
a suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a suggestive effect (stationary suggestive effect) that is a effect suggesting that the predetermined information has not been changed;
A gaming machine comprising
The process execution means executes the suggestion effect by the suggestion effect execution means when the state determination means determines that the power switch 85a is in the first state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is in the OFF state). (turns off the deferred suggestion effect execution permission flag) means for setting the non-suggestion effect execution permission flag to OFF.

According to this feature, when power is supplied to the gaming machine, the first process is executed if the state determining means determines that the state is in the first state, and if it is determined that the state is in the second state. is provided with the process execution means for executing the second process, it is possible to switch the contents of the process to be executed according to the state of the displacement means. As a result, appropriate processing can be executed according to the state of the displacement means.

In addition, in a game hall in which a plurality of game machines are installed on an island facility and an island power switch of the island facility is used to simultaneously start and stop the supply of power to the plurality of game machines, the game machine When the power supply is cut off or started by operating the individual displacement means (power switch 85a), there is a high possibility that the predetermined information has been changed from the previous day (or the previous business day). .

According to this feature, the process executing means includes means for setting a state in which execution of the suggestive effect by the suggestive effect executing means is disabled when the state determining means determines that the suggestive effect is in the first state. When the means determines that the state is the first state (when the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is determined to be the OFF state), that is, when the previous power failure occurred, the displacement means (the power switch In the case of the operation of 85a), the suggestive effect will not be executed in the game machine after the next activation. Therefore, even though the predetermined information has actually been changed since the previous day (or the previous business day), the suggestive effect is executed in the gaming machine, and the player cannot change the predetermined information in the gaming machine. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the user mistakenly recognizes that the device is left untouched.

<Characteristic rD group>
The feature rD group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and mainly from modification 1 of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature rD1]
a displacement means (power switch 85a) capable of being displaced between a first position (OFF position) and a second position (ON position);
a state determination means capable of determining the state of the displacement means;
When power is supplied to the gaming machine, if the state determination means determines that the power switch 85a is in the first state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the OFF state), the first process is executed. , a process executing means for executing a second process when it is determined that the power switch 85a is in the second state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the ON state);
A movable means (movable object for production 99) capable of moving within a predetermined range;
A gaming machine comprising
When the power is cut off under the first condition (when the power is cut off with the power switch 85a turned off), the movable means is positioned at a predetermined position (original position),
When the power is cut off under the second condition (when the power is cut off with the power switch 85a turned on), the movable means is positioned at a specific position (maximum position) different from the predetermined position. Characteristic game machine.

According to this feature, when power is supplied to the gaming machine, the first process is executed if the state determining means determines that the state is in the first state, and if it is determined that the state is in the second state. is provided with the process executing means for executing the second process, the content of the process to be executed can be switched according to the state of the displacement means. As a result, appropriate processing can be executed according to the state of the displacement means.

According to this feature, when power is cut off under the first condition, the movable means is positioned at a predetermined position, and when power is cut off under the second condition, the movable means is positioned at a position different from the predetermined position. Since it is configured to be positioned at a specific position, the manager of the game hall or the like visually confirms whether or not the movable means is at the predetermined position. , or the second state can be easily confirmed.

Then, when the manager or the like notices that the displacement means is determined to be in the second state, the administrator or the like performs work corresponding to the determination that the displacement means is in the second state in the game machine. be able to.

Specifically, for example, in a game hall that is not a game hall in which power supply to a plurality of game machines is simultaneously started and stopped by an island power switch of an island facility, the displacement means If the state of (the power switch 85a) remains ON, there is a possibility that the gaming machine has been illegally operated or remodeled by an illegal person such as a goto master. Therefore, in such a gaming hall, the manager or the like of the gaming hall can temporarily suspend the operation of the gaming machine and inspect the gaming machine.

[Feature rD2]
A gaming machine according to feature rD1,
The predetermined position is an origin position at one end of the predetermined range,
A gaming machine, wherein the specific position is the other end of the predetermined range and is the position (maximum position) that has moved the farthest from the origin position.

According to this feature, the predetermined position is the origin position which is one end of the predetermined range, and the specific position is the other end of the predetermined range and is the most moved position from the origin position, so the game hall A manager or the like can easily confirm at a glance whether the movable means is at a predetermined position or at a specific position.

<Characteristic rE group>
The feature rE group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and mainly from modification 2 of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature rE1]
a displacement means (power switch 85a) capable of being displaced between a first position (OFF position) and a second position (ON position);
a state determination means capable of determining the state of the displacement means;
When power is supplied to the gaming machine, if the state determination means determines that the power switch 85a is in the first state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the OFF state), the first process is executed. , a process executing means for executing a second process when it is determined that the power switch 85a is in the second state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the ON state);
an informing means capable of executing an informing process;
A gaming machine comprising
The process execution means causes the notification means to execute a predetermined notification process when the state determination means determines that the power switch 85a is in the second state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the ON state). A gaming machine characterized by comprising a means.

According to this feature, when power is supplied to the gaming machine, the first process is executed if the state determining means determines that the state is in the first state, and if it is determined that the state is in the second state. is provided with the process executing means for executing the second process, the content of the process to be executed can be switched according to the state of the displacement means. As a result, appropriate processing can be executed according to the state of the displacement means.

Further, according to this feature, the process execution means includes means for causing the notification means to execute a predetermined notification process when the state determination means determines that the state is the second state. , that the displacement means is determined to be in the second state. As a result, the manager or the like can perform work corresponding to the determination that the displacement means is in the second state in the gaming machine.

Specifically, for example, in a game hall that is not a game hall that simultaneously starts and stops power supply to a plurality of game machines by an island power switch of an island facility, the displacement means If the power switch 85a remains ON, there is a possibility that the gaming machine has been illegally operated or remodeled by an illegal person such as a goto master. Therefore, in such a gaming hall, the manager or the like of the gaming hall can temporarily suspend the operation of the gaming machine and inspect the gaming machine.

<Characteristic rF group>
The feature rF group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from modification 3 of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature rF1]
a displacement means (power switch 85a) capable of being displaced between a first position (OFF position) and a second position (ON position);
a state determination means capable of determining the state of the displacement means;
When power is supplied to the gaming machine, if the state determination means determines that the power switch 85a is in the first state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the OFF state), the first process is executed. , a process executing means for executing a second process when it is determined that the power switch 85a is in the second state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the ON state);
Information output means (external output terminal) capable of outputting information to an external device (hall computer);
A gaming machine comprising
The processing execution means causes the information output means to output predetermined information when the state determination means determines that the power switch 85a is in the second state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the ON state). A gaming machine characterized by comprising means.

According to this feature, when power is supplied to the gaming machine, the first process is executed if the state determining means determines that the state is in the first state, and if it is determined that the state is in the second state. is provided with the process execution means for executing the second process, it is possible to switch the contents of the process to be executed according to the state of the displacement means. As a result, appropriate processing can be executed according to the state of the displacement means.

Further, according to this feature, the process execution means includes means for outputting predetermined information to the information output means when the state determination means determines that the state is the second state. , that the displacement means is determined to be in the second state. As a result, the manager or the like can perform work corresponding to the determination that the displacement means is in the second state in the gaming machine.

Specifically, for example, in a game hall that is not a game hall that simultaneously starts and stops power supply to a plurality of game machines by an island power switch of an island facility, the displacement means If the power switch 85a remains ON, there is a possibility that the gaming machine has been illegally operated or remodeled by an illegal person such as a goto master. Therefore, in such a gaming hall, the manager or the like of the gaming hall can temporarily suspend the operation of the gaming machine and inspect the gaming machine.

<Characteristic rG group>
The feature rG group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from modification 4 of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature rG1]
a displacement means (power switch 85a) capable of being displaced between a first position (OFF position) and a second position (ON position);
a state determination means capable of determining the state of the displacement means;
When power is supplied to the gaming machine, if the state determination means determines that the power switch 85a is in the first state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the OFF state), the first process is executed. , a process executing means for executing a second process when it is determined that the power switch 85a is in the second state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the ON state);
A gaming machine comprising
The process execution means shifts the displacement means (power switch 85a) to the second state when the state determination means determines that the power switch 85a is in the second state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the ON state). A game machine characterized by comprising means for displacing to position 1 (OFF position).

According to this feature, when power is supplied to the gaming machine, the first process is executed if the state determining means determines that the state is in the first state, and if it is determined that the state is in the second state. is provided with the process execution means for executing the second process, it is possible to switch the contents of the process to be executed according to the state of the displacement means. As a result, appropriate processing can be executed according to the state of the displacement means.

According to this feature, the process executing means includes means for displacing the displacement means to the first position when the state determining means determines that the state is in the second state. If it is determined that there is, the displacement means is displaced to the first position, and the power supply to the game machine is cut off.
Therefore, it is possible to prevent a game from being played in the gaming machine in a state in which there is a possibility of an abnormality in which the displacement means is determined to be in the second state.

Specifically, for example, in a game hall that is not a game hall that simultaneously starts and stops power supply to a plurality of game machines by an island power switch of an island facility, the displacement means If the power switch 85a remains ON, there is a possibility that the gaming machine has been illegally operated or remodeled by an illegal person such as a goto master. According to this feature, if the state of the displacement means (power switch 85a) at the time of the previous power failure was in an abnormal ON state, the displacement means (power switch 85a) is forcibly turned on at the next start-up. It is displaced to position 1 (OFF state), and the power supply to the game machine is forcibly cut off. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a game from being played on the gaming machine in a state where there is a possibility of an abnormality.

<Characteristic rH group>
The feature rH group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from modification 5 of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature rH1]
a displacement means (power switch 85a) capable of being displaced between a first position (OFF position) and a second position (ON position);
a state determination means capable of determining the state of the displacement means;
When power is supplied to the game machine, if the state determination means determines that the power switch 85a is in the first state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the OFF state), the first process is executed. , a process executing means for executing a second process when it is determined that the power switch 85a is in the second state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the ON state);
an image display means capable of displaying an image;
A gaming machine comprising
The processing execution means displays a predetermined image (activation demonstration image) when the state determination means determines that the power switch 85a is in the first state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the OFF state). A gaming machine characterized by comprising a means for displaying on the means.

According to this feature, when power is supplied to the gaming machine, the first process is executed if the state determining means determines that the state is in the first state, and if it is determined that the state is in the second state. is provided with the process executing means for executing the second process, the content of the process to be executed can be switched according to the state of the displacement means. As a result, appropriate processing can be executed according to the state of the displacement means.

Further, according to this feature, the process execution means has means for displaying a predetermined image on the image display means when the state determination means determines that the state is the first state. By confirming whether or not the predetermined image is displayed on the image display means, it is possible to confirm whether the displacement means is determined to be in the first state or the second state. .

Then, when the manager or the like notices that the displacement means is determined to be in the second state, the administrator or the like performs work corresponding to the determination that the displacement means is in the second state in the game machine. be able to.

Specifically, for example, in a game hall that is not a game hall that simultaneously starts and stops power supply to a plurality of game machines by an island power switch of an island facility, the displacement means If the power switch 85a remains ON, there is a possibility that the gaming machine has been illegally operated or remodeled by an illegal person such as a goto master. Therefore, in such a gaming hall, the manager or the like of the gaming hall can temporarily suspend the operation of the gaming machine and inspect the gaming machine.

<Characteristic rI group>
The feature rI group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from modification 6 of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature rI1]
a displacement means (power switch 85a) capable of being displaced between a first position (OFF position) and a second position (ON position);
a state determination means capable of determining the state of the displacement means;
When power is supplied to the game machine, if the state determination means determines that the power switch 85a is in the first state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the OFF state), the first process is executed. , a process executing means for executing a second process when it is determined that the power switch 85a is in the second state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the ON state);
a launching means capable of launching a game ball;
When the process execution means executes the second process, a predetermined condition must be satisfied within a predetermined period after the supply of power is started (the game permission switch is pressed by the manager of the game hall, etc.). means for enabling the launching of the game ball by the launching means based on
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to this feature, when power is supplied to the gaming machine, the first process is executed if the state determining means determines that the state is in the first state, and if it is determined that the state is in the second state. is provided with the process execution means for executing the second process, it is possible to switch the contents of the process to be executed according to the state of the displacement means. As a result, appropriate processing can be executed according to the state of the displacement means.

Then, according to this feature, when the process executing means executes the second process, the game ball by the launching means based on the establishment of a predetermined condition in a predetermined period after the supply of power is started. Therefore, even if the state determination means determines that the player is in the second state, the player can set the predetermined period of time after the start of power supply. When a predetermined condition is established, it becomes possible to play a game in the gaming machine. On the other hand, if the state determining means determines that the state is the second state, and if the predetermined condition is not established within a predetermined period after the supply of power is started, the gaming machine The player cannot play a game in the gaming machine because the process for enabling shooting of game balls is not executed. Therefore, while suppressing the game from being played in the gaming machine in a state in which there is a possibility of an abnormality that is determined to be the second state by the state determining means, the game is played when the possibility of the abnormality is eliminated. When the manager of the hall or the like recognizes it and the manager or the like establishes a predetermined condition, the player can play a game on the gaming machine.

Specifically, for example, in a game hall that is not a game hall that simultaneously starts and stops power supply to a plurality of game machines by an island power switch of an island facility, the displacement means If the power switch 85a remains ON, there is a possibility that the gaming machine has been illegally operated or remodeled by an illegal person such as a goto master. As described above, according to this feature, when the state determining means determines that the game ball is in the second state, the game machine does not execute the process for enabling the shooting of the game ball. It is possible to prevent a game from being played in the gaming machine in a state in which there is a possibility of an abnormality that is determined to be state 2.例文帳に追加When the manager of the gaming hall recognizes that the possibility of an abnormality has been eliminated and the manager satisfies a predetermined condition, the player can play a game on the gaming machine. becomes.

<Characteristic rJ group>
The feature rJ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from modification 7 of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature rJ1]
a displacement means (power switch 85a) capable of being displaced between a first position (OFF position) and a second position (ON position);
a state determination means capable of determining the state of the displacement means;
When power is supplied to the game machine, if the state determination means determines that the power switch 85a is in the first state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the OFF state), the first process is executed. , a process executing means for executing a second process when it is determined that the power switch 85a is in the second state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the ON state);
A ball entry means (first start port 33, etc.) that allows a game ball to enter,
a detection means (ball entry detection sensor) capable of detecting entry of a game ball into said ball entry means;
When the process execution means executes the second process, a predetermined condition must be satisfied within a predetermined period after the supply of power is started (the game permission switch is pressed by the manager of the game hall, etc.). means for enabling detection of the game ball by the detection means based on the
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to this feature, when power is supplied to the gaming machine, the first process is executed if the state determining means determines that the state is in the first state, and if it is determined that the state is in the second state. is provided with the process executing means for executing the second process, the content of the process to be executed can be switched according to the state of the displacement means. As a result, appropriate processing can be executed according to the state of the displacement means.

Then, according to this feature, when the process execution means executes the second process, the game ball is detected by the detection means based on the establishment of a predetermined condition within a predetermined period after the power supply is started. Therefore, even if the state determination means determines that the state is the second state, the player can detect the predetermined period of time after the start of power supply. When a predetermined condition is established, it becomes possible to play a game in the gaming machine. On the other hand, if the state determining means determines that the state is the second state, and if the predetermined condition is not established within a predetermined period after the supply of power is started, the gaming machine The player cannot play a game in the gaming machine because the process for enabling detection of the gaming ball by the detection means is not executed. Therefore, while suppressing the game from being played in the gaming machine in a state in which there is a possibility of an abnormality that is determined to be the second state by the state determining means, the game is played when the possibility of the abnormality is eliminated. When the manager of the hall or the like recognizes it and the manager or the like establishes a predetermined condition, the player can play a game on the gaming machine.

Specifically, for example, in a game hall that is not a game hall that simultaneously starts and stops power supply to a plurality of game machines by an island power switch of an island facility, the displacement means If the power switch 85a remains ON, there is a possibility that the gaming machine has been illegally operated or remodeled by an illegal person such as a goto master. As described above, according to this feature, when the state determination means determines that the game ball is in the second state, the game machine does not execute the process for enabling detection of the game ball by the detection means. It is possible to suppress the game from being played in the gaming machine in a state in which there is a possibility of an abnormality that is determined to be the second state by the means. When the manager of the gaming hall recognizes that the possibility of an abnormality has been eliminated and the manager satisfies a predetermined condition, the player can play a game on the gaming machine. becomes.

<Characteristic rK group>
The feature rK group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and mainly from modification 8 of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature rK1]
a displacement means (power switch 85a) capable of being displaced between a first position (OFF position) and a second position (ON position);
a state determination means capable of determining the state of the displacement means;
When power is supplied to the game machine, if the state determination means determines that the power switch 85a is in the first state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the OFF state), the first process is executed. , a process executing means for executing a second process when it is determined that the power switch 85a is in the second state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the ON state);
special information acquisition means capable of acquiring special information;
When the process execution means executes the second process, a predetermined condition must be satisfied within a predetermined period after the supply of power is started (the game permission switch is pressed by the manager of the game hall, etc.). a means for enabling acquisition of the special information by the special information acquisition means based on
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to this feature, when power is supplied to the gaming machine, the first process is executed if the state determining means determines that the state is in the first state, and if it is determined that the state is in the second state. is provided with the process executing means for executing the second process, the content of the process to be executed can be switched according to the state of the displacement means. As a result, appropriate processing can be executed according to the state of the displacement means.

Further, according to this feature, when the process execution means executes the second process, the special information acquisition means performs Since means for enabling acquisition of special information is provided, even if the state determination means determines that the player is in the second state, the player can obtain the special information within a predetermined period after the start of power supply. When the predetermined condition is satisfied, it is possible to play a game in the gaming machine. On the other hand, when the state determining means determines that the state is the second state, and the predetermined condition is not established within a predetermined period after the power supply is started, the gaming machine The player cannot play a game on the gaming machine because the special information acquisition means does not execute the process for enabling acquisition of the special information. Therefore, while suppressing the game from being played in the gaming machine in a state in which there is a possibility of an abnormality that is determined to be the second state by the state determining means, the game is played when the possibility of the abnormality is eliminated. When the manager of the hall or the like recognizes it and the manager or the like establishes a predetermined condition, the player can play a game in the gaming machine.

Specifically, for example, in a game hall that is not a game hall that simultaneously starts and stops power supply to a plurality of game machines by an island power switch of an island facility, the displacement means If the power switch 85a remains ON, there is a possibility that the gaming machine has been illegally operated or remodeled by an illegal person such as a goto master. As described above, according to this feature, when the state determining means determines that the game machine is in the second state, the special information acquiring means does not execute the processing for enabling acquisition of special information. It is possible to prevent a game from being played in the gaming machine in a state in which there is a possibility of an abnormality that is determined to be the second state by the state determining means. When the manager of the gaming hall recognizes that the possibility of an abnormality has been eliminated and the manager satisfies a predetermined condition, the player can play a game on the gaming machine. becomes.

<Characteristic rL group>
The feature rL group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from modification 9 of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature rL1]
a displacement means (power switch 85a) capable of being displaced between a first position (OFF position) and a second position (ON position);
a state determination means capable of determining the state of the displacement means;
When power is supplied to the gaming machine, if the state determination means determines that the power switch 85a is in the first state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the OFF state), the first process is executed. , a process executing means for executing a second process when it is determined that the power switch 85a is in the second state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the ON state);
Variable display means capable of executing variable display of identification information (special symbols);
When the process execution means executes the second process, a predetermined condition is established within a predetermined period after the power supply is started (a game permission switch is pressed by a game hall manager or the like). means for enabling execution of variable display of the identification information by the variable display means based on
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to this feature, when power is supplied to the gaming machine, the first process is executed if the state determining means determines that the state is in the first state, and if it is determined that the state is in the second state. is provided with the process executing means for executing the second process, the content of the process to be executed can be switched according to the state of the displacement means. As a result, appropriate processing can be executed according to the state of the displacement means.

Further, according to this feature, when the process execution means executes the second process, the identification by the variation display means is based on the establishment of a predetermined condition within a predetermined period after the power supply is started. Since means for enabling execution of variable display of information is provided, even if the state determination means determines that the player is in the second state, the player can display the information for a predetermined period of time after the start of power supply. When a predetermined condition is satisfied, it becomes possible to play a game in the gaming machine. On the other hand, if the state determining means determines that the state is the second state, and if the predetermined condition is not established within a predetermined period after the supply of power is started, the gaming machine The player cannot play a game on the gaming machine because the process for enabling the variable display means to perform variable display of the identification information is not executed. Therefore, while suppressing the game from being played in the gaming machine in a state in which there is a possibility of an abnormality that is determined to be the second state by the state determining means, the game is played when the possibility of the abnormality is eliminated. When the manager of the hall or the like recognizes it and the manager or the like establishes a predetermined condition, the player can play a game on the gaming machine.

Specifically, for example, in a game hall that is not a game hall that simultaneously starts and stops power supply to a plurality of game machines by an island power switch of an island facility, the displacement means If the power switch 85a remains ON, there is a possibility that the gaming machine has been illegally operated or remodeled by an illegal person such as a goto master. As described above, according to this feature, when the state determination means determines that the game machine is in the second state, the process of enabling the variable display means to perform the variable display of the identification information is not executed in the gaming machine. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a game from being played in the gaming machine in a state in which there is a possibility of an abnormality that is determined to be the second state by the state determining means. When the manager of the gaming hall recognizes that the possibility of an abnormality has been eliminated and the manager satisfies a predetermined condition, the player can play a game on the gaming machine. becomes.

<Feature rM group>
The feature rM group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from modification 10 of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature rM1]
a displacement means (power switch 85a) capable of being displaced between a first position (OFF position) and a second position (ON position);
a state determination means capable of determining the state of the displacement means;
When power is supplied to the game machine, if the state determination means determines that the power switch 85a is in the first state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the OFF state), the first process is executed. , a process executing means for executing a second process when it is determined that the power switch 85a is in the second state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the ON state);
privilege grant determination means capable of executing privilege grant determination, which determines whether or not to grant a privilege to a player;
When the process execution means executes the second process, a predetermined condition must be satisfied within a predetermined period after the supply of power is started (the game permission switch is pressed by the manager of the game hall, etc.). a game machine characterized by comprising means for enabling execution of the privilege granting determination by the privilege granting determination means based on the fact that the privilege granting decision is made.

According to this feature, when power is supplied to the gaming machine, the first process is executed if the state determining means determines that the state is in the first state, and if it is determined that the state is in the second state. is provided with the process execution means for executing the second process, it is possible to switch the contents of the process to be executed according to the state of the displacement means. As a result, appropriate processing can be executed according to the state of the displacement means.

Then, according to this feature, when the process execution means executes the second process, the privilege grant determination means determines that a predetermined condition is satisfied within a predetermined period after power supply is started. Since the means for enabling execution of privilege provision determination is provided, even if the state determination means determines that the player is in the second state, the player can preliminarily perform the operation for a predetermined period after the power supply is started. When a predetermined condition is established, it becomes possible to play a game in the gaming machine. On the other hand, if the state determining means determines that the state is the second state, and if the predetermined condition is not established within a predetermined period after the supply of power is started, the gaming machine The player cannot play a game in the gaming machine because the process enabling execution of the privilege grant determination by the privilege grant determination means is not executed. Therefore, while suppressing the game from being played in the gaming machine in a state in which there is a possibility of an abnormality that is determined to be the second state by the state determining means, the game is played when the possibility of the abnormality is eliminated. When the manager of the hall or the like recognizes it and the manager or the like establishes a predetermined condition, the player can play a game on the gaming machine.

Specifically, for example, in a game hall that is not a game hall that simultaneously starts and stops power supply to a plurality of game machines by an island power switch of an island facility, the displacement means If the power switch 85a remains ON, there is a possibility that the gaming machine has been illegally operated or remodeled by an illegal person such as a goto master. As described above, according to this feature, when the state determination means determines that the state is the second state, the processing for enabling execution of the privilege grant determination by the privilege grant determination means is not executed in the gaming machine. , it is possible to suppress the game from being played in the gaming machine in a state in which there is a possibility of an abnormality that is determined to be the second state by the state determining means. When the manager of the gaming hall recognizes that the possibility of an abnormality has been eliminated and the manager satisfies a predetermined condition, the player can play a game on the gaming machine. becomes.

<Characteristic rN group>
The feature rN group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from modification 11 of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature rN1]
a displacement means (power switch 85a) capable of being displaced between a first position (OFF position) and a second position (ON position);
a state determination means capable of determining the state of the displacement means;
When power is supplied to the gaming machine, if the state determination means determines that the power switch 85a is in the first state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the OFF state), the first process is executed. , a process executing means for executing a second process when it is determined that the power switch 85a is in the second state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the ON state);
privilege granting means capable of executing a privilege granting mode (opening/closing execution mode) for granting a privilege to a player;
When the process execution means executes the second process, a predetermined condition is established within a predetermined period after the power supply is started (a game permission switch is pressed by a game hall manager or the like). means for enabling execution of the privilege granting mode by the privilege granting means based on
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to this feature, when power is supplied to the gaming machine, the first process is executed if the state determining means determines that the state is in the first state, and if it is determined that the state is in the second state. is provided with the process execution means for executing the second process, it is possible to switch the contents of the process to be executed according to the state of the displacement means. As a result, appropriate processing can be executed according to the state of the displacement means.

Further, according to this feature, when the process executing means executes the second process, the privilege granting means provides a privilege based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied within a predetermined period after the supply of power is started. Since the means for enabling execution of the granting mode is provided, the player can, even if the state determination means determines that the state is the second state, for a predetermined period of time after the power supply is started. When the predetermined condition is satisfied, it is possible to play a game in the gaming machine. On the other hand, if the state determining means determines that the state is the second state, and if the predetermined condition is not established within a predetermined period after the supply of power is started, the gaming machine The player cannot play a game in the gaming machine because the process enabling execution of the privilege imparting mode by the privilege imparting means is not executed. Therefore, while suppressing the game from being played in the gaming machine in a state in which there is a possibility of an abnormality that is determined to be the second state by the state determining means, the game is played when the possibility of the abnormality is eliminated. When the manager of the hall or the like recognizes it and the manager or the like establishes a predetermined condition, the player can play a game on the gaming machine.

Specifically, for example, in a game hall that is not a game hall that simultaneously starts and stops power supply to a plurality of game machines by an island power switch of an island facility, the displacement means If the power switch 85a remains ON, there is a possibility that the gaming machine has been illegally operated or remodeled by an illegal person such as a goto master. As described above, according to this feature, when the state determination means determines that the game machine is in the second state, the process for enabling the privilege granting means to execute the privilege granting mode is not executed in the gaming machine. It is possible to prevent a game from being played in the gaming machine in a state in which there is a possibility of an abnormality that is determined to be the second state by the state determining means. When the manager of the gaming hall recognizes that the possibility of an abnormality has been eliminated and the manager satisfies a predetermined condition, the player can play a game on the gaming machine. becomes.

<Characteristic rO group>
The feature rO group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from modification 12 of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature rO1]
a displacement means (power switch 85a) capable of being displaced between a first position (OFF position) and a second position (ON position);
A movable means (movable object for production 99) capable of moving within a predetermined range including a predetermined position (origin position);
a first determination means for determining the position of the displacement means when the supply of electric power from the outside is interrupted;
means for moving the movable means to a position (maximum position) other than the predetermined position (origin position) when the first determination means determines that the displacement means is at the second position;
a second determination means for determining the position of the movable means when power is supplied to the game machine;
a process execution means for executing a first process when the second determination means determines that the movable means is at the predetermined position, and for executing a second process when the second determination means determines that the movable means is not at the predetermined position;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to this feature, since there is provided means for moving the movable means to a position other than the predetermined position when the first determination means determines that the displacement means is at the second position, power supply from the outside is cut off. When the displacement means is at the first position when the power is turned off, the movable means stays at the predetermined position. Move to a position other than the specified position. That is, the position of the displacement means in the game machine when the power supply from the outside is cut off is indicated by the position of the movable means. Therefore, by visually confirming whether or not the movable means is at a predetermined position, the manager of the game hall can easily determine the position of the displacement means in the game machine when the power supply from the outside is cut off. can be verified.

According to this feature, when the second determining means determines that the movable means is at the predetermined position, the first process is executed, and when it is determined that the movable means is not at the predetermined position, the second process is executed. Since the execution means is provided, the content of the process to be executed can be switched according to the position of the displacement means when the power supply from the outside is cut off. As a result, appropriate processing can be executed according to the position of the displacement means.

[Feature rO2]
The gaming machine according to feature rO1,
Predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect (RTC effect) based on the elapsed time since the game machine was started,
The processing execution means is configured to perform the above-described operation by the predetermined effect execution means when the second determination means determines that the movable means is in the predetermined position (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is in the OFF state). A game machine characterized by comprising means for setting a state in which execution of a predetermined effect is impossible (turning off an RTC effect execution permission flag).

According to this feature, since the game machine is provided with a predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect based on the elapsed time (activation elapsed time) after the game machine is started, a plurality of game machines are installed on the island facility. In the game hall where the island facility is located, when the plurality of gaming machines are activated all at once (simultaneously) by turning on the island power switch of the island facility, the activation progress of each gaming machine installed in the island facility Since the time is the same, it is possible to start the predetermined effects all at once (simultaneously).

However, after turning on the island power switch to activate all of the game machines installed in the island facility (at the same time), it is possible to displace one game machine for the purpose of, for example, changing the setting information. The means (power switch 85a) is individually displaced from the second position (ON position) to the first position (OFF position) to cut off the power supply, and the displacement means (power switch 85a) is again turned to the first position (OFF). position) to the second position (ON position), the elapsed startup time of the one gaming machine will deviate from the elapsed startup time of the other gaming machines installed in the island facility. As a result, there arises a problem that the timing of starting the predetermined effect in the one gaming machine is different from that of the other gaming machine. In particular, since it takes about one minute to change the setting information, the one game machine whose setting information is changed starts the predetermined effect about one minute later than the other game machine. become. In general, since the time of the predetermined effect is about 5 minutes, the predetermined effect in the one game machine whose setting information is changed is duplicated in a state shifted from the predetermined effect in the other game machine. However, there is a problem in that the player interferes with the player, giving the player a sense of displeasure.

Therefore, in this feature, the process executing means includes means for setting a state in which execution of the predetermined effect by the predetermined effect executing means is disabled when the second determining means determines that the movable means is at the predetermined position. , the displacement means (power switch 85a) is displaced from the second position (ON position) to the first position (OFF position) to cut off the power supply, and thereafter the displacement means (power switch 85a) is shifted to the first position (OFF position). position) to the second position (ON position), the game machine is set to a state in which the predetermined effect cannot be executed. As a result, since the predetermined effect is not executed in the one gaming machine activated by operating the displacement means (power switch 85a), the predetermined effect in the one gaming machine becomes the predetermined effect in the other gaming machine. It is possible to suppress overlapping execution and interference in a state deviated from, and it is possible to suppress giving discomfort to the player.

On the other hand, while the displacement means (power switch 85a) of the gaming machine remains in the second position (ON position), the island power switch is displaced from ON to OFF. to ON, the gaming machine is set to a state capable of executing a predetermined effect, so that it is the same (or substantially the same) as the other gaming machines installed in the island facilities. It becomes possible to execute a predetermined performance at the timing.

[Feature rO3]
A gaming machine according to feature rO1 or feature rO2,
Predetermined information changing means capable of changing predetermined information (setting information) that is information that determines one privilege granting condition out of a plurality of privilege granting conditions;
a ball entry means for allowing a game ball to enter;
special information acquisition means capable of acquiring special information triggered by the entry of a game ball into said ball entry means;
privilege grant determination means capable of executing privilege grant determination, which is a determination as to whether or not the special information satisfies the privilege grant condition corresponding to the predetermined information;
privilege granting means capable of executing a privilege granting mode (opening/closing execution mode) for granting a privilege to a player when it is determined that the special information satisfies the privilege granting condition;
a suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a suggestive effect (stationary suggestive effect) that is a effect suggesting that the predetermined information has not been changed;
with
The processing execution means is configured to perform the above-mentioned motion by the suggestion effect execution means when the second determination means determines that the movable means is in the predetermined position (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is in the OFF state). A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for setting a state in which it is impossible to execute a suggestive effect (turning off a stationary suggestive effect execution permission flag).

In amusement halls where multiple game machines are installed on an island facility, and the island power switch of the island facility simultaneously starts and stops the supply of electric power to the multiple game machines, the game machine When the power supply is cut off or started by operating the individual displacement means (power switch 85a), there is a high possibility that the predetermined information has been changed since the previous day (or the previous business day).

According to this feature, the process executing means has means for setting a state in which the suggestive effect executing means cannot execute the suggestive effect when the second determining means determines that the movable means is at the predetermined position. , when the second determination means determines that the movable means is at the predetermined position (when it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is in the OFF state), that is, the occurrence of the previous power failure. is due to the operation of the displacement means (power switch 85a), the suggestion effect is not executed in the game machine after the next activation. Therefore, even though the predetermined information has actually been changed since the previous day (or the previous business day), the suggestive effect is executed in the gaming machine, and the player cannot change the predetermined information in the gaming machine. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the user misunderstands that the device is left untouched.

<Feature rP group>
The feature rP group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from modification 12 of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature rP1]
a displacement means (power switch 85a) capable of being displaced between a first position (OFF position) and a second position (ON position);
A movable means (movable object for production 99) capable of moving within a predetermined range including a predetermined position (origin position);
a first determination means for determining the position of the displacement means when the supply of electric power from the outside is interrupted;
means for moving the movable means to a position (maximum position) other than the predetermined position (origin position) when the first determination means determines that the displacement means is at the second position;
a second determination means for determining the position of the movable means when power is supplied to the game machine;
a process execution means for executing a first process when the second determination means determines that the movable means is at the predetermined position, and for executing a second process when the second determination means determines that the movable means is not at the predetermined position;
a predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect (RTC effect) based on the elapsed time since the game machine was activated;
A gaming machine comprising
The process executing means is configured to perform the predetermined effect executing means when the second determining means determines that the movable means is in the predetermined position (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is in the OFF state). A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for setting a state in which execution of a predetermined effect is impossible (turning off an RTC effect execution permission flag).

According to this feature, since there is provided means for moving the movable means to a position other than the predetermined position when the first determination means determines that the displacement means is at the second position, power supply from the outside is cut off. When the displacement means is at the first position when the power is turned off, the movable means stays at the predetermined position. Move to a position other than the specified position. That is, the position of the displacement means in the game machine when the power supply from the outside is cut off is indicated by the position of the movable means. Therefore, by visually confirming whether or not the movable means is at a predetermined position, the manager of the game hall can easily determine the position of the displacement means in the game machine when the power supply from the outside is cut off. can be verified.

According to this feature, when the second determination means determines that the movable means is at the predetermined position, the first process is executed, and when it is determined that the movable means is not at the predetermined position, the second process is executed. Since the execution means is provided, the content of the process to be executed can be switched according to the position of the displacement means when the power supply from the outside is cut off. As a result, appropriate processing can be executed according to the position of the displacement means.

In addition, according to this feature, since the game machine is provided with a predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect based on the elapsed time (activation elapsed time) after the game machine is started, a plurality of game machines are installed on the island facility. In the game hall where the island facility is equipped, if the plurality of gaming machines are activated all at once (simultaneously) by turning on the island power switch of the island facility, each gaming machine installed in the island facility Since the activation elapsed time is the same, it is possible to start the predetermined effect all at once (simultaneously).

However, after turning on the island power switch to activate all of the game machines installed in the island facility (at the same time), it is possible to displace one game machine for the purpose of, for example, changing the setting information. The means (power switch 85a) is individually displaced from the second position (ON position) to the first position (OFF position) to cut off the power supply, and the displacement means (power switch 85a) is again turned to the first position (OFF). position) to the second position (ON position), the elapsed startup time of the one gaming machine will deviate from the elapsed startup time of the other gaming machines installed in the island facility. As a result, there arises a problem that the timing of starting the predetermined effect in the one gaming machine is different from that of the other gaming machine. In particular, since it takes about one minute to change the setting information, the one game machine whose setting information is changed starts the predetermined effect about one minute later than the other game machine. become. In general, since the time of the predetermined effect is about 5 minutes, the predetermined effect in the one game machine whose setting information is changed is duplicated in a state shifted from the predetermined effect in the other game machine. However, there is a problem in that the player interferes with the player, giving the player a sense of displeasure.

Therefore, in this feature, the process executing means includes means for setting a state in which execution of the predetermined effect by the predetermined effect executing means is disabled when the second determining means determines that the movable means is at the predetermined position. , the displacement means (power switch 85a) is displaced from the second position (ON position) to the first position (OFF position) to cut off the power supply, and thereafter the displacement means (power switch 85a) is shifted to the first position (OFF position). position) to the second position (ON position), the game machine is set to a state in which the predetermined effect cannot be executed. As a result, since the predetermined effect is not executed in the one gaming machine activated by operating the displacement means (power switch 85a), the predetermined effect in the one gaming machine becomes the predetermined effect in the other gaming machine. It is possible to suppress overlapping execution and interference in a state deviated from, and it is possible to suppress giving the player an unpleasant feeling.

On the other hand, while the displacement means (power switch 85a) of the gaming machine remains in the second position (ON position), the island power switch is displaced from ON to OFF. to ON, the gaming machine is set to a state capable of executing a predetermined effect, so that it is the same (or substantially the same) as the other gaming machines installed in the island facility. It becomes possible to execute a predetermined performance at the timing.

<Characteristic rQ group>
The feature rQ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from modification 12 of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature rQ1]
a displacement means (power switch 85a) capable of being displaced between a first position (OFF position) and a second position (ON position);
Movable means (movable object for production 99) capable of moving within a predetermined range including a predetermined position (origin position);
a first determination means for determining the position of the displacement means when the supply of electric power from the outside is interrupted;
means for moving the movable means to a position (maximum position) other than the predetermined position (origin position) when the first determination means determines that the displacement means is at the second position;
a second determination means for determining the position of the movable means when power is supplied to the gaming machine;
a process execution means for executing a first process when the second determination means determines that the movable means is at the predetermined position, and for executing a second process when the second determination means determines that the movable means is not at the predetermined position;
Predetermined information changing means capable of changing predetermined information (setting information) that is information that determines one privilege granting condition out of a plurality of privilege granting conditions;
a ball entry means for allowing a game ball to enter;
special information acquisition means capable of acquiring special information triggered by the entry of a game ball into said ball entry means;
privilege grant determination means capable of executing privilege grant determination, which is a determination as to whether or not the special information satisfies the privilege grant condition corresponding to the predetermined information;
privilege granting means capable of executing a privilege granting mode (opening/closing execution mode) for granting a privilege to a player when it is determined that the special information satisfies the privilege granting condition;
a suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a suggestive effect (stationary suggestive effect) that is a effect suggesting that the predetermined information has not been changed;
A gaming machine comprising
The processing execution means is configured to perform the above-mentioned motion by the suggestion effect execution means when the second determination means determines that the movable means is in the predetermined position (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is in the OFF state). A game machine characterized by comprising means for setting a state in which execution of a suggestive effect is impossible (turning off a stationary suggestive effect execution permission flag).

According to this feature, since there is provided means for moving the movable means to a position other than the predetermined position when the first determination means determines that the displacement means is at the second position, power supply from the outside is cut off. When the displacement means is at the first position when the power is turned off, the movable means stays at the predetermined position. Move to a position other than the specified position. That is, the position of the displacement means in the game machine when the power supply from the outside is cut off is indicated by the position of the movable means. Therefore, by visually confirming whether or not the movable means is at a predetermined position, the manager of the game hall or the like can easily determine the position of the displacement means in the game machine when the power supply from the outside is cut off. can be verified.

According to this feature, when the second determination means determines that the movable means is at the predetermined position, the first process is executed, and when it is determined that the movable means is not at the predetermined position, the second process is executed. Since the execution means is provided, the content of the process to be executed can be switched according to the position of the displacement means when the power supply from the outside is cut off. As a result, appropriate processing can be executed according to the position of the displacement means.

In addition, in a game hall in which a plurality of game machines are installed on an island facility and an island power switch of the island facility is used to simultaneously start and stop the supply of power to the plurality of game machines, the game machine When the power supply is cut off or started by operating the individual displacement means (power switch 85a), there is a high possibility that the predetermined information has been changed from the previous day (or the previous business day). .

According to this feature, the process executing means has means for setting a state in which the suggestive effect executing means cannot execute the suggestive effect when the second determining means determines that the movable means is at the predetermined position. , when the second determination means determines that the movable means is at the predetermined position (when it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is in the OFF state), that is, the occurrence of the previous power failure. is due to the operation of the displacement means (power switch 85a), the suggestion effect is not executed in the game machine after the next activation. Therefore, even though the predetermined information has actually been changed since the previous day (or the previous business day), the suggestive effect is executed in the gaming machine, and the player cannot change the predetermined information in the gaming machine. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the user mistakenly recognizes that the device is left untouched.

<Characteristic rR group>
The feature rR group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from modification 13 of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature rR1]
a displacement means (power switch 85a) capable of being displaced between a first position (OFF position) and a second position (ON position);
Movable means (movable object for production 99) capable of moving within a predetermined range including a predetermined position (origin position);
a first determination means for determining the position of the displacement means when the supply of electric power from the outside is interrupted;
means for moving the movable means to a position (maximum position) other than the predetermined position (origin position) when the first determination means determines that the displacement means is at the second position;
a second determination means for determining the position of the movable means when power is supplied to the gaming machine;
executing a first process when the first determination means determines that the displacement means is at the first position and the second determination means determines that the movable means is at the predetermined position; Processing for executing a second process when the first determination means determines that the displacement means is at the second position and the second determination means determines that the movable means is not at the predetermined position A game machine characterized by comprising execution means.

According to this feature, since there is provided means for moving the movable means to a position other than the predetermined position when the first determination means determines that the displacement means is at the second position, power supply from the outside is cut off. When the displacement means is at the first position when the power is turned off, the movable means stays at the predetermined position. Move to a position other than the specified position. Therefore, by visually confirming whether or not the movable means is at a predetermined position, the manager of the game hall can easily determine the position of the displacement means in the game machine when the power supply from the outside is cut off. can be verified.

According to this feature, when the first determination means determines that the displacement means is at the first position and the second determination means determines that the movable means is at the predetermined position, the first process is executed. and processing execution means for executing a second process when the first determination means determines that the displacement means is at the second position and the second determination means determines that the movable means is not at the predetermined position. Therefore, the content of the process to be executed can be switched according to the position of the displacement means when the power supply from the outside is cut off. As a result, appropriate processing can be executed according to the position of the displacement means. According to this feature, the position of the displacement means when the supply of electric power from the outside is cut off is determined by a dual system of the first determination means and the second determination means, so the reliability of the determination result is high. can improve sexuality.

[Feature rR2]
A gaming machine according to feature rR1,
When the first determination means determines that the displacement means is at the first position and the second determination means determines that the movable means is not at the predetermined position, predetermined notification processing (Fig. 325 (abnormality notification process of step Sx4304b2)).

According to this feature, when the first determination means determines that the displacement means is at the first position and the second determination means determines that the movable means is not at the predetermined position, the predetermined notification process is executed. Since the notification means is provided, the manager of the game hall can confirm that the judgment result of the first judgment means and the second judgment means in the game machine is in an abnormal state that contradicts, for example, fraud by a goto master. It is possible to notice that there is a possibility that the game machine has been illegally operated or modified by an unauthorized person. Then, the manager or the like can temporarily suspend the operation of the gaming machine and inspect the gaming machine.

[Feature rR3]
A gaming machine according to feature rR1 or feature rR2,
The notification means, when the first determination means determines that the displacement means is at the second position and the second determination means determines that the movable means is at the predetermined position, a predetermined (abnormality notification processing of step Sx4303b2 in FIG. 325).

According to this feature, the notifying means, when the first determining means determines that the displacement means is at the second position and the second determining means determines that the movable means is at the predetermined position, the predetermined Since means for executing notification processing is provided, the manager of the gaming hall or the like can check that the judgment result of the first judgment means and the second judgment means in the game machine is in an abnormal state, such as a sleight of hand. It is possible to notice that there is a possibility that the game machine has been illegally operated or modified by an illegal person such as. Then, the manager or the like can temporarily suspend the operation of the gaming machine and inspect the gaming machine.

[Feature rR4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features rR1 to feature rR3,
Predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect (RTC effect) based on the elapsed time since the game machine was started,
The process execution means is configured to perform the process when the first determination means determines that the displacement means is at the first position and the second determination means determines that the movable means is at the predetermined position (previous When the main control device 60 and the sound emission control device 90 determine that the state of the power switch 85a is in the OFF state at the time of the power failure), the execution of the predetermined effect by the predetermined effect execution means is disabled. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for setting (turning off an RTC effect execution permission flag).

According to this feature, since the game machine is provided with a predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect based on the elapsed time (activation elapsed time) after the game machine is started, a plurality of game machines are installed in the island facility. In the gaming hall where the island facility is located, when the plurality of gaming machines are activated all at once (simultaneously) by turning on the island power switch of the island facility, the startup progress of each gaming machine installed in the island facility Since the time is the same, it is possible to start the predetermined effects all at once (simultaneously).

However, after turning on the island power switch to activate all of the game machines installed in the island facility (at the same time), it is possible to displace one game machine for the purpose of, for example, changing the setting information. The means (power switch 85a) is individually displaced from the second position (ON position) to the first position (OFF position) to cut off the power supply, and the displacement means (power switch 85a) is again turned to the first position (OFF). position) to the second position (ON position), the elapsed startup time of the one gaming machine will deviate from the elapsed startup time of the other gaming machines installed in the island facility. As a result, there arises a problem that the timing of starting the predetermined effect in the one gaming machine is different from that of the other gaming machine. In particular, since it takes about one minute to change the setting information, the one game machine whose setting information is changed starts the predetermined effect about one minute later than the other game machine. become. In general, since the time of the predetermined effect is about 5 minutes, the predetermined effect in the one game machine whose setting information is changed is duplicated in a state shifted from the predetermined effect in the other game machine. However, there is a problem in that the player interferes with the player, giving the player a sense of displeasure.

Therefore, in this feature, the process execution means performs a predetermined effect when the first determination means determines that the displacement means is at the first position and the second determination means determines that the movable means is at the predetermined position. Since means for setting execution of the predetermined performance by the execution means to a state in which it is impossible is provided, the displacement means (power switch 85a) is displaced from the second position (ON position) to the first position (OFF position) to supply electric power. is disconnected, and then the displacement means (power switch 85a) is displaced from the first position (OFF position) to the second position (ON position) and activated, the gaming machine cannot execute the predetermined effect. state will be set. As a result, since the predetermined effect is not executed in the one game machine activated by operating the displacement means (power switch 85a), the predetermined effect in the one game machine is replaced by the predetermined effect in the other game machine. It is possible to suppress interference caused by overlapping execution in a state deviated from, and to suppress giving discomfort to the player.

On the other hand, while the displacement means (power switch 85a) of the gaming machine remains in the second position (ON position), the island power switch is displaced from ON to OFF. to ON, the gaming machine is set to a state capable of executing a predetermined effect, so that it is the same (or substantially the same) as the other gaming machines installed in the island facility. It becomes possible to execute a predetermined performance at the timing.

[Feature rR5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features rR1 to rR4,
Predetermined information changing means capable of changing predetermined information (setting information) that is information that determines one privilege granting condition out of a plurality of privilege granting conditions;
a ball entry means for allowing a game ball to enter;
special information acquisition means capable of acquiring special information triggered by the entry of a game ball into said ball entry means;
privilege grant determination means capable of executing privilege grant determination, which is a determination as to whether or not the special information satisfies the privilege grant condition corresponding to the predetermined information;
privilege granting means capable of executing a privilege granting mode (opening/closing execution mode) for granting a privilege to a player when it is determined that the special information satisfies the privilege granting condition;
a suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a suggestive effect (stationary suggestive effect) that is a effect suggesting that the predetermined information has not been changed;
with
The process execution means is configured to perform the process when the first determination means determines that the displacement means is at the first position and the second determination means determines that the movable means is at the predetermined position (previous When the main control device 60 and the sound emission control device 90 determine that the power switch 85a is in the OFF state at the time of the power failure, the suggestive effect execution means cannot execute the suggestive effect. A game machine characterized by comprising means for setting (turning off a flag for execution of a stationary suggestion effect execution).

In amusement halls where multiple gaming machines are installed on an island facility and power supply to the multiple gaming machines is simultaneously started and stopped by an island power switch of the island facility, the gaming machines are individually operated. If the power supply is cut off or started by operating the displacement means (power switch 85a), there is a high possibility that the predetermined information has been changed since the previous day (or the previous business day).

According to this feature, the process execution means performs the suggestive effect when the first determination means determines that the displacement means is at the first position and the second determination means determines that the movable means is at the predetermined position. Since the means is provided for setting a state in which execution of the suggestive effect by the execution means is disabled, the first determination means determines that the displacement means is at the first position, and the second determination means determines that the movable means is at the predetermined position. (when it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power interruption was the OFF state), that is, the occurrence of the previous power interruption was due to the operation of the displacement means (the power switch 85a). In the case of , the suggestion effect will not be executed in the gaming machine after the next activation. Therefore, even though the predetermined information has actually been changed from the previous day (or the previous business day), the suggestive effect is executed in the gaming machine, and the player cannot change the predetermined information in the gaming machine. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the user mistakenly recognizes that the device is left untouched.

<Feature rS group>
The feature rS group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from modification 13 of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature rS1]
a displacement means (power switch 85a) capable of being displaced between a first position (OFF position) and a second position (ON position);
Movable means (movable object for production 99) capable of moving within a predetermined range including a predetermined position (origin position);
a first determination means for determining the position of the displacement means when the supply of electric power from the outside is interrupted;
means for moving the movable means to a position (maximum position) other than the predetermined position (origin position) when the first determination means determines that the displacement means is at the second position;
a second determination means for determining the position of the movable means when power is supplied to the gaming machine;
executing a first process when the first determination means determines that the displacement means is at the first position and the second determination means determines that the movable means is at the predetermined position; Processing for executing a second process when the first determination means determines that the displacement means is at the second position and the second determination means determines that the movable means is not at the predetermined position a means of execution;
When the first determination means determines that the displacement means is at the first position and the second determination means determines that the movable means is not at the predetermined position, predetermined notification processing (Fig. 325 step Sx4304b2 anomaly notification processing);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to this feature, since there is provided means for moving the movable means to a position other than the predetermined position when the first determination means determines that the displacement means is at the second position, power supply from the outside is cut off. When the displacement means is at the first position when the power is turned off, the movable means stays at the predetermined position. Move to a position other than the specified position. Therefore, by visually confirming whether or not the movable means is at a predetermined position, the manager of the game hall can easily determine the position of the displacement means in the game machine when the power supply from the outside is cut off. can be verified.

According to this feature, when the first determination means determines that the displacement means is at the first position and the second determination means determines that the movable means is at the predetermined position, the first process is executed. and processing execution means for executing a second process when the first determination means determines that the displacement means is at the second position and the second determination means determines that the movable means is not at the predetermined position. Therefore, the content of the process to be executed can be switched according to the position of the displacement means when the power supply from the outside is cut off. As a result, appropriate processing can be executed according to the position of the displacement means. According to this feature, the position of the displacement means when the supply of power from the outside is cut off is determined by a dual system of the first determination means and the second determination means, so the reliability of the determination result is high. can improve sexuality.

According to this feature, when the first determination means determines that the displacement means is at the first position and the second determination means determines that the movable means is not at the predetermined position, the predetermined notification process is performed. is provided, the manager of the gaming hall, etc., is in an abnormal state in which the judgment results of the first judgment means and the second judgment means in the game machine are inconsistent. You can notice that there is a possibility that the game machine has been illegally operated or modified by an illegal person. Then, the manager or the like can temporarily suspend the operation of the gaming machine and inspect the gaming machine.

<Characteristic rT group>
The feature rT group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from modification 13 of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature rT1]
a displacement means (power switch 85a) capable of being displaced between a first position (OFF position) and a second position (ON position);
Movable means (movable object for production 99) capable of moving within a predetermined range including a predetermined position (origin position);
a first determination means for determining the position of the displacement means when the supply of electric power from the outside is interrupted;
means for moving the movable means to a position (maximum position) other than the predetermined position (origin position) when the first determination means determines that the displacement means is at the second position;
a second determination means for determining the position of the movable means when power is supplied to the gaming machine;
executing a first process when the first determination means determines that the displacement means is at the first position and the second determination means determines that the movable means is at the predetermined position; Processing for executing a second process when the first determination means determines that the displacement means is at the second position and the second determination means determines that the movable means is not at the predetermined position a means of execution;
When the first determination means determines that the displacement means is at the second position and the second determination means determines that the movable means is at the predetermined position, predetermined notification processing (Fig. 325 step Sx4303b2 anomaly notification processing);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to this feature, since there is provided means for moving the movable means to a position other than the predetermined position when the first determination means determines that the displacement means is at the second position, power supply from the outside is cut off. When the displacement means is at the first position when the power is turned off, the movable means stays at the predetermined position. Move to a position other than the specified position. Therefore, by visually confirming whether or not the movable means is at a predetermined position, the manager of the game hall or the like can easily determine the position of the displacement means in the game machine when the power supply from the outside is cut off. can be verified.

According to this feature, when the first determination means determines that the displacement means is at the first position and the second determination means determines that the movable means is at the predetermined position, the first process is executed. and processing execution means for executing a second process when the first determination means determines that the displacement means is at the second position and the second determination means determines that the movable means is not at the predetermined position. Therefore, the content of the process to be executed can be switched according to the position of the displacement means when the power supply from the outside is cut off. As a result, appropriate processing can be executed according to the position of the displacement means. According to this feature, the position of the displacement means when the supply of power from the outside is cut off is determined by a dual system of the first determination means and the second determination means, so the reliability of the determination result is high. can improve sexuality.

According to this feature, the notifying means, when the first determining means determines that the displacement means is at the second position and the second determining means determines that the movable means is at the predetermined position, Since means for executing a predetermined notification process is provided, the manager of the game hall or the like can check that the judgment result of the first judgment means and the second judgment means in the gaming machine is in an abnormal state, such as, for example, It is possible to notice that there is a possibility that the gaming machine has been illegally operated or modified by an illegal person such as a goto master. Then, the manager or the like can temporarily suspend the operation of the gaming machine and inspect the gaming machine.

<Characteristic rU group>
The feature rU group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from modification 13 of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature rU1]
a displacement means (power switch 85a) capable of being displaced between a first position (OFF position) and a second position (ON position);
Movable means (movable object for production 99) capable of moving within a predetermined range including a predetermined position (origin position);
a first determination means for determining the position of the displacement means when the supply of electric power from the outside is interrupted;
means for moving the movable means to a position (maximum position) other than the predetermined position (origin position) when the first determination means determines that the displacement means is at the second position;
a second determination means for determining the position of the movable means when power is supplied to the gaming machine;
executing a first process when the first determination means determines that the displacement means is at the first position and the second determination means determines that the movable means is at the predetermined position; Processing for executing a second process when the first determination means determines that the displacement means is at the second position and the second determination means determines that the movable means is not at the predetermined position a means of execution;
a predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect (RTC effect) based on the elapsed time since the game machine was activated;
A gaming machine comprising
The process execution means is configured to perform the process when the first determination means determines that the displacement means is at the first position and the second determination means determines that the movable means is at the predetermined position (previous When the main control device 60 and the sound emission control device 90 determine that the state of the power switch 85a is in the OFF state at the time of the power failure), the execution of the predetermined effect by the predetermined effect execution means is disabled. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for setting (turning off an RTC effect execution permission flag).

According to this feature, since there is provided means for moving the movable means to a position other than the predetermined position when the first determination means determines that the displacement means is at the second position, power supply from the outside is cut off. When the displacement means is at the first position when the power is turned off, the movable means stays at the predetermined position. Move to a position other than the specified position. Therefore, by visually confirming whether or not the movable means is at a predetermined position, the manager of the game hall can easily determine the position of the displacement means in the game machine when the power supply from the outside is cut off. can be verified.

According to this feature, when the first determination means determines that the displacement means is at the first position and the second determination means determines that the movable means is at the predetermined position, the first process is executed. and processing execution means for executing a second process when the first determination means determines that the displacement means is at the second position and the second determination means determines that the movable means is not at the predetermined position. Therefore, the content of the process to be executed can be switched according to the position of the displacement means when the power supply from the outside is cut off. As a result, appropriate processing can be executed according to the position of the displacement means. According to this feature, the position of the displacement means when the supply of power from the outside is cut off is determined by a dual system of the first determination means and the second determination means, so the reliability of the determination result is high. can improve sexuality.

In addition, according to this feature, since the game machine is provided with a predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect based on the elapsed time (activation elapsed time) after the game machine is started, a plurality of game machines are installed on the island facility. In the game hall where the island facility is equipped, if the plurality of gaming machines are activated all at once (simultaneously) by turning on the island power switch of the island facility, each gaming machine installed in the island facility Since the activation elapsed time is the same, it is possible to start the predetermined effect all at once (simultaneously).

However, after turning on the island power switch to activate all of the game machines installed in the island facility (at the same time), it is possible to displace one game machine for the purpose of, for example, changing the setting information. The means (power switch 85a) is individually displaced from the second position (ON position) to the first position (OFF position) to cut off the power supply, and the displacement means (power switch 85a) is again turned to the first position (OFF). position) to the second position (ON position), the elapsed startup time of the one gaming machine will deviate from the elapsed startup time of the other gaming machines installed in the island facility. As a result, there arises a problem that the timing of starting the predetermined effect in the one gaming machine is different from that of the other gaming machine. In particular, since it takes about one minute to change the setting information, the one game machine whose setting information is changed starts the predetermined effect about one minute later than the other game machine. become. In general, since the time of the predetermined effect is about 5 minutes, the predetermined effect in the one game machine whose setting information is changed is duplicated in a state shifted from the predetermined effect in the other game machine. However, there is a problem in that the player interferes with the player, giving the player a sense of displeasure.

Therefore, in this feature, the process execution means performs a predetermined effect when the first determination means determines that the displacement means is at the first position and the second determination means determines that the movable means is at the predetermined position. Since means for setting the execution of the predetermined effect by the executing means to a state in which it is impossible to perform, the displacement means (power switch 85a) is displaced from the second position (ON position) to the first position (OFF position) to supply electric power. is cut off, and then the displacement means (power switch 85a) is displaced from the first position (OFF position) to the second position (ON position) and activated, the game machine cannot execute the predetermined effect. state will be set. As a result, since the predetermined effect is not executed in the one gaming machine activated by operating the displacement means (power switch 85a), the predetermined effect in the one gaming machine becomes the predetermined effect in the other gaming machine. It is possible to suppress overlapping execution and interference in a state deviated from, and it is possible to suppress giving discomfort to the player.

On the other hand, while the displacement means (power switch 85a) of the gaming machine remains in the second position (ON position), the island power switch is displaced from ON to OFF. to ON, the gaming machine is set to a state capable of executing a predetermined effect, so that it is the same (or substantially the same) as the other gaming machines installed in the island facilities. It becomes possible to execute a predetermined performance at the timing.

<Characteristic rV group>
The feature rV group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from modification 13 of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature rV1]
a displacement means (power switch 85a) capable of being displaced between a first position (OFF position) and a second position (ON position);
Movable means (movable object for production 99) capable of moving within a predetermined range including a predetermined position (origin position);
a first determination means for determining the position of the displacement means when the supply of electric power from the outside is interrupted;
means for moving the movable means to a position (maximum position) other than the predetermined position (origin position) when the first determination means determines that the displacement means is at the second position;
a second determination means for determining the position of the movable means when power is supplied to the gaming machine;
executing a first process when the first determination means determines that the displacement means is at the first position and the second determination means determines that the movable means is at the predetermined position; Processing for executing a second process when the first determination means determines that the displacement means is at the second position and the second determination means determines that the movable means is not at the predetermined position a means of execution;
Predetermined information changing means capable of changing predetermined information (setting information) that is information that determines one privilege granting condition out of a plurality of privilege granting conditions;
a ball entry means for allowing a game ball to enter;
special information acquisition means capable of acquiring special information triggered by the entry of a game ball into said ball entry means;
privilege grant determination means capable of executing privilege grant determination, which is a determination as to whether or not the special information satisfies the privilege grant condition corresponding to the predetermined information;
privilege granting means capable of executing a privilege granting mode (opening/closing execution mode) for granting a privilege to a player when it is determined that the special information satisfies the privilege granting condition;
a suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a suggestive effect (stationary suggestive effect) that is a effect suggesting that the predetermined information has not been changed;
A gaming machine comprising
The process execution means is configured to perform the process when the first determination means determines that the displacement means is at the first position and the second determination means determines that the movable means is at the predetermined position (previous When the main control device 60 and the sound light emission control device 90 determine that the power switch 85a is in the OFF state at the time of power failure, the suggestive effect execution means cannot execute the suggestive effect. A game machine characterized by comprising means for setting (turning off a flag for execution of a stationary suggestion effect execution).

According to this feature, since there is provided means for moving the movable means to a position other than the predetermined position when the first determination means determines that the displacement means is at the second position, power supply from the outside is cut off. When the displacement means is at the first position when the power is turned off, the movable means stays at the predetermined position. Move to a position other than the specified position. Therefore, by visually confirming whether or not the movable means is at a predetermined position, the manager of the game hall can easily determine the position of the displacement means in the game machine when the power supply from the outside is cut off. can be verified.

According to this feature, when the first determination means determines that the displacement means is at the first position and the second determination means determines that the movable means is at the predetermined position, the first process is executed. and processing execution means for executing a second process when the first determination means determines that the displacement means is at the second position and the second determination means determines that the movable means is not at the predetermined position. Therefore, the content of the process to be executed can be switched according to the position of the displacement means when the power supply from the outside is cut off. As a result, appropriate processing can be executed according to the position of the displacement means. According to this feature, the position of the displacement means when the supply of electric power from the outside is cut off is determined by a dual system of the first determination means and the second determination means, so the reliability of the determination result is high. can improve sexuality.

In addition, in a game hall in which a plurality of game machines are installed on an island facility and an island power switch of the island facility is used to simultaneously start and stop the supply of power to the plurality of game machines, the game machine When the power supply is cut off or started by operating the individual displacement means (power switch 85a), there is a high possibility that the predetermined information has been changed from the previous day (or the previous business day). .

According to this feature, the process execution means performs the suggestive effect when the first determination means determines that the displacement means is at the first position and the second determination means determines that the movable means is at the predetermined position. Since the means is provided for setting a state in which execution of the suggestive effect by the execution means is disabled, the first determination means determines that the displacement means is at the first position, and the second determination means determines that the movable means is at the predetermined position. (when it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power interruption was the OFF state), that is, the occurrence of the previous power interruption was due to the operation of the displacement means (the power switch 85a). In the case of , the suggestion effect will not be executed in the gaming machine after the next activation. Therefore, even though the predetermined information has actually been changed from the previous day (or the previous business day), the suggestive effect is executed in the gaming machine, and the player cannot change the predetermined information in the gaming machine. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the user mistakenly recognizes that the device is left untouched.

<Characteristic sA group>
The feature sA group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eighth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature sA1]
A distribution area (game area PA) in which game balls circulate,
A first passage (main line passage portion 210) provided in the circulation area for circulating game balls;
A second passage (first branch passage portion 220) which is provided in the circulation area and which is a passage for circulating game balls and branches from the middle of the first passage;
A first ball entry means (right first starting port 44) provided in the second passage and capable of entering a game ball;
a second ball entry means (second starting port 34) into which the game ball that has circulated through the first passage can enter;
information acquiring means for acquiring special information triggered by the entry of a game ball into each of a plurality of ball entering means including at least the first ball entering means and the second ball entering means;
Means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition, and includes a first determination mode (low-probability mode) and the first determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination. a second determination mode (high-probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher than in the first determination mode;
When one game round is defined as the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended, a game round execution means (main control unit) for executing the game round MPU 62 on the board 61 side, and game round control processing in FIG. 351 executed by it);
In a gaming machine comprising
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) provided at a branch point of the first passage to the second passage and assisting the entry of a game ball into the second passage;
The state of the auxiliary means is divided into a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second path, and a state that makes it possible or easy for a game ball to enter the second path. a state transition means for transitioning between a second state which is a state to
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein the control mode in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means is a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode. a control means having at least a second control mode (high-frequency support mode) in which entry of game balls into the second path is easier than
Judgment mode switching means ( The game ball distribution device 240, the fall port 252, the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side, and the game ball distribution control process of FIG.
with
The control means is
When the number of executions of the game cycle after the control mode is shifted from the first control mode to the second control mode reaches a predetermined number of times, the control mode is changed from the second control mode to the first control Means for shifting to mode (MPU 62 on main control board 61 side and first fluctuation stop processing in FIG. 360 executed by MPU 62)
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the characteristic sA1, in the state where the control mode is the second control mode, it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the second passage than in the state where the control mode is the first control mode, and the game ball enters the first passage with a high probability. Enter the ball into the ball means. However, in a state where the control mode is the second control mode, when a game ball enters the first ball entering means, the judgment mode switching means changes the judgment mode from the second judgment mode to the first with a predetermined probability. Since the mode is switched to the determination mode, the player may be put in a disadvantageous state. Then, in a state in which the control mode is the second control mode, when the number of game rounds executed after the transition to the second control mode reaches a predetermined number of times, the control mode is changed from the second control mode to the first control mode can be switched. When the control mode is the first control mode, the game ball easily circulates downstream of the branch point of the first passage to the second passage, and the game ball enters the second ball entering means with a high probability. do. In this case, unlike the second passage side, since the determination mode is not switched from the second determination mode to the first determination mode, there is no possibility that the player will be in a disadvantageous state. It is possible to continuously perform game rounds triggered by the entry of a game ball into the ball means.

As a result, according to the feature sA1, in the state where the control mode is the second control mode, the player is instructed to wait until the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number after the transition to the second control mode. During the period, the judgment mode is changed from the second judgment mode to the disadvantageous first judgment mode by the judgment mode switching means, and the judgment mode is changed to the first judgment mode by the judgment mode switching means. It is also possible to give a feeling of expectation that the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number before switching to . Then, when the number of executions of the game cycle reaches a predetermined number without switching the determination mode to the first determination mode by the determination mode switching means, the player is notified that the determination mode is the first determination mode. A special state (e.g., the eighth execution A state in which the control mode is the second control mode by continuously performing game rounds triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means. In addition, it is possible to impart a sense of anticipation that the special information acquired with the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means as a trigger will satisfy a predetermined condition in the near future. Thus, according to the feature sA1, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by giving the player emotions such as a sense of anticipation, a sense of urgency, and a sense of relief.

Conventional pachinko machines include loop type pachinko machines and ST type pachinko machines. A loop-type pachinko machine is a model in which the state of the high-probability mode continues until a big win is won in the next winning lottery. The ST type pachinko machine is a model in which the number of games in the high-probability mode is limited. A loop-type pachinko machine can impart a sense of urgency to a player that a jackpot is won in a winning lottery and that the type of the jackpot won is usually a jackpot. On the other hand, the ST type pachinko machine can give the player a sense of urgency, as if he or she might not win the jackpot before the limit number of games is reached. On the other hand, according to the feature sA1, as described above, before the judgment mode is switched to the first judgment mode by the judgment mode switching means, the number of execution times of the game reaches the predetermined number along with the sense of urgency. It is possible to give a sense of expectation such as wanting. Further, when the number of execution times of the game cycle reaches a predetermined number without switching the determination mode to the first determination mode by the determination mode switching means, the player is instructed to switch the determination mode to the first determination mode. A special state (e.g., eighth embodiment In the state where the control mode is the second control mode, the sense of relief that can be shifted to the invincible zone in the second ball entry means and the continuous game rounds that are executed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means It is also possible to give a sense of expectation that the special information acquired with the entry of the game ball into the second ball entering means as a trigger will satisfy a predetermined condition in the near future. Such a sense of relief and anticipation is an effect peculiar to the feature sA1, and can improve the enjoyment of the game.

[Feature sA2]
The gaming machine according to feature sA1,
The determination mode switching means is
A third passage (second branch passage portion 230) that is provided in the circulation area and is a passage for circulating game balls and branches from the middle of the second passage;
a third ball entry means (falling port 252) into which a game ball that has circulated through the third passage can enter;
Judgment mode control means capable of switching the judgment mode from the second judgment mode to the first judgment mode when the game ball enters the third ball entering means;
Game ball distributing means (game ball distributing means) provided at a branch point of the second passage to the third passage and distributing game balls between the downstream portion of the second passage from the branch point and the third passage Sorting device 240),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature sA2, a part of the determination mode switching means can be configured by a hardware configuration including the third path and the game ball sorting means. For this reason, by making the game ball distribution means distribute the game balls so that the player can visually recognize from the outside, the judgment mode is switched from the second judgment mode to the first judgment mode. It is possible to impart a sense of urgency to the player, as if he or she were afraid of being put away. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature sA3]
The gaming machine according to feature sA2,
The game ball sorting means is
A gaming machine characterized in that the probability of allocating game balls to said third path is lower than the probability of allocating game balls to a portion downstream of said branch point in said second path.

According to feature sA3, it is possible to set a relatively low probability that the determination mode will switch from the second determination mode to the first determination mode. For this reason, the probability that the player will suffer a disadvantage can be made relatively low.

[Feature sA4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features sA1 to sA3,
Provided with privilege granting means for granting a privilege,
The privilege granting means is
when the special information corresponding to the game round to be executed satisfies the predetermined condition (when a jackpot is won), a privilege granting means upon establishment of a predetermined condition for granting a privilege;
when the special information corresponding to the game round to be executed satisfies a specific condition (when a special small win is won), a special condition fulfillment benefit granting means for granting a benefit;
with
The control means is
When the control mode is the second control mode, the determination mode is the second determination mode, and the special information corresponding to the game round to be executed satisfies the specific condition, the control mode is the second control mode. from the second control mode to the first control mode.

According to the feature sA4, in a state where the control mode is the second control mode and the determination mode is the second determination mode, the number of game rounds executed after the control mode shifts from the first control mode to the second control mode. reaches a predetermined number of times, and also when the special information corresponding to the game round to be executed satisfies a specific condition, the control mode is shifted from the second control mode to the first control mode. As described above, in the state where the control mode is the first control mode, there is no possibility that the player will be in a disadvantageous state, and execution is triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means. Game rounds can be played continuously. Therefore, according to the characteristic sA4, it is possible to further give the player a sense of anticipation for transitioning to the above-described special state, and as a result, it is possible to further improve the amusement of the game.

[Feature sA5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features sA1 to sA4,
A fourth ball entry means (through gate 35) provided above the ball entry port of the first passage and capable of entering a game ball,
The state transition means is
Means for performing a predetermined lottery triggered by passing through the fourth ball entry means;
means for transitioning the state of the auxiliary means to the second state when the result of the predetermined lottery is a predetermined result;
with
When the control mode is the second control mode, the game ball entering the fourth ball entering means (through gate 35) is configured to flow from the first passage to the second passage. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature sA5, when the control mode is the second control mode, the game ball entering the fourth ball entering means is configured to flow from the first passage to the second passage. A game ball does not circulate downstream of a branch point to a second path in the first path. Therefore, when the control mode is the second control mode, it is possible to ensure that the game ball that has entered the fourth ball entering means enters the first ball entering means. For this reason, it is possible to improve the accuracy of entering the game ball into the first ball entering means.

[Feature sA6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features sA1 to sA5,
First special information that is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and the special information acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entering means and an obtained information storage means for storing the second special information,
The game round execution means is
A first special information game round for notifying the result of determination by the determining means for the first special information, and a game round for notifying the result of determination by the determining means for the second special information. a means for executing in parallel a second special information game round which is
Said second game time in a state in which said control mode is said first control mode and said determination mode is said first determination mode, when said second special information game time is defined as said second game time to a time longer than the time that can be set as the second game time in a state in which the control mode is the first control mode and the determination mode is the second determination mode;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature sA6, in a state where the control mode is the first control mode and the determination mode is the first determination mode, that is, in the normal state, the player shoots the game ball toward the ball entrance of the first passage. In this case, the game ball can be entered into the second ball entering means. However, according to feature sA6, the second special information game time is set to a relatively long time in the state where the control mode is the first control mode and the determination mode is the first determination mode. Therefore, it is possible to suppress repeated execution of determination by the determining means triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second ball entering means in a short period of time. As a result, according to the feature sA6, the player is caused to shoot a game ball aiming at the second ball entering means in a state where the control mode is the first control mode and the determination mode is the first determination mode. can give up.

<Characteristic sB group>
The feature sB group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eighth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature sB1]
A distribution area (game area PA) in which game balls circulate,
A first passage (main line passage portion 210) provided in the circulation area for circulating game balls;
A second passage (first branch passage portion 220) which is provided in the circulation area and which is a passage for circulating game balls and branches from the middle of the first passage;
A first ball entry means (right first starting port 44) provided in the second passage and capable of entering a game ball;
a second ball entry means (second starting port 34) into which the game ball that has circulated through the first passage can enter;
information acquiring means for acquiring special information triggered by the entry of a game ball into each of a plurality of ball entering means including at least the first ball entering means and the second ball entering means;
Means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition, and includes a first determination mode (low-probability mode) and the first determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination. a second determination mode (high-probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher than in the first determination mode;
When one game round is defined as the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended, a game round execution means (main control unit) for executing the game round MPU 62 on the board 61 side, and game round control processing in FIG. 351 executed by it);
In a gaming machine comprising
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) provided at a branch point of the first passage to the second passage and assisting the entry of a game ball into the second passage;
The state of the auxiliary means is divided into a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second path, and a state that makes it possible or easy for a game ball to enter the second path. a state transition means for transitioning between a second state which is a state to
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein the control mode in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means is a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode. a control means having at least a second control mode (high-frequency support mode) in which entry of game balls into the second path is easier than
Judgment mode switching means ( The game ball distribution device 240, the fall port 252, the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side, and the game ball distribution control process of FIG.
a privilege granting means for granting a privilege;
with
The privilege granting means is
When the special information corresponding to the game round to be executed satisfies the predetermined condition (when a jackpot is won), a privilege granting means upon establishment of a predetermined condition for granting a privilege;
when the special information corresponding to the game round to be executed satisfies a specific condition (when a special small win is won), a special condition fulfillment benefit granting means for granting a benefit;
with
The control means is
When the control mode is the second control mode, the determination mode is the second determination mode, and the special information corresponding to the game round to be executed satisfies the specific condition, the control mode is the second control mode. from the second control mode to the first control mode.

According to the characteristic sB1, in the state where the control mode is the second control mode, it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the second passage than in the state where the control mode is the first control mode, and the game ball enters the first passage with a high probability. Enter the ball into the ball means. However, in a state where the control mode is the second control mode, when a game ball enters the first ball entering means, the judgment mode switching means changes the judgment mode from the second judgment mode to the first with a predetermined probability. Since the mode is switched to the determination mode, the player may be put in a disadvantageous state. Then, when the control mode is the second control mode and the determination mode is the second determination mode, and the special information corresponding to the game round to be executed satisfies a specific condition, the control mode is the second control mode. to the first control mode. When the control mode is the first control mode, the game ball easily circulates downstream of the branch point of the first passage to the second passage, and the game ball enters the second ball entering means with a high probability. do. In this case, unlike the second passage side, since the determination mode is not switched from the second determination mode to the first determination mode, there is no possibility that the player will be in a disadvantageous state. It is possible to continuously perform game rounds triggered by the entry of a game ball into the ball means. Therefore, according to the feature sB1, in the state where the control mode is the second control mode, there is no possibility that the player will be in a disadvantageous state, and the game ball is executed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means. It is possible to give the player a feeling of anticipation that a transition to a special state (for example, the invincible zone in the eighth embodiment) in which the game rounds can be played continuously can be performed. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature sB2]
The gaming machine according to feature sB1,
The determination mode switching means is
A third passage (second branch passage portion 230) which is provided in the circulation area and which is a passage for circulating game balls and branches from the middle of the second passage;
a third ball entry means (falling port 252) into which a game ball that has circulated through the third passage can enter;
Judgment mode control means capable of switching the judgment mode from the second judgment mode to the first judgment mode when the game ball enters the third ball entering means;
Game ball distributing means (game ball distributing means) provided at a branch point of the second passage to the third passage and distributing game balls between the downstream portion of the second passage from the branch point and the third passage Sorting device 240),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature sB2, a part of the determination mode switching means can be configured by a hardware configuration including the third path and the game ball sorting means. For this reason, by making the game ball distribution means distribute the game balls so that the player can visually recognize from the outside, the judgment mode is switched from the second judgment mode to the first judgment mode. It is possible to impart a sense of urgency to the player, as if he or she were afraid of being put away. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature sB3]
The gaming machine according to feature sB2,
The game ball sorting means is
A gaming machine characterized in that the probability of allocating game balls to said third path is lower than the probability of allocating game balls to a portion downstream of said branch point in said second path.

According to feature sB3, the probability of the determination mode switching from the second determination mode to the first determination mode can be set relatively low. For this reason, the probability that the player will suffer a disadvantage can be made relatively low.

[Feature sB4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features sB1 to sB3,
The control means is
When the number of executions of the game cycle after the control mode is shifted from the first control mode to the second control mode reaches a predetermined number of times, the control mode is changed from the second control mode to the first control Means for shifting to mode (MPU 62 on main control board 61 side and first fluctuation stop processing in FIG. 360 executed by MPU 62)
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature sB4, in a state where the control mode is the second control mode and the determination mode is the second determination mode, in addition to the case where the special information corresponding to the game round to be executed satisfies a specific condition, The control mode is also shifted from the second control mode to the first control mode when the number of game rounds executed after the mode shifts from the first control mode to the second control mode reaches a predetermined number. As described above, in the state where the control mode is the first control mode, there is no possibility that the player will be in a disadvantageous state, and execution is triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means. Game rounds can be played continuously. Therefore, according to the feature sB4, it is possible to give the player a greater sense of anticipation for the transition to the special state described above, and as a result, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature sB5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features sB1 to sB4,
A fourth ball entry means (through gate 35) provided above the ball entry port of the first passage and capable of entering a game ball,
The state transition means is
Means for performing a predetermined lottery triggered by passing through the fourth ball entry means;
means for transitioning the state of the auxiliary means to the second state when the result of the predetermined lottery is a predetermined result;
with
When the control mode is the second control mode, the game ball entering the fourth ball entering means (through gate 35) is configured to flow from the first passage to the second passage. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature sB5, when the control mode is the second control mode, the game ball entering the fourth ball entering means flows from the first passage to the second passage. A game ball does not circulate downstream of a branch point to a second path in the first path. Therefore, when the control mode is the second control mode, it is possible to ensure that the game ball that has entered the fourth ball entering means enters the first ball entering means. For this reason, it is possible to improve the accuracy of entering the game ball into the first ball entering means.

[Feature sB6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features sB1 to sB5,
First special information that is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and the special information acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entering means Acquired information storage means for storing second special information that is
The game round execution means is
A first special information game round for notifying the result of determination by the determining means for the first special information, and a game round for notifying the result of determination by the determining means for the second special information. a means for executing in parallel a second special information game round which is
Said second game time in a state in which said control mode is said first control mode and said determination mode is said first determination mode, when said second special information game time is defined as said second game time to a time longer than the time that can be set as the second game time in a state in which the control mode is the first control mode and the determination mode is the second determination mode;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature sB6, in a state where the control mode is the first control mode and the determination mode is the first determination mode, that is, in the normal state, the player shoots the game ball toward the ball entrance of the first passage. In this case, the game ball can be entered into the second ball entering means. However, according to feature sB6, the second special information game time is set to a relatively long time in the state where the control mode is the first control mode and the determination mode is the first determination mode. Therefore, it is possible to suppress repeated execution of determination by the determining means triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second ball entering means in a short period of time. As a result, according to the feature sB6, the player is caused to shoot a game ball aiming at the second ball entering means in a state where the control mode is the first control mode and the determination mode is the first determination mode. can give up.

<Characteristic sC group>
The feature sC group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eighth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature sC1]
A distribution area (game area PA) in which game balls circulate,
A first passage (main line passage portion 210) provided in the circulation area for circulating game balls;
A second passage (first branch passage portion 220) which is provided in the circulation area and which is a passage for circulating game balls and branches from the middle of the first passage;
A first ball entry means (right first starting port 44) provided in the second passage and capable of entering a game ball;
a second ball entry means (second starting port 34) into which the game ball that has circulated through the first passage can enter;
information acquiring means for acquiring special information triggered by the entry of a game ball into each of a plurality of ball entering means including at least the first ball entering means and the second ball entering means;
Means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition, and includes a first determination mode (low-probability mode) and the first determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination. a second determination mode (high-probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher than in the first determination mode;
When one game round is defined as the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended, a game round execution means (main control unit) for executing the game round MPU 62 on the board 61 side, and game round control processing in FIG. 351 executed by it);
In a gaming machine comprising
A third passage (second branch passage portion 230) that is provided in the circulation area and is a passage for circulating game balls and branches from the middle of the second passage;
a third ball entry means (falling port 252) into which a game ball that has circulated through the third passage can enter;
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) provided at a branch point of the first passage to the second passage and assisting the entry of a game ball into the second passage;
The state of the auxiliary means is divided into a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second path, and a state that makes it possible or easy for a game ball to enter the second path. a state transition means for transitioning between a second state which is a state to
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein the control mode in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means is a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode. a control means having at least a second control mode (high-frequency support mode) in which entry of game balls into the second path is easier than
Judgment mode control means capable of switching the judgment mode from the second judgment mode to the first judgment mode when the game ball enters the third ball entering means;
Game ball distributing means (game ball distributing means) provided at a branch point of the second passage to the third passage and distributing game balls between the downstream portion of the second passage from the branch point and the third passage Sorting device 240),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the characteristic sC1, in the state where the control mode is the second control mode, it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the second passage than in the state where the control mode is the first control mode, and the game ball enters the first passage with a high probability. Enter the ball into the ball means. However, there is a possibility that the game ball that entered the first ball entering means is then sorted from the second path to the third path by the game ball sorting device and enters the third ball entering means. When a game ball enters the third ball entering means, the judgment mode is switched from the second judgment mode to the first judgment mode, which is disadvantageous for the player. That is, when the control mode is the second control mode, the player may be in a disadvantageous state. On the other hand, when the control mode is the first control mode, the game ball easily circulates downstream of the branch point of the first passage to the second passage, and the game ball enters the second ball entering means with a high probability. enter the ball. In this case, since there is no structure corresponding to the third ball-entering means on the second passage side, the determination mode is switched from the second determination mode to the first determination mode, which is disadvantageous to the player. never. For this reason, according to the feature sC1, it is possible to switch between an advantageous state and a disadvantageous state for the player by controlling whether the control mode is the first control mode or the second control mode. becomes. Therefore, it is possible to impart a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency to the player, thereby making the game more interesting.

In addition, according to the feature sC1, the game ball sorting means sorting the game balls can be visually recognized by the player from the outside. It is possible to impart a sense of urgency to the player as if he or she would suffer a disadvantage by switching from the second determination mode to the first determination mode. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature sC2]
The gaming machine according to feature sC1,
The game ball sorting means is
A gaming machine characterized in that the probability of allocating game balls to the third path is lower than the probability of allocating game balls to a portion downstream of the branch point in the second path.

According to the feature sC2, the probability of switching the determination mode from the second determination mode to the first determination mode can be set relatively low. For this reason, the probability that the player will be in a disadvantageous state can be made relatively low.

[Feature sC3]
A gaming machine according to feature sC1 or feature sC2,
The control means is
When the number of executions of the game round after the control mode shifts from the first control mode to the second control mode reaches a predetermined number of times, the control mode is changed from the second control mode to the first control Mode transition means (MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the first fluctuation stopping process in FIG. 360 executed by the MPU 62)
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature sC3, when the number of game times executed after the control mode transitions from the first control mode to the second control mode reaches a predetermined number of times, the control mode is changed from the second control mode to the first control mode. is transferred to When the control mode is the first control mode, the determination mode is switched from the second determination mode to the first determination mode because there is no possibility of the ball entering the third ball entering means as described above. The player is not put in a disadvantageous state due to being caught, and the game rounds executed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means can be performed continuously. Therefore, according to the feature sC3, in the state where the control mode is the second control mode, there is no possibility that the player will be in a disadvantageous state, and the game ball is executed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means. It is possible to give the player a feeling of anticipation that a transition to a special state (for example, the invincible zone in the eighth embodiment) in which the game rounds can be played continuously can be performed. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature sC4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features sC1 to sC3,
Provided with privilege granting means for granting a privilege,
The privilege granting means is
when the special information corresponding to the game round to be executed satisfies the predetermined condition (when a jackpot is won), a privilege granting means upon establishment of a predetermined condition for granting a privilege;
when the special information corresponding to the game round to be executed satisfies a specific condition (when a special small win is won), a special condition fulfillment benefit granting means for granting a benefit;
with
The control means is
When the control mode is the second control mode, the determination mode is the second determination mode, and the special information corresponding to the game round to be executed satisfies the specific condition, the control mode is the second control mode. from the second control mode to the first control mode.

According to the feature sC4, in a state where the control mode is the second control mode and the determination mode is the second determination mode, the control mode is A transition is made from the second control mode to the first control mode. When the control mode is the first control mode, the determination mode is switched from the second determination mode to the first determination mode because there is no possibility of the ball entering the third ball entering means as described above. The player is not put in a disadvantageous state due to being caught, and the game rounds executed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means can be performed continuously. Therefore, according to the feature sC4, in the state where the control mode is the second control mode, there is no possibility that the player will be in a disadvantageous state, and the game ball is executed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means. It is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation that a transition to a special state (for example, the invincible zone in the eighth embodiment) in which the game rounds can be played continuously can be performed. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature sC5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features sC1 to sC4,
A fourth ball entry means (through gate 35) provided above the ball entry port of the first passage and capable of entering a game ball,
The state transition means is
Means for performing a predetermined lottery triggered by passing through the fourth ball entry means;
means for transitioning the state of the auxiliary means to the second state when the result of the predetermined lottery is a predetermined result;
with
When the control mode is the second control mode, the game ball entering the fourth ball entering means (through gate 35) is configured to flow from the first passage to the second passage. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature sC5, when the control mode is the second control mode, the game ball entering the fourth ball entering means flows from the first passage to the second passage. A game ball does not circulate downstream of a branch point to a second path in the first path. Therefore, when the control mode is the second control mode, it is possible to ensure that the game ball that has entered the fourth ball entering means enters the first ball entering means. For this reason, it is possible to improve the accuracy of entering the game ball into the first ball entering means.

[Feature sC6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features sC1 to sC5,
First special information that is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and the special information acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entering means Acquired information storage means for storing second special information that is
The game round execution means is
A first special information game round for notifying the result of determination by the determining means for the first special information, and a game round for notifying the result of determination by the determining means for the second special information. a means for executing in parallel a second special information game round which is
Said second game time in a state in which said control mode is said first control mode and said determination mode is said first determination mode, when said second special information game time is defined as said second game time to a time longer than the time that can be set as the second game time in a state in which the control mode is the first control mode and the determination mode is the second determination mode;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature sC6, in a state where the control mode is the first control mode and the determination mode is the first determination mode, that is, in the normal state, the player shoots a game ball toward the ball entrance of the first passage. In this case, the game ball can be entered into the second ball entering means. However, according to the characteristic sC6, the second special information game time is set to a relatively long time in the state where the control mode is the first control mode and the determination mode is the first determination mode. Therefore, it is possible to suppress repeated execution of determination by the determining means triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second ball entering means in a short period of time. As a result, according to the feature sC6, the player is caused to shoot a game ball aiming at the second ball entering means in a state where the control mode is the first control mode and the determination mode is the first determination mode. can give up.

<Characteristic sD group>
The feature sD group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eighth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature sD1]
A distribution area (game area PA) in which game balls circulate,
A first passage (main line passage portion 210) provided in the circulation area for circulating game balls;
A second passage (first branch passage portion 220) which is provided in the circulation area and which is a passage for circulating game balls and branches from the middle of the first passage;
A first ball entry means (right first starting port 44) provided in the second passage and capable of entering a game ball;
a second ball entry means (second starting port 34) into which the game ball that has circulated through the first passage can enter;
information acquiring means for acquiring special information triggered by the entry of a game ball into each of a plurality of ball entering means including at least the first ball entering means and the second ball entering means;
Means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition, and includes a first determination mode (low-probability mode) and the first determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination. a second determination mode (high-probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher than in the first determination mode;
When one game round is defined as the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended, a game round execution means (main control unit) for executing the game round MPU 62 on the board 61 side, and game round control processing in FIG. 351 executed by it);
In a gaming machine comprising
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) provided at a branch point of the first passage to the second passage and assisting the entry of a game ball into the second passage;
The state of the auxiliary means is divided into a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second path, and a state that makes it possible or easy for a game ball to enter the second path. a state transition means for transitioning between a second state which is a state to
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein the control mode in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means is a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode. a control means having at least a second control mode (high-frequency support mode) in which entry of game balls into the second path is easier than
Judgment mode switching means ( The game ball distribution device 240, the fall port 252, the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side, and the game ball distribution control process of FIG.
A fourth ball entry means (through gate 35) provided above the ball entry port of the first passage and capable of entering a game ball;
with
The state transition means is
Means for performing a predetermined lottery triggered by passing through the fourth ball entry means;
means for transitioning the state of the auxiliary means to the second state when the result of the predetermined lottery is a predetermined result;
with
It is characterized in that, when the control mode is the second control mode, the game ball entering the fourth ball entering means flows from the first passage to the second passage. game machine.

According to the feature sD1, when the control mode is the second control mode, the game ball entering the fourth ball entering means flows from the first passage to the second passage. A game ball does not circulate to the downstream side of the branch point to the second path in the first path. Therefore, when the control mode is the second control mode, the game ball entering the fourth ball entering means can be entered into the first ball entering means without fail. For this reason, it is possible to improve the accuracy with which the game ball is entered into the first ball entering means.

Further, according to the feature sD1, when the control mode is the second control mode, the game ball always enters the first ball entering means, but the determination mode switching means changes the determination mode to the second with a predetermined probability. Since the second judgment mode is switched to the first judgment mode, the player may be put in a disadvantageous state. On the other hand, when the control mode is the first control mode, the game ball easily circulates downstream of the branch point of the first passage to the second passage, and the game ball enters the second ball entering means with a high probability. enter the ball. In this case, unlike the second passage side, since the determination mode is not switched from the second determination mode to the first determination mode, there is no possibility that the player will be in a disadvantageous state. It is possible to continuously perform game rounds triggered by the entry of a game ball into the ball means. Therefore, according to the feature sD1, in the state where the control mode is the second control mode, there is no possibility that the player will be in a disadvantageous state, and the game ball is executed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means. It is possible to give the player a feeling of anticipation that a transition to a special state (for example, the invincible zone in the eighth embodiment) in which the game rounds can be played continuously can be performed. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

[Feature sD2]
The gaming machine according to feature sD1,
The determination mode switching means is
A third passage (second branch passage portion 230) which is provided in the circulation area and which is a passage for circulating game balls and branches from the middle of the second passage;
a third ball entry means (falling port 252) into which a game ball that has circulated through the third passage can enter;
Judgment mode control means capable of switching the judgment mode from the second judgment mode to the first judgment mode when the game ball enters the third ball entering means;
Game ball distributing means (game ball distributing means) provided at a branch point of the second passage to the third passage and distributing game balls between the downstream portion of the second passage from the branch point and the third passage Sorting device 240) and
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature sD2, a part of the determination mode switching means can be configured by a hardware configuration including the third path and the game ball sorting means. Therefore, by making the game ball sorting means sorting the game balls visible to the player from the outside, the determination mode is switched from the second determination mode to the first determination mode, thereby causing a disadvantage. It is possible to impart a sense of urgency to the player, as if he or she were afraid of being put away. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature sD3]
The gaming machine according to feature sD2,
The game ball sorting means is
A gaming machine characterized in that the probability of allocating game balls to said third path is lower than the probability of allocating game balls to a portion downstream of said branch point in said second path.

According to the characteristic sD3, the probability of the determination mode switching from the second determination mode to the first determination mode can be set relatively low. For this reason, the probability that the player will suffer a disadvantage can be made relatively low.

[Feature sD4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features sD1 to sD3,
The control means is
When the number of executions of the game cycle after the control mode is shifted from the first control mode to the second control mode reaches a predetermined number of times, the control mode is changed from the second control mode to the first control Means for shifting to mode (MPU 62 on main control board 61 side and first fluctuation stop processing in FIG. 360 executed by MPU 62)
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature sD4, when the number of game times executed after the control mode transitions from the first control mode to the second control mode reaches a predetermined number of times, the control mode is changed from the second control mode to the first control mode. is transferred to As described above, in the state where the control mode is the first control mode, there is no possibility that the player will be in a disadvantageous state, and execution is triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means. Game rounds can be played continuously. Therefore, according to the feature sD4, it is possible to further give the player a sense of anticipation for transitioning to the above-described special state, and as a result, it is possible to further improve the amusement of the game.

[Feature sD5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features sD1 to sD4,
Equipped with privilege granting means for granting a privilege,
The privilege granting means is
when the special information corresponding to the game round to be executed satisfies the predetermined condition (when a jackpot is won), a privilege granting means upon establishment of a predetermined condition for granting a privilege;
when the special information corresponding to the game round to be executed satisfies a specific condition (when a special small win is won), a special condition fulfillment benefit granting means for granting a benefit;
with
The control means is
When the control mode is the second control mode, the determination mode is the second determination mode, and the special information corresponding to the game round to be executed satisfies the specific condition, the control mode is the second control mode. from the second control mode to the first control mode.

According to the characteristic sD5, in a state where the control mode is the second control mode and the determination mode is the second determination mode, the control mode is A transition is made from the second control mode to the first control mode. As described above, in the state where the control mode is the first control mode, there is no possibility that the player will be in a disadvantageous state, and execution is triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means. Game rounds can be played continuously. Therefore, according to the feature sD5, it is possible to give the player a greater sense of anticipation for the transition to the special state described above, and as a result, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature sD6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features sD1 to sD5,
First special information that is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and the special information acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entering means Acquired information storage means for storing second special information that is
The game round execution means is
A first special information game round for notifying the result of determination by the determining means for the first special information, and a game round for notifying the result of determination by the determining means for the second special information. a means for executing in parallel a second special information game round which is
Said second game time in a state in which said control mode is said first control mode and said determination mode is said first determination mode, when said second special information game time is defined as said second game time to a time longer than the time that can be set as the second game time in a state in which the control mode is the first control mode and the determination mode is the second determination mode;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature sD6, in a state where the control mode is the first control mode and the determination mode is the first determination mode, that is, in the normal state, the player shoots a game ball toward the ball entrance of the first passage. In this case, the game ball can be entered into the second ball entering means. However, according to the feature sD6, the time of the second special information game is set to a relatively long time in the state where the control mode is the first control mode and the determination mode is the first determination mode. Therefore, it is possible to suppress repeated execution of determination by the determining means triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second ball entering means in a short period of time. As a result, according to the feature sD6, the player is caused to shoot a game ball aiming at the second ball entering means in a state where the control mode is the first control mode and the determination mode is the first determination mode. can give up.

<Characteristic sE group>
The feature sE group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eighth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature sE1]
A distribution area (game area PA) in which game balls circulate,
A first passage (main line passage portion 210) provided in the circulation area for circulating game balls;
A second passage (first branch passage portion 220) which is provided in the circulation area and which is a passage for circulating game balls and branches from the middle of the first passage;
A first ball entry means (right first starting port 44) provided in the second passage and capable of entering a game ball;
a second ball entry means (second starting port 34) into which the game ball that has circulated through the first passage can enter;
information acquiring means for acquiring special information triggered by the entry of a game ball into each of a plurality of ball entering means including at least the first ball entering means and the second ball entering means;
Means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition, and includes a first determination mode (low-probability mode) and the first determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination. a second determination mode (high-probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher than in the first determination mode;
When one game round is defined as the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended, a game round execution means (main control unit) for executing the game round MPU 62 on the board 61 side, and game round control processing in FIG. 351 executed by it);
In a gaming machine comprising
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) provided at a branch point of the first passage to the second passage and assisting the entry of a game ball into the second passage;
The state of the auxiliary means is divided into a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second path, and a state that makes it possible or easy for a game ball to enter the second path. a state transition means for transitioning between a second state which is a state to
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein the control mode in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means is a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode. a control means having at least a second control mode (high-frequency support mode) in which entry of game balls into the second path is easier than
Judgment mode switching means ( The game ball distribution device 240, the fall port 252, the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side, and the game ball distribution control process of FIG.
First special information that is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and the special information acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entering means Acquisition information storage means for storing second special information which is
with
The control means is
Means for shifting the control mode from the second control mode to the first control mode when a specific condition is satisfied (the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the first fluctuation stopping process in FIG. 360 executed by the MPU 62 ),
The game round execution means is
A first special information game round for notifying the result of determination by the determining means for the first special information, and a game round for notifying the result of determination by the determining means for the second special information. a means for executing in parallel a second special information game round which is
Said second game time in a state in which said control mode is said first control mode and said determination mode is said first determination mode, when said second special information game time is defined as said second game time to a time longer than the time that can be set as the second game time in a state in which the control mode is the first control mode and the determination mode is the second determination mode;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the characteristic sE1, in the state where the control mode is the second control mode, it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the second passage than in the state where the control mode is the first control mode, and the game ball enters the first passage with a high probability. Enter the ball into the ball means. However, in a state where the control mode is the second control mode, when a game ball enters the first ball entering means, the judgment mode switching means changes the judgment mode from the second judgment mode to the first with a predetermined probability. Since the mode is switched to the determination mode, the player may be put in a disadvantageous state. Then, when the specific condition is satisfied, the control mode is switched from the second control mode to the first control mode. When the control mode is the first control mode, the game ball easily circulates downstream of the branch point of the first passage to the second passage, and the game ball enters the second ball entering means with a high probability. do. In this case, unlike the second passage side, since the determination mode is not switched from the second determination mode to the first determination mode, there is no possibility that the player will be in a disadvantageous state. It is possible to continuously perform game rounds triggered by the entry of a game ball into the ball means. Therefore, according to the feature sE1, in the state where the control mode is the second control mode, there is no possibility that the player will be in a disadvantageous state, and the game ball is executed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means. It is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation to shift to a state in which the game rounds can be played continuously. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Further, according to the feature sE1, in a state where the control mode is the first control mode and the determination mode is the first determination mode, that is, in the normal state, the player moves the game ball toward the entrance of the first passage. is launched, the game ball can be entered into the second ball entering means. However, according to the feature sE1, the second special information game time is set to a relatively long time in the state where the control mode is the first control mode and the determination mode is the first determination mode. Therefore, it is possible to suppress repeated execution of determination by the determining means triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second ball entering means in a short period of time. As a result, according to the feature sE1, the player is caused to shoot a game ball aiming at the second ball entering means in a state where the control mode is the first control mode and the determination mode is the first determination mode. can give up.

[Feature sE2]
The gaming machine according to feature sE1,
The determination mode switching means is
A third passage (second branch passage portion 230) that is provided in the circulation area and is a passage for circulating game balls and branches from the middle of the second passage;
a third ball entry means (falling port 252) into which a game ball that has circulated through the third passage can enter;
Judgment mode control means capable of switching the judgment mode from the second judgment mode to the first judgment mode when the game ball enters the third ball entering means;
Game ball distributing means (game ball distributing means) provided at a branch point of the second passage to the third passage and distributing game balls between the downstream portion of the second passage from the branch point and the third passage Sorting device 240),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature sE2, a part of the determination mode switching means can be configured by a hardware configuration including the third path and the game ball sorting means. For this reason, by making the game ball distribution means distribute the game balls so that the player can visually recognize from the outside, the judgment mode is switched from the second judgment mode to the first judgment mode. It is possible to impart a sense of urgency to the player, as if he or she were afraid of being put away. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature sE3]
The gaming machine according to feature sE2,
The game ball sorting means is
A gaming machine characterized in that the probability of allocating game balls to the third path is lower than the probability of allocating game balls to a portion downstream of the branch point in the second path.

According to feature sE3, the probability of the determination mode switching from the second determination mode to the first determination mode can be set relatively low. For this reason, the probability that the player will suffer a disadvantage can be made relatively low.

[Feature sE4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features sE1 to sE3,
The control means is
When the number of executions of the game cycle after the control mode is shifted from the first control mode to the second control mode reaches a predetermined number of times, the control mode is changed from the second control mode to the first control Means for shifting to mode (MPU 62 on main control board 61 side and first fluctuation stop processing in FIG. 360 executed by MPU 62)
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature sE4, when the number of game rounds executed after the control mode shifts from the first control mode to the second control mode reaches a predetermined number of times, the control mode is changed from the second control mode to the first control mode. is transferred to As described above, in the state where the control mode is the first control mode, there is no possibility that the player will be in a disadvantageous state, and execution is triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means. Game rounds can be played continuously. Therefore, according to the characteristic sE4, it is possible to further give the player a sense of anticipation for transitioning to the above-described special state, and as a result, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature sE5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features sE1 to sE4,
Equipped with privilege granting means for granting a privilege,
The privilege granting means is
When the special information corresponding to the game round to be executed satisfies the predetermined condition (when a jackpot is won), a privilege granting means upon establishment of a predetermined condition for granting a privilege;
when the special information corresponding to the game round to be executed satisfies a specific condition (when a special small win is won), a special condition fulfillment benefit granting means for granting a benefit;
with
The control means is
When the control mode is the second control mode, the determination mode is the second determination mode, and the special information corresponding to the game round to be executed satisfies the specific condition, the control mode is the second control mode. from the second control mode to the first control mode.

According to the feature sE5, in a state where the control mode is the second control mode and the determination mode is the second determination mode, if the special information corresponding to the game round to be executed satisfies a specific condition, the player To provide a player with a sense of anticipation for transitioning to a state in which the game rounds executed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means can be continuously performed without the possibility of being in a disadvantageous state. can be granted. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature sE6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features sE1 to sE5,
A fourth ball entry means (through gate 35) provided above the ball entry port of the first passage and capable of entering a game ball,
The state transition means is
Means for performing a predetermined lottery triggered by passing through the fourth ball entry means;
means for transitioning the state of the auxiliary means to the second state when the result of the predetermined lottery is a predetermined result;
with
When the control mode is the second control mode, the game ball entering the fourth ball entering means (through gate 35) is configured to flow from the first passage to the second passage. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature sE6, when the control mode is the second control mode, the game ball entering the fourth ball entering means flows from the first passage to the second passage. A game ball does not circulate to the downstream side of the branch point to the second path in the first path. Therefore, when the control mode is the second control mode, the game ball entering the fourth ball entering means can be entered into the first ball entering means without fail. For this reason, it is possible to improve the accuracy with which the game ball is entered into the first ball entering means.

<Characteristic sF group>
The feature sF group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and mainly extracted from the eighth embodiment.

[Feature sF1]
A distribution area (game area PA) in which game balls circulate,
A first ball entry means (right first starting port 44) provided in the circulation area and capable of entering a game ball;
A second ball entry means (second starting port 34) provided in the circulation area and capable of entering a game ball;
A third ball entry means (falling port 252) provided in the circulation area and capable of allowing a game ball to enter;
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry means;
The states of the auxiliary means are a state that makes it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the first ball entering means, and a state that makes it possible or easy for a game ball to enter the first ball entering means. a state transition means for transitioning between
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein the control mode in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means is a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode. a control means having at least a second control mode (high-frequency support mode) in which it is easier for a game ball to enter the first ball entry means than
information acquiring means for acquiring special information triggered by the entry of a game ball into each of a plurality of ball entering means including at least the first ball entering means and the second ball entering means;
Means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition, and includes a first determination mode (low-probability mode) and the first determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination. a second determination mode (high-probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher than in the first determination mode;
When one game round is defined as the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended, a game round execution means (main control unit) for executing the game round MPU 62 on the board 61 side, and game round control processing in FIG. 351 executed by it);
Judgment mode switching means capable of switching the judgment mode from the second judgment mode to the first judgment mode when a game ball enters the third ball entry means (falling port 252, main control board 61 side MPU 62, ball entry processing of the fall opening in FIG. 349 executed by MPU 62),
In a gaming machine comprising
In a second determination second control state (high accuracy high support state) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, the game ball entering the second ball entry means It is impossible or difficult to enter a ball, and it is possible or easy to enter a game ball into the third ball entering means,
In a second determination first control state (high probability low support state) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the first control mode, the number of game balls entering the second ball entry means It is possible or easy to enter a ball, and it is impossible or difficult to enter a game ball into the third ball entering means.
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature sF1, in the second determination second control state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, the state of the auxiliary means is the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry means. Since the ball is in a state that allows or facilitates the ball, it is easy to enter the game ball into the first ball entering means that can trigger the execution of the game round. However, in the second determination second control state, since it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the third ball entering means, the determination mode is switched from the second determination mode to the first determination mode, and the player may be unfavorable for On the other hand, in the second determination first control state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the first control mode, the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means that can trigger the execution of the game round. Although it is easy to enter the game ball into the third ball entering means, it is impossible or difficult to enter, so the judgment mode is switched from the second judgment mode to the first judgment mode, which is disadvantageous for the player. state is not possible. Therefore, according to the feature sF1, in the second determination second control state, there is no possibility that the player will be in a disadvantageous state, and the game round executed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means to the second determination first control state (for example, the invincible zone in the eighth embodiment), in which the player can be given a sense of anticipation. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature sF2]
The gaming machine according to feature sF1,
The control means is
When the number of executions of the game cycle after the control mode is shifted from the first control mode to the second control mode reaches a predetermined number of times, the control mode is changed from the second control mode to the first control Means for shifting to mode (MPU 62 on main control board 61 side and first fluctuation stop processing in FIG. 360 executed by MPU 62)
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature sF2, when the number of game rounds executed after the control mode shifts from the first control mode to the second control mode reaches a predetermined number of times, the control mode is changed from the second control mode to the first control mode. is transferred to For this reason, in the second determination second control state, when the number of game rounds executed after the control mode shifts from the first control mode to the second control mode reaches a predetermined number of times, the second determination first control A transition to a state is made. In the second determination first control state, as described above, the game round executed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means is executed without the possibility of the player being in a disadvantageous state. Can be done continuously. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a feeling of anticipation that the number of game rounds executed after the control mode is shifted from the first control mode to the second control mode will reach a predetermined number of times, and the game will be interesting. Further improvements can be made.

[Feature sF3]
A gaming machine according to feature sF1 or feature sF2,
Equipped with privilege granting means for granting a privilege,
The privilege granting means is
when the special information corresponding to the game round to be executed satisfies the predetermined condition (when a jackpot is won), a privilege granting means upon establishment of a predetermined condition for granting a privilege;
when the special information corresponding to the game round to be executed satisfies a specific condition (when a special small win is won), a special condition fulfillment benefit granting means for granting a benefit;
with
The control means is
Means for shifting the control mode from the second control mode to the first control mode when the special information corresponding to the game round to be executed satisfies the specific condition in the second determination second control state. A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature sF3, in the second determination second control state, when the special information corresponding to the game round to be executed satisfies a specific condition, the control mode shifts from the second control mode to the first control mode, i.e. , the transition to the second determination first control state is made. In the second determination first control state, as described above, the game round executed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means is executed without the possibility of the player being in a disadvantageous state. Can be done continuously. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a feeling of anticipation that the special information corresponding to the game round to be executed satisfies a specific condition, thereby making the game more interesting.

[Feature sF4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features sF1 to sF3,
First special information that is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and the special information acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entering means Acquired information storage means for storing second special information that is
The game round execution means is
A first special information game round for notifying the result of determination by the determining means for the first special information, and a game round for notifying the result of determination by the determining means for the second special information. a means for executing in parallel a second special information game round which is
When the time of the second special information game is set as the second game time, the second game time in a state where the determination mode is the first determination mode and the control mode is the first control mode means for setting a time longer than the time that can be set as the second game time in the second determination first control state;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature sF4, in a state where the control mode is the first control mode and the determination mode is the first determination mode, that is, in the normal state, the player shoots a game ball toward the ball entrance of the first passage. In this case, the game ball can be entered into the second ball entering means. However, according to the feature sF4, the time of the second special information game is set to a relatively long time in the normal state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode and the control mode is the first control mode. Therefore, it is possible to suppress repeated execution of determination by the determining means triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second ball entering means in a short period of time. As a result, according to the feature sF4, it is possible for the player to give up shooting the game ball aiming at the second ball entering means in the normal state.

<Characteristic sG group>
The feature sG group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and mainly extracted from the eighth embodiment.

[Feature sG1]
A distribution area (game area PA) in which game balls circulate,
A first ball entry means (right first starting port 44) provided in the circulation area and capable of entering a game ball;
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry means;
The states of the auxiliary means are a state that makes it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the first ball entering means, and a state that makes it possible or easy for a game ball to enter the first ball entering means. a state transition means for transitioning between
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein the control mode in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means is a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode. a control means having at least a second control mode (high-frequency support mode) in which it is easier for a game ball to enter the first ball entry means than
a second ball entry means (second starting port 34) provided in the circulation area and capable of entering a game ball whose entry into the first ball entry means is rejected by the auxiliary means;
information acquiring means for acquiring special information triggered by the entry of a game ball into each of a plurality of ball entering means including at least the first ball entering means and the second ball entering means;
Means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition, and includes a first determination mode (low-probability mode) and the first determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination. a second determination mode (high-probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher than in the first determination mode;
When one game round is defined as the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended, a game round execution means (main control unit) for executing the game round MPU 62 on the board 61 side, and game round control processing in FIG. 351 executed by it);
In a gaming machine comprising
First special information that is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and the special information acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entering means Acquired information storage means for storing second special information that is
The game round execution means is
A first special information game round for notifying the result of determination by the determining means for the first special information, and a game round for notifying the result of determination by the determining means for the second special information. Parallel execution means for executing in parallel with the second special information game round,
When the time of the second special information game round is the second game time, the second game time in the state where the control mode is the second control mode is the second game time when the determination mode is the second determination mode. a second game time setting means for setting a time longer than the time that can be set as the second game time in a second determination first control state (high-probability-low support state) in which the control mode is the first control mode; ,
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature sG1, in the state where the control mode is the second control mode, the state of the auxiliary means is a state that enables or facilitates the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry means. It becomes impossible or difficult to enter the game ball into the ball means. However, while the control mode is the first control mode, the second special information acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entering means is reserved in the acquired information storage means, and the first control mode is established. In the state of the second control mode that has been transferred from the state, the determination by the determination means may be executed based on the reserved second special information. Since the determination by the determination means based on the second special information is generally more advantageous for the player than the determination by the determination means based on the second special information, the determination by the determination means based on the withheld second special information. If it is done in succession, the player will be in an excessively advantageous situation. On the other hand, according to the feature sG1, when the time of the second special information game is set as the second game time, the second game time in the state where the control mode is the second control mode is the second determination second game time. Since the time is set to be longer than the time that can be set as the second game time in the 1 control state, it is possible to suppress the second special information held in the acquired information storage means from being repeatedly digested in a short period of time. , it is possible to prevent the player from being in an excessively advantageous state.

[Feature sG2]
The gaming machine according to feature sG1,
The second game time setting means is
The second game time in the second determination second control state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode is the second game time in the second determination first control state. A game machine characterized by comprising: means for setting a time longer than a time that can be set as a game time.

According to the feature sG2, the second game time in the second determination second control state is set longer than the time that can be set as the second game time in the second determination first control state. Therefore, in the game state before the second determination second control state, the second special information acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entering means is reserved in the acquired information storage means, and after the shift Second Determination In the second control state, the determination by the determination means may be executed based on the reserved second special information. On the other hand, according to the feature sG2, the second game time in the second determination second control state is set longer than the time that can be set as the second game time in the second determination first control state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the second special information held in the acquired information storage means from being repeatedly digested in a short period of time, and to prevent the player from becoming excessively advantageous.

[Feature sG3]
A gaming machine according to feature sG1 or feature sG2,
The second game time setting means is
The second game time in the first determination first control state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode and the control mode is the first control mode is the second game time in the second determination first control state. A game machine characterized by comprising: means for setting a time longer than a time that can be set as a game time.

According to the feature sG3, in the first determination first control state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode and the control mode is the first control mode, the player shoots the game ball toward the first ball entrance. In this case, the game ball can be entered into the second ball entering means. However, according to the feature sG3, the time of the second special information game is set to a relatively long time in the state where the determination mode is the first determination mode and the control mode is the first control mode. , it is possible to suppress repeated execution of determination by the determining means triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second ball entering means in a short period of time. As a result, according to the feature sG3, in the first determination first control state, it is possible to give up shooting the game ball aiming at the second ball entering means.

<Characteristic sH group>
The feature sH group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eighth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature sH1]
A distribution area (game area PA) in which game balls circulate,
A first ball entry means (through gate 35) provided in the circulation area and capable of entering a game ball;
A second ball entry means (right first starting port 44) provided in the circulation area, positioned below the first ball entry means, and capable of receiving a game ball;
a third ball entry means (out opening 251 in the starting opening unit) provided in the circulation area and positioned below the second ball entry means, and capable of receiving a game ball;
a fourth ball entry means (second starting port 34) provided in the circulation area, positioned below the first ball entry means, and capable of entering a game ball;
In a gaming machine comprising
In the first game state (high-probability-high support state), which is a specific game state, each of the plurality of game balls successively entering the first ball entering means is the second ball entering means and the third When a ball enters both ball entering means, one or a plurality of game balls entering the first ball entering means following the plurality of game balls enter the fourth ball entering means. A game machine characterized by comprising game state transition means for shifting to a game state (high-probability-low support state).

According to the feature sH1, in the first game state, which is a specific game state, each of the plurality of game balls that have entered the first ball entering means is the second ball entering means and the third ball entering means. When both are entered (when 50 game balls enter both the right first starting port 44 and the out port 251 in the starting port unit and the game is executed 50 times), the game state is shifted from the first game state to the second game state. In the second game state, one or a plurality of game balls that entered the first ball entry means following the plurality of game balls that entered the first ball entry means in the first game state are the fourth entry. It is in a state where it is possible to enter the means. Therefore, in the first game state, each of the plurality of game balls continuously entering the first ball entering means completes entering both the second ball entering means and the third ball entering means. In this case, the second game state is entered in which it is possible to continuously perform game rounds triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means. In the second game state, it is possible to continuously perform the game rounds triggered by the entry of the game ball into the fourth ball entry means, which is advantageous for the player. Therefore, according to the feature sH1, in the first game state, there is a sense of expectation and tension, such as whether or not the game ball entering the first ball entering means will enter both the second ball entering means and the third ball entering means. It is possible to give the feeling to the player, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature sH2]
The gaming machine according to feature sH1,
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is a first state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entering means, and the second state is a state in which a game ball enters the second ball entering means. a state transition means for transitioning between a second state that is an enabling or facilitating state;
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein the control mode in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means is a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode. a control means having at least a second control mode (high-frequency support mode) in which it is easier for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means than
with
A gaming machine, wherein the fourth ball-entering means is capable of entering a game ball whose entry into the second ball-entering means is denied by the auxiliary means.

According to the feature sH2, in the state where the control mode is the second control mode, it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter the second ball entering means, and it is impossible for a game ball to enter the fourth ball entering means. possible or difficult. Further, when the control mode is the first control mode, it becomes impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entering means, and it becomes possible or easy for a game ball to enter the fourth ball entering means. Become. Therefore, by switching the control mode between the first control mode and the second control mode, the game ball enters the second ball entering means and the game ball enters the fourth ball entering means. can be easily controlled. Therefore, it is excellent in controllability.

[Feature sH3]
The gaming machine according to feature sH2,
information acquisition means for acquiring special information triggered by the entry of a game ball into each of a plurality of ball entry means including at least the second ball entry means and the fourth ball entry means;
Means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition, and includes a first determination mode (low-probability mode) and the first determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination. a second determination mode (high-probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher than in the first determination mode;
When one game round is defined as the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended, a game round execution means (main control unit) for executing the game round MPU 62 on the board 61 side, and game round control processing in FIG. 351 executed by it);
a fifth ball entry means (falling port 252) provided in the circulation area and positioned below the second ball entry means, into which a game ball can enter;
Judgment mode switching means (game ball distribution device 240, fall port 252) capable of switching the judgment mode from the second judgment mode to the first judgment mode when a game ball enters the fifth ball entering means , MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side, and game ball distribution control processing in FIG. 380 executed by MPU 62)
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature sH3, the game ball entering the second ball entering means can enter either the third ball entering means or the fifth ball entering means. Therefore, the game ball entering the first ball entering means enters the second ball entering means and then enters the fifth ball entering means, and the determination mode is not switched from the second determination mode to the first determination mode. Such a sense of urgency can be imparted to the player. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature sH4]
The gaming machine according to feature sH3,
The control means is
When the number of executions of the game round after the control mode shifts from the first control mode to the second control mode reaches a predetermined number of times, the control mode is changed from the second control mode to the first control Mode transition means (MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the first fluctuation stopping process in FIG. 360 executed by the MPU 62)
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature sH4, in the state where the control mode is the second control mode, the game ball enters the second ball entering means with a higher probability than in the state where the control mode is the first control mode. However, when the control mode is the second control mode, there is a possibility that the game ball enters the fifth ball entering means after the game ball enters the second ball entering means. When a game ball enters the fifth ball entering means, the determination mode is switched from the second determination mode to the first determination mode, which may put the player in a disadvantageous state. Then, in a state in which the control mode is the second control mode, when the number of game rounds executed after the transition to the second control mode reaches a predetermined number of times, the control mode is changed from the second control mode to the first control mode can be switched. When the control mode is the first control mode, the game ball enters the fourth ball entering means with a high probability. In this case, since the game ball that has entered the second ball entering means will not enter the fifth ball entering means, there is no possibility that the player will be disadvantaged. It is possible to continuously perform game rounds that are triggered by the entry of a game ball into. Therefore, according to the feature sH4, in the state where the control mode is the second control mode, there is no possibility that the player will be in a disadvantageous state, and the entry of the game ball into the fourth ball entry means is executed as a trigger. It is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation that a transition to a special state (for example, the invincible zone in the eighth embodiment) in which the game rounds can be played continuously can be performed. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

[Feature sH5]
A gaming machine according to feature sH3 or feature sH4,
Equipped with privilege granting means for granting a privilege,
The privilege granting means is
When the special information corresponding to the game round to be executed satisfies the predetermined condition (when a jackpot is won), a privilege granting means upon establishment of a predetermined condition for granting a privilege;
when the special information corresponding to the game round to be executed satisfies a specific condition (when a special small win is won), a special condition fulfillment benefit granting means for granting a benefit;
with
The control means is
When the control mode is the second control mode, the determination mode is the second determination mode, and the special information corresponding to the game round to be executed satisfies the specific condition, the control mode is the second control mode. from the second control mode to the first control mode.

According to the feature sH5, in a state where the control mode is the second control mode and the determination mode is the second determination mode, the number of game rounds executed after the control mode shifts from the first control mode to the second control mode. reaches a predetermined number of times, and also when the special information corresponding to the game round to be executed satisfies a specific condition, the control mode is shifted from the second control mode to the first control mode. As described above, in the state where the control mode is the first control mode, there is no possibility that the player will be in a disadvantageous state, and execution is triggered by the entry of the game ball into the fourth ball entry means. Game rounds can be played continuously. Therefore, according to the feature sH5, it is possible to further give the player a sense of anticipation for transitioning to the above-described special state, and as a result, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

<Characteristic sI group>
The feature sI group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eighth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature sI1]
A distribution area (game area PA) in which game balls circulate,
A first ball entry means (right first starting port 44) provided in the circulation area and capable of entering a game ball;
information acquisition means for acquiring special information triggered by the entry of a game ball into each of a plurality of ball entry means including at least the first ball entry means;
Means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition, and includes a first determination mode (low-probability mode) and the first determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination. a second determination mode (high-probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher than in the first determination mode;
When one game round is defined as the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended, a game round execution means (main control unit) for executing the game round MPU 62 on the board 61 side, and game round control processing in FIG. 351 executed by it);
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry means;
The states of the auxiliary means are a state that makes it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the first ball entering means, and a state that makes it possible or easy for a game ball to enter the first ball entering means. a state transition means for transitioning between
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein the control modes in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means are a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and a second control mode (high frequency support mode). a control means comprising at least a frequency support mode);
In a gaming machine comprising
The control means changes the control mode to the second control mode when the number of executions of the game times after the control mode is shifted from the first control mode to the second control mode reaches a predetermined number of times. Control mode transition means for transitioning from to the first control mode (MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the first fluctuation stop processing in FIG. 360 executed by MPU 62),
In a second determination second control state (high accuracy high support state) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, the control mode is changed by the control mode transition means. Triggered by the transition from the second control mode to the first control mode, a second determination first control state (high Equipped with a game state transition means for transitioning the game state to a certain low support state),
A gaming machine, wherein the second determination first control state is more advantageous for the player than the second determination second control state.

According to the feature sI1, in the second determination second control state, when the number of game rounds executed after the control mode shifts from the first control mode to the second control mode reaches a predetermined number of times, the game state is shifted from the second determination second control state to the second determination first control state. The second determination first control state is more advantageous for the player than the second determination second control state. For this reason, according to the feature sI1, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation for transitioning to the highly advantageous second determination first control state in the second determination second control state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature sI2]
The gaming machine according to feature sI1,
Judgment mode switching means (game ball distribution device) capable of switching the judgment mode from the second judgment mode to the first judgment mode with a predetermined probability when a game ball enters the first ball entering means 240, the fall port 252, the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side, and the game ball distribution control process of FIG. 380 executed by the MPU 62);
A second ball entry means (second starting port 34) provided in the circulation area and capable of entering a game ball;
with
In the second determination second control state, it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter the first ball entering means, and it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entering means. becomes,
In the second determination first control state, it is impossible or difficult to enter a game ball into the first ball entering means, and it is possible or easy to enter a game ball into the second ball entering means. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature sI2, in the second determination second control state, the game ball enters the first ball entering means with a higher probability than in the state of the second determination first control state. However, when a game ball enters the first ball entering means, the judgment mode switching means switches the judgment mode from the second judgment mode to the first judgment mode with a predetermined probability. may be at a disadvantage. On the other hand, in the second determination first control state, the game ball enters the second ball entering means with a high probability. In this case, the determination mode is not switched from the second determination mode to the first determination mode as in the case where the game ball enters the first ball entry means, which is disadvantageous to the player. It is possible to continuously perform game rounds triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second ball entry means without the possibility of becoming. Therefore, according to the feature sI2, in the second determination second control state, there is no possibility that the player will be in a disadvantageous state, and the game round executed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means to the second determination first control state (for example, the invincible zone in the eighth embodiment), in which the player can be given a sense of anticipation. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

[Feature sI3]
A gaming machine according to feature sI1 or feature sI2,
Provided with privilege granting means for granting a privilege,
The privilege granting means is
When the special information corresponding to the game round to be executed satisfies the predetermined condition (when a jackpot is won), a privilege granting means upon establishment of a predetermined condition for granting a privilege;
when the special information corresponding to the game round to be executed satisfies a specific condition (when a special small win is won), a special condition fulfillment benefit granting means for granting a benefit;
with
The control means is
When the control mode is the second control mode, the determination mode is the second determination mode, and the special information corresponding to the game round to be executed satisfies the specific condition, the control mode is the second control mode. from the second control mode to the first control mode.

According to the feature sI3, in the second determination second control state, in addition to the case where the number of times the game is executed after the control mode transitions from the first control mode to the second control mode reaches a predetermined number of times, the execution Also when the special information corresponding to the game round to be played satisfies the specific condition, the control mode is shifted from the second control mode to the first control mode, and is shifted to the second determination first control state. As described above, in the second determination first control state, the game round executed with the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means as a trigger can be performed without the possibility of being in a disadvantageous state for the player. Can be done continuously. Therefore, according to the feature sI3, it is possible to further give the player a sense of anticipation for transitioning to the previously described second determination first control state (for example, the invincible zone in the eighth embodiment). As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

<Characteristic sJ group>
The feature sJ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eighth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature sJ1]
A distribution area (game area PA) in which game balls circulate,
A first ball entry means (right first starting port 44) provided in the circulation area and capable of entering a game ball;
information acquisition means for acquiring special information triggered by the entry of a game ball into each of a plurality of ball entry means including at least the first ball entry means;
Means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition, and includes a first determination mode (low-probability mode) and the first determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination. a second determination mode (high-probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher than in the first determination mode;
When one game round is defined as the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended, a game round execution means (main control unit) for executing the game round MPU 62 on the board 61 side, and game round control processing in FIG. 351 executed by it);
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry means;
The states of the auxiliary means are a state that makes it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the first ball entering means, and a state that makes it possible or easy for a game ball to enter the first ball entering means. a state transition means for transitioning between
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein the control modes in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means are a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and a second control mode (high frequency support mode). a control means comprising at least a frequency support mode);
a privilege granting means for granting a privilege;
In a gaming machine comprising
The privilege granting means is
When the special information corresponding to the game round to be executed satisfies the predetermined condition (when a jackpot is won), a privilege granting means upon establishment of a predetermined condition for granting a privilege;
when the special information corresponding to the game round to be executed satisfies a specific condition (when a special small win is won), a special condition fulfillment benefit granting means for granting a benefit;
with
The control means is
When the control mode is the second control mode, the determination mode is the second determination mode, and the special information corresponding to the game round to be executed satisfies the specific condition, the control mode is the second control mode. from the second control mode to the first control mode (MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side, and the game state transition process in FIG. 370 executed by MPU 62),
In a second determination second control state (high accuracy high support state) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, the control mode is changed by the control mode transition means. Triggered by the transition from the second control mode to the first control mode, a second determination first control state (high Equipped with a game state transition means for transitioning the game state to a certain low support state),
A gaming machine, wherein the second determination first control state is more advantageous for the player than the second determination second control state.

According to the characteristic sJ1, when the special information corresponding to the game round to be executed in the second determination second control state satisfies a specific condition, the game state changes from the second determination second control state to the second determination second control state. 1 control state. The second determination first control state is more advantageous for the player than the second determination second control state. For this reason, according to the feature sJ1, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation for shifting to the second determination first control state, which is highly advantageous, in the second determination second control state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature sJ2]
The gaming machine according to feature sJ1,
Judgment mode switching means (game ball distribution device) capable of switching the judgment mode from the second judgment mode to the first judgment mode with a predetermined probability when a game ball enters the first ball entering means 240, the fall port 252, the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side, and the game ball distribution control process of FIG. 380 executed by the MPU 62);
A second ball entry means (second starting port 34) provided in the circulation area and capable of entering a game ball;
with
In the second determination second control state, it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter the first ball entering means, and it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entering means. becomes,
In the second determination first control state, it is impossible or difficult to enter a game ball into the first ball entering means, and it is possible or easy to enter a game ball into the second ball entering means. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature sJ2, in the second determination second control state, the game ball enters the first ball entering means with a higher probability than in the state of the second determination first control state. However, when a game ball enters the first ball entering means, the determination mode switching means switches the determination mode from the second determination mode to the first determination mode with a predetermined probability. may be at a disadvantage. On the other hand, in the second determination first control state, the game ball enters the second ball entering means with a high probability. In this case, the determination mode is not switched from the second determination mode to the first determination mode as in the case where the game ball enters the first ball entering means, and thus the player is in a disadvantageous state. It is possible to continuously perform the game rounds that are triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means without the possibility of becoming. Therefore, according to the feature sJ2, in the second determination second control state, there is no possibility that the player will be in a disadvantageous state, and the game round executed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means to the second determination first control state (for example, the invincible zone in the eighth embodiment), in which the player can be given a sense of anticipation. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

[Feature sJ3]
A gaming machine according to feature sJ1 or feature sJ2,
The control means is
When the number of executions of the game round after the control mode shifts from the first control mode to the second control mode reaches a predetermined number of times, the control mode is changed from the second control mode to the first control A game machine characterized by comprising means for shifting to a mode.

According to feature sJ3, in the second determination second control state, in addition to the case where the special information corresponding to the game round to be executed satisfies a specific condition, the control mode is changed from the first control mode to the second control mode. Also when the number of game rounds executed after the shift reaches a predetermined number, the control mode is shifted from the second control mode to the first control mode, and is shifted to the second determination first control state. As described above, in the second determination first control state, the game round executed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means can be performed without the possibility of being in a disadvantageous state for the player. Can be done continuously. Therefore, according to the feature sJ3, it is possible to further give the player a sense of anticipation for transitioning to the previously described second determination first control state (for example, the invincible zone in the eighth embodiment). As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

<Characteristic sK group>
The feature sK group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eighth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature sK1]
A distribution area (game area PA) in which game balls circulate,
A ball entry means (right first start port 44) provided in the circulation area and capable of entering a game ball;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information triggered by the entry of a game ball into said ball entry means;
Means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition, and includes a first determination mode (low-probability mode) and the first determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination. a second determination mode (high-probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher than in the first determination mode;
Judgment mode transition means (ball entry processing for a fall opening) for shifting the judgment executed by the judgment means from the second judgment mode to the first judgment mode when a specific condition is satisfied;
When one game round is defined as the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended, a game round execution means (main control unit) for executing the game round MPU 62 on the board 61 side, and game round control processing in FIG. 351 executed by it);
In a gaming machine comprising
In a specific game state (high probability high support state) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the specific condition can be established, the number of executions of the game round after transition to the specific game state is the specific A game state transition means for shifting from the specific game state to a predetermined game state (high probability low support state) in which the specific condition cannot be satisfied when a predetermined number of times is reached without the condition being satisfied;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature sK1, in the specific game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the determination performed by the determination means shifts from the second determination mode to the first determination mode when the specific condition is met. On the other hand, in the specific game state, if the specific condition is not satisfied for a period of time until the number of game rounds executed after the transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number, the specific condition is satisfied from the specific game state. It shifts to a predetermined game state that cannot be played. In this predetermined game state, since the specific condition cannot be satisfied, the determination mode is not changed from the second determination mode to the first determination mode. In a predetermined game state, it is possible to repeatedly execute a game turn triggered by the entry of a game ball into the ball entry means.

For this reason, according to the feature sK1, in the specific game state, the player is requested not to satisfy the specific condition during the period in which the number of times the game is executed after transition to the specific game state is equal to or less than a predetermined number of times. A sense of urgency (I don't want you to fall down) and a sense of expectation that the number of executions of the game rounds reaches a predetermined number before a specific condition is established can be imparted together. Then, when the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times without the specific condition being satisfied, the player is sent to a predetermined game state (for example, The feeling of relief that can be transferred to the invincible zone in the eighth embodiment) and the continuous execution of the game rounds triggered by the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means, so that the player can enter the ball in a predetermined game state in the near future. It is also possible to impart a feeling of expectation that the special information acquired with the entry of the game ball into the means as a trigger satisfies a predetermined condition. As described above, according to the feature sK1, by giving the player emotions such as a sense of anticipation, a sense of urgency, and a sense of relief, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

[Feature sK2]
The gaming machine according to feature sK1,
The determination mode transition means is
a ball entry means for transitioning to a determination mode in which a game ball can enter;
means for determining that the specific condition is established when a game ball enters the determination mode transition ball entry means;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the characteristic sK2, when a game ball enters the determination mode transition ball entry means, it is determined that the specific condition is established, and the determination executed by the determination means changes from the second determination mode to the first determination mode. migrated. Therefore, according to the feature sK2, the player can recognize whether or not the specific condition is satisfied from whether or not the game ball enters the determination mode transition ball entry means. It can give you more sense of urgency.

[Feature sK3]
A gaming machine according to feature sK1 or feature sK2,
A first passage (main line passage portion 210) provided in the circulation area for circulating game balls;
A second passage (first branch passage portion 220) which is provided in the circulation area and which is a passage for circulating game balls and branches from the middle of the first passage;
a first ball-entering means (right first starting port 44) provided in the second passage and serving as the ball-entering means;
a second ball entry means (second starting port 34) as the ball entry means, into which the game ball that has circulated through the first passage can enter;
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) provided at a branch point of the first passage to the second passage and assisting the entry of a game ball into the second passage;
The state of the auxiliary means is divided into a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second path, and a state that makes it possible or easy for a game ball to enter the second path. a state transition means for transitioning between a second state which is a state to
with
The determination mode transition means is
Means (game ball vibration) capable of switching the determination mode from the second determination mode to the first determination mode with a predetermined probability when a game ball enters the first ball entry means in the second passage Divider 240, fall port 252, MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side, and game ball distribution control processing in FIG. 380 executed by MPU 62)
The game state transition means is
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein the control mode in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means is a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode. a second control mode (high-frequency support mode) in which a game ball is easier to enter the second path than the second control mode, and the control mode is changed from the first control mode to the second control mode. When the number of executions of the game round after the shift reaches a predetermined number of times, the control means (MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side, First fluctuation stop processing in FIG. 360 executed by MPU 62)
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature sK3, in the state where the control mode is the second control mode, it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the second passage than in the state where the control mode is the first control mode, and the game ball enters the first passage with a high probability. Enter the ball into the ball means. However, in a state where the control mode is the second control mode, when a game ball enters the first ball entering means, the judgment mode switching means changes the judgment mode from the second judgment mode to the first with a predetermined probability. Since the mode is switched to the determination mode, the player may be put in a disadvantageous state. Then, in a state in which the control mode is the second control mode, when the number of game rounds executed after the transition to the second control mode reaches a predetermined number of times, the control mode is changed from the second control mode to the first control mode can be switched. When the control mode is the first control mode, the game ball easily circulates downstream of the branch point of the first passage to the second passage, and the game ball enters the second ball entering means with a high probability. do. In this case, unlike the second passage side, since the determination mode is not switched from the second determination mode to the first determination mode, there is no possibility that the player will be in a disadvantageous state. It is possible to continuously perform game rounds triggered by the entry of a game ball into the ball means.

As a result, according to the feature sK3, in the state where the control mode is the second control mode, the player is instructed to wait until the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number after the transition to the second control mode. During the period, the judgment mode is changed from the second judgment mode to the disadvantageous first judgment mode by the judgment mode switching means, and the judgment mode is changed to the first judgment mode by the judgment mode switching means. It is also possible to give a feeling of expectation that the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number before switching to . Then, when the number of executions of the game cycle reaches a predetermined number without switching the determination mode to the first determination mode by the determination mode switching means, the player is notified that the determination mode is the first determination mode. A special state (e.g., the eighth execution A state in which the control mode is the second control mode by continuously performing game rounds triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means. In addition, it is possible to impart a sense of anticipation that the special information acquired with the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means as a trigger will satisfy a predetermined condition in the near future. In this way, according to the feature sK3, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game by providing the player with emotions such as a sense of anticipation, a sense of urgency, and a sense of relief.

[Feature sK4]
The gaming machine according to feature sK3,
The determination mode transition means is
A third passage (second branch passage portion 230) which is provided in the circulation area and which is a passage for circulating game balls and branches from the middle of the second passage;
a third ball entry means (falling port 252) into which a game ball that has circulated through the third passage can enter;
Judgment mode control means capable of switching the judgment mode from the second judgment mode to the first judgment mode when the game ball enters the third ball entering means;
Game ball distributing means (game ball distributing means) provided at a branch point of the second passage to the third passage and distributing game balls between the downstream portion of the second passage from the branch point and the third passage Sorting device 240),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature sK4, a hardware configuration including the third passage and the game ball distribution means can constitute a part of the determination mode transition means. For this reason, by making the game ball distribution means distribute the game balls so that the player can visually recognize from the outside, the judgment mode is switched from the second judgment mode to the first judgment mode. It is possible to impart a sense of urgency to the player, as if he or she were afraid of being put away. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

<Characteristic sL group>
The feature sL group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eighth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature sL1]
a launching means for launching a game ball;
A distribution area (game area PA) in which the launched game balls circulate;
A ball entry means (central side first start port 33) provided in the circulation area and capable of entering a game ball;
A predetermined area (ball entrance 210a of the starter unit 200) provided in the distribution area and through which game balls can pass;
A game state that shifts after a predetermined condition is satisfied in a condition determination executed when a game ball enters the ball entering means, and when the game ball enters the ball entering means A specific game state (high accuracy high support state) in which the game ball can be entered into the predetermined area by a firing mode (weak right-handed firing mode) different from the firing mode (left-handed firing mode) by the shooting means ), when the game ball passes through the predetermined area, multiple types of result information (signal from the detection sensor for the second start port 34, signal from the detection sensor for the right first start port 44, start port information acquisition means for acquiring one result information from the signal from the detection sensor for the out port 251 in the unit and the signal from the detection sensor for the fall port 252;
When the game ball passes through the predetermined area, the first result (route that can enter the second starting port 34) and the second result (route that can enter the right first starting port 44) A first distribution means (electric accessory 34a) for distributing to any one,
When sorted into the second result by the first sorting means, the third result (the route that allows the ball to enter the out port 251 in the starting port unit) and the fourth result (the ball that enters the fall port 252) at a predetermined ratio Possible routes) and a second distribution means (game ball distribution device 240) for distribution,
When the result information acquired by the information acquisition means is the fourth result information corresponding to the fourth result (signal from the detection sensor for the fall opening 252), the game state is changed from the specific game state to the specific game state. A game state transition means that shifts to a predetermined game state (low probability high support state) different from the game state,
with
The specific game state is more advantageous for the player than the predetermined game state,
When one game cycle is defined as the game operation that indicates the result of the game is started and then the game operation is ended, the number of times the game cycle is executed in the specific game state is a predetermined number of times (guaranteed game count). 50 times), wherein the fourth result information can be acquired in a predetermined game situation.

According to the feature sL1, when the game ball passes through the predetermined area, one result information is obtained from a plurality of types of result information. Further, when the game ball passes through the predetermined area, it is distributed to either the first result or the second result, and when it is distributed to the second result, the third result and the fourth result are obtained at a predetermined ratio. be assigned to one of them. When the result information acquired by the information acquisition means is the fourth result information corresponding to the fourth result, the game state shifts from a specific game state with high advantage for the player to a predetermined game state with low advantage. be done. Furthermore, according to the feature sL1, the fourth result information can be acquired in a predetermined game situation in which the number of times the game is executed in the specific game state is equal to or less than the predetermined number of times. When the fourth result information is acquired, the game state is shifted to a predetermined game state with a low advantage for the player as described above. For this reason, according to the feature sL1, in the specific game state, if the number of game rounds executed reaches a predetermined number of times without obtaining information corresponding to the fourth result, the fourth Information corresponding to the result is no longer acquired, and the possibility of being in a disadvantageous state for the player is eliminated.

As a result, according to the feature sL1, in the specific game state, during a period in which the number of times the game is executed in the specific game state is equal to or less than a predetermined number of times, the player enters a predetermined game state with a low advantage for the player. A sense of urgency that the fourth result information that triggers the shift should not be obtained (i.e., do not fall), and a desire that the number of executions of the game rounds reaches a predetermined number before the fourth result information is acquired. Such expectations can be given together. Then, when the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times without acquiring the fourth result information, the game state is shifted to a predetermined game state, which is disadvantageous to the player. It is possible to provide both a sense of relief and a sense of anticipation that can be transferred to a special state (for example, the invincible zone in the eighth embodiment) in which game rounds can be played continuously without risk. In this way, according to the feature sL1, by giving the player emotions such as a sense of anticipation, a sense of urgency, and a sense of relief, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

[Feature sL2]
The gaming machine according to feature sL1,
When the result information acquired by the information acquisition means is the third result information corresponding to the third result (signal from the detection sensor for the out port 251 in the starting port unit), the third result information A gaming machine comprising: means for maintaining the game state of the game round next to the corresponding game round in the specific game state.

According to the feature sL2, when the result information acquired by the information acquisition means is the third result information corresponding to the third result, the game state of the next game round is maintained in the specific game state. For this reason, in the specific game state, depending on the distribution result of the second distribution means, there are cases where the player is shifted to a predetermined game state with a low advantage, and cases where the specific game state is maintained. . Therefore, according to the feature sL2, there is a urgency that the second sorting means does not want the fourth result information that triggers the transition to a predetermined game state with a low advantage for the player (does not want the player to fall). It can give you more feeling.

[Feature sL3]
The gaming machine according to feature sL1,
In a specific game situation in which the number of game times executed in the specific game state exceeds the predetermined number of times (50 times, which is the number of guaranteed games), the first result information corresponding to the first result (for the second start port 34 A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be able to acquire a signal from a detection sensor of

According to the feature sL3, the first result information corresponding to the first result can be acquired in a specific game situation in which the number of times the game has been executed exceeds a predetermined number of times. For this reason, according to the feature sL3, when acquiring the first result information, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that the number of times the game is executed in the specific game state reaches a predetermined number. .

[Feature sL4]
The gaming machine according to feature sL1,
3rd result information corresponding to the 3rd result A game machine characterized in that it is configured to be able to acquire a signal from a detection sensor for H.251.

According to the feature sL4, it is possible to obtain the third result information corresponding to the third result in a predetermined game situation in which the number of times the game is executed in the specific game state is equal to or less than the predetermined number of times. For this reason, according to the feature sL4, in a period in which the number of game rounds executed in the specific game state is equal to or less than a predetermined number of times, the fourth result information that triggers a shift to a predetermined game state with a low advantage for the player. It is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that the third result information that is not obtained is obtained.

[Feature sL5]
The gaming machine according to feature sL1,
In a predetermined game situation in which the number of times the game is executed in the specific game state is equal to or less than the predetermined number of times (50 times, which is the guaranteed number of games), the second result information corresponding to the second result (right first start port 44 A game machine characterized in that it is configured to be able to acquire a signal from a detection sensor for a game.

According to the feature sL5, it is possible to acquire the second result information corresponding to the second result in a predetermined game situation in which the number of times the game is executed in the specific game state is equal to or less than the predetermined number of times. Therefore, the second result information corresponding to the second result that triggers the distribution by the second distribution means can be acquired during the period in which the number of times the game is executed in the specific game state is equal to or less than the predetermined number. The second result is a trigger for sorting by the second sorting means, and the fourth result sorted by the second sorting means is a trigger for shifting to a predetermined game state with a low advantage for the player. Therefore, according to the feature sL5, during the period when the number of game rounds executed in the specific game state is equal to or less than the predetermined number of times, the fourth result information that triggers the transition to the predetermined game state with low advantage for the player is not acquired. It is possible to surely give the player a sense of urgency that the player should not fall down.

[Feature sL6]
The gaming machine according to feature sL1,
In a predetermined game situation in which the number of times the game is executed in the specific game state is equal to or less than the predetermined number of times (50 times, which is the guaranteed number of games), second result information corresponding to the second result (right first start port 44 signal from the detection sensor for the starting port) and third result information corresponding to the third result (signal from the detection sensor for the out port 251 in the starting port unit) can be acquired. Amusement machine.

According to the feature sL6, in a period in which the number of game rounds executed in the specific game state is equal to or less than a predetermined number of times, the second result information corresponding to the second result that triggers the allocation by the second allocating means, and the third Third result information corresponding to the result can be obtained. The second result serves as a trigger for sorting in the second sorting means. The third result is one of the two results distributed by the second distribution means, and is not the fourth result that triggers transition to a predetermined game state with low advantage for the player. be. Therefore, according to the feature sL6, in a period in which the number of game rounds executed in the specific game state is equal to or less than a predetermined number of times, the fourth result information is not the trigger to shift to a predetermined game state with a low advantage for the player. The expectation that the third result information should be obtained can be given to the player.

[Feature sL7]
The gaming machine according to feature sL1,
At least a first mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second mode (high-frequency support mode) are defined as modes in which the first result and the second result are divided by the first distribution means at different ratios. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the characteristic sL7, it is possible to change the distribution ratio between the first result and the second result in the first distribution means depending on the first mode and the second mode. Therefore, it is possible to change the distribution ratio between the first result and the second result with good controllability. When the second mode is set to a mode in which the ratio of sorting to the first result by the first sorting means is higher than that in the first mode, switching to the second mode enables a predetermined low advantage for the player. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the fourth result information that triggers the transition to the game state is acquired. As a result, according to the feature sL7, by switching between the first mode and the second mode, it is possible to switch the degree of expectation and sense of urgency imparted to the player.

[Feature sL8]
The gaming machine according to feature sL1,
The game round following the game round corresponding to the case where the distribution result of the second allocating means is the third result (a route that allows a ball to enter the out port 251 in the starter unit) is the predetermined game state. A game machine characterized in that it is a game cycle that is highly advantageous for a player compared to a game machine.

According to the feature sL8, when the distribution result of the second distribution means is the fourth result, the game state is shifted from the specific game state to the predetermined game state. On the other hand, the game round next to the game round corresponding to the case where the sorting result of the second sorting means is the third result is the game round that is more advantageous for the player than the predetermined game state. ing. Therefore, the game state is switched between a game round with a high advantage for the player and a game round with a low advantage, depending on the distribution result of the second distribution means. Therefore, it is possible to easily give a sense of urgency and expectation to the player.

[Feature sL9]
The gaming machine according to feature sL1,
When the distribution result of the second distribution means is the fourth result (the route that allows the ball to enter the fall hole 252), the effect in the game round is that the distribution result of the second distribution means is An effect including content indicating that the advantage for the player is low compared to the effect in the game round corresponding to the third result (a route in which the ball can be entered into the out port 251 in the starter unit). A game machine characterized by:

According to the feature sL9, it is possible to inform the player whether the distribution result of the second distribution means is the third result or the fourth result by the performance, thereby further improving the interest of the game. be able to.

[Feature sL10]
The gaming machine according to feature sL1,
In the specific game state, the number of times that the distribution result of the second distribution means is the third result (the route that allows a ball to enter the out port 251 in the starting port unit) is the predetermined number of times (50, which is the guaranteed number of games). times), if the distribution result of the second distribution means does not become the fourth result (route that allows a ball to enter the fall opening 252), the state is shifted to the specific game state again. A game machine characterized by shifting to a game state (high-probability-low support state (invincible zone) H6) in which the above is guaranteed.

According to the feature sL10, in the specific game state, when the number of times the game is executed reaches the predetermined number without the distribution result of the second distribution means becoming the fourth result, the specific game state is entered again. It is possible to provide the player with both a sense of relief and a sense of anticipation that a transition to a game state (for example, an invincible zone in the eighth embodiment) is guaranteed to occur.

[Feature sL11]
The gaming machine according to feature sL1,
The shooting mode by the shooting means that is most advantageous for the player in the specific game state is a shooting mode (light hitting shooting mode) in which the game ball is more likely to enter the predetermined area than the ball entering means. can be,
The shooting mode by the shooting means that is most advantageous for the player in the predetermined game state is the shooting mode in which the game ball is more likely to enter the ball entering means than the predetermined area A game machine characterized in that it is a left-handed shooting mode in a low-probability low-support state in modification 14 in which a low-probability low-support state occurs in a case.

According to the feature sL11, the player operates the shooting means in a shooting mode in which the game ball is more likely to enter the predetermined area than the ball entering means in the specific game state. can increase the advantage for Further, the player operates the shooting means in a shooting mode in which the game ball is more likely to enter the ball entering means than in the predetermined area in the predetermined game state, thereby increasing the advantage for the player in the predetermined game state. can increase Therefore, in the specific game state, it is possible to recommend the player to operate the shooting means in a shooting mode in which the game ball is likely to enter the predetermined area. It is possible to recommend the player to operate the shooting means in a shooting mode in which the ball can easily enter. Therefore, according to the feature sL11, the player can be caused to shoot the game ball in the shooting mode of the shooting means intended by the designer of the gaming machine. As a result, according to the feature sL11, it is possible to realize the flow of the game as envisioned by the designer side of the player.

<Feature sM group>
The feature sM group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eighth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature sM1]
a launching means for launching a game ball;
A distribution area (game area PA) in which the launched game balls circulate;
A ball entry means (central side first start port 33) provided in the circulation area and capable of entering a game ball;
A predetermined area (ball entrance 210a of the starter unit 200) provided in the distribution area and through which game balls can pass;
A game state that shifts after a predetermined condition is satisfied in a condition determination executed when a game ball enters the ball entering means, and when the game ball enters the ball entering means A specific game state (high accuracy high support state) in which the game ball can be entered into the predetermined area by a firing mode (weak right-handed firing mode) different from the firing mode (left-handed firing mode) by the shooting means ), when the game ball passes through the predetermined area, multiple types of result information (signal from the detection sensor for the second start port 34, signal from the detection sensor for the right first start port 44, start port information acquisition means for acquiring one result information from the signal from the detection sensor for the out port 251 in the unit and the signal from the detection sensor for the fall port 252;
When the game ball passes through the predetermined area, the first result (route that can enter the second starting port 34) and the second result (route that can enter the right first starting port 44) A first distribution means (electric accessory 34a) for distributing to any one,
When sorted into the second result by the first sorting means, the third result (the route that allows the ball to enter the out port 251 in the starting port unit) and the fourth result (the ball that enters the fall port 252) at a predetermined ratio Possible routes) and a second distribution means (game ball distribution device 240) for distribution,
When the result information acquired by the information acquisition means is the fourth result information corresponding to the fourth result (signal from the detection sensor for the fall opening 252), the game state is changed from the specific game state to the specific game state. A game state transition means that shifts to a predetermined game state (low probability high support state) different from the game state,
with
The specific game state is more advantageous for the player than the predetermined game state,
When one game cycle is defined as the game operation that indicates the result of the game is started and then the game operation is ended, the number of times the game cycle is executed in the specific game state is a predetermined number of times (guaranteed game count). 50 times) is configured so that the fourth result information can be acquired in a predetermined game situation,
When the result information acquired by the information acquisition means is the third result information corresponding to the third result (signal from the detection sensor for the out port 251 in the starting port unit), the third result information A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for maintaining the game state of the game round next to the corresponding game round in the specific game state.

According to the feature sM1, when the game ball passes through the predetermined area, one result information is acquired from a plurality of types of result information. Further, when the game ball passes through the predetermined area, it is distributed to either the first result or the second result, and when it is distributed to the second result, the third result and the fourth result are obtained at a predetermined ratio. be assigned to one of them. When the result information acquired by the information acquisition means is the fourth result information corresponding to the fourth result, the game state shifts from a specific game state with high advantage for the player to a predetermined game state with low advantage. be done. Furthermore, according to the feature sM1, the fourth result information can be acquired in a predetermined game situation in which the number of times the game is executed in the specific game state is equal to or less than the predetermined number of times. When the fourth result information is acquired, the game state is shifted to a predetermined game state with a low advantage for the player as described above. For this reason, according to the characteristic sM1, in the specific game state, if the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number without obtaining information corresponding to the fourth result, the fourth Information corresponding to the result is no longer acquired, and the possibility of being in a disadvantageous state for the player is eliminated.

As a result, according to the feature sM1, in the specific game state, during a period in which the number of times the game is executed in the specific game state is equal to or less than a predetermined number of times, the player is placed in a predetermined game state with a low advantage for the player. A sense of urgency that the fourth result information that triggers the shift should not be obtained (i.e., do not fall), and a desire that the number of executions of the game rounds reaches a predetermined number before the fourth result information is acquired. Such expectations can be given together. Then, when the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times without acquiring the fourth result information, the game state is shifted to a predetermined game state, which is disadvantageous to the player. It is possible to provide both a sense of relief and a sense of anticipation that can be transferred to a special state (for example, the invincible zone in the eighth embodiment) in which game rounds can be played continuously without risk. As described above, according to the feature sM1, by imparting emotions such as anticipation, tension, and relief to the player, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Furthermore, according to the feature sM1, when the result information acquired by the information acquisition means is the third result information corresponding to the third result, the game state of the next game round is maintained in the specific game state. For this reason, in the specific game state, depending on the distribution result of the second distribution means, there are cases where the player is shifted to a predetermined game state with a low advantage, and cases where the specific game state is maintained. . Therefore, according to the feature sM1, there is an urgent need for the player not to acquire the fourth result information that triggers the transition to a predetermined game state with a low advantage for the player (do not fall down) by the second sorting means. It can give you more feeling.

<Feature sN group>
The feature sN group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eighth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature sN1]
a launching means for launching a game ball;
A distribution area (game area PA) in which the launched game balls circulate;
A ball entry means (central side first start port 33) provided in the circulation area and capable of entering a game ball;
A predetermined area (ball entrance 210a of the starter unit 200) provided in the distribution area and through which game balls can pass;
A game state that shifts after a predetermined condition is satisfied in a condition determination executed when a game ball enters the ball entering means, and when the game ball enters the ball entering means A specific game state (high accuracy high support state) in which the game ball can be entered into the predetermined area by a firing mode (weak right-handed firing mode) different from the firing mode (left-handed firing mode) by the shooting means ), when the game ball passes through the predetermined area, multiple types of result information (signal from the detection sensor for the second start port 34, signal from the detection sensor for the right first start port 44, start port information acquisition means for acquiring one result information from the signal from the detection sensor for the out port 251 in the unit and the signal from the detection sensor for the fall port 252;
When the game ball passes through the predetermined area, the first result (route that can enter the second starting port 34) and the second result (route that can enter the right first starting port 44) A first distribution means (electric accessory 34a) for distributing to any one,
When sorted into the second result by the first sorting means, the third result (the route that allows the ball to enter the out port 251 in the starting port unit) and the fourth result (the ball that enters the fall port 252) at a predetermined ratio. Possible routes) and a second distribution means (game ball distribution device 240) for distribution,
When the result information acquired by the information acquisition means is the fourth result information corresponding to the fourth result (signal from the detection sensor for the fall opening 252), the game state is changed from the specific game state to the specific game state. A game state transition means that shifts to a predetermined game state (low probability high support state) different from the game state,
with
The specific game state is more advantageous for the player than the predetermined game state,
When one game cycle is defined as the game motion that indicates the result of the game is started and then the game motion is ended, the number of times the game cycle is executed in the specific game state is a predetermined number of times (guaranteed game count). 50 times) is configured so that the fourth result information can be acquired in a predetermined game situation,
In a specific game situation in which the number of game times executed in the specific game state exceeds the predetermined number of times (50 times, which is the number of guaranteed games), the first result information corresponding to the first result (for the second start port 34 A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be able to acquire a signal from a detection sensor of

According to the feature sN1, when the game ball passes through the predetermined area, one result information is acquired from a plurality of types of result information. Further, when the game ball passes through the predetermined area, it is distributed to either the first result or the second result, and when it is distributed to the second result, the third result and the fourth result are obtained at a predetermined ratio. be assigned to one of them. When the result information acquired by the information acquisition means is the fourth result information corresponding to the fourth result, the game state shifts from a specific game state with high advantage for the player to a predetermined game state with low advantage. be done. Furthermore, according to the feature sN1, the fourth result information can be acquired in a predetermined game situation in which the number of times the game is executed in the specific game state is equal to or less than a predetermined number of times. When the fourth result information is acquired, the game state is shifted to a predetermined game state with a low advantage for the player as described above. For this reason, according to the feature sN1, in the specific game state, if the number of times of execution of the game can be continued until the predetermined number of times is reached without obtaining the information corresponding to the fourth result, the fourth Information corresponding to the result is no longer acquired, and the possibility of being in a disadvantageous state for the player is eliminated.

As a result, according to the feature sN1, in the specific game state, during a period in which the number of times the game is executed in the specific game state is equal to or less than a predetermined number of times, the player is placed in a predetermined game state with a low advantage for the player. A sense of urgency that the fourth result information, which triggers the shift, should not be obtained (i.e., do not fall), and a desire that the number of executions of the game rounds reaches a predetermined number before the fourth result information is acquired. Such expectations can be given together. Then, when the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times without acquiring the fourth result information, the game state is shifted to a predetermined game state, which is disadvantageous to the player. It is possible to give both a sense of relief and a sense of anticipation that a transition to a special state (for example, an invincible zone in the eighth embodiment) in which game rounds can be played continuously without risk can be provided. In this way, according to the feature sN1, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by giving the player emotions such as a sense of anticipation, a sense of urgency, and a sense of relief.

Furthermore, according to the feature sN1, it is possible to obtain the first result information corresponding to the first result in a specific game situation in which the number of times the game has been executed exceeds a predetermined number of times. For this reason, according to the feature sN1, when acquiring the first result information, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that the number of times the game is executed in the specific game state reaches a predetermined number. .

<Characteristic sO group>
The feature sO group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eighth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature sO1]
a launching means for launching a game ball;
A distribution area (game area PA) in which the launched game balls circulate;
A ball entry means (central side first start port 33) provided in the circulation area and capable of entering a game ball;
A predetermined area (ball entrance 210a of the starter unit 200) provided in the distribution area and through which game balls can pass;
A game state that shifts after a predetermined condition is satisfied in a condition determination executed when a game ball enters the ball entering means, and when the game ball enters the ball entering means A specific game state (high accuracy high support state) in which the game ball can be entered into the predetermined area by a firing mode (weak right-handed firing mode) different from the firing mode (left-handed firing mode) by the shooting means ), when the game ball passes through the predetermined area, multiple types of result information (signal from the detection sensor for the second start port 34, signal from the detection sensor for the right first start port 44, start port information acquisition means for acquiring one result information from the signal from the detection sensor for the out port 251 in the unit and the signal from the detection sensor for the fall port 252;
When the game ball passes through the predetermined area, the first result (route that can enter the second starting port 34) and the second result (route that can enter the right first starting port 44) A first distribution means (electric accessory 34a) for distributing to any one,
When sorted into the second result by the first sorting means, the third result (the route that allows the ball to enter the out port 251 in the starting port unit) and the fourth result (the ball that enters the fall port 252) at a predetermined ratio Possible routes) and a second distribution means (game ball distribution device 240) for distribution,
When the result information acquired by the information acquisition means is the fourth result information corresponding to the fourth result (signal from the detection sensor for the fall opening 252), the game state is changed from the specific game state to the specific game state. A game state transition means that shifts to a predetermined game state (low probability high support state) different from the game state,
with
The specific game state is more advantageous for the player than the predetermined game state,
When one game cycle is defined as the game operation that indicates the result of the game is started and then the game operation is ended, the number of times the game cycle is executed in the specific game state is a predetermined number of times (guaranteed game count). 50 times) is configured so that the fourth result information can be acquired in a predetermined game situation,
3rd result information corresponding to the 3rd result A game machine characterized in that it is configured to be able to acquire a signal from a detection sensor for H.251.

According to the feature sO1, when the game ball passes through the predetermined area, one piece of result information is acquired from a plurality of types of result information. Further, when the game ball passes through the predetermined area, it is distributed to either the first result or the second result, and when it is distributed to the second result, the third result and the fourth result are obtained at a predetermined ratio. be assigned to one of them. When the result information acquired by the information acquisition means is the fourth result information corresponding to the fourth result, the game state shifts from a specific game state with high advantage for the player to a predetermined game state with low advantage. be done. Furthermore, according to the feature sO1, the fourth result information can be acquired in a predetermined game situation in which the number of times the game is executed in the specific game state is equal to or less than the predetermined number of times. When the fourth result information is acquired, the game state is shifted to a predetermined game state with a low advantage for the player as described above. For this reason, according to the feature sO1, in the specific game state, if the number of times of execution of the game can be continued until the predetermined number of times is reached without obtaining the information corresponding to the fourth result, the fourth Information corresponding to the result is no longer acquired, and the possibility of being in a disadvantageous state for the player is eliminated.

As a result, according to the feature s01, in the specific game state, the player is placed in a predetermined game state with a low advantage for the player during a period in which the number of times the game is executed in the specific game state is equal to or less than a predetermined number of times. A sense of urgency that the fourth result information, which triggers the shift, should not be obtained (i.e., do not fall), and a desire that the number of executions of the game rounds reaches a predetermined number before the fourth result information is acquired. Such expectations can be given together. Then, when the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times without acquiring the fourth result information, the game state is shifted to a predetermined game state, which is disadvantageous to the player. It is possible to give both a sense of relief and a sense of anticipation that a transition to a special state (for example, an invincible zone in the eighth embodiment) in which game rounds can be played continuously without risk can be provided. In this way, according to the feature sO1, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game by giving the player emotions such as a sense of anticipation, a sense of urgency, and a sense of relief.

Furthermore, according to the feature sO1, it is possible to obtain the third result information corresponding to the third result in a predetermined game situation in which the number of times the game is executed in the specific game state is equal to or less than the predetermined number of times. For this reason, according to the feature sO1, the fourth result information that triggers the transition to a predetermined game state with a low advantage for the player during a period in which the number of game rounds executed in the specific game state is equal to or less than a predetermined number of times. It is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that the third result information that is not obtained is obtained.

<Characteristic sP group>
The feature sP group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eighth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature sP1]
a launching means for launching a game ball;
A distribution area (game area PA) in which the launched game balls circulate;
A ball entry means (central side first start port 33) provided in the circulation area and capable of entering a game ball;
A predetermined area (ball entrance 210a of the starter unit 200) provided in the distribution area and through which game balls can pass;
A game state that shifts after a predetermined condition is satisfied in a condition determination executed when a game ball enters the ball entering means, and when the game ball enters the ball entering means A specific game state (high accuracy high support state) in which the game ball can be entered into the predetermined area by a firing mode (weak right-handed firing mode) different from the firing mode (left-handed firing mode) by the shooting means ), when the game ball passes through the predetermined area, multiple types of result information (signal from the detection sensor for the second start port 34, signal from the detection sensor for the right first start port 44, start port information acquisition means for acquiring one result information from the signal from the detection sensor for the out port 251 in the unit and the signal from the detection sensor for the fall port 252;
When the game ball passes through the predetermined area, the first result (route that can enter the second starting port 34) and the second result (route that can enter the right first starting port 44) A first distribution means (electric accessory 34a) for distributing to any one,
When sorted into the second result by the first sorting means, the third result (the route that allows the ball to enter the out port 251 in the starting port unit) and the fourth result (the ball that enters the fall port 252) at a predetermined ratio Possible routes) and a second distribution means (game ball distribution device 240) for distribution,
When the result information acquired by the information acquisition means is the fourth result information corresponding to the fourth result (signal from the detection sensor for the fall opening 252), the game state is changed from the specific game state to the specific game state. A game state transition means that shifts to a predetermined game state (low probability high support state) different from the game state,
with
The specific game state is more advantageous for the player than the predetermined game state,
When one game cycle is defined as the game operation that indicates the result of the game is started and then the game operation is ended, the number of times the game cycle is executed in the specific game state is a predetermined number of times (guaranteed game count). 50 times) is configured so that the fourth result information can be acquired in a predetermined game situation,
In a predetermined game situation in which the number of times the game is executed in the specific game state is equal to or less than the predetermined number of times (50 times, which is the guaranteed number of games), second result information corresponding to the second result (right first start port 44 A game machine characterized in that it is configured to be able to acquire a signal from a detection sensor for a game.

According to the feature sP1, when the game ball passes through the predetermined area, one piece of result information is acquired from a plurality of types of result information. Further, when the game ball passes through the predetermined area, it is distributed to either the first result or the second result, and when it is distributed to the second result, the third result and the fourth result are obtained at a predetermined ratio. be assigned to one of them. When the result information acquired by the information acquisition means is the fourth result information corresponding to the fourth result, the game state shifts from a specific game state with high advantage for the player to a predetermined game state with low advantage. be done. Furthermore, according to the feature sP1, the fourth result information can be acquired in a predetermined game situation in which the number of times the game is executed in the specific game state is equal to or less than a predetermined number of times. When the fourth result information is acquired, the game state is shifted to a predetermined game state with a low advantage for the player as described above. For this reason, according to the feature sP1, in the specific game state, if the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number without acquiring information corresponding to the fourth result, the fourth Information corresponding to the result is no longer acquired, and the possibility of being in a disadvantageous state for the player is eliminated.

As a result, according to the feature sP1, in the specific game state, during the period in which the number of times the game is executed in the specific game state is equal to or less than a predetermined number of times, the player enters a predetermined game state with a low advantage for the player. A sense of urgency that the fourth result information, which triggers the shift, should not be obtained (i.e., do not fall), and a desire that the number of executions of the game rounds reaches a predetermined number before the fourth result information is acquired. Such expectations can be given together. Then, when the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times without acquiring the fourth result information, the game state is shifted to a predetermined game state, which is disadvantageous to the player. It is possible to give both a sense of relief and a sense of anticipation that a transition to a special state (for example, an invincible zone in the eighth embodiment) in which game rounds can be played continuously without risk can be provided. As described above, according to the feature sP1, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game by providing the player with emotions such as a sense of anticipation, a sense of urgency, and a sense of relief.

Furthermore, according to the feature sP1, it is possible to obtain the second result information corresponding to the second result in a predetermined game situation in which the number of times the game is executed in the specific game state is equal to or less than the predetermined number of times. Therefore, the second result information corresponding to the second result that triggers the distribution by the second distribution means can be acquired during the period in which the number of times the game is executed in the specific game state is equal to or less than the predetermined number. The second result is a trigger for sorting by the second sorting means, and the fourth result sorted by the second sorting means is a trigger for shifting to a predetermined game state with a low advantage for the player. Therefore, according to the feature sP1, during the period when the number of game rounds executed in the specific game state is equal to or less than the predetermined number of times, the fourth result information that triggers the transition to the predetermined game state with low advantage for the player is not acquired. It is possible to surely give the player a sense of urgency that he wants to fall (he does not want to fall).

<Characteristic sQ group>
The feature sQ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eighth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature sQ1]
a launching means for launching a game ball;
A distribution area (game area PA) in which the launched game balls circulate;
A ball entry means (central side first start port 33) provided in the circulation area and capable of entering a game ball;
A predetermined area (ball entrance 210a of the starter unit 200) provided in the distribution area and through which game balls can pass;
A game state that shifts after a predetermined condition is satisfied in a condition determination executed when a game ball enters the ball entering means, and when the game ball enters the ball entering means A specific game state (high accuracy high support state) in which the game ball can be entered into the predetermined area by a firing mode (weak right-handed firing mode) different from the firing mode (left-handed firing mode) by the shooting means ), when the game ball passes through the predetermined area, multiple types of result information (signal from the detection sensor for the second start port 34, signal from the detection sensor for the right first start port 44, start port information acquisition means for acquiring one result information from the signal from the detection sensor for the out port 251 in the unit and the signal from the detection sensor for the fall port 252;
When the game ball passes through the predetermined area, the first result (route that can enter the second starting port 34) and the second result (route that can enter the right first starting port 44) A first distribution means (electric accessory 34a) for distributing to any one,
When sorted into the second result by the first sorting means, the third result (the route that allows the ball to enter the out port 251 in the starting port unit) and the fourth result (the ball that enters the fall port 252) at a predetermined ratio Possible routes) and a second distribution means (game ball distribution device 240) for distribution,
When the result information acquired by the information acquisition means is the fourth result information corresponding to the fourth result (signal from the detection sensor for the fall opening 252), the game state is changed from the specific game state to the specific game state. A game state transition means that shifts to a predetermined game state (low probability high support state) different from the game state,
with
The specific game state is more advantageous for the player than the predetermined game state,
When one game cycle is defined as the game operation that indicates the result of the game is started and then the game operation is ended, the number of times the game cycle is executed in the specific game state is a predetermined number of times (guaranteed game count). 50 times) is configured so that the fourth result information can be acquired in a predetermined game situation,
In a predetermined game situation in which the number of times the game is executed in the specific game state is equal to or less than the predetermined number of times (50 times, which is the guaranteed number of games), second result information corresponding to the second result (right first start port 44 signal from the detection sensor for the starting port) and third result information corresponding to the third result (signal from the detection sensor for the out port 251 in the starting port unit) can be acquired. Amusement machine.

According to the characteristic sQ1, when the game ball passes through the predetermined area, one result information is obtained from a plurality of types of result information. Further, when the game ball passes through the predetermined area, it is distributed to either the first result or the second result, and when it is distributed to the second result, the third result and the fourth result are obtained at a predetermined ratio. be assigned to one of them. When the result information acquired by the information acquisition means is the fourth result information corresponding to the fourth result, the game state shifts from a specific game state with high advantage for the player to a predetermined game state with low advantage. be done. Furthermore, according to the characteristic sQ1, the fourth result information can be acquired in a predetermined game situation in which the number of times the game is executed in the specific game state is equal to or less than a predetermined number of times. When the fourth result information is acquired, the game state is shifted to a predetermined game state with a low advantage for the player as described above. For this reason, according to the feature sQ1, in the specific game state, if the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number without obtaining the information corresponding to the fourth result, the fourth Information corresponding to the result is no longer acquired, and the possibility of being in a disadvantageous state for the player is eliminated.

As a result, according to the feature sQ1, in the specific game state, during the period in which the number of times the game is executed in the specific game state is equal to or less than a predetermined number of times, the player enters a predetermined game state with a low advantage for the player. A sense of urgency that the fourth result information that triggers the shift should not be obtained (i.e., do not fall), and a desire that the number of executions of the game rounds reaches a predetermined number before the fourth result information is acquired. Such expectations can be given together. Then, when the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times without acquiring the fourth result information, the game state is shifted to a predetermined game state, which is disadvantageous to the player. It is possible to provide both a sense of relief and a sense of anticipation that can be transferred to a special state (for example, the invincible zone in the eighth embodiment) in which game rounds can be played continuously without risk. As described above, according to the feature sQ1, by giving the player emotions such as a sense of anticipation, a sense of urgency, and a sense of relief, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Furthermore, according to the feature sQ1, in a period in which the number of game rounds executed in the specific game state is equal to or less than a predetermined number of times, the second result information corresponding to the second result that triggers the allocation by the second allocating means; Third result information corresponding to the third result can be obtained. The second result serves as a trigger for sorting in the second sorting means. The third result is one of the two results distributed by the second distribution means, and is not the fourth result that triggers transition to a predetermined game state with low advantage for the player. be. Therefore, according to the feature sQ1, in a period in which the number of game rounds executed in the specific game state is equal to or less than a predetermined number of times, it is not the fourth result information that triggers a shift to a predetermined game state with a low advantage for the player. The expectation that the third result information should be obtained can be given to the player.

<Characteristic sR group>
The feature sR group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eighth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature sR1]
a launching means for launching a game ball;
A distribution area (game area PA) in which the launched game balls circulate;
A ball entry means (central side first start port 33) provided in the circulation area and capable of entering a game ball;
A predetermined area (ball entrance 210a of the starter unit 200) provided in the distribution area and through which game balls can pass;
A game state that shifts after a predetermined condition is satisfied in a condition determination executed when a game ball enters the ball entering means, and when the game ball enters the ball entering means A specific game state (high accuracy high support state) in which the game ball can be entered into the predetermined area by a firing mode (weak right-handed firing mode) different from the firing mode (left-handed firing mode) by the shooting means ), when the game ball passes through the predetermined area, multiple types of result information (signal from the detection sensor for the second start port 34, signal from the detection sensor for the right first start port 44, start port information acquisition means for acquiring one result information from the signal from the detection sensor for the out port 251 in the unit and the signal from the detection sensor for the fall port 252;
When the game ball passes through the predetermined area, the first result (route that can enter the second starting port 34) and the second result (route that can enter the right first starting port 44) A first distribution means (electric accessory 34a) for distributing to any one,
When sorted into the second result by the first sorting means, the third result (the route that allows the ball to enter the out port 251 in the starting port unit) and the fourth result (the ball that enters the fall port 252) at a predetermined ratio Possible routes) and a second distribution means (game ball distribution device 240) for distribution,
When the result information acquired by the information acquisition means is the fourth result information corresponding to the fourth result (signal from the detection sensor for the fall opening 252), the game state is changed from the specific game state to the specific game state. A game state transition means that shifts to a predetermined game state (low probability high support state) different from the game state,
with
The specific game state is more advantageous for the player than the predetermined game state,
When one game cycle is defined as the game operation that indicates the result of the game is started and then the game operation is ended, the number of times the game cycle is executed in the specific game state is a predetermined number of times (guaranteed game count). 50 times) is configured so that the fourth result information can be acquired in a predetermined game situation,
At least a first mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second mode (high-frequency support mode) are defined as modes in which the first result and the second result are divided by the first distribution means at different ratios. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature sR1, when the game ball passes through the predetermined area, one piece of result information is acquired from a plurality of types of result information. Further, when the game ball passes through the predetermined area, it is distributed to either the first result or the second result, and when it is distributed to the second result, the third result and the fourth result are obtained at a predetermined ratio. be assigned to one of them. When the result information acquired by the information acquisition means is the fourth result information corresponding to the fourth result, the game state shifts from a specific game state with high advantage for the player to a predetermined game state with low advantage. be done. Furthermore, according to the feature sR1, the fourth result information can be acquired in a predetermined game situation in which the number of times the game is executed in the specific game state is equal to or less than the predetermined number of times. When the fourth result information is acquired, the game state is shifted to a predetermined game state with a low advantage for the player as described above. For this reason, according to the feature sR1, in the specific game state, if the number of times of execution of the game can be continued until the predetermined number of times is reached without obtaining the information corresponding to the fourth result, the fourth Information corresponding to the result is no longer acquired, and the possibility of being in a disadvantageous state for the player is eliminated.

As a result, according to the feature sR1, in the specific game state, during the period in which the number of times the game is executed in the specific game state is equal to or less than a predetermined number of times, the player enters a predetermined game state with a low advantage for the player. A sense of urgency that the fourth result information, which triggers the shift, should not be obtained (i.e., do not fall), and a desire that the number of executions of the game rounds reaches a predetermined number before the fourth result information is acquired. Such expectations can be given together. Then, when the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times without acquiring the fourth result information, the game state is shifted to a predetermined game state, which is disadvantageous to the player. It is possible to give both a sense of relief and a sense of anticipation that a transition to a special state (for example, an invincible zone in the eighth embodiment) in which game rounds can be played continuously without risk can be provided. In this way, according to the feature sR1, by giving the player emotions such as a sense of anticipation, a sense of urgency, and a sense of relief, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, according to the characteristic sR1, it is possible to change the distribution ratio between the first result and the second result in the first distribution means depending on the first mode and the second mode. Therefore, it is possible to change the allocation ratio between the first result and the second result with good controllability. When the second mode is set to a mode in which the ratio of sorting to the first result by the first sorting means is higher than that in the first mode, switching to the second mode enables a predetermined low advantage for the player. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the fourth result information that triggers the transition to the game state is acquired. As a result, according to the feature sR1, by switching between the first mode and the second mode, it is possible to switch the degree of expectation and sense of urgency imparted to the player.

<Characteristic sS group>
The feature sS group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eighth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature sS1]
a launching means for launching a game ball;
A distribution area (game area PA) in which the launched game balls circulate;
A ball entry means (central side first start port 33) provided in the circulation area and capable of entering a game ball;
A predetermined area (ball entrance 210a of the starter unit 200) provided in the distribution area and through which game balls can pass;
A game state that shifts after a predetermined condition is satisfied in a condition determination executed when a game ball enters the ball entering means, and when the game ball enters the ball entering means A specific game state (high accuracy high support state) in which the game ball can be entered into the predetermined area by a firing mode (weak right-handed firing mode) different from the firing mode (left-handed firing mode) by the shooting means ), when the game ball passes through the predetermined area, multiple types of result information (signal from the detection sensor for the second start port 34, signal from the detection sensor for the right first start port 44, start port information acquisition means for acquiring one result information from the signal from the detection sensor for the out port 251 in the unit and the signal from the detection sensor for the fall port 252;
When the game ball passes through the predetermined area, the first result (route that can enter the second starting port 34) and the second result (route that can enter the right first starting port 44) A first distribution means (electric accessory 34a) for distributing to any one,
When sorted into the second result by the first sorting means, the third result (the route that allows the ball to enter the out port 251 in the starting port unit) and the fourth result (the ball that enters the fall port 252) at a predetermined ratio Possible routes) and a second distribution means (game ball distribution device 240) for distribution,
When the result information acquired by the information acquisition means is the fourth result information corresponding to the fourth result (signal from the detection sensor for the fall opening 252), the game state is changed from the specific game state to the specific game state. A game state transition means that shifts to a predetermined game state (low probability high support state) different from the game state,
with
The specific game state is more advantageous for the player than the predetermined game state,
When one game cycle is defined as the game operation that indicates the result of the game is started and then the game operation is ended, the number of times the game cycle is executed in the specific game state is a predetermined number of times (guaranteed game count). 50 times) is configured so that the fourth result information can be acquired in a predetermined game situation,
The game round following the game round corresponding to the case where the distribution result of the second allocating means is the third result (a route that allows a ball to enter the out port 251 in the starter unit) is the predetermined game state. A game machine characterized in that it is a game cycle that is highly advantageous for a player compared to a game machine.

According to the characteristic sS1, when the game ball passes through the predetermined area, one result information is obtained from a plurality of types of result information. Further, when the game ball passes through the predetermined area, it is distributed to either the first result or the second result, and when it is distributed to the second result, the third result and the fourth result are obtained at a predetermined ratio. be assigned to one of them. When the result information acquired by the information acquisition means is the fourth result information corresponding to the fourth result, the game state shifts from a specific game state with high advantage for the player to a predetermined game state with low advantage. be done. Furthermore, according to the feature sS1, the fourth result information can be acquired in a predetermined game situation in which the number of times the game is executed in the specific game state is equal to or less than the predetermined number of times. When the fourth result information is acquired, the game state is shifted to a predetermined game state with a low advantage for the player as described above. For this reason, according to the feature sS1, in the specific game state, if the number of times of execution of the game can be continued until the predetermined number of times is reached without obtaining the information corresponding to the fourth result, the fourth Information corresponding to the result is no longer acquired, and the possibility of being in a disadvantageous state for the player is eliminated.

As a result, according to the feature sS1, in the specific game state, during the period in which the number of times the game is executed in the specific game state is equal to or less than a predetermined number of times, the player is placed in a predetermined game state with a low advantage for the player. A sense of urgency that the fourth result information, which triggers the shift, should not be obtained (i.e., do not fall), and a desire that the number of executions of the game rounds reaches a predetermined number before the fourth result information is acquired. Such expectations can be given together. Then, when the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times without acquiring the fourth result information, the game state is shifted to a predetermined game state, which is disadvantageous to the player. It is possible to give both a sense of relief and a sense of anticipation that a transition to a special state (for example, an invincible zone in the eighth embodiment) in which game rounds can be played continuously without risk can be provided. As described above, according to the feature sS1, by giving the player emotions such as a sense of anticipation, a sense of urgency, and a sense of relief, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, according to the feature sS1, when the distribution result of the second distribution means is the fourth result, the game state is shifted from the specific game state to the predetermined game state. On the other hand, the game round next to the game round corresponding to the case where the sorting result of the second sorting means is the third result is the game round that is more advantageous for the player than the predetermined game state. ing. Therefore, the game state is switched between a game round with a high advantage for the player and a game round with a low advantage, depending on the distribution result of the second distribution means. Therefore, it is possible to easily give a sense of urgency and expectation to the player.

<Characteristic sT group>
The feature sT group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eighth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature sT1]
a launching means for launching a game ball;
A distribution area (game area PA) in which the launched game balls circulate;
A ball entry means (central side first start port 33) provided in the circulation area and capable of entering a game ball;
A predetermined area (ball entrance 210a of the starter unit 200) provided in the distribution area and through which game balls can pass;
A game state that shifts after a predetermined condition is satisfied in a condition determination executed when a game ball enters the ball entering means, and when the game ball enters the ball entering means A specific game state (high accuracy high support state) in which the game ball can be entered into the predetermined area by a firing mode (weak right-handed firing mode) different from the firing mode (left-handed firing mode) by the shooting means ), when the game ball passes through the predetermined area, multiple types of result information (signal from the detection sensor for the second start port 34, signal from the detection sensor for the right first start port 44, start port information acquisition means for acquiring one result information from the signal from the detection sensor for the out port 251 in the unit and the signal from the detection sensor for the fall port 252;
When the game ball passes through the predetermined area, the first result (route that can enter the second starting port 34) and the second result (route that can enter the right first starting port 44) A first distribution means (electric accessory 34a) for distributing to any one,
When sorted into the second result by the first sorting means, the third result (the route that allows the ball to enter the out port 251 in the starting port unit) and the fourth result (the ball that enters the fall port 252) at a predetermined ratio Possible routes) and a second distribution means (game ball distribution device 240) for distribution,
When the result information acquired by the information acquisition means is the fourth result information corresponding to the fourth result (signal from the detection sensor for the fall opening 252), the game state is changed from the specific game state to the specific game state. A game state transition means that shifts to a predetermined game state (low probability high support state) different from the game state,
with
The specific game state is more advantageous for the player than the predetermined game state,
When one game cycle is defined as the game operation that indicates the result of the game is started and then the game operation is ended, the number of times the game cycle is executed in the specific game state is a predetermined number of times (guaranteed game count). 50 times) is configured so that the fourth result information can be acquired in a predetermined game situation,
When the distribution result of the second distribution means is the fourth result (the route that allows the ball to enter the fall hole 252), the effect in the game round is that the distribution result of the second distribution means is An effect including content indicating that the advantage for the player is low compared to the effect in the game round corresponding to the third result (a route that allows a ball to enter the out port 251 in the starter unit). A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature sT1, when the game ball passes through the predetermined area, one piece of result information is obtained from a plurality of types of result information. Further, when the game ball passes through the predetermined area, it is distributed to either the first result or the second result, and when it is distributed to the second result, the third result and the fourth result are obtained at a predetermined ratio. be assigned to one of them. When the result information acquired by the information acquisition means is the fourth result information corresponding to the fourth result, the game state shifts from a specific game state with high advantage for the player to a predetermined game state with low advantage. be done. Furthermore, according to the feature sT1, the fourth result information can be acquired in a predetermined game situation in which the number of game rounds executed in the specific game state is equal to or less than a predetermined number of times. When the fourth result information is acquired, the game state is shifted to a predetermined game state with a low advantage for the player as described above. For this reason, according to the feature sT1, in the specific game state, if the number of times of execution of the game can be continued until the predetermined number of times is reached without obtaining the information corresponding to the fourth result, the fourth Information corresponding to the result is no longer acquired, and the possibility of being in a disadvantageous state for the player is eliminated.

As a result, according to the feature sT1, in the specific game state, during the period in which the number of times the game is executed in the specific game state is equal to or less than a predetermined number of times, the player enters a predetermined game state with a low advantage for the player. A sense of urgency that the fourth result information, which triggers the shift, should not be obtained (i.e., do not fall), and a desire that the number of executions of the game rounds reaches a predetermined number before the fourth result information is acquired. Such expectations can be given together. Then, when the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times without acquiring the fourth result information, the game state is shifted to a predetermined game state, which is disadvantageous to the player. It is possible to give both a sense of relief and a sense of anticipation that a transition to a special state (for example, an invincible zone in the eighth embodiment) in which game rounds can be played continuously without risk can be provided. As described above, according to the feature sT1, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game by providing the player with emotions such as a sense of anticipation, a sense of urgency, and a sense of relief. In addition, according to the feature sT1, the player can be informed by the effect which of the third result and the fourth result the distribution result of the second distribution means is, so that the interest in the game can be improved. can achieve more.

<Characteristic sU group>
The feature sU group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eighth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature sU1]
a launching means for launching a game ball;
A distribution area (game area PA) in which the launched game balls circulate;
A ball entry means (central side first start port 33) provided in the circulation area and capable of entering a game ball;
A predetermined area (ball entrance 210a of the starter unit 200) provided in the distribution area and through which game balls can pass;
A game state that shifts after a predetermined condition is satisfied in a condition determination executed when a game ball enters the ball entering means, and when the game ball enters the ball entering means A specific game state (high accuracy high support state) in which the game ball can be entered into the predetermined area by a firing mode (weak right-handed firing mode) different from the firing mode (left-handed firing mode) by the shooting means ), when the game ball passes through the predetermined area, multiple types of result information (signal from the detection sensor for the second start port 34, signal from the detection sensor for the right first start port 44, start port information acquisition means for acquiring one result information from the signal from the detection sensor for the out port 251 in the unit and the signal from the detection sensor for the fall port 252;
When the game ball passes through the predetermined area, the first result (route that can enter the second starting port 34) and the second result (route that can enter the right first starting port 44) A first distribution means (electric accessory 34a) for distributing to any one,
When sorted into the second result by the first sorting means, the third result (the route that allows the ball to enter the out port 251 in the starting port unit) and the fourth result (the ball that enters the fall port 252) at a predetermined ratio Possible routes) and a second distribution means (game ball distribution device 240) for distribution,
When the result information acquired by the information acquisition means is the fourth result information corresponding to the fourth result (signal from the detection sensor for the fall opening 252), the game state is changed from the specific game state to the specific game state. A game state transition means that shifts to a predetermined game state (low probability high support state) different from the game state,
with
The specific game state is more advantageous for the player than the predetermined game state,
When one game cycle is defined as the game operation that indicates the result of the game is started and then the game operation is ended, the number of times the game cycle is executed in the specific game state is a predetermined number of times (guaranteed game count). 50 times) is configured so that the fourth result information can be acquired in a predetermined game situation,
In the specific game state, the number of times that the distribution result of the second distribution means is the third result (the route that allows a ball to enter the out port 251 in the starting port unit) is the predetermined number of times (50, which is the guaranteed number of games). times), if the distribution result of the second distribution means does not become the fourth result (route that allows a ball to enter the fall opening 252), the state is shifted to the specific game state again. A gaming machine characterized by shifting to a game state (high-probability-low support state (invincible zone) H6) in which the above is guaranteed.

According to the feature sU1, one result information is obtained from a plurality of types of result information when the game ball passes through the predetermined area. Further, when the game ball passes through the predetermined area, it is distributed to either the first result or the second result, and when it is distributed to the second result, the third result and the fourth result are obtained at a predetermined ratio. be assigned to one of them. When the result information acquired by the information acquisition means is the fourth result information corresponding to the fourth result, the game state shifts from a specific game state with high advantage for the player to a predetermined game state with low advantage. be done. Furthermore, according to the feature sU1, the fourth result information can be acquired in a predetermined game situation in which the number of times the game is executed in the specific game state is equal to or less than a predetermined number of times. When the fourth result information is acquired, the game state is shifted to a predetermined game state with a low advantage for the player as described above. For this reason, according to the feature sU1, in the specific game state, if the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number without obtaining information corresponding to the fourth result, the fourth Information corresponding to the result is no longer acquired, and the possibility of being in a disadvantageous state for the player is eliminated.

As a result, according to the feature sU1, in the specific game state, during a period in which the number of times the game is executed in the specific game state is equal to or less than a predetermined number of times, the player is placed in a predetermined game state with a low advantage for the player. A sense of urgency that the fourth result information, which triggers the shift, should not be obtained (i.e., do not fall), and a desire that the number of executions of the game rounds reaches a predetermined number before the fourth result information is acquired. Such expectations can be given together. Then, when the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times without acquiring the fourth result information, the game state is shifted to a predetermined game state, which is disadvantageous to the player. It is possible to give both a sense of relief and a sense of anticipation that a transition to a special state (for example, an invincible zone in the eighth embodiment) in which game rounds can be played continuously without risk can be provided. In this way, according to the feature sU1, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by providing the player with emotions such as a sense of anticipation, a sense of urgency, and a sense of relief.

Furthermore, according to the feature sU1, in the specific game state, when the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number without the distribution result of the second distribution means becoming the fourth result, the specific game is performed again. It is possible to provide the player with both a sense of relief and a sense of anticipation that a transition to a guaranteed state (for example, an invincible zone in the eighth embodiment) can be achieved.

<Characteristic sV group>
The feature sV group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eighth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature sV1]
a launching means for launching a game ball;
A distribution area (game area PA) in which the launched game balls circulate;
A ball entry means (central side first start port 33) provided in the circulation area and capable of entering a game ball;
A predetermined area (ball entrance 210a of the starter unit 200) provided in the distribution area and through which game balls can pass;
A game state that shifts after a predetermined condition is satisfied in a condition determination executed when a game ball enters the ball entering means, and when the game ball enters the ball entering means A specific game state (high accuracy high support state) in which the game ball can be entered into the predetermined area by a firing mode (weak right-handed firing mode) different from the firing mode (left-handed firing mode) by the shooting means ), when the game ball passes through the predetermined area, multiple types of result information (signal from the detection sensor for the second start port 34, signal from the detection sensor for the right first start port 44, start port information acquisition means for acquiring one result information from the signal from the detection sensor for the out port 251 in the unit and the signal from the detection sensor for the fall port 252;
When the game ball passes through the predetermined area, the first result (route that can enter the second starting port 34) and the second result (route that can enter the right first starting port 44) A first distribution means (electric accessory 34a) for distributing to any one,
When sorted into the second result by the first sorting means, the third result (the route that allows the ball to enter the out port 251 in the starting port unit) and the fourth result (the ball that enters the fall port 252) at a predetermined ratio Possible routes) and a second distribution means (game ball distribution device 240) for distribution,
When the result information acquired by the information acquisition means is the fourth result information corresponding to the fourth result (signal from the detection sensor for the fall opening 252), the game state is changed from the specific game state to the specific game state. A game state transition means that shifts to a predetermined game state (low probability high support state) different from the game state,
with
The specific game state is more advantageous for the player than the predetermined game state,
When one game cycle is defined as the game operation that indicates the result of the game is started and then the game operation is ended, the number of times the game cycle is executed in the specific game state is a predetermined number of times (guaranteed game count). 50 times) is configured so that the fourth result information can be acquired in a predetermined game situation,
The shooting mode by the shooting means that is most advantageous for the player in the specific game state is a shooting mode (light hitting shooting mode) in which the game ball is more likely to enter the predetermined area than the ball entering means. can be,
The shooting mode by the shooting means that is most advantageous for the player in the predetermined game state is the shooting mode in which the game ball is more likely to enter the ball entering means than the predetermined area A gaming machine characterized in that it is a left-handed shooting mode in a low-probability low-support state in modification 14 in which a low-probability low-support state occurs in a case).

According to the feature sV1, when the game ball passes through the predetermined area, one result information is acquired from a plurality of types of result information. Further, when the game ball passes through the predetermined area, it is distributed to either the first result or the second result, and when it is distributed to the second result, the third result and the fourth result are obtained at a predetermined ratio. be assigned to one of them. When the result information acquired by the information acquisition means is the fourth result information corresponding to the fourth result, the game state shifts from a specific game state with high advantage for the player to a predetermined game state with low advantage. be done. Furthermore, according to the feature sV1, the fourth result information can be acquired in a predetermined game situation in which the number of game rounds executed in the specific game state is equal to or less than a predetermined number of times. When the fourth result information is acquired, the game state is shifted to a predetermined game state with a low advantage for the player as described above. For this reason, according to the feature sV1, in the specific game state, if the number of times of execution of the game can be continued until the predetermined number of times is reached without obtaining the information corresponding to the fourth result, the fourth Information corresponding to the result is no longer acquired, and the possibility of being in a disadvantageous state for the player is eliminated.

As a result, according to the feature sV1, in the specific game state, during a period in which the number of times the game is executed in the specific game state is equal to or less than a predetermined number of times, the player is placed in a predetermined game state with a low advantage for the player. A sense of urgency that the fourth result information, which triggers the shift, should not be obtained (i.e., do not fall), and a desire that the number of executions of the game rounds reaches a predetermined number before the fourth result information is acquired. Such expectations can be given together. Then, when the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times without acquiring the fourth result information, the game state is shifted to a predetermined game state, which is disadvantageous to the player. It is possible to give both a sense of relief and a sense of anticipation that a transition to a special state (for example, an invincible zone in the eighth embodiment) in which game rounds can be played continuously without risk can be provided. In this way, according to the feature sV1, by giving the player emotions such as a sense of anticipation, a sense of urgency, and a sense of relief, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, according to the feature sV1, the player operates the shooting means in a shooting mode in which the game ball is more likely to enter the predetermined area than the ball entering means in the specific game state. It is possible to increase the advantage for the player. Further, the player operates the shooting means in a shooting mode in which the game ball is more likely to enter the ball entering means than in the predetermined area in the predetermined game state, thereby increasing the advantage for the player in the predetermined game state. can increase Therefore, in the specific game state, it is possible to recommend the player to operate the shooting means in a shooting mode in which the game ball is likely to enter the predetermined area. It is possible to recommend the player to operate the shooting means in a shooting mode in which the ball can easily enter. Therefore, according to the feature sV1, it is possible for the player to shoot the game ball in the shooting mode of the shooting means intended by the designer of the gaming machine. As a result, according to the feature sV1, it is possible to realize the flow of the game as envisioned by the designer of the player.

<Characteristic tA group>
The feature tA group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the ninth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature tA1]
A distribution area (game area PA) in which game balls circulate,
A ball entry means (second starting port 34) provided in the circulation area and capable of entering a game ball;
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (value of winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into said ball entering means;
means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot); determination means having a first determination mode (low-probability mode) and a second determination mode (high-probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is higher than that in the first determination mode;
When one game round is defined as the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended, a game round execution means (main control unit) for executing the game round MPU 62 on the board 61 side, and the game turn control process of FIG. 420 executed by it);
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is divided into a first state in which entry of a game ball into the ball entry means is made impossible or difficult, and a state in which entry of a game ball into the ball entry means is made possible or easy. a state transition means for transitioning between a second state which is a state to
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein the control mode in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means is a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode. a control means having at least a second control mode (high-frequency support mode) in which it is easier for a game ball to enter the ball-entering means than
In a gaming machine comprising
In the specific game state (high-probability and high support state) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, until the number of executions of the game round after shifting to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number (time reduction continuous number) When a specific condition (to be elected in a falling lottery) is established, the game state in which the judgment mode is the first judgment mode is the first predetermined game state (low probability high support state) The game state to shift from the specific game state means of transportation;
Advantageous state continuation means for continuing a state advantageous to the player for a predetermined period when the special information satisfies a second predetermined condition (a value corresponding to time saving provision) in the first predetermined game state;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature tA1, in the specific game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, when the specific condition is met before the number of game rounds executed after shifting to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number of times, The determination mode is shifted to the first predetermined game state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode. Then, when the special information satisfies the second predetermined condition in the first predetermined game state, the state advantageous to the player is continued for a predetermined period. Therefore, according to the feature tA1, in the specific game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, before the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number after the transition to the specific game state for the player When a specific condition is satisfied, the player can be expected to move from the specific game state to a first predetermined game state that can be advantageous to the player. That is, according to the feature tA1, in the specific game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the special information is determined by the second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high for the player. can be expected to satisfy the first predetermined condition, but furthermore, the specific condition is satisfied before the number of times of execution of the game round after the transition to the specific game state reaches the predetermined number, and from the specific game state , the player can expect to move to a first predetermined game state that can be advantageous to the player. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature tA2]
The gaming machine according to feature tA1,
The advantageous state continuation means is
In the first predetermined game state, when the special information satisfies a second predetermined condition (a value corresponding to time saving provision), the control mode by the control means until the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition. a control mode continuation means for continuing the second control mode as a gaming machine.

According to the characteristic tA2, in the first predetermined gaming state, when the special information satisfies the second predetermined condition, until the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition (for example, until the jackpot is elected), the control mode by the control means , the second control mode is continued. In the state where the control mode is the second control mode, it is easier for the game ball to enter the ball-entering means than in the state where the control mode is the first control mode, and it is difficult for the player to reduce the number of balls in his/her possession. Determination by the determination means regarding the special information acquired with the entry of the game ball into the means as a trigger can be executed at a high frequency. Therefore, if it is possible to shift to the first predetermined gaming state, it is possible to reliably realize that the special information acquired when the game ball enters the ball-entering means satisfies the first predetermined condition. Become.

Therefore, according to the feature tA2, in the specific game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, for the player, the specified It is possible to expect that a condition is satisfied and that the specific game state is shifted to the first predetermined game state. That is, according to the feature tA2, in the specific game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the special information is determined by the second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high for the player. can be expected to satisfy the first predetermined condition, but furthermore, the specific condition is satisfied before the number of times of execution of the game round after the transition to the specific game state reaches the predetermined number, and from the specific game state , the special information can be expected to shift to a first predetermined game state in which it is possible to reliably realize that the first predetermined condition is satisfied.

On the other hand, in the first predetermined game state after the shift, the player is in a state where the number of balls in his possession is difficult to decrease until the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition by the determination means next time (for example, until the jackpot is won). It is possible to give a sense of security that the second control mode in which the game ball can be easily entered into the ball entering means will not end. As described above, according to the feature tA2, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by providing the player with emotions such as a sense of anticipation and a sense of security.

[Feature tA3]
The gaming machine according to feature tA2,
The specific game, wherein the determination mode is the second determination mode when the number of executions of the game round after the transition to the specific game state reaches the predetermined number of times without the specific condition being satisfied. A means for shifting from the specific game state to a second predetermined game state (high probability low support state) different from the state,
A gaming machine, wherein the second predetermined game state is less advantageous for the player than the first predetermined game state.

According to the feature tA3, when the number of times of execution of the game round after the transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number of times without the specific condition being satisfied, the second predetermined game in which the determination mode is the second determination mode state. The second predetermined game state is less advantageous for the player than the first predetermined game state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode, although the determination mode is the second determination mode. For this reason, according to the feature tA3, the special information does not satisfy the first predetermined condition by the determination means, the specific condition is not established, and the number of game rounds executed after the transition to the specific game state is increased. It is possible to make the player feel a sense of urgency as to whether or not the predetermined number of times is reached. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature tA4]
The gaming machine according to feature tA3,
In the second predetermined game state, when the specific condition is established, the determination mode is the first determination mode, and the control mode is the first control mode to a normal state from the second predetermined game state A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for making a transition.

According to the feature tA4, it is possible to make the player feel a sense of urgency as to whether or not the specific condition will be satisfied in the second predetermined game state and the game will be shifted to the normal state. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature tA5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features tA1 to tA4,
When the number of executions of the game round after the judgment mode becomes the second judgment mode and the transition to the specific game state reaches a specific number of times (ST number of times) which is the number of times equal to or more than the predetermined number of times and means for shifting the determination mode to the first determination mode.

According to the feature tA5, the player is given a sense of urgency that the number of executions of the game rounds after shifting to the specific game state will reach a specific number and the judgment mode will shift to the first judgment mode. It can be held against. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

<Characteristic tB group>
The feature tB group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the ninth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature tB1]
A distribution area (game area PA) in which game balls circulate,
A ball entry means (second starting port 34) provided in the circulation area and capable of entering a game ball;
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (value of winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into said ball entering means;
means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot); determination means having a first determination mode (low-probability mode) and a second determination mode (high-probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is higher than that in the first determination mode;
When one game round is defined as the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended, a game round execution means (main control unit) for executing the game round MPU 62 on the board 61 side, and the game turn control process of FIG. 420 executed by it);
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is divided into a first state in which entry of a game ball into the ball entry means is made impossible or difficult, and a state in which entry of a game ball into the ball entry means is made possible or easy. a state transition means for transitioning between a second state which is a state to
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein the control mode in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means is a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode. a control means having at least a second control mode (high-frequency support mode) in which it is easier for a game ball to enter the ball-entering means than
In a gaming machine comprising
In the specific game state (high-probability and high support state) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, until the number of executions of the game round after shifting to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number (time reduction continuous number) When the specific condition (to be elected in the falling lottery) is established, the determination mode is the first determination mode, which is the first predetermined game state (low probability high support state). When the number of executions of the game round after transition to the specific game state reaches the predetermined number of times without the specific condition being satisfied, the determination mode is the second determination mode, and the specific game state Equipped with a game state transition means for shifting from the specific game state to a second predetermined game state (high probability low support state) different from
A gaming machine, wherein the second predetermined game state is less advantageous for the player than the first predetermined game state.

According to the feature tB1, in the specific game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, when the specific condition is satisfied before the number of game rounds executed after shifting to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number of times, The determination mode is shifted to the first predetermined game state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode. In addition, in the specific game state, when the number of executions of the game round after the transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number of times without the specific condition being satisfied, the determination mode is the second determination mode, and the specific game It is shifted to a second predetermined game state different from the state. The second predetermined game state is less advantageous for the player than the first predetermined game state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode, although the determination mode is the second determination mode. Therefore, according to the feature tB1, in the specific game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, before the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number after the transition to the specific game state for the player It is possible to expect that a specific condition is established and that the specific game state is shifted to the first predetermined game state. That is, according to the feature tB1, in the specific game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the special information is determined by the second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high for the player. can be expected to satisfy the first predetermined condition, but furthermore, the specific condition is satisfied before the number of times of execution of the game round after the transition to the specific game state reaches the predetermined number, and from the specific game state It is possible to make the player expect to move to the first predetermined game state.

In addition, according to the feature tB1, when the number of game rounds executed after the transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number of times without the specific condition being satisfied, a second predetermined number with a low advantage for the player is obtained. Since the transition to the game state is made, in the specific game state, the special information does not satisfy the first predetermined condition by the determination means, and the specific condition is not established, and the game round after the transition to the specific game state is performed. It is possible to make the player feel a sense of urgency as to whether or not the number of executions of the above reaches a predetermined number of times. As described above, according to the feature tB1, by giving the player emotions such as a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

[Feature tB2]
The gaming machine according to feature tB1,
In the first predetermined game state, when the special information satisfies a second predetermined condition (a value corresponding to time saving provision), the control mode by the control means until the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition. a control mode continuation means for continuing the second control mode as a gaming machine.

According to the characteristic tB2, in the first predetermined gaming state, when the special information satisfies the second predetermined condition, until the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition (for example, until the jackpot is elected), the control mode by the control means , the second control mode is continued. In the state where the control mode is the second control mode, it is easier for the game ball to enter the ball entry means than in the state where the control mode is the first control mode, and the player is less likely to lose the number of balls in his possession. Determination by the determination means about the special information acquired with the entry of the game ball into the ball means can be executed at a high frequency. Therefore, if it is possible to shift to the first predetermined gaming state, it is possible to reliably realize that the special information acquired when the game ball enters the ball-entering means satisfies the first predetermined condition. Become.

Therefore, according to the feature tB2, in the specific game state, the specific condition is satisfied before the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number, and the specific game state It is possible to further expect the transition from to the first predetermined game state. In addition, in the first predetermined game state that has shifted from the specific game state, the player is in a state where the number of balls in his possession is difficult to decrease until the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition by the determination means next time (for example, winning a jackpot). (until it is done), it is possible to provide a sense of security that the second control mode in which the game ball can be easily entered into the ball entering means will not end. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature tB3]
The gaming machine according to feature tB2,
In the second predetermined game state, when the specific condition is established, the determination mode is the first determination mode, and the control mode is the first control mode to a normal state from the second predetermined game state A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for making a transition.

According to the characteristic tB3, it is possible to make the player feel a sense of urgency as to whether or not the specific condition will be satisfied in the second predetermined game state and the game will be shifted to the normal state. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature tB4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features tB1 to tB3,
When the number of executions of the game round after the judgment mode becomes the second judgment mode and the transition to the specific game state reaches a specific number of times (ST number of times) which is the number of times equal to or more than the predetermined number of times and means for shifting the determination mode to the first determination mode.

According to the feature tB4, the player is given a sense of urgency that the number of executions of the game round after shifting to the specific game state reaches a specific number and the judgment mode shifts to the first judgment mode. It can be held against. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

<Characteristic tC group>
The feature tC group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the ninth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature tC1]
A distribution area (game area PA) in which game balls circulate,
A ball entry means (second starting port 34) provided in the circulation area and capable of entering a game ball;
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (value of winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into said ball entering means;
means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot); determination means having a first determination mode (low-probability mode) and a second determination mode (high-probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is higher than that in the first determination mode;
When one game round is defined as the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended, a game round execution means (main control unit) for executing the game round MPU 62 on the board 61 side, and the game turn control process of FIG. 420 executed by it);
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is divided into a first state in which entry of a game ball into the ball entry means is made impossible or difficult, and a state in which entry of a game ball into the ball entry means is made possible or easy. a state transition means for transitioning between a second state which is a state to
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein the control mode in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means is a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode. a control means having at least a second control mode (high-frequency support mode) in which it is easier for a game ball to enter the ball-entering means than
In a gaming machine comprising
In a first predetermined game state (low probability high support state) in which the determination mode is the first determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, the special information is different from the first predetermined condition A control mode that continues the second control mode as the control mode by the control means until the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition when the second predetermined condition (value corresponding to time saving provision) is satisfied means of continuity and
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the characteristic tC1, in the first predetermined game state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, the special information satisfies the second predetermined condition different from the first predetermined condition. In this case, the second control mode is continued as the control mode by the control means until the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition (for example, until the jackpot is won). In the state where the control mode is the second control mode, it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the ball-entering means than in the state where the control mode is the first control mode, and it is difficult for the player to reduce the number of balls in his/her possession. Determination by the determination means regarding the special information acquired with the entry of the game ball into the ball means can be executed at a high frequency. Therefore, according to the characteristic tC1, if the transition to the first predetermined gaming state can be made, the special information acquired with the entry of the game ball into the ball-entering means as a trigger surely satisfies the first predetermined condition. Realization is possible.

Therefore, according to the feature tC1, the player can be expected to move to the first predetermined game state. Furthermore, in the first predetermined game state, the number of balls in possession is not likely to decrease, and the next time, the game balls are fed to the ball entry means until the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition by the determination means (for example, until the jackpot is won). It is possible to give the player a sense of security that the second control mode in which the ball is easily entered will not end. As described above, according to the feature tC1, by giving the player feelings such as a sense of anticipation and a sense of security, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

[Feature tC2]
The gaming machine according to feature tC1,
In the first predetermined game state, when the determination means determines that the special information does not satisfy the first predetermined condition, the special information satisfies the second predetermined condition. game machine.

According to the feature tC2, when the determining means determines that the special information does not satisfy the first predetermined condition in the first predetermined game state, the special information satisfies the second predetermined condition. Therefore, in the first predetermined game state, the determination means determines that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition before determining that the special information satisfies the second predetermined condition, or the special information satisfies the second predetermined condition. It is determined that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition by continuing the second control mode because it is determined that the condition is satisfied. Therefore, in the first predetermined game state, it is practically guaranteed that the special information is determined to satisfy the first predetermined condition. Therefore, according to the feature tC2, the player can be expected to move to the first predetermined game state.

If, in the first predetermined game state, if the determination means determines that the special information does not satisfy the first predetermined condition, the special information may not satisfy the second predetermined condition. , As described above, although the player is expected to shift to the first predetermined game state, even if the expectation is betrayed and the state is shifted to the first predetermined game state, the special state will continue forever. It will be possible that the information does not satisfy the second predetermined condition. According to feature tC2, this problem can be avoided and the player's trust can be obtained.

[Feature tC3]
A gaming machine according to feature tC1 or feature tC2,
In a specific game state (high probability high support state) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, execution of the game round after transition to the specific game state When the specific condition (winning in the falling lottery) is established before the number of times reaches a predetermined number (time-saving continuation number), the transition from the specific game state to the first predetermined game state (low probability high support state) A game machine characterized by comprising: a game state transition means for causing the game state to change.

According to the feature tC3, in the specific game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, the number of game rounds executed after the transition to the specific game state is a predetermined number. When the specific condition is satisfied before reaching, the specific game state is shifted to the first predetermined game state. In the first predetermined gaming state, as described above, it is possible to reliably realize that the special information acquired when the game ball enters the ball-entering means satisfies the first predetermined condition. . Therefore, according to the feature tC3, in the specific game state, the specific condition is satisfied before the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number of times, and the specific game state can be expected to shift from to the first predetermined game state. That is, according to the characteristic tC3, in the specific game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the special information is determined by the second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high for the player. can be expected to satisfy the first predetermined condition, but furthermore, the specific condition is satisfied before the number of times of execution of the game round after the transition to the specific game state reaches the predetermined number, and from the specific game state , the special information can be expected to shift to a first predetermined game state in which it is possible to reliably realize that the first predetermined condition is satisfied.

[Feature tC4]
The gaming machine according to feature tC3,
When the number of executions of the game round after the transition to the specific game state reaches the predetermined number without the specific condition being satisfied, the determination mode is the second determination mode, and the control mode is the second A means for shifting from the specific game state to a second predetermined game state (high probability low support state) which is 1 control mode,
A gaming machine, wherein the second predetermined game state is less advantageous for the player than the first predetermined game state.

According to the feature tC4, when the number of game rounds executed after shifting to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number without satisfying a specific condition, the game state is shifted to the second predetermined game state. The second predetermined game state is less advantageous for the player than the first predetermined game state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode, although the determination mode is the second determination mode. For this reason, according to the feature tC4, the special information does not satisfy the first predetermined condition by the determination means, the specific condition is not satisfied, and the number of game rounds executed after the transition to the specific game state is increased. It is possible to make the player feel a sense of urgency as to whether or not the predetermined number of times is reached. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

<Characteristic tD group>
The feature tD group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the ninth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature tD1]
A distribution area (game area PA) in which game balls circulate,
A ball entry means (second starting port 34) provided in the circulation area and capable of entering a game ball;
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (value of winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into said ball entering means;
means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot); determination means having a first determination mode (low-probability mode) and a second determination mode (high-probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is higher than that in the first determination mode;
Judgment mode transition means (fall judgment process) for shifting the judgment executed by the judgment means from the second judgment mode to the first judgment mode when a specific condition (winning in a fall lottery) is established. ,
When one game round is defined as the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended, a game round execution means (main control unit) for executing the game round MPU 62 on the board 61 side, and the game turn control process of FIG. 420 executed by it);
In the specific game state (high-probability and high support state) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, until the number of executions of the game round after shifting to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number (time reduction continuous number) When the specific condition is satisfied, the determination mode is shifted to the first determination mode by the determination mode transition means, thereby from the specific game state to the first predetermined game state (low probability high support state) game state transition means for transition;
with
A gaming machine, wherein the first predetermined game state is more advantageous for the player than the specific game state.

According to the feature tD1, since the judgment mode shifting means shifts the judgment mode from the second judgment mode to the first judgment mode, it originally lowers the advantage for the player. On the other hand, according to the feature tD1, in the specific game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the determination mode When a specific condition for operating the transition means is satisfied, the game state is shifted from the specific game state to a first predetermined game state which is highly advantageous for the player. Therefore, according to the feature tD1, the game state is shifted to the first predetermined game state, which is highly advantageous for the player, although the operation is by the determination mode shift means that originally disappoints the player. Unexpected joy can be imparted to the player. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature tD2]
A gaming machine according to feature tD1,
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is divided into a first state in which entry of a game ball into the ball entry means is made impossible or difficult, and a state in which entry of a game ball into the ball entry means is made possible or easy. a state transition means for transitioning between a second state which is a state to
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein the control mode in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means is a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode. a control means having at least a second control mode (high-frequency support mode) in which it is easier for a game ball to enter the ball-entering means than
In the first predetermined game state, when the special information satisfies a second predetermined condition (a value corresponding to time saving provision), the control mode by the control means until the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition. a control mode continuation means for continuing the second control mode as
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature tD2, in the state where the control mode is the second control mode, it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the ball entry means than in the state where the control mode is the first control mode, and the number of balls held by the player decreases. In a difficult state, determination by the determination means regarding the special information acquired with the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means as a trigger can be executed at a high frequency. Therefore, if it is possible to shift to the first predetermined gaming state, it is possible to reliably realize that the special information acquired when the game ball enters the ball-entering means satisfies the first predetermined condition. Become.

Therefore, according to the feature tD2, in the specific game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, for the player, the specified It is possible to expect that a condition is satisfied and that the specific game state is shifted to the first predetermined game state. That is, according to the feature tD2, in the specific game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the special information is determined by the second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high for the player. can be expected to satisfy the first predetermined condition, but furthermore, the specific condition is satisfied before the number of times of execution of the game round after the transition to the specific game state reaches the predetermined number, and from the specific game state , the special information can be expected to shift to a first predetermined game state in which it is possible to reliably realize that the first predetermined condition is satisfied.

On the other hand, in the first predetermined game state after the shift, the player is in a state where the number of balls in his possession is difficult to decrease until the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition by the determination means next time (for example, until the jackpot is won). It is possible to give a sense of security that the second control mode in which the game ball can be easily entered into the ball entering means will not end. As described above, according to the feature tD2, by giving the player feelings such as a sense of anticipation and a sense of security, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

[Feature tD3]
A gaming machine according to feature tD1 or feature tD2,
The specific game, wherein the determination mode is the second determination mode when the number of executions of the game round after the transition to the specific game state reaches the predetermined number of times without the specific condition being satisfied. A means for shifting from the specific game state to a second predetermined game state (high probability low support state) different from the state,
A gaming machine, wherein the second predetermined game state is less advantageous for the player than the first predetermined game state.

According to the feature tD3, when the number of executions of the game round after the transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number without the specific condition being satisfied, the second predetermined game in which the determination mode is the second determination mode state. The second predetermined game state is less advantageous for the player than the first predetermined game state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode, although the determination mode is the second determination mode. For this reason, according to the feature tD3, the special information does not satisfy the first predetermined condition by the determination means, the specific condition is not satisfied, and the number of game rounds executed after the transition to the specific game state is increased. It is possible to make the player feel a sense of urgency as to whether or not the predetermined number of times is reached. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature tD4]
A gaming machine according to feature tD3,
In the second predetermined game state, when the specific condition is established, the determination mode is the first determination mode, and the control mode is the first control mode to a normal state from the second predetermined game state A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for making a transition.

According to the feature tD4, it is possible to make the player feel a sense of urgency as to whether or not the specific condition will be satisfied in the second predetermined game state and the game will be shifted to the normal state. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature tD5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features tA1 to tA4,
When the number of executions of the game round after the judgment mode becomes the second judgment mode and the transition to the specific game state reaches a specific number of times (ST number of times) which is the number of times equal to or more than the predetermined number of times and means for shifting the determination mode to the first determination mode.

According to the feature tD5, the player is given a sense of urgency that the number of executions of the game rounds after shifting to the specific game state will reach a specific number and the determination mode will shift to the first determination mode. It can be held against. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

<Characteristic tE group>
The feature tE group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the ninth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature tE1]
A distribution area (game area PA) in which game balls circulate,
A ball entry means (second starting port 34) provided in the circulation area and capable of entering a game ball;
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (value of winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into said ball entering means;
means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot); determination means having a first determination mode (low-probability mode) and a second determination mode (high-probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is higher than that in the first determination mode;
Judgment mode transition means (fall judgment process) for shifting the judgment executed by the judgment means from the second judgment mode to the first judgment mode when a specific condition (winning in a fall lottery) is established. ,
When one game round is defined as the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended, a game round execution means (main control unit) for executing the game round MPU 62 on the board 61 side, and the game turn control process of FIG. 420 executed by it);
a production executing means capable of executing production;
with
The production executing means is
In the specific game state (high-probability and high support state) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, until the number of executions of the game round after shifting to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number (time reduction continuous number) means for executing an effect corresponding to a predetermined advantageous state, which is advantageous to the player, when the specific condition is satisfied.

According to the feature tE1, since the determination mode shift means shifts the determination mode from the second determination mode to the first determination mode, it originally lowers the advantage for the player. On the other hand, according to the feature tE1, in the specific game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the determination mode When a specific condition for operating the transition means is established, an effect corresponding to a predetermined advantageous state, which is advantageous to the player, is executed. For this reason, according to the feature tE1, although the action is by the determination mode transition means that originally disappoints the player, an effect corresponding to a predetermined advantageous state that is advantageous to the player is executed. The range of performance can be expanded without being restricted by the operation by the judgment mode shift means. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature tE2]
The gaming machine according to feature tE1,
In the specific game state (high probability high support state), when the specific condition is satisfied before the number of executions of the game round after transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number (time reduction continuous number of times), A game state transition means for transitioning from the specific game state to a first predetermined game state (low probability high support state) by shifting the determination mode to the first determination mode by the determination mode transition means,
A gaming machine, wherein the first predetermined game state is more advantageous for the player than the specific game state.

According to the feature tE2, in the specific game state in which the decision mode is the second decision mode, the decision mode transition means is operated until the number of game rounds executed after the transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number. When the specific condition is established, the game state is shifted from the specific game state to a first predetermined game state having a high advantage for the player. Therefore, according to the feature tE2, the game state is shifted to the first predetermined game state, which is highly advantageous for the player, although it is an action by the determination mode transition means that originally disappoints the player. Unexpected joy can be imparted to the player. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature tE3]
The gaming machine according to feature tE2,
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is divided into a first state in which entry of a game ball into the ball entry means is made impossible or difficult, and a state in which entry of a game ball into the ball entry means is made possible or easy. a state transition means for transitioning between a second state which is a state to
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein the control mode in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means is a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode. a control means having at least a second control mode (high-frequency support mode) in which it is easier for a game ball to enter the ball-entering means than
In the first predetermined game state, when the special information satisfies a second predetermined condition (a value corresponding to time saving provision), the control mode by the control means until the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition. a control mode continuation means for continuing the second control mode as
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature tE3, in the state where the control mode is the second control mode, it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the ball entry means than in the state where the control mode is the first control mode, and the number of balls held by the player is reduced. In a difficult state, it is possible to frequently execute the determination by the determination means regarding the special information acquired with the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means as a trigger. Therefore, if it is possible to shift to the first predetermined gaming state, it is possible to reliably realize that the special information acquired when the game ball enters the ball-entering means satisfies the first predetermined condition. Become.

Therefore, according to the feature tE3, in the specific game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, for the player, after the transition to the specific game state, the specified It is possible to expect that a condition is satisfied and that the specific game state is shifted to the first predetermined game state. That is, according to the feature tE3, in the specific game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the special information is determined by the second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high for the player. can be expected to satisfy the first predetermined condition, but furthermore, the specific condition is satisfied before the number of times of execution of the game round after the transition to the specific game state reaches the predetermined number, and from the specific game state , the special information can be expected to shift to a first predetermined game state in which it is possible to reliably realize that the first predetermined condition is satisfied.

On the other hand, in the first predetermined game state after the shift, the player is in a state where the number of balls in his possession is difficult to decrease until the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition by the determination means next time (for example, until the jackpot is won). It is possible to give a sense of security that the second control mode in which the game ball can be easily entered into the ball entering means will not end. As described above, according to the feature tE3, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game by providing the player with emotions such as a sense of anticipation and a sense of security.

[Feature tE4]
A gaming machine according to feature tE2 or feature tE3,
The specific game, wherein the determination mode is the second determination mode when the number of executions of the game round after the transition to the specific game state reaches the predetermined number of times without the specific condition being satisfied. A means for shifting from the specific game state to a second predetermined game state (high probability low support state) different from the state,
A gaming machine, wherein the second predetermined game state is less advantageous for the player than the first predetermined game state.

According to the feature tE4, when the number of executions of the game round after the transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number of times without the specific condition being satisfied, the second predetermined game in which the determination mode is the second determination mode state. The second predetermined game state is less advantageous for the player than the first predetermined game state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode, although the determination mode is the second determination mode. For this reason, according to the feature tE4, the special information does not satisfy the first predetermined condition by the judging means, the specific condition is not established, and the number of game rounds executed after the transition to the specific game state is increased. It is possible to make the player feel a sense of urgency as to whether or not the predetermined number of times is reached. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature tE5]
The gaming machine according to feature tE4,
In the second predetermined game state, when the specific condition is established, the determination mode is the first determination mode, and the control mode is the first control mode to a normal state from the second predetermined game state A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for making a transition.

According to the feature tE5, it is possible to make the player feel a sense of urgency in the second predetermined game state as to whether the specific condition will be satisfied and the game will be shifted to the normal state. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature tE6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features tE1 to tE5,
When the number of executions of the game round after the judgment mode becomes the second judgment mode and the transition to the specific game state reaches a specific number of times (ST number of times) which is the number of times equal to or more than the predetermined number of times and means for shifting the determination mode to the first determination mode.

According to the feature tE6, the player is given a sense of urgency that the number of executions of the game rounds after shifting to the specific game state will reach a specific number and the judgment mode will shift to the first judgment mode. can be held against Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

<Characteristic tF group>
The feature tF group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the ninth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature tF1]
a launching means for launching a game ball;
A distribution area (game area PA) in which the launched game balls circulate;
A ball entry means (second starting port 34) provided in the circulation area and capable of entering a game ball;
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (value of winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into said ball entering means;
means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot); determination means having a first determination mode (low-probability mode) and a second determination mode (high-probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is higher than that in the first determination mode;
When one game round is defined as the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended, a game round execution means (main control unit) for executing the game round MPU 62 on the board 61 side, and the game turn control process of FIG. 420 executed by it);
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is divided into a first state in which entry of a game ball into the ball entry means is made impossible or difficult, and a state in which entry of a game ball into the ball entry means is made possible or easy. a state transition means for transitioning between a second state which is a state to
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein the control mode in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means is a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode. a control means having at least a second control mode (high-frequency support mode) in which it is easier for a game ball to enter the ball-entering means than
In a gaming machine comprising
In the first predetermined game state (low probability high support state) in which the determination mode is the first determination mode, the special information is a second predetermined condition different from the first predetermined condition (value corresponding to time reduction grant) is satisfied, a control mode continuation means for continuing the second control mode as the control mode by the control means for a period until the number of executions of the game round reaches a predetermined number,
In a situation in which a game ball is fired in a predetermined firing mode (right-handed firing mode) by the shooting means that allows the game ball to enter the ball-entering means, after the start of the second control mode The second control mode is maintained until the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition by repeating that the special information satisfies the second predetermined condition before the number of executions of the game times reaches the predetermined number of times. A game machine characterized by being configured to continue.

According to the feature tF1, when the special information satisfies a second predetermined condition different from the first predetermined condition in the first predetermined game state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode, the number of times the game is executed is predetermined. The second control mode is continued as the control mode by the control means until the number of times is reached. In the state where the control mode is the second control mode, it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the ball-entering means than in the state where the control mode is the first control mode, and it is difficult for the player to reduce the number of balls in his/her possession. Determination by the determination means regarding the special information acquired with the entry of the game ball into the ball means can be executed at a high frequency. Moreover, according to the feature tF1, in a situation where the game ball is being shot in a predetermined shooting mode that allows the game ball to enter the ball entering means, the game round is executed after the second control mode is started. By repeating that the special information satisfies the second predetermined condition before the number of times reaches the predetermined number, the second control mode is continued until the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition. Therefore, according to the feature tF1, if it is possible to shift to the first predetermined gaming state, it is ensured that the special information acquired when the game ball enters the ball-entering means satisfies the first predetermined condition. Realization is possible.

Therefore, according to the feature tF1, the player can expect the transition to the first predetermined game state. Further, according to the feature tF1, in the first predetermined game state, the second control mode is continued until the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition using the control mode continuation means for continuing the second control mode only a predetermined number of times. There is also an effect that a playfulness can be realized. In other words, without using means for continuing the second control mode until the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition, the game property of continuing the second control mode until the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition next time is realized. can.

[Feature tF2]
The gaming machine according to feature tF1,
In the first predetermined game state, when the determination means determines that the special information does not satisfy the first predetermined condition, the special information satisfies the second predetermined condition. game machine.

According to the feature tF2, when the determining means determines that the special information does not satisfy the first predetermined condition in the first predetermined game state, the special information satisfies the second predetermined condition. Therefore, in the first predetermined game state, the determination means determines that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition before determining that the special information satisfies the second predetermined condition, or the special information satisfies the second predetermined condition. It is determined that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition by continuing the second control mode because it is determined that the condition is satisfied. Therefore, in the first predetermined game state, it is practically guaranteed that the special information is determined to satisfy the first predetermined condition. Therefore, according to the feature tF2, the player can be expected to move to the first predetermined game state.

[Feature tF3]
A gaming machine according to feature tF1 or feature tF2,
In a specific game state (high probability high support state) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, execution of the game round after transition to the specific game state When the specific condition (winning in the falling lottery) is established before the number of times reaches a predetermined number (time-saving continuation number), the transition from the specific game state to the first predetermined game state (low probability high support state) A game machine characterized by comprising: a game state transition means for causing the game state to change.

According to the feature tF3, in a specific game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, the number of game rounds executed after the transition to the specific game state is a predetermined number. When the specific condition is satisfied before reaching, the specific game state is shifted to the first predetermined game state. In the first predetermined gaming state, as described above, it is possible to reliably realize that the special information acquired when the game ball enters the ball-entering means satisfies the first predetermined condition. . Therefore, according to the feature tF3, in the specific game state, the specific condition is satisfied before the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number, and the specific game state can be expected to shift from to the first predetermined game state. That is, according to the feature tF3, in the specific game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the special information is determined by the second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high for the player. can be expected to satisfy the first predetermined condition, but furthermore, the specific condition is satisfied before the number of times of execution of the game round after the transition to the specific game state reaches the predetermined number, and from the specific game state , the special information can be expected to shift to a first predetermined game state in which it is possible to reliably realize that the first predetermined condition is satisfied.

[Feature tF4]
The gaming machine according to feature tF3,
When the number of executions of the game round after the transition to the specific game state reaches the predetermined number without the specific condition being satisfied, the determination mode is the second determination mode, and the control mode is the second A means for shifting from the specific game state to a second predetermined game state (high probability low support state) which is 1 control mode,
A gaming machine, wherein the second predetermined game state is less advantageous for the player than the first predetermined game state.

According to the feature tF4, when the number of game rounds executed after shifting to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number without satisfying a specific condition, the game state is shifted to the second predetermined game state. The second predetermined game state is less advantageous for the player than the first predetermined game state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode, although the determination mode is the second determination mode. For this reason, according to the feature tF4, the special information does not satisfy the first predetermined condition by the determination means, the specific condition is not satisfied, and the number of game rounds executed after the transition to the specific game state is increased. It is possible to make the player feel a sense of urgency as to whether or not the predetermined number of times is reached. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

<Characteristic tG group>
The feature tG group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the ninth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature tG1]
A distribution area (game area PA) in which game balls circulate,
A ball entry means (second starting port 34) provided in the circulation area and capable of entering a game ball;
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (value of winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into said ball entering means;
means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot); determination means having a first determination mode (low-probability mode) and a second determination mode (high-probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is higher than that in the first determination mode;
When one game round is defined as the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended, a game round execution means (main control unit) for executing the game round MPU 62 on the board 61 side, and the game turn control process of FIG. 420 executed by it);
In a gaming machine comprising
In the specific game state (high-probability and high support state) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, until the number of executions of the game round after shifting to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number (time reduction continuous number) When the specific condition (winning in the falling lottery) is established, the specific game state is shifted to the first predetermined game state (low probability high support state) guaranteed to transfer to the specific game state again. , when the number of executions of the game round after the transition to the specific game state reaches the predetermined number of times without the specific condition being satisfied, the probability of moving again to the specific game state is the first predetermined A gaming machine characterized by comprising game state transition means for shifting from the specific game state to a second predetermined game state (low probability low support state H1 in modified example 1) lower than the game state.

According to the feature tG1, in the specific game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, when the specific condition is met before the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number after shifting to the specific game state, It is shifted from the specific game state to the first predetermined game state guaranteed to transfer to the specific game state again. In addition, in the specific game state, if the number of game rounds executed after transitioning to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number of times without the specific condition being satisfied, the probability of moving again to the specific game state is the first predetermined The specific game state is shifted to a second predetermined game state lower than the game state. For this reason, according to the feature tG1, in the specific game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, before the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number after the transition to the specific game state for the player It is possible to expect that a specific condition is established and that the specific game state is shifted to the first predetermined game state. That is, according to the feature tG1, in the specific game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the special information is determined by the second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high for the player. can be expected to satisfy the first predetermined condition, but furthermore, the specific condition is satisfied before the number of times of execution of the game round after the transition to the specific game state reaches the predetermined number, and from the specific game state It is possible to make the player expect to move to the first predetermined game state.

In addition, according to the feature tG1, when the number of executions of the game round after the transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number without the specific condition being satisfied, the probability of moving again to the specific game state is the first. Since the transition is made to the second predetermined game state lower than the predetermined game state, in the specific game state, the special information does not satisfy the first predetermined condition by the determination means, and the specific condition is not established. It is possible to make the player feel a sense of urgency as to whether or not the number of game rounds executed after the transition to the game state will reach a predetermined number. As described above, according to the feature tG1, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by giving the player emotions such as a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency.

[Feature tG2]
A gaming machine according to feature tG1,
The game state transition means is
When the specific condition is satisfied, the game state is shifted by switching the determination executed by the determination means between the first determination mode and the second determination mode (fall determination processing). A gaming machine characterized by comprising means.

According to the characteristic tG2, the game state transition is performed by the game state transition means by switching the determination executed by the determination means between the first determination mode and the second determination mode. Therefore, according to the feature tG2, the controllability is excellent.

[Feature tG3]
A gaming machine according to feature tG1,
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is divided into a first state in which entry of a game ball into the ball entry means is made impossible or difficult, and a state in which entry of a game ball into the ball entry means is made possible or easy. a state transition means for transitioning between a second state which is a state to
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein a first control mode (low-frequency support mode) and the first control mode are used as control modes in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means. a control means having at least a second control mode (high-frequency support mode) in which it is easier for a game ball to enter the ball-entering means than
with
A game machine, wherein the second predetermined game state is a game state in which the control mode is the first control mode.

According to the feature tG3, since the control mode is the first control mode in the second predetermined game state, it is difficult to enter the game ball into the ball entering means. Therefore, in the second predetermined game state, the advantage for the player is low. Therefore, according to the feature tG3, in the specific game state, the number of game rounds executed after the transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number of times without the specific condition being satisfied. You can give more to people.

[Feature tG4]
A gaming machine according to feature tG1,
A gaming machine, wherein the second predetermined game state is a game state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode.

According to the feature tG4, in the second predetermined game state, the determination mode is the first determination mode, so the advantage for the player is low. For this reason, according to the feature tG4, in the specific game state, the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific game state will reach a predetermined number of times without the specific condition being satisfied. , more can be awarded to the player.

<Characteristic tH group>
The feature tH group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the ninth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature tH1]
A distribution area (game area PA) in which game balls circulate,
A ball entry means (second starting port 34) provided in the circulation area and capable of entering a game ball;
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (value of winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into said ball entering means;
means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot); determination means having a first determination mode (low-probability mode) and a second determination mode (high-probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is higher than that in the first determination mode;
When one game round is defined as the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended, a game round execution means (main control unit) for executing the game round MPU 62 on the board 61 side, and the game turn control process of FIG. 420 executed by it);
In a gaming machine comprising
In the specific game state (high-probability and high support state) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, until the number of executions of the game round after shifting to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number (time reduction continuous number) When the specific condition (winning in the falling lottery) is established, the specific game state is shifted to the first predetermined game state (low probability high support state) guaranteed to transfer to the specific game state again. , when the number of executions of the game round after the transition to the specific game state reaches the predetermined number of times without the specific condition being satisfied, the probability of moving again to the specific game state is the first predetermined A game state transition means for shifting from the specific game state to a second predetermined game state (low probability low support state H1 in modified example 1) lower than the game state,
The game state transition means is
When the specific condition is established, the game state is shifted by switching the determination executed by the determination means between the first determination mode and the second determination mode (fall determination processing). A gaming machine characterized by comprising means.

According to the feature tH1, in the specific game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, when the specific condition is satisfied before the number of times of execution of the game round after shifting to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number, It is shifted from the specific game state to the first predetermined game state guaranteed to transfer to the specific game state again. In addition, in the specific game state, if the number of game rounds executed after transitioning to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number of times without the specific condition being satisfied, the probability of moving again to the specific game state is the first predetermined The specific game state is shifted to a second predetermined game state lower than the game state. Therefore, according to the feature tH1, in the specific game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, before the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number, It is possible to expect that a specific condition is established and that the specific game state is shifted to the first predetermined game state. That is, according to the feature tH1, in the specific game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the special information is determined by the second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high for the player. can be expected to satisfy the first predetermined condition, but furthermore, the specific condition is satisfied before the number of times of execution of the game round after the transition to the specific game state reaches the predetermined number, and from the specific game state It is possible to make the player expect to move to the first predetermined game state.

Further, according to the feature tH1, when the number of executions of game rounds after the transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number of times without the specific condition being satisfied, the probability of moving again to the specific game state is the first. Since the transition is made to the second predetermined game state lower than the predetermined game state, in the specific game state, the special information does not satisfy the first predetermined condition by the determination means, and the specific condition is not established. It is possible to make the player feel a sense of urgency as to whether or not the number of game rounds executed after the transition to the game state will reach a predetermined number. As described above, according to the feature tH1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the player emotions such as a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency.

Further, according to the feature tH1, the game state transition is performed by the game state transition means by switching the determination executed by the determination means between the first determination mode and the second determination mode. Therefore, according to the feature tH1, the controllability is excellent.

<Characteristic tI group>
The feature tI group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the ninth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature tI1]
A distribution area (game area PA) in which game balls circulate,
A ball entry means (second starting port 34) provided in the circulation area and capable of entering a game ball;
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (value of winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into said ball entering means;
means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot); determination means having a first determination mode (low-probability mode) and a second determination mode (high-probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is higher than that in the first determination mode;
When one game round is defined as the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended, a game round execution means (main control unit) for executing the game round MPU 62 on the board 61 side, and the game turn control process of FIG. 420 executed by it);
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is divided into a first state in which entry of a game ball into the ball entry means is made impossible or difficult, and a state in which entry of a game ball into the ball entry means is made possible or easy. a state transition means for transitioning between a second state which is a state to
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein the control mode in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means is a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode. a control means having at least a second control mode (high-frequency support mode) in which it is easier for a game ball to enter the ball-entering means than
In a gaming machine comprising
In the specific game state (high-probability and high support state) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, until the number of executions of the game round after shifting to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number (time reduction continuous number) When the specific condition (winning in the falling lottery) is established, the specific game state is shifted to the first predetermined game state (low probability high support state) guaranteed to transfer to the specific game state again. , when the number of executions of the game round after the transition to the specific game state reaches the predetermined number of times without the specific condition being satisfied, the probability of moving again to the specific game state is the first predetermined A game state transition means for shifting from the specific game state to a second predetermined game state (low probability low support state H1 in modified example 1) lower than the game state,
A game machine, wherein the second predetermined game state is a game state in which the control mode is the first control mode.

According to the feature tI1, in the specific game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, when the specific condition is met before the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number after shifting to the specific game state, It is shifted from the specific game state to the first predetermined game state guaranteed to transfer to the specific game state again. In addition, in the specific game state, if the number of game rounds executed after transitioning to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number of times without the specific condition being satisfied, the probability of moving again to the specific game state is the first predetermined The specific game state is shifted to a second predetermined game state lower than the game state. Therefore, according to the feature tI1, in the specific game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, before the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number after the transition to the specific game state for the player It is possible to expect that a specific condition is established and that the specific game state is shifted to the first predetermined game state. That is, according to the feature tI1, in the specific game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the special information is determined by the second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high for the player. can be expected to satisfy the first predetermined condition, but furthermore, the specific condition is satisfied before the number of times of execution of the game round after the transition to the specific game state reaches the predetermined number, and from the specific game state It is possible to make the player expect to move to the first predetermined game state.

In addition, according to the feature tI1, when the number of executions of game rounds after the transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number of times without the specific condition being satisfied, the probability of moving again to the specific game state is the first. Since the transition is made to the second predetermined game state lower than the predetermined game state, in the specific game state, the special information does not satisfy the first predetermined condition by the determination means, and the specific condition is not established. It is possible to make the player feel a sense of urgency as to whether or not the number of game rounds executed after the transition to the game state will reach a predetermined number. As described above, according to the feature tI1, by imparting emotions such as a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency to the player, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Furthermore, according to the characteristic tI1, since the control mode is the first control mode in the second predetermined game state, it is difficult to enter the game ball into the ball entering means. Therefore, in the second predetermined game state, the advantage for the player is low. Therefore, according to the feature tI1, in the specific game state, the number of game rounds executed after the transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number of times without the specific condition being satisfied. You can give more to people.

<Characteristic tJ group>
The feature tJ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the ninth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature tJ1]
A distribution area (game area PA) in which game balls circulate,
A ball entry means (second starting port 34) provided in the circulation area and capable of entering a game ball;
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (value of winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into said ball entering means;
means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot); determination means having a first determination mode (low-probability mode) and a second determination mode (high-probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is higher than that in the first determination mode;
When one game round is defined as the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended, a game round execution means (main control unit) for executing the game round MPU 62 on the board 61 side, and the game round control process of FIG. 420 executed by it);
In a gaming machine comprising
In the specific game state (high-probability and high support state) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, until the number of executions of the game round after shifting to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number (time reduction continuous number) When the specific condition (winning in the falling lottery) is established, the specific game state is shifted to the first predetermined game state (low probability high support state) guaranteed to transfer to the specific game state again. , when the number of executions of the game round after the transition to the specific game state reaches the predetermined number of times without the specific condition being satisfied, the probability of moving again to the specific game state is the first predetermined A game state transition means for shifting from the specific game state to a second predetermined game state (low probability low support state H1 in modified example 1) lower than the game state,
A gaming machine, wherein the second predetermined game state is a game state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode.

According to the feature tJ1, in the specific game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, when the specific condition is met before the number of game rounds executed after shifting to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number of times, It is shifted from the specific game state to the first predetermined game state guaranteed to transfer to the specific game state again. In addition, in the specific game state, if the number of game rounds executed after transitioning to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number of times without the specific condition being satisfied, the probability of moving again to the specific game state is the first predetermined The specific game state is shifted to a second predetermined game state lower than the game state. Therefore, according to the feature tJ1, in the specific game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, before the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number after the transition to the specific game state, It is possible to expect that a specific condition is established and that the specific game state is shifted to the first predetermined game state. That is, according to the feature tJ1, in the specific game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the special information is determined by the second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high for the player. can be expected to satisfy the first predetermined condition, but furthermore, the specific condition is satisfied before the number of times of execution of the game round after the transition to the specific game state reaches the predetermined number, and from the specific game state It is possible to make the player expect to move to the first predetermined game state.

In addition, according to the feature tJ1, when the number of executions of the game round after the transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number of times without the specific condition being satisfied, the probability of moving again to the specific game state is the first. Since the transition is made to the second predetermined game state lower than the predetermined game state, in the specific game state, the special information does not satisfy the first predetermined condition by the determination means, and the specific condition is not established. It is possible to make the player feel a sense of urgency as to whether or not the number of game rounds executed after the transition to the game state will reach a predetermined number. As described above, according to the feature tJ1, by imparting emotions such as a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency to the player, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Furthermore, according to the feature tJ1, in the second predetermined game state, the determination mode is the first determination mode, so the advantage for the player is low. For this reason, according to the feature tJ1, in the specific game state, the number of times of execution of game rounds after the transition to the specific game state will reach a predetermined number of times without the specific condition being satisfied. , more can be awarded to the player.

<Characteristic tK group>
The feature tK group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the ninth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature tK1]
A distribution area (game area PA) in which game balls circulate,
A ball entry means (second starting port 34) provided in the circulation area and capable of entering a game ball;
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (value of winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into said ball entering means;
means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot); determination means having a first determination mode (low-probability mode) and a second determination mode (high-probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is higher than that in the first determination mode;
When one game round is defined as the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended, a game round execution means (main control unit) for executing the game round MPU 62 on the board 61 side, and the game turn control process of FIG. 420 executed by it);
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is divided into a first state in which entry of a game ball into the ball entry means is made impossible or difficult, and a state in which entry of a game ball into the ball entry means is made possible or easy. a state transition means for transitioning between a second state which is a state to
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein the control mode in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means is a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode. a control means having at least a second control mode (high-frequency support mode) in which it is easier for a game ball to enter the ball-entering means than
a game state transition means for transitioning a game state specified by the determination mode and the control mode;
with
The game state transition means is
In the first specific game state (high probability high support state), when the specific condition (winning in the falling lottery) is established, the control mode is set to the second control mode for a predetermined period (period until the next jackpot is won) A first transition means for shifting to a first predetermined game state (low probability high support state) that is more advantageous for the player than the first specific game state by maintaining the
In the first specific game state, when the specific condition is not satisfied (without winning in the falling lottery) and the predetermined condition is satisfied (the game round of the number of times of time-saving continuation is executed), the second specific game state A second transition means for transitioning to (high probability low support state),
In the second specific game state, when the specific condition is satisfied, a second predetermined game state (low probability low support state) that is less advantageous for the player than the second specific game state 3 transition means;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature tK1, even if the same specific condition is established, the function differs between the first specific game state and the second specific game state. When a specific condition is satisfied in the first specific game state, the game state is shifted so as to increase the advantage for the player, and when the specific condition is satisfied in the second specific game state. , the transition of the game state is performed such that the advantage for the player is lowered. That is, according to the feature tK1, the fulfillment of the specific condition triggers the transition to two game states with different advantages for the player, so that the game characteristics of the gaming machine can be diversified.

[Feature tK2]
The gaming machine according to feature tK1,
The game state transition means is
determination mode determination means (fall determination process) for alternatively determining the determination to be executed by the determination means between the first determination mode and the second determination mode when the specific condition is satisfied; prepared,
The third transfer means is
The gaming machine is characterized in that the game state is shifted by switching the determination mode from the second determination mode to the first determination mode by the determination mode determining means.

According to the characteristic tK2, by switching the determination mode from the second determination mode to the first determination mode by the determination mode determination means, the transition of the game state in the third transition means is performed. Therefore, according to the feature tK2, the controllability is excellent.

[Feature tK3]
The gaming machine according to feature tK1,
A gaming machine, wherein the first predetermined game state is a state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode.

According to the feature tK3, in the first predetermined game state, the determination mode is the first determination mode, but since the advantage for the player is higher than in the first specific game state, it is unexpected for the player. can be given.

[Feature tK4]
The gaming machine according to feature tK1,
A gaming machine, wherein the second predetermined game state is a state in which the control mode is the first control mode.

According to the feature tK4, in the second predetermined game state, since the control mode is the first control mode, it is difficult to enter the game ball into the ball entering means. Therefore, in the second predetermined game state, the advantage for the player is low. Therefore, according to the feature tK4, in the second specific game state, it is possible to give the player a sense of urgency as to whether or not the specific condition that triggers the transition to the second predetermined game state is established. .

[Feature tK5]
The gaming machine according to feature tK1,
A gaming machine, wherein the second specific game state is a state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode.

According to the feature tK5, in the second specific game state, since the determination mode is the second determination mode, it is highly advantageous for the player. For this reason, according to the feature tK5, it is not desirable for the player to shift the game state from the second specific game state, which is highly advantageous. Such a sense of urgency can be imparted to the player.

[Feature tK6]
The gaming machine according to feature tK1,
A gaming machine, wherein the second predetermined game state is a state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode.

According to the feature tK6, in the second predetermined game state, the determination mode is the first determination mode, so the advantage for the player is low. Therefore, according to the feature tK6, in the second specific game state, it is possible to further give the player a sense of urgency as to whether or not the specific condition that triggers the transition to the second predetermined game state is established. can.

<Characteristic tL group>
The feature tL group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the ninth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature tL1]
A distribution area (game area PA) in which game balls circulate,
A ball entry means (second starting port 34) provided in the circulation area and capable of entering a game ball;
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (value of winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into said ball entering means;
means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot); determination means having a first determination mode (low-probability mode) and a second determination mode (high-probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is higher than that in the first determination mode;
When one game round is defined as the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended, a game round execution means (main control unit) for executing the game round MPU 62 on the board 61 side, and the game turn control process of FIG. 420 executed by it);
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is divided into a first state in which entry of a game ball into the ball entry means is made impossible or difficult, and a state in which entry of a game ball into the ball entry means is made possible or easy. a state transition means for transitioning between a second state which is a state to
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein the control mode in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means is a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode. a control means having at least a second control mode (high-frequency support mode) in which it is easier for a game ball to enter the ball-entering means than
a game state transition means for transitioning a game state specified by the determination mode and the control mode;
with
The game state transition means is
determination mode determination means (fall determination process) for alternatively determining the determination to be executed by the determination means between the first determination mode and the second determination mode when the specific condition is satisfied; ,
In the first specific game state (high probability high support state), when the specific condition (winning in the falling lottery) is established, the control mode is set for a predetermined period by the determination mode determination means (the period until the next jackpot is won) ), by maintaining the second control mode, a first transition means for shifting to a first predetermined game state (low probability high support state) that is more advantageous for the player than the first specific game state,
In the first specific game state, when the specific condition is not satisfied (without winning in the falling lottery) and the predetermined condition is satisfied (the game round of the number of times of time-saving continuation is executed), the second specific game state A second transition means for transitioning to (high probability low support state),
In the second specific game state, when the specific condition is satisfied, the determination mode is switched by the determination mode determination means, so that the advantage for the player is low compared to the second specific game state. 2 a third transition means for shifting from the second specific game state to a predetermined game state (low probability low support state);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the characteristic tL1, even if the same specific condition is satisfied, the function differs between the first specific game state and the second specific game state. When a specific condition is satisfied in the first specific game state, the game state is shifted so as to increase the advantage for the player, and when the specific condition is satisfied in the second specific game state. , the transition of the game state is performed so that the advantage for the player is lowered. That is, according to the feature tL1, the fulfillment of the specific condition triggers the transition to two game states having different advantages for the player, so that the game characteristics of the gaming machine can be diversified. Further, according to the feature tL1, by switching the determination mode from the second determination mode to the first determination mode by the determination mode determination means, the transition of the game state is performed by the third transition means. Therefore, according to the feature tL1, the controllability is excellent.

<Characteristic tM group>
The feature tM group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the ninth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature tM1]
A distribution area (game area PA) in which game balls circulate,
A ball entry means (second starting port 34) provided in the circulation area and capable of entering a game ball;
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (value of winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into said ball entering means;
means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot); determination means having a first determination mode (low-probability mode) and a second determination mode (high-probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is higher than that in the first determination mode;
When one game round is defined as the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended, a game round execution means (main control unit) for executing the game round MPU 62 on the board 61 side, and the game turn control process of FIG. 420 executed by it);
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is divided into a first state in which entry of a game ball into the ball entry means is made impossible or difficult, and a state in which entry of a game ball into the ball entry means is made possible or easy. a state transition means for transitioning between a second state which is a state to
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein the control mode in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means is a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode. a control means having at least a second control mode (high-frequency support mode) in which it is easier for a game ball to enter the ball-entering means than
a game state transition means for transitioning a game state specified by the determination mode and the control mode;
with
The game state transition means is
In the first specific game state (high probability high support state), when the specific condition (winning in the falling lottery) is established, the control mode is set to the second control mode for a predetermined period (period until the next jackpot is won) A first transition means for shifting to a first predetermined game state (low probability high support state) that is more advantageous for the player than the first specific game state by maintaining the
In the first specific game state, when the specific condition is not satisfied (without winning in the falling lottery) and the predetermined condition is satisfied (the game round of the number of times of time-saving continuation is executed), the second specific game state A second transition means for transitioning to (high probability low support state),
In the second specific game state, when the specific condition is satisfied, a second predetermined game state (low probability low support state) that is less advantageous for the player than the second specific game state 3 transfer means;
with
A gaming machine, wherein the first predetermined game state is a state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode.

According to the feature tM1, even if the same specific condition is established, the function differs between the first specific game state and the second specific game state. When a specific condition is satisfied in the first specific game state, the game state is shifted so as to increase the advantage for the player, and when the specific condition is satisfied in the second specific game state. , the transition of the game state is performed such that the advantage for the player is lowered. That is, according to the feature tM1, the fulfillment of the specific condition triggers the transition to two game states with different advantages for the player, so that the game characteristics of the gaming machine can be diversified.

Further, according to the feature tM1, in the first predetermined game state, the determination mode is the first determination mode, but compared to the first specific game state, the advantage for the player is high, so It can add surprise.

<Characteristic tN group>
The feature tN group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the ninth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature tN1]
A distribution area (game area PA) in which game balls circulate,
A ball entry means (second starting port 34) provided in the circulation area and capable of entering a game ball;
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (value of winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into said ball entering means;
means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot); determination means having a first determination mode (low-probability mode) and a second determination mode (high-probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is higher than that in the first determination mode;
When one game round is defined as the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended, a game round execution means (main control unit) for executing the game round MPU 62 on the board 61 side, and the game turn control process of FIG. 420 executed by it);
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is divided into a first state in which entry of a game ball into the ball entry means is made impossible or difficult, and a state in which entry of a game ball into the ball entry means is made possible or easy. a state transition means for transitioning between a second state which is a state to
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein the control mode in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means is a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode. a control means having at least a second control mode (high-frequency support mode) in which it is easier for a game ball to enter the ball-entering means than
a game state transition means for transitioning a game state specified by the determination mode and the control mode;
with
The game state transition means is
In the first specific game state (high probability high support state), when the specific condition (winning in the falling lottery) is established, the control mode is set to the second control mode for a predetermined period (period until the next jackpot is won) A first transition means for shifting to a first predetermined game state (low probability high support state) that is more advantageous for the player than the first specific game state by maintaining the
In the first specific game state, when the specific condition is not satisfied (without winning in the falling lottery) and the predetermined condition is satisfied (the game round of the number of times of time-saving continuation is executed), the second specific game state A second transition means for transitioning to (high probability low support state),
In the second specific game state, when the specific condition is satisfied, a second predetermined game state (low probability low support state) that is less advantageous for the player than the second specific game state 3 transfer means;
with
A gaming machine, wherein the second predetermined game state is a state in which the control mode is the first control mode.

According to the feature tN1, even if the same specific condition is established, the function differs between the first specific game state and the second specific game state. When a specific condition is satisfied in the first specific game state, the game state is shifted so as to increase the advantage for the player, and when the specific condition is satisfied in the second specific game state. , the transition of the game state is performed so that the advantage for the player is lowered. That is, according to the feature tN1, the fulfillment of the specific condition triggers the transition to two game states having different advantages for the player, so that the game characteristics of the gaming machine can be diversified.

Further, according to the characteristic tN1, since the control mode is the first control mode in the second predetermined game state, it is difficult to enter the game ball into the ball entering means. Therefore, in the second predetermined game state, the advantage for the player is low. Therefore, according to the feature tN1, in the second specific game state, it is possible to impart a sense of urgency to the player as to whether or not the specific condition that triggers the transition to the second predetermined game state is established. .

<Feature tO group>
The feature tO group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the ninth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature tO1]
A distribution area (game area PA) in which game balls circulate,
A ball entry means (second starting port 34) provided in the circulation area and capable of entering a game ball;
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (value of winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into said ball entering means;
means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot); determination means having a first determination mode (low-probability mode) and a second determination mode (high-probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is higher than that in the first determination mode;
When one game round is defined as the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended, a game round execution means (main control unit) for executing the game round MPU 62 on the board 61 side, and the game turn control process of FIG. 420 executed by it);
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is divided into a first state in which entry of a game ball into the ball entry means is made impossible or difficult, and a state in which entry of a game ball into the ball entry means is made possible or easy. a state transition means for transitioning between a second state which is a state to
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein the control mode in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means is a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode. a control means having at least a second control mode (high-frequency support mode) in which it is easier for a game ball to enter the ball-entering means than
a game state transition means for transitioning a game state specified by the determination mode and the control mode;
with
The game state transition means is
In the first specific game state (high probability high support state), when the specific condition (winning in the falling lottery) is established, the control mode is set to the second control mode for a predetermined period (period until the next jackpot is won) A first transition means for shifting to a first predetermined game state (low probability high support state) that is more advantageous for the player than the first specific game state by maintaining the
In the first specific game state, when the specific condition is not satisfied (without winning in the falling lottery) and the predetermined condition is satisfied (the game round of the number of times of time-saving continuation is executed), the second specific game state A second transition means for transitioning to (high probability low support state),
In the second specific game state, when the specific condition is satisfied, a second predetermined game state (low probability low support state) that is less advantageous for the player than the second specific game state 3 transition means;
with
A gaming machine, wherein the second specific game state is a state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode.

According to the feature tO1, even if the same specific condition is satisfied, the function differs between the first specific game state and the second specific game state. When a specific condition is satisfied in the first specific game state, the game state is shifted so as to increase the advantage for the player, and when the specific condition is satisfied in the second specific game state. , the transition of the game state is performed such that the advantage for the player is lowered. That is, according to the feature tO1, the fulfillment of the specific condition triggers the transition to two game states having different advantages for the player, so that the game characteristics of the gaming machine can be diversified.

Further, according to the feature tO1, in the second specific game state, the determination mode is the second determination mode, which is highly advantageous for the player. For this reason, according to the feature tO1, it is not desirable for the player to transition to the game state from the highly advantageous second specific game state. Such a sense of urgency can be imparted to the player.

<Characteristic tP group>
The feature tP group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the ninth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature tP1]
A distribution area (game area PA) in which game balls circulate,
A ball entry means (second starting port 34) provided in the circulation area and capable of entering a game ball;
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (value of winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into said ball entering means;
means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot); determination means having a first determination mode (low-probability mode) and a second determination mode (high-probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is higher than that in the first determination mode;
When one game round is defined as the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended, a game round execution means (main control unit) for executing the game round MPU 62 on the board 61 side, and the game turn control process of FIG. 420 executed by it);
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is divided into a first state in which entry of a game ball into the ball entry means is made impossible or difficult, and a state in which entry of a game ball into the ball entry means is made possible or easy. a state transition means for transitioning between a second state which is a state to
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein the control mode in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means is a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode. a control means having at least a second control mode (high-frequency support mode) in which it is easier for a game ball to enter the ball-entering means than
a game state transition means for transitioning a game state specified by the determination mode and the control mode;
with
The game state transition means is
In the first specific game state (high probability high support state), when the specific condition (winning in the falling lottery) is established, the control mode is set to the second control mode for a predetermined period (period until the next jackpot is won) A first transition means for shifting to a first predetermined game state (low probability high support state) that is more advantageous for the player than the first specific game state by maintaining the
In the first specific game state, when the specific condition is not satisfied (without winning in the falling lottery) and the predetermined condition is satisfied (the game round of the number of times of time-saving continuation is executed), the second specific game state A second transition means for transitioning to (high probability low support state),
In the second specific game state, when the specific condition is satisfied, a second predetermined game state (low probability low support state) that is less advantageous for the player than the second specific game state 3 transfer means;
with
A gaming machine, wherein the second predetermined game state is a state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode.

According to the feature tP1, even if the same specific condition is satisfied, the function differs between the first specific game state and the second specific game state. When a specific condition is satisfied in the first specific game state, the game state is shifted so as to increase the advantage for the player, and when the specific condition is satisfied in the second specific game state. , the transition of the game state is performed such that the advantage for the player is lowered. That is, according to the feature tP1, the fulfillment of the specific condition triggers the transition to two game states having different advantages for the player, so that the game characteristics of the gaming machine can be diversified.

Further, according to the feature tP1, in the second predetermined game state, the determination mode is the first determination mode, so the advantage for the player is low. Therefore, according to the feature tP1, in the second specific game state, it is possible to further give the player a sense of urgency as to whether or not the specific condition that triggers the transition to the second predetermined game state is established. can.

<Characteristic uA group>
The feature uA group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature uA1]
A first ball entry means (first starting port 33) that allows a game ball to enter,
A second ball entry means (second starting port 34) that allows a game ball to enter,
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (the value of a winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means;
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and the first special information acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entering means Acquisition information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, respectively;
means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot), wherein the determination of the second special information is performed with priority over the determination of the first special information, and the determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination is the first determination mode (low probability mode) and the first determination mode a second determination mode (high-probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high;
When one game round is defined as the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended, a game round execution means (main control unit) for executing the game round The MPU 62 on the board 61 side, and the game round control processing of FIG. 461 executed by it),
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is divided into a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entering means, and a state that a game ball enters the second ball entering means. state transition means for transitioning between a second state that is a state that enables or facilitates the sphere;
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein the control mode in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means is a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode. a control means having at least a second control mode (high-frequency support mode) in which the entry of game balls to the second ball entry means is easier than
In a gaming machine comprising
In the specific game state (high-probability and high support state) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the number of executions of the game cycle after shifting to the specific game state has reached a predetermined number of times (time reduction continuation count). In the case, game state transition means for shifting from the specific game state to a first predetermined game state (high probability low support state) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode same as the specific game state;
Until the determination by the determination means about the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state, a specific condition (winning in a falling lottery Advantageous state continuation means for continuing a state that is advantageous to the player for a predetermined period of time when the condition ) is established;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature uA1, in the specific game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, when the number of times of execution of the game after the transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number, the determination mode is the specific game state It is shifted to the first predetermined game state which is the same second determination mode as. Immediately after the transition to the first predetermined game state, the second special information acquired in the specific game state may remain in the acquired information storage means, in this case, in the first predetermined game state, the Judgment by the judging means for the remaining second special information is prioritized over judgment by the judging means for the first special information. Then, if a specific condition is established before the determination by the determination means for the remaining second special information is completed in the first predetermined game state, a state advantageous to the player is continued for a predetermined period. . Therefore, according to the feature uA1, in the first predetermined game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the player is judged by the second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high. , the special information can be expected to satisfy the first predetermined condition, and furthermore, the judgment by the judgment means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is different from the specific game state The player can expect that a state advantageous to the player will be executed for a predetermined period by the establishment of the specific condition before the game ends in the shifted first predetermined game state. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature uA2]
The gaming machine according to feature uA1,
The advantageous state continuation means is
Until the determination by the determination means about the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state, the specific condition (winning in a falling lottery to) is established, the second predetermined game state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode (mode H1b during special 2 remaining pending digestion in low probability low support state H1) to the first predetermined game state a means for transferring from
In the second predetermined game state, when the second special information satisfies a second predetermined condition (a value corresponding to the reduction in working hours), the control means continues until the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition. a control mode executing means for executing the second control mode as the control mode;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the characteristic uA2, when the determination by the determination means about the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state, when the specific condition is satisfied, The determination mode is shifted to the second predetermined game state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode. Then, in the second predetermined game state, when the second special information satisfies the second predetermined condition (the value corresponding to the reduction in working hours), until the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition (for example, until the jackpot is won). ), the second control mode is executed as the control mode by the control means. In the state where the control mode is the second control mode, it is easier for the game ball to enter the second ball-entering means than in the state where the control mode is the first control mode, and it is difficult for the player to reduce the number of balls he has. , the determination by the determining means regarding the second special information acquired with the entry of the game ball into the second ball entering means as a trigger can be executed at a high frequency. Therefore, when the second predetermined game state is entered and the second special information satisfies the second predetermined condition, it is possible to realize that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition.

Therefore, according to the feature uA2, the specific condition is satisfied before the determination by the determination means regarding the second special information is completed in the first predetermined game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode. By doing so, it is possible to expect the transition from the first predetermined game state to the second predetermined game state. That is, according to the feature uA2, in the first predetermined game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the determination by the second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high for the player, Although it is possible to expect that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition, the specific condition is established before the determination by the determination means for the second special information is completed, and the state changes from the first predetermined game state to the second state. 2 It is possible to make the player expect to move to the predetermined game state.

On the other hand, if the state is shifted to the second predetermined game state and the second special information satisfies the second predetermined condition, the special information will be sent to the player next time by the determination means in a state in which the number of balls held is unlikely to decrease. 1. It is possible to give a sense of security that the second control mode in which the game ball can easily enter the second ball entering means will not end until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, until the jackpot is won). In this way, according to the feature uA2, by imparting emotions such as a sense of anticipation and a sense of security to the player, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

[Feature uA3]
The gaming machine according to feature uA2,
In the first predetermined game state, when the determination is made by the determination means regarding the first special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the specific condition (winning in a falling lottery) is established. a means for shifting from the first predetermined game state to a normal state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode and the control mode is the first control mode when the game machine is in the first control mode.

According to the feature uA3, in the first predetermined game state, when the determination means determines the first special information stored in the acquired information storage means, when the specific condition is satisfied, the first predetermined game state to normal state. On the other hand, as described above, in the first predetermined game state, the determination by the determination means about the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state before shifting to the first predetermined game state If the same specific condition as described above is met before the end of , the state advantageous to the player is continued for a predetermined period of time. Therefore, even if the same specific condition is established, if the determination is made based on the second special information, the state is shifted to an advantageous state for the player. is completed and the first special information is determined, the state is shifted to the normal state. For this reason, in the first predetermined game state, the player may feel a sense of urgency as to whether the determination by the determination means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means may end without satisfying the specific condition. can be granted to In this way, according to the feature uA3, by imparting emotions such as a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency to the player, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

[Feature uA4]
The gaming machine according to feature uA1,
In the specific game state (high probability high support state), the specific condition (in the falling lottery A game machine characterized by comprising: means for continuing a state (low-probability support state H5) advantageous to a player for a predetermined period when a win is established.

According to the feature uA4, in the specific game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, when the specific condition is satisfied before the number of game rounds executed after shifting to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number of times , a state advantageous to the player is executed for a predetermined period. Therefore, according to the feature uA4, in the specific game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the specific condition is established before the number of game rounds executed after shifting to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number of times. This can be expected from the player. On the other hand, as described above, in the specific game state, when the number of times of execution of the game round after the transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number, the transition to the first predetermined game state, the second special It is possible to make the player expect that the specific condition is satisfied before the determination of the information by the determination means is completed in the first predetermined game state. Therefore, in the specific game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, even if the specific condition is not satisfied before the number of game rounds executed after the transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number of times, It is possible to make the player expect that the specific condition is established before the determination by the determination means for the second special information is completed in the first predetermined game state without giving the player a feeling of disappointment. . Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

<Characteristic uB group>
The feature uB group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature uB1]
A first ball entry means (first starting port 33) that allows a game ball to enter,
A second ball entry means (second starting port 34) that allows a game ball to enter,
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (the value of a winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means;
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and the first special information acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entering means Acquisition information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, respectively;
means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot), wherein the determination of the second special information is performed with priority over the determination of the first special information, and the determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination is the first determination mode (low probability mode) and the first determination mode a second determination mode (high-probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high;
When one game round is defined as the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended, a game round execution means (main control unit) for executing the game round The MPU 62 on the board 61 side, and the game round control processing of FIG. 461 executed by it),
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is divided into a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entering means, and a state that a game ball enters the second ball entering means. state transition means for transitioning between a second state that is a state that enables or facilitates the sphere;
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein the control mode in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means is a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode. a control means having at least a second control mode (high-frequency support mode) in which the entry of game balls to the second ball entry means is easier than
In a gaming machine comprising
The first specific game state (high-probability-high support state) in which the control mode is the second control mode is shifted to the first predetermined game state (low-probability-low support state) in which the control mode is the first control mode. game state transition means;
The second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the first specific game state is a second predetermined condition (a value corresponding to time reduction provision) different from the first predetermined condition is the first predetermined game a control mode execution means for executing the second control mode as the control mode by the control means for a predetermined period when the condition is satisfied;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature uB1, the control mode is shifted from the first specific game state in which the control mode is the second control mode to the first predetermined game state in which the control mode is the first control mode. Immediately after the transition to the first predetermined game state, the second special information acquired by the first specific game state may remain in the acquired information storage means, in this case, in the first predetermined game state , the judgment by the judging means for the remaining second special information is preferentially performed over the judgment by the judging means for the first special information. Then, in the first predetermined game state, when the remaining second special information satisfies the second predetermined condition (for example, a value corresponding to the time saving provision), the second control as the control mode by the control means for a predetermined period mode is executed. In the state where the control mode is the second control mode, it is easier for the game ball to enter the second ball entering means than in the state where the control mode is the first control mode, and it is difficult for the player to reduce the number of balls in his possession. Therefore, it is possible to frequently execute the determination by the determination means for the second special information acquired by the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means, and as a result, the second special information is Satisfying the first predetermined condition (for example, winning a jackpot) can be easily realized. Therefore, according to the feature uB1, if it is possible to shift to the first predetermined game state with the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the second special information meets the second predetermined condition (for example, a value corresponding to time-saving provision), and as a result, the second special information acquired with the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means as a trigger satisfies the first predetermined condition. (for example, winning a jackpot) can be easily realized. As a result, according to the feature uB1, the player can expect the transition to the first predetermined game state while the second special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, thereby improving the interest in the game. can be achieved.

[Feature uB2]
A gaming machine according to feature uB1,
The predetermined period is a period until the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition.
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the characteristic uB2, it is possible to shift to the first predetermined game state with the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means, and in the first predetermined game state, the second special information is stored in the second predetermined game state. If the condition can be satisfied, it can be ensured that the second special information acquired with the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means as a trigger satisfies the first predetermined condition.

[Feature uB3]
A gaming machine according to feature uB2,
The game state transition means is
In the first specific game state (high-precision high support state), when the number of executions of the game round after the transition to the first specific game state reaches a predetermined number of times (time-saving continuous number of times), the control mode means for shifting from the first specific game state to the second specific game state (high probability low support state) which is the first control mode;
By the time the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the first specific game state is completed in the second specific game state, a specific condition (in a fall lottery Means for shifting from the second specific game state to the first predetermined game state when the winning) is established;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature uB3, in the first specific game state, when the number of executions of the game round after the transition to the first specific game state reaches a predetermined number of times (number of continuous time reduction), the control mode is the first It is shifted to the second specific game state which is the control mode. Immediately after the transition to the second specific game state, the second special information acquired in the first specific game state may remain in the acquired information storage means, in this case, in the second specific game state , the judgment by the judging means for the remaining second special information is preferentially performed over the judgment by the judging means for the first special information. Then, when the specific condition is satisfied before the determination by the determination means for the remaining second special information is completed in the second specific game state, the transition from the second specific game state to the first predetermined game state is performed. be done. For this reason, as described above, if the second special information satisfies the second predetermined condition in the first predetermined gaming state, it is acquired when the game ball enters the second ball-entering means as a trigger. Since it is possible to surely realize that the second special information that has been obtained satisfies the first predetermined condition, the number of times of execution of the game round after the transition to the first specific game state reaches the predetermined number and the second specific information When the game state is shifted to the game state, the specific condition is satisfied until the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the first specific game state is completed in the second specific game state. This can be expected from the player. As a result, according to the feature uB3, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

<Characteristic uC group>
The feature uC group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature uC1]
A first ball entry means (first starting port 33) that allows a game ball to enter,
A second ball entry means (second starting port 34) that allows a game ball to enter,
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (the value of a winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means;
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and the first special information acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entering means Acquisition information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, respectively;
means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot), wherein the determination of the second special information is performed with priority over the determination of the first special information, and the determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination is the first determination mode (low probability mode) and the first determination mode a second determination mode (high-probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high;
When one game round is defined as the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended, a game round execution means (main control unit) for executing the game round The MPU 62 on the board 61 side, and the game round control processing of FIG. 461 executed by it),
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is divided into a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entering means, and a state that a game ball enters the second ball entering means. state transition means for transitioning between a second state that is a state that enables or facilitates the sphere;
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein the control mode in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means is a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode. a control means having at least a second control mode (high-frequency support mode) in which the entry of game balls to the second ball entry means is easier than
In a gaming machine comprising
In a specific game state (high probability high support state) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, execution of the game round after transition to the specific game state Control mode transition means for transitioning the control mode from the second control mode to the first control mode when the number of times reaches a first predetermined number of times (time reduction continuation number of times);
In the first predetermined game state (high probability low support state) after the transition to the first control mode, the number of executions of the game round after the transition to the specific game state is the second predetermined number of times (ST number of times ), judgment mode transition means for shifting the judgment mode from the second judgment mode to the first judgment mode;
with
When the first predetermined number of times is N1, the second predetermined number of times is N2, and the maximum number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means is N3, the following formula (1) A gaming machine characterized by satisfying
N2≧N1+N3+1 (1)

According to the feature uC1, in a specific game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, the number of times the game is executed after shifting to the specific game state is the first predetermined number of times. is reached, the control mode is shifted from the second control mode to the first control mode. As a result, the control mode is shifted from the specific game state to the first predetermined game state in which the control mode is the first control mode. Immediately after the transition to the first predetermined game state, the second special information acquired in the specific game state may remain in the acquired information storage means, in this case, in the first predetermined game state, the Judgment by the judging means for the remaining second special information is prioritized over judgment by the judging means for the first special information. Then, in the first predetermined game state, when the number of game rounds executed after shifting to the specific game state reaches the second predetermined number of times, the determination mode is shifted from the second determination mode to the first determination mode. According to the formula (1), the second predetermined number of times N2 is a value larger than the sum of the first predetermined number of times N1 and the maximum number N3 of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means. Therefore, the determination by the determination means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state ends in the first predetermined game state.

When shifting from the specific game state to the first predetermined game state, that is, in the specific game state, when the number of games after shifting to the specific game state reaches the first predetermined number of times N1, stored in the acquired information storage means Consider a case where the number of second special information received is the maximum number N3. When the number of games reaches the first predetermined number of times N1, the control mode shifts to the first control mode, making it impossible or difficult to enter the game ball into the second ball entering means. The game ball may enter the second ball entering means immediately before. A configuration in which the second predetermined number of times N2 is equal to the sum of the first predetermined number of times N1 and the maximum number N3 of the second special information that can be stored in the obtained information storage means (hereinafter referred to as the configuration of the comparative example) ), it corresponds to the game ball that entered the second ball entering means immediately before it became impossible or difficult (hereinafter referred to as "excessive game ball") Judgment by the judging means is not executed in the first predetermined game state, and is executed in a state (hereinafter referred to as a normal state) after the judgment mode is shifted from the second judgment mode to the first judgment mode. When the designer of the gaming machine shifts from the specific game state to the first predetermined game state, the determination by the determination means corresponding to the game ball entered into the second ball entry means is all completed in the first predetermined game state. If the configuration of the comparative example is adopted in the case where the design is designed as a game ball, the determination by the determination means corresponding to the excessive number of game balls is executed in a normal state, resulting in a game that the designer originally did not assume. There was a danger that he might show his sexuality.

On the other hand, according to the feature uC1, from the relationship of the formula (1), the second predetermined number of times N2 is the maximum number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means and the first predetermined number of times N1. Since the number is equal to or greater than the sum of the number N3 and 1, the judgment by the judging means corresponding to the excessive number of game balls is always executed in the first predetermined game state. Therefore, according to the feature uC1, when the specific game state is shifted to the first predetermined game state, the determination by the determination means corresponding to the game ball that entered the second ball entry means is the excessive game ball , all of which are completed in the first predetermined game state, and the game can be played as originally intended by the designer. As a result, according to the characteristic uC1, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

[Feature uC2]
A gaming machine according to feature uC1,
A gaming machine characterized by satisfying the following formula (2).
N2=N1+N3+1 (2)

According to the characteristic uC2, from the relationship of the formula (2), the second predetermined number of times N2 is the sum of the first predetermined number of times N1 and the maximum number N3 of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means. is incremented by 1, similar to the feature uC1, the determination by the determining means corresponding to the excessive number of game balls is always executed in the first predetermined game state. Therefore, the feature uC2 has the same effect as the feature uC1. That is, according to the feature uC2, when the specific game state is shifted to the first predetermined game state, the determination by the determination means corresponding to the game ball that entered the second ball entry means is the above-mentioned excess game ball Including, all are completed in the first predetermined game state, and the game can exhibit the game characteristics originally intended by the designer, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Play.

[Feature uC3]
A gaming machine according to feature uC1 or feature uC2,
By the time the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state, a specific condition (winning in a falling lottery a gaming machine characterized by comprising an advantageous state continuation means for continuing an advantageous state for a player for a predetermined period of time when the condition (1) is established.

According to the feature uC3, in the first predetermined game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the first control mode, there is a probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition for the player. It is possible to expect that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition by the determination by the high second determination mode, but further, the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state. By the time the determination by is completed in the first predetermined game state shifted from the specific game state, the player is informed that a state advantageous to the player will continue for a predetermined period by establishing a specific condition. can be expected. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature uC4]
The gaming machine according to feature uC3,
The advantageous state continuation means is
Until the determination by the determination means about the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state, a specific condition (winning in a falling lottery ) is established, the second predetermined game state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode (mode H1b during special 2 remaining pending digestion in low probability low support state H1) from the first predetermined game state a means of transferring,
In the second predetermined game state, when the second special information satisfies a second predetermined condition (a value corresponding to the reduction in working hours), the control means continues until the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition. a control mode executing means for executing the second control mode as the control mode;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature uC4, when the determination by the determination means about the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed before the specific condition is established in the first predetermined game state, The determination mode is shifted to the second predetermined game state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode. And, in the second predetermined game state, when the second special information satisfies the second predetermined condition (the value corresponding to the reduction in working hours), until the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition (for example, until the jackpot is won). ), the second control mode is executed as the control mode by the control means. In the state where the control mode is the second control mode, it is easier for the game ball to enter the second ball-entering means than in the state where the control mode is the first control mode, and it is difficult for the player to reduce the number of balls he has. , the determination by the determining means regarding the second special information acquired with the entry of the game ball into the second ball entering means as a trigger can be executed at a high frequency. Therefore, if the second predetermined game state is entered and the second special information satisfies the second predetermined condition, it is possible to realize that the second special information satisfies the first predetermined condition.

Therefore, according to the feature uC4, the specific condition is satisfied before the determination by the determination means regarding the second special information is completed in the first predetermined game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode. By doing so, it is possible to expect the transition from the first predetermined game state to the second predetermined game state. That is, according to the feature uC4, in the first predetermined game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the player is determined by the second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high. Although the special information can be expected to satisfy the first predetermined condition, the specific condition is satisfied before the determination by the determination means for the second special information is completed, and the first predetermined game state is changed to the first predetermined condition. 2 It is possible to make the player expect to move to the predetermined game state.

On the other hand, if the state is shifted to the second predetermined game state and the second special information satisfies the second predetermined condition, the special information will be sent to the player next time by the determination means in a state in which the number of balls held is unlikely to decrease. 1. It is possible to give a sense of security that the second control mode in which the game ball can be easily entered into the second ball entering means will not end until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, until the jackpot is won). As described above, according to the feature uC4, by imparting emotions such as a sense of anticipation and a sense of security to the player, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

[Feature uC5]
The gaming machine according to feature uC4,
In the first predetermined game state, when the determination is made by the determination means regarding the first special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the specific condition (winning in a falling lottery) is established. a means for shifting from the first predetermined game state to a normal state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode and the control mode is the first control mode when the game machine is in the first control mode.

According to the feature uC5, in the first predetermined game state, when the determination means determines the first special information stored in the acquired information storage means, if the specific condition is established, the first predetermined game state to normal state. On the other hand, as described above, in the first predetermined game state, the determination by the determination means about the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state before shifting to the first predetermined game state If the same specific condition as described above is met before the end of , the state advantageous to the player is continued for a predetermined period of time. Therefore, even if the same specific condition is established, if the determination is made based on the second special information, the state is shifted to an advantageous state for the player. is completed and the first special information is determined, the state is shifted to the normal state. For this reason, in the first predetermined game state, the player may feel a sense of urgency as to whether the determination by the determination means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means may end without satisfying the specific condition. can be granted to As described above, according to the feature uC5, by imparting emotions such as a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency to the player, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

[Feature uC6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features uC1 to feature uC5,
In the specific game state (high probability high support state), the specific condition (falling lottery A game machine characterized by comprising: means for continuing a state (low-probability support state H5) advantageous to the player for a predetermined period when the winning at the above is established.

According to the feature uC6, in the specific game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, the number of times the game is executed after shifting to the specific game state is the first predetermined number of times If a specific condition is met, a state advantageous to the player is continued for a predetermined period of time. Therefore, according to the feature uC6, in the specific game state, the player is informed that the specific condition is satisfied before the number of game rounds executed after transition to the specific game state reaches the first predetermined number of times. can be expected. On the other hand, as described above, in the specific game state, when the number of game rounds executed after the transition to the specific game state reaches the first predetermined number of times, the transition to the first predetermined game state, the second It is possible to make the player expect that the specific condition is satisfied before the determination of the special information by the determination means is completed in the first predetermined game state. Therefore, in the specific game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, even if the specific condition is not satisfied before the number of game rounds executed after the transition to the specific game state reaches the first predetermined number of times It is possible to make the player expect that the specific condition is satisfied before the determination of the second special information by the determination means is completed in the first predetermined game state without giving the player a feeling of disappointment. can. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

<Characteristic uD group>
The feature uD group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature uD1]
A first ball entry means (first starting port 33) that allows a game ball to enter,
A second ball entry means (second starting port 34) that allows a game ball to enter,
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (the value of a winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means;
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and the first special information acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entering means Acquisition information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, respectively;
means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot), wherein the determination of the second special information is performed with priority over the determination of the first special information, and the determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination is the first determination mode (low probability mode) and the first determination mode a second determination mode (high-probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high;
When one game round is defined as the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended, a game round execution means (main control unit) for executing the game round The MPU 62 on the board 61 side, and the game round control processing of FIG. 461 executed by it),
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is divided into a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entering means, and a state that a game ball enters the second ball entering means. state transition means for transitioning between a second state that is a state that enables or facilitates the sphere;
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein the control mode in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means is a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode. a control means having at least a second control mode (high-frequency support mode) in which the entry of game balls to the second ball entry means is easier than
In a gaming machine comprising
The determination mode is the second determination mode, and from the specific game state (high-precision high support state) in which the control mode is the second control mode, the determination mode is the second determination mode, and the A first game state transition means for shifting to a first predetermined game state (high-probability-low support state) in which the control mode is the first control mode;
Until the determination by the determination means about the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state, a specific condition (winning in a falling lottery ) is established, a second game state transition means for shifting from the first predetermined game state to a second predetermined game state (mode H1b during special 2 remaining hold digestion in low probability low support state H1),
After the determination by the determination means about the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state, the specific condition (winning in a falling lottery a third game state transition means for shifting from the first predetermined game state to a third predetermined game state (low-probability low support state H1) when the condition) is established;
with
A game machine characterized in that the second predetermined game state is more advantageous for the player than the third predetermined game state.

According to the feature uD1, from the specific game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the first control mode It is shifted to a certain first predetermined game state. If the specific condition is satisfied before the determination by the determination means of the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state, it is advantageous for the player. The game state is shifted to a second predetermined game state with a high probability. After the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state, if the specific condition is satisfied, than the second predetermined game state A transition is made to a third predetermined game state in which the advantage for the player is not high. For this reason, according to the feature uD1, in the first predetermined game state shifted from the specific game state, for the player, by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state It is possible to expect that a specific condition is satisfied before the determination ends in the first predetermined game state. That is, according to the feature uD1, in the first predetermined game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the determination by the second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high for the player, The special information can be expected to satisfy the first predetermined condition, and further, the judgment by the judgment means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is By the time it ends, it can be made to expect that a specific condition is satisfied.

Further, according to the feature uD1, after the determination by the determination means about the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state, when the specific condition is satisfied, Since the transition is made to the third predetermined game state, which is less advantageous for the player than the second predetermined game state, in the first predetermined game state, the special information does not satisfy the first predetermined condition by the judging means. , the sense of urgency that the determination by the determination means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specified game state will end in the first predetermined game state without the specific condition being established. , can be given to the player. In this way, according to the feature uD1, by imparting emotions such as a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency to the player, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

[Feature uD2]
A gaming machine according to feature uD1,
The second game state transition means is
Until the determination by the determination means about the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state, the specific condition (winning in a falling lottery to) is established, the second predetermined game state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode (mode H1b during special 2 remaining pending digestion in low probability low support state H1) to the first predetermined game a means for transitioning out of a state;
After the transition to the second predetermined gaming state, when the second special information satisfies the second predetermined condition (value corresponding to time saving provision), until the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition, means for executing the second control mode as the control mode by the control means;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature uD2, when the determination by the determination means about the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state, when the specific condition is established, The determination mode is shifted to the second predetermined game state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode. And, in the second predetermined game state, when the second special information satisfies the second predetermined condition (the value corresponding to the reduction in working hours), until the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition (for example, until the jackpot is won). ), the second control mode is executed as the control mode by the control means. In the state where the control mode is the second control mode, it is easier for the game ball to enter the second ball-entering means than in the state where the control mode is the first control mode, and it is difficult for the player to reduce the number of balls he has. , the determination by the determining means regarding the second special information acquired with the entry of the game ball into the second ball entering means as a trigger can be executed at a high frequency. Therefore, when the second predetermined game state is entered and the second special information satisfies the second predetermined condition, it is possible to reliably realize that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition.

Therefore, according to the feature uD2, the specific condition is satisfied before the determination by the determination means regarding the second special information is completed in the first predetermined game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode. As a result, the player can expect the transition from the first predetermined game state to the second predetermined game state. That is, according to the feature uD2, in the first predetermined game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the determination by the second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high for the player, Although the special information can be expected to satisfy the first predetermined condition, the specific condition is satisfied before the determination by the determination means for the second special information is completed, and the first predetermined game state is changed to the first predetermined condition. 2 It is possible to make the player expect to move to the predetermined game state.

On the other hand, if the state is shifted to the second predetermined game state and the second special information satisfies the second predetermined condition, the special information will be sent to the player next time by the determination means in a state in which the number of balls held is unlikely to decrease. 1. It is possible to give a sense of security that the second control mode in which the game ball can easily enter the second ball entering means will not end until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, until the jackpot is won). In this way, according to the feature uD2, by imparting emotions such as a sense of anticipation and a sense of security to the player, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

[Feature uD3]
A gaming machine according to feature uD2,
The third game state transition means is
In the first predetermined game state, when the determination is made by the determination means regarding the first special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the specific condition (winning in a falling lottery) is established. means for shifting from the first predetermined game state to a normal state as the third predetermined game state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode and the control mode is the first control mode in the case of A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature uD3, in the first predetermined game state, when the determination means determines the first special information stored in the acquired information storage means, if the specific condition is established, the first predetermined game state to normal state. On the other hand, as described above, in the first predetermined game state, the determination by the determination means about the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state before shifting to the first predetermined game state If the same specific condition as described above is met before the end of , the state advantageous to the player is continued for a predetermined period of time. Therefore, even if the same specific condition is established, if the determination is made based on the second special information, the state is shifted to an advantageous state for the player. is completed and the first special information is determined, the state is shifted to the normal state. For this reason, in the first predetermined game state, the player may feel a sense of urgency as to whether the determination by the determination means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means may end without satisfying the specific condition. can be granted to In this way, according to the feature uD3, by giving the player emotions such as a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

[Feature uD4]
A gaming machine according to feature uD3,
The first game state transition means is
In the specific game state (high probability high support state), when the number of executions of the game round after the transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number of times (time-saving continuous number of times), to the first predetermined game state means for shifting from the specific game state,
In the specific game state (high probability high support state), the specific condition (in the falling lottery A game machine characterized by comprising: means for continuing a state (low-probability support state H5) advantageous to a player for a predetermined period when a win is established.

According to the feature uD4, in a specific game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific game state is a predetermined number. If a specific condition is satisfied before reaching the point, a state advantageous to the player is continued for a predetermined period. Therefore, according to the feature uD4, in the specific game state, the player is expected to satisfy the specific condition before the number of game rounds executed after the transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number. can be made On the other hand, as described above, in the specific game state, when the number of times of execution of the game round after the transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number, the transition to the first predetermined game state, the second special It is possible to make the player expect that the specific condition is satisfied before the determination of the information by the determination means ends in the first predetermined game state. Therefore, in the specific game state, even if the specific condition is not satisfied before the number of game rounds executed after the transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number, the player is given a feeling of disappointment. Therefore, the player can expect that the specific condition is satisfied before the determination by the determination means regarding the second special information is completed in the first predetermined game state. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

<Characteristic uE group>
The feature uE group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature uE1]
A first ball entry means (first starting port 33) that allows a game ball to enter,
A second ball entry means (second starting port 34) that allows a game ball to enter,
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (the value of a winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means;
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and the first special information acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entering means Acquisition information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, respectively;
means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot), wherein the determination of the second special information is performed with priority over the determination of the first special information, and the determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination is the first determination mode (low probability mode) and the first determination mode a second determination mode (high-probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high;
Judgment mode transition means (fall judgment process) for shifting the judgment executed by the judgment means from the second judgment mode to the first judgment mode when a specific condition (winning in a fall lottery) is established. ,
When one game round is defined as the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended, a game round execution means (main control unit) for executing the game round MPU 62 on the board 61 side, and the game turn control process of FIG. 461 executed by it),
In the specific game state (high-probability and high support state) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the number of executions of the game cycle after shifting to the specific game state has reached a predetermined number of times (time reduction continuation count). In the case, game state transition means for shifting from the specific game state to a first predetermined game state (high probability low support state) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode same as the specific game state;
production execution means capable of executing production;
with
The production executing means is
When the specific condition is satisfied before the determination by the determination means about the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state and means for executing an effect corresponding to a predetermined advantageous state which is advantageous to the player.

According to the feature uE1, since the determination mode shift means shifts the determination mode from the second determination mode to the first determination mode, it originally reduces the advantage for the player. On the other hand, according to the feature uE1, the specific condition is satisfied before the determination by the determination means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state ends in the first predetermined game state. When established, an effect corresponding to a predetermined advantageous state, which is advantageous to the player, is executed. Therefore, according to the feature uE1, although the operation by the determination mode transition means disappoints the player, an effect corresponding to the predetermined advantageous state, which is advantageous to the player, is executed. The range of presentation can be expanded without being restricted by the operation by the determination mode shift means. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature uE2]
The gaming machine according to feature uE1,
When the specific condition is satisfied before the determination by the determination means about the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state , advantageous state continuation means for continuing a state advantageous to the player for a predetermined period of time;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature uE2, in the first predetermined game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the special information is determined by the second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high for the player. can be expected to satisfy the first predetermined condition, but furthermore, the determination by the determination means about the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is the second that has shifted from the specific game state It is possible to make the player expect that a state advantageous to the player will continue for a predetermined period by satisfying a specific condition before the end of one predetermined game state. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature uE3]
The gaming machine according to feature uE2,
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is divided into a first state in which entry of a game ball into the ball entry means is made impossible or difficult, and a state in which entry of a game ball into the ball entry means is made possible or easy. a state transition means for transitioning between a second state which is a state to
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein the control mode in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means is a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode. a control means having at least a second control mode (high-frequency support mode) in which it is easier for a game ball to enter the ball-entering means than
with
The advantageous state continuation means is
When the specific condition is satisfied before the determination by the determination means about the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state , means for shifting from the first predetermined game state to a second predetermined game state (mode H1b during special 2 remaining pending digestion in low probability low support state H1) in which the determination mode is the first determination mode;
In the second predetermined game state, when the second special information satisfies a second predetermined condition (a value corresponding to the reduction in working hours), the control means continues until the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition. a control mode executing means for executing the second control mode as the control mode;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature uE3, when the determination by the determination means about the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state, when the specific condition is established, The determination mode is shifted to the second predetermined game state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode. Then, in the second predetermined game state, when the second special information satisfies the second predetermined condition (the value corresponding to the reduction in working hours), until the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition (for example, until the jackpot is won). ), the second control mode is executed as the control mode by the control means. In the state where the control mode is the second control mode, it is easier for the game ball to enter the second ball-entering means than in the state where the control mode is the first control mode, and it is difficult for the player to reduce the number of balls he has. , the determination by the determining means regarding the second special information acquired with the entry of the game ball into the second ball entering means as a trigger can be executed at a high frequency. Therefore, if the transition to the second predetermined game state is made and the second special information satisfies the second predetermined condition, it is possible to reliably realize that the second special information satisfies the first predetermined condition. Become.

Therefore, according to the feature uE3, the specific condition is satisfied before the determination of the second special information by the determination means is completed in the first predetermined game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode. As a result, the player can expect the transition from the first predetermined game state to the second predetermined game state. That is, according to the feature uE3, in the first predetermined game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the determination by the second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high for the player, Although the special information can be expected to satisfy the first predetermined condition, the specific condition is satisfied before the determination by the determination means for the second special information is completed, and the first predetermined game state is changed to the first predetermined condition. 2 It is possible to make the player expect to move to the predetermined game state.

On the other hand, if the state is shifted to the second predetermined game state and the second special information satisfies the second predetermined condition, the special information will be sent to the player next time by the determination means in a state in which the number of balls held is unlikely to decrease. 1. It is possible to give a sense of security that the second control mode in which the game ball can be easily entered into the second ball entering means will not end until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, until the jackpot is won). As described above, according to the feature uE3, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by providing the player with emotions such as a sense of anticipation and a sense of security.

[Feature uE4]
The gaming machine according to feature uE3,
In the first predetermined game state, when the determination is made by the determination means regarding the first special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the specific condition (winning in a falling lottery) is established. a means for shifting from the first predetermined game state to a normal state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode and the control mode is the first control mode when the game machine is in the first control mode.

According to the feature uE4, in the first predetermined game state, when the determination means determines the first special information stored in the acquired information storage means, if the specific condition is established, the first predetermined game state to normal state. On the other hand, as described above, in the first predetermined game state, the determination by the determination means about the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state before shifting to the first predetermined game state If the same specific condition as described above is met before the end of , the state advantageous to the player is continued for a predetermined period of time. Therefore, even if the same specific condition is established, if the determination is made based on the second special information, the state is shifted to an advantageous state for the player. is completed and the first special information is determined, the state is shifted to the normal state. For this reason, in the first predetermined game state, the player may feel a sense of urgency as to whether the determination by the determination means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means may end without satisfying the specific condition. can be granted to Thus, according to the feature uE4, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by giving the player emotions such as a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency.

[Feature uE5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features uE1 to feature uE4,
In the specific game state (high probability high support state), the specific condition (falling lottery A game machine characterized by comprising: means for continuing a state (low-probability support state H5) advantageous to the player for a predetermined period when the winning at the above is established.

According to the feature uE5, in a specific game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific game state is the first predetermined number of times If a specific condition is met, a state advantageous to the player is continued for a predetermined period of time. Therefore, according to the feature uE5, in the specific game state, the player is notified that the specific condition is satisfied before the number of game rounds executed after transition to the specific game state reaches the first predetermined number of times. can be expected. On the other hand, as described above, in the specific game state, when the number of game rounds executed after the transition to the specific game state reaches the first predetermined number of times, the transition to the first predetermined game state, the second It is possible to make the player expect that the specific condition is satisfied before the determination of the special information by the determination means is completed in the first predetermined game state. Therefore, in the specific game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, even if the specific condition is not satisfied before the number of game rounds executed after the transition to the specific game state reaches the first predetermined number of times It is possible to make the player expect that the specific condition is satisfied before the determination of the second special information by the determination means is completed in the first predetermined game state without giving the player a feeling of disappointment. can. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

<Characteristic uF group>
The feature uF group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, mainly from the tenth embodiment and its first modification.

[Feature uF1]
A distribution area (game area PA) in which game balls circulate,
A ball entry means (second starting port 34) provided in the circulation area and capable of entering a game ball;
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (value of winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into said ball entering means;
means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot); determination means having a first determination mode (low-probability mode) and a second determination mode (high-probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is higher than that in the first determination mode;
When one game round is defined as the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended, a game round execution means (main control unit) for executing the game round The MPU 62 on the board 61 side, and the game round control processing of FIG. 461 executed by it),
privilege giving means (opening/closing execution mode) for giving a privilege to a player after the game round corresponding to the determination is completed when the determination means determines that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition; ,
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is divided into a first state in which entry of a game ball into the ball entry means is made impossible or difficult, and a state in which entry of a game ball into the ball entry means is made possible or easy. a state transition means for transitioning between a second state which is a state to
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein the control mode in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means is a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode. a control means having at least a second control mode (high-frequency support mode) in which it is easier for a game ball to enter the ball-entering means than
When the number of times that a predetermined privilege is granted by the privilege granting means reaches a specified number of times in a situation where the second judgment mode is continued as the judgment mode, the judgment mode is changed to the first judgment mode. determination mode transition means for transition;
In a predetermined game state (low probability high support state) in which the determination mode is the first determination mode, when the special information satisfies the second predetermined condition (value corresponding to time saving grant), the special information is the Control mode execution means for executing the second control mode as the control mode by the control means until a first predetermined condition is satisfied;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature uF1, in a situation where the second judgment mode is continued as the judgment mode, when the number of times that the privilege granting unit gives the predetermined privilege reaches the specified number of times, the judgment mode is changed to the first judgment mode. , and when the special information satisfies the second predetermined condition in a predetermined game state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode, until the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition (for example, until the jackpot is won), A second control mode is executed as a control mode by the control means. In the state where the control mode is the second control mode, it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the ball-entering means than in the state where the control mode is the first control mode, and it is difficult for the player to reduce the number of balls in his/her possession. Determination by the determination means regarding the special information acquired with the entry of the game ball into the ball means can be executed at a high frequency. Therefore, in a situation where the second determination mode continues as the determination mode, when the number of times that the predetermined privilege is granted by the privilege granting means reaches the predetermined number of times, the determination mode shifts to the first determination mode. and when the special information satisfies a second predetermined condition in a predetermined game state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode, the second game ball acquired with the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means as a trigger. It becomes possible to surely realize that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition, and the privilege is granted once more by the privilege granting means.

Therefore, according to the feature uF1, when the number of times that the privilege granting means grants a predetermined privilege reaches the prescribed number of times in a situation where the second determination mode is continued as the determination mode, the privilege granting means will be granted once more. As a result, according to the feature uF1, it is possible to impart great joy to the player by awarding the privilege one more time. Furthermore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the predetermined number of times the privilege is given by the privilege giving means continues for a specified number of times. In particular, since it is very important that the number of times that the privilege granting means continues to grant the predetermined privilege is the specified number of times, It is possible to give the player a greater sense of expectation for the continuation of the provision of the privilege once more.

[Feature uF2]
The gaming machine according to feature uF1,
In the specific game state (high-probability and high support state) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, until the number of executions of the game round after shifting to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number (time reduction continuous number) a game state transition means for shifting from the specific game state to the predetermined game state (low-probability support state) when a specific condition (winning in a falling lottery) is established.

According to the feature uF2, in the specific game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, when the specific condition is met before the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number after shifting to the specific game state, The determination mode is shifted to a predetermined game state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode. In the predetermined game state, as described above, when the special information satisfies the second predetermined condition, until the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition (for example, until the jackpot is won), the control mode is set to the second control mode by the control means. Since the 2 control modes are executed, it is possible to reliably realize that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition. Therefore, if the state is shifted to the predetermined gaming state and the special information satisfies the second predetermined condition, the special information acquired with the entry of the game ball into the ball-entering means as a trigger satisfies the first predetermined condition. It is possible to achieve this with certainty.

Therefore, according to the feature uF2, in the specific game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the specified It is possible to expect that a condition is satisfied and that the specific game state is shifted to a predetermined game state. That is, according to the feature uF2, in the specific game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the special information is determined by the second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high for the player. can be expected to satisfy the first predetermined condition, but furthermore, the specific condition is satisfied before the number of times of execution of the game round after the transition to the specific game state reaches the predetermined number, and from the specific game state , the special information can be expected to shift to a predetermined game state in which it can be reliably realized that the first predetermined condition is satisfied.

On the other hand, if the special information satisfies the second predetermined condition in the predetermined game state after the shift, the determination means determines that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition next time in a state in which the number of balls held by the player is unlikely to decrease. It is possible to give a sense of security that the second control mode in which the game ball can be easily entered into the ball entering means will not end until the condition is satisfied (for example, until the jackpot is won). As described above, according to the feature uF2, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by providing the player with emotions such as a sense of anticipation and a sense of security.

[Feature uF3]
A gaming machine according to feature uF1 or feature uF2,
a privilege type determining means for determining a privilege type of a privilege granted by the privilege granting means;
The determination mode transition means is
In a situation where the second determination mode continues as the determination mode, the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition (matches a value for winning a jackpot), and the privilege type determination means determines that the Means for incrementing the value of a predetermined counter each time it is determined that the determination mode after the provision of a predetermined benefit is the privilege type (probability variable jackpot) that can be the second determination mode;
Means for shifting the determination mode to the first determination mode when the value of the predetermined counter reaches the specified number of times (probability variation limit number of times) in a situation where the second determination mode continues as the determination mode and,
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature uF3, in a situation where the second determination mode continues as the determination mode, the determination after the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition and the predetermined privilege is given by the privilege type determination means A predetermined counter is updated every time it is determined that the mode is a privilege type that can be the second determination mode. Then, when the value of the predetermined counter reaches the specified number of times while the second determination mode continues as the determination mode, the determination mode is shifted to the first determination mode. As described above, in the predetermined game state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode, if the special information satisfies the second predetermined condition, the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means is prohibited. It becomes possible to realize that the second special information acquired as a trigger satisfies the first predetermined condition, and the awarding of the privilege by the privilege giving means is performed one more time. For this reason, in a situation where the second determination mode continues as the determination mode, until the value of the predetermined counter reaches the predetermined number of times, the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition and If it is possible to repeatedly determine that the determination mode after the award of the privilege is a privilege type that can be the second determination mode, the privilege is granted once more by the privilege imparting means. Become. Therefore, in a situation where the second determination mode continues as the determination mode, until the value of the predetermined counter reaches the predetermined number of times, the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition and The player can be expected to repeat the determination that the determination mode after the award of the privilege is the privilege type that can be the second determination mode. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

<Characteristic uG group>
The feature uG group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, mainly from the tenth embodiment and its second modification.

[Feature uG1]
A first ball entry means (first starting port 33) that allows a game ball to enter,
A second ball entry means (second starting port 34) that allows a game ball to enter,
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (the value of a winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means;
means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot); determination means having a first determination mode (low-probability mode) and a second determination mode (high-probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is higher than that in the first determination mode;
When one game round is defined as the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended, a game round execution means (main control unit) for executing the game round The MPU 62 on the board 61 side, and the game round control processing of FIG. 461 executed by it),
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is divided into a first state in which entry of a game ball into the ball entry means is made impossible or difficult, and a state in which entry of a game ball into the ball entry means is made possible or easy. a state transition means for transitioning between a second state which is a state to
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein the control mode in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means is a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode. a control means having at least a second control mode (high-frequency support mode) in which it is easier for a game ball to enter the ball-entering means than
In the first predetermined game state (high-probability-low support state) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the special information that is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entering means If the special information of 1 satisfies the first predetermined condition (matches the value for winning the jackpot) and does not meet other conditions (matches the value for winning the probability variable jackpot) (distribution result is a normal jackpot), mode transition means for transitioning the determination mode to the first determination mode and transitioning the control mode to the second control mode;
In the second predetermined game state (low probability high support state) in which the determination mode is the first determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, the special information is the second predetermined condition (to shorten the working hours) corresponding value) is satisfied, control mode execution means for executing the second control mode as the control mode by the control means until the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature uG1, in the first predetermined game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the first special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entering means satisfies the first predetermined condition is satisfied and the other conditions are not satisfied, the determination mode shifts to the first determination mode, and the control mode shifts to the second control mode. Then, in a second predetermined game state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, when the special information satisfies the second predetermined condition, the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition. The second control mode is executed as the control mode by the control means until the condition is satisfied (for example, until the jackpot is won). In the state where the control mode is the second control mode, it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the ball-entering means than in the state where the control mode is the first control mode, and it is difficult for the player to reduce the number of balls in his/her possession. Determination by the determination means regarding the special information acquired with the entry of the game ball into the ball means can be executed at a high frequency. Therefore, according to the feature uG1, in the first predetermined game state, when the first special information satisfies the first predetermined condition and does not satisfy the other conditions, the transition is made to the second predetermined game state. Thus, it is possible to reliably realize that the special information acquired when the game ball enters the ball entering means satisfies the first predetermined condition again.

Therefore, according to the feature uG1, in the first predetermined game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the first special information satisfies the first predetermined condition and does not satisfy the other conditions, whereby the second predetermined When the game state is shifted to the game state, the special information acquired with the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means as a trigger satisfies the first predetermined condition once again. As a result, according to the feature uG1, in the first predetermined game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the first special information satisfies the first predetermined condition and does not satisfy the other conditions. It can give people a sense of expectation. As a result, according to the feature uG1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

On the other hand, in the second predetermined game state in which the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition from the first predetermined game state, when the special information satisfies the second predetermined condition, the player is provided with a ball. until the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition by the judging means next time (for example, until the jackpot is won), the second control mode in which the game ball can easily enter the ball entering means ends. It can give you a sense of security. As described above, according to the feature uG1, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game by providing the player with emotions such as a sense of anticipation and a sense of security.

[Feature uG2]
A gaming machine according to feature uG1,
The determination mode is the second determination mode, and in a specific game state (high probability high support state) different from the first predetermined game state, the number of executions of the game round after transition to the specific game state is A game that shifts from the specific game state to the second predetermined game state (low probability high support state) when the specific condition (winning in the falling lottery) is established before reaching a predetermined number of times (time reduction continuation number) A gaming machine comprising state transition means.

According to the feature uG2, in the specific game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, when the specific condition is met before the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number after shifting to the specific game state, The judgment mode is the first judgment mode, and the control mode is shifted to the second predetermined game state where the control mode is the second control mode. In the second predetermined game state, as described above, when the special information satisfies the second predetermined condition, the control mode by the control means continues until the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition (for example, until the jackpot is won). Since the second control mode is executed as , it is possible to reliably realize that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition. Therefore, if it is possible to shift to the second predetermined gaming state, it is possible to reliably realize that the special information acquired with the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means as a trigger satisfies the first predetermined condition. Become.

Therefore, according to the feature uG2, in the specific game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, for the player, after the transition to the specific game state, the specified It is possible to make the player expect that the condition will be established and that the specific game state will shift to the second predetermined game state. That is, according to the feature uG2, in the specific game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the special information is determined by the second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high for the player. can be expected to satisfy the first predetermined condition, but furthermore, the specific condition is satisfied before the number of times of execution of the game round after the transition to the specific game state reaches the predetermined number, and from the specific game state , the special information can be expected to shift to a second predetermined game state in which it can be reliably realized that the first predetermined condition is satisfied.

[Feature uG3]
A gaming machine according to feature uG2,
When the number of executions of the game round after the transition to the specific game state reaches the predetermined number of times without the specific condition being satisfied, the first predetermined game state (high probability low support state) Equipped with a means for transitioning from a specific game state,
A gaming machine, wherein the first predetermined game state is less advantageous for the player than the second predetermined game state.

According to the feature uG3, when the number of executions of the game round after the transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number without the specific condition being satisfied, the first predetermined game in which the determination mode is the second determination mode state. The first predetermined game state is less advantageous for the player than the second predetermined game state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode, although the determination mode is the second determination mode. For this reason, according to the feature uG3, in the specific game state, the special information does not satisfy the first predetermined condition by the determination means and the specific condition is not satisfied, and the game after transition to the specific game state. It is possible to make the player feel a sense of urgency as to whether or not the number of execution times reaches a predetermined number. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature uG4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features uG1 to uG3,
a privilege type determining means for determining a privilege type of a privilege granted by the privilege granting means;
The mode transition means is
In the first predetermined game state, the first special information satisfies the first predetermined condition (matches the value for winning a jackpot), and the privilege is given by the privilege type determination means. When it is determined that the later determination mode is the privilege type (normal jackpot) that becomes the first determination mode, the determination mode is changed to the first determination mode and the control mode is changed to the first A game machine characterized by comprising means for shifting to the second control mode.

According to the feature uG4, in the first predetermined game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the first special information satisfies the first predetermined condition, and after the privilege is given by the privilege type determination means When it is determined that the determination mode is the privilege type that becomes the first determination mode, the determination mode is shifted to the first determination mode and the control mode is shifted to the second control mode. As described above, in the second predetermined game state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, when the special information satisfies the second predetermined condition, the special information until satisfies the first predetermined condition, the second control mode is executed as the control mode by the control means. For this reason, according to the feature uG4, in the first predetermined game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the first special information satisfies the first predetermined condition, and the privilege type determination means provides the privilege It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the fact that the determination mode after the determination is determined to be the privilege type that becomes the first determination mode. Therefore, according to the feature uG4, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic uH group>
The feature uH group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, mainly from the tenth embodiment and its third modification.

[Feature uH1]
a launching means for launching a game ball;
A distribution area (game area PA) in which the launched game balls circulate;
A ball entry means (second starting port 34) provided in the circulation area and capable of entering a game ball;
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (value of winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into said ball entering means;
Means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies the first predetermined condition (matching the value for jackpot winning) or the second predetermined condition (matching the value for reducing time), As determination modes (lottery mode) for determination, a first determination mode (low-probability mode) and a second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is higher than in the first determination mode ( high probability mode);
When one game round is defined as the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended, a game round execution means (main control unit) for executing the game round MPU 62 on the board 61 side, and the game turn control process of FIG. 461 executed by it),
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is divided into a first state in which entry of a game ball into the ball entry means is made impossible or difficult, and a state in which entry of a game ball into the ball entry means is made possible or easy. a state transition means for transitioning between a second state which is a state to
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein the control mode in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means is a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode. a control means having at least a second control mode (high-frequency support mode) in which it is easier for a game ball to enter the ball-entering means than
In the first predetermined game state (low probability high support state) in which the determination mode is the first determination mode, the determination means determines that the special information satisfies the second predetermined condition (value corresponding to time reduction provision) a control mode execution means for executing the second control mode as the control mode by the control means for a period until the number of execution times of the game times reaches a predetermined number,
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature uH1, in the first predetermined game state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode, when the determination means determines that the special information satisfies the second predetermined condition, the number of times the game is executed reaches the predetermined number. The second control mode is executed as the control mode by the control means during the period until the second control mode is reached. The determination by the determining means is performed when the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition, when the special information satisfies the second predetermined condition, and when the special information satisfies neither the first predetermined condition nor the second predetermined condition. Therefore, even if the special information does not satisfy the first predetermined condition, if the special information can satisfy the second predetermined condition, the control mode is maintained until the number of times the game is executed reaches the predetermined number of times. , the second control mode can be executed. In addition, in the state where the control mode is the second control mode, it is easier for the game ball to enter the ball-entering means than in the state where the control mode is the first control mode, and it is difficult for the player to reduce the number of balls he has. , the determination by the determination means regarding the special information acquired with the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means as a trigger can be executed at a high frequency. Therefore, according to the feature uH1, if the determination means can repeat that the special information satisfies the second predetermined condition again by the time the number of game rounds executed after the start of the second control mode reaches the predetermined number of times. , the period for executing the second control mode as the control mode can be sequentially extended until the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition without reducing the number of balls held.

Therefore, according to the feature uH1, in the first predetermined game state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode, even if the special information does not satisfy the first predetermined condition in the determination means, the number of times the game is executed reaches the predetermined number. The player can be made to repeatedly expect that the special information satisfies the second predetermined condition in the determination means by . In other words, the player is given a sense of urgency that the special information does not satisfy the second predetermined condition in the judging means and the period until the number of executions of the game reaches the predetermined number of times ends. can be granted. In this way, according to the feature uH1, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by imparting emotions such as a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency to the player.

[Feature uH2]
A gaming machine according to feature uH1,
In the first predetermined game state (low probability high support state), before the period until the number of executions of the game reaches a predetermined number of times, the special information is the first predetermined condition (a value for winning a jackpot) If it is not determined that the special information satisfies the second predetermined condition (matches the time saving value), the control A gaming machine comprising: means for shifting a mode from the second control mode to the first control mode.

According to feature uH2, in the first predetermined game state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode, when the determination means determines that the special information satisfies the second predetermined condition, the number of times the game is executed reaches the predetermined number. Until this period is reached, the second control mode is executed as the control mode by the control means, but if the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition (matches the value for winning the jackpot) before the end of this period. Without being determined, and when it is not determined that the special information satisfies the second predetermined condition (matching the value that provides time saving), the control mode is the second control mode to the first control mode be transferred to As a result, the first predetermined game state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode is shifted to the normal state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode and the control mode is the first control mode. Since the normal state is not an advantageous state for the player, the game cycle is executed without determining that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition and without determining that the special information satisfies the second predetermined condition. It is possible to impart a greater sense of urgency to the player as to whether the period until the number of times reaches the predetermined number of times will end.

[Feature uH3]
A gaming machine according to feature uH1 or feature uH2,
In a specific game state (high probability high support state) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, execution of the game round after transition to the specific game state When the specific condition (winning in the falling lottery) is established before the number of times reaches a predetermined number (time-saving continuous number of times), the transition from the specific game state to the first predetermined game state (low probability high support state) A game machine characterized by comprising: a game state transition means for causing the game state to change.

According to the feature uH3, in a specific game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, the number of game rounds executed after the transition to the specific game state is a predetermined number. When the specific condition is satisfied before reaching, the specific game state is shifted to the first predetermined game state. In the first predetermined game state, as described above, if the determination means can repeat that the special information satisfies the second predetermined condition, the second control mode is executed as the control mode without reducing the number of balls held. The period can be extended sequentially until the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition. Therefore, according to the feature uH3, in the specific game state, the specific condition is established for the player before the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number of times, and the specific game state can be expected to shift from to the first predetermined game state. That is, according to the feature uH3, in the specific game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the special information is determined by the second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high for the player. can be expected to satisfy the first predetermined condition, but furthermore, the specific condition is satisfied before the number of times of execution of the game round after the transition to the specific game state reaches the predetermined number, and from the specific game state , the special information can be expected to shift to a first predetermined game state with a high possibility of realizing that the first predetermined condition is satisfied.

[Feature uH4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features uH1 to uH3,
When the number of executions of the game round after the transition to the specific game state reaches the predetermined number without the specific condition being satisfied, the determination mode is the second determination mode, and the control mode is the second A means for shifting from the specific game state to a second predetermined game state (high probability low support state) which is 1 control mode,
A gaming machine, wherein the second predetermined game state is less advantageous for the player than the first predetermined game state.

According to the feature uH4, when the number of game rounds executed after the transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number of times without the specific condition being satisfied, the game state is transferred to the second predetermined game state. The second predetermined game state is less advantageous for the player than the first predetermined game state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode, although the determination mode is the second determination mode. For this reason, according to the feature uH4, the special information does not satisfy the first predetermined condition by the judging means, the specific condition is not established, and the number of game rounds executed after the transition to the specific game state is increased. It is possible to make the player feel a sense of urgency as to whether or not the predetermined number of times is reached. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

<Feature uI group>
The feature uI group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature uI1]
A first ball entry means (first starting port 33) that allows a game ball to enter,
A second ball entry means (second starting port 34) that allows a game ball to enter,
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (the value of a winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means;
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and the first special information acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entering means Acquisition information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, respectively;
means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot), wherein the determination of the second special information is performed with priority over the determination of the first special information, and the determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination is the first determination mode (low probability mode) and the first determination mode a second determination mode (high-probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high;
When one game round is defined as the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended, a game round execution means (main control unit) for executing the game round The MPU 62 on the board 61 side, and the game round control processing of FIG. 461 executed by it),
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is divided into a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entering means, and a state that a game ball enters the second ball entering means. state transition means for transitioning between a second state that is a state that enables or facilitates the sphere;
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein the control mode in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means is a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode. a control means having at least a second control mode (high-frequency support mode) in which the entry of game balls to the second ball entry means is easier than
In a gaming machine comprising
In a specific game state (high-precision high support state) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, a predetermined condition (game round after transition to the specific game state The number of times of execution reaches the number of times of time saving continuation) is established, control mode transition means for shifting the control mode from the second control mode to the first control mode;
The determination by the determination means about the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is the first predetermined game state (high If the specific condition (election in the falling lottery) is established before the end in the probability low support state), the specific probability is transferred again to the specific game state (100% probability to the specific game state again a first re-transition means;
After the determination by the determination means about the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state, the specific condition (winning in a falling lottery ) is established, the specific game state is shifted again with a probability lower than the specific probability (a jackpot is won in a low-probability low support state and is distributed to a probability-variable jackpot). a) second re-transition means;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature uI1, in the specific game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, when a predetermined condition is established, the control mode is changed from the second control mode to the first Switch to control mode. Then, until the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specified game state is completed in the first predetermined game state after the transition to the first control mode, the specified When the condition is established, it is shifted again to the specific game state with a specific probability. On the other hand, after the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state, when the specific condition is established, the specific probability It is shifted again to the specific game state with a lower probability than. For this reason, according to the feature uI1, in the first predetermined game state shifted from the specific game state, for the player, by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state It is possible to expect that a specific condition is satisfied before the determination ends in the first predetermined game state. That is, according to the feature uI1, in the first predetermined game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the determination by the second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high for the player, The special information can be expected to satisfy the first predetermined condition, and further, the judgment by the judgment means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is By the time it ends, it can be made to expect that a specific condition is satisfied.

Further, according to the feature uI1, after the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state, when the specific condition is established, Since the transition to the specific game state is made again with a probability lower than the specific probability, in the first predetermined game state, the special information does not satisfy the first predetermined condition by the determination means, and the specific condition is satisfied. However, the player has a sense of urgency that the determination by the determination means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state may end in the first predetermined game state. can let In this way, according to the feature uI1, by giving the player emotions such as a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

[Feature uI2]
A gaming machine according to feature uI1,
A gaming machine, wherein the specific probability is 100%.

According to the feature uI2, in the first predetermined game state, the specific When the conditions are established, the state is shifted again to the specific game state with a probability of 100%. In other words, when the specific condition is established, it is guaranteed that the game state will shift again to the specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a greater sense of expectation.

[Feature uI3]
A gaming machine according to feature uI1 or feature uI2,
The gaming machine, wherein the predetermined condition is that the number of game rounds executed after the transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number.

According to the feature uI3, in the specific game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, the number of times the game is executed after shifting to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number of times. , the control mode is maintained in the second control mode. In the state where the control mode is the second control mode, it is easier for the game ball to enter the second ball-entering means than in the state where the control mode is the first control mode, and it is difficult for the player to reduce the number of balls he has. , the determination by the determining means regarding the second special information acquired with the entry of the game ball into the second ball entering means as a trigger can be executed at a high frequency. Therefore, during the period until the number of executions of game rounds in the specific game state reaches a predetermined number, the second special information acquired with the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means as the first It is possible to make the player expect more that the predetermined condition is satisfied.

<Characteristic uJ group>
The feature uJ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature uJ1]
A first ball entry means (first starting port 33) that allows a game ball to enter,
A second ball entry means (second starting port 34) that allows a game ball to enter,
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (the value of a winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means;
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and the first special information acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entering means Acquisition information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, respectively;
means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot), wherein the determination of the second special information is performed with priority over the determination of the first special information, and the determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination is the first determination mode (low probability mode) and the first determination mode a second determination mode (high-probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high;
When one game round is defined as the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended, a game round execution means (main control unit) for executing the game round The MPU 62 on the board 61 side, and the game round control processing of FIG. 461 executed by it),
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is divided into a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entering means, and a state that a game ball enters the second ball entering means. state transition means for transitioning between a second state that is a state that enables or facilitates the sphere;
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein the control mode in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means is a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode. a control means having at least a second control mode (high-frequency support mode) in which the entry of game balls to the second ball entry means is easier than
In a gaming machine comprising
In a specific game state (high-precision high support state) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, a predetermined condition (game round after transition to the specific game state The number of times of execution reaches the number of times of time reduction continuation) is established, control mode transition means for shifting the control mode from the second control mode to the first control mode;
The determination by the determination means about the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is the first predetermined game state (high If the specific condition (election in the falling lottery) is established before the end in the probability low support state), the specific probability is transferred again to the specific game state (100% probability to the specific game state again a first re-transition means;
After the determination by the determination means about the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state, the specific condition (winning in a falling lottery ) is established, the specific game state is shifted again with a probability lower than the specific probability (a jackpot is won in a low-probability low support state and is distributed to a probability-variable jackpot). a) second re-transition means;
with
A gaming machine, wherein the specific probability is 100%.

According to the feature uJ1, in the specific game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, when a predetermined condition is established, the control mode is changed from the second control mode to the first Switch to control mode. Then, until the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specified game state is completed in the first predetermined game state after the transition to the first control mode, the specified When the condition is established, it is shifted again to the specific game state with a specific probability. On the other hand, after the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state, when the specific condition is established, the specific probability It is shifted again to the specific game state with a lower probability than. For this reason, according to the feature uJ1, in the first predetermined game state shifted from the specific game state, for the player, by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state It is possible to expect that a specific condition is satisfied before the determination ends in the first predetermined game state. That is, according to the feature uJ1, in the first predetermined game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the player is determined by the second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high. The special information can be expected to satisfy the first predetermined condition, and further, the judgment by the judgment means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is By the time it ends, it can be made to expect that a specific condition is satisfied.

Further, according to the feature uJ1, after the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state, when the specific condition is established, Since the transition to the specific game state is made again with a probability lower than the specific probability, in the first predetermined game state, the special information does not satisfy the first predetermined condition by the determination means, and the specific condition is satisfied. However, the player has a sense of urgency that the determination by the determination means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state may end in the first predetermined game state. can let In this way, according to the feature uJ1, by imparting emotions such as a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency to the player, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Furthermore, according to the feature uJ1, in the first predetermined game state, until the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state ends in the first predetermined game state , When a specific condition is established, the state is shifted again to the specific game state with a probability of 100%. In other words, when the specific condition is established, it is guaranteed that the game state will shift again to the specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a greater sense of expectation.

<Characteristic uK group>
The feature uK group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, mainly from the tenth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature uK1]
A first ball entry means (first starting port 33) that allows a game ball to enter,
A second ball entry means (second starting port 34) that allows a game ball to enter,
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (the value of a winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means;
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and the first special information acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entering means Acquisition information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, respectively;
means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot), wherein the determination of the second special information is performed with priority over the determination of the first special information, and the determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination is the first determination mode (low probability mode) and the first determination mode a second determination mode (high-probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high;
When one game round is defined as the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended, a game round execution means (main control unit) for executing the game round The MPU 62 on the board 61 side, and the game round control processing of FIG. 461 executed by it),
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is divided into a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entering means, and a state that a game ball enters the second ball entering means. state transition means for transitioning between a second state that is a state that enables or facilitates the sphere;
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein the control mode in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means is a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode. a control means having at least a second control mode (high-frequency support mode) in which the entry of game balls to the second ball entry means is easier than
In a gaming machine comprising
In a specific game state (high-precision high support state) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, a predetermined condition (game round after transition to the specific game state The number of times of execution reaches the number of times of time saving continuation) is established, control mode transition means for shifting the control mode from the second control mode to the first control mode;
The determination by the determination means about the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is the first predetermined game state (high If the specific condition (winning in the falling lottery) is established before the end in the probability low support state), the specific probability is transferred again to the specific game state (100% probability to the specific game state again a first re-transition means;
After the determination by the determination means about the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state, the specific condition (winning in a falling lottery ) is established, the specific game state is shifted again with a probability lower than the specific probability (a jackpot is won in a low-probability low support state and the probability of being distributed to a probability-variable jackpot is transferred again to a high-probability high-support state a) second re-transition means;
with
A gaming machine, wherein the predetermined condition is that the number of game rounds executed after the transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number.

According to the feature uK1, in the specific game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, when a predetermined condition is established, the control mode is changed from the second control mode to the first Switch to control mode. Then, until the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specified game state is completed in the first predetermined game state after the shift to the first control mode, the specified When the condition is established, it is shifted again to the specific game state with a specific probability. On the other hand, after the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state, when the specific condition is established, the specific probability It is shifted again to the specific game state with a lower probability than. Therefore, according to the feature uK1, in the first predetermined game state shifted from the specific game state, for the player, by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state It is possible to expect that a specific condition is satisfied before the determination ends in the first predetermined game state. That is, according to the feature uK1, in the first predetermined game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the player is determined by the second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high. It is possible to expect that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition. By the time it ends, it can be made to expect that a specific condition is satisfied.

Further, according to the feature uK1, after the determination by the determination means about the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state, when the specific condition is established, Since the transition to the specific game state is made again with a probability lower than the specific probability, in the first predetermined game state, the special information does not satisfy the first predetermined condition by the determination means, and the specific condition is satisfied. However, the player has a sense of urgency that the determination by the determination means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state may end in the first predetermined game state. can let As described above, according to the feature uK1, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by giving the player feelings such as a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency.

Furthermore, according to the feature uK1, in the specific game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, the number of times the game is executed after shifting to the specific game state is a predetermined number of times The control mode is maintained in the second control mode until . In the state where the control mode is the second control mode, it is easier for the game ball to enter the second ball-entering means than in the state where the control mode is the first control mode, and it is difficult for the player to reduce the number of balls he has. , the determination by the determining means regarding the second special information acquired with the entry of the game ball into the second ball entering means as a trigger can be executed at a high frequency. Therefore, during the period until the number of executions of game rounds in the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined number, the second special information acquired with the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means as the first It is possible to make the player expect more that the predetermined condition is satisfied.

<Characteristic uL group>
The feature uL group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature uL1]
A first ball entry means (first starting port 33) that allows a game ball to enter,
A second ball entry means (second starting port 34) that allows a game ball to enter,
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (the value of a winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means;
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and the first special information acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entering means Acquisition information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, respectively;
means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot), wherein the determination of the second special information is performed by the Prioritizing the determination of the first special information, the determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination is the first determination mode (low probability mode) and the first determination mode. a second determination mode (high-probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is high;
When one game round is defined as the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended, a game round execution means (main control unit) for executing the game round The MPU 62 on the board 61 side, and the game round control processing of FIG. 461 executed by it),
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is divided into a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entering means, and a state that a game ball enters the second ball entering means. state transition means for transitioning between a second state that is a state that enables or facilitates the sphere;
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein the control mode in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means is a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode. a control means having at least a second control mode (high-frequency support mode) in which the entry of game balls to the second ball entry means is easier than
a game state transition means for transitioning the game state;
A gaming machine comprising
The game state transition means is
All the second stored in the acquired information storage means in a specific game state (high probability high support state H4) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode By the time the determination by the determination means for the special information is completed (by the end of the mode H6a during special 2 remaining pending digestion of the high probability low support state H6) When the specific condition is satisfied (in the falling lottery a first transition means for shifting to an advantageous game state (low probability high support state H5) guaranteed to shift again to the specific game state when winning);
When the number of executions of the game round after the transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number of times (ST number of times) without the specific condition being satisfied, the probability of moving again to the specific game state is the advantageous A second transition means for transitioning to a predetermined game state (low probability low support state H1) lower than the game state;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to this feature, all the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode By the determination means If a specific condition is satisfied before the determination is completed, the game is transferred to an advantageous game state guaranteed to transfer to the specific game state again. In addition, when the number of executions of the game round after the transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number of times without the specific condition being established, the probability of moving again to the specific game state is lower than the advantageous game state Predetermined game state.

For this reason, according to this feature, for the player, in the specific game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, all the second information stored in the acquired information storage means By the time the determination by the determination means for the special information of 2 is finished, the specific condition is satisfied, and the player can expect to shift to an advantageous game state. That is, according to this feature, in the specific game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the special information is given to the player by determination in the second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is high. It is possible to expect that the condition is satisfied, but furthermore, the specific condition is satisfied before the determination by the determination means for all the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed. , can be expected to shift to an advantageous game state. Conventionally, the player only expects that the special information satisfies a predetermined condition before the determination by the determination means for all the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed. However, according to this feature, the specific condition is satisfied before the determination by the determination means for all the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed, and the transition to the advantageous game state is made. The player can also be expected to do so. The advantageous game state continues until the special information satisfies a predetermined condition and the jackpot game is started, and by adopting a configuration that guarantees a transition to the specific game state again after the jackpot game ends, the player can enjoy the advantage. On the other hand, even if the special information does not meet the predetermined condition until the determination by the determination means for all the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed, acquired in the specific game state If the specific condition is satisfied before the determination by the determination means for all the second special information stored in the information storage means is completed, the jackpot game is guaranteed, and the state can be shifted again to the specific game state. It can give you a sense of security that you are guaranteed.

In addition, according to this feature, when the number of executions of the game round after the transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number of times without the specific condition being established, the probability of moving again to the specific game state is an advantageous game Since it is shifted to a predetermined game state lower than the state, in the specific game state, the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition by the determination means, and all the second stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state A sense of urgency such as whether the specific condition is not satisfied before the determination by the determination means for the special information is completed, and the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number. , can be given to the player. As described above, according to this feature, by imparting emotions such as a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency to the player, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

[Feature uL2]
The gaming machine according to feature uL1,
The game state transition means is
Means for shifting the game state by alternatively determining the determination mode between the first determination mode and the second determination mode (fall determination process) when the specific condition is established. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to this feature, when the specific condition is established, the game state is shifted by alternatively determining the determination mode between the first determination mode and the second determination mode. Switching the determination mode has a great effect on the degree of advantage for the player. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to make the player strongly interested in whether or not the specific condition is satisfied, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

[Feature uL3]
A gaming machine according to feature uL1 or feature uL2,
A game machine, wherein the predetermined game state is a game state in which the control mode is the first control mode.

According to this feature, since the control mode is the first control mode in the predetermined game state, it is difficult to enter the game ball into the second ball entering means, and the advantage for the player is low. Therefore, according to this feature, the number of game rounds executed after the transition to the specific game state will reach a predetermined number of times without the specific condition being satisfied. can be granted.

[Feature uL4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features uL1 to uL3,
A gaming machine, wherein the predetermined game state is a game state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode.

According to this feature, in the predetermined game state, the determination mode is the first determination mode, so the advantage for the player is low. Therefore, according to this feature, the player is given a sense of urgency, such as whether the number of game rounds executed after the transition to the specific game state will reach a predetermined number without satisfying the specific condition. More can be given.

<Feature uM group>
The feature uM group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature uM1]
A first ball entry means (first starting port 33) that allows a game ball to enter,
A second ball entry means (second starting port 34) that allows a game ball to enter,
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (the value of a winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means;
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and the first special information acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entering means Acquisition information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, respectively;
means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot), wherein the determination of the second special information is performed by the Prioritizing the determination of the first special information, the determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination is the first determination mode (low probability mode) and the first determination mode. a second determination mode (high-probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is high;
When one game round is defined as the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended, a game round execution means (main control unit) for executing the game round The MPU 62 on the board 61 side, and the game round control processing of FIG. 461 executed by it),
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is divided into a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entering means, and a state that a game ball enters the second ball entering means. state transition means for transitioning between a second state that is a state that enables or facilitates the sphere;
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein the control mode in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means is a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode. a control means having at least a second control mode (high-frequency support mode) in which the entry of game balls to the second ball entry means is easier than
a game state transition means for transitioning the game state;
A gaming machine comprising
The game state transition means is
All the second stored in the acquired information storage means in a specific game state (high probability high support state H4) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode By the time the determination by the determination means for the special information is completed (by the end of the mode H6a during special 2 remaining pending digestion of the high probability low support state H6) When the specific condition is satisfied (in the falling lottery a first transition means for shifting to an advantageous game state (low probability high support state H5) guaranteed to shift again to the specific game state when winning);
When the number of executions of the game round after the transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number of times (ST number of times) without the specific condition being satisfied, the probability of moving again to the specific game state is the advantageous A second transition means for transitioning to a predetermined game state (low probability low support state H1) lower than the game state;
with
The game state transition means is
Means for shifting the game state by alternatively determining the determination mode between the first determination mode and the second determination mode (fall determination process) when the specific condition is established. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to this feature, all the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode By the determination means If a specific condition is satisfied before the determination is completed, the game is shifted to an advantageous game state guaranteed to shift to the specific game state again. In addition, when the number of executions of the game round after the transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number of times without the specific condition being established, the probability of moving again to the specific game state is lower than the advantageous game state. state.

For this reason, according to this feature, for the player, in the specific game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, all the second information stored in the acquired information storage means By the time the determination by the determination means for the special information of 2 is finished, the specific condition is satisfied, and the player can expect to shift to an advantageous game state. That is, according to this feature, in the specific game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the special information is given to the player by determination in the second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is high. It is possible to expect that the conditions are satisfied, but furthermore, the specific conditions are satisfied before the determination by the determination means for all the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed. , can be expected to shift to an advantageous game state.

In addition, according to this feature, when the number of executions of the game round after the transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number of times without the specific condition being established, the probability of moving again to the specific game state is an advantageous game Since it is shifted to a predetermined game state lower than the state, in the specific game state, the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition by the determination means, and all the second stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state A sense of urgency such as whether the specific condition is not satisfied before the determination by the determination means for the special information is completed, and the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number. , can be given to the player. As described above, according to this feature, by imparting emotions such as a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency to the player, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Furthermore, according to this feature, when the specific condition is satisfied, the game state is shifted by alternatively determining the determination mode between the first determination mode and the second determination mode. Switching the determination mode has a great effect on the degree of advantage for the player. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to make the player strongly interested in whether or not the specific condition is satisfied, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

<Feature uN group>
The feature uN group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature uN1]
A first ball entry means (first starting port 33) that allows a game ball to enter,
A second ball entry means (second starting port 34) that allows a game ball to enter,
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (the value of a winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means;
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and the first special information acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entering means Acquisition information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, respectively;
means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot), wherein the determination of the second special information is performed by the Prioritizing the determination of the first special information, the determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination is the first determination mode (low probability mode) and the first determination mode. a second determination mode (high-probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is high;
When one game round is defined as the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended, a game round execution means (main control unit) for executing the game round The MPU 62 on the board 61 side, and the game round control processing of FIG. 461 executed by it),
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is divided into a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entering means, and a state that a game ball enters the second ball entering means. state transition means for transitioning between a second state that is a state that enables or facilitates the sphere;
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein the control mode in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means is a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode. a control means having at least a second control mode (high-frequency support mode) in which the entry of game balls to the second ball entry means is easier than
a game state transition means for transitioning the game state;
A gaming machine comprising
The game state transition means is
All the second stored in the acquired information storage means in a specific game state (high probability high support state H4) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode By the time the determination by the determination means for the special information is completed (by the end of the mode H6a during special 2 remaining pending digestion of the high probability low support state H6) When the specific condition is satisfied (in the falling lottery a first transition means for shifting to an advantageous game state (low probability high support state H5) guaranteed to shift again to the specific game state when winning);
When the number of executions of the game round after the transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number of times (ST number of times) without the specific condition being satisfied, the probability of moving again to the specific game state is the advantageous A second transition means for transitioning to a predetermined game state (low probability low support state H1) lower than the game state;
with
A game machine, wherein the predetermined game state is a game state in which the control mode is the first control mode.

According to this feature, all the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode By the determination means If a specific condition is satisfied before the determination is completed, the game is shifted to an advantageous game state guaranteed to shift to the specific game state again. In addition, when the number of executions of the game round after the transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number of times without the specific condition being established, the probability of moving again to the specific game state is lower than the advantageous game state. state.

For this reason, according to this feature, for the player, in the specific game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, all the second information stored in the acquired information storage means By the time the determination by the determination means for the special information of 2 is finished, the specific condition is satisfied, and the player can expect to shift to an advantageous game state. That is, according to this feature, in the specific game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the special information is given to the player by determination in the second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is high. It is possible to expect that the condition is satisfied, but furthermore, the specific condition is satisfied before the determination by the determination means for all the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed. , can be expected to shift to an advantageous game state.

In addition, according to this feature, when the number of executions of the game round after the transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number of times without the specific condition being established, the probability of moving again to the specific game state is an advantageous game Since it is shifted to a predetermined game state lower than the state, in the specific game state, the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition by the determination means, and all the second stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state A sense of urgency such as whether the specific condition is not satisfied before the determination by the determination means for the special information is completed, and the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number. , can be given to the player. As described above, according to this feature, by imparting emotions such as a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency to the player, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Furthermore, according to this feature, since the control mode is the first control mode in the predetermined game state, it is difficult to enter the game ball into the second ball entering means, which is advantageous for the player. low. Therefore, according to this feature, the number of game rounds executed after the transition to the specific game state will reach a predetermined number of times without the specific condition being satisfied. can be granted.

<Characteristic uO group>
The feature uO group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature uO1]
A first ball entry means (first starting port 33) that allows a game ball to enter,
A second ball entry means (second starting port 34) that allows a game ball to enter,
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (the value of a winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means;
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and the first special information acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entering means Acquisition information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, respectively;
means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot), wherein the determination of the second special information is performed by the Prioritizing the determination of the first special information, the determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination is the first determination mode (low probability mode) and the first determination mode. a second determination mode (high-probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is high;
When one game round is defined as the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended, a game round execution means (main control unit) for executing the game round The MPU 62 on the board 61 side, and the game round control processing of FIG. 461 executed by it),
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is divided into a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entering means, and a state that a game ball enters the second ball entering means. state transition means for transitioning between a second state that is a state that enables or facilitates the sphere;
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein the control mode in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means is a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode. a control means having at least a second control mode (high-frequency support mode) in which the entry of game balls to the second ball entry means is easier than
a game state transition means for transitioning the game state;
A gaming machine comprising
The game state transition means is
All the second stored in the acquired information storage means in a specific game state (high probability high support state H4) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode By the time the determination by the determination means for the special information is completed (by the end of the mode H6a during special 2 remaining pending digestion of the high probability low support state H6) If the specific condition is satisfied (in the falling lottery a first transition means for shifting to an advantageous game state (low probability high support state H5) guaranteed to shift again to the specific game state when winning);
When the number of executions of the game round after the transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number of times (ST number of times) without the specific condition being satisfied, the probability of moving again to the specific game state is the advantageous A second transition means for shifting to a predetermined game state (low probability low support state H1) lower than the game state;
with
A gaming machine, wherein the predetermined game state is a game state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode.

According to this feature, all the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode By the determination means If a specific condition is satisfied before the determination is completed, the game is transferred to an advantageous game state guaranteed to transfer to the specific game state again. In addition, when the number of executions of the game round after the transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number of times without the specific condition being established, the probability of moving again to the specific game state is lower than the advantageous game state Predetermined game state.

For this reason, according to this feature, for the player, in the specific game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, all the second information stored in the acquired information storage means By the time the determination by the determination means for the special information of 2 is finished, the specific condition is satisfied, and the player can expect to shift to an advantageous game state. That is, according to this feature, in the specific game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the special information is given to the player by determination in the second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is high. It is possible to expect that the conditions are satisfied, but furthermore, the specific conditions are satisfied before the determination by the determination means for all the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed. , can be expected to shift to an advantageous game state.

In addition, according to this feature, when the number of executions of the game round after the transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number of times without the specific condition being established, the probability of moving again to the specific game state is an advantageous game Since it is shifted to a predetermined game state lower than the state, in the specific game state, the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition by the determination means, and all the second stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state A sense of urgency such as whether the specific condition is not satisfied before the determination by the determination means for the special information is completed, and the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number. , can be given to the player. As described above, according to this feature, by imparting emotions such as a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency to the player, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Furthermore, according to this feature, in the predetermined game state, the determination mode is the first determination mode, so the advantage for the player is low. Therefore, according to this feature, the player is given a sense of urgency, such as whether the number of game rounds executed after the transition to the specific game state will reach a predetermined number without satisfying the specific condition. More can be given.

<Feature uP group>
The feature uP group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature uP1]
A first ball entry means (first starting port 33) that allows a game ball to enter,
A second ball entry means (second starting port 34) that allows a game ball to enter,
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (the value of a winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means;
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and the first special information acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entering means Acquisition information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, respectively;
means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot), wherein the determination of the second special information is performed with priority over the determination of the first special information, and the determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination is the first determination mode (low probability mode) and the first determination mode a second determination mode (high-probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high;
When one game round is defined as the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended, a game round execution means (main control unit) for executing the game round The MPU 62 on the board 61 side, and the game round control processing of FIG. 461 executed by it),
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is divided into a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entering means, and a state that a game ball enters the second ball entering means. state transition means for transitioning between a second state that is a state that enables or facilitates the sphere;
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein the control mode in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means is a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode. a control means having at least a second control mode (high-frequency support mode) in which the entry of game balls to the second ball entry means is easier than
a game state transition means for transitioning a game state specified by the determination mode and the control mode;
A gaming machine comprising
The game state transition means is
In the first specific game state (high probability high support state H4), when the specific condition is satisfied (when winning in the falling lottery), the control mode is set for a predetermined period (period until winning the next jackpot), A first transition means for shifting to a first predetermined game state (low probability high support state H5) which is a game state maintained in the 2 control mode and is more advantageous for the player than the first specific game state. ,
In the first specific game state, when the second predetermined condition is satisfied without the specific condition being satisfied (without winning the falling lottery) (when the game round of the number of times of time-saving continuation is executed), the second Second transition means for transitioning to 2 specific game state (high probability low support state H6),
In the second specific game state, when the specific condition is satisfied at the time of the determination by the determination means for the first special information (in the left-handed mode H6b, at the time of the winning lottery for special 1 a third transition means for transitioning to a second predetermined game state (low probability low support state H1) that is less advantageous for the player than the second specific game state (when a fall lottery is won);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to this feature, even if the same specific condition is established, the function differs depending on whether it is established in the first specific game state or in the second specific game state. Specifically, when the specific condition is established in the first specific game state, the game state transition (from the first specific game state to the first predetermined game state) that increases the advantage for the player transition) is performed, and on the other hand, in the second specific game state, if the specific condition is satisfied when the determination means determines the first special information, a game that is less advantageous for the player. State transition (transition from the second specific game state to the second predetermined game state) is performed. That is, according to this feature, the establishment of the specific condition triggers a transition to a game state in which the advantage for the player increases, and also triggers a transition to a game state in which the advantage for the player decreases. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the game machine, and to facilitate the diversification of game playability.

According to this feature, when the specific condition is established in the first specific game state, the game state is shifted so as to increase the advantage for the player. In the 1 specific game state, it is possible to expect that a specific condition is established. On the other hand, in the second specific game state, if the specific condition is satisfied when the determination means determines the first special information, the game state is shifted so as to reduce the advantage for the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel that he/she does not want the specific condition to be established in the second specific game state. That is, it is possible to make the player expect the specific condition to be satisfied in the first specific game state, and to make the player not want the specific condition to be satisfied after shifting to the second specific game state. . In this way, as the game state shifts, the player can feel the exact opposite of the fulfillment of the specific condition, thereby adding excitement to the game.

[Feature uP2]
A gaming machine according to feature uP1,
The game state transition means is
Means for shifting the game state by alternatively determining the determination mode between the first determination mode and the second determination mode (fall determination process) when the specific condition is established. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to this feature, when the specific condition is established, the game state is shifted by alternatively determining the determination mode between the first determination mode and the second determination mode. Switching the determination mode has a great effect on the degree of advantage for the player. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to make the player strongly interested in whether or not the specific condition is satisfied, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

[Feature uP3]
A gaming machine according to feature uP1 or feature uP2,
A gaming machine, wherein the first predetermined game state is a game state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode.

According to this feature, in the first predetermined game state, the determination mode is the first determination mode, but since it is more advantageous for the player than in the first specific game state, it is unexpected for the player. can be given.

[Feature uP4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features uP1 to uP3,
A game machine, wherein the second predetermined game state is a game state in which the control mode is the first control mode.

According to this feature, in the second predetermined game state, since the control mode is the first control mode, it is difficult to enter the game ball into the second ball entering means, which is advantageous for the player. low. Therefore, according to this feature, in the second specific game state, whether or not the specific condition that triggers the transition to the second predetermined game state is established in the determination by the determination means for the first special information. Such a sense of urgency can be imparted to the player.

[Feature uP5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features uP1 to uP4,
A gaming machine, wherein the second predetermined game state is a game state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode.

According to this feature, in the second predetermined game state, since the determination mode is the first determination mode, the advantage for the player is low. Therefore, according to this feature, in the second specific game state, whether or not the specific condition that triggers the transition to the second predetermined game state is established in the determination by the determination means for the first special information. Such a sense of urgency can be further imparted to the player.

[Feature uP6]
A gaming machine according to any one of the features uP1 to uP5,
A gaming machine, wherein the second specific game state is a game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode.

According to this feature, in the second specific game state, since the determination mode is the second determination mode, it is highly advantageous for the player. Therefore, according to this feature, since it is not desirable for the player to shift the game state from the highly advantageous second specific game state, in the second specific game state, the determination means for the first special information It is possible to impart a sense of urgency to the player as to whether or not a specific condition will be established at the time of determination.

<Characteristic uQ group>
The feature uQ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature uQ1]
A first ball entry means (first starting port 33) that allows a game ball to enter,
A second ball entry means (second starting port 34) that allows a game ball to enter,
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (the value of a winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means;
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and the first special information acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entering means Acquisition information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, respectively;
means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot), wherein the determination of the second special information is performed with priority over the determination of the first special information, and the determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination is the first determination mode (low probability mode) and the first determination mode a second determination mode (high-probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high;
When one game round is defined as the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended, a game round execution means (main control unit) for executing the game round The MPU 62 on the board 61 side, and the game round control processing of FIG. 461 executed by it),
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is divided into a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entering means, and a state that a game ball enters the second ball entering means. state transition means for transitioning between a second state that is a state that enables or facilitates the sphere;
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein the control mode in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means is a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode. a control means having at least a second control mode (high-frequency support mode) in which the entry of game balls to the second ball entry means is easier than
a game state transition means for transitioning a game state specified by the determination mode and the control mode;
A gaming machine comprising
The game state transition means is
In the first specific game state (high probability high support state H4), when the specific condition is satisfied (when winning in the falling lottery), the control mode is set for a predetermined period (period until winning the next jackpot), A first transition means for shifting to a first predetermined game state (low probability high support state H5) which is a game state maintained in the 2 control mode and is more advantageous for the player than the first specific game state. ,
In the first specific game state, when the second predetermined condition is satisfied without the specific condition being satisfied (without winning the falling lottery) (when the game round of the number of times of time-saving continuation is executed), the second Second transition means for transitioning to 2 specific game state (high probability low support state H6),
In the second specific game state, when the specific condition is satisfied at the time of the determination by the determination means for the first special information (in the left-handed mode H6b, at the time of the winning lottery for special 1 a third transition means for transitioning to a second predetermined game state (low probability low support state H1) that is less advantageous for the player than the second specific game state (when a fall lottery is won);
with
The game state transition means is
Means for shifting the game state by alternatively determining the determination mode between the first determination mode and the second determination mode (fall determination process) when the specific condition is established. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to this feature, even if the same specific condition is established, the function differs depending on whether it is established in the first specific game state or in the second specific game state. Specifically, when a specific condition is established in the first specific game state, the game state is shifted to increase the advantage for the player, while in the second specific game state, the When a specific condition is established in the judgment by the judgment means for the special information 1, the game state is shifted so as to reduce the advantage for the player. That is, according to this feature, the establishment of the specific condition triggers a transition to a game state in which the advantage for the player increases, and also triggers a transition to a game state in which the advantage for the player decreases. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the game machine, and to facilitate the diversification of game playability.

According to this feature, when the specific condition is satisfied in the first specific game state, the game state is shifted so as to increase the advantage for the player. In the 1 specific game state, it is possible to expect that a specific condition is established. On the other hand, in the second specific game state, when the specific condition is satisfied when the determination means determines the first special information, the game state is shifted so as to reduce the advantage for the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel that he/she does not want the specific condition to be established in the second specific game state. That is, it is possible to make the player feel opposite emotions according to the type of game state at the timing when the specific condition is satisfied, so that the game can be enhanced.

Furthermore, according to this feature, when the specific condition is satisfied, the game state is shifted by alternatively determining the determination mode between the first determination mode and the second determination mode. Switching the determination mode has a great effect on the degree of advantage for the player. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to make the player strongly interested in whether or not the specific condition is satisfied, thereby improving the interest of the game.

<Feature uR group>
The feature uR group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature uR1]
A first ball entry means (first starting port 33) that allows a game ball to enter,
A second ball entry means (second starting port 34) that allows a game ball to enter,
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (the value of a winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means;
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and the first special information acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entering means Acquisition information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, respectively;
means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot), wherein the determination of the second special information is performed with priority over the determination of the first special information, and the determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination is the first determination mode (low probability mode) and the first determination mode a second determination mode (high-probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high;
When one game round is defined as the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended, a game round execution means (main control unit) for executing the game round The MPU 62 on the board 61 side, and the game round control processing of FIG. 461 executed by it),
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is divided into a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entering means, and a state that a game ball enters the second ball entering means. state transition means for transitioning between a second state that is a state that enables or facilitates the sphere;
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein the control mode in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means is a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode. a control means having at least a second control mode (high-frequency support mode) in which the entry of game balls to the second ball entry means is easier than
a game state transition means for transitioning a game state specified by the determination mode and the control mode;
A gaming machine comprising
The game state transition means is
In the first specific game state (high probability high support state H4), when the specific condition is satisfied (when winning in the falling lottery), the control mode is set for a predetermined period (period until winning the next jackpot), A first transition means for shifting to a first predetermined game state (low probability high support state H5) which is a game state maintained in the 2 control mode and is more advantageous for the player than the first specific game state. ,
In the first specific game state, when the second predetermined condition is satisfied without the specific condition being satisfied (without winning the falling lottery) (when the game round of the number of times of time-saving continuation is executed), the second Second transition means for transitioning to 2 specific game state (high probability low support state H6),
In the second specific game state, when the specific condition is satisfied at the time of the determination by the determination means for the first special information (in the left-handed mode H6b, at the time of the winning lottery for special 1 a third transition means for transitioning to a second predetermined game state (low-probability low support state H1) that is less advantageous for the player than the second specific game state (when a falling lottery is won);
with
A gaming machine, wherein the first predetermined game state is a game state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode.

According to this feature, even if the same specific condition is established, the function differs depending on whether it is established in the first specific game state or in the second specific game state. Specifically, when a specific condition is established in the first specific game state, the game state is shifted so as to increase the advantage for the player, while in the second specific game state, the When a specific condition is satisfied in the judgment by the judgment means for the special information 1, the game state is shifted so as to reduce the advantage for the player. That is, according to this feature, the establishment of the specific condition triggers a transition to a game state in which the advantage for the player increases, and also triggers a transition to a game state in which the advantage for the player decreases. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the game machine, and to facilitate diversification of game characteristics.

According to this feature, when the specific condition is established in the first specific game state, the game state is shifted so as to increase the advantage for the player. In the 1 specific game state, it is possible to expect that a specific condition is established. On the other hand, in the second specific game state, if the specific condition is satisfied when the determination means determines the first special information, the game state is shifted so as to reduce the advantage for the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel that he/she does not want the specific condition to be established in the second specific game state. That is, it is possible to make the player feel opposite emotions according to the type of game state at the timing when the specific condition is established, so that the game can be enhanced.

Furthermore, according to this feature, in the first predetermined game state, the determination mode is the first determination mode, but since it is more advantageous for the player than in the first specific game state, It can add surprise.

<Feature uS group>
The feature uS group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, mainly from the tenth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature uS1]
A first ball entry means (first starting port 33) that allows a game ball to enter,
A second ball entry means (second starting port 34) that allows a game ball to enter,
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (the value of a winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means;
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and the first special information acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entering means Acquisition information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, respectively;
means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot), wherein the determination of the second special information is performed with priority over the determination of the first special information, and the determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination is the first determination mode (low probability mode) and the first determination mode a second determination mode (high-probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high;
When one game round is defined as the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended, a game round execution means (main control unit) for executing the game round The MPU 62 on the board 61 side, and the game round control processing of FIG. 461 executed by it),
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is divided into a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entering means, and a state that a game ball enters the second ball entering means. state transition means for transitioning between a second state that is a state that enables or facilitates the sphere;
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein the control mode in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means is a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode. a control means having at least a second control mode (high-frequency support mode) in which the entry of game balls to the second ball entry means is easier than
a game state transition means for transitioning a game state specified by the determination mode and the control mode;
A gaming machine comprising
The game state transition means is
In the first specific game state (high probability high support state H4), when the specific condition is satisfied (when winning in the falling lottery), the control mode is set for a predetermined period (period until winning the next jackpot), A first transition means for shifting to a first predetermined game state (low probability high support state H5) which is a game state maintained in the 2 control mode and is more advantageous for the player than the first specific game state. ,
In the first specific game state, when the second predetermined condition is satisfied without the specific condition being satisfied (without winning the falling lottery) (when the game round of the number of times of time-saving continuation is executed), the second Second transition means for transitioning to 2 specific game state (high probability low support state H6),
In the second specific game state, when the specific condition is satisfied at the time of the determination by the determination means for the first special information (in the left-handed mode H6b, at the time of the winning lottery for special 1 a third transition means for transitioning to a second predetermined game state (low probability low support state H1) that is less advantageous for the player than the second specific game state (when a fall lottery is won);
with
A game machine, wherein the second predetermined game state is a game state in which the control mode is the first control mode.

According to this feature, even if the same specific condition is established, the function differs depending on whether it is established in the first specific game state or in the second specific game state. Specifically, when a specific condition is established in the first specific game state, the game state is shifted so as to increase the advantage for the player, while in the second specific game state, the When a specific condition is satisfied in the judgment by the judgment means for the special information 1, the game state is shifted so as to reduce the advantage for the player. That is, according to this feature, the establishment of the specific condition triggers a transition to a game state in which the advantage for the player increases, and also triggers a transition to a game state in which the advantage for the player decreases. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the game machine, and to facilitate diversification of game characteristics.

According to this feature, when the specific condition is established in the first specific game state, the game state is shifted so as to increase the advantage for the player. In the 1 specific game state, it is possible to expect that a specific condition is established. On the other hand, in the second specific game state, if the specific condition is satisfied when the determination means determines the first special information, the game state is shifted so as to reduce the advantage for the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel that he/she does not want the specific condition to be established in the second specific game state. That is, it is possible to make the player feel opposite emotions according to the type of game state at the timing when the specific condition is established, so that the game can be enhanced.

Furthermore, according to this feature, since the control mode is the first control mode in the second predetermined game state, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entering means, which is advantageous for the player. low sex. Therefore, according to this feature, in the second specific game state, whether or not the specific condition that triggers the transition to the second predetermined game state is established in the determination by the determination means for the first special information. Such a sense of urgency can be imparted to the player.

<Characteristic uT group>
The feature uT group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature uT1]
A first ball entry means (first starting port 33) that allows a game ball to enter,
A second ball entry means (second starting port 34) that allows a game ball to enter,
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (the value of a winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means;
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and the first special information acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entering means Acquisition information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, respectively;
means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot), wherein the determination of the second special information is performed with priority over the determination of the first special information, and the determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination is the first determination mode (low probability mode) and the first determination mode a second determination mode (high-probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high;
When one game round is defined as the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended, a game round execution means (main control unit) for executing the game round The MPU 62 on the board 61 side, and the game round control processing of FIG. 461 executed by it),
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is divided into a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entering means, and a state that a game ball enters the second ball entering means. state transition means for transitioning between a second state that is a state that enables or facilitates the sphere;
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein the control mode in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means is a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode. a control means having at least a second control mode (high-frequency support mode) in which the entry of game balls to the second ball entry means is easier than
a game state transition means for transitioning a game state specified by the determination mode and the control mode;
A gaming machine comprising
The game state transition means is
In the first specific game state (high probability high support state H4), when the specific condition is satisfied (when winning in the falling lottery), the control mode is set for a predetermined period (period until winning the next jackpot), A first transition means for shifting to a first predetermined game state (low probability high support state H5) which is a game state maintained in the 2 control mode and is more advantageous for the player than the first specific game state. ,
In the first specific game state, when the second predetermined condition is satisfied without the specific condition being satisfied (without winning the falling lottery) (when the game round of the number of times of time-saving continuation is executed), the second Second transition means for transitioning to 2 specific game state (high probability low support state H6),
In the second specific game state, when the specific condition is satisfied at the time of the determination by the determination means for the first special information (in the left-handed mode H6b, at the time of the winning lottery for special 1 a third transition means for transitioning to a second predetermined game state (low probability low support state H1) that is less advantageous for the player than the second specific game state (when a fall lottery is won);
with
A gaming machine, wherein the second predetermined game state is a game state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode.

According to this feature, even if the same specific condition is established, the function differs depending on whether it is established in the first specific game state or in the second specific game state. Specifically, when a specific condition is established in the first specific game state, the game state is shifted to increase the advantage for the player, while in the second specific game state, the When a specific condition is established in the judgment by the judgment means for the special information 1, the game state is shifted so as to reduce the advantage for the player. That is, according to this feature, the establishment of the specific condition triggers a transition to a game state in which the advantage for the player increases, and also triggers a transition to a game state in which the advantage for the player decreases. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the game machine, and to facilitate the diversification of game playability.

According to this feature, when the specific condition is established in the first specific game state, the game state is shifted so as to increase the advantage for the player. In the 1 specific game state, it is possible to expect that a specific condition is established. On the other hand, in the second specific game state, if the specific condition is satisfied when the determination means determines the first special information, the game state is shifted so as to reduce the advantage for the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel that he/she does not want the specific condition to be established in the second specific game state. That is, it is possible to make the player feel opposite emotions according to the type of game state at the timing when the specific condition is established, so that the game can be enhanced.

Furthermore, according to this feature, since the determination mode is the first determination mode in the second predetermined game state, the advantage for the player is low. Therefore, according to this feature, in the second specific game state, whether or not the specific condition that triggers the transition to the second predetermined game state is established in the determination by the determination means for the first special information. Such a sense of urgency can be further imparted to the player.

<Characteristic uU group>
The feature uU group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature uU1]
A first ball entry means (first starting port 33) that allows a game ball to enter,
A second ball entry means (second starting port 34) that allows a game ball to enter,
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (the value of a winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means;
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and the first special information acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entering means Acquisition information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, respectively;
means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot), wherein the determination of the second special information is performed with priority over the determination of the first special information, and the determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination is the first determination mode (low probability mode) and the first determination mode a second determination mode (high-probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high;
When one game round is defined as the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended, a game round execution means (main control unit) for executing the game round The MPU 62 on the board 61 side, and the game round control processing of FIG. 461 executed by it),
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is divided into a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entering means, and a state that a game ball enters the second ball entering means. state transition means for transitioning between a second state that is a state that enables or facilitates the sphere;
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein the control mode in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means is a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode. a control means having at least a second control mode (high-frequency support mode) in which the entry of game balls to the second ball entry means is easier than
a game state transition means for transitioning a game state specified by the determination mode and the control mode;
A gaming machine comprising
The game state transition means is
In the first specific game state (high probability high support state H4), when the specific condition is satisfied (when winning in the falling lottery), the control mode is set for a predetermined period (period until winning the next jackpot), A first transition means for shifting to a first predetermined game state (low probability high support state H5) which is a game state maintained in the 2 control mode and is more advantageous for the player than the first specific game state. ,
In the first specific game state, when the second predetermined condition is satisfied without the specific condition being satisfied (without winning the falling lottery) (when the game round of the number of times of time-saving continuation is executed), the second Second transition means for transitioning to 2 specific game state (high probability low support state H6),
In the second specific game state, when the specific condition is satisfied at the time of the determination by the determination means for the first special information (in the left-handed mode H6b, at the time of the winning lottery for special 1 a third transition means for transitioning to a second predetermined game state (low probability low support state H1) that is less advantageous for the player than the second specific game state (when a fall lottery is won);
with
A gaming machine, wherein the second specific game state is a game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode.

According to this feature, even if the same specific condition is established, the function differs depending on whether it is established in the first specific game state or in the second specific game state. Specifically, when a specific condition is established in the first specific game state, the game state is shifted to increase the advantage for the player, while in the second specific game state, the When a specific condition is established in the judgment by the judgment means for the special information 1, the game state is shifted so as to reduce the advantage for the player. That is, according to this feature, the establishment of the specific condition triggers a transition to a game state in which the advantage for the player increases, and also triggers a transition to a game state in which the advantage for the player decreases. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the game machine, and to facilitate diversification of game characteristics.

According to this feature, when the specific condition is established in the first specific game state, the game state is shifted so as to increase the advantage for the player. In the 1 specific game state, it is possible to expect that a specific condition is established. On the other hand, in the second specific game state, if the specific condition is satisfied when the determination means determines the first special information, the game state is shifted so as to reduce the advantage for the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel that he/she does not want the specific condition to be established in the second specific game state. That is, it is possible to make the player feel opposite emotions according to the type of game state at the timing when the specific condition is established, so that the game can be enhanced.

Furthermore, according to this feature, in the second specific game state, the determination mode is the second determination mode, which is highly advantageous for the player. For this reason, according to this feature, since it is not desirable for the player to shift the game state from the second specific game state, which is highly advantageous, in the second specific game state, the determination means for the first special information It is possible to impart a sense of urgency to the player as to whether or not a specific condition will be established at the time of determination.

<Feature uIA group>
The feature uIA group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature uIA1]
A first ball entry means (first starting port 33) that allows a game ball to enter,
A second ball entry means (second starting port 34) that allows a game ball to enter,
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (the value of a winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means;
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and the first special information acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entering means Acquisition information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, respectively;
means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot), wherein the determination of the second special information is performed with priority over the determination of the first special information, and the determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination is the first determination mode (low probability mode) and the first determination mode a second determination mode (high-probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high;
When one game round is defined as the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended, a game round execution means (main control unit) for executing the game round The MPU 62 on the board 61 side, and the game round control processing of FIG. 461 executed by it),
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is divided into a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entering means, and a state that a game ball enters the second ball entering means. state transition means for transitioning between a second state that is a state that enables or facilitates the sphere;
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein the control mode in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means is a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode. a control means having at least a second control mode (high-frequency support mode) in which the entry of game balls to the second ball entry means is easier than
In a gaming machine comprising
In a specific game state (high-precision high support state) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, a predetermined condition (game round after transition to the specific game state The number of times of execution reaches the number of times of time saving continuation) is established, control mode transition means for shifting the control mode from the second control mode to the first control mode;
The determination by the determination means about the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is the first predetermined game state (high If the specific condition (winning in the falling lottery) is established before the end in the probability low support state), the specific probability is transferred again to the specific game state (100% probability to the specific game state again a first re-transition means;
After the determination by the determination means about the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state, the specific condition (winning in a falling lottery ) is established, the specific game state is shifted again with a probability lower than the specific probability (a jackpot is won in a low-probability low support state and the probability of being distributed to a probability-variable jackpot is transferred again to a high-probability high-support state a) second re-transition means;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to this feature, the determination mode is the second determination mode, and in the specific game state in which the control mode is the second control mode, when a predetermined condition is established, the control mode changes from the second control mode to the first Switch to control mode. Then, until the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specified game state is completed in the first predetermined game state after the shift to the first control mode, the specified When the condition is established, it is shifted again to the specific game state with a specific probability. On the other hand, after the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state, when the specific condition is established, the specific probability It is shifted again to the specific game state with a lower probability than. For this reason, according to this feature, in the first predetermined game state shifted from the specific game state, for the player, by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state It is possible to expect that a specific condition is satisfied before the determination ends in the first predetermined game state. That is, according to this feature, in the first predetermined game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the player is determined by the second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high. It is possible to expect that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition. By the time it ends, it can be made to expect that a specific condition is satisfied.

Further, according to this feature, after the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state, when the specific condition is established, Since the transition to the specific game state is made again with a probability lower than the specific probability, in the first predetermined game state, the special information does not satisfy the first predetermined condition by the determination means, and the specific condition is satisfied. However, the player has a sense of urgency that the determination by the determination means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state may end in the first predetermined game state. can let In this way, according to this feature, by imparting emotions such as a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency to the player, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

[Feature uIA2]
A gaming machine according to feature uIA1,
A gaming machine, wherein the specific probability is a probability of 100%.

According to this feature, in the first predetermined game state, until the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state ends in the first predetermined game state, the specified When the conditions are established, the state is shifted again to the specific game state with a probability of 100%. In other words, when the specific condition is established, it is guaranteed that the game state will shift again to the specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a greater sense of expectation.

[Feature uIA3]
A gaming machine according to feature uIA1 or feature uIA2,
The gaming machine, wherein the predetermined condition is that the number of game rounds executed after the transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number.

According to this feature, in the specific game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, the number of times the game is executed after shifting to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number of times. , the control mode is maintained in the second control mode. In the state where the control mode is the second control mode, it is easier for the game ball to enter the second ball-entering means than in the state where the control mode is the first control mode, and it is difficult for the player to reduce the number of balls he has. , the determination by the determining means regarding the second special information acquired with the entry of the game ball into the second ball entering means as a trigger can be executed at a high frequency. Therefore, during the period until the number of executions of game rounds in the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined number, the second special information acquired with the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means as the first It is possible to make the player expect more that the predetermined condition is satisfied.

[Feature uIA4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features uIA1 to uIA3,
Means capable of displaying a first image (first specific background image corresponding to the chance zone in modified example 12) as a background image in the specific game state (high probability high support state H4);
After the transition from the specific game state to the first predetermined game state (high probability low support state H6), the period until the determination by the determination means for the second special information is completed (special 2 remaining Means capable of displaying a second image different from the first image (a third specific background image corresponding to the final chance zone in modification 12) as a background image during pending digestion H6a);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to this feature, the background image displayed in the specific game state, and after the transition from the specific game state to the first predetermined game state until the determination by the determination means for the second special information is completed It will be different from the background image displayed in the period. Therefore, it is possible for the player to clearly distinguish and recognize the two states, and to pay attention to the change in the state of the game.

[Feature uIA5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features uIA1 to uIA4,
When the specific condition is established in the specific game state (high-probability high support state H4) (when the fall is won in the fall lottery), a production that suggests that an advantageous event has occurred A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for executing a mode entry effect).

In a normal game machine, it is not preferable for a player to satisfy a specific condition (to win a drop in a drop lottery). However, in the gaming machine with this characteristic, unlike the ordinary gaming machine, it is preferable for the player that the specific condition is satisfied in the above situation.

According to this feature, when a specific condition is established in a specific game state, an effect suggesting that an advantageous event has occurred is executed, so that the player can clearly see that an advantageous event has occurred. can be recognized.

[Feature uIA6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features uIA1 to uIA5,
After the predetermined condition is established and the state is shifted to the first predetermined game state, the determination by the determination means regarding the second special information ends in the first predetermined game state (high-probability low support state H6). Means for executing an effect suggesting that an advantageous event has occurred (advantageous event occurrence alternative effect in Modification 12) when the above-mentioned specific condition is satisfied (when a fall is won in a drop lottery) before A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In a normal game machine, it is not preferable for a player to satisfy a specific condition (to win a drop in a drop lottery). However, in the gaming machine with this characteristic, unlike the ordinary gaming machine, it is preferable for the player that the specific condition is established in the above situation.

According to this feature, after the predetermined condition is satisfied and the transition is made to the first predetermined game state, the specific condition is satisfied before the determination by the determination means for the second special information is completed in the first predetermined game state. In this case, since an effect suggesting that an advantageous event has occurred is executed, it is possible to make the player clearly recognize that an advantageous event has occurred.

[Feature uIA7]
A gaming machine according to any one of features uIA1 to uIA6,
The game cycle is composed of a variable display period during which predetermined symbols are variably displayed and a stop display period during which the predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed in a display mode corresponding to the result of the determination,
The control mode shifting means shifts the control mode from the second control mode to the first control mode (time t5 in FIG. 489) at the start of the variable display period in the game cycle in which the predetermined condition is satisfied. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to this feature, the control mode is shifted from the second control mode to the first control mode at the start of the variable display period in the game round in which the predetermined condition is satisfied. It is possible to prevent the auxiliary means from transitioning to the second state during execution of the game round and the game ball entering the second ball entering means. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the failure of the game performance of the gaming machine due to the game ball entering the second ball entering means during the execution of the game round following the game round in which the predetermined condition is established. becomes.

[Feature uIA8]
A gaming machine according to any one of features uIA1 to uIA7,
The game cycle is composed of a variable display period during which predetermined symbols are variably displayed and a stop display period during which the predetermined symbols are stop-displayed in a display mode corresponding to the result of the determination,
The control mode shifting means shifts the control mode from the second control mode to the first control mode (time t9 in FIG. 490) at the end of the variable display period in the game cycle in which the predetermined condition is satisfied. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to this feature, since the control mode is shifted from the second control mode to the first control mode at the end of the variable display period in the game round in which the predetermined condition is satisfied, the game is stopped in the game round in which the predetermined condition is satisfied. By setting the display period to a predetermined length or more, the auxiliary means transitions to the second state during the execution of the game round following the game round in which the predetermined condition is established, and the game ball enters the second state. It is possible to avoid entering the ball into the ball means. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the failure of the game performance of the gaming machine due to the game ball entering the second ball entering means during the execution of the game round following the game round in which the predetermined condition is satisfied. becomes.

[Feature uIA9]
A gaming machine according to any one of features uIA1 to uIA8,
The game cycle is composed of a variable display period during which predetermined symbols are variably displayed and a stop display period during which the predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed in a display mode corresponding to the result of the determination,
The control mode shifting means shifts the control mode from the second control mode to the first control mode (time t12 in FIG. 491) when the stop display period elapses in the game cycle in which the predetermined condition is satisfied. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to this feature, the control mode is shifted from the second control mode to the first control mode when the stop display period elapses in the game round in which the predetermined condition is established. It is possible to shift the auxiliary means to the second state during execution of the game round to allow the game ball to enter the second ball entering means. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a new game feature of allowing the game ball to enter the second ball-entering means during the execution of the game round following the game round in which the predetermined condition has been established.

[Feature uIA10]
A gaming machine according to any one of features uIA1 to uIA9,
A game characterized by comprising means for executing an effect (through passage promoting effect in modification 15) for prompting a player to pass a game ball through a predetermined ball entry area (through gate 35) in a predetermined situation. machine.

According to this feature, in a predetermined situation, an effect is executed to prompt the player to let the game ball pass through the predetermined ball entry area. It is possible to make the player recognize how to play the game in line with the game property.

[Feature uIA11]
A gaming machine according to any one of features uIA1 to uIA10,
In a predetermined situation, when a game ball passes through a predetermined ball entry area (through gate 35), an effect (advantageous state start effect in modification 15) suggesting that a state advantageous to the player is started is provided. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a means for executing.

According to this feature, when a game ball passes through a predetermined ball entry area in a predetermined situation, an effect is executed that suggests that a state advantageous to the player will start. It is possible to make the player recognize that a state advantageous to the player, which is different from that of a normal game machine, is started when the ball passes through the predetermined ball entry area.

[Feature uIA12]
A gaming machine according to any one of features uIA1 to uIA11,
In the first predetermined game state (high-probability-low support state H6), when the state of the auxiliary means transitions to the second state, the game is to enter a game ball into the second ball-entering means. A game machine characterized by comprising means for executing an effect to prompt a player (Special 2 ball entry promotion effect in Modification 15).

According to this feature, when the state of the auxiliary means transitions to the second state in the first predetermined game state, an effect is executed to prompt the player to enter the game ball into the second ball entering means. Therefore, it is possible for the player to recognize how to play the game according to the new game characteristics of this gaming machine which are different from those of ordinary gaming machines.

[Feature uIA13]
A gaming machine according to any one of features uIA1 to uIA12,
When the number of stored second special information reaches a predetermined number (four pieces) in the first predetermined gaming state (high probability low support state H6), the number of stored second special information is the predetermined number A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for displaying information (advantage determination effect in Modification 15) corresponding to the fact that the game has become.

According to this feature, when the number of stored second special information reaches the predetermined number in the first predetermined game state, information corresponding to the fact that the number of stored second special information reaches the predetermined number is displayed. Therefore, it is possible for the player to recognize that the fact that the number of the second special information stored reaches the predetermined number in the first predetermined game state has a special meaning, unlike an ordinary game machine. becomes.

[Feature uIA14]
A gaming machine according to any one of features uIA1 to uIA13,
A game machine characterized by not comprising means for holding and storing a predetermined lottery (normal drawing lottery) that triggers the transition of the auxiliary means from the first state to the second state.

According to this feature, since there is no means for holding and storing the predetermined lottery (normal drawing lottery) that triggers the transition of the auxiliary means from the first state to the second state, the reserved predetermined lottery It is possible to avoid automatic execution at a timing unintended by the player. Therefore, by adjusting the timing of entering the game ball into the ball entering means that triggers the transition of the state of the auxiliary means, a new game feature of adjusting the timing of the transition of the auxiliary means to the second state can be realized. can be provided to

[Feature uIA15]
A gaming machine according to any one of features uIA1 to uIA14,
When the specific condition is satisfied in the specific game state (high probability high support state H4) (when the fall is won in the fall lottery), the second predetermined game state ( A means for shifting to a low-probability support state H5);
A predetermined ball entrance (high-probability transition winning opening 34e in modification 18) in which the game ball can be entered in the second predetermined game state;
Means for shifting the determination mode to the second determination mode triggered by the entry of a game ball into the predetermined ball entrance;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to this feature, when the specific condition is established in the specific game state (when the fall is elected in the fall lottery), the second predetermined game state (low probability high support state H5 ), but if the game ball can be entered into the predetermined ball entrance in the second predetermined game state, the determination mode will shift again to the second determination mode. Here, in the case of adopting a configuration in which the second control mode continues until the next jackpot election when the time reduction grant is won in the second predetermined game state, the time reduction grant is elected in the second predetermined game state, and the predetermined If the game ball can be entered into the ball entrance, the second control mode continues until the next jackpot winning, and a game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode is entered. This game state is very advantageous for the player. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to provide the player with a new game in which the game ball is entered into the predetermined ball entrance in the second predetermined game state, and the game state is shifted to an even more advantageous game state.

<Feature uIB group>
The feature uIB group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its twelfth modification.

[Feature uIB1]
A first ball entry means (first starting port 33) that allows a game ball to enter,
A second ball entry means (second starting port 34) that allows a game ball to enter,
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (the value of a winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means;
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and the first special information acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entering means Acquisition information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, respectively;
means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot), wherein the determination of the second special information is performed with priority over the determination of the first special information, and the determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination is the first determination mode (low probability mode) and the first determination mode a second determination mode (high-probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high;
When one game round is defined as the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended, a game round execution means (main control unit) for executing the game round The MPU 62 on the board 61 side, and the game round control processing of FIG. 461 executed by it),
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is divided into a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entering means, and a state that a game ball enters the second ball entering means. state transition means for transitioning between a second state that is a state that enables or facilitates the sphere;
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein the control mode in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means is a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode. a control means having at least a second control mode (high-frequency support mode) in which the entry of game balls to the second ball entry means is easier than
In a gaming machine comprising
In a specific game state (high-precision high support state) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, a predetermined condition (game round after transition to the specific game state The number of times of execution reaches the number of times of time saving continuation) is established, control mode transition means for shifting the control mode from the second control mode to the first control mode;
The determination by the determination means about the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is the first predetermined game state (high If the specific condition (winning in the falling lottery) is established before the end in the probability low support state), the specific probability is transferred again to the specific game state (100% probability to the specific game state again a first re-transition means;
After the determination by the determination means about the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state, the specific condition (winning in a falling lottery ) is established, the specific game state is shifted again with a probability lower than the specific probability (a jackpot is won in a low-probability low support state and the probability of being distributed to a probability-variable jackpot is transferred again to a high-probability high-support state a) second re-transition means;
and furthermore,
Means capable of displaying a first image (first specific background image corresponding to the chance zone in modified example 12) as a background image in the specific game state (high probability high support state H4);
After the transition from the specific game state to the first predetermined game state (high probability low support state H6), the period until the determination by the determination means for the second special information is completed (special 2 remaining Means capable of displaying a second image different from the first image (a third specific background image corresponding to the final chance zone in modification 12) as a background image during pending digestion H6a);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to this feature, the determination mode is the second determination mode, and in the specific game state in which the control mode is the second control mode, when a predetermined condition is established, the control mode changes from the second control mode to the first Switch to control mode. Then, until the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specified game state is completed in the first predetermined game state after the shift to the first control mode, the specified When the condition is established, it is shifted again to the specific game state with a specific probability. On the other hand, after the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state, when the specific condition is established, the specific probability It is shifted again to the specific game state with a lower probability than. For this reason, according to this feature, in the first predetermined game state shifted from the specific game state, for the player, by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state It is possible to expect that a specific condition is satisfied before the determination ends in the first predetermined game state. That is, according to this feature, in the first predetermined game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the player is determined by the second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high. It is possible to expect that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition. By the time it ends, it can be made to expect that a specific condition is satisfied.

Further, according to this feature, after the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state, when the specific condition is established, Since the transition to the specific game state is made again with a probability lower than the specific probability, in the first predetermined game state, the special information does not satisfy the first predetermined condition by the determination means, and the specific condition is satisfied. However, the player has a sense of urgency that the determination by the determination means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state may end in the first predetermined game state. can let In this way, according to this feature, by imparting emotions such as a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency to the player, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Further, according to this feature, the background image displayed in the specific game state and the second special information after the transition from the specific game state to the first predetermined game state are completed by the determination means. The background image displayed during the period up to is different. Therefore, it is possible for the player to clearly distinguish and recognize the two states, and to pay attention to the change in the state of the game.

<Characteristic uIC group>
The feature uIC group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its twelfth modification.

[Feature uIC1]
A first ball entry means (first starting port 33) that allows a game ball to enter,
A second ball entry means (second starting port 34) that allows a game ball to enter,
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (the value of a winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means;
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and the first special information acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entering means Acquisition information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, respectively;
means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot), wherein the determination of the second special information is performed with priority over the determination of the first special information, and the determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination is the first determination mode (low probability mode) and the first determination mode a second determination mode (high-probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high;
When one game round is defined as the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended, a game round execution means (main control unit) for executing the game round The MPU 62 on the board 61 side, and the game round control processing of FIG. 461 executed by it),
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is divided into a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entering means, and a state that a game ball enters the second ball entering means. state transition means for transitioning between a second state that is a state that enables or facilitates the sphere;
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein the control mode in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means is a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode. a control means having at least a second control mode (high-frequency support mode) in which the entry of game balls to the second ball entry means is easier than
In a gaming machine comprising
In a specific game state (high-precision high support state) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, a predetermined condition (game round after transition to the specific game state The number of times of execution reaches the number of times of time saving continuation) is established, control mode transition means for shifting the control mode from the second control mode to the first control mode;
The determination by the determination means about the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is the first predetermined game state (high If the specific condition (winning in the falling lottery) is established before the end in the probability low support state), the specific probability is transferred again to the specific game state (100% probability to the specific game state again a first re-transition means;
After the determination by the determination means about the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state, the specific condition (winning in a falling lottery ) is established, the specific game state is shifted again with a probability lower than the specific probability (a jackpot is won in a low-probability low support state and the probability of being distributed to a probability-variable jackpot is transferred again to a high-probability high-support state a) second re-transition means;
and furthermore,
When the specific condition is established in the specific game state (high-probability high support state H4) (when the fall is won in the fall lottery), a production that suggests that an advantageous event has occurred A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for executing a mode entry effect).

According to this feature, the determination mode is the second determination mode, and in the specific game state in which the control mode is the second control mode, when a predetermined condition is established, the control mode changes from the second control mode to the first Switch to control mode. Then, until the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specified game state is completed in the first predetermined game state after the shift to the first control mode, the specified When the condition is established, it is shifted again to the specific game state with a specific probability. On the other hand, after the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state, when the specific condition is established, the specific probability It is shifted again to the specific game state with a lower probability than. For this reason, according to this feature, in the first predetermined game state shifted from the specific game state, for the player, by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state It is possible to expect that a specific condition is satisfied before the determination ends in the first predetermined game state. That is, according to this feature, in the first predetermined game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the player is determined by the second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high. It is possible to expect that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition. By the time it ends, it can be made to expect that a specific condition is satisfied.

Further, according to this feature, after the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state, when the specific condition is established, Since the transition to the specific game state is made again with a probability lower than the specific probability, in the first predetermined game state, the special information does not satisfy the first predetermined condition by the determination means, and the specific condition is satisfied. However, the player has a sense of urgency that the determination by the determination means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state may end in the first predetermined game state. can let In this way, according to this feature, by imparting emotions such as a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency to the player, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Further, in a normal game machine, it is not preferable for the player to satisfy a specific condition (to win a drop in a drop lottery). However, in the gaming machine with this characteristic, unlike the ordinary gaming machine, it is preferable for the player that the specific condition is established in the above situation.

According to this feature, when a specific condition is established in a specific game state, an effect suggesting that an advantageous event has occurred is executed, so that the player can clearly see that an advantageous event has occurred. can be recognized.

<Feature uID group>
The feature uID group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its twelfth modification.

[Feature uID1]
A first ball entry means (first starting port 33) that allows a game ball to enter,
A second ball entry means (second starting port 34) that allows a game ball to enter,
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (the value of a winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means;
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and the first special information acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entering means Acquisition information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, respectively;
means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot), wherein the determination of the second special information is performed with priority over the determination of the first special information, and the determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination is the first determination mode (low probability mode) and the first determination mode a second determination mode (high-probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high;
When one game round is defined as the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended, a game round execution means (main control unit) for executing the game round MPU 62 on the board 61 side, and the game turn control process of FIG. 461 executed by it),
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is divided into a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entering means, and a state that a game ball enters the second ball entering means. state transition means for transitioning between a second state that is a state that enables or facilitates the sphere;
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein the control mode in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means is a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode. a control means having at least a second control mode (high-frequency support mode) in which the entry of game balls to the second ball entry means is easier than
In a gaming machine comprising
In a specific game state (high-precision high support state) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, a predetermined condition (game round after transition to the specific game state The number of times of execution reaches the number of times of time saving continuation) is established, control mode transition means for shifting the control mode from the second control mode to the first control mode;
The determination by the determination means about the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is the first predetermined game state (high If the specific condition (winning in the falling lottery) is established before the end in the probability low support state), the specific probability is transferred again to the specific game state (100% probability to the specific game state again a first re-transition means;
After the determination by the determination means about the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state, the specific condition (winning in a falling lottery ) is established, the specific game state is shifted again with a probability lower than the specific probability (a jackpot is won in a low-probability low support state and the probability of being distributed to a probability-variable jackpot is transferred again to a high-probability high-support state a) second re-transition means;
and furthermore,
After the predetermined condition is satisfied and the transition is made to the first predetermined game state, the determination of the second special information by the determination means ends in the first predetermined game state (high probability low support state H6). Means for executing an effect suggesting that an advantageous event has occurred (advantageous event occurrence alternative effect in Modification 12) when the above-mentioned specific condition is satisfied (when a fall is won in a drop lottery) before A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to this feature, the determination mode is the second determination mode, and in the specific game state in which the control mode is the second control mode, when a predetermined condition is established, the control mode changes from the second control mode to the first Switch to control mode. Then, until the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specified game state is completed in the first predetermined game state after the shift to the first control mode, the specified When the condition is established, it is shifted again to the specific game state with a specific probability. On the other hand, after the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state, when the specific condition is established, the specific probability It is shifted again to the specific game state with a probability lower than. For this reason, according to this feature, in the first predetermined game state shifted from the specific game state, for the player, by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state It is possible to make the player expect that the specific condition is satisfied before the determination ends in the first predetermined game state. That is, according to this feature, in the first predetermined game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the player is determined by the second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high. The special information can be expected to satisfy the first predetermined condition, and further, the judgment by the judgment means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is By the time it ends, it can be made to expect that a specific condition is satisfied.

Further, according to this feature, after the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state, when the specific condition is established, Since the transition to the specific game state is made again with a probability lower than the specific probability, in the first predetermined game state, the special information does not satisfy the first predetermined condition by the determination means, and the specific condition is satisfied. However, the player has a sense of urgency that the determination by the determination means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state may end in the first predetermined game state. can let In this way, according to this feature, by imparting emotions such as a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency to the player, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Further, in a normal game machine, it is not preferable for the player to satisfy a specific condition (to win a drop in a drop lottery). However, in the gaming machine with this characteristic, unlike the ordinary gaming machine, it is preferable for the player that the specific condition is established in the above situation.

According to this feature, after the predetermined condition is satisfied and the transition is made to the first predetermined game state, the specific condition is satisfied before the determination by the determination means for the second special information is completed in the first predetermined game state. In this case, since an effect suggesting that an advantageous event has occurred is executed, it is possible to make the player clearly recognize that an advantageous event has occurred.

<Feature uIE group>
The feature uIE group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its thirteenth modification.

[Feature uIE1]
A first ball entry means (first starting port 33) that allows a game ball to enter,
A second ball entry means (second starting port 34) that allows a game ball to enter,
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (the value of a winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means;
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and the first special information acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entering means Acquisition information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, respectively;
means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot), wherein the determination of the second special information is performed with priority over the determination of the first special information, and the determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination is the first determination mode (low probability mode) and the first determination mode a second determination mode (high-probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high;
When one game round is defined as the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended, a game round execution means (main control unit) for executing the game round MPU 62 on the board 61 side, and the game turn control process of FIG. 461 executed by it),
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is divided into a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entering means, and a state that a game ball enters the second ball entering means. state transition means for transitioning between a second state that is a state that enables or facilitates the sphere;
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein the control mode in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means is a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode. a control means having at least a second control mode (high-frequency support mode) in which the entry of game balls to the second ball entry means is easier than
In a gaming machine comprising
In a specific game state (high-precision high support state) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, a predetermined condition (game round after transition to the specific game state The number of times of execution reaches the number of times of time saving continuation) is established, control mode transition means for shifting the control mode from the second control mode to the first control mode;
The determination by the determination means about the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is the first predetermined game state (high If the specific condition (winning in the falling lottery) is established before the end in the probability low support state), the specific probability is transferred again to the specific game state (100% probability to the specific game state again a first re-transition means;
After the determination by the determination means about the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state, the specific condition (winning in a falling lottery ) is established, the specific game state is shifted again with a probability lower than the specific probability (a jackpot is won in a low-probability low support state and the probability of being distributed to a probability-variable jackpot is transferred again to a high-probability high-support state a) second re-transition means;
with
The game cycle is composed of a variable display period during which predetermined symbols are variably displayed and a stop display period during which the predetermined symbols are stop-displayed in a display mode corresponding to the result of the determination,
The control mode shifting means shifts the control mode from the second control mode to the first control mode (time t5 in FIG. 489) at the start of the variable display period in the game cycle in which the predetermined condition is satisfied. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to this feature, the determination mode is the second determination mode, and in the specific game state in which the control mode is the second control mode, when a predetermined condition is established, the control mode changes from the second control mode to the first Switch to control mode. Then, until the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specified game state is completed in the first predetermined game state after the shift to the first control mode, the specified When the condition is established, it is shifted again to the specific game state with a specific probability. On the other hand, after the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state, when the specific condition is established, the specific probability It is shifted again to the specific game state with a lower probability than. For this reason, according to this feature, in the first predetermined game state shifted from the specific game state, for the player, by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state It is possible to expect that a specific condition is satisfied before the determination ends in the first predetermined game state. That is, according to this feature, in the first predetermined game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the player is determined by the second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high. It is possible to expect that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition. By the time it ends, it can be made to expect that a specific condition is satisfied.

Further, according to this feature, after the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state, when the specific condition is established, Since the transition to the specific game state is made again with a probability lower than the specific probability, in the first predetermined game state, the special information does not satisfy the first predetermined condition by the determination means, and the specific condition is satisfied. However, the player has a sense of urgency that the determination by the determination means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state may end in the first predetermined game state. can let In this way, according to this feature, by imparting emotions such as a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency to the player, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Further, according to this feature, the control mode is shifted from the second control mode to the first control mode at the start of the variable display period in the game round in which the predetermined condition is established. It is possible to avoid that the auxiliary means transits to the second state during the execution of the next game round and the game ball enters the second ball entering means. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the failure of the game performance of the gaming machine due to the game ball entering the second ball entering means during the execution of the game round following the game round in which the predetermined condition is established. becomes.

<Feature uIF group>
The feature uIF group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its fourteenth modification.

[Feature uIF1]
A first ball entry means (first starting port 33) that allows a game ball to enter,
A second ball entry means (second starting port 34) that allows a game ball to enter,
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (the value of a winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means;
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and the first special information acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entering means Acquisition information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, respectively;
means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot), wherein the determination of the second special information is performed with priority over the determination of the first special information, and the determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination is the first determination mode (low probability mode) and the first determination mode a second determination mode (high-probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high;
When one game round is defined as the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended, a game round execution means (main control unit) for executing the game round The MPU 62 on the board 61 side, and the game round control processing of FIG. 461 executed by it),
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is divided into a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entering means, and a state that a game ball enters the second ball entering means. state transition means for transitioning between a second state that is a state that enables or facilitates the sphere;
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein the control mode in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means is a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode. a control means having at least a second control mode (high-frequency support mode) in which the entry of game balls to the second ball entry means is easier than
In a gaming machine comprising
In a specific game state (high-precision high support state) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, a predetermined condition (game round after transition to the specific game state The number of times of execution reaches the number of times of time saving continuation) is established, control mode transition means for shifting the control mode from the second control mode to the first control mode;
The determination by the determination means about the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is the first predetermined game state (high If the specific condition (winning in the falling lottery) is established before the end in the probability low support state), the specific probability is transferred again to the specific game state (100% probability to the specific game state again a first re-transition means;
After the determination by the determination means about the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state, the specific condition (winning in a falling lottery ) is established, the specific game state is shifted again with a probability lower than the specific probability (a jackpot is won in a low-probability low support state and the probability of being distributed to a probability-variable jackpot is transferred again to a high-probability high-support state a) second re-transition means;
with
The game cycle is composed of a variable display period during which predetermined symbols are variably displayed and a stop display period during which the predetermined symbols are stop-displayed in a display mode corresponding to the result of the determination,
The control mode shifting means shifts the control mode from the second control mode to the first control mode (time t9 in FIG. 490) at the end of the variable display period in the game cycle in which the predetermined condition is satisfied. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to this feature, the determination mode is the second determination mode, and in the specific game state in which the control mode is the second control mode, when a predetermined condition is established, the control mode changes from the second control mode to the first Switch to control mode. Then, until the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specified game state is completed in the first predetermined game state after the shift to the first control mode, the specified When the condition is established, it is shifted again to the specific game state with a specific probability. On the other hand, after the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state, when the specific condition is established, the specific probability It is shifted again to the specific game state with a probability lower than. For this reason, according to this feature, in the first predetermined game state shifted from the specific game state, for the player, by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state It is possible to make the player expect that the specific condition is satisfied before the determination ends in the first predetermined game state. That is, according to this feature, in the first predetermined game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the player is determined by the second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high. It is possible to expect that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition. By the time it ends, it can be made to expect that a specific condition is satisfied.

Further, according to this feature, after the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state, when the specific condition is established, Since the transition to the specific game state is made again with a probability lower than the specific probability, in the first predetermined game state, the special information does not satisfy the first predetermined condition by the determination means, and the specific condition is satisfied. However, the player has a sense of urgency that the determination by the determination means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state may end in the first predetermined game state. can let In this way, according to this feature, by imparting emotions such as a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency to the player, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Further, according to this feature, the control mode is shifted from the second control mode to the first control mode at the end of the variable display period in the game round in which the predetermined condition is established. By setting the stop display period in the above to a predetermined length or more, the auxiliary means transitions to the second state during the execution of the game round following the game round in which the predetermined condition is established, and the game ball moves to the second state. It is possible to avoid entering the ball into the ball entering means. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the failure of the game performance of the gaming machine due to the game ball entering the second ball entering means during the execution of the game round following the game round in which the predetermined condition is satisfied. becomes.

<Feature uIG group>
The feature uIG group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its fifteenth modification.

[Feature uIG1]
A first ball entry means (first starting port 33) that allows a game ball to enter,
A second ball entry means (second starting port 34) that allows a game ball to enter,
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (the value of a winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means;
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and the first special information acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entering means Acquisition information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, respectively;
means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot), wherein the determination of the second special information is performed with priority over the determination of the first special information, and the determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination is the first determination mode (low probability mode) and the first determination mode a second determination mode (high-probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high;
When one game round is defined as the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended, a game round execution means (main control unit) for executing the game round The MPU 62 on the board 61 side, and the game round control processing of FIG. 461 executed by it),
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is divided into a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entering means, and a state that a game ball enters the second ball entering means. state transition means for transitioning between a second state that is a state that enables or facilitates the sphere;
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein the control mode in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means is a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode. a control means having at least a second control mode (high-frequency support mode) in which the entry of game balls to the second ball entry means is easier than
In a gaming machine comprising
In a specific game state (high-precision high support state) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, a predetermined condition (game round after transition to the specific game state The number of times of execution reaches the number of times of time saving continuation) is established, control mode transition means for shifting the control mode from the second control mode to the first control mode;
The determination by the determination means about the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is the first predetermined game state (high If the specific condition (winning in the falling lottery) is established before the end in the probability low support state), the specific probability is transferred again to the specific game state (100% probability to the specific game state again a first re-transition means;
After the determination by the determination means about the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state, the specific condition (winning in a falling lottery ) is established, the specific game state is shifted again with a probability lower than the specific probability (a jackpot is won in a low-probability low support state and the probability of being distributed to a probability-variable jackpot is transferred again to a high-probability high-support state a) second re-transition means;
with
The game cycle is composed of a variable display period during which predetermined symbols are variably displayed and a stop display period during which the predetermined symbols are stop-displayed in a display mode corresponding to the result of the determination,
The control mode shifting means shifts the control mode from the second control mode to the first control mode (time t12 in FIG. 491) when the stop display period elapses in the game cycle in which the predetermined condition is satisfied. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to this feature, the determination mode is the second determination mode, and in the specific game state in which the control mode is the second control mode, when a predetermined condition is established, the control mode changes from the second control mode to the first Switch to control mode. Then, until the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specified game state is completed in the first predetermined game state after the shift to the first control mode, the specified When the condition is established, it is shifted again to the specific game state with a specific probability. On the other hand, after the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state, when the specific condition is established, the specific probability It is shifted again to the specific game state with a lower probability than. For this reason, according to this feature, in the first predetermined game state shifted from the specific game state, for the player, by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state It is possible to expect that a specific condition is satisfied before the determination ends in the first predetermined game state. That is, according to this feature, in the first predetermined game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the player is determined by the second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high. It is possible to expect that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition. By the time it ends, it can be made to expect that a specific condition is satisfied.

Further, according to this feature, after the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state, when the specific condition is established, Since the transition to the specific game state is made again with a probability lower than the specific probability, in the first predetermined game state, the special information does not satisfy the first predetermined condition by the determination means, and the specific condition is satisfied. However, the player has a sense of urgency that the determination by the determination means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state may end in the first predetermined game state. can let In this way, according to this feature, by imparting emotions such as a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency to the player, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Further, according to this feature, the control mode is shifted from the second control mode to the first control mode when the stop display period elapses in the game round in which the predetermined condition is satisfied. During execution of the next game turn, the auxiliary means can be shifted to the second state to allow the game ball to enter the second ball entering means. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a new game feature of allowing the game ball to enter the second ball-entering means during the execution of the game round following the game round in which the predetermined condition has been established.

<Characteristic uIH group>
The feature uIH group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its fifteenth modification.

[Feature uIH1]
A first ball entry means (first starting port 33) that allows a game ball to enter,
A second ball entry means (second starting port 34) that allows a game ball to enter,
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (the value of a winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means;
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and the first special information acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entering means Acquisition information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, respectively;
means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot), wherein the determination of the second special information is performed with priority over the determination of the first special information, and the determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination is the first determination mode (low probability mode) and the first determination mode a second determination mode (high-probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high;
When one game round is defined as the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended, a game round execution means (main control unit) for executing the game round The MPU 62 on the board 61 side, and the game round control processing of FIG. 461 executed by it),
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is divided into a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entering means, and a state that a game ball enters the second ball entering means. state transition means for transitioning between a second state that is a state that enables or facilitates the sphere;
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein the control mode in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means is a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode. a control means having at least a second control mode (high-frequency support mode) in which the entry of game balls to the second ball entry means is easier than
In a gaming machine comprising
In a specific game state (high-precision high support state) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, a predetermined condition (game round after transition to the specific game state The number of times of execution reaches the number of times of time saving continuation) is established, control mode transition means for shifting the control mode from the second control mode to the first control mode;
The determination by the determination means about the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is the first predetermined game state (high If the specific condition (winning in the falling lottery) is established before the end in the probability low support state), the specific probability is transferred again to the specific game state (100% probability to the specific game state again a first re-transition means;
After the determination by the determination means about the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state, the specific condition (winning in a falling lottery ) is established, the specific game state is shifted again with a probability lower than the specific probability (a jackpot is won in a low-probability low support state and the probability of being distributed to a probability-variable jackpot is transferred again to a high-probability high-support state a) second re-transition means;
and furthermore,
A game characterized by comprising means for executing an effect (through passage promoting effect in modification 15) for prompting a player to pass a game ball through a predetermined ball entry area (through gate 35) in a predetermined situation. machine.

According to this feature, the determination mode is the second determination mode, and in the specific game state in which the control mode is the second control mode, when a predetermined condition is established, the control mode changes from the second control mode to the first Switch to control mode. Then, until the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specified game state is completed in the first predetermined game state after the shift to the first control mode, the specified When the condition is established, it is shifted again to the specific game state with a specific probability. On the other hand, after the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state, when the specific condition is established, the specific probability It is shifted again to the specific game state with a lower probability than. For this reason, according to this feature, in the first predetermined game state shifted from the specific game state, for the player, by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state It is possible to expect that a specific condition is satisfied before the determination ends in the first predetermined game state. That is, according to this feature, in the first predetermined game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the player is determined by the second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high. It is possible to expect that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition. By the time it ends, it can be made to expect that a specific condition is satisfied.

Further, according to this feature, after the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state, when the specific condition is established, Since the transition to the specific game state is made again with a probability lower than the specific probability, in the first predetermined game state, the special information does not satisfy the first predetermined condition by the determination means, and the specific condition is satisfied. However, the player has a sense of urgency that the determination by the determination means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state may end in the first predetermined game state. can let In this way, according to this feature, by imparting emotions such as a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency to the player, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, according to this feature, in a predetermined situation, an effect is executed to prompt the player to pass the game ball through the predetermined ball entry area. It is possible to make the player recognize how to play along with the new game property.

<Feature uII group>
The feature uII group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its fifteenth modification.

[Feature uII1]
A first ball entry means (first starting port 33) that allows a game ball to enter,
A second ball entry means (second starting port 34) that allows a game ball to enter,
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (the value of a winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means;
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and the first special information acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entering means Acquisition information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, respectively;
means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot), wherein the determination of the second special information is performed with priority over the determination of the first special information, and the determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination is the first determination mode (low probability mode) and the first determination mode a second determination mode (high-probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high;
When one game round is defined as the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended, a game round execution means (main control unit) for executing the game round The MPU 62 on the board 61 side, and the game round control processing of FIG. 461 executed by it),
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is divided into a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entering means, and a state that a game ball enters the second ball entering means. state transition means for transitioning between a second state that is a state that enables or facilitates the sphere;
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein the control mode in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means is a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode. a control means having at least a second control mode (high-frequency support mode) in which the entry of game balls to the second ball entry means is easier than
In a gaming machine comprising
In a specific game state (high-precision high support state) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, a predetermined condition (game round after transition to the specific game state The number of times of execution reaches the number of times of time saving continuation) is established, control mode transition means for shifting the control mode from the second control mode to the first control mode;
The determination by the determination means about the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is the first predetermined game state (high If the specific condition (winning in the falling lottery) is established before the end in the probability low support state), the specific probability is transferred again to the specific game state (100% probability to the specific game state again a first re-transition means;
After the determination by the determination means about the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state, the specific condition (winning in a falling lottery ) is established, the specific game state is shifted again with a probability lower than the specific probability (a jackpot is won in a low-probability low support state and the probability of being distributed to a probability-variable jackpot is transferred again to a high-probability high-support state a) second re-transition means;
and furthermore,
In a predetermined situation, when a game ball passes through a predetermined ball entry area (through gate 35), an effect (advantageous state start effect in modification 15) suggesting that a state advantageous to the player is started is provided. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a means for executing.

According to this feature, the determination mode is the second determination mode, and in the specific game state in which the control mode is the second control mode, when a predetermined condition is established, the control mode changes from the second control mode to the first Switch to control mode. Then, until the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specified game state is completed in the first predetermined game state after the shift to the first control mode, the specified When the condition is established, it is shifted again to the specific game state with a specific probability. On the other hand, after the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state, when the specific condition is established, the specific probability It is shifted again to the specific game state with a lower probability than. For this reason, according to this feature, in the first predetermined game state shifted from the specific game state, for the player, by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state It is possible to expect that a specific condition is satisfied before the determination ends in the first predetermined game state. That is, according to this feature, in the first predetermined game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the player is determined by the second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high. It is possible to expect that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition. By the time it ends, it can be made to expect that a specific condition is satisfied.

Further, according to this feature, after the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state, when the specific condition is established, Since the transition to the specific game state is made again with a probability lower than the specific probability, in the first predetermined game state, the special information does not satisfy the first predetermined condition by the determination means, and the specific condition is satisfied. However, the player has a sense of urgency that the determination by the determination means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state may end in the first predetermined game state. can let In this way, according to this feature, by imparting emotions such as a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency to the player, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Further, according to this feature, when the game ball passes through a predetermined ball entry area in a predetermined situation, an effect suggesting that a state advantageous to the player will start is executed. It is possible to make the player recognize that a game ball passing through a predetermined ball entry area starts a state advantageous to the player, which is different from that in a normal game machine.

<Characteristic uIJ group>
The feature uIJ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, mainly from the tenth embodiment and its fifteenth modification.

[Feature uIJ1]
A first ball entry means (first starting port 33) that allows a game ball to enter,
A second ball entry means (second starting port 34) that allows a game ball to enter,
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (the value of a winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means;
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and the first special information acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entering means Acquisition information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, respectively;
means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot), wherein the determination of the second special information is performed with priority over the determination of the first special information, and the determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination is the first determination mode (low probability mode) and the first determination mode a second determination mode (high-probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high;
When one game round is defined as the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended, a game round execution means (main control unit) for executing the game round The MPU 62 on the board 61 side, and the game round control processing of FIG. 461 executed by it),
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is divided into a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entering means, and a state that a game ball enters the second ball entering means. state transition means for transitioning between a second state that is a state that enables or facilitates the sphere;
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein the control mode in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means is a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode. a control means having at least a second control mode (high-frequency support mode) in which the entry of game balls to the second ball entry means is easier than
In a gaming machine comprising
In a specific game state (high-precision high support state) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, a predetermined condition (game round after transition to the specific game state The number of times of execution reaches the number of times of time saving continuation) is established, control mode transition means for shifting the control mode from the second control mode to the first control mode;
The determination by the determination means about the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is the first predetermined game state (high If the specific condition (winning in the falling lottery) is established before the end in the probability low support state), the specific probability is transferred again to the specific game state (100% probability to the specific game state again a first re-transition means;
After the determination by the determination means about the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state, the specific condition (winning in a falling lottery ) is established, the specific game state is shifted again with a probability lower than the specific probability (a jackpot is won in a low-probability low support state and the probability of being distributed to a probability-variable jackpot is transferred again to a high-probability high-support state a) second re-transition means;
and furthermore,
In the first predetermined game state (high-probability-low support state H6), when the state of the auxiliary means transitions to the second state, the game is to enter a game ball into the second ball-entering means. A game machine characterized by comprising means for executing an effect to prompt a player (Special 2 ball entry promotion effect in Modification 15).

According to this feature, the determination mode is the second determination mode, and in the specific game state in which the control mode is the second control mode, when a predetermined condition is established, the control mode changes from the second control mode to the first Switch to control mode. Then, until the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specified game state is completed in the first predetermined game state after the shift to the first control mode, the specified When the condition is established, it is shifted again to the specific game state with a specific probability. On the other hand, after the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state, when the specific condition is established, the specific probability It is shifted again to the specific game state with a lower probability than. For this reason, according to this feature, in the first predetermined game state shifted from the specific game state, for the player, by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state It is possible to expect that a specific condition is satisfied before the determination ends in the first predetermined game state. That is, according to this feature, in the first predetermined game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the player is determined by the second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high. It is possible to expect that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition. By the time it ends, it can be made to expect that a specific condition is satisfied.

Further, according to this feature, after the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state, when the specific condition is established, Since the transition to the specific game state is performed again with a probability lower than the specific probability, in the first predetermined game state, the special information does not satisfy the first predetermined condition by the determination means, and the specific condition is satisfied. However, the player has a sense of urgency that the determination by the determination means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state may end in the first predetermined game state. can let As described above, according to this feature, by imparting emotions such as a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency to the player, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to this feature, when the state of the auxiliary means changes to the second state in the first predetermined game state, an effect prompting the player to enter the game ball into the second ball entering means. is executed, it is possible for the player to recognize how to play the game according to the new game characteristics of the game machine, which is different from that of the ordinary game machine.

<Feature uIK group>
The feature uIK group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, mainly from the tenth embodiment and its fifteenth modification.

[Feature uIK1]
A first ball entry means (first starting port 33) that allows a game ball to enter,
A second ball entry means (second starting port 34) that allows a game ball to enter,
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (the value of a winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means;
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and the first special information acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entering means Acquisition information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, respectively;
means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot), wherein the determination of the second special information is performed with priority over the determination of the first special information, and the determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination is the first determination mode (low probability mode) and the first determination mode a second determination mode (high-probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high;
When one game round is defined as the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended, a game round execution means (main control unit) for executing the game round The MPU 62 on the board 61 side, and the game round control processing of FIG. 461 executed by it),
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is divided into a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entering means, and a state that a game ball enters the second ball entering means. state transition means for transitioning between a second state that is a state that enables or facilitates the sphere;
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein the control mode in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means is a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode. a control means having at least a second control mode (high-frequency support mode) in which the entry of game balls to the second ball entry means is easier than
In a gaming machine comprising
In a specific game state (high-precision high support state) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, a predetermined condition (game round after transition to the specific game state The number of times of execution reaches the number of times of time saving continuation) is established, control mode transition means for shifting the control mode from the second control mode to the first control mode;
The determination by the determination means about the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is the first predetermined game state (high If the specific condition (winning in the falling lottery) is established before the end in the probability low support state), the specific probability is transferred again to the specific game state (100% probability to the specific game state again a first re-transition means;
After the determination by the determination means about the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state, the specific condition (winning in a falling lottery ) is established, the specific game state is shifted again with a probability lower than the specific probability (a jackpot is won in a low-probability low support state and the probability of being distributed to a probability-variable jackpot is transferred again to a high-probability high-support state a) second re-transition means;
and furthermore,
When the number of stored second special information reaches a predetermined number (four pieces) in the first predetermined gaming state (high probability low support state H6), the number of stored second special information is the predetermined number A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for displaying information (advantage determination effect in Modification 15) corresponding to the fact that the game has become.

According to this feature, the determination mode is the second determination mode, and in the specific game state in which the control mode is the second control mode, when a predetermined condition is established, the control mode changes from the second control mode to the first Switch to control mode. Then, until the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specified game state is completed in the first predetermined game state after the shift to the first control mode, the specified When the condition is established, it is shifted again to the specific game state with a specific probability. On the other hand, after the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state, when the specific condition is established, the specific probability It is shifted again to the specific game state with a lower probability than. For this reason, according to this feature, in the first predetermined game state shifted from the specific game state, for the player, by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state It is possible to expect that a specific condition is satisfied before the determination ends in the first predetermined game state. That is, according to this feature, in the first predetermined game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the player is determined by the second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high. The special information can be expected to satisfy the first predetermined condition, and further, the judgment by the judgment means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is By the time it ends, it can be made to expect that a specific condition is satisfied.

Further, according to this feature, after the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state, when the specific condition is established, Since the transition to the specific game state is performed again with a probability lower than the specific probability, in the first predetermined game state, the special information does not satisfy the first predetermined condition by the determination means, and the specific condition is satisfied. However, the player has a sense of urgency that the determination by the determination means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state may end in the first predetermined game state. can let As described above, according to this feature, by imparting emotions such as a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency to the player, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to this feature, when the number of stored second special information reaches a predetermined number in the first predetermined game state, information corresponding to the fact that the number of stored second special information has reached a predetermined number. is displayed, so that the player recognizes that there is a special meaning in that the number of stored second special information has reached a predetermined number in a first predetermined game state, unlike an ordinary game machine. becomes possible.

<Feature uIL group>
The feature uIL group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its sixteenth modification.

[Feature uIL1]
A first ball entry means (first starting port 33) that allows a game ball to enter,
A second ball entry means (second starting port 34) that allows a game ball to enter,
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (the value of a winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means;
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and the first special information acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entering means Acquisition information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, respectively;
means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot), wherein the determination of the second special information is performed with priority over the determination of the first special information, and the determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination is the first determination mode (low probability mode) and the first determination mode a second determination mode (high-probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high;
When one game round is defined as the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended, a game round execution means (main control unit) for executing the game round The MPU 62 on the board 61 side, and the game round control processing of FIG. 461 executed by it),
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is divided into a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entering means, and a state that a game ball enters the second ball entering means. state transition means for transitioning between a second state that is a state that enables or facilitates the sphere;
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein the control mode in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means is a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode. a control means having at least a second control mode (high-frequency support mode) in which the entry of game balls to the second ball entry means is easier than
In a gaming machine comprising
In a specific game state (high-precision high support state) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, a predetermined condition (game round after transition to the specific game state The number of times of execution reaches the number of times of time saving continuation) is established, control mode transition means for shifting the control mode from the second control mode to the first control mode;
The determination by the determination means about the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is the first predetermined game state (high If the specific condition (winning in the falling lottery) is established before the end in the probability low support state), the specific probability is transferred again to the specific game state (100% probability to the specific game state again a first re-transition means;
After the determination by the determination means about the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state, the specific condition (winning in a falling lottery ) is established, the specific game state is shifted again with a probability lower than the specific probability (a jackpot is won in a low-probability low support state and the probability of being distributed to a probability-variable jackpot is transferred again to a high-probability high-support state a) second re-transition means;
with
A game machine characterized by not comprising means for holding and storing a predetermined lottery (normal drawing lottery) that triggers the transition of the auxiliary means from the first state to the second state.

According to this feature, the determination mode is the second determination mode, and in the specific game state in which the control mode is the second control mode, when a predetermined condition is established, the control mode changes from the second control mode to the first Switch to control mode. Then, until the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specified game state is completed in the first predetermined game state after the shift to the first control mode, the specified When the condition is established, it is shifted again to the specific game state with a specific probability. On the other hand, after the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state, when the specific condition is established, the specific probability It is shifted again to the specific game state with a lower probability than. For this reason, according to this feature, in the first predetermined game state shifted from the specific game state, for the player, by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state It is possible to expect that a specific condition is satisfied before the determination ends in the first predetermined game state. That is, according to this feature, in the first predetermined game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the player is determined by the second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high. It is possible to expect that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition. By the time it ends, it can be made to expect that a specific condition is satisfied.

Further, according to this feature, after the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state, when the specific condition is established, Since the transition to the specific game state is made again with a probability lower than the specific probability, in the first predetermined game state, the special information does not satisfy the first predetermined condition by the determination means, and the specific condition is satisfied. However, the player has a sense of urgency that the determination by the determination means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state may end in the first predetermined game state. can let In this way, according to this feature, by imparting emotions such as a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency to the player, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, according to this feature, since there is no means for holding and storing the predetermined lottery (normal drawing lottery) that triggers the transition of the auxiliary means from the first state to the second state, the reserved predetermined lottery To avoid automatic execution of a lottery at a timing not intended by a player. Therefore, by adjusting the timing of entering the game ball into the ball entry means that triggers the transition of the state of the auxiliary means, a new game feature of adjusting the timing of the transition of the auxiliary means to the second state is realized. can be provided to

<Feature uIM group>
The feature uIM group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its eighteenth modification.

[Feature uIM1]
A first ball entry means (first starting port 33) that allows a game ball to enter,
A second ball entry means (second starting port 34) that allows a game ball to enter,
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (the value of a winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means;
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and the first special information acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entering means Acquisition information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, respectively;
means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot), wherein the determination of the second special information is performed with priority over the determination of the first special information, and the determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination is the first determination mode (low probability mode) and the first determination mode a second determination mode (high-probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high;
When one game round is defined as the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended, a game round execution means (main control unit) for executing the game round The MPU 62 on the board 61 side, and the game round control processing of FIG. 461 executed by it),
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is divided into a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entering means, and a state that a game ball enters the second ball entering means. state transition means for transitioning between a second state that is a state that enables or facilitates the sphere;
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein the control mode in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means is a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode. a control means having at least a second control mode (high-frequency support mode) in which the entry of game balls to the second ball entry means is easier than
In a gaming machine comprising
In a specific game state (high-precision high support state) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, a predetermined condition (game round after transition to the specific game state The number of times of execution reaches the number of times of time saving continuation) is established, control mode transition means for shifting the control mode from the second control mode to the first control mode;
The determination by the determination means about the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is the first predetermined game state (high If the specific condition (winning in the falling lottery) is established before the end in the probability low support state), the specific probability is transferred again to the specific game state (100% probability to the specific game state again a first re-transition means;
After the determination by the determination means about the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state, the specific condition (winning in a falling lottery ) is established, the specific game state is shifted again with a probability lower than the specific probability (a jackpot is won in a low-probability low support state and the probability of being distributed to a probability-variable jackpot is transferred again to a high-probability high-support state a) second re-transition means;
and furthermore,
When the specific condition is established in the specific game state (high probability high support state H4) (when the fall is won in the fall lottery), the second predetermined game state ( A means for shifting to a low certainty height support state H5),
A predetermined ball entrance (high-probability transition winning opening 34e in modification 18) that allows a game ball to enter in the second predetermined game state,
Means for shifting the determination mode to the second determination mode triggered by the entry of a game ball into the predetermined ball entrance;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to this feature, the determination mode is the second determination mode, and in the specific game state in which the control mode is the second control mode, when a predetermined condition is established, the control mode changes from the second control mode to the first Switch to control mode. Then, until the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specified game state is completed in the first predetermined game state after the transition to the first control mode, the specified When the condition is established, it is shifted again to the specific game state with a specific probability. On the other hand, after the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state, when the specific condition is established, the specific probability It is shifted again to the specific game state with a lower probability than. For this reason, according to this feature, in the first predetermined game state shifted from the specific game state, for the player, by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state It is possible to expect that a specific condition is satisfied before the determination ends in the first predetermined game state. That is, according to this feature, in the first predetermined game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the player is determined by the second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high. The special information can be expected to satisfy the first predetermined condition, and further, the judgment by the judgment means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is By the time it ends, it can be made to expect that a specific condition is satisfied.

Further, according to this feature, after the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state, when the specific condition is established, Since the transition to the specific game state is performed again with a probability lower than the specific probability, in the first predetermined game state, the special information does not satisfy the first predetermined condition by the determination means, and the specific condition is satisfied. However, the player has a sense of urgency that the determination by the determination means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state may end in the first predetermined game state. can let As described above, according to this feature, by imparting emotions such as a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency to the player, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, according to this feature, when the specific condition is established in the specific game state (when the fall is elected in the fall lottery), the second predetermined game state (low probability high support) in which the determination mode is the first determination mode State H5), but if the game ball can be entered into the predetermined ball entrance in the second predetermined game state, the judgment mode will shift again to the second judgment mode. Here, in the case of adopting a configuration in which the second control mode continues until the next jackpot election when the time reduction grant is won in the second predetermined game state, the time reduction grant is elected in the second predetermined game state, and the predetermined If the game ball can be entered into the ball entrance, the second control mode continues until the next jackpot winning, and a game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode is entered. This game state is very advantageous for the player. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to provide the player with a new game in which the game ball is entered into the predetermined ball entrance in the second predetermined game state, and the game state is shifted to an even more advantageous game state.

<Characteristic vA group>
The feature vA group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment and its modifications. In particular, modification 10 of the eleventh embodiment corresponds.

[Feature vA1]
A first ball entry means (first starting port 33) that allows a game ball to enter,
A second ball entry means (second starting port 34) that allows a game ball to enter,
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (the value of a winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means;
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and the first special information acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entering means Acquisition information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, respectively;
means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot), wherein the determination of the second special information prior to the determination of the first special information;
When one game round is defined as the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended, a game round execution means (main control unit) for executing the game round MPU 62 on the board 61 side, and the game round control process of FIG. 511 executed by it),
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is divided into a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entering means, and a state that a game ball enters the second ball entering means. state transition means for transitioning between a second state that is a state that enables or facilitates the sphere;
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein the control mode in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means is a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode. a control means having at least a second control mode (high-frequency support mode) in which the entry of game balls to the second ball entry means is easier than
In a gaming machine comprising
The control means, in a predetermined game state, when a predetermined condition (the game ball passes through the through gates 35a and 35b) is established, the auxiliary comprising means for switching the state of the means from the first state to the second state;
The gaming machine is capable of displaying, in the predetermined game state, a specific effect image (chance number included in the forewarning effect) continuously in a predetermined number of game rounds for the first special information,
The specific effect image can be displayed in a specific number of game rounds for the second special information that is equal to or less than the upper limit number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in the predetermined game state. a first display means (production of game round V21 in FIG. 516);
Second display means capable of displaying the specific effect image in the game rounds for the first special information, which are continuously executed after the game rounds for the second special information are completed the specific number of times. (Production of game round U23 in FIG. 516);
In the game rounds for the first special information, which are continuously executed after the game rounds for the second special information of the specific number are completed, a specific condition (if the judgment result of the second judgment is negative) Effect image switching means capable of switching the specific effect image to a predetermined effect image (special 1 continuous effect continuation pattern same color effect) when the above condition is satisfied;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature vA1, in the predetermined game state, the specific effect image is displayed continuously after the predetermined number of game rounds for the first special information. When a game ball enters the second ball entry means, a specific number of times of the second special information that is equal to or less than the upper limit number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in a predetermined game state. A specific effect image is displayed in the game round. Then, the specific effect image is displayed in the game rounds for the first special information, which are continuously executed after the game rounds for the second special information are finished a specific number of times. For this reason, in the predetermined game state, among the first special information stored in the acquired information storage means, there is special information that satisfies the first predetermined condition, and there is special information that is scheduled to perform an effect with a high degree of expectation. In this case, by displaying a specific effect image, the game player is notified that there is a possibility that the first special information satisfying the first predetermined condition exists in the first special information. can be done. In addition, when the game round for the second special information is executed a specific number of times, which is equal to or less than the upper limit number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means, the specific effect is also performed in the game round. By displaying the image, it is possible to complete the game rounds for the second special information without interrupting the flow of the advance notice effect and feeling a sense of incongruity. Further, by repeating the display of the specific effect image each time the game is played, it is possible to make the player expect that there is an increased possibility that there is special information that satisfies the first predetermined condition. On the other hand, if the specific effect image is always displayed even when the second special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the specific effect image will be repeated unnecessarily, resulting in an advance notice effect. There is a risk that the reliability of the On the other hand, according to the feature vA1, when the specific condition is satisfied in the game rounds for the first special information that are continuously executed after the game rounds for the second special information are completed a specific number of times. In addition, since the specific effect image is switched to the predetermined effect image, it is possible to prevent the specific effect image from appearing excessively when the specific condition is satisfied. Therefore, according to feature vA1, the reliability of the advance notice effect can be improved, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Feature vA2]
A gaming machine according to feature vA1,
The effect image switching means is
Means for switching the image to be displayed from the specific effect image displayed by the first display means (Modification 10, Special 1 continuously executed after game round V21 for Special 2 hold 1 is completed) Configuration for switching and displaying the chance eye effect to special 1 continuous effect continuation pattern same color effect in game round U23 about suspension)
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature vA2, the image to be displayed can be switched from the specific effect image displayed in the game round for the first special information that is continuously executed after the game round for the second special information is completed. If the image to be displayed is a predetermined effect image, the specific effect displayed continuously in the predetermined number of game rounds for the first special information executed before the game round for the second special information is started. The expectation of the existence of the first special information that satisfies the first predetermined condition by the image can be maintained. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the degree of expectation from being unnecessarily increased for the existence of the first special information that satisfies the first predetermined condition. Therefore, according to feature vA2, the degree of reliability of the advance notice effect is further enhanced. can be improved.

[Feature vA3]
A gaming machine according to feature vA1 or feature VA2,
A game machine, wherein the predetermined game state is a game state in which the control mode is the first control mode.

According to the feature vA3, in the predetermined game state in which the control mode is the first control mode, it is possible to perform the advance notice effect for the first special information.

[Feature vA4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features vA1 to vA3,
The effect image switching means is
A gaming machine comprising: means for displaying the predetermined effect image having a degree of expectation substantially the same as the degree of expectation when the specific effect image is displayed.

According to the feature vA4, the degree of expectation when the specific effect image is displayed and the degree of expectation when the predetermined effect image is displayed are substantially the same. Unnecessarily high expectations for the existence of information can be reliably suppressed. Therefore, according to feature vA4, the reliability of the advance notice effect can be further improved.

[Feature vA5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features vA1 to vA4,
The effect image switching means is
A gaming machine comprising means for displaying the predetermined effect image with a higher degree of expectation than the degree of expectation when the specific effect image is displayed.

According to feature vA5, the degree of expectation when the predetermined effect image is displayed exceeds the degree of expectation that special information satisfying the first predetermined condition exists among the first special information stored in the acquired information storage means. If the predetermined effect image is displayed in a state in which no relationship is maintained, the degree of expectation when the predetermined effect image is displayed is higher than the degree of expectation when the specific effect image is displayed. is increased, it is possible to give the player a higher degree of expectation. Therefore, according to feature vA5, the reliability of the advance notice effect can be further improved.

[Feature vA6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features vA1 to vA5,
The configuration in which the specific effect image can be displayed continuously for the predetermined number of game rounds for the first special information,
Means capable of displaying the specific effect image at a position shifted forward and backward with respect to the display surface of the pattern for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means, which is displayed in the game round ( When the display of the effect in which the specific character appears is applied to the layer structure of Modification 1, the effect in which the specific character appears is positioned before the pattern layer). .

According to feature vA6, in a predetermined game state, when the specific effect image is displayed continuously for the predetermined number of game rounds for the first special information, the display surface of the pattern for notifying the result of determination by the determination means. Since the specific effect image is displayed at a position shifted forward and backward with respect to the pattern, drawing can be controlled independently in each of the hierarchy in which the specific effect image is displayed and the hierarchy in which the pattern is displayed. Therefore, according to feature vA6, control can be simplified.

[Feature vA7]
A gaming machine according to any one of features vA1 to vA6,
The first display means is
Means capable of displaying the specific effect image at a position shifted forward and backward with respect to the display surface of the pattern for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means, which is displayed in the game round ( When the display of the effect in which the specific character appears is applied to the layer structure of Modification 1, the effect in which the specific character appears is positioned before the pattern layer).

According to feature vA7, a specific effect image is displayed in a specific number of game rounds for the second special information that is equal to or less than the upper limit number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in a predetermined game state. At this time, since the specific effect image is displayed at a position shifted forward and backward with respect to the display surface of the pattern for notifying the result of determination by the determination means, the hierarchy and pattern where the specific effect image is displayed are displayed. Rendering can be controlled independently at each level in the hierarchy. Therefore, according to feature vA7, control can be simplified.

[Feature vA8]
A gaming machine according to any one of features vA1 to vA7,
The second display means is
Means capable of displaying the specific effect image at a position shifted forward and backward with respect to the display surface of the pattern for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means, which is displayed in the game round ( When the display of the effect in which the specific character appears is applied to the layer structure of Modification 1, the effect in which the specific character appears is positioned before the pattern layer.

According to the feature vA8, in the game rounds for the first special information, which are continuously executed after the game rounds for the second special information are finished a specific number of times, when the specific effect image is displayed, the determining means Since the specific effect image is displayed in a position that is shifted back and forth with respect to the display surface of the pattern for announcing the result of the judgment, in each layer where the specific effect image is displayed and the pattern is displayed Drawing can be controlled independently. Therefore, according to feature vA8, control can be simplified.

[Feature vA9]
A gaming machine according to any one of features vA1 to vA8,
The effect image switching means is
Means capable of displaying the predetermined effect image at a position shifted forward and backward with respect to the display surface of the pattern for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means, which is displayed in the game round ( When the display of the effect in which the specific background zone appears is applied to the layer structure of Modification 1, the effect in which the specific background zone appears is positioned before the pattern layer). game machine.

According to the feature vA9, when a specific condition is satisfied in a game cycle for the first special information stored by the acquired information storage means, when displaying the predetermined effect image, the determination result of the determination means is notified. Since the predetermined performance image is displayed at a position shifted forward and backward with respect to the display surface of the pattern, drawing is independently controlled in each of the hierarchy in which the predetermined performance image is displayed and the hierarchy in which the pattern is displayed. be able to. Therefore, according to feature vA9, control can be simplified.

<Feature vB group>
The feature vB group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment and its modifications. In particular, case 2 in the eleventh embodiment corresponds.

[Feature vB1]
A first ball entry means (first starting port 33) that allows a game ball to enter,
A second ball entry means (second starting port 34) that allows a game ball to enter,
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (the value of a winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means;
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and the first special information acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entering means Acquisition information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, respectively;
means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot), wherein the determination of the second special information prior to the determination of the first special information;
When one game round is defined as the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended, a game round execution means (main control unit) for executing the game round MPU 62 on the board 61 side, and the game round control process of FIG. 511 executed by it),
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is divided into a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entering means, and a state that a game ball enters the second ball entering means. state transition means for transitioning between a second state that is a state that enables or facilitates the sphere;
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein the control mode in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means is a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode. a control means having at least a second control mode (high-frequency support mode) in which the entry of game balls to the second ball entry means is easier than
In a gaming machine comprising
The control means, in a predetermined game state, when a predetermined condition (the game ball passes through the through gates 35a and 35b) is established, the auxiliary comprising means for switching the state of the means from the first state to the second state;
The gaming machine is capable of displaying, in the predetermined game state, a specific effect image (chance number included in the forewarning effect) continuously in a predetermined number of game rounds for the first special information,
The specific effect image can be displayed in a specific number of game rounds for the second special information that is equal to or less than the upper limit number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in the predetermined game state. A first display means (production of game round V21 in FIG. 516),
Second display means capable of displaying the specific effect image in the game rounds for the first special information, which are continuously executed after the game rounds for the second special information are completed the specific number of times. (Production of game round U23 in FIG. 516);
In the game rounds for the first special information, which are continuously executed after the game rounds for the second special information of the specific number are completed, a specific condition (if the judgment result of the second judgment is negative) effect image switching means capable of switching the specific effect image to a predetermined effect image (special 1 continuous effect continuation symbol same color effect) when the above condition is satisfied;
with
The effect image switching means is
Means for switching the image to be displayed from the specific effect image displayed by the first display means (Modification 10, Special 1 continuously executed after game round V21 for Special 2 hold 1 ends) Configuration for switching and displaying the chance eye effect to special 1 continuous effect continuation pattern same color effect in game round U23 about suspension)
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature vB1, in the predetermined game state, the specific effect image is displayed continuously after the predetermined number of game rounds for the first special information. When a game ball enters the second ball entry means, a specific number of times of the second special information that is equal to or less than the upper limit number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in a predetermined game state. A specific effect image is displayed in the game round. Then, the specific effect image is displayed in the game rounds for the first special information, which are continuously executed after the game rounds for the second special information are finished a specific number of times. For this reason, in the predetermined game state, among the first special information stored in the acquired information storage means, there is special information that satisfies the first predetermined condition, and there is special information that is scheduled to perform an effect with a high degree of expectation. In this case, by displaying a specific effect image, the game player is notified that there is a possibility that the first special information satisfying the first predetermined condition exists in the first special information. can be done. In addition, when the game round for the second special information is executed a specific number of times, which is equal to or less than the upper limit number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means, the specific effect is also performed in the game round. By displaying the image, it is possible to complete the game rounds for the second special information without interrupting the flow of the advance notice effect and feeling a sense of incongruity. Further, by repeating the display of the specific effect image each time the game is played, it is possible to make the player expect that there is an increased possibility that there is special information that satisfies the first predetermined condition. On the other hand, if the specific effect image is always displayed even when the second special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the specific effect image will be repeated unnecessarily, resulting in an advance notice effect. There is a risk that the reliability of the On the other hand, according to the feature vB1, when the specific condition is satisfied in the game rounds for the first special information that are continuously executed after the game rounds for the second special information are completed a specific number of times. Furthermore, since the specific effect image is switched to the predetermined effect image, it is possible to suppress the extra appearance of the specific effect image when the specific condition is satisfied. Therefore, according to the feature vB1, the reliability of the advance notice effect can be improved, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, according to the feature vB1, the image to be displayed can be switched from the specific effect image displayed in the game round for the first special information that is continuously executed after the game round for the second special information is completed. Therefore, if the image to be displayed is a predetermined effect image, it is displayed continuously in the predetermined number of game rounds for the first special information executed before the game round for the second special information is started. The degree of expectation that the first special information that satisfies the first predetermined condition exists can be maintained by the specific effect image. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the level of expectation from being unnecessarily raised for the existence of the first special information that satisfies the first predetermined condition. Therefore, according to feature vB1, the level of reliability of the advance notice effect is further increased. can be improved.

<Characteristic vC group>
The feature vC group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment and its modifications. In particular, case 2 in the eleventh embodiment corresponds.

[Feature vC1]
A first ball entry means (first starting port 33) that allows a game ball to enter,
A second ball entry means (second starting port 34) that allows a game ball to enter,
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (the value of a winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means;
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and the first special information acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entering means Acquisition information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, respectively;
means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot), wherein the determination of the second special information prior to the determination of the first special information;
When one game round is defined as the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended, a game round execution means (main control unit) for executing the game round MPU 62 on the board 61 side, and the game round control process of FIG. 511 executed by it),
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is divided into a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entering means, and a state that a game ball enters the second ball entering means. state transition means for transitioning between a second state that is a state that enables or facilitates the sphere;
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein the control mode in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means is a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode. a control means having at least a second control mode (high-frequency support mode) in which the entry of game balls to the second ball entry means is easier than
In a gaming machine comprising
The control means, in a predetermined game state, when a predetermined condition (the game ball passes through the through gates 35a and 35b) is established, the auxiliary comprising means for switching the state of the means from the first state to the second state;
The gaming machine is capable of displaying, in the predetermined game state, a specific effect image (chance number included in the forewarning effect) continuously in a predetermined number of game rounds for the first special information,
The specific effect image can be displayed in a specific number of game rounds for the second special information that is equal to or less than the upper limit number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in the predetermined game state. A first display means (production of game round V21 in FIG. 516),
Second display means capable of displaying the specific effect image in the game rounds for the first special information, which are continuously executed after the game rounds for the second special information are completed the specific number of times. (Production of game round U23 in FIG. 516);
In the game rounds for the first special information, which are continuously executed after the game rounds for the second special information of the specific number are completed, a specific condition (if the judgment result of the second judgment is negative) effect image switching means capable of switching the specific effect image to a predetermined effect image (special 1 continuous effect continuation symbol same color effect) when the above condition is satisfied;
with
A game machine, wherein the predetermined game state is a game state in which the control mode is the first control mode.

According to the feature vC1, in the predetermined game state, the specific effect image is displayed continuously after the predetermined number of game rounds for the first special information. When a game ball enters the second ball entry means, a specific number of times of the second special information that is equal to or less than the upper limit number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in a predetermined game state. A specific effect image is displayed in the game round. Then, the specific effect image is displayed in the game rounds for the first special information, which are continuously executed after the game rounds for the second special information are finished a specific number of times. For this reason, in the predetermined game state, among the first special information stored in the acquired information storage means, there is special information that satisfies the first predetermined condition, and there is special information that is scheduled to perform an effect with a high degree of expectation. In this case, by displaying a specific effect image, the game player is notified that there is a possibility that the first special information satisfying the first predetermined condition exists in the first special information. can be done. In addition, when the game round for the second special information is executed a specific number of times, which is equal to or less than the upper limit number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means, the specific effect is also performed in the game round. By displaying the image, it is possible to complete the game rounds for the second special information without interrupting the flow of the advance notice effect and feeling a sense of incongruity. Further, by repeating the display of the specific effect image each time the game is played, it is possible to make the player expect that there is an increased possibility that there is special information that satisfies the first predetermined condition. On the other hand, if the specific effect image is always displayed even when the second special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the specific effect image will be repeated unnecessarily, resulting in an advance notice effect. There is a risk that the reliability of the On the other hand, according to the characteristic vC1, when the specific condition is satisfied in the game rounds for the first special information which are continuously executed after the game rounds for the second special information are completed a specific number of times. Furthermore, since the specific effect image is switched to the predetermined effect image, it is possible to suppress the extra appearance of the specific effect image when the specific condition is satisfied. Therefore, according to the characteristic vC1, the reliability of the advance notice effect can be improved, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, according to the characteristic vC1, in a predetermined game state in which the control mode is the first control mode, the advance notice effect for the first special information can be performed.

<Feature vD group>
The feature vD group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment and its modifications. In particular, case 2 in the eleventh embodiment corresponds.

[Feature vD1]
A first ball entry means (first starting port 33) that allows a game ball to enter,
A second ball entry means (second starting port 34) that allows a game ball to enter,
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (the value of a winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means;
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and the first special information acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entering means Acquisition information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, respectively;
means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot), wherein the determination of the second special information prior to the determination of the first special information;
When one game round is defined as the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended, a game round execution means (main control unit) for executing the game round MPU 62 on the board 61 side, and the game round control process of FIG. 511 executed by it),
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is divided into a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entering means, and a state that a game ball enters the second ball entering means. state transition means for transitioning between a second state that is a state that enables or facilitates the sphere;
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein the control mode in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means is a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode. a control means having at least a second control mode (high-frequency support mode) in which the entry of game balls to the second ball entry means is easier than
In a gaming machine comprising
The control means, in a predetermined game state, when a predetermined condition (the game ball passes through the through gates 35a and 35b) is established, the auxiliary comprising means for switching the state of the means from the first state to the second state;
The gaming machine is capable of displaying, in the predetermined game state, a specific effect image (chance number included in the forewarning effect) continuously in a predetermined number of game rounds for the first special information,
The specific effect image can be displayed in a specific number of game rounds for the second special information that is equal to or less than the upper limit number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in the predetermined game state. A first display means (production of game round V21 in FIG. 516),
Second display means capable of displaying the specific effect image in the game rounds for the first special information, which are continuously executed after the game rounds for the second special information are completed the specific number of times. (Production of game round U23 in FIG. 516);
In the game rounds for the first special information, which are continuously executed after the game rounds for the second special information of the specific number are completed, a specific condition (if the judgment result of the second judgment is negative) effect image switching means capable of switching the specific effect image to a predetermined effect image (special 1 continuous effect continuation symbol same color effect) when the above condition is satisfied;
with
The effect image switching means is
A gaming machine comprising: means for displaying the predetermined effect image having a degree of expectation substantially the same as the degree of expectation when the specific effect image is displayed.

According to the feature vD1, in the predetermined game state, the specific effect image is displayed continuously after the predetermined number of game rounds for the first special information. When a game ball enters the second ball entry means, a specific number of times of the second special information that is equal to or less than the upper limit number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in a predetermined game state. A specific effect image is displayed in the game round. Then, the specific effect image is displayed in the game rounds for the first special information, which are continuously executed after the game rounds for the second special information are finished a specific number of times. For this reason, in the predetermined game state, among the first special information stored in the acquired information storage means, there is special information that satisfies the first predetermined condition, and there is special information that is scheduled to perform an effect with a high degree of expectation. In this case, by displaying a specific effect image, the game player is notified that there is a possibility that the first special information satisfying the first predetermined condition exists in the first special information. can be done. In addition, when the game round for the second special information is executed a specific number of times, which is equal to or less than the upper limit number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means, the specific effect is also performed in the game round. By displaying the image, it is possible to complete the game rounds for the second special information without interrupting the flow of the advance notice effect and feeling a sense of incongruity. Further, by repeating the display of the specific effect image each time the game is played, it is possible to make the player expect that there is an increased possibility that there is special information that satisfies the first predetermined condition. On the other hand, if the specific effect image is always displayed even when the second special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the specific effect image will be repeated unnecessarily, resulting in an advance notice effect. There is a risk that the reliability of the On the other hand, according to the feature vD1, when the specific condition is satisfied in the game rounds for the first special information that are continuously executed after the game rounds for the second special information are completed a specific number of times. Furthermore, since the specific effect image is switched to the predetermined effect image, it is possible to suppress the extra appearance of the specific effect image when the specific condition is satisfied. Therefore, according to the characteristic vD1, the reliability of the advance notice effect can be improved, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, according to the feature vD1, since the degree of expectation when the specific effect image is displayed and the degree of expectation when the predetermined effect image is displayed are substantially the same, the first predetermined condition is satisfied. Unnecessarily high expectations for the existence of the special information can be reliably suppressed. Therefore, according to feature vD1, it is possible to further improve the reliability of the advance notice effect.

<Feature vE group>
The feature vE group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment and its modifications. In particular, case 2 in the eleventh embodiment corresponds.

[Feature vE1]
A first ball entry means (first starting port 33) that allows a game ball to enter,
A second ball entry means (second starting port 34) that allows a game ball to enter,
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (the value of a winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means;
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and the first special information acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entering means Acquisition information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, respectively;
means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot), wherein the determination of the second special information prior to the determination of the first special information;
When one game round is defined as the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended, a game round execution means (main control unit) for executing the game round MPU 62 on the board 61 side, and the game round control process of FIG. 511 executed by it),
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is divided into a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entering means, and a state that a game ball enters the second ball entering means. state transition means for transitioning between a second state that is a state that enables or facilitates the sphere;
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein the control mode in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means is a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode. a control means having at least a second control mode (high-frequency support mode) in which the entry of game balls to the second ball entry means is easier than
In a gaming machine comprising
The control means, in a predetermined game state, when a predetermined condition (the game ball passes through the through gates 35a and 35b) is established, the auxiliary comprising means for switching the state of the means from the first state to the second state;
The gaming machine is capable of displaying, in the predetermined game state, a specific effect image (chance number included in the forewarning effect) continuously in a predetermined number of game rounds for the first special information,
The specific effect image can be displayed in a specific number of game rounds for the second special information that is equal to or less than the upper limit number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in the predetermined game state. A first display means (production of game round V21 in FIG. 516),
Second display means capable of displaying the specific effect image in the game rounds for the first special information, which are continuously executed after the game rounds for the second special information are completed the specific number of times. (Production of game round U23 in FIG. 516);
In the game rounds for the first special information, which are continuously executed after the game rounds for the second special information of the specific number are completed, a specific condition (if the judgment result of the second judgment is negative) effect image switching means capable of switching the specific effect image to a predetermined effect image (special 1 continuous effect continuation symbol same color effect) when the above condition is satisfied;
with
The effect image switching means is
A gaming machine comprising means for displaying the predetermined effect image with a higher degree of expectation than the degree of expectation when the specific effect image is displayed.

According to the feature vE1, in the predetermined game state, the specific effect image is displayed continuously after the predetermined number of game rounds for the first special information. When a game ball enters the second ball entry means, a specific number of times of the second special information that is equal to or less than the upper limit number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in a predetermined game state. A specific effect image is displayed in the game round. Then, the specific effect image is displayed in the game rounds for the first special information, which are continuously executed after the game rounds for the second special information are finished a specific number of times. For this reason, in the predetermined game state, among the first special information stored in the acquired information storage means, there is special information that satisfies the first predetermined condition, and there is special information that is scheduled to perform an effect with a high degree of expectation. In this case, by displaying a specific effect image, the game player is notified that there is a possibility that the first special information satisfying the first predetermined condition exists in the first special information. can be done. In addition, when the game round for the second special information is executed a specific number of times, which is equal to or less than the upper limit number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means, the specific effect is also performed in the game round. By displaying the image, it is possible to complete the game rounds for the second special information without interrupting the flow of the advance notice effect and feeling a sense of incongruity. Further, by repeating the display of the specific effect image each time the game is played, it is possible to make the player expect that there is an increased possibility that there is special information that satisfies the first predetermined condition. On the other hand, if the specific effect image is always displayed even when the second special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the specific effect image will be repeated unnecessarily, resulting in an advance notice effect. There is a risk that the reliability of the On the other hand, according to the feature vE1, when the specific condition is satisfied in the game rounds for the first special information that are continuously executed after the game rounds for the second special information are completed a specific number of times. Furthermore, since the specific effect image is switched to the predetermined effect image, it is possible to suppress the extra appearance of the specific effect image when the specific condition is satisfied. Therefore, according to the feature vE1, the reliability of the advance notice effect can be improved, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, according to feature vE1, the degree of expectation when the predetermined effect image is displayed is the degree of expectation that special information satisfying the first predetermined condition exists among the first special information stored in the acquired information storage means. If the predetermined effect image is displayed while maintaining a relationship that does not exceed By increasing the degree of expectation, it is possible to provide the player with a higher degree of expectation. Therefore, according to feature vE1, the reliability of the advance notice effect can be further improved.

<Characteristic vF group>
The feature vF group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment and its modifications. In particular, case 2 in the eleventh embodiment corresponds.

[Feature vF1]
A first ball entry means (first starting port 33) that allows a game ball to enter,
A second ball entry means (second starting port 34) that allows a game ball to enter,
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (the value of a winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means;
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and the first special information acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entering means Acquisition information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, respectively;
means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot), wherein the determination of the second special information prior to the determination of the first special information;
When one game round is defined as the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended, a game round execution means (main control unit) for executing the game round MPU 62 on the board 61 side, and the game round control process of FIG. 511 executed by it),
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is divided into a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entering means, and a state that a game ball enters the second ball entering means. state transition means for transitioning between a second state that is a state that enables or facilitates the sphere;
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein the control mode in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means is a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode. a control means having at least a second control mode (high-frequency support mode) in which the entry of game balls to the second ball entry means is easier than
In a gaming machine comprising
The control means, in a predetermined game state, when a predetermined condition (the game ball passes through the through gates 35a and 35b) is established, the auxiliary comprising means for switching the state of the means from the first state to the second state;
The gaming machine is capable of displaying, in the predetermined game state, a specific effect image (chance number included in the forewarning effect) continuously in a predetermined number of game rounds for the first special information,
The specific effect image can be displayed in a specific number of game rounds for the second special information that is equal to or less than the upper limit number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in the predetermined game state. A first display means (production of game round V21 in FIG. 516),
Second display means capable of displaying the specific effect image in the game rounds for the first special information, which are continuously executed after the game rounds for the second special information are completed the specific number of times. (Production of game round U23 in FIG. 516);
In the game rounds for the first special information, which are continuously executed after the game rounds for the second special information of the specific number are completed, a specific condition (if the judgment result of the second judgment is negative) effect image switching means capable of switching the specific effect image to a predetermined effect image (special 1 continuous effect continuation symbol same color effect) when the above condition is satisfied;
with
The configuration in which the specific effect image can be displayed continuously for the predetermined number of game rounds for the first special information,
Means capable of displaying the specific effect image at a position shifted forward and backward with respect to the display surface of the pattern for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means, which is displayed in the game round ( When the display of the effect in which the specific character appears is applied to the layer structure of Modification 1, the effect in which the specific character appears is positioned before the pattern layer). .

According to the feature vF1, in a predetermined game state, a specific effect image is displayed continuously after a predetermined number of game rounds for the first special information. When a game ball enters the second ball entry means, a specific number of times of the second special information that is equal to or less than the upper limit number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in a predetermined game state. A specific effect image is displayed in the game round. Then, the specific effect image is displayed in the game rounds for the first special information, which are continuously executed after the game rounds for the second special information are finished a specific number of times. For this reason, in the predetermined game state, among the first special information stored in the acquired information storage means, there is special information that satisfies the first predetermined condition, and there is special information that is scheduled to perform an effect with a high degree of expectation. In this case, by displaying a specific effect image, the game player is notified that there is a possibility that the first special information satisfying the first predetermined condition exists in the first special information. can be done. In addition, when the game round for the second special information is executed a specific number of times, which is equal to or less than the upper limit number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means, the specific effect is also performed in the game round. By displaying the image, it is possible to complete the game rounds for the second special information without interrupting the flow of the advance notice effect and feeling a sense of incongruity. Further, by repeating the display of the specific effect image each time the game is played, it is possible to make the player expect that there is an increased possibility that there is special information that satisfies the first predetermined condition. On the other hand, if the specific effect image is always displayed even when the second special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the specific effect image will be repeated unnecessarily, resulting in an advance notice effect. There is a risk that the reliability of the On the other hand, according to the feature vF1, when the specific condition is satisfied in the game rounds for the first special information, which are continuously executed after the game rounds for the second special information are finished a specific number of times. In addition, since the specific effect image is switched to the predetermined effect image, it is possible to prevent the specific effect image from appearing excessively when the specific condition is satisfied. Therefore, according to the feature vF1, the reliability of the advance notice effect can be improved, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, according to the feature vF1, in a predetermined game state, when the specific effect image is displayed continuously for the predetermined number of game rounds for the first special information, a pattern for notifying the result of determination by the determination means is displayed. Since the specific effect image is displayed at a position shifted forward and backward with respect to the display surface, drawing can be controlled independently for each of the hierarchy where the specific effect image is displayed and the pattern is displayed. can. Therefore, according to feature vF1, control can be simplified.

<Feature vG group>
The feature vG group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment and its modifications. In particular, case 2 in the eleventh embodiment corresponds.

[Feature vG1]
A first ball entry means (first starting port 33) that allows a game ball to enter,
A second ball entry means (second starting port 34) that allows a game ball to enter,
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (the value of a winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means;
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and the first special information acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entering means Acquisition information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, respectively;
means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot), wherein the determination of the second special information prior to the determination of the first special information;
When one game round is defined as the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended, a game round execution means (main control unit) for executing the game round MPU 62 on the board 61 side, and the game round control process of FIG. 511 executed by it),
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is divided into a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entering means, and a state that a game ball enters the second ball entering means. state transition means for transitioning between a second state that is a state that enables or facilitates the sphere;
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein the control mode in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means is a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode. a control means having at least a second control mode (high-frequency support mode) in which the entry of game balls to the second ball entry means is easier than
In a gaming machine comprising
The control means, in a predetermined game state, when a predetermined condition (the game ball passes through the through gates 35a and 35b) is established, the auxiliary comprising means for switching the state of the means from the first state to the second state;
The gaming machine is capable of displaying, in the predetermined game state, a specific effect image (chance number included in the forewarning effect) continuously in a predetermined number of game rounds for the first special information,
The specific effect image can be displayed in a specific number of game rounds for the second special information that is equal to or less than the upper limit number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in the predetermined game state. A first display means (production of game round V21 in FIG. 516),
Second display means capable of displaying the specific effect image in the game rounds for the first special information, which are continuously executed after the game rounds for the second special information are completed the specific number of times. (Production of game round U23 in FIG. 516);
In the game rounds for the first special information, which are continuously executed after the game rounds for the second special information of the specific number are completed, a specific condition (if the judgment result of the second judgment is negative) effect image switching means capable of switching the specific effect image to a predetermined effect image (special 1 continuous effect continuation symbol same color effect) when the above condition is satisfied;
with
The first display means is
Means capable of displaying the specific effect image at a position shifted forward and backward with respect to the display surface of the pattern for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means, which is displayed in the game round ( When the display of the effect in which the specific character appears is applied to the layer structure of Modification 1, the effect in which the specific character appears is positioned before the pattern layer).

According to the feature vG1, in the predetermined game state, the specific effect image is displayed continuously after the predetermined number of game rounds for the first special information. When a game ball enters the second ball entry means, a specific number of times of the second special information that is equal to or less than the upper limit number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in a predetermined game state. A specific effect image is displayed in the game round. Then, the specific effect image is displayed in the game rounds for the first special information, which are continuously executed after the game rounds for the second special information are finished a specific number of times. For this reason, in the predetermined game state, among the first special information stored in the acquired information storage means, there is special information that satisfies the first predetermined condition, and there is special information that is scheduled to perform an effect with a high degree of expectation. In this case, by displaying a specific effect image, the game player is notified that there is a possibility that the first special information satisfying the first predetermined condition exists in the first special information. can be done. In addition, when the game round for the second special information is executed a specific number of times, which is equal to or less than the upper limit number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means, the specific effect is also performed in the game round. By displaying the image, it is possible to complete the game rounds for the second special information without interrupting the flow of the advance notice effect and feeling a sense of incongruity. Further, by repeating the display of the specific effect image each time the game is played, it is possible to make the player expect that there is an increased possibility that there is special information that satisfies the first predetermined condition. On the other hand, if the specific effect image is always displayed even when the second special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the specific effect image will be repeated unnecessarily, resulting in an advance notice effect. There is a risk that the reliability of the On the other hand, according to the feature vG1, when the specific condition is satisfied in the game rounds for the first special information that are continuously executed after the game rounds for the second special information are completed a specific number of times. Furthermore, since the specific effect image is switched to the predetermined effect image, it is possible to suppress the extra appearance of the specific effect image when the specific condition is satisfied. Therefore, according to the feature vG1, the reliability of the advance notice effect can be improved, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, according to the feature vG1, the specific effect image is displayed in a specific number of game rounds for the second special information that is equal to or less than the upper limit number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in a predetermined game state. When displaying, the specific effect image is displayed at a position shifted forward and backward with respect to the display surface of the pattern for notifying the result of judgment by the judging means. Drawing can be controlled independently for each of the displayed hierarchies. Therefore, according to feature vG7, control can be simplified.

<Characteristic vH group>
The feature vH group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment and its modifications. In particular, case 2 in the eleventh embodiment corresponds.

[Feature vH1]
A first ball entry means (first starting port 33) that allows a game ball to enter,
A second ball entry means (second starting port 34) that allows a game ball to enter,
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (the value of a winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means;
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and the first special information acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entering means Acquisition information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, respectively;
means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot), wherein the determination of the second special information prior to the determination of the first special information;
When one game round is defined as the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended, a game round execution means (main control unit) for executing the game round MPU 62 on the board 61 side, and the game round control process of FIG. 511 executed by it),
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is divided into a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entering means, and a state that a game ball enters the second ball entering means. state transition means for transitioning between a second state that is a state that enables or facilitates the sphere;
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein the control mode in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means is a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode. a control means having at least a second control mode (high-frequency support mode) in which the entry of game balls to the second ball entry means is easier than
In a gaming machine comprising
The control means, in a predetermined game state, when a predetermined condition (the game ball passes through the through gates 35a and 35b) is established, the auxiliary comprising means for switching the state of the means from the first state to the second state;
The gaming machine is capable of displaying, in the predetermined game state, a specific effect image (chance number included in the forewarning effect) continuously in a predetermined number of game rounds for the first special information,
The specific effect image can be displayed in a specific number of game rounds for the second special information that is equal to or less than the upper limit number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in the predetermined game state. A first display means (production of game round V21 in FIG. 516),
Second display means capable of displaying the specific effect image in the game rounds for the first special information, which are continuously executed after the game rounds for the second special information are completed the specific number of times. (Production of game round U23 in FIG. 516);
In the game rounds for the first special information, which are continuously executed after the game rounds for the second special information of the specific number are completed, a specific condition (if the judgment result of the second judgment is negative) effect image switching means capable of switching the specific effect image to a predetermined effect image (special 1 continuous effect continuation symbol same color effect) when the above condition is satisfied;
with
The second display means is
Means capable of displaying the specific effect image at a position shifted forward and backward with respect to the display surface of the pattern for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means, which is displayed in the game round ( When the display of the effect in which the specific character appears is applied to the layer structure of Modification 1, the effect in which the specific character appears is positioned in front of the pattern layer).

According to the feature vH1, in a predetermined game state, a specific effect image is displayed continuously after a predetermined number of game rounds for the first special information. When a game ball enters the second ball entry means, a specific number of times of the second special information that is equal to or less than the upper limit number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in a predetermined game state. A specific effect image is displayed in the game round. Then, the specific effect image is displayed in the game rounds for the first special information, which are continuously executed after the game rounds for the second special information are finished a specific number of times. For this reason, in the predetermined game state, among the first special information stored in the acquired information storage means, there is special information that satisfies the first predetermined condition, and there is special information that is scheduled to perform an effect with a high degree of expectation. In this case, by displaying a specific effect image, the game player is notified that there is a possibility that the first special information satisfying the first predetermined condition exists in the first special information. can be done. In addition, when the game round for the second special information is executed a specific number of times, which is equal to or less than the upper limit number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means, the specific effect is also performed in the game round. By displaying the image, it is possible to complete the game rounds for the second special information without interrupting the flow of the advance notice effect and feeling a sense of incongruity. Further, by repeating the display of the specific effect image each time the game is played, it is possible to make the player expect that there is an increased possibility that there is special information that satisfies the first predetermined condition. On the other hand, if the specific effect image is always displayed even when the second special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the specific effect image will be repeated unnecessarily, resulting in an advance notice effect. There is a risk that the reliability of the On the other hand, according to the feature vH1, when the specific condition is satisfied in the game rounds for the first special information which are continuously executed after the game rounds for the second special information are completed a specific number of times. Furthermore, since the specific effect image is switched to the predetermined effect image, it is possible to suppress the extra appearance of the specific effect image when the specific condition is satisfied. Therefore, according to the feature vH, the reliability of the advance notice effect can be improved, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, according to the feature vH1, in the game rounds for the first special information, which are continuously executed after the game rounds for the second special information are completed a specific number of times, when the specific effect image is displayed, the determination is made. Since the specific effect image is displayed at a position shifted forward and backward with respect to the display surface of the pattern for notifying the result of determination by means, there is a difference between the hierarchy where the specific effect image is displayed and the hierarchy where the pattern is displayed. Each can control drawing independently. Therefore, according to feature vH1, simplification of control can be achieved.

<Feature vI Group>
The feature vI group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment and its modifications. In particular, case 2 in the eleventh embodiment corresponds.

[Feature vI1]
A first ball entry means (first starting port 33) that allows a game ball to enter,
A second ball entry means (second starting port 34) that allows a game ball to enter,
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (the value of a winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means;
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and the first special information acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entering means Acquisition information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, respectively;
means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot), wherein the determination of the second special information prior to the determination of the first special information;
When one game round is defined as the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended, a game round execution means (main control unit) for executing the game round MPU 62 on the board 61 side, and the game round control process of FIG. 511 executed by it),
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is divided into a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entering means, and a state that a game ball enters the second ball entering means. state transition means for transitioning between a second state that is a state that enables or facilitates the sphere;
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein the control mode in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means is a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode. a control means having at least a second control mode (high-frequency support mode) in which the entry of game balls to the second ball entry means is easier than
In a gaming machine comprising
The control means, in a predetermined game state, when a predetermined condition (the game ball passes through the through gates 35a and 35b) is established, the auxiliary comprising means for switching the state of the means from the first state to the second state;
The gaming machine is capable of displaying, in the predetermined game state, a specific effect image (chance number included in the forewarning effect) continuously in a predetermined number of game rounds for the first special information,
The specific effect image can be displayed in a specific number of game rounds for the second special information that is equal to or less than the upper limit number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in the predetermined game state. A first display means (production of game round V21 in FIG. 516),
Second display means capable of displaying the specific effect image in the game rounds for the first special information, which are continuously executed after the game rounds for the second special information are completed the specific number of times. (Production of game round U23 in FIG. 516);
In the game rounds for the first special information, which are continuously executed after the game rounds for the second special information of the specific number are completed, a specific condition (if the judgment result of the second judgment is negative) effect image switching means capable of switching the specific effect image to a predetermined effect image (special 1 continuous effect continuation symbol same color effect) when the above condition is satisfied;
with
The effect image switching means is
Means capable of displaying the predetermined effect image at a position shifted forward and backward with respect to the display surface of the pattern for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means, which is displayed in the game round ( When the display of the effect in which the specific background zone appears is applied to the layer structure of Modification 1, the effect in which the specific background zone appears is positioned before the pattern layer). game machine.

According to the characteristic vI1, in the predetermined game state, the specific effect image is displayed continuously after the predetermined number of game rounds for the first special information. When a game ball enters the second ball entry means, a specific number of times of the second special information that is equal to or less than the upper limit number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in a predetermined game state. A specific effect image is displayed in the game round. Then, the specific effect image is displayed in the game rounds for the first special information, which are continuously executed after the game rounds for the second special information are finished a specific number of times. For this reason, in the predetermined game state, among the first special information stored in the acquired information storage means, there is special information that satisfies the first predetermined condition, and there is special information that is scheduled to perform an effect with a high degree of expectation. In this case, by displaying a specific effect image, the game player is notified that there is a possibility that the first special information satisfying the first predetermined condition exists in the first special information. can be done. In addition, when the game round for the second special information is executed a specific number of times, which is equal to or less than the upper limit number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means, the specific effect is also performed in the game round. By displaying the image, it is possible to complete the game rounds for the second special information without interrupting the flow of the advance notice effect and feeling a sense of incongruity. Further, by repeating the display of the specific effect image each time the game is played, it is possible to make the player expect that there is an increased possibility that there is special information that satisfies the first predetermined condition. On the other hand, if the specific effect image is always displayed even when the second special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the specific effect image will be repeated unnecessarily, resulting in an advance notice effect. There is a risk that the reliability of the On the other hand, according to the feature vI1, when the specific condition is satisfied in the game rounds for the first special information that are continuously executed after the game rounds for the second special information are completed a specific number of times. In addition, since the specific effect image is switched to the predetermined effect image, it is possible to prevent the specific effect image from appearing excessively when the specific condition is satisfied. Therefore, according to feature vI1, the reliability of the advance notice effect can be improved, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, according to the feature vI1, when the specific condition is satisfied in the game round for the first special information stored by the acquired information storage means, the result of the determination by the determination means is notified when the predetermined effect image is displayed. Since the predetermined effect image is displayed at a position shifted forward and backward with respect to the display surface of the pattern for the purpose, drawing is performed independently in each of the layers where the predetermined effect image is displayed and the pattern is displayed. can be controlled. Therefore, according to feature vI1, control can be simplified.

<Feature vJ group>
The feature vJ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment and its modifications. In particular, case 3 in the eleventh embodiment corresponds.

[Feature vJ1]
A first ball entry means (first starting port 33) that allows a game ball to enter,
A second ball entry means (second starting port 34) that allows a game ball to enter,
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (the value of a winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means;
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and the first special information acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entering means Acquisition information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, respectively;
means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot), wherein the determination of the second special information prior to the determination of the first special information;
When one game round is defined as the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended, a game round execution means (main control unit) for executing the game round MPU 62 on the board 61 side, and the game round control process of FIG. 511 executed by it),
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is divided into a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entering means, and a state that a game ball enters the second ball entering means. state transition means for transitioning between a second state that is a state that enables or facilitates the sphere;
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein the control mode in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means is a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode. a control means having at least a second control mode (high-frequency support mode) in which the entry of game balls to the second ball entry means is easier than
In a gaming machine comprising
The control means, in a predetermined game state, when a predetermined condition (the game ball passes through the through gates 35a and 35b) is established, the auxiliary comprising means for switching the state of the means from the first state to the second state;
Predetermined suggestive information display means for displaying predetermined suggestive information (image of bubbles included in an omen advance notice effect) in a predetermined number of the game times for the first special information (the effect of the game time U32 in FIG. 521);
A specific game state (especially A specific game state generating means (a long open state of the electric accessory 34a at normal time) that can generate a game state in which a game round can be executed for 2 holding,
Specific game image display means for displaying a specific game image corresponding to the specific game (shell image SH displayed in the variable display δ11 and the stop display δ12 for Special 2 Hold 1) during the occurrence of the specific game state;
Continuous display means for continuously displaying the predetermined suggestive information when the specific game image is displayed and the game round for the second special information is executed; means for displaying in the effect display area SA),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature vJ1, predetermined suggestive information is displayed in a predetermined number of game rounds for the first special information. For this reason, when there is special information that satisfies the first predetermined condition in the first special information stored in the acquired information storage means and that is scheduled to perform an effect with a high degree of expectation, a predetermined suggestion is made. With the information, it is possible to give a notice performance to the player that the first special information that satisfies the first predetermined condition exists in the first special information. Further, according to the feature vJ1, a specific game that can be executed for the second special information a specific number of times that is equal to or greater than the upper limit number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in a predetermined game state. states can occur. A specific game image corresponding to the specific game is displayed while the specific game state is occurring. For this reason, it takes a long time to execute the game rounds for the second special information. It is possible to improve the interest of people. On the other hand, since the game round for the second special information takes a long time, when the game round for the second special information ends, the game round for the second special information is executed before the game round is started. There is a risk that some players may completely forget that the advance notice effect has appeared in a predetermined number of game rounds for the received first special information. In addition, by displaying the specific game image in the game rounds for the second special information, it becomes easier to forget that the advance notice effect has appeared in the predetermined number of game rounds for the first special information. . On the other hand, according to the feature vJ1, when the specific game image is displayed and the game round for the second special information is executed, the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed. Thus, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the announcement effect from being forgotten, and remind the user that the announcement effect regarding the first special information is continuing. Therefore, according to the feature vJ1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature vJ2]
The gaming machine according to feature vJ1,
The continuous display means
The game regarding the first special information executed immediately before the start of the game cycle regarding the second special information executed by displaying the specific game image as the predetermined suggestive information to be continuously displayed. A gaming machine comprising means for displaying predetermined suggestive information (an image obtained by reducing a captured image) including a state as it is displayed in a single game.

According to feature vJ2, in a specific game state in which a game round for the second special information is executable, the state remains displayed in the game round for the first special information executed immediately before the start of the game round. Since the predetermined suggestive information including is continuously displayed, it is possible to more reliably remind the user that the advance notice effect regarding the first special information is continuing.

[Feature vJ3]
A gaming machine according to feature vJ1 or feature vJ2,
The continuous display means
The game regarding the first special information executed immediately before the start of the game cycle regarding the second special information executed by displaying the specific game image as the predetermined suggestive information to be continuously displayed. A gaming machine comprising means for displaying predetermined suggestive information (an image obtained by changing the captured image to increase the amount of bubbles in the modified example) obtained by changing the information displayed in each game.

According to feature vJ3, in a specific game state in which a game round for the second special information is executable, the information displayed in the game round for the first special information executed immediately before the start of the game round is changed. The predetermined suggestive information that has been set is continuously displayed. For this reason, it is possible to provide the predetermined suggestive information in various ways, and it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature vJ4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features vJ1 to vJ3,
The predetermined suggestive information display means includes:
A gaming machine comprising means for displaying the predetermined suggestive information at a position that does not hinder visual recognition of a pattern for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means, which is displayed in the game round.

According to the feature vJ4, it is possible to prevent the pattern for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means from becoming difficult to see due to the predetermined suggestive information. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature vJ5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features vJ1 to vJ4,
The predetermined suggestive information display means includes:
Means for displaying the predetermined suggestive information (layer A gaming machine characterized by comprising a display using

According to the feature vJ5, when displaying the predetermined suggestive information in the predetermined number of game rounds for the first special information, the position is shifted forward and backward with respect to the display surface of the pattern for announcing the result of determination by the determination means. Since the predetermined suggestive information is displayed at the bottom, display control can be performed independently for each of the hierarchy in which the predetermined suggestive information is displayed and the hierarchy in which the pattern is displayed. Therefore, according to feature vJ5, control can be simplified.

[Feature vJ6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features vJ1 to vJ5,
The continuous display means
Means for displaying the predetermined suggestive information (layer A gaming machine characterized by comprising a display using

According to the characteristic vJ6, when the specific game image is displayed and the game round for the second special information is executed, the position is shifted forward and backward with respect to the display surface of the pattern for announcing the result of determination by the determination means. Since the predetermined suggestive information is displayed at the bottom, it is possible to independently control the display of the hierarchy in which the predetermined suggestive information is displayed and the hierarchy in which the pattern is displayed. Therefore, according to feature vJ6, control can be simplified.

[Feature vJ7]
A gaming machine according to any one of features vJ1 to vJ6,
The specific game image display means is
Means for displaying the specific game image at a position shifted forward and backward with respect to the display surface of the pattern for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means, which is displayed in the game round (the layer of the first modification) structure, the upper layer displaying the shell image SH is located in front of the pattern layer).

According to the feature vJ7, when the specific game image corresponding to the specific game is displayed while the specific game state is occurring, the position is shifted forward and backward with respect to the display surface of the pattern for announcing the result of determination by the determination means. In addition, since the specific effect image is displayed, drawing can be controlled independently in each of the hierarchy in which the specific effect image is displayed and the hierarchy in which the pattern is displayed. Therefore, according to feature vJ7, control can be simplified.

[Feature vJ8]
A gaming machine according to any one of features vJ1 to vJ7,
The predetermined suggestive information suggests a situation in the game round with respect to the first special information executed immediately before the start of the game round with respect to the second special information executed with the specific game image displayed. A gaming machine characterized in that it includes information to display (information representing the captured image described as a modification in characters).

According to feature vJ8, in a specific game state in which a game round for the second special information can be executed, the information suggesting the situation in the game round for the first special information executed immediately before the start of the game round is It will be displayed continuously. For this reason, it is possible to provide the predetermined suggestive information in various ways, and it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature vJ9]
A gaming machine according to any one of features vJ1 to vJ8,
A game machine, wherein the predetermined game state is a game state in which the control mode is the first control mode.

According to the feature vJ9, in the predetermined game state in which the control mode is the first control mode, the advance notice effect for the first special information can be performed.

<Characteristic vK group>
The feature vK group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, mainly from the eleventh embodiment and its modifications. In particular, case 3 in the eleventh embodiment corresponds.

[Feature vK1]
A first ball entry means (first starting port 33) that allows a game ball to enter,
A second ball entry means (second starting port 34) that allows a game ball to enter,
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (the value of a winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means;
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and the first special information acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entering means Acquisition information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, respectively;
means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot), wherein the determination of the second special information prior to the determination of the first special information;
When one game round is defined as the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended, a game round execution means (main control unit) for executing the game round MPU 62 on the board 61 side, and the game round control process of FIG. 511 executed by it),
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is divided into a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entering means, and a state that a game ball enters the second ball entering means. state transition means for transitioning between a second state that is a state that enables or facilitates the sphere;
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein the control mode in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means is a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode. a control means having at least a second control mode (high-frequency support mode) in which the entry of game balls to the second ball entry means is easier than
In a gaming machine comprising
The control means, in a predetermined game state, when a predetermined condition (the game ball passes through the through gates 35a and 35b) is established, the auxiliary comprising means for switching the state of the means from the first state to the second state;
Predetermined suggestive information display means for displaying predetermined suggestive information (image of bubbles included in an omen advance notice effect) in a predetermined number of the game times for the first special information (the effect of the game time U32 in FIG. 521);
A specific game state (especially A specific game state generating means (a long open state of the electric accessory 34a at normal time) that can generate a game state in which a game round can be executed for 2 holding,
Specific game image display means for displaying a specific game image corresponding to the specific game (shell image SH displayed in the variable display δ11 and the stop display δ12 for Special 2 Hold 1) during the occurrence of the specific game state;
Continuous display means for continuously displaying the predetermined suggestive information when the specific game image is displayed and the game round for the second special information is executed; means for displaying in the effect display area SA),
with
The continuous display means
The game regarding the first special information executed immediately before the start of the game cycle regarding the second special information executed by displaying the specific game image as the predetermined suggestive information to be continuously displayed. A gaming machine comprising means for displaying predetermined suggestive information (an image obtained by reducing a captured image) including a state as it is displayed in a single game.

According to the feature vK1, predetermined suggestive information is displayed in a predetermined number of game rounds for the first special information. For this reason, when there is special information that satisfies the first predetermined condition in the first special information stored in the acquired information storage means and that is scheduled to perform an effect with a high degree of expectation, a predetermined suggestion is made. With the information, it is possible to give a notice performance to the player that the first special information that satisfies the first predetermined condition exists in the first special information. Further, according to the feature vK1, a specific game that can be executed with respect to the second special information a specific number of times that is equal to or greater than the upper limit number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in a predetermined game state. states can occur. A specific game image corresponding to the specific game is displayed while the specific game state is occurring. For this reason, it takes a long time to execute the game rounds for the second special information. It is possible to improve the interest of people. On the other hand, since the game round for the second special information takes a long time, when the game round for the second special information ends, the game round for the second special information is executed before the game round is started. There is a risk that some players may completely forget that the advance notice effect has appeared in a predetermined number of game rounds for the received first special information. In addition, by displaying the specific game image in the game rounds for the second special information, it becomes easier to forget that the advance notice effect has appeared in the predetermined number of game rounds for the first special information. . On the other hand, according to the feature vK1, when the specific game image is displayed and the game round for the second special information is executed, the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed. Thus, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the announcement effect from being forgotten, and remind the user that the announcement effect regarding the first special information is continuing. Therefore, according to the feature vK1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the feature vK1, in the specific game state in which the game round for the second special information can be executed, the game round for the first special information executed immediately before the start of the game round is displayed as it is. Since the predetermined suggestive information including the state of is continuously displayed, it is possible to more reliably remind the user that the advance notice effect regarding the first special information is continuing.

<Characteristic vL group>
The feature vL group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment and its modifications. In particular, case 3 in the eleventh embodiment corresponds.

[Feature vL1]
A first ball entry means (first starting port 33) that allows a game ball to enter,
A second ball entry means (second starting port 34) that allows a game ball to enter,
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (the value of a winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means;
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and the first special information acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entering means Acquisition information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, respectively;
means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot), wherein the determination of the second special information prior to the determination of the first special information;
When one game round is defined as the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended, a game round execution means (main control unit) for executing the game round MPU 62 on the board 61 side, and the game round control process of FIG. 511 executed by it),
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is divided into a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entering means, and a state that a game ball enters the second ball entering means. state transition means for transitioning between a second state that is a state that enables or facilitates the sphere;
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein the control mode in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means is a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode. a control means having at least a second control mode (high-frequency support mode) in which the entry of game balls to the second ball entry means is easier than
In a gaming machine comprising
The control means, in a predetermined game state, when a predetermined condition (the game ball passes through the through gates 35a and 35b) is established, the auxiliary comprising means for switching the state of the means from the first state to the second state;
Predetermined suggestive information display means for displaying predetermined suggestive information (image of bubbles included in an omen advance notice effect) in a predetermined number of the game times for the first special information (the effect of the game time U32 in FIG. 521);
A specific game state (especially A specific game state generating means (a long open state of the electric accessory 34a at normal time) that can generate a game state in which a game round can be executed for 2 holding,
Specific game image display means for displaying a specific game image corresponding to the specific game (shell image SH displayed in the variable display δ11 and the stop display δ12 for Special 2 Hold 1) during the occurrence of the specific game state;
Continuous display means for continuously displaying the predetermined suggestive information when the specific game image is displayed and the game round for the second special information is executed; means for displaying in the effect display area SA),
with
The continuous display means
The game regarding the first special information executed immediately before the start of the game cycle regarding the second special information executed by displaying the specific game image as the predetermined suggestive information to be continuously displayed. A gaming machine comprising means for displaying predetermined suggestive information (an image obtained by changing the captured image to increase the amount of bubbles in the modified example) obtained by changing the information displayed in each game.

According to the feature vL1, predetermined suggestive information is displayed in a predetermined number of game rounds for the first special information. For this reason, when there is special information that satisfies the first predetermined condition in the first special information stored in the acquired information storage means and that is scheduled to perform an effect with a high degree of expectation, a predetermined suggestion is made. With the information, it is possible to give a notice performance to the player that the first special information that satisfies the first predetermined condition exists in the first special information. Further, according to the feature vL1, a specific game that can be executed for the second special information a specific number of times that is equal to or greater than the upper limit number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in a predetermined game state. conditions can occur. A specific game image corresponding to the specific game is displayed while the specific game state is occurring. For this reason, it takes a long time to execute the game rounds for the second special information. It is possible to improve the interest of people. On the other hand, since the game round for the second special information takes a long time, when the game round for the second special information ends, the game round for the second special information is executed before the game round is started. There is a risk that some players may completely forget that the advance notice effect has appeared in a predetermined number of game rounds for the received first special information. In addition, by displaying the specific game image in the game rounds for the second special information, it becomes easier to forget that the advance notice effect has appeared in the predetermined number of game rounds for the first special information. . On the other hand, according to the feature vL1, when the specific game image is displayed and the game round for the second special information is executed, the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed. Thus, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the announcement effect from being forgotten, and remind the user that the announcement effect regarding the first special information is continuing. Therefore, according to the characteristic vL1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the feature vL1, in the specific game state in which the game round for the second special information can be executed, the information displayed in the game round for the first special information executed immediately before the start of the game round. is continuously displayed. For this reason, it is possible to provide the predetermined suggestive information in various ways, and it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

<Feature vM group>
The feature vM group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment and its modifications. In particular, case 3 in the eleventh embodiment corresponds.

[Feature vM1]
A first ball entry means (first starting port 33) that allows a game ball to enter,
A second ball entry means (second starting port 34) that allows a game ball to enter,
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (the value of a winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means;
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and the first special information acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entering means Acquisition information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, respectively;
means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot), wherein the determination of the second special information prior to the determination of the first special information;
When one game round is defined as the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended, a game round execution means (main control unit) for executing the game round MPU 62 on the board 61 side, and the game round control process of FIG. 511 executed by it),
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is divided into a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entering means, and a state that a game ball enters the second ball entering means. state transition means for transitioning between a second state that is a state that enables or facilitates the sphere;
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein the control mode in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means is a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode. a control means having at least a second control mode (high-frequency support mode) in which the entry of game balls to the second ball entry means is easier than
In a gaming machine comprising
The control means, in a predetermined game state, when a predetermined condition (the game ball passes through the through gates 35a and 35b) is established, the auxiliary comprising means for switching the state of the means from the first state to the second state;
Predetermined suggestive information display means for displaying predetermined suggestive information (image of bubbles included in an omen advance notice effect) in a predetermined number of the game times for the first special information (the effect of the game time U32 in FIG. 521);
A specific game state (especially A specific game state generating means (a long open state of the electric accessory 34a at normal time) that can generate a game state in which a game round can be executed for 2 holding,
Specific game image display means for displaying a specific game image corresponding to the specific game (shell image SH displayed in the variable display δ11 and the stop display δ12 for Special 2 Hold 1) during the occurrence of the specific game state;
Continuous display means for continuously displaying the predetermined suggestive information when the specific game image is displayed and the game round for the second special information is executed; means for displaying in the effect display area SA),
with
The predetermined suggestive information display means includes:
A gaming machine comprising means for displaying the predetermined suggestive information at a position that does not hinder visual recognition of a pattern for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means, which is displayed in the game round.

According to the feature vM1, predetermined suggestive information is displayed in a predetermined number of game rounds for the first special information. For this reason, when there is special information that satisfies the first predetermined condition in the first special information stored in the acquired information storage means and that is scheduled to perform an effect with a high degree of expectation, a predetermined suggestion is made. With the information, it is possible to give a notice performance to the player that the first special information that satisfies the first predetermined condition exists in the first special information. Further, according to the feature vM1, a specific game that can be executed for the second special information a specific number of times that is equal to or greater than the upper limit number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in a predetermined game state conditions can occur. A specific game image corresponding to the specific game is displayed while the specific game state is occurring. For this reason, it takes a long time to execute the game rounds for the second special information. It is possible to improve the interest of people. On the other hand, since the game round for the second special information takes a long time, when the game round for the second special information ends, the game round for the second special information is executed before the game round is started. There is a risk that some players may completely forget that the advance notice effect has appeared in a predetermined number of game rounds for the received first special information. In addition, by displaying the specific game image in the game rounds for the second special information, it becomes easier to forget that the advance notice effect has appeared in the predetermined number of game rounds for the first special information. . On the other hand, according to the feature vM1, when the specific game image is displayed and the game round for the second special information is executed, the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed. Thus, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the announcement effect from being forgotten, and remind the user that the announcement effect regarding the first special information is continuing. Therefore, according to the feature vM1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the feature vM1, it is possible to prevent the pattern for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means from becoming difficult to see due to the predetermined suggestive information. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

<Feature vN group>
The feature vN group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment and its modifications. In particular, case 3 in the eleventh embodiment corresponds.

[Feature vN1]
A first ball entry means (first starting port 33) that allows a game ball to enter,
A second ball entry means (second starting port 34) that allows a game ball to enter,
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (the value of a winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means;
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and the first special information acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entering means Acquisition information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, respectively;
means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot), wherein the determination of the second special information prior to the determination of the first special information;
When one game round is defined as the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended, a game round execution means (main control unit) for executing the game round MPU 62 on the board 61 side, and the game round control process of FIG. 511 executed by it),
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is divided into a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entering means, and a state that a game ball enters the second ball entering means. state transition means for transitioning between a second state that is a state that enables or facilitates the sphere;
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein the control mode in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means is a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode. a control means having at least a second control mode (high-frequency support mode) in which the entry of game balls to the second ball entry means is easier than
In a gaming machine comprising
The control means, in a predetermined game state, when a predetermined condition (the game ball passes through the through gates 35a and 35b) is established, the auxiliary comprising means for switching the state of the means from the first state to the second state;
Predetermined suggestive information display means for displaying predetermined suggestive information (image of bubbles included in an omen advance notice effect) in a predetermined number of the game times for the first special information (the effect of the game time U32 in FIG. 521);
A specific game state (especially A specific game state generating means (a long open state of the electric accessory 34a at normal time) that can generate a game state in which a game round can be executed for 2 holding,
Specific game image display means for displaying a specific game image corresponding to the specific game (shell image SH displayed in the variable display δ11 and the stop display δ12 for Special 2 Hold 1) during the occurrence of the specific game state;
Continuous display means for continuously displaying the predetermined suggestive information when the specific game image is displayed and the game round for the second special information is executed; means for displaying in the effect display area SA),
with
The predetermined suggestive information display means includes:
Means for displaying the predetermined suggestive information (layer A gaming machine characterized by comprising a display using

According to the feature vN1, predetermined suggestive information is displayed in a predetermined number of game rounds for the first special information. For this reason, when there is special information that satisfies the first predetermined condition in the first special information stored in the acquired information storage means and that is scheduled to perform an effect with a high degree of expectation, a predetermined suggestion is made. With the information, it is possible to give a notice performance to the player that the first special information that satisfies the first predetermined condition exists in the first special information. Further, according to the feature vN1, a specific game that can be executed for the second special information a specific number of times that is equal to or greater than the upper limit number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in a predetermined game state states can occur. A specific game image corresponding to the specific game is displayed while the specific game state is occurring. For this reason, it takes a long time to execute the game rounds for the second special information. It is possible to improve the interest of people. On the other hand, since the game round for the second special information takes a long time, when the game round for the second special information ends, the game round for the second special information is executed before the game round is started. There is a risk that some players may completely forget that the advance notice effect has appeared in a predetermined number of game rounds for the received first special information. In addition, by displaying the specific game image in the game rounds for the second special information, it becomes easier to forget that the advance notice effect has appeared in the predetermined number of game rounds for the first special information. . On the other hand, according to the feature vN1, when the specific game image is displayed and the game round for the second special information is executed, the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed. Thus, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the announcement effect from being forgotten, and remind the user that the announcement effect regarding the first special information is continuing. Therefore, according to the characteristic vN1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the feature vN1, when displaying the predetermined suggestive information in the predetermined number of game rounds for the first special information, the display surface of the pattern for announcing the result of determination by the determining means is shifted forward and backward. Since the predetermined suggested information is displayed at the position where the predetermined suggested information is displayed, display control can be performed independently for each of the hierarchy in which the predetermined suggested information is displayed and the hierarchy in which the pattern is displayed. Therefore, according to the feature vN1, it is possible to simplify the control.

<Feature vO group>
The feature vO group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment and its modifications. In particular, case 3 in the eleventh embodiment corresponds.

[Feature vO1]
A first ball entry means (first starting port 33) that allows a game ball to enter,
A second ball entry means (second starting port 34) that allows a game ball to enter,
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (the value of a winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means;
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and the first special information acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entering means Acquisition information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, respectively;
means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot), wherein the determination of the second special information prior to the determination of the first special information;
When one game round is defined as the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended, a game round execution means (main control unit) for executing the game round MPU 62 on the board 61 side, and the game round control process of FIG. 511 executed by it),
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is divided into a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entering means, and a state that a game ball enters the second ball entering means. state transition means for transitioning between a second state that is a state that enables or facilitates the sphere;
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein the control mode in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means is a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode. a control means having at least a second control mode (high-frequency support mode) in which the entry of game balls to the second ball entry means is easier than
In a gaming machine comprising
The control means, in a predetermined game state, when a predetermined condition (the game ball passes through the through gates 35a and 35b) is established, the auxiliary comprising means for switching the state of the means from the first state to the second state;
Predetermined suggestive information display means for displaying predetermined suggestive information (image of bubbles included in an omen advance notice effect) in a predetermined number of the game times for the first special information (the effect of the game time U32 in FIG. 521);
A specific game state (especially A specific game state generating means (a long open state of the electric accessory 34a at normal time) that can generate a game state in which a game round can be executed for 2 holding,
Specific game image display means for displaying a specific game image corresponding to the specific game (shell image SH displayed in the variable display δ11 and the stop display δ12 for Special 2 Hold 1) during the occurrence of the specific game state;
Continuous display means for continuously displaying the predetermined suggestive information when the specific game image is displayed and the game round for the second special information is executed; means for displaying in the effect display area SA),
with
The continuous display means
Means for displaying the predetermined suggestive information (layer A gaming machine characterized by comprising a display using

According to the feature vO1, predetermined suggestive information is displayed in a predetermined number of game rounds for the first special information. For this reason, when there is special information that satisfies the first predetermined condition in the first special information stored in the acquired information storage means and that is scheduled to perform an effect with a high degree of expectation, a predetermined suggestion is made. With the information, it is possible to give a notice performance to the player that the first special information that satisfies the first predetermined condition exists in the first special information. Further, according to the feature vO1, a specific game that can be executed for the second special information a specific number of times that is equal to or greater than the upper limit number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in a predetermined game state. states can occur. A specific game image corresponding to the specific game is displayed while the specific game state is occurring. For this reason, it takes a long time to execute the game rounds for the second special information. It is possible to improve the interest of people. On the other hand, since the game round for the second special information takes a long time, when the game round for the second special information ends, the game round for the second special information is executed before the game round is started. There is a risk that some players may completely forget that the advance notice effect has appeared in a predetermined number of game rounds for the received first special information. In addition, by displaying the specific game image in the game rounds for the second special information, it becomes easier to forget that the advance notice effect has appeared in the predetermined number of game rounds for the first special information. . On the other hand, according to the feature vO1, when the specific game image is displayed and the game round for the second special information is executed, the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed. Thus, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the announcement effect from being forgotten, and remind the user that the announcement effect regarding the first special information is continuing. Therefore, according to the feature vO1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the feature vO1, when the specific game image is displayed and the game round for the second special information is executed, the display surface of the pattern for announcing the result of determination by the determination means is shifted forward and backward. Since the predetermined suggestive information is displayed at the position where the predetermined suggested information is displayed, display control can be performed independently for each of the hierarchy in which the predetermined suggestive information is displayed and the hierarchy in which the pattern is displayed. Therefore, according to feature vO1, control can be simplified.

<Feature vP group>
The feature vP group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment and its modifications. In particular, case 3 in the eleventh embodiment corresponds.

[Feature vP1]
A first ball entry means (first starting port 33) that allows a game ball to enter,
A second ball entry means (second starting port 34) that allows a game ball to enter,
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (the value of a winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means;
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and the first special information acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entering means Acquisition information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, respectively;
means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot), wherein the determination of the second special information prior to the determination of the first special information;
When one game round is defined as the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended, a game round execution means (main control unit) for executing the game round MPU 62 on the board 61 side, and the game round control process of FIG. 511 executed by it),
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is divided into a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entering means, and a state that a game ball enters the second ball entering means. state transition means for transitioning between a second state that is a state that enables or facilitates the sphere;
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein the control mode in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means is a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode. a control means having at least a second control mode (high-frequency support mode) in which the entry of game balls to the second ball entry means is easier than
In a gaming machine comprising
The control means, in a predetermined game state, when a predetermined condition (the game ball passes through the through gates 35a and 35b) is established, the auxiliary comprising means for switching the state of the means from the first state to the second state;
Predetermined suggestive information display means for displaying predetermined suggestive information (image of bubbles included in an omen advance notice effect) in a predetermined number of the game times for the first special information (the effect of the game time U32 in FIG. 521);
A specific game state (especially A specific game state generating means (a long open state of the electric accessory 34a at normal time) that can generate a game state in which a game round can be executed for 2 holding,
Specific game image display means for displaying a specific game image corresponding to the specific game (shell image SH displayed in the variable display δ11 and the stop display δ12 for Special 2 Hold 1) during the occurrence of the specific game state;
Continuous display means for continuously displaying the predetermined suggestive information when the specific game image is displayed and the game round for the second special information is executed; means for displaying in the effect display area SA),
with
The specific game image display means is
Means for displaying the specific game image at a position shifted forward and backward with respect to the display surface of the pattern for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means, which is displayed in the game round (the layer of the first modification) structure, the upper layer displaying the shell image SH is located in front of the pattern layer).

According to the feature vP1, predetermined suggestive information is displayed in a predetermined number of game rounds for the first special information. For this reason, when there is special information that satisfies the first predetermined condition in the first special information stored in the acquired information storage means and that is scheduled to perform an effect with a high degree of expectation, a predetermined suggestion is made. With the information, it is possible to give a notice performance to the player that the first special information that satisfies the first predetermined condition exists in the first special information. Further, according to the feature vP1, a specific game that can be executed for the second special information a specific number of times that is equal to or greater than the upper limit number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in a predetermined game state. conditions can occur. A specific game image corresponding to the specific game is displayed while the specific game state is occurring. For this reason, it takes a long time to execute the game rounds for the second special information. It is possible to improve the interest of people. On the other hand, since the game round for the second special information takes a long time, when the game round for the second special information ends, the game round for the second special information is executed before the game round is started. There is a risk that some players may completely forget that the advance notice effect has appeared in a predetermined number of game rounds for the received first special information. In addition, by displaying the specific game image in the game rounds for the second special information, it becomes easier to forget that the advance notice effect has appeared in the predetermined number of game rounds for the first special information. . On the other hand, according to the feature vP1, when the specific game image is displayed and the game round for the second special information is executed, the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed. Thus, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the announcement effect from being forgotten, and remind the user that the announcement effect regarding the first special information is continuing. Therefore, according to the feature vP1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the feature vP1, when the specific game image corresponding to the specific game is displayed while the fixed game state is occurring, the display surface of the pattern for announcing the result of determination by the determination means is shifted forward and backward. Since the specific effect image is displayed at the position where the specific effect image is displayed, drawing can be controlled independently in each of the hierarchy in which the specific effect image is displayed and the hierarchy in which the pattern is displayed. Therefore, according to feature vP1, control can be simplified.

<Feature vQ group>
The feature vQ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment and its modifications. In particular, case 3 in the eleventh embodiment corresponds.

[Feature vQ1]
A first ball entry means (first starting port 33) that allows a game ball to enter,
A second ball entry means (second starting port 34) that allows a game ball to enter,
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (the value of a winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means;
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and the first special information acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entering means Acquisition information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, respectively;
means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot), wherein the determination of the second special information prior to the determination of the first special information;
When one game round is defined as the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended, a game round execution means (main control unit) for executing the game round MPU 62 on the board 61 side, and the game round control process of FIG. 511 executed by it),
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is divided into a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entering means, and a state that a game ball enters the second ball entering means. state transition means for transitioning between a second state that is a state that enables or facilitates the sphere;
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein the control mode in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means is a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode. a control means having at least a second control mode (high-frequency support mode) in which the entry of game balls to the second ball entry means is easier than
In a gaming machine comprising
The control means, in a predetermined game state, when a predetermined condition (the game ball passes through the through gates 35a and 35b) is established, the auxiliary comprising means for switching the state of the means from the first state to the second state;
Predetermined suggestive information display means for displaying predetermined suggestive information (image of bubbles included in an omen advance notice effect) in a predetermined number of the game times for the first special information (the effect of the game time U32 in FIG. 521);
A specific game state (especially A specific game state generating means (a long open state of the electric accessory 34a at normal time) that can generate a game state in which a game round can be executed for 2 holding,
Specific game image display means for displaying a specific game image corresponding to the specific game (shell image SH displayed in the variable display δ11 and the stop display δ12 for Special 2 Hold 1) during the occurrence of the specific game state;
Continuous display means for continuously displaying the predetermined suggestive information when the specific game image is displayed and the game round for the second special information is executed; means for displaying in the effect display area SA),
with
The predetermined suggestive information suggests a situation in the game round with respect to the first special information executed immediately before the start of the game round with respect to the second special information executed with the specific game image displayed. A gaming machine characterized in that it includes information to display (information representing the captured image described as a modification in characters).

According to the feature vQ1, predetermined suggestive information is displayed in a predetermined number of game rounds for the first special information. For this reason, when there is special information that satisfies the first predetermined condition in the first special information stored in the acquired information storage means and that is scheduled to perform an effect with a high degree of expectation, a predetermined suggestion is made. With the information, it is possible to give a notice performance to the player that the first special information that satisfies the first predetermined condition exists in the first special information. Further, according to the feature vQ1, a specific game that can be executed for the second special information a specific number of times that is equal to or greater than the upper limit number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in a predetermined game state. conditions can occur. A specific game image corresponding to the specific game is displayed while the specific game state is occurring. For this reason, it takes a long time to execute the game rounds for the second special information. It is possible to improve the interest of people. On the other hand, since the game round for the second special information takes a long time, when the game round for the second special information ends, the game round for the second special information is executed before the game round is started. There is a risk that some players may completely forget that the advance notice effect has appeared in a predetermined number of game rounds for the received first special information. In addition, by displaying the specific game image in the game rounds for the second special information, it becomes easier to forget that the advance notice effect has appeared in the predetermined number of game rounds for the first special information. . On the other hand, according to the feature vQ1, when the specific game image is displayed and the game round for the second special information is executed, the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed. Thus, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the announcement effect from being forgotten, and remind the user that the announcement effect regarding the first special information is continuing. Therefore, according to the characteristic vQ1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the feature vQ1, in a specific game state in which a game round for the second special information can be executed, it suggests the situation in the game round for the first special information executed immediately before the start of the game round. Information will continue to be displayed. For this reason, it is possible to provide the predetermined suggestive information in various ways, and it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

<Feature vR group>
The feature vR group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment and its modifications. In particular, case 3 in the eleventh embodiment corresponds.

[Feature vR1]
A first ball entry means (first starting port 33) that allows a game ball to enter,
A second ball entry means (second starting port 34) that allows a game ball to enter,
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (the value of a winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means;
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and the first special information acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entering means Acquisition information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, respectively;
means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot), wherein the determination of the second special information prior to the determination of the first special information;
When one game round is defined as the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended, a game round execution means (main control unit) for executing the game round MPU 62 on the board 61 side, and the game round control process of FIG. 511 executed by it),
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is divided into a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entering means, and a state that a game ball enters the second ball entering means. state transition means for transitioning between a second state that is a state that enables or facilitates the sphere;
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein the control mode in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means is a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode. a control means having at least a second control mode (high-frequency support mode) in which the entry of game balls to the second ball entry means is easier than
In a gaming machine comprising
The control means, in a predetermined game state, when a predetermined condition (the game ball passes through the through gates 35a and 35b) is established, the auxiliary comprising means for switching the state of the means from the first state to the second state;
Predetermined suggestive information display means for displaying predetermined suggestive information (image of bubbles included in an omen advance notice effect) in a predetermined number of the game times for the first special information (the effect of the game time U32 in FIG. 521);
A specific game state (especially A specific game state generating means (a long open state of the electric accessory 34a at normal time) that can generate a game state in which a game round can be executed for 2 holding,
Specific game image display means for displaying a specific game image corresponding to the specific game (shell image SH displayed in the variable display δ11 and the stop display δ12 for Special 2 Hold 1) during the occurrence of the specific game state;
Continuous display means for continuously displaying the predetermined suggestive information when the specific game image is displayed and the game round for the second special information is executed; means for displaying in the effect display area SA),
with
A game machine, wherein the predetermined game state is a game state in which the control mode is the first control mode.

According to the feature vR1, predetermined suggestive information is displayed in a predetermined number of game rounds for the first special information. For this reason, when there is special information that satisfies the first predetermined condition in the first special information stored in the acquired information storage means and that is scheduled to perform an effect with a high degree of expectation, a predetermined suggestion is made. With the information, it is possible to give a notice performance to the player that the first special information that satisfies the first predetermined condition exists in the first special information. Further, according to the feature vR1, a specific game that can be executed with respect to the second special information a specific number of times that is equal to or greater than the upper limit number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in a predetermined game state. states can occur. A specific game image corresponding to the specific game is displayed while the specific game state is occurring. For this reason, it takes a long time to execute the game rounds for the second special information. It is possible to improve the interest of people. On the other hand, since the game round for the second special information takes a long time, when the game round for the second special information ends, the game round for the second special information is executed before the game round is started. There is a risk that some players may completely forget that the advance notice effect has appeared in a predetermined number of game rounds for the received first special information. In addition, by displaying the specific game image in the game rounds for the second special information, it becomes easier to forget that the advance notice effect has appeared in the predetermined number of game rounds for the first special information. . On the other hand, according to the feature vR1, when the specific game image is displayed and the game round for the second special information is executed, the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed. Thus, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the announcement effect from being forgotten, and remind the user that the announcement effect regarding the first special information is continuing. Therefore, according to the feature vR1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

According to the feature vR1, in the predetermined game state in which the control mode is the first control mode, the advance notice effect for the first special information can be performed.

<Feature wA group>
The feature wA group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the twelfth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature wA1]
A ball entry means (first starting port 33) that allows a game ball to enter,
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (value of winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into said ball entering means;
Acquisition information storage means (first reservation area Ra) capable of storing up to a specific upper limit number of the special information acquired by the game ball entering the ball entry means;
an unexecuted pending display area (unexecuted pending display area Dh) capable of displaying a number of unexecuted pending display information (unexecuted pending display icon H) corresponding to the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means; unexecuted pending display means for displaying;
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot) for each game round;
game spin control means for controlling the game spin action when the game action for notifying the result of the determination by the judging means is started and the game action is ended as one game spin action; ,
The possibility that the special information corresponding to the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area satisfies the predetermined condition is ranked from high to low set according to the level of the possibility. pending change means for suggesting by changing the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information according to a plurality of stages;
means for restricting a direction of change in display mode of the unexecuted pending display information to one direction from the lower side to the upper side;
An already executed pending display area (already executed a pending execution display means for displaying a pending display area (Dz);
with
As the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information, a first display mode (for example, a green display color) and a second display mode that is a higher stage than the first display mode among the plurality of stages ( red display color) and at least
When specific pending display information shifts to the already-executed pending display area, under certain conditions (by shifting the variable executing pending display icon Y to the already-executed pending display area, a predetermined number of already-executed pending display In a situation where all the execution pending display icons Z displayed in the area Dz are aligned in the same display color), when the specific pending display information is displayed in the second display mode It is more advantageous for the player when it is displayed in the first display mode (already-executed suspension notice)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, a number of unexecuted pending display information corresponding to the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means is displayed in the unexecuted pending display area, and the game cycle control means is displayed in the already executed pending display area. The pending display information corresponding to the game round after execution of the game round operation by is displayed as the already-executed pending display information. Then, when the specific pending display information shifts to the already-executed pending display area, under specific conditions, the specific pending display information is displayed in the first display mode rather than in the second display mode. When it is displayed, it is more advantageous for the player. For this reason, even in the first display mode in which the possibility that the special information corresponding to the pending display information satisfies the predetermined condition is lower than in the second display mode, under the specific conditions, the pending display information is displayed in the second display mode. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation to move to the already-executed pending display area while maintaining the first display mode without changing the display mode. In addition, in the first display mode of the reserved display information, a special message regarding the advantage for the player is displayed, which is different from the stage of the possibility that the special information set for the first display mode satisfies the predetermined condition. can make sense. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature wA2]
A gaming machine according to feature wA1,
means for changing the display mode of the already-executed pending display information displayed in the already-executed pending display area (assist setting processing in step S9 in FIG. 567, cases 3 and 4 correspond); Characteristic game machine.

According to this feature, the display mode of the already-executed pending display information displayed in the already-executed pending display area may change. Here, being under a specific condition means that, for example, by shifting specific pending display information to the pending execution display area, all of the display modes of the pending execution display information in the pending execution display area are the same. Assuming that the display mode is the same, for example, all of the already-executed pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of already-executed pending display areas are displayed in the same display mode to the player. Even in a situation where the mode does not match, the display mode of the already-executed pending display information displayed in the already-executed pending display area may change, and the specific pending display information may be displayed in the already-executed pending display area. By shifting, it is possible to create a sense of expectation that all the already-executed pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of already-executed pending display areas will be arranged in the same display mode. Then, the display mode of the already-executed-suspended display information actually displayed in the already-executed-suspended display area changes, and the specified number of already-executed-suspended display information shifts to the already-executed-suspended display area. When all the already-executed pending display information displayed in the area are displayed in the same display mode, the player can be greatly delighted.

[Feature wA3]
A gaming machine according to feature wA1 or feature wA2,
A gaming machine, wherein a display shape of the executed pending display information is different from a display shape of the unexecuted pending display information.

According to this feature, the display shape of the already-executed pending display information is different from the display shape of the unexecuted-suspended display information, so that it is easy to distinguish between the unexecuted-suspended display information and the already-executed pending display information. For this reason, it becomes easy to determine that the specific pending display information has moved from the unexecuted pending display area to the already executed pending display area via the varying active pending display area. Therefore, by improving the visibility, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Feature wA4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features wA1 to wA3,
a game state transition means capable of shifting the game state of the gaming machine from the first game state to a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state;
In the second gaming state, when the specific pending display information shifts to the already-executed pending display area, the specific pending display information is displayed in the second display mode. a means for not executing control that is more advantageous for the player when displayed in the display mode of
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to this feature, in the second game state, which is more advantageous to the player than in the first game state, when the specific reserved display information shifts to the already-executed reserved display area, the specific reserved display information is displayed in the second game state. A control is not executed that makes the player more advantageous when displayed in the first display mode than when displayed in the display mode. The second game state is already more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and the need for the new control described above is lower than in the first game state. Therefore, in this feature, in the second game state, the control can be simplified by not performing the new control described above, and in the first game state, the specific pending display information is displayed in the execution pending display area. , it is more advantageous for the player when the specific pending display information is displayed in the first display mode than in the second display mode. It is possible to improve the interest in the game by executing the new control.

[Feature wA5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features wA1 to wA4,
The predetermined number of pieces of already-executed pending display information that can be displayed in the already-executed pending display area is constant (configuration of modification 13).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, since the predetermined number of pieces of already-executed pending display information that can be displayed in the already-executed pending display area is constant, the display modes of the already-executed pending display information displayed in the already-executed pending display area are all the same. The degree of difficulty to match is constant. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling unnecessary anticipation or disappointment due to a change in the difficulty level.

[Feature wA6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features wA1 to wA5,
The execution suspension display information displayed in the execution suspension display area is erased based on the fulfillment of an erasing condition (execution suspension display icon Z is erased after a predetermined time has passed since it is determined that the game has not been played). A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for erasing.

According to this feature, by erasing the already-executed pending display information displayed in the already-executed pending display area based on the fulfillment of the erasing condition, when the player changes, the previous player's game is saved. It is possible to suppress the remaining of the already-executed pending display information. For this reason, when the player changes, the game can be started in a state in which the already-executed pending display information does not exist in the already-executed pending display area, and the already-executed pending display information remains in the already-executed pending display area. It does not make the player feel annoyed.

[Feature wA7]
A gaming machine according to any one of features wA1 to wA6,
An effect indicating that there is a high advantage for the player when the specific reserved display information shifts to the already-executed reserved display area in the first display mode under the specific condition (female character effect setting processing) A game machine characterized by comprising means for executing

According to this feature, when specific reserved display information moves to the already-executed reserved display area in the first display mode under specific conditions, an effect indicating that the player is highly advantageous is executed. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a greater sense of expectation.

[Feature wA8]
A gaming machine according to any one of features wA1 to wA7,
A special game state generation means is provided for generating a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player after the game rotation operation is completed when the determination means determines that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition. ,
A gaming machine characterized in that the high advantage for the player is that the occurrence of the special game state is confirmed.

According to this feature, when the specific pending display information moves to the already-executed pending display area, under specific conditions, when the specific pending display information is displayed in the first display mode, the special game The occurrence of the condition is confirmed. For this reason, it is possible to give the player a greater sense of expectation for the display of the pending display information to be shifted to the already-executed pending display area in the first display mode under specific conditions. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature wA9]
A gaming machine according to any one of features wA1 to wA8,
The gaming machine, wherein the pending change means includes means for changing a display color of the unexecuted pending display information as one aspect of changing the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information.

According to this feature, by changing the display color of the unexecuted pending display information, it is possible to indicate the degree of possibility that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition. In addition, since the display mode is the display color, it is obvious at a glance whether or not the colors are all the same. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature wA10]
A gaming machine according to any one of features wA1 to wA9,
Means for changing the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area from the first display mode to the second display mode (processing for removing the same color when deviating in FIG. 568) ) is provided.

According to this feature, the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area can be changed from the first display mode to the second display mode. Then, when the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area is changed from the first display mode to the second display mode, the unexecuted pending display information is changed to the specific display mode. When shifting to the already-executed pending display area as the pending display information, there is no need to shift to the first display mode. For this reason, the player has the specific pending display information displayed in the first display mode in the unexecuted pending display area, and the specific pending display information remains in the first display mode under specific conditions. When the player moved to the execution suspension display area and expected that the player's advantage would increase, the display mode changed to the second display mode, and the expected advantage was not given. Expectations fall short and you get discouraged. On the other hand, the expectation remains for the second display mode, in which the special information corresponding to the unexecuted pending display information is more likely to satisfy the predetermined condition than the first display mode. As described above, according to this feature, it is possible to give the player the ups and downs of conflicting emotions such as expectation and disappointment, and to further improve the interest of the game.

[Feature wA11]
A gaming machine according to any one of features wA1 to wA10,
one of the plurality of unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area, one of the unexecuted pending display information closest to the already executed pending display area is displayed in a mode other than the first display mode; to the first display mode (assist setting process in the already-executed suspension notice process in FIG. 567).

According to this feature, of the plurality of unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area, one of the unexecuted pending display information closest to the already executed pending display area is displayed in the first display mode. Since there is a case where the display mode is changed from the display mode other than the display mode to the first display mode, the specific suspension display information to be shifted to the already-executed suspension display area is displayed in the first display mode under specific conditions so that the player can It is possible to impart great joy to the player who has been expecting the occurrence of the phenomenon that the advantage of the game is high.

[Feature wA12]
A gaming machine according to any one of features wA1 to wA11,
one of the plurality of unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area, one of the unexecuted pending display information closest to the already executed pending display area from the first display mode; A gaming machine comprising means for changing to a display mode other than the first display mode (processing for removing the same color when out).

According to this feature, of the plurality of unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area, one of the unexecuted pending display information closest to the already executed pending display area is displayed in the first display mode. to a display mode other than the first display mode. It is possible to give a great feeling of disappointment to the player who expected that the phenomenon of the high advantage of the game would occur.

[Feature wA13]
A gaming machine according to any one of features wA1 to wA12,
the first display mode is a first display color of the unexecuted pending display information;
the second display mode is a second display color of the unexecuted pending display information;
A first display color changing means for changing the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area from a display color other than the first display color to the first display color (executed display in FIG. 567). Assist setting processing in pending notice processing);
When changing the display color by the first display color changing means, the shape of the unexecuted pending display information whose display color is to be changed is changed by changing the display color displayed in the unexecuted pending display area. (Modification 5)
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to this feature, the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area is changed from a display color other than the first display color to the first display color, and when changing the display color, the The shape of the unexecuted pending display information whose display color is to be changed differs from the shape of the unexecuted pending display information other than the unexecuted pending display information whose display color is to be changed, displayed in the unexecuted pending display area. Since the display color is changed to a shape that changes to the shape of the display, the player can pay attention to the change in the first display color of the non-execution reservation display information whose display color is to be changed, giving the player a greater sense of expectation. can do.

[Feature wA14]
A gaming machine according to any one of features wA1 to wA13,
Display mode changing means for changing the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area from a display mode other than the first display mode to the first display mode (for an already executed pending notice in FIG. 567). Assist setting processing in processing);
When the display mode is changed by the display mode changing means, moving objects (tangible objects such as flower petals, confetti, fireballs, etc., and intangible objects such as light rays, laser beams, radio waves, etc.) means to reach the object) and (Modification 5)
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to this feature, when the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area is changed from a display mode other than the first display mode to the first display mode, the moving object is displayed in the unexecuted pending display information. is reached, the player can pay attention to the change in the display mode of the unexecuted reservation display information whose display mode is to be changed to the first display mode, thereby giving the player a further sense of expectation. can be done.

[Feature wA15]
A gaming machine according to any one of features wA1 to wA14,
A means capable of executing the same presentation mode when the display mode of the already executed pending display information is changed and when the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information is changed. game machine.

According to this feature, there is provided means capable of executing the same presentation mode when the display mode of the already-executed pending display information is changed and when the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information is changed, A player who recognizes the effect mode cannot determine whether the display mode of the pending execution display information is changed or the display mode of the non-execution pending display information is changed. Therefore, for example, in a situation where if the display mode of one piece of already-executed-suspended display information changes, all of the already-executed-suspended display information displayed in a predetermined number of already-executed-suspended display areas are aligned in the same display mode, the effect When the mode is executed, the player has an expectation that the display mode of the one already-executed pending display information should be changed instead of changing the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information. become. Thus, according to this feature, it is possible to make the player have a new sense of anticipation that has not existed in the past, and to improve the amusement of the game.

[Feature wA16]
A gaming machine according to any one of features wA1 to wA15,
The apparatus is characterized by comprising a means capable of executing different presentation modes depending on whether the display mode of the already-executed pending display information is changed and when the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information is changed. game machine.

According to this feature, the means capable of executing a different effect mode depending on whether the display mode of the already executed pending display information is changed or the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information is changed. A player who recognizes the effect mode can determine whether the display mode of the already executed pending display information is changed or the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information is changed. Therefore, for example, when an effect mode corresponding to a change in the display mode of the already-executed pending display information is executed, the player will not know what the current display mode of the already-executed pending display information is. On the other hand, when the effect mode corresponding to the change in the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information is executed, the player will display the current unexecuted pending display information. You will have a strong interest in how the mode is. Thus, according to this feature, it is possible to make the player strongly interested in the current display mode of the execution pending display information or the non-execution pending display information, thereby improving the amusement of the game. .

[Feature wA17]
A gaming machine according to any one of features wA1 to wA16,
means capable of executing a first change suggesting effect suggesting that the display mode of the executed pending display information or the unexecuted pending display information will change;
A gaming machine, wherein the display mode may not change even when the first change suggesting effect is executed.

According to this feature, even when the first change suggestion effect suggesting that the display mode of the already-executed pending display information or the unexecuted pending display information is changed, the already-executed pending display information or the unexecuted pending display information or the unexecuted pending display information Since the display mode of the pending display information may not change, for example, if the display mode of one already-executed pending display information changes, all the already-executed pending display information displayed in a predetermined number of already-executed pending display areas will change. When the first change suggesting effect is executed in a situation where the display mode is the same, the player expects an event in which the display mode changes (the first change suggesting effect is not a fake). Furthermore, out of the execution pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of execution pending display areas, there is an expectation that the display mode of the one execution pending display information will be changed. It will be. Thus, according to this feature, it is possible to make the player have a new sense of anticipation that has not existed in the past, and to improve the amusement of the game.

[Feature wA18]
A gaming machine according to any one of features wA1 to wA17,
means capable of executing a second change suggesting effect suggesting a change in the display mode of the executed pending display information or the unexecuted pending display information;
A gaming machine characterized in that the display mode always changes when the second change suggesting effect is executed.

According to this feature, when the second change-suggestion effect suggesting a change in the display mode of the already-executed pending display information or the unexecuted pending display information is executed, the already-executed pending display information or the unexecuted pending display Since the display mode of information always changes, for example, if the display mode of one piece of already-executed-suspended display information changes, all of the already-executed-suspended display information displayed in a predetermined number of already-executed-suspended display areas will have the same display mode. When the second change suggesting effect is executed in a situation where all are aligned, the player selects one of the already executed pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of already executed pending display areas. The user has a feeling of expectation that the display mode of information should be changed. In addition, for example, in a situation where all the unexecuted pending display information has already been arranged in the same display mode, when the second change suggesting effect is executed, the player can change the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information. Since the user does not want to change the display mode of the already-executed pending display information, he/she feels that he/she wants the display mode to change. Thus, according to this feature, it is possible to make the player feel a new emotion that has never existed in the past, and to improve the interest in the game.

[Feature wA19]
A gaming machine according to any one of features wA1 to wA18,
A gaming machine comprising means capable of executing an effect suggesting the display mode after a change in the already-executed pending display information or the unexecuted pending display information.

According to this feature, since it is provided with a means capable of executing an effect that suggests a display mode after a change in the execution pending display information or the unexecuted pending display information, for example, in a situation where the effect is executed, the effect If there is one piece of already-executed pending display information for which all of the already-executed pending display information will be aligned in the same display mode if it changes to the display mode after the suggested change, the player can The user has a feeling of expectation that the already-executed pending display information should be changed to a display mode suggested by the effect. Thus, according to this feature, it is possible to make the player feel a new feeling that has never existed in the past, and to improve the interest in the game.

<Feature wB group>
The feature wB group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the twelfth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature wB1]
A ball entry means (first starting port 33) that allows a game ball to enter,
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (value of winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into said ball entering means;
Acquisition information storage means (first reservation area Ra) capable of storing up to a specific upper limit number of the special information acquired by the game ball entering the ball entry means;
an unexecuted pending display area (unexecuted pending display area Dh) capable of displaying a number of unexecuted pending display information (unexecuted pending display icon H) corresponding to the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means; unexecuted pending display means for displaying;
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot) for each game round;
game spin control means for controlling the game spin action when the game action for notifying the result of the determination by the judging means is started and the game action is ended as one game spin action; ,
The possibility that the special information corresponding to the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area satisfies the predetermined condition is ranked from high to low set according to the level of the possibility. pending change means for suggesting by changing the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information according to a plurality of stages;
means for restricting a direction of change in display mode of the unexecuted pending display information to one direction from the lower side to the upper side;
An already executed pending display area (already executed an already-executed pending display means for displaying a pending display area (Dz);
means for changing the display mode of the already-executed pending display information displayed in the already-executed pending display area (assist setting processing in step S9 in FIG. 567, cases 3 and 4 correspond);
with
As the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information, a first display mode (for example, a green display color) and a second display mode that is a higher stage than the first display mode among the plurality of stages ( red display color) and at least
When specific pending display information shifts to the already-executed pending display area, under certain conditions (by shifting the variable executing pending display icon Y to the already-executed pending display area, a predetermined number of already-executed pending display In a situation where all the execution pending display icons Z displayed in the area Dz are aligned in the same display color), when the specific pending display information is displayed in the second display mode It is more advantageous for the player when it is displayed in the first display mode (already-executed suspension notice)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, a number of pieces of unexecuted pending display information corresponding to the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means are displayed in the unexecuted pending display area, and the game cycle control means is displayed in the executed pending display area. The pending display information corresponding to the game round after execution of the game round operation by is displayed as the already-executed pending display information. Then, when the specific pending display information moves to the already-executed pending display area, under specific conditions, the specific pending display information is displayed in the first display mode rather than in the second display mode. When it is displayed, it is more advantageous for the player. For this reason, even in the first display mode in which the possibility that the special information corresponding to the pending display information satisfies the predetermined condition is lower than in the second display mode, under the specific conditions, the pending display information is the second display mode. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation to move to the already-executed pending display area while maintaining the first display mode without changing the display mode. In addition, in the first display mode of the reserved display information, a special message regarding the advantage for the player is displayed, which is different from the stage of the possibility that the special information set for the first display mode satisfies the predetermined condition. can make sense. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to this feature, the display mode of the already-executed pending display information displayed in the already-executed pending display area may change. Here, being under a specific condition means that, for example, by shifting specific pending display information to the pending execution display area, all of the display modes of the pending execution display information in the pending execution display area are the same. Assuming that the display mode is the same, for example, all of the already-executed pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of already-executed pending display areas are displayed in the same display mode to the player. Even in a situation where the mode does not match, the display mode of the already-executed pending display information displayed in the already-executed pending display area may change, and the specific pending display information may be displayed in the already-executed pending display area. By shifting, it is possible to create a sense of expectation that all the already-executed pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of already-executed pending display areas will be arranged in the same display mode. Then, the display mode of the already-executed-suspended display information actually displayed in the already-executed-suspended display area changes, and the specified number of already-executed-suspended display information shifts to the already-executed-suspended display area. When all the already-executed pending display information displayed in the area are displayed in the same display mode, the player can be greatly delighted.

<Characteristic wC group>
The feature wC group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the twelfth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature wC1]
A ball entry means (first starting port 33) that allows a game ball to enter,
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (value of winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into said ball entering means;
Acquisition information storage means (first reservation area Ra) capable of storing up to a specific upper limit number of the special information acquired by the game ball entering the ball entry means;
an unexecuted pending display area (unexecuted pending display area Dh) capable of displaying a number of unexecuted pending display information (unexecuted pending display icon H) corresponding to the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means; unexecuted pending display means for displaying;
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot) for each game round;
game spin control means for controlling the game spin action when the game action for notifying the result of the determination by the judging means is started and the game action is ended as one game spin action; ,
The possibility that the special information corresponding to the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area satisfies the predetermined condition is ranked from high to low set according to the level of the possibility. pending change means for suggesting by changing the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information according to a plurality of stages;
means for restricting a direction of change in display mode of the unexecuted pending display information to one direction from the lower side to the upper side;
An already executed pending display area (already executed a pending execution display means for displaying a pending display area (Dz);
with
As the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information, a first display mode (for example, a green display color) and a second display mode that is a higher stage than the first display mode among the plurality of stages ( red display color) and at least
The display shape of the executed pending display information is different from the display shape of the unexecuted pending display information,
When specific pending display information shifts to the already-executed pending display area, under certain conditions (by shifting the variable executing pending display icon Y to the already-executed pending display area, a predetermined number of already-executed pending display In a situation where all the execution pending display icons Z displayed in the area Dz are aligned in the same display color), when the specific pending display information is displayed in the second display mode It is more advantageous for the player when it is displayed in the first display mode (already-executed suspension notice)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, a number of unexecuted pending display information corresponding to the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means is displayed in the unexecuted pending display area, and the game cycle control means is displayed in the already executed pending display area. The pending display information corresponding to the game round after execution of the game round operation by is displayed as the already-executed pending display information. Then, when the specific pending display information shifts to the already-executed pending display area, under specific conditions, the specific pending display information is displayed in the first display mode rather than in the second display mode. When it is displayed, it is more advantageous for the player. For this reason, even in the first display mode in which the possibility that the special information corresponding to the pending display information satisfies the predetermined condition is lower than in the second display mode, under the specific conditions, the pending display information is displayed in the second display mode. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation to move to the already-executed pending display area while maintaining the first display mode without changing the display mode. In addition, in the first display mode of the reserved display information, a special message regarding the advantage for the player is displayed, which is different from the stage of the possibility that the special information set for the first display mode satisfies the predetermined condition. can make sense. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to this feature, the display shape of the already-executed pending display information is different from the display shape of the unexecuted-suspended display information, so that it is easy to distinguish between the unexecuted-suspended display information and the already-executed pending display information. For this reason, it becomes easy to determine that the specific pending display information has moved from the unexecuted pending display area to the already executed pending display area via the varying active pending display area. Therefore, by improving the visibility, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

<Feature wD group>
The feature wD group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the twelfth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature wD1]
A ball entry means (first starting port 33) that allows a game ball to enter,
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (value of winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into said ball entering means;
Acquisition information storage means (first reservation area Ra) capable of storing up to a specific upper limit number of the special information acquired by the game ball entering the ball entry means;
an unexecuted pending display area (unexecuted pending display area Dh) capable of displaying a number of unexecuted pending display information (unexecuted pending display icon H) corresponding to the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means; unexecuted pending display means for displaying;
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot) for each game round;
game spin control means for controlling the game spin action when the game action for notifying the result of the determination by the judging means is started and the game action is ended as one game spin action; ,
The possibility that the special information corresponding to the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area satisfies the predetermined condition is ranked from high to low set according to the level of the possibility. pending change means for suggesting by changing the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information according to a plurality of stages;
means for restricting a direction of change in display mode of the unexecuted pending display information to one direction from the lower side to the upper side;
An already executed pending display area (already executed a pending execution display means for displaying a pending display area (Dz);
a game state transition means capable of shifting the game state of the gaming machine from the first game state to a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state;
with
As the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information, a first display mode (for example, a green display color) and a second display mode that is a higher stage than the first display mode among the plurality of stages ( red display color) and at least
When specific pending display information shifts to the already-executed pending display area, under certain conditions (by shifting the variable executing pending display icon Y to the already-executed pending display area, a predetermined number of already-executed pending display In a situation where all the execution pending display icons Z displayed in the area Dz are aligned in the same display color), when the specific pending display information is displayed in the second display mode It is more advantageous for the player when it is displayed in the first display mode (already-executed suspension notice),
In the second gaming state, when the specific pending display information shifts to the already-executed pending display area, the specific pending display information is displayed in the second display mode. A game machine characterized by comprising a means for not executing a control that is more advantageous for the player when the display mode is displayed.

According to this feature, a number of unexecuted pending display information corresponding to the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means is displayed in the unexecuted pending display area, and the game cycle control means is displayed in the already executed pending display area. The pending display information corresponding to the game round after execution of the game round operation by is displayed as the already-executed pending display information. Then, when the specific pending display information shifts to the already-executed pending display area, under specific conditions, the specific pending display information is displayed in the first display mode rather than in the second display mode. When it is displayed, it is more advantageous for the player. For this reason, even in the first display mode in which the possibility that the special information corresponding to the pending display information satisfies the predetermined condition is lower than in the second display mode, under the specific conditions, the pending display information is displayed in the second display mode. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation to move to the already-executed pending display area while maintaining the first display mode without changing the display mode. In addition, in the first display mode of the reserved display information, a special message regarding the advantage for the player is displayed, which is different from the stage of the possibility that the special information set for the first display mode satisfies the predetermined condition. can make sense. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to this feature, in the second gaming state, which is more advantageous to the player than in the first gaming state, when the specific pending display information shifts to the already-executed pending display area, the specific pending display information The control is not executed so that the player is more advantageous when displayed in the first display mode than when displayed in the second display mode. The second game state is already more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and the need for the new control described above is lower than in the first game state. Therefore, in this feature, in the second game state, the control can be simplified by not performing the new control described above, and in the first game state, the specific pending display information is displayed in the execution pending display area. , it is more advantageous for the player when the specific pending display information is displayed in the first display mode than in the second display mode. It is possible to improve the interest in the game by executing the new control.

<Feature wE group>
The feature wE group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the twelfth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature wE1]
A ball entry means (first starting port 33) that allows a game ball to enter,
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (value of winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into said ball entering means;
Acquisition information storage means (first reservation area Ra) capable of storing up to a specific upper limit number of the special information acquired by the game ball entering the ball entry means;
an unexecuted pending display area (unexecuted pending display area Dh) capable of displaying a number of unexecuted pending display information (unexecuted pending display icon H) corresponding to the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means; unexecuted pending display means for displaying;
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot) for each game round;
game spin control means for controlling the game spin action when the game action for notifying the result of the determination by the judging means is started and the game action is ended as one game spin action; ,
The possibility that the special information corresponding to the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area satisfies the predetermined condition is ranked from high to low set according to the level of the possibility. pending change means for suggesting by changing the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information according to a plurality of stages;
means for restricting a direction of change in display mode of the unexecuted pending display information to one direction from the lower side to the upper side;
An already executed pending display area (already executed a pending execution display means for displaying a pending display area (Dz);
with
As the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information, a first display mode (for example, a green display color) and a second display mode that is a higher stage than the first display mode among the plurality of stages ( red display color) and at least
the predetermined number of pieces of the already-executed pending display information that can be displayed in the already-executed pending display area is constant;
When specific pending display information shifts to the already-executed pending display area, under certain conditions (by shifting the variable executing pending display icon Y to the already-executed pending display area, a predetermined number of already-executed pending display In a situation where all the execution pending display icons Z displayed in the area Dz are aligned in the same display color), when the specific pending display information is displayed in the second display mode It is more advantageous for the player when it is displayed in the first display mode (already-executed suspension notice)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, a number of unexecuted pending display information corresponding to the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means is displayed in the unexecuted pending display area, and the game cycle control means is displayed in the already executed pending display area. The pending display information corresponding to the game round after execution of the game round operation by is displayed as the already-executed pending display information. Then, when the specific pending display information shifts to the already-executed pending display area, under specific conditions, the specific pending display information is displayed in the first display mode rather than in the second display mode. When it is displayed, it is more advantageous for the player. For this reason, even in the first display mode in which the possibility that the special information corresponding to the pending display information satisfies the predetermined condition is lower than in the second display mode, under the specific conditions, the pending display information is displayed in the second display mode. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation to move to the already-executed pending display area while maintaining the first display mode without changing the display mode. In addition, in the first display mode of the reserved display information, a special message regarding the advantage for the player is displayed, which is different from the stage of the possibility that the special information set for the first display mode satisfies the predetermined condition. can make sense. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to this feature, since the predetermined number of pieces of already-executed pending display information that can be displayed in the already-executed pending display area is constant, the display mode of the already-executed pending display information displayed in the already-executed pending display area is The difficulty of getting everything the same is constant. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling unnecessary anticipation or disappointment due to a change in the difficulty level.

<Feature wF group>
The feature wF group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the twelfth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature wF1]
A ball entry means (first starting port 33) that allows a game ball to enter,
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (value of winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into said ball entering means;
Acquisition information storage means (first reservation area Ra) capable of storing up to a specific upper limit number of the special information acquired by the game ball entering the ball entry means;
an unexecuted pending display area (unexecuted pending display area Dh) capable of displaying a number of unexecuted pending display information (unexecuted pending display icon H) corresponding to the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means; unexecuted pending display means for displaying;
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot) for each game round;
game spin control means for controlling the game spin action when the game action for notifying the result of the determination by the judging means is started and the game action is ended as one game spin action; ,
The possibility that the special information corresponding to the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area satisfies the predetermined condition is ranked from high to low set according to the level of the possibility. pending change means for suggesting by changing the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information according to a plurality of stages;
means for restricting a direction of change in display mode of the unexecuted pending display information to one direction from the lower side to the upper side;
An already executed pending display area (already executed an already-executed pending display means for displaying a pending display area (Dz);
The execution suspension display information displayed in the execution suspension display area is erased based on the fulfillment of a deletion condition (execution suspension display icon Z is erased after a predetermined time has elapsed since it is determined that the game has not been played). erasing) means;
with
As the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information, a first display mode (for example, a green display color) and a second display mode that is a higher stage than the first display mode among the plurality of stages ( red display color) and at least
When specific pending display information shifts to the already-executed pending display area, under certain conditions (by shifting the variable executing pending display icon Y to the already-executed pending display area, a predetermined number of already-executed pending display In a situation where all the execution pending display icons Z displayed in the area Dz are aligned in the same display color), when the specific pending display information is displayed in the second display mode It is more advantageous for the player when it is displayed in the first display mode (already-executed suspension notice)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, a number of unexecuted pending display information corresponding to the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means is displayed in the unexecuted pending display area, and the game cycle control means is displayed in the already executed pending display area. The pending display information corresponding to the game round after execution of the game round operation by is displayed as the already-executed pending display information. Then, when the specific pending display information shifts to the already-executed pending display area, under specific conditions, the specific pending display information is displayed in the first display mode rather than in the second display mode. When it is displayed, it is more advantageous for the player. For this reason, even in the first display mode in which the possibility that the special information corresponding to the pending display information satisfies the predetermined condition is lower than in the second display mode, under the specific conditions, the pending display information is displayed in the second display mode. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation to move to the already-executed pending display area while maintaining the first display mode without changing the display mode. In addition, in the first display mode of the reserved display information, a special message regarding the advantage for the player is displayed, which is different from the stage of the possibility that the special information set for the first display mode satisfies the predetermined condition. can make sense. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to this feature, by erasing the already-executed pending display information displayed in the already-executed pending display area based on the fulfillment of the erasing condition, when the player is replaced, the previous player can continue to play the game. It is possible to suppress the remaining execution pending display information stored by . For this reason, when the player changes, the game can be started in a state in which the already-executed pending display information does not exist in the already-executed pending display area, and the already-executed pending display information remains in the already-executed pending display area. It does not make the player feel annoyed.

<Feature wG group>
The feature wG group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the twelfth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature wG1]
A ball entry means (first starting port 33) that allows a game ball to enter,
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (value of winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into said ball entering means;
Acquisition information storage means (first reservation area Ra) capable of storing up to a specific upper limit number of the special information acquired by the game ball entering the ball entry means;
an unexecuted pending display area (unexecuted pending display area Dh) capable of displaying a number of unexecuted pending display information (unexecuted pending display icon H) corresponding to the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means; unexecuted pending display means for displaying;
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot) for each game round;
game spin control means for controlling the game spin action when the game action for notifying the result of the determination by the judging means is started and the game action is ended as one game spin action; ,
The possibility that the special information corresponding to the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area satisfies the predetermined condition is ranked from high to low set according to the level of the possibility. pending change means for suggesting by changing the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information according to a plurality of stages;
means for restricting a direction of change in display mode of the unexecuted pending display information to one direction from the lower side to the upper side;
An already executed pending display area (already executed a pending execution display means for displaying a pending display area (Dz);
with
As the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information, a first display mode (for example, a green display color) and a second display mode that is a higher stage than the first display mode among the plurality of stages ( red display color) and at least
When specific pending display information shifts to the already-executed pending display area, under certain conditions (by shifting the variable executing pending display icon Y to the already-executed pending display area, a predetermined number of already-executed pending display In a situation where all the execution pending display icons Z displayed in the area Dz are aligned in the same display color), when the specific pending display information is displayed in the second display mode It is more advantageous for the player when it is displayed in the first display mode (execution suspension notice),
An effect indicating that there is a high advantage for the player when the specific reserved display information shifts to the already-executed reserved display area in the first display mode under the specific condition (female character effect setting process) A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for executing

According to this feature, a number of unexecuted pending display information corresponding to the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means is displayed in the unexecuted pending display area, and the game cycle control means is displayed in the already executed pending display area. The pending display information corresponding to the game round after execution of the game round operation by is displayed as the already-executed pending display information. Then, when the specific pending display information shifts to the already-executed pending display area, under specific conditions, the specific pending display information is displayed in the first display mode rather than in the second display mode. When it is displayed, it is more advantageous for the player. For this reason, even in the first display mode in which the possibility that the special information corresponding to the pending display information satisfies the predetermined condition is lower than in the second display mode, under the specific conditions, the pending display information is displayed in the second display mode. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation to move to the already-executed pending display area while maintaining the first display mode without changing the display mode. In addition, in the first display mode of the reserved display information, a special message regarding the advantage for the player is displayed, which is different from the stage of the possibility that the special information set for the first display mode satisfies the predetermined condition. can make sense. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to this feature, when the specific reserved display information moves to the already-executed reserved display area in the first display mode under specific conditions, an effect indicating that the player is highly advantageous is executed. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a greater sense of expectation.

<Feature wH group>
The feature wH group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the twelfth embodiment and its 15th modification.

[Feature wH1]
A ball entry means (first starting port 33) that allows a game ball to enter,
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (value of winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into said ball entering means;
Acquisition information storage means (first reservation area Ra) capable of storing up to a specific upper limit number of the special information acquired by the game ball entering the ball entry means;
an unexecuted pending display area (unexecuted pending display area Dh) capable of displaying a number of unexecuted pending display information (unexecuted pending display icon H) corresponding to the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means; unexecuted pending display means for displaying;
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot) for each game round;
When the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game operation is ended as one game rotation operation, the game rotation operation (variation game for changing the symbol) a game turn control means for controlling the
special game state generation means for generating a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player after the game rotation operation is completed when the determination means determines that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition;
The possibility that the special information corresponding to the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area satisfies the predetermined condition is ranked from high to low set according to the level of the possibility. pending change means for suggesting by changing the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information according to a plurality of stages;
means for limiting a direction of change of the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information to one direction from the lower side to the upper side;
An already executed pending display area (already executed a pending execution display means for displaying a pending display area (Dz);
with
As the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information, the first display mode (white), which is the lowest among the plurality of stages, and the second display mode (white), which is a stage higher than the first display mode ( a color above white, such as blue), and
All the already-executed pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of already-executed pending display areas are in the second display mode, and all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display areas are in the second display mode. 1 display mode, the game motion in a predetermined mode can be displayed as the game rotation motion (predetermined premium ready-to-win effect can be executed and a predetermined premium image can be displayed).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, all the already-executed pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of already-executed pending display areas are in the second display mode (blue), and all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display areas are displayed in the second display mode (blue). When the pending display information is in the first display mode (white), the game action in the predetermined mode can be displayed as the game spinning motion, so that all the already executed pending display areas displayed in the already executed pending display area are displayed to the player. A new sense of anticipation that has not existed in the past, such as wanting execution suspension display information to be aligned in the second display mode and all unexecution suspension display information displayed in the non-execution suspension display area to be aligned in the first display mode. can hold

In particular, in the conventional gaming machine, after the execution of the game round motion, the pending display information corresponding to the game round of the game round motion is displayed in a display mode that is highly likely to satisfy the predetermined condition. However, if the reserved display information does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the game rotation operation ends, the display mode loses its meaning.

However, according to this feature, the suspended display information corresponding to the game round after the execution of the game rotation motion is displayed as the already-executed suspended display information, and all the already-executed suspended display information displayed in the predetermined number of already-executed suspended display areas are displayed. When the display information is in the second display mode and all of the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area is in the first display mode, a game motion in a predetermined mode is displayed as the game rotation motion. obtain. Therefore, it is possible to give meaning to the already-executed pending display information corresponding to the game round in which the game round motion ends without satisfying a predetermined condition, and to attract the player's interest. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature wH2]
A gaming machine according to feature wH1,
All the already-executed pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of already-executed pending display areas are in the first display mode (white), and all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area. is in the second display mode (blue), a result corresponding to the occurrence of the special game state (an image announcing the winning of a jackpot) can be displayed as a result of the game round. .

According to this feature, all the already-executed pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of already-executed pending display areas are in the first display mode, and all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display areas. is the second display mode, the result corresponding to the occurrence of the special game state can be displayed as the result of the game round, so that the player can see all the executed statuses displayed in the executed pending display area. A new sense of expectation that has not existed in the past, such as wanting the pending display information to be aligned in the first display mode and all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area to be aligned in the second display mode. I can hold you.

In particular, in the conventional gaming machine, after the execution of the game round motion, the pending display information corresponding to the game round of the game round motion is displayed in a display mode that is highly likely to satisfy the predetermined condition. However, if the reserved display information does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the game rotation operation ends, the display mode loses its meaning.

However, according to this feature, the pending display information corresponding to the game round after execution of the game round motion is displayed as the already-executed pending display information, and all the already-executed pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of already-executed pending display areas are displayed. When the display information is in the first display mode and all the non-execution suspension display information displayed in the non-execution suspension display area is in the second display mode, it corresponds to the occurrence of the special game state as a result of the game round. results can be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to give meaning to the already-executed pending display information corresponding to the game round motion ended without satisfying the predetermined condition, and to attract the interest of the player. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature wH3]
A gaming machine according to feature wH1 or feature wH2,
a means for changing the display mode of the already-executed pending display information in the already-executed pending display area (changing the display mode of the already-executed pending display icon Z in the already-executed pending display area Dz). .

According to this feature, since means for changing the display mode of the already-executed pending display information in the already-executed pending display areas is provided, it is possible for the player, for example, to display information in a predetermined number of already-executed pending display areas as it is. Even in a situation where the display mode of all the already-executed pending display information is not aligned in the same display mode, it is possible that the display mode of the already-executed pending display information displayed in the already-executed pending display area is It is possible to create a sense of expectation that all the already-executed pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of already-executed pending display areas will be aligned in the same display mode. Then, the display mode of the already-executed-suspended display information actually displayed in the already-executed-suspended display areas is changed, and all the already-executed-suspended display information displayed in the predetermined number of already-executed-suspended display areas are displayed in the same manner. When the mode is aligned, the player can be given great joy, and furthermore, it is desired that all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area be aligned in the same display mode. It can give you hope.

[Feature wH4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features wH1 to wH3,
A gaming machine, wherein the already-executed pending display information in the already-executed pending display area is displayed in a display mode different from the unexecuted pending display information in the unexecuted pending display area.

According to this feature, the already-executed pending display information in the already-executed pending display area is displayed in a display mode different from that of the unexecuted pending display information in the unexecuted pending display area. Awareness can be provided that the displayed information is different from the pending pending display information. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that there is non-execution suspension information in which a game cycle has not yet been performed in a situation where the already-execution suspension display information is displayed.

[Feature wH5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features wH1 to wH4,
A gaming machine, wherein the number of the already-executed pending display information displayed in the already-executed pending display area is a fixed number.

According to this feature, since the number of already-executed pending display information displayed in the already-executed pending display area is a certain number, it is difficult to arrange all the already-executed pending display information displayed in the already-executed pending display area in the same display mode. degree becomes constant. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling unnecessary anticipation or disappointment due to a change in the difficulty level.

[Feature wH6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features wH1 to wH5,
It is characterized by comprising means for erasing the already-executed pending display information displayed in the already-executed pending display area based on the fulfillment of a delete condition (deleting based on the fulfillment of the delete condition that a predetermined time has passed). Amusement machine.

According to this feature, the already-executed pending display information displayed in the already-executed pending display area is erased based on the fulfillment of the deletion condition. It is possible to prevent the next player from feeling troubled by the remaining execution suspension display information.

Specifically, for example, a case of adopting a configuration in which the erasing condition is satisfied when no game is played in the gaming machine for a predetermined period of time will be described. In the case of adopting this configuration, if the player who was playing the game on the gaming machine stops playing and the next player newly starts playing on the gaming machine after the lapse of a predetermined time, the previous game The already-executed pending display information stored by the player's game is erased at the timing when the next player starts playing. Therefore, the next player does not feel annoyed that the already-executed pending display information accumulated by the previous player's game remains in the already-executed pending display area.

That is, according to this feature, the next player is provided with a situation in which the game can be started in a state in which the execution suspension display information of the previous player's game does not exist in the execution suspension display area. can be done.

[Feature wH7]
A gaming machine according to any one of features wH1 to wH6,
All the already-executed pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of already-executed pending display areas are in the second display mode, and all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display areas are in the second display mode. 1. A gaming machine comprising means for executing a predetermined suggestive effect (a effect in which a female character WM appears) in the case of the display mode 1.

According to this feature, all the already-executed pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of already-executed pending display areas is in the second display mode, and all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display areas. is the first display mode, the means for executing a predetermined suggestive effect is provided, so that the player can clearly see all of the already executed pending display displayed in the predetermined number of already executed pending display areas. The information is in the second display mode, and all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area is in the first display mode. It is possible to recognize that there is a special meaning in the establishment of

[Feature wH8]
A gaming machine according to any one of features wH1 to wH7,
A gaming machine, wherein the second display mode (blue) is a display mode one stage higher than the first display mode (white) among the plurality of stages.

According to this feature, the second display mode is a display mode that is one stage higher than the first display mode among the plurality of stages. In other words, the second display mode is the display mode of the second lowest stage. In general, even if the reserved display information in the first display mode, which is the lowest order, or the second display mode, which is the second lowest order, is displayed, the player does not have a great sense of expectation.

However, in this feature, the pending display information displayed in the first display mode and the second display mode increases, and all the pending execution display information displayed in the pending execution display area is displayed in the second display mode. When all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area are aligned in the first display mode, a predetermined mode of game motion can be displayed as the game rotation motion.

Therefore, according to this feature, even in a situation where the hold display information is displayed in the first display mode or the second display mode in which the player generally does not have a great expectation, the game can be played. It is possible that the user continues to increase the amount of pending display information in the first display mode and the second display mode, and as a result, all the pending display information displayed in the pending execution display area is displayed in the second display mode. All of the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area is expected to be aligned in the first display mode. As a result, according to this feature, special significance can be imparted to the reserved display information in the first display mode and the second display mode, which are generally not expected by the player. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature wH9]
A gaming machine according to any one of features wH1 to wH8,
A gaming machine, wherein the possibility of occurrence of the special game state differs according to the type of display mode of the execution suspension display information displayed in the predetermined number of execution suspension display areas.

According to this feature, the possibility of occurrence of a special game state differs depending on the type of display mode of the execution suspension display information displayed in the predetermined number of execution suspension display areas. Not only does it determine whether or not all of the already-executed pending display information displayed in the display areas are arranged in the same display mode, but also whether or not the already-executed pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of already-executed pending display areas is displayed in what type of display mode. It is also possible to attract the player's interest in whether or not they are aligned, thereby improving the interest in the game.

[Feature wH10]
A gaming machine according to any one of features wH1 to wH9,
a means for changing the display mode of the unexecuted suspension display information in the unexecuted suspension display area (changing the display mode of the unexecuted suspension display icon H in the unexecuted suspension display area Dh). .

According to this feature, since means for changing the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information in the unexecuted pending display area is provided, the player can see, for example, all the information currently displayed in the unexecuted pending display area. Even if the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information does not match the same display mode, the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area may change. , it is possible to create a sense of expectation that all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area will be arranged in the same display mode. Then, the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information actually displayed in the unexecuted pending display area is changed, and all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area are aligned in the same display mode. In this case, it is possible to give great joy to the player, and further expect that all the already-executed pending display information displayed in the already-executed pending display area should be arranged in the same display mode. can give.

[Feature wH11]
A gaming machine according to any one of features wH1 to wH10,
A means capable of executing the same presentation mode when the display mode of the already executed pending display information is changed and when the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information is changed. game machine.

According to this feature, there is provided means capable of executing the same presentation mode when the display mode of the already-executed pending display information is changed and when the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information is changed, The player who recognizes the effect mode cannot determine whether the display mode of the pending execution display information is changed or the display mode of the non-execution pending display information is changed. Therefore, for example, in a situation where if the display mode of one piece of already-executed-suspended display information changes, all of the already-executed-suspended display information displayed in a predetermined number of already-executed-suspended display areas are aligned in the same display mode, the effect When the mode is executed, the player has an expectation that the display mode of the one already-executed pending display information should be changed, not the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information. become. Thus, according to this feature, it is possible to make the player have a new sense of anticipation that has not existed in the past, and to improve the interest in the game.

[Feature wH12]
A gaming machine according to any one of features wH1 to wH11,
The apparatus is characterized by comprising a means capable of executing different presentation modes depending on whether the display mode of the already-executed pending display information is changed and when the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information is changed. game machine.

According to this feature, the means capable of executing different effects depending on whether the display mode of the already-executed pending display information is changed or the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information is changed. A player who recognizes the effect mode can determine whether the display mode of the already executed pending display information is changed or the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information is changed. Therefore, for example, when an effect mode corresponding to a change in the display mode of the already-executed pending display information is executed, the player will not know what the current display mode of the already-executed pending display information is. On the other hand, when the effect mode corresponding to the change in the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information is executed, the player can display the current unexecuted pending display information. You will have a strong interest in how the mode is. Thus, according to this feature, it is possible to make the player strongly interested in the current display mode of the execution pending display information or the non-execution pending display information, thereby improving the interest of the game. .

[Feature wH13]
A gaming machine according to any one of features wH1 to wH12,
means capable of executing a first change suggesting effect suggesting that the display mode of the executed pending display information or the unexecuted pending display information will change;
A gaming machine, wherein the display mode may not change even when the first change suggesting effect is executed.

According to this feature, even when the first change suggestion effect suggesting that the display mode of the already-executed pending display information or the unexecuted pending display information is changed, the already-executed pending display information or the unexecuted pending display information or the unexecuted pending display information Since the display mode of the pending display information may not change, for example, if the display mode of one already-executed pending display information changes, all the already-executed pending display information displayed in a predetermined number of already-executed pending display areas will change. When the first change suggesting effect is executed in a situation where the display mode is the same, the player expects an event in which the display mode changes (the first change suggesting effect is not a fake). Furthermore, out of the execution pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of execution pending display areas, there is an expectation that the display mode of one of the execution pending display information will be changed. It will be. Thus, according to this feature, it is possible to make the player have a new sense of anticipation that has not existed in the past, and to improve the interest in the game.

[Feature wH14]
A gaming machine according to any one of features wH1 to wH13,
means capable of executing a second change suggesting effect suggesting a change in the display mode of the executed pending display information or the unexecuted pending display information;
A gaming machine characterized in that the display mode always changes when the second change suggesting effect is executed.

According to this feature, when the second change-suggestion effect suggesting a change in the display mode of the already-executed pending display information or the unexecuted pending display information is executed, the already-executed pending display information or the unexecuted pending display Since the display mode of information always changes, for example, if the display mode of one piece of already-executed-suspended display information changes, all of the already-executed-suspended display information displayed in a predetermined number of already-executed-suspended display areas will have the same display mode. When the second change suggesting effect is executed in a situation where all are aligned, the player selects one of the already executed pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of already executed pending display areas. The user has a feeling of expectation that the display mode of information should be changed. Further, for example, in a situation where all the unexecuted pending display information are already arranged in the same display mode, when the second change suggesting effect is executed, the player can change the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information. Since the user does not want to change the display mode of the already-executed pending display information, he/she feels that he/she wants the display mode to change. Thus, according to this feature, it is possible to make the player feel a new feeling that has never existed in the past, and to improve the interest in the game.

[Feature wH15]
A gaming machine according to any one of features wH1 to wH14,
A gaming machine comprising means capable of executing an effect suggesting the display mode after a change in the already-executed pending display information or the unexecuted pending display information.

According to this feature, since it is provided with means capable of executing an effect that suggests a display mode after a change in the already-executed pending display information or the unexecuted pending display information, for example, in a situation where the effect is executed, by the effect If there is one piece of already-executed pending display information for which all of the already-executed pending display information will be aligned in the same display mode if changed to the display mode after the suggested change, the player can The player will have a feeling of expectation that the already-executed pending display information should be changed to a display mode suggested by the effect. Thus, according to this feature, it is possible to make the player feel a new emotion that has never existed in the past, and to improve the interest in the game.

<Feature wI group>
The feature wI group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the twelfth embodiment and its 15th modification.

[Feature wI1]
A ball entry means (first starting port 33) that allows a game ball to enter,
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (value of winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into said ball entering means;
Acquisition information storage means (first reservation area Ra) capable of storing up to a specific upper limit number of the special information acquired by the game ball entering the ball entry means;
an unexecuted pending display area (unexecuted pending display area Dh) capable of displaying a number of unexecuted pending display information (unexecuted pending display icon H) corresponding to the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means; unexecuted pending display means for displaying;
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot) for each game round;
When the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game operation is ended as one game rotation operation, the game rotation operation (variation game for changing the symbol) a game turn control means for controlling the
special game state generation means for generating a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player after the game rotation operation is completed when the determination means determines that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition;
The possibility that the special information corresponding to the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area satisfies the predetermined condition is ranked from high to low set according to the level of the possibility. pending change means for suggesting by changing the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information according to a plurality of stages;
means for limiting a direction of change of the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information to one direction from the lower side to the upper side;
An already executed pending display area (already executed an already-executed pending display means for displaying a pending display area (Dz);
means for changing the display mode of the already-executed pending display information in the already-executed pending display area (changing the display mode of the already-executed pending display icon Z in the already-executed pending display area Dz);
with
As the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information, the first display mode (white), which is the lowest among the plurality of stages, and the second display mode (white), which is a stage higher than the first display mode ( a color above white, such as blue), and
All the already-executed pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of already-executed pending display areas are in the second display mode, and all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display areas are in the second display mode. 1 display mode, the game motion in a predetermined mode can be displayed as the game rotation motion (predetermined premium ready-to-win effect can be executed and a predetermined premium image can be displayed).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, all the already-executed pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of already-executed pending display areas are in the second display mode (blue), and all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display areas are displayed in the second display mode (blue). When the pending display information is in the first display mode (white), the game action of the predetermined mode can be displayed as the game spinning action, so that all the already-executed pending display areas displayed in the already-executed pending display area are displayed to the player. A new sense of anticipation that has not existed in the past, such as wanting execution suspension display information to be arranged in the second display mode and all unexecution suspension display information displayed in the non-execution suspension display area to be arranged in the first display mode. can hold

In particular, in the conventional gaming machine, after the execution of the game round motion, the pending display information corresponding to the game round of the game round motion is displayed in a display mode that is highly likely to satisfy the predetermined condition. However, if the reserved display information does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the game rotation operation ends, the display mode loses its meaning.

However, according to this feature, the pending display information corresponding to the game round after execution of the game round motion is displayed as the already-executed pending display information, and all the already-executed pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of already-executed pending display areas are displayed. When the display information is in the second display mode and all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area is in the first display mode, a game action in a predetermined mode is displayed as the game spinning action. obtain. Therefore, it is possible to give meaning to the already-executed pending display information corresponding to the game round motion ended without satisfying the predetermined condition, and to attract the interest of the player. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to this feature, since means for changing the display mode of the already-executed pending display information in the already-executed pending display areas is provided, for example, a predetermined number of already-executed pending display areas can be displayed to the player. Displaying the already-executed-suspended display information displayed in the already-executed-suspended display area even in a situation where the display modes of all the already-executed-suspended display information are not aligned in the same display mode. It is possible to create a sense of expectation that all of the already-executed pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of already-executed pending display areas will be aligned in the same display mode. Then, the display mode of the already-executed-suspended display information actually displayed in the already-executed-suspended display areas is changed, and all the already-executed-suspended display information displayed in the predetermined number of already-executed-suspended display areas are displayed in the same manner. When the mode is aligned, the player can be given great joy, and furthermore, it is desired that all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area be aligned in the same display mode. It can give you hope.

<Feature wJ group>
The feature wJ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the twelfth embodiment and its 15th modification.

[Feature wJ1]
A ball entry means (first starting port 33) that allows a game ball to enter,
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (value of winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into said ball entering means;
Acquisition information storage means (first reservation area Ra) capable of storing up to a specific upper limit number of the special information acquired by the game ball entering the ball entry means;
an unexecuted pending display area (unexecuted pending display area Dh) capable of displaying a number of unexecuted pending display information (unexecuted pending display icon H) corresponding to the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means; unexecuted pending display means for displaying;
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot) for each game round;
When the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game operation is ended as one game rotation operation, the game rotation operation (variation game for changing the symbol) a game turn control means for controlling the
special game state generation means for generating a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player after the game rotation operation is completed when the determination means determines that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition;
The possibility that the special information corresponding to the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area satisfies the predetermined condition is ranked from high to low set according to the level of the possibility. pending change means for suggesting by changing the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information according to a plurality of stages;
means for limiting a direction of change of the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information to one direction from the lower side to the upper side;
An already executed pending display area (already executed an already-executed pending display means for displaying a pending display area (Dz);
with
As the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information, the first display mode (white), which is the lowest among the plurality of stages, and the second display mode (white), which is a stage higher than the first display mode ( a color above white, such as blue), and
the already-executed pending display information in the already-executed pending display area is displayed in a display mode different from the unexecuted pending display information in the unexecuted pending display area;
All the already-executed pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of already-executed pending display areas are in the second display mode, and all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display areas are in the second display mode. 1 display mode, the game motion in a predetermined mode can be displayed as the game rotation motion (predetermined premium ready-to-win effect can be executed and a predetermined premium image can be displayed).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, all the already-executed pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of already-executed pending display areas are in the second display mode (blue), and all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display areas are displayed in the second display mode (blue). When the pending display information is in the first display mode (white), the game action of the predetermined mode can be displayed as the game spinning action, so that all the already-executed pending display areas displayed in the already-executed pending display area are displayed to the player. A new sense of anticipation that has not existed in the past, such as wanting execution suspension display information to be arranged in the second display mode and all unexecution suspension display information displayed in the non-execution suspension display area to be arranged in the first display mode. can hold

In particular, in the conventional gaming machine, after the execution of the game round motion, the pending display information corresponding to the game round of the game round motion is displayed in a display mode that is highly likely to satisfy the predetermined condition. However, if the reserved display information does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the game rotation operation ends, the display mode loses its meaning.

However, according to this feature, the pending display information corresponding to the game round after execution of the game round motion is displayed as the already-executed pending display information, and all the already-executed pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of already-executed pending display areas are displayed. When the display information is in the second display mode and all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area is in the first display mode, a game action in a predetermined mode is displayed as the game spinning action. obtain. Therefore, it is possible to give meaning to the already-executed pending display information corresponding to the game round motion ended without satisfying the predetermined condition, and to attract the interest of the player. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to this feature, the already-executed pending display information in the already-executed pending display area is displayed in a display mode different from the unexecuted pending display information in the unexecuted pending display area. A perception can be provided that execution pending indication information is different from non-execution pending indication information. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that there is non-execution suspension information in which a game cycle has not been executed yet in a situation where the already-execution suspension display information is displayed.

<Characteristic wK group>
The feature wK group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, mainly from the twelfth embodiment and its 15th modification.

[Feature wK1]
A ball entry means (first starting port 33) that allows a game ball to enter,
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (value of winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into said ball entering means;
Acquisition information storage means (first reservation area Ra) capable of storing up to a specific upper limit number of the special information acquired by the game ball entering the ball entry means;
an unexecuted pending display area (unexecuted pending display area Dh) capable of displaying a number of unexecuted pending display information (unexecuted pending display icon H) corresponding to the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means; unexecuted pending display means for displaying;
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot) for each game round;
When the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game operation is ended as one game rotation operation, the game rotation operation (variation game for changing the symbol) a game turn control means for controlling the
special game state generation means for generating a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player after the game rotation operation is completed when the determination means determines that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition;
The possibility that the special information corresponding to the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area satisfies the predetermined condition is ranked from high to low set according to the level of the possibility. pending change means for suggesting by changing the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information according to a plurality of stages;
means for limiting a direction of change of the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information to one direction from the lower side to the upper side;
An already executed pending display area (already executed) capable of displaying a predetermined number of pending display information corresponding to the game round after execution of the game round operation by the game round control means as already executed pending display information (executed pending display icon Z) a pending execution display means for displaying a pending display area (Dz);
with
As the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information, a first display mode (white), which is the lowest among the plurality of stages, and a second display mode (white), which is a stage higher than the first display mode ( a color above white, such as blue), and
a fixed number of the already-executed pending display information displayed in the already-executed pending display area;
All the already-executed pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of already-executed pending display areas are in the second display mode, and all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display areas are in the second display mode. 1 display mode, the game motion in a predetermined mode can be displayed as the game rotation motion (predetermined premium ready-to-win effect can be executed and a predetermined premium image can be displayed).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, all the already-executed pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of already-executed pending display areas are in the second display mode (blue), and all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display areas are displayed in the second display mode (blue). When the pending display information is in the first display mode (white), the game action of the predetermined mode can be displayed as the game spinning action, so that all the already-executed pending display areas displayed in the already-executed pending display area are displayed to the player. A new sense of anticipation that has not existed in the past, such as wanting execution suspension display information to be arranged in the second display mode and all unexecution suspension display information displayed in the non-execution suspension display area to be arranged in the first display mode. can hold

In particular, in the conventional gaming machine, after the execution of the game round motion, the pending display information corresponding to the game round of the game round motion is displayed in a display mode that is highly likely to satisfy the predetermined condition. However, if the reserved display information does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the game rotation operation ends, the display mode loses its meaning.

However, according to this feature, the suspended display information corresponding to the game round after the execution of the game rotation motion is displayed as the already-executed suspended display information, and all the already-executed suspended display information displayed in the predetermined number of already-executed suspended display areas are displayed. When the display information is in the second display mode and all of the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area is in the first display mode, a game motion in a predetermined mode is displayed as the game rotation motion. obtain. Therefore, it is possible to give meaning to the already-executed pending display information corresponding to the game round in which the game round motion ends without satisfying a predetermined condition, and to attract the player's interest. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to this feature, since the number of already-executed pending display information displayed in the already-executed pending display area is fixed, all the already-executed pending display information displayed in the already-executed pending display area are displayed in the same display mode. The difficulty level of matching is constant. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling unnecessary anticipation or disappointment due to a change in the difficulty level.

<Feature wL group>
The feature wL group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the twelfth embodiment and its 15th modification.

[Feature wL1]
A ball entry means (first starting port 33) that allows a game ball to enter,
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (value of winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into said ball entering means;
Acquisition information storage means (first reservation area Ra) capable of storing up to a specific upper limit number of the special information acquired by the game ball entering the ball entry means;
an unexecuted pending display area (unexecuted pending display area Dh) capable of displaying a number of unexecuted pending display information (unexecuted pending display icon H) corresponding to the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means; unexecuted pending display means for displaying;
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot) for each game round;
When the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game operation is ended as one game rotation operation, the game rotation operation (variation game for changing the symbol) a game turn control means for controlling the
special game state generation means for generating a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player after the game rotation operation is completed when the determination means determines that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition;
The possibility that the special information corresponding to the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area satisfies the predetermined condition is ranked from high to low set according to the level of the possibility. pending change means for suggesting by changing the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information according to a plurality of stages;
means for limiting a direction of change of the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information to one direction from the lower side to the upper side;
An already executed pending display area (already executed an already-executed pending display means for displaying a pending display area (Dz);
means for erasing the already-executed pending display information displayed in the already-executed pending display area based on fulfillment of a delete condition (deleting based on fulfillment of a delete condition that a predetermined time has passed);
with
As the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information, the first display mode (white), which is the lowest among the plurality of stages, and the second display mode (white), which is a stage higher than the first display mode ( a color above white, such as blue), and
All the already-executed pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of already-executed pending display areas are in the second display mode, and all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display areas are in the second display mode. 1 display mode, the game motion in a predetermined mode can be displayed as the game rotation motion (predetermined premium ready-to-win effect can be executed and a predetermined premium image can be displayed).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, all the already-executed pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of already-executed pending display areas are in the second display mode (blue), and all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display areas are displayed in the second display mode (blue). When the pending display information is in the first display mode (white), the game action in the predetermined mode can be displayed as the game spinning motion, so that all the already executed pending display areas displayed in the already executed pending display area are displayed to the player. A new sense of anticipation that has not existed in the past, such as wanting execution suspension display information to be aligned in the second display mode and all unexecution suspension display information displayed in the non-execution suspension display area to be aligned in the first display mode. can hold

In particular, in the conventional gaming machine, after the execution of the game round motion, the pending display information corresponding to the game round of the game round motion is displayed in a display mode that is highly likely to satisfy the predetermined condition. However, if the reserved display information does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the game rotation operation ends, the display mode loses its meaning.

However, according to this feature, the pending display information corresponding to the game round after execution of the game round motion is displayed as the already-executed pending display information, and all the already-executed pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of already-executed pending display areas are displayed. When the display information is in the second display mode and all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area is in the first display mode, a game action in a predetermined mode is displayed as the game spinning action. obtain. Therefore, it is possible to give meaning to the already-executed pending display information corresponding to the game round motion ended without satisfying the predetermined condition, and to attract the interest of the player. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to this feature, the already-executed pending display information displayed in the already-executed pending display area is erased based on the fulfillment of the erasing condition. It is possible to prevent the next player from feeling troubled by the remaining execution pending display information.

Specifically, for example, a case of adopting a configuration in which the erasing condition is satisfied when no game is played in the gaming machine for a predetermined period of time will be described. In the case where this configuration is adopted, if the player who was playing the game on the gaming machine stops playing and the next player newly starts playing on the gaming machine after the lapse of a predetermined time, the previous game The already-executed pending display information stored by the player's game is erased at the timing when the next player starts the game. Therefore, the next player does not feel annoyed that the already-executed pending display information accumulated by the previous player's game remains in the already-executed pending display area.

That is, according to this feature, the next player is provided with a situation in which the game can be started in a state in which the execution suspension display information of the previous player's game does not exist in the execution suspension display area. can be done.

<Feature wM group>
The feature wM group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, mainly from the twelfth embodiment and its 15th modification.

[Feature wM1]
A ball entry means (first starting port 33) that allows a game ball to enter,
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (value of winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into said ball entering means;
Acquisition information storage means (first reservation area Ra) capable of storing up to a specific upper limit number of the special information acquired by the game ball entering the ball entry means;
an unexecuted pending display area (unexecuted pending display area Dh) capable of displaying a number of unexecuted pending display information (unexecuted pending display icon H) corresponding to the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means; unexecuted pending display means for displaying;
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot) for each game round;
When the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game operation is ended as one game rotation operation, the game rotation operation (variation game for changing the symbol) a game turn control means for controlling the
special game state generation means for generating a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player after the game rotation operation is completed when the determination means determines that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition;
The possibility that the special information corresponding to the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area satisfies the predetermined condition is ranked from high to low set according to the level of the possibility. pending change means for suggesting by changing the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information according to a plurality of stages;
means for limiting a direction of change of the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information to one direction from the lower side to the upper side;
An already executed pending display area (already executed an already-executed pending display means for displaying a pending display area (Dz);
with
As the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information, a first display mode (white), which is the lowest among the plurality of stages, and a second display mode (white), which is a stage higher than the first display mode ( a color above white, such as blue), and
All the already-executed pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of already-executed pending display areas are in the second display mode, and all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display areas are in the second display mode. 1 display mode, the game motion in a predetermined mode can be displayed as the game spinning motion (predetermined premium ready-to-win effect can be executed and a predetermined premium image can be displayed);
All the already-executed pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of already-executed pending display areas are in the second display mode, and all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display areas are in the second display mode. A gaming machine comprising means for executing a predetermined suggestive effect (a effect in which a female character WM appears) in the case of the display mode 1.

According to this feature, all the already-executed pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of already-executed pending display areas are in the second display mode (blue), and all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display areas are displayed in the second display mode (blue). When the pending display information is in the first display mode (white), the game action of the predetermined mode can be displayed as the game spinning action, so that all the already-executed pending display areas displayed in the already-executed pending display area are displayed to the player. A new sense of anticipation that has not existed in the past, such as wanting execution suspension display information to be arranged in the second display mode and all unexecution suspension display information displayed in the non-execution suspension display area to be arranged in the first display mode. can hold

In particular, in the conventional gaming machine, after the execution of the game round motion, the pending display information corresponding to the game round of the game round motion is displayed in a display mode that is highly likely to satisfy the predetermined condition. However, if the reserved display information does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the game rotation operation ends, the display mode loses its meaning.

However, according to this feature, the suspended display information corresponding to the game round after the execution of the game rotation motion is displayed as the already-executed suspended display information, and all the already-executed suspended display information displayed in the predetermined number of already-executed suspended display areas are displayed. When the display information is in the second display mode and all of the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area is in the first display mode, a game motion in a predetermined mode is displayed as the game rotation motion. obtain. Therefore, it is possible to give meaning to the already-executed pending display information corresponding to the game round in which the game round motion ends without satisfying a predetermined condition, and to attract the player's interest. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to this feature, all the already-executed pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of already-executed pending display areas are in the second display mode, and all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display areas are displayed in the second display mode. When the display information is in the first display mode, the means for executing the predetermined suggestive effect is provided, so that the player can clearly see all of the already-executed display areas displayed in the predetermined number of already-executed suspension display areas. It is possible to recognize that the condition that the pending display information is in the second display mode and that all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area is in the first display mode is established, It is possible to make the user recognize that the fact that the condition is established has a special meaning.

<Feature wN group>
The feature wN group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, mainly from the twelfth embodiment and its 15th modification.

[Feature wN1]
A ball entry means (first starting port 33) that allows a game ball to enter,
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (value of winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into said ball entering means;
Acquisition information storage means (first reservation area Ra) capable of storing up to a specific upper limit number of the special information acquired by the game ball entering the ball entry means;
an unexecuted pending display area (unexecuted pending display area Dh) capable of displaying a number of unexecuted pending display information (unexecuted pending display icon H) corresponding to the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means; unexecuted pending display means for displaying;
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot) for each game round;
When the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game operation is ended as one game rotation operation, the game rotation operation (variation game for changing the symbol) a game turn control means for controlling the
special game state generation means for generating a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player after the game rotation operation is completed when the determination means determines that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition;
The possibility that the special information corresponding to the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area satisfies the predetermined condition is ranked from high to low set according to the level of the possibility. pending change means for suggesting by changing the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information according to a plurality of stages;
means for limiting a direction of change of the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information to one direction from the lower side to the upper side;
An already executed pending display area (already executed an already-executed pending display means for displaying a pending display area (Dz);
with
As the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information, the first display mode (white), which is the lowest among the plurality of stages, and the second display mode (white), which is a stage higher than the first display mode ( a color above white, such as blue), and
The second display mode (blue) is a display mode that is one stage higher than the first display mode (white) among the plurality of stages,
All the already-executed pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of already-executed pending display areas are in the second display mode, and all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display areas are in the second display mode. 1 display mode, the game motion in a predetermined mode can be displayed as the game rotation motion (predetermined premium ready-to-win effect can be executed and a predetermined premium image can be displayed).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, all the already-executed pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of already-executed pending display areas are in the second display mode (blue), and all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display areas are displayed in the second display mode (blue). When the pending display information is in the first display mode (white), the game action in the predetermined mode can be displayed as the game spinning motion, so that all the already executed pending display areas displayed in the already executed pending display area are displayed to the player. A new sense of anticipation that has not existed in the past, such as wanting execution suspension display information to be aligned in the second display mode and all unexecution suspension display information displayed in the non-execution suspension display area to be aligned in the first display mode. can hold

In particular, in the conventional gaming machine, after the execution of the game round motion, the pending display information corresponding to the game round of the game round motion is displayed in a display mode that is highly likely to satisfy the predetermined condition. However, if the reserved display information does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the game rotation operation ends, the display mode loses its meaning.

However, according to this feature, the pending display information corresponding to the game round after execution of the game round motion is displayed as the already-executed pending display information, and all the already-executed pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of already-executed pending display areas are displayed. When the display information is in the second display mode and all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area is in the first display mode, a game action in a predetermined mode is displayed as the game spinning action. obtain. Therefore, it is possible to give meaning to the already-executed pending display information corresponding to the game round motion ended without satisfying the predetermined condition, and to attract the interest of the player. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to this feature, the second display mode is a display mode that is one step higher than the first display mode among the plurality of stages. In other words, the second display mode is the display mode of the second lowest stage. In general, even if the reserved display information in the first display mode, which is the lowest, or the second display mode, which is the second lowest, is displayed, the player does not have a great sense of expectation.

However, in this feature, the pending display information displayed in the first display mode and the second display mode increases, and all the pending execution display information displayed in the pending execution display area is displayed in the second display mode. When all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area are aligned in the first display mode, a predetermined mode of game motion can be displayed as the game rotation motion.

Therefore, according to this feature, even in a situation where the hold display information is displayed in the first display mode or the second display mode in which the player generally does not have much expectation, the game can be played. It is possible that the user continues to increase the pending display information in the first display mode and the second display mode, and as a result, all the pending display information displayed in the pending execution display area is displayed in the second display mode. All the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area will be aligned in the first display mode. As a result, according to this feature, special significance can be imparted to the reserved display information in the first display mode and the second display mode, which are generally not expected by the player. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Feature wO group>
The feature wO group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the twelfth embodiment and its 15th modification.

[Feature wO1]
A ball entry means (first starting port 33) that allows a game ball to enter,
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (value of winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into said ball entering means;
Acquisition information storage means (first reservation area Ra) capable of storing up to a specific upper limit number of the special information acquired by the game ball entering the ball entry means;
an unexecuted pending display area (unexecuted pending display area Dh) capable of displaying a number of unexecuted pending display information (unexecuted pending display icon H) corresponding to the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means; unexecuted pending display means for displaying;
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot) for each game round;
When the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game operation is ended as one game rotation operation, the game rotation operation (variation game for changing the symbol) a game turn control means for controlling the
special game state generation means for generating a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player after the game rotation operation is completed when the determination means determines that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition;
The possibility that the special information corresponding to the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area satisfies the predetermined condition is ranked from high to low set according to the level of the possibility. pending change means for suggesting by changing the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information according to a plurality of stages;
means for limiting a direction of change of the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information to one direction from the lower side to the upper side;
An already executed pending display area (already executed a pending execution display means for displaying a pending display area (Dz);
with
As the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information, the first display mode (white), which is the lowest among the plurality of stages, and the second display mode (white), which is a stage higher than the first display mode ( a color above white, such as blue), and
All the already-executed pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of already-executed pending display areas are in the second display mode, and all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display areas are in the second display mode. 1 display mode, the game motion in a predetermined mode can be displayed as the game spinning motion (predetermined premium ready-to-win effect can be executed and a predetermined premium image can be displayed);
A gaming machine, wherein the possibility of occurrence of the special game state differs according to the type of display mode of the execution suspension display information displayed in the predetermined number of execution suspension display areas.

According to this feature, all the already-executed pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of already-executed pending display areas are in the second display mode (blue), and all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display areas are displayed in the second display mode (blue). When the pending display information is in the first display mode (white), the game action of the predetermined mode can be displayed as the game spinning action, so that all the already-executed pending display areas displayed in the already-executed pending display area are displayed to the player. A new sense of anticipation that has not existed in the past, such as wanting execution suspension display information to be arranged in the second display mode and all unexecution suspension display information displayed in the non-execution suspension display area to be arranged in the first display mode. can hold

In particular, in the conventional gaming machine, after the execution of the game round motion, the pending display information corresponding to the game round of the game round motion is displayed in a display mode that is highly likely to satisfy the predetermined condition. However, if the reserved display information does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the game rotation operation ends, the display mode loses its meaning.

However, according to this feature, the pending display information corresponding to the game round after execution of the game round motion is displayed as the already-executed pending display information, and all the already-executed pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of already-executed pending display areas are displayed. When the display information is in the second display mode and all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area is in the first display mode, a game action in a predetermined mode is displayed as the game spinning action. obtain. Therefore, it is possible to give meaning to the already-executed pending display information corresponding to the game round motion ended without satisfying the predetermined condition, and to attract the interest of the player. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to this feature, the possibility of occurrence of the special game state differs depending on the type of display mode of the execution suspension display information displayed in the predetermined number of execution suspension display areas. It not only determines whether or not all the already-executed pending display information displayed in the already-executed pending display areas are arranged in the same display mode, but also determines what kind of display the already-executed pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of already-executed pending display areas is. It is also possible to draw the player's interest in whether or not the characters match up in a manner, thereby improving the interest in the game.

<Feature wP group>
The feature wP group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the twelfth embodiment and its 15th modification.

[Feature wP1]
A ball entry means (first starting port 33) that allows a game ball to enter,
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (value of winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into said ball entering means;
Acquisition information storage means (first reservation area Ra) capable of storing up to a specific upper limit number of the special information acquired by the game ball entering the ball entry means;
an unexecuted pending display area (unexecuted pending display area Dh) capable of displaying a number of unexecuted pending display information (unexecuted pending display icon H) corresponding to the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means; unexecuted pending display means for displaying;
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot) for each game round;
When the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game operation is ended as one game rotation operation, the game rotation operation (variation game for changing the symbol) a game turn control means for controlling the
special game state generation means for generating a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player after the game rotation operation is completed when the determination means determines that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition;
The possibility that the special information corresponding to the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area satisfies the predetermined condition is ranked from high to low set according to the level of the possibility. pending change means for suggesting by changing the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information according to a plurality of stages;
means for limiting a direction of change of the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information to one direction from the lower side to the upper side;
An already executed pending display area (already executed an already-executed pending display means for displaying a pending display area (Dz);
means for changing the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information in the unexecuted pending display area (changing the display mode of the unexecuted pending display icon H in the unexecuted pending display area Dh);
with
As the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information, the first display mode (white), which is the lowest among the plurality of stages, and the second display mode (white), which is a stage higher than the first display mode ( a color above white, such as blue), and
All the already-executed pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of already-executed pending display areas are in the second display mode, and all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display areas are in the second display mode. 1 display mode, the game motion in a predetermined mode can be displayed as the game rotation motion (predetermined premium ready-to-win effect can be executed and a predetermined premium image can be displayed).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, all the already-executed pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of already-executed pending display areas are in the second display mode (blue), and all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display areas are displayed in the second display mode (blue). When the pending display information is in the first display mode (white), the game action of the predetermined mode can be displayed as the game spinning action, so that all the already-executed pending display areas displayed in the already-executed pending display area are displayed to the player. A new sense of anticipation that has not existed in the past, such as wanting execution suspension display information to be arranged in the second display mode and all unexecution suspension display information displayed in the non-execution suspension display area to be arranged in the first display mode. can hold

In particular, in the conventional gaming machine, after the execution of the game round motion, the pending display information corresponding to the game round of the game round motion is displayed in a display mode that is highly likely to satisfy the predetermined condition. However, if the reserved display information does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the game rotation operation ends, the display mode loses its meaning.

However, according to this feature, the suspended display information corresponding to the game round after the execution of the game rotation motion is displayed as the already-executed suspended display information, and all the already-executed suspended display information displayed in the predetermined number of already-executed suspended display areas are displayed. When the display information is in the second display mode and all of the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area is in the first display mode, a game motion in a predetermined mode is displayed as the game rotation motion. obtain. Therefore, it is possible to give meaning to the already-executed pending display information corresponding to the game round in which the game round motion ends without satisfying a predetermined condition, and to attract the player's interest. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to this feature, since means for changing the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information in the unexecuted pending display area is provided, for example, it is displayed in the unexecuted pending display area as it is to the player. Even if the display modes of all the unexecuted pending display information are not aligned in the same display mode, the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area may change. By doing so, it is possible to create a sense of expectation that all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area will be arranged in the same display mode. Then, the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information actually displayed in the unexecuted pending display area is changed, and all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area are aligned in the same display mode. In this case, it is possible to give great joy to the player, and further expect that all the already-execution-holding display information displayed in the already-execution-holding display area should be arranged in the same display mode. can give.

<Feature wQ group>
The feature wQ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the twelfth embodiment and its 15th modification.

[Feature wQ1]
A ball entry means (first starting port 33) that allows a game ball to enter,
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (value of winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into said ball entering means;
Acquisition information storage means (first reservation area Ra) capable of storing up to a specific upper limit number of the special information acquired by the game ball entering the ball entry means;
an unexecuted pending display area (unexecuted pending display area Dh) capable of displaying a number of unexecuted pending display information (unexecuted pending display icon H) corresponding to the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means; unexecuted pending display means for displaying;
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot) for each game round;
When the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game operation is ended as one game rotation operation, the game rotation operation (variation game for changing the symbol) a game turn control means for controlling the
special game state generation means for generating a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player after the game rotation operation is completed when the determination means determines that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition;
The possibility that the special information corresponding to the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area satisfies the predetermined condition is ranked from high to low set according to the level of the possibility. pending change means for suggesting by changing the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information according to a plurality of stages;
means for limiting a direction of change of the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information to one direction from the lower side to the upper side;
An already executed pending display area (already executed an already-executed pending display means for displaying a pending display area (Dz);
with
As the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information, the first display mode (white), which is the lowest among the plurality of stages, and the second display mode (white), which is a stage higher than the first display mode ( a color above white, such as blue), and
All the already-executed pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of already-executed pending display areas are in the second display mode, and all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display areas are in the second display mode. 1 display mode, the game motion in a predetermined mode can be displayed as the game spinning motion (predetermined premium ready-to-win effect can be executed and a predetermined premium image can be displayed);
All the already-executed pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of already-executed pending display areas are in the first display mode (white), and all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area. is in the second display mode (blue), a result corresponding to the occurrence of the special game state (an image announcing the winning of a jackpot) can be displayed as a result of the game round. .

According to this feature, all the already-executed pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of already-executed pending display areas are in the second display mode (blue), and all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display areas are displayed in the second display mode (blue). When the pending display information is in the first display mode (white), the game action in the predetermined mode can be displayed as the game spinning motion, so that all the already executed pending display areas displayed in the already executed pending display area are displayed to the player. A new sense of anticipation that has not existed in the past, such as wanting execution suspension display information to be aligned in the second display mode and all unexecution suspension display information displayed in the non-execution suspension display area to be aligned in the first display mode. can hold

In particular, in the conventional gaming machine, after the execution of the game round motion, the pending display information corresponding to the game round of the game round motion is displayed in a display mode that is highly likely to satisfy the predetermined condition. However, if the reserved display information does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the game rotation operation ends, the display mode loses its meaning.

However, according to this feature, the pending display information corresponding to the game round after execution of the game round motion is displayed as the already-executed pending display information, and all the already-executed pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of already-executed pending display areas are displayed. When the display information is in the second display mode and all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area is in the first display mode, a game action in a predetermined mode is displayed as the game spinning action. obtain. Therefore, it is possible to give meaning to the already-executed pending display information corresponding to the game round motion ended without satisfying the predetermined condition, and to attract the interest of the player. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to this feature, all the already-executed pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of already-executed pending display areas are in the first display mode, and all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display areas are displayed in the first display mode. When the display information is in the second display mode, a result corresponding to the occurrence of the special game state can be displayed as a result of the game cycle. A new expectation that has not existed in the past, such as wanting all the unexecuted pending display information to be aligned in the first display mode and all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area to be aligned in the second display mode. can make you feel.

<Feature wR group>
The feature wR group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the twelfth embodiment and its 15th modification.

[Feature wR1]
A ball entry means (first starting port 33) that allows a game ball to enter,
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (value of winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into said ball entering means;
Acquisition information storage means (first reservation area Ra) capable of storing up to a specific upper limit number of the special information acquired by the game ball entering the ball entry means;
an unexecuted pending display area (unexecuted pending display area Dh) capable of displaying a number of unexecuted pending display information (unexecuted pending display icon H) corresponding to the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means; unexecuted pending display means for displaying;
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot) for each game round;
When the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game operation is ended as one game rotation operation, the game rotation operation (variation game for changing the symbol) a game turn control means for controlling the
special game state generation means for generating a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player after the game rotation operation is completed when the determination means determines that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition;
The possibility that the special information corresponding to the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area satisfies the predetermined condition is ranked from high to low set according to the level of the possibility. pending change means for suggesting by changing the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information according to a plurality of stages;
means for limiting a direction of change of the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information to one direction from the lower side to the upper side;
An already executed pending display area (already executed an already-executed pending display means for displaying a pending display area (Dz);
with
As the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information, the first display mode (white), which is the lowest among the plurality of stages, and the second display mode (white), which is a stage higher than the first display mode ( a color above white, such as blue), and
All the already-executed pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of already-executed pending display areas are in the first display mode (white), and all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area. is in the second display mode (blue), a result corresponding to the occurrence of the special game state (an image announcing the winning of a jackpot) can be displayed as a result of the game round. .

According to this feature, all the already-executed pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of already-executed pending display areas are in the first display mode, and all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display areas. is the second display mode, the result corresponding to the occurrence of the special game state can be displayed as the result of the game round, so that the player can see all the executed statuses displayed in the executed pending display area. A new sense of expectation that has not existed in the past, such as wanting the pending display information to be aligned in the first display mode and all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area to be aligned in the second display mode. I can hold you.

In particular, in the conventional gaming machine, after the execution of the game round motion, the pending display information corresponding to the game round of the game round motion is displayed in a display mode that is highly likely to satisfy the predetermined condition. However, if the reserved display information does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the game rotation operation ends, the display mode loses its meaning.

However, according to this feature, the pending display information corresponding to the game round after execution of the game round motion is displayed as the already-executed pending display information, and all the already-executed pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of already-executed pending display areas are displayed. When the display information is in the first display mode and all the non-execution suspension display information displayed in the non-execution suspension display area is in the second display mode, it corresponds to the occurrence of the special game state as a result of the game round. results can be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to give meaning to the already-executed pending display information corresponding to the game round motion ended without satisfying the predetermined condition, and to attract the interest of the player. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature wR2]
A gaming machine according to feature wR1,
a means for changing the display mode of the execution suspension display information in the execution suspension display area (changing the display mode of the execution suspension display icon Z in the execution suspension display area Dz). .

According to this feature, since means for changing the display mode of the already-executed pending display information in the already-executed pending display areas is provided, it is possible for the player, for example, to display information in a predetermined number of already-executed pending display areas as it is. Even in a situation where the display mode of all the already-executed pending display information is not aligned in the same display mode, it is possible that the display mode of the already-executed pending display information displayed in the already-executed pending display area is It is possible to create a sense of expectation that all the already-executed pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of already-executed pending display areas will be aligned in the same display mode. Then, the display mode of the already-executed-suspended display information actually displayed in the already-executed-suspended display areas is changed, and all the already-executed-suspended display information displayed in the predetermined number of already-executed-suspended display areas are displayed in the same manner. When the mode is aligned, the player can be given great joy, and furthermore, it is desired that all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area be aligned in the same display mode. It can give you hope.

[Feature wR3]
A gaming machine according to feature wR1 or feature wR2,
A gaming machine, wherein the already-executed pending display information in the already-executed pending display area is displayed in a display mode different from the unexecuted pending display information in the unexecuted pending display area.

According to this feature, the already-executed pending display information in the already-executed pending display area is displayed in a display mode different from that of the unexecuted pending display information in the unexecuted pending display area. Awareness can be provided that the display information is different from the pending display information. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that there is non-execution suspension information in which a game cycle has not yet been performed in a situation where the already-execution suspension display information is displayed.

[Feature wR4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features wR1 to wR3,
A gaming machine, wherein the number of the already-executed pending display information displayed in the already-executed pending display area is a fixed number.

According to this feature, since the number of already-executed pending display information displayed in the already-executed pending display area is a certain number, it is difficult to arrange all the already-executed pending display information displayed in the already-executed pending display area in the same display mode. degree becomes constant. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling unnecessary anticipation or disappointment due to a change in the difficulty level.

[Feature wR5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features wR1 to wR4,
It is characterized by comprising means for erasing the already-executed pending display information displayed in the already-executed pending display area based on the fulfillment of a delete condition (deleting based on the fulfillment of the delete condition that a predetermined time has passed). Amusement machine.

According to this feature, the already-executed pending display information displayed in the already-executed pending display area is erased based on the fulfillment of the deletion condition. It is possible to prevent the next player from feeling troubled by the remaining execution suspension display information.

Specifically, for example, a case of adopting a configuration in which the erasing condition is satisfied when no game is played in the gaming machine for a predetermined period of time will be described. In the case of adopting this configuration, if the player who was playing the game on the gaming machine stops playing and the next player newly starts playing on the gaming machine after the lapse of a predetermined time, the previous game The already-executed pending display information stored by the player's game is erased at the timing when the next player starts playing. Therefore, the next player does not feel annoyed that the already-executed pending display information accumulated by the previous player's game remains in the already-executed pending display area.

That is, according to this feature, the next player is provided with a situation in which the game can be started in a state in which the execution suspension display information of the previous player's game does not exist in the execution suspension display area. can be done.

[Feature wR6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features wR1 to wR5,
All the already-executed pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of already-executed pending display areas are in the first display mode, and all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display areas are in the first display mode. 2. A game machine characterized by comprising means for executing a predetermined suggestive effect (a effect in which a female character WM appears) in the case of the display mode 2.

According to this feature, all the already-executed pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of already-executed pending display areas are in the first display mode, and all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display areas. is in the second display mode, the means for executing a predetermined suggestive effect is provided, so that the player can clearly see all of the already executed pending display displayed in the predetermined number of already executed pending display areas. The information is in the first display mode, and all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area is in the second display mode. It is possible to recognize that there is a special meaning in the establishment of

[Feature wR7]
A gaming machine according to any one of features wR1 to wR6,
A gaming machine, wherein the second display mode (blue) is a display mode one stage higher than the first display mode (white) among the plurality of stages.

According to this feature, the second display mode is a display mode that is one stage higher than the first display mode among the plurality of stages. In other words, the second display mode is the display mode of the second lowest stage. In general, even if the reserved display information in the first display mode, which is the lowest, or the second display mode, which is the second lowest, is displayed, the player does not have a great sense of expectation.

However, in this feature, the pending display information displayed in the first display mode and the second display mode increases, and all the pending execution display information displayed in the pending execution display area is displayed in the first display mode. When all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area are aligned in the second display mode, a result corresponding to the occurrence of the special game state can be displayed as the result of the game round. .

Therefore, according to this feature, even in a situation where the hold display information is displayed in the first display mode or the second display mode in which the player generally does not have much expectation, the game can be played. It is possible that the user continues to increase the amount of pending display information in the first display mode and the second display mode, and as a result, all the already executed pending display information displayed in the already executed pending display area is displayed in the first display mode. All of the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area is expected to be aligned in the second display mode. As a result, according to this feature, special significance can be imparted to the reserved display information in the first display mode and the second display mode, which are generally not expected by the player. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature wR8]
A gaming machine according to any one of features wR1 to wR7,
A gaming machine, wherein the possibility of occurrence of the special game state differs according to the type of display mode of the execution suspension display information displayed in the predetermined number of execution suspension display areas.

According to this feature, the possibility of occurrence of a special game state differs depending on the type of display mode of the execution suspension display information displayed in the predetermined number of execution suspension display areas. Not only does it determine whether or not all of the already-executed pending display information displayed in the display areas are arranged in the same display mode, but also whether or not the already-executed pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of already-executed pending display areas is displayed in what type of display mode. It is also possible to attract the player's interest in whether or not they are aligned, thereby improving the interest in the game.

[Feature wR9]
A gaming machine according to any one of features wR1 to wR8,
a means for changing the display mode of the unexecuted suspension display information in the unexecuted suspension display area (changing the display mode of the unexecuted suspension display icon H in the unexecuted suspension display area Dh). .

According to this feature, since means for changing the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information in the unexecuted pending display area is provided, the player can see, for example, all the information currently displayed in the unexecuted pending display area. Even if the display modes of the unexecuted pending display information are not aligned in the same display mode, the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area may change. , it is possible to create a sense of expectation that all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area will be arranged in the same display mode. Then, the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information actually displayed in the unexecuted pending display area is changed, and all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area are aligned in the same display mode. In this case, it is possible to give great joy to the player, and further expect that all the already-execution-holding display information displayed in the already-execution-holding display area should be arranged in the same display mode. can give.

<Feature wS group>
The feature wS group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the twelfth embodiment and its 15th modification.

[Feature wS1]
A ball entry means (first starting port 33) that allows a game ball to enter,
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (value of winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into said ball entering means;
Acquisition information storage means (first reservation area Ra) capable of storing up to a specific upper limit number of the special information acquired by the game ball entering the ball entry means;
an unexecuted pending display area (unexecuted pending display area Dh) capable of displaying a number of unexecuted pending display information (unexecuted pending display icon H) corresponding to the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means; unexecuted pending display means for displaying;
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot) for each game round;
When the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game operation is ended as one game rotation operation, the game rotation operation (variation game for changing the symbol) a game turn control means for controlling the
special game state generation means for generating a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player after the game rotation operation is completed when the determination means determines that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition;
The possibility that the special information corresponding to the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area satisfies the predetermined condition is ranked from high to low set according to the level of the possibility. pending change means for suggesting by changing the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information according to a plurality of stages;
means for limiting a direction of change of the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information to one direction from the lower side to the upper side;
An already executed pending display area (already executed a pending execution display means for displaying a pending display area (Dz);
means for changing the display mode of the already-executed pending display information in the already-executed pending display area (changing the display mode of the already-executed pending display icon Z in the already-executed pending display area Dz);
with
As the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information, the first display mode (white), which is the lowest among the plurality of stages, and the second display mode (white), which is a stage higher than the first display mode ( a color above white, such as blue), and
All the already-executed pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of already-executed pending display areas are in the first display mode (white), and all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area. is in the second display mode (blue), a result corresponding to the occurrence of the special game state (an image announcing the winning of a jackpot) can be displayed as a result of the game round. .

According to this feature, all the already-executed pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of already-executed pending display areas are in the first display mode, and all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display areas. is the second display mode, the result corresponding to the occurrence of the special game state can be displayed as the result of the game round, so that the player can see all the completed executions displayed in the completed execution pending display area. A new sense of expectation that has not existed in the past, such as wanting the pending display information to be aligned in the first display mode and all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area to be aligned in the second display mode. I can hold you.

In particular, in the conventional gaming machine, after the execution of the game round motion, the pending display information corresponding to the game round of the game round motion is displayed in a display mode that is highly likely to satisfy the predetermined condition. However, if the reserved display information does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the game rotation operation ends, the display mode loses its meaning.

However, according to this feature, the pending display information corresponding to the game round after execution of the game round motion is displayed as the already-executed pending display information, and all the already-executed pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of already-executed pending display areas are displayed. When the display information is in the first display mode and all the non-execution suspension display information displayed in the non-execution suspension display area is in the second display mode, it corresponds to the occurrence of the special game state as a result of the game round. results can be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to give meaning to the already-executed pending display information corresponding to the game round motion ended without satisfying the predetermined condition, and to attract the interest of the player. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to this feature, since means for changing the display mode of the already-executed pending display information in the already-executed pending display areas is provided, it is possible for the player to display, for example, a predetermined number of already-executed pending display areas as it is. Even if the display modes of all the already-executed-suspended display information are not aligned in the same display mode, the already-executed-suspended display information displayed in the already-executed-suspended display area may be displayed. It is possible to create a sense of expectation that all of the already-executed pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of already-executed pending display areas will be aligned in the same display mode. Then, the display mode of the already-executed-suspended display information actually displayed in the already-executed-suspended display areas is changed, and all the already-executed-suspended display information displayed in the predetermined number of already-executed-suspended display areas are displayed in the same manner. When the mode is aligned, the player can be given great joy, and furthermore, it is desired that all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area be aligned in the same display mode. It can give you hope.

<Characteristic wT group>
The feature wT group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the twelfth embodiment and its 15th modification.

[Feature wT1]
A ball entry means (first starting port 33) that allows a game ball to enter,
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (value of winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into said ball entering means;
Acquisition information storage means (first reservation area Ra) capable of storing up to a specific upper limit number of the special information acquired by the game ball entering the ball entry means;
an unexecuted pending display area (unexecuted pending display area Dh) capable of displaying a number of unexecuted pending display information (unexecuted pending display icon H) corresponding to the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means; unexecuted pending display means for displaying;
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot) for each game round;
When the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game operation is ended as one game rotation operation, the game rotation operation (variation game for changing the symbol) a game turn control means for controlling the
special game state generation means for generating a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player after the game rotation operation is completed when the determination means determines that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition;
The possibility that the special information corresponding to the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area satisfies the predetermined condition is ranked from high to low set according to the level of the possibility. pending change means for suggesting by changing the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information according to a plurality of stages;
means for limiting a direction of change of the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information to one direction from the lower side to the upper side;
An already executed pending display area (already executed an already-executed pending display means for displaying a pending display area (Dz);
with
As the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information, the first display mode (white), which is the lowest among the plurality of stages, and the second display mode (white), which is a stage higher than the first display mode ( a color above white, such as blue), and
the already-executed pending display information in the already-executed pending display area is displayed in a display mode different from the unexecuted pending display information in the unexecuted pending display area;
All the already-executed pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of already-executed pending display areas are in the first display mode (white), and all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area. is in the second display mode (blue), a result corresponding to the occurrence of the special game state (an image announcing the winning of a jackpot) can be displayed as a result of the game round. .

According to this feature, all the already-executed pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of already-executed pending display areas are in the first display mode, and all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display areas. is the second display mode, the result corresponding to the occurrence of the special game state can be displayed as the result of the game round, so that the player can see all the completed executions displayed in the completed execution pending display area. A new sense of expectation that has not existed in the past, such as wanting the pending display information to be aligned in the first display mode and all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area to be aligned in the second display mode. I can hold you.

In particular, in the conventional gaming machine, after the execution of the game round motion, the pending display information corresponding to the game round of the game round motion is displayed in a display mode that is highly likely to satisfy the predetermined condition. However, if the reserved display information does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the game rotation operation ends, the display mode loses its meaning.

However, according to this feature, the pending display information corresponding to the game round after execution of the game round motion is displayed as the already-executed pending display information, and all the already-executed pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of already-executed pending display areas are displayed. When the display information is in the first display mode and all the non-execution suspension display information displayed in the non-execution suspension display area is in the second display mode, it corresponds to the occurrence of the special game state as a result of the game round. results can be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to give meaning to the already-executed pending display information corresponding to the game round motion ended without satisfying the predetermined condition, and to attract the interest of the player. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to this feature, the already-executed pending display information in the already-executed pending display area is displayed in a display mode different from that of the unexecuted pending display information in the unexecuted pending display area. A perception can be provided that execution pending indication information is different from non-execution pending indication information. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that there is non-execution suspension information in which a game cycle has not yet been performed in a situation where the already-execution suspension display information is displayed.

<Feature wU group>
The feature wU group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the twelfth embodiment and its modification 22.

[Feature wU1]
A ball entry means (first starting port 33) that allows a game ball to enter,
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (value of winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into said ball entering means;
Acquisition information storage means (first reservation area Ra) capable of storing up to a specific upper limit number of the special information acquired by the game ball entering the ball entry means;
an unexecuted pending display area (unexecuted pending display area Dh) capable of displaying a number of unexecuted pending display information (unexecuted pending display icon H) corresponding to the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means; unexecuted pending display means for displaying;
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot) for each game round;
When the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game operation is ended as one game rotation operation, the game rotation operation (variation game for changing the symbol) a game turn control means for controlling the
special game state generation means for generating a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player after the game rotation operation is completed when the determination means determines that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition;
The possibility that the special information corresponding to the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area satisfies the predetermined condition is ranked from high to low set according to the level of the possibility. pending change means for suggesting by changing the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information according to a plurality of stages;
means for limiting a direction of change of the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information to one direction from the lower side to the upper side;
An already executed pending display area (already executed a pending execution display means for displaying a pending display area (Dz);
with
As the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information, the first display mode (white), which is the lowest among the plurality of stages, and the second display mode (white), which is a stage higher than the first display mode ( a color above white, such as blue), and
All the already-executed pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of already-executed pending display areas are in the second display mode, and all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display areas are in the second display mode. 1 display mode, the game motion in a predetermined mode can be displayed as the game spinning motion (predetermined premium ready-to-win effect can be executed and a predetermined premium image can be displayed);
Further, means is provided for executing the same effect mode when the display mode of the executed pending display information is changed and when the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information is changed. Characteristic game machine.

According to this feature, all the already-executed pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of already-executed pending display areas are in the second display mode (blue), and all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display areas are displayed in the second display mode (blue). When the pending display information is in the first display mode (white), the game action in the predetermined mode can be displayed as the game spinning motion, so that all the already executed pending display areas displayed in the already executed pending display area are displayed to the player. A new sense of anticipation that has not existed in the past, such as wanting execution suspension display information to be aligned in the second display mode and all unexecution suspension display information displayed in the non-execution suspension display area to be aligned in the first display mode. can hold

In particular, in the conventional gaming machine, after the execution of the game round motion, the pending display information corresponding to the game round of the game round motion is displayed in a display mode that is highly likely to satisfy the predetermined condition. However, if the reserved display information does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the game rotation operation ends, the display mode loses its meaning.

However, according to this feature, the pending display information corresponding to the game round after execution of the game round motion is displayed as the already-executed pending display information, and all the already-executed pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of already-executed pending display areas are displayed. When the display information is in the second display mode and all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area is in the first display mode, a game action in a predetermined mode is displayed as the game spinning action. obtain. Therefore, it is possible to give meaning to the already-executed pending display information corresponding to the game round motion ended without satisfying the predetermined condition, and to attract the interest of the player. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to this feature, there is provided means capable of executing the same effect mode when the display mode of the already executed pending display information is changed and when the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information is changed. Therefore, the player who recognizes the effect mode cannot determine whether the display mode of the pending execution display information is changed or the display mode of the non-execution pending display information is changed. Therefore, for example, in a situation where if the display mode of one piece of already-executed-suspended display information changes, all of the already-executed-suspended display information displayed in a predetermined number of already-executed-suspended display areas are aligned in the same display mode, the effect When the mode is executed, the player has an expectation that the display mode of the one already-executed pending display information should be changed instead of changing the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information. become. Thus, according to this feature, it is possible to make the player have a new sense of anticipation that has not existed in the past, and to improve the amusement of the game.

<Feature wV group>
The feature wV group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the twelfth embodiment and its modification 23.

[Feature wV1]
A ball entry means (first starting port 33) that allows a game ball to enter,
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (value of winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into said ball entering means;
Acquisition information storage means (first reservation area Ra) capable of storing up to a specific upper limit number of the special information acquired by the game ball entering the ball entry means;
an unexecuted pending display area (unexecuted pending display area Dh) capable of displaying a number of unexecuted pending display information (unexecuted pending display icon H) corresponding to the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means; unexecuted pending display means for displaying;
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot) for each game round;
When the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game operation is ended as one game rotation operation, the game rotation operation (variation game for changing the symbol) a game turn control means for controlling the
special game state generation means for generating a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player after the game rotation operation is completed when the determination means determines that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition;
The possibility that the special information corresponding to the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area satisfies the predetermined condition is ranked from high to low set according to the level of the possibility. pending change means for suggesting by changing the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information according to a plurality of stages;
means for limiting a direction of change of the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information to one direction from the lower side to the upper side;
An already executed pending display area (already executed an already-executed pending display means for displaying a pending display area (Dz);
with
As the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information, the first display mode (white), which is the lowest among the plurality of stages, and the second display mode (white), which is a stage higher than the first display mode ( a color above white, such as blue), and
All the already-executed pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of already-executed pending display areas are in the second display mode, and all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display areas are in the second display mode. 1 display mode, the game motion in a predetermined mode can be displayed as the game spinning motion (predetermined premium ready-to-win effect can be executed and a predetermined premium image can be displayed);
Further, it comprises means capable of executing a different presentation mode depending on whether the display mode of the already-executed pending display information is changed and when the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information is changed. Amusement machine.

According to this feature, all the already-executed pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of already-executed pending display areas are in the second display mode (blue), and all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display areas are displayed in the second display mode (blue). When the pending display information is in the first display mode (white), the game action of the predetermined mode can be displayed as the game spinning action, so that all the already-executed pending display areas displayed in the already-executed pending display area are displayed to the player. A new sense of anticipation that has not existed in the past, such as wanting execution suspension display information to be arranged in the second display mode and all unexecution suspension display information displayed in the non-execution suspension display area to be arranged in the first display mode. can hold

In particular, in the conventional gaming machine, after the execution of the game round motion, the pending display information corresponding to the game round of the game round motion is displayed in a display mode that is highly likely to satisfy the predetermined condition. However, if the reserved display information does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the game rotation operation ends, the display mode loses its meaning.

However, according to this feature, the suspended display information corresponding to the game round after the execution of the game rotation motion is displayed as the already-executed suspended display information, and all the already-executed suspended display information displayed in the predetermined number of already-executed suspended display areas are displayed. When the display information is in the second display mode and all of the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area is in the first display mode, a game motion in a predetermined mode is displayed as the game rotation motion. obtain. Therefore, it is possible to give meaning to the already-executed pending display information corresponding to the game round in which the game round motion ends without satisfying a predetermined condition, and to attract the player's interest. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to this feature, there is provided a means capable of executing a different presentation mode depending on whether the display mode of the already-executed pending display information is changed or the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information is changed. The player who recognizes the effect mode can determine whether the display mode of the pending execution display information is changed or the display mode of the pending execution display information is changed. Therefore, for example, when an effect mode corresponding to a change in the display mode of the already-executed pending display information is executed, the player will not know what the current display mode of the already-executed pending display information is. On the other hand, when the effect mode corresponding to the change in the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information is executed, the player can display the current unexecuted pending display information. You will have a strong interest in how the mode is. Thus, according to this feature, it is possible to make the player strongly interested in the current display mode of the execution pending display information or the non-execution pending display information, thereby improving the interest of the game. .

<Feature wW group>
The feature wW group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the twelfth embodiment and its modification 22.

[Feature wW1]
A ball entry means (first starting port 33) that allows a game ball to enter,
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (value of winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into said ball entering means;
Acquisition information storage means (first reservation area Ra) capable of storing up to a specific upper limit number of the special information acquired by the game ball entering the ball entry means;
an unexecuted pending display area (unexecuted pending display area Dh) capable of displaying a number of unexecuted pending display information (unexecuted pending display icon H) corresponding to the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means; unexecuted pending display means for displaying;
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot) for each game round;
When the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game operation is ended as one game rotation operation, the game rotation operation (variation game for changing the symbol) a game turn control means for controlling the
special game state generation means for generating a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player after the game rotation operation is completed when the determination means determines that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition;
The possibility that the special information corresponding to the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area satisfies the predetermined condition is ranked from high to low set according to the level of the possibility. pending change means for suggesting by changing the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information according to a plurality of stages;
means for limiting a direction of change of the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information to one direction from the lower side to the upper side;
An already executed pending display area (already executed an already-executed pending display means for displaying a pending display area (Dz);
with
As the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information, the first display mode (white), which is the lowest among the plurality of stages, and the second display mode (white), which is a stage higher than the first display mode ( a color above white, such as blue), and
All the already-executed pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of already-executed pending display areas are in the second display mode, and all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display areas are in the second display mode. 1 display mode, the game motion in a predetermined mode can be displayed as the game spinning motion (predetermined premium ready-to-win effect can be executed and a predetermined premium image can be displayed);
Furthermore, means capable of executing a change suggesting effect suggesting that the display mode of the executed pending display information or the unexecuted pending display information will change,
A gaming machine, wherein the display mode may not change even when the change suggesting effect is executed.

According to this feature, all the already-executed pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of already-executed pending display areas are in the second display mode (blue), and all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display areas are displayed in the second display mode (blue). When the pending display information is in the first display mode (white), the game action of the predetermined mode can be displayed as the game spinning action, so that all the already-executed pending display areas displayed in the already-executed pending display area are displayed to the player. A new sense of anticipation that has not existed in the past, such as wanting execution suspension display information to be arranged in the second display mode and all unexecution suspension display information displayed in the non-execution suspension display area to be arranged in the first display mode. can hold

In particular, in the conventional gaming machine, after the execution of the game round motion, the pending display information corresponding to the game round of the game round motion is displayed in a display mode that is highly likely to satisfy the predetermined condition. However, if the reserved display information does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the game rotation operation ends, the display mode loses its meaning.

However, according to this feature, the suspended display information corresponding to the game round after the execution of the game rotation motion is displayed as the already-executed suspended display information, and all the already-executed suspended display information displayed in the predetermined number of already-executed suspended display areas are displayed. When the display information is in the second display mode and all of the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area is in the first display mode, a game motion in a predetermined mode is displayed as the game rotation motion. obtain. Therefore, it is possible to give meaning to the already-executed pending display information corresponding to the game round in which the game round motion ends without satisfying a predetermined condition, and to attract the player's interest. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to this feature, even if a change suggesting effect that suggests a change in the display mode of the already-executed pending display information or the unexecuted pending display information is executed, the already-executed pending display information or the unexecuted Since the display mode of the pending display information may not change, for example, if the display mode of one already-executed pending display information changes, all the already-executed pending display information displayed in a predetermined number of already-executed pending display areas will change. In a situation where the same display mode is aligned, when a change suggestive effect is executed, the player expects an event in which the display mode changes (expects that the change suggestive effect is not a fake). ), and furthermore, there is an expectation that the display mode of the one of the execution pending display information among the execution pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of execution pending display areas should be changed. Thus, according to this feature, it is possible to make the player have a new sense of anticipation that has not existed in the past, and to improve the amusement of the game.

<Feature wX group>
The feature wX group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the twelfth embodiment and its modification 24.

[Feature wX1]
A ball entry means (first starting port 33) that allows a game ball to enter,
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (value of winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into said ball entering means;
Acquisition information storage means (first reservation area Ra) capable of storing up to a specific upper limit number of the special information acquired by the game ball entering the ball entry means;
an unexecuted pending display area (unexecuted pending display area Dh) capable of displaying a number of unexecuted pending display information (unexecuted pending display icon H) corresponding to the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means; unexecuted pending display means for displaying;
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot) for each game round;
When the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game operation is ended as one game rotation operation, the game rotation operation (variation game for changing the symbol) a game turn control means for controlling the
special game state generation means for generating a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player after the game rotation operation is completed when the determination means determines that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition;
The possibility that the special information corresponding to the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area satisfies the predetermined condition is ranked from high to low set according to the level of the possibility. pending change means for suggesting by changing the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information according to a plurality of stages;
means for limiting a direction of change of the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information to one direction from the lower side to the upper side;
An already executed pending display area (already executed an already-executed pending display means for displaying a pending display area (Dz);
with
As the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information, the first display mode (white), which is the lowest among the plurality of stages, and the second display mode (white), which is a stage higher than the first display mode ( a color above white, such as blue), and
All the already-executed pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of already-executed pending display areas are in the second display mode, and all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display areas are in the second display mode. 1 display mode, the game motion in a predetermined mode can be displayed as the game spinning motion (predetermined premium ready-to-win effect can be executed and a predetermined premium image can be displayed);
Furthermore, means capable of executing a change suggesting effect suggesting that the display mode of the executed pending display information or the unexecuted pending display information will change,
A gaming machine characterized in that the display mode always changes when the change suggesting effect is executed.

According to this feature, all the already-executed pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of already-executed pending display areas are in the second display mode (blue), and all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display areas are displayed in the second display mode (blue). When the pending display information is in the first display mode (white), the game action of the predetermined mode can be displayed as the game spinning action, so that all the already-executed pending display areas displayed in the already-executed pending display area are displayed to the player. A new sense of anticipation that has not existed in the past, such as wanting execution suspension display information to be arranged in the second display mode and all unexecution suspension display information displayed in the non-execution suspension display area to be arranged in the first display mode. can hold

In particular, in the conventional gaming machine, after the execution of the game round motion, the pending display information corresponding to the game round of the game round motion is displayed in a display mode that is highly likely to satisfy the predetermined condition. However, if the reserved display information does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the game rotation operation ends, the display mode loses its meaning.

However, according to this feature, the pending display information corresponding to the game round after execution of the game round motion is displayed as the already-executed pending display information, and all the already-executed pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of already-executed pending display areas are displayed. When the display information is in the second display mode and all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area is in the first display mode, a game action in a predetermined mode is displayed as the game spinning action. obtain. Therefore, it is possible to give meaning to the already-executed pending display information corresponding to the game round motion ended without satisfying the predetermined condition, and to attract the interest of the player. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to this feature, when the change suggestion effect suggesting that the display mode of the already-executed pending display information or the unexecuted pending display information is changed is executed, the already-executed pending display information or the unexecuted pending display Since the display mode of information always changes, for example, if the display mode of one piece of already-executed-suspended display information changes, all of the already-executed-suspended display information displayed in a predetermined number of already-executed-suspended display areas will have the same display mode. When the change suggestive effect is executed in a situation where the The user has a feeling of expectation that the display mode should be changed. Further, for example, in a situation where all of the unexecuted pending display information has already been arranged in the same display mode, when the change suggesting effect is executed, the player can change the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information. Since the user does not want the user to change the display mode of the already-executed pending display information, the user feels a desire to change the display mode. Thus, according to this feature, it is possible to make the player feel a new feeling that has never existed in the past, and to improve the interest in the game.

<Feature wY group>
The feature wY group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, mainly from the twelfth embodiment and its 27th modification.

[Feature wY1]
A ball entry means (first starting port 33) that allows a game ball to enter,
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information (value of winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into said ball entering means;
Acquisition information storage means (first reservation area Ra) capable of storing up to a specific upper limit number of the special information acquired by the game ball entering the ball entry means;
an unexecuted pending display area (unexecuted pending display area Dh) capable of displaying a number of unexecuted pending display information (unexecuted pending display icon H) corresponding to the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means; unexecuted pending display means for displaying;
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot) for each game round;
When the game operation for informing the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game operation is ended as one game rotation operation, the game rotation operation (variation game for changing the symbol) a game turn control means for controlling the
special game state generation means for generating a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player after the game rotation operation is completed when the determination means determines that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition;
The possibility that the special information corresponding to the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area satisfies the predetermined condition is ranked from high to low set according to the level of the possibility. pending change means for suggesting by changing the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information according to a plurality of stages;
means for limiting a direction of change of the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information to one direction from the lower side to the upper side;
An already executed pending display area (already executed a pending execution display means for displaying a pending display area (Dz);
with
As the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information, the first display mode (white), which is the lowest among the plurality of stages, and the second display mode (white), which is a stage higher than the first display mode ( a color above white, such as blue), and
All the already-executed pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of already-executed pending display areas are in the second display mode, and all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display areas are in the second display mode. 1 display mode, the game motion in a predetermined mode can be displayed as the game spinning motion (predetermined premium ready-to-win effect can be executed and a predetermined premium image can be displayed);
The game machine further comprises means capable of executing an effect suggesting the display mode after the change in the already executed pending display information or the unexecuted pending display information.

According to this feature, all the already-executed pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of already-executed pending display areas are in the second display mode (blue), and all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display areas are displayed in the second display mode (blue). When the pending display information is in the first display mode (white), the game action of the predetermined mode can be displayed as the game spinning action, so that all the already-executed pending display areas displayed in the already-executed pending display area are displayed to the player. A new sense of anticipation that has not existed in the past, such as wanting execution suspension display information to be arranged in the second display mode and all unexecution suspension display information displayed in the non-execution suspension display area to be arranged in the first display mode. can hold

In particular, in the conventional gaming machine, after the execution of the game round motion, the pending display information corresponding to the game round of the game round motion is displayed in a display mode that is highly likely to satisfy the predetermined condition. However, if the reserved display information does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the game rotation operation ends, the display mode loses its meaning.

However, according to this feature, the pending display information corresponding to the game round after execution of the game round motion is displayed as the already-executed pending display information, and all the already-executed pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of already-executed pending display areas are displayed. When the display information is in the second display mode and all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area is in the first display mode, a game action in a predetermined mode is displayed as the game spinning action. obtain. Therefore, it is possible to give meaning to the already-executed pending display information corresponding to the game round motion ended without satisfying the predetermined condition, and to attract the interest of the player. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to this feature, since the device is provided with means capable of executing an effect suggesting a change in the display mode of the already-executed pending display information or the unexecuted pending display information, for example, in a situation where the effect is executed, the If there is one piece of already-executed pending display information that, if changed to a post-change display mode suggested by the effect, all of the already-executed pending display information will have the same display mode, the player The user has a feeling of expectation that one piece of already-executed pending display information should be changed to a display mode suggested by the effect. Thus, according to this feature, it is possible to make the player feel a new emotion that has never existed in the past, and to improve the interest in the game.

<Feature xA group>
The feature xA group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the thirteenth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature xA1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Determination means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot);
a first rotating means;
a second rotating means;
A gaming machine comprising
The first rotating means (directing main rotating accessory 170) includes a rotating plate portion (petal portion 172L) rotatable around a rotating shaft (rotating shaft portion 171),
The rotating plate portion is configured so that a light source (high-brightness portion HB included in a predetermined image displayed on the display surface 41a) located on the back side can be visually recognized (configured to include a magnifying lens LZ), and a predetermined A configuration that can be switched between a rotating state and a predetermined stopped state,
The second rotating means (rotating body 182) is configured to be rotatable, and when the game board is viewed from the front, at least a first position visible without passing through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means; displaceable between a second position visible through the rotating plate;
The game machine is
A first state in which the light source can be seen through the rotating rotating plate portion in a predetermined game state (a state in which the result of the winning lottery is a big win) a state in which the high-brightness portion HB is visible);
When the second rotating means moves to the back side of the rotating rotating plate portion, the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source, and the second rotating means is visually recognized through the rotating plate portion. Possible second state (state in which the rotating body 182 blocks the light from the high brightness portion HB in the big or small effect, and the rotating body 182 is visible through the magnifying lens LZ of the petal portion 172L, FIG. 626(b), The state of FIG. 627, etc.),
A game machine characterized by having

According to this feature, the first rotating means can be switched between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined resting state. The second rotating means is displaced between at least a first position visible without passing through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means and a second position visible through the rotating plate portion when the game board is viewed from the front. It is possible. Furthermore, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, the first state in which the light source is visible through the rotating rotary plate portion and the second rotating means moving to the back side of the rotating rotary plate portion and a second state in which the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source and the second rotating means is visible through the rotating plate portion. For this reason, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, it is possible to execute an effect constituted by the first state in which the light source is visible through the rotating rotating plate portion, and the first rotating means rotates the light source. By moving the second rotating means to the back side of the rotating plate portion, the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source, and the second rotating means can be visually recognized through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means. It is possible to execute an effect configured by the second state. If each of the first state effect and the second state effect can suggest that the player will be in an advantageous state, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, the rotating rotating plate In the first state in which the light source can be seen through the part, the second rotating means moves to the back side of the rotating plate part rotated by the first rotating means, and the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source. Thus, when the second rotating means becomes visible through the rotating plate portion, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation that the player will be in an advantageous state. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature xA2]
The gaming machine according to feature xA1,
The rotation mode of the rotary plate portion when the second rotating means is moved to the second position (the petal portion 172L is at the rotation stop position shown in FIG. 626(b), or the petal portion 172L is rotated as shown in FIG. A first mode (the number of round games is 16) that is advantageous to the player and a second mode (a round game that is lower than the first mode) that is advantageous to the player. 8 times).

According to this feature, according to the rotation mode of the rotary plate portion when the second rotating means moves to the second position, the first mode is advantageous to the player, and the advantage to the player is greater than that of the first mode. It can be either aspect with the low second aspect. For this reason, according to this feature, when the rotating state of the rotating plate portion when the second rotating means moves to the second position, which can be the first mode advantageous to the player, is advantageous to the player. It is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation, which is the first mode. Further, in the case where the rotation mode of the rotary plate portion when the second rotating means moves to the second position, which can be the second mode, which is less advantageous for the player than the first mode, it is advantageous for the player. It is possible to give the player a feeling of disappointment that the second mode is lower in quality than the first mode. Therefore, according to this feature, by providing the player with ups and downs of conflicting emotions such as anticipation and disappointment, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

[Feature xA3]
A gaming machine according to feature xA1 or feature xA2,
The rotation speed of the first rotation means can be changed (configuration of modification 10)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, since the rotation speed of the first rotating means can be changed, it is possible to change the visual recognition mode of the light source visually recognized through the rotating rotary plate portion in the first state. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature xA4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features xA1 to xA3,
Each time an opportunity to rotate the first rotating means is established, the rotating direction of the first rotating means is selected from the first rotating direction and the second rotating direction opposite to the first rotating direction. decide which one it will be,
Rotation in the second rotation direction tends to be more advantageous for the player than rotation in the first rotation direction (configuration of Modified Example 11).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, the advantage for the player changes depending on whether the rotation direction of the first rotation means is determined to be the first rotation direction or the second rotation direction. Therefore, since the player becomes concerned about the direction of rotation of the first rotating means, the amusement of the game can be further improved.

[Feature xA5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features xA1 to xA4,
The rotating plate portion is configured to be formed of a material having uniform transparency (configuration of Modified Example 5).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, since the rotating plate portion is formed of a material having uniform transparency, the rotating plate portion can be colored evenly. can clearly see the second rotating means through the rotating plate portion. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature xA6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features xA1 to xA5,
The rotating plate portion has a first region with a predetermined light transmittance and a second region with a higher light transmittance than the first region,
At a predetermined timing, the second rotating means moves at least to the back surface side of the second area (configuration of Modified Example 5).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, the rotating plate portion has a first region with a predetermined light transmittance and a second region with a higher light transmittance than the first region, and at a predetermined timing, at least the back surface of the second region Since the second rotating means moves to the side, after a predetermined timing, the player can clearly see the second rotating means through the second region of the rotating plate portion having a high light transmittance. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature xA7]
A gaming machine according to any one of features xA1 to xA6,
The first rotating means is fixed at a specific position (configuration of modification 8)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, since the first rotating means is fixed at a specific position, it is easy to move the second rotating means to the back side of the rotating rotating plate portion. Therefore, according to this feature, simplification of control can be achieved.

[Feature xA8]
A gaming machine according to any one of features xA1 to xA7,
A game machine, wherein the rotating shaft provided in the first rotating means is arranged in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the game board.

According to this feature, since the rotating shaft provided in the first rotating means is arranged along the direction perpendicular to the surface of the game board, the rotation can be performed on a plane parallel to the surface of the game board with high precision. The rotating plate portion can be rotated. Therefore, it is easy to increase the size of the first rotating means, and as a result, the performance using the first rotating means can be made gorgeous. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature xA9]
A gaming machine according to any one of features xA1 to xA8,
A means for moving the second rotating means toward the first rotating means from above the first rotating means (configuration of Modified Example 13)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, it is possible to produce an effect in which the second rotating means rains down toward the first rotating means from above. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature xA10]
A gaming machine according to any one of features xA1 to xA9,
A plurality of paths through which the second rotating means is displaced from the first position to the second position (configuration of modification 16)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, since a plurality of paths for displacing the second rotating means from the first position to the second position are provided, the player can enjoy transitioning to the second state through various paths. . Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature xA11]
A gaming machine according to any one of features xA1 to xA10,
The speed at which the second rotating means is displaced from the first position to the second position can be changed (configuration of modification 17).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, the speed at which the second rotating means is displaced from the first position to the second position can be changed. , the negative feeling that the second rotating means will not reach the second position and the second state will not occur can be imparted to the player. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature xA12]
A gaming machine according to any one of features xA1 to xA11,
The rotational speed of the second rotating means can be changed (configuration of modification 18)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, since the rotation speed of the second rotating means can be changed, the manner of rotation of the second rotating means when the second rotating means moves to the back side of the rotating rotating plate portion can be varied. can be changed to Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature xA13]
A gaming machine according to any one of features xA1 to xA12,
The direction of rotation of the second rotating means can be reversed (configuration of modification 19)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, since the direction of rotation of the second rotating means can be reversed, the mode of rotation of the second rotating means when the second rotating means moves to the back side of the rotating rotating plate portion can be varied. can be changed to Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature xA14]
A gaming machine according to any one of features xA1 to xA13,
A gaming machine, wherein the outer shape of the second rotating means is point symmetric with respect to the center of rotation of the second rotating means when the game board is viewed from the front.

According to this feature, the outer shape of the second rotating means is point-symmetrical with respect to the center of rotation of the second rotating means when the game board is viewed from the front. It is possible to enhance the beauty of the second rotating means when the second rotating means is closed. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature xA15]
A gaming machine according to any one of features xA1 to xA14,
A gaming machine comprising a plurality of second rotating means (rotating body 182, rotating body 192).

According to this feature, since a plurality of second rotating means are provided, it is possible to obtain various modes in which the second state can be obtained. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature xA16]
A gaming machine according to any one of features xA1 to xA15,
A gaming machine characterized in that characters (such as a rainbow-colored character string 183a of "BIG") are written on the second rotating means.

According to this feature, since the characters are written on the second rotating means, when the second state is established, the characters written on the second rotating means can be visually recognized by the player through the rotating plate portion. can. For this reason, according to this feature, it is possible to notify various sorts by visually recognizable characters. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature xA17]
A gaming machine according to any one of features xA1 to xA16,
The second rotating means is made of a uniform material (configuration of modification 21)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, since the second rotating means is made of a uniform material, the rotation of the second rotating means is smooth without rattling.

[Feature xA18]
A gaming machine according to any one of features xA1 to xA17,
The second rotating means is configured such that the direction of the rotation axis during rotation can be changed (configuration of modification 22).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, since the second rotating means is configured such that the direction of the rotating shaft during rotation can be changed, it is possible to change the rotation mode of the second rotating means in various ways. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature xA19]
A gaming machine according to any one of features xA1 to xA18,
The light source is configured by a light-emitting portion arranged on the back side of the game board (configuration of Modified Example 25).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, since the light source is configured by the light-emitting portion arranged on the back side of the game board, the configuration can be simplified.

[Feature xA20]
A gaming machine according to any one of features xA1 to xA19,
The rotation mode of the rotary plate portion when the second rotating means is moved to the second position (the petal portion 172L is at the rotation stop position shown in FIG. 626(b), or the petal portion 172L is rotated as shown in FIG. In a predetermined period (a period in which the reserved information remaining in the reserved information storage area 64b at the end of the game round related to the jackpot winning is digested), the special information is determined by the determination means. and a first mode in which the frequency of satisfying the predetermined condition is high (in the modified example 23, there is a holding group), and a frequency in which the special information satisfying the predetermined condition by the determination means is lower than in the first mode in the predetermined period of time. A game machine characterized in that it can be in either mode of the second mode (there is no holding group in Modification 23).

According to this feature, according to the rotation mode of the rotary plate portion when the second rotation means moves to the second position, the first mode in which the special information satisfies the predetermined condition with a high frequency in the predetermined period by the determination means; A second mode in which the frequency of the special information satisfying the predetermined condition by the determination means in a predetermined period is lower than that in the first mode. For this reason, according to this feature, when the rotation mode of the rotary plate portion when the second rotation means moves to the second position, which can be the first mode, the determination means outputs the special information for a predetermined period of time. It is possible to give the player a feeling of anticipation of the first mode in which the predetermined condition is frequently met. Further, when the rotation mode of the rotor plate portion when the second rotation means moves to the second position, which can be the second mode, the frequency at which the special information satisfies the predetermined condition by the determination means in the predetermined period is the first. It is possible to give the player a feeling of disappointment that the second mode is lower than the mode. Therefore, according to this feature, by providing the player with ups and downs of conflicting emotions such as anticipation and disappointment, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

<Feature xB group>
The feature xB group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the thirteenth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature xB1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Determination means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot);
a first rotating means;
a second rotating means;
A gaming machine comprising
The first rotating means (directing main rotating accessory 170) includes a rotating plate portion (petal portion 172L) rotatable around a rotating shaft (rotating shaft portion 171),
The rotating plate portion is configured so that a light source (high-brightness portion HB included in a predetermined image displayed on the display surface 41a) located on the back side can be visually recognized (configured to include a magnifying lens LZ), and a predetermined A configuration that can be switched between a rotating state and a predetermined stopped state,
The second rotating means (rotating body 182) is configured to be rotatable, and when the game board is viewed from the front, at least a first position visible without passing through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means; displaceable between a second position visible through the rotating plate;
The game machine is
A first state in which the light source can be seen through the rotating rotating plate portion in a predetermined game state (a state in which the result of the winning lottery is a big win) a state in which the high-brightness portion HB is visible);
When the second rotating means moves to the rear surface side of the rotating rotating plate portion, the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source, and the second rotating means is visually recognized through the rotating plate portion. Possible second state (state in which the rotating body 182 blocks the light from the high brightness portion HB in the big or small effect, and the rotating body 182 is visible through the magnifying lens LZ of the petal portion 172L, FIG. 626(b), The state of FIG. 627, etc.),
has
The rotation mode of the rotary plate portion when the second rotating means is moved to the second position (the petal portion 172L is at the rotation stop position shown in FIG. 626(b), or the petal portion 172L is rotated as shown in FIG. A first mode (the number of round games is 16) that is advantageous to the player and a second mode (a round game that is lower than the first mode) that is advantageous to the player. 8 times).

According to this feature, the first rotating means can be switched between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined resting state. The second rotating means is displaced between at least a first position visible without passing through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means and a second position visible through the rotating plate portion when the game board is viewed from the front. It is possible. Furthermore, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, the first state in which the light source is visible through the rotating rotary plate portion and the second rotating means moving to the back side of the rotating rotary plate portion and a second state in which the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source and the second rotating means is visible through the rotating plate portion. For this reason, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, it is possible to execute an effect constituted by the first state in which the light source is visible through the rotating rotating plate portion, and the first rotating means rotates the light source. By moving the second rotating means to the back side of the rotating plate portion, the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source, and the second rotating means can be visually recognized through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means. It is possible to execute an effect configured by the second state. If each of the first state effect and the second state effect can suggest that the player will be in an advantageous state, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, the rotating rotating plate In the first state in which the light source can be seen through the part, the second rotating means moves to the back side of the rotating plate part rotated by the first rotating means, and the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source. Thus, when the second rotating means becomes visible through the rotating plate portion, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation that the player will be in an advantageous state. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to this feature, according to the rotation mode of the rotary plate portion when the second rotating means moves to the second position, the first mode advantageous to the player and the first mode advantageous to the player It can be any aspect with a second aspect that is lower than the aspect. For this reason, according to this feature, when the rotating state of the rotating plate portion when the second rotating means moves to the second position, which can be the first mode advantageous to the player, is advantageous to the player. It is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation, which is the first mode. Further, in the case where the rotation mode of the rotary plate portion when the second rotating means moves to the second position, which can be the second mode, which is less advantageous for the player than the first mode, it is advantageous for the player. It is possible to give the player a feeling of disappointment that the second mode is lower in quality than the first mode. Therefore, according to this feature, by providing the player with ups and downs of conflicting emotions such as anticipation and disappointment, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

<Feature xC group>
The feature xC group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the thirteenth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature xC1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Determination means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot);
a first rotating means;
a second rotating means;
A gaming machine comprising
The first rotating means (directing main rotating accessory 170) includes a rotating plate portion (petal portion 172L) rotatable around a rotating shaft (rotating shaft portion 171),
The rotating plate portion is configured so that a light source (high-brightness portion HB included in a predetermined image displayed on the display surface 41a) located on the back side can be visually recognized (configured to include a magnifying lens LZ), and a predetermined A configuration that can be switched between a rotating state and a predetermined stopped state,
The second rotating means (rotating body 182) is configured to be rotatable, and when the game board is viewed from the front, at least a first position visible without passing through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means; displaceable between a second position visible through the rotating plate;
The game machine is
A first state in which the light source can be seen through the rotating rotating plate portion in a predetermined game state (a state in which the result of the winning lottery is a big win) a state in which the high-brightness portion HB is visible);
When the second rotating means moves to the rear surface side of the rotating rotating plate portion, the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source, and the second rotating means is visually recognized through the rotating plate portion. Possible second state (state in which the rotating body 182 blocks the light from the high brightness portion HB in the big or small effect, and the rotating body 182 is visible through the magnifying lens LZ of the petal portion 172L, FIG. 626(b), The state of FIG. 627, etc.),
has
The rotation speed of the first rotation means can be changed (configuration of modification 10)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, the first rotating means can be switched between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined resting state. When the game board is viewed from the front, the second rotating means is displaced between at least a first position visible without passing through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means and a second position visible through the rotating plate portion. It is possible. Furthermore, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, the first state in which the light source is visible through the rotating rotary plate portion and the second rotating means moving to the back side of the rotating rotary plate portion and a second state in which the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source and the second rotating means is visible through the rotating plate portion. For this reason, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, it is possible to execute an effect constituted by the first state in which the light source is visible through the rotating rotating plate portion, and the first rotating means rotates the light source. By moving the second rotating means to the rear surface side of the rotating plate portion, the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source, and the second rotating means can be visually recognized through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means. It is possible to execute an effect configured by the second state. When each of the first state effect and the second state effect can suggest that the player will be in an advantageous state, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, the rotating rotating plate In the first state in which the light source can be seen through the part, the second rotating means moves to the back side of the rotating plate part rotated by the first rotating means, and the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source. Thus, when the second rotating means becomes visible through the rotating plate portion, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation that the player will be in an advantageous state. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to this feature, since the rotational speed of the first rotating means can be changed, it is possible to change the visual recognition mode of the light source visually recognized through the rotating rotary plate portion in the first state. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

<Feature xD group>
The feature xD group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the thirteenth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature xD1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Determination means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot);
a first rotating means;
a second rotating means;
A gaming machine comprising
The first rotating means (directing main rotating accessory 170) includes a rotating plate portion (petal portion 172L) rotatable around a rotating shaft (rotating shaft portion 171),
The rotating plate portion is configured so that a light source (high-brightness portion HB included in a predetermined image displayed on the display surface 41a) located on the back side can be visually recognized (configured to include a magnifying lens LZ), and a predetermined A configuration that can be switched between a rotating state and a predetermined stopped state,
The second rotating means (rotating body 182) is configured to be rotatable, and when the game board is viewed from the front, at least a first position visible without passing through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means; Displaceable between a second position visible through the rotating plate portion,
The game machine is
A first state in which the light source can be seen through the rotating rotating plate portion in a predetermined game state (a state in which the result of the winning lottery is a big win) a state in which the high-brightness portion HB is visible);
When the second rotating means moves to the rear surface side of the rotating rotating plate portion, the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source, and the second rotating means is visually recognized through the rotating plate portion. Possible second state (state in which the rotating body 182 blocks the light from the high brightness portion HB in the big or small effect, and the rotating body 182 is visible through the magnifying lens LZ of the petal portion 172L, FIG. 626(b), The state of FIG. 627, etc.),
has
Each time an opportunity to rotate the first rotating means is established, the rotating direction of the first rotating means is selected from the first rotating direction and the second rotating direction opposite to the first rotating direction. decide which one it will be,
Rotation in the second rotation direction tends to be more advantageous for the player than rotation in the first rotation direction (configuration of Modified Example 11).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, the first rotating means can be switched between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined resting state. When the game board is viewed from the front, the second rotating means is displaced between at least a first position visible without passing through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means and a second position visible through the rotating plate portion. It is possible. Furthermore, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, the first state in which the light source is visible through the rotating rotary plate portion and the second rotating means moving to the back side of the rotating rotary plate portion and a second state in which the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source and the second rotating means is visible through the rotating plate portion. For this reason, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, it is possible to execute an effect constituted by the first state in which the light source is visible through the rotating rotating plate portion, and the first rotating means rotates the light source. By moving the second rotating means to the rear surface side of the rotating plate portion, the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source, and the second rotating means can be visually recognized through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means. It is possible to execute an effect configured by the second state. When each of the first state effect and the second state effect can suggest that the player will be in an advantageous state, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, the rotating rotating plate In the first state in which the light source can be seen through the part, the second rotating means moves to the back side of the rotating plate part rotated by the first rotating means, and the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source. Thus, when the second rotating means becomes visible through the rotating plate portion, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation that the player will be in an advantageous state. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Also, according to this feature, the advantage for the player changes depending on whether the rotation direction of the first rotation means is determined to be the first rotation direction or the second rotation direction. Therefore, since the player becomes concerned about the direction of rotation of the first rotating means, the amusement of the game can be further enhanced.

<Feature xE group>
The feature xE group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the thirteenth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature xE1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Determination means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot);
a first rotating means;
a second rotating means;
A gaming machine comprising
The first rotating means (directing main rotating accessory 170) includes a rotating plate portion (petal portion 172L) rotatable around a rotating shaft (rotating shaft portion 171),
The rotating plate portion is configured so that a light source (high-brightness portion HB included in a predetermined image displayed on the display surface 41a) located on the back side can be visually recognized (configured to include a magnifying lens LZ), and a predetermined A configuration that can be switched between a rotating state and a predetermined stopped state,
The second rotating means (rotating body 182) is configured to be rotatable, and when the game board is viewed from the front, at least a first position visible without passing through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means; displaceable between a second position visible through the rotating plate;
The game machine is
A first state in which the light source can be seen through the rotating rotating plate portion in a predetermined game state (a state in which the result of the winning lottery is a big win) a state in which the high-brightness portion HB is visible);
When the second rotating means moves to the rear surface side of the rotating rotating plate portion, the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source, and the second rotating means is visually recognized through the rotating plate portion. Possible second state (state in which the rotating body 182 blocks the light from the high brightness portion HB in the big or small effect, and the rotating body 182 is visible through the magnifying lens LZ of the petal portion 172L, FIG. 626(b), The state of FIG. 627, etc.),
has
The rotating plate portion is configured to be formed of a material having uniform transparency (configuration of Modified Example 5).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, the first rotating means can be switched between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined resting state. When the game board is viewed from the front, the second rotating means is displaced between at least a first position visible without passing through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means and a second position visible through the rotating plate portion. It is possible. Furthermore, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, the first state in which the light source is visible through the rotating rotary plate portion and the second rotating means moving to the back side of the rotating rotary plate portion and a second state in which the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source and the second rotating means is visible through the rotating plate portion. For this reason, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, it is possible to execute an effect constituted by the first state in which the light source is visible through the rotating rotating plate portion, and the first rotating means rotates the light source. By moving the second rotating means to the rear surface side of the rotating plate portion, the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source, and the second rotating means can be visually recognized through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means. It is possible to execute an effect configured by the second state. When each of the first state effect and the second state effect can suggest that the player will be in an advantageous state, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, the rotating rotating plate In the first state in which the light source can be seen through the part, the second rotating means moves to the back side of the rotating plate part rotated by the first rotating means, and the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source. Thus, when the second rotating means becomes visible through the rotating plate portion, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation that the player will be in an advantageous state. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to this feature, since the rotating plate portion is formed of a material having uniform transparency, the rotating plate portion can be made uniform in color, and in the second state, A player can clearly see the second rotating means through the rotating plate portion. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

<Feature xF group>
The feature xF group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the thirteenth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature xF1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Determination means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot);
a first rotating means;
a second rotating means;
A gaming machine comprising
The first rotating means (directing main rotating accessory 170) includes a rotating plate portion (petal portion 172L) rotatable around a rotating shaft (rotating shaft portion 171),
The rotating plate portion is configured so that a light source (high-brightness portion HB included in a predetermined image displayed on the display surface 41a) located on the back side can be visually recognized (configured to include a magnifying lens LZ), and a predetermined A configuration that can be switched between a rotating state and a predetermined stopped state,
The second rotating means (rotating body 182) is configured to be rotatable, and when the game board is viewed from the front, at least a first position visible without passing through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means; displaceable between a second position visible through the rotating plate;
The game machine is
A first state in which the light source can be seen through the rotating rotating plate portion in a predetermined game state (a state in which the result of the winning lottery is a big win) a state in which the high-brightness portion HB is visible);
When the second rotating means moves to the rear surface side of the rotating rotating plate portion, the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source, and the second rotating means is visually recognized through the rotating plate portion. Possible second state (state in which the rotating body 182 blocks the light from the high brightness portion HB in the big or small effect, and the rotating body 182 is visible through the magnifying lens LZ of the petal portion 172L, FIG. 626(b), The state of FIG. 627, etc.),
has
The rotating plate portion has a first region with a predetermined light transmittance and a second region with a higher light transmittance than the first region,
At a predetermined timing, the second rotating means moves at least to the back surface side of the second area (configuration of Modified Example 5).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, the first rotating means can be switched between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined resting state. When the game board is viewed from the front, the second rotating means is displaced between at least a first position visible without passing through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means and a second position visible through the rotating plate portion. It is possible. Furthermore, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, the first state in which the light source is visible through the rotating rotary plate portion and the second rotating means moving to the back side of the rotating rotary plate portion and a second state in which the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source and the second rotating means is visible through the rotating plate portion. For this reason, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, it is possible to execute an effect constituted by the first state in which the light source is visible through the rotating rotating plate portion, and the first rotating means rotates the light source. By moving the second rotating means to the rear surface side of the rotating plate portion, the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source, and the second rotating means can be visually recognized through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means. It is possible to execute an effect configured by the second state. When each of the first state effect and the second state effect can suggest that the player will be in an advantageous state, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, the rotating rotating plate In the first state in which the light source can be seen through the part, the second rotating means moves to the back side of the rotating plate part rotated by the first rotating means, and the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source. Thus, when the second rotating means becomes visible through the rotating plate portion, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation that the player will be in an advantageous state. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to this feature, the rotating plate portion has a first region with a predetermined light transmittance and a second region with a higher light transmittance than the first region, and at a predetermined timing, at least the second region Since the second rotating means moves to the back side of the rotating plate portion, the player can clearly see the second rotating means through the second region of the rotating plate portion having a high light transmittance after a predetermined timing. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

<Feature xG group>
The feature xG group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the thirteenth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature x G1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Determination means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot);
a first rotating means;
a second rotating means;
A gaming machine comprising
The first rotating means (directing main rotating accessory 170) includes a rotating plate portion (petal portion 172L) rotatable around a rotating shaft (rotating shaft portion 171),
The rotating plate portion is configured so that a light source (high-brightness portion HB included in a predetermined image displayed on the display surface 41a) located on the back side can be visually recognized (configured to include a magnifying lens LZ), and a predetermined A configuration that can be switched between a rotating state and a predetermined stopped state,
The second rotating means (rotating body 182) is configured to be rotatable, and when the game board is viewed from the front, at least a first position visible without passing through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means; displaceable between a second position visible through the rotating plate;
The game machine is
A first state in which the light source can be seen through the rotating rotating plate portion in a predetermined game state (a state in which the result of the winning lottery is a big win) a state in which the high-brightness portion HB is visible);
When the second rotating means moves to the rear surface side of the rotating rotating plate portion, the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source, and the second rotating means is visually recognized through the rotating plate portion. Possible second state (state in which the rotating body 182 blocks the light from the high brightness portion HB in the big or small effect, and the rotating body 182 is visible through the magnifying lens LZ of the petal portion 172L, FIG. 626(b), The state of FIG. 627, etc.),
has
The first rotating means is fixed at a specific position (configuration of modification 8)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, the first rotating means can be switched between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined resting state. When the game board is viewed from the front, the second rotating means is displaced between at least a first position visible without passing through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means and a second position visible through the rotating plate portion. It is possible. Furthermore, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, the first state in which the light source is visible through the rotating rotary plate portion and the second rotating means moving to the back side of the rotating rotary plate portion and a second state in which the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source and the second rotating means is visible through the rotating plate portion. For this reason, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, it is possible to execute an effect constituted by the first state in which the light source is visible through the rotating rotating plate portion, and the first rotating means rotates the light source. By moving the second rotating means to the rear surface side of the rotating plate portion, the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source, and the second rotating means can be visually recognized through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means. It is possible to execute an effect configured by the second state. When each of the first state effect and the second state effect can suggest that the player will be in an advantageous state, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, the rotating rotating plate In the first state in which the light source can be seen through the part, the second rotating means moves to the back side of the rotating plate part rotated by the first rotating means, and the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source. Thus, when the second rotating means becomes visible through the rotating plate portion, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation that the player will be in an advantageous state. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to this feature, since the first rotating means is fixed at a specific position, it is easy to move the second rotating means to the back side of the rotating rotating plate portion. Therefore, according to this feature, simplification of control can be achieved.

<Feature xH group>
The feature xH group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the thirteenth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature xH1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Determination means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot);
a first rotating means;
a second rotating means;
A gaming machine comprising
The first rotating means (directing main rotating accessory 170) includes a rotating plate portion (petal portion 172L) rotatable around a rotating shaft (rotating shaft portion 171),
The rotating plate portion is configured so that a light source (high-brightness portion HB included in a predetermined image displayed on the display surface 41a) located on the back side can be visually recognized (configured to include a magnifying lens LZ), and a predetermined A configuration that can be switched between a rotating state and a predetermined stopped state,
The second rotating means (rotating body 182) is configured to be rotatable, and when the game board is viewed from the front, at least a first position visible without passing through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means; displaceable between a second position visible through the rotating plate;
The game machine is
A first state in which the light source can be seen through the rotating rotating plate portion in a predetermined game state (a state in which the result of the winning lottery is a big win) a state in which the high-brightness portion HB is visible);
When the second rotating means moves to the rear surface side of the rotating rotating plate portion, the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source, and the second rotating means is visually recognized through the rotating plate portion. Possible second state (state in which the rotating body 182 blocks the light from the high brightness portion HB in the big or small effect, and the rotating body 182 is visible through the magnifying lens LZ of the petal portion 172L, FIG. 626(b), The state of FIG. 627, etc.),
has
A game machine, wherein the rotating shaft provided in the first rotating means is arranged in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the game board.

According to this feature, the first rotating means can be switched between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined resting state. When the game board is viewed from the front, the second rotating means is displaced between at least a first position visible without passing through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means and a second position visible through the rotating plate portion. It is possible. Furthermore, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, the first state in which the light source is visible through the rotating rotary plate portion and the second rotating means moving to the back side of the rotating rotary plate portion and a second state in which the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source and the second rotating means is visible through the rotating plate portion. For this reason, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, it is possible to execute an effect constituted by the first state in which the light source is visible through the rotating rotating plate portion, and the first rotating means rotates the light source. By moving the second rotating means to the rear surface side of the rotating plate portion, the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source, and the second rotating means can be visually recognized through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means. It is possible to execute an effect configured by the second state. If each of the first state effect and the second state effect can suggest that the player will be in an advantageous state, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, the rotating rotating plate In the first state in which the light source can be seen through the part, the second rotating means moves to the back side of the rotating plate part rotated by the first rotating means, and the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source. Thus, when the second rotating means becomes visible through the rotating plate portion, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation that the player will be in an advantageous state. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to this feature, since the rotating shaft provided in the first rotating means is arranged along the direction perpendicular to the surface of the game board, The rotating plate portion can be rotated on planes that are parallel with precision. Therefore, it is easy to increase the size of the first rotating means, and as a result, the performance using the first rotating means can be made gorgeous. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

<Feature xI group>
The feature xI group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the thirteenth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature xI1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Determination means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot);
a first rotating means;
a second rotating means;
A gaming machine comprising
The first rotating means (directing main rotating accessory 170) includes a rotating plate portion (petal portion 172L) rotatable around a rotating shaft (rotating shaft portion 171),
The rotating plate portion is configured so that a light source (high-brightness portion HB included in a predetermined image displayed on the display surface 41a) located on the back side can be visually recognized (configured to include a magnifying lens LZ), and a predetermined A configuration that can be switched between a rotating state and a predetermined stopped state,
The second rotating means (rotating body 182) is configured to be rotatable, and when the game board is viewed from the front, at least a first position visible without passing through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means; displaceable between a second position visible through the rotating plate;
The game machine is
A first state in which the light source can be seen through the rotating rotating plate portion in a predetermined game state (a state in which the result of the winning lottery is a big win) a state in which the high-brightness portion HB is visible);
When the second rotating means moves to the rear surface side of the rotating rotating plate portion, the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source, and the second rotating means is visually recognized through the rotating plate portion. Possible second state (state in which the rotating body 182 blocks the light from the high brightness portion HB in the big or small effect, and the rotating body 182 is visible through the magnifying lens LZ of the petal portion 172L, FIG. 626(b), The state of FIG. 627, etc.),
has
A means for moving the second rotating means toward the first rotating means from above the first rotating means is provided (structure of modification 13).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, the first rotating means can be switched between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined resting state. When the game board is viewed from the front, the second rotating means is displaced between at least a first position visible without passing through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means and a second position visible through the rotating plate portion. It is possible. Furthermore, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, the first state in which the light source is visible through the rotating rotary plate portion and the second rotating means moving to the back side of the rotating rotary plate portion and a second state in which the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source and the second rotating means is visible through the rotating plate portion. For this reason, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, it is possible to execute an effect constituted by the first state in which the light source is visible through the rotating rotating plate portion, and the first rotating means rotates the light source. By moving the second rotating means to the rear surface side of the rotating plate portion, the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source, and the second rotating means can be visually recognized through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means. It is possible to execute an effect configured by the second state. When each of the first state effect and the second state effect can suggest that the player will be in an advantageous state, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, the rotating rotating plate In the first state in which the light source can be seen through the part, the second rotating means moves to the back side of the rotating plate part rotated by the first rotating means, and the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source. Thus, when the second rotating means becomes visible through the rotating plate portion, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation that the player will be in an advantageous state. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to this feature, it is possible to produce an effect in which the second rotating means rains down from above toward the first rotating means. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

<Features xJ group>
The feature xJ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the thirteenth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature xJ1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Determination means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot);
a first rotating means;
a second rotating means;
A gaming machine comprising
The first rotating means (directing main rotating accessory 170) includes a rotating plate portion (petal portion 172L) rotatable around a rotating shaft (rotating shaft portion 171),
The rotating plate portion is configured so that a light source (high-brightness portion HB included in a predetermined image displayed on the display surface 41a) located on the back side can be visually recognized (configured to include a magnifying lens LZ), and a predetermined A configuration that can be switched between a rotating state and a predetermined stopped state,
The second rotating means (rotating body 182) is configured to be rotatable, and when the game board is viewed from the front, at least a first position visible without passing through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means; displaceable between a second position visible through the rotating plate;
The game machine is
A first state in which the light source can be seen through the rotating rotating plate portion in a predetermined game state (a state in which the result of the winning lottery is a big win) a state in which the high-brightness portion HB is visible);
When the second rotating means moves to the rear surface side of the rotating rotating plate portion, the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source, and the second rotating means is visually recognized through the rotating plate portion. Possible second state (state in which the rotating body 182 blocks the light from the high brightness portion HB in the big or small effect, and the rotating body 182 is visible through the magnifying lens LZ of the petal portion 172L, FIG. 626(b), The state of FIG. 627, etc.),
has
A plurality of paths through which the second rotating means is displaced from the first position to the second position (configuration of modification 16)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, the first rotating means can be switched between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined resting state. When the game board is viewed from the front, the second rotating means is displaced between at least a first position visible without passing through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means and a second position visible through the rotating plate portion. It is possible. Furthermore, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, the first state in which the light source is visible through the rotating rotary plate portion and the second rotating means moving to the back side of the rotating rotary plate portion and a second state in which the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source and the second rotating means is visible through the rotating plate portion. For this reason, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, it is possible to execute an effect constituted by the first state in which the light source is visible through the rotating rotating plate portion, and the first rotating means rotates the light source. By moving the second rotating means to the rear surface side of the rotating plate portion, the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source, and the second rotating means can be visually recognized through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means. It is possible to execute an effect configured by the second state. When each of the first state effect and the second state effect can suggest that the player will be in an advantageous state, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, the rotating rotating plate In the first state in which the light source can be seen through the part, the second rotating means moves to the back side of the rotating plate part rotated by the first rotating means, and the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source. Thus, when the second rotating means becomes visible through the rotating plate portion, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation that the player will be in an advantageous state. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, according to this feature, since a plurality of paths for displacing the second rotating means from the first position to the second position are provided, the player can enjoy transitioning to the second state through various paths. can be done. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

<Characteristics x K group>
The feature xK group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the thirteenth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature xK1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Determination means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot);
a first rotating means;
a second rotating means;
A gaming machine comprising
The first rotating means (directing main rotating accessory 170) includes a rotating plate portion (petal portion 172L) rotatable around a rotating shaft (rotating shaft portion 171),
The rotating plate portion is configured so that a light source (high-brightness portion HB included in a predetermined image displayed on the display surface 41a) located on the back side can be visually recognized (configured to include a magnifying lens LZ), and a predetermined A configuration that can be switched between a rotating state and a predetermined stopped state,
The second rotating means (rotating body 182) is configured to be rotatable, and when the game board is viewed from the front, at least a first position visible without passing through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means; displaceable between a second position visible through the rotating plate;
The game machine is
A first state in which the light source can be seen through the rotating rotating plate portion in a predetermined game state (a state in which the result of the winning lottery is a big win) a state in which the high-brightness portion HB is visible);
When the second rotating means moves to the rear surface side of the rotating rotating plate portion, the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source, and the second rotating means is visually recognized through the rotating plate portion. Possible second state (state in which the rotating body 182 blocks the light from the high brightness portion HB in the big or small effect, and the rotating body 182 is visible through the magnifying lens LZ of the petal portion 172L, FIG. 626(b), The state of FIG. 627, etc.),
has
The speed at which the second rotating means is displaced from the first position to the second position can be changed (configuration of modification 17).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, the first rotating means can be switched between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined resting state. When the game board is viewed from the front, the second rotating means is displaced between at least a first position visible without passing through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means and a second position visible through the rotating plate portion. It is possible. Furthermore, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, the first state in which the light source is visible through the rotating rotary plate portion and the second rotating means moving to the back side of the rotating rotary plate portion and a second state in which the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source and the second rotating means is visible through the rotating plate portion. For this reason, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, it is possible to execute an effect constituted by the first state in which the light source is visible through the rotating rotating plate portion, and the first rotating means rotates the light source. By moving the second rotating means to the rear surface side of the rotating plate portion, the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source, and the second rotating means can be visually recognized through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means. It is possible to execute an effect configured by the second state. When each of the first state effect and the second state effect can suggest that the player will be in an advantageous state, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, the rotating rotating plate In the first state in which the light source can be seen through the part, the second rotating means moves to the back side of the rotating plate part rotated by the first rotating means, and the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source. Thus, when the second rotating means becomes visible through the rotating plate portion, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation that the player will be in an advantageous state. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to this feature, since the speed at which the second rotating means is displaced from the first position to the second position can change, for example, when the displacement speed decreases, the second rotating means is moving at its maximum. During this, it is possible to give the player a negative feeling that the second rotating means will not reach the second position and enter the second state. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

<Feature xL group>
The feature xL group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the thirteenth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature xL1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Determination means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot);
a first rotating means;
a second rotating means;
A gaming machine comprising
The first rotating means (directing main rotating accessory 170) includes a rotating plate portion (petal portion 172L) rotatable around a rotating shaft (rotating shaft portion 171),
The rotating plate portion is configured so that a light source (high-brightness portion HB included in a predetermined image displayed on the display surface 41a) located on the back side can be visually recognized (configured to include a magnifying lens LZ), and a predetermined A configuration that can be switched between a rotating state and a predetermined stopped state,
The second rotating means (rotating body 182) is configured to be rotatable, and when the game board is viewed from the front, at least a first position visible without passing through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means; displaceable between a second position visible through the rotating plate;
The game machine is
A first state in which the light source can be seen through the rotating rotating plate portion in a predetermined game state (a state in which the result of the winning lottery is a big win) a state in which the high-brightness portion HB is visible);
When the second rotating means moves to the rear surface side of the rotating rotating plate portion, the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source, and the second rotating means is visually recognized through the rotating plate portion. Possible second state (state in which the rotating body 182 blocks the light from the high brightness portion HB in the big or small effect, and the rotating body 182 is visible through the magnifying lens LZ of the petal portion 172L, FIG. 626(b), The state of FIG. 627, etc.),
has
The rotational speed of the second rotating means can be changed (configuration of modification 18)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, the first rotating means can be switched between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined resting state. When the game board is viewed from the front, the second rotating means is displaced between at least a first position visible without passing through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means and a second position visible through the rotating plate portion. It is possible. Furthermore, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, the first state in which the light source is visible through the rotating rotary plate portion and the second rotating means moving to the back side of the rotating rotary plate portion and a second state in which the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source and the second rotating means is visible through the rotating plate portion. For this reason, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, it is possible to execute an effect constituted by the first state in which the light source is visible through the rotating rotating plate portion, and the first rotating means rotates the light source. By moving the second rotating means to the rear surface side of the rotating plate portion, the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source, and the second rotating means can be visually recognized through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means. It is possible to execute an effect configured by the second state. When each of the first state effect and the second state effect can suggest that the player will be in an advantageous state, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, the rotating rotating plate In the first state in which the light source can be seen through the part, the second rotating means moves to the back side of the rotating plate part rotated by the first rotating means, and the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source. Thus, when the second rotating means becomes visible through the rotating plate portion, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation that the player will be in an advantageous state. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to this feature, since the rotation speed of the second rotating means can be changed, the mode of rotation of the second rotating means when the second rotating means moves to the back side of the rotating rotating plate portion. can be varied in various ways. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

<Feature xM group>
The feature xM group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the thirteenth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature xM1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Determination means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot);
a first rotating means;
a second rotating means;
A gaming machine comprising
The first rotating means (directing main rotating accessory 170) includes a rotating plate portion (petal portion 172L) rotatable around a rotating shaft (rotating shaft portion 171),
The rotating plate portion is configured so that a light source (high-brightness portion HB included in a predetermined image displayed on the display surface 41a) located on the back side can be visually recognized (configured to include a magnifying lens LZ), and a predetermined A configuration that can be switched between a rotating state and a predetermined stopped state,
The second rotating means (rotating body 182) is configured to be rotatable, and when the game board is viewed from the front, at least a first position visible without passing through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means; displaceable between a second position visible through the rotating plate;
The game machine is
A first state in which the light source can be seen through the rotating rotating plate portion in a predetermined game state (a state in which the result of the winning lottery is a big win) a state in which the high-brightness portion HB is visible);
When the second rotating means moves to the rear surface side of the rotating rotating plate portion, the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source, and the second rotating means is visually recognized through the rotating plate portion. Possible second state (state in which the rotating body 182 blocks the light from the high brightness portion HB in the big or small effect, and the rotating body 182 is visible through the magnifying lens LZ of the petal portion 172L, FIG. 626(b), The state of FIG. 627, etc.),
has
The direction of rotation of the second rotating means can be reversed (configuration of modification 19)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, the first rotating means can be switched between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined resting state. When the game board is viewed from the front, the second rotating means is displaced between at least a first position visible without passing through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means and a second position visible through the rotating plate portion. It is possible. Furthermore, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, the first state in which the light source is visible through the rotating rotary plate portion and the second rotating means moving to the back side of the rotating rotary plate portion and a second state in which the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source and the second rotating means is visible through the rotating plate portion. For this reason, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, it is possible to execute an effect constituted by the first state in which the light source is visible through the rotating rotating plate portion, and the first rotating means rotates the light source. By moving the second rotating means to the rear surface side of the rotating plate portion, the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source, and the second rotating means can be visually recognized through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means. It is possible to execute an effect configured by the second state. When each of the first state effect and the second state effect can suggest that the player will be in an advantageous state, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, the rotating rotating plate In the first state in which the light source can be seen through the part, the second rotating means moves to the back side of the rotating plate part rotated by the first rotating means, and the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source. Thus, when the second rotating means becomes visible through the rotating plate portion, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation that the player will be in an advantageous state. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to this feature, since the direction of rotation of the second rotating means can be reversed, the mode of rotation of the second rotating means when the second rotating means moves to the back side of the rotating rotating plate portion. can be varied in various ways. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

<Feature xN group>
The xN group of features is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the thirteenth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature xN1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Determination means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot);
a first rotating means;
a second rotating means;
A gaming machine comprising
The first rotating means (directing main rotating accessory 170) includes a rotating plate portion (petal portion 172L) rotatable around a rotating shaft (rotating shaft portion 171),
The rotating plate portion is configured so that a light source (high-brightness portion HB included in a predetermined image displayed on the display surface 41a) located on the back side can be visually recognized (configured to include a magnifying lens LZ), and a predetermined A configuration that can be switched between a rotating state and a predetermined stopped state,
The second rotating means (rotating body 182) is configured to be rotatable, and when the game board is viewed from the front, at least a first position visible without passing through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means; displaceable between a second position visible through the rotating plate;
The game machine is
A first state in which the light source can be seen through the rotating rotating plate portion in a predetermined game state (a state in which the result of the winning lottery is a big win) a state in which the high-brightness portion HB is visible);
When the second rotating means moves to the rear surface side of the rotating rotating plate portion, the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source, and the second rotating means is visually recognized through the rotating plate portion. Possible second state (state in which the rotating body 182 blocks the light from the high brightness portion HB in the big or small effect, and the rotating body 182 is visible through the magnifying lens LZ of the petal portion 172L, FIG. 626(b), The state of FIG. 627, etc.),
has
A gaming machine, wherein the outer shape of the second rotating means is point symmetric with respect to the center of rotation of the second rotating means when the game board is viewed from the front.

According to this feature, the first rotating means can be switched between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined resting state. When the game board is viewed from the front, the second rotating means is displaced between at least a first position visible without passing through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means and a second position visible through the rotating plate portion. It is possible. Furthermore, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, the first state in which the light source is visible through the rotating rotary plate portion and the second rotating means moving to the back side of the rotating rotary plate portion and a second state in which the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source and the second rotating means is visible through the rotating plate portion. For this reason, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, it is possible to execute an effect constituted by the first state in which the light source is visible through the rotating rotating plate portion, and the first rotating means rotates the light source. By moving the second rotating means to the rear surface side of the rotating plate portion, the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source, and the second rotating means can be visually recognized through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means. It is possible to execute an effect configured by the second state. When each of the first state effect and the second state effect can suggest that the player will be in an advantageous state, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, the rotating rotating plate In the first state in which the light source can be seen through the part, the second rotating means moves to the back side of the rotating plate part rotated by the first rotating means, and the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source. Thus, when the second rotating means becomes visible through the rotating plate portion, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation that the player will be in an advantageous state. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to this feature, the outer shape of the second rotating means is point-symmetrical with respect to the center of rotation of the second rotating means when the game board is viewed from the front. The beauty of the second rotating means when rotated can be enhanced. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

<Feature xO group>
The feature xO group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the thirteenth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature xO1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Determination means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot);
a first rotating means;
a second rotating means;
A gaming machine comprising
The first rotating means (directing main rotating accessory 170) includes a rotating plate portion (petal portion 172L) rotatable around a rotating shaft (rotating shaft portion 171),
The rotating plate portion is configured so that a light source (high-brightness portion HB included in a predetermined image displayed on the display surface 41a) located on the back side can be visually recognized (configured to include a magnifying lens LZ), and a predetermined A configuration that can be switched between a rotating state and a predetermined stopped state,
The second rotating means (rotating body 182) is configured to be rotatable, and when the game board is viewed from the front, at least a first position visible without passing through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means; displaceable between a second position visible through the rotating plate;
The game machine is
A first state in which the light source can be seen through the rotating rotating plate portion in a predetermined game state (a state in which the result of the winning lottery is a big win) a state in which the high-brightness portion HB is visible);
When the second rotating means moves to the rear surface side of the rotating rotating plate portion, the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source, and the second rotating means is visually recognized through the rotating plate portion. Possible second state (state in which the rotating body 182 blocks the light from the high brightness portion HB in the big or small effect, and the rotating body 182 is visible through the magnifying lens LZ of the petal portion 172L, FIG. 626(b), The state of FIG. 627, etc.),
has
A gaming machine comprising a plurality of second rotating means (rotating body 182, rotating body 192).

According to this feature, the first rotating means can be switched between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined resting state. When the game board is viewed from the front, the second rotating means is displaced between at least a first position visible without passing through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means and a second position visible through the rotating plate portion. It is possible. Furthermore, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, the first state in which the light source is visible through the rotating rotary plate portion and the second rotating means moving to the back side of the rotating rotary plate portion and a second state in which the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source and the second rotating means is visible through the rotating plate portion. For this reason, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, it is possible to execute an effect constituted by the first state in which the light source is visible through the rotating rotating plate portion, and the first rotating means rotates the light source. By moving the second rotating means to the rear surface side of the rotating plate portion, the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source, and the second rotating means can be visually recognized through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means. It is possible to execute an effect configured by the second state. When each of the first state effect and the second state effect can suggest that the player will be in an advantageous state, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, the rotating rotating plate In the first state in which the light source can be seen through the part, the second rotating means moves to the back side of the rotating plate part rotated by the first rotating means, and the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source. Thus, when the second rotating means becomes visible through the rotating plate portion, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation that the player will be in an advantageous state. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to this feature, since a plurality of second rotating means are provided, it is possible to obtain various aspects in which the second state can be obtained. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

<Feature xP group>
The feature xP group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the thirteenth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature xP1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Determination means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot);
a first rotating means;
a second rotating means;
A gaming machine comprising
The first rotating means (directing main rotating accessory 170) includes a rotating plate portion (petal portion 172L) rotatable around a rotating shaft (rotating shaft portion 171),
The rotating plate portion is configured so that a light source (high-brightness portion HB included in a predetermined image displayed on the display surface 41a) located on the back side can be visually recognized (configured to include a magnifying lens LZ), and a predetermined A configuration that can be switched between a rotating state and a predetermined stopped state,
The second rotating means (rotating body 182) is configured to be rotatable, and when the game board is viewed from the front, at least a first position visible without passing through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means; displaceable between a second position visible through the rotating plate;
The game machine is
A first state in which the light source can be seen through the rotating rotating plate portion in a predetermined game state (a state in which the result of the winning lottery is a big win) a state in which the high-brightness portion HB is visible);
When the second rotating means moves to the rear surface side of the rotating rotating plate portion, the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source, and the second rotating means is visually recognized through the rotating plate portion. Possible second state (state in which the rotating body 182 blocks the light from the high brightness portion HB in the big or small effect, and the rotating body 182 is visible through the magnifying lens LZ of the petal portion 172L, FIG. 626(b), The state of FIG. 627, etc.),
has
A gaming machine characterized in that characters (such as a rainbow-colored character string 183a of "BIG") are written on the second rotating means.

According to this feature, the first rotating means can be switched between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined resting state. When the game board is viewed from the front, the second rotating means is displaced between at least a first position visible without passing through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means and a second position visible through the rotating plate portion. It is possible. Furthermore, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, the first state in which the light source is visible through the rotating rotary plate portion and the second rotating means moving to the back side of the rotating rotary plate portion and a second state in which the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source and the second rotating means is visible through the rotating plate portion. For this reason, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, it is possible to execute an effect constituted by the first state in which the light source is visible through the rotating rotating plate portion, and the first rotating means rotates the light source. By moving the second rotating means to the rear surface side of the rotating plate portion, the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source, and the second rotating means can be visually recognized through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means. It is possible to execute an effect configured by the second state. When each of the first state effect and the second state effect can suggest that the player will be in an advantageous state, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, the rotating rotating plate In the first state in which the light source can be seen through the part, the second rotating means moves to the back side of the rotating plate part rotated by the first rotating means, and the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source. Thus, when the second rotating means becomes visible through the rotating plate portion, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation that the player will be in an advantageous state. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to this feature, since the characters are written on the second rotating means, the characters written on the second rotating means are visually recognized by the player through the rotating plate portion when the second state is established. be able to. For this reason, according to this feature, it is possible to notify various sorts by visually recognizable characters. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

<Feature x Q group>
The feature xQ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the thirteenth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature xQ1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Determination means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot);
a first rotating means;
a second rotating means;
A gaming machine comprising
The first rotating means (directing main rotating accessory 170) includes a rotating plate portion (petal portion 172L) rotatable around a rotating shaft (rotating shaft portion 171),
The rotating plate portion is configured so that a light source (high-brightness portion HB included in a predetermined image displayed on the display surface 41a) located on the back side can be visually recognized (configured to include a magnifying lens LZ), and a predetermined A configuration that can be switched between a rotating state and a predetermined stopped state,
The second rotating means (rotating body 182) is configured to be rotatable, and when the game board is viewed from the front, at least a first position visible without passing through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means; displaceable between a second position visible through the rotating plate;
The game machine is
A first state in which the light source can be seen through the rotating rotating plate portion in a predetermined game state (a state in which the result of the winning lottery is a big win) a state in which the high-brightness portion HB is visible);
When the second rotating means moves to the rear surface side of the rotating rotating plate portion, the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source, and the second rotating means is visually recognized through the rotating plate portion. Possible second state (state in which the rotating body 182 blocks the light from the high brightness portion HB in the big or small effect, and the rotating body 182 is visible through the magnifying lens LZ of the petal portion 172L, FIG. 626(b), The state of FIG. 627, etc.),
has
The second rotating means is made of a uniform material (configuration of modification 21)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, the first rotating means can be switched between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined resting state. When the game board is viewed from the front, the second rotating means is displaced between at least a first position visible without passing through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means and a second position visible through the rotating plate portion. It is possible. Furthermore, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, the first state in which the light source is visible through the rotating rotary plate portion and the second rotating means moving to the back side of the rotating rotary plate portion and a second state in which the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source and the second rotating means is visible through the rotating plate portion. For this reason, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, it is possible to execute an effect constituted by the first state in which the light source is visible through the rotating rotating plate portion, and the first rotating means rotates the light source. By moving the second rotating means to the rear surface side of the rotating plate portion, the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source, and the second rotating means can be visually recognized through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means. It is possible to execute an effect configured by the second state. When each of the first state effect and the second state effect can suggest that the player will be in an advantageous state, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, the rotating rotating plate In the first state in which the light source can be seen through the part, the second rotating means moves to the back side of the rotating plate part rotated by the first rotating means, and the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source. Thus, when the second rotating means becomes visible through the rotating plate portion, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation that the player will be in an advantageous state. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to this feature, since the second rotating means is made of a uniform material, the rotation of the second rotating means is smooth without rattling.

<Feature xR group>
The feature xR group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the thirteenth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature xR1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Determination means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot);
a first rotating means;
a second rotating means;
A gaming machine comprising
The first rotating means (directing main rotating accessory 170) includes a rotating plate portion (petal portion 172L) rotatable around a rotating shaft (rotating shaft portion 171),
The rotating plate portion is configured so that a light source (high-brightness portion HB included in a predetermined image displayed on the display surface 41a) located on the back side can be visually recognized (configured to include a magnifying lens LZ), and a predetermined A configuration that can be switched between a rotating state and a predetermined stopped state,
The second rotating means (rotating body 182) is configured to be rotatable, and when the game board is viewed from the front, at least a first position visible without passing through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means; displaceable between a second position visible through the rotating plate;
The game machine is
A first state in which the light source can be seen through the rotating rotating plate portion in a predetermined game state (a state in which the result of the winning lottery is a big win) a state in which the high-brightness portion HB is visible);
When the second rotating means moves to the rear surface side of the rotating rotating plate portion, the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source, and the second rotating means is visually recognized through the rotating plate portion. Possible second state (state in which the rotating body 182 blocks the light from the high brightness portion HB in the big or small effect, and the rotating body 182 is visible through the magnifying lens LZ of the petal portion 172L, FIG. 626(b), The state of FIG. 627, etc.),
has
The second rotating means is configured such that the direction of the rotation axis during rotation can be changed (configuration of modification 22).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, the first rotating means can be switched between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined resting state. When the game board is viewed from the front, the second rotating means is displaced between at least a first position visible without passing through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means and a second position visible through the rotating plate portion. It is possible. Furthermore, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, the first state in which the light source is visible through the rotating rotary plate portion and the second rotating means moving to the back side of the rotating rotary plate portion and a second state in which the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source and the second rotating means is visible through the rotating plate portion. For this reason, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, it is possible to execute an effect constituted by the first state in which the light source is visible through the rotating rotating plate portion, and the first rotating means rotates the light source. By moving the second rotating means to the rear surface side of the rotating plate portion, the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source, and the second rotating means can be visually recognized through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means. It is possible to execute an effect configured by the second state. When each of the first state effect and the second state effect can suggest that the player will be in an advantageous state, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, the rotating rotating plate In the first state in which the light source can be seen through the part, the second rotating means moves to the back side of the rotating plate part rotated by the first rotating means, and the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source. Thus, when the second rotating means becomes visible through the rotating plate portion, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation that the player will be in an advantageous state. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to this feature, since the second rotating means is configured so that the direction of the rotating shaft during rotation can be changed, it is possible to variously change the rotation mode of the second rotating means. . Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Feature xS group>
The feature xS group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the thirteenth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature xS1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Determination means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot);
a first rotating means;
a second rotating means;
A gaming machine comprising
The first rotating means (directing main rotating accessory 170) includes a rotating plate portion (petal portion 172L) rotatable around a rotating shaft (rotating shaft portion 171),
The rotating plate portion is configured so that a light source (high-brightness portion HB included in a predetermined image displayed on the display surface 41a) located on the back side can be visually recognized (configured to include a magnifying lens LZ), and a predetermined A configuration that can be switched between a rotating state and a predetermined stopped state,
The second rotating means (rotating body 182) is configured to be rotatable, and when the game board is viewed from the front, at least a first position visible without passing through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means; displaceable between a second position visible through the rotating plate;
The game machine is
A first state in which the light source can be seen through the rotating rotating plate portion in a predetermined game state (a state in which the result of the winning lottery is a big win) a state in which the high-brightness portion HB is visible);
When the second rotating means moves to the rear surface side of the rotating rotating plate portion, the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source, and the second rotating means is visually recognized through the rotating plate portion. Possible second state (state in which the rotating body 182 blocks the light from the high brightness portion HB in the big or small effect, and the rotating body 182 is visible through the magnifying lens LZ of the petal portion 172L, FIG. 626(b), The state of FIG. 627, etc.),
has
The light source is configured by a light-emitting portion arranged on the back side of the game board (configuration of Modified Example 25).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, the first rotating means can be switched between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined resting state. When the game board is viewed from the front, the second rotating means is displaced between at least a first position visible without passing through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means and a second position visible through the rotating plate portion. It is possible. Furthermore, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, the first state in which the light source is visible through the rotating rotary plate portion and the second rotating means moving to the back side of the rotating rotary plate portion and a second state in which the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source and the second rotating means is visible through the rotating plate portion. For this reason, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, it is possible to execute an effect constituted by the first state in which the light source is visible through the rotating rotating plate portion, and the first rotating means rotates the light source. By moving the second rotating means to the rear surface side of the rotating plate portion, the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source, and the second rotating means can be visually recognized through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means. It is possible to execute an effect configured by the second state. When each of the first state effect and the second state effect can suggest that the player will be in an advantageous state, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, the rotating rotating plate In the first state in which the light source can be seen through the part, the second rotating means moves to the back side of the rotating plate part rotated by the first rotating means, and the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source. Thus, when the second rotating means becomes visible through the rotating plate portion, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation that the player will be in an advantageous state. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, since the light source is composed of the light emitting portion arranged on the back side of the game board, the configuration can be simplified.

<Feature xT group>
The feature xT group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the thirteenth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature xT1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Determination means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot);
a first rotating means;
a second rotating means;
A gaming machine comprising
The first rotating means (directing main rotating accessory 170) includes a rotating plate portion (petal portion 172L) rotatable around a rotating shaft (rotating shaft portion 171),
The rotating plate portion is configured so that a light source (high-brightness portion HB included in a predetermined image displayed on the display surface 41a) located on the back side can be visually recognized (configured to include a magnifying lens LZ), and a predetermined A configuration that can be switched between a rotating state and a predetermined stopped state,
The second rotating means (rotating body 182) is configured to be rotatable, and when the game board is viewed from the front, at least a first position visible without passing through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means; displaceable between a second position visible through the rotating plate;
The game machine is
A first state in which the light source can be seen through the rotating rotating plate portion in a predetermined game state (a state in which the result of the winning lottery is a big win) a state in which the high-brightness portion HB is visible);
When the second rotating means moves to the rear surface side of the rotating rotating plate portion, the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source, and the second rotating means is visually recognized through the rotating plate portion. Possible second state (state in which the rotating body 182 blocks the light from the high brightness portion HB in the big or small effect, and the rotating body 182 is visible through the magnifying lens LZ of the petal portion 172L, FIG. 626(b), The state of FIG. 627, etc.),
has
The rotation mode of the rotary plate portion when the second rotating means is moved to the second position (the petal portion 172L is at the rotation stop position shown in FIG. 626(b), or the petal portion 172L is rotated as shown in FIG. In a predetermined period (a period in which the reserved information remaining in the reserved information storage area 64b at the end of the game round related to the jackpot winning is digested), the special information is determined by the determination means. and a first mode in which the frequency of satisfying the predetermined condition is high (in the modified example 23, there is a holding group), and a frequency in which the special information satisfying the predetermined condition by the determination means is lower than in the first mode in the predetermined period of time. A game machine characterized in that it can be in either mode of the second mode (there is no holding group in Modification 23).

According to this feature, the first rotating means can be switched between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined resting state. When the game board is viewed from the front, the second rotating means is displaced between at least a first position visible without passing through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means and a second position visible through the rotating plate portion. It is possible. Furthermore, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, the first state in which the light source is visible through the rotating rotary plate portion and the second rotating means moving to the back side of the rotating rotary plate portion and a second state in which the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source and the second rotating means is visible through the rotating plate portion. For this reason, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, it is possible to execute an effect constituted by the first state in which the light source is visible through the rotating rotating plate portion, and the first rotating means rotates the light source. By moving the second rotating means to the rear surface side of the rotating plate portion, the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source, and the second rotating means can be visually recognized through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means. It is possible to execute an effect configured by the second state. When each of the first state effect and the second state effect can suggest that the player will be in an advantageous state, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, the rotating rotating plate In the first state in which the light source can be seen through the part, the second rotating means moves to the back side of the rotating plate part rotated by the first rotating means, and the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source. Thus, when the second rotating means becomes visible through the rotating plate portion, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation that the player will be in an advantageous state. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to this feature, according to the rotation mode of the rotary plate portion when the second rotation means moves to the second position, the determination means determines that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition at a high frequency in the predetermined period in the first mode. and a second mode in which the frequency at which the special information satisfies the predetermined condition by the determination means during the predetermined period is lower than that in the first mode. For this reason, according to this feature, when the rotation mode of the rotary plate portion when the second rotation means moves to the second position, which can be the first mode, the determination means outputs the special information for a predetermined period of time. It is possible to give the player a feeling of anticipation of the first mode in which the predetermined condition is frequently met. Further, when the rotation mode of the rotor plate portion when the second rotation means moves to the second position, which can be the second mode, the frequency at which the special information satisfies the predetermined condition by the determination means in the predetermined period is the first. It is possible to give the player a feeling of disappointment that the second mode is lower than the mode. Therefore, according to this feature, by providing the player with ups and downs of conflicting emotions such as anticipation and disappointment, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

<Feature xU group>
The feature xU group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the thirteenth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature xU1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Determination means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot);
a first rotating means;
a second rotating means;
A gaming machine comprising
The first rotating means (directing main rotating accessory 170) includes a rotating plate portion (petal portion 172L) rotatable around a rotating shaft (rotating shaft portion 171),
The rotating plate portion is configured so that a light source (high-brightness portion HB included in a predetermined image displayed on the display surface 41a) located on the back side can be visually recognized (configured to include a magnifying lens LZ), and a predetermined A configuration that can be switched between a rotating state and a predetermined stopped state,
The second rotating means (rotating body 182) is configured to be rotatable, and when the game board is viewed from the front, at least a first position visible without passing through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means; displaceable between a second position visible through the rotating plate;
The rotation mode of the rotary plate portion when the second rotating means is moved to the second position (the petal portion 172L is at the rotation stop position shown in FIG. 626(b), or the petal portion 172L is rotated as shown in FIG. A first mode (the number of round games is 16) that is advantageous to the player and a second mode (a round game that is lower than the first mode) that is advantageous to the player. 8 times).

According to this feature, the first rotating means can be switched between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined resting state. When the game board is viewed from the front, the second rotating means is displaced between at least a first position visible without passing through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means and a second position visible through the rotating plate portion. It is possible. Further, according to this feature, according to the rotation mode of the rotary plate portion when the second rotating means moves to the second position, the first mode advantageous to the player and the first mode advantageous to the player It can be any aspect with a second aspect that is lower than the aspect. For this reason, according to this feature, when the rotating state of the rotating plate portion when the second rotating means moves to the second position, which can be the first mode advantageous to the player, is advantageous to the player. It is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation, which is the first mode. Further, in the case where the rotation mode of the rotary plate portion when the second rotating means moves to the second position, which can be the second mode, which is less advantageous for the player than the first mode, it is advantageous for the player. It is possible to give the player a feeling of disappointment that the second mode is lower in quality than the first mode. Therefore, according to this feature, by providing the player with ups and downs of conflicting emotions such as anticipation and disappointment, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

[Feature xU2]
The gaming machine according to feature xU1,
A first state in which the light source can be seen through the rotating rotating plate portion in a predetermined game state (a state in which the result of the winning lottery is a big win) a state in which the high-brightness portion HB is visible);
When the second rotating means moves to the rear surface side of the rotating rotating plate portion, the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source, and the second rotating means is visually recognized through the rotating plate portion. Possible second state (state in which the rotating body 182 blocks the light from the high brightness portion HB in the big or small effect, and the rotating body 182 is visible through the magnifying lens LZ of the petal portion 172L, FIG. 626(b), The state of FIG. 627, etc.),
A game machine characterized by having

According to this feature, in a predetermined game state, the first state in which the light source can be visually recognized through the rotating rotating plate portion and the second rotating means moving to the back side of the rotating rotating plate portion can be achieved in the second state. and a second state in which the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source and the second rotating means is visible through the rotating plate portion. For this reason, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, it is possible to execute an effect constituted by the first state in which the light source is visible through the rotating rotating plate portion, and the first rotating means rotates the light source. By moving the second rotating means to the rear surface side of the rotating plate portion, the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source, and the second rotating means can be visually recognized through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means. It is possible to execute an effect configured by the second state. When each of the first state effect and the second state effect can suggest that the player will be in an advantageous state, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, the rotating rotating plate In the first state in which the light source can be seen through the part, the second rotating means moves to the back side of the rotating plate part rotated by the first rotating means, and the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source. Thus, when the second rotating means becomes visible through the rotating plate portion, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation that the player will be in an advantageous state. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature xU3]
A gaming machine according to feature xU1 or feature xU2,
The rotation speed of the first rotation means can be changed (configuration of modification 10)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, since the rotation speed of the first rotating means can be changed, it is possible to change the visual recognition mode of the light source visually recognized through the rotating rotary plate portion in a predetermined game state. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature xU4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features xU1 to xU3,
Each time an opportunity to rotate the first rotating means is established, the rotating direction of the first rotating means is selected from the first rotating direction and the second rotating direction opposite to the first rotating direction. decide which one it will be,
Rotation in the second rotation direction tends to be more advantageous for the player than rotation in the first rotation direction (configuration of Modified Example 11).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, the advantage for the player changes depending on whether the rotation direction of the first rotation means is determined to be the first rotation direction or the second rotation direction. Therefore, since the player becomes concerned about the direction of rotation of the first rotating means, the amusement of the game can be further enhanced.

[Feature xU5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features xU1 to xU4,
The rotating plate portion is configured to be formed of a material having uniform transparency (configuration of Modified Example 5).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, since the rotating plate portion is formed of a material having uniform transparency, the rotating plate portion can be colored evenly. can clearly see the second rotating means through the rotating plate portion. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature xU6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features xU1 to xU5,
The rotating plate portion has a first region with a predetermined light transmittance and a second region with a higher light transmittance than the first region,
At a predetermined timing, the second rotating means moves at least to the back surface side of the second area (configuration of Modified Example 5).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, the rotating plate portion has a first region with a predetermined light transmittance and a second region with a higher light transmittance than the first region, and at a predetermined timing, at least the back surface of the second region Since the second rotating means moves to the side, after a predetermined timing, the player can clearly see the second rotating means through the second region of the rotating plate portion having a high light transmittance. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature xU7]
A gaming machine according to any one of features xU1 to xU6,
The first rotating means is fixed at a specific position (configuration of modification 8)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, since the first rotating means is fixed at a specific position, it is easy to move the second rotating means to the back side of the rotating rotating plate portion. Therefore, according to this feature, simplification of control can be achieved.

[Feature xU8]
A gaming machine according to any one of features xU1 to xU7,
A game machine, wherein the rotating shaft provided in the first rotating means is arranged in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the game board.

According to this feature, since the rotating shaft provided in the first rotating means is arranged along the direction perpendicular to the surface of the game board, the rotation can be performed on a plane parallel to the surface of the game board with high accuracy. The rotating plate portion can be rotated. Therefore, it is easy to increase the size of the first rotating means, and as a result, the performance using the first rotating means can be made gorgeous. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature xU9]
A gaming machine according to any one of features xU1 to xU8,
A means for moving the second rotating means toward the first rotating means from above the first rotating means is provided (structure of modification 13).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, it is possible to produce an effect in which the second rotating means pours down toward the first rotating means from above. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature xU10]
A gaming machine according to any one of features xU1 to xU9,
A plurality of paths through which the second rotating means is displaced from the first position to the second position (configuration of modification 16)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, since a plurality of paths for displacing the second rotating means from the first position to the second position are provided, the player can enjoy transitioning to the second state through various paths. . Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature xU11]
A gaming machine according to any one of features xU1 to xU10,
The speed at which the second rotating means is displaced from the first position to the second position can be changed (configuration of modification 17).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, the speed at which the second rotating means is displaced from the first position to the second position can be changed. , the negative feeling that the second rotating means will not reach the second position and the second state will not occur can be imparted to the player. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature xU12]
A gaming machine according to any one of features xU1 to xU11,
The rotational speed of the second rotating means can be changed (configuration of modification 18)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, since the rotation speed of the second rotating means can be changed, the manner of rotation of the second rotating means when the second rotating means moves to the back side of the rotating rotating plate portion can be varied. can be changed to Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature xU13]
A gaming machine according to any one of features xU1 to xU12,
The direction of rotation of the second rotating means can be reversed (configuration of modification 19)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, since the direction of rotation of the second rotating means can be reversed, the mode of rotation of the second rotating means when the second rotating means moves to the back side of the rotating rotating plate portion can be varied. can be changed to Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature xU14]
A gaming machine according to any one of features xU1 to xU13,
A gaming machine, wherein the outer shape of the second rotating means is point symmetric with respect to the center of rotation of the second rotating means when the game board is viewed from the front.

According to this feature, the outer shape of the second rotating means is point-symmetrical with respect to the center of rotation of the second rotating means when the game board is viewed from the front. It is possible to improve the beauty of the second rotating means when the second rotating means is closed. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature xU15]
A gaming machine according to any one of features xU1 to xU14,
A gaming machine comprising a plurality of second rotating means (rotating body 182, rotating body 192).

According to this feature, since a plurality of second rotating means are provided, it is possible to obtain various modes in which the second state can be obtained. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature xU16]
A gaming machine according to any one of features xU1 to xU15,
A gaming machine characterized in that characters (such as a rainbow-colored character string 183a of "BIG") are written on the second rotating means.

According to this feature, since the characters are written on the second rotating means, when the second state is established, the characters written on the second rotating means can be visually recognized by the player through the rotating plate portion. can. For this reason, according to this feature, it is possible to notify various sorts by visually recognizable characters. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature xU17]
A gaming machine according to any one of features xU1 to xU16,
The second rotating means is made of a uniform material (configuration of modification 21)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, since the second rotating means is made of a uniform material, the rotation of the second rotating means is smooth without rattling.

[Feature xU18]
A gaming machine according to any one of features xU1 to xU17,
The second rotating means is configured such that the direction of the rotation axis during rotation can be changed (configuration of modification 22).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, since the second rotating means is configured such that the direction of the rotating shaft during rotation can be changed, it is possible to change the rotation mode of the second rotating means in various ways. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature xU19]
A gaming machine according to any one of features xU1 to xU18,
The light source is configured by a light-emitting portion arranged on the back side of the game board (configuration of Modified Example 25).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, since the light source is configured by the light emitting portion arranged on the back side of the game board, the configuration can be simplified.

[Feature xU20]
A gaming machine according to any one of features xU1 to xU19,
In the first mode, the frequency that the special information satisfies a predetermined condition by the determination means during a predetermined period (a period during which the reserved information left in the reserved information storage area 64b at the end of the game round related to the winning of the jackpot is consumed). is high (there is a holding ream in modification 23),
The second mode is a mode in which the frequency in which the special information satisfies a predetermined condition by the determination means in the predetermined period is lower than in the first mode (there is no holding group in Modification 23). game machine.

According to this feature, according to the rotation mode of the rotary plate portion when the second rotation means moves to the second position, the first mode in which the special information satisfies the predetermined condition with a high frequency in the predetermined period by the determination means; A second mode in which the frequency of the special information satisfying the predetermined condition by the determination means in a predetermined period is lower than that in the first mode. For this reason, according to this feature, when the rotation mode of the rotary plate portion when the second rotation means moves to the second position, which can be the first mode, the determination means outputs the special information for a predetermined period of time. It is possible to give the player a feeling of anticipation of the first mode in which the predetermined condition is frequently met. Further, when the rotation mode of the rotor plate portion when the second rotation means moves to the second position, which can be the second mode, the frequency at which the special information satisfies the predetermined condition by the determination means in the predetermined period is the first. It is possible to give the player a feeling of disappointment that the second mode is lower than the mode. Therefore, according to this feature, by providing the player with ups and downs of conflicting emotions such as anticipation and disappointment, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, the inventions of the above feature groups solve the following problems.

In pachinko machines, slot machines, and other gaming machines, various improvements in structure, control, presentation, etc. are made for the purpose of improving the enjoyment of games, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, optimizing processing, and simplifying control. Technical improvements have been made from the point of view.

In addition, various technical improvements have been made for the purpose of improving the soundness of games, such as detecting and deterring fraudulent actions by players and fraudulent modifications to gaming machines.

In the above-mentioned gaming machines, it is desirable to further improve the technology for the purpose of improving the enjoyment of the game, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, optimizing the processing, simplifying the control, and providing more sound games. It is rare.

A configuration obtained by appropriately combining one or a plurality of configurations included in each feature group may be adopted. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the feature groups described above can be applied or to which each feature group is applied is shown below.

Pachinko machine: shooting means for shooting a game ball toward a game area based on a shooting operation by a player, and ball entry means provided in the game area for allowing game balls flowing down the game area to enter. an information acquiring means for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the ball entering means; an acquired information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquiring means; and the acquired information A gaming machine comprising privilege giving means for giving a privilege to a player when the special information stored in the storage means satisfies a predetermined condition.

Spindle-type game machine such as slot machine: operation of pattern display means for variably displaying a plurality of patterns, starting means for starting the variable display of the plurality of patterns due to operation of the start operation means, and operation of the stop operation means A game machine comprising: stopping means for stopping the variable display of the plurality of pictures due to the lapse of a predetermined period of time;

The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments and modifications, and can be implemented in various configurations without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Technical features included in the above-described embodiments, modifications, and feature groups are used as appropriate to solve some or all of the above problems or achieve some or all of the above effects. , can be replaced or combined. Also, if the technical features are not described as essential in this specification, they can be deleted as appropriate.

Claims (2)

game processing executing means capable of executing a predetermined game processing when predetermined power is supplied;
power interruption processing executing means capable of executing a predetermined power interruption process when it is determined that the predetermined power is interrupted in a predetermined state;
with
A gaming machine capable of entering a playable state when the predetermined power is supplied by a predetermined method after power failure,
a displacement means that can be displaced between a first position and a second position, can be in a predetermined non-energized state when positioned at the first position, and can be in a predetermined energized state when positioned at the second position;
a storage means capable of holding predetermined information during a power failure;
It can be displaced between a pressed state and a non-pressed state, and when the predetermined power is supplied in the pressed state, at least part of the information stored in the storage means is initialized. an initialization switch that can be initialized;
means for determining the predetermined information stored in the storage means when the predetermined power is supplied after power failure;
state determination means capable of determining a state of the displacement means when the predetermined power is supplied to the game machine;
At a predetermined timing after the predetermined power is supplied to the game machine, the state determination means determines information corresponding to the position of the displacement means, and the determination determines that the displacement means is positioned at the first position. A first process is executed in a first case where it is determined that information corresponding to the fact that the displacement means is positioned at the first position is set according to the determination. a process execution means for executing a second process , which is different from the first process and is for displacing the displacement means to the first position, in a second case where it is determined that there is no
with
This game machine is
Acquisition availability condition determination means for determining whether or not acquisition availability conditions for acquiring predetermined lottery information are satisfied;
Lottery information storage means capable of storing the predetermined lottery information up to a predetermined upper limit;
with
In the first case, the lottery information storage means is configured to store the predetermined lottery information when the acquisition condition determination means determines that the acquisition condition is established. ,
This game machine is
a lottery executable condition determination means for determining whether or not a lottery executable condition for executing a predetermined lottery is established;
lottery means for executing the predetermined lottery;
with
In the first case, the lottery means is configured to execute the predetermined lottery when the lottery execution enable condition determination means determines that the lottery execution enable condition is established,
This game machine is
a variation execution enablement condition determining means for determining whether or not a variation execution enablement condition for executing a predetermined variation display has been established;
variable display means for executing the predetermined variable display;
with
In the first case, the variable display means is configured to execute the predetermined variable display when the variable executable condition judging means determines that the variable executable condition is established,
This game machine is
a timing means updated at predetermined intervals and used to acquire time information;
an effect executing means capable of executing a first effect when a first timing is reached based on the timing by the time measuring means;
with
In the first case, when the first timing comes, the effect executing means comprises means for executing a second effect different from the first effect without executing the first effect. ,
This game machine is
ball entry detection means for detecting entry of a game ball into predetermined ball entry means;
a ball entry detection condition determination means for determining whether or not a ball entry detection condition for detecting the entry of a game ball into the predetermined ball entry means is satisfied;
with
In the first case, when it is determined by the entering ball detection condition judging means that the entering ball detecting condition is established, the entry of the game ball into the predetermined ball entering means can be detected. ing
A gaming machine characterized by: The gaming machine according to claim 1,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the predetermined non-energized state, some of the members can be in an energized state.

Images